[Chinese-commits] [manpages-zh] 112/131: remove unneeded files in raw/ and utils/
Boyuan Yang
hosiet-guest at moszumanska.debian.org
Tue Dec 13 19:59:53 UTC 2016
This is an automated email from the git hooks/post-receive script.
hosiet-guest pushed a commit to branch master
in repository manpages-zh.
commit 2e2de6dc50aa9788b63c5ba284b61409d497d755
Author: Boyuan Yang <073plan at gmail.com>
Date: Sun Aug 7 21:24:24 2016 +0800
remove unneeded files in raw/ and utils/
---
.travis.yml | 6 -
INSTALL | 370 --
autogen.sh | 3 -
raw/NOT_FOUND | 64 -
raw/man.macros | 236 -
raw/man1/..1 | 1 -
raw/man1/:.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/[.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/a2p.1 | 298 -
raw/man1/ab.1 | 127 -
raw/man1/access.1 | 64 -
raw/man1/alias.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/apm.1 | 86 -
raw/man1/apropos.1 | 31 -
raw/man1/ar.1 | 377 --
raw/man1/arch.1 | 34 -
raw/man1/at.1 | 285 -
raw/man1/basename.1 | 42 -
raw/man1/bash.1 | 8368 ---------------------------
raw/man1/bg.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/bind.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/break.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/builtin.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/builtins.1 | 15 -
raw/man1/bunzip2.1 | 453 --
raw/man1/bzcat.1 | 453 --
raw/man1/bzip2.1 | 453 --
raw/man1/bzip2recover.1 | 453 --
raw/man1/cal.1 | 97 -
raw/man1/cat.1 | 70 -
raw/man1/cd.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/chattr.1 | 142 -
raw/man1/chfn.1 | 62 -
raw/man1/chgrp.1 | 66 -
raw/man1/chmod.1 | 127 -
raw/man1/chown.1 | 97 -
raw/man1/chroot.1 | 43 -
raw/man1/chsh.1 | 49 -
raw/man1/chvt.1 | 23 -
raw/man1/cksum.1 | 41 -
raw/man1/clear.1 | 47 -
raw/man1/clusterdb.1 | 123 -
raw/man1/col.1 | 138 -
raw/man1/comm.1 | 47 -
raw/man1/command.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/compgen.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/complete.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/continue.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/cp.1 | 160 -
raw/man1/cpio.1 | 341 --
raw/man1/createdb.1 | 149 -
raw/man1/createlang.1 | 114 -
raw/man1/createuser.1 | 170 -
raw/man1/cut.1 | 81 -
raw/man1/date.1 | 206 -
raw/man1/dd.1 | 108 -
raw/man1/deallocvt.1 | 27 -
raw/man1/declare.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/df.1 | 106 -
raw/man1/diff.1 | 485 --
raw/man1/dig.1 | 363 --
raw/man1/dircolors.1 | 52 -
raw/man1/dirname.1 | 42 -
raw/man1/dirs.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/disown.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/dropdb.1 | 113 -
raw/man1/droplang.1 | 107 -
raw/man1/dropuser.1 | 117 -
raw/man1/du.1 | 117 -
raw/man1/dumpkeys.1 | 209 -
raw/man1/echo.1 | 82 -
raw/man1/egrep.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/eject.1 | 288 -
raw/man1/emacs.1 | 534 --
raw/man1/enable.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/env.1 | 46 -
raw/man1/eval.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/ex.1 | 493 --
raw/man1/exec.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/exit.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/expand.1 | 50 -
raw/man1/export.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/false.1 | 43 -
raw/man1/fc.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/fg.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/fgrep.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/file.1 | 473 --
raw/man1/find.1 | 459 --
raw/man1/findsmb.1 | 95 -
raw/man1/finger.1 | 193 -
raw/man1/fmt.1 | 61 -
raw/man1/fold.1 | 53 -
raw/man1/free.1 | 78 -
raw/man1/ftp.1 | 1053 ----
raw/man1/gcc.1 | 10237 ---------------------------------
raw/man1/gedit.1 | 61 -
raw/man1/getopts.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/gnroff.1 | 144 -
raw/man1/grep.1 | 782 ---
raw/man1/groff.1 | 1596 -----
raw/man1/groups.1 | 31 -
raw/man1/gunzip.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/gzip.1 | 499 --
raw/man1/hash.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/head.1 | 56 -
raw/man1/help.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/history.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/host.1 | 129 -
raw/man1/hostid.1 | 41 -
raw/man1/hostname.1 | 200 -
raw/man1/iconv.1 | 239 -
raw/man1/id.1 | 58 -
raw/man1/info.1 | 83 -
raw/man1/initdb.1 | 150 -
raw/man1/initex.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/initlocation.1 | 45 -
raw/man1/install-info.1 | 78 -
raw/man1/install.1 | 101 -
raw/man1/intro.1 | 258 -
raw/man1/ipcclean.1 | 35 -
raw/man1/jobs.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/kbd_mode.1 | 41 -
raw/man1/kill.1 | 87 -
raw/man1/killall.1 | 96 -
raw/man1/last.1 | 102 -
raw/man1/ld.1 | 1912 ------
raw/man1/ldd.1 | 55 -
raw/man1/let.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/ln.1 | 99 -
raw/man1/loadkeys.1 | 153 -
raw/man1/local.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/lockfile.1 | 290 -
raw/man1/logname.1 | 38 -
raw/man1/logout.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/ls.1 | 233 -
raw/man1/lsattr.1 | 44 -
raw/man1/mail.1 | 1041 ----
raw/man1/makeinfo.1 | 188 -
raw/man1/man.1 | 452 --
raw/man1/md5sum.1 | 63 -
raw/man1/mesg.1 | 42 -
raw/man1/minicom.1 | 854 ---
raw/man1/mkdir.1 | 49 -
raw/man1/mkfifo.1 | 43 -
raw/man1/mknod.1 | 57 -
raw/man1/mkpasswd.1 | 100 -
raw/man1/mktemp.1 | 243 -
raw/man1/more.1 | 202 -
raw/man1/mv.1 | 97 -
raw/man1/newgrp.1 | 28 -
raw/man1/nice.1 | 43 -
raw/man1/nmblookup.1 | 185 -
raw/man1/nohup.1 | 34 -
raw/man1/nroff.1 | 144 -
raw/man1/octave-bug.1 | 76 -
raw/man1/octave-config.1 | 37 -
raw/man1/octave.1 | 82 -
raw/man1/paste.1 | 48 -
raw/man1/perlbook.1 | 146 -
raw/man1/perlboot.1 | 1046 ----
raw/man1/perlcn.1 | 253 -
raw/man1/perlcompile.1 | 560 --
raw/man1/perldata.1 | 1075 ----
raw/man1/perlfaq.1 | 858 ---
raw/man1/perlfaq1.1 | 461 --
raw/man1/perlfaq2.1 | 732 ---
raw/man1/perlfaq3.1 | 1102 ----
raw/man1/perlfaq7.1 | 1182 ----
raw/man1/perlfaq8.1 | 1420 -----
raw/man1/perlfaq9.1 | 841 ---
raw/man1/perlform.1 | 502 --
raw/man1/perlfunc.1 | 7474 ------------------------
raw/man1/perlnumber.1 | 314 -
raw/man1/perlsec.1 | 629 --
raw/man1/perlstyle.1 | 353 --
raw/man1/perltw.1 | 271 -
raw/man1/pg_controldata.1 | 24 -
raw/man1/pg_ctl.1 | 239 -
raw/man1/pg_dump.1 | 411 --
raw/man1/pg_dumpall.1 | 187 -
raw/man1/pg_resetxlog.1 | 80 -
raw/man1/pg_restore.1 | 405 --
raw/man1/popd.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/postgres.1 | 223 -
raw/man1/postmaster.1 | 330 --
raw/man1/printf.1 | 96 -
raw/man1/psfaddtable.1 | 47 -
raw/man1/psfgettable.1 | 22 -
raw/man1/psfstriptable.1 | 23 -
raw/man1/psql.1 | 1613 ------
raw/man1/pushd.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/pwd.1 | 40 -
raw/man1/quota.1 | 125 -
raw/man1/read.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/readonly.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/return.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/rlogin.1 | 125 -
raw/man1/rm.1 | 79 -
raw/man1/rmdir.1 | 51 -
raw/man1/rvi.1 | 493 --
raw/man1/rview.1 | 493 --
raw/man1/rvim.1 | 493 --
raw/man1/scp.1 | 167 -
raw/man1/set.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/setleds.1 | 84 -
raw/man1/setmetamode.1 | 46 -
raw/man1/sh.1 | 8368 ---------------------------
raw/man1/shift.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/shopt.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/showkey.1 | 73 -
raw/man1/size.1 | 250 -
raw/man1/sleep.1 | 44 -
raw/man1/smbclient.1 | 637 --
raw/man1/smbcontrol.1 | 221 -
raw/man1/smbstatus.1 | 131 -
raw/man1/smbtar.1 | 148 -
raw/man1/sort.1 | 114 -
raw/man1/source.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/split.1 | 59 -
raw/man1/ssh.1 | 991 ----
raw/man1/stat.1 | 165 -
raw/man1/strings.1 | 236 -
raw/man1/stty.1 | 401 --
raw/man1/su.1 | 58 -
raw/man1/sum.1 | 46 -
raw/man1/suspend.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/svn.1 | 27 -
raw/man1/svnadmin.1 | 27 -
raw/man1/svndumpfilter.1 | 27 -
raw/man1/svnlook.1 | 27 -
raw/man1/svnversion.1 | 28 -
raw/man1/sync.1 | 38 -
raw/man1/tac.1 | 50 -
raw/man1/tail.1 | 93 -
raw/man1/tar.1 | 813 ---
raw/man1/tclsh.1 | 359 --
raw/man1/tee.1 | 44 -
raw/man1/testparm.1 | 123 -
raw/man1/testprns.1 | 96 -
raw/man1/tex.1 | 421 --
raw/man1/texi2dvi.1 | 92 -
raw/man1/texindex.1 | 47 -
raw/man1/times.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/touch.1 | 77 -
raw/man1/trap.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/troff.1 | 686 ---
raw/man1/true.1 | 43 -
raw/man1/tty.1 | 41 -
raw/man1/type.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/typeset.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/ulimit.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/umask.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/unalias.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/uname.1 | 65 -
raw/man1/unicode_start.1 | 39 -
raw/man1/unicode_stop.1 | 20 -
raw/man1/uniq.1 | 69 -
raw/man1/unset.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/uptime.1 | 37 -
raw/man1/usleep.1 | 25 -
raw/man1/vacuumdb.1 | 162 -
raw/man1/vi.1 | 493 --
raw/man1/view.1 | 493 --
raw/man1/vim.1 | 493 --
raw/man1/vimtutor.1 | 54 -
raw/man1/virtex.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/w.1 | 86 -
raw/man1/wait.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/wall.1 | 58 -
raw/man1/wbinfo.1 | 203 -
raw/man1/wc.1 | 55 -
raw/man1/whatis.1 | 33 -
raw/man1/who.1 | 93 -
raw/man1/wish.1 | 421 --
raw/man1/xargs.1 | 112 -
raw/man1/xpdf.1 | 495 --
raw/man1/xxd.1 | 373 --
raw/man1/yacc.1 | 139 -
raw/man1/yes.1 | 41 -
raw/man1/ypchfn.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/ypchsh.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/yppasswd.1 | 156 -
raw/man1/zcat.1 | 1 -
raw/man1/zipinfo.1 | 488 --
raw/man1/zless.1 | 18 -
raw/man2/accept.2 | 288 -
raw/man2/bind.2 | 207 -
raw/man2/close.2 | 101 -
raw/man2/create_module.2 | 41 -
raw/man2/execve.2 | 203 -
raw/man2/init_module.2 | 77 -
raw/man2/listen.2 | 130 -
raw/man2/open.2 | 432 --
raw/man2/query_module.2 | 101 -
raw/man2/read.2 | 140 -
raw/man2/send.2 | 252 -
raw/man2/write.2 | 127 -
raw/man3/Object.3 | 568 --
raw/man3/basename.3 | 135 -
raw/man3/bindtextdomain.3 | 69 -
raw/man3/bzero.3 | 54 -
raw/man3/clearerr.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/exec.3 | 207 -
raw/man3/exit.3 | 96 -
raw/man3/fclose.3 | 104 -
raw/man3/fcloseall.3 | 70 -
raw/man3/fdopen.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/feof.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/ferror.3 | 106 -
raw/man3/fflush.3 | 107 -
raw/man3/fileno.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/flockfile.3 | 89 -
raw/man3/fopen.3 | 236 -
raw/man3/freopen.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/iconv_close.3 | 33 -
raw/man3/iconv_open.3 | 54 -
raw/man3/setbuf.3 | 190 -
raw/man3/setbuffer.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/setlinebuf.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/setlocale.3 | 190 -
raw/man3/setvbuf.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/stderr.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/stdin.3 | 130 -
raw/man3/stdio.3 | 353 --
raw/man3/stdout.3 | 1 -
raw/man3/strcoll.3 | 60 -
raw/man3/strxfrm.3 | 61 -
raw/man3/ulimit.3 | 81 -
raw/man3/unlocked_stdio.3 | 94 -
raw/man4/console_codes.4 | 527 --
raw/man4/fifo.4 | 57 -
raw/man4/hd.4 | 97 -
raw/man5/acct.5 | 40 -
raw/man5/aliases.5 | 120 -
raw/man5/environ.5 | 221 -
raw/man5/fs.5 | 165 -
raw/man5/group.5 | 50 -
raw/man5/host.conf.5 | 192 -
raw/man5/info.5 | 60 -
raw/man5/inittab.5 | 248 -
raw/man5/ipc.5 | 383 --
raw/man5/issue.5 | 38 -
raw/man5/keymaps.5 | 441 --
raw/man5/lmhosts.5 | 92 -
raw/man5/locale.5 | 577 --
raw/man5/man.config.5 | 42 -
raw/man5/motd.5 | 40 -
raw/man5/nologin.5 | 37 -
raw/man5/nscd.conf.5 | 125 -
raw/man5/passwd.5 | 127 -
raw/man5/proc.5 | 1424 -----
raw/man5/protocols.5 | 77 -
raw/man5/resolver.5 | 222 -
raw/man5/rpc.5 | 74 -
raw/man5/securetty.5 | 43 -
raw/man5/services.5 | 208 -
raw/man5/shells.5 | 52 -
raw/man5/smb.conf.5 | 6939 ----------------------
raw/man5/smbpasswd.5 | 111 -
raw/man5/svnserve.conf.5 | 72 -
raw/man5/termcap.5 | 453 --
raw/man5/texinfo.5 | 49 -
raw/man5/ttytype.5 | 69 -
raw/man5/tzfile.5 | 138 -
raw/man5/utmp.5 | 226 -
raw/man6/zic2xpm.6 | 74 -
raw/man7/LDP.7 | 87 -
raw/man7/abort.7 | 48 -
raw/man7/alter_aggregate.7 | 43 -
raw/man7/alter_conversion.7 | 39 -
raw/man7/alter_database.7 | 79 -
raw/man7/alter_domain.7 | 111 -
raw/man7/alter_function.7 | 42 -
raw/man7/alter_group.7 | 56 -
raw/man7/alter_language.7 | 30 -
raw/man7/alter_operator_class.7 | 34 -
raw/man7/alter_schema.7 | 31 -
raw/man7/alter_sequence.7 | 108 -
raw/man7/alter_table.7 | 304 -
raw/man7/alter_trigger.7 | 41 -
raw/man7/alter_user.7 | 156 -
raw/man7/analyze.7 | 98 -
raw/man7/arp.7 | 264 -
raw/man7/ascii.7 | 208 -
raw/man7/begin.7 | 71 -
raw/man7/bootparam.7 | 1238 ----
raw/man7/charsets.7 | 322 --
raw/man7/checkpoint.7 | 32 -
raw/man7/close.7 | 47 -
raw/man7/cluster.7 | 137 -
raw/man7/comment.7 | 111 -
raw/man7/commit.7 | 45 -
raw/man7/copy.7 | 372 --
raw/man7/create_aggregate.7 | 149 -
raw/man7/create_cast.7 | 158 -
raw/man7/create_constraint_trigger.7 | 41 -
raw/man7/create_conversion.7 | 84 -
raw/man7/create_database.7 | 147 -
raw/man7/create_domain.7 | 97 -
raw/man7/create_function.7 | 246 -
raw/man7/create_group.7 | 58 -
raw/man7/create_index.7 | 143 -
raw/man7/create_language.7 | 133 -
raw/man7/create_operator.7 | 168 -
raw/man7/create_operator_class.7 | 133 -
raw/man7/create_rule.7 | 152 -
raw/man7/create_schema.7 | 114 -
raw/man7/create_sequence.7 | 194 -
raw/man7/create_table.7 | 594 --
raw/man7/create_table_as.7 | 65 -
raw/man7/create_trigger.7 | 152 -
raw/man7/create_type.7 | 354 --
raw/man7/create_user.7 | 142 -
raw/man7/create_view.7 | 116 -
raw/man7/deallocate.7 | 29 -
raw/man7/declare.7 | 184 -
raw/man7/delete.7 | 74 -
raw/man7/drop_aggregate.7 | 47 -
raw/man7/drop_cast.7 | 45 -
raw/man7/drop_conversion.7 | 41 -
raw/man7/drop_database.7 | 40 -
raw/man7/drop_domain.7 | 41 -
raw/man7/drop_function.7 | 48 -
raw/man7/drop_group.7 | 33 -
raw/man7/drop_index.7 | 43 -
raw/man7/drop_language.7 | 45 -
raw/man7/drop_operator.7 | 65 -
raw/man7/drop_operator_class.7 | 47 -
raw/man7/drop_rule.7 | 43 -
raw/man7/drop_schema.7 | 47 -
raw/man7/drop_sequence.7 | 39 -
raw/man7/drop_table.7 | 50 -
raw/man7/drop_trigger.7 | 50 -
raw/man7/drop_type.7 | 44 -
raw/man7/drop_user.7 | 44 -
raw/man7/drop_view.7 | 41 -
raw/man7/end.7 | 47 -
raw/man7/execute.7 | 45 -
raw/man7/explain.7 | 173 -
raw/man7/fetch.7 | 225 -
raw/man7/glob.7 | 187 -
raw/man7/grant.7 | 261 -
raw/man7/hier.7 | 471 --
raw/man7/icmp.7 | 115 -
raw/man7/insert.7 | 122 -
raw/man7/ip.7 | 918 ---
raw/man7/listen.7 | 66 -
raw/man7/load.7 | 33 -
raw/man7/locale.7 | 204 -
raw/man7/lock.7 | 145 -
raw/man7/mailaddr.7 | 120 -
raw/man7/man.7 | 723 ---
raw/man7/mdoc.samples.7 | 2936 ----------
raw/man7/move.7 | 56 -
raw/man7/netdevice.7 | 263 -
raw/man7/netlink.7 | 253 -
raw/man7/notify.7 | 108 -
raw/man7/packet.7 | 410 --
raw/man7/prepare.7 | 91 -
raw/man7/raw.7 | 262 -
raw/man7/regex.7 | 264 -
raw/man7/reindex.7 | 146 -
raw/man7/reset.7 | 58 -
raw/man7/revoke.7 | 126 -
raw/man7/rollback.7 | 44 -
raw/man7/samba.7 | 226 -
raw/man7/select.7 | 804 ---
raw/man7/select_into.7 | 60 -
raw/man7/set.7 | 166 -
raw/man7/set_constraints.7 | 53 -
raw/man7/set_session_authorization.7 | 69 -
raw/man7/set_transaction.7 | 95 -
raw/man7/show.7 | 111 -
raw/man7/signal.7 | 255 -
raw/man7/socket.7 | 557 --
raw/man7/start_transaction.7 | 28 -
raw/man7/tcp.7 | 712 ---
raw/man7/truncate.7 | 40 -
raw/man7/udp.7 | 161 -
raw/man7/unicode.7 | 288 -
raw/man7/unix.7 | 254 -
raw/man7/unlisten.7 | 65 -
raw/man7/update.7 | 90 -
raw/man7/utf-8.7 | 285 -
raw/man7/vacuum.7 | 139 -
raw/man7/x25.7 | 112 -
raw/man8/MAKEDEV.8 | 370 --
raw/man8/badblocks.8 | 202 -
raw/man8/blockdev.8 | 55 -
raw/man8/chat.8 | 514 --
raw/man8/chpasswd.8 | 59 -
raw/man8/convertquota.8 | 64 -
raw/man8/cron.8 | 62 -
raw/man8/dmesg.8 | 58 -
raw/man8/edquota.8 | 133 -
raw/man8/exportfs.8 | 227 -
raw/man8/fdisk.8 | 248 -
raw/man8/fsck.8 | 362 --
raw/man8/groupadd.8 | 79 -
raw/man8/groupdel.8 | 56 -
raw/man8/groupmod.8 | 61 -
raw/man8/halt.8 | 102 -
raw/man8/hdparm.8 | 483 --
raw/man8/ifconfig.8 | 200 -
raw/man8/init.8 | 284 -
raw/man8/iptables-restore.8 | 49 -
raw/man8/iptables-save.8 | 48 -
raw/man8/iptables.8 | 1044 ----
raw/man8/losetup.8 | 94 -
raw/man8/lspci.8 | 152 -
raw/man8/mailstats.8 | 115 -
raw/man8/makemap.8 | 160 -
raw/man8/mingetty.8 | 112 -
raw/man8/mkfs.8 | 123 -
raw/man8/mkswap.8 | 152 -
raw/man8/modinfo.8 | 86 -
raw/man8/netstat.8 | 459 --
raw/man8/nmbd.8 | 178 -
raw/man8/ntsysv.8 | 34 -
raw/man8/ping.8 | 332 --
raw/man8/pppd.8 | 1590 -----
raw/man8/quotacheck.8 | 193 -
raw/man8/quotaon.8 | 198 -
raw/man8/ramsize.8 | 1 -
raw/man8/rdev.8 | 159 -
raw/man8/repquota.8 | 109 -
raw/man8/rootflags.8 | 1 -
raw/man8/route.8 | 326 --
raw/man8/rpm.8 | 988 ----
raw/man8/setquota.8 | 137 -
raw/man8/setserial.8 | 520 --
raw/man8/showmount.8 | 58 -
raw/man8/shutdown.8 | 179 -
raw/man8/smbd.8 | 230 -
raw/man8/smbmnt.8 | 91 -
raw/man8/smbmount.8 | 219 -
raw/man8/smbpasswd.8 | 219 -
raw/man8/smbspool.8 | 115 -
raw/man8/smbumount.8 | 56 -
raw/man8/svnserve.8 | 77 -
raw/man8/swapoff.8 | 1 -
raw/man8/swapon.8 | 145 -
raw/man8/sync.8 | 84 -
raw/man8/tcpdump.8 | 1970 -------
raw/man8/tzselect.8 | 44 -
raw/man8/umount.8 | 134 -
raw/man8/useradd.8 | 190 -
raw/man8/userdel.8 | 67 -
raw/man8/usermod.8 | 132 -
raw/man8/vidmode.8 | 1 -
raw/man8/vmstat.8 | 169 -
raw/man8/xinetd.8 | 193 -
raw/man8/zdump.8 | 39 -
raw/man8/zic.8 | 414 --
raw/manl/cbdsqr.l | 136 -
raw/manl/lapack.l | 150 -
raw/manl/zdrot.l | 116 -
raw/manl/zdrscl.l | 39 -
raw/mann/Http.n | 758 ---
raw/mann/Tcl.n | 428 --
raw/mann/after.n | 342 --
raw/mann/append.n | 267 -
raw/mann/array.n | 358 --
raw/mann/bell.n | 269 -
raw/mann/bgerror.n | 314 -
raw/mann/binary.n | 783 ---
raw/mann/bindtags.n | 316 -
raw/mann/break.n | 272 -
raw/mann/catch.n | 301 -
raw/mann/cd.n | 266 -
raw/mann/chooseColor.n | 284 -
raw/mann/chooseDirectory.n | 287 -
raw/mann/ckalloc.n | 281 -
raw/mann/ckfree.n | 281 -
raw/mann/clipboard.n | 316 -
raw/mann/clock.n | 449 --
raw/mann/close.n | 297 -
raw/mann/concat.n | 278 -
raw/mann/continue.n | 272 -
raw/mann/cursors.n | 389 --
raw/mann/dde.n | 371 --
raw/mann/destroy.n | 269 -
raw/mann/encoding.n | 314 -
raw/mann/eof.n | 265 -
raw/mann/error.n | 296 -
raw/mann/eval.n | 268 -
raw/mann/exec.n | 542 --
raw/mann/exit.n | 266 -
raw/mann/expr.n | 622 --
raw/mann/fblocked.n | 268 -
raw/mann/fconfigure.n | 436 --
raw/mann/fcopy.n | 362 --
raw/mann/file.n | 579 --
raw/mann/fileevent.n | 344 --
raw/mann/filename.n | 435 --
raw/mann/flush.n | 270 -
raw/mann/focusNext.n | 295 -
raw/mann/for.n | 298 -
raw/mann/foreach.n | 325 --
raw/mann/format.n | 452 --
raw/mann/gets.n | 285 -
raw/mann/glob.n | 396 --
raw/mann/global.n | 274 -
raw/mann/history.n | 339 --
raw/mann/html.n | 425 --
raw/mann/if.n | 281 -
raw/mann/incr.n | 269 -
raw/mann/info.n | 420 --
raw/mann/interp.n | 777 ---
raw/mann/join.n | 267 -
raw/mann/keysyms.n | 1165 ----
raw/mann/lappend.n | 273 -
raw/mann/library.n | 546 --
raw/mann/lindex.n | 275 -
raw/mann/linsert.n | 271 -
raw/mann/list.n | 284 -
raw/mann/llength.n | 264 -
raw/mann/load.n | 370 --
raw/mann/loadTk.n | 311 -
raw/mann/lower.n | 273 -
raw/mann/lrange.n | 277 -
raw/mann/lreplace.n | 286 -
raw/mann/lsearch.n | 281 -
raw/mann/lsort.n | 426 --
raw/mann/memory.n | 281 -
raw/mann/messageBox.n | 324 --
raw/mann/msgcat.n | 483 --
raw/mann/namespace.n | 801 ---
raw/mann/open.n | 508 --
raw/mann/option.n | 326 --
raw/mann/optionMenu.n | 275 -
raw/mann/package.n | 431 --
raw/mann/packagens.n | 290 -
raw/mann/palette.n | 308 -
raw/mann/pid.n | 272 -
raw/mann/pkgMkIndex.n | 478 --
raw/mann/popup.n | 268 -
raw/mann/proc.n | 312 -
raw/mann/puts.n | 304 -
raw/mann/pwd.n | 263 -
raw/mann/raise.n | 273 -
raw/mann/re_syntax.n | 1167 ----
raw/mann/read.n | 293 -
raw/mann/regexp.n | 368 --
raw/mann/registry.n | 403 --
raw/mann/regsub.n | 347 --
raw/mann/rename.n | 270 -
raw/mann/resource.n | 390 --
raw/mann/return.n | 327 --
raw/mann/safe.n | 585 --
raw/mann/scan.n | 430 --
raw/mann/seek.n | 299 -
raw/mann/selection.n | 365 --
raw/mann/send.n | 332 --
raw/mann/set.n | 286 -
raw/mann/socket.n | 369 --
raw/mann/source.n | 279 -
raw/mann/split.n | 282 -
raw/mann/string.n | 576 --
raw/mann/subst.n | 286 -
raw/mann/switch.n | 352 --
raw/mann/tclvars.n | 636 --
raw/mann/tell.n | 270 -
raw/mann/time.n | 271 -
raw/mann/tk.n | 317 -
raw/mann/tk_dialog.n | 300 -
raw/mann/tkerror.n | 273 -
raw/mann/tkvars.n | 307 -
raw/mann/tkwait.n | 286 -
raw/mann/trace.n | 395 --
raw/mann/unknown.n | 313 -
raw/mann/unset.n | 269 -
raw/mann/update.n | 286 -
raw/mann/uplevel.n | 315 -
raw/mann/upvar.n | 347 --
raw/mann/variable.n | 301 -
raw/mann/vwait.n | 278 -
raw/mann/while.n | 293 -
utils/bi2fbfi.pl | 12 -
utils/html2man | 9 -
utils/man2html | 14 -
utils/man2html.sh | 70 -
utils/name.pl | 7 -
utils/pre-trans.pl | 24 -
utils/release-manpages | 16 -
utils/update-cman.sh | 2 -
utils/zhtw_2_zhcn.pl | 1821 ------
687 files changed, 190818 deletions(-)
diff --git a/.travis.yml b/.travis.yml
deleted file mode 100644
index 66ad181..0000000
--- a/.travis.yml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6 +0,0 @@
-install:
- - sudo apt-get install zh-autoconvert
-script:
- - ./autogen.sh
- - ./configure
- - make
diff --git a/INSTALL b/INSTALL
deleted file mode 100644
index 007e939..0000000
--- a/INSTALL
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
-Installation Instructions
-*************************
-
-Copyright (C) 1994-1996, 1999-2002, 2004-2013 Free Software Foundation,
-Inc.
-
- Copying and distribution of this file, with or without modification,
-are permitted in any medium without royalty provided the copyright
-notice and this notice are preserved. This file is offered as-is,
-without warranty of any kind.
-
-Basic Installation
-==================
-
- Briefly, the shell commands `./configure; make; make install' should
-configure, build, and install this package. The following
-more-detailed instructions are generic; see the `README' file for
-instructions specific to this package. Some packages provide this
-`INSTALL' file but do not implement all of the features documented
-below. The lack of an optional feature in a given package is not
-necessarily a bug. More recommendations for GNU packages can be found
-in *note Makefile Conventions: (standards)Makefile Conventions.
-
- The `configure' shell script attempts to guess correct values for
-various system-dependent variables used during compilation. It uses
-those values to create a `Makefile' in each directory of the package.
-It may also create one or more `.h' files containing system-dependent
-definitions. Finally, it creates a shell script `config.status' that
-you can run in the future to recreate the current configuration, and a
-file `config.log' containing compiler output (useful mainly for
-debugging `configure').
-
- It can also use an optional file (typically called `config.cache'
-and enabled with `--cache-file=config.cache' or simply `-C') that saves
-the results of its tests to speed up reconfiguring. Caching is
-disabled by default to prevent problems with accidental use of stale
-cache files.
-
- If you need to do unusual things to compile the package, please try
-to figure out how `configure' could check whether to do them, and mail
-diffs or instructions to the address given in the `README' so they can
-be considered for the next release. If you are using the cache, and at
-some point `config.cache' contains results you don't want to keep, you
-may remove or edit it.
-
- The file `configure.ac' (or `configure.in') is used to create
-`configure' by a program called `autoconf'. You need `configure.ac' if
-you want to change it or regenerate `configure' using a newer version
-of `autoconf'.
-
- The simplest way to compile this package is:
-
- 1. `cd' to the directory containing the package's source code and type
- `./configure' to configure the package for your system.
-
- Running `configure' might take a while. While running, it prints
- some messages telling which features it is checking for.
-
- 2. Type `make' to compile the package.
-
- 3. Optionally, type `make check' to run any self-tests that come with
- the package, generally using the just-built uninstalled binaries.
-
- 4. Type `make install' to install the programs and any data files and
- documentation. When installing into a prefix owned by root, it is
- recommended that the package be configured and built as a regular
- user, and only the `make install' phase executed with root
- privileges.
-
- 5. Optionally, type `make installcheck' to repeat any self-tests, but
- this time using the binaries in their final installed location.
- This target does not install anything. Running this target as a
- regular user, particularly if the prior `make install' required
- root privileges, verifies that the installation completed
- correctly.
-
- 6. You can remove the program binaries and object files from the
- source code directory by typing `make clean'. To also remove the
- files that `configure' created (so you can compile the package for
- a different kind of computer), type `make distclean'. There is
- also a `make maintainer-clean' target, but that is intended mainly
- for the package's developers. If you use it, you may have to get
- all sorts of other programs in order to regenerate files that came
- with the distribution.
-
- 7. Often, you can also type `make uninstall' to remove the installed
- files again. In practice, not all packages have tested that
- uninstallation works correctly, even though it is required by the
- GNU Coding Standards.
-
- 8. Some packages, particularly those that use Automake, provide `make
- distcheck', which can by used by developers to test that all other
- targets like `make install' and `make uninstall' work correctly.
- This target is generally not run by end users.
-
-Compilers and Options
-=====================
-
- Some systems require unusual options for compilation or linking that
-the `configure' script does not know about. Run `./configure --help'
-for details on some of the pertinent environment variables.
-
- You can give `configure' initial values for configuration parameters
-by setting variables in the command line or in the environment. Here
-is an example:
-
- ./configure CC=c99 CFLAGS=-g LIBS=-lposix
-
- *Note Defining Variables::, for more details.
-
-Compiling For Multiple Architectures
-====================================
-
- You can compile the package for more than one kind of computer at the
-same time, by placing the object files for each architecture in their
-own directory. To do this, you can use GNU `make'. `cd' to the
-directory where you want the object files and executables to go and run
-the `configure' script. `configure' automatically checks for the
-source code in the directory that `configure' is in and in `..'. This
-is known as a "VPATH" build.
-
- With a non-GNU `make', it is safer to compile the package for one
-architecture at a time in the source code directory. After you have
-installed the package for one architecture, use `make distclean' before
-reconfiguring for another architecture.
-
- On MacOS X 10.5 and later systems, you can create libraries and
-executables that work on multiple system types--known as "fat" or
-"universal" binaries--by specifying multiple `-arch' options to the
-compiler but only a single `-arch' option to the preprocessor. Like
-this:
-
- ./configure CC="gcc -arch i386 -arch x86_64 -arch ppc -arch ppc64" \
- CXX="g++ -arch i386 -arch x86_64 -arch ppc -arch ppc64" \
- CPP="gcc -E" CXXCPP="g++ -E"
-
- This is not guaranteed to produce working output in all cases, you
-may have to build one architecture at a time and combine the results
-using the `lipo' tool if you have problems.
-
-Installation Names
-==================
-
- By default, `make install' installs the package's commands under
-`/usr/local/bin', include files under `/usr/local/include', etc. You
-can specify an installation prefix other than `/usr/local' by giving
-`configure' the option `--prefix=PREFIX', where PREFIX must be an
-absolute file name.
-
- You can specify separate installation prefixes for
-architecture-specific files and architecture-independent files. If you
-pass the option `--exec-prefix=PREFIX' to `configure', the package uses
-PREFIX as the prefix for installing programs and libraries.
-Documentation and other data files still use the regular prefix.
-
- In addition, if you use an unusual directory layout you can give
-options like `--bindir=DIR' to specify different values for particular
-kinds of files. Run `configure --help' for a list of the directories
-you can set and what kinds of files go in them. In general, the
-default for these options is expressed in terms of `${prefix}', so that
-specifying just `--prefix' will affect all of the other directory
-specifications that were not explicitly provided.
-
- The most portable way to affect installation locations is to pass the
-correct locations to `configure'; however, many packages provide one or
-both of the following shortcuts of passing variable assignments to the
-`make install' command line to change installation locations without
-having to reconfigure or recompile.
-
- The first method involves providing an override variable for each
-affected directory. For example, `make install
-prefix=/alternate/directory' will choose an alternate location for all
-directory configuration variables that were expressed in terms of
-`${prefix}'. Any directories that were specified during `configure',
-but not in terms of `${prefix}', must each be overridden at install
-time for the entire installation to be relocated. The approach of
-makefile variable overrides for each directory variable is required by
-the GNU Coding Standards, and ideally causes no recompilation.
-However, some platforms have known limitations with the semantics of
-shared libraries that end up requiring recompilation when using this
-method, particularly noticeable in packages that use GNU Libtool.
-
- The second method involves providing the `DESTDIR' variable. For
-example, `make install DESTDIR=/alternate/directory' will prepend
-`/alternate/directory' before all installation names. The approach of
-`DESTDIR' overrides is not required by the GNU Coding Standards, and
-does not work on platforms that have drive letters. On the other hand,
-it does better at avoiding recompilation issues, and works well even
-when some directory options were not specified in terms of `${prefix}'
-at `configure' time.
-
-Optional Features
-=================
-
- If the package supports it, you can cause programs to be installed
-with an extra prefix or suffix on their names by giving `configure' the
-option `--program-prefix=PREFIX' or `--program-suffix=SUFFIX'.
-
- Some packages pay attention to `--enable-FEATURE' options to
-`configure', where FEATURE indicates an optional part of the package.
-They may also pay attention to `--with-PACKAGE' options, where PACKAGE
-is something like `gnu-as' or `x' (for the X Window System). The
-`README' should mention any `--enable-' and `--with-' options that the
-package recognizes.
-
- For packages that use the X Window System, `configure' can usually
-find the X include and library files automatically, but if it doesn't,
-you can use the `configure' options `--x-includes=DIR' and
-`--x-libraries=DIR' to specify their locations.
-
- Some packages offer the ability to configure how verbose the
-execution of `make' will be. For these packages, running `./configure
---enable-silent-rules' sets the default to minimal output, which can be
-overridden with `make V=1'; while running `./configure
---disable-silent-rules' sets the default to verbose, which can be
-overridden with `make V=0'.
-
-Particular systems
-==================
-
- On HP-UX, the default C compiler is not ANSI C compatible. If GNU
-CC is not installed, it is recommended to use the following options in
-order to use an ANSI C compiler:
-
- ./configure CC="cc -Ae -D_XOPEN_SOURCE=500"
-
-and if that doesn't work, install pre-built binaries of GCC for HP-UX.
-
- HP-UX `make' updates targets which have the same time stamps as
-their prerequisites, which makes it generally unusable when shipped
-generated files such as `configure' are involved. Use GNU `make'
-instead.
-
- On OSF/1 a.k.a. Tru64, some versions of the default C compiler cannot
-parse its `<wchar.h>' header file. The option `-nodtk' can be used as
-a workaround. If GNU CC is not installed, it is therefore recommended
-to try
-
- ./configure CC="cc"
-
-and if that doesn't work, try
-
- ./configure CC="cc -nodtk"
-
- On Solaris, don't put `/usr/ucb' early in your `PATH'. This
-directory contains several dysfunctional programs; working variants of
-these programs are available in `/usr/bin'. So, if you need `/usr/ucb'
-in your `PATH', put it _after_ `/usr/bin'.
-
- On Haiku, software installed for all users goes in `/boot/common',
-not `/usr/local'. It is recommended to use the following options:
-
- ./configure --prefix=/boot/common
-
-Specifying the System Type
-==========================
-
- There may be some features `configure' cannot figure out
-automatically, but needs to determine by the type of machine the package
-will run on. Usually, assuming the package is built to be run on the
-_same_ architectures, `configure' can figure that out, but if it prints
-a message saying it cannot guess the machine type, give it the
-`--build=TYPE' option. TYPE can either be a short name for the system
-type, such as `sun4', or a canonical name which has the form:
-
- CPU-COMPANY-SYSTEM
-
-where SYSTEM can have one of these forms:
-
- OS
- KERNEL-OS
-
- See the file `config.sub' for the possible values of each field. If
-`config.sub' isn't included in this package, then this package doesn't
-need to know the machine type.
-
- If you are _building_ compiler tools for cross-compiling, you should
-use the option `--target=TYPE' to select the type of system they will
-produce code for.
-
- If you want to _use_ a cross compiler, that generates code for a
-platform different from the build platform, you should specify the
-"host" platform (i.e., that on which the generated programs will
-eventually be run) with `--host=TYPE'.
-
-Sharing Defaults
-================
-
- If you want to set default values for `configure' scripts to share,
-you can create a site shell script called `config.site' that gives
-default values for variables like `CC', `cache_file', and `prefix'.
-`configure' looks for `PREFIX/share/config.site' if it exists, then
-`PREFIX/etc/config.site' if it exists. Or, you can set the
-`CONFIG_SITE' environment variable to the location of the site script.
-A warning: not all `configure' scripts look for a site script.
-
-Defining Variables
-==================
-
- Variables not defined in a site shell script can be set in the
-environment passed to `configure'. However, some packages may run
-configure again during the build, and the customized values of these
-variables may be lost. In order to avoid this problem, you should set
-them in the `configure' command line, using `VAR=value'. For example:
-
- ./configure CC=/usr/local2/bin/gcc
-
-causes the specified `gcc' to be used as the C compiler (unless it is
-overridden in the site shell script).
-
-Unfortunately, this technique does not work for `CONFIG_SHELL' due to
-an Autoconf limitation. Until the limitation is lifted, you can use
-this workaround:
-
- CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash ./configure CONFIG_SHELL=/bin/bash
-
-`configure' Invocation
-======================
-
- `configure' recognizes the following options to control how it
-operates.
-
-`--help'
-`-h'
- Print a summary of all of the options to `configure', and exit.
-
-`--help=short'
-`--help=recursive'
- Print a summary of the options unique to this package's
- `configure', and exit. The `short' variant lists options used
- only in the top level, while the `recursive' variant lists options
- also present in any nested packages.
-
-`--version'
-`-V'
- Print the version of Autoconf used to generate the `configure'
- script, and exit.
-
-`--cache-file=FILE'
- Enable the cache: use and save the results of the tests in FILE,
- traditionally `config.cache'. FILE defaults to `/dev/null' to
- disable caching.
-
-`--config-cache'
-`-C'
- Alias for `--cache-file=config.cache'.
-
-`--quiet'
-`--silent'
-`-q'
- Do not print messages saying which checks are being made. To
- suppress all normal output, redirect it to `/dev/null' (any error
- messages will still be shown).
-
-`--srcdir=DIR'
- Look for the package's source code in directory DIR. Usually
- `configure' can determine that directory automatically.
-
-`--prefix=DIR'
- Use DIR as the installation prefix. *note Installation Names::
- for more details, including other options available for fine-tuning
- the installation locations.
-
-`--no-create'
-`-n'
- Run the configure checks, but stop before creating any output
- files.
-
-`configure' also accepts some other, not widely useful, options. Run
-`configure --help' for more details.
diff --git a/autogen.sh b/autogen.sh
deleted file mode 100755
index 8b142a1..0000000
--- a/autogen.sh
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-
-autoreconf -i -f
diff --git a/raw/NOT_FOUND b/raw/NOT_FOUND
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c961ca..0000000
--- a/raw/NOT_FOUND
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/ac.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/ali.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/autorun.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/biff.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/cce.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/charset.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/dircolor.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/dnskeygen.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/dnsquery.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/git.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/gview.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/gvim.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/listalias.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/mailto.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/make_smbcodepage.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/mencoder.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/mirror.1l.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/mode.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/mplayer.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/perl.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/rgview.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/rgvim.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/showfont.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/smbrun.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/smbsh.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/sq.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/tcpdump.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/unsq.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/uuencode.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/vt-is-UTF8.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man1/xmodmap.1.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man5/ftpaccess.5.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man5/lilo.conf.5.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man5/man.conf.5.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man5/nsswitch.5.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man7/roff.7.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man7/suffix.7.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/bdflush.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/imapd.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/inetd.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/lilo.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/named-bootconf.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/printcap.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/quotaoff.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/quotastats.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/setclock.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man8/swat.8.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man9/cmanexample.9.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/man9/cmanformat.9.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/ArrowButton.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/Button.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/ComboBox.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/Dialog.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/LabelFrame.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/MainFrame.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/Notebook.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/PagesManager.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/PanedWindow.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/ProgressBar.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/ScrollableFrame.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/ScrolledWindow.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/SpinBox.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-cp: stat‘/usr/share/man/mann/TitleFrame.n.gz’失败: 没有那个文件或目录
-mpg123.1
diff --git a/raw/man.macros b/raw/man.macros
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a62570..0000000
--- a/raw/man.macros
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,236 +0,0 @@
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:52 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c 8c 12c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
diff --git a/raw/man1/..1 b/raw/man1/..1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/..1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/:.1 b/raw/man1/:.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/:.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/[.1 b/raw/man1/[.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/[.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/a2p.1 b/raw/man1/a2p.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 430c3d1..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/a2p.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,298 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "A2P 1"
-.TH A2P 1 "2003-09-02" "perl v5.8.1" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-a2p \- Awk to Perl translator
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-\&\fBa2p [options] filename\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-\&\fIA2p\fR takes an awk script specified on the command line (or from
-standard input) and produces a comparable \fIperl\fR script on the
-standard output.
-.Sh "Options"
-.IX Subsection "Options"
-Options include:
-.IP "\fB\-D<number>\fR" 5
-.IX Item "-D<number>"
-sets debugging flags.
-.IP "\fB\-F<character>\fR" 5
-.IX Item "-F<character>"
-tells a2p that this awk script is always invoked with this \fB\-F\fR
-switch.
-.IP "\fB\-n<fieldlist>\fR" 5
-.IX Item "-n<fieldlist>"
-specifies the names of the input fields if input does not have to be
-split into an array. If you were translating an awk script that
-processes the password file, you might say:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& a2p -7 -nlogin.password.uid.gid.gcos.shell.home
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Any delimiter can be used to separate the field names.
-.IP "\fB\-<number>\fR" 5
-.IX Item "-<number>"
-causes a2p to assume that input will always have that many fields.
-.IP "\fB\-o\fR" 5
-.IX Item "-o"
-tells a2p to use old awk behavior. The only current differences are:
-.RS 5
-.IP "*" 5
-Old awk always has a line loop, even if there are no line
-actions, whereas new awk does not.
-.IP "*" 5
-In old awk, sprintf is extremely greedy about its arguments.
-For example, given the statement
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print sprintf(some_args), extra_args;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-old awk considers \fIextra_args\fR to be arguments to \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR; new awk
-considers them arguments to \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR.
-.RE
-.RS 5
-.RE
-.ie n .Sh """Considerations"""
-.el .Sh "``Considerations''"
-.IX Subsection "Considerations"
-A2p cannot do as good a job translating as a human would, but it
-usually does pretty well. There are some areas where you may want to
-examine the perl script produced and tweak it some. Here are some of
-them, in no particular order.
-.PP
-There is an awk idiom of putting \fIint()\fR around a string expression to
-force numeric interpretation, even though the argument is always
-integer anyway. This is generally unneeded in perl, but a2p can't
-tell if the argument is always going to be integer, so it leaves it
-in. You may wish to remove it.
-.PP
-Perl differentiates numeric comparison from string comparison. Awk
-has one operator for both that decides at run time which comparison to
-do. A2p does not try to do a complete job of awk emulation at this
-point. Instead it guesses which one you want. It's almost always
-right, but it can be spoofed. All such guesses are marked with the
-comment "\f(CW\*(C`#???\*(C'\fR". You should go through and check them. You might
-want to run at least once with the \fB\-w\fR switch to perl, which will
-warn you if you use == where you should have used eq.
-.PP
-Perl does not attempt to emulate the behavior of awk in which
-nonexistent array elements spring into existence simply by being
-referenced. If somehow you are relying on this mechanism to create
-null entries for a subsequent for...in, they won't be there in perl.
-.PP
-If a2p makes a split line that assigns to a list of variables that
-looks like (Fld1, Fld2, Fld3...) you may want to rerun a2p using the
-\&\fB\-n\fR option mentioned above. This will let you name the fields
-throughout the script. If it splits to an array instead, the script
-is probably referring to the number of fields somewhere.
-.PP
-The exit statement in awk doesn't necessarily exit; it goes to the \s-1END\s0
-block if there is one. Awk scripts that do contortions within the \s-1END\s0
-block to bypass the block under such circumstances can be simplified
-by removing the conditional in the \s-1END\s0 block and just exiting directly
-from the perl script.
-.PP
-Perl has two kinds of array, numerically-indexed and associative.
-Perl associative arrays are called \*(L"hashes\*(R". Awk arrays are usually
-translated to hashes, but if you happen to know that the index is
-always going to be numeric you could change the {...} to [...].
-Iteration over a hash is done using the \fIkeys()\fR function, but iteration
-over an array is \s-1NOT\s0. You might need to modify any loop that iterates
-over such an array.
-.PP
-Awk starts by assuming \s-1OFMT\s0 has the value %.6g. Perl starts by
-assuming its equivalent, $#, to have the value %.20g. You'll want to
-set $# explicitly if you use the default value of \s-1OFMT\s0.
-.PP
-Near the top of the line loop will be the split operation that is
-implicit in the awk script. There are times when you can move this
-down past some conditionals that test the entire record so that the
-split is not done as often.
-.PP
-For aesthetic reasons you may wish to change the array base $[ from 1
-back to perl's default of 0, but remember to change all array
-subscripts \s-1AND\s0 all \fIsubstr()\fR and \fIindex()\fR operations to match.
-.PP
-Cute comments that say \*(L"# Here is a workaround because awk is dumb\*(R"
-are passed through unmodified.
-.PP
-Awk scripts are often embedded in a shell script that pipes stuff into
-and out of awk. Often the shell script wrapper can be incorporated
-into the perl script, since perl can start up pipes into and out of
-itself, and can do other things that awk can't do by itself.
-.PP
-Scripts that refer to the special variables \s-1RSTART\s0 and \s-1RLENGTH\s0 can
-often be simplified by referring to the variables $`, $& and $', as
-long as they are within the scope of the pattern match that sets them.
-.PP
-The produced perl script may have subroutines defined to deal with
-awk's semantics regarding getline and print. Since a2p usually picks
-correctness over efficiency. it is almost always possible to rewrite
-such code to be more efficient by discarding the semantic sugar.
-.PP
-For efficiency, you may wish to remove the keyword from any return
-statement that is the last statement executed in a subroutine. A2p
-catches the most common case, but doesn't analyze embedded blocks for
-subtler cases.
-.PP
-ARGV[0] translates to \f(CW$ARGV0\fR, but ARGV[n] translates to \f(CW$ARGV\fR[$n]. A
-loop that tries to iterate over ARGV[0] won't find it.
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT"
-A2p uses no environment variables.
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR"
-Larry Wall <\fIlarry at wall.org\fR>
-.SH "FILES"
-.IX Header "FILES"
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-.Vb 1
-\& perl The perl compiler/interpreter
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& s2p sed to perl translator
-.Ve
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.IX Header "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.SH "BUGS"
-.IX Header "BUGS"
-It would be possible to emulate awk's behavior in selecting string
-versus numeric operations at run time by inspection of the operands,
-but it would be gross and inefficient. Besides, a2p almost always
-guesses right.
-.PP
-Storage for the awk syntax tree is currently static, and can run out.
diff --git a/raw/man1/ab.1 b/raw/man1/ab.1
deleted file mode 100644
index cc39de4..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ab.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,127 +0,0 @@
-.\" XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
-.\" DO NOT EDIT! Generated from XML source.
-.\" XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "AB" 8 "2003-04-29" "Apache HTTP Server" "ab"
-
-.SH NAME
-ab \- Apache HTTP server benchmarking tool
-
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.PP
-\fBab\fR [ -\fBA\fR \fIauth-username\fR:\fIpassword\fR ] [ -\fBc\fR \fIconcurrency\fR ] [ -\fBC\fR \fIcookie-name\fR=\fIvalue\fR ] [ -\fBd\fR ] [ -\fBe\fR \fIcsv-file\fR ] [ -\fBg\fR \fIgnuplot-file\fR ] [ -\fBh\fR ] [ -\fBH\fR \fIcustom-header\fR ] [ -\fBi\fR ] [ -\fBk\fR ] [ -\fBn\fR \fIrequests\fR ] [ -\fBp\fR \fIPOST-file\fR ] [ -\fBP\fR \fIproxy-auth-username\fR:\fIpassword\fR ] [ -\fBq\fR ] [ -\fBs\fR ] [ -\fBS\fR ] [ -\fBt\fR \fItimelimit\fR ] [ -\fBT\fR \fIcontent-type\fR ] [ -\f [...]
-
-
-.SH "SUMMARY"
-
-.PP
-ab is a tool for benchmarking your Apache Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) server\&. It is designed to give you an impression of how your current Apache installation performs\&. This especially shows you how many requests per second your Apache installation is capable of serving\&.
-
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.RS
-
-.TP
--A \fIauth-username\fR:\fIpassword\fR
-Supply BASIC Authentication credentials to the server\&. The username and password are separated by a single : and sent on the wire base64 encoded\&. The string is sent regardless of whether the server needs it (\fIi\&.e\&.\fR, has sent an 401 authentication needed)\&.
-.TP
--c \fIconcurrency\fR
-Number of multiple requests to perform at a time\&. Default is one request at a time\&.
-.TP
--C \fIcookie-name\fR=\fIvalue\fR
-Add a Cookie: line to the request\&. The argument is typically in the form of a \fIname\fR=\fIvalue\fR pair\&. This field is repeatable\&.
-.TP
--d
-Do not display the "percentage served within XX [ms] table"\&. (legacy support)\&.
-.TP
--e \fIcsv-file\fR
-Write a Comma separated value (CSV) file which contains for each percentage (from 1% to 100%) the time (in milli seconds) it took to serve that percentage of the requests\&. This is usually more useful than the 'gnuplot' file; as the results are already 'binned'\&.
-.TP
--g \fIgnuplot-file\fR
-Write all measured values out as a 'gnuplot' or TSV (Tab separate values) file\&. This file can easily be imported into packages like Gnuplot, IDL, Mathematica, Igor or even Excell\&. The labels are on the first line of the file\&.
-.TP
--h
-Display usage information\&.
-.TP
--H \fIcustom-header\fR
-Append extra headers to the request\&. The argument is typically in the form of a valid header line, containing a colon-separated field-value pair (\fIi\&.e\&.\fR, "Accept-Encoding: zip/zop;8bit")\&.
-.TP
--i
-Do HEAD requests instead of GET\&.
-.TP
--k
-Enable the HTTP KeepAlive feature, \fIi\&.e\&.\fR, perform multiple requests within one HTTP session\&. Default is no KeepAlive\&.
-.TP
--n \fIrequests\fR
-Number of requests to perform for the benchmarking session\&. The default is to just perform a single request which usually leads to non-representative benchmarking results\&.
-.TP
--p \fIPOST-file\fR
-File containing data to POST\&.
-.TP
--P \fIproxy-auth-username\fR:\fIpassword\fR
-Supply BASIC Authentication credentials to a proxy en-route\&. The username and password are separated by a single : and sent on the wire base64 encoded\&. The string is sent regardless of whether the proxy needs it (\fIi\&.e\&.\fR, has sent an 407 proxy authentication needed)\&.
-.TP
--q
-When processing more than 150 requests, ab outputs a progress count on stderr every 10% or 100 requests or so\&. The -q flag will suppress these messages\&.
-.TP
--s
-When compiled in (ab -h will show you) use the SSL protected https rather than the http protocol\&. This feature is experimental and \fIvery\fR rudimentary\&. You probably do not want to use it\&.
-.TP
--S
-Do not display the median and standard deviation values, nor display the warning/error messages when the average and median are more than one or two times the standard deviation apart\&. And default to the min/avg/max values\&. (legacy support)\&.
-.TP
--t \fItimelimit\fR
-Maximum number of seconds to spend for benchmarking\&. This implies a -n 50000 internally\&. Use this to benchmark the server within a fixed total amount of time\&. Per default there is no timelimit\&.
-.TP
--T \fIcontent-type\fR
-Content-type header to use for POST data\&.
-.TP
--v \fIverbosity\fR
-Set verbosity level - 4 and above prints information on headers, 3 and above prints response codes (404, 200, etc\&.), 2 and above prints warnings and info\&.
-.TP
--V
-Display version number and exit\&.
-.TP
--w
-Print out results in HTML tables\&. Default table is two columns wide, with a white background\&.
-.TP
--x \fI<table>-attributes\fR
-String to use as attributes for <table>\&. Attributes are inserted <table \fIhere\fR >\&.
-.TP
--X \fIproxy\fR[:\fIport\fR]
-Use a proxy server for the requests\&.
-.TP
--y \fI<tr>-attributes\fR
-String to use as attributes for <tr>\&.
-.TP
--z \fI<td>-attributes\fR
-String to use as attributes for <td>\&.
-.RE
-
-.SH "BUGS"
-
-.PP
-There are various statically declared buffers of fixed length\&. Combined with the lazy parsing of the command line arguments, the response headers from the server and other external inputs, this might bite you\&.
-
-.PP
-It does not implement HTTP/1\&.x fully; only accepts some 'expected' forms of responses\&. The rather heavy use of strstr(3) shows up top in profile, which might indicate a performance problem; \fIi\&.e\&.\fR, you would measure the ab performance rather than the server's\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/access.1 b/raw/man1/access.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5060011..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/access.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-.TH ACCESS 1 "4 January 1998" "Kpathsea 3.4.5"
-.\"=====================================================================
-.if n .ds MP MetaPost
-.if t .ds MP MetaPost
-.if n .ds MF Metafont
-.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
-.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
-.if n .ds TX TeX
-.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff
-.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff
-.\" the same but obliqued
-.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
-.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
-.if n .ds BX BibTeX
-.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
-.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
-.if n .ds LX LaTeX
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH NAME
-access \- determine whether a file can be accessed
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B access
-.I -mode
-.I file
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Exit successfully if
-.I file
-can be accessed with the specified mode.
-.I mode
-is one or more letters of
-.IR rwx ,
-where
-.I r
-is for readable,
-.I w
-is for writable, and
-.I x
-is for executable.
-.PP
-The difference between
-.B access
-and
-.B test
-is that the latter looks at the permission bits, while the former
-checks using the
-.BR access (2)
-system call. This makes a difference when file systems have been
-mounted read-only.
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH OPTIONS
-.B access
-accepts the following additional options:
-.TP
-.B --help
-.rb
-Print help message and exit.
-.TP
-.B --version
-.rb
-Print version information and exit.
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR access (2)
diff --git a/raw/man1/alias.1 b/raw/man1/alias.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/alias.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/apm.1 b/raw/man1/apm.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e9dce69..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/apm.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-.\" apm.1 --
-.\" Created: Wed Jan 10 14:54:03 1996 by r.faith at ieee.org
-.\" Revised: Sun Apr 21 16:37:43 1996 by r.faith at ieee.org
-.\" Copyright 1996 Rickard E. Faith (r.faith at ieee.org)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.TH APM 1 "10 Jan 1996" "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-apm \- query Advanced Power Management (APM) BIOS
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B apm [ \-vVmsS ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B apm
-reads
-.I /proc/apm
-and presents the output in a human-readable format. Since primarily
-battery status information is provided, this command is most useful on
-laptops with a compliant APM BIOS.
-.B apm
-also allows the machine to be put into standby or suspend mode.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-V, \-\-version
-Print the
-.B apm
-program version and exit immediately.
-.TP
-.B \-v, \-\-verbose
-Print information about the APM BIOS version and Linux APM driver version.
-.TP
-.B \-m, \-\-minutes
-Print total minutes remaining instead of using an hh:mm format.
-.TP
-.B \-s, \-\-suspend
-Put the machine into suspend mode if possible.
-.TP
-.B \-S, \-\-standby
-Put the machine into standby mode if possible.
-.TP
-.B \-i, \-\-ignore
-Tell the system to ignore system-generated APM suspend and standby events
-when on AC power. This may be useful to users who have laptops and want
-APM events when on battery power, but not when on AC power.
-.TP
-.B \-n, \-\-noignore
-Tell the system
-.B not
-to ignore system-generated APM suspend and standby events
-when on AC power. This is the default mode; this option is provided as a
-way to undo a prior "apm -i" call.
-.TP
-.SH BUGS
-This program requires a post-1.3.57 kernel. This program will not work
-with older kernels or with the APM patches, since the format for
-.I /proc/apm
-has changed radically.
-.SH FILES
-.I /proc/apm
-.br
-.I linux/drivers/char/apm_bios.c
-.SH AUTHOR
-This program was written by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu) and may be freely
-distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License. There is
-ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for this program. The current maintainer is Avery
-Pennarun (apenwarr at worldvisions.ca).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR xapm "(1), "apmd (8)
diff --git a/raw/man1/apropos.1 b/raw/man1/apropos.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7825a31..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/apropos.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Generated automatically from apropos.1.in by the
-.\" configure script.
-.\"
-.\" Man page for apropos
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, John W. Eaton.
-.\"
-.\" You may distribute under the terms of the GNU General Public
-.\" License as specified in the README file that comes with the man 1.0
-.\" distribution.
-.\"
-.\" John W. Eaton
-.\" jwe at che.utexas.edu
-.\" Department of Chemical Engineering
-.\" The University of Texas at Austin
-.\" Austin, Texas 78712
-.\"
-.TH apropos 1 "Jan 15, 1991"
-.LO 1
-.SH NAME
-apropos \- search the whatis database for strings
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI apropos
-keyword ...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-apropos searches a set of database files containing short descriptions
-of system commands for keywords and displays the result on the
-standard output.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-whatis(1), man(1).
diff --git a/raw/man1/ar.1 b/raw/man1/ar.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f067188..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ar.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,377 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "AR 1"
-.TH AR 1 "2003-09-30" "binutils-2.14.90.0.6" "GNU Development Tools"
-.SH "NAME"
-ar \- create, modify, and extract from archives
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-ar [\fB\-X32_64\fR] [\fB\-\fR]\fIp\fR[\fImod\fR [\fIrelpos\fR] [\fIcount\fR]] \fIarchive\fR [\fImember\fR...]
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-The \s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR program creates, modifies, and extracts from
-archives. An \fIarchive\fR is a single file holding a collection of
-other files in a structure that makes it possible to retrieve
-the original individual files (called \fImembers\fR of the archive).
-.PP
-The original files' contents, mode (permissions), timestamp, owner, and
-group are preserved in the archive, and can be restored on
-extraction.
-.PP
-\&\s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR can maintain archives whose members have names of any
-length; however, depending on how \fBar\fR is configured on your
-system, a limit on member-name length may be imposed for compatibility
-with archive formats maintained with other tools. If it exists, the
-limit is often 15 characters (typical of formats related to a.out) or 16
-characters (typical of formats related to coff).
-.PP
-\&\fBar\fR is considered a binary utility because archives of this sort
-are most often used as \fIlibraries\fR holding commonly needed
-subroutines.
-.PP
-\&\fBar\fR creates an index to the symbols defined in relocatable
-object modules in the archive when you specify the modifier \fBs\fR.
-Once created, this index is updated in the archive whenever \fBar\fR
-makes a change to its contents (save for the \fBq\fR update operation).
-An archive with such an index speeds up linking to the library, and
-allows routines in the library to call each other without regard to
-their placement in the archive.
-.PP
-You may use \fBnm \-s\fR or \fBnm \-\-print\-armap\fR to list this index
-table. If an archive lacks the table, another form of \fBar\fR called
-\&\fBranlib\fR can be used to add just the table.
-.PP
-\&\s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR is designed to be compatible with two different
-facilities. You can control its activity using command-line options,
-like the different varieties of \fBar\fR on Unix systems; or, if you
-specify the single command-line option \fB\-M\fR, you can control it
-with a script supplied via standard input, like the \s-1MRI\s0 ``librarian''
-program.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.IX Header "OPTIONS"
-\&\s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR allows you to mix the operation code \fIp\fR and modifier
-flags \fImod\fR in any order, within the first command-line argument.
-.PP
-If you wish, you may begin the first command-line argument with a
-dash.
-.PP
-The \fIp\fR keyletter specifies what operation to execute; it may be
-any of the following, but you must specify only one of them:
-.IP "\fBd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "d"
-\&\fIDelete\fR modules from the archive. Specify the names of modules to
-be deleted as \fImember\fR...; the archive is untouched if you
-specify no files to delete.
-.Sp
-If you specify the \fBv\fR modifier, \fBar\fR lists each module
-as it is deleted.
-.IP "\fBm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "m"
-Use this operation to \fImove\fR members in an archive.
-.Sp
-The ordering of members in an archive can make a difference in how
-programs are linked using the library, if a symbol is defined in more
-than one member.
-.Sp
-If no modifiers are used with \f(CW\*(C`m\*(C'\fR, any members you name in the
-\&\fImember\fR arguments are moved to the \fIend\fR of the archive;
-you can use the \fBa\fR, \fBb\fR, or \fBi\fR modifiers to move them to a
-specified place instead.
-.IP "\fBp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "p"
-\&\fIPrint\fR the specified members of the archive, to the standard
-output file. If the \fBv\fR modifier is specified, show the member
-name before copying its contents to standard output.
-.Sp
-If you specify no \fImember\fR arguments, all the files in the archive are
-printed.
-.IP "\fBq\fR" 4
-.IX Item "q"
-\&\fIQuick append\fR; Historically, add the files \fImember\fR... to the end of
-\&\fIarchive\fR, without checking for replacement.
-.Sp
-The modifiers \fBa\fR, \fBb\fR, and \fBi\fR do \fInot\fR affect this
-operation; new members are always placed at the end of the archive.
-.Sp
-The modifier \fBv\fR makes \fBar\fR list each file as it is appended.
-.Sp
-Since the point of this operation is speed, the archive's symbol table
-index is not updated, even if it already existed; you can use \fBar s\fR or
-\&\fBranlib\fR explicitly to update the symbol table index.
-.Sp
-However, too many different systems assume quick append rebuilds the
-index, so \s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR implements \fBq\fR as a synonym for \fBr\fR.
-.IP "\fBr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "r"
-Insert the files \fImember\fR... into \fIarchive\fR (with
-\&\fIreplacement\fR). This operation differs from \fBq\fR in that any
-previously existing members are deleted if their names match those being
-added.
-.Sp
-If one of the files named in \fImember\fR... does not exist, \fBar\fR
-displays an error message, and leaves undisturbed any existing members
-of the archive matching that name.
-.Sp
-By default, new members are added at the end of the file; but you may
-use one of the modifiers \fBa\fR, \fBb\fR, or \fBi\fR to request
-placement relative to some existing member.
-.Sp
-The modifier \fBv\fR used with this operation elicits a line of
-output for each file inserted, along with one of the letters \fBa\fR or
-\&\fBr\fR to indicate whether the file was appended (no old member
-deleted) or replaced.
-.IP "\fBt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "t"
-Display a \fItable\fR listing the contents of \fIarchive\fR, or those
-of the files listed in \fImember\fR... that are present in the
-archive. Normally only the member name is shown; if you also want to
-see the modes (permissions), timestamp, owner, group, and size, you can
-request that by also specifying the \fBv\fR modifier.
-.Sp
-If you do not specify a \fImember\fR, all files in the archive
-are listed.
-.Sp
-If there is more than one file with the same name (say, \fBfie\fR) in
-an archive (say \fBb.a\fR), \fBar t b.a fie\fR lists only the
-first instance; to see them all, you must ask for a complete
-listing\-\-\-in our example, \fBar t b.a\fR.
-.IP "\fBx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "x"
-\&\fIExtract\fR members (named \fImember\fR) from the archive. You can
-use the \fBv\fR modifier with this operation, to request that
-\&\fBar\fR list each name as it extracts it.
-.Sp
-If you do not specify a \fImember\fR, all files in the archive
-are extracted.
-.PP
-A number of modifiers (\fImod\fR) may immediately follow the \fIp\fR
-keyletter, to specify variations on an operation's behavior:
-.IP "\fBa\fR" 4
-.IX Item "a"
-Add new files \fIafter\fR an existing member of the
-archive. If you use the modifier \fBa\fR, the name of an existing archive
-member must be present as the \fIrelpos\fR argument, before the
-\&\fIarchive\fR specification.
-.IP "\fBb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "b"
-Add new files \fIbefore\fR an existing member of the
-archive. If you use the modifier \fBb\fR, the name of an existing archive
-member must be present as the \fIrelpos\fR argument, before the
-\&\fIarchive\fR specification. (same as \fBi\fR).
-.IP "\fBc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c"
-\&\fICreate\fR the archive. The specified \fIarchive\fR is always
-created if it did not exist, when you request an update. But a warning is
-issued unless you specify in advance that you expect to create it, by
-using this modifier.
-.IP "\fBf\fR" 4
-.IX Item "f"
-Truncate names in the archive. \s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR will normally permit file
-names of any length. This will cause it to create archives which are
-not compatible with the native \fBar\fR program on some systems. If
-this is a concern, the \fBf\fR modifier may be used to truncate file
-names when putting them in the archive.
-.IP "\fBi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "i"
-Insert new files \fIbefore\fR an existing member of the
-archive. If you use the modifier \fBi\fR, the name of an existing archive
-member must be present as the \fIrelpos\fR argument, before the
-\&\fIarchive\fR specification. (same as \fBb\fR).
-.IP "\fBl\fR" 4
-.IX Item "l"
-This modifier is accepted but not used.
-.IP "\fBN\fR" 4
-.IX Item "N"
-Uses the \fIcount\fR parameter. This is used if there are multiple
-entries in the archive with the same name. Extract or delete instance
-\&\fIcount\fR of the given name from the archive.
-.IP "\fBo\fR" 4
-.IX Item "o"
-Preserve the \fIoriginal\fR dates of members when extracting them. If
-you do not specify this modifier, files extracted from the archive
-are stamped with the time of extraction.
-.IP "\fBP\fR" 4
-.IX Item "P"
-Use the full path name when matching names in the archive. \s-1GNU\s0
-\&\fBar\fR can not create an archive with a full path name (such archives
-are not \s-1POSIX\s0 complaint), but other archive creators can. This option
-will cause \s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR to match file names using a complete path
-name, which can be convenient when extracting a single file from an
-archive created by another tool.
-.IP "\fBs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "s"
-Write an object-file index into the archive, or update an existing one,
-even if no other change is made to the archive. You may use this modifier
-flag either with any operation, or alone. Running \fBar s\fR on an
-archive is equivalent to running \fBranlib\fR on it.
-.IP "\fBS\fR" 4
-.IX Item "S"
-Do not generate an archive symbol table. This can speed up building a
-large library in several steps. The resulting archive can not be used
-with the linker. In order to build a symbol table, you must omit the
-\&\fBS\fR modifier on the last execution of \fBar\fR, or you must run
-\&\fBranlib\fR on the archive.
-.IP "\fBu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "u"
-Normally, \fBar r\fR... inserts all files
-listed into the archive. If you would like to insert \fIonly\fR those
-of the files you list that are newer than existing members of the same
-names, use this modifier. The \fBu\fR modifier is allowed only for the
-operation \fBr\fR (replace). In particular, the combination \fBqu\fR is
-not allowed, since checking the timestamps would lose any speed
-advantage from the operation \fBq\fR.
-.IP "\fBv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "v"
-This modifier requests the \fIverbose\fR version of an operation. Many
-operations display additional information, such as filenames processed,
-when the modifier \fBv\fR is appended.
-.IP "\fBV\fR" 4
-.IX Item "V"
-This modifier shows the version number of \fBar\fR.
-.PP
-\&\fBar\fR ignores an initial option spelt \fB\-X32_64\fR, for
-compatibility with \s-1AIX\s0. The behaviour produced by this option is the
-default for \s-1GNU\s0 \fBar\fR. \fBar\fR does not support any of the other
-\&\fB\-X\fR options; in particular, it does not support \fB\-X32\fR
-which is the default for \s-1AIX\s0 \fBar\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-\&\fInm\fR\|(1), \fIranlib\fR\|(1), and the Info entries for \fIbinutils\fR.
-.SH "COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
-2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
-or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
-with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
-Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
-section entitled ``\s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License''.
diff --git a/raw/man1/arch.1 b/raw/man1/arch.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3eaf4f3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/arch.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-.\" arch.1 --
-.\" Copyright 1993 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Public domain: may be freely distributed.
-.TH ARCH 1 "4 July 1997" "Linux 2.0" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-arch \- print machine architecture
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B arch
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B arch
-is equivalent to
-.BR "uname -m" .
-
-On current Linux systems,
-.B arch
-prints things such as "i386", "i486", "i586", "alpha", "sparc",
-"arm", "m68k", "mips", "ppc".
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR uname (1),
-.BR uname (2)
-.\"
-.\" Details:
-.\" arch prints the machine part of the system_utsname struct
-.\" This struct is defined in version.c, and this field is
-.\" initialized with UTS_MACHINE, which is defined as $ARCH
-.\" in the main Makefile.
-.\" That gives the possibilities
-.\" alpha arm i386 m68k mips ppc sparc sparc64
-.\"
-.\" If Makefile is not edited, ARCH is guessed by
-.\" ARCH := $(shell uname -m | sed -e s/i.86/i386/ -e s/sun4u/sparc64/)
-.\" Then how come we get these i586 values?
-.\" Well, the routine check_bugs() does system_utsname.machine[1] = '0' + x86;
-.\" (called in init/main.c, defined in ./include/asm-i386/bugs.h)
diff --git a/raw/man1/at.1 b/raw/man1/at.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e37dc9..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/at.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,285 +0,0 @@
-.TH AT 1 "Nov 1996" local "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-at, batch, atq, atrm \- queue, examine or delete jobs for later execution
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B at
-.RB [ -V ]
-.RB [ -q
-.IR queue ]
-.RB [ -f
-.IR file ]
-.RB [ -mldbv ]
-.B TIME
-.br
-.B "at -c"
-.I job
-.RI [ job... ]
-.br
-.B atq
-.RB [ -V ]
-.RB [ -q
-.IR queue ]
-.br
-.B atrm
-.RB [ -V ]
-.I job
-.RI [ job... ]
-.br
-.B batch
-.RB [ -V ]
-.RB [ -q
-.IR queue ]
-.RB [ -f
-.IR file ]
-.RB [ -mv ]
-.RB [ TIME ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B at
-and
-.B batch
-read commands from standard input or a specified file which are to
-be executed at a later time, using the shell set by the user's environment
-variable
-.BR SHELL
-or
-.BR /bin/sh .
-.TP 8
-.BR at
-executes commands at a specified time.
-.TP 8
-.BR atq
-lists the user's pending jobs, unless the user is the superuser; in that
-case, everybody's jobs are listed. The format of the output lines (one
-for each job) is: Job number, date, hour, job class.
-.TP 8
-.BR atrm
-deletes jobs, identified by their job number.
-.TP 8
-.BR batch
-executes commands when system load levels permit; in other words, when the load average
-drops below 0.8, or the value specified in the invocation of
-.BR atrun .
-.PP
-.B At
-allows fairly complex time
-specifications, extending the POSIX.2 standard. It accepts times
-of the form
-.B HH:MM
-to run a job at a specific time of day.
-(If that time is already past, the next day is assumed.)
-You may also specify
-.B midnight,
-.B noon,
-or
-.B teatime
-(4pm)
-and you can have a time-of-day suffixed with
-.B AM
-or
-.B PM
-for running in the morning or the evening.
-You can also say what day the job will be run,
-by giving a date in the form
-.B month-name
-.B day
-with an optional
-.B year,
-or giving a date of the form
-.B MMDDYY
-or
-.B MM/DD/YY
-or
-.B DD.MM.YY.
-The specification of a date
-.I must
-follow the specification of the time of day.
-You can also give times like
-.B now
-.B \+
-.I count
-.I time-units,
-where the time-units can be
-.B minutes,
-.B hours,
-.B days,
-or
-.B weeks
-and you can tell
-.B at
-to run the job today by suffixing the time with
-.B today
-and to run the job tomorrow by suffixing the time with
-.B tomorrow.
-.PP
-For example, to run a job at 4pm three days from now, you would do
-.B at 4pm + 3 days,
-to run a job at 10:00am on July 31, you would do
-.B at 10am Jul 31
-and to run a job at 1am tomorrow, you would do
-.B at 1am tomorrow.
-.PP
-The exact definition of the time specification can be found in
-.IR /usr/share/doc/at-3.1.8/timespec .
-.PP
-For both
-.BR at " and " batch ,
-commands are read from standard input or the file specified
-with the
-.B -f
-option and executed.
-The working directory, the environment (except for the variables
-.BR TERM ,
-.BR DISPLAY
-and
-.BR _ )
-and the umask are retained from the time of invocation.
-An
-.BR "at " \-
-or
-.BR "batch "\-
-command invoked from a
-.B su(1)
-shell will retain the current userid.
-The user will be mailed standard error and standard output from his
-commands, if any.
-Mail will be sent using the command
-.BR /usr/sbin/sendmail .
-If
-.B at
-is executed from a
-.B su(1)
-shell, the owner of the login shell will receive the mail.
-.PP
-The superuser may use these commands in any case.
-For other users, permission to use at is determined by the files
-.I /etc/at.allow
-and
-.IR /etc/at.deny .
-.PP
-If the file
-.I /etc/at.allow
-exists, only usernames mentioned in it are allowed to use
-.BR at .
-.PP
-If
-.I /etc/at.allow
-does not exist,
-.I /etc/at.deny
-is checked, every username not mentioned in it is then allowed
-to use
-.BR at .
-.PP
-If neither exists, only the superuser is allowed use of at.
-.PP
-An empty
-.I /etc/at.deny
-means that every user is allowed use these commands, this is the
-default configuration.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP 8
-.B -V
-prints the version number to standard error.
-.TP 8
-.BI \-q " queue"
-uses the specified queue.
-A queue designation consists of a single letter; valid queue designations
-range from
-.B a
-to
-.BR z .
-and
-.B A
-to
-.BR Z .
-The
-.B a
-queue is the default for
-.B at
-and the
-.B b
-queue for
-.BR batch .
-Queues with higher letters run with increased niceness. The special
-queue "=" is reserved for jobs which are currently running.
-.P
-If a job is submitted to a queue designated with an uppercase letter, it
-is treated as if it had been submitted to batch at that time.
-If
-.BR atq
-is given a specific queue, it will only show jobs pending in that queue.
-.TP 8
-.B \-m
-Send mail to the user when the job has completed even if there was no
-output.
-.TP 8
-.BI \-f " file"
-Reads the job from
-.BI file
-rather than standard input.
-.TP 8
-.B \-l
-Is an alias for
-.B atq.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Is an alias for
-.B atrm.
-.TP
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Shows the time the job will be executed.
-.P
-Times displayed will be in the format "1997-02-20 14:50" unless the
-environment variable
-.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
-is set; then, it will be "Thu Feb 20 14:50:00 1996".
-.TP
-.B
-\-c
-cats the jobs listed on the command line to standard output.
-.SH FILES
-.I /var/spool/at
-.br
-.I /var/spool/at/spool
-.br
-.I /proc/loadavg
-.br
-.I /var/run/utmp
-.br
-.I /etc/at.allow
-.br
-.I /etc/at.deny
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR cron (1),
-.BR nice (1),
-.BR sh (1),
-.BR umask (2),
-.BR atd (8).
-.SH BUGS
-The correct operation of
-.B batch
-for Linux depends on the presence of a
-.IR proc -
-type directory mounted on
-.IR /proc .
-.PP
-If the file
-.I /var/run/utmp
-is not available or corrupted, or if the user is not logged on at the
-time
-.B at
-is invoked, the mail is sent to the userid found
-in the environment variable
-.BR LOGNAME .
-If that is undefined or empty, the current userid is assumed.
-.PP
-.B At
-and
-.B batch
-as presently implemented are not suitable when users are competing for
-resources.
-If this is the case for your site, you might want to consider another
-batch system, such as
-.BR nqs .
-.SH AUTHOR
-At was mostly written by Thomas Koenig, ig25 at rz.uni-karlsruhe.de.
diff --git a/raw/man1/basename.1 b/raw/man1/basename.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c33cb0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/basename.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH BASENAME "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-basename \- strip directory and suffix from filenames
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B basename
-\fINAME \fR[\fISUFFIX\fR]
-.br
-.B basename
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print NAME with any leading directory components removed.
-If specified, also remove a trailing SUFFIX.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by FIXME unknown.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B basename
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B basename
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info basename
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/bash.1 b/raw/man1/bash.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e07a9f6..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/bash.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8368 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" MAN PAGE COMMENTS to
-.\"
-.\" Chet Ramey
-.\" Information Network Services
-.\" Case Western Reserve University
-.\" chet at ins.CWRU.Edu
-.\"
-.\" Last Change: Mon Jul 15 15:20:56 EDT 2002
-.\"
-.\" bash_builtins, strip all but Built-Ins section
-.if \n(zZ=1 .ig zZ
-.if \n(zY=1 .ig zY
-.TH BASH 1 "2002 July 15" "GNU Bash-2.05b"
-.\"
-.\" There's some problem with having a `@'
-.\" in a tagged paragraph with the BSD man macros.
-.\" It has to do with `@' appearing in the }1 macro.
-.\" This is a problem on 4.3 BSD and Ultrix, but Sun
-.\" appears to have fixed it.
-.\" If you're seeing the characters
-.\" `@u-3p' appearing before the lines reading
-.\" `possible-hostname-completions
-.\" and `complete-hostname' down in READLINE,
-.\" then uncomment this redefinition.
-.\"
-.de }1
-.ds ]X \&\\*(]B\\
-.nr )E 0
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )I \\$1n
-.}f
-.ll \\n(LLu
-.in \\n()Ru+\\n(INu+\\n()Iu
-.ti \\n(INu
-.ie !\\n()Iu+\\n()Ru-\w\\*(]Xu-3p \{\\*(]X
-.br\}
-.el \\*(]X\h|\\n()Iu+\\n()Ru\c
-.}f
-..
-.\"
-.\" File Name macro. This used to be `.PN', for Path Name,
-.\" but Sun doesn't seem to like that very much.
-.\"
-.de FN
-\fI\|\\$1\|\fP
-..
-.SH NAME
-bash \- GNU Bourne-Again SHell
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B bash
-[options]
-[file]
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-.if n Bash is Copyright (C) 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.if t Bash is Copyright \(co 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Bash
-is an \fBsh\fR-compatible command language interpreter that
-executes commands read from the standard input or from a file.
-.B Bash
-also incorporates useful features from the \fIKorn\fP and \fIC\fP
-shells (\fBksh\fP and \fBcsh\fP).
-.PP
-.B Bash
-is intended to be a conformant implementation of the IEEE
-POSIX Shell and Tools specification (IEEE Working Group 1003\.2).
-.SH OPTIONS
-In addition to the single-character shell options documented in the
-description of the \fBset\fR builtin command, \fBbash\fR
-interprets the following options when it is invoked:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP 10
-.BI \-c "\| string\^"
-If the
-.B \-c
-option is present, then commands are read from
-.IR string .
-If there are arguments after the
-.IR string ,
-they are assigned to the positional parameters, starting with
-.BR $0 .
-.TP
-.B \-i
-If the
-.B \-i
-option is present, the shell is
-.IR interactive .
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Make
-.B bash
-act as if it had been invoked as a login shell (see
-.SM
-.B INVOCATION
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-r
-If the
-.B \-r
-option is present, the shell becomes
-.I restricted
-(see
-.SM
-.B "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-s
-If the
-.B \-s
-option is present, or if no arguments remain after option
-processing, then commands are read from the standard input.
-This option allows the positional parameters to be set
-when invoking an interactive shell.
-.TP
-.B \-D
-A list of all double-quoted strings preceded by \fB$\fP
-is printed on the standard ouput.
-These are the strings that
-are subject to language translation when the current locale
-is not \fBC\fP or \fBPOSIX\fP.
-This implies the \fB\-n\fP option; no commands will be executed.
-.TP
-.B [\-+]O [\fIshopt_option\fP]
-\fIshopt_option\fP is one of the shell options accepted by the
-\fBshopt\fP builtin (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-If \fIshopt_option\fP is present, \fB\-O\fP sets the value of that option;
-\fB+O\fP unsets it.
-If \fIshopt_option\fP is not supplied, the names and values of the shell
-options accepted by \fBshopt\fP are printed on the standard output.
-If the invocation option is \fB+O\fP, the output is displayed in a format
-that may be reused as input.
-.TP
-.B \-\-
-A
-.B \-\-
-signals the end of options and disables further option processing.
-Any arguments after the
-.B \-\-
-are treated as filenames and arguments. An argument of
-.B \-
-is equivalent to \fB\-\-\fP.
-.PD
-.PP
-.B Bash
-also interprets a number of multi-character options.
-These options must appear on the command line before the
-single-character options to be recognized.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-\-dump\-po\-strings
-Equivalent to \fB\-D\fP, but the output is in the GNU \fIgettext\fP
-\fBpo\fP (portable object) file format.
-.TP
-.B \-\-dump\-strings
-Equivalent to \fB\-D\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-\-help
-Display a usage message on standard output and exit successfully.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-init\-file\fP \fIfile\fP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB\-\-rcfile\fP \fIfile\fP
-.PD
-Execute commands from
-.I file
-instead of the standard personal initialization file
-.I ~/.bashrc
-if the shell is interactive (see
-.SM
-.B INVOCATION
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-\-login
-Equivalent to \fB\-l\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-\-noediting
-Do not use the GNU
-.B readline
-library to read command lines when the shell is interactive.
-.TP
-.B \-\-noprofile
-Do not read either the system-wide startup file
-.FN /etc/profile
-or any of the personal initialization files
-.IR ~/.bash_profile ,
-.IR ~/.bash_login ,
-or
-.IR ~/.profile .
-By default,
-.B bash
-reads these files when it is invoked as a login shell (see
-.SM
-.B INVOCATION
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-\-norc
-Do not read and execute the personal initialization file
-.I ~/.bashrc
-if the shell is interactive.
-This option is on by default if the shell is invoked as
-.BR sh .
-.TP
-.B \-\-posix
-Change the behavior of \fBbash\fP where the default operation differs
-from the POSIX 1003.2 standard to match the standard (\fIposix mode\fP).
-.TP
-.B \-\-restricted
-The shell becomes restricted (see
-.SM
-.B "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-\-rpm-requires
-Produce the list of files that are required for the
-shell script to run. This implies '-n' and is subject
-to the same limitations as compile time error checking checking;
-Backticks, [] tests, and evals are not parsed so some
-dependencies may be missed.
-.B \-\-verbose
-Equivalent to \fB\-v\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-\-version
-Show version information for this instance of
-.B bash
-on the standard output and exit successfully.
-.PD
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-If arguments remain after option processing, and neither the
-.B \-c
-nor the
-.B \-s
-option has been supplied, the first argument is assumed to
-be the name of a file containing shell commands.
-If
-.B bash
-is invoked in this fashion,
-.B $0
-is set to the name of the file, and the positional parameters
-are set to the remaining arguments.
-.B Bash
-reads and executes commands from this file, then exits.
-\fBBash\fP's exit status is the exit status of the last command
-executed in the script.
-If no commands are executed, the exit status is 0.
-An attempt is first made to open the file in the current directory, and,
-if no file is found, then the shell searches the directories in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-for the script.
-.SH INVOCATION
-A \fIlogin shell\fP is one whose first character of argument zero is a
-.BR \- ,
-or one started with the
-.B \-\-login
-option.
-.PP
-An \fIinteractive\fP shell is one started without non-option arguments
-and without the
-.B \-c
-option
-whose standard input and output are
-both connected to terminals (as determined by
-.IR isatty (3)),
-or one started with the
-.B \-i
-option.
-.SM
-.B PS1
-is set and
-.B $\-
-includes
-.B i
-if
-.B bash
-is interactive,
-allowing a shell script or a startup file to test this state.
-.PP
-The following paragraphs describe how
-.B bash
-executes its startup files.
-If any of the files exist but cannot be read,
-.B bash
-reports an error.
-Tildes are expanded in file names as described below under
-.B "Tilde Expansion"
-in the
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-section.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-is invoked as an interactive login shell, or as a non-interactive shell
-with the \fB\-\-login\fP option, it first reads and
-executes commands from the file \fI/etc/profile\fP, if that
-file exists.
-After reading that file, it looks for \fI~/.bash_profile\fP,
-\fI~/.bash_login\fP, and \fI~/.profile\fP, in that order, and reads
-and executes commands from the first one that exists and is readable.
-The
-.B \-\-noprofile
-option may be used when the shell is started to inhibit this behavior.
-.PP
-When a login shell exits,
-.B bash
-reads and executes commands from the file \fI~/.bash_logout\fP, if it
-exists.
-.PP
-When an interactive shell that is not a login shell is started,
-.B bash
-reads and executes commands from \fI~/.bashrc\fP, if that file exists.
-This may be inhibited by using the
-.B \-\-norc
-option.
-The \fB\-\-rcfile\fP \fIfile\fP option will force
-.B bash
-to read and execute commands from \fIfile\fP instead of \fI~/.bashrc\fP.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-is started non-interactively, to run a shell script, for example, it
-looks for the variable
-.SM
-.B BASH_ENV
-in the environment, expands its value if it appears there, and uses the
-expanded value as the name of a file to read and execute.
-.B Bash
-behaves as if the following command were executed:
-.sp .5
-.RS
-.if t \f(CWif [ \-n "$BASH_ENV" ]; then . "$BASH_ENV"; fi\fP
-.if n if [ \-n "$BASH_ENV" ]; then . "$BASH_ENV"; fi
-.RE
-.sp .5
-but the value of the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-variable is not used to search for the file name.
-.PP
-If
-.B bash
-is invoked with the name
-.BR sh ,
-it tries to mimic the startup behavior of historical versions of
-.B sh
-as closely as possible,
-while conforming to the POSIX standard as well.
-When invoked as an interactive login shell, or a non-interactive
-shell with the \fB\-\-login\fP option, it first attempts to
-read and execute commands from
-.I /etc/profile
-and
-.IR ~/.profile ,
-in that order.
-The
-.B \-\-noprofile
-option may be used to inhibit this behavior.
-When invoked as an interactive shell with the name
-.BR sh ,
-.B bash
-looks for the variable
-.SM
-.BR ENV ,
-expands its value if it is defined, and uses the
-expanded value as the name of a file to read and execute.
-Since a shell invoked as
-.B sh
-does not attempt to read and execute commands from any other startup
-files, the
-.B \-\-rcfile
-option has no effect.
-A non-interactive shell invoked with the name
-.B sh
-does not attempt to read any other startup files.
-When invoked as
-.BR sh ,
-.B bash
-enters
-.I posix
-mode after the startup files are read.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-is started in
-.I posix
-mode, as with the
-.B \-\-posix
-command line option, it follows the POSIX standard for startup files.
-In this mode, interactive shells expand the
-.SM
-.B ENV
-variable and commands are read and executed from the file
-whose name is the expanded value.
-No other startup files are read.
-.PP
-.B Bash
-attempts to determine when it is being run by the remote shell
-daemon, usually \fIrshd\fP.
-If
-.B bash
-determines it is being run by \fIrshd\fP, it reads and executes
-commands from \fI~/.bashrc\fP, if that file exists and is readable.
-It will not do this if invoked as \fBsh\fP.
-The
-.B \-\-norc
-option may be used to inhibit this behavior, and the
-.B \-\-rcfile
-option may be used to force another file to be read, but
-\fIrshd\fP does not generally invoke the shell with those options
-or allow them to be specified.
-.PP
-If the shell is started with the effective user (group) id not equal to the
-real user (group) id, and the \fB\-p\fP option is not supplied, no startup
-files are read, shell functions are not inherited from the environment, the
-.SM
-.B SHELLOPTS
-variable, if it appears in the environment, is ignored,
-and the effective user id is set to the real user id.
-If the \fB\-p\fP option is supplied at invocation, the startup behavior is
-the same, but the effective user id is not reset.
-.SH DEFINITIONS
-.PP
-The following definitions are used throughout the rest of this
-document.
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B blank
-A space or tab.
-.TP
-.B word
-A sequence of characters considered as a single unit by the shell.
-Also known as a
-.BR token .
-.TP
-.B name
-A
-.I word
-consisting only of alphanumeric characters and underscores, and
-beginning with an alphabetic character or an underscore. Also
-referred to as an
-.BR identifier .
-.TP
-.B metacharacter
-A character that, when unquoted, separates words. One of the following:
-.br
-.RS
-.PP
-.if t \fB| & ; ( ) < > space tab\fP
-.if n \fB| & ; ( ) < > space tab\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.TP
-.B control operator
-A \fItoken\fP that performs a control function. It is one of the following
-symbols:
-.RS
-.PP
-.if t \fB\(bv\(bv & && ; ;; ( ) | <newline>\fP
-.if n \fB|| & && ; ;; ( ) | <newline>\fP
-.RE
-.PD
-.SH "RESERVED WORDS"
-\fIReserved words\fP are words that have a special meaning to the shell.
-The following words are recognized as reserved when unquoted and either
-the first word of a simple command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-below) or the third word of a
-.B case
-or
-.B for
-command:
-.if t .RS
-.PP
-.B
-.if n ! case do done elif else esac fi for function if in select then until while { } time [[ ]]
-.if t ! case do done elif else esac fi for function if in select then until while { } time [[ ]]
-.if t .RE
-.RE
-.SH "SHELL GRAMMAR"
-.SS Simple Commands
-.PP
-A \fIsimple command\fP is a sequence of optional variable assignments
-followed by \fBblank\fP-separated words and redirections, and
-terminated by a \fIcontrol operator\fP. The first word
-specifies the command to be executed, and is passed as argument zero.
-The remaining words are passed as arguments to the invoked command.
-.PP
-The return value of a \fIsimple command\fP is its exit status, or
-128+\fIn\^\fP if the command is terminated by signal
-.IR n .
-.SS Pipelines
-.PP
-A \fIpipeline\fP is a sequence of one or more commands separated by
-the character
-.BR | .
-The format for a pipeline is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fBtime\fP [\fB\-p\fP]] [ ! ] \fIcommand\fP [ \fB|\fP \fIcommand2\fP ... ]
-.RE
-.PP
-The standard output of
-.I command
-is connected via a pipe to the standard input of
-.IR command2 .
-This connection is performed before any redirections specified by the
-command (see
-.SM
-.B REDIRECTION
-below).
-.PP
-If the reserved word
-.B !
-precedes a pipeline, the exit status of that
-pipeline is the logical NOT of the exit status of the last command.
-Otherwise, the status of the pipeline is the exit status of the last
-command.
-The shell waits for all commands in the pipeline to
-terminate before returning a value.
-.PP
-If the
-.B time
-reserved word precedes a pipeline, the elapsed as well as user and
-system time consumed by its execution are reported when the pipeline
-terminates.
-The \fB\-p\fP option changes the output format to that specified by POSIX.
-The
-.SM
-.B TIMEFORMAT
-variable may be set to a format string that specifies how the timing
-information should be displayed; see the description of
-.SM
-.B TIMEFORMAT
-under
-.B "Shell Variables"
-below.
-.PP
-Each command in a pipeline is executed as a separate process (i.e., in a
-subshell).
-.SS Lists
-.PP
-A \fIlist\fP is a sequence of one or more pipelines separated by one
-of the operators
-.BR ; ,
-.BR & ,
-.BR && ,
-or
-.BR \(bv\(bv ,
-and optionally terminated by one of
-.BR ; ,
-.BR & ,
-or
-.BR <newline> .
-.PP
-Of these list operators,
-.B &&
-and
-.B \(bv\(bv
-have equal precedence, followed by
-.B ;
-and
-.BR &,
-which have equal precedence.
-.PP
-A sequence of one or more newlines may appear in a \fIlist\fP instead
-of a semicolon to delimit commands.
-.PP
-If a command is terminated by the control operator
-.BR & ,
-the shell executes the command in the \fIbackground\fP
-in a subshell. The shell does not wait for the command to
-finish, and the return status is 0. Commands separated by a
-.B ;
-are executed sequentially; the shell waits for each
-command to terminate in turn. The return status is the
-exit status of the last command executed.
-.PP
-The control operators
-.B &&
-and
-.B \(bv\(bv
-denote AND lists and OR lists, respectively.
-An AND list has the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIcommand1\fP \fB&&\fP \fIcommand2\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.I command2
-is executed if, and only if,
-.I command1
-returns an exit status of zero.
-.PP
-An OR list has the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIcommand1\fP \fB\(bv\(bv\fP \fIcommand2\fP
-.PP
-.RE
-.PP
-.I command2
-is executed if and only if
-.I command1
-returns a non-zero exit status. The return status of
-AND and OR lists is the exit status of the last command
-executed in the list.
-.SS Compound Commands
-.PP
-A \fIcompound command\fP is one of the following:
-.TP
-(\fIlist\fP)
-\fIlist\fP is executed in a subshell. Variable assignments and builtin
-commands that affect the shell's environment do not remain in effect
-after the command completes. The return status is the exit status of
-\fIlist\fP.
-.TP
-{ \fIlist\fP; }
-\fIlist\fP is simply executed in the current shell environment.
-\fIlist\fP must be terminated with a newline or semicolon.
-This is known as a \fIgroup command\fP.
-The return status is the exit status of
-\fIlist\fP.
-Note that unlike the metacharacters \fB(\fP and \fB\)\fP, \fB{\fP and
-\fB}\fP are \fIreserved words\fP and must occur where a reserved
-word is permitted to be recognized. Since they do not cause a word
-break, they must be separated from \fIlist\fP by whitespace.
-.TP
-((\fIexpression\fP))
-The \fIexpression\fP is evaluated according to the rules described
-below under
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" .
-If the value of the expression is non-zero, the return status is 0;
-otherwise the return status is 1. This is exactly equivalent to
-\fBlet "\fIexpression\fP"\fR.
-.TP
-\fB[[\fP \fIexpression\fP \fB]]\fP
-Return a status of 0 or 1 depending on the evaluation of
-the conditional expression \fIexpression\fP.
-Expressions are composed of the primaries described below under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" .
-Word splitting and pathname expansion are not performed on the words
-between the \fB[[\fP and \fB]]\fP; tilde expansion, parameter and
-variable expansion, arithmetic expansion, command substitution, process
-substitution, and quote removal are performed.
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-When the \fB==\fP and \fB!=\fP operators are used, the string to the
-right of the operator is considered a pattern and matched according
-to the rules described below under \fBPattern Matching\fP.
-The return value is 0 if the string matches or does not match
-the pattern, respectively, and 1 otherwise.
-Any part of the pattern may be quoted to force it to be matched as a
-string.
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Expressions may be combined using the following operators, listed
-in decreasing order of precedence:
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B ( \fIexpression\fP )
-Returns the value of \fIexpression\fP.
-This may be used to override the normal precedence of operators.
-.TP
-.B ! \fIexpression\fP
-True if
-.I expression
-is false.
-.TP
-\fIexpression1\fP \fB&&\fP \fIexpression2\fP
-True if both
-.I expression1
-and
-.I expression2
-are true.
-.TP
-.if t \fIexpression1\fP \fB\(bv\(bv\fP \fIexpression2\fP
-.if n \fIexpression1\fP \fB||\fP \fIexpression2\fP
-True if either
-.I expression1
-or
-.I expression2
-is true.
-.PD
-.LP
-The \fB&&\fP and
-.if t \fB\(bv\(bv\fP
-.if n \fB||\fP
-operators do not evaluate \fIexpression2\fP if the value of
-\fIexpression1\fP is sufficient to determine the return value of
-the entire conditional expression.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfor\fP \fIname\fP [ \fBin\fP \fIword\fP ] ; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP ; \fBdone\fP
-The list of words following \fBin\fP is expanded, generating a list
-of items.
-The variable \fIname\fP is set to each element of this list
-in turn, and \fIlist\fP is executed each time.
-If the \fBin\fP \fIword\fP is omitted, the \fBfor\fP command executes
-\fIlist\fP once for each positional parameter that is set (see
-.SM
-.B PARAMETERS
-below).
-The return status is the exit status of the last command that executes.
-If the expansion of the items following \fBin\fP results in an empty
-list, no commands are executed, and the return status is 0.
-.TP
-\fBfor\fP (( \fIexpr1\fP ; \fIexpr2\fP ; \fIexpr3\fP )) ; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP ; \fBdone\fP
-First, the arithmetic expression \fIexpr1\fP is evaluated according
-to the rules described below under
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" .
-The arithmetic expression \fIexpr2\fP is then evaluated repeatedly
-until it evaluates to zero.
-Each time \fIexpr2\fP evaluates to a non-zero value, \fIlist\fP is
-executed and the arithmetic expression \fIexpr3\fP is evaluated.
-If any expression is omitted, it behaves as if it evaluates to 1.
-The return value is the exit status of the last command in \fIlist\fP
-that is executed, or false if any of the expressions is invalid.
-.TP
-\fBselect\fP \fIname\fP [ \fBin\fP \fIword\fP ] ; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP ; \fBdone\fP
-The list of words following \fBin\fP is expanded, generating a list
-of items. The set of expanded words is printed on the standard
-error, each preceded by a number. If the \fBin\fP
-\fIword\fP is omitted, the positional parameters are printed (see
-.SM
-.B PARAMETERS
-below). The
-.B PS3
-prompt is then displayed and a line read from the standard input.
-If the line consists of a number corresponding to one of
-the displayed words, then the value of
-.I name
-is set to that word. If the line is empty, the words and prompt
-are displayed again. If EOF is read, the command completes. Any
-other value read causes
-.I name
-to be set to null. The line read is saved in the variable
-.BR REPLY .
-The
-.I list
-is executed after each selection until a
-.B break
-command is executed.
-The exit status of
-.B select
-is the exit status of the last command executed in
-.IR list ,
-or zero if no commands were executed.
-.TP
-\fBcase\fP \fIword\fP \fBin\fP [ [(] \fIpattern\fP [ \fB|\fP \fIpattern\fP ] \
-... ) \fIlist\fP ;; ] ... \fBesac\fP
-A \fBcase\fP command first expands \fIword\fP, and tries to match
-it against each \fIpattern\fP in turn, using the same matching rules
-as for pathname expansion (see
-.B Pathname Expansion
-below). When a match is found, the
-corresponding \fIlist\fP is executed. After the first match, no
-subsequent matches are attempted. The exit status is zero if no
-pattern matches. Otherwise, it is the exit status of the
-last command executed in \fIlist\fP.
-.TP
-\fBif\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBthen\fP \fIlist;\fP \
-[ \fBelif\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBthen\fP \fIlist\fP; ] ... \
-[ \fBelse\fP \fIlist\fP; ] \fBfi\fP
-The
-.B if
-.I list
-is executed. If its exit status is zero, the
-\fBthen\fP \fIlist\fP is executed. Otherwise, each \fBelif\fP
-\fIlist\fP is executed in turn, and if its exit status is zero,
-the corresponding \fBthen\fP \fIlist\fP is executed and the
-command completes. Otherwise, the \fBelse\fP \fIlist\fP is
-executed, if present. The exit status is the exit status of the
-last command executed, or zero if no condition tested true.
-.TP
-\fBwhile\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdone\fP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBuntil\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdone\fP
-.PD
-The \fBwhile\fP command continuously executes the \fBdo\fP
-\fIlist\fP as long as the last command in \fIlist\fP returns
-an exit status of zero. The \fBuntil\fP command is identical
-to the \fBwhile\fP command, except that the test is negated;
-the
-.B do
-.I list
-is executed as long as the last command in
-.I list
-returns a non-zero exit status.
-The exit status of the \fBwhile\fP and \fBuntil\fP commands
-is the exit status
-of the last \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP command executed, or zero if
-none was executed.
-.TP
-[ \fBfunction\fP ] \fIname\fP () { \fIlist\fP; }
-This defines a function named \fIname\fP. The \fIbody\fP of the
-function is the
-.I list
-of commands between { and }. This list
-is executed whenever \fIname\fP is specified as the
-name of a simple command. The exit status of a function is
-the exit status of the last command executed in the body. (See
-.SM
-.B FUNCTIONS
-below.)
-.SH COMMENTS
-In a non-interactive shell, or an interactive shell in which the
-.B interactive_comments
-option to the
-.B shopt
-builtin is enabled (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below), a word beginning with
-.B #
-causes that word and all remaining characters on that line to
-be ignored. An interactive shell without the
-.B interactive_comments
-option enabled does not allow comments. The
-.B interactive_comments
-option is on by default in interactive shells.
-.SH QUOTING
-\fIQuoting\fP is used to remove the special meaning of certain
-characters or words to the shell. Quoting can be used to
-disable special treatment for special characters, to prevent
-reserved words from being recognized as such, and to prevent
-parameter expansion.
-.PP
-Each of the \fImetacharacters\fP listed above under
-.SM
-.B DEFINITIONS
-has special meaning to the shell and must be quoted if it is to
-represent itself.
-.PP
-When the command history expansion facilities are being used, the
-\fIhistory expansion\fP character, usually \fB!\fP, must be quoted
-to prevent history expansion.
-.PP
-There are three quoting mechanisms: the
-.IR "escape character" ,
-single quotes, and double quotes.
-.PP
-A non-quoted backslash (\fB\e\fP) is the
-.IR "escape character" .
-It preserves the literal value of the next character that follows,
-with the exception of <newline>. If a \fB\e\fP<newline> pair
-appears, and the backslash is not itself quoted, the \fB\e\fP<newline>
-is treated as a line continuation (that is, it is removed from the
-input stream and effectively ignored).
-.PP
-Enclosing characters in single quotes preserves the literal value
-of each character within the quotes. A single quote may not occur
-between single quotes, even when preceded by a backslash.
-.PP
-Enclosing characters in double quotes preserves the literal value
-of all characters within the quotes, with the exception of
-.BR $ ,
-.BR ` ,
-and
-.BR \e .
-The characters
-.B $
-and
-.B `
-retain their special meaning within double quotes. The backslash
-retains its special meaning only when followed by one of the following
-characters:
-.BR $ ,
-.BR ` ,
-\^\fB"\fP\^,
-.BR \e ,
-or
-.BR <newline> .
-A double quote may be quoted within double quotes by preceding it with
-a backslash.
-.PP
-The special parameters
-.B *
-and
-.B @
-have special meaning when in double
-quotes (see
-.SM
-.B PARAMETERS
-below).
-.PP
-Words of the form \fB$\fP'\fIstring\fP' are treated specially. The
-word expands to \fIstring\fP, with backslash-escaped characters replaced
-as specifed by the ANSI C standard. Backslash escape sequences, if
-present, are decoded as follows:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-alert (bell)
-.TP
-.B \eb
-backspace
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an escape character
-.TP
-.B \ef
-form feed
-.TP
-.B \en
-new line
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-.B \ev
-vertical tab
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-.B \e'
-single quote
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(one to three digits)
-.TP
-.B \ex\fIHH\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP
-(one or two hex digits)
-.TP
-.B \ec\fIx\fP
-a control-\fIx\fP character
-.PD
-.RE
-.LP
-The expanded result is single-quoted, as if the dollar sign had
-not been present.
-.PP
-A double-quoted string preceded by a dollar sign (\fB$\fP) will cause
-the string to be translated according to the current locale.
-If the current locale is \fBC\fP or \fBPOSIX\fP, the dollar sign
-is ignored.
-If the string is translated and replaced, the replacement is
-double-quoted.
-.SH PARAMETERS
-A
-.I parameter
-is an entity that stores values.
-It can be a
-.IR name ,
-a number, or one of the special characters listed below under
-.BR "Special Parameters" .
-For the shell's purposes, a
-.I variable
-is a parameter denoted by a
-.IR name .
-A variable has a \fIvalue\fP and zero or more \fIattributes\fP.
-Attributes are assigned using the
-.B declare
-builtin command (see
-.B declare
-below in
-.SM
-.BR "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS" ).
-.PP
-A parameter is set if it has been assigned a value. The null string is
-a valid value. Once a variable is set, it may be unset only by using
-the
-.B unset
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.PP
-A
-.I variable
-may be assigned to by a statement of the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIname\fP=[\fIvalue\fP]
-.RE
-.PP
-If
-.I value
-is not given, the variable is assigned the null string. All
-.I values
-undergo tilde expansion, parameter and variable expansion,
-command substitution, arithmetic expansion, and quote
-removal (see
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-below). If the variable has its
-.B integer
-attribute set, then
-.I value
-is subject to arithmetic expansion even if the $((...)) expansion is
-not used (see
-.B "Arithmetic Expansion"
-below).
-Word splitting is not performed, with the exception
-of \fB"$@"\fP as explained below under
-.BR "Special Parameters" .
-Pathname expansion is not performed.
-Assignment statements may also appear as arguments to the
-.BR declare ,
-.BR typeset ,
-.BR export ,
-.BR readonly ,
-and
-.B local
-builtin commands.
-.SS Positional Parameters
-.PP
-A
-.I positional parameter
-is a parameter denoted by one or more
-digits, other than the single digit 0. Positional parameters are
-assigned from the shell's arguments when it is invoked,
-and may be reassigned using the
-.B set
-builtin command. Positional parameters may not be assigned to
-with assignment statements. The positional parameters are
-temporarily replaced when a shell function is executed (see
-.SM
-.B FUNCTIONS
-below).
-.PP
-When a positional parameter consisting of more than a single
-digit is expanded, it must be enclosed in braces (see
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-below).
-.SS Special Parameters
-.PP
-The shell treats several parameters specially. These parameters may
-only be referenced; assignment to them is not allowed.
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B *
-Expands to the positional parameters, starting from one. When the
-expansion occurs within double quotes, it expands to a single word
-with the value of each parameter separated by the first character
-of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable. That is, "\fB$*\fP" is equivalent
-to "\fB$1\fP\fIc\fP\fB$2\fP\fIc\fP\fB...\fP", where
-.I c
-is the first character of the value of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-variable. If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is unset, the parameters are separated by spaces.
-If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is null, the parameters are joined without intervening separators.
-.TP
-.B @
-Expands to the positional parameters, starting from one. When the
-expansion occurs within double quotes, each parameter expands to a
-separate word. That is, "\fB$@\fP" is equivalent to
-"\fB$1\fP" "\fB$2\fP" ...
-When there are no positional parameters, "\fB$@\fP" and
-.B $@
-expand to nothing (i.e., they are removed).
-.TP
-.B #
-Expands to the number of positional parameters in decimal.
-.TP
-.B ?
-Expands to the status of the most recently executed foreground
-pipeline.
-.TP
-.B \-
-Expands to the current option flags as specified upon invocation,
-by the
-.B set
-builtin command, or those set by the shell itself
-(such as the
-.B \-i
-option).
-.TP
-.B $
-Expands to the process ID of the shell. In a () subshell, it
-expands to the process ID of the current shell, not the
-subshell.
-.TP
-.B !
-Expands to the process ID of the most recently executed background
-(asynchronous) command.
-.TP
-.B 0
-Expands to the name of the shell or shell script. This is set at
-shell initialization. If
-.B bash
-is invoked with a file of commands,
-.B $0
-is set to the name of that file. If
-.B bash
-is started with the
-.B \-c
-option, then
-.B $0
-is set to the first argument after the string to be
-executed, if one is present. Otherwise, it is set
-to the file name used to invoke
-.BR bash ,
-as given by argument zero.
-.TP
-.B _
-At shell startup, set to the absolute file name of the shell or shell
-script being executed as passed in the argument list.
-Subsequently, expands to the last argument to the previous command,
-after expansion.
-Also set to the full file name of each command executed and placed in
-the environment exported to that command.
-When checking mail, this parameter holds the name of the mail file
-currently being checked.
-.PD
-.SS Shell Variables
-.PP
-The following variables are set by the shell:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B BASH
-Expands to the full file name used to invoke this instance of
-.BR bash .
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO
-A readonly array variable whose members hold version information for
-this instance of
-.BR bash .
-The values assigned to the array members are as follows:
-.sp .5
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 24
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR0\fP]
-The major version number (the \fIrelease\fP).
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR1\fP]
-The minor version number (the \fIversion\fP).
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR2\fP]
-The patch level.
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR3\fP]
-The build version.
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR4\fP]
-The release status (e.g., \fIbeta1\fP).
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR5\fP]
-The value of \fBMACHTYPE\fP.
-.PD
-.RE
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSION
-Expands to a string describing the version of this instance of
-.BR bash .
-.TP
-.B COMP_CWORD
-An index into \fB${COMP_WORDS}\fP of the word containing the current
-cursor position.
-This variable is available only in shell functions invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B COMP_LINE
-The current command line.
-This variable is available only in shell functions and external
-commands invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B COMP_POINT
-The index of the current cursor position relative to the beginning of
-the current command.
-If the current cursor position is at the end of the current command,
-the value of this variable is equal to \fB${#COMP_LINE}\fP.
-This variable is available only in shell functions and external
-commands invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B COMP_WORDS
-An array variable (see \fBArrays\fP below) consisting of the individual
-words in the current command line.
-This variable is available only in shell functions invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B DIRSTACK
-An array variable (see
-.B Arrays
-below) containing the current contents of the directory stack.
-Directories appear in the stack in the order they are displayed by the
-.B dirs
-builtin.
-Assigning to members of this array variable may be used to modify
-directories already in the stack, but the
-.B pushd
-and
-.B popd
-builtins must be used to add and remove directories.
-Assignment to this variable will not change the current directory.
-If
-.SM
-.B DIRSTACK
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B EUID
-Expands to the effective user ID of the current user, initialized at
-shell startup. This variable is readonly.
-.TP
-.B FUNCNAME
-The name of any currently-executing shell function.
-This variable exists only when a shell function is executing.
-Assignments to
-.SM
-.B FUNCNAME
-have no effect and return an error status.
-If
-.SM
-.B FUNCNAME
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B GROUPS
-An array variable containing the list of groups of which the current
-user is a member.
-Assignments to
-.SM
-.B GROUPS
-have no effect and return an error status.
-If
-.SM
-.B GROUPS
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B HISTCMD
-The history number, or index in the history list, of the current
-command.
-If
-.SM
-.B HISTCMD
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B HOSTNAME
-Automatically set to the name of the current host.
-.TP
-.B HOSTTYPE
-Automatically set to a string that uniquely
-describes the type of machine on which
-.B bash
-is executing.
-The default is system-dependent.
-.TP
-.B LINENO
-Each time this parameter is referenced, the shell substitutes
-a decimal number representing the current sequential line number
-(starting with 1) within a script or function. When not in a
-script or function, the value substituted is not guaranteed to
-be meaningful.
-If
-.SM
-.B LINENO
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B MACHTYPE
-Automatically set to a string that fully describes the system
-type on which
-.B bash
-is executing, in the standard GNU \fIcpu-company-system\fP format.
-The default is system-dependent.
-.TP
-.B OLDPWD
-The previous working directory as set by the
-.B cd
-command.
-.TP
-.B OPTARG
-The value of the last option argument processed by the
-.B getopts
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.TP
-.B OPTIND
-The index of the next argument to be processed by the
-.B getopts
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.TP
-.B OSTYPE
-Automatically set to a string that
-describes the operating system on which
-.B bash
-is executing.
-The default is system-dependent.
-.TP
-.B PIPESTATUS
-An array variable (see
-.B Arrays
-below) containing a list of exit status values from the processes
-in the most-recently-executed foreground pipeline (which may
-contain only a single command).
-.TP
-.B PPID
-The process ID of the shell's parent. This variable is readonly.
-.TP
-.B PWD
-The current working directory as set by the
-.B cd
-command.
-.TP
-.B RANDOM
-Each time this parameter is referenced, a random integer between
-0 and 32767 is
-generated. The sequence of random numbers may be initialized by assigning
-a value to
-.SM
-.BR RANDOM .
-If
-.SM
-.B RANDOM
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B REPLY
-Set to the line of input read by the
-.B read
-builtin command when no arguments are supplied.
-.TP
-.B SECONDS
-Each time this parameter is
-referenced, the number of seconds since shell invocation is returned. If a
-value is assigned to
-.SM
-.BR SECONDS ,
-the value returned upon subsequent
-references is
-the number of seconds since the assignment plus the value assigned.
-If
-.SM
-.B SECONDS
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B SHELLOPTS
-A colon-separated list of enabled shell options. Each word in
-the list is a valid argument for the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below). The options appearing in
-.SM
-.B SHELLOPTS
-are those reported as
-.I on
-by \fBset \-o\fP.
-If this variable is in the environment when
-.B bash
-starts up, each shell option in the list will be enabled before
-reading any startup files.
-This variable is read-only.
-.TP
-.B SHLVL
-Incremented by one each time an instance of
-.B bash
-is started.
-.TP
-.B UID
-Expands to the user ID of the current user, initialized at shell startup.
-This variable is readonly.
-.PD
-.PP
-The following variables are used by the shell. In some cases,
-.B bash
-assigns a default value to a variable; these cases are noted
-below.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B BASH_ENV
-If this parameter is set when \fBbash\fP is executing a shell script,
-its value is interpreted as a filename containing commands to
-initialize the shell, as in
-.IR ~/.bashrc .
-The value of
-.SM
-.B BASH_ENV
-is subjected to parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic
-expansion before being interpreted as a file name.
-.SM
-.B PATH
-is not used to search for the resultant file name.
-.TP
-.B CDPATH
-The search path for the
-.B cd
-command.
-This is a colon-separated list of directories in which the shell looks
-for destination directories specified by the
-.B cd
-command.
-A sample value is
-.if t \f(CW".:~:/usr"\fP.
-.if n ".:~:/usr".
-.TP
-.B COLUMNS
-Used by the \fBselect\fP builtin command to determine the terminal width
-when printing selection lists. Automatically set upon receipt of a SIGWINCH.
-.TP
-.B COMPREPLY
-An array variable from which \fBbash\fP reads the possible completions
-generated by a shell function invoked by the programmable completion
-facility (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP below).
-.TP
-.B FCEDIT
-The default editor for the
-.B fc
-builtin command.
-.TP
-.B FIGNORE
-A colon-separated list of suffixes to ignore when performing
-filename completion (see
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-below).
-A filename whose suffix matches one of the entries in
-.SM
-.B FIGNORE
-is excluded from the list of matched filenames.
-A sample value is
-.if t \f(CW".o:~"\fP.
-.if n ".o:~".
-.TP
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-A colon-separated list of patterns defining the set of filenames to
-be ignored by pathname expansion.
-If a filename matched by a pathname expansion pattern also matches one
-of the patterns in
-.SM
-.BR GLOBIGNORE ,
-it is removed from the list of matches.
-.TP
-.B HISTCONTROL
-If set to a value of
-.IR ignorespace ,
-lines which begin with a
-.B space
-character are not entered on the history list.
-If set to a value of
-.IR ignoredups ,
-lines matching the last history line are not entered.
-A value of
-.I ignoreboth
-combines the two options.
-If unset, or if set to any other value than those above,
-all lines read
-by the parser are saved on the history list, subject to the value
-of
-.BR HISTIGNORE .
-This variable's function is superseded by
-.BR HISTIGNORE .
-The second and subsequent lines of a multi-line compound command are
-not tested, and are added to the history regardless of the value of
-.BR HISTCONTROL .
-.TP
-.B HISTFILE
-The name of the file in which command history is saved (see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below). The default value is \fI~/.bash_history\fP. If unset, the
-command history is not saved when an interactive shell exits.
-.TP
-.B HISTFILESIZE
-The maximum number of lines contained in the history file. When this
-variable is assigned a value, the history file is truncated, if
-necessary, to contain no more than that number of lines. The default
-value is 500. The history file is also truncated to this size after
-writing it when an interactive shell exits.
-.TP
-.B HISTIGNORE
-A colon-separated list of patterns used to decide which command lines
-should be saved on the history list. Each pattern is anchored at the
-beginning of the line and must match the complete line (no implicit
-`\fB*\fP' is appended). Each pattern is tested against the line
-after the checks specified by
-.B HISTCONTROL
-are applied.
-In addition to the normal shell pattern matching characters, `\fB&\fP'
-matches the previous history line. `\fB&\fP' may be escaped using a
-backslash; the backslash is removed before attempting a match.
-The second and subsequent lines of a multi-line compound command are
-not tested, and are added to the history regardless of the value of
-.BR HISTIGNORE .
-.TP
-.B HISTSIZE
-The number of commands to remember in the command history (see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below). The default value is 500.
-.TP
-.B HOME
-The home directory of the current user; the default argument for the
-\fBcd\fP builtin command.
-The value of this variable is also used when performing tilde expansion.
-.TP
-.B HOSTFILE
-Contains the name of a file in the same format as
-.FN /etc/hosts
-that should be read when the shell needs to complete a
-hostname.
-The list of possible hostname completions may be changed while the
-shell is running;
-the next time hostname completion is attempted after the
-value is changed,
-.B bash
-adds the contents of the new file to the existing list.
-If
-.SM
-.B HOSTFILE
-is set, but has no value, \fBbash\fP attempts to read
-.FN /etc/hosts
-to obtain the list of possible hostname completions.
-When
-.SM
-.B HOSTFILE
-is unset, the hostname list is cleared.
-.TP
-.B IFS
-The
-.I Internal Field Separator
-that is used
-for word splitting after expansion and to
-split lines into words with the
-.B read
-builtin command. The default value is
-``<space><tab><newline>''.
-.TP
-.B IGNOREEOF
-Controls the
-action of an interactive shell on receipt of an
-.SM
-.B EOF
-character as the sole input. If set, the value is the number of
-consecutive
-.SM
-.B EOF
-characters which must be
-typed as the first characters on an input line before
-.B bash
-exits. If the variable exists but does not have a numeric value, or
-has no value, the default value is 10. If it does not exist,
-.SM
-.B EOF
-signifies the end of input to the shell.
-.TP
-.B INPUTRC
-The filename for the
-.B readline
-startup file, overriding the default of
-.FN ~/.inputrc
-(see
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-below).
-.TP
-.B LANG
-Used to determine the locale category for any category not specifically
-selected with a variable starting with \fBLC_\fP.
-.TP
-.B LC_ALL
-This variable overrides the value of \fBLANG\fP and any other
-\fBLC_\fP variable specifying a locale category.
-.TP
-.B LC_COLLATE
-This variable determines the collation order used when sorting the
-results of pathname expansion, and determines the behavior of range
-expressions, equivalence classes, and collating sequences within
-pathname expansion and pattern matching.
-.TP
-.B LC_CTYPE
-This variable determines the interpretation of characters and the
-behavior of character classes within pathname expansion and pattern
-matching.
-.TP
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-This variable determines the locale used to translate double-quoted
-strings preceded by a \fB$\fP.
-.TP
-.B LC_NUMERIC
-This variable determines the locale category used for number formatting.
-.TP
-.B LINES
-Used by the \fBselect\fP builtin command to determine the column length
-for printing selection lists. Automatically set upon receipt of a SIGWINCH.
-.TP
-.B MAIL
-If this parameter is set to a file name and the
-.SM
-.B MAILPATH
-variable is not set,
-.B bash
-informs the user of the arrival of mail in the specified file.
-.TP
-.B MAILCHECK
-Specifies how
-often (in seconds)
-.B bash
-checks for mail. The default is 60 seconds. When it is time to check
-for mail, the shell does so before displaying the primary prompt.
-If this variable is unset, or set to a value that is not a number
-greater than or equal to zero, the shell disables mail checking.
-.TP
-.B MAILPATH
-A colon-separated list of file names to be checked for mail.
-The message to be printed when mail arrives in a particular file
-may be specified by separating the file name from the message with a `?'.
-When used in the text of the message, \fB$_\fP expands to the name of
-the current mailfile.
-Example:
-.RS
-.PP
-\fBMAILPATH\fP='/var/mail/bfox?"You have mail":~/shell\-mail?"$_ has mail!"'
-.PP
-.B Bash
-supplies a default value for this variable, but the location of the user
-mail files that it uses is system dependent (e.g., /var/mail/\fB$USER\fP).
-.RE
-.TP
-.B OPTERR
-If set to the value 1,
-.B bash
-displays error messages generated by the
-.B getopts
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SM
-.B OPTERR
-is initialized to 1 each time the shell is invoked or a shell
-script is executed.
-.TP
-.B PATH
-The search path for commands. It
-is a colon-separated list of directories in which
-the shell looks for commands (see
-.SM
-.B COMMAND EXECUTION
-below). The default path is system-dependent,
-and is set by the administrator who installs
-.BR bash .
-A common value is
-.if t \f(CW/usr/gnu/bin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/ucb:/bin:/usr/bin:.\fP.
-.if n ``/usr/gnu/bin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/ucb:/bin:/usr/bin:.''.
-.TP
-.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
-If this variable is in the environment when \fBbash\fP starts, the shell
-enters \fIposix mode\fP before reading the startup files, as if the
-.B \-\-posix
-invocation option had been supplied. If it is set while the shell is
-running, \fBbash\fP enables \fIposix mode\fP, as if the command
-.if t \f(CWset -o posix\fP
-.if n \fIset -o posix\fP
-had been executed.
-.TP
-.B PROMPT_COMMAND
-If set, the value is executed as a command prior to issuing each primary
-prompt.
-.TP
-.B PS1
-The value of this parameter is expanded (see
-.SM
-.B PROMPTING
-below) and used as the primary prompt string. The default value is
-``\fB\es\-\ev\e$ \fP''.
-.TP
-.B PS2
-The value of this parameter is expanded as with
-.B PS1
-and used as the secondary prompt string. The default is
-``\fB> \fP''.
-.TP
-.B PS3
-The value of this parameter is used as the prompt for the
-.B select
-command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-above).
-.TP
-.B PS4
-The value of this parameter is expanded as with
-.B PS1
-and the value is printed before each command
-.B bash
-displays during an execution trace. The first character of
-.SM
-.B PS4
-is replicated multiple times, as necessary, to indicate multiple
-levels of indirection. The default is ``\fB+ \fP''.
-.TP
-.B TIMEFORMAT
-The value of this parameter is used as a format string specifying
-how the timing information for pipelines prefixed with the
-.B time
-reserved word should be displayed.
-The \fB%\fP character introduces an escape sequence that is
-expanded to a time value or other information.
-The escape sequences and their meanings are as follows; the
-braces denote optional portions.
-.sp .5
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 10
-.B %%
-A literal \fB%\fP.
-.TP
-.B %[\fIp\fP][l]R
-The elapsed time in seconds.
-.TP
-.B %[\fIp\fP][l]U
-The number of CPU seconds spent in user mode.
-.TP
-.B %[\fIp\fP][l]S
-The number of CPU seconds spent in system mode.
-.TP
-.B %P
-The CPU percentage, computed as (%U + %S) / %R.
-.PD
-.RE
-.IP
-The optional \fIp\fP is a digit specifying the \fIprecision\fP,
-the number of fractional digits after a decimal point.
-A value of 0 causes no decimal point or fraction to be output.
-At most three places after the decimal point may be specified;
-values of \fIp\fP greater than 3 are changed to 3.
-If \fIp\fP is not specified, the value 3 is used.
-.IP
-The optional \fBl\fP specifies a longer format, including
-minutes, of the form \fIMM\fPm\fISS\fP.\fIFF\fPs.
-The value of \fIp\fP determines whether or not the fraction is
-included.
-.IP
-If this variable is not set, \fBbash\fP acts as if it had the
-value \fB$'\enreal\et%3lR\enuser\et%3lU\ensys\t%3lS'\fP.
-If the value is null, no timing information is displayed.
-A trailing newline is added when the format string is displayed.
-.TP
-.B TMOUT
-If set to a value greater than zero, \fBTMOUT\fP is treated as the
-default timeout for the \fBread\fP builtin.
-The \fBselect\fP command terminates if input does not arrive
-after \fBTMOUT\fP seconds when input is coming from a terminal.
-In an interactive shell, the value is interpreted as the
-number of seconds to wait for input after issuing the primary prompt.
-.B Bash
-terminates after waiting for that number of seconds if input does
-not arrive.
-.TP
-.B auto_resume
-This variable controls how the shell interacts with the user and
-job control. If this variable is set, single word simple
-commands without redirections are treated as candidates for resumption
-of an existing stopped job. There is no ambiguity allowed; if there is
-more than one job beginning with the string typed, the job most recently
-accessed is selected. The
-.I name
-of a stopped job, in this context, is the command line used to
-start it.
-If set to the value
-.IR exact ,
-the string supplied must match the name of a stopped job exactly;
-if set to
-.IR substring ,
-the string supplied needs to match a substring of the name of a
-stopped job. The
-.I substring
-value provides functionality analogous to the
-.B %?
-job identifier (see
-.SM
-.B JOB CONTROL
-below). If set to any other value, the supplied string must
-be a prefix of a stopped job's name; this provides functionality
-analogous to the
-.B %
-job identifier.
-.TP
-.B histchars
-The two or three characters which control history expansion
-and tokenization (see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below). The first character is the \fIhistory expansion\fP character,
-the character which signals the start of a history
-expansion, normally `\fB!\fP'.
-The second character is the \fIquick substitution\fP
-character, which is used as shorthand for re-running the previous
-command entered, substituting one string for another in the command.
-The default is `\fB^\fP'.
-The optional third character is the character
-which indicates that the remainder of the line is a comment when found
-as the first character of a word, normally `\fB#\fP'. The history
-comment character causes history substitution to be skipped for the
-remaining words on the line. It does not necessarily cause the shell
-parser to treat the rest of the line as a comment.
-.PD
-.SS Arrays
-.B Bash
-provides one-dimensional array variables. Any variable may be used as
-an array; the
-.B declare
-builtin will explicitly declare an array. There is no maximum
-limit on the size of an array, nor any requirement that members
-be indexed or assigned contiguously. Arrays are indexed using
-integers and are zero-based.
-.PP
-An array is created automatically if any variable is assigned to using
-the syntax \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]=\fIvalue\fP. The
-.I subscript
-is treated as an arithmetic expression that must evaluate to a number
-greater than or equal to zero. To explicitly declare an array, use
-.B declare \-a \fIname\fP
-(see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.B declare \-a \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]
-is also accepted; the \fIsubscript\fP is ignored. Attributes may be
-specified for an array variable using the
-.B declare
-and
-.B readonly
-builtins. Each attribute applies to all members of an array.
-.PP
-Arrays are assigned to using compound assignments of the form
-\fIname\fP=\fB(\fPvalue\fI1\fP ... value\fIn\fP\fB)\fP, where each
-\fIvalue\fP is of the form [\fIsubscript\fP]=\fIstring\fP. Only
-\fIstring\fP is required. If
-the optional brackets and subscript are supplied, that index is assigned to;
-otherwise the index of the element assigned is the last index assigned
-to by the statement plus one. Indexing starts at zero.
-This syntax is also accepted by the
-.B declare
-builtin. Individual array elements may be assigned to using the
-\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]=\fIvalue\fP syntax introduced above.
-.PP
-Any element of an array may be referenced using
-${\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]}. The braces are required to avoid
-conflicts with pathname expansion. If
-\fIsubscript\fP is \fB@\fP or \fB*\fP, the word expands to
-all members of \fIname\fP. These subscripts differ only when the
-word appears within double quotes. If the word is double-quoted,
-${\fIname\fP[*]} expands to a single
-word with the value of each array member separated by the first
-character of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable, and ${\fIname\fP[@]} expands each element of
-\fIname\fP to a separate word. When there are no array members,
-${\fIname\fP[@]} expands to nothing. This is analogous to the expansion
-of the special parameters \fB*\fP and \fB@\fP (see
-.B Special Parameters
-above). ${#\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]} expands to the length of
-${\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]}. If \fIsubscript\fP is \fB*\fP or
-\fB@\fP, the expansion is the number of elements in the array.
-Referencing an array variable without a subscript is equivalent to
-referencing element zero.
-.PP
-The
-.B unset
-builtin is used to destroy arrays. \fBunset\fP \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]
-destroys the array element at index \fIsubscript\fP.
-\fBunset\fP \fIname\fP, where \fIname\fP is an array, or
-\fBunset\fP \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP], where
-\fIsubscript\fP is \fB*\fP or \fB@\fP, removes the entire array.
-.PP
-The
-.BR declare ,
-.BR local ,
-and
-.B readonly
-builtins each accept a
-.B \-a
-option to specify an array. The
-.B read
-builtin accepts a
-.B \-a
-option to assign a list of words read from the standard input
-to an array. The
-.B set
-and
-.B declare
-builtins display array values in a way that allows them to be
-reused as assignments.
-.SH EXPANSION
-Expansion is performed on the command line after it has been split into
-words. There are seven kinds of expansion performed:
-.IR "brace expansion" ,
-.IR "tilde expansion" ,
-.IR "parameter and variable expansion" ,
-.IR "command substitution" ,
-.IR "arithmetic expansion" ,
-.IR "word splitting" ,
-and
-.IR "pathname expansion" .
-.PP
-The order of expansions is: brace expansion, tilde expansion,
-parameter, variable and arithmetic expansion and
-command substitution
-(done in a left-to-right fashion), word splitting, and pathname
-expansion.
-.PP
-On systems that can support it, there is an additional expansion
-available: \fIprocess substitution\fP.
-.PP
-Only brace expansion, word splitting, and pathname expansion
-can change the number of words of the expansion; other expansions
-expand a single word to a single word.
-The only exceptions to this are the expansions of
-"\fB$@\fP" and "\fB${\fP\fIname\fP\fB[@]}\fP"
-as explained above (see
-.SM
-.BR PARAMETERS ).
-.SS Brace Expansion
-.PP
-.I "Brace expansion"
-is a mechanism by which arbitrary strings
-may be generated. This mechanism is similar to
-\fIpathname expansion\fP, but the filenames generated
-need not exist. Patterns to be brace expanded take
-the form of an optional
-.IR preamble ,
-followed by a series of comma-separated strings
-between a pair of braces, followed by an optional
-.IR postscript .
-The preamble is prefixed to each string contained
-within the braces, and the postscript is then appended
-to each resulting string, expanding left to right.
-.PP
-Brace expansions may be nested. The results of each expanded
-string are not sorted; left to right order is preserved.
-For example, a\fB{\fPd,c,b\fB}\fPe expands into `ade ace abe'.
-.PP
-Brace expansion is performed before any other expansions,
-and any characters special to other expansions are preserved
-in the result. It is strictly textual.
-.B Bash
-does not apply any syntactic interpretation to the context of the
-expansion or the text between the braces.
-.PP
-A correctly-formed brace expansion must contain unquoted opening
-and closing braces, and at least one unquoted comma.
-Any incorrectly formed brace expansion is left unchanged.
-A \fB{\fP or \fB,\fP may be quoted with a backslash to prevent its
-being considered part of a brace expression.
-To avoid conflicts with parameter expansion, the string \fB${\fP
-is not considered eligible for brace expansion.
-.PP
-This construct is typically used as shorthand when the common
-prefix of the strings to be generated is longer than in the
-above example:
-.RS
-.PP
-mkdir /usr/local/src/bash/{old,new,dist,bugs}
-.RE
-or
-.RS
-chown root /usr/{ucb/{ex,edit},lib/{ex?.?*,how_ex}}
-.RE
-.PP
-Brace expansion introduces a slight incompatibility with
-historical versions of
-.BR sh .
-.B sh
-does not treat opening or closing braces specially when they
-appear as part of a word, and preserves them in the output.
-.B Bash
-removes braces from words as a consequence of brace
-expansion. For example, a word entered to
-.B sh
-as \fIfile{1,2}\fP
-appears identically in the output. The same word is
-output as
-.I file1 file2
-after expansion by
-.BR bash .
-If strict compatibility with
-.B sh
-is desired, start
-.B bash
-with the
-.B +B
-option or disable brace expansion with the
-.B +B
-option to the
-.B set
-command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SS Tilde Expansion
-.PP
-If a word begins with an unquoted tilde character (`\fB~\fP'), all of
-the characters preceding the first unquoted slash (or all characters,
-if there is no unquoted slash) are considered a \fItilde-prefix\fP.
-If none of the characters in the tilde-prefix are quoted, the
-characters in the tilde-prefix following the tilde are treated as a
-possible \fIlogin name\fP.
-If this login name is the null string, the tilde is replaced with the
-value of the shell parameter
-.SM
-.BR HOME .
-If
-.SM
-.B HOME
-is unset, the home directory of the user executing the shell is
-substituted instead.
-Otherwise, the tilde-prefix is replaced with the home directory
-associated with the specified login name.
-.PP
-If the tilde-prefix is a `~+', the value of the shell variable
-.SM
-.B PWD
-replaces the tilde-prefix.
-If the tilde-prefix is a `~\-', the value of the shell variable
-.SM
-.BR OLDPWD ,
-if it is set, is substituted.
-If the characters following the tilde in the tilde-prefix consist
-of a number \fIN\fP, optionally prefixed
-by a `+' or a `\-', the tilde-prefix is replaced with the corresponding
-element from the directory stack, as it would be displayed by the
-.B dirs
-builtin invoked with the tilde-prefix as an argument.
-If the characters following the tilde in the tilde-prefix consist of a
-number without a leading `+' or `\-', `+' is assumed.
-.PP
-If the login name is invalid, or the tilde expansion fails, the word
-is unchanged.
-.PP
-Each variable assignment is checked for unquoted tilde-prefixes immediately
-following a
-.B :
-or
-.BR = .
-In these cases, tilde expansion is also performed.
-Consequently, one may use file names with tildes in assignments to
-.SM
-.BR PATH ,
-.SM
-.BR MAILPATH ,
-and
-.SM
-.BR CDPATH ,
-and the shell assigns the expanded value.
-.SS Parameter Expansion
-.PP
-The `\fB$\fP' character introduces parameter expansion,
-command substitution, or arithmetic expansion. The parameter name
-or symbol to be expanded may be enclosed in braces, which
-are optional but serve to protect the variable to be expanded from
-characters immediately following it which could be
-interpreted as part of the name.
-.PP
-When braces are used, the matching ending brace is the first `\fB}\fP'
-not escaped by a backslash or within a quoted string, and not within an
-embedded arithmetic expansion, command substitution, or paramter
-expansion.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP}
-The value of \fIparameter\fP is substituted. The braces are required
-when
-.I parameter
-is a positional parameter with more than one digit,
-or when
-.I parameter
-is followed by a character which is not to be
-interpreted as part of its name.
-.PD
-.PP
-If the first character of \fIparameter\fP is an exclamation point,
-a level of variable indirection is introduced.
-\fBBash\fP uses the value of the variable formed from the rest of
-\fIparameter\fP as the name of the variable; this variable is then
-expanded and that value is used in the rest of the substitution, rather
-than the value of \fIparameter\fP itself.
-This is known as \fIindirect expansion\fP.
-The exception to this is the expansion of ${!\fIprefix\fP*}
-described below.
-.PP
-In each of the cases below, \fIword\fP is subject to tilde expansion,
-parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic expansion.
-When not performing substring expansion, \fBbash\fP tests for a parameter
-that is unset or null; omitting the colon results in a test only for a
-parameter that is unset.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:\-\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBUse Default Values\fP. If
-.I parameter
-is unset or null, the expansion of
-.I word
-is substituted. Otherwise, the value of
-.I parameter
-is substituted.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:=\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBAssign Default Values\fP.
-If
-.I parameter
-is unset or null, the expansion of
-.I word
-is assigned to
-.IR parameter .
-The value of
-.I parameter
-is then substituted. Positional parameters and special parameters may
-not be assigned to in this way.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:?\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBDisplay Error if Null or Unset\fP.
-If
-.I parameter
-is null or unset, the expansion of \fIword\fP (or a message to that effect
-if
-.I word
-is not present) is written to the standard error and the shell, if it
-is not interactive, exits. Otherwise, the value of \fIparameter\fP is
-substituted.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:+\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBUse Alternate Value\fP.
-If
-.I parameter
-is null or unset, nothing is substituted, otherwise the expansion of
-.I word
-is substituted.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:\fP\fIoffset\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:\fP\fIoffset\fP\fB:\fP\fIlength\fP}
-.PD
-\fBSubstring Expansion.\fP
-Expands to up to \fIlength\fP characters of \fIparameter\fP
-starting at the character specified by \fIoffset\fP.
-If \fIlength\fP is omitted, expands to the substring of
-\fIparameter\fP starting at the character specified by \fIoffset\fP.
-\fIlength\fP and \fIoffset\fP are arithmetic expressions (see
-.SM
-.B
-ARITHMETIC EVALUATION
-below).
-\fIlength\fP must evaluate to a number greater than or equal to zero.
-If \fIoffset\fP evaluates to a number less than zero, the value
-is used as an offset from the end of the value of \fIparameter\fP.
-If \fIparameter\fP is \fB@\fP, the result is \fIlength\fP positional
-parameters beginning at \fIoffset\fP.
-If \fIparameter\fP is an array name indexed by @ or *,
-the result is the \fIlength\fP
-members of the array beginning with ${\fIparameter\fP[\fIoffset\fP]}.
-Substring indexing is zero-based unless the positional parameters
-are used, in which case the indexing starts at 1.
-.TP
-${\fB!\fP\fIprefix\fP\fB*\fP}
-Expands to the names of variables whose names begin with \fIprefix\fP,
-separated by the first character of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable.
-.TP
-${\fB#\fP\fIparameter\fP}
-The length in characters of the value of \fIparameter\fP is substituted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B *
-or
-.BR @ ,
-the value substituted is the number of positional parameters.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array name subscripted by
-.B *
-or
-.BR @ ,
-the value substituted is the number of elements in the array.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB#\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB##\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD
-The
-.I word
-is expanded to produce a pattern just as in pathname
-expansion. If the pattern matches the beginning of
-the value of
-.IR parameter ,
-then the result of the expansion is the expanded value of
-.I parameter
-with the shortest matching pattern (the ``\fB#\fP'' case) or the
-longest matching pattern (the ``\fB##\fP'' case) deleted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each positional
-parameter in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array variable subscripted with
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each member of the
-array in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB%\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB%%\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD
-The \fIword\fP is expanded to produce a pattern just as in
-pathname expansion.
-If the pattern matches a trailing portion of the expanded value of
-.IR parameter ,
-then the result of the expansion is the expanded value of
-.I parameter
-with the shortest matching pattern (the ``\fB%\fP'' case) or the
-longest matching pattern (the ``\fB%%\fP'' case) deleted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each positional
-parameter in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array variable subscripted with
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each member of the
-array in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB/\fP\fIpattern\fP\fB/\fP\fIstring\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB//\fP\fIpattern\fP\fB/\fP\fIstring\fP}
-.PD
-The \fIpattern\fP is expanded to produce a pattern just as in
-pathname expansion.
-\fIParameter\fP is expanded and the longest match of \fIpattern\fP
-against its value is replaced with \fIstring\fP.
-In the first form, only the first match is replaced.
-The second form causes all matches of \fIpattern\fP to be
-replaced with \fIstring\fP.
-If \fIpattern\fP begins with \fB#\fP, it must match at the beginning
-of the expanded value of \fIparameter\fP.
-If \fIpattern\fP begins with \fB%\fP, it must match at the end
-of the expanded value of \fIparameter\fP.
-If \fIstring\fP is null, matches of \fIpattern\fP are deleted
-and the \fB/\fP following \fIpattern\fP may be omitted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the substitution operation is applied to each positional
-parameter in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array variable subscripted with
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the substitution operation is applied to each member of the
-array in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-.SS Command Substitution
-.PP
-\fICommand substitution\fP allows the output of a command to replace
-the command name. There are two forms:
-.PP
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB$(\fP\fIcommand\fP\|\fB)\fP
-.RE
-or
-.RS
-\fB`\fP\fIcommand\fP\fB`\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.B Bash
-performs the expansion by executing \fIcommand\fP and
-replacing the command substitution with the standard output of the
-command, with any trailing newlines deleted.
-Embedded newlines are not deleted, but they may be removed during
-word splitting.
-The command substitution \fB$(cat \fIfile\fP)\fR can be replaced by
-the equivalent but faster \fB$(< \fIfile\fP)\fR.
-.PP
-When the old-style backquote form of substitution is used,
-backslash retains its literal meaning except when followed by
-.BR $ ,
-.BR ` ,
-or
-.BR \e .
-The first backquote not preceded by a backslash terminates the
-command substitution.
-When using the $(\^\fIcommand\fP\|) form, all characters between the
-parentheses make up the command; none are treated specially.
-.PP
-Command substitutions may be nested. To nest when using the backquoted form,
-escape the inner backquotes with backslashes.
-.PP
-If the substitution appears within double quotes, word splitting and
-pathname expansion are not performed on the results.
-.SS Arithmetic Expansion
-.PP
-Arithmetic expansion allows the evaluation of an arithmetic expression
-and the substitution of the result. The format for arithmetic expansion is:
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB$((\fP\fIexpression\fP\fB))\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-The
-.I expression
-is treated as if it were within double quotes, but a double quote
-inside the parentheses is not treated specially.
-All tokens in the expression undergo parameter expansion, string
-expansion, command substitution, and quote removal.
-Arithmetic substitutions may be nested.
-.PP
-The evaluation is performed according to the rules listed below under
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" .
-If
-.I expression
-is invalid,
-.B bash
-prints a message indicating failure and no substitution occurs.
-.SS Process Substitution
-.PP
-\fIProcess substitution\fP is supported on systems that support named
-pipes (\fIFIFOs\fP) or the \fB/dev/fd\fP method of naming open files.
-It takes the form of
-\fB<(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP
-or
-\fB>(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP.
-The process \fIlist\fP is run with its input or output connected to a
-\fIFIFO\fP or some file in \fB/dev/fd\fP. The name of this file is
-passed as an argument to the current command as the result of the
-expansion. If the \fB>(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP form is used, writing to
-the file will provide input for \fIlist\fP. If the
-\fB<(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP form is used, the file passed as an
-argument should be read to obtain the output of \fIlist\fP.
-.PP
-When available, process substitution is performed
-simultaneously with parameter and variable expansion,
-command substitution,
-and arithmetic expansion.
-.SS Word Splitting
-.PP
-The shell scans the results of
-parameter expansion,
-command substitution,
-and
-arithmetic expansion
-that did not occur within double quotes for
-.IR "word splitting" .
-.PP
-The shell treats each character of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-as a delimiter, and splits the results of the other
-expansions into words on these characters. If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is unset, or its
-value is exactly
-.BR <space><tab><newline> ,
-the default, then
-any sequence of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-characters serves to delimit words. If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-has a value other than the default, then sequences of
-the whitespace characters
-.B space
-and
-.B tab
-are ignored at the beginning and end of the
-word, as long as the whitespace character is in the
-value of
-.SM
-.BR IFS
-(an
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace character).
-Any character in
-.SM
-.B IFS
-that is not
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace, along with any adjacent
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace characters, delimits a field.
-A sequence of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace characters is also treated as a delimiter.
-If the value of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is null, no word splitting occurs.
-.PP
-Explicit null arguments (\^\f3"\^"\fP or \^\f3'\^'\fP\^) are retained.
-Unquoted implicit null arguments, resulting from the expansion of
-parameters that have no values, are removed.
-If a parameter with no value is expanded within double quotes, a
-null argument results and is retained.
-.PP
-Note that if no expansion occurs, no splitting
-is performed.
-.SS Pathname Expansion
-.PP
-After word splitting,
-unless the
-.B \-f
-option has been set,
-.B bash
-scans each word for the characters
-.BR * ,
-.BR ? ,
-and
-.BR [ .
-If one of these characters appears, then the word is
-regarded as a
-.IR pattern ,
-and replaced with an alphabetically sorted list of
-file names matching the pattern.
-If no matching file names are found,
-and the shell option
-.B nullglob
-is disabled, the word is left unchanged.
-If the
-.B nullglob
-option is set, and no matches are found,
-the word is removed.
-If the shell option
-.B nocaseglob
-is enabled, the match is performed without regard to the case
-of alphabetic characters.
-When a pattern is used for pathname expansion,
-the character
-.B ``.''
-at the start of a name or immediately following a slash
-must be matched explicitly, unless the shell option
-.B dotglob
-is set.
-When matching a pathname, the slash character must always be
-matched explicitly.
-In other cases, the
-.B ``.''
-character is not treated specially.
-See the description of
-.B shopt
-below under
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-for a description of the
-.BR nocaseglob ,
-.BR nullglob ,
-and
-.B dotglob
-shell options.
-.PP
-The
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-shell variable may be used to restrict the set of file names matching a
-.IR pattern .
-If
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is set, each matching file name that also matches one of the patterns in
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is removed from the list of matches.
-The file names
-.B ``.''
-and
-.B ``..''
-are always ignored, even when
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is set. However, setting
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-has the effect of enabling the
-.B dotglob
-shell option, so all other file names beginning with a
-.B ``.''
-will match.
-To get the old behavior of ignoring file names beginning with a
-.BR ``.'' ,
-make
-.B ``.*''
-one of the patterns in
-.SM
-.BR GLOBIGNORE .
-The
-.B dotglob
-option is disabled when
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is unset.
-.PP
-\fBPattern Matching\fP
-.PP
-Any character that appears in a pattern, other than the special pattern
-characters described below, matches itself. The NUL character may not
-occur in a pattern. The special pattern characters must be quoted if
-they are to be matched literally.
-.PP
-The special pattern characters have the following meanings:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B *
-Matches any string, including the null string.
-.TP
-.B ?
-Matches any single character.
-.TP
-.B [...]
-Matches any one of the enclosed characters. A pair of characters
-separated by a hyphen denotes a
-\fIrange expression\fP;
-any character that sorts between those two characters, inclusive,
-using the current locale's collating sequence and character set,
-is matched. If the first character following the
-.B [
-is a
-.B !
-or a
-.B ^
-then any character not enclosed is matched.
-The sorting order of characters in range expressions is determined by
-the current locale and the value of the \fBLC_COLLATE\fP shell variable,
-if set.
-A
-.B \-
-may be matched by including it as the first or last character
-in the set.
-A
-.B ]
-may be matched by including it as the first character
-in the set.
-.br
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Within
-.B [
-and
-.BR ] ,
-\fIcharacter classes\fP can be specified using the syntax
-\fB[:\fP\fIclass\fP\fB:]\fP, where \fIclass\fP is one of the
-following classes defined in the POSIX.2 standard:
-.PP
-.RS
-.B
-.if n alnum alpha ascii blank cntrl digit graph lower print punct space upper word xdigit
-.if t alnum alpha ascii blank cntrl digit graph lower print punct space upper word xdigit
-.br
-A character class matches any character belonging to that class.
-The \fBword\fP character class matches letters, digits, and the character _.
-.br
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Within
-.B [
-and
-.BR ] ,
-an \fIequivalence class\fP can be specified using the syntax
-\fB[=\fP\fIc\fP\fB=]\fP, which matches all characters with the
-same collation weight (as defined by the current locale) as
-the character \fIc\fP.
-.br
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Within
-.B [
-and
-.BR ] ,
-the syntax \fB[.\fP\fIsymbol\fP\fB.]\fP matches the collating symbol
-\fIsymbol\fP.
-.RE
-.PD
-.PP
-If the \fBextglob\fP shell option is enabled using the \fBshopt\fP
-builtin, several extended pattern matching operators are recognized.
-In the following description, a \fIpattern-list\fP is a list of one
-or more patterns separated by a \fB|\fP.
-Composite patterns may be formed using one or more of the following
-sub-patterns:
-.sp 1
-.PD 0
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB?(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches zero or one occurrence of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB*(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches zero or more occurrences of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB+(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches one or more occurrences of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB@(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches exactly one of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB!(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches anything except one of the given patterns
-.RE
-.PD
-.SS Quote Removal
-.PP
-After the preceding expansions, all unquoted occurrences of the
-characters
-.BR \e ,
-.BR ' ,
-and \^\f3"\fP\^ that did not result from one of the above
-expansions are removed.
-.SH REDIRECTION
-Before a command is executed, its input and output
-may be
-.I redirected
-using a special notation interpreted by the shell.
-Redirection may also be used to open and close files for the
-current shell execution environment. The following redirection
-operators may precede or appear anywhere within a
-.I simple command
-or may follow a
-.IR command .
-Redirections are processed in the order they appear, from
-left to right.
-.PP
-In the following descriptions, if the file descriptor number is
-omitted, and the first character of the redirection operator is
-.BR < ,
-the redirection refers to the standard input (file descriptor
-0). If the first character of the redirection operator is
-.BR > ,
-the redirection refers to the standard output (file descriptor
-1).
-.PP
-The word following the redirection operator in the following
-descriptions, unless otherwise noted, is subjected to brace expansion,
-tilde expansion, parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic
-expansion, quote removal, pathname expansion, and word splitting.
-If it expands to more than one word,
-.B bash
-reports an error.
-.PP
-Note that the order of redirections is significant. For example,
-the command
-.RS
-.PP
-ls \fB>\fP dirlist 2\fB>&\fP1
-.RE
-.PP
-directs both standard output and standard error to the file
-.IR dirlist ,
-while the command
-.RS
-.PP
-ls 2\fB>&\fP1 \fB>\fP dirlist
-.RE
-.PP
-directs only the standard output to file
-.IR dirlist ,
-because the standard error was duplicated as standard output
-before the standard output was redirected to
-.IR dirlist .
-.PP
-\fBBash\fP handles several filenames specially when they are used in
-redirections, as described in the following table:
-.RS
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B /dev/fd/\fIfd\fP
-If \fIfd\fP is a valid integer, file descriptor \fIfd\fP is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/stdin
-File descriptor 0 is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/stdout
-File descriptor 1 is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/stderr
-File descriptor 2 is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/tcp/\fIhost\fP/\fIport\fP
-If \fIhost\fP is a valid hostname or Internet address, and \fIport\fP
-is an integer port number or service name, \fBbash\fP attempts to open
-a TCP connection to the corresponding socket.
-.TP
-.B /dev/udp/\fIhost\fP/\fIport\fP
-If \fIhost\fP is a valid hostname or Internet address, and \fIport\fP
-is an integer port number or service name, \fBbash\fP attempts to open
-a UDP connection to the corresponding socket.
-.PD
-.RE
-.PP
-A failure to open or create a file causes the redirection to fail.
-.SS Redirecting Input
-.PP
-Redirection of input causes the file whose name results from
-the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for reading on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard input (file descriptor 0) if
-.I n
-is not specified.
-.PP
-The general format for redirecting input is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.SS Redirecting Output
-.PP
-Redirection of output causes the file whose name results from
-the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for writing on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard output (file descriptor 1) if
-.I n
-is not specified. If the file does not exist it is created;
-if it does exist it is truncated to zero size.
-.PP
-The general format for redirecting output is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-If the redirection operator is
-.BR > ,
-and the
-.B noclobber
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin has been enabled, the redirection will fail if the file
-whose name results from the expansion of \fIword\fP exists and is
-a regular file.
-If the redirection operator is
-.BR >| ,
-or the redirection operator is
-.B >
-and the
-.B noclobber
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command is not enabled, the redirection is attempted even
-if the file named by \fIword\fP exists.
-.SS Appending Redirected Output
-.PP
-Redirection of output in this fashion
-causes the file whose name results from
-the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for appending on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard output (file descriptor 1) if
-.I n
-is not specified. If the file does not exist it is created.
-.PP
-The general format for appending output is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.SS Redirecting Standard Output and Standard Error
-.PP
-.B Bash
-allows both the
-standard output (file descriptor 1) and
-the standard error output (file descriptor 2)
-to be redirected to the file whose name is the
-expansion of
-.I word
-with this construct.
-.PP
-There are two formats for redirecting standard output and
-standard error:
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB&>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-and
-.RS
-\fB>&\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-Of the two forms, the first is preferred.
-This is semantically equivalent to
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB>\fP\fIword\fP 2\fB>&\fP1
-.RE
-.SS Here Documents
-.PP
-This type of redirection instructs the shell to read input from the
-current source until a line containing only
-.I word
-(with no trailing blanks)
-is seen. All of
-the lines read up to that point are then used as the standard
-input for a command.
-.PP
-The format of here-documents is:
-.RS
-.PP
-.nf
-\fB<<\fP[\fB\-\fP]\fIword\fP
- \fIhere-document\fP
-\fIdelimiter\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-No parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
-or pathname expansion is performed on
-.IR word .
-If any characters in
-.I word
-are quoted, the
-.I delimiter
-is the result of quote removal on
-.IR word ,
-and the lines in the here-document are not expanded.
-If \fIword\fP is unquoted,
-all lines of the here-document are subjected to parameter expansion,
-command substitution, and arithmetic expansion. In the latter
-case, the character sequence
-.B \e<newline>
-is ignored, and
-.B \e
-must be used to quote the characters
-.BR \e ,
-.BR $ ,
-and
-.BR ` .
-.PP
-If the redirection operator is
-.BR <<\- ,
-then all leading tab characters are stripped from input lines and the
-line containing
-.IR delimiter .
-This allows
-here-documents within shell scripts to be indented in a
-natural fashion.
-.SS "Here Strings"
-A variant of here documents, the format is:
-.RS
-.PP
-.nf
-\fB<<<\fP\fIword\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-The \fIword\fP is expanded and supplied to the command on its standard
-input.
-.SS "Duplicating File Descriptors"
-.PP
-The redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<&\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-is used to duplicate input file descriptors.
-If
-.I word
-expands to one or more digits, the file descriptor denoted by
-.I n
-is made to be a copy of that file descriptor.
-If the digits in
-.I word
-do not specify a file descriptor open for input, a redirection error occurs.
-If
-.I word
-evaluates to
-.BR \- ,
-file descriptor
-.I n
-is closed. If
-.I n
-is not specified, the standard input (file descriptor 0) is used.
-.PP
-The operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>&\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-is used similarly to duplicate output file descriptors. If
-.I n
-is not specified, the standard output (file descriptor 1) is used.
-If the digits in
-.I word
-do not specify a file descriptor open for output, a redirection error occurs.
-As a special case, if \fIn\fP is omitted, and \fIword\fP does not
-expand to one or more digits, the standard output and standard
-error are redirected as described previously.
-.SS "Moving File Descriptors"
-.PP
-The redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<&\fP\fIdigit\fP\fB\-\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-moves the file descriptor \fIdigit\fP to file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard input (file descriptor 0) if \fIn\fP is not specified.
-\fIdigit\fP is closed after being duplicated to \fIn\fP.
-.PP
-Similarly, the redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>&\fP\fIdigit\fP\fB\-\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-moves the file descriptor \fIdigit\fP to file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard output (file descriptor 1) if \fIn\fP is not specified.
-.SS "Opening File Descriptors for Reading and Writing"
-.PP
-The redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-causes the file whose name is the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for both reading and writing on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or on file descriptor 0 if
-.I n
-is not specified. If the file does not exist, it is created.
-.SH ALIASES
-\fIAliases\fP allow a string to be substituted for a word when it is used
-as the first word of a simple command.
-The shell maintains a list of aliases that may be set and unset with the
-.B alias
-and
-.B unalias
-builtin commands (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-The first word of each command, if unquoted,
-is checked to see if it has an
-alias. If so, that word is replaced by the text of the alias.
-The alias name and the replacement text may contain any valid
-shell input, including the
-.I metacharacters
-listed above, with the exception that the alias name may not
-contain \fI=\fP. The first word of the replacement text is tested
-for aliases, but a word that is identical to an alias being expanded
-is not expanded a second time. This means that one may alias
-.B ls
-to
-.BR "ls \-F" ,
-for instance, and
-.B bash
-does not try to recursively expand the replacement text.
-If the last character of the alias value is a
-.IR blank ,
-then the next command
-word following the alias is also checked for alias expansion.
-.PP
-Aliases are created and listed with the
-.B alias
-command, and removed with the
-.B unalias
-command.
-.PP
-There is no mechanism for using arguments in the replacement text.
-If arguments are needed, a shell function should be used (see
-.SM
-.B FUNCTIONS
-below).
-.PP
-Aliases are not expanded when the shell is not interactive, unless
-the
-.B expand_aliases
-shell option is set using
-.B shopt
-(see the description of
-.B shopt
-under
-.SM
-\fBSHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS\fP
-below).
-.PP
-The rules concerning the definition and use of aliases are
-somewhat confusing.
-.B Bash
-always reads at least one complete line
-of input before executing any
-of the commands on that line. Aliases are expanded when a
-command is read, not when it is executed. Therefore, an
-alias definition appearing on the same line as another
-command does not take effect until the next line of input is read.
-The commands following the alias definition
-on that line are not affected by the new alias.
-This behavior is also an issue when functions are executed.
-Aliases are expanded when a function definition is read,
-not when the function is executed, because a function definition
-is itself a compound command. As a consequence, aliases
-defined in a function are not available until after that
-function is executed. To be safe, always put
-alias definitions on a separate line, and do not use
-.B alias
-in compound commands.
-.PP
-For almost every purpose, aliases are superseded by
-shell functions.
-.SH FUNCTIONS
-A shell function, defined as described above under
-.SM
-.BR "SHELL GRAMMAR" ,
-stores a series of commands for later execution.
-When the name of a shell function is used as a simple command name,
-the list of commands associated with that function name is executed.
-Functions are executed in the context of the
-current shell; no new process is created to interpret
-them (contrast this with the execution of a shell script).
-When a function is executed, the arguments to the
-function become the positional parameters
-during its execution.
-The special parameter
-.B #
-is updated to reflect the change. Positional parameter 0
-is unchanged.
-The
-.SM
-.B FUNCNAME
-variable is set to the name of the function while the function
-is executing.
-All other aspects of the shell execution
-environment are identical between a function and its caller
-with the exception that the
-.SM
-.B DEBUG
-trap (see the description of the
-.B trap
-builtin under
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below) is not inherited unless the function has been given the
-\fBtrace\fP attribute (see the description of the
-.SM
-.B declare
-builtin below).
-.PP
-Variables local to the function may be declared with the
-.B local
-builtin command. Ordinarily, variables and their values
-are shared between the function and its caller.
-.PP
-If the builtin command
-.B return
-is executed in a function, the function completes and
-execution resumes with the next command after the function
-call. When a function completes, the values of the
-positional parameters and the special parameter
-.B #
-are restored to the values they had prior to the function's
-execution.
-.PP
-Function names and definitions may be listed with the
-.B \-f
-option to the
-.B declare
-or
-.B typeset
-builtin commands. The
-.B \-F
-option to
-.B declare
-or
-.B typeset
-will list the function names only.
-Functions may be exported so that subshells
-automatically have them defined with the
-.B \-f
-option to the
-.B export
-builtin.
-.PP
-Functions may be recursive. No limit is imposed on the number
-of recursive calls.
-.SH "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION"
-The shell allows arithmetic expressions to be evaluated, under
-certain circumstances (see the \fBlet\fP builtin command and
-\fBArithmetic Expansion\fP).
-Evaluation is done in fixed-width integers with no check for overflow,
-though division by 0 is trapped and flagged as an error.
-The operators and their precedence and associativity are the same
-as in the C language.
-The following list of operators is grouped into levels of
-equal-precedence operators.
-The levels are listed in order of decreasing precedence.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \fIid\fP++ \fIid\fP\-\-
-variable post-increment and post-decrement
-.TP
-.B ++\fIid\fP \-\-\fIid\fP
-variable pre-increment and pre-decrement
-.TP
-.B \- +
-unary minus and plus
-.TP
-.B ! ~
-logical and bitwise negation
-.TP
-.B **
-exponentiation
-.TP
-.B * / %
-multiplication, division, remainder
-.TP
-.B + \-
-addition, subtraction
-.TP
-.B << >>
-left and right bitwise shifts
-.TP
-.B <= >= < >
-comparison
-.TP
-.B == !=
-equality and inequality
-.TP
-.B &
-bitwise AND
-.TP
-.B ^
-bitwise exclusive OR
-.TP
-.B |
-bitwise OR
-.TP
-.B &&
-logical AND
-.TP
-.B ||
-logical OR
-.TP
-.B \fIexpr\fP?\fIexpr\fP:\fIexpr\fP
-conditional evaluation
-.TP
-.B = *= /= %= += \-= <<= >>= &= ^= |=
-assignment
-.TP
-.B \fIexpr1\fP , \fIexpr2\fP
-comma
-.PD
-.PP
-Shell variables are allowed as operands; parameter expansion is
-performed before the expression is evaluated.
-Within an expression, shell variables may also be referenced by name
-without using the parameter expansion syntax.
-The value of a variable is evaluated as an arithmetic expression
-when it is referenced.
-A shell variable need not have its integer attribute
-turned on to be used in an expression.
-.PP
-Constants with a leading 0 are interpreted as octal numbers.
-A leading 0x or 0X denotes hexadecimal.
-Otherwise, numbers take the form [\fIbase#\fP]n, where \fIbase\fP
-is a decimal number between 2 and 64 representing the arithmetic
-base, and \fIn\fP is a number in that base.
-If \fIbase#\fP is omitted, then base 10 is used.
-The digits greater than 9 are represented by the lowercase letters,
-the uppercase letters, @, and _, in that order.
-If \fIbase\fP is less than or equal to 36, lowercase and uppercase
-letters may be used interchangably to represent numbers between 10
-and 35.
-.PP
-Operators are evaluated in order of precedence. Sub-expressions in
-parentheses are evaluated first and may override the precedence
-rules above.
-.SH "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS"
-Conditional expressions are used by the \fB[[\fP compound command and
-the \fBtest\fP and \fB[\fP builtin commands to test file attributes
-and perform string and arithmetic comparisons.
-Expressions are formed from the following unary or binary primaries.
-If any \fIfile\fP argument to one of the primaries is of the form
-\fI/dev/fd/n\fP, then file descriptor \fIn\fP is checked.
-If the \fIfile\fP argument to one of the primaries is one of
-\fI/dev/stdin\fP, \fI/dev/stdout\fP, or \fI/dev/stderr\fP, file
-descriptor 0, 1, or 2, respectively, is checked.
-.sp 1
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists.
-.TP
-.B \-b \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a block special file.
-.TP
-.B \-c \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a character special file.
-.TP
-.B \-d \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a directory.
-.TP
-.B \-e \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists.
-.TP
-.B \-f \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a regular file.
-.TP
-.B \-g \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is set-group-id.
-.TP
-.B \-h \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a symbolic link.
-.TP
-.B \-k \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and its ``sticky'' bit is set.
-.TP
-.B \-p \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a named pipe (FIFO).
-.TP
-.B \-r \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is readable.
-.TP
-.B \-s \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and has a size greater than zero.
-.TP
-.B \-t \fIfd\fP
-True if file descriptor
-.I fd
-is open and refers to a terminal.
-.TP
-.B \-u \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and its set-user-id bit is set.
-.TP
-.B \-w \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is writable.
-.TP
-.B \-x \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is executable.
-.TP
-.B \-O \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is owned by the effective user id.
-.TP
-.B \-G \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is owned by the effective group id.
-.TP
-.B \-L \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a symbolic link.
-.TP
-.B \-S \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a socket.
-.TP
-.B \-N \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and has been modified since it was last read.
-.TP
-\fIfile1\fP \-\fBnt\fP \fIfile2\fP
-True if \fIfile1\fP is newer (according to modification date) than \fIfile2\fP,
-or if \fIfile1\fP exists and \fPfile2\fP does not.
-.TP
-\fIfile1\fP \-\fBot\fP \fIfile2\fP
-True if \fIfile1\fP is older than \fIfile2\fP, or if \fIfile2\fP exists
-and \fIfile1\fP does not.
-.TP
-\fIfile1\fP \fB\-ef\fP \fIfile2\fP
-True if \fIfile1\fP and \fIfile2\fP refer to the same device and
-inode numbers.
-.TP
-.B \-o \fIoptname\fP
-True if shell option
-.I optname
-is enabled.
-See the list of options under the description of the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin below.
-.TP
-.B \-z \fIstring\fP
-True if the length of \fIstring\fP is zero.
-.TP
-.B \-n \fIstring\fP
-.TP
-\fIstring\fP
-True if the length of
-.I string
-is non-zero.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB==\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if the strings are equal. \fB=\fP may be used in place of
-\fB==\fP for strict POSIX compliance.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB!=\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if the strings are not equal.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB<\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if \fIstring1\fP sorts before \fIstring2\fP lexicographically
-in the current locale.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB>\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if \fIstring1\fP sorts after \fIstring2\fP lexicographically
-in the current locale.
-.TP
-.I \fIarg1\fP \fBOP\fP \fIarg2\fP
-.SM
-.B OP
-is one of
-.BR \-eq ,
-.BR \-ne ,
-.BR \-lt ,
-.BR \-le ,
-.BR \-gt ,
-or
-.BR \-ge .
-These arithmetic binary operators return true if \fIarg1\fP
-is equal to, not equal to, less than, less than or equal to,
-greater than, or greater than or equal to \fIarg2\fP, respectively.
-.I Arg1
-and
-.I arg2
-may be positive or negative integers.
-.PD
-.SH "SIMPLE COMMAND EXPANSION"
-When a simple command is executed, the shell performs the following
-expansions, assignments, and redirections, from left to right.
-.IP 1.
-The words that the parser has marked as variable assignments (those
-preceding the command name) and redirections are saved for later
-processing.
-.IP 2.
-The words that are not variable assignments or redirections are
-expanded. If any words remain after expansion, the first word
-is taken to be the name of the command and the remaining words are
-the arguments.
-.IP 3.
-Redirections are performed as described above under
-.SM
-.BR REDIRECTION .
-.IP 4.
-The text after the \fB=\fP in each variable assignment undergoes tilde
-expansion, parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
-and quote removal before being assigned to the variable.
-.PP
-If no command name results, the variable assignments affect the current
-shell environment. Otherwise, the variables are added to the environment
-of the executed command and do not affect the current shell environment.
-If any of the assignments attempts to assign a value to a readonly variable,
-an error occurs, and the command exits with a non-zero status.
-.PP
-If no command name results, redirections are performed, but do not
-affect the current shell environment. A redirection error causes the
-command to exit with a non-zero status.
-.PP
-If there is a command name left after expansion, execution proceeds as
-described below. Otherwise, the command exits. If one of the expansions
-contained a command substitution, the exit status of the command is
-the exit status of the last command substitution performed. If there
-were no command substitutions, the command exits with a status of zero.
-.SH "COMMAND EXECUTION"
-After a command has been split into words, if it results in a
-simple command and an optional list of arguments, the following
-actions are taken.
-.PP
-If the command name contains no slashes, the shell attempts to
-locate it. If there exists a shell function by that name, that
-function is invoked as described above in
-.SM
-.BR FUNCTIONS .
-If the name does not match a function, the shell searches for
-it in the list of shell builtins. If a match is found, that
-builtin is invoked.
-.PP
-If the name is neither a shell function nor a builtin,
-and contains no slashes,
-.B bash
-searches each element of the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-for a directory containing an executable file by that name.
-.B Bash
-uses a hash table to remember the full pathnames of executable
-files (see
-.B hash
-under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below).
-A full search of the directories in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-is performed only if the command is not found in the hash table.
-If the search is unsuccessful, the shell prints an error
-message and returns an exit status of 127.
-.PP
-If the search is successful, or if the command name contains
-one or more slashes, the shell executes the named program in a
-separate execution environment.
-Argument 0 is set to the name given, and the remaining arguments
-to the command are set to the arguments given, if any.
-.PP
-If this execution fails because the file is not in executable
-format, and the file is not a directory, it is assumed to be
-a \fIshell script\fP, a file
-containing shell commands. A subshell is spawned to execute
-it. This subshell reinitializes itself, so
-that the effect is as if a new shell had been invoked
-to handle the script, with the exception that the locations of
-commands remembered by the parent (see
-.B hash
-below under
-.SM
-\fBSHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS\fP)
-are retained by the child.
-.PP
-If the program is a file beginning with
-.BR #! ,
-the remainder of the first line specifies an interpreter
-for the program. The shell executes the
-specified interpreter on operating systems that do not
-handle this executable format themselves. The arguments to the
-interpreter consist of a single optional argument following the
-interpreter name on the first line of the program, followed
-by the name of the program, followed by the command
-arguments, if any.
-.SH COMMAND EXECUTION ENVIRONMENT
-The shell has an \fIexecution environment\fP, which consists of the
-following:
-.sp 1
-.IP \(bu
-open files inherited by the shell at invocation, as modified by
-redirections supplied to the \fBexec\fP builtin
-.IP \(bu
-the current working directory as set by \fBcd\fP, \fBpushd\fP, or
-\fBpopd\fP, or inherited by the shell at invocation
-.IP \(bu
-the file creation mode mask as set by \fBumask\fP or inherited from
-the shell's parent
-.IP \(bu
-current traps set by \fBtrap\fP
-.IP \(bu
-shell parameters that are set by variable assignment or with \fBset\fP
-or inherited from the shell's parent in the environment
-.IP \(bu
-shell functions defined during execution or inherited from the shell's
-parent in the environment
-.IP \(bu
-options enabled at invocation (either by default or with command-line
-arguments) or by \fBset\fP
-.IP \(bu
-options enabled by \fBshopt\fP
-.IP \(bu
-shell aliases defined with \fBalias\fP
-.IP \(bu
-various process IDs, including those of background jobs, the value
-of \fB$$\fP, and the value of \fB$PPID\fP
-.PP
-When a simple command other than a builtin or shell function
-is to be executed, it
-is invoked in a separate execution environment that consists of
-the following. Unless otherwise noted, the values are inherited
-from the shell.
-.sp 1
-.IP \(bu
-the shell's open files, plus any modifications and additions specified
-by redirections to the command
-.IP \(bu
-the current working directory
-.IP \(bu
-the file creation mode mask
-.IP \(bu
-shell variables marked for export, along with variables exported for
-the command, passed in the environment
-.IP \(bu
-traps caught by the shell are reset to the values the inherited
-from the shell's parent, and traps ignored by the shell are ignored
-.PP
-A command invoked in this separate environment cannot affect the
-shell's execution environment.
-.PP
-Command substitution and asynchronous commands are invoked in a
-subshell environment that is a duplicate of the shell environment,
-except that traps caught by the shell are reset to the values
-that the shell inherited from its parent at invocation. Builtin
-commands that are invoked as part of a pipeline are also executed in a
-subshell environment. Changes made to the subshell environment
-cannot affect the shell's execution environment.
-.PP
-If a command is followed by a \fB&\fP and job control is not active, the
-default standard input for the command is the empty file \fI/dev/null\fP.
-Otherwise, the invoked command inherits the file descriptors of the calling
-shell as modified by redirections.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-When a program is invoked it is given an array of strings
-called the
-.IR environment .
-This is a list of
-\fIname\fP\-\fIvalue\fP pairs, of the form
-.IR "name\fR=\fPvalue" .
-.PP
-The shell provides several ways to manipulate the environment.
-On invocation, the shell scans its own environment and
-creates a parameter for each name found, automatically marking
-it for
-.I export
-to child processes. Executed commands inherit the environment.
-The
-.B export
-and
-.B declare \-x
-commands allow parameters and functions to be added to and
-deleted from the environment. If the value of a parameter
-in the environment is modified, the new value becomes part
-of the environment, replacing the old. The environment
-inherited by any executed command consists of the shell's
-initial environment, whose values may be modified in the shell,
-less any pairs removed by the
-.B unset
-command, plus any additions via the
-.B export
-and
-.B declare \-x
-commands.
-.PP
-The environment for any
-.I simple command
-or function may be augmented temporarily by prefixing it with
-parameter assignments, as described above in
-.SM
-.BR PARAMETERS .
-These assignment statements affect only the environment seen
-by that command.
-.PP
-If the
-.B \-k
-option is set (see the
-.B set
-builtin command below), then
-.I all
-parameter assignments are placed in the environment for a command,
-not just those that precede the command name.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-invokes an external command, the variable
-.B _
-is set to the full file name of the command and passed to that
-command in its environment.
-.SH "EXIT STATUS"
-For the shell's purposes, a command which exits with a
-zero exit status has succeeded. An exit status of zero
-indicates success. A non-zero exit status indicates failure.
-When a command terminates on a fatal signal \fIN\fP, \fBbash\fP uses
-the value of 128+\fIN\fP as the exit status.
-.PP
-If a command is not found, the child process created to
-execute it returns a status of 127. If a command is found
-but is not executable, the return status is 126.
-.PP
-If a command fails because of an error during expansion or redirection,
-the exit status is greater than zero.
-.PP
-Shell builtin commands return a status of 0 (\fItrue\fP) if
-successful, and non-zero (\fIfalse\fP) if an error occurs
-while they execute.
-All builtins return an exit status of 2 to indicate incorrect usage.
-.PP
-\fBBash\fP itself returns the exit status of the last command
-executed, unless a syntax error occurs, in which case it exits
-with a non-zero value. See also the \fBexit\fP builtin
-command below.
-.SH SIGNALS
-When \fBbash\fP is interactive, in the absence of any traps, it ignores
-.SM
-.B SIGTERM
-(so that \fBkill 0\fP does not kill an interactive shell),
-and
-.SM
-.B SIGINT
-is caught and handled (so that the \fBwait\fP builtin is interruptible).
-In all cases, \fBbash\fP ignores
-.SM
-.BR SIGQUIT .
-If job control is in effect,
-.B bash
-ignores
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTIN ,
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTOU ,
-and
-.SM
-.BR SIGTSTP .
-.PP
-Synchronous jobs started by \fBbash\fP have signal handlers
-set to the values inherited by the shell from its parent.
-When job control is not in effect, asynchronous commands
-ignore
-.SM
-.B SIGINT
-and
-.SM
-.B SIGQUIT
-as well.
-Commands run as a result of command substitution ignore the
-keyboard-generated job control signals
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTIN ,
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTOU ,
-and
-.SM
-.BR SIGTSTP .
-.PP
-The shell exits by default upon receipt of a
-.SM
-.BR SIGHUP .
-Before exiting, an interactive shell resends the
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-to all jobs, running or stopped.
-Stopped jobs are sent
-.SM
-.B SIGCONT
-to ensure that they receive the
-.SM
-.BR SIGHUP .
-To prevent the shell from
-sending the signal to a particular job, it should be removed from the
-jobs table with the
-.B disown
-builtin (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below) or marked
-to not receive
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-using
-.BR "disown \-h" .
-.PP
-If the
-.B huponexit
-shell option has been set with
-.BR shopt ,
-.B bash
-sends a
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-to all jobs when an interactive login shell exits.
-.PP
-When \fBbash\fP receives a signal for which a trap has been set while
-waiting for a command to complete, the trap will not be executed until
-the command completes.
-When \fBbash\fP is waiting for an asynchronous command via the \fBwait\fP
-builtin, the reception of a signal for which a trap has been set will
-cause the \fBwait\fP builtin to return immediately with an exit status
-greater than 128, immediately after which the trap is executed.
-.SH "JOB CONTROL"
-.I Job control
-refers to the ability to selectively stop (\fIsuspend\fP)
-the execution of processes and continue (\fIresume\fP)
-their execution at a later point. A user typically employs
-this facility via an interactive interface supplied jointly
-by the system's terminal driver and
-.BR bash .
-.PP
-The shell associates a
-.I job
-with each pipeline. It keeps a table of currently executing
-jobs, which may be listed with the
-.B jobs
-command. When
-.B bash
-starts a job asynchronously (in the
-.IR background ),
-it prints a line that looks like:
-.RS
-.PP
-[1] 25647
-.RE
-.PP
-indicating that this job is job number 1 and that the process ID
-of the last process in the pipeline associated with this job is 25647.
-All of the processes in a single pipeline are members of the same job.
-.B Bash
-uses the
-.I job
-abstraction as the basis for job control.
-.PP
-To facilitate the implementation of the user interface to job
-control, the operating system maintains the notion of a \fIcurrent terminal
-process group ID\fP. Members of this process group (processes whose
-process group ID is equal to the current terminal process group ID)
-receive keyboard-generated signals such as
-.SM
-.BR SIGINT .
-These processes are said to be in the
-.IR foreground .
-.I Background
-processes are those whose process group ID differs from the terminal's;
-such processes are immune to keyboard-generated signals.
-Only foreground processes are allowed to read from or write to the
-terminal. Background processes which attempt to read from (write to) the
-terminal are sent a
-.SM
-.B SIGTTIN (SIGTTOU)
-signal by the terminal driver,
-which, unless caught, suspends the process.
-.PP
-If the operating system on which
-.B bash
-is running supports
-job control,
-.B bash
-contains facilities to use it.
-Typing the
-.I suspend
-character (typically
-.BR ^Z ,
-Control-Z) while a process is running
-causes that process to be stopped and returns control to
-.BR bash .
-Typing the
-.I "delayed suspend"
-character (typically
-.BR ^Y ,
-Control-Y) causes the process to be stopped when it
-attempts to read input from the terminal, and control to
-be returned to
-.BR bash .
-The user may then manipulate the state of this job, using the
-.B bg
-command to continue it in the background, the
-.B fg
-command to continue it in the foreground, or
-the
-.B kill
-command to kill it. A \fB^Z\fP takes effect immediately,
-and has the additional side effect of causing pending output
-and typeahead to be discarded.
-.PP
-There are a number of ways to refer to a job in the shell.
-The character
-.B %
-introduces a job name. Job number
-.I n
-may be referred to as
-.BR %n .
-A job may also be referred to using a prefix of the name used to
-start it, or using a substring that appears in its command line.
-For example,
-.B %ce
-refers to a stopped
-.B ce
-job. If a prefix matches more than one job,
-.B bash
-reports an error. Using
-.BR %?ce ,
-on the other hand, refers to any job containing the string
-.B ce
-in its command line. If the substring matches more than one job,
-.B bash
-reports an error. The symbols
-.B %%
-and
-.B %+
-refer to the shell's notion of the
-.IR "current job" ,
-which is the last job stopped while it was in
-the foreground or started in the background.
-The
-.I "previous job"
-may be referenced using
-.BR %\- .
-In output pertaining to jobs (e.g., the output of the
-.B jobs
-command), the current job is always flagged with a
-.BR + ,
-and the previous job with a
-.BR \- .
-.PP
-Simply naming a job can be used to bring it into the
-foreground:
-.B %1
-is a synonym for
-\fB``fg %1''\fP,
-bringing job 1 from the background into the foreground.
-Similarly,
-.B ``%1 &''
-resumes job 1 in the background, equivalent to
-\fB``bg %1''\fP.
-.PP
-The shell learns immediately whenever a job changes state.
-Normally,
-.B bash
-waits until it is about to print a prompt before reporting
-changes in a job's status so as to not interrupt
-any other output. If the
-.B \-b
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command
-is enabled,
-.B bash
-reports such changes immediately.
-Any trap on
-.SM
-.B SIGCHLD
-is executed for each child that exits.
-.PP
-If an attempt to exit
-.B bash
-is made while jobs are stopped, the shell prints a warning message. The
-.B jobs
-command may then be used to inspect their status.
-If a second attempt to exit is made without an intervening command,
-the shell does not print another warning, and the stopped
-jobs are terminated.
-.SH PROMPTING
-When executing interactively,
-.B bash
-displays the primary prompt
-.SM
-.B PS1
-when it is ready to read a command, and the secondary prompt
-.SM
-.B PS2
-when it needs more input to complete a command.
-.B Bash
-allows these prompt strings to be customized by inserting a number of
-backslash-escaped special characters that are decoded as follows:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-an ASCII bell character (07)
-.TP
-.B \ed
-the date in "Weekday Month Date" format (e.g., "Tue May 26")
-.TP
-.B \eD{\fIformat\fP}
-the \fIformat\fP is passed to \fIstrftime\fP(3) and the result is inserted
-into the prompt string; an empty \fIformat\fP results in a locale-specific
-time representation. The braces are required
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an ASCII escape character (033)
-.TP
-.B \eh
-the hostname up to the first `.'
-.TP
-.B \eH
-the hostname
-.TP
-.B \ej
-the number of jobs currently managed by the shell
-.TP
-.B \el
-the basename of the shell's terminal device name
-.TP
-.B \en
-newline
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \es
-the name of the shell, the basename of
-.B $0
-(the portion following the final slash)
-.TP
-.B \et
-the current time in 24-hour HH:MM:SS format
-.TP
-.B \eT
-the current time in 12-hour HH:MM:SS format
-.TP
-.B \e@
-the current time in 12-hour am/pm format
-.TP
-.B \eA
-the current time in 24-hour HH:MM format
-.TP
-.B \eu
-the username of the current user
-.TP
-.B \ev
-the version of \fBbash\fP (e.g., 2.00)
-.TP
-.B \eV
-the release of \fBbash\fP, version + patchelvel (e.g., 2.00.0)
-.TP
-.B \ew
-the current working directory
-.TP
-.B \eW
-the basename of the current working directory
-.TP
-.B \e!
-the history number of this command
-.TP
-.B \e#
-the command number of this command
-.TP
-.B \e$
-if the effective UID is 0, a
-.BR # ,
-otherwise a
-.B $
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the character corresponding to the octal number \fInnn\fP
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-a backslash
-.TP
-.B \e[
-begin a sequence of non-printing characters, which could be used to
-embed a terminal control sequence into the prompt
-.TP
-.B \e]
-end a sequence of non-printing characters
-.PD
-.RE
-.PP
-The command number and the history number are usually different:
-the history number of a command is its position in the history
-list, which may include commands restored from the history file
-(see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below), while the command number is the position in the sequence
-of commands executed during the current shell session.
-After the string is decoded, it is expanded via
-parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic
-expansion, and quote removal, subject to the value of the
-.B promptvars
-shell option (see the description of the
-.B shopt
-command under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below).
-.SH READLINE
-This is the library that handles reading input when using an interactive
-shell, unless the
-.B \-\-noediting
-option is given at shell invocation.
-By default, the line editing commands are similar to those of emacs.
-A vi-style line editing interface is also available.
-To turn off line editing after the shell is running, use the
-.B +o emacs
-or
-.B +o vi
-options to the
-.B set
-builtin (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SS "Readline Notation"
-.PP
-In this section, the emacs-style notation is used to denote
-keystrokes. Control keys are denoted by C\-\fIkey\fR, e.g., C\-n
-means Control\-N. Similarly,
-.I meta
-keys are denoted by M\-\fIkey\fR, so M\-x means Meta\-X. (On keyboards
-without a
-.I meta
-key, M\-\fIx\fP means ESC \fIx\fP, i.e., press the Escape key
-then the
-.I x
-key. This makes ESC the \fImeta prefix\fP.
-The combination M\-C\-\fIx\fP means ESC\-Control\-\fIx\fP,
-or press the Escape key
-then hold the Control key while pressing the
-.I x
-key.)
-.PP
-Readline commands may be given numeric
-.IR arguments ,
-which normally act as a repeat count.
-Sometimes, however, it is the sign of the argument that is significant.
-Passing a negative argument to a command that acts in the forward
-direction (e.g., \fBkill\-line\fP) causes that command to act in a
-backward direction.
-Commands whose behavior with arguments deviates from this are noted
-below.
-.PP
-When a command is described as \fIkilling\fP text, the text
-deleted is saved for possible future retrieval
-(\fIyanking\fP). The killed text is saved in a
-\fIkill ring\fP. Consecutive kills cause the text to be
-accumulated into one unit, which can be yanked all at once.
-Commands which do not kill text separate the chunks of text
-on the kill ring.
-.SS "Readline Initialization"
-.PP
-Readline is customized by putting commands in an initialization
-file (the \fIinputrc\fP file).
-The name of this file is taken from the value of the
-.SM
-.B INPUTRC
-variable. If that variable is unset, the default is
-.IR ~/.inputrc .
-When a program which uses the readline library starts up, the
-initialization file is read, and the key bindings and variables
-are set.
-There are only a few basic constructs allowed in the
-readline initialization file.
-Blank lines are ignored.
-Lines beginning with a \fB#\fP are comments.
-Lines beginning with a \fB$\fP indicate conditional constructs.
-Other lines denote key bindings and variable settings.
-.PP
-The default key-bindings may be changed with an
-.I inputrc
-file.
-Other programs that use this library may add their own commands
-and bindings.
-.PP
-For example, placing
-.RS
-.PP
-M\-Control\-u: universal\-argument
-.RE
-or
-.RS
-C\-Meta\-u: universal\-argument
-.RE
-into the
-.I inputrc
-would make M\-C\-u execute the readline command
-.IR universal\-argument .
-.PP
-The following symbolic character names are recognized:
-.IR RUBOUT ,
-.IR DEL ,
-.IR ESC ,
-.IR LFD ,
-.IR NEWLINE ,
-.IR RET ,
-.IR RETURN ,
-.IR SPC ,
-.IR SPACE ,
-and
-.IR TAB .
-.PP
-In addition to command names, readline allows keys to be bound
-to a string that is inserted when the key is pressed (a \fImacro\fP).
-.SS "Readline Key Bindings"
-.PP
-The syntax for controlling key bindings in the
-.I inputrc
-file is simple. All that is required is the name of the
-command or the text of a macro and a key sequence to which
-it should be bound. The name may be specified in one of two ways:
-as a symbolic key name, possibly with \fIMeta\-\fP or \fIControl\-\fP
-prefixes, or as a key sequence.
-.PP
-When using the form \fBkeyname\fP:\^\fIfunction\-name\fP or \fImacro\fP,
-.I keyname
-is the name of a key spelled out in English. For example:
-.sp
-.RS
-Control-u: universal\-argument
-.br
-Meta-Rubout: backward-kill-word
-.br
-Control-o: "> output"
-.RE
-.LP
-In the above example,
-.I C\-u
-is bound to the function
-.BR universal\-argument ,
-.I M\-DEL
-is bound to the function
-.BR backward\-kill\-word ,
-and
-.I C\-o
-is bound to run the macro
-expressed on the right hand side (that is, to insert the text
-.if t \f(CW> output\fP
-.if n ``> output''
-into the line).
-.PP
-In the second form, \fB"keyseq"\fP:\^\fIfunction\-name\fP or \fImacro\fP,
-.B keyseq
-differs from
-.B keyname
-above in that strings denoting
-an entire key sequence may be specified by placing the sequence
-within double quotes. Some GNU Emacs style key escapes can be
-used, as in the following example, but the symbolic character names
-are not recognized.
-.sp
-.RS
-"\eC\-u": universal\-argument
-.br
-"\eC\-x\eC\-r": re\-read\-init\-file
-.br
-"\ee[11~": "Function Key 1"
-.RE
-.PP
-In this example,
-.I C\-u
-is again bound to the function
-.BR universal\-argument .
-.I "C\-x C\-r"
-is bound to the function
-.BR re\-read\-init\-file ,
-and
-.I "ESC [ 1 1 ~"
-is bound to insert the text
-.if t \f(CWFunction Key 1\fP.
-.if n ``Function Key 1''.
-.PP
-The full set of GNU Emacs style escape sequences is
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \eC\-
-control prefix
-.TP
-.B \eM\-
-meta prefix
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an escape character
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-.B \e"
-literal "
-.TP
-.B \e'
-literal '
-.RE
-.PD
-.PP
-In addition to the GNU Emacs style escape sequences, a second
-set of backslash escapes is available:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-alert (bell)
-.TP
-.B \eb
-backspace
-.TP
-.B \ed
-delete
-.TP
-.B \ef
-form feed
-.TP
-.B \en
-newline
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-.B \ev
-vertical tab
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(one to three digits)
-.TP
-.B \ex\fIHH\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP
-(one or two hex digits)
-.RE
-.PD
-.PP
-When entering the text of a macro, single or double quotes must
-be used to indicate a macro definition.
-Unquoted text is assumed to be a function name.
-In the macro body, the backslash escapes described above are expanded.
-Backslash will quote any other character in the macro text,
-including " and '.
-.PP
-.B Bash
-allows the current readline key bindings to be displayed or modified
-with the
-.B bind
-builtin command. The editing mode may be switched during interactive
-use by using the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SS "Readline Variables"
-.PP
-Readline has variables that can be used to further customize its
-behavior. A variable may be set in the
-.I inputrc
-file with a statement of the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fBset\fP \fIvariable\-name\fP \fIvalue\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-Except where noted, readline variables can take the values
-.B On
-or
-.BR Off .
-The variables and their default values are:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B bell\-style (audible)
-Controls what happens when readline wants to ring the terminal bell.
-If set to \fBnone\fP, readline never rings the bell. If set to
-\fBvisible\fP, readline uses a visible bell if one is available.
-If set to \fBaudible\fP, readline attempts to ring the terminal's bell.
-.TP
-.B comment\-begin (``#'')
-The string that is inserted when the readline
-.B insert\-comment
-command is executed.
-This command is bound to
-.B M\-#
-in emacs mode and to
-.B #
-in vi command mode.
-.TP
-.B completion\-ignore\-case (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline performs filename matching and completion
-in a case\-insensitive fashion.
-.TP
-.B completion\-query\-items (100)
-This determines when the user is queried about viewing
-the number of possible completions
-generated by the \fBpossible\-completions\fP command.
-It may be set to any integer value greater than or equal to
-zero. If the number of possible completions is greater than
-or equal to the value of this variable, the user is asked whether
-or not he wishes to view them; otherwise they are simply listed
-on the terminal.
-.TP
-.B convert\-meta (On)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will convert characters with the
-eighth bit set to an ASCII key sequence
-by stripping the eighth bit and prefixing an
-escape character (in effect, using escape as the \fImeta prefix\fP).
-.TP
-.B disable\-completion (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will inhibit word completion. Completion
-characters will be inserted into the line as if they had been
-mapped to \fBself-insert\fP.
-.TP
-.B editing\-mode (emacs)
-Controls whether readline begins with a set of key bindings similar
-to \fIemacs\fP or \fIvi\fP.
-.B editing\-mode
-can be set to either
-.B emacs
-or
-.BR vi .
-.TP
-.B enable\-keypad (Off)
-When set to \fBOn\fP, readline will try to enable the application
-keypad when it is called. Some systems need this to enable the
-arrow keys.
-.TP
-.B expand\-tilde (Off)
-If set to \fBon\fP, tilde expansion is performed when readline
-attempts word completion.
-.TP
-.B history-preserve-point
-If set to \fBon\fP, the history code attempts to place point at the
-same location on each history line retrived with \fBprevious-history\fP
-or \fBnext-history\fP.
-.TP
-.B horizontal\-scroll\-mode (Off)
-When set to \fBOn\fP, makes readline use a single line for display,
-scrolling the input horizontally on a single screen line when it
-becomes longer than the screen width rather than wrapping to a new line.
-.TP
-.B input\-meta (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will enable eight-bit input (that is,
-it will not strip the high bit from the characters it reads),
-regardless of what the terminal claims it can support. The name
-.B meta\-flag
-is a synonym for this variable.
-.TP
-.B isearch\-terminators (``C\-[C\-J'')
-The string of characters that should terminate an incremental
-search without subsequently executing the character as a command.
-If this variable has not been given a value, the characters
-\fIESC\fP and \fIC\-J\fP will terminate an incremental search.
-.TP
-.B keymap (emacs)
-Set the current readline keymap. The set of valid keymap names is
-\fIemacs, emacs\-standard, emacs\-meta, emacs\-ctlx, vi,
-vi\-command\fP, and
-.IR vi\-insert .
-\fIvi\fP is equivalent to \fIvi\-command\fP; \fIemacs\fP is
-equivalent to \fIemacs\-standard\fP. The default value is
-.IR emacs ;
-the value of
-.B editing\-mode
-also affects the default keymap.
-.TP
-.B mark\-directories (On)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, completed directory names have a slash
-appended.
-.TP
-.B mark\-modified\-lines (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, history lines that have been modified are displayed
-with a preceding asterisk (\fB*\fP).
-.TP
-.B mark\-symlinked\-directories (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, completed names which are symbolic links to directories
-have a slash appended (subject to the value of
-\fBmark\-directories\fP).
-.TP
-.B match\-hidden\-files (On)
-This variable, when set to \fBOn\fP, causes readline to match files whose
-names begin with a `.' (hidden files) when performing filename
-completion, unless the leading `.' is
-supplied by the user in the filename to be completed.
-.TP
-.B output\-meta (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display characters with the
-eighth bit set directly rather than as a meta-prefixed escape
-sequence.
-.TP
-.B page\-completions (On)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline uses an internal \fImore\fP-like pager
-to display a screenful of possible completions at a time.
-.TP
-.B print\-completions\-horizontally (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display completions with matches
-sorted horizontally in alphabetical order, rather than down the screen.
-.TP
-.B show\-all\-if\-ambiguous (Off)
-This alters the default behavior of the completion functions. If
-set to
-.BR on ,
-words which have more than one possible completion cause the
-matches to be listed immediately instead of ringing the bell.
-.TP
-.B visible\-stats (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, a character denoting a file's type as reported
-by \fIstat\fP(2) is appended to the filename when listing possible
-completions.
-.PD
-.SS "Readline Conditional Constructs"
-.PP
-Readline implements a facility similar in spirit to the conditional
-compilation features of the C preprocessor which allows key
-bindings and variable settings to be performed as the result
-of tests. There are four parser directives used.
-.IP \fB$if\fP
-The
-.B $if
-construct allows bindings to be made based on the
-editing mode, the terminal being used, or the application using
-readline. The text of the test extends to the end of the line;
-no characters are required to isolate it.
-.RS
-.IP \fBmode\fP
-The \fBmode=\fP form of the \fB$if\fP directive is used to test
-whether readline is in emacs or vi mode.
-This may be used in conjunction
-with the \fBset keymap\fP command, for instance, to set bindings in
-the \fIemacs\-standard\fP and \fIemacs\-ctlx\fP keymaps only if
-readline is starting out in emacs mode.
-.IP \fBterm\fP
-The \fBterm=\fP form may be used to include terminal-specific
-key bindings, perhaps to bind the key sequences output by the
-terminal's function keys. The word on the right side of the
-.B =
-is tested against the both full name of the terminal and the portion
-of the terminal name before the first \fB\-\fP. This allows
-.I sun
-to match both
-.I sun
-and
-.IR sun\-cmd ,
-for instance.
-.IP \fBapplication\fP
-The \fBapplication\fP construct is used to include
-application-specific settings. Each program using the readline
-library sets the \fIapplication name\fP, and an initialization
-file can test for a particular value.
-This could be used to bind key sequences to functions useful for
-a specific program. For instance, the following command adds a
-key sequence that quotes the current or previous word in Bash:
-.sp 1
-.RS
-.nf
-\fB$if\fP Bash
-# Quote the current or previous word
-"\eC\-xq": "\eeb\e"\eef\e""
-\fB$endif\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.RE
-.IP \fB$endif\fP
-This command, as seen in the previous example, terminates an
-\fB$if\fP command.
-.IP \fB$else\fP
-Commands in this branch of the \fB$if\fP directive are executed if
-the test fails.
-.IP \fB$include\fP
-This directive takes a single filename as an argument and reads commands
-and bindings from that file. For example, the following directive
-would read \fI/etc/inputrc\fP:
-.sp 1
-.RS
-.nf
-\fB$include\fP \^ \fI/etc/inputrc\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.SS Searching
-.PP
-Readline provides commands for searching through the command history
-(see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below) for lines containing a specified string.
-There are two search modes:
-.I incremental
-and
-.IR non-incremental .
-.PP
-Incremental searches begin before the user has finished typing the
-search string.
-As each character of the search string is typed, readline displays
-the next entry from the history matching the string typed so far.
-An incremental search requires only as many characters as needed to
-find the desired history entry.
-The characters present in the value of the \fBisearch-terminators\fP
-variable are used to terminate an incremental search.
-If that variable has not been assigned a value the Escape and
-Control-J characters will terminate an incremental search.
-Control-G will abort an incremental search and restore the original
-line.
-When the search is terminated, the history entry containing the
-search string becomes the current line.
-.PP
-To find other matching entries in the history list, type Control-S or
-Control-R as appropriate.
-This will search backward or forward in the history for the next
-entry matching the search string typed so far.
-Any other key sequence bound to a readline command will terminate
-the search and execute that command.
-For instance, a \fInewline\fP will terminate the search and accept
-the line, thereby executing the command from the history list.
-.PP
-Readline remembers the last incremental search string. If two
-Control-Rs are typed without any intervening characters defining a
-new search string, any remembered search string is used.
-.PP
-Non-incremental searches read the entire search string before starting
-to search for matching history lines. The search string may be
-typed by the user or be part of the contents of the current line.
-.SS "Readline Command Names"
-.PP
-The following is a list of the names of the commands and the default
-key sequences to which they are bound.
-Command names without an accompanying key sequence are unbound by default.
-In the following descriptions, \fIpoint\fP refers to the current cursor
-position, and \fImark\fP refers to a cursor position saved by the
-\fBset\-mark\fP command.
-The text between the point and mark is referred to as the \fIregion\fP.
-.SS Commands for Moving
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B beginning\-of\-line (C\-a)
-Move to the start of the current line.
-.TP
-.B end\-of\-line (C\-e)
-Move to the end of the line.
-.TP
-.B forward\-char (C\-f)
-Move forward a character.
-.TP
-.B backward\-char (C\-b)
-Move back a character.
-.TP
-.B forward\-word (M\-f)
-Move forward to the end of the next word. Words are composed of
-alphanumeric characters (letters and digits).
-.TP
-.B backward\-word (M\-b)
-Move back to the start of the current or previous word. Words are
-composed of alphanumeric characters (letters and digits).
-.TP
-.B clear\-screen (C\-l)
-Clear the screen leaving the current line at the top of the screen.
-With an argument, refresh the current line without clearing the
-screen.
-.TP
-.B redraw\-current\-line
-Refresh the current line.
-.PD
-.SS Commands for Manipulating the History
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B accept\-line (Newline, Return)
-Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is. If this line is
-non-empty, add it to the history list according to the state of the
-.SM
-.B HISTCONTROL
-variable. If the line is a modified history
-line, then restore the history line to its original state.
-.TP
-.B previous\-history (C\-p)
-Fetch the previous command from the history list, moving back in
-the list.
-.TP
-.B next\-history (C\-n)
-Fetch the next command from the history list, moving forward in the
-list.
-.TP
-.B beginning\-of\-history (M\-<)
-Move to the first line in the history.
-.TP
-.B end\-of\-history (M\->)
-Move to the end of the input history, i.e., the line currently being
-entered.
-.TP
-.B reverse\-search\-history (C\-r)
-Search backward starting at the current line and moving `up' through
-the history as necessary. This is an incremental search.
-.TP
-.B forward\-search\-history (C\-s)
-Search forward starting at the current line and moving `down' through
-the history as necessary. This is an incremental search.
-.TP
-.B non\-incremental\-reverse\-search\-history (M\-p)
-Search backward through the history starting at the current line
-using a non-incremental search for a string supplied by the user.
-.TP
-.B non\-incremental\-forward\-search\-history (M\-n)
-Search forward through the history using a non-incremental search for
-a string supplied by the user.
-.TP
-.B history\-search\-forward
-Search forward through the history for the string of characters
-between the start of the current line and the point.
-This is a non-incremental search.
-.TP
-.B history\-search\-backward
-Search backward through the history for the string of characters
-between the start of the current line and the point.
-This is a non-incremental search.
-.TP
-.B yank\-nth\-arg (M\-C\-y)
-Insert the first argument to the previous command (usually
-the second word on the previous line) at point.
-With an argument
-.IR n ,
-insert the \fIn\fPth word from the previous command (the words
-in the previous command begin with word 0). A negative argument
-inserts the \fIn\fPth word from the end of the previous command.
-.TP
-.B
-yank\-last\-arg (M\-.\^, M\-_\^)
-Insert the last argument to the previous command (the last word of
-the previous history entry). With an argument,
-behave exactly like \fByank\-nth\-arg\fP.
-Successive calls to \fByank\-last\-arg\fP move back through the history
-list, inserting the last argument of each line in turn.
-.TP
-.B shell\-expand\-line (M\-C\-e)
-Expand the line as the shell does. This
-performs alias and history expansion as well as all of the shell
-word expansions. See
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below for a description of history expansion.
-.TP
-.B history\-expand\-line (M\-^)
-Perform history expansion on the current line.
-See
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below for a description of history expansion.
-.TP
-.B magic\-space
-Perform history expansion on the current line and insert a space.
-See
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below for a description of history expansion.
-.TP
-.B alias\-expand\-line
-Perform alias expansion on the current line.
-See
-.SM
-.B ALIASES
-above for a description of alias expansion.
-.TP
-.B history\-and\-alias\-expand\-line
-Perform history and alias expansion on the current line.
-.TP
-.B insert\-last\-argument (M\-.\^, M\-_\^)
-A synonym for \fByank\-last\-arg\fP.
-.TP
-.B operate\-and\-get\-next (C\-o)
-Accept the current line for execution and fetch the next line
-relative to the current line from the history for editing. Any
-argument is ignored.
-.TP
-.B edit\-and\-execute\-command (C\-xC\-e)
-Invoke an editor on the current command line, and execute the result as shell
-commands.
-\fBBash\fP attempts to invoke
-.SM
-.BR $FCEDIT ,
-.SM
-.BR $EDITOR ,
-and \fIemacs\fP as the editor, in that order.
-.PD
-.SS Commands for Changing Text
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B delete\-char (C\-d)
-Delete the character at point. If point is at the
-beginning of the line, there are no characters in the line, and
-the last character typed was not bound to \fBdelete\-char\fP,
-then return
-.SM
-.BR EOF .
-.TP
-.B backward\-delete\-char (Rubout)
-Delete the character behind the cursor. When given a numeric argument,
-save the deleted text on the kill ring.
-.TP
-.B forward\-backward\-delete\-char
-Delete the character under the cursor, unless the cursor is at the
-end of the line, in which case the character behind the cursor is
-deleted.
-.TP
-.B quoted\-insert (C\-q, C\-v)
-Add the next character typed to the line verbatim. This is
-how to insert characters like \fBC\-q\fP, for example.
-.TP
-.B tab\-insert (C\-v TAB)
-Insert a tab character.
-.TP
-.B self\-insert (a,\ b,\ A,\ 1,\ !,\ ...)
-Insert the character typed.
-.TP
-.B transpose\-chars (C\-t)
-Drag the character before point forward over the character at point,
-moving point forward as well.
-If point is at the end of the line, then this transposes
-the two characters before point.
-Negative arguments have no effect.
-.TP
-.B transpose\-words (M\-t)
-Drag the word before point past the word after point,
-moving point over that word as well.
-If point is at the end of the line, this transposes
-the last two words on the line.
-.TP
-.B upcase\-word (M\-u)
-Uppercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument,
-uppercase the previous word, but do not move point.
-.TP
-.B downcase\-word (M\-l)
-Lowercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument,
-lowercase the previous word, but do not move point.
-.TP
-.B capitalize\-word (M\-c)
-Capitalize the current (or following) word. With a negative argument,
-capitalize the previous word, but do not move point.
-.TP
-.B overwrite\-mode
-Toggle overwrite mode. With an explicit positive numeric argument,
-switches to overwrite mode. With an explicit non-positive numeric
-argument, switches to insert mode. This command affects only
-\fBemacs\fP mode; \fBvi\fP mode does overwrite differently.
-Each call to \fIreadline()\fP starts in insert mode.
-In overwrite mode, characters bound to \fBself\-insert\fP replace
-the text at point rather than pushing the text to the right.
-Characters bound to \fBbackward\-delete\-char\fP replace the character
-before point with a space. By default, this command is unbound.
-.PD
-.SS Killing and Yanking
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B kill\-line (C\-k)
-Kill the text from point to the end of the line.
-.TP
-.B backward\-kill\-line (C\-x Rubout)
-Kill backward to the beginning of the line.
-.TP
-.B unix\-line\-discard (C\-u)
-Kill backward from point to the beginning of the line.
-The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.
-.\" There is no real difference between this and backward-kill-line
-.TP
-.B kill\-whole\-line
-Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where point is.
-.TP
-.B kill\-word (M\-d)
-Kill from point to the end of the current word, or if between
-words, to the end of the next word.
-Word boundaries are the same as those used by \fBforward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B backward\-kill\-word (M\-Rubout)
-Kill the word behind point.
-Word boundaries are the same as those used by \fBbackward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B unix\-word\-rubout (C\-w)
-Kill the word behind point, using white space as a word boundary.
-The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.
-.TP
-.B delete\-horizontal\-space (M\-\e)
-Delete all spaces and tabs around point.
-.TP
-.B kill\-region
-Kill the text in the current region.
-.TP
-.B copy\-region\-as\-kill
-Copy the text in the region to the kill buffer.
-.TP
-.B copy\-backward\-word
-Copy the word before point to the kill buffer.
-The word boundaries are the same as \fBbackward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B copy\-forward\-word
-Copy the word following point to the kill buffer.
-The word boundaries are the same as \fBforward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B yank (C\-y)
-Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point.
-.TP
-.B yank\-pop (M\-y)
-Rotate the kill ring, and yank the new top. Only works following
-.B yank
-or
-.BR yank\-pop .
-.PD
-.SS Numeric Arguments
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B digit\-argument (M\-0, M\-1, ..., M\-\-)
-Add this digit to the argument already accumulating, or start a new
-argument. M\-\- starts a negative argument.
-.TP
-.B universal\-argument
-This is another way to specify an argument.
-If this command is followed by one or more digits, optionally with a
-leading minus sign, those digits define the argument.
-If the command is followed by digits, executing
-.B universal\-argument
-again ends the numeric argument, but is otherwise ignored.
-As a special case, if this command is immediately followed by a
-character that is neither a digit or minus sign, the argument count
-for the next command is multiplied by four.
-The argument count is initially one, so executing this function the
-first time makes the argument count four, a second time makes the
-argument count sixteen, and so on.
-.PD
-.SS Completing
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B complete (TAB)
-Attempt to perform completion on the text before point.
-.B Bash
-attempts completion treating the text as a variable (if the
-text begins with \fB$\fP), username (if the text begins with
-\fB~\fP), hostname (if the text begins with \fB@\fP), or
-command (including aliases and functions) in turn. If none
-of these produces a match, filename completion is attempted.
-.TP
-.B possible\-completions (M\-?)
-List the possible completions of the text before point.
-.TP
-.B insert\-completions (M\-*)
-Insert all completions of the text before point
-that would have been generated by
-\fBpossible\-completions\fP.
-.TP
-.B menu\-complete
-Similar to \fBcomplete\fP, but replaces the word to be completed
-with a single match from the list of possible completions.
-Repeated execution of \fBmenu\-complete\fP steps through the list
-of possible completions, inserting each match in turn.
-At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung
-(subject to the setting of \fBbell\-style\fP)
-and the original text is restored.
-An argument of \fIn\fP moves \fIn\fP positions forward in the list
-of matches; a negative argument may be used to move backward
-through the list.
-This command is intended to be bound to \fBTAB\fP, but is unbound
-by default.
-.TP
-.B delete\-char\-or\-list
-Deletes the character under the cursor if not at the beginning or
-end of the line (like \fBdelete\-char\fP).
-If at the end of the line, behaves identically to
-\fBpossible\-completions\fP.
-This command is unbound by default.
-.TP
-.B complete\-filename (M\-/)
-Attempt filename completion on the text before point.
-.TP
-.B possible\-filename\-completions (C\-x /)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a filename.
-.TP
-.B complete\-username (M\-~)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a username.
-.TP
-.B possible\-username\-completions (C\-x ~)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a username.
-.TP
-.B complete\-variable (M\-$)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a shell variable.
-.TP
-.B possible\-variable\-completions (C\-x $)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a shell variable.
-.TP
-.B complete\-hostname (M\-@)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a hostname.
-.TP
-.B possible\-hostname\-completions (C\-x @)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a hostname.
-.TP
-.B complete\-command (M\-!)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a command name. Command completion attempts to
-match the text against aliases, reserved words, shell
-functions, shell builtins, and finally executable filenames,
-in that order.
-.TP
-.B possible\-command\-completions (C\-x !)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a command name.
-.TP
-.B dynamic\-complete\-history (M\-TAB)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, comparing
-the text against lines from the history list for possible
-completion matches.
-.TP
-.B complete\-into\-braces (M\-{)
-Perform filename completion and insert the list of possible completions
-enclosed within braces so the list is available to the shell (see
-.B Brace Expansion
-above).
-.PD
-.SS Keyboard Macros
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B start\-kbd\-macro (C\-x (\^)
-Begin saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro.
-.TP
-.B end\-kbd\-macro (C\-x )\^)
-Stop saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro
-and store the definition.
-.TP
-.B call\-last\-kbd\-macro (C\-x e)
-Re-execute the last keyboard macro defined, by making the characters
-in the macro appear as if typed at the keyboard.
-.PD
-.SS Miscellaneous
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B re\-read\-init\-file (C\-x C\-r)
-Read in the contents of the \fIinputrc\fP file, and incorporate
-any bindings or variable assignments found there.
-.TP
-.B abort (C\-g)
-Abort the current editing command and
-ring the terminal's bell (subject to the setting of
-.BR bell\-style ).
-.TP
-.B do\-uppercase\-version (M\-a, M\-b, M\-\fIx\fP, ...)
-If the metafied character \fIx\fP is lowercase, run the command
-that is bound to the corresponding uppercase character.
-.TP
-.B prefix\-meta (ESC)
-Metafy the next character typed.
-.SM
-.B ESC
-.B f
-is equivalent to
-.BR Meta\-f .
-.TP
-.B undo (C\-_, C\-x C\-u)
-Incremental undo, separately remembered for each line.
-.TP
-.B revert\-line (M\-r)
-Undo all changes made to this line. This is like executing the
-.B undo
-command enough times to return the line to its initial state.
-.TP
-.B tilde\-expand (M\-&)
-Perform tilde expansion on the current word.
-.TP
-.B set\-mark (C\-@, M\-<space>)
-Set the mark to the point. If a
-numeric argument is supplied, the mark is set to that position.
-.TP
-.B exchange\-point\-and\-mark (C\-x C\-x)
-Swap the point with the mark. The current cursor position is set to
-the saved position, and the old cursor position is saved as the mark.
-.TP
-.B character\-search (C\-])
-A character is read and point is moved to the next occurrence of that
-character. A negative count searches for previous occurrences.
-.TP
-.B character\-search\-backward (M\-C\-])
-A character is read and point is moved to the previous occurrence of that
-character. A negative count searches for subsequent occurrences.
-.TP
-.B insert\-comment (M\-#)
-Without a numeric argument, the value of the readline
-.B comment\-begin
-variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line.
-If a numeric argument is supplied, this command acts as a toggle: if
-the characters at the beginning of the line do not match the value
-of \fBcomment\-begin\fP, the value is inserted, otherwise
-the characters in \fBcomment-begin\fP are deleted from the beginning of
-the line.
-In either case, the line is accepted as if a newline had been typed.
-The default value of
-\fBcomment\-begin\fP causes this command to make the current line
-a shell comment.
-If a numeric argument causes the comment character to be removed, the line
-will be executed by the shell.
-.TP
-.B glob\-complete\-word (M\-g)
-The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion,
-with an asterisk implicitly appended. This pattern is used to
-generate a list of matching file names for possible completions.
-.TP
-.B glob\-expand\-word (C\-x *)
-The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion,
-and the list of matching file names is inserted, replacing the word.
-If a numeric argument is supplied, an asterisk is appended before
-pathname expansion.
-.TP
-.B glob\-list\-expansions (C\-x g)
-The list of expansions that would have been generated by
-.B glob\-expand\-word
-is displayed, and the line is redrawn.
-If a numeric argument is supplied, an asterisk is appended before
-pathname expansion.
-.TP
-.B dump\-functions
-Print all of the functions and their key bindings to the
-readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied,
-the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part
-of an \fIinputrc\fP file.
-.TP
-.B dump\-variables
-Print all of the settable readline variables and their values to the
-readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied,
-the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part
-of an \fIinputrc\fP file.
-.TP
-.B dump\-macros
-Print all of the readline key sequences bound to macros and the
-strings they ouput. If a numeric argument is supplied,
-the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part
-of an \fIinputrc\fP file.
-.TP
-.B display\-shell\-version (C\-x C\-v)
-Display version information about the current instance of
-.BR bash .
-.PD
-.SS Programmable Completion
-.PP
-When word completion is attempted for an argument to a command for
-which a completion specification (a \fIcompspec\fP) has been defined
-using the \fBcomplete\fP builtin (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below), the programmable completion facilities are invoked.
-.PP
-First, the command name is identified.
-If a compspec has been defined for that command, the
-compspec is used to generate the list of possible completions for the word.
-If the command word is a full pathname, a compspec for the full
-pathname is searched for first.
-If no compspec is found for the full pathname, an attempt is made to
-find a compspec for the portion following the final slash.
-.PP
-Once a compspec has been found, it is used to generate the list of
-matching words.
-If a compspec is not found, the default \fBbash\fP completion as
-described above under \fBCompleting\fP is performed.
-.PP
-First, the actions specified by the compspec are used.
-Only matches which are prefixed by the word being completed are
-returned.
-When the
-.B \-f
-or
-.B \-d
-option is used for filename or directory name completion, the shell
-variable
-.SM
-.B FIGNORE
-is used to filter the matches.
-.PP
-Any completions specified by a filename expansion pattern to the
-\fB\-G\fP option are generated next.
-The words generated by the pattern need not match the word
-being completed.
-The
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-shell variable is not used to filter the matches, but the
-.SM
-.B FIGNORE
-variable is used.
-.PP
-Next, the string specified as the argument to the \fB\-W\fP option
-is considered.
-The string is first split using the characters in the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable as delimiters.
-Shell quoting is honored.
-Each word is then expanded using
-brace expansion, tilde expansion, parameter and variable expansion,
-command substitution, arithmetic expansion, and pathname expansion,
-as described above under
-.SM
-.BR EXPANSION .
-The results are split using the rules described above under
-\fBWord Splitting\fP.
-The results of the expansion are prefix-matched against the word being
-completed, and the matching words become the possible completions.
-.PP
-After these matches have been generated, any shell function or command
-specified with the \fB\-F\fP and \fB\-C\fP options is invoked.
-When the command or function is invoked, the
-.SM
-.B COMP_LINE
-and
-.SM
-.B COMP_POINT
-variables are assigned values as described above under
-\fBShell Variables\fP.
-If a shell function is being invoked, the
-.SM
-.B COMP_WORDS
-and
-.SM
-.B COMP_CWORD
-variables are also set.
-When the function or command is invoked, the first argument is the
-name of the command whose arguments are being completed, the
-second argument is the word being completed, and the third argument
-is the word preceding the word being completed on the current command line.
-No filtering of the generated completions against the word being completed
-is performed; the function or command has complete freedom in generating
-the matches.
-.PP
-Any function specified with \fB\-F\fP is invoked first.
-The function may use any of the shell facilities, including the
-\fBcompgen\fP builtin described below, to generate the matches.
-It must put the possible completions in the
-.SM
-.B COMPREPLY
-array variable.
-.PP
-Next, any command specified with the \fB\-C\fP option is invoked
-in an environment equivalent to command substitution.
-It should print a list of completions, one per line, to the
-standard output.
-Backslash may be used to escape a newline, if necessary.
-.PP
-After all of the possible completions are generated, any filter
-specified with the \fB\-X\fP option is applied to the list.
-The filter is a pattern as used for pathname expansion; a \fB&\fP
-in the pattern is replaced with the text of the word being completed.
-A literal \fB&\fP may be escaped with a backslash; the backslash
-is removed before attempting a match.
-Any completion that matches the pattern will be removed from the list.
-A leading \fB!\fP negates the pattern; in this case any completion
-not matching the pattern will be removed.
-.PP
-Finally, any prefix and suffix specified with the \fB\-P\fP and \fB\-S\fP
-options are added to each member of the completion list, and the result is
-returned to the readline completion code as the list of possible
-completions.
-.PP
-If the previously-applied actions do not generate any matches, and the
-\fB\-o dirnames\fP option was supplied to \fBcomplete\fP when the
-compspec was defined, directory name completion is attempted.
-.PP
-By default, if a compspec is found, whatever it generates is returned
-to the completion code as the full set of possible completions.
-The default \fBbash\fP completions are not attempted, and the readline
-default of filename completion is disabled.
-If the \fB-o default\fP option was supplied to \fBcomplete\fP when the
-compspec was defined, readline's default completion will be performed
-if the compspec generates no matches.
-.PP
-When a compspec indicates that directory name completion is desired,
-the programmable completion functions force readline to append a slash
-to completed names which are symbolic links to directories, subject to
-the value of the \fBmark\-directories\fP readline variable, regardless
-of the setting of the \fBmark-symlinked\-directories\fP readline variable.
-.SH HISTORY
-When the
-.B \-o history
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin is enabled, the shell provides access to the
-\fIcommand history\fP,
-the list of commands previously typed.
-The value of the \fBHISTSIZE\fP variable is used as the
-number of commands to save in a history list.
-The text of the last
-.SM
-.B HISTSIZE
-commands (default 500) is saved. The shell
-stores each command in the history list prior to parameter and
-variable expansion (see
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-above) but after history expansion is performed, subject to the
-values of the shell variables
-.SM
-.B HISTIGNORE
-and
-.SM
-.BR HISTCONTROL .
-.PP
-On startup, the history is initialized from the file named by
-the variable
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-(default \fI~/.bash_history\fP).
-The file named by the value of
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-is truncated, if necessary, to contain no more than
-the number of lines specified by the value of
-.SM
-.BR HISTFILESIZE .
-When an interactive shell exits, the last
-.SM
-.B $HISTSIZE
-lines are copied from the history list to
-.SM
-.BR $HISTFILE .
-If the
-.B histappend
-shell option is enabled
-(see the description of
-.B shopt
-under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below), the lines are appended to the history file,
-otherwise the history file is overwritten.
-If
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-is unset, or if the history file is unwritable, the history is
-not saved. After saving the history, the history file is truncated
-to contain no more than
-.SM
-.B HISTFILESIZE
-lines. If
-.SM
-.B HISTFILESIZE
-is not set, no truncation is performed.
-.PP
-The builtin command
-.B fc
-(see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below) may be used to list or edit and re-execute a portion of
-the history list.
-The
-.B history
-builtin may be used to display or modify the history list and
-manipulate the history file.
-When using command-line editing, search commands
-are available in each editing mode that provide access to the
-history list.
-.PP
-The shell allows control over which commands are saved on the history
-list. The
-.SM
-.B HISTCONTROL
-and
-.SM
-.B HISTIGNORE
-variables may be set to cause the shell to save only a subset of the
-commands entered.
-The
-.B cmdhist
-shell option, if enabled, causes the shell to attempt to save each
-line of a multi-line command in the same history entry, adding
-semicolons where necessary to preserve syntactic correctness.
-The
-.B lithist
-shell option causes the shell to save the command with embedded newlines
-instead of semicolons. See the description of the
-.B shopt
-builtin below under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-for information on setting and unsetting shell options.
-.SH "HISTORY EXPANSION"
-.PP
-The shell supports a history expansion feature that
-is similar to the history expansion in
-.BR csh.
-This section describes what syntax features are available. This
-feature is enabled by default for interactive shells, and can be
-disabled using the
-.B \+H
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below). Non-interactive shells do not perform history expansion
-by default.
-.PP
-History expansions introduce words from the history list into
-the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the
-arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or
-fix errors in previous commands quickly.
-.PP
-History expansion is performed immediately after a complete line
-is read, before the shell breaks it into words.
-It takes place in two parts.
-The first is to determine which line from the history list
-to use during substitution.
-The second is to select portions of that line for inclusion into
-the current one.
-The line selected from the history is the \fIevent\fP,
-and the portions of that line that are acted upon are \fIwords\fP.
-Various \fImodifiers\fP are available to manipulate the selected words.
-The line is broken into words in the same fashion as when reading input,
-so that several \fImetacharacter\fP-separated words surrounded by
-quotes are considered one word.
-History expansions are introduced by the appearance of the
-history expansion character, which is \^\fB!\fP\^ by default.
-Only backslash (\^\fB\e\fP\^) and single quotes can quote
-the history expansion character.
-.PP
-Several shell options settable with the
-.B shopt
-builtin may be used to tailor the behavior of history expansion.
-If the
-.B histverify
-shell option is enabled (see the description of the
-.B shopt
-builtin), and
-.B readline
-is being used, history substitutions are not immediately passed to
-the shell parser.
-Instead, the expanded line is reloaded into the
-.B readline
-editing buffer for further modification.
-If
-.B readline
-is being used, and the
-.B histreedit
-shell option is enabled, a failed history substitution will be reloaded
-into the
-.B readline
-editing buffer for correction.
-The
-.B \-p
-option to the
-.B history
-builtin command may be used to see what a history expansion will
-do before using it.
-The
-.B \-s
-option to the
-.B history
-builtin may be used to add commands to the end of the history list
-without actually executing them, so that they are available for
-subsequent recall.
-.PP
-The shell allows control of the various characters used by the
-history expansion mechanism (see the description of
-.B histchars
-above under
-.BR "Shell Variables" ).
-.SS Event Designators
-.PP
-An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the
-history list.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B !
-Start a history substitution, except when followed by a
-.BR blank ,
-newline, = or (.
-.TP
-.B !\fIn\fR
-Refer to command line
-.IR n .
-.TP
-.B !\-\fIn\fR
-Refer to the current command line minus
-.IR n .
-.TP
-.B !!
-Refer to the previous command. This is a synonym for `!\-1'.
-.TP
-.B !\fIstring\fR
-Refer to the most recent command starting with
-.IR string .
-.TP
-.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
-Refer to the most recent command containing
-.IR string .
-The trailing \fB?\fP may be omitted if
-.I string
-is followed immediately by a newline.
-.TP
-.B \d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring1\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring2\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u
-Quick substitution. Repeat the last command, replacing
-.I string1
-with
-.IR string2 .
-Equivalent to
-``!!:s/\fIstring1\fP/\fIstring2\fP/''
-(see \fBModifiers\fP below).
-.TP
-.B !#
-The entire command line typed so far.
-.PD
-.SS Word Designators
-.PP
-Word designators are used to select desired words from the event.
-A
-.B :
-separates the event specification from the word designator.
-It may be omitted if the word designator begins with a
-.BR ^ ,
-.BR $ ,
-.BR * ,
-.BR \- ,
-or
-.BR % .
-Words are numbered from the beginning of the line,
-with the first word being denoted by 0 (zero).
-Words are inserted into the current line separated by single spaces.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B 0 (zero)
-The zeroth word. For the shell, this is the command
-word.
-.TP
-.I n
-The \fIn\fRth word.
-.TP
-.B ^
-The first argument. That is, word 1.
-.TP
-.B $
-The last argument.
-.TP
-.B %
-The word matched by the most recent `?\fIstring\fR?' search.
-.TP
-.I x\fB\-\fPy
-A range of words; `\-\fIy\fR' abbreviates `0\-\fIy\fR'.
-.TP
-.B *
-All of the words but the zeroth. This is a synonym
-for `\fI1\-$\fP'. It is not an error to use
-.B *
-if there is just one
-word in the event; the empty string is returned in that case.
-.TP
-.B x*
-Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP.
-.TP
-.B x\-
-Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP like \fBx*\fP, but omits the last word.
-.PD
-.PP
-If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the
-previous command is used as the event.
-.SS Modifiers
-.PP
-After the optional word designator, there may appear a sequence of
-one or more of the following modifiers, each preceded by a `:'.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.PP
-.TP
-.B h
-Remove a trailing file name component, leaving only the head.
-.TP
-.B t
-Remove all leading file name components, leaving the tail.
-.TP
-.B r
-Remove a trailing suffix of the form \fI.xxx\fP, leaving the
-basename.
-.TP
-.B e
-Remove all but the trailing suffix.
-.TP
-.B p
-Print the new command but do not execute it.
-.TP
-.B q
-Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions.
-.TP
-.B x
-Quote the substituted words as with
-.BR q ,
-but break into words at
-.B blanks
-and newlines.
-.TP
-.B s/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/
-Substitute
-.I new
-for the first occurrence of
-.I old
-in the event line. Any delimiter can be used in place of /. The
-final delimiter is optional if it is the last character of the
-event line. The delimiter may be quoted in
-.I old
-and
-.I new
-with a single backslash. If & appears in
-.IR new ,
-it is replaced by
-.IR old .
-A single backslash will quote the &. If
-.I old
-is null, it is set to the last
-.I old
-substituted, or, if no previous history substitutions took place,
-the last
-.I string
-in a
-.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
-search.
-.TP
-.B &
-Repeat the previous substitution.
-.TP
-.B g
-Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line. This is
-used in conjunction with `\fB:s\fP' (e.g., `\fB:gs/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/\fR')
-or `\fB:&\fP'. If used with
-`\fB:s\fP', any delimiter can be used
-in place of /, and the final delimiter is optional
-if it is the last character of the event line.
-.PD
-.SH "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-.\" start of bash_builtins
-.zZ
-.PP
-Unless otherwise noted, each builtin command documented in this
-section as accepting options preceded by
-.B \-
-accepts
-.B \-\-
-to signify the end of the options.
-.sp .5
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB:\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-.PD
-No effect; the command does nothing beyond expanding
-.I arguments
-and performing any specified
-redirections. A zero exit code is returned.
-.TP
-\fB .\| \fP \fIfilename\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBsource\fP \fIfilename\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-.PD
-Read and execute commands from
-.I filename
-in the current
-shell environment and return the exit status of the last command
-executed from
-.IR filename .
-If
-.I filename
-does not contain a slash, file names in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-are used to find the directory containing
-.IR filename .
-The file searched for in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-need not be executable.
-When \fBbash\fP is not in \fIposix mode\fP, the current directory is
-searched if no file is found in
-.SM
-.BR PATH .
-If the
-.B sourcepath
-option to the
-.B shopt
-builtin command is turned off, the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-is not searched.
-If any \fIarguments\fP are supplied, they become the positional
-parameters when \fIfilename\fP is executed. Otherwise the positional
-parameters are unchanged.
-The return status is the status of the last command exited within
-the script (0 if no commands are executed), and false if
-.I filename
-is not found or cannot be read.
-.TP
-\fBalias\fP [\fB\-p\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP] ...]
-\fBAlias\fP with no arguments or with the
-.B \-p
-option prints the list of aliases in the form
-\fBalias\fP \fIname\fP=\fIvalue\fP on standard output.
-When arguments are supplied, an alias is defined for
-each \fIname\fP whose \fIvalue\fP is given.
-A trailing space in \fIvalue\fP causes the next word to be
-checked for alias substitution when the alias is expanded.
-For each \fIname\fP in the argument list for which no \fIvalue\fP
-is supplied, the name and value of the alias is printed.
-\fBAlias\fP returns true unless a \fIname\fP is given for which
-no alias has been defined.
-.TP
-\fBbg\fP [\fIjobspec\fP]
-Resume the suspended job \fIjobspec\fP in the background, as if it
-had been started with
-.BR & .
-If \fIjobspec\fP is not present, the shell's notion of the
-\fIcurrent job\fP is used.
-.B bg
-.I jobspec
-returns 0 unless run when job control is disabled or, when run with
-job control enabled, if \fIjobspec\fP was not found or started without
-job control.
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] [\fB\-lpsvPSV\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] [\fB\-q\fP \fIfunction\fP] [\fB\-u\fP \fIfunction\fP] [\fB\-r\fP \fIkeyseq\fP]
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] \fB\-f\fP \fIfilename\fP
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] \fB\-x\fP \fIkeyseq\fP:\fIshell\-command\fP
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] \fIkeyseq\fP:\fIfunction\-name\fP
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP \fIreadline\-command\fP
-.PD
-Display current
-.B readline
-key and function bindings, bind a key sequence to a
-.B readline
-function or macro, or set a
-.B readline
-variable.
-Each non-option argument is a command as it would appear in
-.IR .inputrc ,
-but each binding or command must be passed as a separate argument;
-e.g., '"\eC\-x\eC\-r": re\-read\-init\-file'.
-Options, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-m \fIkeymap\fP
-Use
-.I keymap
-as the keymap to be affected by the subsequent bindings.
-Acceptable
-.I keymap
-names are
-\fIemacs, emacs\-standard, emacs\-meta, emacs\-ctlx, vi,
-vi\-move, vi\-command\fP, and
-.IR vi\-insert .
-\fIvi\fP is equivalent to \fIvi\-command\fP; \fIemacs\fP is
-equivalent to \fIemacs\-standard\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-List the names of all \fBreadline\fP functions.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Display \fBreadline\fP function names and bindings in such a way
-that they can be re-read.
-.TP
-.B \-P
-List current \fBreadline\fP function names and bindings.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Display \fBreadline\fP variable names and values in such a way that they
-can be re-read.
-.TP
-.B \-V
-List current \fBreadline\fP variable names and values.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Display \fBreadline\fP key sequences bound to macros and the strings
-they output in such a way that they can be re-read.
-.TP
-.B \-S
-Display \fBreadline\fP key sequences bound to macros and the strings
-they output.
-.TP
-.B \-f \fIfilename\fP
-Read key bindings from \fIfilename\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-q \fIfunction\fP
-Query about which keys invoke the named \fIfunction\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-u \fIfunction\fP
-Unbind all keys bound to the named \fIfunction\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-r \fIkeyseq\fP
-Remove any current binding for \fIkeyseq\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-x \fIkeyseq\fP:\fIshell\-command\fP
-Cause \fIshell\-command\fP to be executed whenever \fIkeyseq\fP is
-entered.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is 0 unless an unrecognized option is given or an
-error occurred.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBbreak\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Exit from within a
-.BR for ,
-.BR while ,
-.BR until ,
-or
-.B select
-loop. If \fIn\fP is specified, break \fIn\fP levels.
-.I n
-must be \(>= 1. If
-.I n
-is greater than the number of enclosing loops, all enclosing loops
-are exited. The return value is 0 unless the shell is not executing
-a loop when
-.B break
-is executed.
-.TP
-\fBbuiltin\fP \fIshell\-builtin\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-Execute the specified shell builtin, passing it
-.IR arguments ,
-and return its exit status.
-This is useful when defining a
-function whose name is the same as a shell builtin,
-retaining the functionality of the builtin within the function.
-The \fBcd\fP builtin is commonly redefined this way.
-The return status is false if
-.I shell\-builtin
-is not a shell builtin command.
-.TP
-\fBcd\fP [\fB\-L|-P\fP] [\fIdir\fP]
-Change the current directory to \fIdir\fP. The variable
-.SM
-.B HOME
-is the
-default
-.IR dir .
-The variable
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-defines the search path for the directory containing
-.IR dir .
-Alternative directory names in
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-are separated by a colon (:). A null directory name in
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-is the same as the current directory, i.e., ``\fB.\fP''. If
-.I dir
-begins with a slash (/),
-then
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-is not used. The
-.B \-P
-option says to use the physical directory structure instead of
-following symbolic links (see also the
-.B \-P
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command); the
-.B \-L
-option forces symbolic links to be followed. An argument of
-.B \-
-is equivalent to
-.SM
-.BR $OLDPWD .
-The return value is true if the directory was successfully changed;
-false otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBcommand\fP [\fB\-pVv\fP] \fIcommand\fP [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Run
-.I command
-with
-.I args
-suppressing the normal shell function lookup. Only builtin
-commands or commands found in the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-are executed. If the
-.B \-p
-option is given, the search for
-.I command
-is performed using a default value for
-.B PATH
-that is guaranteed to find all of the standard utilities.
-If either the
-.B \-V
-or
-.B \-v
-option is supplied, a description of
-.I command
-is printed. The
-.B \-v
-option causes a single word indicating the command or file name
-used to invoke
-.I command
-to be displayed; the
-.B \-V
-option produces a more verbose description.
-If the
-.B \-V
-or
-.B \-v
-option is supplied, the exit status is 0 if
-.I command
-was found, and 1 if not. If neither option is supplied and
-an error occurred or
-.I command
-cannot be found, the exit status is 127. Otherwise, the exit status of the
-.B command
-builtin is the exit status of
-.IR command .
-.TP
-\fBcompgen\fP [\fIoption\fP] [\fIword\fP]
-Generate possible completion matches for \fIword\fP according to
-the \fIoption\fPs, which may be any option accepted by the
-.B complete
-builtin with the exception of \fB\-p\fP and \fB\-r\fP, and write
-the matches to the standard output.
-When using the \fB\-F\fP or \fB\-C\fP options, the various shell variables
-set by the programmable completion facilities, while available, will not
-have useful values.
-.sp 1
-The matches will be generated in the same way as if the programmable
-completion code had generated them directly from a completion specification
-with the same flags.
-If \fIword\fP is specified, only those completions matching \fIword\fP
-will be displayed.
-.sp 1
-The return value is true unless an invalid option is supplied, or no
-matches were generated.
-.TP
-\fBcomplete\fP [\fB\-abcdefgjksuv\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIcomp-option\fP] [\fB\-A\fP \fIaction\fP] [\fB\-G\fP \fIglobpat\fP] [\fB\-W\fP \fIwordlist\fP] [\fB\-P\fP \fIprefix\fP] [\fB\-S\fP \fIsuffix\fP]
-.br
-[\fB\-X\fP \fIfilterpat\fP] [\fB\-F\fP \fIfunction\fP] [\fB\-C\fP \fIcommand\fP] \fIname\fP [\fIname ...\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBcomplete\fP \fB\-pr\fP [\fIname\fP ...]
-.PD
-Specify how arguments to each \fIname\fP should be completed.
-If the \fB\-p\fP option is supplied, or if no options are supplied,
-existing completion specifications are printed in a way that allows
-them to be reused as input.
-The \fB\-r\fP option removes a completion specification for
-each \fIname\fP, or, if no \fIname\fPs are supplied, all
-completion specifications.
-.sp 1
-The process of applying these completion specifications when word completion
-is attempted is described above under \fBProgrammable Completion\fP.
-.sp 1
-Other options, if specified, have the following meanings.
-The arguments to the \fB\-G\fP, \fB\-W\fP, and \fB\-X\fP options
-(and, if necessary, the \fB\-P\fP and \fB\-S\fP options)
-should be quoted to protect them from expansion before the
-.B complete
-builtin is invoked.
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 8
-\fB\-o\fP \fIcomp-option\fP
-The \fIcomp-option\fP controls several aspects of the compspec's behavior
-beyond the simple generation of completions.
-\fIcomp-option\fP may be one of:
-.RS
-.TP 8
-.B default
-Use readline's default filename completion if the compspec generates
-no matches.
-.TP 8
-.B dirnames
-Perform directory name completion if the compspec generates no matches.
-.TP 8
-.B filenames
-Tell readline that the compspec generates filenames, so it can perform any
-filename\-specific processing (like adding a slash to directory names or
-suppressing trailing spaces). Intended to be used with shell functions.
-.TP 8
-.B nospace
-Tell readline not to append a space (the default) to words completed at
-the end of the line.
-.RE
-.TP 8
-\fB\-A\fP \fIaction\fP
-The \fIaction\fP may be one of the following to generate a list of possible
-completions:
-.RS
-.TP 8
-.B alias
-Alias names. May also be specified as \fB\-a\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B arrayvar
-Array variable names.
-.TP 8
-.B binding
-\fBReadline\fP key binding names.
-.TP 8
-.B builtin
-Names of shell builtin commands. May also be specified as \fB\-b\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B command
-Command names. May also be specified as \fB\-c\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B directory
-Directory names. May also be specified as \fB\-d\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B disabled
-Names of disabled shell builtins.
-.TP 8
-.B enabled
-Names of enabled shell builtins.
-.TP 8
-.B export
-Names of exported shell variables. May also be specified as \fB\-e\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B file
-File names. May also be specified as \fB\-f\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B function
-Names of shell functions.
-.TP 8
-.B group
-Group names. May also be specified as \fB\-g\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B helptopic
-Help topics as accepted by the \fBhelp\fP builtin.
-.TP 8
-.B hostname
-Hostnames, as taken from the file specified by the
-.SM
-.B HOSTFILE
-shell variable.
-.TP 8
-.B job
-Job names, if job control is active. May also be specified as \fB\-j\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B keyword
-Shell reserved words. May also be specified as \fB\-k\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B running
-Names of running jobs, if job control is active.
-.TP 8
-.B service
-Service names. May also be specified as \fB\-s\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B setopt
-Valid arguments for the \fB\-o\fP option to the \fBset\fP builtin.
-.TP 8
-.B shopt
-Shell option names as accepted by the \fBshopt\fP builtin.
-.TP 8
-.B signal
-Signal names.
-.TP 8
-.B stopped
-Names of stopped jobs, if job control is active.
-.TP 8
-.B user
-User names. May also be specified as \fB\-u\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B variable
-Names of all shell variables. May also be specified as \fB\-v\fP.
-.RE
-.TP 8
-\fB\-G\fP \fIglobpat\fP
-The filename expansion pattern \fIglobpat\fP is expanded to generate
-the possible completions.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-W\fP \fIwordlist\fP
-The \fIwordlist\fP is split using the characters in the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable as delimiters, and each resultant word is expanded.
-The possible completions are the members of the resultant list which
-match the word being completed.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-C\fP \fIcommand\fP
-\fIcommand\fP is executed in a subshell environment, and its output is
-used as the possible completions.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-F\fP \fIfunction\fP
-The shell function \fIfunction\fP is executed in the current shell
-environment.
-When it finishes, the possible completions are retrieved from the value
-of the
-.SM
-.B COMPREPLY
-array variable.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-X\fP \fIfilterpat\fP
-\fIfilterpat\fP is a pattern as used for filename expansion.
-It is applied to the list of possible completions generated by the
-preceding options and arguments, and each completion matching
-\fIfilterpat\fP is removed from the list.
-A leading \fB!\fP in \fIfilterpat\fP negates the pattern; in this
-case, any completion not matching \fIfilterpat\fP is removed.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-P\fP \fIprefix\fP
-\fIprefix\fP is added at the beginning of each possible completion
-after all other options have been applied.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-S\fP \fIsuffix\fP
-\fIsuffix\fP is appended to each possible completion
-after all other options have been applied.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is true unless an invalid option is supplied, an option
-other than \fB\-p\fP or \fB\-r\fP is supplied without a \fIname\fP
-argument, an attempt is made to remove a completion specification for
-a \fIname\fP for which no specification exists, or
-an error occurs adding a completion specification.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBcontinue\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Resume the next iteration of the enclosing
-.BR for ,
-.BR while ,
-.BR until ,
-or
-.B select
-loop.
-If
-.I n
-is specified, resume at the \fIn\fPth enclosing loop.
-.I n
-must be \(>= 1. If
-.I n
-is greater than the number of enclosing loops, the last enclosing loop
-(the ``top-level'' loop) is resumed. The return value is 0 unless the
-shell is not executing a loop when
-.B continue
-is executed.
-.TP
-\fBdeclare\fP [\fB\-afFirtx\fP] [\fB\-p\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP]]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBtypeset\fP [\fB\-afFirtx\fP] [\fB\-p\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP]]
-.PD
-Declare variables and/or give them attributes.
-If no \fIname\fPs are given then display the values of variables.
-The
-.B \-p
-option will display the attributes and values of each
-.IR name .
-When
-.B \-p
-is used, additional options are ignored.
-The
-.B \-F
-option inhibits the display of function definitions; only the
-function name and attributes are printed.
-The
-.B \-F
-option implies
-.BR \-f .
-The following options can
-be used to restrict output to variables with the specified attribute or
-to give variables attributes:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Each \fIname\fP is an array variable (see
-.B Arrays
-above).
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Use function names only.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-The variable is treated as an integer; arithmetic evaluation (see
-.SM
-.B "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" ") "
-is performed when the variable is assigned a value.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Make \fIname\fPs readonly. These names cannot then be assigned values
-by subsequent assignment statements or unset.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Give each \fIname\fP the \fItrace\fP attribute.
-Traced functions inherit the \fBDEBUG\fP trap from the calling shell.
-The trace attribute has no special meaning for variables.
-.TP
-.B \-x
-Mark \fIname\fPs for export to subsequent commands via the environment.
-.PD
-.PP
-Using `+' instead of `\-'
-turns off the attribute instead, with the exception that \fB+a\fP
-may not be used to destroy an array variable. When used in a function,
-makes each
-\fIname\fP local, as with the
-.B local
-command. The return value is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered,
-an attempt is made to define a function using
-.if n ``\-f foo=bar'',
-.if t \f(CW\-f foo=bar\fP,
-an attempt is made to assign a value to a readonly variable,
-an attempt is made to assign a value to an array variable without
-using the compound assignment syntax (see
-.B Arrays
-above), one of the \fInames\fP is not a valid shell variable name,
-an attempt is made to turn off readonly status for a readonly variable,
-an attempt is made to turn off array status for an array variable,
-or an attempt is made to display a non-existent function with \fB\-f\fP.
-.RE
-.TP
-.B dirs [\fB\-clpv\fP] [+\fIn\fP] [\-\fIn\fP]
-Without options, displays the list of currently remembered directories.
-The default display is on a single line with directory names separated
-by spaces.
-Directories are added to the list with the
-.B pushd
-command; the
-.B popd
-command removes entries from the list.
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB+\fP\fIn\fP
-Displays the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the left of the list
-shown by
-.B dirs
-when invoked without options, starting with zero.
-.TP
-\fB\-\fP\fIn\fP
-Displays the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the right of the list
-shown by
-.B dirs
-when invoked without options, starting with zero.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Clears the directory stack by deleting all of the entries.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Produces a longer listing; the default listing format uses a
-tilde to denote the home directory.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Print the directory stack with one entry per line.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the directory stack with one entry per line,
-prefixing each entry with its index in the stack.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is 0 unless an
-invalid option is supplied or \fIn\fP indexes beyond the end
-of the directory stack.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBdisown\fP [\fB\-ar\fP] [\fB\-h\fP] [\fIjobspec\fP ...]
-Without options, each
-.I jobspec
-is removed from the table of active jobs.
-If the \fB\-h\fP option is given, each
-.I jobspec
-is not removed from the table, but is marked so that
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-is not sent to the job if the shell receives a
-.SM
-.BR SIGHUP .
-If no
-.I jobspec
-is present, and neither the
-.B \-a
-nor the
-.B \-r
-option is supplied, the \fIcurrent job\fP is used.
-If no
-.I jobspec
-is supplied, the
-.B \-a
-option means to remove or mark all jobs; the
-.B \-r
-option without a
-.I jobspec
-argument restricts operation to running jobs.
-The return value is 0 unless a
-.I jobspec
-does not specify a valid job.
-.TP
-\fBecho\fP [\fB\-neE\fP] [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Output the \fIarg\fPs, separated by spaces, followed by a newline.
-The return status is always 0.
-If \fB\-n\fP is specified, the trailing newline is
-suppressed. If the \fB\-e\fP option is given, interpretation of
-the following backslash-escaped characters is enabled. The
-.B \-E
-option disables the interpretation of these escape characters,
-even on systems where they are interpreted by default.
-The \fBxpg_echo\fP shell option may be used to
-dynamically determine whether or not \fBecho\fP expands these
-escape characters by default.
-.B echo
-does not interpret
-.B \-\-
-to mean the end of options.
-.B echo
-interprets the following escape sequences:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-alert (bell)
-.TP
-.B \eb
-backspace
-.TP
-.B \ec
-suppress trailing newline
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an escape character
-.TP
-.B \ef
-form feed
-.TP
-.B \en
-new line
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-.B \ev
-vertical tab
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-.B \e0\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(zero to three octal digits)
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(one to three octal digits)
-.TP
-.B \ex\fIHH\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP
-(one or two hex digits)
-.PD
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBenable\fP [\fB\-adnps\fP] [\fB\-f\fP \fIfilename\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-Enable and disable builtin shell commands.
-Disabling a builtin allows a disk command which has the same name
-as a shell builtin to be executed without specifying a full pathname,
-even though the shell normally searches for builtins before disk commands.
-If \fB\-n\fP is used, each \fIname\fP
-is disabled; otherwise,
-\fInames\fP are enabled. For example, to use the
-.B test
-binary found via the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-instead of the shell builtin version, run
-.if t \f(CWenable -n test\fP.
-.if n ``enable -n test''.
-The
-.B \-f
-option means to load the new builtin command
-.I name
-from shared object
-.IR filename ,
-on systems that support dynamic loading. The
-.B \-d
-option will delete a builtin previously loaded with
-.BR \-f .
-If no \fIname\fP arguments are given, or if the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, a list of shell builtins is printed.
-With no other option arguments, the list consists of all enabled
-shell builtins.
-If \fB\-n\fP is supplied, only disabled builtins are printed.
-If \fB\-a\fP is supplied, the list printed includes all builtins, with an
-indication of whether or not each is enabled.
-If \fB\-s\fP is supplied, the output is restricted to the POSIX
-\fIspecial\fP builtins.
-The return value is 0 unless a
-.I name
-is not a shell builtin or there is an error loading a new builtin
-from a shared object.
-.TP
-\fBeval\fP [\fIarg\fP ...]
-The \fIarg\fPs are read and concatenated together into a single
-command. This command is then read and executed by the shell, and
-its exit status is returned as the value of
-.BR eval .
-If there are no
-.IR args ,
-or only null arguments,
-.B eval
-returns 0.
-.TP
-\fBexec\fP [\fB\-cl\fP] [\fB\-a\fP \fIname\fP] [\fIcommand\fP [\fIarguments\fP]]
-If
-.I command
-is specified, it replaces the shell.
-No new process is created. The
-.I arguments
-become the arguments to \fIcommand\fP.
-If the
-.B \-l
-option is supplied,
-the shell places a dash at the beginning of the zeroth arg passed to
-.IR command .
-This is what
-.IR login (1)
-does. The
-.B \-c
-option causes
-.I command
-to be executed with an empty environment. If
-.B \-a
-is supplied, the shell passes
-.I name
-as the zeroth argument to the executed command. If
-.I command
-cannot be executed for some reason, a non-interactive shell exits,
-unless the shell option
-.B execfail
-is enabled, in which case it returns failure.
-An interactive shell returns failure if the file cannot be executed.
-If
-.I command
-is not specified, any redirections take effect in the current shell,
-and the return status is 0. If there is a redirection error, the
-return status is 1.
-.TP
-\fBexit\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Cause the shell to exit
-with a status of \fIn\fP. If
-.I n
-is omitted, the exit status
-is that of the last command executed.
-A trap on
-.SM
-.B EXIT
-is executed before the shell terminates.
-.TP
-\fBexport\fP [\fB\-fn\fP\^] [\fIname\fP[=\fIword\fP]] ...
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B export \-p
-.PD
-The supplied
-.I names
-are marked for automatic export to the environment of
-subsequently executed commands. If the
-.B \-f
-option is given,
-the
-.I names
-refer to functions.
-If no
-.I names
-are given, or if the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, a list
-of all names that are exported in this shell is printed.
-The
-.B \-n
-option causes the export property to be removed from the
-named variables.
-.B export
-returns an exit status of 0 unless an invalid option is
-encountered,
-one of the \fInames\fP is not a valid shell variable name, or
-.B \-f
-is supplied with a
-.I name
-that is not a function.
-.TP
-\fBfc\fP [\fB\-e\fP \fIename\fP] [\fB\-nlr\fP] [\fIfirst\fP] [\fIlast\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBfc\fP \fB\-s\fP [\fIpat\fP=\fIrep\fP] [\fIcmd\fP]
-.PD
-Fix Command. In the first form, a range of commands from
-.I first
-to
-.I last
-is selected from the history list.
-.I First
-and
-.I last
-may be specified as a string (to locate the last command beginning
-with that string) or as a number (an index into the history list,
-where a negative number is used as an offset from the current
-command number). If
-.I last
-is not specified it is set to
-the current command for listing (so that
-.if n ``fc \-l \-10''
-.if t \f(CWfc \-l \-10\fP
-prints the last 10 commands) and to
-.I first
-otherwise.
-If
-.I first
-is not specified it is set to the previous
-command for editing and \-16 for listing.
-.sp 1
-The
-.B \-n
-option suppresses
-the command numbers when listing. The
-.B \-r
-option reverses the order of
-the commands. If the
-.B \-l
-option is given,
-the commands are listed on
-standard output. Otherwise, the editor given by
-.I ename
-is invoked
-on a file containing those commands. If
-.I ename
-is not given, the
-value of the
-.SM
-.B FCEDIT
-variable is used, and
-the value of
-.SM
-.B EDITOR
-if
-.SM
-.B FCEDIT
-is not set. If neither variable is set,
-.FN vi
-is used. When editing is complete, the edited commands are
-echoed and executed.
-.sp 1
-In the second form, \fIcommand\fP is re-executed after each instance
-of \fIpat\fP is replaced by \fIrep\fP.
-A useful alias to use with this is
-.if n ``r=fc -s'',
-.if t \f(CWr='fc \-s'\fP,
-so that typing
-.if n ``r cc''
-.if t \f(CWr cc\fP
-runs the last command beginning with
-.if n ``cc''
-.if t \f(CWcc\fP
-and typing
-.if n ``r''
-.if t \f(CWr\fP
-re-executes the last command.
-.sp 1
-If the first form is used, the return value is 0 unless an invalid
-option is encountered or
-.I first
-or
-.I last
-specify history lines out of range.
-If the
-.B \-e
-option is supplied, the return value is the value of the last
-command executed or failure if an error occurs with the temporary
-file of commands. If the second form is used, the return status
-is that of the command re-executed, unless
-.I cmd
-does not specify a valid history line, in which case
-.B fc
-returns failure.
-.TP
-\fBfg\fP [\fIjobspec\fP]
-Resume
-.I jobspec
-in the foreground, and make it the current job.
-If
-.I jobspec
-is not present, the shell's notion of the \fIcurrent job\fP is used.
-The return value is that of the command placed into the foreground,
-or failure if run when job control is disabled or, when run with
-job control enabled, if
-.I jobspec
-does not specify a valid job or
-.I jobspec
-specifies a job that was started without job control.
-.TP
-\fBgetopts\fP \fIoptstring\fP \fIname\fP [\fIargs\fP]
-.B getopts
-is used by shell procedures to parse positional parameters.
-.I optstring
-contains the option characters to be recognized; if a character
-is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an
-argument, which should be separated from it by white space.
-The colon and question mark characters may not be used as
-option characters.
-Each time it is invoked,
-.B getopts
-places the next option in the shell variable
-.IR name ,
-initializing
-.I name
-if it does not exist,
-and the index of the next argument to be processed into the
-variable
-.SM
-.BR OPTIND .
-.SM
-.B OPTIND
-is initialized to 1 each time the shell or a shell script
-is invoked. When an option requires an argument,
-.B getopts
-places that argument into the variable
-.SM
-.BR OPTARG .
-The shell does not reset
-.SM
-.B OPTIND
-automatically; it must be manually reset between multiple
-calls to
-.B getopts
-within the same shell invocation if a new set of parameters
-is to be used.
-.sp 1
-When the end of options is encountered, \fBgetopts\fP exits with a
-return value greater than zero.
-\fBOPTIND\fP is set to the index of the first non-option argument,
-and \fBname\fP is set to ?.
-.sp 1
-.B getopts
-normally parses the positional parameters, but if more arguments are
-given in
-.IR args ,
-.B getopts
-parses those instead.
-.sp 1
-.B getopts
-can report errors in two ways. If the first character of
-.I optstring
-is a colon,
-.I silent
-error reporting is used. In normal operation diagnostic messages
-are printed when invalid options or missing option arguments are
-encountered.
-If the variable
-.SM
-.B OPTERR
-is set to 0, no error messages will be displayed, even if the first
-character of
-.I optstring
-is not a colon.
-.sp 1
-If an invalid option is seen,
-.B getopts
-places ? into
-.I name
-and, if not silent,
-prints an error message and unsets
-.SM
-.BR OPTARG .
-If
-.B getopts
-is silent,
-the option character found is placed in
-.SM
-.B OPTARG
-and no diagnostic message is printed.
-.sp 1
-If a required argument is not found, and
-.B getopts
-is not silent,
-a question mark (\^\fB?\fP\^) is placed in
-.IR name ,
-.SM
-.B OPTARG
-is unset, and a diagnostic message is printed.
-If
-.B getopts
-is silent, then a colon (\^\fB:\fP\^) is placed in
-.I name
-and
-.SM
-.B OPTARG
-is set to the option character found.
-.sp 1
-.B getopts
-returns true if an option, specified or unspecified, is found.
-It returns false if the end of options is encountered or an
-error occurs.
-.TP
-\fBhash\fP [\fB\-lr\fP] [\fB\-p\fP \fIfilename\fP] [\fB\-dt\fP] [\fIname\fP]
-For each
-.IR name ,
-the full file name of the command is determined by searching
-the directories in
-.B $PATH
-and remembered.
-If the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, no path search is performed, and
-.I filename
-is used as the full file name of the command.
-The
-.B \-r
-option causes the shell to forget all
-remembered locations.
-The
-.B \-d
-option causes the shell to forget the remembered location of each \fIname\fP.
-If the
-.B \-t
-option is supplied, the full pathname to which each \fIname\fP corresponds
-is printed. If multiple \fIname\fP arguments are supplied with \fB\-t\fP,
-the \fIname\fP is printed before the hashed full pathname.
-The
-.B \-l
-option causes output to be displayed in a format that may be reused as input.
-If no arguments are given, or if only \fB\-l\fP is supplied,
-information about remembered commands is printed.
-The return status is true unless a
-.I name
-is not found or an invalid option is supplied.
-.TP
-\fBhelp\fP [\fB\-s\fP] [\fIpattern\fP]
-Display helpful information about builtin commands. If
-.I pattern
-is specified,
-.B help
-gives detailed help on all commands matching
-.IR pattern ;
-otherwise help for all the builtins and shell control structures
-is printed.
-The \fB\-s\fP option restricts the information displayed to a short
-usage synopsis.
-The return status is 0 unless no command matches
-.IR pattern .
-.TP
-\fBhistory [\fIn\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-c\fP
-.TP
-\fBhistory \-d\fP \fIoffset\fP
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-anrw\fP [\fIfilename\fP]
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-p\fP \fIarg\fP [\fIarg ...\fP]
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-s\fP \fIarg\fP [\fIarg ...\fP]
-.PD
-With no options, display the command
-history list with line numbers. Lines listed
-with a
-.B *
-have been modified. An argument of
-.I n
-lists only the last
-.I n
-lines. If \fIfilename\fP is supplied, it is used as the
-name of the history file; if not, the value of
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-is used. Options, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Clear the history list by deleting all the entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fP \fIoffset\fP
-Delete the history entry at position \fIoffset\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Append the ``new'' history lines (history lines entered since the
-beginning of the current \fBbash\fP session) to the history file.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Read the history lines not already read from the history
-file into the current history list. These are lines
-appended to the history file since the beginning of the
-current \fBbash\fP session.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Read the contents of the history file
-and use them as the current history.
-.TP
-.B \-w
-Write the current history to the history file, overwriting the
-history file's contents.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Perform history substitution on the following \fIargs\fP and display
-the result on the standard output.
-Does not store the results in the history list.
-Each \fIarg\fP must be quoted to disable normal history expansion.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Store the
-.I args
-in the history list as a single entry. The last command in the
-history list is removed before the
-.I args
-are added.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered, an
-error occurs while reading or writing the history file, an invalid
-\fIoffset\fP is supplied as an argument to \fB\-d\fP, or the
-history expansion supplied as an argument to \fB\-p\fP fails.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBjobs\fP [\fB\-lnprs\fP] [ \fIjobspec\fP ... ]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBjobs\fP \fB\-x\fP \fIcommand\fP [ \fIargs\fP ... ]
-.PD
-The first form lists the active jobs. The options have the following
-meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-l
-List process IDs
-in addition to the normal information.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-List only the process ID of the job's process group
-leader.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Display information only about jobs that have changed status since
-the user was last notified of their status.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Restrict output to running jobs.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Restrict output to stopped jobs.
-.PD
-.PP
-If
-.I jobspec
-is given, output is restricted to information about that job.
-The return status is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered
-or an invalid
-.I jobspec
-is supplied.
-.PP
-If the
-.B \-x
-option is supplied,
-.B jobs
-replaces any
-.I jobspec
-found in
-.I command
-or
-.I args
-with the corresponding process group ID, and executes
-.I command
-passing it
-.IR args ,
-returning its exit status.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBkill\fP [\fB\-s\fP \fIsigspec\fP | \fB\-n\fP \fIsignum\fP | \fB\-\fP\fIsigspec\fP] [\fIpid\fP | \fIjobspec\fP] ...
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBkill\fP \fB\-l\fP [\fIsigspec\fP | \fIexit_status\fP]
-.PD
-Send the signal named by
-.I sigspec
-or
-.I signum
-to the processes named by
-.I pid
-or
-.IR jobspec .
-.I sigspec
-is either a signal name such as
-.SM
-.B SIGKILL
-or a signal number;
-.I signum
-is a signal number. If
-.I sigspec
-is a signal name, the name may be
-given with or without the
-.SM
-.B SIG
-prefix.
-If
-.I sigspec
-is not present, then
-.SM
-.B SIGTERM
-is assumed.
-An argument of
-.B \-l
-lists the signal names.
-If any arguments are supplied when
-.B \-l
-is given, the names of the signals corresponding to the arguments are
-listed, and the return status is 0.
-The \fIexit_status\fP argument to
-.B \-l
-is a number specifying either a signal number or the exit status of
-a process terminated by a signal.
-.B kill
-returns true if at least one signal was successfully sent, or false
-if an error occurs or an invalid option is encountered.
-.TP
-\fBlet\fP \fIarg\fP [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Each
-.I arg
-is an arithmetic expression to be evaluated (see
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" ).
-If the last
-.I arg
-evaluates to 0,
-.B let
-returns 1; 0 is returned otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBlocal\fP [\fIoption\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP] ...]
-For each argument, a local variable named
-.I name
-is created, and assigned
-.IR value .
-The \fIoption\fP can be any of the options accepted by \fBdeclare\fP.
-When
-.B local
-is used within a function, it causes the variable
-.I name
-to have a visible scope restricted to that function and its children.
-With no operands,
-.B local
-writes a list of local variables to the standard output. It is
-an error to use
-.B local
-when not within a function. The return status is 0 unless
-.B local
-is used outside a function, an invalid
-.I name
-is supplied, or
-\fIname\fP is a readonly variable.
-.TP
-.B logout
-Exit a login shell.
-.TP
-\fBpopd\fP [\-\fBn\fP] [+\fIn\fP] [\-\fIn\fP]
-Removes entries from the directory stack. With no arguments,
-removes the top directory from the stack, and performs a
-.B cd
-to the new top directory.
-Arguments, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB+\fP\fIn\fP
-Removes the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the left of the list
-shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero. For example:
-.if n ``popd +0''
-.if t \f(CWpopd +0\fP
-removes the first directory,
-.if n ``popd +1''
-.if t \f(CWpopd +1\fP
-the second.
-.TP
-\fB\-\fP\fIn\fP
-Removes the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the right of the list
-shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero. For example:
-.if n ``popd -0''
-.if t \f(CWpopd -0\fP
-removes the last directory,
-.if n ``popd -1''
-.if t \f(CWpopd -1\fP
-the next to last.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Suppresses the normal change of directory when removing directories
-from the stack, so that only the stack is manipulated.
-.PD
-.PP
-If the
-.B popd
-command is successful, a
-.B dirs
-is performed as well, and the return status is 0.
-.B popd
-returns false if an invalid option is encountered, the directory stack
-is empty, a non-existent directory stack entry is specified, or the
-directory change fails.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBprintf\fP \fIformat\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-Write the formatted \fIarguments\fP to the standard output under the
-control of the \fIformat\fP.
-The \fIformat\fP is a character string which contains three types of objects:
-plain characters, which are simply copied to standard output, character
-escape sequences, which are converted and copied to the standard output, and
-format specifications, each of which causes printing of the next successive
-\fIargument\fP.
-In addition to the standard \fIprintf\fP(1) formats, \fB%b\fP causes
-\fBprintf\fP to expand backslash escape sequences in the corresponding
-\fIargument\fP, and \fB%q\fP causes \fBprintf\fP to output the corresponding
-\fIargument\fP in a format that can be reused as shell input.
-.sp 1
-The \fIformat\fP is reused as necessary to consume all of the \fIarguments\fP.
-If the \fIformat\fP requires more \fIarguments\fP than are supplied, the
-extra format specifications behave as if a zero value or null string, as
-appropriate, had been supplied. The return value is zero on success,
-non-zero on failure.
-.TP
-\fBpushd\fP [\fB\-n\fP] [\fIdir\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBpushd\fP [\fB\-n\fP] [+\fIn\fP] [\-\fIn\fP]
-.PD
-Adds a directory to the top of the directory stack, or rotates
-the stack, making the new top of the stack the current working
-directory. With no arguments, exchanges the top two directories
-and returns 0, unless the directory stack is empty.
-Arguments, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB+\fP\fIn\fP
-Rotates the stack so that the \fIn\fPth directory
-(counting from the left of the list shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero)
-is at the top.
-.TP
-\fB\-\fP\fIn\fP
-Rotates the stack so that the \fIn\fPth directory
-(counting from the right of the list shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero) is at the top.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Suppresses the normal change of directory when adding directories
-to the stack, so that only the stack is manipulated.
-.TP
-.I dir
-Adds
-.I dir
-to the directory stack at the top, making it the
-new current working directory.
-.PD
-.PP
-If the
-.B pushd
-command is successful, a
-.B dirs
-is performed as well.
-If the first form is used,
-.B pushd
-returns 0 unless the cd to
-.I dir
-fails. With the second form,
-.B pushd
-returns 0 unless the directory stack is empty,
-a non-existent directory stack element is specified,
-or the directory change to the specified new current directory
-fails.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBpwd\fP [\fB\-LP\fP]
-Print the absolute pathname of the current working directory.
-The pathname printed contains no symbolic links if the
-.B \-P
-option is supplied or the
-.B \-o physical
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command is enabled.
-If the
-.B \-L
-option is used, the pathname printed may contain symbolic links.
-The return status is 0 unless an error occurs while
-reading the name of the current directory or an
-invalid option is supplied.
-.TP
-\fBread\fP [\fB\-ers\fP] [\fB\-u\fP \fIfd\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItimeout\fP] [\fB\-a\fP \fIaname\fP] [\fB\-p\fP \fIprompt\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fInchars\fP] [\fB\-d\fP \fIdelim\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-One line is read from the standard input, or from the file descriptor
-\fIfd\fP supplied as an argument to the \fB\-u\fP option, and the first word
-is assigned to the first
-.IR name ,
-the second word to the second
-.IR name ,
-and so on, with leftover words and their intervening separators assigned
-to the last
-.IR name .
-If there are fewer words read from the input stream than names,
-the remaining names are assigned empty values.
-The characters in
-.SM
-.B IFS
-are used to split the line into words.
-The backslash character (\fB\e\fP) may be used to remove any special
-meaning for the next character read and for line continuation.
-Options, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a \fIaname\fP
-The words are assigned to sequential indices
-of the array variable
-.IR aname ,
-starting at 0.
-.I aname
-is unset before any new values are assigned.
-Other \fIname\fP arguments are ignored.
-.TP
-.B \-d \fIdelim\fP
-The first character of \fIdelim\fP is used to terminate the input line,
-rather than newline.
-.TP
-.B \-e
-If the standard input
-is coming from a terminal,
-.B readline
-(see
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-above) is used to obtain the line.
-.TP
-.B \-n \fInchars\fP
-\fBread\fP returns after reading \fInchars\fP characters rather than
-waiting for a complete line of input.
-.TP
-.B \-p \fIprompt\fP
-Display \fIprompt\fP on standard error, without a
-trailing newline, before attempting to read any input. The prompt
-is displayed only if input is coming from a terminal.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Backslash does not act as an escape character.
-The backslash is considered to be part of the line.
-In particular, a backslash-newline pair may not be used as a line
-continuation.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Silent mode. If input is coming from a terminal, characters are
-not echoed.
-.TP
-.B \-t \fItimeout\fP
-Cause \fBread\fP to time out and return failure if a complete line of
-input is not read within \fItimeout\fP seconds.
-This option has no effect if \fBread\fP is not reading input from the
-terminal or a pipe.
-.TP
-.B \-u \fIfd\FP
-Read input from file descriptor \fIfd\fP.
-.PD
-.PP
-If no
-.I names
-are supplied, the line read is assigned to the variable
-.SM
-.BR REPLY .
-The return code is zero, unless end-of-file is encountered, \fBread\fP
-times out, or an invalid file descriptor is supplied as the argument to
-\fB\-u\fP.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBreadonly\fP [\fB\-apf\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-.PD
-The given
-\fInames\fP are marked readonly; the values of these
-.I names
-may not be changed by subsequent assignment.
-If the
-.B \-f
-option is supplied, the functions corresponding to the
-\fInames\fP are so
-marked.
-The
-.B \-a
-option restricts the variables to arrays.
-If no
-.I name
-arguments are given, or if the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, a list of all readonly names is printed.
-The
-.B \-p
-option causes output to be displayed in a format that
-may be reused as input.
-The return status is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered,
-one of the
-.I names
-is not a valid shell variable name, or
-.B \-f
-is supplied with a
-.I name
-that is not a function.
-.TP
-\fBreturn\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Causes a function to exit with the return value specified by
-.IR n .
-If
-.I n
-is omitted, the return status is that of the last command
-executed in the function body. If used outside a function,
-but during execution of a script by the
-.B .
-(\fBsource\fP) command, it causes the shell to stop executing
-that script and return either
-.I n
-or the exit status of the last command executed within the
-script as the exit status of the script. If used outside a
-function and not during execution of a script by \fB.\fP\^,
-the return status is false.
-.TP
-\fBset\fP [\fB\-\-abefhkmnptuvxBCHP\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoption\fP] [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Without options, the name and value of each shell variable are displayed
-in a format that can be reused as input.
-The output is sorted according to the current locale.
-When options are specified, they set or unset shell attributes.
-Any arguments remaining after the options are processed are treated
-as values for the positional parameters and are assigned, in order, to
-.BR $1 ,
-.BR $2 ,
-.B ...
-.BR $\fIn\fP .
-Options, if specified, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 8
-.B \-a
-Automatically mark variables and functions which are modified or created
-for export to the environment of subsequent commands.
-.TP 8
-.B \-b
-Report the status of terminated background jobs
-immediately, rather than before the next primary prompt. This is
-effective only when job control is enabled.
-.TP 8
-.B \-e
-Exit immediately if a \fIsimple command\fP (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-above) exits with a non-zero status. The shell does not exit if the
-command that fails is part of an
-.I until
-or
-.I while
-loop,
-part of an
-.I if
-statement, part of a
-.B &&
-or
-.B \(bv\(bv
-list, or if the command's return value is
-being inverted via
-.BR ! .
-A trap on \fBERR\fP, if set, is executed before the shell exits.
-.TP 8
-.B \-f
-Disable pathname expansion.
-.TP 8
-.B \-h
-Remember the location of commands as they are looked up for execution.
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B \-k
-All arguments in the form of assignment statements
-are placed in the environment for a command, not just
-those that precede the command name.
-.TP 8
-.B \-m
-Monitor mode. Job control is enabled. This option is on
-by default for interactive shells on systems that support
-it (see
-.SM
-.B JOB CONTROL
-above). Background processes run in a separate process
-group and a line containing their exit status is printed
-upon their completion.
-.TP 8
-.B \-n
-Read commands but do not execute them. This may be used to
-check a shell script for syntax errors. This is ignored by
-interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B \-o \fIoption\-name\fP
-The \fIoption\-name\fP can be one of the following:
-.RS
-.TP 8
-.B allexport
-Same as
-.BR \-a .
-.TP 8
-.B braceexpand
-Same as
-.BR \-B .
-.TP 8
-.B emacs
-Use an emacs-style command line editing interface. This is enabled
-by default when the shell is interactive, unless the shell is started
-with the
-.B \-\-noediting
-option.
-.TP 8
-.B errexit
-Same as
-.BR \-e .
-.TP 8
-.B hashall
-Same as
-.BR \-h .
-.TP 8
-.B histexpand
-Same as
-.BR \-H .
-.TP 8
-.B history
-Enable command history, as described above under
-.SM
-.BR HISTORY .
-This option is on by default in interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B ignoreeof
-The effect is as if the shell command
-.if t \f(CWIGNOREEOF=10\fP
-.if n ``IGNOREEOF=10''
-had been executed
-(see
-.B Shell Variables
-above).
-.TP 8
-.B keyword
-Same as
-.BR \-k .
-.TP 8
-.B monitor
-Same as
-.BR \-m .
-.TP 8
-.B noclobber
-Same as
-.BR \-C .
-.TP 8
-.B noexec
-Same as
-.BR \-n .
-.TP 8
-.B noglob
-Same as
-.BR \-f .
-.B nolog
-Currently ignored.
-.TP 8
-.B notify
-Same as
-.BR \-b .
-.TP 8
-.B nounset
-Same as
-.BR \-u .
-.TP 8
-.B onecmd
-Same as
-.BR \-t .
-.TP 8
-.B physical
-Same as
-.BR \-P .
-.TP 8
-.B posix
-Change the behavior of
-.B bash
-where the default operation differs
-from the POSIX 1003.2 standard to match the standard (\fIposix mode\fP).
-.TP 8
-.B privileged
-Same as
-.BR \-p .
-.TP 8
-.B verbose
-Same as
-.BR \-v .
-.TP 8
-.B vi
-Use a vi-style command line editing interface.
-.TP 8
-.B xtrace
-Same as
-.BR \-x .
-.sp .5
-.PP
-If
-.B \-o
-is supplied with no \fIoption\-name\fP, the values of the current options are
-printed.
-If
-.B +o
-is supplied with no \fIoption\-name\fP, a series of
-.B set
-commands to recreate the current option settings is displayed on
-the standard output.
-.RE
-.TP 8
-.B \-p
-Turn on
-.I privileged
-mode. In this mode, the
-.SM
-.B $ENV
-and
-.SM
-.B $BASH_ENV
-files are not processed, shell functions are not inherited from the
-environment, and the
-.SM
-.B SHELLOPTS
-variable, if it appears in the environment, is ignored.
-If the shell is started with the effective user (group) id not equal to the
-real user (group) id, and the \fB\-p\fP option is not supplied, these actions
-are taken and the effective user id is set to the real user id.
-If the \fB\-p\fP option is supplied at startup, the effective user id is
-not reset.
-Turning this option off causes the effective user
-and group ids to be set to the real user and group ids.
-.TP 8
-.B \-t
-Exit after reading and executing one command.
-.TP 8
-.B \-u
-Treat unset variables as an error when performing
-parameter expansion. If expansion is attempted on an
-unset variable, the shell prints an error message, and,
-if not interactive, exits with a non-zero status.
-.TP 8
-.B \-v
-Print shell input lines as they are read.
-.TP 8
-.B \-x
-After expanding each \fIsimple command\fP,
-display the expanded value of
-.SM
-.BR PS4 ,
-followed by the command and its expanded arguments.
-.TP 8
-.B \-B
-The shell performs brace expansion (see
-.B Brace Expansion
-above). This is on by default.
-.TP 8
-.B \-C
-If set,
-.B bash
-does not overwrite an existing file with the
-.BR > ,
-.BR >& ,
-and
-.B <>
-redirection operators. This may be overridden when
-creating output files by using the redirection operator
-.B >|
-instead of
-.BR > .
-.TP 8
-.B \-H
-Enable
-.B !
-style history substitution. This option is on by
-default when the shell is interactive.
-.TP 8
-.B \-P
-If set, the shell does not follow symbolic links when executing
-commands such as
-.B cd
-that change the current working directory. It uses the
-physical directory structure instead. By default,
-.B bash
-follows the logical chain of directories when performing commands
-which change the current directory.
-.TP 8
-.B \-\-
-If no arguments follow this option, then the positional parameters are
-unset. Otherwise, the positional parameters are set to the
-\fIarg\fPs, even if some of them begin with a
-.BR \- .
-.TP 8
-.B \-
-Signal the end of options, cause all remaining \fIarg\fPs to be
-assigned to the positional parameters. The
-.B \-x
-and
-.B \-v
-options are turned off.
-If there are no \fIarg\fPs,
-the positional parameters remain unchanged.
-.PD
-.PP
-The options are off by default unless otherwise noted.
-Using + rather than \- causes these options to be turned off.
-The options can also be specified as arguments to an invocation of
-the shell.
-The current set of options may be found in
-.BR $\- .
-The return status is always true unless an invalid option is encountered.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBshift\fP [\fIn\fP]
-The positional parameters from \fIn\fP+1 ... are renamed to
-.B $1
-.B ....
-Parameters represented by the numbers \fB$#\fP
-down to \fB$#\fP\-\fIn\fP+1 are unset.
-.I n
-must be a non-negative number less than or equal to \fB$#\fP.
-If
-.I n
-is 0, no parameters are changed.
-If
-.I n
-is not given, it is assumed to be 1.
-If
-.I n
-is greater than \fB$#\fP, the positional parameters are not changed.
-The return status is greater than zero if
-.I n
-is greater than
-.B $#
-or less than zero; otherwise 0.
-.TP
-\fBshopt\fP [\fB\-pqsu\fP] [\fB\-o\fP] [\fIoptname\fP ...]
-Toggle the values of variables controlling optional shell behavior.
-With no options, or with the
-.B \-p
-option, a list of all settable options is displayed, with
-an indication of whether or not each is set.
-The \fB\-p\fP option causes output to be displayed in a form that
-may be reused as input.
-Other options have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Enable (set) each \fIoptname\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Disable (unset) each \fIoptname\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Suppresses normal output (quiet mode); the return status indicates
-whether the \fIoptname\fP is set or unset.
-If multiple \fIoptname\fP arguments are given with
-.BR \-q ,
-the return status is zero if all \fIoptnames\fP are enabled; non-zero
-otherwise.
-.TP
-.B \-o
-Restricts the values of \fIoptname\fP to be those defined for the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin.
-.PD
-.PP
-If either
-.B \-s
-or
-.B \-u
-is used with no \fIoptname\fP arguments, the display is limited to
-those options which are set or unset, respectively.
-Unless otherwise noted, the \fBshopt\fP options are disabled (unset)
-by default.
-.PP
-The return status when listing options is zero if all \fIoptnames\fP
-are enabled, non-zero otherwise. When setting or unsetting options,
-the return status is zero unless an \fIoptname\fP is not a valid shell
-option.
-.PP
-The list of \fBshopt\fP options is:
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp 1v
-.PD 0
-.TP 8
-.B cdable_vars
-If set, an argument to the
-.B cd
-builtin command that
-is not a directory is assumed to be the name of a variable whose
-value is the directory to change to.
-.TP 8
-.B cdspell
-If set, minor errors in the spelling of a directory component in a
-.B cd
-command will be corrected.
-The errors checked for are transposed characters,
-a missing character, and one character too many.
-If a correction is found, the corrected file name is printed,
-and the command proceeds.
-This option is only used by interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B checkhash
-If set, \fBbash\fP checks that a command found in the hash
-table exists before trying to execute it. If a hashed command no
-longer exists, a normal path search is performed.
-.TP 8
-.B checkwinsize
-If set, \fBbash\fP checks the window size after each command
-and, if necessary, updates the values of
-.SM
-.B LINES
-and
-.SM
-.BR COLUMNS .
-.TP 8
-.B cmdhist
-If set,
-.B bash
-attempts to save all lines of a multiple-line
-command in the same history entry. This allows
-easy re-editing of multi-line commands.
-.TP 8
-.B dotglob
-If set,
-.B bash
-includes filenames beginning with a `.' in the results of pathname
-expansion.
-.TP 8
-.B execfail
-If set, a non-interactive shell will not exit if
-it cannot execute the file specified as an argument to the
-.B exec
-builtin command. An interactive shell does not exit if
-.B exec
-fails.
-.TP 8
-.B expand_aliases
-If set, aliases are expanded as described above under
-.SM
-.BR ALIASES .
-This option is enabled by default for interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B extglob
-If set, the extended pattern matching features described above under
-\fBPathname Expansion\fP are enabled.
-.TP 8
-.B histappend
-If set, the history list is appended to the file named by the value
-of the
-.B HISTFILE
-variable when the shell exits, rather than overwriting the file.
-.TP 8
-.B histreedit
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used, a user is given the opportunity to re-edit a
-failed history substitution.
-.TP 8
-.B histverify
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used, the results of history substitution are not immediately
-passed to the shell parser. Instead, the resulting line is loaded into
-the \fBreadline\fP editing buffer, allowing further modification.
-.TP 8
-.B hostcomplete
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used, \fBbash\fP will attempt to perform hostname completion when a
-word containing a \fB@\fP is being completed (see
-.B Completing
-under
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-above).
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B huponexit
-If set, \fBbash\fP will send
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-to all jobs when an interactive login shell exits.
-.TP 8
-.B interactive_comments
-If set, allow a word beginning with
-.B #
-to cause that word and all remaining characters on that
-line to be ignored in an interactive shell (see
-.SM
-.B COMMENTS
-above). This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B lithist
-If set, and the
-.B cmdhist
-option is enabled, multi-line commands are saved to the history with
-embedded newlines rather than using semicolon separators where possible.
-.TP 8
-.B login_shell
-The shell sets this option if it is started as a login shell (see
-.SM
-.B "INVOCATION"
-above).
-The value may not be changed.
-.TP 8
-.B mailwarn
-If set, and a file that \fBbash\fP is checking for mail has been
-accessed since the last time it was checked, the message ``The mail in
-\fImailfile\fP has been read'' is displayed.
-.TP 8
-.B no_empty_cmd_completion
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used,
-.B bash
-will not attempt to search the \fBPATH\fP for possible completions when
-completion is attempted on an empty line.
-.TP 8
-.B nocaseglob
-If set,
-.B bash
-matches filenames in a case\-insensitive fashion when performing pathname
-expansion (see
-.B Pathname Expansion
-above).
-.TP 8
-.B nullglob
-If set,
-.B bash
-allows patterns which match no
-files (see
-.B Pathname Expansion
-above)
-to expand to a null string, rather than themselves.
-.TP 8
-.B progcomp
-If set, the programmable completion facilities (see
-\fBProgrammable Completion\fP above) are enabled.
-This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B promptvars
-If set, prompt strings undergo variable and parameter expansion after
-being expanded as described in
-.SM
-.B PROMPTING
-above. This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B restricted_shell
-The shell sets this option if it is started in restricted mode (see
-.SM
-.B "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-below).
-The value may not be changed.
-This is not reset when the startup files are executed, allowing
-the startup files to discover whether or not a shell is restricted.
-.TP 8
-.B shift_verbose
-If set, the
-.B shift
-builtin prints an error message when the shift count exceeds the
-number of positional parameters.
-.TP 8
-.B sourcepath
-If set, the
-\fBsource\fP (\fB.\fP) builtin uses the value of
-.SM
-.B PATH
-to find the directory containing the file supplied as an argument.
-This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B xpg_echo
-If set, the \fBecho\fP builtin expands backslash-escape sequences
-by default.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBsuspend\fP [\fB\-f\fP]
-Suspend the execution of this shell until it receives a
-.SM
-.B SIGCONT
-signal. The
-.B \-f
-option says not to complain if this is
-a login shell; just suspend anyway. The return status is 0 unless
-the shell is a login shell and
-.B \-f
-is not supplied, or if job control is not enabled.
-.TP
-\fBtest\fP \fIexpr\fP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB[\fP \fIexpr\fP \fB]\fP
-Return a status of 0 or 1 depending on
-the evaluation of the conditional expression
-.IR expr .
-Each operator and operand must be a separate argument.
-Expressions are composed of the primaries described above under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" .
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Expressions may be combined using the following operators, listed
-in decreasing order of precedence.
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B ! \fIexpr\fP
-True if
-.I expr
-is false.
-.TP
-.B ( \fIexpr\fP )
-Returns the value of \fIexpr\fP.
-This may be used to override the normal precedence of operators.
-.TP
-\fIexpr1\fP \-\fBa\fP \fIexpr2\fP
-True if both
-.I expr1
-and
-.I expr2
-are true.
-.TP
-\fIexpr1\fP \-\fBo\fP \fIexpr2\fP
-True if either
-.I expr1
-or
-.I expr2
-is true.
-.PD
-.PP
-\fBtest\fP and \fB[\fP evaluate conditional
-expressions using a set of rules based on the number of arguments.
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-.PD 0
-.TP
-0 arguments
-The expression is false.
-.TP
-1 argument
-The expression is true if and only if the argument is not null.
-.TP
-2 arguments
-If the first argument is \fB!\fP, the expression is true if and
-only if the second argument is null.
-If the first argument is one of the unary conditional operators listed above
-under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" ,
-the expression is true if the unary test is true.
-If the first argument is not a valid unary conditional operator, the expression
-is false.
-.TP
-3 arguments
-If the second argument is one of the binary conditional operators listed above
-under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" ,
-the result of the expression is the result of the binary test using
-the first and third arguments as operands.
-If the first argument is \fB!\fP, the value is the negation of
-the two-argument test using the second and third arguments.
-If the first argument is exactly \fB(\fP and the third argument is
-exactly \fB)\fP, the result is the one-argument test of the second
-argument.
-Otherwise, the expression is false.
-The \fB\-a\fP and \fB\-o\fP operators are considered binary operators
-in this case.
-.TP
-4 arguments
-If the first argument is \fB!\fP, the result is the negation of
-the three-argument expression composed of the remaining arguments.
-Otherwise, the expression is parsed and evaluated according to
-precedence using the rules listed above.
-.TP
-5 or more arguments
-The expression is parsed and evaluated according to precedence
-using the rules listed above.
-.RE
-.PD
-.TP
-.B times
-Print the accumulated user and system times for the shell and
-for processes run from the shell. The return status is 0.
-.TP
-\fBtrap\fP [\fB\-lp\fP] [\fIarg\fP] [\fIsigspec\fP ...]
-The command
-.I arg
-is to be read and executed when the shell receives
-signal(s)
-.IR sigspec .
-If
-.I arg
-is absent or
-.BR \- ,
-all specified signals are
-reset to their original values (the values they had
-upon entrance to the shell).
-If
-.I arg
-is the null string the signal specified by each
-.I sigspec
-is ignored by the shell and by the commands it invokes.
-If
-.I arg
-is not present and
-.B \-p
-has been supplied, then the trap commands associated with each
-.I sigspec
-are displayed.
-If no arguments are supplied or if only
-.B \-p
-is given,
-.B trap
-prints the list of commands associated with each signal number.
-Each
-.I sigspec
-is either
-a signal name defined in <\fIsignal.h\fP>, or a signal number.
-If a
-.I sigspec
-is
-.SM
-.B EXIT
-(0) the command
-.I arg
-is executed on exit from the shell.
-If a
-.I sigspec
-is
-.SM
-.BR DEBUG ,
-the command
-.I arg
-is executed after every \fIsimple command\fP (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-above).
-If a
-.I sigspec
-is
-.SM
-.BR ERR ,
-the command
-.I arg
-is executed whenever a simple command has a non\-zero exit status.
-The
-.SM
-.BR ERR
-trap is not executed if the failed command is part of an
-.I until
-or
-.I while
-loop,
-part of an
-.I if
-statement, part of a
-.B &&
-or
-.B \(bv\(bv
-list, or if the command's return value is
-being inverted via
-.BR ! .
-The
-.B \-l
-option causes the shell to print a list of signal names and
-their corresponding numbers.
-Signals ignored upon entry to the shell cannot be trapped or reset.
-Trapped signals are reset to their original values in a child
-process when it is created.
-The return status is false if any
-.I sigspec
-is invalid; otherwise
-.B trap
-returns true.
-.TP
-\fBtype\fP [\fB\-aftpP\fP] \fIname\fP [\fIname\fP ...]
-With no options,
-indicate how each
-.I name
-would be interpreted if used as a command name.
-If the
-.B \-t
-option is used,
-.B type
-prints a string which is one of
-.IR alias ,
-.IR keyword ,
-.IR function ,
-.IR builtin ,
-or
-.I file
-if
-.I name
-is an alias, shell reserved word, function, builtin, or disk file,
-respectively.
-If the
-.I name
-is not found, then nothing is printed, and an exit status of false
-is returned.
-If the
-.B \-p
-option is used,
-.B type
-either returns the name of the disk file
-that would be executed if
-.I name
-were specified as a command name,
-or nothing if
-.if t \f(CWtype -t name\fP
-.if n ``type -t name''
-would not return
-.IR file .
-The
-.B \-P
-option forces a
-.SM
-.B PATH
-search for each \fIname\fP, even if
-.if t \f(CWtype -t name\fP
-.if n ``type -t name''
-would not return
-.IR file .
-If a command is hashed,
-.B \-p
-and
-.B \-P
-print the hashed value, not necessarily the file that appears
-first in
-.SM
-.BR PATH .
-If the
-.B \-a
-option is used,
-.B type
-prints all of the places that contain
-an executable named
-.IR name .
-This includes aliases and functions,
-if and only if the
-.B \-p
-option is not also used.
-The table of hashed commands is not consulted
-when using
-.BR \-a .
-The
-.B \-f
-option suppresses shell function lookup, as with the \fBcommand\fP builtin.
-.B type
-returns true if any of the arguments are found, false if
-none are found.
-.TP
-\fBulimit\fP [\fB\-SHacdflmnpstuv\fP [\fIlimit\fP]]
-Provides control over the resources available to the shell and to
-processes started by it, on systems that allow such control.
-The \fB\-H\fP and \fB\-S\fP options specify that the hard or soft limit is
-set for the given resource. A hard limit cannot be increased once it
-is set; a soft limit may be increased up to the value of the hard limit.
-If neither \fB\-H\fP nor \fB\-S\fP is specified, both the soft and hard
-limits are set.
-The value of
-.I limit
-can be a number in the unit specified for the resource
-or one of the special values
-.BR hard ,
-.BR soft ,
-or
-.BR unlimited ,
-which stand for the current hard limit, the current soft limit, and
-no limit, respectively.
-If
-.I limit
-is omitted, the current value of the soft limit of the resource is
-printed, unless the \fB\-H\fP option is given. When more than one
-resource is specified, the limit name and unit are printed before the value.
-Other options are interpreted as follows:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a
-All current limits are reported
-.TP
-.B \-c
-The maximum size of core files created
-.TP
-.B \-d
-The maximum size of a process's data segment
-.TP
-.B \-f
-The maximum size of files created by the shell
-.TP
-.B \-l
-The maximum size that may be locked into memory
-.TP
-.B \-m
-The maximum resident set size
-.TP
-.B \-n
-The maximum number of open file descriptors (most systems do not
-allow this value to be set)
-.TP
-.B \-p
-The pipe size in 512-byte blocks (this may not be set)
-.TP
-.B \-s
-The maximum stack size
-.TP
-.B \-t
-The maximum amount of cpu time in seconds
-.TP
-.B \-u
-The maximum number of processes available to a single user
-.TP
-.B \-v
-The maximum amount of virtual memory available to the shell
-.PD
-.PP
-If
-.I limit
-is given, it is the new value of the specified resource (the
-.B \-a
-option is display only).
-If no option is given, then
-.B \-f
-is assumed. Values are in 1024-byte increments, except for
-.BR \-t ,
-which is in seconds,
-.BR \-p ,
-which is in units of 512-byte blocks,
-and
-.B \-n
-and
-.BR \-u ,
-which are unscaled values.
-The return status is 0 unless an invalid option or argument is supplied,
-or an error occurs while setting a new limit.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBumask\fP [\fB\-p\fP] [\fB\-S\fP] [\fImode\fP]
-The user file-creation mask is set to
-.IR mode .
-If
-.I mode
-begins with a digit, it
-is interpreted as an octal number; otherwise
-it is interpreted as a symbolic mode mask similar
-to that accepted by
-.IR chmod (1).
-If
-.I mode
-is omitted, the current value of the mask is printed.
-The
-.B \-S
-option causes the mask to be printed in symbolic form; the
-default output is an octal number.
-If the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, and
-.I mode
-is omitted, the output is in a form that may be reused as input.
-The return status is 0 if the mode was successfully changed or if
-no \fImode\fP argument was supplied, and false otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBunalias\fP [\-\fBa\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-Remove each \fIname\fP from the list of defined aliases. If
-.B \-a
-is supplied, all alias definitions are removed. The return
-value is true unless a supplied
-.I name
-is not a defined alias.
-.TP
-\fBunset\fP [\-\fBfv\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-For each
-.IR name ,
-remove the corresponding variable or function.
-If no options are supplied, or the
-.B \-v
-option is given, each
-.I name
-refers to a shell variable.
-Read-only variables may not be unset.
-If
-.B \-f
-is specifed,
-each
-.I name
-refers to a shell function, and the function definition
-is removed.
-Each unset variable or function is removed from the environment
-passed to subsequent commands.
-If any of
-.SM
-.BR RANDOM ,
-.SM
-.BR SECONDS ,
-.SM
-.BR LINENO ,
-.SM
-.BR HISTCMD ,
-.SM
-.BR FUNCNAME ,
-.SM
-.BR GROUPS ,
-or
-.SM
-.B DIRSTACK
-are unset, they lose their special properties, even if they are
-subsequently reset. The exit status is true unless a
-.I name
-does not exist or is readonly.
-.TP
-\fBwait\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Wait for the specified process and return its termination
-status.
-.I n
-may be a process
-ID or a job specification; if a job spec is given, all processes
-in that job's pipeline are waited for. If
-.I n
-is not given, all currently active child processes
-are waited for, and the return status is zero. If
-.I n
-specifies a non-existent process or job, the return status is
-127. Otherwise, the return status is the exit status of the last
-process or job waited for.
-.\" bash_builtins
-.if \n(zZ=1 .ig zZ
-.SH "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-.\" rbash.1
-.zY
-.PP
-If
-.B bash
-is started with the name
-.BR rbash ,
-or the
-.B \-r
-option is supplied at invocation,
-the shell becomes restricted.
-A restricted shell is used to
-set up an environment more controlled than the standard shell.
-It behaves identically to
-.B bash
-with the exception that the following are disallowed or not performed:
-.IP \(bu
-changing directories with \fBcd\fP
-.IP \(bu
-setting or unsetting the values of
-.BR SHELL ,
-.BR PATH ,
-.BR ENV ,
-or
-.B BASH_ENV
-.IP \(bu
-specifying command names containing
-.B /
-.IP \(bu
-specifying a file name containing a
-.B /
-as an argument to the
-.B .
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-Specifying a filename containing a slash as an argument to the
-.B \-p
-option to the
-.B hash
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-importing function definitions from the shell environment at startup
-.IP \(bu
-parsing the value of \fBSHELLOPTS\fP from the shell environment at startup
-.IP \(bu
-redirecting output using the >, >|, <>, >&, &>, and >> redirection operators
-.IP \(bu
-using the
-.B exec
-builtin command to replace the shell with another command
-.IP \(bu
-adding or deleting builtin commands with the
-.B \-f
-and
-.B \-d
-options to the
-.B enable
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-Using the \fBenable\fP builtin command to enable disabled shell builtins
-.IP \(bu
-specifying the
-.B \-p
-option to the
-.B command
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-turning off restricted mode with
-\fBset +r\fP or \fBset +o restricted\fP.
-.PP
-These restrictions are enforced after any startup files are read.
-.PP
-When a command that is found to be a shell script is executed (see
-.SM
-.B "COMMAND EXECUTION"
-above),
-.B rbash
-turns off any restrictions in the shell spawned to execute the
-script.
-.\" end of rbash.1
-.if \n(zY=1 .ig zY
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fIBash Reference Manual\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
-.TP
-\fIThe Gnu Readline Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
-.TP
-\fIThe Gnu History Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
-.TP
-\fIPortable Operating System Interface (POSIX) Part 2: Shell and Utilities\fP, IEEE
-.TP
-\fIsh\fP(1), \fIksh\fP(1), \fIcsh\fP(1)
-.TP
-\fIemacs\fP(1), \fIvi\fP(1)
-.TP
-\fIreadline\fP(3)
-.PD
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.FN /bin/bash
-The \fBbash\fP executable
-.TP
-.FN /etc/profile
-The systemwide initialization file, executed for login shells
-.TP
-.FN ~/.bash_profile
-The personal initialization file, executed for login shells
-.TP
-.FN ~/.bashrc
-The individual per-interactive-shell startup file
-.TP
-.FN ~/.bash_logout
-The individual login shell cleanup file, executed when a login shell exits
-.TP
-.FN ~/.inputrc
-Individual \fIreadline\fP initialization file
-.PD
-.SH AUTHORS
-Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation
-.br
-bfox at gnu.org
-.PP
-Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University
-.br
-chet at ins.CWRU.Edu
-.SH BUG REPORTS
-If you find a bug in
-.B bash,
-you should report it. But first, you should
-make sure that it really is a bug, and that it appears in the latest
-version of
-.B bash
-that you have.
-.PP
-Once you have determined that a bug actually exists, use the
-.I bashbug
-command to submit a bug report.
-If you have a fix, you are encouraged to mail that as well!
-Suggestions and `philosophical' bug reports may be mailed
-to \fIbug-bash at gnu.org\fP or posted to the Usenet
-newsgroup
-.BR gnu.bash.bug .
-.PP
-ALL bug reports should include:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-The version number of \fBbash\fR
-.TP
-The hardware and operating system
-.TP
-The compiler used to compile
-.TP
-A description of the bug behaviour
-.TP
-A short script or `recipe' which exercises the bug
-.PD
-.PP
-.I bashbug
-inserts the first three items automatically into the template
-it provides for filing a bug report.
-.PP
-Comments and bug reports concerning
-this manual page should be directed to
-.IR chet at ins.CWRU.Edu .
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-It's too big and too slow.
-.PP
-There are some subtle differences between
-.B bash
-and traditional versions of
-.BR sh ,
-mostly because of the
-.SM
-.B POSIX
-specification.
-.PP
-Aliases are confusing in some uses.
-.PP
-Shell builtin commands and functions are not stoppable/restartable.
-.PP
-Compound commands and command sequences of the form `a ; b ; c'
-are not handled gracefully when process suspension is attempted.
-When a process is stopped, the shell immediately executes the next
-command in the sequence.
-It suffices to place the sequence of commands between
-parentheses to force it into a subshell, which may be stopped as
-a unit.
-.PP
-Commands inside of \fB$(\fP...\fB)\fP command substitution are not
-parsed until substitution is attempted. This will delay error
-reporting until some time after the command is entered.
-.PP
-Array variables may not (yet) be exported.
-.zZ
-.zY
diff --git a/raw/man1/bg.1 b/raw/man1/bg.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/bg.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/bind.1 b/raw/man1/bind.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/bind.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/break.1 b/raw/man1/break.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/break.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/builtin.1 b/raw/man1/builtin.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/builtin.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/builtins.1 b/raw/man1/builtins.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b5ffe0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/builtins.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-.\" This is a hack to force bash builtins into the whatis database
-.\" and to get the list of builtins to come up with the man command.
-.TH BASH_BUILTINS 1 "2001 November 27" "GNU Bash-2.05a"
-.SH NAME
-bash, :, ., [, alias, bg, bind, break, builtin, cd, command, compgen, complete,
-continue, declare, dirs, disown, echo, enable, eval, exec, exit,
-export, fc, fg, getopts, hash, help, history, jobs, kill,
-let, local, logout, popd, printf, pushd, pwd, read, readonly, return, set,
-shift, shopt, source, suspend, test, times, trap, type, typeset,
-ulimit, umask, unalias, unset, wait \- bash built-in commands, see \fBbash\fR(1)
-.SH BASH BUILTIN COMMANDS
-.nr zZ 1
-.so man1/bash.1
-.SH SEE ALSO
-bash(1), sh(1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/bunzip2.1 b/raw/man1/bunzip2.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 623435c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/bunzip2.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,453 +0,0 @@
-.PU
-.TH bzip2 1
-.SH NAME
-bzip2, bunzip2 \- a block-sorting file compressor, v1.0.2
-.br
-bzcat \- decompresses files to stdout
-.br
-bzip2recover \- recovers data from damaged bzip2 files
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ll +8
-.B bzip2
-.RB [ " \-cdfkqstvzVL123456789 " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.ll -8
-.br
-.B bunzip2
-.RB [ " \-fkvsVL " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzcat
-.RB [ " \-s " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzip2recover
-.I "filename"
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I bzip2
-compresses files using the Burrows-Wheeler block sorting
-text compression algorithm, and Huffman coding. Compression is
-generally considerably better than that achieved by more conventional
-LZ77/LZ78-based compressors, and approaches the performance of the PPM
-family of statistical compressors.
-
-The command-line options are deliberately very similar to
-those of
-.I GNU gzip,
-but they are not identical.
-
-.I bzip2
-expects a list of file names to accompany the
-command-line flags. Each file is replaced by a compressed version of
-itself, with the name "original_name.bz2".
-Each compressed file
-has the same modification date, permissions, and, when possible,
-ownership as the corresponding original, so that these properties can
-be correctly restored at decompression time. File name handling is
-naive in the sense that there is no mechanism for preserving original
-file names, permissions, ownerships or dates in filesystems which lack
-these concepts, or have serious file name length restrictions, such as
-MS-DOS.
-
-.I bzip2
-and
-.I bunzip2
-will by default not overwrite existing
-files. If you want this to happen, specify the \-f flag.
-
-If no file names are specified,
-.I bzip2
-compresses from standard
-input to standard output. In this case,
-.I bzip2
-will decline to
-write compressed output to a terminal, as this would be entirely
-incomprehensible and therefore pointless.
-
-.I bunzip2
-(or
-.I bzip2 \-d)
-decompresses all
-specified files. Files which were not created by
-.I bzip2
-will be detected and ignored, and a warning issued.
-.I bzip2
-attempts to guess the filename for the decompressed file
-from that of the compressed file as follows:
-
- filename.bz2 becomes filename
- filename.bz becomes filename
- filename.tbz2 becomes filename.tar
- filename.tbz becomes filename.tar
- anyothername becomes anyothername.out
-
-If the file does not end in one of the recognised endings,
-.I .bz2,
-.I .bz,
-.I .tbz2
-or
-.I .tbz,
-.I bzip2
-complains that it cannot
-guess the name of the original file, and uses the original name
-with
-.I .out
-appended.
-
-As with compression, supplying no
-filenames causes decompression from
-standard input to standard output.
-
-.I bunzip2
-will correctly decompress a file which is the
-concatenation of two or more compressed files. The result is the
-concatenation of the corresponding uncompressed files. Integrity
-testing (\-t)
-of concatenated
-compressed files is also supported.
-
-You can also compress or decompress files to the standard output by
-giving the \-c flag. Multiple files may be compressed and
-decompressed like this. The resulting outputs are fed sequentially to
-stdout. Compression of multiple files
-in this manner generates a stream
-containing multiple compressed file representations. Such a stream
-can be decompressed correctly only by
-.I bzip2
-version 0.9.0 or
-later. Earlier versions of
-.I bzip2
-will stop after decompressing
-the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzcat
-(or
-.I bzip2 -dc)
-decompresses all specified files to
-the standard output.
-
-.I bzip2
-will read arguments from the environment variables
-.I BZIP2
-and
-.I BZIP,
-in that order, and will process them
-before any arguments read from the command line. This gives a
-convenient way to supply default arguments.
-
-Compression is always performed, even if the compressed
-file is slightly
-larger than the original. Files of less than about one hundred bytes
-tend to get larger, since the compression mechanism has a constant
-overhead in the region of 50 bytes. Random data (including the output
-of most file compressors) is coded at about 8.05 bits per byte, giving
-an expansion of around 0.5%.
-
-As a self-check for your protection,
-.I
-bzip2
-uses 32-bit CRCs to
-make sure that the decompressed version of a file is identical to the
-original. This guards against corruption of the compressed data, and
-against undetected bugs in
-.I bzip2
-(hopefully very unlikely). The
-chances of data corruption going undetected is microscopic, about one
-chance in four billion for each file processed. Be aware, though, that
-the check occurs upon decompression, so it can only tell you that
-something is wrong. It can't help you
-recover the original uncompressed
-data. You can use
-.I bzip2recover
-to try to recover data from
-damaged files.
-
-Return values: 0 for a normal exit, 1 for environmental problems (file
-not found, invalid flags, I/O errors, &c), 2 to indicate a corrupt
-compressed file, 3 for an internal consistency error (eg, bug) which
-caused
-.I bzip2
-to panic.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-c --stdout
-Compress or decompress to standard output.
-.TP
-.B \-d --decompress
-Force decompression.
-.I bzip2,
-.I bunzip2
-and
-.I bzcat
-are
-really the same program, and the decision about what actions to take is
-done on the basis of which name is used. This flag overrides that
-mechanism, and forces
-.I bzip2
-to decompress.
-.TP
-.B \-z --compress
-The complement to \-d: forces compression, regardless of the
-invocation name.
-.TP
-.B \-t --test
-Check integrity of the specified file(s), but don't decompress them.
-This really performs a trial decompression and throws away the result.
-.TP
-.B \-f --force
-Force overwrite of output files. Normally,
-.I bzip2
-will not overwrite
-existing output files. Also forces
-.I bzip2
-to break hard links
-to files, which it otherwise wouldn't do.
-
-bzip2 normally declines to decompress files which don't have the
-correct magic header bytes. If forced (-f), however, it will pass
-such files through unmodified. This is how GNU gzip behaves.
-.TP
-.B \-k --keep
-Keep (don't delete) input files during compression
-or decompression.
-.TP
-.B \-s --small
-Reduce memory usage, for compression, decompression and testing. Files
-are decompressed and tested using a modified algorithm which only
-requires 2.5 bytes per block byte. This means any file can be
-decompressed in 2300k of memory, albeit at about half the normal speed.
-
-During compression, \-s selects a block size of 200k, which limits
-memory use to around the same figure, at the expense of your compression
-ratio. In short, if your machine is low on memory (8 megabytes or
-less), use \-s for everything. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-.TP
-.B \-q --quiet
-Suppress non-essential warning messages. Messages pertaining to
-I/O errors and other critical events will not be suppressed.
-.TP
-.B \-v --verbose
-Verbose mode -- show the compression ratio for each file processed.
-Further \-v's increase the verbosity level, spewing out lots of
-information which is primarily of interest for diagnostic purposes.
-.TP
-.B \-L --license -V --version
-Display the software version, license terms and conditions.
-.TP
-.B \-1 (or \-\-fast) to \-9 (or \-\-best)
-Set the block size to 100 k, 200 k .. 900 k when compressing. Has no
-effect when decompressing. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-The \-\-fast and \-\-best aliases are primarily for GNU gzip
-compatibility. In particular, \-\-fast doesn't make things
-significantly faster.
-And \-\-best merely selects the default behaviour.
-.TP
-.B \--
-Treats all subsequent arguments as file names, even if they start
-with a dash. This is so you can handle files with names beginning
-with a dash, for example: bzip2 \-- \-myfilename.
-.TP
-.B \--repetitive-fast --repetitive-best
-These flags are redundant in versions 0.9.5 and above. They provided
-some coarse control over the behaviour of the sorting algorithm in
-earlier versions, which was sometimes useful. 0.9.5 and above have an
-improved algorithm which renders these flags irrelevant.
-
-.SH MEMORY MANAGEMENT
-.I bzip2
-compresses large files in blocks. The block size affects
-both the compression ratio achieved, and the amount of memory needed for
-compression and decompression. The flags \-1 through \-9
-specify the block size to be 100,000 bytes through 900,000 bytes (the
-default) respectively. At decompression time, the block size used for
-compression is read from the header of the compressed file, and
-.I bunzip2
-then allocates itself just enough memory to decompress
-the file. Since block sizes are stored in compressed files, it follows
-that the flags \-1 to \-9 are irrelevant to and so ignored
-during decompression.
-
-Compression and decompression requirements,
-in bytes, can be estimated as:
-
- Compression: 400k + ( 8 x block size )
-
- Decompression: 100k + ( 4 x block size ), or
- 100k + ( 2.5 x block size )
-
-Larger block sizes give rapidly diminishing marginal returns. Most of
-the compression comes from the first two or three hundred k of block
-size, a fact worth bearing in mind when using
-.I bzip2
-on small machines.
-It is also important to appreciate that the decompression memory
-requirement is set at compression time by the choice of block size.
-
-For files compressed with the default 900k block size,
-.I bunzip2
-will require about 3700 kbytes to decompress. To support decompression
-of any file on a 4 megabyte machine,
-.I bunzip2
-has an option to
-decompress using approximately half this amount of memory, about 2300
-kbytes. Decompression speed is also halved, so you should use this
-option only where necessary. The relevant flag is -s.
-
-In general, try and use the largest block size memory constraints allow,
-since that maximises the compression achieved. Compression and
-decompression speed are virtually unaffected by block size.
-
-Another significant point applies to files which fit in a single block
--- that means most files you'd encounter using a large block size. The
-amount of real memory touched is proportional to the size of the file,
-since the file is smaller than a block. For example, compressing a file
-20,000 bytes long with the flag -9 will cause the compressor to
-allocate around 7600k of memory, but only touch 400k + 20000 * 8 = 560
-kbytes of it. Similarly, the decompressor will allocate 3700k but only
-touch 100k + 20000 * 4 = 180 kbytes.
-
-Here is a table which summarises the maximum memory usage for different
-block sizes. Also recorded is the total compressed size for 14 files of
-the Calgary Text Compression Corpus totalling 3,141,622 bytes. This
-column gives some feel for how compression varies with block size.
-These figures tend to understate the advantage of larger block sizes for
-larger files, since the Corpus is dominated by smaller files.
-
- Compress Decompress Decompress Corpus
- Flag usage usage -s usage Size
-
- -1 1200k 500k 350k 914704
- -2 2000k 900k 600k 877703
- -3 2800k 1300k 850k 860338
- -4 3600k 1700k 1100k 846899
- -5 4400k 2100k 1350k 845160
- -6 5200k 2500k 1600k 838626
- -7 6100k 2900k 1850k 834096
- -8 6800k 3300k 2100k 828642
- -9 7600k 3700k 2350k 828642
-
-.SH RECOVERING DATA FROM DAMAGED FILES
-.I bzip2
-compresses files in blocks, usually 900kbytes long. Each
-block is handled independently. If a media or transmission error causes
-a multi-block .bz2
-file to become damaged, it may be possible to
-recover data from the undamaged blocks in the file.
-
-The compressed representation of each block is delimited by a 48-bit
-pattern, which makes it possible to find the block boundaries with
-reasonable certainty. Each block also carries its own 32-bit CRC, so
-damaged blocks can be distinguished from undamaged ones.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-is a simple program whose purpose is to search for
-blocks in .bz2 files, and write each block out into its own .bz2
-file. You can then use
-.I bzip2
-\-t
-to test the
-integrity of the resulting files, and decompress those which are
-undamaged.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-takes a single argument, the name of the damaged file,
-and writes a number of files "rec00001file.bz2",
-"rec00002file.bz2", etc, containing the extracted blocks.
-The output filenames are designed so that the use of
-wildcards in subsequent processing -- for example,
-"bzip2 -dc rec*file.bz2 > recovered_data" -- processes the files in
-the correct order.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-should be of most use dealing with large .bz2
-files, as these will contain many blocks. It is clearly
-futile to use it on damaged single-block files, since a
-damaged block cannot be recovered. If you wish to minimise
-any potential data loss through media or transmission errors,
-you might consider compressing with a smaller
-block size.
-
-.SH PERFORMANCE NOTES
-The sorting phase of compression gathers together similar strings in the
-file. Because of this, files containing very long runs of repeated
-symbols, like "aabaabaabaab ..." (repeated several hundred times) may
-compress more slowly than normal. Versions 0.9.5 and above fare much
-better than previous versions in this respect. The ratio between
-worst-case and average-case compression time is in the region of 10:1.
-For previous versions, this figure was more like 100:1. You can use the
-\-vvvv option to monitor progress in great detail, if you want.
-
-Decompression speed is unaffected by these phenomena.
-
-.I bzip2
-usually allocates several megabytes of memory to operate
-in, and then charges all over it in a fairly random fashion. This means
-that performance, both for compressing and decompressing, is largely
-determined by the speed at which your machine can service cache misses.
-Because of this, small changes to the code to reduce the miss rate have
-been observed to give disproportionately large performance improvements.
-I imagine
-.I bzip2
-will perform best on machines with very large caches.
-
-.SH CAVEATS
-I/O error messages are not as helpful as they could be.
-.I bzip2
-tries hard to detect I/O errors and exit cleanly, but the details of
-what the problem is sometimes seem rather misleading.
-
-This manual page pertains to version 1.0.2 of
-.I bzip2.
-Compressed data created by this version is entirely forwards and
-backwards compatible with the previous public releases, versions
-0.1pl2, 0.9.0, 0.9.5, 1.0.0 and 1.0.1, but with the following
-exception: 0.9.0 and above can correctly decompress multiple
-concatenated compressed files. 0.1pl2 cannot do this; it will stop
-after decompressing just the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-versions prior to this one, 1.0.2, used 32-bit integers to represent
-bit positions in compressed files, so it could not handle compressed
-files more than 512 megabytes long. Version 1.0.2 and above uses
-64-bit ints on some platforms which support them (GNU supported
-targets, and Windows). To establish whether or not bzip2recover was
-built with such a limitation, run it without arguments. In any event
-you can build yourself an unlimited version if you can recompile it
-with MaybeUInt64 set to be an unsigned 64-bit integer.
-
-
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julian Seward, jseward at acm.org.
-
-http://sources.redhat.com/bzip2
-
-The ideas embodied in
-.I bzip2
-are due to (at least) the following
-people: Michael Burrows and David Wheeler (for the block sorting
-transformation), David Wheeler (again, for the Huffman coder), Peter
-Fenwick (for the structured coding model in the original
-.I bzip,
-and many refinements), and Alistair Moffat, Radford Neal and Ian Witten
-(for the arithmetic coder in the original
-.I bzip).
-I am much
-indebted for their help, support and advice. See the manual in the
-source distribution for pointers to sources of documentation. Christian
-von Roques encouraged me to look for faster sorting algorithms, so as to
-speed up compression. Bela Lubkin encouraged me to improve the
-worst-case compression performance.
-The bz* scripts are derived from those of GNU gzip.
-Many people sent patches, helped
-with portability problems, lent machines, gave advice and were generally
-helpful.
diff --git a/raw/man1/bzcat.1 b/raw/man1/bzcat.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 623435c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/bzcat.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,453 +0,0 @@
-.PU
-.TH bzip2 1
-.SH NAME
-bzip2, bunzip2 \- a block-sorting file compressor, v1.0.2
-.br
-bzcat \- decompresses files to stdout
-.br
-bzip2recover \- recovers data from damaged bzip2 files
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ll +8
-.B bzip2
-.RB [ " \-cdfkqstvzVL123456789 " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.ll -8
-.br
-.B bunzip2
-.RB [ " \-fkvsVL " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzcat
-.RB [ " \-s " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzip2recover
-.I "filename"
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I bzip2
-compresses files using the Burrows-Wheeler block sorting
-text compression algorithm, and Huffman coding. Compression is
-generally considerably better than that achieved by more conventional
-LZ77/LZ78-based compressors, and approaches the performance of the PPM
-family of statistical compressors.
-
-The command-line options are deliberately very similar to
-those of
-.I GNU gzip,
-but they are not identical.
-
-.I bzip2
-expects a list of file names to accompany the
-command-line flags. Each file is replaced by a compressed version of
-itself, with the name "original_name.bz2".
-Each compressed file
-has the same modification date, permissions, and, when possible,
-ownership as the corresponding original, so that these properties can
-be correctly restored at decompression time. File name handling is
-naive in the sense that there is no mechanism for preserving original
-file names, permissions, ownerships or dates in filesystems which lack
-these concepts, or have serious file name length restrictions, such as
-MS-DOS.
-
-.I bzip2
-and
-.I bunzip2
-will by default not overwrite existing
-files. If you want this to happen, specify the \-f flag.
-
-If no file names are specified,
-.I bzip2
-compresses from standard
-input to standard output. In this case,
-.I bzip2
-will decline to
-write compressed output to a terminal, as this would be entirely
-incomprehensible and therefore pointless.
-
-.I bunzip2
-(or
-.I bzip2 \-d)
-decompresses all
-specified files. Files which were not created by
-.I bzip2
-will be detected and ignored, and a warning issued.
-.I bzip2
-attempts to guess the filename for the decompressed file
-from that of the compressed file as follows:
-
- filename.bz2 becomes filename
- filename.bz becomes filename
- filename.tbz2 becomes filename.tar
- filename.tbz becomes filename.tar
- anyothername becomes anyothername.out
-
-If the file does not end in one of the recognised endings,
-.I .bz2,
-.I .bz,
-.I .tbz2
-or
-.I .tbz,
-.I bzip2
-complains that it cannot
-guess the name of the original file, and uses the original name
-with
-.I .out
-appended.
-
-As with compression, supplying no
-filenames causes decompression from
-standard input to standard output.
-
-.I bunzip2
-will correctly decompress a file which is the
-concatenation of two or more compressed files. The result is the
-concatenation of the corresponding uncompressed files. Integrity
-testing (\-t)
-of concatenated
-compressed files is also supported.
-
-You can also compress or decompress files to the standard output by
-giving the \-c flag. Multiple files may be compressed and
-decompressed like this. The resulting outputs are fed sequentially to
-stdout. Compression of multiple files
-in this manner generates a stream
-containing multiple compressed file representations. Such a stream
-can be decompressed correctly only by
-.I bzip2
-version 0.9.0 or
-later. Earlier versions of
-.I bzip2
-will stop after decompressing
-the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzcat
-(or
-.I bzip2 -dc)
-decompresses all specified files to
-the standard output.
-
-.I bzip2
-will read arguments from the environment variables
-.I BZIP2
-and
-.I BZIP,
-in that order, and will process them
-before any arguments read from the command line. This gives a
-convenient way to supply default arguments.
-
-Compression is always performed, even if the compressed
-file is slightly
-larger than the original. Files of less than about one hundred bytes
-tend to get larger, since the compression mechanism has a constant
-overhead in the region of 50 bytes. Random data (including the output
-of most file compressors) is coded at about 8.05 bits per byte, giving
-an expansion of around 0.5%.
-
-As a self-check for your protection,
-.I
-bzip2
-uses 32-bit CRCs to
-make sure that the decompressed version of a file is identical to the
-original. This guards against corruption of the compressed data, and
-against undetected bugs in
-.I bzip2
-(hopefully very unlikely). The
-chances of data corruption going undetected is microscopic, about one
-chance in four billion for each file processed. Be aware, though, that
-the check occurs upon decompression, so it can only tell you that
-something is wrong. It can't help you
-recover the original uncompressed
-data. You can use
-.I bzip2recover
-to try to recover data from
-damaged files.
-
-Return values: 0 for a normal exit, 1 for environmental problems (file
-not found, invalid flags, I/O errors, &c), 2 to indicate a corrupt
-compressed file, 3 for an internal consistency error (eg, bug) which
-caused
-.I bzip2
-to panic.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-c --stdout
-Compress or decompress to standard output.
-.TP
-.B \-d --decompress
-Force decompression.
-.I bzip2,
-.I bunzip2
-and
-.I bzcat
-are
-really the same program, and the decision about what actions to take is
-done on the basis of which name is used. This flag overrides that
-mechanism, and forces
-.I bzip2
-to decompress.
-.TP
-.B \-z --compress
-The complement to \-d: forces compression, regardless of the
-invocation name.
-.TP
-.B \-t --test
-Check integrity of the specified file(s), but don't decompress them.
-This really performs a trial decompression and throws away the result.
-.TP
-.B \-f --force
-Force overwrite of output files. Normally,
-.I bzip2
-will not overwrite
-existing output files. Also forces
-.I bzip2
-to break hard links
-to files, which it otherwise wouldn't do.
-
-bzip2 normally declines to decompress files which don't have the
-correct magic header bytes. If forced (-f), however, it will pass
-such files through unmodified. This is how GNU gzip behaves.
-.TP
-.B \-k --keep
-Keep (don't delete) input files during compression
-or decompression.
-.TP
-.B \-s --small
-Reduce memory usage, for compression, decompression and testing. Files
-are decompressed and tested using a modified algorithm which only
-requires 2.5 bytes per block byte. This means any file can be
-decompressed in 2300k of memory, albeit at about half the normal speed.
-
-During compression, \-s selects a block size of 200k, which limits
-memory use to around the same figure, at the expense of your compression
-ratio. In short, if your machine is low on memory (8 megabytes or
-less), use \-s for everything. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-.TP
-.B \-q --quiet
-Suppress non-essential warning messages. Messages pertaining to
-I/O errors and other critical events will not be suppressed.
-.TP
-.B \-v --verbose
-Verbose mode -- show the compression ratio for each file processed.
-Further \-v's increase the verbosity level, spewing out lots of
-information which is primarily of interest for diagnostic purposes.
-.TP
-.B \-L --license -V --version
-Display the software version, license terms and conditions.
-.TP
-.B \-1 (or \-\-fast) to \-9 (or \-\-best)
-Set the block size to 100 k, 200 k .. 900 k when compressing. Has no
-effect when decompressing. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-The \-\-fast and \-\-best aliases are primarily for GNU gzip
-compatibility. In particular, \-\-fast doesn't make things
-significantly faster.
-And \-\-best merely selects the default behaviour.
-.TP
-.B \--
-Treats all subsequent arguments as file names, even if they start
-with a dash. This is so you can handle files with names beginning
-with a dash, for example: bzip2 \-- \-myfilename.
-.TP
-.B \--repetitive-fast --repetitive-best
-These flags are redundant in versions 0.9.5 and above. They provided
-some coarse control over the behaviour of the sorting algorithm in
-earlier versions, which was sometimes useful. 0.9.5 and above have an
-improved algorithm which renders these flags irrelevant.
-
-.SH MEMORY MANAGEMENT
-.I bzip2
-compresses large files in blocks. The block size affects
-both the compression ratio achieved, and the amount of memory needed for
-compression and decompression. The flags \-1 through \-9
-specify the block size to be 100,000 bytes through 900,000 bytes (the
-default) respectively. At decompression time, the block size used for
-compression is read from the header of the compressed file, and
-.I bunzip2
-then allocates itself just enough memory to decompress
-the file. Since block sizes are stored in compressed files, it follows
-that the flags \-1 to \-9 are irrelevant to and so ignored
-during decompression.
-
-Compression and decompression requirements,
-in bytes, can be estimated as:
-
- Compression: 400k + ( 8 x block size )
-
- Decompression: 100k + ( 4 x block size ), or
- 100k + ( 2.5 x block size )
-
-Larger block sizes give rapidly diminishing marginal returns. Most of
-the compression comes from the first two or three hundred k of block
-size, a fact worth bearing in mind when using
-.I bzip2
-on small machines.
-It is also important to appreciate that the decompression memory
-requirement is set at compression time by the choice of block size.
-
-For files compressed with the default 900k block size,
-.I bunzip2
-will require about 3700 kbytes to decompress. To support decompression
-of any file on a 4 megabyte machine,
-.I bunzip2
-has an option to
-decompress using approximately half this amount of memory, about 2300
-kbytes. Decompression speed is also halved, so you should use this
-option only where necessary. The relevant flag is -s.
-
-In general, try and use the largest block size memory constraints allow,
-since that maximises the compression achieved. Compression and
-decompression speed are virtually unaffected by block size.
-
-Another significant point applies to files which fit in a single block
--- that means most files you'd encounter using a large block size. The
-amount of real memory touched is proportional to the size of the file,
-since the file is smaller than a block. For example, compressing a file
-20,000 bytes long with the flag -9 will cause the compressor to
-allocate around 7600k of memory, but only touch 400k + 20000 * 8 = 560
-kbytes of it. Similarly, the decompressor will allocate 3700k but only
-touch 100k + 20000 * 4 = 180 kbytes.
-
-Here is a table which summarises the maximum memory usage for different
-block sizes. Also recorded is the total compressed size for 14 files of
-the Calgary Text Compression Corpus totalling 3,141,622 bytes. This
-column gives some feel for how compression varies with block size.
-These figures tend to understate the advantage of larger block sizes for
-larger files, since the Corpus is dominated by smaller files.
-
- Compress Decompress Decompress Corpus
- Flag usage usage -s usage Size
-
- -1 1200k 500k 350k 914704
- -2 2000k 900k 600k 877703
- -3 2800k 1300k 850k 860338
- -4 3600k 1700k 1100k 846899
- -5 4400k 2100k 1350k 845160
- -6 5200k 2500k 1600k 838626
- -7 6100k 2900k 1850k 834096
- -8 6800k 3300k 2100k 828642
- -9 7600k 3700k 2350k 828642
-
-.SH RECOVERING DATA FROM DAMAGED FILES
-.I bzip2
-compresses files in blocks, usually 900kbytes long. Each
-block is handled independently. If a media or transmission error causes
-a multi-block .bz2
-file to become damaged, it may be possible to
-recover data from the undamaged blocks in the file.
-
-The compressed representation of each block is delimited by a 48-bit
-pattern, which makes it possible to find the block boundaries with
-reasonable certainty. Each block also carries its own 32-bit CRC, so
-damaged blocks can be distinguished from undamaged ones.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-is a simple program whose purpose is to search for
-blocks in .bz2 files, and write each block out into its own .bz2
-file. You can then use
-.I bzip2
-\-t
-to test the
-integrity of the resulting files, and decompress those which are
-undamaged.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-takes a single argument, the name of the damaged file,
-and writes a number of files "rec00001file.bz2",
-"rec00002file.bz2", etc, containing the extracted blocks.
-The output filenames are designed so that the use of
-wildcards in subsequent processing -- for example,
-"bzip2 -dc rec*file.bz2 > recovered_data" -- processes the files in
-the correct order.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-should be of most use dealing with large .bz2
-files, as these will contain many blocks. It is clearly
-futile to use it on damaged single-block files, since a
-damaged block cannot be recovered. If you wish to minimise
-any potential data loss through media or transmission errors,
-you might consider compressing with a smaller
-block size.
-
-.SH PERFORMANCE NOTES
-The sorting phase of compression gathers together similar strings in the
-file. Because of this, files containing very long runs of repeated
-symbols, like "aabaabaabaab ..." (repeated several hundred times) may
-compress more slowly than normal. Versions 0.9.5 and above fare much
-better than previous versions in this respect. The ratio between
-worst-case and average-case compression time is in the region of 10:1.
-For previous versions, this figure was more like 100:1. You can use the
-\-vvvv option to monitor progress in great detail, if you want.
-
-Decompression speed is unaffected by these phenomena.
-
-.I bzip2
-usually allocates several megabytes of memory to operate
-in, and then charges all over it in a fairly random fashion. This means
-that performance, both for compressing and decompressing, is largely
-determined by the speed at which your machine can service cache misses.
-Because of this, small changes to the code to reduce the miss rate have
-been observed to give disproportionately large performance improvements.
-I imagine
-.I bzip2
-will perform best on machines with very large caches.
-
-.SH CAVEATS
-I/O error messages are not as helpful as they could be.
-.I bzip2
-tries hard to detect I/O errors and exit cleanly, but the details of
-what the problem is sometimes seem rather misleading.
-
-This manual page pertains to version 1.0.2 of
-.I bzip2.
-Compressed data created by this version is entirely forwards and
-backwards compatible with the previous public releases, versions
-0.1pl2, 0.9.0, 0.9.5, 1.0.0 and 1.0.1, but with the following
-exception: 0.9.0 and above can correctly decompress multiple
-concatenated compressed files. 0.1pl2 cannot do this; it will stop
-after decompressing just the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-versions prior to this one, 1.0.2, used 32-bit integers to represent
-bit positions in compressed files, so it could not handle compressed
-files more than 512 megabytes long. Version 1.0.2 and above uses
-64-bit ints on some platforms which support them (GNU supported
-targets, and Windows). To establish whether or not bzip2recover was
-built with such a limitation, run it without arguments. In any event
-you can build yourself an unlimited version if you can recompile it
-with MaybeUInt64 set to be an unsigned 64-bit integer.
-
-
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julian Seward, jseward at acm.org.
-
-http://sources.redhat.com/bzip2
-
-The ideas embodied in
-.I bzip2
-are due to (at least) the following
-people: Michael Burrows and David Wheeler (for the block sorting
-transformation), David Wheeler (again, for the Huffman coder), Peter
-Fenwick (for the structured coding model in the original
-.I bzip,
-and many refinements), and Alistair Moffat, Radford Neal and Ian Witten
-(for the arithmetic coder in the original
-.I bzip).
-I am much
-indebted for their help, support and advice. See the manual in the
-source distribution for pointers to sources of documentation. Christian
-von Roques encouraged me to look for faster sorting algorithms, so as to
-speed up compression. Bela Lubkin encouraged me to improve the
-worst-case compression performance.
-The bz* scripts are derived from those of GNU gzip.
-Many people sent patches, helped
-with portability problems, lent machines, gave advice and were generally
-helpful.
diff --git a/raw/man1/bzip2.1 b/raw/man1/bzip2.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 623435c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/bzip2.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,453 +0,0 @@
-.PU
-.TH bzip2 1
-.SH NAME
-bzip2, bunzip2 \- a block-sorting file compressor, v1.0.2
-.br
-bzcat \- decompresses files to stdout
-.br
-bzip2recover \- recovers data from damaged bzip2 files
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ll +8
-.B bzip2
-.RB [ " \-cdfkqstvzVL123456789 " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.ll -8
-.br
-.B bunzip2
-.RB [ " \-fkvsVL " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzcat
-.RB [ " \-s " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzip2recover
-.I "filename"
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I bzip2
-compresses files using the Burrows-Wheeler block sorting
-text compression algorithm, and Huffman coding. Compression is
-generally considerably better than that achieved by more conventional
-LZ77/LZ78-based compressors, and approaches the performance of the PPM
-family of statistical compressors.
-
-The command-line options are deliberately very similar to
-those of
-.I GNU gzip,
-but they are not identical.
-
-.I bzip2
-expects a list of file names to accompany the
-command-line flags. Each file is replaced by a compressed version of
-itself, with the name "original_name.bz2".
-Each compressed file
-has the same modification date, permissions, and, when possible,
-ownership as the corresponding original, so that these properties can
-be correctly restored at decompression time. File name handling is
-naive in the sense that there is no mechanism for preserving original
-file names, permissions, ownerships or dates in filesystems which lack
-these concepts, or have serious file name length restrictions, such as
-MS-DOS.
-
-.I bzip2
-and
-.I bunzip2
-will by default not overwrite existing
-files. If you want this to happen, specify the \-f flag.
-
-If no file names are specified,
-.I bzip2
-compresses from standard
-input to standard output. In this case,
-.I bzip2
-will decline to
-write compressed output to a terminal, as this would be entirely
-incomprehensible and therefore pointless.
-
-.I bunzip2
-(or
-.I bzip2 \-d)
-decompresses all
-specified files. Files which were not created by
-.I bzip2
-will be detected and ignored, and a warning issued.
-.I bzip2
-attempts to guess the filename for the decompressed file
-from that of the compressed file as follows:
-
- filename.bz2 becomes filename
- filename.bz becomes filename
- filename.tbz2 becomes filename.tar
- filename.tbz becomes filename.tar
- anyothername becomes anyothername.out
-
-If the file does not end in one of the recognised endings,
-.I .bz2,
-.I .bz,
-.I .tbz2
-or
-.I .tbz,
-.I bzip2
-complains that it cannot
-guess the name of the original file, and uses the original name
-with
-.I .out
-appended.
-
-As with compression, supplying no
-filenames causes decompression from
-standard input to standard output.
-
-.I bunzip2
-will correctly decompress a file which is the
-concatenation of two or more compressed files. The result is the
-concatenation of the corresponding uncompressed files. Integrity
-testing (\-t)
-of concatenated
-compressed files is also supported.
-
-You can also compress or decompress files to the standard output by
-giving the \-c flag. Multiple files may be compressed and
-decompressed like this. The resulting outputs are fed sequentially to
-stdout. Compression of multiple files
-in this manner generates a stream
-containing multiple compressed file representations. Such a stream
-can be decompressed correctly only by
-.I bzip2
-version 0.9.0 or
-later. Earlier versions of
-.I bzip2
-will stop after decompressing
-the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzcat
-(or
-.I bzip2 -dc)
-decompresses all specified files to
-the standard output.
-
-.I bzip2
-will read arguments from the environment variables
-.I BZIP2
-and
-.I BZIP,
-in that order, and will process them
-before any arguments read from the command line. This gives a
-convenient way to supply default arguments.
-
-Compression is always performed, even if the compressed
-file is slightly
-larger than the original. Files of less than about one hundred bytes
-tend to get larger, since the compression mechanism has a constant
-overhead in the region of 50 bytes. Random data (including the output
-of most file compressors) is coded at about 8.05 bits per byte, giving
-an expansion of around 0.5%.
-
-As a self-check for your protection,
-.I
-bzip2
-uses 32-bit CRCs to
-make sure that the decompressed version of a file is identical to the
-original. This guards against corruption of the compressed data, and
-against undetected bugs in
-.I bzip2
-(hopefully very unlikely). The
-chances of data corruption going undetected is microscopic, about one
-chance in four billion for each file processed. Be aware, though, that
-the check occurs upon decompression, so it can only tell you that
-something is wrong. It can't help you
-recover the original uncompressed
-data. You can use
-.I bzip2recover
-to try to recover data from
-damaged files.
-
-Return values: 0 for a normal exit, 1 for environmental problems (file
-not found, invalid flags, I/O errors, &c), 2 to indicate a corrupt
-compressed file, 3 for an internal consistency error (eg, bug) which
-caused
-.I bzip2
-to panic.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-c --stdout
-Compress or decompress to standard output.
-.TP
-.B \-d --decompress
-Force decompression.
-.I bzip2,
-.I bunzip2
-and
-.I bzcat
-are
-really the same program, and the decision about what actions to take is
-done on the basis of which name is used. This flag overrides that
-mechanism, and forces
-.I bzip2
-to decompress.
-.TP
-.B \-z --compress
-The complement to \-d: forces compression, regardless of the
-invocation name.
-.TP
-.B \-t --test
-Check integrity of the specified file(s), but don't decompress them.
-This really performs a trial decompression and throws away the result.
-.TP
-.B \-f --force
-Force overwrite of output files. Normally,
-.I bzip2
-will not overwrite
-existing output files. Also forces
-.I bzip2
-to break hard links
-to files, which it otherwise wouldn't do.
-
-bzip2 normally declines to decompress files which don't have the
-correct magic header bytes. If forced (-f), however, it will pass
-such files through unmodified. This is how GNU gzip behaves.
-.TP
-.B \-k --keep
-Keep (don't delete) input files during compression
-or decompression.
-.TP
-.B \-s --small
-Reduce memory usage, for compression, decompression and testing. Files
-are decompressed and tested using a modified algorithm which only
-requires 2.5 bytes per block byte. This means any file can be
-decompressed in 2300k of memory, albeit at about half the normal speed.
-
-During compression, \-s selects a block size of 200k, which limits
-memory use to around the same figure, at the expense of your compression
-ratio. In short, if your machine is low on memory (8 megabytes or
-less), use \-s for everything. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-.TP
-.B \-q --quiet
-Suppress non-essential warning messages. Messages pertaining to
-I/O errors and other critical events will not be suppressed.
-.TP
-.B \-v --verbose
-Verbose mode -- show the compression ratio for each file processed.
-Further \-v's increase the verbosity level, spewing out lots of
-information which is primarily of interest for diagnostic purposes.
-.TP
-.B \-L --license -V --version
-Display the software version, license terms and conditions.
-.TP
-.B \-1 (or \-\-fast) to \-9 (or \-\-best)
-Set the block size to 100 k, 200 k .. 900 k when compressing. Has no
-effect when decompressing. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-The \-\-fast and \-\-best aliases are primarily for GNU gzip
-compatibility. In particular, \-\-fast doesn't make things
-significantly faster.
-And \-\-best merely selects the default behaviour.
-.TP
-.B \--
-Treats all subsequent arguments as file names, even if they start
-with a dash. This is so you can handle files with names beginning
-with a dash, for example: bzip2 \-- \-myfilename.
-.TP
-.B \--repetitive-fast --repetitive-best
-These flags are redundant in versions 0.9.5 and above. They provided
-some coarse control over the behaviour of the sorting algorithm in
-earlier versions, which was sometimes useful. 0.9.5 and above have an
-improved algorithm which renders these flags irrelevant.
-
-.SH MEMORY MANAGEMENT
-.I bzip2
-compresses large files in blocks. The block size affects
-both the compression ratio achieved, and the amount of memory needed for
-compression and decompression. The flags \-1 through \-9
-specify the block size to be 100,000 bytes through 900,000 bytes (the
-default) respectively. At decompression time, the block size used for
-compression is read from the header of the compressed file, and
-.I bunzip2
-then allocates itself just enough memory to decompress
-the file. Since block sizes are stored in compressed files, it follows
-that the flags \-1 to \-9 are irrelevant to and so ignored
-during decompression.
-
-Compression and decompression requirements,
-in bytes, can be estimated as:
-
- Compression: 400k + ( 8 x block size )
-
- Decompression: 100k + ( 4 x block size ), or
- 100k + ( 2.5 x block size )
-
-Larger block sizes give rapidly diminishing marginal returns. Most of
-the compression comes from the first two or three hundred k of block
-size, a fact worth bearing in mind when using
-.I bzip2
-on small machines.
-It is also important to appreciate that the decompression memory
-requirement is set at compression time by the choice of block size.
-
-For files compressed with the default 900k block size,
-.I bunzip2
-will require about 3700 kbytes to decompress. To support decompression
-of any file on a 4 megabyte machine,
-.I bunzip2
-has an option to
-decompress using approximately half this amount of memory, about 2300
-kbytes. Decompression speed is also halved, so you should use this
-option only where necessary. The relevant flag is -s.
-
-In general, try and use the largest block size memory constraints allow,
-since that maximises the compression achieved. Compression and
-decompression speed are virtually unaffected by block size.
-
-Another significant point applies to files which fit in a single block
--- that means most files you'd encounter using a large block size. The
-amount of real memory touched is proportional to the size of the file,
-since the file is smaller than a block. For example, compressing a file
-20,000 bytes long with the flag -9 will cause the compressor to
-allocate around 7600k of memory, but only touch 400k + 20000 * 8 = 560
-kbytes of it. Similarly, the decompressor will allocate 3700k but only
-touch 100k + 20000 * 4 = 180 kbytes.
-
-Here is a table which summarises the maximum memory usage for different
-block sizes. Also recorded is the total compressed size for 14 files of
-the Calgary Text Compression Corpus totalling 3,141,622 bytes. This
-column gives some feel for how compression varies with block size.
-These figures tend to understate the advantage of larger block sizes for
-larger files, since the Corpus is dominated by smaller files.
-
- Compress Decompress Decompress Corpus
- Flag usage usage -s usage Size
-
- -1 1200k 500k 350k 914704
- -2 2000k 900k 600k 877703
- -3 2800k 1300k 850k 860338
- -4 3600k 1700k 1100k 846899
- -5 4400k 2100k 1350k 845160
- -6 5200k 2500k 1600k 838626
- -7 6100k 2900k 1850k 834096
- -8 6800k 3300k 2100k 828642
- -9 7600k 3700k 2350k 828642
-
-.SH RECOVERING DATA FROM DAMAGED FILES
-.I bzip2
-compresses files in blocks, usually 900kbytes long. Each
-block is handled independently. If a media or transmission error causes
-a multi-block .bz2
-file to become damaged, it may be possible to
-recover data from the undamaged blocks in the file.
-
-The compressed representation of each block is delimited by a 48-bit
-pattern, which makes it possible to find the block boundaries with
-reasonable certainty. Each block also carries its own 32-bit CRC, so
-damaged blocks can be distinguished from undamaged ones.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-is a simple program whose purpose is to search for
-blocks in .bz2 files, and write each block out into its own .bz2
-file. You can then use
-.I bzip2
-\-t
-to test the
-integrity of the resulting files, and decompress those which are
-undamaged.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-takes a single argument, the name of the damaged file,
-and writes a number of files "rec00001file.bz2",
-"rec00002file.bz2", etc, containing the extracted blocks.
-The output filenames are designed so that the use of
-wildcards in subsequent processing -- for example,
-"bzip2 -dc rec*file.bz2 > recovered_data" -- processes the files in
-the correct order.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-should be of most use dealing with large .bz2
-files, as these will contain many blocks. It is clearly
-futile to use it on damaged single-block files, since a
-damaged block cannot be recovered. If you wish to minimise
-any potential data loss through media or transmission errors,
-you might consider compressing with a smaller
-block size.
-
-.SH PERFORMANCE NOTES
-The sorting phase of compression gathers together similar strings in the
-file. Because of this, files containing very long runs of repeated
-symbols, like "aabaabaabaab ..." (repeated several hundred times) may
-compress more slowly than normal. Versions 0.9.5 and above fare much
-better than previous versions in this respect. The ratio between
-worst-case and average-case compression time is in the region of 10:1.
-For previous versions, this figure was more like 100:1. You can use the
-\-vvvv option to monitor progress in great detail, if you want.
-
-Decompression speed is unaffected by these phenomena.
-
-.I bzip2
-usually allocates several megabytes of memory to operate
-in, and then charges all over it in a fairly random fashion. This means
-that performance, both for compressing and decompressing, is largely
-determined by the speed at which your machine can service cache misses.
-Because of this, small changes to the code to reduce the miss rate have
-been observed to give disproportionately large performance improvements.
-I imagine
-.I bzip2
-will perform best on machines with very large caches.
-
-.SH CAVEATS
-I/O error messages are not as helpful as they could be.
-.I bzip2
-tries hard to detect I/O errors and exit cleanly, but the details of
-what the problem is sometimes seem rather misleading.
-
-This manual page pertains to version 1.0.2 of
-.I bzip2.
-Compressed data created by this version is entirely forwards and
-backwards compatible with the previous public releases, versions
-0.1pl2, 0.9.0, 0.9.5, 1.0.0 and 1.0.1, but with the following
-exception: 0.9.0 and above can correctly decompress multiple
-concatenated compressed files. 0.1pl2 cannot do this; it will stop
-after decompressing just the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-versions prior to this one, 1.0.2, used 32-bit integers to represent
-bit positions in compressed files, so it could not handle compressed
-files more than 512 megabytes long. Version 1.0.2 and above uses
-64-bit ints on some platforms which support them (GNU supported
-targets, and Windows). To establish whether or not bzip2recover was
-built with such a limitation, run it without arguments. In any event
-you can build yourself an unlimited version if you can recompile it
-with MaybeUInt64 set to be an unsigned 64-bit integer.
-
-
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julian Seward, jseward at acm.org.
-
-http://sources.redhat.com/bzip2
-
-The ideas embodied in
-.I bzip2
-are due to (at least) the following
-people: Michael Burrows and David Wheeler (for the block sorting
-transformation), David Wheeler (again, for the Huffman coder), Peter
-Fenwick (for the structured coding model in the original
-.I bzip,
-and many refinements), and Alistair Moffat, Radford Neal and Ian Witten
-(for the arithmetic coder in the original
-.I bzip).
-I am much
-indebted for their help, support and advice. See the manual in the
-source distribution for pointers to sources of documentation. Christian
-von Roques encouraged me to look for faster sorting algorithms, so as to
-speed up compression. Bela Lubkin encouraged me to improve the
-worst-case compression performance.
-The bz* scripts are derived from those of GNU gzip.
-Many people sent patches, helped
-with portability problems, lent machines, gave advice and were generally
-helpful.
diff --git a/raw/man1/bzip2recover.1 b/raw/man1/bzip2recover.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 623435c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/bzip2recover.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,453 +0,0 @@
-.PU
-.TH bzip2 1
-.SH NAME
-bzip2, bunzip2 \- a block-sorting file compressor, v1.0.2
-.br
-bzcat \- decompresses files to stdout
-.br
-bzip2recover \- recovers data from damaged bzip2 files
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ll +8
-.B bzip2
-.RB [ " \-cdfkqstvzVL123456789 " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.ll -8
-.br
-.B bunzip2
-.RB [ " \-fkvsVL " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzcat
-.RB [ " \-s " ]
-[
-.I "filenames \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B bzip2recover
-.I "filename"
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I bzip2
-compresses files using the Burrows-Wheeler block sorting
-text compression algorithm, and Huffman coding. Compression is
-generally considerably better than that achieved by more conventional
-LZ77/LZ78-based compressors, and approaches the performance of the PPM
-family of statistical compressors.
-
-The command-line options are deliberately very similar to
-those of
-.I GNU gzip,
-but they are not identical.
-
-.I bzip2
-expects a list of file names to accompany the
-command-line flags. Each file is replaced by a compressed version of
-itself, with the name "original_name.bz2".
-Each compressed file
-has the same modification date, permissions, and, when possible,
-ownership as the corresponding original, so that these properties can
-be correctly restored at decompression time. File name handling is
-naive in the sense that there is no mechanism for preserving original
-file names, permissions, ownerships or dates in filesystems which lack
-these concepts, or have serious file name length restrictions, such as
-MS-DOS.
-
-.I bzip2
-and
-.I bunzip2
-will by default not overwrite existing
-files. If you want this to happen, specify the \-f flag.
-
-If no file names are specified,
-.I bzip2
-compresses from standard
-input to standard output. In this case,
-.I bzip2
-will decline to
-write compressed output to a terminal, as this would be entirely
-incomprehensible and therefore pointless.
-
-.I bunzip2
-(or
-.I bzip2 \-d)
-decompresses all
-specified files. Files which were not created by
-.I bzip2
-will be detected and ignored, and a warning issued.
-.I bzip2
-attempts to guess the filename for the decompressed file
-from that of the compressed file as follows:
-
- filename.bz2 becomes filename
- filename.bz becomes filename
- filename.tbz2 becomes filename.tar
- filename.tbz becomes filename.tar
- anyothername becomes anyothername.out
-
-If the file does not end in one of the recognised endings,
-.I .bz2,
-.I .bz,
-.I .tbz2
-or
-.I .tbz,
-.I bzip2
-complains that it cannot
-guess the name of the original file, and uses the original name
-with
-.I .out
-appended.
-
-As with compression, supplying no
-filenames causes decompression from
-standard input to standard output.
-
-.I bunzip2
-will correctly decompress a file which is the
-concatenation of two or more compressed files. The result is the
-concatenation of the corresponding uncompressed files. Integrity
-testing (\-t)
-of concatenated
-compressed files is also supported.
-
-You can also compress or decompress files to the standard output by
-giving the \-c flag. Multiple files may be compressed and
-decompressed like this. The resulting outputs are fed sequentially to
-stdout. Compression of multiple files
-in this manner generates a stream
-containing multiple compressed file representations. Such a stream
-can be decompressed correctly only by
-.I bzip2
-version 0.9.0 or
-later. Earlier versions of
-.I bzip2
-will stop after decompressing
-the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzcat
-(or
-.I bzip2 -dc)
-decompresses all specified files to
-the standard output.
-
-.I bzip2
-will read arguments from the environment variables
-.I BZIP2
-and
-.I BZIP,
-in that order, and will process them
-before any arguments read from the command line. This gives a
-convenient way to supply default arguments.
-
-Compression is always performed, even if the compressed
-file is slightly
-larger than the original. Files of less than about one hundred bytes
-tend to get larger, since the compression mechanism has a constant
-overhead in the region of 50 bytes. Random data (including the output
-of most file compressors) is coded at about 8.05 bits per byte, giving
-an expansion of around 0.5%.
-
-As a self-check for your protection,
-.I
-bzip2
-uses 32-bit CRCs to
-make sure that the decompressed version of a file is identical to the
-original. This guards against corruption of the compressed data, and
-against undetected bugs in
-.I bzip2
-(hopefully very unlikely). The
-chances of data corruption going undetected is microscopic, about one
-chance in four billion for each file processed. Be aware, though, that
-the check occurs upon decompression, so it can only tell you that
-something is wrong. It can't help you
-recover the original uncompressed
-data. You can use
-.I bzip2recover
-to try to recover data from
-damaged files.
-
-Return values: 0 for a normal exit, 1 for environmental problems (file
-not found, invalid flags, I/O errors, &c), 2 to indicate a corrupt
-compressed file, 3 for an internal consistency error (eg, bug) which
-caused
-.I bzip2
-to panic.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-c --stdout
-Compress or decompress to standard output.
-.TP
-.B \-d --decompress
-Force decompression.
-.I bzip2,
-.I bunzip2
-and
-.I bzcat
-are
-really the same program, and the decision about what actions to take is
-done on the basis of which name is used. This flag overrides that
-mechanism, and forces
-.I bzip2
-to decompress.
-.TP
-.B \-z --compress
-The complement to \-d: forces compression, regardless of the
-invocation name.
-.TP
-.B \-t --test
-Check integrity of the specified file(s), but don't decompress them.
-This really performs a trial decompression and throws away the result.
-.TP
-.B \-f --force
-Force overwrite of output files. Normally,
-.I bzip2
-will not overwrite
-existing output files. Also forces
-.I bzip2
-to break hard links
-to files, which it otherwise wouldn't do.
-
-bzip2 normally declines to decompress files which don't have the
-correct magic header bytes. If forced (-f), however, it will pass
-such files through unmodified. This is how GNU gzip behaves.
-.TP
-.B \-k --keep
-Keep (don't delete) input files during compression
-or decompression.
-.TP
-.B \-s --small
-Reduce memory usage, for compression, decompression and testing. Files
-are decompressed and tested using a modified algorithm which only
-requires 2.5 bytes per block byte. This means any file can be
-decompressed in 2300k of memory, albeit at about half the normal speed.
-
-During compression, \-s selects a block size of 200k, which limits
-memory use to around the same figure, at the expense of your compression
-ratio. In short, if your machine is low on memory (8 megabytes or
-less), use \-s for everything. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-.TP
-.B \-q --quiet
-Suppress non-essential warning messages. Messages pertaining to
-I/O errors and other critical events will not be suppressed.
-.TP
-.B \-v --verbose
-Verbose mode -- show the compression ratio for each file processed.
-Further \-v's increase the verbosity level, spewing out lots of
-information which is primarily of interest for diagnostic purposes.
-.TP
-.B \-L --license -V --version
-Display the software version, license terms and conditions.
-.TP
-.B \-1 (or \-\-fast) to \-9 (or \-\-best)
-Set the block size to 100 k, 200 k .. 900 k when compressing. Has no
-effect when decompressing. See MEMORY MANAGEMENT below.
-The \-\-fast and \-\-best aliases are primarily for GNU gzip
-compatibility. In particular, \-\-fast doesn't make things
-significantly faster.
-And \-\-best merely selects the default behaviour.
-.TP
-.B \--
-Treats all subsequent arguments as file names, even if they start
-with a dash. This is so you can handle files with names beginning
-with a dash, for example: bzip2 \-- \-myfilename.
-.TP
-.B \--repetitive-fast --repetitive-best
-These flags are redundant in versions 0.9.5 and above. They provided
-some coarse control over the behaviour of the sorting algorithm in
-earlier versions, which was sometimes useful. 0.9.5 and above have an
-improved algorithm which renders these flags irrelevant.
-
-.SH MEMORY MANAGEMENT
-.I bzip2
-compresses large files in blocks. The block size affects
-both the compression ratio achieved, and the amount of memory needed for
-compression and decompression. The flags \-1 through \-9
-specify the block size to be 100,000 bytes through 900,000 bytes (the
-default) respectively. At decompression time, the block size used for
-compression is read from the header of the compressed file, and
-.I bunzip2
-then allocates itself just enough memory to decompress
-the file. Since block sizes are stored in compressed files, it follows
-that the flags \-1 to \-9 are irrelevant to and so ignored
-during decompression.
-
-Compression and decompression requirements,
-in bytes, can be estimated as:
-
- Compression: 400k + ( 8 x block size )
-
- Decompression: 100k + ( 4 x block size ), or
- 100k + ( 2.5 x block size )
-
-Larger block sizes give rapidly diminishing marginal returns. Most of
-the compression comes from the first two or three hundred k of block
-size, a fact worth bearing in mind when using
-.I bzip2
-on small machines.
-It is also important to appreciate that the decompression memory
-requirement is set at compression time by the choice of block size.
-
-For files compressed with the default 900k block size,
-.I bunzip2
-will require about 3700 kbytes to decompress. To support decompression
-of any file on a 4 megabyte machine,
-.I bunzip2
-has an option to
-decompress using approximately half this amount of memory, about 2300
-kbytes. Decompression speed is also halved, so you should use this
-option only where necessary. The relevant flag is -s.
-
-In general, try and use the largest block size memory constraints allow,
-since that maximises the compression achieved. Compression and
-decompression speed are virtually unaffected by block size.
-
-Another significant point applies to files which fit in a single block
--- that means most files you'd encounter using a large block size. The
-amount of real memory touched is proportional to the size of the file,
-since the file is smaller than a block. For example, compressing a file
-20,000 bytes long with the flag -9 will cause the compressor to
-allocate around 7600k of memory, but only touch 400k + 20000 * 8 = 560
-kbytes of it. Similarly, the decompressor will allocate 3700k but only
-touch 100k + 20000 * 4 = 180 kbytes.
-
-Here is a table which summarises the maximum memory usage for different
-block sizes. Also recorded is the total compressed size for 14 files of
-the Calgary Text Compression Corpus totalling 3,141,622 bytes. This
-column gives some feel for how compression varies with block size.
-These figures tend to understate the advantage of larger block sizes for
-larger files, since the Corpus is dominated by smaller files.
-
- Compress Decompress Decompress Corpus
- Flag usage usage -s usage Size
-
- -1 1200k 500k 350k 914704
- -2 2000k 900k 600k 877703
- -3 2800k 1300k 850k 860338
- -4 3600k 1700k 1100k 846899
- -5 4400k 2100k 1350k 845160
- -6 5200k 2500k 1600k 838626
- -7 6100k 2900k 1850k 834096
- -8 6800k 3300k 2100k 828642
- -9 7600k 3700k 2350k 828642
-
-.SH RECOVERING DATA FROM DAMAGED FILES
-.I bzip2
-compresses files in blocks, usually 900kbytes long. Each
-block is handled independently. If a media or transmission error causes
-a multi-block .bz2
-file to become damaged, it may be possible to
-recover data from the undamaged blocks in the file.
-
-The compressed representation of each block is delimited by a 48-bit
-pattern, which makes it possible to find the block boundaries with
-reasonable certainty. Each block also carries its own 32-bit CRC, so
-damaged blocks can be distinguished from undamaged ones.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-is a simple program whose purpose is to search for
-blocks in .bz2 files, and write each block out into its own .bz2
-file. You can then use
-.I bzip2
-\-t
-to test the
-integrity of the resulting files, and decompress those which are
-undamaged.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-takes a single argument, the name of the damaged file,
-and writes a number of files "rec00001file.bz2",
-"rec00002file.bz2", etc, containing the extracted blocks.
-The output filenames are designed so that the use of
-wildcards in subsequent processing -- for example,
-"bzip2 -dc rec*file.bz2 > recovered_data" -- processes the files in
-the correct order.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-should be of most use dealing with large .bz2
-files, as these will contain many blocks. It is clearly
-futile to use it on damaged single-block files, since a
-damaged block cannot be recovered. If you wish to minimise
-any potential data loss through media or transmission errors,
-you might consider compressing with a smaller
-block size.
-
-.SH PERFORMANCE NOTES
-The sorting phase of compression gathers together similar strings in the
-file. Because of this, files containing very long runs of repeated
-symbols, like "aabaabaabaab ..." (repeated several hundred times) may
-compress more slowly than normal. Versions 0.9.5 and above fare much
-better than previous versions in this respect. The ratio between
-worst-case and average-case compression time is in the region of 10:1.
-For previous versions, this figure was more like 100:1. You can use the
-\-vvvv option to monitor progress in great detail, if you want.
-
-Decompression speed is unaffected by these phenomena.
-
-.I bzip2
-usually allocates several megabytes of memory to operate
-in, and then charges all over it in a fairly random fashion. This means
-that performance, both for compressing and decompressing, is largely
-determined by the speed at which your machine can service cache misses.
-Because of this, small changes to the code to reduce the miss rate have
-been observed to give disproportionately large performance improvements.
-I imagine
-.I bzip2
-will perform best on machines with very large caches.
-
-.SH CAVEATS
-I/O error messages are not as helpful as they could be.
-.I bzip2
-tries hard to detect I/O errors and exit cleanly, but the details of
-what the problem is sometimes seem rather misleading.
-
-This manual page pertains to version 1.0.2 of
-.I bzip2.
-Compressed data created by this version is entirely forwards and
-backwards compatible with the previous public releases, versions
-0.1pl2, 0.9.0, 0.9.5, 1.0.0 and 1.0.1, but with the following
-exception: 0.9.0 and above can correctly decompress multiple
-concatenated compressed files. 0.1pl2 cannot do this; it will stop
-after decompressing just the first file in the stream.
-
-.I bzip2recover
-versions prior to this one, 1.0.2, used 32-bit integers to represent
-bit positions in compressed files, so it could not handle compressed
-files more than 512 megabytes long. Version 1.0.2 and above uses
-64-bit ints on some platforms which support them (GNU supported
-targets, and Windows). To establish whether or not bzip2recover was
-built with such a limitation, run it without arguments. In any event
-you can build yourself an unlimited version if you can recompile it
-with MaybeUInt64 set to be an unsigned 64-bit integer.
-
-
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julian Seward, jseward at acm.org.
-
-http://sources.redhat.com/bzip2
-
-The ideas embodied in
-.I bzip2
-are due to (at least) the following
-people: Michael Burrows and David Wheeler (for the block sorting
-transformation), David Wheeler (again, for the Huffman coder), Peter
-Fenwick (for the structured coding model in the original
-.I bzip,
-and many refinements), and Alistair Moffat, Radford Neal and Ian Witten
-(for the arithmetic coder in the original
-.I bzip).
-I am much
-indebted for their help, support and advice. See the manual in the
-source distribution for pointers to sources of documentation. Christian
-von Roques encouraged me to look for faster sorting algorithms, so as to
-speed up compression. Bela Lubkin encouraged me to improve the
-worst-case compression performance.
-The bz* scripts are derived from those of GNU gzip.
-Many people sent patches, helped
-with portability problems, lent machines, gave advice and were generally
-helpful.
diff --git a/raw/man1/cal.1 b/raw/man1/cal.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d5e71e..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/cal.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990, 1993
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Kim Letkeman.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)cal.1 8.1 (Berkeley) 6/6/93
-.\"
-.Dd June 6, 1993
-.Dt CAL 1
-.Os
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm cal
-.Nd displays a calendar
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm cal
-.Op Fl smjy13
-.Op [ Ar month ] Ar year
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm Cal
-displays a simple calendar.
-If arguments are not specified,
-the current month is displayed.
-The options are as follows:
-.Bl -tag -width Ds
-.It Fl 1
-Display single month output.
-(This is the default.)
-.It Fl 3
-Display prev/current/next month output.
-.It Fl s
-Display Sunday as the first day of the week.
-(This is the default.)
-.It Fl m
-Display Monday as the first day of the week.
-.It Fl j
-Display Julian dates (days one-based, numbered from January 1).
-.It Fl y
-Display a calendar for the current year.
-.El
-.Pp
-A single parameter specifies the year (1 - 9999) to be displayed;
-note the year must be fully specified:
-.Dq Li cal 89
-will
-.Em not
-display a calendar for 1989.
-Two parameters denote the month (1 - 12) and year.
-If no parameters are specified, the current month's calendar is
-displayed.
-.Pp
-A year starts on Jan 1.
-.Pp
-The Gregorian Reformation is assumed to have occurred in 1752 on the 3rd
-of September.
-By this time, most countries had recognized the reformation (although a
-few did not recognize it until the early 1900's.)
-Ten days following that date were eliminated by the reformation, so the
-calendar for that month is a bit unusual.
-.Sh HISTORY
-A
-.Nm
-command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX.
-.Sh OTHER VERSIONS
-Several much more elaborate versions of this program exist,
-with support for colors, holidays, birthdays, reminders and
-appointments, etc. For example, try the cal from
-http://home.sprynet.com/~cbagwell/projects.html
-or GNU gcal.
diff --git a/raw/man1/cat.1 b/raw/man1/cat.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5458c0f..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/cat.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CAT "1" "October 2003" "cat (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-cat \- concatenate files and print on the standard output
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B cat
-[\fIOPTION\fR] [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Concatenate FILE(s), or standard input, to standard output.
-.TP
-\fB\-A\fR, \fB\-\-show\-all\fR
-equivalent to \fB\-vET\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-number\-nonblank\fR
-number nonblank output lines
-.TP
-\fB\-e\fR
-equivalent to \fB\-vE\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-E\fR, \fB\-\-show\-ends\fR
-display $ at end of each line
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-number\fR
-number all output lines
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-squeeze\-blank\fR
-never more than one single blank line
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR
-equivalent to \fB\-vT\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-T\fR, \fB\-\-show\-tabs\fR
-display TAB characters as ^I
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR
-(ignored)
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-show\-nonprinting\fR
-use ^ and M- notation, except for LFD and TAB
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Torbjorn Granlund and Richard M. Stallman.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B cat
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B cat
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info cat
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/cd.1 b/raw/man1/cd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/cd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/chattr.1 b/raw/man1/chattr.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 84d8743..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chattr.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,142 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.TH CHATTR 1 "July 2003" "E2fsprogs version 1.34"
-.SH NAME
-chattr \- change file attributes on a Linux second extended file system
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chattr
-[
-.B \-RV
-]
-[
-.B \-v
-.I version
-]
-[
-.I mode
-]
-.I files...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B chattr
-changes the file attributes on a Linux second extended file system.
-.PP
-The format of a symbolic mode is +-=[ASacDdIijsTtu].
-.PP
-The operator `+' causes the selected attributes to be added to the
-existing attributes of the files; `-' causes them to be removed; and
-`=' causes them to be the only attributes that the files have.
-.PP
-The letters `ASacDdijsu' select the new attributes for the files:
-don't update atime (A), synchronous updates (S), synchronous directory
-updates (D), append only (a), compressed (c), no dump (d), immutable (i),
-data journalling (j), secure deletion (s), top of directory hierarchy
-(T), no tail-merging (t), and undeletable (u).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Recursively change attributes of directories and their contents.
-Symbolic links encountered during recursive directory traversals are
-ignored.
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Be verbose with chattr's output and print the program version.
-.TP
-.BI \-v " version"
-Set the file's version/generation number.
-.SH ATTRIBUTES
-When a file with the 'A' attribute set is accessed, its atime record is
-not modified. This avoids a certain amount of disk I/O for laptop
-systems.
-.PP
-A file with the `a' attribute set can only be open in append mode for writing.
-Only the superuser or a process possessing the CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE
-capability can set or clear this attribute.
-.PP
-A file with the `c' attribute set is automatically compressed on the disk
-by the kernel. A read from this file returns uncompressed data. A write to
-this file compresses data before storing them on the disk.
-.PP
-When a directory with the `D' attribute set is modified,
-the changes are written synchronously on the disk; this is equivalent to
-the `dirsync' mount option applied to a subset of the files.
-.PP
-A file with the `d' attribute set is not candidate for backup when the
-.BR dump (8)
-program is run.
-.PP
-The 'E' attribute is used by the experimental compression patches to
-indicate that a compressed file has a compression error. It may not be
-set or reset using
-.BR chattr (1),
-although it can be displayed by
-.BR lsattr (1).
-.PP
-The 'I' attribute is used by the htree code to indicate that a directory
-is behind indexed using hashed trees. It may not be set or reset using
-.BR chattr (1),
-although it can be displayed by
-.BR lsattr (1).
-.PP
-A file with the `i' attribute cannot be modified: it cannot be deleted or
-renamed, no link can be created to this file and no data can be written
-to the file. Only the superuser or a process possessing the
-CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE capability can set or clear this attribute.
-.PP
-A file with the `j' attribute has all of its data written to the ext3
-journal before being written to the file itself, if the filesystem is
-mounted with the "data=ordered" or "data=writeback" options. When the
-filesystem is mounted with the "data=journal" option all file data
-is already journalled and this attribute has no effect.
-Only the superuser or a process possessing the CAP_SYS_RESOURCE
-capability can set or clear this attribute.
-.PP
-When a file with the `s' attribute set is deleted, its blocks are zeroed and
-written back to the disk.
-.PP
-When a file with the `S' attribute set is modified,
-the changes are written synchronously on the disk; this is equivalent to
-the `sync' mount option applied to a subset of the files.
-.PP
-A directory with the 'T' attribute will be deemed to be the top of
-directory hierarchies for the purposes of the Orlov block allocator
-(which is used in on systems with Linux 2.5.46 or later).
-.PP
-A file with the 't' attribute will not have a partial block fragment at
-the end of the file merged with other files (for those filesystems which
-support tail-merging). This is necessary for applications such as LILO
-which read the filesystem directly, and which don't understand tail-merged
-files. Note: As of this writing, the ext2 or ext3 filesystems do not
-(yet, except in very experimental patches) support tail-merging.
-.PP
-When a file with the `u' attribute set is deleted, its contents are saved.
-This allows the user to ask for its undeletion.
-.PP
-The 'X' attribute is used by the experimental compression patches to
-indicate that a raw contents of a compressed file can be accessed
-directly. It currently may not be set or reset using
-.BR chattr (1),
-although it can be displayed by
-.BR lsattr (1).
-.PP
-The 'Z' attribute is used by the experimental compression patches to
-indicate a compressed file is dirty. It may not be set or reset using
-.BR chattr (1),
-although it can be displayed by
-.BR lsattr (1).
-.PP
-.SH AUTHOR
-.B chattr
-was written by Remy Card <Remy.Card at linux.org>.
-.SH BUGS AND LIMITATIONS
-As of Linux 2.2, the `c', 's', and `u' attribute are not honored
-by the kernel filesystem code. These attributes will be implemented
-in a future ext2 fs version.
-.PP
-The `j' option is only useful if the filesystem is mounted as ext3.
-.PP
-The `D' option is only useful on Linux kernel 2.5.19 and later.
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-.B chattr
-is part of the e2fsprogs package and is available from
-http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR lsattr (1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/chfn.1 b/raw/man1/chfn.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f3213d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chfn.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" chfn.1 -- change your finger information
-.\" (c) 1994 by salvatore valente <svalente at athena.mit.edu>
-.\"
-.\" this program is free software. you can redistribute it and
-.\" modify it under the terms of the gnu general public license.
-.\" there is no warranty.
-.\"
-.TH CHFN 1 "October 13 1994" "chfn" "Linux Reference Manual"
-.SH NAME
-chfn \- change your finger information
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chfn
-[\ \-f\ full-name\ ] [\ \-o\ office\ ] [\ \-p\ office-phone\ ]
-[\ \-h\ home-phone\ ] [\ \-u\ ] [\ \-v\ ] [\ username\ ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B chfn
-is used to change your finger information. This information is
-stored in the
-.I /etc/passwd
-file, and is displayed by the
-.B finger
-program. The Linux
-.B finger
-command will display four pieces of information that can be changed by
-.B chfn
-: your real name, your work room and phone, and your home phone.
-.SS COMMAND LINE
-Any of the four pieces of information can be specified on the command
-line. If no information is given on the command line,
-.B chfn
-enters interactive mode.
-.SS INTERACTIVE MODE
-In interactive mode,
-.B chfn
-will prompt for each field. At a prompt, you can enter the new information,
-or just press return to leave the field unchanged. Enter the keyword
-"none" to make the field blank.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.I "\-f, \-\-full-name"
-Specify your real name.
-.TP
-.I "\-o, \-\-office"
-Specify your office room number.
-.TP
-.I "\-p, \-\-office-phone"
-Specify your office phone number.
-.TP
-.I "\-h, \-\-home-phone"
-Specify your home phone number.
-.TP
-.I "\-u, \-\-help"
-Print a usage message and exit.
-.TP
-.I "-v, \-\-version"
-Print version information and exit.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR finger (1),
-.BR passwd (5)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Salvatore Valente <svalente at mit.edu>
diff --git a/raw/man1/chgrp.1 b/raw/man1/chgrp.1
deleted file mode 100644
index dd372f1..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chgrp.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CHGRP "1" "October 2003" "chgrp (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-chgrp \- change group ownership
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chgrp
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIGROUP FILE\fR...
-.br
-.B chgrp
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fI--reference=RFILE FILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Change the group membership of each FILE to GROUP.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-changes\fR
-like verbose but report only when a change is made
-.TP
-\fB\-\-dereference\fR
-affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather
-than the symbolic link itself
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-no\-dereference\fR
-affect symbolic links instead of any referenced file
-(available only on systems that can change the
-ownership of a symlink)
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR
-suppress most error messages
-.TP
-\fB\-\-reference\fR=\fIRFILE\fR
-use RFILE's group rather than the specified
-GROUP value
-.TP
-\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-recursive\fR
-operate on files and directories recursively
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-output a diagnostic for every file processed
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B chgrp
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B chgrp
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info chgrp
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/chmod.1 b/raw/man1/chmod.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c0bdef..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chmod.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,127 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CHMOD "1" "October 2003" "chmod (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-chmod \- change file access permissions
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chmod
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIMODE\fR[\fI,MODE\fR]... \fIFILE\fR...
-.br
-.B chmod
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIOCTAL-MODE FILE\fR...
-.br
-.B chmod
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fI--reference=RFILE FILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page
-documents the GNU version of
-.BR chmod .
-.B chmod
-changes the permissions of each given file according to
-.IR mode ,
-which can be either a symbolic representation of changes to make, or
-an octal number representing the bit pattern for the new permissions.
-.PP
-The format of a symbolic mode is
-`[ugoa...][[+-=][rwxXstugo...]...][,...]'. Multiple symbolic
-operations can be given, separated by commas.
-.PP
-A combination of the letters `ugoa' controls which users' access to
-the file will be changed: the user who owns it (u), other users in the
-file's group (g), other users not in the file's group (o), or all
-users (a). If none of these are given, the effect is as if `a' were
-given, but bits that are set in the umask are not affected.
-.PP
-The operator `+' causes the permissions selected to be added to the
-existing permissions of each file; `-' causes them to be removed; and
-`=' causes them to be the only permissions that the file has.
-.PP
-The letters `rwxXstugo' select the new permissions for the affected
-users: read (r), write (w), execute (or access for directories) (x),
-execute only if the file is a directory or already has execute
-permission for some user (X), set user or group ID on execution (s),
-sticky (t), the permissions granted to the user who owns the file (u),
-the permissions granted to other users who are members of the file's group (g),
-and the permissions granted to users that are in neither of the two preceding
-categories (o).
-.PP
-A numeric mode is from one to four octal digits (0-7), derived by
-adding up the bits with values 4, 2, and 1. Any omitted digits are
-assumed to be leading zeros. The first digit selects the set user ID
-(4) and set group ID (2) and sticky (1) attributes. The second digit
-selects permissions for the user who owns the file: read (4), write (2),
-and execute (1); the third selects permissions for other users in the
-file's group, with the same values; and the fourth for other users not
-in the file's group, with the same values.
-.PP
-.B chmod
-never changes the permissions of symbolic links; the
-.B chmod
-system call cannot change their permissions. This is not a problem
-since the permissions of symbolic links are never used.
-However, for each symbolic link listed on the command line,
-.B chmod
-changes the permissions of the pointed-to file.
-In contrast,
-.B chmod
-ignores symbolic links encountered during recursive directory
-traversals.
-.SH STICKY FILES
-On older Unix systems, the sticky bit caused executable files to be
-hoarded in swap space. This feature is not useful on modern VM
-systems, and the Linux kernel ignores the sticky bit on files. Other
-kernels may use the sticky bit on files for system-defined purposes.
-On some systems, only the superuser can set the sticky bit on files.
-.SH STICKY DIRECTORIES
-When the sticky bit is set on a directory, files in that directory may
-be unlinked or renamed only by root or their owner. Without the
-sticky bit, anyone able to write to the directory can delete or rename
-files. The sticky bit is commonly found on directories, such as /tmp,
-that are world-writable.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.PP
-Change the mode of each FILE to MODE.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-changes\fR
-like verbose but report only when a change is made
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR
-suppress most error messages
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-output a diagnostic for every file processed
-.TP
-\fB\-\-reference\fR=\fIRFILE\fR
-use RFILE's mode instead of MODE values
-.TP
-\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-recursive\fR
-change files and directories recursively
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Each MODE is one or more of the letters ugoa, one of the symbols +-= and
-one or more of the letters rwxXstugo.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B chmod
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B chmod
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info chmod
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/chown.1 b/raw/man1/chown.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 363d50a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chown.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CHOWN "1" "October 2003" "chown (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-chown \- change file owner and group
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chown
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIOWNER\fR[\fI:\fR[\fIGROUP\fR]] \fIFILE\fR...
-.br
-.B chown
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fI:GROUP FILE\fR...
-.br
-.B chown
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fI--reference=RFILE FILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page
-documents the GNU version of
-.BR chown .
-.B chown
-changes the user and/or group ownership of each given file, according
-to its first non-option argument, which is interpreted as follows. If
-only a user name (or numeric user ID) is given, that user is made the
-owner of each given file, and the files' group is not changed. If the
-user name is followed by a colon or dot and a group name (or numeric group ID),
-with no spaces between them, the group ownership of the files is
-changed as well. If a colon or dot but no group name follows the user name,
-that user is made the owner of the files and the group of the files is
-changed to that user's login group. If the colon or dot and group are given,
-but the user name is omitted, only the group of the files is changed;
-in this case,
-.B chown
-performs the same function as
-.BR chgrp .
-.SH OPTIONS
-.PP
-Change the owner and/or group of each FILE to OWNER and/or GROUP.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-changes\fR
-like verbose but report only when a change is made
-.TP
-\fB\-\-dereference\fR
-affect the referent of each symbolic link, rather
-than the symbolic link itself
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-no\-dereference\fR
-affect symbolic links instead of any referenced file
-(available only on systems that can change the
-ownership of a symlink)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-from\fR=\fICURRENT_OWNER\fR:CURRENT_GROUP
-change the owner and/or group of each file only if
-its current owner and/or group match those specified
-here. Either may be omitted, in which case a match
-is not required for the omitted attribute.
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR
-suppress most error messages
-.TP
-\fB\-\-reference\fR=\fIRFILE\fR
-use RFILE's owner and group rather than
-the specified OWNER:GROUP values
-.TP
-\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-recursive\fR
-operate on files and directories recursively
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-output a diagnostic for every file processed
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Owner is unchanged if missing. Group is unchanged if missing, but changed
-to login group if implied by a `:'. OWNER and GROUP may be numeric as well
-as symbolic.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B chown
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B chown
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info chown
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/chroot.1 b/raw/man1/chroot.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 57e9cc3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chroot.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CHROOT "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-chroot \- run command or interactive shell with special root directory
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chroot
-\fINEWROOT \fR[\fICOMMAND\fR...]
-.br
-.B chroot
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Run COMMAND with root directory set to NEWROOT.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-If no command is given, run ``${SHELL} \fB\-i\fR'' (default: /bin/sh).
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Roland McGrath.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B chroot
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B chroot
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info chroot
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/chsh.1 b/raw/man1/chsh.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d86999..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chsh.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" chsh.1 -- change your login shell
-.\" (c) 1994 by salvatore valente <svalente at athena.mit.edu>
-.\"
-.\" this program is free software. you can redistribute it and
-.\" modify it under the terms of the gnu general public license.
-.\" there is no warranty.
-.\"
-.TH CHSH 1 "7 October 1998" "chsh" "Linux Reference Manual"
-.SH NAME
-chsh \- change your login shell
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chsh
-[\ \-s\ shell\ ] [\ \-l\ ] [\ \-u\ ] [\ \-v\ ] [\ username\ ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B chsh
-is used to change your login shell.
-If a shell is not given on the command line,
-.B chsh
-prompts for one.
-.SS VALID SHELLS
-.B chsh
-will accept the full pathname of any executable file on the system.
-However, it will issue a warning if the shell is not listed in the
-.I /etc/shells
-file.
-On the other hand, it can also be configured such that it will
-only accept shells listed in this file, unless you are root.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.I "\-s, \-\-shell"
-Specify your login shell.
-.TP
-.I "\-l, \-\-list-shells"
-Print the list of shells listed in
-.I /etc/shells
-and exit.
-.TP
-.I "\-u, \-\-help"
-Print a usage message and exit.
-.TP
-.I "-v, \-\-version"
-Print version information and exit.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR login (1),
-.BR passwd (5),
-.BR shells (5)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Salvatore Valente <svalente at mit.edu>
diff --git a/raw/man1/chvt.1 b/raw/man1/chvt.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c7b9105..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/chvt.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)chvt.1 1.0 970126 aeb
-.TH CHVT 1 "26 January 1997"
-.SH NAME
-chvt \- change foreground virtual terminal
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chvt
-.I N
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The command
-.B chvt
-.I N
-makes
-.I /dev/ttyN
-the foreground terminal.
-(The corresponding screen is created if it did not exist yet.
-To get rid of unused VTs,
-use
-.BR deallocvt (1).)
-The key combination
-.RI (Ctrl-)LeftAlt-F N
-(with
-.I N
-in the range 1-12) usually has a similar effect.
diff --git a/raw/man1/cksum.1 b/raw/man1/cksum.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 54ff87d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/cksum.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CKSUM "1" "October 2003" "cksum (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-cksum \- checksum and count the bytes in a file
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B cksum
-[\fIFILE\fR]...
-.br
-.B cksum
-[\fIOPTION\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print CRC checksum and byte counts of each FILE.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Q. Frank Xia.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B cksum
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B cksum
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info cksum
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/clear.1 b/raw/man1/clear.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4dab1e2..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/clear.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\"***************************************************************************
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998,2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc. *
-.\" *
-.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a *
-.\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the *
-.\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including *
-.\" without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, *
-.\" distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell *
-.\" copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is *
-.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: *
-.\" *
-.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included *
-.\" in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. *
-.\" *
-.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS *
-.\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF *
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. *
-.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, *
-.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR *
-.\" OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR *
-.\" THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. *
-.\" *
-.\" Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright *
-.\" holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the *
-.\" sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written *
-.\" authorization. *
-.\"***************************************************************************
-.\"
-.TH clear 1 ""
-.ds n 5
-.SH NAME
-\fBclear\fR - clear the terminal screen
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBclear\fR
-.br
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBclear\fR clears your screen if this is possible. It looks in the
-environment for the terminal type and then in the \fBterminfo\fR database to
-figure out how to clear the screen.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-\fBtput\fR(1), \fBterminfo\fR(\*n)
-.\"#
-.\"# The following sets edit modes for GNU EMACS
-.\"# Local Variables:
-.\"# mode:nroff
-.\"# fill-column:79
-.\"# End:
diff --git a/raw/man1/clusterdb.1 b/raw/man1/clusterdb.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f96df7..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/clusterdb.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CLUSTERDB" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-clusterdb \- cluster a PostgreSQL database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBclusterdb\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-option\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB--table | -t \fItable\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdbname\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBclusterdb\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-option\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--all\fR\fR | \fR\fB-a\fR\fR ]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBclusterdb\fR is a utility for reclustering tables
-in a PostgreSQL database. It finds tables
-that have previously been clustered, and clusters them again on the same
-index that was last used. Tables that have never been clustered are not
-affected.
-.PP
-\fBclusterdb\fR is a wrapper around the SQL
-command CLUSTER [\fBcluster\fR(7)].
-There is no effective difference between clustering databases via
-this utility and via other methods for accessing the server.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBclusterdb\fR accepts the following command-line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-.TP
-\fB--all\fR
-Cluster all databases.
-.TP
-\fB[-d] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB[--dbname] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the database to be clustered.
-If this is not specified and \fB-a\fR (or
-\fB--all\fR) is not used, the database name is read
-from the environment variable \fBPGDATABASE\fR. If
-that is not set, the user name specified for the connection is
-used.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Echo the commands that \fBclusterdb\fR generates
-and sends to the server.
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Do not display a response.
-.TP
-\fB-t \fItable\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--table \fItable\fB\fR
-Cluster \fItable\fR only.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBclusterdb\fR also accepts
-the following command-line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the server is
-running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used as the
-directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server
-is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as.
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-In case of difficulty, see CLUSTER [\fBcluster\fR(7)] and \fBpsql\fR(1) for
-discussions of potential problems and error messages.
-The database server must be running at the
-targeted host. Also, any default connection settings and environment
-variables used by the \fBlibpq\fR front-end
-library will apply.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To cluster the database test:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBclusterdb test\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To cluster a single table
-foo in a database named
-xyzzy:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBclusterdb --table foo xyzzy\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CLUSTER [\fBcluster\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/col.1 b/raw/man1/col.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 1415121..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/col.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Michael Rendell.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)col.1 6.8 (Berkeley) 6/17/91
-.\"
-.Dd June 17, 1991
-.Dt COL 1
-.Os
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm col
-.Nd filter reverse line feeds from input
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm col
-.Op Fl bfpx
-.Op Fl l Ar num
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm Col
-filters out reverse (and half reverse) line feeds so the output is
-in the correct order with only forward and half forward line
-feeds, and replaces white-space characters with tabs where possible.
-This can be useful in processing the output of
-.Xr nroff 1
-and
-.Xr tbl 1 .
-.Pp
-.Nm Col
-reads from standard input and writes to standard output.
-.Pp
-The options are as follows:
-.Bl -tag -width "-lnum"
-.It Fl b
-Do not output any backspaces, printing only the last character
-written to each column position.
-.It Fl f
-Forward half line feeds are permitted (``fine'' mode).
-Normally characters printed on a half line boundary are printed
-on the following line.
-.It Fl p
-Force unknown control sequences to be passed through unchanged.
-Normally,
-.Nm col
-will filter out any control sequences from the input other than those
-recognized and interpreted by itself, which are listed below.
-.It Fl x
-Output multiple spaces instead of tabs.
-.It Fl l Ns Ar num
-Buffer at least
-.Ar num
-lines in memory.
-By default, 128 lines are buffered.
-.El
-.Pp
-The control sequences for carriage motion that
-.Nm col
-understands and their decimal values are listed in the following
-table:
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "carriage return" -compact
-.It ESC\-7
-reverse line feed (escape then 7)
-.It ESC\-8
-half reverse line feed (escape then 8)
-.It ESC\-9
-half forward line feed (escape then 9)
-.It backspace
-moves back one column (8); ignored in the first column
-.It carriage return
-(13)
-.It newline
-forward line feed (10); also does carriage return
-.It shift in
-shift to normal character set (15)
-.It shift out
-shift to alternate character set (14)
-.It space
-moves forward one column (32)
-.It tab
-moves forward to next tab stop (9)
-.It vertical tab
-reverse line feed (11)
-.El
-.Pp
-All unrecognized control characters and escape sequences are
-discarded.
-.Pp
-.Nm Col
-keeps track of the character set as characters are read and makes
-sure the character set is correct when they are output.
-.Pp
-If the input attempts to back up to the last flushed line,
-.Nm col
-will display a warning message.
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr expand 1 ,
-.Xr nroff 1 ,
-.Xr tbl 1
-.Sh STANDARDS
-The
-.Nm col
-utility conforms to the Single UNIX Specification, Version 2. The
-.Fl l
-option is an extension to the standard.
-.Sh HISTORY
-A
-.Nm col
-command
-appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX.
diff --git a/raw/man1/comm.1 b/raw/man1/comm.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ae5d3a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/comm.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH COMM "1" "October 2003" "comm (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-comm \- compare two sorted files line by line
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B comm
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fILEFT_FILE RIGHT_FILE\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Compare sorted files LEFT_FILE and RIGHT_FILE line by line.
-.TP
-\fB\-1\fR
-suppress lines unique to left file
-.TP
-\fB\-2\fR
-suppress lines unique to right file
-.TP
-\fB\-3\fR
-suppress lines that appear in both files
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B comm
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B comm
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info comm
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/command.1 b/raw/man1/command.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/command.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/compgen.1 b/raw/man1/compgen.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/compgen.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/complete.1 b/raw/man1/complete.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/complete.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/continue.1 b/raw/man1/continue.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/continue.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/cp.1 b/raw/man1/cp.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f036d71..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/cp.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CP "1" "October 2003" "cp (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-cp \- copy files and directories
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B cp
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fISOURCE DEST\fR
-.br
-.B cp
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fISOURCE\fR... \fIDIRECTORY\fR
-.br
-.B cp
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fI--target-directory=DIRECTORY SOURCE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Copy SOURCE to DEST, or multiple SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-archive\fR
-same as \fB\-dpR\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-backup\fR[=\fICONTROL\fR]
-make a backup of each existing destination file
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR
-like \fB\-\-backup\fR but does not accept an argument
-.TP
-\fB\-\-copy\-contents\fR
-copy contents of special files when recursive
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR
-same as \fB\-\-no\-dereference\fR \fB\-\-preserve\fR=\fIlink\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-dereference\fR
-never follow symbolic links
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-force\fR
-if an existing destination file cannot be
-opened, remove it and try again
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-interactive\fR
-prompt before overwrite
-.TP
-\fB\-H\fR
-follow command-line symbolic links
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-link\fR
-link files instead of copying
-.TP
-\fB\-L\fR, \fB\-\-dereference\fR
-always follow symbolic links
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR
-same as \fB\-\-preserve\fR=\fImode\fR,ownership,timestamps
-.TP
-\fB\-\-preserve\fR[=\fIATTR_LIST\fR]
-preserve the specified attributes (default:
-mode,ownership,timestamps), if possible
-additional attributes: links, all
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-preserve\fR=\fIATTR_LIST\fR
-don't preserve the specified attributes
-.TP
-\fB\-\-parents\fR
-append source path to DIRECTORY
-.TP
-\fB\-P\fR
-same as `--no-dereference'
-.TP
-\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-recursive\fR
-copy directories recursively
-.TP
-\fB\-\-remove\-destination\fR
-remove each existing destination file before
-attempting to open it (contrast with \fB\-\-force\fR)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-reply=\fR{yes,no,query}
-specify how to handle the prompt about an
-existing destination file
-.TP
-\fB\-\-sparse\fR=\fIWHEN\fR
-control creation of sparse files
-.TP
-\fB\-\-strip\-trailing\-slashes\fR remove any trailing slashes from each SOURCE
-argument
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-symbolic\-link\fR
-make symbolic links instead of copying
-.TP
-\fB\-S\fR, \fB\-\-suffix\fR=\fISUFFIX\fR
-override the usual backup suffix
-.TP
-\fB\-\-target\-directory\fR=\fIDIRECTORY\fR
-move all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-update\fR
-copy only when the SOURCE file is newer
-than the destination file or when the
-destination file is missing
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-explain what is being done
-.TP
-\fB\-x\fR, \fB\-\-one\-file\-system\fR
-stay on this file system
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-By default, sparse SOURCE files are detected by a crude heuristic and the
-corresponding DEST file is made sparse as well. That is the behavior
-selected by \fB\-\-sparse\fR=\fIauto\fR. Specify \fB\-\-sparse\fR=\fIalways\fR to create a sparse DEST
-file whenever the SOURCE file contains a long enough sequence of zero bytes.
-Use \fB\-\-sparse\fR=\fInever\fR to inhibit creation of sparse files.
-.PP
-The backup suffix is `~', unless set with \fB\-\-suffix\fR or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.
-The version control method may be selected via the \fB\-\-backup\fR option or through
-the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values:
-.TP
-none, off
-never make backups (even if \fB\-\-backup\fR is given)
-.TP
-numbered, t
-make numbered backups
-.TP
-existing, nil
-numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise
-.TP
-simple, never
-always make simple backups
-.PP
-As a special case, cp makes a backup of SOURCE when the force and backup
-options are given and SOURCE and DEST are the same name for an existing,
-regular file.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, and Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B cp
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B cp
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info cp
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/cpio.1 b/raw/man1/cpio.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 57667d4..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/cpio.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,341 +0,0 @@
-.TH CPIO 1L \" -*- nroff -*-
-.SH NAME
-cpio \- copy files to and from archives
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B cpio
-{\-o|\-\-create} [\-0acvABLV] [\-C bytes] [\-H format] [\-M message]
-[\-O [[user@]host:]archive] [\-F [[user@]host:]archive]
-[\-\-file=[[user@]host:]archive] [\-\-format=format] [\-\-message=message]
-[\-\-null] [\-\-reset-access-time] [\-\-verbose] [\-\-dot] [\-\-append]
-[\-\-block-size=blocks] [\-\-dereference] [\-\-io-size=bytes] [\-\-quiet]
-[\-\-force\-local] [\-\-rsh-command=command] [\-\-help] [\-\-version]
-< name-list [> archive]
-
-.B cpio
-{\-i|\-\-extract} [\-bcdfmnrtsuvBSV] [\-C bytes] [\-E file] [\-H format]
-[\-M message] [\-R [user][:.][group]] [\-I [[user@]host:]archive]
-[\-F [[user@]host:]archive] [\-\-file=[[user@]host:]archive]
-[\-\-make-directories] [\-\-nonmatching] [\-\-preserve-modification-time]
-[\-\-numeric-uid-gid] [\-\-rename] [\-t|\-\-list] [\-\-swap-bytes] [\-\-swap] [\-\-dot]
-[\-\-unconditional] [\-\-verbose] [\-\-block-size=blocks] [\-\-swap-halfwords]
-[\-\-io-size=bytes] [\-\-pattern-file=file] [\-\-format=format]
-[\-\-owner=[user][:.][group]] [\-\-no-preserve-owner] [\-\-message=message]
-[\-\-force\-local] [\-\-no\-absolute\-filenames] [\-\-sparse]
-[\-\-only\-verify\-crc] [\-\-quiet] [\-\-rsh-command=command] [\-\-help]
-[\-\-version] [pattern...] [< archive]
-
-.B cpio
-{\-p|\-\-pass-through} [\-0adlmuvLV] [\-R [user][:.][group]]
-[\-\-null] [\-\-reset-access-time] [\-\-make-directories] [\-\-link] [\-\-quiet]
-[\-\-preserve-modification-time] [\-\-unconditional] [\-\-verbose] [\-\-dot]
-[\-\-dereference] [\-\-owner=[user][:.][group]] [\-\-no-preserve-owner]
-[\-\-sparse] [\-\-help] [\-\-version] destination-directory < name-list
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page
-documents the GNU version of
-.BR cpio .
-.B cpio
-copies files into or out of a cpio or tar archive, which is a file that
-contains other files plus information about them, such as their
-file name, owner, timestamps, and access permissions. The archive can
-be another file on the disk, a magnetic tape, or a pipe.
-.B cpio
-has three operating modes.
-.PP
-In copy-out mode,
-.B cpio
-copies files into an archive. It reads a list of filenames, one per
-line, on the standard input, and writes the archive onto the standard
-output. A typical way to generate the list of filenames is with the
-.B find
-command; you should give
-.B find
-the \-depth option to minimize problems with permissions on
-directories that are unwritable or not searchable.
-.PP
-In copy-in mode,
-.B cpio
-copies files out of an archive or lists the archive contents. It
-reads the archive from the standard input. Any non-option command
-line arguments are shell globbing patterns; only files in the archive
-whose names match one or more of those patterns are copied from the
-archive. Unlike in the shell, an initial `.' in a filename does
-match a wildcard at the start of a pattern, and a `/' in a filename
-can match wildcards. If no patterns are given, all files are
-extracted.
-.PP
-In copy-pass mode,
-.B cpio
-copies files from one directory tree to another, combining the
-copy-out and copy-in steps without actually using an archive.
-It reads the list of files to copy from the standard input; the
-directory into which it will copy them is given as a non-option
-argument.
-.PP
-.B cpio
-supports the following archive formats: binary, old ASCII, new
-ASCII, crc, HPUX binary, HPUX old ASCII, old tar, and POSIX.1 tar.
-The binary format
-is obsolete because it encodes information about the files in a way
-that is not portable between different machine architectures.
-The old ASCII format is portable between different machine architectures,
-but should not be used on file systems with more than 65536 i-nodes.
-The new ASCII format is portable between different machine architectures
-and can be used on any size file system, but is not supported by all
-versions of
-.BR cpio ;
-currently, it is only supported by GNU and Unix System V R4.
-The crc format is
-like the new ASCII format, but also contains a checksum for each file
-which
-.B cpio
-calculates when creating an archive
-and verifies when the file is extracted from the archive.
-The HPUX formats are provided for compatibility with HPUX's cpio which
-stores device files differently.
-.PP
-The tar format is provided for compatability with
-the
-.B tar
-program. It can not be used to archive files with names
-longer than 100 characters, and can not be used to archive "special"
-(block or character devices) files.
-The POSIX.1 tar format can not be used to archive files with names longer
-than 255 characters (less unless they have a "/" in just the right place).
-.PP
-By default,
-.B cpio
-creates binary format archives, for compatibility with
-older
-.B cpio
-programs.
-When extracting from archives,
-.B cpio
-automatically recognizes which kind of archive it is reading and can
-read archives created on machines with a different byte-order.
-.PP
-Some of the options to
-.B cpio
-apply only to certain operating modes; see the SYNOPSIS section for a
-list of which options are allowed in which modes.
-.SS OPTIONS
-.TP
-.I "\-0, \-\-null"
-In copy-out and copy-pass modes, read a list of filenames terminated
-by a null character instead of a newline, so that files whose names
-contain newlines can be archived. GNU
-.B find
-is one way to produce a list of null-terminated filenames.
-.TP
-.I "\-a, \-\-reset-access-time"
-Reset the access times of files after reading them, so that it does
-not look like they have just been read.
-.TP
-.I "\-A, \-\-append"
-Append to an existing archive. Only works in copy-out mode. The
-archive must be a disk file specified with the
-.I \-O
-or
-.I "\-F (\-\-file)"
-option.
-.TP
-.I "\-b, \-\-swap"
-In copy-in mode, swap both halfwords of words and bytes of halfwords
-in the data. Equivalent to
-.IR "\-sS" .
-Use this option to convert 32-bit integers between big-endian and
-little-endian machines.
-.TP
-.I "\-B"
-Set the I/O block size to 5120 bytes. Initially the block size is 512
-bytes.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-block-size=BLOCK-SIZE"
-Set the I/O block size to BLOCK-SIZE * 512 bytes.
-.TP
-.I "\-c"
-Identical to "-H newc", use the new (SVR4) portable format.
-If you wish the old portable (ASCII) archive format, use "-H odc" instead.
-.TP
-.I "\-C IO-SIZE, \-\-io-size=IO-SIZE"
-Set the I/O block size to IO-SIZE bytes.
-.TP
-.I "\-d, \-\-make-directories"
-Create leading directories where needed.
-.TP
-.I "\-E FILE, \-\-pattern-file=FILE"
-In copy-in mode, read additional patterns specifying filenames to
-extract or list from FILE. The lines of FILE are treated as if they
-had been non-option arguments to
-.BR cpio .
-.TP
-.I "\-f, \-\-nonmatching"
-Only copy files that do not match any of the given patterns.
-.TP
-.I "\-F, \-\-file=archive"
-Archive filename to use instead of standard input or output. To use a
-tape drive on another machine as the archive, use a filename that
-starts with `HOSTNAME:'. The hostname can be preceded by a
-username and an `@' to access the remote tape drive as that user, if
-you have permission to do so (typically an entry in that user's
-`~/.rhosts' file).
-.TP
-.I "\-\-force-local"
-With
-.IR \-F ,
-.IR \-I ,
-or
-.IR \-O ,
-take the archive file name to be a local file even if it contains a
-colon, which would ordinarily indicate a remote host name.
-.TP
-.I "\-H FORMAT, \-\-format=FORMAT"
-Use archive format FORMAT. The valid formats are listed below;
-the same names are also recognized in all-caps. The default in
-copy-in mode is to automatically detect the archive format, and in
-copy-out mode is "bin".
-.RS
-.IP bin
-The obsolete binary format.
-.IP odc
-The old (POSIX.1) portable format.
-.IP newc
-The new (SVR4) portable format, which supports file systems having
-more than 65536 i-nodes.
-.IP crc
-The new (SVR4) portable format with a checksum added.
-.IP tar
-The old tar format.
-.IP ustar
-The POSIX.1 tar format. Also recognizes GNU
-.B tar
-archives, which are similar but not identical.
-.IP hpbin
-The obsolete binary format used by HPUX's cpio (which stores device files
-differently).
-.IP hpodc
-The portable format used by HPUX's cpio (which stores device files differently).
-.RE
-.TP
-.I "\-i, \-\-extract"
-Run in copy-in mode.
-.TP
-.I "\-I archive"
-Archive filename to use instead of standard input. To use a
-tape drive on another machine as the archive, use a filename that
-starts with `HOSTNAME:'. The hostname can be preceded by a
-username and an `@' to access the remote tape drive as that user, if
-you have permission to do so (typically an entry in that user's
-`~/.rhosts' file).
-.TP
-.I \-k
-Ignored; for compatibility with other versions of
-.BR cpio .
-.TP
-.I "\-l, \-\-link"
-Link files instead of copying them, when possible.
-.TP
-.I "\-L, \-\-dereference"
-Dereference symbolic links (copy the files that they point to instead
-of copying the links).
-.TP
-.I "\-m, \-\-preserve-modification-time"
-Retain previous file modification times when creating files.
-.TP
-.I "\-M MESSAGE, \-\-message=MESSAGE"
-Print MESSAGE when the end of a volume of the backup media (such as a
-tape or a floppy disk) is reached, to prompt the user to insert a new
-volume. If MESSAGE contains the string "%d", it is replaced by the
-current volume number (starting at 1).
-.TP
-.I "\-n, \-\-numeric-uid-gid"
-In the verbose table of contents listing, show numeric UID and GID
-instead of translating them into names.
-Also extracts tar archives using the numeric UID and GID instead of the
-user/group names.
-.RB ( cpio
-archives are always extracted using the numeric UID and GID.)
-.TP
-.I " \-\-no-absolute-filenames"
-In copy-in mode, create all files relative to the current directory,
-even if they have an absolute file name in the archive.
-.TP
-.I " \-\-no-preserve-owner"
-In copy-in mode and copy-pass mode, do not change the ownership of the
-files; leave them owned by the user extracting them. This is the
-default for non-root users, so that users on System V don't
-inadvertantly give away files.
-.TP
-.I "\-o, \-\-create"
-Run in copy-out mode.
-.TP
-.I "\-O archive"
-Archive filename to use instead of standard output. To use a tape
-drive on another machine as the archive, use a filename that starts
-with `HOSTNAME:'. The hostname can be preceded by a username and an
-`@' to access the remote tape drive as that user, if you have
-permission to do so (typically an entry in that user's `~/.rhosts'
-file).
-.TP
-.I " \-\-only-verify-crc"
-When reading a CRC format archive in copy-in mode, only verify the
-CRC's of each file in the archive, don't actually extract the files.
-.TP
-.I "\-p, \-\-pass-through"
-Run in copy-pass mode.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-quiet"
-Do not print the number of blocks copied.
-.TP
-.I "\-r, \-\-rename"
-Interactively rename files.
-.TP
-.I "\-R [user][:.][group], \-\-owner [user][:.][group]"
-In copy-out and copy-pass modes, set the ownership of all files created
-to the specified user and/or group. Either the user or the group, or
-both, must be present. If the group is omitted but the ":" or "."
-separator is given, use the given user's login group. Only the
-super-user can change files' ownership.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-rsh-command=COMMAND"
-Notifies
-.B mt
-that it should use COMMAND to communicate with remote devices instead of
-.I /usr/bin/ssh
-or
-.IR /usr/bin/rsh .
-.TP
-.I "\-\-sparse"
-In copy-in and copy-pass modes, write files with large blocks of zeros
-as sparse files.
-.TP
-.I "\-s, \-\-swap-bytes"
-In copy-in mode, swap the bytes of each halfword (pair of bytes) in the
-files.
-.TP
-.I "\-S, \-\-swap-halfwords"
-In copy-in mode, swap the halfwords of each word (4 bytes) in the
-files.
-.TP
-.I "\-t, \-\-list"
-Print a table of contents of the input.
-.TP
-.I "\-u, \-\-unconditional"
-Replace all files, without asking whether to replace existing newer
-files with older files.
-.TP
-.I "\-v, \-\-verbose"
-List the files processed, or with
-.IR \-t ,
-give an `ls \-l' style table of contents listing. In a verbose table
-of contents of a ustar archive, user and group names in the archive
-that do not exist on the local system are replaced by the names that
-correspond locally to the numeric UID and GID stored in the archive.
-.TP
-.I "\-V \-\-dot"
-Print a "." for each file processed.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-version"
-Print the
-.B cpio
-program version number and exit.
diff --git a/raw/man1/createdb.1 b/raw/man1/createdb.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 41bd409..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/createdb.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATEDB" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-createdb \- create a new PostgreSQL database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBcreatedb\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdbname\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdescription\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBcreatedb\fR creates a new PostgreSQL
-database.
-.PP
-Normally, the database user who executes this command becomes the owner of
-the new database.
-However a different owner can be specified via the \fB-O\fR
-option, if the executing user has appropriate privileges.
-.PP
-\fBcreatedb\fR is a wrapper around the
-SQL command CREATE DATABASE [\fBcreate_database\fR(7)].
-There is no effective difference between creating databases via
-this utility and via other methods for accessing the server.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBcreatedb\fR accepts the following command-line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the database to be created. The name must be
-unique among all PostgreSQL databases in this cluster.
-The default is to create a database with the same name as the
-current system user.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdescription\fB\fR
-This optionally specifies a comment to be associated with the newly created
-database.
-.TP
-\fB-D \fIlocation\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--location \fIlocation\fB\fR
-Specifies the alternative location for the database. See also \fBinitlocation\fR(1).
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Echo the commands that \fBcreatedb\fR generates
-and sends to the server.
-.TP
-\fB-E \fIencoding\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--encoding \fIencoding\fB\fR
-Specifies the character encoding scheme to be used in this database.
-.TP
-\fB-O \fIowner\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--owner \fIowner\fB\fR
-Specifies the database user who will own the new database.
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Do not display a response.
-.TP
-\fB-T \fItemplate\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--template \fItemplate\fB\fR
-Specifies the template database from which to build this database.
-.PP
-.PP
-The options \fB-D\fR, \fB-E\fR,
-\fB-O\fR, and
-\fB-T\fR correspond to options of the underlying
-SQL command CREATE DATABASE [\fBcreate_database\fR(7)]; see there for more information
-about them.
-.PP
-\fBcreatedb\fR also accepts the following
-command-line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server is running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used
-as the directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or the local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR
-If set, the name of the database to create, unless overridden on
-the command line.
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters. \fBPGUSER\fR also
-determines the name of the database to create, if it is not
-specified on the command line or by \fBPGDATABASE\fR.
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-In case of difficulty, see CREATE DATABASE [\fBcreate_database\fR(7)] and \fBpsql\fR(1) for
-discussions of potential problems and error messages.
-The database server must be running at the
-targeted host. Also, any default connection settings and environment
-variables used by the \fBlibpq\fR front-end
-library will apply.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To create the database demo using the default
-database server:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBcreatedb demo\fR
-CREATE DATABASE
-.sp
-.fi
-The response is the same as you would have gotten from running the
-\fBCREATE DATABASE\fR SQL command.
-.PP
-To create the database demo using the
-server on host eden, port 5000, using the
-LATIN1 encoding scheme with a look at the
-underlying command:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBcreatedb -p 5000 -h eden -E LATIN1 -e demo\fR
-CREATE DATABASE "demo" WITH ENCODING = 'LATIN1'
-CREATE DATABASE
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBdropdb\fR(1), CREATE DATABASE [\fBcreate_database\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/createlang.1 b/raw/man1/createlang.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f748173..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/createlang.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATELANG" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-createlang \- define a new PostgreSQL procedural language
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBcreatelang\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-option\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fB\fIlangname\fB\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdbname\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBcreatelang\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-option\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fR\fR \fB--list\fR\fR | \fR\fB-l\fR\fR\fR \fB\fIdbname\fB\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBcreatelang\fR is a utility for adding a new
-programming language to a PostgreSQL database.
-\fBcreatelang\fR can handle all the languages
-supplied in the default PostgreSQL distribution, but
-not languages provided by other parties.
-.PP
-Although backend programming languages can be added directly using
-several SQL commands, it is recommended to use
-\fBcreatelang\fR because it performs a number
-of checks and is much easier to use. See
-CREATE LANGUAGE [\fBcreate_language\fR(7)]
-for additional information.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBcreatelang\fR accepts the following command-line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\fIlangname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the procedural programming language to be
-defined.
-.TP
-\fB[-d] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB[--dbname] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies to which database the language should be added.
-The default is to use the database with the same name as the
-current system user.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Display SQL commands as they are executed.
-.TP
-\fB-l\fR
-.TP
-\fB--list\fR
-Show a list of already installed languages in the target database.
-.TP
-\fB-L \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-Specifies the directory in which the language interpreter is
-to be found. The directory is normally found automatically; this
-option is primarily for debugging purposes.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBcreatelang\fR also accepts
-the following command-line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server
-is running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used
-as the directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server
-is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as.
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-Most error messages are self-explanatory. If not, run
-\fBcreatelang\fR with the \fB--echo\fR
-option and see under the respective SQL command
-for details.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use \fBdroplang\fR(1) to remove a language.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To install the language pltcl into the database
-template1:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBcreatelang pltcl template1\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBdroplang\fR(1), CREATE LANGUAGE [\fBcreate_language\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/createuser.1 b/raw/man1/createuser.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6fdccea..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/createuser.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,170 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATEUSER" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-createuser \- define a new PostgreSQL user account
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBcreateuser\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIusername\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBcreateuser\fR creates a
-new PostgreSQL user.
-Only superusers (users with usesuper set in
-the pg_shadow table) can create
-new PostgreSQL users,
-so \fBcreateuser\fR must be
-invoked by someone who can connect as a PostgreSQL
-superuser.
-.PP
-Being a superuser also implies the ability to bypass access permission
-checks within the database, so superuserdom should not be granted lightly.
-.PP
-\fBcreateuser\fR is a wrapper around the
-SQL command CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(7)].
-There is no effective difference between creating users via
-this utility and via other methods for accessing the server.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBcreateuser\fR accepts the following command-line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\fIusername\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the PostgreSQL user to be created.
-This name must be unique among all PostgreSQL users.
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-.TP
-\fB--adduser\fR
-The new user is allowed to create other users.
-(Note: Actually, this makes the new user a \fBsuperuser\fR.
-The option is poorly named.)
-.TP
-\fB-A\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-adduser\fR
-The new user is not allowed to create other users (i.e.,
-the new user is a regular user, not a superuser).
-This is the default.
-.TP
-\fB-d\fR
-.TP
-\fB--createdb\fR
-The new user is allowed to create databases.
-.TP
-\fB-D\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-createdb\fR
-The new user is not allowed to create databases.
-This is the default.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Echo the commands that \fBcreateuser\fR generates
-and sends to the server.
-.TP
-\fB-E\fR
-.TP
-\fB--encrypted\fR
-Encrypts the user's password stored in the database. If not
-specified, the default password behavior is used.
-.TP
-\fB-i \fInumber\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--sysid \fInumber\fB\fR
-Allows you to pick a non-default user ID for the new user. This is not
-necessary, but some people like it.
-.TP
-\fB-N\fR
-.TP
-\fB--unencrypted\fR
-Does not encrypt the user's password stored in the database. If
-not specified, the default password behavior is used.
-.TP
-\fB-P\fR
-.TP
-\fB--pwprompt\fR
-If given, \fBcreateuser\fR will issue a prompt for
-the password of the new user. This is not necessary if you do not plan
-on using password authentication.
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Do not display a response.
-.PP
-.PP
-You will be prompted for a name and other missing information if it
-is not specified on the command line.
-.PP
-\fBcreateuser\fR also accepts the following
-command-line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server
-is running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used
-as the directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server
-is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as (not the user name to create).
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt (to connect to the server, not for the
-password of the new user).
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-In case of difficulty, see CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(7)] and \fBpsql\fR(1) for
-discussions of potential problems and error messages.
-The database server must be running at the
-targeted host. Also, any default connection settings and environment
-variables used by the \fBlibpq\fR front-end
-library will apply.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To create a user joe on the default database
-server:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBcreateuser joe\fR
-Is the new user allowed to create databases? (y/n) \fBn\fR
-Shall the new user be allowed to create more new users? (y/n) \fBn\fR
-CREATE USER
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To create the same user joe using the
-server on host eden, port 5000, avoiding the prompts and
-taking a look at the underlying command:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBcreateuser -p 5000 -h eden -D -A -e joe\fR
-CREATE USER "joe" NOCREATEDB NOCREATEUSER
-CREATE USER
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBdropuser\fR(1), CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/cut.1 b/raw/man1/cut.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8428ba8..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/cut.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH CUT "1" "October 2003" "cut (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-cut \- remove sections from each line of files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B cut
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print selected parts of lines from each FILE to standard output.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-bytes\fR=\fILIST\fR
-output only these bytes
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-characters\fR=\fILIST\fR
-output only these characters
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-delimiter\fR=\fIDELIM\fR
-use DELIM instead of TAB for field delimiter
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-fields\fR=\fILIST\fR
-output only these fields; also print any line
-that contains no delimiter character, unless
-the \fB\-s\fR option is specified
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR
-with \fB\-b\fR: don't split multibyte characters
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-only\-delimited\fR
-do not print lines not containing delimiters
-.TP
-\fB\-\-output\-delimiter\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-use STRING as the output delimiter
-the default is to use the input delimiter
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Use one, and only one of \fB\-b\fR, \fB\-c\fR or \fB\-f\fR. Each LIST is made up of one
-range, or many ranges separated by commas. Each range is one of:
-.TP
-N
-N'th byte, character or field, counted from 1
-.TP
-N-
-from N'th byte, character or field, to end of line
-.TP
-N-M
-from N'th to M'th (included) byte, character or field
-.TP
-\fB\-M\fR
-from first to M'th (included) byte, character or field
-.PP
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David Ihnat, David MacKenzie, and Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B cut
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B cut
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info cut
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/date.1 b/raw/man1/date.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2eefa7c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/date.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH DATE "1" "March 2003" "date (coreutils) 5.0" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-date \- print or set the system date and time
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B date
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fI+FORMAT\fR]
-.br
-.B date
-[\fI-u|--utc|--universal\fR] [\fIMMDDhhmm\fR[[\fICC\fR]\fIYY\fR][\fI.ss\fR]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Display the current time in the given FORMAT, or set the system date.
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-date\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-display time described by STRING, not `now'
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-file\fR=\fIDATEFILE\fR
-like \fB\-\-date\fR once for each line of DATEFILE
-.TP
-\fB\-ITIMESPEC\fR, \fB\-\-iso\-8601\fR[=\fITIMESPEC\fR]
-output date/time in ISO 8601 format.
-TIMESPEC=`date' for date only,
-`hours', `minutes', or `seconds' for date and
-time to the indicated precision.
-\fB\-\-iso\-8601\fR without TIMESPEC defaults to `date'.
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-reference\fR=\fIFILE\fR
-display the last modification time of FILE
-.TP
-\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-rfc\-822\fR
-output RFC-822 compliant date string
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-set\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-set time described by STRING
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-utc\fR, \fB\-\-universal\fR
-print or set Coordinated Universal Time
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-FORMAT controls the output. The only valid option for the second form
-specifies Coordinated Universal Time. Interpreted sequences are:
-.TP
-%%
-a literal %
-.TP
-%a
-locale's abbreviated weekday name (Sun..Sat)
-.TP
-%A
-locale's full weekday name, variable length (Sunday..Saturday)
-.TP
-%b
-locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec)
-.TP
-%B
-locale's full month name, variable length (January..December)
-.TP
-%c
-locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04 12:02:33 EST 1989)
-.TP
-%C
-century (year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer) [00-99]
-.TP
-%d
-day of month (01..31)
-.TP
-%D
-date (mm/dd/yy)
-.TP
-%e
-day of month, blank padded ( 1..31)
-.TP
-%F
-same as %Y-%m-%d
-.TP
-%g
-the 2-digit year corresponding to the %V week number
-.TP
-%G
-the 4-digit year corresponding to the %V week number
-.TP
-%h
-same as %b
-.TP
-%H
-hour (00..23)
-.TP
-%I
-hour (01..12)
-.TP
-%j
-day of year (001..366)
-.TP
-%k
-hour ( 0..23)
-.TP
-%l
-hour ( 1..12)
-.TP
-%m
-month (01..12)
-.TP
-%M
-minute (00..59)
-.TP
-%n
-a newline
-.TP
-%N
-nanoseconds (000000000..999999999)
-.TP
-%p
-locale's upper case AM or PM indicator (blank in many locales)
-.TP
-%P
-locale's lower case am or pm indicator (blank in many locales)
-.TP
-%r
-time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M)
-.TP
-%R
-time, 24-hour (hh:mm)
-.TP
-%s
-seconds since `00:00:00 1970-01-01 UTC' (a GNU extension)
-.TP
-%S
-second (00..60); the 60 is necessary to accommodate a leap second
-.TP
-%t
-a horizontal tab
-.TP
-%T
-time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss)
-.TP
-%u
-day of week (1..7); 1 represents Monday
-.TP
-%U
-week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)
-.TP
-%V
-week number of year with Monday as first day of week (01..53)
-.TP
-%w
-day of week (0..6); 0 represents Sunday
-.TP
-%W
-week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)
-.TP
-%x
-locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy)
-.TP
-%X
-locale's time representation (%H:%M:%S)
-.TP
-%y
-last two digits of year (00..99)
-.TP
-%Y
-year (1970...)
-.TP
-%z
-RFC-822 style numeric timezone (-0500) (a nonstandard extension)
-.TP
-%Z
-time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone is determinable
-.PP
-By default, date pads numeric fields with zeroes. GNU date recognizes
-the following modifiers between `%' and a numeric directive.
-.IP
-`-' (hyphen) do not pad the field
-`_' (underscore) pad the field with spaces
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-TZ
-Specifies the timezone, unless overridden by command line parameters.
-If neither is specified, the setting from /etc/localtime is used.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B date
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B date
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info date
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/dd.1 b/raw/man1/dd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 03bd1a3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH DD "1" "October 2003" "dd (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-dd \- convert and copy a file
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B dd
-[\fIOPTION\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Copy a file, converting and formatting according to the options.
-.TP
-bs=BYTES
-force ibs=BYTES and obs=BYTES
-.TP
-cbs=BYTES
-convert BYTES bytes at a time
-.TP
-conv=KEYWORDS
-convert the file as per the comma separated keyword list
-.TP
-count=BLOCKS
-copy only BLOCKS input blocks
-.TP
-ibs=BYTES
-read BYTES bytes at a time
-.TP
-if=FILE
-read from FILE instead of stdin
-.TP
-obs=BYTES
-write BYTES bytes at a time
-.TP
-of=FILE
-write to FILE instead of stdout
-.TP
-seek=BLOCKS
-skip BLOCKS obs-sized blocks at start of output
-.TP
-skip=BLOCKS
-skip BLOCKS ibs-sized blocks at start of input
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-BLOCKS and BYTES may be followed by the following multiplicative suffixes:
-xM M, c 1, w 2, b 512, kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1,000,000, M 1,048,576,
-GB 1,000,000,000, G 1,073,741,824, and so on for T, P, E, Z, Y.
-Each KEYWORD may be:
-.TP
-ascii
-from EBCDIC to ASCII
-.TP
-ebcdic
-from ASCII to EBCDIC
-.TP
-ibm
-from ASCII to alternated EBCDIC
-.TP
-block
-pad newline-terminated records with spaces to cbs-size
-.TP
-unblock
-replace trailing spaces in cbs-size records with newline
-.TP
-lcase
-change upper case to lower case
-.TP
-notrunc
-do not truncate the output file
-.TP
-ucase
-change lower case to upper case
-.TP
-swab
-swap every pair of input bytes
-.TP
-noerror
-continue after read errors
-.TP
-sync
-pad every input block with NULs to ibs-size; when used
-.IP
-with block or unblock, pad with spaces rather than NULs
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, and Stuart Kemp.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B dd
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B dd
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info dd
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/deallocvt.1 b/raw/man1/deallocvt.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 45a329d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/deallocvt.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)deallocvt.1 1.0 970317 aeb
-.TH DEALLOCVT 1 "17 Mar 1997"
-.SH NAME
-deallocvt \- deallocate unused virtual consoles
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B deallocvt
-.RI [ N " ...]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.LP
-The command
-.B deallocvt
-deallocates kernel memory and data structures
-for all unused virtual consoles.
-If one or more arguments
-.IR N " ..."
-are given, only the corresponding consoles
-.I /dev/ttyN
-are deallocated.
-
-A virtual console is unused if it is not the foreground console,
-and no process has it open for reading or writing, and no text
-has been selected on its screen.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR chvt (1),
-.BR openvt (1)
-
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/declare.1 b/raw/man1/declare.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/declare.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/df.1 b/raw/man1/df.1
deleted file mode 100644
index df77219..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/df.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH DF "1" "October 2003" "df (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-df \- report filesystem disk space usage
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B df
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page
-documents the GNU version of
-.BR df .
-.B df
-displays the amount of disk space available on the filesystem
-containing each file name argument. If no file name is given, the
-space available on all currently mounted filesystems is shown. Disk
-space is shown in 1K blocks by default, unless the environment
-variable POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, in which case 512-byte blocks are
-used.
-.PP
-If an argument is the absolute file name of a disk device node containing a
-mounted filesystem,
-.B df
-shows the space available on that filesystem rather than on the
-filesystem containing the device node (which is always the root
-filesystem). This version of
-.B df
-cannot show the space available on unmounted filesystems, because on
-most kinds of systems doing so requires very nonportable intimate
-knowledge of filesystem structures.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.PP
-Show information about the filesystem on which each FILE resides,
-or all filesystems by default.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-all\fR
-include filesystems having 0 blocks
-.HP
-\fB\-B\fR, \fB\-\-block\-size\fR=\fISIZE\fR use SIZE-byte blocks
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-human\-readable\fR
-print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K 234M 2G)
-.TP
-\fB\-H\fR, \fB\-\-si\fR
-likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-inodes\fR
-list inode information instead of block usage
-.TP
-\fB\-k\fR
-like \fB\-\-block\-size\fR=\fI1K\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-local\fR
-limit listing to local filesystems
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-sync\fR
-do not invoke sync before getting usage info (default)
-.TP
-\fB\-P\fR, \fB\-\-portability\fR
-use the POSIX output format
-.TP
-\fB\-\-sync\fR
-invoke sync before getting usage info
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-type\fR=\fITYPE\fR
-limit listing to filesystems of type TYPE
-.TP
-\fB\-T\fR, \fB\-\-print\-type\fR
-print filesystem type
-.TP
-\fB\-x\fR, \fB\-\-exclude\-type\fR=\fITYPE\fR
-limit listing to filesystems not of type TYPE
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR
-(ignored)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed by) one of following:
-kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1,000,000, M 1,048,576, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, Larry McVoy, and Paul Eggert.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B df
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B df
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info df
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/diff.1 b/raw/man1/diff.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a750dd..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/diff.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,485 +0,0 @@
-.TH DIFF 1 "22sep1993" "GNU Tools" "GNU Tools"
-.SH NAME
-diff \- find differences between two files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B diff
-[options] from-file to-file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-In the simplest case,
-.I diff
-compares the contents of the two files
-.I from-file
-and
-.IR to-file .
-A file name of
-.B \-
-stands for
-text read from the standard input. As a special case,
-.B "diff \- \-"
-compares a copy of standard input to itself.
-
-If
-.I from-file
-is a directory and
-.I to-file
-is not,
-.I diff
-compares the file in
-.I from-file
-whose file name is that of
-.IR to-file ,
-and vice versa. The non-directory file must not be
-.BR \- .
-
-If both
-.I from-file
-and
-.I to-file
-are directories,
-.I diff
-compares corresponding files in both directories, in
-alphabetical order; this comparison is not recursive unless the
-.B \-r
-or
-.B \-\-recursive
-option is given.
-.I diff
-never
-compares the actual contents of a directory as if it were a file. The
-file that is fully specified may not be standard input, because standard
-input is nameless and the notion of ``file with the same name'' does not
-apply.
-
-.B diff
-options begin with
-.BR \- ,
-so normally
-.I from-file
-and
-.I to-file
-may not begin with
-.BR \- .
-However,
-.B \-\-
-as an
-argument by itself treats the remaining arguments as file names even if
-they begin with
-.BR \- .
-.SS Options
-Below is a summary of all of the options that GNU
-.I diff
-accepts.
-Most options have two equivalent names, one of which is a single letter
-preceded by
-.BR \- ,
-and the other of which is a long name preceded by
-.BR \-\- .
-Multiple single letter options (unless they take an
-argument) can be combined into a single command line word:
-.B \-ac
-is
-equivalent to
-.BR "\-a \-c" .
-Long named options can be abbreviated to
-any unique prefix of their name. Brackets
-.RB ( [
-and
-.BR ] )
-indicate that an
-option takes an optional argument.
-.TP
-.BI \- lines
-Show
-.I lines
-(an integer) lines of context. This option does not
-specify an output format by itself; it has no effect unless it is
-combined with
-.B \-c
-or
-.BR \-u .
-This option is obsolete. For proper
-operation,
-.I patch
-typically needs at least two lines of context.
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Treat all files as text and compare them line-by-line, even if they
-do not seem to be text.
-.TP
-.B \-b
-Ignore changes in amount of white space.
-.TP
-.B \-B
-Ignore changes that just insert or delete blank lines.
-.TP
-.B \-\-brief
-Report only whether the files differ, not the details of the
-differences.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Use the context output format.
-.TP
-.BI "\-C " lines
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.BI \-\-context[= lines ]
-Use the context output format, showing
-.I lines
-(an integer) lines of
-context, or three if
-.I lines
-is not given.
-For proper operation,
-.I patch
-typically needs at least two lines of
-context.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-changed\-group\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output a line group containing differing lines from
-both files in if-then-else format.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Change the algorithm to perhaps find a smaller set of changes. This makes
-.I diff
-slower (sometimes much slower).
-.TP
-.BI "\-D " name
-Make merged if-then-else format output, conditional on the preprocessor
-macro
-.IR name .
-.TP
-.B \-e
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.B \-\-ed
-Make output that is a valid
-.I ed
-script.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-exclude= pattern
-When comparing directories, ignore files and subdirectories whose basenames
-match
-.IR pattern .
-.TP
-.BI \-\-exclude\-from= file
-When comparing directories, ignore files and subdirectories whose basenames
-match any pattern contained in
-.IR file .
-.TP
-.B \-\-expand\-tabs
-Expand tabs to spaces in the output, to preserve the alignment of tabs
-in the input files.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Make output that looks vaguely like an
-.I ed
-script but has changes
-in the order they appear in the file.
-.TP
-.BI "\-F " regexp
-In context and unified format, for each hunk of differences, show some
-of the last preceding line that matches
-.IR regexp .
-.TP
-.B \-\-forward\-ed
-Make output that looks vaguely like an
-.B ed
-script but has changes
-in the order they appear in the file.
-.TP
-.B \-h
-This option currently has no effect; it is present for Unix
-compatibility.
-.TP
-.B \-H
-Use heuristics to speed handling of large files that have numerous
-scattered small changes.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-horizon\-lines= lines
-Do not discard the last
-.I lines
-lines of the common prefix
-and the first
-.I lines
-lines of the common suffix.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-Ignore changes in case; consider upper- and lower-case letters
-equivalent.
-.TP
-.BI "\-I " regexp
-Ignore changes that just insert or delete lines that match
-.IR regexp .
-.TP
-.BI \-\-ifdef= name
-Make merged if-then-else format output, conditional on the preprocessor
-macro
-.IR name .
-.TP
-.B \-\-ignore\-all\-space
-Ignore white space when comparing lines.
-.TP
-.B \-\-ignore\-blank\-lines
-Ignore changes that just insert or delete blank lines.
-.TP
-.B \-\-ignore\-case
-Ignore changes in case; consider upper- and lower-case to be the same.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-ignore\-matching\-lines= regexp
-Ignore changes that just insert or delete lines that match
-.IR regexp .
-.TP
-.B \-\-ignore\-space\-change
-Ignore changes in amount of white space.
-.TP
-.B \-\-initial\-tab
-Output a tab rather than a space before the text of a line in normal or
-context format. This causes the alignment of tabs in the line to look
-normal.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Pass the output through
-.I pr
-to paginate it.
-.TP
-.BI "\-L " label
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.BI \-\-label= label
-Use
-.I label
-instead of the file name in the context format
-and unified format
-headers.
-.TP
-.B \-\-left\-column
-Print only the left column of two common lines in side by side format.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-line\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output all input lines in in-then-else format.
-.TP
-.B \-\-minimal
-Change the algorithm to perhaps find a smaller set of changes. This
-makes
-.I diff
-slower (sometimes much slower).
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Output RCS-format diffs; like
-.B \-f
-except that each command
-specifies the number of lines affected.
-.TP
-.B \-N
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.B \-\-new\-file
-In directory comparison, if a file is found in only one directory,
-treat it as present but empty in the other directory.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-new\-group\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output a group of lines taken from just the second
-file in if-then-else format.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-new\-line\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output a line taken from just the second file in
-if-then-else format.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-old\-group\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output a group of lines taken from just the first
-file in if-then-else format.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-old\-line\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output a line taken from just the first file in
-if-then-else format.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Show which C function each change is in.
-.TP
-.B \-P
-When comparing directories, if a file appears only in the second
-directory of the two, treat it as present but empty in the other.
-.TP
-.B \-\-paginate
-Pass the output through
-.I pr
-to paginate it.
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Report only whether the files differ, not the details of the
-differences.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-When comparing directories, recursively compare any subdirectories
-found.
-.TP
-.B \-\-rcs
-Output RCS-format diffs; like
-.B \-f
-except that each command
-specifies the number of lines affected.
-.TP
-.B \-\-recursive
-When comparing directories, recursively compare any subdirectories
-found.
-.TP
-.B \-\-report\-identical\-files
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Report when two files are the same.
-.TP
-.BI "\-S " file
-When comparing directories, start with the file
-.IR file .
-This is
-used for resuming an aborted comparison.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-from\-file= file
-Compare
-.I file
-to all operands.
-.I file
-can be a directory.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-to\-file= file
-Compare all operands to
-.IR file . " file"
-can be a directory.
-.TP
-.B \-\-sdiff\-merge\-assist
-Print extra information to help
-.IR sdiff .
-.I sdiff
-uses this
-option when it runs
-.IR diff .
-This option is not intended for users
-to use directly.
-.TP
-.B \-\-show\-c\-function
-Show which C function each change is in.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-show\-function\-line= regexp
-In context and unified format, for each hunk of differences, show some
-of the last preceding line that matches
-.IR regexp .
-.TP
-.B \-\-side\-by\-side
-Use the side by side output format.
-.TP
-.B \-\-speed\-large\-files
-Use heuristics to speed handling of large files that have numerous
-scattered small changes.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-starting\-file= file
-When comparing directories, start with the file
-.IR file .
-This is
-used for resuming an aborted comparison.
-.TP
-.B \-\-suppress\-common\-lines
-Do not print common lines in side by side format.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Expand tabs to spaces in the output, to preserve the alignment of tabs
-in the input files.
-.TP
-.B \-T
-Output a tab rather than a space before the text of a line in normal or
-context format. This causes the alignment of tabs in the line to look
-normal.
-.TP
-.B \-\-text
-Treat all files as text and compare them line-by-line, even if they
-do not appear to be text.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Use the unified output format.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-unchanged\-group\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output a group of common lines taken from both files
-in if-then-else format.
-.TP
-.BI \-\-unchanged\-line\-format= format
-Use
-.I format
-to output a line common to both files in if-then-else
-format.
-.TP
-.B \-\-unidirectional\-new\-file
-When comparing directories, if a file appears only in the second
-directory of the two, treat it as present but empty in the other.
-.TP
-.BI "\-U " lines
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.BI \-\-unified[= lines ]
-Use the unified output format, showing
-.I lines
-(an integer) lines of
-context, or three if
-.I lines
-is not given.
-For proper operation,
-.I patch
-typically needs at least two lines of
-context.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.B \-\-version
-Output the version number of
-.IR diff .
-.TP
-.B \-w
-Ignore white space when comparing lines.
-.TP
-.BI "\-W " columns
-.br
-.ns
-.TP
-.BI \-\-width= columns
-Use an output width of
-.I columns
-in side by side format.
-.TP
-.BI "\-x " pattern
-When comparing directories, ignore files and subdirectories whose basenames
-match
-.IR pattern .
-.TP
-.BI "\-X " file
-When comparing directories, ignore files and subdirectories whose basenames
-match any pattern contained in
-.IR file .
-.TP
-.B \-y
-Use the side by side output format.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-cmp(1), comm(1), diff3(1), ed(1), patch(1), pr(1), sdiff(1).
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-An exit status of 0 means no differences were found, 1 means some
-differences were found, and 2 means trouble.
diff --git a/raw/man1/dig.1 b/raw/man1/dig.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f9dfd6..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dig.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,363 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
-.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
-.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
-.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
-.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM
-.\" DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
-.\" INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
-.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
-.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
-.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
-.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-.\"
-.TH "DIG" "1" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
-dig \- DNS lookup utility
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBdig\fR [ \fB at server\fR ] [ \fB-b \fIaddress\fB\fR ] [ \fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR ] [ \fB-f \fIfilename\fB\fR ] [ \fB-k \fIfilename\fB\fR ] [ \fB-p \fIport#\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t \fItype\fB\fR ] [ \fB-x \fIaddr\fB\fR ] [ \fB-y \fIname:key\fB\fR ] [ \fBname\fR ] [ \fBtype\fR ] [ \fBclass\fR ] [ \fBqueryopt\fR\fI...\fR ]
-.sp
-\fBdig\fR [ \fB-h\fR ]
-.sp
-\fBdig\fR [ \fBglobal-queryopt\fR\fI...\fR ] [ \fBquery\fR\fI...\fR ]
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBdig\fR (domain information groper) is a flexible tool
-for interrogating DNS name servers. It performs DNS lookups and
-displays the answers that are returned from the name server(s) that
-were queried. Most DNS administrators use \fBdig\fR to
-troubleshoot DNS problems because of its flexibility, ease of use and
-clarity of output. Other lookup tools tend to have less functionality
-than \fBdig\fR.
-.PP
-Although \fBdig\fR is normally used with command-line
-arguments, it also has a batch mode of operation for reading lookup
-requests from a file. A brief summary of its command-line arguments
-and options is printed when the \fB-h\fR option is given.
-Unlike earlier versions, the BIND9 implementation of
-\fBdig\fR allows multiple lookups to be issued from the
-command line.
-.PP
-Unless it is told to query a specific name server,
-\fBdig\fR will try each of the servers listed in
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR.
-.PP
-When no command line arguments or options are given, will perform an
-NS query for "." (the root).
-.SH "SIMPLE USAGE"
-.PP
-A typical invocation of \fBdig\fR looks like:
-.sp
-.nf
- dig @server name type
-.sp
-.fi
-where:
-.TP
-\fBserver\fR
-is the name or IP address of the name server to query. This can be an IPv4
-address in dotted-decimal notation or an IPv6
-address in colon-delimited notation. When the supplied
-\fIserver\fR argument is a hostname,
-\fBdig\fR resolves that name before querying that name
-server. If no \fIserver\fR argument is provided,
-\fBdig\fR consults \fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
-and queries the name servers listed there. The reply from the name
-server that responds is displayed.
-.TP
-\fBname\fR
-is the name of the resource record that is to be looked up.
-.TP
-\fBtype\fR
-indicates what type of query is required \(em
-ANY, A, MX, SIG, etc.
-\fItype\fR can be any valid query type. If no
-\fItype\fR argument is supplied,
-\fBdig\fR will perform a lookup for an A record.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The \fB-b\fR option sets the source IP address of the query
-to \fIaddress\fR. This must be a valid address on
-one of the host's network interfaces.
-.PP
-The default query class (IN for internet) is overridden by the
-\fB-c\fR option. \fIclass\fR is any valid
-class, such as HS for Hesiod records or CH for CHAOSNET records.
-.PP
-The \fB-f\fR option makes \fBdig \fR operate
-in batch mode by reading a list of lookup requests to process from the
-file \fIfilename\fR. The file contains a number of
-queries, one per line. Each entry in the file should be organised in
-the same way they would be presented as queries to
-\fBdig\fR using the command-line interface.
-.PP
-If a non-standard port number is to be queried, the
-\fB-p\fR option is used. \fIport#\fR is
-the port number that \fBdig\fR will send its queries
-instead of the standard DNS port number 53. This option would be used
-to test a name server that has been configured to listen for queries
-on a non-standard port number.
-.PP
-The \fB-t\fR option sets the query type to
-\fItype\fR. It can be any valid query type which is
-supported in BIND9. The default query type "A", unless the
-\fB-x\fR option is supplied to indicate a reverse lookup.
-A zone transfer can be requested by specifying a type of AXFR. When
-an incremental zone transfer (IXFR) is required,
-\fItype\fR is set to ixfr=N.
-The incremental zone transfer will contain the changes made to the zone
-since the serial number in the zone's SOA record was
-\fIN\fR.
-.PP
-Reverse lookups - mapping addresses to names - are simplified by the
-\fB-x\fR option. \fIaddr\fR is an IPv4
-address in dotted-decimal notation, or a colon-delimited IPv6 address.
-When this option is used, there is no need to provide the
-\fIname\fR, \fIclass\fR and
-\fItype\fR arguments. \fBdig\fR
-automatically performs a lookup for a name like
-11.12.13.10.in-addr.arpa and sets the query type and
-class to PTR and IN respectively. By default, IPv6 addresses are
-looked up using the IP6.ARPA domain and binary labels as defined in
-RFC2874. To use the older RFC1886 method using the IP6.INT domain and
-"nibble" labels, specify the \fB-n\fR (nibble) option.
-.PP
-To sign the DNS queries sent by \fBdig\fR and their
-responses using transaction signatures (TSIG), specify a TSIG key file
-using the \fB-k\fR option. You can also specify the TSIG
-key itself on the command line using the \fB-y\fR option;
-\fIname\fR is the name of the TSIG key and
-\fIkey\fR is the actual key. The key is a base-64
-encoded string, typically generated by \fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8).
-Caution should be taken when using the \fB-y\fR option on
-multi-user systems as the key can be visible in the output from
-\fBps\fR(1) or in the shell's history file. When
-using TSIG authentication with \fBdig\fR, the name
-server that is queried needs to know the key and algorithm that is
-being used. In BIND, this is done by providing appropriate
-\fBkey\fR and \fBserver\fR statements in
-\fInamed.conf\fR.
-.SH "QUERY OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBdig\fR provides a number of query options which affect
-the way in which lookups are made and the results displayed. Some of
-these set or reset flag bits in the query header, some determine which
-sections of the answer get printed, and others determine the timeout
-and retry strategies.
-.PP
-Each query option is identified by a keyword preceded by a plus sign
-(+). Some keywords set or reset an option. These may be preceded
-by the string no to negate the meaning of that keyword. Other
-keywords assign values to options like the timeout interval. They
-have the form \fB+keyword=value\fR.
-The query options are:
-.TP
-\fB+[no]tcp\fR
-Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. The default
-behaviour is to use UDP unless an AXFR or IXFR query is requested, in
-which case a TCP connection is used.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]vc\fR
-Use [do not use] TCP when querying name servers. This alternate
-syntax to \fI+[no]tcp\fR is provided for backwards
-compatibility. The "vc" stands for "virtual circuit".
-.TP
-\fB+[no]ignore\fR
-Ignore truncation in UDP responses instead of retrying with TCP. By
-default, TCP retries are performed.
-.TP
-\fB+domain=somename\fR
-Set the search list to contain the single domain
-\fIsomename\fR, as if specified in a
-\fBdomain\fR directive in
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR, and enable search list
-processing as if the \fI+search\fR option were given.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]search\fR
-Use [do not use] the search list defined by the searchlist or domain
-directive in \fIresolv.conf\fR (if any).
-The search list is not used by default.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]defname\fR
-Deprecated, treated as a synonym for \fI+[no]search\fR
-.TP
-\fB+[no]aaonly\fR
-This option does nothing. It is provided for compatibility with old
-versions of \fBdig\fR where it set an unimplemented
-resolver flag.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]adflag\fR
-Set [do not set] the AD (authentic data) bit in the query. The AD bit
-currently has a standard meaning only in responses, not in queries,
-but the ability to set the bit in the query is provided for
-completeness.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]cdflag\fR
-Set [do not set] the CD (checking disabled) bit in the query. This
-requests the server to not perform DNSSEC validation of responses.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]recursive\fR
-Toggle the setting of the RD (recursion desired) bit in the query.
-This bit is set by default, which means \fBdig\fR
-normally sends recursive queries. Recursion is automatically disabled
-when the \fI+nssearch\fR or
-\fI+trace\fR query options are used.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]nssearch\fR
-When this option is set, \fBdig\fR attempts to find the
-authoritative name servers for the zone containing the name being
-looked up and display the SOA record that each name server has for the
-zone.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]trace\fR
-Toggle tracing of the delegation path from the root name servers for
-the name being looked up. Tracing is disabled by default. When
-tracing is enabled, \fBdig\fR makes iterative queries to
-resolve the name being looked up. It will follow referrals from the
-root servers, showing the answer from each server that was used to
-resolve the lookup.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]cmd\fR
-toggles the printing of the initial comment in the output identifying
-the version of \fBdig\fR and the query options that have
-been applied. This comment is printed by default.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]short\fR
-Provide a terse answer. The default is to print the answer in a
-verbose form.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]identify\fR
-Show [or do not show] the IP address and port number that supplied the
-answer when the \fI+short\fR option is enabled. If
-short form answers are requested, the default is not to show the
-source address and port number of the server that provided the answer.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]comments\fR
-Toggle the display of comment lines in the output. The default is to
-print comments.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]stats\fR
-This query option toggles the printing of statistics: when the query
-was made, the size of the reply and so on. The default behaviour is
-to print the query statistics.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]qr\fR
-Print [do not print] the query as it is sent.
-By default, the query is not printed.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]question\fR
-Print [do not print] the question section of a query when an answer is
-returned. The default is to print the question section as a comment.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]answer\fR
-Display [do not display] the answer section of a reply. The default
-is to display it.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]authority\fR
-Display [do not display] the authority section of a reply. The
-default is to display it.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]additional\fR
-Display [do not display] the additional section of a reply.
-The default is to display it.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]all\fR
-Set or clear all display flags.
-.TP
-\fB+time=T\fR
-Sets the timeout for a query to
-\fIT\fR seconds. The default time out is 5 seconds.
-An attempt to set \fIT\fR to less than 1 will result
-in a query timeout of 1 second being applied.
-.TP
-\fB+tries=T\fR
-Sets the number of times to retry UDP queries to server to
-\fIT\fR instead of the default, 3. If
-\fIT\fR is less than or equal to zero, the number of
-retries is silently rounded up to 1.
-.TP
-\fB+ndots=D\fR
-Set the number of dots that have to appear in
-\fIname\fR to \fID\fR for it to be
-considered absolute. The default value is that defined using the
-ndots statement in \fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR, or 1 if no
-ndots statement is present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as
-relative names and will be searched for in the domains listed in the
-\fBsearch\fR or \fBdomain\fR directive in
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR.
-.TP
-\fB+bufsize=B\fR
-Set the UDP message buffer size advertised using EDNS0 to
-\fIB\fR bytes. The maximum and minimum sizes of this
-buffer are 65535 and 0 respectively. Values outside this range are
-rounded up or down appropriately.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]multiline\fR
-Print records like the SOA records in a verbose multi-line
-format with human-readable comments. The default is to print
-each record on a single line, to facilitate machine parsing
-of the \fBdig\fR output.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]fail\fR
-Do not try the next server if you receive a SERVFAIL. The default is
-to not try the next server which is the reverse of normal stub resolver
-behaviour.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]besteffort\fR
-Attempt to display the contents of messages which are malformed.
-The default is to not display malformed answers.
-.TP
-\fB+[no]dnssec\fR
-Requests DNSSEC records be sent by setting the DNSSEC OK bit (DO)
-in the the OPT record in the additional section of the query.
-.SH "MULTIPLE QUERIES"
-.PP
-The BIND 9 implementation of \fBdig \fR supports
-specifying multiple queries on the command line (in addition to
-supporting the \fB-f\fR batch file option). Each of those
-queries can be supplied with its own set of flags, options and query
-options.
-.PP
-In this case, each \fIquery\fR argument represent an
-individual query in the command-line syntax described above. Each
-consists of any of the standard options and flags, the name to be
-looked up, an optional query type and class and any query options that
-should be applied to that query.
-.PP
-A global set of query options, which should be applied to all queries,
-can also be supplied. These global query options must precede the
-first tuple of name, class, type, options, flags, and query options
-supplied on the command line. Any global query options (except
-the \fB+[no]cmd\fR option) can be
-overridden by a query-specific set of query options. For example:
-.sp
-.nf
-dig +qr www.isc.org any -x 127.0.0.1 isc.org ns +noqr
-.sp
-.fi
-shows how \fBdig\fR could be used from the command line
-to make three lookups: an ANY query for www.isc.org, a
-reverse lookup of 127.0.0.1 and a query for the NS records of
-isc.org.
-A global query option of \fI+qr\fR is applied, so
-that \fBdig\fR shows the initial query it made for each
-lookup. The final query has a local query option of
-\fI+noqr\fR which means that \fBdig\fR
-will not print the initial query when it looks up the NS records for
-isc.org.
-.SH "FILES"
-.PP
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-\fBhost\fR(1),
-\fBnamed\fR(8),
-\fBdnssec-keygen\fR(8),
-\fIRFC1035\fR.
-.SH "BUGS"
-.PP
-There are probably too many query options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/dircolors.1 b/raw/man1/dircolors.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b9cffb..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dircolors.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH DIRCOLORS "1" "October 2003" "dircolors (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-dircolors \- color setup for ls
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B dircolors
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Output commands to set the LS_COLORS environment variable.
-.SS "Determine format of output:"
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-sh\fR, \fB\-\-bourne\-shell\fR
-output Bourne shell code to set LS_COLORS
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-csh\fR, \fB\-\-c\-shell\fR
-output C shell code to set LS_COLORS
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-print\-database\fR
-output defaults
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-If FILE is specified, read it to determine which colors to use for which
-file types and extensions. Otherwise, a precompiled database is used.
-For details on the format of these files, run `dircolors \fB\-\-print\-database\fR'.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by H. Peter Anvin.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B dircolors
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B dircolors
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info dircolors
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/dirname.1 b/raw/man1/dirname.1
deleted file mode 100644
index d195b14..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dirname.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH DIRNAME "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-dirname \- strip non-directory suffix from file name
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B dirname
-\fINAME\fR
-.br
-.B dirname
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print NAME with its trailing /component removed; if NAME contains no /'s,
-output `.' (meaning the current directory).
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie and Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B dirname
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B dirname
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info dirname
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/dirs.1 b/raw/man1/dirs.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dirs.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/disown.1 b/raw/man1/disown.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/disown.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/dropdb.1 b/raw/man1/dropdb.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c2779e1..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dropdb.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROPDB" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-dropdb \- remove a PostgreSQL database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBdropdb\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fB\fIdbname\fB\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBdropdb\fR destroys an existing
-PostgreSQL database.
-The user who executes this command must be a database
-superuser or the owner of the database.
-.PP
-\fBdropdb\fR is a wrapper around the
-SQL command DROP DATABASE [\fBdrop_database\fR(7)].
-There is no effective difference between dropping databases via
-this utility and via other methods for accessing the server.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBdropdb\fR accepts the following command-line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the database to be removed.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Echo the commands that \fBdropdb\fR generates
-and sends to the server.
-.TP
-\fB-i\fR
-.TP
-\fB--interactive\fR
-Issues a verification prompt before doing anything destructive.
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Do not display a response.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBdropdb\fR also accepts the following
-command-line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server
-is running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used
-as the directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server
-is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-In case of difficulty, see DROP DATABASE [\fBdrop_database\fR(7)] and \fBpsql\fR(1) for
-discussions of potential problems and error messages.
-The database server must be running at the
-targeted host. Also, any default connection settings and environment
-variables used by the \fBlibpq\fR front-end
-library will apply.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To destroy the database demo on the default
-database server:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBdropdb demo\fR
-DROP DATABASE
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To destroy the database demo using the
-server on host eden, port 5000, with verification and a peek
-at the underlying command:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBdropdb -p 5000 -h eden -i -e demo\fR
-Database "demo" will be permanently deleted.
-Are you sure? (y/n) \fBy\fR
-DROP DATABASE "demo"
-DROP DATABASE
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBcreatedb\fR(1), DROP DATABASE [\fBdrop_database\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/droplang.1 b/raw/man1/droplang.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 72e68e0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/droplang.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROPLANG" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-droplang \- remove a PostgreSQL procedural language
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBdroplang\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-option\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fB\fIlangname\fB\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdbname\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBdroplang\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-option\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fR\fR \fB--list\fR\fR | \fR\fB-l\fR\fR\fR \fB\fIdbname\fB\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBdroplang\fR is a utility for removing an
-existing programming language from a
-PostgreSQL database.
-\fBdroplang\fR can drop any procedural language,
-even those not supplied by the PostgreSQL distribution.
-.PP
-Although backend programming languages can be removed directly using
-several SQL commands, it is recommended to use
-\fBdroplang\fR because it performs a number
-of checks and is much easier to use. See
-DROP LANGUAGE [\fBdrop_language\fR(7)]
-for more.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBdroplang\fR accepts the following command line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\fIlangname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the backend programming language to be removed.
-.TP
-\fB[-d] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB[--dbname] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies from which database the language should be removed.
-The default is to use the database with the same name as the
-current system user.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Display SQL commands as they are executed.
-.TP
-\fB-l\fR
-.TP
-\fB--list\fR
-Show a list of already installed languages in the target database.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBdroplang\fR also accepts
-the following command line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server
-is running. If host begins with a slash, it is used
-as the directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the Internet TCP/IP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server
-is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-Most error messages are self-explanatory. If not, run
-\fBdroplang\fR with the \fB--echo\fR
-option and see under the respective SQL command
-for details.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use \fBcreatelang\fR(1) to add a language.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To remove the language pltcl:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBdroplang pltcl dbname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBcreatelang\fR(1), DROP LANGUAGE [\fBdrop_language\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/dropuser.1 b/raw/man1/dropuser.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7725317..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dropuser.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,117 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROPUSER" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-dropuser \- remove a PostgreSQL user account
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBdropuser\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIusername\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBdropuser\fR removes an existing
-PostgreSQL user
-\fBand\fR the databases which that user owned.
-Only superusers (users with usesuper set in
-the pg_shadow table) can destroy
-PostgreSQL users.
-.PP
-\fBdropuser\fR is a wrapper around the
-SQL command DROP USER [\fBdrop_user\fR(7)].
-There is no effective difference between dropping users via
-this utility and via other methods for accessing the server.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBdropuser\fR accepts the following command-line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\fIusername\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the PostgreSQL user to be removed.
-You will be prompted for a name if none is specified on the command line.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Echo the commands that \fBdropuser\fR generates
-and sends to the server.
-.TP
-\fB-i\fR
-.TP
-\fB--interactive\fR
-Prompt for confirmation before actually removing the user.
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Do not display a response.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBdropuser\fR also accepts the following
-command-line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server
-is running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used
-as the directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server
-is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as (not the user name to drop)
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt (to connect to the server, not for the
-password of the user to be dropped).
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-In case of difficulty, see DROP USER [\fBdrop_user\fR(7)] and \fBpsql\fR(1) for
-discussions of potential problems and error messages.
-The database server must be running at the
-targeted host. Also, any default connection settings and environment
-variables used by the \fBlibpq\fR front-end
-library will apply.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To remove user joe from the default database
-server:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBdropuser joe\fR
-DROP USER
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To remove user joe using the server on host
-eden, port 5000, with verification and a peek at the underlying
-command:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBdropuser -p 5000 -h eden -i -e joe\fR
-User "joe" and any owned databases will be permanently deleted.
-Are you sure? (y/n) \fBy\fR
-DROP USER "joe"
-DROP USER
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBcreateuser\fR(1), DROP USER [\fBdrop_user\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/du.1 b/raw/man1/du.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ddeee9f..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/du.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,117 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH DU "1" "October 2003" "du (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-du \- estimate file space usage
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B du
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Summarize disk usage of each FILE, recursively for directories.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-all\fR
-write counts for all files, not just directories
-.TP
-\fB\-\-apparent\-size\fR
-print apparent sizes, rather than disk usage; although
-the apparent size is usually smaller, it may be
-larger due to holes in (`sparse') files, internal
-fragmentation, indirect blocks, and the like
-.HP
-\fB\-B\fR, \fB\-\-block\-size\fR=\fISIZE\fR use SIZE-byte blocks
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-bytes\fR
-equivalent to `--apparent-size \fB\-\-block\-size\fR=\fI1\fR'
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-total\fR
-produce a grand total
-.TP
-\fB\-D\fR, \fB\-\-dereference\-args\fR
-dereference FILEs that are symbolic links
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-human\-readable\fR
-print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K 234M 2G)
-.TP
-\fB\-H\fR, \fB\-\-si\fR
-likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024
-.TP
-\fB\-k\fR
-like \fB\-\-block\-size\fR=\fI1K\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-count\-links\fR
-count sizes many times if hard linked
-.TP
-\fB\-L\fR, \fB\-\-dereference\fR
-dereference all symbolic links
-.TP
-\fB\-S\fR, \fB\-\-separate\-dirs\fR
-do not include size of subdirectories
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-summarize\fR
-display only a total for each argument
-.TP
-\fB\-x\fR, \fB\-\-one\-file\-system\fR
-skip directories on different filesystems
-.TP
-\fB\-X\fR FILE, \fB\-\-exclude\-from\fR=\fIFILE\fR
-Exclude files that match any pattern in FILE.
-.HP
-\fB\-\-exclude\fR=\fIPATTERN\fR Exclude files that match PATTERN.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-max\-depth\fR=\fIN\fR
-print the total for a directory (or file, with \fB\-\-all\fR)
-only if it is N or fewer levels below the command
-line argument; \fB\-\-max\-depth\fR=\fI0\fR is the same as
-\fB\-\-summarize\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed by) one of following:
-kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1,000,000, M 1,048,576, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y.
-.SH PATTERNS
-PATTERN is a shell pattern (not a regular expression). The pattern
-.BR ?
-matches any one character, whereas
-.BR *
-matches any string (composed of zero, one or multiple characters). For
-example,
-.BR *.o
-will match any files whose names end in
-.BR .o .
-Therefore, the command
-.IP
-.B du --exclude='*.o'
-.PP
-will skip all files and subdirectories ending in
-.BR .o
-(including the file
-.BR .o
-itself).
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Torbjorn Granlund, David MacKenzie, Larry McVoy, Paul Eggert, and Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B du
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B du
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info du
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/dumpkeys.1 b/raw/man1/dumpkeys.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 04a19b4..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/dumpkeys.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,209 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)loadkeys.1 1.0 93/09/1 RK
-.TH DUMPKEYS 1 "1 Sep 1993"
-.SH NAME
-dumpkeys \- dump keyboard translation tables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B dumpkeys
-[
-.B \-hilfn
-.BI \-c charset
-.B \-\-help \-\-short\-info \-\-long\-info \-\-numeric \-\-full\-table \-\-funcs\-only \-\-keys\-only \-\-compose\-only
-.BI \-\-charset= charset
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "dumpkeys command" "" "\fLdumpkeys\fR command"
-.LP
-.B dumpkeys
-writes, to the standard output, the current contents of the keyboard
-driver's translation tables, in the format specified by
-.BR keymaps (5).
-.LP
-Using the various options, the format of the output can be controlled
-and also other information from the kernel and the programs
-.BR dumpkeys (1)
-and
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-can be obtained.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-h \-\-help
-Prints the program's version number and a short usage message to the
-program's standard error output and exits.
-.TP
-.B \-i \-\-short-info
-Prints some characteristics of the kernel's keyboard driver. The items
-shown are:
-.LP
-.RS
-Keycode range supported by the kernel
-.LP
-.RS
-This tells what values can be used after the
-.B keycode
-keyword in keytable files. See
-.BR keymaps (5)
-for more information and the syntax of these files.
-.RE
-.LP
-Number of actions bindable to a key
-.LP
-.RS
-This tells how many different actions a single key can output using
-various modifier keys. If the value is 16 for example, you can define up
-to 16 different actions to a key combined with modifiers. When the value
-is 16, the kernel probably knows about four modifier keys, which you can
-press in different combinations with the key to access all the bound
-actions.
-.RE
-.LP
-Ranges of action codes supported by the kernel
-.LP
-.RS
-This item contains a list of action code ranges in hexadecimal notation.
-These are the values that can be used in the right hand side of a key
-definition, ie. the
-.IR vv 's
-in a line
-.LP
-.RS
-.B keycode
-.I xx
-=
-.I vv vv vv vv
-.RE
-.LP
-(see
-.BR keymaps (5)
-for more information about the format of key definition lines).
-.BR dumpkeys (1)
-and
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-support a symbolic notation, which is preferable to the numeric one, as
-the action codes may vary from kernel to kernel while the symbolic names
-usually remain the same. However, the list of action code ranges can be
-used to determine, if the kernel actually supports all the symbols
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-knows, or are there maybe some actions supported by the kernel that
-have no symbolic name in your
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-program. To see this, you compare the range list with the action symbol
-list, see option
-.B --long-info
-below.
-.RE
-.LP
-Number of function keys supported by kernel
-.LP
-.RS
-This tells the number of action codes that can be used to output
-strings of characters. These action codes are traditionally bound to
-the various function and editing keys of the keyboard and are defined
-to send standard escape sequences. However, you can redefine these to
-send common command lines, email addresses or whatever you like.
-Especially if the number of this item is greater than the number of
-function and editing keys in your keyboard, you may have some "spare"
-action codes that you can bind to AltGr-letter combinations, for example,
-to send some useful strings. See
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-for more details.
-.RE
-.LP
-Function strings
-.LP
-.RS
-You can see you current function key definitions with the command
-.LP
-.RS
-.B dumpkeys --funcs-only
-.RE
-.LP
-.RE
-.RE
-.LP
-.TP
-.B \-l \-\-long-info
-This option instructs
-.B dumpkeys
-to print a long information listing. The output is the same as with the
-.B --short-info
-appended with the list of action symbols supported by
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-and
-.BR dumpkeys (1),
-along with the symbols' numeric values.
-.LP
-.TP
-.B \-n \-\-numeric
-This option causes
-.B dumpkeys
-to by-pass the conversion of action code values to symbolic notation and
-to print the in hexadecimal format instead.
-.LP
-.TP
-.B \-f \-\-full-table
-This makes
-.B dumpkeys
-skip all the short-hand heuristics (see
-.BR keymaps (5))
-and output the key bindings in the canonical form. First a keymaps
-line describing the currently defined modifier combinations
-is printed. Then for each key a row with a column for each
-modifier combination is printed. For
-example, if the current keymap in use uses seven modifiers,
-every row will have seven action code columns. This format
-can be useful for example to programs that post-process the
-output of
-.BR dumpkeys .
-.LP
-.TP
-.B \-\-funcs-only
-When this option is given,
-.B dumpkeys
-prints only the function key string definitions. Normally
-.B dumpkeys
-prints both the key bindings and the string definitions.
-.LP
-.TP
-.B \-\-keys-only
-When this option is given,
-.B dumpkeys
-prints only the key bindings. Normally
-.B dumpkeys
-prints both the key bindings and the string definitions.
-.LP
-.TP
-.B \-\-compose-only
-When this option is given,
-.B dumpkeys
-prints only the compose key combinations.
-This option is available only if your kernel has compose key support.
-.LP
-.TP
-.BI \-c charset " " " " \-\-charset= charset
-This instructs
-.B dumpkeys
-to interpret character code values according to the specified character
-set. This affects only the translation of character code values to
-symbolic names. Valid values for
-.I charset
-currently are
-.BR iso-8859-X ,
-Where X is a digit in 1-9. If no
-.I charset
-is specified,
-.B iso-8859-1
-is used as a default.
-This option produces an output line `charset "iso-8859-X"', telling
-loadkeys how to interpret the keymap. (For example, "division" is
-0xf7 in iso-8859-1 but 0xba in iso-8859-8.)
-.LP
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-.BI //lib/kbd/keymaps
-recommended directory for keytable files
-.PD
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR loadkeys (1),
-.BR keymaps (5)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/echo.1 b/raw/man1/echo.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a2d820..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/echo.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH ECHO "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-echo \- display a line of text
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B echo
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fISTRING\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-NOTE: your shell may have its own version of echo which will supercede
-the version described here. Please refer to your shell's documentation
-for details about the options it supports.
-.PP
-Echo the STRING(s) to standard output.
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR
-do not output the trailing newline
-.TP
-\fB\-e\fR
-enable interpretation of the backslash-escaped characters
-listed below
-.TP
-\fB\-E\fR
-disable interpretation of those sequences in STRINGs
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Without \fB\-E\fR, the following sequences are recognized and interpolated:
-.TP
-\eNNN
-the character whose ASCII code is NNN (octal)
-.TP
-\e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-\ea
-alert (BEL)
-.TP
-\eb
-backspace
-.TP
-\ec
-suppress trailing newline
-.TP
-\ef
-form feed
-.TP
-\en
-new line
-.TP
-\er
-carriage return
-.TP
-\et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-\ev
-vertical tab
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by FIXME unknown.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B echo
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B echo
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info echo
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/egrep.1 b/raw/man1/egrep.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a74c5d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/egrep.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/grep.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/eject.1 b/raw/man1/eject.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 93f59b8..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/eject.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
-.\" This file Copyright (C) 1994-2001 Jeff Tranter
-.\" (tranter at pobox.com)
-.\" It may be distributed under the GNU Public License, version 2, or
-.\" any higher version. See section COPYING of the GNU Public license
-.\" for conditions under which this file may be redistributed.
-.TH EJECT 1 "18 May 2001" "Linux" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-eject \- eject removable media
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-eject -h
-.br
-eject [-vnrsfqp] [<name>]
-.br
-eject [-vn] -d
-.br
-eject [-vn] -a on|off|1|0 [<name>]
-.br
-eject [-vn] -c slot [<name>]
-.br
-eject [-vn] -t [<name>]
-.br
-eject [-vn] -x <speed> [<name>]
-.br
-eject -V
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-
-.B Eject
-allows removable media (typically a CD-ROM, floppy disk, tape, or JAZ
-or ZIP disk) to be ejected under software control. The command can
-also control some multi-disc CD-ROM changers, the auto-eject feature
-supported by some devices, and close the disc tray of some CD-ROM
-drives.
-
-The device corresponding to <name> is ejected. The name can be a
-device file or mount point, either a full path or with the leading
-"/dev" or "/mnt" omitted. If no name is specified, the default name
-"cdrom" is used.
-
-There are four different methods of ejecting, depending on whether the
-device is a CD-ROM, SCSI device, removable floppy, or tape. By default
-eject tries all four methods in order until it succeeds.
-
-If the device is currently mounted, it is unmounted before ejecting.
-
-.PP
-.SH "COMMAND\-LINE OPTIONS"
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -h
-This option causes
-.B eject
-to display a brief description of the command options.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -v
-This makes
-.B eject
-run in verbose mode; more information is displayed about what the
-command is doing.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -d
-If invoked with this option,
-.B eject
-lists the default device name.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -a on|1|off|0
-This option controls the auto-eject mode, supported by some devices.
-When enabled, the drive automatically ejects when the device is
-closed.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -c <slot>
-With this option a CD slot can be selected from an ATAPI/IDE CD-ROM
-changer. Linux 2.0 or higher is required to use this feature. The
-CD-ROM drive can not be in use (mounted data CD or playing a music CD)
-for a change request to work. Please also note that the first slot of
-the changer is referred to as 0, not 1.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -t
-With this option the drive is given a CD-ROM tray close command. Not
-all devices support this command.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -x <speed>
-With this option the drive is given a CD-ROM select speed command.
-The speed argument is a number indicating the desired speed (e.g. 8
-for 8X speed), or 0 for maximum data rate. Not all devices support
-this command and you can only specify speeds that the drive is capable
-of. Every time the media is changed this option is cleared. This
-option can be used alone, or with the -t and -c options.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -n
-With this option the selected device is displayed but no action is
-performed.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -r
-This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using a
-CDROM eject command.
-.TP 0.5i
-
-.B -s
-This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using
-SCSI commands.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -f
-This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using a
-removable floppy disk eject command.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -q
-This option specifies that the drive should be ejected using a
-tape drive offline command.
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -p
-This option allow you to use /proc/mounts instead /etc/mtab. It
-also passes the -n option to umount(1).
-
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -V
-This option causes
-.B eject
-to display the program version and exit.
-
-.SH LONG OPTIONS
-All options have corresponding long names, as listed below. The long
-names can be abbreviated as long as they are unique.
-
-.br
--h --help
-.br
--v --verbose
-.br
--d --default
-.br
--a --auto
-.br
--c --changerslot
-.br
--t --trayclose
-.br
--x --cdspeed
-.br
--n --noop
-.br
--r --cdrom
-.br
--s --scsi
-.br
--f --floppy
-.br
--q --tape
-.br
--V --version
-.br
--p --proc
-.br
-
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-Eject the default device:
-.IP
-eject
-.PP
-Eject a device or mount point named cdrom:
-.IP
-eject cdrom
-.PP
-Eject using device name:
-.IP
-eject /dev/cdrom
-.PP
-Eject using mount point:
-.IP
-eject /mnt/cdrom/
-.PP
-Eject 4th IDE device:
-.IP
-eject hdd
-.PP
-Eject first SCSI device:
-.IP
-eject sda
-.PP
-Eject using SCSI partition name (e.g. a ZIP drive):
-.IP
-eject sda4
-.PP
-Select 5th disc on mult-disc changer:
-.IP
-eject -v -c5 /dev/cdrom
-.PP
-Turn on auto-eject on a SoundBlaster CD-ROM drive:
-.IP
-eject -a on /dev/sbpcd
-
-.SH EXIT STATUS
-.PP
-
-Returns 0 if operation was successful, 1 if operation failed or command
-syntax was not valid.
-
-.SH NOTES
-.PP
-
-.B Eject
-only works with devices that support one or more of the four methods
-of ejecting. This includes most CD-ROM drives (IDE, SCSI, and
-proprietary), some SCSI tape drives, JAZ drives, ZIP drives (parallel
-port, SCSI, and IDE versions), and LS120 removable floppies. Users
-have also reported success with floppy drives on Sun SPARC and Apple
-Macintosh systems. If
-.B eject
-does not work, it is most likely a limitation of the kernel driver
-for the device and not the
-.B eject
-program itself.
-
-The -r, -s, -f, and -q options allow controlling which methods are
-used to eject. More than one method can be specified. If none of these
-options are specified, it tries all four (this works fine in most
-cases).
-
-.B Eject
-may not always be able to determine if the device is mounted (e.g. if
-it has several names). If the device name is a symbolic link,
-.B eject
-will follow the link and use the device that it points to.
-
-If
-.B eject
-determines that the device can have multiple partitions, it will
-attempt to unmount all mounted partitions of the device before
-ejecting. If an unmount fails, the program will not attempt to eject
-the media.
-
-You can eject an audio CD. Some CD-ROM drives will refuse to open the
-tray if the drive is empty. Some devices do not support the tray close
-command.
-
-If the auto-eject feature is enabled, then the drive will always be
-ejected after running this command. Not all Linux kernel CD-ROM
-drivers support the auto-eject mode. There is no way to find out the
-state of the auto-eject mode.
-
-You need appropriate privileges to access the device files. Running as
-root or setuid root is required to eject some devices (e.g. SCSI
-devices).
-
-The heuristic used to find a device, given a name, is as follows. If
-the name ends in a trailing slash, it is removed (this is to support
-filenames generated using shell file name completion). If the name
-starts with '.' or '/', it tries to open it as a device file or mount
-point. If that fails, it tries prepending '/dev/', '/mnt/', '/dev/cdroms',
-\&'/dev/rdsk/', '/dev/dsk/', and finally './' to the name, until a
-device file or mount point is found that can be opened. The program
-checks /etc/mtab for mounted devices. If that fails, it also checks
-/etc/fstab for mount points of currently unmounted devices.
-
-Creating symbolic links such as /dev/cdrom or /dev/zip is recommended
-so that
-.B eject
-can determine the appropriate devices using easily remembered names.
-
-To save typing you can create a shell alias for the eject options that
-work for your particular setup.
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-.B Eject
-was written by Jeff Tranter (tranter at pobox.com) and is released
-under the conditions of the GNU General Public License. See the file
-COPYING and notes in the source code for details.
-
-The -x option was added by Nobuyuki Tsuchimura (tutimura at nn.iij4u.or.jp),
-with thanks to Roland Krivanek (krivanek at fmph.uniba.sk) and his
-cdrom_speed command.
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-
-mount(2), umount(2), mount(8), umount(8)
-.br
-/usr/src/linux/Documentation/cdrom/
diff --git a/raw/man1/emacs.1 b/raw/man1/emacs.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a3cca0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/emacs.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,534 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 1995, 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\"
-.\" This file is part of GNU Emacs.
-.\"
-.\" GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
-.\" any later version.
-.\"
-.\" GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the
-.\" Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
-.\" Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-.\"
-.TH EMACS 1 "1995 December 7"
-.UC 4
-.SH NAME
-emacs \- GNU project Emacs
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B emacs
-[
-.I command-line switches
-] [
-.I files ...
-]
-.br
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I GNU Emacs
-is a version of
-.I Emacs,
-written by the author of the original (PDP-10)
-.I Emacs,
-Richard Stallman.
-.br
-The primary documentation of GNU Emacs is in the GNU Emacs Manual,
-which you can read on line using Info, a subsystem of Emacs. Please
-look there for complete and up-to-date documentation. This man page
-is updated only when someone volunteers to do so; the Emacs
-maintainers' priority goal is to minimize the amount of time this man
-page takes away from other more useful projects.
-.br
-The user functionality of GNU Emacs encompasses
-everything other
-.I Emacs
-editors do, and it is easily extensible since its
-editing commands are written in Lisp.
-.PP
-.I Emacs
-has an extensive interactive help facility,
-but the facility assumes that you know how to manipulate
-.I Emacs
-windows and buffers.
-CTRL-h (backspace
-or CTRL-h) enters the Help facility. Help Tutorial (CTRL-h t)
-requests an interactive tutorial which can teach beginners the fundamentals
-of
-.I Emacs
-in a few minutes.
-Help Apropos (CTRL-h a) helps you
-find a command given its functionality, Help Character (CTRL-h c)
-describes a given character's effect, and Help Function (CTRL-h f)
-describes a given Lisp function specified by name.
-.PP
-.I Emacs's
-Undo can undo several steps of modification to your buffers, so it is
-easy to recover from editing mistakes.
-.PP
-.I GNU Emacs's
-many special packages handle mail reading (RMail) and sending (Mail),
-outline editing (Outline), compiling (Compile), running subshells
-within
-.I Emacs
-windows (Shell), running a Lisp read-eval-print loop
-(Lisp-Interaction-Mode), and automated psychotherapy (Doctor).
-.PP
-There is an extensive reference manual, but
-users of other Emacses
-should have little trouble adapting even
-without a copy. Users new to
-.I Emacs
-will be able
-to use basic features fairly rapidly by studying the tutorial and
-using the self-documentation features.
-.PP
-.SM Emacs Options
-.PP
-The following options are of general interest:
-.TP 8
-.I file
-Edit
-.I file.
-.TP
-.BI \+ number
-Go to the line specified by
-.I number
-(do not insert a space between the "+" sign and
-the number).
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Do not load an init file.
-.TP
-.BI \-u " user"
-Load
-.I user's
-init file.
-.TP
-.BI \-t " file"
-Use specified
-.I file
-as the terminal instead of using stdin/stdout.
-This must be the first argument specified in the command line.
-.PP
-The following options are lisp-oriented
-(these options are processed in the order encountered):
-.TP 8
-.BI \-f " function"
-Execute the lisp function
-.I function.
-.TP
-.BI \-l " file"
-Load the lisp code in the file
-.I file.
-.PP
-The following options are useful when running
-.I Emacs
-as a batch editor:
-.TP 8
-.BI \-batch
-Edit in batch mode. The editor will send messages to stderr. This
-option must be the first in the argument list. You must use -l and -f
-options to specify files to execute and functions to call.
-.TP
-.B \-kill
-Exit
-.I Emacs
-while in batch mode.
-.\" START DELETING HERE IF YOU'RE NOT USING X
-.PP
-.SM Using Emacs with X
-.PP
-.I Emacs
-has been tailored to work well with the X window system.
-If you run
-.I Emacs
-from under X windows, it will create its own X window to
-display in. You will probably want to start the editor
-as a background process
-so that you can continue using your original window.
-.PP
-.I Emacs
-can be started with the following X switches:
-.TP 8
-.BI \-name " name"
-Specifies the name which should be assigned to the initial
-.I Emacs
-window. This controls looking up X resources as well as the window title.
-.TP 8
-.BI \-title " name"
-Specifies the title for the initial X window.
-.TP 8
-.B \-r
-Display the
-.I Emacs
-window in reverse video.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-Use the "kitchen sink" bitmap icon when iconifying the
-.I Emacs
-window.
-.TP
-.BI \-font " font, " \-fn " font"
-Set the
-.I Emacs
-window's font to that specified by
-.I font.
-You will find the various
-.I X
-fonts in the
-.I /usr/lib/X11/fonts
-directory.
-Note that
-.I Emacs
-will only accept fixed width fonts.
-Under the X11 Release 4 font-naming conventions, any font with the
-value "m" or "c" in the eleventh field of the font name is a fixed
-width font. Furthermore, fonts whose name are of the form
-.IR width x height
-are generally fixed width, as is the font
-.IR fixed .
-See
-.IR xlsfonts (1)
-for more information.
-
-When you specify a font, be sure to put a space between the
-switch and the font name.
-.TP
-.BI \-bw " pixels"
-Set the
-.I Emacs
-window's border width to the number of pixels specified by
-.I pixels.
-Defaults to one pixel on each side of the window.
-.TP
-.BI \-ib " pixels"
-Set the window's internal border width to the number of pixels specified
-by
-.I pixels.
-Defaults to one pixel of padding on each side of the window.
-.PP
-.TP 8
-.BI \-geometry " geometry"
-Set the
-.I Emacs
-window's width, height, and position as specified. The geometry
-specification is in the standard X format; see
-.IR X (1)
-for more information.
-The width and height are specified in characters; the default is 80 by
-24.
-.PP
-.TP 8
-.BI \-fg " color"
-On color displays, sets the color of the text.
-
-See the file
-.I /usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt
-for a list of valid
-color names.
-.TP
-.BI \-bg " color"
-On color displays,
-sets the color of the window's background.
-.TP
-.BI \-bd " color"
-On color displays,
-sets the color of the window's border.
-.TP
-.BI \-cr " color"
-On color displays,
-sets the color of the window's text cursor.
-.TP
-.BI \-ms " color"
-On color displays,
-sets the color of the window's mouse cursor.
-.TP
-.BI \-d " displayname, " \-display " displayname"
-Create the
-.I Emacs
-window on the display specified by
-.IR displayname .
-Must be the first option specified in the command line.
-.TP
-.B \-nw
-Tells
-.I Emacs
-not to use its special interface to X. If you use this
-switch when invoking
-.I Emacs
-from an
-.IR xterm (1)
-window, display is done in that window.
-This must be the first option specified in the command line.
-.PP
-You can set
-.I X
-default values for your
-.I Emacs
-windows in your
-.I \.Xresources
-file (see
-.IR xrdb (1)).
-Use the following format:
-.IP
-emacs.keyword:value
-.PP
-where
-.I value
-specifies the default value of
-.I keyword.
-.I Emacs
-lets you set default values for the following keywords:
-.TP 8
-.B font (\fPclass\fB Font)
-Sets the window's text font.
-.TP
-.B reverseVideo (\fPclass\fB ReverseVideo)
-If
-.I reverseVideo's
-value is set to
-.I on,
-the window will be displayed in reverse video.
-.TP
-.B bitmapIcon (\fPclass\fB BitmapIcon)
-If
-.I bitmapIcon's
-value is set to
-.I on,
-the window will iconify into the "kitchen sink."
-.TP
-.B borderWidth (\fPclass\fB BorderWidth)
-Sets the window's border width in pixels.
-.TP
-.B internalBorder (\fPclass\fB BorderWidth)
-Sets the window's internal border width in pixels.
-.TP
-.B foreground (\fPclass\fB Foreground)
-For color displays,
-sets the window's text color.
-.TP
-.B background (\fPclass\fB Background)
-For color displays,
-sets the window's background color.
-.TP
-.B borderColor (\fPclass\fB BorderColor)
-For color displays,
-sets the color of the window's border.
-.TP
-.B cursorColor (\fPclass\fB Foreground)
-For color displays,
-sets the color of the window's text cursor.
-.TP
-.B pointerColor (\fPclass\fB Foreground)
-For color displays,
-sets the color of the window's mouse cursor.
-.TP
-.B geometry (\fPclass\fB Geometry)
-Sets the geometry of the
-.I Emacs
-window (as described above).
-.TP
-.B title (\fPclass\fB Title)
-Sets the title of the
-.I Emacs
-window.
-.TP
-.B iconName (\fPclass\fB Title)
-Sets the icon name for the
-.I Emacs
-window icon.
-.PP
-If you try to set color values while using a black and white display,
-the window's characteristics will default as follows:
-the foreground color will be set to black,
-the background color will be set to white,
-the border color will be set to grey,
-and the text and mouse cursors will be set to black.
-.PP
-.SM Using the Mouse
-.PP
-The following lists the mouse button bindings for the
-.I Emacs
-window under X11.
-
-.in +\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-.ta \w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-MOUSE BUTTON FUNCTION
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-left Set point.
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-middle Paste text.
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-right Cut text into X cut buffer.
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-SHIFT-middle Cut text into X cut buffer.
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-SHIFT-right Paste text.
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-CTRL-middle Cut text into X cut buffer and kill it.
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-CTRL-right Select this window, then split it into
-two windows. Same as typing CTRL-x 2.
-.\" START DELETING HERE IF YOU'RE NOT USING X MENUS
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-CTRL-SHIFT-left X buffer menu--hold the buttons and keys
-down, wait for menu to appear, select
-buffer, and release. Move mouse out of
-menu and release to cancel.
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-CTRL-SHIFT-middle X help menu--pop up index card menu for
-Emacs help.
-.\" STOP DELETING HERE IF YOU'RE NOT USING X MENUS
-.br
-.ti -\w'CTRL-SHIFT-middle'u+4n
-CTRL-SHIFT-right Select window with mouse, and delete all
-other windows. Same as typing CTRL-x 1.
-.\" STOP DELETING HERE IF YOU'RE NOT USING X
-.PP
-.SH MANUALS
-You can order printed copies of the GNU Emacs Manual from the Free
-Software Foundation, which develops GNU software. See the file ORDERS
-for ordering information.
-.br
-Your local Emacs maintainer might also have copies available. As
-with all software and publications from FSF, everyone is permitted to
-make and distribute copies of the Emacs manual. The TeX source to the
-manual is also included in the Emacs source distribution.
-.PP
-.SH FILES
-/usr/local/info - files for the Info documentation browser
-(a subsystem of Emacs) to refer to. Currently not much of Unix
-is documented here, but the complete text of the Emacs reference
-manual is included in a convenient tree structured form.
-
-/usr/local/share/emacs/$VERSION/src - C source files and object files
-
-/usr/local/share/emacs/$VERSION/lisp - Lisp source files and compiled files
-that define most editing commands. Some are preloaded;
-others are autoloaded from this directory when used.
-
-/usr/local/share/emacs/$VERSION/etc - various programs that are used with
-GNU Emacs, and some files of information.
-
-/usr/local/share/emacs/$VERSION/etc/DOC.* - contains the documentation
-strings for the Lisp primitives and preloaded Lisp functions
-of GNU Emacs. They are stored here to reduce the size of
-Emacs proper.
-
-/usr/local/share/emacs/$VERSION/etc/OTHER.EMACSES discusses GNU Emacs
-vs. other versions of Emacs.
-.br
-/usr/local/share/emacs/$VERSION/etc/SERVICE lists people offering
-various services to assist users of GNU Emacs, including education,
-troubleshooting, porting and customization.
-.br
-These files also have information useful to anyone wishing to write
-programs in the Emacs Lisp extension language, which has not yet been fully
-documented.
-
-/usr/local/com/emacs/lock - holds lock files that are made for all
-files being modified in Emacs, to prevent simultaneous modification
-of one file by two users.
-
-.\" START DELETING HERE IF YOU'RE NOT USING X
-/usr/lib/X11/rgb.txt - list of valid X color names.
-.\" STOP DELETING HERE IF YOU'RE NOT USING X
-.PP
-.SH BUGS
-There is a mailing list, bug-gnu-emacs at prep.ai.mit.edu on the internet
-(ucbvax!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gnu-emacs on UUCPnet), for reporting Emacs
-bugs and fixes. But before reporting something as a bug, please try
-to be sure that it really is a bug, not a misunderstanding or a
-deliberate feature. We ask you to read the section ``Reporting Emacs
-Bugs'' near the end of the reference manual (or Info system) for hints
-on how and when to report bugs. Also, include the version number of
-the Emacs you are running in \fIevery\fR bug report that you send in.
-
-Do not expect a personal answer to a bug report. The purpose of reporting
-bugs is to get them fixed for everyone in the next release, if possible.
-For personal assistance, look in the SERVICE file (see above) for
-a list of people who offer it.
-
-Please do not send anything but bug reports to this mailing list.
-Send requests to be added to mailing lists to the special list
-info-gnu-emacs-request at prep.ai.mit.edu (or the corresponding UUCP
-address). For more information about Emacs mailing lists, see the
-file /usr/local/emacs/etc/MAILINGLISTS. Bugs tend actually to be
-fixed if they can be isolated, so it is in your interest to report
-them in such a way that they can be easily reproduced.
-.PP
-Bugs that I know about are: shell will not work with programs
-running in Raw mode on some Unix versions.
-.SH UNRESTRICTIONS
-.PP
-.I Emacs
-is free; anyone may redistribute copies of
-.I Emacs
-to
-anyone under the terms stated in the
-.I Emacs
-General Public License,
-a copy of which accompanies each copy of
-.I Emacs
-and which also
-appears in the reference manual.
-.PP
-Copies of
-.I Emacs
-may sometimes be received packaged with distributions of Unix systems,
-but it is never included in the scope of any license covering those
-systems. Such inclusion violates the terms on which distribution
-is permitted. In fact, the primary purpose of the General Public
-License is to prohibit anyone from attaching any other restrictions
-to redistribution of
-.I Emacs.
-.PP
-Richard Stallman encourages you to improve and extend
-.I Emacs,
-and urges that
-you contribute your extensions to the GNU library. Eventually GNU
-(Gnu's Not Unix) will be a complete replacement for Berkeley
-Unix.
-Everyone will be free to use, copy, study and change the GNU system.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-X(1), xlsfonts(1), xterm(1), xrdb(1)
-.SH AUTHORS
-.PP
-.I Emacs
-was written by Richard Stallman and the Free Software Foundation.
-Joachim Martillo and Robert Krawitz added the X features.
-.SH COPYING
-Copyright
-.if t \(co
-.if n (c)
-1995, 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
-or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
-with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and no
-Back-Cover Texts.
-.PP
-This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free
-Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document
-separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the
-license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license.
-A copy of the license is included in the
-.BR gfdl ( 1 )
-man page, and in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation
-License" in the Emacs manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/enable.1 b/raw/man1/enable.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/enable.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/env.1 b/raw/man1/env.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f493909..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/env.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH ENV "1" "October 2003" "env (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-env \- run a program in a modified environment
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B env
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fI-\fR] [\fINAME=VALUE\fR]... [\fICOMMAND \fR[\fIARG\fR]...]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Set each NAME to VALUE in the environment and run COMMAND.
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\-environment\fR
-start with an empty environment
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-unset\fR=\fINAME\fR
-remove variable from the environment
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-A mere - implies \fB\-i\fR. If no COMMAND, print the resulting environment.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Richard Mlynarik and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B env
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B env
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info env
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/eval.1 b/raw/man1/eval.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/eval.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/ex.1 b/raw/man1/ex.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6f1d24..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ex.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIM 1 "2002 Feb 22"
-.SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] [file ..]
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] -
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-t tag
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-q [errorfile]
-.PP
-.br
-.B ex
-.br
-.B view
-.br
-.B gvim
-.B gview
-.br
-.B rvim
-.B rview
-.B rgvim
-.B rgview
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vim
-is a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.
-It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
-It is especially useful for editing programs.
-.PP
-There are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo,
-multi windows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line
-editing, filename completion, on-line help, visual selection, etc..
-See ":help vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between
-.B Vim
-and Vi.
-.PP
-While running
-.B Vim
-a lot of help can be obtained from the on-line help system, with the ":help"
-command.
-See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
-.PP
-Most often
-.B Vim
-is started to edit a single file with the command
-.PP
- vim file
-.PP
-More generally
-.B Vim
-is started with:
-.PP
- vim [options] [filelist]
-.PP
-If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used to choose one or
-more files to be edited.
-.TP 12
-file ..
-A list of filenames.
-The first one will be the current file and read into the buffer.
-The cursor will be positioned on the first line of the buffer.
-You can get to the other files with the ":next" command.
-To edit a file that starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
-.TP
--
-The file to edit is read from stdin. Commands are read from stderr, which
-should be a tty.
-.TP
--t {tag}
-The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on a "tag", a sort
-of goto label.
-{tag} is looked up in the tags file, the associated file becomes the current
-file and the associated command is executed.
-Mostly this is used for C programs, in which case {tag} could be a function
-name.
-The effect is that the file containing that function becomes the current file
-and the cursor is positioned on the start of the function.
-See ":help tag-commands".
-.TP
--q [errorfile]
-Start in quickFix mode.
-The file [errorfile] is read and the first error is displayed.
-If [errorfile] is omitted, the filename is obtained from the 'errorfile'
-option (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the Amiga, "errors.err" on other
-systems).
-Further errors can be jumped to with the ":cn" command.
-See ":help quickfix".
-.PP
-.B Vim
-behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the executable may
-still be the same file).
-.TP 10
-vim
-The "normal" way, everything is default.
-.TP
-ex
-Start in Ex mode.
-Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
-Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
-.TP
-view
-Start in read-only mode. You will be protected from writing the files. Can
-also be done with the "-R" argument.
-.TP
-gvim gview
-The GUI version.
-Starts a new window.
-Can also be done with the "-g" argument.
-.TP
-rvim rview rgvim rgview
-Like the above, but with restrictions. It will not be possible to start shell
-commands, or suspend
-.B Vim.
-Can also be done with the "-Z" argument.
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options may be given in any order, before or after filenames.
-Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
-.TP 12
-+[num]
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on line "num".
-If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned on the last line.
-.TP
-+/{pat}
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on the
-first occurrence of {pat}.
-See ":help search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
-.TP
-+{command}
-.TP
--c {command}
-{command} will be executed after the
-first file has been read.
-{command} is interpreted as an Ex command.
-If the {command} contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes (this
-depends on the shell that is used).
-Example: Vim "+set si" main.c
-.br
-Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
-.TP
---cmd {command}
-Like using "-c", but the command is executed just before
-processing any vimrc file.
-You can use up to 10 of these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-.TP
--A
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with ARABIC support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Arabic keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is set. Otherwise an error
-message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--b
-Binary mode.
-A few options will be set that makes it possible to edit a binary or
-executable file.
-.TP
--C
-Compatible. Set the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave mostly like Vi, even though a .vimrc file exists.
-.TP
--d
-Start in diff mode.
-There should be two or three file name arguments.
-.B Vim
-will open all the files and show differences between them.
-Works like vimdiff(1).
-.TP
--d {device}
-Open {device} for use as a terminal.
-Only on the Amiga.
-Example:
-"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
-.TP
--e
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Ex mode, just like the executable was called "ex".
-.TP
--f
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-On the Amiga,
-.B Vim
-is not restarted to open a new window.
-This option should be used when
-.B Vim
-is executed by a program that will wait for the edit
-session to finish (e.g. mail).
-On the Amiga the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
-.TP
---nofork
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-.TP
--F
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with FKMAP support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Farsi keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--g
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with GUI support, this option enables the GUI.
-If no GUI support was compiled in, an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--h
-Give a bit of help about the command line arguments and options.
-After this
-.B Vim
-exits.
-.TP
--H
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Hebrew keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--i {viminfo}
-When using the viminfo file is enabled, this option sets the filename to use,
-instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
-This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file, by giving the name
-"NONE".
-.TP
--L
-Same as -r.
-.TP
--l
-Lisp mode.
-Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
-.TP
--m
-Modifying files is disabled.
-Resets the 'write' option, so that writing files is not possible.
-.TP
--N
-No-compatible mode. Reset the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible, even though a .vimrc file does
-not exist.
-.TP
--n
-No swap file will be used.
-Recovery after a crash will be impossible.
-Handy if you want to edit a file on a very slow medium (e.g. floppy).
-Can also be done with ":set uc=0".
-Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
-.TP
--o[N]
-Open N windows stacked.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--O[N]
-Open N windows side by side.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--R
-Read-only mode.
-The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
-overwriting a file.
-If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
-as in ":w!".
-The -R option also implies the -n option (see below).
-The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
-See ":help 'readonly'".
-.TP
--r
-List swap files, with information about using them for recovery.
-.TP
--r {file}
-Recovery mode.
-The swap file is used to recover a crashed editing session.
-The swap file is a file with the same filename as the text file with ".swp"
-appended.
-See ":help recovery".
-.TP
--s
-Silent mode. Only when started as "Ex" or when the "-e" option was given
-before the "-s" option.
-.TP
--s {scriptin}
-The script file {scriptin} is read.
-The characters in the file are interpreted as if you had typed them.
-The same can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".
-If the end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further characters
-are read from the keyboard.
-.TP
--T {terminal}
-Tells
-.B Vim
-the name of the terminal you are using.
-Only required when the automatic way doesn't work.
-Should be a terminal known
-to
-.B Vim
-(builtin) or defined in the termcap or terminfo file.
-.TP
--u {vimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
-All the other initializations are skipped.
-Use this to edit a special kind of files.
-It can also be used to skip all initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help initialization" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--U {gvimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializations.
-All the other GUI initializations are skipped.
-It can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help gui-init" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--V
-Verbose. Give messages about which files are sourced and for reading and
-writing a viminfo file.
-.TP
--v
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Vi mode, just like the executable was called "vi". This only has effect
-when the executable is called "ex".
-.TP
--w {scriptout}
-All the characters that you type are recorded in the file
-{scriptout}, until you exit
-.B Vim.
-This is useful if you want to create a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
-":source!".
-If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
-.TP
--W {scriptout}
-Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
-.TP
--x
-Use encryption when writing files. Will prompt for a crypt key.
-.TP
--X
-Don't connect to the X server. Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
-window title and clipboard will not be used.
-.TP
--Z
-Restricted mode. Works like the executable starts with "r".
-.TP
---
-Denotes the end of the options.
-Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
-This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
-.TP
---help
-Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
-.TP
---version
-Print version information and exit.
-.TP
---remote
-Connect to a Vim server and make it edit the files given in the rest of the
-arguments. If no server is found a warning is given and the files are edited
-in the current Vim.
-.TP
---remote-expr {expr}
-Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print the result on stdout.
-.TP
---remote-send {keys}
-Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
-.TP
---remote-silent
-As --remote, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---remote-wait
-As --remote, but Vim does not exit until the files have been edited.
-.TP
---remote-wait-silent
-As --remote-wait, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---serverlist
-List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
-.TP
---servername {name}
-Use {name} as the server name. Used for the current Vim, unless used with a
---remote argument, then it's the name of the server to connect to.
-.TP
---socketid {id}
-GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in another window.
-.TP
---echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
-.SH ON-LINE HELP
-Type ":help" in
-.B Vim
-to get started.
-Type ":help subject" to get help on a specific subject.
-For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the "ZZ" command.
-Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmdline-completion").
-Tags are present to jump from one place to another (sort of hypertext links,
-see ":help").
-All documentation files can be viewed in this way, for example
-":help syntax.txt".
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/*.txt
-The
-.B Vim
-documentation files.
-Use ":help doc-file-list" to get the complete list.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/tags
-The tags file used for finding information in the documentation files.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/syntax.vim
-System wide syntax initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/*.vim
-Syntax files for various languages.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vimrc
-System wide
-.B Vim
-initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/gvimrc
-System wide gvim initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/optwin.vim
-Script used for the ":options" command, a nice way to view and set options.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/menu.vim
-System wide menu initializations for gvim.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/bugreport.vim
-Script to generate a bug report. See ":help bugs".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/filetype.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its name. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/scripts.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its contents. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/*.ps
-Files used for PostScript printing.
-.PP
-For recent info read the VIM home page:
-.br
-<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vimtutor(1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Most of
-.B Vim
-was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
-See ":help credits" in
-.B Vim.
-.br
-.B Vim
-is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,
-Tony Andrews and G.R. (Fred) Walter.
-Although hardly any of the original code remains.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably.
-See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
-.PP
-Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are in fact
-caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.
-And if you think other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
-you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-vi_diff.txt when in Vim).
-Also have a look at the 'compatible' and 'cpoptions' options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/exec.1 b/raw/man1/exec.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/exec.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/exit.1 b/raw/man1/exit.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/exit.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/expand.1 b/raw/man1/expand.1
deleted file mode 100644
index d884a27..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/expand.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH EXPAND "1" "October 2003" "expand (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-expand \- convert tabs to spaces
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B expand
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Convert tabs in each FILE to spaces, writing to standard output.
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-initial\fR
-do not convert TABs after non whitespace
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-tabs\fR=\fINUMBER\fR
-have tabs NUMBER characters apart, not 8
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-tabs\fR=\fILIST\fR
-use comma separated list of explicit tab positions
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B expand
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B expand
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info expand
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/export.1 b/raw/man1/export.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/export.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/false.1 b/raw/man1/false.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 50dac37..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/false.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH FALSE "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-false \- do nothing, unsuccessfully
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B false
-[\fIignored command line arguments\fR]
-.br
-.B false
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Exit with a status code indicating failure.
-.PP
-These option names may not be abbreviated.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B false
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B false
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info false
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/fc.1 b/raw/man1/fc.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/fc.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/fg.1 b/raw/man1/fg.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/fg.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/fgrep.1 b/raw/man1/fgrep.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a74c5d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/fgrep.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/grep.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/file.1 b/raw/man1/file.1
deleted file mode 100644
index d6604b0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/file.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,473 +0,0 @@
-.TH FILE 1 "Copyright but distributable"
-.SH NAME
-file
-\- determine file type
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B file
-[
-.B \-bcikLnNsvz
-]
-[
-.B \-f
-.I namefile
-]
-[
-.B \-F
-.I separator
-]
-[
-.B \-m
-.I magicfiles
-]
-.I file
-\&...
-.br
-.B file
-.B -C
-[
-.B \-m
-magicfile ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page documents version 4.02 of the
-.B file
-command.
-.PP
-.B File
-tests each argument in an attempt to classify it.
-There are three sets of tests, performed in this order:
-filesystem tests, magic number tests, and language tests.
-The
-.I first
-test that succeeds causes the file type to be printed.
-.PP
-The type printed will usually contain one of the words
-.B text
-(the file contains only
-printing characters and a few common control
-characters and is probably safe to read on an
-.SM ASCII
-terminal),
-.B executable
-(the file contains the result of compiling a program
-in a form understandable to some \s-1UNIX\s0 kernel or another),
-or
-.B data
-meaning anything else (data is usually `binary' or non-printable).
-Exceptions are well-known file formats (core files, tar archives)
-that are known to contain binary data.
-When modifying the file
-.I /usr/share/file/magic
-or the program itself,
-.B "preserve these keywords" .
-People depend on knowing that all the readable files in a directory
-have the word ``text'' printed.
-Don't do as Berkeley did and change ``shell commands text''
-to ``shell script''.
-Note that the file
-.I /usr/share/file/magic
-is built mechanically from a large number of small files in
-the subdirectory
-.I Magdir
-in the source distribution of this program.
-.PP
-The filesystem tests are based on examining the return from a
-.BR stat (2)
-system call.
-The program checks to see if the file is empty,
-or if it's some sort of special file.
-Any known file types appropriate to the system you are running on
-(sockets, symbolic links, or named pipes (FIFOs) on those systems that
-implement them)
-are intuited if they are defined in
-the system header file
-.IR <sys/stat.h> .
-.PP
-The magic number tests are used to check for files with data in
-particular fixed formats.
-The canonical example of this is a binary executable (compiled program)
-.I a.out
-file, whose format is defined in
-.I a.out.h
-and possibly
-.I exec.h
-in the standard include directory.
-These files have a `magic number' stored in a particular place
-near the beginning of the file that tells the \s-1UNIX\s0 operating system
-that the file is a binary executable, and which of several types thereof.
-The concept of `magic number' has been applied by extension to data files.
-Any file with some invariant identifier at a small fixed
-offset into the file can usually be described in this way.
-The information identifying these files is read from the compiled
-magic file
-.I /usr/share/file/magic.mgc ,
-or
-.I /usr/share/file/magic
-if the compile file does not exist.
-.PP
-If a file does not match any of the entries in the magic file,
-it is examined to see if it seems to be a text file.
-ASCII, ISO-8859-x, non-ISO 8-bit extended-ASCII character sets
-(such as those used on Macintosh and IBM PC systems),
-UTF-8-encoded Unicode, UTF-16-encoded Unicode, and EBCDIC
-character sets can be distinguished by the different
-ranges and sequences of bytes that constitute printable text
-in each set.
-If a file passes any of these tests, its character set is reported.
-ASCII, ISO-8859-x, UTF-8, and extended-ASCII files are identified
-as ``text'' because they will be mostly readable on nearly any terminal;
-UTF-16 and EBCDIC are only ``character data'' because, while
-they contain text, it is text that will require translation
-before it can be read.
-In addition,
-.B file
-will attempt to determine other characteristics of text-type files.
-If the lines of a file are terminated by CR, CRLF, or NEL, instead
-of the Unix-standard LF, this will be reported.
-Files that contain embedded escape sequences or overstriking
-will also be identified.
-.PP
-Once
-.B file
-has determined the character set used in a text-type file,
-it will
-attempt to determine in what language the file is written.
-The language tests look for particular strings (cf
-.IR names.h )
-that can appear anywhere in the first few blocks of a file.
-For example, the keyword
-.B .br
-indicates that the file is most likely a
-.BR troff (1)
-input file, just as the keyword
-.B struct
-indicates a C program.
-These tests are less reliable than the previous
-two groups, so they are performed last.
-The language test routines also test for some miscellany
-(such as
-.BR tar (1)
-archives).
-.PP
-Any file that cannot be identified as having been written
-in any of the character sets listed above is simply said to be ``data''.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP 8
-.B \-b
-Do not prepend filenames to output lines (brief mode).
-.TP 8
-.B \-c
-Cause a checking printout of the parsed form of the magic file.
-This is usually used in conjunction with
-.B \-m
-to debug a new magic file before installing it.
-.TP 8
-.B \-C
-Write a magic.mgc output file that contains a pre-parsed version of
-file.
-.TP 8
-.BI \-f " namefile"
-Read the names of the files to be examined from
-.I namefile
-(one per line)
-before the argument list.
-Either
-.I namefile
-or at least one filename argument must be present;
-to test the standard input, use ``\-'' as a filename argument.
-.TP 8
-.BI \-F " separator"
-Use the specified string as the separator between the filename and the
-file result returned. Defaults to ``:''.
-.TP 8
-.B \-i
-Causes the file command to output mime type strings rather than the more
-traditional human readable ones. Thus it may say
-``text/plain; charset=us-ascii''
-rather
-than ``ASCII text''.
-In order for this option to work, file changes the way
-it handles files recognised by the command itself (such as many of the
-text file types, directories etc), and makes use of an alternative
-``magic'' file.
-(See ``FILES'' section, below).
-.TP 8
-.B \-k
-Don't stop at the first match, keep going.
-.TP 8
-.B \-L
-option causes symlinks to be followed, as the like-named option in
-.BR ls (1).
-(on systems that support symbolic links).
-.TP 8
-.BI \-m " list"
-Specify an alternate list of files containing magic numbers.
-This can be a single file, or a colon-separated list of files.
-.TP 8
-.B \-n
-Force stdout to be flushed after checking each file.
-This is only useful if checking a list of files.
-It is intended to be used by programs that want filetype output from a pipe.
-.TP 8
-.B \-N
-Don't pad filenames so that they align in the output.
-.TP 8
-.B \-s
-Normally,
-.B file
-only attempts to read and determine the type of argument files which
-.BR stat (2)
-reports are ordinary files.
-This prevents problems, because reading special files may have peculiar
-consequences.
-Specifying the
-.BR \-s
-option causes
-.B file
-to also read argument files which are block or character special files.
-This is useful for determining the filesystem types of the data in raw
-disk partitions, which are block special files.
-This option also causes
-.B file
-to disregard the file size as reported by
-.BR stat (2)
-since on some systems it reports a zero size for raw disk partitions.
-.TP 8
-.B \-v
-Print the version of the program and exit.
-.TP 8
-.B \-z
-Try to look inside compressed files.
-.SH FILES
-.I /usr/share/file/magic.mgc
-\- default compiled list of magic numbers
-.PP
-.I /usr/share/file/magic
-\- default list of magic numbers
-.PP
-.I /usr/share/file/magic.mime.mgc
-\- default compiled list of magic numbers, used to output mime types when
-the -i option is specified.
-.PP
-.I /usr/share/file/magic.mime
-\- default list of magic numbers, used to output mime types when the -i option
-is specified.
-
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-The environment variable
-.B MAGIC
-can be used to set the default magic number files.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR magic (5)
-\- description of magic file format.
-.br
-.BR strings (1), " od" (1), " hexdump(1)"
-\- tools for examining non-textfiles.
-.SH STANDARDS CONFORMANCE
-This program is believed to exceed the System V Interface Definition
-of FILE(CMD), as near as one can determine from the vague language
-contained therein.
-Its behaviour is mostly compatible with the System V program of the same name.
-This version knows more magic, however, so it will produce
-different (albeit more accurate) output in many cases.
-.PP
-The one significant difference
-between this version and System V
-is that this version treats any white space
-as a delimiter, so that spaces in pattern strings must be escaped.
-For example,
-.br
->10 string language impress\ (imPRESS data)
-.br
-in an existing magic file would have to be changed to
-.br
->10 string language\e impress (imPRESS data)
-.br
-In addition, in this version, if a pattern string contains a backslash,
-it must be escaped.
-For example
-.br
-0 string \ebegindata Andrew Toolkit document
-.br
-in an existing magic file would have to be changed to
-.br
-0 string \e\ebegindata Andrew Toolkit document
-.br
-.PP
-SunOS releases 3.2 and later from Sun Microsystems include a
-.BR file (1)
-command derived from the System V one, but with some extensions.
-My version differs from Sun's only in minor ways.
-It includes the extension of the `&' operator, used as,
-for example,
-.br
->16 long&0x7fffffff >0 not stripped
-.SH MAGIC DIRECTORY
-The magic file entries have been collected from various sources,
-mainly USENET, and contributed by various authors.
-Christos Zoulas (address below) will collect additional
-or corrected magic file entries.
-A consolidation of magic file entries
-will be distributed periodically.
-.PP
-The order of entries in the magic file is significant.
-Depending on what system you are using, the order that
-they are put together may be incorrect.
-If your old
-.B file
-command uses a magic file,
-keep the old magic file around for comparison purposes
-(rename it to
-.IR /usr/share/file/magic.orig ).
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.nf
-$ file file.c file /dev/{wd0a,hda}
-file.c: C program text
-file: ELF 32-bit LSB executable, Intel 80386, version 1 (SYSV),
- dynamically linked (uses shared libs), stripped
-/dev/wd0a: block special (0/0)
-/dev/hda: block special (3/0)
-$ file -s /dev/wd0{b,d}
-/dev/wd0b: data
-/dev/wd0d: x86 boot sector
-$ file -s /dev/hda{,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10}
-/dev/hda: x86 boot sector
-/dev/hda1: Linux/i386 ext2 filesystem
-/dev/hda2: x86 boot sector
-/dev/hda3: x86 boot sector, extended partition table
-/dev/hda4: Linux/i386 ext2 filesystem
-/dev/hda5: Linux/i386 swap file
-/dev/hda6: Linux/i386 swap file
-/dev/hda7: Linux/i386 swap file
-/dev/hda8: Linux/i386 swap file
-/dev/hda9: empty
-/dev/hda10: empty
-
-$ file -i file.c file /dev/{wd0a,hda}
-file.c: text/x-c
-file: application/x-executable, dynamically linked (uses shared libs),
-not stripped
-/dev/hda: application/x-not-regular-file
-/dev/wd0a: application/x-not-regular-file
-
-.fi
-.SH HISTORY
-There has been a
-.B file
-command in every \s-1UNIX\s0 since at least Research Version 4
-(man page dated November, 1973).
-The System V version introduced one significant major change:
-the external list of magic number types.
-This slowed the program down slightly but made it a lot more flexible.
-.PP
-This program, based on the System V version,
-was written by Ian Darwin <ian at darwinsys.com>
-without looking at anybody else's source code.
-.PP
-John Gilmore revised the code extensively, making it better than
-the first version.
-Geoff Collyer found several inadequacies
-and provided some magic file entries.
-Contributions by the `&' operator by Rob McMahon, cudcv at warwick.ac.uk, 1989.
-.PP
-Guy Harris, guy at netapp.com, made many changes from 1993 to the present.
-.PP
-Primary development and maintenance from 1990 to the present by
-Christos Zoulas (christos at astron.com).
-.PP
-Altered by Chris Lowth, chris at lowth.com, 2000:
-Handle the ``-i'' option to output mime type strings and using an alternative
-magic file and internal logic.
-.PP
-Altered by Eric Fischer (enf at pobox.com), July, 2000,
-to identify character codes and attempt to identify the languages
-of non-ASCII files.
-.PP
-The list of contributors to the "Magdir" directory (source for the
-/etc/magic
-file) is too long to include here.
-You know who you are; thank you.
-.SH LEGAL NOTICE
-Copyright (c) Ian F. Darwin, Toronto, Canada, 1986-1999.
-Covered by the standard Berkeley Software Distribution copyright; see the file
-LEGAL.NOTICE in the source distribution.
-.PP
-The files
-.I tar.h
-and
-.I is_tar.c
-were written by John Gilmore from his public-domain
-.B tar
-program, and are not covered by the above license.
-.SH BUGS
-There must be a better way to automate the construction of the Magic
-file from all the glop in magdir.
-What is it?
-Better yet, the magic file should be compiled into binary (say,
-.BR ndbm (3)
-or, better yet, fixed-length
-.SM ASCII
-strings for use in heterogenous network environments) for faster startup.
-Then the program would run as fast as the Version 7 program of the same name,
-with the flexibility of the System V version.
-.PP
-.B File
-uses several algorithms that favor speed over accuracy,
-thus it can be misled about the contents of
-text
-files.
-.PP
-The support for
-text
-files (primarily for programming languages)
-is simplistic, inefficient and requires recompilation to update.
-.PP
-There should be an ``else'' clause to follow a series of continuation lines.
-.PP
-The magic file and keywords should have regular expression support.
-Their use of
-.SM "ASCII TAB"
-as a field delimiter is ugly and makes
-it hard to edit the files, but is entrenched.
-.PP
-It might be advisable to allow upper-case letters in keywords
-for e.g.,
-.BR troff (1)
-commands vs man page macros.
-Regular expression support would make this easy.
-.PP
-The program doesn't grok \s-2FORTRAN\s0.
-It should be able to figure \s-2FORTRAN\s0 by seeing some keywords which
-appear indented at the start of line.
-Regular expression support would make this easy.
-.PP
-The list of keywords in
-.I ascmagic
-probably belongs in the Magic file.
-This could be done by using some keyword like `*' for the offset value.
-.PP
-Another optimisation would be to sort
-the magic file so that we can just run down all the
-tests for the first byte, first word, first long, etc, once we
-have fetched it.
-Complain about conflicts in the magic file entries.
-Make a rule that the magic entries sort based on file offset rather
-than position within the magic file?
-.PP
-The program should provide a way to give an estimate
-of ``how good'' a guess is.
-We end up removing guesses (e.g. ``From '' as first 5 chars of file) because
-they are not as good as other guesses (e.g. ``Newsgroups:'' versus
-``Return-Path:'').
-Still, if the others don't pan out, it should be possible to use the
-first guess.
-.PP
-This program is slower than some vendors' file commands.
-The new support for multiple character codes makes it even slower.
-.PP
-This manual page, and particularly this section, is too long.
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-You can obtain the original author's latest version by anonymous FTP
-on
-.B ftp.astron.com
-in the directory
-.I /pub/file/file-X.YZ.tar.gz
diff --git a/raw/man1/find.1 b/raw/man1/find.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 38c7a94..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/find.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,459 +0,0 @@
-.TH FIND 1L \" -*- nroff -*-
-.SH NAME
-find \- search for files in a directory hierarchy
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B find
-[path...] [expression]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page
-documents the GNU version of
-.BR find .
-.B find
-searches the directory tree rooted at each given file name by
-evaluating the given expression from left to right, according to the
-rules of precedence (see section OPERATORS), until the outcome is
-known (the left hand side is false for \fIand\fR operations, true for
-\fIor\fR), at which point
-.B find
-moves on to the next file name.
-.PP
-The first argument that begins with `\-', `(', `)', `,', or `!' is taken
-to be the beginning of the expression; any arguments before it are
-paths to search, and any arguments after it are the rest of the
-expression. If no paths are given, the current directory is used. If
-no expression is given, the expression `\-print' is used.
-.PP
-.B find
-exits with status 0 if all files are processed successfully, greater
-than 0 if errors occur.
-.SH EXPRESSIONS
-.P
-The expression is made up of options (which affect overall operation
-rather than the processing of a specific file, and always return true),
-tests (which return a true or false value), and actions (which have side
-effects and return a true or false value), all separated by operators.
-\-and is assumed where the operator is omitted. If the expression contains
-no actions other than \-prune, \-print is performed on all files
-for which the expression is true.
-.SS OPTIONS
-.P
-All options always return true. They always take effect, rather than
-being processed only when their place in the expression is reached.
-Therefore, for clarity, it is best to place them at the beginning of
-the expression.
-.IP \-daystart
-Measure times (for \-amin, \-atime, \-cmin, \-ctime, \-mmin, and \-mtime)
-from the beginning of today rather than from 24 hours ago.
-.IP \-depth
-Process each directory's contents before the directory itself.
-.IP \-follow
-Dereference symbolic links. Implies \-noleaf.
-.IP "\-help, \-\-help"
-Print a summary of the command-line usage of
-.B find
-and exit.
-.IP "\-maxdepth \fIlevels\fR"
-Descend at most \fIlevels\fR (a non-negative integer) levels of
-directories below the command line arguments. `\-maxdepth 0' means
-only apply the tests and actions to the command line arguments.
-.IP "\-mindepth \fIlevels\fR"
-Do not apply any tests or actions at levels less than \fIlevels\fR (a
-non-negative integer). `\-mindepth 1' means process all files except
-the command line arguments.
-.IP \-mount
-Don't descend directories on other filesystems. An alternate name for
-\-xdev, for compatibility with some other versions of
-.BR find .
-.IP "\-noleaf"
-Do not optimize by assuming that directories contain 2 fewer
-subdirectories than their hard link count. This option is needed when
-searching filesystems that do not follow the Unix directory-link
-convention, such as CD-ROM or MS-DOS filesystems or AFS volume mount
-points. Each directory on a normal Unix filesystem has at least 2
-hard links: its name and its `.' entry. Additionally, its
-subdirectories (if any) each have a `..' entry linked to that
-directory. When
-.B find
-is examining a directory, after it has statted 2 fewer subdirectories
-than the directory's link count, it knows that the rest of the entries
-in the directory are non-directories (`leaf' files in the directory
-tree). If only the files' names need to be examined, there is no need
-to stat them; this gives a significant increase in search speed.
-.IP "\-version, \-\-version"
-Print the \fBfind\fR version number and exit.
-.IP \-xdev
-Don't descend directories on other filesystems.
-.SS TESTS
-.P
-Numeric arguments can be specified as
-.IP \fI+n\fP
-for greater than
-.IR n ,
-.IP \fI\-n\fP
-for less than
-.IR n ,
-.IP \fIn\fP
-for exactly
-.IR n .
-.IP "\-amin \fIn\fR"
-File was last accessed \fIn\fR minutes ago.
-.IP "\-anewer \fIfile\fR"
-File was last accessed more recently than \fIfile\fR was modified.
-\-anewer is affected by \-follow only if \-follow comes before
-\-anewer on the command line.
-.IP "\-atime \fIn\fR"
-File was last accessed \fIn\fR*24 hours ago.
-.IP "\-cmin \fIn\fR"
-File's status was last changed \fIn\fR minutes ago.
-.IP "\-cnewer \fIfile\fR"
-File's status was last changed more recently than \fIfile\fR was modified.
-\-cnewer is affected by \-follow only if \-follow comes before
-\-cnewer on the command line.
-.IP "\-ctime \fIn\fR"
-File's status was last changed \fIn\fR*24 hours ago.
-.IP \-empty
-File is empty and is either a regular file or a directory.
-.IP \-false
-Always false.
-.IP "\-fstype \fItype\fR"
-File is on a filesystem of type \fItype\fR. The valid filesystem
-types vary among different versions of Unix; an incomplete list of
-filesystem types that are accepted on some version of Unix or another
-is: ufs, 4.2, 4.3, nfs, tmp, mfs, S51K, S52K. You can use \-printf
-with the %F directive to see the types of your filesystems.
-.IP "\-gid \fIn\fR"
-File's numeric group ID is \fIn\fR.
-.IP "\-group \fIgname\fR"
-File belongs to group \fIgname\fR (numeric group ID allowed).
-.IP "\-ilname \fIpattern\fR"
-Like \-lname, but the match is case insensitive.
-.IP "\-iname \fIpattern\fR"
-Like \-name, but the match is case insensitive. For example, the
-patterns `fo*' and `F??' match the file names `Foo', `FOO', `foo',
-`fOo', etc.
-.IP "\-inum \fIn\fR"
-File has inode number \fIn\fR.
-.IP "\-ipath \fIpattern\fR"
-Like \-path, but the match is case insensitive.
-.IP "\-iregex \fIpattern\fR"
-Like \-regex, but the match is case insensitive.
-.IP "\-links \fIn\fR"
-File has \fIn\fR links.
-.IP "\-lname \fIpattern\fR"
-File is a symbolic link whose contents match shell pattern
-\fIpattern\fR. The metacharacters do not treat `/' or `.' specially.
-.IP "\-mmin \fIn\fR"
-File's data was last modified \fIn\fR minutes ago.
-.IP "\-mtime \fIn\fR"
-File's data was last modified \fIn\fR*24 hours ago.
-.IP "\-name \fIpattern\fR"
-Base of file name (the path with the leading directories removed)
-matches shell pattern \fIpattern\fR. The metacharacters (`*', `?',
-and `[]') do not match a `.' at the start of the base name. To ignore
-a directory and the files under it, use \-prune; see an example in the
-description of \-path.
-.IP "\-newer \fIfile\fR"
-File was modified more recently than \fIfile\fR.
-\-newer is affected by \-follow only if \-follow comes before
-\-newer on the command line.
-.IP \-nouser
-No user corresponds to file's numeric user ID.
-.IP \-nogroup
-No group corresponds to file's numeric group ID.
-.IP "\-path \fIpattern\fR"
-File name matches shell pattern \fIpattern\fR. The metacharacters do
-not treat `/' or `.' specially; so, for example,
-.br
-.in +1i
-find . \-path './sr*sc'
-.br
-.in -1i
-will print an entry for a directory called './src/misc' (if one
-exists). To ignore a whole directory tree, use \-prune rather than
-checking every file in the tree. For example, to skip the
-directory `src/emacs' and all files and directories under it, and
-print the names of the other files found, do something like this:
-.br
-.in +1i
-find . \-path './src/emacs' -prune -o -print
-.br
-.in -1i
-.IP "\-perm \fImode\fR"
-File's permission bits are exactly \fImode\fR (octal or symbolic).
-Symbolic modes use mode 0 as a point of departure.
-.IP "\-perm \-\fImode\fR"
-All of the permission bits \fImode\fR are set for the file.
-.IP "\-perm +\fImode\fR"
-Any of the permission bits \fImode\fR are set for the file.
-.IP "\-regex \fIpattern\fR"
-File name matches regular expression \fIpattern\fR. This is a match
-on the whole path, not a search. For example, to match a file named
-`./fubar3', you can use the regular expression `.*bar.' or `.*b.*3',
-but not `b.*r3'.
-.IP "\-size \fIn\fR[bckw]"
-File uses \fIn\fP units of space. The units are 512-byte blocks by
-default or if `b' follows \fIn\fP, bytes if `c' follows \fIn\fP,
-kilobytes if `k' follows \fIn\fP, or 2-byte words if `w' follows \fIn\fP.
-The size does not count indirect blocks, but it does count blocks in
-sparse files that are not actually allocated.
-.IP \-true
-Always true.
-.IP "\-type \fIc\fR"
-File is of type \fIc\fR:
-.RS
-.IP b
-block (buffered) special
-.IP c
-character (unbuffered) special
-.IP d
-directory
-.IP p
-named pipe (FIFO)
-.IP f
-regular file
-.IP l
-symbolic link
-.IP s
-socket
-.IP D
-door (Solaris)
-.RE
-.IP "\-uid \fIn\fR"
-File's numeric user ID is \fIn\fR.
-.IP "\-used \fIn\fR"
-File was last accessed \fIn\fR days after its status was last changed.
-.IP "\-user \fIuname\fR"
-File is owned by user \fIuname\fR (numeric user ID allowed).
-.IP "\-xtype \fIc\fR"
-The same as \-type unless the file is a symbolic link. For symbolic
-links: if \-follow has not been given, true if the file is a link to a
-file of type \fIc\fR; if \-follow has been given, true if \fIc\fR is
-`l'. In other words, for symbolic links, \-xtype checks the type of
-the file that \-type does not check.
-.SS ACTIONS
-.IP "\-exec \fIcommand\fR ;"
-Execute \fIcommand\fR; true if 0 status is returned. All following
-arguments to
-.B find
-are taken to be arguments to the command until an argument consisting
-of `;' is encountered. The string `{}' is replaced by the current
-file name being processed everywhere it occurs in the arguments to the
-command, not just in arguments where it is alone, as in some versions
-of
-.BR find .
-Both of these constructions might need to be escaped (with a `\e') or
-quoted to protect them from expansion by the shell. The command is
-executed in the starting directory.
-.IP "\-fls \fIfile\fR"
-True; like \-ls but write to \fIfile\fR like \-fprint.
-.IP "\-fprint \fIfile\fR"
-True; print the full file name into file \fIfile\fR. If \fIfile\fR
-does not exist when \fBfind\fR is run, it is created; if it does
-exist, it is truncated. The file names ``/dev/stdout'' and
-``/dev/stderr'' are handled specially; they refer to the standard
-output and standard error output, respectively.
-.IP "\-fprint0 \fIfile\fR"
-True; like \-print0 but write to \fIfile\fR like \-fprint.
-.IP "\-fprintf \fIfile\fR \fIformat\fR"
-True; like \-printf but write to \fIfile\fR like \-fprint.
-.IP "\-ok \fIcommand\fR ;"
-Like \-exec but ask the user first (on the standard input); if the
-response does not start with `y' or `Y', do not run the command, and
-return false.
-.IP \-print
-True; print the full file name on the standard output, followed by a newline.
-.IP \-print0
-True; print the full file name on the standard output, followed by a
-null character. This allows file names that contain newlines to be
-correctly interpreted by programs that process the \fBfind\fR output.
-.IP "\-printf \fIformat\fR"
-True; print \fIformat\fR on the standard output, interpreting `\e'
-escapes and `%' directives. Field widths and precisions can be
-specified as with the `printf' C function. Unlike \-print, \-printf
-does not add a newline at the end of the string. The escapes and
-directives are:
-.RS
-.IP \ea
-Alarm bell.
-.IP \eb
-Backspace.
-.IP \ec
-Stop printing from this format immediately and flush the output.
-.IP \ef
-Form feed.
-.IP \en
-Newline.
-.IP \er
-Carriage return.
-.IP \et
-Horizontal tab.
-.IP \ev
-Vertical tab.
-.IP \e\e
-A literal backslash (`\e').
-.IP \eNNN
-The character whose ASCII code is NNN (octal).
-.PP
-A `\e' character followed by any other character is treated as an
-ordinary character, so they both are printed.
-.IP %%
-A literal percent sign.
-.IP %a
-File's last access time in the format returned by the C `ctime' function.
-.IP %A\fIk\fP
-File's last access time in the format specified by \fIk\fR, which is
-either `@' or a directive for the C `strftime' function. The possible
-values for \fIk\fR are listed below; some of them might not be
-available on all systems, due to differences in `strftime' between
-systems.
-.RS
-.IP @
-seconds since Jan. 1, 1970, 00:00 GMT.
-.PP
-Time fields:
-.IP H
-hour (00..23)
-.IP I
-hour (01..12)
-.IP k
-hour ( 0..23)
-.IP l
-hour ( 1..12)
-.IP M
-minute (00..59)
-.IP p
-locale's AM or PM
-.IP r
-time, 12-hour (hh:mm:ss [AP]M)
-.IP S
-second (00..61)
-.IP T
-time, 24-hour (hh:mm:ss)
-.IP X
-locale's time representation (H:M:S)
-.IP Z
-time zone (e.g., EDT), or nothing if no time zone is determinable
-.PP
-Date fields:
-.IP a
-locale's abbreviated weekday name (Sun..Sat)
-.IP A
-locale's full weekday name, variable length (Sunday..Saturday)
-.IP b
-locale's abbreviated month name (Jan..Dec)
-.IP B
-locale's full month name, variable length (January..December)
-.IP c
-locale's date and time (Sat Nov 04 12:02:33 EST 1989)
-.IP d
-day of month (01..31)
-.IP D
-date (mm/dd/yy)
-.IP h
-same as b
-.IP j
-day of year (001..366)
-.IP m
-month (01..12)
-.IP U
-week number of year with Sunday as first day of week (00..53)
-.IP w
-day of week (0..6)
-.IP W
-week number of year with Monday as first day of week (00..53)
-.IP x
-locale's date representation (mm/dd/yy)
-.IP y
-last two digits of year (00..99)
-.IP Y
-year (1970...)
-.RE
-.IP %b
-File's size in 512-byte blocks (rounded up).
-.IP %c
-File's last status change time in the format returned by the C `ctime'
-function.
-.IP %C\fIk\fP
-File's last status change time in the format specified by \fIk\fR,
-which is the same as for %A.
-.IP %d
-File's depth in the directory tree; 0 means the file is a command line
-argument.
-.IP %f
-File's name with any leading directories removed (only the last element).
-.IP %F
-Type of the filesystem the file is on; this value can be used for
-\-fstype.
-.IP %g
-File's group name, or numeric group ID if the group has no name.
-.IP %G
-File's numeric group ID.
-.IP %h
-Leading directories of file's name (all but the last element).
-.IP %H
-Command line argument under which file was found.
-.IP %i
-File's inode number (in decimal).
-.IP %k
-File's size in 1K blocks (rounded up).
-.IP %l
-Object of symbolic link (empty string if file is not a symbolic link).
-.IP %m
-File's permission bits (in octal).
-.IP %n
-Number of hard links to file.
-.IP %p
-File's name.
-.IP %P
-File's name with the name of the command line argument under which
-it was found removed.
-.IP %s
-File's size in bytes.
-.IP %t
-File's last modification time in the format returned by the C `ctime'
-function.
-.IP %T\fIk\fP
-File's last modification time in the format specified by \fIk\fR,
-which is the same as for %A.
-.IP %u
-File's user name, or numeric user ID if the user has no name.
-.IP %U
-File's numeric user ID.
-.PP
-A `%' character followed by any other character is discarded (but the
-other character is printed).
-.RE
-.IP \-prune
-If \-depth is not given, true; do not descend the current directory.
-.br
-If \-depth is given, false; no effect.
-.IP \-ls
-True; list current file in `ls \-dils' format on standard output.
-The block counts are of 1K blocks, unless the environment variable
-POSIXLY_CORRECT is set, in which case 512-byte blocks are used.
-.SS OPERATORS
-.P
-Listed in order of decreasing precedence:
-.IP "( \fIexpr\fR )"
-Force precedence.
-.IP "! \fIexpr\fR"
-True if \fIexpr\fR is false.
-.IP "\-not \fIexpr\fR"
-Same as ! \fIexpr\fR.
-.IP "\fIexpr1 expr2\fR"
-And (implied); \fIexpr2\fR is not evaluated if \fIexpr1\fR is false.
-.IP "\fIexpr1\fR \-a \fIexpr2\fR"
-Same as \fIexpr1 expr2\fR.
-.IP "\fIexpr1\fR \-and \fIexpr2\fR"
-Same as \fIexpr1 expr2\fR.
-.IP "\fIexpr1\fR \-o \fIexpr2\fR"
-Or; \fIexpr2\fR is not evaluated if \fIexpr1\fR is true.
-.IP "\fIexpr1\fR \-or \fIexpr2\fR"
-Same as \fIexpr1\fR \-o \fIexpr2\fR.
-.IP "\fIexpr1\fR , \fIexpr2\fR"
-List; both \fIexpr1\fR and \fIexpr2\fR are always evaluated.
-The value of \fIexpr1\fR is discarded; the value of the list is the
-value of \fIexpr2\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBlocate\fP(1L), \fBlocatedb\fP(5L), \fBupdatedb\fP(1L), \fBxargs\fP(1L)
-\fBFinding Files\fP (on-line in Info, or printed)
diff --git a/raw/man1/findsmb.1 b/raw/man1/findsmb.1
deleted file mode 100644
index bd9ba62..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/findsmb.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "FINDSMB" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-findsmb \- list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBfindsmb\fR [subnet broadcast address]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This perl script is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBfindsmb\fR is a perl script that prints out several pieces of information about machines on a subnet that respond to SMB name query requests\&. It uses \fBnmblookup\fR(1) and \fBsmbclient\fR(1) to obtain this information\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--r
-Controls whether \fBfindsmb\fR takes bugs in Windows95 into account when trying to find a Netbios name registered of the remote machine\&. This option is disabled by default because it is specific to Windows 95 and Windows 95 machines only\&. If set, \fBnmblookup\fR(1) will be called with \fB-B\fR option\&.
-
-
-.TP
-subnet broadcast address
-Without this option, \fBfindsmb \fR will probe the subnet of the machine where \fBfindsmb\fR(1) is run\&. This value is passed to \fBnmblookup\fR(1) as part of the \fB-B\fR option\&.
-
-
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-
-.PP
-The output of \fBfindsmb\fR lists the following information for all machines that respond to the initial\fBnmblookup\fR for any name: IP address, NetBIOS name, Workgroup name, operating system, and SMB server version\&.
-
-.PP
-There will be a '+' in front of the workgroup name for machines that are local master browsers for that workgroup\&. There will be an '*' in front of the workgroup name for machines that are the domain master browser for that workgroup\&. Machines that are running Windows, Windows 95 or Windows 98 will not show any information about the operating system or server version\&.
-
-.PP
-The command with \fB-r\fR option must be run on a system without \fBnmbd\fR(8)running\&. If \fBnmbd\fR is running on the system, you will only get the IP address and the DNS name of the machine\&. To get proper responses from Windows 95 and Windows 98 machines, the command must be run as root and with \fB-r\fR option on a machine without \fBnmbd\fR running\&.
-
-.PP
-For example, running \fBfindsmb\fR without \fB-r\fR option set would yield output similar to the following
-.nf
-
-IP ADDR NETBIOS NAME WORKGROUP/OS/VERSION
----------------------------------------------------------------------
-192\&.168\&.35\&.10 MINESET-TEST1 [DMVENGR]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.55 LINUXBOX *[MYGROUP] [Unix] [Samba 2\&.0\&.6]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.56 HERBNT2 [HERB-NT]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.63 GANDALF [MVENGR] [Unix] [Samba 2\&.0\&.5a for IRIX]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.65 SAUNA [WORKGROUP] [Unix] [Samba 1\&.9\&.18p10]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.71 FROGSTAR [ENGR] [Unix] [Samba 2\&.0\&.0 for IRIX]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.78 HERBDHCP1 +[HERB]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.88 SCNT2 +[MVENGR] [Windows NT 4\&.0] [NT LAN Manager 4\&.0]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.93 FROGSTAR-PC [MVENGR] [Windows 5\&.0] [Windows 2000 LAN Manager]
-192\&.168\&.35\&.97 HERBNT1 *[HERB-NT] [Windows NT 4\&.0] [NT LAN Manager 4\&.0]
-.fi
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBnmbd\fR(8),\fBsmbclient\fR(1), and \fBnmblookup\fR(1)
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/finger.1 b/raw/man1/finger.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 9663258..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/finger.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" from: @(#)finger.1 6.14 (Berkeley) 7/27/91
-.\"
-.Dd August 15, 1999
-.Dt FINGER 1
-.Os "Linux NetKit (0.17)"
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm finger
-.Nd user information lookup program
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm finger
-.Op Fl lmsp
-.Op Ar user ...
-.Op Ar user at host ...
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-The
-.Nm finger
-displays information about the system users.
-.Pp
-Options are:
-.Bl -tag -width flag
-.It Fl s
-.Nm Finger
-displays the user's login name, real name, terminal name and write
-status (as a ``*'' after the terminal name if write permission is
-denied), idle time, login time, office location and office phone
-number.
-.Pp
-Login time is displayed as month, day, hours and minutes, unless
-more than six months ago, in which case the year is displayed rather
-than the hours and minutes.
-.Pp
-Unknown devices as well as nonexistent idle and login times are
-displayed as single asterisks.
-.Pp
-.It Fl l
-Produces a multi-line format displaying all of the information
-described for the
-.Fl s
-option as well as the user's home directory, home phone number, login
-shell, mail status, and the contents of the files
-.Dq Pa .plan ,
-.Dq Pa .project ,
-.Dq Pa .pgpkey
-and
-.Dq Pa .forward
-from the user's home directory.
-.Pp
-Phone numbers specified as eleven digits are printed as ``+N-NNN-NNN-NNNN''.
-Numbers specified as ten or seven digits are printed as the appropriate
-subset of that string.
-Numbers specified as five digits are printed as ``xN-NNNN''.
-Numbers specified as four digits are printed as ``xNNNN''.
-.Pp
-If write permission is denied to the device, the phrase ``(messages off)''
-is appended to the line containing the device name.
-One entry per user is displayed with the
-.Fl l
-option; if a user is logged on multiple times, terminal information
-is repeated once per login.
-.Pp
-Mail status is shown as ``No Mail.'' if there is no mail at all,
-``Mail last read DDD MMM ## HH:MM YYYY (TZ)'' if the person has looked
-at their mailbox since new mail arriving, or ``New mail received ...'',
-`` Unread since ...'' if they have new mail.
-.Pp
-.It Fl p
-Prevents
-the
-.Fl l
-option of
-.Nm finger
-from displaying the contents of the
-.Dq Pa .plan ,
-.Dq Pa .project
-and
-.Dq Pa .pgpkey
-files.
-.It Fl m
-Prevent matching of
-.Ar user
-names.
-.Ar User
-is usually a login name; however, matching will also be done on the
-users' real names, unless the
-.Fl m
-option is supplied.
-All name matching performed by
-.Nm finger
-is case insensitive.
-.El
-.Pp
-If no options are specified,
-.Nm finger
-defaults to the
-.Fl l
-style output if operands are provided, otherwise to the
-.Fl s
-style.
-Note that some fields may be missing, in either format, if information
-is not available for them.
-.Pp
-If no arguments are specified,
-.Nm finger
-will print an entry for each user currently logged into the system.
-.Pp
-.Nm Finger
-may be used to look up users on a remote machine.
-The format is to specify a
-.Ar user
-as
-.Dq Li user at host ,
-or
-.Dq Li @host ,
-where the default output
-format for the former is the
-.Fl l
-style, and the default output format for the latter is the
-.Fl s
-style.
-The
-.Fl l
-option is the only option that may be passed to a remote machine.
-.Pp
-If standard output is a socket,
-.Nm finger
-will emit a carriage return (^M) before every linefeed (^J). This is
-for processing remote finger requests when invoked by
-.Xr fingerd 8 .
-.Sh FILES
-.Bl -tag -width mmmmmmmmmmmmmmm
-.It Pa ~/.nofinger
-If finger finds this file in a user's home directory, it will, for
-finger requests originating outside the local host, firmly deny the
-existence of that user. For this to work, the finger program, as
-started by
-.Xr fingerd 8 ,
-must be able to see the
-.Pa .nofinger
-file. This generally means that the home directory containing the file
-must have the other-users-execute bit set (o+x). See
-.Xr chmod 1 .
-If you use this feature for privacy, please test it with ``finger
- at localhost'' before relying on it, just in case.
-.It ~/.plan
-.It ~/.project
-.It ~/.pgpkey
-These files are printed as part of a long-format request. The
-.Pa .project
-file is limited to one line; the
-.Pa .plan
-file may be arbitrarily long.
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr chfn 1 ,
-.Xr passwd 1 ,
-.Xr w 1 ,
-.Xr who 1
-.Sh HISTORY
-The
-.Nm finger
-command appeared in
-.Bx 3.0 .
diff --git a/raw/man1/fmt.1 b/raw/man1/fmt.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 52504ea..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/fmt.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH FMT "1" "October 2003" "fmt (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-fmt \- simple optimal text formatter
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B fmt
-[\fI-DIGITS\fR] [\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Reformat each paragraph in the FILE(s), writing to standard output.
-If no FILE or if FILE is `-', read standard input.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-crown\-margin\fR
-preserve indentation of first two lines
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-prefix\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-combine only lines having STRING as prefix
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-split\-only\fR
-split long lines, but do not refill
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-tagged\-paragraph\fR
-indentation of first line different from second
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-uniform\-spacing\fR
-one space between words, two after sentences
-.TP
-\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-width\fR=\fINUMBER\fR
-maximum line width (default of 75 columns)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-In \fB\-wNUMBER\fR, the letter `w' may be omitted.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Ross Paterson.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B fmt
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B fmt
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info fmt
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/fold.1 b/raw/man1/fold.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ee36ec..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/fold.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH FOLD "1" "October 2003" "fold (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-fold \- wrap each input line to fit in specified width
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B fold
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Wrap input lines in each FILE (standard input by default), writing to
-standard output.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-bytes\fR
-count bytes rather than columns
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-characters\fR
-count characters rather than columns
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-spaces\fR
-break at spaces
-.TP
-\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-width\fR=\fIWIDTH\fR
-use WIDTH columns instead of 80
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B fold
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B fold
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info fold
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/free.1 b/raw/man1/free.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 56e090c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/free.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-.\" free.1 - manpage for the free(1) utility, part of procps
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 2003 Robert Love
-.\" Licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, v2
-.TH FREE 1 "10 Aug 2003" "Linux" "Linux User's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-free \- display information about free and used memory on the system
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "free [\-b|-k|-m|-g] [\-l] [\-o] [\-t] [\-s " delay " ] [\-c " count " ]
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.BR free (1)
-displays the total amount of free and used physical memory and swap space in
-the system, as well as the buffers and cache consumed by the kernel.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-Normal invocation of
-.BR free (1)
-does not require any options. The output, however, can be fine-tuned by
-specifying one or more of the following flags:
-.TP
-.B \-b, \-\^\-bytes
-Display output in bytes.
-.TP
-.B \-k, \-\^\-kb
-Display output in kilobytes (KB). This is the default.
-.TP
-.B \-m, \-\^\-mb
-Display output in megabytes (MB).
-.TP
-.B \-g, \-\^\-gb
-Display output in gigabytes (GB).
-.TP
-.B \-l, \-\^\-lowhigh
-Display detailed information about low vs. high memory usage.
-.TP
-.B \-o, \-\^\-old
-Use old format. Specifically, do not display -/+ buffers/cache.
-.TP
-.B \-t, \-\^\-total
-Display total summary for physical memory + swap space.
-.TP
-.BI \-c " n" ", \-\^\-count=" n
-Display statistics
-.I n
-times, then exit. Used in conjunction with the
-.I -s
-flag. Default is to display only once, unless
-.I -s
-was specified, in which case default is to repeat until interrupted.
-.TP
-.BI \-s " n" ", \-\^\-repeat=" n
-Repeat, pausing every
-.I n
-seconds in-between.
-.TP
-.B \-V, \-\^\-version
-Display version information and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-\^\-help
-Display usage information and exit
-
-.SH FILES
-.IR /proc/meminfo " \-\- memory information"
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ps (1),
-.BR top (1),
-.BR vmstat (1)
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-Written by Robert Love.
-
-The procps package is maintained by Robert Love and was created by Michael
-Johnson.
-
-Send bug reports to <procps-list at redhat.com>.
diff --git a/raw/man1/ftp.1 b/raw/man1/ftp.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b8fe29b..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ftp.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1053 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1989, 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" from: @(#)ftp.1 6.18 (Berkeley) 7/30/91
-.\"
-.Dd August 15, 1999
-.Dt FTP 1
-.Os "Linux NetKit (0.17)"
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm ftp
-.Nd
-.Tn Internet
-file transfer program
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm ftp
-.Op Fl pinegvd
-.Op Ar host
-.Nm pftp
-.Op Fl inegvd
-.Op Ar host
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm Ftp
-is the user interface to the
-.Tn Internet
-standard File Transfer Protocol.
-The program allows a user to transfer files to and from a
-remote network site.
-.Pp
-Options may be specified at the command line, or to the
-command interpreter.
-.Bl -tag -width flag
-.It Fl p
-Use passive mode for data transfers. Allows use of ftp in environments
-where a firewall prevents connections from the outside world back to
-the client machine. Requires that the ftp server support the PASV
-command. This is the default now for
-.Nm all
-clients (ftp and pftp) due to security concerns using the PORT transfer mode.
-The flag is kept for compatibility only and has no effect anymore.
-.It Fl i
-Turns off interactive prompting during multiple file transfers.
-.It Fl n
-Restrains
-.Nm ftp
-from attempting \*(Lqauto-login\*(Rq upon initial connection.
-If auto-login is enabled,
-.Nm ftp
-will check the
-.Pa .netrc
-(see
-.Xr netrc 5)
-file in the user's home directory for an entry describing
-an account on the remote machine.
-If no entry exists,
-.Nm ftp
-will prompt for the remote machine login name (default is the user
-identity on the local machine), and, if necessary, prompt for a password
-and an account with which to login.
-.It Fl e
-Disables command editing and history support, if it was compiled into
-the
-.Nm ftp
-executable. Otherwise, does nothing.
-.It Fl g
-Disables file name globbing.
-.It Fl v
-Verbose option forces
-.Nm ftp
-to show all responses from the remote server, as well
-as report on data transfer statistics.
-.It Fl d
-Enables debugging.
-.El
-.Pp
-The client host with which
-.Nm ftp
-is to communicate may be specified on the command line.
-If this is done,
-.Nm ftp
-will immediately attempt to establish a connection to an
-.Tn FTP
-server on that host; otherwise,
-.Nm ftp
-will enter its command interpreter and await instructions
-from the user.
-When
-.Nm ftp
-is awaiting commands from the user the prompt
-.Ql ftp>
-is provided to the user.
-The following commands are recognized
-by
-.Nm ftp :
-.Bl -tag -width Fl
-.It Ic \&! Op Ar command Op Ar args
-Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine.
-If there are arguments, the first is taken to be a command to execute
-directly, with the rest of the arguments as its arguments.
-.It Ic \&$ Ar macro-name Op Ar args
-Execute the macro
-.Ar macro-name
-that was defined with the
-.Ic macdef
-command.
-Arguments are passed to the macro unglobbed.
-.It Ic account Op Ar passwd
-Supply a supplemental password required by a remote system for access
-to resources once a login has been successfully completed.
-If no argument is included, the user will be prompted for an account
-password in a non-echoing input mode.
-.It Ic append Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
-Append a local file to a file on the remote machine.
-If
-.Ar remote-file
-is left unspecified, the local file name is used in naming the
-remote file after being altered by any
-.Ic ntrans
-or
-.Ic nmap
-setting.
-File transfer uses the current settings for
-.Ic type ,
-.Ic format ,
-.Ic mode ,
-and
-.Ic structure .
-.It Ic ascii
-Set the file transfer
-.Ic type
-to network
-.Tn ASCII .
-This is the default type.
-.It Ic bell
-Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer
-command is completed.
-.It Ic binary
-Set the file transfer
-.Ic type
-to support binary image transfer.
-.It Ic bye
-Terminate the
-.Tn FTP
-session with the remote server
-and exit
-.Nm ftp .
-An end of file will also terminate the session and exit.
-.It Ic case
-Toggle remote computer file name case mapping during
-.Ic mget
-commands.
-When
-.Ic case
-is on (default is off), remote computer file names with all letters in
-upper case are written in the local directory with the letters mapped
-to lower case.
-.It Ic \&cd Ar remote-directory
-Change the working directory on the remote machine
-to
-.Ar remote-directory .
-.It Ic cdup
-Change the remote machine working directory to the parent of the
-current remote machine working directory.
-.It Ic chmod Ar mode file-name
-Change the permission modes of the file
-.Ar file-name
-on the remote
-sytem to
-.Ar mode .
-.It Ic close
-Terminate the
-.Tn FTP
-session with the remote server, and
-return to the command interpreter.
-Any defined macros are erased.
-.It Ic \&cr
-Toggle carriage return stripping during
-ascii type file retrieval.
-Records are denoted by a carriage return/linefeed sequence
-during ascii type file transfer.
-When
-.Ic \&cr
-is on (the default), carriage returns are stripped from this
-sequence to conform with the
-.Ux
-single linefeed record
-delimiter.
-Records on
-.Pf non\- Ns Ux
-remote systems may contain single linefeeds;
-when an ascii type transfer is made, these linefeeds may be
-distinguished from a record delimiter only when
-.Ic \&cr
-is off.
-.It Ic delete Ar remote-file
-Delete the file
-.Ar remote-file
-on the remote machine.
-.It Ic debug Op Ar debug-value
-Toggle debugging mode.
-If an optional
-.Ar debug-value
-is specified it is used to set the debugging level.
-When debugging is on,
-.Nm ftp
-prints each command sent to the remote machine, preceded
-by the string
-.Ql \-\->
-.It Xo
-.Ic dir
-.Op Ar remote-directory
-.Op Ar local-file
-.Xc
-Print a listing of the directory contents in the
-directory,
-.Ar remote-directory ,
-and, optionally, placing the output in
-.Ar local-file .
-If interactive prompting is on,
-.Nm ftp
-will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-target local file for receiving
-.Ic dir
-output.
-If no directory is specified, the current working
-directory on the remote machine is used.
-If no local
-file is specified, or
-.Ar local-file
-is
-.Fl ,
-output comes to the terminal.
-.It Ic disconnect
-A synonym for
-.Ar close .
-.It Ic form Ar format
-Set the file transfer
-.Ic form
-to
-.Ar format .
-The default format is \*(Lqfile\*(Rq.
-.It Ic get Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
-Retrieve the
-.Ar remote-file
-and store it on the local machine.
-If the local
-file name is not specified, it is given the same
-name it has on the remote machine, subject to
-alteration by the current
-.Ic case ,
-.Ic ntrans ,
-and
-.Ic nmap
-settings.
-The current settings for
-.Ic type ,
-.Ic form ,
-.Ic mode ,
-and
-.Ic structure
-are used while transferring the file.
-.It Ic glob
-Toggle filename expansion for
-.Ic mdelete ,
-.Ic mget
-and
-.Ic mput .
-If globbing is turned off with
-.Ic glob ,
-the file name arguments
-are taken literally and not expanded.
-Globbing for
-.Ic mput
-is done as in
-.Xr csh 1 .
-For
-.Ic mdelete
-and
-.Ic mget ,
-each remote file name is expanded
-separately on the remote machine and the lists are not merged.
-Expansion of a directory name is likely to be
-different from expansion of the name of an ordinary file:
-the exact result depends on the foreign operating system and ftp server,
-and can be previewed by doing
-.Ql mls remote-files \-
-Note:
-.Ic mget
-and
-.Ic mput
-are not meant to transfer
-entire directory subtrees of files.
-That can be done by
-transferring a
-.Xr tar 1
-archive of the subtree (in binary mode).
-.It Ic hash
-Toggle hash-sign (``#'') printing for each data block
-transferred.
-The size of a data block is 1024 bytes.
-.It Ic help Op Ar command
-Print an informative message about the meaning of
-.Ar command .
-If no argument is given,
-.Nm ftp
-prints a list of the known commands.
-.It Ic idle Op Ar seconds
-Set the inactivity timer on the remote server to
-.Ar seconds
-seconds.
-If
-.Ar seconds
-is ommitted, the current inactivity timer is printed.
-.It Ic lcd Op Ar directory
-Change the working directory on the local machine.
-If
-no
-.Ar directory
-is specified, the user's home directory is used.
-.It Xo
-.Ic \&ls
-.Op Ar remote-directory
-.Op Ar local-file
-.Xc
-Print a listing of the contents of a
-directory on the remote machine.
-The listing includes any system-dependent information that the server
-chooses to include; for example, most
-.Ux
-systems will produce
-output from the command
-.Ql ls \-l .
-(See also
-.Ic nlist . )
-If
-.Ar remote-directory
-is left unspecified, the current working directory is used.
-If interactive prompting is on,
-.Nm ftp
-will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-target local file for receiving
-.Ic \&ls
-output.
-If no local file is specified, or if
-.Ar local-file
-is
-.Sq Fl ,
-the output is sent to the terminal.
-.It Ic macdef Ar macro-name
-Define a macro.
-Subsequent lines are stored as the macro
-.Ar macro-name ;
-a null line (consecutive newline characters
-in a file or
-carriage returns from the terminal) terminates macro input mode.
-There is a limit of 16 macros and 4096 total characters in all
-defined macros.
-Macros remain defined until a
-.Ic close
-command is executed.
-The macro processor interprets `$' and `\e' as special characters.
-A `$' followed by a number (or numbers) is replaced by the
-corresponding argument on the macro invocation command line.
-A `$' followed by an `i' signals that macro processor that the
-executing macro is to be looped.
-On the first pass `$i' is
-replaced by the first argument on the macro invocation command line,
-on the second pass it is replaced by the second argument, and so on.
-A `\e' followed by any character is replaced by that character.
-Use the `\e' to prevent special treatment of the `$'.
-.It Ic mdelete Op Ar remote-files
-Delete the
-.Ar remote-files
-on the remote machine.
-.It Ic mdir Ar remote-files local-file
-Like
-.Ic dir ,
-except multiple remote files may be specified.
-If interactive prompting is on,
-.Nm ftp
-will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-target local file for receiving
-.Ic mdir
-output.
-.It Ic mget Ar remote-files
-Expand the
-.Ar remote-files
-on the remote machine
-and do a
-.Ic get
-for each file name thus produced.
-See
-.Ic glob
-for details on the filename expansion.
-Resulting file names will then be processed according to
-.Ic case ,
-.Ic ntrans ,
-and
-.Ic nmap
-settings.
-Files are transferred into the local working directory,
-which can be changed with
-.Ql lcd directory ;
-new local directories can be created with
-.Ql "\&! mkdir directory" .
-.It Ic mkdir Ar directory-name
-Make a directory on the remote machine.
-.It Ic mls Ar remote-files local-file
-Like
-.Ic nlist ,
-except multiple remote files may be specified,
-and the
-.Ar local-file
-must be specified.
-If interactive prompting is on,
-.Nm ftp
-will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-target local file for receiving
-.Ic mls
-output.
-.It Ic mode Op Ar mode-name
-Set the file transfer
-.Ic mode
-to
-.Ar mode-name .
-The default mode is \*(Lqstream\*(Rq mode.
-.It Ic modtime Ar file-name
-Show the last modification time of the file on the remote machine.
-.It Ic mput Ar local-files
-Expand wild cards in the list of local files given as arguments
-and do a
-.Ic put
-for each file in the resulting list.
-See
-.Ic glob
-for details of filename expansion.
-Resulting file names will then be processed according to
-.Ic ntrans
-and
-.Ic nmap
-settings.
-.It Ic newer Ar file-name Op Ar local-file
-Get the file only if the modification time of the remote file is more
-recent that the file on the current system.
-If the file does not
-exist on the current system, the remote file is considered
-.Ic newer .
-Otherwise, this command is identical to
-.Ar get .
-.It Xo
-.Ic nlist
-.Op Ar remote-directory
-.Op Ar local-file
-.Xc
-Print a list of the files in a
-directory on the remote machine.
-If
-.Ar remote-directory
-is left unspecified, the current working directory is used.
-If interactive prompting is on,
-.Nm ftp
-will prompt the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
-target local file for receiving
-.Ic nlist
-output.
-If no local file is specified, or if
-.Ar local-file
-is
-.Fl ,
-the output is sent to the terminal.
-.It Ic nmap Op Ar inpattern outpattern
-Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism.
-If no arguments are specified, the filename mapping mechanism is unset.
-If arguments are specified, remote filenames are mapped during
-.Ic mput
-commands and
-.Ic put
-commands issued without a specified remote target filename.
-If arguments are specified, local filenames are mapped during
-.Ic mget
-commands and
-.Ic get
-commands issued without a specified local target filename.
-This command is useful when connecting to a
-.No non\- Ns Ux
-remote computer
-with different file naming conventions or practices.
-The mapping follows the pattern set by
-.Ar inpattern
-and
-.Ar outpattern .
-.Op Ar Inpattern
-is a template for incoming filenames (which may have already been
-processed according to the
-.Ic ntrans
-and
-.Ic case
-settings).
-Variable templating is accomplished by including the
-sequences `$1', `$2', ..., `$9' in
-.Ar inpattern .
-Use `\\' to prevent this special treatment of the `$' character.
-All other characters are treated literally, and are used to determine the
-.Ic nmap
-.Op Ar inpattern
-variable values.
-For example, given
-.Ar inpattern
-$1.$2 and the remote file name "mydata.data", $1 would have the value
-"mydata", and $2 would have the value "data".
-The
-.Ar outpattern
-determines the resulting mapped filename.
-The sequences `$1', `$2', ...., `$9' are replaced by any value resulting
-from the
-.Ar inpattern
-template.
-The sequence `$0' is replace by the original filename.
-Additionally, the sequence
-.Ql Op Ar seq1 , Ar seq2
-is replaced by
-.Op Ar seq1
-if
-.Ar seq1
-is not a null string; otherwise it is replaced by
-.Ar seq2 .
-For example, the command
-.Pp
-.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
-nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]
-.Ed
-.Pp
-would yield
-the output filename "myfile.data" for input filenames "myfile.data" and
-"myfile.data.old", "myfile.file" for the input filename "myfile", and
-"myfile.myfile" for the input filename ".myfile".
-Spaces may be included in
-.Ar outpattern ,
-as in the example: `nmap $1 sed "s/ *$//" > $1' .
-Use the `\e' character to prevent special treatment
-of the `$','[','[', and `,' characters.
-.It Ic ntrans Op Ar inchars Op Ar outchars
-Set or unset the filename character translation mechanism.
-If no arguments are specified, the filename character
-translation mechanism is unset.
-If arguments are specified, characters in
-remote filenames are translated during
-.Ic mput
-commands and
-.Ic put
-commands issued without a specified remote target filename.
-If arguments are specified, characters in
-local filenames are translated during
-.Ic mget
-commands and
-.Ic get
-commands issued without a specified local target filename.
-This command is useful when connecting to a
-.No non\- Ns Ux
-remote computer
-with different file naming conventions or practices.
-Characters in a filename matching a character in
-.Ar inchars
-are replaced with the corresponding character in
-.Ar outchars .
-If the character's position in
-.Ar inchars
-is longer than the length of
-.Ar outchars ,
-the character is deleted from the file name.
-.It Ic open Ar host Op Ar port
-Establish a connection to the specified
-.Ar host
-.Tn FTP
-server.
-An optional port number may be supplied,
-in which case,
-.Nm ftp
-will attempt to contact an
-.Tn FTP
-server at that port.
-If the
-.Ic auto-login
-option is on (default),
-.Nm ftp
-will also attempt to automatically log the user in to
-the
-.Tn FTP
-server (see below).
-.It Ic prompt
-Toggle interactive prompting.
-Interactive prompting
-occurs during multiple file transfers to allow the
-user to selectively retrieve or store files.
-If prompting is turned off (default is on), any
-.Ic mget
-or
-.Ic mput
-will transfer all files, and any
-.Ic mdelete
-will delete all files.
-.It Ic proxy Ar ftp-command
-Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connection.
-This command allows simultaneous connection to two remote ftp
-servers for transferring files between the two servers.
-The first
-.Ic proxy
-command should be an
-.Ic open ,
-to establish the secondary control connection.
-Enter the command "proxy ?" to see other ftp commands executable on the
-secondary connection.
-The following commands behave differently when prefaced by
-.Ic proxy :
-.Ic open
-will not define new macros during the auto-login process,
-.Ic close
-will not erase existing macro definitions,
-.Ic get
-and
-.Ic mget
-transfer files from the host on the primary control connection
-to the host on the secondary control connection, and
-.Ic put ,
-.Ic mput ,
-and
-.Ic append
-transfer files from the host on the secondary control connection
-to the host on the primary control connection.
-Third party file transfers depend upon support of the ftp protocol
-.Dv PASV
-command by the server on the secondary control connection.
-.It Ic put Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
-Store a local file on the remote machine.
-If
-.Ar remote-file
-is left unspecified, the local file name is used
-after processing according to any
-.Ic ntrans
-or
-.Ic nmap
-settings
-in naming the remote file.
-File transfer uses the
-current settings for
-.Ic type ,
-.Ic format ,
-.Ic mode ,
-and
-.Ic structure .
-.It Ic pwd
-Print the name of the current working directory on the remote
-machine.
-.It Ic quit
-A synonym for
-.Ic bye .
-.It Ic quote Ar arg1 arg2 ...
-The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote
-.Tn FTP
-server.
-.It Ic recv Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
-A synonym for get.
-.It Ic reget Ar remote-file Op Ar local-file
-Reget acts like get, except that if
-.Ar local-file
-exists and is
-smaller than
-.Ar remote-file ,
-.Ar local-file
-is presumed to be
-a partially transferred copy of
-.Ar remote-file
-and the transfer
-is continued from the apparent point of failure.
-This command
-is useful when transferring very large files over networks that
-are prone to dropping connections.
-.It Ic remotehelp Op Ar command-name
-Request help from the remote
-.Tn FTP
-server.
-If a
-.Ar command-name
-is specified it is supplied to the server as well.
-.It Ic remotestatus Op Ar file-name
-With no arguments, show status of remote machine.
-If
-.Ar file-name
-is specified, show status of
-.Ar file-name
-on remote machine.
-.It Xo
-.Ic rename
-.Op Ar from
-.Op Ar to
-.Xc
-Rename the file
-.Ar from
-on the remote machine, to the file
-.Ar to .
-.It Ic reset
-Clear reply queue.
-This command re-synchronizes command/reply sequencing with the remote
-ftp server.
-Resynchronization may be necessary following a violation of the ftp protocol
-by the remote server.
-.It Ic restart Ar marker
-Restart the immediately following
-.Ic get
-or
-.Ic put
-at the
-indicated
-.Ar marker .
-On
-.Ux
-systems, marker is usually a byte
-offset into the file.
-.It Ic rmdir Ar directory-name
-Delete a directory on the remote machine.
-.It Ic runique
-Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique filenames.
-If a file already exists with a name equal to the target
-local filename for a
-.Ic get
-or
-.Ic mget
-command, a ".1" is appended to the name.
-If the resulting name matches another existing file,
-a ".2" is appended to the original name.
-If this process continues up to ".99", an error
-message is printed, and the transfer does not take place.
-The generated unique filename will be reported.
-Note that
-.Ic runique
-will not affect local files generated from a shell command
-(see below).
-The default value is off.
-.It Ic send Ar local-file Op Ar remote-file
-A synonym for put.
-.It Ic sendport
-Toggle the use of
-.Dv PORT
-commands.
-By default,
-.Nm ftp
-will attempt to use a
-.Dv PORT
-command when establishing
-a connection for each data transfer.
-The use of
-.Dv PORT
-commands can prevent delays
-when performing multiple file transfers.
-If the
-.Dv PORT
-command fails,
-.Nm ftp
-will use the default data port.
-When the use of
-.Dv PORT
-commands is disabled, no attempt will be made to use
-.Dv PORT
-commands for each data transfer.
-This is useful
-for certain
-.Tn FTP
-implementations which do ignore
-.Dv PORT
-commands but, incorrectly, indicate they've been accepted.
-.It Ic site Ar arg1 arg2 ...
-The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the remote
-.Tn FTP
-server as a
-.Dv SITE
-command.
-.It Ic size Ar file-name
-Return size of
-.Ar file-name
-on remote machine.
-.It Ic status
-Show the current status of
-.Nm ftp .
-.It Ic struct Op Ar struct-name
-Set the file transfer
-.Ar structure
-to
-.Ar struct-name .
-By default \*(Lqstream\*(Rq structure is used.
-.It Ic sunique
-Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique file names.
-Remote ftp server must support ftp protocol
-.Dv STOU
-command for
-successful completion.
-The remote server will report unique name.
-Default value is off.
-.It Ic system
-Show the type of operating system running on the remote machine.
-.It Ic tenex
-Set the file transfer type to that needed to
-talk to
-.Tn TENEX
-machines.
-.It Ic trace
-Toggle packet tracing.
-.It Ic type Op Ar type-name
-Set the file transfer
-.Ic type
-to
-.Ar type-name .
-If no type is specified, the current type
-is printed.
-The default type is network
-.Tn ASCII .
-.It Ic umask Op Ar newmask
-Set the default umask on the remote server to
-.Ar newmask .
-If
-.Ar newmask
-is ommitted, the current umask is printed.
-.It Xo
-.Ic user Ar user-name
-.Op Ar password
-.Op Ar account
-.Xc
-Identify yourself to the remote
-.Tn FTP
-server.
-If the
-.Ar password
-is not specified and the server requires it,
-.Nm ftp
-will prompt the user for it (after disabling local echo).
-If an
-.Ar account
-field is not specified, and the
-.Tn FTP
-server
-requires it, the user will be prompted for it.
-If an
-.Ar account
-field is specified, an account command will
-be relayed to the remote server after the login sequence
-is completed if the remote server did not require it
-for logging in.
-Unless
-.Nm ftp
-is invoked with \*(Lqauto-login\*(Rq disabled, this
-process is done automatically on initial connection to
-the
-.Tn FTP
-server.
-.It Ic verbose
-Toggle verbose mode.
-In verbose mode, all responses from
-the
-.Tn FTP
-server are displayed to the user.
-In addition,
-if verbose is on, when a file transfer completes, statistics
-regarding the efficiency of the transfer are reported.
-By default,
-verbose is on.
-.It Ic ? Op Ar command
-A synonym for help.
-.El
-.Pp
-Command arguments which have embedded spaces may be quoted with
-quote `"' marks.
-.Sh ABORTING A FILE TRANSFER
-To abort a file transfer, use the terminal interrupt key
-(usually Ctrl-C).
-Sending transfers will be immediately halted.
-Receiving transfers will be halted by sending a ftp protocol
-.Dv ABOR
-command to the remote server, and discarding any further data received.
-The speed at which this is accomplished depends upon the remote
-server's support for
-.Dv ABOR
-processing.
-If the remote server does not support the
-.Dv ABOR
-command, an
-.Ql ftp>
-prompt will not appear until the remote server has completed
-sending the requested file.
-.Pp
-The terminal interrupt key sequence will be ignored when
-.Nm ftp
-has completed any local processing and is awaiting a reply
-from the remote server.
-A long delay in this mode may result from the ABOR processing described
-above, or from unexpected behavior by the remote server, including
-violations of the ftp protocol.
-If the delay results from unexpected remote server behavior, the local
-.Nm ftp
-program must be killed by hand.
-.Sh FILE NAMING CONVENTIONS
-Files specified as arguments to
-.Nm ftp
-commands are processed according to the following rules.
-.Bl -enum
-.It
-If the file name
-.Sq Fl
-is specified, the
-.Ar stdin
-(for reading) or
-.Ar stdout
-(for writing) is used.
-.It
-If the first character of the file name is
-.Sq \&| ,
-the
-remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell command.
-.Nm Ftp
-then forks a shell, using
-.Xr popen 3
-with the argument supplied, and reads (writes) from the stdout
-(stdin).
-If the shell command includes spaces, the argument
-must be quoted; e.g.
-\*(Lq" ls -lt"\*(Rq.
-A particularly
-useful example of this mechanism is: \*(Lqdir more\*(Rq.
-.It
-Failing the above checks, if ``globbing'' is enabled,
-local file names are expanded
-according to the rules used in the
-.Xr csh 1 ;
-c.f. the
-.Ic glob
-command.
-If the
-.Nm ftp
-command expects a single local file (.e.g.
-.Ic put ) ,
-only the first filename generated by the "globbing" operation is used.
-.It
-For
-.Ic mget
-commands and
-.Ic get
-commands with unspecified local file names, the local filename is
-the remote filename, which may be altered by a
-.Ic case ,
-.Ic ntrans ,
-or
-.Ic nmap
-setting.
-The resulting filename may then be altered if
-.Ic runique
-is on.
-.It
-For
-.Ic mput
-commands and
-.Ic put
-commands with unspecified remote file names, the remote filename is
-the local filename, which may be altered by a
-.Ic ntrans
-or
-.Ic nmap
-setting.
-The resulting filename may then be altered by the remote server if
-.Ic sunique
-is on.
-.El
-.Sh FILE TRANSFER PARAMETERS
-The FTP specification specifies many parameters which may
-affect a file transfer.
-The
-.Ic type
-may be one of \*(Lqascii\*(Rq, \*(Lqimage\*(Rq (binary),
-\*(Lqebcdic\*(Rq, and \*(Lqlocal byte size\*(Rq (for
-.Tn PDP Ns -10's
-and
-.Tn PDP Ns -20's
-mostly).
-.Nm Ftp
-supports the ascii and image types of file transfer,
-plus local byte size 8 for
-.Ic tenex
-mode transfers.
-.Pp
-.Nm Ftp
-supports only the default values for the remaining
-file transfer parameters:
-.Ic mode ,
-.Ic form ,
-and
-.Ic struct .
-.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-.Nm Ftp
-utilizes the following environment variables.
-.Bl -tag -width Fl
-.It Ev HOME
-For default location of a
-.Pa .netrc
-file, if one exists.
-.It Ev SHELL
-For default shell.
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr ftpd 8 ,
-RFC 959
-.Sh HISTORY
-The
-.Nm ftp
-command appeared in
-.Bx 4.2 .
-.Sh BUGS
-Correct execution of many commands depends upon proper behavior
-by the remote server.
-.Pp
-An error in the treatment of carriage returns
-in the
-.Bx 4.2
-ascii-mode transfer code
-has been corrected.
-This correction may result in incorrect transfers of binary files
-to and from
-.Bx 4.2
-servers using the ascii type.
-Avoid this problem by using the binary image type.
diff --git a/raw/man1/gcc.1 b/raw/man1/gcc.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8569a70..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/gcc.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,10237 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "GCC 1"
-.TH GCC 1 "2003-10-23" "gcc-3.3.2" "GNU"
-.SH "NAME"
-gcc \- GNU project C and C++ compiler
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-gcc [\fB\-c\fR|\fB\-S\fR|\fB\-E\fR] [\fB\-std=\fR\fIstandard\fR]
- [\fB\-g\fR] [\fB\-pg\fR] [\fB\-O\fR\fIlevel\fR]
- [\fB\-W\fR\fIwarn\fR...] [\fB\-pedantic\fR]
- [\fB\-I\fR\fIdir\fR...] [\fB\-L\fR\fIdir\fR...]
- [\fB\-D\fR\fImacro\fR[=\fIdefn\fR]...] [\fB\-U\fR\fImacro\fR]
- [\fB\-f\fR\fIoption\fR...] [\fB\-m\fR\fImachine-option\fR...]
- [\fB\-o\fR \fIoutfile\fR] \fIinfile\fR...
-.PP
-Only the most useful options are listed here; see below for the
-remainder. \fBg++\fR accepts mostly the same options as \fBgcc\fR.
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-When you invoke \s-1GCC\s0, it normally does preprocessing, compilation,
-assembly and linking. The ``overall options'' allow you to stop this
-process at an intermediate stage. For example, the \fB\-c\fR option
-says not to run the linker. Then the output consists of object files
-output by the assembler.
-.PP
-Other options are passed on to one stage of processing. Some options
-control the preprocessor and others the compiler itself. Yet other
-options control the assembler and linker; most of these are not
-documented here, since you rarely need to use any of them.
-.PP
-Most of the command line options that you can use with \s-1GCC\s0 are useful
-for C programs; when an option is only useful with another language
-(usually \*(C+), the explanation says so explicitly. If the description
-for a particular option does not mention a source language, you can use
-that option with all supported languages.
-.PP
-The \fBgcc\fR program accepts options and file names as operands. Many
-options have multi-letter names; therefore multiple single-letter options
-may \fInot\fR be grouped: \fB\-dr\fR is very different from \fB\-d\ \-r\fR.
-.PP
-You can mix options and other arguments. For the most part, the order
-you use doesn't matter. Order does matter when you use several options
-of the same kind; for example, if you specify \fB\-L\fR more than once,
-the directories are searched in the order specified.
-.PP
-Many options have long names starting with \fB\-f\fR or with
-\&\fB\-W\fR\-\-\-for example, \fB\-fforce\-mem\fR,
-\&\fB\-fstrength\-reduce\fR, \fB\-Wformat\fR and so on. Most of
-these have both positive and negative forms; the negative form of
-\&\fB\-ffoo\fR would be \fB\-fno\-foo\fR. This manual documents
-only one of these two forms, whichever one is not the default.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.IX Header "OPTIONS"
-.Sh "Option Summary"
-.IX Subsection "Option Summary"
-Here is a summary of all the options, grouped by type. Explanations are
-in the following sections.
-.IP "\fIOverall Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Overall Options"
-\&\fB\-c \-S \-E \-o\fR \fIfile\fR \fB\-pipe \-pass\-exit\-codes
-\&\-x\fR \fIlanguage\fR \fB\-v \-### \-\-help \-\-target\-help \-\-version\fR
-.IP "\fIC Language Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "C Language Options"
-\&\fB\-ansi \-std=\fR\fIstandard\fR \fB\-aux\-info\fR \fIfilename\fR
-\&\fB\-fno\-asm \-fno\-builtin \-fno\-builtin\-\fR\fIfunction\fR
-\&\fB\-fhosted \-ffreestanding \-fms\-extensions
-\&\-trigraphs \-no\-integrated\-cpp \-traditional \-traditional\-cpp
-\&\-fallow\-single\-precision \-fcond\-mismatch
-\&\-fsigned\-bitfields \-fsigned\-char
-\&\-funsigned\-bitfields \-funsigned\-char
-\&\-fwritable\-strings\fR
-.IP "\fI\*(C+ Language Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item " Language Options"
-\&\fB\-fabi\-version=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-fno\-access\-control \-fcheck\-new
-\&\-fconserve\-space \-fno\-const\-strings \-fdollars\-in\-identifiers
-\&\-fno\-elide\-constructors
-\&\-fno\-enforce\-eh\-specs \-fexternal\-templates
-\&\-falt\-external\-templates
-\&\-ffor\-scope \-fno\-for\-scope \-fno\-gnu\-keywords
-\&\-fno\-implicit\-templates
-\&\-fno\-implicit\-inline\-templates
-\&\-fno\-implement\-inlines \-fms\-extensions
-\&\-fno\-nonansi\-builtins \-fno\-operator\-names
-\&\-fno\-optional\-diags \-fpermissive
-\&\-frepo \-fno\-rtti \-fstats \-ftemplate\-depth\-\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-fuse\-cxa\-atexit \-fvtable\-gc \-fno\-weak \-nostdinc++
-\&\-fno\-default\-inline \-Wabi \-Wctor\-dtor\-privacy
-\&\-Wnon\-virtual\-dtor \-Wreorder
-\&\-Weffc++ \-Wno\-deprecated
-\&\-Wno\-non\-template\-friend \-Wold\-style\-cast
-\&\-Woverloaded\-virtual \-Wno\-pmf\-conversions
-\&\-Wsign\-promo \-Wsynth\fR
-.IP "\fIObjective-C Language Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Objective-C Language Options"
-\&\fB\-fconstant\-string\-class=\fR\fIclass-name\fR
-\&\fB\-fgnu\-runtime \-fnext\-runtime \-gen\-decls
-\&\-Wno\-protocol \-Wselector \-Wundeclared\-selector\fR
-.IP "\fILanguage Independent Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Language Independent Options"
-\&\fB\-fmessage\-length=\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-fdiagnostics\-show\-location=\fR[\fBonce\fR|\fBevery-line\fR]
-.IP "\fIWarning Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Warning Options"
-\&\fB\-fsyntax\-only \-pedantic \-pedantic\-errors
-\&\-w \-W \-Wall \-Waggregate\-return
-\&\-Wcast\-align \-Wcast\-qual \-Wchar\-subscripts \-Wcomment
-\&\-Wconversion \-Wno\-deprecated\-declarations
-\&\-Wdisabled\-optimization \-Wno\-div\-by\-zero \-Werror
-\&\-Wfloat\-equal \-Wformat \-Wformat=2
-\&\-Wformat\-nonliteral \-Wformat\-security
-\&\-Wimplicit \-Wimplicit\-int
-\&\-Wimplicit\-function\-declaration
-\&\-Werror\-implicit\-function\-declaration
-\&\-Wimport \-Winline \-Wno\-endif\-labels
-\&\-Wlarger\-than\-\fR\fIlen\fR \fB\-Wlong\-long
-\&\-Wmain \-Wmissing\-braces
-\&\-Wmissing\-format\-attribute \-Wmissing\-noreturn
-\&\-Wno\-multichar \-Wno\-format\-extra\-args \-Wno\-format\-y2k
-\&\-Wno\-import \-Wnonnull \-Wpacked \-Wpadded
-\&\-Wparentheses \-Wpointer\-arith \-Wredundant\-decls
-\&\-Wreturn\-type \-Wsequence\-point \-Wshadow
-\&\-Wsign\-compare \-Wstrict\-aliasing
-\&\-Wswitch \-Wswitch\-default \-Wswitch\-enum
-\&\-Wsystem\-headers \-Wtrigraphs \-Wundef \-Wuninitialized
-\&\-Wunknown\-pragmas \-Wunreachable\-code
-\&\-Wunused \-Wunused\-function \-Wunused\-label \-Wunused\-parameter
-\&\-Wunused\-value \-Wunused\-variable \-Wwrite\-strings\fR
-.IP "\fIC\-only Warning Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "C-only Warning Options"
-\&\fB\-Wbad\-function\-cast \-Wmissing\-declarations
-\&\-Wmissing\-prototypes \-Wnested\-externs
-\&\-Wstrict\-prototypes \-Wtraditional
-\&\-Wdeclaration\-after\-statement\fR
-.IP "\fIDebugging Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Debugging Options"
-\&\fB\-d\fR\fIletters\fR \fB\-dumpspecs \-dumpmachine \-dumpversion
-\&\-fdump\-unnumbered \-fdump\-translation\-unit\fR[\fB\-\fR\fIn\fR]
-\&\fB\-fdump\-class\-hierarchy\fR[\fB\-\fR\fIn\fR]
-\&\fB\-fdump\-tree\-original\fR[\fB\-\fR\fIn\fR]
-\&\fB\-fdump\-tree\-optimized\fR[\fB\-\fR\fIn\fR]
-\&\fB\-fdump\-tree\-inlined\fR[\fB\-\fR\fIn\fR]
-\&\fB\-feliminate\-dwarf2\-dups \-fmem\-report
-\&\-fprofile\-arcs \-frandom\-seed=\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-fsched\-verbose=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-ftest\-coverage \-ftime\-report
-\&\-g \-g\fR\fIlevel\fR \fB\-gcoff \-gdwarf \-gdwarf\-1 \-gdwarf\-1+ \-gdwarf\-2
-\&\-ggdb \-gstabs \-gstabs+ \-gvms \-gxcoff \-gxcoff+
-\&\-p \-pg \-print\-file\-name=\fR\fIlibrary\fR \fB\-print\-libgcc\-file\-name
-\&\-print\-multi\-directory \-print\-multi\-lib
-\&\-print\-prog\-name=\fR\fIprogram\fR \fB\-print\-search\-dirs \-Q
-\&\-save\-temps \-time\fR
-.IP "\fIOptimization Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Optimization Options"
-\&\fB\-falign\-functions=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-falign\-jumps=\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-falign\-labels=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-falign\-loops=\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-fbranch\-probabilities \-fcaller\-saves \-fcprop\-registers
-\&\-fcse\-follow\-jumps \-fcse\-skip\-blocks \-fdata\-sections
-\&\-fdelayed\-branch \-fdelete\-null\-pointer\-checks
-\&\-fexpensive\-optimizations \-ffast\-math \-ffloat\-store
-\&\-fforce\-addr \-fforce\-mem \-ffunction\-sections
-\&\-fgcse \-fgcse\-lm \-fgcse\-sm \-floop\-optimize \-fcrossjumping
-\&\-fif\-conversion \-fif\-conversion2
-\&\-finline\-functions \-finline\-limit=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-fkeep\-inline\-functions
-\&\-fkeep\-static\-consts \-fmerge\-constants \-fmerge\-all\-constants
-\&\-fmove\-all\-movables \-fnew\-ra \-fno\-branch\-count\-reg
-\&\-fno\-default\-inline \-fno\-defer\-pop
-\&\-fno\-function\-cse \-fno\-guess\-branch\-probability
-\&\-fno\-inline \-fno\-math\-errno \-fno\-peephole \-fno\-peephole2
-\&\-funsafe\-math\-optimizations \-ffinite\-math\-only
-\&\-fno\-trapping\-math \-fno\-zero\-initialized\-in\-bss
-\&\-fomit\-frame\-pointer \-foptimize\-register\-move
-\&\-foptimize\-sibling\-calls \-fprefetch\-loop\-arrays
-\&\-freduce\-all\-givs \-fregmove \-frename\-registers
-\&\-freorder\-blocks \-freorder\-functions
-\&\-frerun\-cse\-after\-loop \-frerun\-loop\-opt
-\&\-fschedule\-insns \-fschedule\-insns2
-\&\-fno\-sched\-interblock \-fno\-sched\-spec \-fsched\-spec\-load
-\&\-fsched\-spec\-load\-dangerous \-fsignaling\-nans
-\&\-fsingle\-precision\-constant \-fssa \-fssa\-ccp \-fssa\-dce
-\&\-fstrength\-reduce \-fstrict\-aliasing \-ftracer \-fthread\-jumps
-\&\-funroll\-all\-loops \-funroll\-loops
-\&\-\-param\fR \fIname\fR\fB=\fR\fIvalue\fR
-\&\fB\-O \-O0 \-O1 \-O2 \-O3 \-Os\fR
-.IP "\fIPreprocessor Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Preprocessor Options"
-\&\fB\-$ \-A\fR\fIquestion\fR\fB=\fR\fIanswer\fR
-\&\fB\-A\-\fR\fIquestion\fR[\fB=\fR\fIanswer\fR]
-\&\fB\-C \-dD \-dI \-dM \-dN
-\&\-D\fR\fImacro\fR[\fB=\fR\fIdefn\fR] \fB\-E \-H
-\&\-idirafter\fR \fIdir\fR
-\&\fB\-include\fR \fIfile\fR \fB\-imacros\fR \fIfile\fR
-\&\fB\-iprefix\fR \fIfile\fR \fB\-iwithprefix\fR \fIdir\fR
-\&\fB\-iwithprefixbefore\fR \fIdir\fR \fB\-isystem\fR \fIdir\fR
-\&\fB\-M \-MM \-MF \-MG \-MP \-MQ \-MT \-nostdinc \-P \-remap
-\&\-trigraphs \-undef \-U\fR\fImacro\fR \fB\-Wp,\fR\fIoption\fR
-.IP "\fIAssembler Option\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Assembler Option"
-\&\fB\-Wa,\fR\fIoption\fR
-.IP "\fILinker Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Linker Options"
-\&\fIobject-file-name\fR \fB\-l\fR\fIlibrary\fR
-\&\fB\-nostartfiles \-nodefaultlibs \-nostdlib \-pie
-\&\-s \-static \-static\-libgcc \-shared \-shared\-libgcc \-symbolic
-\&\-Wl,\fR\fIoption\fR \fB\-Xlinker\fR \fIoption\fR
-\&\fB\-u\fR \fIsymbol\fR
-.IP "\fIDirectory Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Directory Options"
-\&\fB\-B\fR\fIprefix\fR \fB\-I\fR\fIdir\fR \fB\-I\- \-L\fR\fIdir\fR \fB\-specs=\fR\fIfile\fR
-.IP "\fITarget Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Target Options"
-\&\fB\-V\fR \fIversion\fR \fB\-b\fR \fImachine\fR
-.IP "\fIMachine Dependent Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Machine Dependent Options"
-\&\fIM680x0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-m68000 \-m68020 \-m68020\-40 \-m68020\-60 \-m68030 \-m68040
-\&\-m68060 \-mcpu32 \-m5200 \-m68881 \-mbitfield \-mc68000 \-mc68020
-\&\-mfpa \-mnobitfield \-mrtd \-mshort \-msoft\-float \-mpcrel
-\&\-malign\-int \-mstrict\-align\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIM68hc1x Options\fR
-\&\fB\-m6811 \-m6812 \-m68hc11 \-m68hc12 \-m68hcs12
-\&\-mauto\-incdec \-minmax \-mlong\-calls \-mshort
-\&\-msoft\-reg\-count=\fR\fIcount\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1VAX\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mg \-mgnu \-munix\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1SPARC\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR
-\&\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR
-\&\fB\-mcmodel=\fR\fIcode-model\fR
-\&\fB\-m32 \-m64
-\&\-mapp\-regs \-mbroken\-saverestore \-mcypress
-\&\-mfaster\-structs \-mflat
-\&\-mfpu \-mhard\-float \-mhard\-quad\-float
-\&\-mimpure\-text \-mlittle\-endian \-mlive\-g0 \-mno\-app\-regs
-\&\-mno\-faster\-structs \-mno\-flat \-mno\-fpu
-\&\-mno\-impure\-text \-mno\-stack\-bias \-mno\-unaligned\-doubles
-\&\-msoft\-float \-msoft\-quad\-float \-msparclite \-mstack\-bias
-\&\-msupersparc \-munaligned\-doubles \-mv8\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1ARM\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mapcs\-frame \-mno\-apcs\-frame
-\&\-mapcs\-26 \-mapcs\-32
-\&\-mapcs\-stack\-check \-mno\-apcs\-stack\-check
-\&\-mapcs\-float \-mno\-apcs\-float
-\&\-mapcs\-reentrant \-mno\-apcs\-reentrant
-\&\-msched\-prolog \-mno\-sched\-prolog
-\&\-mlittle\-endian \-mbig\-endian \-mwords\-little\-endian
-\&\-malignment\-traps \-mno\-alignment\-traps
-\&\-msoft\-float \-mhard\-float \-mfpe
-\&\-mthumb\-interwork \-mno\-thumb\-interwork
-\&\-mcpu=\fR\fIname\fR \fB\-march=\fR\fIname\fR \fB\-mfpe=\fR\fIname\fR
-\&\fB\-mstructure\-size\-boundary=\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-mabort\-on\-noreturn
-\&\-mlong\-calls \-mno\-long\-calls
-\&\-msingle\-pic\-base \-mno\-single\-pic\-base
-\&\-mpic\-register=\fR\fIreg\fR
-\&\fB\-mnop\-fun\-dllimport
-\&\-mpoke\-function\-name
-\&\-mthumb \-marm
-\&\-mtpcs\-frame \-mtpcs\-leaf\-frame
-\&\-mcaller\-super\-interworking \-mcallee\-super\-interworking\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1MN10200\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mrelax\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1MN10300\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mmult\-bug \-mno\-mult\-bug
-\&\-mam33 \-mno\-am33
-\&\-mno\-crt0 \-mrelax\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIM32R/D Options\fR
-\&\fB\-m32rx \-m32r \-mcode\-model=\fR\fImodel-type\fR
-\&\fB\-msdata=\fR\fIsdata-type\fR \fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIM88K Options\fR
-\&\fB\-m88000 \-m88100 \-m88110 \-mbig\-pic
-\&\-mcheck\-zero\-division \-mhandle\-large\-shift
-\&\-midentify\-revision \-mno\-check\-zero\-division
-\&\-mno\-ocs\-debug\-info \-mno\-ocs\-frame\-position
-\&\-mno\-optimize\-arg\-area \-mno\-serialize\-volatile
-\&\-mno\-underscores \-mocs\-debug\-info
-\&\-mocs\-frame\-position \-moptimize\-arg\-area
-\&\-mserialize\-volatile \-mshort\-data\-\fR\fInum\fR \fB\-msvr3
-\&\-msvr4 \-mtrap\-large\-shift \-muse\-div\-instruction
-\&\-mversion\-03.00 \-mwarn\-passed\-structs\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1RS/6000\s0 and PowerPC Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR
-\&\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR
-\&\fB\-mpower \-mno\-power \-mpower2 \-mno\-power2
-\&\-mpowerpc \-mpowerpc64 \-mno\-powerpc
-\&\-maltivec \-mno\-altivec
-\&\-mpowerpc\-gpopt \-mno\-powerpc\-gpopt
-\&\-mpowerpc\-gfxopt \-mno\-powerpc\-gfxopt
-\&\-mnew\-mnemonics \-mold\-mnemonics
-\&\-mfull\-toc \-mminimal\-toc \-mno\-fp\-in\-toc \-mno\-sum\-in\-toc
-\&\-m64 \-m32 \-mxl\-call \-mno\-xl\-call \-mpe
-\&\-msoft\-float \-mhard\-float \-mmultiple \-mno\-multiple
-\&\-mstring \-mno\-string \-mupdate \-mno\-update
-\&\-mfused\-madd \-mno\-fused\-madd \-mbit\-align \-mno\-bit\-align
-\&\-mstrict\-align \-mno\-strict\-align \-mrelocatable
-\&\-mno\-relocatable \-mrelocatable\-lib \-mno\-relocatable\-lib
-\&\-mtoc \-mno\-toc \-mlittle \-mlittle\-endian \-mbig \-mbig\-endian
-\&\-mcall\-aix \-mcall\-sysv \-mcall\-netbsd
-\&\-maix\-struct\-return \-msvr4\-struct\-return
-\&\-mabi=altivec \-mabi=no\-altivec
-\&\-mabi=spe \-mabi=no\-spe
-\&\-misel=yes \-misel=no
-\&\-mprototype \-mno\-prototype
-\&\-msim \-mmvme \-mads \-myellowknife \-memb \-msdata
-\&\-msdata=\fR\fIopt\fR \fB\-mvxworks \-mwindiss \-G\fR \fInum\fR \fB\-pthread\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIDarwin Options\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-all_load \-allowable_client \-arch \-arch_errors_fatal
-\&\-arch_only \-bind_at_load \-bundle \-bundle_loader
-\&\-client_name \-compatibility_version \-current_version
-\&\-dependency\-file \-dylib_file \-dylinker_install_name
-\&\-dynamic \-dynamiclib \-exported_symbols_list
-\&\-filelist \-flat_namespace \-force_cpusubtype_ALL
-\&\-force_flat_namespace \-headerpad_max_install_names
-\&\-image_base \-init \-install_name \-keep_private_externs
-\&\-multi_module \-multiply_defined \-multiply_defined_unused
-\&\-noall_load \-nomultidefs \-noprebind \-noseglinkedit
-\&\-pagezero_size \-prebind \-prebind_all_twolevel_modules
-\&\-private_bundle \-read_only_relocs \-sectalign
-\&\-sectobjectsymbols \-whyload \-seg1addr
-\&\-sectcreate \-sectobjectsymbols \-sectorder
-\&\-seg_addr_table \-seg_addr_table_filename \-seglinkedit
-\&\-segprot \-segs_read_only_addr \-segs_read_write_addr
-\&\-single_module \-static \-sub_library \-sub_umbrella
-\&\-twolevel_namespace \-umbrella \-undefined
-\&\-unexported_symbols_list \-weak_reference_mismatches \-whatsloaded\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1RT\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mcall\-lib\-mul \-mfp\-arg\-in\-fpregs \-mfp\-arg\-in\-gregs
-\&\-mfull\-fp\-blocks \-mhc\-struct\-return \-min\-line\-mul
-\&\-mminimum\-fp\-blocks \-mnohc\-struct\-return\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1MIPS\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mabicalls \-march=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR \fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu=type\fR
-\&\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR \fB\-membedded\-data \-muninit\-const\-in\-rodata
-\&\-membedded\-pic \-mfp32 \-mfp64 \-mfused\-madd \-mno\-fused\-madd
-\&\-mgas \-mgp32 \-mgp64
-\&\-mgpopt \-mhalf\-pic \-mhard\-float \-mint64 \-mips1
-\&\-mips2 \-mips3 \-mips4 \-mlong64 \-mlong32 \-mlong\-calls \-mmemcpy
-\&\-mmips\-as \-mmips\-tfile \-mno\-abicalls
-\&\-mno\-embedded\-data \-mno\-uninit\-const\-in\-rodata
-\&\-mno\-embedded\-pic \-mno\-gpopt \-mno\-long\-calls
-\&\-mno\-memcpy \-mno\-mips\-tfile \-mno\-rnames \-mno\-stats
-\&\-mrnames \-msoft\-float
-\&\-m4650 \-msingle\-float \-mmad
-\&\-mstats \-EL \-EB \-G\fR \fInum\fR \fB\-nocpp
-\&\-mabi=32 \-mabi=n32 \-mabi=64 \-mabi=eabi
-\&\-mfix7000 \-mno\-crt0 \-mflush\-func=\fR\fIfunc\fR \fB\-mno\-flush\-func
-\&\-mbranch\-likely \-mno\-branch\-likely\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIi386 and x86\-64 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR \fB\-march=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR
-\&\fB\-mfpmath=\fR\fIunit\fR \fB\-masm=\fR\fIdialect\fR \fB\-mno\-fancy\-math\-387
-\&\-mno\-fp\-ret\-in\-387 \-msoft\-float \-msvr3\-shlib
-\&\-mno\-wide\-multiply \-mrtd \-malign\-double
-\&\-mpreferred\-stack\-boundary=\fR\fInum\fR
-\&\fB\-mmmx \-msse \-msse2 \-mpni \-m3dnow
-\&\-mthreads \-mno\-align\-stringops \-minline\-all\-stringops
-\&\-mpush\-args \-maccumulate\-outgoing\-args \-m128bit\-long\-double
-\&\-m96bit\-long\-double \-mregparm=\fR\fInum\fR \fB\-momit\-leaf\-frame\-pointer
-\&\-mno\-red\-zone
-\&\-mcmodel=\fR\fIcode-model\fR
-\&\fB\-m32 \-m64\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1HPPA\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-march=\fR\fIarchitecture-type\fR
-\&\fB\-mbig\-switch \-mdisable\-fpregs \-mdisable\-indexing
-\&\-mfast\-indirect\-calls \-mgas \-mgnu\-ld \-mhp\-ld
-\&\-mjump\-in\-delay \-mlinker\-opt \-mlong\-calls
-\&\-mlong\-load\-store \-mno\-big\-switch \-mno\-disable\-fpregs
-\&\-mno\-disable\-indexing \-mno\-fast\-indirect\-calls \-mno\-gas
-\&\-mno\-jump\-in\-delay \-mno\-long\-load\-store
-\&\-mno\-portable\-runtime \-mno\-soft\-float
-\&\-mno\-space\-regs \-msoft\-float \-mpa\-risc\-1\-0
-\&\-mpa\-risc\-1\-1 \-mpa\-risc\-2\-0 \-mportable\-runtime
-\&\-mschedule=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR \fB\-mspace\-regs \-msio \-mwsio
-\&\-nolibdld \-static \-threads\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIIntel 960 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-m\fR\fIcpu-type\fR \fB\-masm\-compat \-mclean\-linkage
-\&\-mcode\-align \-mcomplex\-addr \-mleaf\-procedures
-\&\-mic\-compat \-mic2.0\-compat \-mic3.0\-compat
-\&\-mintel\-asm \-mno\-clean\-linkage \-mno\-code\-align
-\&\-mno\-complex\-addr \-mno\-leaf\-procedures
-\&\-mno\-old\-align \-mno\-strict\-align \-mno\-tail\-call
-\&\-mnumerics \-mold\-align \-msoft\-float \-mstrict\-align
-\&\-mtail\-call\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1DEC\s0 Alpha Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mno\-fp\-regs \-msoft\-float \-malpha\-as \-mgas
-\&\-mieee \-mieee\-with\-inexact \-mieee\-conformant
-\&\-mfp\-trap\-mode=\fR\fImode\fR \fB\-mfp\-rounding\-mode=\fR\fImode\fR
-\&\fB\-mtrap\-precision=\fR\fImode\fR \fB\-mbuild\-constants
-\&\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR \fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR
-\&\fB\-mbwx \-mmax \-mfix \-mcix
-\&\-mfloat\-vax \-mfloat\-ieee
-\&\-mexplicit\-relocs \-msmall\-data \-mlarge\-data
-\&\-mmemory\-latency=\fR\fItime\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1DEC\s0 Alpha/VMS Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mvms\-return\-codes\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIH8/300 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mrelax \-mh \-ms \-mn \-mint32 \-malign\-300\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1SH\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-m1 \-m2 \-m3 \-m3e
-\&\-m4\-nofpu \-m4\-single\-only \-m4\-single \-m4
-\&\-m5\-64media \-m5\-64media\-nofpu
-\&\-m5\-32media \-m5\-32media\-nofpu
-\&\-m5\-compact \-m5\-compact\-nofpu
-\&\-mb \-ml \-mdalign \-mrelax
-\&\-mbigtable \-mfmovd \-mhitachi \-mnomacsave
-\&\-mieee \-misize \-mpadstruct \-mspace
-\&\-mprefergot \-musermode\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fISystem V Options\fR
-\&\fB\-Qy \-Qn \-YP,\fR\fIpaths\fR \fB\-Ym,\fR\fIdir\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1ARC\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-EB \-EL
-\&\-mmangle\-cpu \-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu\fR \fB\-mtext=\fR\fItext-section\fR
-\&\fB\-mdata=\fR\fIdata-section\fR \fB\-mrodata=\fR\fIreadonly-data-section\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fITMS320C3x/C4x Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu\fR \fB\-mbig \-msmall \-mregparm \-mmemparm
-\&\-mfast\-fix \-mmpyi \-mbk \-mti \-mdp\-isr\-reload
-\&\-mrpts=\fR\fIcount\fR \fB\-mrptb \-mdb \-mloop\-unsigned
-\&\-mparallel\-insns \-mparallel\-mpy \-mpreserve\-float\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIV850 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mlong\-calls \-mno\-long\-calls \-mep \-mno\-ep
-\&\-mprolog\-function \-mno\-prolog\-function \-mspace
-\&\-mtda=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-msda=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-mzda=\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-mapp\-regs \-mno\-app\-regs
-\&\-mdisable\-callt \-mno\-disable\-callt
-\&\-mv850e
-\&\-mv850 \-mbig\-switch\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1NS32K\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-m32032 \-m32332 \-m32532 \-m32081 \-m32381
-\&\-mmult\-add \-mnomult\-add \-msoft\-float \-mrtd \-mnortd
-\&\-mregparam \-mnoregparam \-msb \-mnosb
-\&\-mbitfield \-mnobitfield \-mhimem \-mnohimem\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1AVR\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mmcu=\fR\fImcu\fR \fB\-msize \-minit\-stack=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-mno\-interrupts
-\&\-mcall\-prologues \-mno\-tablejump \-mtiny\-stack\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIMCore Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mhardlit \-mno\-hardlit \-mdiv \-mno\-div \-mrelax\-immediates
-\&\-mno\-relax\-immediates \-mwide\-bitfields \-mno\-wide\-bitfields
-\&\-m4byte\-functions \-mno\-4byte\-functions \-mcallgraph\-data
-\&\-mno\-callgraph\-data \-mslow\-bytes \-mno\-slow\-bytes \-mno\-lsim
-\&\-mlittle\-endian \-mbig\-endian \-m210 \-m340 \-mstack\-increment\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1MMIX\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mlibfuncs \-mno\-libfuncs \-mepsilon \-mno\-epsilon \-mabi=gnu
-\&\-mabi=mmixware \-mzero\-extend \-mknuthdiv \-mtoplevel\-symbols
-\&\-melf \-mbranch\-predict \-mno\-branch\-predict \-mbase\-addresses
-\&\-mno\-base\-addresses \-msingle\-exit \-mno\-single\-exit\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1IA\-64\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mbig\-endian \-mlittle\-endian \-mgnu\-as \-mgnu\-ld \-mno\-pic
-\&\-mvolatile\-asm\-stop \-mb\-step \-mregister\-names \-mno\-sdata
-\&\-mconstant\-gp \-mauto\-pic \-minline\-float\-divide\-min\-latency
-\&\-minline\-float\-divide\-max\-throughput
-\&\-minline\-int\-divide\-min\-latency
-\&\-minline\-int\-divide\-max\-throughput \-mno\-dwarf2\-asm
-\&\-mfixed\-range=\fR\fIregister-range\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fID30V Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mextmem \-mextmemory \-monchip \-mno\-asm\-optimize
-\&\-masm\-optimize \-mbranch\-cost=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-mcond\-exec=\fR\fIn\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIS/390 and zSeries Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mhard\-float \-msoft\-float \-mbackchain \-mno\-backchain
-\&\-msmall\-exec \-mno\-small\-exec \-mmvcle \-mno\-mvcle
-\&\-m64 \-m31 \-mdebug \-mno\-debug\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1CRIS\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu\fR \fB\-march=\fR\fIcpu\fR \fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu\fR
-\&\fB\-mmax\-stack\-frame=\fR\fIn\fR \fB\-melinux\-stacksize=\fR\fIn\fR
-\&\fB\-metrax4 \-metrax100 \-mpdebug \-mcc\-init \-mno\-side\-effects
-\&\-mstack\-align \-mdata\-align \-mconst\-align
-\&\-m32\-bit \-m16\-bit \-m8\-bit \-mno\-prologue\-epilogue \-mno\-gotplt
-\&\-melf \-maout \-melinux \-mlinux \-sim \-sim2\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1PDP\-11\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mfpu \-msoft\-float \-mac0 \-mno\-ac0 \-m40 \-m45 \-m10
-\&\-mbcopy \-mbcopy\-builtin \-mint32 \-mno\-int16
-\&\-mint16 \-mno\-int32 \-mfloat32 \-mno\-float64
-\&\-mfloat64 \-mno\-float32 \-mabshi \-mno\-abshi
-\&\-mbranch\-expensive \-mbranch\-cheap
-\&\-msplit \-mno\-split \-munix\-asm \-mdec\-asm\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIXstormy16 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-msim\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fIXtensa Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mbig\-endian \-mlittle\-endian
-\&\-mdensity \-mno\-density
-\&\-mmac16 \-mno\-mac16
-\&\-mmul16 \-mno\-mul16
-\&\-mmul32 \-mno\-mul32
-\&\-mnsa \-mno\-nsa
-\&\-mminmax \-mno\-minmax
-\&\-msext \-mno\-sext
-\&\-mbooleans \-mno\-booleans
-\&\-mhard\-float \-msoft\-float
-\&\-mfused\-madd \-mno\-fused\-madd
-\&\-mserialize\-volatile \-mno\-serialize\-volatile
-\&\-mtext\-section\-literals \-mno\-text\-section\-literals
-\&\-mtarget\-align \-mno\-target\-align
-\&\-mlongcalls \-mno\-longcalls\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fI\s-1FRV\s0 Options\fR
-\&\fB\-mgpr\-32 \-mgpr\-64 \-mfpr\-32 \-mfpr\-64
-\&\-mhard\-float \-msoft\-float \-malloc\-cc \-mfixed\-cc
-\&\-mdword \-mno\-dword \-mdouble \-mno\-double
-\&\-mmedia \-mno\-media \-mmuladd \-mno\-muladd \-mlibrary\-pic
-\&\-macc\-4 \-macc\-8 \-mpack \-mno\-pack \-mno\-eflags
-\&\-mcond\-move \-mno\-cond\-move \-mscc \-mno\-scc
-\&\-mcond\-exec \-mno\-cond\-exec \-mvliw\-branch \-mno\-vliw\-branch
-\&\-mmulti\-cond\-exec \-mno\-multi\-cond\-exec \-mnested\-cond\-exec
-\&\-mno\-nested\-cond\-exec \-mtomcat\-stats
-\&\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu\fR
-.IP "\fICode Generation Options\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Code Generation Options"
-\&\fB\-fcall\-saved\-\fR\fIreg\fR \fB\-fcall\-used\-\fR\fIreg\fR
-\&\fB\-ffixed\-\fR\fIreg\fR \fB\-fexceptions
-\&\-fnon\-call\-exceptions \-funwind\-tables
-\&\-fasynchronous\-unwind\-tables
-\&\-finhibit\-size\-directive \-finstrument\-functions
-\&\-fno\-common \-fno\-ident \-fno\-gnu\-linker
-\&\-fpcc\-struct\-return \-fpic \-fPIC \-fpie \-fPIE
-\&\-freg\-struct\-return \-fshared\-data \-fshort\-enums
-\&\-fshort\-double \-fshort\-wchar \-fvolatile
-\&\-fvolatile\-global \-fvolatile\-static
-\&\-fverbose\-asm \-fpack\-struct \-fstack\-check
-\&\-fstack\-limit\-register=\fR\fIreg\fR \fB\-fstack\-limit\-symbol=\fR\fIsym\fR
-\&\fB\-fargument\-alias \-fargument\-noalias
-\&\-fargument\-noalias\-global \-fleading\-underscore
-\&\-ftls\-model=\fR\fImodel\fR
-\&\fB\-ftrapv \-fbounds\-check\fR
-.Sh "Options Controlling the Kind of Output"
-.IX Subsection "Options Controlling the Kind of Output"
-Compilation can involve up to four stages: preprocessing, compilation
-proper, assembly and linking, always in that order. The first three
-stages apply to an individual source file, and end by producing an
-object file; linking combines all the object files (those newly
-compiled, and those specified as input) into an executable file.
-.PP
-For any given input file, the file name suffix determines what kind of
-compilation is done:
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.c\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.c"
-C source code which must be preprocessed.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.i\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.i"
-C source code which should not be preprocessed.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.ii\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.ii"
-\&\*(C+ source code which should not be preprocessed.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.m\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.m"
-Objective-C source code. Note that you must link with the library
-\&\fIlibobjc.a\fR to make an Objective-C program work.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.mi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.mi"
-Objective-C source code which should not be preprocessed.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.h\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.h"
-C header file (not to be compiled or linked).
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.cc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.cc"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.cp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.cp"
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.cxx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.cxx"
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.cpp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.cpp"
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.c++\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.c++"
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.C\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.C"
-.PD
-\&\*(C+ source code which must be preprocessed. Note that in \fB.cxx\fR,
-the last two letters must both be literally \fBx\fR. Likewise,
-\&\fB.C\fR refers to a literal capital C.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.f\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.f"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.for\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.for"
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.FOR\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.FOR"
-.PD
-Fortran source code which should not be preprocessed.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.F\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.F"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.fpp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.fpp"
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.FPP\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.FPP"
-.PD
-Fortran source code which must be preprocessed (with the traditional
-preprocessor).
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.r\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.r"
-Fortran source code which must be preprocessed with a \s-1RATFOR\s0
-preprocessor (not included with \s-1GCC\s0).
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.ads\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.ads"
-Ada source code file which contains a library unit declaration (a
-declaration of a package, subprogram, or generic, or a generic
-instantiation), or a library unit renaming declaration (a package,
-generic, or subprogram renaming declaration). Such files are also
-called \fIspecs\fR.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.adb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.adb"
-Ada source code file containing a library unit body (a subprogram or
-package body). Such files are also called \fIbodies\fR.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.s\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.s"
-Assembler code.
-.IP "\fIfile\fR\fB.S\fR" 4
-.IX Item "file.S"
-Assembler code which must be preprocessed.
-.IP "\fIother\fR" 4
-.IX Item "other"
-An object file to be fed straight into linking.
-Any file name with no recognized suffix is treated this way.
-.PP
-You can specify the input language explicitly with the \fB\-x\fR option:
-.IP "\fB\-x\fR \fIlanguage\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x language"
-Specify explicitly the \fIlanguage\fR for the following input files
-(rather than letting the compiler choose a default based on the file
-name suffix). This option applies to all following input files until
-the next \fB\-x\fR option. Possible values for \fIlanguage\fR are:
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& c c-header cpp-output
-\& c++ c++-cpp-output
-\& objective-c objc-cpp-output
-\& assembler assembler-with-cpp
-\& ada
-\& f77 f77-cpp-input ratfor
-\& java
-\& treelang
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-x none\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x none"
-Turn off any specification of a language, so that subsequent files are
-handled according to their file name suffixes (as they are if \fB\-x\fR
-has not been used at all).
-.IP "\fB\-pass\-exit\-codes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pass-exit-codes"
-Normally the \fBgcc\fR program will exit with the code of 1 if any
-phase of the compiler returns a non-success return code. If you specify
-\&\fB\-pass\-exit\-codes\fR, the \fBgcc\fR program will instead return with
-numerically highest error produced by any phase that returned an error
-indication.
-.PP
-If you only want some of the stages of compilation, you can use
-\&\fB\-x\fR (or filename suffixes) to tell \fBgcc\fR where to start, and
-one of the options \fB\-c\fR, \fB\-S\fR, or \fB\-E\fR to say where
-\&\fBgcc\fR is to stop. Note that some combinations (for example,
-\&\fB\-x cpp-output \-E\fR) instruct \fBgcc\fR to do nothing at all.
-.IP "\fB\-c\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-c"
-Compile or assemble the source files, but do not link. The linking
-stage simply is not done. The ultimate output is in the form of an
-object file for each source file.
-.Sp
-By default, the object file name for a source file is made by replacing
-the suffix \fB.c\fR, \fB.i\fR, \fB.s\fR, etc., with \fB.o\fR.
-.Sp
-Unrecognized input files, not requiring compilation or assembly, are
-ignored.
-.IP "\fB\-S\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-S"
-Stop after the stage of compilation proper; do not assemble. The output
-is in the form of an assembler code file for each non-assembler input
-file specified.
-.Sp
-By default, the assembler file name for a source file is made by
-replacing the suffix \fB.c\fR, \fB.i\fR, etc., with \fB.s\fR.
-.Sp
-Input files that don't require compilation are ignored.
-.IP "\fB\-E\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-E"
-Stop after the preprocessing stage; do not run the compiler proper. The
-output is in the form of preprocessed source code, which is sent to the
-standard output.
-.Sp
-Input files which don't require preprocessing are ignored.
-.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-o file"
-Place output in file \fIfile\fR. This applies regardless to whatever
-sort of output is being produced, whether it be an executable file,
-an object file, an assembler file or preprocessed C code.
-.Sp
-Since only one output file can be specified, it does not make sense to
-use \fB\-o\fR when compiling more than one input file, unless you are
-producing an executable file as output.
-.Sp
-If \fB\-o\fR is not specified, the default is to put an executable file
-in \fIa.out\fR, the object file for \fI\fIsource\fI.\fIsuffix\fI\fR in
-\&\fI\fIsource\fI.o\fR, its assembler file in \fI\fIsource\fI.s\fR, and
-all preprocessed C source on standard output.
-.IP "\fB\-v\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-v"
-Print (on standard error output) the commands executed to run the stages
-of compilation. Also print the version number of the compiler driver
-program and of the preprocessor and the compiler proper.
-.IP "\fB\-###\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-###"
-Like \fB\-v\fR except the commands are not executed and all command
-arguments are quoted. This is useful for shell scripts to capture the
-driver-generated command lines.
-.IP "\fB\-pipe\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pipe"
-Use pipes rather than temporary files for communication between the
-various stages of compilation. This fails to work on some systems where
-the assembler is unable to read from a pipe; but the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler has
-no trouble.
-.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--help"
-Print (on the standard output) a description of the command line options
-understood by \fBgcc\fR. If the \fB\-v\fR option is also specified
-then \fB\-\-help\fR will also be passed on to the various processes
-invoked by \fBgcc\fR, so that they can display the command line options
-they accept. If the \fB\-W\fR option is also specified then command
-line options which have no documentation associated with them will also
-be displayed.
-.IP "\fB\-\-target\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--target-help"
-Print (on the standard output) a description of target specific command
-line options for each tool.
-.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--version"
-Display the version number and copyrights of the invoked \s-1GCC\s0.
-.Sh "Compiling \*(C+ Programs"
-.IX Subsection "Compiling Programs"
-\&\*(C+ source files conventionally use one of the suffixes \fB.C\fR,
-\&\fB.cc\fR, \fB.cpp\fR, \fB.c++\fR, \fB.cp\fR, or \fB.cxx\fR;
-preprocessed \*(C+ files use the suffix \fB.ii\fR. \s-1GCC\s0 recognizes
-files with these names and compiles them as \*(C+ programs even if you
-call the compiler the same way as for compiling C programs (usually with
-the name \fBgcc\fR).
-.PP
-However, \*(C+ programs often require class libraries as well as a
-compiler that understands the \*(C+ language\-\-\-and under some
-circumstances, you might want to compile programs from standard input,
-or otherwise without a suffix that flags them as \*(C+ programs.
-\&\fBg++\fR is a program that calls \s-1GCC\s0 with the default language
-set to \*(C+, and automatically specifies linking against the \*(C+
-library. On many systems, \fBg++\fR is also
-installed with the name \fBc++\fR.
-.PP
-When you compile \*(C+ programs, you may specify many of the same
-command-line options that you use for compiling programs in any
-language; or command-line options meaningful for C and related
-languages; or options that are meaningful only for \*(C+ programs.
-.Sh "Options Controlling C Dialect"
-.IX Subsection "Options Controlling C Dialect"
-The following options control the dialect of C (or languages derived
-from C, such as \*(C+ and Objective\-C) that the compiler accepts:
-.IP "\fB\-ansi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ansi"
-In C mode, support all \s-1ISO\s0 C90 programs. In \*(C+ mode,
-remove \s-1GNU\s0 extensions that conflict with \s-1ISO\s0 \*(C+.
-.Sp
-This turns off certain features of \s-1GCC\s0 that are incompatible with \s-1ISO\s0
-C90 (when compiling C code), or of standard \*(C+ (when compiling \*(C+ code),
-such as the \f(CW\*(C`asm\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`typeof\*(C'\fR keywords, and
-predefined macros such as \f(CW\*(C`unix\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`vax\*(C'\fR that identify the
-type of system you are using. It also enables the undesirable and
-rarely used \s-1ISO\s0 trigraph feature. For the C compiler,
-it disables recognition of \*(C+ style \fB//\fR comments as well as
-the \f(CW\*(C`inline\*(C'\fR keyword.
-.Sp
-The alternate keywords \f(CW\*(C`_\|_asm_\|_\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`_\|_extension_\|_\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_inline_\|_\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`_\|_typeof_\|_\*(C'\fR continue to work despite
-\&\fB\-ansi\fR. You would not want to use them in an \s-1ISO\s0 C program, of
-course, but it is useful to put them in header files that might be included
-in compilations done with \fB\-ansi\fR. Alternate predefined macros
-such as \f(CW\*(C`_\|_unix_\|_\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`_\|_vax_\|_\*(C'\fR are also available, with or
-without \fB\-ansi\fR.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-ansi\fR option does not cause non-ISO programs to be
-rejected gratuitously. For that, \fB\-pedantic\fR is required in
-addition to \fB\-ansi\fR.
-.Sp
-The macro \f(CW\*(C`_\|_STRICT_ANSI_\|_\*(C'\fR is predefined when the \fB\-ansi\fR
-option is used. Some header files may notice this macro and refrain
-from declaring certain functions or defining certain macros that the
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 standard doesn't call for; this is to avoid interfering with any
-programs that might use these names for other things.
-.Sp
-Functions which would normally be built in but do not have semantics
-defined by \s-1ISO\s0 C (such as \f(CW\*(C`alloca\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`ffs\*(C'\fR) are not built-in
-functions with \fB\-ansi\fR is used.
-.IP "\fB\-std=\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-std="
-Determine the language standard. This option is currently only
-supported when compiling C or \*(C+. A value for this option must be
-provided; possible values are
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBc89\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c89"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBiso9899:1990\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:1990"
-.PD
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 C90 (same as \fB\-ansi\fR).
-.IP "\fBiso9899:199409\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:199409"
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 C90 as modified in amendment 1.
-.IP "\fBc99\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c99"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBc9x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c9x"
-.IP "\fBiso9899:1999\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:1999"
-.IP "\fBiso9899:199x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:199x"
-.PD
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 C99. Note that this standard is not yet fully supported; see
-<\fBhttp://gcc.gnu.org/gcc\-3.3/c99status.html\fR> for more information. The
-names \fBc9x\fR and \fBiso9899:199x\fR are deprecated.
-.IP "\fBgnu89\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu89"
-Default, \s-1ISO\s0 C90 plus \s-1GNU\s0 extensions (including some C99 features).
-.IP "\fBgnu99\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu99"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBgnu9x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu9x"
-.PD
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 C99 plus \s-1GNU\s0 extensions. When \s-1ISO\s0 C99 is fully implemented in \s-1GCC\s0,
-this will become the default. The name \fBgnu9x\fR is deprecated.
-.IP "\fBc++98\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c++98"
-The 1998 \s-1ISO\s0 \*(C+ standard plus amendments.
-.IP "\fBgnu++98\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu++98"
-The same as \fB\-std=c++98\fR plus \s-1GNU\s0 extensions. This is the
-default for \*(C+ code.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-Even when this option is not specified, you can still use some of the
-features of newer standards in so far as they do not conflict with
-previous C standards. For example, you may use \f(CW\*(C`_\|_restrict_\|_\*(C'\fR even
-when \fB\-std=c99\fR is not specified.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-std\fR options specifying some version of \s-1ISO\s0 C have the same
-effects as \fB\-ansi\fR, except that features that were not in \s-1ISO\s0 C90
-but are in the specified version (for example, \fB//\fR comments and
-the \f(CW\*(C`inline\*(C'\fR keyword in \s-1ISO\s0 C99) are not disabled.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-aux\-info\fR \fIfilename\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-aux-info filename"
-Output to the given filename prototyped declarations for all functions
-declared and/or defined in a translation unit, including those in header
-files. This option is silently ignored in any language other than C.
-.Sp
-Besides declarations, the file indicates, in comments, the origin of
-each declaration (source file and line), whether the declaration was
-implicit, prototyped or unprototyped (\fBI\fR, \fBN\fR for new or
-\&\fBO\fR for old, respectively, in the first character after the line
-number and the colon), and whether it came from a declaration or a
-definition (\fBC\fR or \fBF\fR, respectively, in the following
-character). In the case of function definitions, a K&R\-style list of
-arguments followed by their declarations is also provided, inside
-comments, after the declaration.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-asm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-asm"
-Do not recognize \f(CW\*(C`asm\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`inline\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`typeof\*(C'\fR as a
-keyword, so that code can use these words as identifiers. You can use
-the keywords \f(CW\*(C`_\|_asm_\|_\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`_\|_inline_\|_\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`_\|_typeof_\|_\*(C'\fR
-instead. \fB\-ansi\fR implies \fB\-fno\-asm\fR.
-.Sp
-In \*(C+, this switch only affects the \f(CW\*(C`typeof\*(C'\fR keyword, since
-\&\f(CW\*(C`asm\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`inline\*(C'\fR are standard keywords. You may want to
-use the \fB\-fno\-gnu\-keywords\fR flag instead, which has the same
-effect. In C99 mode (\fB\-std=c99\fR or \fB\-std=gnu99\fR), this
-switch only affects the \f(CW\*(C`asm\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`typeof\*(C'\fR keywords, since
-\&\f(CW\*(C`inline\*(C'\fR is a standard keyword in \s-1ISO\s0 C99.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-builtin\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-builtin"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-builtin\-\fR\fIfunction\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-builtin-function"
-.PD
-Don't recognize built-in functions that do not begin with
-\&\fB_\|_builtin_\fR as prefix.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 normally generates special code to handle certain built-in functions
-more efficiently; for instance, calls to \f(CW\*(C`alloca\*(C'\fR may become single
-instructions that adjust the stack directly, and calls to \f(CW\*(C`memcpy\*(C'\fR
-may become inline copy loops. The resulting code is often both smaller
-and faster, but since the function calls no longer appear as such, you
-cannot set a breakpoint on those calls, nor can you change the behavior
-of the functions by linking with a different library.
-.Sp
-With the \fB\-fno\-builtin\-\fR\fIfunction\fR option
-only the built-in function \fIfunction\fR is
-disabled. \fIfunction\fR must not begin with \fB_\|_builtin_\fR. If a
-function is named this is not built-in in this version of \s-1GCC\s0, this
-option is ignored. There is no corresponding
-\&\fB\-fbuiltin\-\fR\fIfunction\fR option; if you wish to enable
-built-in functions selectively when using \fB\-fno\-builtin\fR or
-\&\fB\-ffreestanding\fR, you may define macros such as:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& #define abs(n) __builtin_abs ((n))
-\& #define strcpy(d, s) __builtin_strcpy ((d), (s))
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-fhosted\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fhosted"
-Assert that compilation takes place in a hosted environment. This implies
-\&\fB\-fbuiltin\fR. A hosted environment is one in which the
-entire standard library is available, and in which \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR has a return
-type of \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR. Examples are nearly everything except a kernel.
-This is equivalent to \fB\-fno\-freestanding\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-ffreestanding\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ffreestanding"
-Assert that compilation takes place in a freestanding environment. This
-implies \fB\-fno\-builtin\fR. A freestanding environment
-is one in which the standard library may not exist, and program startup may
-not necessarily be at \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR. The most obvious example is an \s-1OS\s0 kernel.
-This is equivalent to \fB\-fno\-hosted\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fms\-extensions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fms-extensions"
-Accept some non-standard constructs used in Microsoft header files.
-.IP "\fB\-trigraphs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-trigraphs"
-Support \s-1ISO\s0 C trigraphs. The \fB\-ansi\fR option (and \fB\-std\fR
-options for strict \s-1ISO\s0 C conformance) implies \fB\-trigraphs\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-no\-integrated\-cpp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-no-integrated-cpp"
-Performs a compilation in two passes: preprocessing and compiling. This
-option allows a user supplied \*(L"cc1\*(R", \*(L"cc1plus\*(R", or \*(L"cc1obj\*(R" via the
-\&\fB\-B\fR option. The user supplied compilation step can then add in
-an additional preprocessing step after normal preprocessing but before
-compiling. The default is to use the integrated cpp (internal cpp)
-.Sp
-The semantics of this option will change if \*(L"cc1\*(R", \*(L"cc1plus\*(R", and
-\&\*(L"cc1obj\*(R" are merged.
-.IP "\fB\-traditional\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-traditional"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-traditional\-cpp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-traditional-cpp"
-.PD
-Formerly, these options caused \s-1GCC\s0 to attempt to emulate a pre-standard
-C compiler. They are now only supported with the \fB\-E\fR switch.
-The preprocessor continues to support a pre-standard mode. See the \s-1GNU\s0
-\&\s-1CPP\s0 manual for details.
-.IP "\fB\-fcond\-mismatch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcond-mismatch"
-Allow conditional expressions with mismatched types in the second and
-third arguments. The value of such an expression is void. This option
-is not supported for \*(C+.
-.IP "\fB\-funsigned\-char\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-funsigned-char"
-Let the type \f(CW\*(C`char\*(C'\fR be unsigned, like \f(CW\*(C`unsigned char\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Each kind of machine has a default for what \f(CW\*(C`char\*(C'\fR should
-be. It is either like \f(CW\*(C`unsigned char\*(C'\fR by default or like
-\&\f(CW\*(C`signed char\*(C'\fR by default.
-.Sp
-Ideally, a portable program should always use \f(CW\*(C`signed char\*(C'\fR or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`unsigned char\*(C'\fR when it depends on the signedness of an object.
-But many programs have been written to use plain \f(CW\*(C`char\*(C'\fR and
-expect it to be signed, or expect it to be unsigned, depending on the
-machines they were written for. This option, and its inverse, let you
-make such a program work with the opposite default.
-.Sp
-The type \f(CW\*(C`char\*(C'\fR is always a distinct type from each of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`signed char\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`unsigned char\*(C'\fR, even though its behavior
-is always just like one of those two.
-.IP "\fB\-fsigned\-char\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsigned-char"
-Let the type \f(CW\*(C`char\*(C'\fR be signed, like \f(CW\*(C`signed char\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Note that this is equivalent to \fB\-fno\-unsigned\-char\fR, which is
-the negative form of \fB\-funsigned\-char\fR. Likewise, the option
-\&\fB\-fno\-signed\-char\fR is equivalent to \fB\-funsigned\-char\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fsigned\-bitfields\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsigned-bitfields"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-funsigned\-bitfields\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-funsigned-bitfields"
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-signed\-bitfields\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-signed-bitfields"
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-unsigned\-bitfields\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-unsigned-bitfields"
-.PD
-These options control whether a bit-field is signed or unsigned, when the
-declaration does not use either \f(CW\*(C`signed\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`unsigned\*(C'\fR. By
-default, such a bit-field is signed, because this is consistent: the
-basic integer types such as \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR are signed types.
-.IP "\fB\-fwritable\-strings\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fwritable-strings"
-Store string constants in the writable data segment and don't uniquize
-them. This is for compatibility with old programs which assume they can
-write into string constants.
-.Sp
-Writing into string constants is a very bad idea; ``constants'' should
-be constant.
-.Sh "Options Controlling \*(C+ Dialect"
-.IX Subsection "Options Controlling Dialect"
-This section describes the command-line options that are only meaningful
-for \*(C+ programs; but you can also use most of the \s-1GNU\s0 compiler options
-regardless of what language your program is in. For example, you
-might compile a file \f(CW\*(C`firstClass.C\*(C'\fR like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& g++ -g -frepo -O -c firstClass.C
-.Ve
-.PP
-In this example, only \fB\-frepo\fR is an option meant
-only for \*(C+ programs; you can use the other options with any
-language supported by \s-1GCC\s0.
-.PP
-Here is a list of options that are \fIonly\fR for compiling \*(C+ programs:
-.IP "\fB\-fabi\-version=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fabi-version=n"
-Use version \fIn\fR of the \*(C+ \s-1ABI\s0. Version 1 is the version of the \*(C+
-\&\s-1ABI\s0 that first appeared in G++ 3.2. Version 0 will always be the
-version that conforms most closely to the \*(C+ \s-1ABI\s0 specification.
-Therefore, the \s-1ABI\s0 obtained using version 0 will change as \s-1ABI\s0 bugs are
-fixed.
-.Sp
-The default is version 1.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-access\-control\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-access-control"
-Turn off all access checking. This switch is mainly useful for working
-around bugs in the access control code.
-.IP "\fB\-fcheck\-new\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcheck-new"
-Check that the pointer returned by \f(CW\*(C`operator new\*(C'\fR is non-null
-before attempting to modify the storage allocated. This check is
-normally unnecessary because the \*(C+ standard specifies that
-\&\f(CW\*(C`operator new\*(C'\fR will only return \f(CW0\fR if it is declared
-\&\fB\f(BIthrow()\fB\fR, in which case the compiler will always check the
-return value even without this option. In all other cases, when
-\&\f(CW\*(C`operator new\*(C'\fR has a non-empty exception specification, memory
-exhaustion is signalled by throwing \f(CW\*(C`std::bad_alloc\*(C'\fR. See also
-\&\fBnew (nothrow)\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fconserve\-space\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fconserve-space"
-Put uninitialized or runtime-initialized global variables into the
-common segment, as C does. This saves space in the executable at the
-cost of not diagnosing duplicate definitions. If you compile with this
-flag and your program mysteriously crashes after \f(CW\*(C`main()\*(C'\fR has
-completed, you may have an object that is being destroyed twice because
-two definitions were merged.
-.Sp
-This option is no longer useful on most targets, now that support has
-been added for putting variables into \s-1BSS\s0 without making them common.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-const\-strings\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-const-strings"
-Give string constants type \f(CW\*(C`char *\*(C'\fR instead of type \f(CW\*(C`const
-char *\*(C'\fR. By default, G++ uses type \f(CW\*(C`const char *\*(C'\fR as required by
-the standard. Even if you use \fB\-fno\-const\-strings\fR, you cannot
-actually modify the value of a string constant, unless you also use
-\&\fB\-fwritable\-strings\fR.
-.Sp
-This option might be removed in a future release of G++. For maximum
-portability, you should structure your code so that it works with
-string constants that have type \f(CW\*(C`const char *\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fdollars\-in\-identifiers\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fdollars-in-identifiers"
-Accept \fB$\fR in identifiers. You can also explicitly prohibit use of
-\&\fB$\fR with the option \fB\-fno\-dollars\-in\-identifiers\fR. (\s-1GNU\s0 C allows
-\&\fB$\fR by default on most target systems, but there are a few exceptions.)
-Traditional C allowed the character \fB$\fR to form part of
-identifiers. However, \s-1ISO\s0 C and \*(C+ forbid \fB$\fR in identifiers.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-elide\-constructors\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-elide-constructors"
-The \*(C+ standard allows an implementation to omit creating a temporary
-which is only used to initialize another object of the same type.
-Specifying this option disables that optimization, and forces G++ to
-call the copy constructor in all cases.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-enforce\-eh\-specs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-enforce-eh-specs"
-Don't check for violation of exception specifications at runtime. This
-option violates the \*(C+ standard, but may be useful for reducing code
-size in production builds, much like defining \fB\s-1NDEBUG\s0\fR. The compiler
-will still optimize based on the exception specifications.
-.IP "\fB\-fexternal\-templates\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fexternal-templates"
-Cause \fB#pragma interface\fR and \fBimplementation\fR to apply to
-template instantiation; template instances are emitted or not according
-to the location of the template definition.
-.Sp
-This option is deprecated.
-.IP "\fB\-falt\-external\-templates\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falt-external-templates"
-Similar to \fB\-fexternal\-templates\fR, but template instances are
-emitted or not according to the place where they are first instantiated.
-.Sp
-This option is deprecated.
-.IP "\fB\-ffor\-scope\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ffor-scope"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-for\-scope\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-for-scope"
-.PD
-If \fB\-ffor\-scope\fR is specified, the scope of variables declared in
-a \fIfor-init-statement\fR is limited to the \fBfor\fR loop itself,
-as specified by the \*(C+ standard.
-If \fB\-fno\-for\-scope\fR is specified, the scope of variables declared in
-a \fIfor-init-statement\fR extends to the end of the enclosing scope,
-as was the case in old versions of G++, and other (traditional)
-implementations of \*(C+.
-.Sp
-The default if neither flag is given to follow the standard,
-but to allow and give a warning for old-style code that would
-otherwise be invalid, or have different behavior.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-gnu\-keywords\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-gnu-keywords"
-Do not recognize \f(CW\*(C`typeof\*(C'\fR as a keyword, so that code can use this
-word as an identifier. You can use the keyword \f(CW\*(C`_\|_typeof_\|_\*(C'\fR instead.
-\&\fB\-ansi\fR implies \fB\-fno\-gnu\-keywords\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-implicit\-templates\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-implicit-templates"
-Never emit code for non-inline templates which are instantiated
-implicitly (i.e. by use); only emit code for explicit instantiations.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-implicit\-inline\-templates\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-implicit-inline-templates"
-Don't emit code for implicit instantiations of inline templates, either.
-The default is to handle inlines differently so that compiles with and
-without optimization will need the same set of explicit instantiations.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-implement\-inlines\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-implement-inlines"
-To save space, do not emit out-of-line copies of inline functions
-controlled by \fB#pragma implementation\fR. This will cause linker
-errors if these functions are not inlined everywhere they are called.
-.IP "\fB\-fms\-extensions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fms-extensions"
-Disable pedantic warnings about constructs used in \s-1MFC\s0, such as implicit
-int and getting a pointer to member function via non-standard syntax.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-nonansi\-builtins\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-nonansi-builtins"
-Disable built-in declarations of functions that are not mandated by
-\&\s-1ANSI/ISO\s0 C. These include \f(CW\*(C`ffs\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`alloca\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`_exit\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`index\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`bzero\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`conjf\*(C'\fR, and other related functions.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-operator\-names\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-operator-names"
-Do not treat the operator name keywords \f(CW\*(C`and\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`bitand\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`bitor\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`compl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`not\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`or\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`xor\*(C'\fR as
-synonyms as keywords.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-optional\-diags\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-optional-diags"
-Disable diagnostics that the standard says a compiler does not need to
-issue. Currently, the only such diagnostic issued by G++ is the one for
-a name having multiple meanings within a class.
-.IP "\fB\-fpermissive\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fpermissive"
-Downgrade some diagnostics about nonconformant code from errors to
-warnings. Thus, using \fB\-fpermissive\fR will allow some
-nonconforming code to compile.
-.IP "\fB\-frepo\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-frepo"
-Enable automatic template instantiation at link time. This option also
-implies \fB\-fno\-implicit\-templates\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-rtti\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-rtti"
-Disable generation of information about every class with virtual
-functions for use by the \*(C+ runtime type identification features
-(\fBdynamic_cast\fR and \fBtypeid\fR). If you don't use those parts
-of the language, you can save some space by using this flag. Note that
-exception handling uses the same information, but it will generate it as
-needed.
-.IP "\fB\-fstats\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fstats"
-Emit statistics about front-end processing at the end of the compilation.
-This information is generally only useful to the G++ development team.
-.IP "\fB\-ftemplate\-depth\-\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ftemplate-depth-n"
-Set the maximum instantiation depth for template classes to \fIn\fR.
-A limit on the template instantiation depth is needed to detect
-endless recursions during template class instantiation. \s-1ANSI/ISO\s0 \*(C+
-conforming programs must not rely on a maximum depth greater than 17.
-.IP "\fB\-fuse\-cxa\-atexit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fuse-cxa-atexit"
-Register destructors for objects with static storage duration with the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_cxa_atexit\*(C'\fR function rather than the \f(CW\*(C`atexit\*(C'\fR function.
-This option is required for fully standards-compliant handling of static
-destructors, but will only work if your C library supports
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_cxa_atexit\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fvtable\-gc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fvtable-gc"
-Emit special relocations for vtables and virtual function references
-so that the linker can identify unused virtual functions and zero out
-vtable slots that refer to them. This is most useful with
-\&\fB\-ffunction\-sections\fR and \fB\-Wl,\-\-gc\-sections\fR, in order to
-also discard the functions themselves.
-.Sp
-This optimization requires \s-1GNU\s0 as and \s-1GNU\s0 ld. Not all systems support
-this option. \fB\-Wl,\-\-gc\-sections\fR is ignored without \fB\-static\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-weak\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-weak"
-Do not use weak symbol support, even if it is provided by the linker.
-By default, G++ will use weak symbols if they are available. This
-option exists only for testing, and should not be used by end\-users;
-it will result in inferior code and has no benefits. This option may
-be removed in a future release of G++.
-.IP "\fB\-nostdinc++\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nostdinc++"
-Do not search for header files in the standard directories specific to
-\&\*(C+, but do still search the other standard directories. (This option
-is used when building the \*(C+ library.)
-.PP
-In addition, these optimization, warning, and code generation options
-have meanings only for \*(C+ programs:
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-default\-inline\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-default-inline"
-Do not assume \fBinline\fR for functions defined inside a class scope.
- Note that these
-functions will have linkage like inline functions; they just won't be
-inlined by default.
-.IP "\fB\-Wabi\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wabi ( only)"
-Warn when G++ generates code that is probably not compatible with the
-vendor-neutral \*(C+ \s-1ABI\s0. Although an effort has been made to warn about
-all such cases, there are probably some cases that are not warned about,
-even though G++ is generating incompatible code. There may also be
-cases where warnings are emitted even though the code that is generated
-will be compatible.
-.Sp
-You should rewrite your code to avoid these warnings if you are
-concerned about the fact that code generated by G++ may not be binary
-compatible with code generated by other compilers.
-.Sp
-The known incompatibilities at this point include:
-.RS 4
-.IP "*" 4
-Incorrect handling of tail-padding for bit\-fields. G++ may attempt to
-pack data into the same byte as a base class. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& struct A { virtual void f(); int f1 : 1; };
-\& struct B : public A { int f2 : 1; };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In this case, G++ will place \f(CW\*(C`B::f2\*(C'\fR into the same byte
-as\f(CW\*(C`A::f1\*(C'\fR; other compilers will not. You can avoid this problem
-by explicitly padding \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR so that its size is a multiple of the
-byte size on your platform; that will cause G++ and other compilers to
-layout \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR identically.
-.IP "*" 4
-Incorrect handling of tail-padding for virtual bases. G++ does not use
-tail padding when laying out virtual bases. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& struct A { virtual void f(); char c1; };
-\& struct B { B(); char c2; };
-\& struct C : public A, public virtual B {};
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In this case, G++ will not place \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR into the tail-padding for
-\&\f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR; other compilers will. You can avoid this problem by
-explicitly padding \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR so that its size is a multiple of its
-alignment (ignoring virtual base classes); that will cause G++ and other
-compilers to layout \f(CW\*(C`C\*(C'\fR identically.
-.IP "*" 4
-Incorrect handling of bit-fields with declared widths greater than that
-of their underlying types, when the bit-fields appear in a union. For
-example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& union U { int i : 4096; };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Assuming that an \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR does not have 4096 bits, G++ will make the
-union too small by the number of bits in an \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "*" 4
-Empty classes can be placed at incorrect offsets. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& struct A {};
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& struct B {
-\& A a;
-\& virtual void f ();
-\& };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& struct C : public B, public A {};
-.Ve
-.Sp
-G++ will place the \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR base class of \f(CW\*(C`C\*(C'\fR at a nonzero offset;
-it should be placed at offset zero. G++ mistakenly believes that the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR data member of \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR is already at offset zero.
-.IP "*" 4
-Names of template functions whose types involve \f(CW\*(C`typename\*(C'\fR or
-template template parameters can be mangled incorrectly.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& template <typename Q>
-\& void f(typename Q::X) {}
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& template <template <typename> class Q>
-\& void f(typename Q<int>::X) {}
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Instantiations of these templates may be mangled incorrectly.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-Wctor\-dtor\-privacy\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wctor-dtor-privacy ( only)"
-Warn when a class seems unusable because all the constructors or
-destructors in that class are private, and it has neither friends nor
-public static member functions. This warning is enabled by default.
-.IP "\fB\-Wnon\-virtual\-dtor\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wnon-virtual-dtor ( only)"
-Warn when a class appears to be polymorphic, thereby requiring a virtual
-destructor, yet it declares a non-virtual one.
-This warning is enabled by \fB\-Wall\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wreorder\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wreorder ( only)"
-Warn when the order of member initializers given in the code does not
-match the order in which they must be executed. For instance:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& struct A {
-\& int i;
-\& int j;
-\& A(): j (0), i (1) { }
-\& };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The compiler will rearrange the member initializers for \fBi\fR
-and \fBj\fR to match the declaration order of the members, emitting
-a warning to that effect. This warning is enabled by \fB\-Wall\fR.
-.PP
-The following \fB\-W...\fR options are not affected by \fB\-Wall\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Weffc++\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Weffc++ ( only)"
-Warn about violations of the following style guidelines from Scott Meyers'
-\&\fIEffective \*(C+\fR book:
-.RS 4
-.IP "*" 4
-Item 11: Define a copy constructor and an assignment operator for classes
-with dynamically allocated memory.
-.IP "*" 4
-Item 12: Prefer initialization to assignment in constructors.
-.IP "*" 4
-Item 14: Make destructors virtual in base classes.
-.IP "*" 4
-Item 15: Have \f(CW\*(C`operator=\*(C'\fR return a reference to \f(CW*this\fR.
-.IP "*" 4
-Item 23: Don't try to return a reference when you must return an object.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-Also warn about violations of the following style guidelines from
-Scott Meyers' \fIMore Effective \*(C+\fR book:
-.IP "*" 4
-Item 6: Distinguish between prefix and postfix forms of increment and
-decrement operators.
-.IP "*" 4
-Item 7: Never overload \f(CW\*(C`&&\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`||\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`,\*(C'\fR.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-When selecting this option, be aware that the standard library
-headers do not obey all of these guidelines; use \fBgrep \-v\fR
-to filter out those warnings.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-deprecated\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-deprecated ( only)"
-Do not warn about usage of deprecated features.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-non\-template\-friend\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-non-template-friend ( only)"
-Disable warnings when non-templatized friend functions are declared
-within a template. Since the advent of explicit template specification
-support in G++, if the name of the friend is an unqualified-id (i.e.,
-\&\fBfriend foo(int)\fR), the \*(C+ language specification demands that the
-friend declare or define an ordinary, nontemplate function. (Section
-14.5.3). Before G++ implemented explicit specification, unqualified-ids
-could be interpreted as a particular specialization of a templatized
-function. Because this non-conforming behavior is no longer the default
-behavior for G++, \fB\-Wnon\-template\-friend\fR allows the compiler to
-check existing code for potential trouble spots and is on by default.
-This new compiler behavior can be turned off with
-\&\fB\-Wno\-non\-template\-friend\fR which keeps the conformant compiler code
-but disables the helpful warning.
-.IP "\fB\-Wold\-style\-cast\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wold-style-cast ( only)"
-Warn if an old-style (C\-style) cast to a non-void type is used within
-a \*(C+ program. The new-style casts (\fBstatic_cast\fR,
-\&\fBreinterpret_cast\fR, and \fBconst_cast\fR) are less vulnerable to
-unintended effects and much easier to search for.
-.IP "\fB\-Woverloaded\-virtual\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Woverloaded-virtual ( only)"
-Warn when a function declaration hides virtual functions from a
-base class. For example, in:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& struct A {
-\& virtual void f();
-\& };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& struct B: public A {
-\& void f(int);
-\& };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-the \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR class version of \f(CW\*(C`f\*(C'\fR is hidden in \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR, and code
-like:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& B* b;
-\& b->f();
-.Ve
-.Sp
-will fail to compile.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-pmf\-conversions\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-pmf-conversions ( only)"
-Disable the diagnostic for converting a bound pointer to member function
-to a plain pointer.
-.IP "\fB\-Wsign\-promo\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wsign-promo ( only)"
-Warn when overload resolution chooses a promotion from unsigned or
-enumeral type to a signed type, over a conversion to an unsigned type of
-the same size. Previous versions of G++ would try to preserve
-unsignedness, but the standard mandates the current behavior.
-.IP "\fB\-Wsynth\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wsynth ( only)"
-Warn when G++'s synthesis behavior does not match that of cfront. For
-instance:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& struct A {
-\& operator int ();
-\& A& operator = (int);
-\& };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& main ()
-\& {
-\& A a,b;
-\& a = b;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In this example, G++ will synthesize a default \fBA& operator =
-(const A&);\fR, while cfront will use the user-defined \fBoperator =\fR.
-.Sh "Options Controlling Objective-C Dialect"
-.IX Subsection "Options Controlling Objective-C Dialect"
-This section describes the command-line options that are only meaningful
-for Objective-C programs, but you can also use most of the \s-1GNU\s0 compiler
-options regardless of what language your program is in. For example,
-you might compile a file \f(CW\*(C`some_class.m\*(C'\fR like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& gcc -g -fgnu-runtime -O -c some_class.m
-.Ve
-.PP
-In this example, \fB\-fgnu\-runtime\fR is an option meant only for
-Objective-C programs; you can use the other options with any language
-supported by \s-1GCC\s0.
-.PP
-Here is a list of options that are \fIonly\fR for compiling Objective-C
-programs:
-.IP "\fB\-fconstant\-string\-class=\fR\fIclass-name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fconstant-string-class=class-name"
-Use \fIclass-name\fR as the name of the class to instantiate for each
-literal string specified with the syntax \f(CW\*(C`@"..."\*(C'\fR. The default
-class name is \f(CW\*(C`NXConstantString\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fgnu\-runtime\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fgnu-runtime"
-Generate object code compatible with the standard \s-1GNU\s0 Objective-C
-runtime. This is the default for most types of systems.
-.IP "\fB\-fnext\-runtime\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fnext-runtime"
-Generate output compatible with the NeXT runtime. This is the default
-for NeXT-based systems, including Darwin and Mac \s-1OS\s0 X. The macro
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_NEXT_RUNTIME_\|_\*(C'\fR is predefined if (and only if) this option is
-used.
-.IP "\fB\-gen\-decls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gen-decls"
-Dump interface declarations for all classes seen in the source file to a
-file named \fI\fIsourcename\fI.decl\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-protocol\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-protocol"
-If a class is declared to implement a protocol, a warning is issued for
-every method in the protocol that is not implemented by the class. The
-default behavior is to issue a warning for every method not explicitly
-implemented in the class, even if a method implementation is inherited
-from the superclass. If you use the \f(CW\*(C`\-Wno\-protocol\*(C'\fR option, then
-methods inherited from the superclass are considered to be implemented,
-and no warning is issued for them.
-.IP "\fB\-Wselector\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wselector"
-Warn if multiple methods of different types for the same selector are
-found during compilation. The check is performed on the list of methods
-in the final stage of compilation. Additionally, a check is performed
-for each selector appearing in a \f(CW\*(C`@selector(...)\*(C'\fR
-expression, and a corresponding method for that selector has been found
-during compilation. Because these checks scan the method table only at
-the end of compilation, these warnings are not produced if the final
-stage of compilation is not reached, for example because an error is
-found during compilation, or because the \f(CW\*(C`\-fsyntax\-only\*(C'\fR option is
-being used.
-.IP "\fB\-Wundeclared\-selector\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wundeclared-selector"
-Warn if a \f(CW\*(C`@selector(...)\*(C'\fR expression referring to an
-undeclared selector is found. A selector is considered undeclared if no
-method with that name has been declared before the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`@selector(...)\*(C'\fR expression, either explicitly in an
-\&\f(CW at interface\fR or \f(CW at protocol\fR declaration, or implicitly in
-an \f(CW at implementation\fR section. This option always performs its
-checks as soon as a \f(CW\*(C`@selector(...)\*(C'\fR expression is found,
-while \f(CW\*(C`\-Wselector\*(C'\fR only performs its checks in the final stage of
-compilation. This also enforces the coding style convention
-that methods and selectors must be declared before being used.
-.Sh "Options to Control Diagnostic Messages Formatting"
-.IX Subsection "Options to Control Diagnostic Messages Formatting"
-Traditionally, diagnostic messages have been formatted irrespective of
-the output device's aspect (e.g. its width, ...). The options described
-below can be used to control the diagnostic messages formatting
-algorithm, e.g. how many characters per line, how often source location
-information should be reported. Right now, only the \*(C+ front end can
-honor these options. However it is expected, in the near future, that
-the remaining front ends would be able to digest them correctly.
-.IP "\fB\-fmessage\-length=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fmessage-length=n"
-Try to format error messages so that they fit on lines of about \fIn\fR
-characters. The default is 72 characters for \fBg++\fR and 0 for the rest of
-the front ends supported by \s-1GCC\s0. If \fIn\fR is zero, then no
-line-wrapping will be done; each error message will appear on a single
-line.
-.IP "\fB\-fdiagnostics\-show\-location=once\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fdiagnostics-show-location=once"
-Only meaningful in line-wrapping mode. Instructs the diagnostic messages
-reporter to emit \fIonce\fR source location information; that is, in
-case the message is too long to fit on a single physical line and has to
-be wrapped, the source location won't be emitted (as prefix) again,
-over and over, in subsequent continuation lines. This is the default
-behavior.
-.IP "\fB\-fdiagnostics\-show\-location=every\-line\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fdiagnostics-show-location=every-line"
-Only meaningful in line-wrapping mode. Instructs the diagnostic
-messages reporter to emit the same source location information (as
-prefix) for physical lines that result from the process of breaking
-a message which is too long to fit on a single line.
-.Sh "Options to Request or Suppress Warnings"
-.IX Subsection "Options to Request or Suppress Warnings"
-Warnings are diagnostic messages that report constructions which
-are not inherently erroneous but which are risky or suggest there
-may have been an error.
-.PP
-You can request many specific warnings with options beginning \fB\-W\fR,
-for example \fB\-Wimplicit\fR to request warnings on implicit
-declarations. Each of these specific warning options also has a
-negative form beginning \fB\-Wno\-\fR to turn off warnings;
-for example, \fB\-Wno\-implicit\fR. This manual lists only one of the
-two forms, whichever is not the default.
-.PP
-The following options control the amount and kinds of warnings produced
-by \s-1GCC\s0; for further, language-specific options also refer to
-\&\f(CW at ref\fR{\*(C+ Dialect Options} and \f(CW at ref\fR{Objective\-C Dialect Options}.
-.IP "\fB\-fsyntax\-only\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsyntax-only"
-Check the code for syntax errors, but don't do anything beyond that.
-.IP "\fB\-pedantic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pedantic"
-Issue all the warnings demanded by strict \s-1ISO\s0 C and \s-1ISO\s0 \*(C+;
-reject all programs that use forbidden extensions, and some other
-programs that do not follow \s-1ISO\s0 C and \s-1ISO\s0 \*(C+. For \s-1ISO\s0 C, follows the
-version of the \s-1ISO\s0 C standard specified by any \fB\-std\fR option used.
-.Sp
-Valid \s-1ISO\s0 C and \s-1ISO\s0 \*(C+ programs should compile properly with or without
-this option (though a rare few will require \fB\-ansi\fR or a
-\&\fB\-std\fR option specifying the required version of \s-1ISO\s0 C). However,
-without this option, certain \s-1GNU\s0 extensions and traditional C and \*(C+
-features are supported as well. With this option, they are rejected.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-pedantic\fR does not cause warning messages for use of the
-alternate keywords whose names begin and end with \fB_\|_\fR. Pedantic
-warnings are also disabled in the expression that follows
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_extension_\|_\*(C'\fR. However, only system header files should use
-these escape routes; application programs should avoid them.
-.Sp
-Some users try to use \fB\-pedantic\fR to check programs for strict \s-1ISO\s0
-C conformance. They soon find that it does not do quite what they want:
-it finds some non-ISO practices, but not all\-\-\-only those for which
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 C \fIrequires\fR a diagnostic, and some others for which
-diagnostics have been added.
-.Sp
-A feature to report any failure to conform to \s-1ISO\s0 C might be useful in
-some instances, but would require considerable additional work and would
-be quite different from \fB\-pedantic\fR. We don't have plans to
-support such a feature in the near future.
-.Sp
-Where the standard specified with \fB\-std\fR represents a \s-1GNU\s0
-extended dialect of C, such as \fBgnu89\fR or \fBgnu99\fR, there is a
-corresponding \fIbase standard\fR, the version of \s-1ISO\s0 C on which the \s-1GNU\s0
-extended dialect is based. Warnings from \fB\-pedantic\fR are given
-where they are required by the base standard. (It would not make sense
-for such warnings to be given only for features not in the specified \s-1GNU\s0
-C dialect, since by definition the \s-1GNU\s0 dialects of C include all
-features the compiler supports with the given option, and there would be
-nothing to warn about.)
-.IP "\fB\-pedantic\-errors\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pedantic-errors"
-Like \fB\-pedantic\fR, except that errors are produced rather than
-warnings.
-.IP "\fB\-w\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-w"
-Inhibit all warning messages.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-import\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-import"
-Inhibit warning messages about the use of \fB#import\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wchar\-subscripts\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wchar-subscripts"
-Warn if an array subscript has type \f(CW\*(C`char\*(C'\fR. This is a common cause
-of error, as programmers often forget that this type is signed on some
-machines.
-.IP "\fB\-Wcomment\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wcomment"
-Warn whenever a comment-start sequence \fB/*\fR appears in a \fB/*\fR
-comment, or whenever a Backslash-Newline appears in a \fB//\fR comment.
-.IP "\fB\-Wformat\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wformat"
-Check calls to \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`scanf\*(C'\fR, etc., to make sure that
-the arguments supplied have types appropriate to the format string
-specified, and that the conversions specified in the format string make
-sense. This includes standard functions, and others specified by format
-attributes, in the \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`scanf\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`strftime\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`strfmon\*(C'\fR (an X/Open extension,
-not in the C standard) families.
-.Sp
-The formats are checked against the format features supported by \s-1GNU\s0
-libc version 2.2. These include all \s-1ISO\s0 C90 and C99 features, as well
-as features from the Single Unix Specification and some \s-1BSD\s0 and \s-1GNU\s0
-extensions. Other library implementations may not support all these
-features; \s-1GCC\s0 does not support warning about features that go beyond a
-particular library's limitations. However, if \fB\-pedantic\fR is used
-with \fB\-Wformat\fR, warnings will be given about format features not
-in the selected standard version (but not for \f(CW\*(C`strfmon\*(C'\fR formats,
-since those are not in any version of the C standard).
-.Sp
-Since \fB\-Wformat\fR also checks for null format arguments for
-several functions, \fB\-Wformat\fR also implies \fB\-Wnonnull\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-Wformat\fR is included in \fB\-Wall\fR. For more control over some
-aspects of format checking, the options \fB\-Wno\-format\-y2k\fR,
-\&\fB\-Wno\-format\-extra\-args\fR, \fB\-Wno\-format\-zero\-length\fR,
-\&\fB\-Wformat\-nonliteral\fR, \fB\-Wformat\-security\fR, and
-\&\fB\-Wformat=2\fR are available, but are not included in \fB\-Wall\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-format\-y2k\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-format-y2k"
-If \fB\-Wformat\fR is specified, do not warn about \f(CW\*(C`strftime\*(C'\fR
-formats which may yield only a two-digit year.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-format\-extra\-args\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-format-extra-args"
-If \fB\-Wformat\fR is specified, do not warn about excess arguments to a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`scanf\*(C'\fR format function. The C standard specifies
-that such arguments are ignored.
-.Sp
-Where the unused arguments lie between used arguments that are
-specified with \fB$\fR operand number specifications, normally
-warnings are still given, since the implementation could not know what
-type to pass to \f(CW\*(C`va_arg\*(C'\fR to skip the unused arguments. However,
-in the case of \f(CW\*(C`scanf\*(C'\fR formats, this option will suppress the
-warning if the unused arguments are all pointers, since the Single
-Unix Specification says that such unused arguments are allowed.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-format\-zero\-length\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-format-zero-length"
-If \fB\-Wformat\fR is specified, do not warn about zero-length formats.
-The C standard specifies that zero-length formats are allowed.
-.IP "\fB\-Wformat\-nonliteral\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wformat-nonliteral"
-If \fB\-Wformat\fR is specified, also warn if the format string is not a
-string literal and so cannot be checked, unless the format function
-takes its format arguments as a \f(CW\*(C`va_list\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wformat\-security\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wformat-security"
-If \fB\-Wformat\fR is specified, also warn about uses of format
-functions that represent possible security problems. At present, this
-warns about calls to \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`scanf\*(C'\fR functions where the
-format string is not a string literal and there are no format arguments,
-as in \f(CW\*(C`printf (foo);\*(C'\fR. This may be a security hole if the format
-string came from untrusted input and contains \fB%n\fR. (This is
-currently a subset of what \fB\-Wformat\-nonliteral\fR warns about, but
-in future warnings may be added to \fB\-Wformat\-security\fR that are not
-included in \fB\-Wformat\-nonliteral\fR.)
-.IP "\fB\-Wformat=2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wformat=2"
-Enable \fB\-Wformat\fR plus format checks not included in
-\&\fB\-Wformat\fR. Currently equivalent to \fB\-Wformat
-\&\-Wformat\-nonliteral \-Wformat\-security\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wnonnull\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wnonnull"
-Enable warning about passing a null pointer for arguments marked as
-requiring a non-null value by the \f(CW\*(C`nonnull\*(C'\fR function attribute.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-Wnonnull\fR is included in \fB\-Wall\fR and \fB\-Wformat\fR. It
-can be disabled with the \fB\-Wno\-nonnull\fR option.
-.IP "\fB\-Wimplicit\-int\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wimplicit-int"
-Warn when a declaration does not specify a type.
-.IP "\fB\-Wimplicit\-function\-declaration\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wimplicit-function-declaration"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-Werror\-implicit\-function\-declaration\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Werror-implicit-function-declaration"
-.PD
-Give a warning (or error) whenever a function is used before being
-declared.
-.IP "\fB\-Wimplicit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wimplicit"
-Same as \fB\-Wimplicit\-int\fR and \fB\-Wimplicit\-function\-declaration\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wmain\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wmain"
-Warn if the type of \fBmain\fR is suspicious. \fBmain\fR should be a
-function with external linkage, returning int, taking either zero
-arguments, two, or three arguments of appropriate types.
-.IP "\fB\-Wmissing\-braces\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wmissing-braces"
-Warn if an aggregate or union initializer is not fully bracketed. In
-the following example, the initializer for \fBa\fR is not fully
-bracketed, but that for \fBb\fR is fully bracketed.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& int a[2][2] = { 0, 1, 2, 3 };
-\& int b[2][2] = { { 0, 1 }, { 2, 3 } };
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-Wparentheses\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wparentheses"
-Warn if parentheses are omitted in certain contexts, such
-as when there is an assignment in a context where a truth value
-is expected, or when operators are nested whose precedence people
-often get confused about.
-.Sp
-Also warn about constructions where there may be confusion to which
-\&\f(CW\*(C`if\*(C'\fR statement an \f(CW\*(C`else\*(C'\fR branch belongs. Here is an example of
-such a case:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& {
-\& if (a)
-\& if (b)
-\& foo ();
-\& else
-\& bar ();
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In C, every \f(CW\*(C`else\*(C'\fR branch belongs to the innermost possible \f(CW\*(C`if\*(C'\fR
-statement, which in this example is \f(CW\*(C`if (b)\*(C'\fR. This is often not
-what the programmer expected, as illustrated in the above example by
-indentation the programmer chose. When there is the potential for this
-confusion, \s-1GCC\s0 will issue a warning when this flag is specified.
-To eliminate the warning, add explicit braces around the innermost
-\&\f(CW\*(C`if\*(C'\fR statement so there is no way the \f(CW\*(C`else\*(C'\fR could belong to
-the enclosing \f(CW\*(C`if\*(C'\fR. The resulting code would look like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& {
-\& if (a)
-\& {
-\& if (b)
-\& foo ();
-\& else
-\& bar ();
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-Wsequence\-point\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wsequence-point"
-Warn about code that may have undefined semantics because of violations
-of sequence point rules in the C standard.
-.Sp
-The C standard defines the order in which expressions in a C program are
-evaluated in terms of \fIsequence points\fR, which represent a partial
-ordering between the execution of parts of the program: those executed
-before the sequence point, and those executed after it. These occur
-after the evaluation of a full expression (one which is not part of a
-larger expression), after the evaluation of the first operand of a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`&&\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`||\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`? :\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`,\*(C'\fR (comma) operator, before a
-function is called (but after the evaluation of its arguments and the
-expression denoting the called function), and in certain other places.
-Other than as expressed by the sequence point rules, the order of
-evaluation of subexpressions of an expression is not specified. All
-these rules describe only a partial order rather than a total order,
-since, for example, if two functions are called within one expression
-with no sequence point between them, the order in which the functions
-are called is not specified. However, the standards committee have
-ruled that function calls do not overlap.
-.Sp
-It is not specified when between sequence points modifications to the
-values of objects take effect. Programs whose behavior depends on this
-have undefined behavior; the C standard specifies that ``Between the
-previous and next sequence point an object shall have its stored value
-modified at most once by the evaluation of an expression. Furthermore,
-the prior value shall be read only to determine the value to be
-stored.''. If a program breaks these rules, the results on any
-particular implementation are entirely unpredictable.
-.Sp
-Examples of code with undefined behavior are \f(CW\*(C`a = a++;\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`a[n]
-= b[n++]\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`a[i++] = i;\*(C'\fR. Some more complicated cases are not
-diagnosed by this option, and it may give an occasional false positive
-result, but in general it has been found fairly effective at detecting
-this sort of problem in programs.
-.Sp
-The present implementation of this option only works for C programs. A
-future implementation may also work for \*(C+ programs.
-.Sp
-The C standard is worded confusingly, therefore there is some debate
-over the precise meaning of the sequence point rules in subtle cases.
-Links to discussions of the problem, including proposed formal
-definitions, may be found on our readings page, at
-<\fBhttp://gcc.gnu.org/readings.html\fR>.
-.IP "\fB\-Wreturn\-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wreturn-type"
-Warn whenever a function is defined with a return-type that defaults to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR. Also warn about any \f(CW\*(C`return\*(C'\fR statement with no
-return-value in a function whose return-type is not \f(CW\*(C`void\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-For \*(C+, a function without return type always produces a diagnostic
-message, even when \fB\-Wno\-return\-type\fR is specified. The only
-exceptions are \fBmain\fR and functions defined in system headers.
-.IP "\fB\-Wswitch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wswitch"
-Warn whenever a \f(CW\*(C`switch\*(C'\fR statement has an index of enumeral type
-and lacks a \f(CW\*(C`case\*(C'\fR for one or more of the named codes of that
-enumeration. (The presence of a \f(CW\*(C`default\*(C'\fR label prevents this
-warning.) \f(CW\*(C`case\*(C'\fR labels outside the enumeration range also
-provoke warnings when this option is used.
-.IP "\fB\-Wswitch\-default\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wswitch-default"
-Warn whenever a \f(CW\*(C`switch\*(C'\fR statement does not have a \f(CW\*(C`default\*(C'\fR
-case.
-.IP "\fB\-Wswitch\-enum\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wswitch-enum"
-Warn whenever a \f(CW\*(C`switch\*(C'\fR statement has an index of enumeral type
-and lacks a \f(CW\*(C`case\*(C'\fR for one or more of the named codes of that
-enumeration. \f(CW\*(C`case\*(C'\fR labels outside the enumeration range also
-provoke warnings when this option is used.
-.IP "\fB\-Wtrigraphs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wtrigraphs"
-Warn if any trigraphs are encountered that might change the meaning of
-the program (trigraphs within comments are not warned about).
-.IP "\fB\-Wunused\-function\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunused-function"
-Warn whenever a static function is declared but not defined or a
-non\e\-inline static function is unused.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunused\-label\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunused-label"
-Warn whenever a label is declared but not used.
-.Sp
-To suppress this warning use the \fBunused\fR attribute.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunused\-parameter\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunused-parameter"
-Warn whenever a function parameter is unused aside from its declaration.
-.Sp
-To suppress this warning use the \fBunused\fR attribute.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunused\-variable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunused-variable"
-Warn whenever a local variable or non-constant static variable is unused
-aside from its declaration
-.Sp
-To suppress this warning use the \fBunused\fR attribute.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunused\-value\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunused-value"
-Warn whenever a statement computes a result that is explicitly not used.
-.Sp
-To suppress this warning cast the expression to \fBvoid\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunused\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunused"
-All the above \fB\-Wunused\fR options combined.
-.Sp
-In order to get a warning about an unused function parameter, you must
-either specify \fB\-W \-Wunused\fR or separately specify
-\&\fB\-Wunused\-parameter\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wuninitialized\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wuninitialized"
-Warn if an automatic variable is used without first being initialized or
-if a variable may be clobbered by a \f(CW\*(C`setjmp\*(C'\fR call.
-.Sp
-These warnings are possible only in optimizing compilation,
-because they require data flow information that is computed only
-when optimizing. If you don't specify \fB\-O\fR, you simply won't
-get these warnings.
-.Sp
-These warnings occur only for variables that are candidates for
-register allocation. Therefore, they do not occur for a variable that
-is declared \f(CW\*(C`volatile\*(C'\fR, or whose address is taken, or whose size
-is other than 1, 2, 4 or 8 bytes. Also, they do not occur for
-structures, unions or arrays, even when they are in registers.
-.Sp
-Note that there may be no warning about a variable that is used only
-to compute a value that itself is never used, because such
-computations may be deleted by data flow analysis before the warnings
-are printed.
-.Sp
-These warnings are made optional because \s-1GCC\s0 is not smart
-enough to see all the reasons why the code might be correct
-despite appearing to have an error. Here is one example of how
-this can happen:
-.Sp
-.Vb 12
-\& {
-\& int x;
-\& switch (y)
-\& {
-\& case 1: x = 1;
-\& break;
-\& case 2: x = 4;
-\& break;
-\& case 3: x = 5;
-\& }
-\& foo (x);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If the value of \f(CW\*(C`y\*(C'\fR is always 1, 2 or 3, then \f(CW\*(C`x\*(C'\fR is
-always initialized, but \s-1GCC\s0 doesn't know this. Here is
-another common case:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& {
-\& int save_y;
-\& if (change_y) save_y = y, y = new_y;
-\& ...
-\& if (change_y) y = save_y;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This has no bug because \f(CW\*(C`save_y\*(C'\fR is used only if it is set.
-.Sp
-This option also warns when a non-volatile automatic variable might be
-changed by a call to \f(CW\*(C`longjmp\*(C'\fR. These warnings as well are possible
-only in optimizing compilation.
-.Sp
-The compiler sees only the calls to \f(CW\*(C`setjmp\*(C'\fR. It cannot know
-where \f(CW\*(C`longjmp\*(C'\fR will be called; in fact, a signal handler could
-call it at any point in the code. As a result, you may get a warning
-even when there is in fact no problem because \f(CW\*(C`longjmp\*(C'\fR cannot
-in fact be called at the place which would cause a problem.
-.Sp
-Some spurious warnings can be avoided if you declare all the functions
-you use that never return as \f(CW\*(C`noreturn\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunknown\-pragmas\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunknown-pragmas"
-Warn when a #pragma directive is encountered which is not understood by
-\&\s-1GCC\s0. If this command line option is used, warnings will even be issued
-for unknown pragmas in system header files. This is not the case if
-the warnings were only enabled by the \fB\-Wall\fR command line option.
-.IP "\fB\-Wstrict\-aliasing\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wstrict-aliasing"
-This option is only active when \fB\-fstrict\-aliasing\fR is active.
-It warns about code which might break the strict aliasing rules that the
-compiler is using for optimization. The warning does not catch all
-cases, but does attempt to catch the more common pitfalls. It is
-included in \fB\-Wall\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wall\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wall"
-All of the above \fB\-W\fR options combined. This enables all the
-warnings about constructions that some users consider questionable, and
-that are easy to avoid (or modify to prevent the warning), even in
-conjunction with macros. This also enables some language-specific
-warnings described in \f(CW at ref\fR{\*(C+ Dialect Options} and
-\&\f(CW at ref\fR{Objective\-C Dialect Options}.
-.PP
-The following \fB\-W...\fR options are not implied by \fB\-Wall\fR.
-Some of them warn about constructions that users generally do not
-consider questionable, but which occasionally you might wish to check
-for; others warn about constructions that are necessary or hard to avoid
-in some cases, and there is no simple way to modify the code to suppress
-the warning.
-.IP "\fB\-W\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-W"
-Print extra warning messages for these events:
-.RS 4
-.IP "*" 4
-A function can return either with or without a value. (Falling
-off the end of the function body is considered returning without
-a value.) For example, this function would evoke such a
-warning:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& foo (a)
-\& {
-\& if (a > 0)
-\& return a;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "*" 4
-An expression-statement or the left-hand side of a comma expression
-contains no side effects.
-To suppress the warning, cast the unused expression to void.
-For example, an expression such as \fBx[i,j]\fR will cause a warning,
-but \fBx[(void)i,j]\fR will not.
-.IP "*" 4
-An unsigned value is compared against zero with \fB<\fR or \fB>=\fR.
-.IP "*" 4
-A comparison like \fBx<=y<=z\fR appears; this is equivalent to
-\&\fB(x<=y ? 1 : 0) <= z\fR, which is a different interpretation from
-that of ordinary mathematical notation.
-.IP "*" 4
-Storage-class specifiers like \f(CW\*(C`static\*(C'\fR are not the first things in
-a declaration. According to the C Standard, this usage is obsolescent.
-.IP "*" 4
-The return type of a function has a type qualifier such as \f(CW\*(C`const\*(C'\fR.
-Such a type qualifier has no effect, since the value returned by a
-function is not an lvalue. (But don't warn about the \s-1GNU\s0 extension of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`volatile void\*(C'\fR return types. That extension will be warned about
-if \fB\-pedantic\fR is specified.)
-.IP "*" 4
-If \fB\-Wall\fR or \fB\-Wunused\fR is also specified, warn about unused
-arguments.
-.IP "*" 4
-A comparison between signed and unsigned values could produce an
-incorrect result when the signed value is converted to unsigned.
-(But don't warn if \fB\-Wno\-sign\-compare\fR is also specified.)
-.IP "*" 4
-An aggregate has a partly bracketed initializer.
-For example, the following code would evoke such a warning,
-because braces are missing around the initializer for \f(CW\*(C`x.h\*(C'\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& struct s { int f, g; };
-\& struct t { struct s h; int i; };
-\& struct t x = { 1, 2, 3 };
-.Ve
-.IP "*" 4
-An aggregate has an initializer which does not initialize all members.
-For example, the following code would cause such a warning, because
-\&\f(CW\*(C`x.h\*(C'\fR would be implicitly initialized to zero:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& struct s { int f, g, h; };
-\& struct s x = { 3, 4 };
-.Ve
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-div\-by\-zero\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-div-by-zero"
-Do not warn about compile-time integer division by zero. Floating point
-division by zero is not warned about, as it can be a legitimate way of
-obtaining infinities and NaNs.
-.IP "\fB\-Wsystem\-headers\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wsystem-headers"
-Print warning messages for constructs found in system header files.
-Warnings from system headers are normally suppressed, on the assumption
-that they usually do not indicate real problems and would only make the
-compiler output harder to read. Using this command line option tells
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 to emit warnings from system headers as if they occurred in user
-code. However, note that using \fB\-Wall\fR in conjunction with this
-option will \fInot\fR warn about unknown pragmas in system
-headers\-\-\-for that, \fB\-Wunknown\-pragmas\fR must also be used.
-.IP "\fB\-Wfloat\-equal\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wfloat-equal"
-Warn if floating point values are used in equality comparisons.
-.Sp
-The idea behind this is that sometimes it is convenient (for the
-programmer) to consider floating-point values as approximations to
-infinitely precise real numbers. If you are doing this, then you need
-to compute (by analyzing the code, or in some other way) the maximum or
-likely maximum error that the computation introduces, and allow for it
-when performing comparisons (and when producing output, but that's a
-different problem). In particular, instead of testing for equality, you
-would check to see whether the two values have ranges that overlap; and
-this is done with the relational operators, so equality comparisons are
-probably mistaken.
-.IP "\fB\-Wtraditional\fR (C only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wtraditional (C only)"
-Warn about certain constructs that behave differently in traditional and
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 C. Also warn about \s-1ISO\s0 C constructs that have no traditional C
-equivalent, and/or problematic constructs which should be avoided.
-.RS 4
-.IP "*" 4
-Macro parameters that appear within string literals in the macro body.
-In traditional C macro replacement takes place within string literals,
-but does not in \s-1ISO\s0 C.
-.IP "*" 4
-In traditional C, some preprocessor directives did not exist.
-Traditional preprocessors would only consider a line to be a directive
-if the \fB#\fR appeared in column 1 on the line. Therefore
-\&\fB\-Wtraditional\fR warns about directives that traditional C
-understands but would ignore because the \fB#\fR does not appear as the
-first character on the line. It also suggests you hide directives like
-\&\fB#pragma\fR not understood by traditional C by indenting them. Some
-traditional implementations would not recognize \fB#elif\fR, so it
-suggests avoiding it altogether.
-.IP "*" 4
-A function-like macro that appears without arguments.
-.IP "*" 4
-The unary plus operator.
-.IP "*" 4
-The \fBU\fR integer constant suffix, or the \fBF\fR or \fBL\fR floating point
-constant suffixes. (Traditional C does support the \fBL\fR suffix on integer
-constants.) Note, these suffixes appear in macros defined in the system
-headers of most modern systems, e.g. the \fB_MIN\fR/\fB_MAX\fR macros in \f(CW\*(C`<limits.h>\*(C'\fR.
-Use of these macros in user code might normally lead to spurious
-warnings, however gcc's integrated preprocessor has enough context to
-avoid warning in these cases.
-.IP "*" 4
-A function declared external in one block and then used after the end of
-the block.
-.IP "*" 4
-A \f(CW\*(C`switch\*(C'\fR statement has an operand of type \f(CW\*(C`long\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "*" 4
-A non\-\f(CW\*(C`static\*(C'\fR function declaration follows a \f(CW\*(C`static\*(C'\fR one.
-This construct is not accepted by some traditional C compilers.
-.IP "*" 4
-The \s-1ISO\s0 type of an integer constant has a different width or
-signedness from its traditional type. This warning is only issued if
-the base of the constant is ten. I.e. hexadecimal or octal values, which
-typically represent bit patterns, are not warned about.
-.IP "*" 4
-Usage of \s-1ISO\s0 string concatenation is detected.
-.IP "*" 4
-Initialization of automatic aggregates.
-.IP "*" 4
-Identifier conflicts with labels. Traditional C lacks a separate
-namespace for labels.
-.IP "*" 4
-Initialization of unions. If the initializer is zero, the warning is
-omitted. This is done under the assumption that the zero initializer in
-user code appears conditioned on e.g. \f(CW\*(C`_\|_STDC_\|_\*(C'\fR to avoid missing
-initializer warnings and relies on default initialization to zero in the
-traditional C case.
-.IP "*" 4
-Conversions by prototypes between fixed/floating point values and vice
-versa. The absence of these prototypes when compiling with traditional
-C would cause serious problems. This is a subset of the possible
-conversion warnings, for the full set use \fB\-Wconversion\fR.
-.IP "*" 4
-Use of \s-1ISO\s0 C style function definitions. This warning intentionally is
-\&\fInot\fR issued for prototype declarations or variadic functions
-because these \s-1ISO\s0 C features will appear in your code when using
-libiberty's traditional C compatibility macros, \f(CW\*(C`PARAMS\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`VPARAMS\*(C'\fR. This warning is also bypassed for nested functions
-because that feature is already a gcc extension and thus not relevant to
-traditional C compatibility.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-Wdeclaration\-after\-statement\fR (C only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wdeclaration-after-statement (C only)"
-Warn when a declaration is found after a statement in a block. This
-construct, known from \*(C+, was introduced with \s-1ISO\s0 C99 and is by default
-allowed in \s-1GCC\s0. It is not supported by \s-1ISO\s0 C90 and was not supported by
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 versions before \s-1GCC\s0 3.0.
-.IP "\fB\-Wundef\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wundef"
-Warn if an undefined identifier is evaluated in an \fB#if\fR directive.
-.IP "\fB\-Wendif\-labels\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wendif-labels"
-Warn whenever an \fB#else\fR or an \fB#endif\fR are followed by text.
-.IP "\fB\-Wshadow\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wshadow"
-Warn whenever a local variable shadows another local variable, parameter or
-global variable or whenever a built-in function is shadowed.
-.IP "\fB\-Wlarger\-than\-\fR\fIlen\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wlarger-than-len"
-Warn whenever an object of larger than \fIlen\fR bytes is defined.
-.IP "\fB\-Wpointer\-arith\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wpointer-arith"
-Warn about anything that depends on the ``size of'' a function type or
-of \f(CW\*(C`void\*(C'\fR. \s-1GNU\s0 C assigns these types a size of 1, for
-convenience in calculations with \f(CW\*(C`void *\*(C'\fR pointers and pointers
-to functions.
-.IP "\fB\-Wbad\-function\-cast\fR (C only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wbad-function-cast (C only)"
-Warn whenever a function call is cast to a non-matching type.
-For example, warn if \f(CW\*(C`int malloc()\*(C'\fR is cast to \f(CW\*(C`anything *\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wcast\-qual\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wcast-qual"
-Warn whenever a pointer is cast so as to remove a type qualifier from
-the target type. For example, warn if a \f(CW\*(C`const char *\*(C'\fR is cast
-to an ordinary \f(CW\*(C`char *\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wcast\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wcast-align"
-Warn whenever a pointer is cast such that the required alignment of the
-target is increased. For example, warn if a \f(CW\*(C`char *\*(C'\fR is cast to
-an \f(CW\*(C`int *\*(C'\fR on machines where integers can only be accessed at
-two\- or four-byte boundaries.
-.IP "\fB\-Wwrite\-strings\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wwrite-strings"
-When compiling C, give string constants the type \f(CW\*(C`const
-char[\f(CIlength\f(CW]\*(C'\fR so that
-copying the address of one into a non\-\f(CW\*(C`const\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`char *\*(C'\fR
-pointer will get a warning; when compiling \*(C+, warn about the
-deprecated conversion from string constants to \f(CW\*(C`char *\*(C'\fR.
-These warnings will help you find at
-compile time code that can try to write into a string constant, but
-only if you have been very careful about using \f(CW\*(C`const\*(C'\fR in
-declarations and prototypes. Otherwise, it will just be a nuisance;
-this is why we did not make \fB\-Wall\fR request these warnings.
-.IP "\fB\-Wconversion\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wconversion"
-Warn if a prototype causes a type conversion that is different from what
-would happen to the same argument in the absence of a prototype. This
-includes conversions of fixed point to floating and vice versa, and
-conversions changing the width or signedness of a fixed point argument
-except when the same as the default promotion.
-.Sp
-Also, warn if a negative integer constant expression is implicitly
-converted to an unsigned type. For example, warn about the assignment
-\&\f(CW\*(C`x = \-1\*(C'\fR if \f(CW\*(C`x\*(C'\fR is unsigned. But do not warn about explicit
-casts like \f(CW\*(C`(unsigned) \-1\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Wsign\-compare\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wsign-compare"
-Warn when a comparison between signed and unsigned values could produce
-an incorrect result when the signed value is converted to unsigned.
-This warning is enabled by \fB\-W\fR, and by \fB\-Wall\fR
-in \*(C+ only.
-.IP "\fB\-Waggregate\-return\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Waggregate-return"
-Warn if any functions that return structures or unions are defined or
-called. (In languages where you can return an array, this also elicits
-a warning.)
-.IP "\fB\-Wstrict\-prototypes\fR (C only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wstrict-prototypes (C only)"
-Warn if a function is declared or defined without specifying the
-argument types. (An old-style function definition is permitted without
-a warning if preceded by a declaration which specifies the argument
-types.)
-.IP "\fB\-Wmissing\-prototypes\fR (C only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wmissing-prototypes (C only)"
-Warn if a global function is defined without a previous prototype
-declaration. This warning is issued even if the definition itself
-provides a prototype. The aim is to detect global functions that fail
-to be declared in header files.
-.IP "\fB\-Wmissing\-declarations\fR (C only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wmissing-declarations (C only)"
-Warn if a global function is defined without a previous declaration.
-Do so even if the definition itself provides a prototype.
-Use this option to detect global functions that are not declared in
-header files.
-.IP "\fB\-Wmissing\-noreturn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wmissing-noreturn"
-Warn about functions which might be candidates for attribute \f(CW\*(C`noreturn\*(C'\fR.
-Note these are only possible candidates, not absolute ones. Care should
-be taken to manually verify functions actually do not ever return before
-adding the \f(CW\*(C`noreturn\*(C'\fR attribute, otherwise subtle code generation
-bugs could be introduced. You will not get a warning for \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR in
-hosted C environments.
-.IP "\fB\-Wmissing\-format\-attribute\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wmissing-format-attribute"
-If \fB\-Wformat\fR is enabled, also warn about functions which might be
-candidates for \f(CW\*(C`format\*(C'\fR attributes. Note these are only possible
-candidates, not absolute ones. \s-1GCC\s0 will guess that \f(CW\*(C`format\*(C'\fR
-attributes might be appropriate for any function that calls a function
-like \f(CW\*(C`vprintf\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`vscanf\*(C'\fR, but this might not always be the
-case, and some functions for which \f(CW\*(C`format\*(C'\fR attributes are
-appropriate may not be detected. This option has no effect unless
-\&\fB\-Wformat\fR is enabled (possibly by \fB\-Wall\fR).
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-multichar\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-multichar"
-Do not warn if a multicharacter constant (\fB'\s-1FOOF\s0'\fR) is used.
-Usually they indicate a typo in the user's code, as they have
-implementation-defined values, and should not be used in portable code.
-.IP "\fB\-Wno\-deprecated\-declarations\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wno-deprecated-declarations"
-Do not warn about uses of functions, variables, and types marked as
-deprecated by using the \f(CW\*(C`deprecated\*(C'\fR attribute.
-(@pxref{Function Attributes}, \f(CW at pxref\fR{Variable Attributes},
-\&\f(CW at pxref\fR{Type Attributes}.)
-.IP "\fB\-Wpacked\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wpacked"
-Warn if a structure is given the packed attribute, but the packed
-attribute has no effect on the layout or size of the structure.
-Such structures may be mis-aligned for little benefit. For
-instance, in this code, the variable \f(CW\*(C`f.x\*(C'\fR in \f(CW\*(C`struct bar\*(C'\fR
-will be misaligned even though \f(CW\*(C`struct bar\*(C'\fR does not itself
-have the packed attribute:
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& struct foo {
-\& int x;
-\& char a, b, c, d;
-\& } __attribute__((packed));
-\& struct bar {
-\& char z;
-\& struct foo f;
-\& };
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-Wpadded\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wpadded"
-Warn if padding is included in a structure, either to align an element
-of the structure or to align the whole structure. Sometimes when this
-happens it is possible to rearrange the fields of the structure to
-reduce the padding and so make the structure smaller.
-.IP "\fB\-Wredundant\-decls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wredundant-decls"
-Warn if anything is declared more than once in the same scope, even in
-cases where multiple declaration is valid and changes nothing.
-.IP "\fB\-Wnested\-externs\fR (C only)" 4
-.IX Item "-Wnested-externs (C only)"
-Warn if an \f(CW\*(C`extern\*(C'\fR declaration is encountered within a function.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunreachable\-code\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunreachable-code"
-Warn if the compiler detects that code will never be executed.
-.Sp
-This option is intended to warn when the compiler detects that at
-least a whole line of source code will never be executed, because
-some condition is never satisfied or because it is after a
-procedure that never returns.
-.Sp
-It is possible for this option to produce a warning even though there
-are circumstances under which part of the affected line can be executed,
-so care should be taken when removing apparently-unreachable code.
-.Sp
-For instance, when a function is inlined, a warning may mean that the
-line is unreachable in only one inlined copy of the function.
-.Sp
-This option is not made part of \fB\-Wall\fR because in a debugging
-version of a program there is often substantial code which checks
-correct functioning of the program and is, hopefully, unreachable
-because the program does work. Another common use of unreachable
-code is to provide behavior which is selectable at compile\-time.
-.IP "\fB\-Winline\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Winline"
-Warn if a function can not be inlined and it was declared as inline.
-Even with this option, the compiler will not warn about failures to
-inline functions declared in system headers.
-.Sp
-The compiler uses a variety of heuristics to determine whether or not
-to inline a function. For example, the compiler takes into account
-the size of the function being inlined and the the amount of inlining
-that has already been done in the current function. Therefore,
-seemingly insignificant changes in the source program can cause the
-warnings produced by \fB\-Winline\fR to appear or disappear.
-.IP "\fB\-Wlong\-long\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wlong-long"
-Warn if \fBlong long\fR type is used. This is default. To inhibit
-the warning messages, use \fB\-Wno\-long\-long\fR. Flags
-\&\fB\-Wlong\-long\fR and \fB\-Wno\-long\-long\fR are taken into account
-only when \fB\-pedantic\fR flag is used.
-.IP "\fB\-Wdisabled\-optimization\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wdisabled-optimization"
-Warn if a requested optimization pass is disabled. This warning does
-not generally indicate that there is anything wrong with your code; it
-merely indicates that \s-1GCC\s0's optimizers were unable to handle the code
-effectively. Often, the problem is that your code is too big or too
-complex; \s-1GCC\s0 will refuse to optimize programs when the optimization
-itself is likely to take inordinate amounts of time.
-.IP "\fB\-Werror\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Werror"
-Make all warnings into errors.
-.Sh "Options for Debugging Your Program or \s-1GCC\s0"
-.IX Subsection "Options for Debugging Your Program or GCC"
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 has various special options that are used for debugging
-either your program or \s-1GCC:\s0
-.IP "\fB\-g\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-g"
-Produce debugging information in the operating system's native format
-(stabs, \s-1COFF\s0, \s-1XCOFF\s0, or \s-1DWARF\s0). \s-1GDB\s0 can work with this debugging
-information.
-.Sp
-On most systems that use stabs format, \fB\-g\fR enables use of extra
-debugging information that only \s-1GDB\s0 can use; this extra information
-makes debugging work better in \s-1GDB\s0 but will probably make other debuggers
-crash or
-refuse to read the program. If you want to control for certain whether
-to generate the extra information, use \fB\-gstabs+\fR, \fB\-gstabs\fR,
-\&\fB\-gxcoff+\fR, \fB\-gxcoff\fR, \fB\-gdwarf\-1+\fR, \fB\-gdwarf\-1\fR,
-or \fB\-gvms\fR (see below).
-.Sp
-Unlike most other C compilers, \s-1GCC\s0 allows you to use \fB\-g\fR with
-\&\fB\-O\fR. The shortcuts taken by optimized code may occasionally
-produce surprising results: some variables you declared may not exist
-at all; flow of control may briefly move where you did not expect it;
-some statements may not be executed because they compute constant
-results or their values were already at hand; some statements may
-execute in different places because they were moved out of loops.
-.Sp
-Nevertheless it proves possible to debug optimized output. This makes
-it reasonable to use the optimizer for programs that might have bugs.
-.Sp
-The following options are useful when \s-1GCC\s0 is generated with the
-capability for more than one debugging format.
-.IP "\fB\-ggdb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ggdb"
-Produce debugging information for use by \s-1GDB\s0. This means to use the
-most expressive format available (\s-1DWARF\s0 2, stabs, or the native format
-if neither of those are supported), including \s-1GDB\s0 extensions if at all
-possible.
-.IP "\fB\-gstabs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gstabs"
-Produce debugging information in stabs format (if that is supported),
-without \s-1GDB\s0 extensions. This is the format used by \s-1DBX\s0 on most \s-1BSD\s0
-systems. On \s-1MIPS\s0, Alpha and System V Release 4 systems this option
-produces stabs debugging output which is not understood by \s-1DBX\s0 or \s-1SDB\s0.
-On System V Release 4 systems this option requires the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler.
-.IP "\fB\-gstabs+\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gstabs+"
-Produce debugging information in stabs format (if that is supported),
-using \s-1GNU\s0 extensions understood only by the \s-1GNU\s0 debugger (\s-1GDB\s0). The
-use of these extensions is likely to make other debuggers crash or
-refuse to read the program.
-.IP "\fB\-gcoff\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gcoff"
-Produce debugging information in \s-1COFF\s0 format (if that is supported).
-This is the format used by \s-1SDB\s0 on most System V systems prior to
-System V Release 4.
-.IP "\fB\-gxcoff\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gxcoff"
-Produce debugging information in \s-1XCOFF\s0 format (if that is supported).
-This is the format used by the \s-1DBX\s0 debugger on \s-1IBM\s0 \s-1RS/6000\s0 systems.
-.IP "\fB\-gxcoff+\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gxcoff+"
-Produce debugging information in \s-1XCOFF\s0 format (if that is supported),
-using \s-1GNU\s0 extensions understood only by the \s-1GNU\s0 debugger (\s-1GDB\s0). The
-use of these extensions is likely to make other debuggers crash or
-refuse to read the program, and may cause assemblers other than the \s-1GNU\s0
-assembler (\s-1GAS\s0) to fail with an error.
-.IP "\fB\-gdwarf\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gdwarf"
-Produce debugging information in \s-1DWARF\s0 version 1 format (if that is
-supported). This is the format used by \s-1SDB\s0 on most System V Release 4
-systems.
-.Sp
-This option is deprecated.
-.IP "\fB\-gdwarf+\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gdwarf+"
-Produce debugging information in \s-1DWARF\s0 version 1 format (if that is
-supported), using \s-1GNU\s0 extensions understood only by the \s-1GNU\s0 debugger
-(\s-1GDB\s0). The use of these extensions is likely to make other debuggers
-crash or refuse to read the program.
-.Sp
-This option is deprecated.
-.IP "\fB\-gdwarf\-2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gdwarf-2"
-Produce debugging information in \s-1DWARF\s0 version 2 format (if that is
-supported). This is the format used by \s-1DBX\s0 on \s-1IRIX\s0 6.
-.IP "\fB\-gvms\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gvms"
-Produce debugging information in \s-1VMS\s0 debug format (if that is
-supported). This is the format used by \s-1DEBUG\s0 on \s-1VMS\s0 systems.
-.IP "\fB\-g\fR\fIlevel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-glevel"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-ggdb\fR\fIlevel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ggdblevel"
-.IP "\fB\-gstabs\fR\fIlevel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gstabslevel"
-.IP "\fB\-gcoff\fR\fIlevel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gcofflevel"
-.IP "\fB\-gxcoff\fR\fIlevel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gxcofflevel"
-.IP "\fB\-gvms\fR\fIlevel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-gvmslevel"
-.PD
-Request debugging information and also use \fIlevel\fR to specify how
-much information. The default level is 2.
-.Sp
-Level 1 produces minimal information, enough for making backtraces in
-parts of the program that you don't plan to debug. This includes
-descriptions of functions and external variables, but no information
-about local variables and no line numbers.
-.Sp
-Level 3 includes extra information, such as all the macro definitions
-present in the program. Some debuggers support macro expansion when
-you use \fB\-g3\fR.
-.Sp
-Note that in order to avoid confusion between \s-1DWARF1\s0 debug level 2,
-and \s-1DWARF2\s0, neither \fB\-gdwarf\fR nor \fB\-gdwarf\-2\fR accept
-a concatenated debug level. Instead use an additional \fB\-g\fR\fIlevel\fR
-option to change the debug level for \s-1DWARF1\s0 or \s-1DWARF2\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-feliminate\-dwarf2\-dups\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-feliminate-dwarf2-dups"
-Compress \s-1DWARF2\s0 debugging information by eliminating duplicated
-information about each symbol. This option only makes sense when
-generating \s-1DWARF2\s0 debugging information with \fB\-gdwarf\-2\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-p\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-p"
-Generate extra code to write profile information suitable for the
-analysis program \fBprof\fR. You must use this option when compiling
-the source files you want data about, and you must also use it when
-linking.
-.IP "\fB\-pg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pg"
-Generate extra code to write profile information suitable for the
-analysis program \fBgprof\fR. You must use this option when compiling
-the source files you want data about, and you must also use it when
-linking.
-.IP "\fB\-Q\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Q"
-Makes the compiler print out each function name as it is compiled, and
-print some statistics about each pass when it finishes.
-.IP "\fB\-ftime\-report\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ftime-report"
-Makes the compiler print some statistics about the time consumed by each
-pass when it finishes.
-.IP "\fB\-fmem\-report\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fmem-report"
-Makes the compiler print some statistics about permanent memory
-allocation when it finishes.
-.IP "\fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fprofile-arcs"
-Instrument \fIarcs\fR during compilation to generate coverage data or
-for profile-directed block ordering. During execution the program
-records how many times each branch is executed and how many times it is
-taken. When the compiled program exits it saves this data to a file
-called \fI\fIauxname\fI.da\fR for each source file. \fIauxname\fR is
-generated from the name of the output file, if explicitly specified and
-it is not the final executable, otherwise it is the basename of the
-source file. In both cases any suffix is removed (e.g. \fIfoo.da\fR
-for input file \fIdir/foo.c\fR, or \fIdir/foo.da\fR for output file
-specified as \fB\-o dir/foo.o\fR).
-.Sp
-For profile-directed block ordering, compile the program with
-\&\fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR plus optimization and code generation options,
-generate the arc profile information by running the program on a
-selected workload, and then compile the program again with the same
-optimization and code generation options plus
-\&\fB\-fbranch\-probabilities\fR.
-.Sp
-The other use of \fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR is for use with \fBgcov\fR,
-when it is used with the \fB\-ftest\-coverage\fR option.
-.Sp
-With \fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR, for each function of your program \s-1GCC\s0
-creates a program flow graph, then finds a spanning tree for the graph.
-Only arcs that are not on the spanning tree have to be instrumented: the
-compiler adds code to count the number of times that these arcs are
-executed. When an arc is the only exit or only entrance to a block, the
-instrumentation code can be added to the block; otherwise, a new basic
-block must be created to hold the instrumentation code.
-.IP "\fB\-ftest\-coverage\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ftest-coverage"
-Create data files for the \fBgcov\fR code-coverage utility. See
-\&\fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR option above for a description of \fIauxname\fR.
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fIauxname\fR\fB.bb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "auxname.bb"
-A mapping from basic blocks to line numbers, which \fBgcov\fR uses to
-associate basic block execution counts with line numbers.
-.IP "\fIauxname\fR\fB.bbg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "auxname.bbg"
-A list of all arcs in the program flow graph. This allows \fBgcov\fR
-to reconstruct the program flow graph, so that it can compute all basic
-block and arc execution counts from the information in the
-\&\fI\fIauxname\fI.da\fR file.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-Use \fB\-ftest\-coverage\fR with \fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR; the latter
-option adds instrumentation to the program, which then writes
-execution counts to another data file:
-.IP "\fIauxname\fR\fB.da\fR" 4
-.IX Item "auxname.da"
-Runtime arc execution counts, used in conjunction with the arc
-information in the file \fI\fIauxname\fI.bbg\fR.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-Coverage data will map better to the source files if
-\&\fB\-ftest\-coverage\fR is used without optimization.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-d\fR\fIletters\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dletters"
-Says to make debugging dumps during compilation at times specified by
-\&\fIletters\fR. This is used for debugging the compiler. The file names
-for most of the dumps are made by appending a pass number and a word to
-the \fIdumpname\fR. \fIdumpname\fR is generated from the name of the
-output file, if explicitly specified and it is not an executable,
-otherwise it is the basename of the source file. In both cases any
-suffix is removed (e.g. \fIfoo.00.rtl\fR or \fIfoo.01.sibling\fR).
-Here are the possible letters for use in \fIletters\fR, and their
-meanings:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBA\fR" 4
-.IX Item "A"
-Annotate the assembler output with miscellaneous debugging information.
-.IP "\fBb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "b"
-Dump after computing branch probabilities, to \fI\fIfile\fI.14.bp\fR.
-.IP "\fBB\fR" 4
-.IX Item "B"
-Dump after block reordering, to \fI\fIfile\fI.32.bbro\fR.
-.IP "\fBc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c"
-Dump after instruction combination, to the file \fI\fIfile\fI.19.combine\fR.
-.IP "\fBC\fR" 4
-.IX Item "C"
-Dump after the first if conversion, to the file \fI\fIfile\fI.15.ce1\fR.
-.IP "\fBd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "d"
-Dump after delayed branch scheduling, to \fI\fIfile\fI.34.dbr\fR.
-.IP "\fBD\fR" 4
-.IX Item "D"
-Dump all macro definitions, at the end of preprocessing, in addition to
-normal output.
-.IP "\fBe\fR" 4
-.IX Item "e"
-Dump after \s-1SSA\s0 optimizations, to \fI\fIfile\fI.04.ssa\fR and
-\&\fI\fIfile\fI.07.ussa\fR.
-.IP "\fBE\fR" 4
-.IX Item "E"
-Dump after the second if conversion, to \fI\fIfile\fI.29.ce3\fR.
-.IP "\fBf\fR" 4
-.IX Item "f"
-Dump after control and data flow analysis, to \fI\fIfile\fI.14.cfg\fR.
-Also dump after life analysis, to \fI\fIfile\fI.18.life\fR.
-.IP "\fBF\fR" 4
-.IX Item "F"
-Dump after purging \f(CW\*(C`ADDRESSOF\*(C'\fR codes, to \fI\fIfile\fI.10.addressof\fR.
-.IP "\fBg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "g"
-Dump after global register allocation, to \fI\fIfile\fI.24.greg\fR.
-.IP "\fBG\fR" 4
-.IX Item "G"
-Dump after \s-1GCSE\s0, to \fI\fIfile\fI.11.gcse\fR.
-.IP "\fBh\fR" 4
-.IX Item "h"
-Dump after finalization of \s-1EH\s0 handling code, to \fI\fIfile\fI.02.eh\fR.
-.IP "\fBi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "i"
-Dump after sibling call optimizations, to \fI\fIfile\fI.01.sibling\fR.
-.IP "\fBj\fR" 4
-.IX Item "j"
-Dump after the first jump optimization, to \fI\fIfile\fI.03.jump\fR.
-.IP "\fBk\fR" 4
-.IX Item "k"
-Dump after conversion from registers to stack, to \fI\fIfile\fI.31.stack\fR.
-.IP "\fBl\fR" 4
-.IX Item "l"
-Dump after local register allocation, to \fI\fIfile\fI.23.lreg\fR.
-.IP "\fBL\fR" 4
-.IX Item "L"
-Dump after loop optimization, to \fI\fIfile\fI.12.loop\fR.
-.IP "\fBM\fR" 4
-.IX Item "M"
-Dump after performing the machine dependent reorganization pass, to
-\&\fI\fIfile\fI.33.mach\fR.
-.IP "\fBn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "n"
-Dump after register renumbering, to \fI\fIfile\fI.28.rnreg\fR.
-.IP "\fBN\fR" 4
-.IX Item "N"
-Dump after the register move pass, to \fI\fIfile\fI.21.regmove\fR.
-.IP "\fBo\fR" 4
-.IX Item "o"
-Dump after post-reload optimizations, to \fI\fIfile\fI.25.postreload\fR.
-.IP "\fBr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "r"
-Dump after \s-1RTL\s0 generation, to \fI\fIfile\fI.00.rtl\fR.
-.IP "\fBR\fR" 4
-.IX Item "R"
-Dump after the second scheduling pass, to \fI\fIfile\fI.30.sched2\fR.
-.IP "\fBs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "s"
-Dump after \s-1CSE\s0 (including the jump optimization that sometimes follows
-\&\s-1CSE\s0), to \fI\fIfile\fI.09.cse\fR.
-.IP "\fBS\fR" 4
-.IX Item "S"
-Dump after the first scheduling pass, to \fI\fIfile\fI.22.sched\fR.
-.IP "\fBt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "t"
-Dump after the second \s-1CSE\s0 pass (including the jump optimization that
-sometimes follows \s-1CSE\s0), to \fI\fIfile\fI.17.cse2\fR.
-.IP "\fBT\fR" 4
-.IX Item "T"
-Dump after running tracer, to \fI\fIfile\fI.16.tracer\fR.
-.IP "\fBu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "u"
-Dump after null pointer elimination pass to \fI\fIfile\fI.08.null\fR.
-.IP "\fBw\fR" 4
-.IX Item "w"
-Dump after the second flow pass, to \fI\fIfile\fI.26.flow2\fR.
-.IP "\fBW\fR" 4
-.IX Item "W"
-Dump after \s-1SSA\s0 conditional constant propagation, to
-\&\fI\fIfile\fI.05.ssaccp\fR.
-.IP "\fBX\fR" 4
-.IX Item "X"
-Dump after \s-1SSA\s0 dead code elimination, to \fI\fIfile\fI.06.ssadce\fR.
-.IP "\fBz\fR" 4
-.IX Item "z"
-Dump after the peephole pass, to \fI\fIfile\fI.27.peephole2\fR.
-.IP "\fBa\fR" 4
-.IX Item "a"
-Produce all the dumps listed above.
-.IP "\fBm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "m"
-Print statistics on memory usage, at the end of the run, to
-standard error.
-.IP "\fBp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "p"
-Annotate the assembler output with a comment indicating which
-pattern and alternative was used. The length of each instruction is
-also printed.
-.IP "\fBP\fR" 4
-.IX Item "P"
-Dump the \s-1RTL\s0 in the assembler output as a comment before each instruction.
-Also turns on \fB\-dp\fR annotation.
-.IP "\fBv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "v"
-For each of the other indicated dump files (except for
-\&\fI\fIfile\fI.00.rtl\fR), dump a representation of the control flow graph
-suitable for viewing with \s-1VCG\s0 to \fI\fIfile\fI.\fIpass\fI.vcg\fR.
-.IP "\fBx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "x"
-Just generate \s-1RTL\s0 for a function instead of compiling it. Usually used
-with \fBr\fR.
-.IP "\fBy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "y"
-Dump debugging information during parsing, to standard error.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-fdump\-unnumbered\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fdump-unnumbered"
-When doing debugging dumps (see \fB\-d\fR option above), suppress instruction
-numbers and line number note output. This makes it more feasible to
-use diff on debugging dumps for compiler invocations with different
-options, in particular with and without \fB\-g\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fdump\-translation\-unit\fR (C and \*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-fdump-translation-unit (C and only)"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fdump\-translation\-unit\-\fR\fIoptions\fR\fB \fR(C and \*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-fdump-translation-unit-options (C and only)"
-.PD
-Dump a representation of the tree structure for the entire translation
-unit to a file. The file name is made by appending \fI.tu\fR to the
-source file name. If the \fB\-\fR\fIoptions\fR form is used, \fIoptions\fR
-controls the details of the dump as described for the
-\&\fB\-fdump\-tree\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-fdump\-class\-hierarchy\fR (\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-fdump-class-hierarchy ( only)"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fdump\-class\-hierarchy\-\fR\fIoptions\fR\fB \fR(\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-fdump-class-hierarchy-options ( only)"
-.PD
-Dump a representation of each class's hierarchy and virtual function
-table layout to a file. The file name is made by appending \fI.class\fR
-to the source file name. If the \fB\-\fR\fIoptions\fR form is used,
-\&\fIoptions\fR controls the details of the dump as described for the
-\&\fB\-fdump\-tree\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-fdump\-tree\-\fR\fIswitch\fR\fB \fR(\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-fdump-tree-switch ( only)"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fdump\-tree\-\fR\fIswitch\fR\fB\-\fR\fIoptions\fR\fB \fR(\*(C+ only)" 4
-.IX Item "-fdump-tree-switch-options ( only)"
-.PD
-Control the dumping at various stages of processing the intermediate
-language tree to a file. The file name is generated by appending a switch
-specific suffix to the source file name. If the \fB\-\fR\fIoptions\fR
-form is used, \fIoptions\fR is a list of \fB\-\fR separated options that
-control the details of the dump. Not all options are applicable to all
-dumps, those which are not meaningful will be ignored. The following
-options are available
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBaddress\fR" 4
-.IX Item "address"
-Print the address of each node. Usually this is not meaningful as it
-changes according to the environment and source file. Its primary use
-is for tying up a dump file with a debug environment.
-.IP "\fBslim\fR" 4
-.IX Item "slim"
-Inhibit dumping of members of a scope or body of a function merely
-because that scope has been reached. Only dump such items when they
-are directly reachable by some other path.
-.IP "\fBall\fR" 4
-.IX Item "all"
-Turn on all options.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-The following tree dumps are possible:
-.IP "\fBoriginal\fR" 4
-.IX Item "original"
-Dump before any tree based optimization, to \fI\fIfile\fI.original\fR.
-.IP "\fBoptimized\fR" 4
-.IX Item "optimized"
-Dump after all tree based optimization, to \fI\fIfile\fI.optimized\fR.
-.IP "\fBinlined\fR" 4
-.IX Item "inlined"
-Dump after function inlining, to \fI\fIfile\fI.inlined\fR.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-frandom\-seed=\fR\fIstring\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-frandom-seed=string"
-This option provides a seed that \s-1GCC\s0 uses when it would otherwise use
-random numbers. At present, this is used to generate certain symbol names
-that have to be different in every compiled file.
-.Sp
-The \fIstring\fR should be different for every file you compile.
-.IP "\fB\-fsched\-verbose=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsched-verbose=n"
-On targets that use instruction scheduling, this option controls the
-amount of debugging output the scheduler prints. This information is
-written to standard error, unless \fB\-dS\fR or \fB\-dR\fR is
-specified, in which case it is output to the usual dump
-listing file, \fI.sched\fR or \fI.sched2\fR respectively. However
-for \fIn\fR greater than nine, the output is always printed to standard
-error.
-.Sp
-For \fIn\fR greater than zero, \fB\-fsched\-verbose\fR outputs the
-same information as \fB\-dRS\fR. For \fIn\fR greater than one, it
-also output basic block probabilities, detailed ready list information
-and unit/insn info. For \fIn\fR greater than two, it includes \s-1RTL\s0
-at abort point, control-flow and regions info. And for \fIn\fR over
-four, \fB\-fsched\-verbose\fR also includes dependence info.
-.IP "\fB\-save\-temps\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-save-temps"
-Store the usual ``temporary'' intermediate files permanently; place them
-in the current directory and name them based on the source file. Thus,
-compiling \fIfoo.c\fR with \fB\-c \-save\-temps\fR would produce files
-\&\fIfoo.i\fR and \fIfoo.s\fR, as well as \fIfoo.o\fR. This creates a
-preprocessed \fIfoo.i\fR output file even though the compiler now
-normally uses an integrated preprocessor.
-.IP "\fB\-time\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-time"
-Report the \s-1CPU\s0 time taken by each subprocess in the compilation
-sequence. For C source files, this is the compiler proper and assembler
-(plus the linker if linking is done). The output looks like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # cc1 0.12 0.01
-\& # as 0.00 0.01
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The first number on each line is the ``user time,'' that is time spent
-executing the program itself. The second number is ``system time,''
-time spent executing operating system routines on behalf of the program.
-Both numbers are in seconds.
-.IP "\fB\-print\-file\-name=\fR\fIlibrary\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-print-file-name=library"
-Print the full absolute name of the library file \fIlibrary\fR that
-would be used when linking\-\-\-and don't do anything else. With this
-option, \s-1GCC\s0 does not compile or link anything; it just prints the
-file name.
-.IP "\fB\-print\-multi\-directory\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-print-multi-directory"
-Print the directory name corresponding to the multilib selected by any
-other switches present in the command line. This directory is supposed
-to exist in \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-print\-multi\-lib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-print-multi-lib"
-Print the mapping from multilib directory names to compiler switches
-that enable them. The directory name is separated from the switches by
-\&\fB;\fR, and each switch starts with an \fB@} instead of the
-\&\f(CB at samp\fB{\-\fR, without spaces between multiple switches. This is supposed to
-ease shell\-processing.
-.IP "\fB\-print\-prog\-name=\fR\fIprogram\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-print-prog-name=program"
-Like \fB\-print\-file\-name\fR, but searches for a program such as \fBcpp\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-print\-libgcc\-file\-name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-print-libgcc-file-name"
-Same as \fB\-print\-file\-name=libgcc.a\fR.
-.Sp
-This is useful when you use \fB\-nostdlib\fR or \fB\-nodefaultlibs\fR
-but you do want to link with \fIlibgcc.a\fR. You can do
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& gcc -nostdlib <files>... `gcc -print-libgcc-file-name`
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-print\-search\-dirs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-print-search-dirs"
-Print the name of the configured installation directory and a list of
-program and library directories gcc will search\-\-\-and don't do anything else.
-.Sp
-This is useful when gcc prints the error message
-\&\fBinstallation problem, cannot exec cpp0: No such file or directory\fR.
-To resolve this you either need to put \fIcpp0\fR and the other compiler
-components where gcc expects to find them, or you can set the environment
-variable \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR to the directory where you installed them.
-Don't forget the trailing '/'.
-.IP "\fB\-dumpmachine\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dumpmachine"
-Print the compiler's target machine (for example,
-\&\fBi686\-pc\-linux\-gnu\fR)\-\-\-and don't do anything else.
-.IP "\fB\-dumpversion\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dumpversion"
-Print the compiler version (for example, \fB3.0\fR)\-\-\-and don't do
-anything else.
-.IP "\fB\-dumpspecs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dumpspecs"
-Print the compiler's built-in specs\-\-\-and don't do anything else. (This
-is used when \s-1GCC\s0 itself is being built.)
-.Sh "Options That Control Optimization"
-.IX Subsection "Options That Control Optimization"
-These options control various sorts of optimizations.
-.PP
-Without any optimization option, the compiler's goal is to reduce the
-cost of compilation and to make debugging produce the expected
-results. Statements are independent: if you stop the program with a
-breakpoint between statements, you can then assign a new value to any
-variable or change the program counter to any other statement in the
-function and get exactly the results you would expect from the source
-code.
-.PP
-Turning on optimization flags makes the compiler attempt to improve
-the performance and/or code size at the expense of compilation time
-and possibly the ability to debug the program.
-.PP
-Not all optimizations are controlled directly by a flag. Only
-optimizations that have a flag are listed.
-.IP "\fB\-O\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-O"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-O1\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-O1"
-.PD
-Optimize. Optimizing compilation takes somewhat more time, and a lot
-more memory for a large function.
-.Sp
-With \fB\-O\fR, the compiler tries to reduce code size and execution
-time, without performing any optimizations that take a great deal of
-compilation time.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-O\fR turns on the following optimization flags:
-\&\fB\-fdefer\-pop
-\&\-fmerge\-constants
-\&\-fthread\-jumps
-\&\-floop\-optimize
-\&\-fcrossjumping
-\&\-fif\-conversion
-\&\-fif\-conversion2
-\&\-fdelayed\-branch
-\&\-fguess\-branch\-probability
-\&\-fcprop\-registers\fR
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-O\fR also turns on \fB\-fomit\-frame\-pointer\fR on machines
-where doing so does not interfere with debugging.
-.IP "\fB\-O2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-O2"
-Optimize even more. \s-1GCC\s0 performs nearly all supported optimizations
-that do not involve a space-speed tradeoff. The compiler does not
-perform loop unrolling or function inlining when you specify \fB\-O2\fR.
-As compared to \fB\-O\fR, this option increases both compilation time
-and the performance of the generated code.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-O2\fR turns on all optimization flags specified by \fB\-O\fR. It
-also turns on the following optimization flags:
-\&\fB\-fforce\-mem
-\&\-foptimize\-sibling\-calls
-\&\-fstrength\-reduce
-\&\-fcse\-follow\-jumps \-fcse\-skip\-blocks
-\&\-frerun\-cse\-after\-loop \-frerun\-loop\-opt
-\&\-fgcse \-fgcse\-lm \-fgcse\-sm
-\&\-fdelete\-null\-pointer\-checks
-\&\-fexpensive\-optimizations
-\&\-fregmove
-\&\-fschedule\-insns \-fschedule\-insns2
-\&\-fsched\-interblock \-fsched\-spec
-\&\-fcaller\-saves
-\&\-fpeephole2
-\&\-freorder\-blocks \-freorder\-functions
-\&\-fstrict\-aliasing
-\&\-falign\-functions \-falign\-jumps
-\&\-falign\-loops \-falign\-labels\fR
-.Sp
-Please note the warning under \fB\-fgcse\fR about
-invoking \fB\-O2\fR on programs that use computed gotos.
-.IP "\fB\-O3\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-O3"
-Optimize yet more. \fB\-O3\fR turns on all optimizations specified by
-\&\fB\-O2\fR and also turns on the \fB\-finline\-functions\fR and
-\&\fB\-frename\-registers\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-O0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-O0"
-Do not optimize. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-Os\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Os"
-Optimize for size. \fB\-Os\fR enables all \fB\-O2\fR optimizations that
-do not typically increase code size. It also performs further
-optimizations designed to reduce code size.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-Os\fR disables the following optimization flags:
-\&\fB\-falign\-functions \-falign\-jumps \-falign\-loops
-\&\-falign\-labels \-freorder\-blocks \-fprefetch\-loop\-arrays\fR
-.Sp
-If you use multiple \fB\-O\fR options, with or without level numbers,
-the last such option is the one that is effective.
-.PP
-Options of the form \fB\-f\fR\fIflag\fR specify machine-independent
-flags. Most flags have both positive and negative forms; the negative
-form of \fB\-ffoo\fR would be \fB\-fno\-foo\fR. In the table
-below, only one of the forms is listed\-\-\-the one you typically will
-use. You can figure out the other form by either removing \fBno\-\fR
-or adding it.
-.PP
-The following options control specific optimizations. They are either
-activated by \fB\-O\fR options or are related to ones that are. You
-can use the following flags in the rare cases when ``fine\-tuning'' of
-optimizations to be performed is desired.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-default\-inline\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-default-inline"
-Do not make member functions inline by default merely because they are
-defined inside the class scope (\*(C+ only). Otherwise, when you specify
-\&\fB\-O\fR, member functions defined inside class scope are compiled
-inline by default; i.e., you don't need to add \fBinline\fR in front of
-the member function name.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-defer\-pop\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-defer-pop"
-Always pop the arguments to each function call as soon as that function
-returns. For machines which must pop arguments after a function call,
-the compiler normally lets arguments accumulate on the stack for several
-function calls and pops them all at once.
-.Sp
-Disabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fforce\-mem\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fforce-mem"
-Force memory operands to be copied into registers before doing
-arithmetic on them. This produces better code by making all memory
-references potential common subexpressions. When they are not common
-subexpressions, instruction combination should eliminate the separate
-register\-load.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fforce\-addr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fforce-addr"
-Force memory address constants to be copied into registers before
-doing arithmetic on them. This may produce better code just as
-\&\fB\-fforce\-mem\fR may.
-.IP "\fB\-fomit\-frame\-pointer\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fomit-frame-pointer"
-Don't keep the frame pointer in a register for functions that
-don't need one. This avoids the instructions to save, set up and
-restore frame pointers; it also makes an extra register available
-in many functions. \fBIt also makes debugging impossible on
-some machines.\fR
-.Sp
-On some machines, such as the \s-1VAX\s0, this flag has no effect, because
-the standard calling sequence automatically handles the frame pointer
-and nothing is saved by pretending it doesn't exist. The
-machine-description macro \f(CW\*(C`FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED\*(C'\fR controls
-whether a target machine supports this flag.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-foptimize\-sibling\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-foptimize-sibling-calls"
-Optimize sibling and tail recursive calls.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-inline\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-inline"
-Don't pay attention to the \f(CW\*(C`inline\*(C'\fR keyword. Normally this option
-is used to keep the compiler from expanding any functions inline.
-Note that if you are not optimizing, no functions can be expanded inline.
-.IP "\fB\-finline\-functions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-finline-functions"
-Integrate all simple functions into their callers. The compiler
-heuristically decides which functions are simple enough to be worth
-integrating in this way.
-.Sp
-If all calls to a given function are integrated, and the function is
-declared \f(CW\*(C`static\*(C'\fR, then the function is normally not output as
-assembler code in its own right.
-.Sp
-Enabled at level \fB\-O3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-finline\-limit=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-finline-limit=n"
-By default, gcc limits the size of functions that can be inlined. This flag
-allows the control of this limit for functions that are explicitly marked as
-inline (i.e., marked with the inline keyword or defined within the class
-definition in c++). \fIn\fR is the size of functions that can be inlined in
-number of pseudo instructions (not counting parameter handling). The default
-value of \fIn\fR is 600.
-Increasing this value can result in more inlined code at
-the cost of compilation time and memory consumption. Decreasing usually makes
-the compilation faster and less code will be inlined (which presumably
-means slower programs). This option is particularly useful for programs that
-use inlining heavily such as those based on recursive templates with \*(C+.
-.Sp
-Inlining is actually controlled by a number of parameters, which may be
-specified individually by using \fB\-\-param\fR \fIname\fR\fB=\fR\fIvalue\fR.
-The \fB\-finline\-limit=\fR\fIn\fR option sets some of these parameters
-as follows:
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-.Vb 10
-\& @item max-inline-insns
-\& is set to I<n>.
-\& @item max-inline-insns-single
-\& is set to I<n>/2.
-\& @item max-inline-insns-auto
-\& is set to I<n>/2.
-\& @item min-inline-insns
-\& is set to 130 or I<n>/4, whichever is smaller.
-\& @item max-inline-insns-rtl
-\& is set to I<n>.
-.Ve
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-Using \fB\-finline\-limit=600\fR thus results in the default settings
-for these parameters. See below for a documentation of the individual
-parameters controlling inlining.
-.Sp
-\&\fINote:\fR pseudo instruction represents, in this particular context, an
-abstract measurement of function's size. In no way, it represents a count
-of assembly instructions and as such its exact meaning might change from one
-release to an another.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-fkeep\-inline\-functions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fkeep-inline-functions"
-Even if all calls to a given function are integrated, and the function
-is declared \f(CW\*(C`static\*(C'\fR, nevertheless output a separate run-time
-callable version of the function. This switch does not affect
-\&\f(CW\*(C`extern inline\*(C'\fR functions.
-.IP "\fB\-fkeep\-static\-consts\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fkeep-static-consts"
-Emit variables declared \f(CW\*(C`static const\*(C'\fR when optimization isn't turned
-on, even if the variables aren't referenced.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 enables this option by default. If you want to force the compiler to
-check if the variable was referenced, regardless of whether or not
-optimization is turned on, use the \fB\-fno\-keep\-static\-consts\fR option.
-.IP "\fB\-fmerge\-constants\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fmerge-constants"
-Attempt to merge identical constants (string constants and floating point
-constants) across compilation units.
-.Sp
-This option is the default for optimized compilation if the assembler and
-linker support it. Use \fB\-fno\-merge\-constants\fR to inhibit this
-behavior.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fmerge\-all\-constants\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fmerge-all-constants"
-Attempt to merge identical constants and identical variables.
-.Sp
-This option implies \fB\-fmerge\-constants\fR. In addition to
-\&\fB\-fmerge\-constants\fR this considers e.g. even constant initialized
-arrays or initialized constant variables with integral or floating point
-types. Languages like C or \*(C+ require each non-automatic variable to
-have distinct location, so using this option will result in non-conforming
-behavior.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-branch\-count\-reg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-branch-count-reg"
-Do not use ``decrement and branch'' instructions on a count register,
-but instead generate a sequence of instructions that decrement a
-register, compare it against zero, then branch based upon the result.
-This option is only meaningful on architectures that support such
-instructions, which include x86, PowerPC, \s-1IA\-64\s0 and S/390.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-fbranch\-count\-reg\fR, enabled when
-\&\fB\-fstrength\-reduce\fR is enabled.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-function\-cse\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-function-cse"
-Do not put function addresses in registers; make each instruction that
-calls a constant function contain the function's address explicitly.
-.Sp
-This option results in less efficient code, but some strange hacks
-that alter the assembler output may be confused by the optimizations
-performed when this option is not used.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-ffunction\-cse\fR
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-zero\-initialized\-in\-bss\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-zero-initialized-in-bss"
-If the target supports a \s-1BSS\s0 section, \s-1GCC\s0 by default puts variables that
-are initialized to zero into \s-1BSS\s0. This can save space in the resulting
-code.
-.Sp
-This option turns off this behavior because some programs explicitly
-rely on variables going to the data section. E.g., so that the
-resulting executable can find the beginning of that section and/or make
-assumptions based on that.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-fzero\-initialized\-in\-bss\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fstrength\-reduce\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fstrength-reduce"
-Perform the optimizations of loop strength reduction and
-elimination of iteration variables.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fthread\-jumps\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fthread-jumps"
-Perform optimizations where we check to see if a jump branches to a
-location where another comparison subsumed by the first is found. If
-so, the first branch is redirected to either the destination of the
-second branch or a point immediately following it, depending on whether
-the condition is known to be true or false.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fcse\-follow\-jumps\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcse-follow-jumps"
-In common subexpression elimination, scan through jump instructions
-when the target of the jump is not reached by any other path. For
-example, when \s-1CSE\s0 encounters an \f(CW\*(C`if\*(C'\fR statement with an
-\&\f(CW\*(C`else\*(C'\fR clause, \s-1CSE\s0 will follow the jump when the condition
-tested is false.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fcse\-skip\-blocks\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcse-skip-blocks"
-This is similar to \fB\-fcse\-follow\-jumps\fR, but causes \s-1CSE\s0 to
-follow jumps which conditionally skip over blocks. When \s-1CSE\s0
-encounters a simple \f(CW\*(C`if\*(C'\fR statement with no else clause,
-\&\fB\-fcse\-skip\-blocks\fR causes \s-1CSE\s0 to follow the jump around the
-body of the \f(CW\*(C`if\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-frerun\-cse\-after\-loop\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-frerun-cse-after-loop"
-Re-run common subexpression elimination after loop optimizations has been
-performed.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-frerun\-loop\-opt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-frerun-loop-opt"
-Run the loop optimizer twice.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fgcse\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fgcse"
-Perform a global common subexpression elimination pass.
-This pass also performs global constant and copy propagation.
-.Sp
-\&\fINote:\fR When compiling a program using computed gotos, a \s-1GCC\s0
-extension, you may get better runtime performance if you disable
-the global common subexpression elimination pass by adding
-\&\fB\-fno\-gcse\fR to the command line.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fgcse\-lm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fgcse-lm"
-When \fB\-fgcse\-lm\fR is enabled, global common subexpression elimination will
-attempt to move loads which are only killed by stores into themselves. This
-allows a loop containing a load/store sequence to be changed to a load outside
-the loop, and a copy/store within the loop.
-.Sp
-Enabled by default when gcse is enabled.
-.IP "\fB\-fgcse\-sm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fgcse-sm"
-When \fB\-fgcse\-sm\fR is enabled, A store motion pass is run after global common
-subexpression elimination. This pass will attempt to move stores out of loops.
-When used in conjunction with \fB\-fgcse\-lm\fR, loops containing a load/store sequence
-can be changed to a load before the loop and a store after the loop.
-.Sp
-Enabled by default when gcse is enabled.
-.IP "\fB\-floop\-optimize\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-floop-optimize"
-Perform loop optimizations: move constant expressions out of loops, simplify
-exit test conditions and optionally do strength-reduction and loop unrolling as
-well.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fcrossjumping\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcrossjumping"
-Perform cross-jumping transformation. This transformation unifies equivalent code and save code size. The
-resulting code may or may not perform better than without cross\-jumping.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fif\-conversion\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fif-conversion"
-Attempt to transform conditional jumps into branch-less equivalents. This
-include use of conditional moves, min, max, set flags and abs instructions, and
-some tricks doable by standard arithmetics. The use of conditional execution
-on chips where it is available is controlled by \f(CW\*(C`if\-conversion2\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fif\-conversion2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fif-conversion2"
-Use conditional execution (where available) to transform conditional jumps into
-branch-less equivalents.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fdelete\-null\-pointer\-checks\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fdelete-null-pointer-checks"
-Use global dataflow analysis to identify and eliminate useless checks
-for null pointers. The compiler assumes that dereferencing a null
-pointer would have halted the program. If a pointer is checked after
-it has already been dereferenced, it cannot be null.
-.Sp
-In some environments, this assumption is not true, and programs can
-safely dereference null pointers. Use
-\&\fB\-fno\-delete\-null\-pointer\-checks\fR to disable this optimization
-for programs which depend on that behavior.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fexpensive\-optimizations\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fexpensive-optimizations"
-Perform a number of minor optimizations that are relatively expensive.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-foptimize\-register\-move\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-foptimize-register-move"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fregmove\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fregmove"
-.PD
-Attempt to reassign register numbers in move instructions and as
-operands of other simple instructions in order to maximize the amount of
-register tying. This is especially helpful on machines with two-operand
-instructions.
-.Sp
-Note \fB\-fregmove\fR and \fB\-foptimize\-register\-move\fR are the same
-optimization.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fdelayed\-branch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fdelayed-branch"
-If supported for the target machine, attempt to reorder instructions
-to exploit instruction slots available after delayed branch
-instructions.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fschedule\-insns\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fschedule-insns"
-If supported for the target machine, attempt to reorder instructions to
-eliminate execution stalls due to required data being unavailable. This
-helps machines that have slow floating point or memory load instructions
-by allowing other instructions to be issued until the result of the load
-or floating point instruction is required.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fschedule\-insns2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fschedule-insns2"
-Similar to \fB\-fschedule\-insns\fR, but requests an additional pass of
-instruction scheduling after register allocation has been done. This is
-especially useful on machines with a relatively small number of
-registers and where memory load instructions take more than one cycle.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-sched\-interblock\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-sched-interblock"
-Don't schedule instructions across basic blocks. This is normally
-enabled by default when scheduling before register allocation, i.e.
-with \fB\-fschedule\-insns\fR or at \fB\-O2\fR or higher.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-sched\-spec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-sched-spec"
-Don't allow speculative motion of non-load instructions. This is normally
-enabled by default when scheduling before register allocation, i.e.
-with \fB\-fschedule\-insns\fR or at \fB\-O2\fR or higher.
-.IP "\fB\-fsched\-spec\-load\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsched-spec-load"
-Allow speculative motion of some load instructions. This only makes
-sense when scheduling before register allocation, i.e. with
-\&\fB\-fschedule\-insns\fR or at \fB\-O2\fR or higher.
-.IP "\fB\-fsched\-spec\-load\-dangerous\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsched-spec-load-dangerous"
-Allow speculative motion of more load instructions. This only makes
-sense when scheduling before register allocation, i.e. with
-\&\fB\-fschedule\-insns\fR or at \fB\-O2\fR or higher.
-.IP "\fB\-fcaller\-saves\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcaller-saves"
-Enable values to be allocated in registers that will be clobbered by
-function calls, by emitting extra instructions to save and restore the
-registers around such calls. Such allocation is done only when it
-seems to result in better code than would otherwise be produced.
-.Sp
-This option is always enabled by default on certain machines, usually
-those which have no call-preserved registers to use instead.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fmove\-all\-movables\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fmove-all-movables"
-Forces all invariant computations in loops to be moved
-outside the loop.
-.IP "\fB\-freduce\-all\-givs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-freduce-all-givs"
-Forces all general-induction variables in loops to be
-strength\-reduced.
-.Sp
-\&\fINote:\fR When compiling programs written in Fortran,
-\&\fB\-fmove\-all\-movables\fR and \fB\-freduce\-all\-givs\fR are enabled
-by default when you use the optimizer.
-.Sp
-These options may generate better or worse code; results are highly
-dependent on the structure of loops within the source code.
-.Sp
-These two options are intended to be removed someday, once
-they have helped determine the efficacy of various
-approaches to improving loop optimizations.
-.Sp
-Please let us (<\fBgcc at gcc.gnu.org\fR> and <\fBfortran at gnu.org\fR>)
-know how use of these options affects
-the performance of your production code.
-We're very interested in code that runs \fIslower\fR
-when these options are \fIenabled\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-peephole\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-peephole"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-peephole2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-peephole2"
-.PD
-Disable any machine-specific peephole optimizations. The difference
-between \fB\-fno\-peephole\fR and \fB\-fno\-peephole2\fR is in how they
-are implemented in the compiler; some targets use one, some use the
-other, a few use both.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fpeephole\fR is enabled by default.
-\&\fB\-fpeephole2\fR enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fbranch\-probabilities\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fbranch-probabilities"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-guess\-branch\-probability\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-guess-branch-probability"
-.PD
-Do not guess branch probabilities using a randomized model.
-.Sp
-Sometimes gcc will opt to use a randomized model to guess branch
-probabilities, when none are available from either profiling feedback
-(\fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR) or \fB_\|_builtin_expect\fR. This means that
-different runs of the compiler on the same program may produce different
-object code.
-.Sp
-In a hard real-time system, people don't want different runs of the
-compiler to produce code that has different behavior; minimizing
-non-determinism is of paramount import. This switch allows users to
-reduce non\-determinism, possibly at the expense of inferior
-optimization.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-fguess\-branch\-probability\fR at levels
-\&\fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-freorder\-blocks\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-freorder-blocks"
-Reorder basic blocks in the compiled function in order to reduce number of
-taken branches and improve code locality.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-freorder\-functions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-freorder-functions"
-Reorder basic blocks in the compiled function in order to reduce number of
-taken branches and improve code locality. This is implemented by using special
-subsections \f(CW\*(C`text.hot\*(C'\fR for most frequently executed functions and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`text.unlikely\*(C'\fR for unlikely executed functions. Reordering is done by
-the linker so object file format must support named sections and linker must
-place them in a reasonable way.
-.Sp
-Also profile feedback must be available in to make this option effective. See
-\&\fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR for details.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fstrict\-aliasing\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fstrict-aliasing"
-Allows the compiler to assume the strictest aliasing rules applicable to
-the language being compiled. For C (and \*(C+), this activates
-optimizations based on the type of expressions. In particular, an
-object of one type is assumed never to reside at the same address as an
-object of a different type, unless the types are almost the same. For
-example, an \f(CW\*(C`unsigned int\*(C'\fR can alias an \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR, but not a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`void*\*(C'\fR or a \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR. A character type may alias any other
-type.
-.Sp
-Pay special attention to code like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& union a_union {
-\& int i;
-\& double d;
-\& };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& int f() {
-\& a_union t;
-\& t.d = 3.0;
-\& return t.i;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The practice of reading from a different union member than the one most
-recently written to (called ``type\-punning'') is common. Even with
-\&\fB\-fstrict\-aliasing\fR, type-punning is allowed, provided the memory
-is accessed through the union type. So, the code above will work as
-expected. However, this code might not:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& int f() {
-\& a_union t;
-\& int* ip;
-\& t.d = 3.0;
-\& ip = &t.i;
-\& return *ip;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Every language that wishes to perform language-specific alias analysis
-should define a function that computes, given an \f(CW\*(C`tree\*(C'\fR
-node, an alias set for the node. Nodes in different alias sets are not
-allowed to alias. For an example, see the C front-end function
-\&\f(CW\*(C`c_get_alias_set\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-functions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-functions"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-functions=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-functions=n"
-.PD
-Align the start of functions to the next power-of-two greater than
-\&\fIn\fR, skipping up to \fIn\fR bytes. For instance,
-\&\fB\-falign\-functions=32\fR aligns functions to the next 32\-byte
-boundary, but \fB\-falign\-functions=24\fR would align to the next
-32\-byte boundary only if this can be done by skipping 23 bytes or less.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fno\-align\-functions\fR and \fB\-falign\-functions=1\fR are
-equivalent and mean that functions will not be aligned.
-.Sp
-Some assemblers only support this flag when \fIn\fR is a power of two;
-in that case, it is rounded up.
-.Sp
-If \fIn\fR is not specified or is zero, use a machine-dependent default.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-labels\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-labels"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-labels=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-labels=n"
-.PD
-Align all branch targets to a power-of-two boundary, skipping up to
-\&\fIn\fR bytes like \fB\-falign\-functions\fR. This option can easily
-make code slower, because it must insert dummy operations for when the
-branch target is reached in the usual flow of the code.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fno\-align\-labels\fR and \fB\-falign\-labels=1\fR are
-equivalent and mean that labels will not be aligned.
-.Sp
-If \fB\-falign\-loops\fR or \fB\-falign\-jumps\fR are applicable and
-are greater than this value, then their values are used instead.
-.Sp
-If \fIn\fR is not specified or is zero, use a machine-dependent default
-which is very likely to be \fB1\fR, meaning no alignment.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-loops\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-loops"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-loops=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-loops=n"
-.PD
-Align loops to a power-of-two boundary, skipping up to \fIn\fR bytes
-like \fB\-falign\-functions\fR. The hope is that the loop will be
-executed many times, which will make up for any execution of the dummy
-operations.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fno\-align\-loops\fR and \fB\-falign\-loops=1\fR are
-equivalent and mean that loops will not be aligned.
-.Sp
-If \fIn\fR is not specified or is zero, use a machine-dependent default.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-jumps\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-jumps"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-falign\-jumps=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-falign-jumps=n"
-.PD
-Align branch targets to a power-of-two boundary, for branch targets
-where the targets can only be reached by jumping, skipping up to \fIn\fR
-bytes like \fB\-falign\-functions\fR. In this case, no dummy operations
-need be executed.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fno\-align\-jumps\fR and \fB\-falign\-jumps=1\fR are
-equivalent and mean that loops will not be aligned.
-.Sp
-If \fIn\fR is not specified or is zero, use a machine-dependent default.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-frename\-registers\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-frename-registers"
-Attempt to avoid false dependencies in scheduled code by making use
-of registers left over after register allocation. This optimization
-will most benefit processors with lots of registers. It can, however,
-make debugging impossible, since variables will no longer stay in
-a ``home register''.
-.Sp
-Enabled at levels \fB\-O3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-cprop\-registers\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-cprop-registers"
-After register allocation and post-register allocation instruction splitting,
-we perform a copy-propagation pass to try to reduce scheduling dependencies
-and occasionally eliminate the copy.
-.Sp
-Disabled at levels \fB\-O\fR, \fB\-O2\fR, \fB\-O3\fR, \fB\-Os\fR.
-.PP
-The following options control compiler behavior regarding floating
-point arithmetic. These options trade off between speed and
-correctness. All must be specifically enabled.
-.IP "\fB\-ffloat\-store\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ffloat-store"
-Do not store floating point variables in registers, and inhibit other
-options that might change whether a floating point value is taken from a
-register or memory.
-.Sp
-This option prevents undesirable excess precision on machines such as
-the 68000 where the floating registers (of the 68881) keep more
-precision than a \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR is supposed to have. Similarly for the
-x86 architecture. For most programs, the excess precision does only
-good, but a few programs rely on the precise definition of \s-1IEEE\s0 floating
-point. Use \fB\-ffloat\-store\fR for such programs, after modifying
-them to store all pertinent intermediate computations into variables.
-.IP "\fB\-ffast\-math\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ffast-math"
-Sets \fB\-fno\-math\-errno\fR, \fB\-funsafe\-math\-optimizations\fR, \fB\-fno\-trapping\-math\fR, \fB\-ffinite\-math\-only\fR and \fB\-fno\-signaling\-nans\fR.
-.Sp
-This option causes the preprocessor macro \f(CW\*(C`_\|_FAST_MATH_\|_\*(C'\fR to be defined.
-.Sp
-This option should never be turned on by any \fB\-O\fR option since
-it can result in incorrect output for programs which depend on
-an exact implementation of \s-1IEEE\s0 or \s-1ISO\s0 rules/specifications for
-math functions.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-math\-errno\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-math-errno"
-Do not set \s-1ERRNO\s0 after calling math functions that are executed
-with a single instruction, e.g., sqrt. A program that relies on
-\&\s-1IEEE\s0 exceptions for math error handling may want to use this flag
-for speed while maintaining \s-1IEEE\s0 arithmetic compatibility.
-.Sp
-This option should never be turned on by any \fB\-O\fR option since
-it can result in incorrect output for programs which depend on
-an exact implementation of \s-1IEEE\s0 or \s-1ISO\s0 rules/specifications for
-math functions.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-fmath\-errno\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-funsafe\-math\-optimizations\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-funsafe-math-optimizations"
-Allow optimizations for floating-point arithmetic that (a) assume
-that arguments and results are valid and (b) may violate \s-1IEEE\s0 or
-\&\s-1ANSI\s0 standards. When used at link\-time, it may include libraries
-or startup files that change the default \s-1FPU\s0 control word or other
-similar optimizations.
-.Sp
-This option should never be turned on by any \fB\-O\fR option since
-it can result in incorrect output for programs which depend on
-an exact implementation of \s-1IEEE\s0 or \s-1ISO\s0 rules/specifications for
-math functions.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-fno\-unsafe\-math\-optimizations\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-ffinite\-math\-only\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ffinite-math-only"
-Allow optimizations for floating-point arithmetic that assume
-that arguments and results are not NaNs or +\-Infs.
-.Sp
-This option should never be turned on by any \fB\-O\fR option since
-it can result in incorrect output for programs which depend on
-an exact implementation of \s-1IEEE\s0 or \s-1ISO\s0 rules/specifications.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-fno\-finite\-math\-only\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-trapping\-math\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-trapping-math"
-Compile code assuming that floating-point operations cannot generate
-user-visible traps. These traps include division by zero, overflow,
-underflow, inexact result and invalid operation. This option implies
-\&\fB\-fno\-signaling\-nans\fR. Setting this option may allow faster
-code if one relies on ``non\-stop'' \s-1IEEE\s0 arithmetic, for example.
-.Sp
-This option should never be turned on by any \fB\-O\fR option since
-it can result in incorrect output for programs which depend on
-an exact implementation of \s-1IEEE\s0 or \s-1ISO\s0 rules/specifications for
-math functions.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-ftrapping\-math\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fsignaling\-nans\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsignaling-nans"
-Compile code assuming that \s-1IEEE\s0 signaling NaNs may generate user-visible
-traps during floating-point operations. Setting this option disables
-optimizations that may change the number of exceptions visible with
-signaling NaNs. This option implies \fB\-ftrapping\-math\fR.
-.Sp
-This option causes the preprocessor macro \f(CW\*(C`_\|_SUPPORT_SNAN_\|_\*(C'\fR to
-be defined.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-fno\-signaling\-nans\fR.
-.Sp
-This option is experimental and does not currently guarantee to
-disable all \s-1GCC\s0 optimizations that affect signaling NaN behavior.
-.IP "\fB\-fsingle\-precision\-constant\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fsingle-precision-constant"
-Treat floating point constant as single precision constant instead of
-implicitly converting it to double precision constant.
-.PP
-The following options control optimizations that may improve
-performance, but are not enabled by any \fB\-O\fR options. This
-section includes experimental options that may produce broken code.
-.IP "\fB\-fbranch\-probabilities\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fbranch-probabilities"
-After running a program compiled with \fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR, you can compile it a second time using
-\&\fB\-fbranch\-probabilities\fR, to improve optimizations based on
-the number of times each branch was taken. When the program
-compiled with \fB\-fprofile\-arcs\fR exits it saves arc execution
-counts to a file called \fI\fIsourcename\fI.da\fR for each source
-file The information in this data file is very dependent on the
-structure of the generated code, so you must use the same source code
-and the same optimization options for both compilations.
-.Sp
-With \fB\-fbranch\-probabilities\fR, \s-1GCC\s0 puts a
-\&\fB\s-1REG_BR_PROB\s0\fR note on each \fB\s-1JUMP_INSN\s0\fR and \fB\s-1CALL_INSN\s0\fR.
-These can be used to improve optimization. Currently, they are only
-used in one place: in \fIreorg.c\fR, instead of guessing which path a
-branch is mostly to take, the \fB\s-1REG_BR_PROB\s0\fR values are used to
-exactly determine which path is taken more often.
-.IP "\fB\-fnew\-ra\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fnew-ra"
-Use a graph coloring register allocator. Currently this option is meant
-for testing, so we are interested to hear about miscompilations with
-\&\fB\-fnew\-ra\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-ftracer\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ftracer"
-Perform tail duplication to enlarge superblock size. This transformation
-simplifies the control flow of the function allowing other optimizations to do
-better job.
-.IP "\fB\-funroll\-loops\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-funroll-loops"
-Unroll loops whose number of iterations can be determined at compile
-time or upon entry to the loop. \fB\-funroll\-loops\fR implies both
-\&\fB\-fstrength\-reduce\fR and \fB\-frerun\-cse\-after\-loop\fR. This
-option makes code larger, and may or may not make it run faster.
-.IP "\fB\-funroll\-all\-loops\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-funroll-all-loops"
-Unroll all loops, even if their number of iterations is uncertain when
-the loop is entered. This usually makes programs run more slowly.
-\&\fB\-funroll\-all\-loops\fR implies the same options as
-\&\fB\-funroll\-loops\fR,
-.IP "\fB\-fprefetch\-loop\-arrays\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fprefetch-loop-arrays"
-If supported by the target machine, generate instructions to prefetch
-memory to improve the performance of loops that access large arrays.
-.Sp
-Disabled at level \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-ffunction\-sections\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ffunction-sections"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fdata\-sections\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fdata-sections"
-.PD
-Place each function or data item into its own section in the output
-file if the target supports arbitrary sections. The name of the
-function or the name of the data item determines the section's name
-in the output file.
-.Sp
-Use these options on systems where the linker can perform optimizations
-to improve locality of reference in the instruction space. Most systems
-using the \s-1ELF\s0 object format and \s-1SPARC\s0 processors running Solaris 2 have
-linkers with such optimizations. \s-1AIX\s0 may have these optimizations in
-the future.
-.Sp
-Only use these options when there are significant benefits from doing
-so. When you specify these options, the assembler and linker will
-create larger object and executable files and will also be slower.
-You will not be able to use \f(CW\*(C`gprof\*(C'\fR on all systems if you
-specify this option and you may have problems with debugging if
-you specify both this option and \fB\-g\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-fssa\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fssa"
-Perform optimizations in static single assignment form. Each function's
-flow graph is translated into \s-1SSA\s0 form, optimizations are performed, and
-the flow graph is translated back from \s-1SSA\s0 form. Users should not
-specify this option, since it is not yet ready for production use.
-.IP "\fB\-fssa\-ccp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fssa-ccp"
-Perform Sparse Conditional Constant Propagation in \s-1SSA\s0 form. Requires
-\&\fB\-fssa\fR. Like \fB\-fssa\fR, this is an experimental feature.
-.IP "\fB\-fssa\-dce\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fssa-dce"
-Perform aggressive dead-code elimination in \s-1SSA\s0 form. Requires \fB\-fssa\fR.
-Like \fB\-fssa\fR, this is an experimental feature.
-.IP "\fB\-\-param\fR \fIname\fR\fB=\fR\fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--param name=value"
-In some places, \s-1GCC\s0 uses various constants to control the amount of
-optimization that is done. For example, \s-1GCC\s0 will not inline functions
-that contain more that a certain number of instructions. You can
-control some of these constants on the command-line using the
-\&\fB\-\-param\fR option.
-.Sp
-In each case, the \fIvalue\fR is an integer. The allowable choices for
-\&\fIname\fR are given in the following table:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBmax-crossjump-edges\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-crossjump-edges"
-The maximum number of incoming edges to consider for crossjumping.
-The algorithm used by \fB\-fcrossjumping\fR is O(N^2) in
-the number of edges incoming to each block. Increasing values mean
-more aggressive optimization, making the compile time increase with
-probably small improvement in executable size.
-.IP "\fBmax-delay-slot-insn-search\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-delay-slot-insn-search"
-The maximum number of instructions to consider when looking for an
-instruction to fill a delay slot. If more than this arbitrary number of
-instructions is searched, the time savings from filling the delay slot
-will be minimal so stop searching. Increasing values mean more
-aggressive optimization, making the compile time increase with probably
-small improvement in executable run time.
-.IP "\fBmax-delay-slot-live-search\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-delay-slot-live-search"
-When trying to fill delay slots, the maximum number of instructions to
-consider when searching for a block with valid live register
-information. Increasing this arbitrarily chosen value means more
-aggressive optimization, increasing the compile time. This parameter
-should be removed when the delay slot code is rewritten to maintain the
-control-flow graph.
-.IP "\fBmax-gcse-memory\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-gcse-memory"
-The approximate maximum amount of memory that will be allocated in
-order to perform the global common subexpression elimination
-optimization. If more memory than specified is required, the
-optimization will not be done.
-.IP "\fBmax-gcse-passes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-gcse-passes"
-The maximum number of passes of \s-1GCSE\s0 to run.
-.IP "\fBmax-pending-list-length\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-pending-list-length"
-The maximum number of pending dependencies scheduling will allow
-before flushing the current state and starting over. Large functions
-with few branches or calls can create excessively large lists which
-needlessly consume memory and resources.
-.IP "\fBmax-inline-insns-single\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-inline-insns-single"
-Several parameters control the tree inliner used in gcc.
-This number sets the maximum number of instructions (counted in gcc's
-internal representation) in a single function that the tree inliner
-will consider for inlining. This only affects functions declared
-inline and methods implemented in a class declaration (\*(C+).
-The default value is 300.
-.IP "\fBmax-inline-insns-auto\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-inline-insns-auto"
-When you use \fB\-finline\-functions\fR (included in \fB\-O3\fR),
-a lot of functions that would otherwise not be considered for inlining
-by the compiler will be investigated. To those functions, a different
-(more restrictive) limit compared to functions declared inline can
-be applied.
-The default value is 300.
-.IP "\fBmax-inline-insns\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-inline-insns"
-The tree inliner does decrease the allowable size for single functions
-to be inlined after we already inlined the number of instructions
-given here by repeated inlining. This number should be a factor of
-two or more larger than the single function limit.
-Higher numbers result in better runtime performance, but incur higher
-compile-time resource (\s-1CPU\s0 time, memory) requirements and result in
-larger binaries. Very high values are not advisable, as too large
-binaries may adversely affect runtime performance.
-The default value is 600.
-.IP "\fBmax-inline-slope\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-inline-slope"
-After exceeding the maximum number of inlined instructions by repeated
-inlining, a linear function is used to decrease the allowable size
-for single functions. The slope of that function is the negative
-reciprocal of the number specified here.
-The default value is 32.
-.IP "\fBmin-inline-insns\fR" 4
-.IX Item "min-inline-insns"
-The repeated inlining is throttled more and more by the linear function
-after exceeding the limit. To avoid too much throttling, a minimum for
-this function is specified here to allow repeated inlining for very small
-functions even when a lot of repeated inlining already has been done.
-The default value is 130.
-.IP "\fBmax-inline-insns-rtl\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-inline-insns-rtl"
-For languages that use the \s-1RTL\s0 inliner (this happens at a later stage
-than tree inlining), you can set the maximum allowable size (counted
-in \s-1RTL\s0 instructions) for the \s-1RTL\s0 inliner with this parameter.
-The default value is 600.
-.IP "\fBmax-unrolled-insns\fR" 4
-.IX Item "max-unrolled-insns"
-The maximum number of instructions that a loop should have if that loop
-is unrolled, and if the loop is unrolled, it determines how many times
-the loop code is unrolled.
-.IP "\fBhot-bb-count-fraction\fR" 4
-.IX Item "hot-bb-count-fraction"
-Select fraction of the maximal count of repetitions of basic block in program
-given basic block needs to have to be considered hot.
-.IP "\fBhot-bb-frequency-fraction\fR" 4
-.IX Item "hot-bb-frequency-fraction"
-Select fraction of the maximal frequency of executions of basic block in
-function given basic block needs to have to be considered hot
-.IP "\fBtracer-dynamic-coverage\fR" 4
-.IX Item "tracer-dynamic-coverage"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBtracer-dynamic-coverage-feedback\fR" 4
-.IX Item "tracer-dynamic-coverage-feedback"
-.PD
-This value is used to limit superblock formation once the given percentage of
-executed instructions is covered. This limits unnecessary code size
-expansion.
-.Sp
-The \fBtracer-dynamic-coverage-feedback\fR is used only when profile
-feedback is available. The real profiles (as opposed to statically estimated
-ones) are much less balanced allowing the threshold to be larger value.
-.IP "\fBtracer-max-code-growth\fR" 4
-.IX Item "tracer-max-code-growth"
-Stop tail duplication once code growth has reached given percentage. This is
-rather hokey argument, as most of the duplicates will be eliminated later in
-cross jumping, so it may be set to much higher values than is the desired code
-growth.
-.IP "\fBtracer-min-branch-ratio\fR" 4
-.IX Item "tracer-min-branch-ratio"
-Stop reverse growth when the reverse probability of best edge is less than this
-threshold (in percent).
-.IP "\fBtracer-min-branch-ratio\fR" 4
-.IX Item "tracer-min-branch-ratio"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBtracer-min-branch-ratio-feedback\fR" 4
-.IX Item "tracer-min-branch-ratio-feedback"
-.PD
-Stop forward growth if the best edge do have probability lower than this
-threshold.
-.Sp
-Similarly to \fBtracer-dynamic-coverage\fR two values are present, one for
-compilation for profile feedback and one for compilation without. The value
-for compilation with profile feedback needs to be more conservative (higher) in
-order to make tracer effective.
-.IP "\fBggc-min-expand\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ggc-min-expand"
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 uses a garbage collector to manage its own memory allocation. This
-parameter specifies the minimum percentage by which the garbage
-collector's heap should be allowed to expand between collections.
-Tuning this may improve compilation speed; it has no effect on code
-generation.
-.Sp
-The default is 30% + 70% * (\s-1RAM/1GB\s0) with an upper bound of 100% when
-\&\s-1RAM\s0 >= 1GB. If \f(CW\*(C`getrlimit\*(C'\fR is available, the notion of \*(L"\s-1RAM\s0\*(R" is
-the smallest of actual \s-1RAM\s0, \s-1RLIMIT_RSS\s0, \s-1RLIMIT_DATA\s0 and \s-1RLIMIT_AS\s0. If
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 is not able to calculate \s-1RAM\s0 on a particular platform, the lower
-bound of 30% is used. Setting this parameter and
-\&\fBggc-min-heapsize\fR to zero causes a full collection to occur at
-every opportunity. This is extremely slow, but can be useful for
-debugging.
-.IP "\fBggc-min-heapsize\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ggc-min-heapsize"
-Minimum size of the garbage collector's heap before it begins bothering
-to collect garbage. The first collection occurs after the heap expands
-by \fBggc-min-expand\fR% beyond \fBggc-min-heapsize\fR. Again,
-tuning this may improve compilation speed, and has no effect on code
-generation.
-.Sp
-The default is \s-1RAM/8\s0, with a lower bound of 4096 (four megabytes) and an
-upper bound of 131072 (128 megabytes). If \f(CW\*(C`getrlimit\*(C'\fR is
-available, the notion of \*(L"\s-1RAM\s0\*(R" is the smallest of actual \s-1RAM\s0,
-\&\s-1RLIMIT_RSS\s0, \s-1RLIMIT_DATA\s0 and \s-1RLIMIT_AS\s0. If \s-1GCC\s0 is not able to calculate
-\&\s-1RAM\s0 on a particular platform, the lower bound is used. Setting this
-parameter very large effectively disables garbage collection. Setting
-this parameter and \fBggc-min-expand\fR to zero causes a full
-collection to occur at every opportunity.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.Sh "Options Controlling the Preprocessor"
-.IX Subsection "Options Controlling the Preprocessor"
-These options control the C preprocessor, which is run on each C source
-file before actual compilation.
-.PP
-If you use the \fB\-E\fR option, nothing is done except preprocessing.
-Some of these options make sense only together with \fB\-E\fR because
-they cause the preprocessor output to be unsuitable for actual
-compilation.
-.PP
-You can use \fB\-Wp,\fR\fIoption\fR to bypass the compiler driver
-and pass \fIoption\fR directly through to the preprocessor. If
-\&\fIoption\fR contains commas, it is split into multiple options at the
-commas. However, many options are modified, translated or interpreted
-by the compiler driver before being passed to the preprocessor, and
-\&\fB\-Wp\fR forcibly bypasses this phase. The preprocessor's direct
-interface is undocumented and subject to change, so whenever possible
-you should avoid using \fB\-Wp\fR and let the driver handle the
-options instead.
-.IP "\fB\-D\fR \fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-D name"
-Predefine \fIname\fR as a macro, with definition \f(CW1\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-D\fR \fIname\fR\fB=\fR\fIdefinition\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-D name=definition"
-Predefine \fIname\fR as a macro, with definition \fIdefinition\fR.
-There are no restrictions on the contents of \fIdefinition\fR, but if
-you are invoking the preprocessor from a shell or shell-like program you
-may need to use the shell's quoting syntax to protect characters such as
-spaces that have a meaning in the shell syntax.
-.Sp
-If you wish to define a function-like macro on the command line, write
-its argument list with surrounding parentheses before the equals sign
-(if any). Parentheses are meaningful to most shells, so you will need
-to quote the option. With \fBsh\fR and \fBcsh\fR,
-\&\fB\-D'\fR\fIname\fR\fB(\fR\fIargs...\fR\fB)=\fR\fIdefinition\fR\fB'\fR works.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-D\fR and \fB\-U\fR options are processed in the order they
-are given on the command line. All \fB\-imacros\fR \fIfile\fR and
-\&\fB\-include\fR \fIfile\fR options are processed after all
-\&\fB\-D\fR and \fB\-U\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-U\fR \fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-U name"
-Cancel any previous definition of \fIname\fR, either built in or
-provided with a \fB\-D\fR option.
-.IP "\fB\-undef\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-undef"
-Do not predefine any system-specific or GCC-specific macros. The
-standard predefined macros remain defined.
-.IP "\fB\-I\fR \fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-I dir"
-Add the directory \fIdir\fR to the list of directories to be searched
-for header files.
-Directories named by \fB\-I\fR are searched before the standard
-system include directories. If the directory \fIdir\fR is a standard
-system include directory, the option is ignored to ensure that the
-default search order for system directories and the special treatment
-of system headers are not defeated
-\&.
-.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-o file"
-Write output to \fIfile\fR. This is the same as specifying \fIfile\fR
-as the second non-option argument to \fBcpp\fR. \fBgcc\fR has a
-different interpretation of a second non-option argument, so you must
-use \fB\-o\fR to specify the output file.
-.IP "\fB\-Wall\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wall"
-Turns on all optional warnings which are desirable for normal code. At
-present this is \fB\-Wcomment\fR and \fB\-Wtrigraphs\fR. Note that
-many of the preprocessor's warnings are on by default and have no
-options to control them.
-.IP "\fB\-Wcomment\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wcomment"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-Wcomments\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wcomments"
-.PD
-Warn whenever a comment-start sequence \fB/*\fR appears in a \fB/*\fR
-comment, or whenever a backslash-newline appears in a \fB//\fR comment.
-(Both forms have the same effect.)
-.IP "\fB\-Wtrigraphs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wtrigraphs"
-Warn if any trigraphs are encountered. This option used to take effect
-only if \fB\-trigraphs\fR was also specified, but now works
-independently. Warnings are not given for trigraphs within comments, as
-they do not affect the meaning of the program.
-.IP "\fB\-Wtraditional\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wtraditional"
-Warn about certain constructs that behave differently in traditional and
-\&\s-1ISO\s0 C. Also warn about \s-1ISO\s0 C constructs that have no traditional C
-equivalent, and problematic constructs which should be avoided.
-.IP "\fB\-Wimport\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wimport"
-Warn the first time \fB#import\fR is used.
-.IP "\fB\-Wundef\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wundef"
-Warn whenever an identifier which is not a macro is encountered in an
-\&\fB#if\fR directive, outside of \fBdefined\fR. Such identifiers are
-replaced with zero.
-.IP "\fB\-Wunused\-macros\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wunused-macros"
-Warn about macros defined in the main file that are unused. A macro
-is \fIused\fR if it is expanded or tested for existence at least once.
-The preprocessor will also warn if the macro has not been used at the
-time it is redefined or undefined.
-.Sp
-Built-in macros, macros defined on the command line, and macros
-defined in include files are not warned about.
-.Sp
-\&\fBNote:\fR If a macro is actually used, but only used in skipped
-conditional blocks, then \s-1CPP\s0 will report it as unused. To avoid the
-warning in such a case, you might improve the scope of the macro's
-definition by, for example, moving it into the first skipped block.
-Alternatively, you could provide a dummy use with something like:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& #if defined the_macro_causing_the_warning
-\& #endif
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-Wendif\-labels\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wendif-labels"
-Warn whenever an \fB#else\fR or an \fB#endif\fR are followed by text.
-This usually happens in code of the form
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& #if FOO
-\& ...
-\& #else FOO
-\& ...
-\& #endif FOO
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The second and third \f(CW\*(C`FOO\*(C'\fR should be in comments, but often are not
-in older programs. This warning is on by default.
-.IP "\fB\-Werror\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Werror"
-Make all warnings into hard errors. Source code which triggers warnings
-will be rejected.
-.IP "\fB\-Wsystem\-headers\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wsystem-headers"
-Issue warnings for code in system headers. These are normally unhelpful
-in finding bugs in your own code, therefore suppressed. If you are
-responsible for the system library, you may want to see them.
-.IP "\fB\-w\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-w"
-Suppress all warnings, including those which \s-1GNU\s0 \s-1CPP\s0 issues by default.
-.IP "\fB\-pedantic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pedantic"
-Issue all the mandatory diagnostics listed in the C standard. Some of
-them are left out by default, since they trigger frequently on harmless
-code.
-.IP "\fB\-pedantic\-errors\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pedantic-errors"
-Issue all the mandatory diagnostics, and make all mandatory diagnostics
-into errors. This includes mandatory diagnostics that \s-1GCC\s0 issues
-without \fB\-pedantic\fR but treats as warnings.
-.IP "\fB\-M\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-M"
-Instead of outputting the result of preprocessing, output a rule
-suitable for \fBmake\fR describing the dependencies of the main
-source file. The preprocessor outputs one \fBmake\fR rule containing
-the object file name for that source file, a colon, and the names of all
-the included files, including those coming from \fB\-include\fR or
-\&\fB\-imacros\fR command line options.
-.Sp
-Unless specified explicitly (with \fB\-MT\fR or \fB\-MQ\fR), the
-object file name consists of the basename of the source file with any
-suffix replaced with object file suffix. If there are many included
-files then the rule is split into several lines using \fB\e\fR\-newline.
-The rule has no commands.
-.Sp
-This option does not suppress the preprocessor's debug output, such as
-\&\fB\-dM\fR. To avoid mixing such debug output with the dependency
-rules you should explicitly specify the dependency output file with
-\&\fB\-MF\fR, or use an environment variable like
-\&\fB\s-1DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT\s0\fR. Debug output
-will still be sent to the regular output stream as normal.
-.Sp
-Passing \fB\-M\fR to the driver implies \fB\-E\fR, and suppresses
-warnings with an implicit \fB\-w\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-MM\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MM"
-Like \fB\-M\fR but do not mention header files that are found in
-system header directories, nor header files that are included,
-directly or indirectly, from such a header.
-.Sp
-This implies that the choice of angle brackets or double quotes in an
-\&\fB#include\fR directive does not in itself determine whether that
-header will appear in \fB\-MM\fR dependency output. This is a
-slight change in semantics from \s-1GCC\s0 versions 3.0 and earlier.
-.IP "\fB\-MF\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MF file"
- at anchor{\-MF}
-When used with \fB\-M\fR or \fB\-MM\fR, specifies a
-file to write the dependencies to. If no \fB\-MF\fR switch is given
-the preprocessor sends the rules to the same place it would have sent
-preprocessed output.
-.Sp
-When used with the driver options \fB\-MD\fR or \fB\-MMD\fR,
-\&\fB\-MF\fR overrides the default dependency output file.
-.IP "\fB\-MG\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MG"
-In conjunction with an option such as \fB\-M\fR requesting
-dependency generation, \fB\-MG\fR assumes missing header files are
-generated files and adds them to the dependency list without raising
-an error. The dependency filename is taken directly from the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`#include\*(C'\fR directive without prepending any path. \fB\-MG\fR
-also suppresses preprocessed output, as a missing header file renders
-this useless.
-.Sp
-This feature is used in automatic updating of makefiles.
-.IP "\fB\-MP\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MP"
-This option instructs \s-1CPP\s0 to add a phony target for each dependency
-other than the main file, causing each to depend on nothing. These
-dummy rules work around errors \fBmake\fR gives if you remove header
-files without updating the \fIMakefile\fR to match.
-.Sp
-This is typical output:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& test.o: test.c test.h
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& test.h:
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-MT\fR \fItarget\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MT target"
-Change the target of the rule emitted by dependency generation. By
-default \s-1CPP\s0 takes the name of the main input file, including any path,
-deletes any file suffix such as \fB.c\fR, and appends the platform's
-usual object suffix. The result is the target.
-.Sp
-An \fB\-MT\fR option will set the target to be exactly the string you
-specify. If you want multiple targets, you can specify them as a single
-argument to \fB\-MT\fR, or use multiple \fB\-MT\fR options.
-.Sp
-For example, \fB\-MT\ '$(objpfx)foo.o'\fR might give
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $(objpfx)foo.o: foo.c
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-MQ\fR \fItarget\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MQ target"
-Same as \fB\-MT\fR, but it quotes any characters which are special to
-Make. \fB\-MQ\ '$(objpfx)foo.o'\fR gives
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $$(objpfx)foo.o: foo.c
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The default target is automatically quoted, as if it were given with
-\&\fB\-MQ\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-MD\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MD"
-\&\fB\-MD\fR is equivalent to \fB\-M \-MF\fR \fIfile\fR, except that
-\&\fB\-E\fR is not implied. The driver determines \fIfile\fR based on
-whether an \fB\-o\fR option is given. If it is, the driver uses its
-argument but with a suffix of \fI.d\fR, otherwise it take the
-basename of the input file and applies a \fI.d\fR suffix.
-.Sp
-If \fB\-MD\fR is used in conjunction with \fB\-E\fR, any
-\&\fB\-o\fR switch is understood to specify the dependency output file
-(but \f(CW at pxref\fR{\-MF}), but if used without \fB\-E\fR, each \fB\-o\fR
-is understood to specify a target object file.
-.Sp
-Since \fB\-E\fR is not implied, \fB\-MD\fR can be used to generate
-a dependency output file as a side-effect of the compilation process.
-.IP "\fB\-MMD\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-MMD"
-Like \fB\-MD\fR except mention only user header files, not system
-\&\-header files.
-.IP "\fB\-x c\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x c"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-x c++\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x c++"
-.IP "\fB\-x objective-c\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x objective-c"
-.IP "\fB\-x assembler-with-cpp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x assembler-with-cpp"
-.PD
-Specify the source language: C, \*(C+, Objective\-C, or assembly. This has
-nothing to do with standards conformance or extensions; it merely
-selects which base syntax to expect. If you give none of these options,
-cpp will deduce the language from the extension of the source file:
-\&\fB.c\fR, \fB.cc\fR, \fB.m\fR, or \fB.S\fR. Some other common
-extensions for \*(C+ and assembly are also recognized. If cpp does not
-recognize the extension, it will treat the file as C; this is the most
-generic mode.
-.Sp
-\&\fBNote:\fR Previous versions of cpp accepted a \fB\-lang\fR option
-which selected both the language and the standards conformance level.
-This option has been removed, because it conflicts with the \fB\-l\fR
-option.
-.IP "\fB\-std=\fR\fIstandard\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-std=standard"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-ansi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ansi"
-.PD
-Specify the standard to which the code should conform. Currently \s-1CPP\s0
-knows about C and \*(C+ standards; others may be added in the future.
-.Sp
-\&\fIstandard\fR
-may be one of:
-.RS 4
-.ie n .IP """iso9899:1990""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWiso9899:1990\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:1990"
-.PD 0
-.ie n .IP """c89""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWc89\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c89"
-.PD
-The \s-1ISO\s0 C standard from 1990. \fBc89\fR is the customary shorthand for
-this version of the standard.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-ansi\fR option is equivalent to \fB\-std=c89\fR.
-.ie n .IP """iso9899:199409""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWiso9899:199409\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:199409"
-The 1990 C standard, as amended in 1994.
-.ie n .IP """iso9899:1999""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWiso9899:1999\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:1999"
-.PD 0
-.ie n .IP """c99""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWc99\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c99"
-.ie n .IP """iso9899:199x""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWiso9899:199x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "iso9899:199x"
-.ie n .IP """c9x""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWc9x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c9x"
-.PD
-The revised \s-1ISO\s0 C standard, published in December 1999. Before
-publication, this was known as C9X.
-.ie n .IP """gnu89""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWgnu89\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu89"
-The 1990 C standard plus \s-1GNU\s0 extensions. This is the default.
-.ie n .IP """gnu99""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWgnu99\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu99"
-.PD 0
-.ie n .IP """gnu9x""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWgnu9x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu9x"
-.PD
-The 1999 C standard plus \s-1GNU\s0 extensions.
-.ie n .IP """c++98""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWc++98\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c++98"
-The 1998 \s-1ISO\s0 \*(C+ standard plus amendments.
-.ie n .IP """gnu++98""" 4
-.el .IP "\f(CWgnu++98\fR" 4
-.IX Item "gnu++98"
-The same as \fB\-std=c++98\fR plus \s-1GNU\s0 extensions. This is the
-default for \*(C+ code.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-I\-\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-I-"
-Split the include path. Any directories specified with \fB\-I\fR
-options before \fB\-I\-\fR are searched only for headers requested with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`#include\ "\f(CIfile\f(CW"\*(C'\fR; they are not searched for
-\&\f(CW\*(C`#include\ <\f(CIfile\f(CW>\*(C'\fR. If additional directories are
-specified with \fB\-I\fR options after the \fB\-I\-\fR, those
-directories are searched for all \fB#include\fR directives.
-.Sp
-In addition, \fB\-I\-\fR inhibits the use of the directory of the current
-file directory as the first search directory for \f(CW\*(C`#include\ "\f(CIfile\f(CW"\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-nostdinc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nostdinc"
-Do not search the standard system directories for header files.
-Only the directories you have specified with \fB\-I\fR options
-(and the directory of the current file, if appropriate) are searched.
-.IP "\fB\-nostdinc++\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nostdinc++"
-Do not search for header files in the \*(C+\-specific standard directories,
-but do still search the other standard directories. (This option is
-used when building the \*(C+ library.)
-.IP "\fB\-include\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-include file"
-Process \fIfile\fR as if \f(CW\*(C`#include "file"\*(C'\fR appeared as the first
-line of the primary source file. However, the first directory searched
-for \fIfile\fR is the preprocessor's working directory \fIinstead of\fR
-the directory containing the main source file. If not found there, it
-is searched for in the remainder of the \f(CW\*(C`#include "..."\*(C'\fR search
-chain as normal.
-.Sp
-If multiple \fB\-include\fR options are given, the files are included
-in the order they appear on the command line.
-.IP "\fB\-imacros\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-imacros file"
-Exactly like \fB\-include\fR, except that any output produced by
-scanning \fIfile\fR is thrown away. Macros it defines remain defined.
-This allows you to acquire all the macros from a header without also
-processing its declarations.
-.Sp
-All files specified by \fB\-imacros\fR are processed before all files
-specified by \fB\-include\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-idirafter\fR \fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-idirafter dir"
-Search \fIdir\fR for header files, but do it \fIafter\fR all
-directories specified with \fB\-I\fR and the standard system directories
-have been exhausted. \fIdir\fR is treated as a system include directory.
-.IP "\fB\-iprefix\fR \fIprefix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-iprefix prefix"
-Specify \fIprefix\fR as the prefix for subsequent \fB\-iwithprefix\fR
-options. If the prefix represents a directory, you should include the
-final \fB/\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-iwithprefix\fR \fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-iwithprefix dir"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-iwithprefixbefore\fR \fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-iwithprefixbefore dir"
-.PD
-Append \fIdir\fR to the prefix specified previously with
-\&\fB\-iprefix\fR, and add the resulting directory to the include search
-path. \fB\-iwithprefixbefore\fR puts it in the same place \fB\-I\fR
-would; \fB\-iwithprefix\fR puts it where \fB\-idirafter\fR would.
-.Sp
-Use of these options is discouraged.
-.IP "\fB\-isystem\fR \fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-isystem dir"
-Search \fIdir\fR for header files, after all directories specified by
-\&\fB\-I\fR but before the standard system directories. Mark it
-as a system directory, so that it gets the same special treatment as
-is applied to the standard system directories.
-.IP "\fB\-fpreprocessed\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fpreprocessed"
-Indicate to the preprocessor that the input file has already been
-preprocessed. This suppresses things like macro expansion, trigraph
-conversion, escaped newline splicing, and processing of most directives.
-The preprocessor still recognizes and removes comments, so that you can
-pass a file preprocessed with \fB\-C\fR to the compiler without
-problems. In this mode the integrated preprocessor is little more than
-a tokenizer for the front ends.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fpreprocessed\fR is implicit if the input file has one of the
-extensions \fB.i\fR, \fB.ii\fR or \fB.mi\fR. These are the
-extensions that \s-1GCC\s0 uses for preprocessed files created by
-\&\fB\-save\-temps\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-ftabstop=\fR\fIwidth\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ftabstop=width"
-Set the distance between tab stops. This helps the preprocessor report
-correct column numbers in warnings or errors, even if tabs appear on the
-line. If the value is less than 1 or greater than 100, the option is
-ignored. The default is 8.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-show\-column\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-show-column"
-Do not print column numbers in diagnostics. This may be necessary if
-diagnostics are being scanned by a program that does not understand the
-column numbers, such as \fBdejagnu\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-A\fR \fIpredicate\fR\fB=\fR\fIanswer\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-A predicate=answer"
-Make an assertion with the predicate \fIpredicate\fR and answer
-\&\fIanswer\fR. This form is preferred to the older form \fB\-A\fR
-\&\fIpredicate\fR\fB(\fR\fIanswer\fR\fB)\fR, which is still supported, because
-it does not use shell special characters.
-.IP "\fB\-A \-\fR\fIpredicate\fR\fB=\fR\fIanswer\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-A -predicate=answer"
-Cancel an assertion with the predicate \fIpredicate\fR and answer
-\&\fIanswer\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-dCHARS\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dCHARS"
-\&\fI\s-1CHARS\s0\fR is a sequence of one or more of the following characters,
-and must not be preceded by a space. Other characters are interpreted
-by the compiler proper, or reserved for future versions of \s-1GCC\s0, and so
-are silently ignored. If you specify characters whose behavior
-conflicts, the result is undefined.
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBM\fR" 4
-.IX Item "M"
-Instead of the normal output, generate a list of \fB#define\fR
-directives for all the macros defined during the execution of the
-preprocessor, including predefined macros. This gives you a way of
-finding out what is predefined in your version of the preprocessor.
-Assuming you have no file \fIfoo.h\fR, the command
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& touch foo.h; cpp -dM foo.h
-.Ve
-.Sp
-will show all the predefined macros.
-.IP "\fBD\fR" 4
-.IX Item "D"
-Like \fBM\fR except in two respects: it does \fInot\fR include the
-predefined macros, and it outputs \fIboth\fR the \fB#define\fR
-directives and the result of preprocessing. Both kinds of output go to
-the standard output file.
-.IP "\fBN\fR" 4
-.IX Item "N"
-Like \fBD\fR, but emit only the macro names, not their expansions.
-.IP "\fBI\fR" 4
-.IX Item "I"
-Output \fB#include\fR directives in addition to the result of
-preprocessing.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-P\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-P"
-Inhibit generation of linemarkers in the output from the preprocessor.
-This might be useful when running the preprocessor on something that is
-not C code, and will be sent to a program which might be confused by the
-linemarkers.
-.IP "\fB\-C\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-C"
-Do not discard comments. All comments are passed through to the output
-file, except for comments in processed directives, which are deleted
-along with the directive.
-.Sp
-You should be prepared for side effects when using \fB\-C\fR; it
-causes the preprocessor to treat comments as tokens in their own right.
-For example, comments appearing at the start of what would be a
-directive line have the effect of turning that line into an ordinary
-source line, since the first token on the line is no longer a \fB#\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-CC\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-CC"
-Do not discard comments, including during macro expansion. This is
-like \fB\-C\fR, except that comments contained within macros are
-also passed through to the output file where the macro is expanded.
-.Sp
-In addition to the side-effects of the \fB\-C\fR option, the
-\&\fB\-CC\fR option causes all \*(C+\-style comments inside a macro
-to be converted to C\-style comments. This is to prevent later use
-of that macro from inadvertently commenting out the remainder of
-the source line.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-CC\fR option is generally used to support lint comments.
-.IP "\fB\-traditional\-cpp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-traditional-cpp"
-Try to imitate the behavior of old-fashioned C preprocessors, as
-opposed to \s-1ISO\s0 C preprocessors.
-.IP "\fB\-trigraphs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-trigraphs"
-Process trigraph sequences.
-These are three-character sequences, all starting with \fB??\fR, that
-are defined by \s-1ISO\s0 C to stand for single characters. For example,
-\&\fB??/\fR stands for \fB\e\fR, so \fB'??/n'\fR is a character
-constant for a newline. By default, \s-1GCC\s0 ignores trigraphs, but in
-standard-conforming modes it converts them. See the \fB\-std\fR and
-\&\fB\-ansi\fR options.
-.Sp
-The nine trigraphs and their replacements are
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& Trigraph: ??( ??) ??< ??> ??= ??/ ??' ??! ??-
-\& Replacement: [ ] { } # \e ^ | ~
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-remap\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-remap"
-Enable special code to work around file systems which only permit very
-short file names, such as \s-1MS\-DOS\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--help"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-target\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--target-help"
-.PD
-Print text describing all the command line options instead of
-preprocessing anything.
-.IP "\fB\-v\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-v"
-Verbose mode. Print out \s-1GNU\s0 \s-1CPP\s0's version number at the beginning of
-execution, and report the final form of the include path.
-.IP "\fB\-H\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-H"
-Print the name of each header file used, in addition to other normal
-activities. Each name is indented to show how deep in the
-\&\fB#include\fR stack it is.
-.IP "\fB\-version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-version"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--version"
-.PD
-Print out \s-1GNU\s0 \s-1CPP\s0's version number. With one dash, proceed to
-preprocess as normal. With two dashes, exit immediately.
-.Sh "Passing Options to the Assembler"
-.IX Subsection "Passing Options to the Assembler"
-You can pass options to the assembler.
-.IP "\fB\-Wa,\fR\fIoption\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wa,option"
-Pass \fIoption\fR as an option to the assembler. If \fIoption\fR
-contains commas, it is split into multiple options at the commas.
-.Sh "Options for Linking"
-.IX Subsection "Options for Linking"
-These options come into play when the compiler links object files into
-an executable output file. They are meaningless if the compiler is
-not doing a link step.
-.IP "\fIobject-file-name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "object-file-name"
-A file name that does not end in a special recognized suffix is
-considered to name an object file or library. (Object files are
-distinguished from libraries by the linker according to the file
-contents.) If linking is done, these object files are used as input
-to the linker.
-.IP "\fB\-c\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-c"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-S\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-S"
-.IP "\fB\-E\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-E"
-.PD
-If any of these options is used, then the linker is not run, and
-object file names should not be used as arguments.
-.IP "\fB\-l\fR\fIlibrary\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-llibrary"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-l\fR \fIlibrary\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-l library"
-.PD
-Search the library named \fIlibrary\fR when linking. (The second
-alternative with the library as a separate argument is only for
-\&\s-1POSIX\s0 compliance and is not recommended.)
-.Sp
-It makes a difference where in the command you write this option; the
-linker searches and processes libraries and object files in the order they
-are specified. Thus, \fBfoo.o \-lz bar.o\fR searches library \fBz\fR
-after file \fIfoo.o\fR but before \fIbar.o\fR. If \fIbar.o\fR refers
-to functions in \fBz\fR, those functions may not be loaded.
-.Sp
-The linker searches a standard list of directories for the library,
-which is actually a file named \fIlib\fIlibrary\fI.a\fR. The linker
-then uses this file as if it had been specified precisely by name.
-.Sp
-The directories searched include several standard system directories
-plus any that you specify with \fB\-L\fR.
-.Sp
-Normally the files found this way are library files\-\-\-archive files
-whose members are object files. The linker handles an archive file by
-scanning through it for members which define symbols that have so far
-been referenced but not defined. But if the file that is found is an
-ordinary object file, it is linked in the usual fashion. The only
-difference between using an \fB\-l\fR option and specifying a file name
-is that \fB\-l\fR surrounds \fIlibrary\fR with \fBlib\fR and \fB.a\fR
-and searches several directories.
-.IP "\fB\-lobjc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-lobjc"
-You need this special case of the \fB\-l\fR option in order to
-link an Objective-C program.
-.IP "\fB\-nostartfiles\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nostartfiles"
-Do not use the standard system startup files when linking.
-The standard system libraries are used normally, unless \fB\-nostdlib\fR
-or \fB\-nodefaultlibs\fR is used.
-.IP "\fB\-nodefaultlibs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nodefaultlibs"
-Do not use the standard system libraries when linking.
-Only the libraries you specify will be passed to the linker.
-The standard startup files are used normally, unless \fB\-nostartfiles\fR
-is used. The compiler may generate calls to memcmp, memset, and memcpy
-for System V (and \s-1ISO\s0 C) environments or to bcopy and bzero for
-\&\s-1BSD\s0 environments. These entries are usually resolved by entries in
-libc. These entry points should be supplied through some other
-mechanism when this option is specified.
-.IP "\fB\-nostdlib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nostdlib"
-Do not use the standard system startup files or libraries when linking.
-No startup files and only the libraries you specify will be passed to
-the linker. The compiler may generate calls to memcmp, memset, and memcpy
-for System V (and \s-1ISO\s0 C) environments or to bcopy and bzero for
-\&\s-1BSD\s0 environments. These entries are usually resolved by entries in
-libc. These entry points should be supplied through some other
-mechanism when this option is specified.
-.Sp
-One of the standard libraries bypassed by \fB\-nostdlib\fR and
-\&\fB\-nodefaultlibs\fR is \fIlibgcc.a\fR, a library of internal subroutines
-that \s-1GCC\s0 uses to overcome shortcomings of particular machines, or special
-needs for some languages.
-.Sp
-In most cases, you need \fIlibgcc.a\fR even when you want to avoid
-other standard libraries. In other words, when you specify \fB\-nostdlib\fR
-or \fB\-nodefaultlibs\fR you should usually specify \fB\-lgcc\fR as well.
-This ensures that you have no unresolved references to internal \s-1GCC\s0
-library subroutines. (For example, \fB_\|_main\fR, used to ensure \*(C+
-constructors will be called.)
-.IP "\fB\-pie\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pie"
-Produce a position independent executable on targets which support it.
-For predictable results, you must also specify the same set of options
-that were used to generate code (\fB\-fpie\fR, \fB\-fPIE\fR,
-or model suboptions) when you specify this option.
-.IP "\fB\-s\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-s"
-Remove all symbol table and relocation information from the executable.
-.IP "\fB\-static\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-static"
-On systems that support dynamic linking, this prevents linking with the shared
-libraries. On other systems, this option has no effect.
-.IP "\fB\-shared\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-shared"
-Produce a shared object which can then be linked with other objects to
-form an executable. Not all systems support this option. For predictable
-results, you must also specify the same set of options that were used to
-generate code (\fB\-fpic\fR, \fB\-fPIC\fR, or model suboptions)
-when you specify this option.[1]
-.IP "\fB\-shared\-libgcc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-shared-libgcc"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-static\-libgcc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-static-libgcc"
-.PD
-On systems that provide \fIlibgcc\fR as a shared library, these options
-force the use of either the shared or static version respectively.
-If no shared version of \fIlibgcc\fR was built when the compiler was
-configured, these options have no effect.
-.Sp
-There are several situations in which an application should use the
-shared \fIlibgcc\fR instead of the static version. The most common
-of these is when the application wishes to throw and catch exceptions
-across different shared libraries. In that case, each of the libraries
-as well as the application itself should use the shared \fIlibgcc\fR.
-.Sp
-Therefore, the G++ and \s-1GCJ\s0 drivers automatically add
-\&\fB\-shared\-libgcc\fR whenever you build a shared library or a main
-executable, because \*(C+ and Java programs typically use exceptions, so
-this is the right thing to do.
-.Sp
-If, instead, you use the \s-1GCC\s0 driver to create shared libraries, you may
-find that they will not always be linked with the shared \fIlibgcc\fR.
-If \s-1GCC\s0 finds, at its configuration time, that you have a \s-1GNU\s0 linker that
-does not support option \fB\-\-eh\-frame\-hdr\fR, it will link the shared
-version of \fIlibgcc\fR into shared libraries by default. Otherwise,
-it will take advantage of the linker and optimize away the linking with
-the shared version of \fIlibgcc\fR, linking with the static version of
-libgcc by default. This allows exceptions to propagate through such
-shared libraries, without incurring relocation costs at library load
-time.
-.Sp
-However, if a library or main executable is supposed to throw or catch
-exceptions, you must link it using the G++ or \s-1GCJ\s0 driver, as appropriate
-for the languages used in the program, or using the option
-\&\fB\-shared\-libgcc\fR, such that it is linked with the shared
-\&\fIlibgcc\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-symbolic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-symbolic"
-Bind references to global symbols when building a shared object. Warn
-about any unresolved references (unless overridden by the link editor
-option \fB\-Xlinker \-z \-Xlinker defs\fR). Only a few systems support
-this option.
-.IP "\fB\-Xlinker\fR \fIoption\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Xlinker option"
-Pass \fIoption\fR as an option to the linker. You can use this to
-supply system-specific linker options which \s-1GCC\s0 does not know how to
-recognize.
-.Sp
-If you want to pass an option that takes an argument, you must use
-\&\fB\-Xlinker\fR twice, once for the option and once for the argument.
-For example, to pass \fB\-assert definitions\fR, you must write
-\&\fB\-Xlinker \-assert \-Xlinker definitions\fR. It does not work to write
-\&\fB\-Xlinker \*(L"\-assert definitions\*(R"\fR, because this passes the entire
-string as a single argument, which is not what the linker expects.
-.IP "\fB\-Wl,\fR\fIoption\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Wl,option"
-Pass \fIoption\fR as an option to the linker. If \fIoption\fR contains
-commas, it is split into multiple options at the commas.
-.IP "\fB\-u\fR \fIsymbol\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-u symbol"
-Pretend the symbol \fIsymbol\fR is undefined, to force linking of
-library modules to define it. You can use \fB\-u\fR multiple times with
-different symbols to force loading of additional library modules.
-.Sh "Options for Directory Search"
-.IX Subsection "Options for Directory Search"
-These options specify directories to search for header files, for
-libraries and for parts of the compiler:
-.IP "\fB\-I\fR\fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Idir"
-Add the directory \fIdir\fR to the head of the list of directories to be
-searched for header files. This can be used to override a system header
-file, substituting your own version, since these directories are
-searched before the system header file directories. However, you should
-not use this option to add directories that contain vendor-supplied
-system header files (use \fB\-isystem\fR for that). If you use more than
-one \fB\-I\fR option, the directories are scanned in left-to-right
-order; the standard system directories come after.
-.Sp
-If a standard system include directory, or a directory specified with
-\&\fB\-isystem\fR, is also specified with \fB\-I\fR, the \fB\-I\fR
-option will be ignored. The directory will still be searched but as a
-system directory at its normal position in the system include chain.
-This is to ensure that \s-1GCC\s0's procedure to fix buggy system headers and
-the ordering for the include_next directive are not inadvertently changed.
-If you really need to change the search order for system directories,
-use the \fB\-nostdinc\fR and/or \fB\-isystem\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-I\-\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-I-"
-Any directories you specify with \fB\-I\fR options before the \fB\-I\-\fR
-option are searched only for the case of \fB#include "\fR\fIfile\fR\fB"\fR;
-they are not searched for \fB#include <\fR\fIfile\fR\fB>\fR.
-.Sp
-If additional directories are specified with \fB\-I\fR options after
-the \fB\-I\-\fR, these directories are searched for all \fB#include\fR
-directives. (Ordinarily \fIall\fR \fB\-I\fR directories are used
-this way.)
-.Sp
-In addition, the \fB\-I\-\fR option inhibits the use of the current
-directory (where the current input file came from) as the first search
-directory for \fB#include "\fR\fIfile\fR\fB"\fR. There is no way to
-override this effect of \fB\-I\-\fR. With \fB\-I.\fR you can specify
-searching the directory which was current when the compiler was
-invoked. That is not exactly the same as what the preprocessor does
-by default, but it is often satisfactory.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-I\-\fR does not inhibit the use of the standard system directories
-for header files. Thus, \fB\-I\-\fR and \fB\-nostdinc\fR are
-independent.
-.IP "\fB\-L\fR\fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Ldir"
-Add directory \fIdir\fR to the list of directories to be searched
-for \fB\-l\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-B\fR\fIprefix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Bprefix"
-This option specifies where to find the executables, libraries,
-include files, and data files of the compiler itself.
-.Sp
-The compiler driver program runs one or more of the subprograms
-\&\fIcpp\fR, \fIcc1\fR, \fIas\fR and \fIld\fR. It tries
-\&\fIprefix\fR as a prefix for each program it tries to run, both with and
-without \fImachine\fR\fB/\fR\fIversion\fR\fB/\fR.
-.Sp
-For each subprogram to be run, the compiler driver first tries the
-\&\fB\-B\fR prefix, if any. If that name is not found, or if \fB\-B\fR
-was not specified, the driver tries two standard prefixes, which are
-\&\fI/usr/lib/gcc/\fR and \fI/usr/local/lib/gcc\-lib/\fR. If neither of
-those results in a file name that is found, the unmodified program
-name is searched for using the directories specified in your
-\&\fB\s-1PATH\s0\fR environment variable.
-.Sp
-The compiler will check to see if the path provided by the \fB\-B\fR
-refers to a directory, and if necessary it will add a directory
-separator character at the end of the path.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-B\fR prefixes that effectively specify directory names also apply
-to libraries in the linker, because the compiler translates these
-options into \fB\-L\fR options for the linker. They also apply to
-includes files in the preprocessor, because the compiler translates these
-options into \fB\-isystem\fR options for the preprocessor. In this case,
-the compiler appends \fBinclude\fR to the prefix.
-.Sp
-The run-time support file \fIlibgcc.a\fR can also be searched for using
-the \fB\-B\fR prefix, if needed. If it is not found there, the two
-standard prefixes above are tried, and that is all. The file is left
-out of the link if it is not found by those means.
-.Sp
-Another way to specify a prefix much like the \fB\-B\fR prefix is to use
-the environment variable \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR.
-.Sp
-As a special kludge, if the path provided by \fB\-B\fR is
-\&\fI[dir/]stage\fIN\fI/\fR, where \fIN\fR is a number in the range 0 to
-9, then it will be replaced by \fI[dir/]include\fR. This is to help
-with boot-strapping the compiler.
-.IP "\fB\-specs=\fR\fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-specs=file"
-Process \fIfile\fR after the compiler reads in the standard \fIspecs\fR
-file, in order to override the defaults that the \fIgcc\fR driver
-program uses when determining what switches to pass to \fIcc1\fR,
-\&\fIcc1plus\fR, \fIas\fR, \fIld\fR, etc. More than one
-\&\fB\-specs=\fR\fIfile\fR can be specified on the command line, and they
-are processed in order, from left to right.
-.Sh "Specifying Target Machine and Compiler Version"
-.IX Subsection "Specifying Target Machine and Compiler Version"
-The usual way to run \s-1GCC\s0 is to run the executable called \fIgcc\fR, or
-\&\fI<machine>\-gcc\fR when cross\-compiling, or
-\&\fI<machine>\-gcc\-<version>\fR to run a version other than the one that
-was installed last. Sometimes this is inconvenient, so \s-1GCC\s0 provides
-options that will switch to another cross-compiler or version.
-.IP "\fB\-b\fR \fImachine\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-b machine"
-The argument \fImachine\fR specifies the target machine for compilation.
-.Sp
-The value to use for \fImachine\fR is the same as was specified as the
-machine type when configuring \s-1GCC\s0 as a cross\-compiler. For
-example, if a cross-compiler was configured with \fBconfigure
-i386v\fR, meaning to compile for an 80386 running System V, then you
-would specify \fB\-b i386v\fR to run that cross compiler.
-.IP "\fB\-V\fR \fIversion\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-V version"
-The argument \fIversion\fR specifies which version of \s-1GCC\s0 to run.
-This is useful when multiple versions are installed. For example,
-\&\fIversion\fR might be \fB2.0\fR, meaning to run \s-1GCC\s0 version 2.0.
-.PP
-The \fB\-V\fR and \fB\-b\fR options work by running the
-\&\fI<machine>\-gcc\-<version>\fR executable, so there's no real reason to
-use them if you can just run that directly.
-.Sh "Hardware Models and Configurations"
-.IX Subsection "Hardware Models and Configurations"
-Earlier we discussed the standard option \fB\-b\fR which chooses among
-different installed compilers for completely different target
-machines, such as \s-1VAX\s0 vs. 68000 vs. 80386.
-.PP
-In addition, each of these target machine types can have its own
-special options, starting with \fB\-m\fR, to choose among various
-hardware models or configurations\-\-\-for example, 68010 vs 68020,
-floating coprocessor or none. A single installed version of the
-compiler can compile for any model or configuration, according to the
-options specified.
-.PP
-Some configurations of the compiler also support additional special
-options, usually for compatibility with other compilers on the same
-platform.
-.PP
-These options are defined by the macro \f(CW\*(C`TARGET_SWITCHES\*(C'\fR in the
-machine description. The default for the options is also defined by
-that macro, which enables you to change the defaults.
-.Sh "M680x0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "M680x0 Options"
-These are the \fB\-m\fR options defined for the 68000 series. The default
-values for these options depends on which style of 68000 was selected when
-the compiler was configured; the defaults for the most common choices are
-given below.
-.IP "\fB\-m68000\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68000"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mc68000\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mc68000"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 68000. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 68000\-based systems.
-.Sp
-Use this option for microcontrollers with a 68000 or \s-1EC000\s0 core,
-including the 68008, 68302, 68306, 68307, 68322, 68328 and 68356.
-.IP "\fB\-m68020\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68020"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mc68020\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mc68020"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 68020. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 68020\-based systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m68881\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68881"
-Generate output containing 68881 instructions for floating point.
-This is the default for most 68020 systems unless \fB\-\-nfp\fR was
-specified when the compiler was configured.
-.IP "\fB\-m68030\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68030"
-Generate output for a 68030. This is the default when the compiler is
-configured for 68030\-based systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m68040\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68040"
-Generate output for a 68040. This is the default when the compiler is
-configured for 68040\-based systems.
-.Sp
-This option inhibits the use of 68881/68882 instructions that have to be
-emulated by software on the 68040. Use this option if your 68040 does not
-have code to emulate those instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-m68060\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68060"
-Generate output for a 68060. This is the default when the compiler is
-configured for 68060\-based systems.
-.Sp
-This option inhibits the use of 68020 and 68881/68882 instructions that
-have to be emulated by software on the 68060. Use this option if your 68060
-does not have code to emulate those instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu32"
-Generate output for a \s-1CPU32\s0. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for CPU32\-based systems.
-.Sp
-Use this option for microcontrollers with a
-\&\s-1CPU32\s0 or \s-1CPU32+\s0 core, including the 68330, 68331, 68332, 68333, 68334,
-68336, 68340, 68341, 68349 and 68360.
-.IP "\fB\-m5200\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m5200"
-Generate output for a 520X ``coldfire'' family cpu. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 520X\-based systems.
-.Sp
-Use this option for microcontroller with a 5200 core, including
-the \s-1MCF5202\s0, \s-1MCF5203\s0, \s-1MCF5204\s0 and \s-1MCF5202\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-m68020\-40\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68020-40"
-Generate output for a 68040, without using any of the new instructions.
-This results in code which can run relatively efficiently on either a
-68020/68881 or a 68030 or a 68040. The generated code does use the
-68881 instructions that are emulated on the 68040.
-.IP "\fB\-m68020\-60\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68020-60"
-Generate output for a 68060, without using any of the new instructions.
-This results in code which can run relatively efficiently on either a
-68020/68881 or a 68030 or a 68040. The generated code does use the
-68881 instructions that are emulated on the 68060.
-.IP "\fB\-mfpa\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfpa"
-Generate output containing Sun \s-1FPA\s0 instructions for floating point.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Generate output containing library calls for floating point.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite libraries are not available for all m68k
-targets. Normally the facilities of the machine's usual C compiler are
-used, but this can't be done directly in cross\-compilation. You must
-make your own arrangements to provide suitable library functions for
-cross\-compilation. The embedded targets \fBm68k\-*\-aout\fR and
-\&\fBm68k\-*\-coff\fR do provide software floating point support.
-.IP "\fB\-mshort\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mshort"
-Consider type \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR to be 16 bits wide, like \f(CW\*(C`short int\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mnobitfield\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnobitfield"
-Do not use the bit-field instructions. The \fB\-m68000\fR, \fB\-mcpu32\fR
-and \fB\-m5200\fR options imply \fB\-mnobitfield\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mbitfield\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbitfield"
-Do use the bit-field instructions. The \fB\-m68020\fR option implies
-\&\fB\-mbitfield\fR. This is the default if you use a configuration
-designed for a 68020.
-.IP "\fB\-mrtd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrtd"
-Use a different function-calling convention, in which functions
-that take a fixed number of arguments return with the \f(CW\*(C`rtd\*(C'\fR
-instruction, which pops their arguments while returning. This
-saves one instruction in the caller since there is no need to pop
-the arguments there.
-.Sp
-This calling convention is incompatible with the one normally
-used on Unix, so you cannot use it if you need to call libraries
-compiled with the Unix compiler.
-.Sp
-Also, you must provide function prototypes for all functions that
-take variable numbers of arguments (including \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR);
-otherwise incorrect code will be generated for calls to those
-functions.
-.Sp
-In addition, seriously incorrect code will result if you call a
-function with too many arguments. (Normally, extra arguments are
-harmlessly ignored.)
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`rtd\*(C'\fR instruction is supported by the 68010, 68020, 68030,
-68040, 68060 and \s-1CPU32\s0 processors, but not by the 68000 or 5200.
-.IP "\fB\-malign\-int\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-malign-int"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-align\-int\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-align-int"
-.PD
-Control whether \s-1GCC\s0 aligns \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`long\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`long long\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`float\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR variables on a 32\-bit
-boundary (\fB\-malign\-int\fR) or a 16\-bit boundary (\fB\-mno\-align\-int\fR).
-Aligning variables on 32\-bit boundaries produces code that runs somewhat
-faster on processors with 32\-bit busses at the expense of more memory.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR if you use the \fB\-malign\-int\fR switch, \s-1GCC\s0 will
-align structures containing the above types differently than
-most published application binary interface specifications for the m68k.
-.IP "\fB\-mpcrel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpcrel"
-Use the pc-relative addressing mode of the 68000 directly, instead of
-using a global offset table. At present, this option implies \fB\-fpic\fR,
-allowing at most a 16\-bit offset for pc-relative addressing. \fB\-fPIC\fR is
-not presently supported with \fB\-mpcrel\fR, though this could be supported for
-68020 and higher processors.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-strict\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-strict-align"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mstrict\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstrict-align"
-.PD
-Do not (do) assume that unaligned memory references will be handled by
-the system.
-.Sh "M68hc1x Options"
-.IX Subsection "M68hc1x Options"
-These are the \fB\-m\fR options defined for the 68hc11 and 68hc12
-microcontrollers. The default values for these options depends on
-which style of microcontroller was selected when the compiler was configured;
-the defaults for the most common choices are given below.
-.IP "\fB\-m6811\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m6811"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m68hc11\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68hc11"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 68HC11. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 68HC11\-based systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m6812\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m6812"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m68hc12\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68hc12"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 68HC12. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 68HC12\-based systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m68S12\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68S12"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m68hcs12\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m68hcs12"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 68HCS12.
-.IP "\fB\-mauto\-incdec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mauto-incdec"
-Enable the use of 68HC12 pre and post auto-increment and auto-decrement
-addressing modes.
-.IP "\fB\-minmax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-minmax"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-nominmax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nominmax"
-.PD
-Enable the use of 68HC12 min and max instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong-calls"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-long\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-long-calls"
-.PD
-Treat all calls as being far away (near). If calls are assumed to be
-far away, the compiler will use the \f(CW\*(C`call\*(C'\fR instruction to
-call a function and the \f(CW\*(C`rtc\*(C'\fR instruction for returning.
-.IP "\fB\-mshort\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mshort"
-Consider type \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR to be 16 bits wide, like \f(CW\*(C`short int\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-reg\-count=\fR\fIcount\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-reg-count=count"
-Specify the number of pseudo-soft registers which are used for the
-code generation. The maximum number is 32. Using more pseudo-soft
-register may or may not result in better code depending on the program.
-The default is 4 for 68HC11 and 2 for 68HC12.
-.Sh "\s-1VAX\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "VAX Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1VAX:\s0
-.IP "\fB\-munix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-munix"
-Do not output certain jump instructions (\f(CW\*(C`aobleq\*(C'\fR and so on)
-that the Unix assembler for the \s-1VAX\s0 cannot handle across long
-ranges.
-.IP "\fB\-mgnu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgnu"
-Do output those jump instructions, on the assumption that you
-will assemble with the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler.
-.IP "\fB\-mg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mg"
-Output code for g\-format floating point numbers instead of d\-format.
-.Sh "\s-1SPARC\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "SPARC Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR switches are supported on the \s-1SPARC:\s0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-app\-regs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-app-regs"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mapp\-regs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mapp-regs"
-.PD
-Specify \fB\-mapp\-regs\fR to generate output using the global registers
-2 through 4, which the \s-1SPARC\s0 \s-1SVR4\s0 \s-1ABI\s0 reserves for applications. This
-is the default.
-.Sp
-To be fully \s-1SVR4\s0 \s-1ABI\s0 compliant at the cost of some performance loss,
-specify \fB\-mno\-app\-regs\fR. You should compile libraries and system
-software with this option.
-.IP "\fB\-mfpu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfpu"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-float"
-.PD
-Generate output containing floating point instructions. This is the
-default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fpu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fpu"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-.PD
-Generate output containing library calls for floating point.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite libraries are not available for all \s-1SPARC\s0
-targets. Normally the facilities of the machine's usual C compiler are
-used, but this cannot be done directly in cross\-compilation. You must make
-your own arrangements to provide suitable library functions for
-cross\-compilation. The embedded targets \fBsparc\-*\-aout\fR and
-\&\fBsparclite\-*\-*\fR do provide software floating point support.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-msoft\-float\fR changes the calling convention in the output file;
-therefore, it is only useful if you compile \fIall\fR of a program with
-this option. In particular, you need to compile \fIlibgcc.a\fR, the
-library that comes with \s-1GCC\s0, with \fB\-msoft\-float\fR in order for
-this to work.
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-quad\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-quad-float"
-Generate output containing quad-word (long double) floating point
-instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-quad\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-quad-float"
-Generate output containing library calls for quad-word (long double)
-floating point instructions. The functions called are those specified
-in the \s-1SPARC\s0 \s-1ABI\s0. This is the default.
-.Sp
-As of this writing, there are no sparc implementations that have hardware
-support for the quad-word floating point instructions. They all invoke
-a trap handler for one of these instructions, and then the trap handler
-emulates the effect of the instruction. Because of the trap handler overhead,
-this is much slower than calling the \s-1ABI\s0 library routines. Thus the
-\&\fB\-msoft\-quad\-float\fR option is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-flat\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-flat"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mflat\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mflat"
-.PD
-With \fB\-mflat\fR, the compiler does not generate save/restore instructions
-and will use a ``flat'' or single register window calling convention.
-This model uses \f(CW%i7\fR as the frame pointer and is compatible with the normal
-register window model. Code from either may be intermixed.
-The local registers and the input registers (0\-\-5) are still treated as
-``call saved'' registers and will be saved on the stack as necessary.
-.Sp
-With \fB\-mno\-flat\fR (the default), the compiler emits save/restore
-instructions (except for leaf functions) and is the normal mode of operation.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-unaligned\-doubles\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-unaligned-doubles"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-munaligned\-doubles\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-munaligned-doubles"
-.PD
-Assume that doubles have 8 byte alignment. This is the default.
-.Sp
-With \fB\-munaligned\-doubles\fR, \s-1GCC\s0 assumes that doubles have 8 byte
-alignment only if they are contained in another type, or if they have an
-absolute address. Otherwise, it assumes they have 4 byte alignment.
-Specifying this option avoids some rare compatibility problems with code
-generated by other compilers. It is not the default because it results
-in a performance loss, especially for floating point code.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-faster\-structs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-faster-structs"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mfaster\-structs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfaster-structs"
-.PD
-With \fB\-mfaster\-structs\fR, the compiler assumes that structures
-should have 8 byte alignment. This enables the use of pairs of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`ldd\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`std\*(C'\fR instructions for copies in structure
-assignment, in place of twice as many \f(CW\*(C`ld\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`st\*(C'\fR pairs.
-However, the use of this changed alignment directly violates the \s-1SPARC\s0
-\&\s-1ABI\s0. Thus, it's intended only for use on targets where the developer
-acknowledges that their resulting code will not be directly in line with
-the rules of the \s-1ABI\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mimpure\-text\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mimpure-text"
-\&\fB\-mimpure\-text\fR, used in addition to \fB\-shared\fR, tells
-the compiler to not pass \fB\-z text\fR to the linker when linking a
-shared object. Using this option, you can link position-dependent
-code into a shared object.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-mimpure\-text\fR suppresses the ``relocations remain against
-allocatable but non-writable sections'' linker error message.
-However, the necessary relocations will trigger copy\-on\-write, and the
-shared object is not actually shared across processes. Instead of
-using \fB\-mimpure\-text\fR, you should compile all source code with
-\&\fB\-fpic\fR or \fB\-fPIC\fR.
-.Sp
-This option is only available on SunOS and Solaris.
-.IP "\fB\-mv8\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mv8"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msparclite\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msparclite"
-.PD
-These two options select variations on the \s-1SPARC\s0 architecture.
-.Sp
-By default (unless specifically configured for the Fujitsu SPARClite),
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 generates code for the v7 variant of the \s-1SPARC\s0 architecture.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-mv8\fR will give you \s-1SPARC\s0 v8 code. The only difference from v7
-code is that the compiler emits the integer multiply and integer
-divide instructions which exist in \s-1SPARC\s0 v8 but not in \s-1SPARC\s0 v7.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-msparclite\fR will give you SPARClite code. This adds the integer
-multiply, integer divide step and scan (\f(CW\*(C`ffs\*(C'\fR) instructions which
-exist in SPARClite but not in \s-1SPARC\s0 v7.
-.Sp
-These options are deprecated and will be deleted in a future \s-1GCC\s0 release.
-They have been replaced with \fB\-mcpu=xxx\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcypress\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcypress"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msupersparc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msupersparc"
-.PD
-These two options select the processor for which the code is optimized.
-.Sp
-With \fB\-mcypress\fR (the default), the compiler optimizes code for the
-Cypress \s-1CY7C602\s0 chip, as used in the SPARCStation/SPARCServer 3xx series.
-This is also appropriate for the older SPARCStation 1, 2, \s-1IPX\s0 etc.
-.Sp
-With \fB\-msupersparc\fR the compiler optimizes code for the SuperSPARC cpu, as
-used in the SPARCStation 10, 1000 and 2000 series. This flag also enables use
-of the full \s-1SPARC\s0 v8 instruction set.
-.Sp
-These options are deprecated and will be deleted in a future \s-1GCC\s0 release.
-They have been replaced with \fB\-mcpu=xxx\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=cpu_type"
-Set the instruction set, register set, and instruction scheduling parameters
-for machine type \fIcpu_type\fR. Supported values for \fIcpu_type\fR are
-\&\fBv7\fR, \fBcypress\fR, \fBv8\fR, \fBsupersparc\fR, \fBsparclite\fR,
-\&\fBhypersparc\fR, \fBsparclite86x\fR, \fBf930\fR, \fBf934\fR,
-\&\fBsparclet\fR, \fBtsc701\fR, \fBv9\fR, \fBultrasparc\fR, and
-\&\fBultrasparc3\fR.
-.Sp
-Default instruction scheduling parameters are used for values that select
-an architecture and not an implementation. These are \fBv7\fR, \fBv8\fR,
-\&\fBsparclite\fR, \fBsparclet\fR, \fBv9\fR.
-.Sp
-Here is a list of each supported architecture and their supported
-implementations.
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& v7: cypress
-\& v8: supersparc, hypersparc
-\& sparclite: f930, f934, sparclite86x
-\& sparclet: tsc701
-\& v9: ultrasparc, ultrasparc3
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtune=cpu_type"
-Set the instruction scheduling parameters for machine type
-\&\fIcpu_type\fR, but do not set the instruction set or register set that the
-option \fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR would.
-.Sp
-The same values for \fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR can be used for
-\&\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR, but the only useful values are those
-that select a particular cpu implementation. Those are \fBcypress\fR,
-\&\fBsupersparc\fR, \fBhypersparc\fR, \fBf930\fR, \fBf934\fR,
-\&\fBsparclite86x\fR, \fBtsc701\fR, \fBultrasparc\fR, and
-\&\fBultrasparc3\fR.
-.PP
-These \fB\-m\fR switches are supported in addition to the above
-on the \s-1SPARCLET\s0 processor.
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle-endian"
-Generate code for a processor running in little-endian mode.
-.IP "\fB\-mlive\-g0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlive-g0"
-Treat register \f(CW%g0\fR as a normal register.
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 will continue to clobber it as necessary but will not assume
-it always reads as 0.
-.IP "\fB\-mbroken\-saverestore\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbroken-saverestore"
-Generate code that does not use non-trivial forms of the \f(CW\*(C`save\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`restore\*(C'\fR instructions. Early versions of the \s-1SPARCLET\s0 processor do
-not correctly handle \f(CW\*(C`save\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`restore\*(C'\fR instructions used with
-arguments. They correctly handle them used without arguments. A \f(CW\*(C`save\*(C'\fR
-instruction used without arguments increments the current window pointer
-but does not allocate a new stack frame. It is assumed that the window
-overflow trap handler will properly handle this case as will interrupt
-handlers.
-.PP
-These \fB\-m\fR switches are supported in addition to the above
-on \s-1SPARC\s0 V9 processors in 64\-bit environments.
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle-endian"
-Generate code for a processor running in little-endian mode. It is only
-available for a few configurations and most notably not on Solaris.
-.IP "\fB\-m32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m64"
-.PD
-Generate code for a 32\-bit or 64\-bit environment.
-The 32\-bit environment sets int, long and pointer to 32 bits.
-The 64\-bit environment sets int to 32 bits and long and pointer
-to 64 bits.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=medlow\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=medlow"
-Generate code for the Medium/Low code model: the program must be linked
-in the low 32 bits of the address space. Pointers are 64 bits.
-Programs can be statically or dynamically linked.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=medmid\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=medmid"
-Generate code for the Medium/Middle code model: the program must be linked
-in the low 44 bits of the address space, the text segment must be less than
-2G bytes, and data segment must be within 2G of the text segment.
-Pointers are 64 bits.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=medany\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=medany"
-Generate code for the Medium/Anywhere code model: the program may be linked
-anywhere in the address space, the text segment must be less than
-2G bytes, and data segment must be within 2G of the text segment.
-Pointers are 64 bits.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=embmedany\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=embmedany"
-Generate code for the Medium/Anywhere code model for embedded systems:
-assume a 32\-bit text and a 32\-bit data segment, both starting anywhere
-(determined at link time). Register \f(CW%g4\fR points to the base of the
-data segment. Pointers are still 64 bits.
-Programs are statically linked, \s-1PIC\s0 is not supported.
-.IP "\fB\-mstack\-bias\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstack-bias"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-stack\-bias\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-stack-bias"
-.PD
-With \fB\-mstack\-bias\fR, \s-1GCC\s0 assumes that the stack pointer, and
-frame pointer if present, are offset by \-2047 which must be added back
-when making stack frame references.
-Otherwise, assume no such offset is present.
-.Sh "\s-1ARM\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "ARM Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for Advanced \s-1RISC\s0 Machines (\s-1ARM\s0)
-architectures:
-.IP "\fB\-mapcs\-frame\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mapcs-frame"
-Generate a stack frame that is compliant with the \s-1ARM\s0 Procedure Call
-Standard for all functions, even if this is not strictly necessary for
-correct execution of the code. Specifying \fB\-fomit\-frame\-pointer\fR
-with this option will cause the stack frames not to be generated for
-leaf functions. The default is \fB\-mno\-apcs\-frame\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mapcs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mapcs"
-This is a synonym for \fB\-mapcs\-frame\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mapcs\-26\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mapcs-26"
-Generate code for a processor running with a 26\-bit program counter,
-and conforming to the function calling standards for the \s-1APCS\s0 26\-bit
-option. This option replaces the \fB\-m2\fR and \fB\-m3\fR options
-of previous releases of the compiler.
-.IP "\fB\-mapcs\-32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mapcs-32"
-Generate code for a processor running with a 32\-bit program counter,
-and conforming to the function calling standards for the \s-1APCS\s0 32\-bit
-option. This option replaces the \fB\-m6\fR option of previous releases
-of the compiler.
-.IP "\fB\-mthumb\-interwork\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mthumb-interwork"
-Generate code which supports calling between the \s-1ARM\s0 and Thumb
-instruction sets. Without this option the two instruction sets cannot
-be reliably used inside one program. The default is
-\&\fB\-mno\-thumb\-interwork\fR, since slightly larger code is generated
-when \fB\-mthumb\-interwork\fR is specified.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-sched\-prolog\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-sched-prolog"
-Prevent the reordering of instructions in the function prolog, or the
-merging of those instruction with the instructions in the function's
-body. This means that all functions will start with a recognizable set
-of instructions (or in fact one of a choice from a small set of
-different function prologues), and this information can be used to
-locate the start if functions inside an executable piece of code. The
-default is \fB\-msched\-prolog\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-float"
-Generate output containing floating point instructions. This is the
-default.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Generate output containing library calls for floating point.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite libraries are not available for all \s-1ARM\s0
-targets. Normally the facilities of the machine's usual C compiler are
-used, but this cannot be done directly in cross\-compilation. You must make
-your own arrangements to provide suitable library functions for
-cross\-compilation.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-msoft\-float\fR changes the calling convention in the output file;
-therefore, it is only useful if you compile \fIall\fR of a program with
-this option. In particular, you need to compile \fIlibgcc.a\fR, the
-library that comes with \s-1GCC\s0, with \fB\-msoft\-float\fR in order for
-this to work.
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle-endian"
-Generate code for a processor running in little-endian mode. This is
-the default for all standard configurations.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-endian"
-Generate code for a processor running in big-endian mode; the default is
-to compile code for a little-endian processor.
-.IP "\fB\-mwords\-little\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mwords-little-endian"
-This option only applies when generating code for big-endian processors.
-Generate code for a little-endian word order but a big-endian byte
-order. That is, a byte order of the form \fB32107654\fR. Note: this
-option should only be used if you require compatibility with code for
-big-endian \s-1ARM\s0 processors generated by versions of the compiler prior to
-2.8.
-.IP "\fB\-malignment\-traps\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-malignment-traps"
-Generate code that will not trap if the \s-1MMU\s0 has alignment traps enabled.
-On \s-1ARM\s0 architectures prior to ARMv4, there were no instructions to
-access half-word objects stored in memory. However, when reading from
-memory a feature of the \s-1ARM\s0 architecture allows a word load to be used,
-even if the address is unaligned, and the processor core will rotate the
-data as it is being loaded. This option tells the compiler that such
-misaligned accesses will cause a \s-1MMU\s0 trap and that it should instead
-synthesize the access as a series of byte accesses. The compiler can
-still use word accesses to load half-word data if it knows that the
-address is aligned to a word boundary.
-.Sp
-This option is ignored when compiling for \s-1ARM\s0 architecture 4 or later,
-since these processors have instructions to directly access half-word
-objects in memory.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-alignment\-traps\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-alignment-traps"
-Generate code that assumes that the \s-1MMU\s0 will not trap unaligned
-accesses. This produces better code when the target instruction set
-does not have half-word memory operations (i.e. implementations prior to
-ARMv4).
-.Sp
-Note that you cannot use this option to access unaligned word objects,
-since the processor will only fetch one 32\-bit aligned object from
-memory.
-.Sp
-The default setting for most targets is \fB\-mno\-alignment\-traps\fR, since
-this produces better code when there are no half-word memory
-instructions available.
-.IP "\fB\-mshort\-load\-bytes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mshort-load-bytes"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-short\-load\-words\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-short-load-words"
-.PD
-These are deprecated aliases for \fB\-malignment\-traps\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-short\-load\-bytes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-short-load-bytes"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mshort\-load\-words\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mshort-load-words"
-.PD
-This are deprecated aliases for \fB\-mno\-alignment\-traps\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=name"
-This specifies the name of the target \s-1ARM\s0 processor. \s-1GCC\s0 uses this name
-to determine what kind of instructions it can emit when generating
-assembly code. Permissible names are: \fBarm2\fR, \fBarm250\fR,
-\&\fBarm3\fR, \fBarm6\fR, \fBarm60\fR, \fBarm600\fR, \fBarm610\fR,
-\&\fBarm620\fR, \fBarm7\fR, \fBarm7m\fR, \fBarm7d\fR, \fBarm7dm\fR,
-\&\fBarm7di\fR, \fBarm7dmi\fR, \fBarm70\fR, \fBarm700\fR,
-\&\fBarm700i\fR, \fBarm710\fR, \fBarm710c\fR, \fBarm7100\fR,
-\&\fBarm7500\fR, \fBarm7500fe\fR, \fBarm7tdmi\fR, \fBarm8\fR,
-\&\fBstrongarm\fR, \fBstrongarm110\fR, \fBstrongarm1100\fR,
-\&\fBarm8\fR, \fBarm810\fR, \fBarm9\fR, \fBarm9e\fR, \fBarm920\fR,
-\&\fBarm920t\fR, \fBarm940t\fR, \fBarm9tdmi\fR, \fBarm10tdmi\fR,
-\&\fBarm1020t\fR, \fBxscale\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtune=name"
-This option is very similar to the \fB\-mcpu=\fR option, except that
-instead of specifying the actual target processor type, and hence
-restricting which instructions can be used, it specifies that \s-1GCC\s0 should
-tune the performance of the code as if the target were of the type
-specified in this option, but still choosing the instructions that it
-will generate based on the cpu specified by a \fB\-mcpu=\fR option.
-For some \s-1ARM\s0 implementations better performance can be obtained by using
-this option.
-.IP "\fB\-march=\fR\fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-march=name"
-This specifies the name of the target \s-1ARM\s0 architecture. \s-1GCC\s0 uses this
-name to determine what kind of instructions it can emit when generating
-assembly code. This option can be used in conjunction with or instead
-of the \fB\-mcpu=\fR option. Permissible names are: \fBarmv2\fR,
-\&\fBarmv2a\fR, \fBarmv3\fR, \fBarmv3m\fR, \fBarmv4\fR, \fBarmv4t\fR,
-\&\fBarmv5\fR, \fBarmv5t\fR, \fBarmv5te\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mfpe=\fR\fInumber\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfpe=number"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mfp=\fR\fInumber\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp=number"
-.PD
-This specifies the version of the floating point emulation available on
-the target. Permissible values are 2 and 3. \fB\-mfp=\fR is a synonym
-for \fB\-mfpe=\fR, for compatibility with older versions of \s-1GCC\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mstructure\-size\-boundary=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstructure-size-boundary=n"
-The size of all structures and unions will be rounded up to a multiple
-of the number of bits set by this option. Permissible values are 8 and
-32. The default value varies for different toolchains. For the \s-1COFF\s0
-targeted toolchain the default value is 8. Specifying the larger number
-can produce faster, more efficient code, but can also increase the size
-of the program. The two values are potentially incompatible. Code
-compiled with one value cannot necessarily expect to work with code or
-libraries compiled with the other value, if they exchange information
-using structures or unions.
-.IP "\fB\-mabort\-on\-noreturn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabort-on-noreturn"
-Generate a call to the function \f(CW\*(C`abort\*(C'\fR at the end of a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`noreturn\*(C'\fR function. It will be executed if the function tries to
-return.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong-calls"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-long\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-long-calls"
-.PD
-Tells the compiler to perform function calls by first loading the
-address of the function into a register and then performing a subroutine
-call on this register. This switch is needed if the target function
-will lie outside of the 64 megabyte addressing range of the offset based
-version of subroutine call instruction.
-.Sp
-Even if this switch is enabled, not all function calls will be turned
-into long calls. The heuristic is that static functions, functions
-which have the \fBshort-call\fR attribute, functions that are inside
-the scope of a \fB#pragma no_long_calls\fR directive and functions whose
-definitions have already been compiled within the current compilation
-unit, will not be turned into long calls. The exception to this rule is
-that weak function definitions, functions with the \fBlong-call\fR
-attribute or the \fBsection\fR attribute, and functions that are within
-the scope of a \fB#pragma long_calls\fR directive, will always be
-turned into long calls.
-.Sp
-This feature is not enabled by default. Specifying
-\&\fB\-mno\-long\-calls\fR will restore the default behavior, as will
-placing the function calls within the scope of a \fB#pragma
-long_calls_off\fR directive. Note these switches have no effect on how
-the compiler generates code to handle function calls via function
-pointers.
-.IP "\fB\-mnop\-fun\-dllimport\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnop-fun-dllimport"
-Disable support for the \f(CW\*(C`dllimport\*(C'\fR attribute.
-.IP "\fB\-msingle\-pic\-base\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msingle-pic-base"
-Treat the register used for \s-1PIC\s0 addressing as read\-only, rather than
-loading it in the prologue for each function. The run-time system is
-responsible for initializing this register with an appropriate value
-before execution begins.
-.IP "\fB\-mpic\-register=\fR\fIreg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpic-register=reg"
-Specify the register to be used for \s-1PIC\s0 addressing. The default is R10
-unless stack-checking is enabled, when R9 is used.
-.IP "\fB\-mpoke\-function\-name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpoke-function-name"
-Write the name of each function into the text section, directly
-preceding the function prologue. The generated code is similar to this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& t0
-\& .ascii "arm_poke_function_name", 0
-\& .align
-\& t1
-\& .word 0xff000000 + (t1 - t0)
-\& arm_poke_function_name
-\& mov ip, sp
-\& stmfd sp!, {fp, ip, lr, pc}
-\& sub fp, ip, #4
-.Ve
-.Sp
-When performing a stack backtrace, code can inspect the value of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`pc\*(C'\fR stored at \f(CW\*(C`fp + 0\*(C'\fR. If the trace function then looks at
-location \f(CW\*(C`pc \- 12\*(C'\fR and the top 8 bits are set, then we know that
-there is a function name embedded immediately preceding this location
-and has length \f(CW\*(C`((pc[\-3]) & 0xff000000)\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mthumb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mthumb"
-Generate code for the 16\-bit Thumb instruction set. The default is to
-use the 32\-bit \s-1ARM\s0 instruction set.
-.IP "\fB\-mtpcs\-frame\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtpcs-frame"
-Generate a stack frame that is compliant with the Thumb Procedure Call
-Standard for all non-leaf functions. (A leaf function is one that does
-not call any other functions.) The default is \fB\-mno\-tpcs\-frame\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mtpcs\-leaf\-frame\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtpcs-leaf-frame"
-Generate a stack frame that is compliant with the Thumb Procedure Call
-Standard for all leaf functions. (A leaf function is one that does
-not call any other functions.) The default is \fB\-mno\-apcs\-leaf\-frame\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcallee\-super\-interworking\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcallee-super-interworking"
-Gives all externally visible functions in the file being compiled an \s-1ARM\s0
-instruction set header which switches to Thumb mode before executing the
-rest of the function. This allows these functions to be called from
-non-interworking code.
-.IP "\fB\-mcaller\-super\-interworking\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcaller-super-interworking"
-Allows calls via function pointers (including virtual functions) to
-execute correctly regardless of whether the target code has been
-compiled for interworking or not. There is a small overhead in the cost
-of executing a function pointer if this option is enabled.
-.Sh "\s-1MN10200\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "MN10200 Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for Matsushita \s-1MN10200\s0 architectures:
-.IP "\fB\-mrelax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrelax"
-Indicate to the linker that it should perform a relaxation optimization pass
-to shorten branches, calls and absolute memory addresses. This option only
-has an effect when used on the command line for the final link step.
-.Sp
-This option makes symbolic debugging impossible.
-.Sh "\s-1MN10300\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "MN10300 Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for Matsushita \s-1MN10300\s0 architectures:
-.IP "\fB\-mmult\-bug\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmult-bug"
-Generate code to avoid bugs in the multiply instructions for the \s-1MN10300\s0
-processors. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mult\-bug\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mult-bug"
-Do not generate code to avoid bugs in the multiply instructions for the
-\&\s-1MN10300\s0 processors.
-.IP "\fB\-mam33\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mam33"
-Generate code which uses features specific to the \s-1AM33\s0 processor.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-am33\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-am33"
-Do not generate code which uses features specific to the \s-1AM33\s0 processor. This
-is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-crt0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-crt0"
-Do not link in the C run-time initialization object file.
-.IP "\fB\-mrelax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrelax"
-Indicate to the linker that it should perform a relaxation optimization pass
-to shorten branches, calls and absolute memory addresses. This option only
-has an effect when used on the command line for the final link step.
-.Sp
-This option makes symbolic debugging impossible.
-.Sh "M32R/D Options"
-.IX Subsection "M32R/D Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for Mitsubishi M32R/D architectures:
-.IP "\fB\-m32rx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32rx"
-Generate code for the M32R/X.
-.IP "\fB\-m32r\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32r"
-Generate code for the M32R. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mcode\-model=small\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcode-model=small"
-Assume all objects live in the lower 16MB of memory (so that their addresses
-can be loaded with the \f(CW\*(C`ld24\*(C'\fR instruction), and assume all subroutines
-are reachable with the \f(CW\*(C`bl\*(C'\fR instruction.
-This is the default.
-.Sp
-The addressability of a particular object can be set with the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`model\*(C'\fR attribute.
-.IP "\fB\-mcode\-model=medium\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcode-model=medium"
-Assume objects may be anywhere in the 32\-bit address space (the compiler
-will generate \f(CW\*(C`seth/add3\*(C'\fR instructions to load their addresses), and
-assume all subroutines are reachable with the \f(CW\*(C`bl\*(C'\fR instruction.
-.IP "\fB\-mcode\-model=large\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcode-model=large"
-Assume objects may be anywhere in the 32\-bit address space (the compiler
-will generate \f(CW\*(C`seth/add3\*(C'\fR instructions to load their addresses), and
-assume subroutines may not be reachable with the \f(CW\*(C`bl\*(C'\fR instruction
-(the compiler will generate the much slower \f(CW\*(C`seth/add3/jl\*(C'\fR
-instruction sequence).
-.IP "\fB\-msdata=none\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata=none"
-Disable use of the small data area. Variables will be put into
-one of \fB.data\fR, \fBbss\fR, or \fB.rodata\fR (unless the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`section\*(C'\fR attribute has been specified).
-This is the default.
-.Sp
-The small data area consists of sections \fB.sdata\fR and \fB.sbss\fR.
-Objects may be explicitly put in the small data area with the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`section\*(C'\fR attribute using one of these sections.
-.IP "\fB\-msdata=sdata\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata=sdata"
-Put small global and static data in the small data area, but do not
-generate special code to reference them.
-.IP "\fB\-msdata=use\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata=use"
-Put small global and static data in the small data area, and generate
-special instructions to reference them.
-.IP "\fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-G num"
-Put global and static objects less than or equal to \fInum\fR bytes
-into the small data or bss sections instead of the normal data or bss
-sections. The default value of \fInum\fR is 8.
-The \fB\-msdata\fR option must be set to one of \fBsdata\fR or \fBuse\fR
-for this option to have any effect.
-.Sp
-All modules should be compiled with the same \fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR value.
-Compiling with different values of \fInum\fR may or may not work; if it
-doesn't the linker will give an error message\-\-\-incorrect code will not be
-generated.
-.Sh "M88K Options"
-.IX Subsection "M88K Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for Motorola 88k architectures:
-.IP "\fB\-m88000\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m88000"
-Generate code that works well on both the m88100 and the
-m88110.
-.IP "\fB\-m88100\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m88100"
-Generate code that works best for the m88100, but that also
-runs on the m88110.
-.IP "\fB\-m88110\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m88110"
-Generate code that works best for the m88110, and may not run
-on the m88100.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-pic"
-Obsolete option to be removed from the next revision.
-Use \fB\-fPIC\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-midentify\-revision\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-midentify-revision"
-Include an \f(CW\*(C`ident\*(C'\fR directive in the assembler output recording the
-source file name, compiler name and version, timestamp, and compilation
-flags used.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-underscores\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-underscores"
-In assembler output, emit symbol names without adding an underscore
-character at the beginning of each name. The default is to use an
-underscore as prefix on each name.
-.IP "\fB\-mocs\-debug\-info\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mocs-debug-info"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-ocs\-debug\-info\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-ocs-debug-info"
-.PD
-Include (or omit) additional debugging information (about registers used
-in each stack frame) as specified in the 88open Object Compatibility
-Standard, ``\s-1OCS\s0''. This extra information allows debugging of code that
-has had the frame pointer eliminated. The default for SVr4 and Delta 88
-SVr3.2 is to include this information; other 88k configurations omit this
-information by default.
-.IP "\fB\-mocs\-frame\-position\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mocs-frame-position"
-When emitting \s-1COFF\s0 debugging information for automatic variables and
-parameters stored on the stack, use the offset from the canonical frame
-address, which is the stack pointer (register 31) on entry to the
-function. The SVr4 and Delta88 SVr3.2, and \s-1BCS\s0 configurations use
-\&\fB\-mocs\-frame\-position\fR; other 88k configurations have the default
-\&\fB\-mno\-ocs\-frame\-position\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-ocs\-frame\-position\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-ocs-frame-position"
-When emitting \s-1COFF\s0 debugging information for automatic variables and
-parameters stored on the stack, use the offset from the frame pointer
-register (register 30). When this option is in effect, the frame
-pointer is not eliminated when debugging information is selected by the
-\&\-g switch.
-.IP "\fB\-moptimize\-arg\-area\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-moptimize-arg-area"
-Save space by reorganizing the stack frame. This option generates code
-that does not agree with the 88open specifications, but uses less
-memory.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-optimize\-arg\-area\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-optimize-arg-area"
-Do not reorganize the stack frame to save space. This is the default.
-The generated conforms to the specification, but uses more memory.
-.IP "\fB\-mshort\-data\-\fR\fInum\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mshort-data-num"
-Generate smaller data references by making them relative to \f(CW\*(C`r0\*(C'\fR,
-which allows loading a value using a single instruction (rather than the
-usual two). You control which data references are affected by
-specifying \fInum\fR with this option. For example, if you specify
-\&\fB\-mshort\-data\-512\fR, then the data references affected are those
-involving displacements of less than 512 bytes.
-\&\fB\-mshort\-data\-\fR\fInum\fR is not effective for \fInum\fR greater
-than 64k.
-.IP "\fB\-mserialize\-volatile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mserialize-volatile"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-serialize\-volatile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-serialize-volatile"
-.PD
-Do, or don't, generate code to guarantee sequential consistency
-of volatile memory references. By default, consistency is
-guaranteed.
-.Sp
-The order of memory references made by the \s-1MC88110\s0 processor does
-not always match the order of the instructions requesting those
-references. In particular, a load instruction may execute before
-a preceding store instruction. Such reordering violates
-sequential consistency of volatile memory references, when there
-are multiple processors. When consistency must be guaranteed,
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 generates special instructions, as needed, to force
-execution in the proper order.
-.Sp
-The \s-1MC88100\s0 processor does not reorder memory references and so
-always provides sequential consistency. However, by default, \s-1GCC\s0
-generates the special instructions to guarantee consistency
-even when you use \fB\-m88100\fR, so that the code may be run on an
-\&\s-1MC88110\s0 processor. If you intend to run your code only on the
-\&\s-1MC88100\s0 processor, you may use \fB\-mno\-serialize\-volatile\fR.
-.Sp
-The extra code generated to guarantee consistency may affect the
-performance of your application. If you know that you can safely
-forgo this guarantee, you may use \fB\-mno\-serialize\-volatile\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-msvr4\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msvr4"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msvr3\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msvr3"
-.PD
-Turn on (\fB\-msvr4\fR) or off (\fB\-msvr3\fR) compiler extensions
-related to System V release 4 (SVr4). This controls the following:
-.RS 4
-.IP "1." 4
-Which variant of the assembler syntax to emit.
-.IP "2." 4
-\&\fB\-msvr4\fR makes the C preprocessor recognize \fB#pragma weak\fR
-that is used on System V release 4.
-.IP "3." 4
-\&\fB\-msvr4\fR makes \s-1GCC\s0 issue additional declaration directives used in
-SVr4.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-msvr4\fR is the default for the m88k\-motorola\-sysv4 configuration.
-\&\fB\-msvr3\fR is the default for all other m88k configurations.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-mversion\-03.00\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mversion-03.00"
-This option is obsolete, and is ignored.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-check\-zero\-division\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-check-zero-division"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mcheck\-zero\-division\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcheck-zero-division"
-.PD
-Do, or don't, generate code to guarantee that integer division by
-zero will be detected. By default, detection is guaranteed.
-.Sp
-Some models of the \s-1MC88100\s0 processor fail to trap upon integer
-division by zero under certain conditions. By default, when
-compiling code that might be run on such a processor, \s-1GCC\s0
-generates code that explicitly checks for zero-valued divisors
-and traps with exception number 503 when one is detected. Use of
-\&\fB\-mno\-check\-zero\-division\fR suppresses such checking for code
-generated to run on an \s-1MC88100\s0 processor.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 assumes that the \s-1MC88110\s0 processor correctly detects all instances
-of integer division by zero. When \fB\-m88110\fR is specified, no
-explicit checks for zero-valued divisors are generated, and both
-\&\fB\-mcheck\-zero\-division\fR and \fB\-mno\-check\-zero\-division\fR are
-ignored.
-.IP "\fB\-muse\-div\-instruction\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-muse-div-instruction"
-Use the div instruction for signed integer division on the
-\&\s-1MC88100\s0 processor. By default, the div instruction is not used.
-.Sp
-On the \s-1MC88100\s0 processor the signed integer division instruction
-div) traps to the operating system on a negative operand. The
-operating system transparently completes the operation, but at a
-large cost in execution time. By default, when compiling code
-that might be run on an \s-1MC88100\s0 processor, \s-1GCC\s0 emulates signed
-integer division using the unsigned integer division instruction
-divu), thereby avoiding the large penalty of a trap to the
-operating system. Such emulation has its own, smaller, execution
-cost in both time and space. To the extent that your code's
-important signed integer division operations are performed on two
-nonnegative operands, it may be desirable to use the div
-instruction directly.
-.Sp
-On the \s-1MC88110\s0 processor the div instruction (also known as the
-divs instruction) processes negative operands without trapping to
-the operating system. When \fB\-m88110\fR is specified,
-\&\fB\-muse\-div\-instruction\fR is ignored, and the div instruction is used
-for signed integer division.
-.Sp
-Note that the result of dividing \f(CW\*(C`INT_MIN\*(C'\fR by \-1 is undefined. In
-particular, the behavior of such a division with and without
-\&\fB\-muse\-div\-instruction\fR may differ.
-.IP "\fB\-mtrap\-large\-shift\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtrap-large-shift"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mhandle\-large\-shift\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhandle-large-shift"
-.PD
-Include code to detect bit-shifts of more than 31 bits; respectively,
-trap such shifts or emit code to handle them properly. By default \s-1GCC\s0
-makes no special provision for large bit shifts.
-.IP "\fB\-mwarn\-passed\-structs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mwarn-passed-structs"
-Warn when a function passes a struct as an argument or result.
-Structure-passing conventions have changed during the evolution of the C
-language, and are often the source of portability problems. By default,
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 issues no such warning.
-.Sh "\s-1IBM\s0 \s-1RS/6000\s0 and PowerPC Options"
-.IX Subsection "IBM RS/6000 and PowerPC Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1IBM\s0 \s-1RS/6000\s0 and PowerPC:
-.IP "\fB\-mpower\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpower"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-power\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-power"
-.IP "\fB\-mpower2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpower2"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-power2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-power2"
-.IP "\fB\-mpowerpc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpowerpc"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-powerpc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-powerpc"
-.IP "\fB\-mpowerpc\-gpopt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpowerpc-gpopt"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-powerpc\-gpopt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-powerpc-gpopt"
-.IP "\fB\-mpowerpc\-gfxopt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpowerpc-gfxopt"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-powerpc\-gfxopt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-powerpc-gfxopt"
-.IP "\fB\-mpowerpc64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpowerpc64"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-powerpc64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-powerpc64"
-.PD
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 supports two related instruction set architectures for the
-\&\s-1RS/6000\s0 and PowerPC. The \fI\s-1POWER\s0\fR instruction set are those
-instructions supported by the \fBrios\fR chip set used in the original
-\&\s-1RS/6000\s0 systems and the \fIPowerPC\fR instruction set is the
-architecture of the Motorola MPC5xx, MPC6xx, MPC8xx microprocessors, and
-the \s-1IBM\s0 4xx microprocessors.
-.Sp
-Neither architecture is a subset of the other. However there is a
-large common subset of instructions supported by both. An \s-1MQ\s0
-register is included in processors supporting the \s-1POWER\s0 architecture.
-.Sp
-You use these options to specify which instructions are available on the
-processor you are using. The default value of these options is
-determined when configuring \s-1GCC\s0. Specifying the
-\&\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR overrides the specification of these
-options. We recommend you use the \fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR option
-rather than the options listed above.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-mpower\fR option allows \s-1GCC\s0 to generate instructions that
-are found only in the \s-1POWER\s0 architecture and to use the \s-1MQ\s0 register.
-Specifying \fB\-mpower2\fR implies \fB\-power\fR and also allows \s-1GCC\s0
-to generate instructions that are present in the \s-1POWER2\s0 architecture but
-not the original \s-1POWER\s0 architecture.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-mpowerpc\fR option allows \s-1GCC\s0 to generate instructions that
-are found only in the 32\-bit subset of the PowerPC architecture.
-Specifying \fB\-mpowerpc\-gpopt\fR implies \fB\-mpowerpc\fR and also allows
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 to use the optional PowerPC architecture instructions in the
-General Purpose group, including floating-point square root. Specifying
-\&\fB\-mpowerpc\-gfxopt\fR implies \fB\-mpowerpc\fR and also allows \s-1GCC\s0 to
-use the optional PowerPC architecture instructions in the Graphics
-group, including floating-point select.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-mpowerpc64\fR option allows \s-1GCC\s0 to generate the additional
-64\-bit instructions that are found in the full PowerPC64 architecture
-and to treat GPRs as 64\-bit, doubleword quantities. \s-1GCC\s0 defaults to
-\&\fB\-mno\-powerpc64\fR.
-.Sp
-If you specify both \fB\-mno\-power\fR and \fB\-mno\-powerpc\fR, \s-1GCC\s0
-will use only the instructions in the common subset of both
-architectures plus some special \s-1AIX\s0 common-mode calls, and will not use
-the \s-1MQ\s0 register. Specifying both \fB\-mpower\fR and \fB\-mpowerpc\fR
-permits \s-1GCC\s0 to use any instruction from either architecture and to
-allow use of the \s-1MQ\s0 register; specify this for the Motorola \s-1MPC601\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mnew\-mnemonics\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnew-mnemonics"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mold\-mnemonics\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mold-mnemonics"
-.PD
-Select which mnemonics to use in the generated assembler code. With
-\&\fB\-mnew\-mnemonics\fR, \s-1GCC\s0 uses the assembler mnemonics defined for
-the PowerPC architecture. With \fB\-mold\-mnemonics\fR it uses the
-assembler mnemonics defined for the \s-1POWER\s0 architecture. Instructions
-defined in only one architecture have only one mnemonic; \s-1GCC\s0 uses that
-mnemonic irrespective of which of these options is specified.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 defaults to the mnemonics appropriate for the architecture in
-use. Specifying \fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR sometimes overrides the
-value of these option. Unless you are building a cross\-compiler, you
-should normally not specify either \fB\-mnew\-mnemonics\fR or
-\&\fB\-mold\-mnemonics\fR, but should instead accept the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=cpu_type"
-Set architecture type, register usage, choice of mnemonics, and
-instruction scheduling parameters for machine type \fIcpu_type\fR.
-Supported values for \fIcpu_type\fR are \fBrios\fR, \fBrios1\fR,
-\&\fBrsc\fR, \fBrios2\fR, \fBrs64a\fR, \fB601\fR, \fB602\fR,
-\&\fB603\fR, \fB603e\fR, \fB604\fR, \fB604e\fR, \fB620\fR,
-\&\fB630\fR, \fB740\fR, \fB7400\fR, \fB7450\fR, \fB750\fR,
-\&\fBpower\fR, \fBpower2\fR, \fBpowerpc\fR, \fB403\fR, \fB505\fR,
-\&\fB801\fR, \fB821\fR, \fB823\fR, and \fB860\fR and \fBcommon\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-mcpu=common\fR selects a completely generic processor. Code
-generated under this option will run on any \s-1POWER\s0 or PowerPC processor.
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 will use only the instructions in the common subset of both
-architectures, and will not use the \s-1MQ\s0 register. \s-1GCC\s0 assumes a generic
-processor model for scheduling purposes.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-mcpu=power\fR, \fB\-mcpu=power2\fR, \fB\-mcpu=powerpc\fR, and
-\&\fB\-mcpu=powerpc64\fR specify generic \s-1POWER\s0, \s-1POWER2\s0, pure 32\-bit
-PowerPC (i.e., not \s-1MPC601\s0), and 64\-bit PowerPC architecture machine
-types, with an appropriate, generic processor model assumed for
-scheduling purposes.
-.Sp
-The other options specify a specific processor. Code generated under
-those options will run best on that processor, and may not run at all on
-others.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-mcpu\fR options automatically enable or disable other
-\&\fB\-m\fR options as follows:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBcommon\fR" 4
-.IX Item "common"
-\&\fB\-mno\-power\fR, \fB\-mno\-powerpc\fR
-.IP "\fBpower\fR" 4
-.IX Item "power"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBpower2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "power2"
-.IP "\fBrios1\fR" 4
-.IX Item "rios1"
-.IP "\fBrios2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "rios2"
-.IP "\fBrsc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "rsc"
-.PD
-\&\fB\-mpower\fR, \fB\-mno\-powerpc\fR, \fB\-mno\-new\-mnemonics\fR
-.IP "\fBpowerpc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "powerpc"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBrs64a\fR" 4
-.IX Item "rs64a"
-.IP "\fB602\fR" 4
-.IX Item "602"
-.IP "\fB603\fR" 4
-.IX Item "603"
-.IP "\fB603e\fR" 4
-.IX Item "603e"
-.IP "\fB604\fR" 4
-.IX Item "604"
-.IP "\fB620\fR" 4
-.IX Item "620"
-.IP "\fB630\fR" 4
-.IX Item "630"
-.IP "\fB740\fR" 4
-.IX Item "740"
-.IP "\fB7400\fR" 4
-.IX Item "7400"
-.IP "\fB7450\fR" 4
-.IX Item "7450"
-.IP "\fB750\fR" 4
-.IX Item "750"
-.IP "\fB505\fR" 4
-.IX Item "505"
-.PD
-\&\fB\-mno\-power\fR, \fB\-mpowerpc\fR, \fB\-mnew\-mnemonics\fR
-.IP "\fB601\fR" 4
-.IX Item "601"
-\&\fB\-mpower\fR, \fB\-mpowerpc\fR, \fB\-mnew\-mnemonics\fR
-.IP "\fB403\fR" 4
-.IX Item "403"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB821\fR" 4
-.IX Item "821"
-.IP "\fB860\fR" 4
-.IX Item "860"
-.PD
-\&\fB\-mno\-power\fR, \fB\-mpowerpc\fR, \fB\-mnew\-mnemonics\fR, \fB\-msoft\-float\fR
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtune=cpu_type"
-Set the instruction scheduling parameters for machine type
-\&\fIcpu_type\fR, but do not set the architecture type, register usage, or
-choice of mnemonics, as \fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR would. The same
-values for \fIcpu_type\fR are used for \fB\-mtune\fR as for
-\&\fB\-mcpu\fR. If both are specified, the code generated will use the
-architecture, registers, and mnemonics set by \fB\-mcpu\fR, but the
-scheduling parameters set by \fB\-mtune\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-maltivec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-maltivec"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-altivec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-altivec"
-.PD
-These switches enable or disable the use of built-in functions that
-allow access to the AltiVec instruction set. You may also need to set
-\&\fB\-mabi=altivec\fR to adjust the current \s-1ABI\s0 with AltiVec \s-1ABI\s0
-enhancements.
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=spe\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=spe"
-Extend the current \s-1ABI\s0 with \s-1SPE\s0 \s-1ABI\s0 extensions. This does not change
-the default \s-1ABI\s0, instead it adds the \s-1SPE\s0 \s-1ABI\s0 extensions to the current
-\&\s-1ABI\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=no\-spe\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=no-spe"
-Disable Booke \s-1SPE\s0 \s-1ABI\s0 extensions for the current \s-1ABI\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-misel=\fR\fIyes/no\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-misel=yes/no"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-misel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-misel"
-.PD
-This switch enables or disables the generation of \s-1ISEL\s0 instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mfull\-toc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfull-toc"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fp\-in\-toc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fp-in-toc"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-sum\-in\-toc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-sum-in-toc"
-.IP "\fB\-mminimal\-toc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mminimal-toc"
-.PD
-Modify generation of the \s-1TOC\s0 (Table Of Contents), which is created for
-every executable file. The \fB\-mfull\-toc\fR option is selected by
-default. In that case, \s-1GCC\s0 will allocate at least one \s-1TOC\s0 entry for
-each unique non-automatic variable reference in your program. \s-1GCC\s0
-will also place floating-point constants in the \s-1TOC\s0. However, only
-16,384 entries are available in the \s-1TOC\s0.
-.Sp
-If you receive a linker error message that saying you have overflowed
-the available \s-1TOC\s0 space, you can reduce the amount of \s-1TOC\s0 space used
-with the \fB\-mno\-fp\-in\-toc\fR and \fB\-mno\-sum\-in\-toc\fR options.
-\&\fB\-mno\-fp\-in\-toc\fR prevents \s-1GCC\s0 from putting floating-point
-constants in the \s-1TOC\s0 and \fB\-mno\-sum\-in\-toc\fR forces \s-1GCC\s0 to
-generate code to calculate the sum of an address and a constant at
-run-time instead of putting that sum into the \s-1TOC\s0. You may specify one
-or both of these options. Each causes \s-1GCC\s0 to produce very slightly
-slower and larger code at the expense of conserving \s-1TOC\s0 space.
-.Sp
-If you still run out of space in the \s-1TOC\s0 even when you specify both of
-these options, specify \fB\-mminimal\-toc\fR instead. This option causes
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 to make only one \s-1TOC\s0 entry for every file. When you specify this
-option, \s-1GCC\s0 will produce code that is slower and larger but which
-uses extremely little \s-1TOC\s0 space. You may wish to use this option
-only on files that contain less frequently executed code.
-.IP "\fB\-maix64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-maix64"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-maix32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-maix32"
-.PD
-Enable 64\-bit \s-1AIX\s0 \s-1ABI\s0 and calling convention: 64\-bit pointers, 64\-bit
-\&\f(CW\*(C`long\*(C'\fR type, and the infrastructure needed to support them.
-Specifying \fB\-maix64\fR implies \fB\-mpowerpc64\fR and
-\&\fB\-mpowerpc\fR, while \fB\-maix32\fR disables the 64\-bit \s-1ABI\s0 and
-implies \fB\-mno\-powerpc64\fR. \s-1GCC\s0 defaults to \fB\-maix32\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mxl\-call\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mxl-call"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-xl\-call\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-xl-call"
-.PD
-On \s-1AIX\s0, pass floating-point arguments to prototyped functions beyond the
-register save area (\s-1RSA\s0) on the stack in addition to argument FPRs. The
-\&\s-1AIX\s0 calling convention was extended but not initially documented to
-handle an obscure K&R C case of calling a function that takes the
-address of its arguments with fewer arguments than declared. \s-1AIX\s0 \s-1XL\s0
-compilers access floating point arguments which do not fit in the
-\&\s-1RSA\s0 from the stack when a subroutine is compiled without
-optimization. Because always storing floating-point arguments on the
-stack is inefficient and rarely needed, this option is not enabled by
-default and only is necessary when calling subroutines compiled by \s-1AIX\s0
-\&\s-1XL\s0 compilers without optimization.
-.IP "\fB\-mpe\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpe"
-Support \fI\s-1IBM\s0 \s-1RS/6000\s0 \s-1SP\s0\fR \fIParallel Environment\fR (\s-1PE\s0). Link an
-application written to use message passing with special startup code to
-enable the application to run. The system must have \s-1PE\s0 installed in the
-standard location (\fI/usr/lpp/ppe.poe/\fR), or the \fIspecs\fR file
-must be overridden with the \fB\-specs=\fR option to specify the
-appropriate directory location. The Parallel Environment does not
-support threads, so the \fB\-mpe\fR option and the \fB\-pthread\fR
-option are incompatible.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-float"
-.PD
-Generate code that does not use (uses) the floating-point register set.
-Software floating point emulation is provided if you use the
-\&\fB\-msoft\-float\fR option, and pass the option to \s-1GCC\s0 when linking.
-.IP "\fB\-mmultiple\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmultiple"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-multiple\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-multiple"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses (does not use) the load multiple word
-instructions and the store multiple word instructions. These
-instructions are generated by default on \s-1POWER\s0 systems, and not
-generated on PowerPC systems. Do not use \fB\-mmultiple\fR on little
-endian PowerPC systems, since those instructions do not work when the
-processor is in little endian mode. The exceptions are \s-1PPC740\s0 and
-\&\s-1PPC750\s0 which permit the instructions usage in little endian mode.
-.IP "\fB\-mstring\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstring"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-string\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-string"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses (does not use) the load string instructions
-and the store string word instructions to save multiple registers and
-do small block moves. These instructions are generated by default on
-\&\s-1POWER\s0 systems, and not generated on PowerPC systems. Do not use
-\&\fB\-mstring\fR on little endian PowerPC systems, since those
-instructions do not work when the processor is in little endian mode.
-The exceptions are \s-1PPC740\s0 and \s-1PPC750\s0 which permit the instructions
-usage in little endian mode.
-.IP "\fB\-mupdate\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mupdate"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-update\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-update"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses (does not use) the load or store instructions
-that update the base register to the address of the calculated memory
-location. These instructions are generated by default. If you use
-\&\fB\-mno\-update\fR, there is a small window between the time that the
-stack pointer is updated and the address of the previous frame is
-stored, which means code that walks the stack frame across interrupts or
-signals may get corrupted data.
-.IP "\fB\-mfused\-madd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfused-madd"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fused\-madd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fused-madd"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses (does not use) the floating point multiply and
-accumulate instructions. These instructions are generated by default if
-hardware floating is used.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-bit\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-bit-align"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mbit\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbit-align"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems do not (do) force structures
-and unions that contain bit-fields to be aligned to the base type of the
-bit\-field.
-.Sp
-For example, by default a structure containing nothing but 8
-\&\f(CW\*(C`unsigned\*(C'\fR bit-fields of length 1 would be aligned to a 4 byte
-boundary and have a size of 4 bytes. By using \fB\-mno\-bit\-align\fR,
-the structure would be aligned to a 1 byte boundary and be one byte in
-size.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-strict\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-strict-align"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mstrict\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstrict-align"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems do not (do) assume that
-unaligned memory references will be handled by the system.
-.IP "\fB\-mrelocatable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrelocatable"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-relocatable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-relocatable"
-.PD
-On embedded PowerPC systems generate code that allows (does not allow)
-the program to be relocated to a different address at runtime. If you
-use \fB\-mrelocatable\fR on any module, all objects linked together must
-be compiled with \fB\-mrelocatable\fR or \fB\-mrelocatable\-lib\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mrelocatable\-lib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrelocatable-lib"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-relocatable\-lib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-relocatable-lib"
-.PD
-On embedded PowerPC systems generate code that allows (does not allow)
-the program to be relocated to a different address at runtime. Modules
-compiled with \fB\-mrelocatable\-lib\fR can be linked with either modules
-compiled without \fB\-mrelocatable\fR and \fB\-mrelocatable\-lib\fR or
-with modules compiled with the \fB\-mrelocatable\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-toc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-toc"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mtoc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtoc"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems do not (do) assume that
-register 2 contains a pointer to a global area pointing to the addresses
-used in the program.
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle-endian"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code for the
-processor in little endian mode. The \fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR option is
-the same as \fB\-mlittle\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-endian"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code for the
-processor in big endian mode. The \fB\-mbig\-endian\fR option is
-the same as \fB\-mbig\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-sysv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-sysv"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code using calling
-conventions that adheres to the March 1995 draft of the System V
-Application Binary Interface, PowerPC processor supplement. This is the
-default unless you configured \s-1GCC\s0 using \fBpowerpc\-*\-eabiaix\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-sysv\-eabi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-sysv-eabi"
-Specify both \fB\-mcall\-sysv\fR and \fB\-meabi\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-sysv\-noeabi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-sysv-noeabi"
-Specify both \fB\-mcall\-sysv\fR and \fB\-mno\-eabi\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-aix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-aix"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code using calling
-conventions that are similar to those used on \s-1AIX\s0. This is the
-default if you configured \s-1GCC\s0 using \fBpowerpc\-*\-eabiaix\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-solaris\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-solaris"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code for the Solaris
-operating system.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-linux\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-linux"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code for the
-Linux-based \s-1GNU\s0 system.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-gnu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-gnu"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code for the
-Hurd-based \s-1GNU\s0 system.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-netbsd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-netbsd"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems compile code for the
-NetBSD operating system.
-.IP "\fB\-maix\-struct\-return\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-maix-struct-return"
-Return all structures in memory (as specified by the \s-1AIX\s0 \s-1ABI\s0).
-.IP "\fB\-msvr4\-struct\-return\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msvr4-struct-return"
-Return structures smaller than 8 bytes in registers (as specified by the
-\&\s-1SVR4\s0 \s-1ABI\s0).
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=altivec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=altivec"
-Extend the current \s-1ABI\s0 with AltiVec \s-1ABI\s0 extensions. This does not
-change the default \s-1ABI\s0, instead it adds the AltiVec \s-1ABI\s0 extensions to
-the current \s-1ABI\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=no\-altivec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=no-altivec"
-Disable AltiVec \s-1ABI\s0 extensions for the current \s-1ABI\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mprototype\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mprototype"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-prototype\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-prototype"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems assume that all calls to
-variable argument functions are properly prototyped. Otherwise, the
-compiler must insert an instruction before every non prototyped call to
-set or clear bit 6 of the condition code register (\fI\s-1CR\s0\fR) to
-indicate whether floating point values were passed in the floating point
-registers in case the function takes a variable arguments. With
-\&\fB\-mprototype\fR, only calls to prototyped variable argument functions
-will set or clear the bit.
-.IP "\fB\-msim\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msim"
-On embedded PowerPC systems, assume that the startup module is called
-\&\fIsim\-crt0.o\fR and that the standard C libraries are \fIlibsim.a\fR and
-\&\fIlibc.a\fR. This is the default for \fBpowerpc\-*\-eabisim\fR.
-configurations.
-.IP "\fB\-mmvme\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmvme"
-On embedded PowerPC systems, assume that the startup module is called
-\&\fIcrt0.o\fR and the standard C libraries are \fIlibmvme.a\fR and
-\&\fIlibc.a\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mads\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mads"
-On embedded PowerPC systems, assume that the startup module is called
-\&\fIcrt0.o\fR and the standard C libraries are \fIlibads.a\fR and
-\&\fIlibc.a\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-myellowknife\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-myellowknife"
-On embedded PowerPC systems, assume that the startup module is called
-\&\fIcrt0.o\fR and the standard C libraries are \fIlibyk.a\fR and
-\&\fIlibc.a\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mvxworks\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mvxworks"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems, specify that you are
-compiling for a VxWorks system.
-.IP "\fB\-mwindiss\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mwindiss"
-Specify that you are compiling for the WindISS simulation environment.
-.IP "\fB\-memb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-memb"
-On embedded PowerPC systems, set the \fI\s-1PPC_EMB\s0\fR bit in the \s-1ELF\s0 flags
-header to indicate that \fBeabi\fR extended relocations are used.
-.IP "\fB\-meabi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-meabi"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-eabi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-eabi"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems do (do not) adhere to the
-Embedded Applications Binary Interface (eabi) which is a set of
-modifications to the System V.4 specifications. Selecting \fB\-meabi\fR
-means that the stack is aligned to an 8 byte boundary, a function
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_eabi\*(C'\fR is called to from \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR to set up the eabi
-environment, and the \fB\-msdata\fR option can use both \f(CW\*(C`r2\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`r13\*(C'\fR to point to two separate small data areas. Selecting
-\&\fB\-mno\-eabi\fR means that the stack is aligned to a 16 byte boundary,
-do not call an initialization function from \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR, and the
-\&\fB\-msdata\fR option will only use \f(CW\*(C`r13\*(C'\fR to point to a single
-small data area. The \fB\-meabi\fR option is on by default if you
-configured \s-1GCC\s0 using one of the \fBpowerpc*\-*\-eabi*\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-msdata=eabi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata=eabi"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems, put small initialized
-\&\f(CW\*(C`const\*(C'\fR global and static data in the \fB.sdata2\fR section, which
-is pointed to by register \f(CW\*(C`r2\*(C'\fR. Put small initialized
-non\-\f(CW\*(C`const\*(C'\fR global and static data in the \fB.sdata\fR section,
-which is pointed to by register \f(CW\*(C`r13\*(C'\fR. Put small uninitialized
-global and static data in the \fB.sbss\fR section, which is adjacent to
-the \fB.sdata\fR section. The \fB\-msdata=eabi\fR option is
-incompatible with the \fB\-mrelocatable\fR option. The
-\&\fB\-msdata=eabi\fR option also sets the \fB\-memb\fR option.
-.IP "\fB\-msdata=sysv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata=sysv"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems, put small global and static
-data in the \fB.sdata\fR section, which is pointed to by register
-\&\f(CW\*(C`r13\*(C'\fR. Put small uninitialized global and static data in the
-\&\fB.sbss\fR section, which is adjacent to the \fB.sdata\fR section.
-The \fB\-msdata=sysv\fR option is incompatible with the
-\&\fB\-mrelocatable\fR option.
-.IP "\fB\-msdata=default\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata=default"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msdata\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems, if \fB\-meabi\fR is used,
-compile code the same as \fB\-msdata=eabi\fR, otherwise compile code the
-same as \fB\-msdata=sysv\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-msdata\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata-data"
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems, put small global and static
-data in the \fB.sdata\fR section. Put small uninitialized global and
-static data in the \fB.sbss\fR section. Do not use register \f(CW\*(C`r13\*(C'\fR
-to address small data however. This is the default behavior unless
-other \fB\-msdata\fR options are used.
-.IP "\fB\-msdata=none\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata=none"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-sdata\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-sdata"
-.PD
-On embedded PowerPC systems, put all initialized global and static data
-in the \fB.data\fR section, and all uninitialized data in the
-\&\fB.bss\fR section.
-.IP "\fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-G num"
-On embedded PowerPC systems, put global and static items less than or
-equal to \fInum\fR bytes into the small data or bss sections instead of
-the normal data or bss section. By default, \fInum\fR is 8. The
-\&\fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR switch is also passed to the linker.
-All modules should be compiled with the same \fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR value.
-.IP "\fB\-mregnames\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mregnames"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-regnames\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-regnames"
-.PD
-On System V.4 and embedded PowerPC systems do (do not) emit register
-names in the assembly language output using symbolic forms.
-.IP "\fB\-mlongcall\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlongcall"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-longcall\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-longcall"
-.PD
-Default to making all function calls via pointers, so that functions
-which reside further than 64 megabytes (67,108,864 bytes) from the
-current location can be called. This setting can be overridden by the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`shortcall\*(C'\fR function attribute, or by \f(CW\*(C`#pragma longcall(0)\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Some linkers are capable of detecting out-of-range calls and generating
-glue code on the fly. On these systems, long calls are unnecessary and
-generate slower code. As of this writing, the \s-1AIX\s0 linker can do this,
-as can the \s-1GNU\s0 linker for PowerPC/64. It is planned to add this feature
-to the \s-1GNU\s0 linker for 32\-bit PowerPC systems as well.
-.Sp
-In the future, we may cause \s-1GCC\s0 to ignore all longcall specifications
-when the linker is known to generate glue.
-.IP "\fB\-pthread\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pthread"
-Adds support for multithreading with the \fIpthreads\fR library.
-This option sets flags for both the preprocessor and linker.
-.Sh "Darwin Options"
-.IX Subsection "Darwin Options"
-These options are defined for all architectures running the Darwin operating
-system. They are useful for compatibility with other Mac \s-1OS\s0 compilers.
-.IP "\fB\-all_load\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-all_load"
-Loads all members of static archive libraries.
-See man \fIld\fR\|(1) for more information.
-.IP "\fB\-arch_errors_fatal\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-arch_errors_fatal"
-Cause the errors having to do with files that have the wrong architecture
-to be fatal.
-.IP "\fB\-bind_at_load\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-bind_at_load"
-Causes the output file to be marked such that the dynamic linker will
-bind all undefined references when the file is loaded or launched.
-.IP "\fB\-bundle\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-bundle"
-Produce a Mach-o bundle format file.
-See man \fIld\fR\|(1) for more information.
-.IP "\fB\-bundle_loader\fR \fIexecutable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-bundle_loader executable"
-This specifies the \fIexecutable\fR that will be loading the build
-output file being linked. See man \fIld\fR\|(1) for more information.
-.IP "\fB\-allowable_client\fR \fIclient_name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-allowable_client client_name"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-arch_only\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-arch_only"
-.IP "\fB\-client_name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-client_name"
-.IP "\fB\-compatibility_version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-compatibility_version"
-.IP "\fB\-current_version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-current_version"
-.IP "\fB\-dependency\-file\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dependency-file"
-.IP "\fB\-dylib_file\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dylib_file"
-.IP "\fB\-dylinker_install_name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dylinker_install_name"
-.IP "\fB\-dynamic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dynamic"
-.IP "\fB\-dynamiclib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dynamiclib"
-.IP "\fB\-exported_symbols_list\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-exported_symbols_list"
-.IP "\fB\-filelist\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-filelist"
-.IP "\fB\-flat_namespace\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-flat_namespace"
-.IP "\fB\-force_cpusubtype_ALL\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-force_cpusubtype_ALL"
-.IP "\fB\-force_flat_namespace\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-force_flat_namespace"
-.IP "\fB\-headerpad_max_install_names\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-headerpad_max_install_names"
-.IP "\fB\-image_base\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-image_base"
-.IP "\fB\-init\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-init"
-.IP "\fB\-install_name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-install_name"
-.IP "\fB\-keep_private_externs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-keep_private_externs"
-.IP "\fB\-multi_module\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-multi_module"
-.IP "\fB\-multiply_defined\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-multiply_defined"
-.IP "\fB\-multiply_defined_unused\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-multiply_defined_unused"
-.IP "\fB\-noall_load\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-noall_load"
-.IP "\fB\-nomultidefs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nomultidefs"
-.IP "\fB\-noprebind\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-noprebind"
-.IP "\fB\-noseglinkedit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-noseglinkedit"
-.IP "\fB\-pagezero_size\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pagezero_size"
-.IP "\fB\-prebind\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-prebind"
-.IP "\fB\-prebind_all_twolevel_modules\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-prebind_all_twolevel_modules"
-.IP "\fB\-private_bundle\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-private_bundle"
-.IP "\fB\-read_only_relocs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-read_only_relocs"
-.IP "\fB\-sectalign\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sectalign"
-.IP "\fB\-sectobjectsymbols\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sectobjectsymbols"
-.IP "\fB\-whyload\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-whyload"
-.IP "\fB\-seg1addr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-seg1addr"
-.IP "\fB\-sectcreate\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sectcreate"
-.IP "\fB\-sectobjectsymbols\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sectobjectsymbols"
-.IP "\fB\-sectorder\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sectorder"
-.IP "\fB\-seg_addr_table\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-seg_addr_table"
-.IP "\fB\-seg_addr_table_filename\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-seg_addr_table_filename"
-.IP "\fB\-seglinkedit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-seglinkedit"
-.IP "\fB\-segprot\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-segprot"
-.IP "\fB\-segs_read_only_addr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-segs_read_only_addr"
-.IP "\fB\-segs_read_write_addr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-segs_read_write_addr"
-.IP "\fB\-single_module\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-single_module"
-.IP "\fB\-static\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-static"
-.IP "\fB\-sub_library\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sub_library"
-.IP "\fB\-sub_umbrella\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sub_umbrella"
-.IP "\fB\-twolevel_namespace\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-twolevel_namespace"
-.IP "\fB\-umbrella\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-umbrella"
-.IP "\fB\-undefined\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-undefined"
-.IP "\fB\-unexported_symbols_list\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-unexported_symbols_list"
-.IP "\fB\-weak_reference_mismatches\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-weak_reference_mismatches"
-.IP "\fB\-whatsloaded\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-whatsloaded"
-.PD
-This options are available for Darwin linker. Darwin linker man page
-describes them in detail.
-.Sh "\s-1IBM\s0 \s-1RT\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "IBM RT Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1IBM\s0 \s-1RT\s0 \s-1PC:\s0
-.IP "\fB\-min\-line\-mul\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-min-line-mul"
-Use an in-line code sequence for integer multiplies. This is the
-default.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-lib\-mul\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-lib-mul"
-Call \f(CW\*(C`lmul$$\*(C'\fR for integer multiples.
-.IP "\fB\-mfull\-fp\-blocks\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfull-fp-blocks"
-Generate full-size floating point data blocks, including the minimum
-amount of scratch space recommended by \s-1IBM\s0. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mminimum\-fp\-blocks\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mminimum-fp-blocks"
-Do not include extra scratch space in floating point data blocks. This
-results in smaller code, but slower execution, since scratch space must
-be allocated dynamically.
-.IP "\fB\-mfp\-arg\-in\-fpregs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp-arg-in-fpregs"
-Use a calling sequence incompatible with the \s-1IBM\s0 calling convention in
-which floating point arguments are passed in floating point registers.
-Note that \f(CW\*(C`stdarg.h\*(C'\fR will not work with floating point operands
-if this option is specified.
-.IP "\fB\-mfp\-arg\-in\-gregs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp-arg-in-gregs"
-Use the normal calling convention for floating point arguments. This is
-the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mhc\-struct\-return\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhc-struct-return"
-Return structures of more than one word in memory, rather than in a
-register. This provides compatibility with the MetaWare HighC (hc)
-compiler. Use the option \fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR for compatibility
-with the Portable C Compiler (pcc).
-.IP "\fB\-mnohc\-struct\-return\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnohc-struct-return"
-Return some structures of more than one word in registers, when
-convenient. This is the default. For compatibility with the
-IBM-supplied compilers, use the option \fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR or the
-option \fB\-mhc\-struct\-return\fR.
-.Sh "\s-1MIPS\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "MIPS Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1MIPS\s0 family of computers:
-.IP "\fB\-march=\fR\fIarch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-march=arch"
-Generate code that will run on \fIarch\fR, which can be the name of a
-generic \s-1MIPS\s0 \s-1ISA\s0, or the name of a particular processor. The \s-1ISA\s0 names
-are: \fBmips1\fR, \fBmips2\fR, \fBmips3\fR, \fBmips4\fR, \fBmips32\fR
-and \fBmips64\fR. The processor names are: \fBr2000\fR,
-\&\fBr3000\fR, \fBr3900\fR, \fBr4000\fR, \fBvr4100\fR, \fBvr4300\fR,
-\&\fBr4400\fR, \fBr4600\fR, \fBr4650\fR, \fBvr5000\fR, \fBr6000\fR,
-\&\fBr8000\fR, \fB4kc\fR, \fB4kp\fR, \fB5kc\fR, \fB20kc\fR,
-\&\fBorion\fR, and \fBsb1\fR. The special value \fBfrom-abi\fR selects the
-most compatible architecture for the selected \s-1ABI\s0 (that is,
-\&\fBmips1\fR for 32\-bit ABIs and \fBmips3\fR for 64\-bit ABIs).
-.Sp
-In processor names, a final \fB000\fR can be abbreviated as \fBk\fR
-(for example, \fB\-march=r2k\fR). Prefixes are optional, and
-\&\fBvr\fR may be written \fBr\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 defines two macros based on the value of this option. The first
-is \fB_MIPS_ARCH\fR, which gives the name of target architecture, as
-a string. The second has the form \fB_MIPS_ARCH_\fR\fIfoo\fR,
-where \fIfoo\fR is the capitalized value of \fB_MIPS_ARCH\fR.
-For example, \fB\-march=r2000\fR will set \fB_MIPS_ARCH\fR
-to \fB\*(L"r2000\*(R"\fR and define the macro \fB_MIPS_ARCH_R2000\fR.
-.Sp
-Note that the \fB_MIPS_ARCH\fR macro uses the processor names given
-above. In other words, it will have the full prefix and will not
-abbreviate \fB000\fR as \fBk\fR. In the case of \fBfrom-abi\fR,
-the macro names the resolved architecture (either \fB\*(L"mips1\*(R"\fR or
-\&\fB\*(L"mips3\*(R"\fR). It names the default architecture when no
-\&\fB\-march\fR option is given.
-.IP "\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIarch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtune=arch"
-Optimize for \fIarch\fR. Among other things, this option controls
-the way instructions are scheduled, and the perceived cost of arithmetic
-operations. The list of \fIarch\fR values is the same as for
-\&\fB\-march\fR.
-.Sp
-When this option is not used, \s-1GCC\s0 will optimize for the processor
-specified by \fB\-march\fR. By using \fB\-march\fR and
-\&\fB\-mtune\fR together, it is possible to generate code that will
-run on a family of processors, but optimize the code for one
-particular member of that family.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-mtune\fR defines the macros \fB_MIPS_TUNE\fR and
-\&\fB_MIPS_TUNE_\fR\fIfoo\fR, which work in the same way as the
-\&\fB\-march\fR ones described above.
-.IP "\fB\-mips1\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mips1"
-Equivalent to \fB\-march=mips1\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mips2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mips2"
-Equivalent to \fB\-march=mips2\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mips3\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mips3"
-Equivalent to \fB\-march=mips3\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mips4\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mips4"
-Equivalent to \fB\-march=mips4\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mips32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mips32"
-Equivalent to \fB\-march=mips32\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mips64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mips64"
-Equivalent to \fB\-march=mips64\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mfused\-madd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfused-madd"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fused\-madd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fused-madd"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses (does not use) the floating point multiply and
-accumulate instructions, when they are available. These instructions
-are generated by default if they are available, but this may be
-undesirable if the extra precision causes problems or on certain chips
-in the mode where denormals are rounded to zero where denormals
-generated by multiply and accumulate instructions cause exceptions
-anyway.
-.IP "\fB\-mfp32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp32"
-Assume that floating point registers are 32 bits wide.
-.IP "\fB\-mfp64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp64"
-Assume that floating point registers are 64 bits wide.
-.IP "\fB\-mgp32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgp32"
-Assume that general purpose registers are 32 bits wide.
-.IP "\fB\-mgp64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgp64"
-Assume that general purpose registers are 64 bits wide.
-.IP "\fB\-mint64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mint64"
-Force int and long types to be 64 bits wide. See \fB\-mlong32\fR for an
-explanation of the default, and the width of pointers.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong64"
-Force long types to be 64 bits wide. See \fB\-mlong32\fR for an
-explanation of the default, and the width of pointers.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong32"
-Force long, int, and pointer types to be 32 bits wide.
-.Sp
-The default size of ints, longs and pointers depends on the \s-1ABI\s0. All
-the supported ABIs use 32\-bit ints. The n64 \s-1ABI\s0 uses 64\-bit longs, as
-does the 64\-bit Cygnus \s-1EABI\s0; the others use 32\-bit longs. Pointers
-are the same size as longs, or the same size as integer registers,
-whichever is smaller.
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=32"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=o64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=o64"
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=n32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=n32"
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=64"
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=eabi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=eabi"
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=meabi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=meabi"
-.PD
-Generate code for the given \s-1ABI\s0.
-.Sp
-Note that there are two embedded ABIs: \fB\-mabi=eabi\fR
-selects the one defined by Cygnus while \fB\-meabi=meabi\fR
-selects the one defined by \s-1MIPS\s0. Both these ABIs have
-32\-bit and 64\-bit variants. Normally, \s-1GCC\s0 will generate
-64\-bit code when you select a 64\-bit architecture, but you
-can use \fB\-mgp32\fR to get 32\-bit code instead.
-.IP "\fB\-mmips\-as\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmips-as"
-Generate code for the \s-1MIPS\s0 assembler, and invoke \fImips-tfile\fR to
-add normal debug information. This is the default for all
-platforms except for the \s-1OSF/1\s0 reference platform, using the OSF/rose
-object format. If the either of the \fB\-gstabs\fR or \fB\-gstabs+\fR
-switches are used, the \fImips-tfile\fR program will encapsulate the
-stabs within \s-1MIPS\s0 \s-1ECOFF\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mgas\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgas"
-Generate code for the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler. This is the default on the \s-1OSF/1\s0
-reference platform, using the OSF/rose object format. Also, this is
-the default if the configure option \fB\-\-with\-gnu\-as\fR is used.
-.IP "\fB\-msplit\-addresses\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msplit-addresses"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-split\-addresses\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-split-addresses"
-.PD
-Generate code to load the high and low parts of address constants separately.
-This allows \s-1GCC\s0 to optimize away redundant loads of the high order
-bits of addresses. This optimization requires \s-1GNU\s0 as and \s-1GNU\s0 ld.
-This optimization is enabled by default for some embedded targets where
-\&\s-1GNU\s0 as and \s-1GNU\s0 ld are standard.
-.IP "\fB\-mrnames\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrnames"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-rnames\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-rnames"
-.PD
-The \fB\-mrnames\fR switch says to output code using the \s-1MIPS\s0 software
-names for the registers, instead of the hardware names (ie, \fIa0\fR
-instead of \fI$4\fR). The only known assembler that supports this option
-is the Algorithmics assembler.
-.IP "\fB\-mgpopt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgpopt"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-gpopt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-gpopt"
-.PD
-The \fB\-mgpopt\fR switch says to write all of the data declarations
-before the instructions in the text section, this allows the \s-1MIPS\s0
-assembler to generate one word memory references instead of using two
-words for short global or static data items. This is on by default if
-optimization is selected.
-.IP "\fB\-mstats\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstats"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-stats\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-stats"
-.PD
-For each non-inline function processed, the \fB\-mstats\fR switch
-causes the compiler to emit one line to the standard error file to
-print statistics about the program (number of registers saved, stack
-size, etc.).
-.IP "\fB\-mmemcpy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmemcpy"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-memcpy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-memcpy"
-.PD
-The \fB\-mmemcpy\fR switch makes all block moves call the appropriate
-string function (\fBmemcpy\fR or \fBbcopy\fR) instead of possibly
-generating inline code.
-.IP "\fB\-mmips\-tfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmips-tfile"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mips\-tfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mips-tfile"
-.PD
-The \fB\-mno\-mips\-tfile\fR switch causes the compiler not
-postprocess the object file with the \fImips-tfile\fR program,
-after the \s-1MIPS\s0 assembler has generated it to add debug support. If
-\&\fImips-tfile\fR is not run, then no local variables will be
-available to the debugger. In addition, \fIstage2\fR and
-\&\fIstage3\fR objects will have the temporary file names passed to the
-assembler embedded in the object file, which means the objects will
-not compare the same. The \fB\-mno\-mips\-tfile\fR switch should only
-be used when there are bugs in the \fImips-tfile\fR program that
-prevents compilation.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Generate output containing library calls for floating point.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite libraries are not part of \s-1GCC\s0.
-Normally the facilities of the machine's usual C compiler are used, but
-this can't be done directly in cross\-compilation. You must make your
-own arrangements to provide suitable library functions for
-cross\-compilation.
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-float"
-Generate output containing floating point instructions. This is the
-default if you use the unmodified sources.
-.IP "\fB\-mabicalls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabicalls"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-abicalls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-abicalls"
-.PD
-Emit (or do not emit) the pseudo operations \fB.abicalls\fR,
-\&\fB.cpload\fR, and \fB.cprestore\fR that some System V.4 ports use for
-position independent code.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong-calls"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-long\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-long-calls"
-.PD
-Do all calls with the \fB\s-1JALR\s0\fR instruction, which requires
-loading up a function's address into a register before the call.
-You need to use this switch, if you call outside of the current
-512 megabyte segment to functions that are not through pointers.
-.IP "\fB\-mhalf\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhalf-pic"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-half\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-half-pic"
-.PD
-Put pointers to extern references into the data section and load them
-up, rather than put the references in the text section.
-.IP "\fB\-membedded\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-membedded-pic"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-embedded\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-embedded-pic"
-.PD
-Generate \s-1PIC\s0 code suitable for some embedded systems. All calls are
-made using \s-1PC\s0 relative address, and all data is addressed using the \f(CW$gp\fR
-register. No more than 65536 bytes of global data may be used. This
-requires \s-1GNU\s0 as and \s-1GNU\s0 ld which do most of the work. This currently
-only works on targets which use \s-1ECOFF\s0; it does not work with \s-1ELF\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-membedded\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-membedded-data"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-embedded\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-embedded-data"
-.PD
-Allocate variables to the read-only data section first if possible, then
-next in the small data section if possible, otherwise in data. This gives
-slightly slower code than the default, but reduces the amount of \s-1RAM\s0 required
-when executing, and thus may be preferred for some embedded systems.
-.IP "\fB\-muninit\-const\-in\-rodata\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-muninit-const-in-rodata"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-uninit\-const\-in\-rodata\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-uninit-const-in-rodata"
-.PD
-When used together with \fB\-membedded\-data\fR, it will always store uninitialized
-const variables in the read-only data section.
-.IP "\fB\-msingle\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msingle-float"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mdouble\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdouble-float"
-.PD
-The \fB\-msingle\-float\fR switch tells gcc to assume that the floating
-point coprocessor only supports single precision operations, as on the
-\&\fBr4650\fR chip. The \fB\-mdouble\-float\fR switch permits gcc to use
-double precision operations. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mmad\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmad"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mad\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mad"
-.PD
-Permit use of the \fBmad\fR, \fBmadu\fR and \fBmul\fR instructions,
-as on the \fBr4650\fR chip.
-.IP "\fB\-m4650\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m4650"
-Turns on \fB\-msingle\-float\fR, \fB\-mmad\fR, and, at least for now,
-\&\fB\-mcpu=r4650\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mips16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mips16"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mips16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mips16"
-.PD
-Enable 16\-bit instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mentry\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mentry"
-Use the entry and exit pseudo ops. This option can only be used with
-\&\fB\-mips16\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-EL\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-EL"
-Compile code for the processor in little endian mode.
-The requisite libraries are assumed to exist.
-.IP "\fB\-EB\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-EB"
-Compile code for the processor in big endian mode.
-The requisite libraries are assumed to exist.
-.IP "\fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-G num"
-Put global and static items less than or equal to \fInum\fR bytes into
-the small data or bss sections instead of the normal data or bss
-section. This allows the assembler to emit one word memory reference
-instructions based on the global pointer (\fIgp\fR or \fI$28\fR),
-instead of the normal two words used. By default, \fInum\fR is 8 when
-the \s-1MIPS\s0 assembler is used, and 0 when the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler is used. The
-\&\fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR switch is also passed to the assembler and linker.
-All modules should be compiled with the same \fB\-G\fR \fInum\fR
-value.
-.IP "\fB\-nocpp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nocpp"
-Tell the \s-1MIPS\s0 assembler to not run its preprocessor over user
-assembler files (with a \fB.s\fR suffix) when assembling them.
-.IP "\fB\-mfix7000\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfix7000"
-Pass an option to gas which will cause nops to be inserted if
-the read of the destination register of an mfhi or mflo instruction
-occurs in the following two instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-no\-crt0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-no-crt0"
-Do not include the default crt0.
-.IP "\fB\-mflush\-func=\fR\fIfunc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mflush-func=func"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-flush\-func\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-flush-func"
-.PD
-Specifies the function to call to flush the I and D caches, or to not
-call any such function. If called, the function must take the same
-arguments as the common \f(CW\*(C`_flush_func()\*(C'\fR, that is, the address of the
-memory range for which the cache is being flushed, the size of the
-memory range, and the number 3 (to flush both caches). The default
-depends on the target gcc was configured for, but commonly is either
-\&\fB_flush_func\fR or \fB_\|_cpu_flush\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mbranch\-likely\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbranch-likely"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-branch\-likely\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-branch-likely"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of Branch Likely instructions, regardless of the
-default for the selected architecture. By default, Branch Likely
-instructions may be generated if they are supported by the selected
-architecture. An exception is for the \s-1MIPS32\s0 and \s-1MIPS64\s0 architectures
-and processors which implement those architectures; for those, Branch
-Likely instructions will not be generated by default because the \s-1MIPS32\s0
-and \s-1MIPS64\s0 architectures specifically deprecate their use.
-.Sh "Intel 386 and \s-1AMD\s0 x86\-64 Options"
-.IX Subsection "Intel 386 and AMD x86-64 Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the i386 and x86\-64 family of
-computers:
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=cpu-type"
-Tune to \fIcpu-type\fR everything applicable about the generated code, except
-for the \s-1ABI\s0 and the set of available instructions. The choices for
-\&\fIcpu-type\fR are \fBi386\fR, \fBi486\fR, \fBi586\fR, \fBi686\fR,
-\&\fBpentium\fR, \fBpentium-mmx\fR, \fBpentiumpro\fR, \fBpentium2\fR,
-\&\fBpentium3\fR, \fBpentium4\fR, \fBk6\fR, \fBk6\-2\fR, \fBk6\-3\fR,
-\&\fBathlon\fR, \fBathlon-tbird\fR, \fBathlon\-4\fR, \fBathlon-xp\fR,
-\&\fBathlon-mp\fR, \fBwinchip\-c6\fR, \fBwinchip2\fR and \fBc3\fR.
-.Sp
-While picking a specific \fIcpu-type\fR will schedule things appropriately
-for that particular chip, the compiler will not generate any code that
-does not run on the i386 without the \fB\-march=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR option
-being used. \fBi586\fR is equivalent to \fBpentium\fR and \fBi686\fR
-is equivalent to \fBpentiumpro\fR. \fBk6\fR and \fBathlon\fR are the
-\&\s-1AMD\s0 chips as opposed to the Intel ones.
-.IP "\fB\-march=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-march=cpu-type"
-Generate instructions for the machine type \fIcpu-type\fR. The choices
-for \fIcpu-type\fR are the same as for \fB\-mcpu\fR. Moreover,
-specifying \fB\-march=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR implies \fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-m386\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m386"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m486\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m486"
-.IP "\fB\-mpentium\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpentium"
-.IP "\fB\-mpentiumpro\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpentiumpro"
-.PD
-These options are synonyms for \fB\-mcpu=i386\fR, \fB\-mcpu=i486\fR,
-\&\fB\-mcpu=pentium\fR, and \fB\-mcpu=pentiumpro\fR respectively.
-These synonyms are deprecated.
-.IP "\fB\-mfpmath=\fR\fIunit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfpmath=unit"
-generate floating point arithmetics for selected unit \fIunit\fR. the choices
-for \fIunit\fR are:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fB387\fR" 4
-.IX Item "387"
-Use the standard 387 floating point coprocessor present majority of chips and
-emulated otherwise. Code compiled with this option will run almost everywhere.
-The temporary results are computed in 80bit precision instead of precision
-specified by the type resulting in slightly different results compared to most
-of other chips. See \fB\-ffloat\-store\fR for more detailed description.
-.Sp
-This is the default choice for i386 compiler.
-.IP "\fBsse\fR" 4
-.IX Item "sse"
-Use scalar floating point instructions present in the \s-1SSE\s0 instruction set.
-This instruction set is supported by Pentium3 and newer chips, in the \s-1AMD\s0 line
-by Athlon\-4, Athlon-xp and Athlon-mp chips. The earlier version of \s-1SSE\s0
-instruction set supports only single precision arithmetics, thus the double and
-extended precision arithmetics is still done using 387. Later version, present
-only in Pentium4 and the future \s-1AMD\s0 x86\-64 chips supports double precision
-arithmetics too.
-.Sp
-For i387 you need to use \fB\-march=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR, \fB\-msse\fR or
-\&\fB\-msse2\fR switches to enable \s-1SSE\s0 extensions and make this option
-effective. For x86\-64 compiler, these extensions are enabled by default.
-.Sp
-The resulting code should be considerably faster in majority of cases and avoid
-the numerical instability problems of 387 code, but may break some existing
-code that expects temporaries to be 80bit.
-.Sp
-This is the default choice for x86\-64 compiler.
-.IP "\fBpni\fR" 4
-.IX Item "pni"
-Use all \s-1SSE\s0 extensions enabled by \fB\-msse2\fR as well as the new
-\&\s-1SSE\s0 extensions in Prescott New Intrunctions. \fB\-mpni\fR also
-enables 2 builtin functions, \f(CW\*(C`_\|_builtin_ia32_monitor\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_builtin_ia32_mwait\*(C'\fR, for new intrunctions \f(CW\*(C`monitor\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`mwait\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fBsse,387\fR" 4
-.IX Item "sse,387"
-Attempt to utilize both instruction sets at once. This effectively double the
-amount of available registers and on chips with separate execution units for
-387 and \s-1SSE\s0 the execution resources too. Use this option with care, as it is
-still experimental, because gcc register allocator does not model separate
-functional units well resulting in instable performance.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-masm=\fR\fIdialect\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-masm=dialect"
-Output asm instructions using selected \fIdialect\fR. Supported choices are
-\&\fBintel\fR or \fBatt\fR (the default one).
-.IP "\fB\-mieee\-fp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mieee-fp"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-ieee\-fp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-ieee-fp"
-.PD
-Control whether or not the compiler uses \s-1IEEE\s0 floating point
-comparisons. These handle correctly the case where the result of a
-comparison is unordered.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Generate output containing library calls for floating point.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite libraries are not part of \s-1GCC\s0.
-Normally the facilities of the machine's usual C compiler are used, but
-this can't be done directly in cross\-compilation. You must make your
-own arrangements to provide suitable library functions for
-cross\-compilation.
-.Sp
-On machines where a function returns floating point results in the 80387
-register stack, some floating point opcodes may be emitted even if
-\&\fB\-msoft\-float\fR is used.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fp\-ret\-in\-387\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fp-ret-in-387"
-Do not use the \s-1FPU\s0 registers for return values of functions.
-.Sp
-The usual calling convention has functions return values of types
-\&\f(CW\*(C`float\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR in an \s-1FPU\s0 register, even if there
-is no \s-1FPU\s0. The idea is that the operating system should emulate
-an \s-1FPU\s0.
-.Sp
-The option \fB\-mno\-fp\-ret\-in\-387\fR causes such values to be returned
-in ordinary \s-1CPU\s0 registers instead.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fancy\-math\-387\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fancy-math-387"
-Some 387 emulators do not support the \f(CW\*(C`sin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`cos\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`sqrt\*(C'\fR instructions for the 387. Specify this option to avoid
-generating those instructions. This option is the default on FreeBSD,
-OpenBSD and NetBSD. This option is overridden when \fB\-march\fR
-indicates that the target cpu will always have an \s-1FPU\s0 and so the
-instruction will not need emulation. As of revision 2.6.1, these
-instructions are not generated unless you also use the
-\&\fB\-funsafe\-math\-optimizations\fR switch.
-.IP "\fB\-malign\-double\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-malign-double"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-align\-double\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-align-double"
-.PD
-Control whether \s-1GCC\s0 aligns \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR, and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`long long\*(C'\fR variables on a two word boundary or a one word
-boundary. Aligning \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR variables on a two word boundary will
-produce code that runs somewhat faster on a \fBPentium\fR at the
-expense of more memory.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR if you use the \fB\-malign\-double\fR switch,
-structures containing the above types will be aligned differently than
-the published application binary interface specifications for the 386
-and will not be binary compatible with structures in code compiled
-without that switch.
-.IP "\fB\-m96bit\-long\-double\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m96bit-long-double"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m128bit\-long\-double\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m128bit-long-double"
-.PD
-These switches control the size of \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR type. The i386
-application binary interface specifies the size to be 96 bits,
-so \fB\-m96bit\-long\-double\fR is the default in 32 bit mode.
-.Sp
-Modern architectures (Pentium and newer) would prefer \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR
-to be aligned to an 8 or 16 byte boundary. In arrays or structures
-conforming to the \s-1ABI\s0, this would not be possible. So specifying a
-\&\fB\-m128bit\-long\-double\fR will align \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR
-to a 16 byte boundary by padding the \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR with an additional
-32 bit zero.
-.Sp
-In the x86\-64 compiler, \fB\-m128bit\-long\-double\fR is the default choice as
-its \s-1ABI\s0 specifies that \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR is to be aligned on 16 byte boundary.
-.Sp
-Notice that neither of these options enable any extra precision over the x87
-standard of 80 bits for a \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR if you override the default value for your target \s-1ABI\s0, the
-structures and arrays containing \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR will change their size as
-well as function calling convention for function taking \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR
-will be modified. Hence they will not be binary compatible with arrays or
-structures in code compiled without that switch.
-.IP "\fB\-msvr3\-shlib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msvr3-shlib"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-svr3\-shlib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-svr3-shlib"
-.PD
-Control whether \s-1GCC\s0 places uninitialized local variables into the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`bss\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`data\*(C'\fR segments. \fB\-msvr3\-shlib\fR places them
-into \f(CW\*(C`bss\*(C'\fR. These options are meaningful only on System V Release 3.
-.IP "\fB\-mrtd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrtd"
-Use a different function-calling convention, in which functions that
-take a fixed number of arguments return with the \f(CW\*(C`ret\*(C'\fR \fInum\fR
-instruction, which pops their arguments while returning. This saves one
-instruction in the caller since there is no need to pop the arguments
-there.
-.Sp
-You can specify that an individual function is called with this calling
-sequence with the function attribute \fBstdcall\fR. You can also
-override the \fB\-mrtd\fR option by using the function attribute
-\&\fBcdecl\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR this calling convention is incompatible with the one
-normally used on Unix, so you cannot use it if you need to call
-libraries compiled with the Unix compiler.
-.Sp
-Also, you must provide function prototypes for all functions that
-take variable numbers of arguments (including \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR);
-otherwise incorrect code will be generated for calls to those
-functions.
-.Sp
-In addition, seriously incorrect code will result if you call a
-function with too many arguments. (Normally, extra arguments are
-harmlessly ignored.)
-.IP "\fB\-mregparm=\fR\fInum\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mregparm=num"
-Control how many registers are used to pass integer arguments. By
-default, no registers are used to pass arguments, and at most 3
-registers can be used. You can control this behavior for a specific
-function by using the function attribute \fBregparm\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR if you use this switch, and
-\&\fInum\fR is nonzero, then you must build all modules with the same
-value, including any libraries. This includes the system libraries and
-startup modules.
-.IP "\fB\-mpreferred\-stack\-boundary=\fR\fInum\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpreferred-stack-boundary=num"
-Attempt to keep the stack boundary aligned to a 2 raised to \fInum\fR
-byte boundary. If \fB\-mpreferred\-stack\-boundary\fR is not specified,
-the default is 4 (16 bytes or 128 bits), except when optimizing for code
-size (\fB\-Os\fR), in which case the default is the minimum correct
-alignment (4 bytes for x86, and 8 bytes for x86\-64).
-.Sp
-On Pentium and PentiumPro, \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`long double\*(C'\fR values
-should be aligned to an 8 byte boundary (see \fB\-malign\-double\fR) or
-suffer significant run time performance penalties. On Pentium \s-1III\s0, the
-Streaming \s-1SIMD\s0 Extension (\s-1SSE\s0) data type \f(CW\*(C`_\|_m128\*(C'\fR suffers similar
-penalties if it is not 16 byte aligned.
-.Sp
-To ensure proper alignment of this values on the stack, the stack boundary
-must be as aligned as that required by any value stored on the stack.
-Further, every function must be generated such that it keeps the stack
-aligned. Thus calling a function compiled with a higher preferred
-stack boundary from a function compiled with a lower preferred stack
-boundary will most likely misalign the stack. It is recommended that
-libraries that use callbacks always use the default setting.
-.Sp
-This extra alignment does consume extra stack space, and generally
-increases code size. Code that is sensitive to stack space usage, such
-as embedded systems and operating system kernels, may want to reduce the
-preferred alignment to \fB\-mpreferred\-stack\-boundary=2\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mmmx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmmx"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mmx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mmx"
-.IP "\fB\-msse\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msse"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-sse\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-sse"
-.IP "\fB\-msse2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msse2"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-sse2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-sse2"
-.IP "\fB\-mpni\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpni"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-pni\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-pni"
-.IP "\fB\-m3dnow\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m3dnow"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-3dnow\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-3dnow"
-.PD
-These switches enable or disable the use of built-in functions that allow
-direct access to the \s-1MMX\s0, \s-1SSE\s0 and 3Dnow extensions of the instruction set.
-.Sp
-To have \s-1SSE/SSE2\s0 instructions generated automatically from floating-point
-code, see \fB\-mfpmath=sse\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mpush\-args\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpush-args"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-push\-args\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-push-args"
-.PD
-Use \s-1PUSH\s0 operations to store outgoing parameters. This method is shorter
-and usually equally fast as method using \s-1SUB/MOV\s0 operations and is enabled
-by default. In some cases disabling it may improve performance because of
-improved scheduling and reduced dependencies.
-.IP "\fB\-maccumulate\-outgoing\-args\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-maccumulate-outgoing-args"
-If enabled, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments will be
-computed in the function prologue. This is faster on most modern CPUs
-because of reduced dependencies, improved scheduling and reduced stack usage
-when preferred stack boundary is not equal to 2. The drawback is a notable
-increase in code size. This switch implies \fB\-mno\-push\-args\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mthreads\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mthreads"
-Support thread-safe exception handling on \fBMingw32\fR. Code that relies
-on thread-safe exception handling must compile and link all code with the
-\&\fB\-mthreads\fR option. When compiling, \fB\-mthreads\fR defines
-\&\fB\-D_MT\fR; when linking, it links in a special thread helper library
-\&\fB\-lmingwthrd\fR which cleans up per thread exception handling data.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-align\-stringops\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-align-stringops"
-Do not align destination of inlined string operations. This switch reduces
-code size and improves performance in case the destination is already aligned,
-but gcc don't know about it.
-.IP "\fB\-minline\-all\-stringops\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-minline-all-stringops"
-By default \s-1GCC\s0 inlines string operations only when destination is known to be
-aligned at least to 4 byte boundary. This enables more inlining, increase code
-size, but may improve performance of code that depends on fast memcpy, strlen
-and memset for short lengths.
-.IP "\fB\-momit\-leaf\-frame\-pointer\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-momit-leaf-frame-pointer"
-Don't keep the frame pointer in a register for leaf functions. This
-avoids the instructions to save, set up and restore frame pointers and
-makes an extra register available in leaf functions. The option
-\&\fB\-fomit\-frame\-pointer\fR removes the frame pointer for all functions
-which might make debugging harder.
-.PP
-These \fB\-m\fR switches are supported in addition to the above
-on \s-1AMD\s0 x86\-64 processors in 64\-bit environments.
-.IP "\fB\-m32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m64"
-.PD
-Generate code for a 32\-bit or 64\-bit environment.
-The 32\-bit environment sets int, long and pointer to 32 bits and
-generates code that runs on any i386 system.
-The 64\-bit environment sets int to 32 bits and long and pointer
-to 64 bits and generates code for \s-1AMD\s0's x86\-64 architecture.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-red\-zone\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-red-zone"
-Do not use a so called red zone for x86\-64 code. The red zone is mandated
-by the x86\-64 \s-1ABI\s0, it is a 128\-byte area beyond the location of the
-stack pointer that will not be modified by signal or interrupt handlers
-and therefore can be used for temporary data without adjusting the stack
-pointer. The flag \fB\-mno\-red\-zone\fR disables this red zone.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=small\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=small"
-Generate code for the small code model: the program and its symbols must
-be linked in the lower 2 \s-1GB\s0 of the address space. Pointers are 64 bits.
-Programs can be statically or dynamically linked. This is the default
-code model.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=kernel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=kernel"
-Generate code for the kernel code model. The kernel runs in the
-negative 2 \s-1GB\s0 of the address space.
-This model has to be used for Linux kernel code.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=medium\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=medium"
-Generate code for the medium model: The program is linked in the lower 2
-\&\s-1GB\s0 of the address space but symbols can be located anywhere in the
-address space. Programs can be statically or dynamically linked, but
-building of shared libraries are not supported with the medium model.
-.IP "\fB\-mcmodel=large\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcmodel=large"
-Generate code for the large model: This model makes no assumptions
-about addresses and sizes of sections. Currently \s-1GCC\s0 does not implement
-this model.
-.Sh "\s-1HPPA\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "HPPA Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1HPPA\s0 family of computers:
-.IP "\fB\-march=\fR\fIarchitecture-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-march=architecture-type"
-Generate code for the specified architecture. The choices for
-\&\fIarchitecture-type\fR are \fB1.0\fR for \s-1PA\s0 1.0, \fB1.1\fR for \s-1PA\s0
-1.1, and \fB2.0\fR for \s-1PA\s0 2.0 processors. Refer to
-\&\fI/usr/lib/sched.models\fR on an HP-UX system to determine the proper
-architecture option for your machine. Code compiled for lower numbered
-architectures will run on higher numbered architectures, but not the
-other way around.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1PA\s0 2.0 support currently requires gas snapshot 19990413 or later. The
-next release of binutils (current is 2.9.1) will probably contain \s-1PA\s0 2.0
-support.
-.IP "\fB\-mpa\-risc\-1\-0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpa-risc-1-0"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mpa\-risc\-1\-1\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpa-risc-1-1"
-.IP "\fB\-mpa\-risc\-2\-0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpa-risc-2-0"
-.PD
-Synonyms for \fB\-march=1.0\fR, \fB\-march=1.1\fR, and \fB\-march=2.0\fR respectively.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-switch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-switch"
-Generate code suitable for big switch tables. Use this option only if
-the assembler/linker complain about out of range branches within a switch
-table.
-.IP "\fB\-mjump\-in\-delay\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mjump-in-delay"
-Fill delay slots of function calls with unconditional jump instructions
-by modifying the return pointer for the function call to be the target
-of the conditional jump.
-.IP "\fB\-mdisable\-fpregs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdisable-fpregs"
-Prevent floating point registers from being used in any manner. This is
-necessary for compiling kernels which perform lazy context switching of
-floating point registers. If you use this option and attempt to perform
-floating point operations, the compiler will abort.
-.IP "\fB\-mdisable\-indexing\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdisable-indexing"
-Prevent the compiler from using indexing address modes. This avoids some
-rather obscure problems when compiling \s-1MIG\s0 generated code under \s-1MACH\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-space\-regs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-space-regs"
-Generate code that assumes the target has no space registers. This allows
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 to generate faster indirect calls and use unscaled index address modes.
-.Sp
-Such code is suitable for level 0 \s-1PA\s0 systems and kernels.
-.IP "\fB\-mfast\-indirect\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfast-indirect-calls"
-Generate code that assumes calls never cross space boundaries. This
-allows \s-1GCC\s0 to emit code which performs faster indirect calls.
-.Sp
-This option will not work in the presence of shared libraries or nested
-functions.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong\-load\-store\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong-load-store"
-Generate 3\-instruction load and store sequences as sometimes required by
-the HP-UX 10 linker. This is equivalent to the \fB+k\fR option to
-the \s-1HP\s0 compilers.
-.IP "\fB\-mportable\-runtime\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mportable-runtime"
-Use the portable calling conventions proposed by \s-1HP\s0 for \s-1ELF\s0 systems.
-.IP "\fB\-mgas\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgas"
-Enable the use of assembler directives only \s-1GAS\s0 understands.
-.IP "\fB\-mschedule=\fR\fIcpu-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mschedule=cpu-type"
-Schedule code according to the constraints for the machine type
-\&\fIcpu-type\fR. The choices for \fIcpu-type\fR are \fB700\fR
-\&\fB7100\fR, \fB7100LC\fR, \fB7200\fR, \fB7300\fR and \fB8000\fR. Refer
-to \fI/usr/lib/sched.models\fR on an HP-UX system to determine the
-proper scheduling option for your machine. The default scheduling is
-\&\fB8000\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mlinker\-opt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlinker-opt"
-Enable the optimization pass in the HP-UX linker. Note this makes symbolic
-debugging impossible. It also triggers a bug in the HP-UX 8 and HP-UX 9
-linkers in which they give bogus error messages when linking some programs.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Generate output containing library calls for floating point.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite libraries are not available for all \s-1HPPA\s0
-targets. Normally the facilities of the machine's usual C compiler are
-used, but this cannot be done directly in cross\-compilation. You must make
-your own arrangements to provide suitable library functions for
-cross\-compilation. The embedded target \fBhppa1.1\-*\-pro\fR
-does provide software floating point support.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-msoft\-float\fR changes the calling convention in the output file;
-therefore, it is only useful if you compile \fIall\fR of a program with
-this option. In particular, you need to compile \fIlibgcc.a\fR, the
-library that comes with \s-1GCC\s0, with \fB\-msoft\-float\fR in order for
-this to work.
-.IP "\fB\-msio\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msio"
-Generate the predefine, \f(CW\*(C`_SIO\*(C'\fR, for server \s-1IO\s0. The default is
-\&\fB\-mwsio\fR. This generates the predefines, \f(CW\*(C`_\|_hp9000s700\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_hp9000s700_\|_\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`_WSIO\*(C'\fR, for workstation \s-1IO\s0. These
-options are available under HP-UX and \s-1HI\-UX\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mgnu\-ld\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgnu-ld"
-Use \s-1GNU\s0 ld specific options. This passes \fB\-shared\fR to ld when
-building a shared library. It is the default when \s-1GCC\s0 is configured,
-explicitly or implicitly, with the \s-1GNU\s0 linker. This option does not
-have any affect on which ld is called, it only changes what parameters
-are passed to that ld. The ld that is called is determined by the
-\&\fB\-\-with\-ld\fR configure option, gcc's program search path, and
-finally by the user's \fB\s-1PATH\s0\fR. The linker used by \s-1GCC\s0 can be printed
-using \fBwhich `gcc \-print\-prog\-name=ld`\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mhp\-ld\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhp-ld"
-Use \s-1HP\s0 ld specific options. This passes \fB\-b\fR to ld when building
-a shared library and passes \fB+Accept TypeMismatch\fR to ld on all
-links. It is the default when \s-1GCC\s0 is configured, explicitly or
-implicitly, with the \s-1HP\s0 linker. This option does not have any affect on
-which ld is called, it only changes what parameters are passed to that
-ld. The ld that is called is determined by the \fB\-\-with\-ld\fR
-configure option, gcc's program search path, and finally by the user's
-\&\fB\s-1PATH\s0\fR. The linker used by \s-1GCC\s0 can be printed using \fBwhich
-`gcc \-print\-prog\-name=ld`\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong-calls"
-Generate code that uses long call sequences. This ensures that a call
-is always able to reach linker generated stubs. The default is to generate
-long calls only when the distance from the call site to the beginning
-of the function or translation unit, as the case may be, exceeds a
-predefined limit set by the branch type being used. The limits for
-normal calls are 7,600,000 and 240,000 bytes, respectively for the
-\&\s-1PA\s0 2.0 and \s-1PA\s0 1.X architectures. Sibcalls are always limited at
-240,000 bytes.
-.Sp
-Distances are measured from the beginning of functions when using the
-\&\fB\-ffunction\-sections\fR option, or when using the \fB\-mgas\fR
-and \fB\-mno\-portable\-runtime\fR options together under HP-UX with
-the \s-1SOM\s0 linker.
-.Sp
-It is normally not desirable to use this option as it will degrade
-performance. However, it may be useful in large applications,
-particularly when partial linking is used to build the application.
-.Sp
-The types of long calls used depends on the capabilities of the
-assembler and linker, and the type of code being generated. The
-impact on systems that support long absolute calls, and long pic
-symbol-difference or pc-relative calls should be relatively small.
-However, an indirect call is used on 32\-bit \s-1ELF\s0 systems in pic code
-and it is quite long.
-.IP "\fB\-nolibdld\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nolibdld"
-Suppress the generation of link options to search libdld.sl when the
-\&\fB\-static\fR option is specified on HP-UX 10 and later.
-.IP "\fB\-static\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-static"
-The HP-UX implementation of setlocale in libc has a dependency on
-libdld.sl. There isn't an archive version of libdld.sl. Thus,
-when the \fB\-static\fR option is specified, special link options
-are needed to resolve this dependency.
-.Sp
-On HP-UX 10 and later, the \s-1GCC\s0 driver adds the necessary options to
-link with libdld.sl when the \fB\-static\fR option is specified.
-This causes the resulting binary to be dynamic. On the 64\-bit port,
-the linkers generate dynamic binaries by default in any case. The
-\&\fB\-nolibdld\fR option can be used to prevent the \s-1GCC\s0 driver from
-adding these link options.
-.IP "\fB\-threads\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-threads"
-Add support for multithreading with the \fIdce thread\fR library
-under \s-1HP\-UX\s0. This option sets flags for both the preprocessor and
-linker.
-.Sh "Intel 960 Options"
-.IX Subsection "Intel 960 Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the Intel 960 implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-m\fR\fIcpu-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu-type"
-Assume the defaults for the machine type \fIcpu-type\fR for some of
-the other options, including instruction scheduling, floating point
-support, and addressing modes. The choices for \fIcpu-type\fR are
-\&\fBka\fR, \fBkb\fR, \fBmc\fR, \fBca\fR, \fBcf\fR,
-\&\fBsa\fR, and \fBsb\fR.
-The default is
-\&\fBkb\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mnumerics\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnumerics"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-.PD
-The \fB\-mnumerics\fR option indicates that the processor does support
-floating-point instructions. The \fB\-msoft\-float\fR option indicates
-that floating-point support should not be assumed.
-.IP "\fB\-mleaf\-procedures\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mleaf-procedures"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-leaf\-procedures\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-leaf-procedures"
-.PD
-Do (or do not) attempt to alter leaf procedures to be callable with the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`bal\*(C'\fR instruction as well as \f(CW\*(C`call\*(C'\fR. This will result in more
-efficient code for explicit calls when the \f(CW\*(C`bal\*(C'\fR instruction can be
-substituted by the assembler or linker, but less efficient code in other
-cases, such as calls via function pointers, or using a linker that doesn't
-support this optimization.
-.IP "\fB\-mtail\-call\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtail-call"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-tail\-call\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-tail-call"
-.PD
-Do (or do not) make additional attempts (beyond those of the
-machine-independent portions of the compiler) to optimize tail-recursive
-calls into branches. You may not want to do this because the detection of
-cases where this is not valid is not totally complete. The default is
-\&\fB\-mno\-tail\-call\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcomplex\-addr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcomplex-addr"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-complex\-addr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-complex-addr"
-.PD
-Assume (or do not assume) that the use of a complex addressing mode is a
-win on this implementation of the i960. Complex addressing modes may not
-be worthwhile on the K\-series, but they definitely are on the C\-series.
-The default is currently \fB\-mcomplex\-addr\fR for all processors except
-the \s-1CB\s0 and \s-1CC\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mcode\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcode-align"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-code\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-code-align"
-.PD
-Align code to 8\-byte boundaries for faster fetching (or don't bother).
-Currently turned on by default for C\-series implementations only.
-.IP "\fB\-mic\-compat\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mic-compat"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mic2.0\-compat\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mic2.0-compat"
-.IP "\fB\-mic3.0\-compat\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mic3.0-compat"
-.PD
-Enable compatibility with iC960 v2.0 or v3.0.
-.IP "\fB\-masm\-compat\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-masm-compat"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mintel\-asm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mintel-asm"
-.PD
-Enable compatibility with the iC960 assembler.
-.IP "\fB\-mstrict\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstrict-align"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-strict\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-strict-align"
-.PD
-Do not permit (do permit) unaligned accesses.
-.IP "\fB\-mold\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mold-align"
-Enable structure-alignment compatibility with Intel's gcc release version
-1.3 (based on gcc 1.37). This option implies \fB\-mstrict\-align\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mlong\-double\-64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong-double-64"
-Implement type \fBlong double\fR as 64\-bit floating point numbers.
-Without the option \fBlong double\fR is implemented by 80\-bit
-floating point numbers. The only reason we have it because there is
-no 128\-bit \fBlong double\fR support in \fBfp\-bit.c\fR yet. So it
-is only useful for people using soft-float targets. Otherwise, we
-should recommend against use of it.
-.Sh "\s-1DEC\s0 Alpha Options"
-.IX Subsection "DEC Alpha Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1DEC\s0 Alpha implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-soft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-soft-float"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-.PD
-Use (do not use) the hardware floating-point instructions for
-floating-point operations. When \fB\-msoft\-float\fR is specified,
-functions in \fIlibgcc.a\fR will be used to perform floating-point
-operations. Unless they are replaced by routines that emulate the
-floating-point operations, or compiled in such a way as to call such
-emulations routines, these routines will issue floating-point
-operations. If you are compiling for an Alpha without floating-point
-operations, you must ensure that the library is built so as not to call
-them.
-.Sp
-Note that Alpha implementations without floating-point operations are
-required to have floating-point registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mfp\-reg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp-reg"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fp\-regs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fp-regs"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses (does not use) the floating-point register set.
-\&\fB\-mno\-fp\-regs\fR implies \fB\-msoft\-float\fR. If the floating-point
-register set is not used, floating point operands are passed in integer
-registers as if they were integers and floating-point results are passed
-in \f(CW$0\fR instead of \f(CW$f0\fR. This is a non-standard calling sequence,
-so any function with a floating-point argument or return value called by code
-compiled with \fB\-mno\-fp\-regs\fR must also be compiled with that
-option.
-.Sp
-A typical use of this option is building a kernel that does not use,
-and hence need not save and restore, any floating-point registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mieee\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mieee"
-The Alpha architecture implements floating-point hardware optimized for
-maximum performance. It is mostly compliant with the \s-1IEEE\s0 floating
-point standard. However, for full compliance, software assistance is
-required. This option generates code fully \s-1IEEE\s0 compliant code
-\&\fIexcept\fR that the \fIinexact-flag\fR is not maintained (see below).
-If this option is turned on, the preprocessor macro \f(CW\*(C`_IEEE_FP\*(C'\fR is
-defined during compilation. The resulting code is less efficient but is
-able to correctly support denormalized numbers and exceptional \s-1IEEE\s0
-values such as not-a-number and plus/minus infinity. Other Alpha
-compilers call this option \fB\-ieee_with_no_inexact\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mieee\-with\-inexact\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mieee-with-inexact"
-This is like \fB\-mieee\fR except the generated code also maintains
-the \s-1IEEE\s0 \fIinexact-flag\fR. Turning on this option causes the
-generated code to implement fully-compliant \s-1IEEE\s0 math. In addition to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_IEEE_FP\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`_IEEE_FP_EXACT\*(C'\fR is defined as a preprocessor
-macro. On some Alpha implementations the resulting code may execute
-significantly slower than the code generated by default. Since there is
-very little code that depends on the \fIinexact-flag\fR, you should
-normally not specify this option. Other Alpha compilers call this
-option \fB\-ieee_with_inexact\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mfp\-trap\-mode=\fR\fItrap-mode\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp-trap-mode=trap-mode"
-This option controls what floating-point related traps are enabled.
-Other Alpha compilers call this option \fB\-fptm\fR \fItrap-mode\fR.
-The trap mode can be set to one of four values:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "n"
-This is the default (normal) setting. The only traps that are enabled
-are the ones that cannot be disabled in software (e.g., division by zero
-trap).
-.IP "\fBu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "u"
-In addition to the traps enabled by \fBn\fR, underflow traps are enabled
-as well.
-.IP "\fBsu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "su"
-Like \fBsu\fR, but the instructions are marked to be safe for software
-completion (see Alpha architecture manual for details).
-.IP "\fBsui\fR" 4
-.IX Item "sui"
-Like \fBsu\fR, but inexact traps are enabled as well.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-mfp\-rounding\-mode=\fR\fIrounding-mode\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfp-rounding-mode=rounding-mode"
-Selects the \s-1IEEE\s0 rounding mode. Other Alpha compilers call this option
-\&\fB\-fprm\fR \fIrounding-mode\fR. The \fIrounding-mode\fR can be one
-of:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "n"
-Normal \s-1IEEE\s0 rounding mode. Floating point numbers are rounded towards
-the nearest machine number or towards the even machine number in case
-of a tie.
-.IP "\fBm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "m"
-Round towards minus infinity.
-.IP "\fBc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "c"
-Chopped rounding mode. Floating point numbers are rounded towards zero.
-.IP "\fBd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "d"
-Dynamic rounding mode. A field in the floating point control register
-(\fIfpcr\fR, see Alpha architecture reference manual) controls the
-rounding mode in effect. The C library initializes this register for
-rounding towards plus infinity. Thus, unless your program modifies the
-\&\fIfpcr\fR, \fBd\fR corresponds to round towards plus infinity.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-mtrap\-precision=\fR\fItrap-precision\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtrap-precision=trap-precision"
-In the Alpha architecture, floating point traps are imprecise. This
-means without software assistance it is impossible to recover from a
-floating trap and program execution normally needs to be terminated.
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 can generate code that can assist operating system trap handlers
-in determining the exact location that caused a floating point trap.
-Depending on the requirements of an application, different levels of
-precisions can be selected:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "p"
-Program precision. This option is the default and means a trap handler
-can only identify which program caused a floating point exception.
-.IP "\fBf\fR" 4
-.IX Item "f"
-Function precision. The trap handler can determine the function that
-caused a floating point exception.
-.IP "\fBi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "i"
-Instruction precision. The trap handler can determine the exact
-instruction that caused a floating point exception.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-Other Alpha compilers provide the equivalent options called
-\&\fB\-scope_safe\fR and \fB\-resumption_safe\fR.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-mieee\-conformant\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mieee-conformant"
-This option marks the generated code as \s-1IEEE\s0 conformant. You must not
-use this option unless you also specify \fB\-mtrap\-precision=i\fR and either
-\&\fB\-mfp\-trap\-mode=su\fR or \fB\-mfp\-trap\-mode=sui\fR. Its only effect
-is to emit the line \fB.eflag 48\fR in the function prologue of the
-generated assembly file. Under \s-1DEC\s0 Unix, this has the effect that
-IEEE-conformant math library routines will be linked in.
-.IP "\fB\-mbuild\-constants\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbuild-constants"
-Normally \s-1GCC\s0 examines a 32\- or 64\-bit integer constant to
-see if it can construct it from smaller constants in two or three
-instructions. If it cannot, it will output the constant as a literal and
-generate code to load it from the data segment at runtime.
-.Sp
-Use this option to require \s-1GCC\s0 to construct \fIall\fR integer constants
-using code, even if it takes more instructions (the maximum is six).
-.Sp
-You would typically use this option to build a shared library dynamic
-loader. Itself a shared library, it must relocate itself in memory
-before it can find the variables and constants in its own data segment.
-.IP "\fB\-malpha\-as\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-malpha-as"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mgas\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgas"
-.PD
-Select whether to generate code to be assembled by the vendor-supplied
-assembler (\fB\-malpha\-as\fR) or by the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler \fB\-mgas\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mbwx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbwx"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-bwx\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-bwx"
-.IP "\fB\-mcix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcix"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-cix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-cix"
-.IP "\fB\-mfix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfix"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fix"
-.IP "\fB\-mmax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmax"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-max\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-max"
-.PD
-Indicate whether \s-1GCC\s0 should generate code to use the optional \s-1BWX\s0,
-\&\s-1CIX\s0, \s-1FIX\s0 and \s-1MAX\s0 instruction sets. The default is to use the instruction
-sets supported by the \s-1CPU\s0 type specified via \fB\-mcpu=\fR option or that
-of the \s-1CPU\s0 on which \s-1GCC\s0 was built if none was specified.
-.IP "\fB\-mfloat\-vax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfloat-vax"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mfloat\-ieee\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfloat-ieee"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses (does not use) \s-1VAX\s0 F and G floating point
-arithmetic instead of \s-1IEEE\s0 single and double precision.
-.IP "\fB\-mexplicit\-relocs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mexplicit-relocs"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-explicit\-relocs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-explicit-relocs"
-.PD
-Older Alpha assemblers provided no way to generate symbol relocations
-except via assembler macros. Use of these macros does not allow
-optimal instruction scheduling. \s-1GNU\s0 binutils as of version 2.12
-supports a new syntax that allows the compiler to explicitly mark
-which relocations should apply to which instructions. This option
-is mostly useful for debugging, as \s-1GCC\s0 detects the capabilities of
-the assembler when it is built and sets the default accordingly.
-.IP "\fB\-msmall\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msmall-data"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mlarge\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlarge-data"
-.PD
-When \fB\-mexplicit\-relocs\fR is in effect, static data is
-accessed via \fIgp-relative\fR relocations. When \fB\-msmall\-data\fR
-is used, objects 8 bytes long or smaller are placed in a \fIsmall data area\fR
-(the \f(CW\*(C`.sdata\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`.sbss\*(C'\fR sections) and are accessed via
-16\-bit relocations off of the \f(CW$gp\fR register. This limits the
-size of the small data area to 64KB, but allows the variables to be
-directly accessed via a single instruction.
-.Sp
-The default is \fB\-mlarge\-data\fR. With this option the data area
-is limited to just below 2GB. Programs that require more than 2GB of
-data must use \f(CW\*(C`malloc\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`mmap\*(C'\fR to allocate the data in the
-heap instead of in the program's data segment.
-.Sp
-When generating code for shared libraries, \fB\-fpic\fR implies
-\&\fB\-msmall\-data\fR and \fB\-fPIC\fR implies \fB\-mlarge\-data\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=cpu_type"
-Set the instruction set and instruction scheduling parameters for
-machine type \fIcpu_type\fR. You can specify either the \fB\s-1EV\s0\fR
-style name or the corresponding chip number. \s-1GCC\s0 supports scheduling
-parameters for the \s-1EV4\s0, \s-1EV5\s0 and \s-1EV6\s0 family of processors and will
-choose the default values for the instruction set from the processor
-you specify. If you do not specify a processor type, \s-1GCC\s0 will default
-to the processor on which the compiler was built.
-.Sp
-Supported values for \fIcpu_type\fR are
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBev4\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ev4"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBev45\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ev45"
-.IP "\fB21064\fR" 4
-.IX Item "21064"
-.PD
-Schedules as an \s-1EV4\s0 and has no instruction set extensions.
-.IP "\fBev5\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ev5"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB21164\fR" 4
-.IX Item "21164"
-.PD
-Schedules as an \s-1EV5\s0 and has no instruction set extensions.
-.IP "\fBev56\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ev56"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB21164a\fR" 4
-.IX Item "21164a"
-.PD
-Schedules as an \s-1EV5\s0 and supports the \s-1BWX\s0 extension.
-.IP "\fBpca56\fR" 4
-.IX Item "pca56"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB21164pc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "21164pc"
-.IP "\fB21164PC\fR" 4
-.IX Item "21164PC"
-.PD
-Schedules as an \s-1EV5\s0 and supports the \s-1BWX\s0 and \s-1MAX\s0 extensions.
-.IP "\fBev6\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ev6"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB21264\fR" 4
-.IX Item "21264"
-.PD
-Schedules as an \s-1EV6\s0 and supports the \s-1BWX\s0, \s-1FIX\s0, and \s-1MAX\s0 extensions.
-.IP "\fBev67\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ev67"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB21264a\fR" 4
-.IX Item "21264a"
-.PD
-Schedules as an \s-1EV6\s0 and supports the \s-1BWX\s0, \s-1CIX\s0, \s-1FIX\s0, and \s-1MAX\s0 extensions.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtune=cpu_type"
-Set only the instruction scheduling parameters for machine type
-\&\fIcpu_type\fR. The instruction set is not changed.
-.IP "\fB\-mmemory\-latency=\fR\fItime\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmemory-latency=time"
-Sets the latency the scheduler should assume for typical memory
-references as seen by the application. This number is highly
-dependent on the memory access patterns used by the application
-and the size of the external cache on the machine.
-.Sp
-Valid options for \fItime\fR are
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fInumber\fR" 4
-.IX Item "number"
-A decimal number representing clock cycles.
-.IP "\fBL1\fR" 4
-.IX Item "L1"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBL2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "L2"
-.IP "\fBL3\fR" 4
-.IX Item "L3"
-.IP "\fBmain\fR" 4
-.IX Item "main"
-.PD
-The compiler contains estimates of the number of clock cycles for
-``typical'' \s-1EV4\s0 & \s-1EV5\s0 hardware for the Level 1, 2 & 3 caches
-(also called Dcache, Scache, and Bcache), as well as to main memory.
-Note that L3 is only valid for \s-1EV5\s0.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.Sh "\s-1DEC\s0 Alpha/VMS Options"
-.IX Subsection "DEC Alpha/VMS Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1DEC\s0 Alpha/VMS implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-mvms\-return\-codes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mvms-return-codes"
-Return \s-1VMS\s0 condition codes from main. The default is to return \s-1POSIX\s0
-style condition (e.g. error) codes.
-.Sh "H8/300 Options"
-.IX Subsection "H8/300 Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the H8/300 implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-mrelax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrelax"
-Shorten some address references at link time, when possible; uses the
-linker option \fB\-relax\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mh\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mh"
-Generate code for the H8/300H.
-.IP "\fB\-ms\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ms"
-Generate code for the H8S.
-.IP "\fB\-mn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mn"
-Generate code for the H8S and H8/300H in the normal mode. This switch
-must be used either with \-mh or \-ms.
-.IP "\fB\-ms2600\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ms2600"
-Generate code for the H8S/2600. This switch must be used with \fB\-ms\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mint32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mint32"
-Make \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR data 32 bits by default.
-.IP "\fB\-malign\-300\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-malign-300"
-On the H8/300H and H8S, use the same alignment rules as for the H8/300.
-The default for the H8/300H and H8S is to align longs and floats on 4
-byte boundaries.
-\&\fB\-malign\-300\fR causes them to be aligned on 2 byte boundaries.
-This option has no effect on the H8/300.
-.Sh "\s-1SH\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "SH Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for the \s-1SH\s0 implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-m1\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m1"
-Generate code for the \s-1SH1\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-m2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m2"
-Generate code for the \s-1SH2\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-m3\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m3"
-Generate code for the \s-1SH3\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-m3e\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m3e"
-Generate code for the SH3e.
-.IP "\fB\-m4\-nofpu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m4-nofpu"
-Generate code for the \s-1SH4\s0 without a floating-point unit.
-.IP "\fB\-m4\-single\-only\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m4-single-only"
-Generate code for the \s-1SH4\s0 with a floating-point unit that only
-supports single-precision arithmetic.
-.IP "\fB\-m4\-single\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m4-single"
-Generate code for the \s-1SH4\s0 assuming the floating-point unit is in
-single-precision mode by default.
-.IP "\fB\-m4\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m4"
-Generate code for the \s-1SH4\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mb"
-Compile code for the processor in big endian mode.
-.IP "\fB\-ml\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ml"
-Compile code for the processor in little endian mode.
-.IP "\fB\-mdalign\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdalign"
-Align doubles at 64\-bit boundaries. Note that this changes the calling
-conventions, and thus some functions from the standard C library will
-not work unless you recompile it first with \fB\-mdalign\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mrelax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrelax"
-Shorten some address references at link time, when possible; uses the
-linker option \fB\-relax\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mbigtable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbigtable"
-Use 32\-bit offsets in \f(CW\*(C`switch\*(C'\fR tables. The default is to use
-16\-bit offsets.
-.IP "\fB\-mfmovd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfmovd"
-Enable the use of the instruction \f(CW\*(C`fmovd\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mhitachi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhitachi"
-Comply with the calling conventions defined by Renesas.
-.IP "\fB\-mnomacsave\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnomacsave"
-Mark the \f(CW\*(C`MAC\*(C'\fR register as call\-clobbered, even if
-\&\fB\-mhitachi\fR is given.
-.IP "\fB\-mieee\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mieee"
-Increase IEEE-compliance of floating-point code.
-.IP "\fB\-misize\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-misize"
-Dump instruction size and location in the assembly code.
-.IP "\fB\-mpadstruct\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpadstruct"
-This option is deprecated. It pads structures to multiple of 4 bytes,
-which is incompatible with the \s-1SH\s0 \s-1ABI\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mspace\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mspace"
-Optimize for space instead of speed. Implied by \fB\-Os\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mprefergot\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mprefergot"
-When generating position-independent code, emit function calls using
-the Global Offset Table instead of the Procedure Linkage Table.
-.IP "\fB\-musermode\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-musermode"
-Generate a library function call to invalidate instruction cache
-entries, after fixing up a trampoline. This library function call
-doesn't assume it can write to the whole memory address space. This
-is the default when the target is \f(CW\*(C`sh\-*\-linux*\*(C'\fR.
-.Sh "Options for System V"
-.IX Subsection "Options for System V"
-These additional options are available on System V Release 4 for
-compatibility with other compilers on those systems:
-.IP "\fB\-G\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-G"
-Create a shared object.
-It is recommended that \fB\-symbolic\fR or \fB\-shared\fR be used instead.
-.IP "\fB\-Qy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Qy"
-Identify the versions of each tool used by the compiler, in a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`.ident\*(C'\fR assembler directive in the output.
-.IP "\fB\-Qn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Qn"
-Refrain from adding \f(CW\*(C`.ident\*(C'\fR directives to the output file (this is
-the default).
-.IP "\fB\-YP,\fR\fIdirs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-YP,dirs"
-Search the directories \fIdirs\fR, and no others, for libraries
-specified with \fB\-l\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Ym,\fR\fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Ym,dir"
-Look in the directory \fIdir\fR to find the M4 preprocessor.
-The assembler uses this option.
-.Sh "TMS320C3x/C4x Options"
-.IX Subsection "TMS320C3x/C4x Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for TMS320C3x/C4x implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu_type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=cpu_type"
-Set the instruction set, register set, and instruction scheduling
-parameters for machine type \fIcpu_type\fR. Supported values for
-\&\fIcpu_type\fR are \fBc30\fR, \fBc31\fR, \fBc32\fR, \fBc40\fR, and
-\&\fBc44\fR. The default is \fBc40\fR to generate code for the
-\&\s-1TMS320C40\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-memory\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-memory"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig"
-.IP "\fB\-msmall\-memory\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msmall-memory"
-.IP "\fB\-msmall\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msmall"
-.PD
-Generates code for the big or small memory model. The small memory
-model assumed that all data fits into one 64K word page. At run-time
-the data page (\s-1DP\s0) register must be set to point to the 64K page
-containing the .bss and .data program sections. The big memory model is
-the default and requires reloading of the \s-1DP\s0 register for every direct
-memory access.
-.IP "\fB\-mbk\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbk"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-bk\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-bk"
-.PD
-Allow (disallow) allocation of general integer operands into the block
-count register \s-1BK\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mdb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdb"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-db\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-db"
-.PD
-Enable (disable) generation of code using decrement and branch,
-DBcond(D), instructions. This is enabled by default for the C4x. To be
-on the safe side, this is disabled for the C3x, since the maximum
-iteration count on the C3x is 2^{23 + 1} (but who iterates loops more than
-2^{23} times on the C3x?). Note that \s-1GCC\s0 will try to reverse a loop so
-that it can utilize the decrement and branch instruction, but will give
-up if there is more than one memory reference in the loop. Thus a loop
-where the loop counter is decremented can generate slightly more
-efficient code, in cases where the \s-1RPTB\s0 instruction cannot be utilized.
-.IP "\fB\-mdp\-isr\-reload\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdp-isr-reload"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mparanoid\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mparanoid"
-.PD
-Force the \s-1DP\s0 register to be saved on entry to an interrupt service
-routine (\s-1ISR\s0), reloaded to point to the data section, and restored on
-exit from the \s-1ISR\s0. This should not be required unless someone has
-violated the small memory model by modifying the \s-1DP\s0 register, say within
-an object library.
-.IP "\fB\-mmpyi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmpyi"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mpyi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mpyi"
-.PD
-For the C3x use the 24\-bit \s-1MPYI\s0 instruction for integer multiplies
-instead of a library call to guarantee 32\-bit results. Note that if one
-of the operands is a constant, then the multiplication will be performed
-using shifts and adds. If the \fB\-mmpyi\fR option is not specified for the C3x,
-then squaring operations are performed inline instead of a library call.
-.IP "\fB\-mfast\-fix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfast-fix"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fast\-fix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fast-fix"
-.PD
-The C3x/C4x \s-1FIX\s0 instruction to convert a floating point value to an
-integer value chooses the nearest integer less than or equal to the
-floating point value rather than to the nearest integer. Thus if the
-floating point number is negative, the result will be incorrectly
-truncated an additional code is necessary to detect and correct this
-case. This option can be used to disable generation of the additional
-code required to correct the result.
-.IP "\fB\-mrptb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrptb"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-rptb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-rptb"
-.PD
-Enable (disable) generation of repeat block sequences using the \s-1RPTB\s0
-instruction for zero overhead looping. The \s-1RPTB\s0 construct is only used
-for innermost loops that do not call functions or jump across the loop
-boundaries. There is no advantage having nested \s-1RPTB\s0 loops due to the
-overhead required to save and restore the \s-1RC\s0, \s-1RS\s0, and \s-1RE\s0 registers.
-This is enabled by default with \fB\-O2\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mrpts=\fR\fIcount\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrpts=count"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-rpts\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-rpts"
-.PD
-Enable (disable) the use of the single instruction repeat instruction
-\&\s-1RPTS\s0. If a repeat block contains a single instruction, and the loop
-count can be guaranteed to be less than the value \fIcount\fR, \s-1GCC\s0 will
-emit a \s-1RPTS\s0 instruction instead of a \s-1RPTB\s0. If no value is specified,
-then a \s-1RPTS\s0 will be emitted even if the loop count cannot be determined
-at compile time. Note that the repeated instruction following \s-1RPTS\s0 does
-not have to be reloaded from memory each iteration, thus freeing up the
-\&\s-1CPU\s0 buses for operands. However, since interrupts are blocked by this
-instruction, it is disabled by default.
-.IP "\fB\-mloop\-unsigned\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mloop-unsigned"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-loop\-unsigned\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-loop-unsigned"
-.PD
-The maximum iteration count when using \s-1RPTS\s0 and \s-1RPTB\s0 (and \s-1DB\s0 on the C40)
-is 2^{31 + 1} since these instructions test if the iteration count is
-negative to terminate the loop. If the iteration count is unsigned
-there is a possibility than the 2^{31 + 1} maximum iteration count may be
-exceeded. This switch allows an unsigned iteration count.
-.IP "\fB\-mti\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mti"
-Try to emit an assembler syntax that the \s-1TI\s0 assembler (asm30) is happy
-with. This also enforces compatibility with the \s-1API\s0 employed by the \s-1TI\s0
-C3x C compiler. For example, long doubles are passed as structures
-rather than in floating point registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mregparm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mregparm"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mmemparm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmemparm"
-.PD
-Generate code that uses registers (stack) for passing arguments to functions.
-By default, arguments are passed in registers where possible rather
-than by pushing arguments on to the stack.
-.IP "\fB\-mparallel\-insns\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mparallel-insns"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-parallel\-insns\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-parallel-insns"
-.PD
-Allow the generation of parallel instructions. This is enabled by
-default with \fB\-O2\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mparallel\-mpy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mparallel-mpy"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-parallel\-mpy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-parallel-mpy"
-.PD
-Allow the generation of MPY||ADD and MPY||SUB parallel instructions,
-provided \fB\-mparallel\-insns\fR is also specified. These instructions have
-tight register constraints which can pessimize the code generation
-of large functions.
-.Sh "V850 Options"
-.IX Subsection "V850 Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for V850 implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-mlong\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlong-calls"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-long\-calls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-long-calls"
-.PD
-Treat all calls as being far away (near). If calls are assumed to be
-far away, the compiler will always load the functions address up into a
-register, and call indirect through the pointer.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-ep\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-ep"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mep\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mep"
-.PD
-Do not optimize (do optimize) basic blocks that use the same index
-pointer 4 or more times to copy pointer into the \f(CW\*(C`ep\*(C'\fR register, and
-use the shorter \f(CW\*(C`sld\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`sst\*(C'\fR instructions. The \fB\-mep\fR
-option is on by default if you optimize.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-prolog\-function\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-prolog-function"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mprolog\-function\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mprolog-function"
-.PD
-Do not use (do use) external functions to save and restore registers
-at the prologue and epilogue of a function. The external functions
-are slower, but use less code space if more than one function saves
-the same number of registers. The \fB\-mprolog\-function\fR option
-is on by default if you optimize.
-.IP "\fB\-mspace\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mspace"
-Try to make the code as small as possible. At present, this just turns
-on the \fB\-mep\fR and \fB\-mprolog\-function\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-mtda=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtda=n"
-Put static or global variables whose size is \fIn\fR bytes or less into
-the tiny data area that register \f(CW\*(C`ep\*(C'\fR points to. The tiny data
-area can hold up to 256 bytes in total (128 bytes for byte references).
-.IP "\fB\-msda=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msda=n"
-Put static or global variables whose size is \fIn\fR bytes or less into
-the small data area that register \f(CW\*(C`gp\*(C'\fR points to. The small data
-area can hold up to 64 kilobytes.
-.IP "\fB\-mzda=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mzda=n"
-Put static or global variables whose size is \fIn\fR bytes or less into
-the first 32 kilobytes of memory.
-.IP "\fB\-mv850\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mv850"
-Specify that the target processor is the V850.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-switch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-switch"
-Generate code suitable for big switch tables. Use this option only if
-the assembler/linker complain about out of range branches within a switch
-table.
-.IP "\fB\-mapp\-regs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mapp-regs"
-This option will cause r2 and r5 to be used in the code generated by
-the compiler. This setting is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-app\-regs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-app-regs"
-This option will cause r2 and r5 to be treated as fixed registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mv850e\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mv850e"
-Specify that the target processor is the V850E. The preprocessor
-constant \fB_\|_v850e_\|_\fR will be defined if this option is used.
-.Sp
-If neither \fB\-mv850\fR nor \fB\-mv850e\fR are defined
-then a default target processor will be chosen and the relevant
-\&\fB_\|_v850*_\|_\fR preprocessor constant will be defined.
-.Sp
-The preprocessor constants \fB_\|_v850\fR and \fB_\|_v851_\|_\fR are always
-defined, regardless of which processor variant is the target.
-.IP "\fB\-mdisable\-callt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdisable-callt"
-This option will suppress generation of the \s-1CALLT\s0 instruction for the
-v850e flavors of the v850 architecture. The default is
-\&\fB\-mno\-disable\-callt\fR which allows the \s-1CALLT\s0 instruction to be used.
-.Sh "\s-1ARC\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "ARC Options"
-These options are defined for \s-1ARC\s0 implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-EL\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-EL"
-Compile code for little endian mode. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-EB\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-EB"
-Compile code for big endian mode.
-.IP "\fB\-mmangle\-cpu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmangle-cpu"
-Prepend the name of the cpu to all public symbol names.
-In multiple-processor systems, there are many \s-1ARC\s0 variants with different
-instruction and register set characteristics. This flag prevents code
-compiled for one cpu to be linked with code compiled for another.
-No facility exists for handling variants that are ``almost identical''.
-This is an all or nothing option.
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=cpu"
-Compile code for \s-1ARC\s0 variant \fIcpu\fR.
-Which variants are supported depend on the configuration.
-All variants support \fB\-mcpu=base\fR, this is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mtext=\fR\fItext-section\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtext=text-section"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mdata=\fR\fIdata-section\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdata=data-section"
-.IP "\fB\-mrodata=\fR\fIreadonly-data-section\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrodata=readonly-data-section"
-.PD
-Put functions, data, and readonly data in \fItext-section\fR,
-\&\fIdata-section\fR, and \fIreadonly-data-section\fR respectively
-by default. This can be overridden with the \f(CW\*(C`section\*(C'\fR attribute.
-.Sh "\s-1NS32K\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "NS32K Options"
-These are the \fB\-m\fR options defined for the 32000 series. The default
-values for these options depends on which style of 32000 was selected when
-the compiler was configured; the defaults for the most common choices are
-given below.
-.IP "\fB\-m32032\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32032"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m32032\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32032"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 32032. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 32032 and 32016 based systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m32332\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32332"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m32332\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32332"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 32332. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 32332\-based systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m32532\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32532"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m32532\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32532"
-.PD
-Generate output for a 32532. This is the default
-when the compiler is configured for 32532\-based systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m32081\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32081"
-Generate output containing 32081 instructions for floating point.
-This is the default for all systems.
-.IP "\fB\-m32381\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32381"
-Generate output containing 32381 instructions for floating point. This
-also implies \fB\-m32081\fR. The 32381 is only compatible with the 32332
-and 32532 cpus. This is the default for the pc532\-netbsd configuration.
-.IP "\fB\-mmulti\-add\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmulti-add"
-Try and generate multiply-add floating point instructions \f(CW\*(C`polyF\*(C'\fR
-and \f(CW\*(C`dotF\*(C'\fR. This option is only available if the \fB\-m32381\fR
-option is in effect. Using these instructions requires changes to
-register allocation which generally has a negative impact on
-performance. This option should only be enabled when compiling code
-particularly likely to make heavy use of multiply-add instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mnomulti\-add\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnomulti-add"
-Do not try and generate multiply-add floating point instructions
-\&\f(CW\*(C`polyF\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`dotF\*(C'\fR. This is the default on all platforms.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Generate output containing library calls for floating point.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite libraries may not be available.
-.IP "\fB\-mieee\-compare\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mieee-compare"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-ieee\-compare\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-ieee-compare"
-.PD
-Control whether or not the compiler uses \s-1IEEE\s0 floating point
-comparisons. These handle correctly the case where the result of a
-comparison is unordered.
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the requisite kernel support may not be available.
-.IP "\fB\-mnobitfield\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnobitfield"
-Do not use the bit-field instructions. On some machines it is faster to
-use shifting and masking operations. This is the default for the pc532.
-.IP "\fB\-mbitfield\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbitfield"
-Do use the bit-field instructions. This is the default for all platforms
-except the pc532.
-.IP "\fB\-mrtd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrtd"
-Use a different function-calling convention, in which functions
-that take a fixed number of arguments return pop their
-arguments on return with the \f(CW\*(C`ret\*(C'\fR instruction.
-.Sp
-This calling convention is incompatible with the one normally
-used on Unix, so you cannot use it if you need to call libraries
-compiled with the Unix compiler.
-.Sp
-Also, you must provide function prototypes for all functions that
-take variable numbers of arguments (including \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR);
-otherwise incorrect code will be generated for calls to those
-functions.
-.Sp
-In addition, seriously incorrect code will result if you call a
-function with too many arguments. (Normally, extra arguments are
-harmlessly ignored.)
-.Sp
-This option takes its name from the 680x0 \f(CW\*(C`rtd\*(C'\fR instruction.
-.IP "\fB\-mregparam\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mregparam"
-Use a different function-calling convention where the first two arguments
-are passed in registers.
-.Sp
-This calling convention is incompatible with the one normally
-used on Unix, so you cannot use it if you need to call libraries
-compiled with the Unix compiler.
-.IP "\fB\-mnoregparam\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnoregparam"
-Do not pass any arguments in registers. This is the default for all
-targets.
-.IP "\fB\-msb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msb"
-It is \s-1OK\s0 to use the sb as an index register which is always loaded with
-zero. This is the default for the pc532\-netbsd target.
-.IP "\fB\-mnosb\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnosb"
-The sb register is not available for use or has not been initialized to
-zero by the run time system. This is the default for all targets except
-the pc532\-netbsd. It is also implied whenever \fB\-mhimem\fR or
-\&\fB\-fpic\fR is set.
-.IP "\fB\-mhimem\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhimem"
-Many ns32000 series addressing modes use displacements of up to 512MB.
-If an address is above 512MB then displacements from zero can not be used.
-This option causes code to be generated which can be loaded above 512MB.
-This may be useful for operating systems or \s-1ROM\s0 code.
-.IP "\fB\-mnohimem\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnohimem"
-Assume code will be loaded in the first 512MB of virtual address space.
-This is the default for all platforms.
-.Sh "\s-1AVR\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "AVR Options"
-These options are defined for \s-1AVR\s0 implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-mmcu=\fR\fImcu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmcu=mcu"
-Specify \s-1ATMEL\s0 \s-1AVR\s0 instruction set or \s-1MCU\s0 type.
-.Sp
-Instruction set avr1 is for the minimal \s-1AVR\s0 core, not supported by the C
-compiler, only for assembler programs (\s-1MCU\s0 types: at90s1200, attiny10,
-attiny11, attiny12, attiny15, attiny28).
-.Sp
-Instruction set avr2 (default) is for the classic \s-1AVR\s0 core with up to
-8K program memory space (\s-1MCU\s0 types: at90s2313, at90s2323, attiny22,
-at90s2333, at90s2343, at90s4414, at90s4433, at90s4434, at90s8515,
-at90c8534, at90s8535).
-.Sp
-Instruction set avr3 is for the classic \s-1AVR\s0 core with up to 128K program
-memory space (\s-1MCU\s0 types: atmega103, atmega603, at43usb320, at76c711).
-.Sp
-Instruction set avr4 is for the enhanced \s-1AVR\s0 core with up to 8K program
-memory space (\s-1MCU\s0 types: atmega8, atmega83, atmega85).
-.Sp
-Instruction set avr5 is for the enhanced \s-1AVR\s0 core with up to 128K program
-memory space (\s-1MCU\s0 types: atmega16, atmega161, atmega163, atmega32, atmega323,
-atmega64, atmega128, at43usb355, at94k).
-.IP "\fB\-msize\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msize"
-Output instruction sizes to the asm file.
-.IP "\fB\-minit\-stack=\fR\fIN\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-minit-stack=N"
-Specify the initial stack address, which may be a symbol or numeric value,
-\&\fB_\|_stack\fR is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-interrupts\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-interrupts"
-Generated code is not compatible with hardware interrupts.
-Code size will be smaller.
-.IP "\fB\-mcall\-prologues\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcall-prologues"
-Functions prologues/epilogues expanded as call to appropriate
-subroutines. Code size will be smaller.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-tablejump\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-tablejump"
-Do not generate tablejump insns which sometimes increase code size.
-.IP "\fB\-mtiny\-stack\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtiny-stack"
-Change only the low 8 bits of the stack pointer.
-.Sh "MCore Options"
-.IX Subsection "MCore Options"
-These are the \fB\-m\fR options defined for the Motorola M*Core
-processors.
-.IP "\fB\-mhardlit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhardlit"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-hardlit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-hardlit"
-.PD
-Inline constants into the code stream if it can be done in two
-instructions or less.
-.IP "\fB\-mdiv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdiv"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-div\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-div"
-.PD
-Use the divide instruction. (Enabled by default).
-.IP "\fB\-mrelax\-immediate\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mrelax-immediate"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-relax\-immediate\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-relax-immediate"
-.PD
-Allow arbitrary sized immediates in bit operations.
-.IP "\fB\-mwide\-bitfields\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mwide-bitfields"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-wide\-bitfields\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-wide-bitfields"
-.PD
-Always treat bit-fields as int\-sized.
-.IP "\fB\-m4byte\-functions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m4byte-functions"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-4byte\-functions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-4byte-functions"
-.PD
-Force all functions to be aligned to a four byte boundary.
-.IP "\fB\-mcallgraph\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcallgraph-data"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-callgraph\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-callgraph-data"
-.PD
-Emit callgraph information.
-.IP "\fB\-mslow\-bytes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mslow-bytes"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-slow\-bytes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-slow-bytes"
-.PD
-Prefer word access when reading byte quantities.
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle-endian"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-endian"
-.PD
-Generate code for a little endian target.
-.IP "\fB\-m210\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m210"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m340\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m340"
-.PD
-Generate code for the 210 processor.
-.Sh "\s-1IA\-64\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "IA-64 Options"
-These are the \fB\-m\fR options defined for the Intel \s-1IA\-64\s0 architecture.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-endian"
-Generate code for a big endian target. This is the default for \s-1HP\-UX\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle-endian"
-Generate code for a little endian target. This is the default for \s-1AIX5\s0
-and Linux.
-.IP "\fB\-mgnu\-as\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgnu-as"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-gnu\-as\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-gnu-as"
-.PD
-Generate (or don't) code for the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mgnu\-ld\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgnu-ld"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-gnu\-ld\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-gnu-ld"
-.PD
-Generate (or don't) code for the \s-1GNU\s0 linker. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-pic"
-Generate code that does not use a global pointer register. The result
-is not position independent code, and violates the \s-1IA\-64\s0 \s-1ABI\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mvolatile\-asm\-stop\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mvolatile-asm-stop"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-volatile\-asm\-stop\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-volatile-asm-stop"
-.PD
-Generate (or don't) a stop bit immediately before and after volatile asm
-statements.
-.IP "\fB\-mb\-step\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mb-step"
-Generate code that works around Itanium B step errata.
-.IP "\fB\-mregister\-names\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mregister-names"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-register\-names\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-register-names"
-.PD
-Generate (or don't) \fBin\fR, \fBloc\fR, and \fBout\fR register names for
-the stacked registers. This may make assembler output more readable.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-sdata\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-sdata"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msdata\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msdata"
-.PD
-Disable (or enable) optimizations that use the small data section. This may
-be useful for working around optimizer bugs.
-.IP "\fB\-mconstant\-gp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mconstant-gp"
-Generate code that uses a single constant global pointer value. This is
-useful when compiling kernel code.
-.IP "\fB\-mauto\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mauto-pic"
-Generate code that is self\-relocatable. This implies \fB\-mconstant\-gp\fR.
-This is useful when compiling firmware code.
-.IP "\fB\-minline\-float\-divide\-min\-latency\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-minline-float-divide-min-latency"
-Generate code for inline divides of floating point values
-using the minimum latency algorithm.
-.IP "\fB\-minline\-float\-divide\-max\-throughput\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-minline-float-divide-max-throughput"
-Generate code for inline divides of floating point values
-using the maximum throughput algorithm.
-.IP "\fB\-minline\-int\-divide\-min\-latency\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-minline-int-divide-min-latency"
-Generate code for inline divides of integer values
-using the minimum latency algorithm.
-.IP "\fB\-minline\-int\-divide\-max\-throughput\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-minline-int-divide-max-throughput"
-Generate code for inline divides of integer values
-using the maximum throughput algorithm.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-dwarf2\-asm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-dwarf2-asm"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mdwarf2\-asm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdwarf2-asm"
-.PD
-Don't (or do) generate assembler code for the \s-1DWARF2\s0 line number debugging
-info. This may be useful when not using the \s-1GNU\s0 assembler.
-.IP "\fB\-mfixed\-range=\fR\fIregister-range\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfixed-range=register-range"
-Generate code treating the given register range as fixed registers.
-A fixed register is one that the register allocator can not use. This is
-useful when compiling kernel code. A register range is specified as
-two registers separated by a dash. Multiple register ranges can be
-specified separated by a comma.
-.Sh "D30V Options"
-.IX Subsection "D30V Options"
-These \fB\-m\fR options are defined for D30V implementations:
-.IP "\fB\-mextmem\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mextmem"
-Link the \fB.text\fR, \fB.data\fR, \fB.bss\fR, \fB.strings\fR,
-\&\fB.rodata\fR, \fB.rodata1\fR, \fB.data1\fR sections into external
-memory, which starts at location \f(CW0x80000000\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mextmemory\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mextmemory"
-Same as the \fB\-mextmem\fR switch.
-.IP "\fB\-monchip\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-monchip"
-Link the \fB.text\fR section into onchip text memory, which starts at
-location \f(CW0x0\fR. Also link \fB.data\fR, \fB.bss\fR,
-\&\fB.strings\fR, \fB.rodata\fR, \fB.rodata1\fR, \fB.data1\fR sections
-into onchip data memory, which starts at location \f(CW0x20000000\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-asm\-optimize\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-asm-optimize"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-masm\-optimize\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-masm-optimize"
-.PD
-Disable (enable) passing \fB\-O\fR to the assembler when optimizing.
-The assembler uses the \fB\-O\fR option to automatically parallelize
-adjacent short instructions where possible.
-.IP "\fB\-mbranch\-cost=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbranch-cost=n"
-Increase the internal costs of branches to \fIn\fR. Higher costs means
-that the compiler will issue more instructions to avoid doing a branch.
-The default is 2.
-.IP "\fB\-mcond\-exec=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcond-exec=n"
-Specify the maximum number of conditionally executed instructions that
-replace a branch. The default is 4.
-.Sh "S/390 and zSeries Options"
-.IX Subsection "S/390 and zSeries Options"
-These are the \fB\-m\fR options defined for the S/390 and zSeries architecture.
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-float"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-.PD
-Use (do not use) the hardware floating-point instructions and registers
-for floating-point operations. When \fB\-msoft\-float\fR is specified,
-functions in \fIlibgcc.a\fR will be used to perform floating-point
-operations. When \fB\-mhard\-float\fR is specified, the compiler
-generates \s-1IEEE\s0 floating-point instructions. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mbackchain\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbackchain"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-backchain\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-backchain"
-.PD
-Generate (or do not generate) code which maintains an explicit
-backchain within the stack frame that points to the caller's frame.
-This is currently needed to allow debugging. The default is to
-generate the backchain.
-.IP "\fB\-msmall\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msmall-exec"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-small\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-small-exec"
-.PD
-Generate (or do not generate) code using the \f(CW\*(C`bras\*(C'\fR instruction
-to do subroutine calls.
-This only works reliably if the total executable size does not
-exceed 64k. The default is to use the \f(CW\*(C`basr\*(C'\fR instruction instead,
-which does not have this limitation.
-.IP "\fB\-m64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m64"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m31\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m31"
-.PD
-When \fB\-m31\fR is specified, generate code compliant to the
-Linux for S/390 \s-1ABI\s0. When \fB\-m64\fR is specified, generate
-code compliant to the Linux for zSeries \s-1ABI\s0. This allows \s-1GCC\s0 in
-particular to generate 64\-bit instructions. For the \fBs390\fR
-targets, the default is \fB\-m31\fR, while the \fBs390x\fR
-targets default to \fB\-m64\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mmvcle\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmvcle"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mvcle\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mvcle"
-.PD
-Generate (or do not generate) code using the \f(CW\*(C`mvcle\*(C'\fR instruction
-to perform block moves. When \fB\-mno\-mvcle\fR is specified,
-use a \f(CW\*(C`mvc\*(C'\fR loop instead. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mdebug\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdebug"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-debug\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-debug"
-.PD
-Print (or do not print) additional debug information when compiling.
-The default is to not print debug information.
-.Sh "\s-1CRIS\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "CRIS Options"
-These options are defined specifically for the \s-1CRIS\s0 ports.
-.IP "\fB\-march=\fR\fIarchitecture-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-march=architecture-type"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIarchitecture-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=architecture-type"
-.PD
-Generate code for the specified architecture. The choices for
-\&\fIarchitecture-type\fR are \fBv3\fR, \fBv8\fR and \fBv10\fR for
-respectively \s-1ETRAX\s0\ 4, \s-1ETRAX\s0\ 100, and \s-1ETRAX\s0\ 100\ \s-1LX\s0.
-Default is \fBv0\fR except for cris\-axis\-linux\-gnu, where the default is
-\&\fBv10\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mtune=\fR\fIarchitecture-type\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtune=architecture-type"
-Tune to \fIarchitecture-type\fR everything applicable about the generated
-code, except for the \s-1ABI\s0 and the set of available instructions. The
-choices for \fIarchitecture-type\fR are the same as for
-\&\fB\-march=\fR\fIarchitecture-type\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mmax\-stack\-frame=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmax-stack-frame=n"
-Warn when the stack frame of a function exceeds \fIn\fR bytes.
-.IP "\fB\-melinux\-stacksize=\fR\fIn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-melinux-stacksize=n"
-Only available with the \fBcris-axis-aout\fR target. Arranges for
-indications in the program to the kernel loader that the stack of the
-program should be set to \fIn\fR bytes.
-.IP "\fB\-metrax4\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-metrax4"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-metrax100\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-metrax100"
-.PD
-The options \fB\-metrax4\fR and \fB\-metrax100\fR are synonyms for
-\&\fB\-march=v3\fR and \fB\-march=v8\fR respectively.
-.IP "\fB\-mpdebug\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpdebug"
-Enable CRIS-specific verbose debug-related information in the assembly
-code. This option also has the effect to turn off the \fB#NO_APP\fR
-formatted-code indicator to the assembler at the beginning of the
-assembly file.
-.IP "\fB\-mcc\-init\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcc-init"
-Do not use condition-code results from previous instruction; always emit
-compare and test instructions before use of condition codes.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-side\-effects\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-side-effects"
-Do not emit instructions with side-effects in addressing modes other than
-post\-increment.
-.IP "\fB\-mstack\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mstack-align"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-stack\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-stack-align"
-.IP "\fB\-mdata\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdata-align"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-data\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-data-align"
-.IP "\fB\-mconst\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mconst-align"
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-const\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-const-align"
-.PD
-These options (no\-options) arranges (eliminate arrangements) for the
-stack\-frame, individual data and constants to be aligned for the maximum
-single data access size for the chosen \s-1CPU\s0 model. The default is to
-arrange for 32\-bit alignment. \s-1ABI\s0 details such as structure layout are
-not affected by these options.
-.IP "\fB\-m32\-bit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m32-bit"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-m16\-bit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m16-bit"
-.IP "\fB\-m8\-bit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m8-bit"
-.PD
-Similar to the stack\- data\- and const-align options above, these options
-arrange for stack\-frame, writable data and constants to all be 32\-bit,
-16\-bit or 8\-bit aligned. The default is 32\-bit alignment.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-prologue\-epilogue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-prologue-epilogue"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mprologue\-epilogue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mprologue-epilogue"
-.PD
-With \fB\-mno\-prologue\-epilogue\fR, the normal function prologue and
-epilogue that sets up the stack-frame are omitted and no return
-instructions or return sequences are generated in the code. Use this
-option only together with visual inspection of the compiled code: no
-warnings or errors are generated when call-saved registers must be saved,
-or storage for local variable needs to be allocated.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-gotplt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-gotplt"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mgotplt\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgotplt"
-.PD
-With \fB\-fpic\fR and \fB\-fPIC\fR, don't generate (do generate)
-instruction sequences that load addresses for functions from the \s-1PLT\s0 part
-of the \s-1GOT\s0 rather than (traditional on other architectures) calls to the
-\&\s-1PLT\s0. The default is \fB\-mgotplt\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-maout\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-maout"
-Legacy no-op option only recognized with the cris-axis-aout target.
-.IP "\fB\-melf\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-melf"
-Legacy no-op option only recognized with the cris-axis-elf and
-cris-axis-linux-gnu targets.
-.IP "\fB\-melinux\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-melinux"
-Only recognized with the cris-axis-aout target, where it selects a
-GNU/linux\-like multilib, include files and instruction set for
-\&\fB\-march=v8\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mlinux\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlinux"
-Legacy no-op option only recognized with the cris-axis-linux-gnu target.
-.IP "\fB\-sim\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sim"
-This option, recognized for the cris-axis-aout and cris-axis-elf arranges
-to link with input-output functions from a simulator library. Code,
-initialized data and zero-initialized data are allocated consecutively.
-.IP "\fB\-sim2\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-sim2"
-Like \fB\-sim\fR, but pass linker options to locate initialized data at
-0x40000000 and zero-initialized data at 0x80000000.
-.Sh "\s-1MMIX\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "MMIX Options"
-These options are defined for the \s-1MMIX:\s0
-.IP "\fB\-mlibfuncs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlibfuncs"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-libfuncs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-libfuncs"
-.PD
-Specify that intrinsic library functions are being compiled, passing all
-values in registers, no matter the size.
-.IP "\fB\-mepsilon\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mepsilon"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-epsilon\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-epsilon"
-.PD
-Generate floating-point comparison instructions that compare with respect
-to the \f(CW\*(C`rE\*(C'\fR epsilon register.
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=mmixware\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=mmixware"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mabi=gnu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabi=gnu"
-.PD
-Generate code that passes function parameters and return values that (in
-the called function) are seen as registers \f(CW$0\fR and up, as opposed to
-the \s-1GNU\s0 \s-1ABI\s0 which uses global registers \f(CW$231\fR and up.
-.IP "\fB\-mzero\-extend\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mzero-extend"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-zero\-extend\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-zero-extend"
-.PD
-When reading data from memory in sizes shorter than 64 bits, use (do not
-use) zero-extending load instructions by default, rather than
-sign-extending ones.
-.IP "\fB\-mknuthdiv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mknuthdiv"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-knuthdiv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-knuthdiv"
-.PD
-Make the result of a division yielding a remainder have the same sign as
-the divisor. With the default, \fB\-mno\-knuthdiv\fR, the sign of the
-remainder follows the sign of the dividend. Both methods are
-arithmetically valid, the latter being almost exclusively used.
-.IP "\fB\-mtoplevel\-symbols\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtoplevel-symbols"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-toplevel\-symbols\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-toplevel-symbols"
-.PD
-Prepend (do not prepend) a \fB:\fR to all global symbols, so the assembly
-code can be used with the \f(CW\*(C`PREFIX\*(C'\fR assembly directive.
-.IP "\fB\-melf\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-melf"
-Generate an executable in the \s-1ELF\s0 format, rather than the default
-\&\fBmmo\fR format used by the \fBmmix\fR simulator.
-.IP "\fB\-mbranch\-predict\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbranch-predict"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-branch\-predict\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-branch-predict"
-.PD
-Use (do not use) the probable-branch instructions, when static branch
-prediction indicates a probable branch.
-.IP "\fB\-mbase\-addresses\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbase-addresses"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-base\-addresses\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-base-addresses"
-.PD
-Generate (do not generate) code that uses \fIbase addresses\fR. Using a
-base address automatically generates a request (handled by the assembler
-and the linker) for a constant to be set up in a global register. The
-register is used for one or more base address requests within the range 0
-to 255 from the value held in the register. The generally leads to short
-and fast code, but the number of different data items that can be
-addressed is limited. This means that a program that uses lots of static
-data may require \fB\-mno\-base\-addresses\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-msingle\-exit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msingle-exit"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-single\-exit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-single-exit"
-.PD
-Force (do not force) generated code to have a single exit point in each
-function.
-.Sh "\s-1PDP\-11\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "PDP-11 Options"
-These options are defined for the \s-1PDP\-11:\s0
-.IP "\fB\-mfpu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfpu"
-Use hardware \s-1FPP\s0 floating point. This is the default. (\s-1FIS\s0 floating
-point on the \s-1PDP\-11/40\s0 is not supported.)
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Do not use hardware floating point.
-.IP "\fB\-mac0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mac0"
-Return floating-point results in ac0 (fr0 in Unix assembler syntax).
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-ac0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-ac0"
-Return floating-point results in memory. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-m40\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m40"
-Generate code for a \s-1PDP\-11/40\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-m45\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m45"
-Generate code for a \s-1PDP\-11/45\s0. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-m10\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-m10"
-Generate code for a \s-1PDP\-11/10\s0.
-.IP "\fB\-mbcopy\-builtin\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbcopy-builtin"
-Use inline \f(CW\*(C`movstrhi\*(C'\fR patterns for copying memory. This is the
-default.
-.IP "\fB\-mbcopy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbcopy"
-Do not use inline \f(CW\*(C`movstrhi\*(C'\fR patterns for copying memory.
-.IP "\fB\-mint16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mint16"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-int32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-int32"
-.PD
-Use 16\-bit \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mint32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mint32"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-int16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-int16"
-.PD
-Use 32\-bit \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mfloat64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfloat64"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-float32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-float32"
-.PD
-Use 64\-bit \f(CW\*(C`float\*(C'\fR. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mfloat32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfloat32"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-float64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-float64"
-.PD
-Use 32\-bit \f(CW\*(C`float\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mabshi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mabshi"
-Use \f(CW\*(C`abshi2\*(C'\fR pattern. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-abshi\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-abshi"
-Do not use \f(CW\*(C`abshi2\*(C'\fR pattern.
-.IP "\fB\-mbranch\-expensive\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbranch-expensive"
-Pretend that branches are expensive. This is for experimenting with
-code generation only.
-.IP "\fB\-mbranch\-cheap\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbranch-cheap"
-Do not pretend that branches are expensive. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-msplit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msplit"
-Generate code for a system with split I&D.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-split\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-split"
-Generate code for a system without split I&D. This is the default.
-.IP "\fB\-munix\-asm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-munix-asm"
-Use Unix assembler syntax. This is the default when configured for
-\&\fBpdp11\-*\-bsd\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mdec\-asm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdec-asm"
-Use \s-1DEC\s0 assembler syntax. This is the default when configured for any
-\&\s-1PDP\-11\s0 target other than \fBpdp11\-*\-bsd\fR.
-.Sh "Xstormy16 Options"
-.IX Subsection "Xstormy16 Options"
-These options are defined for Xstormy16:
-.IP "\fB\-msim\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msim"
-Choose startup files and linker script suitable for the simulator.
-.Sh "\s-1FRV\s0 Options"
-.IX Subsection "FRV Options"
-.IP "\fB\-mgpr\-32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgpr-32"
-Only use the first 32 general purpose registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mgpr\-64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mgpr-64"
-Use all 64 general purpose registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mfpr\-32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfpr-32"
-Use only the first 32 floating point registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mfpr\-64\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfpr-64"
-Use all 64 floating point registers
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-float"
-Use hardware instructions for floating point operations.
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-Use library routines for floating point operations.
-.IP "\fB\-malloc\-cc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-malloc-cc"
-Dynamically allocate condition code registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mfixed\-cc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfixed-cc"
-Do not try to dynamically allocate condition code registers, only
-use \f(CW\*(C`icc0\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`fcc0\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-mdword\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdword"
-Change \s-1ABI\s0 to use double word insns.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-dword\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-dword"
-Do not use double word instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mdouble\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdouble"
-Use floating point double instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-double\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-double"
-Do not use floating point double instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mmedia\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmedia"
-Use media instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-media\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-media"
-Do not use media instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mmuladd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmuladd"
-Use multiply and add/subtract instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-muladd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-muladd"
-Do not use multiply and add/subtract instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mlibrary\-pic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlibrary-pic"
-Enable \s-1PIC\s0 support for building libraries
-.IP "\fB\-macc\-4\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-macc-4"
-Use only the first four media accumulator registers.
-.IP "\fB\-macc\-8\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-macc-8"
-Use all eight media accumulator registers.
-.IP "\fB\-mpack\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mpack"
-Pack \s-1VLIW\s0 instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-pack\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-pack"
-Do not pack \s-1VLIW\s0 instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-eflags\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-eflags"
-Do not mark \s-1ABI\s0 switches in e_flags.
-.IP "\fB\-mcond\-move\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcond-move"
-Enable the use of conditional-move instructions (default).
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-cond\-move\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-cond-move"
-Disable the use of conditional-move instructions.
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mscc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mscc"
-Enable the use of conditional set instructions (default).
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-scc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-scc"
-Disable the use of conditional set instructions.
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mcond\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcond-exec"
-Enable the use of conditional execution (default).
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-cond\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-cond-exec"
-Disable the use of conditional execution.
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mvliw\-branch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mvliw-branch"
-Run a pass to pack branches into \s-1VLIW\s0 instructions (default).
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-vliw\-branch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-vliw-branch"
-Do not run a pass to pack branches into \s-1VLIW\s0 instructions.
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mmulti\-cond\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmulti-cond-exec"
-Enable optimization of \f(CW\*(C`&&\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`||\*(C'\fR in conditional execution
-(default).
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-multi\-cond\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-multi-cond-exec"
-Disable optimization of \f(CW\*(C`&&\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`||\*(C'\fR in conditional execution.
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mnested\-cond\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnested-cond-exec"
-Enable nested conditional execution optimizations (default).
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-nested\-cond\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-nested-cond-exec"
-Disable nested conditional execution optimizations.
-.Sp
-This switch is mainly for debugging the compiler and will likely be removed
-in a future version.
-.IP "\fB\-mtomcat\-stats\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtomcat-stats"
-Cause gas to print out tomcat statistics.
-.IP "\fB\-mcpu=\fR\fIcpu\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mcpu=cpu"
-Select the processor type for which to generate code. Possible values are
-\&\fBsimple\fR, \fBtomcat\fR, \fBfr500\fR, \fBfr400\fR, \fBfr300\fR,
-\&\fBfrv\fR.
-.Sh "Xtensa Options"
-.IX Subsection "Xtensa Options"
-The Xtensa architecture is designed to support many different
-configurations. The compiler's default options can be set to match a
-particular Xtensa configuration by copying a configuration file into the
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 sources when building \s-1GCC\s0. The options below may be used to
-override the default options.
-.IP "\fB\-mbig\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbig-endian"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mlittle\-endian\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlittle-endian"
-.PD
-Specify big-endian or little-endian byte ordering for the target Xtensa
-processor.
-.IP "\fB\-mdensity\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mdensity"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-density\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-density"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the optional Xtensa code density instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mmac16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmac16"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mac16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mac16"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the Xtensa \s-1MAC16\s0 option. When enabled, \s-1GCC\s0
-will generate \s-1MAC16\s0 instructions from standard C code, with the
-limitation that it will use neither the \s-1MR\s0 register file nor any
-instruction that operates on the \s-1MR\s0 registers. When this option is
-disabled, \s-1GCC\s0 will translate 16\-bit multiply/accumulate operations to a
-combination of core instructions and library calls, depending on whether
-any other multiplier options are enabled.
-.IP "\fB\-mmul16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmul16"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mul16\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mul16"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the 16\-bit integer multiplier option. When
-enabled, the compiler will generate 16\-bit multiply instructions for
-multiplications of 16 bits or smaller in standard C code. When this
-option is disabled, the compiler will either use 32\-bit multiply or
-\&\s-1MAC16\s0 instructions if they are available or generate library calls to
-perform the multiply operations using shifts and adds.
-.IP "\fB\-mmul32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mmul32"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-mul32\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-mul32"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the 32\-bit integer multiplier option. When
-enabled, the compiler will generate 32\-bit multiply instructions for
-multiplications of 32 bits or smaller in standard C code. When this
-option is disabled, the compiler will generate library calls to perform
-the multiply operations using either shifts and adds or 16\-bit multiply
-instructions if they are available.
-.IP "\fB\-mnsa\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mnsa"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-nsa\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-nsa"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the optional normalization shift amount
-(\f(CW\*(C`NSA\*(C'\fR) instructions to implement the built-in \f(CW\*(C`ffs\*(C'\fR function.
-.IP "\fB\-mminmax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mminmax"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-minmax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-minmax"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the optional minimum and maximum value
-instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-msext\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msext"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-sext\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-sext"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the optional sign extend (\f(CW\*(C`SEXT\*(C'\fR)
-instruction.
-.IP "\fB\-mbooleans\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mbooleans"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-booleans\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-booleans"
-.PD
-Enable or disable support for the boolean register file used by Xtensa
-coprocessors. This is not typically useful by itself but may be
-required for other options that make use of the boolean registers (e.g.,
-the floating-point option).
-.IP "\fB\-mhard\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mhard-float"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-msoft\-float\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-msoft-float"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of the floating-point option. When enabled, \s-1GCC\s0
-generates floating-point instructions for 32\-bit \f(CW\*(C`float\*(C'\fR
-operations. When this option is disabled, \s-1GCC\s0 generates library calls
-to emulate 32\-bit floating-point operations using integer instructions.
-Regardless of this option, 64\-bit \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR operations are always
-emulated with calls to library functions.
-.IP "\fB\-mfused\-madd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mfused-madd"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-fused\-madd\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-fused-madd"
-.PD
-Enable or disable use of fused multiply/add and multiply/subtract
-instructions in the floating-point option. This has no effect if the
-floating-point option is not also enabled. Disabling fused multiply/add
-and multiply/subtract instructions forces the compiler to use separate
-instructions for the multiply and add/subtract operations. This may be
-desirable in some cases where strict \s-1IEEE\s0 754\-compliant results are
-required: the fused multiply add/subtract instructions do not round the
-intermediate result, thereby producing results with \fImore\fR bits of
-precision than specified by the \s-1IEEE\s0 standard. Disabling fused multiply
-add/subtract instructions also ensures that the program output is not
-sensitive to the compiler's ability to combine multiply and add/subtract
-operations.
-.IP "\fB\-mserialize\-volatile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mserialize-volatile"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-serialize\-volatile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-serialize-volatile"
-.PD
-When this option is enabled, \s-1GCC\s0 inserts \f(CW\*(C`MEMW\*(C'\fR instructions before
-\&\f(CW\*(C`volatile\*(C'\fR memory references to guarantee sequential consistency.
-The default is \fB\-mserialize\-volatile\fR. Use
-\&\fB\-mno\-serialize\-volatile\fR to omit the \f(CW\*(C`MEMW\*(C'\fR instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mtext\-section\-literals\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtext-section-literals"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-text\-section\-literals\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-text-section-literals"
-.PD
-Control the treatment of literal pools. The default is
-\&\fB\-mno\-text\-section\-literals\fR, which places literals in a separate
-section in the output file. This allows the literal pool to be placed
-in a data \s-1RAM/ROM\s0, and it also allows the linker to combine literal
-pools from separate object files to remove redundant literals and
-improve code size. With \fB\-mtext\-section\-literals\fR, the literals
-are interspersed in the text section in order to keep them as close as
-possible to their references. This may be necessary for large assembly
-files.
-.IP "\fB\-mtarget\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mtarget-align"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-target\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-target-align"
-.PD
-When this option is enabled, \s-1GCC\s0 instructs the assembler to
-automatically align instructions to reduce branch penalties at the
-expense of some code density. The assembler attempts to widen density
-instructions to align branch targets and the instructions following call
-instructions. If there are not enough preceding safe density
-instructions to align a target, no widening will be performed. The
-default is \fB\-mtarget\-align\fR. These options do not affect the
-treatment of auto-aligned instructions like \f(CW\*(C`LOOP\*(C'\fR, which the
-assembler will always align, either by widening density instructions or
-by inserting no-op instructions.
-.IP "\fB\-mlongcalls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mlongcalls"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-mno\-longcalls\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-mno-longcalls"
-.PD
-When this option is enabled, \s-1GCC\s0 instructs the assembler to translate
-direct calls to indirect calls unless it can determine that the target
-of a direct call is in the range allowed by the call instruction. This
-translation typically occurs for calls to functions in other source
-files. Specifically, the assembler translates a direct \f(CW\*(C`CALL\*(C'\fR
-instruction into an \f(CW\*(C`L32R\*(C'\fR followed by a \f(CW\*(C`CALLX\*(C'\fR instruction.
-The default is \fB\-mno\-longcalls\fR. This option should be used in
-programs where the call target can potentially be out of range. This
-option is implemented in the assembler, not the compiler, so the
-assembly code generated by \s-1GCC\s0 will still show direct call
-instructions\-\-\-look at the disassembled object code to see the actual
-instructions. Note that the assembler will use an indirect call for
-every cross-file call, not just those that really will be out of range.
-.Sh "Options for Code Generation Conventions"
-.IX Subsection "Options for Code Generation Conventions"
-These machine-independent options control the interface conventions
-used in code generation.
-.PP
-Most of them have both positive and negative forms; the negative form
-of \fB\-ffoo\fR would be \fB\-fno\-foo\fR. In the table below, only
-one of the forms is listed\-\-\-the one which is not the default. You
-can figure out the other form by either removing \fBno\-\fR or adding
-it.
-.IP "\fB\-fbounds\-check\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fbounds-check"
-For front-ends that support it, generate additional code to check that
-indices used to access arrays are within the declared range. This is
-currently only supported by the Java and Fortran 77 front\-ends, where
-this option defaults to true and false respectively.
-.IP "\fB\-ftrapv\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ftrapv"
-This option generates traps for signed overflow on addition, subtraction,
-multiplication operations.
-.IP "\fB\-fexceptions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fexceptions"
-Enable exception handling. Generates extra code needed to propagate
-exceptions. For some targets, this implies \s-1GCC\s0 will generate frame
-unwind information for all functions, which can produce significant data
-size overhead, although it does not affect execution. If you do not
-specify this option, \s-1GCC\s0 will enable it by default for languages like
-\&\*(C+ which normally require exception handling, and disable it for
-languages like C that do not normally require it. However, you may need
-to enable this option when compiling C code that needs to interoperate
-properly with exception handlers written in \*(C+. You may also wish to
-disable this option if you are compiling older \*(C+ programs that don't
-use exception handling.
-.IP "\fB\-fnon\-call\-exceptions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fnon-call-exceptions"
-Generate code that allows trapping instructions to throw exceptions.
-Note that this requires platform-specific runtime support that does
-not exist everywhere. Moreover, it only allows \fItrapping\fR
-instructions to throw exceptions, i.e. memory references or floating
-point instructions. It does not allow exceptions to be thrown from
-arbitrary signal handlers such as \f(CW\*(C`SIGALRM\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-funwind\-tables\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-funwind-tables"
-Similar to \fB\-fexceptions\fR, except that it will just generate any needed
-static data, but will not affect the generated code in any other way.
-You will normally not enable this option; instead, a language processor
-that needs this handling would enable it on your behalf.
-.IP "\fB\-fasynchronous\-unwind\-tables\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fasynchronous-unwind-tables"
-Generate unwind table in dwarf2 format, if supported by target machine. The
-table is exact at each instruction boundary, so it can be used for stack
-unwinding from asynchronous events (such as debugger or garbage collector).
-.IP "\fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fpcc-struct-return"
-Return ``short'' \f(CW\*(C`struct\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`union\*(C'\fR values in memory like
-longer ones, rather than in registers. This convention is less
-efficient, but it has the advantage of allowing intercallability between
-GCC-compiled files and files compiled with other compilers, particularly
-the Portable C Compiler (pcc).
-.Sp
-The precise convention for returning structures in memory depends
-on the target configuration macros.
-.Sp
-Short structures and unions are those whose size and alignment match
-that of some integer type.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR code compiled with the \fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR
-switch is not binary compatible with code compiled with the
-\&\fB\-freg\-struct\-return\fR switch.
-Use it to conform to a non-default application binary interface.
-.IP "\fB\-freg\-struct\-return\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-freg-struct-return"
-Return \f(CW\*(C`struct\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`union\*(C'\fR values in registers when possible.
-This is more efficient for small structures than
-\&\fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR.
-.Sp
-If you specify neither \fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR nor
-\&\fB\-freg\-struct\-return\fR, \s-1GCC\s0 defaults to whichever convention is
-standard for the target. If there is no standard convention, \s-1GCC\s0
-defaults to \fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR, except on targets where \s-1GCC\s0 is
-the principal compiler. In those cases, we can choose the standard, and
-we chose the more efficient register return alternative.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR code compiled with the \fB\-freg\-struct\-return\fR
-switch is not binary compatible with code compiled with the
-\&\fB\-fpcc\-struct\-return\fR switch.
-Use it to conform to a non-default application binary interface.
-.IP "\fB\-fshort\-enums\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fshort-enums"
-Allocate to an \f(CW\*(C`enum\*(C'\fR type only as many bytes as it needs for the
-declared range of possible values. Specifically, the \f(CW\*(C`enum\*(C'\fR type
-will be equivalent to the smallest integer type which has enough room.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the \fB\-fshort\-enums\fR switch causes \s-1GCC\s0 to generate
-code that is not binary compatible with code generated without that switch.
-Use it to conform to a non-default application binary interface.
-.IP "\fB\-fshort\-double\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fshort-double"
-Use the same size for \f(CW\*(C`double\*(C'\fR as for \f(CW\*(C`float\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the \fB\-fshort\-double\fR switch causes \s-1GCC\s0 to generate
-code that is not binary compatible with code generated without that switch.
-Use it to conform to a non-default application binary interface.
-.IP "\fB\-fshort\-wchar\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fshort-wchar"
-Override the underlying type for \fBwchar_t\fR to be \fBshort
-unsigned int\fR instead of the default for the target. This option is
-useful for building programs to run under \s-1WINE\s0.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the \fB\-fshort\-wchar\fR switch causes \s-1GCC\s0 to generate
-code that is not binary compatible with code generated without that switch.
-Use it to conform to a non-default application binary interface.
-.IP "\fB\-fshared\-data\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fshared-data"
-Requests that the data and non\-\f(CW\*(C`const\*(C'\fR variables of this
-compilation be shared data rather than private data. The distinction
-makes sense only on certain operating systems, where shared data is
-shared between processes running the same program, while private data
-exists in one copy per process.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-common\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-common"
-In C, allocate even uninitialized global variables in the data section of the
-object file, rather than generating them as common blocks. This has the
-effect that if the same variable is declared (without \f(CW\*(C`extern\*(C'\fR) in
-two different compilations, you will get an error when you link them.
-The only reason this might be useful is if you wish to verify that the
-program will work on other systems which always work this way.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-ident\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-ident"
-Ignore the \fB#ident\fR directive.
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-gnu\-linker\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-gnu-linker"
-Do not output global initializations (such as \*(C+ constructors and
-destructors) in the form used by the \s-1GNU\s0 linker (on systems where the \s-1GNU\s0
-linker is the standard method of handling them). Use this option when
-you want to use a non-GNU linker, which also requires using the
-\&\fBcollect2\fR program to make sure the system linker includes
-constructors and destructors. (\fBcollect2\fR is included in the \s-1GCC\s0
-distribution.) For systems which \fImust\fR use \fBcollect2\fR, the
-compiler driver \fBgcc\fR is configured to do this automatically.
-.IP "\fB\-finhibit\-size\-directive\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-finhibit-size-directive"
-Don't output a \f(CW\*(C`.size\*(C'\fR assembler directive, or anything else that
-would cause trouble if the function is split in the middle, and the
-two halves are placed at locations far apart in memory. This option is
-used when compiling \fIcrtstuff.c\fR; you should not need to use it
-for anything else.
-.IP "\fB\-fverbose\-asm\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fverbose-asm"
-Put extra commentary information in the generated assembly code to
-make it more readable. This option is generally only of use to those
-who actually need to read the generated assembly code (perhaps while
-debugging the compiler itself).
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fno\-verbose\-asm\fR, the default, causes the
-extra information to be omitted and is useful when comparing two assembler
-files.
-.IP "\fB\-fvolatile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fvolatile"
-Consider all memory references through pointers to be volatile.
-.IP "\fB\-fvolatile\-global\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fvolatile-global"
-Consider all memory references to extern and global data items to
-be volatile. \s-1GCC\s0 does not consider static data items to be volatile
-because of this switch.
-.IP "\fB\-fvolatile\-static\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fvolatile-static"
-Consider all memory references to static data to be volatile.
-.IP "\fB\-fpic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fpic"
-Generate position-independent code (\s-1PIC\s0) suitable for use in a shared
-library, if supported for the target machine. Such code accesses all
-constant addresses through a global offset table (\s-1GOT\s0). The dynamic
-loader resolves the \s-1GOT\s0 entries when the program starts (the dynamic
-loader is not part of \s-1GCC\s0; it is part of the operating system). If
-the \s-1GOT\s0 size for the linked executable exceeds a machine-specific
-maximum size, you get an error message from the linker indicating that
-\&\fB\-fpic\fR does not work; in that case, recompile with \fB\-fPIC\fR
-instead. (These maximums are 16k on the m88k, 8k on the \s-1SPARC\s0, and 32k
-on the m68k and \s-1RS/6000\s0. The 386 has no such limit.)
-.Sp
-Position-independent code requires special support, and therefore works
-only on certain machines. For the 386, \s-1GCC\s0 supports \s-1PIC\s0 for System V
-but not for the Sun 386i. Code generated for the \s-1IBM\s0 \s-1RS/6000\s0 is always
-position\-independent.
-.IP "\fB\-fPIC\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fPIC"
-If supported for the target machine, emit position-independent code,
-suitable for dynamic linking and avoiding any limit on the size of the
-global offset table. This option makes a difference on the m68k, m88k,
-and the \s-1SPARC\s0.
-.Sp
-Position-independent code requires special support, and therefore works
-only on certain machines.
-.IP "\fB\-fpie\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fpie"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fPIE\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fPIE"
-.PD
-These options are similar to \fB\-fpic\fR and \fB\-fPIC\fR, but
-generated position independent code can be only linked into executables.
-Usually these options are used when \fB\-pie\fR \s-1GCC\s0 option will be
-used during linking.
-.IP "\fB\-ffixed\-\fR\fIreg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ffixed-reg"
-Treat the register named \fIreg\fR as a fixed register; generated code
-should never refer to it (except perhaps as a stack pointer, frame
-pointer or in some other fixed role).
-.Sp
-\&\fIreg\fR must be the name of a register. The register names accepted
-are machine-specific and are defined in the \f(CW\*(C`REGISTER_NAMES\*(C'\fR
-macro in the machine description macro file.
-.Sp
-This flag does not have a negative form, because it specifies a
-three-way choice.
-.IP "\fB\-fcall\-used\-\fR\fIreg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcall-used-reg"
-Treat the register named \fIreg\fR as an allocable register that is
-clobbered by function calls. It may be allocated for temporaries or
-variables that do not live across a call. Functions compiled this way
-will not save and restore the register \fIreg\fR.
-.Sp
-It is an error to used this flag with the frame pointer or stack pointer.
-Use of this flag for other registers that have fixed pervasive roles in
-the machine's execution model will produce disastrous results.
-.Sp
-This flag does not have a negative form, because it specifies a
-three-way choice.
-.IP "\fB\-fcall\-saved\-\fR\fIreg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fcall-saved-reg"
-Treat the register named \fIreg\fR as an allocable register saved by
-functions. It may be allocated even for temporaries or variables that
-live across a call. Functions compiled this way will save and restore
-the register \fIreg\fR if they use it.
-.Sp
-It is an error to used this flag with the frame pointer or stack pointer.
-Use of this flag for other registers that have fixed pervasive roles in
-the machine's execution model will produce disastrous results.
-.Sp
-A different sort of disaster will result from the use of this flag for
-a register in which function values may be returned.
-.Sp
-This flag does not have a negative form, because it specifies a
-three-way choice.
-.IP "\fB\-fpack\-struct\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fpack-struct"
-Pack all structure members together without holes.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the \fB\-fpack\-struct\fR switch causes \s-1GCC\s0 to generate
-code that is not binary compatible with code generated without that switch.
-Additionally, it makes the code suboptimal.
-Use it to conform to a non-default application binary interface.
-.IP "\fB\-finstrument\-functions\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-finstrument-functions"
-Generate instrumentation calls for entry and exit to functions. Just
-after function entry and just before function exit, the following
-profiling functions will be called with the address of the current
-function and its call site. (On some platforms,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_builtin_return_address\*(C'\fR does not work beyond the current
-function, so the call site information may not be available to the
-profiling functions otherwise.)
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& void __cyg_profile_func_enter (void *this_fn,
-\& void *call_site);
-\& void __cyg_profile_func_exit (void *this_fn,
-\& void *call_site);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The first argument is the address of the start of the current function,
-which may be looked up exactly in the symbol table.
-.Sp
-This instrumentation is also done for functions expanded inline in other
-functions. The profiling calls will indicate where, conceptually, the
-inline function is entered and exited. This means that addressable
-versions of such functions must be available. If all your uses of a
-function are expanded inline, this may mean an additional expansion of
-code size. If you use \fBextern inline\fR in your C code, an
-addressable version of such functions must be provided. (This is
-normally the case anyways, but if you get lucky and the optimizer always
-expands the functions inline, you might have gotten away without
-providing static copies.)
-.Sp
-A function may be given the attribute \f(CW\*(C`no_instrument_function\*(C'\fR, in
-which case this instrumentation will not be done. This can be used, for
-example, for the profiling functions listed above, high-priority
-interrupt routines, and any functions from which the profiling functions
-cannot safely be called (perhaps signal handlers, if the profiling
-routines generate output or allocate memory).
-.IP "\fB\-fstack\-check\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fstack-check"
-Generate code to verify that you do not go beyond the boundary of the
-stack. You should specify this flag if you are running in an
-environment with multiple threads, but only rarely need to specify it in
-a single-threaded environment since stack overflow is automatically
-detected on nearly all systems if there is only one stack.
-.Sp
-Note that this switch does not actually cause checking to be done; the
-operating system must do that. The switch causes generation of code
-to ensure that the operating system sees the stack being extended.
-.IP "\fB\-fstack\-limit\-register=\fR\fIreg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fstack-limit-register=reg"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fstack\-limit\-symbol=\fR\fIsym\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fstack-limit-symbol=sym"
-.IP "\fB\-fno\-stack\-limit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fno-stack-limit"
-.PD
-Generate code to ensure that the stack does not grow beyond a certain value,
-either the value of a register or the address of a symbol. If the stack
-would grow beyond the value, a signal is raised. For most targets,
-the signal is raised before the stack overruns the boundary, so
-it is possible to catch the signal without taking special precautions.
-.Sp
-For instance, if the stack starts at absolute address \fB0x80000000\fR
-and grows downwards, you can use the flags
-\&\fB\-fstack\-limit\-symbol=_\|_stack_limit\fR and
-\&\fB\-Wl,\-\-defsym,_\|_stack_limit=0x7ffe0000\fR to enforce a stack limit
-of 128KB. Note that this may only work with the \s-1GNU\s0 linker.
-.IP "\fB\-fargument\-alias\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fargument-alias"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-fargument\-noalias\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fargument-noalias"
-.IP "\fB\-fargument\-noalias\-global\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fargument-noalias-global"
-.PD
-Specify the possible relationships among parameters and between
-parameters and global data.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-fargument\-alias\fR specifies that arguments (parameters) may
-alias each other and may alias global storage.\fB\-fargument\-noalias\fR specifies that arguments do not alias
-each other, but may alias global storage.\fB\-fargument\-noalias\-global\fR specifies that arguments do not
-alias each other and do not alias global storage.
-.Sp
-Each language will automatically use whatever option is required by
-the language standard. You should not need to use these options yourself.
-.IP "\fB\-fleading\-underscore\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fleading-underscore"
-This option and its counterpart, \fB\-fno\-leading\-underscore\fR, forcibly
-change the way C symbols are represented in the object file. One use
-is to help link with legacy assembly code.
-.Sp
-\&\fBWarning:\fR the \fB\-fleading\-underscore\fR switch causes \s-1GCC\s0 to
-generate code that is not binary compatible with code generated without that
-switch. Use it to conform to a non-default application binary interface.
-Not all targets provide complete support for this switch.
-.IP "\fB\-ftls\-model=\fR\fImodel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-ftls-model=model"
-Alter the thread-local storage model to be used.
-The \fImodel\fR argument should be one of \f(CW\*(C`global\-dynamic\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`local\-dynamic\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`initial\-exec\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`local\-exec\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-The default without \fB\-fpic\fR is \f(CW\*(C`initial\-exec\*(C'\fR; with
-\&\fB\-fpic\fR the default is \f(CW\*(C`global\-dynamic\*(C'\fR.
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT"
-This section describes several environment variables that affect how \s-1GCC\s0
-operates. Some of them work by specifying directories or prefixes to use
-when searching for various kinds of files. Some are used to specify other
-aspects of the compilation environment.
-.PP
-Note that you can also specify places to search using options such as
-\&\fB\-B\fR, \fB\-I\fR and \fB\-L\fR. These
-take precedence over places specified using environment variables, which
-in turn take precedence over those specified by the configuration of \s-1GCC\s0.
-.IP "\fB\s-1LANG\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "LANG"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\s-1LC_CTYPE\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "LC_CTYPE"
-.IP "\fB\s-1LC_MESSAGES\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "LC_MESSAGES"
-.IP "\fB\s-1LC_ALL\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "LC_ALL"
-.PD
-These environment variables control the way that \s-1GCC\s0 uses
-localization information that allow \s-1GCC\s0 to work with different
-national conventions. \s-1GCC\s0 inspects the locale categories
-\&\fB\s-1LC_CTYPE\s0\fR and \fB\s-1LC_MESSAGES\s0\fR if it has been configured to do
-so. These locale categories can be set to any value supported by your
-installation. A typical value is \fBen_UK\fR for English in the United
-Kingdom.
-.Sp
-The \fB\s-1LC_CTYPE\s0\fR environment variable specifies character
-classification. \s-1GCC\s0 uses it to determine the character boundaries in
-a string; this is needed for some multibyte encodings that contain quote
-and escape characters that would otherwise be interpreted as a string
-end or escape.
-.Sp
-The \fB\s-1LC_MESSAGES\s0\fR environment variable specifies the language to
-use in diagnostic messages.
-.Sp
-If the \fB\s-1LC_ALL\s0\fR environment variable is set, it overrides the value
-of \fB\s-1LC_CTYPE\s0\fR and \fB\s-1LC_MESSAGES\s0\fR; otherwise, \fB\s-1LC_CTYPE\s0\fR
-and \fB\s-1LC_MESSAGES\s0\fR default to the value of the \fB\s-1LANG\s0\fR
-environment variable. If none of these variables are set, \s-1GCC\s0
-defaults to traditional C English behavior.
-.IP "\fB\s-1TMPDIR\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "TMPDIR"
-If \fB\s-1TMPDIR\s0\fR is set, it specifies the directory to use for temporary
-files. \s-1GCC\s0 uses temporary files to hold the output of one stage of
-compilation which is to be used as input to the next stage: for example,
-the output of the preprocessor, which is the input to the compiler
-proper.
-.IP "\fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "GCC_EXEC_PREFIX"
-If \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR is set, it specifies a prefix to use in the
-names of the subprograms executed by the compiler. No slash is added
-when this prefix is combined with the name of a subprogram, but you can
-specify a prefix that ends with a slash if you wish.
-.Sp
-If \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR is not set, \s-1GCC\s0 will attempt to figure out
-an appropriate prefix to use based on the pathname it was invoked with.
-.Sp
-If \s-1GCC\s0 cannot find the subprogram using the specified prefix, it
-tries looking in the usual places for the subprogram.
-.Sp
-The default value of \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR is
-\&\fI\fIprefix\fI/lib/gcc\-lib/\fR where \fIprefix\fR is the value
-of \f(CW\*(C`prefix\*(C'\fR when you ran the \fIconfigure\fR script.
-.Sp
-Other prefixes specified with \fB\-B\fR take precedence over this prefix.
-.Sp
-This prefix is also used for finding files such as \fIcrt0.o\fR that are
-used for linking.
-.Sp
-In addition, the prefix is used in an unusual way in finding the
-directories to search for header files. For each of the standard
-directories whose name normally begins with \fB/usr/local/lib/gcc\-lib\fR
-(more precisely, with the value of \fB\s-1GCC_INCLUDE_DIR\s0\fR), \s-1GCC\s0 tries
-replacing that beginning with the specified prefix to produce an
-alternate directory name. Thus, with \fB\-Bfoo/\fR, \s-1GCC\s0 will search
-\&\fIfoo/bar\fR where it would normally search \fI/usr/local/lib/bar\fR.
-These alternate directories are searched first; the standard directories
-come next.
-.IP "\fB\s-1COMPILER_PATH\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "COMPILER_PATH"
-The value of \fB\s-1COMPILER_PATH\s0\fR is a colon-separated list of
-directories, much like \fB\s-1PATH\s0\fR. \s-1GCC\s0 tries the directories thus
-specified when searching for subprograms, if it can't find the
-subprograms using \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR.
-.IP "\fB\s-1LIBRARY_PATH\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "LIBRARY_PATH"
-The value of \fB\s-1LIBRARY_PATH\s0\fR is a colon-separated list of
-directories, much like \fB\s-1PATH\s0\fR. When configured as a native compiler,
-\&\s-1GCC\s0 tries the directories thus specified when searching for special
-linker files, if it can't find them using \fB\s-1GCC_EXEC_PREFIX\s0\fR. Linking
-using \s-1GCC\s0 also uses these directories when searching for ordinary
-libraries for the \fB\-l\fR option (but directories specified with
-\&\fB\-L\fR come first).
-.IP "\fB\s-1LANG\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "LANG"
-This variable is used to pass locale information to the compiler. One way in
-which this information is used is to determine the character set to be used
-when character literals, string literals and comments are parsed in C and \*(C+.
-When the compiler is configured to allow multibyte characters,
-the following values for \fB\s-1LANG\s0\fR are recognized:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBC\-JIS\fR" 4
-.IX Item "C-JIS"
-Recognize \s-1JIS\s0 characters.
-.IP "\fBC\-SJIS\fR" 4
-.IX Item "C-SJIS"
-Recognize \s-1SJIS\s0 characters.
-.IP "\fBC\-EUCJP\fR" 4
-.IX Item "C-EUCJP"
-Recognize \s-1EUCJP\s0 characters.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-If \fB\s-1LANG\s0\fR is not defined, or if it has some other value, then the
-compiler will use mblen and mbtowc as defined by the default locale to
-recognize and translate multibyte characters.
-.RE
-.PP
-Some additional environments variables affect the behavior of the
-preprocessor.
-.IP "\fB\s-1CPATH\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "CPATH"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fBC_INCLUDE_PATH\fR" 4
-.IX Item "C_INCLUDE_PATH"
-.IP "\fB\s-1CPLUS_INCLUDE_PATH\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "CPLUS_INCLUDE_PATH"
-.IP "\fB\s-1OBJC_INCLUDE_PATH\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "OBJC_INCLUDE_PATH"
-.PD
-Each variable's value is a list of directories separated by a special
-character, much like \fB\s-1PATH\s0\fR, in which to look for header files.
-The special character, \f(CW\*(C`PATH_SEPARATOR\*(C'\fR, is target-dependent and
-determined at \s-1GCC\s0 build time. For Windows-based targets it is a
-semicolon, and for almost all other targets it is a colon.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\s-1CPATH\s0\fR specifies a list of directories to be searched as if
-specified with \fB\-I\fR, but after any paths given with \fB\-I\fR
-options on the command line. This environment variable is used
-regardless of which language is being preprocessed.
-.Sp
-The remaining environment variables apply only when preprocessing the
-particular language indicated. Each specifies a list of directories
-to be searched as if specified with \fB\-isystem\fR, but after any
-paths given with \fB\-isystem\fR options on the command line.
-.Sp
-In all these variables, an empty element instructs the compiler to
-search its current working directory. Empty elements can appear at the
-beginning or end of a path. For instance, if the value of
-\&\fB\s-1CPATH\s0\fR is \f(CW\*(C`:/special/include\*(C'\fR, that has the same
-effect as \fB\-I.\ \-I/special/include\fR.
-.IP "\fB\s-1DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT"
-If this variable is set, its value specifies how to output
-dependencies for Make based on the non-system header files processed
-by the compiler. System header files are ignored in the dependency
-output.
-.Sp
-The value of \fB\s-1DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT\s0\fR can be just a file name, in
-which case the Make rules are written to that file, guessing the target
-name from the source file name. Or the value can have the form
-\&\fIfile\fR\fB \fR\fItarget\fR, in which case the rules are written to
-file \fIfile\fR using \fItarget\fR as the target name.
-.Sp
-In other words, this environment variable is equivalent to combining
-the options \fB\-MM\fR and \fB\-MF\fR,
-with an optional \fB\-MT\fR switch too.
-.IP "\fB\s-1SUNPRO_DEPENDENCIES\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "SUNPRO_DEPENDENCIES"
-This variable is the same as \fB\s-1DEPENDENCIES_OUTPUT\s0\fR (see above),
-except that system header files are not ignored, so it implies
-\&\fB\-M\fR rather than \fB\-MM\fR. However, the dependence on the
-main input file is omitted.
-.SH "BUGS"
-.IX Header "BUGS"
-For instructions on reporting bugs, see
-<\fBhttp://gcc.gnu.org/bugs.html\fR>. Use of the \fBgccbug\fR
-script to report bugs is recommended.
-.SH "FOOTNOTES"
-.IX Header "FOOTNOTES"
-.IP "1." 4
-On some systems, \fBgcc \-shared\fR
-needs to build supplementary stub code for constructors to work. On
-multi-libbed systems, \fBgcc \-shared\fR must select the correct support
-libraries to link against. Failing to supply the correct flags may lead
-to subtle defects. Supplying them in cases where they are not necessary
-is innocuous.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-\&\fIgpl\fR\|(7), \fIgfdl\fR\|(7), \fIfsf\-funding\fR\|(7),
-\&\fIcpp\fR\|(1), \fIgcov\fR\|(1), \fIg77\fR\|(1), \fIas\fR\|(1), \fIld\fR\|(1), \fIgdb\fR\|(1), \fIadb\fR\|(1), \fIdbx\fR\|(1), \fIsdb\fR\|(1)
-and the Info entries for \fIgcc\fR, \fIcpp\fR, \fIg77\fR, \fIas\fR,
-\&\fIld\fR, \fIbinutils\fR and \fIgdb\fR.
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR"
-See the Info entry for \fBgcc\fR, or
-<\fBhttp://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Contributors.html\fR>,
-for contributors to \s-1GCC\s0.
-.SH "COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997,
-1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or
-any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
-Invariant Sections being ``\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License'' and ``Funding
-Free Software'', the Front-Cover texts being (a) (see below), and with
-the Back-Cover Texts being (b) (see below). A copy of the license is
-included in the \fIgfdl\fR\|(7) man page.
-.PP
-(a) The \s-1FSF\s0's Front-Cover Text is:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& A GNU Manual
-.Ve
-.PP
-(b) The \s-1FSF\s0's Back-Cover Text is:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& You have freedom to copy and modify this GNU Manual, like GNU
-\& software. Copies published by the Free Software Foundation raise
-\& funds for GNU development.
-.Ve
diff --git a/raw/man1/gedit.1 b/raw/man1/gedit.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c39dfd5..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/gedit.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-.TH GEDIT l "05 Jan 2003"
-.SH NAME
-\fBgedit\fP \- simple text editor for GNOME
-
-The gedit application is a simple text editor. You can use gedit to create and edit text files. You can use gedit plugins to perform a variety of tasks related to text-editing from within the gedit window.
-
-.SH SYNTAX
-.B gedit
-.RI [--help]
-.RI [--debug [-section]]
-.RI [--new-window]
-.RI [--new-document]
-.RI [--quit]
-.RI [filename(s)...]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B gedit
-is a text editor for the GNOME Desktop.
-.LP
-.SH OPTIONS
-
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-Prints the command line options.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-debug[-section]\fR
-Runs gedit in debug mode. In debug mode function names are dumped to the console when they are invoked. Specific sections for debugging are allowed. The sections are: window, commands, document, file, plugins, prefs, print, search,
-undo, view and recent. Run `gedit \-\-help' for more information.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-new\-window\fR
-Create a new toplevel window in an existing instance of gedit.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-new\-document\fR
-Create a new document in an existing instance of gedit.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-quit\fR
-Quit an existing instance of gedit.
-.TP
-\fBfilename(s)...\fR
-Specifies the file to open when gedit starts - if this is not specified, gedit will
-load a blank file with an Untitled label. Multiple files can be loaded if they are
-separated by spaces.
-gedit also supports handling of remote files. For example, you can pass the location of a webpage to gedit, like "http://www.gnome.org", or load a file from a FTP server,
-like "ftp://ftp.gnome.org/robots.txt".
-.SH PIPES
-Gedit accepts pipes, so it can be run after another command to load the output into
-gedit. For example :
-.TP
-ls -l | gedit
-.PB
-.SH BUGS
-If you find a bug, please report it at http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gedit.
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-Paolo Maggi (maggi at athena.polito.it)
-.TP
-James Willcox (jwillcox at cs.indiana.edu)
-.TP
-Federico Mena Quintero (federico at ximian.com)
-.TP
-Chema Celorio (chema at celorio.com)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/getopts.1 b/raw/man1/getopts.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/getopts.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/gnroff.1 b/raw/man1/gnroff.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ef67cae..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/gnroff.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
-.ig
-Copyright (C) 1989-2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH NROFF 1 "23 September 2003" "Groff Version 1.18.1"
-.SH NAME
-nroff \- emulate nroff command with groff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nr a \n(.j
-.ad l
-.nr i \n(.i
-.in +\w'\fBnroff 'u
-.ti \niu
-.B nroff
-.de OP
-.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
-.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
-..
-.OP \-h
-.OP \-i
-.OP \-m name
-.OP \-n num
-.OP \-o list
-.OP \-p
-.OP \-r cn
-.OP \-S
-.OP \-t
-.OP \-T name
-.OP \-U
-.OP \-v
-.RI "[\ " "file" "\ .\|.\|.\ ]"
-.br
-.ad \na
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B nroff
-script emulates the
-.B nroff
-command using groff.
-Only
-.BR ascii ,
-.BR ascii8 ,
-.BR latin1 ,
-.BR utf8 ,
-.BR nippon ,
-and
-.B cp1047
-are valid arguments for the
-.B -T
-option.
-If an invalid or no
-.BR \-T
-option is given,
-.B nroff
-checks the current locale to select a default output device.
-It first tries the
-.B locale
-program, then the environment variables
-.BR LC_ALL ,
-.BR LC_CTYPE ,
-and
-.BR LANG ,
-and finally the
-.B LESSCHARSET
-environment variable.
-.PP
-The
-.B \-h
-and
-.B \-c
-options
-are equivalent to
-.BR grotty 's
-options
-.B \-h
-(using tabs in the output) and
-.B \-c
-(using the old output scheme instead of SGR escape sequences).
-The
-.BR \-C ,
-.BR \-i ,
-.BR \-n ,
-.BR \-m ,
-.BR \-o ,
-and
-.B \-r
-options have the effect described in
-.BR troff (1).
-In addition,
-.B nroff
-silently ignores the options
-.BR \-e ,
-.BR \-q ,
-and
-.BR \-s
-(which are not implemented in
-.BR troff ).
-Options
-.B \-p
-(pic),
-.B \-t
-(tbl),
-.B \-S
-(safer), and
-.B \-U
-(unsafe) are passed to
-.BR groff .
-.B \-v
-shows the version number.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_BIN_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for the
-.B groff
-executable before searching in PATH. If unset, `/usr/bin' is used.
-.SH NOTES
-This shell script is basically intended for use with
-.BR man (1),
-so warnings are suppressed.
-nroff-style character definitions (in the file tty-char.tmac) are also
-loaded to emulate unrepresentable glyphs.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (1),
-.BR troff (1),
-.BR grotty (1)
-.
-.\" Local Variables:
-.\" mode: nroff
-.\" End:
diff --git a/raw/man1/grep.1 b/raw/man1/grep.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7278813..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/grep.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,782 +0,0 @@
-.\" grep man page
-.if !\n(.g \{\
-. if !\w|\*(lq| \{\
-. ds lq ``
-. if \w'\(lq' .ds lq "\(lq
-. \}
-. if !\w|\*(rq| \{\
-. ds rq ''
-. if \w'\(rq' .ds rq "\(rq
-. \}
-.\}
-.de Id
-.ds Dt \\$4
-..
-.TH GREP 1 \*(Dt "GNU Project"
-.SH NAME
-grep, egrep, fgrep \- print lines matching a pattern
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B grep
-.RI [ options ]
-.I PATTERN
-.RI [ FILE .\|.\|.]
-.br
-.B grep
-.RI [ options ]
-.RB [ \-e
-.I PATTERN
-|
-.B \-f
-.IR FILE ]
-.RI [ FILE .\|.\|.]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-.B Grep
-searches the named input
-.IR FILE s
-(or standard input if no files are named, or
-the file name
-.B \-
-is given)
-for lines containing a match to the given
-.IR PATTERN .
-By default,
-.B grep
-prints the matching lines.
-.PP
-In addition, two variant programs
-.B egrep
-and
-.B fgrep
-are available.
-.B Egrep
-is the same as
-.BR "grep\ \-E" .
-.B Fgrep
-is the same as
-.BR "grep\ \-F" .
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI \-A " NUM" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-after-context=" NUM
-Print
-.I NUM
-lines of trailing context after matching lines.
-Places a line containing
-.B \-\^\-
-between contiguous groups of matches.
-.TP
-.BR \-a ", " \-\^\-text
-Process a binary file as if it were text; this is equivalent to the
-.B \-\^\-binary-files=text
-option.
-.TP
-.BI \-B " NUM" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-before-context=" NUM
-Print
-.I NUM
-lines of leading context before matching lines.
-Places a line containing
-.B \-\^\-
-between contiguous groups of matches.
-.TP
-.BI \-C " NUM" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-context=" NUM
-Print
-.I NUM
-lines of output context.
-Places a line containing
-.B \-\^\-
-between contiguous groups of matches.
-.TP
-.BR \-b ", " \-\^\-byte-offset
-Print the byte offset within the input file before
-each line of output.
-.TP
-.BI \-\^\-binary-files= TYPE
-If the first few bytes of a file indicate that the file contains binary
-data, assume that the file is of type
-.IR TYPE .
-By default,
-.I TYPE
-is
-.BR binary ,
-and
-.B grep
-normally outputs either
-a one-line message saying that a binary file matches, or no message if
-there is no match.
-If
-.I TYPE
-is
-.BR without-match ,
-.B grep
-assumes that a binary file does not match; this is equivalent to the
-.B \-I
-option.
-If
-.I TYPE
-is
-.BR text ,
-.B grep
-processes a binary file as if it were text; this is equivalent to the
-.B \-a
-option.
-.I Warning:
-.B "grep \-\^\-binary-files=text"
-might output binary garbage,
-which can have nasty side effects if the output is a terminal and if the
-terminal driver interprets some of it as commands.
-.TP
-.BI \-\^\-colour[=\fIWHEN\fR] ", " \-\^\-color[=\fIWHEN\fR]
-Surround the matching string with the marker find in
-.B GREP_COLOR
-environment variable. WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto'
-.TP
-.BR \-c ", " \-\^\-count
-Suppress normal output; instead print a count of
-matching lines for each input file.
-With the
-.BR \-v ", " \-\^\-invert-match
-option (see below), count non-matching lines.
-.TP
-.BI \-D " ACTION" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-devices=" ACTION
-If an input file is a device, FIFO or socket, use
-.I ACTION
-to process it. By default,
-.I ACTION
-is
-.BR read ,
-which means that devices are read just as if they were ordinary files.
-If
-.I ACTION
-is
-.BR skip ,
-devices are silently skipped.
-.TP
-.BI \-d " ACTION" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-directories=" ACTION
-If an input file is a directory, use
-.I ACTION
-to process it. By default,
-.I ACTION
-is
-.BR read ,
-which means that directories are read just as if they were ordinary files.
-If
-.I ACTION
-is
-.BR skip ,
-directories are silently skipped.
-If
-.I ACTION
-is
-.BR recurse ,
-.B grep
-reads all files under each directory, recursively;
-this is equivalent to the
-.B \-r
-option.
-.TP
-.BR \-E ", " \-\^\-extended-regexp
-Interpret
-.I PATTERN
-as an extended regular expression (see below).
-.TP
-.BI \-e " PATTERN" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-regexp=" PATTERN
-Use
-.I PATTERN
-as the pattern; useful to protect patterns beginning with
-.BR \- .
-.TP
-.BR \-F ", " \-\^\-fixed-strings
-Interpret
-.I PATTERN
-as a list of fixed strings, separated by newlines,
-any of which is to be matched.
-.TP
-.BR \-P ", " \-\^\-perl-regexp
-Interpret
-.I PATTERN
-as a Perl regular expression.
-.TP
-.BI \-f " FILE" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-file=" FILE
-Obtain patterns from
-.IR FILE ,
-one per line.
-The empty file contains zero patterns, and therefore matches nothing.
-.TP
-.BR \-G ", " \-\^\-basic-regexp
-Interpret
-.I PATTERN
-as a basic regular expression (see below). This is the default.
-.TP
-.BR \-H ", " \-\^\-with-filename
-Print the filename for each match.
-.TP
-.BR \-h ", " \-\^\-no-filename
-Suppress the prefixing of filenames on output
-when multiple files are searched.
-.TP
-.B \-\^\-help
-Output a brief help message.
-.TP
-.BR \-I
-Process a binary file as if it did not contain matching data; this is
-equivalent to the
-.B \-\^\-binary-files=without-match
-option.
-.TP
-.BR \-i ", " \-\^\-ignore-case
-Ignore case distinctions in both the
-.I PATTERN
-and the input files.
-.TP
-.BR \-L ", " \-\^\-files-without-match
-Suppress normal output; instead print the name
-of each input file from which no output would
-normally have been printed. The scanning will stop
-on the first match.
-.TP
-.BR \-l ", " \-\^\-files-with-matches
-Suppress normal output; instead print
-the name of each input file from which output
-would normally have been printed. The scanning will
-stop on the first match.
-.TP
-.BI \-m " NUM" "\fR,\fP \-\^\-max-count=" NUM
-Stop reading a file after
-.I NUM
-matching lines. If the input is standard input from a regular file,
-and
-.I NUM
-matching lines are output,
-.B grep
-ensures that the standard input is positioned to just after the last
-matching line before exiting, regardless of the presence of trailing
-context lines. This enables a calling process to resume a search.
-When
-.B grep
-stops after
-.I NUM
-matching lines, it outputs any trailing context lines. When the
-.B \-c
-or
-.B \-\^\-count
-option is also used,
-.B grep
-does not output a count greater than
-.IR NUM .
-When the
-.B \-v
-or
-.B \-\^\-invert-match
-option is also used,
-.B grep
-stops after outputting
-.I NUM
-non-matching lines.
-.TP
-.B \-\^\-mmap
-If possible, use the
-.BR mmap (2)
-system call to read input, instead of
-the default
-.BR read (2)
-system call. In some situations,
-.B \-\^\-mmap
-yields better performance. However,
-.B \-\^\-mmap
-can cause undefined behavior (including core dumps)
-if an input file shrinks while
-.B grep
-is operating, or if an I/O error occurs.
-.TP
-.BR \-n ", " \-\^\-line-number
-Prefix each line of output with the line number
-within its input file.
-.TP
-.BR \-o ", " \-\^\-only-matching
-Show only the part of a matching line that matches
-.I PATTERN.
-.TP
-.BI \-\^\-label= LABEL
-Displays input actually coming from standard input as input coming from file
-.I LABEL.
-This is especially useful for tools like zgrep, e.g.
-.B "gzip -cd foo.gz |grep --label=foo something"
-.TP
-.BR \-\^\-line-buffered
-Use line buffering, it can be a performance penality.
-.TP
-.BR \-q ", " \-\^\-quiet ", " \-\^\-silent
-Quiet; do not write anything to standard output.
-Exit immediately with zero status if any match is found,
-even if an error was detected.
-Also see the
-.B \-s
-or
-.B \-\^\-no-messages
-option.
-.TP
-.BR \-R ", " \-r ", " \-\^\-recursive
-Read all files under each directory, recursively;
-this is equivalent to the
-.B "\-d recurse"
-option.
-.TP
-.BR "\fR \fP \-\^\-include=" PATTERN
-Recurse in directories only searching file matching
-.I PATTERN.
-.TP
-.BR "\fR \fP \-\^\-exclude=" PATTERN
-Recurse in directories skip file matching
-.I PATTERN.
-.TP
-.BR \-s ", " \-\^\-no-messages
-Suppress error messages about nonexistent or unreadable files.
-Portability note: unlike \s-1GNU\s0
-.BR grep ,
-traditional
-.B grep
-did not conform to \s-1POSIX.2\s0, because traditional
-.B grep
-lacked a
-.B \-q
-option and its
-.B \-s
-option behaved like \s-1GNU\s0
-.BR grep 's
-.B \-q
-option.
-Shell scripts intended to be portable to traditional
-.B grep
-should avoid both
-.B \-q
-and
-.B \-s
-and should redirect output to /dev/null instead.
-.TP
-.BR \-U ", " \-\^\-binary
-Treat the file(s) as binary. By default, under MS-DOS and MS-Windows,
-.BR grep
-guesses the file type by looking at the contents of the first 32KB
-read from the file. If
-.BR grep
-decides the file is a text file, it strips the CR characters from the
-original file contents (to make regular expressions with
-.B ^
-and
-.B $
-work correctly). Specifying
-.B \-U
-overrules this guesswork, causing all files to be read and passed to the
-matching mechanism verbatim; if the file is a text file with CR/LF
-pairs at the end of each line, this will cause some regular
-expressions to fail.
-This option has no effect on platforms other than MS-DOS and
-MS-Windows.
-.TP
-.BR \-u ", " \-\^\-unix-byte-offsets
-Report Unix-style byte offsets. This switch causes
-.B grep
-to report byte offsets as if the file were Unix-style text file, i.e. with
-CR characters stripped off. This will produce results identical to running
-.B grep
-on a Unix machine. This option has no effect unless
-.B \-b
-option is also used;
-it has no effect on platforms other than MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
-.TP
-.BR \-V ", " \-\^\-version
-Print the version number of
-.B grep
-to standard error. This version number should
-be included in all bug reports (see below).
-.TP
-.BR \-v ", " \-\^\-invert-match
-Invert the sense of matching, to select non-matching lines.
-.TP
-.BR \-w ", " \-\^\-word-regexp
-Select only those lines containing matches that form whole words.
-The test is that the matching substring must either be at the
-beginning of the line, or preceded by a non-word constituent
-character. Similarly, it must be either at the end of the line
-or followed by a non-word constituent character. Word-constituent
-characters are letters, digits, and the underscore.
-.TP
-.BR \-x ", " \-\^\-line-regexp
-Select only those matches that exactly match the whole line.
-.TP
-.B \-y
-Obsolete synonym for
-.BR \-i .
-.TP
-.BR \-Z ", " \-\^\-null
-Output a zero byte (the \s-1ASCII\s0
-.B NUL
-character) instead of the character that normally follows a file name.
-For example,
-.B "grep \-lZ"
-outputs a zero byte after each file name instead of the usual newline.
-This option makes the output unambiguous, even in the presence of file
-names containing unusual characters like newlines. This option can be
-used with commands like
-.BR "find \-print0" ,
-.BR "perl \-0" ,
-.BR "sort \-z" ,
-and
-.B "xargs \-0"
-to process arbitrary file names,
-even those that contain newline characters.
-.SH "REGULAR EXPRESSIONS"
-.PP
-A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings.
-Regular expressions are constructed analogously to arithmetic
-expressions, by using various operators to combine smaller expressions.
-.PP
-.B Grep
-understands two different versions of regular expression syntax:
-\*(lqbasic\*(rq and \*(lqextended.\*(rq In
-.RB "\s-1GNU\s0\ " grep ,
-there is no difference in available functionality using either syntax.
-In other implementations, basic regular expressions are less powerful.
-The following description applies to extended regular expressions;
-differences for basic regular expressions are summarized afterwards.
-.PP
-The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match
-a single character. Most characters, including all letters and digits,
-are regular expressions that match themselves. Any metacharacter with
-special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash.
-.PP
-A
-.I "bracket expression"
-is a list of characters enclosed by
-.B [
-and
-.BR ] .
-It matches any single
-character in that list; if the first character of the list
-is the caret
-.B ^
-then it matches any character
-.I not
-in the list.
-For example, the regular expression
-.B [0123456789]
-matches any single digit.
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, a
-.I "range expression"
-consists of two characters separated by a hyphen.
-It matches any single character that sorts between the two characters,
-inclusive, using the locale's collating sequence and character set.
-For example, in the default C locale,
-.B [a\-d]
-is equivalent to
-.BR [abcd] .
-Many locales sort characters in dictionary order, and in these locales
-.B [a\-d]
-is typically not equivalent to
-.BR [abcd] ;
-it might be equivalent to
-.BR [aBbCcDd] ,
-for example.
-To obtain the traditional interpretation of bracket expressions,
-you can use the C locale by setting the
-.B LC_ALL
-environment variable to the value
-.BR C .
-.PP
-Finally, certain named classes of characters are predefined within
-bracket expressions, as follows.
-Their names are self explanatory, and they are
-.BR [:alnum:] ,
-.BR [:alpha:] ,
-.BR [:cntrl:] ,
-.BR [:digit:] ,
-.BR [:graph:] ,
-.BR [:lower:] ,
-.BR [:print:] ,
-.BR [:punct:] ,
-.BR [:space:] ,
-.BR [:upper:] ,
-and
-.BR [:xdigit:].
-For example,
-.B [[:alnum:]]
-means
-.BR [0\-9A\-Za\-z] ,
-except the latter form depends upon the C locale and the
-\s-1ASCII\s0 character encoding, whereas the former is independent
-of locale and character set.
-(Note that the brackets in these class names are part of the symbolic
-names, and must be included in addition to the brackets delimiting
-the bracket list.) Most metacharacters lose their special meaning
-inside lists. To include a literal
-.B ]
-place it first in the list. Similarly, to include a literal
-.B ^
-place it anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal
-.B \-
-place it last.
-.PP
-The period
-.B .
-matches any single character.
-The symbol
-.B \ew
-is a synonym for
-.B [[:alnum:]]
-and
-.B \eW
-is a synonym for
-.BR [^[:alnum]] .
-.PP
-The caret
-.B ^
-and the dollar sign
-.B $
-are metacharacters that respectively match the empty string at the
-beginning and end of a line.
-The symbols
-.B \e<
-and
-.B \e>
-respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a word.
-The symbol
-.B \eb
-matches the empty string at the edge of a word,
-and
-.B \eB
-matches the empty string provided it's
-.I not
-at the edge of a word.
-.PP
-A regular expression may be followed by one of several repetition operators:
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B ?
-The preceding item is optional and matched at most once.
-.TP
-.B *
-The preceding item will be matched zero or more times.
-.TP
-.B +
-The preceding item will be matched one or more times.
-.TP
-.BI { n }
-The preceding item is matched exactly
-.I n
-times.
-.TP
-.BI { n ,}
-The preceding item is matched
-.I n
-or more times.
-.TP
-.BI { n , m }
-The preceding item is matched at least
-.I n
-times, but not more than
-.I m
-times.
-.PD
-.PP
-Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting
-regular expression matches any string formed by concatenating
-two substrings that respectively match the concatenated
-subexpressions.
-.PP
-Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator
-.BR | ;
-the resulting regular expression matches any string matching
-either subexpression.
-.PP
-Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn
-takes precedence over alternation. A whole subexpression may be
-enclosed in parentheses to override these precedence rules.
-.PP
-The backreference
-.BI \e n\c
-\&, where
-.I n
-is a single digit, matches the substring
-previously matched by the
-.IR n th
-parenthesized subexpression of the regular expression.
-.PP
-In basic regular expressions the metacharacters
-.BR ? ,
-.BR + ,
-.BR { ,
-.BR | ,
-.BR ( ,
-and
-.BR )
-lose their special meaning; instead use the backslashed
-versions
-.BR \e? ,
-.BR \e+ ,
-.BR \e{ ,
-.BR \e| ,
-.BR \e( ,
-and
-.BR \e) .
-.PP
-Traditional
-.B egrep
-did not support the
-.B {
-metacharacter, and some
-.B egrep
-implementations support
-.B \e{
-instead, so portable scripts should avoid
-.B {
-in
-.B egrep
-patterns and should use
-.B [{]
-to match a literal
-.BR { .
-.PP
-\s-1GNU\s0
-.B egrep
-attempts to support traditional usage by assuming that
-.B {
-is not special if it would be the start of an invalid interval
-specification. For example, the shell command
-.B "egrep '{1'"
-searches for the two-character string
-.B {1
-instead of reporting a syntax error in the regular expression.
-\s-1POSIX.2\s0 allows this behavior as an extension, but portable scripts
-should avoid it.
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
-Grep's behavior is affected by the following environment variables.
-.PP
-A locale
-.BI LC_ foo
-is specified by examining the three environment variables
-.BR LC_ALL ,
-.BR LC_\fIfoo\fP ,
-.BR LANG ,
-in that order.
-The first of these variables that is set specifies the locale.
-For example, if
-.B LC_ALL
-is not set, but
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-is set to
-.BR pt_BR ,
-then Brazilian Portuguese is used for the
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-locale.
-The C locale is used if none of these environment variables are set,
-or if the locale catalog is not installed, or if
-.B grep
-was not compiled with national language support (\s-1NLS\s0).
-.TP
-.B GREP_OPTIONS
-This variable specifies default options to be placed in front of any
-explicit options. For example, if
-.B GREP_OPTIONS
-is
-.BR "'\-\^\-binary-files=without-match \-\^\-directories=skip'" ,
-.B grep
-behaves as if the two options
-.B \-\^\-binary-files=without-match
-and
-.B \-\^\-directories=skip
-had been specified before any explicit options.
-Option specifications are separated by whitespace.
-A backslash escapes the next character,
-so it can be used to specify an option containing whitespace or a backslash.
-.TP
-.B GREP_COLOR
-Specifies the marker for highlighting.
-.TP
-\fBLC_ALL\fP, \fBLC_COLLATE\fP, \fBLANG\fP
-These variables specify the
-.B LC_COLLATE
-locale, which determines the collating sequence used to interpret
-range expressions like
-.BR [a\-z] .
-.TP
-\fBLC_ALL\fP, \fBLC_CTYPE\fP, \fBLANG\fP
-These variables specify the
-.B LC_CTYPE
-locale, which determines the type of characters, e.g., which
-characters are whitespace.
-.TP
-\fBLC_ALL\fP, \fBLC_MESSAGES\fP, \fBLANG\fP
-These variables specify the
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-locale, which determines the language that
-.B grep
-uses for messages.
-The default C locale uses American English messages.
-.TP
-.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
-If set,
-.B grep
-behaves as \s-1POSIX.2\s0 requires; otherwise,
-.B grep
-behaves more like other \s-1GNU\s0 programs.
-\s-1POSIX.2\s0 requires that options that follow file names must be
-treated as file names; by default, such options are permuted to the
-front of the operand list and are treated as options.
-Also, \s-1POSIX.2\s0 requires that unrecognized options be diagnosed as
-\*(lqillegal\*(rq, but since they are not really against the law the default
-is to diagnose them as \*(lqinvalid\*(rq.
-.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
-also disables \fB_\fP\fIN\fP\fB_GNU_nonoption_argv_flags_\fP,
-described below.
-.TP
-\fB_\fP\fIN\fP\fB_GNU_nonoption_argv_flags_\fP
-(Here
-.I N
-is
-.BR grep 's
-numeric process ID.) If the
-.IR i th
-character of this environment variable's value is
-.BR 1 ,
-do not consider the
-.IR i th
-operand of
-.B grep
-to be an option, even if it appears to be one.
-A shell can put this variable in the environment for each command it runs,
-specifying which operands are the results of file name wildcard
-expansion and therefore should not be treated as options.
-This behavior is available only with the \s-1GNU\s0 C library, and only
-when
-.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
-is not set.
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-.PP
-Normally, exit status is 0 if selected lines are found and 1 otherwise.
-But the exit status is 2 if an error occurred, unless the
-.B \-q
-or
-.B \-\^\-quiet
-or
-.B \-\^\-silent
-option is used and a selected line is found.
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-Email bug reports to
-.BR bug-gnu-utils at gnu.org .
-Be sure to include the word \*(lqgrep\*(rq somewhere in the
-\*(lqSubject:\*(rq field.
-.PP
-Large repetition counts in the
-.BI { n , m }
-construct may cause grep to use lots of memory.
-In addition,
-certain other obscure regular expressions require exponential time
-and space, and may cause
-.B grep
-to run out of memory.
-.PP
-Backreferences are very slow, and may require exponential time.
-.\" Work around problems with some troff -man implementations.
-.br
diff --git a/raw/man1/groff.1 b/raw/man1/groff.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2383178..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/groff.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1596 +0,0 @@
-.ig
-groff.man
-
-Last update: 14 July 2002
-
-Copyright (C) 1989, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-Rewritten in 2002 by Bernd Warken <bwarken at mayn.de>
-
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
-any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
-Invariant Sections being this .ig-section and AUTHOR, with no
-Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts.
-
-A copy of the Free Documentation License is included as a file called
-FDL in the main directory of the groff source package.
-..
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Setup
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.mso www.tmac
-.
-.\" set adjust to both
-.ad b
-.
-.\" fonts of fixed length
-.
-.if n \{\
-. mso tty-char.tmac
-. ftr CR R
-. ftr CI I
-. ftr CB B
-.\}
-.
-.if '\*[.T]'dvi' \
-. ftr CB CW
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" String definitions
-.
-.ds @- "\-\"
-.ds @-- "\-\^\-\"
-.
-.ds Ellipsis .\|.\|.\"
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Begin of macro definitions
-.de c
-.\" this is like a comment request when escape mechanism is off
-..
-.eo
-.
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.de TP+
-.br
-.ns
-.TP \$1
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.c the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-. ie \n[.$]=0:((0\$1)*2u>(\n.lu-\n(.iu)) .TP
-. el .TP "\$1"
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.de Text
-. nop \)\$*
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.de Synopsis
-. ds @arg1 \$1\"
-. nr @old_indent \n[.i]
-. ad l
-. in +\w'\f[B]\*[@arg1]\0'u
-. ti \n[@old_indent]u
-. B \*[@arg1]\0\c
-. rr @old_indent
-. rm @arg1
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.de EndSynopsis
-. ad
-. in
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c ShortOpt[] (name [arg])
-.c
-.c short option in synopsis
-.c
-.de ShortOpt[]
-. if \n[.$]=0 \
-. return
-. ds @opt \$1\"
-. shift
-. ie \n[.$]=0 \
-. Text \f[R][\f[]\f[CB]\*[@-]\*[@opt]\f[]\f[R]]\f[]
-. el \
-. Text \f[R][\f[]\f[CB]\*[@-]\*[@opt]\~\f[]\f[I]\/\$*\f[]\f[R]]\f[]
-. rm @opt
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c Option in synopsis (short option)
-.de SynOpt
-. if \n[.$]=0 \
-. return
-. ds @opt \$1\"
-. shift
-. ie \n[.$]=0 \
-. Text \f[R][\f[]\f[CB]\*[@-]\*[@opt]\f[]\f[R]]\f[]
-. el \
-. Text \f[R][\f[]\f[CB]\*[@-]\*[@opt]\~\f[]\f[I]\/\$*\f[]\f[R]]\f[]
-. rm @opt
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c ShortOpt ([char [punct]])
-.c
-.c `-c' somwhere in the text
-.c second arg is punctuation
-.c
-.de ShortOpt
-. ds @opt \$1\"
-. shift
-. Text \f[CB]\*[@-]\*[@opt]\f[]\/\$*
-. rm @opt
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c LongOpt ([name [punct]])
-.c
-.c `--name' somwhere in the text
-.c second arg is punctuation
-.c
-.de LongOpt
-. ds @opt \$1\"
-. shift
-. Text \f[CB]\*[@--]\f[]\f[B]\*[@opt]\f[]\/\$*
-. rm @opt
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c OptDef (shortopt [longopt [argument]])
-.c
-.c option documentation
-.c args : `shortopt', `longopt' can be ""
-.c
-.de OptDef
-. ds @short
-. ds @long
-. ds @arg
-. if \n[.$]>=1 \{\
-. ds @arg1 "\$1\"
-. if !'\*[@arg1]'' \
-. ds @short "\f[CB]\*[@-]\*[@arg1]\f[]\"
-. if \n[.$]>=2 \{\
-. if !'\*[@short]'' \
-. as @short \f[CW]\0\f[]
-. ds @arg2 "\$2\"
-. if !'\*[@arg2]'' \
-. ds @long "\f[CB]\*[@--]\f[]\f[B]\*[@arg2]\f[]\"
-. if \n[.$]>=3 \{\
-. if !'\*[@long]'' \
-. as @long \|=\|\"
-. shift 2
-. ds @arg \f[I]\$*\"
-. \}
-. \}
-. \}
-. IP "\f[R]\*[@short]\*[@long]\*[@arg]\f[]"
-. rm @arg
-. rm @arg1
-. rm @arg2
-. rm @short
-. rm @long
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c Continuation of an OptDef header.
-.de OptDef+
-. br
-. ns
-. OptDef \$@
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c Environment variable
-.de EnvVar
-. SM
-. BR \$1 \$2
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c a shell command line
-.de ShellCommand
-. nr @font \n[.f]
-. c replace argument separator by unbreakable space
-. ds @args \$1\""
-. shift
-. while (\n[.$]>0) \{\
-. ds @args \*[@args]\~\$1
-. shift
-. \}
-. br
-. ad l
-. nh
-. Text \f[I]sh#\h'1m'\f[P]\f[CR]\*[@args]\f[P]\&\"
-. ft R
-. ft P
-. hy
-. ad
-. ft \n[@font]
-. br
-. rr @font
-. rm @args
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c `char or string'
-.de Quoted
-. ft CR
-. Text \[oq]\$*\[cq]
-. ft
-..
-.c --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.c End of macro definitions
-.ec
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Title
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.TH GROFF 1 "23 September 2003" "Groff Version 1.18.1"
-.SH NAME
-groff \- front-end for the groff document formatting system
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.ad l
-.Synopsis groff
-.ShortOpt[] abcegilpstzCEGNRSUVXZ
-.ShortOpt[] d cs
-.ShortOpt[] f fam
-.ShortOpt[] F dir
-.ShortOpt[] I dir
-.ShortOpt[] L arg
-.ShortOpt[] m name
-.ShortOpt[] M dir
-.ShortOpt[] n num
-.ShortOpt[] o list
-.ShortOpt[] P arg
-.ShortOpt[] r cn
-.ShortOpt[] T dev
-.ShortOpt[] w name
-.ShortOpt[] W name
-.RI [ file
-.Text \*[Ellipsis]]
-.EndSynopsis
-.
-.Synopsis groff
-.ShortOpt h
-|
-.LongOpt help
-.EndSynopsis
-.
-.Synopsis groff
-.ShortOpt v
-|
-.LongOpt version
-.RI [ option
-.Text \*[Ellipsis]]
-.EndSynopsis
-.
-.P
-The command line is parsed according to the usual GNU convention.
-.
-The whitespace between a command line option and its argument is
-optional.
-.
-Options can be grouped behind a single
-.ShortOpt
-(minus character).
-.
-A filename of
-.ShortOpt
-(minus character) denotes the standard input.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-This document describes the
-.B groff
-program, the main front-end for the
-.I groff
-document formatting system.
-.
-The
-.I groff
-program and macro suite is the implementation of a
-.BR roff (7)
-system within the free software collection
-.URL http://\:www.gnu.org "GNU" .
-.
-The
-.I groff
-system has all features of the classical
-.IR roff ,
-but adds many extensions.
-.
-.P
-The
-.B groff
-program allows to control the whole
-.I groff
-system by comand line options.
-.
-This is a great simplification in comparison to the classical case (which
-uses pipes only).
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH OPTIONS
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-As
-.B groff
-is a wrapper program for
-.B troff
-both programs share a set of options.
-.
-But the
-.B groff
-program has some additional, native options and gives a new meaning to
-some
-.B troff
-options.
-.
-On the other hand, not all
-.B troff
-options can be fed into
-.BR groff .
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Native groff Options
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The following options either do not exist for
-.B troff
-or are differently interpreted by
-.BR groff .
-.
-.
-.OptDef e
-Preprocess with
-.BR eqn .
-.
-.
-.OptDef g
-Preprocess with
-.BR grn .
-.
-.
-.OptDef G
-Preprocess with
-.BR grap .
-.
-.
-.OptDef h help
-Print a help message.
-.
-.
-.OptDef I "" dir
-Add search directory for
-.BR \%soelim (1).
-This option implies the
-.ShortOpt s
-option.
-.
-.
-.OptDef l
-Send the output to a spooler program for printing.
-.
-The command that should be used for this is specified by the
-.B print
-command in the device description file, see
-.BR \%groff_font (5).
-If this command is not present, the output is piped into the
-.BR lpr (1)
-program by default.
-.
-See options
-.ShortOpt L
-and
-.ShortOpt X .
-.
-.
-.OptDef L "" arg
-Pass
-.I arg
-to the spooler program.
-Several arguments should be passed with a separate
-.ShortOpt L
-option each.
-.
-Note that
-.B groff
-does not prepend
-.ShortOpt\" just a minus sign
-(a minus sign) to
-.I arg
-before passing it to the spooler program.
-.
-.
-.OptDef N
-Don't allow newlines within
-.I eqn
-delimiters.
-.
-This is the same as the
-.ShortOpt N
-option in
-.BR eqn .
-.
-.
-.OptDef p
-Preprocess with
-.BR pic .
-.
-.
-.OptDef P "" "-option"
-.OptDef+ P "" "-option \f[CB]-P\f[] arg"
-Pass
-.I -option
-or
-.I -option arg
-to the postprocessor.
-.
-The option must be specified with the necessary preceding minus
-sign(s)
-.Quoted \*[@-]
-or
-.Quoted \*[@--]
-because groff does not prepend any dashes before passing it to the
-postprocessor.
-.
-For example, to pass a title to the gxditview postprocessor, the shell
-command
-.IP
-.ShellCommand groff -X -P -title -P 'groff it' \f[I]foo\f[]
-.IP
-is equivalent to
-.IP
-.ShellCommand groff -X -Z \f[I]foo\f[] | gxditview -title 'groff it' -
-.
-.
-.OptDef R
-Preprocess with
-.BR refer .
-.
-No mechanism is provided for passing arguments to
-.B refer
-because most
-.B refer
-options have equivalent language elements that can be specified within
-the document.
-.
-See
-.BR \%refer (1)
-for more details.
-.
-.
-.OptDef s
-Preprocess with
-.BR soelim .
-.
-.
-.OptDef S
-Safer mode.
-.
-Pass the
-.ShortOpt S
-option to
-.B pic
-and disable the following
-.B troff
-requests:
-.BR .open ,
-.BR .opena ,
-.BR .pso ,
-.BR .sy ,
-and
-.BR .pi .
-For security reasons, safer mode is enabled by default.
-.
-.
-.OptDef t
-Preprocess with
-.BR tbl .
-.
-.
-.OptDef T "" dev
-Set output device to
-.IR dev .
-The possible values in
-.I groff
-are
-.BR ascii ,
-.BR cp1047 ,
-.BR dvi ,
-.BR html ,
-.BR latin1 ,
-.BR lbp ,
-.BR lj4 ,
-.BR ps ,
-.BR utf8 ,
-.BR X75 ,
-and
-.BR X100 .
-.
-Additionally,
-.B X75-12
-and
-.B X100-12
-are available for documents which use 12\|pt as the base document size.
-.
-The default device is
-.BR ps .
-.
-.
-.OptDef U
-Unsafe mode.
-.
-Reverts to the (old) unsafe behaviour; see option
-.ShortOpt S .
-.
-.
-.OptDef v version
-Output version information of
-.B groff
-and of all programs that are run by it; that is, the given command line
-is parsed in the usual way, passing
-.ShortOpt v
-to all subprograms.
-.
-.
-.OptDef V
-Output the pipeline that would be run by
-.BR groff
-(as a wrapper program), but do not execute it.
-.
-.
-.OptDef X
-Use
-.B gxditview
-instead of using the usual postprocessor to (pre)view a document.
-.
-The printing spooler behavior as outlined with options
-.ShortOpt l
-and
-.ShortOpt L
-is carried over to
-.BR \%gxditview (1)
-by determining an argument for the
-.B -printCommand
-option of
-.BR \%gxditview (1).
-.
-This sets the default
-.B Print
-action and the corresponding menu entry to that value.
-.
-.ShortOpt X
-only produces good results with
-.ShortOpt Tps ,
-.ShortOpt TX75 ,
-.ShortOpt TX75-12 ,
-.ShortOpt TX100 ,
-and
-.ShortOpt TX100-12 .
-.
-The default resolution for previewing
-.ShortOpt Tps
-output is 75\|dpi; this can be changed by passing the
-.ShortOpt resolution
-option to
-.BR gxditview ,
-for example
-.
-.IP
-.ShellCommand groff -X -P-resolution -P100 -man foo.1
-.
-.
-.OptDef z
-Suppress output generated by
-.BR troff .
-Only error messages will be printed.
-.
-.
-.OptDef Z
-Do not postprocess the output of
-.B troff
-that is normally
-called automatically by
-.BR groff .
-This will print the intermediate output to standard output; see
-.BR \%groff_out (5).
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Tranparent Options
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The following options are transparently handed over to the formatter
-program
-.B troff
-that is called by groff subsequently.
-.
-These options are described in more detail in
-.BR troff (1).
-.
-.OptDef a
-ascii approximation of output.
-.
-.OptDef b
-backtrace on error or warning.
-.
-.OptDef c
-disable color output.
-.
-.OptDef C
-enable compatibility mode.
-.
-.OptDef d "" cs
-.OptDef+ d "" name=s
-define string.
-.
-.OptDef E
-disable
-.B troff
-error messages.
-.
-.OptDef f "" fam
-set default font family.
-.
-.OptDef F "" dir
-set path for font DESC files.
-.
-.OptDef i
-process standard input after the specified input files.
-.
-.OptDef m "" name
-include macro file \f[I]name\f[]\f[B].tmac\f[] (or
-\f[B]tmac.\f[]\f[I]name\f[]); see also
-.BR \%groff_tmac (5).
-.
-.OptDef M "" dir
-path for macro files.
-.
-.OptDef n "" num
-number the first page
-.IR num .
-.
-.OptDef o "" list
-output only pages in
-.IR list .
-.
-.OptDef r "" cn
-.OptDef+ r "" name=n
-set number register.
-.
-.OptDef w "" name
-enable warning
-.IR name .
-.
-.OptDef W "" name
-disable warning
-.IR name .
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH "USING GROFF"
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The
-.I groff system
-implements the infrastructure of classical roff; see
-.BR roff (7)
-for a survey on how a roff system works in general.
-.
-Due to the front-end programs available within the groff system, using
-.I groff
-is much easier than
-.IR "classical roff" .
-.
-This section gives an overview of the parts that consitute the groff
-system.
-.
-It complements
-.BR roff (7)
-with groff-specific features.
-.
-This section can be regarded as a guide to the documentation around
-the groff system.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Front-ends
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The
-.B groff
-program is a wrapper around the
-.BR troff (1)
-program.
-.
-It allows to specify the preprocessors by command line options and
-automatically runs the postprocessor that is appropriate for the
-selected device.
-.
-Doing so, the sometimes tedious piping mechanism of classical
-.BR roff (7)
-can be avoided.
-.
-.P
-The
-.BR grog (1)
-program can be used for guessing the correct groff command line to
-format a file.
-.
-.P
-The
-.BR \%groffer (1)
-program is an allround-viewer for groff files and man pages.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Preprocessors
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The groff preprocessors are reimplementations of the classical
-preprocessors with moderate extensions.
-.
-The preprocessors distributed with the
-.I groff
-package are
-.
-.TP
-.BR eqn (1)
-for mathematical formul\(ae,
-.TP
-.BR grn (1)
-for including
-.BR gremlin (1)
-pictures,
-.TP
-.BR pic (1)
-for drawing diagrams,
-.TP
-.BR \%refer (1)
-for bibliographic references,
-.TP
-.BR \%soelim (1)
-for including macro files from standard locations,
-.
-.P
-and
-.TP
-.BR tbl (1)
-for tables.
-.
-.P
-Besides these, there are some internal preprocessors that are
-automatically run with some devices.
-.
-These aren't visible to the user.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS "Macro Packages"
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-Macro packages can be included by option
-.ShortOpt m .
-.
-The groff system implements and extends all classical macro packages
-in a compatible way and adds some packages of its own.
-.
-Actually, the following macro packages come with
-.IR groff :
-.
-.TP
-.B man
-The traditional man page format; see
-.BR \%groff_man (7).
-It can be specified on the command line as
-.ShortOpt man
-or
-.ShortOpt m
-.BR man .
-.
-.TP
-.B mandoc
-The general package for man pages; it automatically recognizes
-whether the documents uses the
-.I man
-or the
-.I mdoc
-format and branches to the corresponding macro package.
-.
-It can be specified on the command line as
-.ShortOpt mandoc
-or
-.ShortOpt m
-.BR mandoc .
-.
-.TP
-.B mdoc
-The BSD-style man page format; see
-.BR \%groff_mdoc (7).
-It can be specified on the command line as
-.ShortOpt mdoc
-or
-.ShortOpt m
-.BR mdoc .
-.
-.TP
-.B me
-The classical
-.I me
-document format; see
-.BR \%groff_me (7).
-It can be specified on the command line as
-.ShortOpt me
-or
-.ShortOpt m
-.BR me .
-.
-.TP
-.B mm
-The classical
-.I mm
-document format; see
-.BR \%groff_mm (7).
-It can be specified on the command line as
-.ShortOpt mm
-or
-.ShortOpt m
-.BR mm .
-.
-.TP
-.B ms
-The classical
-.I ms
-document format; see
-.BR \%groff_ms (7).
-It can be specified on the command line as
-.ShortOpt ms
-or
-.ShortOpt m
-.BR ms .
-.
-.TP
-.B www
-HTML-like macros for inclusion in arbitrary groff documents; see
-.BR \%groff_www (7).
-.
-.P
-Details on the naming of macro files and their placement can be found
-in
-.BR \%groff_tmac (5).
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS "Programming Language"
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-General concepts common to all roff programming languages are
-described in
-.BR roff (7).
-.
-.P
-The groff extensions to the classical troff language are documented in
-.BR \%groff_diff (7).
-.
-.P
-The groff language as a whole is described in the (still incomplete)
-.IR "groff info file" ;
-a short (but complete) reference can be found in
-.BR groff (7).
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Formatters
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The central roff formatter within the groff system is
-.BR troff (1).
-It provides the features of both the classical troff and nroff, as
-well as the groff extensions.
-.
-The command line option
-.ShortOpt C
-switches
-.B troff
-into
-.I "compatibility mode"
-which tries to emulate classical roff as much as possible.
-.
-.P
-There is a shell script
-.BR nroff (1)
-that emulates the behavior of classical nroff.
-.
-It tries to automatically select the proper output encoding, according to
-the current locale.
-.
-.P
-The formatter program generates
-.IR "intermediate output" ;
-see
-.BR \%groff_out (7).
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Devices
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-In roff, the output targets are called
-.IR devices .
-A device can be a piece of hardware, e.g. a printer, or a software
-file format.
-.
-A device is specified by the option
-.ShortOpt T .
-The groff devices are as follows.
-.
-.TP
-.B ascii
-Text output using the
-.BR ascii (7)
-character set.
-.
-.TP
-.B cp1047
-Text output using the EBCDIC code page IBM cp1047 (e.g. OS/390 Unix).
-.
-.TP
-.B nippon
-Text output using the Japanese-EUC character set.
-.
-.TP
-.B dvi
-TeX DVI format.
-.
-.TP
-.B html
-HTML output.
-.
-.TP
-.B ascii8
-For typewriter-like devices. Unlike
-.BR ascii ,
-this device is 8 bit clean. This device is intended to be used
-for codesets other than ASCII and ISO-8859-1.
-.TP
-.B latin1
-Text output using the ISO Latin-1 (ISO 8859-1) character set; see
-.BR iso_8859_1 (7).
-.
-.TP
-.B lbp
-Output for Canon CAPSL printers (LBP-4 and LBP-8 series laser printers).
-.
-.TP
-.B lj4
-HP LaserJet4-compatible (or other PCL5-compatible) printers.
-.
-.TP
-.B ps
-PostScript output; suitable for printers and previewers like
-.BR gv (1).
-.
-.TP
-.B utf8
-Text output using the Unicode (ISO 10646) character set with UTF-8
-encoding; see
-.BR unicode (7).
-.
-.TP
-.B X75
-75dpi X Window System output suitable for the previewers
-.BR xditview (1x)
-and
-.BR \%gxditview (1).
-A variant for a 12\|pt document base font is
-.BR X75-12 .
-.
-.TP
-.B X100
-100dpi X Window System output suitable for the previewers
-.BR xditview (1x)
-and
-.BR \%gxditview (1).
-A variant for a 12\|pt document base font is
-.BR X100-12 .
-.
-.P
-The postprocessor to be used for a device is specified by the
-.B postpro
-command in the device description file; see
-.BR \%groff_font (5).
-.
-This can be overridden with the
-.B \-X
-option.
-.
-.P
-The default device is
-.BR ps .
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Postprocessors
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-groff provides 3\~hardware postprocessors:
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%grolbp (1)
-for some Canon printers,
-.TP
-.BR \%grolj4 (1)
-for printers compatible to the HP LaserJet\~4 and PCL5,
-.TP
-.BR \%grotty (1)
-for text output using various encodings, e.g. on text-oriented
-terminals or line-printers.
-.
-.P
-Today, most printing or drawing hardware is handled by the operating
-system, by device drivers, or by software interfaces, usally accepting
-PostScript.
-.
-Consequently, there isn't an urgent need for more hardware device
-postprocessors.
-.
-.P
-The groff software devices for conversion into other document file
-formats are
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%grodvi (1)
-for the DVI format,
-.TP
-.BR \%grohtml (1)
-for HTML format,
-.TP
-.BR grops (1)
-for PostScript.
-.
-.P
-Combined with the many existing free conversion tools this should
-be sufficient to convert a troff document into virtually any existing
-data format.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS Utilities
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The following utility programs around groff are available.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%addftinfo (1)
-Add information to troff font description files for use with groff.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%afmtodit (1)
-Create font description files for PostScript device.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%groffer (1)
-General viewer program for groff files and man pages.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%gxditview (1)
-The groff X viewer, the GNU version of xditview.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%hpftodit (1)
-Create font description files for lj4 device.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%indxbib (1)
-Make inverted index for bibliographic databases.
-.
-.TP
-.BR lkbib (1)
-Search bibliographic databases.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%lookbib (1)
-Interactively search bibliographic databases.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%pfbtops (1)
-Translate a PostScript font in .pfb format to ASCII.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%tfmtodit (1)
-Create font description files for TeX DVI device.
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%xditview (1x)
-roff viewer distributed with X window.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-Normally, the path separator in the following environment variables is the
-colon; this may vary depending on the operating system.
-.
-For example, DOS and Windows use a semicolon instead.
-.
-.TP
-.EnvVar GROFF_BIN_PATH
-This search path, followed by
-.EnvVar $PATH ,
-will be used for commands that are executed by
-.BR groff .
-.
-If it is not set then the directory where the groff binaries were
-installed is prepended to
-.EnvVar PATH .
-.
-.TP
-.EnvVar GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX
-When there is a need to run different roff implementations at the same
-time
-.I groff
-provides the facility to prepend a prefix to most of its programs that
-could provoke name clashings at run time (default is to have none).
-.
-Historically, this prefix was the character
-.BR g ,
-but it can be anything.
-.
-For example,
-.BR gtroff
-stood for
-.IR groff 's
-.BR troff ,
-.BR gtbl
-for the
-.I groff
-version of
-.BR tbl .
-.
-By setting
-.EnvVar GROFF_COMMAND_PREFIX
-to different values, the different roff installations can be
-addressed.
-.
-More exactly, if it is set to prefix
-.I xxx
-then
-.B groff
-as a wrapper program will internally call
-.IB xxx troff
-instead of
-.BR troff .
-This also applies to the preprocessors
-.BR \%eqn ,
-.BR \%grn ,
-.BR \%pic ,
-.BR \%refer ,
-.BR \%tbl ,
-.BR \%soelim ,
-and to the utilities
-.B \%indxbib
-and
-.BR \%lookbib .
-.
-This feature does not apply to any programs different from the ones
-above (most notably
-.B groff
-itself) since they are unique to the groff package.
-.
-.
-.TP
-.EnvVar GROFF_FONT_PATH
-A list of directories in which to search for the
-.BI dev name
-directory in addition to the default ones.
-.
-See
-.BR troff (1)
-and
-.BR \%groff_font (5)
-for more details.
-.
-.
-.TP
-.EnvVar GROFF_TMAC_PATH
-A list of directories in which to search for macro files in addition to
-the default directories.
-.
-See
-.BR troff (1)
-and
-.BR \%groff_tmac (5)
-for more details.
-.
-.
-.TP
-.EnvVar GROFF_TMPDIR
-The directory in which temporary files will be created.
-.
-If this is not set but the environment variable
-.EnvVar TMPDIR
-instead, temporary files will be created in the directory
-.EnvVar $TMPDIR .
-.
-Otherwise temporary files will be created in
-.BR /tmp .
-The
-.BR \%refer (1),
-.BR \%groffer (1),
-.BR \%grohtml (1),
-and
-.BR grops (1)
-commands use temporary files.
-.
-.
-.TP
-.EnvVar GROFF_TYPESETTER
-Preset the default device.
-.
-If this is not set the
-.B ps
-device is used as default.
-.
-This device name is overwritten by the option
-.ShortOpt T .
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH FILES
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-There are some directories in which
-.I groff
-installs all of its data files.
-.
-Due to different installation habits on different operating systems,
-their locations are not absolutely fixed, but their function is
-clearly defined and coincides on all systems.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS "groff Macro Directory"
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-This contains all information related to macro packages.
-.
-Note that more than a single directory is searched for those files
-as documented in
-.BR \%groff_tmac (5).
-.
-For the groff installation corresponding to this document, it is
-located at
-.IR /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/tmac .
-.
-The following files contained in the
-.I groff macro directory
-have a special meaning:
-.
-.
-.TP
-.B troffrc
-Initialization file for troff.
-.
-This is interpreted by
-.B troff
-before reading the macro sets and any input.
-.
-.
-.TP
-.B troffrc-end
-Final startup file for troff, it is parsed after all macro sets have
-been read.
-.
-.
-.TP
-.IB name .tmac
-.TP+
-.BI tmac. name
-Macro file for macro package
-.IR name .
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SS "groff Font Directory"
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-This contains all information related to output devices.
-.
-Note that more than a single directory is searched for those files; see
-.BR troff (1).
-.
-For the groff installation corresponding to this document, it is
-located at
-.IR /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/font .
-.
-The following files contained in the
-.I groff font directory
-have a special meaning:
-.
-.
-.TP
-.BI dev name /DESC
-Device description file for device
-.IR name ,
-see
-.BR \%groff_font (5).
-.
-.
-.TP
-.BI dev name / F
-Font file for font
-.I F
-of device
-.IR name .
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The following example illustrates the power of the
-.B groff
-program as a wrapper around
-.BR troff .
-.
-.P
-To process a roff file using the preprocessors
-.B tbl
-and
-.B pic
-and the
-.B me
-macro set, classical troff had to be called by
-.
-.P
-.ShellCommand pic foo.me | tbl | troff -me -Tlatin1 | grotty
-.
-.P
-Using
-.BR groff ,
-this pipe can be shortened to the equivalent command
-.P
-.ShellCommand groff -p -t -me -T latin1 foo.me
-.
-.P
-An even easier way to call this is to use
-.BR grog (1)
-to guess the preprocessor and macro options and execute the generated
-command (by specifying shell left quotes)
-.P
-.ShellCommand `grog -Tlatin1 foo.me`
-.
-.P
-The simplest way is to view the contents in an automated way by
-calling
-.
-.P
-.ShellCommand groffer foo.me
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH BUGS
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.P
-On EBCDIC hosts (e.g. OS/390 Unix), output devices
-.B ascii
-and
-.B latin1
-aren't available.
-.
-Similarly, output for EBCDIC code page
-.B cp1047
-is not available on ASCII based operating systems.
-.
-.P
-Report bugs to bug-groff at gnu.org.
-.
-Include a complete, self-contained example that will allow the bug to
-be reproduced, and say which version of groff you are using.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-Information on how to get groff and related information is available
-at the
-.URL http://\:www.gnu.org/\:software/\:groff "GNU website" .
-The most recent released version of groff is available for anonymous
-ftp at the
-.URL ftp://ftp.ffii.org/\:pub/\:groff/\:devel/\:groff-current.tar.gz \
- "groff development site" .
-.
-.P
-Three groff mailing lists are available:
-.TP
-.MTO bug-groff at gnu.org
-for reporting bugs,
-.
-.TP
-.MTO groff at gnu.org
-for general discussion of groff,
-.
-.TP
-.MTO groff-commit at ffii.org
-a read-only list showing logs of commitments to the CVS repository.
-.
-.P
-Details on CVS access and much more can be found in the file
-.B README
-at the top directory of the groff source package.
-.
-.P
-There is a free implementation of the
-.B grap
-preprocessor, written by
-.MTO faber at lunabase.org " Ted Faber" .
-.
-The actual version can be found at the
-.
-.URL http://\:www.lunabase.org/\:~faber/\:Vault/\:software/\:grap/ \
- "grap website" .
-This is the only grap version supported by groff.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH AUTHORS
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-Copyright \(co 1989, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.
-.P
-This document is distributed under the terms of the FDL (GNU Free
-Documentation License) version 1.1 or later.
-.
-You should have received a copy of the FDL on your system, it is also
-available on-line at the
-.URL http://\:www.gnu.org/\:copyleft/\:fdl.html "GNU copyleft site" .
-.
-.P
-This document is based on the original groff man page written by
-.MTO jjc at jclark.com "James Clark" .
-.
-It was rewritten, enhanced, and put under the FDL license by
-.MTO bwarken at mayn.de "Bernd Warken" .
-.
-It is maintained by
-.MTO wl at gnu.org "Werner Lemberg" .
-.
-.P
-.I groff
-is a GNU free software project.
-.
-All parts of the
-.I groff package
-are protected by GNU copyleft licenses.
-.
-The software files are distributed under the terms of the GNU General
-Public License (GPL), while the documentation files mostly use the GNU
-Free Documentation License (FDL).
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The
-.IR "groff info file"
-contains all information on the groff system within a single document.
-.
-Beneath the detailed documentation of all aspects, it provides
-examples and background information.
-.
-See
-.BR info (1)
-on how to read it.
-.
-.P
-Due to its complex structure, the groff system has many man pages.
-.
-They can be read with
-.BR man (1)
-or
-.BR \%groffer (1).
-.
-.TP
-Introduction, history and further readings:
-.BR roff (7).
-.
-.TP
-Viewer for groff files:
-.BR \%groffer (1),
-.BR \%gxditview (1),
-.BR \%xditview (1x).
-.
-.TP
-Wrapper programs for formatters:
-.BR \%groff (1),
-.BR \%grog (1).
-.
-.TP
-Roff preprocessors:
-.BR \%eqn (1),
-.BR \%grn (1),
-.BR \%pic (1),
-.BR \%refer (1),
-.BR \%soelim (1),
-.BR \%tbl (1),
-.BR grap (1).
-.
-.TP
-Roff language with the groff extensions:
-.BR \%groff (7),
-.BR \%groff_char (7),
-.BR \%groff_diff (7),
-.BR \%groff_font (5).
-.
-.TP
-Roff formatter programs:
-.BR \%nroff (1),
-.BR \%troff (1),
-.BR ditroff (7).
-.
-.TP
-The intermediate output language:
-.BR \%groff_out (7).
-.
-.TP
-Postprocessors for the output devices:
-.BR \%grodvi (1),
-.BR \%grohtml (1),
-.BR \%grolbp (1),
-.BR \%grolj4 (1),
-.BR \%grops (1),
-.BR \%grotty (1).
-.
-.TP
-Groff macro packages and macro-specific utilities:
-.BR \%groff_tmac (5),
-.BR \%groff_man (7),
-.BR \%groff_mdoc (7),
-.BR \%groff_me (7),
-.BR \%groff_mm (7),
-.BR \%groff_mmse (7),
-.BR \%groff_mom (7),
-.BR \%groff_ms (7),
-.BR \%groff_www (7),
-.BR \%mmroff (7).
-.
-.TP
-The following utilities are available:
-.BR \%addftinfo (1),
-.BR \%afmtodit (1),
-.BR \%eqn2graph (1),
-.BR \%groffer (1),
-.BR \%gxditview (1),
-.BR \%hpftodit (1),
-.BR \%indxbib (1),
-.BR \%lookbib (1),
-.BR \%pfbtops (1),
-.BR \%pic2graph (1),
-.BR \%tfmtodit (1).
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Emacs setup
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.\" Local Variables:
-.\" mode: nroff
-.\" End:
diff --git a/raw/man1/groups.1 b/raw/man1/groups.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 015ceb3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/groups.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH GROUPS "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-groups \- print the groups a user is in
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groups
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIUSERNAME\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Same as id \fB\-Gn\fR. If no USERNAME, use current process.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B groups
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B groups
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info groups
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/gunzip.1 b/raw/man1/gunzip.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c2a5145..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/gunzip.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/gzip.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/gzip.1 b/raw/man1/gzip.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 06986eb..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/gzip.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,499 +0,0 @@
-.TH GZIP 1 local
-.SH NAME
-gzip, gunzip, zcat \- compress or expand files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ll +8
-.B gzip
-.RB [ " \-acdfhlLnNrtvV19 " ]
-.RB [ \-S\ suffix ]
-[
-.I "name \&..."
-]
-.ll -8
-.br
-.B gunzip
-.RB [ " \-acfhlLnNrtvV " ]
-.RB [ \-S\ suffix ]
-[
-.I "name \&..."
-]
-.br
-.B zcat
-.RB [ " \-fhLV " ]
-[
-.I "name \&..."
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I Gzip
-reduces the size of the named files using Lempel-Ziv coding (LZ77).
-Whenever possible,
-each file is replaced by one with the extension
-.B "\&.gz,"
-while keeping the same ownership modes, access and modification times.
-(The default extension is
-.B "\-gz"
-for VMS,
-.B "z"
-for MSDOS, OS/2 FAT, Windows NT FAT and Atari.)
-If no files are specified, or if a file name is "-", the standard input is
-compressed to the standard output.
-.I Gzip
-will only attempt to compress regular files.
-In particular, it will ignore symbolic links.
-.PP
-If the compressed file name is too long for its file system,
-.I gzip
-truncates it.
-.I Gzip
-attempts to truncate only the parts of the file name longer than 3 characters.
-(A part is delimited by dots.) If the name consists of small parts only,
-the longest parts are truncated. For example, if file names are limited
-to 14 characters, gzip.msdos.exe is compressed to gzi.msd.exe.gz.
-Names are not truncated on systems which do not have a limit on file name
-length.
-.PP
-By default,
-.I gzip
-keeps the original file name and timestamp in the compressed file. These
-are used when decompressing the file with the
-.B \-N
-option. This is useful when the compressed file name was truncated or
-when the time stamp was not preserved after a file transfer.
-.PP
-Compressed files can be restored to their original form using
-.I gzip -d
-or
-.I gunzip
-or
-.I zcat.
-If the original name saved in the compressed file is not suitable for its
-file system, a new name is constructed from the original one to make it
-legal.
-.PP
-.I gunzip
-takes a list of files on its command line and replaces each
-file whose name ends with .gz, -gz, .z, -z, _z or .Z
-and which begins with the correct magic number with an uncompressed
-file without the original extension.
-.I gunzip
-also recognizes the special extensions
-.B "\&.tgz"
-and
-.B "\&.taz"
-as shorthands for
-.B "\&.tar.gz"
-and
-.B "\&.tar.Z"
-respectively.
-When compressing,
-.I gzip
-uses the
-.B "\&.tgz"
-extension if necessary instead of truncating a file with a
-.B "\&.tar"
-extension.
-.PP
-.I gunzip
-can currently decompress files created by
-.I gzip, zip, compress, compress -H
-or
-.I pack.
-The detection of the input format is automatic. When using
-the first two formats,
-.I gunzip
-checks a 32 bit CRC. For
-.I pack, gunzip
-checks the uncompressed length. The standard
-.I compress
-format was not designed to allow consistency checks. However
-.I gunzip
-is sometimes able to detect a bad .Z file. If you get an error
-when uncompressing a .Z file, do not assume that the .Z file is
-correct simply because the standard
-.I uncompress
-does not complain. This generally means that the standard
-.I uncompress
-does not check its input, and happily generates garbage output.
-The SCO compress -H format (lzh compression method) does not include a CRC
-but also allows some consistency checks.
-.PP
-Files created by
-.I zip
-can be uncompressed by gzip only if they have a single member compressed
-with the 'deflation' method. This feature is only intended to help
-conversion of tar.zip files to the tar.gz format. To extract zip files
-with several members, use
-.I unzip
-instead of
-.I gunzip.
-.PP
-.I zcat
-is identical to
-.I gunzip
-.B \-c.
-(On some systems,
-.I zcat
-may be installed as
-.I gzcat
-to preserve the original link to
-.I compress.)
-.I zcat
-uncompresses either a list of files on the command line or its
-standard input and writes the uncompressed data on standard output.
-.I zcat
-will uncompress files that have the correct magic number whether
-they have a
-.B "\&.gz"
-suffix or not.
-.PP
-.I Gzip
-uses the Lempel-Ziv algorithm used in
-.I zip
-and PKZIP.
-The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of the
-input and the distribution of common substrings.
-Typically, text such as source code or English
-is reduced by 60\-70%.
-Compression is generally much better than that achieved by
-LZW (as used in
-.IR compress ),
-Huffman coding (as used in
-.IR pack ),
-or adaptive Huffman coding
-.RI ( compact ).
-.PP
-Compression is always performed, even if the compressed file is
-slightly larger than the original. The worst case expansion is
-a few bytes for the gzip file header, plus 5 bytes every 32K block,
-or an expansion ratio of 0.015% for large files. Note that the actual
-number of used disk blocks almost never increases.
-.I gzip
-preserves the mode, ownership and timestamps of files when compressing
-or decompressing.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-a --ascii
-Ascii text mode: convert end-of-lines using local conventions. This option
-is supported only on some non-Unix systems. For MSDOS, CR LF is converted
-to LF when compressing, and LF is converted to CR LF when decompressing.
-.TP
-.B \-c --stdout --to-stdout
-Write output on standard output; keep original files unchanged.
-If there are several input files, the output consists of a sequence of
-independently compressed members. To obtain better compression,
-concatenate all input files before compressing them.
-.TP
-.B \-d --decompress --uncompress
-Decompress.
-.TP
-.B \-f --force
-Force compression or decompression even if the file has multiple links
-or the corresponding file already exists, or if the compressed data
-is read from or written to a terminal. If the input data is not in
-a format recognized by
-.I gzip,
-and if the option --stdout is also given, copy the input data without change
-to the standard ouput: let
-.I zcat
-behave as
-.I cat.
-If
-.B \-f
-is not given,
-and when not running in the background,
-.I gzip
-prompts to verify whether an existing file should be overwritten.
-.TP
-.B \-h --help
-Display a help screen and quit.
-.TP
-.B \-l --list
-For each compressed file, list the following fields:
-
- compressed size: size of the compressed file
- uncompressed size: size of the uncompressed file
- ratio: compression ratio (0.0% if unknown)
- uncompressed_name: name of the uncompressed file
-
-The uncompressed size is given as -1 for files not in gzip format,
-such as compressed .Z files. To get the uncompressed size for such a file,
-you can use:
-
- zcat file.Z | wc -c
-
-In combination with the --verbose option, the following fields are also
-displayed:
-
- method: compression method
- crc: the 32-bit CRC of the uncompressed data
- date & time: time stamp for the uncompressed file
-
-The compression methods currently supported are deflate, compress, lzh
-(SCO compress -H) and pack. The crc is given as ffffffff for a file
-not in gzip format.
-
-With --name, the uncompressed name, date and time are
-those stored within the compress file if present.
-
-With --verbose, the size totals and compression ratio for all files
-is also displayed, unless some sizes are unknown. With --quiet,
-the title and totals lines are not displayed.
-.TP
-.B \-L --license
-Display the
-.I gzip
-license and quit.
-.TP
-.B \-n --no-name
-When compressing, do not save the original file name and time stamp by
-default. (The original name is always saved if the name had to be
-truncated.) When decompressing, do not restore the original file name
-if present (remove only the
-.I gzip
-suffix from the compressed file name) and do not restore the original
-time stamp if present (copy it from the compressed file). This option
-is the default when decompressing.
-.TP
-.B \-N --name
-When compressing, always save the original file name and time stamp; this
-is the default. When decompressing, restore the original file name and
-time stamp if present. This option is useful on systems which have
-a limit on file name length or when the time stamp has been lost after
-a file transfer.
-.TP
-.B \-q --quiet
-Suppress all warnings.
-.TP
-.B \-r --recursive
-Travel the directory structure recursively. If any of the file names
-specified on the command line are directories,
-.I gzip
-will descend into the directory and compress all the files it finds there
-(or decompress them in the case of
-.I gunzip
-).
-.TP
-.B \-S .suf --suffix .suf
-Use suffix .suf instead of .gz. Any suffix can be given, but suffixes
-other than .z and .gz should be avoided to avoid confusion when files
-are transferred to other systems. A null suffix forces gunzip to try
-decompression on all given files regardless of suffix, as in:
-
- gunzip -S "" * (*.* for MSDOS)
-
-Previous versions of gzip used
-the .z suffix. This was changed to avoid a conflict with
-.IR pack "(1)".
-.TP
-.B \-t --test
-Test. Check the compressed file integrity.
-.TP
-.B \-v --verbose
-Verbose. Display the name and percentage reduction for each file compressed
-or decompressed.
-.TP
-.B \-V --version
-Version. Display the version number and compilation options then quit.
-.TP
-.B \-# --fast --best
-Regulate the speed of compression using the specified digit
-.IR # ,
-where
-.B \-1
-or
-.B \-\-fast
-indicates the fastest compression method (less compression)
-and
-.B \-9
-or
-.B \-\-best
-indicates the slowest compression method (best compression).
-The default compression level is
-.BR \-6
-(that is, biased towards high compression at expense of speed).
-.SH "ADVANCED USAGE"
-Multiple compressed files can be concatenated. In this case,
-.I gunzip
-will extract all members at once. For example:
-
- gzip -c file1 > foo.gz
- gzip -c file2 >> foo.gz
-
-Then
-
- gunzip -c foo
-
-is equivalent to
-
- cat file1 file2
-
-In case of damage to one member of a .gz file, other members can
-still be recovered (if the damaged member is removed). However,
-you can get better compression by compressing all members at once:
-
- cat file1 file2 | gzip > foo.gz
-
-compresses better than
-
- gzip -c file1 file2 > foo.gz
-
-If you want to recompress concatenated files to get better compression, do:
-
- gzip -cd old.gz | gzip > new.gz
-
-If a compressed file consists of several members, the uncompressed
-size and CRC reported by the --list option applies to the last member
-only. If you need the uncompressed size for all members, you can use:
-
- gzip -cd file.gz | wc -c
-
-If you wish to create a single archive file with multiple members so
-that members can later be extracted independently, use an archiver
-such as tar or zip. GNU tar supports the -z option to invoke gzip
-transparently. gzip is designed as a complement to tar, not as a
-replacement.
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-The environment variable
-.B GZIP
-can hold a set of default options for
-.I gzip.
-These options are interpreted first and can be overwritten by
-explicit command line parameters. For example:
- for sh: GZIP="-8v --name"; export GZIP
- for csh: setenv GZIP "-8v --name"
- for MSDOS: set GZIP=-8v --name
-
-On Vax/VMS, the name of the environment variable is GZIP_OPT, to
-avoid a conflict with the symbol set for invocation of the program.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-znew(1), zcmp(1), zmore(1), zforce(1), gzexe(1), zip(1), unzip(1), compress(1),
-pack(1), compact(1)
-.PP
-The
-.I gzip
-file format is specified in P. Deutsch, \s-1GZIP\s0 file format
-specification version 4.3,
-.BR <ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc1952.txt> ,
-Internet RFC 1952 (May 1996).
-The
-.I zip
-deflation format is specified in P. Deutsch, \s-1DEFLATE\s0 Compressed
-Data Format Specification version 1.3,
-.BR <ftp://ftp.isi.edu/in-notes/rfc1951.txt> ,
-Internet RFC 1951 (May 1996).
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-Exit status is normally 0;
-if an error occurs, exit status is 1. If a warning occurs, exit status is 2.
-.TP
-Usage: gzip [-cdfhlLnNrtvV19] [-S suffix] [file ...]
-Invalid options were specified on the command line.
-.TP
-\fIfile\fP\^: not in gzip format
-The file specified to
-.I gunzip
-has not been compressed.
-.TP
-\fIfile\fP\^: Corrupt input. Use zcat to recover some data.
-The compressed file has been damaged. The data up to the point of failure
-can be recovered using
-
- zcat \fIfile\fP > recover
-.TP
-\fIfile\fP\^: compressed with \fIxx\fP bits, can only handle \fIyy\fP bits
-.I File
-was compressed (using LZW) by a program that could deal with
-more
-.I bits
-than the decompress code on this machine.
-Recompress the file with gzip, which compresses better and uses
-less memory.
-.TP
-\fIfile\fP\^: already has .gz suffix -- no change
-The file is assumed to be already compressed.
-Rename the file and try again.
-.TP
-\fIfile\fP already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)?
-Respond "y" if you want the output file to be replaced; "n" if not.
-.TP
-gunzip: corrupt input
-A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means that the input file has
-been corrupted.
-.TP
-\fIxx.x%\fP Percentage of the input saved by compression.
-(Relevant only for
-.BR \-v
-and
-.BR \-l \.)
-.TP
--- not a regular file or directory: ignored
-When the input file is not a regular file or directory,
-(e.g. a symbolic link, socket, FIFO, device file), it is
-left unaltered.
-.TP
--- has \fIxx\fP other links: unchanged
-The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See
-.IR ln "(1)"
-for more information. Use the
-.B \-f
-flag to force compression of multiply-linked files.
-.SH CAVEATS
-When writing compressed data to a tape, it is generally necessary to
-pad the output with zeroes up to a block boundary. When the data is
-read and the whole block is passed to
-.I gunzip
-for decompression,
-.I gunzip
-detects that there is extra trailing garbage after the compressed data
-and emits a warning by default. You have to use the --quiet option to
-suppress the warning. This option can be set in the
-.B GZIP
-environment variable as in:
- for sh: GZIP="-q" tar -xfz --block-compress /dev/rst0
- for csh: (setenv GZIP -q; tar -xfz --block-compr /dev/rst0
-
-In the above example, gzip is invoked implicitly by the -z option of
-GNU tar. Make sure that the same block size (-b option of tar) is used
-for reading and writing compressed data on tapes. (This example
-assumes you are using the GNU version of tar.)
-.SH BUGS
-The gzip format represents the the input size modulo 2^32, so the
---list option reports incorrect uncompressed sizes and compression
-ratios for uncompressed files 4 GB and larger. To work around this
-problem, you can use the following command to discover a large
-uncompressed file's true size:
-
- zcat file.gz | wc -c
-
-The --list option reports sizes as -1 and crc as ffffffff if the
-compressed file is on a non seekable media.
-
-In some rare cases, the --best option gives worse compression than
-the default compression level (-6). On some highly redundant files,
-.I compress
-compresses better than
-.I gzip.
-.SH "COPYRIGHT NOTICE"
-Copyright \(co 1998, 1999, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-Copyright \(co 1992, 1993 Jean-loup Gailly
-.PP
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-.ig
-Permission is granted to process this file through troff and print the
-results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
-notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
-(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
-..
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire
-resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a permission
-notice identical to this one.
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
-except that this permission notice may be stated in a translation approved
-by the Foundation.
diff --git a/raw/man1/hash.1 b/raw/man1/hash.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/hash.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/head.1 b/raw/man1/head.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 59b788e..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/head.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH HEAD "1" "October 2003" "head (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-head \- output the first part of files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B head
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print first 10 lines of each FILE to standard output.
-With more than one FILE, precede each with a header giving the file name.
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-bytes\fR=\fISIZE\fR
-print first SIZE bytes
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-lines\fR=\fINUMBER\fR
-print first NUMBER lines instead of first 10
-.TP
-\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR
-never print headers giving file names
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-always print headers giving file names
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-SIZE may have a multiplier suffix: b for 512, k for 1K, m for 1 Meg.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B head
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B head
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info head
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/help.1 b/raw/man1/help.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/help.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/history.1 b/raw/man1/history.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/history.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/host.1 b/raw/man1/host.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 38a1ef6..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/host.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,129 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 2000, 2001 Internet Software Consortium.
-.\"
-.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
-.\" purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
-.\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
-.\"
-.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM
-.\" DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL
-.\" INTERNET SOFTWARE CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT,
-.\" INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
-.\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
-.\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
-.\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-.\"
-.TH "HOST" "1" "Jun 30, 2000" "BIND9" ""
-.SH NAME
-host \- DNS lookup utility
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBhost\fR [ \fB-aCdlnrTwv\fR ] [ \fB-c \fIclass\fB\fR ] [ \fB-N \fIndots\fB\fR ] [ \fB-R \fInumber\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t \fItype\fB\fR ] [ \fB-W \fIwait\fB\fR ] \fBname\fR [ \fBserver\fR ]
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBhost\fR
-is a simple utility for performing DNS lookups.
-It is normally used to convert names to IP addresses and vice versa.
-When no arguments or options are given,
-\fBhost\fR
-prints a short summary of its command line arguments and options.
-.PP
-\fIname\fR is the domain name that is to be looked
-up. It can also be a dotted-decimal IPv4 address or a colon-delimited
-IPv6 address, in which case \fBhost\fR will by default
-perform a reverse lookup for that address.
-\fIserver\fR is an optional argument which is either
-the name or IP address of the name server that \fBhost\fR
-should query instead of the server or servers listed in
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR.
-.PP
-The \fB-a\fR (all) option is equivalent to setting the
-\fB-v\fR option and asking \fBhost\fR to make
-a query of type ANY.
-.PP
-When the \fB-C\fR option is used, \fBhost\fR
-will attempt to display the SOA records for zone
-\fIname\fR from all the listed authoritative name
-servers for that zone. The list of name servers is defined by the NS
-records that are found for the zone.
-.PP
-The \fB-c\fR option instructs to make a DNS query of class
-\fIclass\fR. This can be used to lookup Hesiod or
-Chaosnet class resource records. The default class is IN (Internet).
-.PP
-Verbose output is generated by \fBhost\fR when the
-\fB-d\fR or \fB-v\fR option is used. The two
-options are equivalent. They have been provided for backwards
-compatibility. In previous versions, the \fB-d\fR option
-switched on debugging traces and \fB-v\fR enabled verbose
-output.
-.PP
-List mode is selected by the \fB-l\fR option. This makes
-\fBhost\fR perform a zone transfer for zone
-\fIname\fR. The argument is provided for
-compatibility with older implementations. This option is equivalent
-to making a query of type AXFR.
-.PP
-The \fB-n\fR
-option specifies that reverse lookups of IPv6 addresses should
-use the IP6.INT domain and "nibble" labels as defined in RFC1886.
-The default is to use IP6.ARPA and binary labels as defined in RFC2874.
-.PP
-The \fB-N\fR option sets the number of dots that have to be
-in \fIname\fR for it to be considered absolute. The
-default value is that defined using the ndots statement in
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR, or 1 if no ndots statement is
-present. Names with fewer dots are interpreted as relative names and
-will be searched for in the domains listed in the \fBsearch\fR
-or \fBdomain\fR directive in
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR.
-.PP
-The number of UDP retries for a lookup can be changed with the
-\fB-R\fR option. \fInumber\fR indicates
-how many times \fBhost\fR will repeat a query that does
-not get answered. The default number of retries is 1. If
-\fInumber\fR is negative or zero, the number of
-retries will default to 1.
-.PP
-Non-recursive queries can be made via the \fB-r\fR option.
-Setting this option clears the \fBRD\fR \(em recursion
-desired \(em bit in the query which \fBhost\fR makes.
-This should mean that the name server receiving the query will not
-attempt to resolve \fIname\fR. The
-\fB-r\fR option enables \fBhost\fR to mimic
-the behaviour of a name server by making non-recursive queries and
-expecting to receive answers to those queries that are usually
-referrals to other name servers.
-.PP
-By default \fBhost\fR uses UDP when making queries. The
-\fB-T\fR option makes it use a TCP connection when querying
-the name server. TCP will be automatically selected for queries that
-require it, such as zone transfer (AXFR) requests.
-.PP
-The \fB-t\fR option is used to select the query type.
-\fItype\fR can be any recognised query type: CNAME,
-NS, SOA, SIG, KEY, AXFR, etc. When no query type is specified,
-\fBhost\fR automatically selects an appropriate query
-type. By default it looks for A records, but if the
-\fB-C\fR option was given, queries will be made for SOA
-records, and if \fIname\fR is a dotted-decimal IPv4
-address or colon-delimited IPv6 address, \fBhost\fR will
-query for PTR records.
-.PP
-The time to wait for a reply can be controlled through the
-\fB-W\fR and \fB-w\fR options. The
-\fB-W\fR option makes \fBhost\fR wait for
-\fIwait\fR seconds. If \fIwait\fR
-is less than one, the wait interval is set to one second. When the
-\fB-w\fR option is used, \fBhost\fR will
-effectively wait forever for a reply. The time to wait for a response
-will be set to the number of seconds given by the hardware's maximum
-value for an integer quantity.
-.SH "FILES"
-.PP
-\fI/etc/resolv.conf\fR
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-\fBdig\fR(1),
-\fBnamed\fR(8).
diff --git a/raw/man1/hostid.1 b/raw/man1/hostid.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c1ab40..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/hostid.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH HOSTID "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-hostid \- print the numeric identifier for the current host
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B hostid
-
-.br
-.B hostid
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print the numeric identifier (in hexadecimal) for the current host.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B hostid
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B hostid
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info hostid
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/hostname.1 b/raw/man1/hostname.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e17e651..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/hostname.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-.TH HOSTNAME 1 "28 Jan 1996" "net-tools" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-
-.SH NAME
-hostname \- show or set the system's host name
-.br
-domainname \- show or set the system's NIS/YP domain name
-.br
-dnsdomainname \- show the system's DNS domain name
-.br
-nisdomainname \- show or set system's NIS/YP domain name
-.br
-ypdomainname \- show or set the system's NIS/YP domain name
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B hostname
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.RB [ \-a ]
-.RB [ \-\-alias ]
-.RB [ \-d ]
-.RB [ \-\-domain ]
-.RB [ \-f ]
-.RB [ \-\-fqdn ]
-.RB [ \-i ]
-.RB [ \-\-ip-address ]
-.RB [ \-\-long ]
-.RB [ \-s ]
-.RB [ \-\-short ]
-.RB [ \-y ]
-.RB [ \-\-yp ]
-.RB [ \-\-nis ]
-.RB [ \-n ]
-.RB [ \-\-node ]
-
-.PP
-.B hostname
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.RB [ \-F\ filename ]
-.RB [ \-\-file\ filename ]
-.RB [ hostname ]
-
-.PP
-.B domainname
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.RB [ \-F\ filename ]
-.RB [ \-\-file\ filename ]
-.RB [ name ]
-
-.PP
-.B nodename
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.RB [ \-F\ filename ]
-.RB [ \-\-file\ filename ]
-.RB [ name ]
-
-.PP
-.B hostname
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.RB [ \-h ]
-.RB [ \-\-help ]
-.RB [ \-V ]
-.RB [ \-\-version ]
-
-.PP
-.B dnsdomainname
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.br
-.B nisdomainname
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.br
-.B ypdomainname
-.RB [ \-v ]
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Hostname
-is the program that is used to either set or display
-the current host, domain or node name of the system. These names are used
-by many of the networking programs to identify the machine. The domain
-name is also used by NIS/YP.
-
-.SS "GET NAME"
-When called without any arguments, the program displays the current
-names:
-
-.LP
-.B hostname
-will print the name of the system as returned by the
-.BR gethostname (2)
-function.
-
-.LP
-.B "domainname, nisdomainname, ypdomainname"
-will print the name of the system as returned by the
-.BR getdomainname (2)
-function. This is also known as the YP/NIS domain name of the system.
-
-.LP
-.B dnsdomainname
-will print the domain part of the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name). The
-complete FQDN of the system is returned with
-.BR "hostname \-\-fqdn" .
-
-.SS "SET NAME"
-When called with one argument or with the
-.B \-\-file
-option, the commands set the host name, the NIS/YP domain name or
-the node name.
-
-.LP
-Note, that only the super-user can change the names.
-
-.LP
-It is not possible to set the FQDN or the DNS domain name with the
-.B dnsdomainname
-command (see
-.B "THE FQDN"
-below).
-
-.LP
-The host name is usually set once at system startup in
-.I /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
-or
-.I /etc/init.d/boot
-(normally by reading the contents of a file which contains
-the host name, e.g.
-.IR /etc/hostname ).
-
-.SS THE FQDN
-You can't change the FQDN (as returned by
-.BR "hostname \-\-fqdn" )
-or the DNS domain name (as returned by
-.BR "dnsdomainname" )
-with this command. The FQDN of the system is the name that the
-.BR resolver (3)
-returns for the host name.
-
-.LP
-Technically: The FQDN is the name
-.BR gethostbyname (2)
-returns for the host name returned by
-.BR gethostname (2).
-The DNS domain name is the part after the first dot.
-.LP
-Therefore it depends on the configuration (usually in
-.IR /etc/host.conf )
-how you can change it. Usually (if the hosts file is parsed before DNS or
-NIS) you can change it in
-.IR /etc/hosts .
-
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.I "\-a, \-\-alias"
-Display the alias name of the host (if used).
-.TP
-.I "\-d, \-\-domain"
-Display the name of the DNS domain. Don't use the command
-.B domainname
-to get the DNS domain name because it will show the NIS domain name and
-not the DNS domain name. Use
-.B dnsdomainname
-instead.
-.TP
-.I "\-F, \-\-file filename"
-Read the host name from the specified file. Comments (lines starting with
-a `#') are ignored.
-.TP
-.I "\-f, \-\-fqdn, \-\-long"
-Display the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name). A FQDN consists of a
-short host name and the DNS domain name. Unless you are using bind or NIS
-for host lookups you can change the FQDN and the DNS domain name (which is
-part of the FQDN) in the \fI/etc/hosts\fR file.
-.TP
-.I "\-h, \-\-help"
-Print a usage message and exit.
-.TP
-.I "\-i, \-\-ip-address"
-Display the IP address(es) of the host.
-.TP
-.I "\-s, \-\-short"
-Display the short host name. This is the host name cut at the first dot.
-.TP
-.I "\-V, \-\-version"
-Print version information on standard output and exit successfully.
-.TP
-.I "\-v, \-\-verbose"
-Be verbose and tell what's going on.
-.TP
-.I "\-y, \-\-yp, \-\-nis"
-Display the NIS domain name. If a parameter is given (or
-.B \-\-file name
-) then root can also set a new NIS domain.
-.SH FILES
-.B /etc/hosts
-.SH AUTHOR
-Peter Tobias, <tobias at et-inf.fho-emden.de>
-.br
-Bernd Eckenfels, <net-tools at lina.inka.de> (NIS and manpage).
-.br
-Steve Whitehouse, <SteveW at ACM.org> (DECnet support and manpage).
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/iconv.1 b/raw/man1/iconv.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f5cfd10..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/iconv.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,239 +0,0 @@
-.rn '' }`
-''' $RCSfile: iconv.1,v $$Revision: 1.1 $$Date: 2003/12/20 03:31:53 $
-'''
-''' $Log: iconv.1,v $
-''' Revision 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush
-''' Add original text to raw directory
-'''
-'''
-.de Sh
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.de Vb
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve
-.ft R
-
-.fi
-..
-'''
-'''
-''' Set up \*(-- to give an unbreakable dash;
-''' string Tr holds user defined translation string.
-''' Bell System Logo is used as a dummy character.
-'''
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ie n \{\
-.ds -- \(*W-
-.ds PI pi
-.if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-.if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-.ds L" ""
-.ds R" ""
-''' \*(M", \*(S", \*(N" and \*(T" are the equivalent of
-''' \*(L" and \*(R", except that they are used on ".xx" lines,
-''' such as .IP and .SH, which do another additional levels of
-''' double-quote interpretation
-.ds M" """
-.ds S" """
-.ds N" """""
-.ds T" """""
-.ds L' '
-.ds R' '
-.ds M' '
-.ds S' '
-.ds N' '
-.ds T' '
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-.ds -- \(em\|
-.tr \*(Tr
-.ds L" ``
-.ds R" ''
-.ds M" ``
-.ds S" ''
-.ds N" ``
-.ds T" ''
-.ds L' `
-.ds R' '
-.ds M' `
-.ds S' '
-.ds N' `
-.ds T' '
-.ds PI \(*p
-'br\}
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate
-.\" index entries out stderr for the following things:
-.\" TH Title
-.\" SH Header
-.\" Sh Subsection
-.\" Ip Item
-.\" X<> Xref (embedded
-.\" Of course, you have to process the output yourself
-.\" in some meaninful fashion.
-.if \nF \{
-.de IX
-.tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-.nr % 0
-.rr F
-.\}
-.TH ICONV 1 "March 2001" "Red Hat Linux"
-.UC
-.if n .hy 0
-.if n .na
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.de CQ \" put $1 in typewriter font
-.ft CW
-'if n "\c
-'if t \\&\\$1\c
-'if n \\&\\$1\c
-'if n \&"
-\\&\\$2 \\$3 \\$4 \\$5 \\$6 \\$7
-'.ft R
-..
-.\" @(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2
-. \" AM - accent mark definitions
-.bd B 3
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds ? ?
-. ds ! !
-. ds /
-. ds q
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ? \s-2c\h'-\w'c'u*7/10'\u\h'\*(#H'\zi\d\s+2\h'\w'c'u*8/10'
-. ds ! \s-2\(or\s+2\h'-\w'\(or'u'\v'-.8m'.\v'.8m'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds q o\h'-\w'o'u*8/10'\s-4\v'.4m'\z\(*i\v'-.4m'\s+4\h'\w'o'u*8/10'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds v \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\v'-\*(#V'\*(#[\s-4v\s0\v'\*(#V'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds _ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H+(\*(#F*2/3))'\v'-.4m'\z\(hy\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds . \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)'\v'\*(#V*4/10'\z.\v'-\*(#V*4/10'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds 3 \*(#[\v'.2m'\s-2\&3\s0\v'-.2m'\*(#]
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-.ds oe o\h'-(\w'o'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Oe O\h'-(\w'O'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds v \h'-1'\o'\(aa\(ga'
-. ds _ \h'-1'^
-. ds . \h'-1'.
-. ds 3 3
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-. ds oe oe
-. ds Oe OE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.SH "NAME"
-iconv \- Convert encoding of given files from one encoding to another
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-iconv \fB\-f\fR \fIencoding\fR \fB\-t\fR \fIencoding\fR \fIinputfile\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-The \fBiconv\fR program converts the encoding of characters in
-\fIinputfile\fR from one coded character set to another. The result is
-written to standard output unless otherwise specified by the
-\fB--output\fR option.
-.PP
-\fB--from-code\fR, \fB\-f\fR \fIencoding\fR
-.PP
-Convert characters from \fIencoding\fR
-.PP
-\fB--to-code\fR, \fB\-t\fR \fIencoding\fR
-.PP
-Convert characters to \fIencoding\fR
-.PP
-\fB--list\fR
-.PP
-List known coded character sets
-.PP
-\fB--output\fR, \fB\-o\fR \fIfile\fR
-.PP
-Specify output file (instead of stdout)
-.PP
-\fB--verbose\fR
-.PP
-Print progress information.
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-iconv is written by Ulrich Drepper as part of the GNU C Library.
-.PP
-This man page is written by Joel Klecker <espy at debian.org>,
-for the Debian GNU/Linux system.
-
-.rn }` ''
-.IX Title "ICONV 1"
-.IX Name "iconv - Convert encoding of given files from one encoding to another"
-
-.IX Header "NAME"
-
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.IX Header "AUTHOR"
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/id.1 b/raw/man1/id.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c9f3b32..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/id.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH ID "1" "October 2003" "id (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-id \- print real and effective UIDs and GIDs
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B id
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIUSERNAME\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print information for USERNAME, or the current user.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR
-ignore, for compatibility with other versions
-.TP
-\fB\-g\fR, \fB\-\-group\fR
-print only the effective group ID
-.TP
-\fB\-G\fR, \fB\-\-groups\fR
-print all group IDs
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-name\fR
-print a name instead of a number, for \fB\-ugG\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-real\fR
-print the real ID instead of the effective ID, with \fB\-ugG\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-user\fR
-print only the effective user ID
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Without any OPTION, print some useful set of identified information.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Arnold Robbins and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B id
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B id
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info id
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/info.1 b/raw/man1/info.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 085fed3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/info.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH INFO "1" "June 2003" "info 4.6" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-info \- read Info documents
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B info
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIMENU-ITEM\fR...]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Read documentation in Info format.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-\fB\-\-apropos\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-look up STRING in all indices of all manuals.
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-directory\fR=\fIDIR\fR
-add DIR to INFOPATH.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-dribble\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
-remember user keystrokes in FILENAME.
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-file\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
-specify Info file to visit.
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-index\-search\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-go to node pointed by index entry STRING.
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-node\fR=\fINODENAME\fR
-specify nodes in first visited Info file.
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
-output selected nodes to FILENAME.
-.TP
-\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-raw\-escapes\fR
-don't remove ANSI escapes from man pages.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-restore\fR=\fIFILENAME\fR
-read initial keystrokes from FILENAME.
-.TP
-\fB\-O\fR, \fB\-\-show\-options\fR, \fB\-\-usage\fR
-go to command-line options node.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-subnodes\fR
-recursively output menu items.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-vi\-keys\fR
-use vi-like and less-like key bindings.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-display version information and exit.
-.PP
-The first non-option argument, if present, is the menu entry to start from;
-it is searched for in all `dir' files along INFOPATH.
-If it is not present, info merges all `dir' files and shows the result.
-Any remaining arguments are treated as the names of menu
-items relative to the initial node visited.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.TP
-info
-show top-level dir menu
-.TP
-info emacs
-start at emacs node from top-level dir
-.TP
-info emacs buffers
-start at buffers node within emacs manual
-.TP
-info \fB\-\-show\-options\fR emacs
-start at node with emacs' command line options
-.TP
-info \fB\-f\fR ./foo.info
-show file ./foo.info, not searching dir
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Email bug reports to bug-texinfo at gnu.org,
-general questions and discussion to help-texinfo at gnu.org.
-Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
-For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
diff --git a/raw/man1/initdb.1 b/raw/man1/initdb.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 90c140e..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/initdb.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "INITDB" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-initdb \- create a new PostgreSQL database cluster
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBinitdb\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fR\fR \fB--pgdata \fR\fR | \fR\fB-D \fR\fIdirectory\fR\fR\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBinitdb\fR creates a new
-PostgreSQL database cluster. A database
-cluster is a collection of databases that are managed by a single
-server instance.
-.PP
-Creating a database cluster consists of creating the directories in which
-the database data will live, generating the shared catalog tables
-(tables that belong to the whole cluster rather than to any particular
-database), and creating the template1
-database. When you later create a new database, everything in the
-template1 database is copied.
-It contains catalog tables filled in for things like the
-built-in types.
-.PP
-\fBinitdb\fR initializes the database cluster's
-default locale and character set encoding. Some locale categories
-are fixed for the lifetime of the cluster, so it is important to
-make the right choice when running \fBinitdb\fR.
-Other locale categories can be changed later when the server is
-started. \fBinitdb\fR will write those locale
-settings into the \fIpostgresql.conf\fR
-configuration file so they are the default, but they can be changed
-by editing that file. To set the locale that
-\fBinitdb\fR uses, see the description of the
-\fB--locale\fR option. The character set encoding can
-be set separately for each database as it is created.
-\fBinitdb\fR determines the encoding for the
-template1 database, which will serve as the
-default for all other databases. To alter the default encoding use
-the \fB--encoding\fR option.
-.PP
-\fBinitdb\fR must be run as the user that will own the
-server process, because the server needs to have access to the
-files and directories that \fBinitdb\fR creates.
-Since the server may not be run as root, you must not run
-\fBinitdb\fR as root either. (It will in fact refuse
-to do so.)
-.PP
-Although \fBinitdb\fR will attempt to create the
-specified data directory, often it won't have permission to do so,
-since the parent of the desired data directory is often a root-owned
-directory. To set up an arrangement like this, create an empty data
-directory as root, then use \fBchown\fR to hand over
-ownership of that directory to the database user account, then
-\fBsu\fR to become the database user, and
-finally run \fBinitdb\fR as the database user.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB-D \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--pgdata=\fIdirectory\fB\fR
-This option specifies the directory where the database cluster
-should be stored. This is the only information required by
-\fBinitdb\fR, but you can avoid writing it by
-setting the \fBPGDATA\fR environment variable, which
-can be convenient since the database server
-(\fBpostmaster\fR) can find the database
-directory later by the same variable.
-.TP
-\fB-E \fIencoding\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--encoding=\fIencoding\fB\fR
-Selects the encoding of the template database. This will also
-be the default encoding of any database you create later, unless you
-override it there. The default is SQL_ASCII.
-.TP
-\fB--locale=\fIlocale\fB\fR
-Sets the default locale for the database cluster. If this
-option is not specified, the locale is inherited from the
-environment that \fBinitdb\fR runs in.
-.TP
-\fB--lc-collate=\fIlocale\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--lc-ctype=\fIlocale\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--lc-messages=\fIlocale\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--lc-monetary=\fIlocale\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--lc-numeric=\fIlocale\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--lc-time=\fIlocale\fB\fR
-Like \fB--locale\fR, but only sets the locale in
-the specified category.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username=\fIusername\fB\fR
-Selects the user name of the database superuser. This defaults
-to the name of the effective user running
-\fBinitdb\fR. It is really not important what the
-superuser's name is, but one might choose to keep the
-customary name \fBpostgres\fR, even if the operating
-system user's name is different.
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--pwprompt\fR
-Makes \fBinitdb\fR prompt for a password
-to give the database superuser. If you don't plan on using password
-authentication, this is not important. Otherwise you won't be
-able to use password authentication until you have a password
-set up.
-.PP
-.PP
-Other, less commonly used, parameters are also available:
-.TP
-\fB-d\fR
-.TP
-\fB--debug\fR
-Print debugging output from the bootstrap backend and a few other
-messages of lesser interest for the general public.
-The bootstrap backend is the program \fBinitdb\fR
-uses to create the catalog tables. This option generates a tremendous
-amount of extremely boring output.
-.TP
-\fB-L \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-Specifies where \fBinitdb\fR should find
-its input files to initialize the database cluster. This is
-normally not necessary. You will be told if you need to
-specify their location explicitly.
-.TP
-\fB-n\fR
-.TP
-\fB--noclean\fR
-By default, when \fBinitdb\fR
-determines that an error prevented it from completely creating the database
-cluster, it removes any files it may have created before discovering
-that it can't finish the job. This option inhibits tidying-up and is
-thus useful for debugging.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATA\fR
-Specifies the directory where the database cluster is to be
-stored; may be overridden using the \fB-D\fR option.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBpostgres\fR(1), \fBpostmaster\fR(1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/initex.1 b/raw/man1/initex.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6cf832..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/initex.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/tex.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/initlocation.1 b/raw/man1/initlocation.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a3b3350..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/initlocation.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "INITLOCATION" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-initlocation \- create a secondary PostgreSQL database storage area
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBinitlocation\fR \fB\fIdirectory\fB\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBinitlocation\fR
-creates a new PostgreSQL secondary database storage area.
-See the discussion under CREATE DATABASE [\fBcreate_database\fR(7)]
-about how to manage and use secondary storage areas. If the argument does not contain
-a slash and is not valid as a path, it is assumed to be an environment variable,
-which is referenced. See the examples at the end.
-.PP
-In order to use this command you must be logged in (using \fBsu\fR, for example)
-as the database superuser.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To create a database in an alternate location, using an
-environment variable:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBexport PGDATA2=/opt/postgres/data\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-Stop and start \fBpostmaster\fR so it sees the \fBPGDATA2\fR
-environment variable. The system must be configured so the
-\fBpostmaster\fR sees \fBPGDATA2\fR every time it starts. Finally:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBinitlocation PGDATA2\fR
-$ \fBcreatedb -D PGDATA2 testdb\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Alternatively, if you allow absolute paths you could write:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBinitlocation /opt/postgres/data\fR
-$ \fBcreatedb -D /opt/postgres/data/testdb testdb\fR
-.sp
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man1/install-info.1 b/raw/man1/install-info.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 312e13b..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/install-info.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH INSTALL-INFO "1" "June 2003" "install-info 4.6" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-install-info \- update info/dir entries
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B install-info
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIINFO-FILE \fR[\fIDIR-FILE\fR]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Install or delete dir entries from INFO-FILE in the Info directory file
-DIR-FILE.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-\fB\-\-delete\fR
-delete existing entries for INFO-FILE from DIR-FILE;
-don't insert any new entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-dir\-file\fR=\fINAME\fR
-specify file name of Info directory file.
-This is equivalent to using the DIR-FILE argument.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-entry\fR=\fITEXT\fR
-insert TEXT as an Info directory entry.
-TEXT should have the form of an Info menu item line
-plus zero or more extra lines starting with whitespace.
-If you specify more than one entry, they are all added.
-If you don't specify any entries, they are determined
-from information in the Info file itself.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-info\-file\fR=\fIFILE\fR
-specify Info file to install in the directory.
-This is equivalent to using the INFO-FILE argument.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-info\-dir\fR=\fIDIR\fR
-same as \fB\-\-dir\-file\fR=\fIDIR\fR/dir.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-item\fR=\fITEXT\fR
-same as \fB\-\-entry\fR TEXT.
-An Info directory entry is actually a menu item.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-quiet\fR
-suppress warnings.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-remove\fR
-same as \fB\-\-delete\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-section\fR=\fISEC\fR
-put this file's entries in section SEC of the directory.
-If you specify more than one section, all the entries
-are added in each of the sections.
-If you don't specify any sections, they are determined
-from information in the Info file itself.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-display version information and exit.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Email bug reports to bug-texinfo at gnu.org,
-general questions and discussion to help-texinfo at gnu.org.
-Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
-For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B install-info
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B install-info
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info install-info
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/install.1 b/raw/man1/install.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3288fec..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/install.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH INSTALL "1" "October 2003" "install (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-ginstall \- copy files and set attributes
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B install
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fISOURCE DEST (1st format)\fR
-.br
-.B install
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fISOURCE\fR... \fIDIRECTORY (2nd format)\fR
-.br
-.B install
-\fI-d \fR[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIDIRECTORY\fR... \fI(3rd format)\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-In the first two formats, copy SOURCE to DEST or multiple SOURCE(s) to
-the existing DIRECTORY, while setting permission modes and owner/group.
-In the third format, create all components of the given DIRECTORY(ies).
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.HP
-\fB\-\-backup\fR[=\fICONTROL\fR] make a backup of each existing destination file
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR
-like \fB\-\-backup\fR but does not accept an argument
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR
-(ignored)
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-directory\fR
-treat all arguments as directory names; create all
-components of the specified directories
-.TP
-\fB\-D\fR
-create all leading components of DEST except the last,
-then copy SOURCE to DEST; useful in the 1st format
-.TP
-\fB\-g\fR, \fB\-\-group\fR=\fIGROUP\fR
-set group ownership, instead of process' current group
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-mode\fR=\fIMODE\fR
-set permission mode (as in chmod), instead of rwxr-xr-x
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-owner\fR=\fIOWNER\fR
-set ownership (super-user only)
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-preserve\-timestamps\fR
-apply access/modification times of SOURCE files
-to corresponding destination files
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-strip\fR
-strip symbol tables, only for 1st and 2nd formats
-.HP
-\fB\-S\fR, \fB\-\-suffix\fR=\fISUFFIX\fR override the usual backup suffix
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-print the name of each directory as it is created
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-The backup suffix is `~', unless set with \fB\-\-suffix\fR or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.
-The version control method may be selected via the \fB\-\-backup\fR option or through
-the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values:
-.TP
-none, off
-never make backups (even if \fB\-\-backup\fR is given)
-.TP
-numbered, t
-make numbered backups
-.TP
-existing, nil
-numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise
-.TP
-simple, never
-always make simple backups
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B install
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B install
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info install
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/intro.1 b/raw/man1/intro.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 31627c5..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/intro.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 2002 Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.TH INTRO 1 2002-08-06 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-intro \- Introduction to user commands
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Linux is a flavour of Unix, and as a first approximation
-all user commands under Unix work precisely the same under
-Linux (and FreeBSD and lots of other Unix-like systems).
-.LP
-Under Linux there are GUIs (graphical user interfaces), where you
-can point and click and drag, and hopefully get work done without
-first reading lots of documentation. The traditional Unix environment
-is a CLI (command line interface), where you type commands to
-tell the computer what to do. That is faster and more powerful,
-but requires finding out what the commands are.
-Below a bare minimum, to get started.
-.SS "Login"
-In order to start working, you probably first have to login,
-that is, give your username and password. See also
-.BR login (1).
-The program
-.I login
-now starts a
-.I shell
-(command interpreter) for you.
-In case of a graphical login, you get a screen with menus or icons
-and a mouse click will start a shell in a window. See also
-.BR xterm (1).
-.SS "The shell"
-One types commands to the
-.IR shell ,
-the command interpreter. It is not built-in, but is just a program
-and you can change your shell. Everybody has her own favourite one.
-The standard one is called
-.IR sh .
-See also
-.BR ash (1),
-.BR bash (1),
-.BR csh (1),
-.BR zsh (1),
-.BR chsh (1).
-.LP
-A session might go like
-
-.RS
-.nf
-.BI "knuth login: " aeb
-.BI "Password: " ********
-.BI "% " date
-Tue Aug 6 23:50:44 CEST 2002
-.BI "% " cal
- August 2002
-Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
- 1 2 3
- 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-11 12 13 14 15 16 17
-18 19 20 21 22 23 24
-25 26 27 28 29 30 31
-
-.BI "% " ls
-bin tel
-.BI "% " "ls -l"
-total 2
-drwxrwxr-x 2 aeb 1024 Aug 6 23:51 bin
--rw-rw-r-- 1 aeb 37 Aug 6 23:52 tel
-.BI "% " "cat tel"
-maja 0501-1136285
-peter 0136-7399214
-.BI "% " "cp tel tel2"
-.BI "% " "ls -l"
-total 3
-drwxr-xr-x 2 aeb 1024 Aug 6 23:51 bin
--rw-r--r-- 1 aeb 37 Aug 6 23:52 tel
--rw-r--r-- 1 aeb 37 Aug 6 23:53 tel2
-.BI "% " "mv tel tel1"
-.BI "% " "ls -l"
-total 3
-drwxr-xr-x 2 aeb 1024 Aug 6 23:51 bin
--rw-r--r-- 1 aeb 37 Aug 6 23:52 tel1
--rw-r--r-- 1 aeb 37 Aug 6 23:53 tel2
-.BI "% " "diff tel1 tel2"
-.BI "% " "rm tel1"
-.BI "% " "grep maja tel2"
-maja 0501-1136285
-.BI "% "
-.fi
-.RE
-and here typing Control-D ended the session.
-The
-.B "% "
-here was the command prompt - it is the shell's way of indicating
-that it is ready for the next command. The prompt can be customized
-in lots of ways, and one might include stuff like user name,
-machine name, current directory, time, etc.
-An assignment PS1="What next, master? "
-would change the prompt as indicated.
-.LP
-We see that there are commands
-.I date
-(that gives date and time), and
-.I cal
-(that gives a calendar).
-.LP
-The command
-.I ls
-lists the contents of the current directory - it tells you what
-files you have. With a \-l option it gives a long listing,
-that includes the owner and size and date of the file, and the
-permissions people have for reading and/or changing the file.
-For example, the file "tel" here is 37 bytes long, owned by aeb
-and the owner can read and write it, others can only read it.
-Owner and permissions can be changed by the commands
-.I chown
-and
-.IR chmod .
-.LP
-The command
-.I cat
-will show the contents of a file.
-(The name is from "concatenate and print": all files given as
-parameters are concatenated and sent to "standard output", here
-the terminal screen.)
-.LP
-The command
-.I cp
-(from "copy") will copy a file.
-On the other hand, the command
-.I mv
-(from "move") only renames it.
-.LP
-The command
-.I diff
-lists the differences between two files.
-Here there was no output because there were no differences.
-.LP
-The command
-.I rm
-(from "remove") deletes the file, and be careful! it is gone.
-No wastepaper basket or anything. Deleted means lost.
-.LP
-The command
-.I grep
-(from "g/re/p") finds occurrences of a string in one or more files.
-Here it finds Maja's telephone number.
-.SS "Path names and the current directory"
-Files live in a large tree, the file hierarchy.
-Each has a
-.I "path name"
-describing the path from the root of the tree (which is called /)
-to the file. For example, such a full path name might be /home/aeb/tel.
-Always using full path names would be inconvenient, and the name
-of a file in the current directory may be abbreviated by only giving
-the last component. That is why "/home/aeb/tel" can be abbreviated
-to "tel" when the current directory is "/home/aeb".
-.LP
-The command
-.I pwd
-prints the current directory.
-.LP
-The command
-.I cd
-changes the current directory.
-Try "cd /" and "pwd" and "cd" and "pwd".
-.SS "Directories"
-The command
-.I mkdir
-makes a new directory.
-.LP
-The command
-.I rmdir
-removes a directory if it is empty, and complains otherwise.
-.LP
-The command
-.I find
-(with a rather baroque syntax) will find files with given name
-or other properties. For example, "find . -name tel" would find
-the file "tel" starting in the present directory (which is called ".").
-And "find / -name tel" would do the same, but starting at the root
-of the tree. Large searches on a multi-GB disk will be time-consuming,
-and it may be better to use
-.BR locate (1).
-.SS "Disks and Filesystems"
-The command
-.I mount
-will attach the filesystem found on some disk (or floppy, or CDROM or so)
-to the big filesystem hierarchy. And
-.I umount
-detaches it again.
-The command
-.I df
-will tell you how much of your disk is still free.
-.SS "Processes"
-On a Unix system many user and system processes run simultaneously.
-The one you are talking to runs in the
-.IR foreground ,
-the others in the
-.IR background .
-The command
-.I ps
-will show you which processes are active and what numbers these
-processes have.
-The command
-.I kill
-allows you to get rid of them. Without option this is a friendly
-request: please go away. And "kill -9" followed by the number
-of the process is an immediate kill.
-Foreground processes can often be killed by typing Control-C.
-.SS "Getting information"
-There are thousands of commands, each with many options.
-Traditionally commands are documented on
-.IR "man pages" ,
-(like this one), so that the command "man kill" will document
-the use of the command "kill" (and "man man" document the command "man").
-The program
-.I man
-sends the text through some
-.IR pager ,
-usually
-.IR less .
-Hit the space bar to get the next page, hit q to quit.
-.LP
-In documentation it is custumary to refer to man pages
-by giving the name and section number, as in
-.BR man (1).
-Man pages are terse, and allow you to find quickly some forgotten
-detail. For newcomers an introductory text with more examples
-and explanations is useful.
-.LP
-A lot of GNU/FSF software is provided with info files. Type "info info"
-for an introduction on the use of the program "info".
-.LP
-Special topics are often treated in HOWTOs. Look in
-.I /usr/share/doc/howto/en
-and use a browser if you find HTML files there.
-.\"
-.\" Actual examples? Separate section for each of cat, cp, ...?
-.\" gzip, bzip2, tar, rpm
diff --git a/raw/man1/ipcclean.1 b/raw/man1/ipcclean.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 88e1828..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ipcclean.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "IPCCLEAN" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-ipcclean \- remove shared memory and semaphores from an aborted PostgreSQL server
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBipcclean\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBipcclean\fR removes all shared memory segments and
-semaphore sets owned by the current user. It is intended to be
-used for cleaning up after a crashed
-PostgreSQL server (\fBpostmaster\fR(1)). Note that immediately restarting the
-server will also clean up shared memory and semaphores, so this
-command is of little real utility.
-.PP
-Only the database administrator should execute this program as it
-can cause bizarre behavior (i.e., crashes) if run during multiuser
-execution. If this command is executed while a server is running,
-the shared memory and semaphores allocated by that server will be
-deleted, which would have rather severe consequences for that
-server.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-This script is a hack, but in the many years since it was written,
-no one has come up with an equally effective and portable solution.
-Since the \fBpostmaster\fR can now clean up by
-itself, it is unlikely that \fBipcclean\fR will be
-improved upon in the future.
-.PP
-The script makes assumption about the format of output of the
-\fBipcs\fR
-utility which may not be true across different operating systems.
-Therefore, it may not work on your particular OS.
diff --git a/raw/man1/jobs.1 b/raw/man1/jobs.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/jobs.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/kbd_mode.1 b/raw/man1/kbd_mode.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ee3316a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/kbd_mode.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)kbd_mode.1 1.0 940406 aeb
-.TH KBD_MODE 1 "6 Apr 1994"
-.SH NAME
-kbd_mode \- report or set the keyboard mode
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B kbd_mode
-[
-.I -a | -u | -k | -s
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "kbd_mode command" "" "\fLkbd_mode\fR command"
-.LP
-Without argument,
-.B kbd_mode
-prints the current keyboard mode (RAW, MEDIUMRAW or XLATE).
-With argument, it sets the keyboard mode as indicated:
-.LP
-\-s: scancode mode (RAW),
-.LP
-\-k: keycode mode (MEDIUMRAW),
-.LP
-\-a: ASCII mode (XLATE),
-.LP
-\-u: UTF-8 mode (UNICODE).
-.LP
-Of course the "\-a" is only traditional, and the code used can be any
-8-bit character set. With "\-u" a 16-bit character set is expected,
-and these chars are transmitted to the kernel as 1, 2, or 3 bytes
-(following the UTF-8 coding).
-In these latter two modes the key mapping defined by loadkeys(1)
-is used.
-
-Warning: changing the keyboard mode, other than between ASCII and
-Unicode, will probably make your keyboard unusable.
-This command is only meant for use (say via remote login)
-when some program left your keyboard in the wrong state.
-Note that in some obsolete versions of this program the "\-u"
-option was a synonym for "\-s".
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/kill.1 b/raw/man1/kill.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 78fd8bb..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/kill.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1994 Salvatore Valente (svalente at mit.edu)
-.\" Copyright 1992 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.TH KILL 1 "14 October 1994" "Linux Utilities" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-kill \- terminate a process
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "kill [ \-s " signal " | \-p ] [ \-a ] [ \-\- ] " "pid ..."
-.br
-.BI "kill -l [ " signal " ]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The command
-.B kill
-sends the specified signal to the specified process or process group.
-If no signal is specified, the TERM signal is sent. The TERM signal
-will kill processes which do not catch this signal. For other processes,
-it may be necessary to use the KILL (9) signal, since this signal cannot
-be caught.
-.PP
-Most modern shells have a builtin kill function, with a usage rather similar
-to that of the command described here. The `-a' and `-p' options,
-and the possibility to specify pids by command name is a local extension.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.IR pid ...
-Specify the list of processes that
-.B kill
-should signal. Each
-.I pid
-can be one of five things:
-
-.RS
-.TP
-.I n
-where
-.I n
-is larger than 0. The process with pid
-.I n
-will be signaled.
-.TP
-.B 0
-All processes in the current process group are signaled.
-.TP
-.B -1
-All processes with pid larger than 1 will be signaled.
-.TP
-.BI - n
-where
-.I n
-is larger than 1.
-All processes in process group
-.I n
-are signaled. When an argument of the form `-n' is given,
-and it is meant to denote a process group,
-either the signal must be specified first, or the argument must be preceded
-by a `--' option, otherwise it will be taken as the signal to send.
-.TP
-.I commandname
-All processes invoked using that name will be signaled.
-.RE
-.TP
-.BI \-s " signal"
-Specify the signal to send.
-The signal may be given as a signal name or number.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Print a list of signal names. These are found in
-.I /usr/include/linux/signal.h
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Do not restrict the commandname-to-pid conversion to processes
-with the same uid as the present process.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Specify that
-.B kill
-should only print the process id (pid)
-of the named processes, and not send any signals.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR bash (1),
-.BR tcsh (1),
-.BR kill (2),
-.BR sigvec (2),
-.BR signal (7)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Taken from BSD 4.4. The ability to translate process names to process
-ids was added by Salvatore Valente <svalente at mit.edu>.
diff --git a/raw/man1/killall.1 b/raw/man1/killall.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b3e0671..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/killall.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-.TH KILLALL 1 "March 25, 2001" "Linux" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-killall \- kill processes by name
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ad l
-.B killall
-.RB [ \-d , \-\-sid ]
-.RB [ \-c , \-\-context ]
-.RB [ \-e , --exact ]
-.RB [ \-g , \-\-process-group ]
-.RB [ \-i , \-\-interactive ]
-.RB [ \-q , \-\-quiet ]
-.RB [ \-s , \-\-signal
-.IR signal ]
-.RB [ \-v , \-\-verbose ]
-.RB [ \-w , \-\-wait ]
-.RB [ \-V, \-\-version ]
-.RB [ \-\- ]
-.I name ...
-.br
-.B killall
-.RB \-l
-.br
-.B killall
-.RB \-V, \-\-version
-.ad b
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B killall
-sends a signal to all processes running any of the specified commands. If no
-signal name is specified, SIGTERM is sent.
-.PP
-Signals can be specified either by name (e.g. \fB\-HUP\fP) or by number
-(e.g. \fB\-1\fP).
-.PP
-If the command name contains a slash (\fB/\fP), processes executing that
-particular file will be selected for killing, independent of their name.
-.PP
-\fBkillall\fP returns a zero return code if at least one process has been
-killed for each ilisted command. \fBkillall\fP returns zero otherwise.
-.PP
-A \fBkillall\fP process never kills itself (but may kill other \fBkillall\fP
-processes).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP "\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-exact\fP"
-Require an exact match for very long names. If a command name is longer
-than 15 characters, the full name may be unavailable (i.e. it is swapped
-out). In this case, \fBkillall\fP will kill everything that matches within
-the first 15 characters. With \fB\-e\fP, such entries are skipped.
-\fBkillall\fP prints a message for each skipped entry
-if \fB\-v\fP is specified in addition to \fB\-e\fP,
-.IP "\fB\-g\fP, \fB\-\-process-group\fP"
-Kill the process group to which the process belongs. The kill signal is only
-sent once per group, even if multiple processes belonging to the same process
-group were found.
-.IP "\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-interactive\fP"
-Interactively ask for confirmation before killing.
-.IP "\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP"
-List all known signal names.
-.IP "\fB\-q\fP, \fB\-\-quiet\fP"
-Do not complain if no processes were killed.
-.IP "\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP"
-Report if the signal was successfully sent.
-.IP "\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP"
-Display version information.
-.IP "\fB\-w\fP, \fB\-\-wait\fP"
-Wait for all killed processes to die. \fBkillall\fP checks once per second if
-any of the killed processes still exist and only returns if none are left.
-Note that \fBkillall\fP may wait forever if the signal was ignored, had no
-effect, or if the process stays in zombie state.
-.IP \fB\-d\fP
-(Flask only) Specify SID: kill only processes with given SID. Mutually exclusive
-with \fB-c\fP argument. Must precede other arguments on command line.
-.IP \fB\-c\fP
-(Flask only) Specify security context: kill only processes with given security context.
-Mutually exclusive with \fB-d\fP. Must precede other arguments on the command line.
-.SH FILES
-.nf
-/proc location of the proc file system
-.fi
-.SH "KNOWN BUGS"
-Killing by file only works for executables that are kept open during
-execution, i.e. impure executables can't be killed this way.
-.PP
-Be warned that typing \fBkillall\fP \fIname\fP may not have the desired
-effect on non-Linux systems, especially when done by a privileged
-user.
-.PP
-\fBkillall \-w\fP doesn't detect if a process disappears and is replaced by
-a new process with the same PID between scans.
-.SH AUTHORS
-Werner Almesberger <Werner.Almesberger at epfl.ch> wrote the original version
-of psmisc. Since version 20 Craig Small <csmall at small.dropbear.id.au>
-can be blamed.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR kill (1), fuser (1), pgrep (1), pidof (1), ps (1), kill (2)
-.\"{{{}}}
diff --git a/raw/man1/last.1 b/raw/man1/last.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a403107..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/last.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-.\"{{{}}}
-.\"{{{ Title
-.TH LAST,LASTB 1 "Jul 29, 1999" "" "Linux System Administrator's Manual"
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Name
-.SH NAME
-last, lastb \- show listing of last logged in users
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Synopsis
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B last
-.RB [ \-R ]
-.RB [ \-\fInum\fP ]
-.RB "[ \-\fBn\fP \fInum\fP ]"
-.RB [ \-adiox ]
-.RB "[ \-\fBf\fP \fIfile\fP ]"
-.RB "[ \-\fBt\fP \fIYYYYMMDDHHMMSS\fP ]"
-.RI [ name... ]
-.RI [ tty... ]
-.br
-.B lastb
-.RB [ \-R ]
-.RB [ \-\fInum\fP ]
-.RB "[ \-\fBn\fP \fInum\fP ]"
-.RB "[ \-\fBf\fP \fIfile\fP ]"
-.RB "[ \-\fBt\fP \fIYYYYMMDDHHMMSS\fP ]"
-.RB [ \-adiox ]
-.RI [ name... ]
-.RI [ tty... ]
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Description
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Last
-searches back through the file \fB/var/log/wtmp\fP (or the file
-designated by the \fB\-f\fP flag) and displays a list of all
-users logged in (and out) since that file was created. Names of users
-and tty's can be given, in which case \fBlast\fP will show only those entries
-matching the arguments. Names of ttys can be abbreviated, thus \fBlast
-0\fP is the same as \fBlast tty0\fP.
-.PP
-When \fBlast\fP catches a \s-2SIGINT\s0 signal (generated by the interrupt key,
-usually control-C) or a \s-2SIGQUIT\s0 signal (generated by the quit key,
-usually control-\e), \fBlast\fP will show how far it has searched through the
-file; in the case of the \s-2SIGINT\s0 signal \fBlast\fP will then terminate.
-.PP
-The pseudo user \fBreboot\fP logs in each time the system is rebooted.
-Thus \fBlast reboot\fP will show a log of all reboots since the log file
-was created.
-.PP
-\fBLastb\fP is the same as \fBlast\fP, except that by default it shows a log
-of the file \fB/var/log/btmp\fP, which contains all the bad login attempts.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Options
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP \fB\-\fP\fInum\fP
-This is a count telling \fBlast\fP how many lines to show.
-.IP "\fB\-n\fP \fInum\fP"
-The same.
-.IP "\fB\-t\fP \fIYYYYMMDDHHMMSS\fP"
-Display the state of logins as of the specified time. This is
-useful, e.g., to determine easily who was logged in at a particular
-time -- specify that time with \fB\-t\fP and look for "still logged
-in".
-.IP \fB\-R\fP
-Suppresses the display of the hostname field.
-.IP \fB\-a\fP
-Display the hostname in the last column. Useful in combination
-with the next flag.
-.IP \fB\-d\fP
-For non-local logins, Linux stores not only the host name of the remote
-host but its IP number as well. This option translates the IP number
-back into a hostname.
-.IP \fB\-i\fP
-This option is like \fB-d\fP in that it displays the IP number of the remote
-host, but it displays the IP number in numbers-and-dots notation.
-.IP \fB\-o\fP
-Read an old-type wtmp file (written by linux-libc5 applications).
-.IP \fB\-x\fP
-Display the system shutdown entries and run level changes.
-.\"}}}
-.SH NOTES
-The files \fIwtmp\fP and \fIbtmp\fP might not be found. The system only
-logs information in these files if they are present. This is a local
-configuration issue. If you want the files to be used, they can be
-created with a simple \fBtouch\fP(1) command (for example,
-\fItouch /var/log/wtmp\fP).
-.\"{{{ Files
-.SH FILES
-/var/log/wtmp
-.br
-/var/log/btmp
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Author
-.SH AUTHOR
-Miquel van Smoorenburg, miquels at cistron.nl
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ See also
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR shutdown (8),
-.BR login (1),
-.BR init (8)
-.\"}}}
diff --git a/raw/man1/ld.1 b/raw/man1/ld.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 909fd6e..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ld.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1912 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "LD 1"
-.TH LD 1 "2003-09-30" "binutils-2.14.90.0.6" "GNU Development Tools"
-.SH "NAME"
-ld \- Using LD, the GNU linker
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-ld [\fBoptions\fR] \fIobjfile\fR ...
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-\&\fBld\fR combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
-their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
-compiling a program is to run \fBld\fR.
-.PP
-\&\fBld\fR accepts Linker Command Language files written in
-a superset of \s-1AT&T\s0's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
-to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
-.PP
-This man page does not describe the command language; see the
-\&\fBld\fR entry in \f(CW\*(C`info\*(C'\fR, or the manual
-ld: the \s-1GNU\s0 linker, for full details on the command language and
-on other aspects of the \s-1GNU\s0 linker.
-.PP
-This version of \fBld\fR uses the general purpose \s-1BFD\s0 libraries
-to operate on object files. This allows \fBld\fR to read, combine, and
-write object files in many different formats\-\-\-for example, \s-1COFF\s0 or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`a.out\*(C'\fR. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
-available kind of object file.
-.PP
-Aside from its flexibility, the \s-1GNU\s0 linker is more helpful than other
-linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
-execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
-\&\fBld\fR continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
-(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
-.PP
-The \s-1GNU\s0 linker \fBld\fR is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
-and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
-you have many choices to control its behavior.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.IX Header "OPTIONS"
-The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
-practice few of them are used in any particular context.
-For instance, a frequent use of \fBld\fR is to link standard Unix
-object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
-link a file \f(CW\*(C`hello.o\*(C'\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ld -o <output> /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
-.Ve
-.PP
-This tells \fBld\fR to produce a file called \fIoutput\fR as the
-result of linking the file \f(CW\*(C`/lib/crt0.o\*(C'\fR with \f(CW\*(C`hello.o\*(C'\fR and
-the library \f(CW\*(C`libc.a\*(C'\fR, which will come from the standard search
-directories. (See the discussion of the \fB\-l\fR option below.)
-.PP
-Some of the command-line options to \fBld\fR may be specified at any
-point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
-as \fB\-l\fR or \fB\-T\fR, cause the file to be read at the point at
-which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
-files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
-different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
-occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
-option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
-noted in the descriptions below.
-.PP
-Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
-together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
-options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
-an option and its argument.
-.PP
-Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
-specify other forms of binary input files using \fB\-l\fR, \fB\-R\fR,
-and the script command language. If \fIno\fR binary input files at all
-are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
-message \fBNo input files\fR.
-.PP
-If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
-assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
-augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
-linker script or the one specified by using \fB\-T\fR). This feature
-permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
-or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
-\&\f(CW\*(C`INPUT\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`GROUP\*(C'\fR to load other objects. Note that
-specifying a script in this way merely augments the main linker script;
-use the \fB\-T\fR option to replace the default linker script entirely.
-.PP
-For options whose names are a single letter,
-option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
-whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
-option that requires them.
-.PP
-For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
-precede the option name; for example, \fB\-trace\-symbol\fR and
-\&\fB\-\-trace\-symbol\fR are equivalent. Note\-\-\-there is one exception to
-this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
-only be preceeded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
-\&\fB\-o\fR option. So for example \fB\-omagic\fR sets the output file
-name to \fBmagic\fR whereas \fB\-\-omagic\fR sets the \s-1NMAGIC\s0 flag on the
-output.
-.PP
-Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
-option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
-immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
-\&\fB\-\-trace\-symbol foo\fR and \fB\-\-trace\-symbol=foo\fR are equivalent.
-Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
-accepted.
-.PP
-Note\-\-\-if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
-(e.g. \fBgcc\fR) then all the linker command line options should be
-prefixed by \fB\-Wl,\fR (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
-compiler driver) like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
-.Ve
-.PP
-This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
-silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
-.PP
-Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the \s-1GNU\s0
-linker:
-.IP "\fB\-a\fR\fIkeyword\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-akeyword"
-This option is supported for \s-1HP/UX\s0 compatibility. The \fIkeyword\fR
-argument must be one of the strings \fBarchive\fR, \fBshared\fR, or
-\&\fBdefault\fR. \fB\-aarchive\fR is functionally equivalent to
-\&\fB\-Bstatic\fR, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
-to \fB\-Bdynamic\fR. This option may be used any number of times.
-.IP "\fB\-A\fR\fIarchitecture\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Aarchitecture"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-architecture=\fR\fIarchitecture\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--architecture=architecture"
-.PD
-In the current release of \fBld\fR, this option is useful only for the
-Intel 960 family of architectures. In that \fBld\fR configuration, the
-\&\fIarchitecture\fR argument identifies the particular architecture in
-the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
-archive-library search path.
-.Sp
-Future releases of \fBld\fR may support similar functionality for
-other architecture families.
-.IP "\fB\-b\fR \fIinput-format\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-b input-format"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-format=\fR\fIinput-format\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--format=input-format"
-.PD
-\&\fBld\fR may be configured to support more than one kind of object
-file. If your \fBld\fR is configured this way, you can use the
-\&\fB\-b\fR option to specify the binary format for input object files
-that follow this option on the command line. Even when \fBld\fR is
-configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
-to specify this, as \fBld\fR should be configured to expect as a
-default input format the most usual format on each machine.
-\&\fIinput-format\fR is a text string, the name of a particular format
-supported by the \s-1BFD\s0 libraries. (You can list the available binary
-formats with \fBobjdump \-i\fR.)
-.Sp
-You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
-binary format. You can also use \fB\-b\fR to switch formats explicitly (when
-linking object files of different formats), by including
-\&\fB\-b\fR \fIinput-format\fR before each group of object files in a
-particular format.
-.Sp
-The default format is taken from the environment variable
-\&\f(CW\*(C`GNUTARGET\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
-\&\f(CW\*(C`TARGET\*(C'\fR;
-.IP "\fB\-c\fR \fIMRI-commandfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-c MRI-commandfile"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-mri\-script=\fR\fIMRI-commandfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--mri-script=MRI-commandfile"
-.PD
-For compatibility with linkers produced by \s-1MRI\s0, \fBld\fR accepts script
-files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
-the \s-1MRI\s0 Compatible Script Files section of \s-1GNU\s0 ld documentation.
-Introduce \s-1MRI\s0 script files with
-the option \fB\-c\fR; use the \fB\-T\fR option to run linker
-scripts written in the general-purpose \fBld\fR scripting language.
-If \fIMRI-cmdfile\fR does not exist, \fBld\fR looks for it in the directories
-specified by any \fB\-L\fR options.
-.IP "\fB\-d\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-d"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-dc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dc"
-.IP "\fB\-dp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dp"
-.PD
-These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
-compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
-even if a relocatable output file is specified (with \fB\-r\fR). The
-script command \f(CW\*(C`FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION\*(C'\fR has the same effect.
-.IP "\fB\-e\fR \fIentry\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-e entry"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-entry=\fR\fIentry\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--entry=entry"
-.PD
-Use \fIentry\fR as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
-program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
-named \fIentry\fR, the linker will try to parse \fIentry\fR as a number,
-and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
-base 10; you may use a leading \fB0x\fR for base 16, or a leading
-\&\fB0\fR for base 8).
-.IP "\fB\-E\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-E"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-export\-dynamic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--export-dynamic"
-.PD
-When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
-dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
-which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
-.Sp
-If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
-contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
-mentioned in the link.
-.Sp
-If you use \f(CW\*(C`dlopen\*(C'\fR to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
-back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
-dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
-linking the program itself.
-.Sp
-You can also use the version script to control what symbols should
-be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
-See the description of \fB\-\-version\-script\fR in \f(CW at ref\fR{\s-1VERSION\s0}.
-.IP "\fB\-EB\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-EB"
-Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
-.IP "\fB\-EL\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-EL"
-Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
-.IP "\fB\-f\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-f"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-auxiliary\fR \fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--auxiliary name"
-.PD
-When creating an \s-1ELF\s0 shared object, set the internal \s-1DT_AUXILIARY\s0 field
-to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
-table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
-symbol table of the shared object \fIname\fR.
-.Sp
-If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
-run the program, the dynamic linker will see the \s-1DT_AUXILIARY\s0 field. If
-the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
-first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
-\&\fIname\fR. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
-in the filter object. The shared object \fIname\fR need not exist.
-Thus the shared object \fIname\fR may be used to provide an alternative
-implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
-machine specific performance.
-.Sp
-This option may be specified more than once. The \s-1DT_AUXILIARY\s0 entries
-will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
-.IP "\fB\-F\fR \fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-F name"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-filter\fR \fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--filter name"
-.PD
-When creating an \s-1ELF\s0 shared object, set the internal \s-1DT_FILTER\s0 field to
-the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
-of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
-on the symbol table of the shared object \fIname\fR.
-.Sp
-If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
-run the program, the dynamic linker will see the \s-1DT_FILTER\s0 field. The
-dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
-filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
-found in the shared object \fIname\fR. Thus the filter object can be
-used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
-\&\fIname\fR.
-.Sp
-Some older linkers used the \fB\-F\fR option throughout a compilation
-toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
-object files.
-The \s-1GNU\s0 linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
-\&\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-format\fR, \fB\-\-oformat\fR options, the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`TARGET\*(C'\fR command in linker scripts, and the \f(CW\*(C`GNUTARGET\*(C'\fR
-environment variable.
-The \s-1GNU\s0 linker will ignore the \fB\-F\fR option when not
-creating an \s-1ELF\s0 shared object.
-.IP "\fB\-fini\fR \fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-fini name"
-When creating an \s-1ELF\s0 executable or shared object, call \s-1NAME\s0 when the
-executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting \s-1DT_FINI\s0 to the
-address of the function. By default, the linker uses \f(CW\*(C`_fini\*(C'\fR as
-the function to call.
-.IP "\fB\-g\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-g"
-Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
-.IP "\fB\-G\fR\fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Gvalue"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-gpsize=\fR\fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--gpsize=value"
-.PD
-Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the \s-1GP\s0 register to
-\&\fIsize\fR. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
-\&\s-1MIPS\s0 \s-1ECOFF\s0 which supports putting large and small objects into different
-sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
-.IP "\fB\-h\fR\fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-hname"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-soname=\fR\fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-soname=name"
-.PD
-When creating an \s-1ELF\s0 shared object, set the internal \s-1DT_SONAME\s0 field to
-the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
-which has a \s-1DT_SONAME\s0 field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
-linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the \s-1DT_SONAME\s0
-field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
-.IP "\fB\-i\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-i"
-Perform an incremental link (same as option \fB\-r\fR).
-.IP "\fB\-init\fR \fIname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-init name"
-When creating an \s-1ELF\s0 executable or shared object, call \s-1NAME\s0 when the
-executable or shared object is loaded, by setting \s-1DT_INIT\s0 to the address
-of the function. By default, the linker uses \f(CW\*(C`_init\*(C'\fR as the
-function to call.
-.IP "\fB\-l\fR\fIarchive\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-larchive"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-library=\fR\fIarchive\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--library=archive"
-.PD
-Add archive file \fIarchive\fR to the list of files to link. This
-option may be used any number of times. \fBld\fR will search its
-path-list for occurrences of \f(CW\*(C`lib\f(CIarchive\f(CW.a\*(C'\fR for every
-\&\fIarchive\fR specified.
-.Sp
-On systems which support shared libraries, \fBld\fR may also search for
-libraries with extensions other than \f(CW\*(C`.a\*(C'\fR. Specifically, on \s-1ELF\s0
-and SunOS systems, \fBld\fR will search a directory for a library with
-an extension of \f(CW\*(C`.so\*(C'\fR before searching for one with an extension of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`.a\*(C'\fR. By convention, a \f(CW\*(C`.so\*(C'\fR extension indicates a shared
-library.
-.Sp
-The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
-specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
-was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
-command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
-archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
-the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
-.Sp
-See the \fB\-(\fR option for a way to force the linker to search
-archives multiple times.
-.Sp
-You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
-.Sp
-This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
-if you are using \fBld\fR on \s-1AIX\s0, note that it is different from the
-behaviour of the \s-1AIX\s0 linker.
-.IP "\fB\-L\fR\fIsearchdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Lsearchdir"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-library\-path=\fR\fIsearchdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--library-path=searchdir"
-.PD
-Add path \fIsearchdir\fR to the list of paths that \fBld\fR will search
-for archive libraries and \fBld\fR control scripts. You may use this
-option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
-in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
-on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
-\&\fB\-L\fR options apply to all \fB\-l\fR options, regardless of the
-order in which the options appear.
-.Sp
-If \fIsearchdir\fR begins with \f(CW\*(C`=\*(C'\fR, then the \f(CW\*(C`=\*(C'\fR will be replaced
-by the \fIsysroot prefix\fR, a path specified when the linker is configured.
-.Sp
-The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
-\&\fB\-L\fR) depends on which emulation mode \fBld\fR is using, and in
-some cases also on how it was configured.
-.Sp
-The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`SEARCH_DIR\*(C'\fR command. Directories specified this way are searched
-at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
-.IP "\fB\-m\fR\fIemulation\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-memulation"
-Emulate the \fIemulation\fR linker. You can list the available
-emulations with the \fB\-\-verbose\fR or \fB\-V\fR options.
-.Sp
-If the \fB\-m\fR option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`LDEMULATION\*(C'\fR environment variable, if that is defined.
-.Sp
-Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
-configured.
-.IP "\fB\-M\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-M"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-print\-map\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--print-map"
-.PD
-Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
-information about the link, including the following:
-.RS 4
-.IP "*" 4
-Where object files and symbols are mapped into memory.
-.IP "*" 4
-How common symbols are allocated.
-.IP "*" 4
-All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
-which caused the archive member to be brought in.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-n\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-n"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-nmagic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--nmagic"
-.PD
-Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`NMAGIC\*(C'\fR if possible.
-.IP "\fB\-N\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-N"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-omagic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--omagic"
-.PD
-Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
-not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
-libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
-mark the output as \f(CW\*(C`OMAGIC\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-omagic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-omagic"
-This option negates most of the effects of the \fB\-N\fR option. It
-sets the text section to be read\-only, and forces the data segment to
-be page\-aligned. Note \- this option does not enable linking against
-shared libraries. Use \fB\-Bdynamic\fR for this.
-.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIoutput\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-o output"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-output=\fR\fIoutput\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--output=output"
-.PD
-Use \fIoutput\fR as the name for the program produced by \fBld\fR; if this
-option is not specified, the name \fIa.out\fR is used by default. The
-script command \f(CW\*(C`OUTPUT\*(C'\fR can also specify the output file name.
-.IP "\fB\-O\fR \fIlevel\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-O level"
-If \fIlevel\fR is a numeric values greater than zero \fBld\fR optimizes
-the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
-should only be enabled for the final binary.
-.IP "\fB\-q\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-q"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-emit\-relocs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--emit-relocs"
-.PD
-Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked exececutables.
-Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
-order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
-in larger executables.
-.Sp
-This option is currently only supported on \s-1ELF\s0 platforms.
-.IP "\fB\-r\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-r"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-relocatable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--relocatable"
-.PD
-Generate relocatable output\-\-\-i.e., generate an output file that can in
-turn serve as input to \fBld\fR. This is often called \fIpartial
-linking\fR. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
-magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`OMAGIC\*(C'\fR.
-If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
-linking \*(C+ programs, this option \fIwill not\fR resolve references to
-constructors; to do that, use \fB\-Ur\fR.
-.Sp
-When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
-partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
-relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
-example some \f(CW\*(C`a.out\*(C'\fR\-based formats do not support partial linking
-with input files in other formats at all.
-.Sp
-This option does the same thing as \fB\-i\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-R\fR \fIfilename\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-R filename"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-just\-symbols=\fR\fIfilename\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--just-symbols=filename"
-.PD
-Read symbol names and their addresses from \fIfilename\fR, but do not
-relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
-to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
-programs. You may use this option more than once.
-.Sp
-For compatibility with other \s-1ELF\s0 linkers, if the \fB\-R\fR option is
-followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
-the \fB\-rpath\fR option.
-.IP "\fB\-s\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-s"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-strip\-all\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--strip-all"
-.PD
-Omit all symbol information from the output file.
-.IP "\fB\-S\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-S"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-strip\-debug\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--strip-debug"
-.PD
-Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
-.IP "\fB\-t\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-t"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-trace\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--trace"
-.PD
-Print the names of the input files as \fBld\fR processes them.
-.IP "\fB\-T\fR \fIscriptfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-T scriptfile"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-script=\fR\fIscriptfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--script=scriptfile"
-.PD
-Use \fIscriptfile\fR as the linker script. This script replaces
-\&\fBld\fR's default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
-\&\fIcommandfile\fR must specify everything necessary to describe the
-output file. If \fIscriptfile\fR does not exist in
-the current directory, \f(CW\*(C`ld\*(C'\fR looks for it in the directories
-specified by any preceding \fB\-L\fR options. Multiple \fB\-T\fR
-options accumulate.
-.IP "\fB\-u\fR \fIsymbol\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-u symbol"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-undefined=\fR\fIsymbol\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--undefined=symbol"
-.PD
-Force \fIsymbol\fR to be entered in the output file as an undefined
-symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
-modules from standard libraries. \fB\-u\fR may be repeated with
-different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
-option is equivalent to the \f(CW\*(C`EXTERN\*(C'\fR linker script command.
-.IP "\fB\-Ur\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Ur"
-For anything other than \*(C+ programs, this option is equivalent to
-\&\fB\-r\fR: it generates relocatable output\-\-\-i.e., an output file that can in
-turn serve as input to \fBld\fR. When linking \*(C+ programs, \fB\-Ur\fR
-\&\fIdoes\fR resolve references to constructors, unlike \fB\-r\fR.
-It does not work to use \fB\-Ur\fR on files that were themselves linked
-with \fB\-Ur\fR; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
-be added to. Use \fB\-Ur\fR only for the last partial link, and
-\&\fB\-r\fR for the others.
-.IP "\fB\-\-unique[=\fR\fI\s-1SECTION\s0\fR\fB]\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--unique[=SECTION]"
-Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
-\&\fI\s-1SECTION\s0\fR, or if the optional wildcard \fI\s-1SECTION\s0\fR argument is
-missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
-specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
-multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
-input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
-in a linker script.
-.IP "\fB\-v\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-v"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--version"
-.IP "\fB\-V\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-V"
-.PD
-Display the version number for \fBld\fR. The \fB\-V\fR option also
-lists the supported emulations.
-.IP "\fB\-x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-discard\-all\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--discard-all"
-.PD
-Delete all local symbols.
-.IP "\fB\-X\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-X"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-discard\-locals\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--discard-locals"
-.PD
-Delete all temporary local symbols. For most targets, this is all local
-symbols whose names begin with \fBL\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-y\fR \fIsymbol\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-y symbol"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-trace\-symbol=\fR\fIsymbol\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--trace-symbol=symbol"
-.PD
-Print the name of each linked file in which \fIsymbol\fR appears. This
-option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
-to prepend an underscore.
-.Sp
-This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
-don't know where the reference is coming from.
-.IP "\fB\-Y\fR \fIpath\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Y path"
-Add \fIpath\fR to the default library search path. This option exists
-for Solaris compatibility.
-.IP "\fB\-z\fR \fIkeyword\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-z keyword"
-The recognized keywords are:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBcombreloc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "combreloc"
-Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
-lookup caching possible.
-.IP "\fBdefs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "defs"
-Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
-shared libaries are still allowed.
-.IP "\fBinitfirst\fR" 4
-.IX Item "initfirst"
-This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
-It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
-before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
-the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
-the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
-objects.
-.IP "\fBinterpose\fR" 4
-.IX Item "interpose"
-Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
-but the primary executable.
-.IP "\fBloadfltr\fR" 4
-.IX Item "loadfltr"
-Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
-runtime.
-.IP "\fBmuldefs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "muldefs"
-Allows multiple definitions.
-.IP "\fBnocombreloc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "nocombreloc"
-Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
-.IP "\fBnocopyreloc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "nocopyreloc"
-Disables production of copy relocs.
-.IP "\fBnodefaultlib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "nodefaultlib"
-Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
-ignore any default library search paths.
-.IP "\fBnodelete\fR" 4
-.IX Item "nodelete"
-Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
-.IP "\fBnodlopen\fR" 4
-.IX Item "nodlopen"
-Marks the object not available to \f(CW\*(C`dlopen\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fBnodump\fR" 4
-.IX Item "nodump"
-Marks the object can not be dumped by \f(CW\*(C`dldump\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fBnow\fR" 4
-.IX Item "now"
-When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
-dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
-when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
-deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
-first called.
-.IP "\fBorigin\fR" 4
-.IX Item "origin"
-Marks the object may contain \f(CW$ORIGIN\fR.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-(\fR \fIarchives\fR \fB\-)\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-( archives -)"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-start\-group\fR \fIarchives\fR \fB\-\-end\-group\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--start-group archives --end-group"
-.PD
-The \fIarchives\fR should be a list of archive files. They may be
-either explicit file names, or \fB\-l\fR options.
-.Sp
-The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
-references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
-the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
-archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
-object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
-would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
-they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
-resolved.
-.Sp
-Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
-it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
-more archives.
-.IP "\fB\-\-accept\-unknown\-input\-arch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--accept-unknown-input-arch"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-accept\-unknown\-input\-arch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-accept-unknown-input-arch"
-.PD
-Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
-recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
-and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
-the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
-behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
-so the \fB\-\-accept\-unknown\-input\-arch\fR option has been added to
-restore the old behaviour.
-.IP "\fB\-assert\fR \fIkeyword\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-assert keyword"
-This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
-.IP "\fB\-Bdynamic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Bdynamic"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-dy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dy"
-.IP "\fB\-call_shared\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-call_shared"
-.PD
-Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
-for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
-default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
-for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
-multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
-\&\fB\-l\fR options which follow it. This
-option also implies \fB\-\-unresolved\-symbols=ignore\-all\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Bgroup\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Bgroup"
-Set the \f(CW\*(C`DF_1_GROUP\*(C'\fR flag in the \f(CW\*(C`DT_FLAGS_1\*(C'\fR entry in the dynamic
-section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
-object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
-\&\fB\-\-unresolved\-symbols=report\-all\fR is implied. This option is
-only meaningful on \s-1ELF\s0 platforms which support shared libraries.
-.IP "\fB\-Bstatic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Bstatic"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-dn\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-dn"
-.IP "\fB\-non_shared\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-non_shared"
-.IP "\fB\-static\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-static"
-.PD
-Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
-platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
-variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
-may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
-library searching for \fB\-l\fR options which follow it. This
-option also implies \fB\-\-unresolved\-symbols=report\-all\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Bsymbolic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Bsymbolic"
-When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
-definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
-for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
-within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on \s-1ELF\s0
-platforms which support shared libraries.
-.IP "\fB\-\-check\-sections\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--check-sections"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-check\-sections\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-check-sections"
-.PD
-Asks the linker \fInot\fR to check section addresses after they have
-been assigned to see if there any overlaps. Normally the linker will
-perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
-suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
-allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
-restored by using the command line switch \fB\-\-check\-sections\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-\-cref\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--cref"
-Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
-generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
-Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
-.Sp
-The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
-easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
-sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
-symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
-definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-define\-common\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-define-common"
-This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
-The script command \f(CW\*(C`INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION\*(C'\fR has the same effect.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-\-no\-define\-common\fR option allows decoupling
-the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
-of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
-forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
-Using \fB\-\-no\-define\-common\fR allows Common symbols that are referenced
-from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
-This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
-and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
-duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
-paths for runtime symbol resolution.
-.IP "\fB\-\-defsym\fR \fIsymbol\fR\fB=\fR\fIexpression\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--defsym symbol=expression"
-Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
-address given by \fIexpression\fR. You may use this option as many
-times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
-limited form of arithmetic is supported for the \fIexpression\fR in this
-context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
-symbol, or use \f(CW\*(C`+\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR to add or subtract hexadecimal
-constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
-using the linker command language from a script. \fINote:\fR there should be no white
-space between \fIsymbol\fR, the equals sign (``\fB=\fR''), and
-\&\fIexpression\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-\-demangle[=\fR\fIstyle\fR\fB]\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--demangle[=style]"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-demangle\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-demangle"
-.PD
-These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
-and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
-present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
-underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts \*(C+
-mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
-different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
-to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
-demangle by default unless the environment variable \fB\s-1COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE\s0\fR
-is set. These options may be used to override the default.
-.IP "\fB\-\-dynamic\-linker\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--dynamic-linker file"
-Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
-generating dynamically linked \s-1ELF\s0 executables. The default dynamic
-linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
-doing.
-.IP "\fB\-\-embedded\-relocs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--embedded-relocs"
-This option is only meaningful when linking \s-1MIPS\s0 embedded \s-1PIC\s0 code,
-generated by the \-membedded\-pic option to the \s-1GNU\s0 compiler and
-assembler. It causes the linker to create a table which may be used at
-runtime to relocate any data which was statically initialized to pointer
-values. See the code in testsuite/ld\-empic for details.
-.IP "\fB\-\-fatal\-warnings\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--fatal-warnings"
-Treat all warnings as errors.
-.IP "\fB\-\-force\-exe\-suffix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--force-exe-suffix"
-Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
-.Sp
-If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`.exe\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`.dll\*(C'\fR suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
-the output file to one of the same name with a \f(CW\*(C`.exe\*(C'\fR suffix. This
-option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
-Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
-it ends in a \f(CW\*(C`.exe\*(C'\fR suffix.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-gc\-sections\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-gc-sections"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-gc\-sections\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--gc-sections"
-.PD
-Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
-targets that do not support this option. This option is not compatible
-with \fB\-r\fR, nor should it be used with dynamic linking. The default
-behaviour (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
-specifying \fB\-\-no\-gc\-sections\fR on the command line.
-.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--help"
-Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
-.IP "\fB\-\-target\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--target-help"
-Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
-.IP "\fB\-Map\fR \fImapfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Map mapfile"
-Print a link map to the file \fImapfile\fR. See the description of the
-\&\fB\-M\fR option, above.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-keep\-memory\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-keep-memory"
-\&\fBld\fR normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
-symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells \fBld\fR to
-instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
-necessary. This may be required if \fBld\fR runs out of memory space
-while linking a large executable.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-undefined\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-undefined"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-z defs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-z defs"
-.PD
-Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
-is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
-The switch \fB\-\-[no\-]allow\-shlib\-undefined\fR controls the
-behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
-libraries being linked in.
-.IP "\fB\-\-allow\-multiple\-definition\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--allow-multiple-definition"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-z muldefs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-z muldefs"
-.PD
-Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
-report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
-first definition will be used.
-.IP "\fB\-\-allow\-shlib\-undefined\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--allow-shlib-undefined"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-allow\-shlib\-undefined\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-allow-shlib-undefined"
-.PD
-Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
-This switch is similar to \fB\-\-no\-undefined\fR except that it
-determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
-shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
-how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
-.Sp
-The reason that \fB\-\-allow\-shlib\-undefined\fR is the default is that
-the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
-the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
-resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
-undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
-them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
-for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
-select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
-for \s-1HPPA\s0 shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-undefined\-version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-undefined-version"
-Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
-it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
-will be issued instead.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-warn\-mismatch\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-warn-mismatch"
-Normally \fBld\fR will give an error if you try to link together input
-files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
-been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
-This option tells \fBld\fR that it should silently permit such possible
-errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
-have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
-inappropriate.
-.IP "\fB\-\-no\-whole\-archive\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--no-whole-archive"
-Turn off the effect of the \fB\-\-whole\-archive\fR option for subsequent
-archive files.
-.IP "\fB\-\-noinhibit\-exec\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--noinhibit-exec"
-Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
-Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
-errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
-when it issues any error whatsoever.
-.IP "\fB\-nostdlib\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-nostdlib"
-Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
-command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
-(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
-.IP "\fB\-\-oformat\fR \fIoutput-format\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--oformat output-format"
-\&\fBld\fR may be configured to support more than one kind of object
-file. If your \fBld\fR is configured this way, you can use the
-\&\fB\-\-oformat\fR option to specify the binary format for the output
-object file. Even when \fBld\fR is configured to support alternative
-object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as \fBld\fR
-should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
-usual format on each machine. \fIoutput-format\fR is a text string, the
-name of a particular format supported by the \s-1BFD\s0 libraries. (You can
-list the available binary formats with \fBobjdump \-i\fR.) The script
-command \f(CW\*(C`OUTPUT_FORMAT\*(C'\fR can also specify the output format, but
-this option overrides it.
-.IP "\fB\-pie\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-pie"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-pic\-executable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--pic-executable"
-.PD
-Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
-\&\s-1ELF\s0 platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
-libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
-address the \s-1OS\s0 chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
-normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
-defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
-.IP "\fB\-qmagic\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-qmagic"
-This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
-.IP "\fB\-Qy\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Qy"
-This option is ignored for \s-1SVR4\s0 compatibility.
-.IP "\fB\-\-relax\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--relax"
-An option with machine dependent effects.
-This option is only supported on a few targets.
-.Sp
-On some platforms, the \fB\-\-relax\fR option performs global
-optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
-in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
-instructions in the output object file.
-.Sp
-On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
-debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
-This is known to be
-the case for the Matsushita \s-1MN10200\s0 and \s-1MN10300\s0 family of processors.
-.Sp
-On platforms where this is not supported, \fB\-\-relax\fR is accepted,
-but ignored.
-.IP "\fB\-\-retain\-symbols\-file\fR \fIfilename\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--retain-symbols-file filename"
-Retain \fIonly\fR the symbols listed in the file \fIfilename\fR,
-discarding all others. \fIfilename\fR is simply a flat file, with one
-symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
-(such as VxWorks)
-where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
-run-time memory.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\-\-retain\-symbols\-file\fR does \fInot\fR discard undefined symbols,
-or symbols needed for relocations.
-.Sp
-You may only specify \fB\-\-retain\-symbols\-file\fR once in the command
-line. It overrides \fB\-s\fR and \fB\-S\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-rpath\fR \fIdir\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-rpath dir"
-Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
-linking an \s-1ELF\s0 executable with shared objects. All \fB\-rpath\fR
-arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
-them to locate shared objects at runtime. The \fB\-rpath\fR option is
-also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
-objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
-\&\fB\-rpath\-link\fR option. If \fB\-rpath\fR is not used when linking an
-\&\s-1ELF\s0 executable, the contents of the environment variable
-\&\f(CW\*(C`LD_RUN_PATH\*(C'\fR will be used if it is defined.
-.Sp
-The \fB\-rpath\fR option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
-SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
-\&\fB\-L\fR options it is given. If a \fB\-rpath\fR option is used, the
-runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the \fB\-rpath\fR
-options, ignoring the \fB\-L\fR options. This can be useful when using
-gcc, which adds many \fB\-L\fR options which may be on \s-1NFS\s0 mounted
-filesystems.
-.Sp
-For compatibility with other \s-1ELF\s0 linkers, if the \fB\-R\fR option is
-followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
-the \fB\-rpath\fR option.
-.IP "\fB\-rpath\-link\fR \fI\s-1DIR\s0\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-rpath-link DIR"
-When using \s-1ELF\s0 or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
-happens when an \f(CW\*(C`ld \-shared\*(C'\fR link includes a shared library as one
-of the input files.
-.Sp
-When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non\-shared,
-non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
-shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
-explicitly. In such a case, the \fB\-rpath\-link\fR option
-specifies the first set of directories to search. The
-\&\fB\-rpath\-link\fR option may specify a sequence of directory names
-either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
-appearing multiple times.
-.Sp
-This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
-that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
-is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
-runtime linker would do.
-.Sp
-The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
-libraries.
-.RS 4
-.IP "1." 4
-Any directories specified by \fB\-rpath\-link\fR options.
-.IP "2." 4
-Any directories specified by \fB\-rpath\fR options. The difference
-between \fB\-rpath\fR and \fB\-rpath\-link\fR is that directories
-specified by \fB\-rpath\fR options are included in the executable and
-used at runtime, whereas the \fB\-rpath\-link\fR option is only effective
-at link time. It is for the native linker only.
-.IP "3." 4
-On an \s-1ELF\s0 system, if the \fB\-rpath\fR and \f(CW\*(C`rpath\-link\*(C'\fR options
-were not used, search the contents of the environment variable
-\&\f(CW\*(C`LD_RUN_PATH\*(C'\fR. It is for the native linker only.
-.IP "4." 4
-On SunOS, if the \fB\-rpath\fR option was not used, search any
-directories specified using \fB\-L\fR options.
-.IP "5." 4
-For a native linker, the contents of the environment variable
-\&\f(CW\*(C`LD_LIBRARY_PATH\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "6." 4
-For a native \s-1ELF\s0 linker, the directories in \f(CW\*(C`DT_RUNPATH\*(C'\fR or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`DT_RPATH\*(C'\fR of a shared library are searched for shared
-libraries needed by it. The \f(CW\*(C`DT_RPATH\*(C'\fR entries are ignored if
-\&\f(CW\*(C`DT_RUNPATH\*(C'\fR entries exist.
-.IP "7." 4
-The default directories, normally \fI/lib\fR and \fI/usr/lib\fR.
-.IP "8." 4
-For a native linker on an \s-1ELF\s0 system, if the file \fI/etc/ld.so.conf\fR
-exists, the list of directories found in that file.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
-warning and continue with the link.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-shared\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-shared"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-Bshareable\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Bshareable"
-.PD
-Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on \s-1ELF\s0, \s-1XCOFF\s0
-and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
-shared library if the \fB\-e\fR option is not used and there are
-undefined symbols in the link.
-.IP "\fB\-\-sort\-common\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--sort-common"
-This option tells \fBld\fR to sort the common symbols by size when it
-places them in the appropriate output sections. First come all the one
-byte symbols, then all the two byte, then all the four byte, and then
-everything else. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to
-alignment constraints.
-.IP "\fB\-\-split\-by\-file [\fR\fIsize\fR\fB]\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--split-by-file [size]"
-Similar to \fB\-\-split\-by\-reloc\fR but creates a new output section for
-each input file when \fIsize\fR is reached. \fIsize\fR defaults to a
-size of 1 if not given.
-.IP "\fB\-\-split\-by\-reloc [\fR\fIcount\fR\fB]\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--split-by-reloc [count]"
-Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
-output section in the file contains more than \fIcount\fR relocations.
-This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
-certain real time kernels with the \s-1COFF\s0 object file format; since \s-1COFF\s0
-cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
-that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
-support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
-input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
-more than \fIcount\fR relocations one output section will contain that
-many relocations. \fIcount\fR defaults to a value of 32768.
-.IP "\fB\-\-stats\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--stats"
-Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
-as execution time and memory usage.
-.IP "\fB\-\-traditional\-format\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--traditional-format"
-For some targets, the output of \fBld\fR is different in some ways from
-the output of some existing linker. This switch requests \fBld\fR to
-use the traditional format instead.
-.Sp
-For example, on SunOS, \fBld\fR combines duplicate entries in the
-symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
-full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
-\&\f(CW\*(C`dbx\*(C'\fR program can not read the resulting program (\f(CW\*(C`gdb\*(C'\fR has no
-trouble). The \fB\-\-traditional\-format\fR switch tells \fBld\fR to not
-combine duplicate entries.
-.IP "\fB\-\-section\-start\fR \fIsectionname\fR\fB=\fR\fIorg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--section-start sectionname=org"
-Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
-address given by \fIorg\fR. You may use this option as many
-times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
-line.
-\&\fIorg\fR must be a single hexadecimal integer;
-for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
-\&\fB0x\fR usually associated with hexadecimal values. \fINote:\fR there
-should be no white space between \fIsectionname\fR, the equals
-sign (``\fB=\fR''), and \fIorg\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-Tbss\fR \fIorg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Tbss org"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-Tdata\fR \fIorg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Tdata org"
-.IP "\fB\-Ttext\fR \fIorg\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-Ttext org"
-.PD
-Same as \-\-section\-start, with \f(CW\*(C`.bss\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`.data\*(C'\fR or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`.text\*(C'\fR as the \fIsectionname\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-\-unresolved\-symbols=\fR\fImethod\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--unresolved-symbols=method"
-Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
-values for \fBmethod\fR:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBignore-all\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ignore-all"
-Do not report any unresolved symbols. This is the default when
-creating shared libraries or dynamic executables.
-.IP "\fBreport-all\fR" 4
-.IX Item "report-all"
-Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default when creating
-static binaries.
-.IP "\fBignore-in-object-files\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ignore-in-object-files"
-Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
-ignore them if they come from regular object files.
-.IP "\fBignore-in-shared-libs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "ignore-in-shared-libs"
-Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
-ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
-when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
-libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
-command line.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
-by the \fB\-\-[no\-]allow\-shlib\-undefined\fR option.
-.Sp
-Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
-unresolved symbol but the option \fB\-\-warn\-unresolved\-symbols\fR
-can change this to a warning.
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-\-dll\-verbose\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--dll-verbose"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-verbose\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--verbose"
-.PD
-Display the version number for \fBld\fR and list the linker emulations
-supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
-the linker script being used by the linker.
-.IP "\fB\-\-version\-script=\fR\fIversion-scriptfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--version-script=version-scriptfile"
-Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
-used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
-about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
-is only meaningful on \s-1ELF\s0 platforms which support shared libraries.
-.IP "\fB\-\-warn\-common\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--warn-common"
-Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
-a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
-but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
-you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
-Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
-warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
-.Sp
-There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
-.RS 4
-.IP "\fBint i = 1;\fR" 4
-.IX Item "int i = 1;"
-A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
-file.
-.IP "\fBextern int i;\fR" 4
-.IX Item "extern int i;"
-An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
-There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
-variable somewhere.
-.IP "\fBint i;\fR" 4
-.IX Item "int i;"
-A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
-variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
-The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
-single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
-size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
-a definition of the same variable.
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.Sp
-The \fB\-\-warn\-common\fR option can produce five kinds of warnings.
-Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
-just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
-encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
-a common symbol.
-.IP "1." 4
-Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
-definition for the symbol.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: common of `<symbol>'
-\& overridden by definition
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: defined here
-.Ve
-.IP "2." 4
-Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
-the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
-except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: definition of `<symbol>'
-\& overriding common
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: common is here
-.Ve
-.IP "3." 4
-Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: multiple common
-\& of `<symbol>'
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: previous common is here
-.Ve
-.IP "4." 4
-Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: common of `<symbol>'
-\& overridden by larger common
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: larger common is here
-.Ve
-.IP "5." 4
-Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
-the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
-encountered in a different order.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: common of `<symbol>'
-\& overriding smaller common
-\& <file>(<section>): warning: smaller common is here
-.Ve
-.RE
-.RS 4
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-\-warn\-constructors\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--warn-constructors"
-Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
-object file formats. For formats like \s-1COFF\s0 or \s-1ELF\s0, the linker can not
-detect the use of global constructors.
-.IP "\fB\-\-warn\-multiple\-gp\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--warn-multiple-gp"
-Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
-This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
-Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
-section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
-of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
-base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
-base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
-bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
-large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
-values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
-option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
-.IP "\fB\-\-warn\-once\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--warn-once"
-Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
-which refers to it.
-.IP "\fB\-\-warn\-section\-align\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--warn-section-align"
-Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
-alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
-The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
-is, if the \f(CW\*(C`SECTIONS\*(C'\fR command does not specify a start address for
-the section.
-.IP "\fB\-\-warn\-unresolved\-symbols\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--warn-unresolved-symbols"
-If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
-\&\fB\-\-unresolved\-symbols\fR) it will normally generate an error.
-This option makes it generate a warning instead.
-.IP "\fB\-\-error\-unresolved\-symbols\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--error-unresolved-symbols"
-This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
-it is reporting unresolved symbols.
-.IP "\fB\-\-whole\-archive\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--whole-archive"
-For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
-\&\fB\-\-whole\-archive\fR option, include every object file in the archive
-in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
-files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
-library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
-library. This option may be used more than once.
-.Sp
-Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
-about this option, so you have to use \fB\-Wl,\-whole\-archive\fR.
-Second, don't forget to use \fB\-Wl,\-no\-whole\-archive\fR after your
-list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
-your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
-.IP "\fB\-\-wrap\fR \fIsymbol\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--wrap symbol"
-Use a wrapper function for \fIsymbol\fR. Any undefined reference to
-\&\fIsymbol\fR will be resolved to \f(CW\*(C`_\|_wrap_\f(CIsymbol\f(CW\*(C'\fR. Any
-undefined reference to \f(CW\*(C`_\|_real_\f(CIsymbol\f(CW\*(C'\fR will be resolved to
-\&\fIsymbol\fR.
-.Sp
-This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
-wrapper function should be called \f(CW\*(C`_\|_wrap_\f(CIsymbol\f(CW\*(C'\fR. If it
-wishes to call the system function, it should call
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_real_\f(CIsymbol\f(CW\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Here is a trivial example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& void *
-\& __wrap_malloc (int c)
-\& {
-\& printf ("malloc called with %ld\en", c);
-\& return __real_malloc (c);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you link other code with this file using \fB\-\-wrap malloc\fR, then
-all calls to \f(CW\*(C`malloc\*(C'\fR will call the function \f(CW\*(C`_\|_wrap_malloc\*(C'\fR
-instead. The call to \f(CW\*(C`_\|_real_malloc\*(C'\fR in \f(CW\*(C`_\|_wrap_malloc\*(C'\fR will
-call the real \f(CW\*(C`malloc\*(C'\fR function.
-.Sp
-You may wish to provide a \f(CW\*(C`_\|_real_malloc\*(C'\fR function as well, so that
-links without the \fB\-\-wrap\fR option will succeed. If you do this,
-you should not put the definition of \f(CW\*(C`_\|_real_malloc\*(C'\fR in the same
-file as \f(CW\*(C`_\|_wrap_malloc\*(C'\fR; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
-call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to \f(CW\*(C`malloc\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-\-enable\-new\-dtags\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--enable-new-dtags"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-disable\-new\-dtags\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--disable-new-dtags"
-.PD
-This linker can create the new dynamic tags in \s-1ELF\s0. But the older \s-1ELF\s0
-systems may not understand them. If you specify
-\&\fB\-\-enable\-new\-dtags\fR, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
-If you specify \fB\-\-disable\-new\-dtags\fR, no new dynamic tags will be
-created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
-those options are only available for \s-1ELF\s0 systems.
-.PP
-The i386 \s-1PE\s0 linker supports the \fB\-shared\fR option, which causes
-the output to be a dynamically linked library (\s-1DLL\s0) instead of a
-normal executable. You should name the output \f(CW\*(C`*.dll\*(C'\fR when you
-use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
-\&\f(CW\*(C`*.def\*(C'\fR files, which may be specified on the linker command line
-like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
-symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
-object file).
-.PP
-In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 \s-1PE\s0 linker
-support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
-\&\s-1PE\s0 target. Options that take values may be separated from their
-values by either a space or an equals sign.
-.IP "\fB\-\-add\-stdcall\-alias\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--add-stdcall-alias"
-If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@\fInn\fR) will be exported
-as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-base\-file\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--base-file file"
-Use \fIfile\fR as the name of a file in which to save the base
-addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
-\&\fIdlltool\fR.
-[This is an i386 \s-1PE\s0 specific option]
-.IP "\fB\-\-dll\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--dll"
-Create a \s-1DLL\s0 instead of a regular executable. You may also use
-\&\fB\-shared\fR or specify a \f(CW\*(C`LIBRARY\*(C'\fR in a given \f(CW\*(C`.def\*(C'\fR
-file.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-enable\-stdcall\-fixup\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--enable-stdcall-fixup"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-disable\-stdcall\-fixup\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--disable-stdcall-fixup"
-.PD
-If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
-do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
-only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
-resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
-undefined symbol \f(CW\*(C`_foo\*(C'\fR might be linked to the function
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_foo at 12\*(C'\fR, or the undefined symbol \f(CW\*(C`_bar at 16\*(C'\fR might be linked
-to the function \f(CW\*(C`_bar\*(C'\fR. When the linker does this, it prints a
-warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
-import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
-to be usable. If you specify \fB\-\-enable\-stdcall\-fixup\fR, this
-feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
-\&\fB\-\-disable\-stdcall\-fixup\fR, this feature is disabled and such
-mismatches are considered to be errors.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-export\-all\-symbols\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--export-all-symbols"
-If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a \s-1DLL\s0 will
-be exported by the \s-1DLL\s0. Note that this is the default if there
-otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
-explicitly exported via \s-1DEF\s0 files or implicitly exported via function
-attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
-option is given. Note that the symbols \f(CW\*(C`DllMain at 12\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`DllEntryPoint at 0\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`DllMainCRTStartup at 12\*(C'\fR, and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`impure_ptr\*(C'\fR will not be automatically
-exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
-re\-exported, nor will symbols specifying the \s-1DLL\s0's internal layout
-such as those beginning with \f(CW\*(C`_head_\*(C'\fR or ending with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_iname\*(C'\fR. In addition, no symbols from \f(CW\*(C`libgcc\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`libstd++\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`libmingw32\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`crtX.o\*(C'\fR will be exported.
-Symbols whose names begin with \f(CW\*(C`_\|_rtti_\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`_\|_builtin_\*(C'\fR will
-not be exported, to help with \*(C+ DLLs. Finally, there is an
-extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
-(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
-These cygwin-excludes are: \f(CW\*(C`_cygwin_dll_entry at 12\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_cygwin_crt0_common at 8\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry at 12\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_fmode\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`_impure_ptr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`cygwin_attach_dll\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`cygwin_premain0\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`cygwin_premain1\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`cygwin_premain2\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`cygwin_premain3\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`environ\*(C'\fR.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-exclude\-symbols\fR \fIsymbol\fR\fB,\fR\fIsymbol\fR\fB,...\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--exclude-symbols symbol,symbol,..."
-Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
-exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-exclude\-libs\fR \fIlib\fR\fB,\fR\fIlib\fR\fB,...\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--exclude-libs lib,lib,..."
-Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
-exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\-libs ALL\*(C'\fR excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
-automatic export. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
-regardless of this option.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-file\-alignment\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--file-alignment"
-Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
-file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
-512.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-heap\fR \fIreserve\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--heap reserve"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-heap\fR \fIreserve\fR\fB,\fR\fIcommit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--heap reserve,commit"
-.PD
-Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be
-used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
-committed.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-image\-base\fR \fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--image-base value"
-Use \fIvalue\fR as the base address of your program or dll. This is
-the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
-is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
-your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
-other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
-for dlls.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-kill\-at\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--kill-at"
-If given, the stdcall suffixes (@\fInn\fR) will be stripped from
-symbols before they are exported.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-major\-image\-version\fR \fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--major-image-version value"
-Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-major\-os\-version\fR \fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--major-os-version value"
-Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-major\-subsystem\-version\fR \fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--major-subsystem-version value"
-Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-minor\-image\-version\fR \fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--minor-image-version value"
-Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-minor\-os\-version\fR \fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--minor-os-version value"
-Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-minor\-subsystem\-version\fR \fIvalue\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--minor-subsystem-version value"
-Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-output\-def\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--output-def file"
-The linker will create the file \fIfile\fR which will contain a \s-1DEF\s0
-file corresponding to the \s-1DLL\s0 the linker is generating. This \s-1DEF\s0 file
-(which should be called \f(CW\*(C`*.def\*(C'\fR) may be used to create an import
-library with \f(CW\*(C`dlltool\*(C'\fR or may be used as a reference to
-automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-out\-implib\fR \fIfile\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--out-implib file"
-The linker will create the file \fIfile\fR which will contain an
-import lib corresponding to the \s-1DLL\s0 the linker is generating. This
-import lib (which should be called \f(CW\*(C`*.dll.a\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`*.a\*(C'\fR
-may be used to link clients against the generated \s-1DLL\s0; this behaviour
-makes it possible to skip a separate \f(CW\*(C`dlltool\*(C'\fR import library
-creation step.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-enable\-auto\-image\-base\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--enable-auto-image-base"
-Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
-using the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-image\-base\*(C'\fR argument. By using a hash generated
-from the dllname to create unique image bases for each \s-1DLL\s0, in-memory
-collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
-avoided.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-disable\-auto\-image\-base\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--disable-auto-image-base"
-Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
-user-specified image base (\f(CW\*(C`\-\-image\-base\*(C'\fR) then use the platform
-default.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-dll\-search\-prefix\fR \fIstring\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--dll-search-prefix string"
-When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
-search for \f(CW\*(C`<string><basename>.dll\*(C'\fR in preference to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`lib<basename>.dll\*(C'\fR. This behaviour allows easy distinction
-between DLLs built for the various \*(L"subplatforms\*(R": native, cygwin,
-uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-dll\-search\-prefix=cyg\*(C'\fR.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-enable\-auto\-import\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--enable-auto-import"
-Do sophisticated linking of \f(CW\*(C`_symbol\*(C'\fR to \f(CW\*(C`_\|_imp_\|_symbol\*(C'\fR for
-\&\s-1DATA\s0 imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
-building the import libraries with those \s-1DATA\s0 exports. This generally
-will 'just work' \*(-- but sometimes you may see this message:
-.Sp
-"variable '<var>' can't be auto\-imported. Please read the
-documentation for ld's \f(CW\*(C`\-\-enable\-auto\-import\*(C'\fR for details."
-.Sp
-This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
-ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
-allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
-fields of struct variables imported from a \s-1DLL\s0, as well as using a
-constant index into an array variable imported from a \s-1DLL\s0. Any
-multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
-this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
-of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
-the warning, and exit.
-.Sp
-There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
-data type of the exported variable:
-.Sp
-One way is to use \-\-enable\-runtime\-pseudo\-reloc switch. This leaves the task
-of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
-this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
-.Sp
-A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable \*(--
-that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
-there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
-a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& extern type extern_array[];
-\& extern_array[1] -->
-\& { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& extern type extern_array[];
-\& extern_array[1] -->
-\& { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
-is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& extern struct s extern_struct;
-\& extern_struct.field -->
-\& { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& extern long long extern_ll;
-\& extern_ll -->
-\& { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
-\&'auto\-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_declspec(dllimport)\*(C'\fR. However, in practise that
-requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
-building a \s-1DLL\s0, building client code that will link to the \s-1DLL\s0, or
-merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
-between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
-constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
-.Sp
-Original:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& --foo.h
-\& extern int arr[];
-\& --foo.c
-\& #include "foo.h"
-\& void main(int argc, char **argv){
-\& printf("%d\en",arr[1]);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Solution 1:
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& --foo.h
-\& extern int arr[];
-\& --foo.c
-\& #include "foo.h"
-\& void main(int argc, char **argv){
-\& /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
-\& volatile int *parr = arr;
-\& printf("%d\en",parr[1]);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Solution 2:
-.Sp
-.Vb 14
-\& --foo.h
-\& /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
-\& #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \e
-\& !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
-\& #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
-\& #else
-\& #define FOO_IMPORT
-\& #endif
-\& extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
-\& --foo.c
-\& #include "foo.h"
-\& void main(int argc, char **argv){
-\& printf("%d\en",arr[1]);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
-library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
-for the offending variables (e.g. \fIset_foo()\fR and \fIget_foo()\fR accessor
-functions).
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-disable\-auto\-import\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--disable-auto-import"
-Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of \f(CW\*(C`_symbol\*(C'\fR to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`_\|_imp_\|_symbol\*(C'\fR for \s-1DATA\s0 imports from DLLs.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-enable\-runtime\-pseudo\-reloc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc"
-If your code contains expressions described in \-\-enable\-auto\-import section,
-that is, \s-1DATA\s0 imports from \s-1DLL\s0 with non-zero offset, this switch will create
-a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
-environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-disable\-runtime\-pseudo\-reloc\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc"
-Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset \s-1DATA\s0 imports from
-DLLs. This is the default.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-enable\-extra\-pe\-debug\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--enable-extra-pe-debug"
-Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-section\-alignment\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--section-alignment"
-Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
-addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-stack\fR \fIreserve\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--stack reserve"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-stack\fR \fIreserve\fR\fB,\fR\fIcommit\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--stack reserve,commit"
-.PD
-Specify the amount of memory to reserve (and optionally commit) to be
-used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
-committed.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.IP "\fB\-\-subsystem\fR \fIwhich\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--subsystem which"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-subsystem\fR \fIwhich\fR\fB:\fR\fImajor\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--subsystem which:major"
-.IP "\fB\-\-subsystem\fR \fIwhich\fR\fB:\fR\fImajor\fR\fB.\fR\fIminor\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--subsystem which:major.minor"
-.PD
-Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
-legal values for \fIwhich\fR are \f(CW\*(C`native\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`windows\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`console\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`posix\*(C'\fR. You may optionally set the
-subsystem version also.
-[This option is specific to the i386 \s-1PE\s0 targeted port of the linker]
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT"
-You can change the behaviour of \fBld\fR with the environment variables
-\&\f(CW\*(C`GNUTARGET\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`LDEMULATION\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-\&\f(CW\*(C`GNUTARGET\*(C'\fR determines the input-file object format if you don't
-use \fB\-b\fR (or its synonym \fB\-\-format\fR). Its value should be one
-of the \s-1BFD\s0 names for an input format. If there is no
-\&\f(CW\*(C`GNUTARGET\*(C'\fR in the environment, \fBld\fR uses the natural format
-of the target. If \f(CW\*(C`GNUTARGET\*(C'\fR is set to \f(CW\*(C`default\*(C'\fR then \s-1BFD\s0
-attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
-this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
-there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
-object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
-\&\s-1BFD\s0 on each system places the conventional format for that system first
-in the search\-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
-.PP
-\&\f(CW\*(C`LDEMULATION\*(C'\fR determines the default emulation if you don't use the
-\&\fB\-m\fR option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
-behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
-available emulations with the \fB\-\-verbose\fR or \fB\-V\fR options. If
-the \fB\-m\fR option is not used, and the \f(CW\*(C`LDEMULATION\*(C'\fR environment
-variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
-linker was configured.
-.PP
-Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
-\&\f(CW\*(C`COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE\*(C'\fR is set in the environment, then it will
-default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
-a similar fashion by the \f(CW\*(C`gcc\*(C'\fR linker wrapper program. The default
-may be overridden by the \fB\-\-demangle\fR and \fB\-\-no\-demangle\fR
-options.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-\&\fIar\fR\|(1), \fInm\fR\|(1), \fIobjcopy\fR\|(1), \fIobjdump\fR\|(1), \fIreadelf\fR\|(1) and
-the Info entries for \fIbinutils\fR and
-\&\fIld\fR.
-.SH "COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
-2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
-or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
-with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
-Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
-section entitled ``\s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License''.
diff --git a/raw/man1/ldd.1 b/raw/man1/ldd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b4b6ef..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ldd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1995-2000 David Engel (david at ods.com)
-.\" Copyright 1995 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Copyright 2000 Ben Collins (bcollins at debian.org)
-.\" Redone for GLibc 2.2
-.\" Copyright 2000 Jakub Jelinek (jakub at redhat.com)
-.\" Corrected.
-.\" Most of this was copied from the README file. Do not restrict distribution.
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.TH LDD 1 "30 October 2000"
-.SH NAME
-ldd \- print shared library dependencies
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B ldd
-.RB [OPTION]...
-FILE...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B ldd
-prints the shared libraries required by each program or shared library
-specified on the command line.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-\-version
-Print the version number of
-.BR ldd .
-.TP
-.B \-v\ \-\-verbose
-Print all information, including e.g. symbol versioning information.
-.TP
-.B \-d\ \-\-data\-relocs
-Perform relocations and report any missing objects (ELF only).
-.TP
-.B \-r\ \-\-function\-relocs
-Perform relocations for both data objects and functions, and
-report any missing objects or functions (ELF only).
-.TP
-.B \-\-help
-Usage information.
-.SH BUGS
-.B ldd
-does not work on a.out shared libraries.
-.PP
-.B ldd
-does not work with some extremely old a.out programs which were
-built before
-.B ldd
-support was added to the compiler releases.
-If you use
-.B ldd
-on one of these programs, the program will attempt to run with argc = 0 and
-the results will be unpredictable.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Roland McGrath and Ulrich Drepper.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR ldconfig (8),
-.BR ld.so (8).
diff --git a/raw/man1/let.1 b/raw/man1/let.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/let.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/ln.1 b/raw/man1/ln.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 406eb02..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ln.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH LN "1" "October 2003" "ln (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-ln \- make links between files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B ln
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fITARGET \fR[\fILINK_NAME\fR]
-.br
-.B ln
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fITARGET\fR... \fIDIRECTORY\fR
-.br
-.B ln
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fI--target-directory=DIRECTORY TARGET\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Create a link to the specified TARGET with optional LINK_NAME.
-If LINK_NAME is omitted, a link with the same basename as the TARGET is
-created in the current directory. When using the second form with more
-than one TARGET, the last argument must be a directory; create links
-in DIRECTORY to each TARGET. Create hard links by default, symbolic
-links with \fB\-\-symbolic\fR. When creating hard links, each TARGET must exist.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-backup\fR[=\fICONTROL\fR]
-make a backup of each existing destination file
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR
-like \fB\-\-backup\fR but does not accept an argument
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-F\fR, \fB\-\-directory\fR
-hard link directories (super-user only)
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-force\fR
-remove existing destination files
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-no\-dereference\fR
-treat destination that is a symlink to a
-directory as if it were a normal file
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-interactive\fR
-prompt whether to remove destinations
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-symbolic\fR
-make symbolic links instead of hard links
-.TP
-\fB\-S\fR, \fB\-\-suffix\fR=\fISUFFIX\fR
-override the usual backup suffix
-.TP
-\fB\-\-target\-directory\fR=\fIDIRECTORY\fR
-specify the DIRECTORY in which to create
-the links
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-print name of each file before linking
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-The backup suffix is `~', unless set with \fB\-\-suffix\fR or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.
-The version control method may be selected via the \fB\-\-backup\fR option or through
-the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values:
-.TP
-none, off
-never make backups (even if \fB\-\-backup\fR is given)
-.TP
-numbered, t
-make numbered backups
-.TP
-existing, nil
-numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise
-.TP
-simple, never
-always make simple backups
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Mike Parker and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B ln
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B ln
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info ln
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/loadkeys.1 b/raw/man1/loadkeys.1
deleted file mode 100644
index d188238..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/loadkeys.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,153 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)loadkeys.1
-.TH LOADKEYS 1 "6 Feb 1994"
-.SH NAME
-loadkeys \- load keyboard translation tables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B loadkeys
-[
-.I -c --clearcompose
-] [
-.I -d --default
-] [
-.I -h --help
-] [
-.I -m --mktable
-] [
-.I -s --clearstrings
-] [
-.I -v --verbose
-] [
-.I filename...
-]
-.LP
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "loadkeys command" "" "\fLloadkeys\fR command"
-.LP
-The program
-.B loadkeys
-reads the file or files specified by
-.IR filename... .
-Its main purpose is to load the kernel keymap for the console.
-.SH "RESET TO DEFAULT"
-If the
-.I -d
-(or
-.I --default
-) option is given,
-.B loadkeys
-loads a default keymap, probably the file
-.I defkeymap.map
-either in
-.I //lib/kbd/keymaps
-or in
-.IR /usr/src/linux/drivers/char .
-(Probably the former was user-defined, while the latter
-is a qwerty keyboard map for PCs - maybe not what was desired.)
-Sometimes, with a strange keymap loaded (with the minus on
-some obscure unknown modifier combination) it is easier to
-type `loadkeys defkeymap'.
-.SH "LOAD KERNEL KEYMAP"
-The main function of
-.B loadkeys
-is to load or modify the keyboard driver's translation tables.
-When specifying the file names, standard input can be denoted
-by dash (-). If no file is specified, the data is read from
-the standard input.
-.LP
-For many countries and keyboard types appropriate keymaps
-are available already, and a command like `loadkeys uk' might
-do what you want. On the other hand, it is easy to construct
-one's own keymap. The user has to tell what symbols belong
-to each key. She can find the keycode for a key by use of
-.BR showkey (1),
-while the keymap format is given in
-.BR keymaps (5)
-and can also be seen from the output of
-.BR dumpkeys (1).
-.SH "LOAD KERNEL ACCENT TABLE"
-If the input file does not contain any compose key definitions,
-the kernel accent table is left unchanged, unless the
-.I -c
-(or
-.I --clearcompose
-) option is given, in which case the kernel accent table is emptied.
-If the input file does contain compose key definitions, then all
-old definitions are removed, and replaced by the specified new entries.
-The kernel accent table is a sequence of (by default 68) entries
-describing how dead diacritical signs and compose keys behave.
-For example, a line
-.LP
-.RS
-compose ',' 'c' to ccedilla
-.RE
-.LP
-means that <ComposeKey><,><c> must be combined to <ccedilla>.
-The current content of this table can be see
-using `dumpkeys --compose-only'.
-.SH "LOAD KERNEL STRING TABLE"
-The option
-.I -s
-(or
-.I --clearstrings
-) clears the kernel string table. If this option is not given,
-.B loadkeys
-will only add or replace strings, not remove them.
-(Thus, the option \-s is required to reach a well-defined state.)
-The kernel string table is a sequence of strings
-with names like F31. One can make function key F5 (on
-an ordinary PC keyboard) produce the text `Hello!',
-and Shift+F5 `Goodbye!' using lines
-.LP
-.RS
-keycode 63 = F70 F71
-.br
-string F70 = "Hello!"
-.br
-string F71 = "Goodbye!"
-.RE
-.LP
-in the keymap.
-The default bindings for the function keys are certain
-escape sequences mostly inspired by the VT100 terminal.
-.SH "CREATE KERNEL SOURCE TABLE"
-If the
-.I -m
-(or
-.I --mktable
-) option is given
-.B loadkeys
-prints to the standard output a file that may be used as
-.I /usr/src/linux\%/drivers\%/char\%/defkeymap.c,
-specifying the default key bindings for a kernel
-(and does not modify the current keymap).
-.SH "OTHER OPTIONS"
-.TP
-.B \-h \-\-help
-.B loadkeys
-prints its version number and a short usage message to the programs
-standard error output and exits.
-.SH WARNING
-Note that anyone having read access to
-.B /dev/console
-can run
-.B loadkeys
-and thus change the keyboard layout, possibly making it unusable. Note
-that the keyboard translation table is common for all the virtual
-consoles, so any changes to the keyboard bindings affect all the virtual
-consoles simultaneously.
-.LP
-Note that because the changes affect all the virtual consoles, they also
-outlive your session. This means that even at the login prompt the key
-bindings may not be what the user expects.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.BI //lib/kbd/keymaps
-default directory for keymaps
-.LP
-.TP
-.BI /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/defkeymap.map
-default kernel keymap
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR dumpkeys (1),
-.BR keymaps (5)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/local.1 b/raw/man1/local.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/local.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/lockfile.1 b/raw/man1/lockfile.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a709dad..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/lockfile.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,290 +0,0 @@
-.\"if n .pl +(135i-\n(.pu)
-.de Id
-.ds Rv \\$3
-.ds Dt \\$4
-..
-.Id $Id: lockfile.1,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.TH LOCKFILE 1 \*(Dt BuGless
-.rn SH Sh
-.de SH
-.br
-.ne 11
-.Sh "\\$1"
-..
-.rn SS Ss
-.de SS
-.br
-.ne 10
-.Ss "\\$1"
-..
-.rn TP Tp
-.de TP
-.br
-.ne 9
-.Tp \\$1
-..
-.rn RS Rs
-.de RS
-.na
-.nf
-.Rs
-..
-.rn RE Re
-.de RE
-.Re
-.fi
-.ad
-..
-.de Sx
-.PP
-.ne \\$1
-.RS
-..
-.de Ex
-.RE
-.PP
-..
-.na
-.SH NAME
-lockfile \- conditional semaphore-file creator
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B lockfile
-.I "\fB\-\fPsleeptime"
-|
-.I "\fB\-r \fPretries"
-|
-.if n .ti +0.5i
-.I "\fB\-l \fPlocktimeout"
-|
-.I "\fB\-s \fPsuspend"
-|
-.B "\-!"
-|
-.B "\-ml"
-|
-.B "\-mu"
-|
-.I filename
-\&.\|.\|.
-.ad
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B lockfile
-can be used to create one or more
-.I semaphore
-.IR files .
-If lockfile can't create all the specified files (in the specified order),
-it waits
-.I sleeptime
-(defaults to 8) seconds and retries the last file that didn't
-succeed. You can specify the number of
-.I retries
-to do until failure is returned.
-If the number of
-.I retries
-is \-1 (default, i.e.,
-.BR \-r\-1 )
-lockfile will retry forever.
-.PP
-If the number of
-.I retries
-expires before all files have been created, lockfile returns failure and
-removes all the files it created up till that point.
-.PP
-Using lockfile as the condition of a loop in a shell script can be done
-easily by using the
-.B \-!
-flag to invert the exit status. To prevent infinite loops, failures
-for any reason other than the lockfile already existing are not
-inverted to success but rather are still returned as failures.
-.PP
-All flags can be specified anywhere on the command line, they will be
-processed when encountered. The command line is simply parsed from
-left to right.
-.PP
-All files created by lockfile will be read-only, and therefore
-will have to be removed with
-.B rm
-.BR \-f .
-.PP
-If you specify a
-.I locktimeout
-then a lockfile will be removed by force after locktimeout seconds have
-passed since the lockfile was last modified/created (most likely by some
-other program that unexpectedly died a long time ago, and hence could not clean
-up any leftover lockfiles). Lockfile is clock skew immune. After a lockfile
-has been removed by force, a suspension of
-.I suspend
-seconds (defaults to 16) is taken into account, in order to prevent
-the inadvertent immediate removal of any newly created lockfile by another
-program (compare
-.BR SUSPEND
-in
-.BR procmail (1)).
-.SS "Mailbox locks"
-If the permissions on the system mail spool directory allow it, or if lockfile
-is suitably setgid, it will be able to lock and unlock your system mailbox by
-using the options
-.B "\-ml"
-and
-.B "\-mu"
-respectively.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-Suppose you want to make sure that access to the file "important" is
-serialised, i.e., no more than one program or shell script should be allowed
-to access it. For simplicity's sake, let's suppose that it is a shell
-script. In this case you could solve it like this:
-.RS
-\&.\|.\|.
-lockfile important.lock
-\&.\|.\|.
-access_"important"_to_your_hearts_content
-\&.\|.\|.
-rm \-f important.lock
-\&.\|.\|.
-.RE
-Now if all the scripts that access "important" follow this guideline, you
-will be assured that at most one script will be executing between the
-`lockfile' and the `rm' commands.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP 2.3i
-.B LOGNAME
-used as a hint to determine the invoker's loginname
-.SH FILES
-.TP 2.3i
-.B /etc/passwd
-to verify and/or correct the invoker's loginname (and to find out his HOME
-directory, if needed)
-.TP
-.B /var/spool/mail/$LOGNAME.lock
-lockfile for the system mailbox, the environment variables present in here
-will not be taken from the environment, but will be determined by looking
-in /etc/passwd
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.na
-.nh
-.BR rm (1),
-.BR mail (1),
-.BR binmail (1),
-.BR sendmail (8),
-.BR procmail (1)
-.hy
-.ad
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-.TP 2.3i
-Filename too long, .\|.\|.
-Use shorter filenames.
-.TP
-Forced unlock denied on "x"
-No write permission in the directory where lockfile "x" resides, or more than
-one lockfile trying to force a lock at exactly the same time.
-.TP
-Forcing lock on "x"
-Lockfile "x" is going to be removed by force because of a timeout
-(compare
-.BR LOCKTIMEOUT
-in
-.BR procmail (1)).
-.TP
-Out of memory, .\|.\|.
-The system is out of swap space.
-.TP
-Signal received, .\|.\|.
-Lockfile will remove anything it created till now and terminate.
-.TP
-Sorry, .\|.\|.
-The
-.I retries
-limit has been reached.
-.TP
-Truncating "x" and retrying lock
-"x" does not seem to be a valid filename.
-.TP
-Try praying, .\|.\|.
-Missing subdirectories or insufficient privileges.
-.SH BUGS
-Definitely less than one.
-.SH WARNINGS
-The behavior of the
-.B \-!
-flag, while useful, is not necessarily intuitive or consistent. When
-testing lockfile's return value, shell script writers should consider
-carefully whether they want to use the
-.B \-!
-flag, simply reverse the test, or do a switch on the exact exitcode.
-In general, the
-.B \-!
-flag should only be used when lockfile is the conditional of a loop.
-.SH MISCELLANEOUS
-Lockfile is NFS-resistant and eight-bit clean.
-.SH NOTES
-Calling up lockfile with the \-h or \-? options will cause
-it to display a command-line help page. Calling it up with the \-v
-option will cause it to display its version information.
-.PP
-Multiple
-.B \-!
-flags will toggle the return status.
-.PP
-Since flags can occur anywhere on the command line, any filename starting
-with a '-' has to be preceded by './'.
-.PP
-The number of
-.I retries
-will not be reset when any following file is being created (i.e., they are
-simply used up). It can, however, be reset by specifying
-.RI \-r newretries
-after every file on the command line.
-.PP
-Although files with any name can be used as lockfiles, it is common practice
-to use the extension `.lock' to lock mailfolders (it is appended to the
-mailfolder name). In case one does not want to have to worry about too long
-filenames and does not have to conform to any other lockfilename convention,
-then an excellent way to generate a lockfilename corresponding to some already
-existing file is by taking the prefix `lock.' and appending the i-node number
-of the file which is to be locked.
-.Sh SOURCE
-This program is part of the
-.I procmail mail-processing-package
-(v3.22) available at http://www.procmail.org/ or
-ftp.procmail.org in
-.BR pub/procmail/ .
-.Sh MAILINGLIST
-There exists a mailinglist for questions relating to any program in the
-procmail package:
-.RS
-<procmail-users at procmail.org>
-.RS
-for submitting questions/answers.
-.RE
-<procmail-users-request at procmail.org>
-.RS
-for subscription requests.
-.RE
-.PP
-.RE
-If you would like to stay informed about new versions and official patches send
-a subscription request to
-.RS
-procmail-announce-request at procmail.org
-.RE
-(this is a readonly list).
-.SH AUTHORS
-Stephen R. van den Berg
-.RS
-<srb at cuci.nl>
-.RE
-Philip A. Guenther
-.RS
-<guenther at sendmail.com>
-.RE
-.\".if n .pl -(\n(.tu-1i)
-.rm SH
-.rn Sh SH
-.rm SS
-.rn Ss SS
-.rm TP
-.rn Tp TP
-.rm RS
-.rn Rs RS
-.rm RE
-.rn Re RE
diff --git a/raw/man1/logname.1 b/raw/man1/logname.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 607b73c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/logname.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH LOGNAME "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-logname \- print user\'s login name
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B logname
-[\fIOPTION\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print the name of the current user.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by FIXME: unknown.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B logname
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B logname
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info logname
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/logout.1 b/raw/man1/logout.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/logout.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/ls.1 b/raw/man1/ls.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 0235d11..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ls.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,233 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH LS "1" "October 2003" "ls (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-ls \- list directory contents
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B ls
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-List information about the FILEs (the current directory by default).
-Sort entries alphabetically if none of \fB\-cftuSUX\fR nor \fB\-\-sort\fR.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-all\fR
-do not hide entries starting with .
-.TP
-\fB\-A\fR, \fB\-\-almost\-all\fR
-do not list implied . and ..
-.TP
-\fB\-\-author\fR
-print the author of each file
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-escape\fR
-print octal escapes for nongraphic characters
-.TP
-\fB\-\-block\-size\fR=\fISIZE\fR
-use SIZE-byte blocks
-.TP
-\fB\-B\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\-backups\fR
-do not list implied entries ending with ~
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR
-with \fB\-lt\fR: sort by, and show, ctime (time of last
-modification of file status information)
-with \fB\-l\fR: show ctime and sort by name
-otherwise: sort by ctime
-.TP
-\fB\-C\fR
-list entries by columns
-.TP
-\fB\-\-color\fR[=\fIWHEN\fR]
-control whether color is used to distinguish file
-types. WHEN may be `never', `always', or `auto'
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-directory\fR
-list directory entries instead of contents,
-and do not dereference symbolic links
-.TP
-\fB\-D\fR, \fB\-\-dired\fR
-generate output designed for Emacs' dired mode
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR
-do not sort, enable \fB\-aU\fR, disable \fB\-lst\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-F\fR, \fB\-\-classify\fR
-append indicator (one of */=@|) to entries
-.TP
-\fB\-\-format\fR=\fIWORD\fR
-across \fB\-x\fR, commas \fB\-m\fR, horizontal \fB\-x\fR, long \fB\-l\fR,
-single-column \fB\-1\fR, verbose \fB\-l\fR, vertical \fB\-C\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-full\-time\fR
-like \fB\-l\fR \fB\-\-time\-style\fR=\fIfull\-iso\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-g\fR
-like \fB\-l\fR, but do not list owner
-.TP
-\fB\-G\fR, \fB\-\-no\-group\fR
-inhibit display of group information
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-human\-readable\fR
-print sizes in human readable format (e.g., 1K 234M 2G)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-si\fR
-likewise, but use powers of 1000 not 1024
-.TP
-\fB\-H\fR, \fB\-\-dereference\-command\-line\fR
-follow symbolic links listed on the command line
-.TP
-\fB\-\-dereference\-command\-line\-symlink\-to\-dir\fR
-follow each command line symbolic link
-.IP
-that points to a directory
-.TP
-\fB\-\-indicator\-style\fR=\fIWORD\fR append indicator with style WORD to entry names:
-none (default), classify (-F), file-type (-p)
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-inode\fR
-print index number of each file
-.TP
-\fB\-I\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\fR=\fIPATTERN\fR
-do not list implied entries matching shell PATTERN
-.TP
-\fB\-k\fR
-like \fB\-\-block\-size\fR=\fI1K\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR
-use a long listing format
-.TP
-\fB\-L\fR, \fB\-\-dereference\fR
-when showing file information for a symbolic
-link, show information for the file the link
-references rather than for the link itself
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR
-fill width with a comma separated list of entries
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-numeric\-uid\-gid\fR
-like \fB\-l\fR, but list numeric UIDs and GIDs
-.TP
-\fB\-N\fR, \fB\-\-literal\fR
-print raw entry names (don't treat e.g. control
-characters specially)
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR
-like \fB\-l\fR, but do not list group information
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-file\-type\fR
-append indicator (one of /=@|) to entries
-.TP
-\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-hide\-control\-chars\fR
-print ? instead of non graphic characters
-.TP
-\fB\-\-show\-control\-chars\fR
-show non graphic characters as-is (default
-unless program is `ls' and output is a terminal)
-.TP
-\fB\-Q\fR, \fB\-\-quote\-name\fR
-enclose entry names in double quotes
-.TP
-\fB\-\-quoting\-style\fR=\fIWORD\fR
-use quoting style WORD for entry names:
-literal, locale, shell, shell-always, c, escape
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-reverse\fR
-reverse order while sorting
-.TP
-\fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-recursive\fR
-list subdirectories recursively
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-size\fR
-print size of each file, in blocks
-.TP
-\fB\-S\fR
-sort by file size
-.TP
-\fB\-\-sort\fR=\fIWORD\fR
-extension \fB\-X\fR, none \fB\-U\fR, size \fB\-S\fR, time \fB\-t\fR,
-version \fB\-v\fR
-.IP
-status \fB\-c\fR, time \fB\-t\fR, atime \fB\-u\fR, access \fB\-u\fR, use \fB\-u\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-time\fR=\fIWORD\fR
-show time as WORD instead of modification time:
-atime, access, use, ctime or status; use
-specified time as sort key if \fB\-\-sort\fR=\fItime\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-time\-style\fR=\fISTYLE\fR
-show times using style STYLE:
-full-iso, long-iso, iso, locale, +FORMAT
-.IP
-FORMAT is interpreted like `date'; if FORMAT is
-FORMAT1<newline>FORMAT2, FORMAT1 applies to
-non-recent files and FORMAT2 to recent files;
-if STYLE is prefixed with `posix-', STYLE
-takes effect only outside the POSIX locale
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR
-sort by modification time
-.TP
-\fB\-T\fR, \fB\-\-tabsize\fR=\fICOLS\fR
-assume tab stops at each COLS instead of 8
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR
-with \fB\-lt\fR: sort by, and show, access time
-with \fB\-l\fR: show access time and sort by name
-otherwise: sort by access time
-.TP
-\fB\-U\fR
-do not sort; list entries in directory order
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR
-sort by version
-.TP
-\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-width\fR=\fICOLS\fR
-assume screen width instead of current value
-.TP
-\fB\-x\fR
-list entries by lines instead of by columns
-.TP
-\fB\-X\fR
-sort alphabetically by entry extension
-.TP
-\fB\-1\fR
-list one file per line
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-SIZE may be (or may be an integer optionally followed by) one of following:
-kB 1000, K 1024, MB 1,000,000, M 1,048,576, and so on for G, T, P, E, Z, Y.
-.PP
-By default, color is not used to distinguish types of files. That is
-equivalent to using \fB\-\-color\fR=\fInone\fR. Using the \fB\-\-color\fR option without the
-optional WHEN argument is equivalent to using \fB\-\-color\fR=\fIalways\fR. With
-\fB\-\-color\fR=\fIauto\fR, color codes are output only if standard output is connected
-to a terminal (tty).
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B ls
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B ls
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info ls
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/lsattr.1 b/raw/man1/lsattr.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 20f99c3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/lsattr.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.TH LSATTR 1 "July 2003" "E2fsprogs version 1.34"
-.SH NAME
-lsattr \- list file attributes on a Linux second extended file system
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B lsattr
-[
-.B \-RVadv
-]
-[
-.I files...
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B lsattr
-lists the file attributes on a second extended file system. See
-.BR chattr (1)
-for a description of the attributes and what they mean.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Recursively list attributes of directories and their contents.
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Display the program version.
-.TP
-.B \-a
-List all files in directories, including files that start with `.'.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-List directories like other files, rather than listing their contents.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-List the file's version/generation number.
-.SH AUTHOR
-.B lsattr
-was written by Remy Card <Remy.Card at linux.org>.
-.SH BUGS
-There are none :-).
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-.B lsattr
-is part of the e2fsprogs package and is available from
-http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chattr (1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/mail.1 b/raw/man1/mail.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3b2ed03..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mail.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1041 +0,0 @@
-.\" $OpenBSD: mail.1,v 1.5 1994/06/29 05:09:32 deraadt Exp $
-.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1990, 1993
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" from: @(#)mail.1 8.2 (Berkeley) 12/30/93
-.\"
-.Dd December 30, 1993
-.Dt MAIL 1
-.Os BSD 4
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm mail
-.Nd send and receive mail
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm mail
-.Op Fl iInv
-.Op Fl s Ar subject
-.Op Fl c Ar cc-addr
-.Op Fl b Ar bcc-addr
-.Ar to-addr...
-.Nm mail
-.Op Fl iInNv
-.Fl f
-.Op Ar name
-.Nm mail
-.Op Fl iInNv
-.Op Fl u Ar user
-.Sh INTRODUCTION
-.Nm Mail
-is an intelligent mail processing system, which has
-a command syntax reminiscent of
-.Xr \&ed 1
-with lines replaced by messages.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width flag
-.It Fl v
-Verbose mode.
-The details of
-delivery are displayed on the user's terminal.
-.It Fl i
-Ignore tty interrupt signals.
-This is
-particularly useful when using
-.Nm mail
-on noisy phone lines.
-.It Fl I
-Forces mail to run in interactive mode even when
-input isn't a terminal.
-In particular, the
-.Sq Ic \&~
-special
-character when sending mail is only active in interactive mode.
-.It Fl n
-Inhibits reading
-.Pa /etc/mail.rc
-upon startup.
-.It Fl N
-Inhibits the initial display of message headers
-when reading mail or editing a mail folder.
-.It Fl s
-Specify subject on command line
-(only the first argument after the
-.Fl s
-flag is used as a subject; be careful to quote subjects
-containing spaces.)
-.It Fl c
-Send carbon copies to
-.Ar list
-of users.
-.It Fl b
-Send blind carbon copies to
-.Ar list .
-List should be a comma-separated list of names.
-.It Fl f
-Read in the contents of your
-.Ar mbox
-(or the specified file)
-for processing; when you
-.Ar quit ,
-.Nm mail
-writes undeleted messages back to this file.
-.It Fl u
-Is equivalent to:
-.Pp
-.Dl mail -f /var/spool/mail/user
-.El
-.Ss Sending mail
-To send a message to one or more people,
-.Nm mail
-can be invoked with arguments which are the names of people to
-whom the mail will be sent.
-You are then expected to type in
-your message, followed
-by an
-.Sq Li control\-D
-at the beginning of a line.
-The section below
-.Ar Replying to or originating mail ,
-describes some features of
-.Nm mail
-available to help you compose your letter.
-.Pp
-.Ss Reading mail
-In normal usage
-.Nm mail
-is given no arguments and checks your mail out of the
-post office, then
-prints out a one line header of each message found.
-The current message is initially the first message (numbered 1)
-and can be printed using the
-.Ic print
-command (which can be abbreviated
-.Ql Ic p ) .
-You can move among the messages much as you move between lines in
-.Xr \&ed 1 ,
-with the commands
-.Ql Ic \&+
-and
-.Ql Ic \&\-
-moving backwards and forwards, and
-simple numbers.
-.Pp
-.Ss Disposing of mail.
-After examining a message you can
-.Ic delete
-.Ql Ic d )
-the message or
-.Ic reply
-.Ql Ic r )
-to it.
-Deletion causes the
-.Nm mail
-program to forget about the message.
-This is not irreversible; the message can be
-.Ic undeleted
-.Ql Ic u )
-by giving its number, or the
-.Nm mail
-session can be aborted by giving the
-.Ic exit
-.Ql Ic x )
-command.
-Deleted messages will, however, usually disappear never to be seen again.
-.Pp
-.Ss Specifying messages
-Commands such as
-.Ic print
-and
-.Ic delete
-can be given a list of message numbers as arguments to apply
-to a number of messages at once.
-Thus
-.Dq Li delete 1 2
-deletes messages 1 and 2, while
-.Dq Li delete 1\-5
-deletes messages 1 through 5.
-The special name
-.Ql Li \&*
-addresses all messages, and
-.Ql Li \&$
-addresses
-the last message; thus the command
-.Ic top
-which prints the first few lines of a message could be used in
-.Dq Li top \&*
-to print the first few lines of all messages.
-.Pp
-.Ss Replying to or originating mail.
-You can use the
-.Ic reply
-command to
-set up a response to a message, sending it back to the
-person who it was from.
-Text you then type in, up to an end-of-file,
-defines the contents of the message.
-While you are composing a message,
-.Nm mail
-treats lines beginning with the character
-.Ql Ic \&~
-specially.
-For instance, typing
-.Ql Ic \&~m
-(alone on a line) will place a copy
-of the current message into the response right shifting it by a tabstop
-(see
-.Em indentprefix
-variable, below).
-Other escapes will set up subject fields, add and delete recipients
-to the message and allow you to escape to an editor to revise the
-message or to a shell to run some commands.
-(These options
-are given in the summary below.)
-.Pp
-.Ss Ending a mail processing session.
-You can end a
-.Nm mail
-session with the
-.Ic quit
-.Ql Ic q )
-command.
-Messages which have been examined go to your
-.Ar mbox
-file unless they have been deleted in which case they are discarded.
-Unexamined messages go back to the post office.
-(See the
-.Fl f
-option above).
-.Pp
-.Ss Personal and systemwide distribution lists.
-It is also possible to create a personal distribution lists so that,
-for instance, you can send mail to
-.Dq Li cohorts
-and have it go
-to a group of people.
-Such lists can be defined by placing a line like
-.Pp
-.Dl alias cohorts bill ozalp jkf mark kridle at ucbcory
-.Pp
-in the file
-.Pa \&.mailrc
-in your home directory.
-The current list of such aliases can be displayed with the
-.Ic alias
-command in
-.Nm mail .
-System wide distribution lists can be created by editing
-.Pa /etc/aliases ,
-see
-.Xr aliases 5
-and
-.Xr sendmail 8 ;
-these are kept in a different syntax.
-In mail you send, personal aliases will be expanded in mail sent
-to others so that they will be able to
-.Ic reply
-to the recipients.
-System wide
-.Ic aliases
-are not expanded when the mail is sent,
-but any reply returned to the machine will have the system wide
-alias expanded as all mail goes through
-.Xr sendmail .
-.Pp
-.Ss Network mail (ARPA, UUCP, Berknet)
-See
-.Xr mailaddr 7
-for a description of network addresses.
-.Pp
-.Nm Mail
-has a number of options which can be set in the
-.Pa .mailrc
-file to alter its behavior; thus
-.Dq Li set askcc
-enables the
-.Ar askcc
-feature.
-(These options are summarized below.)
-.Sh SUMMARY
-(Adapted from the `Mail Reference Manual')
-.Pp
-Each command is typed on a line by itself, and may take arguments
-following the command word.
-The command need not be typed in its
-entirety \- the first command which matches the typed prefix is used.
-For commands which take message lists as arguments, if no message
-list is given, then the next message forward which satisfies the
-command's requirements is used.
-If there are no messages forward of
-the current message, the search proceeds backwards, and if there are no
-good messages at all,
-.Nm mail
-types
-.Dq Li No applicable messages
-and
-aborts the command.
-.Bl -tag -width delete
-.It Ic \&\-
-Print out the preceding message.
-If given a numeric
-argument
-.Ar n ,
-goes to the
-.Ar n Ns 'th
-previous message and prints it.
-.It Ic \&?
-Prints a brief summary of commands.
-.It Ic \&!
-Executes the shell
-(see
-.Xr sh 1
-and
-.Xr csh 1 )
-command which follows.
-.It Ic Print
-.Pq Ic P
-Like
-.Ic print
-but also prints out ignored header fields.
-See also
-.Ic print ,
-.Ic ignore
-and
-.Ic retain .
-.It Ic Reply
-.Pq Ic R
-Reply to originator.
-Does not reply to other
-recipients of the original message.
-.It Ic Type
-.Pq Ic T
-Identical to the
-.Ic Print
-command.
-.It Ic alias
-.Pq Ic a
-With no arguments, prints out all currently-defined aliases.
-With one
-argument, prints out that alias.
-With more than one argument, creates
-a new alias or changes an old one.
-.It Ic alternates
-.Pq Ic alt
-The
-.Ic alternates
-command is useful if you have accounts on several machines.
-It can be used to inform
-.Nm mail
-that the listed addresses are really you.
-When you
-.Ic reply
-to messages,
-.Nm mail
-will not send a copy of the message to any of the addresses
-listed on the
-.Ic alternates
-list.
-If the
-.Ic alternates
-command is given with no argument, the current set of alternate
-names is displayed.
-.It Ic chdir
-.Pq Ic c
-Changes the user's working directory to that specified, if given.
-If
-no directory is given, then changes to the user's login directory.
-.It Ic copy
-.Pq Ic co
-The
-.Ic copy
-command does the same thing that
-.Ic save
-does, except that it does not mark the messages it
-is used on for deletion when you quit.
-.It Ic delete
-.Pq Ic d
-Takes a list of messages as argument and marks them all as deleted.
-Deleted messages will not be saved in
-.Ar mbox ,
-nor will they be available for most other commands.
-.It Ic dp
-(also
-.Ic dt )
-Deletes the current message and prints the next message.
-If there is no next message,
-.Nm mail
-says
-.Dq Li "at EOF" .
-.It Ic edit
-.Pq Ic e
-Takes a list of messages and points the text editor at each one in
-turn.
-On return from the editor, the message is read back in.
-.It Ic exit
-.Pf ( Ic ex
-or
-.Ic x )
-Effects an immediate return to the Shell without
-modifying the user's system mailbox, his
-.Ar mbox
-file, or his edit file in
-.Fl f .
-.It Ic file
-.Pq Ic fi
-The same as
-.Ic folder .
-.It Ic folders
-List the names of the folders in your folder directory.
-.It Ic folder
-.Pq Ic fo
-The
-.Ic folder
-command switches to a new mail file or folder.
-With no
-arguments, it tells you which file you are currently reading.
-If you give it an argument, it will write out changes (such
-as deletions) you have made in the current file and read in
-the new file.
-Some special conventions are recognized for
-the name.
-# means the previous file, % means your system
-mailbox, %user means user's system mailbox, & means
-your
-.Ar mbox
-file, and
-\&+\&folder means a file in your folder
-directory.
-.It Ic from
-.Pq Ic f
-Takes a list of messages and prints their message headers.
-.It Ic headers
-.Pq Ic h
-Lists the current range of headers, which is an 18\-message group.
-If
-a
-.Ql \&+
-argument is given, then the next 18\-message group is printed, and if
-a
-.Ql \&\-
-argument is given, the previous 18\-message group is printed.
-.It Ic help
-A synonym for
-.Ic \&?
-.It Ic hold
-.Pf ( Ic ho ,
-also
-.Ic preserve )
-Takes a message list and marks each
-message therein to be saved in the
-user's system mailbox instead of in
-.Ar mbox .
-Does not override the
-.Ic delete
-command.
-.It Ic ignore
-Add the list of header fields named to the
-.Ar ignored list .
-Header fields in the ignore list are not printed
-on your terminal when you print a message.
-This
-command is very handy for suppression of certain machine-generated
-header fields.
-The
-.Ic Type
-and
-.Ic Print
-commands can be used to print a message in its entirety, including
-ignored fields.
-If
-.Ic ignore
-is executed with no arguments, it lists the current set of
-ignored fields.
-.It Ic mail
-.Pq Ic m
-Takes as argument login names and distribution group names and sends
-mail to those people.
-.It Ic mbox
-Indicate that a list of messages be sent to
-.Ic mbox
-in your home directory when you quit.
-This is the default
-action for messages if you do
-.Em not
-have the
-.Ic hold
-option set.
-.It Ic next
-.Pq Ic n
-like
-.Ic \&+
-or
-.Tn CR )
-Goes to the next message in sequence and types it.
-With an argument list, types the next matching message.
-.It Ic preserve
-.Pq Ic pre
-A synonym for
-.Ic hold .
-.It Ic print
-.Pq Ic p
-Takes a message list and types out each message on the user's terminal.
-.It Ic quit
-.Pq Ic q
-Terminates the session, saving all undeleted, unsaved messages in
-the user's
-.Ar mbox
-file in his login directory, preserving all messages marked with
-.Ic hold
-or
-.Ic preserve
-or never referenced
-in his system mailbox, and removing all other messages from his system
-mailbox.
-If new mail has arrived during the session, the message
-.Dq Li "You have new mail"
-is given.
-If given while editing a
-mailbox file with the
-.Fl f
-flag, then the edit file is rewritten.
-A return to the Shell is
-effected, unless the rewrite of edit file fails, in which case the user
-can escape with the
-.Ic exit
-command.
-.It Ic reply
-.Pq Ic r
-Takes a message list and sends mail to the sender and all
-recipients of the specified message.
-The default message must not be deleted.
-.It Ic respond
-A synonym for
-.Ic reply .
-.It Ic retain
-Add the list of header fields named to the
-.Ar retained list
-Only the header fields in the retain list
-are shown on your terminal when you print a message.
-All other header fields are suppressed.
-The
-.Ic Type
-and
-.Ic Print
-commands can be used to print a message in its entirety.
-If
-.Ic retain
-is executed with no arguments, it lists the current set of
-retained fields.
-.It Ic save
-.Pq Ic s
-Takes a message list and a filename and appends each message in
-turn to the end of the file.
-The filename in quotes, followed by the line
-count and character count is echoed on the user's terminal.
-.It Ic set
-.Pq Ic se
-With no arguments, prints all variable values.
-Otherwise, sets
-option.
-Arguments are of the form
-.Ar option=value
-(no space before or after =) or
-.Ar option .
-Quotation marks may be placed around any part of the assignment statement to
-quote blanks or tabs, i.e.
-.Dq Li "set indentprefix=\*q->\*q"
-.It Ic saveignore
-.Ic Saveignore
-is to
-.Ic save
-what
-.Ic ignore
-is to
-.Ic print
-and
-.Ic type .
-Header fields thus marked are filtered out when
-saving a message by
-.Ic save
-or when automatically saving to
-.Ar mbox .
-.It Ic saveretain
-.Ic Saveretain
-is to
-.Ic save
-what
-.Ic retain
-is to
-.Ic print
-and
-.Ic type .
-Header fields thus marked are the only ones saved
-with a message when saving by
-.Ic save
-or when automatically saving to
-.Ar mbox .
-.Ic Saveretain
-overrides
-.Ic saveignore .
-.It Ic shell
-.Pq Ic sh
-Invokes an interactive version of the shell.
-.It Ic size
-Takes a message list and prints out the size in characters of each
-message.
-.It Ic source
-The
-.Ic source
-command reads
-commands from a file.
-.It Ic top
-Takes a message list and prints the top few lines of each.
-The number of
-lines printed is controlled by the variable
-.Ic toplines
-and defaults to five.
-.It Ic type
-.Pq Ic t
-A synonym for
-.Ic print .
-.It Ic unalias
-Takes a list of names defined by
-.Ic alias
-commands and discards the remembered groups of users.
-The group names
-no longer have any significance.
-.It Ic undelete
-.Pq Ic u
-Takes a message list and marks each message as
-.Ic not
-being deleted.
-.It Ic unread
-.Pq Ic U
-Takes a message list and marks each message as
-.Ic not
-having been read.
-.It Ic unset
-Takes a list of option names and discards their remembered values;
-the inverse of
-.Ic set .
-.It Ic visual
-.Pq Ic v
-Takes a message list and invokes the display editor on each message.
-.It Ic write
-.Pq Ic w
-Similar to
-.Ic save ,
-except that
-.Ic only
-the message body
-.Pq Ar without
-the header) is saved.
-Extremely useful for such tasks as sending and receiving source
-program text over the message system.
-.It Ic xit
-.Pq Ic x
-A synonym for
-.Ic exit .
-.It Ic z
-.Nm Mail
-presents message headers in windowfuls as described under the
-.Ic headers
-command.
-You can move
-.Nm mail Ns 's
-attention forward to the next window with the
-.Ic \&z
-command.
-Also, you can move to the previous window by using
-.Ic \&z\&\- .
-.El
-.Ss Tilde/Escapes
-.Pp
-Here is a summary of the tilde escapes,
-which are used when composing messages to perform
-special functions.
-Tilde escapes are only recognized at the beginning
-of lines.
-The name
-.Dq Em tilde\ escape
-is somewhat of a misnomer since the actual escape character can be set
-by the option
-.Ic escape .
-.Bl -tag -width Ds
-.It Ic \&~! Ns Ar command
-Execute the indicated shell command, then return to the message.
-.It Ic \&~b Ns Ar name ...
-Add the given names to the list of carbon copy recipients but do not make
-the names visible in the Cc: line ("blind" carbon copy).
-.It Ic \&~c Ns Ar name ...
-Add the given names to the list of carbon copy recipients.
-.It Ic \&~d
-Read the file
-.Dq Pa dead.letter
-from your home directory into the message.
-.It Ic \&~e
-Invoke the text editor on the message collected so far.
-After the
-editing session is finished, you may continue appending text to the
-message.
-.It Ic \&~f Ns Ar messages
-Read the named messages into the message being sent.
-If no messages are specified, read in the current message.
-Message headers currently being ignored (by the
-.Ic ignore
-or
-.Ic retain
-command) are not included.
-.It Ic \&~F Ns Ar messages
-Identical to
-.Ic \&~f ,
-except all message headers are included.
-.It Ic \&~h
-Edit the message header fields by typing each one in turn and allowing
-the user to append text to the end or modify the field by using the
-current terminal erase and kill characters.
-.It Ic \&~m Ns Ar messages
-Read the named messages into the message being sent, indented by a
-tab or by the value of
-.Ar indentprefix .
-If no messages are specified,
-read the current message.
-Message headers currently being ignored (by the
-.Ic ignore
-or
-.Ic retain
-command) are not included.
-.It Ic \&~M Ns Ar messages
-Identical to
-.Ic \&~m ,
-except all message headers are included.
-.It Ic \&~p
-Print out the message collected so far, prefaced by the message header
-fields.
-.It Ic \&~q
-Abort the message being sent, copying the message to
-.Dq Pa dead.letter
-in your home directory if
-.Ic save
-is set.
-.It Ic \&~r Ns Ar filename
-Read the named file into the message.
-.It Ic \&~s Ns Ar string
-Cause the named string to become the current subject field.
-.It Ic \&~\&t Ns Ar name ...
-Add the given names to the direct recipient list.
-.It Ic \&~\&v
-Invoke an alternate editor (defined by the
-.Ev VISUAL
-option) on the
-message collected so far.
-Usually, the alternate editor will be a
-screen editor.
-After you quit the editor, you may resume appending
-text to the end of your message.
-.It Ic \&~w Ns Ar filename
-Write the message onto the named file.
-.It Ic \&~\&| Ns Ar command
-Pipe the message through the command as a filter.
-If the command gives
-no output or terminates abnormally, retain the original text of the
-message.
-The command
-.Xr fmt 1
-is often used as
-.Ic command
-to rejustify the message.
-.It Ic \&~: Ns Ar mail-command
-Execute the given mail command.
-Not all commands, however, are allowed.
-.It Ic \&~~ Ns Ar string
-Insert the string of text in the message prefaced by a single ~.
-If
-you have changed the escape character, then you should double
-that character in order to send it.
-.El
-.Ss Mail Options
-Options are controlled via
-.Ic set
-and
-.Ic unset
-commands.
-Options may be either binary, in which case it is only
-significant to see whether they are set or not; or string, in which
-case the actual value is of interest.
-The binary options include the following:
-.Bl -tag -width append
-.It Ar append
-Causes messages saved in
-.Ar mbox
-to be appended to the end rather than prepended.
-This should always be set (perhaps in
-.Pa /etc/mail.rc ) .
-.It Ar ask, asksub
-Causes
-.Nm mail
-to prompt you for the subject of each message you send.
-If
-you respond with simply a newline, no subject field will be sent.
-.It Ar askcc
-Causes you to be prompted for additional carbon copy recipients at the
-end of each message.
-Responding with a newline indicates your
-satisfaction with the current list.
-.It Ar askbcc
-Causes you to be prompted for additional blind carbon copy recipients at the
-end of each message.
-Responding with a newline indicates your
-satisfaction with the current list.
-.It Ar autoprint
-Causes the
-.Ic delete
-command to behave like
-.Ic dp
-\- thus, after deleting a message, the next one will be typed
-automatically.
-.It Ar debug
-Setting the binary option
-.Ar debug
-is the same as specifying
-.Fl d
-on the command line and causes
-.Nm mail
-to output all sorts of information useful for debugging
-.Nm mail .
-.It Ar dot
-The binary option
-.Ar dot
-causes
-.Nm mail
-to interpret a period alone on a line as the terminator
-of a message you are sending.
-.It Ar hold
-This option is used to hold messages in the system mailbox
-by default.
-.It Ar ignore
-Causes interrupt signals from your terminal to be ignored and echoed as
-@'s.
-.It Ar ignoreeof
-An option related to
-.Ar dot
-is
-.Ar ignoreeof
-which makes
-.Nm mail
-refuse to accept a control-d as the end of a message.
-.Ar Ignoreeof
-also applies to
-.Nm mail
-command mode.
-.It Ar metoo
-Usually, when a group is expanded that contains the sender, the sender
-is removed from the expansion.
-Setting this option causes the sender
-to be included in the group.
-.It Ar noheader
-Setting the option
-.Ar noheader
-is the same as giving the
-.Fl N
-flag on the command line.
-.It Ar nosave
-Normally, when you abort a message with two
-.Tn RUBOUT
-(erase or delete)
-.Nm mail
-copies the partial letter to the file
-.Dq Pa dead.letter
-in your home directory.
-Setting the binary option
-.Ar nosave
-prevents this.
-.It Ar Replyall
-Reverses the sense of
-.Ic reply
-and
-.Ic Reply
-commands.
-.It Ar quiet
-Suppresses the printing of the version when first invoked.
-.It Ar searchheaders
-If this option is set, then a message-list specifier in the form ``/x:y''
-will expand to all messages containing the substring ``y'' in the header
-field ``x''. The string search is case insensitive.
-.It Ar verbose
-Setting the option
-.Ar verbose
-is the same as using the
-.Fl v
-flag on the command line.
-When mail runs in verbose mode,
-the actual delivery of messages is displayed on the user's
-terminal.
-.El
-.Ss Option String Values
-.Bl -tag -width Va
-.It Ev EDITOR
-Pathname of the text editor to use in the
-.Ic edit
-command and
-.Ic \&~e
-escape.
-If not defined, then a default editor is used.
-.It Ev LISTER
-Pathname of the directory lister to use in the
-.Ic folders
-command.
-Default is
-.Pa /bin/ls .
-.It Ev PAGER
-Pathname of the program to use in the
-.Ic more
-command or when
-.Ic crt
-variable is set.
-The default paginator
-.Xr more 1
-is used if this option is not defined.
-.It Ev SHELL
-Pathname of the shell to use in the
-.Ic \&!
-command and the
-.Ic \&~!
-escape.
-A default shell is used if this option is
-not defined.
-.It Ev VISUAL
-Pathname of the text editor to use in the
-.Ic visual
-command and
-.Ic \&~v
-escape.
-.It Va crt
-The valued option
-.Va crt
-is used as a threshold to determine how long a message must
-be before
-.Ev PAGER
-is used to read it.
-If
-.Va crt
-is set without a value,
-then the height of the terminal screen stored in the system
-is used to compute the threshold (see
-.Xr stty 1 ) .
-.It Ar escape
-If defined, the first character of this option gives the character to
-use in the place of ~ to denote escapes.
-.It Ar folder
-The name of the directory to use for storing folders of
-messages.
-If this name begins with a `/',
-.Nm mail
-considers it to be an absolute pathname; otherwise, the
-folder directory is found relative to your home directory.
-.It Ev MBOX
-The name of the
-.Ar mbox
-file.
-It can be the name of a folder.
-The default is
-.Dq Li mbox
-in the user's home directory.
-.It Ar record
-If defined, gives the pathname of the file used to record all outgoing
-mail.
-If not defined, then outgoing mail is not so saved.
-.It Ar indentprefix
-String used by the ``~m'' tilde escape for indenting messages, in place of
-the normal tab character (^I).
-Be sure to quote the value if it contains
-spaces or tabs.
-.It Ar toplines
-If defined, gives the number of lines of a message to be printed out
-with the
-.Ic top
-command; normally, the first five lines are printed.
-.El
-.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-.Nm Mail
-utilizes the
-.Ev HOME,
-.Ev USER,
-.Ev SHELL,
-.Ev DEAD,
-.Ev PAGER,
-.Ev LISTER,
-.Ev EDITOR,
-.Ev VISUAL
-and
-.Ev MBOX
-environment variables.
-.Sh FILES
-.Bl -tag -width /usr/lib/mail.*help -compact
-.It Pa /var/spool/mail/*
-Post office.
-.It ~/mbox
-User's old mail.
-.It ~/.mailrc
-File giving initial mail commands. Only used if the owner of the file is the
-user running this copy of mail.
-.It Pa /tmp/R*
-Temporary files.
-.It Pa /usr/lib/mail.*help
-Help files.
-.It Pa /etc/mail.rc
-System initialization file.
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr fmt 1 ,
-.Xr newaliases 1 ,
-.Xr vacation 1 ,
-.Xr aliases 5 ,
-.Xr mailaddr 7 ,
-.Xr sendmail 8
-and
-.Rs
-.%T "The Mail Reference Manual" .
-.Re
-.Sh HISTORY
-A
-.Nm mail
-command
-appeared in
-.At v6 .
-This man page is derived from
-.%T "The Mail Reference Manual"
-originally written by Kurt Shoens.
-.Sh BUGS
-There are some flags that are not documented here.
-Most are
-not useful to the general user.
-.Pp
-.\" This bug is not the case in this particular distribution.
-.\" Usually, .Nm mail is just a link to .Nm Mail, which can be confusing.
diff --git a/raw/man1/makeinfo.1 b/raw/man1/makeinfo.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 75e9fe4..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/makeinfo.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,188 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH MAKEINFO "1" "June 2003" "makeinfo 4.6" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-makeinfo \- translate Texinfo documents
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B makeinfo
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fITEXINFO-FILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Translate Texinfo source documentation to various other formats, by default
-Info files suitable for reading online with Emacs or standalone GNU Info.
-.SS "General options:"
-.TP
-\fB\-\-error\-limit\fR=\fINUM\fR
-quit after NUM errors (default 100).
-.TP
-\fB\-\-force\fR
-preserve output even if errors.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-validate\fR
-suppress node cross-reference validation.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-warn\fR
-suppress warnings (but not errors).
-.TP
-\fB\-\-reference\-limit\fR=\fINUM\fR
-warn about at most NUM references (default 1000).
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-explain what is being done.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-display version information and exit.
-.SS "Output format selection (default is to produce Info):"
-.TP
-\fB\-\-docbook\fR
-output DocBook XML rather than Info.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-html\fR
-output HTML rather than Info.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-xml\fR
-output Texinfo XML rather than Info.
-.SS "General output options:"
-.TP
-\fB\-E\fR, \fB\-\-macro\-expand\fR FILE
-output macro-expanded source to FILE.
-ignoring any @setfilename.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-headers\fR
-suppress node separators, Node: lines, and menus
-from Info output (thus producing plain text)
-or from HTML (thus producing shorter output);
-also, write to standard output by default.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-split\fR
-suppress splitting of Info or HTML output,
-generate only one output file.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-number\-sections\fR
-output chapter and sectioning numbers.
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIFILE\fR
-output to FILE (directory if split HTML),
-.SS "Options for Info and plain text:"
-.TP
-\fB\-\-enable\-encoding\fR
-output accented and special characters in
-Info output based on @documentencoding.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-fill\-column\fR=\fINUM\fR
-break Info lines at NUM characters (default 72).
-.TP
-\fB\-\-footnote\-style\fR=\fISTYLE\fR
-output footnotes in Info according to STYLE:
-`separate' to put them in their own node;
-`end' to put them at the end of the node
-.IP
-in which they are defined (default).
-.TP
-\fB\-\-paragraph\-indent\fR=\fIVAL\fR
-indent Info paragraphs by VAL spaces (default 3).
-If VAL is `none', do not indent; if VAL is
-`asis', preserve existing indentation.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-split\-size\fR=\fINUM\fR
-split Info files at size NUM (default 300000).
-.SS "Options for HTML:"
-.TP
-\fB\-\-css\-include\fR=\fIFILE\fR
-include FILE in HTML <style> output;
-read stdin if FILE is -.
-.SS "Input file options:"
-.TP
-\fB\-\-commands\-in\-node\-names\fR
-allow @ commands in node names.
-.TP
-\fB\-D\fR VAR
-define the variable VAR, as with @set.
-.TP
-\fB\-I\fR DIR
-append DIR to the @include search path.
-.TP
-\fB\-P\fR DIR
-prepend DIR to the @include search path.
-.TP
-\fB\-U\fR VAR
-undefine the variable VAR, as with @clear.
-.SS "Conditional processing in input:"
-.TP
-\fB\-\-ifhtml\fR
-process @ifhtml and @html even if not generating HTML.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-ifinfo\fR
-process @ifinfo even if not generating Info.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-ifplaintext\fR
-process @ifplaintext even if not generating plain text.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-iftex\fR
-process @iftex and @tex; implies \fB\-\-no\-split\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-ifxml\fR
-process @ifxml and @xml.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-ifhtml\fR
-do not process @ifhtml and @html text.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-ifinfo\fR
-do not process @ifinfo text.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-ifplaintext\fR
-do not process @ifplaintext text.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-iftex\fR
-do not process @iftex and @tex text.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-ifxml\fR
-do not process @ifxml and @xml text.
-.IP
-The defaults for the @if... conditionals depend on the output format:
-if generating HTML, \fB\-\-ifhtml\fR is on and the others are off;
-if generating Info, \fB\-\-ifinfo\fR is on and the others are off;
-if generating plain text, \fB\-\-ifplaintext\fR is on and the others are off;
-if generating XML, \fB\-\-ifxml\fR is on and the others are off.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.TP
-makeinfo foo.texi
-write Info to foo's @setfilename
-.TP
-makeinfo \fB\-\-html\fR foo.texi
-write HTML to @setfilename
-.TP
-makeinfo \fB\-\-xml\fR foo.texi
-write Texinfo XML to @setfilename
-.TP
-makeinfo \fB\-\-docbook\fR foo.texi
-write DocBook XML to @setfilename
-.TP
-makeinfo \fB\-\-no\-headers\fR foo.texi
-write plain text to standard output
-.IP
-makeinfo \fB\-\-html\fR \fB\-\-no\-headers\fR foo.texi write html without node lines, menus
-makeinfo \fB\-\-number\-sections\fR foo.texi write Info with numbered sections
-makeinfo \fB\-\-no\-split\fR foo.texi write one Info file however big
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Email bug reports to bug-texinfo at gnu.org,
-general questions and discussion to help-texinfo at gnu.org.
-Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
-For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B makeinfo
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B makeinfo
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info makeinfo
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/man.1 b/raw/man1/man.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 1479d1d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/man.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,452 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Generated automatically from man.1.in by the
-.\" configure script.
-.\"
-.\" Man page for man (and the former manpath)
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, John W. Eaton.
-.\"
-.\" You may distribute under the terms of the GNU General Public
-.\" License as specified in the README file that comes with the man 1.0
-.\" distribution.
-.\"
-.\" John W. Eaton
-.\" jwe at che.utexas.edu
-.\" Department of Chemical Engineering
-.\" The University of Texas at Austin
-.\" Austin, Texas 78712
-.\"
-.\" Many changes - aeb
-.\"
-.TH man 1 "September 2, 1995"
-.LO 1
-.SH NAME
-man \- format and display the on-line manual pages
-.br
-manpath \- determine user's search path for man pages
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B man
-.RB [ \-acdfFhkKtwW ]
-.RB [ --path ]
-.RB [ \-m
-.IR system ]
-.RB [ \-p
-.IR string ]
-.RB [ \-C
-.IR config_file ]
-.RB [ \-M
-.IR pathlist ]
-.RB [ \-P
-.IR pager ]
-.RB [ \-S
-.IR section_list ]
-.RI [ section ]
-.I "name ..."
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B man
-formats and displays the on-line manual pages. If you specify
-.IR section ,
-.B man
-only looks in that section of the manual.
-.I name
-is normally the name of the manual page, which is typically the name
-of a command, function, or file.
-However, if
-.I name
-contains a slash
-.RB ( / )
-then
-.B man
-interprets it as a file specification, so that you can do
-.B "man ./foo.5"
-or even
-.B "man /cd/foo/bar.1.gz\fR.\fP"
-.PP
-See below for a description of where
-.B man
-looks for the manual page files.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-\^C " config_file"
-Specify the configuration file to use; the default is
-.BR /etc/man.config .
-(See
-.BR man.config (5).)
-.TP
-.B \-\^M " path"
-Specify the list of directories to search for man pages.
-Separate the directories with colons. An empty list is the same as
-not specifying
-.B \-M
-at all. See
-.BR "SEARCH PATH FOR MANUAL PAGES" .
-.TP
-.B \-\^P " pager"
-Specify which pager to use.
-This option overrides the
-.B MANPAGER
-environment variable, which in turn overrides the
-.B PAGER
-variable. By default,
-.B man
-uses
-.BR "/usr/bin/less -isr" .
-.TP
-.B \-\^S " section_list"
-List is a colon separated list of manual sections to search.
-This option overrides the
-.B MANSECT
-environment variable.
-.TP
-.B \-\^a
-By default,
-.B man
-will exit after displaying the first manual page it
-finds. Using this option forces
-.B man
-to display all the manual pages that match
-.B name,
-not just the first.
-.TP
-.B \-\^c
-Reformat the source man page, even when an up-to-date cat page exists.
-This can be meaningful if the cat page was formatted for a screen
-with a different number of columns, or if the preformatted page
-is corrupted.
-.TP
-.B \-\^d
-Don't actually display the man pages, but do print gobs of debugging
-information.
-.TP
-.B \-\^D
-Both display and print debugging info.
-.TP
-.B \-\^f
-Equivalent to
-.BR whatis .
-.TP
-.BR \-\^F " or " \-\-preformat
-Format only - do not display.
-.TP
-.B \-\^h
-Print a one-line help message and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-\^k
-Equivalent to
-.BR apropos .
-.TP
-.B \-\^K
-Search for the specified string in *all* man pages. Warning: this is
-probably very slow! It helps to specify a section.
-(Just to give a rough idea, on my machine this takes about a minute
-per 500 man pages.)
-.TP
-.B \-\^m " system"
-Specify an alternate set of man pages to search based on the system
-name given.
-.TP
-.B \-\^p " string"
-Specify the sequence of preprocessors to run before
-.B nroff
-or
-.BR troff .
-Not all installations will have a full set of preprocessors.
-Some of the preprocessors and the letters used to designate them are:
-eqn (e), grap (g), pic (p), tbl (t), vgrind (v), refer (r).
-This option overrides the
-.B MANROFFSEQ
-environment variable.
-.TP
-.B \-\^t
-Use
-.B /usr/bin/groff -Tps -mandoc
-to format the manual page, passing the output to
-.B stdout.
-The output from
-.B /usr/bin/groff -Tps -mandoc
-may need to be passed through some filter or another before being
-printed.
-.TP
-.B \-\^w \fRor\fP \-\-path
-Don't actually display the man pages, but do print the location(s) of
-the files that would be formatted or displayed. If no argument is given:
-display (on stdout) the list of directories that is searched by
-.B man
-for man pages. If
-.B manpath
-is a link to man, then "manpath" is equivalent to "man --path".
-.TP
-.B \-\^W
-Like \-\^w, but print file names one per line, without additional information.
-This is useful in shell commands like
-.ft CW
-.B "man -aW man | xargs ls -l"
-.ft
-
-.SH "CAT PAGES"
-Man will try to save the formatted man pages, in order to save
-formatting time the next time these pages are needed.
-Traditionally, formatted versions of pages in DIR/manX are
-saved in DIR/catX, but other mappings from man dir to cat dir
-can be specified in
-.BR /etc/man.config .
-No cat pages are saved when the required cat directory does not exist.
-No cat pages are saved when they are formatted for a line length
-different from 80.
-No cat pages are saved when man.conf contains the line NOCACHE.
-.PP
-It is possible to make
-.B man
-suid to a user man. Then, if a cat directory
-has owner man and mode 0755 (only writable by man), and the cat files
-have owner man and mode 0644 or 0444 (only writable by man, or not
-writable at all), no ordinary user can change the cat pages or put
-other files in the cat directory. If
-.B man
-is not made suid, then a cat directory should have mode 0777
-if all users should be able to leave cat pages there.
-.PP
-The option
-.B \-c
-forces reformatting a page, even if a recent cat page exists.
-
-
-.SH "SEARCH PATH FOR MANUAL PAGES"
-.B man
-uses a sophisticated method of finding manual page files, based on the
-invocation options and environment variables, the
-.B /etc/man.config
-configuration file, and some built in conventions and heuristics.
-.PP
-First of all, when the
-.I name
-argument to
-.B man
-contains a slash
-.RB ( / ),
-.B man
-assumes it is a file specification itself,
-and there is no searching involved.
-.PP
-But in the normal case where
-.I name
-doesn't contain a slash,
-.B man
-searches a variety of directories for a file that could be a manual page
-for the topic named.
-.PP
-If you specify the
-.BI "-M " pathlist
-option,
-.I pathlist
-is a colon-separated list of the directories that
-.B man
-searches.
-.PP
-If you don't specify
-.B -M
-but set the
-.B MANPATH
-environment variable, the value of that variable is the list of the
-directories that
-.B man
-searches.
-.PP
-If you don't specify an explicit path list with
-.B -M
-or
-.BR MANPATH ,
-.B man
-develops its own path list based on the contents of the configuration
-file
-.BR /etc/man.config .
-The
-.B MANPATH
-statements in the configuration file identify particular directories to
-include in the search path.
-.PP
-Furthermore, the
-.B MANPATH_MAP
-statements add to the search path depending on your command search path
-(i.e. your
-.B PATH
-environment variable). For each directory that may be in the command
-search path, a
-.B MANPATH_MAP
-statement specifies a directory that should be added to the search
-path for manual page files.
-.B man
-looks at the
-.B PATH
-variable and adds the corresponding directories to the manual page
-file search path. Thus, with the proper use of
-.BR MANPATH_MAP ,
-when you issue the command
-.BR "man xyz" ,
-you get a manual page for the program that would run if you issued the
-command
-.BR xyz .
-.PP
-In addition, for each directory in the command search path (we'll call
-it a "command directory") for which you do
-.I not
-have a
-.B MANPATH_MAP
-statement,
-.B man
-automatically looks for a manual page directory "nearby"
-namely as a subdirectory in the command directory itself or
-in the parent directory of the command directory.
-.PP
-You can disable the automatic "nearby" searches by including a
-.B NOAUTOPATH
-statement in
-.BR /etc/man.config .
-.PP
-In each directory in the search path as described above,
-.B man
-searches for a file named
-.IB topic . section\fR,
-with an optional suffix on the section number and
-possibly a compression suffix.
-If it doesn't find such a file, it then looks in any subdirectories
-named
-.BI man N
-or
-.BI cat N
-where
-.I N
-is the manual section number.
-If the file is in a
-.BI cat N
-subdirectory,
-.B man
-assumes it is a formatted manual page file (cat page). Otherwise,
-.B man
-assumes it is unformatted. In either case, if the filename has a
-known compression suffix (like
-.BR .gz ),
-.B man
-assumes it is gzipped.
-.PP
-If you want to see where (or if)
-.B man
-would find the manual page for a particular topic, use the
-.BR "--path " ( -w )
-option.
-
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-.B MANPATH
-If
-.B MANPATH
-is set,
-.B man
-uses it as the path to search for manual page files. It overrides the
-configuration file and the automatic search path, but is overridden by
-the
-.B -M
-invocation option. See
-.BR "SEARCH PATH FOR MANUAL PAGES" .
-.TP
-.B MANPL
-If
-.B MANPL
-is set, its value is used as the display page length.
-Otherwise, the entire man page will occupy one (long) page.
-.TP
-.B MANROFFSEQ
-If
-.B MANROFFSEQ
-is set, its value is used to determine the set of preprocessors run
-before running
-.B nroff
-or
-.BR troff .
-By default, pages are passed through
-the tbl preprocessor before
-.BR nroff .
-.TP
-.B MANSECT
-If
-.B MANSECT
-is set, its value is used to determine which manual sections to search.
-.TP
-.B MANWIDTH
-If
-.B MANWIDTH
-is set, its value is used as the width manpages should be displayed.
-Otherwise the pages may be displayed over the whole width of your
-screen.
-.TP
-.B MANPAGER
-If
-.B MANPAGER
-is set, its value is used as the name of the program to use to display
-the man page. If not, then
-.B PAGER
-is used. If that has no value either,
-.B /usr/bin/less -isr
-is used.
-.TP
-.B LANG
-If
-.B LANG
-is set, its value defines the name of the subdirectory where man
-first looks for man pages. Thus, the command `LANG=dk man 1 foo'
-will cause man to look for the foo man page in .../dk/man1/foo.1,
-and if it cannot find such a file, then in .../man1/foo.1,
-where ... is a directory on the search path.
-.TP
-.B "NLSPATH, LC_MESSAGES, LANG"
-The environment variables
-.B NLSPATH
-and
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-(or
-.B LANG
-when the latter does not exist)
-play a role in locating the message catalog.
-(But the English messages are compiled in, and for English no catalog
-is required.)
-Note that programs like
-.BR col(1)
-called by man also use e.g. LC_CTYPE.
-.TP
-.B PATH
-.B PATH
-helps determine the search path for manual page files. See
-.BR "SEARCH PATH FOR MANUAL PAGES" .
-.TP
-.B SYSTEM
-.B SYSTEM
-is used to get the default alternate system name (for use
-with the
-.B \-m
-option).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-apropos(1), whatis(1), less(1), groff(1), man.conf(5).
-.SH BUGS
-The
-.B \-t
-option only works if a troff-like program is installed.
-.br
-If you see blinking \e255 or <AD> instead of hyphens,
-put `LESSCHARSET=latin1' in your environment.
-.SH TIPS
-If you add the line
-
- (global-set-key [(f1)] (lambda () (interactive) (manual-entry (current-word))))
-
-to your
-.IR .emacs
-file, then hitting F1 will give you the man page for the library call
-at the current cursor position.
-.LP
-To get a plain text version of a man page, without backspaces
-and underscores, try
-
- # man foo | col -b > foo.mantxt
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/md5sum.1 b/raw/man1/md5sum.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 757a67a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/md5sum.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH MD5SUM "1" "October 2003" "md5sum (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-md5sum \- compute and check MD5 message digest
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B md5sum
-[\fIOPTION\fR] [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.br
-.B md5sum
-[\fIOPTION\fR] \fI--check \fR[\fIFILE\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print or check MD5 (128-bit) checksums.
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-binary\fR
-read files in binary mode (default on DOS/Windows)
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-check\fR
-check MD5 sums against given list
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-text\fR
-read files in text mode (default)
-.SS "The following two options are useful only when verifying checksums:"
-.TP
-\fB\-\-status\fR
-don't output anything, status code shows success
-.TP
-\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-warn\fR
-warn about improperly formated checksum lines
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-The sums are computed as described in RFC 1321. When checking, the input
-should be a former output of this program. The default mode is to print
-a line with checksum, a character indicating type (`*' for binary, ` ' for
-text), and name for each FILE.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Ulrich Drepper and Scott Miller.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B md5sum
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B md5sum
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info md5sum
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/mesg.1 b/raw/man1/mesg.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b69a18..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mesg.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-.\"{{{}}}
-.\"{{{ Title
-.TH MESG 1 "Feb 26, 2001" "" "Linux User's Manual"
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Name
-.SH NAME
-mesg \- control write access to your terminal
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Synopsis
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mesg
-.RB [ y | n ]
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Description
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Mesg
-controls the access to your terminal by others. It's typically used to
-allow or disallow other users to write to your terminal (see \fBwrite\fP(1)).
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Options
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP \fBy\fP
-Allow write access to your terminal.
-.IP \fBn\fP
-Disallow write access to your terminal.
-.PP
-If no option is given, \fBmesg\fP prints out the current access state of your
-terminal.
-.PP NOTES
-\fBMesg\fP assumes that it's standard input is connected to your
-terminal. That also means that if you are logged in multiple times,
-you can get/set the mesg status of other sessions by using redirection.
-For example "mesg n < /dev/pts/46".
-.SH AUTHOR
-Miquel van Smoorenburg (miquels at cistron.nl)
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ See also
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR talk (1),
-.BR write (1),
-.BR wall (1)
-.\"}}}
diff --git a/raw/man1/minicom.1 b/raw/man1/minicom.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 70ba6be..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/minicom.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,854 +0,0 @@
-.\" This file Copyright 1992,93 Michael K. Johnson (johnsonm at stolaf.edu)
-.\" Copyright 1995,1996 Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels at cistron.nl>
-.\" Copyright 1997-2000 Jukka Lahtinen <walker at clinet.fi>
-.\" It may be distributed under the GNU Public License, version 2, or
-.\" any higher version. See section COPYING of the GNU Public license
-.\" for conditions under which this file may be redistributed.
-.TH MINICOM 1 "2003/12/20 03:31:53" "User's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-minicom \- friendly serial communication program
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B minicom
-.RI "[-somMlwz8] [-c on|off] [-S script] [-d entry]"
-.br
-.in 15
-.RI "[-a on|off] [-t term] [-p pty] [-C capturefile] [" configuration ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B minicom
-is a communication program which somewhat resembles the shareware
-program TELIX but is free with source code and runs under most unices.
-Features include dialing directory with auto-redial, support for
-UUCP-style lock files on serial devices, a seperate script language
-interpreter, capture to file, multiple users with individual
-configurations, and more.
-.SH COMMAND-LINE
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -s
-.BR S etup.
-Root edits the system-wide defaults in /etc/minirc.dfl with this option.
-When it is used, minicom does
-.I not
-initialize, but puts you directly into the
-configuration menu. This is very handy if minicom refuses to start up
-because your system has changed, or for the first time you run
-minicom. For most systems, reasonable defaults are already compiled in.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -o
-Do not initialize. Minicom will skip the initialization code. This
-option is handy if you quitted from minicom without resetting, and
-then want to restart a session. It is potentially dangerous though: no
-check for lock files etc. is made, so a normal user could interfere
-with things like uucp... Maybe this will be taken out later. For now
-it is assumed, that users who are given access to a modem are
-responsible enough for their actions.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -m
-Override command-key with the Meta or ALT key. This is the default in 1.80
-and it can also be configured in one of minicom's menus, but if you use
-different terminals all the time, of which some don't have a Meta or ALT key,
-it's handy to set the default command key to Ctrl-A and use this option
-when you have a keyboard supporting Meta or ALT keys. Minicom
-assumes that your Meta key sends the ESC prefix, not the other variant
-that sets the highest bit of the character.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -M
-Same as -m, but assumes that your Meta key sets the 8th bit of the
-character high (sends 128 + character code).
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -z
-Use terminal status line. This only works on terminals that support it
-and that have the relevant information in their \fItermcap\fP or
-\fIterminfo\fP database entry.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -l
-.BR L iteral
-translation of characters with the high bit set. With this flag on,
-minicom will not try to translate the IBM line characters to ASCII,
-but passes them straight trough. Many PC-unix clones will display
-them correctly without translation (Linux in a special mode, Coherent
-and Sco).
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -w
-Turns linewrap on at startup by default.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -a
-.BR A ttribute
-usage. Some terminals, notably televideo's, have a rotten attribute
-handling (serial instead of parallel). By default, minicom uses '-a
-on', but if you are using such a terminal you can (must!) supply the
-option '-a off'. The trailing 'on' or 'off' is needed.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -t
-.BR T erminal
-type. With this flag, you can override the environment TERM variable.
-This is handy for use in the MINICOM environment variable; one can create
-a special termcap entry for use with minicom on the console, that
-initializes the screen to raw mode so that in conjunction with the -l
-flag, the IBM line characters are displayed untranslated.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -c
-.BR C olor
-usage. Some terminals (such as the Linux console) support color with
-the standard ANSI escape sequences. Because there is apparently no
-termcap support for color, these escape sequences are hard-coded into
-minicom. Therefore this option is off by default. You can turn it on
-with '-c on'. This, and the '-m' option, are good candidates to put
-into the MINICOM environment variable.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -S
-.BR script .
-Run the named script at startup. So far, passing username and password
-to a startup script is not supported. If you also use the -d option to
-start dialing at startup, the -S script will be run BEFORE dialing the
-entries specified with -d.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -d
-.BR D ial
-an entry from the dialing directory on startup. You can specify an
-index number, but also a substring of the name of the entry. If you
-specify a name that has multiple entries in the directory, they are all
-tagged for dialing. You can also specify multiple names or index numbers
-by separating them with commas. The dialing will start from the first
-entry specified after all other program initialization procedures are
-completed.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -p
-.BR P seudo
-terminal
-to use. This overrrides the terminal port defined in the configuration
-files, but only if it is a pseudo tty. The filename supplied must be of
-the form (/dev/)tty[p-z/][0-f], (/dev/)pts[p-z/][0-f] or
-(/dev/)pty[p-z/][0-f]. For example, /dev/ttyp1, pts/0 or /dev/ptyp2.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -C
-.BR filename .
-Open capture file at startup.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -8
-'8bit clean' and 'continuous' mode. '8bit clean' means Minicom let
-8bit characters pass through without any modification. 'Continuous'
-means no locate/attribute control sequences are inserted without
-real change of locate/attribute. This mode is to display 8bit
-multibyte characters such as Japanese. Not needed in every language with
-8bit characters. (For example displaying Finnish text doesn't need this.)
-.PP
-.RS 0.5i
-When
-.B minicom
-starts, it first searches the MINICOM environment variable for
-command-line arguments, which can be over-ridden on the command line.
-Thus, if you have done
-.PP
-.RS 0.5i
-.PD 0
-MINICOM='-m -c on'
-.PP
-export MINICOM
-.PP
-.PD 1
-.PP
-.RE
-or the equivalent, and start minicom, minicom will assume that your
-terminal
-.I has
-a Meta or <ALT> key and that color is supported. If you then log in
-from a terminal without color support, and you have set MINICOM in your
-startup (.profile or equivalent) file, and don't want to re-set your
-environment variable, you can type 'minicom -c off' and run without
-color support for that session.
-.RE
-.TP 0.5i
-.B configuration
-The
-.I configuration
-argument is more interesting. Normally, minicom gets its defaults from
-a file called "minirc.dfl". If you however give an argument to
-minicom, it will try to get its defaults from a file called
-"minirc.\fIconfiguration\fR\|". So it is possible to create multiple
-configuration files, for different ports, different users etc. Most
-sensible is to use device names, such as tty1, tty64, sio2 etc. If a
-user creates his own configuration file, it will show up in his home
-directory as '.minirc.dfl'.
-.SH USE
-Minicom is window based. To popup a window with the function you
-want, press Control-A (from now on, we will use C-A to mean
-Control-A), and then the function key (a-z or A-Z). By pressing C-A
-first and then 'z', a help screen comes up with a short summary of all
-commands. This escape key can be altered when minicom is configured
-(-s option or C-A O), but we'll stick to Control-A for now.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-For every menu the next keys can be used:
-.TP 0.75i
-.B UP
-arrow-up or 'k'
-.TP 0.75i
-.B DOWN
-arrow-down or 'j'
-.TP 0.75i
-.B LEFT
-arrow-left or 'h'
-.TP 0.75i
-.B RIGHT
-arrow-right or 'l'
-.TP 0.75i
-.B CHOOSE
-Enter
-.TP 0.75i
-.B CANCEL
-ESCape.
-.PD 1
-.PP
-The screen is divided into two portions: the upper 24 lines are the
-terminal-emulator screen. In this window, ANSI or VT100 escape
-sequences are interpreted. If there is a line left at the
-bottom, a status line is placed there. If this is not possible the
-status line will be showed every time you press C-A. On terminals
-that have a special status line that will be used if the termcap
-information is complete \fIand\fP the \fB-k\fP flag has been given.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-Possible commands are listed next, in alphabetical order.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B C-A
-Pressing C-A a second time will just send a C-A to the remote system.
-If you have changed your "escape character" to something other than
-C-A, this works analogously for that character.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B A
-Toggle 'Add Linefeed' on/off. If it is on, a linefeed is added before
-every carriage return displayed on the screen.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B B
-Gives you a scroll back buffer. You can scroll up with \fBu\fP, down with
-\fBd\fP, a page up with \fBb\fP, a page down with \fBf\fP, and if you have them
-the \fBarrow\fP and \fBpage up/page down\fP keys can also be used. You can
-search for text in the buffer with \fBs\fP (case-sensitive) or \fBS\fP
-(case-insensitive). \fBN\fP will find the next occurrence of the string.
-\fBc\fP will enter citation mode. A text cursor appears and you
-specify the start line by hitting Enter key. Then scroll back mode will
-finish and the contents with prefix '>' will be sent.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B C
-Clears the screen.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B D
-Dial a number, or go to the dialing directory.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B E
-Toggle local echo on and off (if your version of minicom supports it).
-.TP 0.5i
-.B F
-A break signal is sent to the modem.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B G
-Run script (Go). Runs a login script.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B H
-Hangup.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B I
-Toggle the type of escape sequence that the cursor keys send between
-normal and applications mode. (See also the comment about the status
-line below).
-.TP 0.5i
-.B J
-Jump to a shell. On return, the whole screen will be redrawn.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B K
-Clears the screen, runs kermit and redraws the screen upon return.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B L
-Turn Capture file on off. If turned on, all output sent to the screen
-will be captured in the file too.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B M
-Sends the modem initialization string. If you are online and the DCD line
-setting is on, you are asked for confirmation before the modem is
-initialized.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B O
-Configure minicom. Puts you in the configuration menu.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B P
-Communication Parameters. Allows you to change the bps rate, parity and
-number of bits.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B Q
-Exit minicom without resetting the modem. If macros changed and were not
-saved, you will have a chance to do so.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B R
-Receive files. Choose from various protocols (external). If you have the
-filename selection window and the prompt for download directory enabled,
-you'll get a selection window for choosing the directory for
-downloading. Otherwise the download directory defined in the Filenames and
-paths menu will be used.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B S
-Send files. Choose the protocol like you do with the receive command. If
-you don't have the filename selection window enabled (in the File transfer
-protocols menu), you'll just have to write the filename(s) in a dialog
-window. If you have the selection window enabled, a window will pop up
-showing the filenames in your upload directory. You can tag and untag
-filenames by pressing spacebar, and move the cursor up and down with the
-cursor keys or j/k. The selected filenames are shown highlighted. Directory
-names are shown [within brackets] and you can move up or down in the
-directory tree by pressing the spacebar twice. Finally, send the files by
-pressing ENTER or quit by pressing ESC.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B T
-Choose Terminal emulation: Ansi(color) or vt100.
-You can also change the backspace key here, turn the status line on or off,
-and define delay (in milliseconds) after each newline if you need that.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B W
-Toggle linewrap on/off.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B X
-Exit minicom, reset modem. If macros changed and were not saved, you will
-have a chance to do so.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B Z
-Pop up the help screen.
-.PD 1
-.SH "DIALING DIRECTORY"
-By pressing C-A D the program puts you in the dialing directory. Select a
-command by pressing the capitalized letter or moving cursor right/left with
-the arrow keys or the h/l keys and pressing Enter. You can add, delete or
-edit entries and move them up and down in the directory list. By choosing
-"dial" the phone numbers of the tagged entries, or if nothing is tagged,
-the number of the highlighted entry will be dialed. While the modem is
-dialing, you can press escape to cancel dialing. Any other key will close
-the dial window, but won't cancel the dialing itself. Your dialing
-directory will be saved into a the file ".dialdir" in your home directory.
-You can scroll up and down with the arrow keys, but you can also scroll
-complete pages by pressing the PageUp or PageDown key. If you don't have
-those, use Control-B (Backward) and Control-F (Forward). You can use the
-space bar to \fBtag\fP a number of entries and minicom will rotate trough
-this list if a connection can't be made. A '>' symbol is drawn in the
-directory before the names of the tagged entries.
-.PP
-The "edit" menu speaks for itself, but I will discuss it briefly here.
-.PD 0
-.TP 1.0i
-.B A - Name
-The name for this entry
-.TP 1.0i
-.B B - Number
-and its telephone number.
-.TP 1.0i
-.B C - Dial string #
-Which specific dial string you want to use to connect. There are three
-different dial strings (prefixes and suffixes) that can be configured
-in the \fBModem and dialing\fP menu.
-.TP 1.0i
-.B D - Local echo
-can be on or off for this system (if your version of minicom supports it).
-.TP 1.0i
-.B E - Script
-The script that must be executed after a succesfull connection is made
-(see the manual for runscript)
-.TP 1.0i
-.B F - Username
-The username that is passed to the runscript program. It
-is passed in the environment string "$LOGIN".
-.TP 1.0i
-.B G - Password
-The password is passed as "$PASS".
-.TP 1.0i
-.B H - Terminal Emulation
-Use ANSI or VT100 emulation.
-.TP 1.0i
-.B I - Backspace key sends
-What code (Backspace or Delete) the backspace key sends.
-.TP 1.0i
-.B J - Linewrap
-Can be on or off.
-.TP 1.0i
-.B K - Line settings
-Bps rate, bits, parity and number of stop bits to use for this connection.
-You can choose \fBcurrent\fP for the speed, so that it will use whatever
-speed is being used at that moment (useful if you have multiple modems).
-.TP 1.0i
-.B L - Conversion table
-You may spacify a character conversion table to be loaded whenever this
-entry answers, before running the login script. If this field is blank,
-the conversion table stays unchanged.
-.PP
-.PD 1
-The edit menu also shows the latest date and time when you called this
-entry and the total number of calls there, but doesn't let you change them.
-They are updated automatically when you connect.
-.PD 1
-.PP
-The moVe command lets you move the highlighted entry up or down in the
-dialing directory with the up/down arrow keys or the k and j keys. Press
-Enter or ESC to end moving the entry.
-.PP
-.SH CONFIGURATION
-By pressing C-A O you will be thrown into the setup menu. Most
-settings there can be changed by everyone, but some are restricted
-to root only. Those priviliged settings are marked with a star (*) here.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.B "Filenames and paths"
-.PP
-.RS 0.25i
-This menu defines your default directories.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B A - Download directory
-where the downloaded files go to.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B B - Upload directory
-where the uploaded files are read from.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B C - Script directory
-Where you keep your login scripts.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B D - Script program
-Which program to use as the script interpreter. Defaults to the
-program "runscript", but if you want to use something else (eg,
-/bin/sh or "expect") it is possible. Stdin and stdout are connected
-to the modem, stderr to the screen.
-.RS 0.5i
-If the path is relative (ie, does not start with a slash) then it's
-relative to your home directory, except for the script interpreter.
-.RE
-.TP 0.5i
-.B E - Kermit program
-Where to find the executable for kermit, and it's options. Some simple
-macro's can be used on the command line: '%l' is expanded to the
-complete filename of the dial out-device, '%f' is expanded to the serial
-port file descriptor and '%b' is expanded to the current serial port speed.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B F - Logging options
-Options to configure the logfile writing.
-.RS 0.5i
-.PD 1
-.TP 0.5i
-.B A - File name
-Here you can enter the name of the logfile. The file will be written in
-your home directory, and the default value is "minicom.log".
-If you blank the name, all logging is turned off.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B B - Log connects and hangups
-This option defines whether or not the logfile is written when the remote
-end answers the call or hangs up. Or when you give the hangup command
-yourself or leave minicom without hangup while online.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B C - Log file transfers
-Do you want log entries of receiving and sending files.
-.RE
-The 'log' command in the scripts is not affected by logging options B and C.
-It is always executed, if you just have the name of the log file defined.
-.RE
-.PD 1
-.PP
-.B "File Transfer Protocols"
-.PD 0
-.PP
-.RS 0.25i
-Protocols defined here will show up when C-A s/r is pressed. "Name" in the
-beginning of the line is the name that will show up in the menu. "Program"
-is the path to the protocol. "Name" after that defines if the program needs
-an argument, eg. a file to be transmitted. U/D defines if this entry should
-show up in the upload or the download menu. Fullscr defines if the program
-should run full screen, or that minicom will only show it's stderr in a
-window. IO-Red defines if minicom should attach the program's standard in
-and output to the modem port or not. "Multi" tells the filename selection
-window whether or not the protocol can send multiple files with one
-command. It has no effect on download protocols, and it is also ignored
-with upload protocols if you don't use the filename selection window. The
-old sz and rz are not full screen, and have IO-Red set. However, there are
-curses based versions of at least rz that do not want their stdin and
-stdout redirected, and run full screen. All file transfer protocols are
-run with the UID of the user, and not with UID=root. '%l', '%f' and '%b'
-can be used on the command line as with kermit. Within this menu you can
-also define if you want to use the filename selection window when prompted
-for files to upload, and if you like to be prompted for the download
-directory every time the automatic download is started. If you leave the
-download directory prompt disabled, the download directory defined in the
-file and directory menu is used.
-.RE
-.PD 1
-.PP
-.B "Serial port setup"
-.RS 0.25i
-.PD 0
-.TP 0.5i
-.B *A - Serial device
-/dev/tty1 or /dev/ttyS1 for most people.
-/dev/cua<n> is still possible under linux, but not recommended any more
-because these devices are obsolete and many newly installed systems
-with kernel 2.2.x or newer don't have them.
-Use /dev/ttyS<n> instead.
-You may also have /dev/modem as a symlink to the real device.
-.br
-If you have modems connected to two or more serial ports, you may specify
-all of them here in a list separated by space, comma or semicolon. When
-Minicom starts, it checks the list until it finds an available modem and
-uses that one. (However, you can't specify different init strings to
-them ..at least not yet.)
-.TP 0.5i
-.B *B - Lock file location
-On most systems This should be /usr/spool/uucp. Linux systems use
-/var/lock. If this directory does not exist,
-minicom will not attempt to use lockfiles.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B *C - Callin program
-If you have a uugetty or something on your serial port, it could be
-that you want a program to be run to switch the modem cq. port into
-dialin/dialout mode. This is the program to get into dialin mode.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B *D - Callout program
-And this to get into dialout mode.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B E - Bps/Par/Bits
-Default parameters at startup.
-.PD 1
-.PP
-If one of the entries is left blank, it will not be used. So if you
-don't care about locking, and don't have a getty running on your
-modemline, entries B - D should be left blank. Be warned! The callin
-and callout programs are run with the effective user id of "root", eg
-0!
-.RE
-.PP
-.B "Modem and Dialing"
-.PD 0
-.PP
-.RS 0.25i
-Here, the parameters for your modem are defined. I will not explain
-this further because the defaults are for generic Hayes modems, and
-should work always. This file is not a Hayes tutorial :-) The only
-things worth noticing are that control characters can be sent by
-prefixing them with a '^', in which '^^' means '^' itself, and the '\\'
-character must also be doubled as '\\\\', because backslash is used
-specially in the macro definitions. Some options however, don't have
-much to do with the modem but more with the behaviour of minicom itself:
-.PP
-.TP 0.5i
-.B M - Dial time
-The number of seconds before minicom times out if no connection is
-established.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B N - Delay before redial
-Minicom will redial if no connection was made, but it first waits some
-time.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B O - Number of tries
-Maximum number of times that minicom attempts to dial.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B P - Drop DTR time
-If you set this to 0, minicom hangs up by sending a Hayes-type hangup
-sequence. If you specify a non-zero value, the hangup will be done by
-dropping the DTR line. The value tells in seconds how long DTR will be
-kept down.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B Q - Auto bps detect
-If this is on, minicom tries to match the dialed party's speed.
-With most modern modems this is NOT desirable, since the modem buffers
-the data and converts the speed.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B R - Modem has DCD line
-If your modem, and your O/S both support the DCD line (that goes 'high'
-when a connection is made) minicom will use it. When you have this option
-on, minicom will also NOT start dialing while you are already online.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B S - Status line shows DTE speed / line speed
-You can toggle the status line to show either the DTE speed (the speed
-which minicom uses to communicate with your modem) or the line speed
-(the speed that your modem uses on the line to communicate with the
-other modem). Notice that the line speed may change during the connection,
-but you will still only see the initial speed that the modems started
-the connection with. This is because the modem doesn't tell the program
-if the speed is changed. Also, to see the line speed, you need to have
-the modem set to show it in the connect string.
-Otherwise you will only see 0 as the line speed.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B T - Multi-line untag
-You can toggle the feature to untag entries from the dialing directory when
-a connection is established to a multi-line BBS. All the tagged entries that
-have the same name are untagged.
-.PD 1
-.PP
-.RE
-.RS 0.5i
-.B Note that a special exception is made for this menu: every user
-.B can change all parameters here, but some of them will not be saved.
-.RE
-.PP
-.B "Screen and keyboard"
-.RS 0.25i
-.PD 0
-.TP 0.5i
-.B A - Command key is
-the 'Hot Key' that brings you into command mode. If this is set
-to 'ALT' or 'meta key', you can directly call commands
-by alt-key instead of HotKey-key.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B B - Backspace key sends
-There still are some systems that want a VT100 to send DEL instead of
-BS. With this option you can enable that stupidity. (Eh, it's even on
-by default...)
-.TP 0.5i
-.B C - Status line is
-Enabled or disabled. Some slow terminals (for example, X-terminals)
-cause the status line to jump "up and down" when scrolling, so you can
-turn it off if desired. It will still be shown in command-mode.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B D - Alarm sound
-If turned on, minicom will sound an alarm (on the console only) after
-a succesfull connection and when up/downloading is complete.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B E - Foreground Color (menu)
-indicates
-the foreground color to use for all the configuration windows in minicom.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B F - Background Color (menu)
-indicates the background color to use for
-all the configuration windows in minicom. Note that minicom will not allow
-you to set forground and background colors to the same value.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B G - Foreground Color (term)
-indicates the foreground color to use in the terminal window.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B H - Background Color (term)
-indicates the background color to use in
-the terminal window. Note that minicom will not allow you to set forground
-and background colors to the same value.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B I - Foreground Color (stat)
-indicates the foreground color to use in for the status bar.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B J - Background Color (stat)
-indicates the color to use in for the
-status bar. Note that minicom will allow you to set the status bar's
-forground and background colors to the same value. This will effectively
-make the status bar invisible but if these are your intensions, please
-see the option
-.TP 0.5i
-.B K - History buffer size
-The number of lines to keep in the history buffer (for backscrolling).
-.TP 0.5i
-.B L - Macros file
-is the full path to the file that holds
-macros. Macros allow you to define a string to be sent when you press
-a certain key. In minicom, you may define F1 through F10 to send
-up to 256 characters [this is set at compile time]. The filename you
-specify is verified as soon as you hit ENTER. If you do not have permissions
-to create the specified file, an error message will so indicate and you
-will be forced to re-edit the filename. If you are permitted to create
-the file, minicom checks to see if it already exists. If so, it assumes
-it's a macro file and reads it in. If it isn't, well, it's your problem :-)
-If the file does not exist, the filename is accepted.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B M - Edit Macros
-opens up a new window
-which allows you to edit the F1 through F10 macros.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B N - Macros enabled
-- Yes or No. If macros are disabled, the F1-F10
-keys will just send the VT100/VT220 function key escape sequences.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B O - Character conversion
-The active conversion table filename is shown here. If you can see no
-name, no conversion is active. Pressing O, you will see the conversion
-table edit menu.
-.RS 0.5i
-.PD 1
-.TP 0.25i
-.B "Edit Macros"
-Here, the macros for F1 through F10 are defined. The bottom of the
-window shows a legend of character combinations that have special meaning.
-They allow you to enter special control characters with plain text by
-prefixing them with a '^', in which '^^' means '^' itself. You can
-send a 1 second delay with the '^~' code. This is useful when you are
-trying to login after ftp'ing or telnet'ing somewhere.
-You can also include your current username and password from the phone
-directory in the macros with '\\u' and '\\p', respectively. If you need
-the backslash character in the macro, write it doubled as '\\\\'.
-To edit a macro, press the number (or letter for F10) and you will be
-moved to the end of the macro. When editing the line, you may use the
-left & right arrows, Home & End keys, Delete & BackSpace, and ESC and
-RETURN. ESC cancels any changes made while ENTER accepts the changes.
-.PD 1
-.TP 0.25i
-.B "Character conversion"
-Here you can edit the character conversion table. If you are not an
-American, you know that in many languages there are characters that are
-not included in the ASCII character set, and in the old times they may
-have replaced some less important characters in ASCII and now they are
-often represented with character codes above 127. AND there are various
-different ways to represent them. This is where you may edit conversion
-tables for systems that use a character set different from the one on your
-computer.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B A - Load table
-You probably guessed it. This command loads a table from the disk.
-You are asked a file name for the table.
-Predefined tables .mciso, .mcpc8 and .mcsf7 should be included with the
-program. Table .mciso does no conversion, .mcpc8 is to be used for
-connections with systems that use the 8-bit pc character set, and .mcsf7
-is for compatibility with the systems that uses the good old 7-bit coding
-to replace the characters {|}[]\\ with the diacritical characters used in
-Finnish and Swedish.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B B - Save table
-This one saves the active table on the filename you specify.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B C - edit char
-This is where you can make your own modifications to the existing table.
-First you are asked the character value (in decimal) whose conversion you
-want to change. Next you'll say which character you want to see on your
-screen when that character comes from the outside world. And then you'll
-be asked what you want to be sent out when you enter that character from
-your keyboard.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B D - next screen
-.TP 0.5i
-.B E - prev screen
-Yeah, you probably noticed that this screen shows you what kind of
-conversions are active. The screen just is (usually) too small to show
-the whole table at once in an easy-to-understand format. This is how you can
-scroll the table left and right.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B F - convert capture
-Toggles whether or not the character conversion table is used when
-writing the capture file.
-.RE
-.RE
-.PD 1
-.TP 0.25i
-.B "Save setup as dfl"
-Save the parameters as the default for the next time the program is
-started. Instead of dfl, any other parameter name may appear, depending
-on which one was used when the program was started.
-.TP 0.25i
-.B "Save setup as.."
-Save the parameters under a special name. Whenever Minicom is started
-with this name as an argument, it will use these parameters. This
-option is of course priviliged to root.
-.TP 0.25i
-.B "Exit"
-Escape from this menu without saving. This can also be done with ESC.
-.TP 0.25i
-.B "Exit from minicom"
-Only root will see this menu entry, if he/she started minicom with the '-s'
-option. This way, it is possible to change the configuration without
-actually running minicom.
-.PD 1
-.SH "STATUS LINE"
-The status line has several indicators, that speak for themselves.
-The mysterious APP or NOR indicator probably needs explanation. The
-VT100 cursor keys can be in two modes: applications mode and cursor
-mode. This is controlled by an escape sequence. If you find that
-the cursor keys do not work in, say, vi when you're logged in using
-minicom then you can see with this indicator whether the cursor keys
-are in applications or cursor mode. You can toggle the two with the
-C-A I key. If the cursor keys then work, it's probably an error in
-the remote system's termcap initialization strings (is).
-.PD 1
-.SH "LOCALES"
-Minicom has now support for local languages. This means you can change most
-of the English messages and other strings to another language by setting
-the environment variable LANG. On September 2001 the supported languages
-are Brazilian Portuguese, Finnish, Japanese, French, Polish, Czech, Russian
-and Spanish.
-Turkish is under construction.
-.PD 1
-.SH "SECURITY ISSUES"
-Since Minicom is run setuid root on some computers, you probably want to
-restrict access to it. This is possible by using a configuration file
-in the same directory as the default files, called "minicom.users".
-The syntax of this file is as following:
-.PP
-.RS 0.5i
-<username> <configuration> [configuration...]
-.RE
-.PP
-To allow user 'miquels' to use the default configuration, enter the
-following line into "minicom.users":
-.PP
-.RS 0.5i
-miquels dfl
-.RE
-.PP
-If you want users to be able to use more than the default
-configurations, just add the names of those configurations behind the
-user name. If no configuration is given behind the username, minicom
-assumes that the user has access to all configurations.
-.PD 1
-.SH MISC
-If minicom is hung, kill it with SIGTERM . (This means kill -15, or
-since sigterm is default, just plain "kill <minicompid>". This will
-cause a graceful exit of minicom, doing resets and everything.
-You may kill minicom from a script with the command "! killall -9 minicom"
-without hanging up the line. Without the -9 parameter, minicom first
-hangs up before exiting.
-.PP
-Since a lot of escape sequences begin with ESC (Arrow up is ESC [ A),
-Minicom does not know if the escape character it gets is you pressing
-the escape key, or part of a sequence.
-.PP
-An old version of Minicom, V1.2, solved this in a rather crude way:
-to get the escape key, you had to press it
-.IR twice .
-.PP
-As of release 1.3 this has bettered a little: now a 1-second timeout
-is builtin, like in vi. For systems that have the select() system call
-the timeout is 0.5 seconds. And... surprise: a special Linux-dependant
-.BR hack " :-) was added. Now, minicom can separate the escape key and"
-escape-sequences. To see how dirty this was done, look into wkeys.c.
-But it works like a charm!
-.SH FILES
-Minicom keeps it's configuration files in one directory, usually
-/var/lib/minicom, /usr/local/etc or /etc. To find out what default
-directory minicom has compiled in, issue the command \fIminicom -h\fP.
-You'll probably also find the demo files for \fBrunscript\fP(1),
-and the examples of character conversion tables either there or
-in the subdirectories of /usr/doc/minicom*. The conversion tables are
-named something like mc.* in that directory, but you probably want to
-copy the ones you need in your home directory as something beginning
-with a dot.
-.sp 1
-.nf
-minicom.users
-minirc.*
-$HOME/.minirc.*
-$HOME/.dialdir
-$HOME/minicom.log
-/usr/share/locale/*/LC_MESSAGES/minicom.mo
-.fi
-.SH VERSION
-Minicom is now up to version 2.00.0.
-.SH AUTHORS
-The original author of minicom is Miquel van Smoorenburg (miquels at cistron.nl).
-He wrote versions up to 1.75.
-.br
-Jukka Lahtinen (walker at clinet.fi, walker at megabaud.fi) has been responsible
-for new versions since 1.78, helped by some other people, including:
-.br
-filipg at paranoia.com wrote the History buffer searching to 1.79.
-.br
-Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo (acme at conectiva.com.br) did the internationalization
-and the Brasilian Portuguese translations.
-.br
-Jim Seymour (jseymour at jimsun.LinxNet.com) wrote the multiple modem support
-and the filename selection window used since 1.80.
-.br
-Tomohiro Kubota (kubota at debian.or.jp) wrote the Japanese translations
-and the citation facility, and did some fixes.
-.br
-Gael Queri (gqueri at mail.dotcom.fr) wrote the French translations.
-.br
-Arkadiusz Miskiewicz (misiek at pld.org.pl) wrote the Polish translations.
-.br
-Kim Soyoung (nexti at chollian.net) wrote the Korean translations.
-.PP
-Most of this man page is copied, with corrections, from the original minicom
-README, but some pieces and the corrections are by Michael K. Johnson.
-.PP
-Jukka Lahtinen (walker at clinet.fi) has added some information of the changes
-made after version 1.75.
diff --git a/raw/man1/mkdir.1 b/raw/man1/mkdir.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 0b059ab..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mkdir.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH MKDIR "1" "October 2003" "mkdir (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-mkdir \- make directories
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mkdir
-[\fIOPTION\fR] \fIDIRECTORY\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Create the DIRECTORY(ies), if they do not already exist.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-mode\fR=\fIMODE\fR
-set permission mode (as in chmod), not rwxrwxrwx - umask
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-parents\fR
-no error if existing, make parent directories as needed
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-print a message for each created directory
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B mkdir
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B mkdir
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info mkdir
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/mkfifo.1 b/raw/man1/mkfifo.1
deleted file mode 100644
index bb477ff..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mkfifo.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH MKFIFO "1" "October 2003" "mkfifo (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-mkfifo \- make FIFOs (named pipes)
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mkfifo
-[\fIOPTION\fR] \fINAME\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Create named pipes (FIFOs) with the given NAMEs.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-mode\fR=\fIMODE\fR
-set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - umask
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B mkfifo
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B mkfifo
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info mkfifo
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/mknod.1 b/raw/man1/mknod.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 151e7db..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mknod.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH MKNOD "1" "October 2003" "mknod (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-mknod \- make block or character special files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mknod
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fINAME TYPE \fR[\fIMAJOR MINOR\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Create the special file NAME of the given TYPE.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-mode\fR=\fIMODE\fR
-set permission mode (as in chmod), not a=rw - umask
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Both MAJOR and MINOR must be specified when TYPE is b, c, or u, and they
-must be omitted when TYPE is p. If MAJOR or MINOR begins with 0x or 0X,
-it is interpreted as hexadecimal; otherwise, if it begins with 0, as octal;
-otherwise, as decimal. TYPE may be:
-.TP
-b
-create a block (buffered) special file
-.TP
-c, u
-create a character (unbuffered) special file
-.TP
-p
-create a FIFO
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B mknod
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B mknod
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info mknod
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/mkpasswd.1 b/raw/man1/mkpasswd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 9da760c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mkpasswd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-.TH MKPASSWD 1 "22 August 1994"
-.SH NAME
-mkpasswd \- generate new password, optionally apply it to a user
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mkpasswd
-.I
-[
-.I args
-]
-[
-.I user
-]
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.B mkpasswd
-generates passwords and can apply them automatically to users.
-mkpasswd is based on the code from Chapter 23 of the O'Reilly book
-"Exploring Expect".
-.SH USAGE
-With no arguments,
-.B mkpasswd
-returns a new password.
-
- mkpasswd
-
-With a user name,
-.B mkpasswd
-assigns a new password to the user.
-
- mkpasswd don
-
-The passwords are randomly generated according to the flags below.
-
-.SH FLAGS
-The
-.B \-l
-flag defines the length of the password. The default is 9.
-The following example creates a 20 character password.
-
- mkpasswd -l 20
-
-The
-.B \-d
-flag defines the minimum number of digits that must be in the password.
-The default is 2. The following example creates a password with at least
-3 digits.
-
- mkpasswd -d 3
-
-The
-.B \-c
-flag defines the minimum number of lowercase alphabetic characters that must be in the password.
-The default is 2.
-
-The
-.B \-C
-flag defines the minimum number of uppercase alphabetic characters that must be in the password.
-The default is 2.
-
-The
-.B \-s
-flag defines the minimum number of special characters that must be in the password.
-The default is 1.
-
-The
-.B \-p
-flag names a program to set the password.
-By default, /etc/yppasswd is used if present, otherwise /bin/passwd is used.
-
-The
-.B \-2
-flag causes characters to be chosen so that they alternate between
-right and left hands (qwerty-style), making it harder for anyone
-watching passwords being entered. This can also make it easier for
-a password-guessing program.
-
-The
-.B \-v
-flag causes the password-setting interaction to be visible.
-By default, it is suppressed.
-
-.SH EXAMPLE
-The following example creates a 15-character password
-that contains at least 3 digits and 5 uppercase characters.
-
- mkpasswd -l 15 -d 3 -C 5
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.I
-"Exploring Expect: A Tcl-Based Toolkit for Automating Interactive Programs"
-\fRby Don Libes,
-O'Reilly and Associates, January 1995.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Don Libes, National Institute of Standards and Technology
-
-.B mkpasswd
-is in the public domain.
-NIST and I would
-appreciate credit if this program or parts of it are used.
-
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/mktemp.1 b/raw/man1/mktemp.1
deleted file mode 100644
index d309560..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mktemp.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,243 +0,0 @@
-.\" $Id: mktemp.1,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1996, 2000, 2001 Todd C. Miller <Todd.Miller at courtesan.com>
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
-.\" derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
-.\" INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
-.\" AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
-.\" THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
-.\" EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
-.\" PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
-.\" OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
-.\" WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
-.\" OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
-.\" ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.TH MKTEMP 1 "30 September 2001"
-.SH NAME
-\fBmktemp\fP \- make temporary filename (unique)
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBmktemp\fP [\fB\-V\fP] | [\fB\-dqtu\fP] [\fB\-p\fP \fIdirectory\fP] [\fItemplate\fP]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B mktemp
-utility takes the given filename
-.I template
-and overwrites a portion of it to create a unique filename.
-The
-.I template
-may be any filename with some number of
-`Xs' appended to it, for example
-.I /tmp/tfile.XXXXXXXXXX.
-If no
-.I template
-is specified a default of
-.I tmp.XXXXXXXXXX
-is used and the
-.B \-t
-flag is implied (see below).
-.PP
-The trailing `Xs' are replaced with a combination
-of the current process number and random letters.
-The name chosen depends both on the number of `Xs' in the
-.I template
-and the number of collisions with pre\-existing files.
-The number of unique filenames
-.B mktemp
-can return depends on the number of
-`Xs' provided; ten `Xs' will result in
-.B mktemp
-testing roughly 26 ** 10 combinations.
-.PP
-If
-.B mktemp
-can successfully generate a unique filename, the file (or directory)
-is created with file permissions such that it is only readable and writable
-by its owner (unless the
-.B \-u
-flag is given) and the filename is printed to standard output.
-.PP
-.B mktemp
-is provided to allow shell scripts to safely use temporary
-files. Traditionally, many shell scripts take the name of the program with
-the PID as a suffix and use that as a temporary filename.
-This kind of naming scheme is predictable and the race condition it creates
-is easy for an attacker to win.
-A safer, though still inferior approach
-is to make a temporary directory using the same naming scheme.
-While this does allow one to guarantee that a temporary file will not be
-subverted, it still allows a simple denial of service attack.
-For these reasons it is suggested that
-.B mktemp
-be used instead.
-.PP
-The options are as follows:
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Print the version and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Make a directory instead of a file.
-.TP
-.BI "\-p " directory
-Use the specified
-.I directory
-as a prefix when generating the temporary filename.
-The
-.I directory
-will be overridden by the user's
-.SM TMPDIR
-environment variable if it is set.
-This option implies the
-.B \-t
-flag (see below).
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Fail silently if an error occurs.
-This is useful if
-a script does not want error output to go to standard error.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Generate a path rooted in a temporary directory.
-This directory is chosen as follows:
-.RS
-.IP \(bu
-If the user's
-.SM TMPDIR
-environment variable is set, the directory contained therein is used.
-.IP \(bu
-Otherwise, if the
-.B \-p
-flag was given the specified directory is used.
-.IP \(bu
-If none of the above apply,
-.I /tmp
-is used.
-.RE
-.PP
-In this mode, the
-.I template
-(if specified) should be a directory component (as opposed to a full path)
-and thus should not contain any forward slashes.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Operate in ``unsafe'' mode.
-The temp file will be unlinked before
-.B mktemp
-exits. This is slightly better than mktemp(3)
-but still introduces a race condition. Use of this
-option is not encouraged.
-.PP
-The
-.B mktemp
-utility
-exits with a value of 0 on success or 1 on failure.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-The following sh(1)
-fragment illustrates a simple use of
-.B mktemp
-where the script should quit if it cannot get a safe
-temporary file.
-.RS
-.nf
-
-TMPFILE=`mktemp /tmp/example.XXXXXXXXXX` || exit 1
-echo "program output" >> $TMPFILE
-
-.fi
-.RE
-The same fragment with support for a user's
-.SM TMPDIR
-environment variable can be written as follows.
-.RS
-.nf
-
-TMPFILE=`mktemp \-t example.XXXXXXXXXX` || exit 1
-echo "program output" >> $TMPFILE
-
-.fi
-.RE
-This can be further simplified if we don't care about the actual name of
-the temporary file. In this case the
-.B \-t
-flag is implied.
-.RS
-.nf
-
-TMPFILE=`mktemp` || exit 1
-echo "program output" >> $TMPFILE
-
-.fi
-.RE
-In some cases, it may be desirable to use a default temporary directory
-other than
-.I /tmp.
-In this example the temporary file will be created in
-.I /extra/tmp
-unless the user's
-.SM TMPDIR
-environment variable specifies otherwise.
-.RS
-.nf
-
-TMPFILE=`mktemp \-p /extra/tmp example.XXXXXXXXXX` || exit 1
-echo "program output" >> $TMPFILE
-
-.fi
-.RE
-In some cases, we want the script to catch the error.
-For instance, if we attempt to create two temporary files and
-the second one fails we need to remove the first before exiting.
-.RS
-.nf
-
-TMP1=`mktemp \-t example.1.XXXXXXXXXX` || exit 1
-TMP2=`mktemp \-t example.2.XXXXXXXXXX`
-if [ $? \-ne 0 ]; then
- rm \-f $TMP1
- exit 1
-fi
-
-.fi
-.RE
-Or perhaps you don't want to exit if
-.B mktemp
-is unable to create the file.
-In this case you can protect that part of the script thusly.
-.RS
-.nf
-
-TMPFILE=`mktemp \-t example.XXXXXXXXXX` && {
- # Safe to use $TMPFILE in this block
- echo data > $TMPFILE
- ...
- rm \-f $TMPFILE
-}
-
-.fi
-.RE
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.IP TMPDIR 8
-directory in which to place the temporary file when in
-.B \-t
-mode
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR mkdtemp (3),
-.BR mkstemp (3),
-.BR mktemp (3)
-.SH HISTORY
-The
-.B mktemp
-utility appeared in OpenBSD 2.1.
diff --git a/raw/man1/more.1 b/raw/man1/more.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 0142d8c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/more.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" Copyright (c) 1988 Mark Nudleman
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)more.1 5.15 (Berkeley) 7/29/91
-.\"
-.\" Revised: Fri Dec 25 15:27:27 1992 by root
-.\" 25Dec92: Extensive changes made by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu) to
-.\" conform with the more 5.19 currently in use by the Linux community.
-.\"
-.\" .Dd July 29, 1991 (Modified December 25, 1992)
-.Dd December 25, 1992
-.Dt MORE 1
-.Os "Linux 0.98"
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm more
-.Nd file perusal filter for crt viewing
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm more
-.Op Fl dlfpcsu
-.Op Fl num
-.Op +/ pattern
-.Op + linenum
-.Op Ar
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm More
-is a filter for paging through text one screenful at a time. This version
-is especially primitve. Users should realize that
-.Xr less 1
-provides
-.Xr more 1
-emulation and extensive enhancements.
-.Sh OPTIONS
-Command line options are described below.
-Options are also taken from the environment variable
-.Ev MORE
-(make sure to precede them with a dash (``-'')) but command
-line options will override them.
-.Bl -tag -width flag
-.It Fl num
-This option specifies an integer which is the screen size (in lines).
-.It Fl d
-.Nm more
-will prompt the user with the message "[Press space to continue, 'q' to
-quit.]" and will display "[Press 'h' for instructions.]" instead of ringing
-the bell when an illegal key is pressed.
-.It Fl l
-.Nm more
-usually treats
-.Ic \&^L
-(form feed) as a special character, and will pause after any line that
-contains a form feed. The
-.Fl l
-option will prevent this behavior.
-.It Fl f
-Causes
-.Nm more
-to count logical, rather than screen lines (i.e., long lines are not
-folded).
-.It Fl p
-Do not scroll. Instead, clear the whole screen and then display the text.
-.It Fl c
-Do not scroll. Instead, paint each screen from the top, clearing the
-remainder of each line as it is displayed.
-.It Fl s
-Squeeze multiple blank lines into one.
-.It Fl u
-Suppress underlining.
-.It Ic +/
-The
-.Ic +/
-option specifies a string that will be searched for before
-each file is displayed.
-.It Ic +num
-Start at line number
-.Ic num .
-.El
-.Sh COMMANDS
-Interactive commands for
-.Nm more
-are based on
-.Xr vi 1 .
-Some commands may be preceded by a decimal number, called k in the
-descriptions below.
-In the following descriptions, ^X means control-X.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width Ic
-.It Ic h No or Ic ?
-Help: display a summary of these commands.
-If you forget all the other commands, remember this one.
-.It Ic SPACE
-Display next k lines of text. Defaults to current screen size.
-.It Ic z
-Display next k lines of text. Defaults to current screen size. Argument
-becomes new default.
-.It Ic RETURN
-Display next k lines of text. Defaults to 1. Argument becomes new
-default.
-.It Ic d No or Ic \&^D
-Scroll k lines. Default is current scroll size, initially 11. Argument
-becomes new default.
-.It Xo
-.Ic q
-.No or
-.Ic Q
-.No or
-.Ic INTERRUPT
-.Xc
-Exit.
-.It Ic s
-Skip forward k lines of text. Defaults to 1.
-.It Ic f
-Skip forward k screenfuls of text. Defaults to 1.
-.It Ic b No or Ic \&^B
-Skip backwards k screenfuls of text. Defaults to 1.
-Only works with files, not pipes.
-.It Ic '
-Go to place where previous search started.
-.It Ic =
-Display current line number.
-.It Ic \&/ Ns Ar pattern
-Search for kth occurrence of regular expression. Defaults to 1.
-.It Ic n
-Search for kth occurrence of last r.e. Defaults to 1.
-.It Ic !<cmd> No or Ic :!<cmd>
-Execute <cmd> in a subshell
-.It Ic v
-Start up an editor at current line.
-The editor is taken from the environment variable VISUAL if defined,
-or EDITOR if VISUAL is not defined,
-or defaults to "vi" if neither VISUAL nor EDITOR is defined.
-.It Ic \&^L
-Redraw screen
-.It Ic :n
-Go to kth next file. Defaults to 1.
-.It Ic :p
-Go to kth previous file. Defaults to 1.
-.It Ic :f
-Display current file name and line number
-.It Ic \&.
-Repeat previous command
-.El
-.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-.Nm More
-utilizes the following environment variables, if they exist:
-.Bl -tag -width Fl
-.It Ev MORE
-This variable may be set with favored options to
-.Nm more .
-.It Ev SHELL
-Current shell in use (normally set by the shell at login time).
-.It Ev TERM
-Specifies terminal type, used by more to get the terminal
-characteristics necessary to manipulate the screen.
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr vi 1
-.Xr less 1
-.Sh AUTHORS
-Eric Shienbrood, UC Berkeley
-.br
-Modified by Geoff Peck, UCB to add underlining, single spacing
-.br
-Modified by John Foderaro, UCB to add -c and MORE environment variable
-.Sh HISTORY
-The
-.Nm more
-command appeared in
-.Bx 3.0 .
-This man page documents
-.Nm more
-version 5.19 (Berkeley 6/29/88), which is currently in use in the Linux
-community. Documentation was produced using several other versions of the
-man page, and extensive inspection of the source code.
diff --git a/raw/man1/mv.1 b/raw/man1/mv.1
deleted file mode 100644
index dcebc47..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/mv.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH MV "1" "October 2003" "mv (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-mv \- move (rename) files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mv
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fISOURCE DEST\fR
-.br
-.B mv
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fISOURCE\fR... \fIDIRECTORY\fR
-.br
-.B mv
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fI--target-directory=DIRECTORY SOURCE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Rename SOURCE to DEST, or move SOURCE(s) to DIRECTORY.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-backup\fR[=\fICONTROL\fR]
-make a backup of each existing destination file
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR
-like \fB\-\-backup\fR but does not accept an argument
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-force\fR
-do not prompt before overwriting
-equivalent to \fB\-\-reply\fR=\fIyes\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-interactive\fR
-prompt before overwrite
-equivalent to \fB\-\-reply\fR=\fIquery\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-reply=\fR{yes,no,query}
-specify how to handle the prompt about an
-existing destination file
-.TP
-\fB\-\-strip\-trailing\-slashes\fR remove any trailing slashes from each SOURCE
-argument
-.TP
-\fB\-S\fR, \fB\-\-suffix\fR=\fISUFFIX\fR
-override the usual backup suffix
-.TP
-\fB\-\-target\-directory\fR=\fIDIRECTORY\fR
-move all SOURCE arguments into DIRECTORY
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-update\fR
-move only when the SOURCE file is newer
-than the destination file or when the
-destination file is missing
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-explain what is being done
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-The backup suffix is `~', unless set with \fB\-\-suffix\fR or SIMPLE_BACKUP_SUFFIX.
-The version control method may be selected via the \fB\-\-backup\fR option or through
-the VERSION_CONTROL environment variable. Here are the values:
-.TP
-none, off
-never make backups (even if \fB\-\-backup\fR is given)
-.TP
-numbered, t
-make numbered backups
-.TP
-existing, nil
-numbered if numbered backups exist, simple otherwise
-.TP
-simple, never
-always make simple backups
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Mike Parker, David MacKenzie, and Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B mv
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B mv
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info mv
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/newgrp.1 b/raw/man1/newgrp.1
deleted file mode 100644
index de420ec..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/newgrp.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-.\" Original author unknown. This man page is in the public domain.
-.\" Modified Sat Oct 9 17:46:48 1993 by faith at cs.unc.edu
-.TH NEWGRP 1 "9 October 1993" "Linux 1.2" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-newgrp \- log in to a new group
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "newgrp [ " group " ]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Newgrp
-changes the group identification of its caller, analogously to
-.BR login (1).
-The same person remains logged in, and the current directory
-is unchanged, but calculations of access permissions to files are performed
-with respect to the new group ID.
-.LP
-If no group is specified, the GID is changed to the login GID.
-.LP
-.SH FILES
-.I /etc/group
-.br
-.I /etc/passwd
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR login "(1), " group (5)
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-Originally by Michael Haardt. Currently maintained by
-Peter Orbaek (poe at daimi.aau.dk).
diff --git a/raw/man1/nice.1 b/raw/man1/nice.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a4c7cab..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/nice.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH NICE "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-nice \- run a program with modified scheduling priority
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B nice
-[\fIOPTION\fR] [\fICOMMAND \fR[\fIARG\fR]...]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Run COMMAND with an adjusted scheduling priority.
-With no COMMAND, print the current scheduling priority. ADJUST is 10
-by default. Range goes from \fB\-20\fR (highest priority) to 19 (lowest).
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-adjustment\fR=\fIADJUST\fR
-increment priority by ADJUST first
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B nice
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B nice
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info nice
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/nmblookup.1 b/raw/man1/nmblookup.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8dc68a3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/nmblookup.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,185 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "NMBLOOKUP" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-nmblookup \- NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS names
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBnmblookup\fR [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B <broadcast address>] [-U <unicast
- address>] [-d <debug level>] [-s <smb config file>] [-i <NetBIOS scope>]
- [-T] [-f] {name}
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBnmblookup\fR is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses in a network using NetBIOS over TCP/IP queries\&. The options allow the name queries to be directed at a particular IP broadcast area or to a particular machine\&. All queries are done over UDP\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--M
-Searches for a master browser by looking up the NetBIOS name \fIname\fR with a type of \fB0x1d\fR\&. If \fI name\fR is "-" then it does a lookup on the special name \fB__MSBROWSE__\fR\&. Please note that in order to use the name "-", you need to make sure "-" isn't parsed as an argument, e\&.g\&. use : \fBnmblookup -M -- -\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
--R
-Set the recursion desired bit in the packet to do a recursive lookup\&. This is used when sending a name query to a machine running a WINS server and the user wishes to query the names in the WINS server\&. If this bit is unset the normal (broadcast responding) NetBIOS processing code on a machine is used instead\&. See RFC1001, RFC1002 for details\&.
-
-
-.TP
--S
-Once the name query has returned an IP address then do a node status query as well\&. A node status query returns the NetBIOS names registered by a host\&.
-
-
-.TP
--r
-Try and bind to UDP port 137 to send and receive UDP datagrams\&. The reason for this option is a bug in Windows 95 where it ignores the source port of the requesting packet and only replies to UDP port 137\&. Unfortunately, on most UNIX systems root privilege is needed to bind to this port, and in addition, if the \fBnmbd\fR(8) daemon is running on this machine it also binds to this port\&.
-
-
-.TP
--A
-Interpret \fIname\fR as an IP Address and do a node status query on this address\&.
-
-
-.TP
--n <primary NetBIOS name>
-This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
--i <scope>
-This specifies a NetBIOS scope that \fBnmblookup\fR will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are \fBvery\fR rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you communicate with\&.
-
-
-.TP
--W|--workgroup=domain
-Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in smb\&.conf\&. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM)\&.
-
-
-.TP
--O socket options
-TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--B <broadcast address>
-Send the query to the given broadcast address\&. Without this option the default behavior of nmblookup is to send the query to the broadcast address of the network interfaces as either auto-detected or defined in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--U <unicast address>
-Do a unicast query to the specified address or host \fIunicast address\fR\&. This option (along with the \fI-R\fR option) is needed to query a WINS server\&.
-
-
-.TP
--V
-Prints the program version number\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s <configuration file>
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
-
-
-.TP
--d|--debug=debuglevel
-\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&.
-
-
-The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&.
-
-
-Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
-
-
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--l|--logfile=logbasename
-File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&.
-
-
-.TP
--T
-This causes any IP addresses found in the lookup to be looked up via a reverse DNS lookup into a DNS name, and printed out before each
-
-
-\fBIP address \&.\&.\&.\&. NetBIOS name\fR
-
-
-pair that is the normal output\&.
-
-
-.TP
--f
-Show which flags apply to the name that has been looked up\&. Possible answers are zero or more of: Response, Authoritative, Truncated, Recursion_Desired, Recursion_Available, Broadcast\&.
-
-
-.TP
-name
-This is the NetBIOS name being queried\&. Depending upon the previous options this may be a NetBIOS name or IP address\&. If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified by appending '#<type>' to the name\&. This name may also be '*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast area\&.
-
-
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-
-.PP
-\fBnmblookup\fR can be used to query a WINS server (in the same way \fBnslookup\fR is used to query DNS servers)\&. To query a WINS server, \fBnmblookup\fR must be called like this:
-
-.PP
-\fBnmblookup -U server -R 'name'\fR
-
-.PP
-For example, running :
-
-.PP
-\fBnmblookup -U samba.org -R 'IRIX#1B'\fR
-
-.PP
-would query the WINS server samba\&.org for the domain master browser (1B name type) for the IRIX workgroup\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBnmbd\fR(8), \fBsamba\fR(7), and \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/nohup.1 b/raw/man1/nohup.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 81aaec0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/nohup.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH NOHUP "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-nohup \- run a command immune to hangups, with output to a non-tty
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B nohup
-\fICOMMAND \fR[\fIARG\fR]...
-.br
-.B nohup
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Run COMMAND, ignoring hangup signals.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B nohup
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B nohup
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info nohup
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/nroff.1 b/raw/man1/nroff.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ef67cae..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/nroff.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,144 +0,0 @@
-.ig
-Copyright (C) 1989-2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH NROFF 1 "23 September 2003" "Groff Version 1.18.1"
-.SH NAME
-nroff \- emulate nroff command with groff
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nr a \n(.j
-.ad l
-.nr i \n(.i
-.in +\w'\fBnroff 'u
-.ti \niu
-.B nroff
-.de OP
-.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
-.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
-..
-.OP \-h
-.OP \-i
-.OP \-m name
-.OP \-n num
-.OP \-o list
-.OP \-p
-.OP \-r cn
-.OP \-S
-.OP \-t
-.OP \-T name
-.OP \-U
-.OP \-v
-.RI "[\ " "file" "\ .\|.\|.\ ]"
-.br
-.ad \na
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B nroff
-script emulates the
-.B nroff
-command using groff.
-Only
-.BR ascii ,
-.BR ascii8 ,
-.BR latin1 ,
-.BR utf8 ,
-.BR nippon ,
-and
-.B cp1047
-are valid arguments for the
-.B -T
-option.
-If an invalid or no
-.BR \-T
-option is given,
-.B nroff
-checks the current locale to select a default output device.
-It first tries the
-.B locale
-program, then the environment variables
-.BR LC_ALL ,
-.BR LC_CTYPE ,
-and
-.BR LANG ,
-and finally the
-.B LESSCHARSET
-environment variable.
-.PP
-The
-.B \-h
-and
-.B \-c
-options
-are equivalent to
-.BR grotty 's
-options
-.B \-h
-(using tabs in the output) and
-.B \-c
-(using the old output scheme instead of SGR escape sequences).
-The
-.BR \-C ,
-.BR \-i ,
-.BR \-n ,
-.BR \-m ,
-.BR \-o ,
-and
-.B \-r
-options have the effect described in
-.BR troff (1).
-In addition,
-.B nroff
-silently ignores the options
-.BR \-e ,
-.BR \-q ,
-and
-.BR \-s
-(which are not implemented in
-.BR troff ).
-Options
-.B \-p
-(pic),
-.B \-t
-(tbl),
-.B \-S
-(safer), and
-.B \-U
-(unsafe) are passed to
-.BR groff .
-.B \-v
-shows the version number.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_BIN_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for the
-.B groff
-executable before searching in PATH. If unset, `/usr/bin' is used.
-.SH NOTES
-This shell script is basically intended for use with
-.BR man (1),
-so warnings are suppressed.
-nroff-style character definitions (in the file tty-char.tmac) are also
-loaded to emulate unrepresentable glyphs.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR groff (1),
-.BR troff (1),
-.BR grotty (1)
-.
-.\" Local Variables:
-.\" mode: nroff
-.\" End:
diff --git a/raw/man1/octave-bug.1 b/raw/man1/octave-bug.1
deleted file mode 100644
index d15cd6d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/octave-bug.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-.\" Man page for octave-bug
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 1996 - 2000 John W. Eaton
-.\"
-.\" This file is part of Octave.
-.\"
-.\" Octave is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-.\" under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
-.\" Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any
-.\" later version.
-.\"
-.\" Octave is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
-.\" ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
-.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
-.\" for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with Octave; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
-.\" 02111-1307, USA.
-.\"
-.\" This page was contributed by Dirk Eddelbuettel <edd at debian.org>
-.\"
-.TH octave-bug 1 "6 March 2000" GNU
-.LO 1
-.SH NAME
-octave-bug \- report a bug in GNU Octave
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B octave-bug
-.RB [\| \-s
-.IR subject \|]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B octave-bug
-is a shell script to help the user compose and mail bug reports
-concerning Octave in a standard format.
-.B octave-bug
-is typically invoked by the Octave command
-.B bug_report
-which is intended to be called interactively from within Octave. This
-provides the best way to submit a bug report for Octave. It creates a
-template bug report file and starts an editor on that file. The bug report
-will be sent to the bug-octave mailing list once the editing has been
-completed (this assumes of course that your system can use email). However,
-the user could also call \fBoctave-bug\fR outside of Octave.
-.PP
-Please read the `Bugs' chapter in the Octave manual to find out how to submit
-a bug report that will enable the Octave maintainers to fix the problem. If
-you are unable to use the bug_report command, send your message to the
-bug-octave mailing list, bug-octave at bevo.che.wisc.edu.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI -s\ subject
-Specify a subject line for the bug report. Spaces in the subject must
-be quoted.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
-.B
-octave-bug
-uses the environment variables
-.BR USER,
-.BR EDITOR,
-and
-.B PAGER
-which can be used for customization.
-.SH VERSION
-This document was last revised for Octave version 2.0.16.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR octave (1),
-.BR bashbug (1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-.nf
-John W. Eaton
-Department of Chemical Engineering
-University of Wisconsin-Madison
-Madison, WI 53706
-USA
-<jwe at bevo.che.wisc.edu>
diff --git a/raw/man1/octave-config.1 b/raw/man1/octave-config.1
deleted file mode 100644
index bfebf49..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/octave-config.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-.\" Man page contributed by Dirk Eddelbuettel <edd at debian.org>
-.\" and released under the GNU GPL
-.TH OCTAVE-CONFIG 1 "19 February 2003" "GNU Octave"
-.SH NAME
-octave-config - GNU Octave component and library information retrieval
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BR octave-config\ [--m-site-dir]\ [--oct-site-dir]\ [-v|--version]\
-[-h|-?|--help]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fIoctave-config\fP is a tool to obtain directory information for
-.f .oct
-and
-.f .m
-files for
-.BR octave (1).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.l
-\fIoctave-config\fP accepts the following options:
-.TP 8
-.B \--m-site-dir
-Display the main directory for local, or site-specific, .m script files.
-.TP 8
-.B \--oct-site-dir
-Display the main directory for local, or site-specific, .oct dynamic-link libraries.
-.B \-v|\-\-version
-Display the version number of
-.BR octave (1).
-.TP 8
-.B \-h|-?|--help
-Display a help page about
-\fIoctave-config\fP
-.SH AUTHOR
-John W. Eaton <jwe at bevo.che.wisc.edu>
-
-This manual page was contributed by Dirk Eddelbuettel <edd at debian.org>
-for the Debian GNU/Linux distribution but may be used by others.
diff --git a/raw/man1/octave.1 b/raw/man1/octave.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8db1d43..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/octave.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-.\" Man page for Octave
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 1996, 1997 John W. Eaton
-.\"
-.\" This file is part of Octave.
-.\"
-.\" Octave is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-.\" under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the
-.\" Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any
-.\" later version.
-.\"
-.\" Octave is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
-.\" ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
-.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License
-.\" for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with Octave; see the file COPYING. If not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
-.\" 02111-1307, USA.
-.\"
-.TH Octave 1 "Jan 8 1996"
-.LO 1
-.SH NAME
-octave \- A high-level interactive language for numerical computations.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-octave [options]
-.fi
-.SH OPTIONS
-The complete set of command-line options for octave is available by
-running the command
-.nf
-
- octave --help
-
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Octave is a high-level language, primarily intended for numerical
-computations. It provides a convenient command line interface for
-solving linear and nonlinear problems numerically.
-.SH DOCUMENTATION
-The primary documentation for Octave is written using Texinfo, the GNU
-documentation system, which allows the same source files to be used to
-produce on-line and printed versions of the manual.
-.PP
-You can read the on-line copy of the Octave documentation by issuing
-the command
-.nf
-
- octave:13> help -i
-
-.fi
-while running Octave interactively, by using the GNU Emacs info mode,
-or by running standalone programs like info or xinfo.
-.SH BUGS
-The best way to submit a bug report for Octave is to use the command
-.nf
-
- octave:13> bug_report
-
-.fi
-while running Octave interactively. This will create a template bug
-report file and start an editor on that file. Your
-message will be sent to the bug-octave mailing list
-once you are finished editing the template.
-.PP
-If you are unable to use the bug_report command, send your message
-to the
-.B bug-octave at bevo.che.wisc.edu
-mailing list by some other means. Please read the `Bugs' chapter in
-the Octave manual to find out how to submit a bug report that will
-enable the Octave maintainers to fix the problem.
-.SH AUTHOR
-.nf
-John W. Eaton
-Department of Chemical Engineering
-University of Wisconsin-Madison
-Madison, WI 53706
-USA
-<jwe at bevo.che.wisc.edu>
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man1/paste.1 b/raw/man1/paste.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3312808..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/paste.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH PASTE "1" "October 2003" "paste (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-paste \- merge lines of files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B paste
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Write lines consisting of the sequentially corresponding lines from
-each FILE, separated by TABs, to standard output.
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-delimiters\fR=\fILIST\fR
-reuse characters from LIST instead of TABs
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-serial\fR
-paste one file at a time instead of in parallel
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David M. Ihnat and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B paste
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B paste
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info paste
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlbook.1 b/raw/man1/perlbook.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 429209e..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlbook.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLBOOK 1"
-.TH PERLBOOK 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlbook \- Perl book information
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-The Camel Book, officially known as \fIProgramming Perl, Third Edition\fR,
-by Larry Wall et al, is the definitive reference work covering nearly
-all of Perl. You can order it and other Perl books from O'Reilly &
-Associates, 1\-800\-998\-9938. Local/overseas is +1 707 829 0515. If you
-can locate an O'Reilly order form, you can also fax to +1 707 829 0104.
-If you're web\-connected, you can even mosey on over to http://www.oreilly.com/
-for an online order form.
-.PP
-Other Perl books from various publishers and authors
-can be found listed in perlfaq2.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlboot.1 b/raw/man1/perlboot.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d802ae..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlboot.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1046 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLBOOT 1"
-.TH PERLBOOT 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlboot \- Beginner's Object\-Oriented Tutorial
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-If you're not familiar with objects from other languages, some of the
-other Perl object documentation may be a little daunting, such as
-perlobj, a basic reference in using objects, and perltoot, which
-introduces readers to the peculiarities of Perl's object system in a
-tutorial way.
-.PP
-So, let's take a different approach, presuming no prior object
-experience. It helps if you know about subroutines (perlsub),
-references (perlref et. seq.), and packages (perlmod), so become
-familiar with those first if you haven't already.
-.Sh "If we could talk to the animals..."
-.IX Subsection "If we could talk to the animals..."
-Let's let the animals talk for a moment:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& sub Cow::speak {
-\& print "a Cow goes moooo!\en";
-\& }
-\& sub Horse::speak {
-\& print "a Horse goes neigh!\en";
-\& }
-\& sub Sheep::speak {
-\& print "a Sheep goes baaaah!\en"
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& Cow::speak;
-\& Horse::speak;
-\& Sheep::speak;
-.Ve
-.PP
-This results in:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& a Cow goes moooo!
-\& a Horse goes neigh!
-\& a Sheep goes baaaah!
-.Ve
-.PP
-Nothing spectacular here. Simple subroutines, albeit from separate
-packages, and called using the full package name. So let's create
-an entire pasture:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& # Cow::speak, Horse::speak, Sheep::speak as before
-\& @pasture = qw(Cow Cow Horse Sheep Sheep);
-\& foreach $animal (@pasture) {
-\& &{$animal."::speak"};
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-This results in:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& a Cow goes moooo!
-\& a Cow goes moooo!
-\& a Horse goes neigh!
-\& a Sheep goes baaaah!
-\& a Sheep goes baaaah!
-.Ve
-.PP
-Wow. That symbolic coderef de-referencing there is pretty nasty.
-We're counting on \f(CW\*(C`no strict subs\*(C'\fR mode, certainly not recommended
-for larger programs. And why was that necessary? Because the name of
-the package seems to be inseparable from the name of the subroutine we
-want to invoke within that package.
-.PP
-Or is it?
-.Sh "Introducing the method invocation arrow"
-.IX Subsection "Introducing the method invocation arrow"
-For now, let's say that \f(CW\*(C`Class\->method\*(C'\fR invokes subroutine
-\&\f(CW\*(C`method\*(C'\fR in package \f(CW\*(C`Class\*(C'\fR. (Here, \*(L"Class\*(R" is used in its
-\&\*(L"category\*(R" meaning, not its \*(L"scholastic\*(R" meaning.) That's not
-completely accurate, but we'll do this one step at a time. Now let's
-use it like so:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& # Cow::speak, Horse::speak, Sheep::speak as before
-\& Cow->speak;
-\& Horse->speak;
-\& Sheep->speak;
-.Ve
-.PP
-And once again, this results in:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& a Cow goes moooo!
-\& a Horse goes neigh!
-\& a Sheep goes baaaah!
-.Ve
-.PP
-That's not fun yet. Same number of characters, all constant, no
-variables. But yet, the parts are separable now. Watch:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $a = "Cow";
-\& $a->speak; # invokes Cow->speak
-.Ve
-.PP
-Ahh! Now that the package name has been parted from the subroutine
-name, we can use a variable package name. And this time, we've got
-something that works even when \f(CW\*(C`use strict refs\*(C'\fR is enabled.
-.Sh "Invoking a barnyard"
-.IX Subsection "Invoking a barnyard"
-Let's take that new arrow invocation and put it back in the barnyard
-example:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& sub Cow::speak {
-\& print "a Cow goes moooo!\en";
-\& }
-\& sub Horse::speak {
-\& print "a Horse goes neigh!\en";
-\& }
-\& sub Sheep::speak {
-\& print "a Sheep goes baaaah!\en"
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& @pasture = qw(Cow Cow Horse Sheep Sheep);
-\& foreach $animal (@pasture) {
-\& $animal->speak;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-There! Now we have the animals all talking, and safely at that,
-without the use of symbolic coderefs.
-.PP
-But look at all that common code. Each of the \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR routines has a
-similar structure: a \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR operator and a string that contains
-common text, except for two of the words. It'd be nice if we could
-factor out the commonality, in case we decide later to change it all
-to \f(CW\*(C`says\*(C'\fR instead of \f(CW\*(C`goes\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-And we actually have a way of doing that without much fuss, but we
-have to hear a bit more about what the method invocation arrow is
-actually doing for us.
-.Sh "The extra parameter of method invocation"
-.IX Subsection "The extra parameter of method invocation"
-The invocation of:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Class->method(@args)
-.Ve
-.PP
-attempts to invoke subroutine \f(CW\*(C`Class::method\*(C'\fR as:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Class::method("Class", @args);
-.Ve
-.PP
-(If the subroutine can't be found, \*(L"inheritance\*(R" kicks in, but we'll
-get to that later.) This means that we get the class name as the
-first parameter (the only parameter, if no arguments are given). So
-we can rewrite the \f(CW\*(C`Sheep\*(C'\fR speaking subroutine as:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& sub Sheep::speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes baaaah!\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-And the other two animals come out similarly:
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& sub Cow::speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes moooo!\en";
-\& }
-\& sub Horse::speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes neigh!\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-In each case, \f(CW$class\fR will get the value appropriate for that
-subroutine. But once again, we have a lot of similar structure. Can
-we factor that out even further? Yes, by calling another method in
-the same class.
-.Sh "Calling a second method to simplify things"
-.IX Subsection "Calling a second method to simplify things"
-Let's call out from \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR to a helper method called \f(CW\*(C`sound\*(C'\fR.
-This method provides the constant text for the sound itself.
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& { package Cow;
-\& sub sound { "moooo" }
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes ", $class->sound, "!\en"
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now, when we call \f(CW\*(C`Cow\->speak\*(C'\fR, we get a \f(CW$class\fR of \f(CW\*(C`Cow\*(C'\fR in
-\&\f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR. This in turn selects the \f(CW\*(C`Cow\->sound\*(C'\fR method, which
-returns \f(CW\*(C`moooo\*(C'\fR. But how different would this be for the \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR?
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& { package Horse;
-\& sub sound { "neigh" }
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes ", $class->sound, "!\en"
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Only the name of the package and the specific sound change. So can we
-somehow share the definition for \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR between the Cow and the
-Horse? Yes, with inheritance!
-.Sh "Inheriting the windpipes"
-.IX Subsection "Inheriting the windpipes"
-We'll define a common subroutine package called \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR, with the
-definition for \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& { package Animal;
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes ", $class->sound, "!\en"
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Then, for each animal, we say it \*(L"inherits\*(R" from \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR, along
-with the animal-specific sound:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& { package Cow;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "moooo" }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note the added \f(CW at ISA\fR array. We'll get to that in a minute.
-.PP
-But what happens when we invoke \f(CW\*(C`Cow\->speak\*(C'\fR now?
-.PP
-First, Perl constructs the argument list. In this case, it's just
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Cow\*(C'\fR. Then Perl looks for \f(CW\*(C`Cow::speak\*(C'\fR. But that's not there, so
-Perl checks for the inheritance array \f(CW at Cow::ISA\fR. It's there,
-and contains the single name \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-Perl next checks for \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR inside \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR instead, as in
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR. And that's found, so Perl invokes that subroutine
-with the already frozen argument list.
-.PP
-Inside the \f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR subroutine, \f(CW$class\fR becomes \f(CW\*(C`Cow\*(C'\fR (the
-first argument). So when we get to the step of invoking
-\&\f(CW\*(C`$class\->sound\*(C'\fR, it'll be looking for \f(CW\*(C`Cow\->sound\*(C'\fR, which
-gets it on the first try without looking at \f(CW at ISA\fR. Success!
-.ie n .Sh "A few notes about @ISA"
-.el .Sh "A few notes about \f(CW at ISA\fP"
-.IX Subsection "A few notes about @ISA"
-This magical \f(CW at ISA\fR variable (pronounced \*(L"is a\*(R" not \*(L"ice\-uh\*(R"), has
-declared that \f(CW\*(C`Cow\*(C'\fR \*(L"is a\*(R" \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR. Note that it's an array,
-not a simple single value, because on rare occasions, it makes sense
-to have more than one parent class searched for the missing methods.
-.PP
-If \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR also had an \f(CW at ISA\fR, then we'd check there too. The
-search is recursive, depth\-first, left-to-right in each \f(CW at ISA\fR.
-Typically, each \f(CW at ISA\fR has only one element (multiple elements means
-multiple inheritance and multiple headaches), so we get a nice tree of
-inheritance.
-.PP
-When we turn on \f(CW\*(C`use strict\*(C'\fR, we'll get complaints on \f(CW at ISA\fR, since
-it's not a variable containing an explicit package name, nor is it a
-lexical (\*(L"my\*(R") variable. We can't make it a lexical variable though
-(it has to belong to the package to be found by the inheritance mechanism),
-so there's a couple of straightforward ways to handle that.
-.PP
-The easiest is to just spell the package name out:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& @Cow::ISA = qw(Animal);
-.Ve
-.PP
-Or allow it as an implicitly named package variable:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& package Cow;
-\& use vars qw(@ISA);
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you're bringing in the class from outside, via an object-oriented
-module, you change:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& package Cow;
-\& use Animal;
-\& use vars qw(@ISA);
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-.Ve
-.PP
-into just:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& package Cow;
-\& use base qw(Animal);
-.Ve
-.PP
-And that's pretty darn compact.
-.Sh "Overriding the methods"
-.IX Subsection "Overriding the methods"
-Let's add a mouse, which can barely be heard:
-.PP
-.Vb 10
-\& # Animal package from before
-\& { package Mouse;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "squeak" }
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes ", $class->sound, "!\en";
-\& print "[but you can barely hear it!]\en";
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Mouse->speak;
-.Ve
-.PP
-which results in:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& a Mouse goes squeak!
-\& [but you can barely hear it!]
-.Ve
-.PP
-Here, \f(CW\*(C`Mouse\*(C'\fR has its own speaking routine, so \f(CW\*(C`Mouse\->speak\*(C'\fR
-doesn't immediately invoke \f(CW\*(C`Animal\->speak\*(C'\fR. This is known as
-\&\*(L"overriding\*(R". In fact, we didn't even need to say that a \f(CW\*(C`Mouse\*(C'\fR was
-an \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR at all, since all of the methods needed for \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR are
-completely defined with \f(CW\*(C`Mouse\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-But we've now duplicated some of the code from \f(CW\*(C`Animal\->speak\*(C'\fR,
-and this can once again be a maintenance headache. So, can we avoid
-that? Can we say somehow that a \f(CW\*(C`Mouse\*(C'\fR does everything any other
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR does, but add in the extra comment? Sure!
-.PP
-First, we can invoke the \f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR method directly:
-.PP
-.Vb 10
-\& # Animal package from before
-\& { package Mouse;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "squeak" }
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& Animal::speak($class);
-\& print "[but you can barely hear it!]\en";
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note that we have to include the \f(CW$class\fR parameter (almost surely
-the value of \f(CW"Mouse"\fR) as the first parameter to \f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR,
-since we've stopped using the method arrow. Why did we stop? Well,
-if we invoke \f(CW\*(C`Animal\->speak\*(C'\fR there, the first parameter to the
-method will be \f(CW"Animal"\fR not \f(CW"Mouse"\fR, and when time comes for it
-to call for the \f(CW\*(C`sound\*(C'\fR, it won't have the right class to come back
-to this package.
-.PP
-Invoking \f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR directly is a mess, however. What if
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR didn't exist before, and was being inherited from a
-class mentioned in \f(CW at Animal::ISA\fR? Because we are no longer using
-the method arrow, we get one and only one chance to hit the right
-subroutine.
-.PP
-Also note that the \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR classname is now hardwired into the
-subroutine selection. This is a mess if someone maintains the code,
-changing \f(CW at ISA\fR for <Mouse> and didn't notice \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR there in
-\&\f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR. So, this is probably not the right way to go.
-.Sh "Starting the search from a different place"
-.IX Subsection "Starting the search from a different place"
-A better solution is to tell Perl to search from a higher place
-in the inheritance chain:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& # same Animal as before
-\& { package Mouse;
-\& # same @ISA, &sound as before
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& $class->Animal::speak;
-\& print "[but you can barely hear it!]\en";
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Ahh. This works. Using this syntax, we start with \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR to find
-\&\f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR, and use all of \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR's inheritance chain if not found
-immediately. And yet the first parameter will be \f(CW$class\fR, so the
-found \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR method will get \f(CW\*(C`Mouse\*(C'\fR as its first entry, and
-eventually work its way back to \f(CW\*(C`Mouse::sound\*(C'\fR for the details.
-.PP
-But this isn't the best solution. We still have to keep the \f(CW at ISA\fR
-and the initial search package coordinated. Worse, if \f(CW\*(C`Mouse\*(C'\fR had
-multiple entries in \f(CW at ISA\fR, we wouldn't necessarily know which one
-had actually defined \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR. So, is there an even better way?
-.Sh "The \s-1SUPER\s0 way of doing things"
-.IX Subsection "The SUPER way of doing things"
-By changing the \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR class to the \f(CW\*(C`SUPER\*(C'\fR class in that
-invocation, we get a search of all of our super classes (classes
-listed in \f(CW at ISA\fR) automatically:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& # same Animal as before
-\& { package Mouse;
-\& # same @ISA, &sound as before
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& $class->SUPER::speak;
-\& print "[but you can barely hear it!]\en";
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-So, \f(CW\*(C`SUPER::speak\*(C'\fR means look in the current package's \f(CW at ISA\fR for
-\&\f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR, invoking the first one found. Note that it does \fInot\fR look in
-the \f(CW at ISA\fR of \f(CW$class\fR.
-.Sh "Where we're at so far..."
-.IX Subsection "Where we're at so far..."
-So far, we've seen the method arrow syntax:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Class->method(@args);
-.Ve
-.PP
-or the equivalent:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $a = "Class";
-\& $a->method(@args);
-.Ve
-.PP
-which constructs an argument list of:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ("Class", @args)
-.Ve
-.PP
-and attempts to invoke
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Class::method("Class", @Args);
-.Ve
-.PP
-However, if \f(CW\*(C`Class::method\*(C'\fR is not found, then \f(CW at Class::ISA\fR is examined
-(recursively) to locate a package that does indeed contain \f(CW\*(C`method\*(C'\fR,
-and that subroutine is invoked instead.
-.PP
-Using this simple syntax, we have class methods, (multiple)
-inheritance, overriding, and extending. Using just what we've seen so
-far, we've been able to factor out common code, and provide a nice way
-to reuse implementations with variations. This is at the core of what
-objects provide, but objects also provide instance data, which we
-haven't even begun to cover.
-.Sh "A horse is a horse, of course of course \*(-- or is it?"
-.IX Subsection "A horse is a horse, of course of course or is it?"
-Let's start with the code for the \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR class
-and the \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR class:
-.PP
-.Vb 10
-\& { package Animal;
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes ", $class->sound, "!\en"
-\& }
-\& }
-\& { package Horse;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "neigh" }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-This lets us invoke \f(CW\*(C`Horse\->speak\*(C'\fR to ripple upward to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR, calling back to \f(CW\*(C`Horse::sound\*(C'\fR to get the specific
-sound, and the output of:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& a Horse goes neigh!
-.Ve
-.PP
-But all of our Horse objects would have to be absolutely identical.
-If I add a subroutine, all horses automatically share it. That's
-great for making horses the same, but how do we capture the
-distinctions about an individual horse? For example, suppose I want
-to give my first horse a name. There's got to be a way to keep its
-name separate from the other horses.
-.PP
-We can do that by drawing a new distinction, called an \*(L"instance\*(R".
-An \*(L"instance\*(R" is generally created by a class. In Perl, any reference
-can be an instance, so let's start with the simplest reference
-that can hold a horse's name: a scalar reference.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& my $name = "Mr. Ed";
-\& my $talking = \e$name;
-.Ve
-.PP
-So now \f(CW$talking\fR is a reference to what will be the instance-specific
-data (the name). The final step in turning this into a real instance
-is with a special operator called \f(CW\*(C`bless\*(C'\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& bless $talking, Horse;
-.Ve
-.PP
-This operator stores information about the package named \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR into
-the thing pointed at by the reference. At this point, we say
-\&\f(CW$talking\fR is an instance of \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR. That is, it's a specific
-horse. The reference is otherwise unchanged, and can still be used
-with traditional dereferencing operators.
-.Sh "Invoking an instance method"
-.IX Subsection "Invoking an instance method"
-The method arrow can be used on instances, as well as names of
-packages (classes). So, let's get the sound that \f(CW$talking\fR makes:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& my $noise = $talking->sound;
-.Ve
-.PP
-To invoke \f(CW\*(C`sound\*(C'\fR, Perl first notes that \f(CW$talking\fR is a blessed
-reference (and thus an instance). It then constructs an argument
-list, in this case from just \f(CW\*(C`($talking)\*(C'\fR. (Later we'll see that
-arguments will take their place following the instance variable,
-just like with classes.)
-.PP
-Now for the fun part: Perl takes the class in which the instance was
-blessed, in this case \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR, and uses that to locate the subroutine
-to invoke the method. In this case, \f(CW\*(C`Horse::sound\*(C'\fR is found directly
-(without using inheritance), yielding the final subroutine invocation:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Horse::sound($talking)
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note that the first parameter here is still the instance, not the name
-of the class as before. We'll get \f(CW\*(C`neigh\*(C'\fR as the return value, and
-that'll end up as the \f(CW$noise\fR variable above.
-.PP
-If Horse::sound had not been found, we'd be wandering up the
-\&\f(CW at Horse::ISA\fR list to try to find the method in one of the
-superclasses, just as for a class method. The only difference between
-a class method and an instance method is whether the first parameter
-is an instance (a blessed reference) or a class name (a string).
-.Sh "Accessing the instance data"
-.IX Subsection "Accessing the instance data"
-Because we get the instance as the first parameter, we can now access
-the instance-specific data. In this case, let's add a way to get at
-the name:
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& { package Horse;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "neigh" }
-\& sub name {
-\& my $self = shift;
-\& $$self;
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now we call for the name:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print $talking->name, " says ", $talking->sound, "\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Inside \f(CW\*(C`Horse::name\*(C'\fR, the \f(CW at _\fR array contains just \f(CW$talking\fR,
-which the \f(CW\*(C`shift\*(C'\fR stores into \f(CW$self\fR. (It's traditional to shift
-the first parameter off into a variable named \f(CW$self\fR for instance
-methods, so stay with that unless you have strong reasons otherwise.)
-Then, \f(CW$self\fR gets de-referenced as a scalar ref, yielding \f(CW\*(C`Mr. Ed\*(C'\fR,
-and we're done with that. The result is:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Mr. Ed says neigh.
-.Ve
-.Sh "How to build a horse"
-.IX Subsection "How to build a horse"
-Of course, if we constructed all of our horses by hand, we'd most
-likely make mistakes from time to time. We're also violating one of
-the properties of object-oriented programming, in that the \*(L"inside
-guts\*(R" of a Horse are visible. That's good if you're a veterinarian,
-but not if you just like to own horses. So, let's let the Horse class
-build a new horse:
-.PP
-.Vb 13
-\& { package Horse;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "neigh" }
-\& sub name {
-\& my $self = shift;
-\& $$self;
-\& }
-\& sub named {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& my $name = shift;
-\& bless \e$name, $class;
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now with the new \f(CW\*(C`named\*(C'\fR method, we can build a horse:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& my $talking = Horse->named("Mr. Ed");
-.Ve
-.PP
-Notice we're back to a class method, so the two arguments to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Horse::named\*(C'\fR are \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`Mr. Ed\*(C'\fR. The \f(CW\*(C`bless\*(C'\fR operator
-not only blesses \f(CW$name\fR, it also returns the reference to \f(CW$name\fR,
-so that's fine as a return value. And that's how to build a horse.
-.PP
-We've called the constructor \f(CW\*(C`named\*(C'\fR here, so that it quickly denotes
-the constructor's argument as the name for this particular \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR.
-You can use different constructors with different names for different
-ways of \*(L"giving birth\*(R" to the object (like maybe recording its
-pedigree or date of birth). However, you'll find that most people
-coming to Perl from more limited languages use a single constructor
-named \f(CW\*(C`new\*(C'\fR, with various ways of interpreting the arguments to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`new\*(C'\fR. Either style is fine, as long as you document your particular
-way of giving birth to an object. (And you \fIwere\fR going to do that,
-right?)
-.Sh "Inheriting the constructor"
-.IX Subsection "Inheriting the constructor"
-But was there anything specific to \f(CW\*(C`Horse\*(C'\fR in that method? No. Therefore,
-it's also the same recipe for building anything else that inherited from
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR, so let's put it there:
-.PP
-.Vb 19
-\& { package Animal;
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& print "a $class goes ", $class->sound, "!\en"
-\& }
-\& sub name {
-\& my $self = shift;
-\& $$self;
-\& }
-\& sub named {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& my $name = shift;
-\& bless \e$name, $class;
-\& }
-\& }
-\& { package Horse;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "neigh" }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Ahh, but what happens if we invoke \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR on an instance?
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& my $talking = Horse->named("Mr. Ed");
-\& $talking->speak;
-.Ve
-.PP
-We get a debugging value:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& a Horse=SCALAR(0xaca42ac) goes neigh!
-.Ve
-.PP
-Why? Because the \f(CW\*(C`Animal::speak\*(C'\fR routine is expecting a classname as
-its first parameter, not an instance. When the instance is passed in,
-we'll end up using a blessed scalar reference as a string, and that
-shows up as we saw it just now.
-.Sh "Making a method work with either classes or instances"
-.IX Subsection "Making a method work with either classes or instances"
-All we need is for a method to detect if it is being called on a class
-or called on an instance. The most straightforward way is with the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`ref\*(C'\fR operator. This returns a string (the classname) when used on a
-blessed reference, and \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR when used on a string (like a
-classname). Let's modify the \f(CW\*(C`name\*(C'\fR method first to notice the change:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& sub name {
-\& my $either = shift;
-\& ref $either
-\& ? $$either # it's an instance, return name
-\& : "an unnamed $either"; # it's a class, return generic
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Here, the \f(CW\*(C`?:\*(C'\fR operator comes in handy to select either the
-dereference or a derived string. Now we can use this with either an
-instance or a class. Note that I've changed the first parameter
-holder to \f(CW$either\fR to show that this is intended:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& my $talking = Horse->named("Mr. Ed");
-\& print Horse->name, "\en"; # prints "an unnamed Horse\en"
-\& print $talking->name, "\en"; # prints "Mr Ed.\en"
-.Ve
-.PP
-and now we'll fix \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR to use this:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $either = shift;
-\& print $either->name, " goes ", $either->sound, "\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-And since \f(CW\*(C`sound\*(C'\fR already worked with either a class or an instance,
-we're done!
-.Sh "Adding parameters to a method"
-.IX Subsection "Adding parameters to a method"
-Let's train our animals to eat:
-.PP
-.Vb 30
-\& { package Animal;
-\& sub named {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& my $name = shift;
-\& bless \e$name, $class;
-\& }
-\& sub name {
-\& my $either = shift;
-\& ref $either
-\& ? $$either # it's an instance, return name
-\& : "an unnamed $either"; # it's a class, return generic
-\& }
-\& sub speak {
-\& my $either = shift;
-\& print $either->name, " goes ", $either->sound, "\en";
-\& }
-\& sub eat {
-\& my $either = shift;
-\& my $food = shift;
-\& print $either->name, " eats $food.\en";
-\& }
-\& }
-\& { package Horse;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "neigh" }
-\& }
-\& { package Sheep;
-\& @ISA = qw(Animal);
-\& sub sound { "baaaah" }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-And now try it out:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& my $talking = Horse->named("Mr. Ed");
-\& $talking->eat("hay");
-\& Sheep->eat("grass");
-.Ve
-.PP
-which prints:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& Mr. Ed eats hay.
-\& an unnamed Sheep eats grass.
-.Ve
-.PP
-An instance method with parameters gets invoked with the instance,
-and then the list of parameters. So that first invocation is like:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Animal::eat($talking, "hay");
-.Ve
-.Sh "More interesting instances"
-.IX Subsection "More interesting instances"
-What if an instance needs more data? Most interesting instances are
-made of many items, each of which can in turn be a reference or even
-another object. The easiest way to store these is often in a hash.
-The keys of the hash serve as the names of parts of the object (often
-called \*(L"instance variables\*(R" or \*(L"member variables\*(R"), and the
-corresponding values are, well, the values.
-.PP
-But how do we turn the horse into a hash? Recall that an object was
-any blessed reference. We can just as easily make it a blessed hash
-reference as a blessed scalar reference, as long as everything that
-looks at the reference is changed accordingly.
-.PP
-Let's make a sheep that has a name and a color:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& my $bad = bless { Name => "Evil", Color => "black" }, Sheep;
-.Ve
-.PP
-so \f(CW\*(C`$bad\->{Name}\*(C'\fR has \f(CW\*(C`Evil\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`$bad\->{Color}\*(C'\fR has
-\&\f(CW\*(C`black\*(C'\fR. But we want to make \f(CW\*(C`$bad\->name\*(C'\fR access the name, and
-that's now messed up because it's expecting a scalar reference. Not
-to worry, because that's pretty easy to fix up:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& ## in Animal
-\& sub name {
-\& my $either = shift;
-\& ref $either ?
-\& $either->{Name} :
-\& "an unnamed $either";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-And of course \f(CW\*(C`named\*(C'\fR still builds a scalar sheep, so let's fix that
-as well:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& ## in Animal
-\& sub named {
-\& my $class = shift;
-\& my $name = shift;
-\& my $self = { Name => $name, Color => $class->default_color };
-\& bless $self, $class;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-What's this \f(CW\*(C`default_color\*(C'\fR? Well, if \f(CW\*(C`named\*(C'\fR has only the name,
-we still need to set a color, so we'll have a class-specific initial color.
-For a sheep, we might define it as white:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& ## in Sheep
-\& sub default_color { "white" }
-.Ve
-.PP
-And then to keep from having to define one for each additional class,
-we'll define a \*(L"backstop\*(R" method that serves as the \*(L"default default\*(R",
-directly in \f(CW\*(C`Animal\*(C'\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& ## in Animal
-\& sub default_color { "brown" }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now, because \f(CW\*(C`name\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`named\*(C'\fR were the only methods that
-referenced the \*(L"structure\*(R" of the object, the rest of the methods can
-remain the same, so \f(CW\*(C`speak\*(C'\fR still works as before.
-.Sh "A horse of a different color"
-.IX Subsection "A horse of a different color"
-But having all our horses be brown would be boring. So let's add a
-method or two to get and set the color.
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& ## in Animal
-\& sub color {
-\& $_[0]->{Color}
-\& }
-\& sub set_color {
-\& $_[0]->{Color} = $_[1];
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note the alternate way of accessing the arguments: \f(CW$_[0]\fR is used
-in\-place, rather than with a \f(CW\*(C`shift\*(C'\fR. (This saves us a bit of time
-for something that may be invoked frequently.) And now we can fix
-that color for Mr. Ed:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& my $talking = Horse->named("Mr. Ed");
-\& $talking->set_color("black-and-white");
-\& print $talking->name, " is colored ", $talking->color, "\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-which results in:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Mr. Ed is colored black-and-white
-.Ve
-.Sh "Summary"
-.IX Subsection "Summary"
-So, now we have class methods, constructors, instance methods,
-instance data, and even accessors. But that's still just the
-beginning of what Perl has to offer. We haven't even begun to talk
-about accessors that double as getters and setters, destructors,
-indirect object notation, subclasses that add instance data, per-class
-data, overloading, \*(L"isa\*(R" and \*(L"can\*(R" tests, \f(CW\*(C`UNIVERSAL\*(C'\fR class, and so
-on. That's for the rest of the Perl documentation to cover.
-Hopefully, this gets you started, though.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-For more information, see perlobj (for all the gritty details about
-Perl objects, now that you've seen the basics), perltoot (the
-tutorial for those who already know objects), perltooc (dealing
-with class data), perlbot (for some more tricks), and books such as
-Damian Conway's excellent \fIObject Oriented Perl\fR.
-.PP
-Some modules which might prove interesting are Class::Accessor,
-Class::Class, Class::Contract, Class::Data::Inheritable,
-Class::MethodMaker and Tie::SecureHash
-.SH "COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 by Randal L. Schwartz and Stonehenge
-Consulting Services, Inc. Permission is hereby granted to distribute
-this document intact with the Perl distribution, and in accordance
-with the licenses of the Perl distribution; derived documents must
-include this copyright notice intact.
-.PP
-Portions of this text have been derived from Perl Training materials
-originally appearing in the \fIPackages, References, Objects, and
-Modules\fR course taught by instructors for Stonehenge Consulting
-Services, Inc. and used with permission.
-.PP
-Portions of this text have been derived from materials originally
-appearing in \fILinux Magazine\fR and used with permission.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlcn.1 b/raw/man1/perlcn.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a32baf..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlcn.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,253 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLCN 1"
-.TH PERLCN 1 "2003-09-02" "perl v5.8.1" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlcn \- �������� Perl ָ��
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-��ӭ���� Perl �����!
-.PP
-�� 5.8.0 �濪ʼ, Perl �߱������Ƶ� Unicode (ͳһ��) ֧Ԯ,
-Ҳ����֧Ԯ�����������ϵ����ı��뷽ʽ; \s-1CJK\s0 (���պ�) �������е�һ����.
-Unicode �ǹ����Եı�, ��ͼ�������������е��ַ�: ��������, ��������,
-�Լ������һ�� (ϣ����, ��������, ��������, ϣ������, ӡ����,
-ӡ�ذ���, �ȵ�). ��Ҳ�����˶�����ҵϵͳ��ƽ̨ (�� \s-1PC\s0 �������).
-.PP
-Perl ������ Unicode ���в���. ���ʾ Perl �ڲ����ַ������ݿ��� Unicode
-��ʾ; Perl �ĺ�ʽ����� (���������ʾʽ�ȶ�) Ҳ�ܶ� Unicode ���в���.
-�����뼰���ʱ, Ϊ�˴����� Unicode ֮ǰ�ı��뷽ʽ��ŵ�����, Perl
-�ṩ�� Encode ���ģ��, �����������ض�ȡ��д����еı�������.
-.PP
-Encode ����ģ��֧Ԯ���м������ĵı��뷽ʽ ('gb2312' ��ʾ 'euc\-cn'):
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& euc-cn Unix �����ַ���, Ҳ�����׳ƵĹ�����
-\& gb2312-raw δ������� (�ͱ���) GB2312 �ַ���
-\& gb12345 δ��������й��÷������ı���
-\& iso-ir-165 GB2312 + GB6345 + GB8565 + �����ַ�
-\& cp936 ����ҳ 936, Ҳ������ 'GBK' (���������) ָ��
-\& hz 7 �����ݳ�ʽ GB2312 ����
-.Ve
-.PP
-������˵, �� EUC-CN ����ĵ���ת�� Unicode, �����������ָ��:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl -Mencoding=euc-cn,STDOUT,utf8 -pe1 < file.euc-cn > file.utf8
-.Ve
-.PP
-Perl Ҳ�ڸ��� \*(L"piconv\*(R", һ֧��ȫ�� Perl д�ɵ��ַ�ת�����߳���, �÷�����:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& piconv -f euc-cn -t utf8 < file.euc-cn > file.utf8
-\& piconv -f utf8 -t euc-cn < file.utf8 > file.euc-cn
-.Ve
-.PP
-����, ���� encoding ģ��, ���������д�����ַ�Ϊ��λ�ij�����, ������ʾ:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& #!/usr/bin/env perl
-\& # �� euc-cn �ִ�����; ������뼰��������Ϊ euc-cn ����
-\& use encoding 'euc-cn', STDIN => 'euc-cn', STDOUT => 'euc-cn';
-\& print length("����"); # 2 (˫���ű�ʾ�ַ�)
-\& print length('����'); # 4 (�����ű�ʾ�ֽ�)
-\& print index("�̻�", "��"); # -1 (�����������ַ���)
-\& print index('�̻�', '��'); # 1 (�ӵڶ����ֽڿ�ʼ)
-.Ve
-.PP
-�����һ��������, \*(L"\*(R" �ĵڶ����ֽ��� \*(L"\*(R" �ĵ�һ���ֽڽ�ϳ� EUC-CN
-��� \*(L"��\*(R"; \*(L"\*(R" �ĵڶ����ֽ����� \*(L"��\*(R" �ĵ�һ���ֽڽ�ϳ� \*(L"��\*(R".
-��������ǰ EUC-CN ��ȶԴ����ϳ���������.
-.Sh "��������ı���"
-.IX Subsection "��������ı���"
-�����Ҫ��������ı���, ���Դ� \s-1CPAN\s0 (<http://www.cpan.org/>) ����
-Encode::HanExtra ģ��. ��Ŀǰ�ṩ���б��뷽ʽ:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& gb18030 �����������, ������������
-.Ve
-.PP
-����, Encode::HanConvert ģ�����ṩ�˼�ת���õ����ֱ���:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& big5-simp Big5 ���������� Unicode �������Ļ�ת
-\& gbk-trad GBK ���������� Unicode �������Ļ�ת
-.Ve
-.PP
-������ \s-1GBK\s0 �� Big5 ֮�以ת, ��ο���ģ���ڸ��� b2g.pl �� g2b.pl ��֧����,
-���ڳ�����ʹ������д��:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use Encode::HanConvert;
-\& $euc_cn = big5_to_gb($big5); # �� Big5 תΪ GBK
-\& $big5 = gb_to_big5($euc_cn); # �� GBK תΪ Big5
-.Ve
-.Sh "��һ������Ϣ"
-.IX Subsection "��һ������Ϣ"
-��ο� Perl �ڸ��Ĵ���˵���ļ� (����ȫ����Ӣ��д��), ��ѧϰ�������
-Perl ��֪ʶ, �Լ� Unicode ��ʹ�÷�ʽ. ����, �ⲿ����Դ�൱�ḻ:
-.Sh "�ṩ Perl ��Դ����ַ"
-.IX Subsection "�ṩ Perl ��Դ����ַ"
-.IP "<http://www.perl.com/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.perl.com/>"
-Perl ����ҳ (��ŷ����˾ά��)
-.IP "<http://www.cpan.org/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.cpan.org/>"
-Perl �ۺϵ���� (Comprehensive Perl Archive Network)
-.IP "<http://lists.perl.org/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://lists.perl.org/>"
-Perl �ʵ���̳һ��
-.Sh "ѧϰ Perl ����ַ"
-.IX Subsection "ѧϰ Perl ����ַ"
-.IP "<http://www.oreilly.com.cn/html/perl.html>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.oreilly.com.cn/html/perl.html>"
-�������İ��ŷ���� Perl ���
-.Sh "Perl ʹ������"
-.IX Subsection "Perl ʹ������"
-.IP "<http://www.pm.org/groups/asia.shtml#China>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.pm.org/groups/asia.shtml#China>"
-�й� Perl �ƹ���һ��
-.Sh "Unicode �����ַ"
-.IX Subsection "Unicode �����ַ"
-.IP "<http://www.unicode.org/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.unicode.org/>"
-Unicode ѧ��ѧ�� (Unicode �����ƶ���)
-.IP "<http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/%7Emgk25/unicode.html>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/%7Emgk25/unicode.html>"
-Unix/Linux �ϵ� \s-1UTF\-8\s0 �� Unicode �����
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-Encode, Encode::CN, encoding, perluniintro, perlunicode
-.SH "AUTHORS"
-.IX Header "AUTHORS"
-Jarkko Hietaniemi <jhi at iki.fi>
-.PP
-Autrijus Tang (���ں�) <autrijus at autrijus.org>
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlcompile.1 b/raw/man1/perlcompile.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5510aa2..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlcompile.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,560 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLCOMPILE 1"
-.TH PERLCOMPILE 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlcompile \- Introduction to the Perl Compiler\-Translator
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-Perl has always had a compiler: your source is compiled into an
-internal form (a parse tree) which is then optimized before being
-run. Since version 5.005, Perl has shipped with a module
-capable of inspecting the optimized parse tree (\f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR), and this has
-been used to write many useful utilities, including a module that lets
-you turn your Perl into C source code that can be compiled into a
-native executable.
-.PP
-The \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR module provides access to the parse tree, and other modules
-(\*(L"back ends\*(R") do things with the tree. Some write it out as
-bytecode, C source code, or a semi-human-readable text. Another
-traverses the parse tree to build a cross-reference of which
-subroutines, formats, and variables are used where. Another checks
-your code for dubious constructs. Yet another back end dumps the
-parse tree back out as Perl source, acting as a source code beautifier
-or deobfuscator.
-.PP
-Because its original purpose was to be a way to produce C code
-corresponding to a Perl program, and in turn a native executable, the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR module and its associated back ends are known as \*(L"the
-compiler\*(R", even though they don't really compile anything.
-Different parts of the compiler are more accurately a \*(L"translator\*(R",
-or an \*(L"inspector\*(R", but people want Perl to have a \*(L"compiler
-option\*(R" not an \*(L"inspector gadget\*(R". What can you do?
-.PP
-This document covers the use of the Perl compiler: which modules
-it comprises, how to use the most important of the back end modules,
-what problems there are, and how to work around them.
-.Sh "Layout"
-.IX Subsection "Layout"
-The compiler back ends are in the \f(CW\*(C`B::\*(C'\fR hierarchy, and the front-end
-(the module that you, the user of the compiler, will sometimes
-interact with) is the O module. Some back ends (e.g., \f(CW\*(C`B::C\*(C'\fR) have
-programs (e.g., \fIperlcc\fR) to hide the modules' complexity.
-.PP
-Here are the important back ends to know about, with their status
-expressed as a number from 0 (outline for later implementation) to
-10 (if there's a bug in it, we're very surprised):
-.IP "B::Bytecode" 4
-.IX Item "B::Bytecode"
-Stores the parse tree in a machine-independent format, suitable
-for later reloading through the ByteLoader module. Status: 5 (some
-things work, some things don't, some things are untested).
-.IP "B::C" 4
-.IX Item "B::C"
-Creates a C source file containing code to rebuild the parse tree
-and resume the interpreter. Status: 6 (many things work adequately,
-including programs using Tk).
-.IP "B::CC" 4
-.IX Item "B::CC"
-Creates a C source file corresponding to the run time code path in
-the parse tree. This is the closest to a Perl-to-C translator there
-is, but the code it generates is almost incomprehensible because it
-translates the parse tree into a giant switch structure that
-manipulates Perl structures. Eventual goal is to reduce (given
-sufficient type information in the Perl program) some of the
-Perl data structure manipulations into manipulations of C\-level
-ints, floats, etc. Status: 5 (some things work, including
-uncomplicated Tk examples).
-.IP "B::Lint" 4
-.IX Item "B::Lint"
-Complains if it finds dubious constructs in your source code. Status:
-6 (it works adequately, but only has a very limited number of areas
-that it checks).
-.IP "B::Deparse" 4
-.IX Item "B::Deparse"
-Recreates the Perl source, making an attempt to format it coherently.
-Status: 8 (it works nicely, but a few obscure things are missing).
-.IP "B::Xref" 4
-.IX Item "B::Xref"
-Reports on the declaration and use of subroutines and variables.
-Status: 8 (it works nicely, but still has a few lingering bugs).
-.SH "Using The Back Ends"
-.IX Header "Using The Back Ends"
-The following sections describe how to use the various compiler back
-ends. They're presented roughly in order of maturity, so that the
-most stable and proven back ends are described first, and the most
-experimental and incomplete back ends are described last.
-.PP
-The O module automatically enabled the \fB\-c\fR flag to Perl, which
-prevents Perl from executing your code once it has been compiled.
-This is why all the back ends print:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& myperlprogram syntax OK
-.Ve
-.PP
-before producing any other output.
-.Sh "The Cross Referencing Back End"
-.IX Subsection "The Cross Referencing Back End"
-The cross referencing back end (B::Xref) produces a report on your program,
-breaking down declarations and uses of subroutines and variables (and
-formats) by file and subroutine. For instance, here's part of the
-report from the \fIpod2man\fR program that comes with Perl:
-.PP
-.Vb 12
-\& Subroutine clear_noremap
-\& Package (lexical)
-\& $ready_to_print i1069, 1079
-\& Package main
-\& $& 1086
-\& $. 1086
-\& $0 1086
-\& $1 1087
-\& $2 1085, 1085
-\& $3 1085, 1085
-\& $ARGV 1086
-\& %HTML_Escapes 1085, 1085
-.Ve
-.PP
-This shows the variables used in the subroutine \f(CW\*(C`clear_noremap\*(C'\fR. The
-variable \f(CW$ready_to_print\fR is a \fImy()\fR (lexical) variable,
-\&\fBi\fRntroduced (first declared with \fImy()\fR) on line 1069, and used on
-line 1079. The variable \f(CW$&\fR from the main package is used on 1086,
-and so on.
-.PP
-A line number may be prefixed by a single letter:
-.IP "i" 4
-.IX Item "i"
-Lexical variable introduced (declared with \fImy()\fR) for the first time.
-.IP "&" 4
-Subroutine or method call.
-.IP "s" 4
-.IX Item "s"
-Subroutine defined.
-.IP "r" 4
-.IX Item "r"
-Format defined.
-.PP
-The most useful option the cross referencer has is to save the report
-to a separate file. For instance, to save the report on
-\&\fImyperlprogram\fR to the file \fIreport\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Xref,-oreport myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.Sh "The Decompiling Back End"
-.IX Subsection "The Decompiling Back End"
-The Deparse back end turns your Perl source back into Perl source. It
-can reformat along the way, making it useful as a de\-obfuscator. The
-most basic way to use it is:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Deparse myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.PP
-You'll notice immediately that Perl has no idea of how to paragraph
-your code. You'll have to separate chunks of code from each other
-with newlines by hand. However, watch what it will do with
-one\-liners:
-.PP
-.Vb 12
-\& $ perl -MO=Deparse -e '$op=shift||die "usage: $0
-\& code [...]";chomp(@ARGV=<>)unless at ARGV; for(@ARGV){$was=$_;eval$op;
-\& die$@ if$@; rename$was,$_ unless$was eq $_}'
-\& -e syntax OK
-\& $op = shift @ARGV || die("usage: $0 code [...]");
-\& chomp(@ARGV = <ARGV>) unless @ARGV;
-\& foreach $_ (@ARGV) {
-\& $was = $_;
-\& eval $op;
-\& die $@ if $@;
-\& rename $was, $_ unless $was eq $_;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-The decompiler has several options for the code it generates. For
-instance, you can set the size of each indent from 4 (as above) to
-2 with:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Deparse,-si2 myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.PP
-The \fB\-p\fR option adds parentheses where normally they are omitted:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& $ perl -MO=Deparse -e 'print "Hello, world\en"'
-\& -e syntax OK
-\& print "Hello, world\en";
-\& $ perl -MO=Deparse,-p -e 'print "Hello, world\en"'
-\& -e syntax OK
-\& print("Hello, world\en");
-.Ve
-.PP
-See B::Deparse for more information on the formatting options.
-.Sh "The Lint Back End"
-.IX Subsection "The Lint Back End"
-The lint back end (B::Lint) inspects programs for poor style. One
-programmer's bad style is another programmer's useful tool, so options
-let you select what is complained about.
-.PP
-To run the style checker across your source code:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Lint myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.PP
-To disable context checks and undefined subroutines:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Lint,-context,-undefined-subs myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.PP
-See B::Lint for information on the options.
-.Sh "The Simple C Back End"
-.IX Subsection "The Simple C Back End"
-This module saves the internal compiled state of your Perl program
-to a C source file, which can be turned into a native executable
-for that particular platform using a C compiler. The resulting
-program links against the Perl interpreter library, so it
-will not save you disk space (unless you build Perl with a shared
-library) or program size. It may, however, save you startup time.
-.PP
-The \f(CW\*(C`perlcc\*(C'\fR tool generates such executables by default.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perlcc myperlprogram.pl
-.Ve
-.Sh "The Bytecode Back End"
-.IX Subsection "The Bytecode Back End"
-This back end is only useful if you also have a way to load and
-execute the bytecode that it produces. The ByteLoader module provides
-this functionality.
-.PP
-To turn a Perl program into executable byte code, you can use \f(CW\*(C`perlcc\*(C'\fR
-with the \f(CW\*(C`\-B\*(C'\fR switch:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perlcc -B myperlprogram.pl
-.Ve
-.PP
-The byte code is machine independent, so once you have a compiled
-module or program, it is as portable as Perl source (assuming that
-the user of the module or program has a modern-enough Perl interpreter
-to decode the byte code).
-.PP
-See \fBB::Bytecode\fR for information on options to control the
-optimization and nature of the code generated by the Bytecode module.
-.Sh "The Optimized C Back End"
-.IX Subsection "The Optimized C Back End"
-The optimized C back end will turn your Perl program's run time
-code-path into an equivalent (but optimized) C program that manipulates
-the Perl data structures directly. The program will still link against
-the Perl interpreter library, to allow for \fIeval()\fR, \f(CW\*(C`s///e\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR, etc.
-.PP
-The \f(CW\*(C`perlcc\*(C'\fR tool generates such executables when using the \-O
-switch. To compile a Perl program (ending in \f(CW\*(C`.pl\*(C'\fR
-or \f(CW\*(C`.p\*(C'\fR):
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perlcc -O myperlprogram.pl
-.Ve
-.PP
-To produce a shared library from a Perl module (ending in \f(CW\*(C`.pm\*(C'\fR):
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perlcc -O Myperlmodule.pm
-.Ve
-.PP
-For more information, see perlcc and B::CC.
-.SH "Module List for the Compiler Suite"
-.IX Header "Module List for the Compiler Suite"
-.IP "B" 4
-.IX Item "B"
-This module is the introspective (\*(L"reflective\*(R" in Java terms)
-module, which allows a Perl program to inspect its innards. The
-back end modules all use this module to gain access to the compiled
-parse tree. You, the user of a back end module, will not need to
-interact with B.
-.IP "O" 4
-.IX Item "O"
-This module is the front-end to the compiler's back ends. Normally
-called something like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Deparse myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This is like saying \f(CW\*(C`use O 'Deparse'\*(C'\fR in your Perl program.
-.IP "B::Asmdata" 4
-.IX Item "B::Asmdata"
-This module is used by the B::Assembler module, which is in turn used
-by the B::Bytecode module, which stores a parse-tree as
-bytecode for later loading. It's not a back end itself, but rather a
-component of a back end.
-.IP "B::Assembler" 4
-.IX Item "B::Assembler"
-This module turns a parse-tree into data suitable for storing
-and later decoding back into a parse\-tree. It's not a back end
-itself, but rather a component of a back end. It's used by the
-\&\fIassemble\fR program that produces bytecode.
-.IP "B::Bblock" 4
-.IX Item "B::Bblock"
-This module is used by the B::CC back end. It walks \*(L"basic blocks\*(R".
-A basic block is a series of operations which is known to execute from
-start to finish, with no possibility of branching or halting.
-.IP "B::Bytecode" 4
-.IX Item "B::Bytecode"
-This module is a back end that generates bytecode from a
-program's parse tree. This bytecode is written to a file, from where
-it can later be reconstructed back into a parse tree. The goal is to
-do the expensive program compilation once, save the interpreter's
-state into a file, and then restore the state from the file when the
-program is to be executed. See \*(L"The Bytecode Back End\*(R"
-for details about usage.
-.IP "B::C" 4
-.IX Item "B::C"
-This module writes out C code corresponding to the parse tree and
-other interpreter internal structures. You compile the corresponding
-C file, and get an executable file that will restore the internal
-structures and the Perl interpreter will begin running the
-program. See \*(L"The Simple C Back End\*(R" for details about usage.
-.IP "B::CC" 4
-.IX Item "B::CC"
-This module writes out C code corresponding to your program's
-operations. Unlike the B::C module, which merely stores the
-interpreter and its state in a C program, the B::CC module makes a
-C program that does not involve the interpreter. As a consequence,
-programs translated into C by B::CC can execute faster than normal
-interpreted programs. See \*(L"The Optimized C Back End\*(R" for
-details about usage.
-.IP "B::Concise" 4
-.IX Item "B::Concise"
-This module prints a concise (but complete) version of the Perl parse
-tree. Its output is more customizable than the one of B::Terse or
-B::Debug (and it can emulate them). This module useful for people who
-are writing their own back end, or who are learning about the Perl
-internals. It's not useful to the average programmer.
-.IP "B::Debug" 4
-.IX Item "B::Debug"
-This module dumps the Perl parse tree in verbose detail to \s-1STDOUT\s0.
-It's useful for people who are writing their own back end, or who
-are learning about the Perl internals. It's not useful to the
-average programmer.
-.IP "B::Deparse" 4
-.IX Item "B::Deparse"
-This module produces Perl source code from the compiled parse tree.
-It is useful in debugging and deconstructing other people's code,
-also as a pretty-printer for your own source. See
-\&\*(L"The Decompiling Back End\*(R" for details about usage.
-.IP "B::Disassembler" 4
-.IX Item "B::Disassembler"
-This module turns bytecode back into a parse tree. It's not a back
-end itself, but rather a component of a back end. It's used by the
-\&\fIdisassemble\fR program that comes with the bytecode.
-.IP "B::Lint" 4
-.IX Item "B::Lint"
-This module inspects the compiled form of your source code for things
-which, while some people frown on them, aren't necessarily bad enough
-to justify a warning. For instance, use of an array in scalar context
-without explicitly saying \f(CW\*(C`scalar(@array)\*(C'\fR is something that Lint
-can identify. See \*(L"The Lint Back End\*(R" for details about usage.
-.IP "B::Showlex" 4
-.IX Item "B::Showlex"
-This module prints out the \fImy()\fR variables used in a function or a
-file. To get a list of the \fImy()\fR variables used in the subroutine
-\&\fImysub()\fR defined in the file myperlprogram:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Showlex,mysub myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.Sp
-To get a list of the \fImy()\fR variables used in the file myperlprogram:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MO=Showlex myperlprogram
-.Ve
-.Sp
-[\s-1BROKEN\s0]
-.IP "B::Stackobj" 4
-.IX Item "B::Stackobj"
-This module is used by the B::CC module. It's not a back end itself,
-but rather a component of a back end.
-.IP "B::Stash" 4
-.IX Item "B::Stash"
-This module is used by the perlcc program, which compiles a module
-into an executable. B::Stash prints the symbol tables in use by a
-program, and is used to prevent B::CC from producing C code for the
-B::* and O modules. It's not a back end itself, but rather a
-component of a back end.
-.IP "B::Terse" 4
-.IX Item "B::Terse"
-This module prints the contents of the parse tree, but without as much
-information as B::Debug. For comparison, \f(CW\*(C`print "Hello, world."\*(C'\fR
-produced 96 lines of output from B::Debug, but only 6 from B::Terse.
-.Sp
-This module is useful for people who are writing their own back end,
-or who are learning about the Perl internals. It's not useful to the
-average programmer.
-.IP "B::Xref" 4
-.IX Item "B::Xref"
-This module prints a report on where the variables, subroutines, and
-formats are defined and used within a program and the modules it
-loads. See \*(L"The Cross Referencing Back End\*(R" for details about
-usage.
-.SH "KNOWN PROBLEMS"
-.IX Header "KNOWN PROBLEMS"
-The simple C backend currently only saves typeglobs with alphanumeric
-names.
-.PP
-The optimized C backend outputs code for more modules than it should
-(e.g., DirHandle). It also has little hope of properly handling
-\&\f(CW\*(C`goto LABEL\*(C'\fR outside the running subroutine (\f(CW\*(C`goto &sub\*(C'\fR is okay).
-\&\f(CW\*(C`goto LABEL\*(C'\fR currently does not work at all in this backend.
-It also creates a huge initialization function that gives
-C compilers headaches. Splitting the initialization function gives
-better results. Other problems include: unsigned math does not
-work correctly; some opcodes are handled incorrectly by default
-opcode handling mechanism.
-.PP
-BEGIN{} blocks are executed while compiling your code. Any external
-state that is initialized in BEGIN{}, such as opening files, initiating
-database connections etc., do not behave properly. To work around
-this, Perl has an INIT{} block that corresponds to code being executed
-before your program begins running but after your program has finished
-being compiled. Execution order: BEGIN{}, (possible save of state
-through compiler back\-end), INIT{}, program runs, END{}.
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR"
-This document was originally written by Nathan Torkington, and is now
-maintained by the perl5\-porters mailing list
-\&\fIperl5\-porters at perl.org\fR.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perldata.1 b/raw/man1/perldata.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3db92e1..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perldata.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1075 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLDATA 1"
-.TH PERLDATA 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perldata \- Perl data types
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-.Sh "Variable names"
-.IX Subsection "Variable names"
-Perl has three built-in data types: scalars, arrays of scalars, and
-associative arrays of scalars, known as \*(L"hashes\*(R". A scalar is a
-single string (of any size, limited only by the available memory),
-number, or a reference to something (which will be discussed
-in perlref). Normal arrays are ordered lists of scalars indexed
-by number, starting with 0. Hashes are unordered collections of scalar
-values indexed by their associated string key.
-.PP
-Values are usually referred to by name, or through a named reference.
-The first character of the name tells you to what sort of data
-structure it refers. The rest of the name tells you the particular
-value to which it refers. Usually this name is a single \fIidentifier\fR,
-that is, a string beginning with a letter or underscore, and
-containing letters, underscores, and digits. In some cases, it may
-be a chain of identifiers, separated by \f(CW\*(C`::\*(C'\fR (or by the slightly
-archaic \f(CW\*(C`'\*(C'\fR); all but the last are interpreted as names of packages,
-to locate the namespace in which to look up the final identifier
-(see \*(L"Packages\*(R" in perlmod for details). It's possible to substitute
-for a simple identifier, an expression that produces a reference
-to the value at runtime. This is described in more detail below
-and in perlref.
-.PP
-Perl also has its own built-in variables whose names don't follow
-these rules. They have strange names so they don't accidentally
-collide with one of your normal variables. Strings that match
-parenthesized parts of a regular expression are saved under names
-containing only digits after the \f(CW\*(C`$\*(C'\fR (see perlop and perlre).
-In addition, several special variables that provide windows into
-the inner working of Perl have names containing punctuation characters
-and control characters. These are documented in perlvar.
-.PP
-Scalar values are always named with '$', even when referring to a
-scalar that is part of an array or a hash. The '$' symbol works
-semantically like the English word \*(L"the\*(R" in that it indicates a
-single value is expected.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& $days # the simple scalar value "days"
-\& $days[28] # the 29th element of array @days
-\& $days{'Feb'} # the 'Feb' value from hash %days
-\& $#days # the last index of array @days
-.Ve
-.PP
-Entire arrays (and slices of arrays and hashes) are denoted by '@',
-which works much like the word \*(L"these\*(R" or \*(L"those\*(R" does in English,
-in that it indicates multiple values are expected.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& @days # ($days[0], $days[1],... $days[n])
-\& @days[3,4,5] # same as ($days[3],$days[4],$days[5])
-\& @days{'a','c'} # same as ($days{'a'},$days{'c'})
-.Ve
-.PP
-Entire hashes are denoted by '%':
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& %days # (key1, val1, key2, val2 ...)
-.Ve
-.PP
-In addition, subroutines are named with an initial '&', though this
-is optional when unambiguous, just as the word \*(L"do\*(R" is often redundant
-in English. Symbol table entries can be named with an initial '*',
-but you don't really care about that yet (if ever :\-).
-.PP
-Every variable type has its own namespace, as do several
-non-variable identifiers. This means that you can, without fear
-of conflict, use the same name for a scalar variable, an array, or
-a hash\*(--or, for that matter, for a filehandle, a directory handle, a
-subroutine name, a format name, or a label. This means that \f(CW$foo\fR
-and \f(CW at foo\fR are two different variables. It also means that \f(CW$foo[1]\fR
-is a part of \f(CW at foo\fR, not a part of \f(CW$foo\fR. This may seem a bit weird,
-but that's okay, because it is weird.
-.PP
-Because variable references always start with '$', '@', or '%', the
-\&\*(L"reserved\*(R" words aren't in fact reserved with respect to variable
-names. They \fIare\fR reserved with respect to labels and filehandles,
-however, which don't have an initial special character. You can't
-have a filehandle named \*(L"log\*(R", for instance. Hint: you could say
-\&\f(CW\*(C`open(LOG,'logfile')\*(C'\fR rather than \f(CW\*(C`open(log,'logfile')\*(C'\fR. Using
-uppercase filehandles also improves readability and protects you
-from conflict with future reserved words. Case \fIis\fR significant\-\-\*(L"\s-1FOO\s0\*(R",
-\&\*(L"Foo\*(R", and \*(L"foo\*(R" are all different names. Names that start with a
-letter or underscore may also contain digits and underscores.
-.PP
-It is possible to replace such an alphanumeric name with an expression
-that returns a reference to the appropriate type. For a description
-of this, see perlref.
-.PP
-Names that start with a digit may contain only more digits. Names
-that do not start with a letter, underscore, digit or a caret (i.e.
-a control character) are limited to one character, e.g., \f(CW$%\fR or
-\&\f(CW$$\fR. (Most of these one character names have a predefined
-significance to Perl. For instance, \f(CW$$\fR is the current process
-id.)
-.Sh "Context"
-.IX Subsection "Context"
-The interpretation of operations and values in Perl sometimes depends
-on the requirements of the context around the operation or value.
-There are two major contexts: list and scalar. Certain operations
-return list values in contexts wanting a list, and scalar values
-otherwise. If this is true of an operation it will be mentioned in
-the documentation for that operation. In other words, Perl overloads
-certain operations based on whether the expected return value is
-singular or plural. Some words in English work this way, like \*(L"fish\*(R"
-and \*(L"sheep\*(R".
-.PP
-In a reciprocal fashion, an operation provides either a scalar or a
-list context to each of its arguments. For example, if you say
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& int( <STDIN> )
-.Ve
-.PP
-the integer operation provides scalar context for the <>
-operator, which responds by reading one line from \s-1STDIN\s0 and passing it
-back to the integer operation, which will then find the integer value
-of that line and return that. If, on the other hand, you say
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& sort( <STDIN> )
-.Ve
-.PP
-then the sort operation provides list context for <>, which
-will proceed to read every line available up to the end of file, and
-pass that list of lines back to the sort routine, which will then
-sort those lines and return them as a list to whatever the context
-of the sort was.
-.PP
-Assignment is a little bit special in that it uses its left argument
-to determine the context for the right argument. Assignment to a
-scalar evaluates the right-hand side in scalar context, while
-assignment to an array or hash evaluates the righthand side in list
-context. Assignment to a list (or slice, which is just a list
-anyway) also evaluates the righthand side in list context.
-.PP
-When you use the \f(CW\*(C`use warnings\*(C'\fR pragma or Perl's \fB\-w\fR command-line
-option, you may see warnings
-about useless uses of constants or functions in \*(L"void context\*(R".
-Void context just means the value has been discarded, such as a
-statement containing only \f(CW\*(C`"fred";\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`getpwuid(0);\*(C'\fR. It still
-counts as scalar context for functions that care whether or not
-they're being called in list context.
-.PP
-User-defined subroutines may choose to care whether they are being
-called in a void, scalar, or list context. Most subroutines do not
-need to bother, though. That's because both scalars and lists are
-automatically interpolated into lists. See \*(L"wantarray\*(R" in perlfunc
-for how you would dynamically discern your function's calling
-context.
-.Sh "Scalar values"
-.IX Subsection "Scalar values"
-All data in Perl is a scalar, an array of scalars, or a hash of
-scalars. A scalar may contain one single value in any of three
-different flavors: a number, a string, or a reference. In general,
-conversion from one form to another is transparent. Although a
-scalar may not directly hold multiple values, it may contain a
-reference to an array or hash which in turn contains multiple values.
-.PP
-Scalars aren't necessarily one thing or another. There's no place
-to declare a scalar variable to be of type \*(L"string\*(R", type \*(L"number\*(R",
-type \*(L"reference\*(R", or anything else. Because of the automatic
-conversion of scalars, operations that return scalars don't need
-to care (and in fact, cannot care) whether their caller is looking
-for a string, a number, or a reference. Perl is a contextually
-polymorphic language whose scalars can be strings, numbers, or
-references (which includes objects). Although strings and numbers
-are considered pretty much the same thing for nearly all purposes,
-references are strongly\-typed, uncastable pointers with builtin
-reference-counting and destructor invocation.
-.PP
-A scalar value is interpreted as \s-1TRUE\s0 in the Boolean sense if it is not
-the null string or the number 0 (or its string equivalent, \*(L"0\*(R"). The
-Boolean context is just a special kind of scalar context where no
-conversion to a string or a number is ever performed.
-.PP
-There are actually two varieties of null strings (sometimes referred
-to as \*(L"empty\*(R" strings), a defined one and an undefined one. The
-defined version is just a string of length zero, such as \f(CW""\fR.
-The undefined version is the value that indicates that there is
-no real value for something, such as when there was an error, or
-at end of file, or when you refer to an uninitialized variable or
-element of an array or hash. Although in early versions of Perl,
-an undefined scalar could become defined when first used in a
-place expecting a defined value, this no longer happens except for
-rare cases of autovivification as explained in perlref. You can
-use the \fIdefined()\fR operator to determine whether a scalar value is
-defined (this has no meaning on arrays or hashes), and the \fIundef()\fR
-operator to produce an undefined value.
-.PP
-To find out whether a given string is a valid non-zero number, it's
-sometimes enough to test it against both numeric 0 and also lexical
-\&\*(L"0\*(R" (although this will cause noises if warnings are on). That's
-because strings that aren't numbers count as 0, just as they do in \fBawk\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& if ($str == 0 && $str ne "0") {
-\& warn "That doesn't look like a number";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-That method may be best because otherwise you won't treat \s-1IEEE\s0
-notations like \f(CW\*(C`NaN\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`Infinity\*(C'\fR properly. At other times, you
-might prefer to determine whether string data can be used numerically
-by calling the \fIPOSIX::strtod()\fR function or by inspecting your string
-with a regular expression (as documented in perlre).
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& warn "has nondigits" if /\eD/;
-\& warn "not a natural number" unless /^\ed+$/; # rejects -3
-\& warn "not an integer" unless /^-?\ed+$/; # rejects +3
-\& warn "not an integer" unless /^[+-]?\ed+$/;
-\& warn "not a decimal number" unless /^-?\ed+\e.?\ed*$/; # rejects .2
-\& warn "not a decimal number" unless /^-?(?:\ed+(?:\e.\ed*)?|\e.\ed+)$/;
-\& warn "not a C float"
-\& unless /^([+-]?)(?=\ed|\e.\ed)\ed*(\e.\ed*)?([Ee]([+-]?\ed+))?$/;
-.Ve
-.PP
-The length of an array is a scalar value. You may find the length
-of array \f(CW at days\fR by evaluating \f(CW$#days\fR, as in \fBcsh\fR. However, this
-isn't the length of the array; it's the subscript of the last element,
-which is a different value since there is ordinarily a 0th element.
-Assigning to \f(CW$#days\fR actually changes the length of the array.
-Shortening an array this way destroys intervening values. Lengthening
-an array that was previously shortened does not recover values
-that were in those elements. (It used to do so in Perl 4, but we
-had to break this to make sure destructors were called when expected.)
-.PP
-You can also gain some minuscule measure of efficiency by pre-extending
-an array that is going to get big. You can also extend an array
-by assigning to an element that is off the end of the array. You
-can truncate an array down to nothing by assigning the null list
-() to it. The following are equivalent:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @whatever = ();
-\& $#whatever = -1;
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you evaluate an array in scalar context, it returns the length
-of the array. (Note that this is not true of lists, which return
-the last value, like the C comma operator, nor of built-in functions,
-which return whatever they feel like returning.) The following is
-always true:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& scalar(@whatever) == $#whatever - $[ + 1;
-.Ve
-.PP
-Version 5 of Perl changed the semantics of \f(CW$[\fR: files that don't set
-the value of \f(CW$[\fR no longer need to worry about whether another
-file changed its value. (In other words, use of \f(CW$[\fR is deprecated.)
-So in general you can assume that
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& scalar(@whatever) == $#whatever + 1;
-.Ve
-.PP
-Some programmers choose to use an explicit conversion so as to
-leave nothing to doubt:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $element_count = scalar(@whatever);
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you evaluate a hash in scalar context, it returns false if the
-hash is empty. If there are any key/value pairs, it returns true;
-more precisely, the value returned is a string consisting of the
-number of used buckets and the number of allocated buckets, separated
-by a slash. This is pretty much useful only to find out whether
-Perl's internal hashing algorithm is performing poorly on your data
-set. For example, you stick 10,000 things in a hash, but evaluating
-\&\f(CW%HASH\fR in scalar context reveals \f(CW"1/16"\fR, which means only one out
-of sixteen buckets has been touched, and presumably contains all
-10,000 of your items. This isn't supposed to happen.
-.PP
-You can preallocate space for a hash by assigning to the \fIkeys()\fR function.
-This rounds up the allocated buckets to the next power of two:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& keys(%users) = 1000; # allocate 1024 buckets
-.Ve
-.Sh "Scalar value constructors"
-.IX Subsection "Scalar value constructors"
-Numeric literals are specified in any of the following floating point or
-integer formats:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& 12345
-\& 12345.67
-\& .23E-10 # a very small number
-\& 3.14_15_92 # a very important number
-\& 4_294_967_296 # underscore for legibility
-\& 0xff # hex
-\& 0xdead_beef # more hex
-\& 0377 # octal
-\& 0b011011 # binary
-.Ve
-.PP
-You are allowed to use underscores (underbars) in numeric literals
-between digits for legibility. You could, for example, group binary
-digits by threes (as for a Unix-style mode argument such as 0b110_100_100)
-or by fours (to represent nibbles, as in 0b1010_0110) or in other groups.
-.PP
-String literals are usually delimited by either single or double
-quotes. They work much like quotes in the standard Unix shells:
-double-quoted string literals are subject to backslash and variable
-substitution; single-quoted strings are not (except for \f(CW\*(C`\e'\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\e\e\*(C'\fR). The usual C\-style backslash rules apply for making
-characters such as newline, tab, etc., as well as some more exotic
-forms. See \*(L"Quote and Quote-like Operators\*(R" in perlop for a list.
-.PP
-Hexadecimal, octal, or binary, representations in string literals
-(e.g. '0xff') are not automatically converted to their integer
-representation. The \fIhex()\fR and \fIoct()\fR functions make these conversions
-for you. See \*(L"hex\*(R" in perlfunc and \*(L"oct\*(R" in perlfunc for more details.
-.PP
-You can also embed newlines directly in your strings, i.e., they can end
-on a different line than they begin. This is nice, but if you forget
-your trailing quote, the error will not be reported until Perl finds
-another line containing the quote character, which may be much further
-on in the script. Variable substitution inside strings is limited to
-scalar variables, arrays, and array or hash slices. (In other words,
-names beginning with $ or @, followed by an optional bracketed
-expression as a subscript.) The following code segment prints out "The
-price is $\&100."
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $Price = '$100'; # not interpolated
-\& print "The price is $Price.\en"; # interpolated
-.Ve
-.PP
-There is no double interpolation in Perl, so the \f(CW$100\fR is left as is.
-.PP
-As in some shells, you can enclose the variable name in braces to
-disambiguate it from following alphanumerics (and underscores).
-You must also do
-this when interpolating a variable into a string to separate the
-variable name from a following double-colon or an apostrophe, since
-these would be otherwise treated as a package separator:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $who = "Larry";
-\& print PASSWD "${who}::0:0:Superuser:/:/bin/perl\en";
-\& print "We use ${who}speak when ${who}'s here.\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Without the braces, Perl would have looked for a \f(CW$whospeak\fR, a
-\&\f(CW$who::0\fR, and a \f(CW$who's\fR variable. The last two would be the
-\&\f(CW$0\fR and the \f(CW$s\fR variables in the (presumably) non-existent package
-\&\f(CW\*(C`who\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-In fact, an identifier within such curlies is forced to be a string,
-as is any simple identifier within a hash subscript. Neither need
-quoting. Our earlier example, \f(CW$days{'Feb'}\fR can be written as
-\&\f(CW$days{Feb}\fR and the quotes will be assumed automatically. But
-anything more complicated in the subscript will be interpreted as
-an expression.
-.PP
-\fIVersion Strings\fR
-.IX Subsection "Version Strings"
-.PP
-\&\fBNote:\fR Version Strings (v\-strings) have been deprecated. They will
-not be available after Perl 5.8. The marginal benefits of v\-strings
-were greatly outweighed by the potential for Surprise and Confusion.
-.PP
-A literal of the form \f(CW\*(C`v1.20.300.4000\*(C'\fR is parsed as a string composed
-of characters with the specified ordinals. This form, known as
-v\-strings, provides an alternative, more readable way to construct
-strings, rather than use the somewhat less readable interpolation form
-\&\f(CW"\ex{1}\ex{14}\ex{12c}\ex{fa0}"\fR. This is useful for representing
-Unicode strings, and for comparing version \*(L"numbers\*(R" using the string
-comparison operators, \f(CW\*(C`cmp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`gt\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`lt\*(C'\fR etc. If there are two or
-more dots in the literal, the leading \f(CW\*(C`v\*(C'\fR may be omitted.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& print v9786; # prints UTF-8 encoded SMILEY, "\ex{263a}"
-\& print v102.111.111; # prints "foo"
-\& print 102.111.111; # same
-.Ve
-.PP
-Such literals are accepted by both \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR for
-doing a version check. The \f(CW$^V\fR special variable also contains the
-running Perl interpreter's version in this form. See \*(L"$^V\*(R" in perlvar.
-Note that using the v\-strings for IPv4 addresses is not portable unless
-you also use the \fIinet_aton()\fR/\fIinet_ntoa()\fR routines of the Socket package.
-.PP
-Note that since Perl 5.8.1 the single-number v\-strings (like \f(CW\*(C`v65\*(C'\fR)
-are not v\-strings before the \f(CW\*(C`=>\*(C'\fR operator (which is usually used
-to separate a hash key from a hash value), instead they are interpreted
-as literal strings ('v65'). They were v\-strings from Perl 5.6.0 to
-Perl 5.8.0, but that caused more confusion and breakage than good.
-Multi-number v\-strings like \f(CW\*(C`v65.66\*(C'\fR and \f(CW65.66.67\fR continue to
-be v\-strings always.
-.PP
-\fISpecial Literals\fR
-.IX Subsection "Special Literals"
-.PP
-The special literals _\|_FILE_\|_, _\|_LINE_\|_, and _\|_PACKAGE_\|_
-represent the current filename, line number, and package name at that
-point in your program. They may be used only as separate tokens; they
-will not be interpolated into strings. If there is no current package
-(due to an empty \f(CW\*(C`package;\*(C'\fR directive), _\|_PACKAGE_\|_ is the undefined
-value.
-.PP
-The two control characters ^D and ^Z, and the tokens _\|_END_\|_ and _\|_DATA_\|_
-may be used to indicate the logical end of the script before the actual
-end of file. Any following text is ignored.
-.PP
-Text after _\|_DATA_\|_ but may be read via the filehandle \f(CW\*(C`PACKNAME::DATA\*(C'\fR,
-where \f(CW\*(C`PACKNAME\*(C'\fR is the package that was current when the _\|_DATA_\|_
-token was encountered. The filehandle is left open pointing to the
-contents after _\|_DATA_\|_. It is the program's responsibility to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`close DATA\*(C'\fR when it is done reading from it. For compatibility with
-older scripts written before _\|_DATA_\|_ was introduced, _\|_END_\|_ behaves
-like _\|_DATA_\|_ in the toplevel script (but not in files loaded with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`do\*(C'\fR) and leaves the remaining contents of the
-file accessible via \f(CW\*(C`main::DATA\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-See SelfLoader for more description of _\|_DATA_\|_, and
-an example of its use. Note that you cannot read from the \s-1DATA\s0
-filehandle in a \s-1BEGIN\s0 block: the \s-1BEGIN\s0 block is executed as soon
-as it is seen (during compilation), at which point the corresponding
-_\|_DATA_\|_ (or _\|_END_\|_) token has not yet been seen.
-.PP
-\fIBarewords\fR
-.IX Subsection "Barewords"
-.PP
-A word that has no other interpretation in the grammar will
-be treated as if it were a quoted string. These are known as
-\&\*(L"barewords\*(R". As with filehandles and labels, a bareword that consists
-entirely of lowercase letters risks conflict with future reserved
-words, and if you use the \f(CW\*(C`use warnings\*(C'\fR pragma or the \fB\-w\fR switch,
-Perl will warn you about any
-such words. Some people may wish to outlaw barewords entirely. If you
-say
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use strict 'subs';
-.Ve
-.PP
-then any bareword that would \s-1NOT\s0 be interpreted as a subroutine call
-produces a compile-time error instead. The restriction lasts to the
-end of the enclosing block. An inner block may countermand this
-by saying \f(CW\*(C`no strict 'subs'\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-\fIArray Joining Delimiter\fR
-.IX Subsection "Array Joining Delimiter"
-.PP
-Arrays and slices are interpolated into double-quoted strings
-by joining the elements with the delimiter specified in the \f(CW$"\fR
-variable (\f(CW$LIST_SEPARATOR\fR if \*(L"use English;\*(R" is specified),
-space by default. The following are equivalent:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $temp = join($", @ARGV);
-\& system "echo $temp";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& system "echo @ARGV";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Within search patterns (which also undergo double-quotish substitution)
-there is an unfortunate ambiguity: Is \f(CW\*(C`/$foo[bar]/\*(C'\fR to be interpreted as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`/${foo}[bar]/\*(C'\fR (where \f(CW\*(C`[bar]\*(C'\fR is a character class for the regular
-expression) or as \f(CW\*(C`/${foo[bar]}/\*(C'\fR (where \f(CW\*(C`[bar]\*(C'\fR is the subscript to array
-\&\f(CW at foo\fR)? If \f(CW at foo\fR doesn't otherwise exist, then it's obviously a
-character class. If \f(CW at foo\fR exists, Perl takes a good guess about \f(CW\*(C`[bar]\*(C'\fR,
-and is almost always right. If it does guess wrong, or if you're just
-plain paranoid, you can force the correct interpretation with curly
-braces as above.
-.PP
-If you're looking for the information on how to use here\-documents,
-which used to be here, that's been moved to
-\&\*(L"Quote and Quote-like Operators\*(R" in perlop.
-.Sh "List value constructors"
-.IX Subsection "List value constructors"
-List values are denoted by separating individual values by commas
-(and enclosing the list in parentheses where precedence requires it):
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& (LIST)
-.Ve
-.PP
-In a context not requiring a list value, the value of what appears
-to be a list literal is simply the value of the final element, as
-with the C comma operator. For example,
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& @foo = ('cc', '-E', $bar);
-.Ve
-.PP
-assigns the entire list value to array \f(CW at foo\fR, but
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $foo = ('cc', '-E', $bar);
-.Ve
-.PP
-assigns the value of variable \f(CW$bar\fR to the scalar variable \f(CW$foo\fR.
-Note that the value of an actual array in scalar context is the
-length of the array; the following assigns the value 3 to \f(CW$foo:\fR
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @foo = ('cc', '-E', $bar);
-\& $foo = @foo; # $foo gets 3
-.Ve
-.PP
-You may have an optional comma before the closing parenthesis of a
-list literal, so that you can say:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& @foo = (
-\& 1,
-\& 2,
-\& 3,
-\& );
-.Ve
-.PP
-To use a here-document to assign an array, one line per element,
-you might use an approach like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& @sauces = <<End_Lines =~ m/(\eS.*\eS)/g;
-\& normal tomato
-\& spicy tomato
-\& green chile
-\& pesto
-\& white wine
-\& End_Lines
-.Ve
-.PP
-LISTs do automatic interpolation of sublists. That is, when a \s-1LIST\s0 is
-evaluated, each element of the list is evaluated in list context, and
-the resulting list value is interpolated into \s-1LIST\s0 just as if each
-individual element were a member of \s-1LIST\s0. Thus arrays and hashes lose their
-identity in a LIST\*(--the list
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& (@foo, at bar,&SomeSub,%glarch)
-.Ve
-.PP
-contains all the elements of \f(CW at foo\fR followed by all the elements of \f(CW at bar\fR,
-followed by all the elements returned by the subroutine named SomeSub
-called in list context, followed by the key/value pairs of \f(CW%glarch\fR.
-To make a list reference that does \fI\s-1NOT\s0\fR interpolate, see perlref.
-.PP
-The null list is represented by (). Interpolating it in a list
-has no effect. Thus ((),(),()) is equivalent to (). Similarly,
-interpolating an array with no elements is the same as if no
-array had been interpolated at that point.
-.PP
-This interpolation combines with the facts that the opening
-and closing parentheses are optional (except when necessary for
-precedence) and lists may end with an optional comma to mean that
-multiple commas within lists are legal syntax. The list \f(CW\*(C`1,,3\*(C'\fR is a
-concatenation of two lists, \f(CW\*(C`1,\*(C'\fR and \f(CW3\fR, the first of which ends
-with that optional comma. \f(CW\*(C`1,,3\*(C'\fR is \f(CW\*(C`(1,),(3)\*(C'\fR is \f(CW\*(C`1,3\*(C'\fR (And
-similarly for \f(CW\*(C`1,,,3\*(C'\fR is \f(CW\*(C`(1,),(,),3\*(C'\fR is \f(CW\*(C`1,3\*(C'\fR and so on.) Not that
-we'd advise you to use this obfuscation.
-.PP
-A list value may also be subscripted like a normal array. You must
-put the list in parentheses to avoid ambiguity. For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # Stat returns list value.
-\& $time = (stat($file))[8];
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # SYNTAX ERROR HERE.
-\& $time = stat($file)[8]; # OOPS, FORGOT PARENTHESES
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # Find a hex digit.
-\& $hexdigit = ('a','b','c','d','e','f')[$digit-10];
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # A "reverse comma operator".
-\& return (pop(@foo),pop(@foo))[0];
-.Ve
-.PP
-Lists may be assigned to only when each element of the list
-is itself legal to assign to:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ($a, $b, $c) = (1, 2, 3);
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ($map{'red'}, $map{'blue'}, $map{'green'}) = (0x00f, 0x0f0, 0xf00);
-.Ve
-.PP
-An exception to this is that you may assign to \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR in a list.
-This is useful for throwing away some of the return values of a
-function:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ($dev, $ino, undef, undef, $uid, $gid) = stat($file);
-.Ve
-.PP
-List assignment in scalar context returns the number of elements
-produced by the expression on the right side of the assignment:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $x = (($foo,$bar) = (3,2,1)); # set $x to 3, not 2
-\& $x = (($foo,$bar) = f()); # set $x to f()'s return count
-.Ve
-.PP
-This is handy when you want to do a list assignment in a Boolean
-context, because most list functions return a null list when finished,
-which when assigned produces a 0, which is interpreted as \s-1FALSE\s0.
-.PP
-It's also the source of a useful idiom for executing a function or
-performing an operation in list context and then counting the number of
-return values, by assigning to an empty list and then using that
-assignment in scalar context. For example, this code:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $count = () = $string =~ /\ed+/g;
-.Ve
-.PP
-will place into \f(CW$count\fR the number of digit groups found in \f(CW$string\fR.
-This happens because the pattern match is in list context (since it
-is being assigned to the empty list), and will therefore return a list
-of all matching parts of the string. The list assignment in scalar
-context will translate that into the number of elements (here, the
-number of times the pattern matched) and assign that to \f(CW$count\fR. Note
-that simply using
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $count = $string =~ /\ed+/g;
-.Ve
-.PP
-would not have worked, since a pattern match in scalar context will
-only return true or false, rather than a count of matches.
-.PP
-The final element of a list assignment may be an array or a hash:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& ($a, $b, @rest) = split;
-\& my($a, $b, %rest) = @_;
-.Ve
-.PP
-You can actually put an array or hash anywhere in the list, but the first one
-in the list will soak up all the values, and anything after it will become
-undefined. This may be useful in a \fImy()\fR or \fIlocal()\fR.
-.PP
-A hash can be initialized using a literal list holding pairs of
-items to be interpreted as a key and a value:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # same as map assignment above
-\& %map = ('red',0x00f,'blue',0x0f0,'green',0xf00);
-.Ve
-.PP
-While literal lists and named arrays are often interchangeable, that's
-not the case for hashes. Just because you can subscript a list value like
-a normal array does not mean that you can subscript a list value as a
-hash. Likewise, hashes included as parts of other lists (including
-parameters lists and return lists from functions) always flatten out into
-key/value pairs. That's why it's good to use references sometimes.
-.PP
-It is often more readable to use the \f(CW\*(C`=>\*(C'\fR operator between key/value
-pairs. The \f(CW\*(C`=>\*(C'\fR operator is mostly just a more visually distinctive
-synonym for a comma, but it also arranges for its left-hand operand to be
-interpreted as a string \*(-- if it's a bareword that would be a legal simple
-identifier (\f(CW\*(C`=>\*(C'\fR doesn't quote compound identifiers, that contain
-double colons). This makes it nice for initializing hashes:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& %map = (
-\& red => 0x00f,
-\& blue => 0x0f0,
-\& green => 0xf00,
-\& );
-.Ve
-.PP
-or for initializing hash references to be used as records:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& $rec = {
-\& witch => 'Mable the Merciless',
-\& cat => 'Fluffy the Ferocious',
-\& date => '10/31/1776',
-\& };
-.Ve
-.PP
-or for using call-by-named-parameter to complicated functions:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& $field = $query->radio_group(
-\& name => 'group_name',
-\& values => ['eenie','meenie','minie'],
-\& default => 'meenie',
-\& linebreak => 'true',
-\& labels => \e%labels
-\& );
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note that just because a hash is initialized in that order doesn't
-mean that it comes out in that order. See \*(L"sort\*(R" in perlfunc for examples
-of how to arrange for an output ordering.
-.Sh "Subscripts"
-.IX Subsection "Subscripts"
-An array is subscripted by specifying a dollary sign (\f(CW\*(C`$\*(C'\fR), then the
-name of the array (without the leading \f(CW\*(C`@\*(C'\fR), then the subscript inside
-square brackets. For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @myarray = (5, 50, 500, 5000);
-\& print "Element Number 2 is", $myarray[2], "\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-The array indices start with 0. A negative subscript retrieves its
-value from the end. In our example, \f(CW$myarray[\-1]\fR would have been
-5000, and \f(CW$myarray[\-2]\fR would have been 500.
-.PP
-Hash subscripts are similar, only instead of square brackets curly brackets
-are used. For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& %scientists =
-\& (
-\& "Newton" => "Isaac",
-\& "Einstein" => "Albert",
-\& "Darwin" => "Charles",
-\& "Feynman" => "Richard",
-\& );
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print "Darwin's First Name is ", $scientists{"Darwin"}, "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sh "Slices"
-.IX Subsection "Slices"
-A common way to access an array or a hash is one scalar element at a
-time. You can also subscript a list to get a single element from it.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $whoami = $ENV{"USER"}; # one element from the hash
-\& $parent = $ISA[0]; # one element from the array
-\& $dir = (getpwnam("daemon"))[7]; # likewise, but with list
-.Ve
-.PP
-A slice accesses several elements of a list, an array, or a hash
-simultaneously using a list of subscripts. It's more convenient
-than writing out the individual elements as a list of separate
-scalar values.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& ($him, $her) = @folks[0,-1]; # array slice
-\& @them = @folks[0 .. 3]; # array slice
-\& ($who, $home) = @ENV{"USER", "HOME"}; # hash slice
-\& ($uid, $dir) = (getpwnam("daemon"))[2,7]; # list slice
-.Ve
-.PP
-Since you can assign to a list of variables, you can also assign to
-an array or hash slice.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& @days[3..5] = qw/Wed Thu Fri/;
-\& @colors{'red','blue','green'}
-\& = (0xff0000, 0x0000ff, 0x00ff00);
-\& @folks[0, -1] = @folks[-1, 0];
-.Ve
-.PP
-The previous assignments are exactly equivalent to
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& ($days[3], $days[4], $days[5]) = qw/Wed Thu Fri/;
-\& ($colors{'red'}, $colors{'blue'}, $colors{'green'})
-\& = (0xff0000, 0x0000ff, 0x00ff00);
-\& ($folks[0], $folks[-1]) = ($folks[-1], $folks[0]);
-.Ve
-.PP
-Since changing a slice changes the original array or hash that it's
-slicing, a \f(CW\*(C`foreach\*(C'\fR construct will alter some\*(--or even all\*(--of the
-values of the array or hash.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& foreach (@array[ 4 .. 10 ]) { s/peter/paul/ }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& foreach (@hash{qw[key1 key2]}) {
-\& s/^\es+//; # trim leading whitespace
-\& s/\es+$//; # trim trailing whitespace
-\& s/(\ew+)/\eu\eL$1/g; # "titlecase" words
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-A slice of an empty list is still an empty list. Thus:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& @a = ()[1,0]; # @a has no elements
-\& @b = (@a)[0,1]; # @b has no elements
-\& @c = (0,1)[2,3]; # @c has no elements
-.Ve
-.PP
-But:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @a = (1)[1,0]; # @a has two elements
-\& @b = (1,undef)[1,0,2]; # @b has three elements
-.Ve
-.PP
-This makes it easy to write loops that terminate when a null list
-is returned:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& while ( ($home, $user) = (getpwent)[7,0]) {
-\& printf "%-8s %s\en", $user, $home;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-As noted earlier in this document, the scalar sense of list assignment
-is the number of elements on the right-hand side of the assignment.
-The null list contains no elements, so when the password file is
-exhausted, the result is 0, not 2.
-.PP
-If you're confused about why you use an '@' there on a hash slice
-instead of a '%', think of it like this. The type of bracket (square
-or curly) governs whether it's an array or a hash being looked at.
-On the other hand, the leading symbol ('$' or '@') on the array or
-hash indicates whether you are getting back a singular value (a
-scalar) or a plural one (a list).
-.Sh "Typeglobs and Filehandles"
-.IX Subsection "Typeglobs and Filehandles"
-Perl uses an internal type called a \fItypeglob\fR to hold an entire
-symbol table entry. The type prefix of a typeglob is a \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR, because
-it represents all types. This used to be the preferred way to
-pass arrays and hashes by reference into a function, but now that
-we have real references, this is seldom needed.
-.PP
-The main use of typeglobs in modern Perl is create symbol table aliases.
-This assignment:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& *this = *that;
-.Ve
-.PP
-makes \f(CW$this\fR an alias for \f(CW$that\fR, \f(CW at this\fR an alias for \f(CW at that\fR, \f(CW%this\fR an alias
-for \f(CW%that\fR, &this an alias for &that, etc. Much safer is to use a reference.
-This:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& local *Here::blue = \e$There::green;
-.Ve
-.PP
-temporarily makes \f(CW$Here::blue\fR an alias for \f(CW$There::green\fR, but doesn't
-make \f(CW at Here::blue\fR an alias for \f(CW at There::green\fR, or \f(CW%Here::blue\fR an alias for
-\&\f(CW%There::green\fR, etc. See \*(L"Symbol Tables\*(R" in perlmod for more examples
-of this. Strange though this may seem, this is the basis for the whole
-module import/export system.
-.PP
-Another use for typeglobs is to pass filehandles into a function or
-to create new filehandles. If you need to use a typeglob to save away
-a filehandle, do it this way:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $fh = *STDOUT;
-.Ve
-.PP
-or perhaps as a real reference, like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $fh = \e*STDOUT;
-.Ve
-.PP
-See perlsub for examples of using these as indirect filehandles
-in functions.
-.PP
-Typeglobs are also a way to create a local filehandle using the \fIlocal()\fR
-operator. These last until their block is exited, but may be passed back.
-For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& sub newopen {
-\& my $path = shift;
-\& local *FH; # not my!
-\& open (FH, $path) or return undef;
-\& return *FH;
-\& }
-\& $fh = newopen('/etc/passwd');
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now that we have the \f(CW*foo{THING}\fR notation, typeglobs aren't used as much
-for filehandle manipulations, although they're still needed to pass brand
-new file and directory handles into or out of functions. That's because
-\&\f(CW*HANDLE{IO}\fR only works if \s-1HANDLE\s0 has already been used as a handle.
-In other words, \f(CW*FH\fR must be used to create new symbol table entries;
-\&\f(CW*foo{THING}\fR cannot. When in doubt, use \f(CW*FH\fR.
-.PP
-All functions that are capable of creating filehandles (\fIopen()\fR,
-\&\fIopendir()\fR, \fIpipe()\fR, \fIsocketpair()\fR, \fIsysopen()\fR, \fIsocket()\fR, and \fIaccept()\fR)
-automatically create an anonymous filehandle if the handle passed to
-them is an uninitialized scalar variable. This allows the constructs
-such as \f(CW\*(C`open(my $fh, ...)\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`open(local $fh,...)\*(C'\fR to be used to
-create filehandles that will conveniently be closed automatically when
-the scope ends, provided there are no other references to them. This
-largely eliminates the need for typeglobs when opening filehandles
-that must be passed around, as in the following example:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& sub myopen {
-\& open my $fh, "@_"
-\& or die "Can't open '@_': $!";
-\& return $fh;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& {
-\& my $f = myopen("</etc/motd");
-\& print <$f>;
-\& # $f implicitly closed here
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note that if an initialized scalar variable is used instead the
-result is different: \f(CW\*(C`my $fh='zzz'; open($fh, ...)\*(C'\fR is equivalent
-to \f(CW\*(C`open( *{'zzz'}, ...)\*(C'\fR.
-\&\f(CW\*(C`use strict 'refs'\*(C'\fR forbids such practice.
-.PP
-Another way to create anonymous filehandles is with the Symbol
-module or with the IO::Handle module and its ilk. These modules
-have the advantage of not hiding different types of the same name
-during the \fIlocal()\fR. See the bottom of \*(L"\fIopen()\fR\*(R" in perlfunc for an
-example.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-See perlvar for a description of Perl's built-in variables and
-a discussion of legal variable names. See perlref, perlsub,
-and \*(L"Symbol Tables\*(R" in perlmod for more discussion on typeglobs and
-the \f(CW*foo{THING}\fR syntax.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfaq.1 b/raw/man1/perlfaq.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 0635a34..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfaq.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,858 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFAQ 1"
-.TH PERLFAQ 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfaq \- frequently asked questions about Perl ($Date: 2004/06/16 03:02:15 $)
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-The perlfaq is divided into several documents based on topics. A table
-of contents is at the end of this document.
-.Sh "Where to get the perlfaq"
-.IX Subsection "Where to get the perlfaq"
-Extracts of the perlfaq are posted regularly to
-comp.lang.perl.misc. It is available on many web sites:
-http://www.perldoc.com/ and http://faq.perl.org/
-.Sh "How to contribute to the perlfaq"
-.IX Subsection "How to contribute to the perlfaq"
-You may mail corrections, additions, and suggestions to
-perlfaq\-workers at perl.org . This alias should not be used to
-\&\fIask\fR FAQs. It's for fixing the current \s-1FAQ\s0. Send
-questions to the comp.lang.perl.misc newsgroup. You can
-view the source tree at http://cvs.perl.org/cvsweb/perlfaq/
-(which is outside of the main Perl source tree). The \s-1CVS\s0
-repository notes all changes to the \s-1FAQ\s0.
-.Sh "What will happen if you mail your Perl programming problems to the authors"
-.IX Subsection "What will happen if you mail your Perl programming problems to the authors"
-Your questions will probably go unread, unless they're
-suggestions of new questions to add to the \s-1FAQ\s0, in which
-case they should have gone to the perlfaq\-workers at perl.org
-instead.
-.PP
-You should have read section 2 of this faq. There you would
-have learned that comp.lang.perl.misc is the appropriate
-place to go for free advice. If your question is really
-important and you require a prompt and correct answer, you
-should hire a consultant.
-.SH "Credits"
-.IX Header "Credits"
-The original perlfaq was written by Tom Christiansen, then expanded
-by collaboration between Tom and Nathan Torkington. The current
-document is maintained by the perlfaq-workers (perlfaq\-workers at perl.org).
-Several people have contributed answers, corrections, and comments.
-.SH "Author and Copyright Information"
-.IX Header "Author and Copyright Information"
-Copyright (c) 1997\-2003 Tom Christiansen, Nathan Torkington, and
-other contributors noted in the answers.
-.PP
-All rights reserved.
-.Sh "Bundled Distributions"
-.IX Subsection "Bundled Distributions"
-This documentation is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-under the same terms as Perl itself.
-.PP
-Irrespective of its distribution, all code examples in these files
-are hereby placed into the public domain. You are permitted and
-encouraged to use this code in your own programs for fun
-or for profit as you see fit. A simple comment in the code giving
-credit would be courteous but is not required.
-.Sh "Disclaimer"
-.IX Subsection "Disclaimer"
-This information is offered in good faith and in the hope that it may
-be of use, but is not guaranteed to be correct, up to date, or suitable
-for any particular purpose whatsoever. The authors accept no liability
-in respect of this information or its use.
-.SH "Table of Contents"
-.IX Header "Table of Contents"
-.IP "perlfaq \- this document" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq - this document"
-.PD 0
-.IP "perlfaq1 \- General Questions About Perl" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq1 - General Questions About Perl"
-.IP "perlfaq2 \- Obtaining and Learning about Perl" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq2 - Obtaining and Learning about Perl"
-.IP "perlfaq3 \- Programming Tools" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq3 - Programming Tools"
-.IP "perlfaq4 \- Data Manipulation" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq4 - Data Manipulation"
-.IP "perlfaq5 \- Files and Formats" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq5 - Files and Formats"
-.IP "perlfaq6 \- Regular Expressions" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq6 - Regular Expressions"
-.IP "perlfaq7 \- General Perl Language Issues" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq7 - General Perl Language Issues"
-.IP "perlfaq8 \- System Interaction" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq8 - System Interaction"
-.IP "perlfaq9 \- Networking" 4
-.IX Item "perlfaq9 - Networking"
-.PD
-.SH "The Questions"
-.IX Header "The Questions"
-.Sh "perlfaq1: General Questions About Perl"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq1: General Questions About Perl"
-Very general, high-level questions about Perl.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Who supports Perl? Who develops it? Why is it free?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Which version of Perl should I use?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What are perl4 and perl5?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is perl6?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How stable is Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is Perl difficult to learn?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How does Perl compare with other languages like Java, Python, \s-1REXX\s0, Scheme, or Tcl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Can I do [task] in Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-When shouldn't I program in Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's the difference between \*(L"perl\*(R" and \*(L"Perl\*(R"?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is it a Perl program or a Perl script?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is a \s-1JAPH\s0?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I get a list of Larry Wall witticisms?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I convince my sysadmin/supervisor/employees to use version 5/5.6.1/Perl instead of some other language?
-.Sh "perlfaq2: Obtaining and Learning about Perl"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq2: Obtaining and Learning about Perl"
-Where to find source and documentation for Perl, support,
-and related matters.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What machines support Perl? Where do I get it?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I get a binary version of Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I don't have a C compiler on my system. How can I compile perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I copied the Perl binary from one machine to another, but scripts don't work.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I grabbed the sources and tried to compile but gdbm/dynamic loading/malloc/linking/... failed. How do I make it work?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What modules and extensions are available for Perl? What is \s-1CPAN\s0? What does CPAN/src/... mean?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is there an \s-1ISO\s0 or \s-1ANSI\s0 certified version of Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I get information on Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What are the Perl newsgroups on Usenet? Where do I post questions?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where should I post source code?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Perl Books
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Perl in Magazines
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Perl on the Net: \s-1FTP\s0 and \s-1WWW\s0 Access
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What mailing lists are there for Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Archives of comp.lang.perl.misc
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I buy a commercial version of Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where do I send bug reports?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is perl.com? Perl Mongers? pm.org? perl.org? cpan.org?
-.Sh "perlfaq3: Programming Tools"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq3: Programming Tools"
-Programmer tools and programming support.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I do (anything)?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I use Perl interactively?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is there a Perl shell?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find which modules are installed on my system?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I debug my Perl programs?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I profile my Perl programs?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I cross-reference my Perl programs?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is there a pretty-printer (formatter) for Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is there a ctags for Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is there an \s-1IDE\s0 or Windows Perl Editor?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I get Perl macros for vi?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I get perl-mode for emacs?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I use curses with Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I use X or Tk with Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I generate simple menus without using \s-1CGI\s0 or Tk?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I make my Perl program run faster?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I make my Perl program take less memory?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is it safe to return a reference to local or lexical data?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I free an array or hash so my program shrinks?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I make my \s-1CGI\s0 script more efficient?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I hide the source for my Perl program?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I compile my Perl program into byte code or C?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I compile Perl into Java?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I get \f(CW\*(C`#!perl\*(C'\fR to work on [\s-1MS\-DOS\s0,NT,...]?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Can I write useful Perl programs on the command line?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why don't Perl one-liners work on my DOS/Mac/VMS system?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I learn about \s-1CGI\s0 or Web programming in Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I learn about object-oriented Perl programming?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where can I learn about linking C with Perl? [h2xs, xsubpp]
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I've read perlembed, perlguts, etc., but I can't embed perl in
-my C program; what am I doing wrong?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-When I tried to run my script, I got this message. What does it mean?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's MakeMaker?
-.Sh "perlfaq4: Data Manipulation"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq4: Data Manipulation"
-Manipulating numbers, dates, strings, arrays, hashes, and
-miscellaneous data issues.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why am I getting long decimals (eg, 19.9499999999999) instead of the numbers I should be getting (eg, 19.95)?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why isn't my octal data interpreted correctly?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Does Perl have a \fIround()\fR function? What about \fIceil()\fR and \fIfloor()\fR? Trig functions?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I convert between numeric representations?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why doesn't & work the way I want it to?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I multiply matrices?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I perform an operation on a series of integers?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I output Roman numerals?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why aren't my random numbers random?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I get a random number between X and Y?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find the day or week of the year?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find the current century or millennium?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I compare two dates and find the difference?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I take a string and turn it into epoch seconds?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I find the Julian Day?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find yesterday's date?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Does Perl have a Year 2000 problem? Is Perl Y2K compliant?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I validate input?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I unescape a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I remove consecutive pairs of characters?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I expand function calls in a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find matching/nesting anything?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I reverse a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I expand tabs in a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I reformat a paragraph?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I access or change N characters of a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I change the Nth occurrence of something?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I count the number of occurrences of a substring within a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I capitalize all the words on one line?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I split a [character] delimited string except when inside [character]?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I strip blank space from the beginning/end of a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I pad a string with blanks or pad a number with zeroes?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I extract selected columns from a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find the soundex value of a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I expand variables in text strings?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's wrong with always quoting \*(L"$vars\*(R"?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why don't my <<\s-1HERE\s0 documents work?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is the difference between a list and an array?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is the difference between \f(CW$array\fR[1] and \f(CW at array\fR[1]?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I remove duplicate elements from a list or array?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I tell whether a certain element is contained in a list or array?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I compute the difference of two arrays? How do I compute the intersection of two arrays?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I test whether two arrays or hashes are equal?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find the first array element for which a condition is true?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I handle linked lists?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I handle circular lists?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I shuffle an array randomly?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I process/modify each element of an array?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I select a random element from an array?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I permute N elements of a list?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I sort an array by (anything)?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I manipulate arrays of bits?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why does \fIdefined()\fR return true on empty arrays and hashes?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I process an entire hash?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What happens if I add or remove keys from a hash while iterating over it?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I look up a hash element by value?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I know how many entries are in a hash?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I sort a hash (optionally by value instead of key)?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I always keep my hash sorted?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's the difference between \*(L"delete\*(R" and \*(L"undef\*(R" with hashes?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why don't my tied hashes make the defined/exists distinction?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I reset an \fIeach()\fR operation part-way through?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I get the unique keys from two hashes?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I store a multidimensional array in a \s-1DBM\s0 file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I make my hash remember the order I put elements into it?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why does passing a subroutine an undefined element in a hash create it?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I make the Perl equivalent of a C structure/\*(C+ class/hash or array of hashes or arrays?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I use a reference as a hash key?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I handle binary data correctly?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I determine whether a scalar is a number/whole/integer/float?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I keep persistent data across program calls?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I print out or copy a recursive data structure?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I define methods for every class/object?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I verify a credit card checksum?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I pack arrays of doubles or floats for \s-1XS\s0 code?
-.Sh "perlfaq5: Files and Formats"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq5: Files and Formats"
-I/O and the \*(L"f\*(R" issues: filehandles, flushing, formats, and footers.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I flush/unbuffer an output filehandle? Why must I do this?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I change one line in a file/delete a line in a file/insert a line in the middle of a file/append to the beginning of a file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I count the number of lines in a file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I use Perl's \f(CW\*(C`\-i\*(C'\fR option from within a program?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I make a temporary file name?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I manipulate fixed-record-length files?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I make a filehandle local to a subroutine? How do I pass filehandles between subroutines? How do I make an array of filehandles?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I use a filehandle indirectly?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I set up a footer format to be used with \fIwrite()\fR?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I \fIwrite()\fR into a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I output my numbers with commas added?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I translate tildes (~) in a filename?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How come when I open a file read-write it wipes it out?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why do I sometimes get an \*(L"Argument list too long\*(R" when I use <*>?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is there a leak/bug in \fIglob()\fR?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I open a file with a leading \*(L">\*(R" or trailing blanks?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I reliably rename a file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I lock a file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why can't I just open(\s-1FH\s0, ">file.lock")?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I still don't get locking. I just want to increment the number in the file. How can I do this?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-All I want to do is append a small amount of text to the end of a file. Do I still have to use locking?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I randomly update a binary file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I get a file's timestamp in perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I set a file's timestamp in perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I print to more than one file at once?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I read in an entire file all at once?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I read in a file by paragraphs?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I read a single character from a file? From the keyboard?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I tell whether there's a character waiting on a filehandle?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I do a \f(CW\*(C`tail \-f\*(C'\fR in perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I \fIdup()\fR a filehandle in Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I close a file descriptor by number?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why can't I use \*(L"C:\etemp\efoo\*(R" in \s-1DOS\s0 paths? What doesn't `C:\etemp\efoo.exe` work?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why doesn't glob(\*(L"*.*\*(R") get all the files?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why does Perl let me delete read-only files? Why does \f(CW\*(C`\-i\*(C'\fR clobber protected files? Isn't this a bug in Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I select a random line from a file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why do I get weird spaces when I print an array of lines?
-.Sh "perlfaq6: Regular Expressions"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq6: Regular Expressions"
-Pattern matching and regular expressions.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I hope to use regular expressions without creating illegible and unmaintainable code?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I'm having trouble matching over more than one line. What's wrong?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I pull out lines between two patterns that are themselves on different lines?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I put a regular expression into $/ but it didn't work. What's wrong?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I substitute case insensitively on the \s-1LHS\s0 while preserving case on the \s-1RHS\s0?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I make \f(CW\*(C`\ew\*(C'\fR match national character sets?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I match a locale-smart version of \f(CW\*(C`/[a\-zA\-Z]/\*(C'\fR?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I quote a variable to use in a regex?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is \f(CW\*(C`/o\*(C'\fR really for?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I use a regular expression to strip C style comments from a file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Can I use Perl regular expressions to match balanced text?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What does it mean that regexes are greedy? How can I get around it?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I process each word on each line?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I print out a word-frequency or line-frequency summary?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I do approximate matching?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I efficiently match many regular expressions at once?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why don't word-boundary searches with \f(CW\*(C`\eb\*(C'\fR work for me?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why does using $&, $`, or $' slow my program down?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What good is \f(CW\*(C`\eG\*(C'\fR in a regular expression?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Are Perl regexes DFAs or NFAs? Are they \s-1POSIX\s0 compliant?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's wrong with using grep or map in a void context?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I match strings with multibyte characters?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I match a pattern that is supplied by the user?
-.Sh "perlfaq7: General Perl Language Issues"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq7: General Perl Language Issues"
-General Perl language issues that don't clearly fit into any of the
-other sections.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Can I get a BNF/yacc/RE for the Perl language?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What are all these $@%&* punctuation signs, and how do I know when to use them?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Do I always/never have to quote my strings or use semicolons and commas?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I skip some return values?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I temporarily block warnings?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's an extension?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why do Perl operators have different precedence than C operators?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I declare/create a structure?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I create a module?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I create a class?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I tell if a variable is tainted?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's a closure?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is variable suicide and how can I prevent it?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I pass/return a {Function, FileHandle, Array, Hash, Method, Regex}?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I create a static variable?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's the difference between dynamic and lexical (static) scoping? Between \fIlocal()\fR and \fImy()\fR?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I access a dynamic variable while a similarly named lexical is in scope?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's the difference between deep and shallow binding?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why doesn't "my($foo) = <\s-1FILE\s0>;" work right?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I redefine a builtin function, operator, or method?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's the difference between calling a function as &foo and \fIfoo()\fR?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I create a switch or case statement?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I catch accesses to undefined variables, functions, or methods?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why can't a method included in this same file be found?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I find out my current package?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I comment out a large block of perl code?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I clear a package?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I use a variable as a variable name?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What does \*(L"bad interpreter\*(R" mean?
-.Sh "perlfaq8: System Interaction"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq8: System Interaction"
-Interprocess communication (\s-1IPC\s0), control over the user-interface
-(keyboard, screen and pointing devices).
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find out which operating system I'm running under?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How come \fIexec()\fR doesn't return?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I do fancy stuff with the keyboard/screen/mouse?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I print something out in color?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I read just one key without waiting for a return key?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I check whether input is ready on the keyboard?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I clear the screen?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I get the screen size?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I ask the user for a password?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I read and write the serial port?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I decode encrypted password files?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I start a process in the background?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I trap control characters/signals?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I modify the shadow password file on a Unix system?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I set the time and date?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I \fIsleep()\fR or \fIalarm()\fR for under a second?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I measure time under a second?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I do an \fIatexit()\fR or \fIsetjmp()\fR/\fIlongjmp()\fR? (Exception handling)
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why doesn't my sockets program work under System V (Solaris)? What does the error message \*(L"Protocol not supported\*(R" mean?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I call my system's unique C functions from Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Where do I get the include files to do \fIioctl()\fR or \fIsyscall()\fR?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why do setuid perl scripts complain about kernel problems?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I open a pipe both to and from a command?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why can't I get the output of a command with \fIsystem()\fR?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I capture \s-1STDERR\s0 from an external command?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why doesn't \fIopen()\fR return an error when a pipe open fails?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's wrong with using backticks in a void context?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I call backticks without shell processing?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Why can't my script read from \s-1STDIN\s0 after I gave it \s-1EOF\s0 (^D on Unix, ^Z on \s-1MS\-DOS\s0)?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I convert my shell script to perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Can I use perl to run a telnet or ftp session?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I write expect in Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Is there a way to hide perl's command line from programs such as \*(L"ps\*(R"?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-I {changed directory, modified my environment} in a perl script. How come the change disappeared when I exited the script? How do I get my changes to be visible?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I close a process's filehandle without waiting for it to complete?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I fork a daemon process?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find out if I'm running interactively or not?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I timeout a slow event?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I set \s-1CPU\s0 limits?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I avoid zombies on a Unix system?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I use an \s-1SQL\s0 database?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I make a \fIsystem()\fR exit on control\-C?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I open a file without blocking?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I install a module from \s-1CPAN\s0?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What's the difference between require and use?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I keep my own module/library directory?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I add the directory my program lives in to the module/library search path?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I add a directory to my include path at runtime?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is socket.ph and where do I get it?
-.Sh "perlfaq9: Networking"
-.IX Subsection "perlfaq9: Networking"
-Networking, the internet, and a few on the web.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-What is the correct form of response from a \s-1CGI\s0 script?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-My \s-1CGI\s0 script runs from the command line but not the browser. (500 Server Error)
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I get better error messages from a \s-1CGI\s0 program?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I remove \s-1HTML\s0 from a string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I extract URLs?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I download a file from the user's machine? How do I open a file on another machine?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I make a pop-up menu in \s-1HTML\s0?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I fetch an \s-1HTML\s0 file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I automate an \s-1HTML\s0 form submission?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I decode or create those %\-encodings on the web?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I redirect to another page?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I put a password on my web pages?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I edit my .htpasswd and .htgroup files with Perl?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I make sure users can't enter values into a form that cause my \s-1CGI\s0 script to do bad things?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I parse a mail header?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I decode a \s-1CGI\s0 form?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I check a valid mail address?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I decode a \s-1MIME/BASE64\s0 string?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I return the user's mail address?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I send mail?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I use \s-1MIME\s0 to make an attachment to a mail message?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I read mail?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I find out my hostname/domainname/IP address?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I fetch a news article or the active newsgroups?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How do I fetch/put an \s-1FTP\s0 file?
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-How can I do \s-1RPC\s0 in Perl?
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfaq1.1 b/raw/man1/perlfaq1.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 073a150..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfaq1.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,461 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFAQ1 1"
-.TH PERLFAQ1 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfaq1 \- General Questions About Perl ($Revision: 1.1 $, $Date: 2004/06/16 03:02:15 $)
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-This section of the \s-1FAQ\s0 answers very general, high-level questions
-about Perl.
-.Sh "What is Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "What is Perl?"
-Perl is a high-level programming language with an eclectic heritage
-written by Larry Wall and a cast of thousands. It derives from the
-ubiquitous C programming language and to a lesser extent from sed,
-awk, the Unix shell, and at least a dozen other tools and languages.
-Perl's process, file, and text manipulation facilities make it
-particularly well-suited for tasks involving quick prototyping, system
-utilities, software tools, system management tasks, database access,
-graphical programming, networking, and world wide web programming.
-These strengths make it especially popular with system administrators
-and \s-1CGI\s0 script authors, but mathematicians, geneticists, journalists,
-and even managers also use Perl. Maybe you should, too.
-.Sh "Who supports Perl? Who develops it? Why is it free?"
-.IX Subsection "Who supports Perl? Who develops it? Why is it free?"
-The original culture of the pre-populist Internet and the deeply-held
-beliefs of Perl's author, Larry Wall, gave rise to the free and open
-distribution policy of perl. Perl is supported by its users. The
-core, the standard Perl library, the optional modules, and the
-documentation you're reading now were all written by volunteers. See
-the personal note at the end of the \s-1README\s0 file in the perl source
-distribution for more details. See perlhist (new as of 5.005)
-for Perl's milestone releases.
-.PP
-In particular, the core development team (known as the Perl Porters)
-are a rag-tag band of highly altruistic individuals committed to
-producing better software for free than you could hope to purchase for
-money. You may snoop on pending developments via the archives at
-http://www.xray.mpe.mpg.de/mailing\-lists/perl5\-porters/
-and http://archive.develooper.com/perl5\-porters@perl.org/
-or the news gateway nntp://nntp.perl.org/perl.perl5.porters or
-its web interface at http://nntp.perl.org/group/perl.perl5.porters ,
-or read the faq at http://simon\-cozens.org/writings/p5p\-faq ,
-or you can subscribe to the mailing list by sending
-perl5\-porters\-request at perl.org a subscription request
-(an empty message with no subject is fine).
-.PP
-While the \s-1GNU\s0 project includes Perl in its distributions, there's no
-such thing as \*(L"\s-1GNU\s0 Perl\*(R". Perl is not produced nor maintained by the
-Free Software Foundation. Perl's licensing terms are also more open
-than \s-1GNU\s0 software's tend to be.
-.PP
-You can get commercial support of Perl if you wish, although for most
-users the informal support will more than suffice. See the answer to
-\&\*(L"Where can I buy a commercial version of perl?\*(R" for more information.
-.Sh "Which version of Perl should I use?"
-.IX Subsection "Which version of Perl should I use?"
-You should definitely use version 5. Version 4 is old, limited, and
-no longer maintained; its last patch (4.036) was in 1992, long ago and
-far away. Sure, it's stable, but so is anything that's dead; in fact,
-perl4 had been called a dead, flea-bitten camel carcass. The most
-recent production release is 5.8.2 (although 5.005_03 and 5.6.2 are
-still supported). The most cutting-edge development release is 5.9.
-Further references to the Perl language in this document refer to the
-production release unless otherwise specified. There may be one or
-more official bug fixes by the time you read this, and also perhaps
-some experimental versions on the way to the next release.
-All releases prior to 5.004 were subject to buffer overruns, a grave
-security issue.
-.Sh "What are perl4 and perl5?"
-.IX Subsection "What are perl4 and perl5?"
-Perl4 and perl5 are informal names for different versions of the Perl
-programming language. It's easier to say \*(L"perl5\*(R" than it is to say
-\&\*(L"the 5(.004) release of Perl\*(R", but some people have interpreted this
-to mean there's a language called \*(L"perl5\*(R", which isn't the case.
-Perl5 is merely the popular name for the fifth major release (October 1994),
-while perl4 was the fourth major release (March 1991). There was also a
-perl1 (in January 1988), a perl2 (June 1988), and a perl3 (October 1989).
-.PP
-The 5.0 release is, essentially, a ground-up rewrite of the original
-perl source code from releases 1 through 4. It has been modularized,
-object\-oriented, tweaked, trimmed, and optimized until it almost doesn't
-look like the old code. However, the interface is mostly the same, and
-compatibility with previous releases is very high.
-See \*(L"Perl4 to Perl5 Traps\*(R" in perltrap.
-.PP
-To avoid the \*(L"what language is perl5?\*(R" confusion, some people prefer to
-simply use \*(L"perl\*(R" to refer to the latest version of perl and avoid using
-\&\*(L"perl5\*(R" altogether. It's not really that big a deal, though.
-.PP
-See perlhist for a history of Perl revisions.
-.Sh "What is Ponie?"
-.IX Subsection "What is Ponie?"
-At The O'Reilly Open Source Software Convention in 2003, Artur
-Bergman, Fotango, and The Perl Foundation announced a project to
-run perl5 on the Parrot virtual machine named Ponie. Ponie stands for
-Perl On New Internal Engine. The Perl 5.10 language implementation
-will be used for Ponie, and there will be no language level
-differences between perl5 and ponie. Ponie is not a complete rewrite
-of perl5.
-.PP
-For more details, see http://www.poniecode.org/
-.Sh "What is perl6?"
-.IX Subsection "What is perl6?"
-At The Second O'Reilly Open Source Software Convention, Larry Wall
-announced Perl6 development would begin in earnest. Perl6 was an oft
-used term for Chip Salzenberg's project to rewrite Perl in \*(C+ named
-Topaz. However, Topaz provided valuable insights to the next version
-of Perl and its implementation, but was ultimately abandoned.
-.PP
-If you want to learn more about Perl6, or have a desire to help in
-the crusade to make Perl a better place then peruse the Perl6 developers
-page at http://dev.perl.org/perl6/ and get involved.
-.PP
-Perl6 is not scheduled for release yet, and Perl5 will still be supported
-for quite awhile after its release. Do not wait for Perl6 to do whatever
-you need to do.
-.PP
-\&\*(L"We're really serious about reinventing everything that needs reinventing.\*(R"
-\&\-\-Larry Wall
-.Sh "How stable is Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How stable is Perl?"
-Production releases, which incorporate bug fixes and new functionality,
-are widely tested before release. Since the 5.000 release, we have
-averaged only about one production release per year.
-.PP
-Larry and the Perl development team occasionally make changes to the
-internal core of the language, but all possible efforts are made toward
-backward compatibility. While not quite all perl4 scripts run flawlessly
-under perl5, an update to perl should nearly never invalidate a program
-written for an earlier version of perl (barring accidental bug fixes
-and the rare new keyword).
-.Sh "Is Perl difficult to learn?"
-.IX Subsection "Is Perl difficult to learn?"
-No, Perl is easy to start learning\*(--and easy to keep learning. It looks
-like most programming languages you're likely to have experience
-with, so if you've ever written a C program, an awk script, a shell
-script, or even a \s-1BASIC\s0 program, you're already partway there.
-.PP
-Most tasks only require a small subset of the Perl language. One of
-the guiding mottos for Perl development is \*(L"there's more than one way
-to do it\*(R" (\s-1TMTOWTDI\s0, sometimes pronounced \*(L"tim toady\*(R"). Perl's
-learning curve is therefore shallow (easy to learn) and long (there's
-a whole lot you can do if you really want).
-.PP
-Finally, because Perl is frequently (but not always, and certainly not by
-definition) an interpreted language, you can write your programs and test
-them without an intermediate compilation step, allowing you to experiment
-and test/debug quickly and easily. This ease of experimentation flattens
-the learning curve even more.
-.PP
-Things that make Perl easier to learn: Unix experience, almost any kind
-of programming experience, an understanding of regular expressions, and
-the ability to understand other people's code. If there's something you
-need to do, then it's probably already been done, and a working example is
-usually available for free. Don't forget the new perl modules, either.
-They're discussed in Part 3 of this \s-1FAQ\s0, along with \s-1CPAN\s0, which is
-discussed in Part 2.
-.Sh "How does Perl compare with other languages like Java, Python, \s-1REXX\s0, Scheme, or Tcl?"
-.IX Subsection "How does Perl compare with other languages like Java, Python, REXX, Scheme, or Tcl?"
-Favorably in some areas, unfavorably in others. Precisely which areas
-are good and bad is often a personal choice, so asking this question
-on Usenet runs a strong risk of starting an unproductive Holy War.
-.PP
-Probably the best thing to do is try to write equivalent code to do a
-set of tasks. These languages have their own newsgroups in which you
-can learn about (but hopefully not argue about) them.
-.PP
-Some comparison documents can be found at http://language.perl.com/versus/
-if you really can't stop yourself.
-.Sh "Can I do [task] in Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "Can I do [task] in Perl?"
-Perl is flexible and extensible enough for you to use on virtually any
-task, from one-line file-processing tasks to large, elaborate systems.
-For many people, Perl serves as a great replacement for shell scripting.
-For others, it serves as a convenient, high-level replacement for most of
-what they'd program in low-level languages like C or \*(C+. It's ultimately
-up to you (and possibly your management) which tasks you'll use Perl
-for and which you won't.
-.PP
-If you have a library that provides an \s-1API\s0, you can make any component
-of it available as just another Perl function or variable using a Perl
-extension written in C or \*(C+ and dynamically linked into your main
-perl interpreter. You can also go the other direction, and write your
-main program in C or \*(C+, and then link in some Perl code on the fly,
-to create a powerful application. See perlembed.
-.PP
-That said, there will always be small, focused, special-purpose
-languages dedicated to a specific problem domain that are simply more
-convenient for certain kinds of problems. Perl tries to be all things
-to all people, but nothing special to anyone. Examples of specialized
-languages that come to mind include prolog and matlab.
-.Sh "When shouldn't I program in Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "When shouldn't I program in Perl?"
-When your manager forbids it\*(--but do consider replacing them :\-).
-.PP
-Actually, one good reason is when you already have an existing
-application written in another language that's all done (and done
-well), or you have an application language specifically designed for a
-certain task (e.g. prolog, make).
-.PP
-For various reasons, Perl is probably not well-suited for real-time
-embedded systems, low-level operating systems development work like
-device drivers or context-switching code, complex multi-threaded
-shared-memory applications, or extremely large applications. You'll
-notice that perl is not itself written in Perl.
-.PP
-The new, native-code compiler for Perl may eventually reduce the
-limitations given in the previous statement to some degree, but understand
-that Perl remains fundamentally a dynamically typed language, not
-a statically typed one. You certainly won't be chastised if you don't
-trust nuclear-plant or brain-surgery monitoring code to it. And Larry
-will sleep easier, too\*(--Wall Street programs not withstanding. :\-)
-.ie n .Sh "What's the difference between ""perl"" and ""Perl""?"
-.el .Sh "What's the difference between ``perl'' and ``Perl''?"
-.IX Subsection "What's the difference between perl and Perl?"
-One bit. Oh, you weren't talking \s-1ASCII\s0? :\-) Larry now uses \*(L"Perl\*(R" to
-signify the language proper and \*(L"perl\*(R" the implementation of it,
-i.e. the current interpreter. Hence Tom's quip that \*(L"Nothing but perl
-can parse Perl.\*(R" You may or may not choose to follow this usage. For
-example, parallelism means \*(L"awk and perl\*(R" and \*(L"Python and Perl\*(R" look
-\&\s-1OK\s0, while \*(L"awk and Perl\*(R" and \*(L"Python and perl\*(R" do not. But never
-write \*(L"\s-1PERL\s0\*(R", because perl is not an acronym, apocryphal
-folklore and post-facto expansions notwithstanding.
-.Sh "Is it a Perl program or a Perl script?"
-.IX Subsection "Is it a Perl program or a Perl script?"
-Larry doesn't really care. He says (half in jest) that \*(L"a script is
-what you give the actors. A program is what you give the audience.\*(R"
-.PP
-Originally, a script was a canned sequence of normally interactive
-commands\*(--that is, a chat script. Something like a \s-1UUCP\s0 or \s-1PPP\s0 chat
-script or an expect script fits the bill nicely, as do configuration
-scripts run by a program at its start up, such \fI.cshrc\fR or \fI.ircrc\fR,
-for example. Chat scripts were just drivers for existing programs,
-not stand-alone programs in their own right.
-.PP
-A computer scientist will correctly explain that all programs are
-interpreted and that the only question is at what level. But if you
-ask this question of someone who isn't a computer scientist, they might
-tell you that a \fIprogram\fR has been compiled to physical machine code
-once and can then be run multiple times, whereas a \fIscript\fR must be
-translated by a program each time it's used.
-.PP
-Perl programs are (usually) neither strictly compiled nor strictly
-interpreted. They can be compiled to a byte-code form (something of a
-Perl virtual machine) or to completely different languages, like C or
-assembly language. You can't tell just by looking at it whether the
-source is destined for a pure interpreter, a parse-tree interpreter,
-a byte-code interpreter, or a native-code compiler, so it's hard to give
-a definitive answer here.
-.PP
-Now that \*(L"script\*(R" and \*(L"scripting\*(R" are terms that have been seized by
-unscrupulous or unknowing marketeers for their own nefarious purposes,
-they have begun to take on strange and often pejorative meanings,
-like \*(L"non serious\*(R" or \*(L"not real programming\*(R". Consequently, some Perl
-programmers prefer to avoid them altogether.
-.Sh "What is a \s-1JAPH\s0?"
-.IX Subsection "What is a JAPH?"
-These are the \*(L"just another perl hacker\*(R" signatures that some people
-sign their postings with. Randal Schwartz made these famous. About
-100 of the earlier ones are available from
-http://www.cpan.org/misc/japh .
-.Sh "Where can I get a list of Larry Wall witticisms?"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I get a list of Larry Wall witticisms?"
-Over a hundred quips by Larry, from postings of his or source code,
-can be found at http://www.cpan.org/misc/lwall\-quotes.txt.gz .
-.Sh "How can I convince my sysadmin/supervisor/employees to use version 5/5.6.1/Perl instead of some other language?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I convince my sysadmin/supervisor/employees to use version 5/5.6.1/Perl instead of some other language?"
-If your manager or employees are wary of unsupported software, or
-software which doesn't officially ship with your operating system, you
-might try to appeal to their self\-interest. If programmers can be
-more productive using and utilizing Perl constructs, functionality,
-simplicity, and power, then the typical manager/supervisor/employee
-may be persuaded. Regarding using Perl in general, it's also
-sometimes helpful to point out that delivery times may be reduced
-using Perl compared to other languages.
-.PP
-If you have a project which has a bottleneck, especially in terms of
-translation or testing, Perl almost certainly will provide a viable,
-quick solution. In conjunction with any persuasion effort, you
-should not fail to point out that Perl is used, quite extensively, and
-with extremely reliable and valuable results, at many large computer
-software and hardware companies throughout the world. In fact,
-many Unix vendors now ship Perl by default. Support is usually
-just a news-posting away, if you can't find the answer in the
-\&\fIcomprehensive\fR documentation, including this \s-1FAQ\s0.
-.PP
-See http://www.perl.org/advocacy/ for more information.
-.PP
-If you face reluctance to upgrading from an older version of perl,
-then point out that version 4 is utterly unmaintained and unsupported
-by the Perl Development Team. Another big sell for Perl5 is the large
-number of modules and extensions which greatly reduce development time
-for any given task. Also mention that the difference between version
-4 and version 5 of Perl is like the difference between awk and \*(C+.
-(Well, \s-1OK\s0, maybe it's not quite that distinct, but you get the idea.)
-If you want support and a reasonable guarantee that what you're
-developing will continue to work in the future, then you have to run
-the supported version. As of December 2003 that means running either
-5.8.2 (released in November 2003), or one of the older releases like
-5.6.2 (also released in November 2003; a maintenance release to let perl
-5.6 compile on newer systems as 5.6.1 was released in April 2001) or
-5.005_03 (released in March 1999),
-although 5.004_05 isn't that bad if you \fBabsolutely\fR need such an old
-version (released in April 1999) for stability reasons.
-Anything older than 5.004_05 shouldn't be used.
-.PP
-Of particular note is the massive bug hunt for buffer overflow
-problems that went into the 5.004 release. All releases prior to
-that, including perl4, are considered insecure and should be upgraded
-as soon as possible.
-.PP
-In August 2000 in all Linux distributions a new security problem was
-found in the optional 'suidperl' (not built or installed by default)
-in all the Perl branches 5.6, 5.005, and 5.004, see
-http://www.cpan.org/src/5.0/sperl\-2000\-08\-05/
-Perl maintenance releases 5.6.1 and 5.8.0 have this security hole closed.
-Most, if not all, Linux distribution have patches for this
-vulnerability available, see http://www.linuxsecurity.com/advisories/ ,
-but the most recommendable way is to upgrade to at least Perl 5.6.1.
-.SH "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 Tom Christiansen and Nathan
-Torkington. All rights reserved.
-.PP
-This documentation is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-under the same terms as Perl itself.
-.PP
-Irrespective of its distribution, all code examples here are in the public
-domain. You are permitted and encouraged to use this code and any
-derivatives thereof in your own programs for fun or for profit as you
-see fit. A simple comment in the code giving credit to the \s-1FAQ\s0 would
-be courteous but is not required.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfaq2.1 b/raw/man1/perlfaq2.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a23520..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfaq2.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,732 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFAQ2 1"
-.TH PERLFAQ2 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfaq2 \- Obtaining and Learning about Perl ($Revision: 1.1 $, $Date: 2004/06/16 03:02:15 $)
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-This section of the \s-1FAQ\s0 answers questions about where to find
-source and documentation for Perl, support, and
-related matters.
-.Sh "What machines support Perl? Where do I get it?"
-.IX Subsection "What machines support Perl? Where do I get it?"
-The standard release of Perl (the one maintained by the perl
-development team) is distributed only in source code form. You
-can find this at http://www.cpan.org/src/latest.tar.gz , which
-is in a standard Internet format (a gzipped archive in \s-1POSIX\s0 tar format).
-.PP
-Perl builds and runs on a bewildering number of platforms. Virtually
-all known and current Unix derivatives are supported (Perl's native
-platform), as are other systems like \s-1VMS\s0, \s-1DOS\s0, \s-1OS/2\s0, Windows,
-\&\s-1QNX\s0, BeOS, \s-1OS\s0 X, MPE/iX and the Amiga.
-.PP
-Binary distributions for some proprietary platforms, including
-Apple systems, can be found http://www.cpan.org/ports/ directory.
-Because these are not part of the standard distribution, they may
-and in fact do differ from the base Perl port in a variety of ways.
-You'll have to check their respective release notes to see just
-what the differences are. These differences can be either positive
-(e.g. extensions for the features of the particular platform that
-are not supported in the source release of perl) or negative (e.g.
-might be based upon a less current source release of perl).
-.Sh "How can I get a binary version of Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I get a binary version of Perl?"
-If you don't have a C compiler because your vendor for whatever
-reasons did not include one with your system, the best thing to do is
-grab a binary version of gcc from the net and use that to compile perl
-with. \s-1CPAN\s0 only has binaries for systems that are terribly hard to
-get free compilers for, not for Unix systems.
-.PP
-Some URLs that might help you are:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& http://www.cpan.org/ports/
-\& http://www.perl.com/pub/language/info/software.html
-.Ve
-.PP
-Someone looking for a Perl for Win16 might look to Laszlo Molnar's djgpp
-port in http://www.cpan.org/ports/#msdos , which comes with clear
-installation instructions. A simple installation guide for MS-DOS using
-Ilya Zakharevich's \s-1OS/2\s0 port is available at
-http://www.cs.ruu.nl/%7Epiet/perl5dos.html
-and similarly for Windows 3.1 at http://www.cs.ruu.nl/%7Epiet/perlwin3.html .
-.Sh "I don't have a C compiler on my system. How can I compile perl?"
-.IX Subsection "I don't have a C compiler on my system. How can I compile perl?"
-Since you don't have a C compiler, you're doomed and your vendor
-should be sacrificed to the Sun gods. But that doesn't help you.
-.PP
-What you need to do is get a binary version of gcc for your system
-first. Consult the Usenet FAQs for your operating system for
-information on where to get such a binary version.
-.Sh "I copied the Perl binary from one machine to another, but scripts don't work."
-.IX Subsection "I copied the Perl binary from one machine to another, but scripts don't work."
-That's probably because you forgot libraries, or library paths differ.
-You really should build the whole distribution on the machine it will
-eventually live on, and then type \f(CW\*(C`make install\*(C'\fR. Most other
-approaches are doomed to failure.
-.PP
-One simple way to check that things are in the right place is to print out
-the hard-coded \f(CW at INC\fR that perl looks through for libraries:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& % perl -le 'print for @INC'
-.Ve
-.PP
-If this command lists any paths that don't exist on your system, then you
-may need to move the appropriate libraries to these locations, or create
-symbolic links, aliases, or shortcuts appropriately. \f(CW at INC\fR is also printed as
-part of the output of
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& % perl -V
-.Ve
-.PP
-You might also want to check out
-\&\*(L"How do I keep my own module/library directory?\*(R" in perlfaq8.
-.Sh "I grabbed the sources and tried to compile but gdbm/dynamic loading/malloc/linking/... failed. How do I make it work?"
-.IX Subsection "I grabbed the sources and tried to compile but gdbm/dynamic loading/malloc/linking/... failed. How do I make it work?"
-Read the \fI\s-1INSTALL\s0\fR file, which is part of the source distribution.
-It describes in detail how to cope with most idiosyncrasies that the
-Configure script can't work around for any given system or
-architecture.
-.Sh "What modules and extensions are available for Perl? What is \s-1CPAN\s0? What does CPAN/src/... mean?"
-.IX Subsection "What modules and extensions are available for Perl? What is CPAN? What does CPAN/src/... mean?"
-\&\s-1CPAN\s0 stands for Comprehensive Perl Archive Network, a ~1.2Gb archive
-replicated on nearly 200 machines all over the world. \s-1CPAN\s0 contains
-source code, non-native ports, documentation, scripts, and many
-third-party modules and extensions, designed for everything from
-commercial database interfaces to keyboard/screen control to web
-walking and \s-1CGI\s0 scripts. The master web site for \s-1CPAN\s0 is
-http://www.cpan.org/ and there is the \s-1CPAN\s0 Multiplexer at
-http://www.cpan.org/CPAN.html which will choose a mirror near you
-via \s-1DNS\s0. See http://www.perl.com/CPAN (without a slash at the
-end) for how this process works. Also, http://mirror.cpan.org/
-has a nice interface to the http://www.cpan.org/MIRRORED.BY
-mirror directory.
-.PP
-See the \s-1CPAN\s0 \s-1FAQ\s0 at http://www.cpan.org/misc/cpan\-faq.html for
-answers to the most frequently asked questions about \s-1CPAN\s0
-including how to become a mirror.
-.PP
-CPAN/path/... is a naming convention for files available on \s-1CPAN\s0
-sites. \s-1CPAN\s0 indicates the base directory of a \s-1CPAN\s0 mirror, and the
-rest of the path is the path from that directory to the file. For
-instance, if you're using ftp://ftp.funet.fi/pub/languages/perl/CPAN
-as your \s-1CPAN\s0 site, the file CPAN/misc/japh is downloadable as
-ftp://ftp.funet.fi/pub/languages/perl/CPAN/misc/japh .
-.PP
-Considering that there are close to two thousand existing modules in
-the archive, one probably exists to do nearly anything you can think of.
-Current categories under CPAN/modules/by\-category/ include Perl core
-modules; development support; operating system interfaces; networking,
-devices, and interprocess communication; data type utilities; database
-interfaces; user interfaces; interfaces to other languages; filenames,
-file systems, and file locking; internationalization and locale; world
-wide web support; server and daemon utilities; archiving and
-compression; image manipulation; mail and news; control flow
-utilities; filehandle and I/O; Microsoft Windows modules; and
-miscellaneous modules.
-.PP
-See http://www.cpan.org/modules/00modlist.long.html or
-http://search.cpan.org/ for a more complete list of modules by category.
-.PP
-\&\s-1CPAN\s0 is not affiliated with O'Reilly and Associates.
-.Sh "Is there an \s-1ISO\s0 or \s-1ANSI\s0 certified version of Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "Is there an ISO or ANSI certified version of Perl?"
-Certainly not. Larry expects that he'll be certified before Perl is.
-.Sh "Where can I get information on Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I get information on Perl?"
-The complete Perl documentation is available with the Perl distribution.
-If you have Perl installed locally, you probably have the documentation
-installed as well: type \f(CW\*(C`man perl\*(C'\fR if you're on a system resembling Unix.
-This will lead you to other important man pages, including how to set your
-\&\f(CW$MANPATH\fR. If you're not on a Unix system, access to the documentation
-will be different; for example, documentation might only be in \s-1HTML\s0 format. All
-proper Perl installations have fully-accessible documentation.
-.PP
-You might also try \f(CW\*(C`perldoc perl\*(C'\fR in case your system doesn't
-have a proper man command, or it's been misinstalled. If that doesn't
-work, try looking in /usr/local/lib/perl5/pod for documentation.
-.PP
-If all else fails, consult http://perldoc.cpan.org/ or
-http://www.perldoc.com/ both offer the complete documentation
-in html format.
-.PP
-Many good books have been written about Perl\*(--see the section below
-for more details.
-.PP
-Tutorial documents are included in current or upcoming Perl releases
-include perltoot for objects or perlboot for a beginner's
-approach to objects, perlopentut for file opening semantics,
-perlreftut for managing references, perlretut for regular
-expressions, perlthrtut for threads, perldebtut for debugging,
-and perlxstut for linking C and Perl together. There may be more
-by the time you read this. The following URLs might also be of
-assistance:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& http://perldoc.cpan.org/
-\& http://www.perldoc.com/
-\& http://bookmarks.cpan.org/search.cgi?cat=Training%2FTutorials
-.Ve
-.Sh "What are the Perl newsgroups on Usenet? Where do I post questions?"
-.IX Subsection "What are the Perl newsgroups on Usenet? Where do I post questions?"
-Several groups devoted to the Perl language are on Usenet:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& comp.lang.perl.announce Moderated announcement group
-\& comp.lang.perl.misc High traffic general Perl discussion
-\& comp.lang.perl.moderated Moderated discussion group
-\& comp.lang.perl.modules Use and development of Perl modules
-\& comp.lang.perl.tk Using Tk (and X) from Perl
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& comp.infosystems.www.authoring.cgi Writing CGI scripts for the Web.
-.Ve
-.PP
-Some years ago, comp.lang.perl was divided into those groups, and
-comp.lang.perl itself officially removed. While that group may still
-be found on some news servers, it is unwise to use it, because
-postings there will not appear on news servers which honour the
-official list of group names. Use comp.lang.perl.misc for topics
-which do not have a more-appropriate specific group.
-.PP
-There is also a Usenet gateway to Perl mailing lists sponsored by
-perl.org at nntp://nntp.perl.org , a web interface to the same lists
-at http://nntp.perl.org/group/ and these lists are also available
-under the \f(CW\*(C`perl.*\*(C'\fR hierarchy at http://groups.google.com . Other
-groups are listed at http://lists.perl.org/ ( also known as
-http://lists.cpan.org/ ).
-.PP
-A nice place to ask questions is the PerlMonks site,
-http://www.perlmonks.org/ , or the Perl Beginners mailing list
-http://lists.perl.org/showlist.cgi?name=beginners .
-.PP
-Note that none of the above are supposed to write your code for you:
-asking questions about particular problems or general advice is fine,
-but asking someone to write your code for free is not very cool.
-.Sh "Where should I post source code?"
-.IX Subsection "Where should I post source code?"
-You should post source code to whichever group is most appropriate, but
-feel free to cross-post to comp.lang.perl.misc. If you want to cross-post
-to alt.sources, please make sure it follows their posting standards,
-including setting the Followup-To header line to \s-1NOT\s0 include alt.sources;
-see their \s-1FAQ\s0 ( http://www.faqs.org/faqs/alt\-sources\-intro/ ) for details.
-.PP
-If you're just looking for software, first use Google
-( http://www.google.com ), Google's usenet search interface
-( http://groups.google.com ), and \s-1CPAN\s0 Search ( http://search.cpan.org ).
-This is faster and more productive than just posting a request.
-.Sh "Perl Books"
-.IX Subsection "Perl Books"
-A number of books on Perl and/or \s-1CGI\s0 programming are available. A few of
-these are good, some are \s-1OK\s0, but many aren't worth your money. Tom
-Christiansen maintains a list of these books, some with extensive
-reviews, at http://www.perl.com/perl/critiques/index.html .
-.PP
-The incontestably definitive reference book on Perl, written by
-the creator of Perl, is now (July 2000) in its third edition:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& Programming Perl (the "Camel Book"):
-\& by Larry Wall, Tom Christiansen, and Jon Orwant
-\& 0-596-00027-8 [3rd edition July 2000]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/pperl3/
-\& (English, translations to several languages are also available)
-.Ve
-.PP
-The companion volume to the Camel containing thousands
-of real-world examples, mini\-tutorials, and complete programs is:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& The Perl Cookbook (the "Ram Book"):
-\& by Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington,
-\& with Foreword by Larry Wall
-\& ISBN 1-56592-243-3 [1st Edition August 1998]
-\& http://perl.oreilly.com/catalog/cookbook/
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you're already a seasoned programmer, then the Camel Book might
-suffice for you to learn Perl from. If you're not, check out the
-Llama book:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& Learning Perl (the "Llama Book")
-\& by Randal L. Schwartz and Tom Phoenix
-\& ISBN 0-596-00132-0 [3rd edition July 2001]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lperl3/
-.Ve
-.PP
-And for more advanced information on writing larger programs,
-presented in the same style as the Llama book, continue your education
-with the Alpaca book:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& Learning Perl Objects, References, and Modules (the "Alpaca Book")
-\& by Randal L. Schwartz, with Tom Phoenix (foreword by Damian Conway)
-\& ISBN 0-596-00478-8 [1st edition June 2003]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lrnperlorm/
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you're not an accidental programmer, but a more serious and
-possibly even degreed computer scientist who doesn't need as much
-hand-holding as we try to provide in the Llama, please check out the
-delightful book
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& Perl: The Programmer's Companion
-\& by Nigel Chapman
-\& ISBN 0-471-97563-X [1997, 3rd printing Spring 1998]
-\& http://www.wiley.com/compbooks/catalog/97563-X.htm
-\& http://www.wiley.com/compbooks/chapman/perl/perltpc.html (errata etc)
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you are more at home in Windows the following is available
-(though unfortunately rather dated).
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& Learning Perl on Win32 Systems (the "Gecko Book")
-\& by Randal L. Schwartz, Erik Olson, and Tom Christiansen,
-\& with foreword by Larry Wall
-\& ISBN 1-56592-324-3 [1st edition August 1997]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lperlwin/
-.Ve
-.PP
-Addison-Wesley ( http://www.awlonline.com/ ) and Manning
-( http://www.manning.com/ ) are also publishers of some fine Perl books
-such as \fIObject Oriented Programming with Perl\fR by Damian Conway and
-\&\fINetwork Programming with Perl\fR by Lincoln Stein.
-.PP
-An excellent technical book discounter is Bookpool at
-http://www.bookpool.com/ where a 30% discount or more is not unusual.
-.PP
-What follows is a list of the books that the \s-1FAQ\s0 authors found personally
-useful. Your mileage may (but, we hope, probably won't) vary.
-.PP
-Recommended books on (or mostly on) Perl follow.
-.IP "References" 4
-.IX Item "References"
-.Vb 4
-\& Programming Perl
-\& by Larry Wall, Tom Christiansen, and Jon Orwant
-\& ISBN 0-596-00027-8 [3rd edition July 2000]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/pperl3/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Perl 5 Pocket Reference
-\& by Johan Vromans
-\& ISBN 0-596-00032-4 [3rd edition May 2000]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/perlpr3/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Perl in a Nutshell
-\& by Ellen Siever, Stephan Spainhour, and Nathan Patwardhan
-\& ISBN 1-56592-286-7 [1st edition December 1998]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/perlnut/
-.Ve
-.IP "Tutorials" 4
-.IX Item "Tutorials"
-.Vb 4
-\& Elements of Programming with Perl
-\& by Andrew L. Johnson
-\& ISBN 1-884777-80-5 [1st edition October 1999]
-\& http://www.manning.com/Johnson/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Learning Perl
-\& by Randal L. Schwartz and Tom Phoenix
-\& ISBN 0-596-00132-0 [3rd edition July 2001]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lperl3/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Learning Perl Objects, References, and Modules
-\& by Randal L. Schwartz, with Tom Phoenix (foreword by Damian Conway)
-\& ISBN 0-596-00478-8 [1st edition June 2003]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lrnperlorm/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& Learning Perl on Win32 Systems
-\& by Randal L. Schwartz, Erik Olson, and Tom Christiansen,
-\& with foreword by Larry Wall
-\& ISBN 1-56592-324-3 [1st edition August 1997]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/lperlwin/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& Perl: The Programmer's Companion
-\& by Nigel Chapman
-\& ISBN 0-471-97563-X [1997, 3rd printing Spring 1998]
-\& http://www.wiley.com/compbooks/catalog/97563-X.htm
-\& http://www.wiley.com/compbooks/chapman/perl/perltpc.html (errata etc)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Cross-Platform Perl
-\& by Eric Foster-Johnson
-\& ISBN 1-55851-483-X [2nd edition September 2000]
-\& http://www.pconline.com/~erc/perlbook.htm
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& MacPerl: Power and Ease
-\& by Vicki Brown and Chris Nandor,
-\& with foreword by Matthias Neeracher
-\& ISBN 1-881957-32-2 [1st edition May 1998]
-\& http://www.macperl.com/ptf_book/
-.Ve
-.IP "Task-Oriented" 4
-.IX Item "Task-Oriented"
-.Vb 5
-\& The Perl Cookbook
-\& by Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington
-\& with foreword by Larry Wall
-\& ISBN 1-56592-243-3 [1st edition August 1998]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/cookbook/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Effective Perl Programming
-\& by Joseph Hall
-\& ISBN 0-201-41975-0 [1st edition 1998]
-\& http://www.awl.com/
-.Ve
-.IP "Special Topics" 4
-.IX Item "Special Topics"
-.Vb 4
-\& Mastering Regular Expressions
-\& by Jeffrey E. F. Friedl
-\& ISBN 0-596-00289-0 [2nd edition July 2002]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/regex2/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Network Programming with Perl
-\& by Lincoln Stein
-\& ISBN 0-201-61571-1 [1st edition 2001]
-\& http://www.awlonline.com/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& Object Oriented Perl
-\& Damian Conway
-\& with foreword by Randal L. Schwartz
-\& ISBN 1-884777-79-1 [1st edition August 1999]
-\& http://www.manning.com/Conway/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Data Munging with Perl
-\& Dave Cross
-\& ISBN 1-930110-00-6 [1st edition 2001]
-\& http://www.manning.com/cross
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Mastering Perl/Tk
-\& by Steve Lidie and Nancy Walsh
-\& ISBN 1-56592-716-8 [1st edition January 2002]
-\& http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/mastperltk/
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& Extending and Embedding Perl
-\& by Tim Jenness and Simon Cozens
-\& ISBN 1-930110-82-0 [1st edition August 2002]
-\& http://www.manning.com/jenness
-.Ve
-.Sh "Perl in Magazines"
-.IX Subsection "Perl in Magazines"
-The first (and for a long time, only) periodical devoted to All Things Perl,
-\&\fIThe Perl Journal\fR contains tutorials, demonstrations, case studies,
-announcements, contests, and much more. \fI\s-1TPJ\s0\fR has columns on web
-development, databases, Win32 Perl, graphical programming, regular
-expressions, and networking, and sponsors the Obfuscated Perl Contest
-and the Perl Poetry Contests. Beginning in November 2002, \s-1TPJ\s0 moved to a
-reader-supported monthly e\-zine format in which subscribers can download
-issues as \s-1PDF\s0 documents. For more details on \s-1TPJ\s0, see http://www.tpj.com/
-.PP
-Beyond this, magazines that frequently carry quality articles on
-Perl are \fIThe Perl Review\fR ( http://www.theperlreview.com ),
-\&\fIUnix Review\fR ( http://www.unixreview.com/ ),
-\&\fILinux Magazine\fR ( http://www.linuxmagazine.com/ ),
-and Usenix's newsletter/magazine to its members, \fIlogin:\fR
-( http://www.usenix.org/ )
-.PP
-The Perl columns of Randal L. Schwartz are available on the web at
-http://www.stonehenge.com/merlyn/WebTechniques/ ,
-http://www.stonehenge.com/merlyn/UnixReview/ , and
-http://www.stonehenge.com/merlyn/LinuxMag/ .
-.Sh "Perl on the Net: \s-1FTP\s0 and \s-1WWW\s0 Access"
-.IX Subsection "Perl on the Net: FTP and WWW Access"
-To get the best performance, pick a site from the list at
-http://www.cpan.org/SITES.html . From there you can find the quickest
-site for you.
-.PP
-You may also use xx.cpan.org where \*(L"xx\*(R" is the 2\-letter country code
-for your domain; e.g. Australia would use au.cpan.org. [Note: This
-only applies to countries that host at least one mirror.]
-.Sh "What mailing lists are there for Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "What mailing lists are there for Perl?"
-Most of the major modules (Tk, \s-1CGI\s0, libwww\-perl) have their own
-mailing lists. Consult the documentation that came with the module for
-subscription information.
-.PP
-A comprehensive list of Perl related mailing lists can be found at:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& http://lists.perl.org/
-.Ve
-.Sh "Archives of comp.lang.perl.misc"
-.IX Subsection "Archives of comp.lang.perl.misc"
-The Google search engine now carries archived and searchable newsgroup
-content.
-.PP
-http://groups.google.com/groups?group=comp.lang.perl.misc
-.PP
-If you have a question, you can be sure someone has already asked the
-same question at some point on c.l.p.m. It requires some time and patience
-to sift through all the content but often you will find the answer you
-seek.
-.Sh "Where can I buy a commercial version of Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I buy a commercial version of Perl?"
-In a real sense, Perl already \fIis\fR commercial software: it has a license
-that you can grab and carefully read to your manager. It is distributed
-in releases and comes in well-defined packages. There is a very large
-user community and an extensive literature. The comp.lang.perl.*
-newsgroups and several of the mailing lists provide free answers to your
-questions in near real\-time. Perl has traditionally been supported by
-Larry, scores of software designers and developers, and myriad
-programmers, all working for free to create a useful thing to make life
-better for everyone.
-.PP
-However, these answers may not suffice for managers who require a
-purchase order from a company whom they can sue should anything go awry.
-Or maybe they need very serious hand-holding and contractual obligations.
-Shrink-wrapped CDs with Perl on them are available from several sources if
-that will help. For example, many Perl books include a distribution of Perl,
-as do the O'Reilly Perl Resource Kits (in both the Unix flavor
-and in the proprietary Microsoft flavor); the free Unix distributions
-also all come with Perl.
-.PP
-Alternatively, you can purchase commercial incidence based support
-through the Perl Clinic. The following is a commercial from them:
-.PP
-"The Perl Clinic is a commercial Perl support service operated by
-ActiveState Tool Corp. and The Ingram Group. The operators have many
-years of in-depth experience with Perl applications and Perl internals
-on a wide range of platforms.
-.PP
-\&\*(L"Through our group of highly experienced and well-trained support engineers,
-we will put our best effort into understanding your problem, providing an
-explanation of the situation, and a recommendation on how to proceed.\*(R"
-.PP
-Contact The Perl Clinic at
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& www.PerlClinic.com
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& North America Pacific Standard Time (GMT-8)
-\& Tel: 1 604 606-4611 hours 8am-6pm
-\& Fax: 1 604 606-4640
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& Europe (GMT)
-\& Tel: 00 44 1483 862814
-\& Fax: 00 44 1483 862801
-.Ve
-.PP
-See also www.perl.com for updates on tutorials, training, and support.
-.Sh "Where do I send bug reports?"
-.IX Subsection "Where do I send bug reports?"
-If you are reporting a bug in the perl interpreter or the modules
-shipped with Perl, use the \fIperlbug\fR program in the Perl distribution or
-mail your report to perlbug at perl.org .
-.PP
-If you are posting a bug with a non-standard port (see the answer to
-\&\*(L"What platforms is Perl available for?\*(R"), a binary distribution, or a
-non-standard module (such as Tk, \s-1CGI\s0, etc), then please see the
-documentation that came with it to determine the correct place to post
-bugs.
-.PP
-Read the \fIperlbug\fR\|(1) man page (perl5.004 or later) for more information.
-.Sh "What is perl.com? Perl Mongers? pm.org? perl.org? cpan.org?"
-.IX Subsection "What is perl.com? Perl Mongers? pm.org? perl.org? cpan.org?"
-The Perl Home Page at http://www.perl.com/ is currently hosted by
-The O'Reilly Network, a subsidiary of O'Reilly and Associates.
-.PP
-Perl Mongers is an advocacy organization for the Perl language which
-maintains the web site http://www.perl.org/ as a general advocacy
-site for the Perl language.
-.PP
-Perl Mongers uses the pm.org domain for services related to Perl user
-groups, including the hosting of mailing lists and web sites. See the
-Perl user group web site at http://www.pm.org/ for more information about
-joining, starting, or requesting services for a Perl user group.
-.PP
-Perl Mongers also maintain the perl.org domain to provide general
-support services to the Perl community, including the hosting of mailing
-lists, web sites, and other services. The web site
-http://www.perl.org/ is a general advocacy site for the Perl language,
-and there are many other sub-domains for special topics, such as
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& http://bugs.perl.org/
-\& http://history.perl.org/
-\& http://lists.perl.org/
-\& http://use.perl.org/
-.Ve
-.PP
-http://www.cpan.org/ is the Comprehensive Perl Archive Network,
-a replicated worlwide repository of Perl software, see
-the \fIWhat is \s-1CPAN\s0?\fR question earlier in this document.
-.SH "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1997\-2001 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington.
-All rights reserved.
-.PP
-This documentation is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-under the same terms as Perl itself.
-.PP
-Irrespective of its distribution, all code examples here are in the public
-domain. You are permitted and encouraged to use this code and any
-derivatives thereof in your own programs for fun or for profit as you
-see fit. A simple comment in the code giving credit to the \s-1FAQ\s0 would
-be courteous but is not required.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfaq3.1 b/raw/man1/perlfaq3.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b282520..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfaq3.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1102 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFAQ3 1"
-.TH PERLFAQ3 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfaq3 \- Programming Tools ($Revision: 1.1 $, $Date: 2004/06/16 03:02:15 $)
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-This section of the \s-1FAQ\s0 answers questions related to programmer tools
-and programming support.
-.Sh "How do I do (anything)?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I do (anything)?"
-Have you looked at \s-1CPAN\s0 (see perlfaq2)? The chances are that
-someone has already written a module that can solve your problem.
-Have you read the appropriate manpages? Here's a brief index:
-.PP
-.Vb 12
-\& Basics perldata, perlvar, perlsyn, perlop, perlsub
-\& Execution perlrun, perldebug
-\& Functions perlfunc
-\& Objects perlref, perlmod, perlobj, perltie
-\& Data Structures perlref, perllol, perldsc
-\& Modules perlmod, perlmodlib, perlsub
-\& Regexes perlre, perlfunc, perlop, perllocale
-\& Moving to perl5 perltrap, perl
-\& Linking w/C perlxstut, perlxs, perlcall, perlguts, perlembed
-\& Various http://www.cpan.org/misc/olddoc/FMTEYEWTK.tgz
-\& (not a man-page but still useful, a collection
-\& of various essays on Perl techniques)
-.Ve
-.PP
-A crude table of contents for the Perl manpage set is found in perltoc.
-.Sh "How can I use Perl interactively?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I use Perl interactively?"
-The typical approach uses the Perl debugger, described in the
-\&\fIperldebug\fR\|(1) manpage, on an ``empty'' program, like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl -de 42
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now just type in any legal Perl code, and it will be immediately
-evaluated. You can also examine the symbol table, get stack
-backtraces, check variable values, set breakpoints, and other
-operations typically found in symbolic debuggers.
-.Sh "Is there a Perl shell?"
-.IX Subsection "Is there a Perl shell?"
-The psh (Perl sh) is currently at version 1.8. The Perl Shell is a
-shell that combines the interactive nature of a Unix shell with the
-power of Perl. The goal is a full featured shell that behaves as
-expected for normal shell activity and uses Perl syntax and
-functionality for control-flow statements and other things.
-You can get psh at http://www.focusresearch.com/gregor/psh/ .
-.PP
-Zoidberg is a similar project and provides a shell written in perl,
-configured in perl and operated in perl. It is intended as a login shell
-and development environment. It can be found at http://zoidberg.sf.net/
-or your local \s-1CPAN\s0 mirror.
-.PP
-The Shell.pm module (distributed with Perl) makes Perl try commands
-which aren't part of the Perl language as shell commands. perlsh
-from the source distribution is simplistic and uninteresting, but
-may still be what you want.
-.Sh "How do I find which modules are installed on my system?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I find which modules are installed on my system?"
-You can use the ExtUtils::Installed module to show all
-installed distributions, although it can take awhile to do
-its magic. The standard library which comes with Perl just
-shows up as \*(L"Perl\*(R" (although you can get those with
-Module::CoreList).
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use ExtUtils::Installed;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& my $inst = ExtUtils::Installed->new();
-\& my @modules = $inst->modules();
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you want a list of all of the Perl module filenames, you
-can use File::Find::Rule.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use File::Find::Rule;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& my @files = File::Find::Rule->file()->name( '*.pm' )->in( @INC );
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you do not have that module, you can do the same thing
-with File::Find which is part of the standard library.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use File::Find;
-\& my @files;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& find sub { push @files, $File::Find::name if -f _ && /\e.pm$/ },
-\& @INC;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print join "\en", @files;
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you simply need to quickly check to see if a module is
-available, you can check for its documentation. If you can
-read the documentation the module is most likely installed.
-If you cannot read the documentation, the module might not
-have any (in rare cases).
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& prompt% perldoc Module::Name
-.Ve
-.PP
-You can also try to include the module in a one-liner to see if
-perl finds it.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl -MModule::Name -e1
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I debug my Perl programs?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I debug my Perl programs?"
-Have you tried \f(CW\*(C`use warnings\*(C'\fR or used \f(CW\*(C`\-w\*(C'\fR? They enable warnings
-to detect dubious practices.
-.PP
-Have you tried \f(CW\*(C`use strict\*(C'\fR? It prevents you from using symbolic
-references, makes you predeclare any subroutines that you call as bare
-words, and (probably most importantly) forces you to predeclare your
-variables with \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`use vars\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-Did you check the return values of each and every system call? The operating
-system (and thus Perl) tells you whether they worked, and if not
-why.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& open(FH, "> /etc/cantwrite")
-\& or die "Couldn't write to /etc/cantwrite: $!\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Did you read perltrap? It's full of gotchas for old and new Perl
-programmers and even has sections for those of you who are upgrading
-from languages like \fIawk\fR and \fIC\fR.
-.PP
-Have you tried the Perl debugger, described in perldebug? You can
-step through your program and see what it's doing and thus work out
-why what it's doing isn't what it should be doing.
-.Sh "How do I profile my Perl programs?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I profile my Perl programs?"
-You should get the Devel::DProf module from the standard distribution
-(or separately on \s-1CPAN\s0) and also use Benchmark.pm from the standard
-distribution. The Benchmark module lets you time specific portions of
-your code, while Devel::DProf gives detailed breakdowns of where your
-code spends its time.
-.PP
-Here's a sample use of Benchmark:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use Benchmark;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @junk = `cat /etc/motd`;
-\& $count = 10_000;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& timethese($count, {
-\& 'map' => sub { my @a = @junk;
-\& map { s/a/b/ } @a;
-\& return @a },
-\& 'for' => sub { my @a = @junk;
-\& for (@a) { s/a/b/ };
-\& return @a },
-\& });
-.Ve
-.PP
-This is what it prints (on one machine\*(--your results will be dependent
-on your hardware, operating system, and the load on your machine):
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& Benchmark: timing 10000 iterations of for, map...
-\& for: 4 secs ( 3.97 usr 0.01 sys = 3.98 cpu)
-\& map: 6 secs ( 4.97 usr 0.00 sys = 4.97 cpu)
-.Ve
-.PP
-Be aware that a good benchmark is very hard to write. It only tests the
-data you give it and proves little about the differing complexities
-of contrasting algorithms.
-.Sh "How do I cross-reference my Perl programs?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I cross-reference my Perl programs?"
-The B::Xref module can be used to generate cross-reference reports
-for Perl programs.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl -MO=Xref[,OPTIONS] scriptname.plx
-.Ve
-.Sh "Is there a pretty-printer (formatter) for Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "Is there a pretty-printer (formatter) for Perl?"
-Perltidy is a Perl script which indents and reformats Perl scripts
-to make them easier to read by trying to follow the rules of the
-perlstyle. If you write Perl scripts, or spend much time reading
-them, you will probably find it useful. It is available at
-http://perltidy.sourceforge.net
-.PP
-Of course, if you simply follow the guidelines in perlstyle,
-you shouldn't need to reformat. The habit of formatting your code
-as you write it will help prevent bugs. Your editor can and should
-help you with this. The perl-mode or newer cperl-mode for emacs
-can provide remarkable amounts of help with most (but not all)
-code, and even less programmable editors can provide significant
-assistance. Tom Christiansen and many other \s-1VI\s0 users swear by
-the following settings in vi and its clones:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& set ai sw=4
-\& map! ^O {^M}^[O^T
-.Ve
-.PP
-Put that in your \fI.exrc\fR file (replacing the caret characters
-with control characters) and away you go. In insert mode, ^T is
-for indenting, ^D is for undenting, and ^O is for blockdenting\*(--
-as it were. A more complete example, with comments, can be found at
-http://www.cpan.org/authors/id/TOMC/scripts/toms.exrc.gz
-.PP
-The a2ps http://www\-inf.enst.fr/%7Edemaille/a2ps/black+white.ps.gz does
-lots of things related to generating nicely printed output of
-documents, as does enscript at http://people.ssh.fi/mtr/genscript/ .
-.Sh "Is there a ctags for Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "Is there a ctags for Perl?"
-Recent versions of ctags do much more than older versions did.
-\&\s-1EXUBERANT\s0 \s-1CTAGS\s0 is available from http://ctags.sourceforge.net/
-and does a good job of making tags files for perl code.
-.PP
-There is also a simple one at
-http://www.cpan.org/authors/id/TOMC/scripts/ptags.gz which may do
-the trick. It can be easy to hack this into what you want.
-.Sh "Is there an \s-1IDE\s0 or Windows Perl Editor?"
-.IX Subsection "Is there an IDE or Windows Perl Editor?"
-Perl programs are just plain text, so any editor will do.
-.PP
-If you're on Unix, you already have an IDE\*(--Unix itself. The \s-1UNIX\s0
-philosophy is the philosophy of several small tools that each do one
-thing and do it well. It's like a carpenter's toolbox.
-.PP
-If you want an \s-1IDE\s0, check the following:
-.IP "Komodo" 4
-.IX Item "Komodo"
-ActiveState's cross-platform (as of April 2001 Windows and Linux),
-multi-language \s-1IDE\s0 has Perl support, including a regular expression
-debugger and remote debugging
-( http://www.ActiveState.com/Products/Komodo/index.html ). (Visual
-Perl, a Visual Studio.NET plug-in is currently (early 2001) in beta
-( http://www.ActiveState.com/Products/VisualPerl/index.html )).
-.IP "The Object System" 4
-.IX Item "The Object System"
-( http://www.castlelink.co.uk/object_system/ ) is a Perl web
-applications development \s-1IDE\s0, apparently for any platform
-that runs Perl.
-.IP "Open Perl \s-1IDE\s0" 4
-.IX Item "Open Perl IDE"
-( http://open\-perl\-ide.sourceforge.net/ )
-Open Perl \s-1IDE\s0 is an integrated development environment for writing
-and debugging Perl scripts with ActiveState's ActivePerl distribution
-under Windows 95/98/NT/2000.
-.IP "PerlBuilder" 4
-.IX Item "PerlBuilder"
-( http://www.solutionsoft.com/perl.htm ) is an integrated development
-environment for Windows that supports Perl development.
-.IP "visiPerl+" 4
-.IX Item "visiPerl+"
-( http://helpconsulting.net/visiperl/ )
-From Help Consulting, for Windows.
-.IP "OptiPerl" 4
-.IX Item "OptiPerl"
-( http://www.optiperl.com/ ) is a Windows \s-1IDE\s0 with simulated \s-1CGI\s0
-environment, including debugger and syntax highlighting editor.
-.PP
-For editors: if you're on Unix you probably have vi or a vi clone already,
-and possibly an emacs too, so you may not need to download anything.
-In any emacs the cperl-mode (M\-x cperl\-mode) gives you perhaps the
-best available Perl editing mode in any editor.
-.PP
-If you are using Windows, you can use any editor that lets
-you work with plain text, such as NotePad or WordPad. Word
-processors, such as Microsoft Word or WordPerfect, typically
-do not work since they insert all sorts of behind-the-scenes
-information, although some allow you to save files as \*(L"Text
-Only\*(R". You can also download text editors designed
-specifically for programming, such as Textpad
-( http://www.textpad.com/ ) and UltraEdit
-( http://www.ultraedit.com/ ), among others.
-.PP
-If you are using MacOS, the same concerns apply. MacPerl
-(for Classic environments) comes with a simple editor.
-Popular external editors are BBEdit ( http://www.bbedit.com/ )
-or Alpha ( http://www.kelehers.org/alpha/ ). MacOS X users can
-use Unix editors as well.
-.IP "\s-1GNU\s0 Emacs" 4
-.IX Item "GNU Emacs"
-http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/windows/ntemacs.html
-.IP "MicroEMACS" 4
-.IX Item "MicroEMACS"
-http://www.microemacs.de/
-.IP "XEmacs" 4
-.IX Item "XEmacs"
-http://www.xemacs.org/Download/index.html
-.IP "Jed" 4
-.IX Item "Jed"
-http://space.mit.edu/~davis/jed/
-.PP
-or a vi clone such as
-.IP "Elvis" 4
-.IX Item "Elvis"
-ftp://ftp.cs.pdx.edu/pub/elvis/ http://www.fh\-wedel.de/elvis/
-.IP "Vile" 4
-.IX Item "Vile"
-http://dickey.his.com/vile/vile.html
-.IP "Vim" 4
-.IX Item "Vim"
-http://www.vim.org/
-.PP
-For vi lovers in general, Windows or elsewhere:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& http://www.thomer.com/thomer/vi/vi.html
-.Ve
-.PP
-nvi ( http://www.bostic.com/vi/ , available from \s-1CPAN\s0 in src/misc/) is
-yet another vi clone, unfortunately not available for Windows, but in
-\&\s-1UNIX\s0 platforms you might be interested in trying it out, firstly because
-strictly speaking it is not a vi clone, it is the real vi, or the new
-incarnation of it, and secondly because you can embed Perl inside it
-to use Perl as the scripting language. nvi is not alone in this,
-though: at least also vim and vile offer an embedded Perl.
-.PP
-The following are Win32 multilanguage editor/IDESs that support Perl:
-.IP "Codewright" 4
-.IX Item "Codewright"
-http://www.starbase.com/
-.IP "MultiEdit" 4
-.IX Item "MultiEdit"
-http://www.MultiEdit.com/
-.IP "SlickEdit" 4
-.IX Item "SlickEdit"
-http://www.slickedit.com/
-.PP
-There is also a toyedit Text widget based editor written in Perl
-that is distributed with the Tk module on \s-1CPAN\s0. The ptkdb
-( http://world.std.com/~aep/ptkdb/ ) is a Perl/tk based debugger that
-acts as a development environment of sorts. Perl Composer
-( http://perlcomposer.sourceforge.net/ ) is an \s-1IDE\s0 for Perl/Tk
-\&\s-1GUI\s0 creation.
-.PP
-In addition to an editor/IDE you might be interested in a more
-powerful shell environment for Win32. Your options include
-.IP "Bash" 4
-.IX Item "Bash"
-from the Cygwin package ( http://sources.redhat.com/cygwin/ )
-.IP "Ksh" 4
-.IX Item "Ksh"
-from the \s-1MKS\s0 Toolkit ( http://www.mks.com/ ), or the Bourne shell of
-the U/WIN environment ( http://www.research.att.com/sw/tools/uwin/ )
-.IP "Tcsh" 4
-.IX Item "Tcsh"
-ftp://ftp.astron.com/pub/tcsh/ , see also
-http://www.primate.wisc.edu/software/csh\-tcsh\-book/
-.IP "Zsh" 4
-.IX Item "Zsh"
-ftp://ftp.blarg.net/users/amol/zsh/ , see also http://www.zsh.org/
-.PP
-\&\s-1MKS\s0 and U/WIN are commercial (U/WIN is free for educational and
-research purposes), Cygwin is covered by the \s-1GNU\s0 Public License (but
-that shouldn't matter for Perl use). The Cygwin, \s-1MKS\s0, and U/WIN all
-contain (in addition to the shells) a comprehensive set of standard
-\&\s-1UNIX\s0 toolkit utilities.
-.PP
-If you're transferring text files between Unix and Windows using \s-1FTP\s0
-be sure to transfer them in \s-1ASCII\s0 mode so the ends of lines are
-appropriately converted.
-.PP
-On Mac \s-1OS\s0 the MacPerl Application comes with a simple 32k text editor
-that behaves like a rudimentary \s-1IDE\s0. In contrast to the MacPerl Application
-the \s-1MPW\s0 Perl tool can make use of the \s-1MPW\s0 Shell itself as an editor (with
-no 32k limit).
-.IP "BBEdit and BBEdit Lite" 4
-.IX Item "BBEdit and BBEdit Lite"
-are text editors for Mac \s-1OS\s0 that have a Perl sensitivity mode
-( http://web.barebones.com/ ).
-.IP "Alpha" 4
-.IX Item "Alpha"
-is an editor, written and extensible in Tcl, that nonetheless has
-built in support for several popular markup and programming languages
-including Perl and \s-1HTML\s0 ( http://alpha.olm.net/ ).
-.PP
-Pepper and Pe are programming language sensitive text editors for Mac
-\&\s-1OS\s0 X and BeOS respectively ( http://www.hekkelman.com/ ).
-.Sh "Where can I get Perl macros for vi?"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I get Perl macros for vi?"
-For a complete version of Tom Christiansen's vi configuration file,
-see http://www.cpan.org/authors/Tom_Christiansen/scripts/toms.exrc.gz ,
-the standard benchmark file for vi emulators. The file runs best with nvi,
-the current version of vi out of Berkeley, which incidentally can be built
-with an embedded Perl interpreter\*(--see http://www.cpan.org/src/misc/ .
-.Sh "Where can I get perl-mode for emacs?"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I get perl-mode for emacs?"
-Since Emacs version 19 patchlevel 22 or so, there have been both a
-perl\-mode.el and support for the Perl debugger built in. These should
-come with the standard Emacs 19 distribution.
-.PP
-In the Perl source directory, you'll find a directory called \*(L"emacs\*(R",
-which contains a cperl-mode that color-codes keywords, provides
-context-sensitive help, and other nifty things.
-.PP
-Note that the perl-mode of emacs will have fits with \f(CW"main'foo"\fR
-(single quote), and mess up the indentation and highlighting. You
-are probably using \f(CW"main::foo"\fR in new Perl code anyway, so this
-shouldn't be an issue.
-.Sh "How can I use curses with Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I use curses with Perl?"
-The Curses module from \s-1CPAN\s0 provides a dynamically loadable object
-module interface to a curses library. A small demo can be found at the
-directory http://www.cpan.org/authors/Tom_Christiansen/scripts/rep.gz ;
-this program repeats a command and updates the screen as needed, rendering
-\&\fBrep ps axu\fR similar to \fBtop\fR.
-.Sh "How can I use X or Tk with Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I use X or Tk with Perl?"
-Tk is a completely Perl\-based, object-oriented interface to the Tk toolkit
-that doesn't force you to use Tcl just to get at Tk. Sx is an interface
-to the Athena Widget set. Both are available from \s-1CPAN\s0. See the
-directory http://www.cpan.org/modules/by\-category/08_User_Interfaces/
-.PP
-Invaluable for Perl/Tk programming are the Perl/Tk \s-1FAQ\s0 at
-http://w4.lns.cornell.edu/%7Epvhp/ptk/ptkTOC.html , the Perl/Tk Reference
-Guide available at
-http://www.cpan.org/authors/Stephen_O_Lidie/ , and the
-online manpages at
-http://www\-users.cs.umn.edu/%7Eamundson/perl/perltk/toc.html .
-.Sh "How can I generate simple menus without using \s-1CGI\s0 or Tk?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I generate simple menus without using CGI or Tk?"
-The http://www.cpan.org/authors/id/SKUNZ/perlmenu.v4.0.tar.gz
-module, which is curses\-based, can help with this.
-.Sh "How can I make my Perl program run faster?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I make my Perl program run faster?"
-The best way to do this is to come up with a better algorithm. This
-can often make a dramatic difference. Jon Bentley's book
-\&\fIProgramming Pearls\fR (that's not a misspelling!) has some good tips
-on optimization, too. Advice on benchmarking boils down to: benchmark
-and profile to make sure you're optimizing the right part, look for
-better algorithms instead of microtuning your code, and when all else
-fails consider just buying faster hardware. You will probably want to
-read the answer to the earlier question ``How do I profile my Perl
-programs?'' if you haven't done so already.
-.PP
-A different approach is to autoload seldom-used Perl code. See the
-AutoSplit and AutoLoader modules in the standard distribution for
-that. Or you could locate the bottleneck and think about writing just
-that part in C, the way we used to take bottlenecks in C code and
-write them in assembler. Similar to rewriting in C, modules that have
-critical sections can be written in C (for instance, the \s-1PDL\s0 module
-from \s-1CPAN\s0).
-.PP
-If you're currently linking your perl executable to a shared
-\&\fIlibc.so\fR, you can often gain a 10\-25% performance benefit by
-rebuilding it to link with a static libc.a instead. This will make a
-bigger perl executable, but your Perl programs (and programmers) may
-thank you for it. See the \fI\s-1INSTALL\s0\fR file in the source distribution
-for more information.
-.PP
-The undump program was an ancient attempt to speed up Perl program by
-storing the already-compiled form to disk. This is no longer a viable
-option, as it only worked on a few architectures, and wasn't a good
-solution anyway.
-.Sh "How can I make my Perl program take less memory?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I make my Perl program take less memory?"
-When it comes to time-space tradeoffs, Perl nearly always prefers to
-throw memory at a problem. Scalars in Perl use more memory than
-strings in C, arrays take more than that, and hashes use even more. While
-there's still a lot to be done, recent releases have been addressing
-these issues. For example, as of 5.004, duplicate hash keys are
-shared amongst all hashes using them, so require no reallocation.
-.PP
-In some cases, using \fIsubstr()\fR or \fIvec()\fR to simulate arrays can be
-highly beneficial. For example, an array of a thousand booleans will
-take at least 20,000 bytes of space, but it can be turned into one
-125\-byte bit vector\*(--a considerable memory savings. The standard
-Tie::SubstrHash module can also help for certain types of data
-structure. If you're working with specialist data structures
-(matrices, for instance) modules that implement these in C may use
-less memory than equivalent Perl modules.
-.PP
-Another thing to try is learning whether your Perl was compiled with
-the system malloc or with Perl's builtin malloc. Whichever one it
-is, try using the other one and see whether this makes a difference.
-Information about malloc is in the \fI\s-1INSTALL\s0\fR file in the source
-distribution. You can find out whether you are using perl's malloc by
-typing \f(CW\*(C`perl \-V:usemymalloc\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-Of course, the best way to save memory is to not do anything to waste
-it in the first place. Good programming practices can go a long way
-toward this:
-.IP "* Don't slurp!" 4
-.IX Item "Don't slurp!"
-Don't read an entire file into memory if you can process it line
-by line. Or more concretely, use a loop like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& #
-\& # Good Idea
-\& #
-\& while (<FILE>) {
-\& # ...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-instead of this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& #
-\& # Bad Idea
-\& #
-\& @data = <FILE>;
-\& foreach (@data) {
-\& # ...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-When the files you're processing are small, it doesn't much matter which
-way you do it, but it makes a huge difference when they start getting
-larger.
-.IP "* Use map and grep selectively" 4
-.IX Item "Use map and grep selectively"
-Remember that both map and grep expect a \s-1LIST\s0 argument, so doing this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @wanted = grep {/pattern/} <FILE>;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-will cause the entire file to be slurped. For large files, it's better
-to loop:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& while (<FILE>) {
-\& push(@wanted, $_) if /pattern/;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "* Avoid unnecessary quotes and stringification" 4
-.IX Item "Avoid unnecessary quotes and stringification"
-Don't quote large strings unless absolutely necessary:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& my $copy = "$large_string";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-makes 2 copies of \f(CW$large_string\fR (one for \f(CW$copy\fR and another for the
-quotes), whereas
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& my $copy = $large_string;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-only makes one copy.
-.Sp
-Ditto for stringifying large arrays:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& {
-\& local $, = "\en";
-\& print @big_array;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-is much more memory-efficient than either
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print join "\en", @big_array;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& {
-\& local $" = "\en";
-\& print "@big_array";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "* Pass by reference" 4
-.IX Item "Pass by reference"
-Pass arrays and hashes by reference, not by value. For one thing, it's
-the only way to pass multiple lists or hashes (or both) in a single
-call/return. It also avoids creating a copy of all the contents. This
-requires some judgment, however, because any changes will be propagated
-back to the original data. If you really want to mangle (er, modify) a
-copy, you'll have to sacrifice the memory needed to make one.
-.IP "* Tie large variables to disk." 4
-.IX Item "Tie large variables to disk."
-For \*(L"big\*(R" data stores (i.e. ones that exceed available memory) consider
-using one of the \s-1DB\s0 modules to store it on disk instead of in \s-1RAM\s0. This
-will incur a penalty in access time, but that's probably better than
-causing your hard disk to thrash due to massive swapping.
-.Sh "Is it safe to return a reference to local or lexical data?"
-.IX Subsection "Is it safe to return a reference to local or lexical data?"
-Yes. Perl's garbage collection system takes care of this so
-everything works out right.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& sub makeone {
-\& my @a = ( 1 .. 10 );
-\& return \e at a;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& for ( 1 .. 10 ) {
-\& push @many, makeone();
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print $many[4][5], "\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print "@many\en";
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I free an array or hash so my program shrinks?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I free an array or hash so my program shrinks?"
-You usually can't. On most operating systems, memory
-allocated to a program can never be returned to the system.
-That's why long-running programs sometimes re-exec
-themselves. Some operating systems (notably, systems that
-use \fImmap\fR\|(2) for allocating large chunks of memory) can
-reclaim memory that is no longer used, but on such systems,
-perl must be configured and compiled to use the \s-1OS\s0's malloc,
-not perl's.
-.PP
-However, judicious use of \fImy()\fR on your variables will help make sure
-that they go out of scope so that Perl can free up that space for
-use in other parts of your program. A global variable, of course, never
-goes out of scope, so you can't get its space automatically reclaimed,
-although \fIundef()\fRing and/or \fIdelete()\fRing it will achieve the same effect.
-In general, memory allocation and de-allocation isn't something you can
-or should be worrying about much in Perl, but even this capability
-(preallocation of data types) is in the works.
-.Sh "How can I make my \s-1CGI\s0 script more efficient?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I make my CGI script more efficient?"
-Beyond the normal measures described to make general Perl programs
-faster or smaller, a \s-1CGI\s0 program has additional issues. It may be run
-several times per second. Given that each time it runs it will need
-to be re-compiled and will often allocate a megabyte or more of system
-memory, this can be a killer. Compiling into C \fBisn't going to help
-you\fR because the process start-up overhead is where the bottleneck is.
-.PP
-There are two popular ways to avoid this overhead. One solution
-involves running the Apache \s-1HTTP\s0 server (available from
-http://www.apache.org/ ) with either of the mod_perl or mod_fastcgi
-plugin modules.
-.PP
-With mod_perl and the Apache::Registry module (distributed with
-mod_perl), httpd will run with an embedded Perl interpreter which
-pre-compiles your script and then executes it within the same address
-space without forking. The Apache extension also gives Perl access to
-the internal server \s-1API\s0, so modules written in Perl can do just about
-anything a module written in C can. For more on mod_perl, see
-http://perl.apache.org/
-.PP
-With the \s-1FCGI\s0 module (from \s-1CPAN\s0) and the mod_fastcgi
-module (available from http://www.fastcgi.com/ ) each of your Perl
-programs becomes a permanent \s-1CGI\s0 daemon process.
-.PP
-Both of these solutions can have far-reaching effects on your system
-and on the way you write your \s-1CGI\s0 programs, so investigate them with
-care.
-.PP
-See http://www.cpan.org/modules/by\-category/15_World_Wide_Web_HTML_HTTP_CGI/ .
-.PP
-A non\-free, commercial product, ``The Velocity Engine for Perl'',
-(http://www.binevolve.com/ or http://www.binevolve.com/velocigen/ )
-might also be worth looking at. It will allow you to increase the
-performance of your Perl programs, running programs up to 25 times
-faster than normal \s-1CGI\s0 Perl when running in persistent Perl mode or 4
-to 5 times faster without any modification to your existing \s-1CGI\s0
-programs. Fully functional evaluation copies are available from the
-web site.
-.Sh "How can I hide the source for my Perl program?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I hide the source for my Perl program?"
-Delete it. :\-) Seriously, there are a number of (mostly
-unsatisfactory) solutions with varying levels of ``security''.
-.PP
-First of all, however, you \fIcan't\fR take away read permission, because
-the source code has to be readable in order to be compiled and
-interpreted. (That doesn't mean that a \s-1CGI\s0 script's source is
-readable by people on the web, though\*(--only by people with access to
-the filesystem.) So you have to leave the permissions at the socially
-friendly 0755 level.
-.PP
-Some people regard this as a security problem. If your program does
-insecure things and relies on people not knowing how to exploit those
-insecurities, it is not secure. It is often possible for someone to
-determine the insecure things and exploit them without viewing the
-source. Security through obscurity, the name for hiding your bugs
-instead of fixing them, is little security indeed.
-.PP
-You can try using encryption via source filters (Starting from Perl
-5.8 the Filter::Simple and Filter::Util::Call modules are included in
-the standard distribution), but any decent programmer will be able to
-decrypt it. You can try using the byte code compiler and interpreter
-described below, but the curious might still be able to de-compile it.
-You can try using the native-code compiler described below, but
-crackers might be able to disassemble it. These pose varying degrees
-of difficulty to people wanting to get at your code, but none can
-definitively conceal it (true of every language, not just Perl).
-.PP
-It is very easy to recover the source of Perl programs. You simply
-feed the program to the perl interpreter and use the modules in
-the B:: hierarchy. The B::Deparse module should be able to
-defeat most attempts to hide source. Again, this is not
-unique to Perl.
-.PP
-If you're concerned about people profiting from your code, then the
-bottom line is that nothing but a restrictive license will give you
-legal security. License your software and pepper it with threatening
-statements like ``This is unpublished proprietary software of \s-1XYZ\s0 Corp.
-Your access to it does not give you permission to use it blah blah
-blah.'' We are not lawyers, of course, so you should see a lawyer if
-you want to be sure your license's wording will stand up in court.
-.Sh "How can I compile my Perl program into byte code or C?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I compile my Perl program into byte code or C?"
-Malcolm Beattie has written a multifunction backend compiler,
-available from \s-1CPAN\s0, that can do both these things. It is included
-in the perl5.005 release, but is still considered experimental.
-This means it's fun to play with if you're a programmer but not
-really for people looking for turn-key solutions.
-.PP
-Merely compiling into C does not in and of itself guarantee that your
-code will run very much faster. That's because except for lucky cases
-where a lot of native type inferencing is possible, the normal Perl
-run-time system is still present and so your program will take just as
-long to run and be just as big. Most programs save little more than
-compilation time, leaving execution no more than 10\-30% faster. A few
-rare programs actually benefit significantly (even running several times
-faster), but this takes some tweaking of your code.
-.PP
-You'll probably be astonished to learn that the current version of the
-compiler generates a compiled form of your script whose executable is
-just as big as the original perl executable, and then some. That's
-because as currently written, all programs are prepared for a full
-\&\fIeval()\fR statement. You can tremendously reduce this cost by building a
-shared \fIlibperl.so\fR library and linking against that. See the
-\&\fI\s-1INSTALL\s0\fR podfile in the Perl source distribution for details. If
-you link your main perl binary with this, it will make it minuscule.
-For example, on one author's system, \fI/usr/bin/perl\fR is only 11k in
-size!
-.PP
-In general, the compiler will do nothing to make a Perl program smaller,
-faster, more portable, or more secure. In fact, it can make your
-situation worse. The executable will be bigger, your \s-1VM\s0 system may take
-longer to load the whole thing, the binary is fragile and hard to fix,
-and compilation never stopped software piracy in the form of crackers,
-viruses, or bootleggers. The real advantage of the compiler is merely
-packaging, and once you see the size of what it makes (well, unless
-you use a shared \fIlibperl.so\fR), you'll probably want a complete
-Perl install anyway.
-.Sh "How can I compile Perl into Java?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I compile Perl into Java?"
-You can also integrate Java and Perl with the
-Perl Resource Kit from O'Reilly and Associates. See
-http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/prkunix/ .
-.PP
-Perl 5.6 comes with Java Perl Lingo, or \s-1JPL\s0. \s-1JPL\s0, still in
-development, allows Perl code to be called from Java. See jpl/README
-in the Perl source tree.
-.ie n .Sh "How can I get ""#!perl"" to work on [\s-1MS\-DOS\s0,NT,...]?"
-.el .Sh "How can I get \f(CW#!perl\fP to work on [\s-1MS\-DOS\s0,NT,...]?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I get #!perl to work on [MS-DOS,NT,...]?"
-For \s-1OS/2\s0 just use
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& extproc perl -S -your_switches
-.Ve
-.PP
-as the first line in \f(CW\*(C`*.cmd\*(C'\fR file (\f(CW\*(C`\-S\*(C'\fR due to a bug in cmd.exe's
-`extproc' handling). For \s-1DOS\s0 one should first invent a corresponding
-batch file and codify it in \f(CW\*(C`ALTERNATE_SHEBANG\*(C'\fR (see the
-\&\fIdosish.h\fR file in the source distribution for more information).
-.PP
-The Win95/NT installation, when using the ActiveState port of Perl,
-will modify the Registry to associate the \f(CW\*(C`.pl\*(C'\fR extension with the
-perl interpreter. If you install another port, perhaps even building
-your own Win95/NT Perl from the standard sources by using a Windows port
-of gcc (e.g., with cygwin or mingw32), then you'll have to modify
-the Registry yourself. In addition to associating \f(CW\*(C`.pl\*(C'\fR with the
-interpreter, \s-1NT\s0 people can use: \f(CW\*(C`SET PATHEXT=%PATHEXT%;.PL\*(C'\fR to let them
-run the program \f(CW\*(C`install\-linux.pl\*(C'\fR merely by typing \f(CW\*(C`install\-linux\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-Macintosh Perl programs will have the appropriate Creator and
-Type, so that double-clicking them will invoke the Perl application.
-.PP
-\&\fI\s-1IMPORTANT\s0!\fR: Whatever you do, \s-1PLEASE\s0 don't get frustrated, and just
-throw the perl interpreter into your cgi-bin directory, in order to
-get your programs working for a web server. This is an \s-1EXTREMELY\s0 big
-security risk. Take the time to figure out how to do it correctly.
-.Sh "Can I write useful Perl programs on the command line?"
-.IX Subsection "Can I write useful Perl programs on the command line?"
-Yes. Read perlrun for more information. Some examples follow.
-(These assume standard Unix shell quoting rules.)
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # sum first and last fields
-\& perl -lane 'print $F[0] + $F[-1]' *
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # identify text files
-\& perl -le 'for(@ARGV) {print if -f && -T _}' *
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # remove (most) comments from C program
-\& perl -0777 -pe 's{/\e*.*?\e*/}{}gs' foo.c
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # make file a month younger than today, defeating reaper daemons
-\& perl -e '$X=24*60*60; utime(time(),time() + 30 * $X, at ARGV)' *
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # find first unused uid
-\& perl -le '$i++ while getpwuid($i); print $i'
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& # display reasonable manpath
-\& echo $PATH | perl -nl -072 -e '
-\& s![^/+]*$!man!&&-d&&!$s{$_}++&&push at m,$_;END{print"@m"}'
-.Ve
-.PP
-\&\s-1OK\s0, the last one was actually an Obfuscated Perl Contest entry. :\-)
-.Sh "Why don't Perl one-liners work on my DOS/Mac/VMS system?"
-.IX Subsection "Why don't Perl one-liners work on my DOS/Mac/VMS system?"
-The problem is usually that the command interpreters on those systems
-have rather different ideas about quoting than the Unix shells under
-which the one-liners were created. On some systems, you may have to
-change single-quotes to double ones, which you must \fI\s-1NOT\s0\fR do on Unix
-or Plan9 systems. You might also have to change a single % to a %%.
-.PP
-For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # Unix
-\& perl -e 'print "Hello world\en"'
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # DOS, etc.
-\& perl -e "print \e"Hello world\en\e""
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& # Mac
-\& print "Hello world\en"
-\& (then Run "Myscript" or Shift-Command-R)
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # MPW
-\& perl -e 'print "Hello world\en"'
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # VMS
-\& perl -e "print ""Hello world\en"""
-.Ve
-.PP
-The problem is that none of these examples are reliable: they depend on the
-command interpreter. Under Unix, the first two often work. Under \s-1DOS\s0,
-it's entirely possible that neither works. If 4DOS was the command shell,
-you'd probably have better luck like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl -e "print <Ctrl-x>"Hello world\en<Ctrl-x>""
-.Ve
-.PP
-Under the Mac, it depends which environment you are using. The MacPerl
-shell, or \s-1MPW\s0, is much like Unix shells in its support for several
-quoting variants, except that it makes free use of the Mac's non-ASCII
-characters as control characters.
-.PP
-Using \fIqq()\fR, q(), and \fIqx()\fR, instead of \*(L"double quotes\*(R", 'single
-quotes', and `backticks`, may make one-liners easier to write.
-.PP
-There is no general solution to all of this. It is a mess.
-.PP
-[Some of this answer was contributed by Kenneth Albanowski.]
-.Sh "Where can I learn about \s-1CGI\s0 or Web programming in Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I learn about CGI or Web programming in Perl?"
-For modules, get the \s-1CGI\s0 or \s-1LWP\s0 modules from \s-1CPAN\s0. For textbooks,
-see the two especially dedicated to web stuff in the question on
-books. For problems and questions related to the web, like ``Why
-do I get 500 Errors'' or ``Why doesn't it run from the browser right
-when it runs fine on the command line'', see the troubleshooting
-guides and references in perlfaq9 or in the \s-1CGI\s0 MetaFAQ:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& http://www.perl.org/CGI_MetaFAQ.html
-.Ve
-.Sh "Where can I learn about object-oriented Perl programming?"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I learn about object-oriented Perl programming?"
-A good place to start is perltoot, and you can use perlobj,
-perlboot, perltoot, perltooc, and perlbot for reference.
-(If you are using really old Perl, you may not have all of these,
-try http://www.perldoc.com/ , but consider upgrading your perl.)
-.PP
-A good book on \s-1OO\s0 on Perl is the \*(L"Object\-Oriented Perl\*(R"
-by Damian Conway from Manning Publications,
-http://www.manning.com/Conway/index.html
-.Sh "Where can I learn about linking C with Perl? [h2xs, xsubpp]"
-.IX Subsection "Where can I learn about linking C with Perl? [h2xs, xsubpp]"
-If you want to call C from Perl, start with perlxstut,
-moving on to perlxs, xsubpp, and perlguts. If you want to
-call Perl from C, then read perlembed, perlcall, and
-perlguts. Don't forget that you can learn a lot from looking at
-how the authors of existing extension modules wrote their code and
-solved their problems.
-.Sh "I've read perlembed, perlguts, etc., but I can't embed perl in my C program; what am I doing wrong?"
-.IX Subsection "I've read perlembed, perlguts, etc., but I can't embed perl in my C program; what am I doing wrong?"
-Download the ExtUtils::Embed kit from \s-1CPAN\s0 and run `make test'. If
-the tests pass, read the pods again and again and again. If they
-fail, see perlbug and send a bug report with the output of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`make test TEST_VERBOSE=1\*(C'\fR along with \f(CW\*(C`perl \-V\*(C'\fR.
-.Sh "When I tried to run my script, I got this message. What does it mean?"
-.IX Subsection "When I tried to run my script, I got this message. What does it mean?"
-A complete list of Perl's error messages and warnings with explanatory
-text can be found in perldiag. You can also use the splain program
-(distributed with Perl) to explain the error messages:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& perl program 2>diag.out
-\& splain [-v] [-p] diag.out
-.Ve
-.PP
-or change your program to explain the messages for you:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use diagnostics;
-.Ve
-.PP
-or
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use diagnostics -verbose;
-.Ve
-.Sh "What's MakeMaker?"
-.IX Subsection "What's MakeMaker?"
-This module (part of the standard Perl distribution) is designed to
-write a Makefile for an extension module from a Makefile.PL. For more
-information, see ExtUtils::MakeMaker.
-.SH "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1997\-2002 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington.
-All rights reserved.
-.PP
-This documentation is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-under the same terms as Perl itself.
-.PP
-Irrespective of its distribution, all code examples here are in the public
-domain. You are permitted and encouraged to use this code and any
-derivatives thereof in your own programs for fun or for profit as you
-see fit. A simple comment in the code giving credit to the \s-1FAQ\s0 would
-be courteous but is not required.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfaq7.1 b/raw/man1/perlfaq7.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 10889af..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfaq7.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1182 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFAQ7 1"
-.TH PERLFAQ7 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfaq7 \- General Perl Language Issues ($Revision: 1.1 $, $Date: 2004/06/16 12:41:53 $)
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-This section deals with general Perl language issues that don't
-clearly fit into any of the other sections.
-.Sh "Can I get a BNF/yacc/RE for the Perl language?"
-.IX Subsection "Can I get a BNF/yacc/RE for the Perl language?"
-There is no \s-1BNF\s0, but you can paw your way through the yacc grammar in
-perly.y in the source distribution if you're particularly brave. The
-grammar relies on very smart tokenizing code, so be prepared to
-venture into toke.c as well.
-.PP
-In the words of Chaim Frenkel: \*(L"Perl's grammar can not be reduced to \s-1BNF\s0.
-The work of parsing perl is distributed between yacc, the lexer, smoke
-and mirrors.\*(R"
-.Sh "What are all these $@%&* punctuation signs, and how do I know when to use them?"
-.IX Subsection "What are all these $@%&* punctuation signs, and how do I know when to use them?"
-They are type specifiers, as detailed in perldata:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& $ for scalar values (number, string or reference)
-\& @ for arrays
-\& % for hashes (associative arrays)
-\& & for subroutines (aka functions, procedures, methods)
-\& * for all types of that symbol name. In version 4 you used them like
-\& pointers, but in modern perls you can just use references.
-.Ve
-.PP
-There are couple of other symbols that you're likely to encounter that aren't
-really type specifiers:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& <> are used for inputting a record from a filehandle.
-\& \e takes a reference to something.
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note that <\s-1FILE\s0> is \fIneither\fR the type specifier for files
-nor the name of the handle. It is the \f(CW\*(C`<>\*(C'\fR operator applied
-to the handle \s-1FILE\s0. It reads one line (well, record\*(--see
-"$/" in perlvar) from the handle \s-1FILE\s0 in scalar context, or \fIall\fR lines
-in list context. When performing open, close, or any other operation
-besides \f(CW\*(C`<>\*(C'\fR on files, or even when talking about the handle, do
-\&\fInot\fR use the brackets. These are correct: \f(CW\*(C`eof(FH)\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`seek(FH, 0,
-2)\*(C'\fR and \*(L"copying from \s-1STDIN\s0 to \s-1FILE\s0\*(R".
-.Sh "Do I always/never have to quote my strings or use semicolons and commas?"
-.IX Subsection "Do I always/never have to quote my strings or use semicolons and commas?"
-Normally, a bareword doesn't need to be quoted, but in most cases
-probably should be (and must be under \f(CW\*(C`use strict\*(C'\fR). But a hash key
-consisting of a simple word (that isn't the name of a defined
-subroutine) and the left-hand operand to the \f(CW\*(C`=>\*(C'\fR operator both
-count as though they were quoted:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& This is like this
-\& ------------ ---------------
-\& $foo{line} $foo{"line"}
-\& bar => stuff "bar" => stuff
-.Ve
-.PP
-The final semicolon in a block is optional, as is the final comma in a
-list. Good style (see perlstyle) says to put them in except for
-one\-liners:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& if ($whoops) { exit 1 }
-\& @nums = (1, 2, 3);
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& if ($whoops) {
-\& exit 1;
-\& }
-\& @lines = (
-\& "There Beren came from mountains cold",
-\& "And lost he wandered under leaves",
-\& );
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I skip some return values?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I skip some return values?"
-One way is to treat the return values as a list and index into it:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $dir = (getpwnam($user))[7];
-.Ve
-.PP
-Another way is to use undef as an element on the left\-hand\-side:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ($dev, $ino, undef, undef, $uid, $gid) = stat($file);
-.Ve
-.PP
-You can also use a list slice to select only the elements that
-you need:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ($dev, $ino, $uid, $gid) = ( stat($file) )[0,1,4,5];
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I temporarily block warnings?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I temporarily block warnings?"
-If you are running Perl 5.6.0 or better, the \f(CW\*(C`use warnings\*(C'\fR pragma
-allows fine control of what warning are produced.
-See perllexwarn for more details.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& {
-\& no warnings; # temporarily turn off warnings
-\& $a = $b + $c; # I know these might be undef
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you have an older version of Perl, the \f(CW$^W\fR variable (documented
-in perlvar) controls runtime warnings for a block:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& {
-\& local $^W = 0; # temporarily turn off warnings
-\& $a = $b + $c; # I know these might be undef
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note that like all the punctuation variables, you cannot currently
-use \fImy()\fR on \f(CW$^W\fR, only \fIlocal()\fR.
-.Sh "What's an extension?"
-.IX Subsection "What's an extension?"
-An extension is a way of calling compiled C code from Perl. Reading
-perlxstut is a good place to learn more about extensions.
-.Sh "Why do Perl operators have different precedence than C operators?"
-.IX Subsection "Why do Perl operators have different precedence than C operators?"
-Actually, they don't. All C operators that Perl copies have the same
-precedence in Perl as they do in C. The problem is with operators that C
-doesn't have, especially functions that give a list context to everything
-on their right, eg. print, chmod, exec, and so on. Such functions are
-called \*(L"list operators\*(R" and appear as such in the precedence table in
-perlop.
-.PP
-A common mistake is to write:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& unlink $file || die "snafu";
-.Ve
-.PP
-This gets interpreted as:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& unlink ($file || die "snafu");
-.Ve
-.PP
-To avoid this problem, either put in extra parentheses or use the
-super low precedence \f(CW\*(C`or\*(C'\fR operator:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& (unlink $file) || die "snafu";
-\& unlink $file or die "snafu";
-.Ve
-.PP
-The \*(L"English\*(R" operators (\f(CW\*(C`and\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`or\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`xor\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`not\*(C'\fR)
-deliberately have precedence lower than that of list operators for
-just such situations as the one above.
-.PP
-Another operator with surprising precedence is exponentiation. It
-binds more tightly even than unary minus, making \f(CW\*(C`\-2**2\*(C'\fR product a
-negative not a positive four. It is also right\-associating, meaning
-that \f(CW\*(C`2**3**2\*(C'\fR is two raised to the ninth power, not eight squared.
-.PP
-Although it has the same precedence as in C, Perl's \f(CW\*(C`?:\*(C'\fR operator
-produces an lvalue. This assigns \f(CW$x\fR to either \f(CW$a\fR or \f(CW$b\fR, depending
-on the trueness of \f(CW$maybe:\fR
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ($maybe ? $a : $b) = $x;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I declare/create a structure?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I declare/create a structure?"
-In general, you don't \*(L"declare\*(R" a structure. Just use a (probably
-anonymous) hash reference. See perlref and perldsc for details.
-Here's an example:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $person = {}; # new anonymous hash
-\& $person->{AGE} = 24; # set field AGE to 24
-\& $person->{NAME} = "Nat"; # set field NAME to "Nat"
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you're looking for something a bit more rigorous, try perltoot.
-.Sh "How do I create a module?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I create a module?"
-A module is a package that lives in a file of the same name. For
-example, the Hello::There module would live in Hello/There.pm. For
-details, read perlmod. You'll also find Exporter helpful. If
-you're writing a C or mixed-language module with both C and Perl, then
-you should study perlxstut.
-.PP
-The \f(CW\*(C`h2xs\*(C'\fR program will create stubs for all the important stuff for you:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& % h2xs -XA -n My::Module
-.Ve
-.PP
-The \f(CW\*(C`\-X\*(C'\fR switch tells \f(CW\*(C`h2xs\*(C'\fR that you are not using \f(CW\*(C`XS\*(C'\fR extension
-code. The \f(CW\*(C`\-A\*(C'\fR switch tells \f(CW\*(C`h2xs\*(C'\fR that you are not using the
-AutoLoader, and the \f(CW\*(C`\-n\*(C'\fR switch specifies the name of the module.
-See h2xs for more details.
-.Sh "How do I create a class?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I create a class?"
-See perltoot for an introduction to classes and objects, as well as
-perlobj and perlbot.
-.Sh "How can I tell if a variable is tainted?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I tell if a variable is tainted?"
-You can use the \fItainted()\fR function of the Scalar::Util module, available
-from \s-1CPAN\s0 (or included with Perl since release 5.8.0).
-See also \*(L"Laundering and Detecting Tainted Data\*(R" in perlsec.
-.Sh "What's a closure?"
-.IX Subsection "What's a closure?"
-Closures are documented in perlref.
-.PP
-\&\fIClosure\fR is a computer science term with a precise but
-hard-to-explain meaning. Closures are implemented in Perl as anonymous
-subroutines with lasting references to lexical variables outside their
-own scopes. These lexicals magically refer to the variables that were
-around when the subroutine was defined (deep binding).
-.PP
-Closures make sense in any programming language where you can have the
-return value of a function be itself a function, as you can in Perl.
-Note that some languages provide anonymous functions but are not
-capable of providing proper closures: the Python language, for
-example. For more information on closures, check out any textbook on
-functional programming. Scheme is a language that not only supports
-but encourages closures.
-.PP
-Here's a classic function-generating function:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& sub add_function_generator {
-\& return sub { shift + shift };
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $add_sub = add_function_generator();
-\& $sum = $add_sub->(4,5); # $sum is 9 now.
-.Ve
-.PP
-The closure works as a \fIfunction template\fR with some customization
-slots left out to be filled later. The anonymous subroutine returned
-by \fIadd_function_generator()\fR isn't technically a closure because it
-refers to no lexicals outside its own scope.
-.PP
-Contrast this with the following \fImake_adder()\fR function, in which the
-returned anonymous function contains a reference to a lexical variable
-outside the scope of that function itself. Such a reference requires
-that Perl return a proper closure, thus locking in for all time the
-value that the lexical had when the function was created.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& sub make_adder {
-\& my $addpiece = shift;
-\& return sub { shift + $addpiece };
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $f1 = make_adder(20);
-\& $f2 = make_adder(555);
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now \f(CW\*(C`&$f1($n)\*(C'\fR is always 20 plus whatever \f(CW$n\fR you pass in, whereas
-\&\f(CW\*(C`&$f2($n)\*(C'\fR is always 555 plus whatever \f(CW$n\fR you pass in. The \f(CW$addpiece\fR
-in the closure sticks around.
-.PP
-Closures are often used for less esoteric purposes. For example, when
-you want to pass in a bit of code into a function:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& my $line;
-\& timeout( 30, sub { $line = <STDIN> } );
-.Ve
-.PP
-If the code to execute had been passed in as a string,
-\&\f(CW'$line = <STDIN>'\fR, there would have been no way for the
-hypothetical \fItimeout()\fR function to access the lexical variable
-\&\f(CW$line\fR back in its caller's scope.
-.Sh "What is variable suicide and how can I prevent it?"
-.IX Subsection "What is variable suicide and how can I prevent it?"
-Variable suicide is when you (temporarily or permanently) lose the
-value of a variable. It is caused by scoping through \fImy()\fR and \fIlocal()\fR
-interacting with either closures or aliased \fIforeach()\fR iterator
-variables and subroutine arguments. It used to be easy to
-inadvertently lose a variable's value this way, but now it's much
-harder. Take this code:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& my $f = "foo";
-\& sub T {
-\& while ($i++ < 3) { my $f = $f; $f .= "bar"; print $f, "\en" }
-\& }
-\& T;
-\& print "Finally $f\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-The \f(CW$f\fR that has \*(L"bar\*(R" added to it three times should be a new \f(CW$f\fR
-(\f(CW\*(C`my $f\*(C'\fR should create a new local variable each time through the loop).
-It isn't, however. This was a bug, now fixed in the latest releases
-(tested against 5.004_05, 5.005_03, and 5.005_56).
-.Sh "How can I pass/return a {Function, FileHandle, Array, Hash, Method, Regex}?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I pass/return a {Function, FileHandle, Array, Hash, Method, Regex}?"
-With the exception of regexes, you need to pass references to these
-objects. See \*(L"Pass by Reference\*(R" in perlsub for this particular
-question, and perlref for information on references.
-.PP
-See ``Passing Regexes'', below, for information on passing regular
-expressions.
-.IP "Passing Variables and Functions" 4
-.IX Item "Passing Variables and Functions"
-Regular variables and functions are quite easy to pass: just pass in a
-reference to an existing or anonymous variable or function:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& func( \e$some_scalar );
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& func( \e at some_array );
-\& func( [ 1 .. 10 ] );
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& func( \e%some_hash );
-\& func( { this => 10, that => 20 } );
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& func( \e&some_func );
-\& func( sub { $_[0] ** $_[1] } );
-.Ve
-.IP "Passing Filehandles" 4
-.IX Item "Passing Filehandles"
-As of Perl 5.6, you can represent filehandles with scalar variables
-which you treat as any other scalar.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open my $fh, $filename or die "Cannot open $filename! $!";
-\& func( $fh );
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& sub func {
-\& my $passed_fh = shift;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& my $line = <$fh>;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Before Perl 5.6, you had to use the \f(CW*FH\fR or \f(CW\*(C`\e*FH\*(C'\fR notations.
-These are \*(L"typeglobs\*(R"\-\-see \*(L"Typeglobs and Filehandles\*(R" in perldata
-and especially \*(L"Pass by Reference\*(R" in perlsub for more information.
-.IP "Passing Regexes" 4
-.IX Item "Passing Regexes"
-To pass regexes around, you'll need to be using a release of Perl
-sufficiently recent as to support the \f(CW\*(C`qr//\*(C'\fR construct, pass around
-strings and use an exception-trapping eval, or else be very, very clever.
-.Sp
-Here's an example of how to pass in a string to be regex compared
-using \f(CW\*(C`qr//\*(C'\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& sub compare($$) {
-\& my ($val1, $regex) = @_;
-\& my $retval = $val1 =~ /$regex/;
-\& return $retval;
-\& }
-\& $match = compare("old McDonald", qr/d.*D/i);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Notice how \f(CW\*(C`qr//\*(C'\fR allows flags at the end. That pattern was compiled
-at compile time, although it was executed later. The nifty \f(CW\*(C`qr//\*(C'\fR
-notation wasn't introduced until the 5.005 release. Before that, you
-had to approach this problem much less intuitively. For example, here
-it is again if you don't have \f(CW\*(C`qr//\*(C'\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& sub compare($$) {
-\& my ($val1, $regex) = @_;
-\& my $retval = eval { $val1 =~ /$regex/ };
-\& die if $@;
-\& return $retval;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $match = compare("old McDonald", q/($?i)d.*D/);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Make sure you never say something like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& return eval "\e$val =~ /$regex/"; # WRONG
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or someone can sneak shell escapes into the regex due to the double
-interpolation of the eval and the double-quoted string. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $pattern_of_evil = 'danger ${ system("rm -rf * &") } danger';
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& eval "\e$string =~ /$pattern_of_evil/";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Those preferring to be very, very clever might see the O'Reilly book,
-\&\fIMastering Regular Expressions\fR, by Jeffrey Friedl. Page 273's
-\&\fIBuild_MatchMany_Function()\fR is particularly interesting. A complete
-citation of this book is given in perlfaq2.
-.IP "Passing Methods" 4
-.IX Item "Passing Methods"
-To pass an object method into a subroutine, you can do this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& call_a_lot(10, $some_obj, "methname")
-\& sub call_a_lot {
-\& my ($count, $widget, $trick) = @_;
-\& for (my $i = 0; $i < $count; $i++) {
-\& $widget->$trick();
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Or, you can use a closure to bundle up the object, its
-method call, and arguments:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& my $whatnot = sub { $some_obj->obfuscate(@args) };
-\& func($whatnot);
-\& sub func {
-\& my $code = shift;
-\& &$code();
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You could also investigate the \fIcan()\fR method in the \s-1UNIVERSAL\s0 class
-(part of the standard perl distribution).
-.Sh "How do I create a static variable?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I create a static variable?"
-As with most things in Perl, \s-1TMTOWTDI\s0. What is a \*(L"static variable\*(R" in
-other languages could be either a function-private variable (visible
-only within a single function, retaining its value between calls to
-that function), or a file-private variable (visible only to functions
-within the file it was declared in) in Perl.
-.PP
-Here's code to implement a function-private variable:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& BEGIN {
-\& my $counter = 42;
-\& sub prev_counter { return --$counter }
-\& sub next_counter { return $counter++ }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Now \fIprev_counter()\fR and \fInext_counter()\fR share a private variable \f(CW$counter\fR
-that was initialized at compile time.
-.PP
-To declare a file-private variable, you'll still use a \fImy()\fR, putting
-the declaration at the outer scope level at the top of the file.
-Assume this is in file Pax.pm:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& package Pax;
-\& my $started = scalar(localtime(time()));
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& sub begun { return $started }
-.Ve
-.PP
-When \f(CW\*(C`use Pax\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`require Pax\*(C'\fR loads this module, the variable will
-be initialized. It won't get garbage-collected the way most variables
-going out of scope do, because the \fIbegun()\fR function cares about it,
-but no one else can get it. It is not called \f(CW$Pax::started\fR because
-its scope is unrelated to the package. It's scoped to the file. You
-could conceivably have several packages in that same file all
-accessing the same private variable, but another file with the same
-package couldn't get to it.
-.PP
-See \*(L"Persistent Private Variables\*(R" in perlsub for details.
-.Sh "What's the difference between dynamic and lexical (static) scoping? Between \fIlocal()\fP and \fImy()\fP?"
-.IX Subsection "What's the difference between dynamic and lexical (static) scoping? Between local() and my()?"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`local($x)\*(C'\fR saves away the old value of the global variable \f(CW$x\fR
-and assigns a new value for the duration of the subroutine \fIwhich is
-visible in other functions called from that subroutine\fR. This is done
-at run\-time, so is called dynamic scoping. \fIlocal()\fR always affects global
-variables, also called package variables or dynamic variables.
-.PP
-\&\f(CW\*(C`my($x)\*(C'\fR creates a new variable that is only visible in the current
-subroutine. This is done at compile\-time, so it is called lexical or
-static scoping. \fImy()\fR always affects private variables, also called
-lexical variables or (improperly) static(ly scoped) variables.
-.PP
-For instance:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& sub visible {
-\& print "var has value $var\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& sub dynamic {
-\& local $var = 'local'; # new temporary value for the still-global
-\& visible(); # variable called $var
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& sub lexical {
-\& my $var = 'private'; # new private variable, $var
-\& visible(); # (invisible outside of sub scope)
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $var = 'global';
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& visible(); # prints global
-\& dynamic(); # prints local
-\& lexical(); # prints global
-.Ve
-.PP
-Notice how at no point does the value \*(L"private\*(R" get printed. That's
-because \f(CW$var\fR only has that value within the block of the \fIlexical()\fR
-function, and it is hidden from called subroutine.
-.PP
-In summary, \fIlocal()\fR doesn't make what you think of as private, local
-variables. It gives a global variable a temporary value. \fImy()\fR is
-what you're looking for if you want private variables.
-.PP
-See \*(L"Private Variables via \fImy()\fR\*(R" in perlsub and
-\&\*(L"Temporary Values via \fIlocal()\fR\*(R" in perlsub for excruciating details.
-.Sh "How can I access a dynamic variable while a similarly named lexical is in scope?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I access a dynamic variable while a similarly named lexical is in scope?"
-If you know your package, you can just mention it explicitly, as in
-\&\f(CW$Some_Pack::var\fR. Note that the notation \f(CW$::var\fR is \fBnot\fR the dynamic \f(CW$var\fR
-in the current package, but rather the one in the \*(L"main\*(R" package, as
-though you had written \f(CW$main::var\fR.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use vars '$var';
-\& local $var = "global";
-\& my $var = "lexical";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& print "lexical is $var\en";
-\& print "global is $main::var\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Alternatively you can use the compiler directive \fIour()\fR to bring a
-dynamic variable into the current lexical scope.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& require 5.006; # our() did not exist before 5.6
-\& use vars '$var';
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& local $var = "global";
-\& my $var = "lexical";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print "lexical is $var\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& {
-\& our $var;
-\& print "global is $var\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sh "What's the difference between deep and shallow binding?"
-.IX Subsection "What's the difference between deep and shallow binding?"
-In deep binding, lexical variables mentioned in anonymous subroutines
-are the same ones that were in scope when the subroutine was created.
-In shallow binding, they are whichever variables with the same names
-happen to be in scope when the subroutine is called. Perl always uses
-deep binding of lexical variables (i.e., those created with \fImy()\fR).
-However, dynamic variables (aka global, local, or package variables)
-are effectively shallowly bound. Consider this just one more reason
-not to use them. See the answer to \*(L"What's a closure?\*(R".
-.ie n .Sh "Why doesn't ""my($foo) = <\s-1FILE\s0>;"" work right?"
-.el .Sh "Why doesn't ``my($foo) = <\s-1FILE\s0>;'' work right?"
-.IX Subsection "Why doesn't ""my($foo) = <FILE>;"" work right?"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`my()\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`local()\*(C'\fR give list context to the right hand side
-of \f(CW\*(C`=\*(C'\fR. The <\s-1FH\s0> read operation, like so many of Perl's
-functions and operators, can tell which context it was called in and
-behaves appropriately. In general, the \fIscalar()\fR function can help.
-This function does nothing to the data itself (contrary to popular myth)
-but rather tells its argument to behave in whatever its scalar fashion is.
-If that function doesn't have a defined scalar behavior, this of course
-doesn't help you (such as with \fIsort()\fR).
-.PP
-To enforce scalar context in this particular case, however, you need
-merely omit the parentheses:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& local($foo) = <FILE>; # WRONG
-\& local($foo) = scalar(<FILE>); # ok
-\& local $foo = <FILE>; # right
-.Ve
-.PP
-You should probably be using lexical variables anyway, although the
-issue is the same here:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& my($foo) = <FILE>; # WRONG
-\& my $foo = <FILE>; # right
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I redefine a builtin function, operator, or method?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I redefine a builtin function, operator, or method?"
-Why do you want to do that? :\-)
-.PP
-If you want to override a predefined function, such as \fIopen()\fR,
-then you'll have to import the new definition from a different
-module. See \*(L"Overriding Built-in Functions\*(R" in perlsub. There's
-also an example in \*(L"Class::Template\*(R" in perltoot.
-.PP
-If you want to overload a Perl operator, such as \f(CW\*(C`+\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`**\*(C'\fR,
-then you'll want to use the \f(CW\*(C`use overload\*(C'\fR pragma, documented
-in overload.
-.PP
-If you're talking about obscuring method calls in parent classes,
-see \*(L"Overridden Methods\*(R" in perltoot.
-.Sh "What's the difference between calling a function as &foo and \fIfoo()\fP?"
-.IX Subsection "What's the difference between calling a function as &foo and foo()?"
-When you call a function as \f(CW&foo\fR, you allow that function access to
-your current \f(CW at _\fR values, and you bypass prototypes.
-The function doesn't get an empty \f(CW at _\fR\-\-it gets yours! While not
-strictly speaking a bug (it's documented that way in perlsub), it
-would be hard to consider this a feature in most cases.
-.PP
-When you call your function as \f(CW\*(C`&foo()\*(C'\fR, then you \fIdo\fR get a new \f(CW at _\fR,
-but prototyping is still circumvented.
-.PP
-Normally, you want to call a function using \f(CW\*(C`foo()\*(C'\fR. You may only
-omit the parentheses if the function is already known to the compiler
-because it already saw the definition (\f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR but not \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR),
-or via a forward reference or \f(CW\*(C`use subs\*(C'\fR declaration. Even in this
-case, you get a clean \f(CW at _\fR without any of the old values leaking through
-where they don't belong.
-.Sh "How do I create a switch or case statement?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I create a switch or case statement?"
-This is explained in more depth in the perlsyn. Briefly, there's
-no official case statement, because of the variety of tests possible
-in Perl (numeric comparison, string comparison, glob comparison,
-regex matching, overloaded comparisons, ...).
-Larry couldn't decide how best to do this, so he left it out, even
-though it's been on the wish list since perl1.
-.PP
-Starting from Perl 5.8 to get switch and case one can use the
-Switch extension and say:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use Switch;
-.Ve
-.PP
-after which one has switch and case. It is not as fast as it could be
-because it's not really part of the language (it's done using source
-filters) but it is available, and it's very flexible.
-.PP
-But if one wants to use pure Perl, the general answer is to write a
-construct like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& for ($variable_to_test) {
-\& if (/pat1/) { } # do something
-\& elsif (/pat2/) { } # do something else
-\& elsif (/pat3/) { } # do something else
-\& else { } # default
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Here's a simple example of a switch based on pattern matching, this
-time lined up in a way to make it look more like a switch statement.
-We'll do a multiway conditional based on the type of reference stored
-in \f(CW$whatchamacallit:\fR
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& SWITCH: for (ref $whatchamacallit) {
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& /^$/ && die "not a reference";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& /SCALAR/ && do {
-\& print_scalar($$ref);
-\& last SWITCH;
-\& };
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& /ARRAY/ && do {
-\& print_array(@$ref);
-\& last SWITCH;
-\& };
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& /HASH/ && do {
-\& print_hash(%$ref);
-\& last SWITCH;
-\& };
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& /CODE/ && do {
-\& warn "can't print function ref";
-\& last SWITCH;
-\& };
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& # DEFAULT
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& warn "User defined type skipped";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-See \f(CW\*(C`perlsyn/"Basic BLOCKs and Switch Statements"\*(C'\fR for many other
-examples in this style.
-.PP
-Sometimes you should change the positions of the constant and the variable.
-For example, let's say you wanted to test which of many answers you were
-given, but in a case-insensitive way that also allows abbreviations.
-You can use the following technique if the strings all start with
-different characters or if you want to arrange the matches so that
-one takes precedence over another, as \f(CW"SEND"\fR has precedence over
-\&\f(CW"STOP"\fR here:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& chomp($answer = <>);
-\& if ("SEND" =~ /^\eQ$answer/i) { print "Action is send\en" }
-\& elsif ("STOP" =~ /^\eQ$answer/i) { print "Action is stop\en" }
-\& elsif ("ABORT" =~ /^\eQ$answer/i) { print "Action is abort\en" }
-\& elsif ("LIST" =~ /^\eQ$answer/i) { print "Action is list\en" }
-\& elsif ("EDIT" =~ /^\eQ$answer/i) { print "Action is edit\en" }
-.Ve
-.PP
-A totally different approach is to create a hash of function references.
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& my %commands = (
-\& "happy" => \e&joy,
-\& "sad", => \e&sullen,
-\& "done" => sub { die "See ya!" },
-\& "mad" => \e&angry,
-\& );
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& print "How are you? ";
-\& chomp($string = <STDIN>);
-\& if ($commands{$string}) {
-\& $commands{$string}->();
-\& } else {
-\& print "No such command: $string\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I catch accesses to undefined variables, functions, or methods?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I catch accesses to undefined variables, functions, or methods?"
-The \s-1AUTOLOAD\s0 method, discussed in \*(L"Autoloading\*(R" in perlsub and
-\&\*(L"\s-1AUTOLOAD:\s0 Proxy Methods\*(R" in perltoot, lets you capture calls to
-undefined functions and methods.
-.PP
-When it comes to undefined variables that would trigger a warning
-under \f(CW\*(C`use warnings\*(C'\fR, you can promote the warning to an error.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use warnings FATAL => qw(uninitialized);
-.Ve
-.Sh "Why can't a method included in this same file be found?"
-.IX Subsection "Why can't a method included in this same file be found?"
-Some possible reasons: your inheritance is getting confused, you've
-misspelled the method name, or the object is of the wrong type. Check
-out perltoot for details about any of the above cases. You may
-also use \f(CW\*(C`print ref($object)\*(C'\fR to find out the class \f(CW$object\fR was
-blessed into.
-.PP
-Another possible reason for problems is because you've used the
-indirect object syntax (eg, \f(CW\*(C`find Guru "Samy"\*(C'\fR) on a class name
-before Perl has seen that such a package exists. It's wisest to make
-sure your packages are all defined before you start using them, which
-will be taken care of if you use the \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR statement instead of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR. If not, make sure to use arrow notation (eg.,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Guru\->find("Samy")\*(C'\fR) instead. Object notation is explained in
-perlobj.
-.PP
-Make sure to read about creating modules in perlmod and
-the perils of indirect objects in \*(L"Method Invocation\*(R" in perlobj.
-.Sh "How can I find out my current package?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I find out my current package?"
-If you're just a random program, you can do this to find
-out what the currently compiled package is:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& my $packname = __PACKAGE__;
-.Ve
-.PP
-But, if you're a method and you want to print an error message
-that includes the kind of object you were called on (which is
-not necessarily the same as the one in which you were compiled):
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& sub amethod {
-\& my $self = shift;
-\& my $class = ref($self) || $self;
-\& warn "called me from a $class object";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I comment out a large block of perl code?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I comment out a large block of perl code?"
-You can use embedded \s-1POD\s0 to discard it. Enclose the blocks you want
-to comment out in \s-1POD\s0 markers, for example \f(CW\*(C`=for nobody\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`=cut\*(C'\fR
-(which marks ends of \s-1POD\s0 blocks).
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& # program is here
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& =for nobody
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& all of this stuff
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& here will be ignored
-\& by everyone
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& =cut
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& # program continues
-.Ve
-.PP
-The pod directives cannot go just anywhere. You must put a
-pod directive where the parser is expecting a new statement,
-not just in the middle of an expression or some other
-arbitrary grammar production.
-.PP
-See perlpod for more details.
-.Sh "How do I clear a package?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I clear a package?"
-Use this code, provided by Mark-Jason Dominus:
-.PP
-.Vb 17
-\& sub scrub_package {
-\& no strict 'refs';
-\& my $pack = shift;
-\& die "Shouldn't delete main package"
-\& if $pack eq "" || $pack eq "main";
-\& my $stash = *{$pack . '::'}{HASH};
-\& my $name;
-\& foreach $name (keys %$stash) {
-\& my $fullname = $pack . '::' . $name;
-\& # Get rid of everything with that name.
-\& undef $$fullname;
-\& undef @$fullname;
-\& undef %$fullname;
-\& undef &$fullname;
-\& undef *$fullname;
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Or, if you're using a recent release of Perl, you can
-just use the \fISymbol::delete_package()\fR function instead.
-.Sh "How can I use a variable as a variable name?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I use a variable as a variable name?"
-Beginners often think they want to have a variable contain the name
-of a variable.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $fred = 23;
-\& $varname = "fred";
-\& ++$$varname; # $fred now 24
-.Ve
-.PP
-This works \fIsometimes\fR, but it is a very bad idea for two reasons.
-.PP
-The first reason is that this technique \fIonly works on global
-variables\fR. That means that if \f(CW$fred\fR is a lexical variable created
-with \fImy()\fR in the above example, the code wouldn't work at all: you'd
-accidentally access the global and skip right over the private lexical
-altogether. Global variables are bad because they can easily collide
-accidentally and in general make for non-scalable and confusing code.
-.PP
-Symbolic references are forbidden under the \f(CW\*(C`use strict\*(C'\fR pragma.
-They are not true references and consequently are not reference counted
-or garbage collected.
-.PP
-The other reason why using a variable to hold the name of another
-variable is a bad idea is that the question often stems from a lack of
-understanding of Perl data structures, particularly hashes. By using
-symbolic references, you are just using the package's symbol-table hash
-(like \f(CW%main::\fR) instead of a user-defined hash. The solution is to
-use your own hash or a real reference instead.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $USER_VARS{"fred"} = 23;
-\& $varname = "fred";
-\& $USER_VARS{$varname}++; # not $$varname++
-.Ve
-.PP
-There we're using the \f(CW%USER_VARS\fR hash instead of symbolic references.
-Sometimes this comes up in reading strings from the user with variable
-references and wanting to expand them to the values of your perl
-program's variables. This is also a bad idea because it conflates the
-program-addressable namespace and the user-addressable one. Instead of
-reading a string and expanding it to the actual contents of your program's
-own variables:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $str = 'this has a $fred and $barney in it';
-\& $str =~ s/(\e$\ew+)/$1/eeg; # need double eval
-.Ve
-.PP
-it would be better to keep a hash around like \f(CW%USER_VARS\fR and have
-variable references actually refer to entries in that hash:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $str =~ s/\e$(\ew+)/$USER_VARS{$1}/g; # no /e here at all
-.Ve
-.PP
-That's faster, cleaner, and safer than the previous approach. Of course,
-you don't need to use a dollar sign. You could use your own scheme to
-make it less confusing, like bracketed percent symbols, etc.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $str = 'this has a %fred% and %barney% in it';
-\& $str =~ s/%(\ew+)%/$USER_VARS{$1}/g; # no /e here at all
-.Ve
-.PP
-Another reason that folks sometimes think they want a variable to
-contain the name of a variable is because they don't know how to build
-proper data structures using hashes. For example, let's say they
-wanted two hashes in their program: \f(CW%fred\fR and \f(CW%barney\fR, and that they
-wanted to use another scalar variable to refer to those by name.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $name = "fred";
-\& $$name{WIFE} = "wilma"; # set %fred
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $name = "barney";
-\& $$name{WIFE} = "betty"; # set %barney
-.Ve
-.PP
-This is still a symbolic reference, and is still saddled with the
-problems enumerated above. It would be far better to write:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $folks{"fred"}{WIFE} = "wilma";
-\& $folks{"barney"}{WIFE} = "betty";
-.Ve
-.PP
-And just use a multilevel hash to start with.
-.PP
-The only times that you absolutely \fImust\fR use symbolic references are
-when you really must refer to the symbol table. This may be because it's
-something that can't take a real reference to, such as a format name.
-Doing so may also be important for method calls, since these always go
-through the symbol table for resolution.
-.PP
-In those cases, you would turn off \f(CW\*(C`strict 'refs'\*(C'\fR temporarily so you
-can play around with the symbol table. For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& @colors = qw(red blue green yellow orange purple violet);
-\& for my $name (@colors) {
-\& no strict 'refs'; # renege for the block
-\& *$name = sub { "<FONT COLOR='$name'>@_</FONT>" };
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-All those functions (\fIred()\fR, \fIblue()\fR, \fIgreen()\fR, etc.) appear to be separate,
-but the real code in the closure actually was compiled only once.
-.PP
-So, sometimes you might want to use symbolic references to directly
-manipulate the symbol table. This doesn't matter for formats, handles, and
-subroutines, because they are always global\*(--you can't use \fImy()\fR on them.
-For scalars, arrays, and hashes, though\*(--and usually for subroutines\*(--
-you probably only want to use hard references.
-.ie n .Sh "What does ""bad interpreter"" mean?"
-.el .Sh "What does ``bad interpreter'' mean?"
-.IX Subsection "What does bad interpreter mean?"
-The \*(L"bad interpreter\*(R" message comes from the shell, not perl. The
-actual message may vary depending on your platform, shell, and locale
-settings.
-.PP
-If you see \*(L"bad interpreter \- no such file or directory\*(R", the first
-line in your perl script (the \*(L"shebang\*(R" line) does not contain the
-right path to perl (or any other program capable of running scripts).
-Sometimes this happens when you move the script from one machine to
-another and each machine has a different path to perl\-\-\-/usr/bin/perl
-versus /usr/local/bin/perl for instance.
-.PP
-If you see \*(L"bad interpreter: Permission denied\*(R", you need to make your
-script executable.
-.PP
-In either case, you should still be able to run the scripts with perl
-explicitly:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& % perl script.pl
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you get a message like \*(L"perl: command not found\*(R", perl is not in
-your \s-1PATH\s0, which might also mean that the location of perl is not
-where you expect it so you need to adjust your shebang line.
-.SH "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1997\-2002 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington.
-All rights reserved.
-.PP
-This documentation is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-under the same terms as Perl itself.
-.PP
-Irrespective of its distribution, all code examples in this file
-are hereby placed into the public domain. You are permitted and
-encouraged to use this code in your own programs for fun
-or for profit as you see fit. A simple comment in the code giving
-credit would be courteous but is not required.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfaq8.1 b/raw/man1/perlfaq8.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c387375..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfaq8.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1420 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFAQ8 1"
-.TH PERLFAQ8 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfaq8 \- System Interaction ($Revision: 1.1 $, $Date: 2004/06/16 12:41:53 $)
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-This section of the Perl \s-1FAQ\s0 covers questions involving operating
-system interaction. Topics include interprocess communication (\s-1IPC\s0),
-control over the user-interface (keyboard, screen and pointing
-devices), and most anything else not related to data manipulation.
-.PP
-Read the FAQs and documentation specific to the port of perl to your
-operating system (eg, perlvms, perlplan9, ...). These should
-contain more detailed information on the vagaries of your perl.
-.Sh "How do I find out which operating system I'm running under?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I find out which operating system I'm running under?"
-The $^O variable ($OSNAME if you use English) contains an indication of
-the name of the operating system (not its release number) that your perl
-binary was built for.
-.Sh "How come \fIexec()\fP doesn't return?"
-.IX Subsection "How come exec() doesn't return?"
-Because that's what it does: it replaces your currently running
-program with a different one. If you want to keep going (as is
-probably the case if you're asking this question) use \fIsystem()\fR
-instead.
-.Sh "How do I do fancy stuff with the keyboard/screen/mouse?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I do fancy stuff with the keyboard/screen/mouse?"
-How you access/control keyboards, screens, and pointing devices
-(\*(L"mice\*(R") is system\-dependent. Try the following modules:
-.IP "Keyboard" 4
-.IX Item "Keyboard"
-.Vb 5
-\& Term::Cap Standard perl distribution
-\& Term::ReadKey CPAN
-\& Term::ReadLine::Gnu CPAN
-\& Term::ReadLine::Perl CPAN
-\& Term::Screen CPAN
-.Ve
-.IP "Screen" 4
-.IX Item "Screen"
-.Vb 3
-\& Term::Cap Standard perl distribution
-\& Curses CPAN
-\& Term::ANSIColor CPAN
-.Ve
-.IP "Mouse" 4
-.IX Item "Mouse"
-.Vb 1
-\& Tk CPAN
-.Ve
-.PP
-Some of these specific cases are shown below.
-.Sh "How do I print something out in color?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I print something out in color?"
-In general, you don't, because you don't know whether
-the recipient has a color-aware display device. If you
-know that they have an \s-1ANSI\s0 terminal that understands
-color, you can use the Term::ANSIColor module from \s-1CPAN:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use Term::ANSIColor;
-\& print color("red"), "Stop!\en", color("reset");
-\& print color("green"), "Go!\en", color("reset");
-.Ve
-.PP
-Or like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use Term::ANSIColor qw(:constants);
-\& print RED, "Stop!\en", RESET;
-\& print GREEN, "Go!\en", RESET;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I read just one key without waiting for a return key?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I read just one key without waiting for a return key?"
-Controlling input buffering is a remarkably system-dependent matter.
-On many systems, you can just use the \fBstty\fR command as shown in
-\&\*(L"getc\*(R" in perlfunc, but as you see, that's already getting you into
-portability snags.
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& open(TTY, "+</dev/tty") or die "no tty: $!";
-\& system "stty cbreak </dev/tty >/dev/tty 2>&1";
-\& $key = getc(TTY); # perhaps this works
-\& # OR ELSE
-\& sysread(TTY, $key, 1); # probably this does
-\& system "stty -cbreak </dev/tty >/dev/tty 2>&1";
-.Ve
-.PP
-The Term::ReadKey module from \s-1CPAN\s0 offers an easy-to-use interface that
-should be more efficient than shelling out to \fBstty\fR for each key.
-It even includes limited support for Windows.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& use Term::ReadKey;
-\& ReadMode('cbreak');
-\& $key = ReadKey(0);
-\& ReadMode('normal');
-.Ve
-.PP
-However, using the code requires that you have a working C compiler
-and can use it to build and install a \s-1CPAN\s0 module. Here's a solution
-using the standard \s-1POSIX\s0 module, which is already on your systems
-(assuming your system supports \s-1POSIX\s0).
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use HotKey;
-\& $key = readkey();
-.Ve
-.PP
-And here's the HotKey module, which hides the somewhat mystifying calls
-to manipulate the \s-1POSIX\s0 termios structures.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # HotKey.pm
-\& package HotKey;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @ISA = qw(Exporter);
-\& @EXPORT = qw(cbreak cooked readkey);
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use strict;
-\& use POSIX qw(:termios_h);
-\& my ($term, $oterm, $echo, $noecho, $fd_stdin);
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& $fd_stdin = fileno(STDIN);
-\& $term = POSIX::Termios->new();
-\& $term->getattr($fd_stdin);
-\& $oterm = $term->getlflag();
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $echo = ECHO | ECHOK | ICANON;
-\& $noecho = $oterm & ~$echo;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& sub cbreak {
-\& $term->setlflag($noecho); # ok, so i don't want echo either
-\& $term->setcc(VTIME, 1);
-\& $term->setattr($fd_stdin, TCSANOW);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& sub cooked {
-\& $term->setlflag($oterm);
-\& $term->setcc(VTIME, 0);
-\& $term->setattr($fd_stdin, TCSANOW);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& sub readkey {
-\& my $key = '';
-\& cbreak();
-\& sysread(STDIN, $key, 1);
-\& cooked();
-\& return $key;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& END { cooked() }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& 1;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I check whether input is ready on the keyboard?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I check whether input is ready on the keyboard?"
-The easiest way to do this is to read a key in nonblocking mode with the
-Term::ReadKey module from \s-1CPAN\s0, passing it an argument of \-1 to indicate
-not to block:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use Term::ReadKey;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ReadMode('cbreak');
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& if (defined ($char = ReadKey(-1)) ) {
-\& # input was waiting and it was $char
-\& } else {
-\& # no input was waiting
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& ReadMode('normal'); # restore normal tty settings
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I clear the screen?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I clear the screen?"
-If you only have do so infrequently, use \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& system("clear");
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you have to do this a lot, save the clear string
-so you can print it 100 times without calling a program
-100 times:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $clear_string = `clear`;
-\& print $clear_string;
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you're planning on doing other screen manipulations, like cursor
-positions, etc, you might wish to use Term::Cap module:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use Term::Cap;
-\& $terminal = Term::Cap->Tgetent( {OSPEED => 9600} );
-\& $clear_string = $terminal->Tputs('cl');
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I get the screen size?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I get the screen size?"
-If you have Term::ReadKey module installed from \s-1CPAN\s0,
-you can use it to fetch the width and height in characters
-and in pixels:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use Term::ReadKey;
-\& ($wchar, $hchar, $wpixels, $hpixels) = GetTerminalSize();
-.Ve
-.PP
-This is more portable than the raw \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR, but not as
-illustrative:
-.PP
-.Vb 10
-\& require 'sys/ioctl.ph';
-\& die "no TIOCGWINSZ " unless defined &TIOCGWINSZ;
-\& open(TTY, "+</dev/tty") or die "No tty: $!";
-\& unless (ioctl(TTY, &TIOCGWINSZ, $winsize='')) {
-\& die sprintf "$0: ioctl TIOCGWINSZ (%08x: $!)\en", &TIOCGWINSZ;
-\& }
-\& ($row, $col, $xpixel, $ypixel) = unpack('S4', $winsize);
-\& print "(row,col) = ($row,$col)";
-\& print " (xpixel,ypixel) = ($xpixel,$ypixel)" if $xpixel || $ypixel;
-\& print "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I ask the user for a password?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I ask the user for a password?"
-(This question has nothing to do with the web. See a different
-\&\s-1FAQ\s0 for that.)
-.PP
-There's an example of this in \*(L"crypt\*(R" in perlfunc). First, you put the
-terminal into \*(L"no echo\*(R" mode, then just read the password normally.
-You may do this with an old-style \fIioctl()\fR function, \s-1POSIX\s0 terminal
-control (see \s-1POSIX\s0 or its documentation the Camel Book), or a call
-to the \fBstty\fR program, with varying degrees of portability.
-.PP
-You can also do this for most systems using the Term::ReadKey module
-from \s-1CPAN\s0, which is easier to use and in theory more portable.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use Term::ReadKey;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& ReadMode('noecho');
-\& $password = ReadLine(0);
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I read and write the serial port?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I read and write the serial port?"
-This depends on which operating system your program is running on. In
-the case of Unix, the serial ports will be accessible through files in
-/dev; on other systems, device names will doubtless differ.
-Several problem areas common to all device interaction are the
-following:
-.IP "lockfiles" 4
-.IX Item "lockfiles"
-Your system may use lockfiles to control multiple access. Make sure
-you follow the correct protocol. Unpredictable behavior can result
-from multiple processes reading from one device.
-.IP "open mode" 4
-.IX Item "open mode"
-If you expect to use both read and write operations on the device,
-you'll have to open it for update (see \*(L"open\*(R" in perlfunc for
-details). You may wish to open it without running the risk of
-blocking by using \fIsysopen()\fR and \f(CW\*(C`O_RDWR|O_NDELAY|O_NOCTTY\*(C'\fR from the
-Fcntl module (part of the standard perl distribution). See
-\&\*(L"sysopen\*(R" in perlfunc for more on this approach.
-.IP "end of line" 4
-.IX Item "end of line"
-Some devices will be expecting a \*(L"\er\*(R" at the end of each line rather
-than a \*(L"\en\*(R". In some ports of perl, \*(L"\er\*(R" and \*(L"\en\*(R" are different from
-their usual (Unix) \s-1ASCII\s0 values of \*(L"\e012\*(R" and \*(L"\e015\*(R". You may have to
-give the numeric values you want directly, using octal (\*(L"\e015\*(R"), hex
-(\*(L"0x0D\*(R"), or as a control-character specification (\*(L"\ecM\*(R").
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print DEV "atv1\e012"; # wrong, for some devices
-\& print DEV "atv1\e015"; # right, for some devices
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Even though with normal text files a \*(L"\en\*(R" will do the trick, there is
-still no unified scheme for terminating a line that is portable
-between Unix, DOS/Win, and Macintosh, except to terminate \fI\s-1ALL\s0\fR line
-ends with \*(L"\e015\e012\*(R", and strip what you don't need from the output.
-This applies especially to socket I/O and autoflushing, discussed
-next.
-.IP "flushing output" 4
-.IX Item "flushing output"
-If you expect characters to get to your device when you \fIprint()\fR them,
-you'll want to autoflush that filehandle. You can use \fIselect()\fR
-and the \f(CW$|\fR variable to control autoflushing (see "$|" in perlvar
-and \*(L"select\*(R" in perlfunc, or perlfaq5, ``How do I flush/unbuffer an
-output filehandle? Why must I do this?''):
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& $oldh = select(DEV);
-\& $| = 1;
-\& select($oldh);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You'll also see code that does this without a temporary variable, as in
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& select((select(DEV), $| = 1)[0]);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Or if you don't mind pulling in a few thousand lines
-of code just because you're afraid of a little $| variable:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use IO::Handle;
-\& DEV->autoflush(1);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-As mentioned in the previous item, this still doesn't work when using
-socket I/O between Unix and Macintosh. You'll need to hard code your
-line terminators, in that case.
-.IP "non-blocking input" 4
-.IX Item "non-blocking input"
-If you are doing a blocking \fIread()\fR or \fIsysread()\fR, you'll have to
-arrange for an alarm handler to provide a timeout (see
-\&\*(L"alarm\*(R" in perlfunc). If you have a non-blocking open, you'll likely
-have a non-blocking read, which means you may have to use a 4\-arg
-\&\fIselect()\fR to determine whether I/O is ready on that device (see
-\&\*(L"select\*(R" in perlfunc.
-.PP
-While trying to read from his caller-id box, the notorious Jamie Zawinski
-<jwz at netscape.com>, after much gnashing of teeth and fighting with sysread,
-sysopen, \s-1POSIX\s0's tcgetattr business, and various other functions that
-go bump in the night, finally came up with this:
-.PP
-.Vb 13
-\& sub open_modem {
-\& use IPC::Open2;
-\& my $stty = `/bin/stty -g`;
-\& open2( \e*MODEM_IN, \e*MODEM_OUT, "cu -l$modem_device -s2400 2>&1");
-\& # starting cu hoses /dev/tty's stty settings, even when it has
-\& # been opened on a pipe...
-\& system("/bin/stty $stty");
-\& $_ = <MODEM_IN>;
-\& chomp;
-\& if ( !m/^Connected/ ) {
-\& print STDERR "$0: cu printed `$_' instead of `Connected'\en";
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I decode encrypted password files?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I decode encrypted password files?"
-You spend lots and lots of money on dedicated hardware, but this is
-bound to get you talked about.
-.PP
-Seriously, you can't if they are Unix password files\*(--the Unix
-password system employs one-way encryption. It's more like hashing than
-encryption. The best you can check is whether something else hashes to
-the same string. You can't turn a hash back into the original string.
-Programs like Crack
-can forcibly (and intelligently) try to guess passwords, but don't
-(can't) guarantee quick success.
-.PP
-If you're worried about users selecting bad passwords, you should
-proactively check when they try to change their password (by modifying
-\&\fIpasswd\fR\|(1), for example).
-.Sh "How do I start a process in the background?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I start a process in the background?"
-Several modules can start other processes that do not block
-your Perl program. You can use IPC::Open3, Parallel::Jobs,
-IPC::Run, and some of the \s-1POE\s0 modules. See \s-1CPAN\s0 for more
-details.
-.PP
-You could also use
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& system("cmd &")
-.Ve
-.PP
-or you could use fork as documented in \*(L"fork\*(R" in perlfunc, with
-further examples in perlipc. Some things to be aware of, if you're
-on a Unix-like system:
-.IP "\s-1STDIN\s0, \s-1STDOUT\s0, and \s-1STDERR\s0 are shared" 4
-.IX Item "STDIN, STDOUT, and STDERR are shared"
-Both the main process and the backgrounded one (the \*(L"child\*(R" process)
-share the same \s-1STDIN\s0, \s-1STDOUT\s0 and \s-1STDERR\s0 filehandles. If both try to
-access them at once, strange things can happen. You may want to close
-or reopen these for the child. You can get around this with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fRing a pipe (see \*(L"open\*(R" in perlfunc) but on some systems this
-means that the child process cannot outlive the parent.
-.IP "Signals" 4
-.IX Item "Signals"
-You'll have to catch the \s-1SIGCHLD\s0 signal, and possibly \s-1SIGPIPE\s0 too.
-\&\s-1SIGCHLD\s0 is sent when the backgrounded process finishes. \s-1SIGPIPE\s0 is
-sent when you write to a filehandle whose child process has closed (an
-untrapped \s-1SIGPIPE\s0 can cause your program to silently die). This is
-not an issue with \f(CW\*(C`system("cmd&")\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "Zombies" 4
-.IX Item "Zombies"
-You have to be prepared to \*(L"reap\*(R" the child process when it finishes.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $SIG{CHLD} = sub { wait };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $SIG{CHLD} = 'IGNORE';
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can also use a double fork. You immediately \fIwait()\fR for your
-first child, and the init daemon will \fIwait()\fR for your grandchild once
-it exits.
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& unless ($pid = fork) {
-\& unless (fork) {
-\& exec "what you really wanna do";
-\& die "exec failed!";
-\& }
-\& exit 0;
-\& }
-\& waitpid($pid,0);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc for other examples of code to do this.
-Zombies are not an issue with \f(CW\*(C`system("prog &")\*(C'\fR.
-.Sh "How do I trap control characters/signals?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I trap control characters/signals?"
-You don't actually \*(L"trap\*(R" a control character. Instead, that character
-generates a signal which is sent to your terminal's currently
-foregrounded process group, which you then trap in your process.
-Signals are documented in \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc and the
-section on ``Signals'' in the Camel.
-.PP
-Be warned that very few C libraries are re\-entrant. Therefore, if you
-attempt to \fIprint()\fR in a handler that got invoked during another stdio
-operation your internal structures will likely be in an
-inconsistent state, and your program will dump core. You can
-sometimes avoid this by using \fIsyswrite()\fR instead of \fIprint()\fR.
-.PP
-Unless you're exceedingly careful, the only safe things to do inside a
-signal handler are (1) set a variable and (2) exit. In the first case,
-you should only set a variable in such a way that \fImalloc()\fR is not
-called (eg, by setting a variable that already has a value).
-.PP
-For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& $Interrupted = 0; # to ensure it has a value
-\& $SIG{INT} = sub {
-\& $Interrupted++;
-\& syswrite(STDERR, "ouch\en", 5);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-However, because syscalls restart by default, you'll find that if
-you're in a \*(L"slow\*(R" call, such as <\s-1FH\s0>, \fIread()\fR, \fIconnect()\fR, or
-\&\fIwait()\fR, that the only way to terminate them is by \*(L"longjumping\*(R" out;
-that is, by raising an exception. See the time-out handler for a
-blocking \fIflock()\fR in \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc or the section on ``Signals''
-in the Camel book.
-.Sh "How do I modify the shadow password file on a Unix system?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I modify the shadow password file on a Unix system?"
-If perl was installed correctly and your shadow library was written
-properly, the getpw*() functions described in perlfunc should in
-theory provide (read\-only) access to entries in the shadow password
-file. To change the file, make a new shadow password file (the format
-varies from system to system\*(--see passwd for specifics) and use
-\&\fIpwd_mkdb\fR\|(8) to install it (see pwd_mkdb for more details).
-.Sh "How do I set the time and date?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I set the time and date?"
-Assuming you're running under sufficient permissions, you should be
-able to set the system-wide date and time by running the \fIdate\fR\|(1)
-program. (There is no way to set the time and date on a per-process
-basis.) This mechanism will work for Unix, \s-1MS\-DOS\s0, Windows, and \s-1NT\s0;
-the \s-1VMS\s0 equivalent is \f(CW\*(C`set time\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-However, if all you want to do is change your time zone, you can
-probably get away with setting an environment variable:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $ENV{TZ} = "MST7MDT"; # unixish
-\& $ENV{'SYS$TIMEZONE_DIFFERENTIAL'}="-5" # vms
-\& system "trn comp.lang.perl.misc";
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I \fIsleep()\fP or \fIalarm()\fP for under a second?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I sleep() or alarm() for under a second?"
-If you want finer granularity than the 1 second that the \fIsleep()\fR
-function provides, the easiest way is to use the \fIselect()\fR function as
-documented in \*(L"select\*(R" in perlfunc. Try the Time::HiRes and
-the BSD::Itimer modules (available from \s-1CPAN\s0, and starting from
-Perl 5.8 Time::HiRes is part of the standard distribution).
-.Sh "How can I measure time under a second?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I measure time under a second?"
-In general, you may not be able to. The Time::HiRes module (available
-from \s-1CPAN\s0, and starting from Perl 5.8 part of the standard distribution)
-provides this functionality for some systems.
-.PP
-If your system supports both the \fIsyscall()\fR function in Perl as well as
-a system call like \fIgettimeofday\fR\|(2), then you may be able to do
-something like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& require 'sys/syscall.ph';
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $TIMEVAL_T = "LL";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $done = $start = pack($TIMEVAL_T, ());
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& syscall(&SYS_gettimeofday, $start, 0) != -1
-\& or die "gettimeofday: $!";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& ##########################
-\& # DO YOUR OPERATION HERE #
-\& ##########################
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& syscall( &SYS_gettimeofday, $done, 0) != -1
-\& or die "gettimeofday: $!";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @start = unpack($TIMEVAL_T, $start);
-\& @done = unpack($TIMEVAL_T, $done);
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& # fix microseconds
-\& for ($done[1], $start[1]) { $_ /= 1_000_000 }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $delta_time = sprintf "%.4f", ($done[0] + $done[1] )
-\& -
-\& ($start[0] + $start[1] );
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I do an \fIatexit()\fP or \fIsetjmp()\fP/\fIlongjmp()\fP? (Exception handling)"
-.IX Subsection "How can I do an atexit() or setjmp()/longjmp()? (Exception handling)"
-Release 5 of Perl added the \s-1END\s0 block, which can be used to simulate
-\&\fIatexit()\fR. Each package's \s-1END\s0 block is called when the program or
-thread ends (see perlmod manpage for more details).
-.PP
-For example, you can use this to make sure your filter program
-managed to finish its output without filling up the disk:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& END {
-\& close(STDOUT) || die "stdout close failed: $!";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-The \s-1END\s0 block isn't called when untrapped signals kill the program,
-though, so if you use \s-1END\s0 blocks you should also use
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use sigtrap qw(die normal-signals);
-.Ve
-.PP
-Perl's exception-handling mechanism is its \fIeval()\fR operator. You can
-use \fIeval()\fR as setjmp and \fIdie()\fR as longjmp. For details of this, see
-the section on signals, especially the time-out handler for a blocking
-\&\fIflock()\fR in \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc or the section on ``Signals'' in
-the Camel Book.
-.PP
-If exception handling is all you're interested in, try the
-exceptions.pl library (part of the standard perl distribution).
-.PP
-If you want the \fIatexit()\fR syntax (and an \fIrmexit()\fR as well), try the
-AtExit module available from \s-1CPAN\s0.
-.ie n .Sh "Why doesn't my sockets program work under System V (Solaris)? What does the error message ""Protocol not supported"" mean?"
-.el .Sh "Why doesn't my sockets program work under System V (Solaris)? What does the error message ``Protocol not supported'' mean?"
-.IX Subsection "Why doesn't my sockets program work under System V (Solaris)? What does the error message Protocol not supported mean?"
-Some Sys-V based systems, notably Solaris 2.X, redefined some of the
-standard socket constants. Since these were constant across all
-architectures, they were often hardwired into perl code. The proper
-way to deal with this is to \*(L"use Socket\*(R" to get the correct values.
-.PP
-Note that even though SunOS and Solaris are binary compatible, these
-values are different. Go figure.
-.Sh "How can I call my system's unique C functions from Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I call my system's unique C functions from Perl?"
-In most cases, you write an external module to do it\*(--see the answer
-to \*(L"Where can I learn about linking C with Perl? [h2xs, xsubpp]\*(R".
-However, if the function is a system call, and your system supports
-\&\fIsyscall()\fR, you can use the syscall function (documented in
-perlfunc).
-.PP
-Remember to check the modules that came with your distribution, and
-\&\s-1CPAN\s0 as well\-\-\-someone may already have written a module to do it. On
-Windows, try Win32::API. On Macs, try Mac::Carbon. If no module
-has an interface to the C function, you can inline a bit of C in your
-Perl source with Inline::C.
-.Sh "Where do I get the include files to do \fIioctl()\fP or \fIsyscall()\fP?"
-.IX Subsection "Where do I get the include files to do ioctl() or syscall()?"
-Historically, these would be generated by the h2ph tool, part of the
-standard perl distribution. This program converts \fIcpp\fR\|(1) directives
-in C header files to files containing subroutine definitions, like
-&SYS_getitimer, which you can use as arguments to your functions.
-It doesn't work perfectly, but it usually gets most of the job done.
-Simple files like \fIerrno.h\fR, \fIsyscall.h\fR, and \fIsocket.h\fR were fine,
-but the hard ones like \fIioctl.h\fR nearly always need to hand\-edited.
-Here's how to install the *.ph files:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& 1. become super-user
-\& 2. cd /usr/include
-\& 3. h2ph *.h */*.h
-.Ve
-.PP
-If your system supports dynamic loading, for reasons of portability and
-sanity you probably ought to use h2xs (also part of the standard perl
-distribution). This tool converts C header files to Perl extensions.
-See perlxstut for how to get started with h2xs.
-.PP
-If your system doesn't support dynamic loading, you still probably
-ought to use h2xs. See perlxstut and ExtUtils::MakeMaker for
-more information (in brief, just use \fBmake perl\fR instead of a plain
-\&\fBmake\fR to rebuild perl with a new static extension).
-.Sh "Why do setuid perl scripts complain about kernel problems?"
-.IX Subsection "Why do setuid perl scripts complain about kernel problems?"
-Some operating systems have bugs in the kernel that make setuid
-scripts inherently insecure. Perl gives you a number of options
-(described in perlsec) to work around such systems.
-.Sh "How can I open a pipe both to and from a command?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I open a pipe both to and from a command?"
-The IPC::Open2 module (part of the standard perl distribution) is an
-easy-to-use approach that internally uses \fIpipe()\fR, \fIfork()\fR, and \fIexec()\fR to do
-the job. Make sure you read the deadlock warnings in its documentation,
-though (see IPC::Open2). See
-\&\*(L"Bidirectional Communication with Another Process\*(R" in perlipc and
-\&\*(L"Bidirectional Communication with Yourself\*(R" in perlipc
-.PP
-You may also use the IPC::Open3 module (part of the standard perl
-distribution), but be warned that it has a different order of
-arguments from IPC::Open2 (see IPC::Open3).
-.Sh "Why can't I get the output of a command with \fIsystem()\fP?"
-.IX Subsection "Why can't I get the output of a command with system()?"
-You're confusing the purpose of \fIsystem()\fR and backticks (``). \fIsystem()\fR
-runs a command and returns exit status information (as a 16 bit value:
-the low 7 bits are the signal the process died from, if any, and
-the high 8 bits are the actual exit value). Backticks (``) run a
-command and return what it sent to \s-1STDOUT\s0.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $exit_status = system("mail-users");
-\& $output_string = `ls`;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I capture \s-1STDERR\s0 from an external command?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I capture STDERR from an external command?"
-There are three basic ways of running external commands:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& system $cmd; # using system()
-\& $output = `$cmd`; # using backticks (``)
-\& open (PIPE, "cmd |"); # using open()
-.Ve
-.PP
-With \fIsystem()\fR, both \s-1STDOUT\s0 and \s-1STDERR\s0 will go the same place as the
-script's \s-1STDOUT\s0 and \s-1STDERR\s0, unless the \fIsystem()\fR command redirects them.
-Backticks and \fIopen()\fR read \fBonly\fR the \s-1STDOUT\s0 of your command.
-.PP
-You can also use the \fIopen3()\fR function from IPC::Open3. Benjamin
-Goldberg provides some sample code:
-.PP
-To capture a program's \s-1STDOUT\s0, but discard its \s-1STDERR:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& use IPC::Open3;
-\& use File::Spec;
-\& use Symbol qw(gensym);
-\& open(NULL, ">", File::Spec->devnull);
-\& my $pid = open3(gensym, \e*PH, ">&NULL", "cmd");
-\& while( <PH> ) { }
-\& waitpid($pid, 0);
-.Ve
-.PP
-To capture a program's \s-1STDERR\s0, but discard its \s-1STDOUT:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& use IPC::Open3;
-\& use File::Spec;
-\& use Symbol qw(gensym);
-\& open(NULL, ">", File::Spec->devnull);
-\& my $pid = open3(gensym, ">&NULL", \e*PH, "cmd");
-\& while( <PH> ) { }
-\& waitpid($pid, 0);
-.Ve
-.PP
-To capture a program's \s-1STDERR\s0, and let its \s-1STDOUT\s0 go to our own \s-1STDERR:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& use IPC::Open3;
-\& use Symbol qw(gensym);
-\& my $pid = open3(gensym, ">&STDERR", \e*PH, "cmd");
-\& while( <PH> ) { }
-\& waitpid($pid, 0);
-.Ve
-.PP
-To read both a command's \s-1STDOUT\s0 and its \s-1STDERR\s0 separately, you can
-redirect them to temp files, let the command run, then read the temp
-files:
-.PP
-.Vb 10
-\& use IPC::Open3;
-\& use Symbol qw(gensym);
-\& use IO::File;
-\& local *CATCHOUT = IO::File->new_tempfile;
-\& local *CATCHERR = IO::File->new_tempfile;
-\& my $pid = open3(gensym, ">&CATCHOUT", ">&CATCHERR", "cmd");
-\& waitpid($pid, 0);
-\& seek $_, 0, 0 for \e*CATCHOUT, \e*CATCHERR;
-\& while( <CATCHOUT> ) {}
-\& while( <CATCHERR> ) {}
-.Ve
-.PP
-But there's no real need for *both* to be tempfiles... the following
-should work just as well, without deadlocking:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& use IPC::Open3;
-\& use Symbol qw(gensym);
-\& use IO::File;
-\& local *CATCHERR = IO::File->new_tempfile;
-\& my $pid = open3(gensym, \e*CATCHOUT, ">&CATCHERR", "cmd");
-\& while( <CATCHOUT> ) {}
-\& waitpid($pid, 0);
-\& seek CATCHERR, 0, 0;
-\& while( <CATCHERR> ) {}
-.Ve
-.PP
-And it'll be faster, too, since we can begin processing the program's
-stdout immediately, rather than waiting for the program to finish.
-.PP
-With any of these, you can change file descriptors before the call:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& open(STDOUT, ">logfile");
-\& system("ls");
-.Ve
-.PP
-or you can use Bourne shell file-descriptor redirection:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $output = `$cmd 2>some_file`;
-\& open (PIPE, "cmd 2>some_file |");
-.Ve
-.PP
-You can also use file-descriptor redirection to make \s-1STDERR\s0 a
-duplicate of \s-1STDOUT:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $output = `$cmd 2>&1`;
-\& open (PIPE, "cmd 2>&1 |");
-.Ve
-.PP
-Note that you \fIcannot\fR simply open \s-1STDERR\s0 to be a dup of \s-1STDOUT\s0
-in your Perl program and avoid calling the shell to do the redirection.
-This doesn't work:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& open(STDERR, ">&STDOUT");
-\& $alloutput = `cmd args`; # stderr still escapes
-.Ve
-.PP
-This fails because the \fIopen()\fR makes \s-1STDERR\s0 go to where \s-1STDOUT\s0 was
-going at the time of the \fIopen()\fR. The backticks then make \s-1STDOUT\s0 go to
-a string, but don't change \s-1STDERR\s0 (which still goes to the old
-\&\s-1STDOUT\s0).
-.PP
-Note that you \fImust\fR use Bourne shell (\fIsh\fR\|(1)) redirection syntax in
-backticks, not \fIcsh\fR\|(1)! Details on why Perl's \fIsystem()\fR and backtick
-and pipe opens all use the Bourne shell are in the
-\&\fIversus/csh.whynot\fR article in the \*(L"Far More Than You Ever Wanted To
-Know\*(R" collection in http://www.cpan.org/misc/olddoc/FMTEYEWTK.tgz . To
-capture a command's \s-1STDERR\s0 and \s-1STDOUT\s0 together:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $output = `cmd 2>&1`; # either with backticks
-\& $pid = open(PH, "cmd 2>&1 |"); # or with an open pipe
-\& while (<PH>) { } # plus a read
-.Ve
-.PP
-To capture a command's \s-1STDOUT\s0 but discard its \s-1STDERR:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $output = `cmd 2>/dev/null`; # either with backticks
-\& $pid = open(PH, "cmd 2>/dev/null |"); # or with an open pipe
-\& while (<PH>) { } # plus a read
-.Ve
-.PP
-To capture a command's \s-1STDERR\s0 but discard its \s-1STDOUT:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $output = `cmd 2>&1 1>/dev/null`; # either with backticks
-\& $pid = open(PH, "cmd 2>&1 1>/dev/null |"); # or with an open pipe
-\& while (<PH>) { } # plus a read
-.Ve
-.PP
-To exchange a command's \s-1STDOUT\s0 and \s-1STDERR\s0 in order to capture the \s-1STDERR\s0
-but leave its \s-1STDOUT\s0 to come out our old \s-1STDERR:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $output = `cmd 3>&1 1>&2 2>&3 3>&-`; # either with backticks
-\& $pid = open(PH, "cmd 3>&1 1>&2 2>&3 3>&-|");# or with an open pipe
-\& while (<PH>) { } # plus a read
-.Ve
-.PP
-To read both a command's \s-1STDOUT\s0 and its \s-1STDERR\s0 separately, it's easiest
-and safest to redirect them separately to files, and then read from those
-files when the program is done:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& system("program args 1>/tmp/program.stdout 2>/tmp/program.stderr");
-.Ve
-.PP
-Ordering is important in all these examples. That's because the shell
-processes file descriptor redirections in strictly left to right order.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& system("prog args 1>tmpfile 2>&1");
-\& system("prog args 2>&1 1>tmpfile");
-.Ve
-.PP
-The first command sends both standard out and standard error to the
-temporary file. The second command sends only the old standard output
-there, and the old standard error shows up on the old standard out.
-.Sh "Why doesn't \fIopen()\fP return an error when a pipe open fails?"
-.IX Subsection "Why doesn't open() return an error when a pipe open fails?"
-If the second argument to a piped \fIopen()\fR contains shell
-metacharacters, perl \fIfork()\fRs, then \fIexec()\fRs a shell to decode the
-metacharacters and eventually run the desired program. If the program
-couldn't be run, it's the shell that gets the message, not Perl. All
-your Perl program can find out is whether the shell itself could be
-successfully started. You can still capture the shell's \s-1STDERR\s0 and
-check it for error messages. See \*(L"How can I capture \s-1STDERR\s0 from an external command?\*(R" elsewhere in this document, or use the
-IPC::Open3 module.
-.PP
-If there are no shell metacharacters in the argument of \fIopen()\fR, Perl
-runs the command directly, without using the shell, and can correctly
-report whether the command started.
-.Sh "What's wrong with using backticks in a void context?"
-.IX Subsection "What's wrong with using backticks in a void context?"
-Strictly speaking, nothing. Stylistically speaking, it's not a good
-way to write maintainable code. Perl has several operators for
-running external commands. Backticks are one; they collect the output
-from the command for use in your program. The \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR function is
-another; it doesn't do this.
-.PP
-Writing backticks in your program sends a clear message to the readers
-of your code that you wanted to collect the output of the command.
-Why send a clear message that isn't true?
-.PP
-Consider this line:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& `cat /etc/termcap`;
-.Ve
-.PP
-You forgot to check \f(CW$?\fR to see whether the program even ran
-correctly. Even if you wrote
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print `cat /etc/termcap`;
-.Ve
-.PP
-this code could and probably should be written as
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& system("cat /etc/termcap") == 0
-\& or die "cat program failed!";
-.Ve
-.PP
-which will get the output quickly (as it is generated, instead of only
-at the end) and also check the return value.
-.PP
-\&\fIsystem()\fR also provides direct control over whether shell wildcard
-processing may take place, whereas backticks do not.
-.Sh "How can I call backticks without shell processing?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I call backticks without shell processing?"
-This is a bit tricky. You can't simply write the command
-like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& @ok = `grep @opts '$search_string' @filenames`;
-.Ve
-.PP
-As of Perl 5.8.0, you can use \fIopen()\fR with multiple arguments.
-Just like the list forms of \fIsystem()\fR and \fIexec()\fR, no shell
-escapes happen.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& open( GREP, "-|", 'grep', @opts, $search_string, @filenames );
-\& chomp(@ok = <GREP>);
-\& close GREP;
-.Ve
-.PP
-You can also:
-.PP
-.Vb 10
-\& my @ok = ();
-\& if (open(GREP, "-|")) {
-\& while (<GREP>) {
-\& chomp;
-\& push(@ok, $_);
-\& }
-\& close GREP;
-\& } else {
-\& exec 'grep', @opts, $search_string, @filenames;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Just as with \fIsystem()\fR, no shell escapes happen when you \fIexec()\fR a list.
-Further examples of this can be found in \*(L"Safe Pipe Opens\*(R" in perlipc.
-.PP
-Note that if you're use Microsoft, no solution to this vexing issue
-is even possible. Even if Perl were to emulate \fIfork()\fR, you'd still
-be stuck, because Microsoft does not have a argc/argv\-style \s-1API\s0.
-.Sh "Why can't my script read from \s-1STDIN\s0 after I gave it \s-1EOF\s0 (^D on Unix, ^Z on \s-1MS\-DOS\s0)?"
-.IX Subsection "Why can't my script read from STDIN after I gave it EOF (^D on Unix, ^Z on MS-DOS)?"
-Some stdio's set error and eof flags that need clearing. The
-\&\s-1POSIX\s0 module defines \fIclearerr()\fR that you can use. That is the
-technically correct way to do it. Here are some less reliable
-workarounds:
-.IP "1" 4
-.IX Item "1"
-Try keeping around the seekpointer and go there, like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $where = tell(LOG);
-\& seek(LOG, $where, 0);
-.Ve
-.IP "2" 4
-.IX Item "2"
-If that doesn't work, try seeking to a different part of the file and
-then back.
-.IP "3" 4
-.IX Item "3"
-If that doesn't work, try seeking to a different part of
-the file, reading something, and then seeking back.
-.IP "4" 4
-.IX Item "4"
-If that doesn't work, give up on your stdio package and use sysread.
-.Sh "How can I convert my shell script to perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I convert my shell script to perl?"
-Learn Perl and rewrite it. Seriously, there's no simple converter.
-Things that are awkward to do in the shell are easy to do in Perl, and
-this very awkwardness is what would make a shell\->perl converter
-nigh-on impossible to write. By rewriting it, you'll think about what
-you're really trying to do, and hopefully will escape the shell's
-pipeline datastream paradigm, which while convenient for some matters,
-causes many inefficiencies.
-.Sh "Can I use perl to run a telnet or ftp session?"
-.IX Subsection "Can I use perl to run a telnet or ftp session?"
-Try the Net::FTP, TCP::Client, and Net::Telnet modules (available from
-\&\s-1CPAN\s0). http://www.cpan.org/scripts/netstuff/telnet.emul.shar
-will also help for emulating the telnet protocol, but Net::Telnet is
-quite probably easier to use..
-.PP
-If all you want to do is pretend to be telnet but don't need
-the initial telnet handshaking, then the standard dual-process
-approach will suffice:
-.PP
-.Vb 12
-\& use IO::Socket; # new in 5.004
-\& $handle = IO::Socket::INET->new('www.perl.com:80')
-\& || die "can't connect to port 80 on www.perl.com: $!";
-\& $handle->autoflush(1);
-\& if (fork()) { # XXX: undef means failure
-\& select($handle);
-\& print while <STDIN>; # everything from stdin to socket
-\& } else {
-\& print while <$handle>; # everything from socket to stdout
-\& }
-\& close $handle;
-\& exit;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I write expect in Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I write expect in Perl?"
-Once upon a time, there was a library called chat2.pl (part of the
-standard perl distribution), which never really got finished. If you
-find it somewhere, \fIdon't use it\fR. These days, your best bet is to
-look at the Expect module available from \s-1CPAN\s0, which also requires two
-other modules from \s-1CPAN\s0, IO::Pty and IO::Stty.
-.ie n .Sh "Is there a way to hide perl's command line from programs such as ""ps""?"
-.el .Sh "Is there a way to hide perl's command line from programs such as ``ps''?"
-.IX Subsection "Is there a way to hide perl's command line from programs such as ps?"
-First of all note that if you're doing this for security reasons (to
-avoid people seeing passwords, for example) then you should rewrite
-your program so that critical information is never given as an
-argument. Hiding the arguments won't make your program completely
-secure.
-.PP
-To actually alter the visible command line, you can assign to the
-variable \f(CW$0\fR as documented in perlvar. This won't work on all
-operating systems, though. Daemon programs like sendmail place their
-state there, as in:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $0 = "orcus [accepting connections]";
-.Ve
-.Sh "I {changed directory, modified my environment} in a perl script. How come the change disappeared when I exited the script? How do I get my changes to be visible?"
-.IX Subsection "I {changed directory, modified my environment} in a perl script. How come the change disappeared when I exited the script? How do I get my changes to be visible?"
-.IP "Unix" 4
-.IX Item "Unix"
-In the strictest sense, it can't be done\*(--the script executes as a
-different process from the shell it was started from. Changes to a
-process are not reflected in its parent\*(--only in any children
-created after the change. There is shell magic that may allow you to
-fake it by \fIeval()\fRing the script's output in your shell; check out the
-comp.unix.questions \s-1FAQ\s0 for details.
-.Sh "How do I close a process's filehandle without waiting for it to complete?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I close a process's filehandle without waiting for it to complete?"
-Assuming your system supports such things, just send an appropriate signal
-to the process (see \*(L"kill\*(R" in perlfunc). It's common to first send a \s-1TERM\s0
-signal, wait a little bit, and then send a \s-1KILL\s0 signal to finish it off.
-.Sh "How do I fork a daemon process?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I fork a daemon process?"
-If by daemon process you mean one that's detached (disassociated from
-its tty), then the following process is reported to work on most
-Unixish systems. Non-Unix users should check their Your_OS::Process
-module for other solutions.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Open /dev/tty and use the \s-1TIOCNOTTY\s0 ioctl on it. See tty
-for details. Or better yet, you can just use the \fIPOSIX::setsid()\fR
-function, so you don't have to worry about process groups.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Change directory to /
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Reopen \s-1STDIN\s0, \s-1STDOUT\s0, and \s-1STDERR\s0 so they're not connected to the old
-tty.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Background yourself like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& fork && exit;
-.Ve
-.PP
-The Proc::Daemon module, available from \s-1CPAN\s0, provides a function to
-perform these actions for you.
-.Sh "How do I find out if I'm running interactively or not?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I find out if I'm running interactively or not?"
-Good question. Sometimes \f(CW\*(C`\-t STDIN\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-t STDOUT\*(C'\fR can give clues,
-sometimes not.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& if (-t STDIN && -t STDOUT) {
-\& print "Now what? ";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-On \s-1POSIX\s0 systems, you can test whether your own process group matches
-the current process group of your controlling terminal as follows:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& use POSIX qw/getpgrp tcgetpgrp/;
-\& open(TTY, "/dev/tty") or die $!;
-\& $tpgrp = tcgetpgrp(fileno(*TTY));
-\& $pgrp = getpgrp();
-\& if ($tpgrp == $pgrp) {
-\& print "foreground\en";
-\& } else {
-\& print "background\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I timeout a slow event?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I timeout a slow event?"
-Use the \fIalarm()\fR function, probably in conjunction with a signal
-handler, as documented in \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc and the section on
-``Signals'' in the Camel. You may instead use the more flexible
-Sys::AlarmCall module available from \s-1CPAN\s0.
-.PP
-The \fIalarm()\fR function is not implemented on all versions of Windows.
-Check the documentation for your specific version of Perl.
-.Sh "How do I set \s-1CPU\s0 limits?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I set CPU limits?"
-Use the BSD::Resource module from \s-1CPAN\s0.
-.Sh "How do I avoid zombies on a Unix system?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I avoid zombies on a Unix system?"
-Use the reaper code from \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc to call \fIwait()\fR when a
-\&\s-1SIGCHLD\s0 is received, or else use the double-fork technique described
-in \*(L"How do I start a process in the background?\*(R" in perlfaq8.
-.Sh "How do I use an \s-1SQL\s0 database?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I use an SQL database?"
-The \s-1DBI\s0 module provides an abstract interface to most database
-servers and types, including Oracle, \s-1DB2\s0, Sybase, mysql, Postgresql,
-\&\s-1ODBC\s0, and flat files. The \s-1DBI\s0 module accesses each database type
-through a database driver, or \s-1DBD\s0. You can see a complete list of
-available drivers on \s-1CPAN:\s0 http://www.cpan.org/modules/by\-module/DBD/ .
-You can read more about \s-1DBI\s0 on http://dbi.perl.org .
-.PP
-Other modules provide more specific access: Win32::ODBC, Alzabo, iodbc,
-and others found on \s-1CPAN\s0 Search: http://search.cpan.org .
-.Sh "How do I make a \fIsystem()\fP exit on control\-C?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I make a system() exit on control-C?"
-You can't. You need to imitate the \fIsystem()\fR call (see perlipc for
-sample code) and then have a signal handler for the \s-1INT\s0 signal that
-passes the signal on to the subprocess. Or you can check for it:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $rc = system($cmd);
-\& if ($rc & 127) { die "signal death" }
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I open a file without blocking?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I open a file without blocking?"
-If you're lucky enough to be using a system that supports
-non-blocking reads (most Unixish systems do), you need only to use the
-O_NDELAY or O_NONBLOCK flag from the Fcntl module in conjunction with
-\&\fIsysopen()\fR:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use Fcntl;
-\& sysopen(FH, "/tmp/somefile", O_WRONLY|O_NDELAY|O_CREAT, 0644)
-\& or die "can't open /tmp/somefile: $!":
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I install a module from \s-1CPAN\s0?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I install a module from CPAN?"
-The easiest way is to have a module also named \s-1CPAN\s0 do it for you.
-This module comes with perl version 5.004 and later.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $ perl -MCPAN -e shell
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& cpan shell -- CPAN exploration and modules installation (v1.59_54)
-\& ReadLine support enabled
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& cpan> install Some::Module
-.Ve
-.PP
-To manually install the \s-1CPAN\s0 module, or any well-behaved \s-1CPAN\s0 module
-for that matter, follow these steps:
-.IP "1" 4
-.IX Item "1"
-Unpack the source into a temporary area.
-.IP "2" 4
-.IX Item "2"
-.Vb 1
-\& perl Makefile.PL
-.Ve
-.IP "3" 4
-.IX Item "3"
-.Vb 1
-\& make
-.Ve
-.IP "4" 4
-.IX Item "4"
-.Vb 1
-\& make test
-.Ve
-.IP "5" 4
-.IX Item "5"
-.Vb 1
-\& make install
-.Ve
-.PP
-If your version of perl is compiled without dynamic loading, then you
-just need to replace step 3 (\fBmake\fR) with \fBmake perl\fR and you will
-get a new \fIperl\fR binary with your extension linked in.
-.PP
-See ExtUtils::MakeMaker for more details on building extensions.
-See also the next question, ``What's the difference between require
-and use?''.
-.Sh "What's the difference between require and use?"
-.IX Subsection "What's the difference between require and use?"
-Perl offers several different ways to include code from one file into
-another. Here are the deltas between the various inclusion constructs:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& 1) do $file is like eval `cat $file`, except the former
-\& 1.1: searches @INC and updates %INC.
-\& 1.2: bequeaths an *unrelated* lexical scope on the eval'ed code.
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& 2) require $file is like do $file, except the former
-\& 2.1: checks for redundant loading, skipping already loaded files.
-\& 2.2: raises an exception on failure to find, compile, or execute $file.
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& 3) require Module is like require "Module.pm", except the former
-\& 3.1: translates each "::" into your system's directory separator.
-\& 3.2: primes the parser to disambiguate class Module as an indirect object.
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& 4) use Module is like require Module, except the former
-\& 4.1: loads the module at compile time, not run-time.
-\& 4.2: imports symbols and semantics from that package to the current one.
-.Ve
-.PP
-In general, you usually want \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR and a proper Perl module.
-.Sh "How do I keep my own module/library directory?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I keep my own module/library directory?"
-When you build modules, use the \s-1PREFIX\s0 and \s-1LIB\s0 options when generating
-Makefiles:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl Makefile.PL PREFIX=/mydir/perl LIB=/mydir/perl/lib
-.Ve
-.PP
-then either set the \s-1PERL5LIB\s0 environment variable before you run
-scripts that use the modules/libraries (see perlrun) or say
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use lib '/mydir/perl/lib';
-.Ve
-.PP
-This is almost the same as
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& BEGIN {
-\& unshift(@INC, '/mydir/perl/lib');
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-except that the lib module checks for machine-dependent subdirectories.
-See Perl's lib for more information.
-.Sh "How do I add the directory my program lives in to the module/library search path?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I add the directory my program lives in to the module/library search path?"
-.Vb 3
-\& use FindBin;
-\& use lib "$FindBin::Bin";
-\& use your_own_modules;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I add a directory to my include path (@INC) at runtime?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I add a directory to my include path (@INC) at runtime?"
-Here are the suggested ways of modifying your include path:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& the PERLLIB environment variable
-\& the PERL5LIB environment variable
-\& the perl -Idir command line flag
-\& the use lib pragma, as in
-\& use lib "$ENV{HOME}/myown_perllib";
-.Ve
-.PP
-The latter is particularly useful because it knows about machine
-dependent architectures. The lib.pm pragmatic module was first
-included with the 5.002 release of Perl.
-.Sh "What is socket.ph and where do I get it?"
-.IX Subsection "What is socket.ph and where do I get it?"
-It's a perl4\-style file defining values for system networking
-constants. Sometimes it is built using h2ph when Perl is installed,
-but other times it is not. Modern programs \f(CW\*(C`use Socket;\*(C'\fR instead.
-.SH "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1997\-2003 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington.
-All rights reserved.
-.PP
-This documentation is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-under the same terms as Perl itself.
-.PP
-Irrespective of its distribution, all code examples in this file
-are hereby placed into the public domain. You are permitted and
-encouraged to use this code in your own programs for fun
-or for profit as you see fit. A simple comment in the code giving
-credit would be courteous but is not required.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfaq9.1 b/raw/man1/perlfaq9.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f5d151f..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfaq9.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,841 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFAQ9 1"
-.TH PERLFAQ9 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfaq9 \- Networking ($Revision: 1.1 $, $Date: 2004/06/16 12:41:53 $)
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-This section deals with questions related to networking, the internet,
-and a few on the web.
-.Sh "What is the correct form of response from a \s-1CGI\s0 script?"
-.IX Subsection "What is the correct form of response from a CGI script?"
-(Alan Flavell <flavell+www at a5.ph.gla.ac.uk> answers...)
-.PP
-The Common Gateway Interface (\s-1CGI\s0) specifies a software interface between
-a program (\*(L"\s-1CGI\s0 script\*(R") and a web server (\s-1HTTPD\s0). It is not specific
-to Perl, and has its own FAQs and tutorials, and usenet group,
-comp.infosystems.www.authoring.cgi
-.PP
-The original \s-1CGI\s0 specification is at: http://hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu/cgi/
-.PP
-Current best-practice \s-1RFC\s0 draft at: http://CGI\-Spec.Golux.Com/
-.PP
-Other relevant documentation listed in: http://www.perl.org/CGI_MetaFAQ.html
-.PP
-These Perl FAQs very selectively cover some \s-1CGI\s0 issues. However, Perl
-programmers are strongly advised to use the \s-1CGI\s0.pm module, to take care
-of the details for them.
-.PP
-The similarity between \s-1CGI\s0 response headers (defined in the \s-1CGI\s0
-specification) and \s-1HTTP\s0 response headers (defined in the \s-1HTTP\s0
-specification, \s-1RFC2616\s0) is intentional, but can sometimes be confusing.
-.PP
-The \s-1CGI\s0 specification defines two kinds of script: the \*(L"Parsed Header\*(R"
-script, and the \*(L"Non Parsed Header\*(R" (\s-1NPH\s0) script. Check your server
-documentation to see what it supports. \*(L"Parsed Header\*(R" scripts are
-simpler in various respects. The \s-1CGI\s0 specification allows any of the
-usual newline representations in the \s-1CGI\s0 response (it's the server's
-job to create an accurate \s-1HTTP\s0 response based on it). So \*(L"\en\*(R" written in
-text mode is technically correct, and recommended. \s-1NPH\s0 scripts are more
-tricky: they must put out a complete and accurate set of \s-1HTTP\s0
-transaction response headers; the \s-1HTTP\s0 specification calls for records
-to be terminated with carriage-return and line\-feed, i.e \s-1ASCII\s0 \e015\e012
-written in binary mode.
-.PP
-Using \s-1CGI\s0.pm gives excellent platform independence, including \s-1EBCDIC\s0
-systems. \s-1CGI\s0.pm selects an appropriate newline representation
-($CGI::CRLF) and sets binmode as appropriate.
-.Sh "My \s-1CGI\s0 script runs from the command line but not the browser. (500 Server Error)"
-.IX Subsection "My CGI script runs from the command line but not the browser. (500 Server Error)"
-Several things could be wrong. You can go through the \*(L"Troubleshooting
-Perl \s-1CGI\s0 scripts\*(R" guide at
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& http://www.perl.org/troubleshooting_CGI.html
-.Ve
-.PP
-If, after that, you can demonstrate that you've read the FAQs and that
-your problem isn't something simple that can be easily answered, you'll
-probably receive a courteous and useful reply to your question if you
-post it on comp.infosystems.www.authoring.cgi (if it's something to do
-with \s-1HTTP\s0 or the \s-1CGI\s0 protocols). Questions that appear to be Perl
-questions but are really \s-1CGI\s0 ones that are posted to comp.lang.perl.misc
-are not so well received.
-.PP
-The useful FAQs, related documents, and troubleshooting guides are
-listed in the \s-1CGI\s0 Meta \s-1FAQ:\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& http://www.perl.org/CGI_MetaFAQ.html
-.Ve
-.Sh "How can I get better error messages from a \s-1CGI\s0 program?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I get better error messages from a CGI program?"
-Use the CGI::Carp module. It replaces \f(CW\*(C`warn\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR, plus the
-normal Carp modules \f(CW\*(C`carp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`croak\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`confess\*(C'\fR functions with
-more verbose and safer versions. It still sends them to the normal
-server error log.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use CGI::Carp;
-\& warn "This is a complaint";
-\& die "But this one is serious";
-.Ve
-.PP
-The following use of CGI::Carp also redirects errors to a file of your choice,
-placed in a \s-1BEGIN\s0 block to catch compile-time warnings as well:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& BEGIN {
-\& use CGI::Carp qw(carpout);
-\& open(LOG, ">>/var/local/cgi-logs/mycgi-log")
-\& or die "Unable to append to mycgi-log: $!\en";
-\& carpout(*LOG);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-You can even arrange for fatal errors to go back to the client browser,
-which is nice for your own debugging, but might confuse the end user.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use CGI::Carp qw(fatalsToBrowser);
-\& die "Bad error here";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Even if the error happens before you get the \s-1HTTP\s0 header out, the module
-will try to take care of this to avoid the dreaded server 500 errors.
-Normal warnings still go out to the server error log (or wherever
-you've sent them with \f(CW\*(C`carpout\*(C'\fR) with the application name and date
-stamp prepended.
-.Sh "How do I remove \s-1HTML\s0 from a string?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I remove HTML from a string?"
-The most correct way (albeit not the fastest) is to use HTML::Parser
-from \s-1CPAN\s0. Another mostly correct
-way is to use HTML::FormatText which not only removes \s-1HTML\s0 but also
-attempts to do a little simple formatting of the resulting plain text.
-.PP
-Many folks attempt a simple-minded regular expression approach, like
-\&\f(CW\*(C`s/<.*?>//g\*(C'\fR, but that fails in many cases because the tags
-may continue over line breaks, they may contain quoted angle\-brackets,
-or \s-1HTML\s0 comment may be present. Plus, folks forget to convert
-entities\*(--like \f(CW\*(C`<\*(C'\fR for example.
-.PP
-Here's one \*(L"simple\-minded\*(R" approach, that works for most files:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& #!/usr/bin/perl -p0777
-\& s/<(?:[^>'"]*|(['"]).*?\e1)*>//gs
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you want a more complete solution, see the 3\-stage striphtml
-program in
-http://www.cpan.org/authors/Tom_Christiansen/scripts/striphtml.gz
-\&.
-.PP
-Here are some tricky cases that you should think about when picking
-a solution:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& <IMG SRC = "foo.gif" ALT = "A > B">
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& <IMG SRC = "foo.gif"
-\& ALT = "A > B">
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& <!-- <A comment> -->
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& <script>if (a<b && a>c)</script>
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& <# Just data #>
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& <![INCLUDE CDATA [ >>>>>>>>>>>> ]]>
-.Ve
-.PP
-If \s-1HTML\s0 comments include other tags, those solutions would also break
-on text like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& <!-- This section commented out.
-\& <B>You can't see me!</B>
-\& -->
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I extract URLs?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I extract URLs?"
-You can easily extract all sorts of URLs from \s-1HTML\s0 with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`HTML::SimpleLinkExtor\*(C'\fR which handles anchors, images, objects,
-frames, and many other tags that can contain a \s-1URL\s0. If you need
-anything more complex, you can create your own subclass of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`HTML::LinkExtor\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`HTML::Parser\*(C'\fR. You might even use
-\&\f(CW\*(C`HTML::SimpleLinkExtor\*(C'\fR as an example for something specifically
-suited to your needs.
-.PP
-You can use URI::Find to extract URLs from an arbitrary text document.
-.PP
-Less complete solutions involving regular expressions can save
-you a lot of processing time if you know that the input is simple. One
-solution from Tom Christiansen runs 100 times faster than most
-module based approaches but only extracts URLs from anchors where the first
-attribute is \s-1HREF\s0 and there are no other attributes.
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& #!/usr/bin/perl -n00
-\& # qxurl - tchrist at perl.com
-\& print "$2\en" while m{
-\& < \es*
-\& A \es+ HREF \es* = \es* (["']) (.*?) \e1
-\& \es* >
-\& }gsix;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I download a file from the user's machine? How do I open a file on another machine?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I download a file from the user's machine? How do I open a file on another machine?"
-In this case, download means to use the file upload feature of \s-1HTML\s0
-forms. You allow the web surfer to specify a file to send to your web
-server. To you it looks like a download, and to the user it looks
-like an upload. No matter what you call it, you do it with what's
-known as \fBmultipart/form\-data\fR encoding. The \s-1CGI\s0.pm module (which
-comes with Perl as part of the Standard Library) supports this in the
-\&\fIstart_multipart_form()\fR method, which isn't the same as the \fIstartform()\fR
-method.
-.PP
-See the section in the \s-1CGI\s0.pm documentation on file uploads for code
-examples and details.
-.Sh "How do I make a pop-up menu in \s-1HTML\s0?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I make a pop-up menu in HTML?"
-Use the \fB<\s-1SELECT\s0>\fR and \fB<\s-1OPTION\s0>\fR tags. The \s-1CGI\s0.pm
-module (available from \s-1CPAN\s0) supports this widget, as well as many
-others, including some that it cleverly synthesizes on its own.
-.Sh "How do I fetch an \s-1HTML\s0 file?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I fetch an HTML file?"
-One approach, if you have the lynx text-based \s-1HTML\s0 browser installed
-on your system, is this:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $html_code = `lynx -source $url`;
-\& $text_data = `lynx -dump $url`;
-.Ve
-.PP
-The libwww-perl (\s-1LWP\s0) modules from \s-1CPAN\s0 provide a more powerful way
-to do this. They don't require lynx, but like lynx, can still work
-through proxies:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& # simplest version
-\& use LWP::Simple;
-\& $content = get($URL);
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& # or print HTML from a URL
-\& use LWP::Simple;
-\& getprint "http://www.linpro.no/lwp/";
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 11
-\& # or print ASCII from HTML from a URL
-\& # also need HTML-Tree package from CPAN
-\& use LWP::Simple;
-\& use HTML::Parser;
-\& use HTML::FormatText;
-\& my ($html, $ascii);
-\& $html = get("http://www.perl.com/");
-\& defined $html
-\& or die "Can't fetch HTML from http://www.perl.com/";
-\& $ascii = HTML::FormatText->new->format(parse_html($html));
-\& print $ascii;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I automate an \s-1HTML\s0 form submission?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I automate an HTML form submission?"
-If you're submitting values using the \s-1GET\s0 method, create a \s-1URL\s0 and encode
-the form using the \f(CW\*(C`query_form\*(C'\fR method:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use LWP::Simple;
-\& use URI::URL;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& my $url = url('http://www.perl.com/cgi-bin/cpan_mod');
-\& $url->query_form(module => 'DB_File', readme => 1);
-\& $content = get($url);
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you're using the \s-1POST\s0 method, create your own user agent and encode
-the content appropriately.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use HTTP::Request::Common qw(POST);
-\& use LWP::UserAgent;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& $ua = LWP::UserAgent->new();
-\& my $req = POST 'http://www.perl.com/cgi-bin/cpan_mod',
-\& [ module => 'DB_File', readme => 1 ];
-\& $content = $ua->request($req)->as_string;
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I decode or create those %\-encodings on the web?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I decode or create those %-encodings on the web?"
-If you are writing a \s-1CGI\s0 script, you should be using the \s-1CGI\s0.pm module
-that comes with perl, or some other equivalent module. The \s-1CGI\s0 module
-automatically decodes queries for you, and provides an \fIescape()\fR
-function to handle encoding.
-.PP
-The best source of detailed information on \s-1URI\s0 encoding is \s-1RFC\s0 2396.
-Basically, the following substitutions do it:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& s/([^\ew()'*~!.-])/sprintf '%%%02x', ord $1/eg; # encode
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& s/%([A-Fa-f\ed]{2})/chr hex $1/eg; # decode
-.Ve
-.PP
-However, you should only apply them to individual \s-1URI\s0 components, not
-the entire \s-1URI\s0, otherwise you'll lose information and generally mess
-things up. If that didn't explain it, don't worry. Just go read
-section 2 of the \s-1RFC\s0, it's probably the best explanation there is.
-.PP
-\&\s-1RFC\s0 2396 also contains a lot of other useful information, including a
-regexp for breaking any arbitrary \s-1URI\s0 into components (Appendix B).
-.Sh "How do I redirect to another page?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I redirect to another page?"
-Specify the complete \s-1URL\s0 of the destination (even if it is on the same
-server). This is one of the two different kinds of \s-1CGI\s0 \*(L"Location:\*(R"
-responses which are defined in the \s-1CGI\s0 specification for a Parsed Headers
-script. The other kind (an absolute URLpath) is resolved internally to
-the server without any \s-1HTTP\s0 redirection. The \s-1CGI\s0 specifications do not
-allow relative URLs in either case.
-.PP
-Use of \s-1CGI\s0.pm is strongly recommended. This example shows redirection
-with a complete \s-1URL\s0. This redirection is handled by the web browser.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use CGI qw/:standard/;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& my $url = 'http://www.cpan.org/';
-\& print redirect($url);
-.Ve
-.PP
-This example shows a redirection with an absolute URLpath. This
-redirection is handled by the local web server.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& my $url = '/CPAN/index.html';
-\& print redirect($url);
-.Ve
-.PP
-But if coded directly, it could be as follows (the final \*(L"\en\*(R" is
-shown separately, for clarity), using either a complete \s-1URL\s0 or
-an absolute URLpath.
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& print "Location: $url\en"; # CGI response header
-\& print "\en"; # end of headers
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I put a password on my web pages?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I put a password on my web pages?"
-To enable authentication for your web server, you need to configure
-your web server. The configuration is different for different sorts
-of web servers\-\-\-apache does it differently from iPlanet which does
-it differently from \s-1IIS\s0. Check your web server documentation for
-the details for your particular server.
-.Sh "How do I edit my .htpasswd and .htgroup files with Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I edit my .htpasswd and .htgroup files with Perl?"
-The HTTPD::UserAdmin and HTTPD::GroupAdmin modules provide a
-consistent \s-1OO\s0 interface to these files, regardless of how they're
-stored. Databases may be text, dbm, Berkeley \s-1DB\s0 or any database with
-a \s-1DBI\s0 compatible driver. HTTPD::UserAdmin supports files used by the
-`Basic' and `Digest' authentication schemes. Here's an example:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& use HTTPD::UserAdmin ();
-\& HTTPD::UserAdmin
-\& ->new(DB => "/foo/.htpasswd")
-\& ->add($username => $password);
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I make sure users can't enter values into a form that cause my \s-1CGI\s0 script to do bad things?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I make sure users can't enter values into a form that cause my CGI script to do bad things?"
-See the security references listed in the \s-1CGI\s0 Meta \s-1FAQ\s0
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& http://www.perl.org/CGI_MetaFAQ.html
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I parse a mail header?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I parse a mail header?"
-For a quick-and-dirty solution, try this solution derived
-from \*(L"split\*(R" in perlfunc:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& $/ = '';
-\& $header = <MSG>;
-\& $header =~ s/\en\es+/ /g; # merge continuation lines
-\& %head = ( UNIX_FROM_LINE, split /^([-\ew]+):\es*/m, $header );
-.Ve
-.PP
-That solution doesn't do well if, for example, you're trying to
-maintain all the Received lines. A more complete approach is to use
-the Mail::Header module from \s-1CPAN\s0 (part of the MailTools package).
-.Sh "How do I decode a \s-1CGI\s0 form?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I decode a CGI form?"
-You use a standard module, probably \s-1CGI\s0.pm. Under no circumstances
-should you attempt to do so by hand!
-.PP
-You'll see a lot of \s-1CGI\s0 programs that blindly read from \s-1STDIN\s0 the number
-of bytes equal to \s-1CONTENT_LENGTH\s0 for POSTs, or grab \s-1QUERY_STRING\s0 for
-decoding GETs. These programs are very poorly written. They only work
-sometimes. They typically forget to check the return value of the \fIread()\fR
-system call, which is a cardinal sin. They don't handle \s-1HEAD\s0 requests.
-They don't handle multipart forms used for file uploads. They don't deal
-with \s-1GET/POST\s0 combinations where query fields are in more than one place.
-They don't deal with keywords in the query string.
-.PP
-In short, they're bad hacks. Resist them at all costs. Please do not be
-tempted to reinvent the wheel. Instead, use the \s-1CGI\s0.pm or CGI_Lite.pm
-(available from \s-1CPAN\s0), or if you're trapped in the module-free land
-of perl1 .. perl4, you might look into cgi\-lib.pl (available from
-http://cgi\-lib.stanford.edu/cgi\-lib/ ).
-.PP
-Make sure you know whether to use a \s-1GET\s0 or a \s-1POST\s0 in your form.
-GETs should only be used for something that doesn't update the server.
-Otherwise you can get mangled databases and repeated feedback mail
-messages. The fancy word for this is ``idempotency''. This simply
-means that there should be no difference between making a \s-1GET\s0 request
-for a particular \s-1URL\s0 once or multiple times. This is because the
-\&\s-1HTTP\s0 protocol definition says that a \s-1GET\s0 request may be cached by the
-browser, or server, or an intervening proxy. \s-1POST\s0 requests cannot be
-cached, because each request is independent and matters. Typically,
-\&\s-1POST\s0 requests change or depend on state on the server (query or update
-a database, send mail, or purchase a computer).
-.Sh "How do I check a valid mail address?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I check a valid mail address?"
-You can't, at least, not in real time. Bummer, eh?
-.PP
-Without sending mail to the address and seeing whether there's a human
-on the other hand to answer you, you cannot determine whether a mail
-address is valid. Even if you apply the mail header standard, you
-can have problems, because there are deliverable addresses that aren't
-\&\s-1RFC\-822\s0 (the mail header standard) compliant, and addresses that aren't
-deliverable which are compliant.
-.PP
-You can use the Email::Valid or RFC::RFC822::Address which check
-the format of the address, although they cannot actually tell you
-if it is a deliverable address (i.e. that mail to the address
-will not bounce). Modules like Mail::CheckUser and Mail::EXPN
-try to interact with the domain name system or particular
-mail servers to learn even more, but their methods do not
-work everywhere\-\-\-especially for security conscious administrators.
-.PP
-Many are tempted to try to eliminate many frequently-invalid
-mail addresses with a simple regex, such as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`/^[\ew.\-]+\e@(?:[\ew\-]+\e.)+\ew+$/\*(C'\fR. It's a very bad idea. However,
-this also throws out many valid ones, and says nothing about
-potential deliverability, so it is not suggested. Instead, see
-http://www.cpan.org/authors/Tom_Christiansen/scripts/ckaddr.gz ,
-which actually checks against the full \s-1RFC\s0 spec (except for nested
-comments), looks for addresses you may not wish to accept mail to
-(say, Bill Clinton or your postmaster), and then makes sure that the
-hostname given can be looked up in the \s-1DNS\s0 \s-1MX\s0 records. It's not fast,
-but it works for what it tries to do.
-.PP
-Our best advice for verifying a person's mail address is to have them
-enter their address twice, just as you normally do to change a password.
-This usually weeds out typos. If both versions match, send
-mail to that address with a personal message that looks somewhat like:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& Dear someuser at host.com,
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& Please confirm the mail address you gave us Wed May 6 09:38:41
-\& MDT 1998 by replying to this message. Include the string
-\& "Rumpelstiltskin" in that reply, but spelled in reverse; that is,
-\& start with "Nik...". Once this is done, your confirmed address will
-\& be entered into our records.
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you get the message back and they've followed your directions,
-you can be reasonably assured that it's real.
-.PP
-A related strategy that's less open to forgery is to give them a \s-1PIN\s0
-(personal \s-1ID\s0 number). Record the address and \s-1PIN\s0 (best that it be a
-random one) for later processing. In the mail you send, ask them to
-include the \s-1PIN\s0 in their reply. But if it bounces, or the message is
-included via a ``vacation'' script, it'll be there anyway. So it's
-best to ask them to mail back a slight alteration of the \s-1PIN\s0, such as
-with the characters reversed, one added or subtracted to each digit, etc.
-.Sh "How do I decode a \s-1MIME/BASE64\s0 string?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I decode a MIME/BASE64 string?"
-The MIME\-Base64 package (available from \s-1CPAN\s0) handles this as well as
-the \s-1MIME/QP\s0 encoding. Decoding \s-1BASE64\s0 becomes as simple as:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use MIME::Base64;
-\& $decoded = decode_base64($encoded);
-.Ve
-.PP
-The MIME-Tools package (available from \s-1CPAN\s0) supports extraction with
-decoding of \s-1BASE64\s0 encoded attachments and content directly from email
-messages.
-.PP
-If the string to decode is short (less than 84 bytes long)
-a more direct approach is to use the \fIunpack()\fR function's \*(L"u\*(R"
-format after minor transliterations:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& tr#A-Za-z0-9+/##cd; # remove non-base64 chars
-\& tr#A-Za-z0-9+/# -_#; # convert to uuencoded format
-\& $len = pack("c", 32 + 0.75*length); # compute length byte
-\& print unpack("u", $len . $_); # uudecode and print
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I return the user's mail address?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I return the user's mail address?"
-On systems that support getpwuid, the $< variable, and the
-Sys::Hostname module (which is part of the standard perl distribution),
-you can probably try using something like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& use Sys::Hostname;
-\& $address = sprintf('%s@%s', scalar getpwuid($<), hostname);
-.Ve
-.PP
-Company policies on mail address can mean that this generates addresses
-that the company's mail system will not accept, so you should ask for
-users' mail addresses when this matters. Furthermore, not all systems
-on which Perl runs are so forthcoming with this information as is Unix.
-.PP
-The Mail::Util module from \s-1CPAN\s0 (part of the MailTools package) provides a
-\&\fImailaddress()\fR function that tries to guess the mail address of the user.
-It makes a more intelligent guess than the code above, using information
-given when the module was installed, but it could still be incorrect.
-Again, the best way is often just to ask the user.
-.Sh "How do I send mail?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I send mail?"
-Use the \f(CW\*(C`sendmail\*(C'\fR program directly:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& open(SENDMAIL, "|/usr/lib/sendmail -oi -t -odq")
-\& or die "Can't fork for sendmail: $!\en";
-\& print SENDMAIL <<"EOF";
-\& From: User Originating Mail <me\e at host>
-\& To: Final Destination <you\e at otherhost>
-\& Subject: A relevant subject line
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& Body of the message goes here after the blank line
-\& in as many lines as you like.
-\& EOF
-\& close(SENDMAIL) or warn "sendmail didn't close nicely";
-.Ve
-.PP
-The \fB\-oi\fR option prevents sendmail from interpreting a line consisting
-of a single dot as \*(L"end of message\*(R". The \fB\-t\fR option says to use the
-headers to decide who to send the message to, and \fB\-odq\fR says to put
-the message into the queue. This last option means your message won't
-be immediately delivered, so leave it out if you want immediate
-delivery.
-.PP
-Alternate, less convenient approaches include calling mail (sometimes
-called mailx) directly or simply opening up port 25 have having an
-intimate conversation between just you and the remote \s-1SMTP\s0 daemon,
-probably sendmail.
-.PP
-Or you might be able use the \s-1CPAN\s0 module Mail::Mailer:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use Mail::Mailer;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& $mailer = Mail::Mailer->new();
-\& $mailer->open({ From => $from_address,
-\& To => $to_address,
-\& Subject => $subject,
-\& })
-\& or die "Can't open: $!\en";
-\& print $mailer $body;
-\& $mailer->close();
-.Ve
-.PP
-The Mail::Internet module uses Net::SMTP which is less Unix-centric than
-Mail::Mailer, but less reliable. Avoid raw \s-1SMTP\s0 commands. There
-are many reasons to use a mail transport agent like sendmail. These
-include queuing, \s-1MX\s0 records, and security.
-.Sh "How do I use \s-1MIME\s0 to make an attachment to a mail message?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I use MIME to make an attachment to a mail message?"
-This answer is extracted directly from the MIME::Lite documentation.
-Create a multipart message (i.e., one with attachments).
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& use MIME::Lite;
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& ### Create a new multipart message:
-\& $msg = MIME::Lite->new(
-\& From =>'me at myhost.com',
-\& To =>'you at yourhost.com',
-\& Cc =>'some at other.com, some at more.com',
-\& Subject =>'A message with 2 parts...',
-\& Type =>'multipart/mixed'
-\& );
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& ### Add parts (each "attach" has same arguments as "new"):
-\& $msg->attach(Type =>'TEXT',
-\& Data =>"Here's the GIF file you wanted"
-\& );
-\& $msg->attach(Type =>'image/gif',
-\& Path =>'aaa000123.gif',
-\& Filename =>'logo.gif'
-\& );
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $text = $msg->as_string;
-.Ve
-.PP
-MIME::Lite also includes a method for sending these things.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $msg->send;
-.Ve
-.PP
-This defaults to using sendmail but can be customized to use
-\&\s-1SMTP\s0 via Net::SMTP.
-.Sh "How do I read mail?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I read mail?"
-While you could use the Mail::Folder module from \s-1CPAN\s0 (part of the
-MailFolder package) or the Mail::Internet module from \s-1CPAN\s0 (part
-of the MailTools package), often a module is overkill. Here's a
-mail sorter.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& #!/usr/bin/perl
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 13
-\& my(@msgs, @sub);
-\& my $msgno = -1;
-\& $/ = ''; # paragraph reads
-\& while (<>) {
-\& if (/^From /m) {
-\& /^Subject:\es*(?:Re:\es*)*(.*)/mi;
-\& $sub[++$msgno] = lc($1) || '';
-\& }
-\& $msgs[$msgno] .= $_;
-\& }
-\& for my $i (sort { $sub[$a] cmp $sub[$b] || $a <=> $b } (0 .. $#msgs)) {
-\& print $msgs[$i];
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Or more succinctly,
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& #!/usr/bin/perl -n00
-\& # bysub2 - awkish sort-by-subject
-\& BEGIN { $msgno = -1 }
-\& $sub[++$msgno] = (/^Subject:\es*(?:Re:\es*)*(.*)/mi)[0] if /^From/m;
-\& $msg[$msgno] .= $_;
-\& END { print @msg[ sort { $sub[$a] cmp $sub[$b] || $a <=> $b } (0 .. $#msg) ] }
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I find out my hostname/domainname/IP address?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I find out my hostname/domainname/IP address?"
-The normal way to find your own hostname is to call the \f(CW`hostname`\fR
-program. While sometimes expedient, this has some problems, such as
-not knowing whether you've got the canonical name or not. It's one of
-those tradeoffs of convenience versus portability.
-.PP
-The Sys::Hostname module (part of the standard perl distribution) will
-give you the hostname after which you can find out the \s-1IP\s0 address
-(assuming you have working \s-1DNS\s0) with a \fIgethostbyname()\fR call.
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& use Socket;
-\& use Sys::Hostname;
-\& my $host = hostname();
-\& my $addr = inet_ntoa(scalar gethostbyname($host || 'localhost'));
-.Ve
-.PP
-Probably the simplest way to learn your \s-1DNS\s0 domain name is to grok
-it out of /etc/resolv.conf, at least under Unix. Of course, this
-assumes several things about your resolv.conf configuration, including
-that it exists.
-.PP
-(We still need a good \s-1DNS\s0 domain name-learning method for non-Unix
-systems.)
-.Sh "How do I fetch a news article or the active newsgroups?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I fetch a news article or the active newsgroups?"
-Use the Net::NNTP or News::NNTPClient modules, both available from \s-1CPAN\s0.
-This can make tasks like fetching the newsgroup list as simple as
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& perl -MNews::NNTPClient
-\& -e 'print News::NNTPClient->new->list("newsgroups")'
-.Ve
-.Sh "How do I fetch/put an \s-1FTP\s0 file?"
-.IX Subsection "How do I fetch/put an FTP file?"
-LWP::Simple (available from \s-1CPAN\s0) can fetch but not put. Net::FTP (also
-available from \s-1CPAN\s0) is more complex but can put as well as fetch.
-.Sh "How can I do \s-1RPC\s0 in Perl?"
-.IX Subsection "How can I do RPC in Perl?"
-A \s-1DCE::RPC\s0 module is being developed (but is not yet available) and
-will be released as part of the DCE-Perl package (available from
-\&\s-1CPAN\s0). The rpcgen suite, available from CPAN/authors/id/JAKE/, is
-an \s-1RPC\s0 stub generator and includes an \s-1RPC::ONC\s0 module.
-.SH "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR AND COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1997\-2002 Tom Christiansen and Nathan Torkington.
-All rights reserved.
-.PP
-This documentation is free; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
-under the same terms as Perl itself.
-.PP
-Irrespective of its distribution, all code examples in this file
-are hereby placed into the public domain. You are permitted and
-encouraged to use this code in your own programs for fun
-or for profit as you see fit. A simple comment in the code giving
-credit would be courteous but is not required.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlform.1 b/raw/man1/perlform.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 28f967b..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlform.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,502 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFORM 1"
-.TH PERLFORM 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlform \- Perl formats
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-Perl has a mechanism to help you generate simple reports and charts. To
-facilitate this, Perl helps you code up your output page close to how it
-will look when it's printed. It can keep track of things like how many
-lines are on a page, what page you're on, when to print page headers,
-etc. Keywords are borrowed from \s-1FORTRAN:\s0 \fIformat()\fR to declare and \fIwrite()\fR
-to execute; see their entries in perlfunc. Fortunately, the layout is
-much more legible, more like \s-1BASIC\s0's \s-1PRINT\s0 \s-1USING\s0 statement. Think of it
-as a poor man's \fInroff\fR\|(1).
-.PP
-Formats, like packages and subroutines, are declared rather than
-executed, so they may occur at any point in your program. (Usually it's
-best to keep them all together though.) They have their own namespace
-apart from all the other \*(L"types\*(R" in Perl. This means that if you have a
-function named \*(L"Foo\*(R", it is not the same thing as having a format named
-\&\*(L"Foo\*(R". However, the default name for the format associated with a given
-filehandle is the same as the name of the filehandle. Thus, the default
-format for \s-1STDOUT\s0 is named \*(L"\s-1STDOUT\s0\*(R", and the default format for filehandle
-\&\s-1TEMP\s0 is named \*(L"\s-1TEMP\s0\*(R". They just look the same. They aren't.
-.PP
-Output record formats are declared as follows:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& format NAME =
-\& FORMLIST
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-If name is omitted, format \*(L"\s-1STDOUT\s0\*(R" is defined. \s-1FORMLIST\s0 consists of
-a sequence of lines, each of which may be one of three types:
-.IP "1." 4
-A comment, indicated by putting a '#' in the first column.
-.IP "2." 4
-A \*(L"picture\*(R" line giving the format for one output line.
-.IP "3." 4
-An argument line supplying values to plug into the previous picture line.
-.PP
-Picture lines are printed exactly as they look, except for certain fields
-that substitute values into the line. Each field in a picture line starts
-with either \*(L"@\*(R" (at) or \*(L"^\*(R" (caret). These lines do not undergo any kind
-of variable interpolation. The at field (not to be confused with the array
-marker @) is the normal kind of field; the other kind, caret fields, are used
-to do rudimentary multi-line text block filling. The length of the field
-is supplied by padding out the field with multiple "<\*(L", \*(R">\*(L", or \*(R"|"
-characters to specify, respectively, left justification, right
-justification, or centering. If the variable would exceed the width
-specified, it is truncated.
-.PP
-As an alternate form of right justification, you may also use \*(L"#\*(R"
-characters (with an optional \*(L".\*(R") to specify a numeric field. This way
-you can line up the decimal points. With a \*(L"0\*(R" (zero) instead of the
-first \*(L"#\*(R", the formatted number will be padded with leading zeroes if
-necessary. If any value supplied for these fields contains a newline,
-only the text up to the newline is printed. Finally, the special field
-\&\*(L"@*\*(R" can be used for printing multi\-line, nontruncated values; it
-should appear by itself on a line.
-.PP
-The values are specified on the following line in the same order as
-the picture fields. The expressions providing the values should be
-separated by commas. The expressions are all evaluated in a list context
-before the line is processed, so a single list expression could produce
-multiple list elements. The expressions may be spread out to more than
-one line if enclosed in braces. If so, the opening brace must be the first
-token on the first line. If an expression evaluates to a number with a
-decimal part, and if the corresponding picture specifies that the decimal
-part should appear in the output (that is, any picture except multiple \*(L"#\*(R"
-characters \fBwithout\fR an embedded \*(L".\*(R"), the character used for the decimal
-point is \fBalways\fR determined by the current \s-1LC_NUMERIC\s0 locale. This
-means that, if, for example, the run-time environment happens to specify a
-German locale, \*(L",\*(R" will be used instead of the default \*(L".\*(R". See
-perllocale and \*(L"\s-1WARNINGS\s0\*(R" for more information.
-.PP
-Picture fields that begin with ^ rather than @ are treated specially.
-With a # field, the field is blanked out if the value is undefined. For
-other field types, the caret enables a kind of fill mode. Instead of an
-arbitrary expression, the value supplied must be a scalar variable name
-that contains a text string. Perl puts as much text as it can into the
-field, and then chops off the front of the string so that the next time
-the variable is referenced, more of the text can be printed. (Yes, this
-means that the variable itself is altered during execution of the \fIwrite()\fR
-call, and is not returned.) Normally you would use a sequence of fields
-in a vertical stack to print out a block of text. You might wish to end
-the final field with the text \*(L"...\*(R", which will appear in the output if
-the text was too long to appear in its entirety. You can change which
-characters are legal to break on by changing the variable \f(CW$:\fR (that's
-\&\f(CW$FORMAT_LINE_BREAK_CHARACTERS\fR if you're using the English module) to a
-list of the desired characters.
-.PP
-Using caret fields can produce variable length records. If the text
-to be formatted is short, you can suppress blank lines by putting a
-\&\*(L"~\*(R" (tilde) character anywhere in the line. The tilde will be translated
-to a space upon output. If you put a second tilde contiguous to the
-first, the line will be repeated until all the fields on the line are
-exhausted. (If you use a field of the at variety, the expression you
-supply had better not give the same value every time forever!)
-.PP
-Top-of-form processing is by default handled by a format with the
-same name as the current filehandle with \*(L"_TOP\*(R" concatenated to it.
-It's triggered at the top of each page. See \*(L"write\*(R" in perlfunc.
-.PP
-Examples:
-.PP
-.Vb 10
-\& # a report on the /etc/passwd file
-\& format STDOUT_TOP =
-\& Passwd File
-\& Name Login Office Uid Gid Home
-\& ------------------------------------------------------------------
-\& .
-\& format STDOUT =
-\& @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< @||||||| @<<<<<<@>>>> @>>>> @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $name, $login, $office,$uid,$gid, $home
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 29
-\& # a report from a bug report form
-\& format STDOUT_TOP =
-\& Bug Reports
-\& @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< @||| @>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
-\& $system, $%, $date
-\& ------------------------------------------------------------------
-\& .
-\& format STDOUT =
-\& Subject: @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $subject
-\& Index: @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $index, $description
-\& Priority: @<<<<<<<<<< Date: @<<<<<<< ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $priority, $date, $description
-\& From: @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $from, $description
-\& Assigned to: @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $programmer, $description
-\& ~ ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $description
-\& ~ ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $description
-\& ~ ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $description
-\& ~ ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $description
-\& ~ ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<...
-\& $description
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-It is possible to intermix \fIprint()\fRs with \fIwrite()\fRs on the same output
-channel, but you'll have to handle \f(CW\*(C`$\-\*(C'\fR (\f(CW$FORMAT_LINES_LEFT\fR)
-yourself.
-.Sh "Format Variables"
-.IX Subsection "Format Variables"
-The current format name is stored in the variable \f(CW$~\fR (\f(CW$FORMAT_NAME\fR),
-and the current top of form format name is in \f(CW$^\fR (\f(CW$FORMAT_TOP_NAME\fR).
-The current output page number is stored in \f(CW$%\fR (\f(CW$FORMAT_PAGE_NUMBER\fR),
-and the number of lines on the page is in \f(CW$=\fR (\f(CW$FORMAT_LINES_PER_PAGE\fR).
-Whether to autoflush output on this handle is stored in \f(CW$|\fR
-(\f(CW$OUTPUT_AUTOFLUSH\fR). The string output before each top of page (except
-the first) is stored in \f(CW$^L\fR (\f(CW$FORMAT_FORMFEED\fR). These variables are
-set on a per-filehandle basis, so you'll need to \fIselect()\fR into a different
-one to affect them:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& select((select(OUTF),
-\& $~ = "My_Other_Format",
-\& $^ = "My_Top_Format"
-\& )[0]);
-.Ve
-.PP
-Pretty ugly, eh? It's a common idiom though, so don't be too surprised
-when you see it. You can at least use a temporary variable to hold
-the previous filehandle: (this is a much better approach in general,
-because not only does legibility improve, you now have intermediary
-stage in the expression to single-step the debugger through):
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& $ofh = select(OUTF);
-\& $~ = "My_Other_Format";
-\& $^ = "My_Top_Format";
-\& select($ofh);
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you use the English module, you can even read the variable names:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& use English '-no_match_vars';
-\& $ofh = select(OUTF);
-\& $FORMAT_NAME = "My_Other_Format";
-\& $FORMAT_TOP_NAME = "My_Top_Format";
-\& select($ofh);
-.Ve
-.PP
-But you still have those funny \fIselect()\fRs. So just use the FileHandle
-module. Now, you can access these special variables using lowercase
-method names instead:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use FileHandle;
-\& format_name OUTF "My_Other_Format";
-\& format_top_name OUTF "My_Top_Format";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Much better!
-.SH "NOTES"
-.IX Header "NOTES"
-Because the values line may contain arbitrary expressions (for at fields,
-not caret fields), you can farm out more sophisticated processing
-to other functions, like \fIsprintf()\fR or one of your own. For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& format Ident =
-\& @<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& &commify($n)
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-To get a real at or caret into the field, do this:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& format Ident =
-\& I have an @ here.
-\& "@"
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-To center a whole line of text, do something like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& format Ident =
-\& @|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
-\& "Some text line"
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-There is no builtin way to say \*(L"float this to the right hand side
-of the page, however wide it is.\*(R" You have to specify where it goes.
-The truly desperate can generate their own format on the fly, based
-on the current number of columns, and then \fIeval()\fR it:
-.PP
-.Vb 9
-\& $format = "format STDOUT = \en"
-\& . '^' . '<' x $cols . "\en"
-\& . '$entry' . "\en"
-\& . "\et^" . "<" x ($cols-8) . "~~\en"
-\& . '$entry' . "\en"
-\& . ".\en";
-\& print $format if $Debugging;
-\& eval $format;
-\& die $@ if $@;
-.Ve
-.PP
-Which would generate a format looking something like this:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& format STDOUT =
-\& ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<
-\& $entry
-\& ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<~~
-\& $entry
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-Here's a little program that's somewhat like \fIfmt\fR\|(1):
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& format =
-\& ^<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<< ~~
-\& $_
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& .
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& $/ = '';
-\& while (<>) {
-\& s/\es*\en\es*/ /g;
-\& write;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sh "Footers"
-.IX Subsection "Footers"
-While \f(CW$FORMAT_TOP_NAME\fR contains the name of the current header format,
-there is no corresponding mechanism to automatically do the same thing
-for a footer. Not knowing how big a format is going to be until you
-evaluate it is one of the major problems. It's on the \s-1TODO\s0 list.
-.PP
-Here's one strategy: If you have a fixed-size footer, you can get footers
-by checking \f(CW$FORMAT_LINES_LEFT\fR before each \fIwrite()\fR and print the footer
-yourself if necessary.
-.PP
-Here's another strategy: Open a pipe to yourself, using \f(CW\*(C`open(MYSELF, "|\-")\*(C'\fR
-(see \*(L"\fIopen()\fR\*(R" in perlfunc) and always \fIwrite()\fR to \s-1MYSELF\s0 instead of \s-1STDOUT\s0.
-Have your child process massage its \s-1STDIN\s0 to rearrange headers and footers
-however you like. Not very convenient, but doable.
-.Sh "Accessing Formatting Internals"
-.IX Subsection "Accessing Formatting Internals"
-For low-level access to the formatting mechanism. you may use \fIformline()\fR
-and access \f(CW$^A\fR (the \f(CW$ACCUMULATOR\fR variable) directly.
-.PP
-For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& $str = formline <<'END', 1,2,3;
-\& @<<< @||| @>>>
-\& END
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& print "Wow, I just stored `$^A' in the accumulator!\en";
-.Ve
-.PP
-Or to make an \fIswrite()\fR subroutine, which is to \fIwrite()\fR what \fIsprintf()\fR
-is to \fIprintf()\fR, do this:
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& use Carp;
-\& sub swrite {
-\& croak "usage: swrite PICTURE ARGS" unless @_;
-\& my $format = shift;
-\& $^A = "";
-\& formline($format, at _);
-\& return $^A;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& $string = swrite(<<'END', 1, 2, 3);
-\& Check me out
-\& @<<< @||| @>>>
-\& END
-\& print $string;
-.Ve
-.SH "WARNINGS"
-.IX Header "WARNINGS"
-The lone dot that ends a format can also prematurely end a mail
-message passing through a misconfigured Internet mailer (and based on
-experience, such misconfiguration is the rule, not the exception). So
-when sending format code through mail, you should indent it so that
-the format-ending dot is not on the left margin; this will prevent
-\&\s-1SMTP\s0 cutoff.
-.PP
-Lexical variables (declared with \*(L"my\*(R") are not visible within a
-format unless the format is declared within the scope of the lexical
-variable. (They weren't visible at all before version 5.001.)
-.PP
-Formats are the only part of Perl that unconditionally use information
-from a program's locale; if a program's environment specifies an
-\&\s-1LC_NUMERIC\s0 locale, it is always used to specify the decimal point
-character in formatted output. Perl ignores all other aspects of locale
-handling unless the \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR pragma is in effect. Formatted output
-cannot be controlled by \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR because the pragma is tied to the
-block structure of the program, and, for historical reasons, formats
-exist outside that block structure. See perllocale for further
-discussion of locale handling.
-.PP
-Inside of an expression, the whitespace characters \en, \et and \ef are
-considered to be equivalent to a single space. Thus, you could think
-of this filter being applied to each value in the format:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $value =~ tr/\en\et\ef/ /;
-.Ve
-.PP
-The remaining whitespace character, \er, forces the printing of a new
-line if allowed by the picture line.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlfunc.1 b/raw/man1/perlfunc.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e10c084..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlfunc.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7474 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLFUNC 1"
-.TH PERLFUNC 1 "2003-09-02" "perl v5.8.1" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlfunc \- Perl builtin functions
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-The functions in this section can serve as terms in an expression.
-They fall into two major categories: list operators and named unary
-operators. These differ in their precedence relationship with a
-following comma. (See the precedence table in perlop.) List
-operators take more than one argument, while unary operators can never
-take more than one argument. Thus, a comma terminates the argument of
-a unary operator, but merely separates the arguments of a list
-operator. A unary operator generally provides a scalar context to its
-argument, while a list operator may provide either scalar or list
-contexts for its arguments. If it does both, the scalar arguments will
-be first, and the list argument will follow. (Note that there can ever
-be only one such list argument.) For instance, \fIsplice()\fR has three scalar
-arguments followed by a list, whereas \fIgethostbyname()\fR has four scalar
-arguments.
-.PP
-In the syntax descriptions that follow, list operators that expect a
-list (and provide list context for the elements of the list) are shown
-with \s-1LIST\s0 as an argument. Such a list may consist of any combination
-of scalar arguments or list values; the list values will be included
-in the list as if each individual element were interpolated at that
-point in the list, forming a longer single-dimensional list value.
-Elements of the \s-1LIST\s0 should be separated by commas.
-.PP
-Any function in the list below may be used either with or without
-parentheses around its arguments. (The syntax descriptions omit the
-parentheses.) If you use the parentheses, the simple (but occasionally
-surprising) rule is this: It \fIlooks\fR like a function, therefore it \fIis\fR a
-function, and precedence doesn't matter. Otherwise it's a list
-operator or unary operator, and precedence does matter. And whitespace
-between the function and left parenthesis doesn't count\*(--so you need to
-be careful sometimes:
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& print 1+2+4; # Prints 7.
-\& print(1+2) + 4; # Prints 3.
-\& print (1+2)+4; # Also prints 3!
-\& print +(1+2)+4; # Prints 7.
-\& print ((1+2)+4); # Prints 7.
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you run Perl with the \fB\-w\fR switch it can warn you about this. For
-example, the third line above produces:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& print (...) interpreted as function at - line 1.
-\& Useless use of integer addition in void context at - line 1.
-.Ve
-.PP
-A few functions take no arguments at all, and therefore work as neither
-unary nor list operators. These include such functions as \f(CW\*(C`time\*(C'\fR
-and \f(CW\*(C`endpwent\*(C'\fR. For example, \f(CW\*(C`time+86_400\*(C'\fR always means
-\&\f(CW\*(C`time() + 86_400\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-For functions that can be used in either a scalar or list context,
-nonabortive failure is generally indicated in a scalar context by
-returning the undefined value, and in a list context by returning the
-null list.
-.PP
-Remember the following important rule: There is \fBno rule\fR that relates
-the behavior of an expression in list context to its behavior in scalar
-context, or vice versa. It might do two totally different things.
-Each operator and function decides which sort of value it would be most
-appropriate to return in scalar context. Some operators return the
-length of the list that would have been returned in list context. Some
-operators return the first value in the list. Some operators return the
-last value in the list. Some operators return a count of successful
-operations. In general, they do what you want, unless you want
-consistency.
-.PP
-A named array in scalar context is quite different from what would at
-first glance appear to be a list in scalar context. You can't get a list
-like \f(CW\*(C`(1,2,3)\*(C'\fR into being in scalar context, because the compiler knows
-the context at compile time. It would generate the scalar comma operator
-there, not the list construction version of the comma. That means it
-was never a list to start with.
-.PP
-In general, functions in Perl that serve as wrappers for system calls
-of the same name (like \fIchown\fR\|(2), \fIfork\fR\|(2), \fIclosedir\fR\|(2), etc.) all return
-true when they succeed and \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR otherwise, as is usually mentioned
-in the descriptions below. This is different from the C interfaces,
-which return \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR on failure. Exceptions to this rule are \f(CW\*(C`wait\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`waitpid\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR. System calls also set the special \f(CW$!\fR
-variable on failure. Other functions do not, except accidentally.
-.Sh "Perl Functions by Category"
-.IX Subsection "Perl Functions by Category"
-Here are Perl's functions (including things that look like
-functions, like some keywords and named operators)
-arranged by category. Some functions appear in more
-than one place.
-.IP "Functions for SCALARs or strings" 4
-.IX Item "Functions for SCALARs or strings"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`chomp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chop\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`crypt\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`hex\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`index\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`lc\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`lcfirst\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`length\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`oct\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`ord\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`q/STRING/\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`qq/STRING/\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`reverse\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`rindex\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`substr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tr///\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`uc\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`ucfirst\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`y///\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Regular expressions and pattern matching" 4
-.IX Item "Regular expressions and pattern matching"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`m//\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`pos\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`quotemeta\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`s///\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`split\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`study\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`qr//\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Numeric functions" 4
-.IX Item "Numeric functions"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`abs\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`atan2\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`cos\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`exp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`hex\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`int\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`log\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`oct\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`rand\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`sin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sqrt\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`srand\*(C'\fR
-.ie n .IP "Functions for real @ARRAYs" 4
-.el .IP "Functions for real \f(CW at ARRAYs\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Functions for real @ARRAYs"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`pop\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`push\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shift\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`splice\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`unshift\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Functions for list data" 4
-.IX Item "Functions for list data"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`grep\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`join\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`map\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`qw/STRING/\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`reverse\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR
-.ie n .IP "Functions for real %HASHes" 4
-.el .IP "Functions for real \f(CW%HASHes\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Functions for real %HASHes"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`delete\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`exists\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Input and output functions" 4
-.IX Item "Input and output functions"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`binmode\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`close\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`closedir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dbmclose\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dbmopen\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`eof\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`fileno\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`format\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getc\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`read\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`readdir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`rewinddir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`seek\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`seekdir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`select\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`sysread\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sysseek\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`syswrite\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tell\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`telldir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`truncate\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`warn\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`write\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Functions for fixed length data or records" 4
-.IX Item "Functions for fixed length data or records"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`read\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sysread\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`syswrite\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`vec\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Functions for filehandles, files, or directories" 4
-.IX Item "Functions for filehandles, files, or directories"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\f(CIX\f(CW\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chdir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chmod\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chown\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chroot\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`fcntl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`glob\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`link\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`lstat\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`mkdir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`opendir\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`readlink\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`rename\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`rmdir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`stat\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`symlink\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`unlink\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`utime\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Keywords related to the control flow of your perl program" 4
-.IX Item "Keywords related to the control flow of your perl program"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`caller\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`do\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dump\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`exit\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`return\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sub\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`wantarray\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Keywords related to scoping" 4
-.IX Item "Keywords related to scoping"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`caller\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`local\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`package\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Miscellaneous functions" 4
-.IX Item "Miscellaneous functions"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`defined\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dump\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`formline\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`local\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`reset\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`scalar\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`wantarray\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Functions for processes and process groups" 4
-.IX Item "Functions for processes and process groups"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`alarm\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`fork\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpgrp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getppid\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpriority\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`kill\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`pipe\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`qx/STRING/\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setpgrp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setpriority\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sleep\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`times\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`wait\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`waitpid\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Keywords related to perl modules" 4
-.IX Item "Keywords related to perl modules"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`do\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`no\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`package\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Keywords related to classes and object-orientedness" 4
-.IX Item "Keywords related to classes and object-orientedness"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`bless\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dbmclose\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dbmopen\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`package\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`ref\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tied\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`untie\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Low-level socket functions" 4
-.IX Item "Low-level socket functions"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`accept\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`bind\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`connect\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpeername\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getsockname\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getsockopt\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`listen\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`recv\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`send\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setsockopt\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shutdown\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`socket\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`socketpair\*(C'\fR
-.IP "System V interprocess communication functions" 4
-.IX Item "System V interprocess communication functions"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`msgctl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`msgget\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`msgrcv\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`msgsnd\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`semctl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`semget\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`semop\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`shmctl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shmget\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shmread\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shmwrite\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Fetching user and group info" 4
-.IX Item "Fetching user and group info"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`endgrent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endhostent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endnetent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endpwent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getgrent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getgrgid\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getgrnam\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getlogin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpwent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpwnam\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getpwuid\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setgrent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setpwent\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Fetching network info" 4
-.IX Item "Fetching network info"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`endprotoent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endservent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`gethostbyaddr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`gethostbyname\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`gethostent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getnetbyaddr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getnetbyname\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getnetent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getprotobyname\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getprotobynumber\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getprotoent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getservbyname\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getservbyport\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getservent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sethostent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`setnetent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setprotoent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setservent\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Time-related functions" 4
-.IX Item "Time-related functions"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`gmtime\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`localtime\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`time\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`times\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Functions new in perl5" 4
-.IX Item "Functions new in perl5"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`abs\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`bless\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chomp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`exists\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`formline\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`glob\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`lc\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`lcfirst\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`map\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`no\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`prototype\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`qx\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`qw\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`readline\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`readpipe\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`ref\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sub*\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`tied\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`uc\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`ucfirst\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`untie\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR
-.Sp
-* \- \f(CW\*(C`sub\*(C'\fR was a keyword in perl4, but in perl5 it is an
-operator, which can be used in expressions.
-.IP "Functions obsoleted in perl5" 4
-.IX Item "Functions obsoleted in perl5"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`dbmclose\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dbmopen\*(C'\fR
-.Sh "Portability"
-.IX Subsection "Portability"
-Perl was born in Unix and can therefore access all common Unix
-system calls. In non-Unix environments, the functionality of some
-Unix system calls may not be available, or details of the available
-functionality may differ slightly. The Perl functions affected
-by this are:
-.PP
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-X\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`binmode\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chmod\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chown\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`chroot\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`crypt\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`dbmclose\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dbmopen\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`dump\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endgrent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endhostent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`endnetent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endprotoent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endpwent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`endservent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`fcntl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`fork\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getgrent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getgrgid\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`gethostbyname\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`gethostent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getlogin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getnetbyaddr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getnetbyname\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getnetent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getppid\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getprgp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpriority\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getprotobynumber\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getprotoent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpwent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpwnam\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getpwuid\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getservbyport\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getservent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`getsockopt\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`glob\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`kill\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`link\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`lstat\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`msgctl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`msgget\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`msgrcv\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`msgsnd\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`pipe\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`readlink\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`rename\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`select\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`semctl\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`semget\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`semop\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setgrent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sethostent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setnetent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`setpgrp\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setpriority\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setprotoent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setpwent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`setservent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`setsockopt\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shmctl\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shmget\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`shmread\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`shmwrite\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`socket\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`socketpair\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`stat\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`symlink\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`times\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`truncate\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`unlink\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`utime\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`wait\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`waitpid\*(C'\fR
-.PP
-For more information about the portability of these functions, see
-perlport and other available platform-specific documentation.
-.Sh "Alphabetical Listing of Perl Functions"
-.IX Subsection "Alphabetical Listing of Perl Functions"
-.IP "\-X \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "-X FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\-X \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "-X EXPR"
-.IP "\-X" 8
-.IX Item "-X"
-.PD
-A file test, where X is one of the letters listed below. This unary
-operator takes one argument, either a filename or a filehandle, and
-tests the associated file to see if something is true about it. If the
-argument is omitted, tests \f(CW$_\fR, except for \f(CW\*(C`\-t\*(C'\fR, which tests \s-1STDIN\s0.
-Unless otherwise documented, it returns \f(CW1\fR for true and \f(CW''\fR for false, or
-the undefined value if the file doesn't exist. Despite the funny
-names, precedence is the same as any other named unary operator, and
-the argument may be parenthesized like any other unary operator. The
-operator may be any of:
-.IX Xref "-r -w -x -o -R -W -X -O -e -z -s -f -d -l -p -S -b -c -t -u -g -k -T -B -M -A -C"
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& -r File is readable by effective uid/gid.
-\& -w File is writable by effective uid/gid.
-\& -x File is executable by effective uid/gid.
-\& -o File is owned by effective uid.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& -R File is readable by real uid/gid.
-\& -W File is writable by real uid/gid.
-\& -X File is executable by real uid/gid.
-\& -O File is owned by real uid.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& -e File exists.
-\& -z File has zero size (is empty).
-\& -s File has nonzero size (returns size in bytes).
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& -f File is a plain file.
-\& -d File is a directory.
-\& -l File is a symbolic link.
-\& -p File is a named pipe (FIFO), or Filehandle is a pipe.
-\& -S File is a socket.
-\& -b File is a block special file.
-\& -c File is a character special file.
-\& -t Filehandle is opened to a tty.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& -u File has setuid bit set.
-\& -g File has setgid bit set.
-\& -k File has sticky bit set.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& -T File is an ASCII text file (heuristic guess).
-\& -B File is a "binary" file (opposite of -T).
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& -M Script start time minus file modification time, in days.
-\& -A Same for access time.
-\& -C Same for inode change time (Unix, may differ for other platforms)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& while (<>) {
-\& chomp;
-\& next unless -f $_; # ignore specials
-\& #...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The interpretation of the file permission operators \f(CW\*(C`\-r\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-R\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-w\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-W\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-x\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`\-X\*(C'\fR is by default based solely on the mode
-of the file and the uids and gids of the user. There may be other
-reasons you can't actually read, write, or execute the file. Such
-reasons may be for example network filesystem access controls, ACLs
-(access control lists), read-only filesystems, and unrecognized
-executable formats.
-.Sp
-Also note that, for the superuser on the local filesystems, the \f(CW\*(C`\-r\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-R\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-w\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`\-W\*(C'\fR tests always return 1, and \f(CW\*(C`\-x\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-X\*(C'\fR return 1
-if any execute bit is set in the mode. Scripts run by the superuser
-may thus need to do a \fIstat()\fR to determine the actual mode of the file,
-or temporarily set their effective uid to something else.
-.Sp
-If you are using ACLs, there is a pragma called \f(CW\*(C`filetest\*(C'\fR that may
-produce more accurate results than the bare \fIstat()\fR mode bits.
-When under the \f(CW\*(C`use filetest 'access'\*(C'\fR the above-mentioned filetests
-will test whether the permission can (not) be granted using the
-\&\fIaccess()\fR family of system calls. Also note that the \f(CW\*(C`\-x\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-X\*(C'\fR may
-under this pragma return true even if there are no execute permission
-bits set (nor any extra execute permission ACLs). This strangeness is
-due to the underlying system calls' definitions. Read the
-documentation for the \f(CW\*(C`filetest\*(C'\fR pragma for more information.
-.Sp
-Note that \f(CW\*(C`\-s/a/b/\*(C'\fR does not do a negated substitution. Saying
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-exp($foo)\*(C'\fR still works as expected, however\*(--only single letters
-following a minus are interpreted as file tests.
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`\-T\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-B\*(C'\fR switches work as follows. The first block or so of the
-file is examined for odd characters such as strange control codes or
-characters with the high bit set. If too many strange characters (>30%)
-are found, it's a \f(CW\*(C`\-B\*(C'\fR file, otherwise it's a \f(CW\*(C`\-T\*(C'\fR file. Also, any file
-containing null in the first block is considered a binary file. If \f(CW\*(C`\-T\*(C'\fR
-or \f(CW\*(C`\-B\*(C'\fR is used on a filehandle, the current \s-1IO\s0 buffer is examined
-rather than the first block. Both \f(CW\*(C`\-T\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-B\*(C'\fR return true on a null
-file, or a file at \s-1EOF\s0 when testing a filehandle. Because you have to
-read a file to do the \f(CW\*(C`\-T\*(C'\fR test, on most occasions you want to use a \f(CW\*(C`\-f\*(C'\fR
-against the file first, as in \f(CW\*(C`next unless \-f $file && \-T $file\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-If any of the file tests (or either the \f(CW\*(C`stat\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`lstat\*(C'\fR operators) are given
-the special filehandle consisting of a solitary underline, then the stat
-structure of the previous file test (or stat operator) is used, saving
-a system call. (This doesn't work with \f(CW\*(C`\-t\*(C'\fR, and you need to remember
-that \fIlstat()\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-l\*(C'\fR will leave values in the stat structure for the
-symbolic link, not the real file.) (Also, if the stat buffer was filled by
-a \f(CW\*(C`lstat\*(C'\fR call, \f(CW\*(C`\-T\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-B\*(C'\fR will reset it with the results of \f(CW\*(C`stat _\*(C'\fR).
-Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print "Can do.\en" if -r $a || -w _ || -x _;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& stat($filename);
-\& print "Readable\en" if -r _;
-\& print "Writable\en" if -w _;
-\& print "Executable\en" if -x _;
-\& print "Setuid\en" if -u _;
-\& print "Setgid\en" if -g _;
-\& print "Sticky\en" if -k _;
-\& print "Text\en" if -T _;
-\& print "Binary\en" if -B _;
-.Ve
-.IP "abs \s-1VALUE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "abs VALUE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "abs" 8
-.IX Item "abs"
-.PD
-Returns the absolute value of its argument.
-If \s-1VALUE\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "accept \s-1NEWSOCKET\s0,GENERICSOCKET" 8
-.IX Item "accept NEWSOCKET,GENERICSOCKET"
-Accepts an incoming socket connect, just as the \fIaccept\fR\|(2) system call
-does. Returns the packed address if it succeeded, false otherwise.
-See the example in \*(L"Sockets: Client/Server Communication\*(R" in perlipc.
-.Sp
-On systems that support a close-on-exec flag on files, the flag will
-be set for the newly opened file descriptor, as determined by the
-value of $^F. See \*(L"$^F\*(R" in perlvar.
-.IP "alarm \s-1SECONDS\s0" 8
-.IX Item "alarm SECONDS"
-.PD 0
-.IP "alarm" 8
-.IX Item "alarm"
-.PD
-Arranges to have a \s-1SIGALRM\s0 delivered to this process after the
-specified number of wallclock seconds have elapsed. If \s-1SECONDS\s0 is not
-specified, the value stored in \f(CW$_\fR is used. (On some machines,
-unfortunately, the elapsed time may be up to one second less or more
-than you specified because of how seconds are counted, and process
-scheduling may delay the delivery of the signal even further.)
-.Sp
-Only one timer may be counting at once. Each call disables the
-previous timer, and an argument of \f(CW0\fR may be supplied to cancel the
-previous timer without starting a new one. The returned value is the
-amount of time remaining on the previous timer.
-.Sp
-For delays of finer granularity than one second, you may use Perl's
-four-argument version of \fIselect()\fR leaving the first three arguments
-undefined, or you might be able to use the \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR interface to
-access \fIsetitimer\fR\|(2) if your system supports it. The Time::HiRes
-module (from \s-1CPAN\s0, and starting from Perl 5.8 part of the standard
-distribution) may also prove useful.
-.Sp
-It is usually a mistake to intermix \f(CW\*(C`alarm\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`sleep\*(C'\fR calls.
-(\f(CW\*(C`sleep\*(C'\fR may be internally implemented in your system with \f(CW\*(C`alarm\*(C'\fR)
-.Sp
-If you want to use \f(CW\*(C`alarm\*(C'\fR to time out a system call you need to use an
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR/\f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR pair. You can't rely on the alarm causing the system call to
-fail with \f(CW$!\fR set to \f(CW\*(C`EINTR\*(C'\fR because Perl sets up signal handlers to
-restart system calls on some systems. Using \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR/\f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR always works,
-modulo the caveats given in \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc.
-.Sp
-.Vb 13
-\& eval {
-\& local $SIG{ALRM} = sub { die "alarm\en" }; # NB: \en required
-\& alarm $timeout;
-\& $nread = sysread SOCKET, $buffer, $size;
-\& alarm 0;
-\& };
-\& if ($@) {
-\& die unless $@ eq "alarm\en"; # propagate unexpected errors
-\& # timed out
-\& }
-\& else {
-\& # didn't
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-For more information see perlipc.
-.IP "atan2 Y,X" 8
-.IX Item "atan2 Y,X"
-Returns the arctangent of Y/X in the range \-PI to \s-1PI\s0.
-.Sp
-For the tangent operation, you may use the \f(CW\*(C`Math::Trig::tan\*(C'\fR
-function, or use the familiar relation:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& sub tan { sin($_[0]) / cos($_[0]) }
-.Ve
-.IP "bind \s-1SOCKET\s0,NAME" 8
-.IX Item "bind SOCKET,NAME"
-Binds a network address to a socket, just as the bind system call
-does. Returns true if it succeeded, false otherwise. \s-1NAME\s0 should be a
-packed address of the appropriate type for the socket. See the examples in
-\&\*(L"Sockets: Client/Server Communication\*(R" in perlipc.
-.IP "binmode \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0, \s-1LAYER\s0" 8
-.IX Item "binmode FILEHANDLE, LAYER"
-.PD 0
-.IP "binmode \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "binmode FILEHANDLE"
-.PD
-Arranges for \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 to be read or written in \*(L"binary\*(R" or \*(L"text\*(R"
-mode on systems where the run-time libraries distinguish between
-binary and text files. If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is an expression, the value is
-taken as the name of the filehandle. Returns true on success,
-otherwise it returns \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR and sets \f(CW$!\fR (errno).
-.Sp
-On some systems (in general, \s-1DOS\s0 and Windows-based systems) \fIbinmode()\fR
-is necessary when you're not working with a text file. For the sake
-of portability it is a good idea to always use it when appropriate,
-and to never use it when it isn't appropriate. Also, people can
-set their I/O to be by default \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded Unicode, not bytes.
-.Sp
-In other words: regardless of platform, use \fIbinmode()\fR on binary data,
-like for example images.
-.Sp
-If \s-1LAYER\s0 is present it is a single string, but may contain multiple
-directives. The directives alter the behaviour of the file handle.
-When \s-1LAYER\s0 is present using binmode on text file makes sense.
-.Sp
-If \s-1LAYER\s0 is omitted or specified as \f(CW\*(C`:raw\*(C'\fR the filehandle is made
-suitable for passing binary data. This includes turning off possible \s-1CRLF\s0
-translation and marking it as bytes (as opposed to Unicode characters).
-Note that as despite what may be implied in \fI\*(L"Programming Perl\*(R"\fR
-(the Camel) or elsewhere \f(CW\*(C`:raw\*(C'\fR is \fInot\fR the simply inverse of \f(CW\*(C`:crlf\*(C'\fR
-\&\*(-- other layers which would affect binary nature of the stream are
-\&\fIalso\fR disabled. See PerlIO, perlrun and the discussion about the
-\&\s-1PERLIO\s0 environment variable.
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`:bytes\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`:crlf\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR, and any other directives of the
-form \f(CW\*(C`:...\*(C'\fR, are called I/O \fIlayers\fR. The \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR pragma can be used to
-establish default I/O layers. See open.
-.Sp
-\&\fIThe \s-1LAYER\s0 parameter of the \fIbinmode()\fI function is described as \*(L"\s-1DISCIPLINE\s0\*(R"
-in \*(L"Programming Perl, 3rd Edition\*(R". However, since the publishing of this
-book, by many known as \*(L"Camel \s-1III\s0\*(R", the consensus of the naming of this
-functionality has moved from \*(L"discipline\*(R" to \*(L"layer\*(R". All documentation
-of this version of Perl therefore refers to \*(L"layers\*(R" rather than to
-\&\*(L"disciplines\*(R". Now back to the regularly scheduled documentation...\fR
-.Sp
-To mark \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 as \s-1UTF\-8\s0, use \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-In general, \fIbinmode()\fR should be called after \fIopen()\fR but before any I/O
-is done on the filehandle. Calling \fIbinmode()\fR will normally flush any
-pending buffered output data (and perhaps pending input data) on the
-handle. An exception to this is the \f(CW\*(C`:encoding\*(C'\fR layer that
-changes the default character encoding of the handle, see open.
-The \f(CW\*(C`:encoding\*(C'\fR layer sometimes needs to be called in
-mid\-stream, and it doesn't flush the stream. The \f(CW\*(C`:encoding\*(C'\fR
-also implicitly pushes on top of itself the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR layer because
-internally Perl will operate on \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded Unicode characters.
-.Sp
-The operating system, device drivers, C libraries, and Perl run-time
-system all work together to let the programmer treat a single
-character (\f(CW\*(C`\en\*(C'\fR) as the line terminator, irrespective of the external
-representation. On many operating systems, the native text file
-representation matches the internal representation, but on some
-platforms the external representation of \f(CW\*(C`\en\*(C'\fR is made up of more than
-one character.
-.Sp
-Mac \s-1OS\s0, all variants of Unix, and Stream_LF files on \s-1VMS\s0 use a single
-character to end each line in the external representation of text (even
-though that single character is \s-1CARRIAGE\s0 \s-1RETURN\s0 on Mac \s-1OS\s0 and \s-1LINE\s0 \s-1FEED\s0
-on Unix and most \s-1VMS\s0 files). In other systems like \s-1OS/2\s0, \s-1DOS\s0 and the
-various flavors of MS-Windows your program sees a \f(CW\*(C`\en\*(C'\fR as a simple \f(CW\*(C`\ecJ\*(C'\fR,
-but what's stored in text files are the two characters \f(CW\*(C`\ecM\ecJ\*(C'\fR. That
-means that, if you don't use \fIbinmode()\fR on these systems, \f(CW\*(C`\ecM\ecJ\*(C'\fR
-sequences on disk will be converted to \f(CW\*(C`\en\*(C'\fR on input, and any \f(CW\*(C`\en\*(C'\fR in
-your program will be converted back to \f(CW\*(C`\ecM\ecJ\*(C'\fR on output. This is what
-you want for text files, but it can be disastrous for binary files.
-.Sp
-Another consequence of using \fIbinmode()\fR (on some systems) is that
-special end-of-file markers will be seen as part of the data stream.
-For systems from the Microsoft family this means that if your binary
-data contains \f(CW\*(C`\ecZ\*(C'\fR, the I/O subsystem will regard it as the end of
-the file, unless you use \fIbinmode()\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\fIbinmode()\fR is not only important for \fIreadline()\fR and \fIprint()\fR operations,
-but also when using \fIread()\fR, \fIseek()\fR, \fIsysread()\fR, \fIsyswrite()\fR and \fItell()\fR
-(see perlport for more details). See the \f(CW$/\fR and \f(CW\*(C`$\e\*(C'\fR variables
-in perlvar for how to manually set your input and output
-line-termination sequences.
-.IP "bless \s-1REF\s0,CLASSNAME" 8
-.IX Item "bless REF,CLASSNAME"
-.PD 0
-.IP "bless \s-1REF\s0" 8
-.IX Item "bless REF"
-.PD
-This function tells the thingy referenced by \s-1REF\s0 that it is now an object
-in the \s-1CLASSNAME\s0 package. If \s-1CLASSNAME\s0 is omitted, the current package
-is used. Because a \f(CW\*(C`bless\*(C'\fR is often the last thing in a constructor,
-it returns the reference for convenience. Always use the two-argument
-version if the function doing the blessing might be inherited by a
-derived class. See perltoot and perlobj for more about the blessing
-(and blessings) of objects.
-.Sp
-Consider always blessing objects in CLASSNAMEs that are mixed case.
-Namespaces with all lowercase names are considered reserved for
-Perl pragmata. Builtin types have all uppercase names, so to prevent
-confusion, you may wish to avoid such package names as well. Make sure
-that \s-1CLASSNAME\s0 is a true value.
-.Sp
-See \*(L"Perl Modules\*(R" in perlmod.
-.IP "caller \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "caller EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "caller" 8
-.IX Item "caller"
-.PD
-Returns the context of the current subroutine call. In scalar context,
-returns the caller's package name if there is a caller, that is, if
-we're in a subroutine or \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR, and the undefined value
-otherwise. In list context, returns
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& ($package, $filename, $line) = caller;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-With \s-1EXPR\s0, it returns some extra information that the debugger uses to
-print a stack trace. The value of \s-1EXPR\s0 indicates how many call frames
-to go back before the current one.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& ($package, $filename, $line, $subroutine, $hasargs,
-\& $wantarray, $evaltext, $is_require, $hints, $bitmask) = caller($i);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Here \f(CW$subroutine\fR may be \f(CW\*(C`(eval)\*(C'\fR if the frame is not a subroutine
-call, but an \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR. In such a case additional elements \f(CW$evaltext\fR and
-\&\f(CW$is_require\fR are set: \f(CW$is_require\fR is true if the frame is created by a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR statement, \f(CW$evaltext\fR contains the text of the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eval EXPR\*(C'\fR statement. In particular, for an \f(CW\*(C`eval BLOCK\*(C'\fR statement,
-\&\f(CW$filename\fR is \f(CW\*(C`(eval)\*(C'\fR, but \f(CW$evaltext\fR is undefined. (Note also that
-each \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR statement creates a \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR frame inside an \f(CW\*(C`eval EXPR\*(C'\fR
-frame.) \f(CW$subroutine\fR may also be \f(CW\*(C`(unknown)\*(C'\fR if this particular
-subroutine happens to have been deleted from the symbol table.
-\&\f(CW$hasargs\fR is true if a new instance of \f(CW at _\fR was set up for the frame.
-\&\f(CW$hints\fR and \f(CW$bitmask\fR contain pragmatic hints that the caller was
-compiled with. The \f(CW$hints\fR and \f(CW$bitmask\fR values are subject to change
-between versions of Perl, and are not meant for external use.
-.Sp
-Furthermore, when called from within the \s-1DB\s0 package, caller returns more
-detailed information: it sets the list variable \f(CW at DB::args\fR to be the
-arguments with which the subroutine was invoked.
-.Sp
-Be aware that the optimizer might have optimized call frames away before
-\&\f(CW\*(C`caller\*(C'\fR had a chance to get the information. That means that \f(CWcaller(N)\fR
-might not return information about the call frame you expect it do, for
-\&\f(CW\*(C`N > 1\*(C'\fR. In particular, \f(CW at DB::args\fR might have information from the
-previous time \f(CW\*(C`caller\*(C'\fR was called.
-.IP "chdir \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "chdir EXPR"
-Changes the working directory to \s-1EXPR\s0, if possible. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted,
-changes to the directory specified by \f(CW$ENV{HOME}\fR, if set; if not,
-changes to the directory specified by \f(CW$ENV{LOGDIR}\fR. (Under \s-1VMS\s0, the
-variable \f(CW$ENV{SYS$LOGIN}\fR is also checked, and used if it is set.) If
-neither is set, \f(CW\*(C`chdir\*(C'\fR does nothing. It returns true upon success,
-false otherwise. See the example under \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "chmod \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "chmod LIST"
-Changes the permissions of a list of files. The first element of the
-list must be the numerical mode, which should probably be an octal
-number, and which definitely should \fInot\fR a string of octal digits:
-\&\f(CW0644\fR is okay, \f(CW'0644'\fR is not. Returns the number of files
-successfully changed. See also \*(L"oct\*(R", if all you have is a string.
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& $cnt = chmod 0755, 'foo', 'bar';
-\& chmod 0755, @executables;
-\& $mode = '0644'; chmod $mode, 'foo'; # !!! sets mode to
-\& # --w----r-T
-\& $mode = '0644'; chmod oct($mode), 'foo'; # this is better
-\& $mode = 0644; chmod $mode, 'foo'; # this is best
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can also import the symbolic \f(CW\*(C`S_I*\*(C'\fR constants from the Fcntl
-module:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use Fcntl ':mode';
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& chmod S_IRWXU|S_IRGRP|S_IXGRP|S_IROTH|S_IXOTH, @executables;
-\& # This is identical to the chmod 0755 of the above example.
-.Ve
-.IP "chomp \s-1VARIABLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "chomp VARIABLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "chomp( \s-1LIST\s0 )" 8
-.IX Item "chomp( LIST )"
-.IP "chomp" 8
-.IX Item "chomp"
-.PD
-This safer version of \*(L"chop\*(R" removes any trailing string
-that corresponds to the current value of \f(CW$/\fR (also known as
-\&\f(CW$INPUT_RECORD_SEPARATOR\fR in the \f(CW\*(C`English\*(C'\fR module). It returns the total
-number of characters removed from all its arguments. It's often used to
-remove the newline from the end of an input record when you're worried
-that the final record may be missing its newline. When in paragraph
-mode (\f(CW\*(C`$/ = ""\*(C'\fR), it removes all trailing newlines from the string.
-When in slurp mode (\f(CW\*(C`$/ = undef\*(C'\fR) or fixed-length record mode (\f(CW$/\fR is
-a reference to an integer or the like, see perlvar) \fIchomp()\fR won't
-remove anything.
-If \s-1VARIABLE\s0 is omitted, it chomps \f(CW$_\fR. Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& while (<>) {
-\& chomp; # avoid \en on last field
-\& @array = split(/:/);
-\& # ...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If \s-1VARIABLE\s0 is a hash, it chomps the hash's values, but not its keys.
-.Sp
-You can actually chomp anything that's an lvalue, including an assignment:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& chomp($cwd = `pwd`);
-\& chomp($answer = <STDIN>);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you chomp a list, each element is chomped, and the total number of
-characters removed is returned.
-.Sp
-Note that parentheses are necessary when you're chomping anything
-that is not a simple variable. This is because \f(CW\*(C`chomp $cwd = `pwd`;\*(C'\fR
-is interpreted as \f(CW\*(C`(chomp $cwd) = `pwd`;\*(C'\fR, rather than as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`chomp( $cwd = `pwd` )\*(C'\fR which you might expect. Similarly,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`chomp $a, $b\*(C'\fR is interpreted as \f(CW\*(C`chomp($a), $b\*(C'\fR rather than
-as \f(CW\*(C`chomp($a, $b)\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "chop \s-1VARIABLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "chop VARIABLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "chop( \s-1LIST\s0 )" 8
-.IX Item "chop( LIST )"
-.IP "chop" 8
-.IX Item "chop"
-.PD
-Chops off the last character of a string and returns the character
-chopped. It is much more efficient than \f(CW\*(C`s/.$//s\*(C'\fR because it neither
-scans nor copies the string. If \s-1VARIABLE\s0 is omitted, chops \f(CW$_\fR.
-If \s-1VARIABLE\s0 is a hash, it chops the hash's values, but not its keys.
-.Sp
-You can actually chop anything that's an lvalue, including an assignment.
-.Sp
-If you chop a list, each element is chopped. Only the value of the
-last \f(CW\*(C`chop\*(C'\fR is returned.
-.Sp
-Note that \f(CW\*(C`chop\*(C'\fR returns the last character. To return all but the last
-character, use \f(CW\*(C`substr($string, 0, \-1)\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-See also \*(L"chomp\*(R".
-.IP "chown \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "chown LIST"
-Changes the owner (and group) of a list of files. The first two
-elements of the list must be the \fInumeric\fR uid and gid, in that
-order. A value of \-1 in either position is interpreted by most
-systems to leave that value unchanged. Returns the number of files
-successfully changed.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $cnt = chown $uid, $gid, 'foo', 'bar';
-\& chown $uid, $gid, @filenames;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Here's an example that looks up nonnumeric uids in the passwd file:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& print "User: ";
-\& chomp($user = <STDIN>);
-\& print "Files: ";
-\& chomp($pattern = <STDIN>);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& ($login,$pass,$uid,$gid) = getpwnam($user)
-\& or die "$user not in passwd file";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& @ary = glob($pattern); # expand filenames
-\& chown $uid, $gid, @ary;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-On most systems, you are not allowed to change the ownership of the
-file unless you're the superuser, although you should be able to change
-the group to any of your secondary groups. On insecure systems, these
-restrictions may be relaxed, but this is not a portable assumption.
-On \s-1POSIX\s0 systems, you can detect this condition this way:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use POSIX qw(sysconf _PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED);
-\& $can_chown_giveaway = not sysconf(_PC_CHOWN_RESTRICTED);
-.Ve
-.IP "chr \s-1NUMBER\s0" 8
-.IX Item "chr NUMBER"
-.PD 0
-.IP "chr" 8
-.IX Item "chr"
-.PD
-Returns the character represented by that \s-1NUMBER\s0 in the character set.
-For example, \f(CW\*(C`chr(65)\*(C'\fR is \f(CW"A"\fR in either \s-1ASCII\s0 or Unicode, and
-chr(0x263a) is a Unicode smiley face. Note that characters from 128
-to 255 (inclusive) are by default not encoded in \s-1UTF\-8\s0 Unicode for
-backward compatibility reasons (but see encoding).
-.Sp
-If \s-1NUMBER\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.Sp
-For the reverse, use \*(L"ord\*(R".
-.Sp
-Note that under the \f(CW\*(C`bytes\*(C'\fR pragma the \s-1NUMBER\s0 is masked to
-the low eight bits.
-.Sp
-See perlunicode and encoding for more about Unicode.
-.IP "chroot \s-1FILENAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "chroot FILENAME"
-.PD 0
-.IP "chroot" 8
-.IX Item "chroot"
-.PD
-This function works like the system call by the same name: it makes the
-named directory the new root directory for all further pathnames that
-begin with a \f(CW\*(C`/\*(C'\fR by your process and all its children. (It doesn't
-change your current working directory, which is unaffected.) For security
-reasons, this call is restricted to the superuser. If \s-1FILENAME\s0 is
-omitted, does a \f(CW\*(C`chroot\*(C'\fR to \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "close \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "close FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "close" 8
-.IX Item "close"
-.PD
-Closes the file or pipe associated with the file handle, returning
-true only if \s-1IO\s0 buffers are successfully flushed and closes the system
-file descriptor. Closes the currently selected filehandle if the
-argument is omitted.
-.Sp
-You don't have to close \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 if you are immediately going to do
-another \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR on it, because \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR will close it for you. (See
-\&\f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR.) However, an explicit \f(CW\*(C`close\*(C'\fR on an input file resets the line
-counter (\f(CW$.\fR), while the implicit close done by \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR does not.
-.Sp
-If the file handle came from a piped open \f(CW\*(C`close\*(C'\fR will additionally
-return false if one of the other system calls involved fails or if the
-program exits with non-zero status. (If the only problem was that the
-program exited non-zero \f(CW$!\fR will be set to \f(CW0\fR.) Closing a pipe
-also waits for the process executing on the pipe to complete, in case you
-want to look at the output of the pipe afterwards, and
-implicitly puts the exit status value of that command into \f(CW$?\fR.
-.Sp
-Prematurely closing the read end of a pipe (i.e. before the process
-writing to it at the other end has closed it) will result in a
-\&\s-1SIGPIPE\s0 being delivered to the writer. If the other end can't
-handle that, be sure to read all the data before closing the pipe.
-.Sp
-Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& open(OUTPUT, '|sort >foo') # pipe to sort
-\& or die "Can't start sort: $!";
-\& #... # print stuff to output
-\& close OUTPUT # wait for sort to finish
-\& or warn $! ? "Error closing sort pipe: $!"
-\& : "Exit status $? from sort";
-\& open(INPUT, 'foo') # get sort's results
-\& or die "Can't open 'foo' for input: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-\&\s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 may be an expression whose value can be used as an indirect
-filehandle, usually the real filehandle name.
-.IP "closedir \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "closedir DIRHANDLE"
-Closes a directory opened by \f(CW\*(C`opendir\*(C'\fR and returns the success of that
-system call.
-.IP "connect \s-1SOCKET\s0,NAME" 8
-.IX Item "connect SOCKET,NAME"
-Attempts to connect to a remote socket, just as the connect system call
-does. Returns true if it succeeded, false otherwise. \s-1NAME\s0 should be a
-packed address of the appropriate type for the socket. See the examples in
-\&\*(L"Sockets: Client/Server Communication\*(R" in perlipc.
-.IP "continue \s-1BLOCK\s0" 8
-.IX Item "continue BLOCK"
-Actually a flow control statement rather than a function. If there is a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR \s-1BLOCK\s0 attached to a \s-1BLOCK\s0 (typically in a \f(CW\*(C`while\*(C'\fR or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`foreach\*(C'\fR), it is always executed just before the conditional is about to
-be evaluated again, just like the third part of a \f(CW\*(C`for\*(C'\fR loop in C. Thus
-it can be used to increment a loop variable, even when the loop has been
-continued via the \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR statement (which is similar to the C \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR
-statement).
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR may appear within a \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR
-block. \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR will behave as if they had been executed within
-the main block. So will \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, but since it will execute a \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR
-block, it may be more entertaining.
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& while (EXPR) {
-\& ### redo always comes here
-\& do_something;
-\& } continue {
-\& ### next always comes here
-\& do_something_else;
-\& # then back the top to re-check EXPR
-\& }
-\& ### last always comes here
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Omitting the \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR section is semantically equivalent to using an
-empty one, logically enough. In that case, \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR goes directly back
-to check the condition at the top of the loop.
-.IP "cos \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "cos EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "cos" 8
-.IX Item "cos"
-.PD
-Returns the cosine of \s-1EXPR\s0 (expressed in radians). If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted,
-takes cosine of \f(CW$_\fR.
-.Sp
-For the inverse cosine operation, you may use the \f(CW\*(C`Math::Trig::acos()\*(C'\fR
-function, or use this relation:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& sub acos { atan2( sqrt(1 - $_[0] * $_[0]), $_[0] ) }
-.Ve
-.IP "crypt \s-1PLAINTEXT\s0,SALT" 8
-.IX Item "crypt PLAINTEXT,SALT"
-Encrypts a string exactly like the \fIcrypt\fR\|(3) function in the C library
-(assuming that you actually have a version there that has not been
-extirpated as a potential munition). This can prove useful for checking
-the password file for lousy passwords, amongst other things. Only the
-guys wearing white hats should do this.
-.Sp
-Note that crypt is intended to be a one-way function, much like
-breaking eggs to make an omelette. There is no (known) corresponding
-decrypt function (in other words, the \fIcrypt()\fR is a one-way hash
-function). As a result, this function isn't all that useful for
-cryptography. (For that, see your nearby \s-1CPAN\s0 mirror.)
-.Sp
-When verifying an existing encrypted string you should use the
-encrypted text as the salt (like \f(CW\*(C`crypt($plain, $crypted) eq
-$crypted\*(C'\fR). This allows your code to work with the standard crypt
-and with more exotic implementations. In other words, do not assume
-anything about the returned string itself, or how many bytes in
-the encrypted string matter.
-.Sp
-Traditionally the result is a string of 13 bytes: two first bytes of
-the salt, followed by 11 bytes from the set \f(CW\*(C`[./0\-9A\-Za\-z]\*(C'\fR, and only
-the first eight bytes of the encrypted string mattered, but
-alternative hashing schemes (like \s-1MD5\s0), higher level security schemes
-(like C2), and implementations on non-UNIX platforms may produce
-different strings.
-.Sp
-When choosing a new salt create a random two character string whose
-characters come from the set \f(CW\*(C`[./0\-9A\-Za\-z]\*(C'\fR (like \f(CW\*(C`join '', ('.',
-\&'/', 0..9, 'A'..'Z', 'a'..'z')[rand 64, rand 64]\*(C'\fR). This set of
-characters is just a recommendation; the characters allowed in
-the salt depend solely on your system's crypt library, and Perl can't
-restrict what salts \f(CW\*(C`crypt()\*(C'\fR accepts.
-.Sp
-Here's an example that makes sure that whoever runs this program knows
-their own password:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $pwd = (getpwuid($<))[1];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& system "stty -echo";
-\& print "Password: ";
-\& chomp($word = <STDIN>);
-\& print "\en";
-\& system "stty echo";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& if (crypt($word, $pwd) ne $pwd) {
-\& die "Sorry...\en";
-\& } else {
-\& print "ok\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Of course, typing in your own password to whoever asks you
-for it is unwise.
-.Sp
-The crypt function is unsuitable for encrypting large quantities
-of data, not least of all because you can't get the information
-back. Look at the \fIby\-module/Crypt\fR and \fIby\-module/PGP\fR directories
-on your favorite \s-1CPAN\s0 mirror for a slew of potentially useful
-modules.
-.Sp
-If using \fIcrypt()\fR on a Unicode string (which \fIpotentially\fR has
-characters with codepoints above 255), Perl tries to make sense
-of the situation by trying to downgrade (a copy of the string)
-the string back to an eight-bit byte string before calling \fIcrypt()\fR
-(on that copy). If that works, good. If not, \fIcrypt()\fR dies with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Wide character in crypt\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "dbmclose \s-1HASH\s0" 8
-.IX Item "dbmclose HASH"
-[This function has been largely superseded by the \f(CW\*(C`untie\*(C'\fR function.]
-.Sp
-Breaks the binding between a \s-1DBM\s0 file and a hash.
-.IP "dbmopen \s-1HASH\s0,DBNAME,MASK" 8
-.IX Item "dbmopen HASH,DBNAME,MASK"
-[This function has been largely superseded by the \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR function.]
-.Sp
-This binds a \fIdbm\fR\|(3), \fIndbm\fR\|(3), \fIsdbm\fR\|(3), \fIgdbm\fR\|(3), or Berkeley \s-1DB\s0 file to a
-hash. \s-1HASH\s0 is the name of the hash. (Unlike normal \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR, the first
-argument is \fInot\fR a filehandle, even though it looks like one). \s-1DBNAME\s0
-is the name of the database (without the \fI.dir\fR or \fI.pag\fR extension if
-any). If the database does not exist, it is created with protection
-specified by \s-1MASK\s0 (as modified by the \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR). If your system supports
-only the older \s-1DBM\s0 functions, you may perform only one \f(CW\*(C`dbmopen\*(C'\fR in your
-program. In older versions of Perl, if your system had neither \s-1DBM\s0 nor
-ndbm, calling \f(CW\*(C`dbmopen\*(C'\fR produced a fatal error; it now falls back to
-\&\fIsdbm\fR\|(3).
-.Sp
-If you don't have write access to the \s-1DBM\s0 file, you can only read hash
-variables, not set them. If you want to test whether you can write,
-either use file tests or try setting a dummy hash entry inside an \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR,
-which will trap the error.
-.Sp
-Note that functions such as \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR may return huge lists
-when used on large \s-1DBM\s0 files. You may prefer to use the \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR
-function to iterate over large \s-1DBM\s0 files. Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& # print out history file offsets
-\& dbmopen(%HIST,'/usr/lib/news/history',0666);
-\& while (($key,$val) = each %HIST) {
-\& print $key, ' = ', unpack('L',$val), "\en";
-\& }
-\& dbmclose(%HIST);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See also AnyDBM_File for a more general description of the pros and
-cons of the various dbm approaches, as well as DB_File for a particularly
-rich implementation.
-.Sp
-You can control which \s-1DBM\s0 library you use by loading that library
-before you call \fIdbmopen()\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use DB_File;
-\& dbmopen(%NS_Hist, "$ENV{HOME}/.netscape/history.db")
-\& or die "Can't open netscape history file: $!";
-.Ve
-.IP "defined \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "defined EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "defined" 8
-.IX Item "defined"
-.PD
-Returns a Boolean value telling whether \s-1EXPR\s0 has a value other than
-the undefined value \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is not present, \f(CW$_\fR will be
-checked.
-.Sp
-Many operations return \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR to indicate failure, end of file,
-system error, uninitialized variable, and other exceptional
-conditions. This function allows you to distinguish \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR from
-other values. (A simple Boolean test will not distinguish among
-\&\f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR, zero, the empty string, and \f(CW"0"\fR, which are all equally
-false.) Note that since \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR is a valid scalar, its presence
-doesn't \fInecessarily\fR indicate an exceptional condition: \f(CW\*(C`pop\*(C'\fR
-returns \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR when its argument is an empty array, \fIor\fR when the
-element to return happens to be \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-You may also use \f(CW\*(C`defined(&func)\*(C'\fR to check whether subroutine \f(CW&func\fR
-has ever been defined. The return value is unaffected by any forward
-declarations of \f(CW&func\fR. Note that a subroutine which is not defined
-may still be callable: its package may have an \f(CW\*(C`AUTOLOAD\*(C'\fR method that
-makes it spring into existence the first time that it is called \*(-- see
-perlsub.
-.Sp
-Use of \f(CW\*(C`defined\*(C'\fR on aggregates (hashes and arrays) is deprecated. It
-used to report whether memory for that aggregate has ever been
-allocated. This behavior may disappear in future versions of Perl.
-You should instead use a simple test for size:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& if (@an_array) { print "has array elements\en" }
-\& if (%a_hash) { print "has hash members\en" }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-When used on a hash element, it tells you whether the value is defined,
-not whether the key exists in the hash. Use \*(L"exists\*(R" for the latter
-purpose.
-.Sp
-Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& print if defined $switch{'D'};
-\& print "$val\en" while defined($val = pop(@ary));
-\& die "Can't readlink $sym: $!"
-\& unless defined($value = readlink $sym);
-\& sub foo { defined &$bar ? &$bar(@_) : die "No bar"; }
-\& $debugging = 0 unless defined $debugging;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note: Many folks tend to overuse \f(CW\*(C`defined\*(C'\fR, and then are surprised to
-discover that the number \f(CW0\fR and \f(CW""\fR (the zero-length string) are, in fact,
-defined values. For example, if you say
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& "ab" =~ /a(.*)b/;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The pattern match succeeds, and \f(CW$1\fR is defined, despite the fact that it
-matched \*(L"nothing\*(R". But it didn't really match nothing\*(--rather, it
-matched something that happened to be zero characters long. This is all
-very above-board and honest. When a function returns an undefined value,
-it's an admission that it couldn't give you an honest answer. So you
-should use \f(CW\*(C`defined\*(C'\fR only when you're questioning the integrity of what
-you're trying to do. At other times, a simple comparison to \f(CW0\fR or \f(CW""\fR is
-what you want.
-.Sp
-See also \*(L"undef\*(R", \*(L"exists\*(R", \*(L"ref\*(R".
-.IP "delete \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "delete EXPR"
-Given an expression that specifies a hash element, array element, hash slice,
-or array slice, deletes the specified element(s) from the hash or array.
-In the case of an array, if the array elements happen to be at the end,
-the size of the array will shrink to the highest element that tests
-true for \fIexists()\fR (or 0 if no such element exists).
-.Sp
-Returns each element so deleted or the undefined value if there was no such
-element. Deleting from \f(CW$ENV{}\fR modifies the environment. Deleting from
-a hash tied to a \s-1DBM\s0 file deletes the entry from the \s-1DBM\s0 file. Deleting
-from a \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fRd hash or array may not necessarily return anything.
-.Sp
-Deleting an array element effectively returns that position of the array
-to its initial, uninitialized state. Subsequently testing for the same
-element with \fIexists()\fR will return false. Note that deleting array
-elements in the middle of an array will not shift the index of the ones
-after them down\*(--use \fIsplice()\fR for that. See \*(L"exists\*(R".
-.Sp
-The following (inefficiently) deletes all the values of \f(CW%HASH\fR and \f(CW at ARRAY:\fR
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& foreach $key (keys %HASH) {
-\& delete $HASH{$key};
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& foreach $index (0 .. $#ARRAY) {
-\& delete $ARRAY[$index];
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-And so do these:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& delete @HASH{keys %HASH};
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& delete @ARRAY[0 .. $#ARRAY];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-But both of these are slower than just assigning the empty list
-or undefining \f(CW%HASH\fR or \f(CW at ARRAY:\fR
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& %HASH = (); # completely empty %HASH
-\& undef %HASH; # forget %HASH ever existed
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& @ARRAY = (); # completely empty @ARRAY
-\& undef @ARRAY; # forget @ARRAY ever existed
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that the \s-1EXPR\s0 can be arbitrarily complicated as long as the final
-operation is a hash element, array element, hash slice, or array slice
-lookup:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& delete $ref->[$x][$y]{$key};
-\& delete @{$ref->[$x][$y]}{$key1, $key2, @morekeys};
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& delete $ref->[$x][$y][$index];
-\& delete @{$ref->[$x][$y]}[$index1, $index2, @moreindices];
-.Ve
-.IP "die \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "die LIST"
-Outside an \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR, prints the value of \s-1LIST\s0 to \f(CW\*(C`STDERR\*(C'\fR and
-exits with the current value of \f(CW$!\fR (errno). If \f(CW$!\fR is \f(CW0\fR,
-exits with the value of \f(CW\*(C`($? >> 8)\*(C'\fR (backtick `command`
-status). If \f(CW\*(C`($? >> 8)\*(C'\fR is \f(CW0\fR, exits with \f(CW255\fR. Inside
-an \f(CW\*(C`eval(),\*(C'\fR the error message is stuffed into \f(CW$@\fR and the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR is terminated with the undefined value. This makes
-\&\f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR the way to raise an exception.
-.Sp
-Equivalent examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& die "Can't cd to spool: $!\en" unless chdir '/usr/spool/news';
-\& chdir '/usr/spool/news' or die "Can't cd to spool: $!\en"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If the last element of \s-1LIST\s0 does not end in a newline, the current
-script line number and input line number (if any) are also printed,
-and a newline is supplied. Note that the \*(L"input line number\*(R" (also
-known as \*(L"chunk\*(R") is subject to whatever notion of \*(L"line\*(R" happens to
-be currently in effect, and is also available as the special variable
-\&\f(CW$.\fR. See \*(L"$/\*(R" in perlvar and \*(L"$.\*(R" in perlvar.
-.Sp
-Hint: sometimes appending \f(CW", stopped"\fR to your message will cause it
-to make better sense when the string \f(CW"at foo line 123"\fR is appended.
-Suppose you are running script \*(L"canasta\*(R".
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& die "/etc/games is no good";
-\& die "/etc/games is no good, stopped";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-produce, respectively
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& /etc/games is no good at canasta line 123.
-\& /etc/games is no good, stopped at canasta line 123.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See also \fIexit()\fR, \fIwarn()\fR, and the Carp module.
-.Sp
-If \s-1LIST\s0 is empty and \f(CW$@\fR already contains a value (typically from a
-previous eval) that value is reused after appending \f(CW"\et...propagated"\fR.
-This is useful for propagating exceptions:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& eval { ... };
-\& die unless $@ =~ /Expected exception/;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If \s-1LIST\s0 is empty and \f(CW$@\fR contains an object reference that has a
-\&\f(CW\*(C`PROPAGATE\*(C'\fR method, that method will be called with additional file
-and line number parameters. The return value replaces the value in
-\&\f(CW$@\fR. ie. as if \f(CW\*(C`$@ = eval { $@\->PROPAGATE(_\|_FILE_\|_, _\|_LINE_\|_) };\*(C'\fR
-were called.
-.Sp
-If \f(CW$@\fR is empty then the string \f(CW"Died"\fR is used.
-.Sp
-\&\fIdie()\fR can also be called with a reference argument. If this happens to be
-trapped within an \fIeval()\fR, $@ contains the reference. This behavior permits
-a more elaborate exception handling implementation using objects that
-maintain arbitrary state about the nature of the exception. Such a scheme
-is sometimes preferable to matching particular string values of $@ using
-regular expressions. Here's an example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& eval { ... ; die Some::Module::Exception->new( FOO => "bar" ) };
-\& if ($@) {
-\& if (ref($@) && UNIVERSAL::isa($@,"Some::Module::Exception")) {
-\& # handle Some::Module::Exception
-\& }
-\& else {
-\& # handle all other possible exceptions
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Because perl will stringify uncaught exception messages before displaying
-them, you may want to overload stringification operations on such custom
-exception objects. See overload for details about that.
-.Sp
-You can arrange for a callback to be run just before the \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR
-does its deed, by setting the \f(CW$SIG{_\|_DIE_\|_}\fR hook. The associated
-handler will be called with the error text and can change the error
-message, if it sees fit, by calling \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR again. See
-\&\*(L"$SIG{expr}\*(R" in perlvar for details on setting \f(CW%SIG\fR entries, and
-\&\*(L"eval \s-1BLOCK\s0\*(R" for some examples. Although this feature was meant
-to be run only right before your program was to exit, this is not
-currently the case\*(--the \f(CW$SIG{_\|_DIE_\|_}\fR hook is currently called
-even inside \fIeval()\fRed blocks/strings! If one wants the hook to do
-nothing in such situations, put
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& die @_ if $^S;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-as the first line of the handler (see \*(L"$^S\*(R" in perlvar). Because
-this promotes strange action at a distance, this counterintuitive
-behavior may be fixed in a future release.
-.IP "do \s-1BLOCK\s0" 8
-.IX Item "do BLOCK"
-Not really a function. Returns the value of the last command in the
-sequence of commands indicated by \s-1BLOCK\s0. When modified by a loop
-modifier, executes the \s-1BLOCK\s0 once before testing the loop condition.
-(On other statements the loop modifiers test the conditional first.)
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`do BLOCK\*(C'\fR does \fInot\fR count as a loop, so the loop control statements
-\&\f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR cannot be used to leave or restart the block.
-See perlsyn for alternative strategies.
-.IP "do \s-1SUBROUTINE\s0(\s-1LIST\s0)" 8
-.IX Item "do SUBROUTINE(LIST)"
-A deprecated form of subroutine call. See perlsub.
-.IP "do \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "do EXPR"
-Uses the value of \s-1EXPR\s0 as a filename and executes the contents of the
-file as a Perl script. Its primary use is to include subroutines
-from a Perl subroutine library.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& do 'stat.pl';
-.Ve
-.Sp
-is just like
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& eval `cat stat.pl`;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-except that it's more efficient and concise, keeps track of the current
-filename for error messages, searches the \f(CW at INC\fR libraries, and updates
-\&\f(CW%INC\fR if the file is found. See \*(L"Predefined Names\*(R" in perlvar for these
-variables. It also differs in that code evaluated with \f(CW\*(C`do FILENAME\*(C'\fR
-cannot see lexicals in the enclosing scope; \f(CW\*(C`eval STRING\*(C'\fR does. It's the
-same, however, in that it does reparse the file every time you call it,
-so you probably don't want to do this inside a loop.
-.Sp
-If \f(CW\*(C`do\*(C'\fR cannot read the file, it returns undef and sets \f(CW$!\fR to the
-error. If \f(CW\*(C`do\*(C'\fR can read the file but cannot compile it, it
-returns undef and sets an error message in \f(CW$@\fR. If the file is
-successfully compiled, \f(CW\*(C`do\*(C'\fR returns the value of the last expression
-evaluated.
-.Sp
-Note that inclusion of library modules is better done with the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR operators, which also do automatic error checking
-and raise an exception if there's a problem.
-.Sp
-You might like to use \f(CW\*(C`do\*(C'\fR to read in a program configuration
-file. Manual error checking can be done this way:
-.Sp
-.Vb 10
-\& # read in config files: system first, then user
-\& for $file ("/share/prog/defaults.rc",
-\& "$ENV{HOME}/.someprogrc")
-\& {
-\& unless ($return = do $file) {
-\& warn "couldn't parse $file: $@" if $@;
-\& warn "couldn't do $file: $!" unless defined $return;
-\& warn "couldn't run $file" unless $return;
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "dump \s-1LABEL\s0" 8
-.IX Item "dump LABEL"
-.PD 0
-.IP "dump" 8
-.IX Item "dump"
-.PD
-This function causes an immediate core dump. See also the \fB\-u\fR
-command-line switch in perlrun, which does the same thing.
-Primarily this is so that you can use the \fBundump\fR program (not
-supplied) to turn your core dump into an executable binary after
-having initialized all your variables at the beginning of the
-program. When the new binary is executed it will begin by executing
-a \f(CW\*(C`goto LABEL\*(C'\fR (with all the restrictions that \f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fR suffers).
-Think of it as a goto with an intervening core dump and reincarnation.
-If \f(CW\*(C`LABEL\*(C'\fR is omitted, restarts the program from the top.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\s-1WARNING\s0\fR: Any files opened at the time of the dump will \fInot\fR
-be open any more when the program is reincarnated, with possible
-resulting confusion on the part of Perl.
-.Sp
-This function is now largely obsolete, partly because it's very
-hard to convert a core file into an executable, and because the
-real compiler backends for generating portable bytecode and compilable
-C code have superseded it. That's why you should now invoke it as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`CORE::dump()\*(C'\fR, if you don't want to be warned against a possible
-typo.
-.Sp
-If you're looking to use dump to speed up your program, consider
-generating bytecode or native C code as described in perlcc. If
-you're just trying to accelerate a \s-1CGI\s0 script, consider using the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`mod_perl\*(C'\fR extension to \fBApache\fR, or the \s-1CPAN\s0 module, CGI::Fast.
-You might also consider autoloading or selfloading, which at least
-make your program \fIappear\fR to run faster.
-.IP "each \s-1HASH\s0" 8
-.IX Item "each HASH"
-When called in list context, returns a 2\-element list consisting of the
-key and value for the next element of a hash, so that you can iterate over
-it. When called in scalar context, returns only the key for the next
-element in the hash.
-.Sp
-Entries are returned in an apparently random order. The actual random
-order is subject to change in future versions of perl, but it is
-guaranteed to be in the same order as either the \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR
-function would produce on the same (unmodified) hash. Since Perl
-5.8.1 the ordering is different even between different runs of Perl
-for security reasons (see \*(L"Algorithmic Complexity Attacks\*(R" in perlsec).
-.Sp
-When the hash is entirely read, a null array is returned in list context
-(which when assigned produces a false (\f(CW0\fR) value), and \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR in
-scalar context. The next call to \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR after that will start iterating
-again. There is a single iterator for each hash, shared by all \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR function calls in the program; it can be reset by
-reading all the elements from the hash, or by evaluating \f(CW\*(C`keys HASH\*(C'\fR or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`values HASH\*(C'\fR. If you add or delete elements of a hash while you're
-iterating over it, you may get entries skipped or duplicated, so
-don't. Exception: It is always safe to delete the item most recently
-returned by \f(CW\*(C`each()\*(C'\fR, which means that the following code will work:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& while (($key, $value) = each %hash) {
-\& print $key, "\en";
-\& delete $hash{$key}; # This is safe
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The following prints out your environment like the \fIprintenv\fR\|(1) program,
-only in a different order:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& while (($key,$value) = each %ENV) {
-\& print "$key=$value\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See also \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "eof \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "eof FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "eof ()" 8
-.IX Item "eof ()"
-.IP "eof" 8
-.IX Item "eof"
-.PD
-Returns 1 if the next read on \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 will return end of file, or if
-\&\s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is not open. \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 may be an expression whose value
-gives the real filehandle. (Note that this function actually
-reads a character and then \f(CW\*(C`ungetc\*(C'\fRs it, so isn't very useful in an
-interactive context.) Do not read from a terminal file (or call
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eof(FILEHANDLE)\*(C'\fR on it) after end-of-file is reached. File types such
-as terminals may lose the end-of-file condition if you do.
-.Sp
-An \f(CW\*(C`eof\*(C'\fR without an argument uses the last file read. Using \f(CW\*(C`eof()\*(C'\fR
-with empty parentheses is very different. It refers to the pseudo file
-formed from the files listed on the command line and accessed via the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`<>\*(C'\fR operator. Since \f(CW\*(C`<>\*(C'\fR isn't explicitly opened,
-as a normal filehandle is, an \f(CW\*(C`eof()\*(C'\fR before \f(CW\*(C`<>\*(C'\fR has been
-used will cause \f(CW at ARGV\fR to be examined to determine if input is
-available. Similarly, an \f(CW\*(C`eof()\*(C'\fR after \f(CW\*(C`<>\*(C'\fR has returned
-end-of-file will assume you are processing another \f(CW at ARGV\fR list,
-and if you haven't set \f(CW at ARGV\fR, will read input from \f(CW\*(C`STDIN\*(C'\fR;
-see \*(L"I/O Operators\*(R" in perlop.
-.Sp
-In a \f(CW\*(C`while (<>)\*(C'\fR loop, \f(CW\*(C`eof\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`eof(ARGV)\*(C'\fR can be used to
-detect the end of each file, \f(CW\*(C`eof()\*(C'\fR will only detect the end of the
-last file. Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& # reset line numbering on each input file
-\& while (<>) {
-\& next if /^\es*#/; # skip comments
-\& print "$.\et$_";
-\& } continue {
-\& close ARGV if eof; # Not eof()!
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& # insert dashes just before last line of last file
-\& while (<>) {
-\& if (eof()) { # check for end of last file
-\& print "--------------\en";
-\& }
-\& print;
-\& last if eof(); # needed if we're reading from a terminal
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Practical hint: you almost never need to use \f(CW\*(C`eof\*(C'\fR in Perl, because the
-input operators typically return \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR when they run out of data, or if
-there was an error.
-.IP "eval \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "eval EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "eval \s-1BLOCK\s0" 8
-.IX Item "eval BLOCK"
-.PD
-In the first form, the return value of \s-1EXPR\s0 is parsed and executed as if it
-were a little Perl program. The value of the expression (which is itself
-determined within scalar context) is first parsed, and if there weren't any
-errors, executed in the lexical context of the current Perl program, so
-that any variable settings or subroutine and format definitions remain
-afterwards. Note that the value is parsed every time the eval executes.
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, evaluates \f(CW$_\fR. This form is typically used to
-delay parsing and subsequent execution of the text of \s-1EXPR\s0 until run time.
-.Sp
-In the second form, the code within the \s-1BLOCK\s0 is parsed only once\*(--at the
-same time the code surrounding the eval itself was parsed\*(--and executed
-within the context of the current Perl program. This form is typically
-used to trap exceptions more efficiently than the first (see below), while
-also providing the benefit of checking the code within \s-1BLOCK\s0 at compile
-time.
-.Sp
-The final semicolon, if any, may be omitted from the value of \s-1EXPR\s0 or within
-the \s-1BLOCK\s0.
-.Sp
-In both forms, the value returned is the value of the last expression
-evaluated inside the mini\-program; a return statement may be also used, just
-as with subroutines. The expression providing the return value is evaluated
-in void, scalar, or list context, depending on the context of the eval itself.
-See \*(L"wantarray\*(R" for more on how the evaluation context can be determined.
-.Sp
-If there is a syntax error or runtime error, or a \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR statement is
-executed, an undefined value is returned by \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW$@\fR is set to the
-error message. If there was no error, \f(CW$@\fR is guaranteed to be a null
-string. Beware that using \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR neither silences perl from printing
-warnings to \s-1STDERR\s0, nor does it stuff the text of warning messages into \f(CW$@\fR.
-To do either of those, you have to use the \f(CW$SIG{_\|_WARN_\|_}\fR facility, or
-turn off warnings inside the \s-1BLOCK\s0 or \s-1EXPR\s0 using \f(CW\*(C`no\ warnings\ 'all'\*(C'\fR.
-See \*(L"warn\*(R", perlvar, warnings and perllexwarn.
-.Sp
-Note that, because \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR traps otherwise-fatal errors, it is useful for
-determining whether a particular feature (such as \f(CW\*(C`socket\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`symlink\*(C'\fR)
-is implemented. It is also Perl's exception trapping mechanism, where
-the die operator is used to raise exceptions.
-.Sp
-If the code to be executed doesn't vary, you may use the eval-BLOCK
-form to trap run-time errors without incurring the penalty of
-recompiling each time. The error, if any, is still returned in \f(CW$@\fR.
-Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # make divide-by-zero nonfatal
-\& eval { $answer = $a / $b; }; warn $@ if $@;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # same thing, but less efficient
-\& eval '$answer = $a / $b'; warn $@ if $@;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # a compile-time error
-\& eval { $answer = }; # WRONG
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # a run-time error
-\& eval '$answer ='; # sets $@
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Due to the current arguably broken state of \f(CW\*(C`_\|_DIE_\|_\*(C'\fR hooks, when using
-the \f(CW\*(C`eval{}\*(C'\fR form as an exception trap in libraries, you may wish not
-to trigger any \f(CW\*(C`_\|_DIE_\|_\*(C'\fR hooks that user code may have installed.
-You can use the \f(CW\*(C`local $SIG{_\|_DIE_\|_}\*(C'\fR construct for this purpose,
-as shown in this example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # a very private exception trap for divide-by-zero
-\& eval { local $SIG{'__DIE__'}; $answer = $a / $b; };
-\& warn $@ if $@;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This is especially significant, given that \f(CW\*(C`_\|_DIE_\|_\*(C'\fR hooks can call
-\&\f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR again, which has the effect of changing their error messages:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& # __DIE__ hooks may modify error messages
-\& {
-\& local $SIG{'__DIE__'} =
-\& sub { (my $x = $_[0]) =~ s/foo/bar/g; die $x };
-\& eval { die "foo lives here" };
-\& print $@ if $@; # prints "bar lives here"
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Because this promotes action at a distance, this counterintuitive behavior
-may be fixed in a future release.
-.Sp
-With an \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR, you should be especially careful to remember what's
-being looked at when:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& eval $x; # CASE 1
-\& eval "$x"; # CASE 2
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& eval '$x'; # CASE 3
-\& eval { $x }; # CASE 4
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& eval "\e$$x++"; # CASE 5
-\& $$x++; # CASE 6
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Cases 1 and 2 above behave identically: they run the code contained in
-the variable \f(CW$x\fR. (Although case 2 has misleading double quotes making
-the reader wonder what else might be happening (nothing is).) Cases 3
-and 4 likewise behave in the same way: they run the code \f(CW'$x'\fR, which
-does nothing but return the value of \f(CW$x\fR. (Case 4 is preferred for
-purely visual reasons, but it also has the advantage of compiling at
-compile-time instead of at run\-time.) Case 5 is a place where
-normally you \fIwould\fR like to use double quotes, except that in this
-particular situation, you can just use symbolic references instead, as
-in case 6.
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eval BLOCK\*(C'\fR does \fInot\fR count as a loop, so the loop control statements
-\&\f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR cannot be used to leave or restart the block.
-.Sp
-Note that as a very special case, an \f(CW\*(C`eval ''\*(C'\fR executed within the \f(CW\*(C`DB\*(C'\fR
-package doesn't see the usual surrounding lexical scope, but rather the
-scope of the first non-DB piece of code that called it. You don't normally
-need to worry about this unless you are writing a Perl debugger.
-.IP "exec \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "exec LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "exec \s-1PROGRAM\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "exec PROGRAM LIST"
-.PD
-The \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR function executes a system command \fIand never returns\fR\-\-
-use \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR instead of \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR if you want it to return. It fails and
-returns false only if the command does not exist \fIand\fR it is executed
-directly instead of via your system's command shell (see below).
-.Sp
-Since it's a common mistake to use \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR instead of \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR, Perl
-warns you if there is a following statement which isn't \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`warn\*(C'\fR,
-or \f(CW\*(C`exit\*(C'\fR (if \f(CW\*(C`\-w\*(C'\fR is set \- but you always do that). If you
-\&\fIreally\fR want to follow an \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR with some other statement, you
-can use one of these styles to avoid the warning:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& exec ('foo') or print STDERR "couldn't exec foo: $!";
-\& { exec ('foo') }; print STDERR "couldn't exec foo: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If there is more than one argument in \s-1LIST\s0, or if \s-1LIST\s0 is an array
-with more than one value, calls \fIexecvp\fR\|(3) with the arguments in \s-1LIST\s0.
-If there is only one scalar argument or an array with one element in it,
-the argument is checked for shell metacharacters, and if there are any,
-the entire argument is passed to the system's command shell for parsing
-(this is \f(CW\*(C`/bin/sh \-c\*(C'\fR on Unix platforms, but varies on other platforms).
-If there are no shell metacharacters in the argument, it is split into
-words and passed directly to \f(CW\*(C`execvp\*(C'\fR, which is more efficient.
-Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& exec '/bin/echo', 'Your arguments are: ', @ARGV;
-\& exec "sort $outfile | uniq";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you don't really want to execute the first argument, but want to lie
-to the program you are executing about its own name, you can specify
-the program you actually want to run as an \*(L"indirect object\*(R" (without a
-comma) in front of the \s-1LIST\s0. (This always forces interpretation of the
-\&\s-1LIST\s0 as a multivalued list, even if there is only a single scalar in
-the list.) Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $shell = '/bin/csh';
-\& exec $shell '-sh'; # pretend it's a login shell
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or, more directly,
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& exec {'/bin/csh'} '-sh'; # pretend it's a login shell
-.Ve
-.Sp
-When the arguments get executed via the system shell, results will
-be subject to its quirks and capabilities. See \*(L"`STRING`\*(R" in perlop
-for details.
-.Sp
-Using an indirect object with \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR is also more
-secure. This usage (which also works fine with \fIsystem()\fR) forces
-interpretation of the arguments as a multivalued list, even if the
-list had just one argument. That way you're safe from the shell
-expanding wildcards or splitting up words with whitespace in them.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @args = ( "echo surprise" );
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& exec @args; # subject to shell escapes
-\& # if @args == 1
-\& exec { $args[0] } @args; # safe even with one-arg list
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The first version, the one without the indirect object, ran the \fIecho\fR
-program, passing it \f(CW"surprise"\fR an argument. The second version
-didn't\*(--it tried to run a program literally called \fI\*(L"echo surprise\*(R"\fR,
-didn't find it, and set \f(CW$?\fR to a non-zero value indicating failure.
-.Sp
-Beginning with v5.6.0, Perl will attempt to flush all files opened for
-output before the exec, but this may not be supported on some platforms
-(see perlport). To be safe, you may need to set \f(CW$|\fR ($AUTOFLUSH
-in English) or call the \f(CW\*(C`autoflush()\*(C'\fR method of \f(CW\*(C`IO::Handle\*(C'\fR on any
-open handles in order to avoid lost output.
-.Sp
-Note that \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR will not call your \f(CW\*(C`END\*(C'\fR blocks, nor will it call
-any \f(CW\*(C`DESTROY\*(C'\fR methods in your objects.
-.IP "exists \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "exists EXPR"
-Given an expression that specifies a hash element or array element,
-returns true if the specified element in the hash or array has ever
-been initialized, even if the corresponding value is undefined. The
-element is not autovivified if it doesn't exist.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& print "Exists\en" if exists $hash{$key};
-\& print "Defined\en" if defined $hash{$key};
-\& print "True\en" if $hash{$key};
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& print "Exists\en" if exists $array[$index];
-\& print "Defined\en" if defined $array[$index];
-\& print "True\en" if $array[$index];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-A hash or array element can be true only if it's defined, and defined if
-it exists, but the reverse doesn't necessarily hold true.
-.Sp
-Given an expression that specifies the name of a subroutine,
-returns true if the specified subroutine has ever been declared, even
-if it is undefined. Mentioning a subroutine name for exists or defined
-does not count as declaring it. Note that a subroutine which does not
-exist may still be callable: its package may have an \f(CW\*(C`AUTOLOAD\*(C'\fR
-method that makes it spring into existence the first time that it is
-called \*(-- see perlsub.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print "Exists\en" if exists &subroutine;
-\& print "Defined\en" if defined &subroutine;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that the \s-1EXPR\s0 can be arbitrarily complicated as long as the final
-operation is a hash or array key lookup or subroutine name:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& if (exists $ref->{A}->{B}->{$key}) { }
-\& if (exists $hash{A}{B}{$key}) { }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& if (exists $ref->{A}->{B}->[$ix]) { }
-\& if (exists $hash{A}{B}[$ix]) { }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& if (exists &{$ref->{A}{B}{$key}}) { }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Although the deepest nested array or hash will not spring into existence
-just because its existence was tested, any intervening ones will.
-Thus \f(CW\*(C`$ref\->{"A"}\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`$ref\->{"A"}\->{"B"}\*(C'\fR will spring
-into existence due to the existence test for the \f(CW$key\fR element above.
-This happens anywhere the arrow operator is used, including even:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& undef $ref;
-\& if (exists $ref->{"Some key"}) { }
-\& print $ref; # prints HASH(0x80d3d5c)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This surprising autovivification in what does not at first\*(--or even
-second\*(--glance appear to be an lvalue context may be fixed in a future
-release.
-.Sp
-See \*(L"Pseudo\-hashes: Using an array as a hash\*(R" in perlref for specifics
-on how \fIexists()\fR acts when used on a pseudo\-hash.
-.Sp
-Use of a subroutine call, rather than a subroutine name, as an argument
-to \fIexists()\fR is an error.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& exists ⊂ # OK
-\& exists &sub(); # Error
-.Ve
-.IP "exit \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "exit EXPR"
-Evaluates \s-1EXPR\s0 and exits immediately with that value. Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $ans = <STDIN>;
-\& exit 0 if $ans =~ /^[Xx]/;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See also \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, exits with \f(CW0\fR status. The only
-universally recognized values for \s-1EXPR\s0 are \f(CW0\fR for success and \f(CW1\fR
-for error; other values are subject to interpretation depending on the
-environment in which the Perl program is running. For example, exiting
-69 (\s-1EX_UNAVAILABLE\s0) from a \fIsendmail\fR incoming-mail filter will cause
-the mailer to return the item undelivered, but that's not true everywhere.
-.Sp
-Don't use \f(CW\*(C`exit\*(C'\fR to abort a subroutine if there's any chance that
-someone might want to trap whatever error happened. Use \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR instead,
-which can be trapped by an \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-The \fIexit()\fR function does not always exit immediately. It calls any
-defined \f(CW\*(C`END\*(C'\fR routines first, but these \f(CW\*(C`END\*(C'\fR routines may not
-themselves abort the exit. Likewise any object destructors that need to
-be called are called before the real exit. If this is a problem, you
-can call \f(CW\*(C`POSIX:_exit($status)\*(C'\fR to avoid \s-1END\s0 and destructor processing.
-See perlmod for details.
-.IP "exp \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "exp EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "exp" 8
-.IX Item "exp"
-.PD
-Returns \fIe\fR (the natural logarithm base) to the power of \s-1EXPR\s0.
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, gives \f(CW\*(C`exp($_)\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "fcntl \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,FUNCTION,SCALAR" 8
-.IX Item "fcntl FILEHANDLE,FUNCTION,SCALAR"
-Implements the \fIfcntl\fR\|(2) function. You'll probably have to say
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use Fcntl;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-first to get the correct constant definitions. Argument processing and
-value return works just like \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR below.
-For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use Fcntl;
-\& fcntl($filehandle, F_GETFL, $packed_return_buffer)
-\& or die "can't fcntl F_GETFL: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You don't have to check for \f(CW\*(C`defined\*(C'\fR on the return from \f(CW\*(C`fcntl\*(C'\fR.
-Like \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR, it maps a \f(CW0\fR return from the system call into
-\&\f(CW"0 but true"\fR in Perl. This string is true in boolean context and \f(CW0\fR
-in numeric context. It is also exempt from the normal \fB\-w\fR warnings
-on improper numeric conversions.
-.Sp
-Note that \f(CW\*(C`fcntl\*(C'\fR will produce a fatal error if used on a machine that
-doesn't implement \fIfcntl\fR\|(2). See the Fcntl module or your \fIfcntl\fR\|(2)
-manpage to learn what functions are available on your system.
-.IP "fileno \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "fileno FILEHANDLE"
-Returns the file descriptor for a filehandle, or undefined if the
-filehandle is not open. This is mainly useful for constructing
-bitmaps for \f(CW\*(C`select\*(C'\fR and low-level \s-1POSIX\s0 tty-handling operations.
-If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is an expression, the value is taken as an indirect
-filehandle, generally its name.
-.Sp
-You can use this to find out whether two handles refer to the
-same underlying descriptor:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& if (fileno(THIS) == fileno(THAT)) {
-\& print "THIS and THAT are dups\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-(Filehandles connected to memory objects via new features of \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR may
-return undefined even though they are open.)
-.IP "flock \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,OPERATION" 8
-.IX Item "flock FILEHANDLE,OPERATION"
-Calls \fIflock\fR\|(2), or an emulation of it, on \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0. Returns true
-for success, false on failure. Produces a fatal error if used on a
-machine that doesn't implement \fIflock\fR\|(2), \fIfcntl\fR\|(2) locking, or \fIlockf\fR\|(3).
-\&\f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR is Perl's portable file locking interface, although it locks
-only entire files, not records.
-.Sp
-Two potentially non-obvious but traditional \f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR semantics are
-that it waits indefinitely until the lock is granted, and that its locks
-\&\fBmerely advisory\fR. Such discretionary locks are more flexible, but offer
-fewer guarantees. This means that files locked with \f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR may be
-modified by programs that do not also use \f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR. See perlport,
-your port's specific documentation, or your system-specific local manpages
-for details. It's best to assume traditional behavior if you're writing
-portable programs. (But if you're not, you should as always feel perfectly
-free to write for your own system's idiosyncrasies (sometimes called
-\&\*(L"features\*(R"). Slavish adherence to portability concerns shouldn't get
-in the way of your getting your job done.)
-.Sp
-\&\s-1OPERATION\s0 is one of \s-1LOCK_SH\s0, \s-1LOCK_EX\s0, or \s-1LOCK_UN\s0, possibly combined with
-\&\s-1LOCK_NB\s0. These constants are traditionally valued 1, 2, 8 and 4, but
-you can use the symbolic names if you import them from the Fcntl module,
-either individually, or as a group using the ':flock' tag. \s-1LOCK_SH\s0
-requests a shared lock, \s-1LOCK_EX\s0 requests an exclusive lock, and \s-1LOCK_UN\s0
-releases a previously requested lock. If \s-1LOCK_NB\s0 is bitwise\-or'ed with
-\&\s-1LOCK_SH\s0 or \s-1LOCK_EX\s0 then \f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR will return immediately rather than blocking
-waiting for the lock (check the return status to see if you got it).
-.Sp
-To avoid the possibility of miscoordination, Perl now flushes \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0
-before locking or unlocking it.
-.Sp
-Note that the emulation built with \fIlockf\fR\|(3) doesn't provide shared
-locks, and it requires that \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 be open with write intent. These
-are the semantics that \fIlockf\fR\|(3) implements. Most if not all systems
-implement \fIlockf\fR\|(3) in terms of \fIfcntl\fR\|(2) locking, though, so the
-differing semantics shouldn't bite too many people.
-.Sp
-Note that the \fIfcntl\fR\|(2) emulation of \fIflock\fR\|(3) requires that \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0
-be open with read intent to use \s-1LOCK_SH\s0 and requires that it be open
-with write intent to use \s-1LOCK_EX\s0.
-.Sp
-Note also that some versions of \f(CW\*(C`flock\*(C'\fR cannot lock things over the
-network; you would need to use the more system-specific \f(CW\*(C`fcntl\*(C'\fR for
-that. If you like you can force Perl to ignore your system's \fIflock\fR\|(2)
-function, and so provide its own \fIfcntl\fR\|(2)\-based emulation, by passing
-the switch \f(CW\*(C`\-Ud_flock\*(C'\fR to the \fIConfigure\fR program when you configure
-perl.
-.Sp
-Here's a mailbox appender for \s-1BSD\s0 systems.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use Fcntl ':flock'; # import LOCK_* constants
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& sub lock {
-\& flock(MBOX,LOCK_EX);
-\& # and, in case someone appended
-\& # while we were waiting...
-\& seek(MBOX, 0, 2);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& sub unlock {
-\& flock(MBOX,LOCK_UN);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open(MBOX, ">>/usr/spool/mail/$ENV{'USER'}")
-\& or die "Can't open mailbox: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& lock();
-\& print MBOX $msg,"\en\en";
-\& unlock();
-.Ve
-.Sp
-On systems that support a real \fIflock()\fR, locks are inherited across \fIfork()\fR
-calls, whereas those that must resort to the more capricious \fIfcntl()\fR
-function lose the locks, making it harder to write servers.
-.Sp
-See also DB_File for other \fIflock()\fR examples.
-.IP "fork" 8
-.IX Item "fork"
-Does a \fIfork\fR\|(2) system call to create a new process running the
-same program at the same point. It returns the child pid to the
-parent process, \f(CW0\fR to the child process, or \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR if the fork is
-unsuccessful. File descriptors (and sometimes locks on those descriptors)
-are shared, while everything else is copied. On most systems supporting
-\&\fIfork()\fR, great care has gone into making it extremely efficient (for
-example, using copy-on-write technology on data pages), making it the
-dominant paradigm for multitasking over the last few decades.
-.Sp
-Beginning with v5.6.0, Perl will attempt to flush all files opened for
-output before forking the child process, but this may not be supported
-on some platforms (see perlport). To be safe, you may need to set
-\&\f(CW$|\fR ($AUTOFLUSH in English) or call the \f(CW\*(C`autoflush()\*(C'\fR method of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`IO::Handle\*(C'\fR on any open handles in order to avoid duplicate output.
-.Sp
-If you \f(CW\*(C`fork\*(C'\fR without ever waiting on your children, you will
-accumulate zombies. On some systems, you can avoid this by setting
-\&\f(CW$SIG{CHLD}\fR to \f(CW"IGNORE"\fR. See also perlipc for more examples of
-forking and reaping moribund children.
-.Sp
-Note that if your forked child inherits system file descriptors like
-\&\s-1STDIN\s0 and \s-1STDOUT\s0 that are actually connected by a pipe or socket, even
-if you exit, then the remote server (such as, say, a \s-1CGI\s0 script or a
-backgrounded job launched from a remote shell) won't think you're done.
-You should reopen those to \fI/dev/null\fR if it's any issue.
-.IP "format" 8
-.IX Item "format"
-Declare a picture format for use by the \f(CW\*(C`write\*(C'\fR function. For
-example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& format Something =
-\& Test: @<<<<<<<< @||||| @>>>>>
-\& $str, $%, '$' . int($num)
-\& .
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& $str = "widget";
-\& $num = $cost/$quantity;
-\& $~ = 'Something';
-\& write;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See perlform for many details and examples.
-.IP "formline \s-1PICTURE\s0,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "formline PICTURE,LIST"
-This is an internal function used by \f(CW\*(C`format\*(C'\fRs, though you may call it,
-too. It formats (see perlform) a list of values according to the
-contents of \s-1PICTURE\s0, placing the output into the format output
-accumulator, \f(CW$^A\fR (or \f(CW$ACCUMULATOR\fR in English).
-Eventually, when a \f(CW\*(C`write\*(C'\fR is done, the contents of
-\&\f(CW$^A\fR are written to some filehandle, but you could also read \f(CW$^A\fR
-yourself and then set \f(CW$^A\fR back to \f(CW""\fR. Note that a format typically
-does one \f(CW\*(C`formline\*(C'\fR per line of form, but the \f(CW\*(C`formline\*(C'\fR function itself
-doesn't care how many newlines are embedded in the \s-1PICTURE\s0. This means
-that the \f(CW\*(C`~\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`~~\*(C'\fR tokens will treat the entire \s-1PICTURE\s0 as a single line.
-You may therefore need to use multiple formlines to implement a single
-record format, just like the format compiler.
-.Sp
-Be careful if you put double quotes around the picture, because an \f(CW\*(C`@\*(C'\fR
-character may be taken to mean the beginning of an array name.
-\&\f(CW\*(C`formline\*(C'\fR always returns true. See perlform for other examples.
-.IP "getc \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getc FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "getc" 8
-.IX Item "getc"
-.PD
-Returns the next character from the input file attached to \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,
-or the undefined value at end of file, or if there was an error (in
-the latter case \f(CW$!\fR is set). If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is omitted, reads from
-\&\s-1STDIN\s0. This is not particularly efficient. However, it cannot be
-used by itself to fetch single characters without waiting for the user
-to hit enter. For that, try something more like:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& if ($BSD_STYLE) {
-\& system "stty cbreak </dev/tty >/dev/tty 2>&1";
-\& }
-\& else {
-\& system "stty", '-icanon', 'eol', "\e001";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $key = getc(STDIN);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& if ($BSD_STYLE) {
-\& system "stty -cbreak </dev/tty >/dev/tty 2>&1";
-\& }
-\& else {
-\& system "stty", 'icanon', 'eol', '^@'; # ASCII null
-\& }
-\& print "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Determination of whether \f(CW$BSD_STYLE\fR should be set
-is left as an exercise to the reader.
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`POSIX::getattr\*(C'\fR function can do this more portably on
-systems purporting \s-1POSIX\s0 compliance. See also the \f(CW\*(C`Term::ReadKey\*(C'\fR
-module from your nearest \s-1CPAN\s0 site; details on \s-1CPAN\s0 can be found on
-\&\*(L"\s-1CPAN\s0\*(R" in perlmodlib.
-.IP "getlogin" 8
-.IX Item "getlogin"
-Implements the C library function of the same name, which on most
-systems returns the current login from \fI/etc/utmp\fR, if any. If null,
-use \f(CW\*(C`getpwuid\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $login = getlogin || getpwuid($<) || "Kilroy";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Do not consider \f(CW\*(C`getlogin\*(C'\fR for authentication: it is not as
-secure as \f(CW\*(C`getpwuid\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "getpeername \s-1SOCKET\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getpeername SOCKET"
-Returns the packed sockaddr address of other end of the \s-1SOCKET\s0 connection.
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& use Socket;
-\& $hersockaddr = getpeername(SOCK);
-\& ($port, $iaddr) = sockaddr_in($hersockaddr);
-\& $herhostname = gethostbyaddr($iaddr, AF_INET);
-\& $herstraddr = inet_ntoa($iaddr);
-.Ve
-.IP "getpgrp \s-1PID\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getpgrp PID"
-Returns the current process group for the specified \s-1PID\s0. Use
-a \s-1PID\s0 of \f(CW0\fR to get the current process group for the
-current process. Will raise an exception if used on a machine that
-doesn't implement \fIgetpgrp\fR\|(2). If \s-1PID\s0 is omitted, returns process
-group of current process. Note that the \s-1POSIX\s0 version of \f(CW\*(C`getpgrp\*(C'\fR
-does not accept a \s-1PID\s0 argument, so only \f(CW\*(C`PID==0\*(C'\fR is truly portable.
-.IP "getppid" 8
-.IX Item "getppid"
-Returns the process id of the parent process.
-.Sp
-Note for Linux users: on Linux, the C functions \f(CW\*(C`getpid()\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getppid()\*(C'\fR return different values from different threads. In order to
-be portable, this behavior is not reflected by the perl-level function
-\&\f(CW\*(C`getppid()\*(C'\fR, that returns a consistent value across threads. If you want
-to call the underlying \f(CW\*(C`getppid()\*(C'\fR, you may use the \s-1CPAN\s0 module
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Linux::Pid\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "getpriority \s-1WHICH\s0,WHO" 8
-.IX Item "getpriority WHICH,WHO"
-Returns the current priority for a process, a process group, or a user.
-(See \fIgetpriority\fR\|(2).) Will raise a fatal exception if used on a
-machine that doesn't implement \fIgetpriority\fR\|(2).
-.IP "getpwnam \s-1NAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getpwnam NAME"
-.PD 0
-.IP "getgrnam \s-1NAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getgrnam NAME"
-.IP "gethostbyname \s-1NAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "gethostbyname NAME"
-.IP "getnetbyname \s-1NAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getnetbyname NAME"
-.IP "getprotobyname \s-1NAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getprotobyname NAME"
-.IP "getpwuid \s-1UID\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getpwuid UID"
-.IP "getgrgid \s-1GID\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getgrgid GID"
-.IP "getservbyname \s-1NAME\s0,PROTO" 8
-.IX Item "getservbyname NAME,PROTO"
-.IP "gethostbyaddr \s-1ADDR\s0,ADDRTYPE" 8
-.IX Item "gethostbyaddr ADDR,ADDRTYPE"
-.IP "getnetbyaddr \s-1ADDR\s0,ADDRTYPE" 8
-.IX Item "getnetbyaddr ADDR,ADDRTYPE"
-.IP "getprotobynumber \s-1NUMBER\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getprotobynumber NUMBER"
-.IP "getservbyport \s-1PORT\s0,PROTO" 8
-.IX Item "getservbyport PORT,PROTO"
-.IP "getpwent" 8
-.IX Item "getpwent"
-.IP "getgrent" 8
-.IX Item "getgrent"
-.IP "gethostent" 8
-.IX Item "gethostent"
-.IP "getnetent" 8
-.IX Item "getnetent"
-.IP "getprotoent" 8
-.IX Item "getprotoent"
-.IP "getservent" 8
-.IX Item "getservent"
-.IP "setpwent" 8
-.IX Item "setpwent"
-.IP "setgrent" 8
-.IX Item "setgrent"
-.IP "sethostent \s-1STAYOPEN\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sethostent STAYOPEN"
-.IP "setnetent \s-1STAYOPEN\s0" 8
-.IX Item "setnetent STAYOPEN"
-.IP "setprotoent \s-1STAYOPEN\s0" 8
-.IX Item "setprotoent STAYOPEN"
-.IP "setservent \s-1STAYOPEN\s0" 8
-.IX Item "setservent STAYOPEN"
-.IP "endpwent" 8
-.IX Item "endpwent"
-.IP "endgrent" 8
-.IX Item "endgrent"
-.IP "endhostent" 8
-.IX Item "endhostent"
-.IP "endnetent" 8
-.IX Item "endnetent"
-.IP "endprotoent" 8
-.IX Item "endprotoent"
-.IP "endservent" 8
-.IX Item "endservent"
-.PD
-These routines perform the same functions as their counterparts in the
-system library. In list context, the return values from the
-various get routines are as follows:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& ($name,$passwd,$uid,$gid,
-\& $quota,$comment,$gcos,$dir,$shell,$expire) = getpw*
-\& ($name,$passwd,$gid,$members) = getgr*
-\& ($name,$aliases,$addrtype,$length, at addrs) = gethost*
-\& ($name,$aliases,$addrtype,$net) = getnet*
-\& ($name,$aliases,$proto) = getproto*
-\& ($name,$aliases,$port,$proto) = getserv*
-.Ve
-.Sp
-(If the entry doesn't exist you get a null list.)
-.Sp
-The exact meaning of the \f(CW$gcos\fR field varies but it usually contains
-the real name of the user (as opposed to the login name) and other
-information pertaining to the user. Beware, however, that in many
-system users are able to change this information and therefore it
-cannot be trusted and therefore the \f(CW$gcos\fR is tainted (see
-perlsec). The \f(CW$passwd\fR and \f(CW$shell\fR, user's encrypted password and
-login shell, are also tainted, because of the same reason.
-.Sp
-In scalar context, you get the name, unless the function was a
-lookup by name, in which case you get the other thing, whatever it is.
-(If the entry doesn't exist you get the undefined value.) For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& $uid = getpwnam($name);
-\& $name = getpwuid($num);
-\& $name = getpwent();
-\& $gid = getgrnam($name);
-\& $name = getgrgid($num);
-\& $name = getgrent();
-\& #etc.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In \fIgetpw*()\fR the fields \f(CW$quota\fR, \f(CW$comment\fR, and \f(CW$expire\fR are special
-cases in the sense that in many systems they are unsupported. If the
-\&\f(CW$quota\fR is unsupported, it is an empty scalar. If it is supported, it
-usually encodes the disk quota. If the \f(CW$comment\fR field is unsupported,
-it is an empty scalar. If it is supported it usually encodes some
-administrative comment about the user. In some systems the \f(CW$quota\fR
-field may be \f(CW$change\fR or \f(CW$age\fR, fields that have to do with password
-aging. In some systems the \f(CW$comment\fR field may be \f(CW$class\fR. The \f(CW$expire\fR
-field, if present, encodes the expiration period of the account or the
-password. For the availability and the exact meaning of these fields
-in your system, please consult your \fIgetpwnam\fR\|(3) documentation and your
-\&\fIpwd.h\fR file. You can also find out from within Perl what your
-\&\f(CW$quota\fR and \f(CW$comment\fR fields mean and whether you have the \f(CW$expire\fR field
-by using the \f(CW\*(C`Config\*(C'\fR module and the values \f(CW\*(C`d_pwquota\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`d_pwage\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`d_pwchange\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`d_pwcomment\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`d_pwexpire\*(C'\fR. Shadow password
-files are only supported if your vendor has implemented them in the
-intuitive fashion that calling the regular C library routines gets the
-shadow versions if you're running under privilege or if there exists
-the \fIshadow\fR\|(3) functions as found in System V ( this includes Solaris
-and Linux.) Those systems which implement a proprietary shadow password
-facility are unlikely to be supported.
-.Sp
-The \f(CW$members\fR value returned by \fIgetgr*()\fR is a space separated list of
-the login names of the members of the group.
-.Sp
-For the \fIgethost*()\fR functions, if the \f(CW\*(C`h_errno\*(C'\fR variable is supported in
-C, it will be returned to you via \f(CW$?\fR if the function call fails. The
-\&\f(CW at addrs\fR value returned by a successful call is a list of the raw
-addresses returned by the corresponding system library call. In the
-Internet domain, each address is four bytes long and you can unpack it
-by saying something like:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& ($a,$b,$c,$d) = unpack('C4',$addr[0]);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The Socket library makes this slightly easier:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use Socket;
-\& $iaddr = inet_aton("127.1"); # or whatever address
-\& $name = gethostbyaddr($iaddr, AF_INET);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # or going the other way
-\& $straddr = inet_ntoa($iaddr);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you get tired of remembering which element of the return list
-contains which return value, by-name interfaces are provided
-in standard modules: \f(CW\*(C`File::stat\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`Net::hostent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`Net::netent\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`Net::protoent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`Net::servent\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`Time::gmtime\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`Time::localtime\*(C'\fR,
-and \f(CW\*(C`User::grent\*(C'\fR. These override the normal built\-ins, supplying
-versions that return objects with the appropriate names
-for each field. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use File::stat;
-\& use User::pwent;
-\& $is_his = (stat($filename)->uid == pwent($whoever)->uid);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Even though it looks like they're the same method calls (uid),
-they aren't, because a \f(CW\*(C`File::stat\*(C'\fR object is different from
-a \f(CW\*(C`User::pwent\*(C'\fR object.
-.IP "getsockname \s-1SOCKET\s0" 8
-.IX Item "getsockname SOCKET"
-Returns the packed sockaddr address of this end of the \s-1SOCKET\s0 connection,
-in case you don't know the address because you have several different
-IPs that the connection might have come in on.
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& use Socket;
-\& $mysockaddr = getsockname(SOCK);
-\& ($port, $myaddr) = sockaddr_in($mysockaddr);
-\& printf "Connect to %s [%s]\en",
-\& scalar gethostbyaddr($myaddr, AF_INET),
-\& inet_ntoa($myaddr);
-.Ve
-.IP "getsockopt \s-1SOCKET\s0,LEVEL,OPTNAME" 8
-.IX Item "getsockopt SOCKET,LEVEL,OPTNAME"
-Returns the socket option requested, or undef if there is an error.
-.IP "glob \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "glob EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "glob" 8
-.IX Item "glob"
-.PD
-In list context, returns a (possibly empty) list of filename expansions on
-the value of \s-1EXPR\s0 such as the standard Unix shell \fI/bin/csh\fR would do. In
-scalar context, glob iterates through such filename expansions, returning
-undef when the list is exhausted. This is the internal function
-implementing the \f(CW\*(C`<*.c>\*(C'\fR operator, but you can use it directly. If
-\&\s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, \f(CW$_\fR is used. The \f(CW\*(C`<*.c>\*(C'\fR operator is discussed in
-more detail in \*(L"I/O Operators\*(R" in perlop.
-.Sp
-Beginning with v5.6.0, this operator is implemented using the standard
-\&\f(CW\*(C`File::Glob\*(C'\fR extension. See File::Glob for details.
-.IP "gmtime \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "gmtime EXPR"
-Converts a time as returned by the time function to an 8\-element list
-with the time localized for the standard Greenwich time zone.
-Typically used as follows:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-\& ($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday) =
-\& gmtime(time);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-All list elements are numeric, and come straight out of the C `struct
-tm'. \f(CW$sec\fR, \f(CW$min\fR, and \f(CW$hour\fR are the seconds, minutes, and hours of the
-specified time. \f(CW$mday\fR is the day of the month, and \f(CW$mon\fR is the month
-itself, in the range \f(CW0..11\fR with 0 indicating January and 11
-indicating December. \f(CW$year\fR is the number of years since 1900. That
-is, \f(CW$year\fR is \f(CW123\fR in year 2023. \f(CW$wday\fR is the day of the week, with
-0 indicating Sunday and 3 indicating Wednesday. \f(CW$yday\fR is the day of
-the year, in the range \f(CW0..364\fR (or \f(CW0..365\fR in leap years.)
-.Sp
-Note that the \f(CW$year\fR element is \fInot\fR simply the last two digits of
-the year. If you assume it is, then you create non\-Y2K\-compliant
-programs\*(--and you wouldn't want to do that, would you?
-.Sp
-The proper way to get a complete 4\-digit year is simply:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $year += 1900;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-And to get the last two digits of the year (e.g., '01' in 2001) do:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $year = sprintf("%02d", $year % 100);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, \f(CW\*(C`gmtime()\*(C'\fR uses the current time (\f(CW\*(C`gmtime(time)\*(C'\fR).
-.Sp
-In scalar context, \f(CW\*(C`gmtime()\*(C'\fR returns the \fIctime\fR\|(3) value:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $now_string = gmtime; # e.g., "Thu Oct 13 04:54:34 1994"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Also see the \f(CW\*(C`timegm\*(C'\fR function provided by the \f(CW\*(C`Time::Local\*(C'\fR module,
-and the \fIstrftime\fR\|(3) function available via the \s-1POSIX\s0 module.
-.Sp
-This scalar value is \fBnot\fR locale dependent (see perllocale), but
-is instead a Perl builtin. Also see the \f(CW\*(C`Time::Local\*(C'\fR module, and the
-\&\fIstrftime\fR\|(3) and \fImktime\fR\|(3) functions available via the \s-1POSIX\s0 module. To
-get somewhat similar but locale dependent date strings, set up your
-locale environment variables appropriately (please see perllocale)
-and try for example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use POSIX qw(strftime);
-\& $now_string = strftime "%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Y", gmtime;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that the \f(CW%a\fR and \f(CW%b\fR escapes, which represent the short forms
-of the day of the week and the month of the year, may not necessarily
-be three characters wide in all locales.
-.IP "goto \s-1LABEL\s0" 8
-.IX Item "goto LABEL"
-.PD 0
-.IP "goto \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "goto EXPR"
-.IP "goto &NAME" 8
-.IX Item "goto &NAME"
-.PD
-The \f(CW\*(C`goto\-LABEL\*(C'\fR form finds the statement labeled with \s-1LABEL\s0 and resumes
-execution there. It may not be used to go into any construct that
-requires initialization, such as a subroutine or a \f(CW\*(C`foreach\*(C'\fR loop. It
-also can't be used to go into a construct that is optimized away,
-or to get out of a block or subroutine given to \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fR.
-It can be used to go almost anywhere else within the dynamic scope,
-including out of subroutines, but it's usually better to use some other
-construct such as \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR. The author of Perl has never felt the
-need to use this form of \f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fR (in Perl, that is\*(--C is another matter).
-(The difference being that C does not offer named loops combined with
-loop control. Perl does, and this replaces most structured uses of \f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fR
-in other languages.)
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`goto\-EXPR\*(C'\fR form expects a label name, whose scope will be resolved
-dynamically. This allows for computed \f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fRs per \s-1FORTRAN\s0, but isn't
-necessarily recommended if you're optimizing for maintainability:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& goto ("FOO", "BAR", "GLARCH")[$i];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`goto\-&NAME\*(C'\fR form is quite different from the other forms of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fR. In fact, it isn't a goto in the normal sense at all, and
-doesn't have the stigma associated with other gotos. Instead, it
-exits the current subroutine (losing any changes set by \fIlocal()\fR) and
-immediately calls in its place the named subroutine using the current
-value of \f(CW at _\fR. This is used by \f(CW\*(C`AUTOLOAD\*(C'\fR subroutines that wish to
-load another subroutine and then pretend that the other subroutine had
-been called in the first place (except that any modifications to \f(CW at _\fR
-in the current subroutine are propagated to the other subroutine.)
-After the \f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fR, not even \f(CW\*(C`caller\*(C'\fR will be able to tell that this
-routine was called first.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1NAME\s0 needn't be the name of a subroutine; it can be a scalar variable
-containing a code reference, or a block which evaluates to a code
-reference.
-.IP "grep \s-1BLOCK\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "grep BLOCK LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "grep \s-1EXPR\s0,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "grep EXPR,LIST"
-.PD
-This is similar in spirit to, but not the same as, \fIgrep\fR\|(1) and its
-relatives. In particular, it is not limited to using regular expressions.
-.Sp
-Evaluates the \s-1BLOCK\s0 or \s-1EXPR\s0 for each element of \s-1LIST\s0 (locally setting
-\&\f(CW$_\fR to each element) and returns the list value consisting of those
-elements for which the expression evaluated to true. In scalar
-context, returns the number of times the expression was true.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @foo = grep(!/^#/, @bar); # weed out comments
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or equivalently,
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @foo = grep {!/^#/} @bar; # weed out comments
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that \f(CW$_\fR is an alias to the list value, so it can be used to
-modify the elements of the \s-1LIST\s0. While this is useful and supported,
-it can cause bizarre results if the elements of \s-1LIST\s0 are not variables.
-Similarly, grep returns aliases into the original list, much as a for
-loop's index variable aliases the list elements. That is, modifying an
-element of a list returned by grep (for example, in a \f(CW\*(C`foreach\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`map\*(C'\fR
-or another \f(CW\*(C`grep\*(C'\fR) actually modifies the element in the original list.
-This is usually something to be avoided when writing clear code.
-.Sp
-See also \*(L"map\*(R" for a list composed of the results of the \s-1BLOCK\s0 or \s-1EXPR\s0.
-.IP "hex \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "hex EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "hex" 8
-.IX Item "hex"
-.PD
-Interprets \s-1EXPR\s0 as a hex string and returns the corresponding value.
-(To convert strings that might start with either 0, 0x, or 0b, see
-\&\*(L"oct\*(R".) If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print hex '0xAf'; # prints '175'
-\& print hex 'aF'; # same
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Hex strings may only represent integers. Strings that would cause
-integer overflow trigger a warning. Leading whitespace is not stripped,
-unlike \fIoct()\fR.
-.IP "import" 8
-.IX Item "import"
-There is no builtin \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR function. It is just an ordinary
-method (subroutine) defined (or inherited) by modules that wish to export
-names to another module. The \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR function calls the \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR method
-for the package used. See also \*(L"use\*(R", perlmod, and Exporter.
-.IP "index \s-1STR\s0,SUBSTR,POSITION" 8
-.IX Item "index STR,SUBSTR,POSITION"
-.PD 0
-.IP "index \s-1STR\s0,SUBSTR" 8
-.IX Item "index STR,SUBSTR"
-.PD
-The index function searches for one string within another, but without
-the wildcard-like behavior of a full regular-expression pattern match.
-It returns the position of the first occurrence of \s-1SUBSTR\s0 in \s-1STR\s0 at
-or after \s-1POSITION\s0. If \s-1POSITION\s0 is omitted, starts searching from the
-beginning of the string. The return value is based at \f(CW0\fR (or whatever
-you've set the \f(CW$[\fR variable to\*(--but don't do that). If the substring
-is not found, returns one less than the base, ordinarily \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "int \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "int EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "int" 8
-.IX Item "int"
-.PD
-Returns the integer portion of \s-1EXPR\s0. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-You should not use this function for rounding: one because it truncates
-towards \f(CW0\fR, and two because machine representations of floating point
-numbers can sometimes produce counterintuitive results. For example,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`int(\-6.725/0.025)\*(C'\fR produces \-268 rather than the correct \-269; that's
-because it's really more like \-268.99999999999994315658 instead. Usually,
-the \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR, or the \f(CW\*(C`POSIX::floor\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`POSIX::ceil\*(C'\fR
-functions will serve you better than will \fIint()\fR.
-.IP "ioctl \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,FUNCTION,SCALAR" 8
-.IX Item "ioctl FILEHANDLE,FUNCTION,SCALAR"
-Implements the \fIioctl\fR\|(2) function. You'll probably first have to say
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& require "ioctl.ph"; # probably in /usr/local/lib/perl/ioctl.ph
-.Ve
-.Sp
-to get the correct function definitions. If \fIioctl.ph\fR doesn't
-exist or doesn't have the correct definitions you'll have to roll your
-own, based on your C header files such as \fI<sys/ioctl.h>\fR.
-(There is a Perl script called \fBh2ph\fR that comes with the Perl kit that
-may help you in this, but it's nontrivial.) \s-1SCALAR\s0 will be read and/or
-written depending on the FUNCTION\*(--a pointer to the string value of \s-1SCALAR\s0
-will be passed as the third argument of the actual \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR call. (If \s-1SCALAR\s0
-has no string value but does have a numeric value, that value will be
-passed rather than a pointer to the string value. To guarantee this to be
-true, add a \f(CW0\fR to the scalar before using it.) The \f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR
-functions may be needed to manipulate the values of structures used by
-\&\f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-The return value of \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR (and \f(CW\*(C`fcntl\*(C'\fR) is as follows:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& if OS returns: then Perl returns:
-\& -1 undefined value
-\& 0 string "0 but true"
-\& anything else that number
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Thus Perl returns true on success and false on failure, yet you can
-still easily determine the actual value returned by the operating
-system:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $retval = ioctl(...) || -1;
-\& printf "System returned %d\en", $retval;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The special string "\f(CW0\fR but true" is exempt from \fB\-w\fR complaints
-about improper numeric conversions.
-.Sp
-Here's an example of setting a filehandle named \f(CW\*(C`REMOTE\*(C'\fR to be
-non-blocking at the system level. You'll have to negotiate \f(CW$|\fR
-on your own, though.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use Fcntl qw(F_GETFL F_SETFL O_NONBLOCK);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $flags = fcntl(REMOTE, F_GETFL, 0)
-\& or die "Can't get flags for the socket: $!\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $flags = fcntl(REMOTE, F_SETFL, $flags | O_NONBLOCK)
-\& or die "Can't set flags for the socket: $!\en";
-.Ve
-.IP "join \s-1EXPR\s0,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "join EXPR,LIST"
-Joins the separate strings of \s-1LIST\s0 into a single string with fields
-separated by the value of \s-1EXPR\s0, and returns that new string. Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $rec = join(':', $login,$passwd,$uid,$gid,$gcos,$home,$shell);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Beware that unlike \f(CW\*(C`split\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`join\*(C'\fR doesn't take a pattern as its
-first argument. Compare \*(L"split\*(R".
-.IP "keys \s-1HASH\s0" 8
-.IX Item "keys HASH"
-Returns a list consisting of all the keys of the named hash.
-(In scalar context, returns the number of keys.)
-.Sp
-The keys are returned in an apparently random order. The actual
-random order is subject to change in future versions of perl, but it
-is guaranteed to be the same order as either the \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR
-function produces (given that the hash has not been modified). Since
-Perl 5.8.1 the ordering is different even between different runs of
-Perl for security reasons (see \*(L"Algorithmic Complexity Attacks\*(R" in perlsec).
-.Sp
-As a side effect, calling \fIkeys()\fR resets the \s-1HASH\s0's internal iterator,
-see \*(L"each\*(R".
-.Sp
-Here is yet another way to print your environment:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& @keys = keys %ENV;
-\& @values = values %ENV;
-\& while (@keys) {
-\& print pop(@keys), '=', pop(@values), "\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or how about sorted by key:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& foreach $key (sort(keys %ENV)) {
-\& print $key, '=', $ENV{$key}, "\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The returned values are copies of the original keys in the hash, so
-modifying them will not affect the original hash. Compare \*(L"values\*(R".
-.Sp
-To sort a hash by value, you'll need to use a \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fR function.
-Here's a descending numeric sort of a hash by its values:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& foreach $key (sort { $hash{$b} <=> $hash{$a} } keys %hash) {
-\& printf "%4d %s\en", $hash{$key}, $key;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-As an lvalue \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR allows you to increase the number of hash buckets
-allocated for the given hash. This can gain you a measure of efficiency if
-you know the hash is going to get big. (This is similar to pre-extending
-an array by assigning a larger number to $#array.) If you say
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& keys %hash = 200;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-then \f(CW%hash\fR will have at least 200 buckets allocated for it\-\-256 of them,
-in fact, since it rounds up to the next power of two. These
-buckets will be retained even if you do \f(CW\*(C`%hash = ()\*(C'\fR, use \f(CW\*(C`undef
-%hash\*(C'\fR if you want to free the storage while \f(CW%hash\fR is still in scope.
-You can't shrink the number of buckets allocated for the hash using
-\&\f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR in this way (but you needn't worry about doing this by accident,
-as trying has no effect).
-.Sp
-See also \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "kill \s-1SIGNAL\s0, \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "kill SIGNAL, LIST"
-Sends a signal to a list of processes. Returns the number of
-processes successfully signaled (which is not necessarily the
-same as the number actually killed).
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $cnt = kill 1, $child1, $child2;
-\& kill 9, @goners;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If \s-1SIGNAL\s0 is zero, no signal is sent to the process. This is a
-useful way to check that a child process is alive and hasn't changed
-its \s-1UID\s0. See perlport for notes on the portability of this
-construct.
-.Sp
-Unlike in the shell, if \s-1SIGNAL\s0 is negative, it kills
-process groups instead of processes. (On System V, a negative \fI\s-1PROCESS\s0\fR
-number will also kill process groups, but that's not portable.) That
-means you usually want to use positive not negative signals. You may also
-use a signal name in quotes.
-.Sp
-See \*(L"Signals\*(R" in perlipc for more details.
-.IP "last \s-1LABEL\s0" 8
-.IX Item "last LABEL"
-.PD 0
-.IP "last" 8
-.IX Item "last"
-.PD
-The \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR command is like the \f(CW\*(C`break\*(C'\fR statement in C (as used in
-loops); it immediately exits the loop in question. If the \s-1LABEL\s0 is
-omitted, the command refers to the innermost enclosing loop. The
-\&\f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR block, if any, is not executed:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& LINE: while (<STDIN>) {
-\& last LINE if /^$/; # exit when done with header
-\& #...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR cannot be used to exit a block which returns a value such as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eval {}\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sub {}\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`do {}\*(C'\fR, and should not be used to exit
-a \fIgrep()\fR or \fImap()\fR operation.
-.Sp
-Note that a block by itself is semantically identical to a loop
-that executes once. Thus \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR can be used to effect an early
-exit out of such a block.
-.Sp
-See also \*(L"continue\*(R" for an illustration of how \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR work.
-.IP "lc \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "lc EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "lc" 8
-.IX Item "lc"
-.PD
-Returns a lowercased version of \s-1EXPR\s0. This is the internal function
-implementing the \f(CW\*(C`\eL\*(C'\fR escape in double-quoted strings. Respects
-current \s-1LC_CTYPE\s0 locale if \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR in force. See perllocale
-and perlunicode for more details about locale and Unicode support.
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "lcfirst \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "lcfirst EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "lcfirst" 8
-.IX Item "lcfirst"
-.PD
-Returns the value of \s-1EXPR\s0 with the first character lowercased. This
-is the internal function implementing the \f(CW\*(C`\el\*(C'\fR escape in
-double-quoted strings. Respects current \s-1LC_CTYPE\s0 locale if \f(CW\*(C`use
-locale\*(C'\fR in force. See perllocale and perlunicode for more
-details about locale and Unicode support.
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "length \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "length EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "length" 8
-.IX Item "length"
-.PD
-Returns the length in \fIcharacters\fR of the value of \s-1EXPR\s0. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is
-omitted, returns length of \f(CW$_\fR. Note that this cannot be used on
-an entire array or hash to find out how many elements these have.
-For that, use \f(CW\*(C`scalar @array\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`scalar keys %hash\*(C'\fR respectively.
-.Sp
-Note the \fIcharacters\fR: if the \s-1EXPR\s0 is in Unicode, you will get the
-number of characters, not the number of bytes. To get the length
-in bytes, use \f(CW\*(C`do { use bytes; length(EXPR) }\*(C'\fR, see bytes.
-.IP "link \s-1OLDFILE\s0,NEWFILE" 8
-.IX Item "link OLDFILE,NEWFILE"
-Creates a new filename linked to the old filename. Returns true for
-success, false otherwise.
-.IP "listen \s-1SOCKET\s0,QUEUESIZE" 8
-.IX Item "listen SOCKET,QUEUESIZE"
-Does the same thing that the listen system call does. Returns true if
-it succeeded, false otherwise. See the example in
-\&\*(L"Sockets: Client/Server Communication\*(R" in perlipc.
-.IP "local \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "local EXPR"
-You really probably want to be using \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR instead, because \f(CW\*(C`local\*(C'\fR isn't
-what most people think of as \*(L"local\*(R". See
-\&\*(L"Private Variables via \fImy()\fR\*(R" in perlsub for details.
-.Sp
-A local modifies the listed variables to be local to the enclosing
-block, file, or eval. If more than one value is listed, the list must
-be placed in parentheses. See \*(L"Temporary Values via \fIlocal()\fR\*(R" in perlsub
-for details, including issues with tied arrays and hashes.
-.IP "localtime \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "localtime EXPR"
-Converts a time as returned by the time function to a 9\-element list
-with the time analyzed for the local time zone. Typically used as
-follows:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
-\& ($sec,$min,$hour,$mday,$mon,$year,$wday,$yday,$isdst) =
-\& localtime(time);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-All list elements are numeric, and come straight out of the C `struct
-tm'. \f(CW$sec\fR, \f(CW$min\fR, and \f(CW$hour\fR are the seconds, minutes, and hours of the
-specified time. \f(CW$mday\fR is the day of the month, and \f(CW$mon\fR is the month
-itself, in the range \f(CW0..11\fR with 0 indicating January and 11
-indicating December. \f(CW$year\fR is the number of years since 1900. That
-is, \f(CW$year\fR is \f(CW123\fR in year 2023. \f(CW$wday\fR is the day of the week, with
-0 indicating Sunday and 3 indicating Wednesday. \f(CW$yday\fR is the day of
-the year, in the range \f(CW0..364\fR (or \f(CW0..365\fR in leap years.) \f(CW$isdst\fR
-is true if the specified time occurs during daylight savings time,
-false otherwise.
-.Sp
-Note that the \f(CW$year\fR element is \fInot\fR simply the last two digits of
-the year. If you assume it is, then you create non\-Y2K\-compliant
-programs\*(--and you wouldn't want to do that, would you?
-.Sp
-The proper way to get a complete 4\-digit year is simply:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $year += 1900;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-And to get the last two digits of the year (e.g., '01' in 2001) do:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $year = sprintf("%02d", $year % 100);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, \f(CW\*(C`localtime()\*(C'\fR uses the current time (\f(CW\*(C`localtime(time)\*(C'\fR).
-.Sp
-In scalar context, \f(CW\*(C`localtime()\*(C'\fR returns the \fIctime\fR\|(3) value:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $now_string = localtime; # e.g., "Thu Oct 13 04:54:34 1994"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This scalar value is \fBnot\fR locale dependent, see perllocale, but
-instead a Perl builtin. Also see the \f(CW\*(C`Time::Local\*(C'\fR module
-(to convert the second, minutes, hours, ... back to seconds since the
-stroke of midnight the 1st of January 1970, the value returned by
-\&\fItime()\fR), and the \fIstrftime\fR\|(3) and \fImktime\fR\|(3) functions available via the
-\&\s-1POSIX\s0 module. To get somewhat similar but locale dependent date
-strings, set up your locale environment variables appropriately
-(please see perllocale) and try for example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use POSIX qw(strftime);
-\& $now_string = strftime "%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Y", localtime;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that the \f(CW%a\fR and \f(CW%b\fR, the short forms of the day of the week
-and the month of the year, may not necessarily be three characters wide.
-.IP "lock \s-1THING\s0" 8
-.IX Item "lock THING"
-This function places an advisory lock on a shared variable, or referenced
-object contained in \fI\s-1THING\s0\fR until the lock goes out of scope.
-.Sp
-\&\fIlock()\fR is a \*(L"weak keyword\*(R" : this means that if you've defined a function
-by this name (before any calls to it), that function will be called
-instead. (However, if you've said \f(CW\*(C`use threads\*(C'\fR, \fIlock()\fR is always a
-keyword.) See threads.
-.IP "log \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "log EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "log" 8
-.IX Item "log"
-.PD
-Returns the natural logarithm (base \fIe\fR) of \s-1EXPR\s0. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted,
-returns log of \f(CW$_\fR. To get the log of another base, use basic algebra:
-The base-N log of a number is equal to the natural log of that number
-divided by the natural log of N. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& sub log10 {
-\& my $n = shift;
-\& return log($n)/log(10);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See also \*(L"exp\*(R" for the inverse operation.
-.IP "lstat \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "lstat EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "lstat" 8
-.IX Item "lstat"
-.PD
-Does the same thing as the \f(CW\*(C`stat\*(C'\fR function (including setting the
-special \f(CW\*(C`_\*(C'\fR filehandle) but stats a symbolic link instead of the file
-the symbolic link points to. If symbolic links are unimplemented on
-your system, a normal \f(CW\*(C`stat\*(C'\fR is done. For much more detailed
-information, please see the documentation for \*(L"stat\*(R".
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, stats \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "m//" 8
-.IX Item "m//"
-The match operator. See perlop.
-.IP "map \s-1BLOCK\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "map BLOCK LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "map \s-1EXPR\s0,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "map EXPR,LIST"
-.PD
-Evaluates the \s-1BLOCK\s0 or \s-1EXPR\s0 for each element of \s-1LIST\s0 (locally setting
-\&\f(CW$_\fR to each element) and returns the list value composed of the
-results of each such evaluation. In scalar context, returns the
-total number of elements so generated. Evaluates \s-1BLOCK\s0 or \s-1EXPR\s0 in
-list context, so each element of \s-1LIST\s0 may produce zero, one, or
-more elements in the returned value.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @chars = map(chr, @nums);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-translates a list of numbers to the corresponding characters. And
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& %hash = map { getkey($_) => $_ } @array;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-is just a funny way to write
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& %hash = ();
-\& foreach $_ (@array) {
-\& $hash{getkey($_)} = $_;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that \f(CW$_\fR is an alias to the list value, so it can be used to
-modify the elements of the \s-1LIST\s0. While this is useful and supported,
-it can cause bizarre results if the elements of \s-1LIST\s0 are not variables.
-Using a regular \f(CW\*(C`foreach\*(C'\fR loop for this purpose would be clearer in
-most cases. See also \*(L"grep\*(R" for an array composed of those items of
-the original list for which the \s-1BLOCK\s0 or \s-1EXPR\s0 evaluates to true.
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`{\*(C'\fR starts both hash references and blocks, so \f(CW\*(C`map { ...\*(C'\fR could be either
-the start of map \s-1BLOCK\s0 \s-1LIST\s0 or map \s-1EXPR\s0, \s-1LIST\s0. Because perl doesn't look
-ahead for the closing \f(CW\*(C`}\*(C'\fR it has to take a guess at which its dealing with
-based what it finds just after the \f(CW\*(C`{\*(C'\fR. Usually it gets it right, but if it
-doesn't it won't realize something is wrong until it gets to the \f(CW\*(C`}\*(C'\fR and
-encounters the missing (or unexpected) comma. The syntax error will be
-reported close to the \f(CW\*(C`}\*(C'\fR but you'll need to change something near the \f(CW\*(C`{\*(C'\fR
-such as using a unary \f(CW\*(C`+\*(C'\fR to give perl some help:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& %hash = map { "\eL$_", 1 } @array # perl guesses EXPR. wrong
-\& %hash = map { +"\eL$_", 1 } @array # perl guesses BLOCK. right
-\& %hash = map { ("\eL$_", 1) } @array # this also works
-\& %hash = map { lc($_), 1 } @array # as does this.
-\& %hash = map +( lc($_), 1 ), @array # this is EXPR and works!
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& %hash = map ( lc($_), 1 ), @array # evaluates to (1, @array)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or to force an anon hash constructor use \f(CW\*(C`+{\*(C'\fR
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @hashes = map +{ lc($_), 1 }, @array # EXPR, so needs , at end
-.Ve
-.Sp
-and you get list of anonymous hashes each with only 1 entry.
-.IP "mkdir \s-1FILENAME\s0,MASK" 8
-.IX Item "mkdir FILENAME,MASK"
-.PD 0
-.IP "mkdir \s-1FILENAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "mkdir FILENAME"
-.PD
-Creates the directory specified by \s-1FILENAME\s0, with permissions
-specified by \s-1MASK\s0 (as modified by \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR). If it succeeds it
-returns true, otherwise it returns false and sets \f(CW$!\fR (errno).
-If omitted, \s-1MASK\s0 defaults to 0777.
-.Sp
-In general, it is better to create directories with permissive \s-1MASK\s0,
-and let the user modify that with their \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR, than it is to supply
-a restrictive \s-1MASK\s0 and give the user no way to be more permissive.
-The exceptions to this rule are when the file or directory should be
-kept private (mail files, for instance). The \fIperlfunc\fR\|(1) entry on
-\&\f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR discusses the choice of \s-1MASK\s0 in more detail.
-.Sp
-Note that according to the \s-1POSIX\s0 1003.1\-1996 the \s-1FILENAME\s0 may have any
-number of trailing slashes. Some operating and filesystems do not get
-this right, so Perl automatically removes all trailing slashes to keep
-everyone happy.
-.IP "msgctl \s-1ID\s0,CMD,ARG" 8
-.IX Item "msgctl ID,CMD,ARG"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function \fImsgctl\fR\|(2). You'll probably have to say
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use IPC::SysV;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-first to get the correct constant definitions. If \s-1CMD\s0 is \f(CW\*(C`IPC_STAT\*(C'\fR,
-then \s-1ARG\s0 must be a variable which will hold the returned \f(CW\*(C`msqid_ds\*(C'\fR
-structure. Returns like \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR: the undefined value for error,
-\&\f(CW"0 but true"\fR for zero, or the actual return value otherwise. See also
-\&\*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc, \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`IPC::Semaphore\*(C'\fR documentation.
-.IP "msgget \s-1KEY\s0,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "msgget KEY,FLAGS"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function \fImsgget\fR\|(2). Returns the message queue
-id, or the undefined value if there is an error. See also
-\&\*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc and \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`IPC::Msg\*(C'\fR documentation.
-.IP "msgrcv \s-1ID\s0,VAR,SIZE,TYPE,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "msgrcv ID,VAR,SIZE,TYPE,FLAGS"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function msgrcv to receive a message from
-message queue \s-1ID\s0 into variable \s-1VAR\s0 with a maximum message size of
-\&\s-1SIZE\s0. Note that when a message is received, the message type as a
-native long integer will be the first thing in \s-1VAR\s0, followed by the
-actual message. This packing may be opened with \f(CW\*(C`unpack("l! a*")\*(C'\fR.
-Taints the variable. Returns true if successful, or false if there is
-an error. See also \*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc, \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR, and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV::Msg\*(C'\fR documentation.
-.IP "msgsnd \s-1ID\s0,MSG,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "msgsnd ID,MSG,FLAGS"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function msgsnd to send the message \s-1MSG\s0 to the
-message queue \s-1ID\s0. \s-1MSG\s0 must begin with the native long integer message
-type, and be followed by the length of the actual message, and finally
-the message itself. This kind of packing can be achieved with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`pack("l! a*", $type, $message)\*(C'\fR. Returns true if successful,
-or false if there is an error. See also \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR
-and \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV::Msg\*(C'\fR documentation.
-.IP "my \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "my EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "my \s-1TYPE\s0 \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "my TYPE EXPR"
-.IP "my \s-1EXPR\s0 : \s-1ATTRS\s0" 8
-.IX Item "my EXPR : ATTRS"
-.IP "my \s-1TYPE\s0 \s-1EXPR\s0 : \s-1ATTRS\s0" 8
-.IX Item "my TYPE EXPR : ATTRS"
-.PD
-A \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR declares the listed variables to be local (lexically) to the
-enclosing block, file, or \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR. If more than one value is listed,
-the list must be placed in parentheses.
-.Sp
-The exact semantics and interface of \s-1TYPE\s0 and \s-1ATTRS\s0 are still
-evolving. \s-1TYPE\s0 is currently bound to the use of \f(CW\*(C`fields\*(C'\fR pragma,
-and attributes are handled using the \f(CW\*(C`attributes\*(C'\fR pragma, or starting
-from Perl 5.8.0 also via the \f(CW\*(C`Attribute::Handlers\*(C'\fR module. See
-\&\*(L"Private Variables via \fImy()\fR\*(R" in perlsub for details, and fields,
-attributes, and Attribute::Handlers.
-.IP "next \s-1LABEL\s0" 8
-.IX Item "next LABEL"
-.PD 0
-.IP "next" 8
-.IX Item "next"
-.PD
-The \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR command is like the \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR statement in C; it starts
-the next iteration of the loop:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& LINE: while (<STDIN>) {
-\& next LINE if /^#/; # discard comments
-\& #...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that if there were a \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR block on the above, it would get
-executed even on discarded lines. If the \s-1LABEL\s0 is omitted, the command
-refers to the innermost enclosing loop.
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR cannot be used to exit a block which returns a value such as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eval {}\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sub {}\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`do {}\*(C'\fR, and should not be used to exit
-a \fIgrep()\fR or \fImap()\fR operation.
-.Sp
-Note that a block by itself is semantically identical to a loop
-that executes once. Thus \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR will exit such a block early.
-.Sp
-See also \*(L"continue\*(R" for an illustration of how \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR work.
-.IP "no Module \s-1VERSION\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "no Module VERSION LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "no Module \s-1VERSION\s0" 8
-.IX Item "no Module VERSION"
-.IP "no Module \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "no Module LIST"
-.IP "no Module" 8
-.IX Item "no Module"
-.PD
-See the \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR function, which \f(CW\*(C`no\*(C'\fR is the opposite of.
-.IP "oct \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "oct EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "oct" 8
-.IX Item "oct"
-.PD
-Interprets \s-1EXPR\s0 as an octal string and returns the corresponding
-value. (If \s-1EXPR\s0 happens to start off with \f(CW\*(C`0x\*(C'\fR, interprets it as a
-hex string. If \s-1EXPR\s0 starts off with \f(CW\*(C`0b\*(C'\fR, it is interpreted as a
-binary string. Leading whitespace is ignored in all three cases.)
-The following will handle decimal, binary, octal, and hex in the standard
-Perl or C notation:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $val = oct($val) if $val =~ /^0/;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR. To go the other way (produce a number
-in octal), use \fIsprintf()\fR or \fIprintf()\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $perms = (stat("filename"))[2] & 07777;
-\& $oct_perms = sprintf "%lo", $perms;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The \fIoct()\fR function is commonly used when a string such as \f(CW644\fR needs
-to be converted into a file mode, for example. (Although perl will
-automatically convert strings into numbers as needed, this automatic
-conversion assumes base 10.)
-.IP "open \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,EXPR" 8
-.IX Item "open FILEHANDLE,EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "open \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,MODE,EXPR" 8
-.IX Item "open FILEHANDLE,MODE,EXPR"
-.IP "open \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,MODE,EXPR,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "open FILEHANDLE,MODE,EXPR,LIST"
-.IP "open \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,MODE,REFERENCE" 8
-.IX Item "open FILEHANDLE,MODE,REFERENCE"
-.IP "open \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "open FILEHANDLE"
-.PD
-Opens the file whose filename is given by \s-1EXPR\s0, and associates it with
-\&\s-1FILEHANDLE\s0.
-.Sp
-(The following is a comprehensive reference to \fIopen()\fR: for a gentler
-introduction you may consider perlopentut.)
-.Sp
-If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is an undefined scalar variable (or array or hash element)
-the variable is assigned a reference to a new anonymous filehandle,
-otherwise if \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is an expression, its value is used as the name of
-the real filehandle wanted. (This is considered a symbolic reference, so
-\&\f(CW\*(C`use strict 'refs'\*(C'\fR should \fInot\fR be in effect.)
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, the scalar variable of the same name as the
-\&\s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 contains the filename. (Note that lexical variables\*(--those
-declared with \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR\-\-will not work for this purpose; so if you're
-using \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR, specify \s-1EXPR\s0 in your call to open.)
-.Sp
-If three or more arguments are specified then the mode of opening and
-the file name are separate. If \s-1MODE\s0 is \f(CW'<'\fR or nothing, the file
-is opened for input. If \s-1MODE\s0 is \f(CW'>'\fR, the file is truncated and
-opened for output, being created if necessary. If \s-1MODE\s0 is \f(CW'>>'\fR,
-the file is opened for appending, again being created if necessary.
-.Sp
-You can put a \f(CW'+'\fR in front of the \f(CW'>'\fR or \f(CW'<'\fR to
-indicate that you want both read and write access to the file; thus
-\&\f(CW'+<'\fR is almost always preferred for read/write updates\*(--the \f(CW'+>'\fR mode would clobber the file first. You can't usually use
-either read-write mode for updating textfiles, since they have
-variable length records. See the \fB\-i\fR switch in perlrun for a
-better approach. The file is created with permissions of \f(CW0666\fR
-modified by the process' \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR value.
-.Sp
-These various prefixes correspond to the \fIfopen\fR\|(3) modes of \f(CW'r'\fR,
-\&\f(CW'r+'\fR, \f(CW'w'\fR, \f(CW'w+'\fR, \f(CW'a'\fR, and \f(CW'a+'\fR.
-.Sp
-In the 2\-arguments (and 1\-argument) form of the call the mode and
-filename should be concatenated (in this order), possibly separated by
-spaces. It is possible to omit the mode in these forms if the mode is
-\&\f(CW'<'\fR.
-.Sp
-If the filename begins with \f(CW'|'\fR, the filename is interpreted as a
-command to which output is to be piped, and if the filename ends with a
-\&\f(CW'|'\fR, the filename is interpreted as a command which pipes output to
-us. See \*(L"Using \fIopen()\fR for \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc
-for more examples of this. (You are not allowed to \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR to a command
-that pipes both in \fIand\fR out, but see IPC::Open2, IPC::Open3,
-and \*(L"Bidirectional Communication with Another Process\*(R" in perlipc
-for alternatives.)
-.Sp
-For three or more arguments if \s-1MODE\s0 is \f(CW'|\-'\fR, the filename is
-interpreted as a command to which output is to be piped, and if \s-1MODE\s0
-is \f(CW'\-|'\fR, the filename is interpreted as a command which pipes
-output to us. In the 2\-arguments (and 1\-argument) form one should
-replace dash (\f(CW'\-'\fR) with the command.
-See \*(L"Using \fIopen()\fR for \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc for more examples of this.
-(You are not allowed to \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR to a command that pipes both in \fIand\fR
-out, but see IPC::Open2, IPC::Open3, and
-\&\*(L"Bidirectional Communication\*(R" in perlipc for alternatives.)
-.Sp
-In the three-or-more argument form of pipe opens, if \s-1LIST\s0 is specified
-(extra arguments after the command name) then \s-1LIST\s0 becomes arguments
-to the command invoked if the platform supports it. The meaning of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR with more than three arguments for non-pipe modes is not yet
-specified. Experimental \*(L"layers\*(R" may give extra \s-1LIST\s0 arguments
-meaning.
-.Sp
-In the 2\-arguments (and 1\-argument) form opening \f(CW'\-'\fR opens \s-1STDIN\s0
-and opening \f(CW'>\-'\fR opens \s-1STDOUT\s0.
-.Sp
-You may use the three-argument form of open to specify \s-1IO\s0 \*(L"layers\*(R"
-(sometimes also referred to as \*(L"disciplines\*(R") to be applied to the handle
-that affect how the input and output are processed (see open and
-PerlIO for more details). For example
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open(FH, "<:utf8", "file")
-.Ve
-.Sp
-will open the \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded file containing Unicode characters,
-see perluniintro. (Note that if layers are specified in the
-three-arg form then default layers set by the \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR pragma are
-ignored.)
-.Sp
-Open returns nonzero upon success, the undefined value otherwise. If
-the \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR involved a pipe, the return value happens to be the pid of
-the subprocess.
-.Sp
-If you're running Perl on a system that distinguishes between text
-files and binary files, then you should check out \*(L"binmode\*(R" for tips
-for dealing with this. The key distinction between systems that need
-\&\f(CW\*(C`binmode\*(C'\fR and those that don't is their text file formats. Systems
-like Unix, Mac \s-1OS\s0, and Plan 9, which delimit lines with a single
-character, and which encode that character in C as \f(CW"\en"\fR, do not
-need \f(CW\*(C`binmode\*(C'\fR. The rest need it.
-.Sp
-When opening a file, it's usually a bad idea to continue normal execution
-if the request failed, so \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR is frequently used in connection with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR. Even if \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR won't do what you want (say, in a \s-1CGI\s0 script,
-where you want to make a nicely formatted error message (but there are
-modules that can help with that problem)) you should always check
-the return value from opening a file. The infrequent exception is when
-working with an unopened filehandle is actually what you want to do.
-.Sp
-As a special case the 3 arg form with a read/write mode and the third
-argument being \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open(TMP, "+>", undef) or die ...
-.Ve
-.Sp
-opens a filehandle to an anonymous temporary file. Also using \*(L"+<\*(R"
-works for symmetry, but you really should consider writing something
-to the temporary file first. You will need to \fIseek()\fR to do the
-reading.
-.Sp
-File handles can be opened to \*(L"in memory\*(R" files held in Perl scalars via:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open($fh, '>', \e$variable) || ..
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Though if you try to re-open \f(CW\*(C`STDOUT\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`STDERR\*(C'\fR as an \*(L"in memory\*(R"
-file, you have to close it first:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& close STDOUT;
-\& open STDOUT, '>', \e$variable or die "Can't open STDOUT: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& $ARTICLE = 100;
-\& open ARTICLE or die "Can't find article $ARTICLE: $!\en";
-\& while (<ARTICLE>) {...
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open(LOG, '>>/usr/spool/news/twitlog'); # (log is reserved)
-\& # if the open fails, output is discarded
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open(DBASE, '+<', 'dbase.mine') # open for update
-\& or die "Can't open 'dbase.mine' for update: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open(DBASE, '+<dbase.mine') # ditto
-\& or die "Can't open 'dbase.mine' for update: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open(ARTICLE, '-|', "caesar <$article") # decrypt article
-\& or die "Can't start caesar: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open(ARTICLE, "caesar <$article |") # ditto
-\& or die "Can't start caesar: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open(EXTRACT, "|sort >/tmp/Tmp$$") # $$ is our process id
-\& or die "Can't start sort: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& # in memory files
-\& open(MEMORY,'>', \e$var)
-\& or die "Can't open memory file: $!";
-\& print MEMORY "foo!\en"; # output will end up in $var
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& # process argument list of files along with any includes
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& foreach $file (@ARGV) {
-\& process($file, 'fh00');
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& sub process {
-\& my($filename, $input) = @_;
-\& $input++; # this is a string increment
-\& unless (open($input, $filename)) {
-\& print STDERR "Can't open $filename: $!\en";
-\& return;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& local $_;
-\& while (<$input>) { # note use of indirection
-\& if (/^#include "(.*)"/) {
-\& process($1, $input);
-\& next;
-\& }
-\& #... # whatever
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You may also, in the Bourne shell tradition, specify an \s-1EXPR\s0 beginning
-with \f(CW'>&'\fR, in which case the rest of the string is interpreted
-as the name of a filehandle (or file descriptor, if numeric) to be
-duped (as \fIdup\fR\|(2)) and opened. You may use \f(CW\*(C`&\*(C'\fR after \f(CW\*(C`>\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`>>\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`<\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`+>\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`+>>\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`+<\*(C'\fR.
-The mode you specify should match the mode of the original filehandle.
-(Duping a filehandle does not take into account any existing contents
-of \s-1IO\s0 buffers.) If you use the 3 arg form then you can pass either a
-number, the name of a filehandle or the normal \*(L"reference to a glob\*(R".
-.Sp
-Here is a script that saves, redirects, and restores \f(CW\*(C`STDOUT\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`STDERR\*(C'\fR using various methods:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& #!/usr/bin/perl
-\& open my $oldout, ">&STDOUT" or die "Can't dup STDOUT: $!";
-\& open OLDERR, ">&", \e*STDERR or die "Can't dup STDERR: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open STDOUT, '>', "foo.out" or die "Can't redirect STDOUT: $!";
-\& open STDERR, ">&STDOUT" or die "Can't dup STDOUT: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& select STDERR; $| = 1; # make unbuffered
-\& select STDOUT; $| = 1; # make unbuffered
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print STDOUT "stdout 1\en"; # this works for
-\& print STDERR "stderr 1\en"; # subprocesses too
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& close STDOUT;
-\& close STDERR;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& open STDOUT, ">&", $oldout or die "Can't dup \e$oldout: $!";
-\& open STDERR, ">&OLDERR" or die "Can't dup OLDERR: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print STDOUT "stdout 2\en";
-\& print STDERR "stderr 2\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you specify \f(CW'<&=X'\fR, where \f(CW\*(C`X\*(C'\fR is a file descriptor number
-or a filehandle, then Perl will do an equivalent of C's \f(CW\*(C`fdopen\*(C'\fR of
-that file descriptor (and not call \fIdup\fR\|(2)); this is more
-parsimonious of file descriptors. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # open for input, reusing the fileno of $fd
-\& open(FILEHANDLE, "<&=$fd")
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open(FILEHANDLE, "<&=", $fd)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # open for append, using the fileno of OLDFH
-\& open(FH, ">>&=", OLDFH)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open(FH, ">>&=OLDFH")
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Being parsimonious on filehandles is also useful (besides being
-parsimonious) for example when something is dependent on file
-descriptors, like for example locking using \fIflock()\fR. If you do just
-\&\f(CW\*(C`open(A, '>>&B')\*(C'\fR, the filehandle A will not have the same file
-descriptor as B, and therefore flock(A) will not flock(B), and vice
-versa. But with \f(CW\*(C`open(A, '>>&=B')\*(C'\fR the filehandles will share
-the same file descriptor.
-.Sp
-Note that if you are using Perls older than 5.8.0, Perl will be using
-the standard C libraries' \fIfdopen()\fR to implement the \*(L"=\*(R" functionality.
-On many \s-1UNIX\s0 systems \fIfdopen()\fR fails when file descriptors exceed a
-certain value, typically 255. For Perls 5.8.0 and later, PerlIO is
-most often the default.
-.Sp
-You can see whether Perl has been compiled with PerlIO or not by
-running \f(CW\*(C`perl \-V\*(C'\fR and looking for \f(CW\*(C`useperlio=\*(C'\fR line. If \f(CW\*(C`useperlio\*(C'\fR
-is \f(CW\*(C`define\*(C'\fR, you have PerlIO, otherwise you don't.
-.Sp
-If you open a pipe on the command \f(CW'\-'\fR, i.e., either \f(CW'|\-'\fR or \f(CW'\-|'\fR
-with 2\-arguments (or 1\-argument) form of \fIopen()\fR, then
-there is an implicit fork done, and the return value of open is the pid
-of the child within the parent process, and \f(CW0\fR within the child
-process. (Use \f(CW\*(C`defined($pid)\*(C'\fR to determine whether the open was successful.)
-The filehandle behaves normally for the parent, but i/o to that
-filehandle is piped from/to the \s-1STDOUT/STDIN\s0 of the child process.
-In the child process the filehandle isn't opened\*(--i/o happens from/to
-the new \s-1STDOUT\s0 or \s-1STDIN\s0. Typically this is used like the normal
-piped open when you want to exercise more control over just how the
-pipe command gets executed, such as when you are running setuid, and
-don't want to have to scan shell commands for metacharacters.
-The following triples are more or less equivalent:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& open(FOO, "|tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'");
-\& open(FOO, '|-', "tr '[a-z]' '[A-Z]'");
-\& open(FOO, '|-') || exec 'tr', '[a-z]', '[A-Z]';
-\& open(FOO, '|-', "tr", '[a-z]', '[A-Z]');
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& open(FOO, "cat -n '$file'|");
-\& open(FOO, '-|', "cat -n '$file'");
-\& open(FOO, '-|') || exec 'cat', '-n', $file;
-\& open(FOO, '-|', "cat", '-n', $file);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The last example in each block shows the pipe as \*(L"list form\*(R", which is
-not yet supported on all platforms. A good rule of thumb is that if
-your platform has true \f(CW\*(C`fork()\*(C'\fR (in other words, if your platform is
-\&\s-1UNIX\s0) you can use the list form.
-.Sp
-See \*(L"Safe Pipe Opens\*(R" in perlipc for more examples of this.
-.Sp
-Beginning with v5.6.0, Perl will attempt to flush all files opened for
-output before any operation that may do a fork, but this may not be
-supported on some platforms (see perlport). To be safe, you may need
-to set \f(CW$|\fR ($AUTOFLUSH in English) or call the \f(CW\*(C`autoflush()\*(C'\fR method
-of \f(CW\*(C`IO::Handle\*(C'\fR on any open handles.
-.Sp
-On systems that support a close-on-exec flag on files, the flag will
-be set for the newly opened file descriptor as determined by the value
-of $^F. See \*(L"$^F\*(R" in perlvar.
-.Sp
-Closing any piped filehandle causes the parent process to wait for the
-child to finish, and returns the status value in \f(CW$?\fR.
-.Sp
-The filename passed to 2\-argument (or 1\-argument) form of \fIopen()\fR will
-have leading and trailing whitespace deleted, and the normal
-redirection characters honored. This property, known as \*(L"magic open\*(R",
-can often be used to good effect. A user could specify a filename of
-\&\fI\*(L"rsh cat file |\*(R"\fR, or you could change certain filenames as needed:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $filename =~ s/(.*\e.gz)\es*$/gzip -dc < $1|/;
-\& open(FH, $filename) or die "Can't open $filename: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Use 3\-argument form to open a file with arbitrary weird characters in it,
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open(FOO, '<', $file);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-otherwise it's necessary to protect any leading and trailing whitespace:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $file =~ s#^(\es)#./$1#;
-\& open(FOO, "< $file\e0");
-.Ve
-.Sp
-(this may not work on some bizarre filesystems). One should
-conscientiously choose between the \fImagic\fR and 3\-arguments form
-of \fIopen()\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open IN, $ARGV[0];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-will allow the user to specify an argument of the form \f(CW"rsh cat file |"\fR,
-but will not work on a filename which happens to have a trailing space, while
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open IN, '<', $ARGV[0];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-will have exactly the opposite restrictions.
-.Sp
-If you want a \*(L"real\*(R" C \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR (see \fIopen\fR\|(2) on your system), then you
-should use the \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR function, which involves no such magic (but
-may use subtly different filemodes than Perl \fIopen()\fR, which is mapped
-to C \fIfopen()\fR). This is
-another way to protect your filenames from interpretation. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& use IO::Handle;
-\& sysopen(HANDLE, $path, O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_EXCL)
-\& or die "sysopen $path: $!";
-\& $oldfh = select(HANDLE); $| = 1; select($oldfh);
-\& print HANDLE "stuff $$\en";
-\& seek(HANDLE, 0, 0);
-\& print "File contains: ", <HANDLE>;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Using the constructor from the \f(CW\*(C`IO::Handle\*(C'\fR package (or one of its
-subclasses, such as \f(CW\*(C`IO::File\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`IO::Socket\*(C'\fR), you can generate anonymous
-filehandles that have the scope of whatever variables hold references to
-them, and automatically close whenever and however you leave that scope:
-.Sp
-.Vb 12
-\& use IO::File;
-\& #...
-\& sub read_myfile_munged {
-\& my $ALL = shift;
-\& my $handle = new IO::File;
-\& open($handle, "myfile") or die "myfile: $!";
-\& $first = <$handle>
-\& or return (); # Automatically closed here.
-\& mung $first or die "mung failed"; # Or here.
-\& return $first, <$handle> if $ALL; # Or here.
-\& $first; # Or here.
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See \*(L"seek\*(R" for some details about mixing reading and writing.
-.IP "opendir \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0,EXPR" 8
-.IX Item "opendir DIRHANDLE,EXPR"
-Opens a directory named \s-1EXPR\s0 for processing by \f(CW\*(C`readdir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`telldir\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`seekdir\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`rewinddir\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`closedir\*(C'\fR. Returns true if successful.
-\&\s-1DIRHANDLE\s0 may be an expression whose value can be used as an indirect
-dirhandle, usually the real dirhandle name. If \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0 is an undefined
-scalar variable (or array or hash element), the variable is assigned a
-reference to a new anonymous dirhandle.
-DIRHANDLEs have their own namespace separate from FILEHANDLEs.
-.IP "ord \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "ord EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "ord" 8
-.IX Item "ord"
-.PD
-Returns the numeric (the native 8\-bit encoding, like \s-1ASCII\s0 or \s-1EBCDIC\s0,
-or Unicode) value of the first character of \s-1EXPR\s0. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted,
-uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.Sp
-For the reverse, see \*(L"chr\*(R".
-See perlunicode and encoding for more about Unicode.
-.IP "our \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "our EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "our \s-1EXPR\s0 \s-1TYPE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "our EXPR TYPE"
-.IP "our \s-1EXPR\s0 : \s-1ATTRS\s0" 8
-.IX Item "our EXPR : ATTRS"
-.IP "our \s-1TYPE\s0 \s-1EXPR\s0 : \s-1ATTRS\s0" 8
-.IX Item "our TYPE EXPR : ATTRS"
-.PD
-An \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR declares the listed variables to be valid globals within
-the enclosing block, file, or \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR. That is, it has the same
-scoping rules as a \*(L"my\*(R" declaration, but does not create a local
-variable. If more than one value is listed, the list must be placed
-in parentheses. The \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR declaration has no semantic effect unless
-\&\*(L"use strict vars\*(R" is in effect, in which case it lets you use the
-declared global variable without qualifying it with a package name.
-(But only within the lexical scope of the \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR declaration. In this
-it differs from \*(L"use vars\*(R", which is package scoped.)
-.Sp
-An \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR declaration declares a global variable that will be visible
-across its entire lexical scope, even across package boundaries. The
-package in which the variable is entered is determined at the point
-of the declaration, not at the point of use. This means the following
-behavior holds:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& package Foo;
-\& our $bar; # declares $Foo::bar for rest of lexical scope
-\& $bar = 20;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& package Bar;
-\& print $bar; # prints 20
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Multiple \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR declarations in the same lexical scope are allowed
-if they are in different packages. If they happened to be in the same
-package, Perl will emit warnings if you have asked for them.
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& use warnings;
-\& package Foo;
-\& our $bar; # declares $Foo::bar for rest of lexical scope
-\& $bar = 20;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& package Bar;
-\& our $bar = 30; # declares $Bar::bar for rest of lexical scope
-\& print $bar; # prints 30
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& our $bar; # emits warning
-.Ve
-.Sp
-An \f(CW\*(C`our\*(C'\fR declaration may also have a list of attributes associated
-with it.
-.Sp
-The exact semantics and interface of \s-1TYPE\s0 and \s-1ATTRS\s0 are still
-evolving. \s-1TYPE\s0 is currently bound to the use of \f(CW\*(C`fields\*(C'\fR pragma,
-and attributes are handled using the \f(CW\*(C`attributes\*(C'\fR pragma, or starting
-from Perl 5.8.0 also via the \f(CW\*(C`Attribute::Handlers\*(C'\fR module. See
-\&\*(L"Private Variables via \fImy()\fR\*(R" in perlsub for details, and fields,
-attributes, and Attribute::Handlers.
-.Sp
-The only currently recognized \f(CW\*(C`our()\*(C'\fR attribute is \f(CW\*(C`unique\*(C'\fR which
-indicates that a single copy of the global is to be used by all
-interpreters should the program happen to be running in a
-multi-interpreter environment. (The default behaviour would be for
-each interpreter to have its own copy of the global.) Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& our @EXPORT : unique = qw(foo);
-\& our %EXPORT_TAGS : unique = (bar => [qw(aa bb cc)]);
-\& our $VERSION : unique = "1.00";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that this attribute also has the effect of making the global
-readonly when the first new interpreter is cloned (for example,
-when the first new thread is created).
-.Sp
-Multi-interpreter environments can come to being either through the
-\&\fIfork()\fR emulation on Windows platforms, or by embedding perl in a
-multi-threaded application. The \f(CW\*(C`unique\*(C'\fR attribute does nothing in
-all other environments.
-.IP "pack \s-1TEMPLATE\s0,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "pack TEMPLATE,LIST"
-Takes a \s-1LIST\s0 of values and converts it into a string using the rules
-given by the \s-1TEMPLATE\s0. The resulting string is the concatenation of
-the converted values. Typically, each converted value looks
-like its machine-level representation. For example, on 32\-bit machines
-a converted integer may be represented by a sequence of 4 bytes.
-.Sp
-The \s-1TEMPLATE\s0 is a sequence of characters that give the order and type
-of values, as follows:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& a A string with arbitrary binary data, will be null padded.
-\& A A text (ASCII) string, will be space padded.
-\& Z A null terminated (ASCIZ) string, will be null padded.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& b A bit string (ascending bit order inside each byte, like vec()).
-\& B A bit string (descending bit order inside each byte).
-\& h A hex string (low nybble first).
-\& H A hex string (high nybble first).
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& c A signed char value.
-\& C An unsigned char value. Only does bytes. See U for Unicode.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& s A signed short value.
-\& S An unsigned short value.
-\& (This 'short' is _exactly_ 16 bits, which may differ from
-\& what a local C compiler calls 'short'. If you want
-\& native-length shorts, use the '!' suffix.)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& i A signed integer value.
-\& I An unsigned integer value.
-\& (This 'integer' is _at_least_ 32 bits wide. Its exact
-\& size depends on what a local C compiler calls 'int',
-\& and may even be larger than the 'long' described in
-\& the next item.)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& l A signed long value.
-\& L An unsigned long value.
-\& (This 'long' is _exactly_ 32 bits, which may differ from
-\& what a local C compiler calls 'long'. If you want
-\& native-length longs, use the '!' suffix.)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& n An unsigned short in "network" (big-endian) order.
-\& N An unsigned long in "network" (big-endian) order.
-\& v An unsigned short in "VAX" (little-endian) order.
-\& V An unsigned long in "VAX" (little-endian) order.
-\& (These 'shorts' and 'longs' are _exactly_ 16 bits and
-\& _exactly_ 32 bits, respectively.)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& q A signed quad (64-bit) value.
-\& Q An unsigned quad value.
-\& (Quads are available only if your system supports 64-bit
-\& integer values _and_ if Perl has been compiled to support those.
-\& Causes a fatal error otherwise.)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& j A signed integer value (a Perl internal integer, IV).
-\& J An unsigned integer value (a Perl internal unsigned integer, UV).
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& f A single-precision float in the native format.
-\& d A double-precision float in the native format.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& F A floating point value in the native native format
-\& (a Perl internal floating point value, NV).
-\& D A long double-precision float in the native format.
-\& (Long doubles are available only if your system supports long
-\& double values _and_ if Perl has been compiled to support those.
-\& Causes a fatal error otherwise.)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& p A pointer to a null-terminated string.
-\& P A pointer to a structure (fixed-length string).
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& u A uuencoded string.
-\& U A Unicode character number. Encodes to UTF-8 internally
-\& (or UTF-EBCDIC in EBCDIC platforms).
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& w A BER compressed integer. Its bytes represent an unsigned
-\& integer in base 128, most significant digit first, with as
-\& few digits as possible. Bit eight (the high bit) is set
-\& on each byte except the last.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& x A null byte.
-\& X Back up a byte.
-\& @ Null fill to absolute position, counted from the start of
-\& the innermost ()-group.
-\& ( Start of a ()-group.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The following rules apply:
-.RS 8
-.IP "*" 8
-Each letter may optionally be followed by a number giving a repeat
-count. With all types except \f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`b\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`h\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`H\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`@\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`x\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`X\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`P\*(C'\fR the pack function will gobble up that
-many values from the \s-1LIST\s0. A \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR for the repeat count means to use
-however many items are left, except for \f(CW\*(C`@\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`x\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`X\*(C'\fR, where it is
-equivalent to \f(CW0\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`u\*(C'\fR, where it is equivalent to 1 (or 45, what
-is the same). A numeric repeat count may optionally be enclosed in
-brackets, as in \f(CW\*(C`pack 'C[80]', @arr\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-One can replace the numeric repeat count by a template enclosed in brackets;
-then the packed length of this template in bytes is used as a count.
-For example, \f(CW\*(C`x[L]\*(C'\fR skips a long (it skips the number of bytes in a long);
-the template \f(CW\*(C`$t X[$t] $t\*(C'\fR \fIunpack()\fRs twice what \f(CW$t\fR unpacks.
-If the template in brackets contains alignment commands (such as \f(CW\*(C`x![d]\*(C'\fR),
-its packed length is calculated as if the start of the template has the maximal
-possible alignment.
-.Sp
-When used with \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR results in the addition of a trailing null
-byte (so the packed result will be one longer than the byte \f(CW\*(C`length\*(C'\fR
-of the item).
-.Sp
-The repeat count for \f(CW\*(C`u\*(C'\fR is interpreted as the maximal number of bytes
-to encode per line of output, with 0 and 1 replaced by 45.
-.IP "*" 8
-The \f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR types gobble just one value, but pack it as a
-string of length count, padding with nulls or spaces as necessary. When
-unpacking, \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR strips trailing spaces and nulls, \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR strips everything
-after the first null, and \f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR returns data verbatim. When packing,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR are equivalent.
-.Sp
-If the value-to-pack is too long, it is truncated. If too long and an
-explicit count is provided, \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR packs only \f(CW\*(C`$count\-1\*(C'\fR bytes, followed
-by a null byte. Thus \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR always packs a trailing null byte under
-all circumstances.
-.IP "*" 8
-Likewise, the \f(CW\*(C`b\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR fields pack a string that many bits long.
-Each byte of the input field of \fIpack()\fR generates 1 bit of the result.
-Each result bit is based on the least-significant bit of the corresponding
-input byte, i.e., on \f(CW\*(C`ord($byte)%2\*(C'\fR. In particular, bytes \f(CW"0"\fR and
-\&\f(CW"1"\fR generate bits 0 and 1, as do bytes \f(CW"\e0"\fR and \f(CW"\e1"\fR.
-.Sp
-Starting from the beginning of the input string of \fIpack()\fR, each 8\-tuple
-of bytes is converted to 1 byte of output. With format \f(CW\*(C`b\*(C'\fR
-the first byte of the 8\-tuple determines the least-significant bit of a
-byte, and with format \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR it determines the most-significant bit of
-a byte.
-.Sp
-If the length of the input string is not exactly divisible by 8, the
-remainder is packed as if the input string were padded by null bytes
-at the end. Similarly, during \fIunpack()\fRing the \*(L"extra\*(R" bits are ignored.
-.Sp
-If the input string of \fIpack()\fR is longer than needed, extra bytes are ignored.
-A \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR for the repeat count of \fIpack()\fR means to use all the bytes of
-the input field. On \fIunpack()\fRing the bits are converted to a string
-of \f(CW"0"\fRs and \f(CW"1"\fRs.
-.IP "*" 8
-The \f(CW\*(C`h\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`H\*(C'\fR fields pack a string that many nybbles (4\-bit groups,
-representable as hexadecimal digits, 0\-9a\-f) long.
-.Sp
-Each byte of the input field of \fIpack()\fR generates 4 bits of the result.
-For non-alphabetical bytes the result is based on the 4 least-significant
-bits of the input byte, i.e., on \f(CW\*(C`ord($byte)%16\*(C'\fR. In particular,
-bytes \f(CW"0"\fR and \f(CW"1"\fR generate nybbles 0 and 1, as do bytes
-\&\f(CW"\e0"\fR and \f(CW"\e1"\fR. For bytes \f(CW"a".."f"\fR and \f(CW"A".."F"\fR the result
-is compatible with the usual hexadecimal digits, so that \f(CW"a"\fR and
-\&\f(CW"A"\fR both generate the nybble \f(CW\*(C`0xa==10\*(C'\fR. The result for bytes
-\&\f(CW"g".."z"\fR and \f(CW"G".."Z"\fR is not well\-defined.
-.Sp
-Starting from the beginning of the input string of \fIpack()\fR, each pair
-of bytes is converted to 1 byte of output. With format \f(CW\*(C`h\*(C'\fR the
-first byte of the pair determines the least-significant nybble of the
-output byte, and with format \f(CW\*(C`H\*(C'\fR it determines the most-significant
-nybble.
-.Sp
-If the length of the input string is not even, it behaves as if padded
-by a null byte at the end. Similarly, during \fIunpack()\fRing the \*(L"extra\*(R"
-nybbles are ignored.
-.Sp
-If the input string of \fIpack()\fR is longer than needed, extra bytes are ignored.
-A \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR for the repeat count of \fIpack()\fR means to use all the bytes of
-the input field. On \fIunpack()\fRing the bits are converted to a string
-of hexadecimal digits.
-.IP "*" 8
-The \f(CW\*(C`p\*(C'\fR type packs a pointer to a null-terminated string. You are
-responsible for ensuring the string is not a temporary value (which can
-potentially get deallocated before you get around to using the packed result).
-The \f(CW\*(C`P\*(C'\fR type packs a pointer to a structure of the size indicated by the
-length. A \s-1NULL\s0 pointer is created if the corresponding value for \f(CW\*(C`p\*(C'\fR or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`P\*(C'\fR is \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR, similarly for \fIunpack()\fR.
-.IP "*" 8
-The \f(CW\*(C`/\*(C'\fR template character allows packing and unpacking of strings where
-the packed structure contains a byte count followed by the string itself.
-You write \fIlength-item\fR\f(CW\*(C`/\*(C'\fR\fIstring-item\fR.
-.Sp
-The \fIlength-item\fR can be any \f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR template letter, and describes
-how the length value is packed. The ones likely to be of most use are
-integer-packing ones like \f(CW\*(C`n\*(C'\fR (for Java strings), \f(CW\*(C`w\*(C'\fR (for \s-1ASN\s0.1 or
-\&\s-1SNMP\s0) and \f(CW\*(C`N\*(C'\fR (for Sun \s-1XDR\s0).
-.Sp
-For \f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR, the \fIstring-item\fR must, at present, be \f(CW"A*"\fR, \f(CW"a*"\fR or
-\&\f(CW"Z*"\fR. For \f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR the length of the string is obtained from the
-\&\fIlength-item\fR, but if you put in the '*' it will be ignored. For all other
-codes, \f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR applies the length value to the next item, which must not
-have a repeat count.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& unpack 'C/a', "\e04Gurusamy"; gives 'Guru'
-\& unpack 'a3/A* A*', '007 Bond J '; gives (' Bond','J')
-\& pack 'n/a* w/a*','hello,','world'; gives "\e000\e006hello,\e005world"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The \fIlength-item\fR is not returned explicitly from \f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Adding a count to the \fIlength-item\fR letter is unlikely to do anything
-useful, unless that letter is \f(CW\*(C`A\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR. Packing with a
-\&\fIlength-item\fR of \f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`Z\*(C'\fR may introduce \f(CW"\e000"\fR characters,
-which Perl does not regard as legal in numeric strings.
-.IP "*" 8
-The integer types \f(CW\*(C`s\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`S\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`l\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`L\*(C'\fR may be
-immediately followed by a \f(CW\*(C`!\*(C'\fR suffix to signify native shorts or
-longs\*(--as you can see from above for example a bare \f(CW\*(C`l\*(C'\fR does mean
-exactly 32 bits, the native \f(CW\*(C`long\*(C'\fR (as seen by the local C compiler)
-may be larger. This is an issue mainly in 64\-bit platforms. You can
-see whether using \f(CW\*(C`!\*(C'\fR makes any difference by
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print length(pack("s")), " ", length(pack("s!")), "\en";
-\& print length(pack("l")), " ", length(pack("l!")), "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`i!\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`I!\*(C'\fR also work but only because of completeness;
-they are identical to \f(CW\*(C`i\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`I\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-The actual sizes (in bytes) of native shorts, ints, longs, and long
-longs on the platform where Perl was built are also available via
-Config:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& use Config;
-\& print $Config{shortsize}, "\en";
-\& print $Config{intsize}, "\en";
-\& print $Config{longsize}, "\en";
-\& print $Config{longlongsize}, "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-(The \f(CW$Config{longlongsize}\fR will be undefined if your system does
-not support long longs.)
-.IP "*" 8
-The integer formats \f(CW\*(C`s\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`S\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`i\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`I\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`l\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`L\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`j\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`J\*(C'\fR
-are inherently non-portable between processors and operating systems
-because they obey the native byteorder and endianness. For example a
-4\-byte integer 0x12345678 (305419896 decimal) would be ordered natively
-(arranged in and handled by the \s-1CPU\s0 registers) into bytes as
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& 0x12 0x34 0x56 0x78 # big-endian
-\& 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12 # little-endian
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Basically, the Intel and \s-1VAX\s0 CPUs are little\-endian, while everybody
-else, for example Motorola m68k/88k, \s-1PPC\s0, Sparc, \s-1HP\s0 \s-1PA\s0, Power, and
-Cray are big\-endian. Alpha and \s-1MIPS\s0 can be either: Digital/Compaq
-used/uses them in little-endian mode; SGI/Cray uses them in big-endian
-mode.
-.Sp
-The names `big\-endian' and `little\-endian' are comic references to
-the classic \*(L"Gulliver's Travels\*(R" (via the paper \*(L"On Holy Wars and a
-Plea for Peace\*(R" by Danny Cohen, \s-1USC/ISI\s0 \s-1IEN\s0 137, April 1, 1980) and
-the egg-eating habits of the Lilliputians.
-.Sp
-Some systems may have even weirder byte orders such as
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& 0x56 0x78 0x12 0x34
-\& 0x34 0x12 0x78 0x56
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can see your system's preference with
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print join(" ", map { sprintf "%#02x", $_ }
-\& unpack("C*",pack("L",0x12345678))), "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The byteorder on the platform where Perl was built is also available
-via Config:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use Config;
-\& print $Config{byteorder}, "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Byteorders \f(CW'1234'\fR and \f(CW'12345678'\fR are little\-endian, \f(CW'4321'\fR
-and \f(CW'87654321'\fR are big\-endian.
-.Sp
-If you want portable packed integers use the formats \f(CW\*(C`n\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`N\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`v\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`V\*(C'\fR, their byte endianness and size are known.
-See also perlport.
-.IP "*" 8
-Real numbers (floats and doubles) are in the native machine format only;
-due to the multiplicity of floating formats around, and the lack of a
-standard \*(L"network\*(R" representation, no facility for interchange has been
-made. This means that packed floating point data written on one machine
-may not be readable on another \- even if both use \s-1IEEE\s0 floating point
-arithmetic (as the endian-ness of the memory representation is not part
-of the \s-1IEEE\s0 spec). See also perlport.
-.Sp
-Note that Perl uses doubles internally for all numeric calculation, and
-converting from double into float and thence back to double again will
-lose precision (i.e., \f(CW\*(C`unpack("f", pack("f", $foo)\*(C'\fR) will not in general
-equal \f(CW$foo\fR).
-.IP "*" 8
-If the pattern begins with a \f(CW\*(C`U\*(C'\fR, the resulting string will be
-treated as UTF\-8\-encoded Unicode. You can force \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoding on in a
-string with an initial \f(CW\*(C`U0\*(C'\fR, and the bytes that follow will be
-interpreted as Unicode characters. If you don't want this to happen,
-you can begin your pattern with \f(CW\*(C`C0\*(C'\fR (or anything else) to force Perl
-not to \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encode your string, and then follow this with a \f(CW\*(C`U*\*(C'\fR
-somewhere in your pattern.
-.IP "*" 8
-You must yourself do any alignment or padding by inserting for example
-enough \f(CW'x'\fRes while packing. There is no way to \fIpack()\fR and \fIunpack()\fR
-could know where the bytes are going to or coming from. Therefore
-\&\f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR (and \f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR) handle their output and input as flat
-sequences of bytes.
-.IP "*" 8
-A ()\-group is a sub-TEMPLATE enclosed in parentheses. A group may
-take a repeat count, both as postfix, and for \fIunpack()\fR also via the \f(CW\*(C`/\*(C'\fR
-template character. Within each repetition of a group, positioning with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`@\*(C'\fR starts again at 0. Therefore, the result of
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& pack( '@1A((@2A)@3A)', 'a', 'b', 'c' )
-.Ve
-.Sp
-is the string \*(L"\e0a\e0\e0bc\*(R".
-.IP "*" 8
-\&\f(CW\*(C`x\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`X\*(C'\fR accept \f(CW\*(C`!\*(C'\fR modifier. In this case they act as
-alignment commands: they jump forward/back to the closest position
-aligned at a multiple of \f(CW\*(C`count\*(C'\fR bytes. For example, to \fIpack()\fR or
-\&\fIunpack()\fR C's \f(CW\*(C`struct {char c; double d; char cc[2]}\*(C'\fR one may need to
-use the template \f(CW\*(C`C x![d] d C[2]\*(C'\fR; this assumes that doubles must be
-aligned on the double's size.
-.Sp
-For alignment commands \f(CW\*(C`count\*(C'\fR of 0 is equivalent to \f(CW\*(C`count\*(C'\fR of 1;
-both result in no\-ops.
-.IP "*" 8
-A comment in a \s-1TEMPLATE\s0 starts with \f(CW\*(C`#\*(C'\fR and goes to the end of line.
-White space may be used to separate pack codes from each other, but
-a \f(CW\*(C`!\*(C'\fR modifier and a repeat count must follow immediately.
-.IP "*" 8
-If \s-1TEMPLATE\s0 requires more arguments to \fIpack()\fR than actually given, \fIpack()\fR
-assumes additional \f(CW""\fR arguments. If \s-1TEMPLATE\s0 requires less arguments
-to \fIpack()\fR than actually given, extra arguments are ignored.
-.RE
-.RS 8
-.Sp
-Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& $foo = pack("CCCC",65,66,67,68);
-\& # foo eq "ABCD"
-\& $foo = pack("C4",65,66,67,68);
-\& # same thing
-\& $foo = pack("U4",0x24b6,0x24b7,0x24b8,0x24b9);
-\& # same thing with Unicode circled letters
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $foo = pack("ccxxcc",65,66,67,68);
-\& # foo eq "AB\e0\e0CD"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& # note: the above examples featuring "C" and "c" are true
-\& # only on ASCII and ASCII-derived systems such as ISO Latin 1
-\& # and UTF-8. In EBCDIC the first example would be
-\& # $foo = pack("CCCC",193,194,195,196);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& $foo = pack("s2",1,2);
-\& # "\e1\e0\e2\e0" on little-endian
-\& # "\e0\e1\e0\e2" on big-endian
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $foo = pack("a4","abcd","x","y","z");
-\& # "abcd"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $foo = pack("aaaa","abcd","x","y","z");
-\& # "axyz"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $foo = pack("a14","abcdefg");
-\& # "abcdefg\e0\e0\e0\e0\e0\e0\e0"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $foo = pack("i9pl", gmtime);
-\& # a real struct tm (on my system anyway)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& $utmp_template = "Z8 Z8 Z16 L";
-\& $utmp = pack($utmp_template, @utmp1);
-\& # a struct utmp (BSDish)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& @utmp2 = unpack($utmp_template, $utmp);
-\& # "@utmp1" eq "@utmp2"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& sub bintodec {
-\& unpack("N", pack("B32", substr("0" x 32 . shift, -32)));
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& $foo = pack('sx2l', 12, 34);
-\& # short 12, two zero bytes padding, long 34
-\& $bar = pack('s at 4l', 12, 34);
-\& # short 12, zero fill to position 4, long 34
-\& # $foo eq $bar
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The same template may generally also be used in \fIunpack()\fR.
-.RE
-.IP "package \s-1NAMESPACE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "package NAMESPACE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "package" 8
-.IX Item "package"
-.PD
-Declares the compilation unit as being in the given namespace. The scope
-of the package declaration is from the declaration itself through the end
-of the enclosing block, file, or eval (the same as the \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR operator).
-All further unqualified dynamic identifiers will be in this namespace.
-A package statement affects only dynamic variables\*(--including those
-you've used \f(CW\*(C`local\*(C'\fR on\*(--but \fInot\fR lexical variables, which are created
-with \f(CW\*(C`my\*(C'\fR. Typically it would be the first declaration in a file to
-be included by the \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR operator. You can switch into a
-package in more than one place; it merely influences which symbol table
-is used by the compiler for the rest of that block. You can refer to
-variables and filehandles in other packages by prefixing the identifier
-with the package name and a double colon: \f(CW$Package::Variable\fR.
-If the package name is null, the \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR package as assumed. That is,
-\&\f(CW$::sail\fR is equivalent to \f(CW$main::sail\fR (as well as to \f(CW$main'sail\fR,
-still seen in older code).
-.Sp
-If \s-1NAMESPACE\s0 is omitted, then there is no current package, and all
-identifiers must be fully qualified or lexicals. However, you are
-strongly advised not to make use of this feature. Its use can cause
-unexpected behaviour, even crashing some versions of Perl. It is
-deprecated, and will be removed from a future release.
-.Sp
-See \*(L"Packages\*(R" in perlmod for more information about packages, modules,
-and classes. See perlsub for other scoping issues.
-.IP "pipe \s-1READHANDLE\s0,WRITEHANDLE" 8
-.IX Item "pipe READHANDLE,WRITEHANDLE"
-Opens a pair of connected pipes like the corresponding system call.
-Note that if you set up a loop of piped processes, deadlock can occur
-unless you are very careful. In addition, note that Perl's pipes use
-\&\s-1IO\s0 buffering, so you may need to set \f(CW$|\fR to flush your \s-1WRITEHANDLE\s0
-after each command, depending on the application.
-.Sp
-See IPC::Open2, IPC::Open3, and \*(L"Bidirectional Communication\*(R" in perlipc
-for examples of such things.
-.Sp
-On systems that support a close-on-exec flag on files, the flag will be set
-for the newly opened file descriptors as determined by the value of $^F.
-See \*(L"$^F\*(R" in perlvar.
-.IP "pop \s-1ARRAY\s0" 8
-.IX Item "pop ARRAY"
-.PD 0
-.IP "pop" 8
-.IX Item "pop"
-.PD
-Pops and returns the last value of the array, shortening the array by
-one element. Has an effect similar to
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $ARRAY[$#ARRAY--]
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If there are no elements in the array, returns the undefined value
-(although this may happen at other times as well). If \s-1ARRAY\s0 is
-omitted, pops the \f(CW at ARGV\fR array in the main program, and the \f(CW at _\fR
-array in subroutines, just like \f(CW\*(C`shift\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "pos \s-1SCALAR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "pos SCALAR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "pos" 8
-.IX Item "pos"
-.PD
-Returns the offset of where the last \f(CW\*(C`m//g\*(C'\fR search left off for the variable
-in question (\f(CW$_\fR is used when the variable is not specified). May be
-modified to change that offset. Such modification will also influence
-the \f(CW\*(C`\eG\*(C'\fR zero-width assertion in regular expressions. See perlre and
-perlop.
-.IP "print \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "print FILEHANDLE LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "print \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "print LIST"
-.IP "print" 8
-.IX Item "print"
-.PD
-Prints a string or a list of strings. Returns true if successful.
-\&\s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 may be a scalar variable name, in which case the variable
-contains the name of or a reference to the filehandle, thus introducing
-one level of indirection. (\s-1NOTE:\s0 If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is a variable and
-the next token is a term, it may be misinterpreted as an operator
-unless you interpose a \f(CW\*(C`+\*(C'\fR or put parentheses around the arguments.)
-If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is omitted, prints by default to standard output (or
-to the last selected output channel\*(--see \*(L"select\*(R"). If \s-1LIST\s0 is
-also omitted, prints \f(CW$_\fR to the currently selected output channel.
-To set the default output channel to something other than \s-1STDOUT\s0
-use the select operation. The current value of \f(CW$,\fR (if any) is
-printed between each \s-1LIST\s0 item. The current value of \f(CW\*(C`$\e\*(C'\fR (if
-any) is printed after the entire \s-1LIST\s0 has been printed. Because
-print takes a \s-1LIST\s0, anything in the \s-1LIST\s0 is evaluated in list
-context, and any subroutine that you call will have one or more of
-its expressions evaluated in list context. Also be careful not to
-follow the print keyword with a left parenthesis unless you want
-the corresponding right parenthesis to terminate the arguments to
-the print\*(--interpose a \f(CW\*(C`+\*(C'\fR or put parentheses around all the
-arguments.
-.Sp
-Note that if you're storing \s-1FILEHANDLES\s0 in an array or other expression,
-you will have to use a block returning its value instead:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& print { $files[$i] } "stuff\en";
-\& print { $OK ? STDOUT : STDERR } "stuff\en";
-.Ve
-.IP "printf \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 \s-1FORMAT\s0, \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "printf FILEHANDLE FORMAT, LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "printf \s-1FORMAT\s0, \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "printf FORMAT, LIST"
-.PD
-Equivalent to \f(CW\*(C`print FILEHANDLE sprintf(FORMAT, LIST)\*(C'\fR, except that \f(CW\*(C`$\e\*(C'\fR
-(the output record separator) is not appended. The first argument
-of the list will be interpreted as the \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR format. See \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR
-for an explanation of the format argument. If \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR is in effect,
-the character used for the decimal point in formatted real numbers is
-affected by the \s-1LC_NUMERIC\s0 locale. See perllocale.
-.Sp
-Don't fall into the trap of using a \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR when a simple
-\&\f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR would do. The \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR is more efficient and less
-error prone.
-.IP "prototype \s-1FUNCTION\s0" 8
-.IX Item "prototype FUNCTION"
-Returns the prototype of a function as a string (or \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR if the
-function has no prototype). \s-1FUNCTION\s0 is a reference to, or the name of,
-the function whose prototype you want to retrieve.
-.Sp
-If \s-1FUNCTION\s0 is a string starting with \f(CW\*(C`CORE::\*(C'\fR, the rest is taken as a
-name for Perl builtin. If the builtin is not \fIoverridable\fR (such as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`qw//\*(C'\fR) or its arguments cannot be expressed by a prototype (such as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR) returns \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR because the builtin does not really behave
-like a Perl function. Otherwise, the string describing the equivalent
-prototype is returned.
-.IP "push \s-1ARRAY\s0,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "push ARRAY,LIST"
-Treats \s-1ARRAY\s0 as a stack, and pushes the values of \s-1LIST\s0
-onto the end of \s-1ARRAY\s0. The length of \s-1ARRAY\s0 increases by the length of
-\&\s-1LIST\s0. Has the same effect as
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& for $value (LIST) {
-\& $ARRAY[++$#ARRAY] = $value;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-but is more efficient. Returns the new number of elements in the array.
-.IP "q/STRING/" 8
-.IX Item "q/STRING/"
-.PD 0
-.IP "qq/STRING/" 8
-.IX Item "qq/STRING/"
-.IP "qr/STRING/" 8
-.IX Item "qr/STRING/"
-.IP "qx/STRING/" 8
-.IX Item "qx/STRING/"
-.IP "qw/STRING/" 8
-.IX Item "qw/STRING/"
-.PD
-Generalized quotes. See \*(L"Regexp Quote-Like Operators\*(R" in perlop.
-.IP "quotemeta \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "quotemeta EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "quotemeta" 8
-.IX Item "quotemeta"
-.PD
-Returns the value of \s-1EXPR\s0 with all non\-\*(L"word\*(R"
-characters backslashed. (That is, all characters not matching
-\&\f(CW\*(C`/[A\-Za\-z_0\-9]/\*(C'\fR will be preceded by a backslash in the
-returned string, regardless of any locale settings.)
-This is the internal function implementing
-the \f(CW\*(C`\eQ\*(C'\fR escape in double-quoted strings.
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "rand \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "rand EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "rand" 8
-.IX Item "rand"
-.PD
-Returns a random fractional number greater than or equal to \f(CW0\fR and less
-than the value of \s-1EXPR\s0. (\s-1EXPR\s0 should be positive.) If \s-1EXPR\s0 is
-omitted, the value \f(CW1\fR is used. Currently \s-1EXPR\s0 with the value \f(CW0\fR is
-also special-cased as \f(CW1\fR \- this has not been documented before perl 5.8.0
-and is subject to change in future versions of perl. Automatically calls
-\&\f(CW\*(C`srand\*(C'\fR unless \f(CW\*(C`srand\*(C'\fR has already been called. See also \f(CW\*(C`srand\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Apply \f(CW\*(C`int()\*(C'\fR to the value returned by \f(CW\*(C`rand()\*(C'\fR if you want random
-integers instead of random fractional numbers. For example,
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& int(rand(10))
-.Ve
-.Sp
-returns a random integer between \f(CW0\fR and \f(CW9\fR, inclusive.
-.Sp
-(Note: If your rand function consistently returns numbers that are too
-large or too small, then your version of Perl was probably compiled
-with the wrong number of \s-1RANDBITS\s0.)
-.IP "read \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,SCALAR,LENGTH,OFFSET" 8
-.IX Item "read FILEHANDLE,SCALAR,LENGTH,OFFSET"
-.PD 0
-.IP "read \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,SCALAR,LENGTH" 8
-.IX Item "read FILEHANDLE,SCALAR,LENGTH"
-.PD
-Attempts to read \s-1LENGTH\s0 \fIcharacters\fR of data into variable \s-1SCALAR\s0
-from the specified \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0. Returns the number of characters
-actually read, \f(CW0\fR at end of file, or undef if there was an error (in
-the latter case \f(CW$!\fR is also set). \s-1SCALAR\s0 will be grown or shrunk
-so that the last character actually read is the last character of the
-scalar after the read.
-.Sp
-An \s-1OFFSET\s0 may be specified to place the read data at some place in the
-string other than the beginning. A negative \s-1OFFSET\s0 specifies
-placement at that many characters counting backwards from the end of
-the string. A positive \s-1OFFSET\s0 greater than the length of \s-1SCALAR\s0
-results in the string being padded to the required size with \f(CW"\e0"\fR
-bytes before the result of the read is appended.
-.Sp
-The call is actually implemented in terms of either Perl's or system's
-\&\fIfread()\fR call. To get a true \fIread\fR\|(2) system call, see \f(CW\*(C`sysread\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Note the \fIcharacters\fR: depending on the status of the filehandle,
-either (8\-bit) bytes or characters are read. By default all
-filehandles operate on bytes, but for example if the filehandle has
-been opened with the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR I/O layer (see \*(L"open\*(R", and the \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR
-pragma, open), the I/O will operate on \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded Unicode
-characters, not bytes. Similarly for the \f(CW\*(C`:encoding\*(C'\fR pragma:
-in that case pretty much any characters can be read.
-.IP "readdir \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "readdir DIRHANDLE"
-Returns the next directory entry for a directory opened by \f(CW\*(C`opendir\*(C'\fR.
-If used in list context, returns all the rest of the entries in the
-directory. If there are no more entries, returns an undefined value in
-scalar context or a null list in list context.
-.Sp
-If you're planning to filetest the return values out of a \f(CW\*(C`readdir\*(C'\fR, you'd
-better prepend the directory in question. Otherwise, because we didn't
-\&\f(CW\*(C`chdir\*(C'\fR there, it would have been testing the wrong file.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& opendir(DIR, $some_dir) || die "can't opendir $some_dir: $!";
-\& @dots = grep { /^\e./ && -f "$some_dir/$_" } readdir(DIR);
-\& closedir DIR;
-.Ve
-.IP "readline \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "readline EXPR"
-Reads from the filehandle whose typeglob is contained in \s-1EXPR\s0. In scalar
-context, each call reads and returns the next line, until end-of-file is
-reached, whereupon the subsequent call returns undef. In list context,
-reads until end-of-file is reached and returns a list of lines. Note that
-the notion of \*(L"line\*(R" used here is however you may have defined it
-with \f(CW$/\fR or \f(CW$INPUT_RECORD_SEPARATOR\fR). See \*(L"$/\*(R" in perlvar.
-.Sp
-When \f(CW$/\fR is set to \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR, when \fIreadline()\fR is in scalar
-context (i.e. file slurp mode), and when an empty file is read, it
-returns \f(CW''\fR the first time, followed by \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR subsequently.
-.Sp
-This is the internal function implementing the \f(CW\*(C`<EXPR>\*(C'\fR
-operator, but you can use it directly. The \f(CW\*(C`<EXPR>\*(C'\fR
-operator is discussed in more detail in \*(L"I/O Operators\*(R" in perlop.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $line = <STDIN>;
-\& $line = readline(*STDIN); # same thing
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If readline encounters an operating system error, \f(CW$!\fR will be set with the
-corresponding error message. It can be helpful to check \f(CW$!\fR when you are
-reading from filehandles you don't trust, such as a tty or a socket. The
-following example uses the operator form of \f(CW\*(C`readline\*(C'\fR, and takes the necessary
-steps to ensure that \f(CW\*(C`readline\*(C'\fR was successful.
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& for (;;) {
-\& undef $!;
-\& unless (defined( $line = <> )) {
-\& die $! if $!;
-\& last; # reached EOF
-\& }
-\& # ...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "readlink \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "readlink EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "readlink" 8
-.IX Item "readlink"
-.PD
-Returns the value of a symbolic link, if symbolic links are
-implemented. If not, gives a fatal error. If there is some system
-error, returns the undefined value and sets \f(CW$!\fR (errno). If \s-1EXPR\s0 is
-omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "readpipe \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "readpipe EXPR"
-\&\s-1EXPR\s0 is executed as a system command.
-The collected standard output of the command is returned.
-In scalar context, it comes back as a single (potentially
-multi\-line) string. In list context, returns a list of lines
-(however you've defined lines with \f(CW$/\fR or \f(CW$INPUT_RECORD_SEPARATOR\fR).
-This is the internal function implementing the \f(CW\*(C`qx/EXPR/\*(C'\fR
-operator, but you can use it directly. The \f(CW\*(C`qx/EXPR/\*(C'\fR
-operator is discussed in more detail in \*(L"I/O Operators\*(R" in perlop.
-.IP "recv \s-1SOCKET\s0,SCALAR,LENGTH,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "recv SOCKET,SCALAR,LENGTH,FLAGS"
-Receives a message on a socket. Attempts to receive \s-1LENGTH\s0 characters
-of data into variable \s-1SCALAR\s0 from the specified \s-1SOCKET\s0 filehandle.
-\&\s-1SCALAR\s0 will be grown or shrunk to the length actually read. Takes the
-same flags as the system call of the same name. Returns the address
-of the sender if \s-1SOCKET\s0's protocol supports this; returns an empty
-string otherwise. If there's an error, returns the undefined value.
-This call is actually implemented in terms of \fIrecvfrom\fR\|(2) system call.
-See \*(L"\s-1UDP:\s0 Message Passing\*(R" in perlipc for examples.
-.Sp
-Note the \fIcharacters\fR: depending on the status of the socket, either
-(8\-bit) bytes or characters are received. By default all sockets
-operate on bytes, but for example if the socket has been changed using
-\&\fIbinmode()\fR to operate with the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR I/O layer (see the \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR
-pragma, open), the I/O will operate on \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded Unicode
-characters, not bytes. Similarly for the \f(CW\*(C`:encoding\*(C'\fR pragma:
-in that case pretty much any characters can be read.
-.IP "redo \s-1LABEL\s0" 8
-.IX Item "redo LABEL"
-.PD 0
-.IP "redo" 8
-.IX Item "redo"
-.PD
-The \f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR command restarts the loop block without evaluating the
-conditional again. The \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR block, if any, is not executed. If
-the \s-1LABEL\s0 is omitted, the command refers to the innermost enclosing
-loop. This command is normally used by programs that want to lie to
-themselves about what was just input:
-.Sp
-.Vb 16
-\& # a simpleminded Pascal comment stripper
-\& # (warning: assumes no { or } in strings)
-\& LINE: while (<STDIN>) {
-\& while (s|({.*}.*){.*}|$1 |) {}
-\& s|{.*}| |;
-\& if (s|{.*| |) {
-\& $front = $_;
-\& while (<STDIN>) {
-\& if (/}/) { # end of comment?
-\& s|^|$front\e{|;
-\& redo LINE;
-\& }
-\& }
-\& }
-\& print;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR cannot be used to retry a block which returns a value such as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`eval {}\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sub {}\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`do {}\*(C'\fR, and should not be used to exit
-a \fIgrep()\fR or \fImap()\fR operation.
-.Sp
-Note that a block by itself is semantically identical to a loop
-that executes once. Thus \f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR inside such a block will effectively
-turn it into a looping construct.
-.Sp
-See also \*(L"continue\*(R" for an illustration of how \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`next\*(C'\fR, and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`redo\*(C'\fR work.
-.IP "ref \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "ref EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "ref" 8
-.IX Item "ref"
-.PD
-Returns a true value if \s-1EXPR\s0 is a reference, false otherwise. If \s-1EXPR\s0
-is not specified, \f(CW$_\fR will be used. The value returned depends on the
-type of thing the reference is a reference to.
-Builtin types include:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& SCALAR
-\& ARRAY
-\& HASH
-\& CODE
-\& REF
-\& GLOB
-\& LVALUE
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If the referenced object has been blessed into a package, then that package
-name is returned instead. You can think of \f(CW\*(C`ref\*(C'\fR as a \f(CW\*(C`typeof\*(C'\fR operator.
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& if (ref($r) eq "HASH") {
-\& print "r is a reference to a hash.\en";
-\& }
-\& unless (ref($r)) {
-\& print "r is not a reference at all.\en";
-\& }
-\& if (UNIVERSAL::isa($r, "HASH")) { # for subclassing
-\& print "r is a reference to something that isa hash.\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See also perlref.
-.IP "rename \s-1OLDNAME\s0,NEWNAME" 8
-.IX Item "rename OLDNAME,NEWNAME"
-Changes the name of a file; an existing file \s-1NEWNAME\s0 will be
-clobbered. Returns true for success, false otherwise.
-.Sp
-Behavior of this function varies wildly depending on your system
-implementation. For example, it will usually not work across file system
-boundaries, even though the system \fImv\fR command sometimes compensates
-for this. Other restrictions include whether it works on directories,
-open files, or pre-existing files. Check perlport and either the
-\&\fIrename\fR\|(2) manpage or equivalent system documentation for details.
-.IP "require \s-1VERSION\s0" 8
-.IX Item "require VERSION"
-.PD 0
-.IP "require \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "require EXPR"
-.IP "require" 8
-.IX Item "require"
-.PD
-Demands a version of Perl specified by \s-1VERSION\s0, or demands some semantics
-specified by \s-1EXPR\s0 or by \f(CW$_\fR if \s-1EXPR\s0 is not supplied.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1VERSION\s0 may be either a numeric argument such as 5.006, which will be
-compared to \f(CW$]\fR, or a literal of the form v5.6.1, which will be compared
-to \f(CW$^V\fR (aka \f(CW$PERL_VERSION\fR). A fatal error is produced at run time if
-\&\s-1VERSION\s0 is greater than the version of the current Perl interpreter.
-Compare with \*(L"use\*(R", which can do a similar check at compile time.
-.Sp
-Specifying \s-1VERSION\s0 as a literal of the form v5.6.1 should generally be
-avoided, because it leads to misleading error messages under earlier
-versions of Perl which do not support this syntax. The equivalent numeric
-version should be used instead.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& require v5.6.1; # run time version check
-\& require 5.6.1; # ditto
-\& require 5.006_001; # ditto; preferred for backwards compatibility
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Otherwise, demands that a library file be included if it hasn't already
-been included. The file is included via the do-FILE mechanism, which is
-essentially just a variety of \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR. Has semantics similar to the following
-subroutine:
-.Sp
-.Vb 20
-\& sub require {
-\& my($filename) = @_;
-\& return 1 if $INC{$filename};
-\& my($realfilename,$result);
-\& ITER: {
-\& foreach $prefix (@INC) {
-\& $realfilename = "$prefix/$filename";
-\& if (-f $realfilename) {
-\& $INC{$filename} = $realfilename;
-\& $result = do $realfilename;
-\& last ITER;
-\& }
-\& }
-\& die "Can't find $filename in \e at INC";
-\& }
-\& delete $INC{$filename} if $@ || !$result;
-\& die $@ if $@;
-\& die "$filename did not return true value" unless $result;
-\& return $result;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that the file will not be included twice under the same specified
-name. The file must return true as the last statement to indicate
-successful execution of any initialization code, so it's customary to
-end such a file with \f(CW\*(C`1;\*(C'\fR unless you're sure it'll return true
-otherwise. But it's better just to put the \f(CW\*(C`1;\*(C'\fR, in case you add more
-statements.
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is a bareword, the require assumes a "\fI.pm\fR\*(L" extension and
-replaces \*(R"\fI::\fR\*(L" with \*(R"\fI/\fR" in the filename for you,
-to make it easy to load standard modules. This form of loading of
-modules does not risk altering your namespace.
-.Sp
-In other words, if you try this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& require Foo::Bar; # a splendid bareword
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The require function will actually look for the "\fIFoo/Bar.pm\fR" file in the
-directories specified in the \f(CW at INC\fR array.
-.Sp
-But if you try this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& $class = 'Foo::Bar';
-\& require $class; # $class is not a bareword
-\& #or
-\& require "Foo::Bar"; # not a bareword because of the ""
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The require function will look for the "\fIFoo::Bar\fR\*(L" file in the \f(CW at INC\fR array and
-will complain about not finding \*(R"\fIFoo::Bar\fR" there. In this case you can do:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& eval "require $class";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Now that you understand how \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR looks for files in the case of
-a bareword argument, there is a little extra functionality going on
-behind the scenes. Before \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR looks for a "\fI.pm\fR\*(L" extension,
-it will first look for a filename with a \*(R"\fI.pmc\fR" extension. A file
-with this extension is assumed to be Perl bytecode generated by
-B::Bytecode. If this file is found, and it's modification
-time is newer than a coinciding "\fI.pm\fR\*(L" non-compiled file, it will be
-loaded in place of that non-compiled file ending in a \*(R"\fI.pm\fR" extension.
-.Sp
-You can also insert hooks into the import facility, by putting directly
-Perl code into the \f(CW at INC\fR array. There are three forms of hooks: subroutine
-references, array references and blessed objects.
-.Sp
-Subroutine references are the simplest case. When the inclusion system
-walks through \f(CW at INC\fR and encounters a subroutine, this subroutine gets
-called with two parameters, the first being a reference to itself, and the
-second the name of the file to be included (e.g. "\fIFoo/Bar.pm\fR"). The
-subroutine should return \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR or a filehandle, from which the file to
-include will be read. If \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR is returned, \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR will look at
-the remaining elements of \f(CW at INC\fR.
-.Sp
-If the hook is an array reference, its first element must be a subroutine
-reference. This subroutine is called as above, but the first parameter is
-the array reference. This enables to pass indirectly some arguments to
-the subroutine.
-.Sp
-In other words, you can write:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& push @INC, \e&my_sub;
-\& sub my_sub {
-\& my ($coderef, $filename) = @_; # $coderef is \e&my_sub
-\& ...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& push @INC, [ \e&my_sub, $x, $y, ... ];
-\& sub my_sub {
-\& my ($arrayref, $filename) = @_;
-\& # Retrieve $x, $y, ...
-\& my @parameters = @$arrayref[1..$#$arrayref];
-\& ...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If the hook is an object, it must provide an \s-1INC\s0 method, that will be
-called as above, the first parameter being the object itself. (Note that
-you must fully qualify the sub's name, as it is always forced into package
-\&\f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR.) Here is a typical code layout:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& # In Foo.pm
-\& package Foo;
-\& sub new { ... }
-\& sub Foo::INC {
-\& my ($self, $filename) = @_;
-\& ...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # In the main program
-\& push @INC, new Foo(...);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that these hooks are also permitted to set the \f(CW%INC\fR entry
-corresponding to the files they have loaded. See \*(L"%INC\*(R" in perlvar.
-.Sp
-For a yet-more-powerful import facility, see \*(L"use\*(R" and perlmod.
-.IP "reset \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "reset EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "reset" 8
-.IX Item "reset"
-.PD
-Generally used in a \f(CW\*(C`continue\*(C'\fR block at the end of a loop to clear
-variables and reset \f(CW\*(C`??\*(C'\fR searches so that they work again. The
-expression is interpreted as a list of single characters (hyphens
-allowed for ranges). All variables and arrays beginning with one of
-those letters are reset to their pristine state. If the expression is
-omitted, one-match searches (\f(CW\*(C`?pattern?\*(C'\fR) are reset to match again. Resets
-only variables or searches in the current package. Always returns
-1. Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& reset 'X'; # reset all X variables
-\& reset 'a-z'; # reset lower case variables
-\& reset; # just reset ?one-time? searches
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Resetting \f(CW"A\-Z"\fR is not recommended because you'll wipe out your
-\&\f(CW at ARGV\fR and \f(CW at INC\fR arrays and your \f(CW%ENV\fR hash. Resets only package
-variables\*(--lexical variables are unaffected, but they clean themselves
-up on scope exit anyway, so you'll probably want to use them instead.
-See \*(L"my\*(R".
-.IP "return \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "return EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "return" 8
-.IX Item "return"
-.PD
-Returns from a subroutine, \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`do FILE\*(C'\fR with the value
-given in \s-1EXPR\s0. Evaluation of \s-1EXPR\s0 may be in list, scalar, or void
-context, depending on how the return value will be used, and the context
-may vary from one execution to the next (see \f(CW\*(C`wantarray\*(C'\fR). If no \s-1EXPR\s0
-is given, returns an empty list in list context, the undefined value in
-scalar context, and (of course) nothing at all in a void context.
-.Sp
-(Note that in the absence of an explicit \f(CW\*(C`return\*(C'\fR, a subroutine, eval,
-or do \s-1FILE\s0 will automatically return the value of the last expression
-evaluated.)
-.IP "reverse \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "reverse LIST"
-In list context, returns a list value consisting of the elements
-of \s-1LIST\s0 in the opposite order. In scalar context, concatenates the
-elements of \s-1LIST\s0 and returns a string value with all characters
-in the opposite order.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print reverse <>; # line tac, last line first
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& undef $/; # for efficiency of <>
-\& print scalar reverse <>; # character tac, last line tsrif
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This operator is also handy for inverting a hash, although there are some
-caveats. If a value is duplicated in the original hash, only one of those
-can be represented as a key in the inverted hash. Also, this has to
-unwind one hash and build a whole new one, which may take some time
-on a large hash, such as from a \s-1DBM\s0 file.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& %by_name = reverse %by_address; # Invert the hash
-.Ve
-.IP "rewinddir \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "rewinddir DIRHANDLE"
-Sets the current position to the beginning of the directory for the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`readdir\*(C'\fR routine on \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0.
-.IP "rindex \s-1STR\s0,SUBSTR,POSITION" 8
-.IX Item "rindex STR,SUBSTR,POSITION"
-.PD 0
-.IP "rindex \s-1STR\s0,SUBSTR" 8
-.IX Item "rindex STR,SUBSTR"
-.PD
-Works just like \fIindex()\fR except that it returns the position of the \s-1LAST\s0
-occurrence of \s-1SUBSTR\s0 in \s-1STR\s0. If \s-1POSITION\s0 is specified, returns the
-last occurrence at or before that position.
-.IP "rmdir \s-1FILENAME\s0" 8
-.IX Item "rmdir FILENAME"
-.PD 0
-.IP "rmdir" 8
-.IX Item "rmdir"
-.PD
-Deletes the directory specified by \s-1FILENAME\s0 if that directory is
-empty. If it succeeds it returns true, otherwise it returns false and
-sets \f(CW$!\fR (errno). If \s-1FILENAME\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "s///" 8
-.IX Item "s///"
-The substitution operator. See perlop.
-.IP "scalar \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "scalar EXPR"
-Forces \s-1EXPR\s0 to be interpreted in scalar context and returns the value
-of \s-1EXPR\s0.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @counts = ( scalar @a, scalar @b, scalar @c );
-.Ve
-.Sp
-There is no equivalent operator to force an expression to
-be interpolated in list context because in practice, this is never
-needed. If you really wanted to do so, however, you could use
-the construction \f(CW\*(C`@{[ (some expression) ]}\*(C'\fR, but usually a simple
-\&\f(CW\*(C`(some expression)\*(C'\fR suffices.
-.Sp
-Because \f(CW\*(C`scalar\*(C'\fR is unary operator, if you accidentally use for \s-1EXPR\s0 a
-parenthesized list, this behaves as a scalar comma expression, evaluating
-all but the last element in void context and returning the final element
-evaluated in scalar context. This is seldom what you want.
-.Sp
-The following single statement:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print uc(scalar(&foo,$bar)),$baz;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-is the moral equivalent of these two:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& &foo;
-\& print(uc($bar),$baz);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See perlop for more details on unary operators and the comma operator.
-.IP "seek \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,POSITION,WHENCE" 8
-.IX Item "seek FILEHANDLE,POSITION,WHENCE"
-Sets \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0's position, just like the \f(CW\*(C`fseek\*(C'\fR call of \f(CW\*(C`stdio\*(C'\fR.
-\&\s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 may be an expression whose value gives the name of the
-filehandle. The values for \s-1WHENCE\s0 are \f(CW0\fR to set the new position
-\&\fIin bytes\fR to \s-1POSITION\s0, \f(CW1\fR to set it to the current position plus
-\&\s-1POSITION\s0, and \f(CW2\fR to set it to \s-1EOF\s0 plus \s-1POSITION\s0 (typically
-negative). For \s-1WHENCE\s0 you may use the constants \f(CW\*(C`SEEK_SET\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`SEEK_CUR\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`SEEK_END\*(C'\fR (start of the file, current position, end
-of the file) from the Fcntl module. Returns \f(CW1\fR upon success, \f(CW0\fR
-otherwise.
-.Sp
-Note the \fIin bytes\fR: even if the filehandle has been set to
-operate on characters (for example by using the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR open
-layer), \fItell()\fR will return byte offsets, not character offsets
-(because implementing that would render \fIseek()\fR and \fItell()\fR rather slow).
-.Sp
-If you want to position file for \f(CW\*(C`sysread\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`syswrite\*(C'\fR, don't use
-\&\f(CW\*(C`seek\*(C'\fR\-\-buffering makes its effect on the file's system position
-unpredictable and non\-portable. Use \f(CW\*(C`sysseek\*(C'\fR instead.
-.Sp
-Due to the rules and rigors of \s-1ANSI\s0 C, on some systems you have to do a
-seek whenever you switch between reading and writing. Amongst other
-things, this may have the effect of calling stdio's \fIclearerr\fR\|(3).
-A \s-1WHENCE\s0 of \f(CW1\fR (\f(CW\*(C`SEEK_CUR\*(C'\fR) is useful for not moving the file position:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& seek(TEST,0,1);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This is also useful for applications emulating \f(CW\*(C`tail \-f\*(C'\fR. Once you hit
-\&\s-1EOF\s0 on your read, and then sleep for a while, you might have to stick in a
-\&\fIseek()\fR to reset things. The \f(CW\*(C`seek\*(C'\fR doesn't change the current position,
-but it \fIdoes\fR clear the end-of-file condition on the handle, so that the
-next \f(CW\*(C`<FILE>\*(C'\fR makes Perl try again to read something. We hope.
-.Sp
-If that doesn't work (some \s-1IO\s0 implementations are particularly
-cantankerous), then you may need something more like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& for (;;) {
-\& for ($curpos = tell(FILE); $_ = <FILE>;
-\& $curpos = tell(FILE)) {
-\& # search for some stuff and put it into files
-\& }
-\& sleep($for_a_while);
-\& seek(FILE, $curpos, 0);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "seekdir \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0,POS" 8
-.IX Item "seekdir DIRHANDLE,POS"
-Sets the current position for the \f(CW\*(C`readdir\*(C'\fR routine on \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0. \s-1POS\s0
-must be a value returned by \f(CW\*(C`telldir\*(C'\fR. Has the same caveats about
-possible directory compaction as the corresponding system library
-routine.
-.IP "select \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "select FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "select" 8
-.IX Item "select"
-.PD
-Returns the currently selected filehandle. Sets the current default
-filehandle for output, if \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is supplied. This has two
-effects: first, a \f(CW\*(C`write\*(C'\fR or a \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR without a filehandle will
-default to this \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0. Second, references to variables related to
-output will refer to this output channel. For example, if you have to
-set the top of form format for more than one output channel, you might
-do the following:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& select(REPORT1);
-\& $^ = 'report1_top';
-\& select(REPORT2);
-\& $^ = 'report2_top';
-.Ve
-.Sp
-\&\s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 may be an expression whose value gives the name of the
-actual filehandle. Thus:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $oldfh = select(STDERR); $| = 1; select($oldfh);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Some programmers may prefer to think of filehandles as objects with
-methods, preferring to write the last example as:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use IO::Handle;
-\& STDERR->autoflush(1);
-.Ve
-.IP "select \s-1RBITS\s0,WBITS,EBITS,TIMEOUT" 8
-.IX Item "select RBITS,WBITS,EBITS,TIMEOUT"
-This calls the \fIselect\fR\|(2) system call with the bit masks specified, which
-can be constructed using \f(CW\*(C`fileno\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`vec\*(C'\fR, along these lines:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& $rin = $win = $ein = '';
-\& vec($rin,fileno(STDIN),1) = 1;
-\& vec($win,fileno(STDOUT),1) = 1;
-\& $ein = $rin | $win;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you want to select on many filehandles you might wish to write a
-subroutine:
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& sub fhbits {
-\& my(@fhlist) = split(' ',$_[0]);
-\& my($bits);
-\& for (@fhlist) {
-\& vec($bits,fileno($_),1) = 1;
-\& }
-\& $bits;
-\& }
-\& $rin = fhbits('STDIN TTY SOCK');
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The usual idiom is:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& ($nfound,$timeleft) =
-\& select($rout=$rin, $wout=$win, $eout=$ein, $timeout);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or to block until something becomes ready just do this
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $nfound = select($rout=$rin, $wout=$win, $eout=$ein, undef);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Most systems do not bother to return anything useful in \f(CW$timeleft\fR, so
-calling \fIselect()\fR in scalar context just returns \f(CW$nfound\fR.
-.Sp
-Any of the bit masks can also be undef. The timeout, if specified, is
-in seconds, which may be fractional. Note: not all implementations are
-capable of returning the \f(CW$timeleft\fR. If not, they always return
-\&\f(CW$timeleft\fR equal to the supplied \f(CW$timeout\fR.
-.Sp
-You can effect a sleep of 250 milliseconds this way:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& select(undef, undef, undef, 0.25);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that whether \f(CW\*(C`select\*(C'\fR gets restarted after signals (say, \s-1SIGALRM\s0)
-is implementation\-dependent.
-.Sp
-\&\fB\s-1WARNING\s0\fR: One should not attempt to mix buffered I/O (like \f(CW\*(C`read\*(C'\fR
-or <\s-1FH\s0>) with \f(CW\*(C`select\*(C'\fR, except as permitted by \s-1POSIX\s0, and even
-then only on \s-1POSIX\s0 systems. You have to use \f(CW\*(C`sysread\*(C'\fR instead.
-.IP "semctl \s-1ID\s0,SEMNUM,CMD,ARG" 8
-.IX Item "semctl ID,SEMNUM,CMD,ARG"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function \f(CW\*(C`semctl\*(C'\fR. You'll probably have to say
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use IPC::SysV;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-first to get the correct constant definitions. If \s-1CMD\s0 is \s-1IPC_STAT\s0 or
-\&\s-1GETALL\s0, then \s-1ARG\s0 must be a variable which will hold the returned
-semid_ds structure or semaphore value array. Returns like \f(CW\*(C`ioctl\*(C'\fR:
-the undefined value for error, "\f(CW\*(C`0 but true\*(C'\fR" for zero, or the actual
-return value otherwise. The \s-1ARG\s0 must consist of a vector of native
-short integers, which may be created with \f(CW\*(C`pack("s!",(0)x$nsem)\*(C'\fR.
-See also \*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc, \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`IPC::Semaphore\*(C'\fR
-documentation.
-.IP "semget \s-1KEY\s0,NSEMS,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "semget KEY,NSEMS,FLAGS"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function semget. Returns the semaphore id, or
-the undefined value if there is an error. See also
-\&\*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc, \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV::Semaphore\*(C'\fR
-documentation.
-.IP "semop \s-1KEY\s0,OPSTRING" 8
-.IX Item "semop KEY,OPSTRING"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function semop to perform semaphore operations
-such as signalling and waiting. \s-1OPSTRING\s0 must be a packed array of
-semop structures. Each semop structure can be generated with
-\&\f(CW\*(C`pack("s!3", $semnum, $semop, $semflag)\*(C'\fR. The number of semaphore
-operations is implied by the length of \s-1OPSTRING\s0. Returns true if
-successful, or false if there is an error. As an example, the
-following code waits on semaphore \f(CW$semnum\fR of semaphore id \f(CW$semid:\fR
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $semop = pack("s!3", $semnum, -1, 0);
-\& die "Semaphore trouble: $!\en" unless semop($semid, $semop);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-To signal the semaphore, replace \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR with \f(CW1\fR. See also
-\&\*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc, \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV::Semaphore\*(C'\fR
-documentation.
-.IP "send \s-1SOCKET\s0,MSG,FLAGS,TO" 8
-.IX Item "send SOCKET,MSG,FLAGS,TO"
-.PD 0
-.IP "send \s-1SOCKET\s0,MSG,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "send SOCKET,MSG,FLAGS"
-.PD
-Sends a message on a socket. Attempts to send the scalar \s-1MSG\s0 to the
-\&\s-1SOCKET\s0 filehandle. Takes the same flags as the system call of the
-same name. On unconnected sockets you must specify a destination to
-send \s-1TO\s0, in which case it does a C \f(CW\*(C`sendto\*(C'\fR. Returns the number of
-characters sent, or the undefined value if there is an error. The C
-system call \fIsendmsg\fR\|(2) is currently unimplemented. See
-\&\*(L"\s-1UDP:\s0 Message Passing\*(R" in perlipc for examples.
-.Sp
-Note the \fIcharacters\fR: depending on the status of the socket, either
-(8\-bit) bytes or characters are sent. By default all sockets operate
-on bytes, but for example if the socket has been changed using
-\&\fIbinmode()\fR to operate with the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR I/O layer (see \*(L"open\*(R", or the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR pragma, open), the I/O will operate on \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded
-Unicode characters, not bytes. Similarly for the \f(CW\*(C`:encoding\*(C'\fR pragma:
-in that case pretty much any characters can be sent.
-.IP "setpgrp \s-1PID\s0,PGRP" 8
-.IX Item "setpgrp PID,PGRP"
-Sets the current process group for the specified \s-1PID\s0, \f(CW0\fR for the current
-process. Will produce a fatal error if used on a machine that doesn't
-implement \s-1POSIX\s0 \fIsetpgid\fR\|(2) or \s-1BSD\s0 \fIsetpgrp\fR\|(2). If the arguments are omitted,
-it defaults to \f(CW\*(C`0,0\*(C'\fR. Note that the \s-1BSD\s0 4.2 version of \f(CW\*(C`setpgrp\*(C'\fR does not
-accept any arguments, so only \f(CW\*(C`setpgrp(0,0)\*(C'\fR is portable. See also
-\&\f(CW\*(C`POSIX::setsid()\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "setpriority \s-1WHICH\s0,WHO,PRIORITY" 8
-.IX Item "setpriority WHICH,WHO,PRIORITY"
-Sets the current priority for a process, a process group, or a user.
-(See \fIsetpriority\fR\|(2).) Will produce a fatal error if used on a machine
-that doesn't implement \fIsetpriority\fR\|(2).
-.IP "setsockopt \s-1SOCKET\s0,LEVEL,OPTNAME,OPTVAL" 8
-.IX Item "setsockopt SOCKET,LEVEL,OPTNAME,OPTVAL"
-Sets the socket option requested. Returns undefined if there is an
-error. \s-1OPTVAL\s0 may be specified as \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR if you don't want to pass an
-argument.
-.IP "shift \s-1ARRAY\s0" 8
-.IX Item "shift ARRAY"
-.PD 0
-.IP "shift" 8
-.IX Item "shift"
-.PD
-Shifts the first value of the array off and returns it, shortening the
-array by 1 and moving everything down. If there are no elements in the
-array, returns the undefined value. If \s-1ARRAY\s0 is omitted, shifts the
-\&\f(CW at _\fR array within the lexical scope of subroutines and formats, and the
-\&\f(CW at ARGV\fR array at file scopes or within the lexical scopes established by
-the \f(CW\*(C`eval ''\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`BEGIN {}\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`INIT {}\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`CHECK {}\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`END {}\*(C'\fR
-constructs.
-.Sp
-See also \f(CW\*(C`unshift\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`push\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`pop\*(C'\fR. \f(CW\*(C`shift\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`unshift\*(C'\fR do the
-same thing to the left end of an array that \f(CW\*(C`pop\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`push\*(C'\fR do to the
-right end.
-.IP "shmctl \s-1ID\s0,CMD,ARG" 8
-.IX Item "shmctl ID,CMD,ARG"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function shmctl. You'll probably have to say
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use IPC::SysV;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-first to get the correct constant definitions. If \s-1CMD\s0 is \f(CW\*(C`IPC_STAT\*(C'\fR,
-then \s-1ARG\s0 must be a variable which will hold the returned \f(CW\*(C`shmid_ds\*(C'\fR
-structure. Returns like ioctl: the undefined value for error, "\f(CW0\fR but
-true" for zero, or the actual return value otherwise.
-See also \*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc and \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR documentation.
-.IP "shmget \s-1KEY\s0,SIZE,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "shmget KEY,SIZE,FLAGS"
-Calls the System V \s-1IPC\s0 function shmget. Returns the shared memory
-segment id, or the undefined value if there is an error.
-See also \*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc and \f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR documentation.
-.IP "shmread \s-1ID\s0,VAR,POS,SIZE" 8
-.IX Item "shmread ID,VAR,POS,SIZE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "shmwrite \s-1ID\s0,STRING,POS,SIZE" 8
-.IX Item "shmwrite ID,STRING,POS,SIZE"
-.PD
-Reads or writes the System V shared memory segment \s-1ID\s0 starting at
-position \s-1POS\s0 for size \s-1SIZE\s0 by attaching to it, copying in/out, and
-detaching from it. When reading, \s-1VAR\s0 must be a variable that will
-hold the data read. When writing, if \s-1STRING\s0 is too long, only \s-1SIZE\s0
-bytes are used; if \s-1STRING\s0 is too short, nulls are written to fill out
-\&\s-1SIZE\s0 bytes. Return true if successful, or false if there is an error.
-\&\fIshmread()\fR taints the variable. See also \*(L"SysV \s-1IPC\s0\*(R" in perlipc,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`IPC::SysV\*(C'\fR documentation, and the \f(CW\*(C`IPC::Shareable\*(C'\fR module from \s-1CPAN\s0.
-.IP "shutdown \s-1SOCKET\s0,HOW" 8
-.IX Item "shutdown SOCKET,HOW"
-Shuts down a socket connection in the manner indicated by \s-1HOW\s0, which
-has the same interpretation as in the system call of the same name.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& shutdown(SOCKET, 0); # I/we have stopped reading data
-\& shutdown(SOCKET, 1); # I/we have stopped writing data
-\& shutdown(SOCKET, 2); # I/we have stopped using this socket
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This is useful with sockets when you want to tell the other
-side you're done writing but not done reading, or vice versa.
-It's also a more insistent form of close because it also
-disables the file descriptor in any forked copies in other
-processes.
-.IP "sin \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sin EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "sin" 8
-.IX Item "sin"
-.PD
-Returns the sine of \s-1EXPR\s0 (expressed in radians). If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted,
-returns sine of \f(CW$_\fR.
-.Sp
-For the inverse sine operation, you may use the \f(CW\*(C`Math::Trig::asin\*(C'\fR
-function, or use this relation:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& sub asin { atan2($_[0], sqrt(1 - $_[0] * $_[0])) }
-.Ve
-.IP "sleep \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sleep EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "sleep" 8
-.IX Item "sleep"
-.PD
-Causes the script to sleep for \s-1EXPR\s0 seconds, or forever if no \s-1EXPR\s0.
-May be interrupted if the process receives a signal such as \f(CW\*(C`SIGALRM\*(C'\fR.
-Returns the number of seconds actually slept. You probably cannot
-mix \f(CW\*(C`alarm\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`sleep\*(C'\fR calls, because \f(CW\*(C`sleep\*(C'\fR is often implemented
-using \f(CW\*(C`alarm\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-On some older systems, it may sleep up to a full second less than what
-you requested, depending on how it counts seconds. Most modern systems
-always sleep the full amount. They may appear to sleep longer than that,
-however, because your process might not be scheduled right away in a
-busy multitasking system.
-.Sp
-For delays of finer granularity than one second, you may use Perl's
-\&\f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR interface to access \fIsetitimer\fR\|(2) if your system supports
-it, or else see \*(L"select\*(R" above. The Time::HiRes module (from \s-1CPAN\s0,
-and starting from Perl 5.8 part of the standard distribution) may also
-help.
-.Sp
-See also the \s-1POSIX\s0 module's \f(CW\*(C`pause\*(C'\fR function.
-.IP "socket \s-1SOCKET\s0,DOMAIN,TYPE,PROTOCOL" 8
-.IX Item "socket SOCKET,DOMAIN,TYPE,PROTOCOL"
-Opens a socket of the specified kind and attaches it to filehandle
-\&\s-1SOCKET\s0. \s-1DOMAIN\s0, \s-1TYPE\s0, and \s-1PROTOCOL\s0 are specified the same as for
-the system call of the same name. You should \f(CW\*(C`use Socket\*(C'\fR first
-to get the proper definitions imported. See the examples in
-\&\*(L"Sockets: Client/Server Communication\*(R" in perlipc.
-.Sp
-On systems that support a close-on-exec flag on files, the flag will
-be set for the newly opened file descriptor, as determined by the
-value of $^F. See \*(L"$^F\*(R" in perlvar.
-.IP "socketpair \s-1SOCKET1\s0,SOCKET2,DOMAIN,TYPE,PROTOCOL" 8
-.IX Item "socketpair SOCKET1,SOCKET2,DOMAIN,TYPE,PROTOCOL"
-Creates an unnamed pair of sockets in the specified domain, of the
-specified type. \s-1DOMAIN\s0, \s-1TYPE\s0, and \s-1PROTOCOL\s0 are specified the same as
-for the system call of the same name. If unimplemented, yields a fatal
-error. Returns true if successful.
-.Sp
-On systems that support a close-on-exec flag on files, the flag will
-be set for the newly opened file descriptors, as determined by the value
-of $^F. See \*(L"$^F\*(R" in perlvar.
-.Sp
-Some systems defined \f(CW\*(C`pipe\*(C'\fR in terms of \f(CW\*(C`socketpair\*(C'\fR, in which a call
-to \f(CW\*(C`pipe(Rdr, Wtr)\*(C'\fR is essentially:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& use Socket;
-\& socketpair(Rdr, Wtr, AF_UNIX, SOCK_STREAM, PF_UNSPEC);
-\& shutdown(Rdr, 1); # no more writing for reader
-\& shutdown(Wtr, 0); # no more reading for writer
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See perlipc for an example of socketpair use. Perl 5.8 and later will
-emulate socketpair using \s-1IP\s0 sockets to localhost if your system implements
-sockets but not socketpair.
-.IP "sort \s-1SUBNAME\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sort SUBNAME LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "sort \s-1BLOCK\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sort BLOCK LIST"
-.IP "sort \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sort LIST"
-.PD
-In list context, this sorts the \s-1LIST\s0 and returns the sorted list value.
-In scalar context, the behaviour of \f(CW\*(C`sort()\*(C'\fR is undefined.
-.Sp
-If \s-1SUBNAME\s0 or \s-1BLOCK\s0 is omitted, \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fRs in standard string comparison
-order. If \s-1SUBNAME\s0 is specified, it gives the name of a subroutine
-that returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than \f(CW0\fR,
-depending on how the elements of the list are to be ordered. (The \f(CW\*(C`<=>\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`cmp\*(C'\fR operators are extremely useful in such routines.)
-\&\s-1SUBNAME\s0 may be a scalar variable name (unsubscripted), in which case
-the value provides the name of (or a reference to) the actual
-subroutine to use. In place of a \s-1SUBNAME\s0, you can provide a \s-1BLOCK\s0 as
-an anonymous, in-line sort subroutine.
-.Sp
-If the subroutine's prototype is \f(CW\*(C`($$)\*(C'\fR, the elements to be compared
-are passed by reference in \f(CW at _\fR, as for a normal subroutine. This is
-slower than unprototyped subroutines, where the elements to be
-compared are passed into the subroutine
-as the package global variables \f(CW$a\fR and \f(CW$b\fR (see example below). Note that
-in the latter case, it is usually counter-productive to declare \f(CW$a\fR and
-\&\f(CW$b\fR as lexicals.
-.Sp
-In either case, the subroutine may not be recursive. The values to be
-compared are always passed by reference, so don't modify them.
-.Sp
-You also cannot exit out of the sort block or subroutine using any of the
-loop control operators described in perlsyn or with \f(CW\*(C`goto\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-When \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR is in effect, \f(CW\*(C`sort LIST\*(C'\fR sorts \s-1LIST\s0 according to the
-current collation locale. See perllocale.
-.Sp
-Perl 5.6 and earlier used a quicksort algorithm to implement sort.
-That algorithm was not stable, and \fIcould\fR go quadratic. (A \fIstable\fR sort
-preserves the input order of elements that compare equal. Although
-quicksort's run time is O(NlogN) when averaged over all arrays of
-length N, the time can be O(N**2), \fIquadratic\fR behavior, for some
-inputs.) In 5.7, the quicksort implementation was replaced with
-a stable mergesort algorithm whose worst case behavior is O(NlogN).
-But benchmarks indicated that for some inputs, on some platforms,
-the original quicksort was faster. 5.8 has a sort pragma for
-limited control of the sort. Its rather blunt control of the
-underlying algorithm may not persist into future perls, but the
-ability to characterize the input or output in implementation
-independent ways quite probably will. See sort.
-.Sp
-Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # sort lexically
-\& @articles = sort @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # same thing, but with explicit sort routine
-\& @articles = sort {$a cmp $b} @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # now case-insensitively
-\& @articles = sort {uc($a) cmp uc($b)} @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # same thing in reversed order
-\& @articles = sort {$b cmp $a} @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # sort numerically ascending
-\& @articles = sort {$a <=> $b} @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # sort numerically descending
-\& @articles = sort {$b <=> $a} @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # this sorts the %age hash by value instead of key
-\& # using an in-line function
-\& @eldest = sort { $age{$b} <=> $age{$a} } keys %age;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& # sort using explicit subroutine name
-\& sub byage {
-\& $age{$a} <=> $age{$b}; # presuming numeric
-\& }
-\& @sortedclass = sort byage @class;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& sub backwards { $b cmp $a }
-\& @harry = qw(dog cat x Cain Abel);
-\& @george = qw(gone chased yz Punished Axed);
-\& print sort @harry;
-\& # prints AbelCaincatdogx
-\& print sort backwards @harry;
-\& # prints xdogcatCainAbel
-\& print sort @george, 'to', @harry;
-\& # prints AbelAxedCainPunishedcatchaseddoggonetoxyz
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # inefficiently sort by descending numeric compare using
-\& # the first integer after the first = sign, or the
-\& # whole record case-insensitively otherwise
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& @new = sort {
-\& ($b =~ /=(\ed+)/)[0] <=> ($a =~ /=(\ed+)/)[0]
-\& ||
-\& uc($a) cmp uc($b)
-\& } @old;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& # same thing, but much more efficiently;
-\& # we'll build auxiliary indices instead
-\& # for speed
-\& @nums = @caps = ();
-\& for (@old) {
-\& push @nums, /=(\ed+)/;
-\& push @caps, uc($_);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& @new = @old[ sort {
-\& $nums[$b] <=> $nums[$a]
-\& ||
-\& $caps[$a] cmp $caps[$b]
-\& } 0..$#old
-\& ];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& # same thing, but without any temps
-\& @new = map { $_->[0] }
-\& sort { $b->[1] <=> $a->[1]
-\& ||
-\& $a->[2] cmp $b->[2]
-\& } map { [$_, /=(\ed+)/, uc($_)] } @old;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& # using a prototype allows you to use any comparison subroutine
-\& # as a sort subroutine (including other package's subroutines)
-\& package other;
-\& sub backwards ($$) { $_[1] cmp $_[0]; } # $a and $b are not set here
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& package main;
-\& @new = sort other::backwards @old;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # guarantee stability, regardless of algorithm
-\& use sort 'stable';
-\& @new = sort { substr($a, 3, 5) cmp substr($b, 3, 5) } @old;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # force use of mergesort (not portable outside Perl 5.8)
-\& use sort '_mergesort'; # note discouraging _
-\& @new = sort { substr($a, 3, 5) cmp substr($b, 3, 5) } @old;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you're using strict, you \fImust not\fR declare \f(CW$a\fR
-and \f(CW$b\fR as lexicals. They are package globals. That means
-if you're in the \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR package and type
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @articles = sort {$b <=> $a} @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-then \f(CW$a\fR and \f(CW$b\fR are \f(CW$main::a\fR and \f(CW$main::b\fR (or \f(CW$::a\fR and \f(CW$::b\fR),
-but if you're in the \f(CW\*(C`FooPack\*(C'\fR package, it's the same as typing
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @articles = sort {$FooPack::b <=> $FooPack::a} @files;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The comparison function is required to behave. If it returns
-inconsistent results (sometimes saying \f(CW$x[1]\fR is less than \f(CW$x[2]\fR and
-sometimes saying the opposite, for example) the results are not
-well\-defined.
-.Sp
-Because \f(CW\*(C`<=>\*(C'\fR returns \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR when either operand is \f(CW\*(C`NaN\*(C'\fR
-(not\-a\-number), and because \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fR will trigger a fatal error unless the
-result of a comparison is defined, when sorting with a comparison function
-like \f(CW\*(C`$a <=> $b\*(C'\fR, be careful about lists that might contain a \f(CW\*(C`NaN\*(C'\fR.
-The following example takes advantage of the fact that \f(CW\*(C`NaN != NaN\*(C'\fR to
-eliminate any \f(CW\*(C`NaN\*(C'\fRs from the input.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& @result = sort { $a <=> $b } grep { $_ == $_ } @input;
-.Ve
-.IP "splice \s-1ARRAY\s0,OFFSET,LENGTH,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "splice ARRAY,OFFSET,LENGTH,LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "splice \s-1ARRAY\s0,OFFSET,LENGTH" 8
-.IX Item "splice ARRAY,OFFSET,LENGTH"
-.IP "splice \s-1ARRAY\s0,OFFSET" 8
-.IX Item "splice ARRAY,OFFSET"
-.IP "splice \s-1ARRAY\s0" 8
-.IX Item "splice ARRAY"
-.PD
-Removes the elements designated by \s-1OFFSET\s0 and \s-1LENGTH\s0 from an array, and
-replaces them with the elements of \s-1LIST\s0, if any. In list context,
-returns the elements removed from the array. In scalar context,
-returns the last element removed, or \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR if no elements are
-removed. The array grows or shrinks as necessary.
-If \s-1OFFSET\s0 is negative then it starts that far from the end of the array.
-If \s-1LENGTH\s0 is omitted, removes everything from \s-1OFFSET\s0 onward.
-If \s-1LENGTH\s0 is negative, removes the elements from \s-1OFFSET\s0 onward
-except for \-LENGTH elements at the end of the array.
-If both \s-1OFFSET\s0 and \s-1LENGTH\s0 are omitted, removes everything. If \s-1OFFSET\s0 is
-past the end of the array, perl issues a warning, and splices at the
-end of the array.
-.Sp
-The following equivalences hold (assuming \f(CW\*(C`$[ == 0 and $#a >= $i\*(C'\fR )
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& push(@a,$x,$y) splice(@a, at a,0,$x,$y)
-\& pop(@a) splice(@a,-1)
-\& shift(@a) splice(@a,0,1)
-\& unshift(@a,$x,$y) splice(@a,0,0,$x,$y)
-\& $a[$i] = $y splice(@a,$i,1,$y)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Example, assuming array lengths are passed before arrays:
-.Sp
-.Vb 10
-\& sub aeq { # compare two list values
-\& my(@a) = splice(@_,0,shift);
-\& my(@b) = splice(@_,0,shift);
-\& return 0 unless @a == @b; # same len?
-\& while (@a) {
-\& return 0 if pop(@a) ne pop(@b);
-\& }
-\& return 1;
-\& }
-\& if (&aeq($len, at foo[1..$len],0+ at bar, at bar)) { ... }
-.Ve
-.IP "split /PATTERN/,EXPR,LIMIT" 8
-.IX Item "split /PATTERN/,EXPR,LIMIT"
-.PD 0
-.IP "split /PATTERN/,EXPR" 8
-.IX Item "split /PATTERN/,EXPR"
-.IP "split /PATTERN/" 8
-.IX Item "split /PATTERN/"
-.IP "split" 8
-.IX Item "split"
-.PD
-Splits a string into a list of strings and returns that list. By default,
-empty leading fields are preserved, and empty trailing ones are deleted.
-.Sp
-In scalar context, returns the number of fields found and splits into
-the \f(CW at _\fR array. Use of split in scalar context is deprecated, however,
-because it clobbers your subroutine arguments.
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, splits the \f(CW$_\fR string. If \s-1PATTERN\s0 is also omitted,
-splits on whitespace (after skipping any leading whitespace). Anything
-matching \s-1PATTERN\s0 is taken to be a delimiter separating the fields. (Note
-that the delimiter may be longer than one character.)
-.Sp
-If \s-1LIMIT\s0 is specified and positive, it represents the maximum number
-of fields the \s-1EXPR\s0 will be split into, though the actual number of
-fields returned depends on the number of times \s-1PATTERN\s0 matches within
-\&\s-1EXPR\s0. If \s-1LIMIT\s0 is unspecified or zero, trailing null fields are
-stripped (which potential users of \f(CW\*(C`pop\*(C'\fR would do well to remember).
-If \s-1LIMIT\s0 is negative, it is treated as if an arbitrarily large \s-1LIMIT\s0
-had been specified. Note that splitting an \s-1EXPR\s0 that evaluates to the
-empty string always returns the empty list, regardless of the \s-1LIMIT\s0
-specified.
-.Sp
-A pattern matching the null string (not to be confused with
-a null pattern \f(CW\*(C`//\*(C'\fR, which is just one member of the set of patterns
-matching a null string) will split the value of \s-1EXPR\s0 into separate
-characters at each point it matches that way. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print join(':', split(/ */, 'hi there'));
-.Ve
-.Sp
-produces the output 'h:i:t:h:e:r:e'.
-.Sp
-Using the empty pattern \f(CW\*(C`//\*(C'\fR specifically matches the null string, and is
-not be confused with the use of \f(CW\*(C`//\*(C'\fR to mean \*(L"the last successful pattern
-match\*(R".
-.Sp
-Empty leading (or trailing) fields are produced when there are positive width
-matches at the beginning (or end) of the string; a zero-width match at the
-beginning (or end) of the string does not produce an empty field. For
-example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print join(':', split(/(?=\ew)/, 'hi there!'));
-.Ve
-.Sp
-produces the output 'h:i :t:h:e:r:e!'.
-.Sp
-The \s-1LIMIT\s0 parameter can be used to split a line partially
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& ($login, $passwd, $remainder) = split(/:/, $_, 3);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-When assigning to a list, if \s-1LIMIT\s0 is omitted, or zero, Perl supplies
-a \s-1LIMIT\s0 one larger than the number of variables in the list, to avoid
-unnecessary work. For the list above \s-1LIMIT\s0 would have been 4 by
-default. In time critical applications it behooves you not to split
-into more fields than you really need.
-.Sp
-If the \s-1PATTERN\s0 contains parentheses, additional list elements are
-created from each matching substring in the delimiter.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& split(/([,-])/, "1-10,20", 3);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-produces the list value
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& (1, '-', 10, ',', 20)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you had the entire header of a normal Unix email message in \f(CW$header\fR,
-you could split it up into fields and their values this way:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $header =~ s/\en\es+/ /g; # fix continuation lines
-\& %hdrs = (UNIX_FROM => split /^(\eS*?):\es*/m, $header);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The pattern \f(CW\*(C`/PATTERN/\*(C'\fR may be replaced with an expression to specify
-patterns that vary at runtime. (To do runtime compilation only once,
-use \f(CW\*(C`/$variable/o\*(C'\fR.)
-.Sp
-As a special case, specifying a \s-1PATTERN\s0 of space (\f(CW'\ '\fR) will split on
-white space just as \f(CW\*(C`split\*(C'\fR with no arguments does. Thus, \f(CW\*(C`split('\ ')\*(C'\fR can
-be used to emulate \fBawk\fR's default behavior, whereas \f(CW\*(C`split(/\ /)\*(C'\fR
-will give you as many null initial fields as there are leading spaces.
-A \f(CW\*(C`split\*(C'\fR on \f(CW\*(C`/\es+/\*(C'\fR is like a \f(CW\*(C`split('\ ')\*(C'\fR except that any leading
-whitespace produces a null first field. A \f(CW\*(C`split\*(C'\fR with no arguments
-really does a \f(CW\*(C`split('\ ',\ $_)\*(C'\fR internally.
-.Sp
-A \s-1PATTERN\s0 of \f(CW\*(C`/^/\*(C'\fR is treated as if it were \f(CW\*(C`/^/m\*(C'\fR, since it isn't
-much use otherwise.
-.Sp
-Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& open(PASSWD, '/etc/passwd');
-\& while (<PASSWD>) {
-\& chomp;
-\& ($login, $passwd, $uid, $gid,
-\& $gcos, $home, $shell) = split(/:/);
-\& #...
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-As with regular pattern matching, any capturing parentheses that are not
-matched in a \f(CW\*(C`split()\*(C'\fR will be set to \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR when returned:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& @fields = split /(A)|B/, "1A2B3";
-\& # @fields is (1, 'A', 2, undef, 3)
-.Ve
-.IP "sprintf \s-1FORMAT\s0, \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sprintf FORMAT, LIST"
-Returns a string formatted by the usual \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR conventions of the C
-library function \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR. See below for more details
-and see \fIsprintf\fR\|(3) or \fIprintf\fR\|(3) on your system for an explanation of
-the general principles.
-.Sp
-For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # Format number with up to 8 leading zeroes
-\& $result = sprintf("%08d", $number);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # Round number to 3 digits after decimal point
-\& $rounded = sprintf("%.3f", $number);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Perl does its own \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR formatting\*(--it emulates the C
-function \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR, but it doesn't use it (except for floating-point
-numbers, and even then only the standard modifiers are allowed). As a
-result, any non-standard extensions in your local \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR are not
-available from Perl.
-.Sp
-Unlike \f(CW\*(C`printf\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR does not do what you probably mean when you
-pass it an array as your first argument. The array is given scalar context,
-and instead of using the 0th element of the array as the format, Perl will
-use the count of elements in the array as the format, which is almost never
-useful.
-.Sp
-Perl's \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR permits the following universally-known conversions:
-.Sp
-.Vb 10
-\& %% a percent sign
-\& %c a character with the given number
-\& %s a string
-\& %d a signed integer, in decimal
-\& %u an unsigned integer, in decimal
-\& %o an unsigned integer, in octal
-\& %x an unsigned integer, in hexadecimal
-\& %e a floating-point number, in scientific notation
-\& %f a floating-point number, in fixed decimal notation
-\& %g a floating-point number, in %e or %f notation
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In addition, Perl permits the following widely-supported conversions:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& %X like %x, but using upper-case letters
-\& %E like %e, but using an upper-case "E"
-\& %G like %g, but with an upper-case "E" (if applicable)
-\& %b an unsigned integer, in binary
-\& %p a pointer (outputs the Perl value's address in hexadecimal)
-\& %n special: *stores* the number of characters output so far
-\& into the next variable in the parameter list
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Finally, for backward (and we do mean \*(L"backward\*(R") compatibility, Perl
-permits these unnecessary but widely-supported conversions:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& %i a synonym for %d
-\& %D a synonym for %ld
-\& %U a synonym for %lu
-\& %O a synonym for %lo
-\& %F a synonym for %f
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that the number of exponent digits in the scientific notation produced
-by \f(CW%e\fR, \f(CW%E\fR, \f(CW%g\fR and \f(CW%G\fR for numbers with the modulus of the
-exponent less than 100 is system\-dependent: it may be three or less
-(zero\-padded as necessary). In other words, 1.23 times ten to the
-99th may be either \*(L"1.23e99\*(R" or \*(L"1.23e099\*(R".
-.Sp
-Between the \f(CW\*(C`%\*(C'\fR and the format letter, you may specify a number of
-additional attributes controlling the interpretation of the format.
-In order, these are:
-.RS 8
-.IP "format parameter index" 4
-.IX Item "format parameter index"
-An explicit format parameter index, such as \f(CW\*(C`2$\*(C'\fR. By default sprintf
-will format the next unused argument in the list, but this allows you
-to take the arguments out of order. Eg:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& printf '%2$d %1$d', 12, 34; # prints "34 12"
-\& printf '%3$d %d %1$d', 1, 2, 3; # prints "3 1 1"
-.Ve
-.IP "flags" 4
-.IX Item "flags"
-one or more of:
- space prefix positive number with a space
- + prefix positive number with a plus sign
- \- left-justify within the field
- 0 use zeros, not spaces, to right-justify
- # prefix non-zero octal with \*(L"0\*(R", non-zero hex with \*(L"0x\*(R",
- non-zero binary with \*(L"0b\*(R"
-.Sp
-For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& printf '<% d>', 12; # prints "< 12>"
-\& printf '<%+d>', 12; # prints "<+12>"
-\& printf '<%6s>', 12; # prints "< 12>"
-\& printf '<%-6s>', 12; # prints "<12 >"
-\& printf '<%06s>', 12; # prints "<000012>"
-\& printf '<%#x>', 12; # prints "<0xc>"
-.Ve
-.IP "vector flag" 4
-.IX Item "vector flag"
-The vector flag \f(CW\*(C`v\*(C'\fR, optionally specifying the join string to use.
-This flag tells perl to interpret the supplied string as a vector
-of integers, one for each character in the string, separated by
-a given string (a dot \f(CW\*(C`.\*(C'\fR by default). This can be useful for
-displaying ordinal values of characters in arbitrary strings:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& printf "version is v%vd\en", $^V; # Perl's version
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Put an asterisk \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR before the \f(CW\*(C`v\*(C'\fR to override the string to
-use to separate the numbers:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& printf "address is %*vX\en", ":", $addr; # IPv6 address
-\& printf "bits are %0*v8b\en", " ", $bits; # random bitstring
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can also explicitly specify the argument number to use for
-the join string using eg \f(CW\*(C`*2$v\*(C'\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& printf '%*4$vX %*4$vX %*4$vX', @addr[1..3], ":"; # 3 IPv6 addresses
-.Ve
-.IP "(minimum) width" 4
-.IX Item "(minimum) width"
-Arguments are usually formatted to be only as wide as required to
-display the given value. You can override the width by putting
-a number here, or get the width from the next argument (with \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR)
-or from a specified argument (with eg \f(CW\*(C`*2$\*(C'\fR):
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& printf '<%s>', "a"; # prints "<a>"
-\& printf '<%6s>', "a"; # prints "< a>"
-\& printf '<%*s>', 6, "a"; # prints "< a>"
-\& printf '<%*2$s>', "a", 6; # prints "< a>"
-\& printf '<%2s>', "long"; # prints "<long>" (does not truncate)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If a field width obtained through \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR is negative, it has the same
-effect as the \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR flag: left\-justification.
-.IP "precision, or maximum width" 4
-.IX Item "precision, or maximum width"
-You can specify a precision (for numeric conversions) or a maximum
-width (for string conversions) by specifying a \f(CW\*(C`.\*(C'\fR followed by a number.
-For floating point formats, with the exception of 'g' and 'G', this specifies
-the number of decimal places to show (the default being 6), eg:
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& # these examples are subject to system-specific variation
-\& printf '<%f>', 1; # prints "<1.000000>"
-\& printf '<%.1f>', 1; # prints "<1.0>"
-\& printf '<%.0f>', 1; # prints "<1>"
-\& printf '<%e>', 10; # prints "<1.000000e+01>"
-\& printf '<%.1e>', 10; # prints "<1.0e+01>"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-For 'g' and 'G', this specifies the maximum number of digits to show,
-including prior to the decimal point as well as after it, eg:
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& # these examples are subject to system-specific variation
-\& printf '<%g>', 1; # prints "<1>"
-\& printf '<%.10g>', 1; # prints "<1>"
-\& printf '<%g>', 100; # prints "<100>"
-\& printf '<%.1g>', 100; # prints "<1e+02>"
-\& printf '<%.2g>', 100.01; # prints "<1e+02>"
-\& printf '<%.5g>', 100.01; # prints "<100.01>"
-\& printf '<%.4g>', 100.01; # prints "<100>"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-For integer conversions, specifying a precision implies that the
-output of the number itself should be zero-padded to this width:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& printf '<%.6x>', 1; # prints "<000001>"
-\& printf '<%#.6x>', 1; # prints "<0x000001>"
-\& printf '<%-10.6x>', 1; # prints "<000001 >"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-For string conversions, specifying a precision truncates the string
-to fit in the specified width:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& printf '<%.5s>', "truncated"; # prints "<trunc>"
-\& printf '<%10.5s>', "truncated"; # prints "< trunc>"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can also get the precision from the next argument using \f(CW\*(C`.*\*(C'\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& printf '<%.6x>', 1; # prints "<000001>"
-\& printf '<%.*x>', 6, 1; # prints "<000001>"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You cannot currently get the precision from a specified number,
-but it is intended that this will be possible in the future using
-eg \f(CW\*(C`.*2$\*(C'\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& printf '<%.*2$x>', 1, 6; # INVALID, but in future will print "<000001>"
-.Ve
-.IP "size" 4
-.IX Item "size"
-For numeric conversions, you can specify the size to interpret the
-number as using \f(CW\*(C`l\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`h\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`V\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`q\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`L\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`ll\*(C'\fR. For integer
-conversions (\f(CW\*(C`d u o x X b i D U O\*(C'\fR), numbers are usually assumed to be
-whatever the default integer size is on your platform (usually 32 or 64
-bits), but you can override this to use instead one of the standard C types,
-as supported by the compiler used to build Perl:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& l interpret integer as C type "long" or "unsigned long"
-\& h interpret integer as C type "short" or "unsigned short"
-\& q, L or ll interpret integer as C type "long long", "unsigned long long".
-\& or "quads" (typically 64-bit integers)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The last will produce errors if Perl does not understand \*(L"quads\*(R" in your
-installation. (This requires that either the platform natively supports quads
-or Perl was specifically compiled to support quads.) You can find out
-whether your Perl supports quads via Config:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use Config;
-\& ($Config{use64bitint} eq 'define' || $Config{longsize} >= 8) &&
-\& print "quads\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-For floating point conversions (\f(CW\*(C`e f g E F G\*(C'\fR), numbers are usually assumed
-to be the default floating point size on your platform (double or long double),
-but you can force 'long double' with \f(CW\*(C`q\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`L\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`ll\*(C'\fR if your
-platform supports them. You can find out whether your Perl supports long
-doubles via Config:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use Config;
-\& $Config{d_longdbl} eq 'define' && print "long doubles\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can find out whether Perl considers 'long double' to be the default
-floating point size to use on your platform via Config:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use Config;
-\& ($Config{uselongdouble} eq 'define') &&
-\& print "long doubles by default\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-It can also be the case that long doubles and doubles are the same thing:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use Config;
-\& ($Config{doublesize} == $Config{longdblsize}) &&
-\& print "doubles are long doubles\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The size specifier \f(CW\*(C`V\*(C'\fR has no effect for Perl code, but it is supported
-for compatibility with \s-1XS\s0 code; it means 'use the standard size for
-a Perl integer (or floating-point number)', which is already the
-default for Perl code.
-.IP "order of arguments" 4
-.IX Item "order of arguments"
-Normally, sprintf takes the next unused argument as the value to
-format for each format specification. If the format specification
-uses \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR to require additional arguments, these are consumed from
-the argument list in the order in which they appear in the format
-specification \fIbefore\fR the value to format. Where an argument is
-specified using an explicit index, this does not affect the normal
-order for the arguments (even when the explicitly specified index
-would have been the next argument in any case).
-.Sp
-So:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& printf '<%*.*s>', $a, $b, $c;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-would use \f(CW$a\fR for the width, \f(CW$b\fR for the precision and \f(CW$c\fR
-as the value to format, while:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print '<%*1$.*s>', $a, $b;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-would use \f(CW$a\fR for the width and the precision, and \f(CW$b\fR as the
-value to format.
-.Sp
-Here are some more examples \- beware that when using an explicit
-index, the \f(CW\*(C`$\*(C'\fR may need to be escaped:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& printf "%2\e$d %d\en", 12, 34; # will print "34 12\en"
-\& printf "%2\e$d %d %d\en", 12, 34; # will print "34 12 34\en"
-\& printf "%3\e$d %d %d\en", 12, 34, 56; # will print "56 12 34\en"
-\& printf "%2\e$*3\e$d %d\en", 12, 34, 3; # will print " 34 12\en"
-.Ve
-.RE
-.RS 8
-.Sp
-If \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR is in effect, the character used for the decimal
-point in formatted real numbers is affected by the \s-1LC_NUMERIC\s0 locale.
-See perllocale.
-.RE
-.IP "sqrt \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sqrt EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "sqrt" 8
-.IX Item "sqrt"
-.PD
-Return the square root of \s-1EXPR\s0. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, returns square
-root of \f(CW$_\fR. Only works on non-negative operands, unless you've
-loaded the standard Math::Complex module.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use Math::Complex;
-\& print sqrt(-2); # prints 1.4142135623731i
-.Ve
-.IP "srand \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "srand EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "srand" 8
-.IX Item "srand"
-.PD
-Sets the random number seed for the \f(CW\*(C`rand\*(C'\fR operator.
-.Sp
-The point of the function is to \*(L"seed\*(R" the \f(CW\*(C`rand\*(C'\fR function so that
-\&\f(CW\*(C`rand\*(C'\fR can produce a different sequence each time you run your
-program.
-.Sp
-If \fIsrand()\fR is not called explicitly, it is called implicitly at the
-first use of the \f(CW\*(C`rand\*(C'\fR operator. However, this was not the case in
-versions of Perl before 5.004, so if your script will run under older
-Perl versions, it should call \f(CW\*(C`srand\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Most programs won't even call \fIsrand()\fR at all, except those that
-need a cryptographically-strong starting point rather than the
-generally acceptable default, which is based on time of day,
-process \s-1ID\s0, and memory allocation, or the \fI/dev/urandom\fR device,
-if available.
-.Sp
-You can call srand($seed) with the same \f(CW$seed\fR to reproduce the
-\&\fIsame\fR sequence from \fIrand()\fR, but this is usually reserved for
-generating predictable results for testing or debugging.
-Otherwise, don't call \fIsrand()\fR more than once in your program.
-.Sp
-Do \fBnot\fR call \fIsrand()\fR (i.e. without an argument) more than once in
-a script. The internal state of the random number generator should
-contain more entropy than can be provided by any seed, so calling
-\&\fIsrand()\fR again actually \fIloses\fR randomness.
-.Sp
-Most implementations of \f(CW\*(C`srand\*(C'\fR take an integer and will silently
-truncate decimal numbers. This means \f(CW\*(C`srand(42)\*(C'\fR will usually
-produce the same results as \f(CW\*(C`srand(42.1)\*(C'\fR. To be safe, always pass
-\&\f(CW\*(C`srand\*(C'\fR an integer.
-.Sp
-In versions of Perl prior to 5.004 the default seed was just the
-current \f(CW\*(C`time\*(C'\fR. This isn't a particularly good seed, so many old
-programs supply their own seed value (often \f(CW\*(C`time ^ $$\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`time ^
-($$ + ($$ << 15))\*(C'\fR), but that isn't necessary any more.
-.Sp
-Note that you need something much more random than the default seed for
-cryptographic purposes. Checksumming the compressed output of one or more
-rapidly changing operating system status programs is the usual method. For
-example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& srand (time ^ $$ ^ unpack "%L*", `ps axww | gzip`);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you're particularly concerned with this, see the \f(CW\*(C`Math::TrulyRandom\*(C'\fR
-module in \s-1CPAN\s0.
-.Sp
-Frequently called programs (like \s-1CGI\s0 scripts) that simply use
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& time ^ $$
-.Ve
-.Sp
-for a seed can fall prey to the mathematical property that
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& a^b == (a+1)^(b+1)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-one-third of the time. So don't do that.
-.IP "stat \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "stat FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "stat \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "stat EXPR"
-.IP "stat" 8
-.IX Item "stat"
-.PD
-Returns a 13\-element list giving the status info for a file, either
-the file opened via \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0, or named by \s-1EXPR\s0. If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted,
-it stats \f(CW$_\fR. Returns a null list if the stat fails. Typically used
-as follows:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& ($dev,$ino,$mode,$nlink,$uid,$gid,$rdev,$size,
-\& $atime,$mtime,$ctime,$blksize,$blocks)
-\& = stat($filename);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Not all fields are supported on all filesystem types. Here are the
-meaning of the fields:
-.Sp
-.Vb 13
-\& 0 dev device number of filesystem
-\& 1 ino inode number
-\& 2 mode file mode (type and permissions)
-\& 3 nlink number of (hard) links to the file
-\& 4 uid numeric user ID of file's owner
-\& 5 gid numeric group ID of file's owner
-\& 6 rdev the device identifier (special files only)
-\& 7 size total size of file, in bytes
-\& 8 atime last access time in seconds since the epoch
-\& 9 mtime last modify time in seconds since the epoch
-\& 10 ctime inode change time in seconds since the epoch (*)
-\& 11 blksize preferred block size for file system I/O
-\& 12 blocks actual number of blocks allocated
-.Ve
-.Sp
-(The epoch was at 00:00 January 1, 1970 \s-1GMT\s0.)
-.Sp
-(*) The ctime field is non\-portable, in particular you cannot expect
-it to be a \*(L"creation time\*(R", see \*(L"Files and Filesystems\*(R" in perlport
-for details.
-.Sp
-If stat is passed the special filehandle consisting of an underline, no
-stat is done, but the current contents of the stat structure from the
-last stat or filetest are returned. Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& if (-x $file && (($d) = stat(_)) && $d < 0) {
-\& print "$file is executable NFS file\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-(This works on machines only for which the device number is negative
-under \s-1NFS\s0.)
-.Sp
-Because the mode contains both the file type and its permissions, you
-should mask off the file type portion and (s)printf using a \f(CW"%o"\fR
-if you want to see the real permissions.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $mode = (stat($filename))[2];
-\& printf "Permissions are %04o\en", $mode & 07777;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In scalar context, \f(CW\*(C`stat\*(C'\fR returns a boolean value indicating success
-or failure, and, if successful, sets the information associated with
-the special filehandle \f(CW\*(C`_\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-The File::stat module provides a convenient, by-name access mechanism:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& use File::stat;
-\& $sb = stat($filename);
-\& printf "File is %s, size is %s, perm %04o, mtime %s\en",
-\& $filename, $sb->size, $sb->mode & 07777,
-\& scalar localtime $sb->mtime;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can import symbolic mode constants (\f(CW\*(C`S_IF*\*(C'\fR) and functions
-(\f(CW\*(C`S_IS*\*(C'\fR) from the Fcntl module:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use Fcntl ':mode';
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $mode = (stat($filename))[2];
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& $user_rwx = ($mode & S_IRWXU) >> 6;
-\& $group_read = ($mode & S_IRGRP) >> 3;
-\& $other_execute = $mode & S_IXOTH;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& printf "Permissions are %04o\en", S_IMODE($mode), "\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $is_setuid = $mode & S_ISUID;
-\& $is_setgid = S_ISDIR($mode);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You could write the last two using the \f(CW\*(C`\-u\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-d\*(C'\fR operators.
-The commonly available S_IF* constants are
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& # Permissions: read, write, execute, for user, group, others.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& S_IRWXU S_IRUSR S_IWUSR S_IXUSR
-\& S_IRWXG S_IRGRP S_IWGRP S_IXGRP
-\& S_IRWXO S_IROTH S_IWOTH S_IXOTH
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # Setuid/Setgid/Stickiness/SaveText.
-\& # Note that the exact meaning of these is system dependent.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& S_ISUID S_ISGID S_ISVTX S_ISTXT
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& # File types. Not necessarily all are available on your system.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& S_IFREG S_IFDIR S_IFLNK S_IFBLK S_ISCHR S_IFIFO S_IFSOCK S_IFWHT S_ENFMT
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& # The following are compatibility aliases for S_IRUSR, S_IWUSR, S_IXUSR.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& S_IREAD S_IWRITE S_IEXEC
-.Ve
-.Sp
-and the S_IF* functions are
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& S_IMODE($mode) the part of $mode containing the permission bits
-\& and the setuid/setgid/sticky bits
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& S_IFMT($mode) the part of $mode containing the file type
-\& which can be bit-anded with e.g. S_IFREG
-\& or with the following functions
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& # The operators -f, -d, -l, -b, -c, -p, and -s.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& S_ISREG($mode) S_ISDIR($mode) S_ISLNK($mode)
-\& S_ISBLK($mode) S_ISCHR($mode) S_ISFIFO($mode) S_ISSOCK($mode)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& # No direct -X operator counterpart, but for the first one
-\& # the -g operator is often equivalent. The ENFMT stands for
-\& # record flocking enforcement, a platform-dependent feature.
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& S_ISENFMT($mode) S_ISWHT($mode)
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See your native \fIchmod\fR\|(2) and \fIstat\fR\|(2) documentation for more details
-about the S_* constants.
-.Sp
-To get status info for a symbolic link instead of the target file
-behind the link, use the \f(CW\*(C`lstat\*(C'\fR function, see \*(L"stat\*(R".
-.IP "study \s-1SCALAR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "study SCALAR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "study" 8
-.IX Item "study"
-.PD
-Takes extra time to study \s-1SCALAR\s0 (\f(CW$_\fR if unspecified) in anticipation of
-doing many pattern matches on the string before it is next modified.
-This may or may not save time, depending on the nature and number of
-patterns you are searching on, and on the distribution of character
-frequencies in the string to be searched\*(--you probably want to compare
-run times with and without it to see which runs faster. Those loops
-which scan for many short constant strings (including the constant
-parts of more complex patterns) will benefit most. You may have only
-one \f(CW\*(C`study\*(C'\fR active at a time\*(--if you study a different scalar the first
-is \*(L"unstudied\*(R". (The way \f(CW\*(C`study\*(C'\fR works is this: a linked list of every
-character in the string to be searched is made, so we know, for
-example, where all the \f(CW'k'\fR characters are. From each search string,
-the rarest character is selected, based on some static frequency tables
-constructed from some C programs and English text. Only those places
-that contain this \*(L"rarest\*(R" character are examined.)
-.Sp
-For example, here is a loop that inserts index producing entries
-before any line containing a certain pattern:
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& while (<>) {
-\& study;
-\& print ".IX foo\en" if /\ebfoo\eb/;
-\& print ".IX bar\en" if /\ebbar\eb/;
-\& print ".IX blurfl\en" if /\ebblurfl\eb/;
-\& # ...
-\& print;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In searching for \f(CW\*(C`/\ebfoo\eb/\*(C'\fR, only those locations in \f(CW$_\fR that contain \f(CW\*(C`f\*(C'\fR
-will be looked at, because \f(CW\*(C`f\*(C'\fR is rarer than \f(CW\*(C`o\*(C'\fR. In general, this is
-a big win except in pathological cases. The only question is whether
-it saves you more time than it took to build the linked list in the
-first place.
-.Sp
-Note that if you have to look for strings that you don't know till
-runtime, you can build an entire loop as a string and \f(CW\*(C`eval\*(C'\fR that to
-avoid recompiling all your patterns all the time. Together with
-undefining \f(CW$/\fR to input entire files as one record, this can be very
-fast, often faster than specialized programs like \fIfgrep\fR\|(1). The following
-scans a list of files (\f(CW at files\fR) for a list of words (\f(CW at words\fR), and prints
-out the names of those files that contain a match:
-.Sp
-.Vb 12
-\& $search = 'while (<>) { study;';
-\& foreach $word (@words) {
-\& $search .= "++\e$seen{\e$ARGV} if /\e\eb$word\e\eb/;\en";
-\& }
-\& $search .= "}";
-\& @ARGV = @files;
-\& undef $/;
-\& eval $search; # this screams
-\& $/ = "\en"; # put back to normal input delimiter
-\& foreach $file (sort keys(%seen)) {
-\& print $file, "\en";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "sub \s-1NAME\s0 \s-1BLOCK\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sub NAME BLOCK"
-.PD 0
-.IP "sub \s-1NAME\s0 (\s-1PROTO\s0) \s-1BLOCK\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sub NAME (PROTO) BLOCK"
-.IP "sub \s-1NAME\s0 : \s-1ATTRS\s0 \s-1BLOCK\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sub NAME : ATTRS BLOCK"
-.IP "sub \s-1NAME\s0 (\s-1PROTO\s0) : \s-1ATTRS\s0 \s-1BLOCK\s0" 8
-.IX Item "sub NAME (PROTO) : ATTRS BLOCK"
-.PD
-This is subroutine definition, not a real function \fIper se\fR.
-Without a \s-1BLOCK\s0 it's just a forward declaration. Without a \s-1NAME\s0,
-it's an anonymous function declaration, and does actually return
-a value: the \s-1CODE\s0 ref of the closure you just created.
-.Sp
-See perlsub and perlref for details about subroutines and
-references, and attributes and Attribute::Handlers for more
-information about attributes.
-.IP "substr \s-1EXPR\s0,OFFSET,LENGTH,REPLACEMENT" 8
-.IX Item "substr EXPR,OFFSET,LENGTH,REPLACEMENT"
-.PD 0
-.IP "substr \s-1EXPR\s0,OFFSET,LENGTH" 8
-.IX Item "substr EXPR,OFFSET,LENGTH"
-.IP "substr \s-1EXPR\s0,OFFSET" 8
-.IX Item "substr EXPR,OFFSET"
-.PD
-Extracts a substring out of \s-1EXPR\s0 and returns it. First character is at
-offset \f(CW0\fR, or whatever you've set \f(CW$[\fR to (but don't do that).
-If \s-1OFFSET\s0 is negative (or more precisely, less than \f(CW$[\fR), starts
-that far from the end of the string. If \s-1LENGTH\s0 is omitted, returns
-everything to the end of the string. If \s-1LENGTH\s0 is negative, leaves that
-many characters off the end of the string.
-.Sp
-You can use the \fIsubstr()\fR function as an lvalue, in which case \s-1EXPR\s0
-must itself be an lvalue. If you assign something shorter than \s-1LENGTH\s0,
-the string will shrink, and if you assign something longer than \s-1LENGTH\s0,
-the string will grow to accommodate it. To keep the string the same
-length you may need to pad or chop your value using \f(CW\*(C`sprintf\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-If \s-1OFFSET\s0 and \s-1LENGTH\s0 specify a substring that is partly outside the
-string, only the part within the string is returned. If the substring
-is beyond either end of the string, \fIsubstr()\fR returns the undefined
-value and produces a warning. When used as an lvalue, specifying a
-substring that is entirely outside the string is a fatal error.
-Here's an example showing the behavior for boundary cases:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& my $name = 'fred';
-\& substr($name, 4) = 'dy'; # $name is now 'freddy'
-\& my $null = substr $name, 6, 2; # returns '' (no warning)
-\& my $oops = substr $name, 7; # returns undef, with warning
-\& substr($name, 7) = 'gap'; # fatal error
-.Ve
-.Sp
-An alternative to using \fIsubstr()\fR as an lvalue is to specify the
-replacement string as the 4th argument. This allows you to replace
-parts of the \s-1EXPR\s0 and return what was there before in one operation,
-just as you can with \fIsplice()\fR.
-.Sp
-If the lvalue returned by substr is used after the \s-1EXPR\s0 is changed in
-any way, the behaviour may not be as expected and is subject to change.
-This caveat includes code such as \f(CW\*(C`print(substr($foo,$a,$b)=$bar)\*(C'\fR or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`(substr($foo,$a,$b)=$bar)=$fud\*(C'\fR (where \f(CW$foo\fR is changed via the
-substring assignment, and then the substr is used again), or where a
-\&\fIsubstr()\fR is aliased via a \f(CW\*(C`foreach\*(C'\fR loop or passed as a parameter or
-a reference to it is taken and then the alias, parameter, or deref'd
-reference either is used after the original \s-1EXPR\s0 has been changed or
-is assigned to and then used a second time.
-.IP "symlink \s-1OLDFILE\s0,NEWFILE" 8
-.IX Item "symlink OLDFILE,NEWFILE"
-Creates a new filename symbolically linked to the old filename.
-Returns \f(CW1\fR for success, \f(CW0\fR otherwise. On systems that don't support
-symbolic links, produces a fatal error at run time. To check for that,
-use eval:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $symlink_exists = eval { symlink("",""); 1 };
-.Ve
-.IP "syscall \s-1NUMBER\s0, \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "syscall NUMBER, LIST"
-Calls the system call specified as the first element of the list,
-passing the remaining elements as arguments to the system call. If
-unimplemented, produces a fatal error. The arguments are interpreted
-as follows: if a given argument is numeric, the argument is passed as
-an int. If not, the pointer to the string value is passed. You are
-responsible to make sure a string is pre-extended long enough to
-receive any result that might be written into a string. You can't use a
-string literal (or other read-only string) as an argument to \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR
-because Perl has to assume that any string pointer might be written
-through. If your
-integer arguments are not literals and have never been interpreted in a
-numeric context, you may need to add \f(CW0\fR to them to force them to look
-like numbers. This emulates the \f(CW\*(C`syswrite\*(C'\fR function (or vice versa):
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& require 'syscall.ph'; # may need to run h2ph
-\& $s = "hi there\en";
-\& syscall(&SYS_write, fileno(STDOUT), $s, length $s);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that Perl supports passing of up to only 14 arguments to your system call,
-which in practice should usually suffice.
-.Sp
-Syscall returns whatever value returned by the system call it calls.
-If the system call fails, \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR returns \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR and sets \f(CW$!\fR (errno).
-Note that some system calls can legitimately return \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR. The proper
-way to handle such calls is to assign \f(CW\*(C`$!=0;\*(C'\fR before the call and
-check the value of \f(CW$!\fR if syscall returns \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-There's a problem with \f(CW\*(C`syscall(&SYS_pipe)\*(C'\fR: it returns the file
-number of the read end of the pipe it creates. There is no way
-to retrieve the file number of the other end. You can avoid this
-problem by using \f(CW\*(C`pipe\*(C'\fR instead.
-.IP "sysopen \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,FILENAME,MODE" 8
-.IX Item "sysopen FILEHANDLE,FILENAME,MODE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "sysopen \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,FILENAME,MODE,PERMS" 8
-.IX Item "sysopen FILEHANDLE,FILENAME,MODE,PERMS"
-.PD
-Opens the file whose filename is given by \s-1FILENAME\s0, and associates it
-with \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0. If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is an expression, its value is used as
-the name of the real filehandle wanted. This function calls the
-underlying operating system's \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR function with the parameters
-\&\s-1FILENAME\s0, \s-1MODE\s0, \s-1PERMS\s0.
-.Sp
-The possible values and flag bits of the \s-1MODE\s0 parameter are
-system\-dependent; they are available via the standard module \f(CW\*(C`Fcntl\*(C'\fR.
-See the documentation of your operating system's \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR to see which
-values and flag bits are available. You may combine several flags
-using the \f(CW\*(C`|\*(C'\fR\-operator.
-.Sp
-Some of the most common values are \f(CW\*(C`O_RDONLY\*(C'\fR for opening the file in
-read-only mode, \f(CW\*(C`O_WRONLY\*(C'\fR for opening the file in write-only mode,
-and \f(CW\*(C`O_RDWR\*(C'\fR for opening the file in read-write mode, and.
-.Sp
-For historical reasons, some values work on almost every system
-supported by perl: zero means read\-only, one means write\-only, and two
-means read/write. We know that these values do \fInot\fR work under
-\&\s-1OS/390\s0 & \s-1VM/ESA\s0 Unix and on the Macintosh; you probably don't want to
-use them in new code.
-.Sp
-If the file named by \s-1FILENAME\s0 does not exist and the \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR call creates
-it (typically because \s-1MODE\s0 includes the \f(CW\*(C`O_CREAT\*(C'\fR flag), then the value of
-\&\s-1PERMS\s0 specifies the permissions of the newly created file. If you omit
-the \s-1PERMS\s0 argument to \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR, Perl uses the octal value \f(CW0666\fR.
-These permission values need to be in octal, and are modified by your
-process's current \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-In many systems the \f(CW\*(C`O_EXCL\*(C'\fR flag is available for opening files in
-exclusive mode. This is \fBnot\fR locking: exclusiveness means here that
-if the file already exists, \fIsysopen()\fR fails. The \f(CW\*(C`O_EXCL\*(C'\fR wins
-\&\f(CW\*(C`O_TRUNC\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Sometimes you may want to truncate an already-existing file: \f(CW\*(C`O_TRUNC\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-You should seldom if ever use \f(CW0644\fR as argument to \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR, because
-that takes away the user's option to have a more permissive umask.
-Better to omit it. See the \fIperlfunc\fR\|(1) entry on \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR for more
-on this.
-.Sp
-Note that \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR depends on the \fIfdopen()\fR C library function.
-On many \s-1UNIX\s0 systems, \fIfdopen()\fR is known to fail when file descriptors
-exceed a certain value, typically 255. If you need more file
-descriptors than that, consider rebuilding Perl to use the \f(CW\*(C`sfio\*(C'\fR
-library, or perhaps using the \fIPOSIX::open()\fR function.
-.Sp
-See perlopentut for a kinder, gentler explanation of opening files.
-.IP "sysread \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,SCALAR,LENGTH,OFFSET" 8
-.IX Item "sysread FILEHANDLE,SCALAR,LENGTH,OFFSET"
-.PD 0
-.IP "sysread \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,SCALAR,LENGTH" 8
-.IX Item "sysread FILEHANDLE,SCALAR,LENGTH"
-.PD
-Attempts to read \s-1LENGTH\s0 bytes of data into variable \s-1SCALAR\s0 from the
-specified \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0, using the system call \fIread\fR\|(2). It bypasses
-buffered \s-1IO\s0, so mixing this with other kinds of reads, \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`write\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`seek\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tell\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`eof\*(C'\fR can cause confusion because the
-perlio or stdio layers usually buffers data. Returns the number of
-bytes actually read, \f(CW0\fR at end of file, or undef if there was an
-error (in the latter case \f(CW$!\fR is also set). \s-1SCALAR\s0 will be grown or
-shrunk so that the last byte actually read is the last byte of the
-scalar after the read.
-.Sp
-An \s-1OFFSET\s0 may be specified to place the read data at some place in the
-string other than the beginning. A negative \s-1OFFSET\s0 specifies
-placement at that many characters counting backwards from the end of
-the string. A positive \s-1OFFSET\s0 greater than the length of \s-1SCALAR\s0
-results in the string being padded to the required size with \f(CW"\e0"\fR
-bytes before the result of the read is appended.
-.Sp
-There is no \fIsyseof()\fR function, which is ok, since \fIeof()\fR doesn't work
-very well on device files (like ttys) anyway. Use \fIsysread()\fR and check
-for a return value for 0 to decide whether you're done.
-.Sp
-Note that if the filehandle has been marked as \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR Unicode
-characters are read instead of bytes (the \s-1LENGTH\s0, \s-1OFFSET\s0, and the
-return value of \fIsysread()\fR are in Unicode characters).
-The \f(CW\*(C`:encoding(...)\*(C'\fR layer implicitly introduces the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR layer.
-See \*(L"binmode\*(R", \*(L"open\*(R", and the \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR pragma, open.
-.IP "sysseek \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,POSITION,WHENCE" 8
-.IX Item "sysseek FILEHANDLE,POSITION,WHENCE"
-Sets \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0's system position in bytes using the system call
-\&\fIlseek\fR\|(2). \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 may be an expression whose value gives the name
-of the filehandle. The values for \s-1WHENCE\s0 are \f(CW0\fR to set the new
-position to \s-1POSITION\s0, \f(CW1\fR to set the it to the current position plus
-\&\s-1POSITION\s0, and \f(CW2\fR to set it to \s-1EOF\s0 plus \s-1POSITION\s0 (typically
-negative).
-.Sp
-Note the \fIin bytes\fR: even if the filehandle has been set to operate
-on characters (for example by using the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR I/O layer), \fItell()\fR
-will return byte offsets, not character offsets (because implementing
-that would render \fIsysseek()\fR very slow).
-.Sp
-\&\fIsysseek()\fR bypasses normal buffered \s-1IO\s0, so mixing this with reads (other
-than \f(CW\*(C`sysread\*(C'\fR, for example >< or \fIread()\fR) \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`write\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`seek\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tell\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`eof\*(C'\fR may cause confusion.
-.Sp
-For \s-1WHENCE\s0, you may also use the constants \f(CW\*(C`SEEK_SET\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`SEEK_CUR\*(C'\fR,
-and \f(CW\*(C`SEEK_END\*(C'\fR (start of the file, current position, end of the file)
-from the Fcntl module. Use of the constants is also more portable
-than relying on 0, 1, and 2. For example to define a \*(L"systell\*(R" function:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& use Fcntl 'SEEK_CUR';
-\& sub systell { sysseek($_[0], 0, SEEK_CUR) }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Returns the new position, or the undefined value on failure. A position
-of zero is returned as the string \f(CW"0 but true"\fR; thus \f(CW\*(C`sysseek\*(C'\fR returns
-true on success and false on failure, yet you can still easily determine
-the new position.
-.IP "system \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "system LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "system \s-1PROGRAM\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "system PROGRAM LIST"
-.PD
-Does exactly the same thing as \f(CW\*(C`exec LIST\*(C'\fR, except that a fork is
-done first, and the parent process waits for the child process to
-complete. Note that argument processing varies depending on the
-number of arguments. If there is more than one argument in \s-1LIST\s0,
-or if \s-1LIST\s0 is an array with more than one value, starts the program
-given by the first element of the list with arguments given by the
-rest of the list. If there is only one scalar argument, the argument
-is checked for shell metacharacters, and if there are any, the
-entire argument is passed to the system's command shell for parsing
-(this is \f(CW\*(C`/bin/sh \-c\*(C'\fR on Unix platforms, but varies on other
-platforms). If there are no shell metacharacters in the argument,
-it is split into words and passed directly to \f(CW\*(C`execvp\*(C'\fR, which is
-more efficient.
-.Sp
-Beginning with v5.6.0, Perl will attempt to flush all files opened for
-output before any operation that may do a fork, but this may not be
-supported on some platforms (see perlport). To be safe, you may need
-to set \f(CW$|\fR ($AUTOFLUSH in English) or call the \f(CW\*(C`autoflush()\*(C'\fR method
-of \f(CW\*(C`IO::Handle\*(C'\fR on any open handles.
-.Sp
-The return value is the exit status of the program as returned by the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`wait\*(C'\fR call. To get the actual exit value shift right by eight (see below).
-See also \*(L"exec\*(R". This is \fInot\fR what you want to use to capture
-the output from a command, for that you should use merely backticks or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`qx//\*(C'\fR, as described in \*(L"`STRING`\*(R" in perlop. Return value of \-1
-indicates a failure to start the program (inspect $! for the reason).
-.Sp
-Like \f(CW\*(C`exec\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR allows you to lie to a program about its name if
-you use the \f(CW\*(C`system PROGRAM LIST\*(C'\fR syntax. Again, see \*(L"exec\*(R".
-.Sp
-Because \f(CW\*(C`system\*(C'\fR and backticks block \f(CW\*(C`SIGINT\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`SIGQUIT\*(C'\fR,
-killing the program they're running doesn't actually interrupt
-your program.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& @args = ("command", "arg1", "arg2");
-\& system(@args) == 0
-\& or die "system @args failed: $?"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-You can check all the failure possibilities by inspecting
-\&\f(CW$?\fR like this:
-.Sp
-.Vb 10
-\& if ($? == -1) {
-\& print "failed to execute: $!\en";
-\& }
-\& elsif ($? & 127) {
-\& printf "child died with signal %d, %s coredump\en",
-\& ($? & 127), ($? & 128) ? 'with' : 'without';
-\& }
-\& else {
-\& printf "child exited with value %d\en", $? >> 8;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-or more portably by using the W*() calls of the \s-1POSIX\s0 extension;
-see perlport for more information.
-.Sp
-When the arguments get executed via the system shell, results
-and return codes will be subject to its quirks and capabilities.
-See \*(L"`STRING`\*(R" in perlop and \*(L"exec\*(R" for details.
-.IP "syswrite \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,SCALAR,LENGTH,OFFSET" 8
-.IX Item "syswrite FILEHANDLE,SCALAR,LENGTH,OFFSET"
-.PD 0
-.IP "syswrite \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,SCALAR,LENGTH" 8
-.IX Item "syswrite FILEHANDLE,SCALAR,LENGTH"
-.IP "syswrite \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,SCALAR" 8
-.IX Item "syswrite FILEHANDLE,SCALAR"
-.PD
-Attempts to write \s-1LENGTH\s0 bytes of data from variable \s-1SCALAR\s0 to the
-specified \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0, using the system call \fIwrite\fR\|(2). If \s-1LENGTH\s0 is
-not specified, writes whole \s-1SCALAR\s0. It bypasses buffered \s-1IO\s0, so
-mixing this with reads (other than \f(CWsysread())\fR, \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`write\*(C'\fR,
-\&\f(CW\*(C`seek\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`tell\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`eof\*(C'\fR may cause confusion because the perlio and
-stdio layers usually buffers data. Returns the number of bytes
-actually written, or \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR if there was an error (in this case the
-errno variable \f(CW$!\fR is also set). If the \s-1LENGTH\s0 is greater than the
-available data in the \s-1SCALAR\s0 after the \s-1OFFSET\s0, only as much data as is
-available will be written.
-.Sp
-An \s-1OFFSET\s0 may be specified to write the data from some part of the
-string other than the beginning. A negative \s-1OFFSET\s0 specifies writing
-that many characters counting backwards from the end of the string.
-In the case the \s-1SCALAR\s0 is empty you can use \s-1OFFSET\s0 but only zero offset.
-.Sp
-Note that if the filehandle has been marked as \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR, Unicode
-characters are written instead of bytes (the \s-1LENGTH\s0, \s-1OFFSET\s0, and the
-return value of \fIsyswrite()\fR are in \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded Unicode characters).
-The \f(CW\*(C`:encoding(...)\*(C'\fR layer implicitly introduces the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR layer.
-See \*(L"binmode\*(R", \*(L"open\*(R", and the \f(CW\*(C`open\*(C'\fR pragma, open.
-.IP "tell \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "tell FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "tell" 8
-.IX Item "tell"
-.PD
-Returns the current position \fIin bytes\fR for \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0, or \-1 on
-error. \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 may be an expression whose value gives the name of
-the actual filehandle. If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is omitted, assumes the file
-last read.
-.Sp
-Note the \fIin bytes\fR: even if the filehandle has been set to
-operate on characters (for example by using the \f(CW\*(C`:utf8\*(C'\fR open
-layer), \fItell()\fR will return byte offsets, not character offsets
-(because that would render \fIseek()\fR and \fItell()\fR rather slow).
-.Sp
-The return value of \fItell()\fR for the standard streams like the \s-1STDIN\s0
-depends on the operating system: it may return \-1 or something else.
-\&\fItell()\fR on pipes, fifos, and sockets usually returns \-1.
-.Sp
-There is no \f(CW\*(C`systell\*(C'\fR function. Use \f(CW\*(C`sysseek(FH, 0, 1)\*(C'\fR for that.
-.Sp
-Do not use \fItell()\fR on a filehandle that has been opened using
-\&\fIsysopen()\fR, use \fIsysseek()\fR for that as described above. Why? Because
-\&\fIsysopen()\fR creates unbuffered, \*(L"raw\*(R", filehandles, while \fIopen()\fR creates
-buffered filehandles. \fIsysseek()\fR make sense only on the first kind,
-\&\fItell()\fR only makes sense on the second kind.
-.IP "telldir \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "telldir DIRHANDLE"
-Returns the current position of the \f(CW\*(C`readdir\*(C'\fR routines on \s-1DIRHANDLE\s0.
-Value may be given to \f(CW\*(C`seekdir\*(C'\fR to access a particular location in a
-directory. Has the same caveats about possible directory compaction as
-the corresponding system library routine.
-.IP "tie \s-1VARIABLE\s0,CLASSNAME,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "tie VARIABLE,CLASSNAME,LIST"
-This function binds a variable to a package class that will provide the
-implementation for the variable. \s-1VARIABLE\s0 is the name of the variable
-to be enchanted. \s-1CLASSNAME\s0 is the name of a class implementing objects
-of correct type. Any additional arguments are passed to the \f(CW\*(C`new\*(C'\fR
-method of the class (meaning \f(CW\*(C`TIESCALAR\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`TIEHANDLE\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`TIEARRAY\*(C'\fR,
-or \f(CW\*(C`TIEHASH\*(C'\fR). Typically these are arguments such as might be passed
-to the \f(CW\*(C`dbm_open()\*(C'\fR function of C. The object returned by the \f(CW\*(C`new\*(C'\fR
-method is also returned by the \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR function, which would be useful
-if you want to access other methods in \s-1CLASSNAME\s0.
-.Sp
-Note that functions such as \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`values\*(C'\fR may return huge lists
-when used on large objects, like \s-1DBM\s0 files. You may prefer to use the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR function to iterate over such. Example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& # print out history file offsets
-\& use NDBM_File;
-\& tie(%HIST, 'NDBM_File', '/usr/lib/news/history', 1, 0);
-\& while (($key,$val) = each %HIST) {
-\& print $key, ' = ', unpack('L',$val), "\en";
-\& }
-\& untie(%HIST);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-A class implementing a hash should have the following methods:
-.Sp
-.Vb 10
-\& TIEHASH classname, LIST
-\& FETCH this, key
-\& STORE this, key, value
-\& DELETE this, key
-\& CLEAR this
-\& EXISTS this, key
-\& FIRSTKEY this
-\& NEXTKEY this, lastkey
-\& DESTROY this
-\& UNTIE this
-.Ve
-.Sp
-A class implementing an ordinary array should have the following methods:
-.Sp
-.Vb 14
-\& TIEARRAY classname, LIST
-\& FETCH this, key
-\& STORE this, key, value
-\& FETCHSIZE this
-\& STORESIZE this, count
-\& CLEAR this
-\& PUSH this, LIST
-\& POP this
-\& SHIFT this
-\& UNSHIFT this, LIST
-\& SPLICE this, offset, length, LIST
-\& EXTEND this, count
-\& DESTROY this
-\& UNTIE this
-.Ve
-.Sp
-A class implementing a file handle should have the following methods:
-.Sp
-.Vb 16
-\& TIEHANDLE classname, LIST
-\& READ this, scalar, length, offset
-\& READLINE this
-\& GETC this
-\& WRITE this, scalar, length, offset
-\& PRINT this, LIST
-\& PRINTF this, format, LIST
-\& BINMODE this
-\& EOF this
-\& FILENO this
-\& SEEK this, position, whence
-\& TELL this
-\& OPEN this, mode, LIST
-\& CLOSE this
-\& DESTROY this
-\& UNTIE this
-.Ve
-.Sp
-A class implementing a scalar should have the following methods:
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& TIESCALAR classname, LIST
-\& FETCH this,
-\& STORE this, value
-\& DESTROY this
-\& UNTIE this
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Not all methods indicated above need be implemented. See perltie,
-Tie::Hash, Tie::Array, Tie::Scalar, and Tie::Handle.
-.Sp
-Unlike \f(CW\*(C`dbmopen\*(C'\fR, the \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR function will not use or require a module
-for you\*(--you need to do that explicitly yourself. See DB_File
-or the \fIConfig\fR module for interesting \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR implementations.
-.Sp
-For further details see perltie, \*(L"tied \s-1VARIABLE\s0\*(R".
-.IP "tied \s-1VARIABLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "tied VARIABLE"
-Returns a reference to the object underlying \s-1VARIABLE\s0 (the same value
-that was originally returned by the \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR call that bound the variable
-to a package.) Returns the undefined value if \s-1VARIABLE\s0 isn't tied to a
-package.
-.IP "time" 8
-.IX Item "time"
-Returns the number of non-leap seconds since whatever time the system
-considers to be the epoch (that's 00:00:00, January 1, 1904 for Mac \s-1OS\s0,
-and 00:00:00 \s-1UTC\s0, January 1, 1970 for most other systems).
-Suitable for feeding to \f(CW\*(C`gmtime\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`localtime\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-For measuring time in better granularity than one second,
-you may use either the Time::HiRes module (from \s-1CPAN\s0, and starting from
-Perl 5.8 part of the standard distribution), or if you have
-\&\fIgettimeofday\fR\|(2), you may be able to use the \f(CW\*(C`syscall\*(C'\fR interface of Perl.
-See perlfaq8 for details.
-.IP "times" 8
-.IX Item "times"
-Returns a four-element list giving the user and system times, in
-seconds, for this process and the children of this process.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& ($user,$system,$cuser,$csystem) = times;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In scalar context, \f(CW\*(C`times\*(C'\fR returns \f(CW$user\fR.
-.IP "tr///" 8
-.IX Item "tr///"
-The transliteration operator. Same as \f(CW\*(C`y///\*(C'\fR. See perlop.
-.IP "truncate \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,LENGTH" 8
-.IX Item "truncate FILEHANDLE,LENGTH"
-.PD 0
-.IP "truncate \s-1EXPR\s0,LENGTH" 8
-.IX Item "truncate EXPR,LENGTH"
-.PD
-Truncates the file opened on \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0, or named by \s-1EXPR\s0, to the
-specified length. Produces a fatal error if truncate isn't implemented
-on your system. Returns true if successful, the undefined value
-otherwise.
-.Sp
-The behavior is undefined if \s-1LENGTH\s0 is greater than the length of the
-file.
-.IP "uc \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "uc EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "uc" 8
-.IX Item "uc"
-.PD
-Returns an uppercased version of \s-1EXPR\s0. This is the internal function
-implementing the \f(CW\*(C`\eU\*(C'\fR escape in double-quoted strings. Respects
-current \s-1LC_CTYPE\s0 locale if \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR in force. See perllocale
-and perlunicode for more details about locale and Unicode support.
-It does not attempt to do titlecase mapping on initial letters. See
-\&\f(CW\*(C`ucfirst\*(C'\fR for that.
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "ucfirst \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "ucfirst EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "ucfirst" 8
-.IX Item "ucfirst"
-.PD
-Returns the value of \s-1EXPR\s0 with the first character in uppercase
-(titlecase in Unicode). This is the internal function implementing
-the \f(CW\*(C`\eu\*(C'\fR escape in double-quoted strings. Respects current \s-1LC_CTYPE\s0
-locale if \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR in force. See perllocale and perlunicode
-for more details about locale and Unicode support.
-.Sp
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "umask \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "umask EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "umask" 8
-.IX Item "umask"
-.PD
-Sets the umask for the process to \s-1EXPR\s0 and returns the previous value.
-If \s-1EXPR\s0 is omitted, merely returns the current umask.
-.Sp
-The Unix permission \f(CW\*(C`rwxr\-x\-\-\-\*(C'\fR is represented as three sets of three
-bits, or three octal digits: \f(CW0750\fR (the leading 0 indicates octal
-and isn't one of the digits). The \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR value is such a number
-representing disabled permissions bits. The permission (or \*(L"mode\*(R")
-values you pass \f(CW\*(C`mkdir\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR are modified by your umask, so
-even if you tell \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR to create a file with permissions \f(CW0777\fR,
-if your umask is \f(CW0022\fR then the file will actually be created with
-permissions \f(CW0755\fR. If your \f(CW\*(C`umask\*(C'\fR were \f(CW0027\fR (group can't
-write; others can't read, write, or execute), then passing
-\&\f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR \f(CW0666\fR would create a file with mode \f(CW0640\fR (\f(CW\*(C`0666 &~
-027\*(C'\fR is \f(CW0640\fR).
-.Sp
-Here's some advice: supply a creation mode of \f(CW0666\fR for regular
-files (in \f(CW\*(C`sysopen\*(C'\fR) and one of \f(CW0777\fR for directories (in
-\&\f(CW\*(C`mkdir\*(C'\fR) and executable files. This gives users the freedom of
-choice: if they want protected files, they might choose process umasks
-of \f(CW022\fR, \f(CW027\fR, or even the particularly antisocial mask of \f(CW077\fR.
-Programs should rarely if ever make policy decisions better left to
-the user. The exception to this is when writing files that should be
-kept private: mail files, web browser cookies, \fI.rhosts\fR files, and
-so on.
-.Sp
-If \fIumask\fR\|(2) is not implemented on your system and you are trying to
-restrict access for \fIyourself\fR (i.e., (\s-1EXPR\s0 & 0700) > 0), produces a
-fatal error at run time. If \fIumask\fR\|(2) is not implemented and you are
-not trying to restrict access for yourself, returns \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Remember that a umask is a number, usually given in octal; it is \fInot\fR a
-string of octal digits. See also \*(L"oct\*(R", if all you have is a string.
-.IP "undef \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "undef EXPR"
-.PD 0
-.IP "undef" 8
-.IX Item "undef"
-.PD
-Undefines the value of \s-1EXPR\s0, which must be an lvalue. Use only on a
-scalar value, an array (using \f(CW\*(C`@\*(C'\fR), a hash (using \f(CW\*(C`%\*(C'\fR), a subroutine
-(using \f(CW\*(C`&\*(C'\fR), or a typeglob (using \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR). (Saying \f(CW\*(C`undef $hash{$key}\*(C'\fR
-will probably not do what you expect on most predefined variables or
-\&\s-1DBM\s0 list values, so don't do that; see delete.) Always returns the
-undefined value. You can omit the \s-1EXPR\s0, in which case nothing is
-undefined, but you still get an undefined value that you could, for
-instance, return from a subroutine, assign to a variable or pass as a
-parameter. Examples:
-.Sp
-.Vb 9
-\& undef $foo;
-\& undef $bar{'blurfl'}; # Compare to: delete $bar{'blurfl'};
-\& undef @ary;
-\& undef %hash;
-\& undef &mysub;
-\& undef *xyz; # destroys $xyz, @xyz, %xyz, &xyz, etc.
-\& return (wantarray ? (undef, $errmsg) : undef) if $they_blew_it;
-\& select undef, undef, undef, 0.25;
-\& ($a, $b, undef, $c) = &foo; # Ignore third value returned
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note that this is a unary operator, not a list operator.
-.IP "unlink \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "unlink LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "unlink" 8
-.IX Item "unlink"
-.PD
-Deletes a list of files. Returns the number of files successfully
-deleted.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& $cnt = unlink 'a', 'b', 'c';
-\& unlink @goners;
-\& unlink <*.bak>;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note: \f(CW\*(C`unlink\*(C'\fR will not delete directories unless you are superuser and
-the \fB\-U\fR flag is supplied to Perl. Even if these conditions are
-met, be warned that unlinking a directory can inflict damage on your
-filesystem. Use \f(CW\*(C`rmdir\*(C'\fR instead.
-.Sp
-If \s-1LIST\s0 is omitted, uses \f(CW$_\fR.
-.IP "unpack \s-1TEMPLATE\s0,EXPR" 8
-.IX Item "unpack TEMPLATE,EXPR"
-\&\f(CW\*(C`unpack\*(C'\fR does the reverse of \f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR: it takes a string
-and expands it out into a list of values.
-(In scalar context, it returns merely the first value produced.)
-.Sp
-The string is broken into chunks described by the \s-1TEMPLATE\s0. Each chunk
-is converted separately to a value. Typically, either the string is a result
-of \f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR, or the bytes of the string represent a C structure of some
-kind.
-.Sp
-The \s-1TEMPLATE\s0 has the same format as in the \f(CW\*(C`pack\*(C'\fR function.
-Here's a subroutine that does substring:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& sub substr {
-\& my($what,$where,$howmuch) = @_;
-\& unpack("x$where a$howmuch", $what);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-and then there's
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& sub ordinal { unpack("c",$_[0]); } # same as ord()
-.Ve
-.Sp
-In addition to fields allowed in \fIpack()\fR, you may prefix a field with
-a %<number> to indicate that
-you want a <number>\-bit checksum of the items instead of the items
-themselves. Default is a 16\-bit checksum. Checksum is calculated by
-summing numeric values of expanded values (for string fields the sum of
-\&\f(CW\*(C`ord($char)\*(C'\fR is taken, for bit fields the sum of zeroes and ones).
-.Sp
-For example, the following
-computes the same number as the System V sum program:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& $checksum = do {
-\& local $/; # slurp!
-\& unpack("%32C*",<>) % 65535;
-\& };
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The following efficiently counts the number of set bits in a bit vector:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $setbits = unpack("%32b*", $selectmask);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`p\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`P\*(C'\fR formats should be used with care. Since Perl
-has no way of checking whether the value passed to \f(CW\*(C`unpack()\*(C'\fR
-corresponds to a valid memory location, passing a pointer value that's
-not known to be valid is likely to have disastrous consequences.
-.Sp
-If there are more pack codes or if the repeat count of a field or a group
-is larger than what the remainder of the input string allows, the result
-is not well defined: in some cases, the repeat count is decreased, or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`unpack()\*(C'\fR will produce null strings or zeroes, or terminate with an
-error. If the input string is longer than one described by the \s-1TEMPLATE\s0,
-the rest is ignored.
-.Sp
-See \*(L"pack\*(R" for more examples and notes.
-.IP "untie \s-1VARIABLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "untie VARIABLE"
-Breaks the binding between a variable and a package. (See \f(CW\*(C`tie\*(C'\fR.)
-Has no effect if the variable is not tied.
-.IP "unshift \s-1ARRAY\s0,LIST" 8
-.IX Item "unshift ARRAY,LIST"
-Does the opposite of a \f(CW\*(C`shift\*(C'\fR. Or the opposite of a \f(CW\*(C`push\*(C'\fR,
-depending on how you look at it. Prepends list to the front of the
-array, and returns the new number of elements in the array.
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& unshift(@ARGV, '-e') unless $ARGV[0] =~ /^-/;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Note the \s-1LIST\s0 is prepended whole, not one element at a time, so the
-prepended elements stay in the same order. Use \f(CW\*(C`reverse\*(C'\fR to do the
-reverse.
-.IP "use Module \s-1VERSION\s0 \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "use Module VERSION LIST"
-.PD 0
-.IP "use Module \s-1VERSION\s0" 8
-.IX Item "use Module VERSION"
-.IP "use Module \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "use Module LIST"
-.IP "use Module" 8
-.IX Item "use Module"
-.IP "use \s-1VERSION\s0" 8
-.IX Item "use VERSION"
-.PD
-Imports some semantics into the current package from the named module,
-generally by aliasing certain subroutine or variable names into your
-package. It is exactly equivalent to
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& BEGIN { require Module; import Module LIST; }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-except that Module \fImust\fR be a bareword.
-.Sp
-\&\s-1VERSION\s0 may be either a numeric argument such as 5.006, which will be
-compared to \f(CW$]\fR, or a literal of the form v5.6.1, which will be compared
-to \f(CW$^V\fR (aka \f(CW$PERL_VERSION\fR. A fatal error is produced if \s-1VERSION\s0 is
-greater than the version of the current Perl interpreter; Perl will not
-attempt to parse the rest of the file. Compare with \*(L"require\*(R", which can
-do a similar check at run time.
-.Sp
-Specifying \s-1VERSION\s0 as a literal of the form v5.6.1 should generally be
-avoided, because it leads to misleading error messages under earlier
-versions of Perl which do not support this syntax. The equivalent numeric
-version should be used instead.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& use v5.6.1; # compile time version check
-\& use 5.6.1; # ditto
-\& use 5.006_001; # ditto; preferred for backwards compatibility
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This is often useful if you need to check the current Perl version before
-\&\f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fRing library modules that have changed in incompatible ways from
-older versions of Perl. (We try not to do this more than we have to.)
-.Sp
-The \f(CW\*(C`BEGIN\*(C'\fR forces the \f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR to happen at compile time. The
-\&\f(CW\*(C`require\*(C'\fR makes sure the module is loaded into memory if it hasn't been
-yet. The \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR is not a builtin\*(--it's just an ordinary static method
-call into the \f(CW\*(C`Module\*(C'\fR package to tell the module to import the list of
-features back into the current package. The module can implement its
-\&\f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR method any way it likes, though most modules just choose to
-derive their \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR method via inheritance from the \f(CW\*(C`Exporter\*(C'\fR class that
-is defined in the \f(CW\*(C`Exporter\*(C'\fR module. See Exporter. If no \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR
-method can be found then the call is skipped.
-.Sp
-If you do not want to call the package's \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR method (for instance,
-to stop your namespace from being altered), explicitly supply the empty list:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& use Module ();
-.Ve
-.Sp
-That is exactly equivalent to
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& BEGIN { require Module }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If the \s-1VERSION\s0 argument is present between Module and \s-1LIST\s0, then the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR will call the \s-1VERSION\s0 method in class Module with the given
-version as an argument. The default \s-1VERSION\s0 method, inherited from
-the \s-1UNIVERSAL\s0 class, croaks if the given version is larger than the
-value of the variable \f(CW$Module::VERSION\fR.
-.Sp
-Again, there is a distinction between omitting \s-1LIST\s0 (\f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR called
-with no arguments) and an explicit empty \s-1LIST\s0 \f(CW\*(C`()\*(C'\fR (\f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR not
-called). Note that there is no comma after \s-1VERSION\s0!
-.Sp
-Because this is a wide-open interface, pragmas (compiler directives)
-are also implemented this way. Currently implemented pragmas are:
-.Sp
-.Vb 8
-\& use constant;
-\& use diagnostics;
-\& use integer;
-\& use sigtrap qw(SEGV BUS);
-\& use strict qw(subs vars refs);
-\& use subs qw(afunc blurfl);
-\& use warnings qw(all);
-\& use sort qw(stable _quicksort _mergesort);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Some of these pseudo-modules import semantics into the current
-block scope (like \f(CW\*(C`strict\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`integer\*(C'\fR, unlike ordinary modules,
-which import symbols into the current package (which are effective
-through the end of the file).
-.Sp
-There's a corresponding \f(CW\*(C`no\*(C'\fR command that unimports meanings imported
-by \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR, i.e., it calls \f(CW\*(C`unimport Module LIST\*(C'\fR instead of \f(CW\*(C`import\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& no integer;
-\& no strict 'refs';
-\& no warnings;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See perlmodlib for a list of standard modules and pragmas. See perlrun
-for the \f(CW\*(C`\-M\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-m\*(C'\fR command-line options to perl that give \f(CW\*(C`use\*(C'\fR
-functionality from the command\-line.
-.IP "utime \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "utime LIST"
-Changes the access and modification times on each file of a list of
-files. The first two elements of the list must be the \s-1NUMERICAL\s0 access
-and modification times, in that order. Returns the number of files
-successfully changed. The inode change time of each file is set
-to the current time. For example, this code has the same effect as the
-Unix \fItouch\fR\|(1) command when the files \fIalready exist\fR.
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& #!/usr/bin/perl
-\& $now = time;
-\& utime $now, $now, @ARGV;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-\&\fBNote:\fR Under \s-1NFS\s0, \fItouch\fR\|(1) uses the time of the \s-1NFS\s0 server, not
-the time of the local machine. If there is a time synchronization
-problem, the \s-1NFS\s0 server and local machine will have different times.
-.Sp
-Since perl 5.7.2, if the first two elements of the list are \f(CW\*(C`undef\*(C'\fR, then
-the \fIutime\fR\|(2) function in the C library will be called with a null second
-argument. On most systems, this will set the file's access and
-modification times to the current time (i.e. equivalent to the example
-above.)
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& utime undef, undef, @ARGV;
-.Ve
-.IP "values \s-1HASH\s0" 8
-.IX Item "values HASH"
-Returns a list consisting of all the values of the named hash.
-(In a scalar context, returns the number of values.)
-.Sp
-The values are returned in an apparently random order. The actual
-random order is subject to change in future versions of perl, but it
-is guaranteed to be the same order as either the \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR
-function would produce on the same (unmodified) hash. Since Perl
-5.8.1 the ordering is different even between different runs of Perl
-for security reasons (see \*(L"Algorithmic Complexity Attacks\*(R" in perlsec).
-.Sp
-As a side effect, calling \fIvalues()\fR resets the \s-1HASH\s0's internal iterator,
-see \*(L"each\*(R".
-.Sp
-Note that the values are not copied, which means modifying them will
-modify the contents of the hash:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& for (values %hash) { s/foo/bar/g } # modifies %hash values
-\& for (@hash{keys %hash}) { s/foo/bar/g } # same
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See also \f(CW\*(C`keys\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`each\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`sort\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "vec \s-1EXPR\s0,OFFSET,BITS" 8
-.IX Item "vec EXPR,OFFSET,BITS"
-Treats the string in \s-1EXPR\s0 as a bit vector made up of elements of
-width \s-1BITS\s0, and returns the value of the element specified by \s-1OFFSET\s0
-as an unsigned integer. \s-1BITS\s0 therefore specifies the number of bits
-that are reserved for each element in the bit vector. This must
-be a power of two from 1 to 32 (or 64, if your platform supports
-that).
-.Sp
-If \s-1BITS\s0 is 8, \*(L"elements\*(R" coincide with bytes of the input string.
-.Sp
-If \s-1BITS\s0 is 16 or more, bytes of the input string are grouped into chunks
-of size \s-1BITS/8\s0, and each group is converted to a number as with
-\&\fIpack()\fR/\fIunpack()\fR with big-endian formats \f(CW\*(C`n\*(C'\fR/\f(CW\*(C`N\*(C'\fR (and analogously
-for BITS==64). See \*(L"pack\*(R" for details.
-.Sp
-If bits is 4 or less, the string is broken into bytes, then the bits
-of each byte are broken into 8/BITS groups. Bits of a byte are
-numbered in a little-endian-ish way, as in \f(CW0x01\fR, \f(CW0x02\fR,
-\&\f(CW0x04\fR, \f(CW0x08\fR, \f(CW0x10\fR, \f(CW0x20\fR, \f(CW0x40\fR, \f(CW0x80\fR. For example,
-breaking the single input byte \f(CW\*(C`chr(0x36)\*(C'\fR into two groups gives a list
-\&\f(CW\*(C`(0x6, 0x3)\*(C'\fR; breaking it into 4 groups gives \f(CW\*(C`(0x2, 0x1, 0x3, 0x0)\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-\&\f(CW\*(C`vec\*(C'\fR may also be assigned to, in which case parentheses are needed
-to give the expression the correct precedence as in
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& vec($image, $max_x * $x + $y, 8) = 3;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If the selected element is outside the string, the value 0 is returned.
-If an element off the end of the string is written to, Perl will first
-extend the string with sufficiently many zero bytes. It is an error
-to try to write off the beginning of the string (i.e. negative \s-1OFFSET\s0).
-.Sp
-The string should not contain any character with the value > 255 (which
-can only happen if you're using \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoding). If it does, it will be
-treated as something which is not \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded. When the \f(CW\*(C`vec\*(C'\fR was
-assigned to, other parts of your program will also no longer consider the
-string to be \s-1UTF\-8\s0 encoded. In other words, if you do have such characters
-in your string, \fIvec()\fR will operate on the actual byte string, and not the
-conceptual character string.
-.Sp
-Strings created with \f(CW\*(C`vec\*(C'\fR can also be manipulated with the logical
-operators \f(CW\*(C`|\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`&\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`^\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`~\*(C'\fR. These operators will assume a bit
-vector operation is desired when both operands are strings.
-See \*(L"Bitwise String Operators\*(R" in perlop.
-.Sp
-The following code will build up an \s-1ASCII\s0 string saying \f(CW'PerlPerlPerl'\fR.
-The comments show the string after each step. Note that this code works
-in the same way on big-endian or little-endian machines.
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& my $foo = '';
-\& vec($foo, 0, 32) = 0x5065726C; # 'Perl'
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # $foo eq "Perl" eq "\ex50\ex65\ex72\ex6C", 32 bits
-\& print vec($foo, 0, 8); # prints 80 == 0x50 == ord('P')
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 11
-\& vec($foo, 2, 16) = 0x5065; # 'PerlPe'
-\& vec($foo, 3, 16) = 0x726C; # 'PerlPerl'
-\& vec($foo, 8, 8) = 0x50; # 'PerlPerlP'
-\& vec($foo, 9, 8) = 0x65; # 'PerlPerlPe'
-\& vec($foo, 20, 4) = 2; # 'PerlPerlPe' . "\ex02"
-\& vec($foo, 21, 4) = 7; # 'PerlPerlPer'
-\& # 'r' is "\ex72"
-\& vec($foo, 45, 2) = 3; # 'PerlPerlPer' . "\ex0c"
-\& vec($foo, 93, 1) = 1; # 'PerlPerlPer' . "\ex2c"
-\& vec($foo, 94, 1) = 1; # 'PerlPerlPerl'
-\& # 'l' is "\ex6c"
-.Ve
-.Sp
-To transform a bit vector into a string or list of 0's and 1's, use these:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& $bits = unpack("b*", $vector);
-\& @bits = split(//, unpack("b*", $vector));
-.Ve
-.Sp
-If you know the exact length in bits, it can be used in place of the \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-Here is an example to illustrate how the bits actually fall in place:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& #!/usr/bin/perl -wl
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& print <<'EOT';
-\& 0 1 2 3
-\& unpack("V",$_) 01234567890123456789012345678901
-\& ------------------------------------------------------------------
-\& EOT
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 13
-\& for $w (0..3) {
-\& $width = 2**$w;
-\& for ($shift=0; $shift < $width; ++$shift) {
-\& for ($off=0; $off < 32/$width; ++$off) {
-\& $str = pack("B*", "0"x32);
-\& $bits = (1<<$shift);
-\& vec($str, $off, $width) = $bits;
-\& $res = unpack("b*",$str);
-\& $val = unpack("V", $str);
-\& write;
-\& }
-\& }
-\& }
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& format STDOUT =
-\& vec($_,@#,@#) = @<< == @######### @>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
-\& $off, $width, $bits, $val, $res
-\& .
-\& __END__
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Regardless of the machine architecture on which it is run, the above
-example should print the following table:
-.Sp
-.Vb 131
-\& 0 1 2 3
-\& unpack("V",$_) 01234567890123456789012345678901
-\& ------------------------------------------------------------------
-\& vec($_, 0, 1) = 1 == 1 10000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 1) = 1 == 2 01000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 1) = 1 == 4 00100000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 1) = 1 == 8 00010000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 4, 1) = 1 == 16 00001000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 5, 1) = 1 == 32 00000100000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 6, 1) = 1 == 64 00000010000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 7, 1) = 1 == 128 00000001000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 8, 1) = 1 == 256 00000000100000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 9, 1) = 1 == 512 00000000010000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_,10, 1) = 1 == 1024 00000000001000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_,11, 1) = 1 == 2048 00000000000100000000000000000000
-\& vec($_,12, 1) = 1 == 4096 00000000000010000000000000000000
-\& vec($_,13, 1) = 1 == 8192 00000000000001000000000000000000
-\& vec($_,14, 1) = 1 == 16384 00000000000000100000000000000000
-\& vec($_,15, 1) = 1 == 32768 00000000000000010000000000000000
-\& vec($_,16, 1) = 1 == 65536 00000000000000001000000000000000
-\& vec($_,17, 1) = 1 == 131072 00000000000000000100000000000000
-\& vec($_,18, 1) = 1 == 262144 00000000000000000010000000000000
-\& vec($_,19, 1) = 1 == 524288 00000000000000000001000000000000
-\& vec($_,20, 1) = 1 == 1048576 00000000000000000000100000000000
-\& vec($_,21, 1) = 1 == 2097152 00000000000000000000010000000000
-\& vec($_,22, 1) = 1 == 4194304 00000000000000000000001000000000
-\& vec($_,23, 1) = 1 == 8388608 00000000000000000000000100000000
-\& vec($_,24, 1) = 1 == 16777216 00000000000000000000000010000000
-\& vec($_,25, 1) = 1 == 33554432 00000000000000000000000001000000
-\& vec($_,26, 1) = 1 == 67108864 00000000000000000000000000100000
-\& vec($_,27, 1) = 1 == 134217728 00000000000000000000000000010000
-\& vec($_,28, 1) = 1 == 268435456 00000000000000000000000000001000
-\& vec($_,29, 1) = 1 == 536870912 00000000000000000000000000000100
-\& vec($_,30, 1) = 1 == 1073741824 00000000000000000000000000000010
-\& vec($_,31, 1) = 1 == 2147483648 00000000000000000000000000000001
-\& vec($_, 0, 2) = 1 == 1 10000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 2) = 1 == 4 00100000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 2) = 1 == 16 00001000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 2) = 1 == 64 00000010000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 4, 2) = 1 == 256 00000000100000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 5, 2) = 1 == 1024 00000000001000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 6, 2) = 1 == 4096 00000000000010000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 7, 2) = 1 == 16384 00000000000000100000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 8, 2) = 1 == 65536 00000000000000001000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 9, 2) = 1 == 262144 00000000000000000010000000000000
-\& vec($_,10, 2) = 1 == 1048576 00000000000000000000100000000000
-\& vec($_,11, 2) = 1 == 4194304 00000000000000000000001000000000
-\& vec($_,12, 2) = 1 == 16777216 00000000000000000000000010000000
-\& vec($_,13, 2) = 1 == 67108864 00000000000000000000000000100000
-\& vec($_,14, 2) = 1 == 268435456 00000000000000000000000000001000
-\& vec($_,15, 2) = 1 == 1073741824 00000000000000000000000000000010
-\& vec($_, 0, 2) = 2 == 2 01000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 2) = 2 == 8 00010000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 2) = 2 == 32 00000100000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 2) = 2 == 128 00000001000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 4, 2) = 2 == 512 00000000010000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 5, 2) = 2 == 2048 00000000000100000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 6, 2) = 2 == 8192 00000000000001000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 7, 2) = 2 == 32768 00000000000000010000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 8, 2) = 2 == 131072 00000000000000000100000000000000
-\& vec($_, 9, 2) = 2 == 524288 00000000000000000001000000000000
-\& vec($_,10, 2) = 2 == 2097152 00000000000000000000010000000000
-\& vec($_,11, 2) = 2 == 8388608 00000000000000000000000100000000
-\& vec($_,12, 2) = 2 == 33554432 00000000000000000000000001000000
-\& vec($_,13, 2) = 2 == 134217728 00000000000000000000000000010000
-\& vec($_,14, 2) = 2 == 536870912 00000000000000000000000000000100
-\& vec($_,15, 2) = 2 == 2147483648 00000000000000000000000000000001
-\& vec($_, 0, 4) = 1 == 1 10000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 4) = 1 == 16 00001000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 4) = 1 == 256 00000000100000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 4) = 1 == 4096 00000000000010000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 4, 4) = 1 == 65536 00000000000000001000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 5, 4) = 1 == 1048576 00000000000000000000100000000000
-\& vec($_, 6, 4) = 1 == 16777216 00000000000000000000000010000000
-\& vec($_, 7, 4) = 1 == 268435456 00000000000000000000000000001000
-\& vec($_, 0, 4) = 2 == 2 01000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 4) = 2 == 32 00000100000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 4) = 2 == 512 00000000010000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 4) = 2 == 8192 00000000000001000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 4, 4) = 2 == 131072 00000000000000000100000000000000
-\& vec($_, 5, 4) = 2 == 2097152 00000000000000000000010000000000
-\& vec($_, 6, 4) = 2 == 33554432 00000000000000000000000001000000
-\& vec($_, 7, 4) = 2 == 536870912 00000000000000000000000000000100
-\& vec($_, 0, 4) = 4 == 4 00100000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 4) = 4 == 64 00000010000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 4) = 4 == 1024 00000000001000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 4) = 4 == 16384 00000000000000100000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 4, 4) = 4 == 262144 00000000000000000010000000000000
-\& vec($_, 5, 4) = 4 == 4194304 00000000000000000000001000000000
-\& vec($_, 6, 4) = 4 == 67108864 00000000000000000000000000100000
-\& vec($_, 7, 4) = 4 == 1073741824 00000000000000000000000000000010
-\& vec($_, 0, 4) = 8 == 8 00010000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 4) = 8 == 128 00000001000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 4) = 8 == 2048 00000000000100000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 4) = 8 == 32768 00000000000000010000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 4, 4) = 8 == 524288 00000000000000000001000000000000
-\& vec($_, 5, 4) = 8 == 8388608 00000000000000000000000100000000
-\& vec($_, 6, 4) = 8 == 134217728 00000000000000000000000000010000
-\& vec($_, 7, 4) = 8 == 2147483648 00000000000000000000000000000001
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 1 == 1 10000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 1 == 256 00000000100000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 1 == 65536 00000000000000001000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 1 == 16777216 00000000000000000000000010000000
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 2 == 2 01000000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 2 == 512 00000000010000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 2 == 131072 00000000000000000100000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 2 == 33554432 00000000000000000000000001000000
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 4 == 4 00100000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 4 == 1024 00000000001000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 4 == 262144 00000000000000000010000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 4 == 67108864 00000000000000000000000000100000
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 8 == 8 00010000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 8 == 2048 00000000000100000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 8 == 524288 00000000000000000001000000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 8 == 134217728 00000000000000000000000000010000
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 16 == 16 00001000000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 16 == 4096 00000000000010000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 16 == 1048576 00000000000000000000100000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 16 == 268435456 00000000000000000000000000001000
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 32 == 32 00000100000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 32 == 8192 00000000000001000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 32 == 2097152 00000000000000000000010000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 32 == 536870912 00000000000000000000000000000100
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 64 == 64 00000010000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 64 == 16384 00000000000000100000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 64 == 4194304 00000000000000000000001000000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 64 == 1073741824 00000000000000000000000000000010
-\& vec($_, 0, 8) = 128 == 128 00000001000000000000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 1, 8) = 128 == 32768 00000000000000010000000000000000
-\& vec($_, 2, 8) = 128 == 8388608 00000000000000000000000100000000
-\& vec($_, 3, 8) = 128 == 2147483648 00000000000000000000000000000001
-.Ve
-.IP "wait" 8
-.IX Item "wait"
-Behaves like the \fIwait\fR\|(2) system call on your system: it waits for a child
-process to terminate and returns the pid of the deceased process, or
-\&\f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR if there are no child processes. The status is returned in \f(CW$?\fR.
-Note that a return value of \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR could mean that child processes are
-being automatically reaped, as described in perlipc.
-.IP "waitpid \s-1PID\s0,FLAGS" 8
-.IX Item "waitpid PID,FLAGS"
-Waits for a particular child process to terminate and returns the pid of
-the deceased process, or \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR if there is no such child process. On some
-systems, a value of 0 indicates that there are processes still running.
-The status is returned in \f(CW$?\fR. If you say
-.Sp
-.Vb 5
-\& use POSIX ":sys_wait_h";
-\& #...
-\& do {
-\& $kid = waitpid(-1, WNOHANG);
-\& } until $kid > 0;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-then you can do a non-blocking wait for all pending zombie processes.
-Non-blocking wait is available on machines supporting either the
-\&\fIwaitpid\fR\|(2) or \fIwait4\fR\|(2) system calls. However, waiting for a particular
-pid with \s-1FLAGS\s0 of \f(CW0\fR is implemented everywhere. (Perl emulates the
-system call by remembering the status values of processes that have
-exited but have not been harvested by the Perl script yet.)
-.Sp
-Note that on some systems, a return value of \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR could mean that child
-processes are being automatically reaped. See perlipc for details,
-and for other examples.
-.IP "wantarray" 8
-.IX Item "wantarray"
-Returns true if the context of the currently executing subroutine is
-looking for a list value. Returns false if the context is looking
-for a scalar. Returns the undefined value if the context is looking
-for no value (void context).
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& return unless defined wantarray; # don't bother doing more
-\& my @a = complex_calculation();
-\& return wantarray ? @a : "@a";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This function should have been named \fIwantlist()\fR instead.
-.IP "warn \s-1LIST\s0" 8
-.IX Item "warn LIST"
-Produces a message on \s-1STDERR\s0 just like \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR, but doesn't exit or throw
-an exception.
-.Sp
-If \s-1LIST\s0 is empty and \f(CW$@\fR already contains a value (typically from a
-previous eval) that value is used after appending \f(CW"\et...caught"\fR
-to \f(CW$@\fR. This is useful for staying almost, but not entirely similar to
-\&\f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR.
-.Sp
-If \f(CW$@\fR is empty then the string \f(CW"Warning: Something's wrong"\fR is used.
-.Sp
-No message is printed if there is a \f(CW$SIG{_\|_WARN_\|_}\fR handler
-installed. It is the handler's responsibility to deal with the message
-as it sees fit (like, for instance, converting it into a \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR). Most
-handlers must therefore make arrangements to actually display the
-warnings that they are not prepared to deal with, by calling \f(CW\*(C`warn\*(C'\fR
-again in the handler. Note that this is quite safe and will not
-produce an endless loop, since \f(CW\*(C`_\|_WARN_\|_\*(C'\fR hooks are not called from
-inside one.
-.Sp
-You will find this behavior is slightly different from that of
-\&\f(CW$SIG{_\|_DIE_\|_}\fR handlers (which don't suppress the error text, but can
-instead call \f(CW\*(C`die\*(C'\fR again to change it).
-.Sp
-Using a \f(CW\*(C`_\|_WARN_\|_\*(C'\fR handler provides a powerful way to silence all
-warnings (even the so-called mandatory ones). An example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& # wipe out *all* compile-time warnings
-\& BEGIN { $SIG{'__WARN__'} = sub { warn $_[0] if $DOWARN } }
-\& my $foo = 10;
-\& my $foo = 20; # no warning about duplicate my $foo,
-\& # but hey, you asked for it!
-\& # no compile-time or run-time warnings before here
-\& $DOWARN = 1;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& # run-time warnings enabled after here
-\& warn "\e$foo is alive and $foo!"; # does show up
-.Ve
-.Sp
-See perlvar for details on setting \f(CW%SIG\fR entries, and for more
-examples. See the Carp module for other kinds of warnings using its
-\&\fIcarp()\fR and \fIcluck()\fR functions.
-.IP "write \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0" 8
-.IX Item "write FILEHANDLE"
-.PD 0
-.IP "write \s-1EXPR\s0" 8
-.IX Item "write EXPR"
-.IP "write" 8
-.IX Item "write"
-.PD
-Writes a formatted record (possibly multi\-line) to the specified \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0,
-using the format associated with that file. By default the format for
-a file is the one having the same name as the filehandle, but the
-format for the current output channel (see the \f(CW\*(C`select\*(C'\fR function) may be set
-explicitly by assigning the name of the format to the \f(CW$~\fR variable.
-.Sp
-Top of form processing is handled automatically: if there is
-insufficient room on the current page for the formatted record, the
-page is advanced by writing a form feed, a special top-of-page format
-is used to format the new page header, and then the record is written.
-By default the top-of-page format is the name of the filehandle with
-\&\*(L"_TOP\*(R" appended, but it may be dynamically set to the format of your
-choice by assigning the name to the \f(CW$^\fR variable while the filehandle is
-selected. The number of lines remaining on the current page is in
-variable \f(CW\*(C`$\-\*(C'\fR, which can be set to \f(CW0\fR to force a new page.
-.Sp
-If \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is unspecified, output goes to the current default output
-channel, which starts out as \s-1STDOUT\s0 but may be changed by the
-\&\f(CW\*(C`select\*(C'\fR operator. If the \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 is an \s-1EXPR\s0, then the expression
-is evaluated and the resulting string is used to look up the name of
-the \s-1FILEHANDLE\s0 at run time. For more on formats, see perlform.
-.Sp
-Note that write is \fInot\fR the opposite of \f(CW\*(C`read\*(C'\fR. Unfortunately.
-.IP "y///" 8
-.IX Item "y///"
-The transliteration operator. Same as \f(CW\*(C`tr///\*(C'\fR. See perlop.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlnumber.1 b/raw/man1/perlnumber.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c10cba..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlnumber.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,314 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLNUMBER 1"
-.TH PERLNUMBER 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlnumber \- semantics of numbers and numeric operations in Perl
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-.Vb 7
-\& $n = 1234; # decimal integer
-\& $n = 0b1110011; # binary integer
-\& $n = 01234; # octal integer
-\& $n = 0x1234; # hexadecimal integer
-\& $n = 12.34e-56; # exponential notation
-\& $n = "-12.34e56"; # number specified as a string
-\& $n = "1234"; # number specified as a string
-.Ve
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-This document describes how Perl internally handles numeric values.
-.PP
-Perl's operator overloading facility is completely ignored here. Operator
-overloading allows user-defined behaviors for numbers, such as operations
-over arbitrarily large integers, floating points numbers with arbitrary
-precision, operations over \*(L"exotic\*(R" numbers such as modular arithmetic or
-p\-adic arithmetic, and so on. See overload for details.
-.SH "Storing numbers"
-.IX Header "Storing numbers"
-Perl can internally represent numbers in 3 different ways: as native
-integers, as native floating point numbers, and as decimal strings.
-Decimal strings may have an exponential notation part, as in \f(CW"12.34e\-56"\fR.
-\&\fINative\fR here means \*(L"a format supported by the C compiler which was used
-to build perl\*(R".
-.PP
-The term \*(L"native\*(R" does not mean quite as much when we talk about native
-integers, as it does when native floating point numbers are involved.
-The only implication of the term \*(L"native\*(R" on integers is that the limits for
-the maximal and the minimal supported true integral quantities are close to
-powers of 2. However, \*(L"native\*(R" floats have a most fundamental
-restriction: they may represent only those numbers which have a relatively
-\&\*(L"short\*(R" representation when converted to a binary fraction. For example,
-0.9 cannot be represented by a native float, since the binary fraction
-for 0.9 is infinite:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& binary0.1110011001100...
-.Ve
-.PP
-with the sequence \f(CW1100\fR repeating again and again. In addition to this
-limitation, the exponent of the binary number is also restricted when it
-is represented as a floating point number. On typical hardware, floating
-point values can store numbers with up to 53 binary digits, and with binary
-exponents between \-1024 and 1024. In decimal representation this is close
-to 16 decimal digits and decimal exponents in the range of \-304..304.
-The upshot of all this is that Perl cannot store a number like
-12345678901234567 as a floating point number on such architectures without
-loss of information.
-.PP
-Similarly, decimal strings can represent only those numbers which have a
-finite decimal expansion. Being strings, and thus of arbitrary length, there
-is no practical limit for the exponent or number of decimal digits for these
-numbers. (But realize that what we are discussing the rules for just the
-\&\fIstorage\fR of these numbers. The fact that you can store such \*(L"large\*(R" numbers
-does not mean that the \fIoperations\fR over these numbers will use all
-of the significant digits.
-See \*(L"Numeric operators and numeric conversions\*(R" for details.)
-.PP
-In fact numbers stored in the native integer format may be stored either
-in the signed native form, or in the unsigned native form. Thus the limits
-for Perl numbers stored as native integers would typically be \-2**31..2**32\-1,
-with appropriate modifications in the case of 64\-bit integers. Again, this
-does not mean that Perl can do operations only over integers in this range:
-it is possible to store many more integers in floating point format.
-.PP
-Summing up, Perl numeric values can store only those numbers which have
-a finite decimal expansion or a \*(L"short\*(R" binary expansion.
-.SH "Numeric operators and numeric conversions"
-.IX Header "Numeric operators and numeric conversions"
-As mentioned earlier, Perl can store a number in any one of three formats,
-but most operators typically understand only one of those formats. When
-a numeric value is passed as an argument to such an operator, it will be
-converted to the format understood by the operator.
-.PP
-Six such conversions are possible:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& native integer --> native floating point (*)
-\& native integer --> decimal string
-\& native floating_point --> native integer (*)
-\& native floating_point --> decimal string (*)
-\& decimal string --> native integer
-\& decimal string --> native floating point (*)
-.Ve
-.PP
-These conversions are governed by the following general rules:
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-If the source number can be represented in the target form, that
-representation is used.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-If the source number is outside of the limits representable in the target form,
-a representation of the closest limit is used. (\fILoss of information\fR)
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-If the source number is between two numbers representable in the target form,
-a representation of one of these numbers is used. (\fILoss of information\fR)
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-In \f(CW\*(C`native floating point \-\-> native integer\*(C'\fR conversions the magnitude
-of the result is less than or equal to the magnitude of the source.
-(\fI\*(L"Rounding to zero\*(R".\fR)
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-If the \f(CW\*(C`decimal string \-\-> native integer\*(C'\fR conversion cannot be done
-without loss of information, the result is compatible with the conversion
-sequence \f(CW\*(C`decimal_string \-\-> native_floating_point \-\-> native_integer\*(C'\fR.
-In particular, rounding is strongly biased to 0, though a number like
-\&\f(CW"0.99999999999999999999"\fR has a chance of being rounded to 1.
-.PP
-\&\fB\s-1RESTRICTION\s0\fR: The conversions marked with \f(CW\*(C`(*)\*(C'\fR above involve steps
-performed by the C compiler. In particular, bugs/features of the compiler
-used may lead to breakage of some of the above rules.
-.SH "Flavors of Perl numeric operations"
-.IX Header "Flavors of Perl numeric operations"
-Perl operations which take a numeric argument treat that argument in one
-of four different ways: they may force it to one of the integer/floating/
-string formats, or they may behave differently depending on the format of
-the operand. Forcing a numeric value to a particular format does not
-change the number stored in the value.
-.PP
-All the operators which need an argument in the integer format treat the
-argument as in modular arithmetic, e.g., \f(CW\*(C`mod 2**32\*(C'\fR on a 32\-bit
-architecture. \f(CW\*(C`sprintf "%u", \-1\*(C'\fR therefore provides the same result as
-\&\f(CW\*(C`sprintf "%u", ~0\*(C'\fR.
-.IP "Arithmetic operators" 4
-.IX Item "Arithmetic operators"
-The binary operators \f(CW\*(C`+\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`/\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`%\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`==\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`!=\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`>\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`<\*(C'\fR
-\&\f(CW\*(C`>=\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`<=\*(C'\fR and the unary operators \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR \f(CW\*(C`abs\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR will
-attempt to convert arguments to integers. If both conversions are possible
-without loss of precision, and the operation can be performed without
-loss of precision then the integer result is used. Otherwise arguments are
-converted to floating point format and the floating point result is used.
-The caching of conversions (as described above) means that the integer
-conversion does not throw away fractional parts on floating point numbers.
-.IP "++" 4
-\&\f(CW\*(C`++\*(C'\fR behaves as the other operators above, except that if it is a string
-matching the format \f(CW\*(C`/^[a\-zA\-Z]*[0\-9]*\ez/\*(C'\fR the string increment described
-in perlop is used.
-.ie n .IP "Arithmetic operators during ""use integer""" 4
-.el .IP "Arithmetic operators during \f(CWuse integer\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Arithmetic operators during use integer"
-In scopes where \f(CW\*(C`use integer;\*(C'\fR is in force, nearly all the operators listed
-above will force their argument(s) into integer format, and return an integer
-result. The exceptions, \f(CW\*(C`abs\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`++\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR, do not change their
-behavior with \f(CW\*(C`use integer;\*(C'\fR
-.IP "Other mathematical operators" 4
-.IX Item "Other mathematical operators"
-Operators such as \f(CW\*(C`**\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sin\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`exp\*(C'\fR force arguments to floating point
-format.
-.IP "Bitwise operators" 4
-.IX Item "Bitwise operators"
-Arguments are forced into the integer format if not strings.
-.ie n .IP "Bitwise operators during ""use integer""" 4
-.el .IP "Bitwise operators during \f(CWuse integer\fR" 4
-.IX Item "Bitwise operators during use integer"
-forces arguments to integer format. Also shift operations internally use
-signed integers rather than the default unsigned.
-.IP "Operators which expect an integer" 4
-.IX Item "Operators which expect an integer"
-force the argument into the integer format. This is applicable
-to the third and fourth arguments of \f(CW\*(C`sysread\*(C'\fR, for example.
-.IP "Operators which expect a string" 4
-.IX Item "Operators which expect a string"
-force the argument into the string format. For example, this is
-applicable to \f(CW\*(C`printf "%s", $value\*(C'\fR.
-.PP
-Though forcing an argument into a particular form does not change the
-stored number, Perl remembers the result of such conversions. In
-particular, though the first such conversion may be time\-consuming,
-repeated operations will not need to redo the conversion.
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-.IX Header "AUTHOR"
-Ilya Zakharevich \f(CW\*(C`ilya at math.ohio\-state.edu\*(C'\fR
-.PP
-Editorial adjustments by Gurusamy Sarathy <gsar at ActiveState.com>
-.PP
-Updates for 5.8.0 by Nicholas Clark <nick at ccl4.org>
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-overload, perlop
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlsec.1 b/raw/man1/perlsec.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a02e85c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlsec.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,629 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLSEC 1"
-.TH PERLSEC 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlsec \- Perl security
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-Perl is designed to make it easy to program securely even when running
-with extra privileges, like setuid or setgid programs. Unlike most
-command line shells, which are based on multiple substitution passes on
-each line of the script, Perl uses a more conventional evaluation scheme
-with fewer hidden snags. Additionally, because the language has more
-builtin functionality, it can rely less upon external (and possibly
-untrustworthy) programs to accomplish its purposes.
-.PP
-Perl automatically enables a set of special security checks, called \fItaint
-mode\fR, when it detects its program running with differing real and effective
-user or group IDs. The setuid bit in Unix permissions is mode 04000, the
-setgid bit mode 02000; either or both may be set. You can also enable taint
-mode explicitly by using the \fB\-T\fR command line flag. This flag is
-\&\fIstrongly\fR suggested for server programs and any program run on behalf of
-someone else, such as a \s-1CGI\s0 script. Once taint mode is on, it's on for
-the remainder of your script.
-.PP
-While in this mode, Perl takes special precautions called \fItaint
-checks\fR to prevent both obvious and subtle traps. Some of these checks
-are reasonably simple, such as verifying that path directories aren't
-writable by others; careful programmers have always used checks like
-these. Other checks, however, are best supported by the language itself,
-and it is these checks especially that contribute to making a set-id Perl
-program more secure than the corresponding C program.
-.PP
-You may not use data derived from outside your program to affect
-something else outside your program\*(--at least, not by accident. All
-command line arguments, environment variables, locale information (see
-perllocale), results of certain system calls (\fIreaddir()\fR,
-\&\fIreadlink()\fR, the variable of \fIshmread()\fR, the messages returned by
-\&\fImsgrcv()\fR, the password, gcos and shell fields returned by the
-\&\fIgetpwxxx()\fR calls), and all file input are marked as \*(L"tainted\*(R".
-Tainted data may not be used directly or indirectly in any command
-that invokes a sub\-shell, nor in any command that modifies files,
-directories, or processes, \fBwith the following exceptions\fR:
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Arguments to \f(CW\*(C`print\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`syswrite\*(C'\fR are \fBnot\fR checked for taintedness.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Symbolic methods
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $obj->$method(@args);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-and symbolic sub references
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& &{$foo}(@args);
-\& $foo->(@args);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-are not checked for taintedness. This requires extra carefulness
-unless you want external data to affect your control flow. Unless
-you carefully limit what these symbolic values are, people are able
-to call functions \fBoutside\fR your Perl code, such as POSIX::system,
-in which case they are able to run arbitrary external code.
-.PP
-For efficiency reasons, Perl takes a conservative view of
-whether data is tainted. If an expression contains tainted data,
-any subexpression may be considered tainted, even if the value
-of the subexpression is not itself affected by the tainted data.
-.PP
-Because taintedness is associated with each scalar value, some
-elements of an array or hash can be tainted and others not.
-The keys of a hash are never tainted.
-.PP
-For example:
-.PP
-.Vb 8
-\& $arg = shift; # $arg is tainted
-\& $hid = $arg, 'bar'; # $hid is also tainted
-\& $line = <>; # Tainted
-\& $line = <STDIN>; # Also tainted
-\& open FOO, "/home/me/bar" or die $!;
-\& $line = <FOO>; # Still tainted
-\& $path = $ENV{'PATH'}; # Tainted, but see below
-\& $data = 'abc'; # Not tainted
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& system "echo $arg"; # Insecure
-\& system "/bin/echo", $arg; # Considered insecure
-\& # (Perl doesn't know about /bin/echo)
-\& system "echo $hid"; # Insecure
-\& system "echo $data"; # Insecure until PATH set
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $path = $ENV{'PATH'}; # $path now tainted
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $ENV{'PATH'} = '/bin:/usr/bin';
-\& delete @ENV{'IFS', 'CDPATH', 'ENV', 'BASH_ENV'};
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $path = $ENV{'PATH'}; # $path now NOT tainted
-\& system "echo $data"; # Is secure now!
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& open(FOO, "< $arg"); # OK - read-only file
-\& open(FOO, "> $arg"); # Not OK - trying to write
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& open(FOO,"echo $arg|"); # Not OK
-\& open(FOO,"-|")
-\& or exec 'echo', $arg; # Also not OK
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& $shout = `echo $arg`; # Insecure, $shout now tainted
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& unlink $data, $arg; # Insecure
-\& umask $arg; # Insecure
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& exec "echo $arg"; # Insecure
-\& exec "echo", $arg; # Insecure
-\& exec "sh", '-c', $arg; # Very insecure!
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& @files = <*.c>; # insecure (uses readdir() or similar)
-\& @files = glob('*.c'); # insecure (uses readdir() or similar)
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& # In Perl releases older than 5.6.0 the <*.c> and glob('*.c') would
-\& # have used an external program to do the filename expansion; but in
-\& # either case the result is tainted since the list of filenames comes
-\& # from outside of the program.
-.Ve
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& $bad = ($arg, 23); # $bad will be tainted
-\& $arg, `true`; # Insecure (although it isn't really)
-.Ve
-.PP
-If you try to do something insecure, you will get a fatal error saying
-something like \*(L"Insecure dependency\*(R" or \*(L"Insecure \f(CW$ENV\fR{\s-1PATH\s0}\*(R".
-.Sh "Laundering and Detecting Tainted Data"
-.IX Subsection "Laundering and Detecting Tainted Data"
-To test whether a variable contains tainted data, and whose use would
-thus trigger an \*(L"Insecure dependency\*(R" message, you can use the
-\&\fItainted()\fR function of the Scalar::Util module, available in your
-nearby \s-1CPAN\s0 mirror, and included in Perl starting from the release 5.8.0.
-Or you may be able to use the following \f(CW\*(C`is_tainted()\*(C'\fR function.
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& sub is_tainted {
-\& return ! eval { eval("#" . substr(join("", @_), 0, 0)); 1 };
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-This function makes use of the fact that the presence of tainted data
-anywhere within an expression renders the entire expression tainted. It
-would be inefficient for every operator to test every argument for
-taintedness. Instead, the slightly more efficient and conservative
-approach is used that if any tainted value has been accessed within the
-same expression, the whole expression is considered tainted.
-.PP
-But testing for taintedness gets you only so far. Sometimes you have just
-to clear your data's taintedness. Values may be untainted by using them
-as keys in a hash; otherwise the only way to bypass the tainting
-mechanism is by referencing subpatterns from a regular expression match.
-Perl presumes that if you reference a substring using \f(CW$1\fR, \f(CW$2\fR, etc., that
-you knew what you were doing when you wrote the pattern. That means using
-a bit of thought\*(--don't just blindly untaint anything, or you defeat the
-entire mechanism. It's better to verify that the variable has only good
-characters (for certain values of \*(L"good\*(R") rather than checking whether it
-has any bad characters. That's because it's far too easy to miss bad
-characters that you never thought of.
-.PP
-Here's a test to make sure that the data contains nothing but \*(L"word\*(R"
-characters (alphabetics, numerics, and underscores), a hyphen, an at sign,
-or a dot.
-.PP
-.Vb 5
-\& if ($data =~ /^([-\e@\ew.]+)$/) {
-\& $data = $1; # $data now untainted
-\& } else {
-\& die "Bad data in '$data'"; # log this somewhere
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-This is fairly secure because \f(CW\*(C`/\ew+/\*(C'\fR doesn't normally match shell
-metacharacters, nor are dot, dash, or at going to mean something special
-to the shell. Use of \f(CW\*(C`/.+/\*(C'\fR would have been insecure in theory because
-it lets everything through, but Perl doesn't check for that. The lesson
-is that when untainting, you must be exceedingly careful with your patterns.
-Laundering data using regular expression is the \fIonly\fR mechanism for
-untainting dirty data, unless you use the strategy detailed below to fork
-a child of lesser privilege.
-.PP
-The example does not untaint \f(CW$data\fR if \f(CW\*(C`use locale\*(C'\fR is in effect,
-because the characters matched by \f(CW\*(C`\ew\*(C'\fR are determined by the locale.
-Perl considers that locale definitions are untrustworthy because they
-contain data from outside the program. If you are writing a
-locale-aware program, and want to launder data with a regular expression
-containing \f(CW\*(C`\ew\*(C'\fR, put \f(CW\*(C`no locale\*(C'\fR ahead of the expression in the same
-block. See \*(L"\s-1SECURITY\s0\*(R" in perllocale for further discussion and examples.
-.ie n .Sh "Switches On the ""#!"" Line"
-.el .Sh "Switches On the ``#!'' Line"
-.IX Subsection "Switches On the #! Line"
-When you make a script executable, in order to make it usable as a
-command, the system will pass switches to perl from the script's #!
-line. Perl checks that any command line switches given to a setuid
-(or setgid) script actually match the ones set on the #! line. Some
-Unix and Unix-like environments impose a one-switch limit on the #!
-line, so you may need to use something like \f(CW\*(C`\-wU\*(C'\fR instead of \f(CW\*(C`\-w \-U\*(C'\fR
-under such systems. (This issue should arise only in Unix or
-Unix-like environments that support #! and setuid or setgid scripts.)
-.ie n .Sh "Taint mode and @INC"
-.el .Sh "Taint mode and \f(CW at INC\fP"
-.IX Subsection "Taint mode and @INC"
-When the taint mode (\f(CW\*(C`\-T\*(C'\fR) is in effect, the \*(L".\*(R" directory is removed
-from \f(CW at INC\fR, and the environment variables \f(CW\*(C`PERL5LIB\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`PERLLIB\*(C'\fR
-are ignored by Perl. You can still adjust \f(CW at INC\fR from outside the
-program by using the \f(CW\*(C`\-I\*(C'\fR command line option as explained in
-perlrun. The two environment variables are ignored because
-they are obscured, and a user running a program could be unaware that
-they are set, whereas the \f(CW\*(C`\-I\*(C'\fR option is clearly visible and
-therefore permitted.
-.PP
-Another way to modify \f(CW at INC\fR without modifying the program, is to use
-the \f(CW\*(C`lib\*(C'\fR pragma, e.g.:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl -Mlib=/foo program
-.Ve
-.PP
-The benefit of using \f(CW\*(C`\-Mlib=/foo\*(C'\fR over \f(CW\*(C`\-I/foo\*(C'\fR, is that the former
-will automagically remove any duplicated directories, while the later
-will not.
-.Sh "Cleaning Up Your Path"
-.IX Subsection "Cleaning Up Your Path"
-For "Insecure \f(CW$ENV{PATH}\fR" messages, you need to set \f(CW$ENV{'PATH'}\fR to a
-known value, and each directory in the path must be non-writable by others
-than its owner and group. You may be surprised to get this message even
-if the pathname to your executable is fully qualified. This is \fInot\fR
-generated because you didn't supply a full path to the program; instead,
-it's generated because you never set your \s-1PATH\s0 environment variable, or
-you didn't set it to something that was safe. Because Perl can't
-guarantee that the executable in question isn't itself going to turn
-around and execute some other program that is dependent on your \s-1PATH\s0, it
-makes sure you set the \s-1PATH\s0.
-.PP
-The \s-1PATH\s0 isn't the only environment variable which can cause problems.
-Because some shells may use the variables \s-1IFS\s0, \s-1CDPATH\s0, \s-1ENV\s0, and
-\&\s-1BASH_ENV\s0, Perl checks that those are either empty or untainted when
-starting subprocesses. You may wish to add something like this to your
-setid and taint-checking scripts.
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& delete @ENV{qw(IFS CDPATH ENV BASH_ENV)}; # Make %ENV safer
-.Ve
-.PP
-It's also possible to get into trouble with other operations that don't
-care whether they use tainted values. Make judicious use of the file
-tests in dealing with any user-supplied filenames. When possible, do
-opens and such \fBafter\fR properly dropping any special user (or group!)
-privileges. Perl doesn't prevent you from opening tainted filenames for reading,
-so be careful what you print out. The tainting mechanism is intended to
-prevent stupid mistakes, not to remove the need for thought.
-.PP
-Perl does not call the shell to expand wild cards when you pass \fBsystem\fR
-and \fBexec\fR explicit parameter lists instead of strings with possible shell
-wildcards in them. Unfortunately, the \fBopen\fR, \fBglob\fR, and
-backtick functions provide no such alternate calling convention, so more
-subterfuge will be required.
-.PP
-Perl provides a reasonably safe way to open a file or pipe from a setuid
-or setgid program: just create a child process with reduced privilege who
-does the dirty work for you. First, fork a child using the special
-\&\fBopen\fR syntax that connects the parent and child by a pipe. Now the
-child resets its \s-1ID\s0 set and any other per-process attributes, like
-environment variables, umasks, current working directories, back to the
-originals or known safe values. Then the child process, which no longer
-has any special permissions, does the \fBopen\fR or other system call.
-Finally, the child passes the data it managed to access back to the
-parent. Because the file or pipe was opened in the child while running
-under less privilege than the parent, it's not apt to be tricked into
-doing something it shouldn't.
-.PP
-Here's a way to do backticks reasonably safely. Notice how the \fBexec\fR is
-not called with a string that the shell could expand. This is by far the
-best way to call something that might be subjected to shell escapes: just
-never call the shell at all.
-.PP
-.Vb 25
-\& use English '-no_match_vars';
-\& die "Can't fork: $!" unless defined($pid = open(KID, "-|"));
-\& if ($pid) { # parent
-\& while (<KID>) {
-\& # do something
-\& }
-\& close KID;
-\& } else {
-\& my @temp = ($EUID, $EGID);
-\& my $orig_uid = $UID;
-\& my $orig_gid = $GID;
-\& $EUID = $UID;
-\& $EGID = $GID;
-\& # Drop privileges
-\& $UID = $orig_uid;
-\& $GID = $orig_gid;
-\& # Make sure privs are really gone
-\& ($EUID, $EGID) = @temp;
-\& die "Can't drop privileges"
-\& unless $UID == $EUID && $GID eq $EGID;
-\& $ENV{PATH} = "/bin:/usr/bin"; # Minimal PATH.
-\& # Consider sanitizing the environment even more.
-\& exec 'myprog', 'arg1', 'arg2'
-\& or die "can't exec myprog: $!";
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-A similar strategy would work for wildcard expansion via \f(CW\*(C`glob\*(C'\fR, although
-you can use \f(CW\*(C`readdir\*(C'\fR instead.
-.PP
-Taint checking is most useful when although you trust yourself not to have
-written a program to give away the farm, you don't necessarily trust those
-who end up using it not to try to trick it into doing something bad. This
-is the kind of security checking that's useful for set-id programs and
-programs launched on someone else's behalf, like \s-1CGI\s0 programs.
-.PP
-This is quite different, however, from not even trusting the writer of the
-code not to try to do something evil. That's the kind of trust needed
-when someone hands you a program you've never seen before and says, \*(L"Here,
-run this.\*(R" For that kind of safety, check out the Safe module,
-included standard in the Perl distribution. This module allows the
-programmer to set up special compartments in which all system operations
-are trapped and namespace access is carefully controlled.
-.Sh "Security Bugs"
-.IX Subsection "Security Bugs"
-Beyond the obvious problems that stem from giving special privileges to
-systems as flexible as scripts, on many versions of Unix, set-id scripts
-are inherently insecure right from the start. The problem is a race
-condition in the kernel. Between the time the kernel opens the file to
-see which interpreter to run and when the (now\-set\-id) interpreter turns
-around and reopens the file to interpret it, the file in question may have
-changed, especially if you have symbolic links on your system.
-.PP
-Fortunately, sometimes this kernel \*(L"feature\*(R" can be disabled.
-Unfortunately, there are two ways to disable it. The system can simply
-outlaw scripts with any set-id bit set, which doesn't help much.
-Alternately, it can simply ignore the set-id bits on scripts. If the
-latter is true, Perl can emulate the setuid and setgid mechanism when it
-notices the otherwise useless setuid/gid bits on Perl scripts. It does
-this via a special executable called \fBsuidperl\fR that is automatically
-invoked for you if it's needed.
-.PP
-However, if the kernel set-id script feature isn't disabled, Perl will
-complain loudly that your set-id script is insecure. You'll need to
-either disable the kernel set-id script feature, or put a C wrapper around
-the script. A C wrapper is just a compiled program that does nothing
-except call your Perl program. Compiled programs are not subject to the
-kernel bug that plagues set-id scripts. Here's a simple wrapper, written
-in C:
-.PP
-.Vb 6
-\& #define REAL_PATH "/path/to/script"
-\& main(ac, av)
-\& char **av;
-\& {
-\& execv(REAL_PATH, av);
-\& }
-.Ve
-.PP
-Compile this wrapper into a binary executable and then make \fIit\fR rather
-than your script setuid or setgid.
-.PP
-In recent years, vendors have begun to supply systems free of this
-inherent security bug. On such systems, when the kernel passes the name
-of the set-id script to open to the interpreter, rather than using a
-pathname subject to meddling, it instead passes \fI/dev/fd/3\fR. This is a
-special file already opened on the script, so that there can be no race
-condition for evil scripts to exploit. On these systems, Perl should be
-compiled with \f(CW\*(C`\-DSETUID_SCRIPTS_ARE_SECURE_NOW\*(C'\fR. The \fBConfigure\fR
-program that builds Perl tries to figure this out for itself, so you
-should never have to specify this yourself. Most modern releases of
-SysVr4 and \s-1BSD\s0 4.4 use this approach to avoid the kernel race condition.
-.PP
-Prior to release 5.6.1 of Perl, bugs in the code of \fBsuidperl\fR could
-introduce a security hole.
-.Sh "Protecting Your Programs"
-.IX Subsection "Protecting Your Programs"
-There are a number of ways to hide the source to your Perl programs,
-with varying levels of \*(L"security\*(R".
-.PP
-First of all, however, you \fIcan't\fR take away read permission, because
-the source code has to be readable in order to be compiled and
-interpreted. (That doesn't mean that a \s-1CGI\s0 script's source is
-readable by people on the web, though.) So you have to leave the
-permissions at the socially friendly 0755 level. This lets
-people on your local system only see your source.
-.PP
-Some people mistakenly regard this as a security problem. If your program does
-insecure things, and relies on people not knowing how to exploit those
-insecurities, it is not secure. It is often possible for someone to
-determine the insecure things and exploit them without viewing the
-source. Security through obscurity, the name for hiding your bugs
-instead of fixing them, is little security indeed.
-.PP
-You can try using encryption via source filters (Filter::* from \s-1CPAN\s0,
-or Filter::Util::Call and Filter::Simple since Perl 5.8).
-But crackers might be able to decrypt it. You can try using the byte
-code compiler and interpreter described below, but crackers might be
-able to de-compile it. You can try using the native-code compiler
-described below, but crackers might be able to disassemble it. These
-pose varying degrees of difficulty to people wanting to get at your
-code, but none can definitively conceal it (this is true of every
-language, not just Perl).
-.PP
-If you're concerned about people profiting from your code, then the
-bottom line is that nothing but a restrictive licence will give you
-legal security. License your software and pepper it with threatening
-statements like \*(L"This is unpublished proprietary software of \s-1XYZ\s0 Corp.
-Your access to it does not give you permission to use it blah blah
-blah.\*(R" You should see a lawyer to be sure your licence's wording will
-stand up in court.
-.Sh "Unicode"
-.IX Subsection "Unicode"
-Unicode is a new and complex technology and one may easily overlook
-certain security pitfalls. See perluniintro for an overview and
-perlunicode for details, and \*(L"Security Implications of Unicode\*(R" in perlunicode for security implications in particular.
-.Sh "Algorithmic Complexity Attacks"
-.IX Subsection "Algorithmic Complexity Attacks"
-Certain internal algorithms used in the implementation of Perl can
-be attacked by choosing the input carefully to consume large amounts
-of either time or space or both. This can lead into the so-called
-\&\fIDenial of Service\fR (DoS) attacks.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Hash Function \- the algorithm used to \*(L"order\*(R" hash elements has been
-changed several times during the development of Perl, mainly to be
-reasonably fast. In Perl 5.8.1 also the security aspect was taken
-into account.
-.Sp
-In Perls before 5.8.1 one could rather easily generate data that as
-hash keys would cause Perl to consume large amounts of time because
-internal structure of hashes would badly degenerate. In Perl 5.8.1
-the hash function is randomly perturbed by a pseudorandom seed which
-makes generating such naughty hash keys harder.
-See \*(L"\s-1PERL_HASH_SEED\s0\*(R" in perlrun for more information.
-.Sp
-The random perturbation is done by default but if one wants for some
-reason emulate the old behaviour one can set the environment variable
-\&\s-1PERL_HASH_SEED\s0 to zero (or any other integer). One possible reason
-for wanting to emulate the old behaviour is that in the new behaviour
-consecutive runs of Perl will order hash keys differently, which may
-confuse some applications (like Data::Dumper: the outputs of two
-different runs are no more identical).
-.Sp
-\&\fBPerl has never guaranteed any ordering of the hash keys\fR, and the
-ordering has already changed several times during the lifetime of
-Perl 5. Also, the ordering of hash keys has always been, and
-continues to be, affected by the insertion order.
-.Sp
-Also note that while the order of the hash elements might be
-randomised, this \*(L"pseudoordering\*(R" should \fBnot\fR be used for
-applications like shuffling a list randomly (use \fIList::Util::shuffle()\fR
-for that, see List::Util, a standard core module since Perl 5.8.0;
-or the \s-1CPAN\s0 module Algorithm::Numerical::Shuffle), or for generating
-permutations (use e.g. the \s-1CPAN\s0 modules Algorithm::Permute or
-Algorithm::FastPermute), or for any cryptographic applications.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Regular expressions \- Perl's regular expression engine is so called
-\&\s-1NFA\s0 (Non\-Finite Automaton), which among other things means that it can
-rather easily consume large amounts of both time and space if the
-regular expression may match in several ways. Careful crafting of the
-regular expressions can help but quite often there really isn't much
-one can do (the book \*(L"Mastering Regular Expressions\*(R" is required
-reading, see perlfaq2). Running out of space manifests itself by
-Perl running out of memory.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Sorting \- the quicksort algorithm used in Perls before 5.8.0 to
-implement the \fIsort()\fR function is very easy to trick into misbehaving
-so that it consumes a lot of time. Nothing more is required than
-resorting a list already sorted. Starting from Perl 5.8.0 a different
-sorting algorithm, mergesort, is used. Mergesort is insensitive to
-its input data, so it cannot be similarly fooled.
-.PP
-See <http://www.cs.rice.edu/~scrosby/hash/> for more information,
-and any computer science text book on the algorithmic complexity.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-perlrun for its description of cleaning up environment variables.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perlstyle.1 b/raw/man1/perlstyle.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a3e3a66..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perlstyle.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,353 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.14
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLSTYLE 1"
-.TH PERLSTYLE 1 "2003-11-25" "perl v5.8.3" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perlstyle \- Perl style guide
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-Each programmer will, of course, have his or her own preferences in
-regards to formatting, but there are some general guidelines that will
-make your programs easier to read, understand, and maintain.
-.PP
-The most important thing is to run your programs under the \fB\-w\fR
-flag at all times. You may turn it off explicitly for particular
-portions of code via the \f(CW\*(C`no warnings\*(C'\fR pragma or the \f(CW$^W\fR variable
-if you must. You should also always run under \f(CW\*(C`use strict\*(C'\fR or know the
-reason why not. The \f(CW\*(C`use sigtrap\*(C'\fR and even \f(CW\*(C`use diagnostics\*(C'\fR pragmas
-may also prove useful.
-.PP
-Regarding aesthetics of code lay out, about the only thing Larry
-cares strongly about is that the closing curly bracket of
-a multi-line \s-1BLOCK\s0 should line up with the keyword that started the construct.
-Beyond that, he has other preferences that aren't so strong:
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-4\-column indent.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Opening curly on same line as keyword, if possible, otherwise line up.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Space before the opening curly of a multi-line \s-1BLOCK\s0.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-One-line \s-1BLOCK\s0 may be put on one line, including curlies.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-No space before the semicolon.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Semicolon omitted in \*(L"short\*(R" one-line \s-1BLOCK\s0.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Space around most operators.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Space around a \*(L"complex\*(R" subscript (inside brackets).
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Blank lines between chunks that do different things.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Uncuddled elses.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-No space between function name and its opening parenthesis.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Space after each comma.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Long lines broken after an operator (except \*(L"and\*(R" and \*(L"or\*(R").
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Space after last parenthesis matching on current line.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Line up corresponding items vertically.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Omit redundant punctuation as long as clarity doesn't suffer.
-.PP
-Larry has his reasons for each of these things, but he doesn't claim that
-everyone else's mind works the same as his does.
-.PP
-Here are some other more substantive style issues to think about:
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Just because you \fI\s-1CAN\s0\fR do something a particular way doesn't mean that
-you \fI\s-1SHOULD\s0\fR do it that way. Perl is designed to give you several
-ways to do anything, so consider picking the most readable one. For
-instance
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& open(FOO,$foo) || die "Can't open $foo: $!";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-is better than
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& die "Can't open $foo: $!" unless open(FOO,$foo);
-.Ve
-.Sp
-because the second way hides the main point of the statement in a
-modifier. On the other hand
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& print "Starting analysis\en" if $verbose;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-is better than
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& $verbose && print "Starting analysis\en";
-.Ve
-.Sp
-because the main point isn't whether the user typed \fB\-v\fR or not.
-.Sp
-Similarly, just because an operator lets you assume default arguments
-doesn't mean that you have to make use of the defaults. The defaults
-are there for lazy systems programmers writing one-shot programs. If
-you want your program to be readable, consider supplying the argument.
-.Sp
-Along the same lines, just because you \fI\s-1CAN\s0\fR omit parentheses in many
-places doesn't mean that you ought to:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& return print reverse sort num values %array;
-\& return print(reverse(sort num (values(%array))));
-.Ve
-.Sp
-When in doubt, parenthesize. At the very least it will let some poor
-schmuck bounce on the % key in \fBvi\fR.
-.Sp
-Even if you aren't in doubt, consider the mental welfare of the person
-who has to maintain the code after you, and who will probably put
-parentheses in the wrong place.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Don't go through silly contortions to exit a loop at the top or the
-bottom, when Perl provides the \f(CW\*(C`last\*(C'\fR operator so you can exit in
-the middle. Just \*(L"outdent\*(R" it a little to make it more visible:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& LINE:
-\& for (;;) {
-\& statements;
-\& last LINE if $foo;
-\& next LINE if /^#/;
-\& statements;
-\& }
-.Ve
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Don't be afraid to use loop labels\*(--they're there to enhance
-readability as well as to allow multilevel loop breaks. See the
-previous example.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Avoid using \fIgrep()\fR (or \fImap()\fR) or `backticks` in a void context, that is,
-when you just throw away their return values. Those functions all
-have return values, so use them. Otherwise use a \fIforeach()\fR loop or
-the \fIsystem()\fR function instead.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-For portability, when using features that may not be implemented on
-every machine, test the construct in an eval to see if it fails. If
-you know what version or patchlevel a particular feature was
-implemented, you can test \f(CW$]\fR (\f(CW$PERL_VERSION\fR in \f(CW\*(C`English\*(C'\fR) to see if it
-will be there. The \f(CW\*(C`Config\*(C'\fR module will also let you interrogate values
-determined by the \fBConfigure\fR program when Perl was installed.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Choose mnemonic identifiers. If you can't remember what mnemonic means,
-you've got a problem.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-While short identifiers like \f(CW$gotit\fR are probably ok, use underscores to
-separate words. It is generally easier to read \f(CW$var_names_like_this\fR than
-\&\f(CW$VarNamesLikeThis\fR, especially for non-native speakers of English. It's
-also a simple rule that works consistently with \s-1VAR_NAMES_LIKE_THIS\s0.
-.Sp
-Package names are sometimes an exception to this rule. Perl informally
-reserves lowercase module names for \*(L"pragma\*(R" modules like \f(CW\*(C`integer\*(C'\fR and
-\&\f(CW\*(C`strict\*(C'\fR. Other modules should begin with a capital letter and use mixed
-case, but probably without underscores due to limitations in primitive
-file systems' representations of module names as files that must fit into a
-few sparse bytes.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-You may find it helpful to use letter case to indicate the scope
-or nature of a variable. For example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& $ALL_CAPS_HERE constants only (beware clashes with perl vars!)
-\& $Some_Caps_Here package-wide global/static
-\& $no_caps_here function scope my() or local() variables
-.Ve
-.Sp
-Function and method names seem to work best as all lowercase.
-E.g., \f(CW$obj\fR\->\fIas_string()\fR.
-.Sp
-You can use a leading underscore to indicate that a variable or
-function should not be used outside the package that defined it.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-If you have a really hairy regular expression, use the \f(CW\*(C`/x\*(C'\fR modifier and
-put in some whitespace to make it look a little less like line noise.
-Don't use slash as a delimiter when your regexp has slashes or backslashes.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Use the new \*(L"and\*(R" and \*(L"or\*(R" operators to avoid having to parenthesize
-list operators so much, and to reduce the incidence of punctuation
-operators like \f(CW\*(C`&&\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`||\*(C'\fR. Call your subroutines as if they were
-functions or list operators to avoid excessive ampersands and parentheses.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Use here documents instead of repeated \fIprint()\fR statements.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Line up corresponding things vertically, especially if it'd be too long
-to fit on one line anyway.
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& $IDX = $ST_MTIME;
-\& $IDX = $ST_ATIME if $opt_u;
-\& $IDX = $ST_CTIME if $opt_c;
-\& $IDX = $ST_SIZE if $opt_s;
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 3
-\& mkdir $tmpdir, 0700 or die "can't mkdir $tmpdir: $!";
-\& chdir($tmpdir) or die "can't chdir $tmpdir: $!";
-\& mkdir 'tmp', 0777 or die "can't mkdir $tmpdir/tmp: $!";
-.Ve
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Always check the return codes of system calls. Good error messages should
-go to \s-1STDERR\s0, include which program caused the problem, what the failed
-system call and arguments were, and (\s-1VERY\s0 \s-1IMPORTANT\s0) should contain the
-standard system error message for what went wrong. Here's a simple but
-sufficient example:
-.Sp
-.Vb 1
-\& opendir(D, $dir) or die "can't opendir $dir: $!";
-.Ve
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Line up your transliterations when it makes sense:
-.Sp
-.Vb 2
-\& tr [abc]
-\& [xyz];
-.Ve
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Think about reusability. Why waste brainpower on a one-shot when you
-might want to do something like it again? Consider generalizing your
-code. Consider writing a module or object class. Consider making your
-code run cleanly with \f(CW\*(C`use strict\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`use warnings\*(C'\fR (or \fB\-w\fR) in
-effect. Consider giving away your code. Consider changing your whole
-world view. Consider... oh, never mind.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Be consistent.
-.IP "\(bu" 4
-Be nice.
diff --git a/raw/man1/perltw.1 b/raw/man1/perltw.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8668637..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/perltw.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,271 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.if n .na
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "PERLTW 1"
-.TH PERLTW 1 "2003-09-02" "perl v5.8.1" "Perl Programmers Reference Guide"
-.SH "NAME"
-perltw \- ���餤�� Perl ���n
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-�w��Ө� Perl ���Ѧa!
-.PP
-�q 5.8.0 ���}�l, Perl ��ƤF������ Unicode (�U��X) �䴩,
-�]�s�a�䴩�F�\e�h�ԤB�y�t�H�~���s�X�覡; \s-1CJK\s0 (������) �K�O�䤤���@����.
-Unicode �O��کʪ��з�, �չϲ[�\e�@�ɤW�Ҧ����r��: ���@��, �F��@��,
-�H�Ψ�̶����@�� (��þ��, �ԧQ�Ȥ�, ���ԧB��, �ƧB�Ӥ�, �L�פ�,
-�L�a�w��, ����). ���]�e�ǤF�h�ا@�~�t�λP���O (�p \s-1PC\s0 �γ�����).
-.PP
-Perl �����H Unicode �i��ާ@. �o��� Perl �������r���ƥi�� Unicode
-���; Perl ���禡�P��� (�Ҧp���W��ܦ����) �]��� Unicode �i��ާ@.
-�b��J�ο�X��, ���F�B�z�H Unicode ���e���s�X�覡�x�s�����, Perl
-���ѤF Encode �o�ӼҲ�, �i�H���A�����aŪ���μg�J�¦����s�X���.
-.PP
-Encode �����Ҳդ䴩�U�C���餤�媺�s�X�覡 ('big5' ��� 'big5\-eten'):
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& big5-eten Big5 �s�X (�t�ʤѩ����r��)
-\& big5-hkscs Big5 + ����~�r��, 2001 �~��
-\& cp950 �r�X�� 950 (Big5 + �L�n�K�[���r��)
-.Ve
-.PP
-�|�Ҩӻ�, �N Big5 �s�X���ɮ��ন Unicode, ������J�U�C���O:
-.PP
-.Vb 1
-\& perl -Mencoding=big5,STDOUT,utf8 -pe1 < file.big5 > file.utf8
-.Ve
-.PP
-Perl �]�����F \*(L"piconv\*(R", �@�䧹���H Perl �g�����r���ഫ�u��{��, �Ϊk�p�U:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& piconv -f big5 -t utf8 < file.big5 > file.utf8
-\& piconv -f utf8 -t big5 < file.utf8 > file.big5
-.Ve
-.PP
-�t�~, �Q�� encoding �Ҳ�, �A�i�H�����g�X�H�r�Ŭ���쪺�{���X, �p�U�ҥ�:
-.PP
-.Vb 7
-\& #!/usr/bin/env perl
-\& # �Ұ� big5 �r��ѪR; �зǿ�X�J�μзǿ��~���]�� big5 �s�X
-\& use encoding 'big5', STDIN => 'big5', STDOUT => 'big5';
-\& print length("�d�m"); # 2 (������ܦr��)
-\& print length('�d�m'); # 4 (�����ܦ줸��)
-\& print index("�ναл�", "να"); # -1 (���]�t���l�r��)
-\& print index('�ναл�', 'να'); # 1 (�q�ĤG�Ӧ줸�ն}�l)
-.Ve
-.PP
-�b�̫�@�C�Ҥl��, \*(L"��\*(R" ���ĤG�Ӧ줸�ջP \*(L"��\*(R" ���Ĥ@�Ӧ줸�յ��X�� Big5
-�X�� \*(L"ν\*(R"; \*(L"��\*(R" ���ĤG�Ӧ줸�իh�P \*(L"��\*(R" ���Ĥ@�Ӧ줸�յ��X�� \*(L"α\*(R".
-�o�ѨM�F�H�e Big5 �X���B�z�W�`�������D.
-.Sh "�B�~������s�X"
-.IX Subsection "�B�~������s�X"
-�p�G�ݭn��h������s�X, �i�H�q \s-1CPAN\s0 (<http://www.cpan.org/>) �U��
-Encode::HanExtra �Ҳ�. ���ثe���ѤU�C�s�X�覡:
-.PP
-.Vb 4
-\& cccii 1980 �~��ط|�������T�洫�X
-\& euc-tw Unix �����r�Ŷ�, �]�t CNS11643 ���� 1-7
-\& big5plus ����Ʀ�ƧN���s����|�� Big5+
-\& big5ext ����Ʀ�ƧN���s����|�� Big5e
-.Ve
-.PP
-�t�~, Encode::HanConvert �Ҳիh���ѤF²�c�ഫ�Ϊ���ؽs�X:
-.PP
-.Vb 2
-\& big5-simp Big5 ���餤��P Unicode ²�餤�夬��
-\& gbk-trad GBK ²�餤��P Unicode ���餤�夬��
-.Ve
-.PP
-�Y�Q�b \s-1GBK\s0 �P Big5 ��������, �аѦҸӼҲդ����� b2g.pl �P g2b.pl ���{��,
-�Φb�{�����ϥΤU�C�g�k:
-.PP
-.Vb 3
-\& use Encode::HanConvert;
-\& $euc_cn = big5_to_gb($big5); # �q Big5 �ର GBK
-\& $big5 = gb_to_big5($euc_cn); # �q GBK �ର Big5
-.Ve
-.Sh "�i�@�B����T"
-.IX Subsection "�i�@�B����T"
-�аѦ� Perl �������j�q������� (�������O�έ^��g��), �ӾDzߧ�h����
-Perl ������, �H�� Unicode ���ϥΤ覡. ���L, �~�����귽�۷��״I:
-.Sh "���� Perl �귽����}"
-.IX Subsection "���� Perl �귽����}"
-.IP "<http://www.perl.com/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.perl.com/>"
-Perl ������ (�Ѽڵ�§���q���@)
-.IP "<http://www.cpan.org/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.cpan.org/>"
-Perl ��X���ú� (Comprehensive Perl Archive Network)
-.IP "<http://lists.perl.org/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://lists.perl.org/>"
-Perl �l���¤@��
-.Sh "�Dz� Perl ����}"
-.IX Subsection "�Dz� Perl ����}"
-.IP "<http://www.oreilly.com.tw/chinese/perl/index.html>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.oreilly.com.tw/chinese/perl/index.html>"
-���餤�媩���ڵ�§ Perl ����
-.IP "<http://groups.google.com/groups?q=tw.bbs.comp.lang.perl>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://groups.google.com/groups?q=tw.bbs.comp.lang.perl>"
-�O�W Perl �s�u�Q�װ� (�]�N�O�U�j \s-1BBS\s0 �� Perl �s�u��)
-.Sh "Perl �ϥΪ̶��|"
-.IX Subsection "Perl �ϥΪ̶��|"
-.IP "<http://www.pm.org/groups/asia.shtml#Taiwan>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.pm.org/groups/asia.shtml#Taiwan>"
-�O�W Perl ���s�դ@��
-.IP "<http://irc.elixus.org/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://irc.elixus.org/>"
-���ߨ�u�W��ѫ�
-.Sh "Unicode ������}"
-.IX Subsection "Unicode ������}"
-.IP "<http://www.unicode.org/>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.unicode.org/>"
-Unicode �dzN�Ƿ| (Unicode �зǪ���w��)
-.IP "<http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/%7Emgk25/unicode.html>" 4
-.IX Item "<http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/%7Emgk25/unicode.html>"
-Unix/Linux �W�� \s-1UTF\-8\s0 �� Unicode ���Ȱ�
-.Sh "����Ƹ�T"
-.IX Subsection "����Ƹ�T"
-.ie n .IP "������s ""���餤��"" ���s ""�c�餤��""?" 4
-.el .IP "������s ``���餤��'' ���s ``�c�餤��''?" 4
-.IX Item "������s ���餤�� ���s �c�餤��?"
-<http://www.csie.ntu.edu.tw/~b7506051/mozilla/faq.html#faqglossary>
-.IP "����Ƴn���p��" 4
-.IX Item "����Ƴn���p��"
-<http://www.cpatch.org/>
-.IP "Linux �n�餤��ƭp��" 4
-.IX Item "Linux �n�餤��ƭp��"
-<http://www.linux.org.tw/CLDP/>
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-Encode, Encode::TW, encoding, perluniintro, perlunicode
-.SH "AUTHORS"
-.IX Header "AUTHORS"
-Jarkko Hietaniemi <jhi at iki.fi>
-.PP
-Autrijus Tang (��v�~) <autrijus at autrijus.org>
diff --git a/raw/man1/pg_controldata.1 b/raw/man1/pg_controldata.1
deleted file mode 100644
index df0afed..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pg_controldata.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PG_CONTROLDATA" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-pg_controldata \- display control information of a PostgreSQL database cluster
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpg_controldata\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpg_controldata\fR prints information initialized during
-\fBinitdb\fR, such as the catalog version and server locale.
-It also shows information about write-ahead logging and checkpoint
-processing. This information is cluster-wide, and not specific to any one
-database.
-.PP
-This utility may only be run by the user who initialized the cluster because
-it requires read access to the data directory.
-You can specify the data directory on the command line, or use
-the environment variable \fBPGDATA\fR.
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATA\fR
-Default data directory location
diff --git a/raw/man1/pg_ctl.1 b/raw/man1/pg_ctl.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b78e2d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pg_ctl.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,239 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PG_CTL" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-pg_ctl \- start, stop, or restart a PostgreSQL server
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpg_ctl\fR \fBstart\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-w \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-s \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-l \fIfilename\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-o \fIoptions\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-p \fIpath\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBpg_ctl\fR \fBstop\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-W \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-s \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-m \fR\fB s[mart]\fR | \fBf[ast]\fR | \fBi[mmediate]\fR\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBpg_ctl\fR \fBrestart\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-w \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-s \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-m \fR\fB s[mart]\fR | \fBf[ast]\fR | \fBi[mmediate]\fR\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-o \fIoptions\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBpg_ctl\fR \fBreload\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-s \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBpg_ctl\fR \fBstatus\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpg_ctl\fR is a utility for starting,
-stopping, or restarting the PostgreSQL
-backend server (\fBpostmaster\fR(1)), or displaying the
-status of a running server. Although the server can be started
-manually, \fBpg_ctl\fR encapsulates tasks such
-as redirecting log output and properly detaching from the terminal
-and process group. It also provides convenient options for
-controlled shutdown.
-.PP
-In \fBstart\fR mode, a new server is launched. The
-server is started in the background, and standard input is attached to
-\fI/dev/null\fR. The standard output and standard
-error are either appended to a log file (if the \fB-l\fR
-option is used), or redirected to \fBpg_ctl\fR's
-standard output (not standard error). If no log file is chosen, the
-standard output of \fBpg_ctl\fR should be redirected
-to a file or piped to another process, for example a log rotating program,
-otherwise \fBpostmaster\fR will write its output to the controlling
-terminal (from the background) and will not leave the shell's
-process group.
-.PP
-In \fBstop\fR mode, the server that is running in
-the specified data directory is shut down. Three different
-shutdown methods can be selected with the \fB-m\fR
-option: ``Smart'' mode waits for all the clients to
-disconnect. This is the default. ``Fast'' mode does
-not wait for clients to disconnect. All active transactions are
-rolled back and clients are forcibly disconnected, then the
-server is shut down. ``Immediate'' mode will abort
-all server processes without a clean shutdown. This will lead to
-a recovery run on restart.
-.PP
-\fBrestart\fR mode effectively executes a stop followed
-by a start. This allows changing the \fBpostmaster\fR
-command-line options.
-.PP
-\fBreload\fR mode simply sends the
-\fBpostmaster\fR process a \fBSIGHUP\fR
-signal, causing it to reread its configuration files
-(\fIpostgresql.conf\fR,
-\fIpg_hba.conf\fR, etc.). This allows changing of
-configuration-file options that do not require a complete restart
-to take effect.
-.PP
-\fBstatus\fR mode checks whether a server is running in
-the specified data directory. If it is, the PID
-and the command line options that were used to invoke it are
-displayed.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB\fR
-Specifies the file system location of the database files. If
-this is omitted, the environment variable
-\fBPGDATA\fR is used.
-.TP
-\fB-l \fIfilename\fB\fR
-Append the server log output to
-\fIfilename\fR. If the file does not
-exist, it is created. The \fBumask\fR is set to 077, so access to
-the log file from other users is disallowed by default.
-.TP
-\fB-m \fImode\fB\fR
-Specifies the shutdown mode. \fImode\fR
-may be smart, fast, or
-immediate, or the first letter of one of
-these three.
-.TP
-\fB-o \fIoptions\fB\fR
-Specifies options to be passed directly to the
-\fBpostmaster\fR command.
-
-The options are usually surrounded by single or double
-quotes to ensure that they are passed through as a group.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIpath\fB\fR
-Specifies the location of the \fIpostmaster\fR
-executable. By default the \fIpostmaster\fR executable is taken from the same
-directory as \fBpg_ctl\fR, or failing that, the hard-wired
-installation directory. It is not necessary to use this
-option unless you are doing something unusual and get errors
-that the \fIpostmaster\fR executable was not found.
-.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-Only print errors, no informational messages.
-.TP
-\fB-w\fR
-Wait for the start or shutdown to complete. Times out after
-60 seconds. This is the default for shutdowns. A successful
-shutdown is indicated by removal of the PID
-file. For starting up, a successful \fBpsql -l\fR
-indicates success. \fBpg_ctl\fR will attempt to
-use the proper port for \fBpsql\fR. If the environment variable
-\fBPGPORT\fR exists, that is used. Otherwise, it will see if a port
-has been set in the \fIpostgresql.conf\fR file.
-If neither of those is used, it will use the default port that
-PostgreSQL was compiled with
-(5432 by default).
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-Do not wait for start or shutdown to complete. This is the
-default for starts and restarts.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATA\fR
-Default data directory location.
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-Default port for \fBpsql\fR(1) (used by the -w option).
-.PP
-For others, see \fBpostmaster\fR(1).
-.PP
-.SH "FILES"
-.TP
-\fB\fIpostmaster.pid\fB\fR
-The existence of this file in the data directory is used to help
-\fBpg_ctl\fR determine if the server is
-currently running or not.
-.TP
-\fB\fIpostmaster.opts.default\fB\fR
-If this file exists in the data directory,
-\fBpg_ctl\fR (in \fBstart\fR
-mode) will pass the contents of the file as options to the
-\fBpostmaster\fR command, unless overridden by the
-\fB-o\fR option.
-.TP
-\fB\fIpostmaster.opts\fB\fR
-If this file exists in the data directory,
-\fBpg_ctl\fR (in \fBrestart\fR mode)
-will pass the contents of the file as options to the
-\fBpostmaster\fR, unless overridden
-by the \fB-o\fR option. The contents of this file
-are also displayed in \fBstatus\fR mode.
-.TP
-\fB\fIpostgresql.conf\fB\fR
-This file, located in the data directory, is parsed to find the
-proper port to use with \fBpsql\fR when the
-\fB-w\fR is given in \fBstart\fR mode.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Waiting for complete start is not a well-defined operation and may
-fail if access control is set up so that a local client cannot
-connect without manual interaction (e.g., password authentication).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.SS "STARTING THE SERVER"
-.PP
-To start up a server:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl start\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-An example of starting the server, blocking until the server has
-come up is:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl -w start\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-For a server using port 5433, and
-running without \fBfsync\fR, use:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl -o "-F -p 5433" start\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SS "STOPPING THE SERVER"
-.PP
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl stop\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-stops the server. Using the \fB-m\fR switch allows one
-to control \fBhow\fR the backend shuts down.
-.SS "RESTARTING THE SERVER"
-.PP
-Restarting the server is almost equivalent to stopping the
-server and starting it again
-except that \fBpg_ctl\fR saves and reuses the command line options that
-were passed to the previously running instance. To restart
-the server in the simplest form, use:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl restart\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To restart server,
-waiting for it to shut down and to come up:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl -w restart\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To restart using port 5433 and disabling \fBfsync\fR after restarting:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl -o "-F -p 5433" restart\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SS "SHOWING THE SERVER STATUS"
-.PP
-Here is a sample status output from
-\fBpg_ctl\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_ctl status\fR
-pg_ctl: postmaster is running (pid: 13718)
-Command line was:
-/usr/local/pgsql/bin/postmaster '-D' '/usr/local/pgsql/data' '-p' '5433' '-B' '128'
-.sp
-.fi
-This is the command line that would be invoked in restart mode.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-\fBpostmaster\fR(1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/pg_dump.1 b/raw/man1/pg_dump.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 031c98e..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pg_dump.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,411 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PG_DUMP" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-pg_dump \- extract a PostgreSQL database into a script file or other archive file
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpg_dump\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdbname\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpg_dump\fR is a utility for backing up a
-PostgreSQL database. It makes consistent
-backups even if the database is being used concurrently.
-\fBpg_dump\fR does not block other users
-accessing the database (readers or writers).
-.PP
-Dumps can be output in script or archive file formats. The script
-files are in plain-text format and contain the SQL commands required
-to reconstruct the database to the state it was in at the time it was
-saved. To restore these scripts, use \fBpsql\fR(1). They
-can be used to reconstruct the database even on other machines and
-other architectures, with some modifications even on other SQL
-database products.
-.PP
-The alternative archive file formats that are meant to be used with
-\fBpg_restore\fR(1) to rebuild the database, and they also
-allow \fBpg_restore\fR to be selective about
-what is restored, or even to reorder the items prior to being
-restored. The archive files are also designed to be portable across
-architectures.
-.PP
-When used with one of the archive file formats and combined with
-\fBpg_restore\fR,
-\fBpg_dump\fR provides a flexible archival and
-transfer mechanism. \fBpg_dump\fR can be used to
-backup an entire database, then \fBpg_restore\fR
-can be used to examine the archive and/or select which parts of the
-database are to be restored. The most flexible output file format is
-the ``custom'' format (\fB-Fc\fR). It allows
-for selection and reordering of all archived items, and is compressed
-by default. The \fBtar\fR format
-(\fB-Ft\fR) is not compressed and it is not possible to
-reorder data when loading, but it is otherwise quite flexible;
-moreover, it can be manipulated with other tools such as
-\fBtar\fR.
-.PP
-While running \fBpg_dump\fR, one should examine the
-output for any warnings (printed on standard error), especially in
-light of the limitations listed below.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The following command-line options are used to control the output format.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the database to be dumped. If this is
-not specified, the environment variable
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR is used. If that is not set, the
-user name specified for the connection is used.
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-.TP
-\fB--data-only\fR
-Dump only the data, not the schema (data definitions).
-
-This option is only meaningful for the plain-text format. For
-the other formats, you may specify the option when you
-call \fBpg_restore\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-b\fR
-.TP
-\fB--blobs\fR
-Include large objects in dump.
-.TP
-\fB-c\fR
-.TP
-\fB--clean\fR
-Output commands to clean (drop)
-database objects prior to (the commands for) creating them.
-
-This option is only meaningful for the plain-text format. For
-the other formats, you may specify the option when you
-call \fBpg_restore\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-C\fR
-.TP
-\fB--create\fR
-Begin the output with a command to create the
-database itself and reconnect to the created database. (With a
-script of this form, it doesn't matter which database you connect
-to before running the script.)
-
-This option is only meaningful for the plain-text format. For
-the other formats, you may specify the option when you
-call \fBpg_restore\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-d\fR
-.TP
-\fB--inserts\fR
-Dump data as \fBINSERT\fR commands (rather
-than \fBCOPY\fR). This will make restoration very
-slow, but it makes the archives more portable to other SQL database
-packages.
-.TP
-\fB-D\fR
-.TP
-\fB--column-inserts\fR
-.TP
-\fB--attribute-inserts\fR
-Dump data as \fBINSERT\fR commands with explicit
-column names (INSERT INTO
-\fItable\fR
-(\fIcolumn\fR, ...) VALUES
-\&...). This will make restoration very slow,
-but it is necessary if you desire to rearrange the column ordering.
-.TP
-\fB-f \fIfile\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--file=\fIfile\fB\fR
-Send output to the specified file. If this is omitted, the
-standard output is used.
-.TP
-\fB-F \fIformat\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--format=\fIformat\fB\fR
-Selects the format of the output.
-\fIformat\fR can be one of the following:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBp\fR
-Output a plain-text SQL script file (default)
-.TP
-\fBt\fR
-Output a \fBtar\fR archive suitable for input into
-\fBpg_restore\fR. Using this archive format
-allows reordering and/or exclusion of schema elements
-at the time the database is restored. It is also possible to limit
-which data is reloaded at restore time.
-.TP
-\fBc\fR
-Output a custom archive suitable for input into
-\fBpg_restore\fR. This is the most flexible
-format in that it allows reordering of data load as well
-as schema elements. This format is also compressed by default.
-.RE
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB-i\fR
-.TP
-\fB--ignore-version\fR
-Ignore version mismatch between
-\fBpg_dump\fR and the database server.
-
-\fBpg_dump\fR can handle databases from
-previous releases of PostgreSQL, but very old
-versions are not supported anymore (currently prior to 7.0).
-Use this option if you need to override the version check (and
-if \fBpg_dump\fR then fails, don't say
-you weren't warned).
-.TP
-\fB-n \fInamespace\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--schema=\fIschema\fB\fR
-Dump the contents of \fIschema\fR
-only. If this option is not specified, all non-system schemas
-in the target database will be dumped.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-In this mode, \fBpg_dump\fR makes no
-attempt to dump any other database objects that objects in the
-selected schema may depend upon. Therefore, there is no
-guarantee that the results of a single-schema dump can be
-successfully restored by themselves into a clean database.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB-o\fR
-.TP
-\fB--oids\fR
-Dump object identifiers (OIDs) for every
-table. Use this option if your application references the OID
-columns in some way (e.g., in a foreign key constraint).
-Otherwise, this option should not be used.
-.TP
-\fB-O\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-owner\fR
-Do not output commands to set
-ownership of objects to match the original database.
-By default, \fBpg_dump\fR issues
-\fBSET SESSION AUTHORIZATION\fR
-statements to set ownership of created schema elements.
-These statements
-will fail when the script is run unless it is started by a superuser
-(or the same user that owns all of the objects in the script).
-To make a script that can be restored by any user, but will give
-that user ownership of all the objects, specify \fB-O\fR.
-
-This option is only meaningful for the plain-text format. For
-the other formats, you may specify the option when you
-call \fBpg_restore\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-R\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-reconnect\fR
-This option is obsolete but still accepted for backwards
-compatibility.
-.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-.TP
-\fB--schema-only\fR
-Dump only the schema (data definitions), no data.
-.TP
-\fB-S \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--superuser=\fIusername\fB\fR
-Specify the superuser user name to use when disabling triggers.
-This is only relevant if \fB--disable-triggers\fR is used.
-(Usually, it's better to leave this out, and instead start the
-resulting script as superuser.)
-.TP
-\fB-t \fItable\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--table=\fItable\fB\fR
-Dump data for \fItable\fR
-only. It is possible for there to be
-multiple tables with the same name in different schemas; if that
-is the case, all matching tables will be dumped. Specify both
-\fB--schema\fR and \fB--table\fR to select just one table.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-In this mode, \fBpg_dump\fR makes no
-attempt to dump any other database objects that the selected table
-may depend upon. Therefore, there is no guarantee
-that the results of a single-table dump can be successfully
-restored by themselves into a clean database.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-.TP
-\fB--verbose\fR
-Specifies verbose mode. This will cause
-\fBpg_dump\fR to print progress messages
-to standard error.
-.TP
-\fB-x\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-privileges\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-acl\fR
-Prevent dumping of access privileges (grant/revoke commands).
-.TP
-\fB-X use-set-session-authorization\fR
-.TP
-\fB--use-set-session-authorization\fR
-This option is obsolete but still accepted for backwards
-compatibility.
-\fBpg_dump\fR now always behaves in the
-way formerly selected by this option.
-.TP
-\fB-X disable-triggers\fR
-.TP
-\fB--disable-triggers\fR
-This option is only relevant when creating a data-only dump.
-It instructs \fBpg_dump\fR to include commands
-to temporarily disable triggers on the target tables while
-the data is reloaded. Use this if you have referential
-integrity checks or other triggers on the tables that you
-do not want to invoke during data reload.
-
-Presently, the commands emitted for \fB--disable-triggers\fR
-must be done as superuser. So, you should also specify
-a superuser name with \fB-S\fR, or preferably be careful to
-start the resulting script as a superuser.
-
-This option is only meaningful for the plain-text format. For
-the other formats, you may specify the option when you
-call \fBpg_restore\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-Z \fI0..9\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--compress=\fI0..9\fB\fR
-Specify the compression level to use in archive formats that
-support compression. (Currently only the custom archive
-format supports compression.)
-.PP
-.PP
-The following command-line options control the database connection parameters.
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host=\fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the server is
-running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used as the
-directory for the Unix domain socket. The default is taken
-from the \fBPGHOST\fR environment variable, if set,
-else a Unix domain socket connection is attempted.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port=\fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server is listening for connections.
-Defaults to the \fBPGPORT\fR environment variable, if
-set, or a compiled-in default.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-Connect as the given user
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-Force a password prompt. This should happen automatically if
-the server requires password authentication.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters.
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-\fBpg_dump\fR internally executes
-\fBSELECT\fR statements. If you have problems running
-\fBpg_dump\fR, make sure you are able to
-select information from the database using, for example, \fBpsql\fR(1).
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-If your database cluster has any local additions to the template1 database,
-be careful to restore the output of \fBpg_dump\fR into a
-truly empty database; otherwise you are likely to get errors due to
-duplicate definitions of the added objects. To make an empty database
-without any local additions, copy from template0 not template1,
-for example:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE DATABASE foo WITH TEMPLATE template0;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-\fBpg_dump\fR has a few limitations:
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-When dumping a single table or as plain text, \fBpg_dump\fR
-does not handle large objects. Large objects must be dumped with the
-entire database using one of the non-text archive formats.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-When a data-only dump is chosen and the option
-\fB--disable-triggers\fR is used,
-\fBpg_dump\fR emits commands to disable
-triggers on user tables before inserting the data and commands
-to re-enable them after the data has been inserted. If the
-restore is stopped in the middle, the system catalogs may be
-left in the wrong state.
-.PP
-.PP
-Members of tar archives are limited to a size less than 8 GB.
-(This is an inherent limitation of the tar file format.) Therefore
-this format cannot be used if the textual representation of a table
-exceeds that size. The total size of a tar archive and any of the
-other output formats is not limited, except possibly by the
-operating system.
-.PP
-Once restored, it is wise to run \fBANALYZE\fR on each
-restored table so the optimizer has useful statistics.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To dump a database:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_dump mydb > db.out\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To reload this database:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpsql -d database -f db.out\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To dump a database called mydb that contains
-large objects to a \fItar\fR file:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_dump -Ft -b mydb > db.tar\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To reload this database (with large objects) to an
-existing database called newdb:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_restore -d newdb db.tar\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "HISTORY"
-.PP
-The \fBpg_dump\fR utility first appeared in
-\fBPostgres95\fR release 0.02. The
-non-plain-text output formats were introduced in
-PostgreSQL release 7.1.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR(1), \fBpg_restore\fR(1), \fBpsql\fR(1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/pg_dumpall.1 b/raw/man1/pg_dumpall.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b643f22..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pg_dumpall.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,187 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PG_DUMPALL" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-pg_dumpall \- extract a PostgreSQL database cluster into a script file
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR is a utility for writing out
-(``dumping'') all PostgreSQL databases
-of a cluster into one script file. The script file contains
-SQL commands that can be used as input to \fBpsql\fR(1) to restore the databases. It does this by
-calling \fBpg_dump\fR(1) for each database in a cluster.
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR also dumps global objects
-that are common to all databases.
-(\fBpg_dump\fR does not save these objects.)
-This currently includes information about database users and
-groups, and access permissions that apply to databases as a whole.
-.PP
-Thus, \fBpg_dumpall\fR is an integrated
-solution for backing up your databases. But note a limitation:
-it cannot dump ``large objects'', since
-\fBpg_dump\fR cannot dump such objects into
-text files. If you have databases containing large objects,
-they should be dumped using one of \fBpg_dump\fR's
-non-text output modes.
-.PP
-Since \fBpg_dumpall\fR reads tables from all
-databases you will most likely have to connect as a database
-superuser in order to produce a complete dump. Also you will need
-superuser privileges to execute the saved script in order to be
-allowed to add users and groups, and to create databases.
-.PP
-The SQL script will be written to the standard output. Shell
-operators should be used to redirect it into a file.
-.PP
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR needs to connect several
-times to the PostgreSQL server and might be asking for
-a password each time. It is convenient to have a
-\fI$HOME/.pgpass\fR file in such cases.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The following command-line options are used to control the content and
-format of the output.
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-.TP
-\fB--data-only\fR
-Dump only the data, not the schema (data definitions).
-.TP
-\fB-c\fR
-.TP
-\fB--clean\fR
-Include SQL commands to clean (drop) the databases before
-recreating them.
-.TP
-\fB-d\fR
-.TP
-\fB--inserts\fR
-Dump data as \fBINSERT\fR commands (rather
-than \fBCOPY\fR). This will make restoration very
-slow, but it makes the output more portable to other SQL database
-packages.
-.TP
-\fB-D\fR
-.TP
-\fB--column-inserts\fR
-.TP
-\fB--attribute-inserts\fR
-Dump data as \fBINSERT\fR commands with explicit
-column names (INSERT INTO
-\fItable\fR
-(\fIcolumn\fR, ...) VALUES
-\&...). This will make restoration very slow,
-but it is necessary if you desire to rearrange column ordering.
-.TP
-\fB-g\fR
-.TP
-\fB--globals-only\fR
-Dump only global objects (users and groups), no databases.
-.TP
-\fB-i\fR
-.TP
-\fB--ignore-version\fR
-Ignore version mismatch between
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR and the database server.
-
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR can handle databases
-from previous releases of PostgreSQL, but very
-old versions are not supported anymore (currently prior to
-7.0). Use this option if you need to override the version
-check (and if \fBpg_dumpall\fR then
-fails, don't say you weren't warned).
-.TP
-\fB-o\fR
-.TP
-\fB--oids\fR
-Dump object identifiers (OIDs) for every
-table. Use this option if your application references the OID
-columns in some way (e.g., in a foreign key constraint).
-Otherwise, this option should not be used.
-.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-.TP
-\fB--schema-only\fR
-Dump only the schema (data definitions), no data.
-.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-.TP
-\fB--verbose\fR
-Specifies verbose mode. This will cause
-\fBpg_dumpall\fR to print progress
-messages to standard error.
-.TP
-\fB-x\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-privileges\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-acl\fR
-Prevent dumping of access privileges (grant/revoke commands).
-.PP
-.PP
-The following command-line options control the database connection parameters.
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the database
-server is running. If the value begins with a slash, it is
-used as the directory for the Unix domain socket. The default
-is taken from the \fBPGHOST\fR environment variable,
-if set, else a Unix domain socket connection is attempted.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server is listening for connections.
-Defaults to the \fBPGPORT\fR environment variable, if
-set, or a compiled-in default.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-Connect as the given user.
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-Force a password prompt. This should happen automatically if
-the server requires password authentication.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Since \fBpg_dumpall\fR calls
-\fBpg_dump\fR internally, some diagnostic
-messages will refer to \fBpg_dump\fR.
-.PP
-Once restored, it is wise to run \fBANALYZE\fR on each
-database so the optimizer has useful statistics. You
-can also run \fBvacuumdb -a -z\fR to analyze all
-databases.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To dump all databases:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_dumpall > db.out\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To reload this database use, for example:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpsql -f db.out template1\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-(It is not important to which database you connect here since the
-script file created by \fBpg_dumpall\fR will
-contain the appropriate commands to create and connect to the saved
-databases.)
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-\fBpg_dump\fR(1). Check there for details on possible
-error conditions.
diff --git a/raw/man1/pg_resetxlog.1 b/raw/man1/pg_resetxlog.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b08d65b..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pg_resetxlog.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PG_RESETXLOG" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-pg_resetxlog \- reset the write-ahead log and other control information of a PostgreSQL database cluster
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpg_resetxlog\fR\fR [ \fR\fB -f \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB -n \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB -o \fIoid\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB -x \fIxid\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB -l \fIfileid\fB,\fIseg\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fB\fIdatadir\fB\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpg_resetxlog\fR clears the write-ahead log (WAL) and
-optionally resets some other control information (stored in the
-\fIpg_control\fR file). This function is sometimes needed
-if these files have become corrupted. It should be used only as a
-last resort, when the server will not start due to such corruption.
-.PP
-After running this command, it should be possible to start the server,
-but bear in mind that the database may contain inconsistent data due to
-partially-committed transactions. You should immediately dump your data,
-run \fBinitdb\fR, and reload. After reload, check for
-inconsistencies and repair as needed.
-.PP
-This utility can only be run by the user who installed the server, because
-it requires read/write access to the data directory.
-For safety reasons, you must specify the data directory on the command line.
-\fBpg_resetxlog\fR does not use the environment variable
-\fBPGDATA\fR.
-.PP
-If \fBpg_resetxlog\fR complains that it cannot determine
-valid data for \fIpg_control\fR, you can force it to proceed anyway
-by specifying the -f (force) switch. In this case plausible
-values will be substituted for the missing data. Most of the fields can be
-expected to match, but manual assistance may be needed for the next OID,
-next transaction ID, WAL starting address, and database locale fields.
-The first three of these can be set using the switches discussed below.
-\fBpg_resetxlog\fR's own environment is the source for its
-guess at the locale fields; take care that \fBLANG\fR and so forth
-match the environment that \fBinitdb\fR was run in.
-If you are not able to determine correct values for all these fields,
--f can still be used, but
-the recovered database must be treated with even more suspicion than
-usual: an immediate dump and reload is imperative. \fBDo not\fR
-execute any data-modifying operations in the database before you dump;
-as any such action is likely to make the corruption worse.
-.PP
-The -o, -x, and -l switches allow
-the next OID, next transaction ID, and WAL starting address values to
-be set manually. These are only needed when
-\fBpg_resetxlog\fR is unable to determine appropriate values
-by reading \fIpg_control\fR. A safe value for the
-next transaction ID may be determined by looking for the numerically largest
-file name in the directory \fIpg_clog\fR under the data directory, adding one,
-and then multiplying by 1048576. Note that the file names are in
-hexadecimal. It is usually easiest to specify the switch value in
-hexadecimal too. For example, if \fI0011\fR is the largest entry
-in \fIpg_clog\fR, -x 0x1200000 will work (five trailing
-zeroes provide the proper multiplier).
-The WAL starting address should be
-larger than any file number currently existing in
-the directory \fIpg_xlog\fR under the data directory. The addresses are also in hexadecimal and
-have two parts. For example, if \fI000000FF0000003A\fR is the
-largest entry in \fIpg_xlog\fR, -l 0xFF,0x3B will work.
-There is no comparably easy way to determine a next OID that's beyond
-the largest one in the database, but fortunately it is not critical to
-get the next-OID setting right.
-.PP
-The -n (no operation) switch instructs
-\fBpg_resetxlog\fR to print the values reconstructed from
-\fIpg_control\fR and then exit without modifying anything.
-This is mainly a debugging tool, but may be useful as a sanity check
-before allowing \fBpg_resetxlog\fR to proceed for real.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-This command must not be used when the server is
-running. \fBpg_resetxlog\fR will refuse to start up if
-it finds a server lock file in the data directory. If the
-server crashed then a lock file may have been left
-behind; in that case you can remove the lock file to allow
-\fBpg_resetxlog\fR to run. But before you do
-so, make doubly certain that there
-is no \fBpostmaster\fR nor any backend server process still alive.
diff --git a/raw/man1/pg_restore.1 b/raw/man1/pg_restore.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 205063a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pg_restore.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,405 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PG_RESTORE" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-pg_restore \- restore a PostgreSQL database from an archive file created by pg_dump
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpg_restore\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIfilename\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpg_restore\fR is a utility for restoring a
-PostgreSQL database from an archive
-created by \fBpg_dump\fR(1) in one of the non-plain-text
-formats. It will issue the commands necessary to reconstruct the
-database to the state it was in at the time it was saved. The
-archive files also allow \fBpg_restore\fR to
-be selective about what is restored, or even to reorder the items
-prior to being restored. The archive files are designed to be
-portable across architectures.
-.PP
-\fBpg_restore\fR can operate in two modes: If
-a database name is specified, the archive is restored directly into
-the database. (Large objects can only be restored by using such a direct
-database connection.) Otherwise, a script containing the SQL
-commands necessary to rebuild the database is created (and written
-to a file or standard output), similar to the ones created by the
-\fBpg_dump\fR plain text format. Some of the
-options controlling the script output are therefore analogous to
-\fBpg_dump\fR options.
-.PP
-Obviously, \fBpg_restore\fR cannot restore information
-that is not present in the archive file. For instance, if the
-archive was made using the ``dump data as
-\fBINSERT\fR commands'' option,
-\fBpg_restore\fR will not be able to load the data
-using \fBCOPY\fR statements.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBpg_restore\fR accepts the following command
-line arguments.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfilename\fB\fR
-Specifies the location of the archive file to be restored.
-If not specified, the standard input is used.
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-.TP
-\fB--data-only\fR
-Restore only the data, not the schema (data definitions).
-.TP
-\fB-c\fR
-.TP
-\fB--clean\fR
-Clean (drop) database objects before recreating them.
-.TP
-\fB-C\fR
-.TP
-\fB--create\fR
-Create the database before restoring into it. (When this
-option is used, the database named with \fB-d\fR is
-used only to issue the initial CREATE DATABASE
-command. All data is restored into the database name that
-appears in the archive.)
-.TP
-\fB-d \fIdbname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--dbname=\fIdbname\fB\fR
-Connect to database \fIdbname\fR and restore directly
-into the database.
-.TP
-\fB-f \fIfilename\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--file=\fIfilename\fB\fR
-Specify output file for generated script, or for the listing
-when used with \fB-l\fR. Default is the standard
-output.
-.TP
-\fB-F \fIformat\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--format=\fIformat\fB\fR
-Specify format of the archive. It is not necessary to specify
-the format, since \fBpg_restore\fR will
-determine the format automatically. If specified, it can be
-one of the following:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBt\fR
-The archive is a \fBtar\fR archive. Using this
-archive format allows reordering and/or exclusion of schema
-elements at the time the database is restored. It is also
-possible to limit which data is reloaded at restore time.
-.TP
-\fBc\fR
-The archive is in the custom format of
-\fBpg_dump\fR. This is the most
-flexible format in that it allows reordering of data load
-as well as schema elements. This format is also compressed
-by default.
-.RE
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB-i\fR
-.TP
-\fB--ignore-version\fR
-Ignore database version checks.
-.TP
-\fB-I \fIindex\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--index=\fIindex\fB\fR
-Restore definition of named index only.
-.TP
-\fB-l\fR
-.TP
-\fB--list\fR
-List the contents of the archive. The output of this operation
-can be used with the \fB-L\fR option to restrict
-and reorder the items that are restored.
-.TP
-\fB-L \fIlist-file\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--use-list=\fIlist-file\fB\fR
-Restore elements in \fIlist-file\fR only, and in the
-order they appear in the file. Lines can be moved and may also
-be commented out by placing a ; at the
-start of the line. (See below for examples.)
-.TP
-\fB-N\fR
-.TP
-\fB--orig-order\fR
-Restore items in the order they were originally generated within
-\fBpg_dump\fR. This option has no known
-practical use, since \fBpg_dump\fR generates
-the items in an order convenient to it, which is unlikely to be a
-safe order for restoring them. (This is \fBnot\fR the order
-in which the items are ultimately listed in the archive's table of
-contents.) See also \fB-r\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-o\fR
-.TP
-\fB--oid-order\fR
-Restore items in order by OID. This option is of limited usefulness,
-since OID is only an approximate indication of original creation
-order. This option overrides \fB-N\fR if both are specified.
-See also \fB-r\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-O\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-owner\fR
-Do not output commands to set
-ownership of objects to match the original database.
-By default, \fBpg_restore\fR issues
-\fBSET SESSION AUTHORIZATION\fR
-statements to set ownership of created schema elements.
-These statements will fail unless the initial connection to the
-database is made by a superuser
-(or the same user that owns all of the objects in the script).
-With \fB-O\fR, any user name can be used for the
-initial connection, and this user will own all the created objects.
-.TP
-\fB-P \fIfunction-name(argtype [, ...])\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--function=\fIfunction-name(argtype [, ...])\fB\fR
-Restore the named function only. Be careful to spell the function
-name and arguments exactly as they appear in the dump file's table
-of contents.
-.TP
-\fB-r\fR
-.TP
-\fB--rearrange\fR
-Rearrange items by object type (this occurs after the sorting
-specified by \fB-N\fR or \fB-o\fR, if
-given). The rearrangement is intended to give the best possible
-restore performance.
-
-When none of \fB-N\fR, \fB-o\fR, and
-\fB-r\fR appear, \fBpg_restore\fR restores
-items in the order they appear in the dump's table of contents,
-or in the order they appear in the \fIlist-file\fR if \fB-L\fR is
-given. The combination of \fB-o\fR and \fB-r\fR
-duplicates the sorting done by \fBpg_dump\fR
-before creating the dump's table of contents,
-and so it is normally unnecessary to specify it.
-.TP
-\fB-R\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-reconnect\fR
-This option is obsolete but still accepted for backwards
-compatibility.
-.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-.TP
-\fB--schema-only\fR
-Restore only the schema (data definitions), not the data.
-Sequence values will be reset.
-.TP
-\fB-S \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--superuser=\fIusername\fB\fR
-Specify the superuser user name to use when disabling triggers.
-This is only relevant if \fB--disable-triggers\fR is used.
-.TP
-\fB-t \fItable\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--table=\fItable\fB\fR
-Restore definition and/or data of named table only.
-.TP
-\fB-T \fItrigger\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--trigger=\fItrigger\fB\fR
-Restore named trigger only.
-.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-.TP
-\fB--verbose\fR
-Specifies verbose mode.
-.TP
-\fB-x\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-privileges\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-acl\fR
-Prevent restoration of access privileges (grant/revoke commands).
-.TP
-\fB-X use-set-session-authorization\fR
-.TP
-\fB--use-set-session-authorization\fR
-This option is obsolete but still accepted for backwards
-compatibility.
-\fBpg_restore\fR now always behaves in the
-way formerly selected by this option.
-.TP
-\fB-X disable-triggers\fR
-.TP
-\fB--disable-triggers\fR
-This option is only relevant when performing a data-only restore.
-It instructs \fBpg_restore\fR to execute commands
-to temporarily disable triggers on the target tables while
-the data is reloaded. Use this if you have referential
-integrity checks or other triggers on the tables that you
-do not want to invoke during data reload.
-
-Presently, the commands emitted for
-\fB--disable-triggers\fR must be done as superuser. So, you
-should also specify a superuser name with \fB-S\fR, or
-preferably run \fBpg_restore\fR as a
-PostgreSQL superuser.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBpg_restore\fR also accepts
-the following command line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host=\fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the server is
-running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used as the
-directory for the Unix domain socket. The default is taken
-from the \fBPGHOST\fR environment variable, if set,
-else a Unix domain socket connection is attempted.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port=\fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server is listening for connections.
-Defaults to the \fBPGPORT\fR environment variable, if
-set, or a compiled-in default.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-Connect as the given user
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-Force a password prompt. This should happen automatically if
-the server requires password authentication.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-When a direct database connection is specified using the
-\fB-d\fR option, \fBpg_restore\fR
-internally executes SQL statements. If you have
-problems running \fBpg_restore\fR, make sure
-you are able to select information from the database using, for
-example, \fBpsql\fR.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-If your installation has any local additions to the
-template1 database, be careful to load the output of
-\fBpg_restore\fR into a truly empty database;
-otherwise you are likely to get errors due to duplicate definitions
-of the added objects. To make an empty database without any local
-additions, copy from template0 not template1, for example:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE DATABASE foo WITH TEMPLATE template0;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-The limitations of \fBpg_restore\fR are detailed below.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-When restoring data to a pre-existing table and the option
-\fB--disable-triggers\fR is used,
-\fBpg_restore\fR emits commands
-to disable triggers on user tables before inserting the data then emits commands to
-re-enable them after the data has been inserted. If the restore is stopped in the
-middle, the system catalogs may be left in the wrong state.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-\fBpg_restore\fR will not restore large objects for a single table. If
-an archive contains large objects, then all large objects will be restored.
-.PP
-.PP
-See also the \fBpg_dump\fR(1) documentation for details on
-limitations of \fBpg_dump\fR.
-.PP
-Once restored, it is wise to run \fBANALYZE\fR on each
-restored table so the optimizer has useful statistics.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To dump a database called mydb that contains
-large objects to a \fItar\fR file:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_dump -Ft -b mydb > db.tar\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To reload this database (with large objects) to an
-existing database called newdb:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_restore -d newdb db.tar\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To reorder database items, it is first necessary to dump the table of
-contents of the archive:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_restore -l archive.file > archive.list\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-The listing file consists of a header and one line for each item, e.g.,
-.sp
-.nf
-;
-; Archive created at Fri Jul 28 22:28:36 2000
-; dbname: birds
-; TOC Entries: 74
-; Compression: 0
-; Dump Version: 1.4-0
-; Format: CUSTOM
-;
-;
-; Selected TOC Entries:
-;
-2; 145344 TABLE species postgres
-3; 145344 ACL species
-4; 145359 TABLE nt_header postgres
-5; 145359 ACL nt_header
-6; 145402 TABLE species_records postgres
-7; 145402 ACL species_records
-8; 145416 TABLE ss_old postgres
-9; 145416 ACL ss_old
-10; 145433 TABLE map_resolutions postgres
-11; 145433 ACL map_resolutions
-12; 145443 TABLE hs_old postgres
-13; 145443 ACL hs_old
-.sp
-.fi
-Semicolons start a comment, and the numbers at the start of lines refer to the
-internal archive ID assigned to each item.
-.PP
-Lines in the file can be commented out, deleted, and reordered. For example,
-.sp
-.nf
-10; 145433 TABLE map_resolutions postgres
-;2; 145344 TABLE species postgres
-;4; 145359 TABLE nt_header postgres
-6; 145402 TABLE species_records postgres
-;8; 145416 TABLE ss_old postgres
-.sp
-.fi
-could be used as input to \fBpg_restore\fR and would only restore
-items 10 and 6, in that order:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpg_restore -L archive.list archive.file\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "HISTORY"
-.PP
-The \fBpg_restore\fR utility first appeared in
-PostgreSQL 7.1.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBpg_dump\fR(1), \fBpg_dumpall\fR(1), \fBpsql\fR(1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/popd.1 b/raw/man1/popd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/popd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/postgres.1 b/raw/man1/postgres.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 877a81a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/postgres.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,223 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "POSTGRES" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-postgres \- run a PostgreSQL server in single-user mode
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpostgres\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-A \fR\fB 0\fR | \fB1\fR\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-B \fInbuffers\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-c \fIname\fB=\fIvalue\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB--describe-config \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-e \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-E \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-f \fR\fB s\fR | \fBi\fR | \fBt\fR | \fBn\fR | \fBm\fR | \fBh\fR\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-F \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-N \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-o \fIfilename\ [...]
-
-\fBpostgres\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-A \fR\fB 0\fR | \fB1\fR\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-B \fInbuffers\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-c \fIname\fB=\fIvalue\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-e \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-f \fR\fB s\fR | \fBi\fR | \fBt\fR | \fBn\fR | \fBm\fR | \fBh\fR\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-F \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-o \fIfilename\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-O \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-p \fIdatabase\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB [...]
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-The \fBpostgres\fR executable is the actual
-PostgreSQL server process that processes
-queries. It is normally not called directly; instead a \fBpostmaster\fR(1) multiuser server is started.
-.PP
-The second form above is how
-\fBpostgres\fR is invoked by the \fBpostmaster\fR(1) (only
-conceptually, since both \fIpostmaster\fR and
-\fIpostgres\fR are in fact the same program); it
-should not be invoked directly this way. The first form invokes
-the server directly in interactive single-user mode. The primary use
-for this mode is during bootstrapping by \fBinitdb\fR(1).
-Sometimes it is used for debugging or disaster recovery.
-.PP
-When invoked in interactive mode from the shell, the user can enter
-queries and the results will be printed to the screen, but in a
-form that is more useful for developers than end users. But note
-that running a single-user server is not truly suitable for
-debugging the server since no realistic interprocess communication
-and locking will happen.
-.PP
-When running a stand-alone server, the session user will be set to
-the user with ID 1. This user does not actually have to exist, so
-a stand-alone server can be used to manually recover from certain
-kinds of accidental damage to the system catalogs. Implicit
-superuser powers are granted to the user with ID 1 in stand-alone
-mode.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-When \fBpostgres\fR is started by a \fBpostmaster\fR(1) then it
-inherits all options set by the latter. Additionally,
-\fBpostgres\fR-specific options can be passed
-from the \fBpostmaster\fR with the
-\fB-o\fR switch.
-.PP
-You can avoid having to type these options by setting up a
-configuration file. See the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation for details. Some
-(safe) options can also be set from the connecting client in an
-application-dependent way. For example, if the environment
-variable \fBPGOPTIONS\fR is set, then
-\fBlibpq\fR-based clients will pass that string to the
-server, which will interpret it as
-\fBpostgres\fR command-line options.
-.SS "GENERAL PURPOSE"
-.PP
-The options \fB-A\fR, \fB-B\fR,
-\fB-c\fR, \fB-d\fR, \fB-D\fR,
-\fB-F\fR, and \fB--\fIname\fB\fR have the same meanings
-as the \fBpostmaster\fR(1) except that
--d 0 prevents the server log level of
-the \fBpostmaster\fR from being propagated to \fBpostgres\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-Sets the default date style to ``European'', that is
-DMY ordering of input date fields. This also causes
-the day to be printed before the month in certain date output formats.
-See the section called ``Date/Time Types'' in the documentation for more information.
-.TP
-\fB-o \fIfilename\fB\fR
-Send all server log output to
-\fIfilename\fR.
-If \fBpostgres\fR is running under the
-\fBpostmaster\fR, this option is ignored,
-and the \fBstderr\fR inherited from the
-\fBpostmaster\fR is used.
-.TP
-\fB-P\fR
-Ignore system indexes when reading system tables (but still update
-the indexes when modifying the tables). This is useful when
-recovering from damaged system indexes.
-.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-Print time information and other statistics at the end of each command.
-This is useful for benchmarking or for use in tuning the number of
-buffers.
-.TP
-\fB-S \fIsort-mem\fB\fR
-Specifies the amount of memory to be used by internal sorts and hashes
-before resorting to temporary disk files. The value is specified in
-kilobytes, and defaults to 1024. Note that for a complex query,
-several sorts and/or hashes might be running in parallel, and each one
-will be allowed to use as much as
-\fIsort-mem\fR kilobytes
-before it starts to put data into temporary files.
-.SS "OPTIONS FOR STAND-ALONE MODE"
-.TP
-\fB\fIdatabase\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the database to be accessed. If it is
-omitted it defaults to the user name.
-.TP
-\fB-E\fR
-Echo all commands.
-.TP
-\fB-N\fR
-Disables use of newline as a statement delimiter.
-.SS "SEMI-INTERNAL OPTIONS"
-.PP
-There are several other options that may be specified, used
-mainly for debugging purposes. These are listed here only for
-the use by PostgreSQL system
-developers. \fBUse of any of these options is highly
-discouraged.\fR Furthermore, any of these options may
-disappear or change in a future release without notice.
-.TP
-\fB-f { s | i | m | n | h }\fR
-Forbids the use of particular scan and join methods:
-s and i
-disable sequential and index scans respectively, while
-n, m, and h
-disable nested-loop, merge and hash joins respectively.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-Neither sequential scans nor nested-loop joins can be disabled completely;
-the -fs and -fn
-options simply discourage the optimizer from using those
-plan types if it has any other alternative.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB-O\fR
-Allows the structure of system tables to be modified. This is
-used by \fBinitdb\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIdatabase\fB\fR
-Indicates that this process has been started by a
-\fBpostmaster\fR and specifies the database to use.
-etc.
-.TP
-\fB-t pa[rser] | pl[anner] | e[xecutor]\fR
-Print timing statistics for each query relating to each of the
-major system modules. This option cannot be used together
-with the \fB-s\fR option.
-.TP
-\fB-v \fIprotocol\fB\fR
-Specifies the version number of the frontend/backend protocol
-to be used for this particular session.
-.TP
-\fB-W \fIseconds\fB\fR
-As soon as this option is encountered, the process sleeps for
-the specified amount of seconds. This gives developers time
-to attach a debugger to the server process.
-.TP
-\fB--describe-config\fR
-This option dumps out the server's internal configuration variables,
-descriptions, and defaults in tab-delimited \fBCOPY\fR format.
-It is designed primarily for use by administration tools.
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATA\fR
-Default data direction location
-.PP
-For others, which have little influence during single-user mode,
-see \fBpostmaster\fR(1).
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-To cancel a running query, send the SIGINT signal
-to the \fBpostgres\fR process running that command.
-.PP
-To tell \fBpostgres\fR to reload the configuration files,
-send a SIGHUP signal. Normally it's best to
-SIGHUP the \fBpostmaster\fR instead;
-the \fBpostmaster\fR will in turn SIGHUP
-each of its children. But in some cases it might be desirable to have only
-one \fBpostgres\fR process reload the configuration files.
-.PP
-The \fBpostmaster\fR uses SIGTERM
-to tell a \fBpostgres\fR process to quit normally and
-SIGQUIT to terminate without the normal cleanup.
-These signals \fBshould not\fR be used by users. It is also
-unwise to send SIGKILL to a \fBpostgres\fR
-process --- the \fBpostmaster\fR will interpret this as
-a crash in \fBpostgres\fR, and will force all the sibling
-\fBpostgres\fR processes to quit as part of its standard
-crash-recovery procedure.
-.SH "USAGE"
-.PP
-Start a stand-alone server with a command like
-.sp
-.nf
-\fBpostgres -D /usr/local/pgsql/data \fIother-options\fB my_database\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-Provide the correct path to the database directory with \fB-D\fR, or
-make sure that the environment variable \fBPGDATA\fR is set.
-Also specify the name of the particular database you want to work in.
-.PP
-Normally, the stand-alone server treats newline as the command
-entry terminator; there is no intelligence about semicolons,
-as there is in \fBpsql\fR. To continue a command
-across multiple lines, you must type backslash just before each
-newline except the last one.
-.PP
-But if you use the \fB-N\fR command line switch, then newline does
-not terminate command entry. In this case, the server will read the standard input
-until the end-of-file (EOF) marker, then
-process the input as a single command string. Backslash-newline is not
-treated specially in this case.
-.PP
-To quit the session, type EOF
-(\fBControl\fR+\fBD\fR, usually).
-If you've
-used \fB-N\fR, two consecutive EOFs are needed to exit.
-.PP
-Note that the stand-alone server does not provide sophisticated
-line-editing features (no command history, for example).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-\fBinitdb\fR(1),
-\fBipcclean\fR(1),
-\fBpostmaster\fR(1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/postmaster.1 b/raw/man1/postmaster.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b53f9a8..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/postmaster.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,330 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "POSTMASTER" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Server Applications"
-.SH NAME
-postmaster \- PostgreSQL multiuser database server
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpostmaster\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-A \fR\fB 0\fR | \fB1\fR\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-B \fInbuffers\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-c \fIname\fB=\fIvalue\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-F \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-h \fIhostname\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-i \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-k \fIdirectory\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-l \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-N \fImax-connections\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB-o \fIextra-options\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \ [...]
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpostmaster\fR is the
-PostgreSQL multiuser database server.
-In order for a client application to access a database it connects
-(over a network or locally) to a running
-\fBpostmaster\fR. The
-\fBpostmaster\fR then starts a separate server
-process (``\fBpostgres\fR(1)'') to handle
-the connection. The \fBpostmaster\fR also
-manages the communication among server processes.
-.PP
-By default the \fBpostmaster\fR starts in the
-foreground and prints log messages to the standard error stream. In
-practical applications the \fBpostmaster\fR
-should be started as a background process, perhaps at boot time.
-.PP
-One \fBpostmaster\fR always manages the data
-from exactly one database cluster. A database cluster is a
-collection of databases that is stored at a common file system
-location. When the \fBpostmaster\fR starts it needs to know the location
-of the database cluster files (``data area''). This is
-done with the \fB-D\fR invocation option or the
-\fBPGDATA\fR environment variable; there is no default.
-More than one \fBpostmaster\fR process can run on a system at one time,
-as long as they use different data areas and different
-communication ports (see below). A data area is created with \fBinitdb\fR(1).
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBpostmaster\fR accepts the following
-command line arguments. For a detailed discussion of the options
-consult the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation. You can also save typing most of these
-options by setting up a configuration file.
-.TP
-\fB-A 0|1\fR
-Enables run-time assertion checks, which is a debugging aid to
-detect programming mistakes. This is only available if it was
-enabled during compilation. If so, the default is on.
-.TP
-\fB-B \fInbuffers\fB\fR
-Sets the number of shared buffers for use by the server
-processes. This value defaults to 64 buffers, where each
-buffer is 8 kB.
-.TP
-\fB-c \fIname\fB=\fIvalue\fB\fR
-Sets a named run-time parameter. Consult the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation for
-a list and descriptions. Most of the other command line
-options are in fact short forms of such a parameter
-assignment. \fB-c\fR can appear multiple times to set
-multiple parameters.
-.TP
-\fB-d \fIdebug-level\fB\fR
-Sets the debug level. The higher this value is set, the more
-debugging output is written to the server log. Values are from
-1 to 5.
-.TP
-\fB-D \fIdatadir\fB\fR
-Specifies the file system location of the data directory. See
-discussion above.
-.TP
-\fB-F\fR
-Disables \fBfsync\fR calls for performance
-improvement, at the risk of data corruption in event of a
-system crash. This option corresponds to setting
-fsync=false in \fIpostgresql.conf\fR. Read the detailed
-documentation before using this!
-
-\fB--fsync=true\fR has the opposite effect
-of this option.
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhostname\fB\fR
-Specifies the IP host name or address on which the
-\fBpostmaster\fR is to listen for
-connections from client applications. Defaults to
-listening on all configured addresses (including
-\fBlocalhost\fR).
-.TP
-\fB-i\fR
-Allows clients to connect via TCP/IP (Internet domain)
-connections. Without this option, only local Unix domain
-socket connections are accepted. This option corresponds
-to setting tcpip_socket=true in \fIpostgresql.conf\fR.
-
-\fB--tcpip-socket=false\fR has the opposite
-effect of this option.
-.TP
-\fB-k \fIdirectory\fB\fR
-Specifies the directory of the Unix-domain socket on which the
-\fBpostmaster\fR is to listen for
-connections from client applications. The default is normally
-\fI/tmp\fR, but can be changed at build time.
-.TP
-\fB-l\fR
-Enables secure connections using SSL. The \fB-i\fR
-option is also required. You must have compiled with SSL
-enabled to use this option.
-.TP
-\fB-N \fImax-connections\fB\fR
-Sets the maximum number of client connections that this
-\fBpostmaster\fR will accept. By
-default, this value is 32, but it can be set as high as your
-system will support. (Note that
-\fB-B\fR is required to be at least twice
-\fB-N\fR. See the section called ``Managing Kernel Resources'' in the documentation for a discussion of
-system resource requirements for large numbers of client
-connections.)
-.TP
-\fB-o \fIextra-options\fB\fR
-The command line-style options specified in \fIextra-options\fR are passed to
-all server processes started by this
-\fBpostmaster\fR. See \fBpostgres\fR(1) for possibilities. If the option
-string contains any spaces, the entire string must be quoted.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP/IP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the \fBpostmaster\fR
-is to listen for connections from client applications.
-Defaults to the value of the \fBPGPORT\fR environment
-variable, or if \fBPGPORT\fR is not set, then
-defaults to the value established during compilation (normally
-5432). If you specify a port other than the default port,
-then all client applications must specify the same port using
-either command-line options or \fBPGPORT\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-S\fR
-Specifies that the \fBpostmaster\fR
-process should start up in silent mode. That is, it will
-disassociate from the user's (controlling) terminal, start its
-own process group, and redirect its standard output and
-standard error to \fI/dev/null\fR.
-
-Using this switch discards all logging output, which is
-probably not what you want, since it makes it very difficult
-to troubleshoot problems. See below for a better way to start
-the \fBpostmaster\fR in the background.
-
-\fB--silent-mode=false\fR has the opposite effect
-of this option.
-.TP
-\fB--\fIname\fB=\fIvalue\fB\fR
-Sets a named run-time parameter; a shorter form of
-\fB-c\fR.
-.PP
-.PP
-Two additional command line options are available for debugging
-problems that cause a server process to die abnormally. The
-ordinary strategy in this situation is to notify all other server
-processes that they must terminate and then reinitialize the
-shared memory and semaphores. This is because an errant server
-process could have corrupted some shared state before terminating.
-These options select alternative behaviors of the
-\fBpostmaster\fR in this situation.
-\fBNeither option is intended for use in ordinary
-operation.\fR
-.PP
-.PP
-These special-case options are:
-.TP
-\fB-n\fR
-\fBpostmaster\fR
-will not reinitialize shared data structures. A knowledgeable system
-programmer can then use a debugger
-to examine shared memory and semaphore state.
-.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-\fBpostmaster\fR
-will stop all other server processes by sending the signal
-SIGSTOP,
-but will not cause them to terminate. This permits system programmers
-to collect core dumps from all server processes by hand.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGCLIENTENCODING\fR
-Default character encoding used by clients. (The clients may
-override this individually.) This value can also be set in the
-configuration file.
-.TP
-\fBPGDATA\fR
-Default data direction location
-.TP
-\fBPGDATESTYLE\fR
-Default value of the DATESTYLE run-time
-parameter. (The use of this environment variable is deprecated.)
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-Default port (preferably set in the configuration file)
-.TP
-\fBTZ\fR
-Server time zone
-.TP
-\fBothers\fR
-Other environment variables may be used to designate alternative
-data storage locations. See the chapter called ``Managing Databases'' in the documentation for more
-information.
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-A failure message mentioning semget or shmget
-probably indicates you need to configure your kernel to provide adequate
-shared memory and semaphores. For more discussion see the section called ``Managing Kernel Resouces'' in the documentation.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-You may be able to postpone reconfiguring your kernel by decreasing
-shared_buffers to reduce the shared memory consumption
-of PostgreSQL, and/or by reducing
-max_connections to reduce the semaphore consumption.
-.RE
-.sp
-.PP
-A failure message suggesting that another postmaster is already running
-should be checked carefully, for example by using the command
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBps ax | grep postmaster\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-or
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBps -ef | grep postmaster\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-depending on your system. If you are certain that no conflicting
-postmaster is running, you may remove the lock file mentioned in the
-message and try again.
-.PP
-A failure message indicating inability to bind to a port may indicate
-that that port is already in use by some non-PostgreSQL process.
-You may also get this error if you terminate the
-\fBpostmaster\fR
-and immediately restart it using the same port; in this case, you must
-simply wait a few seconds until the operating system closes the port
-before trying again. Finally, you may get this error if you specify
-a port number that your operating system considers to be reserved.
-For example, many versions of Unix consider port numbers under 1024 to
-be ``trusted''
-and only permit the Unix superuser to access them.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-If at all possible, \fBdo not\fR use
-SIGKILL to kill the
-\fBpostmaster\fR. Doing so will prevent
-\fBpostmaster\fR from freeing the system
-resources (e.g., shared memory and semaphores) that it holds before
-terminating. This may cause problems for starting a fresh
-\fBpostmaster\fR run.
-.PP
-To terminate the \fBpostmaster\fR normally,
-the signals SIGTERM, SIGINT,
-or SIGQUIT can be used. The first will wait for
-all clients to terminate before quitting, the second will
-forcefully disconnect all clients, and the third will quit
-immediately without proper shutdown, resulting in a recovery run
-during restart. The SIGHUP signal will
-reload the server configuration files.
-.PP
-The utility command \fBpg_ctl\fR(1) can be used to
-start and shut down the \fBpostmaster\fR
-safely and comfortably.
-.PP
-The \fB--\fR options will not work on \fBFreeBSD\fR or \fBOpenBSD\fR.
-Use \fB-c\fR instead. This is a bug in the affected operating
-systems; a future release of PostgreSQL
-will provide a workaround if this is not fixed.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To start \fBpostmaster\fR in the background
-using default values, type:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBnohup postmaster >logfile 2>&1 </dev/null &\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To start \fBpostmaster\fR with a specific
-port:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpostmaster -p 1234\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-This command will start up \fBpostmaster\fR
-communicating through the port 1234. In order to connect to this
-\fBpostmaster\fR using \fBpsql\fR, you would need to
-run it as
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpsql -p 1234\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-or set the environment variable \fBPGPORT\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBexport PGPORT=1234\fR
-$ \fBpsql\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Named run-time parameters can be set in either of these styles:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpostmaster -c sort_mem=1234\fR
-$ \fBpostmaster --sort-mem=1234\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-Either form overrides whatever setting might exist for SORT_MEM
-in \fIpostgresql.conf\fR. Notice that underscores in parameter
-names can be written as either underscore or dash on the command line.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-Except for short-term experiments,
-it's probably better practice to edit the setting in
-\fIpostgresql.conf\fR than to rely on a command-line switch
-to set a parameter.
-.RE
-.sp
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-\fBinitdb\fR(1),
-\fBpg_ctl\fR(1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/printf.1 b/raw/man1/printf.1
deleted file mode 100644
index d6b4d9d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/printf.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH PRINTF "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-printf \- format and print data
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B printf
-\fIFORMAT \fR[\fIARGUMENT\fR]...
-.br
-.B printf
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-NOTE: your shell may have its own version of printf which will supercede
-the version described here. Please refer to your shell's documentation
-for details about the options it supports.
-.PP
-Print ARGUMENT(s) according to FORMAT.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-FORMAT controls the output as in C printf. Interpreted sequences are:
-.TP
-\e"
-double quote
-.TP
-\e0NNN
-character with octal value NNN (0 to 3 digits)
-.TP
-\e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-\ea
-alert (BEL)
-.TP
-\eb
-backspace
-.TP
-\ec
-produce no further output
-.TP
-\ef
-form feed
-.TP
-\en
-new line
-.TP
-\er
-carriage return
-.TP
-\et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-\ev
-vertical tab
-.TP
-\exNN
-byte with hexadecimal value NN (1 to 2 digits)
-.TP
-\euNNNN
-character with hexadecimal value NNNN (4 digits)
-.TP
-\eUNNNNNNNN
-character with hexadecimal value NNNNNNNN (8 digits)
-.TP
-%%
-a single %
-.TP
-%b
-ARGUMENT as a string with `\e' escapes interpreted
-.PP
-and all C format specifications ending with one of diouxXfeEgGcs, with
-ARGUMENTs converted to proper type first. Variable widths are handled.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B printf
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B printf
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info printf
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/psfaddtable.1 b/raw/man1/psfaddtable.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ad5c844..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/psfaddtable.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)psfaddtable.1
-.TH PSFADDTABLE 1 "25 Oct 1994"
-.SH NAME
-psfaddtable \- add a Unicode character table to a console font
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B psfaddtable
-.I fontfile tablefile outfile
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "psfaddtable command" "" "\fLpsfaddtable\fR command"
-.LP
-.B psfaddtable
-takes a console font in .psf format given by
-.I fontfile
-and merges it with the Unicode character table given by
-.I tablefile
-to produce a font file with an embedded character table, which is
-written to
-.IR outfile .
-An input file name of "\-" denotes standard input,
-and an output file name of "\-" denotes standard output.
-If the
-.I fontfile
-already contains an embedded character table, it is ignored.
-.SH TABLE FILE FORMAT
-Each line in the
-.I tablefile
-should be either blank, contain a comment (preceded by
-.IR # ),
-or contain a sequence of numbers in either decimal (default), octal
-(preceded by
-.IR 0 ),
-or hexadecimal (preceded by
-.IR 0x )
-format, separated by spaces or tabs.
-The first number on each line indicates the glyph slot in the
-font that is being referred to, this is between 0 and 0xff for a
-256-character font and 0 and 0x1ff for a 512-character font. Any
-subsequent numbers on the same line are Unicodes matched by this
-specific glyph slot. Instead of a single Unicode one may have
-a sequence of Unicodes separates by commas, to denote that the
-glyph depicts the corresponding composed symbol.
-It is permissible to have multiple lines for the same glyph.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR setfont (8),
-.BR psfgettable (1),
-.BR psfstriptable (1),
-.BR psfxtable (1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/psfgettable.1 b/raw/man1/psfgettable.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 228be18..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/psfgettable.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,22 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)psfgettable.1
-.TH PSFGETTABLE 1 "25 Oct 1994"
-.SH NAME
-psfgettable \- extract the embedded Unicode character table from a console font
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B psfgettable
-.I fontfile
-.RI [ outfile ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "psfgettable command" "" "\fLpsfgettable\fR command"
-.LP
-.B psfgettable
-extracts the embedded Unicode character table from a .psf format
-console font into a human readable ASCII file of the format used by
-.BR psfaddtable (1).
-If the font file name is a single dash (\-), the font is read from
-standard input.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR setfont (8),
-.BR psfaddtable (1),
-.BR psfstriptable (1),
-.BR psfxtable (1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/psfstriptable.1 b/raw/man1/psfstriptable.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f7e059d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/psfstriptable.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,23 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)psfstriptable.1
-.TH PSFSTRIPTABLE 1 "25 Oct 1994"
-.SH NAME
-psfstriptable \- remove the embedded Unicode character table from a console font
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B psfstriptable
-.I fontfile outfile
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "psfstriptable command" "" "\fLpsfstriptable\fR command"
-.LP
-.B psfstriptable
-reads a .psf format console font from
-.IR fontfile ,
-removes the embedded Unicode font table if there is one,
-and writes the result to
-.IR outfile .
-An input file name of "\-" denotes standard input,
-and an output file name of "\-" denotes standard output.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR setfont (8),
-.BR psfaddtable (1),
-.BR psfgettable (1),
-.BR psfxtable (1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/psql.1 b/raw/man1/psql.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 58ad104..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/psql.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1613 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PSQL" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-psql \- PostgreSQL interactive terminal
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpsql\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIoption\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdbname\fB\fR [ \fB\fIusername\fB \fR]\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBpsql\fR is a terminal-based front-end to
-PostgreSQL. It enables you to type in
-queries interactively, issue them to
-PostgreSQL, and see the query results.
-Alternatively, input can be from a file. In addition, it provides a
-number of meta-commands and various shell-like features to
-facilitate writing scripts and automating a wide variety of tasks.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo-all\fR
-Print all the lines to the screen as they are read. This is more
-useful for script processing rather than interactive mode. This is
-equivalent to setting the variable ECHO to
-all.
-.TP
-\fB-A\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-align\fR
-Switches to unaligned output mode. (The default output mode is
-otherwise aligned.)
-.TP
-\fB-c \fIcommand\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--command \fIcommand\fB\fR
-Specifies that \fBpsql\fR is to execute one
-command string, \fIcommand\fR,
-and then exit. This is useful in shell scripts.
-
-\fIcommand\fR must be either
-a command string that is completely parsable by the server (i.e.,
-it contains no \fBpsql\fR specific features),
-or it is a single backslash command. Thus you cannot mix
-SQL and \fBpsql\fR
-meta-commands. To achieve that, you could pipe the string into
-\fBpsql\fR, like this: echo "\\x \\\\
-select * from foo;" | psql.
-
-If the command string contains multiple SQL commands, they are
-processed in a single transaction, unless there are explicit
-BEGIN/COMMIT commands included in the string to divide it into
-multiple transactions. This is different from the behavior when
-the same string is fed to \fBpsql\fR's standard input.
-.TP
-\fB-d \fIdbname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--dbname \fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the database to connect to. This is
-equivalent to specifying \fIdbname\fR as the first non-option
-argument on the command line.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo-queries\fR
-Show all commands that are sent to the server. This is equivalent
-to setting the variable ECHO to
-queries.
-.TP
-\fB-E\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo-hidden\fR
-Echo the actual queries generated by \fB\\d\fR and other backslash
-commands. You can use this if you wish to include similar
-functionality into your own programs. This is equivalent to
-setting the variable ECHO_HIDDEN from within
-\fBpsql\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-f \fIfilename\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--file \fIfilename\fB\fR
-Use the file \fIfilename\fR
-as the source of commands instead of reading commands interactively.
-After the file is processed, \fBpsql\fR
-terminates. This is in many ways equivalent to the internal
-command \fB\\i\fR.
-
-If \fIfilename\fR is -
-(hyphen), then standard input is read.
-
-Using this option is subtly different from writing psql
-< \fIfilename\fR. In general,
-both will do what you expect, but using -f
-enables some nice features such as error messages with line
-numbers. There is also a slight chance that using this option will
-reduce the start-up overhead. On the other hand, the variant using
-the shell's input redirection is (in theory) guaranteed to yield
-exactly the same output that you would have gotten had you entered
-everything by hand.
-.TP
-\fB-F \fIseparator\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--field-separator \fIseparator\fB\fR
-Use \fIseparator\fR as the
-field separator. This is equivalent to \fB\\pset
-fieldsep\fR or \fB\\f\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhostname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhostname\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server is running. If the value begins
-with a slash, it is used as the directory for the Unix-domain
-socket.
-.TP
-\fB-H\fR
-.TP
-\fB--html\fR
-Turn on HTML tabular output. This is
-equivalent to \\pset format html or the
-\fB\\H\fR command.
-.TP
-\fB-l\fR
-.TP
-\fB--list\fR
-List all available databases, then exits. Other non-connection
-options are ignored. This is similar to the internal command
-\fB\\list\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-o \fIfilename\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--output \fIfilename\fB\fR
-Put all query output into file \fIfilename\fR. This is equivalent to
-the command \fB\\o\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or the local Unix domain
-socket file extension on which the server is listening for
-connections. Defaults to the value of the \fBPGPORT\fR
-environment variable or, if not set, to the port specified at
-compile time, usually 5432.
-.TP
-\fB-P \fIassignment\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--pset \fIassignment\fB\fR
-Allows you to specify printing options in the style of
-\fB\\pset\fR on the command line. Note that here you
-have to separate name and value with an equal sign instead of a
-space. Thus to set the output format to LaTeX, you could write
--P format=latex.
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Specifies that \fBpsql\fR should do its work
-quietly. By default, it prints welcome messages and various
-informational output. If this option is used, none of this
-happens. This is useful with the \fB-c\fR option.
-Within \fBpsql\fR you can also set the
-QUIET variable to achieve the same effect.
-.TP
-\fB-R \fIseparator\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--record-separator \fIseparator\fB\fR
-Use \fIseparator\fR as the
-record separator. This is equivalent to the \fB\\pset
-recordsep\fR command.
-.TP
-\fB-s\fR
-.TP
-\fB--single-step\fR
-Run in single-step mode. That means the user is prompted before
-each command is sent to the server, with the option to cancel
-execution as well. Use this to debug scripts.
-.TP
-\fB-S\fR
-.TP
-\fB--single-line\fR
-Runs in single-line mode where a newline terminates an SQL command, as a
-semicolon does.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-This mode is provided for those who insist on it, but you are not
-necessarily encouraged to use it. In particular, if you mix
-SQL and meta-commands on a line the order of
-execution might not always be clear to the inexperienced user.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB-t\fR
-.TP
-\fB--tuples-only\fR
-Turn off printing of column names and result row count footers,
-etc. It is completely equivalent to the \fB\\t\fR
-meta-command.
-.TP
-\fB-T \fItable_options\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--table-attr \fItable_options\fB\fR
-Allows you to specify options to be placed within the
-HTML table tag. See
-\fB\\pset\fR for details.
-.TP
-\fB-u\fR
-Makes \fBpsql\fR prompt for the user name and
-password before connecting to the database.
-
-This option is deprecated, as it is conceptually flawed.
-(Prompting for a non-default user name and prompting for a
-password because the server requires it are really two different
-things.) You are encouraged to look at the \fB-U\fR and
-\fB-W\fR options instead.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-Connect to the database as the user \fIusername\fR instead of the default.
-(You must have permission to do so, of course.)
-.TP
-\fB-v \fIassignment\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--set \fIassignment\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--variable \fIassignment\fB\fR
-Perform a variable assignment, like the \fB\\set\fR
-internal command. Note that you must separate name and value, if
-any, by an equal sign on the command line. To unset a variable,
-leave off the equal sign. To just set a variable without a value,
-use the equal sign but leave off the value. These assignments are
-done during a very early stage of start-up, so variables reserved
-for internal purposes might get overwritten later.
-.TP
-\fB-V\fR
-.TP
-\fB--version\fR
-Show the \fBpsql\fR version.
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Requests that \fBpsql\fR should prompt for a
-password before connecting to a database. This will remain set for
-the entire session, even if you change the database connection
-with the meta-command \fB\\connect\fR.
-
-In the current version, \fBpsql\fR
-automatically issues a password prompt whenever the server
-requests password authentication. Because this is currently based
-on a hack, the automatic recognition might mysteriously fail,
-hence this option to force a prompt. If no password prompt is
-issued and the server requires password authentication the
-connection attempt will fail.
-.TP
-\fB-x\fR
-.TP
-\fB--expanded\fR
-Turn on the extended table formatting mode. This is equivalent to the
-command \fB\\x\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-X,\fR
-.TP
-\fB--no-psqlrc\fR
-Do not read the start-up file \fI~/.psqlrc\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-?\fR
-.TP
-\fB--help\fR
-Show help about \fBpsql\fR command line
-arguments.
-.SH "EXIT STATUS"
-.PP
-\fBpsql\fR returns 0 to the shell if it
-finished normally, 1 if a fatal error of its own (out of memory,
-file not found) occurs, 2 if the connection to the server went bad
-and the session was not interactive, and 3 if an error occurred in a
-script and the variable ON_ERROR_STOP was set.
-.SH "USAGE"
-.SS "CONNECTING TO A DATABASE"
-.PP
-\fBpsql\fR is a regular
-PostgreSQL client application. In order
-to connect to a database you need to know the name of your target
-database, the host name and port number of the server and what user
-name you want to connect as. \fBpsql\fR can be
-told about those parameters via command line options, namely
-\fB-d\fR, \fB-h\fR, \fB-p\fR, and
-\fB-U\fR respectively. If an argument is found that does
-not belong to any option it will be interpreted as the database name
-(or the user name, if the database name is also given). Not all
-these options are required, defaults do apply. If you omit the host
-name, \fBpsql\fR will connect via a Unix domain socket to a server on the
-local host. The default port number is compile-time determined.
-Since the database server uses the same default, you will not have
-to specify the port in most cases. The default user name is your
-Unix user name, as is the default database name. Note that you can't
-just connect to any database under any user name. Your database
-administrator should have informed you about your access rights. To
-save you some typing you can also set the environment variables
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR, \fBPGHOST\fR,
-\fBPGPORT\fR and \fBPGUSER\fR to appropriate
-values.
-.PP
-If the connection could not be made for any reason (e.g., insufficient
-privileges, server is not running on the targeted host, etc.),
-\fBpsql\fR will return an error and terminate.
-.SS "ENTERING SQL COMMANDS"
-.PP
-In normal operation, \fBpsql\fR provides a
-prompt with the name of the database to which
-\fBpsql\fR is currently connected, followed by
-the string =>. For example,
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBpsql testdb\fR
-Welcome to psql 7.4beta5, the PostgreSQL interactive terminal.
-
-Type: \\copyright for distribution terms
- \\h for help with SQL commands
- \\? for help on internal slash commands
- \\g or terminate with semicolon to execute query
- \\q to quit
-
-testdb=>
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-At the prompt, the user may type in SQL commands.
-Ordinarily, input lines are sent to the server when a
-command-terminating semicolon is reached. An end of line does not
-terminate a command. Thus commands can be spread over several lines for
-clarity. If the command was sent and without error, the results of the command
-are displayed on the screen.
-.PP
-Whenever a command is executed, \fBpsql\fR also polls
-for asynchronous notification events generated by
-LISTEN [\fBlisten\fR(7)] and
-NOTIFY [\fBnotify\fR(7)].
-.SS "META-COMMANDS"
-.PP
-Anything you enter in \fBpsql\fR that begins
-with an unquoted backslash is a \fBpsql\fR
-meta-command that is processed by \fBpsql\fR
-itself. These commands are what makes
-\fBpsql\fR interesting for administration or
-scripting. Meta-commands are more commonly called slash or backslash
-commands.
-.PP
-The format of a \fBpsql\fR command is the backslash,
-followed immediately by a command verb, then any arguments. The arguments
-are separated from the command verb and each other by any number of
-whitespace characters.
-.PP
-To include whitespace into an argument you may quote it with a
-single quote. To include a single quote into such an argument,
-precede it by a backslash. Anything contained in single quotes is
-furthermore subject to C-like substitutions for
-\\n (new line), \\t (tab),
-\\\fIdigits\fR,
-\\0\fIdigits\fR, and
-\\0x\fIdigits\fR (the
-character with the given decimal, octal, or hexadecimal code).
-.PP
-If an unquoted argument begins with a colon (:),
-it is taken as a \fBpsql\fR variable and the value of the
-variable is used as the argument instead.
-.PP
-Arguments that are enclosed in backquotes (`)
-are taken as a command line that is passed to the shell. The
-output of the command (with any trailing newline removed) is taken
-as the argument value. The above escape sequences also apply in
-backquotes.
-.PP
-Some commands take an SQL identifier (such as a
-table name) as argument. These arguments follow the syntax rules
-of SQL: Unquoted letters are forced to
-lowercase, while double quotes (") protect letters
-from case conversion and allow incorporation of whitespace into
-the identifier. Within double quotes, paired double quotes reduce
-to a single double quote in the resulting name. For example,
-FOO"BAR"BAZ is interpreted as fooBARbaz,
-and "A weird"" name" becomes A weird"
-name.
-.PP
-Parsing for arguments stops when another unquoted backslash occurs.
-This is taken as the beginning of a new meta-command. The special
-sequence \\\\ (two backslashes) marks the end of
-arguments and continues parsing SQL commands, if
-any. That way SQL and
-\fBpsql\fR commands can be freely mixed on a
-line. But in any case, the arguments of a meta-command cannot
-continue beyond the end of the line.
-.PP
-The following meta-commands are defined:
-.TP
-\fB\\a\fR
-If the current table output format is unaligned, it is switched to aligned.
-If it is not unaligned, it is set to unaligned. This command is
-kept for backwards compatibility. See \fB\\pset\fR for a
-general solution.
-.TP
-\fB\\cd [\fIdirectory\fB]\fR
-Changes the current working directory to
-\fIdirectory\fR. Without argument, changes
-to the current user's home directory.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-To print your current working directory, use \\!pwd.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\C [ \fItitle\fB ]\fR
-Sets the title of any tables being printed as the result of a
-query or unset any such title. This command is equivalent to
-\\pset title \fItitle\fR. (The name of
-this command derives from ``caption'', as it was
-previously only used to set the caption in an
-HTML table.)
-.TP
-\fB\\connect (or \\c) [ \fIdbname\fB [ \fIusername\fB ] ]\fR
-Establishes a connection to a new database and/or under a user
-name. The previous connection is closed. If \fIdbname\fR is -
-the current database name is assumed.
-
-If \fIusername\fR is
-omitted the current user name is assumed.
-
-As a special rule, \fB\\connect\fR without any
-arguments will connect to the default database as the default
-user (as you would have gotten by starting
-\fBpsql\fR without any arguments).
-
-If the connection attempt failed (wrong user name, access
-denied, etc.), the previous connection will be kept if and only
-if \fBpsql\fR is in interactive mode. When
-executing a non-interactive script, processing will immediately
-stop with an error. This distinction was chosen as a user
-convenience against typos on the one hand, and a safety
-mechanism that scripts are not accidentally acting on the wrong
-database on the other hand.
-.TP
-\fB\\copy \fItable\fB\fR
-Performs a frontend (client) copy. This is an operation that
-runs an SQL COPY [\fBcopy\fR(7)] command, but instead of the server
-reading or writing the specified file,
-\fBpsql\fR reads or writes the file and
-routes the data between the server and the local file system.
-This means that file accessibility and privileges are those
-of the local user, not the server, and no SQL superuser
-privileges are required.
-
-The syntax of the command is similar to that of the
-SQL \fBCOPY\fR command. (See its
-description for the details.) Note that, because of this,
-special parsing rules apply to the \fB\\copy\fR
-command. In particular, the variable substitution rules and
-backslash escapes do not apply.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-This operation is not as efficient as the SQL
-\fBCOPY\fR command because all data must pass
-through the client/server connection. For large
-amounts of data the other technique may be preferable.
-.RE
-.sp
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-Note the difference in interpretation of
-stdin and stdout between
-client and server copies: in a client copy these always
-refer to \fBpsql\fR's input and output
-stream. On a server copy stdin comes from
-wherever the \fBCOPY\fR itself came from (for
-example, a script run with the \fB-f\fR option), and
-stdout refers to the query output stream (see
-\fB\\o\fR meta-command below).
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\copyright\fR
-Shows the copyright and distribution terms of
-\fBPostgreSQL\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\\d [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-For each relation (table, view, index, or sequence) matching the
-\fIpattern\fR, show all
-columns, their types, and any special
-attributes such as NOT NULL or defaults, if
-any. Associated indexes, constraints, rules, and triggers are
-also shown, as is the view definition if the relation is a view.
-(``Matching the pattern'' is defined below.)
-
-The command form \\d+ is identical, but any
-comments associated with the table columns are shown as well.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-If \fB\\d\fR is used without a
-\fIpattern\fR argument, it is
-equivalent to \fB\\dtvs\fR which will show a list of
-all tables, views, and sequences. This is purely a convenience
-measure.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\da [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists all available aggregate functions, together with the data
-type they operate on. If \fIpattern\fR
-is specified, only aggregates whose names match the pattern are shown.
-.TP
-\fB\\dc [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists all available conversions between character-set encodings.
-If \fIpattern\fR
-is specified, only conversions whose names match the pattern are
-listed.
-.TP
-\fB\\dC\fR
-Lists all available type casts.
-.TP
-\fB\\dd [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Shows the descriptions of objects matching the \fIpattern\fR, or of all visible objects if
-no argument is given. But in either case, only objects that have
-a description are listed.
-(``Object'' covers aggregates, functions, operators,
-types, relations (tables, views, indexes, sequences, large
-objects), rules, and triggers.) For example:
-.sp
-.nf
-=> \fB\\dd version\fR
- Object descriptions
- Schema | Name | Object | Description
-------------+---------+----------+---------------------------
- pg_catalog | version | function | PostgreSQL version string
-(1 row)
-.sp
-.fi
-
-Descriptions for objects can be created with the
-\fBCOMMENT\fR SQL command.
-.TP
-\fB\\dD [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists all available domains. If \fIpattern\fR
-is specified, only matching domains are shown.
-.TP
-\fB\\df [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists available functions, together with their argument and
-return types. If \fIpattern\fR
-is specified, only functions whose names match the pattern are shown.
-If the form
-\\df+ is used, additional information about
-each function, including language and description, is shown.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-To reduce clutter, \\df does not show data type I/O
-functions. This is implemented by ignoring functions that accept
-or return type \fBcstring\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\distvS [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-This is not the actual command name: the letters i, s, t, v, S
-stand for index, sequence, table, view, and system table,
-respectively. You can specify any or all of these letters, in any
-order, to obtain a listing of all the matching objects. The letter
-S restricts the listing to system objects; without S, only non-system
-objects are shown.
-If + is appended to the command name, each object is
-listed with its associated description, if any.
-
-If \fIpattern\fR is
-specified, only objects whose names match the pattern are listed.
-.TP
-\fB\\dl\fR
-This is an alias for \fB\\lo_list\fR, which shows a
-list of large objects.
-.TP
-\fB\\dn [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists all available schemas (namespaces). If \fIpattern\fR (a regular expression)
-is specified, only schemas whose names match the pattern are listed.
-.TP
-\fB\\do [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists available operators with their operand and return types.
-If \fIpattern\fR is
-specified, only operators whose names match the pattern are listed.
-.TP
-\fB\\dp [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Produces a list of all available tables with their
-associated access privileges.
-If \fIpattern\fR is
-specified, only tables whose names match the pattern are listed.
-
-The commands \fBgrant\fR(7) and
-\fBrevoke\fR(7)
-are used to set access privileges. See \fBgrant\fR(7)
-for more information.
-.TP
-\fB\\dT [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists all data types or only those that match \fIpattern\fR. The command form
-\\dT+ shows extra information.
-.TP
-\fB\\du [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Lists all database users or only those that match \fIpattern\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\\edit (or \\e) [ \fIfilename\fB ]\fR
-If \fIfilename\fR is
-specified, the file is edited; after the editor exits, its
-content is copied back to the query buffer. If no argument is
-given, the current query buffer is copied to a temporary file
-which is then edited in the same fashion.
-
-The new query buffer is then re-parsed according to the normal
-rules of \fBpsql\fR, where the whole buffer
-is treated as a single line. (Thus you cannot make scripts this
-way. Use \fB\\i\fR for that.) This means also that
-if the query ends with (or rather contains) a semicolon, it is
-immediately executed. In other cases it will merely wait in the
-query buffer.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-\fBpsql\fR searches the environment
-variables \fBPSQL_EDITOR\fR, \fBEDITOR\fR, and
-\fBVISUAL\fR (in that order) for an editor to use. If
-all of them are unset, \fI/bin/vi\fR is run.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\echo \fItext\fB [ ... ]\fR
-Prints the arguments to the standard output, separated by one
-space and followed by a newline. This can be useful to
-intersperse information in the output of scripts. For example:
-.sp
-.nf
-=> \fB\\echo `date`\fR
-Tue Oct 26 21:40:57 CEST 1999
-.sp
-.fi
-If the first argument is an unquoted -n the the trailing
-newline is not written.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-If you use the \fB\\o\fR command to redirect your
-query output you may wish to use \fB\\qecho\fR
-instead of this command.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\encoding [ \fIencoding\fB ]\fR
-Sets the client character set encoding. Without an argument, this command
-shows the current encoding.
-.TP
-\fB\\f [ \fIstring\fB ]\fR
-Sets the field separator for unaligned query output. The default
-is the vertical bar (|). See also
-\fB\\pset\fR for a generic way of setting output
-options.
-.TP
-\fB\\g [ { \fIfilename\fB | |\fIcommand\fB } ]\fR
-Sends the current query input buffer to the server and
-optionally saves the output in \fIfilename\fR or pipes the output
-into a separate Unix shell to execute \fIcommand\fR. A bare
-\\g is virtually equivalent to a semicolon. A
-\\g with argument is a ``one-shot''
-alternative to the \fB\\o\fR command.
-.TP
-\fB\\help (or \\h) [ \fIcommand\fB ]\fR
-Gives syntax help on the specified SQL
-command. If \fIcommand\fR
-is not specified, then \fBpsql\fR will list
-all the commands for which syntax help is available. If
-\fIcommand\fR is an
-asterisk (*), then syntax help on all
-SQL commands is shown.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-To simplify typing, commands that consists of several words do
-not have to be quoted. Thus it is fine to type \fB\\help
-alter table\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\H\fR
-Turns on HTML query output format. If the
-HTML format is already on, it is switched
-back to the default aligned text format. This command is for
-compatibility and convenience, but see \fB\\pset\fR
-about setting other output options.
-.TP
-\fB\\i \fIfilename\fB\fR
-Reads input from the file \fIfilename\fR and executes it as
-though it had been typed on the keyboard.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-If you want to see the lines on the screen as they are read you
-must set the variable ECHO to
-all.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\l (or \\list)\fR
-List the names, owners, and character set encodings of all the databases in
-the server. Append a + to the command name to
-see any descriptions for the databases as well.
-.TP
-\fB\\lo_export \fIloid\fB \fIfilename\fB\fR
-Reads the large object with OID \fIloid\fR from the database and
-writes it to \fIfilename\fR. Note that this is
-subtly different from the server function
-\fBlo_export\fR, which acts with the permissions
-of the user that the database server runs as and on the server's
-file system.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-Use \fB\\lo_list\fR to find out the large object's
-OID.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\lo_import \fIfilename\fB [ \fIcomment\fB ]\fR
-Stores the file into a PostgreSQL
-large object. Optionally, it associates the given
-comment with the object. Example:
-.sp
-.nf
-foo=> \fB\\lo_import '/home/peter/pictures/photo.xcf' 'a picture of me'\fR
-lo_import 152801
-.sp
-.fi
-The response indicates that the large object received object ID
-152801 which one ought to remember if one wants to access the
-object ever again. For that reason it is recommended to always
-associate a human-readable comment with every object. Those can
-then be seen with the \fB\\lo_list\fR command.
-
-Note that this command is subtly different from the server-side
-\fBlo_import\fR because it acts as the local user
-on the local file system, rather than the server's user and file
-system.
-.TP
-\fB\\lo_list\fR
-Shows a list of all PostgreSQL
-large objects currently stored in the database,
-along with any comments provided for them.
-.TP
-\fB\\lo_unlink \fIloid\fB\fR
-Deletes the large object with OID
-\fIloid\fR from the
-database.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-Use \fB\\lo_list\fR to find out the large object's
-OID.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\o [ {\fIfilename\fB | |\fIcommand\fB} ]\fR
-Saves future query results to the file \fIfilename\fR or pipes future results
-into a separate Unix shell to execute \fIcommand\fR. If no arguments are
-specified, the query output will be reset to the standard output.
-
-``Query results'' includes all tables, command
-responses, and notices obtained from the database server, as
-well as output of various backslash commands that query the
-database (such as \fB\\d\fR), but not error
-messages.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-To intersperse text output in between query results, use
-\fB\\qecho\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\p\fR
-Print the current query buffer to the standard output.
-.TP
-\fB\\pset \fIparameter\fB [ \fIvalue\fB ]\fR
-This command sets options affecting the output of query result
-tables. \fIparameter\fR
-describes which option is to be set. The semantics of
-\fIvalue\fR depend
-thereon.
-
-Adjustable printing options are:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBformat\fR
-Sets the output format to one of unaligned,
-aligned, html, or
-latex. Unique abbreviations are allowed.
-(That would mean one letter is enough.)
-
-``Unaligned'' writes all columns of a row on a
-line, separated by the currently active field separator. This
-is intended to create output that might be intended to be read
-in by other programs (tab-separated, comma-separated).
-``Aligned'' mode is the standard, human-readable,
-nicely formatted text output that is default. The
-``HTML'' and
-``LaTeX'' modes put out tables that are intended to
-be included in documents using the respective mark-up
-language. They are not complete documents! (This might not be
-so dramatic in HTML, but in LaTeX you must
-have a complete document wrapper.)
-.TP
-\fBborder\fR
-The second argument must be a number. In general, the higher
-the number the more borders and lines the tables will have,
-but this depends on the particular format. In
-HTML mode, this will translate directly
-into the border=... attribute, in the
-others only values 0 (no border), 1 (internal dividing lines),
-and 2 (table frame) make sense.
-.TP
-\fBexpanded (or x)\fR
-Toggles between regular and expanded format. When expanded
-format is enabled, all output has two columns with the column
-name on the left and the data on the right. This mode is
-useful if the data wouldn't fit on the screen in the normal
-``horizontal'' mode.
-
-Expanded mode is supported by all four output formats.
-.TP
-\fBnull\fR
-The second argument is a string that should be printed
-whenever a column is null. The default is not to print
-anything, which can easily be mistaken for, say, an empty
-string. Thus, one might choose to write \\pset null
-\&'(null)'.
-.TP
-\fBfieldsep\fR
-Specifies the field separator to be used in unaligned output
-mode. That way one can create, for example, tab- or
-comma-separated output, which other programs might prefer. To
-set a tab as field separator, type \\pset fieldsep
-\&'\\t'. The default field separator is
-\&'|' (a vertical bar).
-.TP
-\fBfooter\fR
-Toggles the display of the default footer (x
-rows).
-.TP
-\fBrecordsep\fR
-Specifies the record (line) separator to use in unaligned
-output mode. The default is a newline character.
-.TP
-\fBtuples_only (or t)\fR
-Toggles between tuples only and full display. Full display may
-show extra information such as column headers, titles, and
-various footers. In tuples only mode, only actual table data
-is shown.
-.TP
-\fBtitle [ \fItext\fB ]\fR
-Sets the table title for any subsequently printed tables. This
-can be used to give your output descriptive tags. If no
-argument is given, the title is unset.
-.TP
-\fBtableattr (or T) [ \fItext\fB ]\fR
-Allows you to specify any attributes to be placed inside the
-HTML table tag. This
-could for example be cellpadding or
-bgcolor. Note that you probably don't want
-to specify border here, as that is already
-taken care of by \\pset border.
-.TP
-\fBpager\fR
-Controls use of a pager for query and \fBpsql\fR
-help output. If the environment variable \fBPAGER\fR
-is set, the output is piped to the specified program.
-Otherwise a platform-dependent default (such as
-\fImore\fR) is used.
-
-When the pager is off, the pager is not used. When the pager
-is on, the pager is used only when appropriate, i.e. the
-output is to a terminal and will not fit on the screen.
-(\fBpsql\fR does not do a perfect job of estimating
-when to use the pager.) \\pset pager turns the
-pager on and off. Pager can also be set to always,
-which causes the pager to be always used.
-.RE
-.PP
-
-Illustrations on how these different formats look can be seen in
-the Examples [\fBpsql\fR(1)] section.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-There are various shortcut commands for \fB\\pset\fR. See
-\fB\\a\fR, \fB\\C\fR, \fB\\H\fR,
-\fB\\t\fR, \fB\\T\fR, and \fB\\x\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-It is an error to call \fB\\pset\fR without
-arguments. In the future this call might show the current status
-of all printing options.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\q\fR
-Quits the \fBpsql\fR program.
-.TP
-\fB\\qecho \fItext\fB [ ... ]\fR
-This command is identical to \fB\\echo\fR except
-that all output will be written to the query output channel, as
-set by \fB\\o\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\\r\fR
-Resets (clears) the query buffer.
-.TP
-\fB\\s [ \fIfilename\fB ]\fR
-Print or save the command line history to \fIfilename\fR. If \fIfilename\fR is omitted, the history
-is written to the standard output. This option is only available
-if \fBpsql\fR is configured to use the
-GNU history library.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-In the current version, it is no longer necessary to save the
-command history, since that will be done automatically on
-program termination. The history is also loaded automatically
-every time \fBpsql\fR starts up.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\set [ \fIname\fB [ \fIvalue\fB [ ... ]]]\fR
-Sets the internal variable \fIname\fR to \fIvalue\fR or, if more than one value
-is given, to the concatenation of all of them. If no second
-argument is given, the variable is just set with no value. To
-unset a variable, use the \fB\\unset\fR command.
-
-Valid variable names can contain characters, digits, and
-underscores. See the section Variables [\fBpsql\fR(1)] below for details.
-
-Although you are welcome to set any variable to anything you
-want, \fBpsql\fR treats several variables
-as special. They are documented in the section about variables.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-This command is totally separate from the SQL
-command SET [\fBset\fR(7)].
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB\\t\fR
-Toggles the display of output column name headings and row count
-footer. This command is equivalent to \\pset
-tuples_only and is provided for convenience.
-.TP
-\fB\\T \fItable_options\fB\fR
-Allows you to specify attributes to be placed within the
-table tag in HTML tabular
-output mode. This command is equivalent to \\pset
-tableattr \fItable_options\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\\timing\fR
-Toggles a display of how long each SQL statement takes, in milliseconds.
-.TP
-\fB\\w {\fIfilename\fB | \fI|command\fB}\fR
-Outputs the current query buffer to the file \fIfilename\fR or pipes it to the Unix
-command \fIcommand\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\\x\fR
-Toggles extended table formatting mode. As such it is equivalent to
-\\pset expanded.
-.TP
-\fB\\z [ \fIpattern\fB ]\fR
-Produces a list of all available tables with their
-associated access privileges.
-If a \fIpattern\fR is
-specified, only tables whose names match the pattern are listed.
-
-The commands \fBgrant\fR(7) and
-\fBrevoke\fR(7)
-are used to set access privileges. See \fBgrant\fR(7)
-for more information.
-
-This is an alias for \fB\\dp\fR (``display
-privileges'').
-.TP
-\fB\\! [ \fIcommand\fB ]\fR
-Escapes to a separate Unix shell or executes the Unix command
-\fIcommand\fR. The
-arguments are not further interpreted, the shell will see them
-as is.
-.TP
-\fB\\?\fR
-Shows help information about the backslash commands.
-.PP
-.PP
-The various \\d commands accept a \fIpattern\fR parameter to specify the
-object name(s) to be displayed. * means ``any
-sequence of characters'' and ? means ``any single
-character''. (This notation is comparable to Unix shell file name
-patterns.) Advanced users can also use regular-expression
-notations such as character classes, for example [0-9]
-to match ``any digit''. To make any of these
-pattern-matching characters be interpreted literally, surround it
-with double quotes.
-.PP
-A pattern that contains an (unquoted) dot is interpreted as a schema
-name pattern followed by an object name pattern. For example,
-\\dt foo*.bar* displays all tables in schemas whose name
-starts with foo and whose table name
-starts with bar. If no dot appears, then the pattern
-matches only objects that are visible in the current schema search path.
-.PP
-Whenever the \fIpattern\fR parameter
-is omitted completely, the \\d commands display all objects
-that are visible in the current schema search path. To see all objects
-in the database, use the pattern *.*.
-.SS "ADVANCED FEATURES"
-.SS "VARIABLES"
-.PP
-\fBpsql\fR provides variable substitution
-features similar to common Unix command shells.
-Variables are simply name/value pairs, where the value
-can be any string of any length. To set variables, use the
-\fBpsql\fR meta-command
-\fB\\set\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\set foo bar\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-sets the variable foo to the value
-bar. To retrieve the content of the variable, precede
-the name with a colon and use it as the argument of any slash
-command:
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\echo :foo\fR
-bar
-.sp
-.fi
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-The arguments of \fB\\set\fR are subject to the same
-substitution rules as with other commands. Thus you can construct
-interesting references such as \\set :foo
-\&'something' and get ``soft links'' or
-``variable variables'' of Perl
-or PHP fame,
-respectively. Unfortunately (or fortunately?), there is no way to do
-anything useful with these constructs. On the other hand,
-\\set bar :foo is a perfectly valid way to copy a
-variable.
-.RE
-.sp
-.PP
-If you call \fB\\set\fR without a second argument, the
-variable is set, with an empty string as value. To unset (or delete) a
-variable, use the command \fB\\unset\fR.
-.PP
-\fBpsql\fR's internal variable names can
-consist of letters, numbers, and underscores in any order and any
-number of them. A number of these variables are treated specially
-by \fBpsql\fR. They indicate certain option
-settings that can be changed at run time by altering the value of
-the variable or represent some state of the application. Although
-you can use these variables for any other purpose, this is not
-recommended, as the program behavior might grow really strange
-really quickly. By convention, all specially treated variables
-consist of all upper-case letters (and possibly numbers and
-underscores). To ensure maximum compatibility in the future, avoid
-using such variable names for your own purposes. A list of all specially
-treated variables follows.
-.TP
-\fBAUTOCOMMIT\fR
-When on (the default), each SQL command is automatically
-committed upon successful completion. To postpone commit in this
-mode, you must enter a \fBBEGIN\fR or \fBSTART
-TRANSACTION\fR SQL command. When off or unset, SQL
-commands are not committed until you explicitly issue
-\fBCOMMIT\fR or \fBEND\fR. The autocommit-off
-mode works by issuing an implicit \fBBEGIN\fR for you, just
-before any command that is not already in a transaction block and
-is not itself a \fBBEGIN\fR or other transaction-control
-command.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-In autocommit-off mode, you must explicitly abandon any failed
-transaction by entering \fBABORT\fR or \fBROLLBACK\fR.
-Also keep in mind that if you exit the session
-without committing, your work will be lost.
-.RE
-.sp
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-The autocommit-on mode is PostgreSQL's traditional
-behavior, but autocommit-off is closer to the SQL spec. If you
-prefer autocommit-off, you may wish to set it in
-your \fI.psqlrc\fR file.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fBDBNAME\fR
-The name of the database you are currently connected to. This is
-set every time you connect to a database (including program
-start-up), but can be unset.
-.TP
-\fBECHO\fR
-If set to all, all lines
-entered or from a script are written to the standard output
-before they are parsed or executed. To select this behavior on program
-start-up, use the switch \fB-a\fR. If set to
-queries,
-\fBpsql\fR merely prints all queries as
-they are sent to the server. The switch for this is
-\fB-e\fR.
-.TP
-\fBECHO_HIDDEN\fR
-When this variable is set and a backslash command queries the
-database, the query is first shown. This way you can study the
-PostgreSQL internals and provide
-similar functionality in your own programs. (To select this behavior
-on program start-up, use the switch \fB-E\fR.) If you set
-the variable to the value noexec, the queries are
-just shown but are not actually sent to the server and executed.
-.TP
-\fBENCODING\fR
-The current client character set encoding.
-.TP
-\fBHISTCONTROL\fR
-If this variable is set to ignorespace,
-lines which begin with a space are not entered into the history
-list. If set to a value of ignoredups, lines
-matching the previous history line are not entered. A value of
-ignoreboth combines the two options. If
-unset, or if set to any other value than those above, all lines
-read in interactive mode are saved on the history list.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-This feature was shamelessly plagiarized from
-\fBBash\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fBHISTSIZE\fR
-The number of commands to store in the command history. The
-default value is 500.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-This feature was shamelessly plagiarized from
-\fBBash\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fBHOST\fR
-The database server host you are currently connected to. This is
-set every time you connect to a database (including program
-start-up), but can be unset.
-.TP
-\fBIGNOREEOF\fR
-If unset, sending an EOF character (usually
-\fBControl\fR+\fBD\fR)
-to an interactive session of \fBpsql\fR
-will terminate the application. If set to a numeric value,
-that many EOF characters are ignored before the
-application terminates. If the variable is set but has no
-numeric value, the default is 10.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-This feature was shamelessly plagiarized from
-\fBBash\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fBLASTOID\fR
-The value of the last affected OID, as returned from an
-\fBINSERT\fR or \fBlo_insert\fR
-command. This variable is only guaranteed to be valid until
-after the result of the next SQL command has
-been displayed.
-.TP
-\fBON_ERROR_STOP\fR
-By default, if non-interactive scripts encounter an error, such
-as a malformed SQL command or internal
-meta-command, processing continues. This has been the
-traditional behavior of \fBpsql\fR but it
-is sometimes not desirable. If this variable is set, script
-processing will immediately terminate. If the script was called
-from another script it will terminate in the same fashion. If
-the outermost script was not called from an interactive
-\fBpsql\fR session but rather using the
-\fB-f\fR option, \fBpsql\fR will
-return error code 3, to distinguish this case from fatal error
-conditions (error code 1).
-.TP
-\fBPORT\fR
-The database server port to which you are currently connected.
-This is set every time you connect to a database (including
-program start-up), but can be unset.
-.TP
-\fBPROMPT1\fR
-.TP
-\fBPROMPT2\fR
-.TP
-\fBPROMPT3\fR
-These specify what the prompts \fBpsql\fR
-issues should look like. See Prompting [\fBpsql\fR(1)] below.
-.TP
-\fBQUIET\fR
-This variable is equivalent to the command line option
-\fB-q\fR. It is probably not too useful in
-interactive mode.
-.TP
-\fBSINGLELINE\fR
-This variable is equivalent to the command line option
-\fB-S\fR.
-.TP
-\fBSINGLESTEP\fR
-This variable is equivalent to the command line option
-\fB-s\fR.
-.TP
-\fBUSER\fR
-The database user you are currently connected as. This is set
-every time you connect to a database (including program
-start-up), but can be unset.
-.TP
-\fBVERBOSITY\fR
-This variable can be set to the values default,
-verbose, or terse to control the verbosity
-of error reports.
-.SS "SQL INTERPOLATION"
-.PP
-An additional useful feature of \fBpsql\fR
-variables is that you can substitute (``interpolate'')
-them into regular SQL statements. The syntax for
-this is again to prepend the variable name with a colon
-(:).
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\set foo 'my_table'\fR
-testdb=> \fBSELECT * FROM :foo;\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-would then query the table my_table. The value of
-the variable is copied literally, so it can even contain unbalanced
-quotes or backslash commands. You must make sure that it makes sense
-where you put it. Variable interpolation will not be performed into
-quoted SQL entities.
-.PP
-A popular application of this facility is to refer to the last
-inserted OID in subsequent statements to build a
-foreign key scenario. Another possible use of this mechanism is to
-copy the contents of a file into a table column. First load the file into a
-variable and then proceed as above.
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\set content '\\'' `cat my_file.txt` '\\''\fR
-testdb=> \fBINSERT INTO my_table VALUES (:content);\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-One possible problem with this approach is that \fImy_file.txt\fR
-might contain single quotes. These need to be escaped so that
-they don't cause a syntax error when the second line is processed. This
-could be done with the program \fBsed\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\set content '\\'' `sed -e "s/'/\\\\\\\\\\\\'/g" < my_file.txt` '\\''\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-Observe the correct number of backslashes (6)! It works
-this way: After \fBpsql\fR has parsed this
-line, it passes sed -e "s/'/\\\\\\'/g" < my_file.txt
-to the shell. The shell will do its own thing inside the double
-quotes and execute \fBsed\fR with the arguments
--e and s/'/\\\\'/g. When
-\fBsed\fR parses this it will replace the two
-backslashes with a single one and then do the substitution. Perhaps
-at one point you thought it was great that all Unix commands use the
-same escape character. And this is ignoring the fact that you might
-have to escape all backslashes as well because
-SQL text constants are also subject to certain
-interpretations. In that case you might be better off preparing the
-file externally.
-.PP
-Since colons may legally appear in SQL commands, the following rule
-applies: the character sequence
-``:name'' is not changed unless ``name'' is the name
-of a variable that is currently set. In any case you can escape
-a colon with a backslash to protect it from substitution. (The
-colon syntax for variables is standard SQL for
-embedded query languages, such as \fBECPG\fR.
-The colon syntax for array slices and type casts are
-PostgreSQL extensions, hence the
-conflict.)
-.SS "PROMPTING"
-.PP
-The prompts \fBpsql\fR issues can be customized
-to your preference. The three variables PROMPT1,
-PROMPT2, and PROMPT3 contain strings
-and special escape sequences that describe the appearance of the
-prompt. Prompt 1 is the normal prompt that is issued when
-\fBpsql\fR requests a new command. Prompt 2 is
-issued when more input is expected during command input because the
-command was not terminated with a semicolon or a quote was not closed.
-Prompt 3 is issued when you run an SQL
-\fBCOPY\fR command and you are expected to type in the
-row values on the terminal.
-.PP
-The value of the selected prompt variable is printed literally,
-except where a percent sign (%) is encountered.
-Depending on the next character, certain other text is substituted
-instead. Defined substitutions are:
-.TP
-\fB%M\fR
-The full host name (with domain name) of the database server,
-or [local] if the connection is over a Unix
-domain socket, or
-[local:\fI/dir/name\fR], if the Unix domain socket is not at the compiled in default
-location.
-.TP
-\fB%m\fR
-The host name of the database server, truncated at the
-first dot, or [local] if the connection is
-over a Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB%>\fR
-The port number at which the database server is listening.
-.TP
-\fB%n\fR
-The database session user name. (The expansion of this
-value might change during a database session as the result
-of the command \fBSET SESSION
-AUTHORIZATION\fR.)
-.TP
-\fB%/\fR
-The name of the current database.
-.TP
-\fB%~\fR
-Like %/, but the output is ~
-(tilde) if the database is your default database.
-.TP
-\fB%#\fR
-If the session user is a database superuser, then a
-#, otherwise a >.
-(The expansion of this value might change during a database
-session as the result of the command \fBSET SESSION
-AUTHORIZATION\fR.)
-.TP
-\fB%R\fR
-In prompt 1 normally =, but ^ if
-in single-line mode, and ! if the session is
-disconnected from the database (which can happen if
-\fB\\connect\fR fails). In prompt 2 the sequence is
-replaced by -, *, a single quote,
-or a double quote, depending on whether
-\fBpsql\fR expects more input because the
-command wasn't terminated yet, because you are inside a
-/* ... */ comment, or because you are inside
-a quote. In prompt 3 the sequence doesn't produce anything.
-.TP
-\fB%x\fR
-Transaction status: an empty string when not in a transaction
-block, or * when in a transaction block, or
-! when in a failed transaction block, or ?
-when the transaction state is indeterminate (for example, because
-there is no connection).
-.TP
-\fB%\fIdigits\fB\fR
-The character with the indicated numeric code is substituted.
-If \fIdigits\fR starts
-with 0x the rest of the characters are
-interpreted as hexadecimal; otherwise if the first digit is
-0 the digits are interpreted as octal;
-otherwise the digits are read as a decimal number.
-.TP
-\fB%:\fIname\fB:\fR
-The value of the \fBpsql\fR variable
-\fIname\fR. See the
-section Variables [\fBpsql\fR(1)] for details.
-.TP
-\fB%`\fIcommand\fB`\fR
-The output of \fIcommand\fR, similar to ordinary
-``back-tick'' substitution.
-.PP
-To insert a percent sign into your prompt, write
-%%. The default prompts are
-\&'%/%R%# ' for prompts 1 and 2, and
-\&'>> ' for prompt 3.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-This feature was shamelessly plagiarized from
-\fBtcsh\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.SS "COMMAND-LINE EDITING"
-.PP
-\fBpsql\fR supports the \fBReadline\fR
-library for convenient line editing and retrieval. The command
-history is stored in a file named \fI.psql_history\fR
-in your home directory and is reloaded when
-\fBpsql\fR starts up. Tab-completion is also
-supported, although the completion logic makes no claim to be an
-SQL parser. If for some reason you do not like the tab completion, you
-can turn if off by putting this in a file named
-\fI\&.inputrc\fR in your home directory:
-.sp
-.nf
-$if psql
-set disable-completion on
-$endif
-.sp
-.fi
-(This is not a \fBpsql\fR but a
-\fBReadline\fR feature. Read its documentation
-for further details.)
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBHOME\fR
-Directory for initialization file (\fI.psqlrc\fR)
-and command history file (\fI.psql_history\fR).
-.TP
-\fBPAGER\fR
-If the query results do not fit on the screen, they are piped
-through this command. Typical values are
-more or less. The default
-is platform-dependent. The use of the pager can be disabled by
-using the \fB\\pset\fR command.
-.TP
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR
-Default database to connect to
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.TP
-\fBPSQL_EDITOR\fR
-.TP
-\fBEDITOR\fR
-.TP
-\fBVISUAL\fR
-Editor used by the \fB\\e\fR command. The variables
-are examined in the order listed; the first that is set is used.
-.TP
-\fBSHELL\fR
-Command executed by the \fB\\!\fR command.
-.TP
-\fBTMPDIR\fR
-Directory for storing temporary files. The default is
-\fI/tmp\fR.
-.SH "FILES"
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Before starting up, \fBpsql\fR attempts to
-read and execute commands from the file
-\fI$HOME/.psqlrc\fR. It could be used to set up
-the client or the server to taste (using the \fB\\set
-\fRand \fBSET\fR commands).
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-The command-line history is stored in the file
-\fI$HOME/.psql_history\fR.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-In an earlier life \fBpsql\fR allowed the
-first argument of a single-letter backslash command to start
-directly after the command, without intervening whitespace. For
-compatibility this is still supported to some extent,
-but were are not going to explain the details here as this use is
-discouraged. If you get strange messages, keep this in mind.
-For example
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\foo\fR
-Field separator is "oo".
-.sp
-.fi
-which is perhaps not what one would expect.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-\fBpsql\fR only works smoothly with servers
-of the same version. That does not mean other combinations will
-fail outright, but subtle and not-so-subtle problems might come
-up. Backslash commands are particularly likely to fail if the
-server is of a different version.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The first example shows how to spread a command over several lines of
-input. Notice the changing prompt:
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fBCREATE TABLE my_table (\fR
-testdb(> \fB first integer not null default 0,\fR
-testdb(> \fB second text\fR
-testdb-> \fB);\fR
-CREATE TABLE
-.sp
-.fi
-Now look at the table definition again:
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\d my_table\fR
- Table "my_table"
- Attribute | Type | Modifier
------------+---------+--------------------
- first | integer | not null default 0
- second | text |
-.sp
-.fi
-Now we change the prompt to something more interesting:
-.sp
-.nf
-testdb=> \fB\\set PROMPT1 '%n@%m %~%R%# '\fR
-peter at localhost testdb=>
-.sp
-.fi
-Let's assume you have filled the table with data and want to take a
-look at it:
-.sp
-.nf
-peter at localhost testdb=> SELECT * FROM my_table;
- first | second
--------+--------
- 1 | one
- 2 | two
- 3 | three
- 4 | four
-(4 rows)
-.sp
-.fi
-You can make this table look differently by using the
-\fB\\pset\fR command:
-.sp
-.nf
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fB\\pset border 2\fR
-Border style is 2.
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fBSELECT * FROM my_table;\fR
-+-------+--------+
-| first | second |
-+-------+--------+
-| 1 | one |
-| 2 | two |
-| 3 | three |
-| 4 | four |
-+-------+--------+
-(4 rows)
-
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fB\\pset border 0\fR
-Border style is 0.
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fBSELECT * FROM my_table;\fR
-first second
------ ------
- 1 one
- 2 two
- 3 three
- 4 four
-(4 rows)
-
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fB\\pset border 1\fR
-Border style is 1.
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fB\\pset format unaligned\fR
-Output format is unaligned.
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fB\\pset fieldsep ","\fR
-Field separator is ",".
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fB\\pset tuples_only\fR
-Showing only tuples.
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fBSELECT second, first FROM my_table;\fR
-one,1
-two,2
-three,3
-four,4
-.sp
-.fi
-Alternatively, use the short commands:
-.sp
-.nf
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fB\\a \\t \\x\fR
-Output format is aligned.
-Tuples only is off.
-Expanded display is on.
-peter at localhost testdb=> \fBSELECT * FROM my_table;\fR
--[ RECORD 1 ]-
-first | 1
-second | one
--[ RECORD 2 ]-
-first | 2
-second | two
--[ RECORD 3 ]-
-first | 3
-second | three
--[ RECORD 4 ]-
-first | 4
-second | four
-.sp
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man1/pushd.1 b/raw/man1/pushd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pushd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/pwd.1 b/raw/man1/pwd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 09e3b7f..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/pwd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH PWD "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-pwd \- print name of current/working directory
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B pwd
-[\fIOPTION\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-NOTE: your shell may have its own version of pwd which will supercede
-the version described here. Please refer to your shell's documentation
-for details about the options it supports.
-.PP
-Print the full filename of the current working directory.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B pwd
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B pwd
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info pwd
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/quota.1 b/raw/man1/quota.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c49610..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/quota.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
-.TH QUOTA 1
-.SH NAME
-quota \- display disk usage and limits
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B quota
-[
-.B -F
-.I format-name
-] [
-.BR -guvs \ |
-.B q
-]
-.br
-.B quota
-[
-.B -F
-.I format-name
-] [
-.BR -uvs \ |
-.B q
-]
-.I user
-.br
-.B quota
-[
-.B -F
-.I format-name
-] [
-.BR -gvs \ |
-.B q
-]
-.I group
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B quota
-displays users' disk usage and limits.
-By default only the user quotas are printed.
-.PP
-.B quota
-reports the quotas of all the filesystems listed in
-.BR /etc/mtab .
-For filesystems that are NFS-mounted a call to the rpc.rquotad on
-the server machine is performed to get the information.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-F \f2format-name\f1
-Show quota for specified format (ie. don't perform format autodetection).
-Possible format names are:
-.B vfsold
-(version 1 quota),
-.B vfsv0
-(version 2 quota),
-.B rpc
-(quota over NFS),
-.B xfs
-(quota on XFS filesystem)
-.TP
-.B \-g
-Print group quotas for the group
-of which the user is a member.
-The optional
-.TP
-.B \-u
-flag is equivalent to the default.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-will display quotas on filesystems
-where no storage is allocated.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-flag will make
-.BR quota (1)
-try to choose units for showing limits, used space and used inodes.
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Print a more terse message,
-containing only information
-on filesystems where usage is over quota.
-.LP
-Specifying both
-.B \-g
-and
-.B \-u
-displays both the user quotas and the group quotas (for
-the user).
-.LP
-Only the super-user may use the
-.B \-u
-flag and the optional
-.B user
-argument to view the limits of other users.
-Non-super-users can use the the
-.B \-g
-flag and optional
-.B group
-argument to view only the limits of groups of which they are members.
-.LP
-The
-.B \-q
-flag takes precedence over the
-.B \-v
-flag.
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-If
-.B quota
-exits with a non-zero status, one or more filesystems
-are over quota.
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-.B aquota.user " or " aquota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 2 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP 20
-.B quota.user " or " quota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 1 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.B /etc/mtab
-default filesystems
-.PD
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR quotactl (2),
-.BR fstab (5),
-.BR edquota (8),
-.BR quotacheck (8),
-.BR quotaon (8),
-.BR repquota (8)
diff --git a/raw/man1/read.1 b/raw/man1/read.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/read.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/readonly.1 b/raw/man1/readonly.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/readonly.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/return.1 b/raw/man1/return.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/return.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/rlogin.1 b/raw/man1/rlogin.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 182736a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/rlogin.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" from: @(#)rlogin.1 6.19 (Berkeley) 7/27/91
-.\"
-.Dd August 15, 1999
-.Dt RLOGIN 1
-.Os "Linux NetKit (0.17)"
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm rlogin
-.Nd remote login
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Ar rlogin
-.Op Fl 8EKLdx
-.Op Fl e Ar char
-.Op Fl l Ar username
-.Ar host
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm Rlogin
-starts a terminal session on a remote host
-.Ar host .
-.Pp
-The standard Berkeley
-.Pa rhosts
-authorization mechanism is used.
-The options are as follows:
-.Bl -tag -width flag
-.It Fl 8
-The
-.Fl 8
-option allows an eight-bit input data path at all times; otherwise
-parity bits are stripped except when the remote side's stop and start
-characters are other than
-^S/^Q .
-.It Fl E
-The
-.Fl E
-option stops any character from being recognized as an escape character.
-When used with the
-.Fl 8
-option, this provides a completely transparent connection.
-.It Fl L
-The
-.Fl L
-option allows the rlogin session to be run in ``litout'' (see
-.Xr tty 4 )
-mode.
-.It Fl d
-The
-.Fl d
-option turns on socket debugging (see
-.Xr setsockopt 2 )
-on the TCP sockets used for communication with the remote host.
-.It Fl e
-The
-.Fl e
-option allows user specification of the escape character, which is
-``~'' by default.
-This specification may be as a literal character, or as an octal
-value in the form \ennn.
-.El
-.Pp
-A line of the form ``<escape char>.'' disconnects from the remote host.
-Similarly, the line ``<escape char>^Z'' will suspend the
-.Nm rlogin
-session, and ``<escape char><delayed-suspend char>'' suspends the
-send portion of the rlogin, but allows output from the remote system.
-By default, the tilde (``~'') character is the escape character, and
-normally control-Y (``^Y'') is the delayed-suspend character.
-.Pp
-All echoing takes place at the remote site, so that (except for delays)
-the
-.Nm rlogin
-is transparent.
-Flow control via ^S/^Q and flushing of input and output on interrupts
-are handled properly.
-.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-The following environment variable is utilized by
-.Nm rlogin :
-.Bl -tag -width TERM
-.It Ev TERM
-Determines the user's terminal type.
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr rsh 1 ,
-.Sh HISTORY
-The
-.Nm rlogin
-command appeared in
-.Bx 4.2 .
-.Sh BUGS
-.Nm Rlogin
-will be replaced by
-.Xr telnet 1
-in the near future.
-.Pp
-More of the environment should be propagated.
diff --git a/raw/man1/rm.1 b/raw/man1/rm.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 057c0fc..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/rm.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH RM "1" "March 2003" "rm (coreutils) 5.0" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-rm \- remove files or directories
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B rm
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIFILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page
-documents the GNU version of
-.BR rm .
-.B rm
-removes each specified file. By default, it does not remove
-directories.
-.P
-If a file is unwritable, the standard input is a tty, and
-the \fI\-f\fR or \fI\-\-force\fR option is not given,
-.B rm
-prompts the user for whether to remove the file. If the response
-does not begin with `y' or `Y', the file is skipped.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.PP
-Remove (unlink) the FILE(s).
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-directory\fR
-unlink FILE, even if it is a non-empty directory
-(super-user only)
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-force\fR
-ignore nonexistent files, never prompt
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-interactive\fR
-prompt before any removal
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-R\fR, \fB\-\-recursive\fR
-remove the contents of directories recursively
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-explain what is being done
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-To remove a file whose name starts with a `-', for example `-foo',
-use one of these commands:
-.IP
-\fBrm\fR \fB\-\-\fR \-foo
-.IP
-\fBrm\fR ./\-foo
-.PP
-Note that if you use rm to remove a file, it is usually possible to recover
-the contents of that file. If you want more assurance that the contents are
-truly unrecoverable, consider using shred.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, Richard Stallman, and Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-shred(1)
-.PP
-The full documentation for
-.B rm
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B rm
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info rm
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/rmdir.1 b/raw/man1/rmdir.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ef87507..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/rmdir.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH RMDIR "1" "October 2003" "rmdir (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-rmdir \- remove empty directories
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B rmdir
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIDIRECTORY\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Remove the DIRECTORY(ies), if they are empty.
-.HP
-\fB\-\-ignore\-fail\-on\-non\-empty\fR
-.IP
-ignore each failure that is solely because a directory
-is non-empty
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-parents\fR
-remove DIRECTORY, then try to remove each directory
-component of that path name. E.g., `rmdir \fB\-p\fR a/b/c' is
-similar to `rmdir a/b/c a/b a'.
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-output a diagnostic for every directory processed
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B rmdir
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B rmdir
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info rmdir
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/rvi.1 b/raw/man1/rvi.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6f1d24..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/rvi.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIM 1 "2002 Feb 22"
-.SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] [file ..]
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] -
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-t tag
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-q [errorfile]
-.PP
-.br
-.B ex
-.br
-.B view
-.br
-.B gvim
-.B gview
-.br
-.B rvim
-.B rview
-.B rgvim
-.B rgview
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vim
-is a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.
-It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
-It is especially useful for editing programs.
-.PP
-There are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo,
-multi windows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line
-editing, filename completion, on-line help, visual selection, etc..
-See ":help vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between
-.B Vim
-and Vi.
-.PP
-While running
-.B Vim
-a lot of help can be obtained from the on-line help system, with the ":help"
-command.
-See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
-.PP
-Most often
-.B Vim
-is started to edit a single file with the command
-.PP
- vim file
-.PP
-More generally
-.B Vim
-is started with:
-.PP
- vim [options] [filelist]
-.PP
-If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used to choose one or
-more files to be edited.
-.TP 12
-file ..
-A list of filenames.
-The first one will be the current file and read into the buffer.
-The cursor will be positioned on the first line of the buffer.
-You can get to the other files with the ":next" command.
-To edit a file that starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
-.TP
--
-The file to edit is read from stdin. Commands are read from stderr, which
-should be a tty.
-.TP
--t {tag}
-The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on a "tag", a sort
-of goto label.
-{tag} is looked up in the tags file, the associated file becomes the current
-file and the associated command is executed.
-Mostly this is used for C programs, in which case {tag} could be a function
-name.
-The effect is that the file containing that function becomes the current file
-and the cursor is positioned on the start of the function.
-See ":help tag-commands".
-.TP
--q [errorfile]
-Start in quickFix mode.
-The file [errorfile] is read and the first error is displayed.
-If [errorfile] is omitted, the filename is obtained from the 'errorfile'
-option (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the Amiga, "errors.err" on other
-systems).
-Further errors can be jumped to with the ":cn" command.
-See ":help quickfix".
-.PP
-.B Vim
-behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the executable may
-still be the same file).
-.TP 10
-vim
-The "normal" way, everything is default.
-.TP
-ex
-Start in Ex mode.
-Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
-Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
-.TP
-view
-Start in read-only mode. You will be protected from writing the files. Can
-also be done with the "-R" argument.
-.TP
-gvim gview
-The GUI version.
-Starts a new window.
-Can also be done with the "-g" argument.
-.TP
-rvim rview rgvim rgview
-Like the above, but with restrictions. It will not be possible to start shell
-commands, or suspend
-.B Vim.
-Can also be done with the "-Z" argument.
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options may be given in any order, before or after filenames.
-Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
-.TP 12
-+[num]
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on line "num".
-If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned on the last line.
-.TP
-+/{pat}
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on the
-first occurrence of {pat}.
-See ":help search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
-.TP
-+{command}
-.TP
--c {command}
-{command} will be executed after the
-first file has been read.
-{command} is interpreted as an Ex command.
-If the {command} contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes (this
-depends on the shell that is used).
-Example: Vim "+set si" main.c
-.br
-Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
-.TP
---cmd {command}
-Like using "-c", but the command is executed just before
-processing any vimrc file.
-You can use up to 10 of these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-.TP
--A
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with ARABIC support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Arabic keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is set. Otherwise an error
-message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--b
-Binary mode.
-A few options will be set that makes it possible to edit a binary or
-executable file.
-.TP
--C
-Compatible. Set the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave mostly like Vi, even though a .vimrc file exists.
-.TP
--d
-Start in diff mode.
-There should be two or three file name arguments.
-.B Vim
-will open all the files and show differences between them.
-Works like vimdiff(1).
-.TP
--d {device}
-Open {device} for use as a terminal.
-Only on the Amiga.
-Example:
-"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
-.TP
--e
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Ex mode, just like the executable was called "ex".
-.TP
--f
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-On the Amiga,
-.B Vim
-is not restarted to open a new window.
-This option should be used when
-.B Vim
-is executed by a program that will wait for the edit
-session to finish (e.g. mail).
-On the Amiga the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
-.TP
---nofork
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-.TP
--F
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with FKMAP support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Farsi keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--g
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with GUI support, this option enables the GUI.
-If no GUI support was compiled in, an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--h
-Give a bit of help about the command line arguments and options.
-After this
-.B Vim
-exits.
-.TP
--H
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Hebrew keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--i {viminfo}
-When using the viminfo file is enabled, this option sets the filename to use,
-instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
-This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file, by giving the name
-"NONE".
-.TP
--L
-Same as -r.
-.TP
--l
-Lisp mode.
-Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
-.TP
--m
-Modifying files is disabled.
-Resets the 'write' option, so that writing files is not possible.
-.TP
--N
-No-compatible mode. Reset the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible, even though a .vimrc file does
-not exist.
-.TP
--n
-No swap file will be used.
-Recovery after a crash will be impossible.
-Handy if you want to edit a file on a very slow medium (e.g. floppy).
-Can also be done with ":set uc=0".
-Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
-.TP
--o[N]
-Open N windows stacked.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--O[N]
-Open N windows side by side.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--R
-Read-only mode.
-The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
-overwriting a file.
-If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
-as in ":w!".
-The -R option also implies the -n option (see below).
-The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
-See ":help 'readonly'".
-.TP
--r
-List swap files, with information about using them for recovery.
-.TP
--r {file}
-Recovery mode.
-The swap file is used to recover a crashed editing session.
-The swap file is a file with the same filename as the text file with ".swp"
-appended.
-See ":help recovery".
-.TP
--s
-Silent mode. Only when started as "Ex" or when the "-e" option was given
-before the "-s" option.
-.TP
--s {scriptin}
-The script file {scriptin} is read.
-The characters in the file are interpreted as if you had typed them.
-The same can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".
-If the end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further characters
-are read from the keyboard.
-.TP
--T {terminal}
-Tells
-.B Vim
-the name of the terminal you are using.
-Only required when the automatic way doesn't work.
-Should be a terminal known
-to
-.B Vim
-(builtin) or defined in the termcap or terminfo file.
-.TP
--u {vimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
-All the other initializations are skipped.
-Use this to edit a special kind of files.
-It can also be used to skip all initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help initialization" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--U {gvimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializations.
-All the other GUI initializations are skipped.
-It can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help gui-init" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--V
-Verbose. Give messages about which files are sourced and for reading and
-writing a viminfo file.
-.TP
--v
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Vi mode, just like the executable was called "vi". This only has effect
-when the executable is called "ex".
-.TP
--w {scriptout}
-All the characters that you type are recorded in the file
-{scriptout}, until you exit
-.B Vim.
-This is useful if you want to create a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
-":source!".
-If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
-.TP
--W {scriptout}
-Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
-.TP
--x
-Use encryption when writing files. Will prompt for a crypt key.
-.TP
--X
-Don't connect to the X server. Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
-window title and clipboard will not be used.
-.TP
--Z
-Restricted mode. Works like the executable starts with "r".
-.TP
---
-Denotes the end of the options.
-Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
-This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
-.TP
---help
-Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
-.TP
---version
-Print version information and exit.
-.TP
---remote
-Connect to a Vim server and make it edit the files given in the rest of the
-arguments. If no server is found a warning is given and the files are edited
-in the current Vim.
-.TP
---remote-expr {expr}
-Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print the result on stdout.
-.TP
---remote-send {keys}
-Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
-.TP
---remote-silent
-As --remote, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---remote-wait
-As --remote, but Vim does not exit until the files have been edited.
-.TP
---remote-wait-silent
-As --remote-wait, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---serverlist
-List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
-.TP
---servername {name}
-Use {name} as the server name. Used for the current Vim, unless used with a
---remote argument, then it's the name of the server to connect to.
-.TP
---socketid {id}
-GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in another window.
-.TP
---echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
-.SH ON-LINE HELP
-Type ":help" in
-.B Vim
-to get started.
-Type ":help subject" to get help on a specific subject.
-For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the "ZZ" command.
-Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmdline-completion").
-Tags are present to jump from one place to another (sort of hypertext links,
-see ":help").
-All documentation files can be viewed in this way, for example
-":help syntax.txt".
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/*.txt
-The
-.B Vim
-documentation files.
-Use ":help doc-file-list" to get the complete list.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/tags
-The tags file used for finding information in the documentation files.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/syntax.vim
-System wide syntax initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/*.vim
-Syntax files for various languages.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vimrc
-System wide
-.B Vim
-initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/gvimrc
-System wide gvim initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/optwin.vim
-Script used for the ":options" command, a nice way to view and set options.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/menu.vim
-System wide menu initializations for gvim.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/bugreport.vim
-Script to generate a bug report. See ":help bugs".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/filetype.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its name. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/scripts.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its contents. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/*.ps
-Files used for PostScript printing.
-.PP
-For recent info read the VIM home page:
-.br
-<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vimtutor(1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Most of
-.B Vim
-was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
-See ":help credits" in
-.B Vim.
-.br
-.B Vim
-is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,
-Tony Andrews and G.R. (Fred) Walter.
-Although hardly any of the original code remains.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably.
-See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
-.PP
-Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are in fact
-caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.
-And if you think other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
-you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-vi_diff.txt when in Vim).
-Also have a look at the 'compatible' and 'cpoptions' options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/rview.1 b/raw/man1/rview.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6f1d24..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/rview.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIM 1 "2002 Feb 22"
-.SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] [file ..]
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] -
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-t tag
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-q [errorfile]
-.PP
-.br
-.B ex
-.br
-.B view
-.br
-.B gvim
-.B gview
-.br
-.B rvim
-.B rview
-.B rgvim
-.B rgview
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vim
-is a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.
-It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
-It is especially useful for editing programs.
-.PP
-There are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo,
-multi windows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line
-editing, filename completion, on-line help, visual selection, etc..
-See ":help vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between
-.B Vim
-and Vi.
-.PP
-While running
-.B Vim
-a lot of help can be obtained from the on-line help system, with the ":help"
-command.
-See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
-.PP
-Most often
-.B Vim
-is started to edit a single file with the command
-.PP
- vim file
-.PP
-More generally
-.B Vim
-is started with:
-.PP
- vim [options] [filelist]
-.PP
-If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used to choose one or
-more files to be edited.
-.TP 12
-file ..
-A list of filenames.
-The first one will be the current file and read into the buffer.
-The cursor will be positioned on the first line of the buffer.
-You can get to the other files with the ":next" command.
-To edit a file that starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
-.TP
--
-The file to edit is read from stdin. Commands are read from stderr, which
-should be a tty.
-.TP
--t {tag}
-The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on a "tag", a sort
-of goto label.
-{tag} is looked up in the tags file, the associated file becomes the current
-file and the associated command is executed.
-Mostly this is used for C programs, in which case {tag} could be a function
-name.
-The effect is that the file containing that function becomes the current file
-and the cursor is positioned on the start of the function.
-See ":help tag-commands".
-.TP
--q [errorfile]
-Start in quickFix mode.
-The file [errorfile] is read and the first error is displayed.
-If [errorfile] is omitted, the filename is obtained from the 'errorfile'
-option (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the Amiga, "errors.err" on other
-systems).
-Further errors can be jumped to with the ":cn" command.
-See ":help quickfix".
-.PP
-.B Vim
-behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the executable may
-still be the same file).
-.TP 10
-vim
-The "normal" way, everything is default.
-.TP
-ex
-Start in Ex mode.
-Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
-Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
-.TP
-view
-Start in read-only mode. You will be protected from writing the files. Can
-also be done with the "-R" argument.
-.TP
-gvim gview
-The GUI version.
-Starts a new window.
-Can also be done with the "-g" argument.
-.TP
-rvim rview rgvim rgview
-Like the above, but with restrictions. It will not be possible to start shell
-commands, or suspend
-.B Vim.
-Can also be done with the "-Z" argument.
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options may be given in any order, before or after filenames.
-Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
-.TP 12
-+[num]
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on line "num".
-If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned on the last line.
-.TP
-+/{pat}
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on the
-first occurrence of {pat}.
-See ":help search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
-.TP
-+{command}
-.TP
--c {command}
-{command} will be executed after the
-first file has been read.
-{command} is interpreted as an Ex command.
-If the {command} contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes (this
-depends on the shell that is used).
-Example: Vim "+set si" main.c
-.br
-Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
-.TP
---cmd {command}
-Like using "-c", but the command is executed just before
-processing any vimrc file.
-You can use up to 10 of these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-.TP
--A
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with ARABIC support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Arabic keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is set. Otherwise an error
-message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--b
-Binary mode.
-A few options will be set that makes it possible to edit a binary or
-executable file.
-.TP
--C
-Compatible. Set the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave mostly like Vi, even though a .vimrc file exists.
-.TP
--d
-Start in diff mode.
-There should be two or three file name arguments.
-.B Vim
-will open all the files and show differences between them.
-Works like vimdiff(1).
-.TP
--d {device}
-Open {device} for use as a terminal.
-Only on the Amiga.
-Example:
-"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
-.TP
--e
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Ex mode, just like the executable was called "ex".
-.TP
--f
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-On the Amiga,
-.B Vim
-is not restarted to open a new window.
-This option should be used when
-.B Vim
-is executed by a program that will wait for the edit
-session to finish (e.g. mail).
-On the Amiga the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
-.TP
---nofork
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-.TP
--F
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with FKMAP support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Farsi keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--g
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with GUI support, this option enables the GUI.
-If no GUI support was compiled in, an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--h
-Give a bit of help about the command line arguments and options.
-After this
-.B Vim
-exits.
-.TP
--H
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Hebrew keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--i {viminfo}
-When using the viminfo file is enabled, this option sets the filename to use,
-instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
-This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file, by giving the name
-"NONE".
-.TP
--L
-Same as -r.
-.TP
--l
-Lisp mode.
-Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
-.TP
--m
-Modifying files is disabled.
-Resets the 'write' option, so that writing files is not possible.
-.TP
--N
-No-compatible mode. Reset the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible, even though a .vimrc file does
-not exist.
-.TP
--n
-No swap file will be used.
-Recovery after a crash will be impossible.
-Handy if you want to edit a file on a very slow medium (e.g. floppy).
-Can also be done with ":set uc=0".
-Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
-.TP
--o[N]
-Open N windows stacked.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--O[N]
-Open N windows side by side.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--R
-Read-only mode.
-The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
-overwriting a file.
-If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
-as in ":w!".
-The -R option also implies the -n option (see below).
-The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
-See ":help 'readonly'".
-.TP
--r
-List swap files, with information about using them for recovery.
-.TP
--r {file}
-Recovery mode.
-The swap file is used to recover a crashed editing session.
-The swap file is a file with the same filename as the text file with ".swp"
-appended.
-See ":help recovery".
-.TP
--s
-Silent mode. Only when started as "Ex" or when the "-e" option was given
-before the "-s" option.
-.TP
--s {scriptin}
-The script file {scriptin} is read.
-The characters in the file are interpreted as if you had typed them.
-The same can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".
-If the end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further characters
-are read from the keyboard.
-.TP
--T {terminal}
-Tells
-.B Vim
-the name of the terminal you are using.
-Only required when the automatic way doesn't work.
-Should be a terminal known
-to
-.B Vim
-(builtin) or defined in the termcap or terminfo file.
-.TP
--u {vimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
-All the other initializations are skipped.
-Use this to edit a special kind of files.
-It can also be used to skip all initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help initialization" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--U {gvimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializations.
-All the other GUI initializations are skipped.
-It can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help gui-init" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--V
-Verbose. Give messages about which files are sourced and for reading and
-writing a viminfo file.
-.TP
--v
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Vi mode, just like the executable was called "vi". This only has effect
-when the executable is called "ex".
-.TP
--w {scriptout}
-All the characters that you type are recorded in the file
-{scriptout}, until you exit
-.B Vim.
-This is useful if you want to create a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
-":source!".
-If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
-.TP
--W {scriptout}
-Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
-.TP
--x
-Use encryption when writing files. Will prompt for a crypt key.
-.TP
--X
-Don't connect to the X server. Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
-window title and clipboard will not be used.
-.TP
--Z
-Restricted mode. Works like the executable starts with "r".
-.TP
---
-Denotes the end of the options.
-Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
-This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
-.TP
---help
-Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
-.TP
---version
-Print version information and exit.
-.TP
---remote
-Connect to a Vim server and make it edit the files given in the rest of the
-arguments. If no server is found a warning is given and the files are edited
-in the current Vim.
-.TP
---remote-expr {expr}
-Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print the result on stdout.
-.TP
---remote-send {keys}
-Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
-.TP
---remote-silent
-As --remote, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---remote-wait
-As --remote, but Vim does not exit until the files have been edited.
-.TP
---remote-wait-silent
-As --remote-wait, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---serverlist
-List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
-.TP
---servername {name}
-Use {name} as the server name. Used for the current Vim, unless used with a
---remote argument, then it's the name of the server to connect to.
-.TP
---socketid {id}
-GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in another window.
-.TP
---echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
-.SH ON-LINE HELP
-Type ":help" in
-.B Vim
-to get started.
-Type ":help subject" to get help on a specific subject.
-For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the "ZZ" command.
-Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmdline-completion").
-Tags are present to jump from one place to another (sort of hypertext links,
-see ":help").
-All documentation files can be viewed in this way, for example
-":help syntax.txt".
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/*.txt
-The
-.B Vim
-documentation files.
-Use ":help doc-file-list" to get the complete list.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/tags
-The tags file used for finding information in the documentation files.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/syntax.vim
-System wide syntax initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/*.vim
-Syntax files for various languages.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vimrc
-System wide
-.B Vim
-initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/gvimrc
-System wide gvim initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/optwin.vim
-Script used for the ":options" command, a nice way to view and set options.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/menu.vim
-System wide menu initializations for gvim.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/bugreport.vim
-Script to generate a bug report. See ":help bugs".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/filetype.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its name. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/scripts.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its contents. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/*.ps
-Files used for PostScript printing.
-.PP
-For recent info read the VIM home page:
-.br
-<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vimtutor(1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Most of
-.B Vim
-was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
-See ":help credits" in
-.B Vim.
-.br
-.B Vim
-is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,
-Tony Andrews and G.R. (Fred) Walter.
-Although hardly any of the original code remains.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably.
-See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
-.PP
-Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are in fact
-caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.
-And if you think other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
-you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-vi_diff.txt when in Vim).
-Also have a look at the 'compatible' and 'cpoptions' options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/rvim.1 b/raw/man1/rvim.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6f1d24..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/rvim.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIM 1 "2002 Feb 22"
-.SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] [file ..]
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] -
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-t tag
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-q [errorfile]
-.PP
-.br
-.B ex
-.br
-.B view
-.br
-.B gvim
-.B gview
-.br
-.B rvim
-.B rview
-.B rgvim
-.B rgview
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vim
-is a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.
-It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
-It is especially useful for editing programs.
-.PP
-There are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo,
-multi windows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line
-editing, filename completion, on-line help, visual selection, etc..
-See ":help vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between
-.B Vim
-and Vi.
-.PP
-While running
-.B Vim
-a lot of help can be obtained from the on-line help system, with the ":help"
-command.
-See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
-.PP
-Most often
-.B Vim
-is started to edit a single file with the command
-.PP
- vim file
-.PP
-More generally
-.B Vim
-is started with:
-.PP
- vim [options] [filelist]
-.PP
-If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used to choose one or
-more files to be edited.
-.TP 12
-file ..
-A list of filenames.
-The first one will be the current file and read into the buffer.
-The cursor will be positioned on the first line of the buffer.
-You can get to the other files with the ":next" command.
-To edit a file that starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
-.TP
--
-The file to edit is read from stdin. Commands are read from stderr, which
-should be a tty.
-.TP
--t {tag}
-The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on a "tag", a sort
-of goto label.
-{tag} is looked up in the tags file, the associated file becomes the current
-file and the associated command is executed.
-Mostly this is used for C programs, in which case {tag} could be a function
-name.
-The effect is that the file containing that function becomes the current file
-and the cursor is positioned on the start of the function.
-See ":help tag-commands".
-.TP
--q [errorfile]
-Start in quickFix mode.
-The file [errorfile] is read and the first error is displayed.
-If [errorfile] is omitted, the filename is obtained from the 'errorfile'
-option (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the Amiga, "errors.err" on other
-systems).
-Further errors can be jumped to with the ":cn" command.
-See ":help quickfix".
-.PP
-.B Vim
-behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the executable may
-still be the same file).
-.TP 10
-vim
-The "normal" way, everything is default.
-.TP
-ex
-Start in Ex mode.
-Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
-Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
-.TP
-view
-Start in read-only mode. You will be protected from writing the files. Can
-also be done with the "-R" argument.
-.TP
-gvim gview
-The GUI version.
-Starts a new window.
-Can also be done with the "-g" argument.
-.TP
-rvim rview rgvim rgview
-Like the above, but with restrictions. It will not be possible to start shell
-commands, or suspend
-.B Vim.
-Can also be done with the "-Z" argument.
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options may be given in any order, before or after filenames.
-Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
-.TP 12
-+[num]
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on line "num".
-If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned on the last line.
-.TP
-+/{pat}
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on the
-first occurrence of {pat}.
-See ":help search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
-.TP
-+{command}
-.TP
--c {command}
-{command} will be executed after the
-first file has been read.
-{command} is interpreted as an Ex command.
-If the {command} contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes (this
-depends on the shell that is used).
-Example: Vim "+set si" main.c
-.br
-Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
-.TP
---cmd {command}
-Like using "-c", but the command is executed just before
-processing any vimrc file.
-You can use up to 10 of these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-.TP
--A
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with ARABIC support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Arabic keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is set. Otherwise an error
-message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--b
-Binary mode.
-A few options will be set that makes it possible to edit a binary or
-executable file.
-.TP
--C
-Compatible. Set the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave mostly like Vi, even though a .vimrc file exists.
-.TP
--d
-Start in diff mode.
-There should be two or three file name arguments.
-.B Vim
-will open all the files and show differences between them.
-Works like vimdiff(1).
-.TP
--d {device}
-Open {device} for use as a terminal.
-Only on the Amiga.
-Example:
-"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
-.TP
--e
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Ex mode, just like the executable was called "ex".
-.TP
--f
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-On the Amiga,
-.B Vim
-is not restarted to open a new window.
-This option should be used when
-.B Vim
-is executed by a program that will wait for the edit
-session to finish (e.g. mail).
-On the Amiga the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
-.TP
---nofork
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-.TP
--F
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with FKMAP support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Farsi keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--g
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with GUI support, this option enables the GUI.
-If no GUI support was compiled in, an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--h
-Give a bit of help about the command line arguments and options.
-After this
-.B Vim
-exits.
-.TP
--H
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Hebrew keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--i {viminfo}
-When using the viminfo file is enabled, this option sets the filename to use,
-instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
-This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file, by giving the name
-"NONE".
-.TP
--L
-Same as -r.
-.TP
--l
-Lisp mode.
-Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
-.TP
--m
-Modifying files is disabled.
-Resets the 'write' option, so that writing files is not possible.
-.TP
--N
-No-compatible mode. Reset the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible, even though a .vimrc file does
-not exist.
-.TP
--n
-No swap file will be used.
-Recovery after a crash will be impossible.
-Handy if you want to edit a file on a very slow medium (e.g. floppy).
-Can also be done with ":set uc=0".
-Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
-.TP
--o[N]
-Open N windows stacked.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--O[N]
-Open N windows side by side.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--R
-Read-only mode.
-The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
-overwriting a file.
-If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
-as in ":w!".
-The -R option also implies the -n option (see below).
-The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
-See ":help 'readonly'".
-.TP
--r
-List swap files, with information about using them for recovery.
-.TP
--r {file}
-Recovery mode.
-The swap file is used to recover a crashed editing session.
-The swap file is a file with the same filename as the text file with ".swp"
-appended.
-See ":help recovery".
-.TP
--s
-Silent mode. Only when started as "Ex" or when the "-e" option was given
-before the "-s" option.
-.TP
--s {scriptin}
-The script file {scriptin} is read.
-The characters in the file are interpreted as if you had typed them.
-The same can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".
-If the end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further characters
-are read from the keyboard.
-.TP
--T {terminal}
-Tells
-.B Vim
-the name of the terminal you are using.
-Only required when the automatic way doesn't work.
-Should be a terminal known
-to
-.B Vim
-(builtin) or defined in the termcap or terminfo file.
-.TP
--u {vimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
-All the other initializations are skipped.
-Use this to edit a special kind of files.
-It can also be used to skip all initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help initialization" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--U {gvimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializations.
-All the other GUI initializations are skipped.
-It can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help gui-init" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--V
-Verbose. Give messages about which files are sourced and for reading and
-writing a viminfo file.
-.TP
--v
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Vi mode, just like the executable was called "vi". This only has effect
-when the executable is called "ex".
-.TP
--w {scriptout}
-All the characters that you type are recorded in the file
-{scriptout}, until you exit
-.B Vim.
-This is useful if you want to create a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
-":source!".
-If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
-.TP
--W {scriptout}
-Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
-.TP
--x
-Use encryption when writing files. Will prompt for a crypt key.
-.TP
--X
-Don't connect to the X server. Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
-window title and clipboard will not be used.
-.TP
--Z
-Restricted mode. Works like the executable starts with "r".
-.TP
---
-Denotes the end of the options.
-Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
-This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
-.TP
---help
-Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
-.TP
---version
-Print version information and exit.
-.TP
---remote
-Connect to a Vim server and make it edit the files given in the rest of the
-arguments. If no server is found a warning is given and the files are edited
-in the current Vim.
-.TP
---remote-expr {expr}
-Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print the result on stdout.
-.TP
---remote-send {keys}
-Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
-.TP
---remote-silent
-As --remote, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---remote-wait
-As --remote, but Vim does not exit until the files have been edited.
-.TP
---remote-wait-silent
-As --remote-wait, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---serverlist
-List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
-.TP
---servername {name}
-Use {name} as the server name. Used for the current Vim, unless used with a
---remote argument, then it's the name of the server to connect to.
-.TP
---socketid {id}
-GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in another window.
-.TP
---echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
-.SH ON-LINE HELP
-Type ":help" in
-.B Vim
-to get started.
-Type ":help subject" to get help on a specific subject.
-For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the "ZZ" command.
-Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmdline-completion").
-Tags are present to jump from one place to another (sort of hypertext links,
-see ":help").
-All documentation files can be viewed in this way, for example
-":help syntax.txt".
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/*.txt
-The
-.B Vim
-documentation files.
-Use ":help doc-file-list" to get the complete list.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/tags
-The tags file used for finding information in the documentation files.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/syntax.vim
-System wide syntax initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/*.vim
-Syntax files for various languages.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vimrc
-System wide
-.B Vim
-initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/gvimrc
-System wide gvim initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/optwin.vim
-Script used for the ":options" command, a nice way to view and set options.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/menu.vim
-System wide menu initializations for gvim.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/bugreport.vim
-Script to generate a bug report. See ":help bugs".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/filetype.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its name. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/scripts.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its contents. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/*.ps
-Files used for PostScript printing.
-.PP
-For recent info read the VIM home page:
-.br
-<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vimtutor(1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Most of
-.B Vim
-was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
-See ":help credits" in
-.B Vim.
-.br
-.B Vim
-is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,
-Tony Andrews and G.R. (Fred) Walter.
-Although hardly any of the original code remains.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably.
-See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
-.PP
-Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are in fact
-caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.
-And if you think other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
-you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-vi_diff.txt when in Vim).
-Also have a look at the 'compatible' and 'cpoptions' options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/scp.1 b/raw/man1/scp.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a3ec2e0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/scp.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,167 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\"
-.\" scp.1
-.\"
-.\" Author: Tatu Ylonen <ylo at cs.hut.fi>
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo at cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland
-.\" All rights reserved
-.\"
-.\" Created: Sun May 7 00:14:37 1995 ylo
-.\"
-.\" $OpenBSD: scp.1,v 1.27 2003/03/28 10:11:43 jmc Exp $
-.\"
-.Dd September 25, 1999
-.Dt SCP 1
-.Os
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm scp
-.Nd secure copy (remote file copy program)
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm scp
-.Bk -words
-.Op Fl pqrvBC1246
-.Op Fl F Ar ssh_config
-.Op Fl S Ar program
-.Op Fl P Ar port
-.Op Fl c Ar cipher
-.Op Fl i Ar identity_file
-.Op Fl l Ar limit
-.Op Fl o Ar ssh_option
-.Sm off
-.Oo
-.Op Ar user@
-.Ar host1 No :
-.Oc Ns Ar file1
-.Sm on
-.Op Ar ...
-.Sm off
-.Oo
-.Op Ar user@
-.Ar host2 No :
-.Oc Ar file2
-.Sm on
-.Ek
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm
-copies files between hosts on a network.
-It uses
-.Xr ssh 1
-for data transfer, and uses the same authentication and provides the
-same security as
-.Xr ssh 1 .
-Unlike
-.Xr rcp 1 ,
-.Nm
-will ask for passwords or passphrases if they are needed for
-authentication.
-.Pp
-Any file name may contain a host and user specification to indicate
-that the file is to be copied to/from that host.
-Copies between two remote hosts are permitted.
-.Pp
-The options are as follows:
-.Bl -tag -width Ds
-.It Fl c Ar cipher
-Selects the cipher to use for encrypting the data transfer.
-This option is directly passed to
-.Xr ssh 1 .
-.It Fl i Ar identity_file
-Selects the file from which the identity (private key) for RSA
-authentication is read.
-This option is directly passed to
-.Xr ssh 1 .
-.It Fl l Ar limit
-Limits the used bandwidth, specified in Kbit/s.
-.It Fl p
-Preserves modification times, access times, and modes from the
-original file.
-.It Fl r
-Recursively copy entire directories.
-.It Fl v
-Verbose mode.
-Causes
-.Nm
-and
-.Xr ssh 1
-to print debugging messages about their progress.
-This is helpful in
-debugging connection, authentication, and configuration problems.
-.It Fl B
-Selects batch mode (prevents asking for passwords or passphrases).
-.It Fl q
-Disables the progress meter.
-.It Fl C
-Compression enable.
-Passes the
-.Fl C
-flag to
-.Xr ssh 1
-to enable compression.
-.It Fl F Ar ssh_config
-Specifies an alternative
-per-user configuration file for
-.Nm ssh .
-This option is directly passed to
-.Xr ssh 1 .
-.It Fl P Ar port
-Specifies the port to connect to on the remote host.
-Note that this option is written with a capital
-.Sq P ,
-because
-.Fl p
-is already reserved for preserving the times and modes of the file in
-.Xr rcp 1 .
-.It Fl S Ar program
-Name of
-.Ar program
-to use for the encrypted connection.
-The program must understand
-.Xr ssh 1
-options.
-.It Fl o Ar ssh_option
-Can be used to pass options to
-.Nm ssh
-in the format used in
-.Xr ssh_config 5 .
-This is useful for specifying options
-for which there is no separate
-.Nm scp
-command-line flag.
-.It Fl 1
-Forces
-.Nm
-to use protocol 1.
-.It Fl 2
-Forces
-.Nm
-to use protocol 2.
-.It Fl 4
-Forces
-.Nm
-to use IPv4 addresses only.
-.It Fl 6
-Forces
-.Nm
-to use IPv6 addresses only.
-.El
-.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-.Nm
-exits with 0 on success or >0 if an error occurred.
-.Sh AUTHORS
-Timo Rinne <tri at iki.fi> and Tatu Ylonen <ylo at cs.hut.fi>
-.Sh HISTORY
-.Nm
-is based on the
-.Xr rcp 1
-program in BSD source code from the Regents of the University of
-California.
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr rcp 1 ,
-.Xr sftp 1 ,
-.Xr ssh 1 ,
-.Xr ssh-add 1 ,
-.Xr ssh-agent 1 ,
-.Xr ssh-keygen 1 ,
-.Xr ssh_config 5 ,
-.Xr sshd 8
diff --git a/raw/man1/set.1 b/raw/man1/set.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/set.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/setleds.1 b/raw/man1/setleds.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 21b50c9..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/setleds.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)setleds.1 1.0 940924 aeb
-.TH SETLEDS 1 "24 Sep 1994"
-.SH NAME
-setleds \- set the keyboard leds
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B setleds
-.RI [ "-v" "] [" "-L" "] [" "-D" "] [" "-F" ]
-.RI [ {+|-}num "] [" {+|-}caps "] [" {+|-}scroll ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "setleds command" "" "\fLsetleds\fR command"
-.LP
-.B Setleds
-reports and changes the led flag settings of a VT
-(namely NumLock, CapsLock and ScrollLock).
-Without arguments,
-.B setleds
-prints the current settings.
-With arguments, it sets or clears the indicated flags
-(and leaves the others unchanged). The settings before
-and after the change are reported if the -v flag is given.
-.LP
-The led flag settings are specific for each VT (and the VT
-corresponding to stdin is used).
-.LP
-By default (or with option -F),
-.B setleds
-will only change the VT flags (and their setting may be
-reflected by the keyboard leds).
-.LP
-With option -D,
-.B setleds
-will change both the VT flags and their default settings
-(so that a subsequent reset will not undo the change).
-This might be useful for people who always want to have numlock set.
-.LP
-With option -L,
-.B setleds
-will not touch the VT flags, but only change the leds.
-From this moment on, the leds will no longer reflect the VT flags
-(but display whatever is put into them). The command
-.B "setleds -L"
-(without further arguments) will restore the situation in which
-the leds reflect the VT flags.
-.LP
-One might use
-.B setleds
-in /etc/rc to define the initial and default state of NumLock,
-e.g. by
-.br
-.in +5m
-INITTY=/dev/tty[1-8]
-.br
-for tty in $INITTY; do
-.br
-.in +5m
-setleds -D +num < $tty
-.br
-.in -5m
-done
-.in -5m
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-\-num \+num
-Clear or set NumLock.
-(At present, the NumLock setting influences the
-interpretation of keypad keys.
-Pressing the NumLock key complements the NumLock setting.)
-.TP
-\-caps \+caps
-Clear or set CapsLock.
-(At present, the CapsLock setting complements the Shift key
-when applied to letters.
-Pressing the CapsLock key complements the CapsLock setting.)
-.TP
-\-scroll \+scroll
-Clear or set ScrollLock.
-(At present, pressing the ScrollLock key (or ^S/^Q) stops/starts
-console output.)
-.SH "BUGS"
-In keyboard application mode the NumLock key does not
-influence the NumLock flag setting.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/setmetamode.1 b/raw/man1/setmetamode.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a0dd81..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/setmetamode.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)setmetamode.1 1.0 940130 aeb
-.TH SETMETAMODE 1 "30 Jan 1994"
-.SH NAME
-setmetamode \- define the keyboard meta key handling
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B setmetamode
-[
-.I {meta|bit|metabit | esc|prefix|escprefix}
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "setmetamode command" "" "\fLsetmetamode\fR command"
-.LP
-Without argument,
-.B setmetamode
-prints the current Meta key mode.
-With argument, it sets the Meta key mode as indicated.
-The setting before and after the change are reported.
-.LP
-The Meta key mode is specific for each VT (and the VT
-corresponding to stdin is used).
-One might use
-.B setmetamode
-in /etc/rc to define the initial state of the Meta key mode,
-e.g. by
-.br
-.in +5m
-INITTY=/dev/tty[1-8]
-.br
-for tty in $INITTY; do
-.br
-.in +5m
-setmetamode escprefix < $tty
-.br
-.in -5m
-done
-.in -5m
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-esc prefix escprefix
-The Meta key sends an Escape prefix.
-.TP
-meta bit metabit
-The Meta key sets the high order bit of the character.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/sh.1 b/raw/man1/sh.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e07a9f6..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/sh.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8368 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" MAN PAGE COMMENTS to
-.\"
-.\" Chet Ramey
-.\" Information Network Services
-.\" Case Western Reserve University
-.\" chet at ins.CWRU.Edu
-.\"
-.\" Last Change: Mon Jul 15 15:20:56 EDT 2002
-.\"
-.\" bash_builtins, strip all but Built-Ins section
-.if \n(zZ=1 .ig zZ
-.if \n(zY=1 .ig zY
-.TH BASH 1 "2002 July 15" "GNU Bash-2.05b"
-.\"
-.\" There's some problem with having a `@'
-.\" in a tagged paragraph with the BSD man macros.
-.\" It has to do with `@' appearing in the }1 macro.
-.\" This is a problem on 4.3 BSD and Ultrix, but Sun
-.\" appears to have fixed it.
-.\" If you're seeing the characters
-.\" `@u-3p' appearing before the lines reading
-.\" `possible-hostname-completions
-.\" and `complete-hostname' down in READLINE,
-.\" then uncomment this redefinition.
-.\"
-.de }1
-.ds ]X \&\\*(]B\\
-.nr )E 0
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )I \\$1n
-.}f
-.ll \\n(LLu
-.in \\n()Ru+\\n(INu+\\n()Iu
-.ti \\n(INu
-.ie !\\n()Iu+\\n()Ru-\w\\*(]Xu-3p \{\\*(]X
-.br\}
-.el \\*(]X\h|\\n()Iu+\\n()Ru\c
-.}f
-..
-.\"
-.\" File Name macro. This used to be `.PN', for Path Name,
-.\" but Sun doesn't seem to like that very much.
-.\"
-.de FN
-\fI\|\\$1\|\fP
-..
-.SH NAME
-bash \- GNU Bourne-Again SHell
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B bash
-[options]
-[file]
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-.if n Bash is Copyright (C) 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.if t Bash is Copyright \(co 1989-2002 by the Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Bash
-is an \fBsh\fR-compatible command language interpreter that
-executes commands read from the standard input or from a file.
-.B Bash
-also incorporates useful features from the \fIKorn\fP and \fIC\fP
-shells (\fBksh\fP and \fBcsh\fP).
-.PP
-.B Bash
-is intended to be a conformant implementation of the IEEE
-POSIX Shell and Tools specification (IEEE Working Group 1003\.2).
-.SH OPTIONS
-In addition to the single-character shell options documented in the
-description of the \fBset\fR builtin command, \fBbash\fR
-interprets the following options when it is invoked:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP 10
-.BI \-c "\| string\^"
-If the
-.B \-c
-option is present, then commands are read from
-.IR string .
-If there are arguments after the
-.IR string ,
-they are assigned to the positional parameters, starting with
-.BR $0 .
-.TP
-.B \-i
-If the
-.B \-i
-option is present, the shell is
-.IR interactive .
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Make
-.B bash
-act as if it had been invoked as a login shell (see
-.SM
-.B INVOCATION
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-r
-If the
-.B \-r
-option is present, the shell becomes
-.I restricted
-(see
-.SM
-.B "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-s
-If the
-.B \-s
-option is present, or if no arguments remain after option
-processing, then commands are read from the standard input.
-This option allows the positional parameters to be set
-when invoking an interactive shell.
-.TP
-.B \-D
-A list of all double-quoted strings preceded by \fB$\fP
-is printed on the standard ouput.
-These are the strings that
-are subject to language translation when the current locale
-is not \fBC\fP or \fBPOSIX\fP.
-This implies the \fB\-n\fP option; no commands will be executed.
-.TP
-.B [\-+]O [\fIshopt_option\fP]
-\fIshopt_option\fP is one of the shell options accepted by the
-\fBshopt\fP builtin (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-If \fIshopt_option\fP is present, \fB\-O\fP sets the value of that option;
-\fB+O\fP unsets it.
-If \fIshopt_option\fP is not supplied, the names and values of the shell
-options accepted by \fBshopt\fP are printed on the standard output.
-If the invocation option is \fB+O\fP, the output is displayed in a format
-that may be reused as input.
-.TP
-.B \-\-
-A
-.B \-\-
-signals the end of options and disables further option processing.
-Any arguments after the
-.B \-\-
-are treated as filenames and arguments. An argument of
-.B \-
-is equivalent to \fB\-\-\fP.
-.PD
-.PP
-.B Bash
-also interprets a number of multi-character options.
-These options must appear on the command line before the
-single-character options to be recognized.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-\-dump\-po\-strings
-Equivalent to \fB\-D\fP, but the output is in the GNU \fIgettext\fP
-\fBpo\fP (portable object) file format.
-.TP
-.B \-\-dump\-strings
-Equivalent to \fB\-D\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-\-help
-Display a usage message on standard output and exit successfully.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-init\-file\fP \fIfile\fP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB\-\-rcfile\fP \fIfile\fP
-.PD
-Execute commands from
-.I file
-instead of the standard personal initialization file
-.I ~/.bashrc
-if the shell is interactive (see
-.SM
-.B INVOCATION
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-\-login
-Equivalent to \fB\-l\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-\-noediting
-Do not use the GNU
-.B readline
-library to read command lines when the shell is interactive.
-.TP
-.B \-\-noprofile
-Do not read either the system-wide startup file
-.FN /etc/profile
-or any of the personal initialization files
-.IR ~/.bash_profile ,
-.IR ~/.bash_login ,
-or
-.IR ~/.profile .
-By default,
-.B bash
-reads these files when it is invoked as a login shell (see
-.SM
-.B INVOCATION
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-\-norc
-Do not read and execute the personal initialization file
-.I ~/.bashrc
-if the shell is interactive.
-This option is on by default if the shell is invoked as
-.BR sh .
-.TP
-.B \-\-posix
-Change the behavior of \fBbash\fP where the default operation differs
-from the POSIX 1003.2 standard to match the standard (\fIposix mode\fP).
-.TP
-.B \-\-restricted
-The shell becomes restricted (see
-.SM
-.B "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-below).
-.TP
-.B \-\-rpm-requires
-Produce the list of files that are required for the
-shell script to run. This implies '-n' and is subject
-to the same limitations as compile time error checking checking;
-Backticks, [] tests, and evals are not parsed so some
-dependencies may be missed.
-.B \-\-verbose
-Equivalent to \fB\-v\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-\-version
-Show version information for this instance of
-.B bash
-on the standard output and exit successfully.
-.PD
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-If arguments remain after option processing, and neither the
-.B \-c
-nor the
-.B \-s
-option has been supplied, the first argument is assumed to
-be the name of a file containing shell commands.
-If
-.B bash
-is invoked in this fashion,
-.B $0
-is set to the name of the file, and the positional parameters
-are set to the remaining arguments.
-.B Bash
-reads and executes commands from this file, then exits.
-\fBBash\fP's exit status is the exit status of the last command
-executed in the script.
-If no commands are executed, the exit status is 0.
-An attempt is first made to open the file in the current directory, and,
-if no file is found, then the shell searches the directories in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-for the script.
-.SH INVOCATION
-A \fIlogin shell\fP is one whose first character of argument zero is a
-.BR \- ,
-or one started with the
-.B \-\-login
-option.
-.PP
-An \fIinteractive\fP shell is one started without non-option arguments
-and without the
-.B \-c
-option
-whose standard input and output are
-both connected to terminals (as determined by
-.IR isatty (3)),
-or one started with the
-.B \-i
-option.
-.SM
-.B PS1
-is set and
-.B $\-
-includes
-.B i
-if
-.B bash
-is interactive,
-allowing a shell script or a startup file to test this state.
-.PP
-The following paragraphs describe how
-.B bash
-executes its startup files.
-If any of the files exist but cannot be read,
-.B bash
-reports an error.
-Tildes are expanded in file names as described below under
-.B "Tilde Expansion"
-in the
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-section.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-is invoked as an interactive login shell, or as a non-interactive shell
-with the \fB\-\-login\fP option, it first reads and
-executes commands from the file \fI/etc/profile\fP, if that
-file exists.
-After reading that file, it looks for \fI~/.bash_profile\fP,
-\fI~/.bash_login\fP, and \fI~/.profile\fP, in that order, and reads
-and executes commands from the first one that exists and is readable.
-The
-.B \-\-noprofile
-option may be used when the shell is started to inhibit this behavior.
-.PP
-When a login shell exits,
-.B bash
-reads and executes commands from the file \fI~/.bash_logout\fP, if it
-exists.
-.PP
-When an interactive shell that is not a login shell is started,
-.B bash
-reads and executes commands from \fI~/.bashrc\fP, if that file exists.
-This may be inhibited by using the
-.B \-\-norc
-option.
-The \fB\-\-rcfile\fP \fIfile\fP option will force
-.B bash
-to read and execute commands from \fIfile\fP instead of \fI~/.bashrc\fP.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-is started non-interactively, to run a shell script, for example, it
-looks for the variable
-.SM
-.B BASH_ENV
-in the environment, expands its value if it appears there, and uses the
-expanded value as the name of a file to read and execute.
-.B Bash
-behaves as if the following command were executed:
-.sp .5
-.RS
-.if t \f(CWif [ \-n "$BASH_ENV" ]; then . "$BASH_ENV"; fi\fP
-.if n if [ \-n "$BASH_ENV" ]; then . "$BASH_ENV"; fi
-.RE
-.sp .5
-but the value of the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-variable is not used to search for the file name.
-.PP
-If
-.B bash
-is invoked with the name
-.BR sh ,
-it tries to mimic the startup behavior of historical versions of
-.B sh
-as closely as possible,
-while conforming to the POSIX standard as well.
-When invoked as an interactive login shell, or a non-interactive
-shell with the \fB\-\-login\fP option, it first attempts to
-read and execute commands from
-.I /etc/profile
-and
-.IR ~/.profile ,
-in that order.
-The
-.B \-\-noprofile
-option may be used to inhibit this behavior.
-When invoked as an interactive shell with the name
-.BR sh ,
-.B bash
-looks for the variable
-.SM
-.BR ENV ,
-expands its value if it is defined, and uses the
-expanded value as the name of a file to read and execute.
-Since a shell invoked as
-.B sh
-does not attempt to read and execute commands from any other startup
-files, the
-.B \-\-rcfile
-option has no effect.
-A non-interactive shell invoked with the name
-.B sh
-does not attempt to read any other startup files.
-When invoked as
-.BR sh ,
-.B bash
-enters
-.I posix
-mode after the startup files are read.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-is started in
-.I posix
-mode, as with the
-.B \-\-posix
-command line option, it follows the POSIX standard for startup files.
-In this mode, interactive shells expand the
-.SM
-.B ENV
-variable and commands are read and executed from the file
-whose name is the expanded value.
-No other startup files are read.
-.PP
-.B Bash
-attempts to determine when it is being run by the remote shell
-daemon, usually \fIrshd\fP.
-If
-.B bash
-determines it is being run by \fIrshd\fP, it reads and executes
-commands from \fI~/.bashrc\fP, if that file exists and is readable.
-It will not do this if invoked as \fBsh\fP.
-The
-.B \-\-norc
-option may be used to inhibit this behavior, and the
-.B \-\-rcfile
-option may be used to force another file to be read, but
-\fIrshd\fP does not generally invoke the shell with those options
-or allow them to be specified.
-.PP
-If the shell is started with the effective user (group) id not equal to the
-real user (group) id, and the \fB\-p\fP option is not supplied, no startup
-files are read, shell functions are not inherited from the environment, the
-.SM
-.B SHELLOPTS
-variable, if it appears in the environment, is ignored,
-and the effective user id is set to the real user id.
-If the \fB\-p\fP option is supplied at invocation, the startup behavior is
-the same, but the effective user id is not reset.
-.SH DEFINITIONS
-.PP
-The following definitions are used throughout the rest of this
-document.
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B blank
-A space or tab.
-.TP
-.B word
-A sequence of characters considered as a single unit by the shell.
-Also known as a
-.BR token .
-.TP
-.B name
-A
-.I word
-consisting only of alphanumeric characters and underscores, and
-beginning with an alphabetic character or an underscore. Also
-referred to as an
-.BR identifier .
-.TP
-.B metacharacter
-A character that, when unquoted, separates words. One of the following:
-.br
-.RS
-.PP
-.if t \fB| & ; ( ) < > space tab\fP
-.if n \fB| & ; ( ) < > space tab\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.TP
-.B control operator
-A \fItoken\fP that performs a control function. It is one of the following
-symbols:
-.RS
-.PP
-.if t \fB\(bv\(bv & && ; ;; ( ) | <newline>\fP
-.if n \fB|| & && ; ;; ( ) | <newline>\fP
-.RE
-.PD
-.SH "RESERVED WORDS"
-\fIReserved words\fP are words that have a special meaning to the shell.
-The following words are recognized as reserved when unquoted and either
-the first word of a simple command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-below) or the third word of a
-.B case
-or
-.B for
-command:
-.if t .RS
-.PP
-.B
-.if n ! case do done elif else esac fi for function if in select then until while { } time [[ ]]
-.if t ! case do done elif else esac fi for function if in select then until while { } time [[ ]]
-.if t .RE
-.RE
-.SH "SHELL GRAMMAR"
-.SS Simple Commands
-.PP
-A \fIsimple command\fP is a sequence of optional variable assignments
-followed by \fBblank\fP-separated words and redirections, and
-terminated by a \fIcontrol operator\fP. The first word
-specifies the command to be executed, and is passed as argument zero.
-The remaining words are passed as arguments to the invoked command.
-.PP
-The return value of a \fIsimple command\fP is its exit status, or
-128+\fIn\^\fP if the command is terminated by signal
-.IR n .
-.SS Pipelines
-.PP
-A \fIpipeline\fP is a sequence of one or more commands separated by
-the character
-.BR | .
-The format for a pipeline is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fBtime\fP [\fB\-p\fP]] [ ! ] \fIcommand\fP [ \fB|\fP \fIcommand2\fP ... ]
-.RE
-.PP
-The standard output of
-.I command
-is connected via a pipe to the standard input of
-.IR command2 .
-This connection is performed before any redirections specified by the
-command (see
-.SM
-.B REDIRECTION
-below).
-.PP
-If the reserved word
-.B !
-precedes a pipeline, the exit status of that
-pipeline is the logical NOT of the exit status of the last command.
-Otherwise, the status of the pipeline is the exit status of the last
-command.
-The shell waits for all commands in the pipeline to
-terminate before returning a value.
-.PP
-If the
-.B time
-reserved word precedes a pipeline, the elapsed as well as user and
-system time consumed by its execution are reported when the pipeline
-terminates.
-The \fB\-p\fP option changes the output format to that specified by POSIX.
-The
-.SM
-.B TIMEFORMAT
-variable may be set to a format string that specifies how the timing
-information should be displayed; see the description of
-.SM
-.B TIMEFORMAT
-under
-.B "Shell Variables"
-below.
-.PP
-Each command in a pipeline is executed as a separate process (i.e., in a
-subshell).
-.SS Lists
-.PP
-A \fIlist\fP is a sequence of one or more pipelines separated by one
-of the operators
-.BR ; ,
-.BR & ,
-.BR && ,
-or
-.BR \(bv\(bv ,
-and optionally terminated by one of
-.BR ; ,
-.BR & ,
-or
-.BR <newline> .
-.PP
-Of these list operators,
-.B &&
-and
-.B \(bv\(bv
-have equal precedence, followed by
-.B ;
-and
-.BR &,
-which have equal precedence.
-.PP
-A sequence of one or more newlines may appear in a \fIlist\fP instead
-of a semicolon to delimit commands.
-.PP
-If a command is terminated by the control operator
-.BR & ,
-the shell executes the command in the \fIbackground\fP
-in a subshell. The shell does not wait for the command to
-finish, and the return status is 0. Commands separated by a
-.B ;
-are executed sequentially; the shell waits for each
-command to terminate in turn. The return status is the
-exit status of the last command executed.
-.PP
-The control operators
-.B &&
-and
-.B \(bv\(bv
-denote AND lists and OR lists, respectively.
-An AND list has the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIcommand1\fP \fB&&\fP \fIcommand2\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.I command2
-is executed if, and only if,
-.I command1
-returns an exit status of zero.
-.PP
-An OR list has the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIcommand1\fP \fB\(bv\(bv\fP \fIcommand2\fP
-.PP
-.RE
-.PP
-.I command2
-is executed if and only if
-.I command1
-returns a non-zero exit status. The return status of
-AND and OR lists is the exit status of the last command
-executed in the list.
-.SS Compound Commands
-.PP
-A \fIcompound command\fP is one of the following:
-.TP
-(\fIlist\fP)
-\fIlist\fP is executed in a subshell. Variable assignments and builtin
-commands that affect the shell's environment do not remain in effect
-after the command completes. The return status is the exit status of
-\fIlist\fP.
-.TP
-{ \fIlist\fP; }
-\fIlist\fP is simply executed in the current shell environment.
-\fIlist\fP must be terminated with a newline or semicolon.
-This is known as a \fIgroup command\fP.
-The return status is the exit status of
-\fIlist\fP.
-Note that unlike the metacharacters \fB(\fP and \fB\)\fP, \fB{\fP and
-\fB}\fP are \fIreserved words\fP and must occur where a reserved
-word is permitted to be recognized. Since they do not cause a word
-break, they must be separated from \fIlist\fP by whitespace.
-.TP
-((\fIexpression\fP))
-The \fIexpression\fP is evaluated according to the rules described
-below under
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" .
-If the value of the expression is non-zero, the return status is 0;
-otherwise the return status is 1. This is exactly equivalent to
-\fBlet "\fIexpression\fP"\fR.
-.TP
-\fB[[\fP \fIexpression\fP \fB]]\fP
-Return a status of 0 or 1 depending on the evaluation of
-the conditional expression \fIexpression\fP.
-Expressions are composed of the primaries described below under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" .
-Word splitting and pathname expansion are not performed on the words
-between the \fB[[\fP and \fB]]\fP; tilde expansion, parameter and
-variable expansion, arithmetic expansion, command substitution, process
-substitution, and quote removal are performed.
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-When the \fB==\fP and \fB!=\fP operators are used, the string to the
-right of the operator is considered a pattern and matched according
-to the rules described below under \fBPattern Matching\fP.
-The return value is 0 if the string matches or does not match
-the pattern, respectively, and 1 otherwise.
-Any part of the pattern may be quoted to force it to be matched as a
-string.
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Expressions may be combined using the following operators, listed
-in decreasing order of precedence:
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B ( \fIexpression\fP )
-Returns the value of \fIexpression\fP.
-This may be used to override the normal precedence of operators.
-.TP
-.B ! \fIexpression\fP
-True if
-.I expression
-is false.
-.TP
-\fIexpression1\fP \fB&&\fP \fIexpression2\fP
-True if both
-.I expression1
-and
-.I expression2
-are true.
-.TP
-.if t \fIexpression1\fP \fB\(bv\(bv\fP \fIexpression2\fP
-.if n \fIexpression1\fP \fB||\fP \fIexpression2\fP
-True if either
-.I expression1
-or
-.I expression2
-is true.
-.PD
-.LP
-The \fB&&\fP and
-.if t \fB\(bv\(bv\fP
-.if n \fB||\fP
-operators do not evaluate \fIexpression2\fP if the value of
-\fIexpression1\fP is sufficient to determine the return value of
-the entire conditional expression.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfor\fP \fIname\fP [ \fBin\fP \fIword\fP ] ; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP ; \fBdone\fP
-The list of words following \fBin\fP is expanded, generating a list
-of items.
-The variable \fIname\fP is set to each element of this list
-in turn, and \fIlist\fP is executed each time.
-If the \fBin\fP \fIword\fP is omitted, the \fBfor\fP command executes
-\fIlist\fP once for each positional parameter that is set (see
-.SM
-.B PARAMETERS
-below).
-The return status is the exit status of the last command that executes.
-If the expansion of the items following \fBin\fP results in an empty
-list, no commands are executed, and the return status is 0.
-.TP
-\fBfor\fP (( \fIexpr1\fP ; \fIexpr2\fP ; \fIexpr3\fP )) ; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP ; \fBdone\fP
-First, the arithmetic expression \fIexpr1\fP is evaluated according
-to the rules described below under
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" .
-The arithmetic expression \fIexpr2\fP is then evaluated repeatedly
-until it evaluates to zero.
-Each time \fIexpr2\fP evaluates to a non-zero value, \fIlist\fP is
-executed and the arithmetic expression \fIexpr3\fP is evaluated.
-If any expression is omitted, it behaves as if it evaluates to 1.
-The return value is the exit status of the last command in \fIlist\fP
-that is executed, or false if any of the expressions is invalid.
-.TP
-\fBselect\fP \fIname\fP [ \fBin\fP \fIword\fP ] ; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP ; \fBdone\fP
-The list of words following \fBin\fP is expanded, generating a list
-of items. The set of expanded words is printed on the standard
-error, each preceded by a number. If the \fBin\fP
-\fIword\fP is omitted, the positional parameters are printed (see
-.SM
-.B PARAMETERS
-below). The
-.B PS3
-prompt is then displayed and a line read from the standard input.
-If the line consists of a number corresponding to one of
-the displayed words, then the value of
-.I name
-is set to that word. If the line is empty, the words and prompt
-are displayed again. If EOF is read, the command completes. Any
-other value read causes
-.I name
-to be set to null. The line read is saved in the variable
-.BR REPLY .
-The
-.I list
-is executed after each selection until a
-.B break
-command is executed.
-The exit status of
-.B select
-is the exit status of the last command executed in
-.IR list ,
-or zero if no commands were executed.
-.TP
-\fBcase\fP \fIword\fP \fBin\fP [ [(] \fIpattern\fP [ \fB|\fP \fIpattern\fP ] \
-... ) \fIlist\fP ;; ] ... \fBesac\fP
-A \fBcase\fP command first expands \fIword\fP, and tries to match
-it against each \fIpattern\fP in turn, using the same matching rules
-as for pathname expansion (see
-.B Pathname Expansion
-below). When a match is found, the
-corresponding \fIlist\fP is executed. After the first match, no
-subsequent matches are attempted. The exit status is zero if no
-pattern matches. Otherwise, it is the exit status of the
-last command executed in \fIlist\fP.
-.TP
-\fBif\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBthen\fP \fIlist;\fP \
-[ \fBelif\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBthen\fP \fIlist\fP; ] ... \
-[ \fBelse\fP \fIlist\fP; ] \fBfi\fP
-The
-.B if
-.I list
-is executed. If its exit status is zero, the
-\fBthen\fP \fIlist\fP is executed. Otherwise, each \fBelif\fP
-\fIlist\fP is executed in turn, and if its exit status is zero,
-the corresponding \fBthen\fP \fIlist\fP is executed and the
-command completes. Otherwise, the \fBelse\fP \fIlist\fP is
-executed, if present. The exit status is the exit status of the
-last command executed, or zero if no condition tested true.
-.TP
-\fBwhile\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdone\fP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBuntil\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP; \fBdone\fP
-.PD
-The \fBwhile\fP command continuously executes the \fBdo\fP
-\fIlist\fP as long as the last command in \fIlist\fP returns
-an exit status of zero. The \fBuntil\fP command is identical
-to the \fBwhile\fP command, except that the test is negated;
-the
-.B do
-.I list
-is executed as long as the last command in
-.I list
-returns a non-zero exit status.
-The exit status of the \fBwhile\fP and \fBuntil\fP commands
-is the exit status
-of the last \fBdo\fP \fIlist\fP command executed, or zero if
-none was executed.
-.TP
-[ \fBfunction\fP ] \fIname\fP () { \fIlist\fP; }
-This defines a function named \fIname\fP. The \fIbody\fP of the
-function is the
-.I list
-of commands between { and }. This list
-is executed whenever \fIname\fP is specified as the
-name of a simple command. The exit status of a function is
-the exit status of the last command executed in the body. (See
-.SM
-.B FUNCTIONS
-below.)
-.SH COMMENTS
-In a non-interactive shell, or an interactive shell in which the
-.B interactive_comments
-option to the
-.B shopt
-builtin is enabled (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below), a word beginning with
-.B #
-causes that word and all remaining characters on that line to
-be ignored. An interactive shell without the
-.B interactive_comments
-option enabled does not allow comments. The
-.B interactive_comments
-option is on by default in interactive shells.
-.SH QUOTING
-\fIQuoting\fP is used to remove the special meaning of certain
-characters or words to the shell. Quoting can be used to
-disable special treatment for special characters, to prevent
-reserved words from being recognized as such, and to prevent
-parameter expansion.
-.PP
-Each of the \fImetacharacters\fP listed above under
-.SM
-.B DEFINITIONS
-has special meaning to the shell and must be quoted if it is to
-represent itself.
-.PP
-When the command history expansion facilities are being used, the
-\fIhistory expansion\fP character, usually \fB!\fP, must be quoted
-to prevent history expansion.
-.PP
-There are three quoting mechanisms: the
-.IR "escape character" ,
-single quotes, and double quotes.
-.PP
-A non-quoted backslash (\fB\e\fP) is the
-.IR "escape character" .
-It preserves the literal value of the next character that follows,
-with the exception of <newline>. If a \fB\e\fP<newline> pair
-appears, and the backslash is not itself quoted, the \fB\e\fP<newline>
-is treated as a line continuation (that is, it is removed from the
-input stream and effectively ignored).
-.PP
-Enclosing characters in single quotes preserves the literal value
-of each character within the quotes. A single quote may not occur
-between single quotes, even when preceded by a backslash.
-.PP
-Enclosing characters in double quotes preserves the literal value
-of all characters within the quotes, with the exception of
-.BR $ ,
-.BR ` ,
-and
-.BR \e .
-The characters
-.B $
-and
-.B `
-retain their special meaning within double quotes. The backslash
-retains its special meaning only when followed by one of the following
-characters:
-.BR $ ,
-.BR ` ,
-\^\fB"\fP\^,
-.BR \e ,
-or
-.BR <newline> .
-A double quote may be quoted within double quotes by preceding it with
-a backslash.
-.PP
-The special parameters
-.B *
-and
-.B @
-have special meaning when in double
-quotes (see
-.SM
-.B PARAMETERS
-below).
-.PP
-Words of the form \fB$\fP'\fIstring\fP' are treated specially. The
-word expands to \fIstring\fP, with backslash-escaped characters replaced
-as specifed by the ANSI C standard. Backslash escape sequences, if
-present, are decoded as follows:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-alert (bell)
-.TP
-.B \eb
-backspace
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an escape character
-.TP
-.B \ef
-form feed
-.TP
-.B \en
-new line
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-.B \ev
-vertical tab
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-.B \e'
-single quote
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(one to three digits)
-.TP
-.B \ex\fIHH\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP
-(one or two hex digits)
-.TP
-.B \ec\fIx\fP
-a control-\fIx\fP character
-.PD
-.RE
-.LP
-The expanded result is single-quoted, as if the dollar sign had
-not been present.
-.PP
-A double-quoted string preceded by a dollar sign (\fB$\fP) will cause
-the string to be translated according to the current locale.
-If the current locale is \fBC\fP or \fBPOSIX\fP, the dollar sign
-is ignored.
-If the string is translated and replaced, the replacement is
-double-quoted.
-.SH PARAMETERS
-A
-.I parameter
-is an entity that stores values.
-It can be a
-.IR name ,
-a number, or one of the special characters listed below under
-.BR "Special Parameters" .
-For the shell's purposes, a
-.I variable
-is a parameter denoted by a
-.IR name .
-A variable has a \fIvalue\fP and zero or more \fIattributes\fP.
-Attributes are assigned using the
-.B declare
-builtin command (see
-.B declare
-below in
-.SM
-.BR "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS" ).
-.PP
-A parameter is set if it has been assigned a value. The null string is
-a valid value. Once a variable is set, it may be unset only by using
-the
-.B unset
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.PP
-A
-.I variable
-may be assigned to by a statement of the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIname\fP=[\fIvalue\fP]
-.RE
-.PP
-If
-.I value
-is not given, the variable is assigned the null string. All
-.I values
-undergo tilde expansion, parameter and variable expansion,
-command substitution, arithmetic expansion, and quote
-removal (see
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-below). If the variable has its
-.B integer
-attribute set, then
-.I value
-is subject to arithmetic expansion even if the $((...)) expansion is
-not used (see
-.B "Arithmetic Expansion"
-below).
-Word splitting is not performed, with the exception
-of \fB"$@"\fP as explained below under
-.BR "Special Parameters" .
-Pathname expansion is not performed.
-Assignment statements may also appear as arguments to the
-.BR declare ,
-.BR typeset ,
-.BR export ,
-.BR readonly ,
-and
-.B local
-builtin commands.
-.SS Positional Parameters
-.PP
-A
-.I positional parameter
-is a parameter denoted by one or more
-digits, other than the single digit 0. Positional parameters are
-assigned from the shell's arguments when it is invoked,
-and may be reassigned using the
-.B set
-builtin command. Positional parameters may not be assigned to
-with assignment statements. The positional parameters are
-temporarily replaced when a shell function is executed (see
-.SM
-.B FUNCTIONS
-below).
-.PP
-When a positional parameter consisting of more than a single
-digit is expanded, it must be enclosed in braces (see
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-below).
-.SS Special Parameters
-.PP
-The shell treats several parameters specially. These parameters may
-only be referenced; assignment to them is not allowed.
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B *
-Expands to the positional parameters, starting from one. When the
-expansion occurs within double quotes, it expands to a single word
-with the value of each parameter separated by the first character
-of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable. That is, "\fB$*\fP" is equivalent
-to "\fB$1\fP\fIc\fP\fB$2\fP\fIc\fP\fB...\fP", where
-.I c
-is the first character of the value of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-variable. If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is unset, the parameters are separated by spaces.
-If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is null, the parameters are joined without intervening separators.
-.TP
-.B @
-Expands to the positional parameters, starting from one. When the
-expansion occurs within double quotes, each parameter expands to a
-separate word. That is, "\fB$@\fP" is equivalent to
-"\fB$1\fP" "\fB$2\fP" ...
-When there are no positional parameters, "\fB$@\fP" and
-.B $@
-expand to nothing (i.e., they are removed).
-.TP
-.B #
-Expands to the number of positional parameters in decimal.
-.TP
-.B ?
-Expands to the status of the most recently executed foreground
-pipeline.
-.TP
-.B \-
-Expands to the current option flags as specified upon invocation,
-by the
-.B set
-builtin command, or those set by the shell itself
-(such as the
-.B \-i
-option).
-.TP
-.B $
-Expands to the process ID of the shell. In a () subshell, it
-expands to the process ID of the current shell, not the
-subshell.
-.TP
-.B !
-Expands to the process ID of the most recently executed background
-(asynchronous) command.
-.TP
-.B 0
-Expands to the name of the shell or shell script. This is set at
-shell initialization. If
-.B bash
-is invoked with a file of commands,
-.B $0
-is set to the name of that file. If
-.B bash
-is started with the
-.B \-c
-option, then
-.B $0
-is set to the first argument after the string to be
-executed, if one is present. Otherwise, it is set
-to the file name used to invoke
-.BR bash ,
-as given by argument zero.
-.TP
-.B _
-At shell startup, set to the absolute file name of the shell or shell
-script being executed as passed in the argument list.
-Subsequently, expands to the last argument to the previous command,
-after expansion.
-Also set to the full file name of each command executed and placed in
-the environment exported to that command.
-When checking mail, this parameter holds the name of the mail file
-currently being checked.
-.PD
-.SS Shell Variables
-.PP
-The following variables are set by the shell:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B BASH
-Expands to the full file name used to invoke this instance of
-.BR bash .
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO
-A readonly array variable whose members hold version information for
-this instance of
-.BR bash .
-The values assigned to the array members are as follows:
-.sp .5
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 24
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR0\fP]
-The major version number (the \fIrelease\fP).
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR1\fP]
-The minor version number (the \fIversion\fP).
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR2\fP]
-The patch level.
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR3\fP]
-The build version.
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR4\fP]
-The release status (e.g., \fIbeta1\fP).
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSINFO[\fR5\fP]
-The value of \fBMACHTYPE\fP.
-.PD
-.RE
-.TP
-.B BASH_VERSION
-Expands to a string describing the version of this instance of
-.BR bash .
-.TP
-.B COMP_CWORD
-An index into \fB${COMP_WORDS}\fP of the word containing the current
-cursor position.
-This variable is available only in shell functions invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B COMP_LINE
-The current command line.
-This variable is available only in shell functions and external
-commands invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B COMP_POINT
-The index of the current cursor position relative to the beginning of
-the current command.
-If the current cursor position is at the end of the current command,
-the value of this variable is equal to \fB${#COMP_LINE}\fP.
-This variable is available only in shell functions and external
-commands invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B COMP_WORDS
-An array variable (see \fBArrays\fP below) consisting of the individual
-words in the current command line.
-This variable is available only in shell functions invoked by the
-programmable completion facilities (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP
-below).
-.TP
-.B DIRSTACK
-An array variable (see
-.B Arrays
-below) containing the current contents of the directory stack.
-Directories appear in the stack in the order they are displayed by the
-.B dirs
-builtin.
-Assigning to members of this array variable may be used to modify
-directories already in the stack, but the
-.B pushd
-and
-.B popd
-builtins must be used to add and remove directories.
-Assignment to this variable will not change the current directory.
-If
-.SM
-.B DIRSTACK
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B EUID
-Expands to the effective user ID of the current user, initialized at
-shell startup. This variable is readonly.
-.TP
-.B FUNCNAME
-The name of any currently-executing shell function.
-This variable exists only when a shell function is executing.
-Assignments to
-.SM
-.B FUNCNAME
-have no effect and return an error status.
-If
-.SM
-.B FUNCNAME
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B GROUPS
-An array variable containing the list of groups of which the current
-user is a member.
-Assignments to
-.SM
-.B GROUPS
-have no effect and return an error status.
-If
-.SM
-.B GROUPS
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B HISTCMD
-The history number, or index in the history list, of the current
-command.
-If
-.SM
-.B HISTCMD
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B HOSTNAME
-Automatically set to the name of the current host.
-.TP
-.B HOSTTYPE
-Automatically set to a string that uniquely
-describes the type of machine on which
-.B bash
-is executing.
-The default is system-dependent.
-.TP
-.B LINENO
-Each time this parameter is referenced, the shell substitutes
-a decimal number representing the current sequential line number
-(starting with 1) within a script or function. When not in a
-script or function, the value substituted is not guaranteed to
-be meaningful.
-If
-.SM
-.B LINENO
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B MACHTYPE
-Automatically set to a string that fully describes the system
-type on which
-.B bash
-is executing, in the standard GNU \fIcpu-company-system\fP format.
-The default is system-dependent.
-.TP
-.B OLDPWD
-The previous working directory as set by the
-.B cd
-command.
-.TP
-.B OPTARG
-The value of the last option argument processed by the
-.B getopts
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.TP
-.B OPTIND
-The index of the next argument to be processed by the
-.B getopts
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.TP
-.B OSTYPE
-Automatically set to a string that
-describes the operating system on which
-.B bash
-is executing.
-The default is system-dependent.
-.TP
-.B PIPESTATUS
-An array variable (see
-.B Arrays
-below) containing a list of exit status values from the processes
-in the most-recently-executed foreground pipeline (which may
-contain only a single command).
-.TP
-.B PPID
-The process ID of the shell's parent. This variable is readonly.
-.TP
-.B PWD
-The current working directory as set by the
-.B cd
-command.
-.TP
-.B RANDOM
-Each time this parameter is referenced, a random integer between
-0 and 32767 is
-generated. The sequence of random numbers may be initialized by assigning
-a value to
-.SM
-.BR RANDOM .
-If
-.SM
-.B RANDOM
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B REPLY
-Set to the line of input read by the
-.B read
-builtin command when no arguments are supplied.
-.TP
-.B SECONDS
-Each time this parameter is
-referenced, the number of seconds since shell invocation is returned. If a
-value is assigned to
-.SM
-.BR SECONDS ,
-the value returned upon subsequent
-references is
-the number of seconds since the assignment plus the value assigned.
-If
-.SM
-.B SECONDS
-is unset, it loses its special properties, even if it is
-subsequently reset.
-.TP
-.B SHELLOPTS
-A colon-separated list of enabled shell options. Each word in
-the list is a valid argument for the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below). The options appearing in
-.SM
-.B SHELLOPTS
-are those reported as
-.I on
-by \fBset \-o\fP.
-If this variable is in the environment when
-.B bash
-starts up, each shell option in the list will be enabled before
-reading any startup files.
-This variable is read-only.
-.TP
-.B SHLVL
-Incremented by one each time an instance of
-.B bash
-is started.
-.TP
-.B UID
-Expands to the user ID of the current user, initialized at shell startup.
-This variable is readonly.
-.PD
-.PP
-The following variables are used by the shell. In some cases,
-.B bash
-assigns a default value to a variable; these cases are noted
-below.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B BASH_ENV
-If this parameter is set when \fBbash\fP is executing a shell script,
-its value is interpreted as a filename containing commands to
-initialize the shell, as in
-.IR ~/.bashrc .
-The value of
-.SM
-.B BASH_ENV
-is subjected to parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic
-expansion before being interpreted as a file name.
-.SM
-.B PATH
-is not used to search for the resultant file name.
-.TP
-.B CDPATH
-The search path for the
-.B cd
-command.
-This is a colon-separated list of directories in which the shell looks
-for destination directories specified by the
-.B cd
-command.
-A sample value is
-.if t \f(CW".:~:/usr"\fP.
-.if n ".:~:/usr".
-.TP
-.B COLUMNS
-Used by the \fBselect\fP builtin command to determine the terminal width
-when printing selection lists. Automatically set upon receipt of a SIGWINCH.
-.TP
-.B COMPREPLY
-An array variable from which \fBbash\fP reads the possible completions
-generated by a shell function invoked by the programmable completion
-facility (see \fBProgrammable Completion\fP below).
-.TP
-.B FCEDIT
-The default editor for the
-.B fc
-builtin command.
-.TP
-.B FIGNORE
-A colon-separated list of suffixes to ignore when performing
-filename completion (see
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-below).
-A filename whose suffix matches one of the entries in
-.SM
-.B FIGNORE
-is excluded from the list of matched filenames.
-A sample value is
-.if t \f(CW".o:~"\fP.
-.if n ".o:~".
-.TP
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-A colon-separated list of patterns defining the set of filenames to
-be ignored by pathname expansion.
-If a filename matched by a pathname expansion pattern also matches one
-of the patterns in
-.SM
-.BR GLOBIGNORE ,
-it is removed from the list of matches.
-.TP
-.B HISTCONTROL
-If set to a value of
-.IR ignorespace ,
-lines which begin with a
-.B space
-character are not entered on the history list.
-If set to a value of
-.IR ignoredups ,
-lines matching the last history line are not entered.
-A value of
-.I ignoreboth
-combines the two options.
-If unset, or if set to any other value than those above,
-all lines read
-by the parser are saved on the history list, subject to the value
-of
-.BR HISTIGNORE .
-This variable's function is superseded by
-.BR HISTIGNORE .
-The second and subsequent lines of a multi-line compound command are
-not tested, and are added to the history regardless of the value of
-.BR HISTCONTROL .
-.TP
-.B HISTFILE
-The name of the file in which command history is saved (see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below). The default value is \fI~/.bash_history\fP. If unset, the
-command history is not saved when an interactive shell exits.
-.TP
-.B HISTFILESIZE
-The maximum number of lines contained in the history file. When this
-variable is assigned a value, the history file is truncated, if
-necessary, to contain no more than that number of lines. The default
-value is 500. The history file is also truncated to this size after
-writing it when an interactive shell exits.
-.TP
-.B HISTIGNORE
-A colon-separated list of patterns used to decide which command lines
-should be saved on the history list. Each pattern is anchored at the
-beginning of the line and must match the complete line (no implicit
-`\fB*\fP' is appended). Each pattern is tested against the line
-after the checks specified by
-.B HISTCONTROL
-are applied.
-In addition to the normal shell pattern matching characters, `\fB&\fP'
-matches the previous history line. `\fB&\fP' may be escaped using a
-backslash; the backslash is removed before attempting a match.
-The second and subsequent lines of a multi-line compound command are
-not tested, and are added to the history regardless of the value of
-.BR HISTIGNORE .
-.TP
-.B HISTSIZE
-The number of commands to remember in the command history (see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below). The default value is 500.
-.TP
-.B HOME
-The home directory of the current user; the default argument for the
-\fBcd\fP builtin command.
-The value of this variable is also used when performing tilde expansion.
-.TP
-.B HOSTFILE
-Contains the name of a file in the same format as
-.FN /etc/hosts
-that should be read when the shell needs to complete a
-hostname.
-The list of possible hostname completions may be changed while the
-shell is running;
-the next time hostname completion is attempted after the
-value is changed,
-.B bash
-adds the contents of the new file to the existing list.
-If
-.SM
-.B HOSTFILE
-is set, but has no value, \fBbash\fP attempts to read
-.FN /etc/hosts
-to obtain the list of possible hostname completions.
-When
-.SM
-.B HOSTFILE
-is unset, the hostname list is cleared.
-.TP
-.B IFS
-The
-.I Internal Field Separator
-that is used
-for word splitting after expansion and to
-split lines into words with the
-.B read
-builtin command. The default value is
-``<space><tab><newline>''.
-.TP
-.B IGNOREEOF
-Controls the
-action of an interactive shell on receipt of an
-.SM
-.B EOF
-character as the sole input. If set, the value is the number of
-consecutive
-.SM
-.B EOF
-characters which must be
-typed as the first characters on an input line before
-.B bash
-exits. If the variable exists but does not have a numeric value, or
-has no value, the default value is 10. If it does not exist,
-.SM
-.B EOF
-signifies the end of input to the shell.
-.TP
-.B INPUTRC
-The filename for the
-.B readline
-startup file, overriding the default of
-.FN ~/.inputrc
-(see
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-below).
-.TP
-.B LANG
-Used to determine the locale category for any category not specifically
-selected with a variable starting with \fBLC_\fP.
-.TP
-.B LC_ALL
-This variable overrides the value of \fBLANG\fP and any other
-\fBLC_\fP variable specifying a locale category.
-.TP
-.B LC_COLLATE
-This variable determines the collation order used when sorting the
-results of pathname expansion, and determines the behavior of range
-expressions, equivalence classes, and collating sequences within
-pathname expansion and pattern matching.
-.TP
-.B LC_CTYPE
-This variable determines the interpretation of characters and the
-behavior of character classes within pathname expansion and pattern
-matching.
-.TP
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-This variable determines the locale used to translate double-quoted
-strings preceded by a \fB$\fP.
-.TP
-.B LC_NUMERIC
-This variable determines the locale category used for number formatting.
-.TP
-.B LINES
-Used by the \fBselect\fP builtin command to determine the column length
-for printing selection lists. Automatically set upon receipt of a SIGWINCH.
-.TP
-.B MAIL
-If this parameter is set to a file name and the
-.SM
-.B MAILPATH
-variable is not set,
-.B bash
-informs the user of the arrival of mail in the specified file.
-.TP
-.B MAILCHECK
-Specifies how
-often (in seconds)
-.B bash
-checks for mail. The default is 60 seconds. When it is time to check
-for mail, the shell does so before displaying the primary prompt.
-If this variable is unset, or set to a value that is not a number
-greater than or equal to zero, the shell disables mail checking.
-.TP
-.B MAILPATH
-A colon-separated list of file names to be checked for mail.
-The message to be printed when mail arrives in a particular file
-may be specified by separating the file name from the message with a `?'.
-When used in the text of the message, \fB$_\fP expands to the name of
-the current mailfile.
-Example:
-.RS
-.PP
-\fBMAILPATH\fP='/var/mail/bfox?"You have mail":~/shell\-mail?"$_ has mail!"'
-.PP
-.B Bash
-supplies a default value for this variable, but the location of the user
-mail files that it uses is system dependent (e.g., /var/mail/\fB$USER\fP).
-.RE
-.TP
-.B OPTERR
-If set to the value 1,
-.B bash
-displays error messages generated by the
-.B getopts
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SM
-.B OPTERR
-is initialized to 1 each time the shell is invoked or a shell
-script is executed.
-.TP
-.B PATH
-The search path for commands. It
-is a colon-separated list of directories in which
-the shell looks for commands (see
-.SM
-.B COMMAND EXECUTION
-below). The default path is system-dependent,
-and is set by the administrator who installs
-.BR bash .
-A common value is
-.if t \f(CW/usr/gnu/bin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/ucb:/bin:/usr/bin:.\fP.
-.if n ``/usr/gnu/bin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/ucb:/bin:/usr/bin:.''.
-.TP
-.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
-If this variable is in the environment when \fBbash\fP starts, the shell
-enters \fIposix mode\fP before reading the startup files, as if the
-.B \-\-posix
-invocation option had been supplied. If it is set while the shell is
-running, \fBbash\fP enables \fIposix mode\fP, as if the command
-.if t \f(CWset -o posix\fP
-.if n \fIset -o posix\fP
-had been executed.
-.TP
-.B PROMPT_COMMAND
-If set, the value is executed as a command prior to issuing each primary
-prompt.
-.TP
-.B PS1
-The value of this parameter is expanded (see
-.SM
-.B PROMPTING
-below) and used as the primary prompt string. The default value is
-``\fB\es\-\ev\e$ \fP''.
-.TP
-.B PS2
-The value of this parameter is expanded as with
-.B PS1
-and used as the secondary prompt string. The default is
-``\fB> \fP''.
-.TP
-.B PS3
-The value of this parameter is used as the prompt for the
-.B select
-command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-above).
-.TP
-.B PS4
-The value of this parameter is expanded as with
-.B PS1
-and the value is printed before each command
-.B bash
-displays during an execution trace. The first character of
-.SM
-.B PS4
-is replicated multiple times, as necessary, to indicate multiple
-levels of indirection. The default is ``\fB+ \fP''.
-.TP
-.B TIMEFORMAT
-The value of this parameter is used as a format string specifying
-how the timing information for pipelines prefixed with the
-.B time
-reserved word should be displayed.
-The \fB%\fP character introduces an escape sequence that is
-expanded to a time value or other information.
-The escape sequences and their meanings are as follows; the
-braces denote optional portions.
-.sp .5
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 10
-.B %%
-A literal \fB%\fP.
-.TP
-.B %[\fIp\fP][l]R
-The elapsed time in seconds.
-.TP
-.B %[\fIp\fP][l]U
-The number of CPU seconds spent in user mode.
-.TP
-.B %[\fIp\fP][l]S
-The number of CPU seconds spent in system mode.
-.TP
-.B %P
-The CPU percentage, computed as (%U + %S) / %R.
-.PD
-.RE
-.IP
-The optional \fIp\fP is a digit specifying the \fIprecision\fP,
-the number of fractional digits after a decimal point.
-A value of 0 causes no decimal point or fraction to be output.
-At most three places after the decimal point may be specified;
-values of \fIp\fP greater than 3 are changed to 3.
-If \fIp\fP is not specified, the value 3 is used.
-.IP
-The optional \fBl\fP specifies a longer format, including
-minutes, of the form \fIMM\fPm\fISS\fP.\fIFF\fPs.
-The value of \fIp\fP determines whether or not the fraction is
-included.
-.IP
-If this variable is not set, \fBbash\fP acts as if it had the
-value \fB$'\enreal\et%3lR\enuser\et%3lU\ensys\t%3lS'\fP.
-If the value is null, no timing information is displayed.
-A trailing newline is added when the format string is displayed.
-.TP
-.B TMOUT
-If set to a value greater than zero, \fBTMOUT\fP is treated as the
-default timeout for the \fBread\fP builtin.
-The \fBselect\fP command terminates if input does not arrive
-after \fBTMOUT\fP seconds when input is coming from a terminal.
-In an interactive shell, the value is interpreted as the
-number of seconds to wait for input after issuing the primary prompt.
-.B Bash
-terminates after waiting for that number of seconds if input does
-not arrive.
-.TP
-.B auto_resume
-This variable controls how the shell interacts with the user and
-job control. If this variable is set, single word simple
-commands without redirections are treated as candidates for resumption
-of an existing stopped job. There is no ambiguity allowed; if there is
-more than one job beginning with the string typed, the job most recently
-accessed is selected. The
-.I name
-of a stopped job, in this context, is the command line used to
-start it.
-If set to the value
-.IR exact ,
-the string supplied must match the name of a stopped job exactly;
-if set to
-.IR substring ,
-the string supplied needs to match a substring of the name of a
-stopped job. The
-.I substring
-value provides functionality analogous to the
-.B %?
-job identifier (see
-.SM
-.B JOB CONTROL
-below). If set to any other value, the supplied string must
-be a prefix of a stopped job's name; this provides functionality
-analogous to the
-.B %
-job identifier.
-.TP
-.B histchars
-The two or three characters which control history expansion
-and tokenization (see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below). The first character is the \fIhistory expansion\fP character,
-the character which signals the start of a history
-expansion, normally `\fB!\fP'.
-The second character is the \fIquick substitution\fP
-character, which is used as shorthand for re-running the previous
-command entered, substituting one string for another in the command.
-The default is `\fB^\fP'.
-The optional third character is the character
-which indicates that the remainder of the line is a comment when found
-as the first character of a word, normally `\fB#\fP'. The history
-comment character causes history substitution to be skipped for the
-remaining words on the line. It does not necessarily cause the shell
-parser to treat the rest of the line as a comment.
-.PD
-.SS Arrays
-.B Bash
-provides one-dimensional array variables. Any variable may be used as
-an array; the
-.B declare
-builtin will explicitly declare an array. There is no maximum
-limit on the size of an array, nor any requirement that members
-be indexed or assigned contiguously. Arrays are indexed using
-integers and are zero-based.
-.PP
-An array is created automatically if any variable is assigned to using
-the syntax \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]=\fIvalue\fP. The
-.I subscript
-is treated as an arithmetic expression that must evaluate to a number
-greater than or equal to zero. To explicitly declare an array, use
-.B declare \-a \fIname\fP
-(see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.B declare \-a \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]
-is also accepted; the \fIsubscript\fP is ignored. Attributes may be
-specified for an array variable using the
-.B declare
-and
-.B readonly
-builtins. Each attribute applies to all members of an array.
-.PP
-Arrays are assigned to using compound assignments of the form
-\fIname\fP=\fB(\fPvalue\fI1\fP ... value\fIn\fP\fB)\fP, where each
-\fIvalue\fP is of the form [\fIsubscript\fP]=\fIstring\fP. Only
-\fIstring\fP is required. If
-the optional brackets and subscript are supplied, that index is assigned to;
-otherwise the index of the element assigned is the last index assigned
-to by the statement plus one. Indexing starts at zero.
-This syntax is also accepted by the
-.B declare
-builtin. Individual array elements may be assigned to using the
-\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]=\fIvalue\fP syntax introduced above.
-.PP
-Any element of an array may be referenced using
-${\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]}. The braces are required to avoid
-conflicts with pathname expansion. If
-\fIsubscript\fP is \fB@\fP or \fB*\fP, the word expands to
-all members of \fIname\fP. These subscripts differ only when the
-word appears within double quotes. If the word is double-quoted,
-${\fIname\fP[*]} expands to a single
-word with the value of each array member separated by the first
-character of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable, and ${\fIname\fP[@]} expands each element of
-\fIname\fP to a separate word. When there are no array members,
-${\fIname\fP[@]} expands to nothing. This is analogous to the expansion
-of the special parameters \fB*\fP and \fB@\fP (see
-.B Special Parameters
-above). ${#\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]} expands to the length of
-${\fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]}. If \fIsubscript\fP is \fB*\fP or
-\fB@\fP, the expansion is the number of elements in the array.
-Referencing an array variable without a subscript is equivalent to
-referencing element zero.
-.PP
-The
-.B unset
-builtin is used to destroy arrays. \fBunset\fP \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP]
-destroys the array element at index \fIsubscript\fP.
-\fBunset\fP \fIname\fP, where \fIname\fP is an array, or
-\fBunset\fP \fIname\fP[\fIsubscript\fP], where
-\fIsubscript\fP is \fB*\fP or \fB@\fP, removes the entire array.
-.PP
-The
-.BR declare ,
-.BR local ,
-and
-.B readonly
-builtins each accept a
-.B \-a
-option to specify an array. The
-.B read
-builtin accepts a
-.B \-a
-option to assign a list of words read from the standard input
-to an array. The
-.B set
-and
-.B declare
-builtins display array values in a way that allows them to be
-reused as assignments.
-.SH EXPANSION
-Expansion is performed on the command line after it has been split into
-words. There are seven kinds of expansion performed:
-.IR "brace expansion" ,
-.IR "tilde expansion" ,
-.IR "parameter and variable expansion" ,
-.IR "command substitution" ,
-.IR "arithmetic expansion" ,
-.IR "word splitting" ,
-and
-.IR "pathname expansion" .
-.PP
-The order of expansions is: brace expansion, tilde expansion,
-parameter, variable and arithmetic expansion and
-command substitution
-(done in a left-to-right fashion), word splitting, and pathname
-expansion.
-.PP
-On systems that can support it, there is an additional expansion
-available: \fIprocess substitution\fP.
-.PP
-Only brace expansion, word splitting, and pathname expansion
-can change the number of words of the expansion; other expansions
-expand a single word to a single word.
-The only exceptions to this are the expansions of
-"\fB$@\fP" and "\fB${\fP\fIname\fP\fB[@]}\fP"
-as explained above (see
-.SM
-.BR PARAMETERS ).
-.SS Brace Expansion
-.PP
-.I "Brace expansion"
-is a mechanism by which arbitrary strings
-may be generated. This mechanism is similar to
-\fIpathname expansion\fP, but the filenames generated
-need not exist. Patterns to be brace expanded take
-the form of an optional
-.IR preamble ,
-followed by a series of comma-separated strings
-between a pair of braces, followed by an optional
-.IR postscript .
-The preamble is prefixed to each string contained
-within the braces, and the postscript is then appended
-to each resulting string, expanding left to right.
-.PP
-Brace expansions may be nested. The results of each expanded
-string are not sorted; left to right order is preserved.
-For example, a\fB{\fPd,c,b\fB}\fPe expands into `ade ace abe'.
-.PP
-Brace expansion is performed before any other expansions,
-and any characters special to other expansions are preserved
-in the result. It is strictly textual.
-.B Bash
-does not apply any syntactic interpretation to the context of the
-expansion or the text between the braces.
-.PP
-A correctly-formed brace expansion must contain unquoted opening
-and closing braces, and at least one unquoted comma.
-Any incorrectly formed brace expansion is left unchanged.
-A \fB{\fP or \fB,\fP may be quoted with a backslash to prevent its
-being considered part of a brace expression.
-To avoid conflicts with parameter expansion, the string \fB${\fP
-is not considered eligible for brace expansion.
-.PP
-This construct is typically used as shorthand when the common
-prefix of the strings to be generated is longer than in the
-above example:
-.RS
-.PP
-mkdir /usr/local/src/bash/{old,new,dist,bugs}
-.RE
-or
-.RS
-chown root /usr/{ucb/{ex,edit},lib/{ex?.?*,how_ex}}
-.RE
-.PP
-Brace expansion introduces a slight incompatibility with
-historical versions of
-.BR sh .
-.B sh
-does not treat opening or closing braces specially when they
-appear as part of a word, and preserves them in the output.
-.B Bash
-removes braces from words as a consequence of brace
-expansion. For example, a word entered to
-.B sh
-as \fIfile{1,2}\fP
-appears identically in the output. The same word is
-output as
-.I file1 file2
-after expansion by
-.BR bash .
-If strict compatibility with
-.B sh
-is desired, start
-.B bash
-with the
-.B +B
-option or disable brace expansion with the
-.B +B
-option to the
-.B set
-command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SS Tilde Expansion
-.PP
-If a word begins with an unquoted tilde character (`\fB~\fP'), all of
-the characters preceding the first unquoted slash (or all characters,
-if there is no unquoted slash) are considered a \fItilde-prefix\fP.
-If none of the characters in the tilde-prefix are quoted, the
-characters in the tilde-prefix following the tilde are treated as a
-possible \fIlogin name\fP.
-If this login name is the null string, the tilde is replaced with the
-value of the shell parameter
-.SM
-.BR HOME .
-If
-.SM
-.B HOME
-is unset, the home directory of the user executing the shell is
-substituted instead.
-Otherwise, the tilde-prefix is replaced with the home directory
-associated with the specified login name.
-.PP
-If the tilde-prefix is a `~+', the value of the shell variable
-.SM
-.B PWD
-replaces the tilde-prefix.
-If the tilde-prefix is a `~\-', the value of the shell variable
-.SM
-.BR OLDPWD ,
-if it is set, is substituted.
-If the characters following the tilde in the tilde-prefix consist
-of a number \fIN\fP, optionally prefixed
-by a `+' or a `\-', the tilde-prefix is replaced with the corresponding
-element from the directory stack, as it would be displayed by the
-.B dirs
-builtin invoked with the tilde-prefix as an argument.
-If the characters following the tilde in the tilde-prefix consist of a
-number without a leading `+' or `\-', `+' is assumed.
-.PP
-If the login name is invalid, or the tilde expansion fails, the word
-is unchanged.
-.PP
-Each variable assignment is checked for unquoted tilde-prefixes immediately
-following a
-.B :
-or
-.BR = .
-In these cases, tilde expansion is also performed.
-Consequently, one may use file names with tildes in assignments to
-.SM
-.BR PATH ,
-.SM
-.BR MAILPATH ,
-and
-.SM
-.BR CDPATH ,
-and the shell assigns the expanded value.
-.SS Parameter Expansion
-.PP
-The `\fB$\fP' character introduces parameter expansion,
-command substitution, or arithmetic expansion. The parameter name
-or symbol to be expanded may be enclosed in braces, which
-are optional but serve to protect the variable to be expanded from
-characters immediately following it which could be
-interpreted as part of the name.
-.PP
-When braces are used, the matching ending brace is the first `\fB}\fP'
-not escaped by a backslash or within a quoted string, and not within an
-embedded arithmetic expansion, command substitution, or paramter
-expansion.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP}
-The value of \fIparameter\fP is substituted. The braces are required
-when
-.I parameter
-is a positional parameter with more than one digit,
-or when
-.I parameter
-is followed by a character which is not to be
-interpreted as part of its name.
-.PD
-.PP
-If the first character of \fIparameter\fP is an exclamation point,
-a level of variable indirection is introduced.
-\fBBash\fP uses the value of the variable formed from the rest of
-\fIparameter\fP as the name of the variable; this variable is then
-expanded and that value is used in the rest of the substitution, rather
-than the value of \fIparameter\fP itself.
-This is known as \fIindirect expansion\fP.
-The exception to this is the expansion of ${!\fIprefix\fP*}
-described below.
-.PP
-In each of the cases below, \fIword\fP is subject to tilde expansion,
-parameter expansion, command substitution, and arithmetic expansion.
-When not performing substring expansion, \fBbash\fP tests for a parameter
-that is unset or null; omitting the colon results in a test only for a
-parameter that is unset.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:\-\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBUse Default Values\fP. If
-.I parameter
-is unset or null, the expansion of
-.I word
-is substituted. Otherwise, the value of
-.I parameter
-is substituted.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:=\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBAssign Default Values\fP.
-If
-.I parameter
-is unset or null, the expansion of
-.I word
-is assigned to
-.IR parameter .
-The value of
-.I parameter
-is then substituted. Positional parameters and special parameters may
-not be assigned to in this way.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:?\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBDisplay Error if Null or Unset\fP.
-If
-.I parameter
-is null or unset, the expansion of \fIword\fP (or a message to that effect
-if
-.I word
-is not present) is written to the standard error and the shell, if it
-is not interactive, exits. Otherwise, the value of \fIparameter\fP is
-substituted.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:+\fP\fIword\fP}
-\fBUse Alternate Value\fP.
-If
-.I parameter
-is null or unset, nothing is substituted, otherwise the expansion of
-.I word
-is substituted.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:\fP\fIoffset\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB:\fP\fIoffset\fP\fB:\fP\fIlength\fP}
-.PD
-\fBSubstring Expansion.\fP
-Expands to up to \fIlength\fP characters of \fIparameter\fP
-starting at the character specified by \fIoffset\fP.
-If \fIlength\fP is omitted, expands to the substring of
-\fIparameter\fP starting at the character specified by \fIoffset\fP.
-\fIlength\fP and \fIoffset\fP are arithmetic expressions (see
-.SM
-.B
-ARITHMETIC EVALUATION
-below).
-\fIlength\fP must evaluate to a number greater than or equal to zero.
-If \fIoffset\fP evaluates to a number less than zero, the value
-is used as an offset from the end of the value of \fIparameter\fP.
-If \fIparameter\fP is \fB@\fP, the result is \fIlength\fP positional
-parameters beginning at \fIoffset\fP.
-If \fIparameter\fP is an array name indexed by @ or *,
-the result is the \fIlength\fP
-members of the array beginning with ${\fIparameter\fP[\fIoffset\fP]}.
-Substring indexing is zero-based unless the positional parameters
-are used, in which case the indexing starts at 1.
-.TP
-${\fB!\fP\fIprefix\fP\fB*\fP}
-Expands to the names of variables whose names begin with \fIprefix\fP,
-separated by the first character of the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable.
-.TP
-${\fB#\fP\fIparameter\fP}
-The length in characters of the value of \fIparameter\fP is substituted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B *
-or
-.BR @ ,
-the value substituted is the number of positional parameters.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array name subscripted by
-.B *
-or
-.BR @ ,
-the value substituted is the number of elements in the array.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB#\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB##\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD
-The
-.I word
-is expanded to produce a pattern just as in pathname
-expansion. If the pattern matches the beginning of
-the value of
-.IR parameter ,
-then the result of the expansion is the expanded value of
-.I parameter
-with the shortest matching pattern (the ``\fB#\fP'' case) or the
-longest matching pattern (the ``\fB##\fP'' case) deleted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each positional
-parameter in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array variable subscripted with
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each member of the
-array in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB%\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB%%\fP\fIword\fP}
-.PD
-The \fIword\fP is expanded to produce a pattern just as in
-pathname expansion.
-If the pattern matches a trailing portion of the expanded value of
-.IR parameter ,
-then the result of the expansion is the expanded value of
-.I parameter
-with the shortest matching pattern (the ``\fB%\fP'' case) or the
-longest matching pattern (the ``\fB%%\fP'' case) deleted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each positional
-parameter in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array variable subscripted with
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the pattern removal operation is applied to each member of the
-array in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB/\fP\fIpattern\fP\fB/\fP\fIstring\fP}
-.PD 0
-.TP
-${\fIparameter\fP\fB//\fP\fIpattern\fP\fB/\fP\fIstring\fP}
-.PD
-The \fIpattern\fP is expanded to produce a pattern just as in
-pathname expansion.
-\fIParameter\fP is expanded and the longest match of \fIpattern\fP
-against its value is replaced with \fIstring\fP.
-In the first form, only the first match is replaced.
-The second form causes all matches of \fIpattern\fP to be
-replaced with \fIstring\fP.
-If \fIpattern\fP begins with \fB#\fP, it must match at the beginning
-of the expanded value of \fIparameter\fP.
-If \fIpattern\fP begins with \fB%\fP, it must match at the end
-of the expanded value of \fIparameter\fP.
-If \fIstring\fP is null, matches of \fIpattern\fP are deleted
-and the \fB/\fP following \fIpattern\fP may be omitted.
-If
-.I parameter
-is
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the substitution operation is applied to each positional
-parameter in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-If
-.I parameter
-is an array variable subscripted with
-.B @
-or
-.BR * ,
-the substitution operation is applied to each member of the
-array in turn, and the expansion is the resultant list.
-.SS Command Substitution
-.PP
-\fICommand substitution\fP allows the output of a command to replace
-the command name. There are two forms:
-.PP
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB$(\fP\fIcommand\fP\|\fB)\fP
-.RE
-or
-.RS
-\fB`\fP\fIcommand\fP\fB`\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.B Bash
-performs the expansion by executing \fIcommand\fP and
-replacing the command substitution with the standard output of the
-command, with any trailing newlines deleted.
-Embedded newlines are not deleted, but they may be removed during
-word splitting.
-The command substitution \fB$(cat \fIfile\fP)\fR can be replaced by
-the equivalent but faster \fB$(< \fIfile\fP)\fR.
-.PP
-When the old-style backquote form of substitution is used,
-backslash retains its literal meaning except when followed by
-.BR $ ,
-.BR ` ,
-or
-.BR \e .
-The first backquote not preceded by a backslash terminates the
-command substitution.
-When using the $(\^\fIcommand\fP\|) form, all characters between the
-parentheses make up the command; none are treated specially.
-.PP
-Command substitutions may be nested. To nest when using the backquoted form,
-escape the inner backquotes with backslashes.
-.PP
-If the substitution appears within double quotes, word splitting and
-pathname expansion are not performed on the results.
-.SS Arithmetic Expansion
-.PP
-Arithmetic expansion allows the evaluation of an arithmetic expression
-and the substitution of the result. The format for arithmetic expansion is:
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB$((\fP\fIexpression\fP\fB))\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-The
-.I expression
-is treated as if it were within double quotes, but a double quote
-inside the parentheses is not treated specially.
-All tokens in the expression undergo parameter expansion, string
-expansion, command substitution, and quote removal.
-Arithmetic substitutions may be nested.
-.PP
-The evaluation is performed according to the rules listed below under
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" .
-If
-.I expression
-is invalid,
-.B bash
-prints a message indicating failure and no substitution occurs.
-.SS Process Substitution
-.PP
-\fIProcess substitution\fP is supported on systems that support named
-pipes (\fIFIFOs\fP) or the \fB/dev/fd\fP method of naming open files.
-It takes the form of
-\fB<(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP
-or
-\fB>(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP.
-The process \fIlist\fP is run with its input or output connected to a
-\fIFIFO\fP or some file in \fB/dev/fd\fP. The name of this file is
-passed as an argument to the current command as the result of the
-expansion. If the \fB>(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP form is used, writing to
-the file will provide input for \fIlist\fP. If the
-\fB<(\fP\fIlist\^\fP\fB)\fP form is used, the file passed as an
-argument should be read to obtain the output of \fIlist\fP.
-.PP
-When available, process substitution is performed
-simultaneously with parameter and variable expansion,
-command substitution,
-and arithmetic expansion.
-.SS Word Splitting
-.PP
-The shell scans the results of
-parameter expansion,
-command substitution,
-and
-arithmetic expansion
-that did not occur within double quotes for
-.IR "word splitting" .
-.PP
-The shell treats each character of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-as a delimiter, and splits the results of the other
-expansions into words on these characters. If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is unset, or its
-value is exactly
-.BR <space><tab><newline> ,
-the default, then
-any sequence of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-characters serves to delimit words. If
-.SM
-.B IFS
-has a value other than the default, then sequences of
-the whitespace characters
-.B space
-and
-.B tab
-are ignored at the beginning and end of the
-word, as long as the whitespace character is in the
-value of
-.SM
-.BR IFS
-(an
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace character).
-Any character in
-.SM
-.B IFS
-that is not
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace, along with any adjacent
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace characters, delimits a field.
-A sequence of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-whitespace characters is also treated as a delimiter.
-If the value of
-.SM
-.B IFS
-is null, no word splitting occurs.
-.PP
-Explicit null arguments (\^\f3"\^"\fP or \^\f3'\^'\fP\^) are retained.
-Unquoted implicit null arguments, resulting from the expansion of
-parameters that have no values, are removed.
-If a parameter with no value is expanded within double quotes, a
-null argument results and is retained.
-.PP
-Note that if no expansion occurs, no splitting
-is performed.
-.SS Pathname Expansion
-.PP
-After word splitting,
-unless the
-.B \-f
-option has been set,
-.B bash
-scans each word for the characters
-.BR * ,
-.BR ? ,
-and
-.BR [ .
-If one of these characters appears, then the word is
-regarded as a
-.IR pattern ,
-and replaced with an alphabetically sorted list of
-file names matching the pattern.
-If no matching file names are found,
-and the shell option
-.B nullglob
-is disabled, the word is left unchanged.
-If the
-.B nullglob
-option is set, and no matches are found,
-the word is removed.
-If the shell option
-.B nocaseglob
-is enabled, the match is performed without regard to the case
-of alphabetic characters.
-When a pattern is used for pathname expansion,
-the character
-.B ``.''
-at the start of a name or immediately following a slash
-must be matched explicitly, unless the shell option
-.B dotglob
-is set.
-When matching a pathname, the slash character must always be
-matched explicitly.
-In other cases, the
-.B ``.''
-character is not treated specially.
-See the description of
-.B shopt
-below under
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-for a description of the
-.BR nocaseglob ,
-.BR nullglob ,
-and
-.B dotglob
-shell options.
-.PP
-The
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-shell variable may be used to restrict the set of file names matching a
-.IR pattern .
-If
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is set, each matching file name that also matches one of the patterns in
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is removed from the list of matches.
-The file names
-.B ``.''
-and
-.B ``..''
-are always ignored, even when
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is set. However, setting
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-has the effect of enabling the
-.B dotglob
-shell option, so all other file names beginning with a
-.B ``.''
-will match.
-To get the old behavior of ignoring file names beginning with a
-.BR ``.'' ,
-make
-.B ``.*''
-one of the patterns in
-.SM
-.BR GLOBIGNORE .
-The
-.B dotglob
-option is disabled when
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-is unset.
-.PP
-\fBPattern Matching\fP
-.PP
-Any character that appears in a pattern, other than the special pattern
-characters described below, matches itself. The NUL character may not
-occur in a pattern. The special pattern characters must be quoted if
-they are to be matched literally.
-.PP
-The special pattern characters have the following meanings:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B *
-Matches any string, including the null string.
-.TP
-.B ?
-Matches any single character.
-.TP
-.B [...]
-Matches any one of the enclosed characters. A pair of characters
-separated by a hyphen denotes a
-\fIrange expression\fP;
-any character that sorts between those two characters, inclusive,
-using the current locale's collating sequence and character set,
-is matched. If the first character following the
-.B [
-is a
-.B !
-or a
-.B ^
-then any character not enclosed is matched.
-The sorting order of characters in range expressions is determined by
-the current locale and the value of the \fBLC_COLLATE\fP shell variable,
-if set.
-A
-.B \-
-may be matched by including it as the first or last character
-in the set.
-A
-.B ]
-may be matched by including it as the first character
-in the set.
-.br
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Within
-.B [
-and
-.BR ] ,
-\fIcharacter classes\fP can be specified using the syntax
-\fB[:\fP\fIclass\fP\fB:]\fP, where \fIclass\fP is one of the
-following classes defined in the POSIX.2 standard:
-.PP
-.RS
-.B
-.if n alnum alpha ascii blank cntrl digit graph lower print punct space upper word xdigit
-.if t alnum alpha ascii blank cntrl digit graph lower print punct space upper word xdigit
-.br
-A character class matches any character belonging to that class.
-The \fBword\fP character class matches letters, digits, and the character _.
-.br
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Within
-.B [
-and
-.BR ] ,
-an \fIequivalence class\fP can be specified using the syntax
-\fB[=\fP\fIc\fP\fB=]\fP, which matches all characters with the
-same collation weight (as defined by the current locale) as
-the character \fIc\fP.
-.br
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Within
-.B [
-and
-.BR ] ,
-the syntax \fB[.\fP\fIsymbol\fP\fB.]\fP matches the collating symbol
-\fIsymbol\fP.
-.RE
-.PD
-.PP
-If the \fBextglob\fP shell option is enabled using the \fBshopt\fP
-builtin, several extended pattern matching operators are recognized.
-In the following description, a \fIpattern-list\fP is a list of one
-or more patterns separated by a \fB|\fP.
-Composite patterns may be formed using one or more of the following
-sub-patterns:
-.sp 1
-.PD 0
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB?(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches zero or one occurrence of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB*(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches zero or more occurrences of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB+(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches one or more occurrences of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB@(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches exactly one of the given patterns
-.TP
-\fB!(\fP\^\fIpattern-list\^\fP\fB)\fP
-Matches anything except one of the given patterns
-.RE
-.PD
-.SS Quote Removal
-.PP
-After the preceding expansions, all unquoted occurrences of the
-characters
-.BR \e ,
-.BR ' ,
-and \^\f3"\fP\^ that did not result from one of the above
-expansions are removed.
-.SH REDIRECTION
-Before a command is executed, its input and output
-may be
-.I redirected
-using a special notation interpreted by the shell.
-Redirection may also be used to open and close files for the
-current shell execution environment. The following redirection
-operators may precede or appear anywhere within a
-.I simple command
-or may follow a
-.IR command .
-Redirections are processed in the order they appear, from
-left to right.
-.PP
-In the following descriptions, if the file descriptor number is
-omitted, and the first character of the redirection operator is
-.BR < ,
-the redirection refers to the standard input (file descriptor
-0). If the first character of the redirection operator is
-.BR > ,
-the redirection refers to the standard output (file descriptor
-1).
-.PP
-The word following the redirection operator in the following
-descriptions, unless otherwise noted, is subjected to brace expansion,
-tilde expansion, parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic
-expansion, quote removal, pathname expansion, and word splitting.
-If it expands to more than one word,
-.B bash
-reports an error.
-.PP
-Note that the order of redirections is significant. For example,
-the command
-.RS
-.PP
-ls \fB>\fP dirlist 2\fB>&\fP1
-.RE
-.PP
-directs both standard output and standard error to the file
-.IR dirlist ,
-while the command
-.RS
-.PP
-ls 2\fB>&\fP1 \fB>\fP dirlist
-.RE
-.PP
-directs only the standard output to file
-.IR dirlist ,
-because the standard error was duplicated as standard output
-before the standard output was redirected to
-.IR dirlist .
-.PP
-\fBBash\fP handles several filenames specially when they are used in
-redirections, as described in the following table:
-.RS
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B /dev/fd/\fIfd\fP
-If \fIfd\fP is a valid integer, file descriptor \fIfd\fP is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/stdin
-File descriptor 0 is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/stdout
-File descriptor 1 is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/stderr
-File descriptor 2 is duplicated.
-.TP
-.B /dev/tcp/\fIhost\fP/\fIport\fP
-If \fIhost\fP is a valid hostname or Internet address, and \fIport\fP
-is an integer port number or service name, \fBbash\fP attempts to open
-a TCP connection to the corresponding socket.
-.TP
-.B /dev/udp/\fIhost\fP/\fIport\fP
-If \fIhost\fP is a valid hostname or Internet address, and \fIport\fP
-is an integer port number or service name, \fBbash\fP attempts to open
-a UDP connection to the corresponding socket.
-.PD
-.RE
-.PP
-A failure to open or create a file causes the redirection to fail.
-.SS Redirecting Input
-.PP
-Redirection of input causes the file whose name results from
-the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for reading on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard input (file descriptor 0) if
-.I n
-is not specified.
-.PP
-The general format for redirecting input is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.SS Redirecting Output
-.PP
-Redirection of output causes the file whose name results from
-the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for writing on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard output (file descriptor 1) if
-.I n
-is not specified. If the file does not exist it is created;
-if it does exist it is truncated to zero size.
-.PP
-The general format for redirecting output is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-If the redirection operator is
-.BR > ,
-and the
-.B noclobber
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin has been enabled, the redirection will fail if the file
-whose name results from the expansion of \fIword\fP exists and is
-a regular file.
-If the redirection operator is
-.BR >| ,
-or the redirection operator is
-.B >
-and the
-.B noclobber
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command is not enabled, the redirection is attempted even
-if the file named by \fIword\fP exists.
-.SS Appending Redirected Output
-.PP
-Redirection of output in this fashion
-causes the file whose name results from
-the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for appending on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard output (file descriptor 1) if
-.I n
-is not specified. If the file does not exist it is created.
-.PP
-The general format for appending output is:
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-.SS Redirecting Standard Output and Standard Error
-.PP
-.B Bash
-allows both the
-standard output (file descriptor 1) and
-the standard error output (file descriptor 2)
-to be redirected to the file whose name is the
-expansion of
-.I word
-with this construct.
-.PP
-There are two formats for redirecting standard output and
-standard error:
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB&>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-and
-.RS
-\fB>&\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-Of the two forms, the first is preferred.
-This is semantically equivalent to
-.RS
-.PP
-\fB>\fP\fIword\fP 2\fB>&\fP1
-.RE
-.SS Here Documents
-.PP
-This type of redirection instructs the shell to read input from the
-current source until a line containing only
-.I word
-(with no trailing blanks)
-is seen. All of
-the lines read up to that point are then used as the standard
-input for a command.
-.PP
-The format of here-documents is:
-.RS
-.PP
-.nf
-\fB<<\fP[\fB\-\fP]\fIword\fP
- \fIhere-document\fP
-\fIdelimiter\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-No parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
-or pathname expansion is performed on
-.IR word .
-If any characters in
-.I word
-are quoted, the
-.I delimiter
-is the result of quote removal on
-.IR word ,
-and the lines in the here-document are not expanded.
-If \fIword\fP is unquoted,
-all lines of the here-document are subjected to parameter expansion,
-command substitution, and arithmetic expansion. In the latter
-case, the character sequence
-.B \e<newline>
-is ignored, and
-.B \e
-must be used to quote the characters
-.BR \e ,
-.BR $ ,
-and
-.BR ` .
-.PP
-If the redirection operator is
-.BR <<\- ,
-then all leading tab characters are stripped from input lines and the
-line containing
-.IR delimiter .
-This allows
-here-documents within shell scripts to be indented in a
-natural fashion.
-.SS "Here Strings"
-A variant of here documents, the format is:
-.RS
-.PP
-.nf
-\fB<<<\fP\fIword\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-The \fIword\fP is expanded and supplied to the command on its standard
-input.
-.SS "Duplicating File Descriptors"
-.PP
-The redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<&\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-is used to duplicate input file descriptors.
-If
-.I word
-expands to one or more digits, the file descriptor denoted by
-.I n
-is made to be a copy of that file descriptor.
-If the digits in
-.I word
-do not specify a file descriptor open for input, a redirection error occurs.
-If
-.I word
-evaluates to
-.BR \- ,
-file descriptor
-.I n
-is closed. If
-.I n
-is not specified, the standard input (file descriptor 0) is used.
-.PP
-The operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>&\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-is used similarly to duplicate output file descriptors. If
-.I n
-is not specified, the standard output (file descriptor 1) is used.
-If the digits in
-.I word
-do not specify a file descriptor open for output, a redirection error occurs.
-As a special case, if \fIn\fP is omitted, and \fIword\fP does not
-expand to one or more digits, the standard output and standard
-error are redirected as described previously.
-.SS "Moving File Descriptors"
-.PP
-The redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<&\fP\fIdigit\fP\fB\-\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-moves the file descriptor \fIdigit\fP to file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard input (file descriptor 0) if \fIn\fP is not specified.
-\fIdigit\fP is closed after being duplicated to \fIn\fP.
-.PP
-Similarly, the redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB>&\fP\fIdigit\fP\fB\-\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-moves the file descriptor \fIdigit\fP to file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or the standard output (file descriptor 1) if \fIn\fP is not specified.
-.SS "Opening File Descriptors for Reading and Writing"
-.PP
-The redirection operator
-.RS
-.PP
-[\fIn\fP]\fB<>\fP\fIword\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-causes the file whose name is the expansion of
-.I word
-to be opened for both reading and writing on file descriptor
-.IR n ,
-or on file descriptor 0 if
-.I n
-is not specified. If the file does not exist, it is created.
-.SH ALIASES
-\fIAliases\fP allow a string to be substituted for a word when it is used
-as the first word of a simple command.
-The shell maintains a list of aliases that may be set and unset with the
-.B alias
-and
-.B unalias
-builtin commands (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-The first word of each command, if unquoted,
-is checked to see if it has an
-alias. If so, that word is replaced by the text of the alias.
-The alias name and the replacement text may contain any valid
-shell input, including the
-.I metacharacters
-listed above, with the exception that the alias name may not
-contain \fI=\fP. The first word of the replacement text is tested
-for aliases, but a word that is identical to an alias being expanded
-is not expanded a second time. This means that one may alias
-.B ls
-to
-.BR "ls \-F" ,
-for instance, and
-.B bash
-does not try to recursively expand the replacement text.
-If the last character of the alias value is a
-.IR blank ,
-then the next command
-word following the alias is also checked for alias expansion.
-.PP
-Aliases are created and listed with the
-.B alias
-command, and removed with the
-.B unalias
-command.
-.PP
-There is no mechanism for using arguments in the replacement text.
-If arguments are needed, a shell function should be used (see
-.SM
-.B FUNCTIONS
-below).
-.PP
-Aliases are not expanded when the shell is not interactive, unless
-the
-.B expand_aliases
-shell option is set using
-.B shopt
-(see the description of
-.B shopt
-under
-.SM
-\fBSHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS\fP
-below).
-.PP
-The rules concerning the definition and use of aliases are
-somewhat confusing.
-.B Bash
-always reads at least one complete line
-of input before executing any
-of the commands on that line. Aliases are expanded when a
-command is read, not when it is executed. Therefore, an
-alias definition appearing on the same line as another
-command does not take effect until the next line of input is read.
-The commands following the alias definition
-on that line are not affected by the new alias.
-This behavior is also an issue when functions are executed.
-Aliases are expanded when a function definition is read,
-not when the function is executed, because a function definition
-is itself a compound command. As a consequence, aliases
-defined in a function are not available until after that
-function is executed. To be safe, always put
-alias definitions on a separate line, and do not use
-.B alias
-in compound commands.
-.PP
-For almost every purpose, aliases are superseded by
-shell functions.
-.SH FUNCTIONS
-A shell function, defined as described above under
-.SM
-.BR "SHELL GRAMMAR" ,
-stores a series of commands for later execution.
-When the name of a shell function is used as a simple command name,
-the list of commands associated with that function name is executed.
-Functions are executed in the context of the
-current shell; no new process is created to interpret
-them (contrast this with the execution of a shell script).
-When a function is executed, the arguments to the
-function become the positional parameters
-during its execution.
-The special parameter
-.B #
-is updated to reflect the change. Positional parameter 0
-is unchanged.
-The
-.SM
-.B FUNCNAME
-variable is set to the name of the function while the function
-is executing.
-All other aspects of the shell execution
-environment are identical between a function and its caller
-with the exception that the
-.SM
-.B DEBUG
-trap (see the description of the
-.B trap
-builtin under
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below) is not inherited unless the function has been given the
-\fBtrace\fP attribute (see the description of the
-.SM
-.B declare
-builtin below).
-.PP
-Variables local to the function may be declared with the
-.B local
-builtin command. Ordinarily, variables and their values
-are shared between the function and its caller.
-.PP
-If the builtin command
-.B return
-is executed in a function, the function completes and
-execution resumes with the next command after the function
-call. When a function completes, the values of the
-positional parameters and the special parameter
-.B #
-are restored to the values they had prior to the function's
-execution.
-.PP
-Function names and definitions may be listed with the
-.B \-f
-option to the
-.B declare
-or
-.B typeset
-builtin commands. The
-.B \-F
-option to
-.B declare
-or
-.B typeset
-will list the function names only.
-Functions may be exported so that subshells
-automatically have them defined with the
-.B \-f
-option to the
-.B export
-builtin.
-.PP
-Functions may be recursive. No limit is imposed on the number
-of recursive calls.
-.SH "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION"
-The shell allows arithmetic expressions to be evaluated, under
-certain circumstances (see the \fBlet\fP builtin command and
-\fBArithmetic Expansion\fP).
-Evaluation is done in fixed-width integers with no check for overflow,
-though division by 0 is trapped and flagged as an error.
-The operators and their precedence and associativity are the same
-as in the C language.
-The following list of operators is grouped into levels of
-equal-precedence operators.
-The levels are listed in order of decreasing precedence.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \fIid\fP++ \fIid\fP\-\-
-variable post-increment and post-decrement
-.TP
-.B ++\fIid\fP \-\-\fIid\fP
-variable pre-increment and pre-decrement
-.TP
-.B \- +
-unary minus and plus
-.TP
-.B ! ~
-logical and bitwise negation
-.TP
-.B **
-exponentiation
-.TP
-.B * / %
-multiplication, division, remainder
-.TP
-.B + \-
-addition, subtraction
-.TP
-.B << >>
-left and right bitwise shifts
-.TP
-.B <= >= < >
-comparison
-.TP
-.B == !=
-equality and inequality
-.TP
-.B &
-bitwise AND
-.TP
-.B ^
-bitwise exclusive OR
-.TP
-.B |
-bitwise OR
-.TP
-.B &&
-logical AND
-.TP
-.B ||
-logical OR
-.TP
-.B \fIexpr\fP?\fIexpr\fP:\fIexpr\fP
-conditional evaluation
-.TP
-.B = *= /= %= += \-= <<= >>= &= ^= |=
-assignment
-.TP
-.B \fIexpr1\fP , \fIexpr2\fP
-comma
-.PD
-.PP
-Shell variables are allowed as operands; parameter expansion is
-performed before the expression is evaluated.
-Within an expression, shell variables may also be referenced by name
-without using the parameter expansion syntax.
-The value of a variable is evaluated as an arithmetic expression
-when it is referenced.
-A shell variable need not have its integer attribute
-turned on to be used in an expression.
-.PP
-Constants with a leading 0 are interpreted as octal numbers.
-A leading 0x or 0X denotes hexadecimal.
-Otherwise, numbers take the form [\fIbase#\fP]n, where \fIbase\fP
-is a decimal number between 2 and 64 representing the arithmetic
-base, and \fIn\fP is a number in that base.
-If \fIbase#\fP is omitted, then base 10 is used.
-The digits greater than 9 are represented by the lowercase letters,
-the uppercase letters, @, and _, in that order.
-If \fIbase\fP is less than or equal to 36, lowercase and uppercase
-letters may be used interchangably to represent numbers between 10
-and 35.
-.PP
-Operators are evaluated in order of precedence. Sub-expressions in
-parentheses are evaluated first and may override the precedence
-rules above.
-.SH "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS"
-Conditional expressions are used by the \fB[[\fP compound command and
-the \fBtest\fP and \fB[\fP builtin commands to test file attributes
-and perform string and arithmetic comparisons.
-Expressions are formed from the following unary or binary primaries.
-If any \fIfile\fP argument to one of the primaries is of the form
-\fI/dev/fd/n\fP, then file descriptor \fIn\fP is checked.
-If the \fIfile\fP argument to one of the primaries is one of
-\fI/dev/stdin\fP, \fI/dev/stdout\fP, or \fI/dev/stderr\fP, file
-descriptor 0, 1, or 2, respectively, is checked.
-.sp 1
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists.
-.TP
-.B \-b \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a block special file.
-.TP
-.B \-c \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a character special file.
-.TP
-.B \-d \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a directory.
-.TP
-.B \-e \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists.
-.TP
-.B \-f \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a regular file.
-.TP
-.B \-g \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is set-group-id.
-.TP
-.B \-h \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a symbolic link.
-.TP
-.B \-k \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and its ``sticky'' bit is set.
-.TP
-.B \-p \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a named pipe (FIFO).
-.TP
-.B \-r \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is readable.
-.TP
-.B \-s \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and has a size greater than zero.
-.TP
-.B \-t \fIfd\fP
-True if file descriptor
-.I fd
-is open and refers to a terminal.
-.TP
-.B \-u \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and its set-user-id bit is set.
-.TP
-.B \-w \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is writable.
-.TP
-.B \-x \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is executable.
-.TP
-.B \-O \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is owned by the effective user id.
-.TP
-.B \-G \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is owned by the effective group id.
-.TP
-.B \-L \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a symbolic link.
-.TP
-.B \-S \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and is a socket.
-.TP
-.B \-N \fIfile\fP
-True if \fIfile\fP exists and has been modified since it was last read.
-.TP
-\fIfile1\fP \-\fBnt\fP \fIfile2\fP
-True if \fIfile1\fP is newer (according to modification date) than \fIfile2\fP,
-or if \fIfile1\fP exists and \fPfile2\fP does not.
-.TP
-\fIfile1\fP \-\fBot\fP \fIfile2\fP
-True if \fIfile1\fP is older than \fIfile2\fP, or if \fIfile2\fP exists
-and \fIfile1\fP does not.
-.TP
-\fIfile1\fP \fB\-ef\fP \fIfile2\fP
-True if \fIfile1\fP and \fIfile2\fP refer to the same device and
-inode numbers.
-.TP
-.B \-o \fIoptname\fP
-True if shell option
-.I optname
-is enabled.
-See the list of options under the description of the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin below.
-.TP
-.B \-z \fIstring\fP
-True if the length of \fIstring\fP is zero.
-.TP
-.B \-n \fIstring\fP
-.TP
-\fIstring\fP
-True if the length of
-.I string
-is non-zero.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB==\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if the strings are equal. \fB=\fP may be used in place of
-\fB==\fP for strict POSIX compliance.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB!=\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if the strings are not equal.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB<\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if \fIstring1\fP sorts before \fIstring2\fP lexicographically
-in the current locale.
-.TP
-\fIstring1\fP \fB>\fP \fIstring2\fP
-True if \fIstring1\fP sorts after \fIstring2\fP lexicographically
-in the current locale.
-.TP
-.I \fIarg1\fP \fBOP\fP \fIarg2\fP
-.SM
-.B OP
-is one of
-.BR \-eq ,
-.BR \-ne ,
-.BR \-lt ,
-.BR \-le ,
-.BR \-gt ,
-or
-.BR \-ge .
-These arithmetic binary operators return true if \fIarg1\fP
-is equal to, not equal to, less than, less than or equal to,
-greater than, or greater than or equal to \fIarg2\fP, respectively.
-.I Arg1
-and
-.I arg2
-may be positive or negative integers.
-.PD
-.SH "SIMPLE COMMAND EXPANSION"
-When a simple command is executed, the shell performs the following
-expansions, assignments, and redirections, from left to right.
-.IP 1.
-The words that the parser has marked as variable assignments (those
-preceding the command name) and redirections are saved for later
-processing.
-.IP 2.
-The words that are not variable assignments or redirections are
-expanded. If any words remain after expansion, the first word
-is taken to be the name of the command and the remaining words are
-the arguments.
-.IP 3.
-Redirections are performed as described above under
-.SM
-.BR REDIRECTION .
-.IP 4.
-The text after the \fB=\fP in each variable assignment undergoes tilde
-expansion, parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic expansion,
-and quote removal before being assigned to the variable.
-.PP
-If no command name results, the variable assignments affect the current
-shell environment. Otherwise, the variables are added to the environment
-of the executed command and do not affect the current shell environment.
-If any of the assignments attempts to assign a value to a readonly variable,
-an error occurs, and the command exits with a non-zero status.
-.PP
-If no command name results, redirections are performed, but do not
-affect the current shell environment. A redirection error causes the
-command to exit with a non-zero status.
-.PP
-If there is a command name left after expansion, execution proceeds as
-described below. Otherwise, the command exits. If one of the expansions
-contained a command substitution, the exit status of the command is
-the exit status of the last command substitution performed. If there
-were no command substitutions, the command exits with a status of zero.
-.SH "COMMAND EXECUTION"
-After a command has been split into words, if it results in a
-simple command and an optional list of arguments, the following
-actions are taken.
-.PP
-If the command name contains no slashes, the shell attempts to
-locate it. If there exists a shell function by that name, that
-function is invoked as described above in
-.SM
-.BR FUNCTIONS .
-If the name does not match a function, the shell searches for
-it in the list of shell builtins. If a match is found, that
-builtin is invoked.
-.PP
-If the name is neither a shell function nor a builtin,
-and contains no slashes,
-.B bash
-searches each element of the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-for a directory containing an executable file by that name.
-.B Bash
-uses a hash table to remember the full pathnames of executable
-files (see
-.B hash
-under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below).
-A full search of the directories in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-is performed only if the command is not found in the hash table.
-If the search is unsuccessful, the shell prints an error
-message and returns an exit status of 127.
-.PP
-If the search is successful, or if the command name contains
-one or more slashes, the shell executes the named program in a
-separate execution environment.
-Argument 0 is set to the name given, and the remaining arguments
-to the command are set to the arguments given, if any.
-.PP
-If this execution fails because the file is not in executable
-format, and the file is not a directory, it is assumed to be
-a \fIshell script\fP, a file
-containing shell commands. A subshell is spawned to execute
-it. This subshell reinitializes itself, so
-that the effect is as if a new shell had been invoked
-to handle the script, with the exception that the locations of
-commands remembered by the parent (see
-.B hash
-below under
-.SM
-\fBSHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS\fP)
-are retained by the child.
-.PP
-If the program is a file beginning with
-.BR #! ,
-the remainder of the first line specifies an interpreter
-for the program. The shell executes the
-specified interpreter on operating systems that do not
-handle this executable format themselves. The arguments to the
-interpreter consist of a single optional argument following the
-interpreter name on the first line of the program, followed
-by the name of the program, followed by the command
-arguments, if any.
-.SH COMMAND EXECUTION ENVIRONMENT
-The shell has an \fIexecution environment\fP, which consists of the
-following:
-.sp 1
-.IP \(bu
-open files inherited by the shell at invocation, as modified by
-redirections supplied to the \fBexec\fP builtin
-.IP \(bu
-the current working directory as set by \fBcd\fP, \fBpushd\fP, or
-\fBpopd\fP, or inherited by the shell at invocation
-.IP \(bu
-the file creation mode mask as set by \fBumask\fP or inherited from
-the shell's parent
-.IP \(bu
-current traps set by \fBtrap\fP
-.IP \(bu
-shell parameters that are set by variable assignment or with \fBset\fP
-or inherited from the shell's parent in the environment
-.IP \(bu
-shell functions defined during execution or inherited from the shell's
-parent in the environment
-.IP \(bu
-options enabled at invocation (either by default or with command-line
-arguments) or by \fBset\fP
-.IP \(bu
-options enabled by \fBshopt\fP
-.IP \(bu
-shell aliases defined with \fBalias\fP
-.IP \(bu
-various process IDs, including those of background jobs, the value
-of \fB$$\fP, and the value of \fB$PPID\fP
-.PP
-When a simple command other than a builtin or shell function
-is to be executed, it
-is invoked in a separate execution environment that consists of
-the following. Unless otherwise noted, the values are inherited
-from the shell.
-.sp 1
-.IP \(bu
-the shell's open files, plus any modifications and additions specified
-by redirections to the command
-.IP \(bu
-the current working directory
-.IP \(bu
-the file creation mode mask
-.IP \(bu
-shell variables marked for export, along with variables exported for
-the command, passed in the environment
-.IP \(bu
-traps caught by the shell are reset to the values the inherited
-from the shell's parent, and traps ignored by the shell are ignored
-.PP
-A command invoked in this separate environment cannot affect the
-shell's execution environment.
-.PP
-Command substitution and asynchronous commands are invoked in a
-subshell environment that is a duplicate of the shell environment,
-except that traps caught by the shell are reset to the values
-that the shell inherited from its parent at invocation. Builtin
-commands that are invoked as part of a pipeline are also executed in a
-subshell environment. Changes made to the subshell environment
-cannot affect the shell's execution environment.
-.PP
-If a command is followed by a \fB&\fP and job control is not active, the
-default standard input for the command is the empty file \fI/dev/null\fP.
-Otherwise, the invoked command inherits the file descriptors of the calling
-shell as modified by redirections.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-When a program is invoked it is given an array of strings
-called the
-.IR environment .
-This is a list of
-\fIname\fP\-\fIvalue\fP pairs, of the form
-.IR "name\fR=\fPvalue" .
-.PP
-The shell provides several ways to manipulate the environment.
-On invocation, the shell scans its own environment and
-creates a parameter for each name found, automatically marking
-it for
-.I export
-to child processes. Executed commands inherit the environment.
-The
-.B export
-and
-.B declare \-x
-commands allow parameters and functions to be added to and
-deleted from the environment. If the value of a parameter
-in the environment is modified, the new value becomes part
-of the environment, replacing the old. The environment
-inherited by any executed command consists of the shell's
-initial environment, whose values may be modified in the shell,
-less any pairs removed by the
-.B unset
-command, plus any additions via the
-.B export
-and
-.B declare \-x
-commands.
-.PP
-The environment for any
-.I simple command
-or function may be augmented temporarily by prefixing it with
-parameter assignments, as described above in
-.SM
-.BR PARAMETERS .
-These assignment statements affect only the environment seen
-by that command.
-.PP
-If the
-.B \-k
-option is set (see the
-.B set
-builtin command below), then
-.I all
-parameter assignments are placed in the environment for a command,
-not just those that precede the command name.
-.PP
-When
-.B bash
-invokes an external command, the variable
-.B _
-is set to the full file name of the command and passed to that
-command in its environment.
-.SH "EXIT STATUS"
-For the shell's purposes, a command which exits with a
-zero exit status has succeeded. An exit status of zero
-indicates success. A non-zero exit status indicates failure.
-When a command terminates on a fatal signal \fIN\fP, \fBbash\fP uses
-the value of 128+\fIN\fP as the exit status.
-.PP
-If a command is not found, the child process created to
-execute it returns a status of 127. If a command is found
-but is not executable, the return status is 126.
-.PP
-If a command fails because of an error during expansion or redirection,
-the exit status is greater than zero.
-.PP
-Shell builtin commands return a status of 0 (\fItrue\fP) if
-successful, and non-zero (\fIfalse\fP) if an error occurs
-while they execute.
-All builtins return an exit status of 2 to indicate incorrect usage.
-.PP
-\fBBash\fP itself returns the exit status of the last command
-executed, unless a syntax error occurs, in which case it exits
-with a non-zero value. See also the \fBexit\fP builtin
-command below.
-.SH SIGNALS
-When \fBbash\fP is interactive, in the absence of any traps, it ignores
-.SM
-.B SIGTERM
-(so that \fBkill 0\fP does not kill an interactive shell),
-and
-.SM
-.B SIGINT
-is caught and handled (so that the \fBwait\fP builtin is interruptible).
-In all cases, \fBbash\fP ignores
-.SM
-.BR SIGQUIT .
-If job control is in effect,
-.B bash
-ignores
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTIN ,
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTOU ,
-and
-.SM
-.BR SIGTSTP .
-.PP
-Synchronous jobs started by \fBbash\fP have signal handlers
-set to the values inherited by the shell from its parent.
-When job control is not in effect, asynchronous commands
-ignore
-.SM
-.B SIGINT
-and
-.SM
-.B SIGQUIT
-as well.
-Commands run as a result of command substitution ignore the
-keyboard-generated job control signals
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTIN ,
-.SM
-.BR SIGTTOU ,
-and
-.SM
-.BR SIGTSTP .
-.PP
-The shell exits by default upon receipt of a
-.SM
-.BR SIGHUP .
-Before exiting, an interactive shell resends the
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-to all jobs, running or stopped.
-Stopped jobs are sent
-.SM
-.B SIGCONT
-to ensure that they receive the
-.SM
-.BR SIGHUP .
-To prevent the shell from
-sending the signal to a particular job, it should be removed from the
-jobs table with the
-.B disown
-builtin (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below) or marked
-to not receive
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-using
-.BR "disown \-h" .
-.PP
-If the
-.B huponexit
-shell option has been set with
-.BR shopt ,
-.B bash
-sends a
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-to all jobs when an interactive login shell exits.
-.PP
-When \fBbash\fP receives a signal for which a trap has been set while
-waiting for a command to complete, the trap will not be executed until
-the command completes.
-When \fBbash\fP is waiting for an asynchronous command via the \fBwait\fP
-builtin, the reception of a signal for which a trap has been set will
-cause the \fBwait\fP builtin to return immediately with an exit status
-greater than 128, immediately after which the trap is executed.
-.SH "JOB CONTROL"
-.I Job control
-refers to the ability to selectively stop (\fIsuspend\fP)
-the execution of processes and continue (\fIresume\fP)
-their execution at a later point. A user typically employs
-this facility via an interactive interface supplied jointly
-by the system's terminal driver and
-.BR bash .
-.PP
-The shell associates a
-.I job
-with each pipeline. It keeps a table of currently executing
-jobs, which may be listed with the
-.B jobs
-command. When
-.B bash
-starts a job asynchronously (in the
-.IR background ),
-it prints a line that looks like:
-.RS
-.PP
-[1] 25647
-.RE
-.PP
-indicating that this job is job number 1 and that the process ID
-of the last process in the pipeline associated with this job is 25647.
-All of the processes in a single pipeline are members of the same job.
-.B Bash
-uses the
-.I job
-abstraction as the basis for job control.
-.PP
-To facilitate the implementation of the user interface to job
-control, the operating system maintains the notion of a \fIcurrent terminal
-process group ID\fP. Members of this process group (processes whose
-process group ID is equal to the current terminal process group ID)
-receive keyboard-generated signals such as
-.SM
-.BR SIGINT .
-These processes are said to be in the
-.IR foreground .
-.I Background
-processes are those whose process group ID differs from the terminal's;
-such processes are immune to keyboard-generated signals.
-Only foreground processes are allowed to read from or write to the
-terminal. Background processes which attempt to read from (write to) the
-terminal are sent a
-.SM
-.B SIGTTIN (SIGTTOU)
-signal by the terminal driver,
-which, unless caught, suspends the process.
-.PP
-If the operating system on which
-.B bash
-is running supports
-job control,
-.B bash
-contains facilities to use it.
-Typing the
-.I suspend
-character (typically
-.BR ^Z ,
-Control-Z) while a process is running
-causes that process to be stopped and returns control to
-.BR bash .
-Typing the
-.I "delayed suspend"
-character (typically
-.BR ^Y ,
-Control-Y) causes the process to be stopped when it
-attempts to read input from the terminal, and control to
-be returned to
-.BR bash .
-The user may then manipulate the state of this job, using the
-.B bg
-command to continue it in the background, the
-.B fg
-command to continue it in the foreground, or
-the
-.B kill
-command to kill it. A \fB^Z\fP takes effect immediately,
-and has the additional side effect of causing pending output
-and typeahead to be discarded.
-.PP
-There are a number of ways to refer to a job in the shell.
-The character
-.B %
-introduces a job name. Job number
-.I n
-may be referred to as
-.BR %n .
-A job may also be referred to using a prefix of the name used to
-start it, or using a substring that appears in its command line.
-For example,
-.B %ce
-refers to a stopped
-.B ce
-job. If a prefix matches more than one job,
-.B bash
-reports an error. Using
-.BR %?ce ,
-on the other hand, refers to any job containing the string
-.B ce
-in its command line. If the substring matches more than one job,
-.B bash
-reports an error. The symbols
-.B %%
-and
-.B %+
-refer to the shell's notion of the
-.IR "current job" ,
-which is the last job stopped while it was in
-the foreground or started in the background.
-The
-.I "previous job"
-may be referenced using
-.BR %\- .
-In output pertaining to jobs (e.g., the output of the
-.B jobs
-command), the current job is always flagged with a
-.BR + ,
-and the previous job with a
-.BR \- .
-.PP
-Simply naming a job can be used to bring it into the
-foreground:
-.B %1
-is a synonym for
-\fB``fg %1''\fP,
-bringing job 1 from the background into the foreground.
-Similarly,
-.B ``%1 &''
-resumes job 1 in the background, equivalent to
-\fB``bg %1''\fP.
-.PP
-The shell learns immediately whenever a job changes state.
-Normally,
-.B bash
-waits until it is about to print a prompt before reporting
-changes in a job's status so as to not interrupt
-any other output. If the
-.B \-b
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command
-is enabled,
-.B bash
-reports such changes immediately.
-Any trap on
-.SM
-.B SIGCHLD
-is executed for each child that exits.
-.PP
-If an attempt to exit
-.B bash
-is made while jobs are stopped, the shell prints a warning message. The
-.B jobs
-command may then be used to inspect their status.
-If a second attempt to exit is made without an intervening command,
-the shell does not print another warning, and the stopped
-jobs are terminated.
-.SH PROMPTING
-When executing interactively,
-.B bash
-displays the primary prompt
-.SM
-.B PS1
-when it is ready to read a command, and the secondary prompt
-.SM
-.B PS2
-when it needs more input to complete a command.
-.B Bash
-allows these prompt strings to be customized by inserting a number of
-backslash-escaped special characters that are decoded as follows:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-an ASCII bell character (07)
-.TP
-.B \ed
-the date in "Weekday Month Date" format (e.g., "Tue May 26")
-.TP
-.B \eD{\fIformat\fP}
-the \fIformat\fP is passed to \fIstrftime\fP(3) and the result is inserted
-into the prompt string; an empty \fIformat\fP results in a locale-specific
-time representation. The braces are required
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an ASCII escape character (033)
-.TP
-.B \eh
-the hostname up to the first `.'
-.TP
-.B \eH
-the hostname
-.TP
-.B \ej
-the number of jobs currently managed by the shell
-.TP
-.B \el
-the basename of the shell's terminal device name
-.TP
-.B \en
-newline
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \es
-the name of the shell, the basename of
-.B $0
-(the portion following the final slash)
-.TP
-.B \et
-the current time in 24-hour HH:MM:SS format
-.TP
-.B \eT
-the current time in 12-hour HH:MM:SS format
-.TP
-.B \e@
-the current time in 12-hour am/pm format
-.TP
-.B \eA
-the current time in 24-hour HH:MM format
-.TP
-.B \eu
-the username of the current user
-.TP
-.B \ev
-the version of \fBbash\fP (e.g., 2.00)
-.TP
-.B \eV
-the release of \fBbash\fP, version + patchelvel (e.g., 2.00.0)
-.TP
-.B \ew
-the current working directory
-.TP
-.B \eW
-the basename of the current working directory
-.TP
-.B \e!
-the history number of this command
-.TP
-.B \e#
-the command number of this command
-.TP
-.B \e$
-if the effective UID is 0, a
-.BR # ,
-otherwise a
-.B $
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the character corresponding to the octal number \fInnn\fP
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-a backslash
-.TP
-.B \e[
-begin a sequence of non-printing characters, which could be used to
-embed a terminal control sequence into the prompt
-.TP
-.B \e]
-end a sequence of non-printing characters
-.PD
-.RE
-.PP
-The command number and the history number are usually different:
-the history number of a command is its position in the history
-list, which may include commands restored from the history file
-(see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below), while the command number is the position in the sequence
-of commands executed during the current shell session.
-After the string is decoded, it is expanded via
-parameter expansion, command substitution, arithmetic
-expansion, and quote removal, subject to the value of the
-.B promptvars
-shell option (see the description of the
-.B shopt
-command under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below).
-.SH READLINE
-This is the library that handles reading input when using an interactive
-shell, unless the
-.B \-\-noediting
-option is given at shell invocation.
-By default, the line editing commands are similar to those of emacs.
-A vi-style line editing interface is also available.
-To turn off line editing after the shell is running, use the
-.B +o emacs
-or
-.B +o vi
-options to the
-.B set
-builtin (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SS "Readline Notation"
-.PP
-In this section, the emacs-style notation is used to denote
-keystrokes. Control keys are denoted by C\-\fIkey\fR, e.g., C\-n
-means Control\-N. Similarly,
-.I meta
-keys are denoted by M\-\fIkey\fR, so M\-x means Meta\-X. (On keyboards
-without a
-.I meta
-key, M\-\fIx\fP means ESC \fIx\fP, i.e., press the Escape key
-then the
-.I x
-key. This makes ESC the \fImeta prefix\fP.
-The combination M\-C\-\fIx\fP means ESC\-Control\-\fIx\fP,
-or press the Escape key
-then hold the Control key while pressing the
-.I x
-key.)
-.PP
-Readline commands may be given numeric
-.IR arguments ,
-which normally act as a repeat count.
-Sometimes, however, it is the sign of the argument that is significant.
-Passing a negative argument to a command that acts in the forward
-direction (e.g., \fBkill\-line\fP) causes that command to act in a
-backward direction.
-Commands whose behavior with arguments deviates from this are noted
-below.
-.PP
-When a command is described as \fIkilling\fP text, the text
-deleted is saved for possible future retrieval
-(\fIyanking\fP). The killed text is saved in a
-\fIkill ring\fP. Consecutive kills cause the text to be
-accumulated into one unit, which can be yanked all at once.
-Commands which do not kill text separate the chunks of text
-on the kill ring.
-.SS "Readline Initialization"
-.PP
-Readline is customized by putting commands in an initialization
-file (the \fIinputrc\fP file).
-The name of this file is taken from the value of the
-.SM
-.B INPUTRC
-variable. If that variable is unset, the default is
-.IR ~/.inputrc .
-When a program which uses the readline library starts up, the
-initialization file is read, and the key bindings and variables
-are set.
-There are only a few basic constructs allowed in the
-readline initialization file.
-Blank lines are ignored.
-Lines beginning with a \fB#\fP are comments.
-Lines beginning with a \fB$\fP indicate conditional constructs.
-Other lines denote key bindings and variable settings.
-.PP
-The default key-bindings may be changed with an
-.I inputrc
-file.
-Other programs that use this library may add their own commands
-and bindings.
-.PP
-For example, placing
-.RS
-.PP
-M\-Control\-u: universal\-argument
-.RE
-or
-.RS
-C\-Meta\-u: universal\-argument
-.RE
-into the
-.I inputrc
-would make M\-C\-u execute the readline command
-.IR universal\-argument .
-.PP
-The following symbolic character names are recognized:
-.IR RUBOUT ,
-.IR DEL ,
-.IR ESC ,
-.IR LFD ,
-.IR NEWLINE ,
-.IR RET ,
-.IR RETURN ,
-.IR SPC ,
-.IR SPACE ,
-and
-.IR TAB .
-.PP
-In addition to command names, readline allows keys to be bound
-to a string that is inserted when the key is pressed (a \fImacro\fP).
-.SS "Readline Key Bindings"
-.PP
-The syntax for controlling key bindings in the
-.I inputrc
-file is simple. All that is required is the name of the
-command or the text of a macro and a key sequence to which
-it should be bound. The name may be specified in one of two ways:
-as a symbolic key name, possibly with \fIMeta\-\fP or \fIControl\-\fP
-prefixes, or as a key sequence.
-.PP
-When using the form \fBkeyname\fP:\^\fIfunction\-name\fP or \fImacro\fP,
-.I keyname
-is the name of a key spelled out in English. For example:
-.sp
-.RS
-Control-u: universal\-argument
-.br
-Meta-Rubout: backward-kill-word
-.br
-Control-o: "> output"
-.RE
-.LP
-In the above example,
-.I C\-u
-is bound to the function
-.BR universal\-argument ,
-.I M\-DEL
-is bound to the function
-.BR backward\-kill\-word ,
-and
-.I C\-o
-is bound to run the macro
-expressed on the right hand side (that is, to insert the text
-.if t \f(CW> output\fP
-.if n ``> output''
-into the line).
-.PP
-In the second form, \fB"keyseq"\fP:\^\fIfunction\-name\fP or \fImacro\fP,
-.B keyseq
-differs from
-.B keyname
-above in that strings denoting
-an entire key sequence may be specified by placing the sequence
-within double quotes. Some GNU Emacs style key escapes can be
-used, as in the following example, but the symbolic character names
-are not recognized.
-.sp
-.RS
-"\eC\-u": universal\-argument
-.br
-"\eC\-x\eC\-r": re\-read\-init\-file
-.br
-"\ee[11~": "Function Key 1"
-.RE
-.PP
-In this example,
-.I C\-u
-is again bound to the function
-.BR universal\-argument .
-.I "C\-x C\-r"
-is bound to the function
-.BR re\-read\-init\-file ,
-and
-.I "ESC [ 1 1 ~"
-is bound to insert the text
-.if t \f(CWFunction Key 1\fP.
-.if n ``Function Key 1''.
-.PP
-The full set of GNU Emacs style escape sequences is
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \eC\-
-control prefix
-.TP
-.B \eM\-
-meta prefix
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an escape character
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-.B \e"
-literal "
-.TP
-.B \e'
-literal '
-.RE
-.PD
-.PP
-In addition to the GNU Emacs style escape sequences, a second
-set of backslash escapes is available:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-alert (bell)
-.TP
-.B \eb
-backspace
-.TP
-.B \ed
-delete
-.TP
-.B \ef
-form feed
-.TP
-.B \en
-newline
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-.B \ev
-vertical tab
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(one to three digits)
-.TP
-.B \ex\fIHH\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP
-(one or two hex digits)
-.RE
-.PD
-.PP
-When entering the text of a macro, single or double quotes must
-be used to indicate a macro definition.
-Unquoted text is assumed to be a function name.
-In the macro body, the backslash escapes described above are expanded.
-Backslash will quote any other character in the macro text,
-including " and '.
-.PP
-.B Bash
-allows the current readline key bindings to be displayed or modified
-with the
-.B bind
-builtin command. The editing mode may be switched during interactive
-use by using the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below).
-.SS "Readline Variables"
-.PP
-Readline has variables that can be used to further customize its
-behavior. A variable may be set in the
-.I inputrc
-file with a statement of the form
-.RS
-.PP
-\fBset\fP \fIvariable\-name\fP \fIvalue\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-Except where noted, readline variables can take the values
-.B On
-or
-.BR Off .
-The variables and their default values are:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B bell\-style (audible)
-Controls what happens when readline wants to ring the terminal bell.
-If set to \fBnone\fP, readline never rings the bell. If set to
-\fBvisible\fP, readline uses a visible bell if one is available.
-If set to \fBaudible\fP, readline attempts to ring the terminal's bell.
-.TP
-.B comment\-begin (``#'')
-The string that is inserted when the readline
-.B insert\-comment
-command is executed.
-This command is bound to
-.B M\-#
-in emacs mode and to
-.B #
-in vi command mode.
-.TP
-.B completion\-ignore\-case (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline performs filename matching and completion
-in a case\-insensitive fashion.
-.TP
-.B completion\-query\-items (100)
-This determines when the user is queried about viewing
-the number of possible completions
-generated by the \fBpossible\-completions\fP command.
-It may be set to any integer value greater than or equal to
-zero. If the number of possible completions is greater than
-or equal to the value of this variable, the user is asked whether
-or not he wishes to view them; otherwise they are simply listed
-on the terminal.
-.TP
-.B convert\-meta (On)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will convert characters with the
-eighth bit set to an ASCII key sequence
-by stripping the eighth bit and prefixing an
-escape character (in effect, using escape as the \fImeta prefix\fP).
-.TP
-.B disable\-completion (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will inhibit word completion. Completion
-characters will be inserted into the line as if they had been
-mapped to \fBself-insert\fP.
-.TP
-.B editing\-mode (emacs)
-Controls whether readline begins with a set of key bindings similar
-to \fIemacs\fP or \fIvi\fP.
-.B editing\-mode
-can be set to either
-.B emacs
-or
-.BR vi .
-.TP
-.B enable\-keypad (Off)
-When set to \fBOn\fP, readline will try to enable the application
-keypad when it is called. Some systems need this to enable the
-arrow keys.
-.TP
-.B expand\-tilde (Off)
-If set to \fBon\fP, tilde expansion is performed when readline
-attempts word completion.
-.TP
-.B history-preserve-point
-If set to \fBon\fP, the history code attempts to place point at the
-same location on each history line retrived with \fBprevious-history\fP
-or \fBnext-history\fP.
-.TP
-.B horizontal\-scroll\-mode (Off)
-When set to \fBOn\fP, makes readline use a single line for display,
-scrolling the input horizontally on a single screen line when it
-becomes longer than the screen width rather than wrapping to a new line.
-.TP
-.B input\-meta (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will enable eight-bit input (that is,
-it will not strip the high bit from the characters it reads),
-regardless of what the terminal claims it can support. The name
-.B meta\-flag
-is a synonym for this variable.
-.TP
-.B isearch\-terminators (``C\-[C\-J'')
-The string of characters that should terminate an incremental
-search without subsequently executing the character as a command.
-If this variable has not been given a value, the characters
-\fIESC\fP and \fIC\-J\fP will terminate an incremental search.
-.TP
-.B keymap (emacs)
-Set the current readline keymap. The set of valid keymap names is
-\fIemacs, emacs\-standard, emacs\-meta, emacs\-ctlx, vi,
-vi\-command\fP, and
-.IR vi\-insert .
-\fIvi\fP is equivalent to \fIvi\-command\fP; \fIemacs\fP is
-equivalent to \fIemacs\-standard\fP. The default value is
-.IR emacs ;
-the value of
-.B editing\-mode
-also affects the default keymap.
-.TP
-.B mark\-directories (On)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, completed directory names have a slash
-appended.
-.TP
-.B mark\-modified\-lines (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, history lines that have been modified are displayed
-with a preceding asterisk (\fB*\fP).
-.TP
-.B mark\-symlinked\-directories (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, completed names which are symbolic links to directories
-have a slash appended (subject to the value of
-\fBmark\-directories\fP).
-.TP
-.B match\-hidden\-files (On)
-This variable, when set to \fBOn\fP, causes readline to match files whose
-names begin with a `.' (hidden files) when performing filename
-completion, unless the leading `.' is
-supplied by the user in the filename to be completed.
-.TP
-.B output\-meta (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display characters with the
-eighth bit set directly rather than as a meta-prefixed escape
-sequence.
-.TP
-.B page\-completions (On)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline uses an internal \fImore\fP-like pager
-to display a screenful of possible completions at a time.
-.TP
-.B print\-completions\-horizontally (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, readline will display completions with matches
-sorted horizontally in alphabetical order, rather than down the screen.
-.TP
-.B show\-all\-if\-ambiguous (Off)
-This alters the default behavior of the completion functions. If
-set to
-.BR on ,
-words which have more than one possible completion cause the
-matches to be listed immediately instead of ringing the bell.
-.TP
-.B visible\-stats (Off)
-If set to \fBOn\fP, a character denoting a file's type as reported
-by \fIstat\fP(2) is appended to the filename when listing possible
-completions.
-.PD
-.SS "Readline Conditional Constructs"
-.PP
-Readline implements a facility similar in spirit to the conditional
-compilation features of the C preprocessor which allows key
-bindings and variable settings to be performed as the result
-of tests. There are four parser directives used.
-.IP \fB$if\fP
-The
-.B $if
-construct allows bindings to be made based on the
-editing mode, the terminal being used, or the application using
-readline. The text of the test extends to the end of the line;
-no characters are required to isolate it.
-.RS
-.IP \fBmode\fP
-The \fBmode=\fP form of the \fB$if\fP directive is used to test
-whether readline is in emacs or vi mode.
-This may be used in conjunction
-with the \fBset keymap\fP command, for instance, to set bindings in
-the \fIemacs\-standard\fP and \fIemacs\-ctlx\fP keymaps only if
-readline is starting out in emacs mode.
-.IP \fBterm\fP
-The \fBterm=\fP form may be used to include terminal-specific
-key bindings, perhaps to bind the key sequences output by the
-terminal's function keys. The word on the right side of the
-.B =
-is tested against the both full name of the terminal and the portion
-of the terminal name before the first \fB\-\fP. This allows
-.I sun
-to match both
-.I sun
-and
-.IR sun\-cmd ,
-for instance.
-.IP \fBapplication\fP
-The \fBapplication\fP construct is used to include
-application-specific settings. Each program using the readline
-library sets the \fIapplication name\fP, and an initialization
-file can test for a particular value.
-This could be used to bind key sequences to functions useful for
-a specific program. For instance, the following command adds a
-key sequence that quotes the current or previous word in Bash:
-.sp 1
-.RS
-.nf
-\fB$if\fP Bash
-# Quote the current or previous word
-"\eC\-xq": "\eeb\e"\eef\e""
-\fB$endif\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.RE
-.IP \fB$endif\fP
-This command, as seen in the previous example, terminates an
-\fB$if\fP command.
-.IP \fB$else\fP
-Commands in this branch of the \fB$if\fP directive are executed if
-the test fails.
-.IP \fB$include\fP
-This directive takes a single filename as an argument and reads commands
-and bindings from that file. For example, the following directive
-would read \fI/etc/inputrc\fP:
-.sp 1
-.RS
-.nf
-\fB$include\fP \^ \fI/etc/inputrc\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.SS Searching
-.PP
-Readline provides commands for searching through the command history
-(see
-.SM
-.B HISTORY
-below) for lines containing a specified string.
-There are two search modes:
-.I incremental
-and
-.IR non-incremental .
-.PP
-Incremental searches begin before the user has finished typing the
-search string.
-As each character of the search string is typed, readline displays
-the next entry from the history matching the string typed so far.
-An incremental search requires only as many characters as needed to
-find the desired history entry.
-The characters present in the value of the \fBisearch-terminators\fP
-variable are used to terminate an incremental search.
-If that variable has not been assigned a value the Escape and
-Control-J characters will terminate an incremental search.
-Control-G will abort an incremental search and restore the original
-line.
-When the search is terminated, the history entry containing the
-search string becomes the current line.
-.PP
-To find other matching entries in the history list, type Control-S or
-Control-R as appropriate.
-This will search backward or forward in the history for the next
-entry matching the search string typed so far.
-Any other key sequence bound to a readline command will terminate
-the search and execute that command.
-For instance, a \fInewline\fP will terminate the search and accept
-the line, thereby executing the command from the history list.
-.PP
-Readline remembers the last incremental search string. If two
-Control-Rs are typed without any intervening characters defining a
-new search string, any remembered search string is used.
-.PP
-Non-incremental searches read the entire search string before starting
-to search for matching history lines. The search string may be
-typed by the user or be part of the contents of the current line.
-.SS "Readline Command Names"
-.PP
-The following is a list of the names of the commands and the default
-key sequences to which they are bound.
-Command names without an accompanying key sequence are unbound by default.
-In the following descriptions, \fIpoint\fP refers to the current cursor
-position, and \fImark\fP refers to a cursor position saved by the
-\fBset\-mark\fP command.
-The text between the point and mark is referred to as the \fIregion\fP.
-.SS Commands for Moving
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B beginning\-of\-line (C\-a)
-Move to the start of the current line.
-.TP
-.B end\-of\-line (C\-e)
-Move to the end of the line.
-.TP
-.B forward\-char (C\-f)
-Move forward a character.
-.TP
-.B backward\-char (C\-b)
-Move back a character.
-.TP
-.B forward\-word (M\-f)
-Move forward to the end of the next word. Words are composed of
-alphanumeric characters (letters and digits).
-.TP
-.B backward\-word (M\-b)
-Move back to the start of the current or previous word. Words are
-composed of alphanumeric characters (letters and digits).
-.TP
-.B clear\-screen (C\-l)
-Clear the screen leaving the current line at the top of the screen.
-With an argument, refresh the current line without clearing the
-screen.
-.TP
-.B redraw\-current\-line
-Refresh the current line.
-.PD
-.SS Commands for Manipulating the History
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B accept\-line (Newline, Return)
-Accept the line regardless of where the cursor is. If this line is
-non-empty, add it to the history list according to the state of the
-.SM
-.B HISTCONTROL
-variable. If the line is a modified history
-line, then restore the history line to its original state.
-.TP
-.B previous\-history (C\-p)
-Fetch the previous command from the history list, moving back in
-the list.
-.TP
-.B next\-history (C\-n)
-Fetch the next command from the history list, moving forward in the
-list.
-.TP
-.B beginning\-of\-history (M\-<)
-Move to the first line in the history.
-.TP
-.B end\-of\-history (M\->)
-Move to the end of the input history, i.e., the line currently being
-entered.
-.TP
-.B reverse\-search\-history (C\-r)
-Search backward starting at the current line and moving `up' through
-the history as necessary. This is an incremental search.
-.TP
-.B forward\-search\-history (C\-s)
-Search forward starting at the current line and moving `down' through
-the history as necessary. This is an incremental search.
-.TP
-.B non\-incremental\-reverse\-search\-history (M\-p)
-Search backward through the history starting at the current line
-using a non-incremental search for a string supplied by the user.
-.TP
-.B non\-incremental\-forward\-search\-history (M\-n)
-Search forward through the history using a non-incremental search for
-a string supplied by the user.
-.TP
-.B history\-search\-forward
-Search forward through the history for the string of characters
-between the start of the current line and the point.
-This is a non-incremental search.
-.TP
-.B history\-search\-backward
-Search backward through the history for the string of characters
-between the start of the current line and the point.
-This is a non-incremental search.
-.TP
-.B yank\-nth\-arg (M\-C\-y)
-Insert the first argument to the previous command (usually
-the second word on the previous line) at point.
-With an argument
-.IR n ,
-insert the \fIn\fPth word from the previous command (the words
-in the previous command begin with word 0). A negative argument
-inserts the \fIn\fPth word from the end of the previous command.
-.TP
-.B
-yank\-last\-arg (M\-.\^, M\-_\^)
-Insert the last argument to the previous command (the last word of
-the previous history entry). With an argument,
-behave exactly like \fByank\-nth\-arg\fP.
-Successive calls to \fByank\-last\-arg\fP move back through the history
-list, inserting the last argument of each line in turn.
-.TP
-.B shell\-expand\-line (M\-C\-e)
-Expand the line as the shell does. This
-performs alias and history expansion as well as all of the shell
-word expansions. See
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below for a description of history expansion.
-.TP
-.B history\-expand\-line (M\-^)
-Perform history expansion on the current line.
-See
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below for a description of history expansion.
-.TP
-.B magic\-space
-Perform history expansion on the current line and insert a space.
-See
-.SM
-.B HISTORY EXPANSION
-below for a description of history expansion.
-.TP
-.B alias\-expand\-line
-Perform alias expansion on the current line.
-See
-.SM
-.B ALIASES
-above for a description of alias expansion.
-.TP
-.B history\-and\-alias\-expand\-line
-Perform history and alias expansion on the current line.
-.TP
-.B insert\-last\-argument (M\-.\^, M\-_\^)
-A synonym for \fByank\-last\-arg\fP.
-.TP
-.B operate\-and\-get\-next (C\-o)
-Accept the current line for execution and fetch the next line
-relative to the current line from the history for editing. Any
-argument is ignored.
-.TP
-.B edit\-and\-execute\-command (C\-xC\-e)
-Invoke an editor on the current command line, and execute the result as shell
-commands.
-\fBBash\fP attempts to invoke
-.SM
-.BR $FCEDIT ,
-.SM
-.BR $EDITOR ,
-and \fIemacs\fP as the editor, in that order.
-.PD
-.SS Commands for Changing Text
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B delete\-char (C\-d)
-Delete the character at point. If point is at the
-beginning of the line, there are no characters in the line, and
-the last character typed was not bound to \fBdelete\-char\fP,
-then return
-.SM
-.BR EOF .
-.TP
-.B backward\-delete\-char (Rubout)
-Delete the character behind the cursor. When given a numeric argument,
-save the deleted text on the kill ring.
-.TP
-.B forward\-backward\-delete\-char
-Delete the character under the cursor, unless the cursor is at the
-end of the line, in which case the character behind the cursor is
-deleted.
-.TP
-.B quoted\-insert (C\-q, C\-v)
-Add the next character typed to the line verbatim. This is
-how to insert characters like \fBC\-q\fP, for example.
-.TP
-.B tab\-insert (C\-v TAB)
-Insert a tab character.
-.TP
-.B self\-insert (a,\ b,\ A,\ 1,\ !,\ ...)
-Insert the character typed.
-.TP
-.B transpose\-chars (C\-t)
-Drag the character before point forward over the character at point,
-moving point forward as well.
-If point is at the end of the line, then this transposes
-the two characters before point.
-Negative arguments have no effect.
-.TP
-.B transpose\-words (M\-t)
-Drag the word before point past the word after point,
-moving point over that word as well.
-If point is at the end of the line, this transposes
-the last two words on the line.
-.TP
-.B upcase\-word (M\-u)
-Uppercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument,
-uppercase the previous word, but do not move point.
-.TP
-.B downcase\-word (M\-l)
-Lowercase the current (or following) word. With a negative argument,
-lowercase the previous word, but do not move point.
-.TP
-.B capitalize\-word (M\-c)
-Capitalize the current (or following) word. With a negative argument,
-capitalize the previous word, but do not move point.
-.TP
-.B overwrite\-mode
-Toggle overwrite mode. With an explicit positive numeric argument,
-switches to overwrite mode. With an explicit non-positive numeric
-argument, switches to insert mode. This command affects only
-\fBemacs\fP mode; \fBvi\fP mode does overwrite differently.
-Each call to \fIreadline()\fP starts in insert mode.
-In overwrite mode, characters bound to \fBself\-insert\fP replace
-the text at point rather than pushing the text to the right.
-Characters bound to \fBbackward\-delete\-char\fP replace the character
-before point with a space. By default, this command is unbound.
-.PD
-.SS Killing and Yanking
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B kill\-line (C\-k)
-Kill the text from point to the end of the line.
-.TP
-.B backward\-kill\-line (C\-x Rubout)
-Kill backward to the beginning of the line.
-.TP
-.B unix\-line\-discard (C\-u)
-Kill backward from point to the beginning of the line.
-The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.
-.\" There is no real difference between this and backward-kill-line
-.TP
-.B kill\-whole\-line
-Kill all characters on the current line, no matter where point is.
-.TP
-.B kill\-word (M\-d)
-Kill from point to the end of the current word, or if between
-words, to the end of the next word.
-Word boundaries are the same as those used by \fBforward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B backward\-kill\-word (M\-Rubout)
-Kill the word behind point.
-Word boundaries are the same as those used by \fBbackward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B unix\-word\-rubout (C\-w)
-Kill the word behind point, using white space as a word boundary.
-The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.
-.TP
-.B delete\-horizontal\-space (M\-\e)
-Delete all spaces and tabs around point.
-.TP
-.B kill\-region
-Kill the text in the current region.
-.TP
-.B copy\-region\-as\-kill
-Copy the text in the region to the kill buffer.
-.TP
-.B copy\-backward\-word
-Copy the word before point to the kill buffer.
-The word boundaries are the same as \fBbackward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B copy\-forward\-word
-Copy the word following point to the kill buffer.
-The word boundaries are the same as \fBforward\-word\fP.
-.TP
-.B yank (C\-y)
-Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point.
-.TP
-.B yank\-pop (M\-y)
-Rotate the kill ring, and yank the new top. Only works following
-.B yank
-or
-.BR yank\-pop .
-.PD
-.SS Numeric Arguments
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B digit\-argument (M\-0, M\-1, ..., M\-\-)
-Add this digit to the argument already accumulating, or start a new
-argument. M\-\- starts a negative argument.
-.TP
-.B universal\-argument
-This is another way to specify an argument.
-If this command is followed by one or more digits, optionally with a
-leading minus sign, those digits define the argument.
-If the command is followed by digits, executing
-.B universal\-argument
-again ends the numeric argument, but is otherwise ignored.
-As a special case, if this command is immediately followed by a
-character that is neither a digit or minus sign, the argument count
-for the next command is multiplied by four.
-The argument count is initially one, so executing this function the
-first time makes the argument count four, a second time makes the
-argument count sixteen, and so on.
-.PD
-.SS Completing
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B complete (TAB)
-Attempt to perform completion on the text before point.
-.B Bash
-attempts completion treating the text as a variable (if the
-text begins with \fB$\fP), username (if the text begins with
-\fB~\fP), hostname (if the text begins with \fB@\fP), or
-command (including aliases and functions) in turn. If none
-of these produces a match, filename completion is attempted.
-.TP
-.B possible\-completions (M\-?)
-List the possible completions of the text before point.
-.TP
-.B insert\-completions (M\-*)
-Insert all completions of the text before point
-that would have been generated by
-\fBpossible\-completions\fP.
-.TP
-.B menu\-complete
-Similar to \fBcomplete\fP, but replaces the word to be completed
-with a single match from the list of possible completions.
-Repeated execution of \fBmenu\-complete\fP steps through the list
-of possible completions, inserting each match in turn.
-At the end of the list of completions, the bell is rung
-(subject to the setting of \fBbell\-style\fP)
-and the original text is restored.
-An argument of \fIn\fP moves \fIn\fP positions forward in the list
-of matches; a negative argument may be used to move backward
-through the list.
-This command is intended to be bound to \fBTAB\fP, but is unbound
-by default.
-.TP
-.B delete\-char\-or\-list
-Deletes the character under the cursor if not at the beginning or
-end of the line (like \fBdelete\-char\fP).
-If at the end of the line, behaves identically to
-\fBpossible\-completions\fP.
-This command is unbound by default.
-.TP
-.B complete\-filename (M\-/)
-Attempt filename completion on the text before point.
-.TP
-.B possible\-filename\-completions (C\-x /)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a filename.
-.TP
-.B complete\-username (M\-~)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a username.
-.TP
-.B possible\-username\-completions (C\-x ~)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a username.
-.TP
-.B complete\-variable (M\-$)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a shell variable.
-.TP
-.B possible\-variable\-completions (C\-x $)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a shell variable.
-.TP
-.B complete\-hostname (M\-@)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a hostname.
-.TP
-.B possible\-hostname\-completions (C\-x @)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a hostname.
-.TP
-.B complete\-command (M\-!)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, treating
-it as a command name. Command completion attempts to
-match the text against aliases, reserved words, shell
-functions, shell builtins, and finally executable filenames,
-in that order.
-.TP
-.B possible\-command\-completions (C\-x !)
-List the possible completions of the text before point,
-treating it as a command name.
-.TP
-.B dynamic\-complete\-history (M\-TAB)
-Attempt completion on the text before point, comparing
-the text against lines from the history list for possible
-completion matches.
-.TP
-.B complete\-into\-braces (M\-{)
-Perform filename completion and insert the list of possible completions
-enclosed within braces so the list is available to the shell (see
-.B Brace Expansion
-above).
-.PD
-.SS Keyboard Macros
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B start\-kbd\-macro (C\-x (\^)
-Begin saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro.
-.TP
-.B end\-kbd\-macro (C\-x )\^)
-Stop saving the characters typed into the current keyboard macro
-and store the definition.
-.TP
-.B call\-last\-kbd\-macro (C\-x e)
-Re-execute the last keyboard macro defined, by making the characters
-in the macro appear as if typed at the keyboard.
-.PD
-.SS Miscellaneous
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B re\-read\-init\-file (C\-x C\-r)
-Read in the contents of the \fIinputrc\fP file, and incorporate
-any bindings or variable assignments found there.
-.TP
-.B abort (C\-g)
-Abort the current editing command and
-ring the terminal's bell (subject to the setting of
-.BR bell\-style ).
-.TP
-.B do\-uppercase\-version (M\-a, M\-b, M\-\fIx\fP, ...)
-If the metafied character \fIx\fP is lowercase, run the command
-that is bound to the corresponding uppercase character.
-.TP
-.B prefix\-meta (ESC)
-Metafy the next character typed.
-.SM
-.B ESC
-.B f
-is equivalent to
-.BR Meta\-f .
-.TP
-.B undo (C\-_, C\-x C\-u)
-Incremental undo, separately remembered for each line.
-.TP
-.B revert\-line (M\-r)
-Undo all changes made to this line. This is like executing the
-.B undo
-command enough times to return the line to its initial state.
-.TP
-.B tilde\-expand (M\-&)
-Perform tilde expansion on the current word.
-.TP
-.B set\-mark (C\-@, M\-<space>)
-Set the mark to the point. If a
-numeric argument is supplied, the mark is set to that position.
-.TP
-.B exchange\-point\-and\-mark (C\-x C\-x)
-Swap the point with the mark. The current cursor position is set to
-the saved position, and the old cursor position is saved as the mark.
-.TP
-.B character\-search (C\-])
-A character is read and point is moved to the next occurrence of that
-character. A negative count searches for previous occurrences.
-.TP
-.B character\-search\-backward (M\-C\-])
-A character is read and point is moved to the previous occurrence of that
-character. A negative count searches for subsequent occurrences.
-.TP
-.B insert\-comment (M\-#)
-Without a numeric argument, the value of the readline
-.B comment\-begin
-variable is inserted at the beginning of the current line.
-If a numeric argument is supplied, this command acts as a toggle: if
-the characters at the beginning of the line do not match the value
-of \fBcomment\-begin\fP, the value is inserted, otherwise
-the characters in \fBcomment-begin\fP are deleted from the beginning of
-the line.
-In either case, the line is accepted as if a newline had been typed.
-The default value of
-\fBcomment\-begin\fP causes this command to make the current line
-a shell comment.
-If a numeric argument causes the comment character to be removed, the line
-will be executed by the shell.
-.TP
-.B glob\-complete\-word (M\-g)
-The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion,
-with an asterisk implicitly appended. This pattern is used to
-generate a list of matching file names for possible completions.
-.TP
-.B glob\-expand\-word (C\-x *)
-The word before point is treated as a pattern for pathname expansion,
-and the list of matching file names is inserted, replacing the word.
-If a numeric argument is supplied, an asterisk is appended before
-pathname expansion.
-.TP
-.B glob\-list\-expansions (C\-x g)
-The list of expansions that would have been generated by
-.B glob\-expand\-word
-is displayed, and the line is redrawn.
-If a numeric argument is supplied, an asterisk is appended before
-pathname expansion.
-.TP
-.B dump\-functions
-Print all of the functions and their key bindings to the
-readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied,
-the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part
-of an \fIinputrc\fP file.
-.TP
-.B dump\-variables
-Print all of the settable readline variables and their values to the
-readline output stream. If a numeric argument is supplied,
-the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part
-of an \fIinputrc\fP file.
-.TP
-.B dump\-macros
-Print all of the readline key sequences bound to macros and the
-strings they ouput. If a numeric argument is supplied,
-the output is formatted in such a way that it can be made part
-of an \fIinputrc\fP file.
-.TP
-.B display\-shell\-version (C\-x C\-v)
-Display version information about the current instance of
-.BR bash .
-.PD
-.SS Programmable Completion
-.PP
-When word completion is attempted for an argument to a command for
-which a completion specification (a \fIcompspec\fP) has been defined
-using the \fBcomplete\fP builtin (see
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below), the programmable completion facilities are invoked.
-.PP
-First, the command name is identified.
-If a compspec has been defined for that command, the
-compspec is used to generate the list of possible completions for the word.
-If the command word is a full pathname, a compspec for the full
-pathname is searched for first.
-If no compspec is found for the full pathname, an attempt is made to
-find a compspec for the portion following the final slash.
-.PP
-Once a compspec has been found, it is used to generate the list of
-matching words.
-If a compspec is not found, the default \fBbash\fP completion as
-described above under \fBCompleting\fP is performed.
-.PP
-First, the actions specified by the compspec are used.
-Only matches which are prefixed by the word being completed are
-returned.
-When the
-.B \-f
-or
-.B \-d
-option is used for filename or directory name completion, the shell
-variable
-.SM
-.B FIGNORE
-is used to filter the matches.
-.PP
-Any completions specified by a filename expansion pattern to the
-\fB\-G\fP option are generated next.
-The words generated by the pattern need not match the word
-being completed.
-The
-.SM
-.B GLOBIGNORE
-shell variable is not used to filter the matches, but the
-.SM
-.B FIGNORE
-variable is used.
-.PP
-Next, the string specified as the argument to the \fB\-W\fP option
-is considered.
-The string is first split using the characters in the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable as delimiters.
-Shell quoting is honored.
-Each word is then expanded using
-brace expansion, tilde expansion, parameter and variable expansion,
-command substitution, arithmetic expansion, and pathname expansion,
-as described above under
-.SM
-.BR EXPANSION .
-The results are split using the rules described above under
-\fBWord Splitting\fP.
-The results of the expansion are prefix-matched against the word being
-completed, and the matching words become the possible completions.
-.PP
-After these matches have been generated, any shell function or command
-specified with the \fB\-F\fP and \fB\-C\fP options is invoked.
-When the command or function is invoked, the
-.SM
-.B COMP_LINE
-and
-.SM
-.B COMP_POINT
-variables are assigned values as described above under
-\fBShell Variables\fP.
-If a shell function is being invoked, the
-.SM
-.B COMP_WORDS
-and
-.SM
-.B COMP_CWORD
-variables are also set.
-When the function or command is invoked, the first argument is the
-name of the command whose arguments are being completed, the
-second argument is the word being completed, and the third argument
-is the word preceding the word being completed on the current command line.
-No filtering of the generated completions against the word being completed
-is performed; the function or command has complete freedom in generating
-the matches.
-.PP
-Any function specified with \fB\-F\fP is invoked first.
-The function may use any of the shell facilities, including the
-\fBcompgen\fP builtin described below, to generate the matches.
-It must put the possible completions in the
-.SM
-.B COMPREPLY
-array variable.
-.PP
-Next, any command specified with the \fB\-C\fP option is invoked
-in an environment equivalent to command substitution.
-It should print a list of completions, one per line, to the
-standard output.
-Backslash may be used to escape a newline, if necessary.
-.PP
-After all of the possible completions are generated, any filter
-specified with the \fB\-X\fP option is applied to the list.
-The filter is a pattern as used for pathname expansion; a \fB&\fP
-in the pattern is replaced with the text of the word being completed.
-A literal \fB&\fP may be escaped with a backslash; the backslash
-is removed before attempting a match.
-Any completion that matches the pattern will be removed from the list.
-A leading \fB!\fP negates the pattern; in this case any completion
-not matching the pattern will be removed.
-.PP
-Finally, any prefix and suffix specified with the \fB\-P\fP and \fB\-S\fP
-options are added to each member of the completion list, and the result is
-returned to the readline completion code as the list of possible
-completions.
-.PP
-If the previously-applied actions do not generate any matches, and the
-\fB\-o dirnames\fP option was supplied to \fBcomplete\fP when the
-compspec was defined, directory name completion is attempted.
-.PP
-By default, if a compspec is found, whatever it generates is returned
-to the completion code as the full set of possible completions.
-The default \fBbash\fP completions are not attempted, and the readline
-default of filename completion is disabled.
-If the \fB-o default\fP option was supplied to \fBcomplete\fP when the
-compspec was defined, readline's default completion will be performed
-if the compspec generates no matches.
-.PP
-When a compspec indicates that directory name completion is desired,
-the programmable completion functions force readline to append a slash
-to completed names which are symbolic links to directories, subject to
-the value of the \fBmark\-directories\fP readline variable, regardless
-of the setting of the \fBmark-symlinked\-directories\fP readline variable.
-.SH HISTORY
-When the
-.B \-o history
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin is enabled, the shell provides access to the
-\fIcommand history\fP,
-the list of commands previously typed.
-The value of the \fBHISTSIZE\fP variable is used as the
-number of commands to save in a history list.
-The text of the last
-.SM
-.B HISTSIZE
-commands (default 500) is saved. The shell
-stores each command in the history list prior to parameter and
-variable expansion (see
-.SM
-.B EXPANSION
-above) but after history expansion is performed, subject to the
-values of the shell variables
-.SM
-.B HISTIGNORE
-and
-.SM
-.BR HISTCONTROL .
-.PP
-On startup, the history is initialized from the file named by
-the variable
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-(default \fI~/.bash_history\fP).
-The file named by the value of
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-is truncated, if necessary, to contain no more than
-the number of lines specified by the value of
-.SM
-.BR HISTFILESIZE .
-When an interactive shell exits, the last
-.SM
-.B $HISTSIZE
-lines are copied from the history list to
-.SM
-.BR $HISTFILE .
-If the
-.B histappend
-shell option is enabled
-(see the description of
-.B shopt
-under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-below), the lines are appended to the history file,
-otherwise the history file is overwritten.
-If
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-is unset, or if the history file is unwritable, the history is
-not saved. After saving the history, the history file is truncated
-to contain no more than
-.SM
-.B HISTFILESIZE
-lines. If
-.SM
-.B HISTFILESIZE
-is not set, no truncation is performed.
-.PP
-The builtin command
-.B fc
-(see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below) may be used to list or edit and re-execute a portion of
-the history list.
-The
-.B history
-builtin may be used to display or modify the history list and
-manipulate the history file.
-When using command-line editing, search commands
-are available in each editing mode that provide access to the
-history list.
-.PP
-The shell allows control over which commands are saved on the history
-list. The
-.SM
-.B HISTCONTROL
-and
-.SM
-.B HISTIGNORE
-variables may be set to cause the shell to save only a subset of the
-commands entered.
-The
-.B cmdhist
-shell option, if enabled, causes the shell to attempt to save each
-line of a multi-line command in the same history entry, adding
-semicolons where necessary to preserve syntactic correctness.
-The
-.B lithist
-shell option causes the shell to save the command with embedded newlines
-instead of semicolons. See the description of the
-.B shopt
-builtin below under
-.SM
-.B "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-for information on setting and unsetting shell options.
-.SH "HISTORY EXPANSION"
-.PP
-The shell supports a history expansion feature that
-is similar to the history expansion in
-.BR csh.
-This section describes what syntax features are available. This
-feature is enabled by default for interactive shells, and can be
-disabled using the
-.B \+H
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS
-below). Non-interactive shells do not perform history expansion
-by default.
-.PP
-History expansions introduce words from the history list into
-the input stream, making it easy to repeat commands, insert the
-arguments to a previous command into the current input line, or
-fix errors in previous commands quickly.
-.PP
-History expansion is performed immediately after a complete line
-is read, before the shell breaks it into words.
-It takes place in two parts.
-The first is to determine which line from the history list
-to use during substitution.
-The second is to select portions of that line for inclusion into
-the current one.
-The line selected from the history is the \fIevent\fP,
-and the portions of that line that are acted upon are \fIwords\fP.
-Various \fImodifiers\fP are available to manipulate the selected words.
-The line is broken into words in the same fashion as when reading input,
-so that several \fImetacharacter\fP-separated words surrounded by
-quotes are considered one word.
-History expansions are introduced by the appearance of the
-history expansion character, which is \^\fB!\fP\^ by default.
-Only backslash (\^\fB\e\fP\^) and single quotes can quote
-the history expansion character.
-.PP
-Several shell options settable with the
-.B shopt
-builtin may be used to tailor the behavior of history expansion.
-If the
-.B histverify
-shell option is enabled (see the description of the
-.B shopt
-builtin), and
-.B readline
-is being used, history substitutions are not immediately passed to
-the shell parser.
-Instead, the expanded line is reloaded into the
-.B readline
-editing buffer for further modification.
-If
-.B readline
-is being used, and the
-.B histreedit
-shell option is enabled, a failed history substitution will be reloaded
-into the
-.B readline
-editing buffer for correction.
-The
-.B \-p
-option to the
-.B history
-builtin command may be used to see what a history expansion will
-do before using it.
-The
-.B \-s
-option to the
-.B history
-builtin may be used to add commands to the end of the history list
-without actually executing them, so that they are available for
-subsequent recall.
-.PP
-The shell allows control of the various characters used by the
-history expansion mechanism (see the description of
-.B histchars
-above under
-.BR "Shell Variables" ).
-.SS Event Designators
-.PP
-An event designator is a reference to a command line entry in the
-history list.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B !
-Start a history substitution, except when followed by a
-.BR blank ,
-newline, = or (.
-.TP
-.B !\fIn\fR
-Refer to command line
-.IR n .
-.TP
-.B !\-\fIn\fR
-Refer to the current command line minus
-.IR n .
-.TP
-.B !!
-Refer to the previous command. This is a synonym for `!\-1'.
-.TP
-.B !\fIstring\fR
-Refer to the most recent command starting with
-.IR string .
-.TP
-.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
-Refer to the most recent command containing
-.IR string .
-The trailing \fB?\fP may be omitted if
-.I string
-is followed immediately by a newline.
-.TP
-.B \d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring1\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u\fIstring2\fP\d\s+2^\s-2\u
-Quick substitution. Repeat the last command, replacing
-.I string1
-with
-.IR string2 .
-Equivalent to
-``!!:s/\fIstring1\fP/\fIstring2\fP/''
-(see \fBModifiers\fP below).
-.TP
-.B !#
-The entire command line typed so far.
-.PD
-.SS Word Designators
-.PP
-Word designators are used to select desired words from the event.
-A
-.B :
-separates the event specification from the word designator.
-It may be omitted if the word designator begins with a
-.BR ^ ,
-.BR $ ,
-.BR * ,
-.BR \- ,
-or
-.BR % .
-Words are numbered from the beginning of the line,
-with the first word being denoted by 0 (zero).
-Words are inserted into the current line separated by single spaces.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B 0 (zero)
-The zeroth word. For the shell, this is the command
-word.
-.TP
-.I n
-The \fIn\fRth word.
-.TP
-.B ^
-The first argument. That is, word 1.
-.TP
-.B $
-The last argument.
-.TP
-.B %
-The word matched by the most recent `?\fIstring\fR?' search.
-.TP
-.I x\fB\-\fPy
-A range of words; `\-\fIy\fR' abbreviates `0\-\fIy\fR'.
-.TP
-.B *
-All of the words but the zeroth. This is a synonym
-for `\fI1\-$\fP'. It is not an error to use
-.B *
-if there is just one
-word in the event; the empty string is returned in that case.
-.TP
-.B x*
-Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP.
-.TP
-.B x\-
-Abbreviates \fIx\-$\fP like \fBx*\fP, but omits the last word.
-.PD
-.PP
-If a word designator is supplied without an event specification, the
-previous command is used as the event.
-.SS Modifiers
-.PP
-After the optional word designator, there may appear a sequence of
-one or more of the following modifiers, each preceded by a `:'.
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.PP
-.TP
-.B h
-Remove a trailing file name component, leaving only the head.
-.TP
-.B t
-Remove all leading file name components, leaving the tail.
-.TP
-.B r
-Remove a trailing suffix of the form \fI.xxx\fP, leaving the
-basename.
-.TP
-.B e
-Remove all but the trailing suffix.
-.TP
-.B p
-Print the new command but do not execute it.
-.TP
-.B q
-Quote the substituted words, escaping further substitutions.
-.TP
-.B x
-Quote the substituted words as with
-.BR q ,
-but break into words at
-.B blanks
-and newlines.
-.TP
-.B s/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/
-Substitute
-.I new
-for the first occurrence of
-.I old
-in the event line. Any delimiter can be used in place of /. The
-final delimiter is optional if it is the last character of the
-event line. The delimiter may be quoted in
-.I old
-and
-.I new
-with a single backslash. If & appears in
-.IR new ,
-it is replaced by
-.IR old .
-A single backslash will quote the &. If
-.I old
-is null, it is set to the last
-.I old
-substituted, or, if no previous history substitutions took place,
-the last
-.I string
-in a
-.B !?\fIstring\fR\fB[?]\fR
-search.
-.TP
-.B &
-Repeat the previous substitution.
-.TP
-.B g
-Cause changes to be applied over the entire event line. This is
-used in conjunction with `\fB:s\fP' (e.g., `\fB:gs/\fIold\fP/\fInew\fP/\fR')
-or `\fB:&\fP'. If used with
-`\fB:s\fP', any delimiter can be used
-in place of /, and the final delimiter is optional
-if it is the last character of the event line.
-.PD
-.SH "SHELL BUILTIN COMMANDS"
-.\" start of bash_builtins
-.zZ
-.PP
-Unless otherwise noted, each builtin command documented in this
-section as accepting options preceded by
-.B \-
-accepts
-.B \-\-
-to signify the end of the options.
-.sp .5
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB:\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-.PD
-No effect; the command does nothing beyond expanding
-.I arguments
-and performing any specified
-redirections. A zero exit code is returned.
-.TP
-\fB .\| \fP \fIfilename\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBsource\fP \fIfilename\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-.PD
-Read and execute commands from
-.I filename
-in the current
-shell environment and return the exit status of the last command
-executed from
-.IR filename .
-If
-.I filename
-does not contain a slash, file names in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-are used to find the directory containing
-.IR filename .
-The file searched for in
-.SM
-.B PATH
-need not be executable.
-When \fBbash\fP is not in \fIposix mode\fP, the current directory is
-searched if no file is found in
-.SM
-.BR PATH .
-If the
-.B sourcepath
-option to the
-.B shopt
-builtin command is turned off, the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-is not searched.
-If any \fIarguments\fP are supplied, they become the positional
-parameters when \fIfilename\fP is executed. Otherwise the positional
-parameters are unchanged.
-The return status is the status of the last command exited within
-the script (0 if no commands are executed), and false if
-.I filename
-is not found or cannot be read.
-.TP
-\fBalias\fP [\fB\-p\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP] ...]
-\fBAlias\fP with no arguments or with the
-.B \-p
-option prints the list of aliases in the form
-\fBalias\fP \fIname\fP=\fIvalue\fP on standard output.
-When arguments are supplied, an alias is defined for
-each \fIname\fP whose \fIvalue\fP is given.
-A trailing space in \fIvalue\fP causes the next word to be
-checked for alias substitution when the alias is expanded.
-For each \fIname\fP in the argument list for which no \fIvalue\fP
-is supplied, the name and value of the alias is printed.
-\fBAlias\fP returns true unless a \fIname\fP is given for which
-no alias has been defined.
-.TP
-\fBbg\fP [\fIjobspec\fP]
-Resume the suspended job \fIjobspec\fP in the background, as if it
-had been started with
-.BR & .
-If \fIjobspec\fP is not present, the shell's notion of the
-\fIcurrent job\fP is used.
-.B bg
-.I jobspec
-returns 0 unless run when job control is disabled or, when run with
-job control enabled, if \fIjobspec\fP was not found or started without
-job control.
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] [\fB\-lpsvPSV\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] [\fB\-q\fP \fIfunction\fP] [\fB\-u\fP \fIfunction\fP] [\fB\-r\fP \fIkeyseq\fP]
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] \fB\-f\fP \fIfilename\fP
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] \fB\-x\fP \fIkeyseq\fP:\fIshell\-command\fP
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP [\fB\-m\fP \fIkeymap\fP] \fIkeyseq\fP:\fIfunction\-name\fP
-.TP
-\fBbind\fP \fIreadline\-command\fP
-.PD
-Display current
-.B readline
-key and function bindings, bind a key sequence to a
-.B readline
-function or macro, or set a
-.B readline
-variable.
-Each non-option argument is a command as it would appear in
-.IR .inputrc ,
-but each binding or command must be passed as a separate argument;
-e.g., '"\eC\-x\eC\-r": re\-read\-init\-file'.
-Options, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-m \fIkeymap\fP
-Use
-.I keymap
-as the keymap to be affected by the subsequent bindings.
-Acceptable
-.I keymap
-names are
-\fIemacs, emacs\-standard, emacs\-meta, emacs\-ctlx, vi,
-vi\-move, vi\-command\fP, and
-.IR vi\-insert .
-\fIvi\fP is equivalent to \fIvi\-command\fP; \fIemacs\fP is
-equivalent to \fIemacs\-standard\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-List the names of all \fBreadline\fP functions.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Display \fBreadline\fP function names and bindings in such a way
-that they can be re-read.
-.TP
-.B \-P
-List current \fBreadline\fP function names and bindings.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Display \fBreadline\fP variable names and values in such a way that they
-can be re-read.
-.TP
-.B \-V
-List current \fBreadline\fP variable names and values.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Display \fBreadline\fP key sequences bound to macros and the strings
-they output in such a way that they can be re-read.
-.TP
-.B \-S
-Display \fBreadline\fP key sequences bound to macros and the strings
-they output.
-.TP
-.B \-f \fIfilename\fP
-Read key bindings from \fIfilename\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-q \fIfunction\fP
-Query about which keys invoke the named \fIfunction\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-u \fIfunction\fP
-Unbind all keys bound to the named \fIfunction\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-r \fIkeyseq\fP
-Remove any current binding for \fIkeyseq\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-x \fIkeyseq\fP:\fIshell\-command\fP
-Cause \fIshell\-command\fP to be executed whenever \fIkeyseq\fP is
-entered.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is 0 unless an unrecognized option is given or an
-error occurred.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBbreak\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Exit from within a
-.BR for ,
-.BR while ,
-.BR until ,
-or
-.B select
-loop. If \fIn\fP is specified, break \fIn\fP levels.
-.I n
-must be \(>= 1. If
-.I n
-is greater than the number of enclosing loops, all enclosing loops
-are exited. The return value is 0 unless the shell is not executing
-a loop when
-.B break
-is executed.
-.TP
-\fBbuiltin\fP \fIshell\-builtin\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-Execute the specified shell builtin, passing it
-.IR arguments ,
-and return its exit status.
-This is useful when defining a
-function whose name is the same as a shell builtin,
-retaining the functionality of the builtin within the function.
-The \fBcd\fP builtin is commonly redefined this way.
-The return status is false if
-.I shell\-builtin
-is not a shell builtin command.
-.TP
-\fBcd\fP [\fB\-L|-P\fP] [\fIdir\fP]
-Change the current directory to \fIdir\fP. The variable
-.SM
-.B HOME
-is the
-default
-.IR dir .
-The variable
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-defines the search path for the directory containing
-.IR dir .
-Alternative directory names in
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-are separated by a colon (:). A null directory name in
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-is the same as the current directory, i.e., ``\fB.\fP''. If
-.I dir
-begins with a slash (/),
-then
-.SM
-.B CDPATH
-is not used. The
-.B \-P
-option says to use the physical directory structure instead of
-following symbolic links (see also the
-.B \-P
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command); the
-.B \-L
-option forces symbolic links to be followed. An argument of
-.B \-
-is equivalent to
-.SM
-.BR $OLDPWD .
-The return value is true if the directory was successfully changed;
-false otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBcommand\fP [\fB\-pVv\fP] \fIcommand\fP [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Run
-.I command
-with
-.I args
-suppressing the normal shell function lookup. Only builtin
-commands or commands found in the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-are executed. If the
-.B \-p
-option is given, the search for
-.I command
-is performed using a default value for
-.B PATH
-that is guaranteed to find all of the standard utilities.
-If either the
-.B \-V
-or
-.B \-v
-option is supplied, a description of
-.I command
-is printed. The
-.B \-v
-option causes a single word indicating the command or file name
-used to invoke
-.I command
-to be displayed; the
-.B \-V
-option produces a more verbose description.
-If the
-.B \-V
-or
-.B \-v
-option is supplied, the exit status is 0 if
-.I command
-was found, and 1 if not. If neither option is supplied and
-an error occurred or
-.I command
-cannot be found, the exit status is 127. Otherwise, the exit status of the
-.B command
-builtin is the exit status of
-.IR command .
-.TP
-\fBcompgen\fP [\fIoption\fP] [\fIword\fP]
-Generate possible completion matches for \fIword\fP according to
-the \fIoption\fPs, which may be any option accepted by the
-.B complete
-builtin with the exception of \fB\-p\fP and \fB\-r\fP, and write
-the matches to the standard output.
-When using the \fB\-F\fP or \fB\-C\fP options, the various shell variables
-set by the programmable completion facilities, while available, will not
-have useful values.
-.sp 1
-The matches will be generated in the same way as if the programmable
-completion code had generated them directly from a completion specification
-with the same flags.
-If \fIword\fP is specified, only those completions matching \fIword\fP
-will be displayed.
-.sp 1
-The return value is true unless an invalid option is supplied, or no
-matches were generated.
-.TP
-\fBcomplete\fP [\fB\-abcdefgjksuv\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIcomp-option\fP] [\fB\-A\fP \fIaction\fP] [\fB\-G\fP \fIglobpat\fP] [\fB\-W\fP \fIwordlist\fP] [\fB\-P\fP \fIprefix\fP] [\fB\-S\fP \fIsuffix\fP]
-.br
-[\fB\-X\fP \fIfilterpat\fP] [\fB\-F\fP \fIfunction\fP] [\fB\-C\fP \fIcommand\fP] \fIname\fP [\fIname ...\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBcomplete\fP \fB\-pr\fP [\fIname\fP ...]
-.PD
-Specify how arguments to each \fIname\fP should be completed.
-If the \fB\-p\fP option is supplied, or if no options are supplied,
-existing completion specifications are printed in a way that allows
-them to be reused as input.
-The \fB\-r\fP option removes a completion specification for
-each \fIname\fP, or, if no \fIname\fPs are supplied, all
-completion specifications.
-.sp 1
-The process of applying these completion specifications when word completion
-is attempted is described above under \fBProgrammable Completion\fP.
-.sp 1
-Other options, if specified, have the following meanings.
-The arguments to the \fB\-G\fP, \fB\-W\fP, and \fB\-X\fP options
-(and, if necessary, the \fB\-P\fP and \fB\-S\fP options)
-should be quoted to protect them from expansion before the
-.B complete
-builtin is invoked.
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 8
-\fB\-o\fP \fIcomp-option\fP
-The \fIcomp-option\fP controls several aspects of the compspec's behavior
-beyond the simple generation of completions.
-\fIcomp-option\fP may be one of:
-.RS
-.TP 8
-.B default
-Use readline's default filename completion if the compspec generates
-no matches.
-.TP 8
-.B dirnames
-Perform directory name completion if the compspec generates no matches.
-.TP 8
-.B filenames
-Tell readline that the compspec generates filenames, so it can perform any
-filename\-specific processing (like adding a slash to directory names or
-suppressing trailing spaces). Intended to be used with shell functions.
-.TP 8
-.B nospace
-Tell readline not to append a space (the default) to words completed at
-the end of the line.
-.RE
-.TP 8
-\fB\-A\fP \fIaction\fP
-The \fIaction\fP may be one of the following to generate a list of possible
-completions:
-.RS
-.TP 8
-.B alias
-Alias names. May also be specified as \fB\-a\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B arrayvar
-Array variable names.
-.TP 8
-.B binding
-\fBReadline\fP key binding names.
-.TP 8
-.B builtin
-Names of shell builtin commands. May also be specified as \fB\-b\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B command
-Command names. May also be specified as \fB\-c\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B directory
-Directory names. May also be specified as \fB\-d\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B disabled
-Names of disabled shell builtins.
-.TP 8
-.B enabled
-Names of enabled shell builtins.
-.TP 8
-.B export
-Names of exported shell variables. May also be specified as \fB\-e\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B file
-File names. May also be specified as \fB\-f\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B function
-Names of shell functions.
-.TP 8
-.B group
-Group names. May also be specified as \fB\-g\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B helptopic
-Help topics as accepted by the \fBhelp\fP builtin.
-.TP 8
-.B hostname
-Hostnames, as taken from the file specified by the
-.SM
-.B HOSTFILE
-shell variable.
-.TP 8
-.B job
-Job names, if job control is active. May also be specified as \fB\-j\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B keyword
-Shell reserved words. May also be specified as \fB\-k\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B running
-Names of running jobs, if job control is active.
-.TP 8
-.B service
-Service names. May also be specified as \fB\-s\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B setopt
-Valid arguments for the \fB\-o\fP option to the \fBset\fP builtin.
-.TP 8
-.B shopt
-Shell option names as accepted by the \fBshopt\fP builtin.
-.TP 8
-.B signal
-Signal names.
-.TP 8
-.B stopped
-Names of stopped jobs, if job control is active.
-.TP 8
-.B user
-User names. May also be specified as \fB\-u\fP.
-.TP 8
-.B variable
-Names of all shell variables. May also be specified as \fB\-v\fP.
-.RE
-.TP 8
-\fB\-G\fP \fIglobpat\fP
-The filename expansion pattern \fIglobpat\fP is expanded to generate
-the possible completions.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-W\fP \fIwordlist\fP
-The \fIwordlist\fP is split using the characters in the
-.SM
-.B IFS
-special variable as delimiters, and each resultant word is expanded.
-The possible completions are the members of the resultant list which
-match the word being completed.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-C\fP \fIcommand\fP
-\fIcommand\fP is executed in a subshell environment, and its output is
-used as the possible completions.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-F\fP \fIfunction\fP
-The shell function \fIfunction\fP is executed in the current shell
-environment.
-When it finishes, the possible completions are retrieved from the value
-of the
-.SM
-.B COMPREPLY
-array variable.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-X\fP \fIfilterpat\fP
-\fIfilterpat\fP is a pattern as used for filename expansion.
-It is applied to the list of possible completions generated by the
-preceding options and arguments, and each completion matching
-\fIfilterpat\fP is removed from the list.
-A leading \fB!\fP in \fIfilterpat\fP negates the pattern; in this
-case, any completion not matching \fIfilterpat\fP is removed.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-P\fP \fIprefix\fP
-\fIprefix\fP is added at the beginning of each possible completion
-after all other options have been applied.
-.TP 8
-\fB\-S\fP \fIsuffix\fP
-\fIsuffix\fP is appended to each possible completion
-after all other options have been applied.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is true unless an invalid option is supplied, an option
-other than \fB\-p\fP or \fB\-r\fP is supplied without a \fIname\fP
-argument, an attempt is made to remove a completion specification for
-a \fIname\fP for which no specification exists, or
-an error occurs adding a completion specification.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBcontinue\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Resume the next iteration of the enclosing
-.BR for ,
-.BR while ,
-.BR until ,
-or
-.B select
-loop.
-If
-.I n
-is specified, resume at the \fIn\fPth enclosing loop.
-.I n
-must be \(>= 1. If
-.I n
-is greater than the number of enclosing loops, the last enclosing loop
-(the ``top-level'' loop) is resumed. The return value is 0 unless the
-shell is not executing a loop when
-.B continue
-is executed.
-.TP
-\fBdeclare\fP [\fB\-afFirtx\fP] [\fB\-p\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP]]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBtypeset\fP [\fB\-afFirtx\fP] [\fB\-p\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP]]
-.PD
-Declare variables and/or give them attributes.
-If no \fIname\fPs are given then display the values of variables.
-The
-.B \-p
-option will display the attributes and values of each
-.IR name .
-When
-.B \-p
-is used, additional options are ignored.
-The
-.B \-F
-option inhibits the display of function definitions; only the
-function name and attributes are printed.
-The
-.B \-F
-option implies
-.BR \-f .
-The following options can
-be used to restrict output to variables with the specified attribute or
-to give variables attributes:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Each \fIname\fP is an array variable (see
-.B Arrays
-above).
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Use function names only.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-The variable is treated as an integer; arithmetic evaluation (see
-.SM
-.B "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" ") "
-is performed when the variable is assigned a value.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Make \fIname\fPs readonly. These names cannot then be assigned values
-by subsequent assignment statements or unset.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Give each \fIname\fP the \fItrace\fP attribute.
-Traced functions inherit the \fBDEBUG\fP trap from the calling shell.
-The trace attribute has no special meaning for variables.
-.TP
-.B \-x
-Mark \fIname\fPs for export to subsequent commands via the environment.
-.PD
-.PP
-Using `+' instead of `\-'
-turns off the attribute instead, with the exception that \fB+a\fP
-may not be used to destroy an array variable. When used in a function,
-makes each
-\fIname\fP local, as with the
-.B local
-command. The return value is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered,
-an attempt is made to define a function using
-.if n ``\-f foo=bar'',
-.if t \f(CW\-f foo=bar\fP,
-an attempt is made to assign a value to a readonly variable,
-an attempt is made to assign a value to an array variable without
-using the compound assignment syntax (see
-.B Arrays
-above), one of the \fInames\fP is not a valid shell variable name,
-an attempt is made to turn off readonly status for a readonly variable,
-an attempt is made to turn off array status for an array variable,
-or an attempt is made to display a non-existent function with \fB\-f\fP.
-.RE
-.TP
-.B dirs [\fB\-clpv\fP] [+\fIn\fP] [\-\fIn\fP]
-Without options, displays the list of currently remembered directories.
-The default display is on a single line with directory names separated
-by spaces.
-Directories are added to the list with the
-.B pushd
-command; the
-.B popd
-command removes entries from the list.
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB+\fP\fIn\fP
-Displays the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the left of the list
-shown by
-.B dirs
-when invoked without options, starting with zero.
-.TP
-\fB\-\fP\fIn\fP
-Displays the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the right of the list
-shown by
-.B dirs
-when invoked without options, starting with zero.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Clears the directory stack by deleting all of the entries.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Produces a longer listing; the default listing format uses a
-tilde to denote the home directory.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Print the directory stack with one entry per line.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the directory stack with one entry per line,
-prefixing each entry with its index in the stack.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is 0 unless an
-invalid option is supplied or \fIn\fP indexes beyond the end
-of the directory stack.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBdisown\fP [\fB\-ar\fP] [\fB\-h\fP] [\fIjobspec\fP ...]
-Without options, each
-.I jobspec
-is removed from the table of active jobs.
-If the \fB\-h\fP option is given, each
-.I jobspec
-is not removed from the table, but is marked so that
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-is not sent to the job if the shell receives a
-.SM
-.BR SIGHUP .
-If no
-.I jobspec
-is present, and neither the
-.B \-a
-nor the
-.B \-r
-option is supplied, the \fIcurrent job\fP is used.
-If no
-.I jobspec
-is supplied, the
-.B \-a
-option means to remove or mark all jobs; the
-.B \-r
-option without a
-.I jobspec
-argument restricts operation to running jobs.
-The return value is 0 unless a
-.I jobspec
-does not specify a valid job.
-.TP
-\fBecho\fP [\fB\-neE\fP] [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Output the \fIarg\fPs, separated by spaces, followed by a newline.
-The return status is always 0.
-If \fB\-n\fP is specified, the trailing newline is
-suppressed. If the \fB\-e\fP option is given, interpretation of
-the following backslash-escaped characters is enabled. The
-.B \-E
-option disables the interpretation of these escape characters,
-even on systems where they are interpreted by default.
-The \fBxpg_echo\fP shell option may be used to
-dynamically determine whether or not \fBecho\fP expands these
-escape characters by default.
-.B echo
-does not interpret
-.B \-\-
-to mean the end of options.
-.B echo
-interprets the following escape sequences:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \ea
-alert (bell)
-.TP
-.B \eb
-backspace
-.TP
-.B \ec
-suppress trailing newline
-.TP
-.B \ee
-an escape character
-.TP
-.B \ef
-form feed
-.TP
-.B \en
-new line
-.TP
-.B \er
-carriage return
-.TP
-.B \et
-horizontal tab
-.TP
-.B \ev
-vertical tab
-.TP
-.B \e\e
-backslash
-.TP
-.B \e0\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(zero to three octal digits)
-.TP
-.B \e\fInnn\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the octal value \fInnn\fP
-(one to three octal digits)
-.TP
-.B \ex\fIHH\fP
-the eight-bit character whose value is the hexadecimal value \fIHH\fP
-(one or two hex digits)
-.PD
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBenable\fP [\fB\-adnps\fP] [\fB\-f\fP \fIfilename\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-Enable and disable builtin shell commands.
-Disabling a builtin allows a disk command which has the same name
-as a shell builtin to be executed without specifying a full pathname,
-even though the shell normally searches for builtins before disk commands.
-If \fB\-n\fP is used, each \fIname\fP
-is disabled; otherwise,
-\fInames\fP are enabled. For example, to use the
-.B test
-binary found via the
-.SM
-.B PATH
-instead of the shell builtin version, run
-.if t \f(CWenable -n test\fP.
-.if n ``enable -n test''.
-The
-.B \-f
-option means to load the new builtin command
-.I name
-from shared object
-.IR filename ,
-on systems that support dynamic loading. The
-.B \-d
-option will delete a builtin previously loaded with
-.BR \-f .
-If no \fIname\fP arguments are given, or if the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, a list of shell builtins is printed.
-With no other option arguments, the list consists of all enabled
-shell builtins.
-If \fB\-n\fP is supplied, only disabled builtins are printed.
-If \fB\-a\fP is supplied, the list printed includes all builtins, with an
-indication of whether or not each is enabled.
-If \fB\-s\fP is supplied, the output is restricted to the POSIX
-\fIspecial\fP builtins.
-The return value is 0 unless a
-.I name
-is not a shell builtin or there is an error loading a new builtin
-from a shared object.
-.TP
-\fBeval\fP [\fIarg\fP ...]
-The \fIarg\fPs are read and concatenated together into a single
-command. This command is then read and executed by the shell, and
-its exit status is returned as the value of
-.BR eval .
-If there are no
-.IR args ,
-or only null arguments,
-.B eval
-returns 0.
-.TP
-\fBexec\fP [\fB\-cl\fP] [\fB\-a\fP \fIname\fP] [\fIcommand\fP [\fIarguments\fP]]
-If
-.I command
-is specified, it replaces the shell.
-No new process is created. The
-.I arguments
-become the arguments to \fIcommand\fP.
-If the
-.B \-l
-option is supplied,
-the shell places a dash at the beginning of the zeroth arg passed to
-.IR command .
-This is what
-.IR login (1)
-does. The
-.B \-c
-option causes
-.I command
-to be executed with an empty environment. If
-.B \-a
-is supplied, the shell passes
-.I name
-as the zeroth argument to the executed command. If
-.I command
-cannot be executed for some reason, a non-interactive shell exits,
-unless the shell option
-.B execfail
-is enabled, in which case it returns failure.
-An interactive shell returns failure if the file cannot be executed.
-If
-.I command
-is not specified, any redirections take effect in the current shell,
-and the return status is 0. If there is a redirection error, the
-return status is 1.
-.TP
-\fBexit\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Cause the shell to exit
-with a status of \fIn\fP. If
-.I n
-is omitted, the exit status
-is that of the last command executed.
-A trap on
-.SM
-.B EXIT
-is executed before the shell terminates.
-.TP
-\fBexport\fP [\fB\-fn\fP\^] [\fIname\fP[=\fIword\fP]] ...
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B export \-p
-.PD
-The supplied
-.I names
-are marked for automatic export to the environment of
-subsequently executed commands. If the
-.B \-f
-option is given,
-the
-.I names
-refer to functions.
-If no
-.I names
-are given, or if the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, a list
-of all names that are exported in this shell is printed.
-The
-.B \-n
-option causes the export property to be removed from the
-named variables.
-.B export
-returns an exit status of 0 unless an invalid option is
-encountered,
-one of the \fInames\fP is not a valid shell variable name, or
-.B \-f
-is supplied with a
-.I name
-that is not a function.
-.TP
-\fBfc\fP [\fB\-e\fP \fIename\fP] [\fB\-nlr\fP] [\fIfirst\fP] [\fIlast\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBfc\fP \fB\-s\fP [\fIpat\fP=\fIrep\fP] [\fIcmd\fP]
-.PD
-Fix Command. In the first form, a range of commands from
-.I first
-to
-.I last
-is selected from the history list.
-.I First
-and
-.I last
-may be specified as a string (to locate the last command beginning
-with that string) or as a number (an index into the history list,
-where a negative number is used as an offset from the current
-command number). If
-.I last
-is not specified it is set to
-the current command for listing (so that
-.if n ``fc \-l \-10''
-.if t \f(CWfc \-l \-10\fP
-prints the last 10 commands) and to
-.I first
-otherwise.
-If
-.I first
-is not specified it is set to the previous
-command for editing and \-16 for listing.
-.sp 1
-The
-.B \-n
-option suppresses
-the command numbers when listing. The
-.B \-r
-option reverses the order of
-the commands. If the
-.B \-l
-option is given,
-the commands are listed on
-standard output. Otherwise, the editor given by
-.I ename
-is invoked
-on a file containing those commands. If
-.I ename
-is not given, the
-value of the
-.SM
-.B FCEDIT
-variable is used, and
-the value of
-.SM
-.B EDITOR
-if
-.SM
-.B FCEDIT
-is not set. If neither variable is set,
-.FN vi
-is used. When editing is complete, the edited commands are
-echoed and executed.
-.sp 1
-In the second form, \fIcommand\fP is re-executed after each instance
-of \fIpat\fP is replaced by \fIrep\fP.
-A useful alias to use with this is
-.if n ``r=fc -s'',
-.if t \f(CWr='fc \-s'\fP,
-so that typing
-.if n ``r cc''
-.if t \f(CWr cc\fP
-runs the last command beginning with
-.if n ``cc''
-.if t \f(CWcc\fP
-and typing
-.if n ``r''
-.if t \f(CWr\fP
-re-executes the last command.
-.sp 1
-If the first form is used, the return value is 0 unless an invalid
-option is encountered or
-.I first
-or
-.I last
-specify history lines out of range.
-If the
-.B \-e
-option is supplied, the return value is the value of the last
-command executed or failure if an error occurs with the temporary
-file of commands. If the second form is used, the return status
-is that of the command re-executed, unless
-.I cmd
-does not specify a valid history line, in which case
-.B fc
-returns failure.
-.TP
-\fBfg\fP [\fIjobspec\fP]
-Resume
-.I jobspec
-in the foreground, and make it the current job.
-If
-.I jobspec
-is not present, the shell's notion of the \fIcurrent job\fP is used.
-The return value is that of the command placed into the foreground,
-or failure if run when job control is disabled or, when run with
-job control enabled, if
-.I jobspec
-does not specify a valid job or
-.I jobspec
-specifies a job that was started without job control.
-.TP
-\fBgetopts\fP \fIoptstring\fP \fIname\fP [\fIargs\fP]
-.B getopts
-is used by shell procedures to parse positional parameters.
-.I optstring
-contains the option characters to be recognized; if a character
-is followed by a colon, the option is expected to have an
-argument, which should be separated from it by white space.
-The colon and question mark characters may not be used as
-option characters.
-Each time it is invoked,
-.B getopts
-places the next option in the shell variable
-.IR name ,
-initializing
-.I name
-if it does not exist,
-and the index of the next argument to be processed into the
-variable
-.SM
-.BR OPTIND .
-.SM
-.B OPTIND
-is initialized to 1 each time the shell or a shell script
-is invoked. When an option requires an argument,
-.B getopts
-places that argument into the variable
-.SM
-.BR OPTARG .
-The shell does not reset
-.SM
-.B OPTIND
-automatically; it must be manually reset between multiple
-calls to
-.B getopts
-within the same shell invocation if a new set of parameters
-is to be used.
-.sp 1
-When the end of options is encountered, \fBgetopts\fP exits with a
-return value greater than zero.
-\fBOPTIND\fP is set to the index of the first non-option argument,
-and \fBname\fP is set to ?.
-.sp 1
-.B getopts
-normally parses the positional parameters, but if more arguments are
-given in
-.IR args ,
-.B getopts
-parses those instead.
-.sp 1
-.B getopts
-can report errors in two ways. If the first character of
-.I optstring
-is a colon,
-.I silent
-error reporting is used. In normal operation diagnostic messages
-are printed when invalid options or missing option arguments are
-encountered.
-If the variable
-.SM
-.B OPTERR
-is set to 0, no error messages will be displayed, even if the first
-character of
-.I optstring
-is not a colon.
-.sp 1
-If an invalid option is seen,
-.B getopts
-places ? into
-.I name
-and, if not silent,
-prints an error message and unsets
-.SM
-.BR OPTARG .
-If
-.B getopts
-is silent,
-the option character found is placed in
-.SM
-.B OPTARG
-and no diagnostic message is printed.
-.sp 1
-If a required argument is not found, and
-.B getopts
-is not silent,
-a question mark (\^\fB?\fP\^) is placed in
-.IR name ,
-.SM
-.B OPTARG
-is unset, and a diagnostic message is printed.
-If
-.B getopts
-is silent, then a colon (\^\fB:\fP\^) is placed in
-.I name
-and
-.SM
-.B OPTARG
-is set to the option character found.
-.sp 1
-.B getopts
-returns true if an option, specified or unspecified, is found.
-It returns false if the end of options is encountered or an
-error occurs.
-.TP
-\fBhash\fP [\fB\-lr\fP] [\fB\-p\fP \fIfilename\fP] [\fB\-dt\fP] [\fIname\fP]
-For each
-.IR name ,
-the full file name of the command is determined by searching
-the directories in
-.B $PATH
-and remembered.
-If the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, no path search is performed, and
-.I filename
-is used as the full file name of the command.
-The
-.B \-r
-option causes the shell to forget all
-remembered locations.
-The
-.B \-d
-option causes the shell to forget the remembered location of each \fIname\fP.
-If the
-.B \-t
-option is supplied, the full pathname to which each \fIname\fP corresponds
-is printed. If multiple \fIname\fP arguments are supplied with \fB\-t\fP,
-the \fIname\fP is printed before the hashed full pathname.
-The
-.B \-l
-option causes output to be displayed in a format that may be reused as input.
-If no arguments are given, or if only \fB\-l\fP is supplied,
-information about remembered commands is printed.
-The return status is true unless a
-.I name
-is not found or an invalid option is supplied.
-.TP
-\fBhelp\fP [\fB\-s\fP] [\fIpattern\fP]
-Display helpful information about builtin commands. If
-.I pattern
-is specified,
-.B help
-gives detailed help on all commands matching
-.IR pattern ;
-otherwise help for all the builtins and shell control structures
-is printed.
-The \fB\-s\fP option restricts the information displayed to a short
-usage synopsis.
-The return status is 0 unless no command matches
-.IR pattern .
-.TP
-\fBhistory [\fIn\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-c\fP
-.TP
-\fBhistory \-d\fP \fIoffset\fP
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-anrw\fP [\fIfilename\fP]
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-p\fP \fIarg\fP [\fIarg ...\fP]
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fP \fB\-s\fP \fIarg\fP [\fIarg ...\fP]
-.PD
-With no options, display the command
-history list with line numbers. Lines listed
-with a
-.B *
-have been modified. An argument of
-.I n
-lists only the last
-.I n
-lines. If \fIfilename\fP is supplied, it is used as the
-name of the history file; if not, the value of
-.SM
-.B HISTFILE
-is used. Options, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Clear the history list by deleting all the entries.
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fP \fIoffset\fP
-Delete the history entry at position \fIoffset\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Append the ``new'' history lines (history lines entered since the
-beginning of the current \fBbash\fP session) to the history file.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Read the history lines not already read from the history
-file into the current history list. These are lines
-appended to the history file since the beginning of the
-current \fBbash\fP session.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Read the contents of the history file
-and use them as the current history.
-.TP
-.B \-w
-Write the current history to the history file, overwriting the
-history file's contents.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Perform history substitution on the following \fIargs\fP and display
-the result on the standard output.
-Does not store the results in the history list.
-Each \fIarg\fP must be quoted to disable normal history expansion.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Store the
-.I args
-in the history list as a single entry. The last command in the
-history list is removed before the
-.I args
-are added.
-.PD
-.PP
-The return value is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered, an
-error occurs while reading or writing the history file, an invalid
-\fIoffset\fP is supplied as an argument to \fB\-d\fP, or the
-history expansion supplied as an argument to \fB\-p\fP fails.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBjobs\fP [\fB\-lnprs\fP] [ \fIjobspec\fP ... ]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBjobs\fP \fB\-x\fP \fIcommand\fP [ \fIargs\fP ... ]
-.PD
-The first form lists the active jobs. The options have the following
-meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-l
-List process IDs
-in addition to the normal information.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-List only the process ID of the job's process group
-leader.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Display information only about jobs that have changed status since
-the user was last notified of their status.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Restrict output to running jobs.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Restrict output to stopped jobs.
-.PD
-.PP
-If
-.I jobspec
-is given, output is restricted to information about that job.
-The return status is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered
-or an invalid
-.I jobspec
-is supplied.
-.PP
-If the
-.B \-x
-option is supplied,
-.B jobs
-replaces any
-.I jobspec
-found in
-.I command
-or
-.I args
-with the corresponding process group ID, and executes
-.I command
-passing it
-.IR args ,
-returning its exit status.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBkill\fP [\fB\-s\fP \fIsigspec\fP | \fB\-n\fP \fIsignum\fP | \fB\-\fP\fIsigspec\fP] [\fIpid\fP | \fIjobspec\fP] ...
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBkill\fP \fB\-l\fP [\fIsigspec\fP | \fIexit_status\fP]
-.PD
-Send the signal named by
-.I sigspec
-or
-.I signum
-to the processes named by
-.I pid
-or
-.IR jobspec .
-.I sigspec
-is either a signal name such as
-.SM
-.B SIGKILL
-or a signal number;
-.I signum
-is a signal number. If
-.I sigspec
-is a signal name, the name may be
-given with or without the
-.SM
-.B SIG
-prefix.
-If
-.I sigspec
-is not present, then
-.SM
-.B SIGTERM
-is assumed.
-An argument of
-.B \-l
-lists the signal names.
-If any arguments are supplied when
-.B \-l
-is given, the names of the signals corresponding to the arguments are
-listed, and the return status is 0.
-The \fIexit_status\fP argument to
-.B \-l
-is a number specifying either a signal number or the exit status of
-a process terminated by a signal.
-.B kill
-returns true if at least one signal was successfully sent, or false
-if an error occurs or an invalid option is encountered.
-.TP
-\fBlet\fP \fIarg\fP [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Each
-.I arg
-is an arithmetic expression to be evaluated (see
-.SM
-.BR "ARITHMETIC EVALUATION" ).
-If the last
-.I arg
-evaluates to 0,
-.B let
-returns 1; 0 is returned otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBlocal\fP [\fIoption\fP] [\fIname\fP[=\fIvalue\fP] ...]
-For each argument, a local variable named
-.I name
-is created, and assigned
-.IR value .
-The \fIoption\fP can be any of the options accepted by \fBdeclare\fP.
-When
-.B local
-is used within a function, it causes the variable
-.I name
-to have a visible scope restricted to that function and its children.
-With no operands,
-.B local
-writes a list of local variables to the standard output. It is
-an error to use
-.B local
-when not within a function. The return status is 0 unless
-.B local
-is used outside a function, an invalid
-.I name
-is supplied, or
-\fIname\fP is a readonly variable.
-.TP
-.B logout
-Exit a login shell.
-.TP
-\fBpopd\fP [\-\fBn\fP] [+\fIn\fP] [\-\fIn\fP]
-Removes entries from the directory stack. With no arguments,
-removes the top directory from the stack, and performs a
-.B cd
-to the new top directory.
-Arguments, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB+\fP\fIn\fP
-Removes the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the left of the list
-shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero. For example:
-.if n ``popd +0''
-.if t \f(CWpopd +0\fP
-removes the first directory,
-.if n ``popd +1''
-.if t \f(CWpopd +1\fP
-the second.
-.TP
-\fB\-\fP\fIn\fP
-Removes the \fIn\fPth entry counting from the right of the list
-shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero. For example:
-.if n ``popd -0''
-.if t \f(CWpopd -0\fP
-removes the last directory,
-.if n ``popd -1''
-.if t \f(CWpopd -1\fP
-the next to last.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Suppresses the normal change of directory when removing directories
-from the stack, so that only the stack is manipulated.
-.PD
-.PP
-If the
-.B popd
-command is successful, a
-.B dirs
-is performed as well, and the return status is 0.
-.B popd
-returns false if an invalid option is encountered, the directory stack
-is empty, a non-existent directory stack entry is specified, or the
-directory change fails.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBprintf\fP \fIformat\fP [\fIarguments\fP]
-Write the formatted \fIarguments\fP to the standard output under the
-control of the \fIformat\fP.
-The \fIformat\fP is a character string which contains three types of objects:
-plain characters, which are simply copied to standard output, character
-escape sequences, which are converted and copied to the standard output, and
-format specifications, each of which causes printing of the next successive
-\fIargument\fP.
-In addition to the standard \fIprintf\fP(1) formats, \fB%b\fP causes
-\fBprintf\fP to expand backslash escape sequences in the corresponding
-\fIargument\fP, and \fB%q\fP causes \fBprintf\fP to output the corresponding
-\fIargument\fP in a format that can be reused as shell input.
-.sp 1
-The \fIformat\fP is reused as necessary to consume all of the \fIarguments\fP.
-If the \fIformat\fP requires more \fIarguments\fP than are supplied, the
-extra format specifications behave as if a zero value or null string, as
-appropriate, had been supplied. The return value is zero on success,
-non-zero on failure.
-.TP
-\fBpushd\fP [\fB\-n\fP] [\fIdir\fP]
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fBpushd\fP [\fB\-n\fP] [+\fIn\fP] [\-\fIn\fP]
-.PD
-Adds a directory to the top of the directory stack, or rotates
-the stack, making the new top of the stack the current working
-directory. With no arguments, exchanges the top two directories
-and returns 0, unless the directory stack is empty.
-Arguments, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB+\fP\fIn\fP
-Rotates the stack so that the \fIn\fPth directory
-(counting from the left of the list shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero)
-is at the top.
-.TP
-\fB\-\fP\fIn\fP
-Rotates the stack so that the \fIn\fPth directory
-(counting from the right of the list shown by
-.BR dirs ,
-starting with zero) is at the top.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Suppresses the normal change of directory when adding directories
-to the stack, so that only the stack is manipulated.
-.TP
-.I dir
-Adds
-.I dir
-to the directory stack at the top, making it the
-new current working directory.
-.PD
-.PP
-If the
-.B pushd
-command is successful, a
-.B dirs
-is performed as well.
-If the first form is used,
-.B pushd
-returns 0 unless the cd to
-.I dir
-fails. With the second form,
-.B pushd
-returns 0 unless the directory stack is empty,
-a non-existent directory stack element is specified,
-or the directory change to the specified new current directory
-fails.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBpwd\fP [\fB\-LP\fP]
-Print the absolute pathname of the current working directory.
-The pathname printed contains no symbolic links if the
-.B \-P
-option is supplied or the
-.B \-o physical
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin command is enabled.
-If the
-.B \-L
-option is used, the pathname printed may contain symbolic links.
-The return status is 0 unless an error occurs while
-reading the name of the current directory or an
-invalid option is supplied.
-.TP
-\fBread\fP [\fB\-ers\fP] [\fB\-u\fP \fIfd\fP] [\fB\-t\fP \fItimeout\fP] [\fB\-a\fP \fIaname\fP] [\fB\-p\fP \fIprompt\fP] [\fB\-n\fP \fInchars\fP] [\fB\-d\fP \fIdelim\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-One line is read from the standard input, or from the file descriptor
-\fIfd\fP supplied as an argument to the \fB\-u\fP option, and the first word
-is assigned to the first
-.IR name ,
-the second word to the second
-.IR name ,
-and so on, with leftover words and their intervening separators assigned
-to the last
-.IR name .
-If there are fewer words read from the input stream than names,
-the remaining names are assigned empty values.
-The characters in
-.SM
-.B IFS
-are used to split the line into words.
-The backslash character (\fB\e\fP) may be used to remove any special
-meaning for the next character read and for line continuation.
-Options, if supplied, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a \fIaname\fP
-The words are assigned to sequential indices
-of the array variable
-.IR aname ,
-starting at 0.
-.I aname
-is unset before any new values are assigned.
-Other \fIname\fP arguments are ignored.
-.TP
-.B \-d \fIdelim\fP
-The first character of \fIdelim\fP is used to terminate the input line,
-rather than newline.
-.TP
-.B \-e
-If the standard input
-is coming from a terminal,
-.B readline
-(see
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-above) is used to obtain the line.
-.TP
-.B \-n \fInchars\fP
-\fBread\fP returns after reading \fInchars\fP characters rather than
-waiting for a complete line of input.
-.TP
-.B \-p \fIprompt\fP
-Display \fIprompt\fP on standard error, without a
-trailing newline, before attempting to read any input. The prompt
-is displayed only if input is coming from a terminal.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Backslash does not act as an escape character.
-The backslash is considered to be part of the line.
-In particular, a backslash-newline pair may not be used as a line
-continuation.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Silent mode. If input is coming from a terminal, characters are
-not echoed.
-.TP
-.B \-t \fItimeout\fP
-Cause \fBread\fP to time out and return failure if a complete line of
-input is not read within \fItimeout\fP seconds.
-This option has no effect if \fBread\fP is not reading input from the
-terminal or a pipe.
-.TP
-.B \-u \fIfd\FP
-Read input from file descriptor \fIfd\fP.
-.PD
-.PP
-If no
-.I names
-are supplied, the line read is assigned to the variable
-.SM
-.BR REPLY .
-The return code is zero, unless end-of-file is encountered, \fBread\fP
-times out, or an invalid file descriptor is supplied as the argument to
-\fB\-u\fP.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBreadonly\fP [\fB\-apf\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-.PD
-The given
-\fInames\fP are marked readonly; the values of these
-.I names
-may not be changed by subsequent assignment.
-If the
-.B \-f
-option is supplied, the functions corresponding to the
-\fInames\fP are so
-marked.
-The
-.B \-a
-option restricts the variables to arrays.
-If no
-.I name
-arguments are given, or if the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, a list of all readonly names is printed.
-The
-.B \-p
-option causes output to be displayed in a format that
-may be reused as input.
-The return status is 0 unless an invalid option is encountered,
-one of the
-.I names
-is not a valid shell variable name, or
-.B \-f
-is supplied with a
-.I name
-that is not a function.
-.TP
-\fBreturn\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Causes a function to exit with the return value specified by
-.IR n .
-If
-.I n
-is omitted, the return status is that of the last command
-executed in the function body. If used outside a function,
-but during execution of a script by the
-.B .
-(\fBsource\fP) command, it causes the shell to stop executing
-that script and return either
-.I n
-or the exit status of the last command executed within the
-script as the exit status of the script. If used outside a
-function and not during execution of a script by \fB.\fP\^,
-the return status is false.
-.TP
-\fBset\fP [\fB\-\-abefhkmnptuvxBCHP\fP] [\fB\-o\fP \fIoption\fP] [\fIarg\fP ...]
-Without options, the name and value of each shell variable are displayed
-in a format that can be reused as input.
-The output is sorted according to the current locale.
-When options are specified, they set or unset shell attributes.
-Any arguments remaining after the options are processed are treated
-as values for the positional parameters and are assigned, in order, to
-.BR $1 ,
-.BR $2 ,
-.B ...
-.BR $\fIn\fP .
-Options, if specified, have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP 8
-.B \-a
-Automatically mark variables and functions which are modified or created
-for export to the environment of subsequent commands.
-.TP 8
-.B \-b
-Report the status of terminated background jobs
-immediately, rather than before the next primary prompt. This is
-effective only when job control is enabled.
-.TP 8
-.B \-e
-Exit immediately if a \fIsimple command\fP (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-above) exits with a non-zero status. The shell does not exit if the
-command that fails is part of an
-.I until
-or
-.I while
-loop,
-part of an
-.I if
-statement, part of a
-.B &&
-or
-.B \(bv\(bv
-list, or if the command's return value is
-being inverted via
-.BR ! .
-A trap on \fBERR\fP, if set, is executed before the shell exits.
-.TP 8
-.B \-f
-Disable pathname expansion.
-.TP 8
-.B \-h
-Remember the location of commands as they are looked up for execution.
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B \-k
-All arguments in the form of assignment statements
-are placed in the environment for a command, not just
-those that precede the command name.
-.TP 8
-.B \-m
-Monitor mode. Job control is enabled. This option is on
-by default for interactive shells on systems that support
-it (see
-.SM
-.B JOB CONTROL
-above). Background processes run in a separate process
-group and a line containing their exit status is printed
-upon their completion.
-.TP 8
-.B \-n
-Read commands but do not execute them. This may be used to
-check a shell script for syntax errors. This is ignored by
-interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B \-o \fIoption\-name\fP
-The \fIoption\-name\fP can be one of the following:
-.RS
-.TP 8
-.B allexport
-Same as
-.BR \-a .
-.TP 8
-.B braceexpand
-Same as
-.BR \-B .
-.TP 8
-.B emacs
-Use an emacs-style command line editing interface. This is enabled
-by default when the shell is interactive, unless the shell is started
-with the
-.B \-\-noediting
-option.
-.TP 8
-.B errexit
-Same as
-.BR \-e .
-.TP 8
-.B hashall
-Same as
-.BR \-h .
-.TP 8
-.B histexpand
-Same as
-.BR \-H .
-.TP 8
-.B history
-Enable command history, as described above under
-.SM
-.BR HISTORY .
-This option is on by default in interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B ignoreeof
-The effect is as if the shell command
-.if t \f(CWIGNOREEOF=10\fP
-.if n ``IGNOREEOF=10''
-had been executed
-(see
-.B Shell Variables
-above).
-.TP 8
-.B keyword
-Same as
-.BR \-k .
-.TP 8
-.B monitor
-Same as
-.BR \-m .
-.TP 8
-.B noclobber
-Same as
-.BR \-C .
-.TP 8
-.B noexec
-Same as
-.BR \-n .
-.TP 8
-.B noglob
-Same as
-.BR \-f .
-.B nolog
-Currently ignored.
-.TP 8
-.B notify
-Same as
-.BR \-b .
-.TP 8
-.B nounset
-Same as
-.BR \-u .
-.TP 8
-.B onecmd
-Same as
-.BR \-t .
-.TP 8
-.B physical
-Same as
-.BR \-P .
-.TP 8
-.B posix
-Change the behavior of
-.B bash
-where the default operation differs
-from the POSIX 1003.2 standard to match the standard (\fIposix mode\fP).
-.TP 8
-.B privileged
-Same as
-.BR \-p .
-.TP 8
-.B verbose
-Same as
-.BR \-v .
-.TP 8
-.B vi
-Use a vi-style command line editing interface.
-.TP 8
-.B xtrace
-Same as
-.BR \-x .
-.sp .5
-.PP
-If
-.B \-o
-is supplied with no \fIoption\-name\fP, the values of the current options are
-printed.
-If
-.B +o
-is supplied with no \fIoption\-name\fP, a series of
-.B set
-commands to recreate the current option settings is displayed on
-the standard output.
-.RE
-.TP 8
-.B \-p
-Turn on
-.I privileged
-mode. In this mode, the
-.SM
-.B $ENV
-and
-.SM
-.B $BASH_ENV
-files are not processed, shell functions are not inherited from the
-environment, and the
-.SM
-.B SHELLOPTS
-variable, if it appears in the environment, is ignored.
-If the shell is started with the effective user (group) id not equal to the
-real user (group) id, and the \fB\-p\fP option is not supplied, these actions
-are taken and the effective user id is set to the real user id.
-If the \fB\-p\fP option is supplied at startup, the effective user id is
-not reset.
-Turning this option off causes the effective user
-and group ids to be set to the real user and group ids.
-.TP 8
-.B \-t
-Exit after reading and executing one command.
-.TP 8
-.B \-u
-Treat unset variables as an error when performing
-parameter expansion. If expansion is attempted on an
-unset variable, the shell prints an error message, and,
-if not interactive, exits with a non-zero status.
-.TP 8
-.B \-v
-Print shell input lines as they are read.
-.TP 8
-.B \-x
-After expanding each \fIsimple command\fP,
-display the expanded value of
-.SM
-.BR PS4 ,
-followed by the command and its expanded arguments.
-.TP 8
-.B \-B
-The shell performs brace expansion (see
-.B Brace Expansion
-above). This is on by default.
-.TP 8
-.B \-C
-If set,
-.B bash
-does not overwrite an existing file with the
-.BR > ,
-.BR >& ,
-and
-.B <>
-redirection operators. This may be overridden when
-creating output files by using the redirection operator
-.B >|
-instead of
-.BR > .
-.TP 8
-.B \-H
-Enable
-.B !
-style history substitution. This option is on by
-default when the shell is interactive.
-.TP 8
-.B \-P
-If set, the shell does not follow symbolic links when executing
-commands such as
-.B cd
-that change the current working directory. It uses the
-physical directory structure instead. By default,
-.B bash
-follows the logical chain of directories when performing commands
-which change the current directory.
-.TP 8
-.B \-\-
-If no arguments follow this option, then the positional parameters are
-unset. Otherwise, the positional parameters are set to the
-\fIarg\fPs, even if some of them begin with a
-.BR \- .
-.TP 8
-.B \-
-Signal the end of options, cause all remaining \fIarg\fPs to be
-assigned to the positional parameters. The
-.B \-x
-and
-.B \-v
-options are turned off.
-If there are no \fIarg\fPs,
-the positional parameters remain unchanged.
-.PD
-.PP
-The options are off by default unless otherwise noted.
-Using + rather than \- causes these options to be turned off.
-The options can also be specified as arguments to an invocation of
-the shell.
-The current set of options may be found in
-.BR $\- .
-The return status is always true unless an invalid option is encountered.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBshift\fP [\fIn\fP]
-The positional parameters from \fIn\fP+1 ... are renamed to
-.B $1
-.B ....
-Parameters represented by the numbers \fB$#\fP
-down to \fB$#\fP\-\fIn\fP+1 are unset.
-.I n
-must be a non-negative number less than or equal to \fB$#\fP.
-If
-.I n
-is 0, no parameters are changed.
-If
-.I n
-is not given, it is assumed to be 1.
-If
-.I n
-is greater than \fB$#\fP, the positional parameters are not changed.
-The return status is greater than zero if
-.I n
-is greater than
-.B $#
-or less than zero; otherwise 0.
-.TP
-\fBshopt\fP [\fB\-pqsu\fP] [\fB\-o\fP] [\fIoptname\fP ...]
-Toggle the values of variables controlling optional shell behavior.
-With no options, or with the
-.B \-p
-option, a list of all settable options is displayed, with
-an indication of whether or not each is set.
-The \fB\-p\fP option causes output to be displayed in a form that
-may be reused as input.
-Other options have the following meanings:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Enable (set) each \fIoptname\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Disable (unset) each \fIoptname\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Suppresses normal output (quiet mode); the return status indicates
-whether the \fIoptname\fP is set or unset.
-If multiple \fIoptname\fP arguments are given with
-.BR \-q ,
-the return status is zero if all \fIoptnames\fP are enabled; non-zero
-otherwise.
-.TP
-.B \-o
-Restricts the values of \fIoptname\fP to be those defined for the
-.B \-o
-option to the
-.B set
-builtin.
-.PD
-.PP
-If either
-.B \-s
-or
-.B \-u
-is used with no \fIoptname\fP arguments, the display is limited to
-those options which are set or unset, respectively.
-Unless otherwise noted, the \fBshopt\fP options are disabled (unset)
-by default.
-.PP
-The return status when listing options is zero if all \fIoptnames\fP
-are enabled, non-zero otherwise. When setting or unsetting options,
-the return status is zero unless an \fIoptname\fP is not a valid shell
-option.
-.PP
-The list of \fBshopt\fP options is:
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp 1v
-.PD 0
-.TP 8
-.B cdable_vars
-If set, an argument to the
-.B cd
-builtin command that
-is not a directory is assumed to be the name of a variable whose
-value is the directory to change to.
-.TP 8
-.B cdspell
-If set, minor errors in the spelling of a directory component in a
-.B cd
-command will be corrected.
-The errors checked for are transposed characters,
-a missing character, and one character too many.
-If a correction is found, the corrected file name is printed,
-and the command proceeds.
-This option is only used by interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B checkhash
-If set, \fBbash\fP checks that a command found in the hash
-table exists before trying to execute it. If a hashed command no
-longer exists, a normal path search is performed.
-.TP 8
-.B checkwinsize
-If set, \fBbash\fP checks the window size after each command
-and, if necessary, updates the values of
-.SM
-.B LINES
-and
-.SM
-.BR COLUMNS .
-.TP 8
-.B cmdhist
-If set,
-.B bash
-attempts to save all lines of a multiple-line
-command in the same history entry. This allows
-easy re-editing of multi-line commands.
-.TP 8
-.B dotglob
-If set,
-.B bash
-includes filenames beginning with a `.' in the results of pathname
-expansion.
-.TP 8
-.B execfail
-If set, a non-interactive shell will not exit if
-it cannot execute the file specified as an argument to the
-.B exec
-builtin command. An interactive shell does not exit if
-.B exec
-fails.
-.TP 8
-.B expand_aliases
-If set, aliases are expanded as described above under
-.SM
-.BR ALIASES .
-This option is enabled by default for interactive shells.
-.TP 8
-.B extglob
-If set, the extended pattern matching features described above under
-\fBPathname Expansion\fP are enabled.
-.TP 8
-.B histappend
-If set, the history list is appended to the file named by the value
-of the
-.B HISTFILE
-variable when the shell exits, rather than overwriting the file.
-.TP 8
-.B histreedit
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used, a user is given the opportunity to re-edit a
-failed history substitution.
-.TP 8
-.B histverify
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used, the results of history substitution are not immediately
-passed to the shell parser. Instead, the resulting line is loaded into
-the \fBreadline\fP editing buffer, allowing further modification.
-.TP 8
-.B hostcomplete
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used, \fBbash\fP will attempt to perform hostname completion when a
-word containing a \fB@\fP is being completed (see
-.B Completing
-under
-.SM
-.B READLINE
-above).
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B huponexit
-If set, \fBbash\fP will send
-.SM
-.B SIGHUP
-to all jobs when an interactive login shell exits.
-.TP 8
-.B interactive_comments
-If set, allow a word beginning with
-.B #
-to cause that word and all remaining characters on that
-line to be ignored in an interactive shell (see
-.SM
-.B COMMENTS
-above). This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B lithist
-If set, and the
-.B cmdhist
-option is enabled, multi-line commands are saved to the history with
-embedded newlines rather than using semicolon separators where possible.
-.TP 8
-.B login_shell
-The shell sets this option if it is started as a login shell (see
-.SM
-.B "INVOCATION"
-above).
-The value may not be changed.
-.TP 8
-.B mailwarn
-If set, and a file that \fBbash\fP is checking for mail has been
-accessed since the last time it was checked, the message ``The mail in
-\fImailfile\fP has been read'' is displayed.
-.TP 8
-.B no_empty_cmd_completion
-If set, and
-.B readline
-is being used,
-.B bash
-will not attempt to search the \fBPATH\fP for possible completions when
-completion is attempted on an empty line.
-.TP 8
-.B nocaseglob
-If set,
-.B bash
-matches filenames in a case\-insensitive fashion when performing pathname
-expansion (see
-.B Pathname Expansion
-above).
-.TP 8
-.B nullglob
-If set,
-.B bash
-allows patterns which match no
-files (see
-.B Pathname Expansion
-above)
-to expand to a null string, rather than themselves.
-.TP 8
-.B progcomp
-If set, the programmable completion facilities (see
-\fBProgrammable Completion\fP above) are enabled.
-This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B promptvars
-If set, prompt strings undergo variable and parameter expansion after
-being expanded as described in
-.SM
-.B PROMPTING
-above. This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B restricted_shell
-The shell sets this option if it is started in restricted mode (see
-.SM
-.B "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-below).
-The value may not be changed.
-This is not reset when the startup files are executed, allowing
-the startup files to discover whether or not a shell is restricted.
-.TP 8
-.B shift_verbose
-If set, the
-.B shift
-builtin prints an error message when the shift count exceeds the
-number of positional parameters.
-.TP 8
-.B sourcepath
-If set, the
-\fBsource\fP (\fB.\fP) builtin uses the value of
-.SM
-.B PATH
-to find the directory containing the file supplied as an argument.
-This option is enabled by default.
-.TP 8
-.B xpg_echo
-If set, the \fBecho\fP builtin expands backslash-escape sequences
-by default.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBsuspend\fP [\fB\-f\fP]
-Suspend the execution of this shell until it receives a
-.SM
-.B SIGCONT
-signal. The
-.B \-f
-option says not to complain if this is
-a login shell; just suspend anyway. The return status is 0 unless
-the shell is a login shell and
-.B \-f
-is not supplied, or if job control is not enabled.
-.TP
-\fBtest\fP \fIexpr\fP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB[\fP \fIexpr\fP \fB]\fP
-Return a status of 0 or 1 depending on
-the evaluation of the conditional expression
-.IR expr .
-Each operator and operand must be a separate argument.
-Expressions are composed of the primaries described above under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" .
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-Expressions may be combined using the following operators, listed
-in decreasing order of precedence.
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B ! \fIexpr\fP
-True if
-.I expr
-is false.
-.TP
-.B ( \fIexpr\fP )
-Returns the value of \fIexpr\fP.
-This may be used to override the normal precedence of operators.
-.TP
-\fIexpr1\fP \-\fBa\fP \fIexpr2\fP
-True if both
-.I expr1
-and
-.I expr2
-are true.
-.TP
-\fIexpr1\fP \-\fBo\fP \fIexpr2\fP
-True if either
-.I expr1
-or
-.I expr2
-is true.
-.PD
-.PP
-\fBtest\fP and \fB[\fP evaluate conditional
-expressions using a set of rules based on the number of arguments.
-.if t .sp 0.5
-.if n .sp 1
-.PD 0
-.TP
-0 arguments
-The expression is false.
-.TP
-1 argument
-The expression is true if and only if the argument is not null.
-.TP
-2 arguments
-If the first argument is \fB!\fP, the expression is true if and
-only if the second argument is null.
-If the first argument is one of the unary conditional operators listed above
-under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" ,
-the expression is true if the unary test is true.
-If the first argument is not a valid unary conditional operator, the expression
-is false.
-.TP
-3 arguments
-If the second argument is one of the binary conditional operators listed above
-under
-.SM
-.BR "CONDITIONAL EXPRESSIONS" ,
-the result of the expression is the result of the binary test using
-the first and third arguments as operands.
-If the first argument is \fB!\fP, the value is the negation of
-the two-argument test using the second and third arguments.
-If the first argument is exactly \fB(\fP and the third argument is
-exactly \fB)\fP, the result is the one-argument test of the second
-argument.
-Otherwise, the expression is false.
-The \fB\-a\fP and \fB\-o\fP operators are considered binary operators
-in this case.
-.TP
-4 arguments
-If the first argument is \fB!\fP, the result is the negation of
-the three-argument expression composed of the remaining arguments.
-Otherwise, the expression is parsed and evaluated according to
-precedence using the rules listed above.
-.TP
-5 or more arguments
-The expression is parsed and evaluated according to precedence
-using the rules listed above.
-.RE
-.PD
-.TP
-.B times
-Print the accumulated user and system times for the shell and
-for processes run from the shell. The return status is 0.
-.TP
-\fBtrap\fP [\fB\-lp\fP] [\fIarg\fP] [\fIsigspec\fP ...]
-The command
-.I arg
-is to be read and executed when the shell receives
-signal(s)
-.IR sigspec .
-If
-.I arg
-is absent or
-.BR \- ,
-all specified signals are
-reset to their original values (the values they had
-upon entrance to the shell).
-If
-.I arg
-is the null string the signal specified by each
-.I sigspec
-is ignored by the shell and by the commands it invokes.
-If
-.I arg
-is not present and
-.B \-p
-has been supplied, then the trap commands associated with each
-.I sigspec
-are displayed.
-If no arguments are supplied or if only
-.B \-p
-is given,
-.B trap
-prints the list of commands associated with each signal number.
-Each
-.I sigspec
-is either
-a signal name defined in <\fIsignal.h\fP>, or a signal number.
-If a
-.I sigspec
-is
-.SM
-.B EXIT
-(0) the command
-.I arg
-is executed on exit from the shell.
-If a
-.I sigspec
-is
-.SM
-.BR DEBUG ,
-the command
-.I arg
-is executed after every \fIsimple command\fP (see
-.SM
-.B SHELL GRAMMAR
-above).
-If a
-.I sigspec
-is
-.SM
-.BR ERR ,
-the command
-.I arg
-is executed whenever a simple command has a non\-zero exit status.
-The
-.SM
-.BR ERR
-trap is not executed if the failed command is part of an
-.I until
-or
-.I while
-loop,
-part of an
-.I if
-statement, part of a
-.B &&
-or
-.B \(bv\(bv
-list, or if the command's return value is
-being inverted via
-.BR ! .
-The
-.B \-l
-option causes the shell to print a list of signal names and
-their corresponding numbers.
-Signals ignored upon entry to the shell cannot be trapped or reset.
-Trapped signals are reset to their original values in a child
-process when it is created.
-The return status is false if any
-.I sigspec
-is invalid; otherwise
-.B trap
-returns true.
-.TP
-\fBtype\fP [\fB\-aftpP\fP] \fIname\fP [\fIname\fP ...]
-With no options,
-indicate how each
-.I name
-would be interpreted if used as a command name.
-If the
-.B \-t
-option is used,
-.B type
-prints a string which is one of
-.IR alias ,
-.IR keyword ,
-.IR function ,
-.IR builtin ,
-or
-.I file
-if
-.I name
-is an alias, shell reserved word, function, builtin, or disk file,
-respectively.
-If the
-.I name
-is not found, then nothing is printed, and an exit status of false
-is returned.
-If the
-.B \-p
-option is used,
-.B type
-either returns the name of the disk file
-that would be executed if
-.I name
-were specified as a command name,
-or nothing if
-.if t \f(CWtype -t name\fP
-.if n ``type -t name''
-would not return
-.IR file .
-The
-.B \-P
-option forces a
-.SM
-.B PATH
-search for each \fIname\fP, even if
-.if t \f(CWtype -t name\fP
-.if n ``type -t name''
-would not return
-.IR file .
-If a command is hashed,
-.B \-p
-and
-.B \-P
-print the hashed value, not necessarily the file that appears
-first in
-.SM
-.BR PATH .
-If the
-.B \-a
-option is used,
-.B type
-prints all of the places that contain
-an executable named
-.IR name .
-This includes aliases and functions,
-if and only if the
-.B \-p
-option is not also used.
-The table of hashed commands is not consulted
-when using
-.BR \-a .
-The
-.B \-f
-option suppresses shell function lookup, as with the \fBcommand\fP builtin.
-.B type
-returns true if any of the arguments are found, false if
-none are found.
-.TP
-\fBulimit\fP [\fB\-SHacdflmnpstuv\fP [\fIlimit\fP]]
-Provides control over the resources available to the shell and to
-processes started by it, on systems that allow such control.
-The \fB\-H\fP and \fB\-S\fP options specify that the hard or soft limit is
-set for the given resource. A hard limit cannot be increased once it
-is set; a soft limit may be increased up to the value of the hard limit.
-If neither \fB\-H\fP nor \fB\-S\fP is specified, both the soft and hard
-limits are set.
-The value of
-.I limit
-can be a number in the unit specified for the resource
-or one of the special values
-.BR hard ,
-.BR soft ,
-or
-.BR unlimited ,
-which stand for the current hard limit, the current soft limit, and
-no limit, respectively.
-If
-.I limit
-is omitted, the current value of the soft limit of the resource is
-printed, unless the \fB\-H\fP option is given. When more than one
-resource is specified, the limit name and unit are printed before the value.
-Other options are interpreted as follows:
-.RS
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.B \-a
-All current limits are reported
-.TP
-.B \-c
-The maximum size of core files created
-.TP
-.B \-d
-The maximum size of a process's data segment
-.TP
-.B \-f
-The maximum size of files created by the shell
-.TP
-.B \-l
-The maximum size that may be locked into memory
-.TP
-.B \-m
-The maximum resident set size
-.TP
-.B \-n
-The maximum number of open file descriptors (most systems do not
-allow this value to be set)
-.TP
-.B \-p
-The pipe size in 512-byte blocks (this may not be set)
-.TP
-.B \-s
-The maximum stack size
-.TP
-.B \-t
-The maximum amount of cpu time in seconds
-.TP
-.B \-u
-The maximum number of processes available to a single user
-.TP
-.B \-v
-The maximum amount of virtual memory available to the shell
-.PD
-.PP
-If
-.I limit
-is given, it is the new value of the specified resource (the
-.B \-a
-option is display only).
-If no option is given, then
-.B \-f
-is assumed. Values are in 1024-byte increments, except for
-.BR \-t ,
-which is in seconds,
-.BR \-p ,
-which is in units of 512-byte blocks,
-and
-.B \-n
-and
-.BR \-u ,
-which are unscaled values.
-The return status is 0 unless an invalid option or argument is supplied,
-or an error occurs while setting a new limit.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBumask\fP [\fB\-p\fP] [\fB\-S\fP] [\fImode\fP]
-The user file-creation mask is set to
-.IR mode .
-If
-.I mode
-begins with a digit, it
-is interpreted as an octal number; otherwise
-it is interpreted as a symbolic mode mask similar
-to that accepted by
-.IR chmod (1).
-If
-.I mode
-is omitted, the current value of the mask is printed.
-The
-.B \-S
-option causes the mask to be printed in symbolic form; the
-default output is an octal number.
-If the
-.B \-p
-option is supplied, and
-.I mode
-is omitted, the output is in a form that may be reused as input.
-The return status is 0 if the mode was successfully changed or if
-no \fImode\fP argument was supplied, and false otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBunalias\fP [\-\fBa\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-Remove each \fIname\fP from the list of defined aliases. If
-.B \-a
-is supplied, all alias definitions are removed. The return
-value is true unless a supplied
-.I name
-is not a defined alias.
-.TP
-\fBunset\fP [\-\fBfv\fP] [\fIname\fP ...]
-For each
-.IR name ,
-remove the corresponding variable or function.
-If no options are supplied, or the
-.B \-v
-option is given, each
-.I name
-refers to a shell variable.
-Read-only variables may not be unset.
-If
-.B \-f
-is specifed,
-each
-.I name
-refers to a shell function, and the function definition
-is removed.
-Each unset variable or function is removed from the environment
-passed to subsequent commands.
-If any of
-.SM
-.BR RANDOM ,
-.SM
-.BR SECONDS ,
-.SM
-.BR LINENO ,
-.SM
-.BR HISTCMD ,
-.SM
-.BR FUNCNAME ,
-.SM
-.BR GROUPS ,
-or
-.SM
-.B DIRSTACK
-are unset, they lose their special properties, even if they are
-subsequently reset. The exit status is true unless a
-.I name
-does not exist or is readonly.
-.TP
-\fBwait\fP [\fIn\fP]
-Wait for the specified process and return its termination
-status.
-.I n
-may be a process
-ID or a job specification; if a job spec is given, all processes
-in that job's pipeline are waited for. If
-.I n
-is not given, all currently active child processes
-are waited for, and the return status is zero. If
-.I n
-specifies a non-existent process or job, the return status is
-127. Otherwise, the return status is the exit status of the last
-process or job waited for.
-.\" bash_builtins
-.if \n(zZ=1 .ig zZ
-.SH "RESTRICTED SHELL"
-.\" rbash.1
-.zY
-.PP
-If
-.B bash
-is started with the name
-.BR rbash ,
-or the
-.B \-r
-option is supplied at invocation,
-the shell becomes restricted.
-A restricted shell is used to
-set up an environment more controlled than the standard shell.
-It behaves identically to
-.B bash
-with the exception that the following are disallowed or not performed:
-.IP \(bu
-changing directories with \fBcd\fP
-.IP \(bu
-setting or unsetting the values of
-.BR SHELL ,
-.BR PATH ,
-.BR ENV ,
-or
-.B BASH_ENV
-.IP \(bu
-specifying command names containing
-.B /
-.IP \(bu
-specifying a file name containing a
-.B /
-as an argument to the
-.B .
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-Specifying a filename containing a slash as an argument to the
-.B \-p
-option to the
-.B hash
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-importing function definitions from the shell environment at startup
-.IP \(bu
-parsing the value of \fBSHELLOPTS\fP from the shell environment at startup
-.IP \(bu
-redirecting output using the >, >|, <>, >&, &>, and >> redirection operators
-.IP \(bu
-using the
-.B exec
-builtin command to replace the shell with another command
-.IP \(bu
-adding or deleting builtin commands with the
-.B \-f
-and
-.B \-d
-options to the
-.B enable
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-Using the \fBenable\fP builtin command to enable disabled shell builtins
-.IP \(bu
-specifying the
-.B \-p
-option to the
-.B command
-builtin command
-.IP \(bu
-turning off restricted mode with
-\fBset +r\fP or \fBset +o restricted\fP.
-.PP
-These restrictions are enforced after any startup files are read.
-.PP
-When a command that is found to be a shell script is executed (see
-.SM
-.B "COMMAND EXECUTION"
-above),
-.B rbash
-turns off any restrictions in the shell spawned to execute the
-script.
-.\" end of rbash.1
-.if \n(zY=1 .ig zY
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fIBash Reference Manual\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
-.TP
-\fIThe Gnu Readline Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
-.TP
-\fIThe Gnu History Library\fP, Brian Fox and Chet Ramey
-.TP
-\fIPortable Operating System Interface (POSIX) Part 2: Shell and Utilities\fP, IEEE
-.TP
-\fIsh\fP(1), \fIksh\fP(1), \fIcsh\fP(1)
-.TP
-\fIemacs\fP(1), \fIvi\fP(1)
-.TP
-\fIreadline\fP(3)
-.PD
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.FN /bin/bash
-The \fBbash\fP executable
-.TP
-.FN /etc/profile
-The systemwide initialization file, executed for login shells
-.TP
-.FN ~/.bash_profile
-The personal initialization file, executed for login shells
-.TP
-.FN ~/.bashrc
-The individual per-interactive-shell startup file
-.TP
-.FN ~/.bash_logout
-The individual login shell cleanup file, executed when a login shell exits
-.TP
-.FN ~/.inputrc
-Individual \fIreadline\fP initialization file
-.PD
-.SH AUTHORS
-Brian Fox, Free Software Foundation
-.br
-bfox at gnu.org
-.PP
-Chet Ramey, Case Western Reserve University
-.br
-chet at ins.CWRU.Edu
-.SH BUG REPORTS
-If you find a bug in
-.B bash,
-you should report it. But first, you should
-make sure that it really is a bug, and that it appears in the latest
-version of
-.B bash
-that you have.
-.PP
-Once you have determined that a bug actually exists, use the
-.I bashbug
-command to submit a bug report.
-If you have a fix, you are encouraged to mail that as well!
-Suggestions and `philosophical' bug reports may be mailed
-to \fIbug-bash at gnu.org\fP or posted to the Usenet
-newsgroup
-.BR gnu.bash.bug .
-.PP
-ALL bug reports should include:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-The version number of \fBbash\fR
-.TP
-The hardware and operating system
-.TP
-The compiler used to compile
-.TP
-A description of the bug behaviour
-.TP
-A short script or `recipe' which exercises the bug
-.PD
-.PP
-.I bashbug
-inserts the first three items automatically into the template
-it provides for filing a bug report.
-.PP
-Comments and bug reports concerning
-this manual page should be directed to
-.IR chet at ins.CWRU.Edu .
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-It's too big and too slow.
-.PP
-There are some subtle differences between
-.B bash
-and traditional versions of
-.BR sh ,
-mostly because of the
-.SM
-.B POSIX
-specification.
-.PP
-Aliases are confusing in some uses.
-.PP
-Shell builtin commands and functions are not stoppable/restartable.
-.PP
-Compound commands and command sequences of the form `a ; b ; c'
-are not handled gracefully when process suspension is attempted.
-When a process is stopped, the shell immediately executes the next
-command in the sequence.
-It suffices to place the sequence of commands between
-parentheses to force it into a subshell, which may be stopped as
-a unit.
-.PP
-Commands inside of \fB$(\fP...\fB)\fP command substitution are not
-parsed until substitution is attempted. This will delay error
-reporting until some time after the command is entered.
-.PP
-Array variables may not (yet) be exported.
-.zZ
-.zY
diff --git a/raw/man1/shift.1 b/raw/man1/shift.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/shift.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/shopt.1 b/raw/man1/shopt.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/shopt.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/showkey.1 b/raw/man1/showkey.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c0f091..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/showkey.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)showkey.1 1.1 980201 aeb
-.TH SHOWKEY 1 "1 Feb 1998"
-.SH NAME
-showkey \- examine the codes sent by the keyboard
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-showkey [-h|--help] [-a|--ascii] [-s|--scancodes] [-k|--keycodes]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "showkey command" "" "\fLshowkey\fR command"
-.LP
-.B showkey
-prints to standard output either the scan codes or the keycode
-or the `ascii' code of each key pressed.
-In the first two modes the program runs until 10 seconds have elapsed
-since the last key press or release event, or until it receives
-a suitable signal, like SIGTERM, from another process.
-In `ascii' mode the program terminates when the user types ^D.
-.LP
-When in scancode dump mode,
-.B showkey
-prints in hexadecimal format each byte received from the keyboard to the
-standard output. A new line is printed when an interval of about 0.1
-seconds occurs between the bytes received, or when the internal receive
-buffer fills up. This can be used to determine roughly, what byte
-sequences the keyboard sends at once on a given key press. The scan code
-dumping mode is primarily intended for debugging the keyboard driver or
-other low level interfaces. As such it shouldn't be of much interest to
-the regular end-user. However, some modern keyboards have keys or buttons
-that produce scancodes to which the kernel does not associate a keycode,
-and, after finding out what these are, the user can assign keycodes with
-.BR setkeycodes (8).
-.LP
-When in the default keycode dump mode,
-.B showkey
-prints to the standard output the keycode number or each key pressed or
-released. The kind of the event, press or release, is also reported.
-Keycodes are numbers assigned by the kernel to each individual physical
-key. Every key has always only one associated keycode number, whether
-the keyboard sends single or multiple scan codes when pressing it. Using
-.B showkey
-in this mode, you can find out what numbers to use in your personalized
-keymap files.
-.LP
-When in `ascii' dump mode,
-.B showkey
-prints to the standard output the decimal, octal, and hexadecimal
-value(s) of the key pressed, according to he present keymap.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-\-h \-\-help
-.B showkey
-prints to the standard error output its version number, a compile
-option and a short usage message, then exits.
-.TP
-\-s \-\-scancodes
-Starts
-.B showkey
-in scan code dump mode.
-.TP
-\-k \-\-keycodes
-Starts
-.B showkey
-in keycode dump mode. This is the default, when no command line options
-are present.
-.TP
-\-a \-\-ascii
-Starts
-.B showkey
-in `ascii' dump mode.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR loadkeys (1),
-.BR dumpkeys (1),
-.BR keymaps (5),
-.BR setkeycodes (8)
diff --git a/raw/man1/size.1 b/raw/man1/size.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7447236..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/size.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,250 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "SIZE 1"
-.TH SIZE 1 "2003-11-24" "binutils-2.14.90.0.6" "GNU Development Tools"
-.SH "NAME"
-size \- list section sizes and total size.
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-size [\fB\-A\fR|\fB\-B\fR|\fB\-\-format=\fR\fIcompatibility\fR]
- [\fB\-\-help\fR]
- [\fB\-d\fR|\fB\-o\fR|\fB\-x\fR|\fB\-\-radix=\fR\fInumber\fR]
- [\fB\-t\fR|\fB\-\-totals\fR]
- [\fB\-\-target=\fR\fIbfdname\fR] [\fB\-V\fR|\fB\-\-version\fR]
- [\fIobjfile\fR...]
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-The \s-1GNU\s0 \fBsize\fR utility lists the section sizes\-\-\-and the total
-size\-\-\-for each of the object or archive files \fIobjfile\fR in its
-argument list. By default, one line of output is generated for each
-object file or each module in an archive.
-.PP
-\&\fIobjfile\fR... are the object files to be examined.
-If none are specified, the file \f(CW\*(C`a.out\*(C'\fR will be used.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.IX Header "OPTIONS"
-The command line options have the following meanings:
-.IP "\fB\-A\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-A"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-B\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-B"
-.IP "\fB\-\-format=\fR\fIcompatibility\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--format=compatibility"
-.PD
-Using one of these options, you can choose whether the output from \s-1GNU\s0
-\&\fBsize\fR resembles output from System V \fBsize\fR (using \fB\-A\fR,
-or \fB\-\-format=sysv\fR), or Berkeley \fBsize\fR (using \fB\-B\fR, or
-\&\fB\-\-format=berkeley\fR). The default is the one-line format similar to
-Berkeley's.
-.Sp
-Here is an example of the Berkeley (default) format of output from
-\&\fBsize\fR:
-.Sp
-.Vb 4
-\& $ size --format=Berkeley ranlib size
-\& text data bss dec hex filename
-\& 294880 81920 11592 388392 5ed28 ranlib
-\& 294880 81920 11888 388688 5ee50 size
-.Ve
-.Sp
-This is the same data, but displayed closer to System V conventions:
-.Sp
-.Vb 7
-\& $ size --format=SysV ranlib size
-\& ranlib :
-\& section size addr
-\& .text 294880 8192
-\& .data 81920 303104
-\& .bss 11592 385024
-\& Total 388392
-.Ve
-.Sp
-.Vb 6
-\& size :
-\& section size addr
-\& .text 294880 8192
-\& .data 81920 303104
-\& .bss 11888 385024
-\& Total 388688
-.Ve
-.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--help"
-Show a summary of acceptable arguments and options.
-.IP "\fB\-d\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-d"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-o\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-o"
-.IP "\fB\-x\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-x"
-.IP "\fB\-\-radix=\fR\fInumber\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--radix=number"
-.PD
-Using one of these options, you can control whether the size of each
-section is given in decimal (\fB\-d\fR, or \fB\-\-radix=10\fR); octal
-(\fB\-o\fR, or \fB\-\-radix=8\fR); or hexadecimal (\fB\-x\fR, or
-\&\fB\-\-radix=16\fR). In \fB\-\-radix=\fR\fInumber\fR, only the three
-values (8, 10, 16) are supported. The total size is always given in two
-radices; decimal and hexadecimal for \fB\-d\fR or \fB\-x\fR output, or
-octal and hexadecimal if you're using \fB\-o\fR.
-.IP "\fB\-t\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-t"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-totals\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--totals"
-.PD
-Show totals of all objects listed (Berkeley format listing mode only).
-.IP "\fB\-\-target=\fR\fIbfdname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--target=bfdname"
-Specify that the object-code format for \fIobjfile\fR is
-\&\fIbfdname\fR. This option may not be necessary; \fBsize\fR can
-automatically recognize many formats.
-.IP "\fB\-V\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-V"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--version"
-.PD
-Display the version number of \fBsize\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-\&\fIar\fR\|(1), \fIobjdump\fR\|(1), \fIreadelf\fR\|(1), and the Info entries for \fIbinutils\fR.
-.SH "COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
-2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
-or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
-with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
-Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
-section entitled ``\s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License''.
diff --git a/raw/man1/sleep.1 b/raw/man1/sleep.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b3f192c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/sleep.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH SLEEP "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-sleep \- delay for a specified amount of time
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B sleep
-\fINUMBER\fR[\fISUFFIX\fR]...
-.br
-.B sleep
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Pause for NUMBER seconds. SUFFIX may be `s' for seconds (the default),
-`m' for minutes, `h' for hours or `d' for days. Unlike most implementations
-that require NUMBER be an integer, here NUMBER may be an arbitrary floating
-point number.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Jim Meyering and Paul Eggert.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B sleep
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B sleep
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info sleep
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/smbclient.1 b/raw/man1/smbclient.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e14a277..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/smbclient.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,637 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBCLIENT" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbclient \- ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources on servers
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbclient\fR {servicename} [password] [-b <buffer size>] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory]
- [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M <netbios name>] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L <netbios name>] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c <command string>] [-i scope] [-O <socket options>] [-p port] [-R <name resolve order>] [-s <smb config file>] [-T<c|x>IXFqgbNan] [-k]
-
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbclient\fR is a client that can 'talk' to an SMB/CIFS server\&. It offers an interface similar to that of the ftp program (see \fBftp\fR(1))\&. Operations include things like getting files from the server to the local machine, putting files from the local machine to the server, retrieving directory information from the server and so on\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
-servicename
-servicename is the name of the service you want to use on the server\&. A service name takes the form \fI//server/service\fR where \fIserver \fR is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS server offering the desired service and \fIservice\fR is the name of the service offered\&. Thus to connect to the service "printer" on the SMB/CIFS server "smbserver", you would use the servicename \fI//smbserver/printer \fR
-
-
-Note that the server name required is NOT necessarily the IP (DNS) host name of the server ! The name required is a NetBIOS server name, which may or may not be the same as the IP hostname of the machine running the server\&.
-
-
-The server name is looked up according to either the \fI-R\fR parameter to \fBsmbclient\fR or using the name resolve order parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file, allowing an administrator to change the order and methods by which server names are looked up\&.
-
-
-.TP
-password
-The password required to access the specified service on the specified server\&. If this parameter is supplied, the \fI-N\fR option (suppress password prompt) is assumed\&.
-
-
-There is no default password\&. If no password is supplied on the command line (either by using this parameter or adding a password to the \fI-U\fR option (see below)) and the \fI-N\fR option is not specified, the client will prompt for a password, even if the desired service does not require one\&. (If no password is required, simply press ENTER to provide a null password\&.)
-
-
-Note: Some servers (including OS/2 and Windows for Workgroups) insist on an uppercase password\&. Lowercase or mixed case passwords may be rejected by these servers\&.
-
-
-Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&.
-
-
-.TP
--R <name resolve order>
-This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses\&. The option takes a space-separated string of different name resolution options\&.
-
-
-The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows:
-
-
-\fBlmhosts\fR: Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the \fBlmhosts\fR(5) for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&.
-
-\fBhost\fR: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts \fR, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system dependent, for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file)\&. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored\&.
-
-\fBwins\fR: Query a name with the IP address listed in the \fIwins server\fR parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&.
-
-\fBbcast\fR: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&.
-
-If this parameter is not set then the name resolve order defined in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file parameter (name resolve order) will be used\&.
-
-
-The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast and without this parameter or any entry in the \fIname resolve order \fR parameter of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order\&.
-
-
-.TP
--M NetBIOS name
-This options allows you to send messages, using the "WinPopup" protocol, to another computer\&. Once a connection is established you then type your message, pressing ^D (control-D) to end\&.
-
-
-If the receiving computer is running WinPopup the user will receive the message and probably a beep\&. If they are not running WinPopup the message will be lost, and no error message will occur\&.
-
-
-The message is also automatically truncated if the message is over 1600 bytes, as this is the limit of the protocol\&.
-
-
-One useful trick is to cat the message through \fBsmbclient\fR\&. For example: \fB cat mymessage.txt | smbclient -M FRED \fR will send the message in the file \fImymessage\&.txt\fR to the machine FRED\&.
-
-
-You may also find the \fI-U\fR and \fI-I\fR options useful, as they allow you to control the FROM and TO parts of the message\&.
-
-
-See the \fImessage command\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) for a description of how to handle incoming WinPopup messages in Samba\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR: Copy WinPopup into the startup group on your WfWg PCs if you want them to always be able to receive messages\&.
-
-
-.TP
--p port
-This number is the TCP port number that will be used when making connections to the server\&. The standard (well-known) TCP port number for an SMB/CIFS server is 139, which is the default\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--I IP-address
-\fIIP address\fR is the address of the server to connect to\&. It should be specified in standard "a\&.b\&.c\&.d" notation\&.
-
-
-Normally the client would attempt to locate a named SMB/CIFS server by looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution mechanism described above in the \fIname resolve order\fR parameter above\&. Using this parameter will force the client to assume that the server is on the machine with the specified IP address and the NetBIOS name component of the resource being connected to will be ignored\&.
-
-
-There is no default for this parameter\&. If not supplied, it will be determined automatically by the client as described above\&.
-
-
-.TP
--E
-This parameter causes the client to write messages to the standard error stream (stderr) rather than to the standard output stream\&.
-
-
-By default, the client writes messages to standard output - typically the user's tty\&.
-
-
-.TP
--L
-This option allows you to look at what services are available on a server\&. You use it as \fBsmbclient -L host\fR and a list should appear\&. The \fI-I \fR option may be useful if your NetBIOS names don't match your TCP/IP DNS host names or if you are trying to reach a host on another network\&.
-
-
-.TP
--t terminal code
-This option tells \fBsmbclient\fR how to interpret filenames coming from the remote server\&. Usually Asian language multibyte UNIX implementations use different character sets than SMB/CIFS servers (\fBEUC\fR instead of \fB SJIS\fR for example)\&. Setting this parameter will let \fBsmbclient\fR convert between the UNIX filenames and the SMB filenames correctly\&. This option has not been seriously tested and may have some problems\&.
-
-
-The terminal codes include CWsjis, CWeuc, CWjis7, CWjis8, CWjunet, CWhex, CWcap\&. This is not a complete list, check the Samba source code for the complete list\&.
-
-
-.TP
--b buffersize
-This option changes the transmit/send buffer size when getting or putting a file from/to the server\&. The default is 65520 bytes\&. Setting this value smaller (to 1200 bytes) has been observed to speed up file transfers to and from a Win9x server\&.
-
-
-.TP
--V
-Prints the program version number\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s <configuration file>
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
-
-
-.TP
--d|--debug=debuglevel
-\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&.
-
-
-The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&.
-
-
-Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
-
-
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--l|--logfile=logbasename
-File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&.
-
-
-.TP
--N
-If specified, this parameter suppresses the normal password prompt from the client to the user\&. This is useful when accessing a service that does not require a password\&.
-
-
-Unless a password is specified on the command line or this parameter is specified, the client will request a password\&.
-
-
-.TP
--k
-Try to authenticate with kerberos\&. Only useful in an Active Directory environment\&.
-
-
-.TP
--A|--authfile=filename
-This option allows you to specify a file from which to read the username and password used in the connection\&. The format of the file is
-
-
-.nf
-
-username = <value>
-password = <value>
-domain = <value>
-.fi
-
-
-Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&.
-
-
-.TP
--U|--user=username[%password]
-Sets the SMB username or username and password\&.
-
-
-If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted\&. The client will first check the \fBUSER\fR environment variable, then the \fBLOGNAME\fR variable and if either exists, the string is uppercased\&. If these environmental variables are not found, the username \fBGUEST\fR is used\&.
-
-
-A third option is to use a credentials file which contains the plaintext of the username and password\&. This option is mainly provided for scripts where the admin does not wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment variables\&. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions on the file restrict access from unwanted users\&. See the \fI-A\fR for more details\&.
-
-
-Be cautious about including passwords in scripts\&. Also, on many systems the command line of a running process may be seen via the \fBps\fR command\&. To be safe always allow \fBrpcclient\fR to prompt for a password and type it in directly\&.
-
-
-.TP
--n <primary NetBIOS name>
-This option allows you to override the NetBIOS name that Samba uses for itself\&. This is identical to setting the \fInetbios name\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. However, a command line setting will take precedence over settings in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
--i <scope>
-This specifies a NetBIOS scope that \fBnmblookup\fR will use to communicate with when generating NetBIOS names\&. For details on the use of NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001\&.txt and rfc1002\&.txt\&. NetBIOS scopes are \fBvery\fR rarely used, only set this parameter if you are the system administrator in charge of all the NetBIOS systems you communicate with\&.
-
-
-.TP
--W|--workgroup=domain
-Set the SMB domain of the username\&. This overrides the default domain which is the domain defined in smb\&.conf\&. If the domain specified is the same as the servers NetBIOS name, it causes the client to log on using the servers local SAM (as opposed to the Domain SAM)\&.
-
-
-.TP
--O socket options
-TCP socket options to set on the client socket\&. See the socket options parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR manual page for the list of valid options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--T tar options
-smbclient may be used to create \fBtar(1) \fR compatible backups of all the files on an SMB/CIFS share\&. The secondary tar flags that can be given to this option are :
-
-
-\fIc\fR - Create a tar file on UNIX\&. Must be followed by the name of a tar file, tape device or "-" for standard output\&. If using standard output you must turn the log level to its lowest value -d0 to avoid corrupting your tar file\&. This flag is mutually exclusive with the \fIx\fR flag\&.
-
-\fIx\fR - Extract (restore) a local tar file back to a share\&. Unless the -D option is given, the tar files will be restored from the top level of the share\&. Must be followed by the name of the tar file, device or "-" for standard input\&. Mutually exclusive with the \fIc\fR flag\&. Restored files have their creation times (mtime) set to the date saved in the tar file\&. Directories currently do not get their creation dates restored properly\&.
-
-\fII\fR - Include files and directories\&. Is the default behavior when filenames are specified above\&. Causes tar files to be included in an extract or create (and therefore everything else to be excluded)\&. See example below\&. Filename globbing works in one of two ways\&. See r below\&.
-
-\fIX\fR - Exclude files and directories\&. Causes tar files to be excluded from an extract or create\&. See example below\&. Filename globbing works in one of two ways now\&. See \fIr\fR below\&.
-
-\fIb\fR - Blocksize\&. Must be followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize\&. Causes tar file to be written out in blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks\&.
-
-\fIg\fR - Incremental\&. Only back up files that have the archive bit set\&. Useful only with the \fIc\fR flag\&.
-
-\fIq\fR - Quiet\&. Keeps tar from printing diagnostics as it works\&. This is the same as tarmode quiet\&.
-
-\fIr\fR - Regular expression include or exclude\&. Uses regular expression matching for excluding or excluding files if compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H\&. However this mode can be very slow\&. If not compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H, does a limited wildcard match on '*' and '?'\&.
-
-\fIN\fR - Newer than\&. Must be followed by the name of a file whose date is compared against files found on the share during a create\&. Only files newer than the file specified are backed up to the tar file\&. Useful only with the \fIc\fR flag\&.
-
-\fIa\fR - Set archive bit\&. Causes the archive bit to be reset when a file is backed up\&. Useful with the \fIg\fR and \fIc\fR flags\&.
-
-\fBTar Long File Names\fR
-
-
-\fBsmbclient\fR's tar option now supports long file names both on backup and restore\&. However, the full path name of the file must be less than 1024 bytes\&. Also, when a tar archive is created, \fBsmbclient\fR's tar option places all files in the archive with relative names, not absolute names\&.
-
-
-\fBTar Filenames\fR
-
-
-All file names can be given as DOS path names (with '\\\\' as the component separator) or as UNIX path names (with '/' as the component separator)\&.
-
-
-\fBExamples\fR
-
-
-Restore from tar file \fIbackup\&.tar\fR into myshare on mypc (no password on share)\&.
-
-
-\fBsmbclient //mypc/yshare "" -N -Tx backup.tar \fR
-
-
-Restore everything except \fIusers/docs\fR
-
-
-\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -TXx backup.tar users/docs\fR
-
-
-Create a tar file of the files beneath \fI users/docs\fR\&.
-
-
-\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar users/docs \fR
-
-
-Create the same tar file as above, but now use a DOS path name\&.
-
-
-\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -tc backup.tar users\edocs \fR
-
-
-Create a tar file of all the files and directories in the share\&.
-
-
-\fBsmbclient //mypc/myshare "" -N -Tc backup.tar * \fR
-
-
-.TP
--D initial directory
-Change to initial directory before starting\&. Probably only of any use with the tar -T option\&.
-
-
-.TP
--c command string
-command string is a semicolon-separated list of commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin\&. \fI -N\fR is implied by \fI-c\fR\&.
-
-
-This is particularly useful in scripts and for printing stdin to the server, e\&.g\&. \fB-c 'print -'\fR\&.
-
-
-.SH "OPERATIONS"
-
-.PP
-Once the client is running, the user is presented with a prompt :
-
-.PP
-smb:\\>
-
-.PP
-The backslash ("\\\\") indicates the current working directory on the server, and will change if the current working directory is changed\&.
-
-.PP
-The prompt indicates that the client is ready and waiting to carry out a user command\&. Each command is a single word, optionally followed by parameters specific to that command\&. Command and parameters are space-delimited unless these notes specifically state otherwise\&. All commands are case-insensitive\&. Parameters to commands may or may not be case sensitive, depending on the command\&.
-
-.PP
-You can specify file names which have spaces in them by quoting the name with double quotes, for example "a long file name"\&.
-
-.PP
-Parameters shown in square brackets (e\&.g\&., "[parameter]") are optional\&. If not given, the command will use suitable defaults\&. Parameters shown in angle brackets (e\&.g\&., "<parameter>") are required\&.
-
-.PP
-Note that all commands operating on the server are actually performed by issuing a request to the server\&. Thus the behavior may vary from server to server, depending on how the server was implemented\&.
-
-.PP
-The commands available are given here in alphabetical order\&.
-
-.TP
-? [command]
-If \fIcommand\fR is specified, the ? command will display a brief informative message about the specified command\&. If no command is specified, a list of available commands will be displayed\&.
-
-
-.TP
-! [shell command]
-If \fIshell command\fR is specified, the ! command will execute a shell locally and run the specified shell command\&. If no command is specified, a local shell will be run\&.
-
-
-.TP
-altname file
-The client will request that the server return the "alternate" name (the 8\&.3 name) for a file or directory\&.
-
-
-.TP
-cancel jobid0 [jobid1] \&.\&.\&. [jobidN]
-The client will request that the server cancel the printjobs identified by the given numeric print job ids\&.
-
-
-.TP
-chmod file mode in octal
-This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server change the UNIX permissions to the given octal mode, in standard UNIX format\&.
-
-
-.TP
-chown file uid gid
-This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server change the UNIX user and group ownership to the given decimal values\&. Note there is currently no way to remotely look up the UNIX uid and gid values for a given name\&. This may be addressed in future versions of the CIFS UNIX extensions\&.
-
-
-.TP
-cd [directory name]
-If "directory name" is specified, the current working directory on the server will be changed to the directory specified\&. This operation will fail if for any reason the specified directory is inaccessible\&.
-
-
-If no directory name is specified, the current working directory on the server will be reported\&.
-
-
-.TP
-del <mask>
-The client will request that the server attempt to delete all files matching \fImask\fR from the current working directory on the server\&.
-
-
-.TP
-dir <mask>
-A list of the files matching \fImask\fR in the current working directory on the server will be retrieved from the server and displayed\&.
-
-
-.TP
-exit
-Terminate the connection with the server and exit from the program\&.
-
-
-.TP
-get <remote file name> [local file name]
-Copy the file called \fIremote file name\fR from the server to the machine running the client\&. If specified, name the local copy \fIlocal file name\fR\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-help [command]
-See the ? command above\&.
-
-
-.TP
-lcd [directory name]
-If \fIdirectory name\fR is specified, the current working directory on the local machine will be changed to the directory specified\&. This operation will fail if for any reason the specified directory is inaccessible\&.
-
-
-If no directory name is specified, the name of the current working directory on the local machine will be reported\&.
-
-
-.TP
-link source destination
-This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server create a hard link between the source and destination files\&. The source file must not exist\&.
-
-
-.TP
-lowercase
-Toggle lowercasing of filenames for the get and mget commands\&.
-
-
-When lowercasing is toggled ON, local filenames are converted to lowercase when using the get and mget commands\&. This is often useful when copying (say) MSDOS files from a server, because lowercase filenames are the norm on UNIX systems\&.
-
-
-.TP
-ls <mask>
-See the dir command above\&.
-
-
-.TP
-mask <mask>
-This command allows the user to set up a mask which will be used during recursive operation of the mget and mput commands\&.
-
-
-The masks specified to the mget and mput commands act as filters for directories rather than files when recursion is toggled ON\&.
-
-
-The mask specified with the mask command is necessary to filter files within those directories\&. For example, if the mask specified in an mget command is "source*" and the mask specified with the mask command is "*\&.c" and recursion is toggled ON, the mget command will retrieve all files matching "*\&.c" in all directories below and including all directories matching "source*" in the current working directory\&.
-
-
-Note that the value for mask defaults to blank (equivalent to "*") and remains so until the mask command is used to change it\&. It retains the most recently specified value indefinitely\&. To avoid unexpected results it would be wise to change the value of mask back to "*" after using the mget or mput commands\&.
-
-
-.TP
-md <directory name>
-See the mkdir command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-mget <mask>
-Copy all files matching \fImask\fR from the server to the machine running the client\&.
-
-
-Note that \fImask\fR is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and mask commands for more information\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-mkdir <directory name>
-Create a new directory on the server (user access privileges permitting) with the specified name\&.
-
-
-.TP
-mput <mask>
-Copy all files matching \fImask\fR in the current working directory on the local machine to the current working directory on the server\&.
-
-
-Note that \fImask\fR is interpreted differently during recursive operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and mask commands for more information\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&.
-
-
-.TP
-print <file name>
-Print the specified file from the local machine through a printable service on the server\&.
-
-
-See also the printmode command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-printmode <graphics or text>
-Set the print mode to suit either binary data (such as graphical information) or text\&. Subsequent print commands will use the currently set print mode\&.
-
-
-.TP
-prompt
-Toggle prompting for filenames during operation of the mget and mput commands\&.
-
-
-When toggled ON, the user will be prompted to confirm the transfer of each file during these commands\&. When toggled OFF, all specified files will be transferred without prompting\&.
-
-
-.TP
-put <local file name> [remote file name]
-Copy the file called \fIlocal file name\fR from the machine running the client to the server\&. If specified, name the remote copy \fIremote file name\fR\&. Note that all transfers in \fBsmbclient\fR are binary\&. See also the lowercase command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-queue
-Displays the print queue, showing the job id, name, size and current status\&.
-
-
-.TP
-quit
-See the exit command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-rd <directory name>
-See the rmdir command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-recurse
-Toggle directory recursion for the commands mget and mput\&.
-
-
-When toggled ON, these commands will process all directories in the source directory (i\&.e\&., the directory they are copying from ) and will recurse into any that match the mask specified to the command\&. Only files that match the mask specified using the mask command will be retrieved\&. See also the mask command\&.
-
-
-When recursion is toggled OFF, only files from the current working directory on the source machine that match the mask specified to the mget or mput commands will be copied, and any mask specified using the mask command will be ignored\&.
-
-
-.TP
-rm <mask>
-Remove all files matching \fImask\fR from the current working directory on the server\&.
-
-
-.TP
-rmdir <directory name>
-Remove the specified directory (user access privileges permitting) from the server\&.
-
-
-.TP
-setmode <filename> <perm=[+|\\-]rsha>
-A version of the DOS attrib command to set file permissions\&. For example:
-
-
-\fBsetmode myfile +r \fR
-
-
-would make myfile read only\&.
-
-
-.TP
-symlink source destination
-This command depends on the server supporting the CIFS UNIX extensions and will fail if the server does not\&. The client requests that the server create a symbolic hard link between the source and destination files\&. The source file must not exist\&. Note that the server will not create a link to any path that lies outside the currently connected share\&. This is enforced by the Samba server\&.
-
-
-.TP
-tar <c|x>[IXbgNa]
-Performs a tar operation - see the \fI-T \fR command line option above\&. Behavior may be affected by the tarmode command (see below)\&. Using g (incremental) and N (newer) will affect tarmode settings\&. Note that using the "-" option with tar x may not work - use the command line option instead\&.
-
-
-.TP
-blocksize <blocksize>
-Blocksize\&. Must be followed by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize\&. Causes tar file to be written out in \fIblocksize\fR*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks\&.
-
-
-.TP
-tarmode <full|inc|reset|noreset>
-Changes tar's behavior with regard to archive bits\&. In full mode, tar will back up everything regardless of the archive bit setting (this is the default mode)\&. In incremental mode, tar will only back up files with the archive bit set\&. In reset mode, tar will reset the archive bit on all files it backs up (implies read/write share)\&.
-
-
-.SH "NOTES"
-
-.PP
-Some servers are fussy about the case of supplied usernames, passwords, share names (AKA service names) and machine names\&. If you fail to connect try giving all parameters in uppercase\&.
-
-.PP
-It is often necessary to use the -n option when connecting to some types of servers\&. For example OS/2 LanManager insists on a valid NetBIOS name being used, so you need to supply a valid name that would be known to the server\&.
-
-.PP
-smbclient supports long file names where the server supports the LANMAN2 protocol or above\&.
-
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
-
-.PP
-The variable \fBUSER\fR may contain the username of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&.
-
-.PP
-The variable \fBPASSWD\fR may contain the password of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&.
-
-.PP
-The variable \fBLIBSMB_PROG\fR may contain the path, executed with system(), which the client should connect to instead of connecting to a server\&. This functionality is primarily intended as a development aid, and works best when using a LMHOSTS file
-
-.SH "INSTALLATION"
-
-.PP
-The location of the client program is a matter for individual system administrators\&. The following are thus suggestions only\&.
-
-.PP
-It is recommended that the smbclient software be installed in the \fI/usr/local/samba/bin/\fR or \fI /usr/samba/bin/\fR directory, this directory readable by all, writeable only by root\&. The client program itself should be executable by all\&. The client should \fBNOT\fR be setuid or setgid!
-
-.PP
-The client log files should be put in a directory readable and writeable only by the user\&.
-
-.PP
-To test the client, you will need to know the name of a running SMB/CIFS server\&. It is possible to run \fBsmbd\fR(8) as an ordinary user - running that server as a daemon on a user-accessible port (typically any port number over 1024) would provide a suitable test server\&.
-
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-
-.PP
-Most diagnostics issued by the client are logged in a specified log file\&. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line\&.
-
-.PP
-The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the client\&. If you have problems, set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 2\&.2 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/smbcontrol.1 b/raw/man1/smbcontrol.1
deleted file mode 100644
index cec003a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/smbcontrol.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBCONTROL" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbcontrol \- send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbcontrol\fR [-i] [-s]
-.fi
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbcontrol\fR [destination] [message-type] [parameter]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbcontrol\fR is a very small program, which sends messages to a \fBsmbd\fR(8), a \fBnmbd\fR(8), or a \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon running on the system\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s <configuration file>
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
-
-
-.TP
--i
-Run interactively\&. Individual commands of the form destination message-type parameters can be entered on STDIN\&. An empty command line or a "q" will quit the program\&.
-
-
-.TP
-destination
-One of \fInmbd\fR, \fIsmbd\fR or a process ID\&.
-
-
-The \fIsmbd\fR destination causes the message to "broadcast" to all smbd daemons\&.
-
-
-The \fInmbd\fR destination causes the message to be sent to the nmbd daemon specified in the \fInmbd\&.pid\fR file\&.
-
-
-If a single process ID is given, the message is sent to only that process\&.
-
-
-.TP
-message-type
-Type of message to send\&. See the section \fBMESSAGE-TYPES\fR for details\&.
-
-
-.TP
-parameters
-any parameters required for the message-type
-
-
-.SH "MESSAGE-TYPES"
-
-.PP
-Available message types are:
-
-.TP
-close-share
-Order smbd to close the client connections to the named share\&. Note that this doesn't affect client connections to any other shares\&. This message-type takes an argument of the share name for which client connections will be closed, or the "*" character which will close all currently open shares\&. This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share\&. This message can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-debug
-Set debug level to the value specified by the parameter\&. This can be sent to any of the destinations\&.
-
-
-.TP
-force-election
-This message causes the \fBnmbd\fR daemon to force a new browse master election\&.
-
-
-.TP
-ping
-Send specified number of "ping" messages and wait for the same number of reply "pong" messages\&. This can be sent to any of the destinations\&.
-
-
-.TP
-profile
-Change profile settings of a daemon, based on the parameter\&. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats collection, "off" to turn off profile stats collection, "count" to enable only collection of count stats (time stats are disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats\&. This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations\&.
-
-
-.TP
-debuglevel
-Request debuglevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout\&. This can be sent to any of the destinations\&.
-
-
-.TP
-profilelevel
-Request profilelevel of a certain daemon and write it to stdout\&. This can be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations\&.
-
-
-.TP
-printnotify
-Order smbd to send a printer notify message to any Windows NT clients connected to a printer\&. This message-type takes the following arguments:
-
-
-
-.RS
-
-.TP
-queuepause printername
-Send a queue pause change notify message to the printer specified\&.
-
-
-.TP
-queueresume printername
-Send a queue resume change notify message for the printer specified\&.
-
-
-.TP
-jobpause printername unixjobid
-Send a job pause change notify message for the printer and unix jobid specified\&.
-
-
-.TP
-jobresume printername unixjobid
-Send a job resume change notify message for the printer and unix jobid specified\&.
-
-
-.TP
-jobdelete printername unixjobid
-Send a job delete change notify message for the printer and unix jobid specified\&.
-
-
-.RE
-Note that this message only sends notification that an event has occured\&. It doesn't actually cause the event to happen\&.
-
-
-This message can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-samsync
-Order smbd to synchronise sam database from PDC (being BDC)\&. Can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&.
-
-Not working at the moment
-
-
-.TP
-samrepl
-Send sam replication message, with specified serial\&. Can only be sent to \fBsmbd\fR\&. Should not be used manually\&.
-
-
-.TP
-dmalloc-mark
-Set a mark for dmalloc\&. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd\&. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support\&.
-
-
-.TP
-dmalloc-log-changed
-Dump the pointers that have changed since the mark set by dmalloc-mark\&. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd\&. Only available if samba is built with dmalloc support\&.
-
-
-.TP
-shutdown
-Shut down specified daemon\&. Can be sent to both smbd and nmbd\&.
-
-
-.TP
-pool-usage
-Print a human-readable description of all talloc(pool) memory usage by the specified daemon/process\&. Available for both smbd and nmbd\&.
-
-
-.TP
-drvupgrade
-Force clients of printers using specified driver to update their local version of the driver\&. Can only be sent to smbd\&.
-
-
-.TP
-reload-config
-Force daemon to reload smb\&.conf configuration file\&. Can be sent to \fBsmbd\fR, \fBnmbd\fR, or \fBwinbindd\fR\&.
-
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBnmbd\fR(8) and \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/smbstatus.1 b/raw/man1/smbstatus.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 44f0bae..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/smbstatus.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBSTATUS" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbstatus \- report on current Samba connections
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbstatus\fR [-P] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s <configuration
- file>] [-u <username>]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbstatus\fR is a very simple program to list the current Samba connections\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--P|--profile
-If samba has been compiled with the profiling option, print only the contents of the profiling shared memory area\&.
-
-
-.TP
--b|--brief
-gives brief output\&.
-
-
-.TP
--V
-Prints the program version number\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s <configuration file>
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
-
-
-.TP
--d|--debug=debuglevel
-\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&.
-
-
-The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&.
-
-
-Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
-
-
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--l|--logfile=logbasename
-File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&.
-
-
-.TP
--v|--verbose
-gives verbose output\&.
-
-
-.TP
--L|--locks
-causes smbstatus to only list locks\&.
-
-
-.TP
--B|--byterange
-causes smbstatus to include byte range locks\&.
-
-
-.TP
--p|--processes
-print a list of \fBsmbd\fR(8) processes and exit\&. Useful for scripting\&.
-
-
-.TP
--S|--shares
-causes smbstatus to only list shares\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--u|--user=<username>
-selects information relevant to \fIusername\fR only\&.
-
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbd\fR(8) and \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/smbtar.1 b/raw/man1/smbtar.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 00d913b..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/smbtar.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBTAR" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbtar \- shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to UNIX tape drives
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbtar\fR [-r] [-i] [-a] [-v] {-s server} [-p password] [-x services] [-X] [-N filename]
- [-b blocksize] [-d directory] [-l loglevel] [-u user] [-t tape] {filenames}
-
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbtar\fR is a very small shell script on top of \fBsmbclient\fR(1) which dumps SMB shares directly to tape\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--s server
-The SMB/CIFS server that the share resides upon\&.
-
-
-.TP
--x service
-The share name on the server to connect to\&. The default is "backup"\&.
-
-
-.TP
--X
-Exclude mode\&. Exclude filenames\&.\&.\&. from tar create or restore\&.
-
-
-.TP
--d directory
-Change to initial \fIdirectory \fR before restoring / backing up files\&.
-
-
-.TP
--v
-Verbose mode\&.
-
-
-.TP
--p password
-The password to use to access a share\&. Default: none
-
-
-.TP
--u user
-The user id to connect as\&. Default: UNIX login name\&.
-
-
-.TP
--a
-Reset DOS archive bit mode to indicate file has been archived\&.
-
-
-.TP
--t tape
-Tape device\&. May be regular file or tape device\&. Default: \fI$TAPE\fR environmental variable; if not set, a file called \fItar\&.out \fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
--b blocksize
-Blocking factor\&. Defaults to 20\&. See \fBtar(1)\fR for a fuller explanation\&.
-
-
-.TP
--N filename
-Backup only files newer than filename\&. Could be used (for example) on a log file to implement incremental backups\&.
-
-
-.TP
--i
-Incremental mode; tar files are only backed up if they have the archive bit set\&. The archive bit is reset after each file is read\&.
-
-
-.TP
--r
-Restore\&. Files are restored to the share from the tar file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--l log level
-Log (debug) level\&. Corresponds to the \fI-d\fR flag of \fBsmbclient\fR(1)\&.
-
-
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
-
-.PP
-The \fI$TAPE\fR variable specifies the default tape device to write to\&. May be overridden with the -t option\&.
-
-.SH "BUGS"
-
-.PP
-The \fBsmbtar\fR script has different options from ordinary tar and from smbclient's tar command\&.
-
-.SH "CAVEATS"
-
-.PP
-Sites that are more careful about security may not like the way the script handles PC passwords\&. Backup and restore work on entire shares; should work on file lists\&. smbtar works best with GNU tar and may not work well with other versions\&.
-
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-
-.PP
-See the \fBDIAGNOSTICS\fR section for the \fBsmbclient\fR(1) command\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-Ricky Poulten wrote the tar extension and this man page\&. The \fBsmbtar\fR script was heavily rewritten and improved by Martin Kraemer\&. Many thanks to everyone who suggested extensions, improvements, bug fixes, etc\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Ger [...]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/sort.1 b/raw/man1/sort.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c46a29..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/sort.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH SORT "1" "March 2003" "sort (coreutils) 5.0" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-sort \- sort lines of text files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B sort
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Write sorted concatenation of all FILE(s) to standard output.
-.PP
-Ordering options:
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.HP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\-leading\-blanks\fR ignore leading blanks
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-dictionary\-order\fR
-consider only blanks and alphanumeric characters
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\-case\fR
-fold lower case to upper case characters
-.TP
-\fB\-g\fR, \fB\-\-general\-numeric\-sort\fR
-compare according to general numerical value
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\-nonprinting\fR
-consider only printable characters
-.TP
-\fB\-M\fR, \fB\-\-month\-sort\fR
-compare (unknown) < `JAN' < ... < `DEC'
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-numeric\-sort\fR
-compare according to string numerical value
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-reverse\fR
-reverse the result of comparisons
-.PP
-Other options:
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-check\fR
-check whether input is sorted; do not sort
-.TP
-\fB\-k\fR, \fB\-\-key\fR=\fIPOS1[\fR,POS2]
-start a key at POS1, end it at POS 2 (origin 1)
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-merge\fR
-merge already sorted files; do not sort
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIFILE\fR
-write result to FILE instead of standard output
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-stable\fR
-stabilize sort by disabling last-resort comparison
-.TP
-\fB\-S\fR, \fB\-\-buffer\-size\fR=\fISIZE\fR
-use SIZE for main memory buffer
-.HP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-field\-separator\fR=\fISEP\fR use SEP instead of non- to whitespace transition
-.TP
-\fB\-T\fR, \fB\-\-temporary\-directory\fR=\fIDIR\fR
-use DIR for temporaries, not $TMPDIR or /tmp
-multiple options specify multiple directories
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-unique\fR
-with \fB\-c\fR: check for strict ordering
-.br
-otherwise: output only the first of an equal run
-.TP
-\fB\-z\fR, \fB\-\-zero\-terminated\fR
-end lines with 0 byte, not newline
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-POS is F[.C][OPTS], where F is the field number and C the character position
-in the field. OPTS is one or more single-letter ordering options, which
-override global ordering options for that key. If no key is given, use the
-entire line as the key.
-.PP
-SIZE may be followed by the following multiplicative suffixes:
-% 1% of memory, b 1, K 1024 (default), and so on for M, G, T, P, E, Z, Y.
-.PP
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.PP
-*** WARNING ***
-The locale specified by the environment affects sort order.
-Set LC_ALL=C to get the traditional sort order that uses
-native byte values.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Mike Haertel and Paul Eggert.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B sort
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B sort
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info sort
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/source.1 b/raw/man1/source.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/source.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/split.1 b/raw/man1/split.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5317f85..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/split.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH SPLIT "1" "October 2003" "split (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-split \- split a file into pieces
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B split
-[\fIOPTION\fR] [\fIINPUT \fR[\fIPREFIX\fR]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Output fixed-size pieces of INPUT to PREFIXaa, PREFIXab, ...; default
-PREFIX is `x'. With no INPUT, or when INPUT is -, read standard input.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-suffix\-length\fR=\fIN\fR
-use suffixes of length N (default 2)
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-bytes\fR=\fISIZE\fR
-put SIZE bytes per output file
-.TP
-\fB\-C\fR, \fB\-\-line\-bytes\fR=\fISIZE\fR
-put at most SIZE bytes of lines per output file
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-lines\fR=\fINUMBER\fR
-put NUMBER lines per output file
-.TP
-\fB\-\-verbose\fR
-print a diagnostic to standard error just
-before each output file is opened
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-SIZE may have a multiplier suffix: b for 512, k for 1K, m for 1 Meg.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Torbjorn Granlund and Richard M. Stallman.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B split
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B split
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info split
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/ssh.1 b/raw/man1/ssh.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a5e2d1..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ssh.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,991 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\"
-.\" Author: Tatu Ylonen <ylo at cs.hut.fi>
-.\" Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo at cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland
-.\" All rights reserved
-.\"
-.\" As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software
-.\" can be used freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this
-.\" software must be clearly marked as such, and if the derived work is
-.\" incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be
-.\" called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure Shell".
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1999,2000 Markus Friedl. All rights reserved.
-.\" Copyright (c) 1999 Aaron Campbell. All rights reserved.
-.\" Copyright (c) 1999 Theo de Raadt. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
-.\" OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
-.\" IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
-.\" INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
-.\" NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
-.\" DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
-.\" THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
-.\" (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" $OpenBSD: ssh.1,v 1.168 2003/03/28 10:11:43 jmc Exp $
-.Dd September 25, 1999
-.Dt SSH 1
-.Os
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm ssh
-.Nd OpenSSH SSH client (remote login program)
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm ssh
-.Op Fl l Ar login_name
-.Ar hostname | user at hostname
-.Op Ar command
-.Pp
-.Nm ssh
-.Bk -words
-.Op Fl afgknqstvxACNTX1246
-.Op Fl b Ar bind_address
-.Op Fl c Ar cipher_spec
-.Op Fl e Ar escape_char
-.Op Fl i Ar identity_file
-.Op Fl l Ar login_name
-.Op Fl m Ar mac_spec
-.Op Fl o Ar option
-.Op Fl p Ar port
-.Op Fl F Ar configfile
-.Oo Fl L Xo
-.Sm off
-.Ar port :
-.Ar host :
-.Ar hostport
-.Sm on
-.Xc
-.Oc
-.Ek
-.Bk -words
-.Oo Fl R Xo
-.Sm off
-.Ar port :
-.Ar host :
-.Ar hostport
-.Sm on
-.Xc
-.Oc
-.Op Fl D Ar port
-.Ar hostname | user at hostname
-.Op Ar command
-.Ek
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm
-(SSH client) is a program for logging into a remote machine and for
-executing commands on a remote machine.
-It is intended to replace
-rlogin and rsh, and provide secure encrypted communications between
-two untrusted hosts over an insecure network.
-X11 connections and
-arbitrary TCP/IP ports can also be forwarded over the secure channel.
-.Pp
-.Nm
-connects and logs into the specified
-.Ar hostname .
-The user must prove
-his/her identity to the remote machine using one of several methods
-depending on the protocol version used:
-.Pp
-.Ss SSH protocol version 1
-.Pp
-First, if the machine the user logs in from is listed in
-.Pa /etc/hosts.equiv
-or
-.Pa /etc/ssh/shosts.equiv
-on the remote machine, and the user names are
-the same on both sides, the user is immediately permitted to log in.
-Second, if
-.Pa \&.rhosts
-or
-.Pa \&.shosts
-exists in the user's home directory on the
-remote machine and contains a line containing the name of the client
-machine and the name of the user on that machine, the user is
-permitted to log in.
-This form of authentication alone is normally not
-allowed by the server because it is not secure.
-.Pp
-The second authentication method is the
-.Pa rhosts
-or
-.Pa hosts.equiv
-method combined with RSA-based host authentication.
-It means that if the login would be permitted by
-.Pa $HOME/.rhosts ,
-.Pa $HOME/.shosts ,
-.Pa /etc/hosts.equiv ,
-or
-.Pa /etc/ssh/shosts.equiv ,
-and if additionally the server can verify the client's
-host key (see
-.Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
-and
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/known_hosts
-in the
-.Sx FILES
-section), only then login is permitted.
-This authentication method closes security holes due to IP
-spoofing, DNS spoofing and routing spoofing.
-[Note to the administrator:
-.Pa /etc/hosts.equiv ,
-.Pa $HOME/.rhosts ,
-and the rlogin/rsh protocol in general, are inherently insecure and should be
-disabled if security is desired.]
-.Pp
-As a third authentication method,
-.Nm
-supports RSA based authentication.
-The scheme is based on public-key cryptography: there are cryptosystems
-where encryption and decryption are done using separate keys, and it
-is not possible to derive the decryption key from the encryption key.
-RSA is one such system.
-The idea is that each user creates a public/private
-key pair for authentication purposes.
-The server knows the public key, and only the user knows the private key.
-The file
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys
-lists the public keys that are permitted for logging
-in.
-When the user logs in, the
-.Nm
-program tells the server which key pair it would like to use for
-authentication.
-The server checks if this key is permitted, and if
-so, sends the user (actually the
-.Nm
-program running on behalf of the user) a challenge, a random number,
-encrypted by the user's public key.
-The challenge can only be
-decrypted using the proper private key.
-The user's client then decrypts the
-challenge using the private key, proving that he/she knows the private
-key but without disclosing it to the server.
-.Pp
-.Nm
-implements the RSA authentication protocol automatically.
-The user creates his/her RSA key pair by running
-.Xr ssh-keygen 1 .
-This stores the private key in
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/identity
-and the public key in
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/identity.pub
-in the user's home directory.
-The user should then copy the
-.Pa identity.pub
-to
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys
-in his/her home directory on the remote machine (the
-.Pa authorized_keys
-file corresponds to the conventional
-.Pa $HOME/.rhosts
-file, and has one key
-per line, though the lines can be very long).
-After this, the user can log in without giving the password.
-RSA authentication is much
-more secure than rhosts authentication.
-.Pp
-The most convenient way to use RSA authentication may be with an
-authentication agent.
-See
-.Xr ssh-agent 1
-for more information.
-.Pp
-If other authentication methods fail,
-.Nm
-prompts the user for a password.
-The password is sent to the remote
-host for checking; however, since all communications are encrypted,
-the password cannot be seen by someone listening on the network.
-.Pp
-.Ss SSH protocol version 2
-.Pp
-When a user connects using protocol version 2
-similar authentication methods are available.
-Using the default values for
-.Cm PreferredAuthentications ,
-the client will try to authenticate first using the hostbased method;
-if this method fails public key authentication is attempted,
-and finally if this method fails keyboard-interactive and
-password authentication are tried.
-.Pp
-The public key method is similar to RSA authentication described
-in the previous section and allows the RSA or DSA algorithm to be used:
-The client uses his private key,
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/id_dsa
-or
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/id_rsa ,
-to sign the session identifier and sends the result to the server.
-The server checks whether the matching public key is listed in
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys
-and grants access if both the key is found and the signature is correct.
-The session identifier is derived from a shared Diffie-Hellman value
-and is only known to the client and the server.
-.Pp
-If public key authentication fails or is not available a password
-can be sent encrypted to the remote host for proving the user's identity.
-.Pp
-Additionally,
-.Nm
-supports hostbased or challenge response authentication.
-.Pp
-Protocol 2 provides additional mechanisms for confidentiality
-(the traffic is encrypted using 3DES, Blowfish, CAST128 or Arcfour)
-and integrity (hmac-md5, hmac-sha1).
-Note that protocol 1 lacks a strong mechanism for ensuring the
-integrity of the connection.
-.Pp
-.Ss Login session and remote execution
-.Pp
-When the user's identity has been accepted by the server, the server
-either executes the given command, or logs into the machine and gives
-the user a normal shell on the remote machine.
-All communication with
-the remote command or shell will be automatically encrypted.
-.Pp
-If a pseudo-terminal has been allocated (normal login session), the
-user may use the escape characters noted below.
-.Pp
-If no pseudo tty has been allocated, the
-session is transparent and can be used to reliably transfer binary
-data.
-On most systems, setting the escape character to
-.Dq none
-will also make the session transparent even if a tty is used.
-.Pp
-The session terminates when the command or shell on the remote
-machine exits and all X11 and TCP/IP connections have been closed.
-The exit status of the remote program is returned as the exit status
-of
-.Nm ssh .
-.Pp
-.Ss Escape Characters
-.Pp
-When a pseudo terminal has been requested, ssh supports a number of functions
-through the use of an escape character.
-.Pp
-A single tilde character can be sent as
-.Ic ~~
-or by following the tilde by a character other than those described below.
-The escape character must always follow a newline to be interpreted as
-special.
-The escape character can be changed in configuration files using the
-.Cm EscapeChar
-configuration directive or on the command line by the
-.Fl e
-option.
-.Pp
-The supported escapes (assuming the default
-.Ql ~ )
-are:
-.Bl -tag -width Ds
-.It Cm ~.
-Disconnect
-.It Cm ~^Z
-Background ssh
-.It Cm ~#
-List forwarded connections
-.It Cm ~&
-Background ssh at logout when waiting for forwarded connection / X11 sessions
-to terminate
-.It Cm ~?
-Display a list of escape characters
-.It Cm ~C
-Open command line (only useful for adding port forwardings using the
-.Fl L
-and
-.Fl R
-options)
-.It Cm ~R
-Request rekeying of the connection (only useful for SSH protocol version 2
-and if the peer supports it)
-.El
-.Pp
-.Ss X11 and TCP forwarding
-.Pp
-If the
-.Cm ForwardX11
-variable is set to
-.Dq yes
-(or, see the description of the
-.Fl X
-and
-.Fl x
-options described later)
-and the user is using X11 (the
-.Ev DISPLAY
-environment variable is set), the connection to the X11 display is
-automatically forwarded to the remote side in such a way that any X11
-programs started from the shell (or command) will go through the
-encrypted channel, and the connection to the real X server will be made
-from the local machine.
-The user should not manually set
-.Ev DISPLAY .
-Forwarding of X11 connections can be
-configured on the command line or in configuration files.
-.Pp
-The
-.Ev DISPLAY
-value set by
-.Nm
-will point to the server machine, but with a display number greater
-than zero.
-This is normal, and happens because
-.Nm
-creates a
-.Dq proxy
-X server on the server machine for forwarding the
-connections over the encrypted channel.
-.Pp
-.Nm
-will also automatically set up Xauthority data on the server machine.
-For this purpose, it will generate a random authorization cookie,
-store it in Xauthority on the server, and verify that any forwarded
-connections carry this cookie and replace it by the real cookie when
-the connection is opened.
-The real authentication cookie is never
-sent to the server machine (and no cookies are sent in the plain).
-.Pp
-If the
-.Cm ForwardAgent
-variable is set to
-.Dq yes
-(or, see the description of the
-.Fl A
-and
-.Fl a
-options described later) and
-the user is using an authentication agent, the connection to the agent
-is automatically forwarded to the remote side.
-.Pp
-Forwarding of arbitrary TCP/IP connections over the secure channel can
-be specified either on the command line or in a configuration file.
-One possible application of TCP/IP forwarding is a secure connection to an
-electronic purse; another is going through firewalls.
-.Pp
-.Ss Server authentication
-.Pp
-.Nm
-automatically maintains and checks a database containing
-identifications for all hosts it has ever been used with.
-Host keys are stored in
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/known_hosts
-in the user's home directory.
-Additionally, the file
-.Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
-is automatically checked for known hosts.
-Any new hosts are automatically added to the user's file.
-If a host's identification
-ever changes,
-.Nm
-warns about this and disables password authentication to prevent a
-trojan horse from getting the user's password.
-Another purpose of
-this mechanism is to prevent man-in-the-middle attacks which could
-otherwise be used to circumvent the encryption.
-The
-.Cm StrictHostKeyChecking
-option can be used to prevent logins to machines whose
-host key is not known or has changed.
-.Pp
-The options are as follows:
-.Bl -tag -width Ds
-.It Fl a
-Disables forwarding of the authentication agent connection.
-.It Fl A
-Enables forwarding of the authentication agent connection.
-This can also be specified on a per-host basis in a configuration file.
-.Pp
-Agent forwarding should be enabled with caution.
-Users with the ability to bypass file permissions on the remote host
-(for the agent's Unix-domain socket)
-can access the local agent through the forwarded connection.
-An attacker cannot obtain key material from the agent,
-however they can perform operations on the keys that enable them to
-authenticate using the identities loaded into the agent.
-.It Fl b Ar bind_address
-Specify the interface to transmit from on machines with multiple
-interfaces or aliased addresses.
-.It Fl c Ar blowfish|3des|des
-Selects the cipher to use for encrypting the session.
-.Ar 3des
-is used by default.
-It is believed to be secure.
-.Ar 3des
-(triple-des) is an encrypt-decrypt-encrypt triple with three different keys.
-.Ar blowfish
-is a fast block cipher, it appears very secure and is much faster than
-.Ar 3des .
-.Ar des
-is only supported in the
-.Nm
-client for interoperability with legacy protocol 1 implementations
-that do not support the
-.Ar 3des
-cipher.
-Its use is strongly discouraged due to cryptographic weaknesses.
-.It Fl c Ar cipher_spec
-Additionally, for protocol version 2 a comma-separated list of ciphers can
-be specified in order of preference.
-See
-.Cm Ciphers
-for more information.
-.It Fl e Ar ch|^ch|none
-Sets the escape character for sessions with a pty (default:
-.Ql ~ ) .
-The escape character is only recognized at the beginning of a line.
-The escape character followed by a dot
-.Pq Ql \&.
-closes the connection, followed
-by control-Z suspends the connection, and followed by itself sends the
-escape character once.
-Setting the character to
-.Dq none
-disables any escapes and makes the session fully transparent.
-.It Fl f
-Requests
-.Nm
-to go to background just before command execution.
-This is useful if
-.Nm
-is going to ask for passwords or passphrases, but the user
-wants it in the background.
-This implies
-.Fl n .
-The recommended way to start X11 programs at a remote site is with
-something like
-.Ic ssh -f host xterm .
-.It Fl g
-Allows remote hosts to connect to local forwarded ports.
-.It Fl i Ar identity_file
-Selects a file from which the identity (private key) for
-RSA or DSA authentication is read.
-The default is
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/identity
-for protocol version 1, and
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/id_rsa
-and
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/id_dsa
-for protocol version 2.
-Identity files may also be specified on
-a per-host basis in the configuration file.
-It is possible to have multiple
-.Fl i
-options (and multiple identities specified in
-configuration files).
-.It Fl I Ar smartcard_device
-Specifies which smartcard device to use. The argument is
-the device
-.Nm
-should use to communicate with a smartcard used for storing the user's
-private RSA key.
-.It Fl k
-Disables forwarding of Kerberos tickets and AFS tokens.
-This may also be specified on a per-host basis in the configuration file.
-.It Fl l Ar login_name
-Specifies the user to log in as on the remote machine.
-This also may be specified on a per-host basis in the configuration file.
-.It Fl m Ar mac_spec
-Additionally, for protocol version 2 a comma-separated list of MAC
-(message authentication code) algorithms can
-be specified in order of preference.
-See the
-.Cm MACs
-keyword for more information.
-.It Fl n
-Redirects stdin from
-.Pa /dev/null
-(actually, prevents reading from stdin).
-This must be used when
-.Nm
-is run in the background.
-A common trick is to use this to run X11 programs on a remote machine.
-For example,
-.Ic ssh -n shadows.cs.hut.fi emacs &
-will start an emacs on shadows.cs.hut.fi, and the X11
-connection will be automatically forwarded over an encrypted channel.
-The
-.Nm
-program will be put in the background.
-(This does not work if
-.Nm
-needs to ask for a password or passphrase; see also the
-.Fl f
-option.)
-.It Fl N
-Do not execute a remote command.
-This is useful for just forwarding ports
-(protocol version 2 only).
-.It Fl o Ar option
-Can be used to give options in the format used in the configuration file.
-This is useful for specifying options for which there is no separate
-command-line flag.
-.It Fl p Ar port
-Port to connect to on the remote host.
-This can be specified on a
-per-host basis in the configuration file.
-.It Fl q
-Quiet mode.
-Causes all warning and diagnostic messages to be suppressed.
-.It Fl s
-May be used to request invocation of a subsystem on the remote system. Subsystems are a feature of the SSH2 protocol which facilitate the use
-of SSH as a secure transport for other applications (eg. sftp). The
-subsystem is specified as the remote command.
-.It Fl t
-Force pseudo-tty allocation.
-This can be used to execute arbitrary
-screen-based programs on a remote machine, which can be very useful,
-e.g., when implementing menu services.
-Multiple
-.Fl t
-options force tty allocation, even if
-.Nm
-has no local tty.
-.It Fl T
-Disable pseudo-tty allocation.
-.It Fl v
-Verbose mode.
-Causes
-.Nm
-to print debugging messages about its progress.
-This is helpful in
-debugging connection, authentication, and configuration problems.
-Multiple
-.Fl v
-options increases the verbosity.
-Maximum is 3.
-.It Fl x
-Disables X11 forwarding.
-.It Fl X
-Enables X11 forwarding.
-This can also be specified on a per-host basis in a configuration file.
-.Pp
-X11 forwarding should be enabled with caution.
-Users with the ability to bypass file permissions on the remote host
-(for the user's X authorization database)
-can access the local X11 display through the forwarded connection.
-An attacker may then be able to perform activities such as keystroke monitoring.
-.It Fl C
-Requests compression of all data (including stdin, stdout, stderr, and
-data for forwarded X11 and TCP/IP connections).
-The compression algorithm is the same used by
-.Xr gzip 1 ,
-and the
-.Dq level
-can be controlled by the
-.Cm CompressionLevel
-option for protocol version 1.
-Compression is desirable on modem lines and other
-slow connections, but will only slow down things on fast networks.
-The default value can be set on a host-by-host basis in the
-configuration files; see the
-.Cm Compression
-option.
-.It Fl F Ar configfile
-Specifies an alternative per-user configuration file.
-If a configuration file is given on the command line,
-the system-wide configuration file
-.Pq Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_config
-will be ignored.
-The default for the per-user configuration file is
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/config .
-.It Fl L Ar port:host:hostport
-Specifies that the given port on the local (client) host is to be
-forwarded to the given host and port on the remote side.
-This works by allocating a socket to listen to
-.Ar port
-on the local side, and whenever a connection is made to this port, the
-connection is forwarded over the secure channel, and a connection is
-made to
-.Ar host
-port
-.Ar hostport
-from the remote machine.
-Port forwardings can also be specified in the configuration file.
-Only root can forward privileged ports.
-IPv6 addresses can be specified with an alternative syntax:
-.Ar port/host/hostport
-.It Fl R Ar port:host:hostport
-Specifies that the given port on the remote (server) host is to be
-forwarded to the given host and port on the local side.
-This works by allocating a socket to listen to
-.Ar port
-on the remote side, and whenever a connection is made to this port, the
-connection is forwarded over the secure channel, and a connection is
-made to
-.Ar host
-port
-.Ar hostport
-from the local machine.
-Port forwardings can also be specified in the configuration file.
-Privileged ports can be forwarded only when
-logging in as root on the remote machine.
-IPv6 addresses can be specified with an alternative syntax:
-.Ar port/host/hostport
-.It Fl D Ar port
-Specifies a local
-.Dq dynamic
-application-level port forwarding.
-This works by allocating a socket to listen to
-.Ar port
-on the local side, and whenever a connection is made to this port, the
-connection is forwarded over the secure channel, and the application
-protocol is then used to determine where to connect to from the
-remote machine.
-Currently the SOCKS4 protocol is supported, and
-.Nm
-will act as a SOCKS4 server.
-Only root can forward privileged ports.
-Dynamic port forwardings can also be specified in the configuration file.
-.It Fl 1
-Forces
-.Nm
-to try protocol version 1 only.
-.It Fl 2
-Forces
-.Nm
-to try protocol version 2 only.
-.It Fl 4
-Forces
-.Nm
-to use IPv4 addresses only.
-.It Fl 6
-Forces
-.Nm
-to use IPv6 addresses only.
-.El
-.Sh CONFIGURATION FILES
-.Nm
-may additionally obtain configuration data from
-a per-user configuration file and a system-wide configuration file.
-The file format and configuration options are described in
-.Xr ssh_config 5 .
-.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-.Nm
-will normally set the following environment variables:
-.Bl -tag -width Ds
-.It Ev DISPLAY
-The
-.Ev DISPLAY
-variable indicates the location of the X11 server.
-It is automatically set by
-.Nm
-to point to a value of the form
-.Dq hostname:n
-where hostname indicates
-the host where the shell runs, and n is an integer >= 1.
-.Nm
-uses this special value to forward X11 connections over the secure
-channel.
-The user should normally not set
-.Ev DISPLAY
-explicitly, as that
-will render the X11 connection insecure (and will require the user to
-manually copy any required authorization cookies).
-.It Ev HOME
-Set to the path of the user's home directory.
-.It Ev LOGNAME
-Synonym for
-.Ev USER ;
-set for compatibility with systems that use this variable.
-.It Ev MAIL
-Set to the path of the user's mailbox.
-.It Ev PATH
-Set to the default
-.Ev PATH ,
-as specified when compiling
-.Nm ssh .
-.It Ev SSH_ASKPASS
-If
-.Nm
-needs a passphrase, it will read the passphrase from the current
-terminal if it was run from a terminal.
-If
-.Nm
-does not have a terminal associated with it but
-.Ev DISPLAY
-and
-.Ev SSH_ASKPASS
-are set, it will execute the program specified by
-.Ev SSH_ASKPASS
-and open an X11 window to read the passphrase.
-This is particularly useful when calling
-.Nm
-from a
-.Pa .Xsession
-or related script.
-(Note that on some machines it
-may be necessary to redirect the input from
-.Pa /dev/null
-to make this work.)
-.It Ev SSH_AUTH_SOCK
-Identifies the path of a unix-domain socket used to communicate with the
-agent.
-.It Ev SSH_CONNECTION
-Identifies the client and server ends of the connection.
-The variable contains
-four space-separated values: client ip-address, client port number,
-server ip-address and server port number.
-.It Ev SSH_ORIGINAL_COMMAND
-The variable contains the original command line if a forced command
-is executed.
-It can be used to extract the original arguments.
-.It Ev SSH_TTY
-This is set to the name of the tty (path to the device) associated
-with the current shell or command.
-If the current session has no tty,
-this variable is not set.
-.It Ev TZ
-The timezone variable is set to indicate the present timezone if it
-was set when the daemon was started (i.e., the daemon passes the value
-on to new connections).
-.It Ev USER
-Set to the name of the user logging in.
-.El
-.Pp
-Additionally,
-.Nm
-reads
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/environment ,
-and adds lines of the format
-.Dq VARNAME=value
-to the environment if the file exists and if users are allowed to
-change their environment.
-See the
-.Cm PermitUserEnvironment
-option in
-.Xr sshd_config 5 .
-.Sh FILES
-.Bl -tag -width Ds
-.It Pa $HOME/.ssh/known_hosts
-Records host keys for all hosts the user has logged into that are not
-in
-.Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts .
-See
-.Xr sshd 8 .
-.It Pa $HOME/.ssh/identity, $HOME/.ssh/id_dsa, $HOME/.ssh/id_rsa
-Contains the authentication identity of the user.
-They are for protocol 1 RSA, protocol 2 DSA, and protocol 2 RSA, respectively.
-These files
-contain sensitive data and should be readable by the user but not
-accessible by others (read/write/execute).
-Note that
-.Nm
-ignores a private key file if it is accessible by others.
-It is possible to specify a passphrase when
-generating the key; the passphrase will be used to encrypt the
-sensitive part of this file using 3DES.
-.It Pa $HOME/.ssh/identity.pub, $HOME/.ssh/id_dsa.pub, $HOME/.ssh/id_rsa.pub
-Contains the public key for authentication (public part of the
-identity file in human-readable form).
-The contents of the
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/identity.pub
-file should be added to
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys
-on all machines
-where the user wishes to log in using protocol version 1 RSA authentication.
-The contents of the
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/id_dsa.pub
-and
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/id_rsa.pub
-file should be added to
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys
-on all machines
-where the user wishes to log in using protocol version 2 DSA/RSA authentication.
-These files are not
-sensitive and can (but need not) be readable by anyone.
-These files are
-never used automatically and are not necessary; they are only provided for
-the convenience of the user.
-.It Pa $HOME/.ssh/config
-This is the per-user configuration file.
-The file format and configuration options are described in
-.Xr ssh_config 5 .
-.It Pa $HOME/.ssh/authorized_keys
-Lists the public keys (RSA/DSA) that can be used for logging in as this user.
-The format of this file is described in the
-.Xr sshd 8
-manual page.
-In the simplest form the format is the same as the .pub
-identity files.
-This file is not highly sensitive, but the recommended
-permissions are read/write for the user, and not accessible by others.
-.It Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
-Systemwide list of known host keys.
-This file should be prepared by the
-system administrator to contain the public host keys of all machines in the
-organization.
-This file should be world-readable.
-This file contains
-public keys, one per line, in the following format (fields separated
-by spaces): system name, public key and optional comment field.
-When different names are used
-for the same machine, all such names should be listed, separated by
-commas.
-The format is described on the
-.Xr sshd 8
-manual page.
-.Pp
-The canonical system name (as returned by name servers) is used by
-.Xr sshd 8
-to verify the client host when logging in; other names are needed because
-.Nm
-does not convert the user-supplied name to a canonical name before
-checking the key, because someone with access to the name servers
-would then be able to fool host authentication.
-.It Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_config
-Systemwide configuration file.
-The file format and configuration options are described in
-.Xr ssh_config 5 .
-.It Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key, /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key, /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key
-These three files contain the private parts of the host keys
-and are used for
-.Cm RhostsRSAAuthentication
-and
-.Cm HostbasedAuthentication .
-If the protocol version 1
-.Cm RhostsRSAAuthentication
-method is used,
-.Nm
-must be setuid root, since the host key is readable only by root.
-For protocol version 2,
-.Nm
-uses
-.Xr ssh-keysign 8
-to access the host keys for
-.Cm HostbasedAuthentication .
-This eliminates the requirement that
-.Nm
-be setuid root when that authentication method is used.
-By default
-.Nm
-is not setuid root.
-.It Pa $HOME/.rhosts
-This file is used in
-.Pa \&.rhosts
-authentication to list the
-host/user pairs that are permitted to log in.
-(Note that this file is
-also used by rlogin and rsh, which makes using this file insecure.)
-Each line of the file contains a host name (in the canonical form
-returned by name servers), and then a user name on that host,
-separated by a space.
-On some machines this file may need to be
-world-readable if the user's home directory is on a NFS partition,
-because
-.Xr sshd 8
-reads it as root.
-Additionally, this file must be owned by the user,
-and must not have write permissions for anyone else.
-The recommended
-permission for most machines is read/write for the user, and not
-accessible by others.
-.Pp
-Note that by default
-.Xr sshd 8
-will be installed so that it requires successful RSA host
-authentication before permitting \s+2.\s0rhosts authentication.
-If the server machine does not have the client's host key in
-.Pa /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts ,
-it can be stored in
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/known_hosts .
-The easiest way to do this is to
-connect back to the client from the server machine using ssh; this
-will automatically add the host key to
-.Pa $HOME/.ssh/known_hosts .
-.It Pa $HOME/.shosts
-This file is used exactly the same way as
-.Pa \&.rhosts .
-The purpose for
-having this file is to be able to use rhosts authentication with
-.Nm
-without permitting login with
-.Nm rlogin
-or
-.Xr rsh 1 .
-.It Pa /etc/hosts.equiv
-This file is used during
-.Pa \&.rhosts authentication.
-It contains
-canonical hosts names, one per line (the full format is described on
-the
-.Xr sshd 8
-manual page).
-If the client host is found in this file, login is
-automatically permitted provided client and server user names are the
-same.
-Additionally, successful RSA host authentication is normally
-required.
-This file should only be writable by root.
-.It Pa /etc/ssh/shosts.equiv
-This file is processed exactly as
-.Pa /etc/hosts.equiv .
-This file may be useful to permit logins using
-.Nm
-but not using rsh/rlogin.
-.It Pa /etc/ssh/sshrc
-Commands in this file are executed by
-.Nm
-when the user logs in just before the user's shell (or command) is started.
-See the
-.Xr sshd 8
-manual page for more information.
-.It Pa $HOME/.ssh/rc
-Commands in this file are executed by
-.Nm
-when the user logs in just before the user's shell (or command) is
-started.
-See the
-.Xr sshd 8
-manual page for more information.
-.It Pa $HOME/.ssh/environment
-Contains additional definitions for environment variables, see section
-.Sx ENVIRONMENT
-above.
-.El
-.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-.Nm
-exits with the exit status of the remote command or with 255
-if an error occurred.
-.Sh AUTHORS
-OpenSSH is a derivative of the original and free
-ssh 1.2.12 release by Tatu Ylonen.
-Aaron Campbell, Bob Beck, Markus Friedl, Niels Provos,
-Theo de Raadt and Dug Song
-removed many bugs, re-added newer features and
-created OpenSSH.
-Markus Friedl contributed the support for SSH
-protocol versions 1.5 and 2.0.
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr rsh 1 ,
-.Xr scp 1 ,
-.Xr sftp 1 ,
-.Xr ssh-add 1 ,
-.Xr ssh-agent 1 ,
-.Xr ssh-keygen 1 ,
-.Xr telnet 1 ,
-.Xr ssh_config 5 ,
-.Xr ssh-keysign 8 ,
-.Xr sshd 8
-.Rs
-.%A T. Ylonen
-.%A T. Kivinen
-.%A M. Saarinen
-.%A T. Rinne
-.%A S. Lehtinen
-.%T "SSH Protocol Architecture"
-.%N draft-ietf-secsh-architecture-12.txt
-.%D January 2002
-.%O work in progress material
-.Re
diff --git a/raw/man1/stat.1 b/raw/man1/stat.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ca475a..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/stat.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,165 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH STAT "1" "October 2003" "stat (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-stat \- display file or filesystem status
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B stat
-[\fIOPTION\fR] \fIFILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Display file or filesystem status.
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-filesystem\fR
-display filesystem status instead of file status
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR
-\fB\-\-format\fR=\fIFORMAT\fR use the specified FORMAT instead of the default
-.TP
-\fB\-L\fR, \fB\-\-dereference\fR
-follow links
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-terse\fR
-print the information in terse form
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-The valid format sequences for files (without \fB\-\-filesystem\fR):
-.TP
-%A
-Access rights in human readable form
-.TP
-%a
-Access rights in octal
-.TP
-%B
-The size in bytes of each block reported by `%b'
-.TP
-%b
-Number of blocks allocated (see %B)
-.TP
-%D
-Device number in hex
-.TP
-%d
-Device number in decimal
-.TP
-%F
-File type
-.TP
-%f
-Raw mode in hex
-.TP
-%G
-Group name of owner
-.TP
-%g
-Group ID of owner
-.TP
-%h
-Number of hard links
-.TP
-%i
-Inode number
-.TP
-%N
-Quoted File name with dereference if symbolic link
-.TP
-%n
-File name
-.TP
-%o
-IO block size
-.TP
-%s
-Total size, in bytes
-.TP
-%T
-Minor device type in hex
-.TP
-%t
-Major device type in hex
-.TP
-%U
-User name of owner
-.TP
-%u
-User ID of owner
-.TP
-%X
-Time of last access as seconds since Epoch
-.TP
-%x
-Time of last access
-.TP
-%Y
-Time of last modification as seconds since Epoch
-.TP
-%y
-Time of last modification
-.TP
-%Z
-Time of last change as seconds since Epoch
-.TP
-%z
-Time of last change
-.PP
-Valid format sequences for file systems:
-.TP
-%a
-Free blocks available to non-superuser
-.TP
-%b
-Total data blocks in file system
-.TP
-%c
-Total file nodes in file system
-.TP
-%d
-Free file nodes in file system
-.TP
-%f
-Free blocks in file system
-.TP
-%i
-File System id in hex
-.TP
-%l
-Maximum length of filenames
-.TP
-%n
-File name
-.TP
-%s
-Optimal transfer block size
-.TP
-%T
-Type in human readable form
-.TP
-%t
-Type in hex
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Michael Meskes.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B stat
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B stat
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info stat
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/strings.1 b/raw/man1/strings.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e62e91e..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/strings.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,236 +0,0 @@
-.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13
-.\"
-.\" Standard preamble:
-.\" ========================================================================
-.de Sh \" Subsection heading
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text
-.ft CW
-.nf
-.ne \\$1
-..
-.de Ve \" End verbatim text
-.ft R
-.fi
-..
-.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will
-.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left
-.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a
-.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to
-.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C'
-.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>.
-.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr
-.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p'
-.ie n \{\
-. ds -- \(*W-
-. ds PI pi
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch
-. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch
-. ds L" ""
-. ds R" ""
-. ds C` ""
-. ds C' ""
-'br\}
-.el\{\
-. ds -- \|\(em\|
-. ds PI \(*p
-. ds L" ``
-. ds R" ''
-'br\}
-.\"
-.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for
-.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index
-.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the
-.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion.
-.if \nF \{\
-. de IX
-. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2"
-..
-. nr % 0
-. rr F
-.\}
-.\"
-.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes
-.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents.
-.hy 0
-.\"
-.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2).
-.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts.
-. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds #H 0
-. ds #V .8m
-. ds #F .3m
-. ds #[ \f1
-. ds #] \fP
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m)
-. ds #V .6m
-. ds #F 0
-. ds #[ \&
-. ds #] \&
-.\}
-. \" simple accents for nroff and troff
-.if n \{\
-. ds ' \&
-. ds ` \&
-. ds ^ \&
-. ds , \&
-. ds ~ ~
-. ds /
-.\}
-.if t \{\
-. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u"
-. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u'
-. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u'
-.\}
-. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents
-.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V'
-.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#]
-.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H'
-.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u'
-.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#]
-.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#]
-.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e
-.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E
-. \" corrections for vroff
-.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u'
-.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u'
-. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr)
-.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \
-\{\
-. ds : e
-. ds 8 ss
-. ds o a
-. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga
-. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy
-. ds th \o'bp'
-. ds Th \o'LP'
-. ds ae ae
-. ds Ae AE
-.\}
-.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C
-.\" ========================================================================
-.\"
-.IX Title "STRINGS 1"
-.TH STRINGS 1 "2003-09-30" "binutils-2.14.90.0.6" "GNU Development Tools"
-.SH "NAME"
-strings \- print the strings of printable characters in files.
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-.IX Header "SYNOPSIS"
-strings [\fB\-afov\fR] [\fB\-\fR\fImin-len\fR]
- [\fB\-n\fR \fImin-len\fR] [\fB\-\-bytes=\fR\fImin-len\fR]
- [\fB\-t\fR \fIradix\fR] [\fB\-\-radix=\fR\fIradix\fR]
- [\fB\-e\fR \fIencoding\fR] [\fB\-\-encoding=\fR\fIencoding\fR]
- [\fB\-\fR] [\fB\-\-all\fR] [\fB\-\-print\-file\-name\fR]
- [\fB\-\-target=\fR\fIbfdname\fR]
- [\fB\-\-help\fR] [\fB\-\-version\fR] \fIfile\fR...
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.IX Header "DESCRIPTION"
-For each \fIfile\fR given, \s-1GNU\s0 \fBstrings\fR prints the printable
-character sequences that are at least 4 characters long (or the number
-given with the options below) and are followed by an unprintable
-character. By default, it only prints the strings from the initialized
-and loaded sections of object files; for other types of files, it prints
-the strings from the whole file.
-.PP
-\&\fBstrings\fR is mainly useful for determining the contents of non-text
-files.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.IX Header "OPTIONS"
-.IP "\fB\-a\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-a"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-all\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--all"
-.IP "\fB\-\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-"
-.PD
-Do not scan only the initialized and loaded sections of object files;
-scan the whole files.
-.IP "\fB\-f\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-f"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-print\-file\-name\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--print-file-name"
-.PD
-Print the name of the file before each string.
-.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--help"
-Print a summary of the program usage on the standard output and exit.
-.IP "\fB\-\fR\fImin-len\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-min-len"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-n\fR \fImin-len\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-n min-len"
-.IP "\fB\-\-bytes=\fR\fImin-len\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--bytes=min-len"
-.PD
-Print sequences of characters that are at least \fImin-len\fR characters
-long, instead of the default 4.
-.IP "\fB\-o\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-o"
-Like \fB\-t o\fR. Some other versions of \fBstrings\fR have \fB\-o\fR
-act like \fB\-t d\fR instead. Since we can not be compatible with both
-ways, we simply chose one.
-.IP "\fB\-t\fR \fIradix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-t radix"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-radix=\fR\fIradix\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--radix=radix"
-.PD
-Print the offset within the file before each string. The single
-character argument specifies the radix of the offset\-\-\-\fBo\fR for
-octal, \fBx\fR for hexadecimal, or \fBd\fR for decimal.
-.IP "\fB\-e\fR \fIencoding\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-e encoding"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-encoding=\fR\fIencoding\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--encoding=encoding"
-.PD
-Select the character encoding of the strings that are to be found.
-Possible values for \fIencoding\fR are: \fBs\fR = single\-7\-bit\-byte
-characters (\s-1ASCII\s0, \s-1ISO\s0 8859, etc., default), \fBS\fR =
-single\-8\-bit\-byte characters, \fBb\fR = 16\-bit bigendian, \fBl\fR =
-16\-bit littleendian, \fBB\fR = 32\-bit bigendian, \fBL\fR = 32\-bit
-littleendian. Useful for finding wide character strings.
-.IP "\fB\-\-target=\fR\fIbfdname\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--target=bfdname"
-Specify an object code format other than your system's default format.
-.IP "\fB\-v\fR" 4
-.IX Item "-v"
-.PD 0
-.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4
-.IX Item "--version"
-.PD
-Print the program version number on the standard output and exit.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.IX Header "SEE ALSO"
-\&\fIar\fR\|(1), \fInm\fR\|(1), \fIobjdump\fR\|(1), \fIranlib\fR\|(1), \fIreadelf\fR\|(1)
-and the Info entries for \fIbinutils\fR.
-.SH "COPYRIGHT"
-.IX Header "COPYRIGHT"
-Copyright (c) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
-2001, 2002, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.PP
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
-or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
-with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
-Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
-section entitled ``\s-1GNU\s0 Free Documentation License''.
diff --git a/raw/man1/stty.1 b/raw/man1/stty.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c017d0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/stty.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,401 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH STTY "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-stty \- change and print terminal line settings
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B stty
-[\fI-F DEVICE\fR] [\fI--file=DEVICE\fR] [\fISETTING\fR]...
-.br
-.B stty
-[\fI-F DEVICE\fR] [\fI--file=DEVICE\fR] [\fI-a|--all\fR]
-.br
-.B stty
-[\fI-F DEVICE\fR] [\fI--file=DEVICE\fR] [\fI-g|--save\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print or change terminal characteristics.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-all\fR
-print all current settings in human-readable form
-.TP
-\fB\-g\fR, \fB\-\-save\fR
-print all current settings in a stty-readable form
-.TP
-\fB\-F\fR, \fB\-\-file\fR=\fIDEVICE\fR
-open and use the specified DEVICE instead of stdin
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Optional - before SETTING indicates negation. An * marks non-POSIX
-settings. The underlying system defines which settings are available.
-.SS "Special characters:"
-.TP
-* dsusp CHAR
-CHAR will send a terminal stop signal once input flushed
-.TP
-eof CHAR
-CHAR will send an end of file (terminate the input)
-.TP
-eol CHAR
-CHAR will end the line
-.TP
-* eol2 CHAR
-alternate CHAR for ending the line
-.TP
-erase CHAR
-CHAR will erase the last character typed
-.TP
-intr CHAR
-CHAR will send an interrupt signal
-.TP
-kill CHAR
-CHAR will erase the current line
-.TP
-* lnext CHAR
-CHAR will enter the next character quoted
-.TP
-quit CHAR
-CHAR will send a quit signal
-.TP
-* rprnt CHAR
-CHAR will redraw the current line
-.TP
-start CHAR
-CHAR will restart the output after stopping it
-.TP
-stop CHAR
-CHAR will stop the output
-.TP
-susp CHAR
-CHAR will send a terminal stop signal
-.TP
-* swtch CHAR
-CHAR will switch to a different shell layer
-.TP
-* werase CHAR
-CHAR will erase the last word typed
-.SS "Special settings:"
-.TP
-N
-set the input and output speeds to N bauds
-.TP
-* cols N
-tell the kernel that the terminal has N columns
-.TP
-* columns N
-same as cols N
-.TP
-ispeed N
-set the input speed to N
-.TP
-* line N
-use line discipline N
-.TP
-min N
-with \fB\-icanon\fR, set N characters minimum for a completed read
-.TP
-ospeed N
-set the output speed to N
-.TP
-* rows N
-tell the kernel that the terminal has N rows
-.TP
-* size
-print the number of rows and columns according to the kernel
-.TP
-speed
-print the terminal speed
-.TP
-time N
-with \fB\-icanon\fR, set read timeout of N tenths of a second
-.SS "Control settings:"
-.TP
-[-]clocal
-disable modem control signals
-.TP
-[-]cread
-allow input to be received
-.TP
-* [-]crtscts
-enable RTS/CTS handshaking
-.TP
-csN
-set character size to N bits, N in [5..8]
-.TP
-[-]cstopb
-use two stop bits per character (one with `-')
-.TP
-[-]hup
-send a hangup signal when the last process closes the tty
-.TP
-[-]hupcl
-same as [-]hup
-.TP
-[-]parenb
-generate parity bit in output and expect parity bit in input
-.TP
-[-]parodd
-set odd parity (even with `-')
-.SS "Input settings:"
-.TP
-[-]brkint
-breaks cause an interrupt signal
-.TP
-[-]icrnl
-translate carriage return to newline
-.TP
-[-]ignbrk
-ignore break characters
-.TP
-[-]igncr
-ignore carriage return
-.TP
-[-]ignpar
-ignore characters with parity errors
-.TP
-* [-]imaxbel
-beep and do not flush a full input buffer on a character
-.TP
-[-]inlcr
-translate newline to carriage return
-.TP
-[-]inpck
-enable input parity checking
-.TP
-[-]istrip
-clear high (8th) bit of input characters
-.TP
-* [-]iuclc
-translate uppercase characters to lowercase
-.TP
-* [-]ixany
-let any character restart output, not only start character
-.TP
-[-]ixoff
-enable sending of start/stop characters
-.TP
-[-]ixon
-enable XON/XOFF flow control
-.TP
-[-]parmrk
-mark parity errors (with a 255-0-character sequence)
-.TP
-[-]tandem
-same as [-]ixoff
-.SS "Output settings:"
-.TP
-* bsN
-backspace delay style, N in [0..1]
-.TP
-* crN
-carriage return delay style, N in [0..3]
-.TP
-* ffN
-form feed delay style, N in [0..1]
-.TP
-* nlN
-newline delay style, N in [0..1]
-.TP
-* [-]ocrnl
-translate carriage return to newline
-.TP
-* [-]ofdel
-use delete characters for fill instead of null characters
-.TP
-* [-]ofill
-use fill (padding) characters instead of timing for delays
-.TP
-* [-]olcuc
-translate lowercase characters to uppercase
-.TP
-* [-]onlcr
-translate newline to carriage return-newline
-.TP
-* [-]onlret
-newline performs a carriage return
-.TP
-* [-]onocr
-do not print carriage returns in the first column
-.TP
-[-]opost
-postprocess output
-.TP
-* tabN
-horizontal tab delay style, N in [0..3]
-.TP
-* tabs
-same as tab0
-.TP
-* \fB\-tabs\fR
-same as tab3
-.TP
-* vtN
-vertical tab delay style, N in [0..1]
-.SS "Local settings:"
-.TP
-[-]crterase
-echo erase characters as backspace-space-backspace
-.TP
-* crtkill
-kill all line by obeying the echoprt and echoe settings
-.TP
-* \fB\-crtkill\fR
-kill all line by obeying the echoctl and echok settings
-.TP
-* [-]ctlecho
-echo control characters in hat notation (`^c')
-.TP
-[-]echo
-echo input characters
-.TP
-* [-]echoctl
-same as [-]ctlecho
-.TP
-[-]echoe
-same as [-]crterase
-.TP
-[-]echok
-echo a newline after a kill character
-.TP
-* [-]echoke
-same as [-]crtkill
-.TP
-[-]echonl
-echo newline even if not echoing other characters
-.TP
-* [-]echoprt
-echo erased characters backward, between `\e' and '/'
-.TP
-[-]icanon
-enable erase, kill, werase, and rprnt special characters
-.TP
-[-]iexten
-enable non-POSIX special characters
-.TP
-[-]isig
-enable interrupt, quit, and suspend special characters
-.TP
-[-]noflsh
-disable flushing after interrupt and quit special characters
-.TP
-* [-]prterase
-same as [-]echoprt
-.TP
-* [-]tostop
-stop background jobs that try to write to the terminal
-.TP
-* [-]xcase
-with icanon, escape with `\e' for uppercase characters
-.SS "Combination settings:"
-.TP
-* [-]LCASE
-same as [-]lcase
-.TP
-cbreak
-same as \fB\-icanon\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-cbreak\fR
-same as icanon
-.TP
-cooked
-same as brkint ignpar istrip icrnl ixon opost isig
-icanon, eof and eol characters to their default values
-.TP
-\fB\-cooked\fR
-same as raw
-.TP
-crt
-same as echoe echoctl echoke
-.TP
-dec
-same as echoe echoctl echoke \fB\-ixany\fR intr ^c erase 0177
-kill ^u
-.TP
-* [-]decctlq
-same as [-]ixany
-.TP
-ek
-erase and kill characters to their default values
-.TP
-evenp
-same as parenb \fB\-parodd\fR cs7
-.TP
-\fB\-evenp\fR
-same as \fB\-parenb\fR cs8
-.TP
-* [-]lcase
-same as xcase iuclc olcuc
-.TP
-litout
-same as \fB\-parenb\fR \fB\-istrip\fR \fB\-opost\fR cs8
-.TP
-\fB\-litout\fR
-same as parenb istrip opost cs7
-.TP
-nl
-same as \fB\-icrnl\fR \fB\-onlcr\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-nl\fR
-same as icrnl \fB\-inlcr\fR \fB\-igncr\fR onlcr \fB\-ocrnl\fR \fB\-onlret\fR
-.TP
-oddp
-same as parenb parodd cs7
-.TP
-\fB\-oddp\fR
-same as \fB\-parenb\fR cs8
-.TP
-[-]parity
-same as [-]evenp
-.TP
-pass8
-same as \fB\-parenb\fR \fB\-istrip\fR cs8
-.TP
-\fB\-pass8\fR
-same as parenb istrip cs7
-.TP
-raw
-same as \fB\-ignbrk\fR \fB\-brkint\fR \fB\-ignpar\fR \fB\-parmrk\fR \fB\-inpck\fR \fB\-istrip\fR
-\fB\-inlcr\fR \fB\-igncr\fR \fB\-icrnl\fR \fB\-ixon\fR \fB\-ixoff\fR \fB\-iuclc\fR \fB\-ixany\fR
-\fB\-imaxbel\fR \fB\-opost\fR \fB\-isig\fR \fB\-icanon\fR \fB\-xcase\fR min 1 time 0
-.TP
-\fB\-raw\fR
-same as cooked
-.TP
-sane
-same as cread \fB\-ignbrk\fR brkint \fB\-inlcr\fR \fB\-igncr\fR icrnl
-\fB\-ixoff\fR \fB\-iuclc\fR \fB\-ixany\fR imaxbel opost \fB\-olcuc\fR \fB\-ocrnl\fR onlcr
-\fB\-onocr\fR \fB\-onlret\fR \fB\-ofill\fR \fB\-ofdel\fR nl0 cr0 tab0 bs0 vt0 ff0
-isig icanon iexten echo echoe echok \fB\-echonl\fR \fB\-noflsh\fR
-\fB\-xcase\fR \fB\-tostop\fR \fB\-echoprt\fR echoctl echoke, all special
-characters to their default values.
-.PP
-Handle the tty line connected to standard input. Without arguments,
-prints baud rate, line discipline, and deviations from stty sane. In
-settings, CHAR is taken literally, or coded as in ^c, 0x37, 0177 or
-127; special values ^- or undef used to disable special characters.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B stty
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B stty
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info stty
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/su.1 b/raw/man1/su.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 69bc0fc..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/su.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH SU "1" "October 2003" "su (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-su \- run a shell with substitute user and group IDs
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B su
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fI-\fR] [\fIUSER \fR[\fIARG\fR]...]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Change the effective user id and group id to that of USER.
-.TP
--, \fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-login\fR
-make the shell a login shell
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-commmand\fR=\fICOMMAND\fR
-pass a single COMMAND to the shell with \fB\-c\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-fast\fR
-pass \fB\-f\fR to the shell (for csh or tcsh)
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-preserve\-environment\fR
-do not reset environment variables
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR
-same as \fB\-m\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-shell\fR=\fISHELL\fR
-run SHELL if /etc/shells allows it
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-A mere - implies \fB\-l\fR. If USER not given, assume root.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B su
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B su
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info su
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/sum.1 b/raw/man1/sum.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 9d4ded8..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/sum.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,46 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH SUM "1" "October 2003" "sum (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-sum \- checksum and count the blocks in a file
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B sum
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print checksum and block counts for each FILE.
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR
-defeat \fB\-s\fR, use BSD sum algorithm, use 1K blocks
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-sysv\fR
-use System V sum algorithm, use 512 bytes blocks
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Kayvan Aghaiepour and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B sum
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B sum
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info sum
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/suspend.1 b/raw/man1/suspend.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/suspend.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/svn.1 b/raw/man1/svn.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c11f3eb..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/svn.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-.\" You can view this file with:
-.\" nroff -man [filename]
-.\"
-.TH svn 1
-.SH NAME
-svn \- Subversion command line client tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP
-\fBsvn\fP \fIcommand\fP [\fIoptions\fP] [\fIargs\fP]
-.SH OVERVIEW
-Subversion is a version control system, which allows you to keep old
-versions of files and directories (usually source code), keep a log of
-who, when, and why changes occurred, etc., like CVS, RCS or SCCS.
-\fBSubversion\fP keeps a single copy of the master sources. This copy
-is called the source ``repository''; it contains all the information
-to permit extracting previous versions of those files at any time.
-
-For more information about the Subversion project, visit
-http://subversion.tigris.org.
-
-Documentation for Subversion and its tools, including detailed usage
-explanations of the \fBsvn\fP, \fBsvnadmin\fP, \fBsvnserve\fP and
-\fBsvnlook\fP programs, historical background, philosophical
-approaches and reasonings, etc., can be found at
-http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.
-
-Run `svn help' to access the built-in tool documentation.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/raw/man1/svnadmin.1 b/raw/man1/svnadmin.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c31681..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/svnadmin.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-.\" You can view this file with:
-.\" nroff -man [filename]
-.\"
-.TH svnadmin 1
-.SH NAME
-svnadmin \- Subversion repository administration tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP
-\fBsvnadmin\fP \fIcommand\fP \fI/path/to/repos\fP [\fIoptions\fP] [\fIargs\fP]
-.SH OVERVIEW
-Subversion is a version control system, which allows you to keep old
-versions of files and directories (usually source code), keep a log of
-who, when, and why changes occurred, etc., like CVS, RCS or SCCS.
-\fBSubversion\fP keeps a single copy of the master sources. This copy
-is called the source ``repository''; it contains all the information
-to permit extracting previous versions of those files at any time.
-
-For more information about the Subversion project, visit
-http://subversion.tigris.org.
-
-Documentation for Subversion and its tools, including detailed usage
-explanations of the \fBsvn\fP, \fBsvnadmin\fP, \fBsvnserve\fP and
-\fBsvnlook\fP programs, historical background, philosophical
-approaches and reasonings, etc., can be found at
-http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.
-
-Run `svnadmin help' to access the built-in tool documentation.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/raw/man1/svndumpfilter.1 b/raw/man1/svndumpfilter.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 19ffe7f..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/svndumpfilter.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-.\" You can view this file with:
-.\" nroff -man [filename]
-.\"
-.TH svndumpfilter 1
-.SH NAME
-svndumpfilter \- Filter a subversion repository 'dumpfile'.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP
-\fBsvndumpfilter\fP \fIcommand\fP [\fIoptions\fP & \fIargs\fP]
-.SH OVERVIEW
-Subversion is a version control system, which allows you to keep old
-versions of files and directories (usually source code), keep a log of
-who, when, and why changes occurred, etc., like CVS, RCS or SCCS.
-\fBSubversion\fP keeps a single copy of the master sources. This copy
-is called the source ``repository''; it contains all the information
-to permit extracting previous versions of those files at any time.
-
-For more information about the Subversion project, visit
-http://subversion.tigris.org.
-
-Documentation for Subversion and its tools, including detailed usage
-explanations of the \fBsvn\fP, \fBsvnadmin\fP, \fBsvnserve\fP and
-\fBsvnlook\fP programs, historical background, philosophical
-approaches and reasonings, etc., can be found at
-http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.
-
-Run `svndumpfilter help' to access the built-in tool documentation.
diff --git a/raw/man1/svnlook.1 b/raw/man1/svnlook.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 473c617..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/svnlook.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-.\" You can view this file with:
-.\" nroff -man [filename]
-.\"
-.TH svnlook 1
-.SH NAME
-svnlook \- Subversion repository examination tool
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP
-\fBsvnlook\fP \fIcommand\fP \fI/path/to/repos\fP [\fIoptions\fP] [\fIargs\fP]
-.SH OVERVIEW
-Subversion is a version control system, which allows you to keep old
-versions of files and directories (usually source code), keep a log of
-who, when, and why changes occurred, etc., like CVS, RCS or SCCS.
-\fBSubversion\fP keeps a single copy of the master sources. This copy
-is called the source ``repository''; it contains all the information
-to permit extracting previous versions of those files at any time.
-
-For more information about the Subversion project, visit
-http://subversion.tigris.org.
-
-Documentation for Subversion and its tools, including detailed usage
-explanations of the \fBsvn\fP, \fBsvnadmin\fP, \fBsvnserve\fP and
-\fBsvnlook\fP programs, historical background, philosophical
-approaches and reasonings, etc., can be found at
-http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.
-
-Run `svnlook help' to access the built-in tool documentation.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/raw/man1/svnversion.1 b/raw/man1/svnversion.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d40658..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/svnversion.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-.\" You can view this file with:
-.\" nroff -man [filename]
-.\"
-.TH svnversion 1
-.SH NAME
-svnversion \- Produce a compact version number for a working copy.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP
-\fBsvnversion\fP wc_path [\fItrail_url\fP]
-.SH OVERVIEW
-Subversion is a version control system, which allows you to keep old
-versions of files and directories (usually source code), keep a log of
-who, when, and why changes occurred, etc., like CVS, RCS or SCCS.
-\fBSubversion\fP keeps a single copy of the master sources. This copy
-is called the source ``repository''; it contains all the information
-to permit extracting previous versions of those files at any time.
-
-For more information about the Subversion project, visit
-http://subversion.tigris.org.
-
-Documentation for Subversion and its tools, including detailed usage
-explanations of the \fBsvn\fP, \fBsvnadmin\fP, \fBsvnserve\fP and
-\fBsvnlook\fP programs, historical background, philosophical
-approaches and reasonings, etc., can be found at
-http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.
-
-Run `svnversion' with no arguments to access the built-in tool
-documentation.
diff --git a/raw/man1/sync.1 b/raw/man1/sync.1
deleted file mode 100644
index e853e06..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/sync.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH SYNC "1" "October 2003" "sync (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-sync \- flush filesystem buffers
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B sync
-[\fIOPTION\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Force changed blocks to disk, update the super block.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B sync
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B sync
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info sync
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/tac.1 b/raw/man1/tac.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a7d16a9..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/tac.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH TAC "1" "October 2003" "tac (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-tac \- concatenate and print files in reverse
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tac
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Write each FILE to standard output, last line first.
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-before\fR
-attach the separator before instead of after
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-regex\fR
-interpret the separator as a regular expression
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-separator\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-use STRING as the separator instead of newline
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Jay Lepreau and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B tac
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B tac
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info tac
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/tail.1 b/raw/man1/tail.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a6fdb8..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/tail.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH TAIL "1" "October 2003" "tail (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-tail \- output the last part of files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tail
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print the last 10 lines of each FILE to standard output.
-With more than one FILE, precede each with a header giving the file name.
-With no FILE, or when FILE is -, read standard input.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-retry\fR
-keep trying to open a file even if it is
-inaccessible when tail starts or if it becomes
-inaccessible later \fB\-\-\fR useful only with \fB\-f\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-bytes\fR=\fIN\fR
-output the last N bytes
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-follow[=\fR{name|descriptor}]
-output appended data as the file grows;
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-follow\fR, and \fB\-\-follow\fR=\fIdescriptor\fR are
-equivalent
-.TP
-\fB\-F\fR
-same as \fB\-\-follow\fR=\fIname\fR \fB\-\-retry\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-lines\fR=\fIN\fR
-output the last N lines, instead of the last 10
-.TP
-\fB\-\-max\-unchanged\-stats\fR=\fIN\fR
-with \fB\-\-follow\fR=\fIname\fR, reopen a FILE which has not
-changed size after N (default 5) iterations
-to see if it has been unlinked or renamed
-(this is the usual case of rotated log files)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-pid\fR=\fIPID\fR
-with \fB\-f\fR, terminate after process ID, PID dies
-.TP
-\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR
-never output headers giving file names
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-sleep\-interval\fR=\fIS\fR
-with \fB\-f\fR, sleep for approximately S seconds
-(default 1.0) between iterations.
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-always output headers giving file names
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-If the first character of N (the number of bytes or lines) is a `+',
-print beginning with the Nth item from the start of each file, otherwise,
-print the last N items in the file. N may have a multiplier suffix:
-b for 512, k for 1024, m for 1048576 (1 Meg).
-.PP
-With \fB\-\-follow\fR (-f), tail defaults to following the file descriptor, which
-means that even if a tail'ed file is renamed, tail will continue to track
-its end. This default behavior is not desirable when you really want to
-track the actual name of the file, not the file descriptor (e.g., log
-rotation). Use \fB\-\-follow\fR=\fIname\fR in that case. That causes tail to track the
-named file by reopening it periodically to see if it has been removed and
-recreated by some other program.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Paul Rubin, David MacKenzie, Ian Lance Taylor, and Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B tail
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B tail
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info tail
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/tar.1 b/raw/man1/tar.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d60127..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/tar.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,813 +0,0 @@
-.TH TAR 1 "Mar 2010" "GNU" "tar"
-.SH NAME
-tar \- The GNU version of the tape archiver (tar) utility
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tar
-.I <operation> [options]
-
-.I Operations:
-.nf
-.B [-]A --catenate --concatenate
-.B [-]c --create
-.B [-]d --diff --compare
-.B [-]r --append
-.B [-]t --list
-.B [-]u --update
-.B [-]x --extract --get
-.B --delete
-.fi
-
-.I Common Options:
-.nf
-.BR -C ", " --directory " DIR"
-.BR -f ", " --file " FILE"
-.BR -j ", " --bzip2
-.BR -J ", " --xz
-.BR -p ", " --preserve-permissions
-.BR -v ", " --verbose
-.BR -z ", " --gzip
-.fi
-
-.I All Options:
-.br
-[
-.BR -a ", " --auto-compress
-]
-[
-.BR --add-file " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR --anchored
-]
-[
-.BR --atime-preserve
-]
-[
-.BR -b ", " --blocking-factor " N"
-]
-[
-.BR -B ", " --read-full-records
-]
-[
-.BR --backup " BACKUP-TYPE"
-]
-[
-.BR --block-compress
-]
-[
-.BR -C ", " --directory " DIR"
-]
-[
-.BR --checkpoint
-]
-[
-.BR --delay-directory-restore
-]
-[
-.BR --exclude " PATTERN"
-]
-[
-.BR --exclude-caches
-]
-[
-.BR --exclude-caches-all
-]
-[
-.BR --exclude-caches-under
-]
-[
-.BR --exclude-tag " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR --exclude-tag-all " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR --exclude-tag-under " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR -f ", " --file " [HOSTNAME:]FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR -F ", " --info-script " FILE, " --new-volume-script " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR --force-local
-]
-[
-.BR --format " FORMAT"
-]
-[
-.BR -g ", " --listed-incremental " SNAPSHOT"
-]
-[
-.BR -G ", " --incremental
-]
-[
-.BR --group " GROUP"
-]
-[
-.BR -h ", " --dereference
-]
-[
-.BR --help
-]
-[
-.BR -i ", " --ignore-zeros
-]
-[
-.BR -I ", " --use-compress-program " PROG"
-]
-[
-.BR --ignore-case
-]
-[
-.BR --ignore-command-error
-]
-[
-.BR --ignore-failed-read
-]
-[
-.BR --index-file " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR -j ", " --bzip2
-]
-[
-.BR -J ", " --xz
-]
-[
-.BR -k ", " --keep-old-files
-]
-[
-.BR -K ", " --starting-file " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR --keep-newer-files
-]
-[
-.BR -l ", " --check-links
-]
-[
-.BR -L ", " --tape-length " N"
-]
-[
-.BR --lzip
-]
-[
-.BR --lzma
-]
-[
-.BR --lzop
-]
-[
-.BR -m ", " --touch ", " --modification-time
-]
-[
-.BR -M ", " --multi-volume
-]
-[
-.BR --mode " PERMISSIONS"
-]
-[
-.BR --mtime " DATE"
-]
-[
-.BR -N ", " --after-date " DATE, " --newer " DATE"
-]
-[
-.BR --newer-mtime " DATE"
-]
-[
-.BR --no-anchored
-]
-[
-.BR --no-auto-compress
-]
-[
-.BR --no-delay-directory-restore
-]
-[
-.BR --no-ignore-case
-]
-[
-.BR --no-ignore-command-error
-]
-[
-.BR --no-overwrite-dir
-]
-[
-.BR --no-quote-chars
-]
-[
-.BR --no-recursion
-]
-[
-.BR --no-same-permissions
-]
-[
-.BR --no-unquote
-]
-[
-.BR --no-wildcards
-]
-[
-.BR --no-wildcards-match-slash
-]
-[
-.BR --null
-]
-[
-.BR --numeric-owner
-]
-[
-.BR -o ", " --old-archive ", " --portability ", " --no-same-owner
-]
-[
-.BR -O ", " --to-stdout
-]
-[
-.BR --occurrence " NUM"
-]
-[
-.BR --one-file-system
-]
-[
-.BR --overwrite
-]
-[
-.BR --overwrite-dir
-]
-[
-.BR --owner " USER"
-]
-[
-.BR -p ", " --same-permissions ", " --preserve-permissions
-]
-[
-.BR -P ", " --absolute-names
-]
-[
-.BR --pax-option " KEYWORD-LIST"
-]
-[
-.BR --posix
-]
-[
-.BR --preserve
-]
-[
-.BR --quote-chars " STRING"
-]
-[
-.BR --quote-style " STYLE"
-]
-[
-.BR -R ", " --block-number
-]
-[
-.BR --record-size " SIZE"
-]
-[
-.BR --recursion
-]
-[
-.BR --recursive-unlink
-]
-[
-.BR --remove-files
-]
-[
-.BR --restrict
-]
-[
-.BR --rmt-command " CMD"
-]
-[
-.BR --rsh-command " CMD"
-]
-[
-.BR -s ", " --same-order ", " --preserve-order
-]
-[
-.BR -S ", " --sparse
-]
-[
-.BR --same-owner
-]
-[
-.BR --show-defaults
-]
-[
-.BR --show-omitted-dirs
-]
-[
-.BR --show-transformed-names ", " --show-stored-names
-]
-[
-.BR --strip-components " NUMBER"
-]
-[
-.BR --suffix " SUFFIX"
-]
-[
-.BR -T ", " --files-from " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR --test-label
-]
-[
-.BR --to-command " COMMAND"
-]
-[
-.BR --transform " EXPRESSION"
-]
-[
-.BR --totals
-]
-[
-.BR -U ", " --unlink-first
-]
-[
-.BR --unquote
-]
-[
-.BR --utc
-]
-[
-.BR -v ", " --verbose
-]
-[
-.BR -V ", " --label " NAME"
-]
-[
-.BR --version
-]
-[
-.BR --volno-file " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR -w ", " --interactive ", " --confirmation
-]
-[
-.BR -W ", " --verify
-]
-[
-.BR --wildcards
-]
-[
-.BR --wildcards-match-slash
-]
-[
-.BR -X ", " --exclude-from " FILE"
-]
-[
-.BR -z ", " --gzip ", " --gunzip ", " --ungzip
-]
-[
-.BR -Z ", " --compress ", " --uncompress
-]
-[
-.BR -[0-7][lmh]
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page documents the GNU version of \fBtar\fR, an archiving
-program designed to store and extract files from an archive file known
-as a \fItarfile\fR. A \fItarfile\fR may be made on a tape drive,
-however, it is also common to write a \fItarfile\fR to a normal file.
-The first argument to \fBtar\fR must be one of the options \fBAcdrtux\fR,
-followed by any optional functions. The final arguments to \fBtar\fR
-are the names of the files or directories which should be archived. The
-use of a directory name always implies that the subdirectories below
-should be included in the archive.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.TP
-.B tar -xvf foo.tar
-verbosely extract foo.tar
-.TP
-.B tar -xzf foo.tar.gz
-extract gzipped foo.tar.gz
-.TP
-.B tar -cjf foo.tar.bz2 bar/
-create bzipped tar archive of the directory bar called foo.tar.bz2
-.TP
-.B tar -xjf foo.tar.bz2 -C bar/
-extract bzipped foo.tar.bz2 after changing directory to bar
-.TP
-.B tar -xzf foo.tar.gz blah.txt
-extract the file blah.txt from foo.tar.gz
-.P
-Note: When working with archives, specifying the compression option is often
-times unnecessary as \fBtar\fR will automatically detect the compression type
-based on the suffix of the archive.
-.SH "FUNCTION LETTERS"
-.TP
-.B One of the following options must be used:
-.TP
-.BR -A ", " --catenate ", " --concatenate
-append tar files to an archive
-.TP
-.BR -c ", " --create
-create a new archive
-.TP
-.BR -d ", " --diff ", " --compare
-find differences between archive and file system
-.TP
-.BR -r ", " --append
-append files to the end of an archive
-.TP
-.BR -t ", " --list
-list the contents of an archive
-.TP
-.BR -u ", " --update
-only append files that are newer than the existing in archive
-.TP
-.BR -x ", " --extract ", " --get
-extract files from an archive
-.TP
-.BR --delete
-delete from the archive (not for use on magnetic tapes!)
-.SH "COMMON OPTIONS"
-.TP
-.BR -C ", " --directory " DIR"
-change to directory DIR
-.TP
-.BR -f ", " --file " [HOSTNAME:]FILE"
-use archive file or device FILE (default is "-", meaning stdin/stdout)
-.TP
-.BR -j ", " --bzip2
-filter archive through bzip2; use to decompress .bz2 files
-.TP
-.BR -J ", " --xz
-filter archive through xz; use to decompress .xz files
-.TP
-.BR -p ", " --preserve-permissions
-extract all protection information
-.TP
-.BR -v ", " --verbose
-verbosely list files processed
-.TP
-.BR -z ", " --gzip ", " --ungzip
-filter the archive through gzip
-.SH "ALL OPTIONS"
-.TP
-.BR -a ", " --auto-compress
-use archive suffix to determine the compression program
-.TP
-.BR --add-file " FILE"
-add specified FILE to the archive (useful if FILE starts with a dash)
-.TP
-.BR --anchored
-patterns will match the start of file names
-.TP
-.BR --atime-preserve
-don't change access times of files that are archived
-.TP
-.BR -b ", " --blocking-factor " N"
-block size of Nx512 bytes (default N=20)
-.TP
-.BR -B ", " --read-full-blocks
-reblock as we read (for reading 4.2BSD pipes)
-.TP
-.BR --backup " BACKUP-TYPE"
-backup files instead of deleting them using BACKUP-TYPE simple or
-numbered
-.TP
-.BR --block-compress
-block the output of compression program for tapes
-.TP
-.BR -C ", " --directory " DIR"
-change to directory DIR
-.TP
-.BR --checkpoint
-print directory names while reading the archive
-.TP
-.BR --delay-directory-restore
-delay setting modification times and permissions of extracted directories
-until the end of extraction
-.TP
-.BR --exclude " PATTERN"
-exclude files based upon PATTERN
-.TP
-.BR --exclude-caches
-exclude directories that contain a cache directory tag
-.TP
-.BR --exclude-tag " FILE"
-exclude directories that contain a file named FILE
-.TP
-.BR -f ", " --file " [HOSTNAME:]FILE"
-use archive file or device FILE (default "-", meaning stdin/stdout)
-.TP
-.BR -F ", " --info-script " FILE, " --new-volume-script " FILE"
-run script at end of each tape (implies \fI--multi-volume\fR)
-.TP
-.BR --force-local
-archive file is local even if its name contains a colon
-.TP
-.BR --format " FORMAT"
-selects the format of the created archive
-.nf
-\fIv7\fR - Unix V7
-\fIoldgnu\fR - GNU tar <=1.12
-\fIgnu\fR - GNU tar 1.13
-\fIustar\fR - POSIX.1-1988
-\fIposix\fR - POSIX.1-2001
-.fi
-.TP
-.BR -g ", " --listed-incremental " SNAPSHOT"
-create/list/extract new GNU-format incremental backup
-.TP
-.BR --group " GROUP"
-give files added to the archive a group id of GROUP instead of the group id
-of the source file; this option does not affect extraction
-.TP
-.BR -G ", " --incremental
-create/list/extract old GNU-format incremental backup
-.TP
-.BR -h ", " --dereference
-don't archive symlinks; archive the files they point to
-.TP
-.BR --help
-like this manpage, but not as cool
-.TP
-.BR -i ", " --ignore-zeros
-ignore blocks of zeros in archive (normally mean EOF)
-.TP
-.BR -I ", " --use-compress-program " PROG"
-access the archive through PROG (which is generally a compression program;
-it must accept the \fI-d\fR option)
-.TP
-.BR --ignore-case
-ignore case when excluding files
-.TP
-.BR --ignore-command-error
-ignore exit codes of subprocesses
-.TP
-.BR --ignore-failed-read
-don't exit with non-zero status on unreadable files
-.TP
-.BR --index-file " FILE"
-send verbose output to FILE instead of stdout
-.TP
-.BR -j ", " --bzip2
-filter archive through bzip2, use to decompress .bz2 files
-.TP
-.BR -J ", " --xz
-filter archive through xz; use to decompress .xz files
-.TP
-.BR -k ", " --keep-old-files
-keep existing files; don't overwrite them from archive
-.TP
-.BR -K ", " --starting-file " FILE"
-begin at file FILE in the archive
-.TP
-.BR --keep-newer-files
-do not overwrite files which are newer than the archive
-.TP
-.BR -l ", " --check-links
-warn if number of hard links to the file on the filesystem mismatchs
-the number of links recorded in the archive
-.TP
-.BR -L ", " --tape-length " N"
-change tapes after writing N*1024 bytes
-.TP
-.BR -m ", " --touch ", " --modification-time
-don't extract file modified time
-.TP
-.BR -M ", " --multi-volume
-create/list/extract multi-volume archive
-.TP
-.BR --mode " PERMISSIONS"
-apply PERMISSIONS while adding files (see \fBchmod\fR(1))
-.TP
-.BR --mtime " DATE"
-when creating archives, use DATE as the modification time of the members,
-instead of their actual modification times
-.TP
-.BR -N ", " --after-date " DATE, " --newer " DATE"
-only store files that were modified or had status updates (permissions,
-ACLs, extended attributes, ...) since DATE
-.TP
-.BR --newer-mtime " DATE"
-like \fI--newer\fR, but only store files that were modified since DATE
-.TP
-.BR --no-anchored
-match any subsequenceof the name's components with \fI--exclude\fR
-.TP
-.BR --no-auto-compress
-do not use archive suffix to determine the compression program
-.TP
-.BR --no-delay-directory-restore
-modification times and permissions of extracted directories are set when
-all files from this directory have been extracted; this is the default
-.TP
-.BR --no-ignore-command-error
-print warnings about subprocesses that terminated with a non-zero exit code
-.TP
-.BR --no-ignore-case
-use case-sensitive matching with \fI--exclude\fR
-.TP
-.BR --no-overwrite-dir
-preserve metadata of existing directories when extracting files from an
-archive
-.TP
-.BR --no-quote-chars " STRING"
-remove characters listed in STRING from the list of quoted characters
-set by a previous \fI--quote-chars\fR option
-.TP
-.BR --no-recursion
-don't recurse into directories
-.TP
-.BR --no-same-permissions
-apply user's umask when extracting files instead of recorded permissions
-.TP
-.BR --no-unquote
-treat all input file or member names literally, do not interpret
-escape sequences
-.TP
-.BR --no-wildcards
-don't use wildcards with \fI--exclude\fR
-.TP
-.BR --no-wildcards-match-slash
-wildcards do not match slashes (/) with \fI--exclude\fR
-.TP
-.BR --null
-\fI--files-from\fR reads null-terminated names, disable \fI--directory\fR
-.TP
-.BR --numeric-owner
-always use numbers for user/group names
-.TP
-.BR -o ", " --old-archive ", " --portability
-like \fI--format=v7\fR; \fI-o\fR exhibits this behavior when creating an
-archive (deprecated behavior)
-.TP
-.BR -o ", " --no-same-owner
-do not attempt to restore ownership when extracting; \fI-o\fR exhibits
-this behavior when extracting an archive
-.TP
-.BR -O ", " --to-stdout
-extract files to standard output
-.TP
-.BR --occurrence " NUM"
-process only NUM occurrences of each named file; used with
-\fI--delete\fR, \fI--diff\fR, \fI--extract\fR, or \fI--list\fR
-.TP
-.BR --one-file-system
-stay in local file system when creating an archive
-.TP
-.BR --overwrite
-overwrite existing files and directory metadata when extracting
-.TP
-.BR --overwrite-dir
-overwrite directory metadata when extracting
-.TP
-.BR --owner " USER"
-give files added to the archive a user id of USER instead of the user id
-of the source file; this option does not affect extraction
-.TP
-.BR -p ", " --preserve-permissions ", " --same-permissions
-extract all protection information
-.TP
-.BR -P ", " --absolute-names
-don't strip leading `/'s from file names
-.TP
-.BR --pax-option " KEYWORD-LIST"
-used only with POSIX.1-2001 archives to modify the way \fBtar\fR handles
-extended header keywords
-.TP
-.BR --posix
-like \fI--format=posix\fR
-.TP
-.BR --preserve
-like \fI--preserve-permissions\fR plus \fI--same-order\fR
-.TP
-.BR --quote-chars " STRING"
-always quote the characters from STRING, even if the selected quoting
-style would not quote them
-.TP
-.BR --quote-style " STYLE"
-set the quoting style to be used when printing member and file names
-.TP
-.BR -R ", " --record-number
-show record number within archive with each message
-.TP
-.BR --record-size " SIZE"
-use SIZE bytes per record when accessing archives
-.TP
-.BR --recursion
-recurse into directories
-.TP
-.BR --recursive-unlink
-remove existing directories before extracting directories of the same name
-.TP
-.BR --remove-files
-remove files after adding them to the archive
-.TP
-.BR --restrict
-disable the use of some potentially harmful options; currently this
-disables shell invocation from the multi-volume menu
-.TP
-.BR --rmt-command " CMD"
-use CMD instead of the default /usr/sbin/rmt
-.TP
-.BR --rsh-command " CMD"
-use remote CMD instead of \fBrsh\fR(1)
-.TP
-.BR -s ", " --same-order ", " --preserve-order
-list of names to extract is sorted to match archive
-.TP
-.BR -S ", " --sparse
-handle sparse files efficiently
-.TP
-.BR --same-owner
-create extracted files with the same ownership
-.TP
-.BR --show-defaults
-display the default options used by \fBtar\fR
-.TP
-.BR --show-omitted-dirs
-print directories \fBtar\fR skips while operating on an archive
-.TP
-.BR --show-transformed-names ", " --show-stored-names
-display file or member names after applying any \fBsed\fR transformations
-.TP
-.BR --strip-components " NUMBER"
-strip NUMBER of leading path components from file names before extraction
-.TP
-.BR --suffix " SUFFIX"
-use SUFFIX instead of default '~' when backing up files
-.TP
-.BR -T ", " --files-from " FILE"
-get names to extract or create from file FILE
-.TP
-.BR --test-label
-read the volume label; if an argument is specified, test whether it
-matches the volume label
-.TP
-.BR --to-command " COMMAND"
-during extraction, pipe extracted files to the standard input of COMMAND
-.TP
-.BR --totals
-print total bytes written with --create
-.TP
-.BR --transform " EXPRESSION"
-transform file or member names using the \fBsed\fR replacement expression
-EXPRESSION
-.TP
-.BR -U ", " --unlink-first
-remove existing files before extracting files of the same name
-.TP
-.BR --unquote
-enable unquoting input file or member names; this is the default
-.TP
-.BR --utc
-display file modification dates in UTC
-.TP
-.BR -v ", " --verbose
-verbosely list files processed
-.TP
-.BR -V ", " --label " NAME"
-create archive with volume name NAME
-.TP
-.BR --version
-print \fBtar\fR program version number
-.TP
-.BR --volno-file " FILE"
-keep track of which volume of a multi-volume archive its working in
-FILE; used with \fI--multi-volume\fR
-.TP
-.BR -w ", " --interactive ", " --confirmation
-ask for confirmation for every action
-.TP
-.BR -W ", " --verify
-attempt to verify the archive after writing it
-.TP
-.BR --wildcards
-use wildcards with \fI--exclude\fR
-.TP
-.BR --wildcards-match-slash
-wildcards match slashes (/) with \fI--exclude\fR
-.TP
-.BR -X ", " --exclude-from " FILE"
-exclude files listed in FILE
-.TP
-.BR -z ", " --gzip ", " --gunzip ", " --ungzip
-filter the archive through gzip
-.TP
-.BR -Z ", " --compress ", " --uncompress
-filter the archive through compress
-.TP
-.BR -[0-7][lmh]
-specify drive and density
-.SH BUGS
-The GNU folks, in general, abhor man pages and create info documents instead.
-The maintainer of \fBtar\fR falls into this category. Thus, this man page may
-not be complete nor current, and it is included in the Gentoo portage tree
-because man is a great tool :). This man page was first taken from Debian
-Linux and has since been lovingly updated here.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Please report bugs via http://bugs.gentoo.org/
-.SH "AUTHORS"
-.nf
-Debian Linux http://www.debian.org/
-Mike Frysinger <vapier at gentoo.org>
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man1/tclsh.1 b/raw/man1/tclsh.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ab41ab6..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/tclsh.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,359 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tclsh 1 "" Tcl "Tcl Applications"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tclsh \- Simple shell containing Tcl interpreter
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtclsh\fR ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTclsh\fR is a shell-like application that reads Tcl commands
-from its standard input or from a file and evaluates them.
-If invoked with no arguments then it runs interactively, reading
-Tcl commands from standard input and printing command results and
-error messages to standard output.
-It runs until the \fBexit\fR command is invoked or until it
-reaches end-of-file on its standard input.
-If there exists a file \fB.tclshrc\fR (or \fBtclshrc.tcl\fR on
-the Windows platforms) in the home directory of
-the user, \fBtclsh\fR evaluates the file as a Tcl script
-just before reading the first command from standard input.
-
-.SH "SCRIPT FILES"
-.PP
-If \fBtclsh\fR is invoked with arguments then the first argument
-is the name of a script file and any additional arguments
-are made available to the script as variables (see below).
-Instead of reading commands from standard input \fBtclsh\fR will
-read Tcl commands from the named file; \fBtclsh\fR will exit
-when it reaches the end of the file.
-There is no automatic evaluation of \fB.tclshrc\fR in this
-case, but the script file can always \fBsource\fR it if desired.
-.PP
-If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is
-.CS
-\fB#!/usr/local/bin/tclsh\fR
-.CE
-then you can invoke the script file directly from your shell if
-you mark the file as executable.
-This assumes that \fBtclsh\fR has been installed in the default
-location in /usr/local/bin; if it's installed somewhere else
-then you'll have to modify the above line to match.
-Many UNIX systems do not allow the \fB#!\fR line to exceed about
-30 characters in length, so be sure that the \fBtclsh\fR
-executable can be accessed with a short file name.
-.PP
-An even better approach is to start your script files with the
-following three lines:
-.CS
-\fB#!/bin/sh
-# the next line restarts using tclsh \e
-exec tclsh "$0" "$@"\fR
-.CE
-This approach has three advantages over the approach in the previous
-paragraph. First, the location of the \fBtclsh\fR binary doesn't have
-to be hard-wired into the script: it can be anywhere in your shell
-search path. Second, it gets around the 30-character file name limit
-in the previous approach.
-Third, this approach will work even if \fBtclsh\fR is
-itself a shell script (this is done on some systems in order to
-handle multiple architectures or operating systems: the \fBtclsh\fR
-script selects one of several binaries to run). The three lines
-cause both \fBsh\fR and \fBtclsh\fR to process the script, but the
-\fBexec\fR is only executed by \fBsh\fR.
-\fBsh\fR processes the script first; it treats the second
-line as a comment and executes the third line.
-The \fBexec\fR statement cause the shell to stop processing and
-instead to start up \fBtclsh\fR to reprocess the entire script.
-When \fBtclsh\fR starts up, it treats all three lines as comments,
-since the backslash at the end of the second line causes the third
-line to be treated as part of the comment on the second line.
-.PP
-.VS
-You should note that it is also common practise to install tclsh with
-its version number as part of the name. This has the advantage of
-allowing multiple versions of Tcl to exist on the same system at once,
-but also the disadvantage of making it harder to write scripts that
-start up uniformly across different versions of Tcl.
-.VE
-
-.SH "VARIABLES"
-.PP
-\fBTclsh\fR sets the following Tcl variables:
-.TP 15
-\fBargc\fR
-Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none),
-not including the name of the script file.
-.TP 15
-\fBargv\fR
-Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments,
-in order, or an empty string if there are no \fIarg\fR arguments.
-.TP 15
-\fBargv0\fR
-Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified.
-Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBtclsh\fR was invoked.
-.TP 15
-\fBtcl_interactive\fR
-Contains 1 if \fBtclsh\fR is running interactively (no
-\fIfileName\fR was specified and standard input is a terminal-like
-device), 0 otherwise.
-
-.SH PROMPTS
-.PP
-When \fBtclsh\fR is invoked interactively it normally prompts for each
-command with ``\fB% \fR''. You can change the prompt by setting the
-variables \fBtcl_prompt1\fR and \fBtcl_prompt2\fR. If variable
-\fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script
-to output a prompt; instead of outputting a prompt \fBtclsh\fR
-will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR.
-The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when
-a newline is typed but the current command isn't yet complete;
-if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR isn't set then no prompt is output for
-incomplete commands.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-argument, interpreter, prompt, script file, shell
diff --git a/raw/man1/tee.1 b/raw/man1/tee.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e89532..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/tee.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH TEE "1" "October 2003" "tee (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-tee \- read from standard input and write to standard output and files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tee
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Copy standard input to each FILE, and also to standard output.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-append\fR
-append to the given FILEs, do not overwrite
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\-interrupts\fR
-ignore interrupt signals
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Mike Parker, Richard M. Stallman, and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B tee
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B tee
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info tee
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/testparm.1 b/raw/man1/testparm.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4207c2f..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/testparm.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "TESTPARM" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-testparm \- check an smb.conf configuration file for internal correctness
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBtestparm\fR [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L <servername>] [-t <encoding>] {config filename} [hostname
- hostIP]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBtestparm\fR is a very simple test program to check an \fBsmbd\fR(8) configuration file for internal correctness\&. If this program reports no problems, you can use the configuration file with confidence that \fBsmbd \fR will successfully load the configuration file\&.
-
-.PP
-Note that this is \fBNOT\fR a guarantee that the services specified in the configuration file will be available or will operate as expected\&.
-
-.PP
-If the optional host name and host IP address are specified on the command line, this test program will run through the service entries reporting whether the specified host has access to each service\&.
-
-.PP
-If \fBtestparm\fR finds an error in the \fI smb\&.conf\fR file it returns an exit code of 1 to the calling program, else it returns an exit code of 0\&. This allows shell scripts to test the output from \fBtestparm\fR\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--s
-Without this option, \fBtestparm\fR will prompt for a carriage return after printing the service names and before dumping the service definitions\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--V
-Prints the program version number\&.
-
-
-.TP
--L servername
-Sets the value of the %L macro to \fIservername\fR\&. This is useful for testing include files specified with the %L macro\&.
-
-
-.TP
--v
-If this option is specified, testparm will also output all options that were not used in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) and are thus set to their defaults\&.
-
-
-.TP
--t encoding
-Output data in specified encoding\&.
-
-
-.TP
-configfilename
-This is the name of the configuration file to check\&. If this parameter is not present then the default \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file will be checked\&.
-
-
-.TP
-hostname
-If this parameter and the following are specified, then \fBtestparm\fR will examine the \fIhosts allow\fR and \fIhosts deny\fR parameters in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file to determine if the hostname with this IP address would be allowed access to the \fBsmbd\fR server\&. If this parameter is supplied, the hostIP parameter must also be supplied\&.
-
-
-.TP
-hostIP
-This is the IP address of the host specified in the previous parameter\&. This address must be supplied if the hostname parameter is supplied\&.
-
-
-.SH "FILES"
-
-.TP
-\fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
-This is usually the name of the configuration file used by \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
-
-
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-
-.PP
-The program will issue a message saying whether the configuration file loaded OK or not\&. This message may be preceded by errors and warnings if the file did not load\&. If the file was loaded OK, the program then dumps all known service details to stdout\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmb.conf\fR(5), \fBsmbd\fR(8)
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/testprns.1 b/raw/man1/testprns.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f98ea1..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/testprns.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "TESTPRNS" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-testprns \- check printer name for validity with smbd
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBtestprns\fR {printername} [printcapname]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBtestprns\fR is a very simple test program to determine whether a given printer name is valid for use in a service to be provided by \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
-
-.PP
-"Valid" in this context means "can be found in the printcap specified"\&. This program is very stupid - so stupid in fact that it would be wisest to always specify the printcap file to use\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
-printername
-The printer name to validate\&.
-
-
-Printer names are taken from the first field in each record in the printcap file, single printer names and sets of aliases separated by vertical bars ("|") are recognized\&. Note that no validation or checking of the printcap syntax is done beyond that required to extract the printer name\&. It may be that the print spooling system is more forgiving or less forgiving than \fBtestprns\fR\&. However, if \fBtestprns\fR finds the printer then \fBsmbd\fR(8) should do so as well\&.
-
-
-.TP
-printcapname
-This is the name of the printcap file within which to search for the given printer name\&.
-
-
-If no printcap name is specified \fBtestprns \fR will attempt to scan the printcap file name specified at compile time\&.
-
-
-.SH "FILES"
-
-.TP
-\fI/etc/printcap\fR
-This is usually the default printcap file to scan\&. See \fIprintcap (5)\fR\&.
-
-
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-
-.PP
-If a printer is found to be valid, the message "Printer name <printername> is valid" will be displayed\&.
-
-.PP
-If a printer is found to be invalid, the message "Printer name <printername> is not valid" will be displayed\&.
-
-.PP
-All messages that would normally be logged during operation of the Samba daemons are logged by this program to the file \fItest\&.log\fR in the current directory\&. The program runs at debuglevel 3, so quite extensive logging information is written\&. The log should be checked carefully for errors and warnings\&.
-
-.PP
-Other messages are self-explanatory\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fIprintcap(5)\fR,\fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmbclient\fR(1)
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/tex.1 b/raw/man1/tex.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f360a4..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/tex.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,421 +0,0 @@
-.TH TEX 1 "10 November 2001" "Web2C 7.4.5"
-.\"=====================================================================
-.if n .ds MF Metafont
-.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0
-.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP
-.if n .ds TX TeX
-.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff
-.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff
-.\" the same but obliqued
-.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX
-.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX
-.if n .ds BX BibTeX
-.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX
-.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX
-.if n .ds LX LaTeX
-.if n .ds WB Web
-.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH NAME
-tex, virtex, initex \- text formatting and typesetting
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tex
-.RI [ options ]
-.RI [ commands ]
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete
-documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file
-or manual
-.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" .
-.PP
-\*(TX
-formats the interspersed text and commands contained in the named
-files
-and outputs a typesetter independent file (called
-.IR DVI ,
-which is short for
-.IR "DeVice Independent" ).
-\*(TX's capabilities and language are described in
-.IR "The \*(OXbook" .
-\*(TX
-is normally used with a large body of precompiled macros,
-and there are several specific formatting systems, such as
-\*(LX,
-which require the support of several macro files.
-.PP
-This version of \*(TX looks at its command line to see what name it
-was called under. Both
-.B initex
-and
-.B virtex
-are symlinks to the
-.B tex
-executable. When called as
-.BR initex
-(or when the
-.B --ini
-option is given) it can be used to precompile macros into a
-.I .fmt
-file. When called as
-.B virtex
-it will use the
-.I plain
-format. When called under any other name, \*(TX will use that name as
-the name of the format to use. For example, when called as
-.B tex
-the
-.I tex
-format is used, which is identical to the
-.I plain
-format. The commands defined by the
-.I plain
-format are documented in
-.IR "The \*(OXbook" .
-Other formats that are often available include
-.I latex
-and
-.IR amstex .
-.PP
-The
-.I commands
-given on the command line to the
-\*(TX
-program are passed to it as the first input line. (But it is often
-easier to type extended arguments as the first input line, since UNIX
-shells tend to gobble up or misinterpret \*(TX's favorite symbols,
-like backslashes, unless you quote them.)
-As described in
-.IR "The \*(OXbook" ,
-that first line should begin with a filename, a
-.IR \econtrolsequence ,
-or a
-.IR &formatname .
-.PP
-The normal usage is to say
-.RS
-.I tex paper
-.RE
-to start processing
-.IR paper.tex .
-The name
-.I paper
-will be the ``jobname'', and is used in forming
-output filenames.
-If \*(TX doesn't get a filename in the first line, the jobname is
-.IR texput .
-When looking for a file, \*(TX looks for the name with and without the
-default extension
-.RI ( .tex )
-appended, unless the name already contains that extension. If
-.I paper
-is the ``jobname'',
-a log of error messages, with rather more detail than normally appears
-on the screen, will appear in
-.IR paper.log ,
-and the output file will be in
-.IR paper.dvi .
-.PP
-This version of \*(TX can look in the first line of the file
-.I paper.tex
-to see if it begins with the magic sequence
-.IR %& .
-If the first line begins with
-.BI %& format
-.BI --translate-file \ tcxname
-then \*(TX will use the named format and transation table
-.I tcxname
-to process the source file. Either the format name or the
-.B --translate-file
-specification may be omitted, but not both. This overrides the
-format selection based on the name by which the program is invoked.
-The
-.B --parse-first-line
-option or the
-.B parse_first_line
-configuration variable control whether this behaviour is enabled.
-.PP
-The
-.I e
-response to \*(TX's error prompt causes the system default editor to
-start up at the current line of the current file. The environment
-variable TEXEDIT can be used to change the editor used. It may
-contain a string with "%s" indicating where the filename goes and "%d"
-indicating where the decimal line number (if any) goes. For example,
-a TEXEDIT string for
-.B emacs
-can be set with the
-.B sh
-command
-.RS
-\fITEXEDIT="emacs +%d %s"; export TEXEDIT\fP
-.RE
-.PP
-A convenient file in the library is
-.IR null.tex ,
-containing nothing.
-When \*(TX can't find a file it thinks you want to input, it keeps
-asking you for another filename; responding `null' gets you out
-of the loop if you don't want to input anything. You can also type your
-EOF character (usually control-D).
-.PP
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH OPTIONS
-This version of \*(TX understands the following command line options.
-.TP
-.B --file-line-error-style
-.rb
-Print error messages in the form
-.I file:line:error
-which is similar to the way many compilers format them.
-.TP
-.BI --fmt \ format
-.rb
-Use
-.I format
-as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which
-\*(TX was called or a
-.I %&
-line.
-.TP
-.B --help
-.rb
-Print help message and exit.
-.TP
-.B --ini
-.rb
-Be
-.BR initex ,
-for dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the program is called
-as
-.BR initex .
-.TP
-.BI --interaction \ mode
-.rb
-Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of
-.IR batchmode ,
-.IR nonstopmode ,
-.IR scrollmode ,
-and
-.IR errorstopmode .
-The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding
-\ecommands.
-.TP
-.B --ipc
-.rb
-Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether
-this option is available is the choice of the installer.
-.TP
-.B --ipc-start
-.rb
-As
-.BR --ipc ,
-and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option
-is available is the choice of the installer.
-.TP
-.BI --jobname \ name
-.rb
-Use
-.I name
-for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file.
-.TP
-.BI --kpathsea-debug \ bitmask
-.rb
-Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the
-.I Kpathsea
-manual for details.
-.TP
-.BI --maketex \ fmt
-.rb
-Enable
-.RI mktex fmt ,
-where
-.I fmt
-must be one of
-.I tex
-or
-.IR tfm .
-.TP
-.B --mltex
-.rb
-Enable ML\*(TX extensions.
-.TP
-.BI --no-maketex \ fmt
-.rb
-Disable
-.RI mktex fmt ,
-where
-.I fmt
-must be one of
-.I tex
-or
-.IR tfm .
-.TP
-.BI --output-comment \ string
-.rb
-Use
-.I string
-for the DVI file comment instead of the date.
-.TP
-.B --parse-first-line
-.rb
-If the first line of the main input file begins with
-.I %&
-parse it to look for a dump name or a
-.B --translate-file
-option.
-.TP
-.BI --progname \ name
-.rb
-Pretend to be program
-.IR name .
-This affects both the format used and the search paths.
-.TP
-.B --recorder
-.rb
-Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened
-for input and output in a file with extension
-.IR .fls .
-.TP
-.B --shell-escape
-.rb
-Enable the
-.BI \ewrite18{ command }
-construct. The
-.I command
-can be any Bourne shell command. This construct is normally
-disallowed for security reasons.
-.TP
-.BI --translate-file \ tcxname
-.rb
-Use the
-.I tcxname
-translation table.
-.TP
-.B --version
-.rb
-Print version information and exit.
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications'
-node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used.
-The
-.B kpsewhich
-utility can be used to query the values of the variables.
-.PP
-One caveat: In most \*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you
-give directly to \*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is
-expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as
-\*(MF, do not have this problem.
-.PP
-.TP
-TEXMFOUTPUT
-Normally, \*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If
-any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the
-directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT.
-There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say
-.I tex paper
-and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has
-the value
-.IR /tmp ,
-\*(TX attempts to create
-.I /tmp/paper.log
-(and
-.IR /tmp/paper.dvi ,
-if any output is produced.)
-.TP
-TEXINPUTS
-Search path for
-.I \einput
-and
-.I \eopenin
-files.
-This should probably start with ``.'', so
-that user files are found before system files. An empty path
-component will be replaced with the paths defined in the
-.I texmf.cnf
-file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/usr/tex:" to prepend the
-current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path.
-.TP
-TEXEDIT
-Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually
-.BR vi ,
-is set when \*(TX is compiled.
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH FILES
-The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to
-system. Use the
-.B kpsewhich
-utility to find their locations.
-.TP
-.I texmf.cnf
-Configuration file. This contains definitions of search paths as well
-as other configuration parameters like
-.BR parse_first_line .
-.TP
-.I tex.pool
-Encoded text of \*(TX's messages.
-.TP
-.I texfonts.map
-Filename mapping definitions.
-.TP
-.I *.tfm
-Metric files for \*(TX's fonts.
-.TP
-.I *.fmt
-Predigested \*(TX format (.\|fmt) files.
-.TP
-.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/base/plain.tex
-The basic macro package described in the \*(OXbook.
-.br
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH BUGS
-This version of \*(TX implements a number of optional extensions.
-In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser
-extent with the definition of \*(TX. When such extensions are
-enabled, the banner printed when \*(TX starts is changed to print
-.B TeXk
-instead of
-.BR TeX .
-.PP
-This version of \*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when
-dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare,
-but when it does the generated
-.I DVI
-file will be invalid.
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR mf (1),
-.br
-Donald E. Knuth,
-.IR "The \*(OXbook" ,
-Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13447-0.
-.br
-Leslie Lamport,
-.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" ,
-Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X.
-.br
-K. Berry,
-.IR "Eplain: Expanded plain \*(TX" ,
-ftp://ftp.cs.umb.edu/pub/tex/eplain/doc.
-.br
-Michael Spivak,
-.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" ,
-2nd edition, Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-8218-2997-1.
-.br
-.I TUGboat
-(the journal of the \*(TX Users Group).
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH TRIVIA
-\*(TX, pronounced properly, rhymes with ``blecchhh.'' The proper
-spelling in typewriter-like fonts is ``TeX'' and not ``TEX'' or ``tex.''
-.\"=====================================================================
-.SH AUTHORS
-\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth,
-who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs.
-It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and
-at Cornell by Pavel Curtis.
-The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that
-generated by the \*(WB to C system
-.RB ( web2c ),
-originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan.
diff --git a/raw/man1/texi2dvi.1 b/raw/man1/texi2dvi.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f07110..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/texi2dvi.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH TEXI2DVI "1" "June 2003" "texi2dvi 1.23" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-texi2dvi \- print Texinfo documents
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B texi2dvi
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIFILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Run each Texinfo or LaTeX FILE through TeX in turn until all
-cross-references are resolved, building all indices. The directory
-containing each FILE is searched for included files. The suffix of FILE
-is used to determine its language (LaTeX or Texinfo).
-.PP
-Makeinfo is used to perform Texinfo macro expansion before running TeX
-when needed.
-.SS "Operation modes:"
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-batch\fR
-no interaction
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-clean\fR
-remove all auxiliary files
-.TP
-\fB\-D\fR, \fB\-\-debug\fR
-turn on shell debugging (set \fB\-x\fR)
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit successfully
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR=\fIOFILE\fR
-leave output in OFILE (implies \fB\-\-clean\fR);
-Only one input FILE may be specified in this case
-.TP
-\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR
-no output unless errors (implies \fB\-\-batch\fR)
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR
-same as \fB\-\-quiet\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR
-display version information and exit successfully
-.TP
-\fB\-V\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR
-report on what is done
-.SS "TeX tuning:"
-.TP
--@
-use @input instead of \einput; for preloaded Texinfo
-.TP
-\fB\-e\fR, \fB\-E\fR, \fB\-\-expand\fR
-force macro expansion using makeinfo
-.TP
-\fB\-I\fR DIR
-search DIR for Texinfo files
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-language\fR=\fILANG\fR
-specify the LANG of FILE (LaTeX or Texinfo)
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-pdf\fR
-use pdftex or pdflatex for processing
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-command\fR=\fICMD\fR
-insert CMD in copy of input file;
-.TP
-or \fB\-\-texinfo\fR=\fICMD\fR
-multiple values accumulate
-.PP
-The values of the BIBTEX, LATEX (or PDFLATEX), MAKEINDEX, MAKEINFO, TEX
-(or PDFTEX), and TEXINDEX environment variables are used to run those
-commands, if they are set. Any CMD strings are added after @setfilename
-for Texinfo input, in the first line for LaTeX input.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Email bug reports to <bug-texinfo at gnu.org>,
-general questions and discussion to <help-texinfo at gnu.org>.
-Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
-For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B texi2dvi
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B texi2dvi
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info texi2dvi
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/texindex.1 b/raw/man1/texindex.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 6882c45..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/texindex.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH TEXINDEX "1" "June 2003" "texindex 4.6" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-texindex \- sort Texinfo index files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B texindex
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIFILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Generate a sorted index for each TeX output FILE.
-Usually FILE... is specified as `foo.??' for a document `foo.texi'.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-k\fR, \fB\-\-keep\fR
-keep temporary files around after processing
-.TP
-\fB\-\-no\-keep\fR
-do not keep temporary files around after processing (default)
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-output\fR FILE
-send output to FILE
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-display version information and exit
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Email bug reports to bug-texinfo at gnu.org,
-general questions and discussion to help-texinfo at gnu.org.
-Texinfo home page: http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-There is NO warranty. You may redistribute this software
-under the terms of the GNU General Public License.
-For more information about these matters, see the files named COPYING.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B texindex
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B texindex
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info texindex
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/times.1 b/raw/man1/times.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/times.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/touch.1 b/raw/man1/touch.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 46ff653..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/touch.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.29.
-.TH TOUCH "1" "March 2003" "touch (coreutils) 5.0" "User Commands"
-.SH NAME
-touch \- change file timestamps
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B touch
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fIFILE\fR...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Update the access and modification times of each FILE to the current time.
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR
-change only the access time
-.TP
-\fB\-B\fR, \fB\-\-backward\fR=\fISECONDS\fR
-Modify the time by going back SECONDS seconds.
-For example, \fBtouch -r foo -B 5 bar\fR will make the file bar 5 seconds
-older than file foo.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-no\-create\fR
-do not create any files
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-date\fR=\fISTRING\fR
-parse STRING and use it instead of current time
-.TP
-\fB\-F\fR, \fB\-\-forward\fR=\fISECONDS\fR
-Modify the time by going forward SECONDS seconds.
-For example, \fBtouch -r foo -F 5 bar\fR will make the file bar 5 seconds
-newer than file foo.
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR
-(ignored)
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR
-change only the modification time
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-reference\fR=\fIFILE\fR
-use this file's times instead of current time
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR STAMP
-use [[CC]YY]MMDDhhmm[.ss] instead of current time
-.TP
-\fB\-\-time\fR=\fIWORD\fR
-set time given by WORD: access atime use (same as \fB\-a\fR)
-modify mtime (same as \fB\-m\fR)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-Note that the \fB\-d\fR and \fB\-t\fR options accept different time-date formats.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Paul Rubin, Arnold Robbins, Jim Kingdon, David MacKenzie, and Randy Smith.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B touch
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B touch
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info touch
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/trap.1 b/raw/man1/trap.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/trap.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/troff.1 b/raw/man1/troff.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 113549d..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/troff.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,686 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.ig
-troff.man
-
-Last update : 9 Jan 2002
-
-This file is part of groff, the GNU roff type-setting system.
-
-Copyright (C) 1989, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-written by James Clark
-
-modified by Werner Lemberg <wl at gnu.org>
- Bernd Warken <bwarken at mayn.de>
-
-Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
-under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
-any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
-Invariant Sections being this .ig-section and AUTHOR, with no
-Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover Texts.
-
-A copy of the Free Documentation License is included as a file called
-FDL in the main directory of the groff source package.
-..
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Setup
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.mso www.tmac
-.
-.if n \{\
-. mso tty-char.tmac
-. ftr CR R
-. ftr CI I
-. ftr CB B
-.\}
-.
-.if '\*[.T]'dvi' \
-. ftr CB CW
-.
-.de TQ
-.br
-.ns
-.TP \\$1
-..
-.
-.\" Like TP, but if specified indent is more than half
-.\" the current line-length - indent, use the default indent.
-.de Tp
-.ie \\n(.$=0:((0\\$1)*2u>(\\n(.lu-\\n(.iu)) .TP
-.el .TP "\\$1"
-..
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Title
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.TH TROFF 1 "16 September 2002" "Groff Version 1.18.1"
-.SH NAME
-troff \- the troff processor of the groff text formatting system
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.nr a \n(.j
-.ad l
-.nr i \n(.i
-.in +\w'\fBtroff 'u
-.ti \niu
-.B troff
-.de OP
-.ie \\n(.$-1 .RI "[\ \fB\\$1\fP" "\\$2" "\ ]"
-.el .RB "[\ " "\\$1" "\ ]"
-..
-.OP \-abcivzCERU
-.OP \-d cs
-.OP \-f fam
-.OP \-F dir
-.OP \-m name
-.OP \-M dir
-.OP \-n num
-.OP \-o list
-.OP \-r cn
-.OP \-T name
-.OP \-w name
-.OP \-W name
-.RI "[\ " files\|.\|.\|. "\ ]"
-.br
-.ad \na
-.P
-It is possible to have whitespace between a command line option and
-its parameter.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-This manual page describes the GNU version of
-.BR troff .
-It is part of the groff document formatting system.
-.
-It is functionally compatible with UNIX troff, but has many extensions,
-see
-.BR \%groff_diff (7).
-Usually it should be invoked using the
-.BR groff (1)
-command which will also run preprocessors and postprocessors in the
-appropriate order and with the appropriate options.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH OPTIONS
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.TP \w'\-dname=s'u+2n
-.B \-a
-Generate an
-.SM ASCII
-approximation of the typeset output.
-.
-.TP
-.B \-b
-Print a backtrace with each warning or error message.
-.
-This backtrace should help track down the cause of the error.
-.
-The line numbers given in the backtrace may not always be correct, for
-.BR troff 's
-idea of line numbers gets confused by
-.B as
-or
-.B am
-requests.
-.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Disable color output (always disabled in compatibility mode).
-.
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Enable compatibility mode.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-d cs
-.TQ
-.BI \-d name = s
-Define
-.I c
-or
-.I name
-to be a string
-.IR s ;
-.I c
-must be a one letter name.
-.
-.TP
-.B \-E
-Inhibit all error messages of
-.BR troff .
-Note that this doesn't affect messages output to standard error by macro
-packages using the
-.B tm
-or
-.B tm1
-requests.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-f fam
-Use
-.I fam
-as the default font family.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-F dir
-Search in directory (or directory path)
-.I dir
-for subdirectories
-.BI dev name
-.RI ( name
-is the name of the device) and there for the
-.B DESC
-file and font files.
-.I dir
-is scanned before all other font directories.
-.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-Read the standard input after all the named input files have been
-processed.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-m name
-Read in the file
-.IB name .tmac\fR.
-If it isn't found, try
-.BI tmac. name
-instead.
-.
-It will be first searched for in directories given with the
-.B \-M
-command line option, then in directories given in the
-.B GROFF_TMAC_PATH
-environment variable, then in the current directory (only if in unsafe
-mode), the home directory, /usr/lib/groff/site-tmac, /usr/share/groff/site-tmac, and
-/usr/share/groff/1.18.1/tmac.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-M dir
-Search directory (or directory path)
-.I dir
-for macro files.
-.
-This is scanned before all other macro directories.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-n num
-Number the first page
-.IR num .
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-o list
-Output only pages in
-.IR list ,
-which is a comma-separated list of page ranges;
-.I n
-means print page
-.IR n ,
-.IB m \- n
-means print every page between
-.I m
-and
-.IR n ,
-.BI \- n
-means print every page up to
-.IR n ,
-.IB n \-
-means print every page from
-.IR n .
-.B troff
-will exit after printing the last page in the list.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-r cn
-.TQ
-.BI \-r name = n
-Set number register
-.I c
-or
-.I name
-to
-.IR n ;
-.I c
-must be a one character name;
-.I n
-can be any troff numeric expression.
-.
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Don't load
-.B troffrc
-and
-.BR troffrc-end .
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-T name
-Prepare output for device
-.IR name ,
-rather than the default
-.BR ps .
-.
-.TP
-.B \-U
-Unsafe mode.
-.
-This will enable the following requests:
-.BR open ,
-.BR opena ,
-.BR pso ,
-.BR sy ,
-and
-.BR pi .
-For security reasons, these potentially dangerous requests are disabled
-otherwise.
-.
-It will also add the current directory to the macro search path.
-.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print the version number.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-w name
-Enable warning
-.IR name .
-Available warnings are described in the section
-.I WARNINGS
-below.
-.
-For example, to enable all warnings, use
-.B \-w
-.BR all .
-Multiple
-.B \-w
-options are allowed.
-.
-.TP
-.BI \-W name
-Inhibit warning
-.IR name .
-Multiple
-.B \-W
-options are allowed.
-.
-.TP
-.B \-z
-Suppress formatted output.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH WARNINGS
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-The warnings that can be given by
-.B troff
-are divided into the following categories.
-.
-The name associated with each warning is used by the
-.B \-w
-and
-.B \-W
-options; the number is used by the
-.B warn
-request, and by the
-.B .warn
-register; it is always a power of 2 to allow bitwise composition.
-.
-.P
-.TS
-tab(@), center, box;
-c c c | c c c
-r rI lB | r rI lB.
-Bit at Code@Warning at Bit@Code at Warning
-_
-0 at 1@char at 10@1024 at reg
-1 at 2@number at 11@2048 at tab
-2 at 4@break at 12@4096 at right-brace
-3 at 8@delim at 13@8192 at missing
-4 at 16@el at 14@16384 at input
-5 at 32@scale at 15@32768 at escape
-6 at 64@range at 16@65536 at space
-7 at 128@syntax at 17@131072 at font
-8 at 256@di at 18@262144 at ig
-9 at 512@mac at 19@524288 at color
-.TE
-.
-.P
-.nr x \w'\fBright-brace'+1n+\w'00000'u
-.ta \nxuR
-.
-.TP \nxu+3n
-.BR break "\t4"
-In fill mode, lines which could not be broken so that their length was
-less than the line length.
-.
-This is enabled by default.
-.
-.TP
-.BR char "\t1"
-Non-existent characters.
-.
-This is enabled by default.
-.
-.TP
-.BR color "\t524288"
-Color related warnings.
-.
-.TP
-.BR delim "\t8"
-Missing or mismatched closing delimiters.
-.
-.TP
-.BR di "\t256"
-Use of
-.B di
-or
-.B da
-without an argument when there is no current diversion.
-.
-.TP
-.BR el "\t16"
-Use of the
-.B el
-request with no matching
-.B ie
-request.
-.
-.TP
-.BR escape "\t32768"
-Unrecognized escape sequences.
-.
-When an unrecognized escape sequence is encountered, the escape
-character is ignored.
-.
-.TP
-.BR font "\t131072"
-Non-existent fonts.
-.
-This is enabled by default.
-.
-.TP
-.BR ig "\t262144"
-Invalid escapes in text ignored with the
-.B ig
-request.
-.
-These are conditions that are errors when they do not occur in ignored
-text.
-.
-.TP
-.BR input "\t16384"
-Invalid input characters.
-.
-.TP
-.BR mac "\t512"
-Use of undefined strings, macros and diversions.
-.
-When an undefined string, macro or diversion is used, that string is
-automatically defined as empty.
-.
-So, in most cases, at most one warning will be given for each name.
-.
-.TP
-.BR missing "\t8192"
-Requests that are missing non-optional arguments.
-.
-.TP
-.BR number "\t2"
-Invalid numeric expressions.
-.
-This is enabled by default.
-.
-.TP
-.BR range "\t64"
-Out of range arguments.
-.
-.TP
-.BR reg "\t1024"
-Use of undefined number registers.
-.
-When an undefined number register is used, that register is
-automatically defined to have a value of\~0.
-.
-So, in most cases, at most one warning will be given for use of a
-particular name.
-.
-.TP
-.BR right-brace "\t4096"
-Use of
-.B \[rs]}
-where a number was expected.
-.
-.TP
-.BR scale "\t32"
-Meaningless scaling indicators.
-.
-.TP
-.BR space "\t65536"
-Missing space between a request or macro and its argument.
-.
-This warning will be given when an undefined name longer than two
-characters is encountered, and the first two characters of the name
-make a defined name.
-.
-The request or macro will not be invoked.
-.
-When this warning is given, no macro is automatically defined.
-.
-This is enabled by default.
-.
-This warning will never occur in compatibility mode.
-.
-.TP
-.BR syntax "\t128"
-Dubious syntax in numeric expressions.
-.
-.TP
-.BR tab "\t2048"
-Inappropriate use of a tab character.
-Either use of a tab character where a number was expected, or use of tab
-character in an unquoted macro argument.
-.
-.P
-There are also names that can be used to refer to groups of warnings:
-.
-.TP
-.B all
-All warnings except
-.BR di ,
-.BR mac ,
-and
-.BR reg .
-It is intended that this covers all warnings that are useful with
-traditional macro packages.
-.
-.TP
-.B w
-All warnings.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_TMAC_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for
-macro files.
-.B troff
-will scan directories given in the
-.B \-M
-option before these, and in standard directories (current directory if
-in unsafe mode, home directory,
-.BR /usr/lib/groff/site-tmac ,
-.BR /usr/share/groff/site-tmac ,
-.BR /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/tmac )
-after these.
-.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_TYPESETTER
-Default device.
-.
-.TP
-.SM
-.B GROFF_FONT_PATH
-A colon separated list of directories in which to search for the
-.BI dev name
-directory.
-.B troff
-will scan directories given in the
-.B \-F
-option before these, and in standard directories
-.RB ( /usr/share/groff/site-font ,
-.BR /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/font ,
-.BR /usr/lib/font )
-after these.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH FILES
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.Tp \w'/usr/share/groff/1.18.1/font/devname/DESC'u+3n
-.B /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/tmac/troffrc
-Initialization file (called before any other macro package).
-.
-.TP
-.B /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/tmac/troffrc-end
-Initialization file (called after any other macro package).
-.
-.TP
-.BI /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/tmac/ name .tmac
-.TQ
-.BI /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/tmac/tmac. name
-Macro files
-.
-.TP
-.BI /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/font/dev name /DESC
-Device description file for device
-.IR name .
-.
-.TP
-.BI /usr/share/groff/1.18.1/font/dev name / F
-Font file for font
-.I F
-of device
-.IR name .
-.P
-Note that
-.B troffrc
-and
-.B troffrc-end
-are neither searched in the current nor in the home directory by
-default for security reasons (even if the
-.B \-U
-option is given).
-.
-Use the
-.B \-M
-command line option or the
-.B GROFF_TMAC_PATH
-environment variable to add these directories to the search path if
-necessary.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH AUTHOR
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-Copyright (C) 1989, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.
-.P
-This document is distributed under the terms of the FDL (GNU Free
-Documentation License) version 1.1 or later.
-.
-You should have received a copy of the FDL on your system, it is also
-available on-line at the
-.URL http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl.html "GNU copyleft site" .
-This document was written by James Clark, with modifications from
-.MTO wl at gnu.org "Werner Lemberg"
-and
-.MTO bwarken at mayn.de "Bernd Warken"
-.
-.P
-This document is part of
-.IR groff ,
-the GNU roff distribution.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.TP
-.BR groff (1)
-The main program of the
-.I groff
-system, a wrapper around
-.IR troff .
-.
-.TP
-.BR groff (7)
-A description of the
-.I groff
-language, including a short but complete reference of all predefined
-requests, registers, and escapes of plain
-.IR groff .
-From the command line, this is called by
-.RS
-.IP
-.B man 7 groff
-.RE
-.
-.TP
-.BR \%groff_diff (7)
-The differences of the
-.I groff
-language and the
-.I classical troff
-language.
-.
-Currently, this is the most actual document of the
-.I groff
-system.
-.
-.TP
-.BR roff (7)
-An overview over
-.I groff
-and other
-.I roff
-systems, including pointers to further related documentation.
-.
-.P
-The
-.I groff info
-.IR file ,
-cf.\&
-.BR info (1),
-presents all groff documentation within a single document.
-.
-.
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Emacs variables
-.\" --------------------------------------------------------------------
-.
-.\" Local Variables:
-.\" mode: nroff
-.\" End:
diff --git a/raw/man1/true.1 b/raw/man1/true.1
deleted file mode 100644
index fa01840..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/true.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH TRUE "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-true \- do nothing, successfully
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B true
-[\fIignored command line arguments\fR]
-.br
-.B true
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Exit with a status code indicating success.
-.PP
-These option names may not be abbreviated.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Jim Meyering.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B true
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B true
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info true
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/tty.1 b/raw/man1/tty.1
deleted file mode 100644
index be67c28..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/tty.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH TTY "1" "October 2003" "tty (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-tty \- print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tty
-[\fIOPTION\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print the file name of the terminal connected to standard input.
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR
-print nothing, only return an exit status
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B tty
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B tty
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info tty
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/type.1 b/raw/man1/type.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/type.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/typeset.1 b/raw/man1/typeset.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/typeset.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/ulimit.1 b/raw/man1/ulimit.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ulimit.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/umask.1 b/raw/man1/umask.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/umask.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/unalias.1 b/raw/man1/unalias.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/unalias.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/uname.1 b/raw/man1/uname.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 652ca4c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/uname.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH UNAME "1" "October 2003" "uname (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-uname \- print system information
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B uname
-[\fIOPTION\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print certain system information. With no OPTION, same as \fB\-s\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-all\fR
-print all information, in the following order:
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-kernel\-name\fR
-print the kernel name
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-nodename\fR
-print the network node hostname
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-kernel\-release\fR
-print the kernel release
-.TP
-\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-kernel\-version\fR
-print the kernel version
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-machine\fR
-print the machine hardware name
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-processor\fR
-print the processor type
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-hardware\-platform\fR
-print the hardware platform
-.TP
-\fB\-o\fR, \fB\-\-operating\-system\fR
-print the operating system
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B uname
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B uname
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info uname
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/unicode_start.1 b/raw/man1/unicode_start.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c2b939..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/unicode_start.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)unicode_start.1 1.0 010203 aeb
-.TH UNICODE_START 1 "3 Feb 2001"
-.SH NAME
-unicode_start \- put keyboard and console in unicode mode
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B unicode_start
-.RI [ font " [" umap ]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "unicode_start command" "" "\fLunicode_start\fR command"
-.LP
-The
-.B unicode_start
-command will put the keyboard and console into Unicode (UTF-8) mode.
-.LP
-For the keyboard this means that one can attach 16-bit U+xxxx values
-to keyboard keys using
-.BR loadkeys (1),
-and have these appear as UTF-8 input to user programs.
-Also, that one can type hexadecimal Alt-xxxx using the numeric keypad,
-and again produce UTF-8.
-.LP
-For the console this means that the kernel expects UTF-8 output
-from user programs, and displays the output accordingly.
-.LP
-The parameter
-.I font
-is a font that is loaded. It should have a built-in Unicode map,
-or, if it hasn't, such a map can be given explicitly as second parameter.
-When no font was specified, some default font is loaded.
-.SH NOTE
-Unicode mode is a parameter with a value per virtual console.
-However, usually the font and keymap is common to all consoles.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR dumpkeys (1),
-.BR kbd_mode (1),
-.BR loadkeys (1),
-.BR unicode_stop (1),
-.BR utf-8(7),
-.BR setfont (8)
diff --git a/raw/man1/unicode_stop.1 b/raw/man1/unicode_stop.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2fa2015..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/unicode_stop.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)unicode_stop.1 1.0 010203 aeb
-.TH UNICODE_STOP 1 "3 Feb 2001"
-.SH NAME
-unicode_stop \- revert keyboard and console from unicode mode
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B unicode_stop
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "unicode_stop command" "" "\fLunicode_stop\fR command"
-.LP
-The
-.B unicode_stop
-command will more-or-less undo the effect of
-.BR unicode_start .
-It puts the keyboard in ASCII (XLATE) mode, and clears
-the console UTF-8 mode.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR kbd_mode (1),
-.BR unicode_start (1),
-.BR utf-8(7),
-.BR setfont (8)
diff --git a/raw/man1/uniq.1 b/raw/man1/uniq.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 70555ad..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/uniq.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH UNIQ "1" "October 2003" "uniq (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-uniq \- remove duplicate lines from a sorted file
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B uniq
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIINPUT \fR[\fIOUTPUT\fR]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Discard all but one of successive identical lines from INPUT (or
-standard input), writing to OUTPUT (or standard output).
-.PP
-Mandatory arguments to long options are mandatory for short options too.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-count\fR
-prefix lines by the number of occurrences
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-repeated\fR
-only print duplicate lines
-.TP
-\fB\-D\fR, \fB\-\-all\-repeated\fR[=\fIdelimit\-method\fR] print all duplicate lines
-delimit-method={none(default),prepend,separate}
-Delimiting is done with blank lines.
-.TP
-\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-skip\-fields\fR=\fIN\fR
-avoid comparing the first N fields
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-ignore\-case\fR
-ignore differences in case when comparing
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-skip\-chars\fR=\fIN\fR
-avoid comparing the first N characters
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-unique\fR
-only print unique lines
-.TP
-\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-check\-chars\fR=\fIN\fR
-compare no more than N characters in lines
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-A field is a run of whitespace, then non-whitespace characters.
-Fields are skipped before chars.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Richard Stallman and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B uniq
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B uniq
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info uniq
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/unset.1 b/raw/man1/unset.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/unset.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/uptime.1 b/raw/man1/uptime.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f215999..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/uptime.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*-Nroff-*-
-.\"
-.TH UPTIME 1 "26 Jan 1993" "Cohesive Systems" "Linux User's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-uptime \- Tell how long the system has been running.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B uptime
-.br
-.BR uptime " [" "\-V" ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B uptime
-gives a one line display of the following information.
-The current time,
-how long the system has been running,
-how many users are currently logged on,
-and the system load averages for the past 1, 5, and 15 minutes.
-.sp
-This is the same information contained in the header line displayed by
-.BR w (1).
-.SH FILES
-.IR /var/run/utmp " information about who is currently logged on"
-.br
-.IR /proc " process information"
-.SH AUTHORS
-.B uptime
-was written by Larry Greenfield <greenfie at gauss.rutgers.edu> and
-Michael K. Johnson <johnsonm at sunsite.unc.edu>.
-
-The procps package is maintained by Robert Love and was created by Michael
-Johnson.
-
-Please send bug reports to <procps-list at redhat.com>.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ps (1),
-.BR top (1),
-.BR utmp (5),
-.BR w (1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/usleep.1 b/raw/man1/usleep.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d7520f..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/usleep.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,25 +0,0 @@
-.TH USLEEP 1 "Red Hat, Inc" \" -*- nroff -*-
-.SH NAME
-usleep \- sleep some number of microseconds
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B usleep
-[\fInumber\fP]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B usleep
-sleeps some number of microseconds. The default is 1.
-.SH OPTIONS
-\fI--usage\fP
-Show short usage message.
-.TP
-\fI--help, -?\fP
-Print help information.
-.TP
-\fI-v, --version\fP
-Print version information.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably not accurate on many machines down to the microsecond. Count
-on precision only to -4 or maybe -5.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Donald Barnes <djb at redhat.com>
-.br
-Erik Troan <ewt at redhat.com>
diff --git a/raw/man1/vacuumdb.1 b/raw/man1/vacuumdb.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 2693fd0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/vacuumdb.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,162 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "VACUUMDB" "1" "2003-11-02" "Application" "PostgreSQL Client Applications"
-.SH NAME
-vacuumdb \- garbage-collect and analyze a PostgreSQL database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBvacuumdb\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-option\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--full\fR\fR | \fR\fB-f\fR\fR ]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--verbose\fR\fR | \fR\fB-v\fR\fR ]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--analyze\fR\fR | \fR\fB-z\fR\fR ]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB--table | -t \fItable\fB\fR [ \fB( \fIcolumn\fB [,...] ) \fR]\fB \fR\fR]\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIdbname\fB \fR\fR]\fR
-
-\fBvacuumdb\fR\fR [ \fR\fB\fIconnection-options\fB\fR...\fB \fR\fR]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--all\fR\fR | \fR\fB-a\fR\fR ]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--full\fR\fR | \fR\fB-f\fR\fR ]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--verbose\fR\fR | \fR\fB-v\fR\fR ]\fR \fR[\fR \fB--analyze\fR\fR | \fR\fB-z\fR\fR ]\fR
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBvacuumdb\fR is a utility for cleaning a
-PostgreSQL database.
-\fBvacuumdb\fR will also generate internal statistics
-used by the PostgreSQL query optimizer.
-.PP
-\fBvacuumdb\fR is a wrapper around the SQL
-command VACUUM [\fBvacuum\fR(7)].
-There is no effective difference between vacuuming databases via
-this utility and via other methods for accessing the server.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBvacuumdb\fR accepts the following command-line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-.TP
-\fB--all\fR
-Vacuum all databases.
-.TP
-\fB[-d] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB[--dbname] \fIdbname\fB\fR
-Specifies the name of the database to be cleaned or analyzed.
-If this is not specified and \fB-a\fR (or
-\fB--all\fR) is not used, the database name is read
-from the environment variable \fBPGDATABASE\fR. If
-that is not set, the user name specified for the connection is
-used.
-.TP
-\fB-e\fR
-.TP
-\fB--echo\fR
-Echo the commands that \fBvacuumdb\fR generates
-and sends to the server.
-.TP
-\fB-f\fR
-.TP
-\fB--full\fR
-Perform ``full'' vacuuming.
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Do not display a response.
-.TP
-\fB-t \fItable\fB [ (\fIcolumn\fB [,...]) ]\fR
-.TP
-\fB--table \fItable\fB [ (\fIcolumn\fB [,...]) ]\fR
-Clean or analyze \fItable\fR only.
-Column names may be specified only in conjunction with
-the \fB--analyze\fR option.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-If you specify columns, you probably have to escape the parentheses
-from the shell. (See examples below.)
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-.TP
-\fB--verbose\fR
-Print detailed information during processing.
-.TP
-\fB-z\fR
-.TP
-\fB--analyze\fR
-Calculate statistics for use by the optimizer.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBvacuumdb\fR also accepts
-the following command-line arguments for connection parameters:
-.TP
-\fB-h \fIhost\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--host \fIhost\fB\fR
-Specifies the host name of the machine on which the
-server
-is running. If the value begins with a slash, it is used
-as the directory for the Unix domain socket.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIport\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--port \fIport\fB\fR
-Specifies the TCP port or local Unix domain socket file
-extension on which the server
-is listening for connections.
-.TP
-\fB-U \fIusername\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB--username \fIusername\fB\fR
-User name to connect as
-.TP
-\fB-W\fR
-.TP
-\fB--password\fR
-Force password prompt.
-.PP
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT"
-.TP
-\fBPGDATABASE\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGHOST\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGPORT\fR
-.TP
-\fBPGUSER\fR
-Default connection parameters
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.PP
-In case of difficulty, see VACUUM [\fBvacuum\fR(7)] and \fBpsql\fR(1) for
-discussions of potential problems and error messages.
-The database server must be running at the
-targeted host. Also, any default connection settings and environment
-variables used by the \fBlibpq\fR front-end
-library will apply.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-\fBvacuumdb\fR might need to connect several
-times to the PostgreSQL server, asking
-for a password each time. It is convenient to have a
-\fI$HOME/.pgpass\fR file in such cases.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To clean the database test:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBvacuumdb test\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To clean and analyze for the optimizer a database named
-bigdb:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBvacuumdb --analyze bigdb\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To clean a single table
-foo in a database named
-xyzzy, and analyze a single column
-bar of the table for the optimizer:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBvacuumdb --analyze --verbose --table 'foo(bar)' xyzzy\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-VACUUM [\fBvacuum\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/vi.1 b/raw/man1/vi.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6f1d24..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/vi.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIM 1 "2002 Feb 22"
-.SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] [file ..]
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] -
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-t tag
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-q [errorfile]
-.PP
-.br
-.B ex
-.br
-.B view
-.br
-.B gvim
-.B gview
-.br
-.B rvim
-.B rview
-.B rgvim
-.B rgview
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vim
-is a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.
-It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
-It is especially useful for editing programs.
-.PP
-There are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo,
-multi windows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line
-editing, filename completion, on-line help, visual selection, etc..
-See ":help vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between
-.B Vim
-and Vi.
-.PP
-While running
-.B Vim
-a lot of help can be obtained from the on-line help system, with the ":help"
-command.
-See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
-.PP
-Most often
-.B Vim
-is started to edit a single file with the command
-.PP
- vim file
-.PP
-More generally
-.B Vim
-is started with:
-.PP
- vim [options] [filelist]
-.PP
-If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used to choose one or
-more files to be edited.
-.TP 12
-file ..
-A list of filenames.
-The first one will be the current file and read into the buffer.
-The cursor will be positioned on the first line of the buffer.
-You can get to the other files with the ":next" command.
-To edit a file that starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
-.TP
--
-The file to edit is read from stdin. Commands are read from stderr, which
-should be a tty.
-.TP
--t {tag}
-The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on a "tag", a sort
-of goto label.
-{tag} is looked up in the tags file, the associated file becomes the current
-file and the associated command is executed.
-Mostly this is used for C programs, in which case {tag} could be a function
-name.
-The effect is that the file containing that function becomes the current file
-and the cursor is positioned on the start of the function.
-See ":help tag-commands".
-.TP
--q [errorfile]
-Start in quickFix mode.
-The file [errorfile] is read and the first error is displayed.
-If [errorfile] is omitted, the filename is obtained from the 'errorfile'
-option (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the Amiga, "errors.err" on other
-systems).
-Further errors can be jumped to with the ":cn" command.
-See ":help quickfix".
-.PP
-.B Vim
-behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the executable may
-still be the same file).
-.TP 10
-vim
-The "normal" way, everything is default.
-.TP
-ex
-Start in Ex mode.
-Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
-Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
-.TP
-view
-Start in read-only mode. You will be protected from writing the files. Can
-also be done with the "-R" argument.
-.TP
-gvim gview
-The GUI version.
-Starts a new window.
-Can also be done with the "-g" argument.
-.TP
-rvim rview rgvim rgview
-Like the above, but with restrictions. It will not be possible to start shell
-commands, or suspend
-.B Vim.
-Can also be done with the "-Z" argument.
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options may be given in any order, before or after filenames.
-Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
-.TP 12
-+[num]
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on line "num".
-If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned on the last line.
-.TP
-+/{pat}
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on the
-first occurrence of {pat}.
-See ":help search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
-.TP
-+{command}
-.TP
--c {command}
-{command} will be executed after the
-first file has been read.
-{command} is interpreted as an Ex command.
-If the {command} contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes (this
-depends on the shell that is used).
-Example: Vim "+set si" main.c
-.br
-Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
-.TP
---cmd {command}
-Like using "-c", but the command is executed just before
-processing any vimrc file.
-You can use up to 10 of these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-.TP
--A
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with ARABIC support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Arabic keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is set. Otherwise an error
-message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--b
-Binary mode.
-A few options will be set that makes it possible to edit a binary or
-executable file.
-.TP
--C
-Compatible. Set the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave mostly like Vi, even though a .vimrc file exists.
-.TP
--d
-Start in diff mode.
-There should be two or three file name arguments.
-.B Vim
-will open all the files and show differences between them.
-Works like vimdiff(1).
-.TP
--d {device}
-Open {device} for use as a terminal.
-Only on the Amiga.
-Example:
-"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
-.TP
--e
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Ex mode, just like the executable was called "ex".
-.TP
--f
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-On the Amiga,
-.B Vim
-is not restarted to open a new window.
-This option should be used when
-.B Vim
-is executed by a program that will wait for the edit
-session to finish (e.g. mail).
-On the Amiga the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
-.TP
---nofork
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-.TP
--F
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with FKMAP support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Farsi keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--g
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with GUI support, this option enables the GUI.
-If no GUI support was compiled in, an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--h
-Give a bit of help about the command line arguments and options.
-After this
-.B Vim
-exits.
-.TP
--H
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Hebrew keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--i {viminfo}
-When using the viminfo file is enabled, this option sets the filename to use,
-instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
-This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file, by giving the name
-"NONE".
-.TP
--L
-Same as -r.
-.TP
--l
-Lisp mode.
-Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
-.TP
--m
-Modifying files is disabled.
-Resets the 'write' option, so that writing files is not possible.
-.TP
--N
-No-compatible mode. Reset the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible, even though a .vimrc file does
-not exist.
-.TP
--n
-No swap file will be used.
-Recovery after a crash will be impossible.
-Handy if you want to edit a file on a very slow medium (e.g. floppy).
-Can also be done with ":set uc=0".
-Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
-.TP
--o[N]
-Open N windows stacked.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--O[N]
-Open N windows side by side.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--R
-Read-only mode.
-The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
-overwriting a file.
-If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
-as in ":w!".
-The -R option also implies the -n option (see below).
-The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
-See ":help 'readonly'".
-.TP
--r
-List swap files, with information about using them for recovery.
-.TP
--r {file}
-Recovery mode.
-The swap file is used to recover a crashed editing session.
-The swap file is a file with the same filename as the text file with ".swp"
-appended.
-See ":help recovery".
-.TP
--s
-Silent mode. Only when started as "Ex" or when the "-e" option was given
-before the "-s" option.
-.TP
--s {scriptin}
-The script file {scriptin} is read.
-The characters in the file are interpreted as if you had typed them.
-The same can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".
-If the end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further characters
-are read from the keyboard.
-.TP
--T {terminal}
-Tells
-.B Vim
-the name of the terminal you are using.
-Only required when the automatic way doesn't work.
-Should be a terminal known
-to
-.B Vim
-(builtin) or defined in the termcap or terminfo file.
-.TP
--u {vimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
-All the other initializations are skipped.
-Use this to edit a special kind of files.
-It can also be used to skip all initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help initialization" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--U {gvimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializations.
-All the other GUI initializations are skipped.
-It can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help gui-init" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--V
-Verbose. Give messages about which files are sourced and for reading and
-writing a viminfo file.
-.TP
--v
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Vi mode, just like the executable was called "vi". This only has effect
-when the executable is called "ex".
-.TP
--w {scriptout}
-All the characters that you type are recorded in the file
-{scriptout}, until you exit
-.B Vim.
-This is useful if you want to create a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
-":source!".
-If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
-.TP
--W {scriptout}
-Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
-.TP
--x
-Use encryption when writing files. Will prompt for a crypt key.
-.TP
--X
-Don't connect to the X server. Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
-window title and clipboard will not be used.
-.TP
--Z
-Restricted mode. Works like the executable starts with "r".
-.TP
---
-Denotes the end of the options.
-Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
-This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
-.TP
---help
-Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
-.TP
---version
-Print version information and exit.
-.TP
---remote
-Connect to a Vim server and make it edit the files given in the rest of the
-arguments. If no server is found a warning is given and the files are edited
-in the current Vim.
-.TP
---remote-expr {expr}
-Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print the result on stdout.
-.TP
---remote-send {keys}
-Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
-.TP
---remote-silent
-As --remote, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---remote-wait
-As --remote, but Vim does not exit until the files have been edited.
-.TP
---remote-wait-silent
-As --remote-wait, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---serverlist
-List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
-.TP
---servername {name}
-Use {name} as the server name. Used for the current Vim, unless used with a
---remote argument, then it's the name of the server to connect to.
-.TP
---socketid {id}
-GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in another window.
-.TP
---echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
-.SH ON-LINE HELP
-Type ":help" in
-.B Vim
-to get started.
-Type ":help subject" to get help on a specific subject.
-For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the "ZZ" command.
-Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmdline-completion").
-Tags are present to jump from one place to another (sort of hypertext links,
-see ":help").
-All documentation files can be viewed in this way, for example
-":help syntax.txt".
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/*.txt
-The
-.B Vim
-documentation files.
-Use ":help doc-file-list" to get the complete list.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/tags
-The tags file used for finding information in the documentation files.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/syntax.vim
-System wide syntax initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/*.vim
-Syntax files for various languages.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vimrc
-System wide
-.B Vim
-initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/gvimrc
-System wide gvim initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/optwin.vim
-Script used for the ":options" command, a nice way to view and set options.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/menu.vim
-System wide menu initializations for gvim.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/bugreport.vim
-Script to generate a bug report. See ":help bugs".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/filetype.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its name. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/scripts.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its contents. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/*.ps
-Files used for PostScript printing.
-.PP
-For recent info read the VIM home page:
-.br
-<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vimtutor(1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Most of
-.B Vim
-was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
-See ":help credits" in
-.B Vim.
-.br
-.B Vim
-is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,
-Tony Andrews and G.R. (Fred) Walter.
-Although hardly any of the original code remains.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably.
-See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
-.PP
-Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are in fact
-caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.
-And if you think other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
-you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-vi_diff.txt when in Vim).
-Also have a look at the 'compatible' and 'cpoptions' options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/view.1 b/raw/man1/view.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6f1d24..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/view.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIM 1 "2002 Feb 22"
-.SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] [file ..]
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] -
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-t tag
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-q [errorfile]
-.PP
-.br
-.B ex
-.br
-.B view
-.br
-.B gvim
-.B gview
-.br
-.B rvim
-.B rview
-.B rgvim
-.B rgview
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vim
-is a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.
-It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
-It is especially useful for editing programs.
-.PP
-There are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo,
-multi windows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line
-editing, filename completion, on-line help, visual selection, etc..
-See ":help vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between
-.B Vim
-and Vi.
-.PP
-While running
-.B Vim
-a lot of help can be obtained from the on-line help system, with the ":help"
-command.
-See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
-.PP
-Most often
-.B Vim
-is started to edit a single file with the command
-.PP
- vim file
-.PP
-More generally
-.B Vim
-is started with:
-.PP
- vim [options] [filelist]
-.PP
-If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used to choose one or
-more files to be edited.
-.TP 12
-file ..
-A list of filenames.
-The first one will be the current file and read into the buffer.
-The cursor will be positioned on the first line of the buffer.
-You can get to the other files with the ":next" command.
-To edit a file that starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
-.TP
--
-The file to edit is read from stdin. Commands are read from stderr, which
-should be a tty.
-.TP
--t {tag}
-The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on a "tag", a sort
-of goto label.
-{tag} is looked up in the tags file, the associated file becomes the current
-file and the associated command is executed.
-Mostly this is used for C programs, in which case {tag} could be a function
-name.
-The effect is that the file containing that function becomes the current file
-and the cursor is positioned on the start of the function.
-See ":help tag-commands".
-.TP
--q [errorfile]
-Start in quickFix mode.
-The file [errorfile] is read and the first error is displayed.
-If [errorfile] is omitted, the filename is obtained from the 'errorfile'
-option (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the Amiga, "errors.err" on other
-systems).
-Further errors can be jumped to with the ":cn" command.
-See ":help quickfix".
-.PP
-.B Vim
-behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the executable may
-still be the same file).
-.TP 10
-vim
-The "normal" way, everything is default.
-.TP
-ex
-Start in Ex mode.
-Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
-Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
-.TP
-view
-Start in read-only mode. You will be protected from writing the files. Can
-also be done with the "-R" argument.
-.TP
-gvim gview
-The GUI version.
-Starts a new window.
-Can also be done with the "-g" argument.
-.TP
-rvim rview rgvim rgview
-Like the above, but with restrictions. It will not be possible to start shell
-commands, or suspend
-.B Vim.
-Can also be done with the "-Z" argument.
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options may be given in any order, before or after filenames.
-Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
-.TP 12
-+[num]
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on line "num".
-If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned on the last line.
-.TP
-+/{pat}
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on the
-first occurrence of {pat}.
-See ":help search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
-.TP
-+{command}
-.TP
--c {command}
-{command} will be executed after the
-first file has been read.
-{command} is interpreted as an Ex command.
-If the {command} contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes (this
-depends on the shell that is used).
-Example: Vim "+set si" main.c
-.br
-Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
-.TP
---cmd {command}
-Like using "-c", but the command is executed just before
-processing any vimrc file.
-You can use up to 10 of these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-.TP
--A
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with ARABIC support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Arabic keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is set. Otherwise an error
-message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--b
-Binary mode.
-A few options will be set that makes it possible to edit a binary or
-executable file.
-.TP
--C
-Compatible. Set the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave mostly like Vi, even though a .vimrc file exists.
-.TP
--d
-Start in diff mode.
-There should be two or three file name arguments.
-.B Vim
-will open all the files and show differences between them.
-Works like vimdiff(1).
-.TP
--d {device}
-Open {device} for use as a terminal.
-Only on the Amiga.
-Example:
-"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
-.TP
--e
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Ex mode, just like the executable was called "ex".
-.TP
--f
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-On the Amiga,
-.B Vim
-is not restarted to open a new window.
-This option should be used when
-.B Vim
-is executed by a program that will wait for the edit
-session to finish (e.g. mail).
-On the Amiga the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
-.TP
---nofork
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-.TP
--F
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with FKMAP support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Farsi keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--g
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with GUI support, this option enables the GUI.
-If no GUI support was compiled in, an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--h
-Give a bit of help about the command line arguments and options.
-After this
-.B Vim
-exits.
-.TP
--H
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Hebrew keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--i {viminfo}
-When using the viminfo file is enabled, this option sets the filename to use,
-instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
-This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file, by giving the name
-"NONE".
-.TP
--L
-Same as -r.
-.TP
--l
-Lisp mode.
-Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
-.TP
--m
-Modifying files is disabled.
-Resets the 'write' option, so that writing files is not possible.
-.TP
--N
-No-compatible mode. Reset the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible, even though a .vimrc file does
-not exist.
-.TP
--n
-No swap file will be used.
-Recovery after a crash will be impossible.
-Handy if you want to edit a file on a very slow medium (e.g. floppy).
-Can also be done with ":set uc=0".
-Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
-.TP
--o[N]
-Open N windows stacked.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--O[N]
-Open N windows side by side.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--R
-Read-only mode.
-The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
-overwriting a file.
-If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
-as in ":w!".
-The -R option also implies the -n option (see below).
-The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
-See ":help 'readonly'".
-.TP
--r
-List swap files, with information about using them for recovery.
-.TP
--r {file}
-Recovery mode.
-The swap file is used to recover a crashed editing session.
-The swap file is a file with the same filename as the text file with ".swp"
-appended.
-See ":help recovery".
-.TP
--s
-Silent mode. Only when started as "Ex" or when the "-e" option was given
-before the "-s" option.
-.TP
--s {scriptin}
-The script file {scriptin} is read.
-The characters in the file are interpreted as if you had typed them.
-The same can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".
-If the end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further characters
-are read from the keyboard.
-.TP
--T {terminal}
-Tells
-.B Vim
-the name of the terminal you are using.
-Only required when the automatic way doesn't work.
-Should be a terminal known
-to
-.B Vim
-(builtin) or defined in the termcap or terminfo file.
-.TP
--u {vimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
-All the other initializations are skipped.
-Use this to edit a special kind of files.
-It can also be used to skip all initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help initialization" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--U {gvimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializations.
-All the other GUI initializations are skipped.
-It can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help gui-init" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--V
-Verbose. Give messages about which files are sourced and for reading and
-writing a viminfo file.
-.TP
--v
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Vi mode, just like the executable was called "vi". This only has effect
-when the executable is called "ex".
-.TP
--w {scriptout}
-All the characters that you type are recorded in the file
-{scriptout}, until you exit
-.B Vim.
-This is useful if you want to create a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
-":source!".
-If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
-.TP
--W {scriptout}
-Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
-.TP
--x
-Use encryption when writing files. Will prompt for a crypt key.
-.TP
--X
-Don't connect to the X server. Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
-window title and clipboard will not be used.
-.TP
--Z
-Restricted mode. Works like the executable starts with "r".
-.TP
---
-Denotes the end of the options.
-Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
-This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
-.TP
---help
-Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
-.TP
---version
-Print version information and exit.
-.TP
---remote
-Connect to a Vim server and make it edit the files given in the rest of the
-arguments. If no server is found a warning is given and the files are edited
-in the current Vim.
-.TP
---remote-expr {expr}
-Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print the result on stdout.
-.TP
---remote-send {keys}
-Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
-.TP
---remote-silent
-As --remote, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---remote-wait
-As --remote, but Vim does not exit until the files have been edited.
-.TP
---remote-wait-silent
-As --remote-wait, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---serverlist
-List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
-.TP
---servername {name}
-Use {name} as the server name. Used for the current Vim, unless used with a
---remote argument, then it's the name of the server to connect to.
-.TP
---socketid {id}
-GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in another window.
-.TP
---echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
-.SH ON-LINE HELP
-Type ":help" in
-.B Vim
-to get started.
-Type ":help subject" to get help on a specific subject.
-For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the "ZZ" command.
-Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmdline-completion").
-Tags are present to jump from one place to another (sort of hypertext links,
-see ":help").
-All documentation files can be viewed in this way, for example
-":help syntax.txt".
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/*.txt
-The
-.B Vim
-documentation files.
-Use ":help doc-file-list" to get the complete list.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/tags
-The tags file used for finding information in the documentation files.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/syntax.vim
-System wide syntax initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/*.vim
-Syntax files for various languages.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vimrc
-System wide
-.B Vim
-initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/gvimrc
-System wide gvim initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/optwin.vim
-Script used for the ":options" command, a nice way to view and set options.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/menu.vim
-System wide menu initializations for gvim.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/bugreport.vim
-Script to generate a bug report. See ":help bugs".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/filetype.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its name. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/scripts.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its contents. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/*.ps
-Files used for PostScript printing.
-.PP
-For recent info read the VIM home page:
-.br
-<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vimtutor(1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Most of
-.B Vim
-was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
-See ":help credits" in
-.B Vim.
-.br
-.B Vim
-is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,
-Tony Andrews and G.R. (Fred) Walter.
-Although hardly any of the original code remains.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably.
-See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
-.PP
-Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are in fact
-caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.
-And if you think other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
-you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-vi_diff.txt when in Vim).
-Also have a look at the 'compatible' and 'cpoptions' options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/vim.1 b/raw/man1/vim.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6f1d24..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/vim.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,493 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIM 1 "2002 Feb 22"
-.SH NAME
-vim \- Vi IMproved, a programmers text editor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] [file ..]
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] -
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-t tag
-.br
-.B vim
-[options] \-q [errorfile]
-.PP
-.br
-.B ex
-.br
-.B view
-.br
-.B gvim
-.B gview
-.br
-.B rvim
-.B rview
-.B rgvim
-.B rgview
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vim
-is a text editor that is upwards compatible to Vi.
-It can be used to edit all kinds of plain text.
-It is especially useful for editing programs.
-.PP
-There are a lot of enhancements above Vi: multi level undo,
-multi windows and buffers, syntax highlighting, command line
-editing, filename completion, on-line help, visual selection, etc..
-See ":help vi_diff.txt" for a summary of the differences between
-.B Vim
-and Vi.
-.PP
-While running
-.B Vim
-a lot of help can be obtained from the on-line help system, with the ":help"
-command.
-See the ON-LINE HELP section below.
-.PP
-Most often
-.B Vim
-is started to edit a single file with the command
-.PP
- vim file
-.PP
-More generally
-.B Vim
-is started with:
-.PP
- vim [options] [filelist]
-.PP
-If the filelist is missing, the editor will start with an empty buffer.
-Otherwise exactly one out of the following four may be used to choose one or
-more files to be edited.
-.TP 12
-file ..
-A list of filenames.
-The first one will be the current file and read into the buffer.
-The cursor will be positioned on the first line of the buffer.
-You can get to the other files with the ":next" command.
-To edit a file that starts with a dash, precede the filelist with "--".
-.TP
--
-The file to edit is read from stdin. Commands are read from stderr, which
-should be a tty.
-.TP
--t {tag}
-The file to edit and the initial cursor position depends on a "tag", a sort
-of goto label.
-{tag} is looked up in the tags file, the associated file becomes the current
-file and the associated command is executed.
-Mostly this is used for C programs, in which case {tag} could be a function
-name.
-The effect is that the file containing that function becomes the current file
-and the cursor is positioned on the start of the function.
-See ":help tag-commands".
-.TP
--q [errorfile]
-Start in quickFix mode.
-The file [errorfile] is read and the first error is displayed.
-If [errorfile] is omitted, the filename is obtained from the 'errorfile'
-option (defaults to "AztecC.Err" for the Amiga, "errors.err" on other
-systems).
-Further errors can be jumped to with the ":cn" command.
-See ":help quickfix".
-.PP
-.B Vim
-behaves differently, depending on the name of the command (the executable may
-still be the same file).
-.TP 10
-vim
-The "normal" way, everything is default.
-.TP
-ex
-Start in Ex mode.
-Go to Normal mode with the ":vi" command.
-Can also be done with the "-e" argument.
-.TP
-view
-Start in read-only mode. You will be protected from writing the files. Can
-also be done with the "-R" argument.
-.TP
-gvim gview
-The GUI version.
-Starts a new window.
-Can also be done with the "-g" argument.
-.TP
-rvim rview rgvim rgview
-Like the above, but with restrictions. It will not be possible to start shell
-commands, or suspend
-.B Vim.
-Can also be done with the "-Z" argument.
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options may be given in any order, before or after filenames.
-Options without an argument can be combined after a single dash.
-.TP 12
-+[num]
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on line "num".
-If "num" is missing, the cursor will be positioned on the last line.
-.TP
-+/{pat}
-For the first file the cursor will be positioned on the
-first occurrence of {pat}.
-See ":help search-pattern" for the available search patterns.
-.TP
-+{command}
-.TP
--c {command}
-{command} will be executed after the
-first file has been read.
-{command} is interpreted as an Ex command.
-If the {command} contains spaces it must be enclosed in double quotes (this
-depends on the shell that is used).
-Example: Vim "+set si" main.c
-.br
-Note: You can use up to 10 "+" or "-c" commands.
-.TP
---cmd {command}
-Like using "-c", but the command is executed just before
-processing any vimrc file.
-You can use up to 10 of these commands, independently from "-c" commands.
-.TP
--A
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with ARABIC support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Arabic keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Arabic mode, i.e. 'arabic' is set. Otherwise an error
-message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--b
-Binary mode.
-A few options will be set that makes it possible to edit a binary or
-executable file.
-.TP
--C
-Compatible. Set the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave mostly like Vi, even though a .vimrc file exists.
-.TP
--d
-Start in diff mode.
-There should be two or three file name arguments.
-.B Vim
-will open all the files and show differences between them.
-Works like vimdiff(1).
-.TP
--d {device}
-Open {device} for use as a terminal.
-Only on the Amiga.
-Example:
-"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
-.TP
--e
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Ex mode, just like the executable was called "ex".
-.TP
--f
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-On the Amiga,
-.B Vim
-is not restarted to open a new window.
-This option should be used when
-.B Vim
-is executed by a program that will wait for the edit
-session to finish (e.g. mail).
-On the Amiga the ":sh" and ":!" commands will not work.
-.TP
---nofork
-Foreground. For the GUI version,
-.B Vim
-will not fork and detach from the shell it was started in.
-.TP
--F
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with FKMAP support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Farsi keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Farsi mode, i.e. 'fkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--g
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with GUI support, this option enables the GUI.
-If no GUI support was compiled in, an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--h
-Give a bit of help about the command line arguments and options.
-After this
-.B Vim
-exits.
-.TP
--H
-If
-.B Vim
-has been compiled with RIGHTLEFT support for editing right-to-left
-oriented files and Hebrew keyboard mapping, this option starts
-.B Vim
-in Hebrew mode, i.e. 'hkmap' and 'rightleft' are set.
-Otherwise an error message is given and
-.B Vim
-aborts.
-.TP
--i {viminfo}
-When using the viminfo file is enabled, this option sets the filename to use,
-instead of the default "~/.viminfo".
-This can also be used to skip the use of the .viminfo file, by giving the name
-"NONE".
-.TP
--L
-Same as -r.
-.TP
--l
-Lisp mode.
-Sets the 'lisp' and 'showmatch' options on.
-.TP
--m
-Modifying files is disabled.
-Resets the 'write' option, so that writing files is not possible.
-.TP
--N
-No-compatible mode. Reset the 'compatible' option.
-This will make
-.B Vim
-behave a bit better, but less Vi compatible, even though a .vimrc file does
-not exist.
-.TP
--n
-No swap file will be used.
-Recovery after a crash will be impossible.
-Handy if you want to edit a file on a very slow medium (e.g. floppy).
-Can also be done with ":set uc=0".
-Can be undone with ":set uc=200".
-.TP
--o[N]
-Open N windows stacked.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--O[N]
-Open N windows side by side.
-When N is omitted, open one window for each file.
-.TP
--R
-Read-only mode.
-The 'readonly' option will be set.
-You can still edit the buffer, but will be prevented from accidently
-overwriting a file.
-If you do want to overwrite a file, add an exclamation mark to the Ex command,
-as in ":w!".
-The -R option also implies the -n option (see below).
-The 'readonly' option can be reset with ":set noro".
-See ":help 'readonly'".
-.TP
--r
-List swap files, with information about using them for recovery.
-.TP
--r {file}
-Recovery mode.
-The swap file is used to recover a crashed editing session.
-The swap file is a file with the same filename as the text file with ".swp"
-appended.
-See ":help recovery".
-.TP
--s
-Silent mode. Only when started as "Ex" or when the "-e" option was given
-before the "-s" option.
-.TP
--s {scriptin}
-The script file {scriptin} is read.
-The characters in the file are interpreted as if you had typed them.
-The same can be done with the command ":source! {scriptin}".
-If the end of the file is reached before the editor exits, further characters
-are read from the keyboard.
-.TP
--T {terminal}
-Tells
-.B Vim
-the name of the terminal you are using.
-Only required when the automatic way doesn't work.
-Should be a terminal known
-to
-.B Vim
-(builtin) or defined in the termcap or terminfo file.
-.TP
--u {vimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {vimrc} for initializations.
-All the other initializations are skipped.
-Use this to edit a special kind of files.
-It can also be used to skip all initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help initialization" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--U {gvimrc}
-Use the commands in the file {gvimrc} for GUI initializations.
-All the other GUI initializations are skipped.
-It can also be used to skip all GUI initializations by giving the name "NONE".
-See ":help gui-init" within vim for more details.
-.TP
--V
-Verbose. Give messages about which files are sourced and for reading and
-writing a viminfo file.
-.TP
--v
-Start
-.B Vim
-in Vi mode, just like the executable was called "vi". This only has effect
-when the executable is called "ex".
-.TP
--w {scriptout}
-All the characters that you type are recorded in the file
-{scriptout}, until you exit
-.B Vim.
-This is useful if you want to create a script file to be used with "vim -s" or
-":source!".
-If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
-.TP
--W {scriptout}
-Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
-.TP
--x
-Use encryption when writing files. Will prompt for a crypt key.
-.TP
--X
-Don't connect to the X server. Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
-window title and clipboard will not be used.
-.TP
--Z
-Restricted mode. Works like the executable starts with "r".
-.TP
---
-Denotes the end of the options.
-Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
-This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
-.TP
---help
-Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
-.TP
---version
-Print version information and exit.
-.TP
---remote
-Connect to a Vim server and make it edit the files given in the rest of the
-arguments. If no server is found a warning is given and the files are edited
-in the current Vim.
-.TP
---remote-expr {expr}
-Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print the result on stdout.
-.TP
---remote-send {keys}
-Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
-.TP
---remote-silent
-As --remote, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---remote-wait
-As --remote, but Vim does not exit until the files have been edited.
-.TP
---remote-wait-silent
-As --remote-wait, but without the warning when no server is found.
-.TP
---serverlist
-List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
-.TP
---servername {name}
-Use {name} as the server name. Used for the current Vim, unless used with a
---remote argument, then it's the name of the server to connect to.
-.TP
---socketid {id}
-GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in another window.
-.TP
---echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
-.SH ON-LINE HELP
-Type ":help" in
-.B Vim
-to get started.
-Type ":help subject" to get help on a specific subject.
-For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the "ZZ" command.
-Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmdline-completion").
-Tags are present to jump from one place to another (sort of hypertext links,
-see ":help").
-All documentation files can be viewed in this way, for example
-":help syntax.txt".
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/*.txt
-The
-.B Vim
-documentation files.
-Use ":help doc-file-list" to get the complete list.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/doc/tags
-The tags file used for finding information in the documentation files.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/syntax.vim
-System wide syntax initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/syntax/*.vim
-Syntax files for various languages.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vimrc
-System wide
-.B Vim
-initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/gvimrc
-System wide gvim initializations.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/optwin.vim
-Script used for the ":options" command, a nice way to view and set options.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/menu.vim
-System wide menu initializations for gvim.
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/bugreport.vim
-Script to generate a bug report. See ":help bugs".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/filetype.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its name. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/scripts.vim
-Script to detect the type of a file by its contents. See ":help 'filetype'".
-.TP
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/*.ps
-Files used for PostScript printing.
-.PP
-For recent info read the VIM home page:
-.br
-<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vimtutor(1)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Most of
-.B Vim
-was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
-See ":help credits" in
-.B Vim.
-.br
-.B Vim
-is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,
-Tony Andrews and G.R. (Fred) Walter.
-Although hardly any of the original code remains.
-.SH BUGS
-Probably.
-See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
-.PP
-Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are in fact
-caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.
-And if you think other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
-you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-vi_diff.txt when in Vim).
-Also have a look at the 'compatible' and 'cpoptions' options.
diff --git a/raw/man1/vimtutor.1 b/raw/man1/vimtutor.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ef3a738..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/vimtutor.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-.TH VIMTUTOR 1 "2001 April 2"
-.SH NAME
-vimtutor \- the Vim tutor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.br
-.B vimtutor [language]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Vimtutor
-starts the
-.B Vim
-tutor.
-It copies the tutor file first, so that it can be modified without changing
-the original file.
-.PP
-The
-.B Vimtutor
-is useful for people that want to learn their first
-.B Vim
-commands.
-.PP
-The optional [language] argument is the two-letter name of a language, like
-"it" or "es".
-If the [language] argument is missing, the language of the current locale will
-be used.
-If a tutor in this language is available, it will be used.
-Otherwise the English version will be used.
-.PP
-.B Vim
-is always started in Vi compatible mode.
-.SH FILES
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/tutor/tutor[.language]
-The
-.B Vimtutor
-text file(s).
-.TP 15
-/usr/share/vim/vim62/tutor/tutor.vim
-The Vim script used to copy the
-.B Vimtutor
-text file.
-.SH AUTHOR
-The
-.B Vimtutor
-was originally written for Vi by Michael C. Pierce and Robert K. Ware,
-Colorado School of Mines using ideas supplied by Charles Smith,
-Colorado State University.
-E-mail: bware at mines.colorado.edu.
-.br
-It was modified for
-.B Vim
-by Bram Moolenaar.
-For the names of the translators see the tutor files.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-vim(1)
diff --git a/raw/man1/virtex.1 b/raw/man1/virtex.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b6cf832..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/virtex.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/tex.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/w.1 b/raw/man1/w.1
deleted file mode 100644
index da3c6ad..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/w.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-.\" w.1 - manpage for the w(1) utility, part of procps
-.TH W 1 "10 Aug 2003" "Linux" "Linux User's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-w \- show who is logged on and what they are doing
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B w \-
-.RB [ -husfV ]
-.RI [ user ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B "w "
-displays information about the users currently on the machine and their
-processes. The header shows (in this order) the current time, how long the
-system has been running, how many users are currently logged on, and the system
-load averages for the past 1, 5, and 15 minutes.
-.sp
-The following entries are displayed for each user: their login name, the tty
-name, their remote host, their login time, their idle time, JCPU, PCPU, and the
-command line of their current process.
-.sp
-The
-.B JCPU
-time is the time used by all processes attached to the tty. It
-does not include past background jobs, but does include currently
-running background jobs.
-.sp
-The
-.B PCPU
-time is the time used by the current process, which is listed in the "what"
-field.
-
-.PP
-.SH "COMMAND\-LINE OPTIONS"
-.TP 0.5i
-.B "\-h "
-Don't print the header.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B "\-u "
-Ignores the username while figuring out the current process and cpu
-times. To demonstrate this, do a "su" and do a "w" and a "w -u".
-.TP 0.5i
-.B "\-s "
-Use the short format.
-Don't print the login time, JCPU or PCPU times.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B "\-f "
-Toggle printing the
-.B from
-(remote hostname) field. The default is for the
-.B from
-field to be printed, although your system administrator or distribution
-maintainer may have compiled a version in which the
-.B from
-field is not shown by default.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B "\-V "
-Display version information and exit.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B "user "
-Show information about the specified user only.
-
-.SH FILES
-.ta
-.I /etc/utmp
-information about who is currently logged on
-.I /proc
-process information
-.fi
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR free (1),
-.BR ps (1),
-.BR top (1),
-.BR uptime (1),
-.BR utmp (5),
-.BR who (1)
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-.B w
-was re-written almost entirely by Charles Blake, based on the version by Larry
-Greenfield <greenfie at gauss.rutgers.edu> and Michael K. Johnson
-<johnsonm at redhat.com>.
-
-The procps package is maintained by Robert Love and was created by Michael
-Johnson.
-
-Please send bug reports to <procps-list at redhat.com>.
diff --git a/raw/man1/wait.1 b/raw/man1/wait.1
deleted file mode 100644
index b757cd3..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/wait.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/builtins.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/wall.1 b/raw/man1/wall.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f086be0..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/wall.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-.TH WALL 1 "15 April 2003" "" "Linux User's Manual"
-
-.SH NAME
-wall -- send a message to everybody's terminal.
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B wall
-.RB [ \-n ]
-.RB [ " message " ]
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Wall
-sends a message to everybody logged in with their
-.IR mesg (1)
-permission
-set to
-.BR yes .
-The message can be given as an argument to
-.IR wall ,
-or it can be sent to
-.IR wall 's
-standard input. When using the standard input from a terminal,
-the message should be terminated with the
-.B EOF
-key (usually Control-D).
-.PP
-The length of the message is limited to 20 lines.
-For every invocation of
-.I wall
-a notification will be written to syslog, with facility
-.B LOG_USER
-and level
-.BR LOG_INFO .
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP \fB\-n\fn
-Suppresses the normal banner printed by
-.IR wall ,
-changing it to "Remote broadcast message".
-This option is only available for root if
-.I wall
-is installed set-group-id, and is used by
-.IR rpc.walld (8).
-.PP
-
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-.I Wall
-ignores the
-.B TZ
-variable - the time printed in the banner is based on the systems
-local time.
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.IR mesg (1),
-.IR rpc.rwalld (8).
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-Miquel van Smoorenburg, miquels at cistron.nl
diff --git a/raw/man1/wbinfo.1 b/raw/man1/wbinfo.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f740448..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/wbinfo.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,203 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "WBINFO" 1 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-wbinfo \- Query information from winbind daemon
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBwbinfo\fR [-a user%password] [-c username] [-C groupname] [--domain domain] [-I ip] [-s sid] [-u] [-U uid] [-g] [--get-auth-user] [-G gid] [-m] [-n name] [-N netbios-name] [-o user:group] [-O user:group] [-p] [-r user] [--set-auth-user user%password] [--sequence] [-S sid] [-t] [-x username] [-X groupname] [-Y sid]
-
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-The \fBwbinfo\fR program queries and returns information created and used by the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon\&.
-
-.PP
-The \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon must be configured and running for the \fBwbinfo\fR program to be able to return information\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--a username%password
-Attempt to authenticate a user via winbindd\&. This checks both authenticaion methods and reports its results\&.
-
-
-.TP
--c user
-Create a local winbind user\&.
-
-
-.TP
--C group
-Create a local winbindd group\&.
-
-
-.TP
---domain name
-This parameter sets the domain on which any specified operations will performed\&. If special domain name '\&.' is used to represent the current domain to which winbindd belongs\&. Currently only the \fB--sequence\fR, \fB-u\fR, and \fB-g\fR options honor this parameter\&.
-
-
-.TP
--g
-This option will list all groups available in the Windows NT domain for which the \fBSamba\fR(7) daemon is operating in\&. Groups in all trusted domains will also be listed\&. Note that this operation does not assign group ids to any groups that have not already been seen by \fBwinbindd\fR(8)\&.
-
-
-.TP
---get-auth-user
-Print username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. Username and password can be set using '-A'\&. Only available for root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--G gid
-Try to convert a UNIX group id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the gid specified does not refer to one within the idmap gid range then the operation will fail\&.
-
-
-.TP
--I ip
-The \fI-I\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to send a node status request to get the NetBIOS name associated with the IP address specified by the \fIip\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-.TP
--m
-Produce a list of domains trusted by the Windows NT server \fBwinbindd\fR(8) contacts when resolving names\&. This list does not include the Windows NT domain the server is a Primary Domain Controller for\&.
-
-
-.TP
--n name
-The \fI-n\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) for the SID associated with the name specified\&. Domain names can be specified before the user name by using the winbind separator character\&. For example CWDOM1/Administrator refers to the Administrator user in the domain CWDOM1\&. If no domain is specified then the domain used is the one specified in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) \fIworkgroup \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-.TP
--N name
-The \fI-N\fR option queries \fBwinbindd\fR(8) to query the WINS server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name specified by the \fIname\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-.TP
--o user:group
-Add a winbindd local group as a secondary group for the specified winbindd local user\&.
-
-
-.TP
--O user:group
-Remove a winbindd local group as a secondary group for the specified winbindd local user\&.
-
-
-.TP
--p
-Check whether winbindd is still alive\&. Prints out either 'succeeded' or 'failed'\&.
-
-
-.TP
--r username
-Try to obtain the list of UNIX group ids to which the user belongs\&. This only works for users defined on a Domain Controller\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s sid
-Use \fI-s\fR to resolve a SID to a name\&. This is the inverse of the \fI-n \fR option above\&. SIDs must be specified as ASCII strings in the traditional Microsoft format\&. For example, S-1-5-21-1455342024-3071081365-2475485837-500\&.
-
-
-.TP
---set-auth-user username%password
-Store username and password used by winbindd during session setup to a domain controller\&. This enables winbindd to operate in a Windows 2000 domain with Restrict Anonymous turned on (a\&.k\&.a\&. Permissions compatiable with Windows 2000 servers only)\&.
-
-
-.TP
---sequence
-Show sequence numbers of all known domains
-
-
-.TP
--S sid
-Convert a SID to a UNIX user id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX user mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&.
-
-
-.TP
--t
-Verify that the workstation trust account created when the Samba server is added to the Windows NT domain is working\&.
-
-
-.TP
--u
-This option will list all users available in the Windows NT domain for which the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon is operating in\&. Users in all trusted domains will also be listed\&. Note that this operation does not assign user ids to any users that have not already been seen by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) \&.
-
-
-.TP
--U uid
-Try to convert a UNIX user id to a Windows NT SID\&. If the uid specified does not refer to one within the idmap uid range then the operation will fail\&.
-
-
-.TP
--x user
-Delete an existing local winbind user\&.
-
-
-.TP
--X group
-Delete an existing local winbindd group\&.
-
-
-.TP
--Y sid
-Convert a SID to a UNIX group id\&. If the SID does not correspond to a UNIX group mapped by \fBwinbindd\fR(8) then the operation will fail\&.
-
-
-.TP
--V
-Prints the program version number\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.SH "EXIT STATUS"
-
-.PP
-The wbinfo program returns 0 if the operation succeeded, or 1 if the operation failed\&. If the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon is not working \fBwbinfo\fR will always return failure\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBwinbindd\fR(8)
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBwbinfo\fR and \fBwinbindd\fR were written by Tim Potter\&.
-
-.PP
-The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man1/wc.1 b/raw/man1/wc.1
deleted file mode 100644
index bb2e228..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/wc.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH WC "1" "October 2003" "wc (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-wc \- print the number of bytes, words, and lines in files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B wc
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [\fIFILE\fR]...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Print byte, word, and newline counts for each FILE, and a total line if
-more than one FILE is specified. With no FILE, or when FILE is -,
-read standard input.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-bytes\fR
-print the byte counts
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-chars\fR
-print the character counts
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-lines\fR
-print the newline counts
-.TP
-\fB\-L\fR, \fB\-\-max\-line\-length\fR
-print the length of the longest line
-.TP
-\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-words\fR
-print the word counts
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Paul Rubin and David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B wc
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B wc
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info wc
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/whatis.1 b/raw/man1/whatis.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a407a48..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/whatis.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Generated automatically from whatis.1.in by the
-.\" configure script.
-.\"
-.\" Man page for whatis
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991, John W. Eaton.
-.\"
-.\" You may distribute under the terms of the GNU General Public
-.\" License as specified in the README file that comes with the man 1.0
-.\" distribution.
-.\"
-.\" John W. Eaton
-.\" jwe at che.utexas.edu
-.\" Department of Chemical Engineering
-.\" The University of Texas at Austin
-.\" Austin, Texas 78712
-.\"
-.TH whatis 1 "Jan 5, 1991"
-.LO 1
-.SH NAME
-whatis \- search the whatis database for complete words.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI whatis
-keyword ...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-whatis searches a set of database files containing short descriptions
-of system commands for keywords and displays the result on the
-standard output. Only complete word matches are displayed.
-
-The whatis database is created using the command /usr/sbin/makewhatis.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-apropos(1), man(1).
diff --git a/raw/man1/who.1 b/raw/man1/who.1
deleted file mode 100644
index ef52703..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/who.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,93 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH WHO "1" "October 2003" "who (coreutils) 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-who \- show who is logged on
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B who
-[\fIOPTION\fR]... [ \fIFILE | ARG1 ARG2 \fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.TP
-\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-all\fR
-same as \fB\-b\fR \fB\-d\fR \fB\-\-login\fR \fB\-p\fR \fB\-r\fR \fB\-t\fR \fB\-T\fR \fB\-u\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-b\fR, \fB\-\-boot\fR
-time of last system boot
-.TP
-\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-dead\fR
-print dead processes
-.TP
-\fB\-H\fR, \fB\-\-heading\fR
-print line of column headings
-.TP
-\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-idle\fR
-add idle time as HOURS:MINUTES, . or old
-(deprecated, use \fB\-u\fR)
-.TP
-\fB\-\-login\fR
-print system login processes
-(equivalent to SUS \fB\-l\fR)
-.TP
-\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-lookup\fR
-attempt to canonicalize hostnames via DNS
-(-l is deprecated, use \fB\-\-lookup\fR)
-.TP
-\fB\-m\fR
-only hostname and user associated with stdin
-.TP
-\fB\-p\fR, \fB\-\-process\fR
-print active processes spawned by init
-.TP
-\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-count\fR
-all login names and number of users logged on
-.TP
-\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-runlevel\fR
-print current runlevel
-.TP
-\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-short\fR
-print only name, line, and time (default)
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-time\fR
-print last system clock change
-.TP
-\fB\-T\fR, \fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-mesg\fR
-add user's message status as +, - or ?
-.TP
-\fB\-u\fR, \fB\-\-users\fR
-list users logged in
-.TP
-\fB\-\-message\fR
-same as \fB\-T\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-writable\fR
-same as \fB\-T\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.PP
-If FILE is not specified, use /var/run/utmp. /var/log/wtmp as FILE is common.
-If ARG1 ARG2 given, \fB\-m\fR presumed: `am i' or `mom likes' are usual.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by Joseph Arceneaux, David MacKenzie, and Michael Stone.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B who
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B who
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info who
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/wish.1 b/raw/man1/wish.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f1fd28b..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/wish.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,421 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: wish.1,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: wish.1,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-wish \- Simple windowing shell
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBwish\fR ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR?
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20
-Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of
-using the default colormap for the screen.
-.IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20
-Display (and screen) on which to display window.
-.IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20
-Initial geometry to use for window. If this option is specified, its
-value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's
-Tcl interpreter.
-.IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20
-Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and
-as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands.
-.IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20
-Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors
-are reported immediately. This will result in much slower
-execution, but it is useful for debugging.
-.VS 8.0 br
-.IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20
-Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in
-the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an
-independent toplevel window. \fIId\fR must be specified in the same
-way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e.
-it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command).
-.VE
-.IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20
-Specifies the visual to use for the window.
-\fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR
-procedure.
-.IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20
-Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR
-variable without interpreting them.
-This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR
-to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them.
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBWish\fR is a simple program consisting of the Tcl command
-language, the Tk toolkit, and a main program that reads commands
-from standard input or from a file.
-It creates a main window and then processes Tcl commands.
-If \fBwish\fR is invoked with no arguments, or with a first argument
-that starts with ``\-'', then it reads Tcl commands interactively from
-standard input.
-It will continue processing commands until all windows have been
-deleted or until end-of-file is reached on standard input.
-If there exists a file \fB.wishrc\fR in the home directory of
-the user, \fBwish\fR evaluates the file as a Tcl script
-just before reading the first command from standard input.
-.PP
-If \fBwish\fR is invoked with an initial \fIfileName\fR argument, then
-\fIfileName\fR is treated as the name of a script file.
-\fBWish\fR will evaluate the script in \fIfileName\fR (which
-presumably creates a user interface), then it will respond to events
-until all windows have been deleted.
-Commands will not be read from standard input.
-There is no automatic evaluation of \fB.wishrc\fR in this
-case, but the script file can always \fBsource\fR it if desired.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBWish\fR automatically processes all of the command-line options
-described in the \fBOPTIONS\fR summary above.
-Any other command-line arguments besides these are passed through
-to the application using the \fBargc\fR and \fBargv\fR variables
-described later.
-
-.SH "APPLICATION NAME AND CLASS"
-.PP
-The name of the application, which is used for purposes such as
-\fBsend\fR commands, is taken from the \fB\-name\fR option,
-if it is specified; otherwise it is taken from \fIfileName\fR,
-if it is specified, or from the command name by which
-\fBwish\fR was invoked. In the last two cases, if the name contains a ``/''
-character, then only the characters after the last slash are used
-as the application name.
-.PP
-The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as
-specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults
-file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is
-capitalized.
-
-.SH "VARIABLES"
-.PP
-\fBWish\fR sets the following Tcl variables:
-.TP 15
-\fBargc\fR
-Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none),
-not including the options described above.
-.TP 15
-\fBargv\fR
-Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments
-that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or don't match any of the
-options described in OPTIONS above, in order, or an empty string
-if there are no such arguments.
-.TP 15
-\fBargv0\fR
-Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified.
-Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked.
-.TP 15
-\fBgeometry\fR
-If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its
-value into this variable. If the variable still exists after
-\fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of
-the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main
-window's geometry.
-.TP 15
-\fBtcl_interactive\fR
-Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR
-was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like
-device), 0 otherwise.
-
-.SH "SCRIPT FILES"
-.PP
-If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is
-.CS
-\fB#!/usr/local/bin/wish\fR
-.CE
-then you can invoke the script file directly from your shell if
-you mark it as executable.
-This assumes that \fBwish\fR has been installed in the default
-location in /usr/local/bin; if it's installed somewhere else
-then you'll have to modify the above line to match.
-Many UNIX systems do not allow the \fB#!\fR line to exceed about
-30 characters in length, so be sure that the \fBwish\fR executable
-can be accessed with a short file name.
-.PP
-An even better approach is to start your script files with the
-following three lines:
-.CS
-\fB#!/bin/sh
-# the next line restarts using wish \e
-exec wish "$0" "$@"\fR
-.CE
-This approach has three advantages over the approach in the previous
-paragraph. First, the location of the \fBwish\fR binary doesn't have
-to be hard-wired into the script: it can be anywhere in your shell
-search path. Second, it gets around the 30-character file name limit
-in the previous approach.
-Third, this approach will work even if \fBwish\fR is
-itself a shell script (this is done on some systems in order to
-handle multiple architectures or operating systems: the \fBwish\fR
-script selects one of several binaries to run). The three lines
-cause both \fBsh\fR and \fBwish\fR to process the script, but the
-\fBexec\fR is only executed by \fBsh\fR.
-\fBsh\fR processes the script first; it treats the second
-line as a comment and executes the third line.
-The \fBexec\fR statement cause the shell to stop processing and
-instead to start up \fBwish\fR to reprocess the entire script.
-When \fBwish\fR starts up, it treats all three lines as comments,
-since the backslash at the end of the second line causes the third
-line to be treated as part of the comment on the second line.
-
-.SH PROMPTS
-.PP
-When \fBwish\fR is invoked interactively it normally prompts for each
-command with ``\fB% \fR''. You can change the prompt by setting the
-variables \fBtcl_prompt1\fR and \fBtcl_prompt2\fR. If variable
-\fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script
-to output a prompt; instead of outputting a prompt \fBwish\fR
-will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR.
-The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when
-a newline is typed but the current command isn't yet complete;
-if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR isn't set then no prompt is output for
-incomplete commands.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-shell, toolkit
diff --git a/raw/man1/xargs.1 b/raw/man1/xargs.1
deleted file mode 100644
index a9f39a7..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/xargs.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-.TH XARGS 1L \" -*- nroff -*-
-.SH NAME
-xargs \- build and execute command lines from standard input
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B xargs
-[\-0prtx] [\-e[eof-str]] [\-i[replace-str]] [\-l[max-lines]]
-[\-n max-args] [\-s max-chars] [\-P max-procs] [\-\-null] [\-\-eof[=eof-str]]
-[\-\-replace[=replace-str]] [\-\-max-lines[=max-lines]] [\-\-interactive]
-[\-\-max-chars=max-chars] [\-\-verbose] [\-\-exit] [\-\-max-procs=max-procs]
-[\-\-max-args=max-args] [\-\-no-run-if-empty] [\-\-version] [\-\-help]
-[command [initial-arguments]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page
-documents the GNU version of
-.BR xargs .
-.B xargs
-reads arguments from the standard input, delimited by blanks (which can be
-protected with double or single quotes or a backslash) or newlines,
-and executes the
-.I command
-(default is /bin/echo) one or more times with any
-.I initial-arguments
-followed by arguments read from standard input. Blank lines on the
-standard input are ignored.
-.P
-.B xargs
-exits with the following status:
-.nf
-0 if it succeeds
-123 if any invocation of the command exited with status 1-125
-124 if the command exited with status 255
-125 if the command is killed by a signal
-126 if the command cannot be run
-127 if the command is not found
-1 if some other error occurred.
-.fi
-.SS OPTIONS
-.TP
-.I "\-\-null, \-0"
-Input filenames are terminated by a null character instead of by
-whitespace, and the quotes and backslash are not special (every
-character is taken literally). Disables the end of file string, which
-is treated like any other argument. Useful when arguments might
-contain white space, quote marks, or backslashes. The GNU find
-\-print0 option produces input suitable for this mode.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-eof[=eof-str], \-e[eof-str]"
-Set the end of file string to \fIeof-str\fR. If the end of file
-string occurs as a line of input, the rest of the input is ignored.
-If \fIeof-str\fR is omitted, there is no end of file string. If this
-option is not given, the end of file string defaults to "_".
-.TP
-.I "\-\-help"
-Print a summary of the options to
-.B xargs
-and exit.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-replace[=replace-str], \-i[replace-str]"
-Replace occurences of \fIreplace-str\fR in the initial arguments with
-names read from standard input.
-Also, unquoted blanks do not terminate arguments.
-If \fIreplace-str\fR is omitted, it
-defaults to "{}" (like for `find \-exec'). Implies \fI\-x\fP and
-\fI\-l 1\fP.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-max-lines[=max-lines], -l[max-lines]"
-Use at most \fImax-lines\fR nonblank input lines per command line;
-\fImax-lines\fR defaults to 1 if omitted. Trailing blanks cause an
-input line to be logically continued on the next input line. Implies
-\fI\-x\fR.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-max-args=max-args, \-n max-args"
-Use at most \fImax-args\fR arguments per command line. Fewer than
-\fImax-args\fR arguments will be used if the size (see the \-s option)
-is exceeded, unless the \-x option is given, in which case \fBxargs\fR
-will exit.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-interactive, \-p"
-Prompt the user about whether to run each command line and read a line
-from the terminal. Only run the command line if the response starts
-with `y' or `Y'. Implies \fI\-t\fR.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-no-run-if-empty, \-r"
-If the standard input does not contain any nonblanks, do not run the
-command. Normally, the command is run once even if there is no input.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-max-chars=max-chars, \-s max-chars"
-Use at most \fImax-chars\fR characters per command line, including the
-command and initial arguments and the terminating nulls at the ends of
-the argument strings. The default is as large as possible, up to 20k
-characters.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-verbose, \-t"
-Print the command line on the standard error output before executing
-it.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-version"
-Print the version number of
-.B xargs
-and exit.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-exit, \-x"
-Exit if the size (see the \fI\-s\fR option) is exceeded.
-.TP
-.I "\-\-max-procs=max-procs, \-P max-procs"
-Run up to \fImax-procs\fR processes at a time; the default is 1. If
-\fImax-procs\fR is 0, \fBxargs\fR will run as many processes as
-possible at a time. Use the \fI\-n\fR option with \fI\-P\fR;
-otherwise chances are that only one exec will be done.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBfind\fP(1L), \fBlocate\fP(1L), \fBlocatedb\fP(5L), \fBupdatedb\fP(1)
-\fBFinding Files\fP (on-line in Info, or printed)
diff --git a/raw/man1/xpdf.1 b/raw/man1/xpdf.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f7b263..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/xpdf.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,495 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1996-2003 Glyph & Cog, LLC
-.TH xpdf 1 "10 October 2003"
-.SH NAME
-xpdf \- Portable Document Format (PDF) file viewer for X (version 2.03)
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B xpdf
-[options]
-.RI [ PDF-file
-.RI [ page " | +" dest ]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Xpdf
-is a viewer for Portable Document Format (PDF) files. (These are also
-sometimes also called \'Acrobat' files, from the name of Adobe's PDF
-software.) Xpdf runs under the X Window System on UNIX, VMS, and
-OS/2.
-.PP
-To run xpdf, simply type:
-.PP
-.RS
-xpdf file.pdf
-.RE
-.PP
-where
-.I file.pdf
-is your PDF file. The file name can be followed by a number
-specifying the page which should be displayed first, e.g.:
-.PP
-.RS
-xpdf file.pdf 18
-.RE
-.PP
-You can also give a named destination, prefixed with \'+' in place of
-the page number.
-.PP
-You can also start xpdf without opening any files:
-.PP
-.RS
-xpdf
-.RE
-.SH CONFIGURATION FILE
-Xpdf reads a configuration file at startup. It first tries to find
-the user's private config file, ~/.xpdfrc. If that doesn't exist, it
-looks for a system-wide config file, typically /etc/xpdfrc
-(but this location can be changed when xpdf is built). See the
-.BR xpdfrc (5)
-man page for details.
-.SH OPTIONS
-Many of the following options can be set with configuration file
-commands or X resources. These are listed in square brackets with the
-description of the corresponding command line option.
-.TP
-.BI \-g " geometry"
-Set the initial window geometry.
-.RB ( \-geometry
-is equivalent.)
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf.geometry ]
-.TP
-.BI \-title " title"
-Set the window title. By default, the title will be "xpdf: foo.pdf".
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf.title ]
-.TP
-.B \-cmap
-Install a private colormap. This is ignored on TrueColor visuals.
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf.installCmap ]
-.TP
-.BI \-rgb " number"
-Set the size of largest RGB cube xpdf will try to allocate. The
-default is 5 (for a 5x5x5 cube); set to a smaller number to conserve
-color table entries. This is ignored with private colormaps and on
-TrueColor visuals.
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf.rgbCubeSize ]
-.TP
-.B \-rv
-Set reverse video mode. This reverses the colors of everything except
-images. It may not always produce great results for PDF files which
-do weird things with color. This also causes the paper color to
-default to black.
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf.reverseVideo ]
-.TP
-.BI \-papercolor " color"
-Set the "paper color", i.e., the background of the page display. This
-will not work too well with PDF files that do things like filling in
-white behind the text.
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf.paperColor ]
-.TP
-.BI \-z " zoom"
-Set the initial zoom factor. A number specifies a zoom percentage,
-where 100 means 72 dpi.You may also specify \'page', to fit the page
-to the window size, or \'width', to fit the page width to the window
-width.
-.RB "[config file: " initialZoom "; or X resource: " xpdf.initialZoom ]
-.TP
-.BI \-t1lib " font-type"
-Set the type of font rendering for t1lib (the Type 1 rasterizer) to
-use. Options are \'none' (don't use t1lib at all), \'plain' (use
-non-anti-aliased fonts), \'low' or \'high' (use low-level or
-high-level anti-aliased fonts).
-.RB "[config file: " t1libControl ]
-.TP
-.BI \-freetype " font-type"
-Set the type of font rendering for FreeType (the TrueType rasterizer)
-to use. Options are \'none' (don't use FreeType at all), \'plain'
-(use non-anti-aliased fonts), \'low' or \'high' (use anti-aliased
-fonts; these two are identical).
-.RB "[config file: " freetypeControl ]
-.TP
-.BI \-ps " PS-file"
-Set the default file name for PostScript output. This can also be of
-the form \'|command' to pipe the PostScript through a command.
-.RB "[config file: " psFile ]
-.TP
-.BI \-paper " size"
-Set the paper size to one of "letter", "legal", "A4", or "A3". This
-can also be set to "match", which will set the paper size to match the
-size specified in the PDF file.
-.RB "[config file: " psPaperSize ]
-.TP
-.BI \-paperw " size"
-Set the paper width, in points.
-.RB "[config file: " psPaperSize ]
-.TP
-.BI \-paperh " size"
-Set the paper height, in points.
-.RB "[config file: " psPaperSize ]
-.TP
-.B \-level1
-Generate Level 1 PostScript. The resulting PostScript files will be
-significantly larger (if they contain images), but will print on Level
-1 printers. This also converts all images to black and white.
-.RB "[config file: " psLevel ]
-.TP
-.BI \-enc " encoding-name"
-Sets the encoding to use for text output. The
-.I encoding\-name
-must be defined with the unicodeMap command (see
-.BR xpdfrc (5)).
-This defaults to "Latin1" (which is a built-in encoding).
-.RB "[config file: " textEncoding ]
-.TP
-.BI \-eol " unix | dos | mac"
-Sets the end-of-line convention to use for text output.
-.RB "[config file: " textEOL ]
-.TP
-.BI \-opw " password"
-Specify the owner password for the PDF file. Providing this will
-bypass all security restrictions.
-.TP
-.BI \-upw " password"
-Specify the user password for the PDF file.
-.TP
-.B \-fullscreen
-Open xpdf in a full-screen mode, useful for presentations. You may
-also want to specify '-bg black' (or similar) with this. (There is
-currently no way to switch between window and full-screen modes on the
-fly.)
-.TP
-.BI \-remote " name"
-Start/contact xpdf remote server with specified name (see the
-.B "REMOTE SERVER MODE"
-section below).
-.TP
-.B \-reload
-Reload xpdf remote server window (with -remote only).
-.TP
-.B \-raise
-Raise xpdf remote server window (with -remote only).
-.TP
-.B \-quit
-Kill xpdf remote server (with -remote only).
-.TP
-.B \-cmd
-Print commands as they're executed (useful for debugging).
-.RB "[config file: " printCommands ]
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Don't print any messages or errors.
-.RB "[config file: " errQuiet ]
-.TP
-.BI \-cfg " config-file"
-Read
-.I config-file
-in place of ~/.xpdfrc or the system-wide config file.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print copyright and version information.
-.TP
-.B \-h
-Print usage information.
-.RB ( \-help
-and
-.B \-\-help
-are equivalent.)
-.PP
-Several other standard X options and resources will work as expected:
-.TP
-.BI \-display " display"
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf.display ]
-.TP
-.BI \-fg " color"
-.RB ( \-foreground
-is equivalent.)
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf*Foreground ]
-.TP
-.BI \-bg " color"
-.RB ( \-background
-is equivalent.)
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf*Background ]
-.TP
-.BI \-font " font"
-.RB ( \-fn
-is equivalent.)
-.RB "[X resource: " xpdf*fontList ]
-.PP
-The color and font options only affect the user interface elements,
-not the PDF display (the \'paper').
-.PP
-The following X resources do not have command line option equivalents:
-.TP
-.B xpdf.viKeys
-Enables the \'h', \'l', \'k' and \'j' keys for left, right, up, and
-down scrolling.
-.SH CONTROLS
-.SS On-screen controls, at the bottom of the xpdf window
-.TP
-.B "left/right arrow buttons"
-Move to the previous/next page.
-.TP
-.B "double left/right arrow buttons"
-Move backward or forward by ten pages.
-.TP
-.B "dashed left/right arrow buttons"
-Move backward or forward along the history path.
-.TP
-.B "\'Page' entry box"
-Move to a specific page number. Click in the box to activate it, type
-the page number, then hit return.
-.TP
-.B "zoom popup menu"
-Change the zoom factor (see the description of the -z option above).
-.TP
-.B "binoculars button"
-Find a text string.
-.TP
-.B "print button"
-Bring up a dialog for generating a PostScript file. The dialog has
-options to set the pages to be printed and the PostScript file name.
-The file name can be \'-' for stdout or \'|command' to pipe the
-PostScript through a command, e.g., \'|lpr'.
-.TP
-.B "\'?' button"
-Bring up the \'about xpdf' window.
-.TP
-.B "link info"
-The space between the \'?' and \'Quit' buttons is used to show the URL
-or external file name when the mouse is over a link.
-.TP
-.B "\'Quit' button"
-Quit xpdf.
-.PP
-.SS Menu
-Pressing the right mouse button will post a popup menu with the
-following commands:
-.TP
-.B "Open..."
-Open a new PDF file via a file requester.
-.TP
-.B "Open in new window..."
-Create a new window and open a new PDF file via a file requester.
-.TP
-.B "Reload"
-Reload the current PDF file. Note that Xpdf will reload the file
-automatically (on a page change or redraw) if it has changed since it
-was last loaded.
-.TP
-.B "Save as..."
-Save the current file via a file requester.
-.TP
-.B "Rotate counterclockwise"
-Rotate the page 90 degrees counterclockwise.
-.TP
-.B "Rotate clockwise"
-Rotate the page 90 degrees clockwise. The two rotate commands are
-intended primarily for PDF files where the rotation isn't correctly
-specified in the file, but they're also useful if your X server
-doesn't support font rotation.
-.TP
-.B "Close"
-Close the current window. If this is the only open window, the
-document is closed, but the window is left open (i.e., this menu
-command won't quit xpdf).
-.TP
-.B "Quit"
-Quit xpdf.
-.PP
-.SS Outline
-If the PDF contains an outline (a.k.a., bookmarks), there will be an
-outline pane on the left side of the window. The width of the outline
-pane is adjustable with a vertical split bar via the knob near its
-bottom end.
-.PP
-.SS Text selection
-Dragging the mouse with the left button held down will highlight an
-arbitrary rectangle. Any text inside this rectangle will be copied to
-the X selection buffer.
-.PP
-.SS Links
-Clicking on a hyperlink will jump to the link's destination. A link
-to another PDF document will make xpdf load that document. A
-\'launch' link to an executable program will display a dialog, and if
-you click \'ok', execute the program. URL links call an external
-command (see the
-.B WEB BROWSERS
-section below).
-.PP
-.SS Panning
-Dragging the mouse with the middle button held down pans the window.
-.PP
-.SS Key bindings
-.TP
-.B o
-Open a new PDF file via a file requester.
-.TP
-.B r
-Reload the current PDF file. Note that Xpdf will reload the file
-automatically (on a page change or redraw) if it has changed since it
-was last loaded.
-.TP
-.B control-L
-Redraw the current page.
-.TP
-.B control-W
-Close the current window.
-.TP
-.B f or control-F
-Find a text string.
-.TP
-.B control-G
-Find next occurrence.
-.TP
-.B control-P
-Print.
-.TP
-.B n
-Move to the next page. Scrolls to the top of the page, unless scroll
-lock is turned on.
-.TP
-.B p
-Move to the previous page. Scrolls to the top of the page, unless
-scroll lock is turned on.
-.TP
-.BR <Space> " or " <PageDown> " or " <Next>
-Scroll down on the current page; if already at bottom, move to next
-page.
-.TP
-.BR <Backspace> " or " <Delete> " or " <PageUp> " or " <Previous>
-Scroll up on the current page; if already at top, move to previous
-page.
-.TP
-.B v
-Move forward along the history path.
-.TP
-.B b
-Move backward along the history path.
-.TP
-.B <Home>
-Scroll to top of current page.
-.TP
-.B <End>
-Scroll to bottom of current page.
-.TP
-.B control-<Home>
-Scroll to first page of document.
-.TP
-.B control-<End>
-Scroll to last page of document.
-.TP
-.B arrows
-Scroll the current page.
-.TP
-.B g
-Activate the page number text field ("goto page").
-.TP
-.B 0
-Set the zoom factor to zero (72 dpi).
-.TP
-.B +
-Zoom in (increment the zoom factor by 1).
-.TP
-.B -
-Zoom out (decrement the zoom factor by 1).
-.TP
-.B z
-Set the zoom factor to 'page' (fit page to window).
-.TP
-.B w
-Set the zoom factor to 'width' (fit page width to window).
-.TP
-.B q
-Quit xpdf.
-.SH "WEB BROWSERS"
-If you want to run xpdf automatically from netscape or mosaic (and
-probably other browsers) when you click on a link to a PDF file, you
-need to edit (or create) the files
-.I .mime.types
-and
-.I .mailcap
-in your home directory. In
-.I .mime.types
-add the line:
-.PP
-.RS
-application/pdf pdf
-.RE
-.PP
-In
-.I .mailcap
-add the lines:
-.PP
-.RS
-# Use xpdf to view PDF files.
-.RE
-.RS
-application/pdf; xpdf -q %s
-.RE
-.PP
-Make sure that xpdf is on your executable search path.
-.PP
-When you click on a URL link in a PDF file, xpdf will execute the
-command specified by the urlCommand config file option, replacing an
-occurrence of \'%s' with the URL. For example, to call netscape with
-the URL, add this line to your config file:
-.PP
-.RS
-urlCommand "netscape -remote 'openURL(%s)'"
-.RE
-.SH "REMOTE SERVER MODE"
-Xpdf can be started in remote server mode by specifying a server name
-(in addition to the file name and page number). For example:
-.PP
-.RS
-xpdf -remote myServer file.pdf
-.RE
-.PP
-If there is currently no xpdf running in server mode with the name
-\'myServer', a new xpdf window will be opened. If another command:
-.PP
-.RS
-xpdf -remote myServer another.pdf 9
-.RE
-.PP
-is issued, a new copy of xpdf will not be started. Instead, the first
-xpdf (the server) will load
-.I another.pdf
-and display page nine. If the file name is the same:
-.PP
-.RS
-xpdf -remote myServer another.pdf 4
-.RE
-.PP
-the xpdf server will simply display the specified page.
-.PP
-The -raise option tells the server to raise its window; it can be
-specified with or without a file name and page number.
-.PP
-The -quit option tells the server to close its window and exit.
-.SH EXIT CODES
-The Xpdf tools use the following exit codes:
-.TP
-0
-No error.
-.TP
-1
-Error opening a PDF file.
-.TP
-2
-Error opening an output file.
-.TP
-3
-Error related to PDF permissions.
-.TP
-99
-Other error.
-.SH AUTHOR
-The xpdf software and documentation are copyright 1996-2003 Glyph &
-Cog, LLC.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR pdftops (1),
-.BR pdftotext (1),
-.BR pdfinfo (1),
-.BR pdffonts (1),
-.BR pdftopbm (1),
-.BR pdfimages (1),
-.BR xpdfrc (5)
-.br
-.B http://www.foolabs.com/xpdf/
diff --git a/raw/man1/xxd.1 b/raw/man1/xxd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index fba0521..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/xxd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,373 +0,0 @@
-.TH XXD 1 "August 1996" "Manual page for xxd"
-.\"
-.\" 21st May 1996
-.\" Man page author:
-.\" Tony Nugent <tony at sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent at sct.gu.edu.au>
-.\" Changes by Bram Moolenaar <Bram at vim.org>
-.SH NAME
-.I xxd
-\- make a hexdump or do the reverse.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B xxd
-\-h[elp]
-.br
-.B xxd
-[options] [infile [outfile]]
-.br
-.B xxd
-\-r[evert] [options] [infile [outfile]]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I xxd
-creates a hex dump of a given file or standard input.
-It can also convert a hex dump back to its original binary form.
-Like
-.BR uuencode(1)
-and
-.BR uudecode(1)
-it allows the transmission of binary data in a `mail-safe' ASCII representation,
-but has the advantage of decoding to standard output.
-Moreover, it can be used to perform binary file patching.
-.SH OPTIONS
-If no
-.I infile
-is given, standard input is read.
-If
-.I infile
-is specified as a
-.RB \` \- '
-character, then input is taken from standard input.
-If no
-.I outfile
-is given (or a
-.RB \` \- '
-character is in its place), results are sent to standard output.
-.PP
-Note that a "lazy" parser is used which does not check for more than the first
-option letter, unless the option is followed by a parameter.
-Spaces between a single option letter and its parameter are optional.
-Parameters to options can be specified in decimal, hexadecimal or octal
-notation.
-Thus
-.BR \-c8 ,
-.BR "\-c 8" ,
-.B \-c 010
-and
-.B \-cols 8
-are all equivalent.
-.PP
-.TP
-.IR \-a " | " \-autoskip
-toggle autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines. Default off.
-.TP
-.IR \-b " | " \-bits
-Switch to bits (binary digits) dump, rather than hexdump.
-This option writes octets as eight digits "1"s and "0"s instead of a normal
-hexacecimal dump. Each line is preceded by a line number in hexadecimal and
-followed by an ascii (or ebcdic) representation. The command line switches
-\-r, \-p, \-i do not work with this mode.
-.TP
-.IR "\-c cols " | " \-cols cols"
-.IR "\-c cols " | " \-cols cols"
-format
-.RI < cols >
-octets per line. Default 16 (\-i: 12, \-ps: 30, \-b: 6). Max 256.
-.TP
-.IR \-E " | " \-EBCDIC
-Change the character encoding in the righthand column from ASCII to EBCDIC.
-This does not change the hexadecimal representation. The option is
-meaningless in combinations with \-r, \-p or \-i.
-.TP
-.IR "\-g bytes " | " \-groupsize bytes"
-seperate the output of every
-.RI < bytes >
-bytes (two hex characters or eight bit-digits each) by a whitespace.
-Specify
-.I \-g 0
-to suppress grouping.
-.RI < Bytes "> defaults to " 2
-in normal mode and \fI1\fP in bits mode.
-Grouping does not apply to postscript or include style.
-.TP
-.IR \-h " | " \-help
-print a summary of available commands and exit. No hex dumping is performed.
-.TP
-.IR \-i " | " \-include
-output in C include file style. A complete static array definition is written
-(named after the input file), unless xxd reads from stdin.
-.TP
-.IR "\-l len " | " \-len len"
-stop after writing
-.RI < len >
-octets.
-.TP
-.IR \-p " | " \-ps " | " \-postscript " | " \-plain
-output in postscript continuous hexdump style. Also known as plain hexdump
-style.
-.TP
-.IR \-r " | " \-revert
-reverse operation: convert (or patch) hexdump into binary.
-If not writing to stdout, xxd writes into its output file without truncating
-it. Use the combination
-.I \-r \-p
-to read plain hexadecimal dumps without line number information and without a
-particular column layout. Additional Whitespace and line-breaks are allowed
-anywhere.
-.TP
-.I \-seek offset
-When used after
-.I \-r
-: revert with
-.RI < offset >
-added to file positions found in hexdump.
-.TP
-.I \-s [\+][\-]seek
-start at
-.RI < seek >
-bytes abs. (or rel.) infile offset.
-\fI\+ \fRindicates that the seek is relative to the current stdin file position
-(meaningless when not reading from stdin). \fI\- \fRindicates that the seek
-should be that many characters from the end of the input (or if combined with
-\fI \+ \fR: before the current stdin file position).
-Without \-s option, xxd starts at the current file position.
-.TP
-.I \-u
-use upper case hex letters. Default is lower case.
-.TP
-.IR \-v " | " \-version
-show version string.
-.SH CAVEATS
-.PP
-.I xxd \-r
-has some builtin magic while evaluating line number information.
-If the ouput file is seekable, then the linenumbers at the start of each
-hexdump line may be out of order, lines may be missing, or overlapping. In
-these cases xxd will lseek(2) to the next position. If the output file is not
-seekable, only gaps are allowed, which will be filled by null-bytes.
-.PP
-.I xxd \-r
-never generates parse errors. Garbage is silently skipped.
-.PP
-When editing hexdumps, please note that
-.I xxd \-r
-skips everything on the input line after reading enough columns of hexadecimal
-data (see option \-c). This also means, that changes to the printable ascii (or
-ebcdic) columns are always ignored. Reverting a plain (or postscript) style
-hexdump with xxd \-r \-p does not depend on the correct number of columns. Here an thing that looks like a pair of hex-digits is interpreted.
-.PP
-Note the difference between
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-i file\fR
-.br
-and
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-i \< file\fR
-.PP
-.I xxd \-s \+seek
-may be different from
-.I xxd \-s seek
-, as lseek(2) is used to "rewind" input. A '+'
-makes a difference if the input source is stdin, and if stdin's file position
-is not at the start of the file by the time xxd is started and given its input.
-The following examples may help to clarify (or further confuse!)...
-.PP
-Rewind stdin before reading; needed because the `cat' has already read to the
-end of stdin.
-.br
-\fI% sh \-c 'cat > plain_copy; xxd \-s 0 > hex_copy' < file
-.PP
-Hexdump from file position 0x480 (=1024+128) onwards.
-The `+' sign means "relative to the current position", thus the `128' adds to
-the 1k where dd left off.
-.br
-\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +128 > hex_snippet' < file
-.PP
-Hexdump from file position 0x100 ( = 1024-768) on.
-.br
-\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +-768 > hex_snippet' < file
-.PP
-However, this is a rare situation and the use of `+' is rarely needed.
-the author prefers to monitor the effect of xxd with strace(1) or truss(1), whenever \-s is used.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-.br
-Print everything but the first three lines (hex 0x30 bytes) of
-.B file
-\.
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-s 0x30 file
-.PP
-.br
-Print 3 lines (hex 0x30 bytes) from the end of
-.B file
-\.
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-s \-0x30 file
-.PP
-.br
-Print 120 bytes as continuous hexdump with 40 octets per line.
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-l 120 \-ps \-c 20 xxd.1\fR
-.br
-2e544820585844203120224d616e75616c207061
-.br
-676520666f7220787864220a2e5c220a2e5c2220
-.br
-32317374204d617920313939360a2e5c22204d61
-.br
-6e207061676520617574686f723a0a2e5c222020
-.br
-2020546f6e79204e7567656e74203c746f6e7940
-.br
-7363746e7567656e2e7070702e67752e6564752e
-.br
-
-.br
-Hexdump the first 120 bytes of this man page with 12 octets per line.
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-l 120 \-c 12 xxd.1\fR
-.br
-0000000: 2e54 4820 5858 4420 3120 224d .TH XXD 1 "M
-.br
-000000c: 616e 7561 6c20 7061 6765 2066 anual page f
-.br
-0000018: 6f72 2078 7864 220a 2e5c 220a or xxd"..\\".
-.br
-0000024: 2e5c 2220 3231 7374 204d 6179 .\\" 21st May
-.br
-0000030: 2031 3939 360a 2e5c 2220 4d61 1996..\\" Ma
-.br
-000003c: 6e20 7061 6765 2061 7574 686f n page autho
-.br
-0000048: 723a 0a2e 5c22 2020 2020 546f r:..\\" To
-.br
-0000054: 6e79 204e 7567 656e 7420 3c74 ny Nugent <t
-.br
-0000060: 6f6e 7940 7363 746e 7567 656e ony at sctnugen
-.br
-000006c: 2e70 7070 2e67 752e 6564 752e .ppp.gu.edu.
-.PP
-.br
-Display just the date from the file xxd.1
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-s 0x28 \-l 12 \-c 12 xxd.1\fR
-.br
-0000028: 3231 7374 204d 6179 2031 3939 21st May 199
-.PP
-.br
-Copy
-.B input_file
-to
-.B output_file
-and prepend 100 bytes of value 0x00.
-.br
-\fI% xxd input_file | xxd \-r \-s 100 \> output_file\fR
-.br
-
-.br
-Patch the date in the file xxd.1
-.br
-\fI% echo '0000029: 3574 68' | xxd \-r \- xxd.1\fR
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-s 0x28 \-l 12 \-c 12 xxd.1\fR
-.br
-0000028: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939 25th May 199
-.PP
-.br
-Create a 65537 byte file with all bytes 0x00,
-except for the last one which is 'A' (hex 0x41).
-.br
-\fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \> file\fR
-.PP
-.br
-Hexdump this file with autoskip.
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-a \-c 12 file\fR
-.br
-0000000: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ............
-.br
-*
-.br
-000fffc: 0000 0000 40 ....A
-.PP
-Create a 1 byte file containing a single 'A' character.
-The number after '\-r \-s' adds to the linenumbers found in the file;
-in effect, the leading bytes are suppressed.
-.br
-\fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \-s \-0x10000 \> file\fR
-.PP
-Use xxd as a filter within an editor such as
-.B vim(1)
-to hexdump a region marked between `a' and `z'.
-.br
-\fI:'a,'z!xxd\fR
-.PP
-Use xxd as a filter within an editor such as
-.B vim(1)
-to recover a binary hexdump marked between `a' and `z'.
-.br
-\fI:'a,'z!xxd \-r\fR
-.PP
-Use xxd as a filter within an editor such as
-.B vim(1)
-to recover one line of a hexdump. Move the cursor over the line and type:
-.br
-\fI!!xxd \-r\fR
-.PP
-Read single characters from a serial line
-.br
-\fI% xxd \-c1 < /dev/term/b &\fR
-.br
-\fI% stty < /dev/term/b \-echo \-opost \-isig \-icanon min 1\fR
-.br
-\fI% echo \-n foo > /dev/term/b\fR
-.PP
-.SH "RETURN VALUES"
-The following error values are returned:
-.TP
-0
-no errors encountered.
-.TP
-\-1
-operation not supported (
-.I xxd \-r \-i
-still impossible).
-.TP
-1
-error while parsing options.
-.TP
-2
-problems with input file.
-.TP
-3
-problems with output file.
-.TP
-4,5
-desired seek position is unreachable.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-uuencode(1), uudecode(1), patch(1)
-.br
-.SH WARNINGS
-The tools weirdness matches its creators brain.
-Use entirely at your own risk. Copy files. Trace it. Become a wizard.
-.br
-.SH VERSION
-This manual page documents xxd version 1.7
-.SH AUTHOR
-.br
-(c) 1990-1997 by Juergen Weigert
-.br
-<jnweiger at informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
-.LP
-Distribute freely and credit me,
-.br
-make money and share with me,
-.br
-lose money and don't ask me.
-.PP
-Manual page started by Tony Nugent
-.br
-<tony at sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent at sct.gu.edu.au>
-.br
-Small changes by Bram Moolenaar.
-Edited by Juergen Weigert.
-.PP
diff --git a/raw/man1/yacc.1 b/raw/man1/yacc.1
deleted file mode 100644
index cc6a304..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/yacc.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1989, 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Robert Paul Corbett.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)yacc.1 5.8 (Berkeley) 5/24/93
-.\" $FreeBSD: src/usr.bin/yacc/yacc.1,v 1.10 2000/01/10 08:54:09 kris Exp $
-.\"
-.Dd May 24, 1993
-.Dt YACC 1
-.Os
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm yacc
-.Nd an LALR(1) parser generator
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm
-.Op Fl dlrtv
-.Op Fl b Ar file_prefix
-.Op Fl o Ar output_filename
-.Op Fl p Ar symbol_prefix
-.Ar filename
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-.Nm Yacc
-reads the grammar specification in the file
-.Ar filename
-and generates an LR(1) parser for it.
-The parsers consist of a set of LALR(1) parsing tables and a driver routine
-written in the C programming language.
-.Nm Yacc
-normally writes the parse tables and the driver routine to the file
-.Pa y.tab.c .
-.Pp
-The following options are available:
-.Bl -tag -width indent
-.It Fl b Ar file_prefix
-Change the prefix prepended to the output file names to
-the string denoted by
-.Ar file_prefix .
-The default prefix is the character
-.Pa y .
-.It Fl d
-Cause the header file
-.Pa y.tab.h
-to be written.
-.It Fl l
-If the
-.Fl l
-option is not specified,
-.Nm
-will insert #line directives in the generated code.
-The #line directives let the C compiler relate errors in the
-generated code to the user's original code.
-If the
-.Fl l
-option is specified,
-.Nm
-will not insert the #line directives.
-Any #line directives specified by the user will be retained.
-.It Fl o Ar output_filename
-Cause
-.Nm
-to write the generated code to
-.Ar output_filename
-instead of the default file,
-.Pa y.tab.c .
-.It Fl p Ar symbol_prefix
-Change the prefix prepended to yacc-generated symbols to
-the string denoted by
-.Ar symbol_prefix .
-The default prefix is the string
-.Pa yy .
-.It Fl r
-Cause
-.Nm
-to produce separate files for code and tables. The code file
-is named
-.Pa y.code.c ,
-and the tables file is named
-.Pa y.tab.c .
-.It Fl t
-Change the preprocessor directives generated by
-.Nm
-so that debugging statements will be incorporated in the compiled code.
-.It Fl v
-Cause a human-readable description of the generated parser to
-be written to the file
-.Pa y.output .
-.El
-.Pp
-If the environment variable
-.Ev TMPDIR
-is set, the string denoted by
-.Ev TMPDIR
-will be used as the name of the directory where the temporary
-files are created.
-.Sh FILES
-.Bl -tag -width /tmp/yacc.aXXXXXXXXXX -compact
-.It Pa y.code.c
-.It Pa y.tab.c
-.It Pa y.tab.h
-.It Pa y.output
-.It Pa /tmp/yacc.aXXXXXXXXXX
-.It Pa /tmp/yacc.tXXXXXXXXXX
-.It Pa /tmp/yacc.uXXXXXXXXXX
-.El
-.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-If there are rules that are never reduced, the number of such rules is
-reported on standard error.
-If there are any LALR(1) conflicts, the number of conflicts is reported
-on standard error.
diff --git a/raw/man1/yes.1 b/raw/man1/yes.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c313e68..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/yes.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.022.
-.TH YES "1" "October 2003" "GNU coreutils 5.0" FSF
-.SH NAME
-yes \- output a string repeatedly until killed
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B yes
-[\fISTRING\fR]...
-.br
-.B yes
-\fIOPTION\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\" Add any additional description here
-.PP
-Repeatedly output a line with all specified STRING(s), or `y'.
-.TP
-\fB\-\-help\fR
-display this help and exit
-.TP
-\fB\-\-version\fR
-output version information and exit
-.SH AUTHOR
-Written by David MacKenzie.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Report bugs to <bug-coreutils at gnu.org>.
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-Copyright \(co 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.br
-This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO
-warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-The full documentation for
-.B yes
-is maintained as a Texinfo manual. If the
-.B info
-and
-.B yes
-programs are properly installed at your site, the command
-.IP
-.B info yes
-.PP
-should give you access to the complete manual.
diff --git a/raw/man1/ypchfn.1 b/raw/man1/ypchfn.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f94f124..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ypchfn.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/yppasswd.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/ypchsh.1 b/raw/man1/ypchsh.1
deleted file mode 100644
index f94f124..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/ypchsh.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/yppasswd.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/yppasswd.1 b/raw/man1/yppasswd.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 7aeb5ca..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/yppasswd.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\" Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2001 Thorsten Kukuk
-.\" This file is part of the yp-tools.
-.\" Author: Thorsten Kukuk <kukuk at suse.de>
-.\"
-.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation.
-.\"
-.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation,
-.\" Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-.\"
-.TH yppasswd 1 "May 1998" "YP Tools 2.8"
-.SH NAME
-yppasswd, ypchfn, ypchsh \- change your password in the NIS database
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B "yppasswd [-f] [-l] [-p] [user]"
-.br
-.B "ypchfn [user]"
-.br
-.B "ypchsh [user]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The standard
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR chfn (1)
-and
-.BR chsh (1)
-cannot be used under Linux to change the users NIS password, shell and GECOS
-information, because they only modify the password file on the local host.
-For changing the NIS information, they are replaced by their NIS
-counterparts,
-.BR yppasswd ,
-.B ypchfn
-and
-.BR ypchsh .
-.P
-These commands are the same program, linked to different names.
-Using the command line switches, you can choose whether to update your
-password
-.BR \-p ,
-your login shell
-.BR \-l ,
-or your GECOS field
-.BR \-f ,
-or a combination of them.
-.B yppasswd
-implies the
-.B \-p
-option, if no other option is given. If you use the
-.B \-f
-or
-.B \-l
-option, you also need to add the
-.B \-p
-flag.
-.B ypchfn
-implies the
-.B \-f
-option, and
-.B ypchsh
-.BR \-l .
-.P
-When invoked without the
-.I user
-argument, the account information for the invoking user will be updated,
-otherwise that of
-.I user
-will be updated. This option is only available to the super-user. If the
-yppasswdd daemon on the server supports it, you can give the root password
-of the server instead of the users [old] password.
-.P
-All tools will first prompt the user for the current NIS password needed
-for authentication with the
-.BR yppasswdd (8)
-daemon. Subsequently, the
-program prompts for the updated information:
-.\"
-.\"
-.IP "\fByppasswd\fP or \fB-l\fP"
-Change the user's NIS password. The user is prompted for the new password.
-While typing the password, echoing is turned off, so the password does not
-appear on the screen. An empty password is rejected, as are passwords shorter
-than six characters. The user will then be requested to retype the
-password to make sure it wasn't misspelled the first time.
-.\"
-.\"
-.IP "\fBypchsh\fP or \fB-l\fP"
-Change the user's login shell. The user is prompted for a new shell,
-offering the old one as default:
-.IP
-.in +2n
-.ft B
-.nf
-Login shell [/bin/sh]: _
-.fi
-.ft
-.in
-.IP
-To accept the default, simply press return. To clear the shell field in
-your
-.BR passwd (5)
-file entry (so that the system's default shell is selected),
-enter the string
-.IR none .
-.\"
-.\"
-.IP "\fBypchfn\fP or \fB-f\fP"
-Change the user's full name and related information. Traditionally, some
-applications expect the GECOS field (field 4) of the
-.BR passwd (5)
-file to
-contain the user's real name (as opposed to the login name) plus some
-additional information like the office phone number. This information is
-displayed by
-.BR finger (1)
-and probably some other tools, too.
-.IP
-When setting the full name,
-.B ypchfn
-displays the following prompts, with the defaults in brackets:
-.IP
-.in +2n
-.ft B
-.nf
-Name [Joe Doe]:
-Location [2nd floor, bldg 34]:
-Office Phone [12345]:
-Home Phone []:
-.fi
-.ft
-.in
-.IP
-To accept a default, simply press return. To clear a field, enter the string
-.IR none .
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chfn (1),
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR finger (1),
-.BR passwd (5),
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR ypcat (1),
-.BR yppasswdd (8),
-.BR ypserv (8),
-.BR ypwhich (1)
-.LP
-.SH AUTHOR
-.B yppasswd
-is part of the
-.B yp-tools
-package, which was written by Thorsten Kukuk <kukuk at suse.de>.
diff --git a/raw/man1/zcat.1 b/raw/man1/zcat.1
deleted file mode 100644
index c2a5145..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/zcat.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man1/gzip.1
diff --git a/raw/man1/zipinfo.1 b/raw/man1/zipinfo.1
deleted file mode 100644
index eca6307..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/zipinfo.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,488 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990-2002 Info-ZIP. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" See the accompanying file LICENSE, version 2000-Apr-09 or later
-.\" (the contents of which are also included in unzip.h) for terms of use.
-.\" If, for some reason, all these files are missing, the Info-ZIP license
-.\" also may be found at: ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html
-.\"
-.\" zipinfo.1 by Greg Roelofs and others.
-.\"
-.\" =========================================================================
-.\" define .X macro (for long-line ZipInfo output examples; small Courier):
-.de X
-.nf
-.ft CW
-.ie n .ti -5
-.el \{ .ti +2m
-.ps -1 \}
-\&\\$1
-.ie n .ti +5
-.el \{ .ti -2m
-.ps +1 \}
-.ft
-.fi
-..
-.\" define .EX/.EE (for multiline user-command examples; normal Courier font)
-.de EX
-.in +4n
-.nf
-.ft CW
-..
-.de EE
-.ft
-.fi
-.in -4n
-..
-.\" =========================================================================
-.TH ZIPINFO 1L "17 February 2002 (v2.4)" "Info-ZIP"
-.SH NAME
-zipinfo \- list detailed information about a ZIP archive
-.PD
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBzipinfo\fP [\fB\-12smlvhMtTz\fP] \fIfile\fP[\fI.zip\fP]
-[\fIfile(s)\fP\ .\|.\|.] [\fB\-x\fP\ \fIxfile(s)\fP\ .\|.\|.]
-.PP
-\fBunzip\fP \fB\-Z\fP [\fB\-12smlvhMtTz\fP] \fIfile\fP[\fI.zip\fP]
-[\fIfile(s)\fP\ .\|.\|.] [\fB\-x\fP\ \fIxfile(s)\fP\ .\|.\|.]
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fIzipinfo\fP lists technical information about files in a ZIP archive, most
-commonly found on MS-DOS systems. Such information includes file access
-permissions, encryption status, type of compression, version and operating
-system or file system of compressing program, and the like. The default
-behavior (with no options) is
-to list single-line entries for each file in the archive, with header and
-trailer lines providing summary information for the entire archive. The
-format is a cross between Unix ``\fCls \-l\fR'' and ``\fCunzip \-v\fR''
-output. See
-.B "DETAILED DESCRIPTION"
-below. Note that \fIzipinfo\fP is the same program as \fIunzip\fP (under
-Unix, a link to it); on some systems, however, \fIzipinfo\fP support may
-have been omitted when \fIunzip\fP was compiled.
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.TP
-.IR file [ .zip ]
-Path of the ZIP archive(s). If the file specification is a wildcard,
-each matching file is processed in an order determined by the operating
-system (or file system). Only the filename can be a wildcard; the path
-itself cannot. Wildcard expressions are similar to Unix \fIegrep\fP(1)
-(regular) expressions and may contain:
-.RS
-.IP *
-matches a sequence of 0 or more characters
-.IP ?
-matches exactly 1 character
-.IP [.\|.\|.]
-matches any single character found inside the brackets; ranges are specified
-by a beginning character, a hyphen, and an ending character. If an exclamation
-point or a caret (`!' or `^') follows the left bracket, then the range of
-characters within the brackets is complemented (that is, anything \fIexcept\fP
-the characters inside the brackets is considered a match).
-.RE
-.IP
-(Be sure to quote any character that might otherwise be interpreted or
-modified by the operating system, particularly under Unix and VMS.) If no
-matches are found, the specification is assumed to be a literal filename;
-and if that also fails, the suffix \fC.zip\fR is appended. Note that
-self-extracting ZIP files are supported; just specify the \fC.exe\fR suffix
-(if any) explicitly.
-.IP [\fIfile(s)\fP]
-An optional list of archive members to be processed.
-Regular expressions (wildcards) may be used to match multiple members; see
-above. Again, be sure to quote expressions that would otherwise be expanded
-or modified by the operating system.
-.IP [\fB\-x\fP\ \fIxfile(s)\fP]
-An optional list of archive members to be excluded from processing.
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-1
-list filenames only, one per line. This option excludes all others; headers,
-trailers and zipfile comments are never printed. It is intended for use in
-Unix shell scripts.
-.TP
-.B \-2
-list filenames only, one per line, but allow headers (\fB\-h\fP), trailers
-(\fB\-t\fP) and zipfile comments (\fB\-z\fP), as well. This option may be
-useful in cases where the stored filenames are particularly long.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-list zipfile info in short Unix ``\fCls \-l\fR'' format. This is the default
-behavior; see below.
-.TP
-.B \-m
-list zipfile info in medium Unix ``\fCls \-l\fR'' format. Identical to the
-\fB\-s\fP output, except that the compression factor, expressed as a
-percentage, is also listed.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-list zipfile info in long Unix ``\fCls \-l\fR'' format. As with \fB\-m\fP
-except that the compressed size (in bytes) is printed instead of the
-compression ratio.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-list zipfile information in verbose, multi-page format.
-.TP
-.B \-h
-list header line. The archive name, actual size (in bytes) and total number
-of files is printed.
-.TP
-.B \-M
-pipe all output through an internal pager similar to the Unix \fImore\fP(1)
-command. At the end of a screenful of output, \fIzipinfo\fP pauses with a
-``\-\-More\-\-'' prompt; the next screenful may be viewed by pressing the
-Enter (Return) key or the space bar. \fIzipinfo\fP can be terminated by
-pressing the ``q'' key and, on some systems, the Enter/Return key. Unlike
-Unix \fImore\fP(1), there is no forward-searching or editing capability.
-Also, \fIzipinfo\fP doesn't notice if long lines wrap at the edge of the
-screen, effectively resulting in the printing of two or more lines and the
-likelihood that some text will scroll off the top of the screen before being
-viewed. On some systems the number of available lines on the screen is not
-detected, in which case \fIzipinfo\fP assumes the height is 24 lines.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-list totals for files listed or for all files. The number of files listed,
-their uncompressed and compressed total sizes, and their overall compression
-factor is printed; or, if only the totals line is being printed, the values
-for the entire archive are given. Note that the total compressed (data)
-size will never match the actual zipfile size, since the latter includes all
-of the internal zipfile headers in addition to the compressed data.
-.TP
-.B \-T
-print the file dates and times in a sortable decimal format (yymmdd.hhmmss).
-The default date format is a more standard, human-readable version with
-abbreviated month names (see examples below).
-.TP
-.B \-z
-include the archive comment (if any) in the listing.
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH "DETAILED DESCRIPTION"
-.I zipinfo
-has a number of modes, and its behavior can be rather difficult to fathom
-if one isn't familiar with Unix \fIls\fP(1) (or even if one is). The default
-behavior is to list files in the following format:
-.PP
-.X "-rw-rws--- 1.9 unx 2802 t- defX 11-Aug-91 13:48 perms.2660"
-.PP
-The last three fields are the modification date and time of
-the file, and its name. The case of the filename is respected; thus
-files that come from MS-DOS PKZIP are always capitalized. If the file
-was zipped with a stored directory name, that is also displayed as part
-of the filename.
-.PP
-The second and third fields indicate that the file was zipped under
-Unix with version 1.9 of \fIzip\fP. Since it comes from Unix, the file
-permissions at the beginning of the line are printed in Unix format.
-The uncompressed file-size (2802 in this example) is the fourth field.
-.PP
-The fifth field consists of two characters, either of which may take
-on several values. The first character may be either `t' or `b', indicating
-that \fIzip\fP believes the file to be text or binary, respectively;
-but if the file is encrypted, \fIzipinfo\fP
-notes this fact by capitalizing the character (`T' or `B'). The second
-character may also take on four values, depending on whether there is
-an extended local header and/or an ``extra field'' associated with the
-file (fully explained in PKWare's APPNOTE.TXT, but basically analogous to
-pragmas in ANSI C--i.e., they provide a standard way to include non-standard
-information in the archive). If neither exists, the character
-will be a hyphen (`\-'); if there is an extended local header but no extra
-field, `l'; if the reverse, `x'; and if both exist, `X'. Thus the
-file in this example is (probably) a text file, is not encrypted, and
-has neither an extra field nor an extended local header associated with it.
-The example below, on the other hand, is an encrypted binary file with an
-extra field:
-.PP
-.X "RWD,R,R 0.9 vms 168 Bx shrk 9-Aug-91 19:15 perms.0644"
-.PP
-Extra fields are used for various purposes (see discussion of the \fB\-v\fP
-option below) including the storage of VMS file attributes, which is
-presumably the case here. Note that the file attributes are listed in
-VMS format. Some other possibilities for the host operating system (which
-is actually a misnomer--host file system is more correct) include
-OS/2 or NT with High Performance File System (HPFS), MS-DOS, OS/2 or NT
-with File Allocation Table (FAT) file system, and Macintosh. These are
-denoted as follows:
-.PP
-.X "-rw-a-- 1.0 hpf 5358 Tl i4:3 4-Dec-91 11:33 longfilename.hpfs"
-.X "-r--ahs 1.1 fat 4096 b- i4:2 14-Jul-91 12:58 EA DATA. SF"
-.X "--w------- 1.0 mac 17357 bx i8:2 4-May-92 04:02 unzip.macr"
-.PP
-File attributes in the first two cases are indicated in a Unix-like format,
-where the seven subfields indicate whether the file: (1) is a directory,
-(2) is readable (always true), (3) is writable, (4) is executable (guessed
-on the basis of the extension--\fI.exe\fP, \fI.com\fP, \fI.bat\fP, \fI.cmd\fP
-and \fI.btm\fP files are assumed to be so), (5) has its archive bit set,
-(6) is hidden, and (7) is a system file. Interpretation of Macintosh file
-attributes is unreliable because some Macintosh archivers don't store any
-attributes in the archive.
-.PP
-Finally, the sixth field indicates
-the compression method and possible sub-method used. There are six methods
-known at present: storing (no compression), reducing, shrinking, imploding,
-tokenizing (never publicly released), and deflating. In addition, there are
-four levels of reducing (1 through 4); four types of imploding (4K or 8K
-sliding dictionary, and 2 or 3 Shannon-Fano trees); and four levels of
-deflating (superfast, fast, normal, maximum compression). \fIzipinfo\fP
-represents these methods and their sub-methods as follows: \fIstor\fP;
-\fIre:1\fP, \fIre:2\fP, etc.; \fIshrk\fP; \fIi4:2\fP, \fIi8:3\fP, etc.;
-\fItokn\fP; and \fIdefS\fP, \fIdefF\fP, \fIdefN\fP, and \fIdefX\fP.
-.PP
-The medium and long listings are almost identical to the short format except
-that they add information on the file's compression. The medium format lists
-the file's compression factor as a percentage indicating the amount of space
-that has been ``removed'':
-.PP
-.X "-rw-rws--- 1.5 unx 2802 t- 81% defX 11-Aug-91 13:48 perms.2660"
-.PP
-In this example, the file has been compressed by more than a factor of
-five; the compressed data are only 19% of the original size. The long
-format gives the compressed file's size in bytes, instead:
-.PP
-.X "-rw-rws--- 1.5 unx 2802 t- 538 defX 11-Aug-91 13:48 perms.2660"
-.PP
-Adding the \fB\-T\fP option changes the file date and time to decimal
-format:
-.PP
-.X "-rw-rws--- 1.5 unx 2802 t- 538 defX 910811.134804 perms.2660"
-.PP
-Note that because of limitations in the MS-DOS format used to store file
-times, the seconds field is always rounded to the nearest even second.
-For Unix files this is expected to change in the next major releases of
-\fIzip\fP(1L) and \fIunzip\fP.
-.PP
-In addition to individual file information, a default zipfile listing
-also includes header and trailer lines:
-.PP
-.X "Archive: OS2.zip 5453 bytes 5 files"
-.X ",,rw, 1.0 hpf 730 b- i4:3 26-Jun-92 23:40 Contents"
-.X ",,rw, 1.0 hpf 3710 b- i4:3 26-Jun-92 23:33 makefile.os2"
-.X ",,rw, 1.0 hpf 8753 b- i8:3 26-Jun-92 15:29 os2unzip.c"
-.X ",,rw, 1.0 hpf 98 b- stor 21-Aug-91 15:34 unzip.def"
-.X ",,rw, 1.0 hpf 95 b- stor 21-Aug-91 17:51 zipinfo.def"
-.X "5 files, 13386 bytes uncompressed, 4951 bytes compressed: 63.0%"
-.PP
-The header line gives the name of the archive, its total size, and the
-total number of files; the trailer gives the number of files listed,
-their total uncompressed size, and their total compressed size (not
-including any of \fIzip\fP's internal overhead). If, however, one or
-more \fIfile(s)\fP are provided, the header and trailer lines are
-not listed. This behavior is also similar to that of Unix's ``\fCls \-l\fR'';
-it may be overridden by specifying the \fB\-h\fP and \fB\-t\fP options
-explicitly.
-In such a case the listing format must also be specified explicitly,
-since \fB\-h\fP or \fB\-t\fP (or both) in the absence of other options implies
-that ONLY the header or trailer line (or both) is listed. See the
-\fBEXAMPLES\fP section below for a semi-intelligible translation of this
-nonsense.
-.PP
-The verbose listing is mostly self-explanatory. It also lists file
-comments and the zipfile comment, if any, and the type and number of bytes
-in any stored extra fields. Currently known types of extra fields include
-PKWARE's authentication (``AV'') info; OS/2 extended attributes; VMS
-filesystem info, both PKWARE and Info-ZIP versions; Macintosh resource
-forks; Acorn/Archimedes SparkFS info; and so on. (Note
-that in the case of OS/2 extended attributes--perhaps the most common
-use of zipfile extra fields--the size of the stored EAs as reported by
-\fIzipinfo\fP may not match the number given by OS/2's \fIdir\fP command:
-OS/2 always reports the number of bytes required in 16-bit format, whereas
-\fIzipinfo\fP always reports the 32-bit storage.)
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT OPTIONS"
-Modifying \fIzipinfo\fP's default behavior via options placed in
-an environment variable can be a bit complicated to explain, due to
-\fIzipinfo\fP's attempts to handle various defaults in an intuitive,
-yet Unix-like, manner. (Try not to laugh.) Nevertheless, there is some
-underlying logic. In brief,
-there are three ``priority levels'' of options: the default options;
-environment options, which can override or add to the defaults; and
-explicit options given by the user, which can override or add to
-either of the above.
-.PP
-The default listing format, as noted above, corresponds roughly
-to the "\fCzipinfo \-hst\fR" command (except when individual zipfile members
-are specified).
-A user who prefers the long-listing format (\fB\-l\fP) can make use of the
-\fIzipinfo\fP's environment variable to change this default:
-.TP
-Unix Bourne shell:
-\f(CW\&ZIPINFO=\-l; export ZIPINFO\fP
-.TP
-Unix C shell:
-\f(CW\&setenv ZIPINFO \-l\fP
-.TP
-OS/2 or MS-DOS:
-\f(CW\&set ZIPINFO=\-l\fP
-.TP
-VMS (quotes for \fIlowercase\fP):
-\f(CW\&define ZIPINFO_OPTS "\-l"\fP
-.EE
-.PP
-If, in addition, the user dislikes the trailer line, \fIzipinfo\fP's
-concept of ``negative options'' may be used to override the default
-inclusion of the line. This is accomplished by preceding the undesired
-option with one or more minuses: e.g., ``\fC\-l\-t\fR'' or ``\fC\-\-tl\fR'',
-in this example. The first hyphen is the regular switch character, but the
-one before the `t' is a minus sign. The dual use of hyphens may seem a
-little awkward, but it's reasonably intuitive nonetheless: simply ignore
-the first hyphen and go from there. It is also consistent with the behavior
-of the Unix command \fInice\fP(1).
-.PP
-As suggested above, the default variable names are ZIPINFO_OPTS for VMS
-(where the symbol used to install \fIzipinfo\fP as a foreign command
-would otherwise be confused with the environment variable), and ZIPINFO
-for all other operating systems. For compatibility with \fIzip\fP(1L),
-ZIPINFOOPT is also accepted (don't ask). If both ZIPINFO and ZIPINFOOPT
-are defined, however, ZIPINFO takes precedence. \fIunzip\fP's diagnostic
-option (\fB\-v\fP with no zipfile name) can be used to check the values
-of all four possible \fIunzip\fP and \fIzipinfo\fP environment variables.
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH EXAMPLES
-To get a basic, short-format listing of the complete contents of a ZIP
-archive \fIstorage.zip\fP, with both header and totals lines, use only
-the archive name as an argument to zipinfo:
-.PP
-.EX
-zipinfo storage
-.EE
-.PP
-To produce a basic, long-format listing (not verbose), including header and
-totals lines, use \fB\-l\fP:
-.PP
-.EX
-zipinfo \-l storage
-.EE
-.PP
-To list the complete contents of the archive without header and totals
-lines, either negate the \fB\-h\fP and \fB\-t\fP options or else specify the
-contents explicitly:
-.PP
-.EX
-zipinfo \-\-h\-t storage
-zipinfo storage \e*
-.EE
-.PP
-(where the backslash is required only if the shell would otherwise expand
-the `*' wildcard, as in Unix when globbing is turned on--double quotes around
-the asterisk would have worked as well). To turn off the totals line by
-default, use the environment variable (C shell is assumed here):
-.PP
-.EX
-setenv ZIPINFO \-\-t
-zipinfo storage
-.EE
-.PP
-To get the full, short-format listing of the first example again, given
-that the environment variable is set as in the previous example, it is
-necessary to specify the \fB\-s\fP option explicitly, since the \fB\-t\fP
-option by itself implies that ONLY the footer line is to be printed:
-.PP
-.EX
-setenv ZIPINFO \-\-t
-zipinfo \-t storage \fR[only totals line]\fP
-zipinfo \-st storage \fR[full listing]\fP
-.EE
-.PP
-The \fB\-s\fP option, like \fB\-m\fP and \fB\-l\fP, includes headers and
-footers by default, unless otherwise specified. Since the environment
-variable specified no footers and that has a higher precedence than the
-default behavior of \fB\-s\fP, an explicit \fB\-t\fP option was necessary
-to produce the full listing. Nothing was indicated about the header,
-however, so the \fB\-s\fP option was sufficient. Note that both the
-\fB\-h\fP and \fB\-t\fP options, when used by themselves or with
-each other, override any default listing of member files; only the header
-and/or footer are printed. This behavior is useful when \fIzipinfo\fP is
-used with a wildcard zipfile specification; the contents of all zipfiles
-are then summarized with a single command.
-.PP
-To list information on a single file within the archive, in medium format,
-specify the filename explicitly:
-.PP
-.EX
-zipinfo \-m storage unshrink.c
-.EE
-.PP
-The specification of any member file, as in this example, will override
-the default header and totals lines; only the single line of information
-about the requested file will be printed. This is intuitively what one
-would expect when requesting information about a single file. For multiple
-files, it is often useful to know the total compressed and uncompressed
-size; in such cases \fB\-t\fP may be specified explicitly:
-.PP
-.EX
-zipinfo \-mt storage "*.[ch]" Mak\e*
-.EE
-.PP
-To get maximal information about the ZIP archive, use the verbose
-option. It is usually wise to pipe the output into a filter such as
-Unix \fImore\fP(1) if the operating system allows it:
-.PP
-.EX
-zipinfo \-v storage | more
-.EE
-.PP
-Finally, to see the most recently modified files in the archive, use
-the \fB\-T\fP option in conjunction with an external sorting utility
-such as Unix \fIsort\fP(1) (and \fItail\fP(1) as well, in this example):
-.PP
-.EX
-zipinfo \-T storage | sort -n +6 | tail -15
-.EE
-.PP
-The \fB\-n\fP option to \fIsort\fP(1) tells it to sort numerically
-rather than in ASCII order, and the \fB\+6\fP option tells it to sort
-on the sixth field after the first one (i.e., the seventh field). This
-assumes the default short-listing format; if \fB\-m\fP or \fB\-l\fP is
-used, the proper \fIsort\fP(1) option would be \fB\+7\fP. The \fItail\fP(1)
-command filters out all but the last 15 lines of the listing. Future
-releases of \fIzipinfo\fP may incorporate date/time and filename sorting
-as built-in options.
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH TIPS
-The author finds it convenient to define an alias \fIii\fP for \fIzipinfo\fP
-on systems that allow aliases (or, on other systems, copy/rename the
-executable, create a link or create a command file with the name \fIii\fP).
-The \fIii\fP usage parallels the common \fIll\fP alias for long listings in
-Unix, and the similarity between the outputs of the two commands was
-intentional.
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH BUGS
-As with \fIunzip\fP, \fIzipinfo\fP's \fB\-M\fP (``more'') option is overly
-simplistic in its handling of screen output; as noted above, it fails to detect
-the wrapping of long lines and may thereby cause lines at the top of the screen
-to be scrolled off before being read. \fIzipinfo\fP should detect and treat
-each occurrence of line-wrap as one additional line printed. This requires
-knowledge of the screen's width as well as its height. In addition,
-\fIzipinfo\fP should detect the true screen geometry on all systems.
-.PP
-\fIzipinfo\fP's listing-format behavior is unnecessarily complex and should
-be simplified. (This is not to say that it will be.)
-.PP
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fIls\fP(1), \fIfunzip\fP(1L), \fIunzip\fP(1L), \fIunzipsfx\fP(1L),
-\fIzip\fP(1L), \fIzipcloak\fP(1L), \fIzipnote\fP(1L), \fIzipsplit\fP(1L)
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH URL
-The Info-ZIP home page is currently at
-.EX
-\fChttp://www.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/\fR
-.EE
-or
-.EX
-\fCftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/\fR .
-.EE
-.PD
-.\" =========================================================================
-.SH AUTHOR
-Greg ``Cave Newt'' Roelofs. ZipInfo contains pattern-matching code
-by Mark Adler and fixes/improvements by many others. Please refer to the
-CONTRIBS file in the UnZip source distribution for a more complete list.
diff --git a/raw/man1/zless.1 b/raw/man1/zless.1
deleted file mode 100644
index 996fb0c..0000000
--- a/raw/man1/zless.1
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-.TH ZLESS 1
-.SH NAME
-zless \- file perusal filter for crt viewing of compressed text
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B zless
-[ name ... ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I Zless
-is a filter which allows examination of compressed or plain text files
-one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. It is the equivalent of
-setting the environment variable PAGER to
-.I less,
-and then running zmore. However, enough people seem to think that having the
-command
-.I zless
-available is important to be worth providing it.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-zmore(1), less(1)
diff --git a/raw/man2/accept.2 b/raw/man2/accept.2
deleted file mode 100644
index de344fb..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/accept.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 16:42:42 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 23:05:29 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" Modified 1998-2000 by Andi Kleen to match Linux 2.2 reality
-.\" Modified Tue Apr 23 20:33:18 CEST 2002 by Roger Luethi <rl at hellgate.ch>
-.TH ACCEPT 2 2002-04-23 "Linux 2.2 Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-accept \- accept a connection on a socket
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/types.h>
-.br
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int accept(int " s ", struct sockaddr *" addr ", socklen_t *" addrlen );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-
-The
-.B accept
-function is used with connection-based socket types
-.RB ( SOCK_STREAM ,
-.B SOCK_SEQPACKET
-and
-.BR SOCK_RDM ).
-It extracts the first connection request on the queue of pending
-connections, creates a new connected socket with mostly the same properties as
-.IR s ,
-and allocates a new file descriptor for the socket, which is returned.
-The newly created socket is no longer in the listening state.
-The original socket
-.I s
-is unaffected by this call. Note that any per file descriptor flags
-(everything that can be set with the
-.B F_SETFL
-fcntl, like non blocking or async state) are not inherited across
-an
-.IR accept .
-.PP
-The argument
-.I s
-is a socket that has been created with
-.BR socket (2),
-bound to a local address with
-.BR bind (2),
-and is listening for connections after a
-.BR listen (2).
-
-The argument
-.I addr
-is a pointer to a sockaddr structure. This structure is filled in
-with the address of the connecting entity,
-as known to the communications layer. The exact format of the
-address passed in the
-.I addr
-parameter is determined by the socket's family (see
-.BR socket (2)
-and the respective protocol man pages).
-The
-.I addrlen
-argument is a value-result parameter: it should initially contain the
-size of the structure pointed to by
-.IR addr ;
-on return it will contain the actual length (in bytes) of the address
-returned. When
-.I addr
-is NULL nothing is filled in.
-.PP
-If no pending
-connections are present on the queue, and the socket is not marked as
-non-blocking,
-.B accept
-blocks the caller until a connection is present. If the socket is marked
-non-blocking and no pending connections are present on the queue,
-.B accept
-returns EAGAIN.
-.PP
-In order to be notified of incoming connections on a socket, you can use
-.BR select (2)
-or
-.BR poll (2).
-A readable event will be delivered when a new connection is attempted and you
-may then call
-.B accept
-to get a socket for that connection. Alternatively, you can set the socket
-to deliver
-.B SIGIO
-when activity occurs on a socket; see
-.BR socket (7)
-for details.
-.PP
-For certain protocols which require an explicit confirmation,
-such as
-DECNet,
-.B accept
-can be thought of as merely dequeuing the next connection request and not
-implying confirmation. Confirmation can be implied by
-a normal read or write on the new file descriptor, and rejection can be
-implied by closing the new socket. Currently only
-DECNet
-has these semantics on Linux.
-.SH NOTES
-There may not always be a connection waiting after a
-.B SIGIO
-is delivered or
-.BR select (2)
-or
-.BR poll (2)
-return a readability event because the connection might have been
-removed by an asynchronous network error or another thread before
-.B accept
-is called.
-If this happens then the call will block waiting for the next
-connection to arrive.
-To ensure that
-.B accept
-never blocks, the passed socket
-.I s
-needs to have the
-.B O_NONBLOCK
-flag set (see
-.BR socket (7)).
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The call returns \-1 on error. If it succeeds, it returns a non-negative
-integer that is a descriptor for the accepted socket.
-.SH "ERROR HANDLING"
-Linux
-.B accept
-passes already-pending network errors on the new socket
-as an error code from
-.BR accept .
-This behaviour differs from other BSD socket
-implementations. For reliable operation the application should detect
-the network errors defined for the protocol after
-.B accept
-and treat
-them like
-.BR EAGAIN
-by retrying. In case of TCP/IP these are
-.BR ENETDOWN ,
-.BR EPROTO ,
-.BR ENOPROTOOPT ,
-.BR EHOSTDOWN ,
-.BR ENONET ,
-.BR EHOSTUNREACH ,
-.BR EOPNOTSUPP ,
-and
-.BR ENETUNREACH .
-.SH ERRORS
-.B accept
-shall fail if:
-.TP
-.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
-The socket is marked non-blocking and no connections are
-present to be accepted.
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-The descriptor is invalid.
-.TP
-.B ENOTSOCK
-The descriptor references a file, not a socket.
-.TP
-.B EOPNOTSUPP
-The referenced socket is not of type
-.BR SOCK_STREAM .
-.TP
-.B EINTR
-The system call was interrupted by a signal that was caught
-before a valid connection arrived.
-.TP
-.B ECONNABORTED
-A connection has been aborted.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Socket is not listening for connections.
-.TP
-.B EMFILE
-The per-process limit of open file descriptors has been reached.
-.TP
-.B ENFILE
-The system maximum for file descriptors has been reached.
-.PP
-.B accept
-may fail if:
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-The
-.I addr
-parameter is not in a writable part of the user address space.
-.TP
-.B ENOBUFS, ENOMEM
-Not enough free memory.
-This often means that the memory allocation is limited by the socket buffer
-limits, not by the system memory.
-.TP
-.B EPROTO
-Protocol error.
-.PP
-Linux
-.B accept
-may fail if:
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-Firewall rules forbid connection.
-.PP
-In addition, network errors for the new socket and as defined
-for the protocol may be returned. Various Linux kernels can
-return other errors such as
-.BR ENOSR ,
-.BR ESOCKTNOSUPPORT ,
-.BR EPROTONOSUPPORT ,
-.BR ETIMEDOUT .
-The value
-.B ERESTARTSYS
-may be seen during a trace.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVr4, 4.4BSD (the
-.B accept
-function first appeared in BSD 4.2).
-The BSD man page documents five possible error returns
-(EBADF, ENOTSOCK, EOPNOTSUPP, EWOULDBLOCK, EFAULT).
-SUSv3 documents errors EAGAIN, EBADF, ECONNABORTED, EINTR, EINVAL, EMFILE,
-ENFILE, ENOBUFS, ENOMEM, ENOTSOCK, EOPNOTSUPP, EPROTO, EWOULDBLOCK. In
-addition, SUSv2 documents EFAULT and ENOSR.
-.LP
-Linux accept does _not_ inherit socket flags like
-.BR O_NONBLOCK .
-This behaviour differs from other BSD socket implementations.
-Portable programs should not rely on this behaviour and always set
-all required flags on the socket returned from accept.
-.SH NOTE
-The third argument of
-.B accept
-was originally declared as an `int *' (and is that under libc4 and libc5
-and on many other systems like BSD 4.*, SunOS 4, SGI); a POSIX 1003.1g draft
-standard wanted to change it into a `size_t *', and that is what it is
-for SunOS 5.
-Later POSIX drafts have `socklen_t *', and so do the Single Unix Specification
-and glibc2.
-Quoting Linus Torvalds:
-.\" .I fails: only italicizes a single line
-\fI_Any_ sane library _must_ have "socklen_t" be the same size
-as int. Anything else breaks any BSD socket layer stuff.
-POSIX initially _did_ make it a size_t, and I (and hopefully others, but
-obviously not too many) complained to them very loudly indeed. Making
-it a size_t is completely broken, exactly because size_t very seldom is
-the same size as "int" on 64-bit architectures, for example. And it
-_has_ to be the same size as "int" because that's what the BSD socket
-interface is.
-Anyway, the POSIX people eventually got a clue, and created "socklen_t".
-They shouldn't have touched it in the first place, but once they did
-they felt it had to have a named type for some unfathomable reason
-(probably somebody didn't like losing face over having done the original
-stupid thing, so they silently just renamed their blunder).\fP
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR bind (2),
-.BR connect (2),
-.BR listen (2),
-.BR select (2),
-.BR socket (2)
diff --git a/raw/man2/bind.2 b/raw/man2/bind.2
deleted file mode 100644
index 7dc14d7..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/bind.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" Copyright 1993 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Portions extracted from /usr/include/sys/socket.h, which does not have
-.\" any authorship information in it. It is probably available under the GPL.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\"
-.\" Other portions are from the 6.9 (Berkeley) 3/10/91 man page:
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1983 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 23:05:29 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" Modified 1998 by Andi Kleen
-.TH BIND 2 1998-10-03 "Linux 2.2" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-bind \- bind a name to a socket
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/types.h>
-.br
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int bind(int " sockfd ", struct sockaddr *" my_addr ", socklen_t " addrlen );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B bind
-gives the socket
-.I sockfd
-the local address
-.IR my_addr .
-.I my_addr
-is
-.I addrlen
-bytes long. Traditionally, this is called \(lqassigning a name to a socket.\(rq
-When a socket is created with
-.BR socket (2),
-it exists in a name space (address family) but has no name assigned.
-.PP
-It is normally necessary to assign a local address using
-.B bind
-before a
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-socket may receive connections (see
-.BR accept (2)).
-
-The rules used in name binding vary between address families. Consult
-the manual entries in Section 7 for detailed information. For
-.B AF_INET
-see
-.BR ip (7),
-for
-.B AF_UNIX
-see
-.BR unix (7),
-for
-.B AF_APPLETALK
-see
-.BR ddp (7),
-for
-.B AF_PACKET
-see
-.BR packet (7),
-for
-.B AF_X25
-see
-.BR x25 (7)
-and for
-.B AF_NETLINK
-see
-.BR netlink (7).
-
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, zero is returned. On error, \-1 is returned, and
-.I errno
-is set appropriately.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-.I sockfd
-is not a valid descriptor.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-The socket is already bound to an address. This may change in the future:
-see
-.I linux/unix/sock.c
-for details.
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-The address is protected, and the user is not the super-user.
-.TP
-.B ENOTSOCK
-Argument is a descriptor for a file, not a socket.
-.PP
-The following errors are specific to UNIX domain
-.RB ( AF_UNIX )
-sockets:
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-The
-.I addrlen
-is wrong, or the socket was not in the
-.B AF_UNIX
-family.
-.TP
-.B EROFS
-The socket inode would reside on a read-only file system.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-.I my_addr
-points outside the user's accessible address space.
-.TP
-.B ENAMETOOLONG
-.I my_addr
-is too long.
-.TP
-.B ENOENT
-The file does not exist.
-.TP
-.B ENOMEM
-Insufficient kernel memory was available.
-.TP
-.B ENOTDIR
-A component of the path prefix is not a directory.
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix.
-.TP
-.B ELOOP
-Too many symbolic links were encountered in resolving
-.IR my_addr .
-.SH BUGS
-The transparent proxy options are not described.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVr4, 4.4BSD (the
-.B bind
-function first appeared in BSD 4.2). SVr4 documents additional
-.BR EADDRNOTAVAIL ,
-.BR EADDRINUSE ,
-and
-.B ENOSR
-general error conditions, and
-additional
-.B EIO
-and
-.B EISDIR
-Unix-domain error conditions.
-.SH NOTE
-The third argument of
-.B bind
-is in reality an int (and this is what BSD 4.* and libc4 and libc5 have).
-Some POSIX confusion resulted in the present socklen_t. See also
-.BR accept (2).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR accept (2),
-.BR connect (2),
-.BR listen (2),
-.BR socket (2),
-.BR getsockname (2),
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR socket (7)
diff --git a/raw/man2/close.2 b/raw/man2/close.2
deleted file mode 100644
index bec96d4..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/close.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" This manpage is Copyright (C) 1992 Drew Eckhardt;
-.\" 1993 Michael Haardt, Ian Jackson.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Wed Jul 21 22:40:25 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Sat Feb 18 15:27:48 1995 by Michael Haardt
-.\" Modified Sun Apr 14 11:40:50 1996 by Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>:
-.\" corrected description of effect on locks (thanks to
-.\" Tigran Aivazian <tigran at sco.com>).
-.\" Modified Fri Jan 31 16:21:46 1997 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" Modified 2000-07-22 by Nicol?s Lichtmaier <nick at debian.org>
-.\" added note about close(2) not guaranteeing that data is safe on close.
-.\"
-.TH CLOSE 2 2001-12-13 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-close \- close a file descriptor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <unistd.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int close(int " fd );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B close
-closes a file descriptor, so that it no longer refers to any file and
-may be reused. Any locks held on the file it was associated with,
-and owned by the process, are removed (regardless of the file
-descriptor that was used to obtain the lock).
-.PP
-If
-.I fd
-is the last copy of a particular file descriptor the resources
-associated with it are freed;
-if the descriptor was the last reference to a file which has been
-removed using
-.BR unlink (2)
-the file is deleted.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-.B close
-returns zero on success, or \-1 if an error occurred.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-.I fd
-isn't a valid open file descriptor.
-.TP
-.B EINTR
-The
-.BR close ()
-call was interrupted by a signal.
-.TP
-.B EIO
-An I/O error occurred.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVr4, SVID, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3. SVr4 documents an additional
-ENOLINK error condition.
-.SH NOTES
-Not checking the return value of close is a common but nevertheless
-serious programming error. It is quite possible that errors on a
-previous
-.BR write (2)
-operation are first reported at the final
-.BR close .
-Not checking the return value when closing the file may lead to
-silent loss of data. This can especially be observed with NFS
-and disk quotas.
-.PP
-A successful close does not guarantee that the data has been successfully
-saved to disk, as the kernel defers writes. It is not common for a filesystem
-to flush the buffers when the stream is closed. If you need to be sure that
-the data is physically stored use
-.BR fsync (2).
-(It will depend on the disk hardware at this point.)
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR open (2),
-.BR fcntl (2),
-.BR shutdown (2),
-.BR unlink (2),
-.BR fclose (3),
-.BR fsync (2)
diff --git a/raw/man2/create_module.2 b/raw/man2/create_module.2
deleted file mode 100644
index 12fc442..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/create_module.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\" This file is distributed according to the GNU General Public License.
-.\" See the file COPYING in the top level source directory for details.
-.\"
-.TH CREATE_MODULE 2 "26 Dec 1996" Linux "Linux Module Support"
-.SH NAME
-create_module \- create a loadable module entry
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <linux/module.h>
-.sp
-.BI "caddr_t create_module(const char *" name ", size_t " size );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B create_module
-attempts to create a loadable module entry and reserve the kernel memory
-that will be needed to hold the module. This system call is only open
-to the superuser.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, returns the kernel address at which the module will reside.
-On error \-1 is returned and \fIerrno\fP is set appropriately.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-The user is not the superuser.
-.TP
-.B EEXIST
-A module by that name already exists.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-The requested size is too small even for the module header information.
-.TP
-.B ENOMEM
-The kernel could not allocate a contiguous block of memory large
-enough for the module.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-.I name
-is outside the program's accessible address space.
-.SH "SEE ALSO
-.BR init_module "(2), " delete_module "(2), " query_module "(2)."
diff --git a/raw/man2/execve.2 b/raw/man2/execve.2
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c460bb..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/execve.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,203 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1992 Drew Eckhardt (drew at cs.colorado.edu), March 28, 1992
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Modified by Michael Haardt <michael at moria.de>
-.\" Modified Wed Jul 21 22:47:01 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified 21 Aug 1994 by Michael Chastain <mec at shell.portal.com>:
-.\" Fixed typoes.
-.\" Modified Fri Jan 31 16:24:28 1997 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" Modified Fri Nov 12 22:57:27 1999 by Urs Thuermann <urs at isnogud.escape.de>
-.\"
-.TH EXECVE 2 1997-09-03 "Linux 2.0.30" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-execve \- execute program
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <unistd.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int execve(const char *" filename ", char *const " argv
-.BI "[], char *const " envp []);
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBexecve()\fP executes the program pointed to by \fIfilename\fP.
-\fIfilename\fP must be either a binary executable, or a script
-starting with a line of the form "\fB#! \fIinterpreter \fR[arg]".
-In the latter case, the interpreter must be a valid pathname for an
-executable which is not itself a script, which will be invoked as
-\fBinterpreter\fR [arg] \fIfilename\fR.
-
-\fIargv\fP is an array of argument strings passed to the new program.
-\fIenvp\fP is an array of strings, conventionally of the form
-\fBkey=value\fR, which are passed as environment to the new
-program. Both, \fIargv\fP and \fIenvp\fP must be terminated by a null
-pointer. The argument vector and environment can be accessed by the
-called program's main function, when it is defined as \fBint main(int
-argc, char *argv[], char *envp[])\fR.
-
-\fBexecve()\fP does not return on success, and the text, data, bss, and
-stack of the calling process are overwritten by that of the program
-loaded. The program invoked inherits the calling process's PID, and any
-open file descriptors that are not set to close on exec. Signals pending
-on the calling process are cleared. Any signals set to be caught by
-the calling process are reset to their default behaviour.
-The SIGCHLD signal (when set to SIG_IGN) may or may not be reset to SIG_DFL.
-
-If the current program is being ptraced, a \fBSIGTRAP\fP is sent to it
-after a successful \fBexecve()\fP.
-
-If the set-uid bit is set on the program file pointed to by
-\fIfilename\fP the effective user ID of the calling process is changed
-to that of the owner of the program file. Similarly, when the set-gid
-bit of the program file is set the effective group ID of the calling
-process is set to the group of the program file.
-
-If the executable is an a.out dynamically-linked binary executable containing
-shared-library stubs, the Linux dynamic linker
-.BR ld.so (8)
-is called at the start of execution to bring needed shared libraries into core
-and link the executable with them.
-
-If the executable is a dynamically-linked ELF executable, the
-interpreter named in the PT_INTERP segment is used to load the needed
-shared libraries. This interpreter is typically
-\fI/lib/ld-linux.so.1\fR for binaries linked with the Linux libc
-version 5, or \fI/lib/ld-linux.so.2\fR for binaries linked with the
-GNU libc version 2.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, \fBexecve()\fP does not return, on error \-1 is returned, and
-.I errno
-is set appropriately.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-The file or a script interpreter is not a regular file.
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-Execute permission is denied for the file or a script or ELF interpreter.
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-The file system is mounted
-.IR noexec .
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-The file system is mounted
-.IR nosuid ,
-the user is not the superuser, and the file has an SUID or SGID bit set.
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-The process is being traced, the user is not the superuser and the
-file has an SUID or SGID bit set.
-.TP
-.B E2BIG
-The argument list is too big.
-.TP
-.B ENOEXEC
-An executable is not in a recognised format, is for the wrong
-architecture, or has some other format error that means it cannot be
-executed.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-.I filename
-points outside your accessible address space.
-.TP
-.B ENAMETOOLONG
-.I filename
-is too long.
-.TP
-.B ENOENT
-The file
-.I filename
-or a script or ELF interpreter does not exist, or a shared library
-needed for file or interpreter cannot be found.
-.TP
-.B ENOMEM
-Insufficient kernel memory was available.
-.TP
-.B ENOTDIR
-A component of the path prefix of
-.I filename
-or a script or ELF interpreter is not a directory.
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-Search permission is denied on a component of the path prefix of
-.I filename
-or the name of a script interpreter.
-.TP
-.B ELOOP
-Too many symbolic links were encountered in resolving
-.I filename
-or the name of a script or ELF interpreter.
-.TP
-.B ETXTBSY
-Executable was open for writing by one or more processes.
-.TP
-.B EIO
-An I/O error occurred.
-.TP
-.B ENFILE
-The limit on the total number of files open on the system has been reached.
-.TP
-.B EMFILE
-The process has the maximum number of files open.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-An ELF executable had more than one PT_INTERP segment (i.e., tried to
-name more than one interpreter).
-.TP
-.B EISDIR
-An ELF interpreter was a directory.
-.TP
-.B ELIBBAD
-An ELF interpreter was not in a recognised format.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVr4, SVID, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3. POSIX does not document the #! behavior
-but is otherwise compatible. SVr4 documents additional error
-conditions EAGAIN, EINTR, ELIBACC, ENOLINK, EMULTIHOP; POSIX does not
-document ETXTBSY, EPERM, EFAULT, ELOOP, EIO, ENFILE, EMFILE, EINVAL,
-EISDIR or ELIBBAD error conditions.
-.SH NOTES
-SUID and SGID processes can not be \fBptrace()\fPd.
-
-Linux ignores the SUID and SGID bits on scripts.
-
-The result of mounting a filesystem
-.I nosuid
-vary between Linux kernel versions:
-some will refuse execution of SUID/SGID executables when this would
-give the user powers she did not have already (and return EPERM),
-some will just ignore the SUID/SGID bits and exec successfully.
-
-A maximum line length of 127 characters is allowed for the first line in
-a #! executable shell script.
-.\" .SH BUGS
-.\" Some Linux versions have failed to check permissions on ELF
-.\" interpreters. This is a security hole, because it allows users to
-.\" open any file, such as a rewinding tape device, for reading. Some
-.\" Linux versions have also had other security holes in \fBexecve()\fP,
-.\" that could be exploited for denial of service by a suitably crafted
-.\" ELF binary. There are no known problems with 2.0.34 or 2.2.15.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR chmod (2),
-.BR fork (2),
-.BR execl (3),
-.BR environ (5),
-.BR ld.so (8)
diff --git a/raw/man2/init_module.2 b/raw/man2/init_module.2
deleted file mode 100644
index b3debf6..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/init_module.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\" This file is distributed according to the GNU General Public License.
-.\" See the file COPYING in the top level source directory for details.
-.\"
-.TH INIT_MODULE 2 "26 Dec 1996" "Linux 2.1.17" "Linux Module Support"
-.SH NAME
-init_module \- initialize a loadable module entry
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <linux/module.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int init_module(const char *" name ", struct module *" image );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B init_module
-loads the relocated module image into kernel space and runs the
-module's \fIinit\fP function.
-.PP
-The module image begins with a module structure and is followed by
-code and data as appropriate. The module structure is defined as follows:
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-struct module
-{
- unsigned long size_of_struct;
- struct module *next;
- const char *name;
- unsigned long size;
- long usecount;
- unsigned long flags;
- unsigned int nsyms;
- unsigned int ndeps;
- struct module_symbol *syms;
- struct module_ref *deps;
- struct module_ref *refs;
- int (*init)(void);
- void (*cleanup)(void);
- const struct exception_table_entry *ex_table_start;
- const struct exception_table_entry *ex_table_end;
-#ifdef __alpha__
- unsigned long gp;
-#endif
-};
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-All of the pointer fields, with the exception of \fInext\fP and
-\fIrefs\fP, are expected to point within the module body and be
-initialized as appropriate for kernel space, i.e. relocated with
-the rest of the module.
-.PP
-This system call is only open to the superuser.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, zero is returned. On error, \-1 is returned and \fIerrno\fP
-is set appropriately.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-The user is not the superuser.
-.TP
-.B ENOENT
-No module by that name exists.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Some \fIimage\fP slot filled in incorrectly, \fIimage->name\fP does not
-correspond to the original module name, some \fIimage->deps\fP entry
-does not correspond to a loaded module, or some other similar inconsistency.
-.TP
-.B EBUSY
-The module's initialization routine failed.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-\fIname\fP or \fIimage\fP
-is outside the program's accessible address space.
-.SH "SEE ALSO
-.BR create_module "(2), " delete_module "(2), " query_module "(2)."
diff --git a/raw/man2/listen.2 b/raw/man2/listen.2
deleted file mode 100644
index e6b0ced..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/listen.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Fri Jul 23 22:07:54 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified 950727 by aeb, following a suggestion by Urs Thuermann
-.\" <urs at isnogud.escape.de>
-.\" Modified Tue Oct 22 08:11:14 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" Modified 1998 by Andi Kleen
-.\" Modified 11 May 2001 by Sam Varshavchik <mrsam at courier-mta.com>
-.\"
-.TH LISTEN 2 1993-07-23 "BSD Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-listen \- listen for connections on a socket
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int listen(int " s ", int " backlog );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-To accept connections, a socket is first created with
-.BR socket (2),
-a willingness to accept incoming connections and a queue limit for incoming
-connections are specified with
-.BR listen ,
-and then the connections are
-accepted with
-.BR accept (2).
-The
-.B listen
-call applies only to sockets of type
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-or
-.BR SOCK_SEQPACKET .
-.PP
-The
-.I backlog
-parameter defines the maximum length the queue of pending connections may
-grow to. If a connection request arrives with the queue full the client
-may receive an error with an indication of
-.B ECONNREFUSED
-or, if the underlying protocol supports retransmission, the request may be
-ignored so that retries succeed.
-.SH NOTES
-The behaviour of the
-.I backlog
-parameter on TCP sockets changed with Linux 2.2.
-Now it specifies the queue length for
-.I completely
-established sockets waiting to be accepted, instead of the number of incomplete
-connection requests. The maximum length of the queue for incomplete sockets
-can be set using the
-.B tcp_max_syn_backlog
-sysctl.
-When syncookies are enabled there is no logical maximum
-length and this sysctl setting is ignored.
-See
-.BR tcp (7)
-for more information.
-
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, zero is returned. On error, \-1 is returned, and
-.I errno
-is set appropriately.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EADDRINUSE
-Another socket is already listening on the same port.
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-The argument
-.I s
-is not a valid descriptor.
-.TP
-.B ENOTSOCK
-The argument
-.I s
-is not a socket.
-.TP
-.B EOPNOTSUPP
-The socket is not of a type that supports the
-.B listen
-operation.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-Single Unix, 4.4BSD, POSIX 1003.1g draft. The
-.B listen
-function call first appeared in 4.2BSD.
-.SH BUGS
-If the socket is of type
-.BR AF_INET ,
-and the
-.I backlog
-argument is greater
-than the constant
-.B SOMAXCONN
-(128 in Linux 2.0 & 2.2), it is silently truncated
-to
-.BR SOMAXCONN .
-Don't rely on this value in portable applications since BSD
-(and some BSD-derived systems) limit the backlog to 5.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR accept (2),
-.BR connect (2),
-.BR socket (2)
diff --git a/raw/man2/open.2 b/raw/man2/open.2
deleted file mode 100644
index 97b3d81..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/open.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,432 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" This manpage is Copyright (C) 1992 Drew Eckhardt;
-.\" 1993 Michael Haardt, Ian Jackson.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Wed Jul 21 22:42:16 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sun Aug 21 18:18:14 1994: Michael Haardt's NFS diffs were
-.\" applied by hand (faith at cs.unc.edu).
-.\" Modified Sat Apr 13 16:25:28 1996 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Mon May 13 00:53:52 1996: added symbolic constants
-.\" as sent by Thomas Koenig
-.\" Modified Fri Dec 20 16:06:45 1996 by Michael Haardt: More NFS details
-.\" Modified Fri Feb 19 15:08:34 1999 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified 981128 by Joseph S. Myers <jsm28 at hermes.cam.ac.uk>
-.\" Modified Thu Jun 3 19:29:06 1999 by Michael Haardt: NFS lock optimisation
-.\" Modified, 7 May 2002, Michael Kerrisk <mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz>
-.\"
-.TH OPEN 2 1999-06-03 "Linux" "System calls"
-.SH NAME
-open, creat \- open and possibly create a file or device
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <sys/types.h>
-.B #include <sys/stat.h>
-.B #include <fcntl.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int open(const char *" pathname ", int " flags );
-.BI "int open(const char *" pathname ", int " flags ", mode_t " mode );
-.BI "int creat(const char *" pathname ", mode_t " mode );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B open()
-system call is used to convert a pathname into a file descriptor
-(a small, non-negative integer for use in subsequent I/O as with
-.BR read ", " write ", etc.)."
-When the call is successful, the file descriptor returned will be
-the lowest file descriptor not currently open for the process.
-This call creates a new open file, not shared with any other process.
-(But shared open files may arise via the
-.BR fork (2)
-system call.)
-The new file descriptor is set to remain open across exec functions
-(see
-.BR fcntl (2)).
-The file offset is set to the beginning of the file.
-
-The parameter
-.I flags
-is one of
-.BR O_RDONLY ", " O_WRONLY " or " O_RDWR
-which request opening the file read-only, write-only or read/write,
-respectively,
-.RI bitwise- or 'd
-with zero or more of the following:
-.TP
-.B O_CREAT
-If the file does not exist it will be created.
-The owner (user ID) of the file is set to the effective user ID
-of the process. The group ownership (group ID) is set either to
-the effective group ID of the process or to the group ID of the
-parent directory (depending on filesystem type and mount options,
-and the mode of the parent directory, see, e.g., the mount options
-.I bsdgroups
-and
-.I sysvgroups
-of the ext2 filesystem, as described in
-.BR mount (8)).
-.TP
-.B O_EXCL
-When used with
-.BR O_CREAT ,
-if the file already exists it is an error and the
-.B open
-will fail. In this context, a symbolic link exists, regardless
-of where its points to.
-.B O_EXCL
-is broken on NFS file systems, programs which rely on it for performing
-locking tasks will contain a race condition. The solution for performing
-atomic file locking using a lockfile is to create a unique file on the same
-fs (e.g., incorporating hostname and pid), use
-.BR link (2)
-to make a link to the lockfile. If \fBlink()\fP returns 0, the lock is
-successful. Otherwise, use
-.BR stat (2)
-on the unique file to check if its link count has increased to 2,
-in which case the lock is also successful.
-.TP
-.B O_NOCTTY
-If
-.I pathname
-refers to a terminal device \(em see
-.BR tty (4)
-\(em it will not become the process's controlling terminal even if the
-process does not have one.
-.TP
-.B O_TRUNC
-If the file already exists and is a regular file and the open mode allows
-writing (i.e., is O_RDWR or O_WRONLY) it will be truncated to length 0.
-If the file is a FIFO or terminal device file, the O_TRUNC
-flag is ignored. Otherwise the effect of O_TRUNC is unspecified.
-.TP
-.B O_APPEND
-The file is opened in append mode. Before each
-.BR write ,
-the file pointer is positioned at the end of the file,
-as if with
-.BR lseek .
-.B O_APPEND
-may lead to corrupted files on NFS file systems if more than one process
-appends data to a file at once. This is because NFS does not support
-appending to a file, so the client kernel has to simulate it, which
-can't be done without a race condition.
-.TP
-.BR O_NONBLOCK " or " O_NDELAY
-When possible, the file is opened in non-blocking mode. Neither the
-.B open
-nor any subsequent operations on the file descriptor which is
-returned will cause the calling process to wait.
-For the handling of FIFOs (named pipes), see also
-.BR fifo (4).
-This mode need not have any effect on files other than FIFOs.
-.TP
-.B O_SYNC
-The file is opened for synchronous I/O. Any
-.BR write s
-on the resulting file descriptor will block the calling process until
-the data has been physically written to the underlying hardware.
-.I See RESTRICTIONS below, though.
-.TP
-.B O_NOFOLLOW
-If \fIpathname\fR is a symbolic link, then the open fails. This is a
-FreeBSD extension, which was added to Linux in version 2.1.126.
-Symbolic links in earlier components of the pathname will still be
-followed. The headers from glibc 2.0.100 and later include a
-definition of this flag; \fIkernels before 2.1.126 will ignore it if
-used\fR.
-.TP
-.B O_DIRECTORY
-If \fIpathname\fR is not a directory, cause the open to fail. This
-flag is Linux-specific, and was added in kernel version 2.1.126, to
-avoid denial-of-service problems if \fBopendir\fR(3) is called on a
-FIFO or tape device, but should not be used outside of the
-implementation of \fBopendir\fR.
-.TP
-.B O_DIRECT
-Try to minimize cache effects of the I/O to and from this file.
-In general this will degrade performance, but it is useful in
-special situations, such as when applications do their own caching.
-File I/O is done directly to/from user space buffers.
-The I/O is synchronous, i.e., at the completion of the
-.BR read (2)
-or
-.BR write (2)
-system call, data is guaranteed to have been transferred.
-Under Linux 2.4 transfer sizes, and the alignment of user buffer
-and file offset must all be multiples of the logical block size
-of the file system. Under Linux 2.6 alignment to 512-byte boundaries
-suffices.
-.\" There may be coherency problems.
-.br
-A semantically similar interface for block devices is described in
-.BR raw (8).
-.TP
-.B O_ASYNC
-Generate a signal (SIGIO by default, but this can be changed via
-.BR fcntl (2))
-when input or output becomes possible on this file descriptor.
-This feature is only available for terminals, pseudo-terminals, and
-sockets. See
-.BR fcntl (2)
-for further details.
-.TP
-.B O_LARGEFILE
-On 32-bit systems that support the Large Files System, allow files
-whose sizes cannot be represented in 31 bits to be opened.
-.PP
-Some of these optional flags can be altered using
-.B fcntl
-after the file has been opened.
-
-The argument
-.I mode
-specifies the permissions to use in case a new file is created. It is
-modified by the process's
-.BR umask
-in the usual way: the permissions of the created file are
-.BR "(mode & ~umask)" .
-Note that this mode only applies to future accesses of the
-newly created file; the
-.B open
-call that creates a read-only file may well return a read/write
-file descriptor.
-.PP
-The following symbolic constants are provided for
-.IR mode :
-.TP
-.B S_IRWXU
-00700 user (file owner) has read, write and execute permission
-.TP
-.B S_IRUSR (S_IREAD)
-00400 user has read permission
-.TP
-.B S_IWUSR (S_IWRITE)
-00200 user has write permission
-.TP
-.B S_IXUSR (S_IEXEC)
-00100 user has execute permission
-.TP
-.B S_IRWXG
-00070 group has read, write and execute permission
-.TP
-.B S_IRGRP
-00040 group has read permission
-.TP
-.B S_IWGRP
-00020 group has write permission
-.TP
-.B S_IXGRP
-00010 group has execute permission
-.TP
-.B S_IRWXO
-00007 others have read, write and execute permission
-.TP
-.B S_IROTH
-00004 others have read permission
-.TP
-.B S_IWOTH
-00002 others have write permisson
-.TP
-.B S_IXOTH
-00001 others have execute permission
-.PP
-.I mode
-must be specified when
-.B O_CREAT
-is in the
-.IR flags ,
-and is ignored otherwise.
-
-.B creat
-is equivalent to
-.B open
-with
-.I flags
-equal to
-.BR O_CREAT|O_WRONLY|O_TRUNC .
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-.BR open " and " creat
-return the new file descriptor, or \-1 if an error occurred (in which case,
-.I errno
-is set appropriately).
-Note that
-.B open
-can open device special files, but
-.B creat
-cannot create them - use
-.BR mknod (2)
-instead.
-.LP
-On NFS file systems with UID mapping enabled, \fBopen\fP may return a file
-descriptor but e.g. \fBread\fP(2) requests are denied with \fBEACCES\fP.
-This is because the client performs \fBopen\fP by checking the permissions,
-but UID mapping is performed by the server upon read and write requests.
-
-If the file is newly created, its atime, ctime, mtime fields are set
-to the current time, and so are the ctime and mtime fields of the
-parent directory.
-Otherwise, if the file is modified because of the O_TRUNC flag,
-its ctime and mtime fields are set to the current time.
-
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EEXIST
-.I pathname
-already exists and
-.BR O_CREAT " and " O_EXCL
-were used.
-.TP
-.B EISDIR
-.I pathname
-refers to a directory and the access requested involved writing
-(that is,
-.B O_WRONLY
-or
-.B O_RDWR
-is set).
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-The requested access to the file is not allowed, or one of the
-directories in
-.IR pathname
-did not allow search (execute) permission, or the file did not exist
-yet and write access to the parent directory is not allowed.
-.TP
-.B ENAMETOOLONG
-.IR pathname " was too long."
-.TP
-.B ENOENT
-O_CREAT is not set and the named file does not exist.
-Or, a directory component in
-.I pathname
-does not exist or is a dangling symbolic link.
-.TP
-.B ENOTDIR
-A component used as a directory in
-.I pathname
-is not, in fact, a directory, or \fBO_DIRECTORY\fR was specified and
-.I pathname
-was not a directory.
-.TP
-.B ENXIO
-O_NONBLOCK | O_WRONLY is set, the named file is a FIFO and
-no process has the file open for reading.
-Or, the file is a device special file and no corresponding device exists.
-.TP
-.B ENODEV
-.I pathname
-refers to a device special file and no corresponding device exists.
-(This is a Linux kernel bug - in this situation ENXIO must be returned.)
-.TP
-.B EROFS
-.I pathname
-refers to a file on a read-only filesystem and write access was
-requested.
-.TP
-.B ETXTBSY
-.I pathname
-refers to an executable image which is currently being executed and
-write access was requested.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-.IR pathname " points outside your accessible address space."
-.TP
-.B ELOOP
-Too many symbolic links were encountered in resolving
-.IR pathname ,
-or \fBO_NOFOLLOW\fR was specified but
-.I pathname
-was a symbolic link.
-.TP
-.B ENOSPC
-.I pathname
-was to be created but the device containing
-.I pathname
-has no room for the new file.
-.TP
-.B ENOMEM
-Insufficient kernel memory was available.
-.TP
-.B EMFILE
-The process already has the maximum number of files open.
-.TP
-.B ENFILE
-The limit on the total number of files open on the system has been
-reached.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVr4, SVID, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3.
-The
-.B O_NOFOLLOW
-and
-.B O_DIRECTORY
-flags are Linux-specific.
-One may have to define the
-.B _GNU_SOURCE
-macro to get their definitions.
-.LP
-The (undefined) effect of
-.B O_RDONLY | O_TRUNC
-various among implementations. On many systems the file is actually
-truncated.
-.\" Linux 2.0, 2.5: truncate
-.\" Solaris 5.7, 5.8: truncate
-.\" Irix 6.5: truncate
-.\" Tru64 5.1B: truncate
-.\" HP-UX 11.22: truncate
-.\" FreeBSD 4.7: truncate
-.LP
-The
-.B O_DIRECT
-flag was introduced in SGI IRIX, where it has alignment restrictions
-similar to those of Linux 2.4. IRIX has also a fcntl(2) call to
-query appropriate alignments, and sizes. FreeBSD 4.x introduced
-a flag of same name, but without alignment restrictions.
-Support was added under Linux in kernel version 2.4.10.
-Older Linux kernels simply ignore this flag.
-.SH BUGS
-"The thing that has always disturbed me about O_DIRECT is that the whole
-interface is just stupid, and was probably designed by a deranged monkey
-on some serious mind-controlling substances." -- Linus
-.SH RESTRICTIONS
-There are many infelicities in the protocol underlying NFS, affecting
-amongst others
-.BR O_SYNC " and " O_NDELAY .
-
-POSIX provides for three different variants of synchronised I/O,
-corresponding to the flags \fBO_SYNC\fR, \fBO_DSYNC\fR and
-\fBO_RSYNC\fR. Currently (2.1.130) these are all synonymous under Linux.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR read (2),
-.BR write (2),
-.BR fcntl (2),
-.BR close (2),
-.BR link (2),
-.BR mknod (2),
-.BR mount (2),
-.BR stat (2),
-.BR umask (2),
-.BR unlink (2),
-.BR socket (2),
-.BR fopen (3),
-.BR fifo (4)
diff --git a/raw/man2/query_module.2 b/raw/man2/query_module.2
deleted file mode 100644
index f8a78fa..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/query_module.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\" This file is distributed according to the GNU General Public License.
-.\" See the file COPYING in the top level source directory for details.
-.\"
-.TH QUERY_MODULE 2 "26 Dec 1996" "Linux 2.1.17" "Linux Module Support"
-.SH NAME
-query_module \- query the kernel for various bits pertaining to modules.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <linux/module.h>
-.sp
-\fBint query_module(const char *\fIname\fB, int \fIwhich\fB,
-void *\fIbuf\fB, size_t \fIbufsize\fB, size_t *\fIret\fB);
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B query_module
-requests information related to loadable modules from the kernel. The
-precise nature of the information and its format depends on the \fIwhich\fP
-sub function. Some functions require \fIname\fP to name a currently
-loaded module, some allow \fIname\fP to be \fBNULL\fP indicating the
-kernel proper.
-
-.SS "VALUES OF WHICH"
-.TP
-.B 0
-Always returns success. Used to probe for the system call.
-.TP
-.B QM_MODULES
-Returns the names of all loaded modules. The output buffer format is
-adjacent null-terminated strings; \fIret\fP is set to the number of
-modules.
-.TP
-.B QM_DEPS
-Returns the names of all modules used by the indicated module. The
-output buffer format is adjacent null-terminated strings; \fIret\fP is
-set to the number of modules.
-.TP
-.B QM_REFS
-Returns the names of all modules using the indicated module. This is
-the inverse of \fBQM_DEPS\fP. The output buffer format is adjacent
-null-terminated strings; \fIret\fP is set to the number of modules.
-.TP
-.B QM_SYMBOLS
-Returns the symbols and values exported by the kernel or the indicated
-module. The buffer format is an array of:
-.RS
-.PP
-.nf
-struct module_symbol
-{
- unsigned long value;
- unsigned long name;
-};
-.fi
-.PP
-followed by null-terminated strings. The value of \fIname\fP is the
-character offset of the string relative to the start of \fIbuf\fP;
-\fIret\fP is set to the number of symbols.
-.RE
-.TP
-.B QM_INFO
-Returns miscellaneous information about the indicated module. The output
-buffer format is:
-.RS
-.PP
-.nf
-struct module_info
-{
- unsigned long address;
- unsigned long size;
- unsigned long flags;
-};
-.fi
-.PP
-where \fIaddress\fP is the kernel address at which the module resides,
-\fIsize\fP is the size of the module in bytes, and \fIflags\fP is
-a mask of \fBMOD_RUNNING\fP, \fBMOD_AUTOCLEAN\fP, et al that indicates
-the current status of the module. \fIret\fP is set to the size of
-the \fBmodule_info\fP struct.
-.RE
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, zero is returned. On error, \-1 is returned and \fIerrno\fP
-is set appropriately.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B ENOENT
-No module by that \fIname\fP exists.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Invalid \fIwhich\fP, or \fIname\fP indicates the kernel for an
-inappropriate sub function.
-.TP
-.B ENOSPC
-The buffer size provided was too small. \fIret\fP is set to the
-minimum size needed.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-At least one of \fIname\fP, \fIbuf\fP, or \fIret\fP was
-outside the program's accessible address space.
-.SH "SEE ALSO
-.BR create_module "(2), " init_module "(2), " delete_module "(2).
diff --git a/raw/man2/read.2 b/raw/man2/read.2
deleted file mode 100644
index 2c616b0..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/read.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" This manpage is Copyright (C) 1992 Drew Eckhardt;
-.\" 1993 Michael Haardt, Ian Jackson.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 00:06:00 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Wed Jan 17 16:02:32 1996 by Michael Haardt
-.\" <michael at cantor.informatik.rwth-aachen.de>
-.\" Modified Thu Apr 11 19:26:35 1996 by Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 21 18:59:33 1996 by Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>
-.\" Modified Fri Jan 31 16:47:33 1997 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 12 20:45:39 1997 by Michael Haardt
-.\" <michael at cantor.informatik.rwth-aachen.de>
-.\"
-.TH READ 2 1997-07-12 "Linux 2.0.32" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-read \- read from a file descriptor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <unistd.h>
-.sp
-.BI "ssize_t read(int " fd ", void *" buf ", size_t " count );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B read()
-attempts to read up to
-.I count
-bytes from file descriptor
-.I fd
-into the buffer starting at
-.IR buf .
-.PP
-If
-.I count
-is zero, \fBread()\fP returns zero and has no other results.
-If
-.I count
-is greater than SSIZE_MAX, the result is unspecified.
-.PP
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, the number of bytes read is returned (zero indicates end of
-file), and the file position is advanced by this number.
-It is not an error if this number is smaller than the number of bytes
-requested; this may happen for example because fewer bytes are actually
-available right now (maybe because we were close to end-of-file, or
-because we are reading from a pipe, or from a terminal), or because
-\fBread()\fP was interrupted by a signal.
-On error, \-1 is returned, and
-.I errno
-is set appropriately. In this case it is left unspecified whether
-the file position (if any) changes.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EINTR
-The call was interrupted by a signal before any data was read.
-.TP
-.B EAGAIN
-Non-blocking I/O has been selected using
-.B O_NONBLOCK
-and no data was immediately available for reading.
-.TP
-.B EIO
-I/O error. This will happen for example when the process is in a
-background process group, tries to read from its controlling tty,
-and either it is ignoring or blocking SIGTTIN or its process group
-is orphaned. It may also occur when there is a low-level I/O error
-while reading from a disk or tape.
-.TP
-.B EISDIR
-.I fd
-refers to a directory.
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-.I fd
-is not a valid file descriptor or is not open for reading.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-.I fd
-is attached to an object which is unsuitable for reading.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-.I buf
-is outside your accessible address space.
-.PP
-Other errors may occur, depending on the object connected to
-.IR fd .
-POSIX allows a
-.B read
-that is interrupted after reading some data
-to return \-1 (with
-.I errno
-set to EINTR) or to return the number of bytes already read.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVr4, SVID, AT&T, POSIX, X/OPEN, BSD 4.3
-.SH RESTRICTIONS
-On NFS file systems, reading small amounts of data will only update the
-time stamp the first time, subsequent calls may not do so. This is caused
-by client side attribute caching, because most if not all NFS clients
-leave atime updates to the server and client side reads satisfied from the
-client's cache will not cause atime updates on the server as there are no
-server side reads. UNIX semantics can be obtained by disabling client
-side attribute caching, but in most situations this will substantially
-increase server load and decrease performance.
-.PP
-Many filesystems and disks were considered to be fast enough that the
-implementation of
-.B O_NONBLOCK
-was deemed unneccesary. So, O_NONBLOCK may not be available on files
-and/or disks.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR close (2),
-.BR fcntl (2),
-.BR ioctl (2),
-.BR lseek (2),
-.BR readdir (2),
-.BR readlink (2),
-.BR select (2),
-.BR write (2),
-.BR fread (3),
-.BR readv (3)
diff --git a/raw/man2/send.2 b/raw/man2/send.2
deleted file mode 100644
index 2313041..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/send.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 01:15:33 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Tue Oct 22 17:55:49 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" Modified Oct 1998 by Andi Kleen
-.\"
-.TH SEND 2 2002-12-31 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-send, sendto, sendmsg \- send a message from a socket
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/types.h>
-.br
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.sp
-.BI "ssize_t send(int " s ", const void *" msg ", size_t " len ,
-.BI "int " flags );
-.br
-.BI "ssize_t sendto(int " s ", const void *" msg ", size_t " len ,
-.BI "int " flags ", const struct sockaddr *" to ", socklen_t " tolen );
-.br
-.BI "ssize_t sendmsg(int " s ", const struct msghdr *" msg ,
-.BI "int " flags );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.BR Send ,
-.BR sendto ,
-and
-.B sendmsg
-are used to transmit a message to another socket.
-.B Send
-may be used only when the socket is in a
-.I connected
-state, while
-.B sendto
-and
-.B sendmsg
-may be used at any time.
-.PP
-The address of the target is given by
-.I to
-with
-.I tolen
-specifying its size. The length of the message is given by
-.IR len .
-If the message is too long to pass atomically through the
-underlying protocol, the error
-.B EMSGSIZE
-is returned, and the message is not transmitted.
-.PP
-No indication of failure to deliver is implicit in a
-.BR send .
-Locally detected errors are indicated by a return value of \-1.
-.PP
-When the message does not fit into the send buffer of the socket,
-.B send
-normally blocks, unless the socket has been placed in non-blocking I/O
-mode. In non-blocking mode it would return
-.B EAGAIN
-in this case.
-The
-.BR select (2)
-call may be used to determine when it is possible to send more data.
-.PP
-The
-.I flags
-parameter is a flagword and can contain the following flags:
-.\" XXX document MSG_PROXY
-.TP
-.B MSG_OOB
-Sends
-.I out-of-band
-data on sockets that support this notion (e.g.
-.BR SOCK_STREAM );
-the underlying protocol must also support
-.I out-of-band
-data.
-.TP
-.B MSG_DONTROUTE
-Dont't use a gateway to send out the packet, only send to hosts on
-directly connected networks. This is usually used only
-by diagnostic or routing programs. This is only defined for protocol
-families that route; packet sockets don't.
-.TP
-.B MSG_DONTWAIT
-Enables non-blocking operation; if the operation would block,
-.B EAGAIN
-is returned (this can also be enabled using the
-.B O_NONBLOCK
-with the
-.B F_SETFL
-.BR fcntl (2)).
-.TP
-.B MSG_NOSIGNAL
-Requests not to send
-.B SIGPIPE
-on errors on stream oriented sockets when the other end breaks the
-connection. The
-.B EPIPE
-error is still returned.
-.TP
-.BR MSG_CONFIRM " (Linux 2.3+ only)"
-Tell the link layer that forward process happened: you got a successful
-reply from the other side. If the link layer doesn't get this
-it'll regularly reprobe the neighbour (e.g. via a unicast ARP).
-Only valid on
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-and
-.B SOCK_RAW
-sockets and currently only implemented for IPv4 and IPv6. See
-.BR arp (7)
-for details.
-.PP
-The definition of the
-.I msghdr
-structure follows. See
-.BR recv (2)
-and below for an exact description of its fields.
-.IP
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 17n 33n
-struct msghdr {
- void * msg_name; /* optional address */
- socklen_t msg_namelen; /* size of address */
- struct iovec * msg_iov; /* scatter/gather array */
- size_t msg_iovlen; /* # elements in msg_iov */
- void * msg_control; /* ancillary data, see below */
- socklen_t msg_controllen; /* ancillary data buffer len */
- int msg_flags; /* flags on received message */
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-You may send control information using the
-.I msg_control
-and
-.I msg_controllen
-members. The maximum control buffer length the kernel can process is limited
-per socket by the
-.B net.core.optmem_max
-sysctl; see
-.BR socket (7).
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The calls return the number of characters sent, or \-1
-if an error occurred.
-.SH ERRORS
-These are some standard errors generated by the socket layer. Additional errors
-may be generated and returned from the underlying protocol modules; see their
-respective manual pages.
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-An invalid descriptor was specified.
-.TP
-.B ENOTSOCK
-The argument
-.I s
-is not a socket.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-An invalid user space address was specified for a parameter.
-.TP
-.B EMSGSIZE
-The socket requires that message be sent atomically, and the size
-of the message to be sent made this impossible.
-.TP
-.BR EAGAIN " or " EWOULDBLOCK
-The socket is marked non-blocking and the requested operation
-would block.
-.TP
-.B ENOBUFS
-The output queue for a network interface was full.
-This generally indicates that the interface has stopped sending,
-but may be caused by transient congestion.
-(Normally, this does not occur in Linux. Packets are just silently dropped
-when a device queue overflows.)
-.TP
-.B EINTR
-A signal occurred.
-.TP
-.B ENOMEM
-No memory available.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Invalid argument passed.
-.TP
-.B EPIPE
-The local end has been shut down on a connection oriented socket.
-In this case the process
-will also receive a
-.B SIGPIPE
-unless
-.B MSG_NOSIGNAL
-is set.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-4.4BSD, SVr4, POSIX 1003.1g draft (these function calls appeared in 4.2BSD).
-
-.B MSG_CONFIRM
-is a Linux extension.
-.SH NOTE
-The prototypes given above follow the Single Unix Specification,
-as glibc2 also does; the
-.I flags
-argument was `int' in BSD 4.*, but `unsigned int' in libc4 and libc5;
-the
-.I len
-argument was `int' in BSD 4.* and libc4, but `size_t' in libc5;
-the
-.I tolen
-argument was `int' in BSD 4.* and libc4 and libc5.
-See also
-.BR accept (2).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR fcntl (2),
-.BR recv (2),
-.BR select (2),
-.BR getsockopt (2),
-.BR sendfile (2),
-.BR socket (2),
-.BR write (2),
-.BR socket (7),
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR tcp (7),
-.BR udp (7)
diff --git a/raw/man2/write.2 b/raw/man2/write.2
deleted file mode 100644
index 0dd0b7f..0000000
--- a/raw/man2/write.2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,127 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" This manpage is Copyright (C) 1992 Drew Eckhardt;
-.\" 1993 Michael Haardt, Ian Jackson.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 13:35:59 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Sun Nov 28 17:19:01 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Sat Jan 13 12:58:08 1996 by Michael Haardt
-.\" <michael at cantor.informatik.rwth-aachen.de>
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 21 18:59:33 1996 by Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>
-.\" 2001-12-13 added remark by Zack Weinberg
-.\"
-.TH WRITE 2 2001-12-13 "Linux 2.0.32" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-write \- write to a file descriptor
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <unistd.h>
-.sp
-.BI "ssize_t write(int " fd ", const void *" buf ", size_t " count );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B write
-writes up to
-.I count
-bytes to the file referenced by the file descriptor
-.I fd
-from the buffer starting at
-.IR buf .
-POSIX requires that a \fBread()\fP which can be proved to occur after a
-\fBwrite()\fP has returned returns the new data. Note that not all file
-systems are POSIX conforming.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success, the number of bytes written are returned (zero indicates
-nothing was written). On error, \-1 is returned, and \fIerrno\fP is set
-appropriately. If \fIcount\fP is zero and the file descriptor refers to
-a regular file, 0 will be returned without causing any other effect.
-For a special file, the results are not portable.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-.I fd
-is not a valid file descriptor or is not open for writing.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-.I fd
-is attached to an object which is unsuitable for writing.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-.I buf
-is outside your accessible address space.
-.TP
-.B EFBIG
-An attempt was made to write a file that exceeds the implementation-defined
-maximum file size or the process' file size limit, or to write at a position
-past than the maximum allowed offset.
-.TP
-.B EPIPE
-.I fd
-is connected to a pipe or socket whose reading end is closed. When this
-happens the writing process will also receive a
-.B SIGPIPE
-signal.
-(Thus, the write return value is seen only if the program
-catches, blocks or ignores this signal.)
-.TP
-.B EAGAIN
-Non-blocking I/O has been selected using
-.B O_NONBLOCK
-and the write would block.
-.TP
-.B EINTR
-The call was interrupted by a signal before any data was written.
-.TP
-.B ENOSPC
-The device containing the file referred to by
-.I fd
-has no room for the data.
-.TP
-.B EIO
-A low-level I/O error occurred while modifying the inode.
-.PP
-Other errors may occur, depending on the object connected to
-.IR fd .
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVr4, SVID, POSIX, X/OPEN, 4.3BSD. SVr4 documents additional error
-conditions EDEADLK, ENOLCK, ENOLNK, ENOSR, ENXIO, or ERANGE.
-Under SVr4 a write may be interrupted and return EINTR at any point,
-not just before any data is written.
-.SH NOTES
-A successful return from
-.B write
-does not make any guarantee that data has been committed to disk.
-In fact, on some buggy implementations, it does not even guarantee
-that space has successfully been reserved for the data.
-The only way to be sure is to call
-.BR fsync (2)
-after you are done writing all your data.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR close (2),
-.BR fcntl (2),
-.BR fsync (2),
-.BR ioctl (2),
-.BR lseek (2),
-.BR open (2),
-.BR read (2),
-.BR select (2),
-.BR fwrite (3),
-.BR writev (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/Object.3 b/raw/man3/Object.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 449f2cc..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/Object.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,568 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH Tcl_Obj 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DuplicateObj, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IsShared, Tcl_InvalidateStringRep \- manipulate Tcl objects
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
-.sp
-Tcl_Obj *
-\fBTcl_NewObj\fR()
-.sp
-Tcl_Obj *
-\fBTcl_DuplicateObj\fR(\fIobjPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTcl_IncrRefCount\fR(\fIobjPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTcl_DecrRefCount\fR(\fIobjPtr\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTcl_IsShared\fR(\fIobjPtr\fR)
-.sp
-\fBTcl_InvalidateStringRep\fR(\fIobjPtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
-Points to an object;
-must have been the result of a previous call to \fBTcl_NewObj\fR.
-.BE
-
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-This man page presents an overview of Tcl objects and how they are used.
-It also describes generic procedures for managing Tcl objects.
-These procedures are used to create and copy objects,
-and increment and decrement the count of references (pointers) to objects.
-The procedures are used in conjunction with ones
-that operate on specific types of objects such as
-\fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and \fBTcl_ListObjAppendElement\fR.
-The individual procedures are described along with the data structures
-they manipulate.
-.PP
-Tcl's \fIdual-ported\fR objects provide a general-purpose mechanism
-for storing and exchanging Tcl values.
-They largely replace the use of strings in Tcl.
-For example, they are used to store variable values,
-command arguments, command results, and scripts.
-Tcl objects behave like strings but also hold an internal representation
-that can be manipulated more efficiently.
-For example, a Tcl list is now represented as an object
-that holds the list's string representation
-as well as an array of pointers to the objects for each list element.
-Dual-ported objects avoid most runtime type conversions.
-They also improve the speed of many operations
-since an appropriate representation is immediately available.
-The compiler itself uses Tcl objects to
-cache the instruction bytecodes resulting from compiling scripts.
-.PP
-The two representations are a cache of each other and are computed lazily.
-That is, each representation is only computed when necessary,
-it is computed from the other representation,
-and, once computed, it is saved.
-In addition, a change in one representation invalidates the other one.
-As an example, a Tcl program doing integer calculations can
-operate directly on a variable's internal machine integer
-representation without having to constantly convert
-between integers and strings.
-Only when it needs a string representing the variable's value,
-say to print it,
-will the program regenerate the string representation from the integer.
-Although objects contain an internal representation,
-their semantics are defined in terms of strings:
-an up-to-date string can always be obtained,
-and any change to the object will be reflected in that string
-when the object's string representation is fetched.
-Because of this representation invalidation and regeneration,
-it is dangerous for extension writers to access
-\fBTcl_Obj\fR fields directly.
-It is better to access Tcl_Obj information using
-procedures like \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR and \fBTcl_GetString\fR.
-.PP
-Objects are allocated on the heap
-and are referenced using a pointer to their \fBTcl_Obj\fR structure.
-Objects are shared as much as possible.
-This significantly reduces storage requirements
-because some objects such as long lists are very large.
-Also, most Tcl values are only read and never modified.
-This is especially true for procedure arguments,
-which can be shared between the caller and the called procedure.
-Assignment and argument binding is done by
-simply assigning a pointer to the value.
-Reference counting is used to determine when it is safe to
-reclaim an object's storage.
-.PP
-Tcl objects are typed.
-An object's internal representation is controlled by its type.
-Seven types are predefined in the Tcl core
-including integer, double, list, and bytecode.
-Extension writers can extend the set of types
-by using the procedure \fBTcl_RegisterObjType\fR .
-
-.SH "THE TCL_OBJ STRUCTURE"
-.PP
-Each Tcl object is represented by a \fBTcl_Obj\fR structure
-which is defined as follows.
-.CS
-typedef struct Tcl_Obj {
- int \fIrefCount\fR;
- char *\fIbytes\fR;
- int \fIlength\fR;
- Tcl_ObjType *\fItypePtr\fR;
- union {
- long \fIlongValue\fR;
- double \fIdoubleValue\fR;
- VOID *\fIotherValuePtr\fR;
- struct {
- VOID *\fIptr1\fR;
- VOID *\fIptr2\fR;
- } \fItwoPtrValue\fR;
- } \fIinternalRep\fR;
-} Tcl_Obj;
-.CE
-The \fIbytes\fR and the \fIlength\fR members together hold
-an object's string representation,
-which is a \fIcounted\fR or \fIbinary string\fR
-that may contain binary data with embedded null bytes.
-\fIbytes\fR points to the first byte of the string representation.
-The \fIlength\fR member gives the number of bytes.
-The byte array must always have a null after the last byte,
-at offset \fIlength\fR;
-this allows string representations that do not contain nulls
-to be treated as conventional null-terminated C strings.
-C programs use \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR and \fBTcl_GetString\fR to get
-an object's string representation.
-If \fIbytes\fR is NULL,
-the string representation is invalid.
-.PP
-An object's type manages its internal representation.
-The member \fItypePtr\fR points to the Tcl_ObjType structure
-that describes the type.
-If \fItypePtr\fR is NULL,
-the internal representation is invalid.
-.PP
-The \fIinternalRep\fR union member holds
-an object's internal representation.
-This is either a (long) integer, a double-precision floating point number,
-a pointer to a value containing additional information
-needed by the object's type to represent the object,
-or two arbitrary pointers.
-.PP
-The \fIrefCount\fR member is used to tell when it is safe to free
-an object's storage.
-It holds the count of active references to the object.
-Maintaining the correct reference count is a key responsibility
-of extension writers.
-Reference counting is discussed below
-in the section \fBSTORAGE MANAGEMENT OF OBJECTS\fR.
-.PP
-Although extension writers can directly access
-the members of a Tcl_Obj structure,
-it is much better to use the appropriate procedures and macros.
-For example, extension writers should never
-read or update \fIrefCount\fR directly;
-they should use macros such as
-\fBTcl_IncrRefCount\fR and \fBTcl_IsShared\fR instead.
-.PP
-A key property of Tcl objects is that they hold two representations.
-An object typically starts out containing only a string representation:
-it is untyped and has a NULL \fItypePtr\fR.
-An object containing an empty string or a copy of a specified string
-is created using \fBTcl_NewObj\fR or \fBTcl_NewStringObj\fR respectively.
-An object's string value is gotten with
-\fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR or \fBTcl_GetString\fR
-and changed with \fBTcl_SetStringObj\fR.
-If the object is later passed to a procedure like \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR
-that requires a specific internal representation,
-the procedure will create one and set the object's \fItypePtr\fR.
-The internal representation is computed from the string representation.
-An object's two representations are duals of each other:
-changes made to one are reflected in the other.
-For example, \fBTcl_ListObjReplace\fR will modify an object's
-internal representation and the next call to \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR
-or \fBTcl_GetString\fR will reflect that change.
-.PP
-Representations are recomputed lazily for efficiency.
-A change to one representation made by a procedure
-such as \fBTcl_ListObjReplace\fR is not reflected immediately
-in the other representation.
-Instead, the other representation is marked invalid
-so that it is only regenerated if it is needed later.
-Most C programmers never have to be concerned with how this is done
-and simply use procedures such as \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR or
-\fBTcl_ListObjIndex\fR.
-Programmers that implement their own object types
-must check for invalid representations
-and mark representations invalid when necessary.
-The procedure \fBTcl_InvalidateStringRep\fR is used
-to mark an object's string representation invalid and to
-free any storage associated with the old string representation.
-.PP
-Objects usually remain one type over their life,
-but occasionally an object must be converted from one type to another.
-For example, a C program might build up a string in an object
-with repeated calls to \fBTcl_AppendToObj\fR,
-and then call \fBTcl_ListObjIndex\fR to extract a list element from
-the object.
-The same object holding the same string value
-can have several different internal representations
-at different times.
-Extension writers can also force an object to be converted from one type
-to another using the \fBTcl_ConvertToType\fR procedure.
-Only programmers that create new object types need to be concerned
-about how this is done.
-A procedure defined as part of the object type's implementation
-creates a new internal representation for an object
-and changes its \fItypePtr\fR.
-See the man page for \fBTcl_RegisterObjType\fR
-to see how to create a new object type.
-
-.SH "EXAMPLE OF THE LIFETIME OF AN OBJECT"
-.PP
-As an example of the lifetime of an object,
-consider the following sequence of commands:
-.CS
-\fBset x 123\fR
-.CE
-This assigns to \fIx\fR an untyped object whose
-\fIbytes\fR member points to \fB123\fR and \fIlength\fR member contains 3.
-The object's \fItypePtr\fR member is NULL.
-.CS
-\fBputs "x is $x"\fR
-.CE
-\fIx\fR's string representation is valid (since \fIbytes\fR is non-NULL)
-and is fetched for the command.
-.CS
-\fBincr x\fR
-.CE
-The \fBincr\fR command first gets an integer from \fIx\fR's object
-by calling \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR.
-This procedure checks whether the object is already an integer object.
-Since it is not, it converts the object
-by setting the object's \fIinternalRep.longValue\fR member
-to the integer \fB123\fR
-and setting the object's \fItypePtr\fR
-to point to the integer Tcl_ObjType structure.
-Both representations are now valid.
-\fBincr\fR increments the object's integer internal representation
-then invalidates its string representation
-(by calling \fBTcl_InvalidateStringRep\fR)
-since the string representation
-no longer corresponds to the internal representation.
-.CS
-\fBputs "x is now $x"\fR
-.CE
-The string representation of \fIx\fR's object is needed
-and is recomputed.
-The string representation is now \fB124\fR.
-and both representations are again valid.
-
-.SH "STORAGE MANAGEMENT OF OBJECTS"
-.PP
-Tcl objects are allocated on the heap and are shared as much as possible
-to reduce storage requirements.
-Reference counting is used to determine when an object is
-no longer needed and can safely be freed.
-An object just created by \fBTcl_NewObj\fR or \fBTcl_NewStringObj\fR
-has \fIrefCount\fR 0.
-The macro \fBTcl_IncrRefCount\fR increments the reference count
-when a new reference to the object is created.
-The macro \fBTcl_DecrRefCount\fR decrements the count
-when a reference is no longer needed and,
-if the object's reference count drops to zero, frees its storage.
-An object shared by different code or data structures has
-\fIrefCount\fR greater than 1.
-Incrementing an object's reference count ensures that
-it won't be freed too early or have its value change accidently.
-.PP
-As an example, the bytecode interpreter shares argument objects
-between calling and called Tcl procedures to avoid having to copy objects.
-It assigns the call's argument objects to the procedure's
-formal parameter variables.
-In doing so, it calls \fBTcl_IncrRefCount\fR to increment
-the reference count of each argument since there is now a new
-reference to it from the formal parameter.
-When the called procedure returns,
-the interpreter calls \fBTcl_DecrRefCount\fR to decrement
-each argument's reference count.
-When an object's reference count drops less than or equal to zero,
-\fBTcl_DecrRefCount\fR reclaims its storage.
-Most command procedures do not have to be concerned about
-reference counting since they use an object's value immediately
-and don't retain a pointer to the object after they return.
-However, if they do retain a pointer to an object in a data structure,
-they must be careful to increment its reference count
-since the retained pointer is a new reference.
-.PP
-Command procedures that directly modify objects
-such as those for \fBlappend\fR and \fBlinsert\fR must be careful to
-copy a shared object before changing it.
-They must first check whether the object is shared
-by calling \fBTcl_IsShared\fR.
-If the object is shared they must copy the object
-by using \fBTcl_DuplicateObj\fR;
-this returns a new duplicate of the original object
-that has \fIrefCount\fR 0.
-If the object is not shared,
-the command procedure "owns" the object and can safely modify it directly.
-For example, the following code appears in the command procedure
-that implements \fBlinsert\fR.
-This procedure modifies the list object passed to it in \fIobjv[1]\fR
-by inserting \fIobjc-3\fR new elements before \fIindex\fR.
-.CS
-listPtr = objv[1];
-if (Tcl_IsShared(listPtr)) {
- listPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(listPtr);
-}
-result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, index, 0, (objc-3), &(objv[3]));
-.CE
-As another example, \fBincr\fR's command procedure
-must check whether the variable's object is shared before
-incrementing the integer in its internal representation.
-If it is shared, it needs to duplicate the object
-in order to avoid accidently changing values in other data structures.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tcl_ConvertToType, Tcl_GetIntFromObj, Tcl_ListObjAppendElement, Tcl_ListObjIndex, Tcl_ListObjReplace, Tcl_RegisterObjType
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-internal representation, object, object creation, object type, reference counting, string representation, type conversion
diff --git a/raw/man3/basename.3 b/raw/man3/basename.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3d44094..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/basename.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,135 +0,0 @@
-.\" (c) 2000 by Michael Kerrisk (michael.kerrisk at gmx.net)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\" License.
-.\" Created, 14 Dec 2000 by Michael Kerrisk
-.\"
-.TH DIRNAME 3 2000-12-14 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-dirname, basename \- Parse pathname components
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <libgen.h>
-.sp
-.BI "char *dirname(char *" path );
-.nl
-.BI "char *basename(char *" path );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The functions
-.B dirname
-and
-.B basename
-break a null-terminated pathname string into directory
-and filename components.
-In the usual case,
-.B dirname
-returns the string up to, but not including, the final '/', and
-.B basename
-returns the component following the final '/'.
-Trailing '/' characters are not counted as part of the pathname.
-.PP
-If
-.I path
-does not contain a slash,
-.B dirname
-returns the string "." while
-.B basename
-returns a copy of
-.IR path .
-If
-.I path
-is the string "/", then both
-.B dirname
-and
-.B basename
-return the string "/".
-If
-.I path
-is a NULL pointer or points to an empty string, then both
-.B dirname
-and
-.B basename
-return the string ".".
-.PP
-Concatenating the string returned by
-.BR dirname ,
-a "/", and the string returned by
-.B basename
-yields a complete pathname.
-.PP
-Both
-.B dirname
-and
-.B basename
-may modify the contents of
-.IR path ,
-so if you need to preserve the pathname string,
-copies should be passed to these functions. Furthermore,
-.B dirname
-and
-.B basename
-may return pointers to statically allocated memory
-which may be overwritten by subsequent calls.
-.PP
-The following list of examples (taken from SUSv2)
-shows the strings returned by
-.B dirname
-and
-.B basename
-for different paths:
-.sp
-.nf
-.B
-path dirname basename
-"/usr/lib" "/usr" "lib"
-"/usr/" "/" "usr"
-"usr" "." "usr"
-"/" "/" "/"
-"." "." "."
-".." "." ".."
-.fi
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.nf
-char *dirc, *basec, *bname, *dname;
-char *path = "/etc/passwd";
-
-dirc = strdup(path);
-basec = strdup(path);
-dname = dirname(dirc);
-bname = basename(basec);
-printf("dirname=%s, basename=%s\\n", dname, bname);
-free(dirc);
-free(basec);
-.fi
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-Both
-.B dirname
-and
-.B basename
-return pointers to null-terminated strings.
-.SH BUGS
-In versions of glibc up to and including 2.2.1,
-.B dirname
-does not correctly handle pathnames with trailing '/' characters,
-and generates a segmentation violation if given a NULL argument.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SUSv2
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR dirname (1),
-.BR basename (1),
diff --git a/raw/man3/bindtextdomain.3 b/raw/man3/bindtextdomain.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3de1252..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/bindtextdomain.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) Bruno Haible <haible at clisp.cons.org>
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" References consulted:
-.\" GNU glibc-2 source code and manual
-.\" GNU gettext source code and manual
-.\" LI18NUX 2000 Globalization Specification
-.\"
-.TH BINDTEXTDOMAIN 3 "May 2001" "GNU gettext 0.12.1"
-.SH NAME
-bindtextdomain \- set directory containing message catalogs
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <libintl.h>
-.sp
-.BI "char * bindtextdomain (const char * " domainname ", const char * " dirname );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBbindtextdomain\fP function sets the base directory of the hierarchy
-containing message catalogs for a given message domain.
-.PP
-A message domain is a set of translatable \fImsgid\fP messages. Usually,
-every software package has its own message domain. The need for calling
-\fBbindtextdomain\fP arises because packages are not always installed with
-the same prefix as the <libintl.h> header and the libc/libintl libraries.
-.PP
-Message catalogs will be expected at the pathnames
-\fIdirname\fP/\fIlocale\fP/\fIcategory\fP/\fIdomainname\fP.mo,
-where \fIlocale\fP is a locale name and \fIcategory\fP is a locale facet such
-as \fBLC_MESSAGES\fP.
-.PP
-\fIdomainname\fP must be a non-empty string.
-.PP
-If \fIdirname\fP is not NULL, the base directory for message catalogs belonging
-to domain \fIdomainname\fP is set to \fIdirname\fP. The function makes copies
-of the argument strings as needed. If the program wishes to call the
-\fBchdir\fP function, it is important that \fIdirname\fP be an absolute
-pathname; otherwise it cannot be guaranteed that the message catalogs will
-be found.
-.PP
-If \fIdirname\fP is NULL, the function returns the previously set base
-directory for domain \fIdomainname\fP.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-If successful, the \fBbindtextdomain\fP function returns the current base
-directory for domain \fIdomainname\fP, after possibly changing it. The
-resulting string is valid until the next \fBbindtextdomain\fP call for the
-same \fIdomainname\fP and must not be modified or freed. If a memory allocation
-failure occurs, it sets \fBerrno\fP to \fBENOMEM\fP and returns NULL.
-.SH ERRORS
-The following error can occur, among others:
-.TP
-.B ENOMEM
-Not enough memory available.
-.SH BUGS
-The return type ought to be \fBconst char *\fP, but is \fBchar *\fP to avoid
-warnings in C code predating ANSI C.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR gettext (3),
-.BR dgettext (3),
-.BR dcgettext (3),
-.BR ngettext (3),
-.BR dngettext (3),
-.BR dcngettext (3),
-.BR textdomain (3),
-.BR realpath (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/bzero.3 b/raw/man3/bzero.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 8839cc6..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/bzero.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1993 David Metcalfe (david at prism.demon.co.uk)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" References consulted:
-.\" Linux libc source code
-.\" Lewine's _POSIX Programmer's Guide_ (O'Reilly & Associates, 1991)
-.\" 386BSD man pages
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 21:28:17 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Tue Oct 22 23:49:37 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.TH BZERO 3 2002-12-31 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-bzero \- write zero bytes
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <strings.h>
-.sp
-.BI "void bzero(void *" s ", size_t " n );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B bzero()
-function sets the first
-.I n
-bytes of the byte area starting at
-.I s
-to zero.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-None.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-4.3BSD. This function is deprecated -- use
-.BR memset
-in new programs.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR memset (3),
-.BR swab (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/clearerr.3 b/raw/man3/clearerr.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a95cca..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/clearerr.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/ferror.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/exec.3 b/raw/man3/exec.3
deleted file mode 100644
index b820bc9..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/exec.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)exec.3 6.4 (Berkeley) 4/19/91
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 11:12:48 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Updated more for Linux, Tue Jul 15 11:54:18 1997, pacman at cqc.com
-.\"
-.TH EXEC 3 1993-11-29 "BSD MANPAGE" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-execl, execlp, execle, execv, execvp \- execute a file
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <unistd.h>
-.sp
-.B extern char **environ;
-.sp
-.BI "int execl(const char *" path ", const char *" arg ", ...);"
-.br
-.BI "int execlp(const char *" file ", const char *" arg ", ...);"
-.br
-.BI "int execle(const char *" path ", const char *" arg
-.BI ", ..., char * const " envp "[]);"
-.br
-.BI "int execv(const char *" path ", char *const " argv "[]);"
-.br
-.BI "int execvp(const char *" file ", char *const " argv "[]);"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B exec
-family of functions replaces the current process image with a new process
-image. The functions described in this manual page are front-ends for the
-function
-.BR execve (2).
-(See the manual page for
-.B execve
-for detailed information about the replacement of the current process.)
-.PP
-The initial argument for these functions is the pathname of a file which is
-to be executed.
-.PP
-The
-.I "const char *arg"
-and subsequent ellipses in the
-.BR execl ,
-.BR execlp ,
-and
-.B execle
-functions can be thought of as
-.IR arg0 ,
-.IR arg1 ,
-\&...,
-.IR argn .
-Together they describe a list of one or more pointers to null-terminated
-strings that represent the argument list available to the executed program.
-The first argument, by convention, should point to the file name associated
-with the file being executed. The list of arguments
-.I must
-be terminated by a
-.B NULL
-pointer.
-.PP
-The
-.B execv
-and
-.B execvp
-functions provide an array of pointers to null-terminated strings that
-represent the argument list available to the new program. The first
-argument, by convention, should point to the file name associated with the
-file being executed. The array of pointers
-.I must
-be terminated by a
-.B NULL
-pointer.
-.PP
-The
-.B execle
-function also specifies the environment of the executed process by following
-the
-.B NULL
-pointer that terminates the list of arguments in the parameter list or the
-pointer to the argv array with an additional parameter. This additional
-parameter is an array of pointers to null-terminated strings and
-.I must
-be terminated by a
-.B NULL
-pointer. The other functions take the environment for the new process
-image from the external variable
-.I environ
-in the current process.
-.PP
-Some of these functions have special semantics.
-.PP
-The functions
-.B execlp
-and
-.B execvp
-will duplicate the actions of the shell in searching for an executable file
-if the specified file name does not contain a slash (/) character. The
-search path is the path specified in the environment by the
-.B PATH
-variable. If this variable isn't specified, the default path
-``:/bin:/usr/bin'' is used. In addition, certain
-errors are treated specially.
-.PP
-If permission is denied for a file (the attempted
-.B execve
-returned
-.BR EACCES ),
-these functions will continue searching the rest of the search path. If no
-other file is found, however, they will return with the global variable
-.I errno
-set to
-.BR EACCES .
-.PP
-If the header of a file isn't recognized (the attempted
-.B execve
-returned
-.BR ENOEXEC ),
-these functions will execute the shell with the path of the file as its
-first argument. (If this attempt fails, no further searching is done.)
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-If any of the
-.B exec
-functions returns, an error will have occurred. The return value is \-1,
-and the global variable
-.I errno
-will be set to indicate the error.
-.SH FILES
-.I /bin/sh
-.SH ERRORS
-All of these functions may fail and set
-.I errno
-for any of the errors specified for the library function
-.BR execve (2).
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR sh (1),
-.BR execve (2),
-.BR fork (2),
-.BR environ (5),
-.BR ptrace (2)
-.SH COMPATIBILITY
-On some other systems the default path (used when the environment
-does not contain the variable \fBPATH\fR) has the current working
-directory listed after
-.I /bin
-and
-.IR /usr/bin ,
-as an anti-Trojan-horse measure. Linux uses here the
-traditional "current directory first" default path.
-.PP
-The behavior of
-.B execlp
-and
-.B execvp
-when errors occur while attempting to execute the file is historic
-practice, but has not traditionally been documented and is not specified by
-the POSIX standard. BSD (and possibly other systems) do an automatic
-sleep and retry if ETXTBSY is encountered. Linux treats it as a hard
-error and returns immediately.
-.PP
-Traditionally, the functions
-.B execlp
-and
-.B execvp
-ignored all errors except for the ones described above and
-.B ENOMEM
-and
-.BR E2BIG ,
-upon which they returned. They now return if any error other than the ones
-described above occurs.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-.BR execl ,
-.BR execv ,
-.BR execle ,
-.B execlp
-and
-.B execvp
-conform to
-IEEE Std1003.1-88 (``POSIX.1'').
diff --git a/raw/man3/exit.3 b/raw/man3/exit.3
deleted file mode 100644
index bc8ded7..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/exit.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2001 Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.TH EXIT 3 2001-11-17 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-exit \- cause normal program termination
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <stdlib.h>
-.sp
-.BI "void exit(int " status );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBexit()\fP function causes normal program termination and the
-the value of \fIstatus & 0377\fP is returned to the parent
-(see
-.BR wait (2)).
-All functions registered with \fBatexit()\fP and \fBon_exit()\fP
-are called in the reverse order of their registration,
-and all open streams are flushed and closed.
-Files created by \fItmpfile()\fP are removed.
-.LP
-The C standard specifies two defines \fIEXIT_SUCCESS\fP and \fIEXIT_FAILURE\fP
-that may be passed to \fBexit()\fP to indicate successful or unsuccessful
-termination, respectively.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The \fBexit()\fP function does not return.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVID 3, POSIX, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899 (``ANSI C'')
-.SH NOTES
-During the exit processing, it is possible to register additional
-functions with \fBatexit()\fP and \fBon_exit()\fP.
-Always the last-registered function is removed from the chain
-of registered functions, and invoked.
-It is undefined what happens if during this processing
-either \fBexit()\fP or \fBlongjmp()\fP is called.
-.LP
-The use of EXIT_SUCCESS and EXIT_FAILURE is slightly more portable
-(to non-Unix environments) than that of 0 and some nonzero value
-like 1 or \-1. In particular, VMS uses a different convention.
-.LP
-BSD has attempted to standardize exit codes - see the file
-.IR <sysexits.h> .
-.LP
-After \fBexit()\fP, the exit status must be transmitted to the
-parent process. There are three cases. If the parent has set
-SA_NOCLDWAIT, or has set the SIGCHLD handler to SIG_IGN, the
-status is discarded. If the parent was waiting on the child
-it is notified of the exit status. In both cases the exiting
-process dies immediately. If the parent has not indicated that
-it is not interested in the exit status, but is not waiting,
-the exiting process turns into a "zombie" process
-(which is nothing but a container for the single byte representing
-the exit status) so that the parent can learn the exit status when
-it later calls one of the \fIwait()\fP functions.
-.LP
-If the implementation supports the SIGCHLD signal, this signal
-is sent to the parent. If the parent has set SA_NOCLDWAIT,
-it is undefined whether a SIGCHLD signal is sent.
-.LP
-If the process is a session leader and its controlling terminal
-the controlling terminal of the session, then each process in
-the foreground process group of this controlling terminal
-is sent a SIGHUP signal, and the terminal is disassociated
-from this session, allowing it to be acquired by a new controlling
-process.
-.LP
-If the exit of the process causes a process group to become orphaned,
-and if any member of the newly-orphaned process group is stopped,
-then a SIGHUP signal followed by a SIGCONT signal will be
-sent to each process in this process group.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR _exit (2),
-.BR wait (2),
-.BR atexit (3),
-.BR on_exit (3),
-.BR tmpfile (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/fclose.3 b/raw/man3/fclose.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 1cc960a..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/fclose.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Chris Torek and the American National Standards Committee X3,
-.\" on Information Processing Systems.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)fclose.3 6.7 (Berkeley) 6/29/91
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 15:19:14 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\"
-.\" Modified 2000-07-22 by Nicol??s Lichtmaier <nick at debian.org>
-.\"
-.TH FCLOSE 3 1993-11-29 "BSD MANPAGE" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-fclose \- close a stream
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int fclose(FILE *" stream );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B fclose
-function dissociates the named
-.I stream
-from its underlying file or set of functions. If the stream was being used
-for output, any buffered data is written first, using
-.BR fflush (3).
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-Upon successful completion 0 is returned. Otherwise,
-.B EOF
-is returned and the global variable
-.I errno
-is set to indicate the error. In either case any further access
-(including another call to
-.BR fclose "())"
-to the stream results in undefined behaviour.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-The filedescriptor underlying
-.I stream
-is not valid.
-.\" This error cannot occur unless you are mixing ANSI C stdio operations and
-.\" low-level file operations on the same stream. If you do get this error,
-.\" you must have closed the stream's low-level file descriptor using
-.\" something like close(fileno(fp)).
-.PP
-The
-.B fclose
-function may also fail and set
-.I errno
-for any of the errors specified for the routines
-.BR close (2),
-.BR write (2)
-or
-.BR fflush (3).
-.SH NOTES
-Note that
-.B fclose
-only flushes the user space buffers provided by the
-C library. To ensure that the data is physically stored
-on disk the kernel buffers must be flushed too, e.g. with
-.BR sync (2)
-or
-.BR fsync (2).
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The
-.B fclose
-function conforms to ANSI X3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR close (2),
-.BR fcloseall (3),
-.BR fflush (3),
-.BR fopen (3),
-.BR setbuf (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/fcloseall.3 b/raw/man3/fcloseall.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 07eeeee..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/fcloseall.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Chris Torek and the American National Standards Committee X3,
-.\" on Information Processing Systems.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)fclose.3 6.7 (Berkeley) 6/29/91
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 15:19:14 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Modified to be fcloseall(3) by Nicol??s Lichtmaier <nick at debian.org> Fri Apr 10 1998
-.\"
-.TH FCLOSE 3 1998-04-10 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-fcloseall \- close all open streams
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #define _GNU_SOURCE
-.sp
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.B int fcloseall(void);
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B fcloseall
-function dissociates all open streams
-from its underlying file or set of functions. Any buffered output data is
-written first, using
-.BR fflush (3).
-Note that the standard streams (stdin, stdout
-and stderr) are also closed.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-This function always returns 0.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR fclose (3),
-.BR close (2),
-.BR fflush (3),
-.BR fopen (3),
-.BR setbuf (3)
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The
-.B fcloseall
-function is a GNU extension.
diff --git a/raw/man3/fdopen.3 b/raw/man3/fdopen.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a40124..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/fdopen.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/fopen.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/feof.3 b/raw/man3/feof.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a95cca..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/feof.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/ferror.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/ferror.3 b/raw/man3/ferror.3
deleted file mode 100644
index c0fff2d..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/ferror.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Chris Torek and the American National Standards Committee X3,
-.\" on Information Processing Systems.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)ferror.3 6.8 (Berkeley) 6/29/91
-.\"
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 14:24:40 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Added remark on EBADF for fileno, aeb, 2001-03-22
-.\"
-.TH FERROR 3 2001-10-16 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-clearerr, feof, ferror, fileno \- check and reset stream status
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "void clearerr(FILE *" stream );
-.br
-.BI "int feof(FILE *" stream );
-.br
-.BI "int ferror(FILE *" stream );
-.br
-.BI "int fileno(FILE *" stream );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The function
-.B clearerr
-clears the end-of-file and error indicators for the stream pointed to by
-.IR stream .
-.PP
-The function
-.B feof
-tests the end-of-file indicator for the stream pointed to by
-.IR stream ,
-returning non-zero if it is set. The end-of-file indicator can only be
-cleared by the function
-.BR clearerr .
-.PP
-The function
-.B ferror
-tests the error indicator for the stream pointed to by
-.IR stream ,
-returning non-zero if it is set. The error indicator can only be reset by
-the
-.B clearerr
-function.
-.PP
-The function
-.B fileno
-examines the argument
-.I stream
-and returns its integer descriptor.
-.PP
-For non-locking counterparts, see
-.BR unlocked_stdio (3).
-.SH ERRORS
-These functions should not fail and do not set the external variable
-.IR errno .
-(However, in case
-.B fileno
-detects that its argument is not a valid stream, it must
-return \-1 and set
-.I errno
-to
-.BR EBADF .)
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The functions
-.BR clearerr ,
-.BR feof ,
-and
-.BR ferror
-conform to X3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR open (2),
-.BR unlocked_stdio (3),
-.BR stdio (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/fflush.3 b/raw/man3/fflush.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 159cb51..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/fflush.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Chris Torek and the American National Standards Committee X3,
-.\" on Information Processing Systems.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)fflush.3 5.4 (Berkeley) 6/29/91
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 15:22:01 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\"
-.\" Modified 2000-07-22 by Nicol??s Lichtmaier <nick at debian.org>
-.\" Modified 2001-10-16 by John Levon <moz at compsoc.man.ac.uk>
-.\"
-.TH FFLUSH 3 1993-11-29 "BSD MANPAGE" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-fflush \- flush a stream
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int fflush(FILE *" stream );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The function
-.B fflush
-forces a write of all user-space buffered data for the given output or update
-.I stream
-via the stream's underlying write function. The open status of the stream
-is unaffected.
-.PP
-If the
-.I stream
-argument is
-.BR NULL ,
-.B fflush
-flushes
-.I all
-open output streams.
-.PP
-For a non-locking counterpart, see
-.BR unlocked_stdio (3).
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-Upon successful completion 0 is returned. Otherwise,
-.B EOF
-is returned and the global variable
-.I errno
-is set to indicate the error.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EBADF
-.I Stream
-is not an open stream, or is not open for writing.
-.PP
-The function
-.B fflush
-may also fail and set
-.I errno
-for any of the errors specified for the routine
-.BR write (2).
-.SH NOTES
-Note that
-.B fflush()
-only flushes the user space buffers provided by the C library.
-To ensure that the data is physically stored on disk
-the kernel buffers must be flushed too, e.g. with
-.BR sync (2)
-or
-.BR fsync (2).
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The function
-.BR fflush()
-conforms to ANSI X3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR fsync (2),
-.BR sync (2),
-.BR write (2),
-.BR fclose (3),
-.BR fopen (3),
-.BR setbuf (3),
-.BR unlocked_stdio (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/fileno.3 b/raw/man3/fileno.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a95cca..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/fileno.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/ferror.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/flockfile.3 b/raw/man3/flockfile.3
deleted file mode 100644
index fd736a5..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/flockfile.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2001 Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.TH LOCKFILE 3 2001-10-18 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-flockfile, ftrylockfile, funlockfile \- lock FILE for stdio
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "void flockfile(FILE *" filehandle );
-.br
-.BI "int ftrylockfile(FILE *" filehandle );
-.br
-.BI "void funlockfile(FILE *" filehandle );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The stdio functions are thread-safe. This is achieved by assigning
-to each FILE object a lockcount and (if the lockcount is nonzero)
-an owning thread.
-For each library call, these functions wait until the FILE object
-is no longer locked by a different thread, then lock it, do the
-requested I/O, and unlock the object again.
-.LP
-(Note: this locking has nothing to do with the file locking done
-by functions like
-.BR flock (2)
-and
-.BR lockf (3).)
-.LP
-All this is invisible to the C-programmer, but there may be two
-reasons to wish for more detailed control. On the one hand, maybe
-a series of I/O actions by one thread belongs together, and should
-not be interrupted by the I/O of some other thread.
-On the other hand, maybe the locking overhead should be avoided
-for greater efficiency.
-.LP
-To this end, a thread can explicitly lock the FILE object,
-then do its series of I/O actions, then unlock. This prevents
-other threads from coming in between. If the reason for doing
-this was to achieve greater efficiency, one does the I/O with
-the non-locking versions of the stdio functions: with
-\fIgetc_unlocked\fP() and \fIputc_unlocked\fP() instead of
-\fIgetc\fP() and \fIputc\fP().
-.LP
-The \fBflockfile()\fP function waits for *\fIfilehandle\fP to be
-no longer locked by a different thread, then makes the
-current thread owner of *\fIfilehandle\fP, and increments
-the lockcount.
-.LP
-The \fBfunlockfile()\fP function decrements the lock count.
-.LP
-The \fBftrylockfile()\fP function is a non-blocking version
-of \fBflockfile()\fP. It does nothing in case some other thread
-owns *\fIfilehandle\fP, and it obtains ownership and increments
-the lockcount otherwise.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The \fBftrylockfile()\fP function returns zero for success
-(the lock was obtained), and nonzero for failure.
-.SH ERRORS
-None.
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-These functions are available when _POSIX_THREAD_SAFE_FUNCTIONS
-is defined. They are in libc since libc 5.1.1 and in glibc
-since glibc 2.0.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-POSIX.1
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR unlocked_stdio (3)
-
diff --git a/raw/man3/fopen.3 b/raw/man3/fopen.3
deleted file mode 100644
index e9da6d5..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/fopen.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,236 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" Chris Torek and the American National Standards Committee X3,
-.\" on Information Processing Systems.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)fopen.3 6.8 (Berkeley) 6/29/91
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 15:22:01 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Modified, aeb, 960421, 970806
-.\" Modified, joey, aeb, 2002-01-03
-.\"
-.TH FOPEN 3 2002-01-03 "BSD MANPAGE" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-fopen, fdopen, freopen \- stream open functions
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "FILE *fopen(const char *" path ", const char *" mode );
-.br
-.BI "FILE *fdopen(int " fildes ", const char *" mode );
-.br
-.BI "FILE *freopen(const char *" path ", const char *" mode ", FILE *" stream );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B fopen
-function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by
-.I path
-and associates a stream with it.
-.PP
-The argument
-.I mode
-points to a string beginning with one of the following sequences
-(Additional characters may follow these sequences.):
-.TP
-.B r
-Open text file for reading. The stream is positioned at the beginning of
-the file.
-.TP
-.B r+
-Open for reading and writing. The stream is positioned at the beginning of
-the file.
-.TP
-.B w
-Truncate file to zero length or create text file for writing. The stream
-is positioned at the beginning of the file.
-.TP
-.B w+
-Open for reading and writing. The file is created if it does not exist,
-otherwise it is truncated. The stream is positioned at the beginning of
-the file.
-.TP
-.B a
-Open for appending (writing at end of file). The file is created
-if it does not exist. The stream is positioned at the end of the file.
-.TP
-.B a+
-Open for reading and appending (writing at end of file). The file
-is created if it does not exist.
-The initial file position for reading is at the beginning of the file,
-but output is always appended to the end of the file.
-.PP
-The
-.I mode
-string can also include the letter ``b'' either as a last character or as
-a character between the characters in any of the two-character strings
-described above. This is strictly for compatibility with ANSI X3.159-1989
-(``ANSI C'') and has no effect; the ``b'' is ignored on all POSIX
-conforming systems, including Linux.
-(Other systems may treat text files and binary files differently,
-and adding the ``b'' may be a good idea if you do I/O to a binary
-file and expect that your program may be ported to non-Unix
-environments.)
-.PP
-Any created files will have mode
-.BR S_IRUSR \&| S_IWUSR \&| S_IRGRP \&| S_IWGRP \&| S_IROTH \&| S_IWOTH
-(0666), as modified by the process' umask value (see
-.BR umask (2)).
-.PP
-Reads and writes may be intermixed on read/write streams in any order.
-Note that ANSI C requires that a file positioning function intervene
-between output and input, unless an input operation encounters end-of-file.
-(If this condition is not met, then a read is allowed to return the
-result of writes other than the most recent.)
-Therefore it is good practice (and indeed sometimes necessary
-under Linux) to put an
-.B fseek
-or
-.B fgetpos
-operation between write and read operations on such a stream. This
-operation may be an apparent no-op (as in \fIfseek(..., 0L,
-SEEK_CUR)\fR called for its synchronizing side effect.
-.PP
-Opening a file in append mode (\fBa\fR as the first character of
-.IR mode )
-causes all subsequent write operations to this stream to occur
-at end-of-file, as if preceded by an
-.RS
-fseek(stream,0,SEEK_END);
-.RE
-call.
-.PP
-The
-.B fdopen
-function associates a stream with the existing file descriptor,
-.IR fildes .
-The
-.I mode
-of the stream (one of the values "r", "r+", "w", "w+", "a", "a+")
-must be compatible with the mode of the file descriptor.
-The file position indicator of the new stream is set to that
-belonging to
-.IR fildes ,
-and the error and end-of-file indicators are cleared.
-Modes "w" or "w+" do not cause truncation of the file.
-The file descriptor is not dup'ed, and will be closed when
-the stream created by
-.B fdopen
-is closed.
-The result of applying
-.B fdopen
-to a shared memory object is undefined.
-.PP
-The
-.B freopen
-function opens the file whose name is the string pointed to by
-.I path
-and associates the stream pointed to by
-.I stream
-with it. The original stream (if it exists) is closed. The
-.I mode
-argument is used just as in the
-.B fopen
-function. The primary use of the
-.B freopen
-function is to change the file associated with a standard text stream
-.IR "" ( stderr ", " stdin ", or " stdout ).
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-Upon successful completion
-.BR fopen ,
-.B fdopen
-and
-.B freopen
-return a
-.B FILE
-pointer. Otherwise,
-.B NULL
-is returned and the global variable
-.I errno
-is set to indicate the error.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-The
-.I mode
-provided to
-.BR fopen ,
-.BR fdopen ,
-or
-.B freopen
-was invalid.
-.PP
-The
-.BR fopen ,
-.B fdopen
-and
-.B freopen
-functions may also fail and set
-.I errno
-for any of the errors specified for the routine
-.BR malloc (3).
-.PP
-The
-.B fopen
-function may also fail and set
-.I errno
-for any of the errors specified for the routine
-.BR open (2).
-.PP
-The
-.B fdopen
-function may also fail and set
-.I errno
-for any of the errors specified for the routine
-.BR fcntl (2).
-.PP
-The
-.B freopen
-function may also fail and set
-.I errno
-for any of the errors specified for the routines
-.BR open (2),
-.BR fclose (3)
-and
-.BR fflush (3).
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The
-.B fopen
-and
-.B freopen
-functions conform to ANSI X3.159-1989 (``ANSI C''). The
-.B fdopen
-function conforms to IEEE Std1003.1-1988 (``POSIX.1'').
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR open (2),
-.BR fclose (3),
-.BR fileno (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/freopen.3 b/raw/man3/freopen.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a40124..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/freopen.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/fopen.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/iconv_close.3 b/raw/man3/iconv_close.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b9e4ac..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/iconv_close.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) Bruno Haible <haible at clisp.cons.org>
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" References consulted:
-.\" GNU glibc-2 source code and manual
-.\" OpenGroup's Single Unix specification http://www.UNIX-systems.org/online.html
-.\"
-.TH ICONV_CLOSE 3 1999-11-27 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-iconv_close \- deallocate descriptor for character set conversion
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <iconv.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int iconv_close(iconv_t " cd );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBiconv_close\fP function deallocates a conversion descriptor \fIcd\fP
-previously allocated using \fBiconv_open\fP.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-When successful, the \fBiconv_close\fP function returns 0.
-In case of error, it sets
-.I errno
-and returns \-1.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-UNIX98
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR iconv_open (3),
-.BR iconv (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/iconv_open.3 b/raw/man3/iconv_open.3
deleted file mode 100644
index cb689ca..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/iconv_open.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) Bruno Haible <haible at clisp.cons.org>
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" References consulted:
-.\" GNU glibc-2 source code and manual
-.\" OpenGroup's Single Unix specification http://www.UNIX-systems.org/online.html
-.\"
-.TH ICONV_OPEN 3 1999-11-27 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-iconv_open \- allocate descriptor for character set conversion
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <iconv.h>
-.sp
-.BI "iconv_t iconv_open(const char *" tocode ", const char *" fromcode );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBiconv_open\fP function allocates a conversion descriptor suitable
-for converting byte sequences from character encoding \fIfromcode\fP to
-character encoding \fItocode\fP.
-.PP
-The values permitted for \fIfromcode\fP and \fItocode\fP and the supported
-combinations are system dependent. For the GNU C library, the permitted
-values are listed by the \fBiconv --list\fP command, and all combinations
-of the listed values are supported.
-.PP
-The resulting conversion descriptor can be used with \fBiconv\fP any number
-of times. It remains valid until deallocated using \fBiconv_close\fP.
-.PP
-A conversion descriptor contains a conversion state. After creation using
-\fBiconv_open\fP, the state is in the initial state. Using \fBiconv\fP
-modifies the descriptor's conversion state. (This implies that a conversion
-descriptor can not be used in multiple threads simultaneously.) To bring the
-state back to the initial state, use \fBiconv\fP with NULL as \fIinbuf\fP
-argument.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The \fBiconv_open\fP function returns a freshly allocated conversion
-descriptor. In case of error, it sets \fBerrno\fP and returns (iconv_t)(-1).
-.SH ERRORS
-The following error can occur, among others:
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-The conversion from \fIfromcode\fP to \fItocode\fP is not supported by the
-implementation.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-UNIX98
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR iconv (3),
-.BR iconv_close (3),
-.BR iconv (1)
diff --git a/raw/man3/setbuf.3 b/raw/man3/setbuf.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 5c58a43..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/setbuf.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991 Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by
-.\" the American National Standards Committee X3, on Information
-.\" Processing Systems.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)setbuf.3 6.10 (Berkeley) 6/29/91
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 14:55:24 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Added section to BUGS, Sun Mar 12 22:28:33 MET 1995,
-.\" Thomas.Koenig at ciw.uni-karlsruhe.de
-.\" Correction, Sun, 11 Apr 1999 15:55:18,
-.\" Martin Vicente <martin at netadmin.dgac.fr>
-.\" Correction, 2000-03-03, Andreas Jaeger <aj at suse.de>
-.\" Added return value for setvbuf, aeb,
-.\"
-.TH SETBUF 3 2001-06-09 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-setbuf, setbuffer, setlinebuf, setvbuf \- stream buffering operations
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.na
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "void setbuf(FILE *" stream ", char *" buf );
-.br
-.BI "void setbuffer(FILE *" stream ", char *" buf ", size_t " size );
-.br
-.BI "void setlinebuf(FILE *" stream );
-.br
-.BI "int setvbuf(FILE *" stream ", char *" buf ", int " mode
-.BI ", size_t " size );
-.ad
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The three types of buffering available are unbuffered, block buffered, and
-line buffered. When an output stream is unbuffered, information appears on
-the destination file or terminal as soon as written; when it is block
-buffered many characters are saved up and written as a block; when it is
-line buffered characters are saved up until a newline is output or input is
-read from any stream attached to a terminal device (typically stdin). The
-function
-.BR fflush (3)
-may be used to force the block out early.
-(See
-.BR fclose (3).)
-Normally all files are block buffered. When the first I/O operation occurs
-on a file,
-.BR malloc (3)
-is called, and a buffer is obtained. If a stream refers to a terminal (as
-.I stdout
-normally does) it is line buffered. The standard error stream
-.I stderr
-is always unbuffered by default.
-.PP
-The
-.B setvbuf
-function may be used on any open stream to change its buffer.
-The
-.I mode
-parameter must be one of the following three macros:
-.RS
-.TP
-.B _IONBF
-unbuffered
-.TP
-.B _IOLBF
-line buffered
-.TP
-.B _IOFBF
-fully buffered
-.RE
-.PP
-Except for unbuffered files, the
-.I buf
-argument should point to a buffer at least
-.I size
-bytes long; this buffer will be used instead of the current buffer. If the
-argument
-.I buf
-is
-.BR NULL ,
-only the mode is affected; a new buffer will be allocated on the next read
-or write operation. The
-.B setvbuf
-function may only be used after opening a stream and before any other
-operations have been performed on it.
-.PP
-The other three calls are, in effect, simply aliases for calls to
-.BR setvbuf .
-The
-.B setbuf
-function is exactly equivalent to the call
-.PP
-.RS
-setvbuf(stream, buf, buf ? _IOFBF : _IONBF, BUFSIZ);
-.RE
-.PP
-The
-.B setbuffer
-function is the same, except that the size of the buffer is up to the
-caller, rather than being determined by the default
-.BR BUFSIZ .
-The
-.B setlinebuf
-function is exactly equivalent to the call:
-.PP
-.RS
-setvbuf(stream, (char *)NULL, _IOLBF, 0);
-.RE
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The function
-.B setvbuf
-returns 0 on success.
-It can return any value on failure, but returns nonzero when
-.I mode
-is invalid or the request cannot be honoured. It may set
-.I errno
-on failure.
-The other functions are void.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The
-.B setbuf
-and
-.B setvbuf
-functions conform to ANSI X3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
-.SH BUGS
-The
-.B setbuffer
-and
-.B setlinebuf
-functions are not portable to versions of BSD before 4.2BSD, and
-are available under Linux since libc 4.5.21. On 4.2BSD and 4.3BSD systems,
-.B setbuf
-always uses a suboptimal buffer size and should be avoided.
-.P
-You must make sure that both
-.I buf
-and the space it points to still exist by the time
-.I stream
-is closed, which also happens at program termination.
-.P
-For example, the following is illegal:
-.nf
-.sp
-#include <stdio.h>
-int main()
-{
- char buf[BUFSIZ];
- setbuf(stdin, buf);
- printf("Hello, world!\\n");
- return 0;
-}
-.fi
-.sp
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR fclose (3),
-.BR fflush (3),
-.BR fopen (3),
-.BR fread (3),
-.BR malloc (3),
-.BR printf (3),
-.BR puts (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/setbuffer.3 b/raw/man3/setbuffer.3
deleted file mode 100644
index dc02d9e..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/setbuffer.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/setbuf.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/setlinebuf.3 b/raw/man3/setlinebuf.3
deleted file mode 100644
index dc02d9e..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/setlinebuf.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/setbuf.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/setlocale.3 b/raw/man3/setlocale.3
deleted file mode 100644
index ad76ee2..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/setlocale.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
-.\" (c) 1993 by Thomas Koenig (ig25 at rz.uni-karlsruhe.de)
-.\" and 1999 by Bruno Haible (haible at clisp.cons.org)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\" License.
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 18:20:12 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Tue Jul 15 16:49:10 1997 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 4 14:52:16 1999 by Bruno Haible (haible at clisp.cons.org)
-.\" Modified Tue Aug 24 17:11:01 1999 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Tue Feb 6 03:31:55 2001 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\"
-.TH SETLOCALE 3 1999-07-04 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-setlocale \- set the current locale.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <locale.h>
-.sp
-.BI "char *setlocale(int " category ", const char *" locale );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B setlocale()
-function is used to set or query the program's current locale.
-.PP
-If
-.I locale
-is not
-.BR NULL ,
-the program's current locale is modified according to the arguments.
-The argument
-.I category
-determines which parts of the program's current locale should be modified.
-.TP
-.B LC_ALL
-for all of the locale.
-.TP
-.B LC_COLLATE
-for regular expression matching (it determines the meaning
-of range expressions and equivalence classes) and string collation.
-.TP
-.B LC_CTYPE
-for regular expression matching, character classification, conversion,
-case-sensitive comparison, and wide character functions.
-.TP
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-for localizable natural-language messages.
-.TP
-.B LC_MONETARY
-for monetary formatting.
-.TP
-.B LC_NUMERIC
-for number formatting (such as the decimal point and the thousands separator).
-.TP
-.B LC_TIME
-for time and date formatting.
-.PP
-The argument
-.I locale
-is a pointer to a character string containing the
-required setting of
-.IR category .
-Such a string is either a well-known constant like "C" or "da_DK"
-(see below), or an opaque string that was returned by another call of
-.BR setlocale .
-.PP
-If
-.I locale
-is
-.BR """""" ,
-each part of the locale that should be modified is set according to the
-environment variables. The details are implementation dependent.
-For glibc, first
-.\" [This is false on my system - must check which library versions do this]
-.\" if
-.\" .I category
-.\" is LC_MESSAGES, the environment variable LANGUAGE is inspected,
-.\" then
-(regardless of
-.IR category ),
-the environment variable LC_ALL is inspected,
-next the environment variable with the same name as the category
-(LC_COLLATE, LC_CTYPE, LC_MESSAGES, LC_MONETARY, LC_NUMERIC, LC_TIME)
-and finally the environment variable LANG.
-The first existing environment variable is used.
-If its value is not a valid locale specification, the locale
-is unchanged, and
-.B setlocale
-returns NULL.
-.\" The environment variable LANGUAGE may contain several, colon-separated,
-.\" locale names.
-.PP
-The locale
-.B """C"""
-or
-.B """POSIX"""
-is a portable locale; its LC_CTYPE part corresponds to the 7-bit ASCII
-character set.
-.PP
-A locale name is typically of the form
-.IR language "[_" territory "][." codeset "][@" modifier "],"
-where
-.I language
-is an ISO 639 language code,
-.I territory
-is an ISO 3166 country code, and
-.I codeset
-is a character set or encoding identifier like
-.B "ISO-8859-1"
-or
-.BR "UTF-8" .
-For a list of all supported locales, try "locale -a", cf.\&
-.BR locale (1).
-.PP
-If
-.I locale
-is
-.BR NULL ,
-the current locale is only queried, not modified.
-.PP
-On startup of the main program, the portable
-.B """C"""
-locale is selected as default.
-A program may be made portable to all locales by calling
-.B setlocale(LC_ALL, """""")
-after program initialization, by using the values returned
-from a
-.B localeconv()
-call
-for locale \- dependent information, by using the multi-byte and wide
-character functions for text processing if
-.BR "MB_CUR_MAX > 1" ,
-and by using
-.BR strcoll() ", " wcscoll()
-or
-.BR strxfrm() ", " wcsxfrm()
-to compare strings.
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-A successful call to
-.B setlocale()
-returns an opaque string that corresponds to the locale set.
-This string may be allocated in static storage.
-The string returned is such that a subsequent call with that string
-and its associated category will restore that part of the process's
-locale. The return value is
-.B NULL
-if the request cannot be honored.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-ANSI C, POSIX.1
-.SH NOTES
-Linux (that is, GNU libc) supports the portable locales
-.BR """C""" " and " """POSIX""" .
-In the good old days there used to be support for
-the European Latin-1
-.B """ISO-8859-1"""
-locale (e.g. in libc-4.5.21 and libc-4.6.27), and the Russian
-.B """KOI-8"""
-(more precisely, "koi-8r") locale (e.g. in libc-4.6.27),
-so that having an environment variable LC_CTYPE=ISO-8859-1
-sufficed to make isprint() return the right answer.
-These days non-English speaking Europeans have to work a bit harder,
-and must install actual locale files.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR locale (1),
-.BR localedef (1),
-.BR strcoll (3),
-.BR isalpha (3),
-.BR localeconv (3),
-.BR strftime (3),
-.BR charsets (4),
-.BR locale (7),
-.BR nl_langinfo (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/setvbuf.3 b/raw/man3/setvbuf.3
deleted file mode 100644
index dc02d9e..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/setvbuf.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/setbuf.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/stderr.3 b/raw/man3/stderr.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 752ae27..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/stderr.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/stdin.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/stdin.3 b/raw/man3/stdin.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 42d0271..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/stdin.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-.\" From dholland at burgundy.eecs.harvard.edu Tue Mar 24 18:08:15 1998
-.\"
-.\" This man page was written in 1998 by David A. Holland
-.\" and placed in the Public Domain. Polished a bit by aeb.
-.\"
-.Dd March 24, 1998
-.Dt STDIN 3
-.Os "Linux 2.0"
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm stdin ,
-.Nm stdout ,
-.Nm stderr
-.Nd standard I/O streams
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Fd #include <stdio.h>
-.Fd extern FILE *stdin;
-.Fd extern FILE *stdout;
-.Fd extern FILE *stderr;
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-Under normal circumstances every Unix program has three streams opened
-for it when it starts up, one for input, one for output, and one for
-printing diagnostic or error messages. These are typically attached to
-the user's terminal (see
-.Xr tty 4 )
-but might instead refer to files or other devices, depending on what
-the parent process chose to set up. (See also the ``Redirection'' section of
-.Xr sh 1 .)
-.Pp
-The input stream is referred to as ``standard input''; the output stream is
-referred to as ``standard output''; and the error stream is referred to
-as ``standard error''. These terms are abbreviated to form the symbols
-used to refer to these files, namely
-.Nm stdin ,
-.Nm stdout ,
-and
-.Nm stderr .
-.Pp
-Each of these symbols is a
-.Xr stdio 3
-macro of type pointer to FILE, and can be used with functions like
-.Xr fprintf 3
-or
-.Xr fread 3 .
-.Pp
-Since FILEs are a buffering wrapper around Unix file descriptors, the
-same underlying files may also be accessed using the raw Unix file
-interface, that is, the functions like
-.Xr read 2
-and
-.Xr lseek 2 .
-The integer file descriptors associated with the streams
-.Nm stdin ,
-.Nm stdout ,
-and
-.Nm stderr
-are 0, 1, and 2, respectively. The preprocessor symbols STDIN_FILENO,
-STDOUT_FILENO, and STDERR_FILENO are defined with these values in
-<unistd.h>.
-.Pp
-Note that mixing use of FILEs and raw file descriptors can produce
-unexpected results and should generally be avoided.
-(For the masochistic among you: POSIX.1, section 8.2.3, describes
-in detail how this interaction is supposed to work.)
-A general rule is that file descriptors are handled in the kernel,
-while stdio is just a library. This means for example, that after an
-exec, the child inherits all open file descriptors, but all old streams
-have become inaccessible.
-.Pp
-Since the symbols
-.Nm stdin ,
-.Nm stdout ,
-and
-.Nm stderr
-are specified to be macros, assigning to them is non-portable.
-The standard streams can be made to refer to different files
-with help of the library function
-.Xr freopen 3 ,
-specially introduced to make it possible to reassign
-.Nm stdin ,
-.Nm stdout ,
-and
-.Nm stderr .
-The standard streams are closed by a call to
-.Xr exit 3
-and by normal program termination.
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr sh 1 ,
-.Xr csh 1 ,
-.Xr open 2 ,
-.Xr fopen 3 ,
-.Xr stdio 3
-.Sh CONSIDERATIONS
-The stream
-.Nm stderr
-is unbuffered. The stream
-.Nm stdout
-is line-buffered when it points to a terminal. Partial lines will not
-appear until
-.Xr fflush 3
-or
-.Xr exit 3
-is called, or a newline is printed. This can produce unexpected
-results, especially with debugging output.
-The buffering mode of the standard streams (or any other stream)
-can be changed using the
-.Xr setbuf 3
-or
-.Xr setvbuf 3
-call.
-Note that in case
-.Nm stdin
-is associated with a terminal, there may also be input buffering
-in the terminal driver, entirely unrelated to stdio buffering.
-(Indeed, normally terminal input is line buffered in the kernel.)
-This kernel input handling can be modified using calls like
-.Xr tcsetattr 3 ;
-see also
-.Xr stty 1 ,
-and
-.Xr termios 3 .
-.Sh "CONFORMING TO"
-The
-.Nm stdin ,
-.Nm stdout ,
-and
-.Nm stderr
-macros conform to
-.St -ansiC ,
-and this standard also stipulates that these three
-streams shall be open at program startup.
diff --git a/raw/man3/stdio.3 b/raw/man3/stdio.3
deleted file mode 100644
index e5f3a0e..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/stdio.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,353 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1991 Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)stdio.3 6.5 (Berkeley) 5/6/91
-.\"
-.\" Converted for Linux, Mon Nov 29 16:07:22 1993, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Modified, 2001-12-26, aeb
-.\"
-.TH STDIO 3 2001-12-26 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-stdio \- standard input/output library functions
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.B FILE *stdin;
-.br
-.B FILE *stdout;
-.br
-.B FILE *stderr;
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The standard I/O library provides a simple and efficient buffered stream
-I/O interface. Input and output is mapped into logical data streams and the
-physical I/O characteristics are concealed. The functions and macros are
-listed below; more information is available from the individual man pages.
-.PP
-A stream is associated with an external file (which may be a physical
-device) by
-.I opening
-a file, which may involve creating a new file. Creating an existing file
-causes its former contents to be discarded. If a file can support
-positioning requests (such as a disk file, as opposed to a terminal) then a
-.I file position indicator
-associated with the stream is positioned at the start of the file (byte
-zero), unless the file is opened with append mode. If append mode is used,
-it is unspecified whether the position indicator will be placed at the
-start or the end of the file. The position indicator is maintained by
-subsequent reads, writes and positioning requests. All input occurs
-as if the characters were read by successive calls to the
-.BR fgetc (3)
-function; all output takes place as if all characters were written by
-successive calls to the
-.BR fputc (3)
-function.
-.PP
-A file is disassociated from a stream by
-.I closing
-the file. Output streams are flushed (any unwritten buffer contents are
-transferred to the host environment) before the stream is disassociated from
-the file. The value of a pointer to a
-.B FILE
-object is indeterminate after a file is closed (garbage).
-.PP
-A file may be subsequently reopened, by the same or another program
-execution, and its contents reclaimed or modified (if it can be
-repositioned at the start). If the main function returns to its original
-caller, or the
-.BR exit (3)
-function is called, all open files are closed (hence all output streams are
-flushed) before program termination. Other methods of program termination,
-such as
-.BR abort (3)
-do not bother about closing files properly.
-.PP
-At program startup, three text streams are predefined and need not be
-opened explicitly \(em
-.I standard input
-(for reading conventional input), \(em
-.I standard output
-(for writing conventional input), and
-.I standard error
-(for writing diagnostic output). These streams are abbreviated
-.IR stdin , stdout
-and
-.IR stderr .
-When opened, the standard error stream is not fully buffered; the standard
-input and output streams are fully buffered if and only if the streams do
-not to refer to an interactive device.
-.PP
-Output streams that refer to terminal devices are always line buffered by
-default; pending output to such streams is written automatically whenever
-an input stream that refers to a terminal device is read. In cases where a
-large amount of computation is done after printing part of a line on an
-output terminal, it is necessary to
-.BR fflush (3)
-the standard output before going off and computing so that the output will
-appear.
-.PP
-The
-.B stdio
-library is a part of the library
-.B libc
-and routines are automatically loaded as needed by the compilers
-.BR cc (1)
-and
-.BR pc (1).
-The
-.B SYNOPSIS
-sections of the following manual pages indicate which include files are to
-be used, what the compiler declaration for the function looks like and
-which external variables are of interest.
-.PP
-The following are defined as macros; these names may not be re-used without
-first removing their current definitions with
-.BR #undef :
-.BR BUFSIZ ,
-.BR EOF ,
-.BR FILENAME_MAX ,
-.BR FOPEN_MAX ,
-.BR L_cuserid ,
-.BR L_ctermid ,
-.BR L_tmpnam,
-.BR NULL ,
-.BR SEEK_END ,
-.BR SEEK_SET ,
-.BR SEE_CUR ,
-.BR TMP_MAX ,
-.BR clearerr ,
-.BR feof ,
-.BR ferror ,
-.BR fileno ,
-.BR fropen ,
-.BR fwopen ,
-.BR getc ,
-.BR getchar ,
-.BR putc ,
-.BR putchar ,
-.BR stderr ,
-.BR stdin ,
-.BR stdout .
-Function versions of the macro functions
-.BR feof ,
-.BR ferror ,
-.BR clearerr ,
-.BR fileno ,
-.BR getc ,
-.BR getchar ,
-.BR putc ,
-and
-.B putchar
-exist and will be used if the macros definitions are explicitly removed.
-.SH "LIST OF FUNCTIONS"
-.TP 10n
-.B Function
-.B Description
-.TP
-.B clearerr
-check and reset stream status
-.TP
-.B fclose
-close a stream
-.TP
-.B fdopen
-stream open functions
-.TP
-.B feof
-check and reset stream status
-.TP
-.B ferror
-check and reset stream status
-.TP
-.B fflush
-flush a stream
-.TP
-.B fgetc
-get next character or word from input stream
-.\" .TP
-.\" .B fgetline
-.\" get a line from a stream (BSD only; renamed to fgetln())
-.TP
-.B fgetpos
-reposition a stream
-.TP
-.B fgets
-get a line from a stream
-.TP
-.B fileno
-return the integer descriptor of the argument stream
-.TP
-.B fopen
-stream open functions
-.TP
-.B fprintf
-formatted output conversion
-.TP
-.B fpurge
-flush a stream
-.TP
-.B fputc
-output a character or word to a stream
-.TP
-.B fputs
-output a line to a stream
-.TP
-.B fread
-binary stream input/output
-.TP
-.B freopen
-stream open functions
-.TP
-.B fropen
-open a stream
-.TP
-.B fscanf
-input format conversion
-.TP
-.B fseek
-reposition a stream
-.TP
-.B fsetpos
-reposition a stream
-.TP
-.B ftell
-reposition a stream
-.TP
-.B fwrite
-binary stream input/output
-.TP
-.B getc
-get next character or word from input stream
-.TP
-.B getchar
-get next character or word from input stream
-.TP
-.B gets
-get a line from a stream
-.TP
-.B getw
-get next character or word from input stream
-.TP
-.B mktemp
-make temporary file name (unique)
-.TP
-.B perror
-system error messages
-.TP
-.B printf
-formatted output conversion
-.TP
-.B putc
-output a character or word to a stream
-.TP
-.B putchar
-output a character or word to a stream
-.TP
-.B puts
-output a line to a stream
-.TP
-.B putw
-output a character or word to a stream
-.TP
-.B remove
-remove directory entry
-.TP
-.B rewind
-reposition a stream
-.TP
-.B scanf
-input format conversion
-.TP
-.B setbuf
-stream buffering operations
-.TP
-.B setbuffer
-stream buffering operations
-.TP
-.B setlinebuf
-stream buffering operations
-.TP
-.B setvbuf
-stream buffering operations
-.TP
-.B sprintf
-formatted output conversion
-.TP
-.B sscanf
-input format conversion
-.TP
-.B strerror
-system error messages
-.TP
-.B sys_errlist
-system error messages
-.TP
-.B sys_nerr
-system error messages
-.TP
-.B tempnam
-temporary file routines
-.TP
-.B tmpfile
-temporary file routines
-.TP
-.B tmpnam
-temporary file routines
-.TP
-.B ungetc
-un-get character from input stream
-.TP
-.B vfprintf
-formatted output conversion
-.TP
-.B vfscanf
-input format conversion
-.TP
-.B vprintf
-formatted output conversion
-.TP
-.B vscanf
-input format conversion
-.TP
-.B vsprintf
-formatted output conversion
-.TP
-.B vsscanf
-input format conversion
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The
-.B stdio
-library conforms to ANSI X3.159-1989 (``ANSI C'').
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR open (2),
-.BR close (2),
-.BR read (2),
-.BR write (2),
-.BR stdout (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/stdout.3 b/raw/man3/stdout.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 752ae27..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/stdout.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man3/stdin.3
diff --git a/raw/man3/strcoll.3 b/raw/man3/strcoll.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 358aa42..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/strcoll.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1993 David Metcalfe (david at prism.demon.co.uk)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" References consulted:
-.\" Linux libc source code
-.\" Lewine's _POSIX Programmer's Guide_ (O'Reilly & Associates, 1991)
-.\" 386BSD man pages
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 10:40:44 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.TH STRCOLL 3 1993-04-12 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-strcoll \- compare two strings using the current locale
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <string.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int strcoll(const char *" s1 ", const char *" s2 );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBstrcoll()\fP function compares the two strings \fIs1\fP and
-\fIs2\fP. It returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater
-than zero if \fIs1\fP is found, respectively, to be less than,
-to match, or be greater than \fIs2\fP. The comparison is based on
-strings interpreted as appropriate for the program's current locale
-for category \fILC_COLLATE\fP. (See \fBsetlocale\fP(3)).
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The \fBstrcoll()\fP function returns an integer less than, equal to,
-or greater than zero if \fIs1\fP is found, respectively, to be less
-than, to match, or be greater than \fIs2\fP, when both are interpreted
-as appropriate for the current locale.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
-.SH NOTES
-In the \fI"POSIX"\fP or \fI"C"\fP locales \fBstrcoll()\fP is equivalent to
-\fBstrcmp()\fP.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR bcmp (3),
-.BR memcmp (3),
-.BR strcasecmp (3),
-.BR strcmp (3),
-.BR strxfrm (3),
-.BR setlocale (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/strxfrm.3 b/raw/man3/strxfrm.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 916412c..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/strxfrm.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1993 David Metcalfe (david at prism.demon.co.uk)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" References consulted:
-.\" Linux libc source code
-.\" Lewine's _POSIX Programmer's Guide_ (O'Reilly & Associates, 1991)
-.\" 386BSD man pages
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 10:41:28 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.TH STRXFRM 3 1993-04-12 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-strxfrm \- string transformation
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <string.h>
-.sp
-.BI "size_t strxfrm(char *" dest ", const char *" src ", size_t " n );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBstrxfrm()\fP function transforms the \fIsrc\fP string into a
-form such that the result of \fBstrcmp()\fP on two strings that have
-been transformed with \fBstrxfrm()\fP is the same as the result of
-\fBstrcoll()\fP on the two strings before their transformation. The
-first \fIn\fP characters of the transformed string are placed in
-\fIdest\fP. The transformation is based on the program's current
-locale for category \fILC_COLLATE\fP. (See \fBsetlocale\fP(3)).
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-The \fBstrxfrm()\fP function returns the number of bytes required to
-store the transformed string in \fIdest\fP excluding the terminating
-`\\0' character. If the value returned is \fIn\fP or more, the
-contents of \fIdest\fP are indeterminate.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVID 3, BSD 4.3, ISO 9899
-.SH NOTES
-In the \fI"POSIX"\fP or \fI"C"\fP locales \fBstrxfrm()\fP is equivalent to
-copying the string with \fBstrncpy()\fP.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR bcmp (3),
-.BR memcmp (3),
-.BR strcasecmp (3),
-.BR strcmp (3),
-.BR strcoll (3),
-.BR setlocale (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/ulimit.3 b/raw/man3/ulimit.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 684a7dd..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/ulimit.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 1996 Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Moved to man3, aeb, 980612
-.\"
-.TH ULIMIT 3 1998-06-12 "Linux 2.0" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-ulimit \- get and set user limits
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <ulimit.h>
-.sp
-.BI "long ulimit(int " cmd ", long " newlimit );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Warning: This routine is obsolete. The include file is no longer
-provided by glibc. Use getrlimit(2), setrlimit(2) and sysconf(3)
-instead.
-For the shell command
-.BR ulimit ,
-see
-.BR bash (1).
-
-The
-.B ulimit
-call will get or set some limit for the current process.
-The
-.I cmd
-argument can have one of the following values.
-.TP
-.B UL_GETFSIZE
-Return the limit on the size of a file, in units of 512 bytes.
-.TP
-.B UL_SETFSIZE
-Set the limit on the size of a file.
-.TP
-.B 3
-(Not implemented for Linux.)
-Return the maximum possible address of the data segment.
-.TP
-.B 4
-(Implemented but no symbolic constant provided.)
-Return the maximum number of files that the calling process can open.
-
-.SH "RETURN VALUE"
-On success,
-.B ulimit
-returns a nonnegative value.
-On error, \-1 is returned, and
-.I errno
-is set appropriately.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-A non-root process tried to increase a limit.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-SVID.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR bash (1),
-.BR getrlimit (2),
-.BR setrlimit (2),
-.BR sysconf (3)
diff --git a/raw/man3/unlocked_stdio.3 b/raw/man3/unlocked_stdio.3
deleted file mode 100644
index 53fa32f..0000000
--- a/raw/man3/unlocked_stdio.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 2001 Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.TH UNLOCKED_STDIO 3 2001-10-18 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-*_unlocked \- non-locking stdio functions
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "int getc_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int getchar_unlocked(void);"
-.BI "int putc_unlocked(int " c ", FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int putchar_unlocked(int " c );
-.sp
-.BR "#define _BSD_SOURCE" " /* or _SVID_SOURCE or _GNU_SOURCE */
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "void clearerr_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int feof_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int ferror_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int fileno_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int fflush_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int fgetc_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int fputc_unlocked(int " c ", FILE *" stream );
-.BI "size_t fread_unlocked(void *" ptr ", size_t " size ", size_t " n ,
-.BI " FILE *" stream );
-.BI "size_t fwrite_unlocked(const void *" ptr ", size_t " size ", size_t " n ,
-.BI " FILE *" stream );
-.sp
-.B #define _GNU_SOURCE
-.B #include <stdio.h>
-.sp
-.BI "char *fgets_unlocked(char *" s ", int " n ", FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int fputs_unlocked(const char *" s ", FILE *" stream );
-.sp
-.B #define _GNU_SOURCE
-.B #include <wchar.h>
-.sp
-.BI "wint_t getwc_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "wint_t getwchar_unlocked(void);"
-.BI "wint_t fgetwc_unlocked(FILE *" stream );
-.BI "wint_t fputwc_unlocked(wchar_t " wc ", FILE *" stream );
-.BI "wint_t putwc_unlocked(wchar_t " wc ", FILE *" stream );
-.BI "wint_t putwchar_unlocked(wchar_t " wc );
-.BI "wchar_t *fgetws_unlocked(wchar_t *" ws ", int " n ", FILE *" stream );
-.BI "int fputws_unlocked(const wchar_t *" ws ", FILE *" stream );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Each of these functions has the same behaviour as its counterpart
-without the `_unlocked' suffix, except that they do not use locking
-(they do not set locks themselves, and do not test for the presence
-of locks set by others) and hence are thread-unsafe.
-See
-.BR flockfile (3).
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-The four functions \fIgetc_unlocked\fP(), \fIgetchar_unlocked\fP(),
-\fIputc_unlocked\fP(), \fIputchar_unlocked\fP() are in POSIX.1.
-The nonstandard
-.BR *_unlocked()
-variants occur on a few Unix systems, and are available in recent glibc.
-.\" E.g., in HPUX 10.0. In HPUX 10.30 they are called obsolescent, and
-.\" moved to a compatibility library.
-.\" Available in HPUX 10.0: clearerr_unlocked, fclose_unlocked,
-.\" feof_unlocked, ferror_unlocked, fflush_unlocked, fgets_unlocked,
-.\" fgetwc_unlocked, fgetws_unlocked, fileno_unlocked, fputs_unlocked,
-.\" fputwc_unlocked, fputws_unlocked, fread_unlocked, fseek_unlocked,
-.\" ftell_unlocked, fwrite_unlocked, getc_unlocked, getchar_unlocked,
-.\" getw_unlocked, getwc_unlocked, getwchar_unlocked, putc_unlocked,
-.\" putchar_unlocked, puts_unlocked, putws_unlocked, putw_unlocked,
-.\" putwc_unlocked, putwchar_unlocked, rewind_unlocked, setvbuf_unlocked,
-.\" ungetc_unlocked, ungetwc_unlocked.
-They should probably not be used.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR flockfile (3)
diff --git a/raw/man4/console_codes.4 b/raw/man4/console_codes.4
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b8fbf3..0000000
--- a/raw/man4/console_codes.4
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,527 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Copyright (c) 1996 Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>, Mon Oct 31 22:13:04 1996
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" This is combined from many sources.
-.\" For Linux, the definitive source is of course console.c.
-.\" About vt100-like escape sequences in general there are
-.\" the ISO 6429 and ISO 2022 norms, the descriptions of
-.\" an actual vt100, and the xterm docs (ctlseqs.ms).
-.\" Substantial portions of this text are derived from a write-up
-.\" by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>.
-.\"
-.\" Tiny correction, aeb, 961107.
-.\"
-.TH CONSOLE_CODES 4 1996-10-31 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-console_codes \- Linux console escape and control sequences
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The Linux console implements a large subset of the VT102 and ECMA-48/ISO
-6429/ANSI X3.64 terminal controls, plus certain private-mode sequences
-for changing the color palette, character-set mapping, etc.
-In the tabular descriptions below, the second column gives ECMA-48 or DEC
-mnemonics (the latter if prefixed with DEC) for the given function.
-Sequences without a mnemonic are neither ECMA-48 nor VT102.
-.LP
-After all the normal output processing has been done, and a
-stream of characters arrives at the console driver for actual
-printing, the first thing that happens is a translation from
-the code used for processing to the code used for printing.
-.LP
-If the console is in UTF-8 mode, then the incoming bytes are
-first assembled into 16-bit Unicode codes. Otherwise
-each byte is transformed according to the current mapping table
-(which translates it to a Unicode value). See the CHARACTER SETS
-section below for discussion.
-.LP
-In the normal case, the Unicode value is converted to a font index,
-and this is stored in video memory, so that the corresponding glyph
-(as found in video ROM) appears on the screen.
-Note that the use of Unicode (and the design of the PC hardware)
-allows us to use 512 different glyphs simultaneously.
-.LP
-If the current Unicode value is a control character, or we are
-currently processing an escape sequence, the value will treated
-specially. Instead of being turned into a font index and rendered as
-a glyph, it may trigger cursor movement or other control functions.
-See the LINUX CONSOLE CONTROLS section below for discussion.
-.LP
-It is generally not good practice to hard-wire terminal controls into
-programs. Linux supports a
-.BR terminfo (5)
-database of terminal capabilities.
-Rather than emitting console escape sequences by hand, you will almost
-always want to use a terminfo-aware screen library or utility such as
-.BR ncurses (3),
-.BR tput (1),
-or
-.BR reset (1).
-
-.SH "LINUX CONSOLE CONTROLS"
-
-This section describes all the control characters and escape sequences
-that invoke special functions (i.e. anything other than writing a
-glyph at the current cursor location) on the Linux console.
-.SS "Control characters"
-A character is a control character if (before transformation
-according to the mapping table) it has one of the 14 codes
-00 (NUL), 07 (BEL), 08 (BS), 09 (HT), 0a (LF), 0b (VT),
-0c (FF), 0d (CR), 0e (SO), 0f (SI), 18 (CAN), 1a (SUB),
-1b (ESC), 7f (DEL).
-One can set a `display control characters' mode (see below),
-and allow 07, 09, 0b, 18, 1a, 7f to be displayed as glyphs.
-On the other hand, in UTF-8 mode all codes 00-1f are regarded
-as control characters, regardless of any `display control characters'
-mode.
-
-If we have a control character, it is acted upon immediately
-and then discarded (even in the middle of an escape sequence)
-and the escape sequence continues with the next character.
-(However, ESC starts a new escape sequence, possibly aborting a previous
-unfinished one, and CAN and SUB abort any escape sequence.)
-The recognized control characters are BEL, BS, HT, LF, VT, FF,
-CR, SO, SI, CAN, SUB, ESC, DEL, CSI. They do what one would expect:
-.HP
-BEL (0x07, ^G) beeps;
-.HP
-BS (0x08, ^H) backspaces one column
-(but not past the beginning of the line);
-.HP
-HT (0x09, ^I) goes to the next tab stop or to the end of the line
-if there is no earlier tab stop;
-.HP
-LF (0x0A, ^J), VT (0x0B, ^K) and FF (0x0C, ^L) all give a linefeed;
-.HP
-CR (0x0D, ^M) gives a carriage return;
-.HP
-SO (0x0E, ^N) activates the G1 character set,
-and if LF/NL (new line mode) is set also a carriage return;
-.HP
-SI (0x0F, ^O) activates the G0 character set;
-.HP
-CAN (0x18, ^X) and SUB (0x1A, ^Z) interrupt escape sequences;
-.HP
-ESC (0x1B, ^[) starts an escape sequence;
-.HP
-DEL (0x7F) is ignored;
-.HP
-CSI (0x9B) is equivalent to ESC [.
-.\" .LP
-.SS "ESC- but not CSI-sequences"
-.TS
-l l l.
-ESC c RIS Reset.
-ESC D IND Linefeed.
-ESC E NEL Newline.
-ESC H HTS Set tab stop at current column.
-ESC M RI Reverse linefeed.
-ESC Z DECID DEC private identification. The kernel
- returns the string ESC [ ? 6 c, claiming
- that it is a VT102.
-ESC 7 DECSC Save current state (cursor coordinates,
- attributes, character sets pointed at by G0, G1).
-ESC 8 DECRC Restore state most recently saved by ESC 7.
-ESC [ CSI Control sequence introducer
-ESC % Start sequence selecting character set
-ESC % @ \0\0\0Select default (ISO 646 / ISO 8859-1)
-ESC % G \0\0\0Select UTF-8
-ESC % 8 \0\0\0Select UTF-8 (obsolete)
-ESC # 8 DECALN DEC screen alignment test - fill screen with E's.
-ESC ( Start sequence defining G0 character set
-ESC ( B \0\0\0Select default (ISO 8859-1 mapping)
-ESC ( 0 \0\0\0Select vt100 graphics mapping
-ESC ( U \0\0\0Select null mapping - straight to character ROM
-ESC ( K \0\0\0Select user mapping - the map that is loaded by
- \0\0\0the utility \fBmapscrn\fP(8).
-ESC ) Start sequence defining G1
- (followed by one of B, 0, U, K, as above).
-ESC > DECPNM Set numeric keypad mode
-ESC = DECPAM Set application keypad mode
-ESC ] OSC (Should be: Operating system command)
- ESC ] P \fInrrggbb\fP: set palette, with parameter
- given in 7 hexadecimal digits after the final P :-(.
- Here \fIn\fP is the color (0-15), and \fIrrggbb\fP indicates
- the red/green/blue values (0-255).
- ESC ] R: reset palette
-.TE
-.SS "ECMA-48 CSI sequences"
-
-CSI (or ESC [) is followed by a sequence of parameters,
-at most NPAR (16), that are decimal numbers separated by
-semicolons. An empty or absent parameter is taken to be 0.
-The sequence of parameters may be preceded by a single question mark.
-
-However, after CSI [ (or ESC [ [) a single character is read
-and this entire sequence is ignored. (The idea is to ignore
-an echoed function key.)
-
-The action of a CSI sequence is determined by its final character.
-
-.TS
-l l l.
-@ ICH Insert the indicated # of blank characters.
-A CUU Move cursor up the indicated # of rows.
-B CUD Move cursor down the indicated # of rows.
-C CUF Move cursor right the indicated # of columns.
-D CUB Move cursor left the indicated # of columns.
-E CNL Move cursor down the indicated # of rows, to column 1.
-F CPL Move cursor up the indicated # of rows, to column 1.
-G CHA Move cursor to indicated column in current row.
-H CUP Move cursor to the indicated row, column (origin at 1,1).
-J ED Erase display (default: from cursor to end of display).
- ESC [ 1 J: erase from start to cursor.
- ESC [ 2 J: erase whole display.
-K EL Erase line (default: from cursor to end of line).
- ESC [ 1 K: erase from start of line to cursor.
- ESC [ 2 K: erase whole line.
-L IL Insert the indicated # of blank lines.
-M DL Delete the indicated # of lines.
-P DCH Delete the indicated # of characters on the current line.
-X ECH Erase the indicated # of characters on the current line.
-a HPR Move cursor right the indicated # of columns.
-c DA Answer ESC [ ? 6 c: `I am a VT102'.
-d VPA Move cursor to the indicated row, current column.
-e VPR Move cursor down the indicated # of rows.
-f HVP Move cursor to the indicated row, column.
-g TBC Without parameter: clear tab stop at the current position.
- ESC [ 3 g: delete all tab stops.
-h SM Set Mode (see below).
-l RM Reset Mode (see below).
-m SGR Set attributes (see below).
-n DSR Status report (see below).
-q DECLL Set keyboard LEDs.
- ESC [ 0 q: clear all LEDs
- ESC [ 1 q: set Scroll Lock LED
- ESC [ 2 q: set Num Lock LED
- ESC [ 3 q: set Caps Lock LED
-r DECSTBM Set scrolling region; parameters are top and bottom row.
-s ? Save cursor location.
-u ? Restore cursor location.
-` HPA Move cursor to indicated column in current row.
-.TE
-.SS ECMA-48 Set Graphics Rendition
-
-The ECMA-48 SGR sequence ESC [ <parameters> m sets display attributes.
-Several attributes can be set in the same sequence.
-.LP
-.TS
-l l.
-par result
-0 reset all attributes to their defaults
-1 set bold
-2 set half-bright (simulated with color on a color display)
-4 set underscore (simulated with color on a color display)
- (the colors used to simulate dim or underline are set
- using ESC ] ...)
-5 set blink
-7 set reverse video
-10 reset selected mapping, display control flag,
- and toggle meta flag.
-11 select null mapping, set display control flag,
- reset toggle meta flag.
-12 select null mapping, set display control flag,
- set toggle meta flag. (The toggle meta flag
- causes the high bit of a byte to be toggled
- before the mapping table translation is done.)
-21 set normal intensity (this is not compatible with ECMA-48)
-22 set normal intensity
-24 underline off
-25 blink off
-27 reverse video off
-30 set black foreground
-31 set red foreground
-32 set green foreground
-33 set brown foreground
-34 set blue foreground
-35 set magenta foreground
-36 set cyan foreground
-37 set white foreground
-38 set underscore on, set default foreground color
-39 set underscore off, set default foreground color
-40 set black background
-41 set red background
-42 set green background
-43 set brown background
-44 set blue background
-45 set magenta background
-46 set cyan background
-47 set white background
-49 set default background color
-.TE
-.SS ECMA-48 Mode Switches
-.TP
-ESC [ 3 h
-DECCRM (default off): Display control chars.
-.TP
-ESC [ 4 h
-DECIM (default off): Set insert mode.
-.TP
-ESC [ 20 h
-LF/NL (default off): Automatically follow echo of LF, VT or FF with CR.
-.\"
-.SS ECMA-48 Status Report Commands
-.\"
-.TP
-ESC [ 5 n
-Device status report (DSR): Answer is ESC [ 0 n (Terminal OK).
-.TP
-ESC [ 6 n
-Cursor position report (CPR): Answer is ESC [ \fIy\fP ; \fIx\fP R,
-where \fIx,y\fP is the cursor location.
-.\"
-.SS DEC Private Mode (DECSET/DECRST) sequences.
-.\"
-These are not described in ECMA-48. We list the Set Mode sequences;
-the Reset Mode sequences are obtained by replacing the final `h'
-by `l'.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 1 h
-DECCKM (default off): When set, the cursor keys send an ESC O prefix,
-rather than ESC [.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 3 h
-DECCOLM (default off = 80 columns): 80/132 col mode switch. The
-driver sources note that this alone does not suffice; some user-mode
-utility such as
-.BR resizecons (8)
-has to change the hardware registers on the console video card.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 5 h
-DECSCNM (default off): Set reverse-video mode.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 6 h
-DECOM (default off): When set, cursor addressing is relative to
-the upper left corner of the scrolling region.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 7 h
-DECAWM (default on): Set autowrap on. In this mode, a graphic
-character emitted after column 80 (or column 132 of DECCOLM is on)
-forces a wrap to the beginning of the following line first.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 8 h
-DECARM (default on): Set keyboard autorepreat on.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 9 h
-X10 Mouse Reporting (default off): Set reporting mode to 1 (or reset to
-0) \- see below.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 25 h
-DECCM (default on): Make cursor visible.
-.TP
-ESC [ ? 1000 h
-X11 Mouse Reporting (default off): Set reporting mode to 2 (or reset
-to 0) \- see below.
-.\"
-.SS Linux Console Private CSI Sequences
-.\"
-The following sequences are neither ECMA-48 nor native VT102. They
-are native to the Linux console driver. Colors are in SGR parameters:
-0 = black, 1 = red, 2 = green, 3 = brown, 4 = blue, 5 = magenta, 6 =
-cyan, 7 = white.
-
-.TS
-l l.
-ESC [ 1 ; \fIn\fP ] Set color \fIn\fP as the underline color
-ESC [ 2 ; \fIn\fP ] Set color \fIn\fP as the dim color
-ESC [ 8 ] Make the current color pair the default attributes.
-ESC [ 9 ; \fIn\fP ] Set screen blank timeout to \fIn\fP minutes.
-ESC [ 10 ; \fIn\fP ] Set bell frequency in Hz.
-ESC [ 11 ; \fIn\fP ] Set bell duration in msec.
-ESC [ 12 ; \fIn\fP ] Bring specified console to the front.
-ESC [ 13 ] Unblank the screen.
-ESC [ 14 ; \fIn\fP ] Set the VESA powerdown interval in minutes.
-.TE
-
-.SH "CHARACTER SETS"
-
-The kernel knows about 4 translations of bytes into console-screen symbols.
-The four tables are: a) Latin1 -> PC, b) VT100 graphics -> PC, c) PC -> PC,
-d) user-defined.
-
-There are two character sets, called G0 and G1, and one of them
-is the current character set. (Initially G0.)
-Typing ^N causes G1 to become current, ^O causes G0 to become current.
-
-These variables G0 and G1 point at a translation table, and can be changed
-by the user. Initially they point at tables a) and b), respectively.
-The sequences ESC ( B and ESC ( 0 and ESC ( U and ESC ( K cause G0 to point
-at translation table a), b), c) and d), respectively.
-The sequences ESC ) B and ESC ) 0 and ESC ) U and ESC ) K cause G1 to point
-at translation table a), b), c) and d), respectively.
-
-The sequence ESC c causes a terminal reset, which is what you want if the
-screen is all garbled. The oft-advised "echo ^V^O" will only make G0 current,
-but there is no guarantee that G0 points at table a).
-In some distributions there is a program
-.BR reset (1)
-that just does "echo ^[c".
-If your terminfo entry for the console is correct (and has an entry rs1=\\Ec),
-then "tput reset" will also work.
-
-The user-defined mapping table can be set using
-.BR mapscrn (8).
-The result of the mapping is that if a symbol c is printed, the symbol
-s = map[c] is sent to the video memory. The bitmap that corresponds to
-s is found in the character ROM, and can be changed using
-.BR setfont(8).
-
-.SH "MOUSE TRACKING"
-
-The mouse tracking facility is intended to return xterm-compatible
-mouse status reports. Because the console driver has no way to know
-the device or type of the mouse, these reports are returned in the
-console input stream only when the virtual terminal driver receives
-a mouse update ioctl. These ioctls must be generated by a mouse-aware
-user-mode application such as the \fBgpm(8)\fR daemon.
-
-Parameters for all mouse tracking escape sequences generated by
-\fIxterm\fP encode numeric parameters in a single character as
-\fIvalue\fP+040. For example, `!' is 1. The screen
-coordinate system is 1-based.
-
-The X10 compatibility mode sends an escape sequence on button press
-encoding the location and the mouse button pressed.
-It is enabled by sending ESC [ ? 9 h and disabled with ESC [ ? 9 l.
-On button press, \fIxterm\fP sends
-ESC [ M \fIbxy\fP (6 characters). Here \fIb\fP is button\-1,
-and \fIx\fP and \fIy\fP are the x and y coordinates of the mouse
-when the button was pressed.
-This is the same code the kernel also produces.
-
-Normal tracking mode (not implemented in Linux 2.0.24) sends an escape
-sequence on both button press and release. Modifier information is
-also sent. It is enabled by sending ESC [ ? 1000 h and disabled with
-ESC [ 1000 l. On button press or release, \fIxterm\fP sends ESC [ M
-\fIbxy\fP. The low two bits of \fIb\fP encode button information:
-0=MB1 pressed, 1=MB2 pressed, 2=MB3 pressed, 3=release. The upper
-bits encode what modifiers were down when the button was pressed and
-are added together: 4=Shift, 8=Meta, 16=Control. Again \fIx\fP and
-\fIy\fP are the x and y coordinates of the mouse event. The upper
-left corner is (1,1).
-
-.SH "COMPARISONS WITH OTHER TERMINALS"
-
-Many different terminal types are described, like the Linux console,
-as being `VT100-compatible'. Here we discuss differences vbetween the
-Linux console an the two most important others, the DEC VT102 and
-.BR xterm (1).
-.\"
-.SS Control-character handling
-The vt102 also recognized the following control characters:
-.HP
-NUL (0x00) was ignored;
-.HP
-ENQ (0x05) triggered an answerback message;
-.HP
-DC1 (0x11, ^Q, XON) resumed transmission;
-.HP
-DC3 (0x13, ^S, XOFF) caused vt100 to ignore (and stop transmitting)
-all codes except XOFF and XON.
-.LP
-VT100-like DC1/DC3 processing may be enabled by the tty driver.
-.LP
-The
-.I xterm
-program (in vt100 mode) recognizes the control characters
-BEL, BS, HT, LF, VT, FF, CR, SO, SI, ESC.
-.\"
-.SS Escape sequences
-VT100 console sequences not implemented on the Linux console:
-.LP
-.TS
-l l l.
-ESC N SS2 Single shift 2. (Select G2 character set for the next
- character only.)
-ESC O SS3 Single shift 3. (Select G3 character set for the next
- character only.)
-ESC P DCS Device control string (ended by ESC \e)
-ESC X SOS Start of string.
-ESC ^ PM Privacy message (ended by ESC \e)
-ESC \e ST String terminator
-ESC * ... Designate G2 character set
-ESC + ... Designate G3 character set
-.TE
-
-The program
-.I xterm
-(in vt100 mode) recognizes ESC c, ESC # 8, ESC >, ESC =,
-ESC D, ESC E, ESC H, ESC M, ESC N, ESC O, ESC P ... ESC \,
-ESC Z (it answers ESC [ ? 1 ; 2 c, `I am a vt100 with advanced video option')
-and ESC ^ ... ESC \ with the same meanings as indicated above.
-It accepts ESC (, ESC ), ESC *, ESC + followed by 0, A, B for
-the DEC special character and line drawing set, UK, and USASCII,
-respectively.
-It accepts ESC ] for the setting of certain resources:
-.LP
-.TS
-l l.
-ESC ] 0 ; txt BEL Set icon name and window title to txt.
-ESC ] 1 ; txt BEL Set icon name to txt.
-ESC ] 2 ; txt BEL Set window title to txt.
-ESC ] 4 6 ; name BEL Change log file to name (normally disabled
- by a compile-time option)
-ESC ] 5 0 ; fn BEL Set font to fn.
-.TE
-
-It recognizes the following with slightly modified meaning:
-.LP
-.TS
-l l l.
-ESC 7 DECSC Save cursor
-ESC 8 DECRC Restore cursor
-.TE
-
-It also recognizes
-.LP
-.TS
-l l l.
-ESC F Cursor to lower left corner of screen (if enabled by
- the hpLowerleftBugCompat resource)
-ESC l Memory lock (per HP terminals).
- Locks memory above the cursor.
-ESC m Memory unlock (per HP terminals).
-ESC n LS2 Invoke the G2 character set.
-ESC o LS3 Invoke the G3 character set.
-ESC | LS3R Invoke the G3 character set as GR.
- Has no visible effect in xterm.
-ESC } LS2R Invoke the G2 character set as GR.
- Has no visible effect in xterm.
-ESC ~ LS1R Invoke the G1 character set as GR.
- Has no visible effect in xterm.
-.TE
-
-It does not recognize ESC % ...
-.\"
-.SS CSI Sequences
-The
-.I xterm
-program (as of XFree86 3.1.2G) does not recognize the blink or invisible-mode
-SGRs. Stock X11R6 versions do not recognize the color-setting SGRs.
-All other ECMA-48 CSI sequences recognized by Linux are also recognized by
-.IR xterm ,
-and vice-versa.
-
-The
-.I xterm
-program will recognize all of the DEC Private Mode sequences listed
-above, but none of the Linux private-mode sequences. For discussion
-of
-.IR xterm 's
-own private-mode sequences, refer to the
-.I Xterm Control Sequences
-document by Edward Moy and Stephen Gildea, available with the X
-distribution.
-
-.SH BUGS
-
-In 2.0.23, CSI is broken, and NUL is not ignored inside escape sequences.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR console (4),
-.BR console_ioctl (4),
-.BR charsets (7)
-
diff --git a/raw/man4/fifo.4 b/raw/man4/fifo.4
deleted file mode 100644
index 006ed87..0000000
--- a/raw/man4/fifo.4
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,57 +0,0 @@
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Claus Fischer.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\"
-.\" 990620 - page created - aeb at cwi.nl
-.\"
-.TH FIFO 4 1999-06-20 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-fifo \- first-in first-out special file, named pipe
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-A FIFO special file (a named pipe) is similar to a pipe,
-except that it is accessed as part of the file system.
-It can be opened by multiple processes for reading or
-writing. When processes are exchanging data via the FIFO,
-the kernel passes all data internally without writing it
-to the file system. Thus, the FIFO special file has no
-contents on the file system, the file system entry merely
-serves as a reference point so that processes can access
-the pipe using a name in the file system.
-.PP
-The kernel maintains exactly one pipe object for each
-FIFO special file that is opened by at least one process.
-The FIFO must be opened on both ends (reading and writing)
-before data can be passed. Normally, opening the FIFO blocks
-until the other end is opened also.
-.PP
-A process can open a FIFO in non-blocking mode. In this
-case, opening for read only will succeed even if noone has
-opened on the write side yet; opening for write only will
-fail with ENXIO (no such device or address) unless the other
-end has already been opened.
-.PP
-Under Linux, opening a FIFO for read and write will succeed
-both in blocking and non-blocking mode. POSIX leaves this
-behaviour undefined. This can be used to open a FIFO for
-writing while there are no readers available. A process
-that uses both ends of the connection in order to communicate
-with itself should be very careful to avoid deadlocks.
-.SH NOTES
-When a process tries to write to a FIFO that is not opened
-for read on the other side, the process is sent a SIGPIPE
-signal.
-
-FIFO special files can be created by
-.BR mkfifo (3),
-and are specially indicated in
-.IR "ls -l" .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR mkfifo (3),
-.BR mkfifo (1),
-.BR pipe (2),
-.BR socketpair (2),
-.BR open (2),
-.BR signal (2),
-.BR sigaction (2)
diff --git a/raw/man4/hd.4 b/raw/man4/hd.4
deleted file mode 100644
index 8de8e4c..0000000
--- a/raw/man4/hd.4
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 16:56:20 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 21:38:51 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" (and some more by aeb)
-.\"
-.TH HD 4 1992-12-17 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-hd \- MFM/IDE hard disk devices
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBhd*\fP devices are block devices to access MFM/IDE hard disk drives
-in raw mode. The master drive on the primary IDE controller (major device
-number 3) is \fBhda\fR; the slave drive is \fBhdb\fR. The master
-drive of the second controller (major device number 22) is \fBhdc\fR
-and the slave \fBhdd\fR.
-.LP
-General IDE block device names have the form
-.BI hd X\c
-, or
-.BI hd XP\c
-, where
-.I X
-is a letter denoting the physical drive, and
-.I P
-is a number denoting the partition on that physical drive.
-The first form,
-.BI hd X,
-is used to address the whole drive.
-Partition numbers are assigned in the order the partitions
-are discovered, and only non-empty, non-extended partitions
-get a number. However, partition numbers 1-4 are given to the
-four partitions described in the MBR (the `primary' partitions),
-regardless of whether they are unused or extended.
-Thus, the first logical partition will be
-.BI hd X 5\c
-\&.
-Both DOS-type partitioning and BSD-disklabel partitioning are supported.
-You can have at most 63 partitions on an IDE disk.
-.LP
-For example,
-.B /dev/hda
-refers to all of the first IDE drive in the system; and
-.B /dev/hdb3
-refers to the third DOS `primary' partition on the second one.
-.LP
-They are typically created by:
-.RS
-.sp
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hda b 3 0
-.br
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hda1 b 3 1
-.br
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hda2 b 3 2
-.br
-\&...
-.br
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hda8 b 3 8
-.br
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hdb b 3 64
-.br
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hdb1 b 3 65
-.br
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hdb2 b 3 66
-.br
-\&...
-.br
-mknod -m 660 /dev/hdb8 b 3 72
-.br
-chown root:disk /dev/hd*
-.RE
-.SH FILES
-/dev/hd*
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR mknod (1),
-.BR chown (1),
-.BR mount (8),
-.BR sd (4)
diff --git a/raw/man5/acct.5 b/raw/man5/acct.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 4e62eae..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/acct.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1995 Dirk Eddelbuettel (Dirk.Eddelbuettel at qed.econ.queensu.ca)
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.TH ACCT 5 1995-10-31 "Debian GNU/Linux"
-.SH NAME
-acct \- execution accounting file
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/acct.h>
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The kernel maintains an accounting information structure for all
-processes. If a process terminates, and accounting is enabled, the kernel
-calls the
-.BR acct (2)
-function to prepare, and then append, a record for this process
-to the accounting file. The accounting structure
-.B "struct acct"
-is also described in the file
-.IR /usr/include/linux/acct.h .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR acct (2),
-.BR sa (1)
diff --git a/raw/man5/aliases.5 b/raw/man5/aliases.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b3f7ef..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/aliases.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Sendmail, Inc. and its suppliers.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1997 Eric P. Allman. All rights reserved.
-.\" Copyright (c) 1985, 1991, 1993
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" By using this file, you agree to the terms and conditions set
-.\" forth in the LICENSE file which can be found at the top level of
-.\" the sendmail distribution.
-.\"
-.\"
-.\" $Id: aliases.5,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.\"
-.TH ALIASES 5 "$Date: 2003/12/20 03:31:53 $"
-.SH NAME
-aliases
-\- aliases file for sendmail
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B aliases
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This file describes user
-ID
-aliases used by
-sendmail.
-The file resides in
-/etc/mail
-and
-is formatted as a series of lines of the form
-.IP
-name: addr_1, addr_2, addr_3, . . .
-.PP
-The
-.I name
-is the name to alias, and the
-.I addr_n
-are the aliases for that name.
-.I addr_n
-can be another alias, a local username, a local filename,
-a command,
-an include file,
-or an external address.
-.TP
-.B Local Username
-username
-.IP
-The username must be available via getpwnam(3).
-.TP
-.B Local Filename
-/path/name
-.IP
-Messages are appended to the file specified by the full pathname
-(starting with a slash (/))
-.TP
-.B Command
-|command
-.IP
-A command starts with a pipe symbol (|),
-it receives messages via standard input.
-.TP
-.B Include File
-:include: /path/name
-.IP
-The aliases in pathname are added to the aliases for
-.I name.
-.TP
-.B E-Mail Address
-user at domain
-.IP
-An e-mail address in RFC 822 format.
-.PP
-Lines beginning with white space are continuation lines.
-Another way to continue lines is by placing a backslash
-directly before a newline.
-Lines beginning with
-#
-are comments.
-.PP
-Aliasing occurs only on local names.
-Loops can not occur, since no message will be sent to any person more than once.
-.PP
-After aliasing has been done, local and valid recipients who have a
-``.forward''
-file in their home directory have messages forwarded to the
-list of users defined in that file.
-.PP
-This is only the raw data file; the actual aliasing information is
-placed into a binary format in the file
-/etc/mail/aliases.db
-using the program
-newaliases(1).
-A
-newaliases
-command should be executed each time the aliases file is changed for the
-change to take effect.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-newaliases(1),
-dbm(3),
-dbopen(3),
-db_open(3),
-sendmail(8)
-.PP
-.I
-SENDMAIL Installation and Operation Guide.
-.PP
-.I
-SENDMAIL An Internetwork Mail Router.
-.SH BUGS
-If you have compiled
-sendmail
-with DBM support instead of NEWDB,
-you may have encountered problems in
-dbm(3)
-restricting a single alias to about 1000 bytes of information.
-You can get longer aliases by ``chaining''; that is, make the last name in
-the alias be a dummy name which is a continuation alias.
-.SH HISTORY
-The
-.B aliases
-file format appeared in
-4.0BSD.
diff --git a/raw/man5/environ.5 b/raw/man5/environ.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 88c3914..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/environ.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de),
-.\" Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\" and Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl), Fri Feb 14 21:47:50 1997.
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 10:45:30 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 21 21:25:26 1996 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 17:47:19 1996 by Eric S. Raymond (esr at thyrsus.com)
-.\" Modified Wed Aug 27 20:28:58 1997 by Nicol?s Lichtmaier (nick at debian.org)
-.\" Modified Mon Sep 21 00:00:26 1998 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Wed Jan 24 06:37:24 2001 by Eric S. Raymond (esr at thyrsus.com)
-.\" Modified Thu Dec 13 23:53:27 2001 by Martin Schulze <joey at infodrom.org>
-.\"
-.TH ENVIRON 5 2001-12-14 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-environ \- user environment
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ad l
-.nf
-.B extern char **environ;
-.br
-.fi
-.ad b
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The variable
-.I environ
-points to an array of strings called the `environment'.
-(This variable must be declared in the user program,
-but is declared in the header file
-.I unistd.h
-in case the header files came from libc4 or libc5, and
-in case they came from glibc and
-.B _GNU_SOURCE
-was defined.)
-This array of strings is made available to the process by the
-.BR exec (3)
-call that started the process. By convention these strings
-have the form `\fIname\fP\fB=\fP\fIvalue\fP'. Common examples are:
-.TP
-.B USER
-The name of the logged-in user (used by some BSD-derived programs).
-.TP
-.B LOGNAME
-The name of the logged-in user (used by some System-V derived programs).
-.TP
-.B HOME
-A user's login directory, set by
-.BR login (1)
-from the password file
-.BR passwd (5).
-.TP
-.B LANG
-The name of a locale to use for locale categories when not overridden
-by \fBLC_ALL\fP or more specific environment variables like
-\fBLC_COLLATE\fP, \fBLC_CTYPE\fP, \fBLC_MESSAGES\fP, \fBLC_MONETARY\fP,
-\fBLC_NUMERIC\fP, \fBLC_TIME\fP, cf.
-.BR locale (5).
-.TP
-.B PATH
-The sequence of directory prefixes that \fBsh\fP(1) and many other
-programs apply in searching for a file known by an incomplete path name.
-The prefixes are separated by `\fB:\fP'.
-(Similarly one has \fBCDPATH\fP used by some shells to find the target
-of a change directory command, \fBMANPATH\fP used by \fBman\fP(1) to
-find manual pages, etc.)
-.TP
-.B PWD
-The current working directory. Set by some shells.
-.TP
-.B SHELL
-The file name of the user's login shell.
-.TP
-.B TERM
-The terminal type for which output is to be prepared.
-.TP
-.B PAGER
-The user's preferred utility to display text files.
-.TP
-.BR EDITOR / VISUAL
-The user's preferred utility to edit text files.
-.TP
-.B BROWSER
-The user's preferred utility to browse URLs. Sequence of colon-separated
-browser commands. See http://www.tuxedo.org/~esr/BROWSER/ .
-.PP
-Further names may be placed in the environment by the \fBexport\fP
-command and `name=value' in
-.BR sh (1),
-or by the \fBsetenv\fP command if you use
-.BR csh (1).
-Arguments may also be placed in the
-environment at the point of an
-.BR exec (3).
-A C program can manipulate its environment using the functions
-.BR getenv (3),
-.BR putenv (3),
-.BR setenv (3),
-and
-.BR unsetenv (3).
-
-Note that the behaviour of many programs and library routines is
-influenced by the presence or value of certain environment variables.
-A random collection:
-.LP
-The variables
-.BR LANG ", " LANGUAGE ", " NLSPATH ", " LOCPATH ", " LC_ALL ", " LC_MESSAGES ", "
-etc. influence locale handling, cf.
-.BR locale (5).
-.LP
-.B TMPDIR
-influences the path prefix of names created by
-\fBtmpnam(3)\fP and other routines, the temporary directory used by
-\fBsort\fP(1) and other programs, etc.
-.LP
-.BR LD_LIBRARY_PATH ", " LD_PRELOAD
-and other LD_* variables influence
-the behaviour of the dynamic loader/linker.
-.LP
-.B POSIXLY_CORRECT
-makes certain programs and library routines follow
-the prescriptions of POSIX.
-.LP
-The behaviour of \fBmalloc\fP(3) is influenced by MALLOC_* variables.
-.LP
-The variable
-.B HOSTALIASES
-gives the name of a file containing aliases
-to be used with \fBgethostbyname\fP(3).
-.LP
-.BR TZ " and " TZDIR
-give time zone information used by
-.BR tzset (3)
-and through that by functions like
-.IR ctime (),
-.IR localtime (),
-.IR mktime (),
-.IR strftime ().
-See also
-.BR tzselect (1).
-.LP
-.B TERMCAP
-gives information on how to address a given terminal
-(or gives the name of a file containing such information).
-.LP
-.BR COLUMNS " and " LINES
-tell applications about the window size, possibly overriding the actual size.
-.LP
-.BR PRINTER " or " LPDEST
-may specify the desired printer to use. See
-.BR lpr (1).
-.LP
-Etc.
-.SH BUGS
-Clearly there is a security risk here. Many a system command has been
-tricked into mischief by a user who specified unusual values for
-.BR IFS " or " LD_LIBRARY_PATH .
-
-There is also the risk of name space pollution.
-Programs like
-.I make
-and
-.I autoconf
-allow overriding of default utility names from the
-environment with similarly named variables in all caps.
-Thus one uses
-.B CC
-to select the desired C compiler (and similarly
-.BR MAKE ,
-.BR AR ,
-.BR AS ,
-.BR FC ,
-.BR LD ,
-.BR LEX ,
-.BR RM ,
-.BR YACC ,
-etc.).
-However, in some traditional uses such an environment variable
-gives options for the program instead of a pathname.
-Thus, one has
-.BR MORE ,
-.BR LESS ,
-and
-.BR GZIP .
-Such usage is considered mistaken, and to be avoided in new
-programs. The authors of
-.I gzip
-should consider renaming their option to
-.BR GZIP_OPT .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR login (1),
-.BR sh (1),
-.BR bash (1),
-.BR csh (1),
-.BR tcsh (1),
-.BR execve (2),
-.BR exec (3),
-.BR getenv (3),
-.BR putenv (3),
-.BR setenv (3),
-.BR clearenv (3),
-.BR unsetenv (3),
-.BR locale (5)
diff --git a/raw/man5/fs.5 b/raw/man5/fs.5
deleted file mode 100644
index e63e09b..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/fs.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,165 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1996 Daniel Quinlan (Daniel.Quinlan at linux.org)
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.TH FILESYSTEMS 5 2001-12-07 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.nh
-.SH NAME
-filesystems \- Linux filesystem types: minix, ext, ext2, ext3, xia, msdos,
-umsdos, vfat, proc, nfs, iso9660, hpfs, sysv, smb, ncpfs
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-When, as is customary, the
-.B proc
-filesystem is mounted on
-.IR /proc ,
-you can find in the file
-.I /proc/filesystems
-which filesystems your kernel currently supports.
-If you need a currently unsupported one, insert the corresponding
-module or recompile the kernel.
-
-In order to use a filesystem, you have to
-.I mount
-it, see
-.BR mount (8)
-for the mount command, and for the available mount options.
-
-Below a short description of a few of the available filesystems.
-
-.TP
-.B "minix"
-is the filesystem used in the Minix operating system, the first to run
-under Linux. It has a number of shortcomings: a 64MB partition size
-limit, short filenames, a single time stamp, etc.
-It remains useful for floppies and RAM disks.
-.TP
-.B ext
-is an elaborate extension of the
-.B minix
-filesystem. It has been completely superseded by the second version
-of the extended filesystem
-.RB ( ext2 )
-and has been removed from the kernel (in 2.1.21).
-.TP
-.B ext2
-is the high performance disk filesystem used by Linux for fixed disks
-as well as removable media.
-The second extended filesystem was designed as an extension of the
-extended file system
-.RB ( ext ).
-.B ext2
-offers the best performance (in terms of speed and CPU usage) of
-the filesystems supported under Linux.
-.TP
-.B ext3
-is a journaling version of the ext2 filesystem. It is easy to
-switch back and forth between ext2 and ext3. ext3 offers the most
-complete set of journaling options available among journaling
-filesystems.
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------
-.TP
-.B xiafs
-was designed and implemented to be a stable, safe filesystem by
-extending the Minix filesystem code. It provides the basic most
-requested features without undue complexity.
-The
-.B xia
-filesystem is no longer actively developed or maintained.
-It was removed from the kernel in 2.1.21.
-.TP
-.B msdos
-is the filesystem used by DOS, Windows, and some OS/2 computers.
-.B msdos
-filenames can be no longer than 8 characters, followed by an
-optional period and 3 character extension.
-.TP
-.B umsdos
-is an extended DOS filesystem used by Linux. It adds capability for
-long filenames, UID/GID, POSIX permissions, and special files
-(devices, named pipes, etc.) under the DOS filesystem, without
-sacrificing compatibility with DOS.
-.TP
-.B vfat
-is an extended DOS filesystem used by Microsoft Windows95 and Windows NT.
-VFAT adds the capability to use long filenames under the MSDOS filesystem.
-.TP
-.B proc
-is a pseudo-filesystem which is used as an interface to kernel data
-structures rather than reading and interpreting
-.IR /dev/kmem .
-In particular, its files do not take disk space. See proc(5).
-.TP
-.B iso9660
-is a CD-ROM filesystem type conforming to the ISO 9660 standard.
-.RS
-.TP
-.B "High Sierra"
-Linux supports High Sierra, the precursor to the ISO 9660 standard for
-CD-ROM filesystems. It is automatically recognized within the
-.B iso9660
-filesystem support under Linux.
-.TP
-.B "Rock Ridge"
-Linux also supports the System Use Sharing Protocol records specified
-by the Rock Ridge Interchange Protocol. They are used to further
-describe the files in the
-.B iso9660
-filesystem to a UNIX host, and provide information such as long
-filenames, UID/GID, POSIX permissions, and devices. It is
-automatically recognized within the
-.B iso9660
-filesystem support under Linux.
-.RE
-.TP
-.B hpfs
-is the High Performance Filesystem, used in OS/2. This filesystem is
-read-only under Linux due to the lack of available documentation.
-.TP
-.B sysv
-is an implementation of the SystemV/Coherent filesystem for Linux. It
-implements all of Xenix FS, SystemV/386 FS, and Coherent FS.
-.TP
-.B nfs
-is the network filesystem used to access disks located on remote computers.
-.TP
-.B smb
-is a network filesystem that supports the SMB protocol, used by
-Windows for Workgroups, Windows NT, and Lan Manager.
-.sp
-To use
-.B smb
-fs, you need a special mount program, which can be found in the ksmbfs
-package, found at
-.IR ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/system/Filesystems/smbfs .
-.TP
-.B ncpfs
-is a network filesystem that supports the NCP protocol, used by
-Novell NetWare.
-.sp
-To use
-.BR ncpfs ,
-you need special programs, which can be found at
-.IR ftp://linux01.gwdg.de/pub/ncpfs .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR proc (5),
-.BR fsck (8),
-.BR mkfs (8),
-.BR mount (8)
diff --git a/raw/man5/group.5 b/raw/man5/group.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ff53d0..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/group.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 17:06:03 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.TH GROUP 5 1992-12-29 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-group \- user group file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fB/etc/group\fP is an ASCII file which defines the groups to which users
-belong. There is one entry per line, and each line has the format:
-.sp
-.RS
-group_name:passwd:GID:user_list
-.RE
-.sp
-The field descriptions are:
-.IP group_name
-the name of the group.
-.IP password
-the (encrypted) group password. If this field is
-empty, no password is needed.
-.IP GID
-the numerical group ID.
-.IP user_list
-all the group member's user names, separated by commas.
-.SH FILES
-/etc/group
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR login (1),
-.BR newgrp (1),
-.BR passwd (5)
diff --git a/raw/man5/host.conf.5 b/raw/man5/host.conf.5
deleted file mode 100644
index e7088b2..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/host.conf.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,192 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1997 Martin Schulze (joey at infodrom.north.de)
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Much of the text is copied from the manpage of resolv+(8).
-.\"
-.\" 2003-08-23 Martin Schulze <joey at infodrom.org> Updated according to glibc 2.3.2
-.TH HOST.CONF 5 2003-08-23 "Debian GNU/Linux" "Linux System Administration"
-.SH NAME
-host.conf \- resolver configuration file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The file
-.I /etc/host.conf
-contains configuration information specific to the resolver library.
-It should contain one configuration keyword per line, followed by
-appropriate configuration information. The keywords recognized are
-.IR order ", " trim ", " multi ", " nospoof ", " spoof ", and " reorder .
-These keywords are described below.
-
-.TP
-.I order
-This keyword specifies how host lookups are to be performed. It
-should be followed by one or more lookup methods, separated by commas.
-Valid methods are
-.IR bind ", " hosts ", and " nis .
-.TP
-.I trim
-This keyword may be listed more than once. Each time it should be
-followed by a list of domains, separated by colons (`:'), semicolons
-(`;') or commas (`,'), with the leading dot. When set, the
-resolv+ library will automatically trim the given domain name from the
-end of any hostname resolved via DNS. This is intended for use with
-local hosts and domains. (Related note: trim will not affect hostnames
-gathered via NIS or the hosts file. Care should be taken to
-ensure that the first hostname for each entry in the hosts file is
-fully qualified or non-qualified, as appropriate for the local
-installation.)
-.TP
-.I multi
-Valid values are
-.IR on " and " off .
-If set to
-.IR on ,
-the resolv+ library will return all valid addresses for a host that
-appears in the
-.I /etc/hosts
-file,
-instead of only the first. This is
-.I off
-by default, as it may cause a substantial performance loss at sites
-with large hosts files.
-.TP
-.I nospoof
-Valid values are
-.IR on " and " off .
-If set to
-.IR on ,
-the resolv+ library will attempt to prevent hostname spoofing to
-enhance the security of
-.BR rlogin " and " rsh .
-It works as follows: after performing a host address lookup, resolv+
-will perform a hostname lookup for that address. If the two hostnames
-do not match, the query will fail.
-The default value is
-.IR off .
-.TP
-.I spoofalert
-Valid values are
-.IR on " and " off .
-If this option is set to
-.I on
-and the
-.I nospoof
-option is also set, resolv+ will log a warning of the error via the
-syslog facility. The default value is
-.IR off .
-.TP
-.I spoof
-Valid values are
-.IR off ", " nowarn " and " warn .
-If this option is set to
-.IR off ,
-spoofed addresses are permitted and no warnings will be emitted
-via the syslog facility.
-If this option is set to
-.IR warn ,
-resolv+ will attempt to prevent hostname spoofing to
-enhance the security and log a warning of the error via the syslog
-facility.
-If this option is set to
-.IR nowarn ,
-the resolv+ library will attempt to prevent hostname spoofing to
-enhance the security but not emit warnings via the syslog facility.
-Setting this option to anything else is equal to setting it to
-.IR nowarn .
-.TP
-.I reorder
-Valid values are
-.IR on " and " off .
-If set to
-.IR on ,
-resolv+ will attempt to reorder host addresses so that local addresses
-(i.e., on the same subnet) are listed first when a
-.BR gethostbyname (3)
-is performed. Reordering is done for all lookup methods. The default
-value is
-.IR off .
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-There are six environment variables that can be used to allow users to
-override the behavior which is configured in
-.IR /etc/host.conf .
-.TP
-.B RESOLV_HOST_CONF
-If set this variable points to a file that should be read instead of
-.IR /etc/host.conf .
-.TP
-.B RESOLV_SERV_ORDER
-Overrides the
-.I order
-command.
-.TP
-.B RESOLV_SPOOF_CHECK
-Overrides the
-.IR nospoof ", " spoofalert " and " spoof
-commands in the same way as the
-.I spoof
-command is parsed. Valid values are
-.IR off ", " nowarn " and " warn .
-.TP
-.B RESOLV_MULTI
-Overrides the
-.I multi
-command.
-.TP
-.B RESOLV_REORDER
-Overrides the
-.I reorder
-command.
-.TP
-.B RESOLV_ADD_TRIM_DOMAINS
-A list of domains, separated by colons (`:'), semicolons (`;') or
-commas (`,'), with the leading dot, which will be added to the list of
-domains that should be trimmed.
-.TP
-.B RESOLV_OVERRIDE_TRIM_DOMAINS
-A list of domains, separated by colons (`:'), semicolons (`;') or
-commas (`,'), with the leading dot, which will replace the list of
-domains that should be trimmed. Overrides the
-.I trim
-command.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.I /etc/host.conf
-Resolver configuration file
-.TP
-.I /etc/resolv.conf
-Resolver configuration file
-.TP
-.I /etc/hosts
-Local hosts database
-.SH NOTES
-The following differences exist compared to the original implementation.
-A new command
-.I spoof
-and a new environment variable
-.B RESOLV_SPOOF_CHECK
-can take arguments like
-.IR off ", " nowarn " and " warn .
-Line comments can appear anywhere and not only at the beginning of a line.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR gethostbyname (3),
-.BR hostname (7),
-.BR resolv+ (8),
-.BR named (8)
diff --git a/raw/man5/info.5 b/raw/man5/info.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c39809..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/info.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-.\" info(5)
-.\" Copyright (C) 1998 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
-.\" this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
-.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-.\" manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-.\" versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a
-.\" translation approved by the Foundation.
-.\"
-.TH INFO 5 "GNU Info" "FSF"
-.SH NAME
-info \- readable online documentation
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The Info file format is an easily-parsable representation for online
-documents. It can be read by
-.I emacs(1)
-and
-.I info(1)
-among other programs.
-.PP
-Info files are usually created from
-.I texinfo(5)
-sources by
-.IR makeinfo(1) ,
-but can be created from scratch if so desired.
-.PP
-For a full description of the Texinfo language and associated tools,
-please see the Texinfo manual (written in Texinfo itself). Most likely,
-running this command from your shell:
-.RS
-.I info texinfo
-.RE
-or this key sequence from inside Emacs:
-.RS
-.I M-x info RET m texinfo RET
-.RE
-will get you there.
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo-<version>.tar.gz
-.br
-or any GNU mirror site.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Please send bug reports to bug-texinfo at gnu.org,
-general questions and discussion to help-texinfo at gnu.org.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-info(1), install-info(1), makeinfo(1), texi2dvi(1),
-.br
-texindex(1).
-.br
-emacs(1), tex(1).
-.br
-texinfo(5).
diff --git a/raw/man5/inittab.5 b/raw/man5/inittab.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 4915d64..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/inittab.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,248 +0,0 @@
-.\"{{{}}}
-.\"{{{ Title
-.TH INITTAB 5 "Dec 4, 2001" "" "Linux System Administrator's Manual"
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Name
-.SH NAME
-inittab \- format of the inittab file used by the sysv-compatible init
-process
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Description
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBinittab\fP file describes which processes are started at bootup and
-during normal operation (e.g.\& /etc/init.d/boot, /etc/init.d/rc, gettys...).
-.BR Init (8)
-distinguishes multiple \fIrunlevels\fP, each of which can have its own set of
-processes that are started. Valid runlevels are \fB0\fP\-\fB6\fP plus
-\fBA\fP, \fBB\fP, and \fBC\fP for \fBondemand\fP entries. An entry in the
-\fBinittab\fP file has the following format:
-.RS
-.sp
-\fIid\fP:\fIrunlevels\fP:\fIaction\fP:\fIprocess\fP
-.sp
-.RE
-Lines beginning with `#' are ignored.
-.\"{{{ id
-.IP \fIid\fP
-is a unique sequence of 1-4 characters which identifies an entry in
-.B inittab
-(for versions of sysvinit compiled with the \fIold\fP libc5 (< 5.2.18) or
-a.out libraries the limit is 2 characters).
-.sp
-Note: traditionally, for getty and other login processes, the value of the
-\fIid\fP field is kept the same as the suffix of the corresponding tty, e.g.\&
-\fB1\fP for \fBtty1\fP. Some ancient login accounting programs might
-expect this, though I can't think of any.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ runlevels
-.IP \fIrunlevels\fP
-lists the runlevels for which the specified action should be taken.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ action
-.IP \fIaction\fP
-describes which action should be taken.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ process
-.IP \fIprocess\fP
-specifies the process to be executed. If the process field starts with
-a `+' character,
-.B init
-will not do utmp and wtmp accounting for that process. This is needed for
-gettys that insist on doing their own utmp/wtmp housekeeping. This is also
-a historic bug.
-.\"}}}
-.PP
-The \fIrunlevels\fP field may contain multiple characters for different
-runlevels. For example, \fB123\fP specifies that the process should be
-started in runlevels 1, 2, and 3.
-The \fIrunlevels\fP for \fBondemand\fP entries may contain an \fBA\fP,
-\fBB\fP, or \fBC\fP. The \fIrunlevels\fP field of \fBsysinit\fP,
-\fBboot\fP, and \fBbootwait\fP entries are ignored.
-.PP
-When the system runlevel is changed, any running processes that are not
-specified for the new runlevel are killed, first with \s-2SIGTERM\s0,
-then with \s-2SIGKILL\s0.
-.PP
-Valid actions for the \fIaction\fP field are:
-.\"{{{ respawn
-.IP \fBrespawn\fP
-The process will be restarted whenever it terminates (e.g.\& getty).
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ wait
-.IP \fBwait\fP
-The process will be started once when the specified runlevel is entered and
-.B init
-will wait for its termination.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ once
-.IP \fBonce\fP
-The process will be executed once when the specified runlevel is
-entered.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ boot
-.IP \fBboot\fP
-The process will be executed during system boot. The \fIrunlevels\fP
-field is ignored.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ bootwait
-.IP \fBbootwait\fP
-The process will be executed during system boot, while
-.B init
-waits for its termination (e.g.\& /etc/rc).
-The \fIrunlevels\fP field is ignored.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ off
-.IP \fBoff\fP
-This does nothing.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ ondemand
-.IP \fBondemand\fP
-A process marked with an \fBondemand\fP runlevel will be executed
-whenever the specified \fBondemand\fP runlevel is called. However, no
-runlevel change will occur (\fBondemand\fP runlevels are `a', `b',
-and `c').
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ initdefault
-.IP \fBinitdefault\fP
-An \fBinitdefault\fP entry specifies the runlevel which should be
-entered after system boot. If none exists,
-.B init
-will ask for a runlevel on the console. The \fIprocess\fP field is ignored.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ sysinit
-.IP \fBsysinit\fP
-The process will be executed during system boot. It will be
-executed before any \fBboot\fP or \fB bootwait\fP entries.
-The \fIrunlevels\fP field is ignored.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ powerwait
-.IP \fBpowerwait\fP
-The process will be executed when the power goes down. Init is usually
-informed about this by a process talking to a UPS connected to the computer.
-\fBInit\fP will wait for the process to finish before continuing.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ powerfail
-.IP \fBpowerfail\fP
-As for \fBpowerwait\fP, except that \fBinit\fP does not wait for the process's
-completion.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ powerokwait
-.IP \fBpowerokwait\fP
-This process will be executed as soon as \fBinit\fP is informormed that the
-power has been restored.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ powerfailnow
-.IP \fBpowerfailnow\fP
-This process will be executed when \fBinit\fP is told that the battery of
-the external UPS is almost empty and the power is failing (provided that the
-external UPS and the monitoring process are able to detect this condition).
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ ctrlaltdel
-.IP \fBctrlaltdel\fP
-The process will be executed when \fBinit\fP receives the SIGINT signal.
-This means that someone on the system console has pressed the
-\fBCTRL\-ALT\-DEL\fP key combination. Typically one wants to execute some
-sort of \fBshutdown\fP either to get into single\-user level or to
-reboot the machine.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ kbrequest
-.IP \fBkbrequest\fP
-The process will be executed when \fBinit\fP receives a signal from the
-keyboard handler that a special key combination was pressed on the
-console keyboard.
-.sp
-The documentation for this function is not complete yet; more documentation
-can be found in the kbd-x.xx packages (most recent was kbd-0.94 at
-the time of this writing). Basically you want to map some keyboard
-combination to the "KeyboardSignal" action. For example, to map Alt-Uparrow
-for this purpose use the following in your keymaps file:
-.RS
-.sp
-alt keycode 103 = KeyboardSignal
-.sp
-.RE
-.\"}}}
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Examples
-.SH EXAMPLES
-This is an example of a inittab which resembles the old Linux inittab:
-.RS
-.sp
-.nf
-.ne 7
-# inittab for linux
-id:1:initdefault:
-rc::bootwait:/etc/rc
-1:1:respawn:/etc/getty 9600 tty1
-2:1:respawn:/etc/getty 9600 tty2
-3:1:respawn:/etc/getty 9600 tty3
-4:1:respawn:/etc/getty 9600 tty4
-.fi
-.sp
-.RE
-This inittab file executes \fB/etc/rc\fP during boot and starts gettys
-on tty1\-tty4.
-.PP
-A more elaborate \fBinittab\fP with different runlevels (see the comments
-inside):
-.RS
-.sp
-.nf
-.ne 19
-# Level to run in
-id:2:initdefault:
-
-# Boot-time system configuration/initialization script.
-si::sysinit:/etc/init.d/rcS
-
-# What to do in single-user mode.
-~:S:wait:/sbin/sulogin
-
-# /etc/init.d executes the S and K scripts upon change
-# of runlevel.
-#
-# Runlevel 0 is halt.
-# Runlevel 1 is single-user.
-# Runlevels 2-5 are multi-user.
-# Runlevel 6 is reboot.
-
-l0:0:wait:/etc/init.d/rc 0
-l1:1:wait:/etc/init.d/rc 1
-l2:2:wait:/etc/init.d/rc 2
-l3:3:wait:/etc/init.d/rc 3
-l4:4:wait:/etc/init.d/rc 4
-l5:5:wait:/etc/init.d/rc 5
-l6:6:wait:/etc/init.d/rc 6
-
-# What to do at the "3 finger salute".
-ca::ctrlaltdel:/sbin/shutdown -t1 -h now
-
-# Runlevel 2,3: getty on virtual consoles
-# Runlevel 3: getty on terminal (ttyS0) and modem (ttyS1)
-1:23:respawn:/sbin/getty tty1 VC linux
-2:23:respawn:/sbin/getty tty2 VC linux
-3:23:respawn:/sbin/getty tty3 VC linux
-4:23:respawn:/sbin/getty tty4 VC linux
-S0:3:respawn:/sbin/getty -L 9600 ttyS0 vt320
-S1:3:respawn:/sbin/mgetty -x0 -D ttyS1
-
-.fi
-.sp
-.RE
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Files
-.SH FILES
-/etc/inittab
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Author
-.SH AUTHOR
-\fBInit\fP was written by Miquel van Smoorenburg
-(miquels at cistron.nl). This manual page was written by
-Sebastian Lederer (lederer at francium.informatik.uni-bonn.de) and modified
-by Michael Haardt (u31b3hs at pool.informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ See also
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR init (8),
-.BR telinit (8)
-.\"}}}
diff --git a/raw/man5/ipc.5 b/raw/man5/ipc.5
deleted file mode 100644
index d3c3211..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/ipc.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,383 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1993 Giorgio Ciucci (giorgio at crcc.it)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.TH IPC 5 1993-11-01 "Linux 0.99.13" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-ipc \- System V interprocess communication mechanisms
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B
-# include <sys/types.h>
-.B
-# include <sys/ipc.h>
-.B
-# include <sys/msg.h>
-.B
-# include <sys/sem.h>
-.B
-# include <sys/shm.h>
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page refers to the Linux implementation of the System V
-interprocess communication mechanisms:
-message queues, semaphore sets, and shared memory segments.
-In the following, the word
-.B resource
-means an instantiation of one among such mechanisms.
-.SS Resource Access Permissions
-For each resource, the system uses a common structure of type
-.BR "struct ipc_perm"
-to store information needed in determining permissions to perform an
-ipc operation.
-The
-.B ipc_perm
-structure, defined by the
-.I <sys/ipc.h>
-system header file, includes the following members:
-.sp
-.B
- ushort cuid;
-/* creator user id */
-.br
-.B
- ushort cgid;
-/* creator group id */
-.br
-.B
- ushort uid;
-/* owner user id */
-.br
-.B
- ushort gid;
-/* owner group id */
-.br
-.B
- ushort mode;
-/* r/w permissions */
-.PP
-The
-.B mode
-member of the
-.B ipc_perm
-structure defines, with its lower 9 bits, the access permissions to the
-resource for a process executing an ipc system call.
-The permissions are interpreted as follows:
-.sp
-.nf
- 0400 Read by user.
- 0200 Write by user.
-.sp .5
- 0040 Read by group.
- 0020 Write by group.
-.sp .5
- 0004 Read by others.
- 0002 Write by others.
-.fi
-.PP
-Bits 0100, 0010, and 0001 (the execute bits) are unused by the system.
-Furthermore,
-"write"
-effectively means
-"alter"
-for a semaphore set.
-.PP
-The same system header file also defines the following symbolic
-constants:
-.TP 14
-.B IPC_CREAT
-Create entry if key doesn't exist.
-.TP
-.B IPC_EXCL
-Fail if key exists.
-.TP
-.B IPC_NOWAIT
-Error if request must wait.
-.TP
-.B IPC_PRIVATE
-Private key.
-.TP
-.B IPC_RMID
-Remove resource.
-.TP
-.B IPC_SET
-Set resource options.
-.TP
-.B IPC_STAT
-Get resource options.
-.PP
-Note that
-.B IPC_PRIVATE
-is a
-.B key_t
-type, while all the other symbolic constants are flag fields and can
-be OR'ed into an
-.B int
-type variable.
-.SS Message Queues
-A message queue is uniquely identified by a positive integer
-.RI "(its " msqid )
-and has an associated data structure of type
-.BR "struct msquid_ds" ,
-defined in
-.IR <sys/msg.h> ,
-containing the following members:
-.sp
-.B
- struct ipc_perm msg_perm;
-.br
-.B
- ushort msg_qnum;
-/* no of messages on queue */
-.br
-.B
- ushort msg_qbytes;
-/* bytes max on a queue */
-.br
-.B
- ushort msg_lspid;
-/* pid of last msgsnd call */
-.br
-.B
- ushort msg_lrpid;
-/* pid of last msgrcv call */
-.br
-.B
- time_t msg_stime;
-/* last msgsnd time */
-.br
-.B
- time_t msg_rtime;
-/* last msgrcv time */
-.br
-.B
- time_t msg_ctime;
-/* last change time */
-.TP 11
-.B msg_perm
-.B ipc_perm
-structure that specifies the access permissions on the message
-queue.
-.TP
-.B msg_qnum
-Number of messages currently on the message queue.
-.TP
-.B msg_qbytes
-Maximum number of bytes of message text allowed on the message
-queue.
-.TP
-.B msg_lspid
-ID of the process that performed the last
-.B msgsnd
-system call.
-.TP
-.B msg_lrpid
-ID of the process that performed the last
-.B msgrcv
-system call.
-.TP
-.B msg_stime
-Time of the last
-.B msgsnd
-system call.
-.TP
-.B msg_rtime
-Time of the last
-.B msgcv
-system call.
-.TP
-.B msg_ctime
-Time of the last
-system call that changed a member of the
-.B msqid_ds
-structure.
-.SS Semaphore Sets
-A semaphore set is uniquely identified by a positive integer
-.RI "(its " semid )
-and has an associated data structure of type
-.BR "struct semid_ds" ,
-defined in
-.IR <sys/sem.h> ,
-containing the following members:
-.sp
-.B
- struct ipc_perm sem_perm;
-.br
-.B
- time_t sem_otime;
-/* last operation time */
-.br
-.B
- time_t sem_ctime;
-/* last change time */
-.br
-.B
- ushort sem_nsems;
-/* count of sems in set */
-.TP 11
-.B sem_perm
-.B ipc_perm
-structure that specifies the access permissions on the semaphore
-set.
-.TP
-.B sem_otime
-Time of last
-.B semop
-system call.
-.TP
-.B sem_ctime
-Time of last
-.B semctl
-system call that changed a member of the above structure or of one
-semaphore belonging to the set.
-.TP
-.B sem_nsems
-Number of semaphores in the set.
-Each semaphore of the set is referenced by a non-negative integer
-ranging from
-.B 0
-to
-.BR sem_nsems\-1 .
-.PP
-A semaphore is a data structure of type
-.B "struct sem"
-containing the following members:
-.sp
-.B
- ushort semval;
-/* semaphore value */
-.br
-.B
- short sempid;
-/* pid for last operation */
-.br
-.B
- ushort semncnt;
-/* nr awaiting semval to increase */
-.br
-.B
- ushort semzcnt;
-/* nr awaiting semval = 0 */
-.TP 11
-.B semval
-Semaphore value: a non-negative integer.
-.TP
-.B sempid
-ID of the last process that performed a semaphore operation
-on this semaphore.
-.TP
-.B semncnt
-Number of processes suspended awaiting for
-.B semval
-to increase.
-.TP
-.B semznt
-Number of processes suspended awaiting for
-.B semval
-to become zero.
-.SS Shared Memory Segments
-A shared memory segment is uniquely identified by a positive integer
-.RI "(its " shmid )
-and has an associated data structure of type
-.BR "struct shmid_ds" ,
-defined in
-.IR <sys/shm.h> ,
-containing the following members:
-.sp
-.B
- struct ipc_perm shm_perm;
-.br
-.B
- int shm_segsz;
-/* size of segment */
-.br
-.B
- ushort shm_cpid;
-/* pid of creator */
-.br
-.B
- ushort shm_lpid;
-/* pid, last operation */
-.br
-.B
- short shm_nattch;
-/* no. of current attaches */
-.br
-.B
- time_t shm_atime;
-/* time of last attach */
-.br
-.B
- time_t shm_dtime;
-/* time of last detach */
-.br
-.B
- time_t shm_ctime;
-/* time of last change */
-.TP 11
-.B shm_perm
-.B ipc_perm
-structure that specifies the access permissions on the shared memory
-segment.
-.TP
-.B shm_segsz
-Size in bytes of the shared memory segment.
-.TP
-.B shm_cpid
-ID of the process that created the shared memory segment.
-.TP
-.B shm_lpid
-ID of the last process that executed a
-.B shmat
-or
-.B shmdt
-system call.
-.TP
-.B shm_nattch
-Number of current alive attaches for this shared memory segment.
-.TP
-.B shm_atime
-Time of the last
-.B shmat
-system call.
-.TP
-.B shm_dtime
-Time of the last
-.B shmdt
-system call.
-.TP
-.B shm_ctime
-Time of the last
-.B shmctl
-system call that changed
-.BR shmid_ds .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ftok (3),
-.BR msgctl (2),
-.BR msgget (2),
-.BR msgrcv (2),
-.BR msgsnd (2),
-.BR semctl (2),
-.BR semget (2),
-.BR semop (2),
-.BR shmat (2),
-.BR shmctl (2),
-.BR shmget (2),
-.BR shmdt (2)
diff --git a/raw/man5/issue.5 b/raw/man5/issue.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 15d58e5..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/issue.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 11:06:22 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 17:47:19 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.TH ISSUE 5 1993-07-24 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-issue \- pre-login message and identification file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The file \fB/etc/issue\fP is a text file which contains a message or
-system identification to be printed before the login prompt. It may
-contain various \fB@\fP\fIchar\fP and \fB\e\fP\fIchar\fP sequences, if
-supported by
-.BR mingetty (1).
-.SH FILES
-/etc/issue
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR mingetty (1),
-.BR motd (5)
diff --git a/raw/man5/keymaps.5 b/raw/man5/keymaps.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 29aadfe..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/keymaps.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,441 +0,0 @@
-.\" keymaps.5 - Copyright (C) Andries Brouwer 1998
-.\" May be freely distributed.
-.\" @(#)keymaps.5 1.10 940130 aeb
-.TH KEYMAPS 5 "24 April 1998"
-.SH NAME
-keymaps \- keyboard table descriptions for loadkeys and dumpkeys
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "keymaps" "" "\fLkeymaps\fR \(em keyboard table descriptions for loadkeys and dumpkeys" ""
-.IX "loadkeys" "keyboard table descriptions" "\fLloadkeys\fR" "keyboard table descriptions"
-.IX "dumpkeys" "keyboard table descriptions" "\fLdumpkeys\fR" "keyboard table descriptions"
-.IX keyboard "table descriptions for loadkeys and dumpkeys" keyboard "table descriptions for \fLloadkeys\fR and \fLdumpkeys\fR"
-.IX "translation tables"
-.LP
-These files are used by
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-to modify the translation tables used by the kernel keyboard driver
-and generated by
-.BR dumpkeys (1)
-from those translation tables.
-.LP
-The format of these files is vaguely similar to the one accepted by
-.BR xmodmap (1).
-The file consists of charset or key or string definition lines
-interspersed with comments.
-.LP
-Comments are introduced with
-.B !
-or
-.B #
-characters and continue to the end of the line. Anything following one
-of these characters on that line is ignored. Note that comments need
-not begin from column one as with
-.BR xmodmap (1).
-.LP
-The syntax of keymap files is line oriented; a complete definition
-must fit on a single logical line. Logical lines can, however, be split
-into multiple physical lines by ending each subline with the backslash
-character (\\).
-.SH "INCLUDE FILES"
-A keymap can include other keymaps using the syntax
-.LP
-.RS
-include "pathname"
-.RE
-.LP
-.SH "CHARSET DEFINITIONS"
-A character set definition line is of the form:
-.LP
-.RS
-.EX
-charset "iso-8859-x"
-.EE
-.RE
-.LP
-It defines how following keysyms are to be interpreted.
-For example, in iso-8859-1 the symbol mu (or micro) has code 0265,
-while in iso-8859-7 the letter mu has code 0354.
-.SH "COMPLETE KEYCODE DEFINITIONS"
-Each complete key definition line is of the form:
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-.BI keycode " keynumber " = " keysym keysym keysym" \fR...
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-.I keynumber
-is the internal identification number of the key, roughly equivalent to
-the scan code of it.
-.I keynumber
-can be given in decimal, octal or hexadecimal notation.
-Octal is denoted by a leading zero and hexadecimal by the prefix
-.B 0x.
-.LP
-Each of the
-.I keysyms
-represent keyboard actions, of which up to 256 can be bound to a single
-key. The actions available include outputting character codes or
-character sequences, switching consoles or keymaps, booting the machine
-etc. (The complete list can be obtained from dumpkeys(1) by saying
-.BI " dumpkeys -l"
-\&.)
-.LP
-Each
-.I keysym
-may be prefixed by a '+' (plus sign), in wich case this keysym is treated
-as a "letter" and therefore affected by the "CapsLock" the same way as by
-"Shift" (to be correct, the CapsLock inverts the Shift state).
-The ASCII letters ('a'-'z' and 'A'-'Z') are made CapsLock'able by default.
-If Shift+CapsLock should not produce a lower case symbol, put lines like
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-.BI "keycode 30 = +a A"
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-in the map file.
-.LP
-Which of the actions bound to a given key is taken when it is pressed
-depends on what modifiers are in effect at that moment.
-The keyboard driver supports 8 modifiers. These modifiers are labeled
-(completely arbitrarily) Shift, AltGr, Control, Alt, ShiftL, ShiftR,
-CtrlL and CtrlR.
-Each of these modifiers has an associated weight of power of two
-according to the following table:
-.LP
-.RS
-.TP 24
-.I modifier
-.I weight
-.TP 24
-Shift
- 1
-.PD 0
-.TP 24
-AltGr
- 2
-.TP 24
-Control
- 4
-.TP 24
-Alt
- 8
-.TP 24
-ShiftL
- 16
-.TP 24
-ShiftR
- 32
-.TP 24
-CtrlL
- 64
-.TP 24
-CtrlR
-128
-.PD
-.RE
-.LP
-The effective action of a key is found out by adding up the weights of
-all the modifiers in effect. By default, no modifiers are in effect, so
-action number zero, i.e. the one in the first column in a key definition
-line, is taken when the key is pressed or released. When e.g. Shift and
-Alt modifiers are in effect, action number nine (from the 10th column)
-is the effective one.
-.LP
-Changing the state of what modifiers are in effect can be achieved by
-binding appropriate key actions to desired keys. For example, binding
-the symbol Shift to a key sets the Shift modifier in effect when that
-key is pressed and cancels the effect of that modifier when the key is
-released. Binding AltGr_Lock to a key sets AltGr in effect when the key
-is pressed and cancels the effect when the key is pressed again.
-(By default Shift, AltGr, Control and Alt are bound to the keys that bear
-a similar label; AltGr may denote the right Alt key.)
-.LP
-Note that you should be very careful when binding the modifier keys,
-otherwise you can end up with an unusable keyboard mapping. If you for
-example define a key to have Control in its first column and leave the
-rest of the columns to be VoidSymbols, you're in trouble. This is
-because pressing the key puts Control modifier in effect and the
-following actions are looked up from the fifth column (see the table
-above). So, when you release the key, the action from the fifth column
-is taken. It has VoidSymbol in it, so nothing happens. This means that
-the Control modifier is still in effect, although you have released the key.
-Re-pressing and releasing the key has no effect. To avoid this,
-you should always define all the columns to have the same modifier
-symbol. There is a handy short-hand notation for this, see below.
-.LP
-.I keysyms
-can be given in decimal, octal, hexadecimal, unicode or symbolic notation.
-The numeric notations use the same format as with
-.IR keynumber .
-Unicode notation is "U+" followed by four hexadecimal digits.
-The symbolic notation resembles that used by
-.BR xmodmap (1).
-Notable differences are the number symbols. The numeric
-symbols '0', ..., '9' of
-.BR xmodmap (1)
-are replaced with the corresponding words 'zero', 'one', ... 'nine' to
-avoid confusion with the numeric notation.
-.LP
-It should be noted that using numeric notation for the
-.I keysyms
-is highly unportable as the key action numbers may vary from one kernel
-version to another and the use of numeric notations is thus strongly
-discouraged. They are intended to be used only when you know there is a
-supported keyboard action in your kernel for which your current version
-of
-.BR loadkeys (1)
-has no symbolic name.
-.LP
-There is a number of short-hand notations to add readability and reduce
-typing work and the probability of typing-errors.
-.LP
-First of all, you can give a map specification line, of the form
-.LP
-.RS
-.EX
-keymaps 0-2,4-5,8,12
-.EE
-.RE
-.LP
-to indicate that the lines of the keymap will not specify all 256 columns,
-but only the indicated ones. (In the example: only the plain, Shift,
-AltGr, Control, Control+Shift, Alt and Control+Alt maps, that is, 7 columns
-instead of 256.)
-When no such line is given, the keymaps 0-M will be defined, where
-M+1 is the maximum number of entries found in any definition line.
-.LP
-Next, you can leave off any trailing VoidSymbol entries from a key
-definition line. VoidSymbol denotes a keyboard action which produces no
-output and has no other effects either. For example, to define key
-number 30 to output 'a' unshifted, 'A' when pressed with Shift and do
-nothing when pressed with AltGr or other modifiers, you can write
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-keycode 30 = a A
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-instead of the more verbose
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-keycode 30 = a A VoidSymbol VoidSymbol \\
- VoidSymbol VoidSymbol VoidSymbol ...
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-For added convenience, you can usually get off with still more terse
-definitions. If you enter a key definition line with only and exactly
-one action code after the equals sign, it has a special meaning. If the
-code (numeric or symbolic) is not an ASCII letter, it means the code
-is implicitly replicated through all columns being defined.
-If, on the other hand, the action code is an ASCII character in the
-range 'a', ..., 'z' or 'A', ..., 'Z' in the ASCII collating sequence,
-the following definitions are made for the different modifier combinations,
-provided these are actually being defined.
-(The table lists the two possible cases:
-either the single action code is a lower case letter,
-denoted by 'x' or an upper case letter, denoted by 'Y'.)
-.LP
-.RS 4
-.TP 24
-.I modifier
-.I symbol
-.TP 24
-none
-x Y
-.PD 0
-.TP 24
-Shift
-X y
-.TP 24
-AltGr
-x Y
-.TP 24
-Shift+AltGr
-X y
-.TP 24
-Control
-Control_x Control_y
-.TP 24
-Shift+Control
-Control_x Control_y
-.TP 24
-AltGr+Control
-Control_x Control_y
-.TP 24
-Shift+AltGr+Control
-Control_x Control_y
-.TP 24
-Alt
-Meta_x Meta_Y
-.TP 24
-Shift+Alt
-Meta_X Meta_y
-.TP 24
-AltGr+Alt
-Meta_x Meta_Y
-.TP 24
-Shift+AltGr+Alt
-Meta_X Meta_y
-.TP 24
-Control+Alt
-Meta_Control_x Meta_Control_y
-.TP 24
-Shift+Control+Alt
-Meta_Control_x Meta_Control_y
-.TP 24
-AltGr+Control+Alt
-Meta_Control_x Meta_Control_y
-.TP 24
-Shift+AltGr+Control+Alt
-Meta_Control_x Meta_Control_y
-.PD
-.RE
-.LP
-.SH "SINGLE MODIFIER DEFINITIONS"
-All the previous forms of key definition lines always define all the M+1
-possible modifier combinations being defined, whether the line actually
-contains that many action codes or not.
-There is, however, a variation of the definition
-syntax for defining only single actions to a particular modifier
-combination of a key. This is especially useful, if you load a keymap
-which doesn't match your needs in only some modifier combinations, like
-AltGr+function keys. You can then make a small local file redefining
-only those modifier combinations and loading it after the main file.
-The syntax of this form is:
-.LP
-.BR "" { " plain " "| <modifier sequence> } " keycode
-.I keynumber
-.B =
-.I keysym
-.LP
-, e.g.,
-.RS
-.EX
-.nf
-plain keycode 14 = BackSpace
-control alt keycode 83 = Boot
-alt keycode 105 = Decr_Console
-alt keycode 106 = Incr_Console
-.fi
-.EE
-.RE
-Using "plain" will define only the base entry of a
-key (i.e. the one with no modifiers in effect) without affecting the
-bindings of other modifier combinations of that key.
-.SH "STRING DEFINITIONS"
-In addition to comments and key definition lines, a keymap can
-contain string definitions. These are used to define what each function
-key action code sends. The syntax of string definitions is:
-.LP
-.RS
-.B string
-.I keysym
-.B =
-.BI
-"text"
-.RE
-.LP
-.I text
-can contain literal characters, octal character codes in the format of
-backslash followed by up to three octal digits, and the three escape
-sequences \fB\\n\fP, \fB\\\\\fP, and \fB\\"\fP,
-for newline, backslash and quote, respectively.
-.SH "COMPOSE DEFINITIONS"
-Then there may also be compose definitions. They have syntax
-.LP
-.RS
-.BI "compose '" char "' '" char "' to '" char "'"
-.RE
-and describe how two bytes are combined to form a third one
-(when a dead accent or compose key is used).
-This is used to get accented letters and the like on a standard
-keyboard.
-.SH ABBREVIATIONS
-Various abbreviations can be used with kbd-0.96 and later.
-.TP
-.B "strings as usual"
-Defines the usual values of the strings (but not the keys
-they are bound to).
-.TP
-\fBcompose as usual for "iso-8859-1"\fP
-Defines the usual compose combinations.
-.LP
-To find out what
-.I keysyms
-there are available for use in keymaps, use the command
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-.B dumpkeys --long-info
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-Unfortunately, there is currently no description of what each symbol
-does. It has to be guessed from the name or figured out from the kernel
-sources.
-.LP
-.SH EXAMPLES
-(Be careful to use a keymaps line, like the first line of `dumpkeys`,
-or "keymaps 0-15" or so.)
-.LP
-The following entry exchanges the left Control key and the Caps Lock
-key on the keyboard:
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-keycode 58 = Control
-keycode 29 = Caps_Lock
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-Key number 58 is normally the Caps Lock key, and key number 29 is
-normally the Control key.
-.LP
-The following entry sets the Shift and Caps Lock keys to behave more
-nicely, like in older typewriters. That is, pressing Caps Lock key once
-or more sets the keyboard in CapsLock state and pressing either of the
-Shift keys releases it.
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-keycode 42 = Uncaps_Shift
-keycode 54 = Uncaps_Shift
-keycode 58 = Caps_On
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-The following entry sets the layout of the edit pad in the enhanced
-keyboard to be more like that in the VT200 series terminals:
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-keycode 102 = Insert
-keycode 104 = Remove
-keycode 107 = Prior
-shift keycode 107 = Scroll_Backward
-keycode 110 = Find
-keycode 111 = Select
-control alt keycode 111 = Boot
-control altgr keycode 111 = Boot
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-Here's an example to bind the string "du\\ndf\\n" to the key AltGr-D. We use
-the "spare" action code F100 not normally bound to any key.
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-altgr keycode 32 = F100
-string F100 = "du\\ndf\\n"
-.LP
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR loadkeys (1),
-.BR dumpkeys (1),
-.BR showkey (1),
-.BR xmodmap (1)
diff --git a/raw/man5/lmhosts.5 b/raw/man5/lmhosts.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 47bedda..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/lmhosts.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "LMHOSTS" 5 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-lmhosts \- The Samba NetBIOS hosts file
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.PP
-\fIlmhosts\fR is the \fBSamba\fR(7) NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file\&.
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This file is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fIlmhosts\fR is the \fBSamba \fR NetBIOS name to IP address mapping file\&. It is very similar to the \fI/etc/hosts\fR file format, except that the hostname component must correspond to the NetBIOS naming format\&.
-
-.SH "FILE FORMAT"
-
-.PP
-It is an ASCII file containing one line for NetBIOS name\&. The two fields on each line are separated from each other by white space\&. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored\&. Each line in the lmhosts file contains the following information:
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-IP Address - in dotted decimal format\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-NetBIOS Name - This name format is a maximum fifteen character host name, with an optional trailing '#' character followed by the NetBIOS name type as two hexadecimal digits\&.
-
-
-If the trailing '#' is omitted then the given IP address will be returned for all names that match the given name, whatever the NetBIOS name type in the lookup\&.
-
-.LP
-
-.PP
-An example follows:
-.nf
-
-#
-# Sample Samba lmhosts file\&.
-#
-192\&.9\&.200\&.1 TESTPC
-192\&.9\&.200\&.20 NTSERVER#20
-192\&.9\&.200\&.21 SAMBASERVER
- .fi
-
-.PP
-Contains three IP to NetBIOS name mappings\&. The first and third will be returned for any queries for the names "TESTPC" and "SAMBASERVER" respectively, whatever the type component of the NetBIOS name requested\&.
-
-.PP
-The second mapping will be returned only when the "0x20" name type for a name "NTSERVER" is queried\&. Any other name type will not be resolved\&.
-
-.PP
-The default location of the \fIlmhosts\fR file is in the same directory as the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5), and \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8)
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available atftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/locale.5 b/raw/man5/locale.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 46caf12..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/locale.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,577 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs, this is -*- nroff -*-
-.\"
-.\" This file is part of locale(1) which displays the settings of the
-.\" current locale.
-.\" Copyright (C) 1994 Jochen Hein (Hein at Student.TU-Clausthal.de)
-.\"
-.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-.\" (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-.\" Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111, USA.
-.\"
-.TH locale 5 1994-11-09 "National Language Support" "Linux User Manual"
-.SH NAME
-locale \- Describes a locale definition file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B locale
-definition files contains all the information that the
-.BR localedef (1)
-command needs to convert it into the binary locale database.
-
-The definition files consist of sections which each describe a
-locale category in detail.
-.SH SYNTAX
-The locale definition file starts with a header that may consist
-of the following keywords:
-.TP
-.I <escape_char>
-is followed by a character that should be used as the
-escape-character for the rest of the file to mark characters that
-should be interpreted in a special way. It defaults to
-the backslash (
-.B \\\\
-).
-.TP
-.I <comment_char>
-is followed by a character that will be used as the
-comment-character for the rest of the file. It defaults to the
-number sign (#).
-
-.PP
-The locale definition has one part for each locale category.
-Each part can be copied from another existing locale or
-can be defined from scratch. If the category should be copied,
-the only valid keyword in the definition is
-.B copy
-followed by the name of the locale which should be copied.
-
-.SS LC_CTYPE
-.The definition for the
-.B LC_CTYPE
-category starts with the string
-.I LC_CTYPE
-in the first column.
-
-There are the following keywords allowed:
-
-.TP
-.I upper
-followed by a list of uppercase letters. The letters
-.B A
-trough
-.B Z
-are included automatically. Characters also specified as
-.BR cntrl ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR punct ,
-or
-.B space
-are not allowed.
-
-.TP
-.I lower
-followed by a list of lowercase letters. The letters
-.B a
-trough
-.B z
-are included automatically. Characters also specified as
-.BR cntrl ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR punct ,
-or
-.B space
-are not allowed.
-
-.TP
-.I alpha
-followed by a list of letters. All character specified as either
-.B upper
-or
-.B lower
-are automatically included. Characters also specified as
-.BR cntrl ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR punct ,
-or
-.B space
-are not allowed.
-
-.TP
-.I digit
-followed by the characters classified as numeric digits. Only the
-digits
-.B 0
-trough
-.B 9
-are allowed. They are included by default in this class.
-
-.TP
-.I space
-followed by a list of characters defined as white-space
-characters. Characters also specified as
-.BR upper ,
-.BR lower ,
-.BR alpha ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR graph ,
-or
-.B xdigit
-are not allowed. The characters
-.BR <space> ,
-.BR <form-feed> ,
-.BR <newline> ,
-.BR <carriage-return> ,
-.BR <tab> ,
-and
-.B <vertical-tab>
-are automatically included.
-
-.TP
-.I cntrl
-followed by a list of control characters.
-Characters also specified as
-.BR upper ,
-.BR lower ,
-.BR alpha ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR punct ,
-.BR graph ,
-.BR print ,
-or
-.B xdigit
-are not allowed.
-.TP
-.I punct
-followed by a list of punctuation characters. Characters also
-specified as
-.BR upper ,
-.BR lower ,
-.BR alpha ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR cntrl ,
-.BR xdigit ,
-or the
-.B <space>
-character are not allowed.
-
-.TP
-.I graph
-followed by a list of printable characters, not including the
-.B <space>
-character. The characters defined as
-.BR upper ,
-.BR lower ,
-.BR alpha ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR xdigit ,
-and
-.B punct
-are automatically included.
-Characters also specified as
-.B cntrl
-are not allowed.
-
-.TP
-.I print
-followed by a list of printable characters, including the
-.B <space>
-character. The characters defined as
-.BR upper ,
-.BR lower ,
-.BR alpha ,
-.BR digit ,
-.BR xdigit ,
-.BR punct ,
-and the
-.B <space>
-character are automatically included.
-Characters also specified as
-.B cntrl
-are not allowed.
-
-.TP
-.I xdigit
-followed by a list of characters classified as hexadecimal
-digits. The decimal digits must be included followed by one or
-more set of six characters in ascending order. The following
-characters are included by default:
-.B 0
-trough
-.BR 9 ,
-.B a
-trough
-.BR f ,
-.B A
-trough
-.BR F .
-
-.TP
-.I blank
-followed by a list of characters classified as
-.BR blank .
-The characters
-.B <space>
-and
-.B <tab>
-are automatically included.
-
-.TP
-.I toupper
-followed by a list of mappings from lowercase to uppercase
-letters. Each mapping is a pair of a lowercase and an uppercase letter
-separated with a
-.B ,
-and enclosed in parentheses. The members of the list are separated
-with semicolons.
-.TP
-.I tolower
-followed by a list of mappings from uppercase to lowercase
-letters. If the keyword tolower is not present, the reverse of the
-toupper list is used.
-
-.PP
-The
-.B LC_CTYPE
-definition ends with the string
-.I END LC_CYTPE.
-
-.SS LC_COLLATE
-The
-.B LC_COLLATE
-category defines the rules for collating characters. Due to
-limitations of libc not all POSIX-options are implemented.
-
-The definition starts with the string
-.B LC_COLLATE
-in the first column.
-
-There are the following keywords allowed:
-
-.TP
-.I collating-element
-
-.TP
-.I collating-symbol
-
-.PP
-The order-definition starts with a line:
-.TP
-.I order_start
-.PP
-followed by a list of keywords out of
-.B forward,
-.B backward,
-or
-.B position.
-The order definition consists of lines that describe the order
-and is terminated with the keyword
-.TP
-.I order_end.
-.PP
-
-For more details see the sources in
-.B /usr/lib/nls/src
-notably the examples
-.B POSIX,
-.B Example
-and
-.B Example2
-
-.PP
-The
-.B LC_COLLATE
-definition ends with the string
-.I END LC_COLLATE.
-
-.SS LC_MONETARY
-The definition starts with the string
-.B LC_MONETARY
-in the first column.
-
-There are the following keywords allowed:
-
-.TP
-.I int_curr_symbol
-followed by the international currency symbol. This must be a
-4-character string containing the international currency symbol as
-defined by the ISO 4217 standard (three characters) followed by a
-separator.
-.TP
-.I currency_symbol
-followed by the local currency symbol.
-.TP
-.I mon_decimal_point
-followed by the string that will be used as the decimal delimiter
-when formatting monetary quantities.
-.TP
-.I mon_thousands_sep
-followed by the string that will be used as a group separator
-when formatting monetary quantities.
-.TP
-.I mon_grouping
-followed by a string that describes the formatting of numeric
-quantities.
-.TP
-.I positive_sign
-followed by a string that is used to indicate a positive sign for
-monetary quantities.
-.TP
-.I negative_sign
-followed by a string that is used to indicate a negative sign for
-monetary quantities.
-.TP
-.I int_frac_digits
-followed by the number of fractional digits that should be used when
-formatting with the
-.B int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.I frac_digits
-followed by the number of fractional digits that should be used when
-formatting with the
-.B currency_symbol.
-.TP
-.I p_cs_precedes
-followed by an integer set to
-.B 1
-if the
-.I currency_symbol
-or
-.I int_curr_symbol
- should precede the formatted monetary quantity or set to
-.B 0
-if the symbol succeeds the value.
-.TP
-.I p_sep_by_space
-followed by an integer.
-.RS
-.TP
-.B 0
-means that no space should be printed between the symbol and the
-value.
-.TP
-.B 1
-means that a space should be printed between the symbol and the
-value.
-.TP
-.B 2
-means that a space should be printed between the symbol and the
-sign string, if adjacent.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I n_cs_precedes
-.RS
-.TP
-.B 0
-- the symbol succeeds the value.
-.TP
-.B 1
-- the symbol precedes the value.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I n_sep_by_space
-An integer set to
-.B 0
-if no space separates the
-.I currency_symbol
-or
-.I int_curr_symbol
-from the value for a negative monetary quantity, set to
-.B 1
-if a space separates the symbol from the value and set to
-.B 2
-if a space separates the symbol and the sign string, if adjacent.
-.TP
-.I p_sign_posn
-.RS
-.TP
-.B 0
-Parentheses enclose the quantity and the
-.I currency_symbol
-or
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 1
-The sign string precedes the quantity and the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 2
-The sign string succeeds the quantity and the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 3
-The sign string precedes the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 4
-The sign string succeeds the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I n_sign_posn
-.RS
-.TP
-.B 0
-Parentheses enclose the quantity and the
-.I currency_symbol
-or
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 1
-The sign string precedes the quantity and the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 2
-The sign string succeeds the quantity and the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 3
-The sign string precedes the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.TP
-.B 4
-The sign string succeeds the
-.I currency_symbol
-or the
-.I int_curr_symbol.
-.RE
-.PP
-The
-.B LC_MONETARY
-definition ends with the string
-.I END LC_MONETARY.
-
-.SS LC_NUMERIC
-The definition starts with the string
-.B LC_NUMERIC
-in the first column.
-
-The following keywords are allowed:
-
-.TP
-.I decimal_point
-followed by the string that will be used as the decimal delimiter
-when formatting numeric quantities.
-.TP
-.I thousands_sep
-followed by the string that will be used as a group separator
-when formatting numeric quantities.
-.TP
-.I grouping
-followed by a string that describes the formatting of numeric
-quantities.
-.PP
-The
-.B LC_NUMERIC
-definition ends with the string
-.I END LC_NUMERIC.
-
-.SS LC_TIME
-The definition starts with the string
-.B LC_TIME
-in the first column.
-
-The following keywords are allowed:
-
-.TP
-.I abday
-followed by a list of abbreviated weekday names. The list starts with
-Sunday or its translation.
-.TP
-.I day
-followed by a list of weekday names. The list starts with Sunday.
-.TP
-.I abmon
-followed by a list of abbreviated month names.
-.TP
-.I mon
-followed by a list of month names.
-.TP
-.I am_pm
-The appropriate representation of the
-.B am
-and
-.B pm
-strings.
-.TP
-.I d_t_fmt
-The appropriate date and time format.
-.TP
-.I d_fmt
-The appropriate date format.
-.TP
-.I t_fmt
-The appropriate time format.
-.TP
-.I t_fmt_ampm
-The appropriate time format when using 12h clock format.
-.PP
-The
-.B LC_TIME
-definition ends with the string
-.I END LC_TIME.
-
-.SS LC_MESSAGES
-The definition starts with the string
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-in the first column.
-
-The following keywords are allowed:
-
-.TP
-.I yesexpr
-followed by a regular expression that describes possible
-yes-responses.
-.TP
-.I noexpr
-followed by a regular expression that describes possible
-no-responses.
-
-.PP
-The
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-definition ends with the string
-.I END LC_MESSAGES.
-
-See the POSIX.2 standard for details.
-.SH FILES
-/usr/lib/locale/
-\- database for the current locale setting of that category
-.br
-/usr/lib/nls/charmap/* \- charmap-files
-.SH BUGS
-The manpage isn't complete.
-.\" .SH AUTHOR
-.\" Jochen Hein (Hein at Student.TU-Clausthal.de)
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-POSIX.2
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR setlocale (3),
-.BR localeconv (3),
-.BR charmap (5),
-.BR locale (1),
-.BR localedef (1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/man.config.5 b/raw/man5/man.config.5
deleted file mode 100644
index b03e833..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/man.config.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)man.conf
-.TH MAN.CONF 5 "30 Mar 1994"
-.SH NAME
-man.conf \- configuration data for man
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.LP
-This file is read by
-.BR man (1)
-and contains (a) information on how to construct the search path for man,
-(b) full path names for various programs like nroff, eqn, tbl etc. used by man,
-and (c) a list with uncompressors for files with a given extension.
-An alternative version of this file can be specified with
-.LP
-.RS
-man -C private_man.conf ...
-.RE
-.LP
-The command names may be provided with options.
-Useful options to nroff can be found in grotty(1).
-For example, instead of the default line
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-NROFF /usr/bin/groff -mandoc -Tlatin1
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-one may write
-.LP
-.RS
-.nf
-NROFF /usr/bin/groff -mandoc -Tlatin1 -P-u -P-b
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-in order to suppress underlining and overstriking.
-.SH FILES
-.I "@man_config_file@"
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-col(1), (g)eqn(1), (g)pic(1), groff(1), grotty(1), (g)refer(1), (g)tbl(1),
-less(1), man (1) and compress(1), gzip(1).
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/motd.5 b/raw/man5/motd.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 904b025..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/motd.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 17:08:16 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 17:47:19 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.TH MOTD 5 1992-12-29 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-motd \- message of the day
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The contents of \fB/etc/motd\fP are displayed by
-.BR login (1)
-after a successful login but just before it executes the login shell.
-
-The abbreviation "motd" stands for "message of the day", and this file
-has been traditionally used for exactly that (it requires much less disk
-space than mail to all users).
-.SH FILES
-/etc/motd
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR login (1),
-.BR issue (5)
diff --git a/raw/man5/nologin.5 b/raw/man5/nologin.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 5fb0137..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/nologin.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 11:06:34 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Corrected Mon Oct 21 17:47:19 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond (esr at thyrsus.com)
-.TH NOLOGIN 5 1992-12-29 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-nologin \- prevent non-root users from logging into the system
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-If the file \fB/etc/nologin\fP exists,
-.BR login (1)
-will allow access only to root. Other users will
-be shown the contents of this file and their logins will be refused.
-.SH FILES
-/etc/nologin
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR login (1),
-.BR shutdown (8)
diff --git a/raw/man5/nscd.conf.5 b/raw/man5/nscd.conf.5
deleted file mode 100644
index bf364d9..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/nscd.conf.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,125 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\" Copyright (c) 1999, 2000 SuSE GmbH Nuernberg, Germany
-.\" Author: Thorsten Kukuk <kukuk at suse.de>
-.\"
-.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the
-.\" License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
-.\" General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this program; see the file COPYING. If not,
-.\" write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330,
-.\" Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
-.\"
-.TH nscd.conf 5 1999-10 "GNU C Library"
-.SH NAME
-/etc/nscd.conf - name service cache daemon configuration file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The file
-.B /etc/nscd.conf
-is read from
-.BR nscd (8)
-at startup. Each line specifies either an attribute and a value, or an
-attribute, service, and a value. Fields are separated either by SPACE
-or TAB characters. A `#' (number sign) indicates the beginning of a
-comment; following characters, up to the end of the line,
-are not interpreted by nscd.
-
-
-Valid services are passwd, group, or hosts.
-
-.B logfile
-.I debug-file-name
-.RS
-Specifies name of the file to which debug info should be written.
-.RE
-
-.B debug-level
-.I value
-.RS
-Sets the desired debug level.
-.RE
-
-.B threads
-.I number
-.RS
-This is the number of threads that are started to wait for
-requests. At least five threads will always be created.
-.RE
-
-.B server-user
-.I user
-.RS
-If this option is set, nscd will run as this user and not as root.
-If a separate cache for every user is used (-S parameter), this
-option is ignored.
-.RE
-
-.B enable-cache
-.I service
-.I <yes|no>
-.RS
-Enables or disables the specified
-.I service
-cache.
-.RE
-
-.B positive-time-to-live
-.I service
-.I value
-.RS
-Sets the TTL (time-to-live) for positive entries (successful queries)
-in the specified cache for
-.IR service .
-.I Value
-is in seconds. Larger values increase cache hit rates and reduce mean
-response times, but increase problems with cache coherence.
-.RE
-
-.B negative-time-to-live
-.I service
-.I value
-.RS
-Sets the TTL (time-to-live) for negative entries (unsuccessful queries)
-in the specified cache for
-.IR service .
-.I Value
-is in seconds. Can result in significant performance improvements if there
-are several files owned by uids (user IDs) not in system databases (for
-example untarring the linux kernel sources as root); should be kept small
-to reduce cache coherency problems.
-.RE
-
-.B suggested-size
-.I service
-.I value
-.RS
-This is the internal hash table size,
-.I value
-should remain a prime number for optimum efficiency.
-.RE
-
-.B check-files
-.I service
-.I <yes|no>
-.RS
-Enables or disables checking the file belonging to the specified
-.I service
-for changes. The files are
-.IR /etc/passwd ,
-.IR /etc/group ,
-and
-.IR /etc/hosts .
-.RE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR nscd (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-.B nscd
-was written by Thorsten Kukuk and Ulrich Drepper.
diff --git a/raw/man5/passwd.5 b/raw/man5/passwd.5
deleted file mode 100644
index fec474e..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/passwd.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,127 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 10:46:28 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sun Aug 21 18:12:27 1994 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sun Jun 18 01:53:57 1995 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Mon Jan 5 20:24:40 MET 1998 by Michael Haardt
-.\" (michael at cantor.informatik.rwth-aachen.de)
-.TH PASSWD 5 1998-01-05 "" "File formats"
-.SH NAME
-passwd \- password file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Passwd
-is a text file, that contains a list of the system's accounts,
-giving for each account some useful information like user ID,
-group ID, home directory, shell, etc.
-Often, it also contains the encrypted passwords for each account.
-It should have general read permission (many utilities, like
-.BR ls (1)
-use it to map user IDs to user names), but write access only for the
-superuser.
-.PP
-In the good old days there was no great problem with this general
-read permission. Everybody could read the encrypted passwords, but the
-hardware was too slow to crack a well-chosen password, and moreover, the
-basic assumption used to be that of a friendly user-community. These days
-many people run some version of the shadow password suite, where
-.I /etc/passwd
-has *'s instead of encrypted passwords, and the encrypted passwords are in
-.I /etc/shadow
-which is readable by the superuser only.
-.PP
-Regardless of whether shadow passwords are used, many sysadmins
-use a star in the encrypted password field to make sure
-that this user can not authenticate him- or herself using a
-password. (But see the Notes below.)
-.PP
-If you create a new login, first put a star in the password field,
-then use
-.BR passwd (1)
-to set it.
-.PP
-There is one entry per line, and each line has the format:
-.sp
-.RS
-account:password:UID:GID:GECOS:directory:shell
-.RE
-.sp
-The field descriptions are:
-.sp
-.RS
-.TP 1.0in
-.I account
-the name of the user on the system. It should not contain capital letters.
-.TP
-.I password
-the encrypted user password or a star.
-.TP
-.I UID
-the numerical user ID.
-.TP
-.I GID
-the numerical primary group ID for this user.
-.TP
-.I GECOS
-This field is optional and only used for informational purposes.
-Usually, it contains the full user name. GECOS means General Electric
-Comprehensive Operating System, which has been renamed to GCOS when
-GE's large systems division was sold to Honeywell. Dennis Ritchie has
-reported: "Sometimes we sent printer output or batch jobs to the GCOS
-machine. The gcos field in the password file was a place to stash the
-information for the $IDENTcard. Not elegant."
-.TP
-.I directory
-the user's $HOME directory.
-.TP
-.I shell
-the program to run at login (if empty, use
-.BR /bin/sh ).
-If set to a non-existing executable, the user will be unable to login
-through
-.BR login (1).
-.RE
-.SH NOTE
-If you want to create
-user groups, their GIDs must be equal and there must be an entry in
-\fI/etc/group\fP, or no group will exist.
-.PP
-If the encrypted password is set to a star, the user will be unable
-to login using
-.BR login (1),
-but may still login using
-.BR rlogin (1),
-run existing processes and initiate new ones through
-.BR rsh (1),
-.BR cron (1),
-.BR at (1),
-or mail filters, etc. Trying to lock an account by simply changing the
-shell field yields the same result and additionally allows the use of
-.BR su (1).
-.SH FILES
-.I /etc/passwd
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR login (1),
-.BR su (1),
-.BR group (5),
-.BR shadow (5)
diff --git a/raw/man5/proc.5 b/raw/man5/proc.5
deleted file mode 100644
index c83a52f..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/proc.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1424 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 1994, 1995 by Daniel Quinlan (quinlan at yggdrasil.com)
-.\" with networking additions from Alan Cox (A.Cox at swansea.ac.uk)
-.\" and scsi additions from Michael Neuffer (neuffer at mail.uni-mainz.de)
-.\" and sysctl additions from Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" and System V IPC (as well as various other) additions from
-.\" Michael Kerrisk (mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz)
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Wed May 17 15:26:04 1995: faith at cs.unc.edu, updated BUGS section
-.\" Minor changes by aeb and Marty Leisner (leisner at sdsp.mc.xerox.com).
-.\" Sat Apr 13 02:32:45 1996: aeb at cwi.nl, added sys, various fixes.
-.\" Mon Jul 22 17:14:44 1996: aeb at cwi.nl, minor fix.
-.\" Sun Dec 16 11:39:19 2001: rwhron at earthlink.net, update for 2.4.
-.\" Sat Jul 13 14:00:00 2002: jbelton at shaw.ca, added to sys/fs and sys/kernel.
-.\" Modified, 22 Jul 2002, Michael Kerrisk <mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz>
-.\" Modified, 27 May 2003, Michael Kerrisk <mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz>
-.\"
-.TH PROC 5 2003-05-27 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-proc \- process information pseudo-filesystem
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-/proc is a pseudo-filesystem which is used as an interface to kernel
-data structures rather than reading and interpreting /dev/kmem.
-Most of it is read-only, but some files allow kernel variables to be changed.
-.LP
-The following outline gives a quick tour through the /proc hierarchy.
-.LP
-.\" .na
-.\" .nh
-.PD 1
-.TP
-.I [number]
-There is a numerical subdirectory for each running process; the
-subdirectory is named by the process ID. Each contains the following
-pseudo-files and directories.
-.RS
-.TP
-.I cmdline
-This holds the complete command line for the process, unless the whole
-process has been swapped out, or unless the process is a zombie. In
-either of these later cases, there is nothing in this file: i.e. a
-read on this file will return 0 characters.
-The command line arguments appear in this file as a set of
-null-separated strings, with a further null byte after the last string.
-.TP
-.I cwd
-This is a link to the current working directory of the process. To find out
-the cwd of process 20, for instance, you can do this:
-
-.br
-.nf
-.ft CW
-cd /proc/20/cwd; /bin/pwd
-.fi
-.ft
-
-Note that the pwd command is often a shell builtin, and might
-not work properly. In bash, you may use pwd -P.
-.TP
-.I environ
-This file contains the environment for the process.
-The entries are separated by null characters,
-and there may be a null character at the end.
-Thus, to print out the environment of process 1, you would do:
-
-.br
-.nf
-.ft CW
-(cat /proc/1/environ; echo) | tr "\\000" "\\n"
-.fi
-.ft P
-
-(For a reason why one should want to do this, see
-.BR lilo (8).)
-.TP
-.I exe
-Under Linux 2.2 and 2.4
-.I exe
-is a symbolic link containing the actual path name of the executed command.
-The
-.I exe
-symbolic link can be dereferenced normally - attempting to open
-.I exe
-will open the executable. You can even type
-.I /proc/[number]/exe
-to run another copy of the same process as [number].
-
-Under Linux 2.0 and earlier
-.I exe
-is a pointer to the binary which was executed,
-and appears as a symbolic link. A
-.BR readlink (2)
-call on the
-.I exe
-special file under Linux 2.0 returns a string in the format:
-
-[device]:inode
-
-For example, [0301]:1502 would be inode 1502 on device major 03 (IDE,
-MFM, etc. drives) minor 01 (first partition on the first drive).
-
-.BR find (1)
-with the -inum option can be used to locate the file.
-.TP
-.I fd
-This is a subdirectory containing one entry for each file which the
-process has open, named by its file descriptor, and which is a
-symbolic link to the actual file (as the exe entry does). Thus, 0 is
-standard input, 1 standard output, 2 standard error, etc.
-
-Programs that will take a filename, but will not take the standard
-input, and which write to a file, but will not send their output to
-standard output, can be effectively foiled this way, assuming that -i
-is the flag designating an input file and -o is the flag designating
-an output file:
-.br
-.nf
-\f(CWfoobar -i /proc/self/fd/0 -o /proc/self/fd/1 ...\fR
-.fi
-.br
-and you have a working filter. Note that this will not work for
-programs that seek on their files, as the files in the fd directory
-are not seekable.
-
-/proc/self/fd/N is approximately the same as /dev/fd/N in some UNIX
-and UNIX-like systems. Most Linux MAKEDEV scripts symbolically link
-/dev/fd to /proc/self/fd, in fact.
-.TP
-.I maps
-A file containing the currently mapped memory regions and their access
-permissions.
-
-The format is:
-
-.nf
-.ft CW
-.in 8n
-address perms offset dev inode pathname
-08048000-08056000 r-xp 00000000 03:0c 64593 /usr/sbin/gpm
-08056000-08058000 rw-p 0000d000 03:0c 64593 /usr/sbin/gpm
-08058000-0805b000 rwxp 00000000 00:00 0
-40000000-40013000 r-xp 00000000 03:0c 4165 /lib/ld-2.2.4.so
-40013000-40015000 rw-p 00012000 03:0c 4165 /lib/ld-2.2.4.so
-4001f000-40135000 r-xp 00000000 03:0c 45494 /lib/libc-2.2.4.so
-40135000-4013e000 rw-p 00115000 03:0c 45494 /lib/libc-2.2.4.so
-4013e000-40142000 rw-p 00000000 00:00 0
-bffff000-c0000000 rwxp 00000000 00:00 0
-.ft
-.fi
-.in
-
-where address is the address space in the process that it occupies,
-perms is a set of permissions:
-
-.nf
-.in +5
-r = read
-w = write
-x = execute
-s = shared
-p = private (copy on write)
-.fi
-.in
-
-offset is the offset into the file/whatever, dev is the device
-(major:minor), and inode is the inode on that device. 0 indicates
-that no inode is associated with the memory region, as the case would
-be with bss.
-
-Under Linux 2.0 there is no field giving pathname.
-.TP
-.I mem
-Via the
-.I mem
-file one can access the pages of a process's memory through
-.BR open (2),
-.BR read (2),
-and
-.BR fseek (3).
-.TP
-.I root
-Unix and Linux support the idea of a per-process root of the
-filesystem, set by the
-.BR chroot (2)
-system call. Root points to the file system root, and behaves as exe,
-fd/*, etc. do.
-.TP
-.I stat
-Status information about the process. This is used by
-.BR ps (1).
-It is defined in
-.IR /usr/src/linux/fs/proc/array.c "."
-
-The fields, in order, with their proper
-.BR scanf (3)
-format specifiers, are:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIpid\fP %d
-The process id.
-.TP
-\fIcomm\fP %s
-The filename of the executable, in parentheses. This is visible
-whether or not the executable is swapped out.
-.TP
-\fIstate\fP %c
-One character from the string "RSDZTW" where R is running, S is
-sleeping in an interruptible wait, D is waiting in uninterruptible
-disk sleep, Z is zombie, T is traced or stopped (on a signal),
-and W is paging.
-.TP
-\fIppid\fP %d
-The PID of the parent.
-.TP
-\fIpgrp\fP %d
-The process group ID of the process.
-.TP
-\fIsession\fP %d
-The session ID of the process.
-.TP
-.\" tty_nr needs better explanation.
-\fItty_nr\fP %d
-The tty the process uses.
-.TP
-\fItpgid\fP %d
-The process group ID of the process which currently owns the tty that
-the process is connected to.
-.TP
-\fIflags\fP %lu
-The flags of the process.
-The math bit is decimal 4, and the traced bit is decimal 10.
-.TP
-\fIminflt\fP %lu
-The number of minor faults the process has made which have not
-required loading a memory page from disk.
-.TP
-\fIcminflt\fP %lu
-The number of minor faults that the process and its children have
-made.
-.TP
-\fImajflt\fP %lu
-The number of major faults the process has made which have
-required loading a memory page from disk.
-.TP
-\fIcmajflt\fP %lu
-The number of major faults that the process and its children have
-made.
-.TP
-\fIutime\fP %lu
-The number of jiffies that this process has been scheduled in user
-mode.
-.TP
-\fIstime\fP %lu
-The number of jiffies that this process has been scheduled in kernel
-mode.
-.TP
-\fIcutime\fP %ld
-The number of jiffies that this process and its children have been
-scheduled in user mode.
-.TP
-\fIcstime\fP %ld
-The number of jiffies that this process and its children have been
-scheduled in kernel mode.
-.TP
-\fIpriority\fP %ld
-The standard nice value, plus fifteen. The value is never negative in
-the kernel.
-.TP
-\fInice\fP %ld
-The nice value ranges from 19 (nicest) to -19 (not nice to others).
-.TP
-.\" .TP
-.\" \fIcounter\fP %ld
-.\" The current maximum size in jiffies of the process's next timeslice,
-.\" or what is currently left of its current timeslice, if it is the
-.\" currently running process.
-.\" .TP
-.\" \fItimeout\fP %u
-.\" The time in jiffies of the process's next timeout.
-\fI0\fP %ld
-This value is hard coded to 0 as a placeholder for a removed field.
-.TP
-\fIitrealvalue\fP %ld
-The time in jiffies before the next SIGALRM is sent to the process
-due to an interval timer.
-.TP
-\fIstarttime\fP %lu
-The time in jiffies the process started after system boot.
-.TP
-\fIvsize\fP %lu
-Virtual memory size in bytes.
-.TP
-\fIrss\fP %ld
-Resident Set Size: number of pages the process has in real memory,
-minus 3 for administrative purposes. This is just the pages which
-count towards text, data, or stack space. This does not include pages
-which have not been demand-loaded in, or which are swapped out.
-.TP
-\fIrlim\fP %lu
-Current limit in bytes on the rss of the process (usually
-4294967295 on i386).
-.TP
-\fIstartcode\fP %lu
-The address above which program text can run.
-.TP
-\fIendcode\fP %lu
-The address below which program text can run.
-.TP
-\fIstartstack\fP %lu
-The address of the start of the stack.
-.TP
-\fIkstkesp\fP %lu
-The current value of esp (stack pointer), as found in the
-kernel stack page for the process.
-.TP
-\fIkstkeip\fP %lu
-The current EIP (instruction pointer).
-.TP
-\fIsignal\fP %lu
-The bitmap of pending signals (usually 0).
-.TP
-\fIblocked\fP %lu
-The bitmap of blocked signals (usually 0, 2 for shells).
-.TP
-\fIsigignore\fP %lu
-The bitmap of ignored signals.
-.TP
-\fIsigcatch\fP %lu
-The bitmap of catched signals.
-.TP
-\fIwchan\fP %lu
-This is the "channel" in which the process is waiting. It is the
-address of a system call, and can be looked up in a namelist if you
-need a textual name. (If you have an up-to-date /etc/psdatabase, then
-try \fIps -l\fP to see the WCHAN field in action.)
-.TP
-\fInswap\fP %lu
-Number of pages swapped - not maintained.
-.TP
-\fIcnswap\fP %lu
-Cumulative \fInswap\fP for child processes.
-.TP
-\fIexit_signal\fP %d
-Signal to be sent to parent when we die.
-.TP
-\fIprocessor\fP %d
-CPU number last executed on.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I statm
-Provides information about memory status in pages. The columns are:
- size total program size
- resident resident set size
- share shared pages
- trs text (code)
- drs data/stack
- lrs library
- dt dirty pages
-.TP
-.I status
-Provides much of the information in
-.I stat
-and
-.I statm
-in an format that's easier for humans to parse.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I apm
-Advanced power management version and battery information
-when CONFIG_APM is defined at kernel compilation time.
-.TP
-.I bus
-Contains subdirectories for installed busses.
-.RS
-.TP
-.I pccard
-Subdirectory for pcmcia devices when CONFIG_PCMCIA is set
-at kernel compilation time.
-.RS
-.TP
-.I drivers
-.RE
-.RE
-.RS
-.TP
-.I pci
-Contains various bus subdirectories and pseudo-files containing
-information about pci busses, installed devices, and device
-drivers. Some of these files are not ASCII.
-.RS
-.TP
-.I devices
-Information about pci devices. They may be accessed through
-.BR lspci (8)
-and
-.BR setpci (8).
-.RE
-.RE
-.TP
-.I cmdline
-Arguments passed to the Linux kernel at boot time. Often done via
-a boot manager such as
-.BR lilo (1).
-.TP
-.I cpuinfo
-This is a collection of CPU and system architecture dependent items,
-for each supported architecture a different list.
-Two common entries are \fIprocessor\fP which gives CPU number and
-\fIbogomips\fP; a system constant that is calculated
-during kernel initialization. SMP machines have information for
-each CPU.
-.TP
-.I devices
-Text listing of major numbers and device groups. This can be used by
-MAKEDEV scripts for consistency with the kernel.
-.TP
-.I dma
-This is a list of the registered \fIISA\fP DMA (direct memory access)
-channels in use.
-.TP
-.I driver
-Empty subdirectory.
-.TP
-.I execdomains
-List of the execution domains (ABI personalities).
-.TP
-.I fb
-Frame buffer information when CONFIG_FB is defined during kernel
-compilation.
-.TP
-.I filesystems
-A text listing of the filesystems which were compiled into the kernel.
-Incidentally, this is used by
-.BR mount (1)
-to cycle through different filesystems when none is specified.
-.TP
-.I fs
-Empty subdirectory.
-.TP
-.I ide
-.I ide
-exists on systems with the ide bus. There are directories for each
-ide channel and attached device. Files include:
-
-.nf
-cache buffer size in KB
-capacity number of sectors
-driver driver version
-geometry physical and logical geometry
-identify in hexidecimal
-media media type
-model manufacturer's model number
-settings drive settings
-smart_thresholds in hexidecimal
-smart_values in hexidecimal
-.fi
-
-The
-.BR hdparm (8)
-utility provides access to this information in a friendly format.
-.TP
-.I interrupts
-This is used to record the number of interrupts per each IRQ on (at
-least) the i386 architechure. Very easy to read formatting, done in
-ASCII.
-.TP
-.I iomem
-I/O memory map in Linux 2.4.
-.TP
-.I ioports
-This is a list of currently registered Input-Output port regions that
-are in use.
-.TP
-.I kcore
-This file represents the physical memory of the system and is stored
-in the ELF core file format. With this pseudo-file, and an unstripped
-kernel (/usr/src/linux/vmlinux) binary, GDB can be used to
-examine the current state of any kernel data structures.
-
-The total length of the file is the size of physical memory (RAM) plus
-4KB.
-.TP
-.I kmsg
-This file can be used instead of the
-.BR syslog (2)
-system call to read kernel messages. A process must have superuser
-privileges to read this file, and only one process should read this
-file. This file should not be read if a syslog process is running
-which uses the
-.BR syslog (2)
-system call facility to log kernel messages.
-
-Information in this file is retrieved with the
-.BR dmesg (8)
-program.
-.TP
-.I ksyms
-This holds the kernel exported symbol definitions used by the
-.BR modules (X)
-tools to dynamically link and bind loadable modules.
-.TP
-.I loadavg
-The load average numbers give the number of jobs in the run queue (state R)
-or waiting for disk I/O (state D) averaged over 1, 5, and 15 minutes.
-They are the same as the load average numbers given by
-.BR uptime (1)
-and other programs.
-.TP
-.I locks
-This file shows current file locks
-.RB ( flock "(2) and " fcntl (2))
-and leases
-.RB ( fcntl (2)).
-.TP
-.I malloc
-This file is only present if CONFIGDEBUGMALLOC was defined during
-compilation.
-.TP
-.I meminfo
-This is used by
-.BR free (1)
-to report the amount of free and used memory (both physical and swap)
-on the system as well as the shared memory and buffers used by the
-kernel.
-
-It is in the same format as
-.BR free (1),
-except in bytes rather than KB.
-.TP
-.I mounts
-This is a list of all the file systems currently mounted on the system.
-The format of this file is documented in
-.IR fstab (5).
-.TP
-.I modules
-A text list of the modules that have been loaded by the system.
-See also
-.BR lsmod (8).
-.TP
-.I mtrr
-Memory Type Range Registers.
-See
-.I /usr/src/linux/Documentation/mtrr.txt
-for details.
-.TP
-.I net
-various net pseudo-files, all of which give the status of some part of
-the networking layer. These files contain ASCII structures and are,
-therefore, readable with cat. However, the standard
-.BR netstat (8)
-suite provides much cleaner access to these files.
-.RS
-.TP
-.I arp
-This holds an ASCII readable dump of the kernel ARP table used for
-address resolutions. It will show both dynamically learned and
-pre-programmed ARP entries. The format is:
-
-.nf
-.ft CW
-.in 8n
-IP address HW type Flags HW address Mask Device
-192.168.0.50 0x1 0x2 00:50:BF:25:68:F3 * eth0
-192.168.0.250 0x1 0xc 00:00:00:00:00:00 * eth0
-.ft
-.fi
-.in
-.PP
-Here 'IP address' is the IPv4 address of the machine and the 'HW type' is the
-hardware type of the address from RFC 826. The flags are the internal flags
-of the ARP structure (as defined in /usr/include/linux/if_arp.h) and the 'HW
-address' is the physical layer mapping for that IP address if it is known.
-.TP
-.I dev
-The dev pseudo-file contains network device status information. This gives
-the number of received and sent packets, the number of errors and collisions
-and other basic statistics. These are used by the
-.BR ifconfig (8)
-program to report device status. The format is:
-
-.nf
-.ft CW
-.in 1n
-Inter-| Receive | Transmit
- face |bytes packets errs drop fifo frame compressed multicast|bytes packets errs drop fifo colls carrier compressed
- lo: 2776770 11307 0 0 0 0 0 0 2776770 11307 0 0 0 0 0 0
- eth0: 1215645 2751 0 0 0 0 0 0 1782404 4324 0 0 0 427 0 0
- ppp0: 1622270 5552 1 0 0 0 0 0 354130 5669 0 0 0 0 0 0
- tap0: 7714 81 0 0 0 0 0 0 7714 81 0 0 0 0 0 0
-.in
-.ft
-.fi
-.\" .TP
-.\" .I ipx
-.\" No information.
-.\" .TP
-.\" .I ipx_route
-.\" No information.
-.TP
-.I dev_mcast
-Defined in
-.IR /usr/src/linux/net/core/dev_mcast.c :
-.nf
-.in +5
-indx ifterface_name dmi_u dmi_g dmi_address
-2 eth0 1 0 01005e000001
-3 eth1 1 0 01005e000001
-4 eth2 1 0 01005e000001
-.in
-.fi
-.TP
-.I igmp
-Internet Group Management Protocol. Defined in
-.IR /usr/src/linux/net/core/igmp.c .
-.TP
-.I rarp
-This file uses the same format as the
-.I arp
-file and contains the current reverse mapping database used to provide
-.BR rarp (8)
-reverse address lookup services. If RARP is not configured into the kernel,
-this file will not be present.
-.TP
-.I raw
-Holds a dump of the RAW socket table. Much of the information is not of use
-apart from debugging. The 'sl' value is the kernel hash slot for the socket,
-the 'local address' is the local address and protocol number pair."St" is
-the internal status of the socket. The "tx_queue" and "rx_queue" are the
-outgoing and incoming data queue in terms of kernel memory usage. The "tr",
-"tm->when", and "rexmits" fields are not used by RAW. The uid field holds the
-creator euid of the socket.
-.\" .TP
-.\" .I route
-.\" No information, but looks similar to
-.\" .BR route (8).
-.TP
-.I snmp
-This file holds the ASCII data needed for the IP, ICMP, TCP, and UDP management
-information bases for an snmp agent.
-.TP
-.I tcp
-Holds a dump of the TCP socket table. Much of the information is not of use
-apart from debugging. The "sl" value is the kernel hash slot for the socket,
-the "local address" is the local address and port number pair. The "remote
-address" is the remote address and port number pair (if connected). 'St' is
-the internal status of the socket. The 'tx_queue' and 'rx_queue' are the
-outgoing and incoming data queue in terms of kernel memory usage. The "tr",
-"tm->when", and "rexmits" fields hold internal information of the kernel
-socket state and are only useful for debugging. The uid field holds the
-creator euid of the socket.
-.TP
-.I udp
-Holds a dump of the UDP socket table. Much of the information is not of use
-apart from debugging. The "sl" value is the kernel hash slot for the socket,
-the "local address" is the local address and port number pair. The "remote
-address" is the remote address and port number pair (if connected). "St" is
-the internal status of the socket. The "tx_queue" and "rx_queue" are the
-outgoing and incoming data queue in terms of kernel memory usage. The "tr",
-"tm->when", and "rexmits" fields are not used by UDP. The uid field holds the
-creator euid of the socket. The format is:
-
-.nf
-.ft CW
-.in 1n
-sl local_address rem_address st tx_queue rx_queue tr rexmits tm->when uid
- 1: 01642C89:0201 0C642C89:03FF 01 00000000:00000001 01:000071BA 00000000 0
- 1: 00000000:0801 00000000:0000 0A 00000000:00000000 00:00000000 6F000100 0
- 1: 00000000:0201 00000000:0000 0A 00000000:00000000 00:00000000 00000000 0
-.in
-.ft
-.fi
-.TP
-.I unix
-Lists the UNIX domain sockets present within the system and their
-status. The format is:
-.nf
-.sp .5
-.ft CW
-Num RefCount Protocol Flags Type St Path
- 0: 00000002 00000000 00000000 0001 03
- 1: 00000001 00000000 00010000 0001 01 /dev/printer
-.ft
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.PP
-Here 'Num' is the kernel table slot number, 'RefCount' is the number
-of users of the socket, 'Protocol' is currently always 0, 'Flags'
-represent the internal kernel flags holding the status of the
-socket. Currently, type is always '1' (Unix domain datagram sockets are
-not yet supported in the kernel). 'St' is the internal state of the
-socket and Path is the bound path (if any) of the socket.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I partitions
-Contains major and minor numbers of each partition as well as number
-of blocks and partition name.
-.TP
-.I pci
-This is a listing of all PCI devices found during kernel initialization
-and their configuration.
-.TP
-.I scsi
-A directory with the scsi midlevel pseudo-file and various SCSI lowlevel driver
-directories, which contain a file for each SCSI host in this system, all of
-which give the status of some part of the SCSI IO subsystem.
-These files contain ASCII structures and are, therefore, readable with cat.
-
-You can also write to some of the files to reconfigure the subsystem or switch
-certain features on or off.
-.RS
-.TP
-.I scsi
-This is a listing of all SCSI devices known to the kernel. The listing is
-similar to the one seen during bootup.
-scsi currently supports only the \fIadd-single-device\fP command which allows
-root to add a hotplugged device to the list of known devices.
-
-An
-.B echo 'scsi add-single-device 1 0 5 0' > /proc/scsi/scsi
-will cause
-host scsi1 to scan on SCSI channel 0 for a device on ID 5 LUN 0. If there
-is already a device known on this address or the address is invalid, an
-error will be returned.
-.TP
-.I drivername
-\fIdrivername\fP can currently be NCR53c7xx, aha152x, aha1542, aha1740,
-aic7xxx, buslogic, eata_dma, eata_pio, fdomain, in2000, pas16, qlogic,
-scsi_debug, seagate, t128, u15-24f, ultrastore, or wd7000.
-These directories show up for all drivers that registered at least one SCSI
-HBA. Every directory contains one file per registered host. Every host-file is
-named after the number the host was assigned during initialization.
-
-Reading these files will usually show driver and host configuration,
-statistics etc.
-
-Writing to these files allows different things on different hosts.
-For example, with the \fIlatency\fP and \fInolatency\fP commands,
-root can switch on and off command latency measurement code in the
-eata_dma driver. With the \fIlockup\fP and \fIunlock\fP commands,
-root can control bus lockups simulated by the scsi_debug driver.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I self
-This directory refers to the process accessing the /proc filesystem,
-and is identical to the /proc directory named by the process ID of the
-same process.
-.TP
-.I slabinfo
-Information about kernel caches. The columns are:
-.nf
-cache-name
-num-active-objs
-total-objs
-object-size
-num-active-slabs
-total-slabs
-num-pages-per-slab
-.fi
-See
-.BR slabinfo (5)
-for details.
-.TP
-.I stat
-kernel/system statistics. Varies with architecture. Common
-entries include:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fIcpu 3357 0 4313 1362393\fP
-The number of jiffies (1/100ths of a second) that the system spent in
-user mode, user mode with low priority (nice), system mode, and the
-idle task, respectively. The last value should be 100 times the
-second entry in the uptime pseudo-file.
-.TP
-\fIpage 5741 1808\fP
-The number of pages the system paged in and the number that were paged
-out (from disk).
-.TP
-\fIswap 1 0\fP
-The number of swap pages that have been brought in and out.
-.TP
-\fIintr 1462898\fP
-The number of interrupts received from the system boot.
-.TP
-\fIdisk_io: (2,0):(31,30,5764,1,2) (3,0):\fP...
-(major,minor):(noinfo, read_io_ops, blks_read, write_io_ops, blks_written)
-.TP
-\fIctxt 115315\fP
-The number of context switches that the system underwent.
-.TP
-\fIbtime 769041601\fP
-boot time, in seconds since the epoch (January 1, 1970).
-.TP
-\fIprocesses 86031\fP
-Number of forks since boot.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I swaps
-Swap areas in use. See also
-.BR swapon (8).
-.TP
-.I sys
-This directory (present since 1.3.57) contains a number of files
-and subdirectories corresponding to kernel variables.
-These variables can be read and sometimes modified using
-the \fIproc\fP file system, and the
-.BR sysctl (2)
-system call. Presently, there are subdirectories
-.IR abi ", " debug ", " dev ", " fs ", " kernel ", " net ", " proc ", "
-.IR rxrpc ", " sunrpc " and " vm
-that each contain more files and subdirectories.
-.RS
-.TP
-.I abi
-This directory may contain files with application binary information.
-On some systems, it is not present.
-.TP
-.I debug
-This directory may be empty.
-.TP
-.I dev
-This directory contains device specific information (eg dev/cdrom/info). On
-some systems, it may be empty.
-.TP
-.I fs
-This contains the subdirectory
-.IR binfmt_misc
-and files
-.IR dentry-state ", " dir-notify-enable ", " dquot-nr ", " file-max ", "
-.IR file-nr ", " inode-max ", " inode-nr ", " inode-state ", "
-.IR lease-break-time ", " leases-enable ", " overflowgid ", " overflowuid
-.IR super-max " and " super-nr
-with function fairly clear from the name.
-.LP
-Documentation for the files in
-.I /proc/sys/binfmt_misc
-can be found in the kernel sources in
-.IR Documentation/binfmt_misc.txt .
-.LP
-The file
-.I dentry-state
-contains six numbers,
-.IR nr_dentry ", " nr_unused ", " age_limit " (age in seconds), " want_pages
-(pages requested by system) and two dummy values.
-nr_dentry seems to be 0 all the time.
-nr_unused seems to be the number of unused dentries.
-age_limit is the age in seconds after which dcache entries
-can be reclaimed when memory is short and want_pages is
-nonzero when the kernel has called shrink_dcache_pages() and the
-dcache isn't pruned yet.
-.LP
-The file
-.I dir-notify-enable
-can be used to disable or enable the
-.I dnotify
-interface described in
-.BR fcntl (2)
-on a system-wide basis.
-A value of 0 in this file disables the interface,
-and a value of 1 enables it.
-.LP
-The file
-.I dquot-max
-shows the maximum number of cached disk quota entries.
-On some (2.4) systems, it is not present.
-If the number of free cached disk quotas is very low and
-you have some awesome number of simultaneous system users,
-you might want to raise the limit.
-.LP
-The file
-.I dquot-nr
-shows the number of allocated disk quota
-entries and the number of free disk quota entries.
-.LP
-The file
-.I file-max
-is a system-wide limit on the number of open files for all processes.
-(See also
-.BR setrlimit (2),
-which can be used by a process to set the per-process limit,
-.BR RLIMIT_NOFILE ,
-on the number of files it may open.)
-If you get lots
-of error messages about running out of file handles,
-try increasing this value:
-.br
-
-.br
-.nf
-.ft CW
-echo 100000 > /proc/sys/fs/file-max
-.fi
-.ft
-.LP
-The kernel constant
-.I NR_OPEN
-imposes an upper limit on the value that may be placed in
-.IR file-max .
-.LP
-If you increase
-.IR file-max ","
-be sure to increase
-.I inode-max
-to 3-4 times the new
-value of
-.IR file-max ","
-or you will run out of inodes.
-.LP
-The (read-only) file
-.I file-nr
-gives the number of files presently opened.
-It contains three numbers: The number of allocated
-file handles, the number of free file handles and the maximum
-number of file handles. The kernel allocates file handles dynamically, but it
-doesn't free them again. If the number of allocated files is close to the
-maximum, you should consider increasing the maximum.
-When the number of free file handles is
-large, you've encountered a peak in your usage of file
-handles and you probably don't need to increase the maximum.
-.LP
-The file
-.I inode-max
-contains the maximum number of in-memory inodes.
-On some (2.4) systems, it may not be
-present. This value should be 3-4 times larger
-than the value in file-max, since stdin, stdout and network sockets also
-need an inode to handle them. When you regularly run
-out of inodes, you need to increase this value.
-.LP
-The file
-.I inode-nr
-contains the first two values from inode-state.
-.LP
-The file
-.I inode-state
-contains seven numbers: nr_inodes, nr_free_inodes, preshrink and four dummy
-values.
-nr_inodes is the number of inodes the system has
-allocated. This can be slightly more than inode-max because
-Linux allocates them one pageful at a time.
-nr_free_inodes represents the number of free inodes.
-preshrink is nonzero when the nr_inodes > inode-max and the
-system needs to prune the inode list instead of allocating
-more.
-.LP
-The file
-.I lease-break-time
-specifies the grace period that the kernel grants to a process
-holding a file lease
-.RB ( fcntl (2))
-after it has sent a signal to that process notifying it
-that another process is waiting to open the file.
-If the lease holder does not remove or downgrade the lease within
-this grace period, the kernel forcibly breaks the lease.
-.LP
-The file
-.I leases-enable
-can be used to enable or disable file leases
-.RB ( fcntl (2))
-on a system-wide basis.
-If this file contains the value 0, leases are disabled.
-A non-zero value enables leases.
-.LP
-The files
-.IR overflowgid " and "
-.I overflowuid
-allow you to change the value of the fixed UID and GID.
-The default is 65534.
-Some filesystems only support 16-bit UIDs and GIDs, although in Linux
-UIDs and GIDs are 32 bits. When one of these filesystems is mounted
-with writes enabled, any UID or GID that would exceed 65535 is translated
-to the overflow value before being written to disk.
-.LP
-The file
-.I super-max
-controls the maximum number of superblocks, and
-thus the maximum number of mounted filesystems the kernel
-can have. You only need to increase super-max if you need to
-mount more filesystems than the current value in super-max
-allows you to.
-The file
-.I super-nr
-contains the number of filesystems currently mounted.
-.TP
-.I kernel
-This directory contains files
-.IR acct ", " cad_pid ", " cap-bound ", "
-.IR core_pattern ", " core_uses_pid ", "
-.IR ctrl-alt-del ", " dentry-state ", " domainname ", "
-.IR hotplug ", " hostname ", "
-.IR htab-reclaim " (PowerPC only), "
-.IR java-appletviewer " (binfmt_java, obsolete), "
-.IR java-interpreter " (binfmt_java, obsolete), " l2cr " (PowerPC only), "
-.IR modprobe ", " msgmax ", " msgmnb ", "
-.IR msgmni ", " osrelease ", " ostype ", " overflowgid ", " overflowuid ", "
-.IR panic ", " panic_on_oops ", " pid_max ", "
-.IR powersave-nap " (PowerPC only), " printk ", " random ", "
-.IR real-root-dev ", " reboot-cmd " (SPARC only), " rtsig-max ", "
-.IR rtsig-nr ", " sem ", " sg-big-buff ", "
-.IR shmall ", " shmmax ", " shmmni ", " sysrq ", " tainted ", " threads-max ", "
-.IR version " and " zero-paged " (PowerPC only) "
-with function fairly clear from the name.
-.LP
-The file
-.I acct
-contains three numbers: highwater, lowwater and frequency.
-If BSD-style process accounting is enabled these values control
-its behaviour. If free space on filesystem where the log lives
-goes below lowwater percent accounting suspends. If free space gets
-above highwater percent accounting resumes. Frequency determines
-how often the kernel checks the amount of free space (value is in
-seconds). Default values are 4, 2 and 30.
-That is, suspend accounting if <= 2% of space is free; resume it
-if >= 4% of space is free; consider information about amount of free space
-valid for 30 seconds.
-.LP
-The file
-.I cap-bound
-holds the value of the kernel
-.IR "capability bounding set"
-(expressed as a signed decimal number).
-This set is ANDed against the capabilities permitted to a process
-during exec.
-.LP
-The file
-.I core_pattern
-(new in Linux 2.5) provides finer control over the form of
-a core filename than the obsolete
-.IR core_uses_pid
-file described below.
-The name for a core file is controlled by defining a template in
-.IR core_pattern .
-The template can contain % specifiers which are substituted
-by the following values when a core file is created:
-.nf
-
- %% A single % character
- %p PID of dumped process
- %u real UID of dumped process
- %g real GID of dumped process
- %s number of signal causing dump
- %t time of dump (secs since 0:00h, 1 Jan 1970)
- %h hostname (same as the 'nodename'
- returned by \fBuname\fP(2))
- %e executable filename
-
-.fi
-A single % at the end of the template is dropped from the
-core filename, as is the combination of a % followed by any
-character other than those listed above.
-All other characters in the template become a literal
-part of the core filename.
-The maximum size of the resulting core filename is 64 bytes.
-The default value in this file is "core".
-For backward compatibility, if
-.I core_pattern
-does not include "%p" and
-.I core_uses_pid
-is non-zero, then .PID will be appended to the core filename.
-.LP
-The file
-.I core_uses_pid
-can be used control the naming of a core dump file on Linux 2.4.
-If this file contains the value 0, then a core dump file is simply named
-.IR core .
-If this file contains a non-zero value, then the core dump file includes
-the process ID in a name of the form
-.IR core.PID .
-.LP
-The file
-.I ctrl-alt-del
-controls the handling of Ctrl-Alt-Del from the keyboard.
-When the value in this file is 0, Ctrl-Alt-Del is trapped and
-sent to the
-.BR init (1)
-program to handle a graceful restart.
-When the value is > 0, Linux's reaction to a Vulcan
-Nerve Pinch (tm) will be an immediate reboot, without even
-syncing its dirty buffers.
-Note: when a program (like dosemu) has the keyboard in 'raw'
-mode, the ctrl-alt-del is intercepted by the program before it
-ever reaches the kernel tty layer, and it's up to the program
-to decide what to do with it.
-.LP
-The file
-.I hotplug
-contains the path for the hotplug policy agent.
-The default value in this file "/sbin/hotplug".
-.LP
-The files
-.IR domainname " and "
-.I hostname
-can be used to set the NIS/YP domainname and the
-hostname of your box in exactly the same way as the commands
-domainname and hostname, i.e.:
-.br
-
-.br
-# echo "darkstar" > /proc/sys/kernel/hostname
-.br
-# echo "mydomain" > /proc/sys/kernel/domainname
-.br
-
-.br
-has the same effect as
-.br
-
-.br
-# hostname "darkstar"
-.br
-# domainname "mydomain"
-.br
-
-.br
-Note, however, that the classic darkstar.frop.org has the
-hostname "darkstar" and DNS (Internet Domain Name Server)
-domainname "frop.org", not to be confused with the NIS (Network
-Information Service) or YP (Yellow Pages) domainname. These two
-domain names are in general different. For a detailed discussion
-see the
-.BR hostname (1)
-man page.
-.LP
-If the file
-.I htab-reclaim
-(PowerPC only) is set to a non-zero value,
-the PowerPC htab
-(see kernel file Documentation/powerpc/ppc_htab.txt) is pruned
-each time the system hits the idle loop.
-.LP
-The file
-.I l2cr
-(PowerPC only) contains a flag that controls the L2 cache of G3 processor
-boards. If 0, the cache is disabled. Enabled if nonzero.
-.LP
-The file
-.I modprobe
-is described by the kernel source file Documentation/kmod.txt.
-.LP
-The file
-.I msgmax
-is a system-wide limit specifying the maximum number of bytes in
-a single message written on a System V message queue.
-.LP
-The file
-.I msgmni
-defines the system-wide limit on the number of message queue identifiers.
-(This file is only present in Linux 2.4 onwards.)
-.LP
-The file
-.I msgmnb
-is a system-wide paramter used to initialise the
-.I msg_qbytes
-setting for subsequenly created message queues.
-The
-.I msg_qbytes
-setting specifies the maximum number of bytes that may be written to the
-message queue.
-.LP
-The files
-.I ostype
-and
-.I osrelease
-give substrings of
-.IR /proc/version .
-.LP
-The files
-.I overflowgid
-and
-.I overflowuid
-duplicate the files
-.I /proc/sys/fs/overflowgid
-and
-.IR /proc/sys/fs/overflowuid .
-.LP
-The file
-.I panic
-gives read/write access to the kernel variable
-.IR panic_timeout .
-If this is zero, the kernel will loop on a panic; if nonzero
-it indicates that the kernel should autoreboot after this number
-of seconds. When you use the
-software watchdog device driver, the recommended setting is 60.
-.LP
-The file
-.I panic_on_oops
-(new in Linux 2.5) controls the kernel's behaviour when an oops or
-BUG is encountered. If this file contains 0, then the system
-tries to continue operation. If it contains 1, then the system
-delays a few seconds (to give klogd time to record the oops output)
-and then panics.
-If the
-.I panic
-file is also non-zero then the machine will be rebooted.
-.LP
-The file
-.I pid_max
-(new in Linux 2.5)
-specifies the value at which PIDs wrap around
-(i.e., the value in this file is one greater than the maximum PID).
-The default value for this file, 32768,
-results in the same range of PIDs as on earlier kernels.
-The value in this file can be set to any value up to 2^22
-(PID_MAX_LIMIT, approximately 4 million).
-.LP
-The file
-.IR powersave-nap " (PowerPC only)"
-contains a flag. If set, Linux-PPC will use the 'nap' mode of powersaving,
-otherwise the 'doze' mode will be used.
-.LP
-The four values in the file
-.I printk
-are console_loglevel, default_message_loglevel, minimum_console_level and
-default_console_loglevel.
-These values influence printk() behavior when printing or
-logging error messages. See
-.BR syslog (2)
-for more info on the different loglevels.
-Messages with a higher priority than
-console_loglevel will be printed to the console.
-Messages without an explicit priority
-will be printed with priority default_message_level.
-minimum_console_loglevel is the minimum (highest) value to which
-console_loglevel can be set.
-default_console_loglevel is the default value for console_loglevel.
-.LP
-The directory
-.\" FIXME say more about random
-.I random
-contains various parameters controlling the operation of the file
-.IR /dev/random .
-.LP
-The file
-.I real-root-dev
-is documented in the kernel source file Documentation/initrd.txt.
-.LP
-The file
-.IR reboot-cmd " (Sparc only) "
-seems to be a way to give an argument to the SPARC
-ROM/Flash boot loader. Maybe to tell it what to do after
-rebooting?
-.LP
-The file
-.I rtsig-max
-can be used to tune the maximum number
-of POSIX realtime (queued) signals that can be outstanding
-in the system.
-.LP
-The file
-.I rtsig-nr
-shows the number POSIX realtime signals currently queued.
-.LP
-The file
-.I sem
-(available in Linux 2.4 onwards)
-contains 4 numbers defining limits for System V IPC semaphores.
-These fields are, in order:
-.IP SEMMSL 8
-The maximum semaphores per semaphore set.
-.IP SEMMNS 8
-A system-wide limit on the number of semaphores in all semaphore sets.
-.IP SEMOPM 8
-The maximum number of operations that may be specified in a
-.BR semop (2)
-call.
-.IP SEMMNI 8
-A system-wide limit on the maximum number of semaphore identifiers.
-.LP
-The file
-.I sg-big-buff
-shows the size of the generic SCSI device (sg) buffer.
-You can't tune it just yet, but you could change it on
-compile time by editing include/scsi/sg.h and changing
-the value of SG_BIG_BUFF. However, there shouldn't be any reason to change
-this value.
-.LP
-The file
-.I shmall
-contains the system-wide limit on the total number of pages of
-System V shared memory.
-.LP
-The file
-.I shmmax
-can be used to query and set the run time limit
-on the maximum (System V IPC) shared memory segment size that can be created.
-Shared memory segments up to 1Gb are now supported in the
-kernel. This value defaults to SHMMAX.
-.LP
-The file
-.I shmmni
-(available in Linux 2.4 and onwards)
-specifies the system-wide maximum number of System V shared memory
-segments that can be created.
-.LP
-The file
-.I version
-contains a string like:
-.br
-
-.br
-#5 Wed Feb 25 21:49:24 MET 1998.TP
-.br
-
-.br
-The '#5' means that
-this is the fifth kernel built from this source base and the
-date behind it indicates the time the kernel was built.
-.LP
-The file
-.IR zero-paged " (PowerPC only) "
-contains a flag. When enabled (non-zero), Linux-PPC will pre-zero pages in
-the idle loop, possibly speeding up get_free_pages.
-.TP
-The
-.I net
-This directory contains networking stuff.
-.TP
-.I proc
-This directory may be empty.
-.TP
-.I sunrpc
-This directory supports Sun remote procedure call for network file system
-(NFS). On some systems, it is not present.
-.TP
-.I vm
-This directory contains files for memory management tuning, buffer and cache
-management.
-.RE
-.TP
-.I sysvipc
-Subdirectory containing the pseudo-files
-.IR msg ", " sem " and " shm "."
-These files list the System V Interprocess Communication (IPC) objects
-(respectively: message queues, semaphores, and shared memory)
-that currently exist on the system,
-providing similar information to that available via
-.BR ipcs (1).
-These files have headers and are formatted (one IPC object per line)
-for easy understanding.
-.BR ipc (5)
-provides further background on the information shown by these files.
-.TP
-.I tty
-Subdirectory containing the psuedo-files and subdirectories for
-tty drivers and line disciplines.
-.TP
-.I uptime
-This file contains two numbers: the uptime of the system (seconds),
-and the amount of time spent in idle process (seconds).
-.TP
-.I version
-This string identifies the kernel version that is currently running.
-It includes the contents of /proc/sys/ostype, /proc/sys/osrelease and
-/proc/sys/version. For example:
-.nf
-.in -2
-.ft CW
-Linux version 1.0.9 (quinlan at phaze) #1 Sat May 14 01:51:54 EDT 1994
-.ft
-.in +2
-.fi
-
-.RE
-.RE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR cat (1),
-.BR find (1),
-.BR free (1),
-.BR mount (1),
-.BR ps (1),
-.BR tr (1),
-.BR uptime (1),
-.BR chroot (2),
-.BR mmap (2),
-.BR readlink (2),
-.BR syslog (2),
-.BR slabinfo (5),
-.BR hier (7),
-.BR arp (8),
-.BR dmesg (8),
-.BR hdparm (8),
-.BR ifconfig (8),
-.BR lsmod (8),
-.BR lspci (8),
-.BR netstat (8),
-.BR procinfo (8),
-.BR route (8)
-.BR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
-.SH "CONFORMS TO"
-This roughly conforms to a Linux 2.4.17 kernel. Please update this as
-necessary!
-
-Last updated for Linux 2.4.17.
-.SH CAVEATS
-Note that many strings (i.e., the environment and command line) are in
-the internal format, with sub-fields terminated by NUL bytes, so you
-may find that things are more readable if you use \fIod -c\fP or \fItr
-"\\000" "\\n"\fP to read them.
-Alternatively, \fIecho `cat <file>`\fP works well.
-
-This manual page is incomplete, possibly inaccurate, and is the kind
-of thing that needs to be updated very often.
-.SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
-The material on /proc/sys/fs and /proc/sys/kernel is closely based on
-kernel source documentation files written by Rik van Riel.
diff --git a/raw/man5/protocols.5 b/raw/man5/protocols.5
deleted file mode 100644
index ceee60b..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/protocols.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1995 Martin Schulze <joey at infodrom.north.de>
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Wed Oct 18 20:23:54 MET 1995 Martin Schulze <joey at infodrom.north.de>
-.\" * first released
-.\"
-.TH PROTOCOLS 5 1995-10-18 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-protocols \- the protocols definition file
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This file is a plain ASCII file, describing the various DARPA internet
-protocols that are available from the TCP/IP subsystem. It should be
-consulted instead of using the numbers in the ARPA include files, or,
-even worse, just guessing them. These numbers will occur in the
-protocol field of any ip header.
-
-Keep this file untouched since changes would result in incorrect ip
-packages. Protocol numbers and names are specified by the DDN Network
-Information Center.
-
-Each line is of the following format:
-
-.RS
-.I protocol number aliases ...
-.RE
-
-where the fields are delimited by spaces or tabs.
-Empty lines are ignored.
-If a line contains a hash mark (#), the hash mark and the part
-of the line following it are ignored.
-
-The field descriptions are:
-
-.TP
-.I protocol
-the native name for the protocol. For example ip, tcp, or udp.
-.TP
-.I number
-the official number for this protocol as it will appear within the ip
-header.
-.TP
-.I aliases
-optional aliases for the protocol.
-.LP
-
-This file might be distributed over a network using a networkwide
-naming service like Yellow Pages/NIS or BIND/Hesiod.
-
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.I /etc/protocols
-The protocols definition file.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR getprotoent (3)
-
-Guide to Yellow Pages Service
-
-Guide to BIND/Hesiod Service
diff --git a/raw/man5/resolver.5 b/raw/man5/resolver.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 35977f9..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/resolver.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,222 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1986 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted
-.\" provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
-.\" duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation,
-.\" advertising materials, and other materials related to such
-.\" distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed
-.\" by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the
-.\" University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
-.\" from this software without specific prior written permission.
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
-.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.\"
-.\"
-.Dd November 11, 1993
-.Dt RESOLVER 5
-.Os BSD 4
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm resolver
-.Nd resolver configuration file
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Pa /etc/resolv.conf
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-The
-.Nm resolver
-is a set of routines in the C library
-.Pq Xr resolve 3
-that provide access to the Internet Domain Name System.
-The
-.Nm resolver
-configuration file contains information that is read
-by the
-.Nm resolver
-routines the first time they are invoked by a process.
-The file is designed to be human readable and contains a list of
-keywords with values that provide various types of
-.Nm resolver
-information.
-.Pp
-On a normally configured system, this file should not be necessary.
-The only name server to be queried will be on the local machine,
-the domain name is determined from the host name,
-and the domain search path is constructed from the domain name.
-.Pp
-The different configuration directives are:
-.Bl -tag -width "nameser"
-.It Li nameserver
-Internet address (in dot notation) of a name server that the
-.Nm resolver
-should query. Up to
-.Dv MAXNS
-(see
-.Pa <resolv.h> )
-name servers may be listed, one per keyword.
-If there are multiple servers, the
-.Nm resolver
-library queries them in the order listed.
-If no
-.Li nameserver
-entries are present, the default is to use the name server on the local machine.
-(The algorithm used is to try a name server, and if the query times out,
-try the next, until out of name servers,
-then repeat trying all the name servers
-until a maximum number of retries are made).
-.It Li domain
-Local domain name.
-Most queries for names within this domain can use short names
-relative to the local domain.
-If no
-.Li domain
-entry is present, the domain is determined from the local host name returned by
-.Xr gethostname 2 ;
-the domain part is taken to be everything after the first
-.Sq \&. .
-Finally, if the host name does not contain a domain part, the root
-domain is assumed.
-.It Li search
-Search list for host-name lookup.
-The search list is normally determined from the local domain name;
-by default, it contains only the local domain name.
-This may be changed by listing the desired domain search path
-following the
-.Li search
-keyword with spaces or tabs separating the names.
-Most
-.Nm resolver
-queries will be attempted using each component
-of the search path in turn until a match is found.
-Note that this process may be slow and will generate a lot of network
-traffic if the servers for the listed domains are not local,
-and that queries will time out if no server is available
-for one of the domains.
-.Pp
-The search list is currently limited to six domains
-with a total of 256 characters.
-.It Li sortlist
-Allows addresses returned by gethostbyname to be sorted.
-A
-.Li sortlist
-is specified by IP address netmask pairs. The netmask is
-optional and defaults to the natural netmask of the net. The IP address
-and optional network pairs are separated by slashes. Up to 10 pairs may
-be specified. For example:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-sortlist 130.155.160.0/255.255.240.0 130.155.0.0
-.Ed
-.It Li options
-Allows certain internal
-.Nm resolver
-variables to be modified.
-The syntax is
-.D1 Li options Ar option ...
-where
-.Ar option
-is one of the following:
-.Bl -tag -width "ndots:n "
-.It Li debug
-sets
-.Dv RES_DEBUG
-in
-.Ft _res.options .
-.It Li ndots: Ns Ar n
-sets a threshold for the number of dots which
-must appear in a name given to
-.Fn res_query
-(see
-.Xr resolver 3 )
-before an
-.Em initial absolute query
-will be made. The default for
-.Ar n
-is
-.Dq 1 ,
-meaning that if there are
-.Em any
-dots in a name, the name will be tried first as an absolute name before any
-.Em search list
-elements are appended to it.
-.It Li timeout: Ns Ar n
-sets the amount of time the resolver will wait for a response from a remote
-name server before retrying the query via a different name server. Measured in
-seconds, the default is
-.Dv RES_TIMEOUT
-(see
-.Pa <resolv.h> ).
-.It Li attempts: Ns Ar n
-sets the number of times the resolver will send a query to its name servers
-before giving up and returning an error to the calling application. The
-default is
-.Dv RES_DFLRETRY
-(see
-.Pa <resolv.h> ).
-.It Li rotate
-sets
-.Dv RES_ROTATE
-in
-.Ft _res.options ,
-which causes round robin selection of nameservers from among those listed.
-This has the effect of spreading the query load among all listed servers,
-rather than having all clients try the first listed server first every time.
-.It Li no-check-names
-sets
-.Dv RES_NOCHECKNAME
-in
-.Ft _res.options ,
-which disables the modern BIND checking of incoming host names and mail names
-for invalid characters such as underscore (_), non-ASCII, or control characters.
-.It Li inet6
-sets
-.Dv RES_USE_INET6
-in
-.Ft _res.options .
-This has the effect of trying a AAAA query before an A query inside the
-.Ft gethostbyname
-function, and of mapping IPv4 responses in IPv6 ``tunnelled form'' if no
-AAAA records are found but an A record set exists.
-.El
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Li domain
-and
-.Li search
-keywords are mutually exclusive.
-If more than one instance of these keywords is present,
-the last instance wins.
-.Pp
-The
-.Li search
-keyword of a system's
-.Pa resolv.conf
-file can be
-overridden on a per-process basis by setting the environment variable
-.Dq Ev LOCALDOMAIN
-to a space-separated list of search domains.
-.Pp
-The
-.Li options
-keyword of a system's
-.Pa resolv.conf
-file can be amended on a per-process basis by setting the environment variable
-.Dq Ev RES_OPTIONS to a space-separated list of
-.Nm resolver
-options as explained above under
-.Li options .
-.Pp
-The keyword and value must appear on a single line, and the keyword
-(e.g.,
-.Li nameserver )
-must start the line. The value follows the keyword, separated by white space.
-.Sh FILES
-.Pa /etc/resolv.conf
-.Pa <resolv.h>
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr gethostbyname 3 ,
-.Xr hostname 7 ,
-.Xr named 8 ,
-.Xr resolver 3 ,
-.Xr resolver 5 .
-.Dq Name Server Operations Guide for Sy BIND
diff --git a/raw/man5/rpc.5 b/raw/man5/rpc.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 5150b56..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/rpc.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)rpc.5 2.2 88/08/03 4.0 RPCSRC; from 1.4 87/11/27 SMI;
-.TH RPC 5 1985-09-26
-.SH NAME
-rpc \- rpc program number data base
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /etc/rpc
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.I rpc
-file contains user readable names that
-can be used in place of rpc program numbers.
-Each line has the following information:
-.HP 10
-name of server for the rpc program
-.br
-.ns
-.HP 10
-rpc program number
-.br
-.ns
-.HP 10
-aliases
-.LP
-Items are separated by any number of blanks and/or
-tab characters.
-A '#' indicates the beginning of a comment; characters from
-the '#' to the end of the line are not interpreted by routines
-which search the file.
-.LP
-Here is an example of the \fI/etc/rpc\fP file from the Sun RPC Source
-distribution.
-.nf
-.ta 1.5i +0.5i +1.0i +1.0i
-#
-# rpc 88/08/01 4.0 RPCSRC; from 1.12 88/02/07 SMI
-#
-portmapper 100000 portmap sunrpc
-rstatd 100001 rstat rstat_svc rup perfmeter
-rusersd 100002 rusers
-nfs 100003 nfsprog
-ypserv 100004 ypprog
-mountd 100005 mount showmount
-ypbind 100007
-walld 100008 rwall shutdown
-yppasswdd 100009 yppasswd
-etherstatd 100010 etherstat
-rquotad 100011 rquotaprog quota rquota
-sprayd 100012 spray
-3270_mapper 100013
-rje_mapper 100014
-selection_svc 100015 selnsvc
-database_svc 100016
-rexd 100017 rex
-alis 100018
-sched 100019
-llockmgr 100020
-nlockmgr 100021
-x25.inr 100022
-statmon 100023
-status 100024
-bootparam 100026
-ypupdated 100028 ypupdate
-keyserv 100029 keyserver
-tfsd 100037
-nsed 100038
-nsemntd 100039
-.fi
-.DT
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.I /etc/rpc
-rpc program number data base
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR getrpcent (3)
diff --git a/raw/man5/securetty.5 b/raw/man5/securetty.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c71030..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/securetty.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 11:06:27 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.TH SECURETTY 5 1992-12-29 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-securetty \- file which lists ttys from which root can log in
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The file
-.I /etc/securetty
-is used by (some versions of)
-.BR login (1).
-The file contains the device names of tty lines
-(one per line, without leading
-.IR /dev/ )
-on which root is allowed to login.
-See
-.BR login.defs (5)
-if you use the shadow suite.
-.SH FILES
-.I /etc/securetty
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR login (1),
-.BR login.defs (5)
diff --git a/raw/man5/services.5 b/raw/man5/services.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c526ea..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/services.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" This manpage is Copyright (C) 1996 Austin Donnelly <and1000 at cam.ac.uk>,
-.\" with additional material (c) 1995 Martin Schulze <joey at infodrom.north.de>
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" This manpage was made by merging two independently written manpages,
-.\" one written by Martin Schulze (18 Oct 95), the other written by
-.\" Austin Donnelly, (9 Jan 96).
-.\"
-.\" Thu Jan 11 12:14:41 1996 Austin Donnelly <and1000 at cam.ac.uk>
-.\" * Merged two services(5) manpages
-.\"
-.TH SERVICES 5 1996-01-11 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-services \- Internet network services list
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B services
-is a plain ASCII file providing a mapping between friendly textual
-names for internet services, and their underlying assigned port
-numbers and protocol types. Every networking program should look into
-this file to get the port number (and protocol) for its service.
-The C library routines
-.BR getservent (3),
-.BR getservbyname (3),
-.BR getservbyport (3),
-.BR setservent (3),
-and
-.BR endservent (3)
-support querying this file from programs.
-
-Port numbers are assigned by the IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers
-Authority), and their current policy is to assign both TCP and UDP
-protocols when assigning a port number. Therefore, most entries will
-have two entries, even for TCP only services.
-
-Port numbers below 1024 (so-called 'low numbered' ports) can only be
-bound to by root (see
-.BR bind (2),
-.BR tcp (7),
-and
-.BR udp (7)).
-This is so clients connecting to low numbered ports can trust
-that the service running on the port is the standard implementation,
-and not a rogue service run by a user of the machine. Well-known port
-numbers specified by the IANA are normally located in this root-only
-space.
-
-The presence of an entry for a service in the
-.B services
-file does not necessarily mean that the service is currently running
-on the machine. See
-.BR inetd.conf (5)
-for the configuration of Internet services offered. Note that not all
-networking services are started by
-.BR inetd (8),
-and so won't appear in
-.BR inetd.conf (5).
-In particular, news (NNTP) and mail (SMTP) servers are often
-initialized from the system boot scripts.
-
-The location of the
-.B services
-file is defined by
-.B _PATH_SERVICES
-in
-.IR /usr/include/netdb.h "."
-This is usually set to
-.IR /etc/services "."
-
-Each line describes one service, and is of the form:
-.IP
-\f2service-name\ \ \ port\f3/\f2protocol\ \ \ \f1[\f2aliases ...\f1]
-.TP
-where:
-.TP 10
-.I service-name
-is the friendly name the service is known by and looked up under. It
-is case sensitive. Often, the client program is named after the
-.IR service-name "."
-.TP
-.I port
-is the port number (in decimal) to use for this service.
-.TP
-.I protocol
-is the type of protocol to be used. This field should match an entry
-in the
-.BR protocols (5)
-file. Typical values include
-.B tcp
-and
-.BR udp .
-.TP
-.I aliases
-is an optional space or tab separated list of other names for this
-service (but see the BUGS section below). Again, the names are case
-sensitive.
-.PP
-
-Either spaces or tabs may be used to separate the fields.
-
-Comments are started by the hash sign (#) and continue until the end
-of the line. Blank lines are skipped.
-
-The
-.I service-name
-should begin in the first column of the file, since leading spaces are
-not stripped.
-.I service-names
-can be any printable characters excluding space and tab. However,
-a conservative choice of characters should be used to minimize
-inter-operability problems. E.g., a-z, 0-9, and hyphen (\-) would seem a
-sensible choice.
-
-Lines not matching this format should not be present in the
-file. (Currently, they are silently skipped by
-.BR getservent (3),
-.BR getservbyname (3),
-and
-.BR getservbyport (3).
-However, this behaviour should not be relied on.)
-
-As a backwards compatibility feature, the slash (/) between the
-.I port
-number and
-.I protocol
-name can in fact be either a slash or a comma (,). Use of the comma in
-modern installations is depreciated.
-
-This file might be distributed over a network using a network-wide
-naming service like Yellow Pages/NIS or BIND/Hesiod.
-
-A sample
-.B services
-file might look like this:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-.ta 3i
-netstat 15/tcp
-qotd 17/tcp quote
-msp 18/tcp # message send protocol
-msp 18/udp # message send protocol
-chargen 19/tcp ttytst source
-chargen 19/udp ttytst source
-ftp 21/tcp
-# 22 - unassigned
-telnet 23/tcp
-.sp
-.fi
-.RE
-.SH BUGS
-There is a maximum of 35 aliases, due to the way the
-.BR getservent (3)
-code is written.
-
-Lines longer than
-.B BUFSIZ
-(currently 1024) characters will be ignored by
-.BR getservent (3),
-.BR getservbyname (3),
-and
-.BR getservbyport (3).
-However, this will also cause the next line to be mis-parsed.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.I /etc/services
-The Internet network services list
-.TP
-.I /usr/include/netdb.h
-Definition of
-.B _PATH_SERVICES
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR getservent (3),
-.BR getservbyname (3),
-.BR getservbyport (3),
-.BR setservent (3),
-.BR endservent (3),
-.BR protocols (5),
-.BR listen (2),
-.BR inetd.conf (5),
-.BR inetd (8)
-
-Assigned Numbers RFC, most recently RFC 1700, (AKA STD0002)
-
-Guide to Yellow Pages Service
-
-Guide to BIND/Hesiod Service
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/shells.5 b/raw/man5/shells.5
deleted file mode 100644
index cd7d091..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/shells.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,52 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Thu May 20 20:45:48 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 17:11:07 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sun Nov 21 10:49:38 1993 by Michael Haardt
-.\" Modified Sun Feb 26 15:09:15 1995 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.TH SHELLS 5 1993-11-21 "" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-shells \- pathnames of valid login shells
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B /etc/shells
-is a text file which contains the full pathnames of valid login shells.
-This file is consulted by
-.BR chsh (1)
-and available to be queried by other programs.
-.PP
-Be aware that there are programs which consult this file to
-find out if a user is a normal user. E.g.: ftp daemons traditionally
-disallow access to users with shells not included in this file.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.B /etc/shells
-may contain the following paths:
-.sp
-.RS
-.I /bin/sh
-.br
-.I /bin/csh
-.RE
-.SH FILES
-.I /etc/shells
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR getusershell (3)
diff --git a/raw/man5/smb.conf.5 b/raw/man5/smb.conf.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ed8240..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/smb.conf.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,6939 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMB.CONF" 5 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smb.conf \- The configuration file for the Samba suite
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.PP
-The \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file is a configuration file for the Samba suite\&. \fIsmb\&.conf\fR contains runtime configuration information for the Samba programs\&. The \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file is designed to be configured and administered by the \fBswat\fR(8) program\&. The complete description of the file format and possible parameters held within are here for reference purposes\&.
-
-.SH "FILE FORMAT"
-
-.PP
-The file consists of sections and parameters\&. A section begins with the name of the section in square brackets and continues until the next section begins\&. Sections contain parameters of the form
-
-.PP
-\fIname\fR = \fIvalue \fR
-
-.PP
-The file is line-based - that is, each newline-terminated line represents either a comment, a section name or a parameter\&.
-
-.PP
-Section and parameter names are not case sensitive\&.
-
-.PP
-Only the first equals sign in a parameter is significant\&. Whitespace before or after the first equals sign is discarded\&. Leading, trailing and internal whitespace in section and parameter names is irrelevant\&. Leading and trailing whitespace in a parameter value is discarded\&. Internal whitespace within a parameter value is retained verbatim\&.
-
-.PP
-Any line beginning with a semicolon (';') or a hash ('#') character is ignored, as are lines containing only whitespace\&.
-
-.PP
-Any line ending in a '\\' is continued on the next line in the customary UNIX fashion\&.
-
-.PP
-The values following the equals sign in parameters are all either a string (no quotes needed) or a boolean, which may be given as yes/no, 0/1 or true/false\&. Case is not significant in boolean values, but is preserved in string values\&. Some items such as create modes are numeric\&.
-
-.SH "SECTION DESCRIPTIONS"
-
-.PP
-Each section in the configuration file (except for the [global] section) describes a shared resource (known as a "share")\&. The section name is the name of the shared resource and the parameters within the section define the shares attributes\&.
-
-.PP
-There are three special sections, [global], [homes] and [printers], which are described under \fBspecial sections\fR\&. The following notes apply to ordinary section descriptions\&.
-
-.PP
-A share consists of a directory to which access is being given plus a description of the access rights which are granted to the user of the service\&. Some housekeeping options are also specifiable\&.
-
-.PP
-Sections are either file share services (used by the client as an extension of their native file systems) or printable services (used by the client to access print services on the host running the server)\&.
-
-.PP
-Sections may be designated \fBguest\fR services, in which case no password is required to access them\&. A specified UNIX \fBguest account\fR is used to define access privileges in this case\&.
-
-.PP
-Sections other than guest services will require a password to access them\&. The client provides the username\&. As older clients only provide passwords and not usernames, you may specify a list of usernames to check against the password using the "user =" option in the share definition\&. For modern clients such as Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000, this should not be necessary\&.
-
-.PP
-Note that the access rights granted by the server are masked by the access rights granted to the specified or guest UNIX user by the host system\&. The server does not grant more access than the host system grants\&.
-
-.PP
-The following sample section defines a file space share\&. The user has write access to the path \fI/home/bar\fR\&. The share is accessed via the share name "foo":
-.nf
-
-
-[foo]
- path = /home/bar
- read only = no
-
-.fi
-
-.PP
-The following sample section defines a printable share\&. The share is readonly, but printable\&. That is, the only write access permitted is via calls to open, write to and close a spool file\&. The \fBguest ok\fR parameter means access will be permitted as the default guest user (specified elsewhere):
-.nf
-
-
-[aprinter]
- path = /usr/spool/public
- read only = yes
- printable = yes
- guest ok = yes
-
-.fi
-
-.SH "SPECIAL SECTIONS"
-
-.SS "The [global] section"
-
-.PP
-parameters in this section apply to the server as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not specifically define certain items\&. See the notes under PARAMETERS for more information\&.
-
-.SS "The [homes] section"
-
-.PP
-If a section called homes is included in the configuration file, services connecting clients to their home directories can be created on the fly by the server\&.
-
-.PP
-When the connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned\&. If a match is found, it is used\&. If no match is found, the requested section name is treated as a user name and looked up in the local password file\&. If the name exists and the correct password has been given, a share is created by cloning the [homes] section\&.
-
-.PP
-Some modifications are then made to the newly created share:
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-The share name is changed from homes to the located username\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-If no path was given, the path is set to the user's home directory\&.
-
-.LP
-
-.PP
-If you decide to use a \fBpath =\fR line in your [homes] section then you may find it useful to use the %S macro\&. For example :
-
-.PP
-\fBpath = /data/pchome/%S\fR
-
-.PP
-would be useful if you have different home directories for your PCs than for UNIX access\&.
-
-.PP
-This is a fast and simple way to give a large number of clients access to their home directories with a minimum of fuss\&.
-
-.PP
-A similar process occurs if the requested section name is "homes", except that the share name is not changed to that of the requesting user\&. This method of using the [homes] section works well if different users share a client PC\&.
-
-.PP
-The [homes] section can specify all the parameters a normal service section can specify, though some make more sense than others\&. The following is a typical and suitable [homes] section:
-.nf
-
-
-[homes]
- read only = no
-
-.fi
-
-.PP
-An important point is that if guest access is specified in the [homes] section, all home directories will be visible to all clients \fBwithout a password\fR\&. In the very unlikely event that this is actually desirable, it would be wise to also specify \fBread only access\fR\&.
-
-.PP
-Note that the \fBbrowseable\fR flag for auto home directories will be inherited from the global browseable flag, not the [homes] browseable flag\&. This is useful as it means setting \fBbrowseable = no\fR in the [homes] section will hide the [homes] share but make any auto home directories visible\&.
-
-.SS "The [printers] section"
-
-.PP
-This section works like [homes], but for printers\&.
-
-.PP
-If a [printers] section occurs in the configuration file, users are able to connect to any printer specified in the local host's printcap file\&.
-
-.PP
-When a connection request is made, the existing sections are scanned\&. If a match is found, it is used\&. If no match is found, but a [homes] section exists, it is used as described above\&. Otherwise, the requested section name is treated as a printer name and the appropriate printcap file is scanned to see if the requested section name is a valid printer share name\&. If a match is found, a new printer share is created by cloning the [printers] section\&.
-
-.PP
-A few modifications are then made to the newly created share:
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-The share name is set to the located printer name
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-If no printer name was given, the printer name is set to the located printer name
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-If the share does not permit guest access and no username was given, the username is set to the located printer name\&.
-
-.LP
-
-.PP
-Note that the [printers] service MUST be printable - if you specify otherwise, the server will refuse to load the configuration file\&.
-
-.PP
-Typically the path specified would be that of a world-writeable spool directory with the sticky bit set on it\&. A typical [printers] entry would look like this:
-.nf
-
-[printers]
- path = /usr/spool/public
- guest ok = yes
- printable = yes
-.fi
-
-.PP
-All aliases given for a printer in the printcap file are legitimate printer names as far as the server is concerned\&. If your printing subsystem doesn't work like that, you will have to set up a pseudo-printcap\&. This is a file consisting of one or more lines like this:
-.nf
-
-
-alias|alias|alias|alias\&.\&.\&.
-
-.fi
-
-.PP
-Each alias should be an acceptable printer name for your printing subsystem\&. In the [global] section, specify the new file as your printcap\&. The server will then only recognize names found in your pseudo-printcap, which of course can contain whatever aliases you like\&. The same technique could be used simply to limit access to a subset of your local printers\&.
-
-.PP
-An alias, by the way, is defined as any component of the first entry of a printcap record\&. Records are separated by newlines, components (if there are more than one) are separated by vertical bar symbols ('|')\&.
-
-.RS
-.Sh "Note"
-
-.PP
-On SYSV systems which use lpstat to determine what printers are defined on the system you may be able to use "printcap name = lpstat" to automatically obtain a list of printers\&. See the "printcap name" option for more details\&.
-
-.RE
-
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-
-.PP
-parameters define the specific attributes of sections\&.
-
-.PP
-Some parameters are specific to the [global] section (e\&.g\&., \fBsecurity\fR)\&. Some parameters are usable in all sections (e\&.g\&., \fBcreate mode\fR)\&. All others are permissible only in normal sections\&. For the purposes of the following descriptions the [homes] and [printers] sections will be considered normal\&. The letter \fBG\fR in parentheses indicates that a parameter is specific to the [global] section\&. The letter \fBS\fR indicates that a parameter can be specified in a [...]
-
-.PP
-parameters are arranged here in alphabetical order - this may not create best bedfellows, but at least you can find them! Where there are synonyms, the preferred synonym is described, others refer to the preferred synonym\&.
-
-.SH "VARIABLE SUBSTITUTIONS"
-
-.PP
-Many of the strings that are settable in the config file can take substitutions\&. For example the option "path = /tmp/%u" would be interpreted as "path = /tmp/john" if the user connected with the username john\&.
-
-.PP
-These substitutions are mostly noted in the descriptions below, but there are some general substitutions which apply whenever they might be relevant\&. These are:
-
-.TP
-%U
-session user name (the user name that the client wanted, not necessarily the same as the one they got)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%G
-primary group name of %U\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%h
-the Internet hostname that Samba is running on\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%m
-the NetBIOS name of the client machine (very useful)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%L
-the NetBIOS name of the server\&. This allows you to change your config based on what the client calls you\&. Your server can have a "dual personality"\&.
-
-
-Note that this parameter is not available when Samba listens on port 445, as clients no longer send this information
-
-
-.TP
-%M
-the Internet name of the client machine\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%R
-the selected protocol level after protocol negotiation\&. It can be one of CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1, LANMAN2 or NT1\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%d
-The process id of the current server process\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%a
-the architecture of the remote machine\&. Only some are recognized, and those may not be 100% reliable\&. It currently recognizes Samba, WfWg, Win95, WinNT and Win2k\&. Anything else will be known as "UNKNOWN"\&. If it gets it wrong then sending a level 3 log to samba at samba\&.org should allow it to be fixed\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%I
-The IP address of the client machine\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%T
-the current date and time\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%D
-Name of the domain or workgroup of the current user\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%$(\fIenvvar\fR)
-The value of the environment variable \fIenvar\fR\&.
-
-
-.PP
-The following substitutes apply only to some configuration options(only those that are used when a connection has been established):
-
-.TP
-%S
-the name of the current service, if any\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%P
-the root directory of the current service, if any\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%u
-user name of the current service, if any\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%g
-primary group name of %u\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%H
-the home directory of the user given by %u\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%N
-the name of your NIS home directory server\&. This is obtained from your NIS auto\&.map entry\&. If you have not compiled Samba with the \fB--with-automount\fR option then this value will be the same as %L\&.
-
-
-.TP
-%p
-the path of the service's home directory, obtained from your NIS auto\&.map entry\&. The NIS auto\&.map entry is split up as "%N:%p"\&.
-
-
-.PP
-There are some quite creative things that can be done with these substitutions and other smb\&.conf options\&.
-
-.SH "NAME MANGLING"
-
-.PP
-Samba supports "name mangling" so that DOS and Windows clients can use files that don't conform to the 8\&.3 format\&. It can also be set to adjust the case of 8\&.3 format filenames\&.
-
-.PP
-There are several options that control the way mangling is performed, and they are grouped here rather than listed separately\&. For the defaults look at the output of the testparm program\&.
-
-.PP
-All of these options can be set separately for each service (or globally, of course)\&.
-
-.PP
-The options are:
-
-.TP
-mangle case = yes/no
-controls if names that have characters that aren't of the "default" case are mangled\&. For example, if this is yes then a name like "Mail" would be mangled\&. Default \fBno\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-case sensitive = yes/no
-controls whether filenames are case sensitive\&. If they aren't then Samba must do a filename search and match on passed names\&. Default \fBno\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-default case = upper/lower
-controls what the default case is for new filenames\&. Default \fBlower\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-preserve case = yes/no
-controls if new files are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the "default" case\&. Default \fByes\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-short preserve case = yes/no
-controls if new files which conform to 8\&.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the "default" case\&. This option can be use with "preserve case = yes" to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowercased\&. Default \fByes\fR\&.
-
-
-.PP
-By default, Samba 3\&.0 has the same semantics as a Windows NT server, in that it is case insensitive but case preserving\&.
-
-.SH "NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION"
-
-.PP
-There are a number of ways in which a user can connect to a service\&. The server uses the following steps in determining if it will allow a connection to a specified service\&. If all the steps fail, then the connection request is rejected\&. However, if one of the steps succeeds, then the following steps are not checked\&.
-
-.PP
-If the service is marked "guest only = yes" and the server is running with share-level security ("security = share") then steps 1 to 5 are skipped\&.
-
-.TP 3
-1.
-If the client has passed a username/password pair and that username/password pair is validated by the UNIX system's password programs then the connection is made as that username\&. Note that this includes the \\\\server\\service%\fIusername\fR method of passing a username\&.
-
-.TP
-2.
-If the client has previously registered a username with the system and now supplies a correct password for that username then the connection is allowed\&.
-
-.TP
-3.
-The client's NetBIOS name and any previously used user names are checked against the supplied password, if they match then the connection is allowed as the corresponding user\&.
-
-.TP
-4.
-If the client has previously validated a username/password pair with the server and the client has passed the validation token then that username is used\&.
-
-.TP
-5.
-If a "user = " field is given in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file for the service and the client has supplied a password, and that password matches (according to the UNIX system's password checking) with one of the usernames from the "user =" field then the connection is made as the username in the "user =" line\&. If one of the username in the "user =" list begins with a '@' then that name expands to a list of names in the group of the same name\&.
-
-.TP
-6.
-If the service is a guest service then a connection is made as the username given in the "guest account =" for the service, irrespective of the supplied password\&.
-
-.LP
-
-.SH "COMPLETE LIST OF GLOBAL PARAMETERS"
-
-.PP
-Here is a list of all global parameters\&. See the section of each parameter for details\&. Note that some are synonyms\&.
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-\fIabort shutdown script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIadd group script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIadd machine script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIaddprinter command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIadd share command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIadd user script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIadd user to group script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIafs username map\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIalgorithmic rid base\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIallow trusted domains\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIannounce as\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIannounce version\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIauth methods\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIauto services\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIbind interfaces only\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIbrowse list\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIchange notify timeout\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIchange share command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIclient lanman auth\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIclient ntlmv2 auth\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIclient plaintext auth\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIclient schannel\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIclient signing\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIclient use spnego\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIconfig file\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdeadtime\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdebug hires timestamp\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdebuglevel\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdebug pid\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdebug timestamp\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdebug uid\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdefault\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdefault service\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdelete group script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdeleteprinter command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdelete share command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdelete user from group script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdelete user script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdfree command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdisable netbios\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdisable spoolss\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdisplay charset\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdns proxy\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdomain logons\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdomain master\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdos charset\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIenable rid algorithm\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIencrypt passwords\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIenhanced browsing\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIenumports command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIget quota command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIgetwd cache\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIguest account\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhide local users\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhomedir map\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhost msdfs\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhostname lookups\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhosts equiv\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIidmap backend\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIidmap gid\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIidmap uid\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIinclude\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIinterfaces\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIkeepalive\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIkernel change notify\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIkernel oplocks\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlanman auth\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlarge readwrite\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap admin dn\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap delete dn\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap filter\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap group suffix\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap idmap suffix\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap machine suffix\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap passwd sync\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap port\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap server\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap ssl\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap suffix\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIldap user suffix\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlm announce\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlm interval\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIload printers\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlocal master\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlock dir\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlock directory\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlock spin count\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlock spin time\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlog file\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlog level\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlogon drive\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlogon home\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlogon path\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlogon script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlpq cache time\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImachine password timeout\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImangled stack\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImangle prefix\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImangling method\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImap to guest\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax disk size\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax log size\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax mux\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax open files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax protocol\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax smbd processes\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax ttl\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax wins ttl\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax xmit\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImessage command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImin passwd length\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImin password length\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImin protocol\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImin wins ttl\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIname cache timeout\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIname resolve order\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInetbios aliases\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInetbios name\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInetbios scope\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInis homedir\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIntlm auth\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInt pipe support\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInt status support\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInull passwords\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIobey pam restrictions\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIoplock break wait time\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIos2 driver map\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIos level\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpam password change\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpanic action\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIparanoid server security\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpassdb backend\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpasswd chat\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpasswd chat debug\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpasswd program\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpassword level\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpassword server\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpid directory\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprefered master\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpreferred master\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpreload\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpreload modules\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprintcap\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprivate dir\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprotocol\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIread bmpx\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIread raw\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIread size\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIrealm\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIremote announce\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIremote browse sync\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIrestrict anonymous\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIroot\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIroot dir\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIroot directory\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsecurity\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIserver schannel\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIserver signing\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIserver string\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIset primary group script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIset quota command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIshow add printer wizard\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIshutdown script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsmb passwd file\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsmb ports\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsocket address\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsocket options\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsource environment\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIstat cache\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsyslog\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsyslog only\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fItemplate homedir\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fItemplate primary group\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fItemplate shell\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fItime offset\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fItime server\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fItimestamp logs\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIunicode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIunix charset\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIunix extensions\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIunix password sync\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIupdate encrypted\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIuse mmap\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIusername level\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIusername map\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIuse spnego\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIutmp\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIutmp directory\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind cache time\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind enable local accounts\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind enum groups\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind enum users\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind gid\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind separator\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind trusted domains only\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind uid\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwinbind use default domain\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwins hook\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwins partners\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwins proxy\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwins server\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwins support\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIworkgroup\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwrite raw\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwtmp directory\fR
-
-.LP
-
-.SH "COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS"
-
-.PP
-Here is a list of all service parameters\&. See the section on each parameter for details\&. Note that some are synonyms\&.
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-\fIacl compatibility\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIadmin users\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIafs share\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIallow hosts\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIavailable\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIblocking locks\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIblock size\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIbrowsable\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIbrowseable\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIcase sensitive\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIcasesignames\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIcomment\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIcopy\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIcreate mask\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIcreate mode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIcsc policy\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdefault case\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdefault devmode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdelete readonly\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdelete veto files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdeny hosts\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdirectory\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdirectory mask\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdirectory mode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdirectory security mask\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdont descend\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdos filemode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdos filetime resolution\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIdos filetimes\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIexec\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIfake directory create times\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIfake oplocks\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIfollow symlinks\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIforce create mode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIforce directory mode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIforce directory security mode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIforce group\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIforce security mode\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIforce user\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIfstype\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIgroup\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIguest account\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIguest ok\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIguest only\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhide dot files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhide files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhide special files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhide unreadable\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhide unwriteable files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhosts allow\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIhosts deny\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIinherit acls\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIinherit permissions\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIinvalid users\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlevel2 oplocks\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlocking\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlppause command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlpq command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlpresume command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIlprm command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImagic output\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImagic script\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImangle case\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImangled map\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImangled names\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImangling char\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImap acl inherit\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImap archive\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImap hidden\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImap system\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax connections\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax print jobs\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImax reported print jobs\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImin print space\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImsdfs proxy\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fImsdfs root\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fInt acl support\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIonly guest\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIonly user\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIoplock contention limit\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIoplocks\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpath\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIposix locking\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpostexec\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpreexec\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpreexec close\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpreserve case\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprintable\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprintcap name\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprint command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprinter\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprinter admin\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprinter name\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprinting\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprint ok\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIprofile acls\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIpublic\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIqueuepause command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIqueueresume command\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIread list\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIread only\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIroot postexec\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIroot preexec\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIroot preexec close\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsecurity mask\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIset directory\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIshare modes\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIshort preserve case\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIstrict allocate\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIstrict locking\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIstrict sync\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIsync always\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIuse client driver\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIuser\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIusername\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIusers\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIuse sendfile\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fI-valid\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIvalid users\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIveto files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIveto oplock files\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIvfs object\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIvfs objects\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIvolume\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwide links\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwritable\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwriteable\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwrite cache size\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwrite list\fR
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fIwrite ok\fR
-
-.LP
-
-.SH "EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER"
-
-.TP
-abort shutdown script (G)
-\fBThis parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch\fR This a full path name to a script called by \fBsmbd\fR(8) that should stop a shutdown procedure issued by the \fIshutdown script\fR\&.
-
-
-This command will be run as user\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBNone\fR\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBabort shutdown script = /sbin/shutdown -c\fR
-
-
-.TP
-acl compatibility (S)
-This parameter specifies what OS ACL semantics should be compatible with\&. Possible values are \fBwinnt\fR for Windows NT 4, \fBwin2k\fR for Windows 2000 and above and \fBauto\fR\&. If you specify \fBauto\fR, the value for this parameter will be based upon the version of the client\&. There should be no reason to change this parameter from the default\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBacl compatibility = Auto\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBacl compatibility = win2k\fR
-
-
-.TP
-add group script (G)
-This is the full pathname to a script that will be run \fBAS ROOT\fR by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a new group is requested\&. It will expand any \fI%g\fR to the group name passed\&. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. The script is free to create a group with an arbitrary name to circumvent unix group name restrictions\&. In that case the script must print the numeric gid of the created group on stdout\&.
-
-
-.TP
-add machine script (G)
-This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a machine is added to it's domain using the administrator username and password method\&.
-
-
-This option is only required when using sam back-ends tied to the Unix uid method of RID calculation such as smbpasswd\&. This option is only available in Samba 3\&.0\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBadd machine script = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBadd machine script = /usr/sbin/adduser -n -g machines -c Machine -d /dev/null -s /bin/false %u\fR
-
-
-.TP
-addprinter command (G)
-With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2\&.2, The MS Add Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder displayed a share listing\&. The APW allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows NT/2000 print server\&.
-
-
-For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically added to the underlying printing system\&. The \fIadd printer command\fR defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition to the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file in order that it can be shared by \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
-
-
-The \fIaddprinter command\fR is automatically invoked with the following parameter (in order):
-
-
-\fIprinter name\fR
-
-\fIshare name\fR
-
-\fIport name\fR
-
-\fIdriver name\fR
-
-\fIlocation\fR
-
-\fIWindows 9x driver location\fR
-
-All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception\&. The "Windows 9x driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility only\&. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers to the APW questions\&.
-
-
-Once the \fIaddprinter command\fR has been executed, \fBsmbd\fR will reparse the \fI smb\&.conf\fR to determine if the share defined by the APW exists\&. If the sharename is still invalid, then \fBsmbd \fR will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client\&.
-
-
-The "add printer command" program can output a single line of text, which Samba will set as the port the new printer is connected to\&. If this line isn't output, Samba won't reload its printer shares\&.
-
-
-See also \fI deleteprinter command\fR, \fIprinting\fR, \fIshow add printer wizard\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBaddprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter\fR
-
-
-.TP
-add share command (G)
-Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The \fIadd share command\fR is used to define an external program or script which will add a new service definition to \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. In order to successfully execute the \fIadd share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0)\&.
-
-
-When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the \fIadd share command\fR with four parameters\&.
-
-
-\fIconfigFile\fR - the location of the global \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-\fIshareName\fR - the name of the new share\&.
-
-\fIpathName\fR - path to an **existing** directory on disk\&.
-
-\fIcomment\fR - comment string to associate with the new share\&.
-
-This parameter is only used for add file shares\&. To add printer shares, see the \fIaddprinter command\fR\&.
-
-
-See also \fIchange share command\fR, \fIdelete share command\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBadd share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare\fR
-
-
-.TP
-add user script (G)
-This is the full pathname to a script that will be run \fBAS ROOT\fR by \fBsmbd\fR(8) under special circumstances described below\&.
-
-
-Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are created for all users accessing files on this server\&. For sites that use Windows NT account databases as their primary user database creating these users and keeping the user list in sync with the Windows NT PDC is an onerous task\&. This option allows smbd to create the required UNIX users \fBON DEMAND\fR when a user accesses the Samba server\&.
-
-
-In order to use this option, \fBsmbd\fR(8) must \fBNOT\fR be set to \fIsecurity = share\fR and \fIadd user script\fR must be set to a full pathname for a script that will create a UNIX user given one argument of \fI%u\fR, which expands into the UNIX user name to create\&.
-
-
-When the Windows user attempts to access the Samba server, at login (session setup in the SMB protocol) time, \fBsmbd\fR(8) contacts the \fIpassword server\fR and attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password\&. If the authentication succeeds then \fBsmbd\fR attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the Windows user into\&. If this lookup fails, and \fIadd user script \fR is set then \fBsmbd\fR will call the specified script \fBAS ROOT\fR, expand [...]
-
-
-If this script successfully creates the user then \fBsmbd \fR will continue on as though the UNIX user already existed\&. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to match existing Windows NT accounts\&.
-
-
-See also \fI security\fR, \fIpassword server\fR, \fIdelete user script\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBadd user script = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBadd user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/add_user %u\fR
-
-
-.TP
-add user to group script (G)
-Full path to the script that will be called when a user is added to a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. It will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) \fBAS ROOT\fR\&. Any \fI%g\fR will be replaced with the group name and any \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user name\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBadd user to group script = \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBadd user to group script = /usr/sbin/adduser %u %g\fR
-
-
-.TP
-admin users (S)
-This is a list of users who will be granted administrative privileges on the share\&. This means that they will do all file operations as the super-user (root)\&.
-
-
-You should use this option very carefully, as any user in this list will be able to do anything they like on the share, irrespective of file permissions\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno admin users\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBadmin users = jason\fR
-
-
-.TP
-afs share (S)
-This parameter controls whether special AFS features are enabled for this share\&. If enabled, it assumes that the directory exported via the \fIpath\fR parameter is a local AFS import\&. The special AFS features include the attempt to hand-craft an AFS token if you enabled --with-fake-kaserver in configure\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBafs share = no\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBafs share = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-afs username map (G)
-If you are using the fake kaserver AFS feature, you might want to hand-craft the usernames you are creating tokens for\&. For example this is necessary if you have users from several domain in your AFS Protection Database\&. One possible scheme to code users as DOMAIN+User as it is done by winbind with the + as a separator\&.
-
-
-The mapped user name must contain the cell name to log into, so without setting this parameter there will be no token\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBafs username map = %u at afs.samba.org\fR
-
-
-.TP
-algorithmic rid base (G)
-This determines how Samba will use its algorithmic mapping from uids/gid to the RIDs needed to construct NT Security Identifiers\&.
-
-
-Setting this option to a larger value could be useful to sites transitioning from WinNT and Win2k, as existing user and group rids would otherwise clash with sytem users etc\&.
-
-
-All UIDs and GIDs must be able to be resolved into SIDs for the correct operation of ACLs on the server\&. As such the algorithmic mapping can't be 'turned off', but pushing it 'out of the way' should resolve the issues\&. Users and groups can then be assigned 'low' RIDs in arbitary-rid supporting backends\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBalgorithmic rid base = 1000\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBalgorithmic rid base = 100000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-allow hosts (S)
-Synonym for \fIhosts allow\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-allow trusted domains (G)
-This option only takes effect when the \fIsecurity\fR option is set to \fBserver\fR or \fBdomain\fR\&. If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running in will fail, even if that domain is trusted by the remote server doing the authentication\&.
-
-
-This is useful if you only want your Samba server to serve resources to users in the domain it is a member of\&. As an example, suppose that there are two domains DOMA and DOMB\&. DOMB is trusted by DOMA, which contains the Samba server\&. Under normal circumstances, a user with an account in DOMB can then access the resources of a UNIX account with the same account name on the Samba server even if they do not have an account in DOMA\&. This can make implementing a security boundary diff [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBallow trusted domains = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-announce as (G)
-This specifies what type of server \fBnmbd\fR(8) will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse list\&. By default this is set to Windows NT\&. The valid options are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"), "NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server, Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups respectively\&. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to stop Samba appearing as an NT server as this may prevent Sam [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBannounce as = NT Server\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBannounce as = Win95\fR
-
-
-.TP
-announce version (G)
-This specifies the major and minor version numbers that nmbd will use when announcing itself as a server\&. The default is 4\&.9\&. Do not change this parameter unless you have a specific need to set a Samba server to be a downlevel server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBannounce version = 4.9\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBannounce version = 2.0\fR
-
-
-.TP
-auth methods (G)
-This option allows the administrator to chose what authentication methods \fBsmbd\fR will use when authenticating a user\&. This option defaults to sensible values based on \fIsecurity\fR\&. This should be considered a developer option and used only in rare circumstances\&. In the majority (if not all) of production servers, the default setting should be adequate\&.
-
-
-Each entry in the list attempts to authenticate the user in turn, until the user authenticates\&. In practice only one method will ever actually be able to complete the authentication\&.
-
-
-Possible options include \fBguest\fR (anonymous access), \fBsam\fR (lookups in local list of accounts based on netbios name or domain name), \fBwinbind\fR (relay authentication requests for remote users through winbindd), \fBntdomain\fR (pre-winbindd method of authentication for remote domain users; deprecated in favour of winbind method), \fBtrustdomain\fR (authenticate trusted users by contacting the remote DC directly from smbd; deprecated in favour of winbind method)\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBauth methods = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBauth methods = guest sam winbind\fR
-
-
-.TP
-auto services (G)
-This is a synonym for the \fIpreload\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-available (S)
-This parameter lets you "turn off" a service\&. If \fIavailable = no\fR, then \fBALL\fR attempts to connect to the service will fail\&. Such failures are logged\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBavailable = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-bind interfaces only (G)
-This global parameter allows the Samba admin to limit what interfaces on a machine will serve SMB requests\&. It affects file service \fBsmbd\fR(8) and name service \fBnmbd\fR(8) in a slightly different ways\&.
-
-
-For name service it causes \fBnmbd\fR to bind to ports 137 and 138 on the interfaces listed in the interfaces parameter\&. \fBnmbd\fR also binds to the "all addresses" interface (0\&.0\&.0\&.0) on ports 137 and 138 for the purposes of reading broadcast messages\&. If this option is not set then \fBnmbd\fR will service name requests on all of these sockets\&. If \fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then \fBnmbd\fR will check the source address of any packets coming in on the broadcast socket [...]
-
-
-For file service it causes \fBsmbd\fR(8) to bind only to the interface list given in the interfaces parameter\&. This restricts the networks that \fBsmbd\fR will serve to packets coming in those interfaces\&. Note that you should not use this parameter for machines that are serving PPP or other intermittent or non-broadcast network interfaces as it will not cope with non-permanent interfaces\&.
-
-
-If \fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then unless the network address \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR is added to the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter list \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) and \fBswat\fR(8) may not work as expected due to the reasons covered below\&.
-
-
-To change a users SMB password, the \fBsmbpasswd\fR by default connects to the \fBlocalhost - 127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR address as an SMB client to issue the password change request\&. If \fIbind interfaces only\fR is set then unless the network address \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR is added to the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter list then \fB smbpasswd\fR will fail to connect in it's default mode\&. \fBsmbpasswd\fR can be forced to use the primary IP interface of the local host by using its \fBsmbpasswd\fR [...]
-
-
-The \fBswat\fR status page tries to connect with \fBsmbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR at the address \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR to determine if they are running\&. Not adding \fB127\&.0\&.0\&.1\fR will cause \fB smbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR to always show "not running" even if they really are\&. This can prevent \fB swat\fR from starting/stopping/restarting \fBsmbd\fR and \fBnmbd\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBbind interfaces only = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-blocking locks (S)
-This parameter controls the behavior of \fBsmbd\fR(8) when given a request by a client to obtain a byte range lock on a region of an open file, and the request has a time limit associated with it\&.
-
-
-If this parameter is set and the lock range requested cannot be immediately satisfied, samba will internally queue the lock request, and periodically attempt to obtain the lock until the timeout period expires\&.
-
-
-If this parameter is set to \fBno\fR, then samba will behave as previous versions of Samba would and will fail the lock request immediately if the lock range cannot be obtained\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBblocking locks = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-block size (S)
-This parameter controls the behavior of \fBsmbd\fR(8) when reporting disk free sizes\&. By default, this reports a disk block size of 1024 bytes\&.
-
-
-Changing this parameter may have some effect on the efficiency of client writes, this is not yet confirmed\&. This parameter was added to allow advanced administrators to change it (usually to a higher value) and test the effect it has on client write performance without re-compiling the code\&. As this is an experimental option it may be removed in a future release\&.
-
-
-Changing this option does not change the disk free reporting size, just the block size unit reported to the client\&.
-
-
-.TP
-browsable (S)
-See the \fIbrowseable\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-browseable (S)
-This controls whether this share is seen in the list of available shares in a net view and in the browse list\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBbrowseable = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-browse list (G)
-This controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will serve a browse list to a client doing a \fBNetServerEnum\fR call\&. Normally set to \fByes\fR\&. You should never need to change this\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBbrowse list = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-case sensitive (S)
-See the discussion in the section NAME MANGLING\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBcase sensitive = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-casesignames (S)
-Synonym for case sensitive\&.
-
-
-.TP
-change notify timeout (G)
-This SMB allows a client to tell a server to "watch" a particular directory for any changes and only reply to the SMB request when a change has occurred\&. Such constant scanning of a directory is expensive under UNIX, hence an \fBsmbd\fR(8) daemon only performs such a scan on each requested directory once every \fIchange notify timeout\fR seconds\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBchange notify timeout = 60\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBchange notify timeout = 300\fR
-
-
-Would change the scan time to every 5 minutes\&.
-
-
-.TP
-change share command (G)
-Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The \fIchange share command\fR is used to define an external program or script which will modify an existing service definition in \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. In order to successfully execute the \fIchange share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0)\&.
-
-
-When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the \fIchange share command\fR with four parameters\&.
-
-
-\fIconfigFile\fR - the location of the global \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-\fIshareName\fR - the name of the new share\&.
-
-\fIpathName\fR - path to an **existing** directory on disk\&.
-
-\fIcomment\fR - comment string to associate with the new share\&.
-
-This parameter is only used modify existing file shares definitions\&. To modify printer shares, use the "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder as seen when browsing the Samba host\&.
-
-
-See also \fIadd share command\fR, \fIdelete share command\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBchange share command = /usr/local/bin/addshare\fR
-
-
-.TP
-client lanman auth (G)
-This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbclient\fR(8) and other samba client tools will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the weaker LANMAN password hash\&. If disabled, only server which support NT password hashes (e\&.g\&. Windows NT/2000, Samba, etc\&.\&.\&. but not Windows 95/98) will be able to be connected from the Samba client\&.
-
-
-The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to it's case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm\&. Clients without Windows 95/98 servers are advised to disable this option\&.
-
-
-Disabling this option will also disable the \fBclient plaintext auth\fR option
-
-
-Likewise, if the \fBclient ntlmv2 auth\fR parameter is enabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be attempted\&. Not all servers support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to us it\&.
-
-
-Default : \fBclient lanman auth = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-client ntlmv2 auth (G)
-This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbclient\fR(8) will attempt to authenticate itself to servers using the NTLMv2 encrypted password response\&.
-
-
-If enabled, only an NTLMv2 and LMv2 response (both much more secure than earlier versions) will be sent\&. Many servers (including NT4 < SP4, Win9x and Samba 2\&.2) are not compatible with NTLMv2\&.
-
-
-Similarly, if enabled, NTLMv1, \fBclient lanman auth\fR and \fBclient plaintext auth\fR authentication will be disabled\&. This also disables share-level authentication\&.
-
-
-If disabled, an NTLM response (and possibly a LANMAN response) will be sent by the client, depending on the value of \fBclient lanman auth\fR\&.
-
-
-Note that some sites (particularly those following 'best practice' security polices) only allow NTLMv2 responses, and not the weaker LM or NTLM\&.
-
-
-Default : \fBclient ntlmv2 auth = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-client plaintext auth (G)
-Specifies whether a client should send a plaintext password if the server does not support encrypted passwords\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBclient plaintext auth = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-client schannel (G)
-This controls whether the client offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel\&. \fIclient schannel = no\fR does not offer the schannel, \fIserver schannel = auto\fR offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and \fIserver schannel = yes\fR denies access if the server is not able to speak netlogon schannel\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBclient schannel = auto\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBclient schannel = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-client signing (G)
-This controls whether the client offers or requires the server it talks to to use SMB signing\&. Possible values are \fBauto\fR, \fBmandatory\fR and \fBdisabled\fR\&.
-
-
-When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced\&. When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBclient signing = auto\fR
-
-
-.TP
-client use spnego (G)
-This variable controls controls whether samba clients will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 servers to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&. SPNEGO client support for SMB Signing is currently broken, so you might want to turn this option off when operating with Windows 2003 domain controllers in particular\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBclient use spnego = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-comment (S)
-This is a text field that is seen next to a share when a client does a queries the server, either via the network neighborhood or via \fBnet view\fR to list what shares are available\&.
-
-
-If you want to set the string that is displayed next to the machine name then see the \fI server string\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBNo comment string\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBcomment = Fred's Files\fR
-
-
-.TP
-config file (G)
-This allows you to override the config file to use, instead of the default (usually \fIsmb\&.conf\fR)\&. There is a chicken and egg problem here as this option is set in the config file!
-
-
-For this reason, if the name of the config file has changed when the parameters are loaded then it will reload them from the new config file\&.
-
-
-This option takes the usual substitutions, which can be very useful\&.
-
-
-If the config file doesn't exist then it won't be loaded (allowing you to special case the config files of just a few clients)\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBconfig file = /usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf.%m\fR
-
-
-.TP
-copy (S)
-This parameter allows you to "clone" service entries\&. The specified service is simply duplicated under the current service's name\&. Any parameters specified in the current section will override those in the section being copied\&.
-
-
-This feature lets you set up a 'template' service and create similar services easily\&. Note that the service being copied must occur earlier in the configuration file than the service doing the copying\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno value\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBcopy = otherservice\fR
-
-
-.TP
-create mask (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is \fIcreate mode\fR \&.
-
-
-When a file is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter\&. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a file\&. Any bit \fBnot\fR set here will be removed from the modes set on a file when it is created\&.
-
-
-The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' write and execute bits from the UNIX modes\&.
-
-
-Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the \fIforce create mode\fR parameter which is set to 000 by default\&.
-
-
-This parameter does not affect directory modes\&. See the parameter \fIdirectory mode \fR for details\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIforce create mode\fR parameter for forcing particular mode bits to be set on created files\&. See also the \fIdirectory mode\fR parameter for masking mode bits on created directories\&. See also the \fIinherit permissions\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors\&. If the administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the \fIsecurity mask\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBcreate mask = 0744\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBcreate mask = 0775\fR
-
-
-.TP
-create mode (S)
-This is a synonym for \fI create mask\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-csc policy (S)
-This stands for \fBclient-side caching policy\fR, and specifies how clients capable of offline caching will cache the files in the share\&. The valid values are: manual, documents, programs, disable\&.
-
-
-These values correspond to those used on Windows servers\&.
-
-
-For example, shares containing roaming profiles can have offline caching disabled using \fBcsc policy = disable\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBcsc policy = manual\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBcsc policy = programs\fR
-
-
-.TP
-deadtime (G)
-The value of the parameter (a decimal integer) represents the number of minutes of inactivity before a connection is considered dead, and it is disconnected\&. The deadtime only takes effect if the number of open files is zero\&.
-
-
-This is useful to stop a server's resources being exhausted by a large number of inactive connections\&.
-
-
-Most clients have an auto-reconnect feature when a connection is broken so in most cases this parameter should be transparent to users\&.
-
-
-Using this parameter with a timeout of a few minutes is recommended for most systems\&.
-
-
-A deadtime of zero indicates that no auto-disconnection should be performed\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdeadtime = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdeadtime = 15\fR
-
-
-.TP
-debug hires timestamp (G)
-Sometimes the timestamps in the log messages are needed with a resolution of higher that seconds, this boolean parameter adds microsecond resolution to the timestamp message header when turned on\&.
-
-
-Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an effect\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdebug hires timestamp = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-debuglevel (G)
-Synonym for \fI log level\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-debug pid (G)
-When using only one log file for more then one forked \fBsmbd\fR(8)-process there may be hard to follow which process outputs which message\&. This boolean parameter is adds the process-id to the timestamp message headers in the logfile when turned on\&.
-
-
-Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an effect\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdebug pid = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-debug timestamp (G)
-Samba debug log messages are timestamped by default\&. If you are running at a high \fIdebug level\fR these timestamps can be distracting\&. This boolean parameter allows timestamping to be turned off\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdebug timestamp = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-debug uid (G)
-Samba is sometimes run as root and sometime run as the connected user, this boolean parameter inserts the current euid, egid, uid and gid to the timestamp message headers in the log file if turned on\&.
-
-
-Note that the parameter \fI debug timestamp\fR must be on for this to have an effect\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdebug uid = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-default (G)
-A synonym for \fI default service\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-default case (S)
-See the section on NAME MANGLING\&. Also note the \fIshort preserve case\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdefault case = lower\fR
-
-
-.TP
-default devmode (S)
-This parameter is only applicable to printable services\&. When smbd is serving Printer Drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients, each printer on the Samba server has a Device Mode which defines things such as paper size and orientation and duplex settings\&. The device mode can only correctly be generated by the printer driver itself (which can only be executed on a Win32 platform)\&. Because smbd is unable to execute the driver code to generate the device mode, the default behavior is to se [...]
-
-
-Most problems with serving printer drivers to Windows NT/2k/XP clients can be traced to a problem with the generated device mode\&. Certain drivers will do things such as crashing the client's Explorer\&.exe with a NULL devmode\&. However, other printer drivers can cause the client's spooler service (spoolsv\&.exe) to die if the devmode was not created by the driver itself (i\&.e\&. smbd generates a default devmode)\&.
-
-
-This parameter should be used with care and tested with the printer driver in question\&. It is better to leave the device mode to NULL and let the Windows client set the correct values\&. Because drivers do not do this all the time, setting \fBdefault devmode = yes\fR will instruct smbd to generate a default one\&.
-
-
-For more information on Windows NT/2k printing and Device Modes, see the MSDN documentation\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdefault devmode = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-default service (G)
-This parameter specifies the name of a service which will be connected to if the service actually requested cannot be found\&. Note that the square brackets are \fBNOT\fR given in the parameter value (see example below)\&.
-
-
-There is no default value for this parameter\&. If this parameter is not given, attempting to connect to a nonexistent service results in an error\&.
-
-
-Typically the default service would be a \fIguest ok\fR, \fIread-only\fR service\&.
-
-
-Also note that the apparent service name will be changed to equal that of the requested service, this is very useful as it allows you to use macros like \fI%S\fR to make a wildcard service\&.
-
-
-Note also that any "_" characters in the name of the service used in the default service will get mapped to a "/"\&. This allows for interesting things\&.
-
-
-Example:
-
-
-.nf
-
-[global]
- default service = pub
-
-[pub]
- path = /%S
-.fi
-
-
-.TP
-delete group script (G)
-This is the full pathname to a script that will be run \fBAS ROOT\fR \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a group is requested to be deleted\&. It will expand any \fI%g\fR to the group name passed\&. This script is only useful for installations using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&.
-
-
-.TP
-deleteprinter command (G)
-With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2\&.2, it is now possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the DeletePrinter() RPC call\&.
-
-
-For a Samba host this means that the printer must be physically deleted from underlying printing system\&. The \fI deleteprinter command\fR defines a script to be run which will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer from the print system and from \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
-
-
-The \fIdeleteprinter command\fR is automatically called with only one parameter: \fI "printer name"\fR\&.
-
-
-Once the \fIdeleteprinter command\fR has been executed, \fBsmbd\fR will reparse the \fI smb\&.conf\fR to associated printer no longer exists\&. If the sharename is still valid, then \fBsmbd \fR will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client\&.
-
-
-See also \fI addprinter command\fR, \fIprinting\fR, \fIshow add printer wizard\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdeleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter\fR
-
-
-.TP
-delete readonly (S)
-This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted\&. This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX\&.
-
-
-This option may be useful for running applications such as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdelete readonly = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-delete share command (G)
-Samba 2\&.2\&.0 introduced the ability to dynamically add and delete shares via the Windows NT 4\&.0 Server Manager\&. The \fIdelete share command\fR is used to define an external program or script which will remove an existing service definition from \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&. In order to successfully execute the \fIdelete share command\fR, \fBsmbd\fR requires that the administrator be connected using a root account (i\&.e\&. uid == 0)\&.
-
-
-When executed, \fBsmbd\fR will automatically invoke the \fIdelete share command\fR with two parameters\&.
-
-
-\fIconfigFile\fR - the location of the global \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-\fIshareName\fR - the name of the existing service\&.
-
-This parameter is only used to remove file shares\&. To delete printer shares, see the \fIdeleteprinter command\fR\&.
-
-
-See also \fIadd share command\fR, \fIchange share command\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdelete share command = /usr/local/bin/delshare\fR
-
-
-.TP
-delete user from group script (G)
-Full path to the script that will be called when a user is removed from a group using the Windows NT domain administration tools\&. It will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) \fBAS ROOT\fR\&. Any \fI%g\fR will be replaced with the group name and any \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user name\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdelete user from group script = \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdelete user from group script = /usr/sbin/deluser %u %g\fR
-
-
-.TP
-delete user script (G)
-This is the full pathname to a script that will be run by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when managing users with remote RPC (NT) tools\&.
-
-
-This script is called when a remote client removes a user from the server, normally using 'User Manager for Domains' or \fBrpcclient\fR\&.
-
-
-This script should delete the given UNIX username\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdelete user script = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdelete user script = /usr/local/samba/bin/del_user %u\fR
-
-
-.TP
-delete veto files (S)
-This option is used when Samba is attempting to delete a directory that contains one or more vetoed directories (see the \fIveto files\fR option)\&. If this option is set to \fBno\fR (the default) then if a vetoed directory contains any non-vetoed files or directories then the directory delete will fail\&. This is usually what you want\&.
-
-
-If this option is set to \fByes\fR, then Samba will attempt to recursively delete any files and directories within the vetoed directory\&. This can be useful for integration with file serving systems such as NetAtalk which create meta-files within directories you might normally veto DOS/Windows users from seeing (e\&.g\&. \fI\&.AppleDouble\fR)
-
-
-Setting \fBdelete veto files = yes\fR allows these directories to be transparently deleted when the parent directory is deleted (so long as the user has permissions to do so)\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIveto files\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdelete veto files = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-deny hosts (S)
-Synonym for \fIhosts deny\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-dfree command (G)
-The \fIdfree command\fR setting should only be used on systems where a problem occurs with the internal disk space calculations\&. This has been known to happen with Ultrix, but may occur with other operating systems\&. The symptom that was seen was an error of "Abort Retry Ignore" at the end of each directory listing\&.
-
-
-This setting allows the replacement of the internal routines to calculate the total disk space and amount available with an external routine\&. The example below gives a possible script that might fulfill this function\&.
-
-
-The external program will be passed a single parameter indicating a directory in the filesystem being queried\&. This will typically consist of the string \fI\&./\fR\&. The script should return two integers in ASCII\&. The first should be the total disk space in blocks, and the second should be the number of available blocks\&. An optional third return value can give the block size in bytes\&. The default blocksize is 1024 bytes\&.
-
-
-Note: Your script should \fBNOT\fR be setuid or setgid and should be owned by (and writeable only by) root!
-
-
-Default: \fBBy default internal routines for determining the disk capacity and remaining space will be used\&. \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdfree command = /usr/local/samba/bin/dfree\fR
-
-
-Where the script dfree (which must be made executable) could be:
-
-
-.nf
-
-#!/bin/sh
-df $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $2" "$4}'
-.fi
-
-
-or perhaps (on Sys V based systems):
-
-
-.nf
-
-#!/bin/sh
-/usr/bin/df -k $1 | tail -1 | awk '{print $3" "$5}'
-.fi
-
-
-Note that you may have to replace the command names with full path names on some systems\&.
-
-
-.TP
-directory (S)
-Synonym for \fIpath\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-directory mask (S)
-This parameter is the octal modes which are used when converting DOS modes to UNIX modes when creating UNIX directories\&.
-
-
-When a directory is created, the necessary permissions are calculated according to the mapping from DOS modes to UNIX permissions, and the resulting UNIX mode is then bit-wise 'AND'ed with this parameter\&. This parameter may be thought of as a bit-wise MASK for the UNIX modes of a directory\&. Any bit \fBnot\fR set here will be removed from the modes set on a directory when it is created\&.
-
-
-The default value of this parameter removes the 'group' and 'other' write bits from the UNIX mode, allowing only the user who owns the directory to modify it\&.
-
-
-Following this Samba will bit-wise 'OR' the UNIX mode created from this parameter with the value of the \fIforce directory mode\fR parameter\&. This parameter is set to 000 by default (i\&.e\&. no extra mode bits are added)\&.
-
-
-Note that this parameter does not apply to permissions set by Windows NT/2000 ACL editors\&. If the administrator wishes to enforce a mask on access control lists also, they need to set the \fIdirectory security mask\fR\&.
-
-
-See the \fIforce directory mode\fR parameter to cause particular mode bits to always be set on created directories\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIcreate mode \fR parameter for masking mode bits on created files, and the \fIdirectory security mask\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Also refer to the \fI inherit permissions\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdirectory mask = 0755\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdirectory mask = 0775\fR
-
-
-.TP
-directory mode (S)
-Synonym for \fI directory mask\fR
-
-
-.TP
-directory security mask (S)
-This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box\&.
-
-
-This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from being modified\&. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change\&.
-
-
-If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0777 meaning a user is allowed to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it as the default of \fB0777\fR\&.
-
-
-See also the \fI force directory security mode\fR, \fIsecurity mask\fR, \fIforce security mode \fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdirectory security mask = 0777\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdirectory security mask = 0700\fR
-
-
-.TP
-disable netbios (G)
-Enabling this parameter will disable netbios support in Samba\&. Netbios is the only available form of browsing in all windows versions except for 2000 and XP\&.
-
-
-Note that clients that only support netbios won't be able to see your samba server when netbios support is disabled\&.
-
-Default: \fBdisable netbios = no\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdisable netbios = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-disable spoolss (G)
-Enabling this parameter will disable Samba's support for the SPOOLSS set of MS-RPC's and will yield identical behavior as Samba 2\&.0\&.x\&. Windows NT/2000 clients will downgrade to using Lanman style printing commands\&. Windows 9x/ME will be uneffected by the parameter\&. However, this will also disable the ability to upload printer drivers to a Samba server via the Windows NT Add Printer Wizard or by using the NT printer properties dialog window\&. It will also disable the capability [...]
-
-
-See also use client driver
-
-
-Default : \fBdisable spoolss = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-display charset (G)
-Specifies the charset that samba will use to print messages to stdout and stderr and SWAT will use\&. Should generally be the same as the \fBunix charset\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdisplay charset = ASCII\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdisplay charset = UTF8\fR
-
-
-.TP
-dns proxy (G)
-Specifies that \fBnmbd\fR(8) when acting as a WINS server and finding that a NetBIOS name has not been registered, should treat the NetBIOS name word-for-word as a DNS name and do a lookup with the DNS server for that name on behalf of the name-querying client\&.
-
-
-Note that the maximum length for a NetBIOS name is 15 characters, so the DNS name (or DNS alias) can likewise only be 15 characters, maximum\&.
-
-
-\fBnmbd\fR spawns a second copy of itself to do the DNS name lookup requests, as doing a name lookup is a blocking action\&.
-
-
-See also the parameter \fI wins support\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdns proxy = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-domain logons (G)
-If set to \fByes\fR, the Samba server will serve Windows 95/98 Domain logons for the \fIworkgroup\fR it is in\&. Samba 2\&.2 has limited capability to act as a domain controller for Windows NT 4 Domains\&. For more details on setting up this feature see the Samba-PDC-HOWTO included in the Samba documentation\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdomain logons = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-domain master (G)
-Tell \fBsmbd\fR(8) to enable WAN-wide browse list collation\&. Setting this option causes \fBnmbd\fR to claim a special domain specific NetBIOS name that identifies it as a domain master browser for its given \fIworkgroup\fR\&. Local master browsers in the same \fIworkgroup\fR on broadcast-isolated subnets will give this \fBnmbd\fR their local browse lists, and then ask \fBsmbd\fR(8) for a complete copy of the browse list for the whole wide area network\&. Browser clients will then conta [...]
-
-
-Note that Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers expect to be able to claim this \fIworkgroup\fR specific special NetBIOS name that identifies them as domain master browsers for that \fIworkgroup\fR by default (i\&.e\&. there is no way to prevent a Windows NT PDC from attempting to do this)\&. This means that if this parameter is set and \fBnmbd\fR claims the special name for a \fIworkgroup\fR before a Windows NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave strangely and ma [...]
-
-
-If \fBdomain logons = yes\fR , then the default behavior is to enable the \fIdomain master\fR parameter\&. If \fIdomain logons\fR is not enabled (the default setting), then neither will \fIdomain master\fR be enabled by default\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdomain master = auto\fR
-
-
-.TP
-dont descend (S)
-There are certain directories on some systems (e\&.g\&., the \fI/proc\fR tree under Linux) that are either not of interest to clients or are infinitely deep (recursive)\&. This parameter allows you to specify a comma-delimited list of directories that the server should always show as empty\&.
-
-
-Note that Samba can be very fussy about the exact format of the "dont descend" entries\&. For example you may need \fI \&./proc\fR instead of just \fI/proc\fR\&. Experimentation is the best policy :-)
-
-
-Default: \fBnone (i\&.e\&., all directories are OK to descend)\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdont descend = /proc,/dev\fR
-
-
-.TP
-dos charset (G)
-DOS SMB clients assume the server has the same charset as they do\&. This option specifies which charset Samba should talk to DOS clients\&.
-
-
-The default depends on which charsets you have installed\&. Samba tries to use charset 850 but falls back to ASCII in case it is not available\&. Run \fBtestparm\fR(1) to check the default on your system\&.
-
-
-.TP
-dos filemode (S)
-The default behavior in Samba is to provide UNIX-like behavior where only the owner of a file/directory is able to change the permissions on it\&. However, this behavior is often confusing to DOS/Windows users\&. Enabling this parameter allows a user who has write access to the file (by whatever means) to modify the permissions on it\&. Note that a user belonging to the group owning the file will not be allowed to change permissions if the group is only granted read access\&. Ownership o [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBdos filemode = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-dos filetime resolution (S)
-Under the DOS and Windows FAT filesystem, the finest granularity on time resolution is two seconds\&. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to round the reported time down to the nearest two second boundary when a query call that requires one second resolution is made to \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
-
-
-This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares\&. If oplocks are enabled on a share, Visual C++ uses two different time reading calls to check if a file has changed since it was last read\&. One of these calls uses a one-second granularity, the other uses a two second granularity\&. As the two second call rounds any odd second down, then if the file has a timestamp of an odd number of seconds then the two timestamps will not match and V [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBdos filetime resolution = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-dos filetimes (S)
-Under DOS and Windows, if a user can write to a file they can change the timestamp on it\&. Under POSIX semantics, only the owner of the file or root may change the timestamp\&. By default, Samba runs with POSIX semantics and refuses to change the timestamp on a file if the user \fBsmbd\fR is acting on behalf of is not the file owner\&. Setting this option to \fB yes\fR allows DOS semantics and \fBsmbd\fR(8) will change the file timestamp as DOS requires\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdos filetimes = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-enable rid algorithm (G)
-This option is used to control whether or not smbd in Samba 3\&.0 should fallback to the algorithm used by Samba 2\&.2 to generate user and group RIDs\&. The longterm development goal is to remove the algorithmic mappings of RIDs altogether, but this has proved to be difficult\&. This parameter is mainly provided so that developers can turn the algorithm on and off and see what breaks\&. This parameter should not be disabled by non-developers because certain features in Samba will fail t [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBenable rid algorithm = <yes>\fR
-
-
-.TP
-encrypt passwords (G)
-This boolean controls whether encrypted passwords will be negotiated with the client\&. Note that Windows NT 4\&.0 SP3 and above and also Windows 98 will by default expect encrypted passwords unless a registry entry is changed\&. To use encrypted passwords in Samba see the chapter "User Database" in the Samba HOWTO Collection\&.
-
-
-In order for encrypted passwords to work correctly \fBsmbd\fR(8) must either have access to a local \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) file (see the \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) program for information on how to set up and maintain this file), or set the security = [server|domain|ads] parameter which causes \fBsmbd\fR to authenticate against another server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBencrypt passwords = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-enhanced browsing (G)
-This option enables a couple of enhancements to cross-subnet browse propagation that have been added in Samba but which are not standard in Microsoft implementations\&.
-
-
-The first enhancement to browse propagation consists of a regular wildcard query to a Samba WINS server for all Domain Master Browsers, followed by a browse synchronization with each of the returned DMBs\&. The second enhancement consists of a regular randomised browse synchronization with all currently known DMBs\&.
-
-
-You may wish to disable this option if you have a problem with empty workgroups not disappearing from browse lists\&. Due to the restrictions of the browse protocols these enhancements can cause a empty workgroup to stay around forever which can be annoying\&.
-
-
-In general you should leave this option enabled as it makes cross-subnet browse propagation much more reliable\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBenhanced browsing = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-enumports command (G)
-The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign to UNIX hosts\&. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of a local port (i\&.e\&. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port (i\&.e\&. LPD Port Monitor, etc\&.\&.\&.)\&. By default, Samba has only one port defined--\fB"Samba Printer Port"\fR\&. Under Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name\&. If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (\fBsmbd \fR does not use a p [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBno enumports command\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBenumports command = /usr/bin/listports\fR
-
-
-.TP
-exec (S)
-This is a synonym for \fIpreexec\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-fake directory create times (S)
-NTFS and Windows VFAT file systems keep a create time for all files and directories\&. This is not the same as the ctime - status change time - that Unix keeps, so Samba by default reports the earliest of the various times Unix does keep\&. Setting this parameter for a share causes Samba to always report midnight 1-1-1980 as the create time for directories\&.
-
-
-This option is mainly used as a compatibility option for Visual C++ when used against Samba shares\&. Visual C++ generated makefiles have the object directory as a dependency for each object file, and a make rule to create the directory\&. Also, when NMAKE compares timestamps it uses the creation time when examining a directory\&. Thus the object directory will be created if it does not exist, but once it does exist it will always have an earlier timestamp than the object files it contains\&.
-
-
-However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or or deleted in the directory\&. NMAKE finds all object files in the object directory\&. The timestamp of the last one built is then compared to the timestamp of the object directory\&. If the directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files will be rebuilt\&. Enabling this option ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build will proceed as exp [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBfake directory create times = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-fake oplocks (S)
-Oplocks are the way that SMB clients get permission from a server to locally cache file operations\&. If a server grants an oplock (opportunistic lock) then the client is free to assume that it is the only one accessing the file and it will aggressively cache file data\&. With some oplock types the client may even cache file open/close operations\&. This can give enormous performance benefits\&.
-
-
-When you set \fBfake oplocks = yes\fR, \fBsmbd\fR(8) will always grant oplock requests no matter how many clients are using the file\&.
-
-
-It is generally much better to use the real \fIoplocks\fR support rather than this parameter\&.
-
-
-If you enable this option on all read-only shares or shares that you know will only be accessed from one client at a time such as physically read-only media like CDROMs, you will see a big performance improvement on many operations\&. If you enable this option on shares where multiple clients may be accessing the files read-write at the same time you can get data corruption\&. Use this option carefully!
-
-
-Default: \fBfake oplocks = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-follow symlinks (S)
-This parameter allows the Samba administrator to stop \fBsmbd\fR(8) from following symbolic links in a particular share\&. Setting this parameter to \fBno\fR prevents any file or directory that is a symbolic link from being followed (the user will get an error)\&. This option is very useful to stop users from adding a symbolic link to \fI/etc/passwd\fR in their home directory for instance\&. However it will slow filename lookups down slightly\&.
-
-
-This option is enabled (i\&.e\&. \fBsmbd\fR will follow symbolic links) by default\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBfollow symlinks = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-force create mode (S)
-This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will \fBalways\fR be set on a file created by Samba\&. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its permissions changed\&. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 000\&. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file mode after the mask set in the \fIcreate mask\fR parameter is applied\&.
-
-
-See also the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details on masking mode bits on files\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIinherit permissions\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBforce create mode = 000\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBforce create mode = 0755\fR
-
-
-would force all created files to have read and execute permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'\&.
-
-
-.TP
-force directory mode (S)
-This parameter specifies a set of UNIX mode bit permissions that will \fBalways\fR be set on a directory created by Samba\&. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto the mode bits of a directory that is being created\&. The default for this parameter is (in octal) 0000 which will not add any extra permission bits to a created directory\&. This operation is done after the mode mask in the parameter \fIdirectory mask\fR is applied\&.
-
-
-See also the parameter \fI directory mask\fR for details on masking mode bits on created directories\&.
-
-
-See also the \fI inherit permissions\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBforce directory mode = 000\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBforce directory mode = 0755\fR
-
-
-would force all created directories to have read and execute permissions set for 'group' and 'other' as well as the read/write/execute bits set for the 'user'\&.
-
-
-.TP
-force directory security mode (S)
-This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a directory using the native NT security dialog box\&.
-
-
-This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may have modified to be on\&. Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a directory, the user has always set to be 'on'\&.
-
-
-If not set explicitly this parameter is 000, which allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a directory without restrictions\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set as 0000\&.
-
-
-See also the \fI directory security mask\fR, \fIsecurity mask\fR, \fIforce security mode \fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBforce directory security mode = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBforce directory security mode = 700\fR
-
-
-.TP
-force group (S)
-This specifies a UNIX group name that will be assigned as the default primary group for all users connecting to this service\&. This is useful for sharing files by ensuring that all access to files on service will use the named group for their permissions checking\&. Thus, by assigning permissions for this group to the files and directories within this service the Samba administrator can restrict or allow sharing of these files\&.
-
-
-In Samba 2\&.0\&.5 and above this parameter has extended functionality in the following way\&. If the group name listed here has a '+' character prepended to it then the current user accessing the share only has the primary group default assigned to this group if they are already assigned as a member of that group\&. This allows an administrator to decide that only users who are already in a particular group will create files with group ownership set to that group\&. This gives a finer g [...]
-
-
-If the \fIforce user\fR parameter is also set the group specified in \fIforce group\fR will override the primary group set in \fIforce user\fR\&.
-
-
-See also \fIforce user\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno forced group\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBforce group = agroup\fR
-
-
-.TP
-force security mode (S)
-This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&.
-
-
-This parameter is applied as a mask (OR'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus forcing any bits in this mask that the user may have modified to be on\&. Essentially, one bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits that, when modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'\&.
-
-
-If not set explicitly this parameter is set to 0, and allows a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, with no restrictions\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave this set to 0000\&.
-
-
-See also the \fI force directory security mode\fR, \fIdirectory security mask\fR, \fI security mask\fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBforce security mode = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBforce security mode = 700\fR
-
-
-.TP
-force user (S)
-This specifies a UNIX user name that will be assigned as the default user for all users connecting to this service\&. This is useful for sharing files\&. You should also use it carefully as using it incorrectly can cause security problems\&.
-
-
-This user name only gets used once a connection is established\&. Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a valid password\&. Once connected, all file operations will be performed as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected as\&. This can be very useful\&.
-
-
-In Samba 2\&.0\&.5 and above this parameter also causes the primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group for all file activity\&. Prior to 2\&.0\&.5 the primary group was left as the primary group of the connecting user (this was a bug)\&.
-
-
-See also \fIforce group\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBno forced user\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBforce user = auser\fR
-
-
-.TP
-fstype (S)
-This parameter allows the administrator to configure the string that specifies the type of filesystem a share is using that is reported by \fBsmbd\fR(8) when a client queries the filesystem type for a share\&. The default type is \fBNTFS\fR for compatibility with Windows NT but this can be changed to other strings such as \fBSamba\fR or \fBFAT \fR if required\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBfstype = NTFS\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBfstype = Samba\fR
-
-
-.TP
-get quota command (G)
-The \fBget quota command\fR should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use\&.
-
-
-This parameter should specify the path to a script that queries the quota information for the specified user/group for the partition that the specified directory is on\&.
-
-
-Such a script should take 3 arguments:
-
-
-directory
-
-type of query
-
-uid of user or gid of group
-
-The type of query can be one of :
-
-
-1 - user quotas
-
-2 - user default quotas (uid = -1)
-
-3 - group quotas
-
-4 - group default quotas (gid = -1)
-
-This script should print its output according to the following format:
-
-
-Line 1 - quota flags (0 = no quotas, 1 = quotas enabled, 2 = quotas enabled and enforced)
-
-Line 2 - number of currently used blocks
-
-Line 3 - the softlimit number of blocks
-
-Line 4 - the hardlimit number of blocks
-
-Line 5 - currently used number of inodes
-
-Line 6 - the softlimit number of inodes
-
-Line 7 - the hardlimit number of inodes
-
-Line 8(optional) - the number of bytes in a block(default is 1024)
-
-See also the \fIset quota command\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBget quota command = \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBget quota command = /usr/local/sbin/query_quota\fR
-
-
-.TP
-getwd cache (G)
-This is a tuning option\&. When this is enabled a caching algorithm will be used to reduce the time taken for getwd() calls\&. This can have a significant impact on performance, especially when the \fIwide links\fR parameter is set to \fBno\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBgetwd cache = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-group (S)
-Synonym for \fIforce group\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-guest account (G,S)
-This is a username which will be used for access to services which are specified as \fI guest ok\fR (see below)\&. Whatever privileges this user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service\&. Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not have a valid login\&. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice for this parameter\&. If a username is specified in a given service, the specified username overrides this one\&.
-
-
-One some systems the default guest account "nobody" may not be able to print\&. Use another account in this case\&. You should test this by trying to log in as your guest user (perhaps by using the \fBsu -\fR command) and trying to print using the system print command such as \fBlpr(1)\fR or \fB lp(1)\fR\&.
-
-
-This parameter does not accept % macros, because many parts of the system require this value to be constant for correct operation\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBspecified at compile time, usually "nobody"\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBguest account = ftp\fR
-
-
-.TP
-guest ok (S)
-If this parameter is \fByes\fR for a service, then no password is required to connect to the service\&. Privileges will be those of the \fI guest account\fR\&.
-
-
-This paramater nullifies the benifits of setting \fIrestrict anonymous\fR = 2
-
-
-See the section below on \fI security\fR for more information about this option\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBguest ok = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-guest only (S)
-If this parameter is \fByes\fR for a service, then only guest connections to the service are permitted\&. This parameter will have no effect if \fIguest ok\fR is not set for the service\&.
-
-
-See the section below on \fI security\fR for more information about this option\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBguest only = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hide dot files (S)
-This is a boolean parameter that controls whether files starting with a dot appear as hidden files\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhide dot files = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hide files (S)
-This is a list of files or directories that are not visible but are accessible\&. The DOS 'hidden' attribute is applied to any files or directories that match\&.
-
-
-Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry\&. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards\&.
-
-
-Each entry must be a Unix path, not a DOS path and must not include the Unix directory separator '/'\&.
-
-
-Note that the case sensitivity option is applicable in hiding files\&.
-
-
-Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they are scanned\&.
-
-
-See also \fIhide dot files\fR, \fI veto files\fR and \fIcase sensitive\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno file are hidden\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBhide files = /.*/DesktopFolderDB/TrashFor%m/resource.frk/\fR
-
-
-The above example is based on files that the Macintosh SMB client (DAVE) available from Thursby creates for internal use, and also still hides all files beginning with a dot\&.
-
-
-.TP
-hide local users (G)
-This parameter toggles the hiding of local UNIX users (root, wheel, floppy, etc) from remote clients\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhide local users = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hide special files (S)
-This parameter prevents clients from seeing special files such as sockets, devices and fifo's in directory listings\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhide special files = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hide unreadable (S)
-This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be read\&. Defaults to off\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhide unreadable = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hide unwriteable files (S)
-This parameter prevents clients from seeing the existance of files that cannot be written to\&. Defaults to off\&. Note that unwriteable directories are shown as usual\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhide unwriteable = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-homedir map (G)
-If\fInis homedir \fR is \fByes\fR, and \fBsmbd\fR(8) is also acting as a Win95/98 \fIlogon server\fR then this parameter specifies the NIS (or YP) map from which the server for the user's home directory should be extracted\&. At present, only the Sun auto\&.home map format is understood\&. The form of the map is:
-
-
-\fBusername server:/some/file/system\fR
-
-
-and the program will extract the servername from before the first ':'\&. There should probably be a better parsing system that copes with different map formats and also Amd (another automounter) maps\&.
-
-
-A working NIS client is required on the system for this option to work\&.
-
-See also \fInis homedir\fR , \fIdomain logons\fR \&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhomedir map = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBhomedir map = amd.homedir\fR
-
-
-.TP
-host msdfs (G)
-If set to \fByes\fR, Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server\&.
-
-
-See also the \fI msdfs root\fR share level parameter\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to ???\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhost msdfs = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hostname lookups (G)
-Specifies whether samba should use (expensive) hostname lookups or use the ip addresses instead\&. An example place where hostname lookups are currently used is when checking the \fBhosts deny\fR and \fBhosts allow\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBhostname lookups = yes\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBhostname lookups = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hosts allow (S)
-A synonym for this parameter is \fIallow hosts\fR\&.
-
-
-This parameter is a comma, space, or tab delimited set of hosts which are permitted to access a service\&.
-
-
-If specified in the [global] section then it will apply to all services, regardless of whether the individual service has a different setting\&.
-
-
-You can specify the hosts by name or IP number\&. For example, you could restrict access to only the hosts on a Class C subnet with something like \fBallow hosts = 150.203.5. \fR\&. The full syntax of the list is described in the man page \fIhosts_access(5)\fR\&. Note that this man page may not be present on your system, so a brief description will be given here also\&.
-
-
-Note that the localhost address 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 will always be allowed access unless specifically denied by a \fIhosts deny\fR option\&.
-
-
-You can also specify hosts by network/netmask pairs and by netgroup names if your system supports netgroups\&. The \fBEXCEPT\fR keyword can also be used to limit a wildcard list\&. The following examples may provide some help:
-
-
-Example 1: allow all IPs in 150\&.203\&.*\&.*; except one
-
-
-\fBhosts allow = 150.203. EXCEPT 150.203.6.66\fR
-
-
-Example 2: allow hosts that match the given network/netmask
-
-
-\fBhosts allow = 150.203.15.0/255.255.255.0\fR
-
-
-Example 3: allow a couple of hosts
-
-
-\fBhosts allow = lapland, arvidsjaur\fR
-
-
-Example 4: allow only hosts in NIS netgroup "foonet", but deny access from one particular host
-
-
-\fBhosts allow = @foonet\fR
-
-
-\fBhosts deny = pirate\fR
-
-
-Note that access still requires suitable user-level passwords\&.
-
-See \fBtestparm\fR(1) for a way of testing your host access to see if it does what you expect\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone (i\&.e\&., all hosts permitted access)\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBallow hosts = 150.203.5. myhost.mynet.edu.au\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hosts deny (S)
-The opposite of \fIhosts allow\fR - hosts listed here are \fBNOT\fR permitted access to services unless the specific services have their own lists to override this one\&. Where the lists conflict, the \fIallow\fR list takes precedence\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone (i\&.e\&., no hosts specifically excluded)\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBhosts deny = 150.203.4. badhost.mynet.edu.au\fR
-
-
-.TP
-hosts equiv (G)
-If this global parameter is a non-null string, it specifies the name of a file to read for the names of hosts and users who will be allowed access without specifying a password\&.
-
-
-This is not be confused with \fIhosts allow\fR which is about hosts access to services and is more useful for guest services\&. \fI hosts equiv\fR may be useful for NT clients which will not supply passwords to Samba\&.
-
-
-The use of \fIhosts equiv \fR can be a major security hole\&. This is because you are trusting the PC to supply the correct username\&. It is very easy to get a PC to supply a false username\&. I recommend that the \fIhosts equiv\fR option be only used if you really know what you are doing, or perhaps on a home network where you trust your spouse and kids\&. And only if you \fBreally\fR trust them :-)\&.
-
-Default: \fBno host equivalences\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBhosts equiv = /etc/hosts.equiv\fR
-
-
-.TP
-idmap backend (G)
-The purpose of the idmap backend parameter is to allow idmap to NOT use the local idmap tdb file to obtain SID to UID / GID mappings, but instead to obtain them from a common LDAP backend\&. This way all domain members and controllers will have the same UID and GID to SID mappings\&. This avoids the risk of UID / GID inconsistencies across UNIX / Linux systems that are sharing information over protocols other than SMB/CIFS (ie: NFS)\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBidmap backend = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBidmap backend = ldap:ldap://ldapslave.example.com\fR
-
-
-.TP
-idmap gid (G)
-The idmap gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated for the purpose of mapping UNX groups to NT group SIDs\&. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
-
-
-The availability of an idmap gid range is essential for correct operation of all group mapping\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBidmap gid = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBidmap gid = 10000-20000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-idmap uid (G)
-The idmap uid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated for use in mapping UNIX users to NT user SIDs\&. This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBidmap uid = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBidmap uid = 10000-20000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-include (G)
-This allows you to include one config file inside another\&. The file is included literally, as though typed in place\&.
-
-
-It takes the standard substitutions, except \fI%u \fR, \fI%P\fR and \fI%S\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno file included\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBinclude = /usr/local/samba/lib/admin_smb.conf\fR
-
-
-.TP
-inherit acls (S)
-This parameter can be used to ensure that if default acls exist on parent directories, they are always honored when creating a subdirectory\&. The default behavior is to use the mode specified when creating the directory\&. Enabling this option sets the mode to 0777, thus guaranteeing that default directory acls are propagated\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBinherit acls = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-inherit permissions (S)
-The permissions on new files and directories are normally governed by \fI create mask\fR, \fIdirectory mask\fR, \fIforce create mode\fR and \fIforce directory mode\fR but the boolean inherit permissions parameter overrides this\&.
-
-
-New directories inherit the mode of the parent directory, including bits such as setgid\&.
-
-
-New files inherit their read/write bits from the parent directory\&. Their execute bits continue to be determined by \fImap archive\fR , \fImap hidden\fR and \fImap system\fR as usual\&.
-
-
-Note that the setuid bit is \fBnever\fR set via inheritance (the code explicitly prohibits this)\&.
-
-
-This can be particularly useful on large systems with many users, perhaps several thousand, to allow a single [homes] share to be used flexibly by each user\&.
-
-
-See also \fIcreate mask \fR, \fI directory mask\fR, \fIforce create mode\fR and \fIforce directory mode\fR \&.
-
-
-Default: \fBinherit permissions = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-interfaces (G)
-This option allows you to override the default network interfaces list that Samba will use for browsing, name registration and other NBT traffic\&. By default Samba will query the kernel for the list of all active interfaces and use any interfaces except 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 that are broadcast capable\&.
-
-
-The option takes a list of interface strings\&. Each string can be in any of the following forms:
-
-
-a network interface name (such as eth0)\&. This may include shell-like wildcards so eth* will match any interface starting with the substring "eth"
-
-an IP address\&. In this case the netmask is determined from the list of interfaces obtained from the kernel
-
-an IP/mask pair\&.
-
-a broadcast/mask pair\&.
-
-The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted decimal form\&.
-
-
-The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms\&.
-
-
-For example, the following line:
-
-
-\fBinterfaces = eth0 192.168.2.10/24 192.168.3.10/255.255.255.0\fR
-
-
-would configure three network interfaces corresponding to the eth0 device and IP addresses 192\&.168\&.2\&.10 and 192\&.168\&.3\&.10\&. The netmasks of the latter two interfaces would be set to 255\&.255\&.255\&.0\&.
-
-
-See also \fIbind interfaces only\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBall active interfaces except 127\&.0\&.0\&.1 that are broadcast capable\fR
-
-
-.TP
-invalid users (S)
-This is a list of users that should not be allowed to login to this service\&. This is really a \fBparanoid\fR check to absolutely ensure an improper setting does not breach your security\&.
-
-
-A name starting with a '@' is interpreted as an NIS netgroup first (if your system supports NIS), and then as a UNIX group if the name was not found in the NIS netgroup database\&.
-
-
-A name starting with '+' is interpreted only by looking in the UNIX group database\&. A name starting with '&' is interpreted only by looking in the NIS netgroup database (this requires NIS to be working on your system)\&. The characters '+' and '&' may be used at the start of the name in either order so the value \fI+&group\fR means check the UNIX group database, followed by the NIS netgroup database, and the value \fI&+group\fR means check the NIS netgroup database, followed by the UNI [...]
-
-
-The current servicename is substituted for \fI%S\fR\&. This is useful in the [homes] section\&.
-
-
-See also \fIvalid users \fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno invalid users\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBinvalid users = root fred admin @wheel\fR
-
-
-.TP
-keepalive (G)
-The value of the parameter (an integer) represents the number of seconds between \fIkeepalive\fR packets\&. If this parameter is zero, no keepalive packets will be sent\&. Keepalive packets, if sent, allow the server to tell whether a client is still present and responding\&.
-
-
-Keepalives should, in general, not be needed if the socket being used has the SO_KEEPALIVE attribute set on it (see \fIsocket options\fR)\&. Basically you should only use this option if you strike difficulties\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBkeepalive = 300\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBkeepalive = 600\fR
-
-
-.TP
-kernel change notify (G)
-This parameter specifies whether Samba should ask the kernel for change notifications in directories so that SMB clients can refresh whenever the data on the server changes\&.
-
-
-This parameter is only usd when your kernel supports change notification to user programs, using the F_NOTIFY fcntl\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBYes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-kernel oplocks (G)
-For UNIXes that support kernel based \fIoplocks\fR (currently only IRIX and the Linux 2\&.4 kernel), this parameter allows the use of them to be turned on or off\&.
-
-
-Kernel oplocks support allows Samba \fIoplocks \fR to be broken whenever a local UNIX process or NFS operation accesses a file that \fBsmbd\fR(8) has oplocked\&. This allows complete data consistency between SMB/CIFS, NFS and local file access (and is a \fBvery\fR cool feature :-)\&.
-
-
-This parameter defaults to \fBon\fR, but is translated to a no-op on systems that no not have the necessary kernel support\&. You should never need to touch this parameter\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIoplocks\fR and \fIlevel2 oplocks \fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBkernel oplocks = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lanman auth (G)
-This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to authenticate users using the LANMAN password hash\&. If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e\&.g\&. Windows NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc\&.\&.\&. but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host\&.
-
-
-The LANMAN encrypted response is easily broken, due to it's case-insensitive nature, and the choice of algorithm\&. Servers without Windows 95/98 or MS DOS clients are advised to disable this option\&.
-
-
-Unlike the \fBencypt passwords\fR option, this parameter cannot alter client behaviour, and the LANMAN response will still be sent over the network\&. See the \fBclient lanman auth\fR to disable this for Samba's clients (such as smbclient)
-
-
-If this option, and \fBntlm auth\fR are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be permited\&. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to us it\&.
-
-
-Default : \fBlanman auth = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-large readwrite (G)
-This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbd\fR(8) supports the new 64k streaming read and write varient SMB requests introduced with Windows 2000\&. Note that due to Windows 2000 client redirector bugs this requires Samba to be running on a 64-bit capable operating system such as IRIX, Solaris or a Linux 2\&.4 kernel\&. Can improve performance by 10% with Windows 2000 clients\&. Defaults to on\&. Not as tested as some other Samba code paths\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlarge readwrite = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap admin dn (G)
-The \fIldap admin dn\fR defines the Distinguished Name (DN) name used by Samba to contact the ldap server when retreiving user account information\&. The \fIldap admin dn\fR is used in conjunction with the admin dn password stored in the \fIprivate/secrets\&.tdb\fR file\&. See the \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8) man page for more information on how to accmplish this\&.
-
-
-.TP
-ldap delete dn (G)
-This parameter specifies whether a delete operation in the ldapsam deletes the complete entry or only the attributes specific to Samba\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBldap delete dn = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap filter (G)
-This parameter specifies the RFC 2254 compliant LDAP search filter\&. The default is to match the login name with the \fBuid\fR attribute for all entries matching the \fBsambaAccount\fR objectclass\&. Note that this filter should only return one entry\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBldap filter = (&(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaAccount))\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap group suffix (G)
-This parameters specifies the suffix that is used for groups when these are added to the LDAP directory\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of \fIldap suffix\fR will be used instead\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBdc=samba,ou=Groups\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap idmap suffix (G)
-This parameters specifies the suffix that is used when storing idmap mappings\&. If this parameter is unset, the value of \fIldap suffix\fR will be used instead\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBou=Idmap,dc=samba,dc=org\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap machine suffix (G)
-It specifies where machines should be added to the ldap tree\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap passwd sync (G)
-This option is used to define whether or not Samba should sync the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes for normal accounts (NOT for workstation, server or domain trusts) on a password change via SAMBA\&.
-
-
-The \fIldap passwd sync\fR can be set to one of three values:
-
-
-\fIYes\fR = Try to update the LDAP, NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time\&.
-
-\fINo\fR = Update NT and LM passwords and update the pwdLastSet time\&.
-
-\fIOnly\fR = Only update the LDAP password and let the LDAP server do the rest\&.
-
-Default: \fBldap passwd sync = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap port (G)
-This parameter is only available if Samba has been configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option at compile time\&.
-
-
-This option is used to control the tcp port number used to contact the \fIldap server\fR\&. The default is to use the stand LDAPS port 636\&.
-
-
-See Also: ldap ssl
-
-
-Default : \fBldap port = 636 ; if ldap ssl = on\fR
-
-
-Default : \fBldap port = 389 ; if ldap ssl = off\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap server (G)
-This parameter is only available if Samba has been configure to include the \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option at compile time\&.
-
-
-This parameter should contain the FQDN of the ldap directory server which should be queried to locate user account information\&.
-
-
-Default : \fBldap server = localhost\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap ssl (G)
-This option is used to define whether or not Samba should use SSL when connecting to the ldap server This is \fBNOT\fR related to Samba's previous SSL support which was enabled by specifying the \fB--with-ssl\fR option to the \fIconfigure\fR script\&.
-
-
-The \fIldap ssl\fR can be set to one of three values:
-
-
-\fIOff\fR = Never use SSL when querying the directory\&.
-
-\fIStart_tls\fR = Use the LDAPv3 StartTLS extended operation (RFC2830) for communicating with the directory server\&.
-
-\fIOn\fR = Use SSL on the ldaps port when contacting the \fIldap server\fR\&. Only available when the backwards-compatiblity \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option is specified to configure\&. See \fIpassdb backend\fR
-
-Default : \fBldap ssl = start_tls\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap suffix (G)
-Specifies where user and machine accounts are added to the tree\&. Can be overriden by \fBldap user suffix\fR and \fBldap machine suffix\fR\&. It also used as the base dn for all ldap searches\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ldap user suffix (G)
-This parameter specifies where users are added to the tree\&. If this parameter is not specified, the value from \fBldap suffix\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-.TP
-level2 oplocks (S)
-This parameter controls whether Samba supports level2 (read-only) oplocks on a share\&.
-
-
-Level2, or read-only oplocks allow Windows NT clients that have an oplock on a file to downgrade from a read-write oplock to a read-only oplock once a second client opens the file (instead of releasing all oplocks on a second open, as in traditional, exclusive oplocks)\&. This allows all openers of the file that support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie\&. they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance for many accesses of files that are not [...]
-
-
-Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock writes to the file all clients are notified (no reply is needed or waited for) and told to break their oplocks to "none" and delete any read-ahead caches\&.
-
-
-It is recommended that this parameter be turned on to speed access to shared executables\&.
-
-
-For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec\&.
-
-
-Currently, if \fIkernel oplocks\fR are supported then level2 oplocks are not granted (even if this parameter is set to \fByes\fR)\&. Note also, the \fIoplocks\fR parameter must be set to \fByes\fR on this share in order for this parameter to have any effect\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIoplocks\fR and \fIkernel oplocks\fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlevel2 oplocks = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lm announce (G)
-This parameter determines if \fBnmbd\fR(8) will produce Lanman announce broadcasts that are needed by OS/2 clients in order for them to see the Samba server in their browse list\&. This parameter can have three values, \fByes\fR, \fBno\fR, or \fBauto\fR\&. The default is \fBauto\fR\&. If set to \fBno\fR Samba will never produce these broadcasts\&. If set to \fByes\fR Samba will produce Lanman announce broadcasts at a frequency set by the parameter \fIlm interval\fR\&. If set to \fBauto\f [...]
-
-
-See also \fIlm interval\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlm announce = auto\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlm announce = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lm interval (G)
-If Samba is set to produce Lanman announce broadcasts needed by OS/2 clients (see the \fIlm announce\fR parameter) then this parameter defines the frequency in seconds with which they will be made\&. If this is set to zero then no Lanman announcements will be made despite the setting of the \fIlm announce\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-See also \fIlm announce\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlm interval = 60\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlm interval = 120\fR
-
-
-.TP
-load printers (G)
-A boolean variable that controls whether all printers in the printcap will be loaded for browsing by default\&. See the printers section for more details\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBload printers = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-local master (G)
-This option allows \fBnmbd\fR(8) to try and become a local master browser on a subnet\&. If set to \fBno\fR then \fB nmbd\fR will not attempt to become a local master browser on a subnet and will also lose in all browsing elections\&. By default this value is set to \fByes\fR\&. Setting this value to \fByes\fR doesn't mean that Samba will \fBbecome\fR the local master browser on a subnet, just that \fBnmbd\fR will \fBparticipate\fR in elections for local master browser\&.
-
-
-Setting this value to \fBno\fR will cause \fBnmbd\fR \fBnever\fR to become a local master browser\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlocal master = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lock dir (G)
-Synonym for \fI lock directory\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-lock directory (G)
-This option specifies the directory where lock files will be placed\&. The lock files are used to implement the \fImax connections\fR option\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlock directory = /var/run/samba/locks\fR
-
-
-.TP
-locking (S)
-This controls whether or not locking will be performed by the server in response to lock requests from the client\&.
-
-
-If \fBlocking = no\fR, all lock and unlock requests will appear to succeed and all lock queries will report that the file in question is available for locking\&.
-
-
-If \fBlocking = yes\fR, real locking will be performed by the server\&.
-
-
-This option \fBmay\fR be useful for read-only filesystems which \fBmay\fR not need locking (such as CDROM drives), although setting this parameter of \fBno\fR is not really recommended even in this case\&.
-
-
-Be careful about disabling locking either globally or in a specific service, as lack of locking may result in data corruption\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlocking = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lock spin count (G)
-This parameter controls the number of times that smbd should attempt to gain a byte range lock on the behalf of a client request\&. Experiments have shown that Windows 2k servers do not reply with a failure if the lock could not be immediately granted, but try a few more times in case the lock could later be aquired\&. This behavior is used to support PC database formats such as MS Access and FoxPro\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlock spin count = 3\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lock spin time (G)
-The time in microseconds that smbd should pause before attempting to gain a failed lock\&. See \fIlock spin count\fR for more details\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlock spin time = 10\fR
-
-
-.TP
-log file (G)
-This option allows you to override the name of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file)\&.
-
-
-This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate log files for each user or machine\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBlog file = /usr/local/samba/var/log.%m\fR
-
-
-.TP
-log level (G)
-The value of the parameter (a astring) allows the debug level (logging level) to be specified in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&. This parameter has been extended since the 2\&.2\&.x series, now it allow to specify the debug level for multiple debug classes\&. This is to give greater flexibility in the configuration of the system\&.
-
-
-The default will be the log level specified on the command line or level zero if none was specified\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBlog level = 3 passdb:5 auth:10 winbind:2\fR
-
-
-.TP
-logon drive (G)
-This parameter specifies the local path to which the home directory will be connected (see \fIlogon home\fR) and is only used by NT Workstations\&.
-
-
-Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlogon drive = z:\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlogon drive = h:\fR
-
-
-.TP
-logon home (G)
-This parameter specifies the home directory location when a Win95/98 or NT Workstation logs into a Samba PDC\&. It allows you to do
-
-
-C:\\> \fBNET USE H: /HOME\fR
-
-
-from a command prompt, for example\&.
-
-
-This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&.
-
-
-This parameter can be used with Win9X workstations to ensure that roaming profiles are stored in a subdirectory of the user's home directory\&. This is done in the following way:
-
-
-\fBlogon home = \\%N\%U\profile\fR
-
-
-This tells Samba to return the above string, with substitutions made when a client requests the info, generally in a NetUserGetInfo request\&. Win9X clients truncate the info to \\\\server\\share when a user does \fBnet use /home\fR but use the whole string when dealing with profiles\&.
-
-
-Note that in prior versions of Samba, the \fIlogon path\fR was returned rather than \fIlogon home\fR\&. This broke \fBnet use /home\fR but allowed profiles outside the home directory\&. The current implementation is correct, and can be used for profiles if you use the above trick\&.
-
-
-This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlogon home = "\\%N\%U"\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlogon home = "\\remote_smb_server\%U"\fR
-
-
-.TP
-logon path (G)
-This parameter specifies the home directory where roaming profiles (NTuser\&.dat etc files for Windows NT) are stored\&. Contrary to previous versions of these manual pages, it has nothing to do with Win 9X roaming profiles\&. To find out how to handle roaming profiles for Win 9X system, see the \fIlogon home\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&. It also specifies the directory from which the "Application Data", (\fIdesktop\fR, \fIstart menu\fR, \fInetwork neighborhood\fR, \fIprograms\fR and other folders, and their contents, are loaded and displayed on your Windows NT client\&.
-
-
-The share and the path must be readable by the user for the preferences and directories to be loaded onto the Windows NT client\&. The share must be writeable when the user logs in for the first time, in order that the Windows NT client can create the NTuser\&.dat and other directories\&.
-
-
-Thereafter, the directories and any of the contents can, if required, be made read-only\&. It is not advisable that the NTuser\&.dat file be made read-only - rename it to NTuser\&.man to achieve the desired effect (a \fBMAN\fRdatory profile)\&.
-
-
-Windows clients can sometimes maintain a connection to the [homes] share, even though there is no user logged in\&. Therefore, it is vital that the logon path does not include a reference to the homes share (i\&.e\&. setting this parameter to \\%N\\%U\\profile_path will cause problems)\&.
-
-
-This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&.
-
-
-Note that this option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlogon path = \\%N\%U\profile\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlogon path = \\PROFILESERVER\PROFILE\%U\fR
-
-
-.TP
-logon script (G)
-This parameter specifies the batch file (\&.bat) or NT command file (\&.cmd) to be downloaded and run on a machine when a user successfully logs in\&. The file must contain the DOS style CR/LF line endings\&. Using a DOS-style editor to create the file is recommended\&.
-
-
-The script must be a relative path to the [netlogon] service\&. If the [netlogon] service specifies a \fIpath\fR of \fI/usr/local/samba/netlogon\fR, and \fBlogon script = STARTUP.BAT\fR, then the file that will be downloaded is:
-
-
-\fI/usr/local/samba/netlogon/STARTUP\&.BAT\fR
-
-
-The contents of the batch file are entirely your choice\&. A
- suggested command would be to add \fBNET TIME \\SERVER /SET
- /YES\fR, to force every machine to synchronize clocks with
- the same time server\&. Another use would be to add \fBNET USE
- U: \\SERVER\UTILS\fR for commonly used utilities, or .nf
-
- \fBNET USE Q: \\\\SERVER\\ISO9001_QA\fR.fi
- for example\&.
-
-Note that it is particularly important not to allow write access to the [netlogon] share, or to grant users write permission on the batch files in a secure environment, as this would allow the batch files to be arbitrarily modified and security to be breached\&.
-
-
-This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing you to have separate logon scripts for each user or machine\&.
-
-
-This option is only useful if Samba is set up as a logon server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno logon script defined\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlogon script = scripts\%U.bat\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lppause command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to stop printing or spooling a specific print job\&.
-
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to pause the print job\&. One way of implementing this is by using job priorities, where jobs having a too low priority won't be sent to the printer\&.
-
-
-If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&. On HPUX (see \fIprinting=hpux \fR), if the \fI-p%p\fR option is added to the lpq command, the job will show up with the correct status, i\&.e\&. if the job priority is lower than the set fence priority it will have the PAUSED status, whereas if the priority is equal or higher it will have the SPOOLED or PRINTING status\&.
-
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the lppause command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSYSV\fR, in which case the default is :
-
-
-\fBlp -i %p-%j -H hold\fR
-
-
-or if the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSOFTQ\fR, then the default is:
-
-
-\fBqstat -s -j%j -h\fR
-
-
-Example for HPUX: \fBlppause command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p0\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lpq cache time (G)
-This controls how long lpq info will be cached for to prevent the \fBlpq\fR command being called too often\&. A separate cache is kept for each variation of the \fB lpq\fR command used by the system, so if you use different \fBlpq\fR commands for different users then they won't share cache information\&.
-
-
-The cache files are stored in \fI/tmp/lpq\&.xxxx\fR where xxxx is a hash of the \fBlpq\fR command in use\&.
-
-
-The default is 10 seconds, meaning that the cached results of a previous identical \fBlpq\fR command will be used if the cached data is less than 10 seconds old\&. A large value may be advisable if your \fBlpq\fR command is very slow\&.
-
-
-A value of 0 will disable caching completely\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIprinting\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBlpq cache time = 10\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlpq cache time = 30\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lpq command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to obtain \fBlpq \fR-style printer status information\&.
-
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and outputs printer status information\&.
-
-
-Currently nine styles of printer status information are supported; BSD, AIX, LPRNG, PLP, SYSV, HPUX, QNX, CUPS, and SOFTQ\&. This covers most UNIX systems\&. You control which type is expected using the \fIprinting =\fR option\&.
-
-
-Some clients (notably Windows for Workgroups) may not correctly send the connection number for the printer they are requesting status information about\&. To get around this, the server reports on the first printer service connected to by the client\&. This only happens if the connection number sent is invalid\&.
-
-
-If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&.
-
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the \fIlpq command\fR as the \fB$PATH \fR may not be available to the server\&. When compiled with the CUPS libraries, no \fIlpq command\fR is needed because smbd will make a library call to obtain the print queue listing\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fI printing\fR\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBlpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lpresume command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to restart or continue printing or spooling a specific print job\&.
-
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number to resume the print job\&. See also the \fIlppause command \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&.
-
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the \fIlpresume command\fR as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: Currently no default value is given to this string, unless the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSYSV\fR, in which case the default is :
-
-
-\fBlp -i %p-%j -H resume\fR
-
-
-or if the value of the \fIprinting\fR parameter is \fBSOFTQ\fR, then the default is:
-
-
-\fBqstat -s -j%j -r\fR
-
-
-Example for HPUX: \fBlpresume command = /usr/bin/lpalt %p-%j -p2\fR
-
-
-.TP
-lprm command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to delete a print job\&.
-
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name and job number, and deletes the print job\&.
-
-
-If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. A \fI%j\fR is replaced with the job number (an integer)\&.
-
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the \fIlprm command\fR as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting \fR\fR
-
-
-Example 1: \fBlprm command = /usr/bin/lprm -P%p %j\fR
-
-
-Example 2: \fBlprm command = /usr/bin/cancel %p-%j\fR
-
-
-.TP
-machine password timeout (G)
-If a Samba server is a member of a Windows NT Domain (see the security = domain) parameter) then periodically a running smbd process will try and change the MACHINE ACCOUNT PASSWORD stored in the TDB called \fIprivate/secrets\&.tdb \fR\&. This parameter specifies how often this password will be changed, in seconds\&. The default is one week (expressed in seconds), the same as a Windows NT Domain member server\&.
-
-
-See also \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), and the security = domain) parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmachine password timeout = 604800\fR
-
-
-.TP
-magic output (S)
-This parameter specifies the name of a file which will contain output created by a magic script (see the \fImagic script\fR parameter below)\&.
-
-
-Warning: If two clients use the same \fImagic script \fR in the same directory the output file content is undefined\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmagic output = <magic script name>.out\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmagic output = myfile.txt\fR
-
-
-.TP
-magic script (S)
-This parameter specifies the name of a file which, if opened, will be executed by the server when the file is closed\&. This allows a UNIX script to be sent to the Samba host and executed on behalf of the connected user\&.
-
-
-Scripts executed in this way will be deleted upon completion assuming that the user has the appropriate level of privilege and the file permissions allow the deletion\&.
-
-
-If the script generates output, output will be sent to the file specified by the \fI magic output\fR parameter (see above)\&.
-
-
-Note that some shells are unable to interpret scripts containing CR/LF instead of CR as the end-of-line marker\&. Magic scripts must be executable \fBas is\fR on the host, which for some hosts and some shells will require filtering at the DOS end\&.
-
-
-Magic scripts are \fBEXPERIMENTAL\fR and should \fBNOT\fR be relied upon\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBNone\&. Magic scripts disabled\&.\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmagic script = user.csh\fR
-
-
-.TP
-mangle case (S)
-See the section on NAME MANGLING
-
-
-Default: \fBmangle case = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-mangled map (S)
-This is for those who want to directly map UNIX file names which cannot be represented on Windows/DOS\&. The mangling of names is not always what is needed\&. In particular you may have documents with file extensions that differ between DOS and UNIX\&. For example, under UNIX it is common to use \fI\&.html\fR for HTML files, whereas under Windows/DOS \fI\&.htm\fR is more commonly used\&.
-
-
-So to map \fIhtml\fR to \fIhtm\fR you would use:
-
-
-\fBmangled map = (*.html *.htm)\fR
-
-
-One very useful case is to remove the annoying \fI;1 \fR off the ends of filenames on some CDROMs (only visible under some UNIXes)\&. To do this use a map of (*;1 *;)\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno mangled map\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmangled map = (*;1 *;)\fR
-
-
-.TP
-mangled names (S)
-This controls whether non-DOS names under UNIX should be mapped to DOS-compatible names ("mangled") and made visible, or whether non-DOS names should simply be ignored\&.
-
-
-See the section on NAME MANGLING for details on how to control the mangling process\&.
-
-
-If mangling is used then the mangling algorithm is as follows:
-
-
-The first (up to) five alphanumeric characters before the rightmost dot of the filename are preserved, forced to upper case, and appear as the first (up to) five characters of the mangled name\&.
-
-A tilde "~" is appended to the first part of the mangled name, followed by a two-character unique sequence, based on the original root name (i\&.e\&., the original filename minus its final extension)\&. The final extension is included in the hash calculation only if it contains any upper case characters or is longer than three characters\&.
-
-
-Note that the character to use may be specified using the \fImangling char\fR option, if you don't like '~'\&.
-
-The first three alphanumeric characters of the final extension are preserved, forced to upper case and appear as the extension of the mangled name\&. The final extension is defined as that part of the original filename after the rightmost dot\&. If there are no dots in the filename, the mangled name will have no extension (except in the case of "hidden files" - see below)\&.
-
-Files whose UNIX name begins with a dot will be presented as DOS hidden files\&. The mangled name will be created as for other filenames, but with the leading dot removed and "___" as its extension regardless of actual original extension (that's three underscores)\&.
-
-The two-digit hash value consists of upper case alphanumeric characters\&.
-
-
-This algorithm can cause name collisions only if files in a directory share the same first five alphanumeric characters\&. The probability of such a clash is 1/1300\&.
-
-
-The name mangling (if enabled) allows a file to be copied between UNIX directories from Windows/DOS while retaining the long UNIX filename\&. UNIX files can be renamed to a new extension from Windows/DOS and will retain the same basename\&. Mangled names do not change between sessions\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmangled names = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-mangled stack (G)
-This parameter controls the number of mangled names that should be cached in the Samba server \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&.
-
-
-This stack is a list of recently mangled base names (extensions are only maintained if they are longer than 3 characters or contains upper case characters)\&.
-
-
-The larger this value, the more likely it is that mangled names can be successfully converted to correct long UNIX names\&. However, large stack sizes will slow most directory accesses\&. Smaller stacks save memory in the server (each stack element costs 256 bytes)\&.
-
-
-It is not possible to absolutely guarantee correct long filenames, so be prepared for some surprises!
-
-
-Default: \fBmangled stack = 50\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmangled stack = 100\fR
-
-
-.TP
-mangle prefix (G)
-controls the number of prefix characters from the original name used when generating the mangled names\&. A larger value will give a weaker hash and therefore more name collisions\&. The minimum value is 1 and the maximum value is 6\&.
-
-
-mangle prefix is effective only when mangling method is hash2\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmangle prefix = 1\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmangle prefix = 4\fR
-
-
-.TP
-mangling char (S)
-This controls what character is used as the \fBmagic\fR character in name mangling\&. The default is a '~' but this may interfere with some software\&. Use this option to set it to whatever you prefer\&. This is effective only when mangling method is hash\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmangling char = ~\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmangling char = ^\fR
-
-
-.TP
-mangling method (G)
-controls the algorithm used for the generating the mangled names\&. Can take two different values, "hash" and "hash2"\&. "hash" is the default and is the algorithm that has been used in Samba for many years\&. "hash2" is a newer and considered a better algorithm (generates less collisions) in the names\&. However, many Win32 applications store the mangled names and so changing to the new algorithm must not be done lightly as these applications may break unless reinstalled\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmangling method = hash2\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmangling method = hash\fR
-
-
-.TP
-map acl inherit (S)
-This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to map the 'inherit' and 'protected' access control entry flags stored in Windows ACLs into an extended attribute called user\&.SAMBA_PAI\&. This parameter only takes effect if Samba is being run on a platform that supports extended attributes (Linux and IRIX so far) and allows the Windows 2000 ACL editor to correctly use inheritance with the Samba POSIX ACL mapping code\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmap acl inherit = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-map archive (S)
-This controls whether the DOS archive attribute should be mapped to the UNIX owner execute bit\&. The DOS archive bit is set when a file has been modified since its last backup\&. One motivation for this option it to keep Samba/your PC from making any file it touches from becoming executable under UNIX\&. This can be quite annoying for shared source code, documents, etc\&.\&.\&.
-
-
-Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR parameter to be set such that owner execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 100)\&. See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmap archive = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-map hidden (S)
-This controls whether DOS style hidden files should be mapped to the UNIX world execute bit\&.
-
-
-Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR to be set such that the world execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 001)\&. See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmap hidden = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-map system (S)
-This controls whether DOS style system files should be mapped to the UNIX group execute bit\&.
-
-
-Note that this requires the \fIcreate mask\fR to be set such that the group execute bit is not masked out (i\&.e\&. it must include 010)\&. See the parameter \fIcreate mask\fR for details\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmap system = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-map to guest (G)
-This parameter is only useful in security modes other than \fIsecurity = share\fR - i\&.e\&. \fBuser\fR, \fBserver\fR, and \fBdomain\fR\&.
-
-
-This parameter can take three different values, which tell \fBsmbd\fR(8) what to do with user login requests that don't match a valid UNIX user in some way\&.
-
-
-The three settings are :
-
-
-\fBNever\fR - Means user login requests with an invalid password are rejected\&. This is the default\&.
-
-\fBBad User\fR - Means user logins with an invalid password are rejected, unless the username does not exist, in which case it is treated as a guest login and mapped into the \fI guest account\fR\&.
-
-\fBBad Password\fR - Means user logins with an invalid password are treated as a guest login and mapped into the guest account\&. Note that this can cause problems as it means that any user incorrectly typing their password will be silently logged on as "guest" - and will not know the reason they cannot access files they think they should - there will have been no message given to them that they got their password wrong\&. Helpdesk services will \fBhate\fR you if you set the \fImap to gu [...]
-
-Note that this parameter is needed to set up "Guest" share services when using \fIsecurity\fR modes other than share\&. This is because in these modes the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client so the server cannot make authentication decisions at the correct time (connection to the share) for "Guest" shares\&.
-
-
-For people familiar with the older Samba releases, this parameter maps to the old compile-time setting of the \fB GUEST_SESSSETUP\fR value in local\&.h\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmap to guest = Never\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmap to guest = Bad User\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max connections (S)
-This option allows the number of simultaneous connections to a service to be limited\&. If \fImax connections\fR is greater than 0 then connections will be refused if this number of connections to the service are already open\&. A value of zero mean an unlimited number of connections may be made\&.
-
-
-Record lock files are used to implement this feature\&. The lock files will be stored in the directory specified by the \fIlock directory\fR option\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax connections = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmax connections = 10\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max disk size (G)
-This option allows you to put an upper limit on the apparent size of disks\&. If you set this option to 100 then all shares will appear to be not larger than 100 MB in size\&.
-
-
-Note that this option does not limit the amount of data you can put on the disk\&. In the above case you could still store much more than 100 MB on the disk, but if a client ever asks for the amount of free disk space or the total disk size then the result will be bounded by the amount specified in \fImax disk size\fR\&.
-
-
-This option is primarily useful to work around bugs in some pieces of software that can't handle very large disks, particularly disks over 1GB in size\&.
-
-
-A \fImax disk size\fR of 0 means no limit\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax disk size = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmax disk size = 1000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max log size (G)
-This option (an integer in kilobytes) specifies the max size the log file should grow to\&. Samba periodically checks the size and if it is exceeded it will rename the file, adding a \fI\&.old\fR extension\&.
-
-
-A size of 0 means no limit\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax log size = 5000\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmax log size = 1000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max mux (G)
-This option controls the maximum number of outstanding simultaneous SMB operations that Samba tells the client it will allow\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax mux = 50\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max open files (G)
-This parameter limits the maximum number of open files that one \fBsmbd\fR(8) file serving process may have open for a client at any one time\&. The default for this parameter is set very high (10,000) as Samba uses only one bit per unopened file\&.
-
-
-The limit of the number of open files is usually set by the UNIX per-process file descriptor limit rather than this parameter so you should never need to touch this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax open files = 10000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max print jobs (S)
-This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment\&. If this number is exceeded, \fBsmbd\fR(8) will remote "Out of Space" to the client\&. See all \fItotal print jobs\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax print jobs = 1000\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmax print jobs = 5000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max protocol (G)
-The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest protocol level that will be supported by the server\&.
-
-
-Possible values are :
-
-
-\fBCORE\fR: Earliest version\&. No concept of user names\&.
-
-\fBCOREPLUS\fR: Slight improvements on CORE for efficiency\&.
-
-\fBLANMAN1\fR: First \fB modern\fR version of the protocol\&. Long filename support\&.
-
-\fBLANMAN2\fR: Updates to Lanman1 protocol\&.
-
-\fBNT1\fR: Current up to date version of the protocol\&. Used by Windows NT\&. Known as CIFS\&.
-
-Normally this option should not be set as the automatic negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing the appropriate protocol\&.
-
-
-See also \fImin protocol\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBmax protocol = NT1\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmax protocol = LANMAN1\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max reported print jobs (S)
-This parameter limits the maximum number of jobs displayed in a port monitor for Samba printer queue at any given moment\&. If this number is exceeded, the excess jobs will not be shown\&. A value of zero means there is no limit on the number of print jobs reported\&. See all \fItotal print jobs\fR and \fImax print jobs\fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax reported print jobs = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmax reported print jobs = 1000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max smbd processes (G)
-This parameter limits the maximum number of \fBsmbd\fR(8) processes concurrently running on a system and is intended as a stopgap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this number of connections\&. Remember that under normal operating conditions, each user will have an \fBsmbd\fR(8) associated with him or her to handle connections to all shares from a given host\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax smbd processes = 0\fR ## no limit
-
-
-Example: \fBmax smbd processes = 1000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max ttl (G)
-This option tells \fBnmbd\fR(8) what the default 'time to live' of NetBIOS names should be (in seconds) when \fBnmbd\fR is requesting a name using either a broadcast packet or from a WINS server\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 3 days\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax ttl = 259200\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max wins ttl (G)
-This option tells \fBsmbd\fR(8) when acting as a WINS server ( \fIwins support = yes\fR) what the maximum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that \fBnmbd\fR will grant will be (in seconds)\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 6 days (518400 seconds)\&.
-
-
-See also the \fImin wins ttl\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax wins ttl = 518400\fR
-
-
-.TP
-max xmit (G)
-This option controls the maximum packet size that will be negotiated by Samba\&. The default is 65535, which is the maximum\&. In some cases you may find you get better performance with a smaller value\&. A value below 2048 is likely to cause problems\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmax xmit = 65535\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmax xmit = 8192\fR
-
-
-.TP
-message command (G)
-This specifies what command to run when the server receives a WinPopup style message\&.
-
-
-This would normally be a command that would deliver the message somehow\&. How this is to be done is up to your imagination\&.
-
-
-An example is:
-
-
-\fBmessage command = csh -c 'xedit %s;rm %s' &\fR
-
-
-This delivers the message using \fBxedit\fR, then removes it afterwards\&. \fBNOTE THAT IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THIS COMMAND RETURN IMMEDIATELY\fR\&. That's why I have the '&' on the end\&. If it doesn't return immediately then your PCs may freeze when sending messages (they should recover after 30 seconds, hopefully)\&.
-
-
-All messages are delivered as the global guest user\&. The command takes the standard substitutions, although \fI %u\fR won't work (\fI%U\fR may be better in this case)\&.
-
-
-Apart from the standard substitutions, some additional ones apply\&. In particular:
-
-
-\fI%s\fR = the filename containing the message\&.
-
-\fI%t\fR = the destination that the message was sent to (probably the server name)\&.
-
-\fI%f\fR = who the message is from\&.
-
-You could make this command send mail, or whatever else takes your fancy\&. Please let us know of any really interesting ideas you have\&.
-
-
-Here's a way of sending the messages as mail to root:
-
-
-\fBmessage command = /bin/mail -s 'message from %f on %m' root < %s; rm %s\fR
-
-
-If you don't have a message command then the message won't be delivered and Samba will tell the sender there was an error\&. Unfortunately WfWg totally ignores the error code and carries on regardless, saying that the message was delivered\&.
-
-
-If you want to silently delete it then try:
-
-
-\fBmessage command = rm %s\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBno message command\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmessage command = csh -c 'xedit %s; rm %s' &\fR
-
-
-.TP
-min passwd length (G)
-Synonym for \fImin password length\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-min password length (G)
-This option sets the minimum length in characters of a plaintext password that \fBsmbd\fR will accept when performing UNIX password changing\&.
-
-
-See also \fIunix password sync\fR, \fIpasswd program\fR and \fIpasswd chat debug\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmin password length = 5\fR
-
-
-.TP
-min print space (S)
-This sets the minimum amount of free disk space that must be available before a user will be able to spool a print job\&. It is specified in kilobytes\&. The default is 0, which means a user can always spool a print job\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIprinting \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmin print space = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBmin print space = 2000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-min protocol (G)
-The value of the parameter (a string) is the lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support\&. Please refer to the \fImax protocol\fR parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description of each\&. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in \fIsource/smbd/negprot\&.c\fR for a listing of known protocol dialects supported by clients\&.
-
-
-If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should also refer to the \fIlanman auth\fR parameter\&. Otherwise, you should never need to change this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default : \fBmin protocol = CORE\fR
-
-
-Example : \fBmin protocol = NT1\fR # disable DOS clients
-
-
-.TP
-min wins ttl (G)
-This option tells \fBnmbd\fR(8) when acting as a WINS server (\fI wins support = yes\fR) what the minimum 'time to live' of NetBIOS names that \fBnmbd\fR will grant will be (in seconds)\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&. The default is 6 hours (21600 seconds)\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmin wins ttl = 21600\fR
-
-
-.TP
-msdfs proxy (S)
-This parameter indicates that the share is a stand-in for another CIFS share whose location is specified by the value of the parameter\&. When clients attempt to connect to this share, they are redirected to the proxied share using the SMB-Dfs protocol\&.
-
-
-Only Dfs roots can act as proxy shares\&. Take a look at the \fImsdfs root\fR and \fIhost msdfs\fR options to find out how to set up a Dfs root share\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBmsdfs proxy = \\\\otherserver\\someshare\fR
-
-
-.TP
-msdfs root (S)
-If set to \fByes\fR, Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory\&. Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic links of the form \fImsdfs:serverA\\\\shareA,serverB\\\\shareB\fR and so on\&. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba, refer to ???\&.
-
-
-See also \fIhost msdfs\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBmsdfs root = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-name cache timeout (G)
-Specifies the number of seconds it takes before entries in samba's hostname resolve cache time out\&. If the timeout is set to 0\&. the caching is disabled\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBname cache timeout = 660\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBname cache timeout = 0\fR
-
-
-.TP
-name resolve order (G)
-This option is used by the programs in the Samba suite to determine what naming services to use and in what order to resolve host names to IP addresses\&. Its main purpose to is to control how netbios name resolution is performed\&. The option takes a space separated string of name resolution options\&.
-
-
-The options are: "lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows:
-
-
-\fBlmhosts\fR : Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the lmhosts(5) for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&.
-
-\fBhost\fR : Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts \fR, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file\&. Note that this method is used only if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type or 0x1c (domain controllers)\&. The latter case is only useful for active directory domains and results in a [...]
-
-\fBwins\fR : Query a name with the IP address listed in the \fI wins server\fR parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&.
-
-\fBbcast\fR : Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&.
-
-Default: \fBname resolve order = lmhosts host wins bcast\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBname resolve order = lmhosts bcast host\fR
-
-
-This will cause the local lmhosts file to be examined first, followed by a broadcast attempt, followed by a normal system hostname lookup\&.
-
-
-When Samba is functioning in ADS security mode (\fBsecurity = ads\fR) it is advised to use following settings for \fIname resolve order\fR:
-
-
-\fBname resolve order = wins bcast\fR
-
-
-DC lookups will still be done via DNS, but fallbacks to netbios names will not inundate your DNS servers with needless querys for DOMAIN<0x1c> lookups\&.
-
-
-.TP
-netbios aliases (G)
-This is a list of NetBIOS names that nmbd will advertise as additional names by which the Samba server is known\&. This allows one machine to appear in browse lists under multiple names\&. If a machine is acting as a browse server or logon server none of these names will be advertised as either browse server or logon servers, only the primary name of the machine will be advertised with these capabilities\&.
-
-
-See also \fInetbios name\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBempty string (no additional names)\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBnetbios aliases = TEST TEST1 TEST2\fR
-
-
-.TP
-netbios name (G)
-This sets the NetBIOS name by which a Samba server is known\&. By default it is the same as the first component of the host's DNS name\&. If a machine is a browse server or logon server this name (or the first component of the hosts DNS name) will be the name that these services are advertised under\&.
-
-
-See also \fInetbios aliases\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBmachine DNS name\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBnetbios name = MYNAME\fR
-
-
-.TP
-netbios scope (G)
-This sets the NetBIOS scope that Samba will operate under\&. This should not be set unless every machine on your LAN also sets this value\&.
-
-
-.TP
-nis homedir (G)
-Get the home share server from a NIS map\&. For UNIX systems that use an automounter, the user's home directory will often be mounted on a workstation on demand from a remote server\&.
-
-
-When the Samba logon server is not the actual home directory server, but is mounting the home directories via NFS then two network hops would be required to access the users home directory if the logon server told the client to use itself as the SMB server for home directories (one over SMB and one over NFS)\&. This can be very slow\&.
-
-
-This option allows Samba to return the home share as being on a different server to the logon server and as long as a Samba daemon is running on the home directory server, it will be mounted on the Samba client directly from the directory server\&. When Samba is returning the home share to the client, it will consult the NIS map specified in \fIhomedir map\fR and return the server listed there\&.
-
-
-Note that for this option to work there must be a working NIS system and the Samba server with this option must also be a logon server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnis homedir = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-nt acl support (S)
-This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to map UNIX permissions into Windows NT access control lists\&. This parameter was formally a global parameter in releases prior to 2\&.2\&.2\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnt acl support = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-ntlm auth (G)
-This parameter determines whether or not \fBsmbd\fR(8) will attempt to authenticate users using the NTLM encrypted password response\&. If disabled, either the lanman password hash or an NTLMv2 response will need to be sent by the client\&.
-
-
-If this option, and \fBlanman auth\fR are both disabled, then only NTLMv2 logins will be permited\&. Not all clients support NTLMv2, and most will require special configuration to us it\&.
-
-
-Default : \fBntlm auth = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-nt pipe support (G)
-This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will allow Windows NT clients to connect to the NT SMB specific \fBIPC$\fR pipes\&. This is a developer debugging option and can be left alone\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnt pipe support = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-nt status support (G)
-This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will negotiate NT specific status support with Windows NT/2k/XP clients\&. This is a developer debugging option and should be left alone\&. If this option is set to \fBno\fR then Samba offers exactly the same DOS error codes that versions prior to Samba 2\&.2\&.3 reported\&.
-
-
-You should not need to ever disable this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnt status support = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-null passwords (G)
-Allow or disallow client access to accounts that have null passwords\&.
-
-
-See also \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5)\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnull passwords = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-obey pam restrictions (G)
-When Samba 3\&.0 is configured to enable PAM support (i\&.e\&. --with-pam), this parameter will control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account and session management directives\&. The default behavior is to use PAM for clear text authentication only and to ignore any account or session management\&. Note that Samba always ignores PAM for authentication in the case of \fIencrypt passwords = yes\fR\&. The reason is that PAM modules cannot support the challenge/response authenticati [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBobey pam restrictions = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-only guest (S)
-A synonym for \fI guest only\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-only user (S)
-This is a boolean option that controls whether connections with usernames not in the \fIuser\fR list will be allowed\&. By default this option is disabled so that a client can supply a username to be used by the server\&. Enabling this parameter will force the server to only use the login names from the \fIuser\fR list and is only really useful in share level security\&.
-
-
-Note that this also means Samba won't try to deduce usernames from the service name\&. This can be annoying for the [homes] section\&. To get around this you could use \fBuser = %S\fR which means your \fIuser\fR list will be just the service name, which for home directories is the name of the user\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIuser\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBonly user = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-oplock break wait time (G)
-This is a tuning parameter added due to bugs in both Windows 9x and WinNT\&. If Samba responds to a client too quickly when that client issues an SMB that can cause an oplock break request, then the network client can fail and not respond to the break request\&. This tuning parameter (which is set in milliseconds) is the amount of time Samba will wait before sending an oplock break request to such (broken) clients\&.
-
-
-\fBDO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBoplock break wait time = 0\fR
-
-
-.TP
-oplock contention limit (S)
-This is a \fBvery\fR advanced \fBsmbd\fR(8) tuning option to improve the efficiency of the granting of oplocks under multiple client contention for the same file\&.
-
-
-In brief it specifies a number, which causes \fBsmbd\fR(8)not to grant an oplock even when requested if the approximate number of clients contending for an oplock on the same file goes over this limit\&. This causes \fBsmbd\fR to behave in a similar way to Windows NT\&.
-
-
-\fBDO NOT CHANGE THIS PARAMETER UNLESS YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD THE SAMBA OPLOCK CODE\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBoplock contention limit = 2\fR
-
-
-.TP
-oplocks (S)
-This boolean option tells \fBsmbd\fR whether to issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this share\&. The oplock code can dramatically (approx\&. 30% or more) improve the speed of access to files on Samba servers\&. It allows the clients to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by default in Windows NT Servers)\&. For more information see the file \fISpeed\&.txt\fR in the Samba \f [...]
-
-
-Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files with a share\&. See the \fI veto oplock files\fR parameter\&. On some systems oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system\&. This allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files, whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process\&. See the \fIkernel oplocks\fR parameter for details\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIkernel oplocks\fR and \fI level2 oplocks\fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBoplocks = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-os2 driver map (G)
-The parameter is used to define the absolute path to a file containing a mapping of Windows NT printer driver names to OS/2 printer driver names\&. The format is:
-
-
-<nt driver name> = <os2 driver name>\&.<device name>
-
-
-For example, a valid entry using the HP LaserJet 5 printer driver would appear as \fBHP LaserJet 5L = LASERJET.HP LaserJet 5L\fR\&.
-
-
-The need for the file is due to the printer driver namespace problem described in ???\&. For more details on OS/2 clients, please refer to ???\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBos2 driver map = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-.TP
-os level (G)
-This integer value controls what level Samba advertises itself as for browse elections\&. The value of this parameter determines whether \fBnmbd\fR(8) has a chance of becoming a local master browser for the \fI WORKGROUP\fR in the local broadcast area\&.
-
-
-\fBNote :\fRBy default, Samba will win a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating systems except a Windows NT 4\&.0/2000 Domain Controller\&. This means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate a subnet for browsing purposes\&. See \fIBROWSING\&.txt \fR in the Samba \fIdocs/\fR directory for details\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBos level = 20\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBos level = 65 \fR
-
-
-.TP
-pam password change (G)
-With the addition of better PAM support in Samba 2\&.2, this parameter, it is possible to use PAM's password change control flag for Samba\&. If enabled, then PAM will be used for password changes when requested by an SMB client instead of the program listed in \fIpasswd program\fR\&. It should be possible to enable this without changing your \fIpasswd chat\fR parameter for most setups\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpam password change = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-panic action (G)
-This is a Samba developer option that allows a system command to be called when either \fBsmbd\fR(8) or \fBsmbd\fR(8) crashes\&. This is usually used to draw attention to the fact that a problem occurred\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpanic action = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpanic action = "/bin/sleep 90000"\fR
-
-
-.TP
-paranoid server security (G)
-Some version of NT 4\&.x allow non-guest users with a bad passowrd\&. When this option is enabled, samba will not use a broken NT 4\&.x server as password server, but instead complain to the logs and exit\&.
-
-
-Disabling this option prevents Samba from making this check, which involves deliberatly attempting a bad logon to the remote server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBparanoid server security = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-passdb backend (G)
-This option allows the administrator to chose which backends to retrieve and store passwords with\&. This allows (for example) both smbpasswd and tdbsam to be used without a recompile\&. Multiple backends can be specified, separated by spaces\&. The backends will be searched in the order they are specified\&. New users are always added to the first backend specified\&.
-
-
-This parameter is in two parts, the backend's name, and a 'location' string that has meaning only to that particular backed\&. These are separated by a : character\&.
-
-
-Available backends can include: .TP 3 \(bu \fBsmbpasswd\fR - The default smbpasswd backend\&. Takes a path to the smbpasswd file as an optional argument\&. .TP \(bu \fBtdbsam\fR - The TDB based password storage backend\&. Takes a path to the TDB as an optional argument (defaults to passdb\&.tdb in the \fIprivate dir\fR directory\&. .TP \(bu \fBldapsam\fR - The LDAP based passdb backend\&. Takes an LDAP URL as an optional argument (defaults to \fBldap://localhost\fR) LDAP connections shou [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBpassdb backend = smbpasswd\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpassdb backend = tdbsam:/etc/samba/private/passdb.tdb smbpasswd:/etc/samba/smbpasswd\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpassdb backend = ldapsam:ldaps://ldap.example.com\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpassdb backend = mysql:my_plugin_args tdbsam\fR
-
-
-.TP
-passwd chat (G)
-This string controls the \fB"chat"\fR conversation that takes places between \fBsmbd\fR(8) and the local password changing program to change the user's password\&. The string describes a sequence of response-receive pairs that \fBsmbd\fR(8) uses to determine what to send to the \fIpasswd program\fR and what to expect back\&. If the expected output is not received then the password is not changed\&.
-
-
-This chat sequence is often quite site specific, depending on what local methods are used for password control (such as NIS etc)\&.
-
-
-Note that this parameter only is only used if the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter is set to \fByes\fR\&. This sequence is then called \fBAS ROOT\fR when the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is being changed, without access to the old password cleartext\&. This means that root must be able to reset the user's password without knowing the text of the previous password\&. In the presence of NIS/YP, this means that the passwd program must be executed on the NIS master\&.
-
-
-The string can contain the macro \fI%n\fR which is substituted for the new password\&. The chat sequence can also contain the standard macros \fB\\\\n\fR, \fB\\\\r\fR, \fB\\\\t\fR and \fB\\\\s\fR to give line-feed, carriage-return, tab and space\&. The chat sequence string can also contain a '*' which matches any sequence of characters\&. Double quotes can be used to collect strings with spaces in them into a single string\&.
-
-
-If the send string in any part of the chat sequence is a full stop "\&.", then no string is sent\&. Similarly, if the expect string is a full stop then no string is expected\&.
-
-
-If the \fIpam password change\fR parameter is set to \fByes\fR, the chat pairs may be matched in any order, and success is determined by the PAM result, not any particular output\&. The \\n macro is ignored for PAM conversions\&.
-
-
-See also \fIunix password sync\fR, \fI passwd program\fR , \fIpasswd chat debug\fR and \fIpam password change\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpasswd chat = *new*password* %n\\n *new*password* %n\\n *changed*\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpasswd chat = "*Enter OLD password*" %o\\n "*Enter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Reenter NEW password*" %n\\n "*Password changed*"\fR
-
-
-.TP
-passwd chat debug (G)
-This boolean specifies if the passwd chat script parameter is run in \fBdebug\fR mode\&. In this mode the strings passed to and received from the passwd chat are printed in the \fBsmbd\fR(8) log with a \fIdebug level\fR of 100\&. This is a dangerous option as it will allow plaintext passwords to be seen in the \fBsmbd\fR log\&. It is available to help Samba admins debug their \fIpasswd chat\fR scripts when calling the \fIpasswd program\fR and should be turned off after this has been done [...]
-
-
-See also \fIpasswd chat\fR , \fIpam password change\fR , \fIpasswd program\fR \&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpasswd chat debug = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-passwd program (G)
-The name of a program that can be used to set UNIX user passwords\&. Any occurrences of \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user name\&. The user name is checked for existence before calling the password changing program\&.
-
-
-Also note that many passwd programs insist in \fBreasonable \fR passwords, such as a minimum length, or the inclusion of mixed case chars and digits\&. This can pose a problem as some clients (such as Windows for Workgroups) uppercase the password before sending it\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that if the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter is set to \fByes \fR then this program is called \fBAS ROOT\fR before the SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed\&. If this UNIX password change fails, then \fBsmbd\fR will fail to change the SMB password also (this is by design)\&.
-
-
-If the \fIunix password sync\fR parameter is set this parameter \fBMUST USE ABSOLUTE PATHS\fR for \fBALL\fR programs called, and must be examined for security implications\&. Note that by default \fIunix password sync\fR is set to \fBno\fR\&.
-
-
-See also \fIunix password sync\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpasswd program = /bin/passwd\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpasswd program = /sbin/npasswd %u\fR
-
-
-.TP
-password level (G)
-Some client/server combinations have difficulty with mixed-case passwords\&. One offending client is Windows for Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when using COREPLUS! Another problem child is the Windows 95/98 family of operating systems\&. These clients upper case clear text passwords even when NT LM 0\&.12 selected by the protocol negotiation request/response\&.
-
-
-This parameter defines the maximum number of characters that may be upper case in passwords\&.
-
-
-For example, say the password given was "FRED"\&. If \fI password level\fR is set to 1, the following combinations would be tried if "FRED" failed:
-
-
-"Fred", "fred", "fRed", "frEd","freD"
-
-
-If \fIpassword level\fR was set to 2, the following combinations would also be tried:
-
-
-"FRed", "FrEd", "FreD", "fREd", "fReD", "frED", \&.\&.
-
-
-And so on\&.
-
-
-The higher value this parameter is set to the more likely it is that a mixed case password will be matched against a single case password\&. However, you should be aware that use of this parameter reduces security and increases the time taken to process a new connection\&.
-
-
-A value of zero will cause only two attempts to be made - the password as is and the password in all-lower case\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpassword level = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpassword level = 4\fR
-
-
-.TP
-password server (G)
-By specifying the name of another SMB server or Active Directory domain controller with this option, and using \fBsecurity = [ads|domain|server]\fR it is possible to get Samba to to do all its username/password validation using a specific remote server\&.
-
-
-This option sets the name or IP address of the password server to use\&. New syntax has been added to support defining the port to use when connecting to the server the case of an ADS realm\&. To define a port other than the default LDAP port of 389, add the port number using a colon after the name or IP address (e\&.g\&. 192\&.168\&.1\&.100:389)\&. If you do not specify a port, Samba will use the standard LDAP port of tcp/389\&. Note that port numbers have no effect on password servers [...]
-
-
-If parameter is a name, it is looked up using the parameter \fIname resolve order\fR and so may resolved by any method and order described in that parameter\&.
-
-
-The password server must be a machine capable of using the "LM1\&.2X002" or the "NT LM 0\&.12" protocol, and it must be in user level security mode\&.
-
-
-Using a password server means your UNIX box (running Samba) is only as secure as your password server\&. \fBDO NOT CHOOSE A PASSWORD SERVER THAT YOU DON'T COMPLETELY TRUST\fR\&.
-
-Never point a Samba server at itself for password serving\&. This will cause a loop and could lock up your Samba server!
-
-
-The name of the password server takes the standard substitutions, but probably the only useful one is \fI%m \fR, which means the Samba server will use the incoming client as the password server\&. If you use this then you better trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!
-
-
-If the \fIsecurity\fR parameter is set to \fBdomain\fR or \fBads\fR, then the list of machines in this option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is effectively in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls to authenticate the user logging on\&. The advantage of using \fB security = domain\fR is that if you list several hosts in the \fIpassword server\fR option then \fBsmbd \fR will try e [...]
-
-
-If the \fIpassword server\fR option is set to the character '*', then Samba will attempt to auto-locate the Primary or Backup Domain controllers to authenticate against by doing a query for the name \fBWORKGROUP<1C>\fR and then contacting each server returned in the list of IP addresses from the name resolution source\&.
-
-
-If the list of servers contains both names/IP's and the '*' character, the list is treated as a list of preferred domain controllers, but an auto lookup of all remaining DC's will be added to the list as well\&. Samba will not attempt to optimize this list by locating the closest DC\&.
-
-
-If the \fIsecurity\fR parameter is set to \fBserver\fR, then there are different restrictions that \fBsecurity = domain\fR doesn't suffer from:
-
-
-You may list several password servers in the \fIpassword server\fR parameter, however if an \fBsmbd\fR makes a connection to a password server, and then the password server fails, no more users will be able to be authenticated from this \fBsmbd\fR\&. This is a restriction of the SMB/CIFS protocol when in \fBsecurity = server \fR mode and cannot be fixed in Samba\&.
-
-If you are using a Windows NT server as your password server then you will have to ensure that your users are able to login from the Samba server, as when in \fB security = server\fR mode the network logon will appear to come from there rather than from the users workstation\&.
-
-See also the \fIsecurity \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpassword server = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpassword server = NT-PDC, NT-BDC1, NT-BDC2, *\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpassword server = windc.mydomain.com:389 192.168.1.101 *\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpassword server = *\fR
-
-
-.TP
-path (S)
-This parameter specifies a directory to which the user of the service is to be given access\&. In the case of printable services, this is where print data will spool prior to being submitted to the host for printing\&.
-
-
-For a printable service offering guest access, the service should be readonly and the path should be world-writeable and have the sticky bit set\&. This is not mandatory of course, but you probably won't get the results you expect if you do otherwise\&.
-
-
-Any occurrences of \fI%u\fR in the path will be replaced with the UNIX username that the client is using on this connection\&. Any occurrences of \fI%m\fR will be replaced by the NetBIOS name of the machine they are connecting from\&. These replacements are very useful for setting up pseudo home directories for users\&.
-
-
-Note that this path will be based on \fIroot dir\fR if one was specified\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpath = /home/fred\fR
-
-
-.TP
-pid directory (G)
-This option specifies the directory where pid files will be placed\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpid directory = ${prefix}/var/locks\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpid directory = /var/run/\fR
-
-
-.TP
-posix locking (S)
-The \fBsmbd\fR(8) daemon maintains an database of file locks obtained by SMB clients\&. The default behavior is to map this internal database to POSIX locks\&. This means that file locks obtained by SMB clients are consistent with those seen by POSIX compliant applications accessing the files via a non-SMB method (e\&.g\&. NFS or local file access)\&. You should never need to disable this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBposix locking = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-postexec (S)
-This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is disconnected\&. It takes the usual substitutions\&. The command may be run as the root on some systems\&.
-
-
-An interesting example may be to unmount server resources:
-
-
-\fBpostexec = /etc/umount /cdrom\fR
-
-
-See also \fIpreexec\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpostexec = echo \"%u disconnected from %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log\fR
-
-
-.TP
-preexec (S)
-This option specifies a command to be run whenever the service is connected to\&. It takes the usual substitutions\&.
-
-
-An interesting example is to send the users a welcome message every time they log in\&. Maybe a message of the day? Here is an example:
-
-
-\fBpreexec = csh -c 'echo \"Welcome to %S!\" | /usr/local/samba/bin/smbclient -M %m -I %I' & \fR
-
-
-Of course, this could get annoying after a while :-)
-
-
-See also \fIpreexec close\fR and \fIpostexec \fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpreexec = echo \"%u connected to %S from %m (%I)\" >> /tmp/log\fR
-
-
-.TP
-preexec close (S)
-This boolean option controls whether a non-zero return code from \fIpreexec \fR should close the service being connected to\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpreexec close = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-prefered master (G)
-Synonym for \fI preferred master\fR for people who cannot spell :-)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-preferred master (G)
-This boolean parameter controls if \fBnmbd\fR(8) is a preferred master browser for its workgroup\&.
-
-
-If this is set to \fByes\fR, on startup, \fBnmbd\fR will force an election, and it will have a slight advantage in winning the election\&. It is recommended that this parameter is used in conjunction with \fB domain master = yes\fR, so that \fBnmbd\fR can guarantee becoming a domain master\&.
-
-
-Use this option with caution, because if there are several hosts (whether Samba servers, Windows 95 or NT) that are preferred master browsers on the same subnet, they will each periodically and continuously attempt to become the local master browser\&. This will result in unnecessary broadcast traffic and reduced browsing capabilities\&.
-
-
-See also \fIos level\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpreferred master = auto\fR
-
-
-.TP
-preload (G)
-This is a list of services that you want to be automatically added to the browse lists\&. This is most useful for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be visible\&.
-
-
-Note that if you just want all printers in your printcap file loaded then the \fIload printers\fR option is easier\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno preloaded services\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpreload = fred lp colorlp\fR
-
-
-.TP
-preload modules (G)
-This is a list of paths to modules that should be loaded into smbd before a client connects\&. This improves the speed of smbd when reacting to new connections somewhat\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpreload modules = \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBpreload modules = /usr/lib/samba/passdb/mysql.so+++ \fR
-
-
-.TP
-preserve case (S)
-This controls if new filenames are created with the case that the client passes, or if they are forced to be the \fIdefault case \fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBpreserve case = yes\fR
-
-
-See the section on NAME MANGLING for a fuller discussion\&.
-
-
-.TP
-printable (S)
-If this parameter is \fByes\fR, then clients may open, write to and submit spool files on the directory specified for the service\&.
-
-
-Note that a printable service will ALWAYS allow writing to the service path (user privileges permitting) via the spooling of print data\&. The \fIread only \fR parameter controls only non-printing access to the resource\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBprintable = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-printcap (G)
-Synonym for \fI printcap name\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-printcap name (S)
-This parameter may be used to override the compiled-in default printcap name used by the server (usually \fI /etc/printcap\fR)\&. See the discussion of the [printers] section above for reasons why you might want to do this\&.
-
-
-To use the CUPS printing interface set \fBprintcap name = cups \fR\&. This should be supplemented by an addtional setting printing = cups in the [global] section\&. \fBprintcap name = cups\fR will use the "dummy" printcap created by CUPS, as specified in your CUPS configuration file\&.
-
-
-On System V systems that use \fBlpstat\fR to list available printers you can use \fBprintcap name = lpstat \fR to automatically obtain lists of available printers\&. This is the default for systems that define SYSV at configure time in Samba (this includes most System V based systems)\&. If \fI printcap name\fR is set to \fBlpstat\fR on these systems then Samba will launch \fBlpstat -v\fR and attempt to parse the output to obtain a printer list\&.
-
-
-A minimal printcap file would look something like this:
-
-
-.nf
-
-print1|My Printer 1
-print2|My Printer 2
-print3|My Printer 3
-print4|My Printer 4
-print5|My Printer 5
-.fi
-
-
-where the '|' separates aliases of a printer\&. The fact that the second alias has a space in it gives a hint to Samba that it's a comment\&.
-
-
-Under AIX the default printcap name is \fI/etc/qconfig\fR\&. Samba will assume the file is in AIX \fIqconfig\fR format if the string \fIqconfig\fR appears in the printcap filename\&.
-
-Default: \fBprintcap name = /etc/printcap\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBprintcap name = /etc/myprintcap\fR
-
-
-.TP
-print command (S)
-After a print job has finished spooling to a service, this command will be used via a \fBsystem()\fR call to process the spool file\&. Typically the command specified will submit the spool file to the host's printing subsystem, but there is no requirement that this be the case\&. The server will not remove the spool file, so whatever command you specify should remove the spool file when it has been processed, otherwise you will need to manually remove old spool files\&.
-
-
-The print command is simply a text string\&. It will be used verbatim after macro substitutions have been made:
-
-
-%s, %f - the path to the spool file name
-
-
-%p - the appropriate printer name
-
-
-%J - the job name as transmitted by the client\&.
-
-
-%c - The number of printed pages of the spooled job (if known)\&.
-
-
-%z - the size of the spooled print job (in bytes)
-
-
-The print command \fBMUST\fR contain at least one occurrence of \fI%s\fR or \fI%f \fR - the \fI%p\fR is optional\&. At the time a job is submitted, if no printer name is supplied the \fI%p \fR will be silently removed from the printer command\&.
-
-
-If specified in the [global] section, the print command given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own print command specified\&.
-
-
-If there is neither a specified print command for a printable service nor a global print command, spool files will be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed\&.
-
-
-Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the \fBnobody\fR account\&. If this happens then create an alternative guest account that can print and set the \fIguest account\fR in the [global] section\&.
-
-
-You can form quite complex print commands by realizing that they are just passed to a shell\&. For example the following will log a print job, print the file, then remove it\&. Note that ';' is the usual separator for command in shell scripts\&.
-
-
-\fBprint command = echo Printing %s >> /tmp/print.log; lpr -P %p %s; rm %s\fR
-
-
-You may have to vary this command considerably depending on how you normally print files on your system\&. The default for the parameter varies depending on the setting of the \fIprinting\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: For \fBprinting = BSD, AIX, QNX, LPRNG or PLP :\fR
-
-
-\fBprint command = lpr -r -P%p %s\fR
-
-
-For \fBprinting = SYSV or HPUX :\fR
-
-
-\fBprint command = lp -c -d%p %s; rm %s\fR
-
-
-For \fBprinting = SOFTQ :\fR
-
-
-\fBprint command = lp -d%p -s %s; rm %s\fR
-
-
-For printing = CUPS : If SAMBA is compiled against libcups, then printcap = cups uses the CUPS API to submit jobs, etc\&. Otherwise it maps to the System V commands with the -oraw option for printing, i\&.e\&. it uses \fBlp -c -d%p -oraw; rm %s\fR\&. With \fBprinting = cups\fR, and if SAMBA is compiled against libcups, any manually set print command will be ignored\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBprint command = /usr/local/samba/bin/myprintscript %p %s\fR
-
-
-.TP
-printer (S)
-Synonym for \fI printer name\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-printer admin (S)
-This is a list of users that can do anything to printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC (usually using a NT workstation)\&. Note that the root user always has admin rights\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBprinter admin = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBprinter admin = admin, @staff\fR
-
-
-.TP
-printer name (S)
-This parameter specifies the name of the printer to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent\&.
-
-
-If specified in the [global] section, the printer name given will be used for any printable service that does not have its own printer name specified\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnone (but may be \fBlp\fR on many systems)\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBprinter name = laserwriter\fR
-
-
-.TP
-printing (S)
-This parameters controls how printer status information is interpreted on your system\&. It also affects the default values for the \fIprint command\fR, \fIlpq command\fR, \fIlppause command \fR, \fIlpresume command\fR, and \fIlprm command\fR if specified in the [global] section\&.
-
-
-Currently nine printing styles are supported\&. They are \fBBSD\fR, \fBAIX\fR, \fBLPRNG\fR, \fBPLP\fR, \fBSYSV\fR, \fBHPUX\fR, \fBQNX\fR, \fBSOFTQ\fR, and \fBCUPS\fR\&.
-
-
-To see what the defaults are for the other print commands when using the various options use the \fBtestparm\fR(1) program\&.
-
-
-This option can be set on a per printer basis
-
-
-See also the discussion in the [printers] section\&.
-
-
-.TP
-print ok (S)
-Synonym for \fIprintable\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-private dir (G)
-This parameters defines the directory smbd will use for storing such files as \fIsmbpasswd\fR and \fIsecrets\&.tdb\fR\&.
-
-
-Default :\fBprivate dir = ${prefix}/private\fR
-
-
-.TP
-profile acls (S)
-This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) This boolean parameter was added to fix the problems that people have been having with storing user profiles on Samba shares from Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients\&. New versions of Windows 2000 or Windows XP service packs do security ACL checking on the owner and ability to write of the profile directory stored on a local workstation when copied from a Samba share\&.
-
-
-When not in domain mode with winbindd then the security info copied onto the local workstation has no meaning to the logged in user (SID) on that workstation so the profile storing fails\&. Adding this parameter onto a share used for profile storage changes two things about the returned Windows ACL\&. Firstly it changes the owner and group owner of all reported files and directories to be BUILTIN\\\\Administrators, BUILTIN\\\\Users respectively (SIDs S-1-5-32-544, S-1-5-32-545)\&. Second [...]
-
-
-Note that if you have multiple users logging on to a workstation then in order to prevent them from being able to access each others profiles you must remove the "Bypass traverse checking" advanced user right\&. This will prevent access to other users profile directories as the top level profile directory (named after the user) is created by the workstation profile code and has an ACL restricting entry to the directory tree to the owning user\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBprofile acls = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-protocol (G)
-Synonym for \fImax protocol\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-public (S)
-Synonym for \fIguest ok\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-queuepause command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to pause the printer queue\&.
-
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and stops the printer queue, such that no longer jobs are submitted to the printer\&.
-
-
-This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT\&.
-
-
-If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&.
-
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting\fR\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBqueuepause command = disable %p\fR
-
-
-.TP
-queueresume command (S)
-This parameter specifies the command to be executed on the server host in order to resume the printer queue\&. It is the command to undo the behavior that is caused by the previous parameter (\fI queuepause command\fR)\&.
-
-
-This command should be a program or script which takes a printer name as its only parameter and resumes the printer queue, such that queued jobs are resubmitted to the printer\&.
-
-
-This command is not supported by Windows for Workgroups, but can be issued from the Printers window under Windows 95 and NT\&.
-
-
-If a \fI%p\fR is given then the printer name is put in its place\&. Otherwise it is placed at the end of the command\&.
-
-
-Note that it is good practice to include the absolute path in the command as the PATH may not be available to the server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBdepends on the setting of \fIprinting\fR\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBqueuepause command = enable %p\fR
-
-
-.TP
-read bmpx (G)
-This boolean parameter controls whether \fBsmbd\fR(8) will support the "Read Block Multiplex" SMB\&. This is now rarely used and defaults to \fBno\fR\&. You should never need to set this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBread bmpx = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-read list (S)
-This is a list of users that are given read-only access to a service\&. If the connecting user is in this list then they will not be given write access, no matter what the \fIread only\fR option is set to\&. The list can include group names using the syntax described in the \fI invalid users\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-See also the \fI write list\fR parameter and the \fIinvalid users\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBread list = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBread list = mary, @students\fR
-
-
-.TP
-read only (S)
-An inverted synonym is \fIwriteable\fR\&.
-
-
-If this parameter is \fByes\fR, then users of a service may not create or modify files in the service's directory\&.
-
-
-Note that a printable service (\fBprintable = yes\fR) will \fBALWAYS\fR allow writing to the directory (user privileges permitting), but only via spooling operations\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBread only = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-read raw (G)
-This parameter controls whether or not the server will support the raw read SMB requests when transferring data to clients\&.
-
-
-If enabled, raw reads allow reads of 65535 bytes in one packet\&. This typically provides a major performance benefit\&.
-
-
-However, some clients either negotiate the allowable block size incorrectly or are incapable of supporting larger block sizes, and for these clients you may need to disable raw reads\&.
-
-
-In general this parameter should be viewed as a system tuning tool and left severely alone\&. See also \fIwrite raw\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBread raw = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-read size (G)
-The option \fIread size\fR affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with network reads/writes\&. If the amount of data being transferred in several of the SMB commands (currently SMBwrite, SMBwriteX and SMBreadbraw) is larger than this value then the server begins writing the data before it has received the whole packet from the network, or in the case of SMBreadbraw, it begins writing to the network before all the data has been read from disk\&.
-
-
-This overlapping works best when the speeds of disk and network access are similar, having very little effect when the speed of one is much greater than the other\&.
-
-
-The default value is 16384, but very little experimentation has been done yet to determine the optimal value, and it is likely that the best value will vary greatly between systems anyway\&. A value over 65536 is pointless and will cause you to allocate memory unnecessarily\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBread size = 16384\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBread size = 8192\fR
-
-
-.TP
-realm (G)
-This option specifies the kerberos realm to use\&. The realm is used as the ADS equivalent of the NT4 \fBdomain\fR\&. It is usually set to the DNS name of the kerberos server\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBrealm = \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBrealm = mysambabox.mycompany.com\fR
-
-
-.TP
-remote announce (G)
-This option allows you to setup \fBnmbd\fR(8)to periodically announce itself to arbitrary IP addresses with an arbitrary workgroup name\&.
-
-
-This is useful if you want your Samba server to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don't work\&. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP packets to\&.
-
-
-For example:
-
-
-\fBremote announce = 192.168.2.255/SERVERS 192.168.4.255/STAFF\fR
-
-
-the above line would cause \fBnmbd\fR to announce itself to the two given IP addresses using the given workgroup names\&. If you leave out the workgroup name then the one given in the \fIworkgroup\fR parameter is used instead\&.
-
-
-The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network config is that stable\&.
-
-
-See ???\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBremote announce = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-.TP
-remote browse sync (G)
-This option allows you to setup \fBnmbd\fR(8) to periodically request synchronization of browse lists with the master browser of a Samba server that is on a remote segment\&. This option will allow you to gain browse lists for multiple workgroups across routed networks\&. This is done in a manner that does not work with any non-Samba servers\&.
-
-
-This is useful if you want your Samba server and all local clients to appear in a remote workgroup for which the normal browse propagation rules don't work\&. The remote workgroup can be anywhere that you can send IP packets to\&.
-
-
-For example:
-
-
-\fBremote browse sync = 192.168.2.255 192.168.4.255\fR
-
-
-the above line would cause \fBnmbd\fR to request the master browser on the specified subnets or addresses to synchronize their browse lists with the local server\&.
-
-
-The IP addresses you choose would normally be the broadcast addresses of the remote networks, but can also be the IP addresses of known browse masters if your network config is that stable\&. If a machine IP address is given Samba makes NO attempt to validate that the remote machine is available, is listening, nor that it is in fact the browse master on its segment\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBremote browse sync = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-.TP
-restrict anonymous (G)
-The setting of this parameter determines whether user and group list information is returned for an anonymous connection\&. and mirrors the effects of the \fBHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\Control\\LSA\\RestrictAnonymous\fR registry key in Windows 2000 and Windows NT\&. When set to 0, user and group list information is returned to anyone who asks\&. When set to 1, only an authenticated user can retrive user and group list information\&. For the value 2, supported by Windo [...]
-
-
-The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 1 is dubious, as user and group list information can be obtained using other means\&.
-
-
-The security advantage of using restrict anonymous = 2 is removed by setting \fIguest ok\fR = yes on any share\&.
-
-Default: \fBrestrict anonymous = 0\fR
-
-
-.TP
-root (G)
-Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-root dir (G)
-Synonym for \fIroot directory"\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-root directory (G)
-The server will \fBchroot()\fR (i\&.e\&. Change its root directory) to this directory on startup\&. This is not strictly necessary for secure operation\&. Even without it the server will deny access to files not in one of the service entries\&. It may also check for, and deny access to, soft links to other parts of the filesystem, or attempts to use "\&.\&." in file names to access other directories (depending on the setting of the \fIwide links\fR parameter)\&.
-
-
-Adding a \fIroot directory\fR entry other than "/" adds an extra level of security, but at a price\&. It absolutely ensures that no access is given to files not in the sub-tree specified in the \fIroot directory\fR option, \fBincluding\fR some files needed for complete operation of the server\&. To maintain full operability of the server you will need to mirror some system files into the \fIroot directory\fR tree\&. In particular you will need to mirror \fI/etc/passwd\fR (or a subset of [...]
-
-
-Default: \fBroot directory = /\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBroot directory = /homes/smb\fR
-
-
-.TP
-root postexec (S)
-This is the same as the \fIpostexec\fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for unmounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) after a connection is closed\&.
-
-
-See also \fI postexec\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBroot postexec = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-.TP
-root preexec (S)
-This is the same as the \fIpreexec\fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&. This is useful for mounting filesystems (such as CDROMs) when a connection is opened\&.
-
-
-See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBroot preexec = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-.TP
-root preexec close (S)
-This is the same as the \fIpreexec close \fR parameter except that the command is run as root\&.
-
-
-See also \fI preexec\fR and \fIpreexec close\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBroot preexec close = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-security (G)
-This option affects how clients respond to Samba and is one of the most important settings in the \fI smb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-
-The option sets the "security mode bit" in replies to protocol negotiations with \fBsmbd\fR(8) to turn share level security on or off\&. Clients decide based on this bit whether (and how) to transfer user and password information to the server\&.
-
-
-The default is \fBsecurity = user\fR, as this is the most common setting needed when talking to Windows 98 and Windows NT\&.
-
-
-The alternatives are \fBsecurity = share\fR, \fBsecurity = server\fR or \fBsecurity = domain \fR\&.
-
-
-In versions of Samba prior to 2\&.0\&.0, the default was \fBsecurity = share\fR mainly because that was the only option at one stage\&.
-
-
-There is a bug in WfWg that has relevance to this setting\&. When in user or server level security a WfWg client will totally ignore the password you type in the "connect drive" dialog box\&. This makes it very difficult (if not impossible) to connect to a Samba service as anyone except the user that you are logged into WfWg as\&.
-
-
-If your PCs use usernames that are the same as their usernames on the UNIX machine then you will want to use \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. If you mostly use usernames that don't exist on the UNIX box then use \fBsecurity = share\fR\&.
-
-
-You should also use \fBsecurity = share\fR if you want to mainly setup shares without a password (guest shares)\&. This is commonly used for a shared printer server\&. It is more difficult to setup guest shares with \fBsecurity = user\fR, see the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details\&.
-
-
-It is possible to use \fBsmbd\fR in a \fB hybrid mode\fR where it is offers both user and share level security under different \fINetBIOS aliases\fR\&.
-
-
-The different settings will now be explained\&.
-
-
-\fBSECURITY = SHARE\fR
-
-
-When clients connect to a share level security server they need not log onto the server with a valid username and password before attempting to connect to a shared resource (although modern clients such as Windows 95/98 and Windows NT will send a logon request with a username but no password when talking to a \fBsecurity = share \fR server)\&. Instead, the clients send authentication information (passwords) on a per-share basis, at the time they attempt to connect to that share\&.
-
-
-Note that \fBsmbd\fR \fBALWAYS\fR uses a valid UNIX user to act on behalf of the client, even in \fBsecurity = share\fR level security\&.
-
-
-As clients are not required to send a username to the server in share level security, \fBsmbd\fR uses several techniques to determine the correct UNIX user to use on behalf of the client\&.
-
-
-A list of possible UNIX usernames to match with the given client password is constructed using the following methods :
-
-
-If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is set, then all the other stages are missed and only the \fIguest account\fR username is checked\&.
-
-Is a username is sent with the share connection request, then this username (after mapping - see \fIusername map\fR), is added as a potential username\&.
-
-If the client did a previous \fBlogon \fR request (the SessionSetup SMB call) then the username sent in this SMB will be added as a potential username\&.
-
-The name of the service the client requested is added as a potential username\&.
-
-The NetBIOS name of the client is added to the list as a potential username\&.
-
-Any users on the \fI user\fR list are added as potential usernames\&.
-
-If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is not set, then this list is then tried with the supplied password\&. The first user for whom the password matches will be used as the UNIX user\&.
-
-
-If the \fIguest only\fR parameter is set, or no username can be determined then if the share is marked as available to the \fIguest account\fR, then this guest user will be used, otherwise access is denied\&.
-
-
-Note that it can be \fBvery\fR confusing in share-level security as to which UNIX username will eventually be used in granting access\&.
-
-
-See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
-
-
-\fBSECURITY = USER\fR
-
-
-This is the default security setting in Samba 3\&.0\&. With user-level security a client must first "log-on" with a valid username and password (which can be mapped using the \fIusername map\fR parameter)\&. Encrypted passwords (see the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter) can also be used in this security mode\&. Parameters such as \fIuser\fR and \fIguest only\fR if set are then applied and may change the UNIX user to use on this connection, but only after the user has been successfully [...]
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR\&. See the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details on doing this\&.
-
-
-See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
-
-
-\fBSECURITY = DOMAIN\fR
-
-
-This mode will only work correctly if \fBnet\fR(8) has been used to add this machine into a Windows NT Domain\&. It expects the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter to be set to \fByes\fR\&. In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain Controller, in exactly the same way that a Windows NT Server would do\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that a valid UNIX user must still exist as well as the account on the Domain Controller to allow Samba to have a valid UNIX account to map file access to\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that from the client's point of view \fBsecurity = domain\fR is the same as \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR\&. See the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details on doing this\&.
-
-
-See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIpassword server\fR parameter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-\fBSECURITY = SERVER\fR
-
-
-In this mode Samba will try to validate the username/password by passing it to another SMB server, such as an NT box\&. If this fails it will revert to \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. It expects the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter to be set to \fByes\fR, unless the remote server does not support them\&. However note that if encrypted passwords have been negotiated then Samba cannot revert back to checking the UNIX password file, it must have a valid \fIsmbpasswd\fR file to check users again [...]
-
-
-This mode of operation has significant pitfalls, due to the fact that is activly initiates a man-in-the-middle attack on the remote SMB server\&. In particular, this mode of operation can cause significant resource consuption on the PDC, as it must maintain an active connection for the duration of the user's session\&. Furthermore, if this connection is lost, there is no way to reestablish it, and futher authenticaions to the Samba server may fail\&. (From a single client, till it discon [...]
-
-From the client's point of view \fBsecurity = server\fR is the same as \fBsecurity = user\fR\&. It only affects how the server deals with the authentication, it does not in any way affect what the client sees\&.
-
-\fBNote\fR that the name of the resource being requested is \fBnot\fR sent to the server until after the server has successfully authenticated the client\&. This is why guest shares don't work in user level security without allowing the server to automatically map unknown users into the \fIguest account\fR\&. See the \fImap to guest\fR parameter for details on doing this\&.
-
-
-See also the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIpassword server\fR parameter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-\fBSECURITY = ADS\fR
-
-
-In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an ADS realm\&. To operate in this mode, the machine running Samba will need to have Kerberos installed and configured and Samba will need to be joined to the ADS realm using the net utility\&.
-
-
-Note that this mode does NOT make Samba operate as a Active Directory Domain Controller\&.
-
-
-Read the chapter about Domain Membership in the HOWTO for details\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIads server \fR parameter, the \fIrealm \fR paramter and the \fIencrypted passwords\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsecurity = USER\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBsecurity = DOMAIN\fR
-
-
-.TP
-security mask (S)
-This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits can be modified when a Windows NT client is manipulating the UNIX permission on a file using the native NT security dialog box\&.
-
-
-This parameter is applied as a mask (AND'ed with) to the changed permission bits, thus preventing any bits not in this mask from being modified\&. Essentially, zero bits in this mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is not allowed to change\&.
-
-
-If not set explicitly this parameter is 0777, allowing a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that users who can access the Samba server through other means can easily bypass this restriction, so it is primarily useful for standalone "appliance" systems\&. Administrators of most normal systems will probably want to leave it set to \fB0777\fR\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIforce directory security mode\fR, \fIdirectory security mask\fR, \fIforce security mode\fR parameters\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsecurity mask = 0777\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBsecurity mask = 0770\fR
-
-
-.TP
-server schannel (G)
-This controls whether the server offers or even demands the use of the netlogon schannel\&. \fIserver schannel = no\fR does not offer the schannel, \fIserver schannel = auto\fR offers the schannel but does not enforce it, and \fIserver schannel = yes\fR denies access if the client is not able to speak netlogon schannel\&. This is only the case for Windows NT4 before SP4\&.
-
-
-Please note that with this set to \fIno\fR you will have to apply the WindowsXP requireSignOrSeal-Registry patch found in the docs/Registry subdirectory\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBserver schannel = auto\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBserver schannel = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-server signing (G)
-This controls whether the server offers or requires the client it talks to to use SMB signing\&. Possible values are \fBauto\fR, \fBmandatory\fR and \fBdisabled\fR\&.
-
-
-When set to auto, SMB signing is offered, but not enforced\&. When set to mandatory, SMB signing is required and if set to disabled, SMB signing is not offered either\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBclient signing = False\fR
-
-
-.TP
-server string (G)
-This controls what string will show up in the printer comment box in print manager and next to the IPC connection in \fBnet view\fR\&. It can be any string that you wish to show to your users\&.
-
-
-It also sets what will appear in browse lists next to the machine name\&.
-
-
-A \fI%v\fR will be replaced with the Samba version number\&.
-
-
-A \fI%h\fR will be replaced with the hostname\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBserver string = Samba %v\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBserver string = University of GNUs Samba Server\fR
-
-
-.TP
-set directory (S)
-If \fBset directory = no\fR, then users of the service may not use the setdir command to change directory\&.
-
-
-The \fBsetdir\fR command is only implemented in the Digital Pathworks client\&. See the Pathworks documentation for details\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBset directory = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-set primary group script (G)
-Thanks to the Posix subsystem in NT a Windows User has a primary group in addition to the auxiliary groups\&. This script sets the primary group in the unix userdatase when an administrator sets the primary group from the windows user manager or when fetching a SAM with \fBnet rpc vampire\fR\&. \fI%u\fR will be replaced with the user whose primary group is to be set\&. \fI%g\fR will be replaced with the group to set\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBNo default value\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBset primary group script = /usr/sbin/usermod -g '%g' '%u'\fR
-
-
-.TP
-set quota command (G)
-The \fBset quota command\fR should only be used whenever there is no operating system API available from the OS that samba can use\&.
-
-
-This parameter should specify the path to a script that can set quota for the specified arguments\&.
-
-
-The specified script should take the following arguments:
-
-
-1 - quota type .TP 3 \(bu 1 - user quotas .TP \(bu 2 - user default quotas (uid = -1) .TP \(bu 3 - group quotas .TP \(bu 4 - group default quotas (gid = -1) .LP
-
-2 - id (uid for user, gid for group, -1 if N/A)
-
-3 - quota state (0 = disable, 1 = enable, 2 = enable and enforce)
-
-4 - block softlimit
-
-5 - block hardlimit
-
-6 - inode softlimit
-
-7 - inode hardlimit
-
-8(optional) - block size, defaults to 1024
-
-The script should output at least one line of data\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIget quota command\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBset quota command = \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBset quota command = /usr/local/sbin/set_quota\fR
-
-
-.TP
-share modes (S)
-This enables or disables the honoring of the \fIshare modes\fR during a file open\&. These modes are used by clients to gain exclusive read or write access to a file\&.
-
-
-These open modes are not directly supported by UNIX, so they are simulated using shared memory, or lock files if your UNIX doesn't support shared memory (almost all do)\&.
-
-
-The share modes that are enabled by this option are \fBDENY_DOS\fR, \fBDENY_ALL\fR, \fBDENY_READ\fR, \fBDENY_WRITE\fR, \fBDENY_NONE\fR and \fBDENY_FCB\fR\&.
-
-
-This option gives full share compatibility and enabled by default\&.
-
-
-You should \fBNEVER\fR turn this parameter off as many Windows applications will break if you do so\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBshare modes = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-short preserve case (S)
-This boolean parameter controls if new files which conform to 8\&.3 syntax, that is all in upper case and of suitable length, are created upper case, or if they are forced to be the \fIdefault case \fR\&. This option can be use with \fBpreserve case = yes\fR to permit long filenames to retain their case, while short names are lowered\&.
-
-
-See the section on NAME MANGLING\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBshort preserve case = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-show add printer wizard (G)
-With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2\&.2, a "Printers\&.\&.\&." folder will appear on Samba hosts in the share listing\&. Normally this folder will contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW)\&. However, it is possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege of the connected user\&.
-
-
-Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for Administrator privileges\&. If the user does not have administrative access on the print server (i\&.e is not root or a member of the \fIprinter admin\fR group), the OpenPrinterEx() call fails and the client makes another open call with a request for a lower privilege level\&. This should succeed, however the APW icon will not be displayed\&.
-
-
-Disabling the \fIshow add printer wizard\fR parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server to fail\&. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed\&. \fB Note :\fRThis does not prevent the same user from having administrative privilege on an individual printer\&.
-
-
-See also \fIaddprinter command\fR, \fIdeleteprinter command\fR, \fIprinter admin\fR
-
-
-Default :\fBshow add printer wizard = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-shutdown script (G)
-\fBThis parameter only exists in the HEAD cvs branch\fR This a full path name to a script called by \fBsmbd\fR(8) that should start a shutdown procedure\&.
-
-
-This command will be run as the user connected to the server\&.
-
-
-%m %t %r %f parameters are expanded:
-
-
-\fI%m\fR will be substituted with the shutdown message sent to the server\&.
-
-\fI%t\fR will be substituted with the number of seconds to wait before effectively starting the shutdown procedure\&.
-
-\fI%r\fR will be substituted with the switch \fB-r\fR\&. It means reboot after shutdown for NT\&.
-
-\fI%f\fR will be substituted with the switch \fB-f\fR\&. It means force the shutdown even if applications do not respond for NT\&.
-
-Default: \fBNone\fR\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBshutdown script = /usr/local/samba/sbin/shutdown %m %t %r %f\fR
-
-
-Shutdown script example:
-.nf
-
-#!/bin/bash
-
-$time=0
-let "time/60"
-let "time++"
-
-/sbin/shutdown $3 $4 +$time $1 &
-.fi
-
-Shutdown does not return so we need to launch it in background\&.
-
-
-See also \fIabort shutdown script\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-smb passwd file (G)
-This option sets the path to the encrypted smbpasswd file\&. By default the path to the smbpasswd file is compiled into Samba\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsmb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBsmb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd\fR
-
-
-.TP
-smb ports (G)
-Specifies which ports the server should listen on for SMB traffic\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsmb ports = 445 139\fR
-
-
-.TP
-socket address (G)
-This option allows you to control what address Samba will listen for connections on\&. This is used to support multiple virtual interfaces on the one server, each with a different configuration\&.
-
-
-By default Samba will accept connections on any address\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBsocket address = 192.168.2.20\fR
-
-
-.TP
-socket options (G)
-This option allows you to set socket options to be used when talking with the client\&.
-
-
-Socket options are controls on the networking layer of the operating systems which allow the connection to be tuned\&.
-
-
-This option will typically be used to tune your Samba server for optimal performance for your local network\&. There is no way that Samba can know what the optimal parameters are for your net, so you must experiment and choose them yourself\&. We strongly suggest you read the appropriate documentation for your operating system first (perhaps \fBman setsockopt\fR will help)\&.
-
-
-You may find that on some systems Samba will say "Unknown socket option" when you supply an option\&. This means you either incorrectly typed it or you need to add an include file to includes\&.h for your OS\&. If the latter is the case please send the patch to samba-technical at samba\&.org\&.
-
-
-Any of the supported socket options may be combined in any way you like, as long as your OS allows it\&.
-
-
-This is the list of socket options currently settable using this option:
-
-
-SO_KEEPALIVE
-
-SO_REUSEADDR
-
-SO_BROADCAST
-
-TCP_NODELAY
-
-IPTOS_LOWDELAY
-
-IPTOS_THROUGHPUT
-
-SO_SNDBUF *
-
-SO_RCVBUF *
-
-SO_SNDLOWAT *
-
-SO_RCVLOWAT *
-
-Those marked with a \fB'*'\fR take an integer argument\&. The others can optionally take a 1 or 0 argument to enable or disable the option, by default they will be enabled if you don't specify 1 or 0\&.
-
-
-To specify an argument use the syntax SOME_OPTION = VALUE for example \fBSO_SNDBUF = 8192\fR\&. Note that you must not have any spaces before or after the = sign\&.
-
-
-If you are on a local network then a sensible option might be:
-
-
-\fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY\fR
-
-
-If you have a local network then you could try:
-
-
-\fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY TCP_NODELAY\fR
-
-
-If you are on a wide area network then perhaps try setting IPTOS_THROUGHPUT\&.
-
-
-Note that several of the options may cause your Samba server to fail completely\&. Use these options with caution!
-
-
-Default: \fBsocket options = TCP_NODELAY\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBsocket options = IPTOS_LOWDELAY\fR
-
-
-.TP
-source environment (G)
-This parameter causes Samba to set environment variables as per the content of the file named\&.
-
-
-If the value of this parameter starts with a "|" character then Samba will treat that value as a pipe command to open and will set the environment variables from the output of the pipe\&.
-
-
-The contents of the file or the output of the pipe should be formatted as the output of the standard Unix \fBenv(1)\fR command\&. This is of the form:
-
-
-Example environment entry:
-
-
-\fBSAMBA_NETBIOS_NAME = myhostname\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBNo default value\fR
-
-
-Examples: \fBsource environment = |/etc/smb.conf.sh\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBsource environment = /usr/local/smb_env_vars\fR
-
-
-.TP
-stat cache (G)
-This parameter determines if \fBsmbd\fR(8) will use a cache in order to speed up case insensitive name mappings\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBstat cache = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-strict allocate (S)
-This is a boolean that controls the handling of disk space allocation in the server\&. When this is set to \fByes\fR the server will change from UNIX behaviour of not committing real disk storage blocks when a file is extended to the Windows behaviour of actually forcing the disk system to allocate real storage blocks when a file is created or extended to be a given size\&. In UNIX terminology this means that Samba will stop creating sparse files\&. This can be slow on some systems\&.
-
-
-When strict allocate is \fBno\fR the server does sparse disk block allocation when a file is extended\&.
-
-
-Setting this to \fByes\fR can help Samba return out of quota messages on systems that are restricting the disk quota of users\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBstrict allocate = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-strict locking (S)
-This is a boolean that controls the handling of file locking in the server\&. When this is set to \fByes\fR, the server will check every read and write access for file locks, and deny access if locks exist\&. This can be slow on some systems\&.
-
-
-When strict locking is disabled, the server performs file lock checks only when the client explicitly asks for them\&.
-
-
-Well-behaved clients always ask for lock checks when it is important\&. So in the vast majority of cases, \fBstrict locking = no\fR is preferable\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBstrict locking = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-strict sync (S)
-Many Windows applications (including the Windows 98 explorer shell) seem to confuse flushing buffer contents to disk with doing a sync to disk\&. Under UNIX, a sync call forces the process to be suspended until the kernel has ensured that all outstanding data in kernel disk buffers has been safely stored onto stable storage\&. This is very slow and should only be done rarely\&. Setting this parameter to \fBno\fR (the default) means that \fBsmbd\fR(8) ignores the Windows applications requ [...]
-
-
-See also the \fIsync always\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBstrict sync = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-sync always (S)
-This is a boolean parameter that controls whether writes will always be written to stable storage before the write call returns\&. If this is \fBno\fR then the server will be guided by the client's request in each write call (clients can set a bit indicating that a particular write should be synchronous)\&. If this is \fByes\fR then every write will be followed by a \fBfsync() \fR call to ensure the data is written to disk\&. Note that the \fIstrict sync\fR parameter must be set to \fBye [...]
-
-
-See also the \fIstrict sync\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsync always = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-syslog (G)
-This parameter maps how Samba debug messages are logged onto the system syslog logging levels\&. Samba debug level zero maps onto syslog \fBLOG_ERR\fR, debug level one maps onto \fBLOG_WARNING\fR, debug level two maps onto \fBLOG_NOTICE\fR, debug level three maps onto LOG_INFO\&. All higher levels are mapped to \fB LOG_DEBUG\fR\&.
-
-
-This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages to syslog\&. Only messages with debug level less than this value will be sent to syslog\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsyslog = 1\fR
-
-
-.TP
-syslog only (G)
-If this parameter is set then Samba debug messages are logged into the system syslog only, and not to the debug log files\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBsyslog only = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-template homedir (G)
-When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon uses this parameter to fill in the home directory for that user\&. If the string \fI%D\fR is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT domain name\&. If the string \fI%U\fR is present it is substituted with the user's Windows NT user name\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBtemplate homedir = /home/%D/%U\fR
-
-
-.TP
-template primary group (G)
-This option defines the default primary group for each user created by \fBwinbindd\fR(8)'s local account management functions (similar to the 'add user script')\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBtemplate primary group = nobody\fR
-
-
-.TP
-template shell (G)
-When filling out the user information for a Windows NT user, the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon uses this parameter to fill in the login shell for that user\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBtemplate shell = /bin/false\fR
-
-
-.TP
-time offset (G)
-This parameter is a setting in minutes to add to the normal GMT to local time conversion\&. This is useful if you are serving a lot of PCs that have incorrect daylight saving time handling\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBtime offset = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBtime offset = 60\fR
-
-
-.TP
-time server (G)
-This parameter determines if \fBnmbd\fR(8) advertises itself as a time server to Windows clients\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBtime server = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-timestamp logs (G)
-Synonym for \fI debug timestamp\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-unicode (G)
-Specifies whether Samba should try to use unicode on the wire by default\&. Note: This does NOT mean that samba will assume that the unix machine uses unicode!
-
-
-Default: \fBunicode = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-unix charset (G)
-Specifies the charset the unix machine Samba runs on uses\&. Samba needs to know this in order to be able to convert text to the charsets other SMB clients use\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBunix charset = UTF8\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBunix charset = ASCII\fR
-
-
-.TP
-unix extensions (G)
-This boolean parameter controls whether Samba implments the CIFS UNIX extensions, as defined by HP\&. These extensions enable Samba to better serve UNIX CIFS clients by supporting features such as symbolic links, hard links, etc\&.\&.\&. These extensions require a similarly enabled client, and are of no current use to Windows clients\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBunix extensions = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-unix password sync (G)
-This boolean parameter controls whether Samba attempts to synchronize the UNIX password with the SMB password when the encrypted SMB password in the smbpasswd file is changed\&. If this is set to \fByes\fR the program specified in the \fIpasswd program\fRparameter is called \fBAS ROOT\fR - to allow the new UNIX password to be set without access to the old UNIX password (as the SMB password change code has no access to the old password cleartext, only the new)\&.
-
-
-See also \fIpasswd program\fR, \fI passwd chat\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBunix password sync = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-update encrypted (G)
-This boolean parameter allows a user logging on with a plaintext password to have their encrypted (hashed) password in the smbpasswd file to be updated automatically as they log on\&. This option allows a site to migrate from plaintext password authentication (users authenticate with plaintext password over the wire, and are checked against a UNIX account database) to encrypted password authentication (the SMB challenge/response authentication mechanism) without forcing all users to re-e [...]
-
-
-In order for this parameter to work correctly the \fIencrypt passwords\fR parameter must be set to \fBno\fR when this parameter is set to \fByes\fR\&.
-
-
-Note that even when this parameter is set a user authenticating to \fBsmbd\fR must still enter a valid password in order to connect correctly, and to update their hashed (smbpasswd) passwords\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBupdate encrypted = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-use client driver (S)
-This parameter applies only to Windows NT/2000 clients\&. It has no effect on Windows 95/98/ME clients\&. When serving a printer to Windows NT/2000 clients without first installing a valid printer driver on the Samba host, the client will be required to install a local printer driver\&. From this point on, the client will treat the print as a local printer and not a network printer connection\&. This is much the same behavior that will occur when \fBdisable spoolss = yes\fR\&.
-
-
-The differentiating factor is that under normal circumstances, the NT/2000 client will attempt to open the network printer using MS-RPC\&. The problem is that because the client considers the printer to be local, it will attempt to issue the OpenPrinterEx() call requesting access rights associated with the logged on user\&. If the user possesses local administator rights but not root privilegde on the Samba host (often the case), the OpenPrinterEx() call will fail\&. The result is that t [...]
-
-
-If this parameter is enabled for a printer, then any attempt to open the printer with the PRINTER_ACCESS_ADMINISTER right is mapped to PRINTER_ACCESS_USE instead\&. Thus allowing the OpenPrinterEx() call to succeed\&. \fBThis parameter MUST not be able enabled on a print share which has valid print driver installed on the Samba server\&.\fR
-
-
-See also \fIdisable spoolss\fR
-
-
-Default: \fBuse client driver = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-use mmap (G)
-This global parameter determines if the tdb internals of Samba can depend on mmap working correctly on the running system\&. Samba requires a coherent mmap/read-write system memory cache\&. Currently only HPUX does not have such a coherent cache, and so this parameter is set to \fBno\fR by default on HPUX\&. On all other systems this parameter should be left alone\&. This parameter is provided to help the Samba developers track down problems with the tdb internal code\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBuse mmap = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-user (S)
-Synonym for \fIusername\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-username (S)
-Multiple users may be specified in a comma-delimited list, in which case the supplied password will be tested against each username in turn (left to right)\&.
-
-
-The \fIusername\fR line is needed only when the PC is unable to supply its own username\&. This is the case for the COREPLUS protocol or where your users have different WfWg usernames to UNIX usernames\&. In both these cases you may also be better using the \\\\server\\share%user syntax instead\&.
-
-
-The \fIusername\fR line is not a great solution in many cases as it means Samba will try to validate the supplied password against each of the usernames in the \fIusername\fR line in turn\&. This is slow and a bad idea for lots of users in case of duplicate passwords\&. You may get timeouts or security breaches using this parameter unwisely\&.
-
-
-Samba relies on the underlying UNIX security\&. This parameter does not restrict who can login, it just offers hints to the Samba server as to what usernames might correspond to the supplied password\&. Users can login as whoever they please and they will be able to do no more damage than if they started a telnet session\&. The daemon runs as the user that they log in as, so they cannot do anything that user cannot do\&.
-
-
-To restrict a service to a particular set of users you can use the \fIvalid users \fR parameter\&.
-
-
-If any of the usernames begin with a '@' then the name will be looked up first in the NIS netgroups list (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support), followed by a lookup in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
-
-
-If any of the usernames begin with a '+' then the name will be looked up only in the UNIX groups database and will expand to a list of all users in the group of that name\&.
-
-
-If any of the usernames begin with a '&' then the name will be looked up only in the NIS netgroups database (if Samba is compiled with netgroup support) and will expand to a list of all users in the netgroup group of that name\&.
-
-
-Note that searching though a groups database can take quite some time, and some clients may time out during the search\&.
-
-
-See the section NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION for more information on how this parameter determines access to the services\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBThe guest account if a guest service, else <empty string>.\fR
-
-
-Examples:\fBusername = fred, mary, jack, jane, @users, @pcgroup\fR
-
-
-.TP
-username level (G)
-This option helps Samba to try and 'guess' at the real UNIX username, as many DOS clients send an all-uppercase username\&. By default Samba tries all lowercase, followed by the username with the first letter capitalized, and fails if the username is not found on the UNIX machine\&.
-
-
-If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes\&. This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name\&. The higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower the discovery of usernames will be\&. Use this parameter when you have strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as \fBAstrangeUser \fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBusername level = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBusername level = 5\fR
-
-
-.TP
-username map (G)
-This option allows you to specify a file containing a mapping of usernames from the clients to the server\&. This can be used for several purposes\&. The most common is to map usernames that users use on DOS or Windows machines to those that the UNIX box uses\&. The other is to map multiple users to a single username so that they can more easily share files\&.
-
-
-The map file is parsed line by line\&. Each line should contain a single UNIX username on the left then a '=' followed by a list of usernames on the right\&. The list of usernames on the right may contain names of the form @group in which case they will match any UNIX username in that group\&. The special client name '*' is a wildcard and matches any name\&. Each line of the map file may be up to 1023 characters long\&.
-
-
-The file is processed on each line by taking the supplied username and comparing it with each username on the right hand side of the '=' signs\&. If the supplied name matches any of the names on the right hand side then it is replaced with the name on the left\&. Processing then continues with the next line\&.
-
-
-If any line begins with a '#' or a ';' then it is ignored
-
-
-If any line begins with an '!' then the processing will stop after that line if a mapping was done by the line\&. Otherwise mapping continues with every line being processed\&. Using '!' is most useful when you have a wildcard mapping line later in the file\&.
-
-
-For example to map from the name \fBadmin\fR or \fBadministrator\fR to the UNIX name \fB root\fR you would use:
-
-
-\fBroot = admin administrator\fR
-
-
-Or to map anyone in the UNIX group \fBsystem\fR to the UNIX name \fBsys\fR you would use:
-
-
-\fBsys = @system\fR
-
-
-You can have as many mappings as you like in a username map file\&.
-
-
-If your system supports the NIS NETGROUP option then the netgroup database is checked before the \fI/etc/group \fR database for matching groups\&.
-
-
-You can map Windows usernames that have spaces in them by using double quotes around the name\&. For example:
-
-
-\fBtridge = "Andrew Tridgell"\fR
-
-
-would map the windows username "Andrew Tridgell" to the unix username "tridge"\&.
-
-
-The following example would map mary and fred to the unix user sys, and map the rest to guest\&. Note the use of the '!' to tell Samba to stop processing if it gets a match on that line\&.
-
-
-.nf
-
-!sys = mary fred
-guest = *
-.fi
-
-
-Note that the remapping is applied to all occurrences of usernames\&. Thus if you connect to \\\\server\\fred and \fB fred\fR is remapped to \fBmary\fR then you will actually be connecting to \\\\server\\mary and will need to supply a password suitable for \fBmary\fR not \fBfred\fR\&. The only exception to this is the username passed to the \fI password server\fR (if you have one)\&. The password server will receive whatever username the client supplies without modification\&.
-
-
-Also note that no reverse mapping is done\&. The main effect this has is with printing\&. Users who have been mapped may have trouble deleting print jobs as PrintManager under WfWg will think they don't own the print job\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno username map\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBusername map = /usr/local/samba/lib/users.map\fR
-
-
-.TP
-users (S)
-Synonym for \fI username\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-use sendfile (S)
-If this parameter is \fByes\fR, and Samba was built with the --with-sendfile-support option, and the underlying operating system supports sendfile system call, then some SMB read calls (mainly ReadAndX and ReadRaw) will use the more efficient sendfile system call for files that are exclusively oplocked\&. This may make more efficient use of the system CPU's and cause Samba to be faster\&. This is off by default as it's effects are unknown as yet\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBuse sendfile = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-use spnego (G)
-This variable controls controls whether samba will try to use Simple and Protected NEGOciation (as specified by rfc2478) with WindowsXP and Windows2000 clients to agree upon an authentication mechanism\&. Unless further issues are discovered with our SPNEGO implementation, there is no reason this should ever be disabled\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBuse spnego = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-utmp (G)
-This boolean parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. If set to \fByes\fR then Samba will attempt to add utmp or utmpx records (depending on the UNIX system) whenever a connection is made to a Samba server\&. Sites may use this to record the user connecting to a Samba share\&.
-
-
-Due to the requirements of the utmp record, we are required to create a unique identifier for the incoming user\&. Enabling this option creates an n^2 algorithm to find this number\&. This may impede performance on large installations\&.
-
-
-See also the \fI utmp directory\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fButmp = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-utmp directory (G)
-This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the utmp or utmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server\&. See also the \fIutmp\fR parameter\&. By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the native system is set to use (usually \fI/var/run/utmp\fR on Linux)\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno utmp directory\fR
-
-
-Example: \fButmp directory = /var/run/utmp\fR
-
-
-.TP
--valid (S)
-This parameter indicates whether a share is valid and thus can be used\&. When this parameter is set to false, the share will be in no way visible nor accessible\&.
-
-
-This option should not be used by regular users but might be of help to developers\&. Samba uses this option internally to mark shares as deleted\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBTrue\fR
-
-
-.TP
-valid users (S)
-This is a list of users that should be allowed to login to this service\&. Names starting with '@', '+' and '&' are interpreted using the same rules as described in the \fIinvalid users\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-If this is empty (the default) then any user can login\&. If a username is in both this list and the \fIinvalid users\fR list then access is denied for that user\&.
-
-
-The current servicename is substituted for \fI%S \fR\&. This is useful in the [homes] section\&.
-
-
-See also \fIinvalid users \fR
-
-
-Default: \fBNo valid users list (anyone can login) \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBvalid users = greg, @pcusers\fR
-
-
-.TP
-veto files (S)
-This is a list of files and directories that are neither visible nor accessible\&. Each entry in the list must be separated by a '/', which allows spaces to be included in the entry\&. '*' and '?' can be used to specify multiple files or directories as in DOS wildcards\&.
-
-
-Each entry must be a unix path, not a DOS path and must \fBnot\fR include the unix directory separator '/'\&.
-
-
-Note that the \fIcase sensitive\fR option is applicable in vetoing files\&.
-
-
-One feature of the veto files parameter that it is important to be aware of is Samba's behaviour when trying to delete a directory\&. If a directory that is to be deleted contains nothing but veto files this deletion will \fBfail\fR unless you also set the \fIdelete veto files\fR parameter to \fIyes\fR\&.
-
-
-Setting this parameter will affect the performance of Samba, as it will be forced to check all files and directories for a match as they are scanned\&.
-
-
-See also \fIhide files \fR and \fI case sensitive\fR\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBNo files or directories are vetoed\&. \fR
-
-
-Examples:
-.nf
-
-; Veto any files containing the word Security,
-; any ending in \&.tmp, and any directory containing the
-; word root\&.
-veto files = /*Security*/*\&.tmp/*root*/
-
-; Veto the Apple specific files that a NetAtalk server
-; creates\&.
-veto files = /\&.AppleDouble/\&.bin/\&.AppleDesktop/Network Trash Folder/
-.fi
-
-
-.TP
-veto oplock files (S)
-This parameter is only valid when the \fIoplocks\fR parameter is turned on for a share\&. It allows the Samba administrator to selectively turn off the granting of oplocks on selected files that match a wildcarded list, similar to the wildcarded list used in the \fIveto files\fR parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBNo files are vetoed for oplock grants\fR
-
-
-You might want to do this on files that you know will be heavily contended for by clients\&. A good example of this is in the NetBench SMB benchmark program, which causes heavy client contention for files ending in \fI\&.SEM\fR\&. To cause Samba not to grant oplocks on these files you would use the line (either in the [global] section or in the section for the particular NetBench share :
-
-
-Example: \fBveto oplock files = /*.SEM/\fR
-
-
-.TP
-vfs object (S)
-Synonym for \fIvfs objects\fR \&.
-
-
-.TP
-vfs objects (S)
-This parameter specifies the backend names which are used for Samba VFS I/O operations\&. By default, normal disk I/O operations are used but these can be overloaded with one or more VFS objects\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno value\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBvfs objects = extd_audit recycle\fR
-
-
-.TP
-volume (S)
-This allows you to override the volume label returned for a share\&. Useful for CDROMs with installation programs that insist on a particular volume label\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBthe name of the share\fR
-
-
-.TP
-wide links (S)
-This parameter controls whether or not links in the UNIX file system may be followed by the server\&. Links that point to areas within the directory tree exported by the server are always allowed; this parameter controls access only to areas that are outside the directory tree being exported\&.
-
-
-Note that setting this parameter can have a negative effect on your server performance due to the extra system calls that Samba has to do in order to perform the link checks\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwide links = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind cache time (G)
-This parameter specifies the number of seconds the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon will cache user and group information before querying a Windows NT server again\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind cache type = 300\fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind enable local accounts (G)
-This parameter controls whether or not winbindd will act as a stand in replacement for the various account management hooks in smb\&.conf (e\&.g\&. 'add user script')\&. If enabled, winbindd will support the creation of local users and groups as another source of UNIX account information available via getpwnam() or getgrgid(), etc\&.\&.\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind enable local accounts = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind enum groups (G)
-On large installations using \fBwinbindd\fR(8) it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of groups through the \fBsetgrent()\fR, \fBgetgrent()\fR and \fBendgrent()\fR group of system calls\&. If the \fIwinbind enum groups\fR parameter is \fBno\fR, calls to the \fBgetgrent()\fR system call will not return any data\&.
-
-
-\fBWarning:\fR Turning off group enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind enum groups = yes \fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind enum users (G)
-On large installations using \fBwinbindd\fR(8) it may be necessary to suppress the enumeration of users through the \fBsetpwent()\fR, \fBgetpwent()\fR and \fBendpwent()\fR group of system calls\&. If the \fIwinbind enum users\fR parameter is \fBno\fR, calls to the \fBgetpwent\fR system call will not return any data\&.
-
-
-\fBWarning:\fR Turning off user enumeration may cause some programs to behave oddly\&. For example, the finger program relies on having access to the full user list when searching for matching usernames\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind enum users = yes \fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind gid (G)
-This parameter is now an alias for \fBidmap gid\fR
-
-
-The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group ids that are allocated by the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon\&. This range of group ids should have no existing local or NIS groups within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind gid = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwinbind gid = 10000-20000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind separator (G)
-This parameter allows an admin to define the character used when listing a username of the form of \fIDOMAIN \fR\\\fIuser\fR\&. This parameter is only applicable when using the \fIpam_winbind\&.so\fR and \fInss_winbind\&.so\fR modules for UNIX services\&.
-
-
-Please note that setting this parameter to + causes problems with group membership at least on glibc systems, as the character + is used as a special character for NIS in /etc/group\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind separator = '\'\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwinbind separator = +\fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind trusted domains only (G)
-This parameter is designed to allow Samba servers that are members of a Samba controlled domain to use UNIX accounts distributed vi NIS, rsync, or LDAP as the uid's for winbindd users in the hosts primary domain\&. Therefore, the user 'SAMBA\\user1' would be mapped to the account 'user1' in /etc/passwd instead of allocating a new uid for him or her\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind trusted domains only = <no>\fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind uid (G)
-This parameter is now an alias for \fBidmap uid\fR
-
-
-The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of user ids that are allocated by the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon\&. This range of ids should have no existing local or NIS users within it as strange conflicts can occur otherwise\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind uid = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwinbind uid = 10000-20000\fR
-
-
-.TP
-winbind use default domain (G)
-This parameter specifies whether the \fBwinbindd\fR(8) daemon should operate on users without domain component in their username\&. Users without a domain component are treated as is part of the winbindd server's own domain\&. While this does not benifit Windows users, it makes SSH, FTP and e-mail function in a way much closer to the way they would in a native unix system\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwinbind use default domain = <no>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwinbind use default domain = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-wins hook (G)
-When Samba is running as a WINS server this allows you to call an external program for all changes to the WINS database\&. The primary use for this option is to allow the dynamic update of external name resolution databases such as dynamic DNS\&.
-
-
-The wins hook parameter specifies the name of a script or executable that will be called as follows:
-
-
-\fBwins_hook operation name nametype ttl IP_list\fR
-
-
-The first argument is the operation and is one of "add", "delete", or "refresh"\&. In most cases the operation can be ignored as the rest of the parameters provide sufficient information\&. Note that "refresh" may sometimes be called when the name has not previously been added, in that case it should be treated as an add\&.
-
-The second argument is the NetBIOS name\&. If the name is not a legal name then the wins hook is not called\&. Legal names contain only letters, digits, hyphens, underscores and periods\&.
-
-The third argument is the NetBIOS name type as a 2 digit hexadecimal number\&.
-
-The fourth argument is the TTL (time to live) for the name in seconds\&.
-
-The fifth and subsequent arguments are the IP addresses currently registered for that name\&. If this list is empty then the name should be deleted\&.
-
-An example script that calls the BIND dynamic DNS update program \fBnsupdate\fR is provided in the examples directory of the Samba source code\&.
-
-
-.TP
-wins partners (G)
-A space separated list of partners' IP addresses for WINS replication\&. WINS partners are always defined as push/pull partners as defining only one way WINS replication is unreliable\&. WINS replication is currently experimental and unreliable between samba servers\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwins partners = \fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwins partners = 192.168.0.1 172.16.1.2\fR
-
-
-.TP
-wins proxy (G)
-This is a boolean that controls if \fBnmbd\fR(8) will respond to broadcast name queries on behalf of other hosts\&. You may need to set this to \fByes\fR for some older clients\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwins proxy = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-wins server (G)
-This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP address for preference) of the WINS server that \fBnmbd\fR(8) should register with\&. If you have a WINS server on your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP\&.
-
-
-You should point this at your WINS server if you have a multi-subnetted network\&.
-
-
-If you want to work in multiple namespaces, you can give every wins server a 'tag'\&. For each tag, only one (working) server will be queried for a name\&. The tag should be seperated from the ip address by a colon\&.
-
-
-You need to set up Samba to point to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet browsing to work correctly\&.
-
-See the ???\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBnot enabled\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwins server = mary:192.9.200.1 fred:192.168.3.199 mary:192.168.2.61\fR
-
-
-For this example when querying a certain name, 192\&.19\&.200\&.1 will be asked first and if that doesn't respond 192\&.168\&.2\&.61\&. If either of those doesn't know the name 192\&.168\&.3\&.199 will be queried\&.
-
-
-Example: \fBwins server = 192.9.200.1 192.168.2.61\fR
-
-
-.TP
-wins support (G)
-This boolean controls if the \fBnmbd\fR(8) process in Samba will act as a WINS server\&. You should not set this to \fByes\fR unless you have a multi-subnetted network and you wish a particular \fBnmbd\fR to be your WINS server\&. Note that you should \fBNEVER\fR set this to \fByes\fR on more than one machine in your network\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwins support = no\fR
-
-
-.TP
-workgroup (G)
-This controls what workgroup your server will appear to be in when queried by clients\&. Note that this parameter also controls the Domain name used with the \fBsecurity = domain\fR setting\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBset at compile time to WORKGROUP\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBworkgroup = MYGROUP\fR
-
-
-.TP
-writable (S)
-Synonym for \fI writeable\fR for people who can't spell :-)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-writeable (S)
-Inverted synonym for \fIread only\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-write cache size (S)
-If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value, Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file (it does \fBnot\fR do this for non-oplocked files)\&. All writes that the client does not request to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible\&. The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client\&. Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is st [...]
-
-
-This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more efficient write size for RAID disks (i\&.e\&. writes may be tuned to be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free memory for userspace programs\&.
-
-
-The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache (per oplocked file) in bytes\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwrite cache size = 0\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwrite cache size = 262144\fR
-
-
-for a 256k cache size per file\&.
-
-
-.TP
-write list (S)
-This is a list of users that are given read-write access to a service\&. If the connecting user is in this list then they will be given write access, no matter what the \fIread only\fR option is set to\&. The list can include group names using the @group syntax\&.
-
-
-Note that if a user is in both the read list and the write list then they will be given write access\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIread list \fR option\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwrite list = <empty string>\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwrite list = admin, root, @staff\fR
-
-
-.TP
-write ok (S)
-Inverted synonym for \fIread only\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-write raw (G)
-This parameter controls whether or not the server will support raw write SMB's when transferring data from clients\&. You should never need to change this parameter\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBwrite raw = yes\fR
-
-
-.TP
-wtmp directory (G)
-This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured and compiled with the option \fB --with-utmp\fR\&. It specifies a directory pathname that is used to store the wtmp or wtmpx files (depending on the UNIX system) that record user connections to a Samba server\&. The difference with the utmp directory is the fact that user info is kept after a user has logged out\&.
-
-
-See also the \fIutmp\fR parameter\&. By default this is not set, meaning the system will use whatever utmp file the native system is set to use (usually \fI/var/run/wtmp\fR on Linux)\&.
-
-
-Default: \fBno wtmp directory\fR
-
-
-Example: \fBwtmp directory = /var/log/wtmp\fR
-
-
-.SH "WARNINGS"
-
-.PP
-Although the configuration file permits service names to contain spaces, your client software may not\&. Spaces will be ignored in comparisons anyway, so it shouldn't be a problem - but be aware of the possibility\&.
-
-.PP
-On a similar note, many clients - especially DOS clients - limit service names to eight characters\&. \fBsmbd\fR(8) has no such limitation, but attempts to connect from such clients will fail if they truncate the service names\&. For this reason you should probably keep your service names down to eight characters in length\&.
-
-.PP
-Use of the [homes] and [printers] special sections make life for an administrator easy, but the various combinations of default attributes can be tricky\&. Take extreme care when designing these sections\&. In particular, ensure that the permissions on spool directories are correct\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsamba\fR(7), \fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), \fBswat\fR(8), \fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBnmbd\fR(8), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBnmblookup\fR(1), \fBtestparm\fR(1), \fBtestprns\fR(1)\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/smbpasswd.5 b/raw/man5/smbpasswd.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 75645d4..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/smbpasswd.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBPASSWD" 5 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbpasswd \- The Samba encrypted password file
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.PP
-\fIsmbpasswd\fR
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-smbpasswd is the Samba encrypted password file\&. It contains the username, Unix user id and the SMB hashed passwords of the user, as well as account flag information and the time the password was last changed\&. This file format has been evolving with Samba and has had several different formats in the past\&.
-
-.SH "FILE FORMAT"
-
-.PP
-The format of the smbpasswd file used by Samba 2\&.2 is very similar to the familiar Unix \fIpasswd(5)\fR file\&. It is an ASCII file containing one line for each user\&. Each field ithin each line is separated from the next by a colon\&. Any entry beginning with '#' is ignored\&. The smbpasswd file contains the following information for each user:
-
-.TP
-name
-This is the user name\&. It must be a name that already exists in the standard UNIX passwd file\&.
-
-
-.TP
-uid
-This is the UNIX uid\&. It must match the uid field for the same user entry in the standard UNIX passwd file\&. If this does not match then Samba will refuse to recognize this smbpasswd file entry as being valid for a user\&.
-
-
-.TP
-Lanman Password Hash
-This is the LANMAN hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits\&. The LANMAN hash is created by DES encrypting a well known string with the user's password as the DES key\&. This is the same password used by Windows 95/98 machines\&. Note that this password hash is regarded as weak as it is vulnerable to dictionary attacks and if two users choose the same password this entry will be identical (i\&.e\&. the password is not "salted" as the UNIX password is)\&. If the user has a n [...]
-
-
-\fBWARNING !!\fR Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network\&. For this reason these hashes are known as \fBplain text equivalents\fR and must \fBNOT\fR be made available to anyone but the root user\&. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the smbpasswd file [...]
-
-
-.TP
-NT Password Hash
-This is the Windows NT hash of the user's password, encoded as 32 hex digits\&. The Windows NT hash is created by taking the user's password as represented in 16-bit, little-endian UNICODE and then applying the MD4 (internet rfc1321) hashing algorithm to it\&.
-
-
-This password hash is considered more secure than the LANMAN Password Hash as it preserves the case of the password and uses a much higher quality hashing algorithm\&. However, it is still the case that if two users choose the same password this entry will be identical (i\&.e\&. the password is not "salted" as the UNIX password is)\&.
-
-
-\fBWARNING !!\fR\&. Note that, due to the challenge-response nature of the SMB/CIFS authentication protocol, anyone with a knowledge of this password hash will be able to impersonate the user on the network\&. For this reason these hashes are known as \fBplain text equivalents\fR and must \fBNOT\fR be made available to anyone but the root user\&. To protect these passwords the smbpasswd file is placed in a directory with read and traverse access only to the root user and the smbpasswd fi [...]
-
-
-.TP
-Account Flags
-This section contains flags that describe the attributes of the users account\&. In the Samba 2\&.2 release this field is bracketed by '[' and ']' characters and is always 13 characters in length (including the '[' and ']' characters)\&. The contents of this field may be any of the following characters:
-
-
-\fBU\fR - This means this is a "User" account, i\&.e\&. an ordinary user\&. Only User and Workstation Trust accounts are currently supported in the smbpasswd file\&.
-
-\fBN\fR - This means the account has no password (the passwords in the fields LANMAN Password Hash and NT Password Hash are ignored)\&. Note that this will only allow users to log on with no password if the \fI null passwords\fR parameter is set in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) config file\&.
-
-\fBD\fR - This means the account is disabled and no SMB/CIFS logins will be allowed for this user\&.
-
-\fBW\fR - This means this account is a "Workstation Trust" account\&. This kind of account is used in the Samba PDC code stream to allow Windows NT Workstations and Servers to join a Domain hosted by a Samba PDC\&.
-
-Other flags may be added as the code is extended in future\&. The rest of this field space is filled in with spaces\&.
-
-
-.TP
-Last Change Time
-This field consists of the time the account was last modified\&. It consists of the characters 'LCT-' (standing for "Last Change Time") followed by a numeric encoding of the UNIX time in seconds since the epoch (1970) that the last change was made\&.
-
-
-.PP
-All other colon separated fields are ignored at this time\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbpasswd\fR(8), \fBSamba\fR(7), and the Internet RFC1321 for details on the MD4 algorithm\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/svnserve.conf.5 b/raw/man5/svnserve.conf.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e0f6da..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/svnserve.conf.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-.\" You can view this file with:
-.\" nroff -man [filename]
-.\"
-.TH svnserve.conf 5
-.SH NAME
-svnserve.conf \- Repository configuration file for svnserve
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP
-\fIrepository-path\fP\fB/conf/svnserve.conf\fP
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBsvnserve.conf\fP controls the behavior of the \fBsvnserve\fP daemon
-on a per-repository basis. It is located in the \fBconf\fP
-subdirectory of the repository.
-.PP
-The overall structure of the file is the same as the structure of
-Subversion user configuration files. At the top level are sections,
-which are specified by words in square brackets; inside each section
-are variable definitions of the form "variable = value". Lines
-beginning with '#' are ignored. \fBsvnserve.conf\fP currently uses
-only one section named "general", and supports the following
-variables:
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fBanon-access\fP = \fBnone\fP|\fBread\fP|\fBwrite\fP
-Determines the access level for unauthenticated users. \fBwrite\fP
-access allows all repository operations. \fBread\fP access allows all
-operations except committing and changing revision properties.
-\fBnone\fP access allows no access. The default level is \fBread\fP.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fBauth-access\fP = \fBnone\fP|\fBread\fP|\fBwrite\fP
-Determines the access level for authenticated users, using the same
-access levels as above. The default level is \fBwrite\fP.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fBpassword-db\fP = \fIfilename\fP
-Sets the location of the password database. \fIfilename\fP may be
-relative to the repository conf directory. There is no default value.
-The password database has the same overall format as this file. It
-uses only one section "users"; each variable within the section is a
-username, and each value is a password.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fBrealm\fP = \fIrealm\-name\fP
-Sets the authentication realm of the repository. If two repositories
-have the same password database, they should have the same realm, and
-vice versa; this association allows clients to use a single cached
-password for several repositories. The default realm value is the
-path to the repository, relative to the server process's virtual
-repository root.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-The following example \fBsvnserve.conf\fP allows read access for
-authenticated users, no access for anonymous users, points to a passwd
-database in the same directory, and defines a realm name.
-.PP
-.nf
- [general]
- anon-access = none
- auth-access = read
- password-db = passwd
- realm = My First Repository
-.fi
-.PP
-The file "passwd" would look like:
-.PP
-.nf
- [users]
- joeuser = joepassword
- jayrandom = randomjay
-.fi
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR svnserve (8)
diff --git a/raw/man5/termcap.5 b/raw/man5/termcap.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 4883fba..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/termcap.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,453 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified formatting Sat Jul 24 17:13:38 1993, Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified (extensions and corrections) Sun May 1 14:21:25 MET DST 1994 Michael Haardt
-.\" If mistakes in the capabilities are found, please send a bug report to:
-.\" michael at moria.de
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 17:47:19 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond (esr at thyrsus.com)
-.TH TERMCAP 5 "" "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-termcap \- terminal capability database
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The termcap database is an obsolete facility for describing the
-capabilities of character-cell terminals and printers. It is retained
-only for capability with old programs; new ones should use the
-.BR terminfo (5)
-database and associated libraries.
-.LP
-.B /etc/termcap
-is an ASCII file (the database master) that lists the capabilities of
-many different types of terminals. Programs can read termcap to find
-the particular escape codes needed to control the visual attributes of
-the terminal actually in use. (Other aspects of the terminal are
-handled by stty.) The termcap database is indexed on the TERM
-environment variable.
-.LP
-Termcap entries must be defined on a single logical line, with `\\'
-used to suppress the newline. Fields are separated by `:'. The first
-field of each entry starts at the left-hand margin, and contains a list
-of names for the terminal, separated by '|'.
-.LP
-The first subfield may (in BSD termcap entries from versions 4.3 and
-prior) contain a short name consisting of two characters. This short
-name may consist of capital or small letters. In 4.4BSD termcap
-entries this field is omitted.
-.LP
-The second subfield (first, in the newer 4.4BSD format) contains the
-name used by the environment variable TERM. It should be spelled in
-lowercase letters. Selectable hardware capabilities should be marked
-by appending a hyphen and a suffix to this name. See below for an
-example. Usual suffixes are w (more than 80 characters wide), am
-(automatic margins), nam (no automatic margins), and rv (reverse video
-display). The third subfield contains a long and descriptive name for
-this termcap entry.
-.LP
-Subsequent fields contain the terminal capabilities; any continued
-capability lines must be indented one tab from the left margin.
-.LP
-Although there is no defined order, it is suggested to write first
-boolean, then numeric, and then string capabilities, each sorted
-alphabetically without looking at lower or upper spelling. Capabilities
-of similar functions can be written in one line.
-.LP
-.nf
-Example for:
-.sp
-Head line: vt|vt101|DEC VT 101 terminal in 80 character mode:\e
-Head line: Vt|vt101-w|DEC VT 101 terminal in (wide) 132 character mode:\e
-Boolean: :bs:\e
-Numeric: :co#80:\e
-String: :sr=\eE[H:\e
-.SS "Boolean Capabilities"
-.nf
-5i Printer will not echo on screen
-am Automatic margins which means automatic line wrap
-bs Control-H (8 dec.) performs a backspace
-bw Backspace on left margin wraps to previous line and right margin
-da Display retained above screen
-db Display retained below screen
-eo A space erases all characters at cursor position
-es Escape sequences and special characters work in status line
-gn Generic device
-hc This is a hardcopy terminal
-HC The cursor is hard to see when not on bottom line
-hs Has a status line
-hz Hazeltine bug, the terminal can not print tilde characters
-in Terminal inserts nulls, not spaces, to fill whitespace
-km Terminal has a meta key
-mi Cursor movement works in insert mode
-ms Cursor movement works in standout/underline mode
-NP No pad character
-NR ti does not reverse te
-nx No padding, must use XON/XOFF
-os Terminal can overstrike
-ul Terminal underlines although it can not overstrike
-xb Beehive glitch, f1 sends ESCAPE, f2 sends ^C
-xn Newline/wraparound glitch
-xo Terminal uses xon/xoff protocol
-xs Text typed over standout text will be displayed in standout
-xt Teleray glitch, destructive tabs and odd standout mode
-.fi
-.SS "Numeric Capabilities"
-.nf
-co Number of columns
-dB Delay in milliseconds for backspace on hardcopy terminals
-dC Delay in milliseconds for carriage return on hardcopy terminals
-dF Delay in milliseconds for form feed on hardcopy terminals
-dN Delay in milliseconds for new line on hardcopy terminals
-dT Delay in milliseconds for tabulator stop on hardcopy terminals
-dV Delay in milliseconds for vertical tabulator stop on hardcopy terminals
-it Difference between tab positions
-lh Height of soft labels
-lm Lines of memory
-lw Width of soft labels
-li Number of lines
-Nl Number of soft labels
-pb Lowest baud rate which needs padding
-sg Standout glitch
-ug Underline glitch
-vt virtual terminal number
-ws Width of status line if different from screen width
-.fi
-.SS "String Capabilities"
-.nf
-!1 shifted save key
-!2 shifted suspend key
-!3 shifted undo key
-#1 shifted help key
-#2 shifted home key
-#3 shifted input key
-#4 shifted cursor left key
-%0 redo key
-%1 help key
-%2 mark key
-%3 message key
-%4 move key
-%5 next-object key
-%6 open key
-%7 options key
-%8 previous-object key
-%9 print key
-%a shifted message key
-%b shifted move key
-%c shifted next key
-%d shifted options key
-%e shifted previous key
-%f shifted print key
-%g shifted redo key
-%h shifted replace key
-%i shifted cusor right key
-%j shifted resume key
-&0 shifted cancel key
-&1 reference key
-&2 refresh key
-&3 replace key
-&4 restart key
-&5 resume key
-&6 save key
-&7 suspend key
-&8 undo key
-&9 shifted begin key
-*0 shifted find key
-*1 shifted command key
-*2 shifted copy key
-*3 shifted create key
-*4 shifted delete character
-*5 shifted delete line
-*6 select key
-*7 shifted end key
-*8 shifted clear line key
-*9 shifted exit key
- at 0 find key
- at 1 begin key
- at 2 cancel key
- at 3 close key
- at 4 command key
- at 5 copy key
- at 6 create key
- at 7 end key
- at 8 enter/send key
- at 9 exit key
-al Insert one line
-AL Indert %1 lines
-ac Pairs of block graphic characters to map alternate character set
-ae End alternative character set
-as Start alternative character set for block graphic characters
-bc Backspace, if not ^H
-bl Audio bell
-bt Move to previous tab stop
-cb Clear from beginning of line to cursor
-cc Dummy command character
-cd Clear to end of screen
-ce Clear to end of line
-ch Move cursor horizontally only to column %1
-cl Clear screen and cursor home
-cm Cursor move to row %1 and column %2 (on screen)
-CM Move cursor to row %1 and column %2 (in memory)
-cr Carriage return
-cs Scroll region from line %1 to %2
-ct Clear tabs
-cv Move cursor vertically only to line %1
-dc Delete one character
-DC Delete %1 characters
-dl Delete one line
-DL Delete %1 lines
-dm Begin delete mode
-do Cursor down one line
-DO Cursor down #1 lines
-ds Disable status line
-eA Enable alternate character set
-ec Erase %1 characters starting at cursor
-ed End delete mode
-ei End insert mode
-ff Formfeed character on hardcopy terminals
-fs Return character to its position before going to status line
-F1 The string sent by function key f11
-F2 The string sent by function key f12
-F3 The string sent by function key f13
-\&... \&...
-F9 The string sent by function key f19
-FA The string sent by function key f20
-FB The string sent by function key f21
-\&... \&...
-FZ The string sent by function key f45
-Fa The string sent by function key f46
-Fb The string sent by function key f47
-\&... \&...
-Fr The string sent by function key f63
-hd Move cursor a half line down
-ho Cursor home
-hu Move cursor a half line up
-i1 Initialization string 1 at login
-i3 Initialization string 3 at login
-is Initialization string 2 at login
-ic Insert one character
-IC Insert %1 characters
-if Initialization file
-im Begin insert mode
-ip Insert pad time and needed special characters after insert
-iP Initialization program
-K1 upper left key on keypad
-K2 center key on keypad
-K3 upper right key on keypad
-K4 bottom left key on keypad
-K5 bottom right key on keypad
-k0 Function key 0
-k1 Function key 1
-k2 Function key 2
-k3 Function key 3
-k4 Function key 4
-k5 Function key 5
-k6 Function key 6
-k7 Function key 7
-k8 Function key 8
-k9 Function key 9
-k; Function key 10
-ka Clear all tabs key
-kA Insert line key
-kb Backspace key
-kB Back tab stop
-kC Clear screen key
-kd Cursor down key
-kD Key for delete character under cursor
-ke turn keypad off
-kE Key for clear to end of line
-kF Key for scolling forward/down
-kh Cursor home key
-kH Cursor hown down key
-kI Insert character/Insert mode key
-kl Cursor left key
-kL Key for delete line
-kM Key for exit insert mode
-kN Key for next page
-kP Key for previous page
-kr Cursor right key
-kR Key for scolling backward/up
-ks Turn keypad on
-kS Clear to end of screen key
-kt Clear this tab key
-kT Set tab here key
-ku Cursor up key
-l0 Label of zeroth function key, if not f0
-l1 Label of first function key, if not f1
-l2 Label of first function key, if not f2
-\&... \&...
-la Label of tenth function key, if not f10
-le Cursor left one character
-ll Move cursor to lower left corner
-LE Cursor left %1 characters
-LF Turn soft labels off
-LO Turn soft labels on
-mb Start blinking
-MC Clear soft margins
-md Start bold mode
-me End all mode like so, us, mb, md and mr
-mh Start half bright mode
-mk Dark mode (Characters invisible)
-ML Set left soft margin
-mm Put terminal in meta mode
-mo Put terminal out of meta mode
-mp Turn on protected attribute
-mr Start reverse mode
-MR Set right soft margin
-nd Cursor right one character
-nw Carriage return command
-pc Padding character
-pf Turn printer off
-pk Program key %1 to send string %2 as if typed by user
-pl Program key %1 to execute string %2 in local mode
-pn Program soft label %1 to to show string %2
-po Turn the printer on
-pO Turn the printer on for %1 (<256) bytes
-ps Print screen contents on printer
-px Program key %1 to send string %2 to computer
-r1 Reset string 1 to set terminal to sane modes
-r2 Reset string 2 to set terminal to sane modes
-r3 Reset string 3 to set terminal to sane modes
-RA disable automatic margins
-rc Restore saved cursor position
-rf Reset string file name
-RF Request for input from terminal
-RI Cursor right %1 characters
-rp Repeat character %1 for %2 times
-rP Padding after character sent in replace mode
-rs Reset string
-RX Turn off XON/XOFF flow control
-sa Set %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9 attributes
-SA enable automatic margins
-sc Save cursor position
-se End standout mode
-sf Normal scroll one line
-SF Normal scroll %1 lines
-so Start standout mode
-sr Reverse scroll
-SR scroll back %1 lines
-st Set tabulator stop in all rows at current column
-SX Turn on XON/XOFF flow control
-ta move to next hardware tab
-tc Read in terminal description from another entry
-te End program that uses cursor motion
-ti Begin program that uses cursor motion
-ts Move cursor to column %1 of status line
-uc Underline character under cursor and move cursor right
-ue End underlining
-up Cursor up one line
-UP Cursor up %1 lines
-us Start underlining
-vb Visible bell
-ve Normal cursor visible
-vi Cursor unvisible
-vs Standout cursor
-wi Set window from line %1 to %2 and column %3 to %4
-XF XOFF character if not ^S
-.fi
-.LP
-There are several ways of defining the control codes for string capabilities:
-.LP
-Normal Characters except '^','\e' and '%' repesent themself.
-.LP
-A '^x' means Control-x. Control-A equals 1 decimal.
-.LP
-\ex means a special code. x can be one of the following charaters:
-.RS
-E Escape (27)
-.br
-n Linefeed (10)
-.br
-r Carriage return (13)
-.br
-t Tabulation (9)
-.br
-b Backspace (8)
-.br
-f Form feed (12)
-.br
-0 Null character. A \exxx specifies the octal character xxx.
-.RE
-.IP i
-Increments paramters by one.
-.IP r
-Single parameter capability
-.IP +
-Add value of next character to this parameter and do binary output
-.IP 2
-Do ASCII output of this parameter with a field with of 2
-.IP d
-Do ASCII output of this parameter with a field with of 3
-.IP %
-Print a '%'
-.LP
-If you use binary output, then you should avoid the null character
-because it terminates the string. You should reset tabulator expansion
-if a tabulator can be the binary output of a parameter.
-.IP Warning:
-The above metacharacters for parameters may be wrong, they document Minix
-termcap which may not be compatible with Linux termcap.
-.LP
-The block graphic characters can be specified by three string capabilities:
-.IP as
-start the alternative charset
-.IP ae
-end it
-.IP ac
-pairs of characters. The first character is the name of the block graphic
-symbol and the second characters is its definition.
-.LP
-The following names are available:
-.sp
-.nf
-+ right arrow (>)
-, left arrow (<)
-\&. down arrow (v)
-0 full square (#)
-I latern (#)
-- upper arrow (^)
-\&' rhombus (+)
-a chess board (:)
-f degree (')
-g plus-minus (#)
-h square (#)
-j right bottom corner (+)
-k right upper corner (+)
-l left upper corner (+)
-m left bottom corner (+)
-n cross (+)
-o upper horizontal line (-)
-q middle horizontal line (-)
-s bottom horizontal line (_)
-t left tee (+)
-u right tee (+)
-v bottom tee (+)
-w normal tee (+)
-x vertical line (|)
-~ paragraph (???)
-.fi
-.sp
-The values in parentheses are suggested defaults which are used by curses,
-if the capabilities are missing.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR termcap (3),
-.BR curses (3),
-.BR terminfo (5)
-
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/texinfo.5 b/raw/man5/texinfo.5
deleted file mode 100644
index be4dc58..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/texinfo.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-.\" texinfo(5)
-.\" Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of
-.\" this manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that
-.\" the entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-.\" manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-.\" versions, except that this permission notice may be stated in a
-.\" translation approved by the Foundation.
-.\"
-.TH TEXINFO 5 "GNU Texinfo" "FSF"
-.SH NAME
-texinfo \- software documentation system
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Texinfo is a documentation system that uses a single source file to
-produce both online information and printed output. It is primarily
-designed for writing software manuals.
-.PP
-For a full description of the Texinfo language and associated tools,
-please see the Texinfo manual (written in Texinfo itself). Most likely,
-running this command from your shell:
-.RS
-.I info texinfo
-.RE
-or this key sequence from inside Emacs:
-.RS
-.I M-x info RET m texinfo RET
-.RE
-will get you there.
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/
-.br
-or any GNU mirror site.
-.SH "REPORTING BUGS"
-Please send bug reports to bug-texinfo at gnu.org,
-general questions and discussion to help-texinfo at gnu.org.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-info(1), install-info(1), makeinfo(1), texi2dvi(1), texindex(1).
-.br
-emacs(1), tex(1).
-.br
-info(5).
diff --git a/raw/man5/ttytype.5 b/raw/man5/ttytype.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 6775bcc..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/ttytype.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 17:17:50 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Thu Oct 19 21:25:21 MET 1995 by Martin Schulze <joey at infodrom.north.de>
-.\" Modified Mon Oct 21 17:47:19 EDT 1996 by Eric S. Raymond
-.\" <esr at thyrsus.com>xk
-.TH TTYTYPE 5 1993-07-24 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-ttytype \- terminal device to default terminal type mapping
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.I /etc/ttytype
-file associates termcap/terminfo terminal type names
-with tty lines. Each line consists of a terminal type, followed by
-whitespace, followed by a tty name (a device name without the
-.IR /dev/ ") prefix."
-
-This association is used by the program
-.BR tset (1)
-to set the environment variable TERM to the default terminal name for
-the user's current tty.
-
-This facility was designed for a traditional time-sharing environment
-featuring character-cell terminals hardwired to a Unix minicomputer.
-It is little used on modern workstation and personal Unixes.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-A typical
-.I /etc/ttytype
-is:
-.RS
-.sp
-con80x25 tty1
-.br
-vt320 ttys0
-.sp
-.RE
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.I /etc/ttytype
-the tty definitions file.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR getty (1),
-.BR terminfo (5),
-.BR termcap (5)
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/raw/man5/tzfile.5 b/raw/man5/tzfile.5
deleted file mode 100644
index 91f67ef..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/tzfile.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#)tzfile.5 7.11
-.\" This file is in the public domain, so clarified as of
-.\" 1996-06-05 by Arthur David Olson <arthur_david_olson at nih.gov>.
-.TH TZFILE 5
-.SH NAME
-tzfile \- time zone information
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B
-#include <tzfile.h>
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The time zone information files used by
-.BR tzset (3)
-begin with the magic characters "TZif" to identify then as
-time zone information files,
-followed by sixteen bytes reserved for future use,
-followed by six four-byte values of type
-.BR long ,
-written in a ``standard'' byte order
-(the high-order byte of the value is written first).
-These values are,
-in order:
-.TP
-.I tzh_ttisgmtcnt
-The number of UTC/local indicators stored in the file.
-.TP
-.I tzh_ttisstdcnt
-The number of standard/wall indicators stored in the file.
-.TP
-.I tzh_leapcnt
-The number of leap seconds for which data is stored in the file.
-.TP
-.I tzh_timecnt
-The number of "transition times" for which data is stored
-in the file.
-.TP
-.I tzh_typecnt
-The number of "local time types" for which data is stored
-in the file (must not be zero).
-.TP
-.I tzh_charcnt
-The number of characters of "time zone abbreviation strings"
-stored in the file.
-.PP
-The above header is followed by
-.I tzh_timecnt
-four-byte values of type
-.BR long ,
-sorted in ascending order.
-These values are written in ``standard'' byte order.
-Each is used as a transition time (as returned by
-.BR time (2))
-at which the rules for computing local time change.
-Next come
-.I tzh_timecnt
-one-byte values of type
-.BR "unsigned char" ;
-each one tells which of the different types of ``local time'' types
-described in the file is associated with the same-indexed transition time.
-These values serve as indices into an array of
-.I ttinfo
-structures that appears next in the file;
-these structures are defined as follows:
-.in +.5i
-.sp
-.nf
-.ta .5i +\w'unsigned int\0\0'u
-struct ttinfo {
- long tt_gmtoff;
- int tt_isdst;
- unsigned int tt_abbrind;
-};
-.in -.5i
-.fi
-.sp
-Each structure is written as a four-byte value for
-.I tt_gmtoff
-of type
-.BR long ,
-in a standard byte order, followed by a one-byte value for
-.I tt_isdst
-and a one-byte value for
-.IR tt_abbrind .
-In each structure,
-.I tt_gmtoff
-gives the number of seconds to be added to UTC,
-.I tt_isdst
-tells whether
-.I tm_isdst
-should be set by
-.BR localtime (3),
-and
-.I tt_abbrind
-serves as an index into the array of time zone abbreviation characters
-that follow the
-.I ttinfo
-structure(s) in the file.
-.PP
-Then there are
-.I tzh_leapcnt
-pairs of four-byte values, written in standard byte order;
-the first value of each pair gives the time
-(as returned by
-.BR time (2))
-at which a leap second occurs;
-the second gives the
-.I total
-number of leap seconds to be applied after the given time.
-The pairs of values are sorted in ascending order by time.
-.PP
-Then there are
-.I tzh_ttisstdcnt
-standard/wall indicators, each stored as a one-byte value;
-they tell whether the transition times associated with local time types
-were specified as standard time or wall clock time,
-and are used when a time zone file is used in handling POSIX-style
-time zone environment variables.
-.PP
-Finally, there are
-.I tzh_ttisgmtcnt
-UTC/local indicators, each stored as a one-byte value;
-they tell whether the transition times associated with local time types
-were specified as UTC or local time,
-and are used when a time zone file is used in handling POSIX-style
-time zone environment variables.
-.PP
-.I Localtime
-uses the first standard-time
-.I ttinfo
-structure in the file
-(or simply the first
-.I ttinfo
-structure in the absence of a standard-time structure)
-if either
-.I tzh_timecnt
-is zero or the time argument is less than the first transition time recorded
-in the file.
-.\" .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.\" .BR newctime (3)
diff --git a/raw/man5/utmp.5 b/raw/man5/utmp.5
deleted file mode 100644
index ab35d2b..0000000
--- a/raw/man5/utmp.5
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at cantor.informatik.rwth-aachen.de), Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 10:44:50 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Thu Feb 26 16:08:49 MET 1995 by Michael Haardt
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 20 14:39:03 MET DST 1996 by Michael Haardt
-.\" Modified Wed Jul 2 20:20:53 ART 1997 by Nicol?s Lichtmaier <nick at debian.org>
-.TH UTMP 5 1997-07-02 "" "File formats"
-.SH NAME
-utmp, wtmp \- login records
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-#include <utmp.h>
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.I utmp
-file allows one to discover information about who is currently using the
-system. There may be more users currently using the system, because not
-all programs use utmp logging.
-.PP
-.B Warning:
-.I utmp
-must not be writable, because many system programs (foolishly)
-depend on its integrity. You risk faked system logfiles and
-modifications of system files if you leave
-.I utmp
-writable to any user.
-.PP
-The file is a sequence of entries with the following structure declared
-in the include file (note that this is only one of several definitions
-around; details depend on the version of libc):
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-.ta 3i
-#define UT_UNKNOWN 0
-#define RUN_LVL 1
-#define BOOT_TIME 2
-#define NEW_TIME 3
-#define OLD_TIME 4
-#define INIT_PROCESS 5
-#define LOGIN_PROCESS 6
-#define USER_PROCESS 7
-#define DEAD_PROCESS 8
-#define ACCOUNTING 9
-
-#define UT_LINESIZE 12
-#define UT_NAMESIZE 32
-#define UT_HOSTSIZE 256
-
-struct exit_status {
- short int e_termination; /* process termination status. */
- short int e_exit; /* process exit status. */
-};
-
-struct utmp {
- short ut_type; /* type of login */
- pid_t ut_pid; /* pid of login process */
- char ut_line[UT_LINESIZE]; /* device name of tty \- "/dev/" */
- char ut_id[4]; /* init id or abbrev. ttyname */
- char ut_user[UT_NAMESIZE]; /* user name */
- char ut_host[UT_HOSTSIZE]; /* hostname for remote login */
- struct exit_status ut_exit; /* The exit status of a process
- marked as DEAD_PROCESS. */
- long ut_session; /* session ID, used for windowing*/
- struct timeval ut_tv; /* time entry was made. */
- int32_t ut_addr_v6[4]; /* IP address of remote host. */
- char pad[20]; /* Reserved for future use. */
-};
-
-/* Backwards compatibility hacks. */
-#define ut_name ut_user
-#ifndef _NO_UT_TIME
-#define ut_time ut_tv.tv_sec
-#endif
-#define ut_xtime ut_tv.tv_sec
-#define ut_addr ut_addr_v6[0]
-.sp
-.fi
-.RE
-This structure gives the name of the special file associated with the
-user's terminal, the user's login name, and the time of login in the form
-of
-.BR time (2).
-String fields are terminated by \fB'\e0'\fP if they are shorter than the size
-of the field.
-.PP
-The first entries ever created result from
-.BR init (8)
-processing
-.BR inittab (5).
-Before an entry is processed, though,
-.BR init (8)
-cleans up utmp by setting \fIut_type\fP to \fBDEAD_PROCESS\fP, clearing
-\fIut_user\fP, \fIut_host\fP, and \fIut_time\fP with null bytes for each
-record which \fIut_type\fP is not \fBDEAD_PROCESS\fP or \fBRUN_LVL\fP
-and where no process with PID \fIut_pid\fP exists. If no empty record
-with the needed \fIut_id\fP can be found, init creates a new one. It
-sets \fIut_id\fP from the inittab, \fIut_pid\fP and \fIut_time\fP to the
-current values, and \fIut_type\fP to \fBINIT_PROCESS\fP.
-.PP
-.BR getty (8)
-locates the entry by the pid, changes \fIut_type\fP to
-\fBLOGIN_PROCESS\fP, changes \fIut_time\fP, sets \fIut_line\fP, and waits
-for connection to be established.
-.BR login (8),
-after a user has been
-authenticated, changes \fIut_type\fP to \fBUSER_PROCESS\fP, changes
-\fIut_time\fP, and sets \fIut_host\fP and \fIut_addr\fP. Depending on
-.BR getty (8)
-and
-.BR login (8),
-records may be located by
-\fIut_line\fP instead of the preferable \fIut_pid\fP.
-.PP
-When
-.BR init (8)
-finds that a process has exited, it locates its utmp
-entry by \fIut_pid\fP, sets \fIut_type\fP to \fBDEAD_PROCESS\fP, and
-clears \fIut_user\fP, \fIut_host\fP and \fIut_time\fP with null bytes.
-.PP
-.BR xterm (1)
-and other terminal emulators directly create a
-\fBUSER_PROCESS\fP record and generate the \fIut_id\fP by using the last
-two letters of \fI/dev/ttyp\fP\fI%c\fP or by using \fIp\fP\fI%d\fP for
-\fI/dev/pts/\fP\fI%d\fP. If they find a \fBDEAD_PROCESS\fP for this id,
-they recycle it, otherwise they create a new entry. If they can, they
-will mark it as \fBDEAD_PROCESS\fP on exiting and it is advised that
-they null \fIut_line\fP, \fIut_time\fP, \fIut_user\fP, and \fIut_host\fP
-as well.
-.PP
-\fIxdm\fP(8) should not create a utmp record, because there is no
-assigned terminal. Letting it create one will result in errors, such
-as 'finger: cannot stat /dev/machine.dom'. It should create wtmp entries,
-though, just like
-.BR ftpd (8)
-does.
-.PP
-.BR telnetd (8)
-sets up a \fBLOGIN_PROCESS\fP entry and leaves the rest to
-.BR login (8)
-as usual. After the telnet session ends,
-.BR telnetd (8)
-cleans up utmp in the described way.
-.PP
-The \fIwtmp\fP file records all logins and logouts. Its format is
-exactly like \fIutmp\fP except that a null user name indicates a logout
-on the associated terminal. Furthermore, the terminal name \fB~\fP
-with user name \fBshutdown\fP or \fBreboot\fP indicates a system
-shutdown or reboot and the pair of terminal names \fB|\fP/\fB}\fP
-logs the old/new system time when
-.BR date (1)
-changes it. \fIwtmp\fP is maintained by
-.BR login (1),
-.BR init (1),
-and some versions of
-.BR getty (1).
-Neither of these programs creates the file, so if it is
-removed, record-keeping is turned off.
-.SH FILES
-/var/run/utmp
-.br
-/var/log/wtmp
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-Linux utmp entries conform neither to v7/BSD nor to SYSV; they are a
-mix of the two. v7/BSD has fewer fields; most importantly it lacks
-\fIut_type\fP, which causes native v7/BSD-like programs to display (for
-example) dead or login entries. Further, there is no configuration file
-which allocates slots to sessions. BSD does so because it lacks
-\fIut_id\fP fields. In Linux (as in SYSV), the \fIut_id\fP field of a
-record will never change once it has been set, which reserves that slot
-without needing a configuration file. Clearing \fIut_id\fP may result
-in race conditions leading to corrupted utmp entries and and potential
-security holes. Clearing the above mentioned fields by filling them
-with null bytes is not required by SYSV semantics, but it allows to run
-many programs which assume BSD semantics and which do not modify utmp.
-Linux uses the BSD conventions for line contents, as documented above.
-.PP
-SYSV only uses the type field to mark them and logs informative messages
-such as e.g.\& \fB"new time"\fP in the line field. \fBUT_UNKNOWN\fP seems
-to be a Linux invention.
-SYSV has no \fIut_host\fP or \fIut_addr_v6\fP fields.
-.PP
-Unlike various other
-systems, where utmp logging can be disabled by removing the file, utmp
-must always exist on Linux. If you want to disable \fIwho\fP(1) then
-do not make utmp world readable.
-.PP
-Note that the utmp struct from libc5 has changed in libc6. Because of this,
-binaries using the old libc5 struct will corrupt
-.IR /var/run/utmp " and/or " /var/log/wtmp .
-Debian systems include a patched libc5 which uses the new utmp format.
-The problem still exists with wtmp since it's accessed directly in
-libc5.
-.SH RESTRICTIONS
-The file format is machine dependent, so it is recommended that it be
-processed only on the machine architecture where it was created.
-.SH BUGS
-This manpage is based on the libc5 one, things may work differently now.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ac (1),
-.BR date (1),
-.BR getutent (3),
-.BR init (8),
-.BR last (1),
-.BR login (1),
-.BR updwtmp (3),
-.BR who (1)
diff --git a/raw/man6/zic2xpm.6 b/raw/man6/zic2xpm.6
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a6769d..0000000
--- a/raw/man6/zic2xpm.6
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\" See section COPYING below.
-.TH zic2xpm 6 "11 Apr 1996" "zic2xpm 2.0" "Games"
-.SH NAME
-zic2xpm \- Tool to convert ZIICS chess pieces into XBoard (XPM/XIM) pieces.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-zic2xpm
-.B file1 [file2 ...]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B zic2xpm
-converts one or more ZIICS piece files into a format that can
-be used by XBoard.
-If you give more than one filename, be aware that multiple sets
-of the same size cannot exist in one directory. Multiple sets
-of different sizes can exist in a single directory.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-If you wanted to make a directory containing the sets SET2.V32,
-SET2.V40, SET2.V50, and SET2.V56, all of which are located in
-~/ziics, you could do:
-
-.nf
- mkdir Sets
- cd Sets
- zic2xpm ~/ziics/SET2.*
-.fi
-
-You would then run XBoard like this:
-
-.nf
- xboard -pixmap Sets
-.fi
-.SH BUGS
-Please report any bugs to
-.B frankm at hiwaay.net
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR
-.BR xboard ( 6 ).
-.SH AUTHOR
-Frank McIngvale (frankm at hiwaay.net)
-.SH COPYING
-Copyright (C) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.PP
-NOTICE: The piece images distributed with ZIICS are
-copyrighted works of their original creators. Images
-converted with zic2xpm may not be redistributed without
-the permission of the copyright holders. Do not contact
-the authors of zic2xpm or of ZIICS itself to request
-permission.
-.PP
-NOTICE: The format of the ZIICS piece file was gleaned from
-SHOWSETS.PAS, a part of ZIICS. Thanks to Andy McFarland
-(Zek on ICC) for making this source available! ZIICS is a
-completely separate and copyrighted work of Andy
-McFarland. Use and distribution of ZIICS falls under the
-ZIICS license, NOT the GNU General Public License.
-.PP
-NOTICE: The format of the VGA imageblocks was determined
-by experimentation, and without access to any
-of Borland Inc.'s BGI library source code.
-.PP
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-(at your option) any later version. However, the above notices
-MUST BE RETAINED in any copy that you redistribute or modify.
-.PP
-This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-GNU General Public License for more details.
-.PP
-You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111 USA.
diff --git a/raw/man7/LDP.7 b/raw/man7/LDP.7
deleted file mode 100644
index cffa0c4..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/LDP.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-.ig \"-*- nroff -*-
-Copyright (C) 2000 Stein Gjoen
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this
-manual into another language, under the above conditions for modified
-versions, except that this permission notice may be included in
-translations approved by the Free Software Foundation instead of in
-the original English.
-..
-.TH "LDP Introduction" "ldp" 2001-11-15 "LDP"
-.SH NAME
-LDP \- Intro to the Linux Documentation Project, with help, guides and documents
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-The Linux Documentation Project (LDP) provides a variety of
-free documentation resources including
-guides, FAQs, HOWTOs, and man-pages to the Linux community.
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-The various documents in the LDP archives are maintained by individual
-authors, and are listed in the beginning of each HOWTO. If you have
-any questions or inputs to a document we encourage you to contact the
-authors directly.
-
-.SH "WEB PAGES"
-The LDP has its own dedicated web site as do many of
-the various translations projects which are linked from the
-main LDP web site at
-.RS
-\fBhttp://www\&.LinuxDoc\&.org/\fP
-.RE
-which you may wish to bookmark.
-
-.SH "MAN PAGES"
-A web page with status information for manual pages and translations
-is found at
-.RS
-\fBhttp://www\&.win\&.tue\&.nl/~aeb/linux/man/\fP
-.RE
-
-.SH "MAILING LISTS"
-LDP has a number of mailing lists, mostly of use to authors:
-.PP
-.PD 0
-.TP
-.PD
-\fB<ldp\-announce at lists\&.LinuxDoc\&.org>\fP
-Announcements from the LDP project
-.TP
-\fB<ldp\-discuss at lists\&.LinuxDoc\&.org>\fP
-General discussion on the LDP project
-.PP
-To join these lists send a mail with a body of "subscribe"
-to \fB<ldp\-announce\-request at lists\&.LinuxDoc\&.org>\fP
-or \fB<ldp\-discuss\-request at lists\&.LinuxDoc\&.org>\fP
-respectively. These mailing lists are also archived at the
-LinuxDoc site.
-
-.SH FILES
-Most distributions include the HOWTOs and mini-HOWTOs in the installation
-.PD 0
-.TP
-\fB/usr/doc/\fP (old place for documentation)
-.TP
-\fB/usr/share/doc/\fP (new place for documentation)
-.TP
-\fB/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/\fP (HOWTO files)
-.TP
-\fB/usr/share/doc/HOWTO/mini/\fP (mini-HOWTO files)
-.PD
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR man (1),
-.BR xman (1x),
-.BR info (1)
-.PP
-\fBinfo\fP pages as read with
-.BR emacs (1)
-or
-.BR info (1)
diff --git a/raw/man7/abort.7 b/raw/man7/abort.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 977191a..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/abort.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ABORT" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ABORT \- abort the current transaction
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ABORT [ WORK | TRANSACTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBABORT\fR rolls back the current transaction and causes
-all the updates made by the transaction to be discarded.
-This command is identical
-in behavior to the standard SQL command
-ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(7)],
-and is present only for historical reasons.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBWORK\fR
-.TP
-\fBTRANSACTION\fR
-Optional key words. They have no effect.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)] to
-successfully terminate a transaction.
-.PP
-Issuing \fBABORT\fR when not inside a transaction does
-no harm, but it will provoke a warning message.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To abort all changes:
-.sp
-.nf
-ABORT;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command is a PostgreSQL extension
-present for historical reasons. \fBROLLBACK\fR is the
-equivalent standard SQL command.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-BEGIN [\fBbegin\fR(7)], COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(l)], ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_aggregate.7 b/raw/man7/alter_aggregate.7
deleted file mode 100644
index e08a014..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_aggregate.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER AGGREGATE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER AGGREGATE \- change the definition of an aggregate function
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER AGGREGATE \fIname\fR ( \fItype\fR ) RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER AGGREGATE\fR changes the definition of an
-aggregate function. The only currently available functionality is to
-rename the aggregate function.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing aggregate function.
-.TP
-\fB\fItype\fB\fR
-The argument data type of the aggregate function, or
-* if the function accepts any data type.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the aggregate function.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To rename the aggregate function myavg for type
-\fBinteger\fR to my_average:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER AGGREGATE myavg(integer) RENAME TO my_average;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBALTER AGGREGATE\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE AGGREGATE [\fBcreate_aggregate\fR(7)], DROP AGGREGATE [\fBdrop_aggregate\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_conversion.7 b/raw/man7/alter_conversion.7
deleted file mode 100644
index ea39db0..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_conversion.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER CONVERSION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER CONVERSION \- change the definition of a conversion
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER CONVERSION \fIname\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER CONVERSION\fR changes the definition of a
-conversion. The only currently available functionality is to rename the
-conversion.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing conversion.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the conversion.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To rename the conversion iso_8859_1_to_utf_8 to
-latin1_to_unicode:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER CONVERSION iso_8859_1_to_utf_8 RENAME TO latin1_to_unicode;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBALTER CONVERSION\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE CONVERSION [\fBcreate_conversion\fR(7)], DROP CONVERSION [\fBdrop_conversion\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_database.7 b/raw/man7/alter_database.7
deleted file mode 100644
index c107e62..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_database.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER DATABASE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER DATABASE \- change a database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER DATABASE \fIname\fR SET \fIparameter\fR { TO | = } { \fIvalue\fR | DEFAULT }
-ALTER DATABASE \fIname\fR RESET \fIparameter\fR
-
-ALTER DATABASE \fIname\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER DATABASE\fR is used to change the attributes
-of a database.
-.PP
-The first two forms change the session default of a run-time
-configuration variable for a PostgreSQL
-database. Whenever a new session is subsequently started in that
-database, the specified value becomes the session default value.
-The database-specific default overrides whatever setting is present
-in \fIpostgresql.conf\fR or has been received from the
-\fBpostmaster\fR command line. Only the database
-owner or a superuser can change the session defaults for a
-database.
-.PP
-The third form changes the name of the database. Only the database
-owner can rename a database, and only if he has the
-CREATEDB privilege. The current database cannot
-be renamed. (Connect to a different database if you need to do
-that.)
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the database whose session defaults are to be altered.
-.TP
-\fB\fIparameter\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fIvalue\fB\fR
-Set the session default for this database of the specified
-configuration parameter to the given value. If
-\fIvalue\fR is DEFAULT
-or, equivalently, RESET is used, the
-database-specific variable setting is removed and the system-wide
-default
-setting will be inherited in new sessions. Use RESET
-ALL to clear all settings.
-
-See SET [\fBset\fR(7)] and the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation
-for more information about allowed parameter names
-and values.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the database.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Using ALTER USER [\fBalter_user\fR(7)],
-it is also possible to tie a session default to a specific user
-rather than a database. User-specific settings override database-specific
-ones if there is a conflict.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To disable index scans by default in the database
-test:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER DATABASE test SET enable_indexscan TO off;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBALTER DATABASE\fR statement is a
-PostgreSQL extension.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER USER [\fBalter_user\fR(7)], CREATE DATABASE [\fBcreate_database\fR(l)], DROP DATABASE [\fBdrop_database\fR(l)], SET [\fBset\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_domain.7 b/raw/man7/alter_domain.7
deleted file mode 100644
index f6b7603..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_domain.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER DOMAIN" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER DOMAIN \- change the definition of a domain
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER DOMAIN \fIname\fR
- { SET DEFAULT \fIexpression\fR | DROP DEFAULT }
-ALTER DOMAIN \fIname\fR
- { SET | DROP } NOT NULL
-ALTER DOMAIN \fIname\fR
- ADD \fIdomain_constraint\fR
-ALTER DOMAIN \fIname\fR
- DROP CONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fR [ RESTRICT | CASCADE ]
-ALTER DOMAIN \fIname\fR
- OWNER TO \fInew_owner\fR
-
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER DOMAIN\fR changes the definition of an existing domain.
-There are several sub-forms:
-.TP
-\fBSET/DROP DEFAULT\fR
-These forms set or remove the default value for a domain. Note
-that defaults only apply to subsequent \fBINSERT\fR
-commands; they do not affect rows already in a table using the domain.
-.TP
-\fBSET/DROP NOT NULL\fR
-These forms change whether a domain is marked to allow NULL
-values or to reject NULL values. You may only SET NOT NULL
-when the columns using the domain contain no null values.
-.TP
-\fBADD \fIdomain_constraint\fB\fR
-This form adds a new constraint to a domain using the same syntax as
-CREATE DOMAIN [\fBcreate_domain\fR(7)].
-This will only succeed if all columns using the domain satisfy the
-new constraint.
-.TP
-\fBDROP CONSTRAINT\fR
-This form drops constraints on a domain.
-.TP
-\fBOWNER\fR
-This form changes the owner of the domain to the specified user.
-.PP
-You must own the domain to use \fBALTER DOMAIN\fR; except for
-\fBALTER DOMAIN OWNER\fR, which may only be executed by a superuser.
-.PP
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (possibly schema-qualified) of an existing domain to
-alter.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdomain_constraint\fB\fR
-New domain constraint for the domain.
-.TP
-\fB\fIconstraint_name\fB\fR
-Name of an existing constraint to drop.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the constraint.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the constraint if there are any dependent
-objects. This is the default behavior.
-.TP
-\fB\fInew_owner\fB\fR
-The user name of the new owner of the domain.
-.PP
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To add a NOT NULL constraint to a domain:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER DOMAIN zipcode SET NOT NULL;
-
-.sp
-.fi
-To remove a NOT NULL constraint from a domain:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER DOMAIN zipcode DROP NOT NULL;
-
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To add a check constraint to a domain:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER DOMAIN zipcode ADD CONSTRAINT zipchk CHECK (char_length(VALUE) = 5);
-
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To remove a check constraint from a domain:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER DOMAIN zipcode DROP CONSTRAINT zipchk;
-
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBALTER DOMAIN\fR statement is compatible with SQL99,
-except for the OWNER variant, which is a
-PostgreSQL extension.
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_function.7 b/raw/man7/alter_function.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 04781bf..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_function.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER FUNCTION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER FUNCTION \- change the definition of a function
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER FUNCTION \fIname\fR ( [ \fItype\fR [, ...] ] ) RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER FUNCTION\fR changes the definition of a
-function. The only functionality is to rename the function.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing function.
-.TP
-\fB\fItype\fB\fR
-The data type of an argument of the function.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the function.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To rename the function sqrt for type
-\fBinteger\fR to square_root:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER FUNCTION sqrt(integer) RENAME TO square_root;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is an \fBALTER FUNCTION\fR statement in the SQL
-standard, but it does not provide the option to rename the
-function.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)], DROP FUNCTION [\fBdrop_function\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_group.7 b/raw/man7/alter_group.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 882826f..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_group.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER GROUP" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER GROUP \- change a user group
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER GROUP \fIgroupname\fR ADD USER \fIusername\fR [, ... ]
-ALTER GROUP \fIgroupname\fR DROP USER \fIusername\fR [, ... ]
-
-ALTER GROUP \fIgroupname\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER GROUP\fR is used to change a user group. The
-first two variants add or remove users from a group. Only database
-superusers can use this command. Adding a user to a group does not
-create the user. Similarly, removing a user from a group does not
-drop the user itself.
-.PP
-The third variant changes the name of the group. Only a database
-superuser can rename groups.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIgroupname\fB\fR
-The name of the group to modify.
-.TP
-\fB\fIusername\fB\fR
-Users which are to be added or removed from the group. The users
-must exist.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the group.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Add users to a group:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER GROUP staff ADD USER karl, john;
-.sp
-.fi
-Remove a user from a group:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER GROUP workers DROP USER beth;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBALTER GROUP\fR statement in the SQL
-standard. The concept of roles is similar.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE GROUP [\fBcreate_group\fR(7)], DROP GROUP [\fBdrop_group\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_language.7 b/raw/man7/alter_language.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d92c25..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_language.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,30 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER LANGUAGE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER LANGUAGE \- change the definition of a procedural language
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER LANGUAGE \fIname\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER LANGUAGE\fR changes the definition of a
-language. The only functionality is to rename the language. Only
-a superuser can rename languages.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-Name of a language
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the language
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBALTER LANGUAGE\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE LANGUAGE [\fBcreate_language\fR(7)], DROP LANGUAGE [\fBdrop_language\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_operator_class.7 b/raw/man7/alter_operator_class.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ddf21c..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_operator_class.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER OPERATOR CLASS" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER OPERATOR CLASS \- change the definition of an operator class
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER OPERATOR CLASS \fIname\fR USING \fIindex_method\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER OPERATOR CLASS\fR changes the definition of
-an operator class. The only functionality is to rename the
-operator class.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing operator
-class.
-.TP
-\fB\fIindex_method\fB\fR
-The name of the index method this operator class is for.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the operator class.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBALTER OPERATOR CLASS\fR statement in
-the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE OPERATOR CLASS [\fBcreate_operator_class\fR(7)], DROP OPERATOR CLASS [\fBdrop_operator_class\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_schema.7 b/raw/man7/alter_schema.7
deleted file mode 100644
index feb2d50..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_schema.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,31 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER SCHEMA" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Schema Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER SCHEMA \- change the definition of a schema
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER SCHEMA \fIname\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER SCHEMA\fR changes the definition of a schema.
-The only functionality is to rename the schema. To rename a schema
-you must own the schema and have the privilege
-CREATE for the database.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-Name of a schema
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the schema
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBALTER SCHEMA\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE SCHEMA [\fBcreate_schema\fR(7)], DROP SCHEMA [\fBdrop_schema\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_sequence.7 b/raw/man7/alter_sequence.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 36e8036..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_sequence.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER SEQUENCE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER SEQUENCE \- alter the definition of a sequence generator
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER SEQUENCE \fIname\fR [ INCREMENT [ BY ] \fIincrement\fR ]
- [ MINVALUE \fIminvalue\fR | NO MINVALUE ] [ MAXVALUE \fImaxvalue\fR | NO MAXVALUE ]
- [ RESTART [ WITH ] \fIstart\fR ] [ CACHE \fIcache\fR ] [ [ NO ] CYCLE ]
-
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER SEQUENCE\fR changes the parameters of an existing
-sequence generator. Any parameter not specifically set in the
-\fBALTER SEQUENCE\fR command retains its prior setting.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a sequence to be altered.
-.TP
-\fB\fIincrement\fB\fR
-The clause INCREMENT BY \fIincrement\fR is
-optional. A positive value will make an ascending sequence, a
-negative one a descending sequence. If unspecified, the old
-increment value will be maintained.
-.TP
-\fB\fIminvalue\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fBNO MINVALUE\fR
-The optional clause MINVALUE \fIminvalue\fR determines
-the minimum value a sequence can generate. If NO
-MINVALUE is specified, the defaults of 1 and
--263-1 for ascending and descending sequences,
-respectively, will be used. If neither option is specified,
-the current minimum value will be maintained.
-.TP
-\fB\fImaxvalue\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fBNO MAXVALUE\fR
-The optional clause MAXVALUE \fImaxvalue\fR determines
-the maximum value for the sequence. If NO
-MAXVALUE is specified, the defaults are
-263-1 and -1 for ascending and descending
-sequences, respectively, will be used. If neither option is
-specified, the current maximum value will be maintained.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstart\fB\fR
-The optional clause RESTART WITH \fIstart\fR changes the
-current value of the sequence.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcache\fB\fR
-The clause CACHE \fIcache\fR enables
-sequence numbers to be preallocated and stored in memory for
-faster access. The minimum value is 1 (only one value can be
-generated at a time, i.e., no cache). If unspecified, the old
-cache value will be maintained.
-.TP
-\fBCYCLE\fR
-The optional CYCLE key word may be used to enable
-the sequence to wrap around when the
-\fImaxvalue\fR or
-\fIminvalue\fR has been
-reached by
-an ascending or descending sequence respectively. If the limit is
-reached, the next number generated will be the
-\fIminvalue\fR or
-\fImaxvalue\fR,
-respectively.
-.TP
-\fBNO CYCLE\fR
-If the optional NO CYCLE key word is
-specified, any calls to \fBnextval\fR after the
-sequence has reached its maximum value will return an error.
-If neither CYCLE or NO
-CYCLE are specified, the old cycle behaviour will be
-maintained.
-.PP
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Restart a sequence called serial, at 105:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER SEQUENCE serial RESTART WITH 105;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-To avoid blocking of concurrent transactions that obtain numbers from the
-same sequence, \fBALTER SEQUENCE\fR is never rolled back;
-the changes take effect immediately and are not reversible.
-.PP
-\fBALTER SEQUENCE\fR will not immediately affect
-nextval results in backends,
-other than the current one, that have preallocated (cached) sequence
-values. They will use up all cached values prior to noticing the changed
-sequence parameters. The current backend will be affected immediately.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.SS "SQL99"
-.PP
-\fBALTER SEQUENCE\fR is a PostgreSQL
-language extension.
-There is no \fBALTER SEQUENCE\fR statement
-in SQL99.
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_table.7 b/raw/man7/alter_table.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 3a0f6ef..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_table.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,304 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER TABLE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER TABLE \- change the definition of a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- ADD [ COLUMN ] \fIcolumn\fR \fItype\fR [ \fIcolumn_constraint\fR [ ... ] ]
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- DROP [ COLUMN ] \fIcolumn\fR [ RESTRICT | CASCADE ]
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- ALTER [ COLUMN ] \fIcolumn\fR { SET DEFAULT \fIexpression\fR | DROP DEFAULT }
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- ALTER [ COLUMN ] \fIcolumn\fR { SET | DROP } NOT NULL
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- ALTER [ COLUMN ] \fIcolumn\fR SET STATISTICS \fIinteger\fR
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- ALTER [ COLUMN ] \fIcolumn\fR SET STORAGE { PLAIN | EXTERNAL | EXTENDED | MAIN }
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- SET WITHOUT OIDS
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- RENAME [ COLUMN ] \fIcolumn\fR TO \fInew_column\fR
-ALTER TABLE \fIname\fR
- RENAME TO \fInew_name\fR
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- ADD \fItable_constraint\fR
-ALTER TABLE [ ONLY ] \fIname\fR [ * ]
- DROP CONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fR [ RESTRICT | CASCADE ]
-ALTER TABLE \fIname\fR
- OWNER TO \fInew_owner\fR
-ALTER TABLE \fIname\fR
- CLUSTER ON \fIindex_name\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER TABLE\fR changes the definition of an existing table.
-There are several subforms:
-.TP
-\fBADD COLUMN\fR
-This form adds a new column to the table using the same syntax as
-CREATE TABLE [\fBcreate_table\fR(7)].
-.TP
-\fBDROP COLUMN\fR
-This form drops a column from a table. Indexes and
-table constraints involving the column will be automatically
-dropped as well. You will need to say CASCADE if
-anything outside the table depends on the column, for example,
-foreign key references or views.
-.TP
-\fBSET/DROP DEFAULT\fR
-These forms set or remove the default value for a column.
-The default values only apply to subsequent \fBINSERT\fR
-commands; they do not cause rows already in the table to change.
-Defaults may also be created for views, in which case they are
-inserted into \fBINSERT\fR statements on the view before
-the view's ON INSERT rule is applied.
-.TP
-\fBSET/DROP NOT NULL\fR
-These forms change whether a column is marked to allow null
-values or to reject null values. You can only use SET
-NOT NULL when the column contains no null values.
-.TP
-\fBSET STATISTICS\fR
-This form
-sets the per-column statistics-gathering target for subsequent
-ANALYZE [\fBanalyze\fR(7)] operations.
-The target can be set in the range 0 to 1000; alternatively, set it
-to -1 to revert to using the system default statistics target.
-.TP
-\fBSET STORAGE\fR
-This form sets the storage mode for a column. This controls whether this
-column is held inline or in a supplementary table, and whether the data
-should be compressed or not. PLAIN must be used
-for fixed-length values such as \fBinteger\fR and is
-inline, uncompressed. MAIN is for inline,
-compressible data. EXTERNAL is for external,
-uncompressed data, and EXTENDED is for external,
-compressed data. EXTENDED is the default for all
-data types that support it. The use of EXTERNAL will, for example,
-make substring operations on a \fBtext\fR column faster, at the penalty of
-increased storage space.
-.TP
-\fBSET WITHOUT OIDS\fR
-This form removes the oid column from the
-table. Removing OIDs from a table does not occur immediately.
-The space that the OID uses will be reclaimed when the row is
-updated. Without updating the row, both the space and the value
-of the OID are kept indefinitely. This is semantically similar
-to the DROP COLUMN process.
-.TP
-\fBRENAME\fR
-The RENAME forms change the name of a table
-(or an index, sequence, or view) or the name of an individual column in
-a table. There is no effect on the stored data.
-.TP
-\fBADD \fItable_constraint\fB\fR
-This form adds a new constraint to a table using the same syntax as
-CREATE TABLE [\fBcreate_table\fR(7)].
-.TP
-\fBDROP CONSTRAINT\fR
-This form drops constraints on a table.
-Currently, constraints on tables are not required to have unique
-names, so there may be more than one constraint matching the specified
-name. All such constraints will be dropped.
-.TP
-\fBOWNER\fR
-This form changes the owner of the table, index, sequence, or view to the
-specified user.
-.TP
-\fBCLUSTER\fR
-This form marks a table for future CLUSTER [\fBcluster\fR(7)]
-operations.
-.PP
-.PP
-You must own the table to use \fBALTER TABLE\fR; except for
-\fBALTER TABLE OWNER\fR, which may only be executed by a superuser.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (possibly schema-qualified) of an existing table to
-alter. If ONLY is specified, only that table is
-altered. If ONLY is not specified, the table and all
-its descendant tables (if any) are updated. * can be
-appended to the table name to indicate that descendant tables are
-to be altered, but in the current version, this is the default
-behavior. (In releases before 7.1, ONLY was the
-default behavior. The default can be altered by changing the
-configuration parameter sql_inheritance.)
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-Name of a new or existing column.
-.TP
-\fB\fItype\fB\fR
-Data type of the new column.
-.TP
-\fB\fInew_column\fB\fR
-New name for an existing column.
-.TP
-\fB\fInew_name\fB\fR
-New name for the table.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable_constraint\fB\fR
-New table constraint for the table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIconstraint_name\fB\fR
-Name of an existing constraint to drop.
-.TP
-\fB\fInew_owner\fB\fR
-The user name of the new owner of the table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIindex_name\fB\fR
-The index name on which the table should be marked for clustering.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the dropped column
-or constraint (for example, views referencing the column).
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the column or constraint if there are any dependent
-objects. This is the default behavior.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-The key word COLUMN is noise and can be omitted.
-.PP
-In the current implementation of ADD COLUMN,
-default and NOT NULL clauses for the new column are not supported.
-The new column always comes into being with all values null.
-You can use the SET DEFAULT form
-of \fBALTER TABLE\fR to set the default afterward.
-(You may also want to update the already existing rows to the
-new default value, using
-UPDATE [\fBupdate\fR(7)].)
-If you want to mark the column non-null, use the SET NOT NULL
-form after you've entered non-null values for the column in all rows.
-.PP
-The DROP COLUMN form does not physically remove
-the column, but simply makes it invisible to SQL operations. Subsequent
-insert and update operations in the table will store a null value for the column.
-Thus, dropping a column is quick but it will not immediately reduce the
-on-disk size of your table, as the space occupied
-by the dropped column is not reclaimed. The space will be
-reclaimed over time as existing rows are updated.
-To reclaim the space at once, do a dummy \fBUPDATE\fR of all rows
-and then vacuum, as in:
-.sp
-.nf
-UPDATE table SET col = col;
-VACUUM FULL table;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-If a table has any descendant tables, it is not permitted to add
-or rename a column in the parent table without doing the same to
-the descendants. That is, \fBALTER TABLE ONLY\fR
-will be rejected. This ensures that the descendants always have
-columns matching the parent.
-.PP
-A recursive DROP COLUMN operation will remove a
-descendant table's column only if the descendant does not inherit
-that column from any other parents and never had an independent
-definition of the column. A nonrecursive DROP
-COLUMN (i.e., \fBALTER TABLE ONLY ... DROP
-COLUMN\fR) never removes any descendant columns, but
-instead marks them as independently defined rather than inherited.
-.PP
-Changing any part of a system catalog table is not permitted.
-.PP
-Refer to \fBCREATE TABLE\fR for a further description
-of valid parameters. The chapter called ``Data Definition'' in the documentation has further information on
-inheritance.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To add a column of type \fBvarchar\fR to a table:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors ADD COLUMN address varchar(30);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To drop a column from a table:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors DROP COLUMN address RESTRICT;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To rename an existing column:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors RENAME COLUMN address TO city;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To rename an existing table:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors RENAME TO suppliers;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To add a not-null constraint to a column:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors ALTER COLUMN street SET NOT NULL;
-.sp
-.fi
-To remove a not-null constraint from a column:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors ALTER COLUMN street DROP NOT NULL;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To add a check constraint to a table:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors ADD CONSTRAINT zipchk CHECK (char_length(zipcode) = 5);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To remove a check constraint from a table and all its children:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors DROP CONSTRAINT zipchk;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To add a foreign key constraint to a table:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors ADD CONSTRAINT distfk FOREIGN KEY (address) REFERENCES addresses (address) MATCH FULL;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To add a (multicolumn) unique constraint to a table:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors ADD CONSTRAINT dist_id_zipcode_key UNIQUE (dist_id, zipcode);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To add an automatically named primary key constraint to a table, noting
-that a table can only ever have one primary key:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TABLE distributors ADD PRIMARY KEY (dist_id);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The ADD COLUMN form conforms with the SQL
-standard, with the exception that it does not support defaults and
-not-null constraints, as explained above. The ALTER
-COLUMN form is in full conformance.
-.PP
-The clauses to rename tables, columns, indexes, views, and sequences are
-PostgreSQL extensions of the SQL standard.
-.PP
-\fBALTER TABLE DROP COLUMN\fR can be used to drop the only
-column of a table, leaving a zero-column table. This is an
-extension of SQL, which disallows zero-column tables.
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_trigger.7 b/raw/man7/alter_trigger.7
deleted file mode 100644
index ef74be0..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_trigger.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER TRIGGER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER TRIGGER \- change the definition of a trigger
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TRIGGER \fIname\fR ON \fItable\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER TRIGGER\fR changes properties of an existing
-trigger. The RENAME clause changes the name of
-the given trigger without otherwise changing the trigger
-definition.
-.PP
-You must own the table on which the trigger acts to be allowed to change its properties.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of an existing trigger to alter.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name of the table on which this trigger acts.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name for the trigger.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To rename an existing trigger:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER TRIGGER emp_stamp ON emp RENAME TO emp_track_chgs;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBALTER TRIGGER\fR is a PostgreSQL
-extension of the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/alter_user.7 b/raw/man7/alter_user.7
deleted file mode 100644
index e37f129..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/alter_user.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ALTER USER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ALTER USER \- change a database user account
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER USER \fIname\fR [ [ WITH ] \fIoption\fR [ ... ] ]
-
-where \fIoption\fR can be:
-
- [ ENCRYPTED | UNENCRYPTED ] PASSWORD '\fIpassword\fR'
- | CREATEDB | NOCREATEDB
- | CREATEUSER | NOCREATEUSER
- | VALID UNTIL '\fIabstime\fR'
-
-ALTER USER \fIname\fR RENAME TO \fInewname\fR
-
-ALTER USER \fIname\fR SET \fIparameter\fR { TO | = } { \fIvalue\fR | DEFAULT }
-ALTER USER \fIname\fR RESET \fIparameter\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBALTER USER\fR is used to change the attributes of a
-PostgreSQL user account. Attributes not
-mentioned in the command retain their previous settings.
-.PP
-The first variant of this command in the synopsis changes certain
-global user privileges and authentication settings. (See below for
-details.) Only a database superuser can change these privileges and
-the password expiration with this command. Ordinary users can only
-change their own password.
-.PP
-The second variant changes the name of the user. Only a database
-superuser can rename user accounts. The session user cannot be
-renamed. (Connect as a different user if you need to do that.)
-.PP
-The third and the fourth variant change a user's session default for
-a specified configuration variable. Whenever the user subsequently
-starts a new session, the specified value becomes the session default,
-overriding whatever setting is present in \fIpostgresql.conf\fR
-or has been received from the \fBpostmaster\fR command line.
-Ordinary users can change their own session defaults.
-Superusers can change anyone's session defaults.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the user whose attributes are to be altered.
-.TP
-\fB\fIpassword\fB\fR
-The new password to be used for this account.
-.TP
-\fBENCRYPTED\fR
-.TP
-\fBUNENCRYPTED\fR
-These key words control whether the password is stored
-encrypted in pg_shadow. (See
-CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(7)]
-for more information about this choice.)
-.TP
-\fBCREATEDB\fR
-.TP
-\fBNOCREATEDB\fR
-These clauses define a user's ability to create databases. If
-CREATEDB is specified, the user
-will be allowed to create his own databases. Using
-NOCREATEDB will deny a user the ability to
-create databases.
-.TP
-\fBCREATEUSER\fR
-.TP
-\fBNOCREATEUSER\fR
-These clauses determine whether a user will be permitted to
-create new users himself. This option will also make the user
-a superuser who can override all access restrictions.
-.TP
-\fB\fIabstime\fB\fR
-The date (and, optionally, the time)
-at which this user's password is to expire. To set the password
-never to expire, use 'infinity'.
-.TP
-\fB\fInewname\fB\fR
-The new name of the user.
-.TP
-\fB\fIparameter\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fIvalue\fB\fR
-Set this user's session default for the specified configuration
-parameter to the given value. If
-\fIvalue\fR is DEFAULT
-or, equivalently, RESET is used, the
-user-specific variable setting is removed and the user will
-inherit the system-wide default setting in new sessions. Use
-RESET ALL to clear all settings.
-
-See SET [\fBset\fR(7)] and the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation for more information about allowed
-parameter names and values.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(7)]
-to add new users, and DROP USER [\fBdrop_user\fR(7)] to remove a user.
-.PP
-\fBALTER USER\fR cannot change a user's group memberships.
-Use ALTER GROUP [\fBalter_group\fR(7)]
-to do that.
-.PP
-Using ALTER DATABASE [\fBalter_database\fR(7)], it is also possible to tie a
-session default to a specific database rather than a user.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Change a user password:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER USER davide WITH PASSWORD 'hu8jmn3';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Change a user's valid until date:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER USER manuel VALID UNTIL 'Jan 31 2030';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Change a user's valid until date, specifying that his
-authorization should expire at midday on 4th May 2005 using
-the time zone which is one hour ahead of UTC:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER USER chris VALID UNTIL 'May 4 12:00:00 2005 +1';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Make a user valid forever:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER USER fred VALID UNTIL 'infinity';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Give a user the ability to create other users and new databases:
-.sp
-.nf
-ALTER USER miriam CREATEUSER CREATEDB;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBALTER USER\fR statement is a
-PostgreSQL extension. The SQL standard
-leaves the definition of users to the implementation.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(7)], DROP USER [\fBdrop_user\fR(l)], SET [\fBset\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/analyze.7 b/raw/man7/analyze.7
deleted file mode 100644
index ecfc63d..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/analyze.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ANALYZE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ANALYZE \- collect statistics about a database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ANALYZE [ VERBOSE ] [ \fItable\fR [ (\fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ] ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBANALYZE\fR collects statistics about the contents
-of tables in the database, and stores the results in the system
-table pg_statistic. Subsequently, the query
-planner uses these statistics to help determine the most efficient
-execution plans for queries.
-.PP
-With no parameter, \fBANALYZE\fR examines every table in the
-current database. With a parameter, \fBANALYZE\fR examines
-only that table. It is further possible to give a list of column names,
-in which case only the statistics for those columns are collected.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBVERBOSE\fR
-Enables display of progress messages.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (possibly schema-qualified) of a specific table to
-analyze. Defaults to all tables in the current database.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-The name of a specific column to analyze. Defaults to all columns.
-.SH "OUTPUTS"
-.PP
-When VERBOSE is specified, \fBANALYZE\fR emits
-progress messages to indicate which table is currently being
-processed. Various statistics about the tables are printed as well.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-It is a good idea to run \fBANALYZE\fR periodically, or
-just after making major changes in the contents of a table. Accurate
-statistics will help the planner to choose the most appropriate query
-plan, and thereby improve the speed of query processing. A common
-strategy is to run VACUUM [\fBvacuum\fR(7)]
-and \fBANALYZE\fR once a day during a low-usage time of day.
-.PP
-Unlike \fBVACUUM FULL\fR, \fBANALYZE\fR
-requires only a read lock on the target table, so it can run in
-parallel with other activity on the table.
-.PP
-The statistics collected by \fBANALYZE\fR usually
-include a list of some of the most common values in each column and
-a histogram showing the approximate data distribution in each
-column. One or both of these may be omitted if
-\fBANALYZE\fR deems them uninteresting (for example,
-in a unique-key column, there are no common values) or if the
-column data type does not support the appropriate operators. There
-is more information about the statistics in the chapter called ``Routine Database Maintenance'' in the documentation.
-.PP
-For large tables, \fBANALYZE\fR takes a random sample
-of the table contents, rather than examining every row. This
-allows even very large tables to be analyzed in a small amount of
-time. Note, however, that the statistics are only approximate, and
-will change slightly each time \fBANALYZE\fR is run,
-even if the actual table contents did not change. This may result
-in small changes in the planner's estimated costs shown by
-\fBEXPLAIN\fR. In rare situations, this
-non-determinism will cause the query optimizer to choose a
-different query plan between runs of \fBANALYZE\fR. To
-avoid this, raise the amount of statistics collected by
-\fBANALYZE\fR, as described below.
-.PP
-The extent of analysis can be controlled by adjusting the
-DEFAULT_STATISTICS_TARGET parameter variable, or
-on a column-by-column basis by setting the per-column statistics
-target with \fBALTER TABLE ... ALTER COLUMN ... SET
-STATISTICS\fR (see ALTER TABLE [\fBalter_table\fR(7)]). The target value sets the
-maximum number of entries in the most-common-value list and the
-maximum number of bins in the histogram. The default target value
-is 10, but this can be adjusted up or down to trade off accuracy of
-planner estimates against the time taken for
-\fBANALYZE\fR and the amount of space occupied in
-pg_statistic. In particular, setting the
-statistics target to zero disables collection of statistics for
-that column. It may be useful to do that for columns that are
-never used as part of the WHERE, GROUP BY,
-or ORDER BY clauses of queries, since the planner will
-have no use for statistics on such columns.
-.PP
-The largest statistics target among the columns being analyzed determines
-the number of table rows sampled to prepare the statistics. Increasing
-the target causes a proportional increase in the time and space needed
-to do \fBANALYZE\fR.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBANALYZE\fR statement in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/arp.7 b/raw/man7/arp.7
deleted file mode 100644
index adcc362..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/arp.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,264 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Matthew Wilcox <willy at bofh.ai>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" Modified June 1999 Andi Kleen
-.\" $Id: arp.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.TH ARP 7 1999-06-03 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-arp \- Linux ARP kernel module.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This kernel protocol module implements the Address Resolution
-Protocol defined in RFC 826.
-It is used to convert between Layer2 hardware addresses
-and IPv4 protocol addresses on directly connected networks.
-The user normally doesn't interact directly with this module except to
-configure it;
-instead it provides a service for other protocols in the kernel.
-
-A user process can receive ARP packets by using
-.BR packet (7)
-sockets. There is also a mechanism for managing the ARP cache
-in user-space by using
-.BR netlink (7)
-sockets. The ARP table can also be controlled via
-.B ioctl (2)
-on any
-.B PF_INET
-socket.
-
-The ARP module maintains a cache of mappings between hardware addresses
-and protocol addresses. The cache has a limited size so old and less
-frequently used entries are garbage-collected. Entries which are marked
-as permanent are never deleted by the garbage-collector. The cache can
-be directly manipulated by the use of ioctls and its behaviour can be
-tuned by the sysctls defined below.
-
-When there is no positive feedback for an existing mapping after some
-time (see the sysctls below) a neighbour cache entry is considered stale.
-Positive feedback can be gotten from a higher layer; for example from
-a successful TCP ACK. Other protocols can signal forward progress
-using the
-.B MSG_CONFIRM
-flag to
-.BR sendmsg (2).
-When there is no forward progress ARP tries to reprobe.
-It first tries to ask a local arp daemon
-.B app_solicit
-times for an updated MAC address.
-If that fails and an old MAC address is known an unicast probe is send
-.B ucast_solicit
-times. If that fails too it will broadcast a new ARP
-request to the network. Requests are only send when there is data queued
-for sending.
-
-Linux will automatically add a non-permanent proxy arp entry when it receives
-a request for an address it forwards to and proxy arp is enabled on the
-receiving interface. When there is a reject route for the target
-no proxy arp entry is added.
-
-.SH IOCTLS
-Three ioctls are available on all
-.B PF_INET
-sockets.
-They take a pointer to a
-.B struct arpreq
-as their parameter.
-
-.nf
-.ta 4 20 33
-struct arpreq
-{
- struct sockaddr arp_pa; /* protocol address */
- struct sockaddr arp_ha; /* hardware address */
- int arp_flags; /* flags */
- struct sockaddr arp_netmask; /* netmask of protocol address */
- char arp_dev[16];
-};
-.fi
-
-.BR SIOCSARP ", " SIOCDARP " and " SIOCGARP
-respectively set, delete and get an ARP mapping.
-Setting & deleting ARP maps are privileged operations and may
-only be performed by a process with the
-.B CAP_NET_ADMIN
-capability or an effective UID of 0.
-
-.I arp_pa
-must be an
-.B AF_INET
-socket and
-.I arp_ha
-must have the same type as the device which is specified in
-.IR arp_dev .
-.I arp_dev
-is a zero-terminated string which names a device.
-
-.TS
-tab(:) allbox;
-c s
-l l.
-\fIarp_flags\fR
-flag:meaning
-ATF_COM:Lookup complete
-ATF_PERM:Permanent entry
-ATF_PUBL:Publish entry
-ATF_USETRAILERS:Trailers requested
-ATF_NETMASK:Use a netmask
-ATF_DONTPUB:Don't answer
-.TE
-
-.PP
-
-If the
-.B ATF_NETMASK
-flag is set, then
-.I arp_netmask
-should be valid.
-Linux 2.2 does not support proxy network ARP entries, so this
-should be set to 0xffffffff, or 0 to remove an existing proxy arp entry.
-.B ATF_USETRAILERS
-is obsolete and should not be used.
-
-.SH SYSCTLS
-ARP supports a sysctl interface to configure parameters on a global
-or per-interface basis.
-The sysctls can be accessed by reading or writing the
-.B /proc/sys/net/ipv4/neigh/*/*
-files or with the
-.BR sysctl (2)
-interface. Each interface in the system has its own directory in
-/proc/sys/net/ipv4/neigh/.
-The setting in the `default' directory is used for all newly created devices.
-Unless otherwise specified time related sysctls are specified in seconds.
-.TP
-.B anycast_delay
-The maximum number of jiffies to delay before replying to a
-IPv6 neighbour solicitation message.
-Anycast support is not yet implemented.
-Defaults to 1 second.
-.TP
-.B app_solicit
-The maximum number of probes to send to the user space ARP daemon via
-netlink before dropping back to multicast probes (see
-.IR mcast_solicit ).
-Defaults to 0.
-.TP
-.B base_reachable_time
-Once a neighbour has been found, the entry is considered to be valid
-for at least a random value between
-.IR base_reachable_time "/2 and 3*" base_reachable_time /2.
-An entry's validity will be extended if it receives positive feedback
-from higher level protocols.
-Defaults to 30 seconds.
-.TP
-.B delay_first_probe_time
-Delay before first probe after it has been decided that a neighbour
-is stale.
-Defaults to 5 seconds.
-.TP
-.B gc_interval
-How frequently the garbage collector for neighbour entries
-should attempt to run.
-Defaults to 30 seconds.
-.TP
-.B gc_stale_time
-Determines how often to check for stale neighbour entries. When
-a neighbour entry is considered stale it is resolved again before
-sending data to it.
-Defaults to 60 seconds.
-.TP
-.B gc_thresh1
-The minimum number of entries to keep in the ARP cache.
-The garbage collector will not run if there are fewer than
-this number of entries in the cache.
-Defaults to 128.
-.TP
-.B gc_thresh2
-The soft maximum number of entries to keep in the ARP cache.
-The garbage collector will allow the number of entries to exceed
-this for 5 seconds before collection will be performed.
-Defaults to 512.
-.TP
-.B gc_thresh3
-The hard maximum number of entries to keep in the ARP cache.
-The garbage collector will always run if there are more than
-this number of entries in the cache.
-Defaults to 1024.
-.TP
-.B locktime
-The minimum number of jiffies to keep an ARP entry in the cache.
-This prevents ARP cache thrashing if there is more than one potential
-mapping (generally due to network misconfiguration).
-Defaults to 1 second.
-.TP
-.B mcast_solicit
-The maximum number of attempts to resolve an address by multicast/broadcast
-before marking the entry as unreachable.
-Defaults to 3.
-.TP
-.B proxy_delay
-When an ARP request for a known proxy-ARP address is received, delay up to
-.I proxy_delay
-jiffies before replying.
-This is used to prevent network flooding in some cases.
-Defaults to 0.8 seconds.
-.TP
-.B proxy_qlen
-The maximum number of packets which may be queued to proxy-ARP addresses.
-Defaults to 64.
-.TP
-.B retrans_time
-The number of jiffies to delay before retransmitting a request.
-Defaults to 1 second.
-.TP
-.B ucast_solicit
-The maximum number of attempts to send unicast probes before asking
-the ARP daemon (see
-.IR app_solicit ).
-Defaults to 3.
-.TP
-.B unres_qlen
-The maximum number of packets which may be queued for each unresolved
-address by other network layers.
-Defaults to 3.
-
-.SH BUGS
-Some timer settings are specified in jiffies, which is architecture related.
-On the Alpha a jiffy is 1/1024 of a second, on most other architectures it
-is 1/100s.
-
-There is no way to signal positive feedback from user space. This means
-connection oriented protocols implemented in user space will generate
-excessive ARP traffic, because ndisc will regularly reprobe the MAC address.
-The same problem applies for some kernel protocols (e.g. NFS over UDP).
-
-This man page mashes IPv4 specific and shared between IPv4 and IPv6
-functionality together.
-
-.SH VERSIONS
-The
-.B struct arpreq
-changed in Linux 2.0 to include the
-.I arp_dev
-member and the ioctl numbers changed at the same time.
-Support for the old ioctls was dropped in Linux 2.2.
-
-Support for proxy arp entries for networks (netmask not equal 0xffffffff)
-was dropped in Linux 2.2. It is replaced by automatic proxy arp setup by
-the kernel for all reachable hosts on other interfaces (when forwarding and
-proxy arp is enabled for the interface).
-
-The neigh/* sysctls did not exist before Linux 2.2.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ip (7)
-.PP
-RFC826 for a description of ARP.
-.br
-RFC2461 for a description of IPv6 neighbour discovery and the base
-algorithms used.
-.LP
-Linux 2.2+ IPv4 ARP uses the IPv6 algorithms when applicable.
diff --git a/raw/man7/ascii.7 b/raw/man7/ascii.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 6dd1c69..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/ascii.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de)
-.\" Created Fri Apr 2 11:32:09 MET DST 1993
-.\"
-.\" %%%LICENSE_START(GPLv2+_DOC_FULL)
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, see
-.\" <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
-.\" %%%LICENSE_END
-.\"
-.\" Modified 1993-07-24 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified 1994-05-15 by Daniel Quinlan (quinlan at yggdrasil.com)
-.\" Modified 1994-11-22 by Daniel Quinlan (quinlan at yggdrasil.com)
-.\" Modified 1995-07-11 by Daniel Quinlan (quinlan at yggdrasil.com)
-.\" Modified 1996-12-18 by Michael Haardt and aeb
-.\" Modified 1999-05-31 by Dimitri Papadopoulos (dpo at club-internet.fr)
-.\" Modified 1999-08-08 by Michael Haardt (michael at moria.de)
-.\" Modified 2004-04-01 by aeb
-.\"
-.TH ASCII 7 2009-02-12 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-ascii \- ASCII character set encoded in octal, decimal, and hexadecimal
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-ASCII is the American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
-It is a 7-bit code.
-Many 8-bit codes (such as ISO 8859-1, the
-Linux default character set) contain ASCII as their lower half.
-The international counterpart of ASCII is known as ISO 646.
-.LP
-The following table contains the 128 ASCII characters.
-.LP
-C program \f(CW\(aq\eX\(aq\fP escapes are noted.
-.if t \{\
-.ft CW
-\}
-.TS
-l l l l l l l l.
-Oct Dec Hex Char Oct Dec Hex Char
-_
-000 0 00 NUL \(aq\e0\(aq 100 64 40 @
-001 1 01 SOH (start of heading) 101 65 41 A
-002 2 02 STX (start of text) 102 66 42 B
-003 3 03 ETX (end of text) 103 67 43 C
-004 4 04 EOT (end of transmission) 104 68 44 D
-005 5 05 ENQ (enquiry) 105 69 45 E
-006 6 06 ACK (acknowledge) 106 70 46 F
-007 7 07 BEL \(aq\ea\(aq (bell) 107 71 47 G
-010 8 08 BS \(aq\eb\(aq (backspace) 110 72 48 H
-011 9 09 HT \(aq\et\(aq (horizontal tab) 111 73 49 I
-012 10 0A LF \(aq\en\(aq (new line) 112 74 4A J
-013 11 0B VT \(aq\ev\(aq (vertical tab) 113 75 4B K
-014 12 0C FF \(aq\ef\(aq (form feed) 114 76 4C L
-015 13 0D CR \(aq\er\(aq (carriage ret) 115 77 4D M
-016 14 0E SO (shift out) 116 78 4E N
-017 15 0F SI (shift in) 117 79 4F O
-020 16 10 DLE (data link escape) 120 80 50 P
-021 17 11 DC1 (device control 1) 121 81 51 Q
-022 18 12 DC2 (device control 2) 122 82 52 R
-023 19 13 DC3 (device control 3) 123 83 53 S
-024 20 14 DC4 (device control 4) 124 84 54 T
-025 21 15 NAK (negative ack.) 125 85 55 U
-026 22 16 SYN (synchronous idle) 126 86 56 V
-027 23 17 ETB (end of trans. blk) 127 87 57 W
-030 24 18 CAN (cancel) 130 88 58 X
-031 25 19 EM (end of medium) 131 89 59 Y
-032 26 1A SUB (substitute) 132 90 5A Z
-033 27 1B ESC (escape) 133 91 5B [
-034 28 1C FS (file separator) 134 92 5C \e \(aq\e\e\(aq
-035 29 1D GS (group separator) 135 93 5D ]
-036 30 1E RS (record separator) 136 94 5E ^
-037 31 1F US (unit separator) 137 95 5F \&_
-040 32 20 SPACE 140 96 60 \`
-041 33 21 ! 141 97 61 a
-042 34 22 " 142 98 62 b
-043 35 23 # 143 99 63 c
-044 36 24 $ 144 100 64 d
-045 37 25 % 145 101 65 e
-046 38 26 & 146 102 66 f
-047 39 27 \' 147 103 67 g
-050 40 28 ( 150 104 68 h
-051 41 29 ) 151 105 69 i
-052 42 2A * 152 106 6A j
-053 43 2B + 153 107 6B k
-054 44 2C , 154 108 6C l
-055 45 2D \- 155 109 6D m
-056 46 2E . 156 110 6E n
-057 47 2F / 157 111 6F o
-060 48 30 0 160 112 70 p
-061 49 31 1 161 113 71 q
-062 50 32 2 162 114 72 r
-063 51 33 3 163 115 73 s
-064 52 34 4 164 116 74 t
-065 53 35 5 165 117 75 u
-066 54 36 6 166 118 76 v
-067 55 37 7 167 119 77 w
-070 56 38 8 170 120 78 x
-071 57 39 9 171 121 79 y
-072 58 3A : 172 122 7A z
-073 59 3B ; 173 123 7B {
-074 60 3C < 174 124 7C |
-075 61 3D = 175 125 7D }
-076 62 3E > 176 126 7E ~
-077 63 3F ? 177 127 7F DEL
-.TE
-.if t \{\
-.in
-.ft P
-\}
-.SS Tables
-For convenience, let us give more compact tables in hex and decimal.
-.sp
-.nf
-.if t \{\
-.in 1i
-.ft CW
-\}
- 2 3 4 5 6 7 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
- ------------- ---------------------------------
-0: 0 @ P \` p 0: ( 2 < F P Z d n x
-1: ! 1 A Q a q 1: ) 3 = G Q [ e o y
-2: " 2 B R b r 2: * 4 > H R \e f p z
-3: # 3 C S c s 3: ! + 5 ? I S ] g q {
-4: $ 4 D T d t 4: " , 6 @ J T ^ h r |
-5: % 5 E U e u 5: # \- 7 A K U _ i s }
-6: & 6 F V f v 6: $ . 8 B L V \` j t ~
-7: \' 7 G W g w 7: % / 9 C M W a k u DEL
-8: ( 8 H X h x 8: & 0 : D N X b l v
-9: ) 9 I Y i y 9: \' 1 ; E O Y c m w
-A: * : J Z j z
-B: + ; K [ k {
-C: , < L \e l |
-D: \- = M ] m }
-E: . > N ^ n ~
-F: / ? O _ o DEL
-.if t \{\
-.in
-.ft P
-\}
-.fi
-.SH NOTES
-.SS History
-An
-.B ascii
-manual page appeared in Version 7 of AT&T UNIX.
-.LP
-On older terminals, the underscore code is displayed as a left arrow,
-called backarrow, the caret is displayed as an up-arrow and the vertical
-bar has a hole in the middle.
-.LP
-Uppercase and lowercase characters differ by just one bit and the
-ASCII character 2 differs from the double quote by just one bit, too.
-That made it much easier to encode characters mechanically or with a
-non-microcontroller-based electronic keyboard and that pairing was found
-on old teletypes.
-.LP
-The ASCII standard was published by the United States of America
-Standards Institute (USASI) in 1968.
-.\"
-.\" ASA was the American Standards Association and X3 was an ASA sectional
-.\" committee on computers and data processing. Its name changed to
-.\" American National Standards Committee X3 (ANSC-X3) and now it is known
-.\" as Accredited Standards Committee X3 (ASC X3). It is accredited by ANSI
-.\" and administered by ITI. The subcommittee X3.2 worked on coded
-.\" character sets; the task group working on ASCII appears to have been
-.\" designated X3.2.4. In 1966, ASA became the United States of America
-.\" Standards Institute (USASI) and published ASCII in 1968. It became the
-.\" American National Standards Institute (ANSI) in 1969 and is the
-.\" U.S. member body of ISO; private and nonprofit.
-.\"
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.ad l
-.BR iso_8859-1 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-10 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-13 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-14 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-15 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-16 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-2 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-3 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-4 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-5 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-6 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-7 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-8 (7),
-.BR iso_8859-9 (7)
-.SH COLOPHON
-This page is part of release 3.53 of the Linux
-.I man-pages
-project.
-A description of the project,
-and information about reporting bugs,
-can be found at
-\%http://www.kernel.org/doc/man\-pages/.
diff --git a/raw/man7/begin.7 b/raw/man7/begin.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b598bb8..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/begin.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,71 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "BEGIN" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-BEGIN \- start a transaction block
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN [ WORK | TRANSACTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBBEGIN\fR initiates a transaction block, that is,
-all statements after \fBBEGIN\fR command will be
-executed in a single transaction until an explicit COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)] or ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(l)] is given.
-By default (without \fBBEGIN\fR),
-PostgreSQL executes
-transactions in ``autocommit'' mode, that is, each
-statement is executed in its own transaction and a commit is
-implicitly performed at the end of the statement (if execution was
-successful, otherwise a rollback is done).
-.PP
-Statements are executed more quickly in a transaction block, because
-transaction start/commit requires significant CPU and disk
-activity. Execution of multiple statements inside a transaction is
-also useful to ensure consistency when making several related changes:
-other sessions will be unable to see the intermediate states
-wherein not all the related updates have been done.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBWORK\fR
-.TP
-\fBTRANSACTION\fR
-Optional key words. They have no effect.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-START TRANSACTION [\fBstart_transaction\fR(7)] has the same functionality
-as \fBBEGIN\fR.
-.PP
-Use COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)] or
-ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(7)]
-to terminate a transaction block.
-.PP
-Issuing \fBBEGIN\fR when already inside a transaction block will
-provoke a warning message. The state of the transaction is not affected.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To begin a transaction block:
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBBEGIN\fR is a PostgreSQL
-language extension. There is no explicit \fBBEGIN\fR
-command in the SQL standard; transaction initiation is
-always implicit and it terminates either with a
-\fBCOMMIT\fR or \fBROLLBACK\fR statement.
-.PP
-Other relational database systems may offer an autocommit feature
-as a convenience.
-.PP
-Incidentally, the BEGIN key word is used for a
-different purpose in embedded SQL. You are advised to be careful
-about the transaction semantics when porting database applications.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)], ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/bootparam.7 b/raw/man7/bootparam.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a12c1f..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/bootparam.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1238 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1995,1997 Paul Gortmaker and Andries Brouwer
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" This man page written 950814 by aeb, based on Paul Gortmaker's HOWTO
-.\" (dated v1.0.1, 15/08/95).
-.\" Major update, aeb, 970114.
-.\"
-.TH BOOTPARAM 7 1995-01-14 "Linux 2.1.21" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-bootparam \- Introduction to boot time parameters of the Linux kernel
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The Linux kernel accepts certain `command line options' or `boot time
-parameters' at the moment it is started. In general this is used to
-supply the kernel with information about hardware parameters that
-the kernel would not be able to determine on its own, or to avoid/override
-the values that the kernel would otherwise detect.
-
-When the kernel is booted directly by the BIOS (say from a floppy to
-which you copied a kernel using `cp zImage /dev/fd0'),
-you have no opportunity to specify any parameters.
-So, in order to take advantage of this possibility you have to
-use software that is able to pass parameters, like LILO or loadlin.
-For a few parameters one can also modify the kernel image itself,
-using rdev, see
-.BR rdev (8)
-for further details.
-
-The LILO program (LInux LOader) written by Werner Almesberger is the
-most commonly used. It has the ability to boot various kernels, and
-stores the configuration information in a plain text file. (See
-.BR lilo (8)
-and
-.BR lilo.conf (5).)
-LILO can boot DOS, OS/2, Linux, FreeBSD, UnixWare, etc., and is quite flexible.
-
-The other commonly used Linux loader is `LoadLin' which is a DOS
-program that has the capability to launch a Linux kernel from the DOS
-prompt (with boot-args) assuming that certain resources are available.
-This is good for people that want to launch Linux from DOS.
-
-It is also very useful if you have certain hardware which relies on
-the supplied DOS driver to put the hardware into a known state. A
-common example is `SoundBlaster Compatible' sound cards that require
-the DOS driver to twiddle a few mystical registers to put the card
-into a SB compatible mode. Booting DOS with the supplied driver, and
-then loading Linux from the DOS prompt with loadlin avoids the reset
-of the card that happens if one rebooted instead.
-
-.SH "THE ARGUMENT LIST"
-
-The kernel command line is parsed into a list of strings
-(boot arguments) separated by spaces. Most of the boot args
-take the form of:
-.IP
-name[=value_1][,value_2]...[,value_10]
-.LP
-where `name' is a unique keyword that is used to identify what part of
-the kernel the associated values (if any) are to be given to.
-Note the limit of 10 is real, as the present code only handles 10 comma
-separated parameters per keyword. (However, you can re-use the same
-keyword with up to an additional 10 parameters in unusually
-complicated situations, assuming the setup function supports it.)
-
-Most of the sorting goes on in linux/init/main.c. First, the kernel
-checks to see if the argument is any of the special arguments `root=',
-`nfsroot=', `nfsaddrs=', `ro', `rw', `debug' or `init'. The meaning
-of these special arguments is described below.
-
-Then it walks a list of setup functions (contained in the bootsetups
-array) to see if the specified argument string (such as `foo') has
-been associated with a setup function (`foo_setup()') for a particular
-device or part of the kernel. If you passed the kernel the line
-foo=3,4,5,6 then the kernel would search the bootsetups array to see
-if `foo' was registered. If it was, then it would call the setup
-function associated with `foo' (foo_setup()) and hand it the arguments
-3, 4, 5 and 6 as given on the kernel command line.
-
-Anything of the form `foo=bar' that is not accepted as a setup function
-as described above is then interpreted as an environment variable to
-be set. A (useless?) example would be to use `TERM=vt100' as a boot
-argument.
-
-Any remaining arguments that were not picked up by the kernel and were
-not interpreted as environment variables are then passed onto process
-one, which is usually the init program. The most common argument that
-is passed to the init process is the word `single' which instructs init
-to boot the computer in single user mode, and not launch all the usual
-daemons. Check the manual page for the version of init installed on
-your system to see what arguments it accepts.
-
-.SH "GENERAL NON-DEVICE SPECIFIC BOOT ARGS"
-
-.SS "`init=...'"
-
-This sets the initial command to be executed by the kernel.
-If this is not set, or cannot be found, the kernel will try
-.IR /etc/init ,
-then
-.IR /bin/init ,
-then
-.IR /sbin/init ,
-then
-.IR /bin/sh
-and panic if all of this fails.
-
-.SS "`nfsaddrs=...'"
-
-This sets the nfs boot address to the given string.
-This boot address is used in case of a net boot.
-
-.SS "`nfsroot=...'"
-
-This sets the nfs root name to the given string. If this string
-does not begin with '/' or ',' or a digit, then it is prefixed by
-`/tftpboot/'. This root name is used in case of a net boot.
-
-.SS "`no387'"
-
-(Only when CONFIG_BUGi386 is defined.)
-Some i387 coprocessor chips have bugs that show up when used in 32 bit
-protected mode. For example, some of the early ULSI-387 chips would
-cause solid lockups while performing floating point calculations.
-Using the `no387' boot arg causes Linux to ignore the maths
-coprocessor even if you have one. Of course you must then have your
-kernel compiled with math emulation support!
-
-.SS "`no-hlt'"
-
-(Only when CONFIG_BUGi386 is defined.)
-Some of the early i486DX-100 chips have a problem with the `hlt'
-instruction, in that they can't reliably return to operating mode
-after this instruction is used. Using the `no-hlt' instruction tells
-Linux to just run an infinite loop when there is nothing else to do,
-and to not halt the CPU. This allows people with these broken chips
-to use Linux.
-
-.SS "`root=...'"
-
-This argument tells the kernel what device is to be used as the root
-filesystem while booting. The default of this setting is determined
-at compile time, and usually is the value of the root device of the
-system that the kernel was built on. To override this value, and
-select the second floppy drive as the root device, one would
-use `root=/dev/fd1'. (The root device can also be set using
-.BR rdev (8).)
-
-The root device can be specified symbolically or numerically.
-A symbolic specification has the form /dev/XXYN, where XX designates
-the device type (`hd' for ST-506 compatible hard disk, with Y in
-`a'-`d'; `sd' for SCSI compatible disk, with Y in `a'-`e';
-`ad' for Atari ACSI disk, with Y in `a'-`e',
-`ez' for a Syquest EZ135 parallel port removable drive, with Y=`a',
-`xd' for XT compatible disk, with Y either `a' or `b'; `fd' for
-floppy disk, with Y the floppy drive number - fd0 would be
-the DOS `A:' drive, and fd1 would be `B:'), Y the driver letter or
-number, and N the number (in decimal) of the partition on this device
-(absent in the case of floppies). Recent kernels allow many other
-types, mostly for CD-ROMs: nfs, ram, scd, mcd, cdu535, aztcd, cm206cd,
-gscd, sbpcd, sonycd, bpcd.
-(The type nfs specifies a net boot; ram refers to a ram disk.)
-
-Note that this has nothing to do with the designation of these
-devices on your file system. The `/dev/' part is purely conventional.
-
-The more awkward and less portable numeric specification of the above
-possible root devices in major/minor format is also accepted. (E.g.,
-/dev/sda3 is major 8, minor 3, so you could use `root=0x803' as an
-alternative.)
-
-.SS "`ro' and `rw'"
-
-The `ro' option tells the kernel to mount the root filesystem
-as `readonly' so that filesystem consistency check programs (fsck)
-can do their work on a quiescent file system. No processes can
-write to files on the filesystem in question until it is `remounted'
-as read/write capable, e.g., by `mount -w -n -o remount /'.
-(See also
-.BR mount (8).)
-
-The `rw' option tells the kernel to mount the root filesystem read/write.
-This is the default.
-
-The choice between read-only and read/write can also be set using
-.BR rdev (8).
-
-.SS "`reserve=...'"
-
-This is used to protect I/O port regions from probes. The form of the
-command is:
-.IP
-.BI reserve= iobase,extent[,iobase,extent]...
-.LP
-In some machines it may be necessary to prevent device drivers from
-checking for devices (auto-probing) in a specific region. This may be
-because of hardware that reacts badly to the probing, or hardware
-that would be mistakenly identified, or merely
-hardware you don't want the kernel to initialize.
-
-The reserve boot-time argument specifies an I/O port region that
-shouldn't be probed. A device driver will not probe a reserved region,
-unless another boot argument explicitly specifies that it do so.
-
-For example, the boot line
-.IP
-reserve=0x300,32 blah=0x300
-.LP
-keeps all device drivers except the driver for `blah' from probing
-0x300-0x31f.
-
-.SS "`mem=...'"
-
-The BIOS call defined in the PC specification that returns
-the amount of installed memory was only designed to be able
-to report up to 64MB. Linux uses this BIOS call at boot to
-determine how much memory is installed. If you have more than 64MB of
-RAM installed, you can use this boot arg to tell Linux how much memory
-you have. The value is in decimal or hexadecimal (prefix 0x),
-and the suffixes `k' (times 1024) or `M' (times 1048576) can be used.
-Here is a quote from Linus on usage of the `mem=' parameter.
-
-\&``The kernel will accept any `mem=xx' parameter you give it, and if it
-turns out that you lied to it, it will crash horribly sooner or later.
-The parameter indicates the highest addressable RAM address, so
-\&`mem=0x1000000' means you have 16MB of memory, for example. For a
-96MB machine this would be `mem=0x6000000'.
-
-NOTE NOTE NOTE: some machines might use the top of memory for BIOS
-cacheing or whatever, so you might not actually have up to the full
-96MB addressable. The reverse is also true: some chipsets will map
-the physical memory that is covered by the BIOS area into the area
-just past the top of memory, so the top-of-mem might actually be 96MB
-+ 384kB for example. If you tell linux that it has more memory than
-it actually does have, bad things will happen: maybe not at once, but
-surely eventually.''
-
-You can also use the boot argument `mem=nopentium' to turn off 4 MB
-pagetables on kernels configured for IA32 systems with a pentium or newer
-CPU.
-
-.SS "`panic=N'"
-By default the kernel will not reboot after a panic, but this option
-will cause a kernel reboot after N seconds (if N > 0).
-This panic timeout can also be set by "echo N > /proc/sys/kernel/panic".
-
-.SS "`reboot=[warm|cold][,[bios|hard]]'"
-(Only when CONFIG_BUGi386 is defined.)
-Since 2.0.22 a reboot is by default a cold reboot.
-One asks for the old default with `reboot=warm'.
-(A cold reboot may be required to reset certain hardware,
-but might destroy not yet written data in a disk cache.
-A warm reboot may be faster.)
-By default a reboot is hard, by asking the keyboard controller
-to pulse the reset line low, but there is at least one type
-of motherboard where that doesn't work. The option `reboot=bios' will
-instead jump through the BIOS.
-
-.SS "`nosmp'" and "`maxcpus=N'"
-(Only when __SMP__ is defined.)
-A command-line option of `nosmp' or `maxcpus=0' will disable SMP
-activation entirely; an option `maxcpus=N' limits the maximum number
-of CPUs activated in SMP mode to N.
-
-
-.SH "BOOT ARGUMENTS FOR USE BY KERNEL DEVELOPERS"
-
-.SS "`debug'"
-
-Kernel messages are handed off to the kernel log daemon klogd so that they
-may be logged to disk. Messages with a priority above
-.I console_loglevel
-are also printed on the console. (For these levels, see <linux/kernel.h>.)
-By default this variable is set to log anything more important than
-debug messages. This boot argument will cause the kernel to also
-print the messages of DEBUG priority.
-The console loglevel can also be set at run time via an option
-to klogd. See
-.BR klogd (8).
-
-.SS "`profile=N'"
-
-It is possible to enable a kernel profiling function,
-if one wishes to find out where the kernel is spending its CPU cycles.
-Profiling is enabled by setting the variable
-.I prof_shift
-to a nonzero value. This is done either by specifying CONFIG_PROFILE at
-compile time, or by giving the `profile=' option.
-Now the value that
-.I prof_shift
-gets will be N, when given, or CONFIG_PROFILE_SHIFT, when that is given,
-or 2, the default. The significance of this variable is that it
-gives the granularity of the profiling: each clock tick, if the
-system was executing kernel code, a counter is incremented:
-.IP
-profile[address >> prof_shift]++;
-.LP
-The raw profiling information can be read from
-.IR /proc/profile .
-Probably you'll want to use a tool such as readprofile.c to digest it.
-Writing to
-.I /proc/profile
-will clear the counters.
-
-.SS "`swap=N1,N2,N3,N4,N5,N6,N7,N8'"
-Set the eight parameters max_page_age, page_advance, page_decline,
-page_initial_age, age_cluster_fract, age_cluster_min, pageout_weight,
-bufferout_weight that control the kernel swap algorithm.
-For kernel tuners only.
-
-.SS "`buff=N1,N2,N3,N4,N5,N6'"
-Set the six parameters max_buff_age, buff_advance, buff_decline,
-buff_initial_age, bufferout_weight, buffermem_grace that control
-kernel buffer memory management. For kernel tuners only.
-
-
-
-.SH "BOOT ARGUMENTS FOR RAMDISK USE"
-(Only if the kernel was compiled with CONFIG_BLK_DEV_RAM.)
-In general it is a bad idea to use a ramdisk under Linux -
-the system will use available memory more efficiently itself.
-But while booting (or while constructing boot floppies)
-it is often useful to load the floppy contents into a
-ramdisk. One might also have a system in which first
-some modules (for filesystem or hardware) must be loaded
-before the main disk can be accessed.
-
-In Linux 1.3.48, ramdisk handling was changed drastically.
-Earlier, the memory was allocated statically, and there was
-a `ramdisk=N' parameter to tell its size. (This could also
-be set in the kernel image at compile time, or by use of
-.BR rdev (8).)
-These days ram disks use the buffer cache, and grow dynamically.
-For a lot of information (e.g., how to use
-.BR rdev (8)
-in conjunction with the new ramdisk setup), see
-.IR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/ramdisk.txt .
-
-There are four parameters, two boolean and two integral.
-
-.SS "`load_ramdisk=N'"
-If N=1, do load a ramdisk. If N=0, do not load a ramdisk.
-(This is the default.)
-
-.SS "`prompt_ramdisk=N'"
-If N=1, do prompt for insertion of the floppy. (This is the default.)
-If N=0, do not prompt. (Thus, this parameter is never needed.)
-
-.SS "`ramdisk_size=N' or (obsolete) `ramdisk=N'
-Set the maximal size of the ramdisk(s) to N kB. The default is 4096 (4 MB).
-
-.SS "`ramdisk_start=N'"
-Sets the starting block number (the offset on the floppy where
-the ramdisk starts) to N.
-This is needed in case the ramdisk follows a kernel image.
-
-.SS "`noinitrd'"
-(Only if the kernel was compiled with CONFIG_BLK_DEV_RAM
-and CONFIG_BLK_DEV_INITRD.)
-These days it is possible to compile the kernel to use initrd.
-When this feature is enabled, the boot process will load the kernel
-and an initial ramdisk; then the kernel converts initrd into
-a "normal" ramdisk, which is mounted read-write as root device;
-then /linuxrc is executed; afterwards the "real" root file system is mounted,
-and the initrd filesystem is moved over to /initrd; finally
-the usual boot sequence (e.g. invocation of /sbin/init) is performed.
-
-For a detailed description of the initrd feature, see
-.IR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/initrd.txt .
-
-The `noinitrd' option tells the kernel that although it was compiled for
-operation with initrd, it should not go through the above steps, but
-leave the initrd data under
-.IR /dev/initrd .
-(This device can be used only once - the data is freed as soon as
-the last process that used it has closed
-.IR /dev/initrd .)
-
-
-.SH "BOOT ARGUMENTS FOR SCSI DEVICES"
-
-General notation for this section:
-
-.I iobase
--- the first I/O port that the SCSI host occupies. These are
-specified in hexidecimal notation, and usually lie in the range from
-0x200 to 0x3ff.
-
-.I irq
--- the hardware interrupt that the card is configured to use.
-Valid values will be dependent on the card in question, but will
-usually be 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 15. The other values are usually
-used for common peripherals like IDE hard disks, floppies, serial
-ports, etc.
-
-.I scsi-id
--- the ID that the host adapter uses to identify itself on the
-SCSI bus. Only some host adapters allow you to change this value, as
-most have it permanently specified internally. The usual default value
-is 7, but the Seagate and Future Domain TMC-950 boards use 6.
-
-.I parity
--- whether the SCSI host adapter expects the attached devices
-to supply a parity value with all information exchanges. Specifying a
-one indicates parity checking is enabled, and a zero disables parity
-checking. Again, not all adapters will support selection of parity
-behaviour as a boot argument.
-
-.SS "`max_scsi_luns=...'"
-
-A SCSI device can have a number of `sub-devices' contained within
-itself. The most common example is one of the new SCSI CD-ROMs that
-handle more than one disk at a time. Each CD is addressed as a
-`Logical Unit Number' (LUN) of that particular device. But most
-devices, such as hard disks, tape drives and such are only one device,
-and will be assigned to LUN zero.
-
-Some poorly designed SCSI devices cannot handle being probed for
-LUNs not equal to zero. Therefore, if the compile time flag
-CONFIG_SCSI_MULTI_LUN is not set, newer kernels will by default
-only probe LUN zero.
-
-To specify the number of probed LUNs at boot, one enters
-`max_scsi_luns=n' as a boot arg, where n is a number between one and
-eight. To avoid problems as described above, one would use n=1 to
-avoid upsetting such broken devices.
-
-.SS "SCSI tape configuration"
-
-Some boot time configuration of the SCSI tape driver can be achieved
-by using the following:
-.IP
-.BI st= buf_size[,write_threshold[,max_bufs]]
-.LP
-The first two numbers are specified in units of kB. The default
-.I buf_size
-is 32kB, and the maximum size that can be specified is a
-ridiculous 16384kB. The
-.I write_threshold
-is the value at which the buffer is committed to tape, with a
-default value of 30kB. The maximum number of buffers varies
-with the number of drives detected, and has a default of two.
-An example usage would be:
-.IP
-st=32,30,2
-.LP
-Full details can be found in the README.st file that is in the scsi
-directory of the kernel source tree.
-
-.SS "Adaptec aha151x, aha152x, aic6260, aic6360, SB16-SCSI configuration"
-
-The aha numbers refer to cards and the aic numbers refer to the actual
-SCSI chip on these type of cards, including the Soundblaster-16 SCSI.
-
-The probe code for these SCSI hosts looks for an installed BIOS, and
-if none is present, the probe will not find your card. Then you will
-have to use a boot arg of the form:
-.IP
-.BI aha152x= iobase[,irq[,scsi-id[,reconnect[,parity]]]]
-.LP
-If the driver was compiled with debugging enabled, a sixth
-value can be specified to set the debug level.
-
-All the parameters are as described at the top of this section, and the
-.I reconnect
-value will allow device disconnect/reconnect if a non-zero value
-is used. An example usage is as follows:
-.IP
-aha152x=0x340,11,7,1
-.LP
-Note that the parameters must be specified in order, meaning that if
-you want to specify a parity setting, then you will have to specify an
-iobase, irq, scsi-id and reconnect value as well.
-
-.SS "Adaptec aha154x configuration"
-
-The aha1542 series cards have an i82077 floppy controller onboard,
-while the aha1540 series cards do not. These are busmastering cards,
-and have parameters to set the ``fairness'' that is used to share
-the bus with other devices. The boot arg looks like the following.
-.IP
-.BI aha1542= iobase[,buson,busoff[,dmaspeed]]
-.LP
-Valid iobase values are usually one of: 0x130, 0x134, 0x230, 0x234,
-0x330, 0x334. Clone cards may permit other values.
-
-The
-.IR buson ", " busoff
-values refer to the number of microseconds that the
-card dominates the ISA bus. The defaults are 11us on, and 4us off, so
-that other cards (such as an ISA LANCE Ethernet card) have a chance to
-get access to the ISA bus.
-
-The
-.I dmaspeed
-value refers to the rate (in MB/s) at which the DMA
-(Direct Memory Access) transfers proceed. The default is 5MB/s.
-Newer revision cards allow you to select this value as part of the
-soft-configuration, older cards use jumpers. You can use values up to
-10MB/s assuming that your motherboard is capable of handling it.
-Experiment with caution if using values over 5MB/s.
-
-.SS "Adaptec aha274x, aha284x, aic7xxx configuration"
-
-These boards can accept an argument of the form:
-.IP
-.BI aic7xxx= extended,no_reset
-.LP
-The
-.I extended
-value, if non-zero, indicates that extended translation for large
-disks is enabled. The
-.I no_reset
-value, if non-zero, tells the driver not to reset the SCSI bus when
-setting up the host adaptor at boot.
-
-.SS "AdvanSys SCSI Hosts configuration (`advansys=')"
-
-The AdvanSys driver can accept up to four i/o addresses that will be
-probed for an AdvanSys SCSI card. Note that these values (if used) do
-not effect EISA or PCI probing in any way. They are only used for
-probing ISA and VLB cards. In addition, if the driver has been
-compiled with debugging enabled, the level of debugging output can be
-set by adding an 0xdeb[0-f] parameter. The 0-f allows setting the
-level of the debugging messages to any of 16 levels of verbosity.
-
-.SS "AM53C974"
-.IP
-.BI AM53C974= host-scsi-id,target-scsi-id,max-rate,max-offset
-.LP
-
-.SS "BusLogic SCSI Hosts configuration (`BusLogic=')"
-.IP
-.BI BusLogic= N1,N2,N3,N4,N5,S1,S2,...
-.LP
-For an extensive discussion of the BusLogic command line parameters,
-see
-.IR /usr/src/linux/drivers/scsi/BusLogic.c
-(lines 3149-3270 in the kernel version I am looking at). The text
-below is a very much abbreviated extract.
-
-The parameters N1-N5 are integers. The parameters S1,... are strings.
-N1 is the I/O Address at which the Host Adapter is located.
-N2 is the Tagged Queue Depth to use for Target Devices that support
-Tagged Queuing.
-N3 is the Bus Settle Time in seconds. This is the amount of time
-to wait between a Host Adapter Hard Reset which
-initiates a SCSI Bus Reset and issuing any SCSI Commands.
-N4 is the Local Options (for one Host Adapter).
-N5 is the Global Options (for all Host Adapters).
-
-The string options are used to provide control over Tagged Queuing
-(TQ:Default, TQ:Enable, TQ:Disable, TQ:<Per-Target-Spec>), over
-Error Recovery (ER:Default, ER:HardReset, ER:BusDeviceReset,
-ER:None, ER:<Per-Target-Spec>), and over Host Adapter Probing
-(NoProbe, NoProbeISA, NoSortPCI).
-
-.SS "EATA/DMA configuration"
-The default list of i/o ports to be probed can be changed by
-.IP
-.BI eata= iobase,iobase,... .
-.LP
-
-.SS "Future Domain TMC-16x0 configuration"
-.IP
-.BI fdomain= iobase,irq[,adapter_id]
-.LP
-
-.SS "Great Valley Products (GVP) SCSI controller configuration"
-.IP
-.BI gvp11= dma_transfer_bitmask
-.LP
-
-.SS "Future Domain TMC-8xx, TMC-950 configuration"
-.IP
-.BI tmc8xx= mem_base,irq
-.LP
-The
-.I mem_base
-value is the value of the memory mapped I/O region that
-the card uses. This will usually be one of the following values:
-0xc8000, 0xca000, 0xcc000, 0xce000, 0xdc000, 0xde000.
-
-.SS "IN2000 configuration"
-.IP
-.BI in2000= S
-.LP
-where S is a comma-separated string of items keyword[:value].
-Recognized keywords (possibly with value) are:
-ioport:addr, noreset, nosync:x, period:ns, disconnect:x,
-debug:x, proc:x. For the function of these parameters, see
-.IR /usr/src/linux/drivers/scsi/in2000.c .
-
-.SS "NCR5380 and NCR53C400 configuration"
-The boot arg is of the form
-.IP
-.BI ncr5380= iobase,irq,dma
-.LP
-or
-.IP
-.BI ncr53c400= iobase,irq
-.LP
-If the card doesn't use interrupts, then an IRQ value of 255 (0xff) will
-disable interrupts. An IRQ value of 254 means to autoprobe. More
-details can be found in the file
-.IR /usr/src/linux/drivers/scsi/README.g_NCR5380 .
-
-.SS "NCR53C8xx configuration"
-.IP
-.BI ncr53c8xx= S
-.LP
-where S is a comma-separated string of items keyword:value.
-Recognized keywords are: mpar (master_parity), spar (scsi_parity),
-disc (disconnection), specf (special_features), ultra (ultra_scsi),
-fsn (force_sync_nego), tags (default_tags), sync (default_sync),
-verb (verbose), debug (debug), burst (burst_max).
-For the function of the assigned values, see
-.IR /usr/src/linux/drivers/scsi/ncr53c8xx.c .
-
-.SS "NCR53c406a configuration"
-.IP
-.BI ncr53c406a= iobase[,irq[,fastpio]]
-.LP
-Specify irq = 0 for non-interrupt driven mode.
-Set fastpio = 1 for fast pio mode, 0 for slow mode.
-
-.SS "Pro Audio Spectrum configuration"
-
-The PAS16 uses a NC5380 SCSI chip, and newer models support
-jumperless configuration. The boot arg is of the form:
-.IP
-.BI pas16= iobase,irq
-.LP
-The only difference is that you can specify an IRQ value of 255, which
-will tell the driver to work without using interrupts, albeit at a
-performance loss. The iobase is usually 0x388.
-
-.SS "Seagate ST-0x configuration"
-
-If your card is not detected at boot time,
-you will then have to use a boot arg of the form:
-.IP
-.BI st0x= mem_base,irq
-.LP
-The
-.I mem_base
-value is the value of the memory mapped I/O region that
-the card uses. This will usually be one of the following values:
-0xc8000, 0xca000, 0xcc000, 0xce000, 0xdc000, 0xde000.
-
-.SS "Trantor T128 configuration"
-
-These cards are also based on the NCR5380 chip, and accept the
-following options:
-.IP
-.BI t128= mem_base,irq
-.LP
-The valid values for
-.I mem_base
-are as follows: 0xcc000, 0xc8000, 0xdc000, 0xd8000.
-
-.SS "UltraStor 14F/34F configuration"
-The default list of i/o ports to be probed can be changed by
-.IP
-.BI eata= iobase,iobase,... .
-.LP
-
-.SS "WD7000 configuration"
-.IP
-.BI wd7000= irq,dma,iobase
-.LP
-
-.SS "Commodore Amiga A2091/590 SCSI controller configuration"
-.IP
-.BI wd33c93= S
-.LP
-where S is a comma-separated string of options. Recognized options are
-nosync:bitmask, nodma:x, period:ns, disconnect:x, debug:x,
-clock:x, next. For details, see
-.IR /usr/src/linux/drivers/scsi/wd33c93.c .
-
-.SH "HARD DISKS"
-
-.SS "IDE Disk/CD-ROM Driver Parameters"
-
-The IDE driver accepts a number of parameters, which range from disk
-geometry specifications, to support for broken controller chips. Drive
-specific options are specified by using `hdX=' with X in `a'-`h'.
-
-Non-drive specific options are specified with the prefix `hd='. Note
-that using a drive specific prefix for a non-drive specific option
-will still work, and the option will just be applied as expected.
-
-Also note that `hd=' can be used to refer to the next unspecified
-drive in the (a, ..., h) sequence. For the following discussions,
-the `hd=' option will be cited for brevity. See the file
-README.ide in linux/drivers/block for more details.
-
-.SS "The `hd=cyls,heads,sects[,wpcom[,irq]]' options"
-
-These options are used to specify the physical geometry of the disk.
-Only the first three values are required. The cylinder/head/sectors
-values will be those used by fdisk. The write precompensation value
-is ignored for IDE disks. The IRQ value specified will be the IRQ
-used for the interface that the drive resides on, and is not really a
-drive specific parameter.
-
-.SS "The `hd=serialize' option"
-
-The dual IDE interface CMD-640 chip is broken as designed such that
-when drives on the secondary interface are used at the same time as
-drives on the primary interface, it will corrupt your data. Using this
-option tells the driver to make sure that both interfaces are never
-used at the same time.
-
-.SS "The `hd=dtc2278' option"
-
-This option tells the driver that you have a DTC-2278D IDE interface.
-The driver then tries to do DTC specific operations to enable the
-second interface and to enable faster transfer modes.
-
-.SS "The `hd=noprobe' option"
-
-Do not probe for this drive. For example,
-.IP
-hdb=noprobe hdb=1166,7,17
-.LP
-would disable the probe, but still specify the drive geometry so
-that it would be registered as a valid block device, and hence
-usable.
-
-.SS "The `hd=nowerr' option"
-
-Some drives apparently have the WRERR_STAT bit stuck on permanently.
-This enables a work-around for these broken devices.
-
-.SS "The `hd=cdrom' option"
-
-This tells the IDE driver that there is an ATAPI compatible CD-ROM
-attached in place of a normal IDE hard disk. In most cases the CD-ROM
-is identified automatically, but if it isn't then this may help.
-
-.SS "Standard ST-506 Disk Driver Options (`hd=')"
-
-The standard disk driver can accept geometry arguments for the disks
-similar to the IDE driver. Note however that it only expects three
-values (C/H/S) -- any more or any less and it will silently ignore
-you. Also, it only accepts `hd=' as an argument, i.e. `hda='
-and so on are not valid here. The format is as follows:
-.IP
-hd=cyls,heads,sects
-.LP
-If there are two disks installed, the above is repeated with the
-geometry parameters of the second disk.
-
-.SS "XT Disk Driver Options (`xd=')"
-
-If you are unfortunate enough to be using one of these old 8 bit cards
-that move data at a whopping 125kB/s then here is the scoop.
-If the card is not recognised, you will have to use a boot arg of the form:
-.IP
-xd=type,irq,iobase,dma_chan
-.LP
-The type value specifies the particular manufacturer of the card,
-overriding autodetection. For the types to use, consult the
-.I drivers/block/xd.c
-source file of the kernel you are using. The type is an index in the list
-.I xd_sigs
-and in the course of time
-.\" 1.1.50, 1.3.81, 1.3.99, 2.0.34, 2.1.67, 2.1.78, 2.1.127
-types have been added to or deleted from the middle of the list,
-changing all type numbers. Today (Linux 2.5.0) the types are
-0=generic; 1=DTC 5150cx; 2,3=DTC 5150x; 4,5=Western Digital;
-6,7,8=Seagate; 9=Omti; 10=XEBEC, and where here several types are
-given with the same designation, they are equivalent.
-
-The xd_setup() function does no checking on the values, and assumes
-that you entered all four values. Don't disappoint it. Here is an
-example usage for a WD1002 controller with the BIOS disabled/removed,
-using the `default' XT controller parameters:
-.IP
-xd=2,5,0x320,3
-.LP
-
-.SS "Syquest's EZ* removable disks"
-.IP
-.BI ez= iobase[,irq[,rep[,nybble]]]
-.LP
-
-.SH "IBM MCA BUS DEVICES"
-See also
-.IR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/mca.txt .
-
-.SS "PS/2 ESDI hard disks"
-It is possible to specify the desired geometry at boot time:
-.IP
-.BI ed= cyls,heads,sectors.
-.LP
-For a ThinkPad-720, add the option
-.IP
-.BR tp720=1 .
-.LP
-
-.SS "IBM Microchannel SCSI Subsystem configuration"
-.IP
-.BI ibmmcascsi= N
-.LP
-where N is the \fIpun\fP (SCSI ID) of the subsystem.
-
-.SH "CD-ROMs (Non-SCSI/ATAPI/IDE)"
-
-.SS "The Aztech Interface"
-
-The syntax for this type of card is:
-.IP
-aztcd=iobase[,magic_number]
-.LP
-If you set the magic_number to 0x79 then the driver will try and run
-anyway in the event of an unknown firmware version. All other values
-are ignored.
-
-.SS "Parallel port CD-ROM drives"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-pcd.driveN=prt,pro,uni,mod,slv,dly
-.br
-pcd.nice=nice
-.LP
-where `port' is the base address, `pro' is the protocol number, `uni'
-is the unit selector (for chained devices), `mod' is the mode (or -1
-to choose the best automatically), `slv' is 1 if it should be a slave,
-and `dly' is a small integer for slowing down port accesses. The
-`nice' parameter controls the driver's use of idle CPU time, at the
-expense of some speed.
-
-.SS "The CDU-31A and CDU-33A Sony Interface"
-
-This CD-ROM interface is found on some of the Pro Audio Spectrum sound
-cards, and other Sony supplied interface cards. The syntax is as
-follows:
-.IP
-cdu31a=iobase,[irq[,is_pas_card]]
-.LP
-Specifying an IRQ value of zero tells the driver that hardware
-interrupts aren't supported (as on some PAS cards). If your card
-supports interrupts, you should use them as it cuts down on the CPU
-usage of the driver.
-
-The
-.I is_pas_card
-should be entered as `PAS' if using a Pro Audio Spectrum card,
-and otherwise it should not be specified at all.
-
-.SS "The CDU-535 Sony Interface"
-
-The syntax for this CD-ROM interface is:
-.IP
-sonycd535=iobase[,irq]
-.LP
-A zero can be used for the I/O base as a `placeholder' if one wishes
-to specify an IRQ value.
-
-.SS "The GoldStar Interface"
-
-The syntax for this CD-ROM interface is:
-.IP
-gscd=iobase
-.LP
-
-.SS "The ISP16 CD-ROM Interface"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-isp16=[iobase[,irq[,dma[,type]]]]
-.LP
-(three integers and a string). If the type is given as `noisp16',
-the interface will not be configured. Other recognized types
-are: `Sanyo", `Sony', `Panasonic' and `Mitsumi'.
-
-.SS "The Mitsumi Standard Interface"
-
-The syntax for this CD-ROM interface is:
-.IP
-mcd=iobase,[irq[,wait_value]]
-.LP
-The
-.I wait_value
-is used as an internal timeout value for people who are
-having problems with their drive, and may or may not be implemented
-depending on a compile time #define.
-The Mitsumi FX400 is an IDE/ATAPI CD-ROM player and does not use
-the mcd driver.
-
-.SS "The Mitsumi XA/MultiSession Interface"
-
-This is for the same hardware as above, but the driver has extended features.
-Syntax:
-.IP
-mcdx=iobase[,irq]
-.LP
-
-.SS "The Optics Storage Interface"
-
-The syntax for this type of card is:
-.IP
-optcd=iobase
-.LP
-
-.SS "The Phillips CM206 Interface"
-
-The syntax for this type of card is:
-.IP
-cm206=[iobase][,irq]
-.LP
-
-The driver assumes numbers between 3 and 11 are IRQ values, and
-numbers between 0x300 and 0x370 are I/O ports, so you can specify one,
-or both numbers, in any order. It also accepts `cm206=auto' to enable
-autoprobing.
-
-.SS "The Sanyo Interface"
-
-The syntax for this type of card is:
-.IP
-sjcd=iobase[,irq[,dma_channel]]
-.LP
-
-.SS "The SoundBlaster Pro Interface"
-
-The syntax for this type of card is:
-.IP
-sbpcd=iobase,type
-.LP
-where type is one of the following (case sensitive) strings:
-`SoundBlaster', `LaserMate', or `SPEA'. The I/O base is that of the
-CD-ROM interface, and not that of the sound portion of the card.
-
-.SH "ETHERNET DEVICES"
-
-Different drivers make use of different parameters, but they all at
-least share having an IRQ, an I/O port base value, and a name. In its
-most generic form, it looks something like this:
-.IP
-ether=irq,iobase[,param_1[,...param_8]],name
-.LP
-The first non-numeric argument is taken as the name. The param_n
-values (if applicable) usually have different meanings for each
-different card/driver. Typical param_n values are used to specify
-things like shared memory address, interface selection, DMA channel
-and the like.
-
-The most common use of this parameter is to force probing for a second
-ethercard, as the default is to only probe for one. This can be
-accomplished with a simple:
-.IP
-ether=0,0,eth1
-.LP
-Note that the values of zero for the IRQ and I/O base in the above
-example tell the driver(s) to autoprobe.
-
-The Ethernet-HowTo has extensive documentation on using multiple
-cards and on the card/driver specific implementation
-of the param_n values where used. Interested readers should refer to
-the section in that document on their particular card.
-
-.SH "THE FLOPPY DISK DRIVER"
-
-There are many floppy driver options, and they are all listed in
-README.fd in linux/drivers/block. This information is taken directly
-from that file.
-
-.SS "floppy=mask,allowed_drive_mask"
-
-Sets the bitmask of allowed drives to mask. By default, only units 0
-and 1 of each floppy controller are allowed. This is done because
-certain non-standard hardware (ASUS PCI motherboards) mess up the
-keyboard when accessing units 2 or 3. This option is somewhat
-obsoleted by the cmos option.
-
-.SS "floppy=all_drives"
-
-Sets the bitmask of allowed drives to all drives. Use this if you have
-more than two drives connected to a floppy controller.
-
-.SS "floppy=asus_pci"
-
-Sets the bitmask to allow only units 0 and 1. (The default)
-
-.SS "floppy=daring"
-
-Tells the floppy driver that you have a well behaved floppy
-controller. This allows more efficient and smoother operation, but
-may fail on certain controllers. This may speed up certain operations.
-
-.SS "floppy=0,daring"
-
-Tells the floppy driver that your floppy controller should be used
-with caution.
-
-.SS "floppy=one_fdc"
-
-Tells the floppy driver that you have only floppy controller (default)
-
-.SS "floppy=two_fdc or floppy=address,two_fdc"
-
-Tells the floppy driver that you have two floppy controllers. The
-second floppy controller is assumed to be at address. If address is
-not given, 0x370 is assumed.
-
-.SS "floppy=thinkpad"
-
-Tells the floppy driver that you have a Thinkpad. Thinkpads use an
-inverted convention for the disk change line.
-
-.SS "floppy=0,thinkpad"
-
-Tells the floppy driver that you don't have a Thinkpad.
-
-.SS "floppy=drive,type,cmos"
-
-Sets the cmos type of drive to type. Additionally, this drive is
-allowed in the bitmask. This is useful if you have more than two
-floppy drives (only two can be described in the physical cmos), or if
-your BIOS uses non-standard CMOS types. Setting the CMOS to 0 for the
-first two drives (default) makes the floppy driver read the physical
-cmos for those drives.
-
-.SS "floppy=unexpected_interrupts"
-
-Print a warning message when an unexpected interrupt is received
-(default behaviour)
-
-.SS "floppy=no_unexpected_interrupts or floppy=L40SX"
-
-Don't print a message when an unexpected interrupt is received. This
-is needed on IBM L40SX laptops in certain video modes. (There seems to
-be an interaction between video and floppy. The unexpected interrupts
-only affect performance, and can safely be ignored.)
-
-.SH "THE SOUND DRIVER"
-
-The sound driver can also accept boot args to override the compiled in
-values. This is not recommended, as it is rather complex. It is
-described in the Readme.Linux file, in linux/drivers/sound. It accepts
-a boot arg of the form:
-.IP
-sound=device1[,device2[,device3...[,device10]]]
-.LP
-where each deviceN value is of the following format 0xTaaaId and the
-bytes are used as follows:
-
-T - device type: 1=FM, 2=SB, 3=PAS, 4=GUS, 5=MPU401, 6=SB16,
-7=SB16-MPU401
-
-aaa - I/O address in hex.
-
-I - interrupt line in hex (i.e 10=a, 11=b, ...)
-
-d - DMA channel.
-
-As you can see it gets pretty messy, and you are better off to compile
-in your own personal values as recommended. Using a boot arg of
-`sound=0' will disable the sound driver entirely.
-
-
-.SH "ISDN DRIVERS"
-
-.SS "The ICN ISDN driver"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-icn=iobase,membase,icn_id1,icn_id2
-.LP
-where icn_id1,icn_id2 are two strings used to identify the
-card in kernel messages.
-
-.SS "The PCBIT ISDN driver"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-pcbit=membase1,irq1[,membase2,irq2]
-.LP
-where membaseN is the shared memory base of the N'th card, and irqN is
-the interrupt setting of the N'th card. The default is IRQ 5 and
-membase 0xD0000.
-
-.SS "The Teles ISDN driver"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-teles=iobase,irq,membase,protocol,teles_id
-.LP
-where iobase is the i/o port address of the card, membase is the
-shared memory base address of the card, irq is the interrupt channel
-the card uses, and teles_id is the unique ASCII string identifier.
-
-.SH "SERIAL PORT DRIVERS"
-
-.SS "The RISCom/8 Multiport Serial Driver (`riscom8=')"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-riscom=iobase1[,iobase2[,iobase3[,iobase4]]]
-.LP
-More details can be found in
-.IR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/riscom8.txt .
-
-.SS "The DigiBoard Driver (`digi=')"
-If this option is used, it should have precisely six parameters.
-Syntax:
-.IP
-digi=status,type,altpin,numports,iobase,membase
-.LP
-The parameters maybe given as integers, or as strings.
-If strings are used, then iobase and membase should be given
-in hexadecimal.
-The integer arguments (fewer may be given) are in order:
-status (Enable(1) or Disable(0) this card),
-type (PC/Xi(0), PC/Xe(1), PC/Xeve(2), PC/Xem(3)),
-altpin (Enable(1) or Disable(0) alternate pin arrangement),
-numports (number of ports on this card),
-iobase (I/O Port where card is configured (in HEX)),
-membase (base of memory window (in HEX)).
-Thus, the following two boot prompt arguments are equivalent:
-.IP
-digi=E,PC/Xi,D,16,200,D0000
-.br
-digi=1,0,0,16,0x200,851968
-.LP
-More details can be found in
-.IR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/digiboard.txt .
-
-.SS "The Baycom Serial/Parallel Radio Modem"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-baycom=iobase,irq,modem
-.LP
-There are precisely 3 parameters; for several cards, give
-several `baycom=' commands. The modem parameter is a string
-that can take one of the values ser12, ser12*, par96, par96*.
-Here the * denotes that software DCD is to be used, and
-ser12/par96 chooses between the supported modem types.
-For more details, see
-.IR /usr/src/linux/drivers/net/README.baycom .
-
-.SS "Soundcard radio modem driver"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-soundmodem=iobase,irq,dma[,dma2[,serio[,pario]]],0,mode
-.LP
-All parameters except the last are integers;
-the dummy 0 is required because of a bug in the setup code.
-The mode parameter is a string with syntax hw:modem,
-where hw is one of sbc, wss, wssfdx and modem is one of
-afsk1200, fsk9600.
-
-.SH "THE LINE PRINTER DRIVER"
-
-.SS "`lp='"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-lp=0
-.br
-lp=auto
-.br
-lp=reset
-.br
-lp=port[,port...]
-.LP
-You can tell the printer driver what ports to use and what ports not
-to use. The latter comes in handy if you don't want the printer driver
-to claim all available parallel ports, so that other drivers
-(e.g. PLIP, PPA) can use them instead.
-
-The format of the argument is multiple port names. For example,
-lp=none,parport0 would use the first parallel port for lp1, and
-disable lp0. To disable the printer driver entirely, one can use
-lp=0.
-
-.SS "WDT500/501 driver"
-Syntax:
-.IP
-wdt=io,irq
-.LP
-
-.SH "MOUSE DRIVERS"
-
-.SS "`bmouse=irq'"
-The busmouse driver only accepts one parameter, that being the
-hardware IRQ value to be used.
-
-.SS "`msmouse=irq'"
-And precisely the same is true for the msmouse driver.
-
-.SS "ATARI mouse setup"
-.LP
-atamouse=threshold[,y-threshold]
-.IP
-If only one argument is given, it is used for both
-x-threshold and y-threshold. Otherwise, the first argument
-is the x-threshold, and the second the y-threshold.
-These values must lie between 1 and 20 (inclusive); the default is 2.
-
-.SH "VIDEO HARDWARE"
-
-.SS "`no-scroll'"
-This option tells the console driver not to use hardware scroll
-(where a scroll is effected by moving the screen origin in video
-memory, instead of moving the data). It is required by certain
-Braille machines.
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-Linus Torvalds (and many others)
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR klogd (8),
-.BR lilo.conf (5),
-.BR lilo (8),
-.BR mount (8),
-.BR rdev (8)
-
-Large parts of this man page have been derived from the
-Boot Parameter HOWTO (version 1.0.1) written by Paul Gortmaker.
-More information may be found in this (or a more recent) HOWTO.
-An uptodate source of information is
-.IR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt .
diff --git a/raw/man7/charsets.7 b/raw/man7/charsets.7
deleted file mode 100644
index dd9f1d9..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/charsets.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,322 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1996 Eric S. Raymond <esr at thyrsus.com>
-.\" and Andries Brouwer <aeb at cwi.nl>
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" This is combined from many sources, including notes by aeb and
-.\" research by esr. Portions derive from a writeup by Roman Czyborra.
-.\"
-.\" Last changed by David Starner <dstarner98 at aasaa.ofe.org>.
-.TH CHARSETS 7 2001-05-07 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-charsets \- programmer's view of character sets and internationalization
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Linux is an international operating system. Various of its utilities
-and device drivers (including the console driver) support multilingual
-character sets including Latin-alphabet letters with diacritical
-marks, accents, ligatures, and entire non-Latin alphabets including
-Greek, Cyrillic, Arabic, and Hebrew.
-.LP
-This manual page presents a programmer's-eye view of different
-character-set standards and how they fit together on Linux. Standards
-discussed include ASCII, ISO 8859, KOI8-R, Unicode, ISO 2022 and
-ISO 4873. The primary emphasis is on character sets actually used as
-locale character sets, not the myriad others that can be found in data
-from other systems.
-.LP
-A complete list of charsets used in a officially supported locale in glibc
-2.2.3 is: ISO-8859-{1,2,3,5,6,7,8,9,13,15}, CP1251, UTF-8, EUC-{KR,JP,TW},
-KOI8-{R,U}, GB2312, GB18030, GBK, BIG5, BIG5-HKSCS and TIS-620 (in no
-particular order.) (Romanian may be switching to ISO-8859-16.)
-
-.SH ASCII
-ASCII (American Standard Code For Information Interchange) is the original
-7-bit character set, originally designed for American English. It is
-currently described by the ECMA-6 standard.
-.LP
-Various ASCII variants replacing the dollar sign with other currency
-symbols and replacing punctuation with non-English alphabetic characters
-to cover German, French, Spanish and others in 7 bits exist. All are
-deprecated; GNU libc doesn't support locales whose character sets aren't
-true supersets of ASCII. (These sets are also known as ISO-646, a close
-relative of ASCII that permitted replacing these characters.)
-.LP
-As Linux was written for hardware designed in the US, it natively
-supports ASCII.
-
-.SH ISO 8859
-ISO 8859 is a series of 15 8-bit character sets all of which have US
-ASCII in their low (7-bit) half, invisible control characters in
-positions 128 to 159, and 96 fixed-width graphics in positions 160-255.
-.LP
-Of these, the most important is ISO 8859-1 (Latin-1). It is natively
-supported in the Linux console driver, fairly well supported in X11R6,
-and is the base character set of HTML.
-.LP
-Console support for the other 8859 character sets is available under
-Linux through user-mode utilities (such as
-.BR setfont (8))
-.\" // some distributions still have the deprecated consolechars
-that modify keyboard bindings and the EGA graphics
-table and employ the "user mapping" font table in the console
-driver.
-.LP
-Here are brief descriptions of each set:
-.TP
-8859-1 (Latin-1)
-Latin-1 covers most Western European languages such as Albanian, Catalan,
-Danish, Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, French, German, Galician,
-Irish, Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, and
-Swedish. The lack of the ligatures Dutch ij, French oe and old-style
-,,German`` quotation marks is considered tolerable.
-.TP
-8859-2 (Latin-2)
-Latin-2 supports most Latin-written Slavic and Central European
-languages: Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish, Rumanian,
-Slovak, and Slovene.
-.TP
-8859-3 (Latin-3)
-Latin-3 is popular with authors of Esperanto, Galician, and Maltese.
-(Turkish is now written with 8859-9 instead.)
-.TP
-8859-4 (Latin-4)
-Latin-4 introduced letters for Estonian, Latvian, and Lithuanian. It
-is essentially obsolete; see 8859-10 (Latin-6) and 8859-13 (Latin-7).
-.TP
-8859-5
-Cyrillic letters supporting Bulgarian, Byelorussian, Macedonian,
-Russian, Serbian and Ukrainian. Ukrainians read the letter `ghe'
-with downstroke as `heh' and would need a ghe with upstroke to write a
-correct ghe. See the discussion of KOI8-R below.
-.TP
-8859-6
-Supports Arabic. The 8859-6 glyph table is a fixed font of separate
-letter forms, but a proper display engine should combine these
-using the proper initial, medial, and final forms.
-.TP
-8859-7
-Supports Modern Greek.
-.TP
-8859-8
-Supports modern Hebrew without niqud (punctuation signs). Niqud
-and full-fledged Biblical Hebrew are outside the scope of this
-character set; under Linux, UTF-8 is the preferred encoding for
-these.
-.TP
-8859-9 (Latin-5)
-This is a variant of Latin-1 that replaces Icelandic letters with
-Turkish ones.
-.TP
-8859-10 (Latin-6)
-Latin 6 adds the last Inuit (Greenlandic) and Sami (Lappish) letters
-that were missing in Latin 4 to cover the entire Nordic area. RFC
-1345 listed a preliminary and different `latin6'. Skolt Sami still
-needs a few more accents than these.
-.TP
-8859-11
-This only exists as a rejected draft standard. The draft standard
-was identical to TIS-620, which is used under Linux for Thai.
-.TP
-8859-12
-This set does not exist. While Vietnamese has been suggested for this
-space, it does not fit within the 96 (non-combining) characters ISO
-8859 offers. UTF-8 is the preferred character set for Vietnamese use
-under Linux.
-.TP
-8859-13 (Latin-7)
-Supports the Baltic Rim languages; in particular, it includes Latvian
-characters not found in Latin-4.
-.TP
-8859-14 (Latin-8)
-This is the Celtic character set, covering Gaelic and Welsh.
-This charset also contains the dotted characters needed for Old Irish.
-.TP
-8859-15 (Latin-9)
-This adds the Euro sign and French and Finnish letters that were missing in
-Latin-1.
-.TP
-8859-16 (Latin-10)
-This set covers many of the languages covered by 8859-2, and supports
-Romanian more completely then that set does.
-.SH KOI8-R
-KOI8-R is a non-ISO character set popular in Russia. The lower half
-is US ASCII; the upper is a Cyrillic character set somewhat better
-designed than ISO 8859-5. KOI8-U is a common character set, based off
-KOI8-R, that has better support for Ukrainian. Neither of these sets
-are ISO-2022 compatible, unlike the ISO-8859 series.
-.LP
-Console support for KOI8-R is available under Linux through user-mode
-utilities that modify keyboard bindings and the EGA graphics table,
-and employ the "user mapping" font table in the console driver.
-
-.\" Thanks to Tomohiro KUBOTA for the following sections about
-.\" national standards.
-.SH JIS X 0208
-JIS X 0208 is a Japanese national standard character set. Though
-there are some more Japanese national standard character sets (like
-JIS X 0201, JIS X 0212, and JIS X 0213), this is the most important
-one. Characters are mapped into a 94x94 two-byte matrix,
-whose each byte is in the range 0x21-0x7e. Note that JIS X 0208
-is a character set, not an encoding. This means that JIS X 0208
-itself is not used for expressing text data. JIS X 0208 is used
-as a component to construct encodings such as EUC-JP, Shift_JIS,
-and ISO-2022-JP. EUC-JP is the most important encoding for Linux
-and includes US ASCII and JIS X 0208. In EUC-JP, JIS X 0208
-characters are expressed in two bytes, each of which is the
-JIS X 0208 code plus 0x80.
-
-.SH KS X 1001
-KS X 1001 is a Korean national standard character set. Just as
-JIS X 0208, characters are mapped into a 94x94 two-byte matrix.
-KS X 1001 is used like JIS X 0208, as a component
-to construct encodings such as EUC-KR, Johab, and ISO-2022-KR.
-EUC-KR is the most important encoding for Linux and includes
-US ASCII and KS X 1001. KS C 5601 is an older name for KS X 1001.
-
-.SH GB 2312
-GB 2312 is a mainland Chinese national standard character set used
-to express simplified Chinese. Just like JIS X 0208, characters are
-mapped into a 94x94 two-byte matrix used to construct EUC-CN. EUC-CN
-is the most important encoding for Linux and includes US ASCII and
-GB 2312. Note that EUC-CN is often called as GB, GB 2312, or CN-GB.
-
-.SH Big5
-Big5 is a popular character set in Taiwan to express traditional
-Chinese. (Big5 is both a character set and an encoding.) It is a
-superset of US ASCII. Non-ASCII characters are expressed in two
-bytes. Bytes 0xa1-0xfe are used as leading bytes for two-byte
-characters. Big5 and its extension is widely used in Taiwan and Hong
-Kong. It is not ISO 2022-compliant.
-
-.SH TIS 620
-TIS 620 is a Thai national standard character set and a superset
-of US ASCII. Like ISO 8859 series, Thai characters are mapped into
-0xa1-0xfe. TIS 620 is the only commonly used character set under
-Linux besides UTF-8 to have combining characters.
-
-.SH UNICODE
-Unicode (ISO 10646) is a standard which aims to unambiguously represent every
-character in every human language. Unicode's structure permits 20.1 bits
-to encode every character. Since most computers don't include 20.1-bit
-integers, Unicode is usually encoded as 32-bit integers internally and
-either a series of 16-bit integers (UTF-16) (needing two 16-bit integers
-only when encoding certain rare characters) or a series of 8-bit bytes
-(UTF-8). Information on Unicode is available at <http://www.unicode.com>.
-.LP
-Linux represents Unicode using the 8-bit Unicode Transformation Format
-(UTF-8). UTF-8 is a variable length encoding of Unicode. It uses 1
-byte to code 7 bits, 2 bytes for 11 bits, 3 bytes for 16 bits, 4 bytes
-for 21 bits, 5 bytes for 26 bits, 6 bytes for 31 bits.
-.LP
-Let 0,1,x stand for a zero, one, or arbitrary bit. A byte 0xxxxxxx
-stands for the Unicode 00000000 0xxxxxxx which codes the same symbol
-as the ASCII 0xxxxxxx. Thus, ASCII goes unchanged into UTF-8, and
-people using only ASCII do not notice any change: not in code, and not
-in file size.
-.LP
-A byte 110xxxxx is the start of a 2-byte code, and 110xxxxx 10yyyyyy
-is assembled into 00000xxx xxyyyyyy. A byte 1110xxxx is the start
-of a 3-byte code, and 1110xxxx 10yyyyyy 10zzzzzz is assembled
-into xxxxyyyy yyzzzzzz.
-(When UTF-8 is used to code the 31-bit ISO 10646
-then this progression continues up to 6-byte codes.)
-.LP
-For most people who use ISO-8859 character sets, this means that the
-characters outside of ASCII are now coded with two bytes. This tends
-to expand ordinary text files by only one or two percent. For Russian
-or Greek users, this expands ordinary text files by 100%, since text in
-those languages is mostly outside of ASCII. For Japanese users this means
-that the 16-bit codes now in common use will take three bytes. While there
-are algorithmic conversions from some character sets (esp. ISO-8859-1) to
-Unicode, general conversion requires carrying around conversion tables,
-which can be quite large for 16-bit codes.
-.LP
-Note that UTF-8 is self-synchronizing: 10xxxxxx is a tail, any other
-byte is the head of a code. Note that the only way ASCII bytes occur
-in a UTF-8 stream, is as themselves. In particular, there are no
-embedded NULs or '/'s that form part of some larger code.
-.LP
-Since ASCII, and, in particular, NUL and '/', are unchanged, the
-kernel does not notice that UTF-8 is being used. It does not care at
-all what the bytes it is handling stand for.
-.LP
-Rendering of Unicode data streams is typically handled through
-`subfont' tables which map a subset of Unicode to glyphs. Internally
-the kernel uses Unicode to describe the subfont loaded in video RAM.
-This means that in UTF-8 mode one can use a character set with 512
-different symbols. This is not enough for Japanese, Chinese and
-Korean, but it is enough for most other purposes.
-.LP
-At the current time, the console driver does not handle combining
-characters. So Thai, Sioux and any other script needing combining
-characters can't be handled on the console.
-
-.SH "ISO 2022 AND ISO 4873"
-The ISO 2022 and 4873 standards describe a font-control model
-based on VT100 practice. This model is (partially) supported
-by the Linux kernel and by
-.BR xterm (1).
-It is popular in Japan and Korea.
-.LP
-There are 4 graphic character sets, called G0, G1, G2 and G3,
-and one of them is the current character set for codes with
-high bit zero (initially G0), and one of them is the current
-character set for codes with high bit one (initially G1).
-Each graphic character set has 94 or 96 characters, and is
-essentially a 7-bit character set. It uses codes either
-040-0177 (041-0176) or 0240-0377 (0241-0376).
-G0 always has size 94 and uses codes 041-0176.
-.LP
-Switching between character sets is done using the shift functions
-^N (SO or LS1), ^O (SI or LS0), ESC n (LS2), ESC o (LS3),
-ESC N (SS2), ESC O (SS3), ESC ~ (LS1R), ESC } (LS2R), ESC | (LS3R).
-The function LS\fIn\fP makes character set G\fIn\fP the current one
-for codes with high bit zero.
-The function LS\fIn\fPR makes character set G\fIn\fP the current one
-for codes with high bit one.
-The function SS\fIn\fP makes character set G\fIn\fP (\fIn\fP=2 or 3)
-the current one for the next character only (regardless of the value
-of its high order bit).
-.LP
-A 94-character set is designated as G\fIn\fP character set
-by an escape sequence ESC ( xx (for G0), ESC ) xx (for G1),
-ESC * xx (for G2), ESC + xx (for G3), where xx is a symbol
-or a pair of symbols found in the ISO 2375 International
-Register of Coded Character Sets.
-For example, ESC ( @ selects the ISO 646 character set as G0,
-ESC ( A selects the UK standard character set (with pound
-instead of number sign), ESC ( B selects ASCII (with dollar
-instead of currency sign), ESC ( M selects a character set
-for African languages, ESC ( ! A selects the Cuban character
-set, etc. etc.
-.LP
-A 96-character set is designated as G\fIn\fP character set
-by an escape sequence ESC - xx (for G1), ESC . xx (for G2)
-or ESC / xx (for G3).
-For example, ESC - G selects the Hebrew alphabet as G1.
-.LP
-A multibyte character set is designated as G\fIn\fP character set
-by an escape sequence ESC $ xx or ESC $ ( xx (for G0),
-ESC $ ) xx (for G1), ESC $ * xx (for G2), ESC $ + xx (for G3).
-For example, ESC $ ( C selects the Korean character set for G0.
-The Japanese character set selected by ESC $ B has a more
-recent version selected by ESC & @ ESC $ B.
-.LP
-ISO 4873 stipulates a narrower use of character sets, where G0
-is fixed (always ASCII), so that G1, G2 and G3
-can only be invoked for codes with the high order bit set.
-In particular, ^N and ^O are not used anymore, ESC ( xx
-can be used only with xx=B, and ESC ) xx, ESC * xx, ESC + xx
-are equivalent to ESC - xx, ESC . xx, ESC / xx, respectively.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR console (4),
-.BR console_ioctl (4),
-.BR console_codes (4),
-.BR ascii (7),
-.BR iso_8859-1 (7),
-.BR unicode (7),
-.BR utf-8 (7)
diff --git a/raw/man7/checkpoint.7 b/raw/man7/checkpoint.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 45a0c2b..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/checkpoint.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CHECKPOINT" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CHECKPOINT \- force a transaction log checkpoint
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CHECKPOINT
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-Write-Ahead Logging (WAL) puts a checkpoint in the transaction log
-every so often. (To adjust the automatic checkpoint interval, see
-the run-time
-configuration options checkpoint_segments
-and checkpoint_timeout.)
-The \fBCHECKPOINT\fR command forces an immediate checkpoint
-when the command is issued, without waiting for a scheduled checkpoint.
-.PP
-A checkpoint is a point in the transaction log sequence at which
-all data files have been updated to reflect the information in the
-log. All data files will be flushed to disk. Refer to the
-the chapter called ``Write-Ahead Logging'' in the documentation for more information about the WAL system.
-.PP
-Only superusers may call \fBCHECKPOINT\fR. The command is
-not intended for use during normal operation.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBCHECKPOINT\fR command is a
-PostgreSQL language extension.
diff --git a/raw/man7/close.7 b/raw/man7/close.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 32ecaf6..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/close.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CLOSE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CLOSE \- close a cursor
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CLOSE \fIname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCLOSE\fR frees the resources associated with an open cursor.
-After the cursor is closed, no subsequent operations
-are allowed on it. A cursor should be closed when it is
-no longer needed.
-.PP
-Every non-holdable open cursor is implicitly closed when a
-transaction is terminated by \fBCOMMIT\fR or
-\fBROLLBACK\fR. A holdable cursor is implicitly
-closed if the transaction that created it aborts via
-\fBROLLBACK\fR. If the creating transaction successfully
-commits, the holdable
-cursor remains open until an explicit \fBCLOSE\fR is
-executed, or the client disconnects.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of an open cursor to close.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-PostgreSQL does not have an explicit
-\fBOPEN\fR cursor statement; a cursor is considered
-open when it is declared. Use the \fBDECLARE\fR
-statement to declare a cursor.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Close the cursor liahona:
-.sp
-.nf
-CLOSE liahona;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCLOSE\fR is fully conforming with the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/cluster.7 b/raw/man7/cluster.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 9dc1ab2..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/cluster.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CLUSTER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CLUSTER \- cluster a table according to an index
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CLUSTER \fIindexname\fR ON \fItablename\fR
-CLUSTER \fItablename\fR
-CLUSTER
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCLUSTER\fR instructs PostgreSQL
-to cluster the table specified
-by \fItablename\fR
-based on the index specified by
-\fIindexname\fR. The index must
-already have been defined on
-\fItablename\fR.
-.PP
-When a table is clustered, it is physically reordered
-based on the index information. Clustering is a one-time operation:
-when the table is subsequently updated, the changes are
-not clustered. That is, no attempt is made to store new or
-updated rows according to their index order. If one wishes, one can
-periodically recluster by issuing the command again.
-.PP
-When a table is clustered, PostgreSQL
-remembers on which index it was clustered. The form
-\fBCLUSTER \fItablename\fB\fR,
-reclusters the table on the same index that it was clustered before.
-.PP
-\fBCLUSTER\fR without any parameter reclusters all the tables
-in the
-current database that the calling user owns, or all tables if called
-by a superuser. (Never-clustered tables are not included.) This
-form of \fBCLUSTER\fR cannot be called from inside a
-transaction or function.
-.PP
-When a table is being clustered, an ACCESS
-EXCLUSIVE lock is acquired on it. This prevents any other
-database operations (both reads and writes) from operating on the
-table until the \fBCLUSTER\fR is finished.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIindexname\fB\fR
-The name of an index.
-.TP
-\fB\fItablename\fB\fR
-The name (possibly schema-qualified) of a table.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-In cases where you are accessing single rows randomly
-within a table, the actual order of the data in the
-table is unimportant. However, if you tend to access some
-data more than others, and there is an index that groups
-them together, you will benefit from using \fBCLUSTER\fR.
-If you are requesting a range of indexed values from a table, or a
-single indexed value that has multiple rows that match,
-\fBCLUSTER\fR will help because once the index identifies the
-heap page for the first row that matches, all other rows
-that match are probably already on the same heap page,
-and so you save disk accesses and speed up the query.
-.PP
-During the cluster operation, a temporary copy of the table is created
-that contains the table data in the index order. Temporary copies of
-each index on the table are created as well. Therefore, you need free
-space on disk at least equal to the sum of the table size and the index
-sizes.
-.PP
-Because \fBCLUSTER\fR remembers the clustering information,
-one can cluster the tables one wants clustered manually the first time, and
-setup a timed event similar to \fBVACUUM\fR so that the tables
-are periodically reclustered.
-.PP
-Because the planner records statistics about the ordering of tables, it
-is advisable to run \fBANALYZE\fR on the newly clustered
-table. Otherwise, the planner may make poor choices of query plans.
-.PP
-There is another way to cluster data. The
-\fBCLUSTER\fR command reorders the original table using
-the ordering of the index you specify. This can be slow
-on large tables because the rows are fetched from the heap
-in index order, and if the heap table is unordered, the
-entries are on random pages, so there is one disk page
-retrieved for every row moved. (PostgreSQL has a cache,
-but the majority of a big table will not fit in the cache.)
-The other way to cluster a table is to use
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE \fInewtable\fR AS
- SELECT \fIcolumnlist\fR FROM \fItable\fR ORDER BY \fIcolumnlist\fR;
-.sp
-.fi
-which uses the PostgreSQL sorting code in
-the ORDER BY clause to create the desired order; this is usually much
-faster than an index scan for
-unordered data. You then drop the old table, use
-\fBALTER TABLE ... RENAME\fR
-to rename \fInewtable\fR to the old name, and
-recreate the table's indexes. However, this approach does not preserve
-OIDs, constraints, foreign key relationships, granted privileges, and
-other ancillary properties of the table --- all such items must be
-manually recreated.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Cluster the table employees on the basis of
-its index emp_ind:
-.sp
-.nf
-CLUSTER emp_ind ON emp;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Cluster the employees relation using the same
-index that was used before:
-.sp
-.nf
-CLUSTER emp;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Cluster all the tables on the database that have previously been clustered:
-.sp
-.nf
-CLUSTER;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBCLUSTER\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-clusterdb [\fBclusterdb\fR(1)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/comment.7 b/raw/man7/comment.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 229502f..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/comment.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "COMMENT" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-COMMENT \- define or change the comment of an object
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-COMMENT ON
-{
- TABLE \fIobject_name\fR |
- COLUMN \fItable_name\fR.\fIcolumn_name\fR |
- AGGREGATE \fIagg_name\fR (\fIagg_type\fR) |
- CONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fR ON \fItable_name\fR |
- DATABASE \fIobject_name\fR |
- DOMAIN \fIobject_name\fR |
- FUNCTION \fIfunc_name\fR (\fIarg1_type\fR, \fIarg2_type\fR, ...) |
- INDEX \fIobject_name\fR |
- OPERATOR \fIop\fR (\fIleftoperand_type\fR, \fIrightoperand_type\fR) |
- RULE \fIrule_name\fR ON \fItable_name\fR |
- SCHEMA \fIobject_name\fR |
- SEQUENCE \fIobject_name\fR |
- TRIGGER \fItrigger_name\fR ON \fItable_name\fR |
- TYPE \fIobject_name\fR |
- VIEW \fIobject_name\fR
-} IS \fI'text'\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCOMMENT\fR stores a comment about a database object.
-Comments can be
-easily retrieved with the \fBpsql\fR commands
-\fB\\dd\fR, \fB\\d+\fR, and \fB\\l+\fR.
-Other user interfaces to retrieve comments can be built atop
-the same built-in functions that \fBpsql\fR uses, namely
-\fBobj_description\fR and \fBcol_description\fR.
-.PP
-To modify a comment, issue a new \fBCOMMENT\fR command for the
-same object. Only one comment string is stored for each object.
-To remove a comment, write NULL in place of the text
-string.
-Comments are automatically dropped when the object is dropped.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIobject_name\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fItable_name.column_name\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fIaggname\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fIconstraint_name\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fIfunc_name\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fIop\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fIrule_name\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fB\fItrigger_name\fB\fR
-The name of the object to be be commented. Names of tables,
-aggregates, domains, functions, indexes, operators, sequences,
-types, and views may be schema-qualified.
-.TP
-\fB\fItext\fB\fR
-The new comment.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-There is presently no security mechanism for comments: any user
-connected to a database can see all the comments for objects in
-that database (although only superusers can change comments for
-objects that they don't own). Therefore, don't put
-security-critical information in comments.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Attach a comment to the table mytable:
-.sp
-.nf
-COMMENT ON TABLE mytable IS 'This is my table.';
-.sp
-.fi
-Remove it again:
-.sp
-.nf
-COMMENT ON TABLE mytable IS NULL;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Some more examples:
-.sp
-.nf
-COMMENT ON AGGREGATE my_aggregate (double precision) IS 'Computes sample variance';
-COMMENT ON COLUMN my_table.my_column IS 'Employee ID number';
-COMMENT ON DATABASE my_database IS 'Development Database';
-COMMENT ON DOMAIN my_domain IS 'Email Address Domain';
-COMMENT ON FUNCTION my_function (timestamp) IS 'Returns Roman Numeral';
-COMMENT ON INDEX my_index IS 'Enforces uniqueness on employee ID';
-COMMENT ON OPERATOR ^ (text, text) IS 'Performs intersection of two texts';
-COMMENT ON OPERATOR ^ (NONE, text) IS 'This is a prefix operator on text';
-COMMENT ON RULE my_rule ON my_table IS 'Logs updates of employee records';
-COMMENT ON SCHEMA my_schema IS 'Departmental data';
-COMMENT ON SEQUENCE my_sequence IS 'Used to generate primary keys';
-COMMENT ON TABLE my_schema.my_table IS 'Employee Information';
-COMMENT ON TRIGGER my_trigger ON my_table IS 'Used for RI';
-COMMENT ON TYPE complex IS 'Complex number data type';
-COMMENT ON VIEW my_view IS 'View of departmental costs';
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBCOMMENT\fR command in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/commit.7 b/raw/man7/commit.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 2554964..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/commit.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "COMMIT" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-COMMIT \- commit the current transaction
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-COMMIT [ WORK | TRANSACTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCOMMIT\fR commits the current transaction. All
-changes made by the transaction become visible to others
-and are guaranteed to be durable if a crash occurs.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBWORK\fR
-.TP
-\fBTRANSACTION\fR
-Optional key words. They have no effect.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(7)] to
-abort a transaction.
-.PP
-Issuing \fBCOMMIT\fR when not inside a transaction does
-no harm, but it will provoke a warning message.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To commit the current transaction and make all changes permanent:
-.sp
-.nf
-COMMIT;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard only specifies the two forms
-COMMIT and COMMIT
-WORK. Otherwise, this command is fully conforming.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-BEGIN [\fBbegin\fR(7)], ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/copy.7 b/raw/man7/copy.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 68ed6da..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/copy.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,372 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "COPY" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-COPY \- copy data between a file and a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-COPY \fItablename\fR [ ( \fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ]
- FROM { '\fIfilename\fR' | STDIN }
- [ [ WITH ]
- [ BINARY ]
- [ OIDS ]
- [ DELIMITER [ AS ] '\fIdelimiter\fR' ]
- [ NULL [ AS ] '\fInull string\fR' ] ]
-
-COPY \fItablename\fR [ ( \fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ]
- TO { '\fIfilename\fR' | STDOUT }
- [ [ WITH ]
- [ BINARY ]
- [ OIDS ]
- [ DELIMITER [ AS ] '\fIdelimiter\fR' ]
- [ NULL [ AS ] '\fInull string\fR' ] ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCOPY\fR moves data between
-PostgreSQL tables and standard file-system
-files. \fBCOPY TO\fR copies the contents of a table
-\fBto\fR a file, while \fBCOPY FROM\fR copies
-data \fBfrom\fR a file to a table (appending the data to
-whatever is in the table already).
-.PP
-If a list of columns is specified, \fBCOPY\fR will
-only copy the data in the specified columns to or from the file.
-If there are any columns in the table that are not in the column list,
-\fBCOPY FROM\fR will insert the default values for
-those columns.
-.PP
-\fBCOPY\fR with a file name instructs the
-PostgreSQL server to directly read from
-or write to a file. The file must be accessible to the server and
-the name must be specified from the viewpoint of the server. When
-STDIN or STDOUT is
-specified, data is transmitted via the connection between the
-client and the server.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fItablename\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-An optional list of columns to be copied. If no column list is
-specified, all columns will be used.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfilename\fB\fR
-The absolute path name of the input or output file.
-.TP
-\fBSTDIN\fR
-Specifies that input comes from the client application.
-.TP
-\fBSTDOUT\fR
-Specifies that output goes to the client application.
-.TP
-\fBBINARY\fR
-Causes all data to be stored or read in binary format rather
-than as text. You cannot specify the \fBDELIMITER\fR
-or \fBNULL\fR options in binary mode.
-.TP
-\fBOIDS\fR
-Specifies copying the OID for each row. (An error is raised if
-OIDS is specified for a table that does not
-have OIDs.)
-.TP
-\fB\fIdelimiter\fB\fR
-The single character that separates columns within each row
-(line) of the file. The default is a tab character.
-.TP
-\fB\fInull string\fB\fR
-The string that represents a null value. The default is
-\\N (backslash-N). You might prefer an empty
-string, for example.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-On a \fBCOPY FROM\fR, any data item that matches
-this string will be stored as a null value, so you should make
-sure that you use the same string as you used with
-\fBCOPY TO\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-\fBCOPY\fR can only be used with plain tables, not
-with views.
-.PP
-The BINARY key word causes all data to be
-stored/read as binary format rather than as text. It is
-somewhat faster than the normal text mode, but a binary-format
-file is less portable across machine architectures and
-PostgreSQL versions.
-.PP
-You must have select privilege on the table
-whose values are read by \fBCOPY TO\fR, and
-insert privilege on the table into which values
-are inserted by \fBCOPY FROM\fR.
-.PP
-Files named in a \fBCOPY\fR command are read or written
-directly by the server, not by the client application. Therefore,
-they must reside on or be accessible to the database server machine,
-not the client. They must be accessible to and readable or writable
-by the PostgreSQL user (the user ID the
-server runs as), not the client. \fBCOPY\fR naming a
-file is only allowed to database superusers, since it allows reading
-or writing any file that the server has privileges to access.
-.PP
-Do not confuse \fBCOPY\fR with the
-\fBpsql\fR instruction
-\fB\\copy\fR. \fB\\copy\fR invokes
-\fBCOPY FROM STDIN\fR or \fBCOPY TO
-STDOUT\fR, and then fetches/stores the data in a file
-accessible to the \fBpsql\fR client. Thus,
-file accessibility and access rights depend on the client rather
-than the server when \fB\\copy\fR is used.
-.PP
-It is recommended that the file name used in \fBCOPY\fR
-always be specified as an absolute path. This is enforced by the
-server in the case of \fBCOPY TO\fR, but for
-\fBCOPY FROM\fR you do have the option of reading from
-a file specified by a relative path. The path will be interpreted
-relative to the working directory of the server process (somewhere below
-the data directory), not the client's working directory.
-.PP
-\fBCOPY FROM\fR will invoke any triggers and check
-constraints on the destination table. However, it will not invoke rules.
-.PP
-\fBCOPY\fR stops operation at the first error. This
-should not lead to problems in the event of a \fBCOPY
-TO\fR, but the target table will already have received
-earlier rows in a \fBCOPY FROM\fR. These rows will not
-be visible or accessible, but they still occupy disk space. This may
-amount to a considerable amount of wasted disk space if the failure
-happened well into a large copy operation. You may wish to invoke
-\fBVACUUM\fR to recover the wasted space.
-.SH "FILE FORMATS"
-.SS "TEXT FORMAT"
-.PP
-When \fBCOPY\fR is used without the BINARY option,
-the data read or written is a text file with one line per table row.
-Columns in a row are separated by the delimiter character.
-The column values themselves are strings generated by the
-output function, or acceptable to the input function, of each
-attribute's data type. The specified null string is used in
-place of columns that are null.
-\fBCOPY FROM\fR will raise an error if any line of the
-input file contains more or fewer columns than are expected.
-If OIDS is specified, the OID is read or written as the first column,
-preceding the user data columns.
-.PP
-End of data can be represented by a single line containing just
-backslash-period (\\.). An end-of-data marker is
-not necessary when reading from a file, since the end of file
-serves perfectly well; it is needed only when copying data to or from
-client applications using pre-3.0 client protocol.
-.PP
-Backslash characters (\\) may be used in the
-\fBCOPY\fR data to quote data characters that might
-otherwise be taken as row or column delimiters. In particular, the
-following characters \fBmust\fR be preceded by a backslash if
-they appear as part of a column value: backslash itself,
-newline, carriage return, and the current delimiter character.
-.PP
-The specified null string is sent by \fBCOPY TO\fR without
-adding any backslashes; conversely, \fBCOPY FROM\fR matches
-the input against the null string before removing backslashes. Therefore,
-a null string such as \\N cannot be confused with
-the actual data value \\N (which would be represented
-as \\\\N).
-.PP
-The following special backslash sequences are recognized by
-\fBCOPY FROM\fR:
-SequenceRepresents\\bBackspace (ASCII 8)\\fForm feed (ASCII 12)\\nNewline (ASCII 10)\\rCarriage return (ASCII 13)\\tTab (ASCII 9)\\vVertical tab (ASCII 11)\\\fIdigits\fRBackslash followed by one to three octal digits specifies
-the character with that numeric code
-Presently, \fBCOPY TO\fR will never emit an octal-digits
-backslash sequence, but it does use the other sequences listed above
-for those control characters.
-.PP
-Any other backslashed character that is not mentioned in the above table
-will be taken to represent itself. However, beware of adding backslashes
-unnecessarily, since that might accidentally produce a string matching the
-end-of-data marker (\\.) or the null string (\\N by
-default). These strings will be recognized before any other backslash
-processing is done.
-.PP
-It is strongly recommended that applications generating COPY data convert
-data newlines and carriage returns to the \\n and
-\\r sequences respectively. At present it is
-possible to represent a data carriage return by a backslash and carriage
-return, and to represent a data newline by a backslash and newline.
-However, these representations might not be accepted in future releases.
-They are also highly vulnerable to corruption if the COPY file is
-transferred across different machines (for example, from Unix to Windows
-or vice versa).
-.PP
-\fBCOPY TO\fR will terminate each row with a Unix-style
-newline (``\\n''). Servers running on MS Windows instead
-output carriage return/newline (``\\r\\n''), but only for
-\fBCOPY\fR to a server file; for consistency across platforms,
-\fBCOPY TO STDOUT\fR always sends ``\\n''
-regardless of server platform.
-\fBCOPY FROM\fR can handle lines ending with newlines,
-carriage returns, or carriage return/newlines. To reduce the risk of
-error due to un-backslashed newlines or carriage returns that were
-meant as data, \fBCOPY FROM\fR will complain if the line
-endings in the input are not all alike.
-.SS "BINARY FORMAT"
-.PP
-The file format used for \fBCOPY BINARY\fR changed in
-PostgreSQL 7.4. The new format consists
-of a file header, zero or more tuples containing the row data, and
-a file trailer. Headers and data are now in network byte order.
-.SS "FILE HEADER"
-.PP
-The file header consists of 15 bytes of fixed fields, followed
-by a variable-length header extension area. The fixed fields are:
-.TP
-\fBSignature\fR
-11-byte sequence PGCOPY\\n\\377\\r\\n\\0 --- note that the zero byte
-is a required part of the signature. (The signature is designed to allow
-easy identification of files that have been munged by a non-8-bit-clean
-transfer. This signature will be changed by end-of-line-translation
-filters, dropped zero bytes, dropped high bits, or parity changes.)
-.TP
-\fBFlags field\fR
-32-bit integer bit mask to denote important aspects of the file format. Bits
-are numbered from 0 (LSB) to 31 (MSB). Note that
-this field is stored in network byte order (most significant byte first),
-as are all the integer fields used in the file format. Bits
-16-31 are reserved to denote critical file format issues; a reader
-should abort if it finds an unexpected bit set in this range. Bits 0-15
-are reserved to signal backwards-compatible format issues; a reader
-should simply ignore any unexpected bits set in this range. Currently
-only one flag bit is defined, and the rest must be zero:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBBit 16\fR
-if 1, OIDs are included in the data; if 0, not
-.RE
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBHeader extension area length\fR
-32-bit integer, length in bytes of remainder of header, not including self.
-Currently, this is zero, and the first tuple follows
-immediately. Future changes to the format might allow additional data
-to be present in the header. A reader should silently skip over any header
-extension data it does not know what to do with.
-.PP
-.PP
-The header extension area is envisioned to contain a sequence of
-self-identifying chunks. The flags field is not intended to tell readers
-what is in the extension area. Specific design of header extension contents
-is left for a later release.
-.PP
-This design allows for both backwards-compatible header additions (add
-header extension chunks, or set low-order flag bits) and
-non-backwards-compatible changes (set high-order flag bits to signal such
-changes, and add supporting data to the extension area if needed).
-.SS "TUPLES"
-.PP
-Each tuple begins with a 16-bit integer count of the number of fields in the
-tuple. (Presently, all tuples in a table will have the same count, but that
-might not always be true.) Then, repeated for each field in the tuple, there
-is a 32-bit length word followed by that many bytes of field data. (The
-length word does not include itself, and can be zero.) As a special case,
--1 indicates a NULL field value. No value bytes follow in the NULL case.
-.PP
-There is no alignment padding or any other extra data between fields.
-.PP
-Presently, all data values in a \fBCOPY BINARY\fR file are
-assumed to be in binary format (format code one). It is anticipated that a
-future extension may add a header field that allows per-column format codes
-to be specified.
-.PP
-To determine the appropriate binary format for the actual tuple data you
-should consult the PostgreSQL source, in
-particular the \fB*send\fR and \fB*recv\fR functions for
-each column's data type (typically these functions are found in the
-\fIsrc/backend/utils/adt/\fR directory of the source
-distribution).
-.PP
-If OIDs are included in the file, the OID field immediately follows the
-field-count word. It is a normal field except that it's not included
-in the field-count. In particular it has a length word --- this will allow
-handling of 4-byte vs. 8-byte OIDs without too much pain, and will allow
-OIDs to be shown as null if that ever proves desirable.
-.SS "FILE TRAILER"
-.PP
-The file trailer consists of a 16-bit integer word containing -1. This
-is easily distinguished from a tuple's field-count word.
-.PP
-A reader should report an error if a field-count word is neither -1
-nor the expected number of columns. This provides an extra
-check against somehow getting out of sync with the data.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The following example copies a table to the client
-using the vertical bar (|) as the field delimiter:
-.sp
-.nf
-COPY country TO STDOUT WITH DELIMITER '|';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To copy data from a file into the country table:
-.sp
-.nf
-COPY country FROM '/usr1/proj/bray/sql/country_data';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Here is a sample of data suitable for copying into a table from
-STDIN:
-.sp
-.nf
-AF AFGHANISTAN
-AL ALBANIA
-DZ ALGERIA
-ZM ZAMBIA
-ZW ZIMBABWE
-.sp
-.fi
-Note that the white space on each line is actually a tab character.
-.PP
-The following is the same data, output in binary format.
-The data is shown after filtering through the
-Unix utility \fBod -c\fR. The table has three columns;
-the first has type \fBchar(2)\fR, the second has type \fBtext\fR,
-and the third has type \fBinteger\fR. All the rows have a null value
-in the third column.
-.sp
-.nf
-0000000 P G C O P Y \\n 377 \\r \\n \\0 \\0 \\0 \\0 \\0 \\0
-0000020 \\0 \\0 \\0 \\0 003 \\0 \\0 \\0 002 A F \\0 \\0 \\0 013 A
-0000040 F G H A N I S T A N 377 377 377 377 \\0 003
-0000060 \\0 \\0 \\0 002 A L \\0 \\0 \\0 007 A L B A N I
-0000100 A 377 377 377 377 \\0 003 \\0 \\0 \\0 002 D Z \\0 \\0 \\0
-0000120 007 A L G E R I A 377 377 377 377 \\0 003 \\0 \\0
-0000140 \\0 002 Z M \\0 \\0 \\0 006 Z A M B I A 377 377
-0000160 377 377 \\0 003 \\0 \\0 \\0 002 Z W \\0 \\0 \\0 \\b Z I
-0000200 M B A B W E 377 377 377 377 377 377
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBCOPY\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.PP
-The following syntax was used before PostgreSQL version 7.3 and is
-still supported:
-.sp
-.nf
-COPY [ BINARY ] \fItablename\fR [ WITH OIDS ]
- FROM { '\fIfilename\fR' | STDIN }
- [ [USING] DELIMITERS '\fIdelimiter\fR' ]
- [ WITH NULL AS '\fInull string\fR' ]
-
-COPY [ BINARY ] \fItablename\fR [ WITH OIDS ]
- TO { '\fIfilename\fR' | STDOUT }
- [ [USING] DELIMITERS '\fIdelimiter\fR' ]
- [ WITH NULL AS '\fInull string\fR' ]
-.sp
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_aggregate.7 b/raw/man7/create_aggregate.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 87a383a..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_aggregate.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE AGGREGATE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE AGGREGATE \- define a new aggregate function
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE AGGREGATE \fIname\fR (
- BASETYPE = \fIinput_data_type\fR,
- SFUNC = \fIsfunc\fR,
- STYPE = \fIstate_data_type\fR
- [ , FINALFUNC = \fIffunc\fR ]
- [ , INITCOND = \fIinitial_condition\fR ]
-)
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE AGGREGATE\fR defines a new aggregate function. Some aggregate functions
-for base types such as \fBmin(integer)\fR
-and \fBavg(double precision)\fR are already provided in the standard
-distribution. If one defines new types or needs an aggregate function not
-already provided, then \fBCREATE AGGREGATE\fR
-can be used to provide the desired features.
-.PP
-If a schema name is given (for example, CREATE AGGREGATE
-myschema.myagg ...) then the aggregate function is created in the
-specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema.
-.PP
-An aggregate function is identified by its name and input data type.
-Two aggregates in the same schema can have the same name if they operate on
-different input types. The
-name and input data type of an aggregate must also be distinct from
-the name and input data type(s) of every ordinary function in the same
-schema.
-.PP
-An aggregate function is made from one or two ordinary
-functions:
-a state transition function
-\fIsfunc\fR,
-and an optional final calculation function
-\fIffunc\fR.
-These are used as follows:
-.sp
-.nf
-\fIsfunc\fR( internal-state, next-data-item ) ---> next-internal-state
-\fIffunc\fR( internal-state ) ---> aggregate-value
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-PostgreSQL creates a temporary variable
-of data type \fIstype\fR
-to hold the current internal state of the aggregate. At each input
-data item,
-the state transition function is invoked to calculate a new
-internal state value. After all the data has been processed,
-the final function is invoked once to calculate the aggregate's return
-value. If there is no final function then the ending state value
-is returned as-is.
-.PP
-An aggregate function may provide an initial condition,
-that is, an initial value for the internal state value.
-This is specified and stored in the database as a column of type
-\fBtext\fR, but it must be a valid external representation
-of a constant of the state value data type. If it is not supplied
-then the state value starts out null.
-.PP
-If the state transition function is declared ``strict'',
-then it cannot be called with null inputs. With such a transition
-function, aggregate execution behaves as follows. Null input values
-are ignored (the function is not called and the previous state value
-is retained). If the initial state value is null, then the first
-nonnull input value replaces the state value, and the transition
-function is invoked beginning with the second nonnull input value.
-This is handy for implementing aggregates like \fBmax\fR.
-Note that this behavior is only available when
-\fIstate_data_type\fR
-is the same as
-\fIinput_data_type\fR.
-When these types are different, you must supply a nonnull initial
-condition or use a nonstrict transition function.
-.PP
-If the state transition function is not strict, then it will be called
-unconditionally at each input value, and must deal with null inputs
-and null transition values for itself. This allows the aggregate
-author to have full control over the aggregate's handling of null values.
-.PP
-If the final function is declared ``strict'', then it will not
-be called when the ending state value is null; instead a null result
-will be returned automatically. (Of course this is just the normal
-behavior of strict functions.) In any case the final function has
-the option of returning a null value. For example, the final function for
-\fBavg\fR returns null when it sees there were zero
-input rows.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the aggregate function
-to create.
-.TP
-\fB\fIinput_data_type\fB\fR
-The input data type on which this aggregate function operates.
-This can be specified as "ANY" for an aggregate that
-does not examine its input values (an example is
-\fBcount(*)\fR).
-.TP
-\fB\fIsfunc\fB\fR
-The name of the state transition function to be called for each
-input data value. This is normally a function of two arguments,
-the first being of type \fIstate_data_type\fR and the second
-of type \fIinput_data_type\fR. Alternatively,
-for an aggregate that does not examine its input values, the
-function takes just one argument of type \fIstate_data_type\fR. In either case
-the function must return a value of type \fIstate_data_type\fR. This function
-takes the current state value and the current input data item,
-and returns the next state value.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstate_data_type\fB\fR
-The data type for the aggregate's state value.
-.TP
-\fB\fIffunc\fB\fR
-The name of the final function called to compute the aggregate's
-result after all input data has been traversed. The function
-must take a single argument of type \fIstate_data_type\fR. The return
-data type of the aggregate is defined as the return type of this
-function. If \fIffunc\fR
-is not specified, then the ending state value is used as the
-aggregate's result, and the return type is \fIstate_data_type\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\fIinitial_condition\fB\fR
-The initial setting for the state value. This must be a string
-constant in the form accepted for the data type \fIstate_data_type\fR. If not
-specified, the state value starts out null.
-.PP
-The parameters of \fBCREATE AGGREGATE\fR can be
-written in any order, not just the order illustrated above.
-.PP
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-See the section called ``User-defined Aggregates'' in the documentation.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE AGGREGATE\fR is a
-PostgreSQL language extension. The SQL
-standard does not provide for user-defined aggregate function.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER AGGREGATE [\fBalter_aggregate\fR(7)], DROP AGGREGATE [\fBdrop_aggregate\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_cast.7 b/raw/man7/create_cast.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e761ad..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_cast.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,158 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE CAST" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE CAST \- define a new cast
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE CAST (\fIsourcetype\fR AS \fItargettype\fR)
- WITH FUNCTION \fIfuncname\fR (\fIargtype\fR)
- [ AS ASSIGNMENT | AS IMPLICIT ]
-
-CREATE CAST (\fIsourcetype\fR AS \fItargettype\fR)
- WITHOUT FUNCTION
- [ AS ASSIGNMENT | AS IMPLICIT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE CAST\fR defines a new cast. A cast
-specifies how to perform a conversion between
-two data types. For example,
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT CAST(42 AS text);
-.sp
-.fi
-converts the integer constant 42 to type \fBtext\fR by
-invoking a previously specified function, in this case
-text(int4). (If no suitable cast has been defined, the
-conversion fails.)
-.PP
-Two types may be \fIbinary compatible\fR, which
-means that they can be converted into one another ``for
-free'' without invoking any function. This requires that
-corresponding values use the same internal representation. For
-instance, the types \fBtext\fR and \fBvarchar\fR are
-binary compatible.
-.PP
-By default, a cast can be invoked only by an explicit cast request,
-that is an explicit CAST(\fIx\fR AS
-\fItypename\fR),
-\fIx\fR::\fItypename\fR, or
-\fItypename\fR(\fIx\fR) construct.
-.PP
-If the cast is marked AS ASSIGNMENT then it can be invoked
-implicitly when assigning a value to a column of the target data type.
-For example, supposing that foo.f1 is a column of
-type \fBtext\fR, then
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT INTO foo (f1) VALUES (42);
-.sp
-.fi
-will be allowed if the cast from type \fBinteger\fR to type
-\fBtext\fR is marked AS ASSIGNMENT, otherwise
-not.
-(We generally use the term \fIassignment
-cast\fR to describe this kind of cast.)
-.PP
-If the cast is marked AS IMPLICIT then it can be invoked
-implicitly in any context, whether assignment or internally in an
-expression. For example, since || takes \fBtext\fR
-operands,
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT 'The time is ' || now();
-.sp
-.fi
-will be allowed only if the cast from type \fBtimestamp\fR to
-\fBtext\fR is marked AS IMPLICIT. Otherwise it
-will be necessary to write the cast explicitly, for example
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT 'The time is ' || CAST(now() AS text);
-.sp
-.fi
-(We generally use the term \fIimplicit
-cast\fR to describe this kind of cast.)
-.PP
-It is wise to be conservative about marking casts as implicit. An
-overabundance of implicit casting paths can cause
-PostgreSQL to choose surprising
-interpretations of commands, or to be unable to resolve commands at
-all because there are multiple possible interpretations. A good
-rule of thumb is to make a cast implicitly invokable only for
-information-preserving transformations between types in the same
-general type category. For example, the cast from \fBint2\fR to
-\fBint4\fR can reasonably be implicit, but the cast from
-\fBfloat8\fR to \fBint4\fR should probably be
-assignment-only. Cross-type-category casts, such as \fBtext\fR
-to \fBint4\fR, are best made explicit-only.
-.PP
-To be able to create a cast, you must own the source or the target
-data type. To create a binary-compatible cast, you must be superuser.
-(This restriction is made because an erroneous binary-compatible cast
-conversion can easily crash the server.)
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIsourcetype\fB\fR
-The name of the source data type of the cast.
-.TP
-\fB\fItargettype\fB\fR
-The name of the target data type of the cast.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfuncname\fB(\fIargtype\fB)\fR
-The function used to perform the cast. The function name may
-be schema-qualified. If it is not, the function will be looked
-up in the path. The argument type must be identical to the
-source type, the result data type must match the target type of
-the cast.
-.TP
-\fBWITHOUT FUNCTION\fR
-Indicates that the source type and the target type are binary
-compatible, so no function is required to perform the cast.
-.TP
-\fBAS ASSIGNMENT\fR
-Indicates that the cast may be invoked implicitly in assignment
-contexts.
-.TP
-\fBAS IMPLICIT\fR
-Indicates that the cast may be invoked implicitly in any context.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use \fBDROP CAST\fR to remove user-defined casts.
-.PP
-Remember that if you want to be able to convert types both ways you
-need to declare casts both ways explicitly.
-.PP
-Prior to PostgreSQL 7.3, every function that had
-the same name as a data type, returned that data type, and took one
-argument of a different type was automatically a cast function.
-This convention has been abandoned in face of the introduction of
-schemas and to be able to represent binary compatible casts in the
-system catalogs. (The built-in cast functions still follow this naming
-scheme, but they have to be shown as casts in the system catalog pg_cast
-now.)
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To create a cast from type \fBtext\fR to type
-\fBint4\fR using the function int4(text):
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE CAST (text AS int4) WITH FUNCTION int4(text);
-.sp
-.fi
-(This cast is already predefined in the system.)
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBCREATE CAST\fR command conforms to SQL99,
-except that SQL99 does not make provisions for binary-compatible
-types. AS IMPLICIT is a PostgreSQL
-extension, too.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)],
-CREATE TYPE [\fBcreate_type\fR(7)],
-DROP CAST [\fBdrop_cast\fR(7)]
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_constraint_trigger.7 b/raw/man7/create_constraint_trigger.7
deleted file mode 100644
index a130e53..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_constraint_trigger.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE CONSTRAINT TRIGGER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE CONSTRAINT TRIGGER \- define a new constraint trigger
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE CONSTRAINT TRIGGER \fIname\fR
- AFTER \fIevents\fR ON
- \fItablename\fR \fIconstraint\fR \fIattributes\fR
- FOR EACH ROW EXECUTE PROCEDURE \fIfuncname\fR ( \fIargs\fR )
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE CONSTRAINT TRIGGER\fR is used within
-\fBCREATE TABLE\fR/\fBALTER TABLE\fR and by
-\fBpg_dump\fR to create the special triggers for
-referential integrity.
-It is not intended for general use.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the constraint trigger.
-.TP
-\fB\fIevents\fB\fR
-The event categories for which this trigger should be fired.
-.TP
-\fB\fItablename\fB\fR
-The name (possibly schema-qualified) of the table in which
-the triggering events occur.
-.TP
-\fB\fIconstraint\fB\fR
-Actual constraint specification.
-.TP
-\fB\fIattributes\fB\fR
-The constraint attributes.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfuncname\fB(\fIargs\fB)\fR
-The function to call as part of the trigger processing.
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_conversion.7 b/raw/man7/create_conversion.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 325e7fe..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_conversion.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE CONVERSION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE CONVERSION \- define a new conversion
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [DEFAULT] CONVERSION \fIname\fR
- FOR \fIsource_encoding\fR TO \fIdest_encoding\fR FROM \fIfuncname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE CONVERSION\fR defines a new encoding
-conversion. Conversion names may be used in the \fBconvert\fR function
-to specify a particular encoding conversion. Also, conversions that
-are marked DEFAULT can be used for automatic encoding conversion between
-client and server. For this purpose, two conversions, from encoding A to
-B \fBand\fR from encoding B to A, must be defined.
-.PP
-To be able to create a conversion, you must have EXECUTE privilege
-on the function and CREATE privilege on the destination schema.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT\fR
-The DEFAULT clause indicates that this conversion
-is the default for this particular source to destination
-encoding. There should be only one default encoding in a schema
-for the encoding pair.
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the conversion. The conversion name may be
-schema-qualified. If it is not, the conversion is defined in the
-current schema. The conversion name must be unique within a
-schema.
-.TP
-\fB\fIsource_encoding\fB\fR
-The source encoding name.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdest_encoding\fB\fR
-The destination encoding name.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfuncname\fB\fR
-The function used to perform the conversion. The function name may
-be schema-qualified. If it is not, the function will be looked
-up in the path.
-
-The function must have the following signature:
-.sp
-.nf
-conv_proc(
- integer, -- source encoding ID
- integer, -- destination encoding ID
- cstring, -- source string (null terminated C string)
- cstring, -- destination string (null terminated C string)
- integer -- source string length
-) RETURNS void;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use \fBDROP CONVERSION\fR to remove user-defined conversions.
-.PP
-The privileges required to create a conversion may be changed in a future
-release.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To create a conversion from encoding UNICODE to
-LATIN1 using \fBmyfunc\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE CONVERSION myconv FOR 'UNICODE' TO 'LATIN1' FROM myfunc;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE CONVERSION\fR
-is a PostgreSQL extension.
-There is no \fBCREATE CONVERSION\fR
-statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER CONVERSION [\fBalter_conversion\fR(7)], CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(l)], DROP CONVERSION [\fBdrop_conversion\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_database.7 b/raw/man7/create_database.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ab3bbf..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_database.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE DATABASE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE DATABASE \- create a new database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE DATABASE \fIname\fR
- [ [ WITH ] [ OWNER [=] \fIdbowner\fR ]
- [ LOCATION [=] '\fIdbpath\fR' ]
- [ TEMPLATE [=] \fItemplate\fR ]
- [ ENCODING [=] \fIencoding\fR ] ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE DATABASE\fR creates a new
-PostgreSQL database.
-.PP
-To create a database, you must be a superuser or have the special
-CREATEDB privilege.
-See CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(7)].
-.PP
-Normally, the creator becomes the owner of the new database.
-Superusers can create databases owned by other users using the
-OWNER clause. They can even create databases owned by
-users with no special privileges. Non-superusers with CREATEDB
-privilege can only create databases owned by themselves.
-.PP
-An alternative location can be specified in order to,
-for example, store the database on a different disk.
-The path must have been prepared with the
-initlocation [\fBinitlocation\fR(1)]
-command.
-.PP
-If the path name does not contain a slash, it is interpreted
-as an environment variable name, which must be known to the
-server process. This way the database administrator can
-exercise control over locations in which databases can be created.
-(A customary choice is, e.g., \fBPGDATA2\fR.)
-If the server is compiled with ALLOW_ABSOLUTE_DBPATHS
-(not so by default), absolute path names, as identified by
-a leading slash
-(e.g., \fI/usr/local/pgsql/data\fR),
-are allowed as well.
-In either case, the final path name must be absolute and must not
-contain any single quotes.
-.PP
-By default, the new database will be created by cloning the standard
-system database template1. A different template can be
-specified by writing TEMPLATE
-\fIname\fR. In particular,
-by writing TEMPLATE template0, you can create a virgin
-database containing only the standard objects predefined by your
-version of PostgreSQL. This is useful
-if you wish to avoid copying
-any installation-local objects that may have been added to
-template1.
-.PP
-The optional encoding parameter allows selection of the database
-encoding. When not specified, it defaults to the encoding used by
-the selected template database.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of a database to create.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdbowner\fB\fR
-The name of the database user who will own the new database,
-or DEFAULT to use the default (namely, the
-user executing the command).
-.TP
-\fB\fIdbpath\fB\fR
-An alternate file-system location in which to store the new database,
-specified as a string literal;
-or DEFAULT to use the default location.
-.TP
-\fB\fItemplate\fB\fR
-The name of the template from which to create the new database,
-or DEFAULT to use the default template
-(template1).
-.TP
-\fB\fIencoding\fB\fR
-Character set encoding to use in the new database. Specify
-a string constant (e.g., 'SQL_ASCII'),
-or an integer encoding number, or DEFAULT
-to use the default encoding.
-.PP
-Optional parameters can be written in any order, not only the order
-illustrated above.
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE DATABASE\fR cannot be executed inside a transaction
-block.
-.PP
-Errors along the line of ``could not initialize database directory''
-are most likely related to insufficient permissions on the data
-directory, a full disk, or other file system problems. When using an
-alternate location, the user under
-which the database server is running must have access to the location.
-.PP
-Use DROP DATABASE [\fBdrop_database\fR(7)] to remove a database.
-.PP
-The program createdb [\fBcreatedb\fR(1)] is a
-wrapper program around this command, provided for convenience.
-.PP
-There are security issues involved with using alternate database
-locations specified with absolute path names; this is why the feature
-is not enabled by default. See the chapter called ``Managing Databases'' in the documentation for more information.
-.PP
-Although it is possible to copy a database other than template1
-by specifying its name as the template, this is not (yet) intended as
-a general-purpose ``\fBCOPY DATABASE\fR'' facility.
-We recommend that databases used as templates be treated as read-only.
-See the chapter called ``Managing Databases'' in the documentation for more information.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To create a new database:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE DATABASE lusiadas;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To create a new database in an alternate area
-\fI~/private_db\fR, execute the following from the
-shell:
-.sp
-.nf
-mkdir private_db
-initlocation ~/private_db
-.sp
-.fi
-Then execute the following from within a
-\fBpsql\fR session:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE DATABASE elsewhere WITH LOCATION '/home/olly/private_db';
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBCREATE DATABASE\fR statement in the SQL
-standard. Databases are equivalent to catalogs, whose creation is
-implementation-defined.
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_domain.7 b/raw/man7/create_domain.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 0275b95..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_domain.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE DOMAIN" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE DOMAIN \- define a new domain
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE DOMAIN \fIname\fR [AS] \fIdata_type\fR
- [ DEFAULT \fIexpression\fR ]
- [ \fIconstraint\fR [ ... ] ]
-
-where \fIconstraint\fR is:
-
-[ CONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fR ]
-{ NOT NULL | NULL | CHECK (\fIexpression\fR) }
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE DOMAIN\fR creates a new data domain. The
-user who defines a domain becomes its owner.
-.PP
-If a schema name is given (for example, CREATE DOMAIN
-myschema.mydomain ...) then the domain is created in the
-specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema.
-The domain name must be unique among the types and domains existing
-in its schema.
-.PP
-Domains are useful for abstracting common fields between tables into
-a single location for maintenance. For example, an email address column may be used
-in several tables, all with the same properties. Define a domain and
-use that rather than setting up each table's constraints individually.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a domain to be created.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdata_type\fB\fR
-The underlying data type of the domain. This may include array
-specifiers.
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT \fIexpression\fB\fR
-The DEFAULT clause specifies a default value for
-columns of the domain data type. The value is any
-variable-free expression (but subqueries are not allowed).
-The data type of the default expression must match the data
-type of the domain. If no default value is specified, then
-the default value is the null value.
-
-The default expression will be used in any insert operation
-that does not specify a value for the column. If a default
-value is defined for a particular column, it overrides any
-default associated with the domain. In turn, the domain
-default overrides any default value associated with the
-underlying data type.
-.TP
-\fBCONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fB\fR
-An optional name for a constraint. If not specified,
-the system generates a name.
-.TP
-\fBNOT NULL\fR
-Values of this domain are not allowed to be null.
-.TP
-\fBNULL\fR
-Values of this domain are allowed to be null. This is the default.
-
-This clause is only intended for compatibility with
-nonstandard SQL databases. Its use is discouraged in new
-applications.
-.TP
-\fBCHECK (\fIexpression\fB)\fR
-CHECK clauses specify integrity constraints or tests
-which values of the domain must satisfy.
-Each constraint must be an expression
-producing a Boolean result. It should use the name VALUE
-to refer to the value being tested.
-
-Currently, CHECK expressions cannot contain
-subqueries nor refer to variables other than VALUE.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-This example creates the \fBcountry_code\fR data type and then uses the
-type in a table definition:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE DOMAIN country_code char(2) NOT NULL;
-CREATE TABLE countrylist (id integer, country country_code);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The command \fBCREATE DOMAIN\fR conforms to the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-DROP DOMAIN [\fBdrop_domain\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_function.7 b/raw/man7/create_function.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 332d910..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_function.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,246 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE FUNCTION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE FUNCTION \- define a new function
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] FUNCTION \fIname\fR ( [ \fIargtype\fR [, ...] ] )
- RETURNS \fIrettype\fR
- { LANGUAGE \fIlangname\fR
- | IMMUTABLE | STABLE | VOLATILE
- | CALLED ON NULL INPUT | RETURNS NULL ON NULL INPUT | STRICT
- | [EXTERNAL] SECURITY INVOKER | [EXTERNAL] SECURITY DEFINER
- | AS '\fIdefinition\fR'
- | AS '\fIobj_file\fR', '\fIlink_symbol\fR'
- } ...
- [ WITH ( \fIattribute\fR [, ...] ) ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE FUNCTION\fR defines a new function.
-\fBCREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION\fR will either create a
-new function, or replace an existing definition.
-.PP
-If a schema name is included, then the function is created in the
-specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema.
-The name of the new function must not match any existing function
-with the same argument types in the same schema. However,
-functions of different argument types may share a name (this is
-called \fIoverloading\fR).
-.PP
-To update the definition of an existing function, use
-\fBCREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION\fR. It is not possible
-to change the name or argument types of a function this way (if you
-tried, you'd just be creating a new, distinct function). Also,
-\fBCREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION\fR will not let you
-change the return type of an existing function. To do that, you
-must drop and recreate the function.
-.PP
-If you drop and then recreate a function, the new function is not
-the same entity as the old; you will break existing rules, views,
-triggers, etc. that referred to the old function. Use
-\fBCREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION\fR to change a function
-definition without breaking objects that refer to the function.
-.PP
-The user that creates the function becomes the owner of the function.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of a function to create.
-.TP
-\fB\fIargtype\fB\fR
-The data type(s) of the function's arguments (optionally
-schema-qualified), if any. The argument types may be base, complex, or
-domain types, or copy the type of an existing column.
-
-The type of a column is referenced by writing
-\fItablename\fR.\fIcolumnname\fR%TYPE;
-using this can sometimes help make a function independent from
-changes to the definition of a table.
-
-Depending on the implementation language it may also be allowed
-to specify ``pseudotypes'' such as \fBcstring\fR.
-Pseudotypes indicate that the actual argument type is either
-incompletely specified, or outside the set of ordinary SQL data types.
-.TP
-\fB\fIrettype\fB\fR
-The return data type (optionally schema-qualified). The return type
-may be specified as a base, complex, or domain type,
-or may copy the type of an existing column. See the description
-under argtype above on how to reference the type
-of an existing column.
-
-Depending on the implementation language it may also be allowed
-to specify ``pseudotypes'' such as \fBcstring\fR.
-The SETOF
-modifier indicates that the function will return a set of
-items, rather than a single item.
-.TP
-\fB\fIlangname\fB\fR
-The name of the language that the function is implemented in.
-May be SQL, C,
-internal, or the name of a user-defined
-procedural language. (See also createlang [\fBcreatelang\fR(1)].) For backward compatibility,
-the name may be enclosed by single quotes.
-.TP
-\fBIMMUTABLE\fR
-.TP
-\fBSTABLE\fR
-.TP
-\fBVOLATILE\fR
-These attributes inform the system whether it is safe to
-replace multiple evaluations of the function with a single
-evaluation, for run-time optimization. At most one choice
-should be specified. If none of these appear,
-VOLATILE is the default assumption.
-
-IMMUTABLE indicates that the function always
-returns the same result when given the same argument values; that
-is, it does not do database lookups or otherwise use information not
-directly present in its argument list. If this option is given,
-any call of the function with all-constant arguments can be
-immediately replaced with the function value.
-
-STABLE indicates that within a single table scan
-the function will consistently
-return the same result for the same argument values, but that its
-result could change across SQL statements. This is the appropriate
-selection for functions whose results depend on database lookups,
-parameter variables (such as the current time zone), etc. Also note
-that the \fBcurrent_timestamp\fR family of functions qualify
-as stable, since their values do not change within a transaction.
-
-VOLATILE indicates that the function value can
-change even within a single table scan, so no optimizations can be
-made. Relatively few database functions are volatile in this sense;
-some examples are random(), currval(),
-timeofday(). Note that any function that has side-effects
-must be classified volatile, even if its result is quite predictable,
-to prevent calls from being optimized away; an example is
-setval().
-.TP
-\fBCALLED ON NULL INPUT\fR
-.TP
-\fBRETURNS NULL ON NULL INPUT\fR
-.TP
-\fBSTRICT\fR
-CALLED ON NULL INPUT (the default) indicates
-that the function will be called normally when some of its
-arguments are null. It is then the function author's
-responsibility to check for null values if necessary and respond
-appropriately.
-
-RETURNS NULL ON NULL INPUT or
-STRICT indicates that the function always
-returns null whenever any of its arguments are null. If this
-parameter is specified, the function is not executed when there
-are null arguments; instead a null result is assumed
-automatically.
-.TP
-\fB[EXTERNAL] SECURITY INVOKER\fR
-.TP
-\fB[EXTERNAL] SECURITY DEFINER\fR
-SECURITY INVOKER indicates that the function
-is to be executed with the privileges of the user that calls it.
-That is the default. SECURITY DEFINER
-specifies that the function is to be executed with the
-privileges of the user that created it.
-
-The key word EXTERNAL is present for SQL
-conformance but is optional since, unlike in SQL, this feature
-does not only apply to external functions.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdefinition\fB\fR
-A string defining the function; the meaning depends on the
-language. It may be an internal function name, the path to an
-object file, an SQL command, or text in a procedural language.
-.TP
-\fB\fIobj_file\fB, \fIlink_symbol\fB\fR
-This form of the AS clause is used for
-dynamically loadable C language functions when the function name
-in the C language source code is not the same as the name of
-the SQL function. The string \fIobj_file\fR is the name of the
-file containing the dynamically loadable object, and
-\fIlink_symbol\fR is the
-function's link symbol, that is, the name of the function in the C
-language source code. If the link symbol is omitted, it is assumed
-to be the same as the name of the SQL function being defined.
-.TP
-\fB\fIattribute\fB\fR
-The historical way to specify optional pieces of information
-about the function. The following attributes may appear here:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBisStrict\fR
-Equivalent to STRICT or RETURNS NULL ON NULL INPUT
-.TP
-\fBisCachable\fR
-isCachable is an obsolete equivalent of
-IMMUTABLE; it's still accepted for
-backwards-compatibility reasons.
-.RE
-.PP
-Attribute names are not case-sensitive.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Refer to the section called ``User-Defined Functions'' in the documentation for further information on writing
-functions.
-.PP
-The full SQL type syntax is allowed for
-input arguments and return value. However, some details of the
-type specification (e.g., the precision field for
-type \fBnumeric\fR) are the responsibility of the
-underlying function implementation and are silently swallowed
-(i.e., not recognized or
-enforced) by the \fBCREATE FUNCTION\fR command.
-.PP
-PostgreSQL allows function
-\fIoverloading\fR; that is, the same name can be
-used for several different functions so long as they have distinct
-argument types. However, the C names of all functions must be
-different, so you must give overloaded C functions different C
-names (for example, use the argument types as part of the C
-names).
-.PP
-When repeated \fBCREATE FUNCTION\fR calls refer to
-the same object file, the file is only loaded once. To unload and
-reload the file (perhaps during development), use the LOAD [\fBload\fR(7)] command.
-.PP
-Use \fBDROP FUNCTION\fR
-to remove user-defined functions.
-.PP
-Any single quotes or backslashes in the function definition must be
-escaped by doubling them.
-.PP
-To be able to define a function, the user must have the
-USAGE privilege on the language.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Here is a trivial example to help you get started. For more
-information and examples, see the section called ``User-Defined Functions'' in the documentation.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE FUNCTION add(integer, integer) RETURNS integer
- AS 'select $1 + $2;'
- LANGUAGE SQL
- IMMUTABLE
- RETURNS NULL ON NULL INPUT;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-A \fBCREATE FUNCTION\fR command is defined in SQL99.
-The PostgreSQL version is similar but
-not fully compatible. The attributes are not portable, neither are the
-different available languages.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-ALTER FUNCTION [\fBalter_function\fR(7)],
-DROP FUNCTION [\fBdrop_function\fR(7)],
-GRANT [\fBgrant\fR(7)],
-LOAD [\fBload\fR(7)],
-REVOKE [\fBrevoke\fR(7)],
-\fBcreatelang\fR(1)
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_group.7 b/raw/man7/create_group.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 1f3a765..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_group.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE GROUP" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE GROUP \- define a new user group
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE GROUP \fIname\fR [ [ WITH ] \fIoption\fR [ ... ] ]
-
-where \fIoption\fR can be:
-
- SYSID \fIgid\fR
- | USER \fIusername\fR [, ...]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE GROUP\fR will create a new group in the
-database cluster. You must be a database
-superuser to use this command.
-.PP
-Use ALTER GROUP [\fBalter_group\fR(7)]
-to change a group's membership, and DROP GROUP [\fBdrop_group\fR(7)] to remove a group.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the group.
-.TP
-\fB\fIgid\fB\fR
-The SYSID clause can be used to choose
-the PostgreSQL group ID of the new
-group. It is not necessary to do so, however.
-
-If this is not specified, the highest assigned group ID plus one,
-starting at 1, will be used as default.
-.TP
-\fB\fIusername\fB\fR
-A list of users to include in the group. The users must already exist.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Create an empty group:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE GROUP staff;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Create a group with members:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE GROUP marketing WITH USER jonathan, david;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBCREATE GROUP\fR statement in the SQL
-standard. Roles are similar in concept to groups.
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_index.7 b/raw/man7/create_index.7
deleted file mode 100644
index e0f52a6..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_index.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE INDEX" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE INDEX \- define a new index
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ UNIQUE ] INDEX \fIname\fR ON \fItable\fR [ USING \fImethod\fR ]
- ( { \fIcolumn\fR | ( \fIexpression\fR ) } [ \fIopclass\fR ] [, ...] )
- [ WHERE \fIpredicate\fR ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE INDEX\fR constructs an index \fIindex_name\fR on the specified table.
-Indexes are primarily used to enhance database performance (though
-inappropriate use will result in slower performance).
-.PP
-The key field(s) for the index are specified as column names,
-or alternatively as expressions written in parentheses.
-Multiple fields can be specified if the index method supports
-multicolumn indexes.
-.PP
-An index field can be an expression computed from the values of
-one or more columns of the table row. This feature can be used
-to obtain fast access to data based on some transformation of
-the basic data. For example, an index computed on
-upper(col) would allow the clause
-WHERE upper(col) = 'JIM' to use an index.
-.PP
-PostgreSQL provides the index methods
-B-tree, R-tree, hash, and GiST. The B-tree index method is an
-implementation of Lehman-Yao high-concurrency B-trees. The R-tree
-index method implements standard R-trees using Guttman's quadratic
-split algorithm. The hash index method is an implementation of
-Litwin's linear hashing. Users can also define their own index
-methods, but that is fairly complicated.
-.PP
-When the WHERE clause is present, a
-\fIpartial index\fR is created.
-A partial index is an index that contains entries for only a portion of
-a table, usually a portion that is somehow more interesting than the
-rest of the table. For example, if you have a table that contains both
-billed and unbilled orders where the unbilled orders take up a small
-fraction of the total table and yet that is an often used section, you
-can improve performance by creating an index on just that portion.
-Another possible application is to use WHERE with
-UNIQUE to enforce uniqueness over a subset of a
-table.
-.PP
-The expression used in the WHERE clause may refer
-only to columns of the underlying table (but it can use all columns,
-not only the one(s) being indexed). Presently, subqueries and
-aggregate expressions are also forbidden in WHERE.
-The same restrictions apply to index fields that are expressions.
-.PP
-All functions and operators used in an index definition must be
-``immutable'', that is, their results must depend only on
-their arguments and never on any outside influence (such as
-the contents of another table or the current time). This restriction
-ensures that the behavior of the index is well-defined. To use a
-user-defined function in an index expression or WHERE
-clause, remember to mark the function immutable when you create it.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBUNIQUE\fR
-Causes the system to check for
-duplicate values in the table when the index is created (if data
-already exist) and each time data is added. Attempts to
-insert or update data which would result in duplicate entries
-will generate an error.
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the index to be created. No schema name can be included
-here; the index is always created in the same schema as its parent
-table.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (possibly schema-qualified) of the table to be indexed.
-.TP
-\fB\fImethod\fB\fR
-The name of the method to be used for the index. Choices are
-btree, hash,
-rtree, and gist. The
-default method is btree.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-The name of a column of the table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIexpression\fB\fR
-An expression based on one or more columns of the table. The
-expression usually must be written with surrounding parentheses,
-as shown in the syntax. However, the parentheses may be omitted
-if the expression has the form of a function call.
-.TP
-\fB\fIopclass\fB\fR
-The name of an operator class. See below for details.
-.TP
-\fB\fIpredicate\fB\fR
-The constraint expression for a partial index.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-See the chapter called ``Indexes'' in the documentation for information about when indexes can
-be used, when they are not used, and in which particular situations
-can be useful.
-.PP
-Currently, only the B-tree and GiST index methods support
-multicolumn indexes. Up to 32 fields may be specified by default.
-(This limit can be altered when building
-PostgreSQL.) Only B-tree currently
-supports unique indexes.
-.PP
-An \fIoperator class\fR can be specified for each
-column of an index. The operator class identifies the operators to be
-used by the index for that column. For example, a B-tree index on
-four-byte integers would use the int4_ops class;
-this operator class includes comparison functions for four-byte
-integers. In practice the default operator class for the column's data
-type is usually sufficient. The main point of having operator classes
-is that for some data types, there could be more than one meaningful
-ordering. For example, we might want to sort a complex-number data
-type either by absolute value or by real part. We could do this by
-defining two operator classes for the data type and then selecting
-the proper class when making an index. More information about
-operator classes is in the sections called ``Operator Classes'' and ``Interfacing Extensions to Indexes'' in the documentation.
-.PP
-Use DROP INDEX [\fBdrop_index\fR(7)]
-to remove an index.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To create a B-tree index on the column title in
-the table films:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE UNIQUE INDEX title_idx ON films (title);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE INDEX\fR is a
-PostgreSQL language extension. There
-are no provisions for indexes in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_language.7 b/raw/man7/create_language.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b71c3ac..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_language.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE LANGUAGE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE LANGUAGE \- define a new procedural language
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ TRUSTED ] [ PROCEDURAL ] LANGUAGE \fIname\fR
- HANDLER \fIcall_handler\fR [ VALIDATOR \fIvalfunction\fR ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-Using \fBCREATE LANGUAGE\fR, a
-PostgreSQL user can register a new
-procedural language with a PostgreSQL
-database. Subsequently, functions and trigger procedures can be
-defined in this new language. The user must have the
-PostgreSQL superuser privilege to
-register a new language.
-.PP
-\fBCREATE LANGUAGE\fR effectively associates the
-language name with a call handler that is responsible for executing
-functions written in the language. Refer to the section called ``User-Defined Functions'' in the documentation
-for more information about language call handlers.
-.PP
-Note that procedural languages are local to individual databases.
-To make a language available in all databases by default, it should
-be installed into the template1 database.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBTRUSTED\fR
-TRUSTED specifies that the call handler for
-the language is safe, that is, it does not offer an
-unprivileged user any functionality to bypass access
-restrictions. If this key word is omitted when registering the
-language, only users with the
-PostgreSQL superuser privilege can
-use this language to create new functions.
-.TP
-\fBPROCEDURAL\fR
-This is a noise word.
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the new procedural language. The language name is
-case insensitive. The name must be unique among the languages
-in the database.
-
-For backward compatibility, the name may be enclosed by single
-quotes.
-.TP
-\fBHANDLER \fIcall_handler\fB\fR
-\fIcall_handler\fR is
-the name of a previously registered function that will be
-called to execute the procedural language functions. The call
-handler for a procedural language must be written in a compiled
-language such as C with version 1 call convention and
-registered with PostgreSQL as a
-function taking no arguments and returning the
-\fBlanguage_handler\fR type, a placeholder type that is
-simply used to identify the function as a call handler.
-.TP
-\fBVALIDATOR \fIvalfunction\fB\fR
-\fIvalfunction\fR is the
-name of a previously registered function that will be called
-when a new function in the language is created, to validate the
-new function.
-If no
-validator function is specified, then a new function will not
-be checked when it is created.
-The validator function must take one argument of
-type \fBoid\fR, which will be the OID of the
-to-be-created function, and will typically return \fBvoid\fR.
-
-A validator function would typically inspect the function body
-for syntactical correctness, but it can also look at other
-properties of the function, for example if the language cannot
-handle certain argument types. To signal an error, the
-validator function should use the \fBereport()\fR
-function. The return value of the function is ignored.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-This command normally should not be executed directly by users.
-For the procedural languages supplied in the
-PostgreSQL distribution, the \fBcreatelang\fR(1) program should be used, which will also
-install the correct call handler. (\fBcreatelang\fR
-will call \fBCREATE LANGUAGE\fR internally.)
-.PP
-In PostgreSQL versions before 7.3, it was
-necessary to declare handler functions as returning the placeholder
-type \fBopaque\fR, rather than \fBlanguage_handler\fR.
-To support loading
-of old dump files, \fBCREATE LANGUAGE\fR will accept a function
-declared as returning \fBopaque\fR, but it will issue a notice and
-change the function's declared return type to \fBlanguage_handler\fR.
-.PP
-Use the CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)] command to create a new
-function.
-.PP
-Use DROP LANGUAGE [\fBdrop_language\fR(7)], or better yet the \fBdroplang\fR(1) program, to drop procedural languages.
-.PP
-The system catalog \fBpg_language\fR (see the chapter called ``System Catalogs'' in the documentation) records information about the
-currently installed languages. Also \fBcreatelang\fR
-has an option to list the installed languages.
-.PP
-The definition of a procedural language cannot be changed once it
-has been created, with the exception of the privileges.
-.PP
-To be able to use a procedural language, a user must be granted the
-USAGE privilege. The
-\fBcreatelang\fR program automatically grants
-permissions to everyone if the language is known to be trusted.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The following two commands executed in sequence will register a new
-procedural language and the associated call handler.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE FUNCTION plsample_call_handler() RETURNS language_handler
- AS '$libdir/plsample'
- LANGUAGE C;
-CREATE LANGUAGE plsample
- HANDLER plsample_call_handler;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE LANGUAGE\fR is a
-PostgreSQL extension.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER LANGUAGE [\fBalter_language\fR(7)], CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(l)], DROP LANGUAGE [\fBdrop_language\fR(l)], GRANT [\fBgrant\fR(l)], REVOKE [\fBrevoke\fR(l)], \fBcreatelang\fR(1), \fBdroplang\fR(1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_operator.7 b/raw/man7/create_operator.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 3adc7ab..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_operator.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE OPERATOR" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE OPERATOR \- define a new operator
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE OPERATOR \fIname\fR (
- PROCEDURE = \fIfuncname\fR
- [, LEFTARG = \fIlefttype\fR ] [, RIGHTARG = \fIrighttype\fR ]
- [, COMMUTATOR = \fIcom_op\fR ] [, NEGATOR = \fIneg_op\fR ]
- [, RESTRICT = \fIres_proc\fR ] [, JOIN = \fIjoin_proc\fR ]
- [, HASHES ] [, MERGES ]
- [, SORT1 = \fIleft_sort_op\fR ] [, SORT2 = \fIright_sort_op\fR ]
- [, LTCMP = \fIless_than_op\fR ] [, GTCMP = \fIgreater_than_op\fR ]
-)
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE OPERATOR\fR defines a new operator,
-\fIname\fR. The user who
-defines an operator becomes its owner. If a schema name is given
-then the operator is created in the specified schema. Otherwise it
-is created in the current schema.
-.PP
-The operator name is a sequence of up to \fBNAMEDATALEN\fR-1
-(63 by default) characters from the following list:
-.sp
-.nf
-+ - * / < > = ~ ! @ # % ^ & | ` ?
-.sp
-.fi
-There are a few restrictions on your choice of name:
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
--- and /* cannot appear anywhere in an operator name,
-since they will be taken as the start of a comment.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-A multicharacter operator name cannot end in + or
--,
-unless the name also contains at least one of these characters:
-.sp
-.nf
-~ ! @ # % ^ & | ` ?
-.sp
-.fi
-For example, @- is an allowed operator name,
-but *- is not.
-This restriction allows PostgreSQL to
-parse SQL-compliant commands without requiring spaces between tokens.
-.PP
-.PP
-The operator != is mapped to
-<> on input, so these two names are always
-equivalent.
-.PP
-At least one of LEFTARG and RIGHTARG must be defined. For
-binary operators, both must be defined. For right unary
-operators, only LEFTARG should be defined, while for left
-unary operators only RIGHTARG should be defined.
-.PP
-The \fIfuncname\fR
-procedure must have been previously defined using \fBCREATE
-FUNCTION\fR and must be defined to accept the correct number
-of arguments (either one or two) of the indicated types.
-.PP
-The other clauses specify optional operator optimization clauses.
-Their meaning is detailed in the section called ``User-Defined Operators'' in the documentation.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the operator to be defined. See above for allowable
-characters. The name may be schema-qualified, for example
-CREATE OPERATOR myschema.+ (...). If not, then
-the operator is created in the current schema. Two operators
-in the same schema can have the same name if they operate on
-different data types. This is called
-\fIoverloading\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfuncname\fB\fR
-The function used to implement this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIlefttype\fB\fR
-The type of the left-hand argument of the operator, if any.
-This option would be omitted for a left-unary operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIrighttype\fB\fR
-The type of the right-hand argument of the operator, if any.
-This option would be omitted for a right-unary operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcom_op\fB\fR
-The commutator of this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIneg_op\fB\fR
-The negator of this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIres_proc\fB\fR
-The restriction selectivity estimator function for this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIjoin_proc\fB\fR
-The join selectivity estimator function for this operator.
-.TP
-\fBHASHES\fR
-Indicates this operator can support a hash join.
-.TP
-\fBMERGES\fR
-Indicates this operator can support a merge join.
-.TP
-\fB\fIleft_sort_op\fB\fR
-If this operator can support a merge join, the less-than
-operator that sorts the left-hand data type of this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIright_sort_op\fB\fR
-If this operator can support a merge join, the less-than
-operator that sorts the right-hand data type of this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIless_than_op\fB\fR
-If this operator can support a merge join, the less-than
-operator that compares the input data types of this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIgreater_than_op\fB\fR
-If this operator can support a merge join, the greater-than
-operator that compares the input data types of this operator.
-.PP
-To give a schema-qualified operator name in \fIcom_op\fR or the other optional
-arguments, use the OPERATOR() syntax, for example
-.sp
-.nf
-COMMUTATOR = OPERATOR(myschema.===) ,
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Refer to the section called ``User-Defined Operators'' in the documentation for further information.
-.PP
-Use \fBDROP OPERATOR\fR to delete user-defined
-operators from a database.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The following command defines a new operator, area-equality, for
-the data type \fBbox\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE OPERATOR === (
- LEFTARG = box,
- RIGHTARG = box,
- PROCEDURE = area_equal_procedure,
- COMMUTATOR = ===,
- NEGATOR = !==,
- RESTRICT = area_restriction_procedure,
- JOIN = area_join_procedure,
- HASHES,
- SORT1 = <<<,
- SORT2 = <<<
- -- Since sort operators were given, MERGES is implied.
- -- LTCMP and GTCMP are assumed to be < and > respectively
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE OPERATOR\fR is a
-PostgreSQL extension. There are no
-provisions for user-defined operators in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_operator_class.7 b/raw/man7/create_operator_class.7
deleted file mode 100644
index d4ab1c4..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_operator_class.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE OPERATOR CLASS" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE OPERATOR CLASS \- define a new operator class
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE OPERATOR CLASS \fIname\fR [ DEFAULT ] FOR TYPE \fIdata_type\fR USING \fIindex_method\fR AS
- { OPERATOR \fIstrategy_number\fR \fIoperator_name\fR [ ( \fIop_type\fR, \fIop_type\fR ) ] [ RECHECK ]
- | FUNCTION \fIsupport_number\fR \fIfuncname\fR ( \fIargument_type\fR [, ...] )
- | STORAGE \fIstorage_type\fR
- } [, ... ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE OPERATOR CLASS\fR creates a new operator class.
-An operator class defines how a particular data type can be used with
-an index. The operator class specifies that certain operators will fill
-particular roles or ``strategies'' for this data type and this
-index method. The operator class also specifies the support procedures to
-be used by
-the index method when the operator class is selected for an
-index column. All the operators and functions used by an operator
-class must be defined before the operator class is created.
-.PP
-If a schema name is given then the operator class is created in the
-specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema.
-Two operator classes in the same schema can have the same name only if they
-are for different index methods.
-.PP
-The user who defines an operator class becomes its owner. Presently,
-the creating user must be a superuser. (This restriction is made because
-an erroneous operator class definition could confuse or even crash the
-server.)
-.PP
-\fBCREATE OPERATOR CLASS\fR does not presently check
-whether the operator class definition includes all the operators and functions
-required by the index method. It is the user's
-responsibility to define a valid operator class.
-.PP
-Refer to the section called ``Interfacing Extensions to Indexes'' in the documentation for further information.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the operator class to be created. The name may be
-schema-qualified.
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT\fR
-If present, the operator class will become the default
-operator class for its data type. At most one operator class
-can be the default for a specific data type and index method.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdata_type\fB\fR
-The column data type that this operator class is for.
-.TP
-\fB\fIindex_method\fB\fR
-The name of the index method this operator class is for.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstrategy_number\fB\fR
-The index method's strategy number for an operator
-associated with the operator class.
-.TP
-\fB\fIoperator_name\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an operator associated
-with the operator class.
-.TP
-\fB\fIop_type\fB\fR
-The operand data type(s) of an operator, or NONE to
-signify a left-unary or right-unary operator. The operand data
-types may be omitted in the normal case where they are the same
-as the operator class's data type.
-.TP
-\fBRECHECK\fR
-If present, the index is ``lossy'' for this operator, and
-so the rows retrieved using the index must be rechecked to
-verify that they actually satisfy the qualification clause
-involving this operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIsupport_number\fB\fR
-The index method's support procedure number for a
-function associated with the operator class.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfuncname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a function that is an
-index method support procedure for the operator class.
-.TP
-\fB\fIargument_types\fB\fR
-The parameter data type(s) of the function.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstorage_type\fB\fR
-The data type actually stored in the index. Normally this is
-the same as the column data type, but some index methods
-(only GiST at this writing) allow it to be different. The
-STORAGE clause must be omitted unless the index
-method allows a different type to be used.
-.PP
-The OPERATOR, FUNCTION, and STORAGE
-clauses may appear in any order.
-.PP
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The following example command defines a GiST index operator class
-for the data type _int4 (array of \fBint4\fR). See
-\fIcontrib/intarray/\fR for the complete example.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE OPERATOR CLASS gist__int_ops
- DEFAULT FOR TYPE _int4 USING gist AS
- OPERATOR 3 &&,
- OPERATOR 6 = RECHECK,
- OPERATOR 7 @,
- OPERATOR 8 ~,
- OPERATOR 20 @@ (_int4, query_int),
- FUNCTION 1 g_int_consistent (internal, _int4, int4),
- FUNCTION 2 g_int_union (bytea, internal),
- FUNCTION 3 g_int_compress (internal),
- FUNCTION 4 g_int_decompress (internal),
- FUNCTION 5 g_int_penalty (internal, internal, internal),
- FUNCTION 6 g_int_picksplit (internal, internal),
- FUNCTION 7 g_int_same (_int4, _int4, internal);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE OPERATOR CLASS\fR is a
-PostgreSQL extension. There is no
-\fBCREATE OPERATOR CLASS\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER OPERATOR CLASS [\fBalter_operator_class\fR(7)], DROP OPERATOR CLASS [\fBdrop_operator_class\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_rule.7 b/raw/man7/create_rule.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ae2e7c..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_rule.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,152 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE RULE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE RULE \- define a new rewrite rule
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] RULE \fIname\fR AS ON \fIevent\fR
- TO \fItable\fR [ WHERE \fIcondition\fR ]
- DO [ INSTEAD ] { NOTHING | \fIcommand\fR | ( \fIcommand\fR ; \fIcommand\fR ... ) }
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE RULE\fR defines a new rule applying to a specified
-table or view.
-\fBCREATE OR REPLACE RULE\fR will either create a
-new rule, or replace an existing rule of the same name for the same
-table.
-.PP
-The PostgreSQL rule system allows one to
-define an alternate action to be performed on insertions, updates,
-or deletions in database tables. Roughly speaking, a rule causes
-additional commands to be executed when a given command on a given
-table is executed. Alternatively, a rule can replace a given
-command by another, or cause a command not to be executed at all.
-Rules are used to implement table views as well. It is important
-to realize that a rule is really a command transformation
-mechanism, or command macro. The transformation happens before the
-execution of the commands starts. If you actually want an
-operation that fires independently for each physical row, you
-probably want to use a trigger, not a rule. More information about
-the rules system is in the chapter called ``The Rule System'' in the documentation.
-.PP
-Presently, ON SELECT rules must be unconditional
-INSTEAD rules and must have actions that consist
-of a single \fBSELECT\fR command. Thus, an
-ON SELECT rule effectively turns the table into
-a view, whose visible contents are the rows returned by the rule's
-\fBSELECT\fR command rather than whatever had been
-stored in the table (if anything). It is considered better style
-to write a \fBCREATE VIEW\fR command than to create a
-real table and define an ON SELECT rule for it.
-.PP
-You can create the illusion of an updatable view by defining
-ON INSERT, ON UPDATE, and
-ON DELETE rules (or any subset of those that's
-sufficient for your purposes) to replace update actions on the view
-with appropriate updates on other tables.
-.PP
-There is a catch if you try to use conditional rules for view
-updates: there \fBmust\fR be an unconditional
-INSTEAD rule for each action you wish to allow
-on the view. If the rule is conditional, or is not
-INSTEAD, then the system will still reject
-attempts to perform the update action, because it thinks it might
-end up trying to perform the action on the dummy table of the view
-in some cases. If you want to handle all the useful cases in
-conditional rules, you can; just add an unconditional DO
-INSTEAD NOTHING rule to ensure that the system
-understands it will never be called on to update the dummy table.
-Then make the conditional rules not INSTEAD; in
-the cases where they are applied, they add to the default
-INSTEAD NOTHING action.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of a rule to create. This must be distinct from the
-name of any other rule for the same table. Multiple rules on
-the same table and same event type are applied in alphabetical
-name order.
-.TP
-\fB\fIevent\fB\fR
-The even is one of SELECT,
-INSERT, UPDATE, or
-DELETE.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table or view the
-rule applies to.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcondition\fB\fR
-Any SQL conditional expression (returning \fBboolean\fR).
-The condition expression may not refer to any tables except
-NEW and OLD, and may not
-contain aggregate functions.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcommand\fB\fR
-The command or commands that make up the rule action. Valid
-commands are SELECT,
-INSERT, UPDATE,
-DELETE, or NOTIFY.
-.PP
-Within \fIcondition\fR and
-\fIcommand\fR, the special
-table names NEW and OLD may
-be used to refer to values in the referenced table.
-NEW is valid in ON INSERT and
-ON UPDATE rules to refer to the new row being
-inserted or updated. OLD is valid in
-ON UPDATE and ON DELETE rules
-to refer to the existing row being updated or deleted.
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-You must have the privilege RULE on a table to
-be allowed to define a rule on it.
-.PP
-It is very important to take care to avoid circular rules. For
-example, though each of the following two rule definitions are
-accepted by PostgreSQL, the
-\fBSELECT\fR command would cause
-PostgreSQL to report an error because
-the query cycled too many times:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE RULE "_RETURN" AS
- ON SELECT TO t1
- DO INSTEAD
- SELECT * FROM t2;
-
-CREATE RULE "_RETURN" AS
- ON SELECT TO t2
- DO INSTEAD
- SELECT * FROM t1;
-
-SELECT * FROM t1;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Presently, if a rule action contains a \fBNOTIFY\fR
-command, the \fBNOTIFY\fR command will be executed
-unconditionally, that is, the \fBNOTIFY\fR will be
-issued even if there are not any rows that the rule should apply
-to. For example, in
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE RULE notify_me AS ON UPDATE TO mytable DO NOTIFY mytable;
-
-UPDATE mytable SET name = 'foo' WHERE id = 42;
-.sp
-.fi
-one \fBNOTIFY\fR event will be sent during the
-\fBUPDATE\fR, whether or not there are any rows with
-id = 42. This is an implementation restriction
-that may be fixed in future releases.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE RULE\fR is a
-PostgreSQL language extension, as is the
-entire rules system.
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_schema.7 b/raw/man7/create_schema.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 372ffcd..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_schema.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE SCHEMA" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE SCHEMA \- define a new schema
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE SCHEMA \fIschemaname\fR [ AUTHORIZATION \fIusername\fR ] [ \fIschema_element\fR [ ... ] ]
-CREATE SCHEMA AUTHORIZATION \fIusername\fR [ \fIschema_element\fR [ ... ] ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE SCHEMA\fR will enter a new schema
-into the current database.
-The schema name must be distinct from the name of any existing schema
-in the current database.
-.PP
-A schema is essentially a namespace:
-it contains named objects (tables, data types, functions, and operators)
-whose names may duplicate those of other objects existing in other
-schemas. Named objects are accessed either by ``qualifying''
-their names with the schema name as a prefix, or by setting a search
-path that includes the desired schema(s). Unqualified objects are
-created in the current schema (the one at the front of the search path,
-which can be determined with the function \fBcurrent_schema\fR).
-.PP
-Optionally, \fBCREATE SCHEMA\fR can include subcommands
-to create objects within the new schema. The subcommands are treated
-essentially the same as separate commands issued after creating the
-schema, except that if the AUTHORIZATION clause is used,
-all the created objects will be owned by that user.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIschemaname\fB\fR
-The name of a schema to be created. If this is omitted, the user name
-is used as the schema name.
-.TP
-\fB\fIusername\fB\fR
-The name of the user who will own the schema. If omitted,
-defaults to the user executing the command. Only superusers
-may create schemas owned by users other than themselves.
-.TP
-\fB\fIschema_element\fB\fR
-An SQL statement defining an object to be created within the schema.
-Currently, only \fBCREATE TABLE\fR, \fBCREATE VIEW\fR,
-and \fBGRANT\fR are accepted as clauses within
-\fBCREATE SCHEMA\fR. Other kinds of objects may be created
-in separate commands after the schema is created.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-To create a schema, the invoking user must have CREATE
-privilege for the current database. (Of course, superusers bypass
-this check.)
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Create a schema:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE SCHEMA myschema;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Create a schema for user joe; the schema will also be
-named joe:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE SCHEMA AUTHORIZATION joe;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Create a schema and create a table and view within it:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE SCHEMA hollywood
- CREATE TABLE films (title text, release date, awards text[])
- CREATE VIEW winners AS
- SELECT title, release FROM films WHERE awards IS NOT NULL;
-.sp
-.fi
-Notice that the individual subcommands do not end with semicolons.
-.PP
-The following is an equivalent way of accomplishing the same result:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE SCHEMA hollywood;
-CREATE TABLE hollywood.films (title text, release date, awards text[]);
-CREATE VIEW hollywood.winners AS
- SELECT title, release FROM hollywood.films WHERE awards IS NOT NULL;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard allows a DEFAULT CHARACTER SET clause
-in \fBCREATE SCHEMA\fR, as well as more subcommand
-types than are presently accepted by
-PostgreSQL.
-.PP
-The SQL standard specifies that the subcommands in \fBCREATE
-SCHEMA\fR may appear in any order. The present
-PostgreSQL implementation does not
-handle all cases of forward references in subcommands; it may
-sometimes be necessary to reorder the subcommands to avoid forward
-references.
-.PP
-According to the SQL standard, the owner of a schema always owns
-all objects within it. PostgreSQL
-allows schemas to contain objects owned by users other than the
-schema owner. This can happen only if the schema owner grants the
-CREATE privilege on his schema to someone else.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER SCHEMA [\fBalter_schema\fR(7)], DROP SCHEMA [\fBdrop_schema\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_sequence.7 b/raw/man7/create_sequence.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 1eda397..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_sequence.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,194 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE SEQUENCE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE SEQUENCE \- define a new sequence generator
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ TEMPORARY | TEMP ] SEQUENCE \fIname\fR [ INCREMENT [ BY ] \fIincrement\fR ]
- [ MINVALUE \fIminvalue\fR | NO MINVALUE ] [ MAXVALUE \fImaxvalue\fR | NO MAXVALUE ]
- [ START [ WITH ] \fIstart\fR ] [ CACHE \fIcache\fR ] [ [ NO ] CYCLE ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE SEQUENCE\fR creates a new sequence number
-generator. This involves creating and initializing a new special
-single-row table with the name \fIname\fR. The generator will be
-owned by the user issuing the command.
-.PP
-If a schema name is given then the sequence is created in the
-specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema.
-Temporary sequences exist in a special schema, so a schema name may not be
-given when creating a temporary sequence.
-The sequence name must be distinct from the name of any other sequence,
-table, index, or view in the same schema.
-.PP
-After a sequence is created, you use the functions
-\fBnextval\fR,
-\fBcurrval\fR, and
-\fBsetval\fR
-to operate on the sequence. These functions are documented in
-the section called ``Sequence-Manipulation Functions'' in the documentation.
-.PP
-Although you cannot update a sequence directly, you can use a query like
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT * FROM \fIname\fR;
-.sp
-.fi
-to examine the parameters and current state of a sequence. In particular,
-the last_value field of the sequence shows the last value
-allocated by any session. (Of course, this value may be obsolete
-by the time it's printed, if other sessions are actively doing
-\fBnextval\fR calls.)
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBTEMPORARY or TEMP\fR
-If specified, the sequence object is created only for this
-session, and is automatically dropped on session exit. Existing
-permanent sequences with the same name are not visible (in this
-session) while the temporary sequence exists, unless they are
-referenced with schema-qualified names.
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the sequence to be created.
-.TP
-\fB\fIincrement\fB\fR
-The optional clause INCREMENT BY \fIincrement\fR specified,
-which value is added to the current sequence value to create a
-new value. A positive value will make an ascending sequence, a
-negative one a descending sequence. The default value is 1.
-.TP
-\fB\fIminvalue\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fBNO MINVALUE\fR
-The optional clause MINVALUE \fIminvalue\fR determines
-the minimum value a sequence can generate. If this clause is not
-supplied or \fBNO MINVALUE\fR is specified, then
-defaults will be used. The defaults are 1 and
--263-1 for ascending and descending sequences,
-respectively.
-.TP
-\fB\fImaxvalue\fB\fR
-.TP
-\fBNO MAXVALUE\fR
-The optional clause MAXVALUE \fImaxvalue\fR determines
-the maximum value for the sequence. If this clause is not
-supplied or \fBNO MAXVALUE\fR is specified, then
-default values will be used. The defaults are
-263-1 and -1 for ascending and descending
-sequences, respectively.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstart\fB\fR
-The optional clause START WITH \fIstart\fR allows the
-sequence to begin anywhere. The default starting value is
-\fIminvalue\fR for
-ascending sequences and \fImaxvalue\fR for descending ones.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcache\fB\fR
-The optional clause CACHE \fIcache\fR specifies how
-many sequence numbers are to be preallocated and stored in
-memory for faster access. The minimum value is 1 (only one value
-can be generated at a time, i.e., no cache), and this is also the
-default.
-.TP
-\fBCYCLE\fR
-.TP
-\fBNO CYCLE\fR
-The CYCLE option allows the sequence to wrap
-around when the \fImaxvalue\fR or \fIminvalue\fR has been reached by an
-ascending or descending sequence respectively. If the limit is
-reached, the next number generated will be the \fIminvalue\fR or \fImaxvalue\fR, respectively.
-
-If NO CYCLE is specified, any calls to
-\fBnextval\fR after the sequence has reached its
-maximum value will return an error. If neither
-CYCLE or NO CYCLE are
-specified, NO CYCLE is the default.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use \fBDROP SEQUENCE\fR to remove a sequence.
-.PP
-Sequences are based on \fBbigint\fR arithmetic, so the range
-cannot exceed the range of an eight-byte integer
-(-9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807). On some older
-platforms, there may be no compiler support for eight-byte
-integers, in which case sequences use regular \fBinteger\fR
-arithmetic (range -2147483648 to +2147483647).
-.PP
-Unexpected results may be obtained if a \fIcache\fR setting greater than one is
-used for a sequence object that will be used concurrently by
-multiple sessions. Each session will allocate and cache successive
-sequence values during one access to the sequence object and
-increase the sequence object's last_value accordingly.
-Then, the next \fIcache\fR-1
-uses of \fBnextval\fR within that session simply return the
-preallocated values without touching the sequence object. So, any
-numbers allocated but not used within a session will be lost when
-that session ends, resulting in ``holes'' in the
-sequence.
-.PP
-Furthermore, although multiple sessions are guaranteed to allocate
-distinct sequence values, the values may be generated out of
-sequence when all the sessions are considered. For example, with
-a \fIcache\fR setting of 10,
-session A might reserve values 1..10 and return
-\fBnextval\fR=1, then session B might reserve values
-11..20 and return \fBnextval\fR=11 before session A
-has generated nextval=2. Thus, with a
-\fIcache\fR setting of one
-it is safe to assume that \fBnextval\fR values are generated
-sequentially; with a \fIcache\fR setting greater than one you
-should only assume that the \fBnextval\fR values are all
-distinct, not that they are generated purely sequentially. Also,
-last_value will reflect the latest value reserved by
-any session, whether or not it has yet been returned by
-\fBnextval\fR.
-.PP
-Another consideration is that a \fBsetval\fR executed on
-such a sequence will not be noticed by other sessions until they
-have used up any preallocated values they have cached.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Create an ascending sequence called serial, starting at 101:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE SEQUENCE serial START 101;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Select the next number from this sequence:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT nextval('serial');
-
- nextval
----------
- 114
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Use this sequence in an \fBINSERT\fR command:
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT INTO distributors VALUES (nextval('serial'), 'nothing');
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Update the sequence value after a \fBCOPY FROM\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN;
-COPY distributors FROM 'input_file';
-SELECT setval('serial', max(id)) FROM distributors;
-END;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE SEQUENCE\fR is a
-PostgreSQL language extension. There is
-no \fBCREATE SEQUENCE\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_table.7 b/raw/man7/create_table.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 05a84ab..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_table.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,594 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE TABLE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE TABLE \- define a new table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ [ GLOBAL | LOCAL ] { TEMPORARY | TEMP } ] TABLE \fItable_name\fR (
- { \fIcolumn_name\fR \fIdata_type\fR [ DEFAULT \fIdefault_expr\fR ] [ \fIcolumn_constraint\fR [, ... ] ]
- | \fItable_constraint\fR
- | LIKE \fIparent_table\fR [ { INCLUDING | EXCLUDING } DEFAULTS ] } [, ... ]
-)
-[ INHERITS ( \fIparent_table\fR [, ... ] ) ]
-[ WITH OIDS | WITHOUT OIDS ]
-[ ON COMMIT { PRESERVE ROWS | DELETE ROWS | DROP } ]
-
-where \fIcolumn_constraint\fR is:
-
-[ CONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fR ]
-{ NOT NULL | NULL | UNIQUE | PRIMARY KEY |
- CHECK (\fIexpression\fR) |
- REFERENCES \fIreftable\fR [ ( \fIrefcolumn\fR ) ] [ MATCH FULL | MATCH PARTIAL | MATCH SIMPLE ]
- [ ON DELETE \fIaction\fR ] [ ON UPDATE \fIaction\fR ] }
-[ DEFERRABLE | NOT DEFERRABLE ] [ INITIALLY DEFERRED | INITIALLY IMMEDIATE ]
-
-and \fItable_constraint\fR is:
-
-[ CONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fR ]
-{ UNIQUE ( \fIcolumn_name\fR [, ... ] ) |
- PRIMARY KEY ( \fIcolumn_name\fR [, ... ] ) |
- CHECK ( \fIexpression\fR ) |
- FOREIGN KEY ( \fIcolumn_name\fR [, ... ] ) REFERENCES \fIreftable\fR [ ( \fIrefcolumn\fR [, ... ] ) ]
- [ MATCH FULL | MATCH PARTIAL | MATCH SIMPLE ] [ ON DELETE \fIaction\fR ] [ ON UPDATE \fIaction\fR ] }
-[ DEFERRABLE | NOT DEFERRABLE ] [ INITIALLY DEFERRED | INITIALLY IMMEDIATE ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE TABLE\fR will create a new, initially empty table
-in the current database. The table will be owned by the user issuing the
-command.
-.PP
-If a schema name is given (for example, CREATE TABLE
-myschema.mytable ...) then the table is created in the
-specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema.
-Temporary tables exist in a special schema, so a schema name may not be
-given when creating a temporary table.
-The table name must be distinct from the name of any other table,
-sequence, index, or view in the same schema.
-.PP
-\fBCREATE TABLE\fR also automatically creates a data
-type that represents the composite type corresponding
-to one row of the table. Therefore, tables cannot have the same
-name as any existing data type in the same schema.
-.PP
-A table cannot have more than 1600 columns. (In practice, the
-effective limit is lower because of tuple-length constraints).
-.PP
-The optional constraint clauses specify constraints (or tests) that
-new or updated rows must satisfy for an insert or update operation
-to succeed. A constraint is an SQL object that helps define the
-set of valid values in the table in various ways.
-.PP
-There are two ways to define constraints: table constraints and
-column constraints. A column constraint is defined as part of a
-column definition. A table constraint definition is not tied to a
-particular column, and it can encompass more than one column.
-Every column constraint can also be written as a table constraint;
-a column constraint is only a notational convenience if the
-constraint only affects one column.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBTEMPORARY or TEMP\fR
-If specified, the table is created as a temporary table.
-Temporary tables are automatically dropped at the end of a
-session, or optionally at the end of the current transaction
-(see ON COMMIT below). Existing permanent tables with the same
-name are not visible to the current session while the temporary
-table exists, unless they are referenced with schema-qualified
-names. Any indexes created on a temporary table are automatically
-temporary as well.
-
-Optionally, GLOBAL or LOCAL
-can be written before TEMPORARY or TEMP.
-This makes no difference in PostgreSQL, but see
-Compatibility [\fBcreate_table\fR(7)].
-.TP
-\fB\fItable_name\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table to be created.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn_name\fB\fR
-The name of a column to be created in the new table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdata_type\fB\fR
-The data type of the column. This may include array specifiers.
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT\fR
-The DEFAULT clause assigns a default data value for
-the column whose column definition it appears within. The value
-is any variable-free expression (subqueries and cross-references
-to other columns in the current table are not allowed). The
-data type of the default expression must match the data type of the
-column.
-
-The default expression will be used in any insert operation that
-does not specify a value for the column. If there is no default
-for a column, then the default is null.
-.TP
-\fBLIKE \fIparent_table\fB [ { INCLUDING | EXCLUDING } DEFAULTS ]\fR
-The LIKE clause specifies a table from which
-the new table automatically inherits all column names, their data types, and
-not-null constraints.
-
-Unlike INHERITS, the new table and inherited table
-are complete decoupled after creation has been completed. Data inserted
-into the new table will not be reflected into the parent table.
-
-Default expressions for the inherited column definitions will only be included if
-INCLUDING DEFAULTS is specified. The default is to exclude
-default expressions.
-.TP
-\fBINHERITS ( \fIparent_table\fB [, ... ] )\fR
-The optional INHERITS clause specifies a list of
-tables from which the new table automatically inherits all
-columns. If the same column name exists in more than one parent
-table, an error is reported unless the data types of the columns
-match in each of the parent tables. If there is no conflict,
-then the duplicate columns are merged to form a single column in
-the new table. If the column name list of the new table
-contains a column that is also inherited, the data type must
-likewise match the inherited column(s), and the column
-definitions are merged into one. However, inherited and new
-column declarations of the same name need not specify identical
-constraints: all constraints provided from any declaration are
-merged together and all are applied to the new table. If the
-new table explicitly specifies a default value for the column,
-this default overrides any defaults from inherited declarations
-of the column. Otherwise, any parents that specify default
-values for the column must all specify the same default, or an
-error will be reported.
-.TP
-\fBWITH OIDS\fR
-.TP
-\fBWITHOUT OIDS\fR
-This optional clause specifies whether rows of the new table
-should have OIDs (object identifiers) assigned to them. The
-default is to have OIDs. (If the new table inherits from any
-tables that have OIDs, then WITH OIDS is forced even
-if the command says WITHOUT OIDS.)
-
-Specifying WITHOUT OIDS allows the user to suppress
-generation of OIDs for rows of a table. This may be worthwhile
-for large tables, since it will reduce OID consumption and
-thereby postpone wraparound of the 32-bit OID counter. Once the
-counter wraps around, uniqueness of OIDs can no longer be
-assumed, which considerably reduces their usefulness. Specifying
-WITHOUT OIDS also reduces the space required
-to store the table on disk by 4 bytes per row of the table,
-thereby improving performance.
-.TP
-\fBCONSTRAINT \fIconstraint_name\fB\fR
-An optional name for a column or table constraint. If not specified,
-the system generates a name.
-.TP
-\fBNOT NULL\fR
-The column is not allowed to contain null values.
-.TP
-\fBNULL\fR
-The column is allowed to contain null values. This is the default.
-
-This clause is only available for compatibility with
-non-standard SQL databases. Its use is discouraged in new
-applications.
-.TP
-\fBUNIQUE (column constraint)\fR
-.TP
-\fBUNIQUE ( \fIcolumn_name\fB [, ... ] ) (table constraint)\fR
-The UNIQUE constraint specifies that a
-group of one or more distinct columns of a table may contain
-only unique values. The behavior of the unique table constraint
-is the same as that for column constraints, with the additional
-capability to span multiple columns.
-
-For the purpose of a unique constraint, null values are not
-considered equal.
-
-Each unique table constraint must name a set of columns that is
-different from the set of columns named by any other unique or
-primary key constraint defined for the table. (Otherwise it
-would just be the same constraint listed twice.)
-.TP
-\fBPRIMARY KEY (column constraint)\fR
-.TP
-\fBPRIMARY KEY ( \fIcolumn_name\fB [, ... ] ) (table constraint)\fR
-The primary key constraint specifies that a column or columns of a table
-may contain only unique (non-duplicate), nonnull values.
-Technically, PRIMARY KEY is merely a
-combination of UNIQUE and NOT NULL, but
-identifying a set of columns as primary key also provides
-metadata about the design of the schema, as a primary key
-implies that other tables
-may rely on this set of columns as a unique identifier for rows.
-
-Only one primary key can be specified for a table, whether as a
-column constraint or a table constraint.
-
-The primary key constraint should name a set of columns that is
-different from other sets of columns named by any unique
-constraint defined for the same table.
-.TP
-\fBCHECK (\fIexpression\fB)\fR
-The CHECK clause specifies an expression producing a
-Boolean result which new or updated rows must satisfy for an
-insert or update operation to succeed. A check constraint
-specified as a column constraint should reference that column's
-value only, while an expression appearing in a table constraint
-may reference multiple columns.
-
-Currently, CHECK expressions cannot contain
-subqueries nor refer to variables other than columns of the
-current row.
-.TP
-\fBREFERENCES \fIreftable\fB [ ( \fIrefcolumn\fB ) ] [ MATCH \fImatchtype\fB ] [ ON DELETE \fIaction\fB ] [ ON UPDATE \fIaction\fB ] (column constraint)\fR
-.TP
-\fBFOREIGN KEY ( \fIcolumn\fB [, ... ] )\fR
-Theses clauses specify a foreign key constraint, which specifies
-that a group of one or more columns of the new table must only
-contain values which match against values in the referenced
-column(s) \fIrefcolumn\fR
-of the referenced table \fIreftable\fR. If \fIrefcolumn\fR is omitted, the
-primary key of the \fIreftable\fR is used. The
-referenced columns must be the columns of a unique or primary
-key constraint in the referenced table.
-
-A value inserted into these columns is matched against the
-values of the referenced table and referenced columns using the
-given match type. There are three match types: MATCH
-FULL, MATCH PARTIAL, and MATCH
-SIMPLE, which is also the default. MATCH
-FULL will not allow one column of a multicolumn foreign key
-to be null unless all foreign key columns are null.
-MATCH SIMPLE allows some foreign key columns
-to be null while other parts of the foreign key are not
-null. MATCH PARTIAL is not yet implemented.
-
-In addition, when the data in the referenced columns is changed,
-certain actions are performed on the data in this table's
-columns. The ON DELETE clause specifies the
-action to perform when a referenced row in the referenced table is
-being deleted. Likewise, the ON UPDATE
-clause specifies the action to perform when a referenced column
-in the referenced table is being updated to a new value. If the
-row is updated, but the referenced column is not actually
-changed, no action is done. There are the following possible
-actions for each clause:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBNO ACTION\fR
-Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update
-would create a foreign key constraint violation. This is
-the default action.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Same as NO ACTION.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Delete any rows referencing the deleted row, or update the
-value of the referencing column to the new value of the
-referenced column, respectively.
-.TP
-\fBSET NULL\fR
-Set the referencing column values to null.
-.TP
-\fBSET DEFAULT\fR
-Set the referencing column values to their default value.
-.RE
-.PP
-
-If primary key column is updated frequently, it may be wise to
-add an index to the foreign key column so that NO
-ACTION and CASCADE actions
-associated with the foreign key column can be more efficiently
-performed.
-.TP
-\fBDEFERRABLE\fR
-.TP
-\fBNOT DEFERRABLE\fR
-This controls whether the constraint can be deferred. A
-constraint that is not deferrable will be checked immediately
-after every command. Checking of constraints that are
-deferrable may be postponed until the end of the transaction
-(using the SET CONSTRAINTS [\fBset_constraints\fR(7)] command).
-NOT DEFERRABLE is the default. Only foreign
-key constraints currently accept this clause. All other
-constraint types are not deferrable.
-.TP
-\fBINITIALLY IMMEDIATE\fR
-.TP
-\fBINITIALLY DEFERRED\fR
-If a constraint is deferrable, this clause specifies the default
-time to check the constraint. If the constraint is
-INITIALLY IMMEDIATE, it is checked after each
-statement. This is the default. If the constraint is
-INITIALLY DEFERRED, it is checked only at the
-end of the transaction. The constraint check time can be
-altered with the SET CONSTRAINTS [\fBset_constraints\fR(7)] command.
-.TP
-\fBON COMMIT\fR
-The behavior of temporary tables at the end of a transaction
-block can be controlled using ON COMMIT.
-The three options are:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBPRESERVE ROWS\fR
-No special action is taken at the ends of transactions.
-This is the default behavior.
-.TP
-\fBDELETE ROWS\fR
-All rows in the temporary table will be deleted at the
-end of each transaction block. Essentially, an automatic
-\fBtruncate\fR(7) is done at each commit.
-.TP
-\fBDROP\fR
-The temporary table will be dropped at the end of the current
-transaction block.
-.RE
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Whenever an application makes use of OIDs to identify specific
-rows of a table, it is recommended to create a unique constraint
-on the \fBoid\fR column of that table, to ensure that
-OIDs in the table will indeed uniquely identify rows even after
-counter wraparound. Avoid assuming that OIDs are unique across
-tables; if you need a database-wide unique identifier, use the
-combination of \fBtableoid\fR and row OID for the
-purpose. (It is likely that future PostgreSQL
-releases will use a separate OID counter for each table, so that
-it will be \fBnecessary\fR, not optional, to include
-\fBtableoid\fR to have a unique identifier
-database-wide.)
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-The use of WITHOUT OIDS is not recommended
-for tables with no primary key, since without either an OID or a
-unique data key, it is difficult to identify specific rows.
-.RE
-.sp
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-PostgreSQL automatically creates an
-index for each unique constraint and primary key constraint to
-enforce the uniqueness. Thus, it is not necessary to create an
-explicit index for primary key columns. (See CREATE INDEX [\fBcreate_index\fR(7)] for more information.)
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Unique constraints and primary keys are not inherited in the
-current implementation. This makes the combination of
-inheritance and unique constraints rather dysfunctional.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Create table \fBfilms\fR and table
-\fBdistributors\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE films (
- code char(5) CONSTRAINT firstkey PRIMARY KEY,
- title varchar(40) NOT NULL,
- did integer NOT NULL,
- date_prod date,
- kind varchar(10),
- len interval hour to minute
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer PRIMARY KEY DEFAULT nextval('serial'),
- name varchar(40) NOT NULL CHECK (name <> '')
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Create a table with a 2-dimensional array:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE array (
- vector int[][]
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Define a unique table constraint for the table
-films. Unique table constraints can be defined
-on one or more columns of the table.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE films (
- code char(5),
- title varchar(40),
- did integer,
- date_prod date,
- kind varchar(10),
- len interval hour to minute,
- CONSTRAINT production UNIQUE(date_prod)
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Define a check column constraint:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer CHECK (did > 100),
- name varchar(40)
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Define a check table constraint:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer,
- name varchar(40)
- CONSTRAINT con1 CHECK (did > 100 AND name <> '')
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Define a primary key table constraint for the table
-\fBfilms\fR. Primary key table constraints can be defined
-on one or more columns of the table.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE films (
- code char(5),
- title varchar(40),
- did integer,
- date_prod date,
- kind varchar(10),
- len interval hour to minute,
- CONSTRAINT code_title PRIMARY KEY(code,title)
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Define a primary key constraint for table
-\fBdistributors\fR. The following two examples are
-equivalent, the first using the table constraint syntax, the second
-the column constraint notation.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer,
- name varchar(40),
- PRIMARY KEY(did)
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer PRIMARY KEY,
- name varchar(40)
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-This assigns a literal constant default value for the column
-name, arranges for the default value of column
-did to be generated by selecting the next value
-of a sequence object, and makes the default value of
-modtime be the time at which the row is
-inserted.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- name varchar(40) DEFAULT 'Luso Films',
- did integer DEFAULT nextval('distributors_serial'),
- modtime timestamp DEFAULT current_timestamp
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Define two NOT NULL column constraints on the table
-\fBdistributors\fR, one of which is explicitly
-given a name:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer CONSTRAINT no_null NOT NULL,
- name varchar(40) NOT NULL
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Define a unique constraint for the name column:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer,
- name varchar(40) UNIQUE
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-The above is equivalent to the following specified as a table constraint:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TABLE distributors (
- did integer,
- name varchar(40),
- UNIQUE(name)
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBCREATE TABLE\fR command conforms to SQL92
-and to a subset of SQL99, with exceptions listed below.
-.SS "TEMPORARY TABLES"
-.PP
-Although the syntax of CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE
-resembles that of the SQL standard, the effect is not the same. In the
-standard,
-temporary tables are defined just once and automatically exist (starting
-with empty contents) in every session that needs them.
-PostgreSQL instead
-requires each session to issue its own CREATE TEMPORARY
-TABLE command for each temporary table to be used. This allows
-different sessions to use the same temporary table name for different
-purposes, whereas the standard's approach constrains all instances of a
-given temporary table name to have the same table structure.
-.PP
-The standard's definition of the behavior of temporary tables is
-widely ignored. PostgreSQL's behavior
-on this point is similar to that of several other SQL databases.
-.PP
-The standard's distinction between global and local temporary tables
-is not in PostgreSQL, since that distinction
-depends on the concept of modules, which
-PostgreSQL does not have.
-For compatibility's sake, PostgreSQL will
-accept the GLOBAL and LOCAL keywords
-in a temporary table declaration, but they have no effect.
-.PP
-The ON COMMIT clause for temporary tables
-also resembles the SQL standard, but has some differences.
-If the ON COMMIT clause is omitted, SQL specifies that the
-default behavior is ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS. However, the
-default behavior in PostgreSQL is
-ON COMMIT PRESERVE ROWS. The ON COMMIT
-DROP option does not exist in SQL.
-.SS "COLUMN CHECK CONSTRAINTS"
-.PP
-The SQL standard says that CHECK column constraints
-may only refer to the column they apply to; only CHECK
-table constraints may refer to multiple columns.
-PostgreSQL does not enforce this
-restriction; it treats column and table check constraints alike.
-.SS "NULL ``CONSTRAINT''"
-.PP
-The NULL ``constraint'' (actually a
-non-constraint) is a PostgreSQL
-extension to the SQL standard that is included for compatibility with some
-other database systems (and for symmetry with the NOT
-NULL constraint). Since it is the default for any
-column, its presence is simply noise.
-.SS "INHERITANCE"
-.PP
-Multiple inheritance via the INHERITS clause is
-a PostgreSQL language extension. SQL99
-(but not SQL92) defines single inheritance using a different
-syntax and different semantics. SQL99-style inheritance is not
-yet supported by PostgreSQL.
-.SS "OBJECT IDS"
-.PP
-The PostgreSQL concept of OIDs is not
-standard.
-.SS "ZERO-COLUMN TABLES"
-.PP
-PostgreSQL allows a table of no columns
-to be created (for example, CREATE TABLE foo();). This
-is an extension from the SQL standard, which does not allow zero-column
-tables. Zero-column tables are not in themselves very useful, but
-disallowing them creates odd special cases for \fBALTER TABLE
-DROP COLUMN\fR, so it seems cleaner to ignore this spec restriction.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER TABLE [\fBalter_table\fR(7)], DROP TABLE [\fBdrop_table\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_table_as.7 b/raw/man7/create_table_as.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e045fb..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_table_as.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE TABLE AS" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE TABLE AS \- create a new table from the results of a query
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ [ GLOBAL | LOCAL ] { TEMPORARY | TEMP } ] TABLE \fItable_name\fR [ (\fIcolumn_name\fR [, ...] ) ]
- AS \fIquery\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE TABLE AS\fR creates a table and fills it
-with data computed by a \fBSELECT\fR command or an
-\fBEXECUTE\fR that runs a prepared
-\fBSELECT\fR command. The table columns have the
-names and data types associated with the output columns of the
-\fBSELECT\fR (except that you can override the column
-names by giving an explicit list of new column names).
-.PP
-\fBCREATE TABLE AS\fR bears some resemblance to
-creating a view, but it is really quite different: it creates a new
-table and evaluates the query just once to fill the new table
-initially. The new table will not track subsequent changes to the
-source tables of the query. In contrast, a view re-evaluates its
-defining \fBSELECT\fR statement whenever it is
-queried.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBTEMPORARY or TEMP\fR
-If specified, the table is created as a temporary table.
-Refer to CREATE TABLE [\fBcreate_table\fR(7)] for details.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable_name\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table to be created.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn_name\fB\fR
-The name of a column in the new table. If column names are not
-provided, they are taken from the output column names of the
-query. If the table is created out of an
-\fBEXECUTE\fR command, a column name list can
-currently not be specified.
-.TP
-\fB\fIquery\fB\fR
-A query statement (that is, a \fBSELECT\fR command
-or an \fBEXECUTE\fR command that runs a prepared
-\fBSELECT\fR command). Refer to SELECT [\fBselect\fR(7)] or EXECUTE [\fBexecute\fR(l)],
-respectively, for a description of the allowed syntax.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-This command is functionally equivalent to SELECT INTO [\fBselect_into\fR(7)], but it is preferred since it is less
-likely to be confused with other uses of the \fBSELECT
-\&... INTO\fR syntax.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command is modeled after an Oracle
-feature. There is no command with equivalent functionality in
-the SQL standard. However, a combination of CREATE
-TABLE and INSERT ... SELECT can
-accomplish the same thing with little more effort.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE TABLE [\fBcreate_table\fR(7)], CREATE VIEW [\fBcreate_view\fR(l)], EXECUTE [\fBexecute\fR(l)], SELECT [\fBselect\fR(l)], SELECT INTO [\fBselect_into\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_trigger.7 b/raw/man7/create_trigger.7
deleted file mode 100644
index cf1ac02..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_trigger.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,152 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE TRIGGER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE TRIGGER \- define a new trigger
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TRIGGER \fIname\fR { BEFORE | AFTER } { \fIevent\fR [ OR ... ] }
- ON \fItable\fR [ FOR [ EACH ] { ROW | STATEMENT } ]
- EXECUTE PROCEDURE \fIfuncname\fR ( \fIarguments\fR )
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE TRIGGER\fR creates a new trigger. The
-trigger will be associated with the specified table and will
-execute the specified function \fIfunc\fR when certain events occur.
-.PP
-The trigger can be specified to fire either before before the
-operation is attempted on a row (before constraints are checked and
-the \fBINSERT\fR, \fBUPDATE\fR, or
-\fBDELETE\fR is attempted) or after the operation has
-completed (after constraints are checked and the
-\fBINSERT\fR, \fBUPDATE\fR, or
-\fBDELETE\fR has completed). If the trigger fires
-before the event, the trigger may skip the operation for the
-current row, or change the row being inserted (for
-\fBINSERT\fR and \fBUPDATE\fR operations
-only). If the trigger fires after the event, all changes, including
-the last insertion, update, or deletion, are ``visible''
-to the trigger.
-.PP
-A trigger that is marked FOR EACH ROW is called
-once for every row that the operation modifies. For example, a
-\fBDELETE\fR that affects 10 rows will cause any
-ON DELETE triggers on the target relation to be
-called 10 separate times, once for each deleted row. In contrast, a
-trigger that is marked FOR EACH STATEMENT only
-executes once for any given operation, regardless of how many rows
-it modifies (in particular, an operation that modifies zero rows
-will still result in the execution of any applicable FOR
-EACH STATEMENT triggers).
-.PP
-If multiple triggers of the same kind are defined for the same event,
-they will be fired in alphabetical order by name.
-.PP
-\fBSELECT\fR does not modify any rows so you can not
-create \fBSELECT\fR triggers. Rules and views are more
-appropriate in such cases.
-.PP
-Refer to the chapter called ``Triggers'' in the documentation for more information about triggers.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name to give the new trigger. This must be distinct from
-the name of any other trigger for the same table.
-.TP
-\fBBEFORE\fR
-.TP
-\fBAFTER\fR
-Determines whether the function is called before or after the
-event.
-.TP
-\fB\fIevent\fB\fR
-One of \fBINSERT\fR, \fBUPDATE\fR, or
-\fBDELETE\fR; this specifies the event that will
-fire the trigger. Multiple events can be specified using
-OR.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table the trigger
-is for.
-.TP
-\fBFOR EACH ROW\fR
-.TP
-\fBFOR EACH STATEMENT\fR
-This specifies whether the trigger procedure should be fired
-once for every row affected by the trigger event, or just once
-per SQL statement. If neither is specified, FOR EACH
-STATEMENT is the default.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfunc\fB\fR
-A user-supplied function that is declared as taking no arguments
-and returning type trigger, which is executed when
-the trigger fires.
-.TP
-\fB\fIarguments\fB\fR
-An optional comma-separated list of arguments to be provided to
-the function when the trigger is executed. The arguments are
-literal string constants. Simple names and numeric constants
-may be written here, too, but they will all be converted to
-strings. Please check the description of the implementation
-language of the trigger function about how the trigger arguments
-are accessible within the function; it may be different from
-normal function arguments.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-To create a trigger on a table, the user must have the
-TRIGGER privilege on the table.
-.PP
-In PostgreSQL versions before 7.3, it was
-necessary to declare trigger functions as returning the placeholder
-type \fBopaque\fR, rather than \fBtrigger\fR. To support loading
-of old dump files, \fBCREATE TRIGGER\fR will accept a function
-declared as returning \fBopaque\fR, but it will issue a notice and
-change the function's declared return type to \fBtrigger\fR.
-.PP
-Use DROP TRIGGER [\fBdrop_trigger\fR(7)] to remove a trigger.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The chapter called ``Triggers'' in the documentation contains a complete example.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBCREATE TRIGGER\fR statement in
-PostgreSQL implements a subset of the
-SQL99 standard. (There are no provisions for triggers in SQL92.)
-The following functionality is missing:
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-SQL99 allows triggers to fire on updates to specific columns
-(e.g., AFTER UPDATE OF col1, col2).
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-SQL99 allows you to define aliases for the ``old''
-and ``new'' rows or tables for use in the definition
-of the triggered action (e.g., CREATE TRIGGER ... ON
-tablename REFERENCING OLD ROW AS somename NEW ROW AS othername
-\&...). Since PostgreSQL
-allows trigger procedures to be written in any number of
-user-defined languages, access to the data is handled in a
-language-specific way.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-PostgreSQL only allows the execution
-of a user-defined function for the triggered action. SQL99
-allows the execution of a number of other SQL commands, such as
-\fBCREATE TABLE\fR as triggered action. This
-limitation is not hard to work around by creating a user-defined
-function that executes the desired commands.
-.PP
-.PP
-SQL99 specifies that multiple triggers should be fired in
-time-of-creation order. PostgreSQL uses
-name order, which was judged more convenient to work with.
-.PP
-The ability to specify multiple actions for a single trigger using
-OR is a PostgreSQL extension of
-the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)], ALTER TRIGGER [\fBalter_trigger\fR(l)], DROP TRIGGER [\fBdrop_trigger\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_type.7 b/raw/man7/create_type.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b5e54e8..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_type.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,354 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE TYPE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE TYPE \- define a new data type
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TYPE \fIname\fR AS
- ( \fIattribute_name\fR \fIdata_type\fR [, ... ] )
-
-CREATE TYPE \fIname\fR (
- INPUT = \fIinput_function\fR,
- OUTPUT = \fIoutput_function\fR
- [ , RECEIVE = \fIreceive_function\fR ]
- [ , SEND = \fIsend_function\fR ]
- [ , INTERNALLENGTH = { \fIinternallength\fR | VARIABLE } ]
- [ , PASSEDBYVALUE ]
- [ , ALIGNMENT = \fIalignment\fR ]
- [ , STORAGE = \fIstorage\fR ]
- [ , DEFAULT = \fIdefault\fR ]
- [ , ELEMENT = \fIelement\fR ]
- [ , DELIMITER = \fIdelimiter\fR ]
-)
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE TYPE\fR registers a new data type for use in
-the current data base. The user who defines a type becomes its
-owner.
-.PP
-If a schema name is given then the type is created in the specified
-schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema. The type
-name must be distinct from the name of any existing type or domain
-in the same schema. (Because tables have associated data types,
-the type name must also be distinct from the name of any existing
-table in the same schema.)
-.SS "COMPOSITE TYPES"
-.PP
-The first form of \fBCREATE TYPE\fR
-creates a composite type.
-The composite type is specified by a list of attribute names and data types.
-This is essentially the same as the row type
-of a table, but using \fBCREATE TYPE\fR avoids the need to
-create an actual table when all that is wanted is to define a type.
-A stand-alone composite type is useful as the return type of a function.
-.SS "BASE TYPES"
-.PP
-The second form of \fBCREATE TYPE\fR creates a new base type
-(scalar type). The parameters may appear in any order, not only that
-illustrated above, and most are optional. You must register
-two or more functions (using \fBCREATE FUNCTION\fR) before
-defining the type. The support functions
-\fIinput_function\fR and
-\fIoutput_function\fR
-are required, while the functions
-\fIreceive_function\fR and
-\fIsend_function\fR
-are optional. Generally these functions have to be coded in C
-or another low-level language.
-.PP
-The \fIinput_function\fR
-converts the type's external textual representation to the internal
-representation used by the
-operators and functions defined for the type.
-\fIoutput_function\fR
-performs the reverse transformation. The input function may be
-declared as taking one argument of type \fBcstring\fR,
-or as taking three arguments of types
-\fBcstring\fR, \fBoid\fR, \fBinteger\fR.
-The first argument is the input text as a C string, the second
-argument is the element type in case this is an array type,
-and the third is the typmod of the destination column, if known.
-The input function should return a value of the data type itself.
-The output function may be
-declared as taking one argument of the new data type, or as taking
-two arguments of which the second is type \fBoid\fR.
-The second argument is again the array element type for array types.
-The output function should return type \fBcstring\fR.
-.PP
-The optional \fIreceive_function\fR
-converts the type's external binary representation to the internal
-representation. If this function is not supplied, the type cannot
-participate in binary input. The binary representation should be
-chosen to be cheap to convert to internal form, while being reasonably
-portable. (For example, the standard integer data types use network
-byte order as the external binary representation, while the internal
-representation is in the machine's native byte order.) The receive
-function should perform adequate checking to ensure that the value is
-valid.
-The receive function may be declared as taking one argument of type
-\fBinternal\fR, or two arguments of types \fBinternal\fR
-and \fBoid\fR. It must return a value of the data type itself.
-(The first argument is a pointer to a \fBStringInfo\fR buffer
-holding the received byte string; the optional second argument is the
-element type in case this is an array type.) Similarly, the optional
-\fIsend_function\fR converts
-from the internal representation to the external binary representation.
-If this function is not supplied, the type cannot participate in binary
-output. The send function may be
-declared as taking one argument of the new data type, or as taking
-two arguments of which the second is type \fBoid\fR.
-The second argument is again the array element type for array types.
-The send function must return type \fBbytea\fR.
-.PP
-You should at this point be wondering how the input and output functions
-can be declared to have results or arguments of the new type, when they have
-to be created before the new type can be created. The answer is that the
-input function must be created first, then the output function (and
-the binary I/O functions if wanted), and finally the data type.
-PostgreSQL will first see the name of the new
-data type as the return type of the input function. It will create a
-``shell'' type, which is simply a placeholder entry in
-the system catalog, and link the input function definition to the shell
-type. Similarly the other functions will be linked to the (now already
-existing) shell type. Finally, \fBCREATE TYPE\fR replaces the
-shell entry with a complete type definition, and the new type can be used.
-.PP
-While the details of the new type's internal representation are only
-known to the I/O functions and other functions you create to work with
-the type, there are several properties of the internal representation
-that must be declared to PostgreSQL.
-Foremost of these is
-\fIinternallength\fR.
-Base data types can be fixed-length, in which case
-\fIinternallength\fR is a
-positive integer, or variable length, indicated by setting
-\fIinternallength\fR
-to VARIABLE. (Internally, this is represented
-by setting typlen to -1.) The internal representation of all
-variable-length types must start with a 4-byte integer giving the total
-length of this value of the type.
-.PP
-The optional flag PASSEDBYVALUE indicates that
-values of this data type are passed by value, rather than by
-reference. You may not pass by value types whose internal
-representation is larger than the size of the \fBDatum\fR type
-(4 bytes on most machines, 8 bytes on a few).
-.PP
-The \fIalignment\fR parameter
-specifies the storage alignment required for the data type. The
-allowed values equate to alignment on 1, 2, 4, or 8 byte boundaries.
-Note that variable-length types must have an alignment of at least
-4, since they necessarily contain an \fBint4\fR as their first component.
-.PP
-The \fIstorage\fR parameter
-allows selection of storage strategies for variable-length data
-types. (Only plain is allowed for fixed-length
-types.) plain specifies that data of the type
-will always be stored in-line and not compressed.
-extended specifies that the system will first
-try to compress a long data value, and will move the value out of
-the main table row if it's still too long.
-external allows the value to be moved out of the
-main table, but the system will not try to compress it.
-main allows compression, but discourages moving
-the value out of the main table. (Data items with this storage
-strategy may still be moved out of the main table if there is no
-other way to make a row fit, but they will be kept in the main
-table preferentially over extended and
-external items.)
-.PP
-A default value may be specified, in case a user wants columns of the
-data type to default to something other than the null value.
-Specify the default with the DEFAULT key word.
-(Such a default may be overridden by an explicit DEFAULT
-clause attached to a particular column.)
-.PP
-To indicate that a type is an array, specify the type of the array
-elements using the ELEMENT key word. For example, to
-define an array of 4-byte integers (\fBint4\fR), specify
-ELEMENT = int4. More details about array types
-appear below.
-.PP
-To indicate the delimiter to be used between values in the external
-representation of arrays of this type, \fIdelimiter\fR can be
-set to a specific character. The default delimiter is the comma
-(,). Note that the delimiter is associated
-with the array element type, not the array type itself.
-.SS "ARRAY TYPES"
-.PP
-Whenever a user-defined base data type is created,
-PostgreSQL automatically creates an
-associated array type, whose name consists of the base type's
-name prepended with an underscore. The parser understands this
-naming convention, and translates requests for columns of type
-foo[] into requests for type _foo.
-The implicitly-created array type is variable length and uses the
-built-in input and output functions array_in and
-array_out.
-.PP
-You might reasonably ask why there is an \fBELEMENT\fR
-option, if the system makes the correct array type automatically.
-The only case where it's useful to use \fBELEMENT\fR is when you are
-making a fixed-length type that happens to be internally an array of a number of
-identical things, and you want to allow these things to be accessed
-directly by subscripting, in addition to whatever operations you plan
-to provide for the type as a whole. For example, type \fBname\fR
-allows its constituent \fBchar\fR elements to be accessed this way.
-A 2-D \fBpoint\fR type could allow its two component numbers to be
-accessed like point[0] and point[1].
-Note that
-this facility only works for fixed-length types whose internal form
-is exactly a sequence of identical fixed-length fields. A subscriptable
-variable-length type must have the generalized internal representation
-used by array_in and array_out.
-For historical reasons (i.e., this is clearly wrong but it's far too
-late to change it), subscripting of fixed-length array types starts from
-zero, rather than from one as for variable-length arrays.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a type to be created.
-.TP
-\fB\fIattribute_name\fB\fR
-The name of an attribute (column) for the composite type.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdata_type\fB\fR
-The name of an existing data type to become a column of the
-composite type.
-.TP
-\fB\fIinput_function\fB\fR
-The name of a function that converts data from the type's
-external textual form to its internal form.
-.TP
-\fB\fIoutput_function\fB\fR
-The name of a function that converts data from the type's
-internal form to its external textual form.
-.TP
-\fB\fIreceive_function\fB\fR
-The name of a function that converts data from the type's
-external binary form to its internal form.
-.TP
-\fB\fIsend_function\fB\fR
-The name of a function that converts data from the type's
-internal form to its external binary form.
-.TP
-\fB\fIinternallength\fB\fR
-A numeric constant that specifies the length in bytes of the new
-type's internal representation. The default assumption is that
-it is variable-length.
-.TP
-\fB\fIalignment\fB\fR
-The storage alignment requirement of the data type. If specified,
-it must be char, int2,
-int4, or double; the
-default is int4.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstorage\fB\fR
-The storage strategy for the data type. If specified, must be
-plain, external,
-extended, or main; the
-default is plain.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdefault\fB\fR
-The default value for the data type. If this is omitted, the
-default is null.
-.TP
-\fB\fIelement\fB\fR
-The type being created is an array; this specifies the type of
-the array elements.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdelimiter\fB\fR
-The delimiter character to be used between values in arrays made
-of this type.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-User-defined type names cannot begin with the underscore character
-(_) and can only be 62 characters
-long (or in general \fBNAMEDATALEN\fR - 2, rather than
-the \fBNAMEDATALEN\fR - 1 characters allowed for other
-names). Type names beginning with underscore are reserved for
-internally-created array type names.
-.PP
-In PostgreSQL versions before 7.3, it
-was customary to avoid creating a shell type by replacing the
-functions' forward references to the type name with the placeholder
-pseudotype \fBopaque\fR. The \fBcstring\fR arguments and
-results also had to be declared as \fBopaque\fR before 7.3. To
-support loading of old dump files, \fBCREATE TYPE\fR will
-accept functions declared using \fBopaque\fR, but it will issue
-a notice and change the function's declaration to use the correct
-types.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-This example creates a composite type and uses it in
-a function definition:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TYPE compfoo AS (f1 int, f2 text);
-CREATE FUNCTION getfoo() RETURNS SETOF compfoo AS
- 'SELECT fooid, fooname FROM foo' LANGUAGE SQL;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-This example creates the base data type \fBbox\fR and then uses the
-type in a table definition:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TYPE box (
- INTERNALLENGTH = 16,
- INPUT = my_box_in_function,
- OUTPUT = my_box_out_function
-);
-
-CREATE TABLE myboxes (
- id integer,
- description box
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-If the internal structure of \fBbox\fR were an array of four
-\fBfloat4\fR elements, we might instead use
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TYPE box (
- INTERNALLENGTH = 16,
- INPUT = my_box_in_function,
- OUTPUT = my_box_out_function,
- ELEMENT = float4
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-which would allow a box value's component numbers to be accessed
-by subscripting. Otherwise the type behaves the same as before.
-.PP
-This example creates a large object type and uses it in
-a table definition:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE TYPE bigobj (
- INPUT = lo_filein, OUTPUT = lo_fileout,
- INTERNALLENGTH = VARIABLE
-);
-CREATE TABLE big_objs (
- id integer,
- obj bigobj
-);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-More examples, including suitable input and output functions, are
-in the chapter called ``Extending SQL'' in the documentation.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This \fBCREATE TYPE\fR command is a
-PostgreSQL extension. There is a
-\fBCREATE TYPE\fR statement in SQL99 that is rather
-different in detail.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)], DROP TYPE [\fBdrop_type\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_user.7 b/raw/man7/create_user.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 2dfb9cf..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_user.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,142 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE USER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE USER \- define a new database user account
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE USER \fIname\fR [ [ WITH ] \fIoption\fR [ ... ] ]
-
-where \fIoption\fR can be:
-
- SYSID \fIuid\fR
- | [ ENCRYPTED | UNENCRYPTED ] PASSWORD '\fIpassword\fR'
- | CREATEDB | NOCREATEDB
- | CREATEUSER | NOCREATEUSER
- | IN GROUP \fIgroupname\fR [, ...]
- | VALID UNTIL '\fIabstime\fR'
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE USER\fR adds a new user to a
-PostgreSQL database cluster. Refer to
-the chapters called ``Database Users and Privileges'' and ``Client Authentication'' in the documentation for information about managing
-users and authentication. You must be a database superuser to use
-this command.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the user.
-.TP
-\fB\fIuid\fB\fR
-The SYSID clause can be used to choose the
-PostgreSQL user ID of the user that
-is being created. This is not normally not necessary, but may
-be useful if you need to recreate the owner of an orphaned
-object.
-
-If this is not specified, the highest assigned user ID plus one
-(with a minimum of 100) will be used as default.
-.TP
-\fB\fIpassword\fB\fR
-Sets the user's password. If you do not plan to use password
-authentication you can omit this option, but then the user
-won't be able to connect if you decide to switch to password
-authentication. The password can be set or changed later,
-using ALTER USER [\fBalter_user\fR(7)].
-.TP
-\fBENCRYPTED\fR
-.TP
-\fBUNENCRYPTED\fR
-These key words control whether the password is stored
-encrypted in the system catalogs. (If neither is specified,
-the default behavior is determined by the configuration
-parameter PASSWORD_ENCRYPTION.) If the
-presented password string is already in MD5-encrypted format,
-then it is stored encrypted as-is, regardless of whether
-ENCRYPTED or UNENCRYPTED is specified
-(since the system cannot decrypt the specified encrypted
-password string). This allows reloading of encrypted
-passwords during dump/restore.
-
-Note that older clients may lack support for the MD5
-authentication mechanism that is needed to work with passwords
-that are stored encrypted.
-.TP
-\fBCREATEDB\fR
-.TP
-\fBNOCREATEDB\fR
-These clauses define a user's ability to create databases. If
-CREATEDB is specified, the user being
-defined will be allowed to create his own databases. Using
-NOCREATEDB will deny a user the ability to
-create databases. If this clause is omitted,
-NOCREATEDB is used by default.
-.TP
-\fBCREATEUSER\fR
-.TP
-\fBNOCREATEUSER\fR
-These clauses determine whether a user will be permitted to
-create new users himself. This option will also make the user
-a superuser who can override all access restrictions.
-Omitting this clause will set the user's value of this
-attribute to be NOCREATEUSER.
-.TP
-\fB\fIgroupname\fB\fR
-A name of a group into which to insert the user as a new member.
-Multiple group names may be listed.
-.TP
-\fB\fIabstime\fB\fR
-The VALID UNTIL clause sets an absolute
-time after which the user's password is no longer valid. If
-this clause is omitted the login will be valid for all time.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use ALTER USER [\fBalter_user\fR(7)] to
-change the attributes of a user, and DROP USER [\fBdrop_user\fR(7)] to remove a user. Use ALTER GROUP [\fBalter_group\fR(l)] to add the
-user to groups or remove the user from groups.
-.PP
-PostgreSQL includes a program createuser [\fBcreateuser\fR(1)] that has
-the same functionality as \fBCREATE USER\fR (in fact, it calls this
-command) but can be run from the command shell.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Create a user with no password:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE USER jonathan;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Create a user with a password:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE USER davide WITH PASSWORD 'jw8s0F4';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Create a user with a password that is valid until the end of 2004.
-After one second has ticked in 2005, the password is no longer
-valid.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE USER miriam WITH PASSWORD 'jw8s0F4' VALID UNTIL '2005-01-01';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Create an account where the user can create databases:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE USER manuel WITH PASSWORD 'jw8s0F4' CREATEDB;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBCREATE USER\fR statement is a
-PostgreSQL extension. The SQL standard
-leaves the definition of users to the implementation.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER USER [\fBalter_user\fR(7)], DROP USER [\fBdrop_user\fR(l)], \fBcreateuser\fR(1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/create_view.7 b/raw/man7/create_view.7
deleted file mode 100644
index e4a2ddf..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/create_view.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "CREATE VIEW" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-CREATE VIEW \- define a new view
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE [ OR REPLACE ] VIEW \fIname\fR [ ( \fIcolumn_name\fR [, ...] ) ] AS \fIquery\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBCREATE VIEW\fR defines a view of a query. The view
-is not physically materialized. Instead, the query is run every time
-the view is referenced in a query.
-.PP
-\fBCREATE OR REPLACE VIEW\fR is similar, but if a view
-of the same name already exists, it is replaced. You can only replace
-a view with a new query that generates the identical set of columns
-(i.e., same column names and data types).
-.PP
-If a schema name is given (for example, CREATE VIEW
-myschema.myview ...) then the view is created in the
-specified schema. Otherwise it is created in the current schema.
-The view name must be distinct from the name of any other view, table,
-sequence, or index in the same schema.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a view to be created.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn_name\fB\fR
-An optional list of names to be used for columns of the view.
-If not given, the column names are deduced from the query.
-.TP
-\fB\fIquery\fB\fR
-A query (that is, a \fBSELECT\fR statement) which will
-provide the columns and rows of the view.
-
-Refer to SELECT [\fBselect\fR(7)]
-for more information about valid queries.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Currently, views are read only: the system will not allow an insert,
-update, or delete on a view. You can get the effect of an updatable
-view by creating rules that rewrite inserts, etc. on the view into
-appropriate actions on other tables. For more information see
-CREATE RULE [\fBcreate_rule\fR(7)].
-.PP
-Use the \fBDROP VIEW\fR statement to drop views.
-.PP
-Be careful that the names and types of the view's columns will be
-assigned the way you want. For example,
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE VIEW vista AS SELECT 'Hello World';
-.sp
-.fi
-is bad form in two ways: the column name defaults to ?column?,
-and the column data type defaults to \fBunknown\fR. If you want a
-string literal in a view's result, use something like
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE VIEW vista AS SELECT text 'Hello World' AS hello;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Access to tables referenced in the view is determined by permissions of
-the view owner. However, functions called in the view are treated the
-same as if they had been called directly from the query using the view.
-Therefore the user of a view must have permissions to call all functions
-used by the view.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Create a view consisting of all comedy films:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE VIEW comedies AS
- SELECT *
- FROM films
- WHERE kind = 'Comedy';
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard specifies some additional capabilities for the
-\fBCREATE VIEW\fR statement:
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE VIEW \fIname\fR [ ( \fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ]
- AS query
- [ WITH [ CASCADE | LOCAL ] CHECK OPTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-The optional clauses for the full SQL command are:
-.TP
-\fBCHECK OPTION\fR
-This option is to do with updatable views. All
-\fBINSERT\fR and \fBUPDATE\fR commands on the view
-will be checked to ensure data satisfy the view-defining
-condition (that is, the new data would be visible through the
-view). If they do not, the update will be rejected.
-.TP
-\fBLOCAL\fR
-Check for integrity on this view.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Check for integrity on this view and on any dependent
-view. CASCADE is assumed if neither
-CASCADE nor LOCAL is specified.
-.PP
-.PP
-\fBCREATE OR REPLACE VIEW\fR is a
-PostgreSQL language extension.
diff --git a/raw/man7/deallocate.7 b/raw/man7/deallocate.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 14a0f75..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/deallocate.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DEALLOCATE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DEALLOCATE \- deallocate a prepared statement
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DEALLOCATE [ PREPARE ] \fIplan_name\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDEALLOCATE\fR is used to deallocate a previously
-prepared SQL statement. If you do not explicitly deallocate a
-prepared statement, it is deallocated when the session ends.
-.PP
-For more information on prepared statements, see PREPARE [\fBprepare\fR(7)].
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBPREPARE\fR
-This key word is ignored.
-.TP
-\fB\fIplan_name\fB\fR
-The name of the prepared statement to deallocate.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard includes a \fBDEALLOCATE\fR
-statement, but it is only for use in embedded SQL.
diff --git a/raw/man7/declare.7 b/raw/man7/declare.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f208ce..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/declare.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,184 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DECLARE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DECLARE \- define a cursor
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DECLARE \fIname\fR [ BINARY ] [ INSENSITIVE ] [ [ NO ] SCROLL ]
- CURSOR [ { WITH | WITHOUT } HOLD ] FOR \fIquery\fR
- [ FOR { READ ONLY | UPDATE [ OF \fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ] } ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDECLARE\fR allows a user to create cursors, which
-can be used to retrieve
-a small number of rows at a time out of a larger query. Cursors can
-return data either in text or in binary format using
-FETCH [\fBfetch\fR(7)].
-.PP
-Normal cursors return data in text format, the same as a
-\fBSELECT\fR would produce. Since data is stored natively in
-binary format, the system must do a conversion to produce the text
-format. Once the information comes back in text form, the client
-application may need to convert it to a binary format to manipulate
-it. In addition, data in the text format is often larger in size
-than in the binary format. Binary cursors return the data in a
-binary representation that may be more easily manipulated.
-Nevertheless, if you intend to display the data as text anyway,
-retrieving it in text form will
-save you some effort on the client side.
-.PP
-As an example, if a query returns a value of one from an integer column,
-you would get a string of 1 with a default cursor
-whereas with a binary cursor you would get
-a 4-byte field containing the internal representation of the value
-(in big-endian byte order).
-.PP
-Binary cursors should be used carefully. Many applications,
-including \fBpsql\fR, are not prepared to
-handle binary cursors and expect data to come back in the text
-format.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Note:"
-When the client application uses the ``extended query'' protocol
-to issue a \fBFETCH\fR command, the Bind protocol message
-specifies whether data is to be retrieved in text or binary format.
-This choice overrides the way that the cursor is defined. The concept
-of a binary cursor as such is thus obsolete when using extended query
-protocol --- any cursor can be treated as either text or binary.
-.RE
-.sp
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the cursor to be created.
-.TP
-\fBBINARY\fR
-Causes the cursor to return data in binary rather than in text format.
-.TP
-\fBINSENSITIVE\fR
-Indicates that data retrieved from the cursor should be
-unaffected by updates to the tables underlying the cursor while
-the cursor exists. In PostgreSQL,
-all cursors are insensitive; this key word currently has no
-effect and is present for compatibility with the SQL standard.
-.TP
-\fBSCROLL\fR
-.TP
-\fBNO SCROLL\fR
-SCROLL specifies that the cursor may be used
-to retrieve rows in a nonsequential fashion (e.g.,
-backward). Depending upon the complexity of the query's
-execution plan, specifying SCROLL may impose
-a performance penalty on the query's execution time.
-NO SCROLL specifies that the cursor cannot be
-used to retrieve rows in a nonsequential fashion.
-.TP
-\fBWITH HOLD\fR
-.TP
-\fBWITHOUT HOLD\fR
-WITH HOLD specifies that the cursor may
-continue to be used after the transaction that created it
-successfully commits. WITHOUT HOLD specifies
-that the cursor cannot be used outside of the transaction that
-created it. If neither WITHOUT HOLD nor
-WITH HOLD is specified, WITHOUT
-HOLD is the default.
-.TP
-\fB\fIquery\fB\fR
-A \fBSELECT\fR command that will provide the rows to be
-returned by the cursor. Refer to SELECT [\fBselect\fR(7)] for further information about valid
-queries.
-.TP
-\fBFOR READ ONLY\fR
-.TP
-\fBFOR UPDATE\fR
-FOR READ ONLY indicates that the cursor will
-be used in a read-only mode. FOR UPDATE
-indicates that the cursor will be used to update tables. Since
-cursor updates are not currently supported in
-PostgreSQL, specifying FOR
-UPDATE will cause an error message and specifying
-FOR READ ONLY has no effect.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-Column(s) to be updated by the cursor. Since cursor updates are
-not currently supported in
-PostgreSQL, the FOR
-UPDATE clause provokes an error message.
-.PP
-The key words BINARY,
-INSENSITIVE, and SCROLL may
-appear in any order.
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Unless WITH HOLD is specified, the cursor
-created by this command can only be used within the current
-transaction. Thus, \fBDECLARE\fR without WITH
-HOLD is useless outside a transaction block: the cursor would
-survive only to the completion of the statement. Therefore
-PostgreSQL reports an error if this
-command is used outside a transaction block.
-Use
-BEGIN [\fBbegin\fR(7)],
-COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)]
-and
-ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(7)]
-to define a transaction block.
-.PP
-If WITH HOLD is specified and the transaction
-that created the cursor successfully commits, the cursor can
-continue to be accessed by subsequent transactions in the same
-session. (But if the creating transaction is aborted, the cursor
-is removed.) A cursor created with WITH HOLD
-is closed when an explicit \fBCLOSE\fR command is
-issued on it, or the session ends. In the current implementation,
-the rows represented by a held cursor are copied into a temporary
-file or memory area so that they remain available for subsequent
-transactions.
-.PP
-The SCROLL option should be specified when defining a
-cursor that will be used to fetch backwards. This is required by
-the SQL standard. However, for compatibility with earlier
-versions, PostgreSQL will allow
-backward fetches without SCROLL, if the cursor's query
-plan is simple enough that no extra overhead is needed to support
-it. However, application developers are advised not to rely on
-using backward fetches from a cursor that has not been created
-with SCROLL. If NO SCROLL is
-specified, then backward fetches are disallowed in any case.
-.PP
-The SQL standard only makes provisions for cursors in embedded
-SQL. The PostgreSQL
-server does not implement an \fBOPEN\fR statement for
-cursors; a cursor is considered to be open when it is declared.
-However, \fBECPG\fR, the embedded SQL
-preprocessor for PostgreSQL, supports
-the standard SQL cursor conventions, including those involving
-\fBDECLARE\fR and \fBOPEN\fR statements.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To declare a cursor:
-.sp
-.nf
-DECLARE liahona CURSOR FOR SELECT * FROM films;
-.sp
-.fi
-See FETCH [\fBfetch\fR(7)] for more
-examples of cursor usage.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard allows cursors only in embedded
-SQL and in modules. PostgreSQL
-permits cursors to be used interactively.
-.PP
-The SQL standard allows cursors to update table data. All
-PostgreSQL cursors are read only.
-.PP
-Binary cursors are a PostgreSQL
-extension.
diff --git a/raw/man7/delete.7 b/raw/man7/delete.7
deleted file mode 100644
index aea991a..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/delete.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DELETE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DELETE \- delete rows of a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DELETE FROM [ ONLY ] \fItable\fR [ WHERE \fIcondition\fR ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDELETE\fR deletes rows that satisfy the
-WHERE clause from the specified table. If the
-WHERE clause is absent, the effect is to delete
-all rows in the table. The result is a valid, but empty table.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-TRUNCATE [\fBtruncate\fR(7)] is a
-PostgreSQL extension which provides a
-faster mechanism to remove all rows from a table.
-.RE
-.sp
-.PP
-By default, \fBDELETE\fR will delete rows in the
-specified table and all its subtables. If you wish to only delete
-from the specific table mentioned, you must use the
-ONLY clause.
-.PP
-You must have the DELETE privilege on the table
-to delete from it, as well as the SELECT
-privilege for any table whose values are read in the \fIcondition\fR.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcondition\fB\fR
-A value expression that returns a value of type
-\fBboolean\fR that determines the rows which are to be
-deleted.
-.SH "OUTPUTS"
-.PP
-On successful completion, a \fBDELETE\fR command returns a command
-tag of the form
-.sp
-.nf
-DELETE \fIcount\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-The \fIcount\fR is the number
-of rows deleted. If \fIcount\fR is
-0, no rows matched the \fIcondition\fR (this is not considered
-an error).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Delete all films but musicals:
-.sp
-.nf
-DELETE FROM films WHERE kind <> 'Musical';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Clear the table films:
-.sp
-.nf
-DELETE FROM films;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command conforms to the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_aggregate.7 b/raw/man7/drop_aggregate.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 5eed29e..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_aggregate.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP AGGREGATE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP AGGREGATE \- remove an aggregate function
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP AGGREGATE \fIname\fR ( \fItype\fR ) [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP AGGREGATE\fR will delete an existing
-aggregate function. To execute this command the current
-user must be the owner of the aggregate function.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing aggregate function.
-.TP
-\fB\fItype\fB\fR
-The argument data type of the aggregate function, or
-* if the function accepts any data type.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the aggregate function.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the aggregate function if any objects depend on
-it. This is the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To remove the aggregate function myavg for type
-\fBinteger\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP AGGREGATE myavg(integer);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP AGGREGATE\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER AGGREGATE [\fBalter_aggregate\fR(7)], CREATE AGGREGATE [\fBcreate_aggregate\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_cast.7 b/raw/man7/drop_cast.7
deleted file mode 100644
index ad29af7..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_cast.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP CAST" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP CAST \- remove a cast
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP CAST (\fIsourcetype\fR AS \fItargettype\fR) [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP CAST\fR removes a previously defined cast.
-.PP
-To be able to drop a cast, you must own the source or the target
-data type. These are the same privileges that are required to
-create a cast.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIsourcetype\fB\fR
-The name of the source data type of the cast.
-.TP
-\fB\fItargettype\fB\fR
-The name of the target data type of the cast.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-These key words do not have any effect, since there are no
-dependencies on casts.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To drop the cast from type \fBtext\fR to type \fBint\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP CAST (text AS int);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBDROP CAST\fR command conforms to the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE CAST [\fBcreate_cast\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_conversion.7 b/raw/man7/drop_conversion.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c74ee7..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_conversion.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP CONVERSION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP CONVERSION \- remove a conversion
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP CONVERSION \fIname\fR [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP CONVERSION\fR removes a previously defined conversion.
-To be able to drop a conversion, you must own the conversion.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the conversion. The conversion name may be
-schema-qualified.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-These key words do not have any effect, since there are no
-dependencies on conversions.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To drop the conversion named myname:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP CONVERSION myname;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP CONVERSION\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER CONVERSION [\fBalter_conversion\fR(7)], CREATE CONVERSION [\fBcreate_conversion\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_database.7 b/raw/man7/drop_database.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 9df5657..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_database.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP DATABASE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP DATABASE \- remove a database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP DATABASE \fIname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP DATABASE\fR drops a database. It removes the
-catalog entries for the database and deletes the directory
-containing the data. It can only be executed by the database owner.
-Also, it cannot be executed while you or anyone else are connected
-to the target database. (Connect to template1 or any
-other database to issue this command.)
-.PP
-\fBDROP DATABASE\fR cannot be undone. Use it with care!
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the database to remove.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-\fBDROP DATABASE\fR cannot be executed inside a transaction
-block.
-.PP
-This command cannot be executed while connected to the target
-database. Thus, it might be more convenient to use the program
-dropdb [\fBdropdb\fR(1)] instead,
-which is a wrapper around this command.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The is no \fBDROP DATABASE\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE DATABASE [\fBcreate_database\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_domain.7 b/raw/man7/drop_domain.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 7ca0847..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_domain.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP DOMAIN" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP DOMAIN \- remove a domain
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP DOMAIN \fIname\fR [, ...] [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP DOMAIN\fR will remove a domain. Only the
-owner of a domain can remove it.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing domain.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the domain (such as
-table columns).
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the domain if any objects depend on it. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To remove the domain \fBbox\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP DOMAIN box;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command conforms to the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE DOMAIN [\fBcreate_domain\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_function.7 b/raw/man7/drop_function.7
deleted file mode 100644
index cb573a2..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_function.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP FUNCTION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP FUNCTION \- remove a function
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP FUNCTION \fIname\fR ( [ \fItype\fR [, ...] ] ) [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP FUNCTION\fR removes the definition of an existing
-function. To execute this command the user must be the
-owner of the function. The argument types to the
-function must be specified, since several different functions
-may exist with the same name and different argument lists.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing function.
-.TP
-\fB\fItype\fB\fR
-The data type of an argument of the function.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the function (such as
-operators or triggers).
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the function if any objects depend on it. This
-is the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-This command removes the square root function:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP FUNCTION sqrt(integer);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-A \fBDROP FUNCTION\fR statement is defined in the SQL
-standard, but it is not compatible with this command.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)], ALTER FUNCTION [\fBalter_function\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_group.7 b/raw/man7/drop_group.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 54bdcf2..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_group.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP GROUP" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP GROUP \- remove a user group
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP GROUP \fIname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP GROUP\fR removes the specified group. The
-users in the group are not deleted.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of an existing group.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To drop a group:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP GROUP staff;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP GROUP\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER GROUP [\fBalter_group\fR(7)], CREATE GROUP [\fBcreate_group\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_index.7 b/raw/man7/drop_index.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 6766eae..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_index.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP INDEX" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP INDEX \- remove an index
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP INDEX \fIname\fR [, ...] [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP INDEX\fR drops an existing index from the database
-system. To execute this command you must be the owner of
-the index.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an index to remove.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the index.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the index if any objects depend on it. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-This command will remove the index title_idx:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP INDEX title_idx;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBDROP INDEX\fR is a
-PostgreSQL language extension. There
-are no provisions for indexes in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE INDEX [\fBcreate_index\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_language.7 b/raw/man7/drop_language.7
deleted file mode 100644
index fdf7980..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_language.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP LANGUAGE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP LANGUAGE \- remove a procedural language
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP [ PROCEDURAL ] LANGUAGE \fIname\fR [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP LANGUAGE\fR will remove the definition
-of the previously registered procedural language called
-\fIname\fR.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of an existing procedural language. For backward
-compatibility, the name may be enclosed by single quotes.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the language (such as
-functions in the language).
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the language if any objects depend on it. This
-is the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-This command removes the procedural language
-plsample:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP LANGUAGE plsample;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP LANGUAGE\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER LANGUAGE [\fBalter_language\fR(7)], CREATE LANGUAGE [\fBcreate_language\fR(l)], \fBdroplang\fR(1)
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_operator.7 b/raw/man7/drop_operator.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f7dde9..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_operator.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP OPERATOR" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP OPERATOR \- remove an operator
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP OPERATOR \fIname\fR ( \fIlefttype\fR | NONE , \fIrighttype\fR | NONE ) [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP OPERATOR\fR drops an existing operator from
-the database system. To execute this command you must be the owner
-of the operator.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing operator.
-.TP
-\fB\fIlefttype\fB\fR
-The data type of the operator's left operand; write
-NONE if the operator has no left operand.
-.TP
-\fB\fIrighttype\fB\fR
-The data type of the operator's right operand; write
-NONE if the operator has no right operand.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the operator.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the operator if any objects depend on it. This
-is the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Remove the power operator a^b for type \fBinteger\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP OPERATOR ^ (integer, integer);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Remove the left unary bitwise complement operator
-~b for type \fBbit\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP OPERATOR ~ (none, bit);
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Remove the right unary factorial operator x!
-for type \fBinteger\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP OPERATOR ! (integer, none);
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP OPERATOR\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE OPERATOR [\fBcreate_operator\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_operator_class.7 b/raw/man7/drop_operator_class.7
deleted file mode 100644
index ba4e245..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_operator_class.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP OPERATOR CLASS" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP OPERATOR CLASS \- remove an operator class
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP OPERATOR CLASS \fIname\fR USING \fIindex_method\fR [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP OPERATOR CLASS\fR drops an existing operator class.
-To execute this command you must be the owner of the operator class.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing operator class.
-.TP
-\fB\fIindex_method\fB\fR
-The name of the index access method the operator class is for.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the operator class.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the operator class if any objects depend on it.
-This is the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Remove the B-tree operator class widget_ops:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP OPERATOR CLASS widget_ops USING btree;
-.sp
-.fi
-This command will not succeed if there are any existing indexes
-that use the operator class. Add CASCADE to drop
-such indexes along with the operator class.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP OPERATOR CLASS\fR statement in the
-SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER OPERATOR CLASS [\fBalter_operator_class\fR(7)], CREATE OPERATOR CLASS [\fBcreate_operator_class\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_rule.7 b/raw/man7/drop_rule.7
deleted file mode 100644
index d0260ee..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_rule.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,43 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP RULE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP RULE \- remove a rewrite rule
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP RULE \fIname\fR ON \fIrelation\fR [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP RULE\fR drops a rewrite rule.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the rule to drop.
-.TP
-\fB\fIrelation\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table or view that
-the rule applies to.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the rule.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the rule if any objects depend on it. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To drop the rewrite rule newrule:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP RULE newrule ON mytable;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP RULE\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE RULE [\fBcreate_rule\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_schema.7 b/raw/man7/drop_schema.7
deleted file mode 100644
index f17e64c..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_schema.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP SCHEMA" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP SCHEMA \- remove a schema
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP SCHEMA \fIname\fR [, ...] [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP SCHEMA\fR removes schemas from the database.
-.PP
-A schema can only be dropped by its owner or a superuser. Note that
-the owner can drop the schema (and thereby all contained objects)
-even if he does not own some of the objects within the schema.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of a schema.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects (tables, functions, etc.) that are
-contained in the schema.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the schema if it contains any objects. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To remove schema mystuff from the database,
-along with everything it contains:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP SCHEMA mystuff CASCADE;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBDROP SCHEMA\fR is fully conforming with the SQL
-standard, except that the standard only allows one schema to be
-dropped per command.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER SCHEMA [\fBalter_schema\fR(7)], CREATE SCHEMA [\fBcreate_schema\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_sequence.7 b/raw/man7/drop_sequence.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a978b9..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_sequence.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP SEQUENCE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP SEQUENCE \- remove a sequence
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP SEQUENCE \fIname\fR [, ...] [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP SEQUENCE\fR removes sequence number generators.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a sequence.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the sequence.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the sequence if any objects depend on it. This
-is the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To remove the sequence serial:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP SEQUENCE serial;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBDROP SEQUENCE\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE SEQUENCE [\fBcreate_sequence\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_table.7 b/raw/man7/drop_table.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 79443b3..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_table.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP TABLE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP TABLE \- remove a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP TABLE \fIname\fR [, ...] [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP TABLE\fR removes tables from the database.
-Only its owner may destroy a table. To empty a table of rows,
-without destroying the table, use \fBDELETE\fR.
-.PP
-\fBDROP TABLE\fR always removes any indexes, rules,
-triggers, and constraints that exist for the target table.
-However, to drop a table that is referenced by a foreign-key
-constraint of another table, CASCADE must be
-specified. (CASCADE will remove the foreign-key
-constraint, not the other table entirely.)
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table to drop.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the table (such as
-views).
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the table if any objects depend on it. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To destroy two tables, films and
-distributors:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP TABLE films, distributors;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command conforms to the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER TABLE [\fBalter_table\fR(7)], CREATE TABLE [\fBcreate_table\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_trigger.7 b/raw/man7/drop_trigger.7
deleted file mode 100644
index e8d37bb..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_trigger.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP TRIGGER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP TRIGGER \- remove a trigger
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP TRIGGER \fIname\fR ON \fItable\fR [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP TRIGGER\fR will remove an existing
-trigger definition. To execute this command, the current
-user must be the owner of the table for which the trigger is defined.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the trigger to remove.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a table for which the
-trigger is defined.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the trigger.
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the trigger if any objects depend on it. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Destroy the trigger if_dist_exists on the table
-films:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP TRIGGER if_dist_exists ON films;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBDROP TRIGGER\fR statement in
-PostgreSQL is incompatible with the SQL
-standard. In the SQL standard, trigger names are not local to
-tables, so the command is simply DROP TRIGGER
-\fIname\fR.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE TRIGGER [\fBcreate_trigger\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_type.7 b/raw/man7/drop_type.7
deleted file mode 100644
index dd8b202..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_type.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP TYPE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP TYPE \- remove a data type
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP TYPE \fIname\fR [, ...] [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP TYPE\fR will remove a user-defined data type.
-Only the owner of a type can remove it.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the data type to remove.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the type (such as
-table columns, functions, operators).
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the type if any objects depend on it. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To remove the data type \fBbox\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP TYPE box;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command is similar to the corresponding command in the SQL
-standard, but note that the \fBCREATE TYPE\fR command
-and the data type extension mechanisms in
-PostgreSQL differ from the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE TYPE [\fBcreate_type\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_user.7 b/raw/man7/drop_user.7
deleted file mode 100644
index a233b18..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_user.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP USER" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP USER \- remove a database user account
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP USER \fIname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP USER\fR removes the specified user.
-It does not remove tables, views, or other objects owned by the user. If the
-user owns any database, an error is raised.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the user to remove.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-PostgreSQL includes a program dropuser [\fBdropuser\fR(1)] that has the
-same functionality as this command (in fact, it calls this command)
-but can be run from the command shell.
-.PP
-To drop a user who owns a database, first drop the database or change
-its ownership.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To drop a user account:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP USER jonathan;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBDROP USER\fR statement is a
-PostgreSQL extension. The SQL standard
-leaves the definition of users to the implementation.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ALTER USER [\fBalter_user\fR(7)], CREATE USER [\fBcreate_user\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/drop_view.7 b/raw/man7/drop_view.7
deleted file mode 100644
index dd1d414..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/drop_view.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,41 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "DROP VIEW" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-DROP VIEW \- remove a view
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP VIEW \fIname\fR [, ...] [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBDROP VIEW\fR drops an existing view. To execute
-this command you must be the owner of the view.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the view to remove.
-.TP
-\fBCASCADE\fR
-Automatically drop objects that depend on the view (such as
-other views).
-.TP
-\fBRESTRICT\fR
-Refuse to drop the view if any objects depend on it. This is
-the default.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-This command will remove the view called kinds:
-.sp
-.nf
-DROP VIEW kinds;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command conforms to the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-CREATE VIEW [\fBcreate_view\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/end.7 b/raw/man7/end.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b4b6ad5..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/end.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "END" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-END \- commit the current transaction
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-END [ WORK | TRANSACTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBEND\fR commits the current transaction. All changes
-made by the transaction become visible to others and are guaranteed
-to be durable if a crash occurs. This command is a
-PostgreSQL extension
-that is equivalent to COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)].
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBWORK\fR
-.TP
-\fBTRANSACTION\fR
-Optional key words. They have no effect.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(7)] to
-abort a transaction.
-.PP
-Issuing \fBEND\fR when not inside a transaction does
-no harm, but it will provoke a warning message.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To commit the current transaction and make all changes permanent:
-.sp
-.nf
-END;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBEND\fR is a PostgreSQL
-extension that provides functionality equivalent to COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)], which is
-specified in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-BEGIN [\fBbegin\fR(7)], COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(l)], ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/execute.7 b/raw/man7/execute.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 684dbf0..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/execute.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "EXECUTE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-EXECUTE \- execute a prepared statement
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-EXECUTE \fIplan_name\fR [ (\fIparameter\fR [, ...] ) ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBEXECUTE\fR is used to execute a previously prepared
-statement. Since prepared statements only exist for the duration of a
-session, the prepared statement must have been created by a
-\fBPREPARE\fR statement executed earlier in the
-current session.
-.PP
-If the \fBPREPARE\fR statement that created the statement
-specified some parameters, a compatible set of parameters must be
-passed to the \fBEXECUTE\fR statement, or else an
-error is raised. Note that (unlike functions) prepared statements are
-not overloaded based on the type or number of their parameters; the
-name of a prepared statement must be unique within a database session.
-.PP
-For more information on the creation and usage of prepared statements,
-see PREPARE [\fBprepare\fR(7)].
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIplan_name\fB\fR
-The name of the prepared statement to execute.
-.TP
-\fB\fIparameter\fB\fR
-The actual value of a parameter to the prepared statement. This
-must be an expression yielding a value of a type compatible with
-the data type specified for this parameter position in the
-\fBPREPARE\fR command that created the prepared
-statement.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard includes an \fBEXECUTE\fR statement,
-but it is only for use in embedded SQL. This version of the
-\fBEXECUTE\fR statement also uses a somewhat different
-syntax.
diff --git a/raw/man7/explain.7 b/raw/man7/explain.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 681c040..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/explain.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,173 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "EXPLAIN" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-EXPLAIN \- show the execution plan of a statement
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-EXPLAIN [ ANALYZE ] [ VERBOSE ] \fIstatement\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-This command displays the execution plan that the
-PostgreSQL planner generates for the
-supplied statement. The execution plan shows how the table(s)
-referenced by the statement will be scanned---by plain sequential scan,
-index scan, etc.---and if multiple tables are referenced, what join
-algorithms will be used to bring together the required row from
-each input table.
-.PP
-The most critical part of the display is the estimated statement execution
-cost, which is the planner's guess at how long it will take to run the
-statement (measured in units of disk page fetches). Actually two numbers
-are shown: the start-up time before the first row can be returned, and
-the total time to return all the rows. For most queries the total time
-is what matters, but in contexts such as a subquery in EXISTS, the planner
-will choose the smallest start-up time instead of the smallest total time
-(since the executor will stop after getting one row, anyway).
-Also, if you limit the number of rows to return with a LIMIT clause,
-the planner makes an appropriate interpolation between the endpoint
-costs to estimate which plan is really the cheapest.
-.PP
-The ANALYZE option causes the statement to be actually executed, not only
-planned. The total elapsed time expended within each plan node (in
-milliseconds) and total number of rows it actually returned are added to
-the display. This is useful for seeing whether the planner's estimates
-are close to reality.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Important:"
-Keep in mind that the statement is actually executed when
-ANALYZE is used. Although
-\fBEXPLAIN\fR will discard any output that a
-\fBSELECT\fR would return, other side effects of the
-statement will happen as usual. If you wish to use
-\fBEXPLAIN ANALYZE\fR on an
-\fBINSERT\fR, \fBUPDATE\fR,
-\fBDELETE\fR, or \fBEXECUTE\fR statement
-without letting the command affect your data, use this approach:
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN;
-EXPLAIN ANALYZE ...;
-ROLLBACK;
-.sp
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBANALYZE\fR
-Carry out the command and show the actual run times.
-.TP
-\fBVERBOSE\fR
-Show the full internal representation of the plan tree, rather
-than just a summary. Usually this option is only useful for
-debugging PostgreSQL. The
-VERBOSE output is either pretty-printed or
-not, depending on the setting of the
-explain_pretty_print configuration parameter.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstatement\fB\fR
-Any \fBSELECT\fR, \fBINSERT\fR, \fBUPDATE\fR,
-\fBDELETE\fR, \fBEXECUTE\fR, or \fBDECLARE\fR
-statement, whose execution plan you wish to see.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-There is only sparse documentation on the optimizer's use of cost
-information in PostgreSQL. Refer to
-the section called ``Using \fBEXPLAIN\fR'' in the documentation for more information.
-.PP
-In order to allow the PostgreSQL query
-planner to make reasonably informed decisions when optimizing
-queries, the \fBANALYZE\fR statement should be run to
-record statistics about the distribution of data within the
-table. If you have not done this (or if the statistical
-distribution of the data in the table has changed significantly
-since the last time \fBANALYZE\fR was run), the
-estimated costs are unlikely to conform to the real properties of
-the query, and consequently an inferior query plan may be chosen.
-.PP
-Prior to PostgreSQL 7.3, the plan was
-emitted in the form of a NOTICE message. Now it
-appears as a query result (formatted like a table with a single
-text column).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To show the plan for a simple query on a table with a single
-\fBinteger\fR column and 10000 rows:
-.sp
-.nf
-EXPLAIN SELECT * FROM foo;
-
- QUERY PLAN
----------------------------------------------------------
- Seq Scan on foo (cost=0.00..155.00 rows=10000 width=4)
-(1 row)
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-If there is an index and we use a query with an indexable
-WHERE condition, \fBEXPLAIN\fR
-might show a different plan:
-.sp
-.nf
-EXPLAIN SELECT * FROM foo WHERE i = 4;
-
- QUERY PLAN
---------------------------------------------------------------
- Index Scan using fi on foo (cost=0.00..5.98 rows=1 width=4)
- Index Cond: (i = 4)
-(2 rows)
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-And here is an example of a query plan for a query
-using an aggregate function:
-.sp
-.nf
-EXPLAIN SELECT sum(i) FROM foo WHERE i < 10;
-
- QUERY PLAN
----------------------------------------------------------------------
- Aggregate (cost=23.93..23.93 rows=1 width=4)
- -> Index Scan using fi on foo (cost=0.00..23.92 rows=6 width=4)
- Index Cond: (i < 10)
-(3 rows)
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Here is an example of using \fBEXPLAIN EXECUTE\fR to
-display the execution plan for a prepared query:
-.sp
-.nf
-PREPARE query(int, int) AS SELECT sum(bar) FROM test
- WHERE id > $1 AND id < $2
- GROUP BY foo;
-
-EXPLAIN ANALYZE EXECUTE query(100, 200);
-
- QUERY PLAN
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- HashAggregate (cost=39.53..39.53 rows=1 width=8) (actual time=0.661..0.672 rows=7 loops=1)
- -> Index Scan using test_pkey on test (cost=0.00..32.97 rows=1311 width=8) (actual time=0.050..0.395 rows=99 loops=1)
- Index Cond: ((id > $1) AND (id < $2))
- Total runtime: 0.851 ms
-(4 rows)
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Of course, the specific numbers shown here depend on the actual
-contents of the tables involved. Also note that the numbers, and
-even the selected query strategy, may vary between
-PostgreSQL releases due to planner
-improvements. In addition, the \fBANALYZE\fR command
-uses random sampling to estimate data statistics; therefore, it is
-possible for cost estimates to change after a fresh run of
-\fBANALYZE\fR, even if the actual distribution of data
-in the table has not changed.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBEXPLAIN\fR statement defined in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/fetch.7 b/raw/man7/fetch.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 58071a6..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/fetch.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,225 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "FETCH" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-FETCH \- retrieve rows from a query using a cursor
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-FETCH [ \fIdirection\fR { FROM | IN } ] \fIcursorname\fR
-
-where \fIdirection\fR can be empty or one of:
-
- NEXT
- PRIOR
- FIRST
- LAST
- ABSOLUTE \fIcount\fR
- RELATIVE \fIcount\fR
- \fIcount\fR
- ALL
- FORWARD
- FORWARD \fIcount\fR
- FORWARD ALL
- BACKWARD
- BACKWARD \fIcount\fR
- BACKWARD ALL
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBFETCH\fR retrieves rows using a previously-created cursor.
-.PP
-A cursor has an associated position, which is used by
-\fBFETCH\fR. The cursor position can be before the first row of the
-query result, on any particular row of the result, or after the last row
-of the result. When created, a cursor is positioned before the first row.
-After fetching some rows, the cursor is positioned on the row most recently
-retrieved. If \fBFETCH\fR runs off the end of the available rows
-then the cursor is left positioned after the last row, or before the first
-row if fetching backward. \fBFETCH ALL\fR or \fBFETCH BACKWARD
-ALL\fR will always leave the cursor positioned after the last row or before
-the first row.
-.PP
-The forms NEXT, PRIOR, FIRST,
-LAST, ABSOLUTE, RELATIVE fetch
-a single row after moving the cursor appropriately. If there is no
-such row, an empty result is returned, and the cursor is left
-positioned before the first row or after the last row as
-appropriate.
-.PP
-The forms using FORWARD and BACKWARD
-retrieve the indicated number of rows moving in the forward or
-backward direction, leaving the cursor positioned on the
-last-returned row (or after/before all rows, if the \fIcount\fR exceeds the number of rows
-available).
-.PP
-RELATIVE 0, FORWARD 0, and
-BACKWARD 0 all request fetching the current row without
-moving the cursor, that is, re-fetching the most recently fetched
-row. This will succeed unless the cursor is positioned before the
-first row or after the last row; in which case, no row is returned.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIdirection\fB\fR
-\fIdirection\fR defines
-the fetch direction and number of rows to fetch. It can be one
-of the following:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBNEXT\fR
-Fetch the next row. This is the default if \fIdirection\fR is omitted.
-.TP
-\fBPRIOR\fR
-Fetch the prior row.
-.TP
-\fBFIRST\fR
-Fetch the first row of the query (same as ABSOLUTE 1).
-.TP
-\fBLAST\fR
-Fetch the last row of the query (same as ABSOLUTE -1).
-.TP
-\fBABSOLUTE \fIcount\fB\fR
-Fetch the \fIcount\fR'th row of the query,
-or the abs(\fIcount\fR)'th row from
-the end if \fIcount\fR is negative. Position
-before first row or after last row if \fIcount\fR is out of range; in
-particular, ABSOLUTE 0 positions before
-the first row.
-.TP
-\fBRELATIVE \fIcount\fB\fR
-Fetch the \fIcount\fR'th succeeding row, or
-the abs(\fIcount\fR)'th prior
-row if \fIcount\fR is
-negative. RELATIVE 0 re-fetches the
-current row, if any.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcount\fB\fR
-Fetch the next \fIcount\fR rows (same as
-FORWARD \fIcount\fR).
-.TP
-\fBALL\fR
-Fetch all remaining rows (same as FORWARD ALL).
-.TP
-\fBFORWARD\fR
-Fetch the next row (same as NEXT).
-.TP
-\fBFORWARD \fIcount\fB\fR
-Fetch the next \fIcount\fR rows.
-FORWARD 0 re-fetches the current row.
-.TP
-\fBFORWARD ALL\fR
-Fetch all remaining rows.
-.TP
-\fBBACKWARD\fR
-Fetch the prior row (same as PRIOR).
-.TP
-\fBBACKWARD \fIcount\fB\fR
-Fetch the prior \fIcount\fR rows (scanning
-backwards). BACKWARD 0 re-fetches the
-current row.
-.TP
-\fBBACKWARD ALL\fR
-Fetch all prior rows (scanning backwards).
-.RE
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB\fIcount\fB\fR
-\fIcount\fR is a
-possibly-signed integer constant, determining the location or
-number of rows to fetch. For FORWARD and
-BACKWARD cases, specifying a negative \fIcount\fR is equivalent to changing
-the sense of FORWARD and BACKWARD.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcursorname\fB\fR
-An open cursor's name.
-.SH "OUTPUTS"
-.PP
-On successful completion, a \fBFETCH\fR command returns a command
-tag of the form
-.sp
-.nf
-FETCH \fIcount\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-The \fIcount\fR is the number
-of rows fetched (possibly zero). Note that in
-\fBpsql\fR, the command tag will not actually be
-displayed, since \fBpsql\fR displays the fetched
-rows instead.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-The cursor should be declared with the SCROLL
-option if one intends to use any variants of \fBFETCH\fR
-other than \fBFETCH NEXT\fR or \fBFETCH FORWARD\fR with
-a positive count. For simple queries
-PostgreSQL will allow backwards fetch
-from cursors not declared with SCROLL, but this
-behavior is best not relied on. If the cursor is declared with
-NO SCROLL, no backward fetches are allowed.
-.PP
-ABSOLUTE fetches are not any faster than
-navigating to the desired row with a relative move: the underlying
-implementation must traverse all the intermediate rows anyway.
-Negative absolute fetches are even worse: the query must be read to
-the end to find the last row, and then traversed backward from
-there. However, rewinding to the start of the query (as with
-FETCH ABSOLUTE 0) is fast.
-.PP
-Updating data via a cursor is currently not supported by
-PostgreSQL.
-.PP
-DECLARE [\fBdeclare\fR(7)]
-is used to define a cursor. Use
-MOVE [\fBmove\fR(7)]
-to change cursor position without retrieving data.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The following example traverses a table using a cursor.
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN WORK;
-
--- Set up a cursor:
-DECLARE liahona SCROLL CURSOR FOR SELECT * FROM films;
-
--- Fetch the first 5 rows in the cursor liahona:
-FETCH FORWARD 5 FROM liahona;
-
- code | title | did | date_prod | kind | len
--------+-------------------------+-----+------------+----------+-------
- BL101 | The Third Man | 101 | 1949-12-23 | Drama | 01:44
- BL102 | The African Queen | 101 | 1951-08-11 | Romantic | 01:43
- JL201 | Une Femme est une Femme | 102 | 1961-03-12 | Romantic | 01:25
- P_301 | Vertigo | 103 | 1958-11-14 | Action | 02:08
- P_302 | Becket | 103 | 1964-02-03 | Drama | 02:28
-
--- Fetch the previous row:
-FETCH PRIOR FROM liahona;
-
- code | title | did | date_prod | kind | len
--------+---------+-----+------------+--------+-------
- P_301 | Vertigo | 103 | 1958-11-14 | Action | 02:08
-
--- Close the cursor and end the transaction:
-CLOSE liahona;
-COMMIT WORK;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard defines \fBFETCH\fR for use in
-embedded SQL only. This variant of \fBFETCH\fR
-described here returns the data as if it were a
-\fBSELECT\fR result rather than placing it in host
-variables. Other than this point, \fBFETCH\fR is
-fully upward-compatible with the SQL standard.
-.PP
-The \fBFETCH\fR forms involving
-FORWARD and BACKWARD, as well
-as the forms FETCH \fIcount\fR and FETCH
-ALL, in which FORWARD is implicit, are
-PostgreSQL extensions.
-.PP
-The SQL standard allows only FROM preceding the cursor
-name; the option to use IN is an extension.
diff --git a/raw/man7/glob.7 b/raw/man7/glob.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b485767..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/glob.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,187 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998 Andries Brouwer
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" 2003-08-24 fix for / by John Kristoff + joey
-.\"
-.TH GLOB 7 2003-08-24 "Unix" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-glob \- Globbing pathnames
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Long ago, in Unix V6, there was a program
-.I /etc/glob
-that would expand wildcard patterns.
-Soon afterwards this became a shell built-in.
-
-These days there is also a library routine
-.BR glob (3)
-that will perform this function for a user program.
-
-The rules are as follows (POSIX 1003.2, 3.13).
-.SH "WILDCARD MATCHING"
-A string is a wildcard pattern if it contains one of the
-characters `?', `*' or `['. Globbing is the operation
-that expands a wildcard pattern into the list of pathnames
-matching the pattern. Matching is defined by:
-
-A `?' (not between brackets) matches any single character.
-
-A `*' (not between brackets) matches any string,
-including the empty string.
-
-.SS "Character classes"
-An expression `[...]' where the first character after the
-leading `[' is not an `!' matches a single character,
-namely any of the characters enclosed by the brackets.
-The string enclosed by the brackets cannot be empty;
-therefore `]' can be allowed between the brackets, provided
-that it is the first character. (Thus, `[][!]' matches the
-three characters `[', `]' and `!'.)
-
-.SS Ranges
-There is one special convention:
-two characters separated by `-' denote a range.
-(Thus, `[A-Fa-f0-9]' is equivalent to `[ABCDEFabcdef0123456789]'.)
-One may include `-' in its literal meaning by making it the
-first or last character between the brackets.
-(Thus, `[]-]' matches just the two characters `]' and `-',
-and `[--0]' matches the three characters `-', `.', `0', since `/'
-cannot be matched.)
-
-.SS Complementation
-An expression `[!...]' matches a single character, namely
-any character that is not matched by the expression obtained
-by removing the first `!' from it.
-(Thus, `[!]a-]' matches any single character except `]', `a' and `-'.)
-
-One can remove the special meaning of `?', `*' and `[' by
-preceding them by a backslash, or, in case this is part of
-a shell command line, enclosing them in quotes.
-Between brackets these characters stand for themselves.
-Thus, `[[?*\e]' matches the four characters `[', `?', `*' and `\e'.
-
-.SH PATHNAMES
-Globbing is applied on each of the components of a pathname
-separately. A `/' in a pathname cannot be matched by a `?' or `*'
-wildcard, or by a range like `[.-0]'. A range cannot contain an
-explicit `/' character; this would lead to a syntax error.
-
-If a filename starts with a `.', this character must be matched explicitly.
-(Thus, `rm *' will not remove .profile, and `tar c *' will not
-archive all your files; `tar c .' is better.)
-
-.SH "EMPTY LISTS"
-The nice and simple rule given above: `expand a wildcard pattern
-into the list of matching pathnames' was the original Unix
-definition. It allowed one to have patterns that expand into
-an empty list, as in
-.br
-.nf
- xv -wait 0 *.gif *.jpg
-.fi
-where perhaps no *.gif files are present (and this is not
-an error).
-However, POSIX requires that a wildcard pattern is left
-unchanged when it is syntactically incorrect, or the list of
-matching pathnames is empty.
-With
-.I bash
-one can force the classical behaviour by setting
-.IR allow_null_glob_expansion=true .
-
-(Similar problems occur elsewhere. E.g., where old scripts have
-.br
-.nf
- rm `find . -name "*~"`
-.fi
-new scripts require
-.br
-.nf
- rm -f nosuchfile `find . -name "*~"`
-.fi
-to avoid error messages from
-.I rm
-called with an empty argument list.)
-
-.SH NOTES
-.SS Regular expressions
-Note that wildcard patterns are not regular expressions,
-although they are a bit similar. First of all, they match
-filenames, rather than text, and secondly, the conventions
-are not the same: e.g., in a regular expression `*' means zero or
-more copies of the preceding thing.
-
-Now that regular expressions have bracket expressions where
-the negation is indicated by a `^', POSIX has declared the
-effect of a wildcard pattern `[^...]' to be undefined.
-
-.SS Character classes and Internationalization
-Of course ranges were originally meant to be ASCII ranges,
-so that `[ -%]' stands for `[ !"#$%]' and `[a-z]' stands
-for "any lowercase letter".
-Some Unix implementations generalized this so that a range X-Y
-stands for the set of characters with code between the codes for
-X and for Y. However, this requires the user to know the
-character coding in use on the local system, and moreover, is
-not convenient if the collating sequence for the local alphabet
-differs from the ordering of the character codes.
-Therefore, POSIX extended the bracket notation greatly,
-both for wildcard patterns and for regular expressions.
-In the above we saw three types of items that can occur in a bracket
-expression: namely (i) the negation, (ii) explicit single characters,
-and (iii) ranges. POSIX specifies ranges in an internationally
-more useful way and adds three more types:
-
-(iii) Ranges X-Y comprise all characters that fall between X
-and Y (inclusive) in the currect collating sequence as defined
-by the LC_COLLATE category in the current locale.
-
-(iv) Named character classes, like
-.br
-.nf
-[:alnum:] [:alpha:] [:blank:] [:cntrl:]
-[:digit:] [:graph:] [:lower:] [:print:]
-[:punct:] [:space:] [:upper:] [:xdigit:]
-.fi
-so that one can say `[[:lower:]]' instead of `[a-z]', and have
-things work in Denmark, too, where there are three letters past `z'
-in the alphabet.
-These character classes are defined by the LC_CTYPE category
-in the current locale.
-
-(v) Collating symbols, like `[.ch.]' or `[.a-acute.]',
-where the string between `[.' and `.]' is a collating
-element defined for the current locale. Note that this may
-be a multi-character element.
-
-(vi) Equivalence class expressions, like `[=a=]',
-where the string between `[=' and `=]' is any collating
-element from its equivalence class, as defined for the
-current locale. For example, `[[=a=]]' might be equivalent
-to `[a????]' (warning: Latin-1 here), that is,
-to `[a[.a-acute.][.a-grave.][.a-umlaut.][.a-circumflex.]]'.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR sh (1),
-.BR glob (3),
-.BR fnmatch (3),
-.BR locale (7),
-.BR regex (7)
diff --git a/raw/man7/grant.7 b/raw/man7/grant.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 5de0d9b..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/grant.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,261 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "GRANT" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-GRANT \- define access privileges
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-GRANT { { SELECT | INSERT | UPDATE | DELETE | RULE | REFERENCES | TRIGGER }
- [,...] | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON [ TABLE ] \fItablename\fR [, ...]
- TO { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
-
-GRANT { { CREATE | TEMPORARY | TEMP } [,...] | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON DATABASE \fIdbname\fR [, ...]
- TO { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
-
-GRANT { EXECUTE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON FUNCTION \fIfuncname\fR ([\fItype\fR, ...]) [, ...]
- TO { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
-
-GRANT { USAGE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON LANGUAGE \fIlangname\fR [, ...]
- TO { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
-
-GRANT { { CREATE | USAGE } [,...] | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON SCHEMA \fIschemaname\fR [, ...]
- TO { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...] [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-The \fBGRANT\fR command gives specific privileges on
-an object (table, view, sequence, database, function, procedural language,
-or schema) to
-one or more users or groups of users. These privileges are added
-to those already granted, if any.
-.PP
-The key word PUBLIC indicates that the
-privileges are to be granted to all users, including those that may
-be created later. PUBLIC may be thought of as an
-implicitly defined group that always includes all users.
-Any particular user will have the sum
-of privileges granted directly to him, privileges granted to any group he
-is presently a member of, and privileges granted to
-PUBLIC.
-.PP
-If WITH GRANT OPTION is specified, the recipient
-of the privilege may in turn grant it to others. By default this
-is not allowed. Grant options can only be granted to individual
-users, not to groups or PUBLIC.
-.PP
-There is no need to grant privileges to the owner of an object
-(usually the user that created it),
-as the owner has all privileges by default. (The owner could,
-however, choose to revoke some of his own privileges for safety.)
-The right to drop an object, or to alter its definition in any way is
-not described by a grantable privilege; it is inherent in the owner,
-and cannot be granted or revoked. It is not possible for the owner's
-grant options to be revoked, either.
-.PP
-Depending on the type of object, the initial default privileges may
-include granting some privileges to PUBLIC.
-The default is no public access for tables and schemas;
-TEMP table creation privilege for databases;
-EXECUTE privilege for functions; and
-USAGE privilege for languages.
-The object owner may of course revoke these privileges. (For maximum
-security, issue the \fBREVOKE\fR in the same transaction that
-creates the object; then there is no window in which another user
-may use the object.)
-.PP
-The possible privileges are:
-.TP
-\fBSELECT\fR
-Allows SELECT [\fBselect\fR(7)] from any column of the
-specified table, view, or sequence. Also allows the use of
-COPY [\fBcopy\fR(7)] TO. For sequences, this
-privilege also allows the use of the \fBcurrval\fR function.
-.TP
-\fBINSERT\fR
-Allows INSERT [\fBinsert\fR(7)] of a new row into the
-specified table. Also allows COPY [\fBcopy\fR(7)] FROM.
-.TP
-\fBUPDATE\fR
-Allows UPDATE [\fBupdate\fR(7)] of any column of the
-specified table. SELECT ... FOR UPDATE
-also requires this privilege (besides the
-SELECT privilege). For sequences, this
-privilege allows the use of the \fBnextval\fR and
-\fBsetval\fR functions.
-.TP
-\fBDELETE\fR
-Allows DELETE [\fBdelete\fR(7)] of a row from the
-specified table.
-.TP
-\fBRULE\fR
-Allows the creation of a rule on the table/view. (See CREATE RULE [\fBcreate_rule\fR(7)] statement.)
-.TP
-\fBREFERENCES\fR
-To create a foreign key constraint, it is
-necessary to have this privilege on both the referencing and
-referenced tables.
-.TP
-\fBTRIGGER\fR
-Allows the creation of a trigger on the specified table. (See
-CREATE TRIGGER [\fBcreate_trigger\fR(7)] statement.)
-.TP
-\fBCREATE\fR
-For databases, allows new schemas to be created within the database.
-
-For schemas, allows new objects to be created within the schema.
-To rename an existing object, you must own the object \fBand\fR
-have this privilege for the containing schema.
-.TP
-\fBTEMPORARY\fR
-.TP
-\fBTEMP\fR
-Allows temporary tables to be created while using the database.
-.TP
-\fBEXECUTE\fR
-Allows the use of the specified function and the use of any
-operators that are implemented on top of the function. This is
-the only type of privilege that is applicable to functions.
-(This syntax works for aggregate functions, as well.)
-.TP
-\fBUSAGE\fR
-For procedural languages, allows the use of the specified language for
-the creation of functions in that language. This is the only type
-of privilege that is applicable to procedural languages.
-
-For schemas, allows access to objects contained in the specified
-schema (assuming that the objects' own privilege requirements are
-also met). Essentially this allows the grantee to ``look up''
-objects within the schema.
-.TP
-\fBALL PRIVILEGES\fR
-Grant all of the privileges applicable to the object at once.
-The PRIVILEGES key word is optional in
-PostgreSQL, though it is required by
-strict SQL.
-.PP
-The privileges required by other commands are listed on the
-reference page of the respective command.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-The REVOKE [\fBrevoke\fR(7)] command is used
-to revoke access privileges.
-.PP
-It should be noted that database superusers can access
-all objects regardless of object privilege settings. This
-is comparable to the rights of root in a Unix system.
-As with root, it's unwise to operate as a superuser
-except when absolutely necessary.
-.PP
-If a superuser chooses to issue a \fBGRANT\fR or \fBREVOKE\fR
-command, the command is performed as though it were issued by the
-owner of the affected object. In particular, privileges granted via
-such a command will appear to have been granted by the object owner.
-.PP
-Currently, to grant privileges in PostgreSQL
-to only a few columns, you must
-create a view having the desired columns and then grant privileges
-to that view.
-.PP
-Use \fBpsql\fR(1)'s \fB\\z\fR command
-to obtain information about existing privileges, for example:
-.sp
-.nf
-=> \\z mytable
-
- Access privileges for database "lusitania"
- Schema | Table | Access privileges
---------+---------+---------------------------------------
- public | mytable | {=r/postgres,miriam=arwdRxt/postgres,"group todos=arw/postgres"}
-(1 row)
-.sp
-.fi
-The entries shown by \fB\\z\fR are interpreted thus:
-.sp
-.nf
- =xxxx -- privileges granted to PUBLIC
- uname=xxxx -- privileges granted to a user
- group gname=xxxx -- privileges granted to a group
-
- r -- SELECT ("read")
- w -- UPDATE ("write")
- a -- INSERT ("append")
- d -- DELETE
- R -- RULE
- x -- REFERENCES
- t -- TRIGGER
- X -- EXECUTE
- U -- USAGE
- C -- CREATE
- T -- TEMPORARY
- arwdRxt -- ALL PRIVILEGES (for tables)
- * -- grant option for preceding privilege
-
- /yyyy -- user who granted this privilege
-.sp
-.fi
-The above example display would be seen by user miriam after
-creating table mytable and doing
-.sp
-.nf
-GRANT SELECT ON mytable TO PUBLIC;
-GRANT SELECT, UPDATE, INSERT ON mytable TO GROUP todos;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-If the ``Access privileges'' column is empty for a given object,
-it means the object has default privileges (that is, its privileges column
-is null). Default privileges always include all privileges for the owner,
-and may include some privileges for PUBLIC depending on the
-object type, as explained above. The first \fBGRANT\fR or
-\fBREVOKE\fR on an object
-will instantiate the default privileges (producing, for example,
-{=,miriam=arwdRxt}) and then modify them per the specified request.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Grant insert privilege to all users on table films:
-.sp
-.nf
-GRANT INSERT ON films TO PUBLIC;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Grant all privileges to user manuel on view kinds:
-.sp
-.nf
-GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON kinds TO manuel;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-According to the SQL standard, the PRIVILEGES
-key word in ALL PRIVILEGES is required. The
-SQL standard does not support setting the privileges on more than
-one object per command.
-.PP
-The SQL standard allows setting privileges for individual columns
-within a table:
-.sp
-.nf
-GRANT \fIprivileges\fR
- ON \fItable\fR [ ( \fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ] [, ...]
- TO { PUBLIC | \fIusername\fR [, ...] } [ WITH GRANT OPTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-The SQL standard provides for a USAGE privilege
-on other kinds of objects: character sets, collations,
-translations, domains.
-.PP
-The RULE privilege, and privileges on
-databases, schemas, languages, and sequences are
-PostgreSQL extensions.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-REVOKE [\fBrevoke\fR(7)]
diff --git a/raw/man7/hier.7 b/raw/man7/hier.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 36aad2f..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/hier.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,471 +0,0 @@
-.\" (c) 1993 by Thomas Koenig (ig25 at rz.uni-karlsruhe.de)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\" License.
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 11:05:58 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sat Feb 10 16:18:03 1996 by Urs Thuermann (urs at isnogud.escape.de)
-.\" Modified Mon Jun 16 20:02:00 1997 by Nicol?s Lichtmaier <nick at debian.org>
-.\" Modified Mon Feb 6 16:41:00 1999 by Nicol?s Lichtmaier <nick at debian.org>
-.\" Modified Tue Feb 8 16:46:45 2000 by Chris Pepper <pepper at tgg.com>
-.\" Modified Fri Sep 7 20:32:45 2001 by Tammy Fox <tfox at redhat.com>
-.TH HIER 7 2001-09-07 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-hier \- Description of the file system hierarchy
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-A typical Linux system has, among others, the following directories:
-.TP
-.I /
-This is the root directory. This is where the whole tree starts.
-.TP
-.I /bin
-This directory contains executable programs which are needed in
-single user mode and to bring the system up or repair it.
-.TP
-.I /boot
-Contains static files for the boot loader. This directory only holds
-the files which are needed during the boot process. The map installer
-and configuration files should go to
-.I /sbin
-and
-.IR /etc .
-.TP
-.I /dev
-Special or device files, which refer to physical devices. See
-mknod(1).
-.TP
-.I /dos
-If both MS\-DOS and Linux are run on one computer, this is a typical
-place to mount a DOS file system.
-.TP
-.I /etc
-Contains configuration files which are local to the machine. Some
-larger software packages, like X11, can have their own subdirectories
-below
-.IR /etc .
-Site-wide configuration files may be placed here or in
-.IR /usr/etc .
-Nevertheless, programs should always look for these files in
-.I /etc
-and you may have links for these files to
-.IR /usr/etc .
-.TP
-.I /etc/opt
-Host-specific configuration files for add-on applications installed
-in
-.IR /opt .
-.TP
-.I /etc/sgml
-This directory contains the configuration files for SGML and XML (optional).
-.TP
-.I /etc/skel
-When a new user account is created, files from this directory are
-usually copied into the user's home directory.
-.TP
-.I /etc/X11
-Configuration files for the X11 window system (optional).
-.TP
-.I /home
-On machines with home directories for users, these are usually beneath
-this directory, directly or not. The structure of this directory
-depends on local administration decisions.
-.TP
-.I /lib
-This directory should hold those shared libraries that are necessary
-to boot the system and to run the commands in the root filesystem.
-.TP
-.I /mnt
-This directory contains mount points for temporarily mounted filesystems
-.TP
-.I /opt
-This directory should contain add-on packages that contain static files.
-.TP
-.I /proc
-This is a mount point for the
-.I proc
-filesystem, which provides information about running processes and
-the kernel. This pseudo-file system is described in more detail in
-.BR proc (5).
-.TP
-.I /root
-This directory is usually the home directory for the root user (optional).
-.TP
-.I /sbin
-Like
-.IR /bin ,
-this directory holds commands needed to boot the system, but which are
-usually not executed by normal users.
-.TP
-.I /tmp
-This directory contains temporary files which may be deleted with no
-notice, such as by a regular job or at system boot up.
-.TP
-.I /usr
-This directory is usually mounted from a separate partition. It
-should hold only sharable, read-only data, so that it can be mounted
-by various machines running Linux.
-.TP
-.I /usr/X11R6
-The X\-Window system, version 11 release 6 (optional).
-.TP
-.I /usr/X11R6/bin
-Binaries which belong to the X\-Windows system; often, there is a
-symbolic link from the more traditional
-.I /usr/bin/X11
-to here.
-.TP
-.I /usr/X11R6/lib
-Data files associated with the X\-Windows system.
-.TP
-.I /usr/X11R6/lib/X11
-These contain miscellaneous files needed to run X; Often, there is a
-symbolic link from
-.I /usr/lib/X11
-to this directory.
-.TP
-.I /usr/X11R6/include/X11
-Contains include files needed for compiling programs using the X11
-window system. Often, there is a symbolic link from
-.I /usr/include/X11
-to this directory.
-.TP
-.I /usr/bin
-This is the primary directory for executable programs. Most programs
-executed by normal users which are not needed for booting or for
-repairing the system and which are not installed locally should be
-placed in this directory.
-.TP
-.I /usr/bin/X11
-is the traditional place to look for X11 executables; on Linux, it
-usually is a symbolic link to
-.IR /usr/X11R6/bin .
-.TP
-.I /usr/dict
-Replaced by
-.IR /usr/share/dict .
-.TP
-.I /usr/doc
-Replaced by
-.IR /usr/share/doc .
-.TP
-.I /usr/etc
-Site-wide configuration files to be shared between several machines
-may be stored in this directory. However, commands should always
-reference those files using the
-.I /etc
-directory. Links from files in
-.I /etc
-should point to the appropriate files in
-.IR /usr/etc .
-.TP
-.I /usr/games
-Binaries for games and educational programs (optional).
-.TP
-.I /usr/include
-Include files for the C compiler.
-.TP
-.I /usr/include/X11
-Include files for the C compiler and the X\-Windows system. This is
-usually a symbolic link to
-.I /usr/X11R6/include/X11.
-.TP
-.I /usr/include/asm
-Include files which declare some assembler functions. This used to be a
-symbolic link to
-.IR /usr/src/linux/include/asm .
-.TP
-.I /usr/include/linux
-This contains information which may change from system release to
-system release and used to be a symbolic link to
-.I /usr/src/linux/include/linux
-to get at operating system specific information.
-
-(Note that one should have include files there that work correctly with
-the current libc and in user space. However, Linux kernel source is not
-designed to be used with user programs and does not know anything
-about the libc you are using. It is very likely that things will break
-if you let
-.I /usr/include/asm
-and
-.I /usr/include/linux
-point at a random kernel tree. Debian systems don't do this
-and use headers from a known good kernel
-version, provided in the libc*-dev package.)
-.TP
-.I /usr/include/g++
-Include files to use with the GNU C++ compiler.
-.TP
-.I /usr/lib
-Object libraries, including dynamic libraries, plus some executables
-which usually are not invoked directly. More complicated programs may
-have whole subdirectories there.
-.TP
-.I /usr/lib/X11
-The usual place for data files associated with X programs, and
-configuration files for the X system itself. On Linux, it usually is
-a symbolic link to
-.IR /usr/X11R6/lib/X11 .
-.TP
-.I /usr/lib/gcc-lib
-contains executables and include files for the GNU C compiler,
-.BR gcc (1).
-.TP
-.I /usr/lib/groff
-Files for the GNU groff document formatting system.
-.TP
-.I /usr/lib/uucp
-Files for
-.BR uucp (1).
-.TP
-.I /usr/local
-This is where programs which are local to the site typically go.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/bin
-Binaries for programs local to the site.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/doc
-Local documentation.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/etc
-Configuration files associated with locally installed programs.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/games
-Binaries for locally installed games.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/lib
-Files associated with locally installed programs.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/include
-Header files for the local C compiler.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/info
-Info pages associated with locally installed programs.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/man
-Man pages associated with locally installed programs.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/sbin
-Locally installed programs for system administration.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/share
-Local application data that can be shared among different architectures
-of the same OS.
-.TP
-.I /usr/local/src
-Source code for locally installed software.
-.TP
-.I /usr/man
-Replaced by
-.IR /usr/share/man .
-.TP
-.I /usr/sbin
-This directory contains program binaries for system administration
-which are not essential for the boot process, for mounting
-.IR /usr ,
-or for system repair.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share
-This directory contains subdirectories with specific application data, that
-can be shared among different architectures of the same OS.
-Often one finds stuff here that used to live in
-.I /usr/doc
-or
-.I /usr/lib
-or
-.IR /usr/man .
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/dict
-Contains the word lists used by spell checkers.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/doc
-Documentation about installed programs.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/games
-Static data files for games in
-.IR /usr/games .
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/info
-Info pages go here.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/locale
-Locale information goes here.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/man
-Manpages go here in subdirectories according to the man page sections.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/man/<locale>/man[1-9]
-These directories contain manual pages for the specific locale in source code
-form. Systems which use a unique language and code set for all manual pages
-may omit the <locale> substring.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/misc
-Miscellaneous data that can be shared among different architectures of the
-same OS.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/nls
-The message catalogs for native language support go here.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/sgml
-Files for SGML and XML.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/terminfo
-The datebase for terminfo.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/tmac
-Troff macros that are not distributed with groff.
-.TP
-.I /usr/share/zoneinfo
-Files for timezone information.
-.TP
-.I /usr/src
-Source files for different parts of the system, included with some packages
-for reference purposes. Don't work here with your own projects, as files
-below /usr should be read-only except when installing software.
-.TP
-.I /usr/src/linux
-This was the traditional place for the kernel source.
-Some distributions put here the source for the default kernel they ship.
-You should probably use another directory when building your own kernel.
-.TP
-.I /usr/tmp
-Obsolete. This should be a link
-to
-.IR /var/tmp .
-This link is present only for compatibility reasons and shouldn't be used.
-.TP
-.I /var
-This directory contains files which may change in size, such as spool
-and log files.
-.TP
-.I /var/adm
-This directory is superseded by
-.I /var/log
-and should be a symbolic link to
-.IR /var/log .
-.TP
-.I /var/backups
-Reserved for historical reasons.
-.TP
-.I /var/cache
-Data cached for programs.
-.TP
-.IR /var/catman/cat[1-9] " or " /var/cache/man/cat[1-9]
-These directories contain preformatted manual pages according to their
-man page section. (The use of preformatted manual pages is deprecated.)
-.TP
-.I /var/cron
-Reserved for historical reasons.
-.TP
-.I /var/lib
-Variable state information for programs.
-.TP
-.I /var/local
-Variable data for
-.IR /usr/local .
-.TP
-.I /var/lock
-Lock files are placed in this directory. The naming convention for
-device lock files is
-.I LCK..<device>
-where
-.I <device>
-is the device's name in the filesystem.
-The format used is that of HDU UUCP lock files, i.e. lock files
-contain a PID as a 10-byte ASCII decimal number, followed by a newline
-character.
-.TP
-.I /var/log
-Miscellaneous log files.
-.TP
-.I /var/opt
-Variable data for
-.IR /opt .
-.TP
-.I /var/mail
-Users' mailboxes. Replaces
-.IR /var/spool/mail .
-.TP
-.I /var/msgs
-Reserved for historical reasons.
-.TP
-.I /var/preserve
-Reserved for historical reasons.
-.TP
-.I /var/run
-Run-time variable files, like files holding process identifiers (PIDs)
-and logged user information
-.IR (utmp) .
-Files in this directory are usually cleared when the system boots.
-.TP
-.I /var/spool
-Spooled (or queued) files for various programs.
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/at
-Spooled jobs for
-.BR at (1).
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/cron
-Spooled jobs for
-.BR cron (1).
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/lpd
-Spooled files for printing.
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/mail
-Replaced by
-.IR /var/mail .
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/mqueue
-Queued outgoing mail.
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/news
-Spool directory for news.
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/rwho
-Spooled files for
-.BR rwhod (8).
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/smail
-Spooled files for the
-.BR smail (1)
-mail delivery program.
-.TP
-.I /var/spool/uucp
-Spooled files for
-.BR uucp (1).
-.TP
-.I /var/tmp
-Like
-.IR /tmp ,
-this directory holds temporary files stored for an unspecified duration.
-.TP
-.I /var/yp
-Database files for NIS.
-.SH "CONFORMS TO"
-The Filesystem Hierarchy Standard, Version 2.2 <http://www.pathname.com/fhs/>
-.SH BUGS
-This list is not exhaustive; different systems may be configured
-differently.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR find (1),
-.BR ln (1),
-.BR mount (1),
-.BR proc (5),
-The Filesystem Hierarchy Standard
diff --git a/raw/man7/icmp.7 b/raw/man7/icmp.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 4092d0e..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/icmp.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.TH ICMP 7 1999-04-27 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-icmp, IPPROTO_ICMP \- Linux IPv4 ICMP kernel module.
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This kernel protocol module implements the Internet Control Message Protocol
-defined in RFC792. It is used to signal error conditions and for diagnosis.
-The user doesn't interact directly with this module; instead it communicates
-with the other protocols in the kernel and these pass the ICMP
-errors to the application layers. The kernel ICMP module also
-answers ICMP requests.
-.PP
-A user protocol may receive ICMP packets for all local sockets by opening
-a raw socket with the protocol
-.BR IPPROTO_ICMP .
-See
-.BR raw (7)
-for more information.
-The types of ICMP packets passed to the socket can be filtered using the
-.B ICMP_FILTER
-socket option. ICMP packets are always processed by the kernel too, even
-when passed to a user socket.
-.LP
-Linux limits the rate of ICMP error packets to each destination.
-.B ICMP_REDIRECT
-and
-.B ICMP_DEST_UNREACH
-are also limited by the destination route of the incoming packets.
-.SH SYSCTLS
-ICMP supports a sysctl interface to configure some global IP parameters.
-The sysctls can be accessed by reading or writing the
-.B /proc/sys/net/ipv4/*
-files or with the
-.BR sysctl (2)
-interface. Most of these sysctls are rate limitations for specific ICMP types.
-Linux 2.2 uses a token bucket filter to limit ICMPs.
-.\" XXX better description needed
-The value is the timeout in jiffies until the token bucket filter is cleared
-after a burst. A jiffy is a system dependent unit, usually 10ms on x86 and
-about 1ms on alpha and IA64.
-.TP
-.B icmp_destunreach_rate
-Maximum rate to send ICMP Destination Unreachable packets. This limits the
-rate at which packets are sent to any individual route or destination.
-The limit does not affect sending of
-.B ICMP_FRAG_NEEDED
-packets needed for path MTU discovery.
-.TP
-.B icmp_echo_ignore_all
-If this value is non-zero, Linux will ignore all
-.B ICMP_ECHO
-requests.
-.TP
-.B icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts
-If this value is non-zero, Linux will ignore all
-.B ICMP_ECHO
-packets sent to broadcast addresses.
-.TP
-.B icmp_echoreply_rate
-Maximum rate for sending
-.B ICMP_ECHOREPLY
-packets in response to
-.B ICMP_ECHOREQUEST
-packets.
-.TP
-.B icmp_paramprob_rate
-Maximum rate for sending
-.B ICMP_PARAMETERPROB
-packets.
-These packets are sent when a packet arrives with an invalid IP header.
-.TP
-.B icmp_timeexceed_rate
-Maximum rate for sending
-.B ICMP_TIME_EXCEEDED
-packets. These packets are
-sent to prevent loops when a packet has crossed too many hops.
-.SH NOTES
-As many other implementations don't support
-.B IPPROTO_ICMP
-raw sockets, this feature
-should not be relied on in portable programs.
-.\" not really true ATM
-.\" .PP
-.\" Linux ICMP should be compliant to RFC1122.
-.PP
-.B ICMP_REDIRECT
-packets are not sent when Linux is not acting as a router.
-They are also only accepted from the old gateway defined in the routing table and
-the redirect routes are expired after some time.
-.PP
-The 64-bit timestamp returned by
-.B ICMP_TIMESTAMP
-is in milliseconds since January 1, 1970.
-.PP
-Linux ICMP internally uses a raw socket to send ICMPs. This raw socket
-may appear in
-.BR netstat (8)
-output with a zero inode.
-.PP
-.SH VERSIONS
-Support for the
-.B ICMP_ADDRESS
-request was removed in 2.2.
-.PP
-Support for
-.B ICMP_SOURCE_QUENCH
-was removed in Linux 2.2.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ip (7)
-.PP
-RFC792 for a description of the ICMP protocol.
diff --git a/raw/man7/insert.7 b/raw/man7/insert.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 5674b52..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/insert.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "INSERT" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-INSERT \- create new rows in a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT INTO \fItable\fR [ ( \fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ]
- { DEFAULT VALUES | VALUES ( { \fIexpression\fR | DEFAULT } [, ...] ) | \fIquery\fR }
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBINSERT\fR allows one to insert new rows into a
-table. One can insert
-a single row at a time or several rows as a result of a query.
-.PP
-The columns in the target list may be listed in any order.
-Each column not present in the target list will be inserted
-using a default value, either its declared default value
-or null.
-.PP
-If the expression for each column is not of the correct data type,
-automatic type conversion will be attempted.
-.PP
-You must have INSERT privilege to a table in
-order to insert into it. If you use the \fIquery\fR clause to insert rows from a
-query, you also need to have SELECT privilege on
-any table used in the query.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-The name of a column in \fItable\fR.
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT VALUES\fR
-All columns will be filled with their default values.
-.TP
-\fB\fIexpression\fB\fR
-An expression or value to assign to \fIcolumn\fR.
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT\fR
-This column will be filled with its default value.
-.TP
-\fB\fIquery\fB\fR
-A query (\fBSELECT\fR statement) that supplies the
-rows to be inserted. Refer to the \fBSELECT\fR
-statement for a description of the syntax.
-.SH "OUTPUTS"
-.PP
-On successful completion, an \fBINSERT\fR command returns a command
-tag of the form
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT \fIoid\fR \fIcount\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-The \fIcount\fR is the number
-of rows inserted. If \fIcount\fR
-is exactly one, and the target table has OIDs, then
-\fIoid\fR is the
-OID assigned to the inserted row. Otherwise
-\fIoid\fR is zero.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Insert a single row into table films:
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT INTO films VALUES
- ('UA502', 'Bananas', 105, '1971-07-13', 'Comedy', '82 minutes');
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-In this second example, the last column len is
-omitted and therefore it will have the default value of null:
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT INTO films (code, title, did, date_prod, kind)
- VALUES ('T_601', 'Yojimbo', 106, '1961-06-16', 'Drama');
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-The third example uses the DEFAULT clause for
-the date columns rather than specifying a value:
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT INTO films VALUES
- ('UA502', 'Bananas', 105, DEFAULT, 'Comedy', '82 minutes');
-INSERT INTO films (code, title, did, date_prod, kind)
- VALUES ('T_601', 'Yojimbo', 106, DEFAULT, 'Drama');
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-This examples inserts several rows into table
-films from table tmp:
-.sp
-.nf
-INSERT INTO films SELECT * FROM tmp;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-This example inserts into array columns:
-.sp
-.nf
--- Create an empty 3x3 gameboard for noughts-and-crosses
--- (all of these commands create the same board)
-INSERT INTO tictactoe (game, board[1:3][1:3])
- VALUES (1,'{{"","",""},{},{"",""}}');
-INSERT INTO tictactoe (game, board[3][3])
- VALUES (2,'{}');
-INSERT INTO tictactoe (game, board)
- VALUES (3,'{{,,},{,,},{,,}}');
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBINSERT\fR conforms fully to the SQL standard.
-Possible limitations of the \fIquery\fR clause are documented under
-SELECT [\fBselect\fR(7)].
diff --git a/raw/man7/ip.7 b/raw/man7/ip.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b66c3f2..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/ip.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,918 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Don't change the line above. it tells man that tbl is needed.
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" $Id: ip.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.TH IP 7 2001-06-19 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-ip \- Linux IPv4 protocol implementation
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.\" .B #include <net/netinet.h> -- does not exist anymore
-.\" .B #include <linux/errqueue.h> -- never include <linux/foo.h>
-.B #include <netinet/in.h>
-.sp
-.IB tcp_socket " = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);"
-.br
-.IB raw_socket " = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_RAW, " protocol ");"
-.br
-.IB udp_socket " = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, " protocol ");"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Linux implements the Internet Protocol, version 4,
-described in RFC791 and RFC1122.
-.B ip
-contains a level 2
-multicasting implementation conforming to RFC1112. It also contains an IP
-router including a packet filter.
-.\" XXX: has someone verified that 2.1 is really 1812 compliant?
-.PP
-The programmer's interface is BSD sockets compatible.
-For more information on sockets, see
-.BR socket (7).
-.PP
-An IP socket is created by calling the
-.BR socket (2)
-function as
-.BR "socket(PF_INET, socket_type, protocol)" .
-Valid socket types are
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-to open a
-.BR tcp (7)
-socket,
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-to open a
-.BR udp (7)
-socket, or
-.B SOCK_RAW
-to open a
-.BR raw (7)
-socket to access the IP protocol directly.
-.I protocol
-is the IP protocol in the IP header to be received or sent. The only valid
-values for
-.I protocol
-are
-.B 0
-and
-.B IPPROTO_TCP
-for TCP sockets and
-.B 0
-and
-.B IPPROTO_UDP
-for UDP sockets. For
-.B SOCK_RAW
-you may specify
-a valid IANA IP protocol defined in
-RFC1700
-assigned numbers.
-.PP
-.\" XXX ip current does an autobind in listen, but I'm not sure if that should
-.\" be documented.
-When a process wants to receive new incoming packets or connections, it
-should bind a socket to a local interface address using
-.BR bind (2).
-Only one IP socket may be bound to any given local (address, port) pair.
-When
-.B INADDR_ANY
-is specified in the bind call the socket will be bound to
-.I all
-local interfaces. When
-.BR listen (2)
-or
-.BR connect (2)
-are called on a unbound socket the socket is automatically bound to a
-random free port with the local address set to
-.BR INADDR_ANY .
-
-A TCP local socket address that has been bound is unavailable for some time after closing,
-unless the
-.B SO_REUSEADDR
-flag has been set. Care should be taken when using this flag as it
-makes TCP less reliable.
-
-.SH "ADDRESS FORMAT"
-An IP socket address is defined as a combination of an IP interface address
-and a port number. The basic IP protocol does not supply port numbers, they
-are implemented by higher level protocols like
-.BR udp (7)
-and
-.BR tcp (7).
-On raw sockets
-.B sin_port
-is set to the IP protocol.
-
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 19n 31n
-struct sockaddr_in {
- sa_family_t sin_family; /* address family: AF_INET */
- u_int16_t sin_port; /* port in network byte order */
- struct in_addr sin_addr; /* internet address */
-};
-
-/* Internet address. */
-struct in_addr {
- u_int32_t s_addr; /* address in network byte order */
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-.I sin_family
-is always set to
-.BR AF_INET .
-This is required; in Linux 2.2 most networking functions return
-.B EINVAL
-when this setting is missing.
-.I sin_port
-contains the port in network byte order. The port numbers below 1024 are called
-.IR "reserved ports" .
-Only processes with effective user id 0 or the
-.B CAP_NET_BIND_SERVICE
-capability may
-.BR bind (2)
-to these sockets. Note that the raw IPv4 protocol as such has no concept of a
-port, they are only implemented by higher protocols like
-.BR tcp (7)
-and
-.BR udp (7).
-.PP
-.I sin_addr
-is the IP host address.
-The
-.I addr
-member of
-.B struct in_addr
-contains the host interface address in network order.
-.B in_addr
-should be only accessed using the
-.BR inet_aton (3),
-.BR inet_addr (3),
-.BR inet_makeaddr (3)
-library functions or directly with the name resolver (see
-.BR gethostbyname (3)).
-IPv4 addresses are divided into unicast, broadcast
-and multicast addresses. Unicast addresses specify a single interface of a host,
-broadcast addresses specify all hosts on a network and multicast addresses
-address all hosts in a multicast group. Datagrams to broadcast addresses
-can be only sent or received when the
-.B SO_BROADCAST
-socket flag is set.
-In the current implementation connection oriented sockets are only allowed
-to use unicast addresses.
-.\" Leave a loophole for XTP @)
-
-Note that the address and the port are always stored in network order.
-In particular, this means that you need to call
-.BR htons (3)
-on the number that is assigned to a port. All address/port manipulation
-functions in the standard library work in network order.
-
-There are several special addresses:
-.B INADDR_LOOPBACK
-(127.0.0.1)
-always refers to the local host via the loopback device;
-.B INADDR_ANY
-(0.0.0.0)
-means any address for binding;
-.B INADDR_BROADCAST
-(255.255.255.255)
-means any host and has the same effect on bind as
-.B INADDR_ANY
-for historical reasons.
-
-.SH "SOCKET OPTIONS"
-
-IP supports some protocol specific socket options that can be set with
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-and read with
-.BR getsockopt (2).
-The socket option level for IP is
-.BR SOL_IP .
-A boolean integer flag is zero when it is false, otherwise true.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_OPTIONS
-Sets or get the IP options to be sent with every packet from this
-socket. The arguments are a pointer to a memory buffer containing the options
-and the option length.
-The
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-call sets the IP options associated with a socket.
-The maximum option size for IPv4 is 40 bytes. See RFC791 for the allowed
-options. When the initial connection request packet for a
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-socket contains IP options, the IP options will be set automatically
-to the options from the initial packet with routing headers reversed.
-Incoming packets are not allowed to change options after the connection
-is established.
-The processing of all incoming source routing options
-is disabled by default and can be enabled by using the
-.B accept_source_route
-sysctl. Other options like timestamps are still handled.
-For datagram sockets, IP options can be only set by the local user.
-Calling
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-with
-.I IP_OPTIONS
-puts the current IP options used for sending into the supplied buffer.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_PKTINFO
-Pass an
-.I IP_PKTINFO
-ancillary message that contains a
-.B pktinfo
-structure that supplies some information about the incoming packet.
-This only works for datagram oriented sockets.
-The argument is a flag that tells the socket whether the IP_PKTINFO message
-should be passed or not. The message itself can only be sent/retrieved
-as control message with a packet using
-.BR recvmsg (2)
-or
-.BR sendmsg (2).
-
-.IP
-.RS
-.ta 4n 19n 33n
-.nf
-struct in_pktinfo {
- unsigned int ipi_ifindex; /* Interface index */
- struct in_addr ipi_spec_dst; /* Local address */
- struct in_addr ipi_addr; /* Header Destination address */
-};
-.fi
-.RE
-.IP
-.\" XXX elaborate on that.
-.B ipi_ifindex
-is the unique index of the interface the packet was received on.
-.B ipi_spec_dst
-is the local address of the packet and
-.B ipi_addr
-is the destination address in the packet header.
-If
-.I IP_PKTINFO
-is passed to
-.BR sendmsg (2)
-and
-.\" This field is grossly misnamed
-.B ipi_spec_dst
-is not zero, then it is used as the local source address for the routing
-table lookup and for setting up IP source route options.
-When
-.B ipi_ifindex
-is not zero the primary local address of the interface specified by the
-index overwrites
-.I ipi_spec_dst
-for the routing table lookup.
-.TP
-.B IP_RECVTOS
-If enabled the
-.I IP_TOS
-ancillary message is passed with incoming packets. It contains a byte which
-specifies the Type of Service/Precedence field of the packet header.
-Expects a boolean integer flag.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_RECVTTL
-When this flag is set
-pass a
-.I IP_RECVTTL
-control message with the time to live
-field of the received packet as a byte. Not supported for
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-sockets.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_RECVOPTS
-Pass all incoming IP options to the user in a
-.I IP_OPTIONS
-control message. The routing header and other options are already filled in
-for the local host. Not supported for
-.I SOCK_STREAM
-sockets.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_RETOPTS
-Identical to
-.I IP_RECVOPTS
-but returns raw unprocessed options with timestamp and route record
-options not filled in for this hop.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_TOS
-Set or receive the Type-Of-Service (TOS) field that is sent with every IP packet
-originating from this socket. It is used to prioritize packets on the network.
-TOS is a byte. There are some standard TOS flags defined:
-.B IPTOS_LOWDELAY
-to minimize delays for interactive traffic,
-.B IPTOS_THROUGHPUT
-to optimize throughput,
-.B IPTOS_RELIABILITY
-to optimize for reliability,
-.B IPTOS_MINCOST
-should be used for "filler data" where slow transmission doesn't matter.
-At most one of these TOS values can be specified. Other bits are invalid and
-shall be cleared.
-Linux sends
-.B IPTOS_LOWDELAY
-datagrams first by default,
-but the exact behaviour depends on the configured queueing discipline.
-.\" XXX elaborate on this
-Some high priority levels may require an effective user id of 0 or the
-.B CAP_NET_ADMIN
-capability.
-The priority can also be set in a protocol independent way by the
-.RB ( SOL_SOCKET ", " SO_PRIORITY )
-socket option (see
-.BR socket (7)).
-
-.TP
-.B IP_TTL
-Set or retrieve the current time to live field that is send in every packet
-send from this socket.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_HDRINCL
-If enabled
-the user supplies an ip header in front of the user data. Only valid
-for
-.B SOCK_RAW
-sockets. See
-.BR raw (7)
-for more information. When this flag is enabled the values set by
-.IR IP_OPTIONS ,
-.I IP_TTL
-and
-.I IP_TOS
-are ignored.
-
-.TP
-.BR IP_RECVERR " (defined in <linux/errqueue.h>)"
-Enable extended reliable error message passing.
-When enabled on a datagram socket all
-generated errors will be queued in a per-socket error queue. When the user
-receives an error from a socket operation the errors can
-be received by calling
-.BR recvmsg (2)
-with the
-.B MSG_ERRQUEUE
-flag set. The
-.B sock_extended_err
-structure describing the error will be passed in a ancillary message with
-the type
-.I IP_RECVERR
-and the level
-.BR SOL_IP .
-This is useful for reliable error handling on unconnected sockets.
-The received data portion of the error queue
-contains the error packet.
-.IP
-The
-.I IP_RECVERR
-control message contains a
-.B sock_extended_err
-structure:
-.IP
-.RS
-.ne 18
-.nf
-.ta 4n 20n 32n
-#define SO_EE_ORIGIN_NONE 0
-#define SO_EE_ORIGIN_LOCAL 1
-#define SO_EE_ORIGIN_ICMP 2
-#define SO_EE_ORIGIN_ICMP6 3
-
-struct sock_extended_err {
- u_int32_t ee_errno; /* error number */
- u_int8_t ee_origin; /* where the error originated */
- u_int8_t ee_type; /* type */
- u_int8_t ee_code; /* code */
- u_int8_t ee_pad;
- u_int32_t ee_info; /* additional information */
- u_int32_t ee_data; /* other data */
- /* More data may follow */
-};
-
-struct sockaddr *SO_EE_OFFENDER(struct sock_extended_err *);
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-.IP
-.B ee_errno
-contains the errno number of the queued error.
-.B ee_origin
-is the origin code of where the error originated.
-The other fields are protocol specific. The macro
-.B SO_EE_OFFENDER
-returns a pointer to the address of the network object
-where the error originated from given a pointer to the ancillary message.
-If this address is not known, the
-.I sa_family
-member of the
-.B sockaddr
-contains
-.B AF_UNSPEC
-and the other fields of the
-.B sockaddr
-are undefined.
-.IP
-IP uses the
-.B sock_extended_err
-structure as follows:
-.I ee_origin
-is set to
-.B SO_EE_ORIGIN_ICMP
-for errors received as an ICMP packet, or
-.B SO_EE_ORIGIN_LOCAL
-for locally generated errors. Unknown values should be ignored.
-.I ee_type
-and
-.I ee_code
-are set from the type and code fields of the ICMP header.
-.I ee_info
-contains the discovered MTU for
-.B EMSGSIZE
-errors. The message also contains the
-.I sockaddr_in of the node
-caused the error, which can be accessed with the
-.B SO_EE_OFFENDER
-macro. The
-.I sin_family
-field of the SO_EE_OFFENDER address is
-.I AF_UNSPEC
-when the source was unknown.
-When the error originated from the network, all IP options
-.RI ( IP_OPTIONS ", " IP_TTL ", "
-etc.) enabled on the socket and contained in the
-error packet are passed as control messages. The payload of the packet
-causing the error is returned as normal payload.
-.\" XXX: is it a good idea to document that? It is a dubious feature.
-.\" On
-.\" .B SOCK_STREAM
-.\" sockets,
-.\" .I IP_RECVERR
-.\" has slightly different semantics. Instead of
-.\" saving the errors for the next timeout, it passes all incoming errors
-.\" immediately to the
-.\" user. This might be useful for very short-lived TCP connections which
-.\" need fast error handling. Use this option with care: it makes TCP unreliable
-.\" by not allowing it to recover properly from routing shifts and other normal
-.\" conditions and breaks the protocol specification.
-Note that TCP has no error queue;
-.B MSG_ERRQUEUE
-is illegal on
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-sockets.
-Thus all errors are returned by socket function return or
-.B SO_ERROR
-only.
-.IP
-For raw sockets,
-.I IP_RECVERR
-enables passing of all received ICMP errors to the
-application, otherwise errors are only reported on connected sockets
-.IP
-It sets or retrieves an integer boolean flag.
-.I IP_RECVERR
-defaults to off.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_MTU_DISCOVER
-Sets or receives the Path MTU Discovery setting
-for a socket. When enabled, Linux will perform Path MTU Discovery
-as defined in RFC1191
-on this socket. The don't fragment flag is set on all outgoing datagrams.
-The system-wide default is controlled by the
-.B ip_no_pmtu_disc
-sysctl for
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-sockets, and disabled on all others. For non
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-sockets it is the user's responsibility to packetize the data
-in MTU sized chunks and to do the retransmits if necessary.
-The kernel will reject packets that are bigger than the known
-path MTU if this flag is set (with
-.B EMSGSIZE
-).
-
-.TS
-tab(:);
-c l
-l l.
-Path MTU discovery flags:Meaning
-IP_PMTUDISC_WANT:Use per-route settings.
-IP_PMTUDISC_DONT:Never do Path MTU Discovery.
-IP_PMTUDISC_DO:Always do Path MTU Discovery.
-.TE
-
-
-When PMTU discovery is enabled the kernel automatically keeps track of
-the path MTU per destination host.
-When it is connected to a specific peer with
-.BR connect (2)
-the currently known path MTU can be retrieved conveniently using the
-.B IP_MTU
-socket option (e.g. after a
-.B EMSGSIZE
-error occurred). It may change over time.
-For connectionless sockets with many destinations
-the new also MTU for a given destination can also be accessed using the
-error queue (see
-.BR IP_RECVERR ).
-A new error will be queued for every incoming MTU update.
-
-While MTU discovery is in progress initial packets from datagram sockets
-may be dropped. Applications using UDP should be aware of this and not
-take it into account for their packet retransmit strategy.
-
-To bootstrap the path MTU discovery process on unconnected sockets it
-is possible to start with a big datagram size
-(up to 64K-headers bytes long) and let it shrink by updates of the path MTU.
-.\" XXX this is an ugly hack
-
-To get an initial estimate of the
-path MTU connect a datagram socket to the destination address using
-.BR connect (2)
-and retrieve the MTU by calling
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-with the
-.B IP_MTU
-option.
-
-.TP
-.B IP_MTU
-Retrieve the current known path MTU of the current socket.
-Only valid when the socket has been connected. Returns an integer. Only valid
-as a
-.BR getsockopt (2).
-.\"
-.TP
-.B IP_ROUTER_ALERT
-Pass all to-be forwarded packets with the
-IP Router Alert
-option
-set to this socket. Only valid for raw sockets. This is useful, for instance, for user
-space RSVP daemons. The tapped packets are not forwarded by the kernel, it is
-the users responsibility to send them out again. Socket binding is ignored,
-such packets are only filtered by protocol.
-Expects an integer flag.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B IP_MULTICAST_TTL
-Set or reads the time-to-live value of outgoing multicast packets for this
-socket. It is
-very important for multicast packets to set the smallest TTL possible.
-The default is 1 which means that multicast packets don't leave the local
-network unless the user program explicitly requests it. Argument is an
-integer.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B IP_MULTICAST_LOOP
-Sets or reads a boolean integer argument whether sent multicast packets should be
-looped back to the local sockets.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP
-Join a multicast group. Argument is a
-.B struct ip_mreqn
-structure.
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 19n 34n
-struct ip_mreqn {
- struct in_addr imr_multiaddr; /* IP multicast group address */
- struct in_addr imr_address; /* IP address of local interface */
- int imr_ifindex; /* interface index */
-};
-.fi
-.RE
-.IP
-.I imr_multiaddr
-contains the address of the multicast group the application wants to join or leave.
-It must be a valid multicast address.
-.I imr_address
-is the address of the local interface with which the system should join the multicast
-group; if it is equal to
-.B INADDR_ANY
-an appropriate interface is chosen by the system.
-.I imr_ifindex
-is the interface index of the interface that should join/leave the
-.I imr_multiaddr
-group, or 0 to indicate any interface.
-.IP
-For compatibility, the old
-.B ip_mreq
-structure is still supported. It differs from
-.B ip_mreqn
-only by not including
-the
-.I imr_ifindex
-field. Only valid as a
-.BR setsockopt (2).
-.\"
-.TP
-.B IP_DROP_MEMBERSHIP
-Leave a multicast group. Argument is an
-.B ip_mreqn
-or
-.B ip_mreq
-structure similar to
-.IR IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP .
-.\"
-.TP
-.B IP_MULTICAST_IF
-Set the local device for a multicast socket. Argument is an
-.B ip_mreqn
-or
-.B ip_mreq
-structure similar to
-.IR IP_ADD_MEMBERSHIP .
-.IP
-When an invalid socket option is passed,
-.B ENOPROTOOPT
-is returned.
-.SH SYSCTLS
-The IP protocol
-supports the sysctl interface to configure some global options. The sysctls
-can be accessed by reading or writing the
-.B /proc/sys/net/ipv4/*
-files or using the
-.BR sysctl (2)
-interface.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B ip_default_ttl
-Set the default time-to-live value of outgoing packets. This can be changed
-per socket with the
-.I IP_TTL
-option.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B ip_forward
-Enable IP forwarding with a boolean flag. IP forwarding can be also set on a
-per interface basis.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B ip_dynaddr
-Enable dynamic socket address and masquerading entry rewriting on interface
-address change. This is useful for dialup interface with changing IP addresses.
-0 means no rewriting, 1 turns it on and 2 enables verbose mode.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B ip_autoconfig
-Not documented.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B ip_local_port_range
-Contains two integers that define the default local port range allocated to
-sockets. Allocation starts with the first number and ends with the second number.
-Note that these should not conflict with the ports used by masquerading (although
-the case is handled). Also arbitary choices may cause problems with some
-firewall packet filters that make assumptions about the local ports in use.
-First number should be at least >1024, better >4096 to avoid clashes with well
-known ports and to minimize firewall problems.
-.\"
-.TP
-.B ip_no_pmtu_disc
-If enabled, don't do Path MTU Discovery for TCP sockets by default. Path MTU
-discovery may fail if misconfigured firewalls (that drop all ICMP packets) or
-misconfigured interfaces (e.g., a point-to-point link where the both ends don't
-agree on the MTU) are on the path. It is better to fix the broken routers on
-the path than to turn off Path MTU Discovery globally, because not doing it
-incurs a high cost to the network.
-.\"
-.TP
-.BR ipfrag_high_thresh ", " ipfrag_low_thresh
-If the amount of queued IP fragments reaches
-.BR ipfrag_high_thresh ,
-the queue
-is pruned down to
-.BR ipfrag_low_thresh .
-Contains an integer with the number of
-bytes.
-.TP
-.B ip_always_defrag
-[New with Kernel 2.2.13; in earlier kernel version the feature was controlled
-at compile time by the
-.B CONFIG_IP_ALWAYS_DEFRAG
-option]
-
-When this boolean frag is enabled (not equal 0) incoming fragments
-(parts of IP packets
-that arose when some host between origin and destination decided
-that the packets were too large and cut them into pieces) will be
-reassembled (defragmented) before being processed, even if they are
-about to be forwarded.
-
-Only enable if running either a firewall that is the sole link
-to your network or a transparent proxy; never ever turn on here for a
-normal router or host. Otherwise fragmented communication may me disturbed
-when the fragments would travel over different links. Defragmentation
-also has a large memory and CPU time cost.
-
-This is automagically turned on when masquerading or transparent
-proxying are configured.
-.TP
-.B neigh/*
-See
-.BR arp (7).
-.\" XXX Document the conf/*/* sysctls
-.\" XXX Document the route/* sysctls
-.\" XXX document them all
-.SH IOCTLS
-All ioctls described in
-.BR socket (7)
-apply to ip.
-.PP
-The ioctls to configure firewalling are documented in
-.BR ipfw (7)
-from the
-.B ipchains
-package.
-.PP
-Ioctls to configure generic device parameters are described in
-.BR netdevice (7).
-.\" XXX Add a chapter about multicasting
-.SH NOTES
-Be very careful with the
-.B SO_BROADCAST
-option \- it is not privileged in Linux. It is easy to overload the network
-with careless broadcasts. For new application protocols
-it is better to use a multicast group instead of broadcasting. Broadcasting
-is discouraged.
-.PP
-Some other BSD sockets implementations provide
-.I IP_RCVDSTADDR
-and
-.I IP_RECVIF
-socket options to get the destination address and the interface of
-received datagrams. Linux has the more general
-.I IP_PKTINFO
-for the same task.
-.PP
-.SH ERRORS
-.\" XXX document all errors. We should really fix the kernels to give more uniform
-.\" error returns (ENOMEM vs ENOBUFS, EPERM vs EACCES etc.)
-.TP
-.B ENOTCONN
-The operation is only defined on a connected socket, but the socket wasn't
-connected.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Invalid argument passed.
-For send operations this can be caused by sending to a
-.I blackhole
-route.
-.TP
-.B EMSGSIZE
-Datagram is bigger than an MTU on the path and it cannot be fragmented.
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-The user tried to execute an operation without the necessary permissions.
-These include:
-Sending a packet to a broadcast address without having the
-.B SO_BROADCAST
-flag set.
-Sending a packet via a
-.I prohibit
-route.
-Modifying firewall settings without
-.B CAP_NET_ADMIN
-or effective user id 0.
-Binding to a reserved port without the
-.B CAP_NET_BIND_SERVICE
-capacibility or effective user id 0.
-
-.TP
-.B EADDRINUSE
-Tried to bind to an address already in use.
-.TP
-.BR ENOPROTOOPT " and " EOPNOTSUPP
-Invalid socket option passed.
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-User doesn't have permission to set high priority, change configuration,
-or send signals to the requested process or group.
-.TP
-.B EADDRNOTAVAIL
-A non-existent interface was requested or the requested source address was
-not local.
-.TP
-.B EAGAIN
-Operation on a non-blocking socket would block.
-.TP
-.B ESOCKTNOSUPPORT
-The socket is not configured or an unknown socket type was requested.
-.TP
-.B EISCONN
-.BR connect (2)
-was called on an already connected socket.
-.TP
-.B EALREADY
-An connection operation on a non-blocking socket is already in progress.
-.TP
-.B ECONNABORTED
-A connection was closed during an
-.BR accept (2).
-.TP
-.B EPIPE
-The connection was unexpectedly closed or shut down by the other end.
-.TP
-.B ENOENT
-.B SIOCGSTAMP
-was called on a socket where no packet arrived.
-.TP
-.B EHOSTUNREACH
-No valid routing table entry matches the destination address. This error
-can be caused by a ICMP message from a remote router or for the local
-routing table.
-.TP
-.B ENODEV
-Network device not available or not capable of sending IP.
-.TP
-.B ENOPKG
-A kernel subsystem was not configured.
-.TP
-.BR ENOBUFS ", " ENOMEM
-Not enough free memory.
-This often means that the memory allocation is limited by the socket buffer
-limits, not by the system memory, but this is not 100% consistent.
-.PP
-Other errors may be generated by the overlaying protocols; see
-.BR tcp (7),
-.BR raw (7),
-.BR udp (7)
-and
-.BR socket (7).
-.SH VERSIONS
-.IR IP_PKTINFO ,
-.IR IP_MTU ,
-.IR IP_MTU_DISCOVER ,
-.IR IP_PKTINFO ,
-.I IP_RECVERR
-and
-.I IP_ROUTER_ALERT
-are new options in Linux 2.2.
-They are also all Linux specific and should not be used in
-programs intended to be portable.
-.PP
-.B struct ip_mreqn
-is new in Linux 2.2. Linux 2.0 only supported
-.BR ip_mreq .
-.PP
-The sysctls were introduced with Linux 2.2.
-.SH COMPATIBILITY
-For compatibility with Linux 2.0, the obsolete
-.BI "socket(PF_INET, SOCK_RAW, " protocol )
-syntax is still supported to open a
-.BR packet (7)
-socket. This is deprecated and should be replaced by
-.BI "socket(PF_PACKET, SOCK_RAW, " protocol )
-instead. The main difference is the
-new
-.B sockaddr_ll
-address structure for generic link layer information instead of the old
-.BR sockaddr_pkt .
-.SH BUGS
-There are too many inconsistent error values.
-.PP
-The ioctls to configure IP-specific interface options and ARP tables are
-not described.
-.PP
-Some versions of glibc forget to declare
-.IR in_pktinfo .
-Workaround currently is to copy it into your program from this man page.
-.PP
-Receiving the original destination address with
-.B MSG_ERRQUEUE
-in
-.I msg_name
-by
-.BR recvmsg (2)
-does not work in some 2.2 kernels.
-.SH AUTHORS
-This man page was written by Andi Kleen.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR sendmsg (2),
-.BR recvmsg (2),
-.BR socket (7),
-.BR netlink (7),
-.BR tcp (7),
-.BR udp (7),
-.BR raw (7),
-.BR ipfw (7)
-.PP
-RFC791 for the original IP specification.
-.br
-RFC1122 for the IPv4 host requirements.
-.br
-RFC1812 for the IPv4 router requirements.
-\" LocalWords: XXX autobind INADDR REUSEADDR
diff --git a/raw/man7/listen.7 b/raw/man7/listen.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f6af63..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/listen.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "LISTEN" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-LISTEN \- listen for a notification
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-LISTEN \fIname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBLISTEN\fR registers the current session as a
-listener on the notification condition \fIname\fR.
-If the current session is already registered as a listener for
-this notification condition, nothing is done.
-.PP
-Whenever the command \fBNOTIFY \fIname\fB\fR is invoked, either
-by this session or another one connected to the same database, all
-the sessions currently listening on that notification condition are
-notified, and each will in turn notify its connected client
-application. See the discussion of \fBNOTIFY\fR for
-more information.
-.PP
-A session can be unregistered for a given notify condition with the
-\fBUNLISTEN\fR command. A session's listen
-registrations are automatically cleared when the session ends.
-.PP
-The method a client application must use to detect notification events depends on
-which PostgreSQL application programming interface it
-uses. With the \fBlibpq\fR library, the application issues
-\fBLISTEN\fR as an ordinary SQL command, and then must
-periodically call the function \fBPQnotifies\fR to find out
-whether any notification events have been received. Other interfaces such as
-\fBlibpgtcl\fR provide higher-level methods for handling notify events; indeed,
-with \fBlibpgtcl\fR the application programmer should not even issue
-\fBLISTEN\fR or \fBUNLISTEN\fR directly. See the
-documentation for the interface you are using for more details.
-.PP
-NOTIFY [\fBnotify\fR(7)]
-contains a more extensive
-discussion of the use of \fBLISTEN\fR and
-\fBNOTIFY\fR.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-Name of a notify condition (any identifier).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Configure and execute a listen/notify sequence from
-\fBpsql\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-LISTEN virtual;
-NOTIFY virtual;
-Asynchronous notification "virtual" received from server process with PID 8448.
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBLISTEN\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-NOTIFY [\fBnotify\fR(7)], UNLISTEN [\fBunlisten\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/load.7 b/raw/man7/load.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e42ff1..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/load.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "LOAD" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-LOAD \- load or reload a shared library file
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-LOAD '\fIfilename\fR'
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-This command loads a shared library file into the PostgreSQL
-server's address space. If the file had been loaded previously,
-it is first unloaded. This command is primarily useful to unload
-and reload a shared library file that has been changed since the
-server first loaded it. To make use of the shared library,
-function(s) in it need to be declared using the CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)]
-command.
-.PP
-The file name is specified in the same way as for shared library
-names in CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)]; in particular, one
-may rely on a search path and automatic addition of the system's standard
-shared library file name extension. See the section called ``User-Defined Functions'' in the documentation for
-more information on this topic.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBLOAD\fR is a PostgreSQL
-extension.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-CREATE FUNCTION [\fBcreate_function\fR(7)]
diff --git a/raw/man7/locale.7 b/raw/man7/locale.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 6ea3ec5..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/locale.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,204 +0,0 @@
-.\" (c) 1993 by Thomas Koenig (ig25 at rz.uni-karlsruhe.de)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 17:28:34 1993 by Rik Faith <faith at cs.unc.edu>
-.\" Modified Sun Jun 01 17:16:34 1997 by Jochen Hein
-.\" <jochen.hein at delphi.central.de>
-.\" Modified Thu Apr 25 00:43:19 2002 by Bruno Haible <bruno at clisp.org>
-.\"
-.TH LOCALE 7 1993-04-24 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-locale \- Description of multi-language support
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <locale.h>
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-A locale is a set of language and cultural rules. These cover aspects
-such as language for messages, different character sets, lexigraphic
-conventions, etc. A program needs to be able to determine its locale
-and act accordingly to be portable to different cultures.
-.PP
-The header
-.B <locale.h>
-declares data types, functions and macros which are useful in this
-task.
-.PP
-The functions it declares are
-.B setlocale()
-to set the current locale, and
-.B localeconv()
-to get information about number formatting.
-.PP
-There are different categories for local information a program might
-need; they are declared as macros. Using them as the first argument
-to the
-.B setlocale()
-function, it is possible to set one of these to the desired locale:
-.TP
-.B LC_COLLATE
-This is used to change the behaviour of the functions
-.B strcoll()
-and
-.BR strxfrm() ,
-which are used to compare strings in the local alphabet. For example,
-the German sharp s is sorted as "ss".
-.TP
-.B LC_CTYPE
-This changes the behaviour of the character handling and
-classification functions, such as
-.B isupper()
-and
-.BR toupper() ,
-and the multi\-byte character functions such as
-.B mblen()
-or
-.BR wctomb() .
-.TP
-.B LC_MONETARY
-changes the information returned by
-.B localeconv()
-which describes the way numbers are usually printed, with details such
-as decimal point versus decimal comma. This information is internally
-used by the function
-.BR strfmon() .
-.TP
-.B LC_MESSAGES
-changes the language messages are displayed in and how an affirmative or
-negative answer looks like. The GNU C-library contains the
-.BR gettext() ,
-.BR ngettext() ,
-and
-.B rpmatch()
-functions to ease the use of these information. The GNU gettext family of
-functions also obey the environment variable
-.BR LANGUAGE .
-.TP
-.B LC_NUMERIC
-changes the information used by the
-.B printf()
-and
-.B scanf()
-family of functions, when they are advised to use the
-locale-settings. This information can also be read with the
-.B localeconv()
-function.
-.TP
-.B LC_TIME
-changes the behaviour of the
-.B strftime()
-function to display the current time in a locally acceptable form; for
-example, most of Europe uses a 24\-hour clock vs. the US' 12\-hour
-clock.
-.TP
-.B LC_ALL
-All of the above.
-.PP
-If the second argument to
-.B setlocale()
-is empty string,
-.BR """""" ,
-for the default locale, it is determined using the following steps:
-.IP 1.
-If there is a non-null environment variable
-.BR LC_ALL ,
-the value of
-.B LC_ALL
-is used.
-.IP 2.
-If an environment variable with the same name as one of the categories
-above exists and is non-null, its value is used for that category.
-.IP 3.
-If there is a non-null environment variable
-.BR LANG ,
-the value of
-.B LANG
-is used.
-.PP
-Values about local numeric formatting is made available in a
-.B struct lconv
-returned by the
-.B localeconv()
-function, which has the following declaration:
-.nf
-struct lconv
-{
- /* Numeric (non-monetary) information. */
-
- char *decimal_point; /* Decimal point character. */
- char *thousands_sep; /* Thousands separator. */
- /* Each element is the number of digits in each group;
- elements with higher indices are farther left.
- An element with value CHAR_MAX means that no further grouping is done.
- An element with value 0 means that the previous element is used
- for all groups farther left. */
- char *grouping;
-
- /* Monetary information. */
-
- /* First three chars are a currency symbol from ISO 4217.
- Fourth char is the separator. Fifth char is '\0'. */
- char *int_curr_symbol;
- char *currency_symbol; /* Local currency symbol. */
- char *mon_decimal_point; /* Decimal point character. */
- char *mon_thousands_sep; /* Thousands separator. */
- char *mon_grouping; /* Like `grouping' element (above). */
- char *positive_sign; /* Sign for positive values. */
- char *negative_sign; /* Sign for negative values. */
- char int_frac_digits; /* Int'l fractional digits. */
- char frac_digits; /* Local fractional digits. */
- /* 1 if currency_symbol precedes a positive value, 0 if succeeds. */
- char p_cs_precedes;
- /* 1 if a space separates currency_symbol from a positive value. */
- char p_sep_by_space;
- /* 1 if currency_symbol precedes a negative value, 0 if succeeds. */
- char n_cs_precedes;
- /* 1 if a space separates currency_symbol from a negative value. */
- char n_sep_by_space;
- /* Positive and negative sign positions:
- 0 Parentheses surround the quantity and currency_symbol.
- 1 The sign string precedes the quantity and currency_symbol.
- 2 The sign string succeeds the quantity and currency_symbol.
- 3 The sign string immediately precedes the currency_symbol.
- 4 The sign string immediately succeeds the currency_symbol. */
- char p_sign_posn;
- char n_sign_posn;
-};
-.fi
-.SH "CONFORMS TO"
-.nf
-POSIX.1
-.fi
-The GNU gettext functions are specified in LI18NUX2000.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR setlocale (3),
-.BR localeconv (3),
-.BR locale (1),
-.BR localedef (1),
-.BR nl_langinfo (3),
-.BR gettext (3),
-.BR ngettext (3),
-.BR rpmatch (3),
-.BR strfmon (3),
-.BR strcoll (3),
-.BR strxfrm (3),
-.BR strftime (3)
diff --git a/raw/man7/lock.7 b/raw/man7/lock.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 97b81f0..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/lock.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "LOCK" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-LOCK \- lock a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-LOCK [ TABLE ] \fIname\fR [, ...] [ IN \fIlockmode\fR MODE ]
-
-where \fIlockmode\fR is one of:
-
- ACCESS SHARE | ROW SHARE | ROW EXCLUSIVE | SHARE UPDATE EXCLUSIVE
- | SHARE | SHARE ROW EXCLUSIVE | EXCLUSIVE | ACCESS EXCLUSIVE
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBLOCK TABLE\fR obtains a table-level lock, waiting if
-necessary for any conflicting locks to be released. Once obtained,
-the lock is held for the remainder of the current transaction.
-(There is no \fBUNLOCK TABLE\fR command; locks are always
-released at transaction end.)
-.PP
-When acquiring locks automatically for commands that reference
-tables, PostgreSQL always uses the least
-restrictive lock mode possible. \fBLOCK TABLE\fR
-provides for cases when you might need more restrictive locking.
-For example, suppose an application runs a transaction at the
-isolation level read committed and needs to ensure that data in a
-table remains stable for the duration of the transaction. To
-achieve this you could obtain SHARE lock mode over the
-table before querying. This will prevent concurrent data changes
-and ensure subsequent reads of the table see a stable view of
-committed data, because SHARE lock mode conflicts with
-the ROW EXCLUSIVE lock acquired by writers, and your
-\fBLOCK TABLE \fIname\fB IN SHARE MODE\fR
-statement will wait until any concurrent holders of ROW
-EXCLUSIVE mode locks commit or roll back. Thus, once you
-obtain the lock, there are no uncommitted writes outstanding;
-furthermore none can begin until you release the lock.
-.PP
-To achieve a similar effect when running a transaction at the
-isolation level serializable, you have to execute the \fBLOCK
-TABLE\fR statement before executing any data modification
-statement. A serializable transaction's view of data will be
-frozen when its first data modification statement begins. A later
-\fBLOCK TABLE\fR will still prevent concurrent writes --- but it
-won't ensure that what the transaction reads corresponds to the
-latest committed values.
-.PP
-If a transaction of this sort is going to change the data in the
-table, then it should use SHARE ROW EXCLUSIVE lock mode
-instead of SHARE mode. This ensures that only one
-transaction of this type runs at a time. Without this, a deadlock
-is possible: two transactions might both acquire SHARE
-mode, and then be unable to also acquire ROW EXCLUSIVE
-mode to actually perform their updates. (Note that a transaction's
-own locks never conflict, so a transaction can acquire ROW
-EXCLUSIVE mode when it holds SHARE mode --- but not
-if anyone else holds SHARE mode.) To avoid deadlocks,
-make sure all transactions acquire locks on the same objects in the
-same order, and if multiple lock modes are involved for a single
-object, then transactions should always acquire the most
-restrictive mode first.
-.PP
-More information about the lock modes and locking strategies can be
-found in the section called ``Explicit Locking'' in the documentation.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing table to
-lock.
-
-The command LOCK a, b; is equivalent to
-LOCK a; LOCK b;. The tables are locked one-by-one in
-the order specified in the \fBLOCK\fR command.
-.TP
-\fB\fIlockmode\fB\fR
-The lock mode specifies which locks this lock conflicts with.
-Lock modes are described in the section called ``Explicit Locking'' in the documentation.
-
-If no lock mode is specified, then ACCESS
-EXCLUSIVE, the most restrictive mode, is used.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-LOCK ... IN ACCESS SHARE MODE requires SELECT
-privileges on the target table. All other forms of \fBLOCK\fR
-require UPDATE and/or DELETE privileges.
-.PP
-\fBLOCK\fR is useful only inside a transaction block
-(\fBBEGIN\fR/\fBCOMMIT\fR pair), since the lock is dropped
-as soon as the transaction ends. A \fBLOCK\fR command appearing
-outside any transaction block forms a self-contained transaction, so the
-lock will be dropped as soon as it is obtained.
-.PP
-\fBLOCK TABLE\fR only deals with table-level locks, and so
-the mode names involving ROW are all misnomers. These
-mode names should generally be read as indicating the intention of
-the user to acquire row-level locks within the locked table. Also,
-ROW EXCLUSIVE mode is a sharable table lock. Keep in
-mind that all the lock modes have identical semantics so far as
-\fBLOCK TABLE\fR is concerned, differing only in the rules
-about which modes conflict with which.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Obtain a SHARE lock on a primary key table when going to perform
-inserts into a foreign key table:
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN WORK;
-LOCK TABLE films IN SHARE MODE;
-SELECT id FROM films
- WHERE name = 'Star Wars: Episode I - The Phantom Menace';
--- Do ROLLBACK if record was not returned
-INSERT INTO films_user_comments VALUES
- (_id_, 'GREAT! I was waiting for it for so long!');
-COMMIT WORK;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Take a SHARE ROW EXCLUSIVE lock on a primary key table when going to perform
-a delete operation:
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN WORK;
-LOCK TABLE films IN SHARE ROW EXCLUSIVE MODE;
-DELETE FROM films_user_comments WHERE id IN
- (SELECT id FROM films WHERE rating < 5);
-DELETE FROM films WHERE rating < 5;
-COMMIT WORK;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBLOCK TABLE\fR in the SQL standard,
-which instead uses \fBSET TRANSACTION\fR to specify
-concurrency levels on transactions. PostgreSQL supports that too;
-see SET TRANSACTION [\fBset_transaction\fR(7)] for details.
-.PP
-Except for ACCESS SHARE, ACCESS EXCLUSIVE,
-and SHARE UPDATE EXCLUSIVE lock modes, the
-PostgreSQL lock modes and the
-\fBLOCK TABLE\fR syntax are compatible with those
-present in Oracle.
diff --git a/raw/man7/mailaddr.7 b/raw/man7/mailaddr.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e03d3e..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/mailaddr.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
-.TH MAILADDR 7 1995-06-24 linux "Linux User's Manual" \" -*- nroff -*-
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1983, 1987 The Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted
-.\" provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are
-.\" duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation,
-.\" advertising materials, and other materials related to such
-.\" distribution and use acknowledge that the software was developed
-.\" by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the
-.\" University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
-.\" from this software without specific prior written permission.
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
-.\" WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)mailaddr.7 6.5 (Berkeley) 2/14/89
-.\"
-.\" Extensively rewritten by Arnt Gulbrandsen <agulbra at troll.no>. My
-.\" changes are placed under the same copyright as the original BSD page.
-.\"
-.\" fool hilith19: "
-.UC 5
-.SH NAME
-mailaddr \- mail addressing description
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page gives a brief introduction to SMTP mail addresses, as
-used on the Internet. These addresses are in the general format
-.PP
- user at domain
-.PP
-where a domain is a hierarchical dot separated list of subdomains. For
-example, the addresses
-.PP
- eric at monet.berkeley.edu
-.br
- Eric Allman <eric at monet.berkeley.edu>
-.br
- eric at monet.berkeley.edu (Eric Allman)
-.PP
-are valid forms of the same address.
-.PP
-The domain part (``monet.berkeley.edu'') may be the name of an internet
-host, or it may be a logical mail address. The domain part is not
-case sensitive.
-.PP
-The local part (``eric'') is often a user name, but its meaning is
-defined by the local software. It can be case sensitive, but usually
-isn't. If you see a local-part that looks like garbage, it is usually
-because of a gateway between an internal e-mail system and the net,
-here are some examples:
-.PP
- "surname/admd=telemail/c=us/o=hp/prmd=hp"@some.where
- USER%SOMETHING at some.where
- machine!machine!name at some.where
- I2461572 at some.where
-.PP
-(These are, respectively, an X.400 gateway, a gateway to an arbitrary
-inernal mail system that lacks proper internet support, an UUCP
-gateway, and the last one is just boring username policy.)
-.PP
-The real-name part (``Eric Allman'') can either be placed first, outside
-<>, or last, inside (). (Strictly speaking the two aren't the same,
-but the difference is outside the scope of this page.) The name may
-have to be quoted using "" if it contains certain characters, most
-commonly ``.'':
-.PP
- "Eric P. Allman" <eric at monet.berkeley.edu>
-.SS Abbreviation.
-.PP
-Many mail systems let users abbreviate the domain name. For instance,
-users at berkeley.edu may get away with ``eric at monet'' to send mail to
-Eric Allman. \fIThis behavior is deprecated.\fP
-.SS Route-addrs.
-.PP
-Under some circumstances it may be necessary to route a message
-through several hosts to get it to the final destination. Normally
-this happens automatically and invisibly, but sometimes not,
-particularly with old and broken software. Addresses which show these
-relays are termed ``route-addrs.'' These use the syntax:
-.PP
- <@hosta, at hostb:user at hostc>
-.PP
-This specifies that the message should be sent to hosta, from there to
-hostb, and finally to hostc. Some hosts disregard route-addrs and
-send directly to hostc.
-.PP
-Route-addrs occur frequently on return addresses, since these are generally
-augmented by the software at each host. It is generally possible to ignore
-all but the ``user at hostc'' part of the address to determine the actual
-sender.
-.SS Postmaster.
-.PP
-Every site is required to have a user or user alias designated
-``postmaster'' to which problems with the mail system may be
-addressed. The ``postmaster'' address is not case sensitive.
-.SS "FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS"
-rtfm.mit.edu and many mirrors store a collection of FAQs. Please find
-and use a nearby FAQ archive; there are dozens or hundreds around the
-world.
-.I mail/inter-network-guide
-explains how to send mail between many different networks.
-.I mail/country-codes
-lists the top level domains (e.g. ``no'' is Norway and ``ea'' is Eritrea).
-.I mail/college-email/part*
-gives some useful tips on how to locate e-mail addresses.
-.SH FILES
-.I /etc/aliases
-.br
-.I ~/.forward
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR binmail (1),
-.BR mail (1),
-.BR mconnect (1),
-.BR forward (5),
-.BR aliases (5),
-.BR sendmail (8),
-.BR vrfy (8),
-RFC822 (Standard for the Format of Arpa Internet Text Messages).
diff --git a/raw/man7/man.7 b/raw/man7/man.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 4cdb585..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/man.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,723 +0,0 @@
-.\" (C) Copyright 1992-1999 Rickard E. Faith and David A. Wheeler
-.\" (faith at cs.unc.edu and dwheeler at ida.org)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\"
-.\" Modified Sun Jul 25 11:06:05 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sat Jun 8 00:39:52 1996 by aeb
-.\" Modified Wed Jun 16 23:00:00 1999 by David A. Wheeler (dwheeler at ida.org)
-.\" Modified Thu Jul 15 12:43:28 1999 by aeb
-.\" [todo: split this into man.7 describing the macros
-.\" and manpage.7 describing the Linux man page conventions]
-.\"
-.TH MAN 7 1999-06-16 "Linux" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-man \- macros to format man pages
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B groff \-Tascii \-man
-.I file
-\&...
-.LP
-.B groff \-Tps \-man
-.I file
-\&...
-.LP
-.B man
-.RI [ section ]
-.I title
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page explains the
-.B "groff tmac.an"
-macro package (often called the
-.B man
-macro package) and related conventions for creating manual (man) pages.
-This macro package should be used by developers when
-writing or porting man pages for Linux. It is fairly compatible with other
-versions of this macro package, so porting man pages should not be a major
-problem (exceptions include the NET-2 BSD release, which uses a totally
-different macro package called mdoc; see
-.BR mdoc (7)).
-.PP
-Note that NET-2 BSD mdoc man pages can be used with
-.B groff
-simply by specifying the
-.B \-mdoc
-option instead of the
-.B \-man
-option. Using the
-.B \-mandoc
-option is, however, recommended, since this will automatically detect which
-macro package is in use.
-.SH PREAMBLE
-The first command in a man page (after comment lines) should be
-.RS
-.sp
-.B \&.TH
-.IR "title section date source manual" ,
-.sp
-.RE
-where:
-.RS
-.TP 10
-.I title
-The title of the man page (e.g.,
-.IR MAN ).
-.TP
-.I section
-The section number the man page should be placed in (e.g.,
-.IR 7 ).
-.TP
-.I date
-The date of the last revision\(emremember to change this every time a
-change is made to the man page, since this is the most general way of doing
-version control.
-.TP
-.I source
-The source of the command.
-.sp
-For binaries, use something like:
-.IR GNU ", " NET-2 ", " "SLS Distribution" ", " "MCC Distribution" .
-.sp
-For system calls, use the version of the kernel that you are currently
-looking at:
-.IR "Linux 0.99.11" .
-.sp
-For library calls, use the source of the function:
-.IR GNU ", " "BSD 4.3" ", " "Linux DLL 4.4.1" .
-.TP
-.I manual
-The title of the manual (e.g.,
-.IR "Linux Programmer's Manual" ).
-.RE
-.PP
-Note that BSD mdoc-formatted pages begin with the
-.B Dd
-command, not the
-.B TH
-command.
-.PP
-The manual sections are traditionally defined as follows:
-.RS
-.TP 10
-.B 1 Commands
-Those commands that can be executed by the user from within
-a shell.
-.TP
-.B 2 System calls
-Those functions which must be performed by the kernel.
-.TP
-.B 3 Library calls
-Most of the
-.I libc
-functions, such as
-.BR qsort (3))
-.TP
-.B 4 Special files
-Files found in
-.IR /dev )
-.TP
-.B 5 File formats and conventions
-The format for
-.I /etc/passwd
-and other human-readable files.
-.TP
-.B 6 Games
-.TP
-.B 7 Macro packages and conventions
-A description of the standard file system layout, network protocols,
-ASCII and other character codes, this man page, and other things.
-.TP
-.B 8 System management commands
-Commands like
-.BR mount (8),
-many of which only
-.I root
-can execute.
-.TP
-.B 9 Kernel routines
-This is an obsolete manual section.
-Once it was thought a good idea to document the Linux kernel here,
-but in fact very little has been documented, and the documentation
-that exists is outdated already. There are better sources of
-information for kernel developers.
-.RE
-.SH SECTIONS
-Sections are started with
-.B \&.SH
-followed by the heading name. If the name contains spaces and appears
-on the same line as
-.BR \&.SH ,
-then place the heading in double quotes. Traditional or suggested
-headings include:
-NAME, SYNOPSIS, DESCRIPTION, RETURN VALUE,
-EXIT STATUS, ERROR HANDLING, ERRORS,
-OPTIONS, USAGE, EXAMPLES, FILES, ENVIRONMENT, DIAGNOSTICS, SECURITY,
-CONFORMING TO, NOTES,
-BUGS, AUTHOR, and SEE ALSO.
-Where a traditional heading would apply, please use it;
-this kind of consistency can make the information easier to understand.
-However, feel free to create your own headings if they make things easier
-to understand.
-The only required heading is
-.IR NAME ,
-which should be the first section and
-be followed on the next line by a one line description of the program:
-.RS
-.sp
-\&.SH NAME
-.br
-chess \\- the game of chess
-.sp
-.RE
-It is extremely important that this format is followed, and that there is a
-backslash before the single dash which follows the command name. This
-syntax is used by the
-.BR makewhatis (8)
-program to create a database of short command descriptions for the
-.BR whatis (1)
-and
-.BR apropos (1)
-commands.
-.PP
-Some other traditional sections have the following contents:
-.TP 14
-.B SYNOPSIS
-briefly describes the command or function's interface.
-For commands, this shows the syntax of the command and its arguments
-(including options);
-boldface is used for as-is text and italics are used to indicate replaceable
-arguments. Brackets ([]) surround optional arguments, vertical bars (|)
-separate choices, and ellipses (\&...) can be repeated.
-For functions, it shows any required data declarations or
-.B #include
-directives, followed by the function declaration.
-.TP
-.B DESCRIPTION
-gives an explanation of what the command, function, or format does.
-Discuss how it interacts with files and standard input, and what it
-produces on standard output or standard error.
-Omit internals and implementation details unless they're critical for
-understanding the interface.
-Describe the usual case; for information on options use the
-.B OPTIONS
-section.
-If there is some kind of input grammar or complex set of subcommands,
-consider describing them in a separate
-.B USAGE
-section (and just place an overview in the
-.B DESCRIPTION
-section).
-.TP
-.B RETURN VALUE
-gives a
-list of the values the library routine will return to the caller
-and the conditions that cause these values to be returned.
-.TP
-.B EXIT STATUS
-lists the possible exit status values or a program and
-the conditions that cause these values to be returned.
-.TP
-.B OPTIONS
-describes the options accepted by the program and how they change
-its behavior.
-.TP
-.B USAGE
-describes the grammar of any sublanguage this implements.
-.TP
-.B EXAMPLES
-provides one or more examples describing how this function, file or
-command is used.
-.TP
-.B FILES
-lists the files the program or function uses, such as
-configuration files, startup files,
-and files the program directly operates on.
-Give the full pathname of these files, and use the installation
-process to modify the directory part to match user preferences.
-For many programs, the default installation location is in /usr/local,
-so your base manual page should use /usr/local as the base.
-.TP
-.B ENVIRONMENT
-lists all environment variables that affect your program or function
-and how they affect it.
-.TP
-.B DIAGNOSTICS
-gives an overview of the most common error messages and how to
-cope with them. You don't need to explain system error messages
-or fatal signals that can appear during execution of any program
-unless they're special in some way to your program.
-.TP
-.B SECURITY
-discusses security issues and implications.
-Warn about configurations or environments that should be avoided,
-commands that may have security implications, and so on, especially
-if they aren't obvious.
-Discussing security in a separate section isn't necessary;
-if it's easier to understand, place security information in the
-other sections (such as the
-.B DESCRIPTION
-or
-.B USAGE
-section).
-However, please include security information somewhere!
-.TP
-.B CONFORMING TO
-describes any standards or conventions this implements.
-.TP
-.B NOTES
-provides miscellaneous notes.
-.TP
-.B BUGS
-lists limitations, known defects or inconveniences,
-and other questionable activities.
-.TP
-.B AUTHOR
-lists authors of the documentation or program so you can mail in bug
-reports.
-.TP
-.B SEE ALSO
-lists related man pages in alphabetical order, possibly followed by
-other related pages or documents.
-Conventionally this is the last section.
-.SH FONTS
-Although there are many arbitrary conventions for man pages in the UNIX
-world, the existence of several hundred Linux-specific man pages defines our
-font standards:
-.IP
-For functions, the arguments are always specified using italics,
-.IR "even in the SYNOPSIS section" ,
-where the rest of the function is specified in bold:
-.RS
-.BI "int myfunction(int " argc ", char **" argv );
-.RE
-.IP
-Filenames are always in italics (e.g.,
-.IR "/usr/include/stdio.h" ),
-except in the SYNOPSIS section, where included files are in bold (e.g.,
-.BR "#include <stdio.h>" ).
-.IP
-Special macros, which are usually in upper case, are in bold (e.g.,
-.BR MAXINT ).
-.IP
-When enumerating a list of error codes, the codes are in bold (this list
-usually uses the
-.B \&.TP
-macro).
-.IP
-Any reference to another man page (or to the subject of the current man
-page) is in bold. If the manual section number is given, it is given in
-Roman (normal) font, without any spaces (e.g.,
-.BR man (7)).
-.LP
-The commands to select the type face are:
-.TP 4
-.B \&.B
-Bold
-.TP
-.B \&.BI
-Bold alternating with italics
-(especially useful for function specifications)
-.TP
-.B \&.BR
-Bold alternating with Roman
-(especially useful for referring to other
-manual pages)
-.TP
-.B \&.I
-Italics
-.TP
-.B \&.IB
-Italics alternating with bold
-.TP
-.B \&.IR
-Italics alternating with Roman
-.TP
-.B \&.RB
-Roman alternating with bold
-.TP
-.B \&.RI
-Roman alternating with italics
-.TP
-.B \&.SB
-Small alternating with bold
-.TP
-.B \&.SM
-Small (useful for acronyms)
-.LP
-Traditionally, each command can have up to six arguments, but the GNU
-implementation removes this limitation (you might still want to limit
-yourself to 6 arguments for portability's sake).
-Arguments are delimited by
-spaces. Double quotes can be used to specify an argument which contains
-spaces. All of the arguments will be printed next to each other without
-intervening spaces, so that the
-.B \&.BR
-command can be used to specify a word in bold followed by a mark of
-punctuation in Roman.
-If no arguments are given, the command is applied to the following line
-of text.
-.SH "OTHER MACROS AND STRINGS"
-.PP
-Below are other relevant macros and predefined strings.
-Unless noted otherwise, all macros
-cause a break (end the current line of text).
-Many of these macros set or use the "prevailing indent."
-The "prevailing indent" value is set by any macro with the parameter
-.I i
-below;
-macros may omit
-.I i
-in which case the current prevailing indent will be used.
-As a result, successive indented paragraphs can use the same indent without
-re-specifying the indent value.
-A normal (non-indented) paragraph resets the prevailing indent value
-to its default value (0.5 inches).
-By default a given indent is measured in ens; try to ens or ems as units for
-indents, since these will automatically adjust to font size changes.
-The other key macro definitions are:
-.SS "Normal Paragraphs"
-.TP 9m
-.B \&.LP
-Same as
-.B \&.PP
-(begin a new paragraph).
-.TP
-.B \&.P
-Same as
-.B \&.PP
-(begin a new paragraph).
-.TP
-.B \&.PP
-Begin a new paragraph and reset prevailing indent.
-.SS "Relative Margin Indent"
-.TP 9m
-.BI \&.RS " i"
-Start relative margin indent - moves the left margin
-.I i
-to the right (if
-.I i
-is omitted, the prevailing indent value is used).
-A new prevailing indent is set to 0.5 inches.
-As a result, all following paragraph(s) will be
-indented until the corresponding
-.BR \&.RE .
-.TP
-.B \&.RE
-End relative margin indent and
-restores the previous value of the prevailing indent.
-.SS "Indented Paragraph Macros"
-.TP 9m
-.BI \&.HP " i"
-Begin paragraph with a hanging indent
-(the first line of the paragraph is at the left margin of
-normal paragraphs, and the rest of the paragraph's lines are indented).
-.TP
-.BI \&.IP " x i"
-Indented paragraph with optional hanging tag.
-If the tag
-.I x
-is omitted, the entire following paragraph is indented by
-.IR i .
-If the tag
-.I x
-is provided, it is hung at the left margin
-before the following indented paragraph
-(this is just like
-.BR \&.TP
-except the tag is included with the command instead of being on the
-following line).
-If the tag is too long, the text after the tag will be moved down to the
-next line (text will not be lost or garbled).
-For bulleted lists, use this macro with \e(bu (bullet) or \e(em (em dash)
-as the tag, and for numbered lists, use the number or letter followed by
-a period as the tag;
-this simplifies translation to other formats.
-.TP
-.BI \&.TP " i"
-Begin paragraph with hanging tag. The tag is given on the next line, but
-its results are like those of the
-.B \&.IP
-command.
-.SS "Hypertext Link Macros"
-.TP 9m
-.BI \&.UR " u"
-Begins a hypertext link to the URI (URL)
-.IR u ;
-it will end with the corresponding
-.B UE
-command.
-When generating HTML this should translate into the HTML command
-\fB<A HREF="\fP\fIu\fP\fB">\fP.
-There is an exception: if
-.I u
-is the special value ":", then no hypertext link of any kind
-will be generated until after the closing
-.B UE
-(this permits disabling hypertext links in phrases like
-.UR ":"
-LALR(1)
-.UE
-when linking is not appropriate).
-These hypertext link "macros" are new, and
-many tools won't do anything with them, but
-since many tools (including troff) will simply ignore undefined macros
-(or at worst insert their text) these are safe to insert.
-.TP
-.BI \&.UE
-Ends the corresponding
-.B UR
-command;
-when generating HTML this should translate into
-\fB</A>\fP.
-.TP
-.BI \&.UN " u"
-Creates a named hypertext location named
-.IR u ;
-do not include a corresponding
-.B UE
-command.
-When generating HTML this should translate into the HTML command
-\fB<A NAME="\fP\fIu\fP\fB" id="\fP\fIu\fP\fB"> </A>\fP
-(the is optional if support for Mosaic is unneeded).
-.SS "Miscellaneous Macros"
-.TP 9m
-.B \&.DT
-Reset tabs to default tab values (every 0.5 inches);
-does not cause a break.
-.TP
-.BI \&.PD " d"
-Set inter-paragraph vertical distance to d
-(if omitted, d=0.4v);
-does not cause a break.
-.TP
-.BI \&.SS " t"
-Subheading
-.I t
-(like
-.BR \&.SH ,
-but used for a subsection inside a section).
-.SS "Predefined Strings"
-The
-.B man
-package has the following predefined strings:
-.IP \e*R
-Registration Symbol: \*R
-.IP \e*S
-Change to default font size
-.IP \e*(Tm
-Trademark Symbol: \*(Tm
-.IP \e*(lq
-Left angled doublequote: \*(lq
-.IP \e*(rq
-Right angled doublequote: \*(rq
-.SH "SAFE SUBSET"
-Although technically
-.B man
-is a troff macro package, in reality a large number of other tools
-process man page files that don't implement all of troff's abilities.
-Thus, it's best to avoid some of troff's more exotic abilities where possible
-to permit these other tools to work correctly.
-Avoid using the various troff preprocessors
-(if you must, go ahead and use
-.BR tbl (1),
-but try to use the
-.B IP
-and
-.B TP
-commands instead for two-column tables).
-Avoid using computations; most other tools can't process them.
-Use simple commands that are easy to translate to other formats.
-The following troff macros are believed to be safe (though in many cases
-they will be ignored by translators):
-.BR \e" ,
-.BR . ,
-.BR ad ,
-.BR bp ,
-.BR br ,
-.BR ce ,
-.BR de ,
-.BR ds ,
-.BR el ,
-.BR ie ,
-.BR if ,
-.BR fi ,
-.BR ft ,
-.BR hy ,
-.BR ig ,
-.BR in ,
-.BR na ,
-.BR ne ,
-.BR nf ,
-.BR nh ,
-.BR ps ,
-.BR so ,
-.BR sp ,
-.BR ti ,
-.BR tr .
-.PP
-You may also use many troff escape sequences (those sequences beginning
-with \e).
-When you need to include the backslash character as normal text,
-use \ee.
-Other sequences you may use, where x or xx are any characters and N
-is any digit, include:
-.BR \e' ,
-.BR \e` ,
-.BR \e- ,
-.BR \e. ,
-.BR \e" ,
-.BR \e% ,
-.BR \e*x ,
-.BR \e*(xx ,
-.BR \e(xx ,
-.BR \e$N ,
-.BR \enx ,
-.BR \en(xx ,
-.BR \efx ,
-and
-.BR \ef(xx .
-Avoid using the escape sequences for drawing graphics.
-.PP
-Do not use the optional parameter for
-.B bp
-(break page).
-Use only positive values for
-.B sp
-(vertical space).
-Don't define a macro
-.RB ( de )
-with the same name as a macro in this or the
-mdoc macro package with a different meaning; it's likely that
-such redefinitions will be ignored.
-Every positive indent
-.RB ( in )
-should be paired with a matching negative indent
-(although you should be using the
-.B RS
-and
-.B RE
-macros instead).
-The condition test
-.RB ( if,ie )
-should only have 't' or 'n' as the condition.
-Only translations
-.RB ( tr )
-that can be ignored should be used.
-Font changes
-.RB ( ft
-and the \fB\ef\fP escape sequence)
-should only have the values 1, 2, 3, 4, R, I, B, P, or CW
-(the ft command may also have no parameters).
-.PP
-If you use capabilities beyond these, check the
-results carefully on several tools.
-Once you've confirmed that the additional capability is safe,
-let the maintainer of this
-document know about the safe command or sequence
-that should be added to this list.
-.SH NOTES
-.PP
-By all means include full URLs (or URIs) in the text itself;
-some tools such as
-.BR man2html (1)
-can automatically turn them into hypertext links.
-You can also use the new
-.B UR
-macro to identify links to related information.
-If you include URLs, use the full URL
-(e.g., <http://www.kernelnotes.org>) to ensure that tools
-can automatically find the URLs.
-.PP
-Tools processing these files should open the file and examine the first
-non-whitespace character. A period (.) or single quote (')
-at the beginning of a line indicates a troff-based file (such as man or mdoc).
-A left angle bracket (<) indicates an SGML/XML-based
-file (such as HTML or Docbook). Anything else suggests simple ASCII
-text (e.g., a "catman" result).
-.PP
-Many man pages begin with '\e" followed by a space and a list of characters,
-indicating how the page is to be preprocessed.
-For portability's sake to non-troff translators we recommend that you avoid
-using anything other than
-.BR tbl (1),
-and Linux can detect that automatically.
-However, you might want to include this information so your man page
-can be handled by other (less capable) systems.
-Here are the definitions of the preprocessors invoked by these characters:
-.TP 3
-.B e
-eqn(1)
-.TP
-.B g
-grap(1)
-.TP
-.B p
-pic(1)
-.TP
-.B r
-refer(1)
-.TP
-.B t
-tbl(1)
-.TP
-.B v
-vgrind(1)
-.SH FILES
-.IR /usr/share/groff/ [*/] tmac/tmac.an
-.br
-.I /usr/man/whatis
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-Most of the macros describe formatting (e.g., font type and spacing) instead
-of marking semantic content (e.g., this text is a reference to another page),
-compared to formats like mdoc and DocBook (even HTML has more semantic
-markings).
-This situation makes it harder to vary the
-.B man
-format for different media,
-to make the formatting consistent for a given media, and to automatically
-insert cross-references.
-By sticking to the safe subset described above, it should be easier to
-automate transitioning to a different reference page format in the future.
-.LP
-The Sun macro
-.B TX
-is not implemented.
-.SH AUTHORS
-.IP \(em 3m
-James Clark (jjc at jclark.com) wrote the implementation of the macro package.
-.IP \(em
-Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu) wrote the initial version of
-this manual page.
-.IP \(em
-Jens Schweikhardt (schweikh at noc.fdn.de) wrote the Linux Man-Page Mini-HOWTO
-(which influenced this manual page).
-.IP \(em
-David A. Wheeler (dwheeler at ida.org) heavily modified this
-manual page, such as adding detailed information on sections and macros.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR apropos (1),
-.BR groff (1),
-.BR man (1),
-.BR man2html (1),
-.BR mdoc (7),
-.BR mdoc.samples (7),
-.BR whatis (1)
diff --git a/raw/man7/mdoc.samples.7 b/raw/man7/mdoc.samples.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 04ce369..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/mdoc.samples.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2936 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1990, 1993
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\"
-.\" This tutorial sampler invokes every macro in the package several
-.\" times and is guaranteed to give a worst case performance
-.\" for an already extremely slow package.
-.\"
-.Dd December 30, 1993
-.Os
-.Dt MDOC.SAMPLES 7
-.Sh NAME
-.Nm mdoc.samples
-.Nd tutorial sampler for writing
-.Bx
-manuals with
-.Nm \-mdoc
-.Sh SYNOPSIS
-.Nm man mdoc.samples
-.Sh DESCRIPTION
-A tutorial sampler for writing
-.Bx
-manual pages with the
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macro package, a
-.Em content Ns \-based
-and
-.Em domain Ns \-based
-formatting
-package for
-.Xr troff 1 .
-Its predecessor, the
-.Xr \-man 7
-package,
-addressed page layout leaving the
-manipulation of fonts and other
-typesetting details to the individual author.
-In
-.Nm \-mdoc ,
-page layout macros
-make up the
-.Em "page structure domain"
-which consists of macros for titles, section headers, displays
-and lists. Essentially items which affect the physical position
-of text on a formatted page.
-In addition to the page structure domain, there are two more domains,
-the manual domain and the general text domain.
-The general text domain is defined as macros which
-perform tasks such as quoting or emphasizing pieces of text.
-The manual domain is defined as macros that are a subset of the
-day to day informal language used to describe commands, routines
-and related
-.Bx
-files.
-Macros in the manual domain handle
-command names, command line arguments and options, function names,
-function parameters, pathnames, variables, cross
-references to other manual pages, and so on.
-These domain
-items have value
-for both the author and the future user of the manual page.
-It is hoped the consistency gained
-across the manual set will provide easier
-translation to future documentation tools.
-.Pp
-Throughout the
-.Ux
-manual pages, a manual entry
-is simply referred
-to as a man page, regardless of actual length and without
-sexist intention.
-.Sh GETTING STARTED
-Since a tutorial document is normally read when a person
-desires to use the material immediately, the assumption has
-been made that the user of this document may be impatient.
-The material presented in the remained of this document is
-outlined as follows:
-.Bl -enum -offset indent
-.It
-.Tn "TROFF IDIOSYNCRASIES"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Macro Usage" .
-.It "Passing Space Characters in an Argument" .
-.It "Trailing Blank Space Characters (a warning)" .
-.It "Escaping Special Characters" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "THE ANATOMY OF A MAN PAGE"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "A manual page template" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "TITLE MACROS" .
-.It
-.Tn "INTRODUCTION OF MANUAL AND GENERAL TEXT DOMAINS" .
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "What's in a name..." .
-.It "General Syntax" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "MANUAL DOMAIN"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Addresses" .
-.It "Author name" .
-.It "Arguments" .
-.It "Configuration Declarations (section four only)" .
-.It "Command Modifier" .
-.It "Defined Variables" .
-.It "Errno's (Section two only)" .
-.It "Environment Variables" .
-.It "Function Argument" .
-.It "Function Declaration" .
-.It "Flags" .
-.It "Functions (library routines)" .
-.It "Function Types" .
-.\" .It "Header File (including source code)" .
-.It "Interactive Commands" .
-.It "Names" .
-.It "Options" .
-.It "Pathnames" .
-.It "Variables" .
-.It "Cross References" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "AT&T Macro" .
-.It "BSD Macro" .
-.It "FreeBSD Macro" .
-.It "UNIX Macro" .
-.It "Enclosure/Quoting Macros"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Angle Bracket Quote/Enclosure" .
-.It "Bracket Quotes/Enclosure" .
-.It "Double Quote macro/Enclosure" .
-.It "Parenthesis Quote/Enclosure" .
-.It "Single Quotes/Enclosure" .
-.It "Prefix Macro" .
-.El
-.It "No\-Op or Normal Text Macro" .
-.It "No Space Macro" .
-.It "Section Cross References" .
-.It "References and Citations" .
-.It "Return Values (sections two and three only)"
-.It "Trade Names (Acronyms and Type Names)" .
-.It "Extended Arguments" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN"
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact -offset indent
-.It "Section Headers" .
-.It "Paragraphs and Line Spacing" .
-.It "Keeps" .
-.It "Displays" .
-.It "Font Modes (Emphasis, Literal, and Symbolic)" .
-.It "Lists and Columns" .
-.El
-.It
-.Tn "PREDEFINED STRINGS"
-.It
-.Tn "DIAGNOSTICS"
-.It
-.Tn "FORMATTING WITH GROFF, TROFF AND NROFF"
-.It
-.Tn "BUGS"
-.El
-.ne 7
-.Sh TROFF IDIOSYNCRASIES
-The
-.Nm \-mdoc
-package attempts to simplify the process of writing a man page.
-Theoretically, one should not have to learn the dirty details of
-.Xr troff 1
-to use
-.Nm \-mdoc ;
-however, there are a few
-limitations which are unavoidable and best gotten out
-of the way.
-And, too, be forewarned, this package is
-.Em not
-fast.
-.Ss Macro Usage
-As in
-.Xr troff 1 ,
-a macro is called by placing a
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot character)
-at the beginning of
-a line followed by the two character name for the macro.
-Arguments may follow the macro separated by spaces.
-It is the dot character at the beginning of the line which causes
-.Xr troff 1
-to interpret the next two characters as a macro name.
-To place a
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot character)
-at the beginning of a line in some context other than
-a macro invocation, precede the
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot) with the
-.Ql \e&
-escape sequence.
-The
-.Ql \e&
-translates literally to a zero width space, and is never displayed in the
-output.
-.Pp
-In general,
-.Xr troff 1
-macros accept up to nine arguments, any
-extra arguments are ignored.
-Most macros in
-.Nm \-mdoc
-accept nine arguments and,
-in limited cases, arguments may be continued or extended
-on the
-next line (See
-.Sx Extensions ) .
-A few macros handle quoted arguments (see
-.Sx Passing Space Characters in an Argument
-below).
-.Pp
-Most of the
-.Nm \-mdoc
-general text domain and manual domain macros are special
-in that their argument lists are
-.Em parsed
-for callable macro names.
-This means an argument on the argument list which matches
-a general text or manual domain macro name and is determined
-to be callable will be executed
-or called when it is processed.
-In this case
-the argument, although the name of a macro,
-is not preceded by a
-.Ql \&\.
-(dot).
-It is in this manner that many macros are nested; for
-example
-the option macro,
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-may
-.Em call
-the flag and argument macros,
-.Ql \&Fl
-and
-.Ql \&Ar ,
-to specify an optional flag with an argument:
-.Bl -tag -width "\&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes" -offset indent
-.It Op Fl s Ar bytes
-is produced by
-.Li \&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes
-.El
-.Pp
-To prevent a two character
-string from being interpreted as a macro name, precede
-the string with the
-escape sequence
-.Ql \e& :
-.Bl -tag -width "\&.Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes" -offset indent
-.It Op \&Fl s \&Ar bytes
-is produced by
-.Li \&.Op \e&Fl s \e&Ar bytes
-.El
-.Pp
-Here the strings
-.Ql \&Fl
-and
-.Ql \&Ar
-are not interpreted as macros.
-Macros whose argument lists are parsed for callable arguments
-are referred to
-as parsed and macros which may be called from an argument
-list are referred to as callable
-throughout this document and in the companion quick reference
-manual
-.Xr mdoc 7 .
-This is a technical
-.Em faux pas
-as almost all of the macros in
-.Nm \-mdoc
-are parsed, but as it was cumbersome to constantly refer to macros
-as being callable and being able to call other macros,
-the term parsed has been used.
-.Ss Passing Space Characters in an Argument
-Sometimes it is desirable to give as one argument a string
-containing one or more blank space characters.
-This may be necessary
-to defeat the nine argument limit or to specify arguments to macros
-which expect particular arrangement of items in the argument list.
-For example,
-the function macro
-.Ql \&.Fn
-expects the first argument to be the name of a function and any
-remaining arguments to be function parameters.
-As
-.Tn "ANSI C"
-stipulates the declaration of function parameters in the
-parenthesized parameter list, each parameter is guaranteed
-to be at minimum a two word string.
-For example,
-.Fa int foo .
-.Pp
-There are two possible ways to pass an argument which contains
-an embedded space.
-.Em Implementation note :
-Unfortunately, the most convenient way
-of passing spaces in between quotes by reassigning individual
-arguments before parsing was fairly expensive speed wise
-and space wise to implement in all the macros for
-.Tn AT&T
-.Xr troff .
-It is not expensive for
-.Xr groff
-but for the sake of portability, has been limited
-to the following macros which need
-it the most:
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width 4n -offset indent -compact
-.It Li \&Cd
-Configuration declaration (section 4
-.Sx SYNOPSIS )
-.It Li \&Bl
-Begin list (for the width specifier).
-.It Li \&Em
-Emphasized text.
-.It Li \&Fn
-Functions (sections two and four).
-.It Li \&It
-List items.
-.It Li \&Li
-Literal text.
-.It Li \&Sy
-Symbolic text.
-.It Li \&%B
-Book titles.
-.It Li \&%J
-Journal names.
-.It Li \&%O
-Optional notes for a reference.
-.It Li \&%R
-Report title (in a reference).
-.It Li \&%T
-Title of article in a book or journal.
-.El
-.Pp
-One way of passing a string
-containing blank spaces is to use the hard or unpaddable space character
-.Ql \e\ ,
-that is, a blank space preceded by the escape character
-.Ql \e .
-This method may be used with any macro but has the side effect
-of interfering with the adjustment of text
-over the length of a line.
-.Xr Troff
-sees the hard space as if it were any other printable character and
-cannot split the string into blank or newline separated pieces as one
-would expect.
-The method is useful for strings which are not expected
-to overlap a line boundary.
-For example:
-.Bl -tag -width "fetch(char *str)" -offset indent
-.It Fn fetch char\ *str
-is created by
-.Ql \&.Fn fetch char\e *str
-.It Fn fetch "char *str"
-can also be created by
-.Ql \&.Fn fetch "\\*qchar *str\\*q"
-.El
-.Pp
-If the
-.Ql \e
-or quotes
-were omitted,
-.Ql \&.Fn
-would see three arguments and
-the result would be:
-.Pp
-.Dl Fn fetch char *str
-.Pp
-For an example of what happens when the parameter list overlaps
-a newline boundary, see the
-.Sx BUGS
-section.
-.Ss Trailing Blank Space Characters
-.Xr Troff
-can be confused by blank space characters at the end of a line.
-It
-is a wise preventive measure to globally remove all blank spaces
-from <blank-space><end-of-line> character sequences.
-Should the need
-arise to force a blank character at the end of a line,
-it may be forced with an unpaddable space and the
-.Ql \e&
-escape character.
-For example,
-.Ql string\e\ \e& .
-.Ss Escaping Special Characters
-Special characters
-like the newline character
-.Ql \en ,
-are handled by replacing the
-.Ql \e
-with
-.Ql \ee
-(e.g.
-.Ql \een )
-to preserve
-the backslash.
-.Sh THE ANATOMY OF A MAN PAGE
-The body of a man page is easily constructed from a basic
-template found in the file
-.Pa /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template .
-Several example man pages can also be found
-in
-.Pa /usr/share/examples/mdoc .
-.Pp
-.Ss A manual page template
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.\e" The following requests are required for all man pages.
-\&.Dd Month day, year
-\&.Os OPERATING_SYSTEM [version/release]
-\&.Dt DOCUMENT_TITLE [section number] [volume]
-\&.Sh NAME
-\&.Nm name
-\&.Nd one line description of name
-\&.Sh SYNOPSIS
-\&.Sh DESCRIPTION
-\&.\e" The following requests should be uncommented and
-\&.\e" used where appropriate. This next request is
-\&.\e" for sections 2 and 3 function return values only.
-\&.\e" .Sh RETURN VALUES
-\&.\e" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only
-\&.\e" .Sh ENVIRONMENT
-\&.\e" .Sh FILES
-\&.\e" .Sh EXAMPLES
-\&.\e" This next request is for sections 1, 6, 7 & 8 only
-\&.\e" (command return values (to shell) and
-\&.\e" fprintf/stderr type diagnostics)
-\&.\e" .Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-\&.\e" The next request is for sections 2 and 3 error
-\&.\e" and signal handling only.
-\&.\e" .Sh ERRORS
-\&.\e" .Sh SEE ALSO
-\&.\e" .Sh CONFORMING TO
-\&.\e" .Sh HISTORY
-\&.\e" .Sh AUTHORS
-\&.\e" .Sh BUGS
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The first items in the template are the macros
-.Pq Li \&.Dd , \&.Os , \&.Dt ;
-the document date,
-the operating system the man page or subject source is developed
-or modified for,
-and the man page title
-.Pq Em in upper case
-along with the section of the manual the page
-belongs in.
-These macros identify the page,
-and are discussed below in
-.Sx TITLE MACROS .
-.Pp
-The remaining items in the template are section headers
-.Pq Li \&.Sh ;
-of which
-.Sx NAME ,
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-and
-.Sx DESCRIPTION
-are mandatory.
-The
-headers are
-discussed in
-.Sx PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN ,
-after
-presentation of
-.Sx MANUAL DOMAIN .
-Several content macros are used to demonstrate page layout macros;
-reading about content macros before page layout macros is
-recommended.
-.Sh TITLE MACROS
-The title macros are the first portion of the page structure
-domain, but are presented first and separate for someone who
-wishes to start writing a man page yesterday.
-Three header macros designate the document title or manual page title,
-the operating system,
-and the date of authorship.
-These macros are one called once at the very beginning of the document
-and are used to construct the headers and footers only.
-.Bl -tag -width 6n
-.It Li \&.Dt DOCUMENT_TITLE section# [volume]
-The document title is the
-subject of the man page and must be in
-.Tn CAPITALS
-due to troff
-limitations.
-The section number may be 1,\ ...,\ 8,
-and if it is specified,
-the volume title may be omitted.
-A volume title may be arbitrary or one of the following:
-.\" .Cl
-.\" USD UNIX User's Supplementary Documents
-.\" .Cl
-.\" PS1 UNIX Programmer's Supplementary Documents
-.Pp
-.Bl -column SMM -offset indent -compact
-.It Li AMD UNIX Ancestral Manual Documents
-.It Li SMM UNIX System Manager's Manual
-.It Li URM UNIX Reference Manual
-.It Li PRM UNIX Programmer's Manual
-.El
-.Pp
-The default volume labeling is
-.Li URM
-for sections 1, 6, and 7;
-.Li SMM
-for section 8;
-.Li PRM
-for sections 2, 3, 4, and 5.
-.\" .Cl
-.\" MMI UNIX Manual Master Index
-.\" .Cl
-.\" CON UNIX Contributed Software Manual
-.\" .Cl
-.\" LOC UNIX Local Manual
-.It Li \&.Os operating_system release#
-The name of the operating system
-should be the common acronym, e.g.
-.Tn BSD
-or
-.Tn FreeBSD
-or
-.Tn ATT .
-The release should be the standard release
-nomenclature for the system specified, e.g. 4.3, 4.3+Tahoe, V.3,
-V.4.
-Unrecognized arguments are displayed as given in the page footer.
-For instance, a typical footer might be:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Os BSD 4.3
-.Pp
-or
-.Dl \&.Os FreeBSD 2.2
-.Pp
-or for a locally produced set
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Os CS Department
-.Pp
-The Berkeley default,
-.Ql \&.Os
-without an argument, has been defined as
-.Tn BSD
-in the
-site specific file
-.Pa /usr/share/tmac/mdoc/doc-common .
-It really should default to
-.Tn LOCAL .
-Note, if the
-.Ql \&.Os
-macro is not present, the bottom left corner of the page
-will be ugly.
-.It Li \&.Dd month day, year
-The date should be written formally:
-.Pp
-.ne 5
-.Dl January 25, 1989
-.El
-.Sh INTRODUCTION OF MANUAL AND GENERAL TEXT DOMAINS
-.Ss What's in a name...
-The manual domain macro names are derived from the day to day
-informal language used to describe commands, subroutines and related
-files.
-Slightly different variations of this language are used to describe
-the three different aspects of writing a man page.
-First, there is the description of
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macro request usage.
-Second is the description of a
-.Ux
-command
-.Em with
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macros and third,
-the description of a command to a user in the verbal sense;
-that is, discussion of a command in the text of a man page.
-.Pp
-In the first case,
-.Xr troff 1
-macros are themselves a type of command;
-the general syntax for a troff command is:
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-\&.Va argument1 argument2 ... argument9
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Va
-is a macro command or request, and anything following it is an argument to
-be processed.
-In the second case,
-the description of a
-.Ux
-command using the content macros is a
-bit more involved;
-a typical
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-command line might be displayed as:
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Nm filter
-.Op Fl flag
-.Ar infile outfile
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Here,
-.Nm filter
-is the command name and the
-bracketed string
-.Fl flag
-is a
-.Em flag
-argument designated as optional by the option brackets.
-In
-.Nm \-mdoc
-terms,
-.Ar infile
-and
-.Ar outfile
-are
-called
-.Em arguments .
-The macros which formatted the above example:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Nm filter
-\&.Op \&Fl flag
-\&.Ar infile outfile
-.Ed
-.Pp
-In the third case, discussion of commands and command syntax
-includes both examples above, but may add more detail.
-The
-arguments
-.Ar infile
-and
-.Ar outfile
-from the example above might be referred to as
-.Em operands
-or
-.Em file arguments .
-Some command line argument lists are quite long:
-.Bl -tag -width make -offset indent
-.It Nm make
-.Op Fl eiknqrstv
-.Op Fl D Ar variable
-.Op Fl d Ar flags
-.Op Fl f Ar makefile
-.Bk -words
-.Op Fl I Ar directory
-.Ek
-.Op Fl j Ar max_jobs
-.Op Ar variable=value
-.Bk -words
-.Op Ar target ...
-.Ek
-.El
-.Pp
-Here one might talk about the command
-.Nm make
-and qualify the argument
-.Ar makefile ,
-as an argument to the flag,
-.Fl f ,
-or discuss the optional
-file
-operand
-.Ar target .
-In the verbal context, such detail can prevent confusion,
-however the
-.Nm \-mdoc
-package
-does not have a macro for an argument
-.Em to
-a flag.
-Instead the
-.Ql \&Ar
-argument macro is used for an operand or file argument like
-.Ar target
-as well as an argument to a flag like
-.Ar variable .
-The make command line was produced from:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Nm make
-\&.Op Fl eiknqrstv
-\&.Op Fl D Ar variable
-\&.Op Fl d Ar flags
-\&.Op Fl f Ar makefile
-\&.Op Fl I Ar directory
-\&.Op Fl j Ar max_jobs
-\&.Op Ar variable=value
-\&.Bk -words
-\&.Op Ar target ...
-\&.Ek
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Bk
-and
-.Ql \&.Ek
-macros are explained in
-.Sx Keeps .
-.Ss General Syntax
-The manual domain and general text domain macros share a similar
-syntax with a few minor deviations:
-.Ql \&.Ar ,
-.Ql \&.Fl ,
-.Ql \&.Nm ,
-and
-.Ql \&.Pa
-differ only when called without arguments;
-.Ql \&.Fn
-and
-.Ql \&.Xr
-impose an order on their argument lists
-and the
-.Ql \&.Op
-and
-.Ql \&.Fn
-macros
-have nesting limitations.
-All content macros
-are capable of recognizing and properly handling punctuation,
-provided each punctuation character is separated by a leading space.
-If an request is given:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Li sptr, ptr),
-.Pp
-The result is:
-.Pp
-.Dl Li sptr, ptr),
-.Pp
-The punctuation is not recognized and all is output in the
-literal font. If the punctuation is separated by a leading
-white space:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Li "sptr , ptr ) ,"
-.Pp
-The result is:
-.Pp
-.Dl Li sptr , ptr ) ,
-.Pp
-The punctuation is now recognized and is output in the
-default font distinguishing it from the strings in literal font.
-.Pp
-To remove the special meaning from a punctuation character
-escape it with
-.Ql \e& .
-.Xr Troff
-is limited as a macro language, and has difficulty
-when presented with a string containing
-a member of the mathematical, logical or
-quotation set:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
-\&{+,\-,/,*,\&%,<,>,<=,>=,=,==,&,`,',"}
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The problem is that
-.Xr troff
-may assume it is supposed to actually perform the operation
-or evaluation suggested by the characters. To prevent
-the accidental evaluation of these characters,
-escape them with
-.Ql \e& .
-Typical syntax is shown in the first content macro displayed
-below,
-.Ql \&.Ad .
-.Sh MANUAL DOMAIN
-.Ss Address Macro
-The address macro identifies an address construct
-of the form addr1[,addr2[,addr3]].
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ad address ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ad f1 , f2 , f3 :" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Ad addr1
-.Ad addr1
-.It Li \&.Ad addr1\ .
-.Ad addr1 .
-.It Li \&.Ad addr1\ , file2
-.Ad addr1 , file2
-.It Li \&.Ad f1\ , f2\ , f3\ :
-.Ad f1 , f2 , f3 :
-.It Li \&.Ad addr\ )\ )\ ,
-.Ad addr ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Ad
-without arguments.
-.Ql \&.Ad
-is callable by other macros and is parsed.
-.Ss Author Name
-The
-.Ql \&.An
-macro is used to specify the name of the author of the item being
-documented, or the name of the author of the actual manual page.
-Any remaining arguments after the name information are assumed
-to be punctuation.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .An author_name \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".An Joe Author ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.An Joe\ Author
-.An Joe Author
-.It Li \&.An Joe\ Author\ ,
-.An Joe\ Author ,
-.It Li \&.An Joe\ Author\ \&Aq\ nobody at FreeBSD.ORG
-.An Joe Author Aq nobody at FreeBSD.ORG
-.It Li \&.An Joe\ Author\ )\ )\ ,
-.An Joe Author ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.An
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.An
-without
-any arguments.
-.Ss Argument Macro
-The
-.Ql \&.Ar
-argument macro may be used whenever
-a command line argument is referenced.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ar argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ar file1 file2" -compact -offset 15n
-.It Li \&.Ar
-.Ar
-.It Li \&.Ar file1
-.Ar file1
-.It Li \&.Ar file1\ .
-.Ar file1 .
-.It Li \&.Ar file1 file2
-.Ar file1 file2
-.It Li \&.Ar f1 f2 f3\ :
-.Ar f1 f2 f3 :
-.It Li \&.Ar file\ )\ )\ ,
-.Ar file ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-If
-.Ql \&.Ar
-is called without arguments
-.Ql Ar
-is assumed.
-The
-.Ql \&.Ar
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Configuration Declaration (section four only)
-The
-.Ql \&.Cd
-macro is used to demonstrate a
-.Xr config 8
-declaration for a device interface in a section four manual.
-This macro accepts quoted arguments (double quotes only).
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "device le0 at scode?" -offset indent
-.It Cd "device le0 at scode?"
-produced by:
-.Ql ".Cd device le0 at scode?" .
-.El
-.Ss Command Modifier
-The command modifier is identical to the
-.Ql \&.Fl
-(flag) command with the exception
-the
-.Ql \&.Cm
-macro does not assert a dash
-in front of every argument.
-Traditionally flags are marked by the
-preceding dash, some commands or subsets of commands do not use them.
-Command modifiers may also be specified in conjunction with interactive
-commands such as editor commands.
-See
-.Sx Flags .
-.Ss Defined Variables
-A variable which is defined in an include file is specified
-by the macro
-.Ql \&.Dv .
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Dv defined_variable ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN"
-.Dv MAXHOSTNAMELEN
-.It Li ".Dv TIOCGPGRP )"
-.Dv TIOCGPGRP )
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Dv
-without arguments.
-.Ql \&.Dv
-is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Errno's (Section two only)
-The
-.Ql \&.Er
-errno macro specifies the error return value
-for section two library routines.
-The second example
-below shows
-.Ql \&.Er
-used with the
-.Ql \&.Bq
-general text domain macro, as it would be used in
-a section two manual page.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Er ERRNOTYPE ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Bq Er ENOTDIR" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Er ENOENT
-.Er ENOENT
-.It Li \&.Er ENOENT\ )\ ;
-.Er ENOENT ) ;
-.It Li \&.Bq \&Er ENOTDIR
-.Bq Er ENOTDIR
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Er
-without arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Er
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Environment Variables
-The
-.Ql \&.Ev
-macro specifies an environment variable.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ev argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ev PRINTER ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Ev DISPLAY
-.Ev DISPLAY
-.It Li \&.Ev PATH\ .
-.Ev PATH .
-.It Li \&.Ev PRINTER\ )\ )\ ,
-.Ev PRINTER ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Ev
-without arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Ev
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Function Argument
-The
-.Ql \&.Fa
-macro is used to refer to function arguments (parameters)
-outside of the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section of the manual or inside
-the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section should a parameter list be too
-long for the
-.Ql \&.Fn
-macro and the enclosure macros
-.Ql \&.Fo
-and
-.Ql \&.Fc
-must be used.
-.Ql \&.Fa
-may also be used to refer to structure members.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Fa function_argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fa d_namlen\ )\ )\ ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Fa d_namlen\ )\ )\ ,
-.Fa d_namlen ) ) ,
-.It Li \&.Fa iov_len
-.Fa iov_len
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Fa
-without arguments.
-.Ql \&.Fa
-is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Function Declaration
-The
-.Ql \&.Fd
-macro is used in the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section with section two or three
-functions.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fd
-macro does not call other macros and is not callable by other
-macros.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Fd include_file (or defined variable)
-.Pp
-In the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section a
-.Ql \&.Fd
-request causes a line break if a function has already been presented
-and a break has not occurred.
-This leaves a nice vertical space
-in between the previous function call and the declaration for the
-next function.
-.Ss Flags
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl
-macro handles command line flags.
-It prepends
-a dash,
-.Ql \- ,
-to the flag.
-For interactive command flags, which
-are not prepended with a dash, the
-.Ql \&.Cm
-(command modifier)
-macro is identical, but without the dash.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Fl argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fl \-s \-t \-v" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Fl
-.Fl
-.It Li \&.Fl cfv
-.Fl cfv
-.It Li \&.Fl cfv\ .
-.Fl cfv .
-.It Li \&.Fl s v t
-.Fl s v t
-.It Li \&.Fl -\ ,
-.Fl - ,
-.It Li \&.Fl xyz\ )\ ,
-.Fl xyz ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl
-macro without any arguments results
-in a dash representing stdin/stdout.
-Note that giving
-.Ql \&.Fl
-a single dash, will result in two dashes.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Functions (library routines)
-The .Fn macro is modeled on ANSI C conventions.
-.Bd -literal
-Usage: .Fn [type] function [[type] parameters ... \*(Pu]
-.Ed
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fn .int align. .const * char *sptrsxx" -compact
-.It Li "\&.Fn getchar"
-.Fn getchar
-.It Li "\&.Fn strlen ) ,"
-.Fn strlen ) ,
-.It Li \&.Fn "\\*qint align\\*q" "\\*qconst * char *sptrs\\*q" ,
-.Fn "int align" "const * char *sptrs" ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Fn
-without any arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fn
-macro
-is parsed and is callable,
-note that any call to another macro signals the end of
-the
-.Ql \&.Fn
-call (it will close-parenthesis at that point).
-.Pp
-For functions that have more than eight parameters (and this
-is rare), the
-macros
-.Ql \&.Fo
-(function open)
-and
-.Ql \&.Fc
-(function close)
-may be used with
-.Ql \&.Fa
-(function argument)
-to get around the limitation. For example:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Fo "int res_mkquery"
-\&.Fa "int op"
-\&.Fa "char *dname"
-\&.Fa "int class"
-\&.Fa "int type"
-\&.Fa "char *data"
-\&.Fa "int datalen"
-\&.Fa "struct rrec *newrr"
-\&.Fa "char *buf"
-\&.Fa "int buflen"
-\&.Fc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces:
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Fo "int res_mkquery"
-.Fa "int op"
-.Fa "char *dname"
-.Fa "int class"
-.Fa "int type"
-.Fa "char *data"
-.Fa "int datalen"
-.Fa "struct rrec *newrr"
-.Fa "char *buf"
-.Fa "int buflen"
-.Fc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Fo
-and
-.Ql \&.Fc
-macros are parsed and are callable.
-In the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section, the function will always begin at
-the beginning of line.
-If there is more than one function
-presented in the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section and a function type has not been
-given, a line break will occur, leaving a nice vertical space
-between the current function name and the one prior.
-At the moment,
-.Ql \&.Fn
-does not check its word boundaries
-against troff line lengths and may split across a newline
-ungracefully.
-This will be fixed in the near future.
-.Ss Function Type
-This macro is intended for the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section.
-It may be used
-anywhere else in the man page without problems, but its main purpose
-is to present the function type in kernel normal form for the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-of sections two and three
-(it causes a line break allowing the function name to appear
-on the next line).
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ft type ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width "\&.Ft struct stat" -offset 14n -compact
-.It Li \&.Ft struct stat
-.Ft struct stat
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Ft
-request is not callable by other macros.
-.Ss Interactive Commands
-The
-.Ql \&.Ic
-macro designates an interactive or internal command.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Ic argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ic setenv , unsetenvxx" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Ic :wq
-.Ic :wq
-.It Li \&.Ic do while {...}
-.Ic do while {...}
-.It Li \&.Ic setenv\ , unsetenv
-.Ic setenv , unsetenv
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Ic
-without arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Ic
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Name Macro
-The
-.Ql \&.Nm
-macro is used for the document title or subject name.
-It has the peculiarity of remembering the first
-argument it was called with, which should
-always be the subject name of the page.
-When called without
-arguments,
-.Ql \&.Nm
-regurgitates this initial name for the sole purpose
-of making less work for the author.
-Note:
-a section two
-or three document function name is addressed with the
-.Ql \&.Nm
-in the
-.Sx NAME
-section, and with
-.Ql \&.Fn
-in the
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-and remaining sections.
-For interactive commands, such as the
-.Ql while
-command keyword in
-.Xr csh 1 ,
-the
-.Ql \&.Ic
-macro should be used.
-While the
-.Ql \&.Ic
-is nearly identical
-to
-.Ql \&.Nm ,
-it can not recall the first argument it was invoked with.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Nm argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Nm mdoc.sample" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Nm mdoc.sample
-.Nm mdoc.sample
-.It Li \&.Nm \e-mdoc
-.Nm \-mdoc .
-.It Li \&.Nm foo\ )\ )\ ,
-.Nm foo ) ) ,
-.It Li \&.Nm
-.Nm
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Nm
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Options
-The
-.Ql \&.Op
-macro
-places option brackets around the any remaining arguments on the command
-line, and places any
-trailing punctuation outside the brackets.
-The macros
-.Ql \&.Oc
-and
-.Ql \&.Oo
-may be used across one or more lines.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Op options ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ," -compact -offset indent
-.It Li \&.Op
-.Op
-.It Li ".Op Fl k"
-.Op Fl k
-.It Li ".Op Fl k ) ."
-.Op Fl k ) .
-.It Li ".Op Fl k Ar kookfile"
-.Op Fl k Ar kookfile
-.It Li ".Op Fl k Ar kookfile ,"
-.Op Fl k Ar kookfile ,
-.It Li ".Op Ar objfil Op Ar corfil"
-.Op Ar objfil Op Ar corfil
-.It Li ".Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ,"
-.Op Fl c Ar objfil Op Ar corfil ,
-.It Li \&.Op word1 word2
-.Op word1 word2
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Oc
-and
-.Ql \&.Oo
-macros:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Oo
-\&.Op \&Fl k \&Ar kilobytes
-\&.Op \&Fl i \&Ar interval
-\&.Op \&Fl c \&Ar count
-\&.Oc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produce:
-.Oo
-.Op Fl k Ar kilobytes
-.Op Fl i Ar interval
-.Op Fl c Ar count
-.Oc
-.Pp
-The macros
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-.Ql \&.Oc
-and
-.Ql \&.Oo
-are parsed and are callable.
-.Ss Pathnames
-The
-.Ql \&.Pa
-macro formats path or file names.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Pa pathname \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX ) ." -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Pa /usr/share
-.Pa /usr/share
-.It Li \&.Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX\ )\ .
-.Pa /tmp/fooXXXXX ) .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Pa
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Variables
-Generic variable reference:
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Va variable ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Va char s ] ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Va count
-.Va count
-.It Li \&.Va settimer ,
-.Va settimer ,
-.It Li \&.Va int\ *prt\ )\ :
-.Va int\ *prt ) :
-.It Li \&.Va char\ s\ ]\ )\ )\ ,
-.Va char\ s ] ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Va
-without any arguments.
-The
-.Ql \&.Va
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Manual Page Cross References
-The
-.Ql \&.Xr
-macro expects the first argument to be
-a manual page name, and the second argument, if it exists,
-to be either a section page number or punctuation.
-Any
-remaining arguments are assumed to be punctuation.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Xr man_page [1,...,8] \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Xr mdoc 7 ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc
-.Xr mdoc
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc\ ,
-.Xr mdoc ,
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc 7
-.Xr mdoc 7
-.It Li \&.Xr mdoc 7\ )\ )\ ,
-.Xr mdoc 7 ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Xr
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Xr
-without
-any arguments.
-.Sh GENERAL TEXT DOMAIN
-.Ss AT&T Macro
-.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
-Usage: .At [v6 | v7 | 32v | V.1 | V.4] ... \*(Pu
-.Ed
-.Bl -tag -width ".At v6 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".At"
-.At
-.It Li ".At v6 ."
-.At v6 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.At
-macro is
-.Em not
-parsed and
-.Em not
-callable. It accepts at most two arguments.
-.Ss BSD Macro
-.Dl Usage: .Bx [Version/release] ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Bx 4.3 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Bx"
-.Bx
-.It Li ".Bx 4.3 ."
-.Bx 4.3 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Bx
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss FreeBSD Macro
-.Bd -literal -offset indent -compact
-Usage: .Fx Version.release ... \*(Pu
-.Ed
-.Bl -tag -width ".Fx 2.2 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Fx 2.2 ."
-.Fx 2.2 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Fx
-macro is
-.Em not
-parsed and
-.Em not
-callable. It accepts at most two arguments.
-.Ss UNIX Macro
-.Dl Usage: .Ux ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Ux 4.3 ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Ux"
-.Ux
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Ux
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Enclosure and Quoting Macros
-The concept of enclosure is similar to quoting.
-The object being to enclose one or more strings between
-a pair of characters like quotes or parentheses.
-The terms quoting and enclosure are used
-interchangeably throughout this document.
-Most of the
-one line enclosure macros end
-in small letter
-.Ql q
-to give a hint of quoting, but there are a few irregularities.
-For each enclosure macro
-there is also a pair of open and close macros which end
-in small letters
-.Ql o
-and
-.Ql c
-respectively.
-These can be used across one or more lines of text
-and while they have nesting limitations, the one line quote macros
-can be used inside
-of them.
-.Pp
-.ne 5
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -column "quote " "close " "open " "Enclose Stringx(in XX) " XXstringXX
-.Em " Quote Close Open Function Result"
-\&.Aq .Ac .Ao Angle Bracket Enclosure <string>
-\&.Bq .Bc .Bo Bracket Enclosure [string]
-\&.Dq .Dc .Do Double Quote ``string''
- .Ec .Eo Enclose String (in XX) XXstringXX
-\&.Pq .Pc .Po Parenthesis Enclosure (string)
-\&.Ql Quoted Literal `st' or string
-\&.Qq .Qc .Qo Straight Double Quote "string"
-\&.Sq .Sc .So Single Quote `string'
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Except for the irregular macros noted below, all
-of the quoting macros are parsed and callable.
-All handle punctuation properly, as long as it
-is presented one character at a time and separated by spaces.
-The quoting macros examine opening and closing punctuation
-to determine whether it comes before or after the
-enclosing string. This makes some nesting possible.
-.Bl -tag -width xxx,xxxx
-.It Li \&.Ec , \&.Eo
-These macros expect the first argument to be the
-opening and closing strings respectively.
-.It Li \&.Ql
-The quoted literal macro behaves differently for
-.Xr troff
-than
-.Xr nroff .
-If formatted with
-.Xr nroff ,
-a quoted literal is always quoted. If formatted with
-troff, an item is only quoted if the width
-of the item is less than three constant width characters.
-This is to make short strings more visible where the font change
-to literal (constant width) is less noticeable.
-.It Li \&.Pf
-The prefix macro is not callable, but it is parsed:
-.Bl -tag -width "(namexx" -offset indent
-.It Li ".Pf ( Fa name2"
-becomes
-.Pf ( Fa name2 .
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Ns
-(no space) macro performs the analogous suffix function.
-.El
-.Pp
-.ne 4
-Examples of quoting:
-.Bl -tag -width ".Aq Pa ctype.h ) ,xxxxxxxx" -compact -offset indent
-.It Li \&.Aq
-.Aq
-.It Li \&.Aq \&Ar ctype.h\ )\ ,
-.Aq Ar ctype.h ) ,
-.It Li \&.Bq
-.Bq
-.It Li \&.Bq \&Em Greek \&, French \&.
-.Bq Em Greek , French .
-.It Li \&.Dq
-.Dq
-.It Li ".Dq string abc ."
-.Dq string abc .
-.It Li ".Dq \'^[A-Z]\'"
-.Dq \'^[A-Z]\'
-.It Li "\&.Ql man mdoc"
-.Ql man mdoc
-.It Li \&.Qq
-.Qq
-.It Li "\&.Qq string ) ,"
-.Qq string ) ,
-.It Li "\&.Qq string Ns ),"
-.Qq string Ns ),
-.It Li \&.Sq
-.Sq
-.It Li "\&.Sq string
-.Sq string
-.El
-.Pp
-For a good example of nested enclosure macros, see the
-.Ql \&.Op
-option macro.
-It was created from the same
-underlying enclosure macros as those presented in the list
-above.
-The
-.Ql \&.Xo
-and
-.Ql \&.Xc
-extended argument list macros
-were also built from the same underlying routines and are a good
-example of
-.Nm \-mdoc
-macro usage at its worst.
-.Ss No\-Op or Normal Text Macro
-The macro
-.Ql \&.No
-is
-a hack for words in a macro command line which should
-.Em not
-be formatted and follows the conventional syntax
-for content macros.
-.Ss No Space Macro
-The
-.Ql \&.Ns
-macro eliminates unwanted spaces in between macro requests.
-It is useful for old style argument lists where there is no space
-between the flag and argument:
-.Bl -tag -width ".Op Fl I Ns Ar directoryxx" -offset indent
-.It Li ".Op Fl I Ns Ar directory"
-produces
-.Op Fl I Ns Ar directory
-.El
-.Pp
-Note: the
-.Ql \&.Ns
-macro always invokes the
-.Ql \&.No
-macro after eliminating the space unless another macro name
-follows it.
-The macro
-.Ql \&.Ns
-is parsed and is callable.
-.Ss Section Cross References
-The
-.Ql \&.Sx
-macro designates a reference to a section header
-within the same document.
-It is parsed and is callable.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "Li \&.Sx FILES" -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Sx FILES
-.Sx FILES
-.El
-.Ss References and Citations
-The following macros make a modest attempt to handle references.
-At best, the macros make it convenient to manually drop in a subset of
-refer style references.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width 6n -offset indent -compact
-.It Li ".Rs"
-Reference Start.
-Causes a line break and begins collection
-of reference information until the
-reference end macro is read.
-.It Li ".Re"
-Reference End.
-The reference is printed.
-.It Li ".%A"
-Reference author name, one name per invocation.
-.It Li ".%B"
-Book title.
-.It Li ".\&%C"
-City/place.
-.It Li ".\&%D"
-Date.
-.It Li ".%J"
-Journal name.
-.It Li ".%N"
-Issue number.
-.It Li ".%O"
-Optional information.
-.It Li ".%P"
-Page number.
-.It Li ".%R"
-Report name.
-.It Li ".%T"
-Title of article.
-.It Li ".%V"
-Volume(s).
-.El
-.Pp
-The macros beginning with
-.Ql %
-are not callable, and are parsed only for the trade name macro which
-returns to its caller.
-(And not very predictably at the moment either.)
-The purpose is to allow trade names
-to be pretty printed in
-.Xr troff Ns / Ns Xr ditroff
-output.
-.Ss Return Values
-The
-.Ql \&.Rv
-macro generates text for use in the
-.Sx RETURN VALUES
-section.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Rv [-std function]
-.Pp
-.Ql \&.Rv -std atexit
-will generate the following text:
-.Pp
-.\" fake chapter 3 to avoid error message from Rv
-.ds cH 3
-.Rv -std atexit
-.\" and back to 7 again
-.ds cH 7
-.Pp
-The
-.Fl std
-option is valid only for manual page sections 2 and 3.
-.Ss Trade Names (or Acronyms and Type Names)
-The trade name macro is generally a small caps macro for
-all upper case words longer than two characters.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Tn symbol ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Tn ASCII" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Tn DEC
-.Tn DEC
-.It Li \&.Tn ASCII
-.Tn ASCII
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Tn
-macro
-is parsed and is callable by other macros.
-.Ss Extended Arguments
-The
-.Ql \&.Xo
-and
-.Ql \&.Xc
-macros allow one to extend an argument list
-on a macro boundary.
-Argument lists cannot
-be extended within a macro
-which expects all of its arguments on one line such
-as
-.Ql \&.Op .
-.Pp
-Here is an example of
-.Ql \&.Xo
-using the space mode macro to turn spacing off:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Sm off
-\&.It Xo Sy I Ar operation
-\&.No \een Ar count No \een
-\&.Xc
-\&.Sm on
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.Sm off
-.It Xo Sy I Ar operation
-.No \en Ar count No \en
-.Xc
-.Sm on
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Another one:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Sm off
-\&.It Cm S No \&/ Ar old_pattern Xo
-\&.No \&/ Ar new_pattern
-\&.No \&/ Op Cm g
-\&.Xc
-\&.Sm on
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.Sm off
-.It Cm S No \&/ Ar old_pattern Xo
-.No \&/ Ar new_pattern
-.No \&/ Op Cm g
-.Xc
-.Sm on
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Another example of
-.Ql \&.Xo
-and using enclosure macros:
-Test the value of an variable.
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.It Xo
-\&.Ic .ifndef
-\&.Oo \e&! Oc Ns Ar variable
-\&.Op Ar operator variable ...
-\&.Xc
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Bl -tag -width flag -compact
-.It Xo
-.Ic .ifndef
-.Oo \&! Oc Ns Ar variable
-.Op Ar operator variable ...
-.Xc
-.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-All of the above examples have used the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-macro on the argument list of the
-.Ql \&.It
-(list-item)
-macro.
-The extend macros are not used very often, and when they are
-it is usually to extend the list-item argument list.
-Unfortunately, this is also where the extend macros are the
-most finicky.
-In the first two examples, spacing was turned off;
-in the third, spacing was desired in part of the output but
-not all of it.
-To make these macros work in this situation make sure
-the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-and
-.Ql \&.Xc
-macros are placed as shown in the third example.
-If the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-macro is not alone on the
-.Ql \&.It
-argument list, spacing will be unpredictable.
-The
-.Ql \&.Ns
-(no space macro)
-must not occur as the first or last macro on a line
-in this situation.
-Out of 900 manual pages (about 1500 actual pages)
-currently released with
-.Bx
-only fifteen use the
-.Ql \&.Xo
-macro.
-.Sh PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN
-.Ss Section Headers
-The first three
-.Ql \&.Sh
-section header macros
-list below are required in every
-man page.
-The remaining section headers
-are recommended at the discretion of the author
-writing the manual page.
-The
-.Ql \&.Sh
-macro can take up to nine arguments.
-It is parsed and but is not callable.
-.Bl -tag -width ".Sh SYNOPSIS"
-.It \&.Sh NAME
-The
-.Ql \&.Sh NAME
-macro is mandatory.
-If not specified,
-the headers, footers and page layout defaults
-will not be set and things will be rather unpleasant.
-The
-.Sx NAME
-section consists of at least three items.
-The first is the
-.Ql \&.Nm
-name macro naming the subject of the man page.
-The second is the Name Description macro,
-.Ql \&.Nd ,
-which separates the subject
-name from the third item, which is the description.
-The
-description should be the most terse and lucid possible,
-as the space available is small.
-.It \&.Sh SYNOPSIS
-The
-.Sx SYNOPSIS
-section describes the typical usage of the
-subject of a man page.
-The macros required
-are either
-.Ql ".Nm" ,
-.Ql ".Cd" ,
-.Ql ".Fn" ,
-(and possibly
-.Ql ".Fo" ,
-.Ql ".Fc" ,
-.Ql ".Fd" ,
-.Ql ".Ft"
-macros).
-The function name
-macro
-.Ql ".Fn"
-is required
-for manual page sections 2 and 3, the command and general
-name macro
-.Ql \&.Nm
-is required for sections 1, 5, 6, 7, 8.
-Section 4 manuals require a
-.Ql ".Nm" ,
-.Ql ".Fd"
-or a
-.Ql ".Cd"
-configuration device usage macro.
-Several other macros may be necessary to produce
-the synopsis line as shown below:
-.Pp
-.Bd -filled -offset indent
-.Nm cat
-.Op Fl benstuv
-.Op Fl
-.Ar
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The following macros were used:
-.Pp
-.Dl \&.Nm cat
-.Dl \&.Op \&Fl benstuv
-.Dl \&.Op \&Fl
-.Dl \&.Ar
-.Pp
-.Sy Note :
-The macros
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-.Ql \&.Fl ,
-and
-.Ql \&.Ar
-recognize the pipe bar character
-.Ql \*(Ba ,
-so a command line such as:
-.Pp
-.Dl ".Op Fl a | Fl b"
-.Pp
-will not go orbital.
-.Xr Troff
-normally interprets a \*(Ba as a special operator.
-See
-.Sx PREDEFINED STRINGS
-for a usable \*(Ba
-character in other situations.
-.It \&.Sh DESCRIPTION
-In most cases the first text in the
-.Sx DESCRIPTION
-section
-is a brief paragraph on the command, function or file,
-followed by a lexical list of options and respective
-explanations.
-To create such a list, the
-.Ql \&.Bl
-begin-list,
-.Ql \&.It
-list-item and
-.Ql \&.El
-end-list
-macros are used (see
-.Sx Lists and Columns
-below).
-.El
-.Pp
-The following
-.Ql \&.Sh
-section headers are part of the
-preferred manual page layout and must be used appropriately
-to maintain consistency.
-They are listed in the order
-in which they would be used.
-.Bl -tag -width SYNOPSIS
-.It \&.Sh ENVIRONMENT
-The
-.Sx ENVIRONMENT
-section should reveal any related
-environment
-variables and clues to their behavior and/or usage.
-.It \&.Sh EXAMPLES
-There are several ways to create examples.
-See
-the
-.Sx EXAMPLES
-section below
-for details.
-.It \&.Sh FILES
-Files which are used or created by the man page subject
-should be listed via the
-.Ql \&.Pa
-macro in the
-.Sx FILES
-section.
-.It \&.Sh SEE ALSO
-References to other material on the man page topic and
-cross references to other relevant man pages should
-be placed in the
-.Sx SEE ALSO
-section.
-Cross references
-are specified using the
-.Ql \&.Xr
-macro.
-Cross references in the
-.Sx SEE ALSO
-section should be sorted by section number, and then
-placed in alphabetical order and comma separated. For example:
-.Pp
-.Xr ls 1 ,
-.Xr ps 1 ,
-.Xr group 5 ,
-.Xr passwd 5 .
-.Pp
-At this time
-.Xr refer 1
-style references are not accommodated.
-.It \&.Sh CONFORMING TO
-If the command, library function or file adheres to a
-specific implementation such as
-.St -p1003.2
-or
-.St -ansiC
-this should be noted here.
-If the
-command does not adhere to any standard, its history
-should be noted in the
-.Sx HISTORY
-section.
-.It \&.Sh HISTORY
-Any command which does not adhere to any specific standards
-should be outlined historically in this section.
-.It \&.Sh AUTHORS
-Credits, if need be, should be placed here.
-.It \&.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-Diagnostics from a command should be placed in this section.
-.It \&.Sh ERRORS
-Specific error handling, especially from library functions
-(man page sections 2 and 3) should go here.
-The
-.Ql \&.Er
-macro is used to specify an errno.
-.It \&.Sh BUGS
-Blatant problems with the topic go here...
-.El
-.Pp
-User specified
-.Ql \&.Sh
-sections may be added,
-for example, this section was set with:
-.Bd -literal -offset 14n
-\&.Sh PAGE STRUCTURE DOMAIN
-.Ed
-.Ss Paragraphs and Line Spacing.
-.Bl -tag -width 6n
-.It \&.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Pp
-paragraph command may
-be used to specify a line space where necessary.
-The macro is not necessary after a
-.Ql \&.Sh
-or
-.Ql \&.Ss
-macro or before
-a
-.Ql \&.Bl
-macro.
-(The
-.Ql \&.Bl
-macro asserts a vertical distance unless the -compact flag is given).
-.El
-.\" This worked with version one, need to redo for version three
-.\" .Pp
-.\" .Ds I
-.\" .Cw (ax+bx+c) \ is\ produced\ by\ \&
-.\" .\".Cw (ax+bx+c) \&.Va_by_) \&_and_\& \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\&
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx\ (
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va ax
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy \+
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \&(\&
-.\" .Va ax
-.\" .Cx +
-.\" .Va by
-.\" .Cx +
-.\" .Va c )
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Em is produced by
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Li \&.Va by
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy \+
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va c )
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cw
-.\" .De
-.\" .Pp
-.\" This example shows the same equation in a different format.
-.\" The spaces
-.\" around the
-.\" .Li \&+
-.\" signs were forced with
-.\" .Li \e :
-.\" .Pp
-.\" .Ds I
-.\" .Cw (ax\ +\ bx\ +\ c) \ is\ produced\ by\ \&
-.\" .\".Cw (ax+bx+c) \&.Va_by_) \&_and_\& \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\&
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx\ (
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va a
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy x
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx \e\ +\e\ \e&
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \&(\&
-.\" .Va a
-.\" .Sy x
-.\" .Cx \ +\ \&
-.\" .Va b
-.\" .Sy y
-.\" .Cx \ +\ \&
-.\" .Va c )
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Em is produced by
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va b
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Sy y
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx \e\ +\e\ \e&
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Va c )
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cw
-.\" .De
-.\" .Pp
-.\" The incantation below was
-.\" lifted from the
-.\" .Xr adb 1
-.\" manual page:
-.\" .Pp
-.\" .Ds I
-.\" .Cw \&[?/]m_b1_e1_f1[?/]\& is\ produced\ by
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Nm m
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Nm m
-.\" .Ad \ b1 e1 f1
-.\" .Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Em is produced by
-.\" .Cx \t
-.\" .Li \&.Ar \e\ b1 e1 f1
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Op Sy ?/
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cl Cx \t\t
-.\" .Li \&.Cx
-.\" .Cx
-.\" .Cw
-.\" .De
-.\" .Pp
-.Ss Keeps
-The only keep that is implemented at this time is for words.
-The macros are
-.Ql \&.Bk
-(begin-keep)
-and
-.Ql \&.Ek
-(end-keep).
-The only option that
-.Ql \&.Bk
-accepts is
-.Fl words
-and is useful for preventing line breaks in the middle of options.
-In the example for the make command line arguments (see
-.Sx What's in a name ) ,
-the keep prevented
-.Xr nroff
-from placing up the
-flag and the argument
-on separate lines.
-(Actually, the option macro used to prevent this from occurring,
-but was dropped when the decision (religious) was made to force
-right justified margins in
-.Xr troff
-as options in general look atrocious when spread across a sparse
-line.
-More work needs to be done with the keep macros, a
-.Fl line
-option needs to be added.)
-.Ss Examples and Displays
-There are five types of displays, a quickie one line indented display
-.Ql \&.D1 ,
-a quickie one line literal display
-.Ql \&.Dl ,
-and a block literal, block filled and block ragged which use
-the
-.Ql \&.Bd
-begin-display
-and
-.Ql \&.Ed
-end-display macros.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width \&.Dlxx
-.It Li \&.D1
-(D-one) Display one line of indented text.
-This macro is parsed, but it is not callable.
-.Pp
-.Dl Fl ldghfstru
-.Pp
-The above was produced by:
-.Li \&.Dl Fl ldghfstru .
-.It Li \&.Dl
-(D-ell)
-Display one line of indented
-.Em literal
-text.
-The
-.Ql \&.Dl
-example macro has been used throughout this
-file.
-It allows
-the indent (display) of one line of text.
-Its default font is set to
-constant width (literal) however
-it is parsed and will recognized other macros.
-It is not callable however.
-.Pp
-.Dl % ls -ldg /usr/local/bin
-.Pp
-The above was produced by
-.Li \&.Dl % ls -ldg /usr/local/bin .
-.It Li \&.Bd
-Begin-display.
-The
-.Ql \&.Bd
-display must be ended with the
-.Ql \&.Ed
-macro.
-Displays may be nested within displays and
-lists.
-.Ql \&.Bd
-has the following syntax:
-.Pp
-.Dl ".Bd display-type [-offset offset_value] [-compact]"
-.Pp
-The display-type must be one of the following four types and
-may have an offset specifier for indentation:
-.Ql \&.Bd .
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "file file_name " -compact
-.It Fl ragged
-Display a block of text as typed,
-right (and left) margin edges are left ragged.
-.It Fl filled
-Display a filled (formatted) block.
-The block of text is formatted (the edges are filled \-
-not left unjustified).
-.It Fl literal
-Display a literal block, useful for source code or
-simple tabbed or spaced text.
-.It Fl file Ar file_name
-The file name following the
-.Fl file
-flag is read and displayed.
-Literal mode is
-asserted and tabs are set at 8 constant width character
-intervals, however any
-.Xr troff/ Ns Nm \-mdoc
-commands in file will be processed.
-.It Fl offset Ar string
-If
-.Fl offset
-is specified with one of the following strings, the string
-is interpreted to indicate the level of indentation for the
-forthcoming block of text:
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "indent-two" -compact
-.It Ar left
-Align block on the current left margin,
-this is the default mode of
-.Ql \&.Bd .
-.It Ar center
-Supposedly center the block.
-At this time
-unfortunately, the block merely gets
-left aligned about an imaginary center margin.
-.It Ar indent
-Indents by one default indent value or tab.
-The default
-indent value is also used for the
-.Ql \&.D1
-display so one is guaranteed the two types of displays
-will line up.
-This indent is normally set to 6n or about two
-thirds of an inch (six constant width characters).
-.It Ar indent-two
-Indents two times the default indent value.
-.It Ar right
-This
-.Em left
-aligns the block about two inches from
-the right side of the page.
-This macro needs
-work and perhaps may never do the right thing by
-.Xr troff .
-.El
-.El
-.It ".Ed"
-End-display.
-.El
-.Ss Font Modes
-There are five macros for changing the appearance of the manual page text:
-.Bl -tag -width \&.Emxx
-.It \&.Em
-Text may be stressed or emphasized with the
-.Ql \&.Em
-macro.
-The usual font for emphasis is italic.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Em argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Em vide infra ) ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li ".Em does not"
-.Em does not
-.It Li ".Em exceed 1024 ."
-.Em exceed 1024 .
-.It Li ".Em vide infra ) ) ,"
-.Em vide infra ) ) ,
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Em
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-It is an error to call
-.Ql \&.Em
-without arguments.
-.It \&.Li
-The
-.Ql \&.Li
-literal macro may be used for special characters,
-variable constants, anything which should be displayed as it
-would be typed.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Li argument ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Li cntrl-D ) ," -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Li \een
-.Li \en
-.It Li \&.Li M1 M2 M3\ ;
-.Li M1 M2 M3 ;
-.It Li \&.Li cntrl-D\ )\ ,
-.Li cntrl-D ) ,
-.It Li \&.Li 1024\ ...
-.Li 1024 ...
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Li
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-.It \&.Sy
-The symbolic emphasis macro is generally a boldface macro in
-either the symbolic sense or the traditional English usage.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: .Sy symbol ... \*(Pu
-.Bl -tag -width ".Sy Important Noticex" -compact -offset 14n
-.It Li \&.Sy Important Notice
-.Sy Important Notice
-.El
-.Pp
-The
-.Ql \&.Sy
-macro is parsed and is callable.
-Arguments to
-.Ql \&.Sy
-may be quoted.
-.It Li \&.Bf
-Begin font mode.
-The
-.Ql \&.Bf
-font mode must be ended with the
-.Ql \&.Ef
-macro.
-Font modes may be nested within other font modes.
-.Ql \&.Bf
-has the following syntax:
-.Pp
-.Dl ".Bf font-mode"
-.Pp
-The font-mode must be one of the following three types:
-.Ql \&.Bf .
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "file file_name " -compact
-.It Sy \&Em | Fl emphasis
-Same as if the
-.Ql \&.Em
-macro was used for the entire block of text.
-.It Sy \&Li | Fl literal
-Same as if the
-.Ql \&.Li
-macro was used for the entire block of text.
-.It Sy \&Sy | Fl symbolic
-Same as if the
-.Ql \&.Sy
-macro was used for the entire block of text.
-.El
-.It ".Ef"
-End font mode.
-.El
-.Ss Tagged Lists and Columns
-There are several types of lists which may be initiated with the
-.Ql ".Bl"
-begin-list macro.
-Items within the list
-are specified with the
-.Ql ".It"
-item macro and
-each list must end with the
-.Ql ".El"
-macro.
-Lists may be nested within themselves and within displays.
-Columns may be used inside of lists, but lists are unproven
-inside of columns.
-.Pp
-In addition, several list attributes may be specified such as
-the width of a tag, the list offset, and compactness
-(blank lines between items allowed or disallowed).
-Most of this document has been formatted with a tag style list
-.Pq Fl tag .
-For a change of pace, the list-type used to present the list-types
-is an over-hanging list
-.Pq Fl ohang .
-This type of list is quite popular with
-.Tn TeX
-users, but might look a bit funny after having read many pages of
-tagged lists.
-The following list types are accepted by
-.Ql ".Bl" :
-.Pp
-.Bl -ohang -compact
-.It Fl bullet
-.It Fl item
-.It Fl enum
-These three are the simplest types of lists.
-Once the
-.Ql ".Bl"
-macro has been given, items in the list are merely
-indicated by a line consisting solely of the
-.Ql ".It"
-macro.
-For example, the source text for a simple enumerated list
-would look like:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
-\&.Bl -enum -compact
-\&.It
-\&Item one goes here.
-\&.It
-\&And item two here.
-\&.It
-\&Lastly item three goes here.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The results:
-.Pp
-.Bl -enum -offset indent-two -compact
-.It
-Item one goes here.
-.It
-And item two here.
-.It
-Lastly item three goes here.
-.El
-.Pp
-A simple bullet list construction:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent-two
-\&.Bl -bullet -compact
-\&.It
-\&Bullet one goes here.
-\&.It
-\&Bullet two here.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Produces:
-.Bl -bullet -offset indent-two -compact
-.It
-Bullet one goes here.
-.It
-Bullet two here.
-.El
-.Pp
-.It Fl tag
-.It Fl diag
-.It Fl hang
-.It Fl ohang
-.It Fl inset
-These list-types collect arguments specified with the
-.Ql \&.It
-macro and create a label which may be
-.Em inset
-into the forthcoming text,
-.Em hanged
-from the forthcoming text,
-.Em overhanged
-from above and not indented or
-.Em tagged .
-This
-list was constructed with the
-.Ql Fl ohang
-list-type.
-The
-.Ql \&.It
-macro is parsed only for the inset, hang
-and tag list-types and is not callable.
-Here is an example of inset labels:
-.Bl -inset -offset indent
-.It Em Tag
-The tagged list (also called a tagged paragraph) is the
-most common type of list used in the Berkeley manuals.
-.It Em Diag
-Diag lists create section four diagnostic lists
-and are similar to inset lists except callable
-macros are ignored.
-.It Em Hang
-Hanged labels are a matter of taste.
-.It Em Ohang
-Overhanging labels are nice when space is constrained.
-.It Em Inset
-Inset labels are useful for controlling blocks of
-paragraphs and are valuable for converting
-.Nm \-mdoc
-manuals to other formats.
-.El
-.Pp
-Here is the source text which produced the above example:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Bl -inset -offset indent
-\&.It Em Tag
-\&The tagged list (also called a tagged paragraph) is the
-\&most common type of list used in the Berkeley manuals.
-\&.It Em Diag
-\&Diag lists create section four diagnostic lists
-\&and are similar to inset lists except callable
-\¯os are ignored.
-\&.It Em Hang
-\&Hanged labels are a matter of taste.
-\&.It Em Ohang
-\&Overhanging labels are nice when space is constrained.
-\&.It Em Inset
-\&Inset labels are useful for controlling blocks of
-\¶graphs and are valuable for converting
-\&.Nm \-mdoc
-\&manuals to other formats.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Here is a hanged list with two items:
-.Bl -hang -offset indent
-.It Em Hanged
-labels appear similar to tagged lists when the
-label is smaller than the label width.
-.It Em Longer hanged list labels
-blend in to the paragraph unlike
-tagged paragraph labels.
-.El
-.Pp
-And the unformatted text which created it:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Bl -hang -offset indent
-\&.It Em Hanged
-\&labels appear similar to tagged lists when the
-\&label is smaller than the label width.
-\&.It Em Longer hanged list labels
-\&blend in to the paragraph unlike
-\&tagged paragraph labels.
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The tagged list which follows uses an optional width specifier to control
-the width of the tag.
-.Pp
-.Bl -tag -width "PAGEIN" -compact -offset indent
-.It SL
-sleep time of the process (seconds blocked)
-.It PAGEIN
-number of disk
-.Tn I/O Ns 's
-resulting from references
-by the process to pages not loaded in core.
-.It UID
-numerical user-id of process owner
-.It PPID
-numerical id of parent of process process priority
-(non-positive when in non-interruptible wait)
-.El
-.Pp
-The raw text:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Bl -tag -width "PAGEIN" -compact -offset indent
-\&.It SL
-\&sleep time of the process (seconds blocked)
-\&.It PAGEIN
-\&number of disk
-\&.Tn I/O Ns 's
-\&resulting from references
-\&by the process to pages not loaded in core.
-\&.It UID
-\&numerical user-id of process owner
-\&.It PPID
-\&numerical id of parent of process process priority
-\&(non-positive when in non-interruptible wait)
-\&.El
-.Ed
-.Pp
-Acceptable width specifiers:
-.Bl -tag -width Ar -offset indent
-.It Fl width Ar "\&Fl"
-sets the width to the default width for a flag.
-All callable
-macros have a default width value.
-The
-.Ql \&.Fl ,
-value is presently
-set to ten constant width characters or about five sixth of
-an inch.
-.It Fl width Ar "24n"
-sets the width to 24 constant width characters or about two
-inches.
-The
-.Ql n
-is absolutely necessary for the scaling to work correctly.
-.It Fl width Ar "ENAMETOOLONG"
-sets width to the constant width length of the
-string given.
-.It Fl width Ar "\\*qint mkfifo\\*q"
-again, the width is set to the constant width of the string
-given.
-.El
-.Pp
-If a width is not specified for the tag list type, the first
-time
-.Ql \&.It
-is invoked, an attempt is made to determine an appropriate
-width.
-If the first argument to
-.Ql ".It"
-is a callable macro, the default width for that macro will be used
-as if the macro name had been supplied as the width.
-However,
-if another item in the list is given with a different callable
-macro name, a new and nested list is assumed.
-.Sh PREDEFINED STRINGS
-The following strings are predefined as may be used by
-preceding with the troff string interpreting sequence
-.Ql \&\e*(xx
-where
-.Em xx
-is the name of the defined string or as
-.Ql \&\e*x
-where
-.Em x
-is the name of the string.
-The interpreting sequence may be used any where in the text.
-.Pp
-.Bl -column "String " "Nroff " "Troff " -offset indent
-.It Sy "String Nroff Troff"
-.It Li "<=" Ta \&<\&= Ta \*(<=
-.It Li ">=" Ta \&>\&= Ta \*(>=
-.It Li "Rq" Ta "''" Ta \*(Rq
-.It Li "Lq" Ta "``" Ta \*(Lq
-.It Li "ua" Ta ^ Ta \*(ua
-.It Li "aa" Ta ' Ta \*(aa
-.It Li "ga" Ta \` Ta \*(ga
-.\" .It Li "sL" Ta ` Ta \*(sL
-.\" .It Li "sR" Ta ' Ta \*(sR
-.It Li "q" Ta \&" Ta \*q
-.It Li "Pi" Ta pi Ta \*(Pi
-.It Li "Ne" Ta != Ta \*(Ne
-.It Li "Le" Ta <= Ta \*(Le
-.It Li "Ge" Ta >= Ta \*(Ge
-.It Li "Lt" Ta < Ta \*(Gt
-.It Li "Gt" Ta > Ta \*(Lt
-.It Li "Pm" Ta +- Ta \*(Pm
-.It Li "If" Ta infinity Ta \*(If
-.It Li "Na" Ta \fINaN\fP Ta \*(Na
-.It Li "Ba" Ta \fR\&|\fP Ta \*(Ba
-.El
-.Pp
-.Sy Note :
-The string named
-.Ql q
-should be written as
-.Ql \e*q
-since it is only one char.
-.Sh DIAGNOSTICS
-The debugging facilities for
-.Nm \-mdoc
-are limited, but can help detect subtle errors such
-as the collision of an argument name with an internal
-register or macro name.
-(A what?)
-A register is an arithmetic storage class for
-.Xr troff
-with a one or two character name.
-All registers internal to
-.Nm \-mdoc
-for
-.Xr troff
-and
-.Xr ditroff
-are two characters and
-of the form <upper_case><lower_case> such as
-.Ql \&Ar ,
-<lower_case><upper_case> as
-.Ql \&aR
-or
-<upper or lower letter><digit> as
-.Ql \&C\&1 .
-And adding to the muddle,
-.Xr troff
-has its own internal registers all of which are either
-two lower case characters or a dot plus a letter or meta-character
-character.
-In one of the introduction examples, it was shown how to
-prevent the interpretation of a macro name with the escape sequence
-.Ql \e& .
-This is sufficient for the internal register names also.
-.Pp
-.\" Every callable macro name has a corresponding register
-.\" of the same name (<upper_case><lower_case>).
-.\" There are also specific registers which have
-.\" been used for stacks and arrays and are listed in the
-.\" .Sx Appendix .
-.\" .Bd -ragged -offset 4n
-.\" [A-Z][a-z] registers corresponding to macro names (example ``Ar'')
-.\" [a-z][A-Z] registers corresponding to macro names (example ``aR'')
-.\" C[0-9] argument types (example C1)
-.\" O[0-9] offset stack (displays)
-.\" h[0-9] horizontal spacing stack (lists)
-.\" o[0-9] offset (stack) (lists)
-.\" t[0-9] tag stack (lists)
-.\" v[0-9] vertical spacing stack (lists)
-.\" w[0-9] width tag/label stack
-.\" .Ed
-.\" .Pp
-If a non-escaped register name is given in the argument list of a request
-unpredictable behavior will occur.
-In general, any time huge portions
-of text do not appear where expected in the output, or small strings
-such as list tags disappear, chances are there is a misunderstanding
-about an argument type in the argument list.
-Your mother never intended for you to remember this evil stuff - so here
-is a way to find out whether or not your arguments are valid: The
-.Ql \&.Db
-(debug)
-macro displays the interpretation of the argument list for most
-macros.
-Macros such as the
-.Ql \&.Pp
-(paragraph)
-macro do not contain debugging information.
-All of the callable macros do,
-and it is strongly advised whenever in doubt,
-turn on the
-.Ql \&.Db
-macro.
-.Pp
-.Dl Usage: \&.Db [on | off]
-.Pp
-An example of a portion of text with
-the debug macro placed above and below an
-artificially created problem (a flag argument
-.Ql \&aC
-which should be
-.Ql \e&aC
-in order to work):
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Db on
-\&.Op Fl aC Ar file )
-\&.Db off
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The resulting output:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-DEBUGGING ON
-DEBUG(argv) MACRO: `.Op' Line #: 2
- Argc: 1 Argv: `Fl' Length: 2
- Space: `' Class: Executable
- Argc: 2 Argv: `aC' Length: 2
- Space: `' Class: Executable
- Argc: 3 Argv: `Ar' Length: 2
- Space: `' Class: Executable
- Argc: 4 Argv: `file' Length: 4
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- Argc: 5 Argv: `)' Length: 1
- Space: ` ' Class: Closing Punctuation or suffix
- MACRO REQUEST: .Op Fl aC Ar file )
-DEBUGGING OFF
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The first line of information tells the name of the calling
-macro, here
-.Ql \&.Op ,
-and the line number it appears on.
-If one or more files are involved
-(especially if text from another file is included) the line number
-may be bogus.
-If there is only one file, it should be accurate.
-The second line gives the argument count, the argument
-.Pq Ql \&Fl
-and its length.
-If the length of an argument is two characters, the
-argument is tested to see if it is executable (unfortunately, any
-register which contains a non-zero value appears executable).
-The third line gives the space allotted for a class, and the
-class type.
-The problem here is the argument aC should not be
-executable.
-The four types of classes are string, executable, closing
-punctuation and opening punctuation.
-The last line shows the entire
-argument list as it was read.
-In this next example, the offending
-.Ql \&aC
-is escaped:
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-\&.Db on
-\&.Em An escaped \e&aC
-\&.Db off
-.Ed
-.Bd -literal -offset indent
-DEBUGGING ON
-DEBUG(fargv) MACRO: `.Em' Line #: 2
- Argc: 1 Argv: `An' Length: 2
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- Argc: 2 Argv: `escaped' Length: 7
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- Argc: 3 Argv: `aC' Length: 2
- Space: ` ' Class: String
- MACRO REQUEST: .Em An escaped &aC
-DEBUGGING OFF
-.Ed
-.Pp
-The argument
-.Ql \e&aC
-shows up with the same length of 2 as the
-.Ql \e&
-sequence produces a zero width, but a register
-named
-.Ql \e&aC
-was not found and the type classified as string.
-.Pp
-Other diagnostics consist of usage statements and are self explanatory.
-.Sh GROFF, TROFF AND NROFF
-The
-.Nm \-mdoc
-package does not need compatibility mode with
-.Xr groff .
-.Pp
-The package inhibits page breaks, and the headers and footers
-which normally occur at those breaks with
-.Xr nroff ,
-to make the manual more efficient for viewing on-line.
-At the moment,
-.Xr groff
-with
-.Fl T Ns Ar ascii
-does eject the imaginary remainder of the page at end of file.
-The inhibiting of the page breaks makes
-.Xr nroff Ns 'd
-files unsuitable for hardcopy.
-There is a register named
-.Ql \&cR
-which can be set to zero in the site dependent style file
-.Pa /usr/src/share/tmac/doc-nroff
-to restore the old style behavior.
-.Sh FILES
-.Bl -tag -width /usr/share/man0/template.doc -compact
-.It Pa /usr/share/tmac/tmac.doc
-manual macro package
-.It Pa /usr/share/misc/mdoc.template
-template for writing a man page
-.It Pa /usr/share/examples/mdoc/*
-several example man pages
-.El
-.Sh SEE ALSO
-.Xr man 1 ,
-.Xr troff 1 ,
-.Xr mdoc 7
-.Sh BUGS
-Undesirable hyphenation on the dash of a flag
-argument is not yet resolved, and causes
-occasional mishaps in the
-.Sx DESCRIPTION
-section.
-(line break on the hyphen).
-.Pp
-Predefined strings are not declared in documentation.
-.Pp
-Section 3f has not been added to the header routines.
-.Pp
-.Ql \&.Nm
-font should be changed in
-.Sx NAME
-section.
-.Pp
-.Ql \&.Fn
-needs to have a check to prevent splitting up
-if the line length is too short.
-Occasionally it
-separates the last parenthesis, and sometimes
-looks ridiculous if a line is in fill mode.
-.Pp
-The method used to prevent header and footer page
-breaks (other than the initial header and footer) when using
-nroff occasionally places an unsightly partially filled line (blank)
-at the would be bottom of the page.
-.Pp
-The list and display macros to not do any keeps
-and certainly should be able to.
-.\" Note what happens if the parameter list overlaps a newline
-.\" boundary.
-.\" to make sure a line boundary is crossed:
-.\" .Bd -literal
-.\" \&.Fn struct\e\ dictionarytable\e\ *dictionarylookup struct\e\ dictionarytable\e\ *tab[]
-.\" .Ed
-.\" .Pp
-.\" produces, nudge nudge,
-.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] ,
-.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] ,
-.\" nudge
-.\" .Fn struct\ dictionarytable\ *dictionarylookup char\ *h struct\ dictionarytable\ *tab[] .
-.\" .Pp
-.\" If double quotes are used, for example:
-.\" .Bd -literal
-.\" \&.Fn \*qstruct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup\*q \*qchar *h\*q \*qstruct dictionarytable *tab[]\*q
-.\" .Ed
-.\" .Pp
-.\" produces, nudge nudge,
-.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" ,
-.\" nudge
-.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" ,
-.\" nudge
-.\" .Fn "struct dictionarytable *dictionarylookup" "char *h" "struct dictionarytable *tab[]" .
-.\" .Pp
-.\" Not a pretty sight...
-.\" In a paragraph, a long parameter containing unpaddable spaces as
-.\" in the former example will cause
-.\" .Xr troff
-.\" to break the line and spread
-.\" the remaining words out.
-.\" The latter example will adjust nicely to
-.\" justified margins, but may break in between an argument and its
-.\" declaration.
-.\" In
-.\" .Xr nroff
-.\" the right margin adjustment is normally ragged and the problem is
-.\" not as severe.
diff --git a/raw/man7/move.7 b/raw/man7/move.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 75e4ef8..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/move.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "MOVE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-MOVE \- position a cursor
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-MOVE [ \fIdirection\fR { FROM | IN } ] \fIcursorname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBMOVE\fR repositions a cursor without retrieving any data.
-\fBMOVE\fR works exactly like the \fBFETCH\fR
-command, except it only positions the cursor and does not return rows.
-.PP
-Refer to
-FETCH [\fBfetch\fR(7)]
-for details on syntax and usage.
-.SH "OUTPUTS"
-.PP
-On successful completion, a \fBMOVE\fR command returns a command
-tag of the form
-.sp
-.nf
-MOVE \fIcount\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-The \fIcount\fR is the number
-of rows moved over (possibly zero).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.sp
-.nf
-BEGIN WORK;
-DECLARE liahona CURSOR FOR SELECT * FROM films;
-
--- Skip the first 5 rows:
-MOVE FORWARD 5 IN liahona;
-MOVE 5
-
--- Fetch the 6th row from the cursor liahona:
-FETCH 1 FROM liahona;
- code | title | did | date_prod | kind | len
--------+--------+-----+------------+--------+-------
- P_303 | 48 Hrs | 103 | 1982-10-22 | Action | 01:37
-(1 row)
-
--- Close the cursor liahona and end the transaction:
-CLOSE liahona;
-COMMIT WORK;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBMOVE\fR statement in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/netdevice.7 b/raw/man7/netdevice.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 792e768..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/netdevice.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,263 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Don't change the first line, it tells man that tbl is needed.
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" $Id: netdevice.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.TH NETDEVICE 7 1999-05-02 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-netdevice \- Low level access to Linux network devices.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B "#include <sys/ioctl.h>"
-.br
-.B "#include <net/if.h>"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This man page describes the sockets interface which is used to configure
-network devices.
-
-Linux supports some standard ioctls to configure network devices. They
-can be used on any socket's file descriptor regardless of the family or type.
-They pass an
-.B ifreq
-structure:
-
-.nf
-.ta 4 12 20
-struct ifreq {
- char ifr_name[IFNAMSIZ]; /* Interface name */
- union {
- struct sockaddr ifr_addr;
- struct sockaddr ifr_dstaddr;
- struct sockaddr ifr_broadaddr;
- struct sockaddr ifr_netmask;
- struct sockaddr ifr_hwaddr;
- short ifr_flags;
- int ifr_ifindex;
- int ifr_metric;
- int ifr_mtu;
- struct ifmap ifr_map;
- char ifr_slave[IFNAMSIZ];
- char ifr_newname[IFNAMSIZ];
- char * ifr_data;
- };
-};
-
-struct ifconf {
- int ifc_len; /* size of buffer */
- union {
- char * ifc_buf; /* buffer address */
- struct ifreq *ifc_req; /* array of structures */
- };
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-
-Normally, the user specifies which device to affect by setting
-.B ifr_name
-to the name of the interface. All other members of the structure may
-share memory.
-
-.SH IOCTLS
-If an ioctl is marked as privileged then using it requires an effective
-user id of 0 or the
-.B CAP_NET_ADMIN
-capability. If this is not the case
-.B EPERM
-will be returned.
-
-.TP
-.B SIOCGIFNAME
-Given the
-.BR ifr_ifindex ,
-return the name of the interface in
-.BR ifr_name .
-This is the only ioctl which returns its result in
-.BR ifr_name .
-
-.TP
-.B SIOCGIFINDEX
-Retrieve the interface index of the interface into
-.BR ifr_ifindex .
-
-.TP
-.BR SIOCGIFFLAGS ", " SIOCSIFFLAGS
-Get or set the active flag word of the device.
-.B ifr_flags
-contains a bitmask of the following values:
-
-.TS
-tab(:);
-c s
-l l.
-Device flags
-IFF_UP:Interface is running.
-IFF_BROADCAST:Valid broadcast address set.
-IFF_DEBUG:Internal debugging flag.
-IFF_LOOPBACK:Interface is a loopback interface.
-IFF_POINTOPOINT:Interface is a point-to-point link.
-IFF_RUNNING:Resources allocated.
-IFF_NOARP:No arp protocol, L2 destination address not set.
-IFF_PROMISC:Interface is in promiscuous mode.
-IFF_NOTRAILERS:Avoid use of trailers.
-IFF_ALLMULTI:Receive all multicast packets.
-IFF_MASTER:Master of a load balancing bundle.
-IFF_SLAVE:Slave of a load balancing bundle.
-IFF_MULTICAST:Supports multicast
-IFF_PORTSEL:Is able to select media type via ifmap.
-IFF_AUTOMEDIA:Auto media selection active.
-IFF_DYNAMIC:T{
-The addresses are lost when the interface goes down.
-T}
-.TE
-
-Setting the active flag word is a privileged operation, but any
-process may read it.
-.TP
-.BR SIOCGIFMETRIC ", " SIOCSIFMETRIC
-Get or set the metric of the device using
-.BR ifr_metric .
-This is currently not implemented; it sets
-.B ifr_metric
-to 0 if you attempt to read it and returns
-.B EOPNOTSUPP
-if you attempt to set it.
-.TP
-.BR SIOCGIFMTU ", " SIOCSIFMTU
-Get or set the MTU (Maximum Transfer Unit) of a device using
-.BR ifr_mtu .
-Setting the MTU is a privileged operation. Setting the MTU to
-too small values may cause kernel crashes.
-.TP
-.BR SIOCGIFHWADDR ", " SIOCSIFHWADDR
-Get or set the hardware address of a device using
-.BR ifr_hwaddr .
-The hardware address is specified in a struct
-.IR sockaddr .
-.I sa_family
-contains the ARPHRD_* device type,
-.I sa_data
-the L2 hardware address starting from byte 0.
-Setting the hardware address is a privileged operation.
-.TP
-.B SIOCSIFHWBROADCAST
-Set the hardware broadcast address of a device from
-.BR ifr_hwaddr .
-This is a privileged operation.
-.TP
-.BR SIOCGIFMAP ", " SIOCSIFMAP
-Get or set the interface's hardware parameters using
-.BR ifr_map .
-Setting the parameters is a privileged operation.
-
-.nf
-.ta 4 20 42
-struct ifmap
-{
- unsigned long mem_start;
- unsigned long mem_end;
- unsigned short base_addr;
- unsigned char irq;
- unsigned char dma;
- unsigned char port;
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-
-The interpretation of the ifmap structure depends on the device driver
-and the architecture.
-.TP
-.BR SIOCADDMULTI ", " SIOCDELMULTI
-Add an address to or delete an address from the device's link layer
-multicast filters using
-.BR ifr_hwaddr .
-These are privileged operations.
-See also
-.BR packet (7)
-for an alternative.
-.TP
-.BR SIOCGIFTXQLEN ", " SIOCSIFTXQLEN
-Get or set the transmit queue length of a device using
-.BR ifr_qlen .
-Setting the transmit queue length is a privileged operation.
-.TP
-.B SIOCSIFNAME
-Changes the name of the interface specified in
-.BR ifr_name
-to
-.BR ifr_newname .
-This is a privileged operation. It is only allowed when the interface
-is not up.
-.TP
-.B SIOCGIFCONF
-Return a list of interface (transport layer) addresses. This currently
-means only addresses of the AF_INET (IPv4) family for compatibility.
-The user passes a
-.B ifconf
-structure as argument to the ioctl. It contains a pointer to an array of
-.I ifreq
-structures in
-.B ifc_req
-and its length in bytes in
-.B ifc_len.
-The kernel fills the ifreqs with all current L3 interface addresses that
-are running:
-.I ifr_name
-contains the interface name (eth0:1 etc.),
-.I ifr_addr
-the address.
-The kernel returns with the actual length in
-.IR ifc_len .
-If
-.I ifc_len
-is equal to the original length the buffer probably has overflowed
-and you should retry with a bigger buffer to get all addresses.
-When no error occurs the ioctl returns 0;
-otherwise \-1. Overflow is no error.
-\" XXX Slaving isn't supported in 2.2
-.\" .TP
-.\" .BR SIOCGIFSLAVE ", " SIOCSIFSLAVE
-.\" Get or set the slave device using
-.\" .BR ifr_slave .
-.\" Setting the slave device is a privileged operation.
-.\" .PP
-.\" XXX add amateur radio stuff.
-.PP
-Most protocols support their own ioctls to configure protocol specific
-interface options. See the protocol man pages for a description.
-For configuring IP addresses see
-.BR ip (7).
-.PP
-In addition some devices support private ioctls. These are not described here.
-.SH NOTES
-Strictly seen,
-.B SIOCGIFCONF
-is IP specific and belongs in
-.BR ip (7).
-.LP
-The names of interfaces with no addresses or that don't have the
-.B IFF_RUNNING
-flag set can be found via
-.IR /proc/net/dev .
-.LP
-Local IPv6 IP addresses can be found via /proc/net or via
-.BR rtnetlink (7).
-.SH BUGS
-glibc 2.1 is missing the
-.I ifr_newname
-macro in net/if.h. Add the following to your program as workaround:
-.sp
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4 20 42
-#ifndef ifr_newname
-#define ifr_newname ifr_ifru.ifru_slave
-#endif
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR proc (7),
-.BR rtnetlink (7)
diff --git a/raw/man7/netlink.7 b/raw/man7/netlink.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 7fd36bb..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/netlink.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,253 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Don't change the first line, it tells man that tbl is needed.
-.\" This man page copyright 1998 by Andi Kleen. Subject to the GPL.
-.\" This manpage copyright 1998 by Andi Kleen. Subject to the GPL.
-.\" Based on the original comments from Alexey Kuznetsov
-.\" $Id: netlink.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.TH NETLINK 7 1999-04-27 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-netlink, PF_NETLINK \- Communication between kernel and user.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.\" XXX
-.B #include <asm/types.h>
-.br
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.B #include <linux/netlink.h>
-.br
-.PP
-.BI "netlink_socket = socket(PF_NETLINK, " socket_type ", " netlink_family );
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Netlink is used to transfer information between kernel modules and user space processes.
-It consists of a standard sockets based interface for user processes and an
-internal kernel API for kernel modules. The internal kernel interface is not
-documented in this man page. Also there is an obsolete netlink interface via
-netlink character devices, this interface is not documented here and is only
-provided for backwards compatibility.
-
-Netlink is a datagram oriented service. Both
-.B SOCK_RAW
-and
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-are valid values for
-.IR socket_type ;
-however the netlink protocol does not distinguish between
-datagram and raw sockets.
-
-.I netlink_family
-selects the kernel module or netlink group to communicate with.
-The currently assigned netlink families are:
-.TP
-.B NETLINK_ROUTE
-Receives routing updates and may be used to modify the IPv4 routing
-table (see
-.BR rtnetlink (7)).
-.TP
-.B NETLINK_FIREWALL
-Receives packets sent by the IPv4 firewall code.
-.TP
-.B NETLINK_ARPD
-For managing the arp table in user space.
-.TP
-.B NETLINK_ROUTE6
-Receives and sends IPv6 routing table updates.
-.TP
-.B NETLINK_IP6_FW
-to receive packets that failed the IPv6 firewall checks (currently not
-implemented).
-.TP
-.BR NETLINK_TAPBASE ... NETLINK_TAPBASE+15
-are the instances of the
-.B ethertap
-device. Ethertap is a pseudo network tunnel device that allows an
-ethernet driver to be simulated from user space.
-.TP
-.B NETLINK_SKIP
-Reserved for ENskip.
-.TP
-.B NETLINK_USERSOCK
-is reserved for future user space protocols.
-.PP
-Netlink messages consist of a byte stream with one or multiple
-.B nlmsghdr
-headers and associated payload.
-For multipart messages the first and all following headers have the
-.B NLM_F_MULTI
-flag set, except for the last header
-which has the type
-.BR NLMSG_DONE .
-The byte stream should only be accessed with the standard
-.B NLMSG_*
-macros, see
-.BR netlink (3).
-
-Netlink is not a reliable protocol. It tries its best to deliver a
-message to its destination(s), but may drop messages when an out of
-memory condition or other error occurs. For reliable transfer the
-sender can request an acknowledgement from the receiver by setting the
-.B NLM_F_ACK
-flag. An acknowledgment is an
-.B NLMSG_ERROR
-packet with the error field set to 0. The application must generate
-acks for received messages itself. The kernel tries to send an
-.B NLMSG_ERROR
-message for every failed packet. A user process should follow this convention too.
-
-Each netlink family has a set of 32 multicast groups.
-When
-.BR bind (2)
-is called on the socket, the
-.B nl_groups
-field in the
-.B sockaddr_nl
-should be set to a bitmask of the groups which it wishes to listen to.
-The default value for this field is zero which means that no multicasts
-will be received.
-A socket may multicast messages to any of the multicast groups by setting
-.B nl_groups
-to a bitmask of the groups it wishes to send to when it calls
-.BR sendmsg (2)
-or does a
-.BR connect (2).
-Only users with an effective uid of 0 or the
-.B CAP_NET_ADMIN
-capability may send or listen to
-a netlink multicast group.
-Any replies to a message received for a multicast group
-should be sent back to the sending pid and the multicast group.
-
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4 13 25
-struct nlmsghdr
-{
- __u32 nlmsg_len; /* Length of message including header */
- __u16 nlmsg_type; /* Message content */
- __u16 nlmsg_flags; /* Additional flags */
- __u32 nlmsg_seq; /* Sequence number */
- __u32 nlmsg_pid; /* PID of the process that opened the socket */
-};
-
-
-struct nlmsgerr
-{
- int error; /* negative errno or 0 for acks. */
- struct nlmsghdr msg; /* message header that caused the error */
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-
-After each
-.B nlmsghdr
-the payload follows.
-.B nlmsg_type
-can be one of the standard message types:
-.B NLMSG_NOOP
-message is to be ignored,
-.B NLMSG_ERROR
-the message signals an error and the payload contains a
-.I nlmsgerr
-structure,
-.B NLMSG_DONE
-message terminates a multipart message,
-.\" 2.1.130 does not seem to use it.
-.\" .B NLMSG_OVERRUN
-.\" data was lost.
-
-A netlink family usually specifies more message types, see the
-appropriate man pages for that, e.g.
-.BR rtnetlink (7)
-for
-.IR NETLINK_ROUTE .
-
-.TS
-tab(:);
-l s
-l l.
-Standard Flag bits in nlmsg_flags
-NLM_F_REQUEST:set on all request messages
-NLM_F_MULTI:T{
-the message is part of a multipart message terminated by
-.B
-NLMSG_DONE
-.\" XXX describe that
-T}
-NLM_F_ACK:reply with an acknowledgment on success
-NLM_F_ECHO:echo this request
-.TE
-
-.TS
-tab(:);
-l s
-l l.
-Additional flag bits for GET requests
-NLM_F_ROOT:Return the complete table instead of a single entry.
-NLM_F_MATCH:Not implemented yet.
-NLM_F_ATOMIC:Return an atomic snapshot of the table.
-NLM_F_DUMP:not documented yet.
-.TE
-
-.TS
-tab(:);
-l s
-l l.
-Additional flag bits for NEW requests
-NLM_F_REPLACE:Override existing object.
-NLM_F_EXCL:Don't replace if the object already exists.
-NLM_F_CREATE:Create object if it doesn't already exist.
-NLM_F_APPEND:Add to the end of the object list.
-.TE
-
-Note that NLM_F_ATOMIC requires CAP_NET_ADMIN or super user rights.
-
-.SH "ADDRESS FORMATS"
-The
-.B sockaddr_nl
-structure describes a netlink client in user space or in the kernel.
-A sockaddr_nl can be either unicast (only send to one peer) or send
-to netlink groups (nl_groups not equal 0).
-
-.RS
-.nf
-struct sockaddr_nl
-{
- sa_family_t nl_family; /* AF_NETLINK */
- unsigned short nl_pad; /* zero */
- pid_t nl_pid; /* process pid */
- __u32 nl_groups; /* multicast groups mask */
-};
-.fi
-.RE
-
-.B nl_pid
-is the pid of the process owning the destination socket, or 0 if the
-destination is in the kernel.
-.B nl_groups
-is a bitmask with every bit representing a netlink group number.
-.\" XXX describe what that is.
-
-
-.SH BUGS
-This man page is not complete.
-
-.SH NOTES
-It is often better to use netlink via
-.B libnetlink
-than via the low level kernel interface.
-
-.SH VERSIONS
-The socket interface to netlink is a new feature of Linux 2.2
-
-Linux 2.0 supported a more primitive device based netlink interface (which
-is still available as a compatibility option). This obsolete interface is not
-described here.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR cmsg (3),
-.BR rtnetlink (7),
-.BR netlink (3)
-.PP
-ftp://ftp.inr.ac.ru/ip-routing/iproute2*
-for libnetlink
diff --git a/raw/man7/notify.7 b/raw/man7/notify.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 0215680..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/notify.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,108 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "NOTIFY" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-NOTIFY \- generate a notification
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-NOTIFY \fIname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-The \fBNOTIFY\fR command sends a notification event to each
-client application that has previously executed
-\fBLISTEN \fIname\fB\fR
-for the specified notification name in the current database.
-.PP
-The information passed to the client for a notification event includes the notification
-name and the notifying session's server process PID. It is up to the
-database designer to define the notification names that will be used in a given
-database and what each one means.
-.PP
-Commonly, the notification name is the same as the name of some table in
-the database, and the notify event essentially means, ``I changed this table,
-take a look at it to see what's new''. But no such association is enforced by
-the \fBNOTIFY\fR and \fBLISTEN\fR commands. For
-example, a database designer could use several different notification names
-to signal different sorts of changes to a single table.
-.PP
-\fBNOTIFY\fR provides a simple form of signal or
-interprocess communication mechanism for a collection of processes
-accessing the same PostgreSQL database.
-Higher-level mechanisms can be built by using tables in the database to
-pass additional data (beyond a mere notification name) from notifier to
-listener(s).
-.PP
-When \fBNOTIFY\fR is used to signal the occurrence of changes
-to a particular table, a useful programming technique is to put the
-\fBNOTIFY\fR in a rule that is triggered by table updates.
-In this way, notification happens automatically when the table is changed,
-and the application programmer can't accidentally forget to do it.
-.PP
-\fBNOTIFY\fR interacts with SQL transactions in some important
-ways. Firstly, if a \fBNOTIFY\fR is executed inside a
-transaction, the notify events are not delivered until and unless the
-transaction is committed. This is appropriate, since if the transaction
-is aborted, all the commands within it have had no
-effect, including \fBNOTIFY\fR. But it can be disconcerting if one
-is expecting the notification events to be delivered immediately. Secondly, if
-a listening session receives a notification signal while it is within a transaction,
-the notification event will not be delivered to its connected client until just
-after the transaction is completed (either committed or aborted). Again, the
-reasoning is that if a notification were delivered within a transaction that was
-later aborted, one would want the notification to be undone somehow---but
-the server cannot ``take back'' a notification once it has sent it to the client.
-So notification events are only delivered between transactions. The upshot of this
-is that applications using \fBNOTIFY\fR for real-time signaling
-should try to keep their transactions short.
-.PP
-\fBNOTIFY\fR behaves like Unix signals in one important
-respect: if the same notification name is signaled multiple times in quick
-succession, recipients may get only one notification event for several executions
-of \fBNOTIFY\fR. So it is a bad idea to depend on the number
-of notifications received. Instead, use \fBNOTIFY\fR to wake up
-applications that need to pay attention to something, and use a database
-object (such as a sequence) to keep track of what happened or how many times
-it happened.
-.PP
-It is common for a client that executes \fBNOTIFY\fR
-to be listening on the same notification name itself. In that case
-it will get back a notification event, just like all the other
-listening sessions. Depending on the application logic, this could
-result in useless work, for example, reading a database table to
-find the same updates that that session just wrote out. It is
-possible to avoid such extra work by noticing whether the notifying
-session's server process PID (supplied in the
-notification event message) is the same as one's own session's
-PID (available from \fBlibpq\fR). When they
-are the same, the notification event is one's own work bouncing
-back, and can be ignored. (Despite what was said in the preceding
-paragraph, this is a safe technique.
-PostgreSQL keeps self-notifications
-separate from notifications arriving from other sessions, so you
-cannot miss an outside notification by ignoring your own
-notifications.)
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-Name of the notification to be signaled (any identifier).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Configure and execute a listen/notify sequence from
-\fBpsql\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-LISTEN virtual;
-NOTIFY virtual;
-Asynchronous notification "virtual" received from server process with PID 8448.
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBNOTIFY\fR statement in the SQL
-standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-LISTEN [\fBlisten\fR(7)], UNLISTEN [\fBunlisten\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/packet.7 b/raw/man7/packet.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 7da6e2e..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/packet.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,410 +0,0 @@
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" $Id: packet.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.TH PACKET 7 1999-04-29 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-packet, PF_PACKET \- packet interface on device level.
-
-.\" yes, this is ugly.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.B #include <features.h> /* for the glibc version number */
-.br
-.B #if __GLIBC__ >= 2 && __GLIBC_MINOR >= 1
-.br
-.B #include <netpacket/packet.h>
-.br
-.B #include <net/ethernet.h> /* the L2 protocols */
-.br
-.B #else
-.br
-.B #include <asm/types.h>
-.br
-.B #include <linux/if_packet.h>
-.br
-.B #include <linux/if_ether.h> /* The L2 protocols */
-.br
-.B #endif
-.sp
-.PP
-.BI "packet_socket = socket(PF_PACKET, int " socket_type ", int "protocol );
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Packet sockets are used to receive or send raw packets at the device driver
-(OSI Layer 2)
-level. They allow the user to implement protocol modules in user space
-on top of the physical layer.
-
-The
-.I socket_type
-is either
-.B SOCK_RAW
-for raw packets including the link level header or
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-for cooked packets with the link level header removed. The link level
-header information is available in a common format in a
-.BR sockaddr_ll .
-.I protocol
-is the IEEE 802.3 protocol number in network order. See the
-.B <linux/if_ether.h>
-include file for a list of allowed protocols. When protocol
-is set to
-.B htons(ETH_P_ALL)
-then all protocols are received.
-All incoming packets of that protocol type will be passed to the packet
-socket before they are passed to the protocols implemented in the kernel.
-
-Only processes with effective uid 0 or the
-.B CAP_NET_RAW
-capability may open packet sockets.
-
-.B SOCK_RAW
-packets are passed to and from the device driver without any changes in
-the packet data. When receiving a packet, the address is still parsed and
-passed in a standard
-.B sockaddr_ll
-address structure. When transmitting a packet, the user supplied buffer
-should contain the physical layer header. That packet is then
-queued unmodified to the network driver of the interface defined by the
-destination address. Some device drivers always add other headers.
-.B SOCK_RAW
-is similar to but not compatible with the obsolete
-.B SOCK_PACKET
-of Linux 2.0.
-
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-operates on a slightly higher level. The physical header is removed before
-the packet is passed to the user. Packets sent through a
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-packet socket get a suitable physical layer header based on the information
-in the
-.B sockaddr_ll
-destination address before they are queued.
-
-By default all packets of the specified protocol type
-are passed to a packet socket. To only get packets from a specific interface
-use
-.BR bind (2)
-specifying an address in a
-.B struct sockaddr_ll
-to bind the packet socket to an interface. Only the
-.B sll_protocol
-and the
-.B sll_ifindex
-address fields are used for purposes of binding.
-
-The
-.BR connect (2)
-operation is not supported on packet sockets.
-
-When the
-.B MSG_TRUNC
-flag is passed to
-.BR recvmsg (2),
-.BR recv (2),
-.BR recvfrom (2)
-the real length of the packet on the wire is always returned, even when it
-is longer than the buffer.
-
-.SH "ADDRESS TYPES"
-The sockaddr_ll is a device independent physical layer address.
-
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 20n 35n
-struct sockaddr_ll {
- unsigned short sll_family; /* Always AF_PACKET */
- unsigned short sll_protocol; /* Physical layer protocol */
- int sll_ifindex; /* Interface number */
- unsigned short sll_hatype; /* Header type */
- unsigned char sll_pkttype; /* Packet type */
- unsigned char sll_halen; /* Length of address */
- unsigned char sll_addr[8]; /* Physical layer address */
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-
-.B sll_protocol
-is the standard ethernet protocol type in network order as defined
-in the
-.B linux/if_ether.h
-include file. It defaults to the socket's protocol.
-.B sll_ifindex
-is the interface index of the interface
-(see
-.BR netdevice (7));
-0 matches any interface (only legal for binding).
-.B sll_hatype
-is a ARP type as defined in the
-.B linux/if_arp.h
-include file.
-.B sll_pkttype
-contains the packet type. Valid types are
-.B PACKET_HOST
-for a packet addressed to the local host,
-.B PACKET_BROADCAST
-for a physical layer broadcast packet,
-.B PACKET_MULTICAST
-for a packet sent to a physical layer multicast address,
-.B PACKET_OTHERHOST
-for a packet to some other host that has been caught by a device driver
-in promiscuous mode, and
-.B PACKET_OUTGOING
-for a packet originated from the local host that is looped back to a packet
-socket. These types make only sense for receiving.
-.B sll_addr
-and
-.B sll_halen
-contain the physical layer (e.g. IEEE 802.3) address and its length. The
-exact interpretation depends on the device.
-
-When you send packets it is enough to specify
-.BR sll_family ,
-.BR sll_addr ,
-.BR sll_halen ,
-.BR sll_ifindex .
-The other fields should be 0.
-.B sll_hatype
-and
-.B sll_pkttype
-are set on received packets for your information.
-For bind only
-.B sll_protocol
-and
-.B sll_ifindex
-are used.
-
-.SH "SOCKET OPTIONS"
-Packet sockets can be used to configure physical layer multicasting
-and promiscuous mode. It works by calling
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-on a packet socket for SOL_PACKET and one of the options
-.B PACKET_ADD_MEMBERSHIP
-to add a binding or
-.B PACKET_DROP_MEMBERSHIP
-to drop it.
-They both expect a
-.B packet_mreq
-structure as argument:
-
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 20n 35n
-struct packet_mreq
-{
- int mr_ifindex; /* interface index */
- unsigned short mr_type; /* action */
- unsigned short mr_alen; /* address length */
- unsigned char mr_address[8]; /* physical layer address */
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-
-.B mr_ifindex
-contains the interface index for the interface whose status
-should be changed.
-The
-.B mr_type
-parameter specifies which action to perform.
-.B PACKET_MR_PROMISC
-enables receiving all packets on a shared medium - often known as
-``promiscuous mode'',
-.B PACKET_MR_MULTICAST
-binds the socket to the physical layer multicast group specified in
-.B mr_address
-and
-.BR mr_alen ,
-and
-.B PACKET_MR_ALLMULTI
-sets the socket up to receive all multicast packets arriving at the interface.
-
-In addition the traditional ioctls
-.B SIOCSIFFLAGS,
-.B SIOCADDMULTI,
-.B SIOCDELMULTI
-can be used for the same purpose.
-
-
-.SH IOCTLS
-.B SIOCGSTAMP
-can be used to receive the time stamp of the last received packet. Argument
-is a
-.B struct timeval.
-
-In addition all standard ioctls defined in
-.BR netdevice (7)
-and
-.BR socket (7)
-are valid on packet sockets.
-
-.SH "ERROR HANDLING"
-Packet sockets do no error handling other than errors occurred while passing
-the packet to the device driver. They don't have the concept of a pending
-error.
-
-.SH COMPATIBILITY
-In Linux 2.0, the only way to get a packet socket was by calling
-.BI "socket(PF_INET, SOCK_PACKET, " protocol )\fR.
-This is still supported but strongly deprecated.
-The main difference between the two methods is that
-.B SOCK_PACKET
-uses the old
-.B struct sockaddr_pkt
-to specify an interface, which doesn't provide physical layer independence.
-
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 20n 35n
-struct sockaddr_pkt
-{
- unsigned short spkt_family;
- unsigned char spkt_device[14];
- unsigned short spkt_protocol;
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-
-.B spkt_family
-contains
-the device type,
-.B spkt_protocol
-is the IEEE 802.3 protocol type as defined in
-.B <sys/if_ether.h>
-and
-.B spkt_device
-is the device name as a null terminated string, e.g. eth0.
-
-This structure is obsolete and should not be used in new code.
-
-.SH NOTES
-For portable programs it is suggested to use
-.B PF_PACKET
-via
-.BR pcap (3);
-although this only covers a subset of the
-.B PF_PACKET
-features.
-
-The
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-packet sockets make no attempt to create or parse the IEEE 802.2 LLC header
-for a IEEE 802.3 frame.
-When
-.B ETH_P_802_3
-is specified as protocol for sending the kernel creates the
-802.3 frame and fills out the length field; the user has to supply the LLC
-header to get a fully conforming packet. Incoming 802.3 packets are not
-multiplexed on the DSAP/SSAP protocol fields; instead they are supplied to the
-user as protocol
-.B ETH_P_802_2
-with the LLC header prepended. It is thus not possible to bind to
-.B ETH_P_802_3;
-bind to
-.B ETH_P_802_2
-instead and do the protocol multiplex yourself.
-The default for sending is the standard Ethernet DIX
-encapsulation with the protocol filled in.
-
-Packet sockets are not subject to the input or output firewall chains.
-
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B ENETDOWN
-Interface is not up.
-
-.TP
-.B ENOTCONN
-No interface address passed.
-
-.TP
-.B ENODEV
-Unknown device name or interface index specified in interface address.
-
-.TP
-.B EMSGSIZE
-Packet is bigger than interface MTU.
-
-.TP
-.B ENOBUFS
-Not enough memory to allocate the packet.
-
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-User passed invalid memory address.
-
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Invalid argument.
-
-.TP
-.B ENXIO
-Interface address contained illegal interface index.
-
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-User has insufficient privileges to carry out this operation.
-
-.TP
-.B EADDRNOTAVAIL
-Unknown multicast group address passed.
-
-.TP
-.B ENOENT
-No packet received.
-
-In addition other errors may be generated by the low-level driver.
-.SH VERSIONS
-.B PF_PACKET
-is a new feature in Linux 2.2. Earlier Linux versions supported only
-.B SOCK_PACKET.
-
-.SH BUGS
-glibc 2.1 does not have a define for
-.B SOL_PACKET.
-The suggested workaround is to use
-.RS
-.nf
-#ifndef SOL_PACKET
-#define SOL_PACKET 263
-#endif
-.fi
-.RE
-This is fixed in later glibc versions and also does not occur on libc5 systems.
-
-The IEEE 802.2/803.3 LLC handling could be considered as a bug.
-
-Socket filters are not documented.
-
-The
-.I MSG_TRUNC
-recvmsg extension is an ugly hack and should be replaced by a control message.
-There is currently no way to get the original destination address of
-packets via SOCK_DGRAM.
-
-.SH CREDITS
-This man page was written by Andi Kleen with help from Matthew Wilcox.
-PF_PACKET in Linux 2.2 was implemented
-by Alexey Kuznetsov, based on code by Alan Cox and others.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR socket (7),
-.BR socket (2),
-.BR raw (7),
-.BR pcap (3)
-
-RFC 894 for the standard IP Ethernet encapsulation.
-
-RFC 1700 for the IEEE 802.3 IP encapsulation.
-
-The
-.I <linux/if_ether.h>
-include file for physical layer protocols.
diff --git a/raw/man7/prepare.7 b/raw/man7/prepare.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b8d4743..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/prepare.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "PREPARE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-PREPARE \- prepare a statement for execution
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-PREPARE \fIplan_name\fR [ (\fIdatatype\fR [, ...] ) ] AS \fIstatement\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBPREPARE\fR creates a prepared statement. A prepared
-statement is a server-side object that can be used to optimize
-performance. When the \fBPREPARE\fR statement is
-executed, the specified statement is parsed, rewritten, and
-planned. When an \fBEXECUTE\fR command is subsequently
-issued, the prepared statement need only be executed. Thus, the
-parsing, rewriting, and planning stages are only performed once,
-instead of every time the statement is executed.
-.PP
-Prepared statements can take parameters: values that are
-substituted into the statement when it is executed. To include
-parameters in a prepared statement, supply a list of data types in
-the \fBPREPARE\fR statement, and, in the statement to
-be prepared itself, refer to the parameters by position using
-$1, $2, etc. When executing
-the statement, specify the actual values for these parameters in
-the \fBEXECUTE\fR statement. Refer to EXECUTE [\fBexecute\fR(7)] for more
-information about that.
-.PP
-Prepared statements are only stored in and for the duration of
-the current database session. When
-the session ends, the prepared statement is forgotten, and so it must be
-recreated before being used again. This also means that a single
-prepared statement cannot be used by multiple simultaneous database
-clients; however, each client can create their own prepared statement
-to use.
-.PP
-Prepared statements have the largest performance advantage when a
-single session is being used to execute a large number of similar
-statements. The performance difference will be particularly
-significant if the statements are complex to plan or rewrite, for
-example, if the query involves a join of many tables or requires
-the application of several rules. If the statement is relatively simple
-to plan and rewrite but relatively expensive to execute, the
-performance advantage of prepared statements will be less noticeable.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIplan_name\fB\fR
-An arbitrary name given to this particular prepared
-statement. It must be unique within a single session and is
-subsequently used to execute or deallocate a previously prepared
-statement.
-.TP
-\fB\fIdatatype\fB\fR
-The data type of a parameter to the prepared statement. To
-refer to the parameters in the prepared statement itself, use
-$1, $2, etc.
-.TP
-\fB\fIstatement\fB\fR
-Any \fBSELECT\fR, \fBINSERT\fR, \fBUPDATE\fR,
-or \fBDELETE\fR statement.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-In some situations, the query plan produced by for a prepared
-statement may be inferior to the plan produced if the statement
-were submitted and executed normally. This is because when the
-statement is planned and the planner attempts to determine the
-optimal query plan, the actual values of any parameters specified
-in the statement are
-unavailable. PostgreSQL collects
-statistics on the distribution of data in the table, and can use
-constant values in a statement to make guesses about the likely
-result of executing the statement. Since this data is unavailable
-when planning prepared statements with parameters, the chosen plan
-may be suboptimal. To examine the query plan
-PostgreSQL has chosen for a prepared
-statement, use \fBEXPLAIN EXECUTE\fR.
-.PP
-For more information on query planning and the statistics collected
-by PostgreSQL for that purpose, see
-the ANALYZE [\fBanalyze\fR(7)]
-documentation.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard includes a \fBPREPARE\fR statement,
-but it is only for use in embedded SQL. This version of the
-\fBPREPARE\fR statement also uses a somewhat different
-syntax.
diff --git a/raw/man7/raw.7 b/raw/man7/raw.7
deleted file mode 100644
index c259054..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/raw.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,262 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Don't change the first line, it tells man that we need tbl.
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" Please send bug reports, corrections and suggestions for improvements to
-.\" <ak at muc.de>
-.\" $Id: raw.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.TH RAW 7 1998-10-02 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-raw, SOCK_RAW \- Linux IPv4 raw sockets
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.B #include <netinet/in.h>
-.br
-.BI "raw_socket = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_RAW, int " protocol );
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Raw sockets allow new IPv4 protocols to be implemented in user space.
-A raw socket receives or sends the raw datagram not including link level headers.
-
-The IPv4 layer generates an IP header when sending a packet unless the
-.B IP_HDRINCL
-socket option is enabled on the socket.
-When it is enabled, the packet must contain an IP header.
-For receiving the IP header is always included in the packet.
-
-Only processes with an effective user id of 0 or the
-.B CAP_NET_RAW
-capability are allowed to open raw sockets.
-
-All packets or errors matching the
-.I protocol
-number specified
-for the raw socket are passed to this socket. For a list of the
-allowed protocols see RFC1700 assigned numbers and
-.BR getprotobyname (3).
-
-A protocol of
-.B IPPROTO_RAW
-implies enabled
-.B IP_HDRINCL
-and is able to send any IP protocol that is specified in the passed header.
-Receiving of all IP protocols via
-.B IPPROTO_RAW
-is not possible using raw sockets.
-
-.TS
-tab(:) allbox;
-c s
-l l.
-IP Header fields modified on sending by IP_HDRINCL
-IP Checksum:Always filled in.
-Source Address:Filled in when zero.
-Packet Id:Filled in when zero.
-Total Length:Always filled in.
-.TE
-.PP
-
-If
-.B IP_HDRINCL
-is specified and the IP header has a non-zero destination address then
-the destination address of the socket is used to route the packet. When
-.B MSG_DONTROUTE
-is specified the destination address should refer to a local interface,
-otherwise a routing table lookup is done anyways but gatewayed routes
-are ignored.
-
-If
-.B IP_HDRINCL
-isn't set then IP header options can be set on raw sockets with
-.BR setsockopt (2);
-see
-.BR ip (7)
-for more information.
-
-In Linux 2.2 all IP header fields and options can be set using
-IP socket options. This means raw sockets are usually only needed for new
-protocols or protocols with no user interface (like ICMP).
-
-When a packet is received, it is passed to any raw sockets which have
-been bound to its protocol before it is passed to other protocol handlers
-(e.g. kernel protocol modules).
-
-.SH "ADDRESS FORMAT"
-
-Raw sockets use the standard
-.B sockaddr_in
-address structure defined in
-.BR ip (7).
-The
-The
-.B sin_port
-field could be used to specify the IP protocol number,
-but it is ignored for sending in Linux 2.2 and should be always
-set to 0 (see BUGS)
-For incoming packets
-.B sin_port
-is set to the protocol of the packet.
-See the
-.B <netinet/in.h>
-include file for valid IP protocols.
-
-.SH "SOCKET OPTIONS"
-Raw socket options can be set with
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-and read with
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-by passing the
-.I SOL_RAW
-family flag.
-
-.TP
-.B ICMP_FILTER
-Enable a special filter for raw sockets bound to the
-.B IPPROTO_ICMP
-protocol. The value has a bit set for each ICMP message type which
-should be filtered out. The default is to filter no ICMP messages.
-
-.PP
-In addition all
-.BR ip (7)
-.B SOL_IP
-socket options valid for datagram sockets are supported.
-
-.SH NOTES
-Raw sockets fragment a packet when its total length exceeds the interface MTU
-(but see BUGS).
-A more network friendly and faster alternative is to implement path MTU
-discovery as described in the
-.B IP_PMTU_DISCOVER
-section of
-.BR ip (7).
-
-A raw socket can be bound to a specific local address using the
-.BR bind (2)
-call. If it isn't bound all packets with the specified IP protocol are received.
-In addition a RAW socket can be bound to a specific network device using
-.B SO_BINDTODEVICE;
-see
-.BR socket (7).
-
-An
-.B IPPROTO_RAW
-socket is send only.
-If you really want to receive all IP packets use a
-.BR packet (7)
-socket with the
-.B ETH_P_IP
-protocol. Note that packet sockets don't reassemble IP fragments, unlike raw sockets.
-
-If you want to receive all ICMP packets for a datagram socket it is often better
-to use
-.B IP_RECVERR
-on that particular socket; see
-.BR ip (7).
-
-Raw sockets may tap all IP protocols in Linux, even
-protocols like ICMP or TCP which have a protocol module in the kernel. In
-this case the packets are passed to both the kernel module and the raw
-socket(s). This should not be relied upon in portable programs, many other BSD
-socket implementation have limitations here.
-
-Linux never changes headers passed from the user (except for filling in some
-zeroed fields as described for
-.BR IP_HDRINCL ).
-This differs from many other implementations of raw sockets.
-
-RAW sockets are generally rather unportable and should be avoided in programs
-intended to be portable.
-
-Sending on raw sockets should take the IP protocol from
-.B sin_port;
-this ability was lost in Linux 2.2. Work around is to use
-.B IP_HDRINCL.
-
-.SH "ERROR HANDLING"
-Errors originating from the network are only passed to the user when the
-socket is connected or the
-.B IP_RECVERR
-flag is enabled. For connected sockets only
-.B EMSGSIZE
-and
-.B EPROTO
-are passed for compatibility. With
-.B IP_RECVERR
-all network errors are saved in the error queue.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EMSGSIZE
-Packet too big. Either Path MTU Discovery is enabled (the
-.B IP_PMTU_DISCOVER
-socket flag) or the packet size exceeds the maximum allowed IPv4 packet size
-of 64KB.
-.TP
-.B EACCES
-User tried to send to a broadcast address without having the broadcast flag
-set on the socket.
-.TP
-.B EPROTO
-An ICMP error has arrived reporting a parameter problem.
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-An invalid memory address was supplied.
-.TP
-.B EOPNOTSUPP
-Invalid flag has been passed to a socket call (like
-.BR MSG_OOB ).
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Invalid argument.
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-The user doesn't have permission to open raw sockets. Only processes
-with a effective user id of 0 or the
-.B CAP_NET_RAW
-attribute may do that.
-
-.SH VERSIONS
-.B IP_RECVERR
-and
-.B ICMP_FILTER
-are new in Linux 2.2. They are Linux extensions
-and should not be used in portable programs.
-
-Linux 2.0 enabled some bug-to-bug compatibility with BSD in the raw socket code
-when the SO_BSDCOMPAT flag was set - that has been removed in 2.2.
-
-.SH BUGS
-Transparent proxy extensions are not described.
-
-When the
-.B IP_HDRINCL
-option is set datagrams will not be fragmented and are limited to the interface
-MTU. This is a limitation in Linux 2.2.
-
-Setting the IP protocol for sending in
-.B sin_port
-got lost in Linux 2.2. The protocol that socket was bound to or that
-was specified in the initial
-.BR socket (2)
-call is always used.
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-This man page was written by Andi Kleen.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR socket (7),
-.BR recvmsg (2),
-.BR sendmsg (2)
-
-.B RFC1191
-for path MTU discovery.
-
-.B RFC791
-and the
-.B <linux/ip.h>
-include file for the IP protocol.
diff --git a/raw/man7/regex.7 b/raw/man7/regex.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a87d31..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/regex.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,264 +0,0 @@
-.\" From Henry Spencer's regex package (as found in the apache
-.\" distribution). The package carries the following copyright:
-.\"
-.\" Copyright 1992, 1993, 1994 Henry Spencer. All rights reserved.
-.\" This software is not subject to any license of the American Telephone
-.\" and Telegraph Company or of the Regents of the University of California.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose
-.\" on any computer system, and to alter it and redistribute it, subject
-.\" to the following restrictions:
-.\"
-.\" 1. The author is not responsible for the consequences of use of this
-.\" software, no matter how awful, even if they arise from flaws in it.
-.\"
-.\" 2. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented, either by
-.\" explicit claim or by omission. Since few users ever read sources,
-.\" credits must appear in the documentation.
-.\"
-.\" 3. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be
-.\" misrepresented as being the original software. Since few users
-.\" ever read sources, credits must appear in the documentation.
-.\"
-.\" 4. This notice may not be removed or altered.
-.\"
-.\" In order to comply with `credits must appear in the documentation'
-.\" I added an AUTHOR paragraph below - aeb.
-.\"
-.\" In the default nroff environment there is no dagger \(dg.
-.ie t .ds dg \(dg
-.el .ds dg (!)
-.TH REGEX 7 1994-02-07
-.SH NAME
-regex \- POSIX 1003.2 regular expressions
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Regular expressions (``RE''s),
-as defined in POSIX 1003.2, come in two forms:
-modern REs (roughly those of
-.IR egrep ;
-1003.2 calls these ``extended'' REs)
-and obsolete REs (roughly those of
-.BR ed (1);
-1003.2 ``basic'' REs).
-Obsolete REs mostly exist for backward compatibility in some old programs;
-they will be discussed at the end.
-1003.2 leaves some aspects of RE syntax and semantics open;
-`\*(dg' marks decisions on these aspects that
-may not be fully portable to other 1003.2 implementations.
-.PP
-A (modern) RE is one\*(dg or more non-empty\*(dg \fIbranches\fR,
-separated by `|'.
-It matches anything that matches one of the branches.
-.PP
-A branch is one\*(dg or more \fIpieces\fR, concatenated.
-It matches a match for the first, followed by a match for the second, etc.
-.PP
-A piece is an \fIatom\fR possibly followed
-by a single\*(dg `*', `+', `?', or \fIbound\fR.
-An atom followed by `*' matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom.
-An atom followed by `+' matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the atom.
-An atom followed by `?' matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches of the atom.
-.PP
-A \fIbound\fR is `{' followed by an unsigned decimal integer,
-possibly followed by `,'
-possibly followed by another unsigned decimal integer,
-always followed by `}'.
-The integers must lie between 0 and RE_DUP_MAX (255\*(dg) inclusive,
-and if there are two of them, the first may not exceed the second.
-An atom followed by a bound containing one integer \fIi\fR
-and no comma matches
-a sequence of exactly \fIi\fR matches of the atom.
-An atom followed by a bound
-containing one integer \fIi\fR and a comma matches
-a sequence of \fIi\fR or more matches of the atom.
-An atom followed by a bound
-containing two integers \fIi\fR and \fIj\fR matches
-a sequence of \fIi\fR through \fIj\fR (inclusive) matches of the atom.
-.PP
-An atom is a regular expression enclosed in `()' (matching a match for the
-regular expression),
-an empty set of `()' (matching the null string)\*(dg,
-a \fIbracket expression\fR (see below), `.'
-(matching any single character), `^' (matching the null string at the
-beginning of a line), `$' (matching the null string at the
-end of a line), a `\e' followed by one of the characters
-`^.[$()|*+?{\e'
-(matching that character taken as an ordinary character),
-a `\e' followed by any other character\*(dg
-(matching that character taken as an ordinary character,
-as if the `\e' had not been present\*(dg),
-or a single character with no other significance (matching that character).
-A `{' followed by a character other than a digit is an ordinary
-character, not the beginning of a bound\*(dg.
-It is illegal to end an RE with `\e'.
-.PP
-A \fIbracket expression\fR is a list of characters enclosed in `[]'.
-It normally matches any single character from the list (but see below).
-If the list begins with `^',
-it matches any single character
-(but see below) \fInot\fR from the rest of the list.
-If two characters in the list are separated by `\-', this is shorthand
-for the full \fIrange\fR of characters between those two (inclusive) in the
-collating sequence,
-e.g. `[0-9]' in ASCII matches any decimal digit.
-It is illegal\*(dg for two ranges to share an
-endpoint, e.g. `a-c-e'.
-Ranges are very collating-sequence-dependent,
-and portable programs should avoid relying on them.
-.PP
-To include a literal `]' in the list, make it the first character
-(following a possible `^').
-To include a literal `\-', make it the first or last character,
-or the second endpoint of a range.
-To use a literal `\-' as the first endpoint of a range,
-enclose it in `[.' and `.]' to make it a collating element (see below).
-With the exception of these and some combinations using `[' (see next
-paragraphs), all other special characters, including `\e', lose their
-special significance within a bracket expression.
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, a collating element (a character,
-a multi-character sequence that collates as if it were a single character,
-or a collating-sequence name for either)
-enclosed in `[.' and `.]' stands for the
-sequence of characters of that collating element.
-The sequence is a single element of the bracket expression's list.
-A bracket expression containing a multi-character collating element
-can thus match more than one character,
-e.g. if the collating sequence includes a `ch' collating element,
-then the RE `[[.ch.]]*c' matches the first five characters
-of `chchcc'.
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, a collating element enclosed in `[=' and
-`=]' is an equivalence class, standing for the sequences of characters
-of all collating elements equivalent to that one, including itself.
-(If there are no other equivalent collating elements,
-the treatment is as if the enclosing delimiters were `[.' and `.]'.)
-For example, if o and \o'o^' are the members of an equivalence class,
-then `[[=o=]]', `[[=\o'o^'=]]', and `[o\o'o^']' are all synonymous.
-An equivalence class may not\*(dg be an endpoint
-of a range.
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, the name of a \fIcharacter class\fR enclosed
-in `[:' and `:]' stands for the list of all characters belonging to that
-class.
-Standard character class names are:
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 3c 6c 9c
-alnum digit punct
-alpha graph space
-blank lower upper
-cntrl print xdigit
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-These stand for the character classes defined in
-.BR wctype (3).
-A locale may provide others.
-A character class may not be used as an endpoint of a range.
-.PP
-There are two special cases\*(dg of bracket expressions:
-the bracket expressions `[[:<:]]' and `[[:>:]]' match the null string at
-the beginning and end of a word respectively.
-A word is defined as a sequence of
-word characters
-which is neither preceded nor followed by
-word characters.
-A word character is an
-.I alnum
-character (as defined by
-.BR wctype (3))
-or an underscore.
-This is an extension,
-compatible with but not specified by POSIX 1003.2,
-and should be used with
-caution in software intended to be portable to other systems.
-.PP
-In the event that an RE could match more than one substring of a given
-string,
-the RE matches the one starting earliest in the string.
-If the RE could match more than one substring starting at that point,
-it matches the longest.
-Subexpressions also match the longest possible substrings, subject to
-the constraint that the whole match be as long as possible,
-with subexpressions starting earlier in the RE taking priority over
-ones starting later.
-Note that higher-level subexpressions thus take priority over
-their lower-level component subexpressions.
-.PP
-Match lengths are measured in characters, not collating elements.
-A null string is considered longer than no match at all.
-For example,
-`bb*' matches the three middle characters of `abbbc',
-`(wee|week)(knights|nights)' matches all ten characters of `weeknights',
-when `(.*).*' is matched against `abc' the parenthesized subexpression
-matches all three characters, and
-when `(a*)*' is matched against `bc' both the whole RE and the parenthesized
-subexpression match the null string.
-.PP
-If case-independent matching is specified,
-the effect is much as if all case distinctions had vanished from the
-alphabet.
-When an alphabetic that exists in multiple cases appears as an
-ordinary character outside a bracket expression, it is effectively
-transformed into a bracket expression containing both cases,
-e.g. `x' becomes `[xX]'.
-When it appears inside a bracket expression, all case counterparts
-of it are added to the bracket expression, so that (e.g.) `[x]'
-becomes `[xX]' and `[^x]' becomes `[^xX]'.
-.PP
-No particular limit is imposed on the length of REs\*(dg.
-Programs intended to be portable should not employ REs longer
-than 256 bytes,
-as an implementation can refuse to accept such REs and remain
-POSIX-compliant.
-.PP
-Obsolete (``basic'') regular expressions differ in several respects.
-`|', `+', and `?' are ordinary characters and there is no equivalent
-for their functionality.
-The delimiters for bounds are `\e{' and `\e}',
-with `{' and `}' by themselves ordinary characters.
-The parentheses for nested subexpressions are `\e(' and `\e)',
-with `(' and `)' by themselves ordinary characters.
-`^' is an ordinary character except at the beginning of the
-RE or\*(dg the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression,
-`$' is an ordinary character except at the end of the
-RE or\*(dg the end of a parenthesized subexpression,
-and `*' is an ordinary character if it appears at the beginning of the
-RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression
-(after a possible leading `^').
-Finally, there is one new type of atom, a \fIback reference\fR:
-`\e' followed by a non-zero decimal digit \fId\fR
-matches the same sequence of characters
-matched by the \fId\fRth parenthesized subexpression
-(numbering subexpressions by the positions of their opening parentheses,
-left to right),
-so that (e.g.) `\e([bc]\e)\e1' matches `bb' or `cc' but not `bc'.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR regex (3)
-.PP
-POSIX 1003.2, section 2.8 (Regular Expression Notation).
-.SH BUGS
-Having two kinds of REs is a botch.
-.PP
-The current 1003.2 spec says that `)' is an ordinary character in
-the absence of an unmatched `(';
-this was an unintentional result of a wording error,
-and change is likely.
-Avoid relying on it.
-.PP
-Back references are a dreadful botch,
-posing major problems for efficient implementations.
-They are also somewhat vaguely defined
-(does
-`a\e(\e(b\e)*\e2\e)*d' match `abbbd'?).
-Avoid using them.
-.PP
-1003.2's specification of case-independent matching is vague.
-The ``one case implies all cases'' definition given above
-is current consensus among implementors as to the right interpretation.
-.PP
-The syntax for word boundaries is incredibly ugly.
-.SH AUTHOR
-This page was taken from Henry Spencer's regex package.
diff --git a/raw/man7/reindex.7 b/raw/man7/reindex.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a0861d..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/reindex.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "REINDEX" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-REINDEX \- rebuild indexes
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-REINDEX { DATABASE | TABLE | INDEX } \fIname\fR [ FORCE ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBREINDEX\fR rebuilds an index based on the data
-stored in the table, replacing the old copy of the index. There are
-two main reasons to use \fBREINDEX\fR:
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-An index has become corrupted, and no longer contains valid
-data. Although in theory this should never happen, in
-practice indexes may become corrupted due to software bugs or
-hardware failures. \fBREINDEX\fR provides a
-recovery method.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-The index in question contains a lot of dead index pages that
-are not being reclaimed. This can occur with B-tree indexes in
-PostgreSQL under certain access
-patterns. \fBREINDEX\fR provides a way to reduce
-the space consumption of the index by writing a new version of
-the index without the dead pages. See the section called ``Routine Indexing'' in the documentation for more information.
-.PP
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBDATABASE\fR
-Recreate all system indexes of a specified database. Indexes on
-user tables are not processed. Also, indexes on shared system
-catalogs are skipped except in stand-alone mode (see below).
-.TP
-\fBTABLE\fR
-Recreate all indexes of a specified table. If the table has a
-secondary ``TOAST'' table, that is reindexed as well.
-.TP
-\fBINDEX\fR
-Recreate a specified index.
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of the specific database, table, or index to be
-reindexed. Table and index names may be schema-qualified.
-.TP
-\fBFORCE\fR
-This is an obsolete option; it is ignored if specified.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-If you suspect corruption of an index on a user table, you can
-simply rebuild that index, or all indexes on the table, using
-\fBREINDEX INDEX\fR or \fBREINDEX
-TABLE\fR. Another approach to dealing with a corrupted
-user-table index is just to drop and recreate it. This may in fact
-be preferable if you would like to maintain some semblance of
-normal operation on the table meanwhile. \fBREINDEX\fR
-acquires exclusive lock on the table, while \fBCREATE
-INDEX\fR only locks out writes not reads of the table.
-.PP
-Things are more difficult if you need to recover from corruption of
-an index on a system table. In this case it's important for the
-system to not have used any of the suspect indexes itself.
-(Indeed, in this sort of scenario you may find that server
-processes are crashing immediately at start-up, due to reliance on
-the corrupted indexes.) To recover safely, the server must be started
-with the \fB-P\fR option, which prevents it from using
-indexes for system catalog lookups.
-.PP
-One way to do this is to shut down the postmaster and start a stand-alone
-PostgreSQL server
-with the \fB-P\fR option included on its command line.
-Then, \fBREINDEX DATABASE\fR,
-\fBREINDEX TABLE\fR, or \fBREINDEX INDEX\fR can be
-issued, depending on how much you want to reconstruct. If in
-doubt, use \fBREINDEX DATABASE\fR to select
-reconstruction of all system indexes in the database. Then quit
-the standalone server session and restart the regular server.
-See the \fBpostgres\fR(1) reference page for more
-information about how to interact with the stand-alone server
-interface.
-.PP
-Alternatively, a regular server session can be started with
-\fB-P\fR included in its command line options.
-The method for doing this varies across clients, but in all
-\fBlibpq\fR-based clients, it is possible to set
-the \fBPGOPTIONS\fR environment variable to -P
-before starting the client. Note that while this method does not
-require locking out other clients, it may still be wise to prevent
-other users from connecting to the damaged database until repairs
-have been completed.
-.PP
-If corruption is suspected in the indexes of any of the shared
-system catalogs (\fBpg_database\fR,
-\fBpg_group\fR, or
-\fBpg_shadow\fR), then a standalone server
-must be used to repair it. \fBREINDEX\fR will not process
-shared catalogs in multiuser mode.
-.PP
-For all indexes except the shared system catalogs, \fBREINDEX\fR
-is crash-safe and transaction-safe. \fBREINDEX\fR is not
-crash-safe for shared indexes, which is why this case is disallowed
-during normal operation. If a failure occurs while reindexing one
-of these catalogs in standalone mode, it will not be possible to
-restart the regular server until the problem is rectified. (The
-typical symptom of a partially rebuilt shared index is ``index is not
-a btree'' errors.)
-.PP
-Prior to PostgreSQL 7.4, \fBREINDEX
-TABLE\fR did not automatically process TOAST tables, and so those had
-to be reindexed by separate commands. This is still possible, but
-redundant.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Recreate the indexes on the table my_table:
-.sp
-.nf
-REINDEX TABLE my_table;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Rebuild a single index:
-.sp
-.nf
-REINDEX INDEX my_index;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Rebuild all system indexes in a particular database, without trusting them
-to be valid already:
-.sp
-.nf
-$ \fBexport PGOPTIONS="-P"\fR
-$ \fBpsql broken_db\fR
-...
-broken_db=> REINDEX DATABASE broken_db;
-broken_db=> \\q
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBREINDEX\fR command in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/reset.7 b/raw/man7/reset.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 8756d09..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/reset.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "RESET" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-RESET \- restore the value of a run-time parameter to the default value
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-RESET \fIname\fR
-RESET ALL
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBRESET\fR restores run-time parameters to their
-default values. \fBRESET\fR is an alternative
-spelling for
-.sp
-.nf
-SET \fIparameter\fR TO DEFAULT
-.sp
-.fi
-Refer to SET [\fBset\fR(7)] for
-details.
-.PP
-The default value is defined as the value that the parameter would
-have had, had no \fBSET\fR ever been issued for it in the
-current session. The actual source of this value might be a
-compiled-in default, the configuration file, command-line options,
-or per-database or per-user default settings. See the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation for details.
-.PP
-See the \fBSET\fR reference page for details on the
-transaction behavior of \fBRESET\fR.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of a run-time parameter. See SET [\fBset\fR(7)] for a list.
-.TP
-\fBALL\fR
-Resets all settable run-time parameters to default values.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Set DATESTYLE to its default value:
-.sp
-.nf
-RESET datestyle;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Set GEQO to its default value:
-.sp
-.nf
-RESET geqo;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-\fBRESET\fR is a PostgreSQL extension.
diff --git a/raw/man7/revoke.7 b/raw/man7/revoke.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 3560247..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/revoke.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "REVOKE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-REVOKE \- remove access privileges
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ]
- { { SELECT | INSERT | UPDATE | DELETE | RULE | REFERENCES | TRIGGER }
- [,...] | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON [ TABLE ] \fItablename\fR [, ...]
- FROM { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...]
- [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-
-REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ]
- { { CREATE | TEMPORARY | TEMP } [,...] | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON DATABASE \fIdbname\fR [, ...]
- FROM { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...]
- [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-
-REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ]
- { EXECUTE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON FUNCTION \fIfuncname\fR ([\fItype\fR, ...]) [, ...]
- FROM { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...]
- [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-
-REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ]
- { USAGE | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON LANGUAGE \fIlangname\fR [, ...]
- FROM { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...]
- [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-
-REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ]
- { { CREATE | USAGE } [,...] | ALL [ PRIVILEGES ] }
- ON SCHEMA \fIschemaname\fR [, ...]
- FROM { \fIusername\fR | GROUP \fIgroupname\fR | PUBLIC } [, ...]
- [ CASCADE | RESTRICT ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-The \fBREVOKE\fR command revokes previously granted
-privileges from one or more users or groups of users. The key word
-PUBLIC refers to the implicitly defined group of
-all users.
-.PP
-See the description of the GRANT [\fBgrant\fR(7)] command for
-the meaning of the privilege types.
-.PP
-Note that any particular user will have the sum
-of privileges granted directly to him, privileges granted to any group he
-is presently a member of, and privileges granted to
-PUBLIC. Thus, for example, revoking SELECT privilege
-from PUBLIC does not necessarily mean that all users
-have lost SELECT privilege on the object: those who have it granted
-directly or via a group will still have it.
-.PP
-If GRANT OPTION FOR is specified, only the grant
-option for the privilege is revoked, not the privilege itself.
-.PP
-If a user holds a privilege with grant option and has granted it to
-other users then the privileges held by those other users are
-called dependent privileges. If the privilege or the grant option
-held by the first user is being revoked and dependent privileges
-exist, those dependent privileges are also revoked if
-CASCADE is specified, else the revoke action
-will fail. This recursive revocation only affects privileges that
-were granted through a chain of users that is traceable to the user
-that is the subject of this REVOKE command.
-Thus, the affected users may effectively keep the privilege if it
-was also granted through other users.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use \fBpsql\fR(1)'s \fB\\z\fR command to
-display the privileges granted on existing objects. See also GRANT [\fBgrant\fR(7)] for information about the format.
-.PP
-A user can only revoke privileges that were granted directly by
-that user. If, for example, user A has granted a privilege with
-grant option to user B, and user B has in turned granted it to user
-C, then user A cannot revoke the privilege directly from C.
-Instead, user A could revoke the grant option from user B and use
-the CASCADE option so that the privilege is
-automatically revoked from user C.
-.PP
-If a superuser chooses to issue a \fBGRANT\fR or \fBREVOKE\fR
-command, the command is performed as though it were issued by the
-owner of the affected object. Since all privileges ultimately come
-from the object owner (possibly indirectly via chains of grant options),
-it is possible for a superuser to revoke all privileges, but this may
-require use of CASCADE as stated above.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Revoke insert privilege for the public on table
-films:
-.sp
-.nf
-REVOKE INSERT ON films FROM PUBLIC;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Revoke all privileges from user manuel on view kinds:
-.sp
-.nf
-
-REVOKE ALL PRIVILEGES ON kinds FROM manuel;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The compatibility notes of the GRANT [\fBgrant\fR(7)] command
-apply analogously to \fBREVOKE\fR. The syntax summary is:
-.sp
-.nf
-REVOKE [ GRANT OPTION FOR ] \fIprivileges\fR
- ON \fIobject\fR [ ( \fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ]
- FROM { PUBLIC | \fIusername\fR [, ...] }
- { RESTRICT | CASCADE }
-.sp
-.fi
-One of RESTRICT or CASCADE
-is required according to the standard, but PostgreSQL
-assumes RESTRICT by default.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-GRANT [\fBgrant\fR(7)]
diff --git a/raw/man7/rollback.7 b/raw/man7/rollback.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 50e664f..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/rollback.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "ROLLBACK" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-ROLLBACK \- abort the current transaction
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-ROLLBACK [ WORK | TRANSACTION ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBROLLBACK\fR rolls back the current transaction and causes
-all the updates made by the transaction to be discarded.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBWORK\fR
-.TP
-\fBTRANSACTION\fR
-Optional key words. They have no effect.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-Use COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(7)] to
-successfully terminate a transaction.
-.PP
-Issuing \fBROLLBACK\fR when not inside a transaction does
-no harm, but it will provoke a warning message.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To abort all changes:
-.sp
-.nf
-ROLLBACK;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard only specifies the two forms
-ROLLBACK and ROLLBACK
-WORK. Otherwise, this command is fully conforming.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-BEGIN [\fBbegin\fR(7)], COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/samba.7 b/raw/man7/samba.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 3fddca2..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/samba.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SAMBA" 7 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-samba \- A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBSamba\fR
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-The Samba software suite is a collection of programs that implements the Server Message Block (commonly abbreviated as SMB) protocol for UNIX systems\&. This protocol is sometimes also referred to as the Common Internet File System (CIFS)\&. For a more thorough description, see http://www\&.ubiqx\&.org/cifs/\&. Samba also implements the NetBIOS protocol in nmbd\&.
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbd\fR(8)
-The \fBsmbd\fR daemon provides the file and print services to SMB clients, such as Windows 95/98, Windows NT, Windows for Workgroups or LanManager\&. The configuration file for this daemon is described in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
-
-
-.TP
-\fBnmbd\fR(8)
-The \fBnmbd\fR daemon provides NetBIOS nameservice and browsing support\&. The configuration file for this daemon is described in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbclient\fR(1)
-The \fBsmbclient\fR program implements a simple ftp-like client\&. This is useful for accessing SMB shares on other compatible servers (such as Windows NT), and can also be used to allow a UNIX box to print to a printer attached to any SMB server (such as a PC running Windows NT)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBtestparm\fR(1)
-The \fBtestparm\fR utility is a simple syntax checker for Samba's \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) configuration file\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBtestprns\fR(1)
-The \fBtestprns\fR utility supports testing printer names defined in your \fIprintcap\fR file used by Samba\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbstatus\fR(1)
-The \fBsmbstatus\fR tool provides access to information about the current connections to \fBsmbd\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBnmblookup\fR(1)
-The \fBnmblookup\fR tools allows NetBIOS name queries to be made from a UNIX host\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbgroupedit\fR(8)
-The \fBsmbgroupedit\fR tool allows for mapping unix groups to NT Builtin, Domain, or Local groups\&. Also it allows setting priviledges for that group, such as saAddUser, etc\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbpasswd\fR(8)
-The \fBsmbpasswd\fR command is a tool for changing LanMan and Windows NT password hashes on Samba and Windows NT servers\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbcacls\fR(1)
-The \fBsmbcacls\fR command is a tool to set ACL's on remote CIFS servers\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbsh\fR(1)
-The \fBsmbsh\fR command is a program that allows you to run a unix shell with with an overloaded VFS\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbtree\fR(1)
-The \fBsmbtree\fR command is a text-based network neighborhood tool\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbtar\fR(1)
-The \fBsmbtar\fR can make backups of data on CIFS/SMB servers\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbspool\fR(8)
-\fBsmbspool\fR is a helper utility for printing on printers connected to CIFS servers\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbcontrol\fR(1)
-\fBsmbcontrol\fR is a utility that can change the behaviour of running samba daemons\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBrpcclient\fR(1)
-\fBrpcclient\fR is a utility that can be used to execute RPC commands on remote CIFS servers\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBpdbedit\fR(8)
-The \fBpdbedit\fR command can be used to maintain the local user database on a samba server\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBfindsmb\fR(1)
-The \fBfindsmb\fR command can be used to find SMB servers on the local network\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBnet\fR(8)
-The \fBnet\fR command is supposed to work similar to the DOS/Windows NET\&.EXE command\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBswat\fR(8)
-\fBswat\fR is a web-based interface to configuring \fIsmb\&.conf\fR\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBwinbindd\fR(8)
-\fBwinbindd\fR is a daemon that is used for integrating authentication and the user database into unix\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBwbinfo\fR(1)
-\fBwbinfo\fR is a utility that retrieves and stores information related to winbind\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBeditreg\fR(1)
-\fBeditreg\fR is a command-line utility that can edit windows registry files\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBprofiles\fR(1)
-\fBprofiles\fR is a command-line utility that can be used to replace all occurences of a certain SID with another SID\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBlog2pcap\fR(1)
-\fBlog2pcap\fR is a utility for generating pcap trace files from Samba log files\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBvfstest\fR(1)
-\fBvfstest\fR is a utility that can be used to test vfs modules\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBntlm_auth\fR(1)
-\fBntlm_auth\fR is a helper-utility for external programs wanting to do NTLM-authentication\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbmount\fR(8), \fBsmbumount\fR(8), \fBsmbmount\fR(8)
-\fBsmbmount\fR,\fBsmbmnt\fR and \fBsmbmnt\fR are commands that can be used to mount CIFS/SMB shares on Linux\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fBsmbcquotas\fR(1)
-\fBsmbcquotas\fR is a tool that can set remote QUOTA's on server with NTFS 5\&.
-
-
-.SH "COMPONENTS"
-
-.PP
-The Samba suite is made up of several components\&. Each component is described in a separate manual page\&. It is strongly recommended that you read the documentation that comes with Samba and the manual pages of those components that you use\&. If the manual pages and documents aren't clear enough then please visithttp://devel\&.samba\&.org for information on how to file a bug report or submit a patch\&.
-
-.PP
-If you require help, visit the Samba webpage athttp://www\&.samba\&.org/ and explore the many option available to you\&.
-
-.SH "AVAILABILITY"
-
-.PP
-The Samba software suite is licensed under the GNU Public License(GPL)\&. A copy of that license should have come with the package in the file COPYING\&. You are encouraged to distribute copies of the Samba suite, but please obey the terms of this license\&.
-
-.PP
-The latest version of the Samba suite can be obtained via anonymous ftp from samba\&.org in the directory pub/samba/\&. It is also available on several mirror sites worldwide\&.
-
-.PP
-You may also find useful information about Samba on the newsgroup comp\&.protocol\&.smb and the Samba mailing list\&. Details on how to join the mailing list are given in the README file that comes with Samba\&.
-
-.PP
-If you have access to a WWW viewer (such as Mozilla or Konqueror) then you will also find lots of useful information, including back issues of the Samba mailing list, athttp://lists\&.samba\&.org\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "CONTRIBUTIONS"
-
-.PP
-If you wish to contribute to the Samba project, then I suggest you join the Samba mailing list athttp://lists\&.samba\&.org\&.
-
-.PP
-If you have patches to submit, visithttp://devel\&.samba\&.org/ for information on how to do it properly\&. We prefer patches in \fBdiff -u\fR format\&.
-
-.SH "CONTRIBUTORS"
-
-.PP
-Contributors to the project are now too numerous to mention here but all deserve the thanks of all Samba users\&. To see a full list, look at the\fIchange-log\fR in the source package for the pre-CVS changes and at http://cvs\&.samba\&.org/ for the contributors to Samba post-CVS\&. CVS is the Open Source source code control system used by the Samba Team to develop Samba\&. The project would have been unmanageable without it\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/select.7 b/raw/man7/select.7
deleted file mode 100644
index f705d28..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/select.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,804 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "SELECT" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-SELECT \- retrieve rows from a table or view
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT [ ALL | DISTINCT [ ON ( \fIexpression\fR [, ...] ) ] ]
- * | \fIexpression\fR [ AS \fIoutput_name\fR ] [, ...]
- [ FROM \fIfrom_item\fR [, ...] ]
- [ WHERE \fIcondition\fR ]
- [ GROUP BY \fIexpression\fR [, ...] ]
- [ HAVING \fIcondition\fR [, ...] ]
- [ { UNION | INTERSECT | EXCEPT } [ ALL ] \fIselect\fR ]
- [ ORDER BY \fIexpression\fR [ ASC | DESC | USING \fIoperator\fR ] [, ...] ]
- [ LIMIT { \fIcount\fR | ALL } ]
- [ OFFSET \fIstart\fR ]
- [ FOR UPDATE [ OF \fItable_name\fR [, ...] ] ]
-
-where \fIfrom_item\fR can be one of:
-
- [ ONLY ] \fItable_name\fR [ * ] [ [ AS ] \fIalias\fR [ ( \fIcolumn_alias\fR [, ...] ) ] ]
- ( \fIselect\fR ) [ AS ] \fIalias\fR [ ( \fIcolumn_alias\fR [, ...] ) ]
- \fIfunction_name\fR ( [ \fIargument\fR [, ...] ] ) [ AS ] \fIalias\fR [ ( \fIcolumn_alias\fR [, ...] | \fIcolumn_definition\fR [, ...] ) ]
- \fIfunction_name\fR ( [ \fIargument\fR [, ...] ] ) AS ( \fIcolumn_definition\fR [, ...] )
- \fIfrom_item\fR [ NATURAL ] \fIjoin_type\fR \fIfrom_item\fR [ ON \fIjoin_condition\fR | USING ( \fIjoin_column\fR [, ...] ) ]
-.sp
-.fi
-[Comment: FIXME: This last syntax is incorrect if the join type is an
-INNER or OUTER join (in which case one of NATURAL, ON ..., or USING
-\&... is mandatory, not optional). What's the best way to fix
-this?]
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBSELECT\fR retrieves rows from one or more tables.
-The general processing of \fBSELECT\fR is as follows:
-.IP 1.
-All elements in the FROM list are computed.
-(Each element in the FROM list is a real or
-virtual table.) If more than one element is specified in the
-FROM list, they are cross-joined together.
-(See FROM Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.IP 2.
-If the WHERE clause is specified, all rows
-that do not satisfy the condition are eliminated from the
-output. (See WHERE Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.IP 3.
-If the GROUP BY clause is specified, the
-output is divided into groups of rows that match on one or more
-values. If the HAVING clause is present, it
-eliminates groups that do not satisfy the given condition. (See
-GROUP BY Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] and
-HAVING Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.IP 4.
-Using the operators UNION,
-INTERSECT, and EXCEPT, the
-output of more than one \fBSELECT\fR statement can
-be combined to form a single result set. The
-UNION operator returns all rows that are in
-one or both of the result sets. The
-INTERSECT operator returns all rows that are
-strictly in both result sets. The EXCEPT
-operator returns the rows that are in the first result set but
-not in the second. In all three cases, duplicate rows are
-eliminated unless ALL is specified. (See
-UNION Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)], INTERSECT Clause [\fBselect\fR(l)], and
-EXCEPT Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.IP 5.
-The actual output rows are computed the
-\fBSELECT\fR output expressions for each selected
-row. (See
-SELECT List [\fBselect\fR(7)]
-below.)
-.IP 6.
-If the ORDER BY clause is specified, the
-returned rows are sorted in the specified order. If
-ORDER BY is not given, the rows are returned
-in whatever order the system finds fastest to produce. (See
-ORDER BY Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.IP 7.
-If the LIMIT or OFFSET
-clause is specified, the \fBSELECT\fR statement
-only returns a subset of the result rows. (See LIMIT Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.IP 8.
-DISTINCT eliminates duplicate rows from the
-result. DISTINCT ON eliminates rows that
-match on all the specified expressions. ALL
-(the default) will return all candidate rows, including
-duplicates. (See DISTINCT Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.IP 9.
-The FOR UPDATE clause causes the
-\fBSELECT\fR statement to lock the selected rows
-against concurrent updates. (See FOR UPDATE Clause [\fBselect\fR(7)] below.)
-.PP
-.PP
-You must have SELECT privilege on a table to
-read its values. The use of FOR UPDATE requires
-UPDATE privilege as well.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.SS "FROM CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The FROM clause specifies one or more source
-tables for the \fBSELECT\fR. If multiple sources are
-specified, the result is the Cartesian product (cross join) of all
-the sources. But usually qualification conditions
-are added to restrict the returned rows to a small subset of the
-Cartesian product.
-.PP
-FROM-clause elements can contain:
-.TP
-\fB\fItable_name\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of an existing table or
-view. If ONLY is specified, only that table is
-scanned. If ONLY is not specified, the table and
-all its descendant tables (if any) are scanned. *
-can be appended to the table name to indicate that descendant
-tables are to be scanned, but in the current version, this is
-the default behavior. (In releases before 7.1,
-ONLY was the default behavior.) The default
-behavior can be modified by changing the
-sql_interitance configuration option.
-.TP
-\fB\fIalias\fB\fR
-A substitute name for the FROM item containing the
-alias. An alias is used for brevity or to eliminate ambiguity
-for self-joins (where the same table is scanned multiple
-times). When an alias is provided, it completely hides the
-actual name of the table or function; for example given
-FROM foo AS f, the remainder of the
-\fBSELECT\fR must refer to this FROM
-item as f not foo. If an alias is
-written, a column alias list can also be written to provide
-substitute names for one or more columns of the table.
-.TP
-\fB\fIselect\fB\fR
-A sub-\fBSELECT\fR can appear in the
-FROM clause. This acts as though its
-output were created as a temporary table for the duration of
-this single \fBSELECT\fR command. Note that the
-sub-\fBSELECT\fR must be surrounded by
-parentheses, and an alias \fBmust\fR be
-provided for it.
-.TP
-\fB\fIfunction_name\fB\fR
-Function calls can appear in the FROM
-clause. (This is especially useful for functions that return
-result sets, but any function can be used.) This acts as
-though its output were created as a temporary table for the
-duration of this single \fBSELECT\fR command. An
-alias may also be used. If an alias is written, a column alias
-list can also be written to provide substitute names for one
-or more attributes of the function's composite return type. If
-the function has been defined as returning the \fBrecord\fR
-data type, then an alias or the key word AS must
-be present, followed by a column definition list in the form
-( \fIcolumn_name\fR \fIdata_type\fR [, ... ]
-). The column definition list must match the actual
-number and types of columns returned by the function.
-.TP
-\fB\fIjoin_type\fB\fR
-One of
-.RS
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-[ INNER ] JOIN
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-LEFT [ OUTER ] JOIN
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-RIGHT [ OUTER ] JOIN
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-FULL [ OUTER ] JOIN
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-CROSS JOIN
-.RE
-.PP
-For the INNER and OUTER join types, a
-join condition must be specified, namely exactly one of
-NATURAL, ON \fIjoin_condition\fR, or
-USING (\fIjoin_column\fR [, ...]).
-See below for the meaning. For CROSS JOIN,
-none of these clauses may appear.
-
-A JOIN clause, combines two
-FROM items. (Use parentheses if necessary to
-determine the order of nesting.)
-
-CROSS JOIN and INNER JOIN
-produce a simple Cartesian product, the same as you get from
-listing the two items at the top level of FROM.
-CROSS JOIN is equivalent to INNER JOIN ON
-(true), that is, no rows are removed by qualification.
-These join types are just a notational convenience, since they
-do nothing you couldn't do with plain FROM and
-WHERE.
-
-LEFT OUTER JOIN returns all rows in the qualified
-Cartesian product (i.e., all combined rows that pass its join
-condition), plus one copy of each row in the left-hand table
-for which there was no right-hand row that passed the join
-condition. This left-hand row is extended to the full width
-of the joined table by inserting null values for the
-right-hand columns. Note that only the JOIN
-clauses own condition is considered while deciding which rows
-have matches. Outer conditions are applied afterwards.
-
-Conversely, RIGHT OUTER JOIN returns all the
-joined rows, plus one row for each unmatched right-hand row
-(extended with nulls on the left). This is just a notational
-convenience, since you could convert it to a LEFT
-OUTER JOIN by switching the left and right inputs.
-
-FULL OUTER JOIN returns all the joined rows, plus
-one row for each unmatched left-hand row (extended with nulls
-on the right), plus one row for each unmatched right-hand row
-(extended with nulls on the left).
-.TP
-\fBON \fIjoin_condition\fB\fR
-\fIjoin_condition\fR is
-an expression resulting in a value of type
-\fBboolean\fR (similar to a WHERE
-clause) that specifies which rows in a join are considered to
-match.
-.TP
-\fBUSING (\fIjoin_column\fB [, ...])\fR
-A clause of the form USING ( a, b, ... ) is
-shorthand for ON left_table.a = right_table.a AND
-left_table.b = right_table.b .... Also,
-USING implies that only one of each pair of
-equivalent columns will be included in the join output, not
-both.
-.TP
-\fBNATURAL\fR
-NATURAL is shorthand for a
-USING list that mentions all columns in the two
-tables that have the same names.
-.PP
-.SS "WHERE CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The optional WHERE clause has the general form
-.sp
-.nf
-WHERE \fIcondition\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-where \fIcondition\fR is
-any expression that evaluates to a result of type
-\fBboolean\fR. Any row that does not satisfy this
-condition will be eliminated from the output. A row satisfies the
-condition if it returns true when the actual row values are
-substituted for any variable references.
-.SS "GROUP BY CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The optional GROUP BY clause has the general form
-.sp
-.nf
-GROUP BY \fIexpression\fR [, ...]
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-GROUP BY will condense into a single row all
-selected rows that share the same values for the grouped
-expressions. \fIexpression\fR can be an input column
-name, or the name or ordinal number of an output column
-(\fBSELECT\fR list), or it can be an arbitrary
-expression formed from input-column values. In case of ambiguity,
-a GROUP BY name will be interpreted as an
-input-column name rather than an output column name.
-.PP
-Aggregate functions, if any are used, are computed across all rows
-making up each group, producing a separate value for each group
-(whereas without GROUP BY, an aggregate
-produces a single value computed across all the selected rows).
-When GROUP BY is present, it is not valid for
-the \fBSELECT\fR list expressions to refer to
-ungrouped columns except within aggregate functions, since there
-would be more than one possible value to return for an ungrouped
-column.
-.SS "HAVING CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The optional HAVING clause has the general form
-.sp
-.nf
-HAVING \fIcondition\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-where \fIcondition\fR is
-the same as specified for the WHERE clause.
-.PP
-HAVING eliminates group rows that do not
-satisfy the condition. HAVING is different
-from WHERE: WHERE filters
-individual rows before the application of GROUP
-BY, while HAVING filters group rows
-created by GROUP BY. Each column referenced in
-\fIcondition\fR must
-unambiguously reference a grouping column, unless the reference
-appears within an aggregate function.
-.SS "UNION CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The UNION clause has this general form:
-.sp
-.nf
-\fIselect_statement\fR UNION [ ALL ] \fIselect_statement\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-\fIselect_statement\fR is
-any \fBSELECT\fR statement without an ORDER
-BY, LIMIT, or FOR UPDATE clause.
-(ORDER BY and LIMIT can be attached to a
-subexpression if it is enclosed in parentheses. Without
-parentheses, these clauses will be taken to apply to the result of
-the UNION, not to its right-hand input
-expression.)
-.PP
-The UNION operator computes the set union of
-the rows returned by the involved \fBSELECT\fR
-statements. A row is in the set union of two result sets if it
-appears in at least one of the result sets. The two
-\fBSELECT\fR statements that represent the direct
-operands of the UNION must produce the same
-number of columns, and corresponding columns must be of compatible
-data types.
-.PP
-The result of UNION does not contain any duplicate
-rows unless the ALL option is specified.
-ALL prevents elimination of duplicates.
-.PP
-Multiple UNION operators in the same
-\fBSELECT\fR statement are evaluated left to right,
-unless otherwise indicated by parentheses.
-.PP
-Currently, FOR UPDATE may not be specified either for
-a UNION result or for the inputs of UNION.
-.SS "INTERSECT CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The INTERSECT clause has this general form:
-.sp
-.nf
-\fIselect_statement\fR INTERSECT [ ALL ] \fIselect_statement\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-\fIselect_statement\fR is
-any \fBSELECT\fR statement without an ORDER
-BY, LIMIT, or FOR UPDATE clause.
-.PP
-The INTERSECT operator computes the set
-intersection of the rows returned by the involved
-\fBSELECT\fR statements. A row is in the
-intersection of two result sets if it appears in both result sets.
-.PP
-The result of INTERSECT does not contain any
-duplicate rows unless the ALL option is specified.
-With ALL, a row that has m duplicates in the left
-table and n duplicates in the right table will appear min(m,n)
-times in the result set.
-.PP
-Multiple INTERSECT operators in the same
-\fBSELECT\fR statement are evaluated left to right,
-unless parentheses dictate otherwise.
-INTERSECT binds more tightly than
-UNION. That is, A UNION B INTERSECT
-C will be read as A UNION (B INTERSECT
-C).
-.SS "EXCEPT CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The EXCEPT clause has this general form:
-.sp
-.nf
-\fIselect_statement\fR EXCEPT [ ALL ] \fIselect_statement\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-\fIselect_statement\fR is
-any \fBSELECT\fR statement without an ORDER
-BY, LIMIT, or FOR UPDATE clause.
-.PP
-The EXCEPT operator computes the set of rows
-that are in the result of the left \fBSELECT\fR
-statement but not in the result of the right one.
-.PP
-The result of EXCEPT does not contain any
-duplicate rows unless the ALL option is specified.
-With ALL, a row that has m duplicates in the left
-table and n duplicates in the right table will appear max(m-n,0)
-times in the result set.
-.PP
-Multiple EXCEPT operators in the same
-\fBSELECT\fR statement are evaluated left to right,
-unless parentheses dictate otherwise. EXCEPT binds at
-the same level as UNION.
-.SS "SELECT LIST"
-.PP
-The \fBSELECT\fR list (between the key words
-SELECT and FROM) specifies expressions
-that form the output rows of the \fBSELECT\fR
-statement. The expressions can (and usually do) refer to columns
-computed in the FROM clause. Using the clause
-AS \fIoutput_name\fR, another
-name can be specified for an output column. This name is
-primarily used to label the column for display. It can also be
-used to refer to the column's value in ORDER BY and
-GROUP BY clauses, but not in the WHERE or
-HAVING clauses; there you must write out the
-expression instead.
-.PP
-Instead of an expression, * can be written in
-the output list as a shorthand for all the columns of the selected
-rows. Also, one can write \fItable_name\fR.* as a
-shorthand for the columns coming from just that table.
-.SS "ORDER BY CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The optional ORDER BY clause has this general form:
-.sp
-.nf
-ORDER BY \fIexpression\fR [ ASC | DESC | USING \fIoperator\fR ] [, ...]
-.sp
-.fi
-\fIexpression\fR can be the
-name or ordinal number of an output column
-(\fBSELECT\fR list), or it can be an arbitrary
-expression formed from input-column values.
-.PP
-The ORDER BY clause causes the result rows to
-be sorted according to the specified expressions. If two rows are
-equal according to the leftmost expression, the are compared
-according to the next expression and so on. If they are equal
-according to all specified expressions, they are returned in
-random order.
-.PP
-The ordinal number refers to the ordinal (left-to-right) position
-of the result column. This feature makes it possible to define an
-ordering on the basis of a column that does not have a unique
-name. This is never absolutely necessary because it is always
-possible to assign a name to a result column using the
-AS clause.
-.PP
-It is also possible to use arbitrary expressions in the
-ORDER BY clause, including columns that do not
-appear in the \fBSELECT\fR result list. Thus the
-following statement is valid:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT name FROM distributors ORDER BY code;
-.sp
-.fi
-A limitation of this feature is that an ORDER BY
-clause applying to the result of a UNION,
-INTERSECT, or EXCEPT clause may only
-specify an output column name or number, not an expression.
-.PP
-If an ORDER BY expression is a simple name that
-matches both a result column name and an input column name,
-ORDER BY will interpret it as the result column name.
-This is the opposite of the choice that GROUP BY will
-make in the same situation. This inconsistency is made to be
-compatible with the SQL standard.
-.PP
-Optionally one may add the key word ASC (ascending) or
-DESC (descending) after each expression in the
-ORDER BY clause. If not specified, ASC is
-assumed by default. Alternatively, a specific ordering operator
-name may be specified in the USING clause.
-ASC is usually equivalent to USING < and
-DESC is usually equivalent to USING >.
-(But the creator of a user-defined data type can define exactly what the
-default sort ordering is, and it might correspond to operators with other
-names.)
-.PP
-The null value sorts higher than any other value. In other words,
-with ascending sort order, null values sort at the end, and with
-descending sort order, null values sort at the beginning.
-.PP
-Character-string data is sorted according to the locale-specific
-collation order that was established when the database cluster
-was initialized.
-.SS "LIMIT CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The LIMIT clause consists of two independent
-clauses:
-.sp
-.nf
-LIMIT { \fIcount\fR | ALL }
-OFFSET \fIstart\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-\fIcount\fR specifies the
-maximum number of rows to return, and \fIstart\fR specifies the number of rows
-to skip before starting to return rows.
-.PP
-When using LIMIT, it is a good idea to use an
-ORDER BY clause that constrains the result rows into a
-unique order. Otherwise you will get an unpredictable subset of
-the query's rows---you may be asking for the tenth through
-twentieth rows, but tenth through twentieth in what ordering? You
-don't know what ordering unless you specify ORDER BY.
-.PP
-The query planner takes LIMIT into account when
-generating a query plan, so you are very likely to get different
-plans (yielding different row orders) depending on what you use
-for LIMIT and OFFSET. Thus, using
-different LIMIT/OFFSET values to select
-different subsets of a query result \fBwill give
-inconsistent results\fR unless you enforce a predictable
-result ordering with ORDER BY. This is not a bug; it
-is an inherent consequence of the fact that SQL does not promise
-to deliver the results of a query in any particular order unless
-ORDER BY is used to constrain the order.
-.SS "DISTINCT CLAUSE"
-.PP
-If DISTINCT is specified, all duplicate rows are
-removed from the result set (one row is kept from each group of
-duplicates). ALL specifies the opposite: all rows are
-kept; that is the default.
-.PP
-DISTINCT ON ( \fIexpression\fR [, ...] )
-keeps only the first row of each set of rows where the given
-expressions evaluate to equal. The DISTINCT ON
-expressions are interpreted using the same rules as for
-ORDER BY (see above). Note that the ``first
-row'' of each set is unpredictable unless ORDER
-BY is used to ensure that the desired row appears first. For
-example,
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT DISTINCT ON (location) location, time, report
- FROM weather_reports
- ORDER BY location, time DESC;
-.sp
-.fi
-retrieves the most recent weather report for each location. But
-if we had not used ORDER BY to force descending order
-of time values for each location, we'd have gotten a report from
-an unpredictable time for each location.
-.SS "FOR UPDATE CLAUSE"
-.PP
-The FOR UPDATE clause has this form:
-.sp
-.nf
-FOR UPDATE [ OF \fItable_name\fR [, ...] ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-FOR UPDATE causes the rows retrieved by the
-\fBSELECT\fR statement to be locked as though for
-update. This prevents them from being modified or deleted by
-other transactions until the current transaction ends. That is,
-other transactions that attempt \fBUPDATE\fR,
-\fBDELETE\fR, or \fBSELECT FOR UPDATE\fR
-of these rows will be blocked until the current transaction ends.
-Also, if an \fBUPDATE\fR, \fBDELETE\fR,
-or \fBSELECT FOR UPDATE\fR from another transaction
-has already locked a selected row or rows, \fBSELECT FOR
-UPDATE\fR will wait for the other transaction to complete,
-and will then lock and return the updated row (or no row, if the
-row was deleted). For further discussion see the chapter called ``Concurrency Control'' in the documentation.
-.PP
-If specific tables are named in FOR UPDATE,
-then only rows coming from those tables are locked; any other
-tables used in the \fBSELECT\fR are simply read as
-usual.
-.PP
-FOR UPDATE cannot be used in contexts where
-returned rows can't be clearly identified with individual table
-rows; for example it can't be used with aggregation.
-.PP
-FOR UPDATE may appear before
-LIMIT for compatibility with
-PostgreSQL versions before 7.3. It
-effectively executes after LIMIT, however, and
-so that is the recommended place to write it.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To join the table films with the table
-distributors:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT f.title, f.did, d.name, f.date_prod, f.kind
- FROM distributors d, films f
- WHERE f.did = d.did
-
- title | did | name | date_prod | kind
--------------------+-----+--------------+------------+----------
- The Third Man | 101 | British Lion | 1949-12-23 | Drama
- The African Queen | 101 | British Lion | 1951-08-11 | Romantic
- ...
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To sum the column len of all films and group
-the results by kind:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT kind, sum(len) AS total FROM films GROUP BY kind;
-
- kind | total
-----------+-------
- Action | 07:34
- Comedy | 02:58
- Drama | 14:28
- Musical | 06:42
- Romantic | 04:38
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-To sum the column len of all films, group
-the results by kind and show those group totals
-that are less than 5 hours:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT kind, sum(len) AS total
- FROM films
- GROUP BY kind
- HAVING sum(len) < interval '5 hours';
-
- kind | total
-----------+-------
- Comedy | 02:58
- Romantic | 04:38
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-The following two examples are identical ways of sorting the individual
-results according to the contents of the second column
-(name):
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT * FROM distributors ORDER BY name;
-SELECT * FROM distributors ORDER BY 2;
-
- did | name
------+------------------
- 109 | 20th Century Fox
- 110 | Bavaria Atelier
- 101 | British Lion
- 107 | Columbia
- 102 | Jean Luc Godard
- 113 | Luso films
- 104 | Mosfilm
- 103 | Paramount
- 106 | Toho
- 105 | United Artists
- 111 | Walt Disney
- 112 | Warner Bros.
- 108 | Westward
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-This example shows how to obtain the union of the tables
-distributors and
-actors, restricting the results to those that begin
-with letter W in each table. Only distinct rows are wanted, so the
-key word ALL is omitted.
-.sp
-.nf
-distributors: actors:
- did | name id | name
------+-------------- ----+----------------
- 108 | Westward 1 | Woody Allen
- 111 | Walt Disney 2 | Warren Beatty
- 112 | Warner Bros. 3 | Walter Matthau
- ... ...
-
-SELECT distributors.name
- FROM distributors
- WHERE distributors.name LIKE 'W%'
-UNION
-SELECT actors.name
- FROM actors
- WHERE actors.name LIKE 'W%';
-
- name
-----------------
- Walt Disney
- Walter Matthau
- Warner Bros.
- Warren Beatty
- Westward
- Woody Allen
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-This example shows how to use a function in the FROM
-clause, both with and without a column definition list.
-.sp
-.nf
-CREATE FUNCTION distributors(int) RETURNS SETOF distributors AS '
- SELECT * FROM distributors WHERE did = $1;
-' LANGUAGE SQL;
-
-SELECT * FROM distributors(111);
- did | name
------+-------------
- 111 | Walt Disney
-
-CREATE FUNCTION distributors_2(int) RETURNS SETOF record AS '
- SELECT * FROM distributors WHERE did = $1;
-' LANGUAGE SQL;
-
-SELECT * FROM distributors_2(111) AS (f1 int, f2 text);
- f1 | f2
------+-------------
- 111 | Walt Disney
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-Of course, the \fBSELECT\fR statement is compatible
-with the SQL standard. But there are some extensions and some
-missing features.
-.SS "OMITTED FROM CLAUSES"
-.PP
-PostgreSQL allows one to omit the
-FROM clause. It has a straightforward use to
-compute the results of simple expressions:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT 2+2;
-
- ?column?
-----------
- 4
-.sp
-.fi
-Some other SQL databases cannot do this except
-by introducing a dummy one-row table from which to do the
-\fBSELECT\fR.
-.PP
-A less obvious use is to abbreviate a normal
-\fBSELECT\fR from tables:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT distributors.* WHERE distributors.name = 'Westward';
-
- did | name
------+----------
- 108 | Westward
-.sp
-.fi
-This works because an implicit FROM item is
-added for each table that is referenced in other parts of the
-\fBSELECT\fR statement but not mentioned in
-FROM.
-.PP
-While this is a convenient shorthand, it's easy to misuse. For
-example, the command
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT distributors.* FROM distributors d;
-.sp
-.fi
-is probably a mistake; most likely the user meant
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT d.* FROM distributors d;
-.sp
-.fi
-rather than the unconstrained join
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT distributors.* FROM distributors d, distributors distributors;
-.sp
-.fi
-that he will actually get. To help detect this sort of mistake,
-PostgreSQL will warn if the
-implicit-FROM feature is used in a
-\fBSELECT\fR statement that also contains an explicit
-FROM clause. Also, it is possible to disable
-the implicit-FROM feature by setting the
-ADD_MISSING_FROM parameter to false.
-.SS "THE AS KEY WORD"
-.PP
-In the SQL standard, the optional key word AS is just
-noise and can be omitted without affecting the meaning. The
-PostgreSQL parser requires this key
-word when renaming output columns because the type extensibility
-features lead to parsing ambiguities without it.
-AS is optional in FROM
-items, however.
-.SS "NAMESPACE AVAILABLE TO GROUP BY AND ORDER BY"
-.PP
-In the SQL92 standard, an ORDER BY clause may
-only use result column names or numbers, while a GROUP
-BY clause may only use expressions based on input column
-names. PostgreSQL extends each of
-these clauses to allow the other choice as well (but it uses the
-standard's interpretation if there is ambiguity).
-PostgreSQL also allows both clauses to
-specify arbitrary expressions. Note that names appearing in an
-expression will always be taken as input-column names, not as
-result-column names.
-.PP
-SQL99 uses a slightly different definition which is not upward compatible
-with SQL92. In most cases, however, PostgreSQL
-will interpret an ORDER BY or GROUP
-BY expression the same way SQL99 does.
-.SS "NONSTANDARD CLAUSES"
-.PP
-The clauses DISTINCT ON,
-LIMIT, and OFFSET are not
-defined in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/select_into.7 b/raw/man7/select_into.7
deleted file mode 100644
index c3affd1..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/select_into.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "SELECT INTO" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-SELECT INTO \- create a new table from the results of a query
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT [ ALL | DISTINCT [ ON ( \fIexpression\fR [, ...] ) ] ]
- * | \fIexpression\fR [ AS \fIoutput_name\fR ] [, ...]
- INTO [ TEMPORARY | TEMP ] [ TABLE ] \fInew_table\fR
- [ FROM \fIfrom_item\fR [, ...] ]
- [ WHERE \fIcondition\fR ]
- [ GROUP BY \fIexpression\fR [, ...] ]
- [ HAVING \fIcondition\fR [, ...] ]
- [ { UNION | INTERSECT | EXCEPT } [ ALL ] \fIselect\fR ]
- [ ORDER BY \fIexpression\fR [ ASC | DESC | USING \fIoperator\fR ] [, ...] ]
- [ LIMIT { \fIcount\fR | ALL } ]
- [ OFFSET \fIstart\fR ]
- [ FOR UPDATE [ OF \fItablename\fR [, ...] ] ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBSELECT INTO\fR creates a new table and fills it
-with data computed by a query. The data is not returned to the
-client, as it is with a normal \fBSELECT\fR. The new
-table's columns have the names and data types associated with the
-output columns of the \fBSELECT\fR.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBTEMPORARY or TEMP\fR
-If specified, the table is created as a temporary table. Refer
-to CREATE TABLE [\fBcreate_table\fR(7)] for details.
-.TP
-\fB\fInew_table\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table to be created.
-.PP
-All other parameters are described in detail under SELECT [\fBselect\fR(7)].
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-CREATE TABLE AS [\fBcreate_table_as\fR(7)]
-is functionally equivalent to \fBSELECT INTO\fR.
-\fBCREATE TABLE AS\fR is the recommended syntax, since
-this form of \fBSELECT INTO\fR is not available in
-\fBECPG\fR or
-\fBPL/pgSQL\fR, because they interpret the
-INTO clause differently.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard uses \fBSELECT ... INTO\fR to
-represent selecting values into scalar variables of a host program,
-rather than creating a new table. This indeed is the usage found
-in \fBECPG\fR and \fBPL/pgSQL\fR.
-The PostgreSQL usage of \fBSELECT
-INTO\fR to represent table creation is historical. It's
-best to use \fBCREATE TABLE AS\fR for this purpose in
-new code. (\fBCREATE TABLE AS\fR isn't standard
-either, but it's less likely to cause confusion.)
diff --git a/raw/man7/set.7 b/raw/man7/set.7
deleted file mode 100644
index cce7d3e..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/set.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "SET" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-SET \- change a run-time parameter
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-SET [ SESSION | LOCAL ] \fIname\fR { TO | = } { \fIvalue\fR | '\fIvalue\fR' | DEFAULT }
-SET [ SESSION | LOCAL ] TIME ZONE { \fItimezone\fR | LOCAL | DEFAULT }
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-The \fBSET\fR command changes run-time configuration
-parameters. Many of the run-time parameters listed in
-the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation can be changed on-the-fly with
-\fBSET\fR.
-(But some require superuser privileges to change, and others cannot
-be changed after server or session start.)
-\fBSET\fR only affects the value used by the current
-session.
-.PP
-If \fBSET\fR or \fBSET SESSION\fR is issued
-within a transaction that is later aborted, the effects of the
-\fBSET\fR command disappear when the transaction is rolled
-back. (This behavior represents a change from
-PostgreSQL versions prior to 7.3, where
-the effects of \fBSET\fR would not roll back after a later
-error.) Once the surrounding transaction is committed, the effects
-will persist until the end of the session, unless overridden by another
-\fBSET\fR.
-.PP
-The effects of \fBSET LOCAL\fR last only till the end of
-the current transaction, whether committed or not. A special case is
-\fBSET\fR followed by \fBSET LOCAL\fR within
-a single transaction: the \fBSET LOCAL\fR value will be
-seen until the end of the transaction, but afterwards (if the transaction
-is committed) the \fBSET\fR value will take effect.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBSESSION\fR
-Specifies that the command takes effect for the current session.
-(This is the default if neither SESSION nor
-LOCAL appears.)
-.TP
-\fBLOCAL\fR
-Specifies that the command takes effect for only the current
-transaction. After \fBCOMMIT\fR or \fBROLLBACK\fR,
-the session-level setting takes effect again. Note that
-\fBSET LOCAL\fR will appear to have no effect if it is
-executed outside a \fBBEGIN\fR block, since the
-transaction will end immediately.
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-Name of a settable run-time parameter. Available parameters are
-documented in the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation and below.
-.TP
-\fB\fIvalue\fB\fR
-New value of parameter. Values can be specified as string
-constants, identifiers, numbers, or comma-separated lists of
-these. DEFAULT can be used to specify
-resetting the parameter to its default value.
-.PP
-Besides the configuration parameters documented in the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation, there are a few that can only be
-adjusted using the \fBSET\fR command or that have a
-special syntax:
-.TP
-\fBNAMES\fR
-SET NAMES \fIvalue\fR is an alias for
-SET client_encoding TO \fIvalue\fR.
-.TP
-\fBSEED\fR
-Sets the internal seed for the random number generator (the
-function \fBrandom\fR). Allowed values are
-floating-point numbers between 0 and 1, which are then
-multiplied by 231-1.
-
-The seed can also be set by invoking the function
-\fBsetseed\fR:
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT setseed(\fIvalue\fR);
-.sp
-.fi
-.TP
-\fBTIME ZONE\fR
-SET TIME ZONE \fIvalue\fR is an alias
-for SET timezone TO \fIvalue\fR. The
-syntax SET TIME ZONE allows special syntax
-for the time zone specification. Here are examples of valid
-values (but note some are accepted only on some platforms):
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\&'PST8PDT'\fR
-The time zone for Berkeley, California.
-.TP
-\fB\&'Portugal'\fR
-The time zone for Portugal.
-.TP
-\fB\&'Europe/Rome'\fR
-The time zone for Italy.
-.TP
-\fB-7\fR
-The time zone 7 hours west from UTC (equivalent
-to PDT). Positive values are east from UTC.
-.TP
-\fBINTERVAL '-08:00' HOUR TO MINUTE\fR
-The time zone 8 hours west from UTC (equivalent
-to PST).
-.TP
-\fBLOCAL\fR
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT\fR
-Set the time zone to your local time zone (the one that
-the server's operating system defaults to).
-.RE
-.PP
-See the section called ``Date/Time Types'' in the documentation for more information
-about time zones.
-.PP
-.PP
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-The function \fBset_config\fR provides equivalent
-functionality. See the section called ``Miscellaneous Functions'' in the documentation.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Set the schema search path:
-.sp
-.nf
-SET search_path TO my_schema, public;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Set the style of date to traditional
-POSTGRES with ``day before month''
-input convention:
-.sp
-.nf
-SET datestyle TO postgres, dmy;
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Set the time zone for Berkeley, California, using quotes to
-preserve the uppercase spelling of the time zone name:
-.sp
-.nf
-SET TIME ZONE 'PST8PDT';
-SELECT current_timestamp AS today;
-
- today
--------------------------------
- 2003-04-29 15:02:01.218622-07
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-SET TIME ZONE extends syntax defined in the SQL
-standard. The standard allows only numeric time zone offsets while
-PostgreSQL allows more flexible
-time-zone specifications. All other SET
-features are PostgreSQL extensions.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-RESET [\fBreset\fR(7)], SHOW [\fBshow\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/set_constraints.7 b/raw/man7/set_constraints.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 2030968..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/set_constraints.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "SET CONSTRAINTS" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-SET CONSTRAINTS \- set the constraint mode of the current transaction
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-SET CONSTRAINTS { ALL | \fIname\fR [, ...] } { DEFERRED | IMMEDIATE }
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBSET CONSTRAINTS\fR sets the behavior of constraint
-evaluation in the current transaction. In
-IMMEDIATE mode, constraints are checked at the
-end of each statement. In DEFERRED mode,
-constraints are not checked until transaction commit.
-.PP
-When you change the mode of a constraint to be
-IMMEDIATE, the new constraint mode takes effect
-retroactively: any outstanding data modifications that would have
-been checked at the end of the transaction (when using
-DEFERRED) are instead checked during the
-execution of the \fBSET CONSTRAINTS\fR command.
-.PP
-Upon creation, a constraint is always give one of three
-characteristics: INITIALLY DEFERRED,
-INITIALLY IMMEDIATE DEFERRABLE, or
-INITIALLY IMMEDIATE NOT DEFERRABLE. The third
-class is not affected by the \fBSET CONSTRAINTS\fR
-command.
-.PP
-Currently, only foreign key constraints are affected by this
-setting. Check and unique constraints are always effectively
-initially immediate not deferrable.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-This command only alters the behavior of constraints within the
-current transaction. Thus, if you execute this command outside of a
-transaction block
-(\fBBEGIN\fR/\fBCOMMIT\fR pair), it will
-not appear to have any effect. If you wish to change the behavior
-of a constraint without needing to issue a \fBSET
-CONSTRAINTS\fR command in every transaction, specify
-INITIALLY DEFERRED or INITIALLY
-IMMEDIATE when you create the constraint.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command complies with the behavior defined in the SQL
-standard, except for the limitation that, in
-PostgreSQL, it only applies to
-foreign-key constraints.
diff --git a/raw/man7/set_session_authorization.7 b/raw/man7/set_session_authorization.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e22235..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/set_session_authorization.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION \- set the session user identifier and the current user identifier of the current session
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-SET [ SESSION | LOCAL ] SESSION AUTHORIZATION \fIusername\fR
-SET [ SESSION | LOCAL ] SESSION AUTHORIZATION DEFAULT
-RESET SESSION AUTHORIZATION
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-This command sets the session user identifier and the current user
-identifier of the current SQL-session context to be \fIusername\fR. The user name may be
-written as either an identifier or a string literal. Using this
-command, it is possible, for example, to temporarily become an
-unprivileged user and later switch back to become a superuser.
-.PP
-The session user identifier is initially set to be the (possibly
-authenticated) user name provided by the client. The current user
-identifier is normally equal to the session user identifier, but
-may change temporarily in the context of ``setuid''
-functions and similar mechanisms. The current user identifier is
-relevant for permission checking.
-.PP
-The session user identifier may be changed only if the initial session
-user (the \fIauthenticated user\fR) had the
-superuser privilege. Otherwise, the command is accepted only if it
-specifies the authenticated user name.
-.PP
-The SESSION and LOCAL modifiers act the same
-as for the regular SET [\fBset\fR(7)]
-command.
-.PP
-The DEFAULT and RESET forms reset the session
-and current user identifiers to be the originally authenticated user
-name. These forms may be executed by any user.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.sp
-.nf
-SELECT SESSION_USER, CURRENT_USER;
-
- session_user | current_user
---------------+--------------
- peter | peter
-
-SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION 'paul';
-
-SELECT SESSION_USER, CURRENT_USER;
-
- session_user | current_user
---------------+--------------
- paul | paul
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The SQL standard allows some other expressions to appear in place
-of the literal \fIusername\fR which are not
-important in practice. PostgreSQL
-allows identifier syntax ("username"), which SQL
-does not. SQL does not allow this command during a transaction;
-PostgreSQL does not make this
-restriction because there is no reason to. The privileges
-necessary to execute this command are left implementation-defined
-by the standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/set_transaction.7 b/raw/man7/set_transaction.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 28417ef..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/set_transaction.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "SET TRANSACTION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-SET TRANSACTION \- set the characteristics of the current transaction
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-SET TRANSACTION
- [ ISOLATION LEVEL { READ COMMITTED | SERIALIZABLE } ] [ READ WRITE | READ ONLY ]
-SET SESSION CHARACTERISTICS AS TRANSACTION
- [ ISOLATION LEVEL { READ COMMITTED | SERIALIZABLE } ] [ READ WRITE | READ ONLY ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-The \fBSET TRANSACTION\fR command sets the transaction
-characteristics of the current transaction. It has no effect on any
-subsequent transactions. \fBSET SESSION
-CHARACTERISTICS\fR sets the default transaction
-characteristics for each transaction of a session. \fBSET
-TRANSACTION\fR can override it for an individual
-transaction.
-.PP
-The available transaction characteristics are the transaction
-isolation level and the transaction access mode (read/write or
-read-only).
-.PP
-The isolation level of a transaction determines what data the
-transaction can see when other transactions are running concurrently.
-.TP
-\fBREAD COMMITTED\fR
-A statement can only see rows committed before it began. This
-is the default.
-.TP
-\fBSERIALIZABLE\fR
-The current transaction can only see rows committed before
-first query or data-modification statement was executed in this transaction.
-.sp
-.RS
-.B "Tip:"
-Intuitively, serializable means that two concurrent
-transactions will leave the database in the same state as if
-the two has been executed strictly after one another in either
-order.
-.RE
-.sp
-.PP
-The transaction isolation level cannot be set after the first query
-or data-modification statement (\fBSELECT\fR,
-\fBINSERT\fR, \fBDELETE\fR,
-\fBUPDATE\fR, \fBFETCH\fR,
-\fBCOPY\fR) of a transaction has been executed. See
-the chapter called ``Concurrency Control'' in the documentation for more information about transaction
-isolation and concurrency control.
-.PP
-The transaction access mode determines whether the transaction is
-read/write or read-only. Read/write is the default. When a
-transaction is read-only, the following SQL commands are
-disallowed: INSERT, UPDATE,
-DELETE, and COPY TO if the
-table they would write to is not a temporary table; all
-CREATE, ALTER, and
-DROP commands; COMMENT,
-GRANT, REVOKE,
-TRUNCATE; and EXPLAIN ANALYZE
-and EXECUTE if the command they would execute is
-among those listed. This is a high-level notion of read-only that
-does not prevent writes to disk.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-The session default transaction isolation level can also be set
-with the command
-.sp
-.nf
-SET default_transaction_isolation = '\fIvalue\fR'
-.sp
-.fi
-and in the configuration file. Consult the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation for more
-information.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-Both commands are defined in the SQL standard.
-SERIALIZABLE is the default transaction
-isolation level in the standard; in PostgreSQL the default is
-ordinarily READ COMMITTED, but you can change it as
-described above. PostgreSQL does not
-provide the isolation levels READ UNCOMMITTED
-and REPEATABLE READ. Because of multiversion
-concurrency control, the SERIALIZABLE level is
-not truly serializable. See the chapter called ``Concurrency Control'' in the documentation for details.
-.PP
-In the SQL standard, there is one other transaction characteristic
-that can be set with these commands: the size of the diagnostics
-area. This concept is only for use in embedded SQL.
diff --git a/raw/man7/show.7 b/raw/man7/show.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 8e0ca7d..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/show.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "SHOW" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-SHOW \- show the value of a run-time parameter
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-SHOW \fIname\fR
-SHOW ALL
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBSHOW\fR will display the current setting of
-run-time parameters. These variables can be set using the
-\fBSET\fR statement, by editing the
-\fIpostgresql.conf\fR configuration file, through
-the \fBPGOPTIONS\fR environmental variable (when using
-\fBlibpq\fR or a \fBlibpq\fR-based
-application), or through command-line flags when starting the
-\fBpostmaster\fR. See the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation for details.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name of a run-time parameter. Available parameters are
-documented in the section called ``Run-time Configuration'' in the documentation and on the SET [\fBset\fR(7)] reference page. In
-addition, there are a few parameters that can be shown but not
-set:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBSERVER_VERSION\fR
-Shows the server's version number.
-.TP
-\fBSERVER_ENCODING\fR
-Shows the server-side character set encoding. At present,
-this parameter can be shown but not set, because the
-encoding is determined at database creation time.
-.TP
-\fBLC_COLLATE\fR
-Shows the database's locale setting for collation (text
-ordering). At present, this parameter can be shown but not
-set, because the setting is determined at
-\fBinitdb\fR time.
-.TP
-\fBLC_CTYPE\fR
-Shows the database's locale setting for character
-classification. At present, this parameter can be shown but
-not set, because the setting is determined at
-\fBinitdb\fR time.
-.TP
-\fBIS_SUPERUSER\fR
-True if the current session authorization identifier has
-superuser privileges.
-.RE
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBALL\fR
-Show the values of all configurations parameters.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-The function \fBcurrent_setting\fR produces
-equivalent output. See the section called ``Miscellaneous Functions'' in the documentation.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Show the current setting of the parameter DateStyle:
-.sp
-.nf
-SHOW DateStyle;
- DateStyle
------------
- ISO, MDY
-(1 row)
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Show the current setting of the parameter geqo:
-.sp
-.nf
-SHOW geqo;
- geqo
-------
- on
-(1 row)
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Show all settings:
-.sp
-.nf
-SHOW ALL;
- name | setting
--------------------------------+---------------------------------------
- australian_timezones | off
- authentication_timeout | 60
- checkpoint_segments | 3
- .
- .
- .
- wal_debug | 0
- wal_sync_method | fdatasync
-(94 rows)
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-The \fBSHOW\fR command is a
-PostgreSQL extension.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-SET [\fBset\fR(7)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/signal.7 b/raw/man7/signal.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cb228b..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/signal.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,255 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Copyright (c) 1993 by Thomas Koenig (ig25 at rz.uni-karlsruhe.de)
-.\" Copyright (c) 2002 by Michael Kerrisk (mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz)
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of this
-.\" manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice are
-.\" preserved on all copies.
-.\"
-.\" Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-.\" manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the
-.\" entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-.\" permission notice identical to this one
-.\"
-.\" Since the Linux kernel and libraries are constantly changing, this
-.\" manual page may be incorrect or out-of-date. The author(s) assume no
-.\" responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from
-.\" the use of the information contained herein. The author(s) may not
-.\" have taken the same level of care in the production of this manual,
-.\" which is licensed free of charge, as they might when working
-.\" professionally.
-.\"
-.\" Formatted or processed versions of this manual, if unaccompanied by
-.\" the source, must acknowledge the copyright and authors of this work.
-.\" License.
-.\" Modified Sat Jul 24 17:34:08 1993 by Rik Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Modified Sun Jan 7 01:41:27 1996 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Sun Apr 14 12:02:29 1996 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified Sat Nov 13 16:28:23 1999 by Andries Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" Modified 10 Apr 2002, by Michael Kerrisk (mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz)
-.\" Modified 7 Jun 2002, by Michael Kerrisk (mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz)
-.\" Added information on real-time signals
-.\" Modified 13 Jun 2002, by Michael Kerrisk (mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz)
-.\" Noted that SIGSTKFLT is in fact unused
-.\"
-.TH SIGNAL 7 2002-06-13 "Linux 2.4.18" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-signal \- list of available signals
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Linux supports both POSIX reliable signals (hereinafter
-"standard signals") and POSIX real-time signals.
-.SS "Standard Signals"
-Linux supports the standard signals listed below. Several signal numbers
-are architecture dependent, as indicated in the "Value" column.
-(Where three values are given, the first one is usually valid for
-alpha and sparc, the middle one for i386, ppc and sh, and
-the last one for mips.
-A \- denotes that a signal is absent on the corresponding architecture.)
-
-The entries in the "Action" column of the table specify
-the default action for the signal, as follows:
-.IP Term
-Default action is to terminate the process.
-.IP Ign
-Default action is to ignore the signal.
-.IP Core
-Default action is to terminate the process and dump core.
-.IP Stop
-Default action is to stop the process.
-.PP
-First the signals described in the original POSIX.1 standard.
-.sp
-.PP
-.TS
-l c c l
-____
-lB c c l.
-Signal Value Action Comment
-SIGHUP \01 Term Hangup detected on controlling terminal
- or death of controlling process
-SIGINT \02 Term Interrupt from keyboard
-SIGQUIT \03 Core Quit from keyboard
-SIGILL \04 Core Illegal Instruction
-SIGABRT \06 Core Abort signal from \fIabort\fP(3)
-SIGFPE \08 Core Floating point exception
-SIGKILL \09 Term Kill signal
-SIGSEGV 11 Core Invalid memory reference
-SIGPIPE 13 Term Broken pipe: write to pipe with no readers
-SIGALRM 14 Term Timer signal from \fIalarm\fP(2)
-SIGTERM 15 Term Termination signal
-SIGUSR1 30,10,16 Term User\-defined signal 1
-SIGUSR2 31,12,17 Term User\-defined signal 2
-SIGCHLD 20,17,18 Ign Child stopped or terminated
-SIGCONT 19,18,25 Continue if stopped
-SIGSTOP 17,19,23 Stop Stop process
-SIGTSTP 18,20,24 Stop Stop typed at tty
-SIGTTIN 21,21,26 Stop tty input for background process
-SIGTTOU 22,22,27 Stop tty output for background process
-.TE
-
-The signals
-.B SIGKILL
-and
-.B SIGSTOP
-cannot be caught, blocked, or ignored.
-
-Next the signals not in the POSIX.1 standard but described in SUSv2 and
-SUSv3 / POSIX 1003.1-2001.
-.sp
-.PP
-.TS
-l c c l
-____
-lB c c l.
-Signal Value Action Comment
-SIGBUS 10,7,10 Core Bus error (bad memory access)
-SIGPOLL Term Pollable event (Sys V). Synonym of SIGIO
-SIGPROF 27,27,29 Term Profiling timer expired
-SIGSYS 12,\-,12 Core Bad argument to routine (SVID)
-SIGTRAP 5 Core Trace/breakpoint trap
-SIGURG 16,23,21 Ign Urgent condition on socket (4.2 BSD)
-SIGVTALRM 26,26,28 Term Virtual alarm clock (4.2 BSD)
-SIGXCPU 24,24,30 Core CPU time limit exceeded (4.2 BSD)
-SIGXFSZ 25,25,31 Core File size limit exceeded (4.2 BSD)
-.TE
-
-Up to and including Linux 2.2, the default behaviour for
-.BR SIGSYS ", " SIGXCPU ", " SIGXFSZ ", "
-and (on architectures other than SPARC and MIPS)
-.B SIGBUS
-was to terminate the process (without a core dump).
-(On some other Unices the default action for
-.BR SIGXCPU " and " SIGXFSZ
-is to terminate the process without a core dump.)
-Linux 2.4 conforms to the POSIX 1003.1-2001 requirements for these signals,
-terminating the process with a core dump.
-
-Next various other signals.
-.sp
-.PP
-.TS
-l c c l
-____
-lB c c l.
-Signal Value Action Comment
-SIGIOT 6 Core IOT trap. A synonym for SIGABRT
-SIGEMT 7,\-,7 Term
-SIGSTKFLT \-,16,\- Term Stack fault on coprocessor (unused)
-SIGIO 23,29,22 Term I/O now possible (4.2 BSD)
-SIGCLD \-,\-,18 Ign A synonym for SIGCHLD
-SIGPWR 29,30,19 Term Power failure (System V)
-SIGINFO 29,\-,\- A synonym for SIGPWR
-SIGLOST \-,\-,\- Term File lock lost
-SIGWINCH 28,28,20 Ign Window resize signal (4.3 BSD, Sun)
-SIGUNUSED \-,31,\- Term Unused signal (will be SIGSYS)
-.TE
-
-(Signal 29 is
-.B SIGINFO
-/
-.B SIGPWR
-on an alpha but
-.B SIGLOST
-on a sparc.)
-
-.B SIGEMT
-is not specified in POSIX 1003.1-2001, but neverthless appears
-on most other Unices, where its default action is typically to terminate
-the process with a core dump.
-
-.B SIGPWR
-(which is not specified in POSIX 1003.1-2001) is typically ignored
-by default on those other Unices where it appears.
-
-.B SIGIO
-(which is not specified in POSIX 1003.1-2001) is ignored by default
-on several other Unices.
-.SS "Real-time Signals"
-Linux supports real-time signals as originally defined in the POSIX.4
-real-time extensions (and now included in POSIX 1003.1-2001).
-Linux supports 32 real-time signals, numbered from 32
-.RB ( SIGRTMIN )
-to 63
-.RB ( SIGRTMAX ).
-(Programs should always refer to real-time signals using notation
-.BR SIGRTMIN +n,
-since the range of real-time signal numbers varies across Unices.)
-.PP
-Unlike standard signals, real-time signals have no predefined meanings:
-the entire set of real-time signals can be used for application-defined
-purposes.
-(Note, however, that the LinuxThreads implementation uses the first
-three real-time signals.)
-.PP
-The default action for an unhandled real-time signal is to terminate the
-receiving process.
-.PP
-Real-time signals are distinguished by the following:
-.IP 1. 4
-Multiple instances of real-time signals can be queued.
-By contrast, if multiple instances of a standard signal are delivered
-while that signal is currently blocked, then only one instance is queued.
-.IP 2. 4
-If the signal is sent using
-.BR sigqueue (2),
-an accompanying value (either an integer or a pointer) can be sent
-with the signal.
-If the receiving process establishes a handler for this signal using the
-.B SA_SIGACTION
-flag to
-.BR sigaction (2)
-then it can obtain this data via the
-.I si_value
-field of the
-.I siginfo_t
-structure passed as the second argument to the handler.
-Furthermore, the
-.I si_pid
-and
-.I si_uid
-fields of this structure can be used to obtain the PID
-and real user ID of the process sending the signal.
-.IP 3. 4
-Real-time signals are delivered in a guaranteed order.
-Multiple real-time signals of the same type are delivered in the order
-they were sent.
-If different real-time signals are sent to a process, they are delivered
-starting with the lowest-numbered signal.
-(I.e., low-numbered signals have highest priority.)
-.PP
-If both standard and real-time signals are pending for a process,
-POSIX leaves it unspecified which is delivered first.
-Linux, like many other implementations, gives priority
-to standard signals in this case.
-.PP
-According to POSIX, an implementation should permit at least
-_POSIX_SIGQUEUE_MAX (32) real-time signals to be queued to
-a process.
-However, rather than placing a per-process limit, Linux imposes
-a system-wide limit on the number of queued real-time signals
-for all processes.
-This limit can be viewed and (with privilege) changed via the
-.I /proc/sys/kernel/rtsig-max
-file.
-A related file,
-.IR /proc/sys/kernel/rtsig-nr ,
-can be used to find out how many real-time signals are currently queued.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-POSIX.1
-.SH BUGS
-.B SIGIO
-and
-.B SIGLOST
-have the same value.
-The latter is commented out in the kernel source, but
-the build process of some software still thinks that
-signal 29 is
-.BR SIGLOST .
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR kill (1),
-.BR kill (2),
-.BR setitimer (2),
-.BR sigaction (2),
-.BR signal (2),
-.BR sigprocmask (2),
-.BR sigqueue (2)
diff --git a/raw/man7/socket.7 b/raw/man7/socket.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 069033e..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/socket.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,557 +0,0 @@
-'\" t
-.\" Don't change the first line, it tells man that we need tbl.
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" and copyright (c) 1999 Matthew Wilcox.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" $Id: socket.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:53 bbbush Exp $
-.\"
-.\" 30 Oct 2002, Modified, Michael Kerrisk, mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz
-.\" Added description of SO_ACCEPTCONN
-.\" Plus 1 language tidy-up
-.\"
-.TH SOCKET 7 1999-05-07 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-socket - Linux socket interface
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.IB mysocket " = socket(int " socket_family ", int " socket_type ", int " protocol );
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This manual page describes the Linux networking socket layer user
-interface. The BSD compatible sockets
-are the uniform interface
-between the user process and the network protocol stacks in the kernel.
-The protocol modules are grouped into
-.I protocol families
-like
-.BR PF_INET ", " PF_IPX ", " PF_PACKET
-and
-.I socket types
-like
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-or
-.BR SOCK_DGRAM .
-See
-.BR socket (2)
-for more information on families and types.
-
-.SH "SOCKET LAYER FUNCTIONS"
-These functions are used by the user process to send or receive packets and
-to do other socket operations. For more information see their respective
-manual pages.
-
-.BR socket (2)
-creates a socket,
-.BR connect (2)
-connects a socket to a remote socket address,
-the
-.BR bind (2)
-function binds a socket to a local socket address,
-.BR listen (2)
-tells the socket that new connections shall be accepted, and
-.BR accept (2)
-is used to get a new socket with a new incoming connection.
-.BR socketpair (2)
-returns two connected anonymous sockets (only implemented for a few
-local families like
-.BR PF_UNIX )
-.PP
-.BR send (2),
-.BR sendto (2),
-and
-.BR sendmsg (2)
-send data over a socket, and
-.BR recv (2),
-.BR recvfrom (2),
-.BR recvmsg (2)
-receive data from a socket.
-.BR poll (2)
-and
-.BR select (2)
-wait for arriving data or a readiness to send data.
-In addition, the standard I/O operations like
-.BR write (2),
-.BR writev (2),
-.BR sendfile (2),
-.BR read (2),
-and
-.BR readv (2)
-can be used to read and write data.
-.PP
-.BR getsockname (2)
-returns the local socket address and
-.BR getpeername (2)
-returns the remote socket address.
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-and
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-are used to set or get socket layer or protocol options.
-.BR ioctl (2)
-can be used to set or read some other options.
-.PP
-.BR close (2)
-is used to close a socket.
-.BR shutdown (2)
-closes parts of a full duplex socket connection.
-.PP
-Seeking, or calling
-.BR pread (2)
-or
-.BR pwrite (2)
-with a non-zero position is not supported on sockets.
-.PP
-It is possible to do non-blocking IO on sockets by setting the
-.B O_NONBLOCK
-flag on a socket file descriptor using
-.BR fcntl (2).
-Then all operations that would block will (usually)
-return with
-.B EAGAIN
-(operation should be retried later);
-.BR connect (2)
-will return
-.B EINPROGRESS
-error.
-The user can then wait for various events via
-.BR poll (2)
-or
-.BR select (2).
-.PP
-.TS
-tab(:) allbox;
-c s s
-l l l.
-I/O events
-Event:Poll flag:Occurrence
-Read:POLLIN:T{
-New data arrived.
-T}
-Read:POLLIN:T{
-A connection setup has been completed
-(for connection-oriented sockets)
-T}
-Read:POLLHUP:T{
-A disconnection request has been initiated by the other end.
-T}
-Read:POLLHUP:T{
-A connection is broken (only for connection-oriented protocols).
-When the socket is written
-.B SIGPIPE
-is also sent.
-T}
-Write:POLLOUT:T{
-Socket has enough send buffer space for writing new data.
-T}
-Read/Write:T{
-POLLIN|
-.br
-POLLOUT
-T}:T{
-An outgoing
-.BR connect (2)
-finished.
-T}
-Read/Write:POLLERR:An asynchronous error occurred.
-Read/Write:POLLHUP:The other end has shut down one direction.
-Exception:POLLPRI:T{
-Urgent data arrived.
-.B SIGURG
-is sent then.
-T}
-.\" XXX not true currently
-.\" It is no I/O event when the connection
-.\" is broken from the local end using
-.\" .BR shutdown (2)
-.\" or
-.\" .BR close (2)
-.\" .
-.TE
-
-.PP
-An alternative to poll/select
-is to let the kernel inform the application about events
-via a
-.B SIGIO
-signal. For that the
-.B FASYNC
-flag must be set on a socket file descriptor
-via
-.BR fcntl (2)
-and a valid signal handler for
-.B SIGIO
-must be installed via
-.BR sigaction (2).
-See the
-.I SIGNALS
-discussion below.
-.SH "SOCKET OPTIONS"
-These socket options can be set by using
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-and read with
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-with the socket level set to
-.B SOL_SOCKET
-for all sockets:
-.TP
-.B SO_KEEPALIVE
-Enable sending of keep-alive messages on connection-oriented sockets. Expects
-a integer boolean flag.
-.TP
-.B SO_OOBINLINE
-If this option is enabled, out-of-band data is directly placed into the receive
-data stream. Otherwise out-of-band data is only passed when the
-.B MSG_OOB
-flag is set during receiving.
-.\" don't document it because it can do too much harm.
-.\".B SO_NO_CHECK
-.TP
-.BR SO_RCVLOWAT " and " SO_SNDLOWAT
-Specify the minimum number of bytes in the buffer until the socket layer
-will pass the data to the protocol
-.RB ( SO_SNDLOWAT )
-or the user on receiving
-.RB ( SO_RCVLOWAT ).
-These two values are not changeable in Linux and their argument size
-is always fixed
-to 1 byte.
-.B getsockopt
-is able to read them;
-.B setsockopt
-will always return
-.BR ENOPROTOOPT .
-.TP
-.BR SO_RCVTIMEO " and " SO_SNDTIMEO
-Specify the sending or receiving timeouts until reporting an error.
-They are fixed to a protocol specific setting in Linux and cannot be read
-or written. Their functionality can be emulated using
-.BR alarm (2)
-or
-.BR setitimer (2).
-.TP
-.B SO_BSDCOMPAT
-Enable BSD bug-to-bug compatibility. This is used only by the UDP
-protocol module and scheduled to be removed in future.
-If enabled ICMP errors received for a UDP socket will not be passed
-to the user program. Linux 2.0 also enabled BSD bug-to-bug compatibility
-options (random header changing, skipping of the broadcast flag) for raw
-sockets with this option, but that has been removed in Linux 2.2. It is
-better to fix the user programs than to enable this flag.
-.TP
-.B SO_PASSCRED
-Enable or disable the receiving of the
-.B SCM_CREDENTIALS
-control message. For more information see
-.BR unix (7).
-.TP
-.B SO_PEERCRED
-Return the credentials of the foreign process connected to this socket.
-Only useful for
-.B PF_UNIX
-sockets; see
-.BR unix (7).
-Argument is a
-.B ucred
-structure. Only valid as a
-.BR getsockopt .
-.TP
-.B SO_BINDTODEVICE
-Bind this socket to a particular device like \(lqeth0\(rq,
-as specified in the passed interface name. If the
-name is an empty string or the option length is zero, the socket device
-binding is removed. The passed option is a variable-length null terminated
-interface name string with the maximum size of
-.BR IFNAMSIZ .
-If a socket is bound to an interface,
-only packets received from that particular interface are processed by the
-socket. Note that this only works for some socket types, particularly
-.B AF_INET
-sockets. It is not supported for packet sockets (use normal
-.BR bind (8)
-there).
-.TP
-.B SO_DEBUG
-Enable socket debugging. Only allowed for processes with the
-.B CAP_NET_ADMIN
-capability or an effective user id of 0.
-.TP
-.B SO_REUSEADDR
-Indicates that the rules used in validating addresses supplied in a
-.BR bind (2)
-call should allow reuse of local addresses. For
-.B PF_INET
-sockets this
-means that a socket may bind, except when there
-is an active listening socket bound to the address. When the listening
-socket is bound to
-.B INADDR_ANY
-with a specific port then it is not possible
-to bind to this port for any local address.
-.TP
-.B SO_TYPE
-Gets the socket type as an integer (like
-.BR SOCK_STREAM ).
-Can only be read
-with
-.BR getsockopt .
-.\" SO_ACCEPTCONN is in SUSv3, and its origin is explained in
-.\" W R Stevens, UNPv1
-.TP
-.B SO_ACCEPTCONN
-Returns a value indicating whether or not this socket has been marked
-to accept connections with
-.BR listen ().
-The value 0 indicates that this is not a listening socket,
-the value 1 indicates that this is a listening socket.
-Can only be read
-with
-.BR getsockopt .
-.TP
-.B SO_DONTROUTE
-Don't send via a gateway, only send to directly connected hosts.
-The same effect can be achieved by setting the
-.B MSG_DONTROUTE
-flag on a socket
-.BR send (2)
-operation. Expects an integer boolean flag.
-.TP
-.B SO_BROADCAST
-Set or get the broadcast flag. When enabled, datagram sockets
-receive packets sent to a broadcast address and they are allowed to send
-packets to a broadcast address.
-This option has no effect on stream-oriented sockets.
-.TP
-.B SO_SNDBUF
-Sets or gets the maximum socket send buffer in bytes. The default value is set
-by the
-.B wmem_default
-sysctl and the maximum allowed value is set by the
-.B wmem_max
-sysctl.
-.TP
-.B SO_RCVBUF
-Sets or gets the maximum socket receive buffer in bytes. The default value is
-set by the
-.B rmem_default
-sysctl and the maximum allowed value is set by the
-.B rmem_max
-sysctl.
-.TP
-.B SO_LINGER
-Sets or gets the
-.B SO_LINGER
-option. The argument is a
-.B linger
-structure.
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 10n 22n
-struct linger {
- int l_onoff; /* linger active */
- int l_linger; /* how many seconds to linger for */
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-.IP
-When enabled, a
-.BR close (2)
-or
-.BR shutdown (2)
-will not return until all queued messages for the socket have been
-successfully sent or the linger timeout has been reached. Otherwise,
-the call returns immediately and the closing is done in the background.
-When the socket is closed as part of
-.BR exit (2),
-it always lingers in the background.
-.TP
-.B SO_PRIORITY
-Set the protocol-defined priority for all packets to be sent on this socket.
-Linux uses this value to order the networking queues: packets with a higher
-priority may be processed first depending on the selected device queueing
-discipline. For
-.BR ip (7),
-this also sets the IP type-of-service (TOS) field for outgoing packets.
-.TP
-.B SO_ERROR
-Get and clear the pending socket error. Only valid as a
-.BR getsockopt .
-Expects an integer.
-.SH SIGNALS
-When writing onto a connection-oriented socket that has been shut down
-(by the local or the remote end)
-.B SIGPIPE
-is sent to the writing process and
-.B EPIPE
-is returned.
-The signal is not sent when the write call
-specified the
-.B MSG_NOSIGNAL
-flag.
-.PP
-When requested with the
-.B FIOSETOWN
-fcntl or
-.B SIOCSPGRP
-ioctl,
-.B SIGIO
-is sent when an I/O event occurs. It is possible to use
-.BR poll (2)
-or
-.BR select (2)
-in the signal handler to find out which socket the event occurred on.
-An alternative (in Linux 2.2) is to set a realtime signal using the
-.B F_SETSIG
-fcntl; the handler of the real time signal will be called with
-the file descriptor in the
-.I si_fd
-field of its
-.IR siginfo_t .
-See
-.BR fcntl (2)
-for more information.
-.PP
-Under some circumstances (e.g. multiple processes accessing a single socket),
-the condition that caused the
-.B SIGIO
-may have already disappeared when the process reacts to the signal.
-If this happens, the process should wait again because Linux will resend the
-signal later.
-.\" .SH ANCILLARY MESSAGES
-.SH SYSCTLS
-The core socket networking sysctls can be accessed using the
-.B /proc/sys/net/core/*
-files or with the
-.BR sysctl (2)
-interface.
-.TP
-.B rmem_default
-contains the default setting in bytes of the socket receive buffer.
-.TP
-.B rmem_max
-contains the maximum socket receive buffer size in bytes which a user may
-set by using the
-.B SO_RCVBUF
-socket option.
-.TP
-.B wmem_default
-contains the default setting in bytes of the socket send buffer.
-.TP
-.B wmem_max
-contains the maximum socket send buffer size in bytes which a user may
-set by using the
-.B SO_SNDBUF
-socket option.
-.TP
-.BR message_cost " and " message_burst
-configure the token bucket filter used to load limit warning messages
-caused by external network events.
-.TP
-.B netdev_max_backlog
-Maximum number of packets in the global input queue.
-.TP
-.B optmem_max
-Maximum length of ancillary data and user control data like the iovecs
-per socket.
-.\" netdev_fastroute is not documented because it is experimental
-.SH IOCTLS
-These ioctls can be accessed using
-.BR ioctl (2):
-
-.RS
-.nf
-.IB error " = ioctl(" ip_socket ", " ioctl_type ", " &value_result ");"
-.fi
-.RE
-
-.TP
-.B SIOCGSTAMP
-Return a
-.B struct timeval
-with the receive timestamp of the last packet passed to the user. This is useful
-for accurate round trip time measurements. See
-.BR setitimer (2)
-for a description of
-.BR "struct timeval" .
-.\"
-.TP
-.BR SIOCSPGRP
-Set the process or process group to send
-.B SIGIO
-or
-.B SIGURG
-signals
-to when an
-asynchronous I/O operation has finished or urgent data is available.
-The argument is a pointer to a
-.BR pid_t .
-If the argument is positive, send the signals to that process. If the
-argument is negative, send the signals to the process group with the id
-of the absolute value of the argument.
-The process may only choose itself or its own process group to receive
-signals unless it has the
-.B CAP_KILL
-capability or an effective UID of 0.
-.TP
-.B FIOASYNC
-Change the
-.B O_ASYNC
-flag to enable or disable asynchronous IO mode of the socket. Asynchronous IO
-mode means that the
-.B SIGIO
-signal or the signal set with
-.B F_SETSIG
-is raised when a new I/O event occurs.
-.IP
-Argument is a integer boolean flag.
-.\"
-.TP
-.BR SIOCGPGRP
-Get the current process or process group that receives
-.B SIGIO
-or
-.B SIGURG
-signals,
-or 0
-when none is set.
-.PP
-Valid fcntls:
-.TP
-.BR FIOGETOWN
-The same as the SIOCGPGRP ioctl.
-.TP
-.BR FIOSETOWN
-The same as the SIOCSPGRP ioctl
-.SH NOTES
-Linux assumes that half of the send/receive buffer is used for internal
-kernel structures; thus the sysctls are twice what can be observed
-on the wire.
-.SH BUGS
-The
-.B CONFIG_FILTER
-socket options
-.B SO_ATTACH_FILTER
-and
-.B SO_DETACH_FILTER
-are
-not documented. The suggested interface to use them is via the libpcap
-library.
-.SH VERSIONS
-.B SO_BINDTODEVICE
-was introduced in Linux 2.0.30.
-.B SO_PASSCRED
-is new in Linux 2.2.
-The sysctls are new in Linux 2.2.
-.SH AUTHORS
-This man page was written by Andi Kleen.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR socket (2),
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR setsockopt (2),
-.BR getsockopt (2),
-.BR packet (7),
-.BR ddp (7)
diff --git a/raw/man7/start_transaction.7 b/raw/man7/start_transaction.7
deleted file mode 100644
index a2035dd..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/start_transaction.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "START TRANSACTION" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-START TRANSACTION \- start a transaction block
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-START TRANSACTION [ ISOLATION LEVEL { READ COMMITTED | SERIALIZABLE } ] [ READ WRITE | READ ONLY ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-This command begins a new transaction. If the isolation level or
-read/write mode is specified, the new transaction has those
-characteristics, as if SET TRANSACTION [\fBset_transaction\fR(7)] was executed. In all other
-respects, the behavior of this command is identical to the BEGIN [\fBbegin\fR(7)] command.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.PP
-See under SET TRANSACTION [\fBset_transaction\fR(7)] about the meaning of the
-parameters.
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command conforms to the SQL standard; but see also the
-compatibility section of SET TRANSACTION [\fBset_transaction\fR(7)].
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-BEGIN [\fBbegin\fR(7)], COMMIT [\fBcommit\fR(l)], ROLLBACK [\fBrollback\fR(l)], SET TRANSACTION [\fBset_transaction\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/tcp.7 b/raw/man7/tcp.7
deleted file mode 100644
index f03fda2..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/tcp.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,712 +0,0 @@
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\"
-.\" 2.4 Updates by Nivedita Singhvi 4/20/02 <nivedita at us.ibm.com>.
-.\"
-.TH TCP 7 2003-08-21 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-tcp \- TCP protocol.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.B #include <netinet/in.h>
-.br
-.B #include <netinet/tcp.h>
-.br
-.B tcp_socket = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0);
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This is an implementation of the TCP protocol defined in
-RFC793, RFC1122 and RFC2001 with the NewReno and SACK
-extensions. It provides a reliable, stream oriented, full
-duplex connection between two sockets on top of
-.BR ip (7),
-for both v4 and v6 versions.
-TCP guarantees that the data arrives in order and
-retransmits lost packets. It generates and checks a per
-packet checksum to catch transmission errors. TCP does not
-preserve record boundaries.
-
-A fresh TCP socket has no remote or local address and is not
-fully specified. To create an outgoing TCP connection use
-.BR connect (2)
-to establish a connection to another TCP socket.
-To receive new incoming connections
-.BR bind (2)
-the socket first to a local address and port and then call
-.BR listen (2)
-to put the socket into listening state. After that a new
-socket for each incoming connection can be accepted
-using
-.BR accept (2).
-A socket which has had
-.B accept
-or
-.B connect
-successfully called on it is fully specified and may
-transmit data. Data cannot be transmitted on listening or
-not yet connected sockets.
-
-Linux supports RFC1323 TCP high performance
-extensions. These include Protection Against Wrapped
-Sequence Numbers (PAWS), Window Scaling and
-Timestamps. Window scaling allows the use
-of large (> 64K) TCP windows in order to support links with high
-latency or bandwidth. To make use of them, the send and
-receive buffer sizes must be increased.
-They can be set globally with the
-.B net.ipv4.tcp_wmem
-and
-.B net.ipv4.tcp_rmem
-sysctl variables, or on individual sockets by using the
-.B SO_SNDBUF
-and
-.B SO_RCVBUF
-socket options with the
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-call.
-
-The maximum sizes for socket buffers declared via the
-.B SO_SNDBUF
-and
-.B SO_RCVBUF
-mechanisms are limited by the global
-.B net.core.rmem_max
-and
-.B net.core.wmem_max
-sysctls. Note that TCP actually allocates twice the size of
-the buffer requested in the
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-call, and so a succeeding
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-call will not return the same size of buffer as requested
-in the
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-call. TCP uses this for administrative purposes and internal
-kernel structures, and the sysctl variables reflect the
-larger sizes compared to the actual TCP windows.
-On individual connections, the socket buffer size must be
-set prior to the
-.B listen()
-or
-.B connect()
-calls in order to have it take effect. See
-.BR socket (7)
-for more information.
-.PP
-TCP supports urgent data. Urgent data is used to signal the
-receiver that some important message is part of the data
-stream and that it should be processed as soon as possible.
-To send urgent data specify the
-.B MSG_OOB
-option to
-.BR send (2).
-When urgent data is received, the kernel sends a
-.B SIGURG
-signal to the reading process or the process or process
-group that has been set for the socket using the
-.B SIOCSPGRP
-or
-.B FIOSETOWN
-ioctls. When the
-.B SO_OOBINLINE
-socket option is enabled, urgent data is put into the normal
-data stream (and can be tested for by the
-.B SIOCATMARK
-ioctl),
-otherwise it can be only received when the
-.B MSG_OOB
-flag is set for
-.BR sendmsg (2).
-
-Linux 2.4 introduced a number of changes for improved
-throughput and scaling, as well as enhanced functionality.
-Some of these features include support for zerocopy
-.BR sendfile (2),
-Explicit Congestion Notification, new
-management of TIME_WAIT sockets, keep-alive socket options
-and support for Duplicate SACK extensions.
-.SH "ADDRESS FORMATS"
-TCP is built on top of IP (see
-.BR ip (7)).
-The address formats defined by
-.BR ip (7)
-apply to TCP. TCP only supports point-to-point
-communication; broadcasting and multicasting are not
-supported.
-.SH SYSCTLS
-These variables can be accessed by the
-.B /proc/sys/net/ipv4/*
-files or with the
-.BR sysctl (2)
-interface. In addition, most IP sysctls also apply to TCP; see
-.BR ip (7).
-.TP
-.B tcp_abort_on_overflow
-Enable resetting connections if the listening service is too
-slow and unable to keep up and accept them. It is not
-enabled by default. It means that if overflow occurred due
-to a burst, the connection will recover. Enable this option
-_only_ if you are really sure that the listening daemon
-cannot be tuned to accept connections faster. Enabling this
-option can harm the clients of your server.
-.TP
-.B tcp_adv_win_scale
-Count buffering overhead as bytes/2^tcp_adv_win_scale
-(if tcp_adv_win_scale > 0) or bytes-bytes/2^(-tcp_adv_win_scale),
-if it is <= 0. The default is 2.
-
-The socket receive buffer space is shared between the
-application and kernel. TCP maintains part of the buffer as
-the TCP window, this is the size of the receive window
-advertised to the other end. The rest of the space is used
-as the "application" buffer, used to isolate the network
-from scheduling and application latencies. The
-.B tcp_adv_win_scale
-default value of 2 implies that the space
-used for the application buffer is one fourth that of the
-total.
-.TP
-.B tcp_app_win
-This variable defines how many
-bytes of the TCP window are reserved for buffering
-overhead.
-
-A maximum of (window/2^tcp_app_win, mss) bytes in the window
-are reserved for the application buffer. A value of 0
-implies that no amount is reserved. The default value is 31.
-.TP
-.B tcp_dsack
-Enable RFC2883 TCP Duplicate SACK support.
-It is enabled by default.
-.TP
-.B tcp_ecn
-Enable RFC2884 Explicit Congestion Notification. It is not
-enabled by default. When enabled, connectivity to some
-destinations could be affected due to older, misbehaving
-routers along the path causing connections to be dropped.
-.TP
-.B tcp_fack
-Enable TCP Forward Acknowledgement support. It is enabled by
-default.
-.TP
-.B tcp_fin_timeout
-How many seconds to wait for a final FIN packet before the
-socket is forcibly closed. This is strictly a violation of
-the TCP specification, but required to prevent
-denial-of-service (DoS) attacks. The default value in 2.4
-kernels is 60, down from 180 in 2.2.
-.TP
-.B tcp_keepalive_intvl
-The number of seconds between TCP keep-alive probes.
-The default value is 75 seconds.
-.TP
-.B tcp_keepalive_probes
-The maximum number of TCP keep-alive probes to send
-before giving up and killing the connection if
-no response is obtained from the other end.
-The default value is 9.
-.TP
-.B tcp_keepalive_time
-The number of seconds a connection needs to be idle
-before TCP begins sending out keep-alive probes.
-Keep-alives are only sent when the
-.B SO_KEEPALIVE
-socket option is enabled. The default value is 7200 seconds
-(2 hours). An idle connection is terminated after
-approximately an additional 11 minutes (9 probes an interval
-of 75 seconds apart) when keep-alive is enabled.
-
-Note that underlying connection tracking mechanisms and
-application timeouts may be much shorter.
-.TP
-.B tcp_max_orphans
-The maximum number of orphaned (not attached to any user file
-handle) TCP sockets allowed in the system. When this number
-is exceeded, the orphaned connection is reset and a warning
-is printed. This limit exists only to prevent simple DoS
-attacks. Lowering this limit is not recommended. Network
-conditions might require you to increase the number of
-orphans allowed, but note that each orphan can eat up to ~64K
-of unswappable memory. The default initial value is set
-equal to the kernel parameter NR_FILE. This initial default
-is adjusted depending on the memory in the system.
-.TP
-.B tcp_max_syn_backlog
-The maximum number of queued connection requests which have
-still not received an acknowledgement from the connecting
-client. If this number is exceeded, the kernel will begin
-dropping requests. The default value of 256 is increased to
-1024 when the memory present in the system is adequate or
-greater (>= 128Mb), and reduced to 128 for those systems with
-very low memory (<= 32Mb). It is recommended that if this
-needs to be increased above 1024, TCP_SYNQ_HSIZE in
-include/net/tcp.h be modified to keep
-TCP_SYNQ_HSIZE*16<=tcp_max_syn_backlog, and the kernel be
-recompiled.
-.TP
-.B tcp_max_tw_buckets
-The maximum number of sockets in TIME_WAIT state allowed in
-the system. This limit exists only to prevent simple DoS
-attacks. The default value of NR_FILE*2 is adjusted
-depending on the memory in the system. If this number is
-exceeded, the socket is closed and a warning is printed.
-.TP
-.B tcp_mem
-This is a vector of 3 integers: [low, pressure, high]. These
-bounds are used by TCP to track its memory usage. The
-defaults are calculated at boot time from the amount of
-available memory.
-
-.I low
-- TCP doesn't regulate its memory allocation when the number
-of pages it has allocated globally is below this number.
-
-.I pressure
-- when the amount of memory allocated by TCP
-exceeds this number of pages, TCP moderates its memory
-consumption. This memory pressure state is exited
-once the number of pages allocated falls below
-the
-.B low
-mark.
-
-.I high
-- the maximum number of pages, globally, that TCP
-will allocate. This value overrides any other limits
-imposed by the kernel.
-.TP
-.B tcp_orphan_retries
-The maximum number of attempts made to probe the other
-end of a connection which has been closed by our end.
-The default value is 8.
-.TP
-.B tcp_reordering
-The maximum a packet can be reordered in a TCP packet stream
-without TCP assuming packet loss and going into slow start.
-The default is 3. It is not advisable to change this number.
-This is a packet reordering detection metric designed to
-minimize unnecessary back off and retransmits provoked by
-reordering of packets on a connection.
-.TP
-.B tcp_retrans_collapse
-Try to send full-sized packets during retransmit.
-This is enabled by default.
-.TP
-.B tcp_retries1
-The number of times TCP will attempt to retransmit a
-packet on an established connection normally,
-without the extra effort of getting the network
-layers involved. Once we exceed this number of
-retransmits, we first have the network layer
-update the route if possible before each new retransmit.
-The default is the RFC specified minimum of 3.
-.TP
-.B tcp_retries2
-The maximum number of times a TCP packet is retransmitted
-in established state before giving up. The default
-value is 15, which corresponds to a duration of
-approximately between 13 to 30 minutes, depending
-on the retransmission timeout. The RFC1122 specified
-minimum limit of 100 seconds is typically deemed too
-short.
-.TP
-.B tcp_rfc1337
-Enable TCP behaviour conformant with RFC 1337.
-This is not enabled by default. When not enabled,
-if a RST is received in TIME_WAIT state, we close
-the socket immediately without waiting for the end
-of the TIME_WAIT period.
-.TP
-.B tcp_rmem
-This is a vector of 3 integers: [min, default,
-max]. These parameters are used by TCP to regulate receive
-buffer sizes. TCP dynamically adjusts the size of the
-receive buffer from the defaults listed below, in the range
-of these sysctl variables, depending on memory available
-in the system.
-
-.I min
-- minimum size of the receive buffer used by each TCP
-socket. The default value is 4K, and is lowered to
-PAGE_SIZE bytes in low memory systems. This value
-is used to ensure that in memory pressure mode,
-allocations below this size will still succeed. This is not
-used to bound the size of the receive buffer declared
-using
-.B SO_RCVBUF
-on a socket.
-
-.I default
-- the default size of the receive buffer for a TCP socket.
-This value overwrites the initial default buffer size from
-the generic global
-.B net.core.rmem_default
-defined for all protocols. The default value is 87380
-bytes, and is lowered to 43689 in low memory systems. If
-larger receive buffer sizes are desired, this value should
-be increased (to affect all sockets). To employ large TCP
-windows, the
-.B net.ipv4.tcp_window_scaling
-must be enabled (default).
-
-.I max
-- the maximum size of the receive buffer used by
-each TCP socket. This value does not override the global
-.BR net.core.rmem_max .
-This is not used to limit the size of the receive buffer
-declared using
-.B SO_RCVBUF
-on a socket.
-The default value of 87380*2 bytes is lowered to 87380
-in low memory systems.
-.TP
-.B tcp_sack
-Enable RFC2018 TCP Selective Acknowledgements.
-It is enabled by default.
-.TP
-.B tcp_stdurg
-Enable the strict RFC793 interpretation of the TCP
-urgent-pointer field. The default is to use the
-BSD-compatible interpretation of the urgent-pointer, pointing
-to the first byte after the urgent data. The RFC793
-interpretation is to have it point to the last byte of urgent
-data. Enabling this option may lead to interoperatibility
-problems.
-.TP
-.B tcp_synack_retries
-The maximum number of times a SYN/ACK segment
-for a passive TCP connection will be retransmitted.
-This number should not be higher than 255. The default
-value is 5.
-.TP
-.B tcp_syncookies
-Enable TCP syncookies. The kernel must be compiled with
-.BR CONFIG_SYN_COOKIES .
-Send out syncookies when the syn backlog queue of a socket
-overflows. The syncookies feature attempts to protect a
-socket from a SYN flood attack. This should be used as a
-last resort, if at all. This is a violation of the TCP
-protocol, and conflicts with other areas of TCP such as TCP
-extensions. It can cause problems for clients and relays.
-It is not recommended as a tuning mechanism for heavily
-loaded servers to help with overloaded or misconfigured
-conditions. For recommended alternatives see
-.BR tcp_max_syn_backlog ,
-.BR tcp_synack_retries ,
-.BR tcp_abort_on_overflow .
-.TP
-.B tcp_syn_retries
-The maximum number of times initial SYNs for an active TCP
-connection attempt will be retransmitted. This value should
-not be higher than 255. The default value is 5, which
-corresponds to approximately 180 seconds.
-.TP
-.B tcp_timestamps
-Enable RFC1323 TCP timestamps. This is enabled
-by default.
-.TP
-.B tcp_tw_recycle
-Enable fast recycling of TIME-WAIT sockets. It is
-not enabled by default. Enabling this option is not
-recommended since this causes problems when working
-with NAT (Network Address Translation).
-.TP
-.B tcp_window_scaling
-Enable RFC1323 TCP window scaling. It is enabled by
-default. This feature allows the use of a large window
-(> 64K) on a TCP connection, should the other end support it.
-Normally, the 16 bit window length field in the TCP header
-limits the window size to less than 64K bytes. If larger
-windows are desired, applications can increase the size of
-their socket buffers and the window scaling option will be
-employed. If
-.B tcp_window_scaling
-is disabled, TCP will not negotiate the use of window
-scaling with the other end during connection setup.
-.TP
-.B tcp_wmem
-This is a vector of 3 integers: [min, default, max]. These
-parameters are used by TCP to regulate send buffer sizes.
-TCP dynamically adjusts the size of the send buffer from the
-default values listed below, in the range of these sysctl
-variables, depending on memory available.
-
-.I min
-- minimum size of the send buffer used by each TCP socket.
-The default value is 4K bytes.
-This value is used to ensure that in memory pressure mode,
-allocations below this size will still succeed. This is not
-used to bound the size of the send buffer declared
-using
-.B SO_SNDBUF
-on a socket.
-
-.I default
-- the default size of the send buffer for a TCP socket.
-This value overwrites the initial default buffer size from
-the generic global
-.B net.core.wmem_default
-defined for all protocols. The default value is 16K bytes.
-If larger send buffer sizes are desired, this value
-should be increased (to affect all sockets). To employ
-large TCP windows, the sysctl variable
-.B net.ipv4.tcp_window_scaling
-must be enabled (default).
-
-.I max
-- the maximum size of the send buffer used by
-each TCP socket. This value does not override the global
-.BR net.core.wmem_max .
-This is not used to limit the size of the send buffer
-declared using
-.B SO_SNDBUF
-on a socket.
-The default value is 128K bytes. It is lowered to 64K
-depending on the memory available in the system.
-.SH "SOCKET OPTIONS"
-To set or get a TCP socket option, call
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-to read or
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-to write the option with the option level argument set to
-.BR SOL_TCP.
-In addition,
-most
-.B SOL_IP
-socket options are valid on TCP sockets. For more
-information see
-.BR ip (7).
-.TP
-.B TCP_CORK
-If set, don't send out partial frames. All queued
-partial frames are sent when the option is cleared again.
-This is useful for prepending headers before calling
-.BR sendfile (2),
-or for throughput optimization. This option cannot be
-combined with
-.BR TCP_NODELAY.
-This option should not be used in code intended to be
-portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_DEFER_ACCEPT
-Allows a listener to be awakened only when data arrives on
-the socket. Takes an integer value (seconds), this can
-bound the maximum number of attempts TCP will make to
-complete the connection. This option should not be used in
-code intended to be portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_INFO
-Used to collect information about this socket. The kernel
-returns a struct tcp_info as defined in the file
-/usr/include/linux/tcp.h. This option should not be used in
-code intended to be portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_KEEPCNT
-The maximum number of keepalive probes TCP should send
-before dropping the connection. This option should not be
-used in code intended to be portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_KEEPIDLE
-The time (in seconds) the connection needs to remain idle
-before TCP starts sending keepalive probes, if the socket
-option SO_KEEPALIVE has been set on this socket. This
-option should not be used in code intended to be portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_KEEPINTVL
-The time (in seconds) between individual keepalive probes.
-This option should not be used in code intended to be
-portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_LINGER2
-The lifetime of orphaned FIN_WAIT2 state sockets. This
-option can be used to override the system wide sysctl
-.B tcp_fin_timeout
-on this socket. This is not to be confused with the
-.BR socket (7)
-level option
-.BR SO_LINGER .
-This option should not be used in code intended to be
-portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_MAXSEG
-The maximum segment size for outgoing TCP packets. If this
-option is set before connection establishment, it also
-changes the MSS value announced to the other end in the
-initial packet. Values greater than the (eventual)
-interface MTU have no effect. TCP will also impose
-its minimum and maximum bounds over the value provided.
-.TP
-.B TCP_NODELAY
-If set, disable the Nagle algorithm. This means that segments
-are always sent as soon as possible, even if there is only a
-small amount of data. When not set, data is buffered until there
-is a sufficient amount to send out, thereby avoiding the
-frequent sending of small packets, which results in poor
-utilization of the network. This option cannot be used
-at the same time as the option
-.BR TCP_CORK .
-.TP
-.B TCP_QUICKACK
-Enable quickack mode if set or disable quickack
-mode if cleared. In quickack mode, acks are sent
-immediately, rather than delayed if needed in accordance
-to normal TCP operation. This flag is not permanent,
-it only enables a switch to or from quickack mode.
-Subsequent operation of the TCP protocol will
-once again enter/leave quickack mode depending on
-internal protocol processing and factors such as
-delayed ack timeouts occurring and data transfer.
-This option should not be used in code intended to be
-portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_SYNCNT
-Set the number of SYN retransmits that TCP should send before
-aborting the attempt to connect. It cannot exceed 255.
-This option should not be used in code intended to be
-portable.
-.TP
-.B TCP_WINDOW_CLAMP
-Bound the size of the advertised window to this value. The
-kernel imposes a minimum size of SOCK_MIN_RCVBUF/2.
-This option should not be used in code intended to be
-portable.
-.SH IOCTLS
-These ioctls can be accessed using
-.BR ioctl (2).
-The correct syntax is:
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-.BI int " value";
-.IB error " = ioctl(" tcp_socket ", " ioctl_type ", &" value ");"
-.fi
-.RE
-.TP
-.BR SIOCINQ
-Returns the amount of queued unread data in the receive
-buffer. Argument is a pointer to an integer. The socket
-must not be in LISTEN state, otherwise an error (EINVAL)
-is returned.
-.TP
-.B SIOCATMARK
-Returns true when the all urgent data has been already
-received by the user program. This is used together with
-.BR SO_OOBINLINE .
-Argument is an pointer to an integer for the test result.
-.TP
-.B SIOCOUTQ
-Returns the amount of unsent data in the socket send queue
-in the passed integer value pointer. The socket must not
-be in LISTEN state, otherwise an error (EINVAL)
-is returned.
-.SH "ERROR HANDLING"
-When a network error occurs, TCP tries to resend the
-packet. If it doesn't succeed after some time, either
-.B ETIMEDOUT
-or the last received error on this connection is reported.
-.PP
-Some applications require a quicker error notification.
-This can be enabled with the
-.B SOL_IP
-level
-.B IP_RECVERR
-socket option. When this option is enabled, all incoming
-errors are immediately passed to the user program. Use this
-option with care \- it makes TCP less tolerant to routing
-changes and other normal network conditions.
-.SH NOTES
-When an error occurs doing a connection setup occurring in a
-socket write
-.B SIGPIPE
-is only raised when the
-.B SO_KEEPALIVE
-socket option is set.
-.PP
-TCP has no real out-of-band data; it has urgent data. In
-Linux this means if the other end sends newer out-of-band
-data the older urgent data is inserted as normal data into
-the stream (even when
-.B SO_OOBINLINE
-is not set). This differs from BSD based stacks.
-.PP
-Linux uses the BSD compatible interpretation of the urgent
-pointer field by default. This violates RFC1122, but is
-required for interoperability with other stacks. It can be
-changed by the
-.B tcp_stdurg
-sysctl.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B EPIPE
-The other end closed the socket unexpectedly or a read is
-executed on a shut down socket.
-.TP
-.B ETIMEDOUT
-The other end didn't acknowledge retransmitted data after
-some time.
-.TP
-.B EAFNOTSUPPORT
-Passed socket address type in
-.I sin_family
-was not
-.BR AF_INET .
-.PP
-Any errors defined for
-.BR ip (7)
-or the generic socket layer may also be returned for TCP.
-.SH BUGS
-Not all errors are documented.
-.br
-IPv6 is not described.
-.\" Only a single Linux kernel version is described
-.\" Info for 2.2 was lost. Should be added again,
-.\" or put into a separate page.
-.SH VERSIONS
-Support for Explicit Congestion Notification, zerocopy
-sendfile, reordering support and some SACK extensions
-(DSACK) were introduced in 2.4.
-Support for forward acknowledgement (FACK), TIME_WAIT recycling,
-per connection keepalive socket options and sysctls
-were introduced in 2.3.
-
-The default values and descriptions for the sysctl variables
-given above are applicable for the 2.4 kernel.
-.SH AUTHORS
-This man page was originally written by Andi Kleen.
-It was updated for 2.4 by Nivedita Singhvi with input from
-Alexey Kuznetsov's Documentation/networking/ip-sysctls.txt
-document.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR socket (7),
-.BR socket (2),
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR bind (2),
-.BR listen (2),
-.BR accept (2),
-.BR connect (2),
-.BR sendmsg (2),
-.BR recvmsg (2),
-.BR sendfile (2),
-.BR sysctl (2),
-.BR getsockopt (2).
-.sp
-RFC793 for the TCP specification.
-.br
-RFC1122 for the TCP requirements and a description
-of the Nagle algorithm.
-.br
-RFC1323 for TCP timestamp and window scaling options.
-.br
-RFC1644 for a description of TIME_WAIT assassination
-hazards.
-.br
-RFC2481 for a description of Explicit Congestion
-Notification.
-.br
-RFC2581 for TCP congestion control algorithms.
-.br
-RFC2018 and RFC2883 for SACK and extensions to SACK.
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/truncate.7 b/raw/man7/truncate.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 1836c06..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/truncate.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,40 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "TRUNCATE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-TRUNCATE \- empty a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-TRUNCATE [ TABLE ] \fIname\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBTRUNCATE\fR quickly removes all rows from a
-table. It has the same effect as an unqualified
-\fBDELETE\fR but since it does not actually scan the
-table it is faster. This is most useful on large tables.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table to be truncated.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-\fBTRUNCATE\fR cannot be used if there are foreign-key references
-to the table from other tables. Checking validity in such cases would
-require table scans, and the whole point is not to do one.
-.PP
-\fBTRUNCATE\fR will not run any user-defined ON DELETE triggers
-that might exist for the table.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Truncate the table bigtable:
-.sp
-.nf
-TRUNCATE TABLE bigtable;
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBTRUNCATE\fR command in the SQL standard.
diff --git a/raw/man7/udp.7 b/raw/man7/udp.7
deleted file mode 100644
index c187635..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/udp.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,161 +0,0 @@
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" $Id: udp.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.TH UDP 7 1998-10-02 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-udp \- User Datagram Protocol for IPv4
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.B #include <netinet/in.h>
-.br
-.B udp_socket = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0);
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-This is an implemention of the User Datagram Protocol described in RFC768. It
-implements a connectionless, unreliable datagram packet service.
-Packets may be reordered or duplicated before they arrive. UDP
-generates and checks checksums to catch transmission errors.
-
-When a UDP socket is created, its local and remote addresses are unspecified.
-Datagrams can be sent immediately using
-.BR sendto (2)
-or
-.BR sendmsg (2)
-with a valid destination address as an argument. When
-.BR connect (2)
-is called on the socket the default destination address is set and datagrams
-can now be sent using
-.BR send (2)
-or
-.BR write (2)
-without specifying an destination address.
-It is still possible to send to other destinations by passing an address to
-.BR sendto (2)
-or
-.BR sendmsg (2).
-In order to receive packets the socket can be bound to an local
-address first by using
-.BR bind (2).
-Otherwise the socket layer will automatically assign
-a free local port out of the range defined by
-.I net.ipv4.ip_local_port_range
-and bind the socket to
-.IR INADDR_ANY .
-
-All receive operations return only one packet. When the packet is smaller
-than the passed buffer only that much data is returned, when it is bigger
-the packet is truncated and the
-.B MSG_TRUNC
-flag is set.
-.I MSG_WAITALL
-is not supported.
-
-IP options may be sent or received using the socket options described in
-.BR ip (7).
-They are only processed by the kernel when the appropriate sysctl
-is enabled (but still passed to the user even when it is turned off). See
-.BR ip (7).
-
-When the
-.B MSG_DONTROUTE
-flag is set on sending the destination address must refer to an local
-interface address and the packet is only sent to that interface.
-
-UDP fragments a packet when its total length exceeds the interface MTU
-(Maximum Transmission Unit).
-A more network friendly alternative is to use path MTU discovery
-as described in the
-.B IP_PMTU_DISCOVER
-section of
-.BR ip (7).
-
-.SH "ADDRESS FORMAT"
-UDP uses the IPv4
-.B sockaddr_in
-address format described in
-.BR ip (7).
-
-.SH "ERROR HANDLING"
-All fatal errors will be passed to the user as an error return even
-when the socket is not connected. This includes asynchronous errors
-received from the network. You may get an error for an earlier packet
-that was sent on the same socket.
-This behaviour differs from many other BSD socket implementations
-which don't pass any errors unless the socket is connected.
-Linux's behaviour is mandated by
-.BR RFC1122 .
-
-For compatibility with legacy code it is possible to set the
-.B SO_BSDCOMPAT
-SOL_SOCKET option to receive remote errors only when the socket has been
-connected (except for
-.B EPROTO
-and
-.BR EMSGSIZE ).
-It is better to fix the
-code to handle errors properly than to enable this option.
-Locally generated errors are always passed.
-
-When the
-.B IP_RECVERR
-option is enabled all errors are stored in the socket error queue
-and can be received by
-.BR recvmsg (2)
-with the
-.B MSG_ERRQUEUE
-flag set.
-.SH IOCTLS
-These ioctls can be accessed using
-.BR ioctl (2).
-The correct syntax is:
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-.BI int " value";
-.IB error " = ioctl(" tcp_socket ", " ioctl_type ", &" value ");"
-.fi
-.RE
-.TP
-.B SIOCINQ
-Gets a pointer to an integer as argument. Returns the size of the next
-pending datagram in the integer in bytes, or 0 when no datagram is pending.
-.TP
-.B SIOCOUTQ
-Returns the number of data bytes in the local send queue. Only supported
-with Linux 2.4 and above.
-.PP
-In addition all ioctls documented in
-.BR ip (7)
-and
-.BR socket (7)
-are supported.
-.SH ERRORS
-All errors documented for
-.BR socket (7)
-or
-.BR ip (7)
-may be returned by a send or receive on a UDP socket.
-
-.B ECONNREFUSED
-No receiver was associated with the destination address. This might be
-caused by a previous packet sent over the socket.
-
-.SH VERSIONS
-IP_RECVERR is a new feature in Linux 2.2.
-
-.SH CREDITS
-This man page was written by Andi Kleen.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ip (7),
-.BR socket (7),
-.BR raw (7)
-
-RFC768 for the User Datagram Protocol.
-.br
-RFC1122 for the host requirements.
-.br
-RFC1191 for a description of path MTU discovery.
diff --git a/raw/man7/unicode.7 b/raw/man7/unicode.7
deleted file mode 100644
index a562eeb..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/unicode.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,288 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) Markus Kuhn, 1995, 2001
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" 1995-11-26 Markus Kuhn <mskuhn at cip.informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
-.\" First version written
-.\" 2001-05-11 Markus Kuhn <mgk25 at cl.cam.ac.uk>
-.\" Update
-.\"
-.TH UNICODE 7 2001-05-11 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-Unicode \- the Universal Character Set
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The international standard
-.B ISO 10646
-defines the
-.BR "Universal Character Set (UCS)" .
-UCS contains all characters of all other character set standards. It
-also guarantees
-.BR "round-trip compatibility" ,
-i.e., conversion tables can be built such that no information is lost
-when a string is converted from any other encoding to UCS and back.
-
-UCS contains the characters required to represent practically all
-known languages. This includes not only the Latin, Greek, Cyrillic,
-Hebrew, Arabic, Armenian, and Georgian scripts, but also also Chinese,
-Japanese and Korean Han ideographs as well as scripts such as
-Hiragana, Katakana, Hangul, Devanagari, Bengali, Gurmukhi, Gujarati,
-Oriya, Tamil, Telugu, Kannada, Malayalam, Thai, Lao, Khmer, Bopomofo,
-Tibetan, Runic, Ethiopic, Canadian Syllabics, Cherokee, Mongolian,
-Ogham, Myanmar, Sinhala, Thaana, Yi, and others. For scripts not yet
-covered, research on how to best encode them for computer usage is
-still going on and they will be added eventually. This might
-eventually include not only Hieroglyphs and various historic
-Indo-European languages, but even some selected artistic scripts such
-as Tengwar, Cirth, and Klingon. UCS also covers a large number of
-graphical, typographical, mathematical and scientific symbols,
-including those provided by TeX, Postscript, APL, MS-DOS, MS-Windows,
-Macintosh, OCR fonts, as well as many word processing and publishing
-systems, and more are being added.
-
-The UCS standard (ISO 10646) describes a
-.I "31-bit character set architecture"
-consisting of 128 24-bit
-.IR groups ,
-each divided into 256 16-bit
-.I planes
-made up of 256 8-bit
-.I rows
-with 256
-.I column
-positions, one for each character. Part 1 of the standard
-.RB ( "ISO 10646-1" )
-defines the first 65534 code positions (0x0000 to 0xfffd), which form
-the
-.IR "Basic Multilingual Plane (BMP)" ,
-that is plane 0 in group 0. Part 2 of the standard
-.RB ( "ISO 10646-2" )
-adds characters to group 0 outside the BMP in several
-.I "supplementary planes"
-in the range 0x10000 to 0x10ffff. There are no plans to add characters
-beyond 0x10ffff to the standard, therefore of the entire code space,
-only a small fraction of group 0 will ever be actually used in the
-foreseeable future. The BMP contains all characters found in the
-commonly used other character sets. The supplemental planes added by
-ISO 10646-2 cover only more exotic characters for special scientific,
-dictionary printing, publishing industry, higher-level protocol and
-enthusiast needs.
-.PP
-The representation of each UCS character as a 2-byte word is referred
-to as the
-.B UCS-2
-form (only for BMP characters), whereas
-.B UCS-4
-is the representation of each character by a 4-byte word.
-In addition, there exist two encoding forms
-.B UTF-8
-for backwards compatibility with ASCII processing software and
-.B UTF-16
-for the backwards compatible handling of non-BMP characters up to
-0x10ffff by UCS-2 software.
-.PP
-The UCS characters 0x0000 to 0x007f are identical to those of the
-classic
-.B US-ASCII
-character set and the characters in the range 0x0000 to 0x00ff
-are identical to those in
-.BR "ISO 8859-1 Latin-1" .
-.SH "COMBINING CHARACTERS"
-Some code points in
-.B UCS
-have been assigned to
-.IR "combining characters" .
-These are similar to the non-spacing accent keys on a typewriter. A
-combining character just adds an accent to the previous character. The
-most important accented characters have codes of their own in UCS,
-however, the combining character mechanism allows us to add accents
-and other diacritical marks to any character. The combining characters
-always follow the character which they modify. For example, the German
-character Umlaut-A ("Latin capital letter A with diaeresis") can
-either be represented by the precomposed UCS code 0x00c4, or
-alternatively as the combination of a normal "Latin capital letter A"
-followed by a "combining diaeresis": 0x0041 0x0308.
-.PP
-Combining characters are essential for instance for encoding the Thai
-script or for mathematical typesetting and users of the International
-Phonetic Alphabet.
-.SH "IMPLEMENTATION LEVELS"
-As not all systems are expected to support advanced mechanisms like
-combining characters, ISO 10646-1 specifies the following three
-.I implementation levels
-of UCS:
-.TP 0.9i
-Level 1
-Combining characters and
-.B Hangul Jamo
-(a variant encoding of the Korean script, where a Hangul syllable
-glyph is coded as a triplet or pair of vovel/consonant codes) are not
-supported.
-.TP
-Level 2
-In addition to level 1, combining characters are now allowed for some
-languages where they are essential (e.g., Thai, Lao, Hebrew,
-Arabic, Devanagari, Malayalam, etc.).
-.TP
-Level 3
-All
-.B UCS
-characters are supported.
-.PP
-The
-.B Unicode 3.0 Standard
-published by the
-.B Unicode Consortium
-contains exactly the
-.B UCS Basic Multilingual Plane
-at implementation level 3, as described in ISO 10646-1:2000.
-.B Unicode 3.1
-added the supplemental planes of ISO 10646-2. The Unicode standard and
-technical reports published by the Unicode Consortium provide much
-additional information on the semantics and recommended usages of
-various characters. They provide guidelines and algorithms for
-editing, sorting, comparing, normalizing, converting and displaying
-Unicode strings.
-.SH "UNICODE UNDER LINUX"
-Under GNU/Linux, the C type
-.B wchar_t
-is a signed 32-bit integer type. Its values are always interpreted
-by the C library as
-.B UCS
-code values (in all locales), a convention that is signaled by the GNU
-C library to applications by defining the constant
-.B __STDC_ISO_10646__
-as specified in the ISO C 99 standard.
-
-UCS/Unicode can be used just like ASCII in input/output streams,
-terminal communication, plaintext files, filenames, and environment
-variables in the ASCII compatible
-.B UTF-8
-multi-byte encoding. To signal the use of UTF-8 as the character
-encoding to all applications, a suitable
-.B locale
-has to be selected via environment variables (e.g.,
-"LANG=en_GB.UTF-8").
-.PP
-The
-.B nl_langinfo(CODESET)
-function returns the name of the selected encoding. Library functions
-such as
-.BR wctomb (3)
-and
-.BR mbsrtowcs (3)
-can be used to transform the internal
-.B wchar_t
-characters and strings into the system character encoding and back
-and
-.BR wcwidth (3)
-tells, how many positions (0\(en2) the cursor is advanced by the
-output of a character.
-.PP
-Under Linux, in general only the BMP at implementation level 1 should
-be used at the moment. Up to two combining characters per base
-character for certain scripts (in particular Thai) are also supported
-by some UTF-8 terminal emulators and ISO 10646 fonts (level 2), but in
-general precomposed characters should be preferred where available
-(Unicode calls this
-.BR "Normalization Form C" ).
-.SH "PRIVATE AREA"
-In the
-.BR BMP ,
-the range 0xe000 to 0xf8ff will never be assigned to any characters by
-the standard and is reserved for private usage. For the Linux
-community, this private area has been subdivided further into the
-range 0xe000 to 0xefff which can be used individually by any end-user
-and the Linux zone in the range 0xf000 to 0xf8ff where extensions are
-coordinated among all Linux users. The registry of the characters
-assigned to the Linux zone is currently maintained by H. Peter Anvin
-<Peter.Anvin at linux.org>.
-.SH LITERATURE
-.TP 0.2i
-*
-Information technology \(em Universal Multiple-Octet Coded Character
-Set (UCS) \(em Part 1: Architecture and Basic Multilingual Plane.
-International Standard ISO/IEC 10646-1, International Organization
-for Standardization, Geneva, 2000.
-
-This is the official specification of
-.BR UCS .
-Available as a PDF file on CD-ROM from http://www.iso.ch/.
-.TP
-*
-The Unicode Standard, Version 3.0.
-The Unicode Consortium, Addison-Wesley,
-Reading, MA, 2000, ISBN 0-201-61633-5.
-.TP
-*
-S. Harbison, G. Steele. C: A Reference Manual. Fourth edition,
-Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1995, ISBN 0-13-326224-3.
-
-A good reference book about the C programming language. The fourth
-edition covers the 1994 Amendment 1 to the ISO C 90 standard, which
-adds a large number of new C library functions for handling wide and
-multi-byte character encodings, but it does not yet cover ISO C 99,
-which improved wide and multi-byte character support even further.
-.TP
-*
-Unicode Technical Reports.
-.RS
-http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/
-.RE
-.TP
-*
-Markus Kuhn: UTF-8 and Unicode FAQ for Unix/Linux.
-.RS
-http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~mgk25/unicode.html
-
-Provides subscription information for the
-.B linux-utf8
-mailing list, which is the best place to look for advice on using
-Unicode under Linux.
-.RE
-.TP
-*
-Bruno Haible: Unicode HOWTO.
-.RS
-ftp://ftp.ilog.fr/pub/Users/haible/utf8/Unicode-HOWTO.html
-.RE
-.SH BUGS
-When this man page was last revised, the GNU C Library support for
-.B UTF-8
-locales was mature and XFree86 support was in an advanced state, but
-work on making applications (most notably editors) suitable for use in
-.B UTF-8
-locales was still fully in progress. Current general
-.B UCS
-support under Linux usually provides for CJK double-width characters
-and sometimes even simple overstriking combining characters, but
-usually does not include support for scripts with right-to-left
-writing direction or ligature substitution requirements such as
-Hebrew, Arabic, or the Indic scripts. These scripts are currently only
-supported in certain GUI applications (HTML viewers, word processors)
-with sophisticated text rendering engines.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Markus Kuhn <mgk25 at cl.cam.ac.uk>
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR utf-8 (7),
-.BR charsets (7),
-.BR setlocale (3)
diff --git a/raw/man7/unix.7 b/raw/man7/unix.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a9f2af..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/unix.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,254 +0,0 @@
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1999 Andi Kleen <ak at muc.de>.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\"
-.\" Modified, 2 Dec 2002, Michael Kerrisk, mtk16 at ext.canterbury.ac.nz
-.\"
-.TH UNIX 7 2002-12-02 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-unix, PF_UNIX, AF_UNIX, PF_LOCAL, AF_LOCAL \- Sockets for local interprocess communication.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.B #include <sys/un.h>
-
-.IB unix_socket " = socket(PF_UNIX, type, 0);"
-.br
-.IB error " = socketpair(PF_UNIX, type, 0, int *" sv ");"
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B PF_UNIX
-(also known as
-.BR PF_LOCAL )
-socket family is used to communicate between processes on the same machine
-efficiently. Unix sockets can be either anonymous (created by
-.BR socketpair (2))
-or associated with a file of type socket.
-Linux also supports an abstract namespace which is independent of the
-file system.
-
-Valid types are
-.B SOCK_STREAM
-for a stream oriented socket and
-.B SOCK_DGRAM
-for a datagram oriented socket that preserves message boundaries. Unix
-sockets are always reliable and don't reorder datagrams.
-
-Unix sockets support passing file descriptors or process credentials to other
-processes using ancillary data.
-
-.SH "ADDRESS FORMAT"
-A unix address is defined as a filename in the filesystem or
-as a unique string in the abstract namespace. Sockets created by
-.BR socketpair (2)
-are anonymous. For non-anonymous sockets the target address can be set
-using
-.BR connect (2).
-The local address can be set using
-.BR bind (2).
-When a socket is connected and it doesn't already have a local address a
-unique address in the abstract namespace will be generated automatically.
-
-.RS
-.nf
-#define UNIX_PATH_MAX 108
-
-.ta 4n 17n 42n
-struct sockaddr_un {
- sa_family_t sun_family; /* AF_UNIX */
- char sun_path[UNIX_PATH_MAX]; /* pathname */
-};
-.fi
-.RE
-
-.B sun_family
-always contains
-.BR AF_UNIX .
-.B sun_path
-contains the zero-terminated pathname of the socket in the file system.
-If
-.B sun_path
-starts with a zero byte it refers to the abstract namespace maintained by
-the Unix protocol module.
-The socket's address in this namespace is given by the rest of the bytes in
-.BR sun_path .
-Note that names in the abstract namespace are not zero-terminated.
-
-.SH "SOCKET OPTIONS"
-For historical reasons these socket options are specified with a
-SOL_SOCKET type even though they are PF_UNIX specific.
-They can be set with
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-and read with
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-by specifying SOL_SOCKET as the socket family.
-.TP
-.B SO_PASSCRED
-Enables the receiving of the credentials of the sending process
-ancillary message. When this option is set and the socket is not yet connected
-a unique name in the abstract namespace will be generated automatically.
-Expects an integer boolean flag.
-
-.SH "ANCILLARY MESSAGES"
-Ancillary data is sent and received using
-.BR sendmsg (2)
-and
-.BR recvmsg (2).
-For historical reasons the ancillary message types listed below
-are specified with a SOL_SOCKET type even though they are PF_UNIX specific.
-To send them set the
-.B cmsg_level
-field of the struct
-.B cmsghdr
-to SOL_SOCKET and the
-.B cmsg_type
-field to the type. For more information see
-.BR cmsg (3).
-
-.TP
-.B SCM_RIGHTS
-Send or receive a set of open file descriptors from another process.
-The data portion contains an integer array of the file descriptors.
-The passed file descriptors behave as though they have been created with
-.BR dup (2).
-
-.TP
-.B SCM_CREDENTIALS
-Send or receive unix credentials. This can be used for authentication.
-The credentials are passed as a
-.B struct ucred
-ancillary message.
-
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 11n 17n
-struct ucred {
- pid_t pid; /* process id of the sending process */
- uid_t uid; /* user id of the sending process */
- gid_t gid; /* group id of the sending process */
-};
-.fi
-.RE
-
-The credentials which the sender specifies are checked by the kernel.
-A process with effective user ID 0 is allowed to specify values that do
-not match his own.
-The sender must specify its own process ID (unless it has the capability
-.BR CAP_SYS_ADMIN ),
-its user ID, effective user ID or set user ID (unless it has
-.BR CAP_SETUID ),
-and its group id, effective group ID or set group ID (unless it has
-.BR CAP_SETGID ).
-To receive a
-.B struct ucred
-message the
-.B SO_PASSCRED
-option must be enabled on the socket.
-
-.SH VERSIONS
-.B SCM_CREDENTIALS
-and the abstract namespace were introduced with Linux 2.2 and should not
-be used in portable programs.
-(Some BSD-derived systems also support credential passing,
-but the implementation details differ.)
-
-.SH NOTES
-In the Linux implementation, sockets which are visible in the
-filesystem honour the permissions of the directory they are in. Their
-owner, group and their permissions can be changed.
-Creation of a new socket will fail if the process does not have write and
-search (execute) permission on the directory the socket is created in.
-Connecting to the socket object requires read/write permission.
-This behavior differs from many BSD-derived systems which
-ignore permissions for Unix sockets. Portable programs should not rely on
-this feature for security.
-
-Binding to a socket with a filename creates a socket
-in the file system that must be deleted by the caller when it is no
-longer needed (using
-.BR unlink (2)).
-The usual Unix close-behind semantics apply; the socket can be unlinked
-at any time and will be finally removed from the file system when the last
-reference to it is closed.
-
-To pass file descriptors or credentials you need to send/read at least
-one byte of data.
-
-Unix domain stream sockets do not support the notion of out-of-band data.
-.SH ERRORS
-.TP
-.B ENOMEM
-Out of memory.
-.TP
-.B ECONNREFUSED
-.BR connect (2)
-called with a socket object that isn't listening. This can happen when
-the remote socket does not exist or the filename is not a socket.
-.TP
-.B EINVAL
-Invalid argument passed. A common cause is the missing setting of AF_UNIX
-in the sun_type field of passed addresses or the socket being in an invalid
-state for the applied operation.
-.TP
-.B EOPNOTSUPP
-Stream operation called on non-stream oriented socket or tried to
-use the out-of-band data option.
-.TP
-.B EPROTONOSUPPORT
-Passed protocol is not PF_UNIX.
-.TP
-.B ESOCKTNOSUPPORT
-Unknown socket type.
-.TP
-.B EPROTOTYPE
-Remote socket does not match the local socket type (SOCK_DGRAM vs.
-SOCK_STREAM)
-.TP
-.B EADDRINUSE
-Selected local address is already taken or filesystem socket object already
-exists.
-.TP
-.B EISCONN
-.BR connect (2)
-called on an already connected socket or a target address was
-specified on a connected socket.
-.TP
-.B ENOTCONN
-Socket operation needs a target address, but the socket is not connected.
-.TP
-.B ECONNRESET
-Remote socket was unexpectedly closed.
-.TP
-.B EPIPE
-Remote socket was closed on a stream socket. If enabled, a
-.B SIGPIPE
-is sent as well. This can be avoided by passing the
-.B MSG_NOSIGNAL
-flag to
-.BR sendmsg (2)
-or
-.BR recvmsg (2).
-.TP
-.B EFAULT
-User memory address was not valid.
-.TP
-.B EPERM
-The sender passed invalid credentials in the
-.BR "struct ucred" .
-.PP
-Other errors can be generated by the generic socket layer or
-by the filesystem while generating a filesystem socket object. See
-the appropriate manual pages for more information.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR recvmsg (2),
-.BR sendmsg (2),
-.BR socket (2),
-.BR socketpair (2),
-.BR cmsg (3),
-.BR capabilities (7),
-.BR socket (7)
-.\" .SH CREDITS
-.\" This man page was written by Andi Kleen.
diff --git a/raw/man7/unlisten.7 b/raw/man7/unlisten.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e06135..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/unlisten.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "UNLISTEN" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-UNLISTEN \- stop listening for a notification
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-UNLISTEN { \fIname\fR | * }
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBUNLISTEN\fR is used to remove an existing
-registration for \fBNOTIFY\fR events.
-\fBUNLISTEN\fR cancels any existing registration of
-the current PostgreSQL session as a
-listener on the notification \fIname\fR. The special wildcard
-* cancels all listener registrations for the
-current session.
-.PP
-NOTIFY [\fBnotify\fR(7)]
-contains a more extensive
-discussion of the use of \fBLISTEN\fR and
-\fBNOTIFY\fR.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fIname\fB\fR
-Name of a notification (any identifier).
-.TP
-\fB*\fR
-All current listen registrations for this session are cleared.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-You may unlisten something you were not listening for; no warning or error
-will appear.
-.PP
-At the end of each session, \fBUNLISTEN *\fR is
-automatically executed.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-To make a registration:
-.sp
-.nf
-LISTEN virtual;
-NOTIFY virtual;
-Asynchronous notification "virtual" received from server process with PID 8448.
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Once \fBUNLISTEN\fR has been executed, further \fBNOTIFY\fR
-commands will be ignored:
-.sp
-.nf
-UNLISTEN virtual;
-NOTIFY virtual;
--- no NOTIFY event is received
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBUNLISTEN\fR command in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-LISTEN [\fBlisten\fR(7)], NOTIFY [\fBnotify\fR(l)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/update.7 b/raw/man7/update.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 75b9f20..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/update.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,90 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "UPDATE" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-UPDATE \- update rows of a table
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-UPDATE [ ONLY ] \fItable\fR SET \fIcolumn\fR = { \fIexpression\fR | DEFAULT } [, ...]
- [ FROM \fIfromlist\fR ]
- [ WHERE \fIcondition\fR ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBUPDATE\fR changes the values of the specified
-columns in all rows that satisfy the condition. Only the columns to
-be modified need be mentioned in the statement; columns not explicitly
-SET retain their previous values.
-.PP
-By default, \fBUPDATE\fR will update rows in the
-specified table and all its subtables. If you wish to only update
-the specific table mentioned, you must use the ONLY
-clause.
-.PP
-You must have the UPDATE privilege on the table
-to update it, as well as the SELECT
-privilege to any table whose values are read in the
-\fIexpression\fRs or
-\fIcondition\fR.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of the table to update.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-The name of a column in \fItable\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\fIexpression\fB\fR
-An expression to assign to the column. The expression may use the
-old values of this and other columns in the table.
-.TP
-\fBDEFAULT\fR
-Set the column to its default value (which will be NULL if no
-specific default expression has been assigned to it).
-.TP
-\fB\fIfromlist\fB\fR
-A list of table expressions, allowing columns from other tables
-to appear in the WHERE condition and the update expressions.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcondition\fB\fR
-An expression that returns a value of type \fBboolean\fR.
-Only rows for which this expression returns true
-will be updated.
-.SH "OUTPUTS"
-.PP
-On successful completion, an \fBUPDATE\fR command returns a command
-tag of the form
-.sp
-.nf
-UPDATE \fIcount\fR
-.sp
-.fi
-The \fIcount\fR is the number
-of rows updated. If \fIcount\fR is
-0, no rows matched the \fIcondition\fR (this is not considered
-an error).
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-Change the word Drama to Dramatic in the
-column \fBkind\fR of the table films:
-.sp
-.nf
-UPDATE films SET kind = 'Dramatic' WHERE kind = 'Drama';
-.sp
-.fi
-.PP
-Adjust temperature entries and reset precipitation to its default
-value in one row of the table weather:
-.sp
-.nf
-UPDATE weather SET temp_lo = temp_lo+1, temp_hi = temp_lo+15, prcp = DEFAULT
- WHERE city = 'San Francisco' AND date = '2003-07-03';
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-This command conforms to the SQL standard. The
-FROM clause is a
-PostgreSQL extension.
diff --git a/raw/man7/utf-8.7 b/raw/man7/utf-8.7
deleted file mode 100644
index e364c2e..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/utf-8.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,285 +0,0 @@
-.\" Hey Emacs! This file is -*- nroff -*- source.
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) Markus Kuhn, 1996, 2001
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.\" 1995-11-26 Markus Kuhn <mskuhn at cip.informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
-.\" First version written
-.\" 2001-05-11 Markus Kuhn <mgk25 at cl.cam.ac.uk>
-.\" Update
-.\"
-.TH UTF-8 7 2001-05-11 "GNU" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-UTF-8 \- an ASCII compatible multi-byte Unicode encoding
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B Unicode 3.0
-character set occupies a 16-bit code space. The most obvious
-Unicode encoding (known as
-.BR UCS-2 )
-consists of a sequence of 16-bit words. Such strings can contain as
-parts of many 16-bit characters bytes like '\\0' or '/' which have a
-special meaning in filenames and other C library function parameters.
-In addition, the majority of UNIX tools expects ASCII files and can't
-read 16-bit words as characters without major modifications. For these
-reasons,
-.B UCS-2
-is not a suitable external encoding of
-.B Unicode
-in filenames, text files, environment variables, etc. The
-.BR "ISO 10646 Universal Character Set (UCS)" ,
-a superset of Unicode, occupies even a 31-bit code space and the obvious
-.B UCS-4
-encoding for it (a sequence of 32-bit words) has the same problems.
-
-The
-.B UTF-8
-encoding of
-.B Unicode
-and
-.B UCS
-does not have these problems and is the common way in which
-.B Unicode
-is used on Unix-style operating systems.
-.SH PROPERTIES
-The
-.B UTF-8
-encoding has the following nice properties:
-.TP 0.2i
-*
-.B UCS
-characters 0x00000000 to 0x0000007f (the classic
-.B US-ASCII
-characters) are encoded simply as bytes 0x00 to 0x7f (ASCII
-compatibility). This means that files and strings which contain only
-7-bit ASCII characters have the same encoding under both
-.B ASCII
-and
-.BR UTF-8 .
-.TP
-*
-All
-.B UCS
-characters > 0x7f are encoded as a multi-byte sequence
-consisting only of bytes in the range 0x80 to 0xfd, so no ASCII
-byte can appear as part of another character and there are no
-problems with e.g. '\\0' or '/'.
-.TP
-*
-The lexicographic sorting order of
-.B UCS-4
-strings is preserved.
-.TP
-*
-All possible 2^31 UCS codes can be encoded using
-.BR UTF-8 .
-.TP
-*
-The bytes 0xfe and 0xff are never used in the
-.B UTF-8
-encoding.
-.TP
-*
-The first byte of a multi-byte sequence which represents a single non-ASCII
-.B UCS
-character is always in the range 0xc0 to 0xfd and indicates how long
-this multi-byte sequence is. All further bytes in a multi-byte sequence
-are in the range 0x80 to 0xbf. This allows easy resynchronization and
-makes the encoding stateless and robust against missing bytes.
-.TP
-*
-.B UTF-8
-encoded
-.B UCS
-characters may be up to six bytes long, however the
-.B Unicode
-standard specifies no characters above 0x10ffff, so Unicode characters
-can only be up to four bytes long in
-.BR UTF-8 .
-.SH ENCODING
-The following byte sequences are used to represent a character. The
-sequence to be used depends on the UCS code number of the character:
-.TP 0.4i
-0x00000000 - 0x0000007F:
-.RI 0 xxxxxxx
-.TP
-0x00000080 - 0x000007FF:
-.RI 110 xxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.TP
-0x00000800 - 0x0000FFFF:
-.RI 1110 xxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.TP
-0x00010000 - 0x001FFFFF:
-.RI 11110 xxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.TP
-0x00200000 - 0x03FFFFFF:
-.RI 111110 xx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.TP
-0x04000000 - 0x7FFFFFFF:
-.RI 1111110 x
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.RI 10 xxxxxx
-.PP
-The
-.I xxx
-bit positions are filled with the bits of the character code number in
-binary representation. Only the shortest possible multi-byte sequence
-which can represent the code number of the character can be used.
-.PP
-The
-.B UCS
-code values 0xd800\(en0xdfff (UTF-16 surrogates) as well as 0xfffe and
-0xffff (UCS non-characters) should not appear in conforming
-.B UTF-8
-streams.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-The
-.B Unicode
-character 0xa9 = 1010 1001 (the copyright sign) is encoded
-in UTF-8 as
-.PP
-.RS
-11000010 10101001 = 0xc2 0xa9
-.RE
-.PP
-and character 0x2260 = 0010 0010 0110 0000 (the "not equal" symbol) is
-encoded as:
-.PP
-.RS
-11100010 10001001 10100000 = 0xe2 0x89 0xa0
-.RE
-.SH "APPLICATION NOTES"
-Users have to select a
-.B UTF-8
-locale, for example with
-.PP
-.RS
-export LANG=en_GB.UTF-8
-.RE
-.PP
-in order to activate the
-.B UTF-8
-support in applications.
-.PP
-Application software that has to be aware of the used character
-encoding should always set the locale with for example
-.PP
-.RS
-setlocale(LC_CTYPE, "")
-.RE
-.PP
-and programmers can then test the expression
-.PP
-.RS
-strcmp(nl_langinfo(CODESET), "UTF-8") == 0
-.RE
-.PP
-to determine whether a
-.B UTF-8
-locale has been selected and whether
-therefore all plaintext standard input and output, terminal
-communication, plaintext file content, filenames and environment
-variables are encoded in
-.BR UTF-8 .
-.PP
-Programmers accustomed to single-byte encodings such as
-.B US-ASCII
-or
-.B ISO 8859
-have to be aware that two assumptions made so far are no longer valid
-in
-.B UTF-8
-locales. Firstly, a single byte does not necessarily correspond any
-more to a single character. Secondly, since modern terminal emulators
-in
-.B UTF-8
-mode also support Chinese, Japanese, and Korean
-.B double-width characters
-as well as non-spacing
-.BR "combining characters" ,
-outputting a single character does not necessarily advance the cursor
-by one position as it did in
-.BR ASCII .
-Library functions such as
-.BR mbsrtowcs (3)
-and
-.BR wcswidth (3)
-should be used today to count characters and cursor positions.
-.PP
-The official ESC sequence to switch from an
-.B ISO 2022
-encoding scheme (as used for instance by VT100 terminals) to
-.B UTF-8
-is ESC % G
-("\\x1b%G"). The corresponding return sequence from
-.B UTF-8
-to ISO 2022 is ESC % @ ("\\x1b%@"). Other ISO 2022 sequences (such as
-for switching the G0 and G1 sets) are not applicable in UTF-8 mode.
-.PP
-It can be hoped that in the foreseeable future,
-.B UTF-8
-will replace
-.B ASCII
-and
-.B ISO 8859
-at all levels as the common character encoding on POSIX systems,
-leading to a significantly richer environment for handling plain text.
-.SH SECURITY
-The
-.BR Unicode " and " UCS
-standards require that producers of
-.B UTF-8
-shall use the shortest form possible, e.g., producing a two-byte
-sequence with first byte 0xc0 is non-conforming.
-.B Unicode 3.1
-has added the requirement that conforming programs must not accept
-non-shortest forms in their input. This is for security reasons: if
-user input is checked for possible security violations, a program
-might check only for the
-.B ASCII
-version of "/../" or ";" or NUL and overlook that there are many
-.RB non- ASCII
-ways to represent these things in a non-shortest
-.B UTF-8
-encoding.
-.SH STANDARDS
-ISO/IEC 10646-1:2000, Unicode 3.1, RFC 2279, Plan 9.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Markus Kuhn <mgk25 at cl.cam.ac.uk>
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR nl_langinfo (3),
-.BR setlocale (3),
-.BR charsets (7),
-.BR unicode (7)
diff --git a/raw/man7/vacuum.7 b/raw/man7/vacuum.7
deleted file mode 100644
index 1f7851f..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/vacuum.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,139 +0,0 @@
-.\\" auto-generated by docbook2man-spec $Revision: 1.1 $
-.TH "VACUUM" "7" "2003-11-02" "SQL - Language Statements" "SQL Commands"
-.SH NAME
-VACUUM \- garbage-collect and optionally analyze a database
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-.nf
-VACUUM [ FULL ] [ FREEZE ] [ VERBOSE ] [ \fItable\fR ]
-VACUUM [ FULL ] [ FREEZE ] [ VERBOSE ] ANALYZE [ \fItable\fR [ (\fIcolumn\fR [, ...] ) ] ]
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBVACUUM\fR reclaims storage occupied by deleted tuples.
-In normal PostgreSQL operation, tuples that
-are deleted or obsoleted by an update are not physically removed from
-their table; they remain present until a \fBVACUUM\fR is
-done. Therefore it's necessary to do \fBVACUUM\fR
-periodically, especially on frequently-updated tables.
-.PP
-With no parameter, \fBVACUUM\fR processes every table in the
-current database. With a parameter, \fBVACUUM\fR processes
-only that table.
-.PP
-\fBVACUUM ANALYZE\fR performs a \fBVACUUM\fR
-and then an \fBANALYZE\fR for each selected table. This
-is a handy combination form for routine maintenance scripts. See
-ANALYZE [\fBanalyze\fR(7)]
-for more details about its processing.
-.PP
-Plain \fBVACUUM\fR (without FULL) simply reclaims
-space and makes it
-available for re-use. This form of the command can operate in parallel
-with normal reading and writing of the table, as an exclusive lock
-is not obtained. \fBVACUUM
-FULL\fR does more extensive processing, including moving of tuples
-across blocks to try to compact the table to the minimum number of disk
-blocks. This form is much slower and requires an exclusive lock on each
-table while it is being processed.
-.PP
-\fBFREEZE\fR is a special-purpose option that
-causes tuples to be marked ``frozen'' as soon as possible,
-rather than waiting until they are quite old. If this is done when there
-are no other open transactions in the same database, then it is guaranteed
-that all tuples in the database are ``frozen'' and will not be
-subject to transaction ID wraparound problems, no matter how long the
-database is left unvacuumed.
-\fBFREEZE\fR is not recommended for routine use. Its only
-intended usage is in connection with preparation of user-defined template
-databases, or other databases that are completely read-only and will not
-receive routine maintenance \fBVACUUM\fR operations.
-See the chapter called ``Routine Database Maintenance'' in the documentation for details.
-.SH "PARAMETERS"
-.TP
-\fBFULL\fR
-Selects ``full'' vacuum, which may reclaim more
-space, but takes much longer and exclusively locks the table.
-.TP
-\fBFREEZE\fR
-Selects aggressive ``freezing'' of tuples.
-.TP
-\fBVERBOSE\fR
-Prints a detailed vacuum activity report for each table.
-.TP
-\fBANALYZE\fR
-Updates statistics used by the planner to determine the most
-efficient way to execute a query.
-.TP
-\fB\fItable\fB\fR
-The name (optionally schema-qualified) of a specific table to
-vacuum. Defaults to all tables in the current database.
-.TP
-\fB\fIcolumn\fB\fR
-The name of a specific column to analyze. Defaults to all columns.
-.SH "OUTPUTS"
-.PP
-When VERBOSE is specified, \fBVACUUM\fR emits
-progress messages to indicate which table is currently being
-processed. Various statistics about the tables are printed as well.
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-We recommend that active production databases be
-vacuumed frequently (at least nightly), in order to
-remove expired rows. After adding or deleting a large number
-of rows, it may be a good idea to issue a \fBVACUUM
-ANALYZE\fR command for the affected table. This will update the
-system catalogs with
-the results of all recent changes, and allow the
-PostgreSQL query planner to make better
-choices in planning queries.
-.PP
-The \fBFULL\fR option is not recommended for routine use,
-but may be useful in special cases. An example is when you have deleted
-most of the rows in a table and would like the table to physically shrink
-to occupy less disk space. \fBVACUUM FULL\fR will usually
-shrink the table more than a plain \fBVACUUM\fR would.
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-.PP
-The following is an example from running \fBVACUUM\fR on a
-table in the regression database:
-.sp
-.nf
-regression=# VACUUM VERBOSE ANALYZE onek;
-INFO: vacuuming "public.onek"
-INFO: index "onek_unique1" now contains 1000 tuples in 14 pages
-DETAIL: 3000 index tuples were removed.
-0 index pages have been deleted, 0 are currently reusable.
-CPU 0.01s/0.08u sec elapsed 0.18 sec.
-INFO: index "onek_unique2" now contains 1000 tuples in 16 pages
-DETAIL: 3000 index tuples were removed.
-0 index pages have been deleted, 0 are currently reusable.
-CPU 0.00s/0.07u sec elapsed 0.23 sec.
-INFO: index "onek_hundred" now contains 1000 tuples in 13 pages
-DETAIL: 3000 index tuples were removed.
-0 index pages have been deleted, 0 are currently reusable.
-CPU 0.01s/0.08u sec elapsed 0.17 sec.
-INFO: index "onek_stringu1" now contains 1000 tuples in 48 pages
-DETAIL: 3000 index tuples were removed.
-0 index pages have been deleted, 0 are currently reusable.
-CPU 0.01s/0.09u sec elapsed 0.59 sec.
-INFO: "onek": removed 3000 tuples in 108 pages
-DETAIL: CPU 0.01s/0.06u sec elapsed 0.07 sec.
-INFO: "onek": found 3000 removable, 1000 nonremovable tuples in 143 pages
-DETAIL: 0 dead tuples cannot be removed yet.
-There were 0 unused item pointers.
-0 pages are entirely empty.
-CPU 0.07s/0.39u sec elapsed 1.56 sec.
-INFO: analyzing "public.onek"
-INFO: "onek": 36 pages, 1000 rows sampled, 1000 estimated total rows
-VACUUM
-.sp
-.fi
-.SH "COMPATIBILITY"
-.PP
-There is no \fBVACUUM\fR statement in the SQL standard.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-vacuumdb [\fBvacuumdb\fR(1)]
-
diff --git a/raw/man7/x25.7 b/raw/man7/x25.7
deleted file mode 100644
index b4f9feb..0000000
--- a/raw/man7/x25.7
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-.\" This man page is Copyright (C) 1998 Heiner Eisen.
-.\" Permission is granted to distribute possibly modified copies
-.\" of this page provided the header is included verbatim,
-.\" and in case of nontrivial modification author and date
-.\" of the modification is added to the header.
-.\" $Id: x25.7,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.TH X25 4 1998-12-01 "Linux Man Page" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-x25, PF_X25 \- ITU-T X.25 / ISO-8208 protocol interface.
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B #include <sys/socket.h>
-.br
-.B #include <linux/x25.h>
-.sp
-.B x25_socket = socket(PF_X25, SOCK_SEQPACKET, 0);
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-X25 sockets provide an interface to the X.25 packet layer protocol.
-This allows applications to
-communicate over a public X.25 data network as standardised by
-International Telecommunication Union's recommendation X.25
-(X.25 DTE-DCE mode). X25 sockets can also be used for communication
-without an intermediate X.25 network (X.25 DTE-DTE mode) as described
-in ISO-8208.
-.PP
-Message boundaries are preserved \- a
-.BR read (2)
-from a socket will
-retrieve the same chunk of data as output with the corresponding
-.BR write (2)
-to the peer socket. When necessary, the kernel takes care
-of segmenting and re-assembling long messages by means of
-the X.25 M-bit. There is no hard-coded upper limit for the
-message size. However, re-assembling of a long message might fail if
-there is a temporary lack of system resources or when other constraints
-(such as socket memory or buffer size limits) become effective. If that
-occurs, the X.25 connection will be reset.
-.SH "SOCKET ADDRESSES"
-The
-.B AF_X25
-socket address family uses the
-.B struct sockaddr_x25
-for representing network addresses as defined in ITU-T
-recommendation X.121.
-.PP
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta 4n 18n 32n
-struct sockaddr_x25 {
- sa_family_t sx25_family; /* must be AF_X25 */
- x25_address sx25_addr; /* X.121 Address */
-};
-.ta
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-.I sx25_addr
-contains a char array
-.I x25_addr[]
-to be interpreted as a null-terminated string.
-.I sx25_addr.x25_addr[]
-consists of up to 15 (not counting the terminating 0) ASCII
-characters forming the X.121 address.
-Only the decimal digit characters from `0' to `9' are allowed.
-.SH "SOCKET OPTIONS"
-The following X.25 specific socket options can be set by using
-.BR setsockopt (2)
-and read with
-.BR getsockopt (2)
-with the level parameter set to
-.BR SOL_X25 .
-.TP
-.B X25_QBITINCL
-Controls whether the X.25 Q-bit (Qualified Data Bit) is accessible by the
-user. It expects an integer argument. If set to 0 (default),
-the Q-bit is never set for outgoing packets and the Q-bit of incoming
-packets is ignored. If set to 1, an additional first byte is prepended
-to each message read from or written to the socket. For data read from
-the socket, a 0 first byte indicates that the Q-bits of the corresponding
-incoming data packets were not set. A first byte with value 1 indicates
-that the Q-bit of the corresponding incoming data packets was set.
-If the first byte of the data written to the socket is 1 the Q-bit of the
-corresponding outgoing data packets will be set. If the first byte is 0
-the Q-bit will not be set.
-.SH BUGS
-Plenty, as the X.25 PLP implementation is
-.BR CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL .
-.PP
-This man page is incomplete.
-.PP
-There is no dedicated application programmer's header file yet;
-you need to include the kernel header file
-.BR <linux/x25.h> .
-.B CONFIG_EXPERIMENTAL
-might also imply that future versions of the
-interface are not binary compatible.
-.PP
-X.25 N-Reset events are not propagated to the user process yet. Thus,
-if a reset occurred, data might be lost without notice.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR socket (7),
-.BR socket (2)
-.PP
-Jonathan Simon Naylor:
-\(lqThe Re-Analysis and Re-Implementation of X.25.\(rq
-The URL is
-.RS
-.I ftp://ftp.pspt.fi/pub/ham/linux/ax25/x25doc.tgz
-.RE
-.SH VERSIONS
-The PF_X25 protocol family is a new feature of Linux 2.2.
diff --git a/raw/man8/MAKEDEV.8 b/raw/man8/MAKEDEV.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 4753c5a..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/MAKEDEV.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
-.TH MAKEDEV 8 "26 June 2001" Linux "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-MAKEDEV \- create devices
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B "cd dev; ./MAKEDEV -V"
-.br
-.B "cd dev; ./MAKEDEV [ -d directory ] [ -c configdir ] [ -m maxdevices ] [-n] [-v] [-i] [-M] [-S]" " device ..."
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B MAKEDEV
-is a program that will create the devices in \fC/dev\fR used to interface
-with drivers in the kernel.
-.PP
-Note that programs giving the error ``ENOENT: No such file or
-directory'' normally means that the device file is missing, whereas
-``ENODEV: No such device'' normally means the kernel does not have the
-driver configured or loaded.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Print out version and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Do not actually update the devices, just print the actions that would be
-performed.
-.TP
-.B \-M
-Create symlinks, directories, and sockets belonging to the current user,
-and print out the list of devices which would be created in a format
-which is understood by RPM.
-.TP
-.B \-S
-Do not actually update the devices, just print the actions that would be
-performed in a format which can be fed to a shell.
-.TP
-.B \-d directory
-Create the devices under \fBdirectory\fR instead of the default (usually
-\fB/dev\fR).
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Be verbose. Print out the actions as they are performed. This is the
-same output as produced by the \fB-n\fR option.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-Ignore errors parsing configuration files.
-.BR
-.SH CUSTOMIZATION
-Since there is currently no standardization in what names are used for
-system users and groups, it is possible that you may need to modify
-\fBMAKEDEV\fR's configuration files to reflect your site's settings.
-.SH DEVICES
-.TP
-Certain devices are required for minimal functionality. These are:
-.B mem
-\- access to physical memory;
-.B kmem
-\- access to kernel virtual memory;
-.B null
-\- null device (infinite sink);
-.B port
-\- access to I/O ports;
-.B zero
-\- null byte source (infinite source);
-.B core
-\- symlink to \fB/proc/kcore\fR (for kernel debugging);
-.B full
-\- always returns ENOSPACE on write;
-.B ram
-\- ramdisk;
-.B tty
-\- to access the controlling tty of a process.
-.TP
-.B Virtual Terminals
-.TP
-.I console
-This creates the devices associated with the console. These are the virtual
-terminals \fBtty\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR can be from 0 though 63. The device
-\fItty0\fR is the currently active VT, and is also known as \fCconsole\fR.
-For each VT, there are two devices: \fBvcs\fIx\fR and \fBvcsa\fIx\fR,
-which can be used to generate screen-dumps of the VT (\fBvcs\fIx\fR is just the
-text, and \fBvcsa\fIx\fR includes the attributes).
-.TP
-.B Serial Devices
-.TP
-.I ttyS{0..63}
-Serial ports.
-.TP
-.B Pseudo Terminals
-.TP
-.I pty[p-s]
-Each possible argument will create a bank of 16 master and slave
-pairs. The current kernel (1.2) is limited to 64 such pairs.
-The master pseudo-terminals are
-.BR pty[p-s][0-9a-f] ,
-and the slaves are
-.BR tty[p-s][0-9a-f] .
-.TP
-.B Parallel Ports
-.TP
-.I lp
-Standard parallel ports. The devices are created
-.BR lp0 ,
-.BR lp1 ,
-and
-.BR lp2 .
-.TP
-.B Bus Mice
-.TP
-.I busmice
-The various bus mice devices. This creates the following devices:
-.B logimouse
-(Logitech bus mouse),
-.B psmouse
-(PS/2-style mouse),
-.B msmouse
-(Microsoft Inport bus mouse) and
-.B atimouse
-(ATI XL bus mouse) and
-.B jmouse
-(J-mouse).
-.TP
-.B Joystick Devices
-.TP
-.I js
-Joystick. Creates
-.B js0
-and
-.BR js1 .
-.TP
-.B Disk Devices
-.TP
-.I fd[0-7]
-Floppy disk devices. The device
-.BI fd x
-is the device which autodetects the format, and the additional devices are
-fixed format (whose size is indicated in the name).
-The other devices are named as
-.BI fd xLn .
-The single letter
-.I L
-identifies the type of floppy disk (d = 5.25" DD, h = 5.25" HD, D = 3.5"
-DD, H = 3.5" HD, E = 3.5" ED). The number
-.I n
-represents the capacity of that format in K. Thus the standard formats
-are
-.BI fd x d360 ,
-.BI fd x h1200 ,
-.BI fd x D720 ,
-.BI fd x H1440 ,
-and
-.RI fd x E2880 .
-.IP
-For more information see Alain Knaff's fdutils package.
-.IP
-Devices
-.BI fd0 *
-through
-.BI fd3 *
-are floppy disks on the first controller, and devices
-.BI fd4 *
-through
-.BI fd7 *
-are floppy disks on the second controller.
-.TP
-.I hd[a-d]
-AT hard disks. The device
-.BI hd x
-provides access to the whole disk, with the partitions being
-.BI hd x [0-20].
-The four primary partitions are
-.BI hd x 1
-through
-.BI hd x 4,
-with the logical partitions being numbered from
-.BI hd x 5
-though
-.BI hd x 20.
-(A primary partition can be made into an extended partition, which can hold
-4 logical partitions).
-By default, only the devices for 4 logical partitions are made. The
-others can be made by uncommenting them.
-.IP
-Drives hda and hdb are the two on the first controller. If using the new
-IDE driver (rather than the old HD driver), then hdc and hdd are the two
-drives on the secondary controller. These devices can also be used to
-acess IDE CDROMs if using the new IDE driver.
-.TP
-.I xd[a-d]
-XT hard disks. Partitions are the same as IDE disks.
-.TP
-.I sd[a-z], sd[a-c][a-z], sdd[a-x]
-SCSI hard disks. The partitions are similar to the IDE disks, but there
-is a limit of 11 logical partitions
-.RI (sd x 5
-through
-.RI sd x 15).
-This is to allow there to be 128 SCSI disks.
-.TP
-.I loop
-Loopback disk devices. These allow you to use a regular file as a
-block device. This means that images of filesystems can be mounted,
-and used as normal. This creates 16 devices loop0 through loop15.
-.TP
-.B Tape Devices
-.TP
-.I st[0-7]
-SCSI tapes. This creates the rewinding tape device
-.BI st x
-and the non-rewinding tape device
-.BI nst x .
-.TP
-.I qic
-QIC-80 tapes. The devices created are
-.BR rmt8 ,
-.BR rmt16 ,
-.BR tape-d ,
-and
-.BR tape-reset .
-.TP
-.I ftape
-Floppy driver tapes (QIC-117). There are 4 methods of access depending on
-the floppy tape drive. For each of access methods 0, 1, 2 and 3, the
-devices
-.BI rft x
-(rewinding) and
-.BI nrft x
-(non-rewinding) are created. For compatability, devices
-.B ftape
-and
-.B nftape
-are symlinks to
-.B rft0
-and
-.B nrft0
-respectively.
-.TP
-.B CDROM Devices
-.TP
-.I scd[0-7]
-SCSI CD players.
-.TP
-.I sonycd
-Sony CDU-31A CD player.
-.TP
-.I mcd
-Mitsumi CD player.
-.TP
-.I cdu535
-Sony CDU-535 CD player.
-.TP
-.I lmscd
-LMS/Philips CD player.
-.TP
-.I sbpcd{,1,2,3}
-Sound Blaster CD player. The kernel is capable of supporting 16 CDROMs,
-each of which is accessed as
-.BR sbpcd[0-9a-f] .
-These are assigned in groups of 4 to each controller.
-.B sbpcd
-is a symlink to
-.BR sbpcd0 .
-.\" .TP
-.\" .I idecd
-.\" NEC CDR-260 (note: this will probably be obsoleted by the new IDE driver).
-.TP
-.B Scanner
-.TP
-.I logiscan
-Logitech ScanMan32 & ScanMan 256.
-.TP
-.I m105scan
-Mustek M105 Handscanner.
-.TP
-.I ac4096
-A4Tek Color Handscanner.
-.TP
-.B Audio
-.TP
-.I sound
-This creates the audio devices used by the sound driver. These include
-.BR mixer ,
-.BR sequencer ,
-.BR dsp ,
-and
-.BR audio .
-.TP
-.B Miscellaneous
-.TP
-.I sg
-Generic SCSI devices. The devices created are
-.B sga
-through
-.B sgh
-and
-.B sg0
-through
-.BR sg7 .
-These allow arbitary commands to be sent to any SCSI device. This allows for
-querying information about the device, or controlling SCSI devices that
-are not one of disk, tape or CDROM (e.g. scanner, CD-R, CD-RW).
-.TP
-.I fd
-To allow an arbitary program to be fed input from file descriptor
-.IR x ,
-use
-.BI /dev/fd/ x
-as the file name. This also creates
-.BR /dev/stdin ,
-.BR /dev/stdout ,
-and
-.BR /dev/stderr .
-(Note, these are just symlinks into /proc/self/fd).
-.TP
-.I ibcs2
-Devices (and symlinks) needed by the IBCS2 emulation.
-.TP
-.I apm
-Devices for power management.
-.TP
-.B "Network Devices"
-Linux used to have devices in /dev for controlling network devices, but
-that is no longer the case. To see what network devices are known by the
-kernel, look in /proc/net/dev.
-.TP
-.B "Other Devices"
-Note that the list of devices above is not exhaustive. MAKEDEV can create
-more devices nodes. Its aim is to be able to create everything listed in the
-\fBdevices.txt\fR file distributed with Linux 2.4.
-
-.SH CONFIGURATION
-MAKEDEV doesn't actually know anything about devices. It reads all of the
-information from files stored in \fB/etc/makedev.d\fR. MAKEDEV will read any
-and all files in the subdirectory, processing lines in them like so:
-.TP
-.B devices
-.B [b|c]
-mode owner group major minor inc count fmt [base]
-.br
-\fIcount\fR devices will be created, with permissions set to \fImode\fR and
-owned by \fIowner\fR and \fIgroup\fR. The first device will be named \fIfmt\fR,
-and additional devices will be created if \fIcount\fR is larger than 1.
-If \fIfmt\fR contains a C-style formatting string, it will be filled with the
-sum of \fIbase\fR and zero. Subsequent devices will be filled with the sum of
-\fIbase\fR and \fIn\fR * \fIinc\fR, where \fIn\fR is the order this device is
-being created in. If the format string did not already include a format
-specifier, a "%d" will automatically be appended to it to make this work.
-.TP
-.B symbolic links
-.B l
-linkname target
-.br
-A symbolic link pointing to \fItarget\fR named \fIlinkname\fR will be created.
-.TP
-.B aliases
-.B a
-alias value
-.br
-Any commands that create devices for \fIalias\fR will also include devices that
-would be crated for \fIvalue\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Linux Allocated Devices, maintained by H.\ Peter Anvin,
-<Peter.Anvin at linux.org>.
-.SH BUGS
-Let's hope not. If we're lucky, any problems we'll find will be confined to
-the configuration files, which were written by examining the devices.txt file.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Nalin Dahyabhai, based largely on work done by
-Nick Holloway
-and
-Michael K. Johnson.
diff --git a/raw/man8/badblocks.8 b/raw/man8/badblocks.8
deleted file mode 100644
index c33d3d8..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/badblocks.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.TH BADBLOCKS 8 "July 2003" "E2fsprogs version 1.34"
-.SH NAME
-badblocks \- search a device for bad blocks
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B badblocks
-[
-.B \-svwnf
-]
-[
-.B \-b
-.I block-size
-]
-[
-.B \-c
-.I blocks_at_once
-]
-[
-.B \-i
-.I input_file
-]
-[
-.B \-o
-.I output_file
-]
-[
-.B \-p
-.I num_passes
-]
-[
-.B \-t
-.I test_pattern
-]
-.I device
-[
-.I last-block
-] [
-.I start-block
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B badblocks
-is used to search for bad blocks on a device (usually a disk partition).
-.I device
-is the special file corresponding to the device (e.g
-.IR /dev/hdc1 ).
-.I last-block
-is the last block to be checked; if it is not specified, the last block
-on the device is used as a default.
-.I start-block
-is an optional parameter specifying the starting block number
-for the test, which allows the testing to start in the middle of the
-disk. If it is not specified the first block on the disk is used as a default.
-.PP
-.B Important note:
-If the output of
-.B badblocks
-is going to be fed to the
-.B e2fsck
-or
-.B mke2fs
-programs, it is important that the block size is properly specified,
-since the block numbers which are generated are very dependent on the
-block size in use. For this reason, it is strongly recommended that
-users
-.B not
-run
-.B badblocks
-directly, but rather use the
-.B \-c
-option of the
-.B e2fsck
-and
-.B mke2fs
-programs.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI \-b " block-size"
-Specify the size of blocks in bytes.
-.TP
-.BI \-c " number of blocks"
-is the number of blocks which are tested at a time. The default is 16.
-Increasing this number will increase the efficiency of
-.B badblocks
-but also will increase its memory usage.
-.B Badblocks
-needs memory proportional to the number of blocks tested at once, in
-read-only mode, proportional to twice that number in read-write mode,
-and proportional to three times that number in non-destructive read-write
-mode. If you set the number-of-blocks parameter to too high a value,
-.B badblocks
-will exit almost immediately with an out-of-memory error "while allocating
-buffers". If you set it too low, however, for a non-destructive-write-mode
-test, then it's possble for questionable blocks on an unreliable
-hard drive to be hidden by the effects of the hard disk track buffer.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Normally, badblocks will refuse to do a read/write or a non-destructive
-test on a device which is mounted, since either can cause the system to
-potentially crash and/or damage the filesystem even if it is mounted
-read-only. This can be overriden using the
-.B \-f
-flag, but should almost never be used --- if you think you're smarter
-than the
-.B badblocks
-program, you almost certainly aren't. The only time when this option
-might be safe to use is if the /etc/mtab file is incorrect, and the device
-really isn't mounted.
-.TP
-.BI \-i " input_file"
-Read a list of already existing known bad blocks.
-.B Badblocks
-will skip testing these blocks since they are known to be bad. If
-.I input_file
-is specified as "-", the list will be read from the standard input.
-Blocks listed in this list will be omitted from the list of
-.I new
-bad blocks produced on the standard output or in the output file.
-The
-.B \-b
-option of
-.BR dumpe2fs (8)
-can be used to retrieve the list of blocks currently marked bad on
-an existing filesystem, in a format suitable for use with this option.
-.TP
-.BI \-o " output_file"
-Write the list of bad blocks to the specified file. Without this option,
-.B badblocks
-displays the list on its standard output. The format of this file is suitable
-for use by the
-.
-.B \-l
-option in
-.BR e2fsck (8)
-or
-.BR mke2fs (8).
-.TP
-.BI \-p " num_passes"
-Repeat scanning the disk until there are no new blocks discovered in
-num_passes consecutive scans of the disk.
-Default is 0, meaning
-.B badblocks
-will exit after the first pass.
-.TP
-.BI \-t " test_pattern"
-Specify a test pattern to be read (and written) to disk blocks. The
-.I test_pattern
-may either be a numeric value between 0 and ULONG_MAX-1 inclusive, or the word
-"random", which specifies that the block should be filled with a random
-bit pattern.
-For read/write (\fB-w\fR) and non-destructive (\fB-n\fR) modes,
-one or more test patterns may be specified by specifiying the
-.B -t
-option for each test pattern desired. For
-read-only mode only a single pattern may be specified and it may not be
-"random". Read-only testing with a pattern assumes that the
-specified pattern has previously been written to the disk - if not, large
-numbers of blocks will fail verification.
-If multiple patterns
-are specified then all blocks will be tested with an one pattern
-before proceeding to the next pattern.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Use non-destructive read-write mode. By default only a non-destructive
-read-only test is done. This option must not be combined with the
-.B \-w
-option, as they are mutually exclusive.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Show the progress of the scan by writing out the block numbers as they
-are checked.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Verbose mode.
-.TP
-.B \-w
-Use write-mode test. With this option,
-.B badblocks
-scans for bad blocks by writing some patterns (0xaa, 0x55, 0xff, 0x00) on
-every block of the device, reading every block and comparing the contents.
-This option may not be combined with the
-.B \-n
-option, as they are mutually exclusive.
-.SH WARNING
-Never use the
-.B \-w
-option on an device containing an existing file system.
-This option erases data! If you want to do write-mode testing on
-an existing file system, use the
-.B \-n
-option instead. It is slower, but it will preserve your data.
-.SH AUTHOR
-.B badblocks
-was written by Remy Card <Remy.Card at linux.org>. Current maintainer is
-Theodore Ts'o <tytso at alum.mit.edu>. Non-destructive read/write test
-implemented by David Beattie <dbeattie at softhome.net>.
-.SH AVAILABILITY
-.B badblocks
-is part of the e2fsprogs package and is available from
-http://e2fsprogs.sourceforge.net.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR e2fsck (8),
-.BR mke2fs (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/blockdev.8 b/raw/man8/blockdev.8
deleted file mode 100644
index bde6426..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/blockdev.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,55 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\" Copyright 1998 Andries E. Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\"
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.TH BLOCKDEV 8 "May 2000" ""
-.SH NAME
-blockdev \- call block device ioctls from the command line
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B blockdev
-.RI [ options ]
-.I commands devices
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The utility
-.B blockdev
-allows one to call block device ioctls from the command line.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Print version and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Be quiet.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Be verbose.
-.SH COMMANDS
-.TP
-.B \--setro
-Set read-only.
-.TP
-.B \--setrw
-Set read-write.
-.TP
-.B \--getro
-Get read-only. Print 1 if the device is read-only, 0 otherwise.
-.TP
-.B \--getss
-Print sectorsize in bytes - usually 512.
-.TP
-.B \--getsize
-Print device capacity (in 512-byte sectors).
-.TP
-.BI \--setra " N"
-Set readahead to
-.I N
-512-byte sectors.
-.TP
-.B \--getra
-Print readahead (in 512-byte sectors).
-.TP
-.B \--flushbufs
-Flush buffers.
-.TP
-.B \--rereadpt
-Reread partition table.
diff --git a/raw/man8/chat.8 b/raw/man8/chat.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 5498904..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/chat.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,514 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\" manual page [] for chat 1.8
-.\" SH section heading
-.\" SS subsection heading
-.\" LP paragraph
-.\" IP indented paragraph
-.\" TP hanging label
-.TH CHAT 8 "22 May 1999" "Chat Version 1.22"
-.SH NAME
-chat \- Automated conversational script with a modem
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B chat
-[
-.I options
-]
-.I script
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.LP
-The \fIchat\fR program defines a conversational exchange between the
-computer and the modem. Its primary purpose is to establish the
-connection between the Point-to-Point Protocol Daemon (\fIpppd\fR) and
-the remote's \fIpppd\fR process.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B -f \fI<chat file>
-Read the chat script from the chat \fIfile\fR. The use of this option
-is mutually exclusive with the chat script parameters. The user must
-have read access to the file. Multiple lines are permitted in the
-file. Space or horizontal tab characters should be used to separate
-the strings.
-.TP
-.B -t \fI<timeout>
-Set the timeout for the expected string to be received. If the string
-is not received within the time limit then the reply string is not
-sent. An alternate reply may be sent or the script will fail if there
-is no alternate reply string. A failed script will cause the
-\fIchat\fR program to terminate with a non-zero error code.
-.TP
-.B -r \fI<report file>
-Set the file for output of the report strings. If you use the keyword
-\fIREPORT\fR, the resulting strings are written to this file. If this
-option is not used and you still use \fIREPORT\fR keywords, the
-\fIstderr\fR file is used for the report strings.
-.TP
-.B -e
-Start with the echo option turned on. Echoing may also be turned on
-or off at specific points in the chat script by using the \fIECHO\fR
-keyword. When echoing is enabled, all output from the modem is echoed
-to \fIstderr\fR.
-.TP
-.B -E
-Enables environment variable substituion within chat scripts using the
-standard \fI$xxx\fR syntax.
-.TP
-.B -v
-Request that the \fIchat\fR script be executed in a verbose mode. The
-\fIchat\fR program will then log the execution state of the chat
-script as well as all text received from the modem and the output
-strings sent to the modem. The default is to log through the SYSLOG;
-the logging method may be altered with the -S and -s flags.
-.TP
-.B -V
-Request that the \fIchat\fR script be executed in a stderr verbose
-mode. The \fIchat\fR program will then log all text received from the
-modem and the output strings sent to the modem to the stderr device. This
-device is usually the local console at the station running the chat or
-pppd program.
-.TP
-.B -s
-Use stderr. All log messages from '-v' and all error messages will be
-sent to stderr.
-.TP
-.B -S
-Do not use the SYSLOG. By default, error messages are sent to the
-SYSLOG. The use of -S will prevent both log messages from '-v' and
-error messages from being sent to the SYSLOG.
-.TP
-.B -T \fI<phone number>
-Pass in an arbitary string, usually a phone number, that will be
-substituted for the \\T substitution metacharacter in a send string.
-.TP
-.B -U \fI<phone number 2>
-Pass in a second string, usually a phone number, that will be
-substituted for the \\U substitution metacharacter in a send string.
-This is useful when dialing an ISDN terminal adapter that requires two
-numbers.
-.TP
-.B script
-If the script is not specified in a file with the \fI-f\fR option then
-the script is included as parameters to the \fIchat\fR program.
-.SH CHAT SCRIPT
-.LP
-The \fIchat\fR script defines the communications.
-.LP
-A script consists of one or more "expect-send" pairs of strings,
-separated by spaces, with an optional "subexpect-subsend" string pair,
-separated by a dash as in the following example:
-.IP
-ogin:-BREAK-ogin: ppp ssword: hello2u2
-.LP
-This line indicates that the \fIchat\fR program should expect the string
-"ogin:". If it fails to receive a login prompt within the time interval
-allotted, it is to send a break sequence to the remote and then expect the
-string "ogin:". If the first "ogin:" is received then the break sequence is
-not generated.
-.LP
-Once it received the login prompt the \fIchat\fR program will send the
-string ppp and then expect the prompt "ssword:". When it receives the
-prompt for the password, it will send the password hello2u2.
-.LP
-A carriage return is normally sent following the reply string. It is not
-expected in the "expect" string unless it is specifically requested by using
-the \\r character sequence.
-.LP
-The expect sequence should contain only what is needed to identify the
-string. Since it is normally stored on a disk file, it should not contain
-variable information. It is generally not acceptable to look for time
-strings, network identification strings, or other variable pieces of data as
-an expect string.
-.LP
-To help correct for characters which may be corrupted during the initial
-sequence, look for the string "ogin:" rather than "login:". It is possible
-that the leading "l" character may be received in error and you may never
-find the string even though it was sent by the system. For this reason,
-scripts look for "ogin:" rather than "login:" and "ssword:" rather than
-"password:".
-.LP
-A very simple script might look like this:
-.IP
-ogin: ppp ssword: hello2u2
-.LP
-In other words, expect ....ogin:, send ppp, expect ...ssword:, send hello2u2.
-.LP
-In actual practice, simple scripts are rare. At the vary least, you
-should include sub-expect sequences should the original string not be
-received. For example, consider the following script:
-.IP
-ogin:--ogin: ppp ssword: hello2u2
-.LP
-This would be a better script than the simple one used earlier. This would look
-for the same login: prompt, however, if one was not received, a single
-return sequence is sent and then it will look for login: again. Should line
-noise obscure the first login prompt then sending the empty line will
-usually generate a login prompt again.
-.SH COMMENTS
-Comments can be embedded in the chat script. A comment is a line which
-starts with the \fB#\fR (hash) character in column 1. Such comment
-lines are just ignored by the chat program. If a '#' character is to
-be expected as the first character of the expect sequence, you should
-quote the expect string.
-If you want to wait for a prompt that starts with a # (hash)
-character, you would have to write something like this:
-.IP
-# Now wait for the prompt and send logout string
-.br
-\'# ' logout
-.LP
-
-.SH SENDING DATA FROM A FILE
-If the string to send starts with an at sign (@), the rest of the
-string is taken to be the name of a file to read to get the string to
-send. If the last character of the data read is a newline, it is
-removed. The file can be a named pipe (or fifo) instead of a regular
-file. This provides a way for \fBchat\fR to communicate with another
-program, for example, a program to prompt the user and receive a
-password typed in.
-.LP
-
-.SH ABORT STRINGS
-Many modems will report the status of the call as a string. These
-strings may be \fBCONNECTED\fR or \fBNO CARRIER\fR or \fBBUSY\fR. It
-is often desirable to terminate the script should the modem fail to
-connect to the remote. The difficulty is that a script would not know
-exactly which modem string it may receive. On one attempt, it may
-receive \fBBUSY\fR while the next time it may receive \fBNO CARRIER\fR.
-.LP
-These "abort" strings may be specified in the script using the \fIABORT\fR
-sequence. It is written in the script as in the following example:
-.IP
-ABORT BUSY ABORT 'NO CARRIER' '' ATZ OK ATDT5551212 CONNECT
-.LP
-This sequence will expect nothing; and then send the string ATZ. The
-expected response to this is the string \fIOK\fR. When it receives \fIOK\fR,
-the string ATDT5551212 to dial the telephone. The expected string is
-\fICONNECT\fR. If the string \fICONNECT\fR is received the remainder of the
-script is executed. However, should the modem find a busy telephone, it will
-send the string \fIBUSY\fR. This will cause the string to match the abort
-character sequence. The script will then fail because it found a match to
-the abort string. If it received the string \fINO CARRIER\fR, it will abort
-for the same reason. Either string may be received. Either string will
-terminate the \fIchat\fR script.
-.SH CLR_ABORT STRINGS
-This sequence allows for clearing previously set \fBABORT\fR strings.
-\fBABORT\fR strings are kept in an array of a pre-determined size (at
-compilation time); \fBCLR_ABORT\fR will reclaim the space for cleared
-entries so that new strings can use that space.
-.SH SAY STRINGS
-The \fBSAY\fR directive allows the script to send strings to the user
-at the terminal via standard error. If \fBchat\fR is being run by
-pppd, and pppd is running as a daemon (detached from its controlling
-terminal), standard error will normally be redirected to the file
-/etc/ppp/connect-errors.
-.LP
-\fBSAY\fR strings must be enclosed in single or double quotes. If
-carriage return and line feed are needed in the string to be output,
-you must explicitely add them to your string.
-.LP
-The SAY strings could be used to give progress messages in sections of
-the script where you want to have 'ECHO OFF' but still let the user
-know what is happening. An example is:
-.IP
-ABORT BUSY
-.br
-ECHO OFF
-.br
-SAY "Dialling your ISP...\\n"
-.br
-\'' ATDT5551212
-.br
-TIMEOUT 120
-.br
-SAY "Waiting up to 2 minutes for connection ... "
-.br
-CONNECT ''
-.br
-SAY "Connected, now logging in ...\n"
-.br
-ogin: account
-.br
-ssword: pass
-.br
-$ \c
-SAY "Logged in OK ...\n"
-\fIetc ...\fR
-.LP
-This sequence will only present the SAY strings to the user and all
-the details of the script will remain hidden. For example, if the
-above script works, the user will see:
-.IP
-Dialling your ISP...
-.br
-Waiting up to 2 minutes for connection ... Connected, now logging in ...
-.br
-Logged in OK ...
-.LP
-
-.SH REPORT STRINGS
-A \fBreport\fR string is similar to the ABORT string. The difference
-is that the strings, and all characters to the next control character
-such as a carriage return, are written to the report file.
-.LP
-The report strings may be used to isolate the transmission rate of the
-modem's connect string and return the value to the chat user. The
-analysis of the report string logic occurs in conjunction with the
-other string processing such as looking for the expect string. The use
-of the same string for a report and abort sequence is probably not
-very useful, however, it is possible.
-.LP
-The report strings to no change the completion code of the program.
-.LP
-These "report" strings may be specified in the script using the \fIREPORT\fR
-sequence. It is written in the script as in the following example:
-.IP
-REPORT CONNECT ABORT BUSY '' ATDT5551212 CONNECT '' ogin: account
-.LP
-This sequence will expect nothing; and then send the string
-ATDT5551212 to dial the telephone. The expected string is
-\fICONNECT\fR. If the string \fICONNECT\fR is received the remainder
-of the script is executed. In addition the program will write to the
-expect-file the string "CONNECT" plus any characters which follow it
-such as the connection rate.
-.SH CLR_REPORT STRINGS
-This sequence allows for clearing previously set \fBREPORT\fR strings.
-\fBREPORT\fR strings are kept in an array of a pre-determined size (at
-compilation time); \fBCLR_REPORT\fR will reclaim the space for cleared
-entries so that new strings can use that space.
-.SH ECHO
-The echo options controls whether the output from the modem is echoed
-to \fIstderr\fR. This option may be set with the \fI-e\fR option, but
-it can also be controlled by the \fIECHO\fR keyword. The "expect-send"
-pair \fIECHO\fR \fION\fR enables echoing, and \fIECHO\fR \fIOFF\fR
-disables it. With this keyword you can select which parts of the
-conversation should be visible. For instance, with the following
-script:
-.IP
-ABORT 'BUSY'
-.br
-ABORT 'NO CARRIER'
-.br
-'' ATZ
-.br
-OK\\r\\n ATD1234567
-.br
-\\r\\n \\c
-.br
-ECHO ON
-.br
-CONNECT \\c
-.br
-ogin: account
-.LP
-all output resulting from modem configuration and dialing is not visible,
-but starting with the \fICONNECT\fR (or \fIBUSY\fR) message, everything
-will be echoed.
-.SH HANGUP
-The HANGUP options control whether a modem hangup should be considered
-as an error or not. This option is useful in scripts for dialling
-systems which will hang up and call your system back. The HANGUP
-options can be \fBON\fR or \fBOFF\fR.
-.br
-When HANGUP is set OFF and the modem hangs up (e.g., after the first
-stage of logging in to a callback system), \fBchat\fR will continue
-running the script (e.g., waiting for the incoming call and second
-stage login prompt). As soon as the incoming call is connected, you
-should use the \fBHANGUP ON\fR directive to reinstall normal hang up
-signal behavior. Here is an (simple) example script:
-.IP
-ABORT 'BUSY'
-.br
-'' ATZ
-.br
-OK\\r\\n ATD1234567
-.br
-\\r\\n \\c
-.br
-CONNECT \\c
-.br
-\'Callback login:' call_back_ID
-.br
-HANGUP OFF
-.br
-ABORT "Bad Login"
-.br
-\'Callback Password:' Call_back_password
-.br
-TIMEOUT 120
-.br
-CONNECT \\c
-.br
-HANGUP ON
-.br
-ABORT "NO CARRIER"
-.br
-ogin:--BREAK--ogin: real_account
-.br
-\fIetc ...\fR
-.LP
-.SH TIMEOUT
-The initial timeout value is 45 seconds. This may be changed using the \fB-t\fR
-parameter.
-.LP
-To change the timeout value for the next expect string, the following
-example may be used:
-.IP
-ATZ OK ATDT5551212 CONNECT TIMEOUT 10 ogin:--ogin: TIMEOUT 5 assword: hello2u2
-.LP
-This will change the timeout to 10 seconds when it expects the login:
-prompt. The timeout is then changed to 5 seconds when it looks for the
-password prompt.
-.LP
-The timeout, once changed, remains in effect until it is changed again.
-.SH SENDING EOT
-The special reply string of \fIEOT\fR indicates that the chat program
-should send an EOT character to the remote. This is normally the
-End-of-file character sequence. A return character is not sent
-following the EOT.
-.PR
-The EOT sequence may be embedded into the send string using the
-sequence \fI^D\fR.
-.SH GENERATING BREAK
-The special reply string of \fIBREAK\fR will cause a break condition
-to be sent. The break is a special signal on the transmitter. The
-normal processing on the receiver is to change the transmission rate.
-It may be used to cycle through the available transmission rates on
-the remote until you are able to receive a valid login prompt.
-.PR
-The break sequence may be embedded into the send string using the
-\fI\\K\fR sequence.
-.SH ESCAPE SEQUENCES
-The expect and reply strings may contain escape sequences. All of the
-sequences are legal in the reply string. Many are legal in the expect.
-Those which are not valid in the expect sequence are so indicated.
-.TP
-.B ''
-Expects or sends a null string. If you send a null string then it will still
-send the return character. This sequence may either be a pair of apostrophe
-or quote characters.
-.TP
-.B \\\\b
-represents a backspace character.
-.TP
-.B \\\\c
-Suppresses the newline at the end of the reply string. This is the only
-method to send a string without a trailing return character. It must
-be at the end of the send string. For example,
-the sequence hello\\c will simply send the characters h, e, l, l, o.
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\d
-Delay for one second. The program uses sleep(1) which will delay to a
-maximum of one second.
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\K
-Insert a BREAK
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\n
-Send a newline or linefeed character.
-.TP
-.B \\\\N
-Send a null character. The same sequence may be represented by \\0.
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\p
-Pause for a fraction of a second. The delay is 1/10th of a second.
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\q
-Suppress writing the string to the SYSLOG file. The string ?????? is
-written to the log in its place.
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\r
-Send or expect a carriage return.
-.TP
-.B \\\\s
-Represents a space character in the string. This may be used when it
-is not desirable to quote the strings which contains spaces. The
-sequence 'HI TIM' and HI\\sTIM are the same.
-.TP
-.B \\\\t
-Send or expect a tab character.
-.TP
-.B \\\\T
-Send the phone number string as specified with the \fI-T\fR option
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\U
-Send the phone number 2 string as specified with the \fI-U\fR option
-.I (not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \\\\\\\\
-Send or expect a backslash character.
-.TP
-.B \\\\ddd
-Collapse the octal digits (ddd) into a single ASCII character and send that
-character.
-.I (some characters are not valid in expect.)
-.TP
-.B \^^C
-Substitute the sequence with the control character represented by C.
-For example, the character DC1 (17) is shown as \^^Q.
-.I (some characters are not valid in expect.)
-.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
-Environment variables are available within chat scripts, if the \fI-E\fR
-option was specified in the command line. The metacharacter \fI$\fR is used
-to introduce the name of the environment variable to substitute. If the
-substition fails, because the requested environment variable is not set,
-\fInothing\fR is replaced for the variable.
-.SH TERMINATION CODES
-The \fIchat\fR program will terminate with the following completion
-codes.
-.TP
-.B 0
-The normal termination of the program. This indicates that the script
-was executed without error to the normal conclusion.
-.TP
-.B 1
-One or more of the parameters are invalid or an expect string was too
-large for the internal buffers. This indicates that the program as not
-properly executed.
-.TP
-.B 2
-An error occurred during the execution of the program. This may be due
-to a read or write operation failing for some reason or chat receiving
-a signal such as SIGINT.
-.TP
-.B 3
-A timeout event occurred when there was an \fIexpect\fR string without
-having a "-subsend" string. This may mean that you did not program the
-script correctly for the condition or that some unexpected event has
-occurred and the expected string could not be found.
-.TP
-.B 4
-The first string marked as an \fIABORT\fR condition occurred.
-.TP
-.B 5
-The second string marked as an \fIABORT\fR condition occurred.
-.TP
-.B 6
-The third string marked as an \fIABORT\fR condition occurred.
-.TP
-.B 7
-The fourth string marked as an \fIABORT\fR condition occurred.
-.TP
-.B ...
-The other termination codes are also strings marked as an \fIABORT\fR
-condition.
-.LP
-Using the termination code, it is possible to determine which event
-terminated the script. It is possible to decide if the string "BUSY"
-was received from the modem as opposed to "NO DIAL TONE". While the
-first event may be retried, the second will probably have little
-chance of succeeding during a retry.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-Additional information about \fIchat\fR scripts may be found with UUCP
-documentation. The \fIchat\fR script was taken from the ideas proposed
-by the scripts used by the \fIuucico\fR program.
-.LP
-uucico(1), uucp(1)
-.SH COPYRIGHT
-The \fIchat\fR program is in public domain. This is not the GNU public
-license. If it breaks then you get to keep both pieces.
diff --git a/raw/man8/chpasswd.8 b/raw/man8/chpasswd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index eda8b29..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/chpasswd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1991, Julianne Frances Haugh
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.TH CHPASSWD 8
-.SH NAME
-\fBchpasswd\fR - update password file in batch
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBchpasswd\fR [\fB-e\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBchpasswd\fR reads a file of user name and password pairs
-from standard input and uses this information
-to update a group of existing users. Without the -e switch, the
-passwords are expected to be cleartext. With the -e switch, the
-passwords are expected to be in encrypted form.
-Each line is of the format
-.sp 1
- \fIuser_name\fR:\fIpassword\fR
-.sp 1
-The named user must exist.
-The supplied password will be encrypted as necessary, and the password age
-updated, if present.
-.PP
-This command is intended to be used in a large system environment where
-many accounts are created at a single time.
-.SH CAVEATS
-.\" The \fBmkpasswd\fR command must be executed afterwards to update the
-.\" DBM password files.
-The input file must be protected if it contains unencrypted passwords.
-.\" This command may be discarded in favor of the newusers(8) command.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.\" mkpasswd(8), passwd(1), useradd(1)
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR newusers (8),
-.BR useradd (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julianne Frances Haugh (jockgrrl at ix.netcom.com)
diff --git a/raw/man8/convertquota.8 b/raw/man8/convertquota.8
deleted file mode 100644
index ea5b803..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/convertquota.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-.TH CONVERTQUOTA 8 "Fri Aug 20 1999"
-.UC 4
-.SH NAME
-convertquota \- convert quota from old file format to new one
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B convertquota
-[
-.B -ug
-] [
-.B -e
-|
-.B -f
-]
-.I filesystem
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B convertquota
-converts old quota files
-.BR quota.user
-and
-.BR quota.group
-to files
-.BR aquota.user
-and
-.BR aquota.group
-in new format currently used by 2.4.0-ac? and newer or by Red Hat Linux 2.4 kernels on
-.IR filesystem .
-.PP
-New file format allows using quotas for 32-bit uids / gids, setting quotas for root,
-accounting used space in bytes (and so allowing use of quotas in ReiserFS) and it
-is also architecture independent. This format introduces Radix Tree (a simple form of tree
-structure) to quota file.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B -u
-convert user quota file. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B -g
-convert group quota file.
-.TP
-.B -f
-convert from old file format to new one. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B -e
-convert new file format from big endian to little endian.
-.TP
-.B -V
-print version information.
-.SH FILES
-.TP 20
-.B aquota.user
-new user quota file
-.TP
-.B aquota.group
-new group quota file
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR quota (1),
-.BR setquota (8),
-.BR edquota (8),
-.BR quotacheck (8),
-.BR quotaon (8),
-.BR repquota (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Jan Kara \<jack at suse.cz\>
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/cron.8 b/raw/man8/cron.8
deleted file mode 100644
index f73c51c..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/cron.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-.\"/* Copyright 1988,1990,1993 by Paul Vixie
-.\" * All rights reserved
-.\" *
-.\" * Distribute freely, except: don't remove my name from the source or
-.\" * documentation (don't take credit for my work), mark your changes (don't
-.\" * get me blamed for your possible bugs), don't alter or remove this
-.\" * notice. May be sold if buildable source is provided to buyer. No
-.\" * warrantee of any kind, express or implied, is included with this
-.\" * software; use at your own risk, responsibility for damages (if any) to
-.\" * anyone resulting from the use of this software rests entirely with the
-.\" * user.
-.\" *
-.\" * Send bug reports, bug fixes, enhancements, requests, flames, etc., and
-.\" * I'll try to keep a version up to date. I can be reached as follows:
-.\" * Paul Vixie <paul at vix.com> uunet!decwrl!vixie!paul
-.\" */
-.\"
-.\" $Id: cron.8,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.\"
-.TH CRON 8 "20 December 1993"
-.UC 4
-.SH NAME
-cron \- daemon to execute scheduled commands (Vixie Cron)
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-cron
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I Cron
-should be started from /etc/rc or /etc/rc.local. It will return immediately,
-so you don't need to start it with '&'.
-.PP
-.I Cron
-searches /var/spool/cron for crontab files which are named after accounts in
-/etc/passwd; crontabs found are loaded into memory.
-.I Cron
-also searches for /etc/crontab and the files in the /etc/cron.d/ directory,
-which are in a different format (see
-.IR crontab(5)).
-.I Cron
-then wakes up every minute, examining all stored crontabs, checking each
-command to see if it should be run in the current minute. When executing
-commands, any output is mailed to the owner of the crontab (or to the user
-named in the MAILTO environment variable in the crontab, if such exists).
-.PP
-Additionally,
-.I cron
-checks each minute to see if its spool directory's modtime (or the modtime
-on
-.IR /etc/crontab)
-has changed, and if it has,
-.I cron
-will then examine the modtime on all crontabs and reload those which have
-changed. Thus
-.I cron
-need not be restarted whenever a crontab file is modified. Note that the
-.IR Crontab (1)
-command updates the modtime of the spool directory whenever it changes a
-crontab.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-crontab(1), crontab(5)
-.SH AUTHOR
-.nf
-Paul Vixie <paul at vix.com>
diff --git a/raw/man8/dmesg.8 b/raw/man8/dmesg.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 8064b1d..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/dmesg.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1993 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.TH DMESG 8
-.SH NAME
-dmesg \- print or control the kernel ring buffer
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "dmesg [ \-c ] [ \-n " level " ] [ \-s " bufsize " ]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B dmesg
-is used to examine or control the kernel ring buffer.
-
-The program helps users to print out their bootup messages. Instead of
-copying the messages by hand, the user need only:
-.RS
-dmesg > boot.messages
-.RE
-and mail the
-.I boot.messages
-file to whoever can debug their problem.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Clear the ring buffer contents after printing.
-.TP
-.BI \-s bufsize
-Use a buffer of size
-.I bufsize
-to query the kernel ring buffer. This is 16392 by default.
-(The default kernel syslog buffer size was 4096
-at first, 8192 since 1.3.54, 16384 since 2.1.113.)
-If you have set the kernel buffer to be larger than the default
-then this option can be used to view the entire buffer.
-.TP
-.BI \-n level
-Set the
-.I level
-at which logging of messages is done to the console. For example,
-.B \-n 1
-prevents all messages, expect panic messages, from appearing on the
-console. All levels of messages are still written to
-.IR /proc/kmsg ,
-so
-.BR syslogd (8)
-can still be used to control exactly where kernel messages appear. When
-the
-.B \-n
-option is used,
-.B dmesg
-will
-.I not
-print or clear the kernel ring buffer.
-
-When both options are used, only the last option on the command line will
-have an effect.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR syslogd (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Theodore Ts'o (tytso at athena.mit.edu)
diff --git a/raw/man8/edquota.8 b/raw/man8/edquota.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a8e21b..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/edquota.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-.TH EDQUOTA 8
-.SH NAME
-edquota \- edit user quotas
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B edquota
-[
-.B \-p
-.I protoname
-] [
-.BR \-u \ |
-.B \-g
-] [
-.B \-r
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I format-name
-] [
-.B \-f
-.I filesystem
-]
-.IR username .\|.\|.
-.LP
-.B edquota
-[
-.BR \-u \ |
-.B \-g
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I format-name
-] [
-.B \-f
-.I filesystem
-]
-.B \-t
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "edquota command" "" "\fLedquota\fP \(em edit user quotas"
-.IX edit "user quotas \(em \fLedquota\fP"
-.IX "user quotas" "edquota command" "" "\fLedquota\fP \(em edit user quotas"
-.IX "disk quotas" "edquota command" "" "\fLedquota\fP \(em edit user quotas"
-.IX "quotas" "edquota command" "" "\fLedquota\fP \(em edit user quotas"
-.IX "filesystem" "edquota command" "" "\fLedquota\fP \(em edit user quotas"
-.B edquota
-is a quota editor. One or more users or groups may be specified on the command
-line. For each user or group a temporary file is created with an
-.SM ASCII
-representation of the current disk quotas for that user or group and an editor
-is then invoked on the file. The quotas may then be modified, new
-quotas added, etc.
-Setting a quota to zero indicates that no quota should be imposed.
-.PP
-Users are permitted to exceed their soft limits for a grace period that
-may be specified per filesystem. Once the grace period has expired, the
-soft limit is enforced as a hard limit.
-.PP
-The current usage information in the file is for informational purposes;
-only the hard and soft limits can be changed.
-.PP
-Upon leaving the editor,
-.B edquota
-reads the temporary file and modifies the binary quota files to reflect
-the changes made.
-.LP
-The editor invoked is
-.BR vi (1)
-unless either the
-.SB EDITOR
-or the
-.SB VISUAL
-environment variable specifies otherwise.
-.LP
-Only the super-user may edit quotas.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Edit also non-local quota use rpc.rquotad on remote server to set quota.
-The
-.B \-n
-option is equivalent, and is maintained for backward compatibility.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Edit the user quota. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B \-g
-Edit the group quota.
-.TP
-.B \-p \f2protoname\f1
-Duplicate the quotas of the prototypical user
-specified for each user specified. This is the normal
-mechanism used to initialize quotas for groups of users.
-.TP
-.B \-F \f2format-name\f1
-Edit quota for specified format (ie. don't perform format autodetection).
-Possible format names are:
-.B vfsold
-(version 1 quota),
-.B vfsv0
-(version 2 quota),
-.B rpc
-(quota over NFS),
-.B xfs
-(quota on XFS filesystem)
-.TP
-.B \-f \f2filesystem\f1
-Perform specified operations only for given filesystem (default is to perform
-operations for all filesystems with quota).
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Edit the soft time limits for each filesystem.
-In old quota format if the time limits are zero, the default time limits in
-.B <linux/quota.h>
-are used. In new quota format time limits must be specified (there is no default
-value set in kernel). Time units of seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, and months
-are understood. Time limits are printed in the greatest possible time unit such that
-the value is greater than or equal to one.
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-.BR aquota.user " or " aquota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 2 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.BR quota.user " or " quota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 1 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.B /etc/mtab
-mounted filesystems table
-.PD
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR quota (1),
-.BR vi (1),
-.BR quotactl (2),
-.BR quotacheck (8),
-.BR quotaon (8),
-.BR repquota (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/exportfs.8 b/raw/man8/exportfs.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 9024caf..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/exportfs.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,227 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" exportfs(8)
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 1995 Olaf Kirch <okir at monad.swb.de>
-.\" Modifications 1999-2003 Neil Brown <neilb at cse.unsw.edu.au>
-.TH exportfs 8 "18 July 2003"
-.SH NAME
-exportfs \- maintain list of NFS exported file systems
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "/usr/sbin/exportfs [-avi] [-o " "options,.." "] [" "client:/path" " ..]
-.br
-.BI "/usr/sbin/exportfs -r [-v]"
-.br
-.BI "/usr/sbin/exportfs [-av] -u [" "client:/path" " ..]
-.br
-.BI "/usr/sbin/exportfs [-v]
-.br
-.BI "/usr/sbin/exportfs -f"
-.br
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B exportfs
-command is used to maintain the current table of exported file systems for
-NFS. This list is kept in a separate file named
-.BR /var/lib/nfs/xtab
-which is read by
-.B mountd
-when a remote host requests access to mount a file tree, and parts of
-the list which are active are kept in the kernel's export table.
-.P
-Normally this
-.B xtab
-file is initialized with the list of all file systems named in
-.B /etc/exports
-by invoking
-.BR "exportfs -a" .
-.P
-However, administrators can choose to add and delete individual file systems
-without modifying
-.B /etc/exports
-using
-.BR exportfs .
-.P
-.B exportfs
-and it's partner program
-.B mountd
-work in one of two modes, a legacy mode which applies to 2.4 and
-earlier versions of the Linux kernel, and a new mode which applies to
-2.6 and later versions providing the
-.B nfsd
-virtual filesystem has been mounted at
-.B /proc/fs/nfsd
-or
-.BR /proc/fs/nfs .
-If this filesystem is not mounted in 2.6, the legacy mode is used.
-.P
-In the new mode,
-.B exportfs
-does not give any information to the kernel but only provides it to
-.B mountd
-through the
-.B /var/lib/nfs/xtab
-file.
-.B mountd
-will listen to requests from the kernel and will provide information
-as needed.
-.P
-In the legacy mode,
-any export requests which identify a specific host (rather than a
-subnet or netgroup etc) are entered directly into the kernel's export
-table as well as being written to
-.BR /var/lib/nfs/xtab .
-Further, any mount points listed in
-.B /var/lib/nfs/rmtab
-which match a non host-specific export request will cause an
-appropriate export entry for the host given in
-.B rmtab
-to be entered
-into the kernel's export table.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B -a
-Export or unexport all directories.
-.TP
-.BI "-o " options,...
-Specify a list of export options in the same manner as in
-.BR exports(5) .
-.TP
-.B -i
-Ignore the
-.B /etc/exports
-file, so that only default options and options given on the command
-line are used.
-.TP
-.B -r
-Reexport all directories. It synchronizes /var/lib/nfs/xtab
-with /etc/exports. It removes entries in /var/lib/nfs/xtab
-which are deleted from /etc/exports, and remove any entries from the
-kernel export table which are no longer valid.
-.TP
-.B -u
-Unexport one or more directories.
-.TP
-.B -f
-In 'new' mode, flush everything out of the kernels export table. Any
-clients that are active will get new entries added by
-.B mountd
-when they make their next request.
-.TP
-.B -v
-Be verbose. When exporting or unexporting, show what's going on. When
-displaying the current export list, also display the list of export
-options.
-.SH DISCUSSION
-.\" -------------------- Exporting Directories --------------------
-.SS Exporting Directories
-The first synopsis shows how to invoke the command when adding new
-entries to the export table. When using
-.BR "exportfs -a" ,
-all directories in
-.B exports(5)
-are added to
-.B xtab
-and the resulting list is pushed into the kernel.
-.P
-The
-.I host:/path
-argument specifies the directory to export along with the host or hosts to
-export it to. All formats described in
-.B exports(5)
-are supported; to export a directory to the world, simply specify
-.IR :/path .
-.P
-The export options for a particular host/directory pair derive from
-several sources. There is a set of default options which can be overridden by
-entries in
-.B /etc/exports
-(unless the
-.B -i
-option is given).
-In addition, the administrator may overide any options from these sources
-using the
-.B -o
-argument which takes a comma-separated list of options in the same fashion
-as one would specify them in
-.BR exports(5) .
-Thus,
-.B exportfs
-can also be used to modify the export options of an already exported
-directory.
-.P
-Modifications of the kernel export table used by
-.B nfsd(8)
-take place immediately after parsing the command line and updating the
-.B xtab
-file.
-.P
-The default export options are
-.BR sync,ro,root_squash,no_delay .
-.\" -------------------- Unexporting Directories ------------------
-.SS Unexporting Directories
-The third synopsis shows how to unexported a currently exported directory.
-When using
-.BR "exportfs -ua" ,
-all entries listed in
-.B xtab
-are removed from the kernel export tables, and the file is cleared. This
-effectively shuts down all NFS activity.
-.P
-To remove individial export entries, one can specify a
-.I host:/path
-pair. This deletes the specified entry from
-.B xtab
-and removes the corresponding kernel entry (if any).
-.P
-.\" -------------------- Dumping the Export Table -----------------
-.SS Dumping the Export Table
-Invoking
-.B exportfs
-without further options shows the current list of exported file systems.
-When giving the
-.B -v
-option, the list of flags pertaining to each export are shown in addition.
-.\" -------------------- EXAMPLES ---------------------------------
-.SH EXAMPLES
-The following adds all directories listed in
-.B /etc/exports to /var/lib/nfs/xtab
-and pushes the resulting export entries into the kernel:
-.P
-.nf
-.B "# exportfs -a
-.fi
-.P
-To export the
-.B /usr/tmp
-directory to host
-.BR djando ,
-allowing asynchronous writes, one would do this:
-.P
-.nf
-.B "# exportfs -o async django:/usr/tmp
-.fi
-.\" -------------------- DEPENDENCIES -----------------------------
-.SH DEPENDENCIES
-Exporting to IP networks, DNS and NIS domains does not enable clients
-from these groups to access NFS immediately; rather, these sorts of
-exports are hints to
-.B mountd(8)
-to grant any mount requests from these clients.
-This is usually not a big problem, because any existing mounts are preserved
-in
-.B rmtab
-across reboots.
-.P
-When unexporting a network or domain entry, any current exports to members
-of this group will be checked against the remaining valid exports and
-if they themselves are nolonger valid they will be removed.
-.P
-.\" -------------------- SEE ALSO --------------------------------
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR exports(5) ", " mountd(8)
-.\" -------------------- AUTHOR ----------------------------------
-.SH AUTHORS
-Olaf Kirch, <okir at monad.swb.de>
-.br
-Neil Brown, <neilb at cse.unsw.edu.au>
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/fdisk.8 b/raw/man8/fdisk.8
deleted file mode 100644
index e1bf926..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/fdisk.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,248 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1992, 1993 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" Copyright 1998 Andries E. Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.TH FDISK 8 "11 June 1998" "Linux 2.0" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-fdisk \- Partition table manipulator for Linux
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "fdisk [\-u] [\-b " sectorsize ]
-.BI "[\-C " cyls "] [\-H " heads "] [\-S " sects "] " device
-.sp
-.BI "fdisk \-l [\-u] [" "device ..." ]
-.sp
-.BI "fdisk \-s " "partition ..."
-.sp
-.BI "fdisk \-v
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Hard disks can be divided into one or more logical disks called
-.IR partitions .
-This division is described in the
-.I "partition table"
-found in sector 0 of the disk.
-
-In the BSD world one talks about `disk slices' and a `disklabel'.
-
-Linux needs at least one partition, namely for its root file system.
-It can use swap files and/or swap partitions, but the latter are more
-efficient. So, usually one will want a second Linux partition
-dedicated as swap partition.
-On Intel compatible hardware, the BIOS that boots the system
-can often only access the first 1024 cylinders of the disk.
-For this reason people with large disks often create a third partition,
-just a few MB large, typically mounted on
-.IR /boot ,
-to store the kernel image and a few auxiliary files needed at boot time,
-so as to make sure that this stuff is accessible to the BIOS.
-There may be reasons of security, ease of administration and backup,
-or testing, to use more than the minimum number of partitions.
-
-.B fdisk
-(in the first form of invocation)
-is a menu driven program for creation and manipulation of
-partition tables.
-It understands DOS type partition tables and BSD or SUN type disklabels.
-
-The
-.I device
-is usually one of the following:
-.br
-.nf
-.RS
-/dev/hda
-/dev/hdb
-/dev/sda
-/dev/sdb
-.RE
-.fi
-(/dev/hd[a-h] for IDE disks, /dev/sd[a-p] for SCSI disks,
-/dev/ed[a-d] for ESDI disks, /dev/xd[ab] for XT disks).
-A device name refers to the entire disk.
-
-The
-.I partition
-is a
-.I device
-name followed by a partition number. For example,
-.B /dev/hda1
-is the first partition on the first IDE hard disk in the system.
-Disks can have up to 15 partitions.
-See also
-.IR /usr/src/linux/Documentation/devices.txt .
-
-A BSD/SUN type disklabel can describe 8 partitions,
-the third of which should be a `whole disk' partition.
-Do not start a partition that actually uses its first sector
-(like a swap partition) at cylinder 0, since that will
-destroy the disklabel.
-
-An IRIX/SGI type disklabel can describe 16 partitions,
-the eleventh of which should be an entire `volume' partition,
-while the ninth should be labeled `volume header'.
-The volume header will also cover the partition table, i.e.,
-it starts at block zero and extends by default over five cylinders.
-The remaining space in the volume header may be used by header
-directory entries. No partitions may overlap with the volume header.
-Also do not change its type and make some file system on it, since
-you will lose the partition table. Use this type of label only when
-working with Linux on IRIX/SGI machines or IRIX/SGI disks under Linux.
-
-A DOS type partition table can describe an unlimited number
-of partitions. In sector 0 there is room for the description
-of 4 partitions (called `primary'). One of these may be an
-extended partition; this is a box holding logical partitions,
-with descriptors found in a linked list of sectors, each
-preceding the corresponding logical partitions.
-The four primary partitions, present or not, get numbers 1-4.
-Logical partitions start numbering from 5.
-
-In a DOS type partition table the starting offset and the size
-of each partition is stored in two ways: as an absolute number
-of sectors (given in 32 bits) and as a Cylinders/Heads/Sectors
-triple (given in 10+8+6 bits). The former is OK - with 512-byte
-sectors this will work up to 2 TB. The latter has two different
-problems. First of all, these C/H/S fields can be filled only
-when the number of heads and the number of sectors per track
-are known. Secondly, even if we know what these numbers should be,
-the 24 bits that are available do not suffice.
-DOS uses C/H/S only, Windows uses both, Linux never uses C/H/S.
-
-If possible,
-.B fdisk
-will obtain the disk geometry automatically. This is not
-necessarily the physical disk geometry (indeed, modern disks do not
-really have anything like a physical geometry, certainly not something
-that can be described in simplistic Cylinders/Heads/Sectors form),
-but is the disk geometry that MS-DOS uses for the partition table.
-
-Usually all goes well by default, and there are no problems if
-Linux is the only system on the disk. However, if the disk has
-to be shared with other operating systems, it is often a good idea
-to let an fdisk from another operating system make at least one
-partition. When Linux boots it looks at the partition table, and
-tries to deduce what (fake) geometry is required for good
-cooperation with other systems.
-
-Whenever a partition table is printed out, a consistency check is performed
-on the partition table entries. This check verifies that the physical and
-logical start and end points are identical, and that the partition starts
-and ends on a cylinder boundary (except for the first partition).
-
-Some versions of MS-DOS create a first partition which does not begin
-on a cylinder boundary, but on sector 2 of the first cylinder.
-Partitions beginning in cylinder 1 cannot begin on a cylinder boundary, but
-this is unlikely to cause difficulty unless you have OS/2 on your machine.
-
-A sync() and a BLKRRPART ioctl() (reread partition table from disk)
-are performed before exiting when the partition table has been updated.
-Long ago it used to be necessary to reboot after the use of fdisk.
-I do not think this is the case anymore - indeed, rebooting too quickly
-might cause loss of not-yet-written data. Note that both the kernel
-and the disk hardware may buffer data.
-
-.SH "DOS 6.x WARNING"
-
-The DOS 6.x FORMAT command looks for some information in the first
-sector of the data area of the partition, and treats this information
-as more reliable than the information in the partition table. DOS
-FORMAT expects DOS FDISK to clear the first 512 bytes of the data area
-of a partition whenever a size change occurs. DOS FORMAT will look at
-this extra information even if the /U flag is given -- we consider
-this a bug in DOS FORMAT and DOS FDISK.
-
-The bottom line is that if you use cfdisk or fdisk to change the size of a
-DOS partition table entry, then you must also use
-.B dd
-to zero the first 512 bytes of that partition before using DOS FORMAT to
-format the partition. For example, if you were using cfdisk to make a DOS
-partition table entry for /dev/hda1, then (after exiting fdisk or cfdisk
-and rebooting Linux so that the partition table information is valid) you
-would use the command "dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/hda1 bs=512 count=1" to zero
-the first 512 bytes of the partition.
-
-.B BE EXTREMELY CAREFUL
-if you use the
-.B dd
-command, since a small typo can make all of the data on your disk useless.
-
-For best results, you should always use an OS-specific partition table
-program. For example, you should make DOS partitions with the DOS FDISK
-program and Linux partitions with the Linux fdisk or Linux cfdisk program.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BI "\-b " sectorsize
-Specify the sector size of the disk. Valid values are 512, 1024, or 2048.
-(Recent kernels know the sector size. Use this only on old kernels or
-to override the kernel's ideas.)
-.TP
-.BI "\-C " cyls
-Specify the number of cylinders of the disk.
-I have no idea why anybody would want to do so.
-.TP
-.BI "\-H " heads
-Specify the number of heads of the disk. (Not the physical number,
-of course, but the number used for partition tables.)
-Reasonable values are 255 and 16.
-.TP
-.BI "\-S " sects
-Specify the number of sectors per track of the disk.
-(Not the physical number, of course, but the number used for
-partition tables.)
-A reasonable value is 63.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-List the partition tables for the specified devices and then exit.
-If no devices are given, those mentioned in
-.I /proc/partitions
-(if that exists) are used.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-When listing partition tables, give sizes in sectors instead
-of cylinders.
-.TP
-.BI "\-s " partition
-The
-.I size
-of the partition (in blocks) is printed on the standard output.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Print version number of
-.B fdisk
-program and exit.
-.SH BUGS
-There are several *fdisk programs around.
-Each has its problems and strengths.
-Try them in the order
-.BR cfdisk ,
-.BR fdisk ,
-.BR sfdisk .
-(Indeed,
-.B cfdisk
-is a beautiful program that has strict requirements on
-the partition tables it accepts, and produces high quality partition
-tables. Use it if you can.
-.B fdisk
-is a buggy program that does fuzzy things - usually it happens to
-produce reasonable results. Its single advantage is that it has
-some support for BSD disk labels and other non-DOS partition tables.
-Avoid it if you can.
-.B sfdisk
-is for hackers only - the user interface is terrible, but it is
-more correct than fdisk and more powerful than both fdisk and cfdisk.
-Moreover, it can be used noninteractively.)
-.PP
-The IRIX/SGI type disklabel is currently not supported by the kernel.
-Moreover, IRIX/SGI header directories are not fully supported yet.
-.PP
-The option `dump partition table to file' is missing.
-.\" .SH AUTHORS
-.\" A. V. Le Blanc (LeBlanc at mcc.ac.uk)
-.\" Bernhard Fastenrath (fasten at informatik.uni-bonn.de)
-.\" Jakub Jelinek (jj at sunsite.mff.cuni.cz)
-.\" Andreas Neuper (ANeuper at GUUG.de)
-.\" and many others.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR cfdisk (8),
-.BR mkfs (8),
-.BR parted (8),
-.BR sfdisk (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/fsck.8 b/raw/man8/fsck.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 10dde44..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/fsck.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,362 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.\" Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 by Theodore Ts'o. All Rights Reserved.
-.\" This file may be copied under the terms of the GNU Public License.
-.\"
-.TH FSCK 8 "July 2003" "E2fsprogs version 1.34"
-.SH NAME
-fsck \- check and repair a Linux file system
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B fsck
-[
-.B \-sACVRTNP
-]
-[
-.B \-t
-.I fstype
-]
-.I [filesys ... ]
-[\-\-] [
-.B fs-specific-options
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B fsck
-is used to check and optionally repair one or more Linux file systems.
-.I filesys
-can be a device name (e.g.
-.IR /dev/hdc1 ", " /dev/sdb2 ),
-a mount point (e.g.
-.IR / ", " /usr ", " /home ),
-or an ext2 label or UUID specifier (e.g.
-UUID=8868abf6-88c5-4a83-98b8-bfc24057f7bd or LABEL=root).
-Normally, the
-.B fsck
-program will try to run filesystems on different physical disk drives
-in parallel to reduce total amount time to check all of the filesystems.
-.PP
-If no filesystems are specified on the command line, and the
-.B \-A
-option is not specified,
-.B fsck
-will default to checking filesystems in
-.B /etc/fstab
-serial. This is equivalent to the
-.B \-As
-options.
-.PP
-The exit code returned by
-.B fsck
-is the sum of the following conditions:
-.br
-\ 0\ \-\ No errors
-.br
-\ 1\ \-\ File system errors corrected
-.br
-\ 2\ \-\ System should be rebooted
-.br
-\ 4\ \-\ File system errors left uncorrected
-.br
-\ 8\ \-\ Operational error
-.br
-\ 16\ \-\ Usage or syntax error
-.br
-\ 32\ \-\ Fsck canceled by user request
-.br
-\ 128\ \-\ Shared library error
-.br
-The exit code returned when multiple file systems are checked
-is the bit-wise OR of the exit codes for each
-file system that is checked.
-.PP
-In actuality,
-.B fsck
-is simply a front-end for the various file system checkers
-(\fBfsck\fR.\fIfstype\fR) available under Linux. The file
-system-specific checker is searched for in
-.I /sbin
-first, then in
-.I /etc/fs
-and
-.IR /etc ,
-and finally in the directories listed in the PATH environment
-variable. Please see the file system-specific checker manual pages for
-further details.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Serialize
-.B fsck
-operations. This is a good idea if you are checking multiple
-filesystems and the checkers are in an interactive mode. (Note:
-.BR e2fsck (8)
-runs in an interactive mode by default. To make
-.BR e2fsck (8)
-run in a non-interactive mode, you must either specify the
-.B \-p
-or
-.B \-a
-option, if you wish for errors to be corrected automatically, or the
-.B \-n
-option if you do not.)
-.TP
-.BI \-t " fslist"
-Specifies the type(s) of file system to be checked. When the
-.B \-A
-flag is specified, only filesystems that match
-.I fslist
-are checked. The
-.I fslist
-parameter is a comma-separated list of filesystems and options
-specifiers. All of the filesystems in this comma-separated list may be
-prefixed by a negation operator
-.RB ' no '
-or
-.RB ' ! ',
-which requests that only those filesystems not listed in
-.I fslist
-will be checked. If all of the filesystems in
-.I fslist
-are not prefixed by a negation operator, then only those filesystems
-listed
-in
-.I fslist
-will be checked.
-.sp
-Options specifiers may be included in the comma separated
-.IR fslist .
-They must have the format
-.BI opts= fs-option\fR.
-If an options specifier is present, then only filesystems which contain
-.I fs-option
-in their mount options field of
-.B /etc/fstab
-will be checked. If the options specifier is prefixed by a negation
-operator, then only
-those filesystems that do not have
-.I fs-option
-in their mount options field of
-.B /etc/fstab
-will be checked.
-.sp
-For example, if
-.B opts=ro
-appears in
-.IR fslist ,
-then only filesystems listed in
-.B /etc/fstab
-with the
-.B ro
-option will be checked.
-.sp
-For compatibility with Mandrake distributions whose boot scripts
-depend upon an unauthorized UI change to the
-.B fsck
-program, if a filesystem type of
-.B loop
-is found in
-.IR fslist ,
-it is treated as if
-.B opts=loop
-were specified as an argument to the
-.B \-t
-option.
-.sp
-Normally, the filesystem type is deduced by searching for
-.I filesys
-in the
-.I /etc/fstab
-file and using the corresponding entry.
-If the type can not be deduced, and there is only a single filesystem
-given as an argument to the
-.B \-t
-option,
-.B fsck
-will use the specified filesystem type. If this type is not
-available, then the default file system type (currently ext2) is used.
-.TP
-.B \-A
-Walk through the
-.I /etc/fstab
-file and try to check all file systems in one run. This option is
-typically used from the
-.I /etc/rc
-system initalization file, instead of multiple commands for checking
-a single file system.
-.sp
-The root filesystem will be checked first unless the
-.B \-P
-option is specified (see below). After that,
-filesystems will be checked in the order specified by the
-.I fs_passno
-(the sixth) field in the
-.I /etc/fstab
-file.
-Filesystems with a
-.I fs_passno
-value of 0 are skipped and are not checked at all. Filesystems with a
-.I fs_passno
-value of greater than zero will be checked in order,
-with filesystems with the lowest
-.I fs_passno
-number being checked first.
-If there are multiple filesystems with the same pass number,
-fsck will attempt to check them in parallel, although it will avoid running
-multiple filesystem checks on the same physical disk.
-.sp
-Hence, a very common configuration in
-.I /etc/fstab
-files is to set the root filesystem to have a
-.I fs_passno
-value of 1
-and to set all filesystems to have a
-.I fs_passno
-value of 2. This will allow
-.B fsck
-to automatically run filesystem checkers in parallel if it is advantageous
-to do so. System administrators might choose
-not to use this configuration if they need to avoid multiple filesystem
-checks running in parallel for some reason --- for example, if the
-machine in question is short on memory so that
-excessive paging is a concern.
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Display completion/progress bars for those filesystems checkers (currently
-only for ext2) which support them. Fsck will manage the filesystem checkers
-so that only one of them will display a progress bar at a time.
-.TP
-.B \-N
-Don't execute, just show what would be done.
-.TP
-.B \-P
-When the
-.B \-A
-flag is set, check the root filesystem in parallel with the other filesystems.
-This is not the safest thing in the world to do,
-since if the root filesystem is in doubt things like the
-.BR e2fsck (8)
-executable might be corrupted! This option is mainly provided
-for those sysadmins who don't want to repartition the root
-filesystem to be small and compact (which is really the right solution).
-.TP
-.B \-R
-When checking all file systems with the
-.B \-A
-flag, skip the root file system (in case it's already mounted read-write).
-.TP
-.B \-T
-Don't show the title on startup.
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Produce verbose output, including all file system-specific commands
-that are executed.
-.TP
-.B fs-specific-options
-Options which are not understood by
-.B fsck
-are passed to the filesystem-specific checker. These arguments
-.B must
-not take arguments, as there is no
-way for
-.B fsck
-to be able to properly guess which arguments take options and which
-don't.
-.IP
-Options and arguments which follow the
-.B \-\-
-are treated as file system-specific options to be passed to the
-file system-specific checker.
-.IP
-Please note that fsck is not
-designed to pass arbitrarily complicated options to filesystem-specific
-checkers. If you're doing something complicated, please just
-execute the filesystem-specific checker directly. If you pass
-.B fsck
-some horribly complicated option and arguments, and it doesn't do
-what you expect,
-.B don't bother reporting it as a bug.
-You're almost certainly doing something that you shouldn't be doing
-with
-.BR fsck.
-.PP
-Currently, standardized file system-specific options are somewhat in
-flux. Although not guaranteed, the following options are supported
-by most file system checkers:
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Automatically repair the file system without any questions (use
-this option with caution). Note that
-.BR e2fsck (8)
-supports
-.B \-a
-for backwards compatibility only. This option is mapped to
-.BR e2fsck 's
-.B \-p
-option which is safe to use, unlike the
-.B \-a
-option that most file system checkers support.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Interactively repair the filesystem (ask for confirmations). Note: It
-is generally a bad idea to use this option if multiple fsck's are being
-run in parallel. Also note that this is
-.BR e2fsck 's
-default behavior; it supports this option for backwards compatibility
-reasons only.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Theodore Ts'o (tytso at mit.edu)
-.SH FILES
-.IR /etc/fstab .
-.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
-The
-.B fsck
-program's behavior is affected by the following environment variables:
-.TP
-.B FSCK_FORCE_ALL_PARALLEL
-If this environment variable is set,
-.B fsck
-will attempt to run all of the specified filesystems in parallel,
-regardless of whether the filesystems appear to be on the same
-device. (This is useful for RAID systems or high-end storage systems
-such as those sold by companies such as IBM or EMC.)
-.TP
-.B FSCK_MAX_INST
-This environment variable will limit the maximum number of file system
-checkers that can be running at one time. This allows configurations
-which have a large number of disks to avoid
-.B fsck
-starting too many file system checkers at once, which might overload
-CPU and memory resources available on the system. If this value is
-zero, then an unlimited number of processes can be spawned. This is
-currently the default, but future versions of
-.B fsck
-may attempt to automatically determine how many file system checks can
-be run based on gathering accounting data from the operating system.
-.TP
-.B PATH
-The
-.B PATH
-environment variable is used to find file system checkers. A set of
-system directories are searched first:
-.BR /sbin ,
-.BR /sbin/fs.d ,
-.BR /sbin/fs ,
-.BR /etc/fs ,
-and
-.BR /etc .
-Then the set of directories found in the
-.B PATH
-environment are searched.
-.TP
-.B FSTAB_FILE
-This environment variable allows the system administrator
-to override the standard location of the
-.B /etc/fstab
-file. It is also use for developers who are testing
-.BR fsck .
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR fstab (5),
-.BR mkfs (8),
-.BR fsck.minix (8),
-.BR fsck.ext2 (8)
-or
-.BR e2fsck (8),
-.BR fsck.xiafs (8).
diff --git a/raw/man8/groupadd.8 b/raw/man8/groupadd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 7207973..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/groupadd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1991, Julianne Frances Haugh
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.TH GROUPADD 8
-.SH NAME
-groupadd \- Create a new group
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBgroupadd\fR [\fB-g\fI gid \fR[\fB-o\fR]] [\fB-r\fR] [\fB-f\fR] \fIgroup\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBgroupadd\fR command
-creates a new group account using the values specified on the
-command line and the default values from the system.
-The new group will be entered into the system files as needed.
-The options which apply to the \fBgroupadd\fR command are
-.IP "\fB-g \fIgid\fR"
-The numerical value of the group's ID.
-This value must be unique, unless the \fB-o\fR option is used.
-The value must be non-negative.
-The default is to use the smallest ID value greater than 500 and
-greater than every other group.
-Values between 0 and 499 are typically reserved for \fIsystem accounts\fR.
-.IP \fB-r\fR
-This flag instructs \fBgroupadd\fR to add a \fIsystem
-account\fR. The first available \fIgid\fR lower than 499 will be
-automatically selected unless the \fB-g\fR option is also given on the
-command line.
-.br
-This is an option added by Red Hat.
-.IP \fB-f\fR
-This is the \fIforce\fR flag. This will cause \fBgroupadd\fR to exit with an
-error when the group about to be added already exists on the
-system. If that is the case, the group won't be altered (or added
-again).
-.br
-This option also modifies the way \fB-g\fR option works. When you
-request a \fIgid\fR that it is not unique and you don't specify the \fB-o\fR
-option too, the group creation will fall back to the standard behavior
-(adding a group as if neither \fB-g\fR or \fB-o\fR options were
-specified).
-.br
-This is an option added by Red Hat.
-.SH FILES
-/etc/group \- group account information
-.br
-/etc/gshadow \- secure group account information
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chfn (1),
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR groupdel (8),
-.BR groupmod (8),
-.BR useradd (8),
-.BR userdel (8),
-.BR usermod (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julianne Frances Haugh (jockgrrl at ix.netcom.com)
diff --git a/raw/man8/groupdel.8 b/raw/man8/groupdel.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e6eec1..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/groupdel.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1991 - 1993, Julianne Frances Haugh
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.TH GROUPDEL 8
-.SH NAME
-groupdel \- Delete a group
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBgroupdel\fR \fIgroup\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBgroupdel\fR command modifies the system account files, deleting
-all entries that refer to \fIgroup\fR.
-The named group must exist.
-.PP
-You must manually check all filesystems to insure that no files remain
-with the named group as the file group ID.
-.SH CAVEATS
-You may not remove the primary group of any existing user.
-You must remove the user before you remove the group.
-.SH FILES
-/etc/group \- group information
-.br
-/etc/gshadow \- secure group information
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chfn (1),
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR groupadd (8),
-.BR groupmod (8),
-.BR useradd (8),
-.BR userdel (8),
-.BR usermod (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julianne Frances Haugh (jockgrrl at ix.netcom.com)
diff --git a/raw/man8/groupmod.8 b/raw/man8/groupmod.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ada6e8..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/groupmod.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1991, Julianne Frances Haugh
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.TH GROUPMOD 8
-.SH NAME
-groupmod \- Modify a group
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBgroupmod\fR [\fB-g\fI gid \fR[\fB-o\fR]] [\fB-n\fI group_name \fR]
-\fIgroup\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBgroupmod\fR command modifies the system account files to reflect
-the changes that are specified on the command line.
-The options which apply to the \fIgroupmod\fR command are
-.IP "\fB-g \fIgid\fR"
-The numerical value of the group's ID.
-This value must be unique, unless the \fB-o\fR option is used.
-The value must be non-negative.
-Values between 0 and 99 are typically reserved for system groups.
-Any files which the old group ID is the file group ID
-must have the file group ID changed manually.
-.IP "\fB-n \fIgroup_name\fR"
-The name of the group will be changed from \fIgroup\fR to
-\fIgroup_name\fR.
-.SH FILES
-/etc/group \- group information
-.br
-/etc/gshadow \- secure group information
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chfn (1),
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR groupadd (8),
-.BR groupdel (8),
-.BR useradd (8),
-.BR userdel (8),
-.BR usermod (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julianne Frances Haugh (jockgrrl at ix.netcom.com)
diff --git a/raw/man8/halt.8 b/raw/man8/halt.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a88ebb..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/halt.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-.\"{{{}}}
-.\"{{{ Title
-.TH HALT 8 "Nov 6, 2001" "" "Linux System Administrator's Manual"
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Name
-.SH NAME
-halt, reboot, poweroff \- stop the system.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Synopsis
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /sbin/halt
-.RB [ \-n ]
-.RB [ \-w ]
-.RB [ \-d ]
-.RB [ \-f ]
-.RB [ \-i ]
-.RB [ \-p ]
-.RB [ \-h ]
-.br
-.B /sbin/reboot
-.RB [ \-n ]
-.RB [ \-w ]
-.RB [ \-d ]
-.RB [ \-f ]
-.RB [ \-i ]
-.br
-.B /sbin/poweroff
-.RB [ \-n ]
-.RB [ \-w ]
-.RB [ \-d ]
-.RB [ \-f ]
-.RB [ \-i ]
-.RB [ \-h ]
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Description
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBHalt\fP notes that the system is being brought down in the file
-\fI/var/log/wtmp\fP, and then either tells the kernel to halt, reboot or
-poweroff the system.
-.PP
-If \fBhalt\fP or \fBreboot\fP is called when the system is
-\fInot\fP in runlevel \fB0\fP or \fB6\fP, in other words when it's running
-normally, \fBshutdown\fP will be invoked instead (with the \fB-h\fP
-or \fB-r\fP flag). For more info see the \fBshutdown\fP(8)
-manpage.
-.PP
-The rest of this manpage describes the behaviour in runlevels 0
-and 6, that is when the systems shutdown scripts are being run.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Options
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP \fB\-n\fP
-Don't sync before reboot or halt.
-.IP \fB\-w\fP
-Don't actually reboot or halt but only write the wtmp record
-(in the \fI/var/log/wtmp\fP file).
-.IP \fB\-d\fP
-Don't write the wtmp record. The \fB\-n\fP flag implies \fB\-d\fP.
-.IP \fB\-f\fP
-Force halt or reboot, don't call \fBshutdown\fP(8).
-.IP \fB\-i\fP
-Shut down all network interfaces just before halt or reboot.
-.IP \fB\-h\fP
-Put all harddrives on the system in standby mode just before halt or poweroff.
-.IP \fB\-p\fP
-When halting the system, do a poweroff. This is the default when halt is
-called as \fBpoweroff\fP.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Diagnostics
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-If you're not the superuser, you will get the message `must be superuser'.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Notes
-.SH NOTES
-Under older \fBsysvinit\fP releases , \fBreboot\fP and \fBhalt\fP should
-never be called directly. From release 2.74 on \fBhalt\fP and \fBreboot\fP
-invoke \fBshutdown\fP(8) if the system is not in runlevel 0 or 6. This
-means that if \fBhalt\fP or \fBreboot\fP cannot find out the current
-runlevel (for example, when \fI/var/run/utmp\fP hasn't been initialized
-correctly) \fBshutdown\fP will be called, which might not be what you want.
-Use the \fB-f\fP flag if you want to do a hard \fBhalt\fP or \fBreboot\fP.
-.PP
-The \fB-h\fP flag puts all harddisks in standby mode just before halt
-or poweroff. Right now this is only implemented for IDE drives. A side
-effect of putting the drive in standby mode is that the write cache
-on the disk is flushed. This is important for IDE drives, since the
-kernel doesn't flush the write-cache itself before poweroff.
-.PP
-The \fBhalt\fP program uses /proc/ide/hd* to find all IDE disk devices,
-which means that /proc needs to be mounted when \fBhalt\fP or
-\fBpoweroff\fP is called or the \fB-h\fP switch will do nothing.
-.PP
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Author
-.SH AUTHOR
-Miquel van Smoorenburg, miquels at cistron.nl
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ See also
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR shutdown (8),
-.BR init (8)
-.\"}}}
diff --git a/raw/man8/hdparm.8 b/raw/man8/hdparm.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f5ef58..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/hdparm.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,483 +0,0 @@
-.TH HDPARM 8 "Feb 2003" "Version 5.4"
-
-.SH NAME
-hdparm \- get/set hard disk parameters
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B hdparm
-[ flags ] [device] ..
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.BI hdparm
-provides a command line interface to various hard disk ioctls
-supported by the stock Linux ATA/IDE device driver subsystem.
-Some options may work correctly only with the latest kernels.
-For best results, compile hdparm with the include files from the latest kernel source code.
-.SH OPTIONS
-When no flags are given,
-.I -acdgkmnru
-is assumed.
-.TP
-.I -a
-Get/set sector count for filesystem read-ahead. This is used to improve
-performance in sequential reads of large files, by prefetching additional
-blocks in anticipation of them being needed by the running task.
-In the current kernel version (2.0.10) this has a default setting
-of 8 sectors (4KB). This value seems good for most purposes,
-but in a system where most file accesses are random seeks,
-a smaller setting might provide better performance.
-Also, many IDE drives also have a separate built-in read-ahead function,
-which alleviates the need for a filesystem read-ahead in many situations.
-.TP
-.I -A
-Disable/enable the IDE drive's read-lookahead feature (usually ON by default).
-.TP
-.I -b
-Get/set bus state.
-.TP
-.I -B
-Set Advanced Power Management feature, if the drive supports it. A low value
-means aggressive power management and a high value means better performance. A value of 255 will disable apm on the drive.
-.TP
-.I -c
-Query/enable (E)IDE 32-bit I/O support. A numeric parameter can be
-used to enable/disable 32-bit I/O support:
-Currently supported values include
-.I 0
-to disable 32-bit I/O support,
-.I 1
-to enable 32-bit data transfers, and
-.I 3
-to enable 32-bit data transfers with a special
-.I sync
-sequence required by many chipsets. The value
-.I 3
-works with nearly all
-32-bit IDE chipsets, but incurs slightly more overhead.
-Note that "32-bit" refers to data transfers across a PCI or VLB bus to the
-interface card only; all (E)IDE drives still have only a 16-bit connection
-over the ribbon cable from the interface card.
-.TP
-.I -C
-Check the current IDE power mode status, which will always be one of
-.B unknown
-(drive does not support this command),
-.B active/idle
-(normal operation),
-.B standby
-(low power mode, drive has spun down),
-or
-.B sleeping
-(lowest power mode, drive is completely shut down).
-The
-.B -S, -y, -Y,
-and
-.B -Z
-flags can be used to manipulate the IDE power modes.
-.TP
-.I -d
-Disable/enable the "using_dma" flag for this drive. This option now works
-with most combinations of drives and PCI interfaces which support DMA
-and which are known to the IDE driver.
-It is also a good idea to use the appropriate
-.I -X
-option in combination with
-.I -d1
-to ensure that the drive itself is programmed for the correct DMA mode,
-although most BIOSs should do this for you at boot time.
-Using DMA nearly always gives the best performance,
-with fast I/O throughput and low CPU usage.
-But there are at least a few configurations of chipsets and drives
-for which DMA does not make much of a difference, or may even slow
-things down (on really messed up hardware!). Your mileage may vary.
-.TP
-.I -D
-Enable/disable the on-drive defect management feature,
-whereby the drive firmware tries to automatically manage
-defective sectors by relocating them to "spare" sectors
-reserved by the factory for such.
-.TP
-.I -E
-Set cdrom speed. This is NOT necessary for regular operation,
-as the drive will automatically switch speeds on its own.
-But if you want to play with it, just supply a speed number
-after the option, usually a number like 2 or 4.
-.TP
-.I -f
-Sync and flush the buffer cache for the device on exit.
-This operation is also performed as part of the
-.I -t
-and
-.I -T
-timings.
-.TP
-.I -g
-Display the drive geometry (cylinders, heads, sectors),
-the size (in sectors) of the device,
-and the starting offset (in sectors) of the device from
-the beginning of the drive.
-.TP
-.I -h
-Display terse usage information (help).
-.TP
-.I -i
-Display the identification info that was obtained from the drive at
-.I boot time,
-if available.
-This is a feature of modern IDE drives,
-and may not be supported by older devices.
-The data returned may or may not be current, depending on activity
-since booting the system.
-However, the current multiple sector mode count is always shown.
-For a more detailed interpretation of the identification info,
-refer to
-.I AT Attachment Interface for Disk Drives
-(ANSI ASC X3T9.2 working draft, revision 4a, April 19/93).
-.TP
-.I -I
-Request identification info directly from the drive,
-which is displayed in a new expanded format with considerably
-more detail than with the older
-.I -i
-flag. There is a special "no seatbelts" variation on this option,
-.B -Istdin
-which cannot be combined with any other options, and
-which accepts a drive identification block as standard input
-instead of using a /dev/hd* parameter.
-The format of this block must be
-.I exactly
-the same as that found in the /proc/ide/*/hd*/identify "files".
-This variation is designed for use with "libraries" of drive
-identification information, and can also be used on ATAPI
-drives which may give media errors with the standard mechanism.
-.TP
-.I -k
-Get/set the keep_settings_over_reset flag for the drive.
-When this flag is set, the driver will preserve the
-.I -dmu
-options over a soft reset, (as done during the error recovery sequence).
-This flag defaults to off,
-to prevent drive reset loops which could be caused by combinations of
-.I -dmu
-settings. The
-.I -k
-flag should therefore only be set after one has achieved confidence in
-correct system operation with a chosen set of configuration settings.
-In practice, all that is typically necessary to test a configuration
-(prior to using -k) is to verify that the drive can be read/written,
-and that no error logs (kernel messages) are generated in the process
-(look in /var/adm/messages on most systems).
-.TP
-.I -K
-Set the drive's keep_features_over_reset flag. Setting this enables
-the drive to retain the settings for
-.I -APSWXZ
-over a soft reset (as done during the error recovery sequence).
-Not all drives support this feature.
-.TP
-.I -L
-Set the drive's doorlock flag. Setting this to
-.B 1
-will lock the door mechanism of some removeable hard drives
-(eg. Syquest, ZIP, Jazz..), and setting it to
-.B 0
-will unlock the door mechanism. Normally, Linux
-maintains the door locking mechanism automatically, depending on drive usage
-(locked whenever a filesystem is mounted). But on system shutdown, this can
-be a nuisance if the root partition is on a removeable disk, since the root
-partition is left mounted (read-only) after shutdown. So, by using this
-command to unlock the door
-.B after
-the root filesystem is remounted read-only, one can then remove the cartridge
-from the drive after shutdown.
-.TP
-.I -m
-Get/set sector count for multiple sector I/O on the drive. A setting of
-.B 0
-disables this feature. Multiple sector mode (aka IDE Block Mode), is a feature
-of most modern IDE hard drives, permitting the transfer of multiple sectors per
-I/O interrupt, rather than the usual one sector per interrupt. When this
-feature is enabled, it typically reduces operating system overhead for disk
-I/O by 30-50%. On many systems, it also provides increased data throughput
-of anywhere from 5% to 50%. Some drives, however
-(most notably the WD Caviar series),
-seem to run slower with multiple mode enabled. Your mileage may vary.
-Most drives support the minimum settings of
-2, 4, 8, or 16 (sectors). Larger settings may also be possible, depending on
-the drive. A setting of 16 or 32 seems optimal on many systems.
-Western Digital recommends lower settings of 4 to 8 on many of their drives,
-due tiny (32kB) drive buffers and non-optimized buffering algorithms.
-The
-.B -i
-flag can be used to find the maximum setting supported by an installed drive
-(look for MaxMultSect in the output).
-Some drives claim to support multiple mode, but lose data at some settings.
-Under rare circumstances, such failures can result in
-.B massive filesystem corruption.
-.TP
-.I -M
-Get/set Automatic Acoustic Management (AAM) setting. Most modern harddisk drives
-have the ability to speed down the head movements to reduce their noise output.
-The possible values are between 0 and 254. 128 is the most quiet (and therefore
-slowest) setting and 254 the fastest (and loudest). Some drives have ownly two
-levels (quiet / fast), while others may have different levels between 128 and 254.
-.B THIS FEATURE IS EXPERIMENTAL AND NOT WELL TESTED. USE AT YOUR OWN RISK.
-.TP
-.I -n
-Get or set the "ignore write errors" flag in the driver.
-Do NOT play with this without grokking the driver source code first.
-.TP
-.I -p
-Attempt to reprogram the IDE interface chipset for the specified PIO mode,
-or attempt to auto-tune for the "best" PIO mode supported by the drive.
-This feature is supported in the kernel for only a few "known" chipsets,
-and even then the support is iffy at best. Some IDE chipsets are unable
-to alter the PIO mode for a single drive, in which case this flag may cause
-the PIO mode for
-.I both
-drives to be set. Many IDE chipsets support either fewer or more than the
-standard six (0 to 5) PIO modes, so the exact speed setting that is actually
-implemented will vary by chipset/driver sophistication.
-.I Use with extreme caution!
-This feature includes zero protection for the unwary,
-and an unsuccessful outcome may result in
-.I severe filesystem corruption!
-.TP
-.I -P
-Set the maximum sector count for the drive's internal prefetch mechanism.
-Not all drives support this feature.
-.TP
-.I -q
-Handle the next flag quietly, supressing normal output. This is useful
-for reducing screen clutter when running from /etc/rc.c/rc.local.
-Not applicable to the
-.I -i
-or
-.I -v
-or
-.I -t
-or
-.I -T
-flags.
-.TP
-.I -Q
-Set tagged queue depth (1 or greater), or turn tagged queuing off (0).
-This only works with the newer 2.5.xx (or later) kernels, and only with
-the few drives that currently support it.
-.TP
-.I -r
-Get/set read-only flag for device. When set, write operations are not
-permitted on the device.
-.TP
-.I -R
-Register an IDE interface.
-.B Dangerous.
-See the
-.B -U
-option for more information.
-.TP
-.I -S
-Set the standby (spindown) timeout for the drive.
-This value is used by the drive to determine how long to wait (with no
-disk activity) before turning off the spindle motor to save power.
-Under such circumstances, the drive may take as long as 30 seconds
-to respond to a subsequent disk access, though most drives are much quicker.
-The encoding of the timeout value is somewhat peculiar. A value of zero
-means "off". Values from 1 to 240 specify multiples of 5 seconds,
-for timeouts from 5 seconds to 20 minutes.
-Values from 241 to 251 specify from 1 to 11 units of 30 minutes,
-for timeouts from 30 minutes to 5.5 hours. A value of 252 signifies
-a timeout of 21 minutes, 253 sets a vendor-defined timeout,
-and 255 is interpreted as 21 minutes plus 15 seconds.
-.TP
-.I -T
-Perform timings of cache reads for benchmark and comparison purposes.
-For meaningful results, this operation should be repeated 2-3 times
-on an otherwise inactive system (no other active processes) with at
-least a couple of megabytes of free memory. This displays the speed
-of reading directly from the Linux buffer cache without disk access.
-This measurement is essentially an indication of the throughput of the
-processor, cache, and memory of the system under test.
-If the
-.I -t
-flag is also specified, then a correction factor based on the outcome of
-.I -T
-will be incorporated into the result reported for the
-.I -t
-operation.
-.TP
-.I -t
-Perform timings of device reads for benchmark and comparison purposes.
-For meaningful results, this operation should be repeated 2-3 times on
-an otherwise inactive system (no other active processes) with at least a
-couple of megabytes of free memory. This displays the speed of reading
-through the buffer cache to the disk without any prior caching of data.
-This measurement is an indication of how fast the drive can sustain
-sequential data reads under Linux, without any filesystem overhead. To
-ensure accurate measurments, the buffer cache is flushed during the
-processing of
-.I -t
-using the BLKFLSBUF ioctl.
-If the
-.I -T
-flag is also specified, then a correction factor based on the outcome of
-.I -T
-will be incorporated into the result reported for the
-.I -t
-operation.
-.TP
-.I -u
-Get/set interrupt-unmask flag for the drive. A setting of
-.B 1
-permits the
-driver to unmask other interrupts during processing of a disk interrupt,
-which greatly improves Linux's responsiveness and eliminates "serial port
-overrun" errors.
-.B Use this feature with caution:
-some drive/controller combinations do
-not tolerate the increased I/O latencies possible when this feature is enabled,
-resulting in
-.B massive filesystem corruption.
-In particular,
-.B CMD-640B
-and
-.B RZ1000
-(E)IDE interfaces can be
-.B unreliable
-(due to a hardware flaw) when this option is used with kernel versions earlier
-than 2.0.13. Disabling the
-.B IDE prefetch
-feature of these interfaces (usually a BIOS/CMOS setting)
-provides a safe fix for the problem for use with earlier kernels.
-.TP
-.I -U
-Un-register an IDE interface.
-.B Dangerous.
-The companion for the
-.B -R
-option.
-Intended for use with hardware made specifically for hot-swapping (very rare!).
-Use with knowledge and
-.B extreme caution
-as this can easily hang or damage your system.
-The hdparm source distribution includes a 'contrib' directory with
-some user-donated scripts for hot-swapping on the UltraBay of a ThinkPad 600E.
-Use at your own risk.
-.TP
-.I -v
-Display all settings, except -i (same as -acdgkmnru for IDE, -gr for SCSI or
--adgr for XT). This is also the default behaviour when no flags are specified.
-.TP
-.I -w
-Perform a device reset (DANGEROUS). Do NOT use this option.
-It exists for unlikely situations where a reboot might otherwise be
-required to get a confused drive back into a useable state.
-.TP
-.I -W
-Disable/enable the IDE drive's write-caching feature
-(default state is undeterminable; manufacturer/model specific).
-.TP
-.I -x
-Tristate device for hotswap (DANGEROUS).
-.TP
-.I -X
-Set the IDE transfer mode for newer (E)IDE/ATA drives.
-This is typically used in combination with
-.I -d1
-when enabling DMA to/from a drive on a supported interface chipset, where
-.I -X mdma2
-is used to select multiword DMA mode2 transfers and
-.I -X sdma1
-is used to select simple mode 1 DMA transfers.
-With systems which support UltraDMA burst timings,
-.I -X udma2
-is used to select UltraDMA mode2 transfers (you'll need to prepare
-the chipset for UltraDMA beforehand).
-Apart from that, use of this flag is
-.I seldom necessary
-since most/all modern IDE drives default to their fastest PIO transfer mode
-at power-on. Fiddling with this can be both needless and risky.
-On drives which support alternate transfer modes,
-.I -X
-can be used to switch the mode of the drive
-.I only.
-Prior to changing the transfer mode, the IDE interface should be jumpered
-or programmed (see
-.I -p
-flag)
-for the new mode setting to prevent loss and/or corruption of data.
-.I Use this with extreme caution!
-For the PIO (Programmed Input/Output)
-transfer modes used by Linux, this value is simply the desired
-PIO mode number plus 8.
-Thus, a value of 09 sets PIO mode1, 10 enables PIO mode2,
-and 11 selects PIO mode3.
-Setting 00 restores the drive's "default" PIO mode, and 01 disables IORDY.
-For multiword DMA, the value used is the desired DMA mode number
-plus 32. for UltraDMA, the value is the desired UltraDMA mode number
-plus 64.
-.TP
-.I -y
-Force an IDE drive to immediately enter the low power consumption
-.B standby
-mode, usually causing it to spin down.
-The current power mode status can be checked using the
-.B -C
-flag.
-.TP
-.I -Y
-Force an IDE drive to immediately enter the lowest power consumption
-.B sleep
-mode, causing it to shut down completely. A hard or soft reset
-is required before the drive can be accessed again
-(the Linux IDE driver will automatically handle issuing a reset if/when needed).
-The current power mode status can be checked using the
-.B -C
-flag.
-.TP
-.I -z
-Force a kernel re-read of the partition table of the specified device(s).
-.TP
-.I -Z
-Disable the automatic power-saving function of certain Seagate drives
-(ST3xxx models?), to prevent them from idling/spinning-down
-at inconvenient times.
-.SH BUGS
-As noted above, the
-.B -m sectcount
-and
-.B -u 1
-options should be used with caution at first, preferably on a
-read-only filesystem. Most drives work well with these features, but
-a few drive/controller combinations are not 100% compatible. Filesystem
-corruption may result. Backup everything before experimenting!
-.PP
-Some options (eg. -r for SCSI) may not work with old kernels as
-necessary ioctl()'s were not supported.
-.PP
-Although this utility is intended primarily for use with (E)IDE hard disk
-devices, several of the options are also valid (and permitted) for use with
-SCSI hard disk devices and MFM/RLL hard disks with XT interfaces.
-.SH AUTHOR
-.B hdparm
-has been written by Mark Lord <mlord at pobox.com>, the primary developer and
-maintainer of the (E)IDE driver for Linux, with suggestions from many netfolk.
-.PP
-The disable Seagate auto-powersaving code
-is courtesy of Tomi Leppikangas(tomilepp at paju.oulu.fi).
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.B AT Attachment Interface for Disk Drives,
-ANSI ASC X3T9.2 working draft, revision 4a, April 19, 1993.
-.PP
-.B AT Attachment Interface with Extensions (ATA-2),
-ANSI ASC X3T9.2 working draft, revision 2f, July 26, 1994.
-.PP
-.B AT Attachment with Packet Interface - 5 (ATA/ATAPI-5),
-T13-1321D working draft, revision 3, February 29, 2000.
-.PP
-.B AT Attachment with Packet Interface - 6 (ATA/ATAPI-6),
-T13-1410D working draft, revision 3b, February 26, 2002.
-.PP
-.B Western Digital Enhanced IDE Implementation Guide,
-by Western Digital Corporation, revision 5.0, November 10, 1993.
-.PP
-.B Enhanced Disk Drive Specification,
-by Phoenix Technologies Ltd., version 1.0, January 25, 1994.
diff --git a/raw/man8/ifconfig.8 b/raw/man8/ifconfig.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 42d2830..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/ifconfig.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-.TH IFCONFIG 8 "14 August 2000" "net-tools" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-ifconfig \- configure a network interface
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B "ifconfig [interface]"
-.br
-.B "ifconfig interface [aftype] options | address ..."
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Ifconfig
-is used to configure the kernel-resident network interfaces. It is
-used at boot time to set up interfaces as necessary. After that, it
-is usually only needed when debugging or when system tuning is needed.
-.LP
-If no arguments are given,
-.B ifconfig
-displays the status of the currently active interfaces. If
-a single
-.B interface
-argument is given, it displays the status of the given interface
-only; if a single
-.B -a
-argument is given, it displays the status of all interfaces, even
-those that are down. Otherwise, it configures an interface.
-
-.SH Address Families
-If the first argument after the interface name is recognized as
-the name of a supported address family, that address family is
-used for decoding and displaying all protocol addresses. Currently
-supported address families include
-.B inet
-(TCP/IP, default),
-.B inet6
-(IPv6),
-.B ax25
-(AMPR Packet Radio),
-.B ddp
-(Appletalk Phase 2),
-.B ipx
-(Novell IPX) and
-.B netrom
-(AMPR Packet radio).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B interface
-The name of the interface. This is usually a driver name followed by
-a unit number, for example
-.B eth0
-for the first Ethernet interface.
-.TP
-.B up
-This flag causes the interface to be activated. It is implicitly
-specified if an address is assigned to the interface.
-.TP
-.B down
-This flag causes the driver for this interface to be shut down.
-.TP
-.B "[\-]arp"
-Enable or disable the use of the ARP protocol on this interface.
-.TP
-.B "[\-]promisc"
-Enable or disable the
-.B promiscuous
-mode of the interface. If selected, all packets on the network will
-be received by the interface.
-.TP
-.B "[\-]allmulti"
-Enable or disable
-.B all-multicast
-mode. If selected, all multicast packets on the network will be
-received by the interface.
-.TP
-.B "metric N"
-This parameter sets the interface metric.
-.TP
-.B "mtu N"
-This parameter sets the Maximum Transfer Unit (MTU) of an interface.
-.TP
-.B "dstaddr addr"
-Set the remote IP address for a point-to-point link (such as
-PPP). This keyword is now obsolete; use the
-.B pointopoint
-keyword instead.
-.TP
-.B "netmask addr"
-Set the IP network mask for this interface. This value defaults to the
-usual class A, B or C network mask (as derived from the interface IP
-address), but it can be set to any value.
-.TP
-.B "add addr/prefixlen"
-Add an IPv6 address to an interface.
-.TP
-.B "del addr/prefixlen"
-Remove an IPv6 address from an interface.
-.TP
-.B "tunnel aa.bb.cc.dd"
-Create a new SIT (IPv6-in-IPv4) device, tunnelling to the given destination.
-.TP
-.B "irq addr"
-Set the interrupt line used by this device. Not all devices can
-dynamically change their IRQ setting.
-.TP
-.B "io_addr addr"
-Set the start address in I/O space for this device.
-.TP
-.B "mem_start addr"
-Set the start address for shared memory used by this device. Only a
-few devices need this.
-.TP
-.B "media type"
-Set the physical port or medium type to be used by the device. Not
-all devices can change this setting, and those that can vary in what
-values they support. Typical values for
-.B type
-are
-.B 10base2
-(thin Ethernet),
-.B 10baseT
-(twisted-pair 10Mbps Ethernet),
-.B AUI
-(external transceiver) and so on. The special medium type of
-.B auto
-can be used to tell the driver to auto-sense the media. Again, not
-all drivers can do this.
-.TP
-.B "[-]broadcast [addr]"
-If the address argument is given, set the protocol broadcast
-address for this interface. Otherwise, set (or clear) the
-.B IFF_BROADCAST
-flag for the interface.
-.TP
-.B "[-]pointopoint [addr]"
-This keyword enables the
-.B point-to-point
-mode of an interface, meaning that it is a direct link between two
-machines with nobody else listening on it.
-.br
-If the address argument is also given, set the protocol address of
-the other side of the link, just like the obsolete
-.B dstaddr
-keyword does. Otherwise, set or clear the
-.B IFF_POINTOPOINT
-flag for the interface.
-.TP
-.B hw class address
-Set the hardware address of this interface, if the device driver
-supports this operation. The keyword must be followed by the
-name of the hardware class and the printable ASCII equivalent of
-the hardware address. Hardware classes currently supported include
-.B ether
-(Ethernet),
-.B ax25
-(AMPR AX.25),
-.B ARCnet
-and
-.B netrom
-(AMPR NET/ROM).
-.TP
-.B multicast
-Set the multicast flag on the interface. This should not normally be needed
-as the drivers set the flag correctly themselves.
-.TP
-.B address
-The IP address to be assigned to this interface.
-.TP
-.B txqueuelen length
-Set the length of the transmit queue of the device. It is useful to set this
-to small values for slower devices with a high latency (modem links, ISDN)
-to prevent fast bulk transfers from disturbing interactive traffic like
-telnet too much.
-.SH NOTES
-Since kernel release 2.2 there are no explicit interface statistics for
-alias interfaces anymore. The statistics printed for the original address
-are shared with all alias addresses on the same device. If you want per-address
-statistics you should add explicit accounting
-rules for the address using the
-.BR ipchains(8)
-command.
-.LP
-Interrupt problems with Ethernet device drivers fail with EAGAIN. See
-.I http://www.scyld.com/expert/irq-conflict.html
-for more information.
-.SH FILES
-.I /proc/net/socket
-.br
-.I /proc/net/dev
-.br
-.I /proc/net/if_inet6
-.SH BUGS
-While appletalk DDP and IPX addresses will be displayed they cannot be
-altered by this command.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-route(8), netstat(8), arp(8), rarp(8), ipchains(8)
-.SH AUTHORS
-Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje at uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
-.br
-Alan Cox, <Alan.Cox at linux.org>
-.br
-Phil Blundell, <Philip.Blundell at pobox.com>
-.br
-Andi Kleen
diff --git a/raw/man8/init.8 b/raw/man8/init.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 7885720..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/init.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,284 +0,0 @@
-.\"{{{}}}
-.\"{{{ Title
-.TH INIT 8 "18 April 2003" "" "Linux System Administrator's Manual"
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Name
-.SH NAME
-init, telinit \- process control initialization
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Synopsis
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /sbin/init
-.RB [ " -a " ]
-.RB [ " -s " ]
-.RB [ " -b " ]
-.RB [ " -z xxx " ]
-.RB [ " 0123456Ss " ]
-.br
-.B /sbin/telinit
-.RB [ " \-t sec " ]
-.RB [ " 0123456sSQqabcUu " ]
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Description
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.\"{{{ init
-.SS Init
-.B Init
-is the parent of all processes. Its primary role is to create processes
-from a script stored in the file \fB/etc/inittab\fP (see
-\fIinittab\fP(5)). This file usually has entries which cause \fBinit\fP
-to spawn \fBgetty\fPs on each line that users can log in. It also
-controls autonomous processes required by any particular system.
-.PP
-.\"{{{ Runlevels
-.SH RUNLEVELS
-A \fIrunlevel\fP is a software configuration of the system which allows
-only a selected group of processes to exist. The processes spawned by
-\fBinit\fP for each of these runlevels are defined in the
-\fB/etc/inittab\fP file. \fBInit\fP can be in one of eight runlevels:
-\fB0\(en6\fP and \fBS\fP or \fBs\fP. The runlevel is
-changed by having a privileged user run \fBtelinit\fP, which sends
-appropriate signals to \fBinit\fP, telling it which runlevel to change
-to.
-.PP
-Runlevels \fB0\fP, \fB1\fP, and \fB6\fP are reserved. Runlevel 0 is used to
-halt the system, runlevel 6 is used to reboot the system, and runlevel
-1 is used to get the system down into single user mode. Runlevel \fBS\fP
-is not really meant to be used directly, but more for the scripts that are
-executed when entering runlevel 1. For more information on this,
-see the manpages for \fBshutdown\fP(8) and \fBinittab\fP(5).
-.PP
-Runlevels 7-9 are also valid, though not really documented. This is
-because "traditional" Unix variants don't use them.
-In case you're curious, runlevels \fIS\fP and \fIs\fP are in fact the same.
-Internally they are aliases for the same runlevel.
-.\"}}}
-.PP
-.SH BOOTING
-After \fBinit\fP is invoked as the last step of the kernel boot sequence,
-it looks for the file \fB/etc/inittab\fP to see if there is an entry of the
-type \fBinitdefault\fP (see \fIinittab\fP(5)). The \fBinitdefault\fP entry
-determines the initial runlevel of the system. If there is no such
-entry (or no \fB/etc/inittab\fP at all), a runlevel must be
-entered at the system console.
-.PP
-Runlevel \fBS\fP or \fBs\fP bring the system to single user mode
-and do not require an \fB/etc/inittab\fP file. In single user mode,
-a root shell is opened on \fB/dev/console\fP.
-.PP
-When entering single user mode, \fBinit\fP initializes the consoles
-\fBstty\fP settings to sane values. Clocal mode is set. Hardware
-speed and handshaking are not changed.
-.PP
-When entering a multi-user mode for the first time, \fBinit\fP performs the
-\fBboot\fP and \fBbootwait\fP entries to allow file systems to be
-mounted before users can log in. Then all entries matching the runlevel
-are processed.
-.PP
-When starting a new process, \fBinit\fP first checks whether the file
-\fI/etc/initscript\fP exists. If it does, it uses this script to
-start the process.
-.PP
-Each time a child terminates, \fBinit\fP records the fact and the reason
-it died in \fB/var/run/utmp\fP and \fB/var/log/wtmp\fP,
-provided that these files exist.
-.SH CHANGING RUNLEVELS
-After it has spawned all of the processes specified, \fBinit\fP waits
-for one of its descendant processes to die, a powerfail signal, or until
-it is signaled by \fBtelinit\fP to change the system's runlevel.
-When one of the above three conditions occurs, it re-examines
-the \fB/etc/inittab\fP file. New entries can be added to this file at
-any time. However, \fBinit\fP still waits for one of the above three
-conditions to occur. To provide for an instantaneous response, the
-\fBtelinit Q\fP or \fBq\fP command can wake up \fBinit\fP to re-examine the
-\fB/etc/inittab\fP file.
-.PP
-If \fBinit\fP is not in single user mode and receives a powerfail
-signal (SIGPWR), it reads the file \fB/etc/powerstatus\fP. It then starts
-a command based on the contents of this file:
-.IP F(AIL)
-Power is failing, UPS is providing the power. Execute the \fBpowerwait\fP
-and \fBpowerfail\fP entries.
-.IP O(K)
-The power has been restored, execute the \fBpowerokwait\fP entries.
-.IP L(OW)
-The power is failing and the UPS has a low battery. Execute the
-\fBpowerfailnow\fP entries.
-.PP
-If /etc/powerstatus doesn't exist or contains anything else then the
-letters \fBF\fP, \fBO\fP or \fBL\fP, init will behave as if it has read
-the letter \fBF\fP.
-.PP
-Usage of \fBSIGPWR\fP and \fB/etc/powerstatus\fP is discouraged. Someone
-wanting to interact with \fBinit\fP should use the \fB/dev/initctl\fP
-control channel - see the source code of the \fBsysvinit\fP package
-for more documentation about this.
-.PP
-When \fBinit\fP is requested to change the runlevel, it sends the
-warning signal \s-1\fBSIGTERM\fP\s0 to all processes that are undefined
-in the new runlevel. It then waits 5 seconds before forcibly
-terminating these processes via the \s-1\fBSIGKILL\fP\s0 signal.
-Note that \fBinit\fP assumes that all these processes (and their
-descendants) remain in the same process group which \fBinit\fP
-originally created for them. If any process changes its process group
-affiliation it will not receive these signals. Such processes need to
-be terminated separately.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ telinit
-.SH TELINIT
-\fB/sbin/telinit\fP is linked to \fB/sbin/init\fP. It takes a
-one-character argument and signals \fBinit\fP to perform the appropriate
-action. The following arguments serve as directives to
-\fBtelinit\fP:
-.IP "\fB0\fP,\fB1\fP,\fB2\fP,\fB3\fP,\fB4\fP,\fB5\fP or \fB6\fP"
-tell \fBinit\fP to switch to the specified run level.
-.IP \fBa\fP,\fBb\fP,\fBc\fP
-tell \fBinit\fP to process only those \fB/etc/inittab\fP file
-entries having runlevel \fBa\fP,\fBb\fP or \fBc\fP.
-.IP "\fBQ\fP or \fBq\fP"
-tell \fBinit\fP to re-examine the \fB/etc/inittab\fP file.
-.IP "\fBS\fP or \fBs\fP"
-tell \fBinit\fP to switch to single user mode.
-.IP "\fBU\fP or \fBu\fP"
-tell \fBinit\fP to re-execute itself (preserving the state). No re-examining of
-\fB/etc/inittab\fP file happens. Run level should be one of \fBSs12345\fP,
-otherwise request would be silently ignored.
-.PP
-\fBtelinit\fP can also tell \fBinit\fP how long it should wait
-between sending processes the SIGTERM and SIGKILL signals. The default
-is 5 seconds, but this can be changed with the \fB-t sec\fP option.
-.PP
-\fBtelinit\fP can be invoked only by users with appropriate
-privileges.
-.PP
-The \fBinit\fP binary checks if it is \fBinit\fP or \fBtelinit\fP by looking
-at its \fIprocess id\fP; the real \fBinit\fP's process id is always \fB1\fP.
-From this it follows that instead of calling \fBtelinit\fP one can also
-just use \fBinit\fP instead as a shortcut.
-.\"}}}
-.\"}}}
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-\fBInit\fP sets the following environment variables for all its children:
-.IP \fBPATH\fP
-\fI/usr/local/sbin:/sbin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/usr/bin\fP
-.IP \fBINIT_VERSION\fP
-As the name says. Useful to determine if a script runs directly from \fBinit\fP.
-.IP \fBRUNLEVEL\fP
-The current system runlevel.
-.IP \fBPREVLEVEL\fP
-The previous runlevel (useful after a runlevel switch).
-.IP \fBCONSOLE\fP
-The system console. This is really inherited from the kernel; however
-if it is not set \fBinit\fP will set it to \fB/dev/console\fP by default.
-.SH BOOTFLAGS
-It is possible to pass a number of flags to \fBinit\fP from the
-boot monitor (eg. LILO). \fBInit\fP accepts the following flags:
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -s, S, single
-Single user mode boot. In this mode \fI/etc/inittab\fP is
-examined and the bootup rc scripts are usually run before
-the single user mode shell is started.
-.PP
-.TP 0.5i
-.B 1-5
-Runlevel to boot into.
-.PP
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -b, emergency
-Boot directly into a single user shell without running any
-other startup scripts.
-.PP
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -a, auto
-The LILO boot loader adds the word "auto" to the command line if it
-booted the kernel with the default command line (without user intervention).
-If this is found \fBinit\fP sets the "AUTOBOOT" environment
-variable to "yes". Note that you cannot use this for any security
-measures - of course the user could specify "auto" or \-a on the
-command line manually.
-.PP
-.TP 0.5i
-.B -z xxx
-The argument to -z is ignored. You can use this to expand the command
-line a bit, so that it takes some more space on the stack. \fBInit\fP
-can then manipulate the command line so that \fBps\fP(1) shows
-the current runlevel.
-.PP
-.SH INTERFACE
-Init listens on a \fIfifo\fP in /dev, \fI/dev/initctl\fP, for messages.
-\fBTelinit\fP uses this to communicate with init. The interface is not
-very well documented or finished. Those interested should study the
-\fIinitreq.h\fP file in the \fIsrc/\fP subdirectory of the \fBinit\fP
-source code tar archive.
-.SH SIGNALS
-Init reacts to several signals:
-.TP 0.5i
-.B SIGHUP
-Has the same effect as \fBtelinit q\fP.
-.PP
-.TP 0.5i
-.B SIGUSR1
-On receipt of this signals, init closes and re-opens its control fifo,
-\fB/dev/initctl\fP. Useful for bootscripts when /dev is remounted.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B SIGINT
-Normally the kernel sends this signal to init when CTRL-ALT-DEL is
-pressed. It activates the \fIctrlaltdel\fP action.
-.TP 0.5i
-.B SIGWINCH
-The kernel sends this signal when the \fIKeyboardSignal\fP key is hit.
-It activates the \fIkbrequest\fP action.
-\"{{{ Conforming to
-.SH CONFORMING TO
-\fBInit\fP is compatible with the System V init. It works closely
-together with the scripts in the directories
-\fI/etc/init.d\fP and \fI/etc/rc{runlevel}.d\fP.
-If your system uses this convention, there should be a \fIREADME\fP
-file in the directory \fI/etc/init.d\fP explaining how these scripts work.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Files
-.SH FILES
-.nf
-/etc/inittab
-/etc/initscript
-/dev/console
-/var/run/utmp
-/var/log/wtmp
-/dev/initctl
-.fi
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Warnings
-.SH WARNINGS
-\fBInit\fP assumes that processes and descendants of processes
-remain in the same process group which was originally created
-for them. If the processes change their group, \fBinit\fP can't
-kill them and you may end up with two processes reading from one
-terminal line.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Diagnostics
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-If \fBinit\fP finds that it is continuously respawning an entry
-more than 10 times in 2 minutes, it will assume that there is an error
-in the command string, generate an error message on the system console,
-and refuse to respawn this entry until either 5 minutes has elapsed or
-it receives a signal. This prevents it from eating up system resources
-when someone makes a typographical error in the \fB/etc/inittab\fP file
-or the program for the entry is removed.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Author
-.SH AUTHOR
-Miquel van Smoorenburg (miquels at cistron.nl), initial manual
-page by Michael Haardt (u31b3hs at pool.informatik.rwth-aachen.de).
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ See also
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR getty (1),
-.BR login (1),
-.BR sh (1),
-.BR runlevel (8),
-.BR shutdown(8),
-.BR kill (1),
-.BR inittab (5),
-.BR initscript (5),
-.BR utmp (5)
-.\"}}}
diff --git a/raw/man8/iptables-restore.8 b/raw/man8/iptables-restore.8
deleted file mode 100644
index e2649e5..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/iptables-restore.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,49 +0,0 @@
-.TH IPTABLES-RESTORE 8 "Jan 04, 2001" "" ""
-.\"
-.\" Man page written by Harald Welte <laforge at gnumonks.org>
-.\" It is based on the iptables man page.
-.\"
-.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-.\" (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-.\" Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-.\"
-.\"
-.SH NAME
-iptables-restore \- Restore IP Tables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BR "iptables-restore " "[-c] [-n]"
-.br
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-.B iptables-restore
-is used to restore IP Tables from data specified on STDIN. Use
-I/O redirection provided by your shell to read from a file
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-counters\fR
-restore the values of all packet and byte counters
-.TP
-\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-noflush\fR
-.TP
-don't flush the previous contents of the table. If not specified,
-.B iptables-restore
-flushes (deletes) all previous contents of the respective IP Table.
-.SH BUGS
-None known as of iptables-1.2.1 release
-.SH AUTHOR
-Harald Welte <laforge at gnumonks.org>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR iptables-save "(8), " iptables "(8) "
-.PP
-The iptables-HOWTO, which details more iptables usage, the NAT-HOWTO,
-which details NAT, and the netfilter-hacking-HOWTO which details the
-internals.
diff --git a/raw/man8/iptables-save.8 b/raw/man8/iptables-save.8
deleted file mode 100644
index f9c7d65..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/iptables-save.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-.TH IPTABLES-SAVE 8 "Jan 04, 2001" "" ""
-.\"
-.\" Man page written by Harald Welte <laforge at gnumonks.org>
-.\" It is based on the iptables man page.
-.\"
-.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-.\" (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-.\" Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-.\"
-.\"
-.SH NAME
-iptables-save \- Save IP Tables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BR "iptables-save " "[-c] [-t table]"
-.br
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-.B iptables-save
-is used to dump the contents of an IP Table in easily parseable format
-to STDOUT. Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
-.TP
-\fB\-c\fR, \fB\-\-counters\fR
-include the current values of all packet and byte counters in the output
-.TP
-\fB\-t\fR, \fB\-\-table\fR \fBtablename\fR
-.TP
-restrict output to only one table. If not specified, output includes all
-available tables.
-.SH BUGS
-None known as of iptables-1.2.1 release
-.SH AUTHOR
-Harald Welte <laforge at gnumonks.org>
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR iptables-restore "(8), " iptables "(8) "
-.PP
-The iptables-HOWTO, which details more iptables usage, the NAT-HOWTO,
-which details NAT, and the netfilter-hacking-HOWTO which details the
-internals.
diff --git a/raw/man8/iptables.8 b/raw/man8/iptables.8
deleted file mode 100644
index c1039fb..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/iptables.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1044 +0,0 @@
-.TH IPTABLES 8 "Mar 09, 2002" "" ""
-.\"
-.\" Man page written by Herve Eychenne <rv at wallfire.org> (May 1999)
-.\" It is based on ipchains page.
-.\" TODO: add a word for protocol helpers (FTP, IRC, SNMP-ALG)
-.\"
-.\" ipchains page by Paul ``Rusty'' Russell March 1997
-.\" Based on the original ipfwadm man page by Jos Vos <jos at xos.nl>
-.\"
-.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
-.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
-.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
-.\" (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-.\" along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
-.\" Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
-.\"
-.\"
-.SH NAME
-iptables \- administration tool for IPv4 packet filtering and NAT
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -[ADC] " "chain rule-specification [options]"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -I " "chain [rulenum] rule-specification [options]"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -R " "chain rulenum rule-specification [options]"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -D " "chain rulenum [options]"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -[LFZ] " "[chain] [options]"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -N " "chain"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -X " "[chain]"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -P " "chain target [options]"
-.br
-.BR "iptables [-t table] -E " "old-chain-name new-chain-name"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Iptables
-is used to set up, maintain, and inspect the tables of IP packet
-filter rules in the Linux kernel. Several different tables
-may be defined. Each table contains a number of built-in
-chains and may also contain user-defined chains.
-
-Each chain is a list of rules which can match a set of packets. Each
-rule specifies what to do with a packet that matches. This is called
-a `target', which may be a jump to a user-defined chain in the same
-table.
-
-.SH TARGETS
-A firewall rule specifies criteria for a packet, and a target. If the
-packet does not match, the next rule in the chain is the examined; if
-it does match, then the next rule is specified by the value of the
-target, which can be the name of a user-defined chain or one of the
-special values
-.IR ACCEPT ,
-.IR DROP ,
-.IR QUEUE ,
-or
-.IR RETURN .
-.PP
-.I ACCEPT
-means to let the packet through.
-.I DROP
-means to drop the packet on the floor.
-.I QUEUE
-means to pass the packet to userspace (if supported by the kernel).
-.I RETURN
-means stop traversing this chain and resume at the next rule in the
-previous (calling) chain. If the end of a built-in chain is reached
-or a rule in a built-in chain with target
-.I RETURN
-is matched, the target specified by the chain policy determines the
-fate of the packet.
-.SH TABLES
-There are currently three independent tables (which tables are present
-at any time depends on the kernel configuration options and which
-modules are present).
-.TP
-.BI "-t, --table " "table"
-This option specifies the packet matching table which the command
-should operate on. If the kernel is configured with automatic module
-loading, an attempt will be made to load the appropriate module for
-that table if it is not already there.
-
-The tables are as follows:
-.TP
-.B "filter"
-This is the default table (if no -t option is passed). It contains
-the built-in chains
-.B INPUT
-(for packets coming into the box itself),
-.B FORWARD
-(for packets being routed through the box), and
-.B OUTPUT
-(for locally-generated packets).
-.TP
-.B "nat"
-This table is consulted when a packet that creates a new
-connection is encountered. It consists of three built-ins:
-.B PREROUTING
-(for altering packets as soon as they come in),
-.B OUTPUT
-(for altering locally-generated packets before routing), and
-.B POSTROUTING
-(for altering packets as they are about to go out).
-.TP
-.B "mangle"
-This table is used for specialized packet alteration. Until kernel
-2.4.17 it had two built-in chains:
-.B PREROUTING
-(for altering incoming packets before routing) and
-.B OUTPUT
-(for altering locally-generated packets before routing).
-Since kernel 2.4.18, three other built-in chains are also supported:
-.B INPUT
-(for packets coming into the box itself),
-.B FORWARD
-(for altering packets being routed through the box), and
-.B POSTROUTING
-(for altering packets as they are about to go out).
-.SH OPTIONS
-The options that are recognized by
-.B iptables
-can be divided into several different groups.
-.SS COMMANDS
-These options specify the specific action to perform. Only one of them
-can be specified on the command line unless otherwise specified
-below. For all the long versions of the command and option names, you
-need to use only enough letters to ensure that
-.B iptables
-can differentiate it from all other options.
-.TP
-.BI "-A, --append " "chain rule-specification"
-Append one or more rules to the end of the selected chain.
-When the source and/or destination names resolve to more than one
-address, a rule will be added for each possible address combination.
-.TP
-.BI "-D, --delete " "chain rule-specification"
-.ns
-.TP
-.BI "-D, --delete " "chain rulenum"
-Delete one or more rules from the selected chain. There are two
-versions of this command: the rule can be specified as a number in the
-chain (starting at 1 for the first rule) or a rule to match.
-.TP
-.BR "-I, --insert " "\fIchain\fP [\fIrulenum\fP] \fIrule-specification\fP"
-Insert one or more rules in the selected chain as the given rule
-number. So, if the rule number is 1, the rule or rules are inserted
-at the head of the chain. This is also the default if no rule number
-is specified.
-.TP
-.BI "-R, --replace " "chain rulenum rule-specification"
-Replace a rule in the selected chain. If the source and/or
-destination names resolve to multiple addresses, the command will
-fail. Rules are numbered starting at 1.
-.TP
-.BR "-L, --list " "[\fIchain\fP]"
-List all rules in the selected chain. If no chain is selected, all
-chains are listed. As every other iptables command, it applies to the
-specified table (filter is the default), so NAT rules get listed by
-.br
- iptables -t nat -n -L
-.br
-Please note that it is often used with the
-.B -n
-option, in order to avoid long reverse DNS lookups.
-It is legal to specify the
-.B -Z
-(zero) option as well, in which case the chain(s) will be atomically
-listed and zeroed. The exact output is affected by the other
-arguments given. The exact rules are suppressed until you use
-.br
- iptables -L -v
-.br
-.TP
-.BR "-F, --flush " "[\fIchain\fP]"
-Flush the selected chain (all the chains in the table if none is given).
-This is equivalent to deleting all the rules one by one.
-.TP
-.BR "-Z, --zero " "[\fIchain\fP]"
-Zero the packet and byte counters in all chains. It is legal to
-specify the
-.B "-L, --list"
-(list) option as well, to see the counters immediately before they are
-cleared. (See above.)
-.TP
-.BI "-N, --new-chain " "chain"
-Create a new user-defined chain by the given name. There must be no
-target of that name already.
-.TP
-.BR "-X, --delete-chain " "[\fIchain\fP]"
-Delete the optional user-defined chain specified. There must be no references
-to the chain. If there are, you must delete or replace the referring
-rules before the chain can be deleted. If no argument is given, it
-will attempt to delete every non-builtin chain in the table.
-.TP
-.BI "-P, --policy " "chain target"
-Set the policy for the chain to the given target. See the section
-.B TARGETS
-for the legal targets. Only built-in (non-user-defined) chains can have
-policies, and neither built-in nor user-defined chains can be policy
-targets.
-.TP
-.BI "-E, --rename-chain " "old-chain new-chain"
-Rename the user specified chain to the user supplied name. This is
-cosmetic, and has no effect on the structure of the table.
-.TP
-.B -h
-Help.
-Give a (currently very brief) description of the command syntax.
-.SS PARAMETERS
-The following parameters make up a rule specification (as used in the
-add, delete, insert, replace and append commands).
-.TP
-.BR "-p, --protocol " "[!] \fIprotocol\fP"
-The protocol of the rule or of the packet to check.
-The specified protocol can be one of
-.IR tcp ,
-.IR udp ,
-.IR icmp ,
-or
-.IR all ,
-or it can be a numeric value, representing one of these protocols or a
-different one. A protocol name from /etc/protocols is also allowed.
-A "!" argument before the protocol inverts the
-test. The number zero is equivalent to
-.IR all .
-Protocol
-.I all
-will match with all protocols and is taken as default when this
-option is omitted.
-.TP
-.BR "-s, --source " "[!] \fIaddress\fP[/\fImask\fP]"
-Source specification.
-.I Address
-can be either a network name, a hostname (please note that specifying
-any name to be resolved with a remote query such as DNS is a really bad idea),
-a network IP address (with /mask), or a plain IP address.
-The
-.I mask
-can be either a network mask or a plain number,
-specifying the number of 1's at the left side of the network mask.
-Thus, a mask of
-.I 24
-is equivalent to
-.IR 255.255.255.0 .
-A "!" argument before the address specification inverts the sense of
-the address. The flag
-.B --src
-is an alias for this option.
-.TP
-.BR "-d, --destination " "[!] \fIaddress\fP[/\fImask\fP]"
-Destination specification.
-See the description of the
-.B -s
-(source) flag for a detailed description of the syntax. The flag
-.B --dst
-is an alias for this option.
-.TP
-.BI "-j, --jump " "target"
-This specifies the target of the rule; i.e., what to do if the packet
-matches it. The target can be a user-defined chain (other than the
-one this rule is in), one of the special builtin targets which decide
-the fate of the packet immediately, or an extension (see
-.B EXTENSIONS
-below). If this
-option is omitted in a rule, then matching the rule will have no
-effect on the packet's fate, but the counters on the rule will be
-incremented.
-.TP
-.BR "-i, --in-interface " "[!] \fIname\fP"
-Name of an interface via which a packet is going to be received (only for
-packets entering the
-.BR INPUT ,
-.B FORWARD
-and
-.B PREROUTING
-chains). When the "!" argument is used before the interface name, the
-sense is inverted. If the interface name ends in a "+", then any
-interface which begins with this name will match. If this option is
-omitted, any interface name will match.
-.TP
-.BR "-o, --out-interface " "[!] \fIname\fP"
-Name of an interface via which a packet is going to be sent (for packets
-entering the
-.BR FORWARD ,
-.B OUTPUT
-and
-.B POSTROUTING
-chains). When the "!" argument is used before the interface name, the
-sense is inverted. If the interface name ends in a "+", then any
-interface which begins with this name will match. If this option is
-omitted, any interface name will match.
-.TP
-.B "[!] " "-f, --fragment"
-This means that the rule only refers to second and further fragments
-of fragmented packets. Since there is no way to tell the source or
-destination ports of such a packet (or ICMP type), such a packet will
-not match any rules which specify them. When the "!" argument
-precedes the "-f" flag, the rule will only match head fragments, or
-unfragmented packets.
-.TP
-.BI "-c, --set-counters " "PKTS BYTES"
-This enables the administrator to initialize the packet and byte
-counters of a rule (during
-.B INSERT,
-.B APPEND,
-.B REPLACE
-operations).
-.SS "OTHER OPTIONS"
-The following additional options can be specified:
-.TP
-.B "-v, --verbose"
-Verbose output. This option makes the list command show the interface
-name, the rule options (if any), and the TOS masks. The packet and
-byte counters are also listed, with the suffix 'K', 'M' or 'G' for
-1000, 1,000,000 and 1,000,000,000 multipliers respectively (but see
-the
-.B -x
-flag to change this).
-For appending, insertion, deletion and replacement, this causes
-detailed information on the rule or rules to be printed.
-.TP
-.B "-n, --numeric"
-Numeric output.
-IP addresses and port numbers will be printed in numeric format.
-By default, the program will try to display them as host names,
-network names, or services (whenever applicable).
-.TP
-.B "-x, --exact"
-Expand numbers.
-Display the exact value of the packet and byte counters,
-instead of only the rounded number in K's (multiples of 1000)
-M's (multiples of 1000K) or G's (multiples of 1000M). This option is
-only relevant for the
-.B -L
-command.
-.TP
-.B "--line-numbers"
-When listing rules, add line numbers to the beginning of each rule,
-corresponding to that rule's position in the chain.
-.TP
-.B "--modprobe=command"
-When adding or inserting rules into a chain, use
-.B command
-to load any necessary modules (targets, match extensions, etc).
-.SH MATCH EXTENSIONS
-iptables can use extended packet matching modules. These are loaded
-in two ways: implicitly, when
-.B -p
-or
-.B --protocol
-is specified, or with the
-.B -m
-or
-.B --match
-options, followed by the matching module name; after these, various
-extra command line options become available, depending on the specific
-module. You can specify multiple extended match modules in one line,
-and you can use the
-.B -h
-or
-.B --help
-options after the module has been specified to receive help specific
-to that module.
-
-The following are included in the base package, and most of these can
-be preceded by a
-.B !
-to invert the sense of the match.
-.SS ah
-This module matches the SPIs in AH header of IPSec packets.
-.TP
-.BR "--ahspi " "[!] \fIspi\fP[:\fIspi\fP]"
-.SS conntrack
-This module, when combined with connection tracking, allows access to
-more connection tracking information than the "state" match.
-(this module is present only if iptables was compiled under a kernel
-supporting this feature)
-.TP
-.BI "--ctstate " "state"
-Where state is a comma separated list of the connection states to
-match. Possible states are
-.B INVALID
-meaning that the packet is associated with no known connection,
-.B ESTABLISHED
-meaning that the packet is associated with a connection which has seen
-packets in both directions,
-.B NEW
-meaning that the packet has started a new connection, or otherwise
-associated with a connection which has not seen packets in both
-directions, and
-.B RELATED
-meaning that the packet is starting a new connection, but is
-associated with an existing connection, such as an FTP data transfer,
-or an ICMP error.
-.B SNAT
-A virtual state, matching if the original source address differs from
-the reply destination.
-.B DNAT
-A virtual state, matching if the original destination differs from the
-reply source.
-.TP
-.BI "--ctproto " "proto"
-Protocol to match (by number or name)
-.TP
-.BI "--ctorigsrc " "[!] \fIaddress\fP[/\fImask\fP]"
-Match against original source address
-.TP
-.BI "--ctorigdst " "[!] \fIaddress\fP[/\fImask\fP]"
-Match against original destination address
-.TP
-.BI "--ctreplsrc " "[!] \fIaddress\fP[/\fImask\fP]"
-Match against reply source address
-.TP
-.BI "--ctrepldst " "[!] \fIaddress\fB[/\fImask\fP]"
-Match against reply destination address
-.TP
-.BI "--ctstatus " "[\fINONE|EXPECTED|SEEN_REPLY|ASSURED\fP][,...]"
-Match against internal conntrack states
-.TP
-.BI "--ctexpire " "\fItime\fP[\fI:time\fP]"
-Match remaining lifetime in seconds against given value
-or range of values (inclusive)
-.SS dscp
-This module matches the 6 bit DSCP field within the TOS field in the
-IP header. DSCP has superseded TOS within the IETF.
-.TP
-.BI "--dscp " "value"
-Match against a numeric (decimal or hex) value [0-32].
-.TP
-.BI "--dscp-class " "\fIDiffServ Class\fP"
-Match the DiffServ class. This value may be any of the
-BE, EF, AFxx or CSx classes. It will then be converted
-into it's according numeric value.
-.SS esp
-This module matches the SPIs in ESP header of IPSec packets.
-.TP
-.BR "--espspi " "[!] \fIspi\fP[:\fIspi\fP]"
-.SS helper
-This module matches packets related to a specific conntrack-helper.
-.TP
-.BI "--helper " "string"
-Matches packets related to the specified conntrack-helper.
-.TP
-string can be "ftp" for packets related to a ftp-session on default port.
-For other ports append -portnr to the value, ie. "ftp-2121".
-.br
-Same rules apply for other conntrack-helpers.
-.br
-.SS icmp
-This extension is loaded if `--protocol icmp' is specified. It
-provides the following option:
-.TP
-.BR "--icmp-type " "[!] \fItypename\fP"
-This allows specification of the ICMP type, which can be a numeric
-ICMP type, or one of the ICMP type names shown by the command
-.br
- iptables -p icmp -h
-.br
-.SS length
-This module matches the length of a packet against a specific value
-or range of values.
-.TP
-.BR "--length " "\fIlength\fP[:\fIlength\fP]"
-.SS limit
-This module matches at a limited rate using a token bucket filter.
-A rule using this extension will match until this limit is reached
-(unless the `!' flag is used). It can be used in combination with the
-.B LOG
-target to give limited logging, for example.
-.TP
-.BI "--limit " "rate"
-Maximum average matching rate: specified as a number, with an optional
-`/second', `/minute', `/hour', or `/day' suffix; the default is
-3/hour.
-.TP
-.BI "--limit-burst " "number"
-Maximum initial number of packets to match: this number gets
-recharged by one every time the limit specified above is not reached,
-up to this number; the default is 5.
-.SS mac
-.TP
-.BR "--mac-source " "[!] \fIaddress\fP"
-Match source MAC address. It must be of the form XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX.
-Note that this only makes sense for packets coming from an Ethernet device
-and entering the
-.BR PREROUTING ,
-.B FORWARD
-or
-.B INPUT
-chains.
-.SS mark
-This module matches the netfilter mark field associated with a packet
-(which can be set using the
-.B MARK
-target below).
-.TP
-.BR "--mark " "\fIvalue\fP[/\fImask\fP]"
-Matches packets with the given unsigned mark value (if a mask is
-specified, this is logically ANDed with the mask before the
-comparison).
-.SS multiport
-This module matches a set of source or destination ports. Up to 15
-ports can be specified. It can only be used in conjunction with
-.B "-p tcp"
-or
-.BR "-p udp" .
-.TP
-.BR "--source-ports " "\fIport\fP[,\fIport\fP[,\fIport\fP...]]"
-Match if the source port is one of the given ports. The flag
-.B --sports
-is a convenient alias for this option.
-.TP
-.BR "--destination-ports " "\fIport\fP[,\fIport\fP[,\fIport\fP...]]"
-Match if the destination port is one of the given ports. The flag
-.B --dports
-is a convenient alias for this option.
-.TP
-.BR "--ports " "\fIport\fP[,\fIport\fP[,\fIport\fP...]]"
-Match if the both the source and destination ports are equal to each
-other and to one of the given ports.
-.SS owner
-This module attempts to match various characteristics of the packet
-creator, for locally-generated packets. It is only valid in the
-.B OUTPUT
-chain, and even this some packets (such as ICMP ping responses) may
-have no owner, and hence never match.
-.TP
-.BI "--uid-owner " "userid"
-Matches if the packet was created by a process with the given
-effective user id.
-.TP
-.BI "--gid-owner " "groupid"
-Matches if the packet was created by a process with the given
-effective group id.
-.TP
-.BI "--pid-owner " "processid"
-Matches if the packet was created by a process with the given
-process id.
-.TP
-.BI "--sid-owner " "sessionid"
-Matches if the packet was created by a process in the given session
-group.
-.TP
-.BI "--cmd-owner " "name"
-Matches if the packet was created by a process with the given command name.
-(this option is present only if iptables was compiled under a kernel
-supporting this feature)
-.SS physdev
-This module matches on the bridge port input and output devices enslaved
-to a bridge device. This is only useful if the input device or output device
-is a bridge device. This module is a part of the infrastructure that enables
-a transparent bridging IP firewall and is only useful for kernel versions
-above version 2.5.44.
-.TP
-.B --physdev-in name
-Name of a bridge port via which a packet is received (only for
-packets entering the
-.BR INPUT ,
-.B FORWARD
-and
-.B PREROUTING
-chains). If the interface name ends in a "+", then any
-interface which begins with this name will match.
-.TP
-.B --physdev-out name
-Name of a bridge port via which a packet is going to be sent (for packets
-entering the
-.BR FORWARD ,
-.B OUTPUT
-and
-.B POSTROUTING
-chains). If the interface name ends in a "+", then any
-interface which begins with this name will match. Note that in the
-.BR nat " and " mangle
-.B OUTPUT
-chains one cannot match on the bridge output port, however one can in the
-.B "filter OUTPUT"
-chain.
-.SS pkttype
-This module matches the link-layer packet type.
-.TP
-.BI "--pkt-type " "[\fIunicast\fP|\fIbroadcast\fP|\fImulticast\fP]"
-.SS state
-This module, when combined with connection tracking, allows access to
-the connection tracking state for this packet.
-.TP
-.BI "--state " "state"
-Where state is a comma separated list of the connection states to
-match. Possible states are
-.B INVALID
-meaning that the packet is associated with no known connection,
-.B ESTABLISHED
-meaning that the packet is associated with a connection which has seen
-packets in both directions,
-.B NEW
-meaning that the packet has started a new connection, or otherwise
-associated with a connection which has not seen packets in both
-directions, and
-.B RELATED
-meaning that the packet is starting a new connection, but is
-associated with an existing connection, such as an FTP data transfer,
-or an ICMP error.
-.SS tcp
-These extensions are loaded if `--protocol tcp' is specified. It
-provides the following options:
-.TP
-.BR "--source-port " "[!] \fIport\fP[:\fIport\fP]"
-Source port or port range specification. This can either be a service
-name or a port number. An inclusive range can also be specified,
-using the format
-.IR port : port .
-If the first port is omitted, "0" is assumed; if the last is omitted,
-"65535" is assumed.
-If the second port greater then the first they will be swapped.
-The flag
-.B --sport
-is a convenient alias for this option.
-.TP
-.BR "--destination-port " "[!] \fIport\fP[:\fIport\fP]"
-Destination port or port range specification. The flag
-.B --dport
-is a convenient alias for this option.
-.TP
-.BR "--tcp-flags " "[!] \fImask\fP \fIcomp\fP"
-Match when the TCP flags are as specified. The first argument is the
-flags which we should examine, written as a comma-separated list, and
-the second argument is a comma-separated list of flags which must be
-set. Flags are:
-.BR "SYN ACK FIN RST URG PSH ALL NONE" .
-Hence the command
-.br
- iptables -A FORWARD -p tcp --tcp-flags SYN,ACK,FIN,RST SYN
-.br
-will only match packets with the SYN flag set, and the ACK, FIN and
-RST flags unset.
-.TP
-.B "[!] --syn"
-Only match TCP packets with the SYN bit set and the ACK and RST bits
-cleared. Such packets are used to request TCP connection initiation;
-for example, blocking such packets coming in an interface will prevent
-incoming TCP connections, but outgoing TCP connections will be
-unaffected.
-It is equivalent to \fB--tcp-flags SYN,RST,ACK SYN\fP.
-If the "!" flag precedes the "--syn", the sense of the
-option is inverted.
-.TP
-.BR "--tcp-option " "[!] \fInumber\fP"
-Match if TCP option set.
-.TP
-.BR "--mss " "\fIvalue\fP[:\fIvalue\fP]"
-Match TCP SYN or SYN/ACK packets with the specified MSS value (or range),
-which control the maximum packet size for that connection.
-.SS tos
-This module matches the 8 bits of Type of Service field in the IP
-header (ie. including the precedence bits).
-.TP
-.BI "--tos " "tos"
-The argument is either a standard name, (use
-.br
- iptables -m tos -h
-.br
-to see the list), or a numeric value to match.
-.SS ttl
-This module matches the time to live field in the IP header.
-.TP
-.BI "--ttl " "ttl"
-Matches the given TTL value.
-.SS udp
-These extensions are loaded if `--protocol udp' is specified. It
-provides the following options:
-.TP
-.BR "--source-port " "[!] \fIport\fP[:\fIport\fP]"
-Source port or port range specification.
-See the description of the
-.B --source-port
-option of the TCP extension for details.
-.TP
-.BR "--destination-port " "[!] \fIport\fP[:\fIport\fP]"
-Destination port or port range specification.
-See the description of the
-.B --destination-port
-option of the TCP extension for details.
-.SS unclean
-This module takes no options, but attempts to match packets which seem
-malformed or unusual. This is regarded as experimental.
-.SH TARGET EXTENSIONS
-iptables can use extended target modules: the following are included
-in the standard distribution.
-.SS DNAT
-This target is only valid in the
-.B nat
-table, in the
-.B PREROUTING
-and
-.B OUTPUT
-chains, and user-defined chains which are only called from those
-chains. It specifies that the destination address of the packet
-should be modified (and all future packets in this connection will
-also be mangled), and rules should cease being examined. It takes one
-type of option:
-.TP
-.BR "--to-destination " "\fIipaddr\fP[-\fIipaddr\fP][:\fIport\fP-\fIport\fP]"
-which can specify a single new destination IP address, an inclusive
-range of IP addresses, and optionally, a port range (which is only
-valid if the rule also specifies
-.B "-p tcp"
-or
-.BR "-p udp" ).
-If no port range is specified, then the destination port will never be
-modified.
-.TP
-You can add several --to-destination options. If you specify more
-than one destination address, either via an address range or multiple
---to-destination options, a simple round-robin (one after another in
-cycle) load balancing takes place between these adresses.
-.SS DSCP
-This target allows to alter the value of the DSCP bits within the TOS
-header of the IPv4 packet. As this manipulates a packet, it can only
-be used in the mangle table.
-.TP
-.BI "--set-dscp " "value"
-Set the DSCP field to a numerical value (can be decimal or hex)
-.TP
-.BI "--set-dscp-class " "class"
-Set the DSCP field to a DiffServ class.
-.SS ECN
-This target allows to selectively work around known ECN blackholes.
-It can only be used in the mangle table.
-.TP
-.BI "--ecn-tcp-remove"
-Remove all ECN bits from the TCP header. Of course, it can only be used
-in conjunction with
-.BR "-p tcp" .
-.SS LOG
-Turn on kernel logging of matching packets. When this option is set
-for a rule, the Linux kernel will print some information on all
-matching packets (like most IP header fields) via the kernel log
-(where it can be read with
-.I dmesg
-or
-.IR syslogd (8)).
-This is a "non-terminating target", i.e. rule traversal continues at
-the next rule. So if you want to LOG the packets you refuse, use two
-separate rules with the same matching criteria, first using target LOG
-then DROP (or REJECT).
-.TP
-.BI "--log-level " "level"
-Level of logging (numeric or see \fIsyslog.conf\fP(5)).
-.TP
-.BI "--log-prefix " "prefix"
-Prefix log messages with the specified prefix; up to 29 letters long,
-and useful for distinguishing messages in the logs.
-.TP
-.B --log-tcp-sequence
-Log TCP sequence numbers. This is a security risk if the log is
-readable by users.
-.TP
-.B --log-tcp-options
-Log options from the TCP packet header.
-.TP
-.B --log-ip-options
-Log options from the IP packet header.
-.SS MARK
-This is used to set the netfilter mark value associated with the
-packet. It is only valid in the
-.B mangle
-table. It can for example be used in conjunction with iproute2.
-.TP
-.BI "--set-mark " "mark"
-.SS MASQUERADE
-This target is only valid in the
-.B nat
-table, in the
-.B POSTROUTING
-chain. It should only be used with dynamically assigned IP (dialup)
-connections: if you have a static IP address, you should use the SNAT
-target. Masquerading is equivalent to specifying a mapping to the IP
-address of the interface the packet is going out, but also has the
-effect that connections are
-.I forgotten
-when the interface goes down. This is the correct behavior when the
-next dialup is unlikely to have the same interface address (and hence
-any established connections are lost anyway). It takes one option:
-.TP
-.BR "--to-ports " "\fIport\fP[-\fIport\fP]"
-This specifies a range of source ports to use, overriding the default
-.B SNAT
-source port-selection heuristics (see above). This is only valid
-if the rule also specifies
-.B "-p tcp"
-or
-.BR "-p udp" .
-.SS MIRROR
-This is an experimental demonstration target which inverts the source
-and destination fields in the IP header and retransmits the packet.
-It is only valid in the
-.BR INPUT ,
-.B FORWARD
-and
-.B PREROUTING
-chains, and user-defined chains which are only called from those
-chains. Note that the outgoing packets are
-.B NOT
-seen by any packet filtering chains, connection tracking or NAT, to
-avoid loops and other problems.
-.SS REDIRECT
-This target is only valid in the
-.B nat
-table, in the
-.B PREROUTING
-and
-.B OUTPUT
-chains, and user-defined chains which are only called from those
-chains. It alters the destination IP address to send the packet to
-the machine itself (locally-generated packets are mapped to the
-127.0.0.1 address). It takes one option:
-.TP
-.BR "--to-ports " "\fIport\fP[-\fIport\fP]"
-This specifies a destination port or range of ports to use: without
-this, the destination port is never altered. This is only valid
-if the rule also specifies
-.B "-p tcp"
-or
-.BR "-p udp" .
-.SS REJECT
-This is used to send back an error packet in response to the matched
-packet: otherwise it is equivalent to
-.B DROP
-so it is a terminating TARGET, ending rule traversal.
-This target is only valid in the
-.BR INPUT ,
-.B FORWARD
-and
-.B OUTPUT
-chains, and user-defined chains which are only called from those
-chains. The following option controls the nature of the error packet
-returned:
-.TP
-.BI "--reject-with " "type"
-The type given can be
-.BR icmp-net-unreachable ,
-.BR icmp-host-unreachable ,
-.BR icmp-port-unreachable ,
-.BR icmp-proto-unreachable ,
-.BR "icmp-net-prohibited or"
-.BR icmp-host-prohibited ,
-which return the appropriate ICMP error message (\fBport-unreachable\fP is
-the default). The option
-.B tcp-reset
-can be used on rules which only match the TCP protocol: this causes a
-TCP RST packet to be sent back. This is mainly useful for blocking
-.I ident
-(113/tcp) probes which frequently occur when sending mail to broken mail
-hosts (which won't accept your mail otherwise).
-.SS SNAT
-This target is only valid in the
-.B nat
-table, in the
-.B POSTROUTING
-chain. It specifies that the source address of the packet should be
-modified (and all future packets in this connection will also be
-mangled), and rules should cease being examined. It takes one type
-of option:
-.TP
-.BR "--to-source " "\fIipaddr\fP[-\fIipaddr\fP][:\fIport\fP-\fIport\fP]"
-which can specify a single new source IP address, an inclusive range
-of IP addresses, and optionally, a port range (which is only valid if
-the rule also specifies
-.B "-p tcp"
-or
-.BR "-p udp" ).
-If no port range is specified, then source ports below 512 will be
-mapped to other ports below 512: those between 512 and 1023 inclusive
-will be mapped to ports below 1024, and other ports will be mapped to
-1024 or above. Where possible, no port alteration will occur.
-.TP
-You can add several --to-source options. If you specify more
-than one source address, either via an address range or multiple
---to-source options, a simple round-robin (one after another in
-cycle) takes place between these adresses.
-.SS TCPMSS
-This target allows to alter the MSS value of TCP SYN packets, to control
-the maximum size for that connection (usually limiting it to your
-outgoing interface's MTU minus 40). Of course, it can only be used
-in conjunction with
-.BR "-p tcp" .
-.br
-This target is used to overcome criminally braindead ISPs or servers
-which block ICMP Fragmentation Needed packets. The symptoms of this
-problem are that everything works fine from your Linux
-firewall/router, but machines behind it can never exchange large
-packets:
-.br
- 1) Web browsers connect, then hang with no data received.
-.br
- 2) Small mail works fine, but large emails hang.
-.br
- 3) ssh works fine, but scp hangs after initial handshaking.
-.br
-Workaround: activate this option and add a rule to your firewall
-configuration like:
-.br
- iptables -A FORWARD -p tcp --tcp-flags SYN,RST SYN \\
-.br
- -j TCPMSS --clamp-mss-to-pmtu
-.TP
-.BI "--set-mss " "value"
-Explicitly set MSS option to specified value.
-.TP
-.B "--clamp-mss-to-pmtu"
-Automatically clamp MSS value to (path_MTU - 40).
-.TP
-These options are mutually exclusive.
-.SS TOS
-This is used to set the 8-bit Type of Service field in the IP header.
-It is only valid in the
-.B mangle
-table.
-.TP
-.BI "--set-tos " "tos"
-You can use a numeric TOS values, or use
-.br
- iptables -j TOS -h
-.br
-to see the list of valid TOS names.
-.SS ULOG
-This target provides userspace logging of matching packets. When this
-target is set for a rule, the Linux kernel will multicast this packet
-through a
-.IR netlink
-socket. One or more userspace processes may then subscribe to various
-multicast groups and receive the packets.
-Like LOG, this is a "non-terminating target", i.e. rule traversal
-continues at the next rule.
-.TP
-.BI "--ulog-nlgroup " "nlgroup"
-This specifies the netlink group (1-32) to which the packet is sent.
-Default value is 1.
-.TP
-.BI "--ulog-prefix " "prefix"
-Prefix log messages with the specified prefix; up to 32 characters
-long, and useful for distinguishing messages in the logs.
-.TP
-.BI "--ulog-cprange " "size"
-Number of bytes to be copied to userspace. A value of 0 always copies
-the entire packet, regardless of its size. Default is 0.
-.TP
-.BI "--ulog-qthreshold " "size"
-Number of packet to queue inside kernel. Setting this value to, e.g. 10
-accumulates ten packets inside the kernel and transmits them as one
-netlink multipart message to userspace. Default is 1 (for backwards
-compatibility).
-.br
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-Various error messages are printed to standard error. The exit code
-is 0 for correct functioning. Errors which appear to be caused by
-invalid or abused command line parameters cause an exit code of 2, and
-other errors cause an exit code of 1.
-.SH BUGS
-Bugs? What's this? ;-)
-Well... the counters are not reliable on sparc64.
-.SH COMPATIBILITY WITH IPCHAINS
-This
-.B iptables
-is very similar to ipchains by Rusty Russell. The main difference is
-that the chains
-.B INPUT
-and
-.B OUTPUT
-are only traversed for packets coming into the local host and
-originating from the local host respectively. Hence every packet only
-passes through one of the three chains; previously a forwarded packet
-would pass through all three.
-.PP
-The other main difference is that
-.B -i
-refers to the input interface;
-.B -o
-refers to the output interface, and both are available for packets
-entering the
-.B FORWARD
-chain.
-.PP The various forms of NAT have been separated out;
-.B iptables
-is a pure packet filter when using the default `filter' table, with
-optional extension modules. This should simplify much of the previous
-confusion over the combination of IP masquerading and packet filtering
-seen previously. So the following options are handled differently:
-.br
- -j MASQ
-.br
- -M -S
-.br
- -M -L
-.br
-There are several other changes in iptables.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR iptables-save (8),
-.BR iptables-restore (8),
-.BR ip6tables (8),
-.BR ip6tables-save (8),
-.BR ip6tables-restore (8).
-.P
-The packet-filtering-HOWTO details iptables usage for
-packet filtering, the NAT-HOWTO details NAT,
-the netfilter-extensions-HOWTO details the extensions that are
-not in the standard distribution,
-and the netfilter-hacking-HOWTO details the netfilter internals.
-.br
-See
-.BR "http://www.netfilter.org/" .
-.SH AUTHORS
-Rusty Russell wrote iptables, in early consultation with Michael
-Neuling.
-.PP
-Marc Boucher made Rusty abandon ipnatctl by lobbying for a generic packet
-selection framework in iptables, then wrote the mangle table, the owner match,
-the mark stuff, and ran around doing cool stuff everywhere.
-.PP
-James Morris wrote the TOS target, and tos match.
-.PP
-Jozsef Kadlecsik wrote the REJECT target.
-.PP
-Harald Welte wrote the ULOG target, TTL, DSCP, ECN matches and targets.
-.PP
-The Netfilter Core Team is: Marc Boucher, Jozsef Kadlecsik, James Morris,
-Harald Welte and Rusty Russell.
-.PP
-Man page written by Herve Eychenne <rv at wallfire.org>.
-
-.\" .. and did I mention that we are incredibly cool people?
-.\" .. sexy, too ..
-.\" .. witty, charming, powerful ..
-.\" .. and most of all, modest ..
diff --git a/raw/man8/losetup.8 b/raw/man8/losetup.8
deleted file mode 100644
index d364f4f..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/losetup.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,94 +0,0 @@
-.TH LOSETUP 8 "Nov 24 1993" "Linux" "MAINTENANCE COMMANDS"
-.SH NAME
-losetup \- set up and control loop devices
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.ad l
-.B losetup
-[
-.B \-e
-.I encryption
-] [
-.B \-o
-.I offset
-]
-.I loop_device file
-.br
-.B losetup
-[
-.B \-d
-]
-.I loop_device
-.ad b
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B losetup
-is used to associate loop devices with regular files or block devices,
-to detach loop devices and to query the status of a loop device. If only the
-\fIloop_device\fP argument is given, the status of the corresponding loop
-device is shown.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.IP \fB\-d\fP
-detach the file or device associated with the specified loop device.
-.IP "\fB\-e \fIencryption\fP"
-.RS
-enable data encryption. The following keywords are recognized:
-.IP \fBNONE\fP
-use no encryption (default).
-.PD 0
-.IP \fBXOR\fP
-use a simple XOR encryption.
-.IP \fBDES\fP
-use DES encryption. DES encryption is only available if the optional
-DES package has been added to the kernel. DES encryption uses an additional
-start value that is used to protect passwords against dictionary
-attacks.
-.PD
-.RE
-.IP "\fB\-o \fIoffset\fP"
-the data start is moved \fIoffset\fP bytes into the specified file or
-device.
-.SH RETURN VALUE
-.B losetup
-returns 0 on success, nonzero on failure. When
-.B losetup
-displays the status of a loop device, it returns 1 if the device
-is not configured and 2 if an error occurred which prevented
-.B losetup
-from determining the status of the device.
-
-.SH FILES
-.nf
-/dev/loop0,/dev/loop1,... loop devices (major=7)
-.fi
-.SH EXAMPLE
-If you are using the loadable module you must have the module loaded
-first with the command
-.IP
-# insmod loop.o
-.LP
-The following commands can be used as an example of using the loop device.
-.nf
-.IP
-dd if=/dev/zero of=/file bs=1k count=100
-losetup -e des /dev/loop0 /file
-Password:
-Init (up to 16 hex digits):
-mkfs -t ext2 /dev/loop0 100
-mount -t ext2 /dev/loop0 /mnt
- ...
-umount /dev/loop0
-losetup -d /dev/loop0
-.fi
-.LP
-If you are using the loadable module you may remove the module with
-the command
-.IP
-# rmmod loop
-.LP
-.fi
-.SH RESTRICTION
-DES encryption is painfully slow. On the other hand, XOR is terribly weak.
-.SH AUTHORS
-.nf
-Original version: Theodore Ts'o <tytso at athena.mit.edu>
-Original DES by: Eric Young <eay at psych.psy.uq.oz.au>
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man8/lspci.8 b/raw/man8/lspci.8
deleted file mode 100644
index ceb4d7f..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/lspci.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,152 +0,0 @@
-.TH lspci 8 "30 March 2002" "pciutils-2.1.10" "Linux PCI Utilities"
-.IX lspci
-.SH NAME
-lspci \- list all PCI devices
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B lspci
-.RB [ options ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B lspci
-is a utility for displaying information about all PCI buses in the system and
-all devices connected to them.
-
-To make use of all the features of this program, you need to have Linux kernel
-2.1.82 or newer which supports the /proc/bus/pci interface. With older kernels,
-the PCI utilities have to use direct hardware access which is available
-only to root and it suffers from numerous race conditions and other problems.
-
-If you are going to report bugs in PCI device drivers or in
-.I lspci
-itself, please include output of "lspci -vvx".
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B -v
-Tells
-.I lspci
-to be verbose and display detailed information about all devices.
-.TP
-.B -vv
-Tells
-.I lspci
-to be very verbose and display even more information (actually everything the
-PCI device is able to tell). The exact meaning of these data is not explained
-in this manual page, if you want to know more, consult
-.B /usr/include/linux/pci.h
-or the PCI specs.
-.TP
-.B -n
-Show PCI vendor and device codes as numbers instead of looking them up in the
-PCI ID database.
-.TP
-.B -x
-Show hexadecimal dump of first 64 bytes of the PCI configuration space (the standard
-header). Useful for debugging of drivers and
-.I lspci
-itself.
-.TP
-.B -xxx
-Show hexadecimal dump of whole PCI configuration space. Available only for root
-as several PCI devices
-.B crash
-when you try to read undefined portions of the config space (this behaviour probably
-doesn't violate the PCI standard, but it's at least very stupid).
-.TP
-.B -b
-Bus-centric view. Show all IRQ numbers and addresses as seen by the cards on the
-PCI bus instead of as seen by the kernel.
-.TP
-.B -t
-Show a tree-like diagram containing all buses, bridges, devices and connections
-between them.
-.TP
-.B -s [[<bus>]:][<slot>][.[<func>]]
-Show only devices in specified bus, slot and function. Each component of the device
-address can be omitted or set as "*" meaning "any value". All numbers are
-hexadecimal. E.g., "0:" means all devices on bus 0, "0" means all functions of device 0
-on any bus, "0.3" selects third function of device 0 on all buses and ".4" shows only
-fourth function of each device.
-.TP
-.B -d [<vendor>]:[<device>]
-Show only devices with specified vendor and device ID. Both ID's are given in
-hexadecimal and may be omitted or given as "*" meaning "any value".
-.TP
-.B -i <file>
-Use
-.B
-<file>
-as PCI ID database instead of /usr/share/hwdata/pci.ids.
-.TP
-.B -p <dir>
-Use
-.B <dir>
-as directory containing PCI bus information instead of /proc/bus/pci.
-.TP
-.B -m
-Dump PCI device data in machine readable form (both normal and verbose format supported)
-for easy parsing by scripts.
-.TP
-.B -M
-Invoke bus mapping mode which scans the bus extensively to find all devices including
-those behind misconfigured bridges etc. Please note that this is intended only for
-debugging and as it can crash the machine (only in case of buggy devices, but
-unfortunately these happen to exist), it's available only to root. Also using
--M on PCI access methods which don't directly touch the hardware has no
-sense since the results are (modulo bugs in lspci) identical to normal listing
-modes.
-.TP
-.B --version
-Shows
-.I lspci
-version. This option should be used standalone.
-
-.SH PCILIB OPTIONS
-The PCI utilities use PCILIB (a portable library providing platform-independent
-functions for PCI configuration space access) to talk to the PCI cards. The following
-options control parameters of the library, especially what access method it uses.
-By default, PCILIB uses the first available access method and displays no debugging
-messages. Each switch is accompanied by a list of hardware/software configurations
-it's supported in.
-
-.TP
-.B -P <dir>
-Use Linux 2.1 style configuration access to directory
-.B <dir>
-instead of /proc/bus/pci. (Linux 2.1 or newer only)
-.TP
-.B -H1
-Use direct hardware access via Intel configuration mechanism 1. (i386 and compatible only)
-.TP
-.B -H2
-Use direct hardware access via Intel configuration mechanism 2. Warning: This method
-is able to address only first 16 devices on any bus and it seems to be very
-unrealiable in many cases. (i386 and compatible only)
-.TP
-.B -S
-Use PCI access syscalls. (Linux on Alpha and UltraSparc only)
-.TP
-.B -F <file>
-Extract all information from given file containing output of lspci -x. This is very
-useful for analysis of user-supplied bug reports, because you can display the
-hardware configuration in any way you want without disturbing the user with
-requests for more dumps. (All systems)
-.TP
-.B -G
-Increase debug level of the library. (All systems)
-
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.B /usr/share/hwdata/pci.ids
-A list of all known PCI ID's (vendors, devices, classes and subclasses).
-.TP
-.B /proc/bus/pci
-An interface to PCI bus configuration space provided by the post-2.1.82 Linux
-kernels. Contains per-bus subdirectories with per-card config space files and a
-.I devices
-file containing a list of all PCI devices.
-
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR setpci (8)
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-The Linux PCI Utilities are maintained by Martin Mares <mj at ucw.cz>.
diff --git a/raw/man8/mailstats.8 b/raw/man8/mailstats.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d1feaa..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/mailstats.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2002 Sendmail, Inc. and its suppliers.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" By using this file, you agree to the terms and conditions set
-.\" forth in the LICENSE file which can be found at the top level of
-.\" the sendmail distribution.
-.\"
-.\"
-.\" $Id: mailstats.8,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.\"
-.TH MAILSTATS 8 "$Date: 2003/12/20 03:31:54 $"
-.SH NAME
-mailstats
-\- display mail statistics
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mailstats
-.RB [ \-c "] [" \-o "] [" \-p "] [" \-P ]
-.RB [ \-C
-.IR cffile ]
-.RB [ \-f
-.IR stfile ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B mailstats
-utility displays the current mail statistics.
-.PP
-First, the time at which statistics started being kept is displayed,
-in the format specified by
-ctime(3).
-Then,
-the statistics for each mailer are displayed on a single line,
-each with the following white space separated fields:
-.sp
-.RS
-.PD 0.2v
-.TP 1.2i
-.B M
-The mailer number.
-.TP
-.B msgsfr
-Number of messages from the mailer.
-.TP
-.B bytes_from
-Kbytes from the mailer.
-.TP
-.B msgsto
-Number of messages to the mailer.
-.TP
-.B bytes_to
-Kbytes to the mailer.
-.TP
-.B msgsrej
-Number of messages rejected.
-.TP
-.B msgsdis
-Number of messages discarded.
-.TP
-.B Mailer
-The name of the mailer.
-.PD
-.RE
-.PP
-After this display, a line totaling the values for all of the mailers
-is displayed (preceded with a ``T''),
-separated from the previous information by a line containing only equals
-(``='')
-characters.
-Another line preceded with a ``C'' lists the number of TCP connections.
-.PP
-The options are as follows:
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Read the specified file instead of the default
-.B sendmail
-configuration file.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Try to use submit.cf instead of the default
-.B sendmail
-configuration file.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Read the specified statistics file instead of the statistics file
-specified in the
-.B sendmail
-configuration file.
-.TP
-.B \-P
-Output information in program-readable mode without clearing statistics.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Output information in program-readable mode and clear statistics.
-.TP
-.B \-o
-Don't display the name of the mailer in the output.
-.PP
-The
-.B mailstats
-utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs.
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0.2v
-.TP 2.5i
-/etc/mail/sendmail.cf
-The default
-.B sendmail
-configuration file.
-.TP
-/etc/mail/statistics
-The default
-.B sendmail
-statistics file.
-.PD
-.SH SEE ALSO
-mailq(1),
-sendmail(8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/makemap.8 b/raw/man8/makemap.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 260132f..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/makemap.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1998-2001 Sendmail, Inc. and its suppliers.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\" Copyright (c) 1988, 1991, 1993
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" By using this file, you agree to the terms and conditions set
-.\" forth in the LICENSE file which can be found at the top level of
-.\" the sendmail distribution.
-.\"
-.\"
-.\" $Id: makemap.8,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.\"
-.TH MAKEMAP 8 "$Date: 2003/12/20 03:31:54 $"
-.SH NAME
-makemap
-\- create database maps for sendmail
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B makemap
-.RB [ \-C
-.IR file ]
-.RB [ \-N ]
-.RB [ \-c
-.IR cachesize ]
-.RB [ \-d ]
-.RB [ \-e ]
-.RB [ \-f ]
-.RB [ \-l ]
-.RB [ \-o ]
-.RB [ \-r ]
-.RB [ \-s ]
-.RB [ \-t
-.IR delim ]
-.RB [ \-u ]
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.I
-maptype mapnam
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Makemap
-creates the database maps used by the keyed map lookups in
-sendmail(8).
-It reads input from the standard input
-and outputs them to the indicated
-.I mapname.
-.PP
-Depending on how it is compiled,
-.B makemap
-handles up to three different database formats,
-selected using the
-.I maptype
-parameter.
-They may be
-.TP
-btree
-B-Tree format maps.
-This requires the new Berkeley DB
-library.
-.TP
-hash
-Hash format maps.
-This also requires the Berkeley DB
-library.
-.PP
-In all cases,
-.B makemap
-reads lines from the standard input consisting of two
-words separated by white space.
-The first is the database key,
-the second is the value.
-The value may contain
-``%\fIn\fP''
-strings to indicate parameter substitution.
-Literal percents should be doubled
-(``%%'').
-Blank lines and lines beginning with ``#'' are ignored.
-.PP
-Notice: do
-.B not
-use
-.B makemap
-to create the aliases data base, but
-.B newaliases
-which puts a special token into the data base that is required by
-.B sendmail.
-.PP
-If the
-.I TrustedUser
-option is set in the sendmail configuration file and
-.B makemap
-is invoked as root, the generated files will be owned by
-the specified
-.IR TrustedUser.
-.SS Flags
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Use the specified
-.B sendmail
-configuration file for looking up the TrustedUser option.
-.TP
-.B \-N
-Include the null byte that terminates strings
-in the map.
-This must match the \-N flag in the sendmail.cf
-``K'' line.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Use the specified hash and B-Tree cache size.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Allow duplicate keys in the map.
-This is only allowed on B-Tree format maps.
-If two identical keys are read,
-they will both be inserted into the map.
-.TP
-.B \-e
-Allow empty value (right hand side).
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Normally all upper case letters in the key
-are folded to lower case.
-This flag disables that behaviour.
-This is intended to mesh with the
-\-f flag in the
-.B K
-line in sendmail.cf.
-The value is never case folded.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-List supported map types.
-.TP
-.B \-o
-Append to an old file.
-This allows you to augment an existing file.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Allow replacement of existing keys.
-Normally
-.B makemap
-complains if you repeat a key,
-and does not do the insert.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Ignore safety checks on maps being created.
-This includes checking for hard or symbolic
-links in world writable directories.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Use the specified delimiter instead of white space.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-dump (unmap) the content of the database to standard output.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Verbosely print what it is doing.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-sendmail(8), newaliases(1)
-.SH HISTORY
-The
-.B makemap
-command appeared in
-4.4BSD.
diff --git a/raw/man8/mingetty.8 b/raw/man8/mingetty.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 629205e..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/mingetty.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-.TH MINGETTY 8 "6 Apr 1996" "Debian-Local" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-mingetty \- minimal getty for consoles
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mingetty
-[\-\-noclear] [\-\-nonewline] [\-\-noissue] [\-\-nohangup] [\-\-nohostname]
-[\-\-long\-hostname] [\-\-loginprog=/bin/login] [\-\-nice=10] [\-\-delay=5]
-[\-\-chdir=/home] [\-\-chroot=/chroot] [\-\-autologin username]
-.I tty
-.PP
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B mingetty
-is a minimal getty for use on virtual consoles.
-Unlike
-.BR agetty (8),
-.B mingetty
-is not suitable for serial lines.
-I recommend using
-.BR mgetty (8)
-for this purpose.
-.PP
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-\-noclear
-Do not clear the screen before prompting for the login name (the screen
-is normally cleared).
-.TP
-.B \-\-nonewline
-Do not print a newline before writing out /etc/issue.
-.TP
-.B \-\-noissue
-Do not output /etc/issue.
-.TP
-.B \-\-nohangup
-Do not call vhangup() to disable writing to this tty by
-other applications.
-.TP
-.B \-\-nohostname
-Do not print the hostname before the login prompt.
-.TP
-.B \-\-long\-hostname
-By default the hostname is only printed until the first dot.
-With this option enabled, the full text from gethostname() is shown.
-.TP
-.B \-\-loginprog /bin/login
-Change the login app.
-.TP
-.B \-\-nice 10
-Change the priority by calling nice().
-.TP
-.B \-\-delay 5
-Sleep this many seconds after startup of mingetty.
-.TP
-.B \-\-chdir /home
-Change into this directory before calling the login prog.
-.TP
-.B \-\-chroot /chroot
-Call chroot() with this directory name.
-.TP
-.B \-\-autologin username
-Log the specified user automatically in without asking for
-a login name and password. Check the \-f option from
-.B /bin/login
-for this.
-.PP
-.SH "ISSUE ESCAPES"
-.B mingetty
-recognizes the following escapes sequences which might be embedded in the
-.I /etc/issue
-file:
-.IP \fB\ed\fP
-insert current day (localtime),
-.IP \fB\el\fP
-insert line on which
-.B mingetty
-is running,
-.IP \fB\em\fP
-inserts machine architecture (uname -m),
-.IP \fB\en\fP
-inserts machine's network node hostname (uname -n),
-.IP \fB\eo\fP
-inserts domain name,
-.IP \fB\er\fP
-inserts operating system release (uname -r),
-.IP \fB\et\fP
-insert current time (localtime),
-.IP \fB\es\fP
-inserts operating system name,
-.IP \fB\eu\fP
-resp. \fB\eU\fP
-the current number of users which are currently logged in.
-\\U inserts "\fIn\fP users", where as \\u only inserts "\fIn\fP".
-.IP \fB\ev\fP
-inserts operating system version (uname -v).
-.PP
-.SH EXAMPLE
-"\fBLinux\ eos\ i386\ #1\ Tue\ Mar\ 19\ 21:54:09\ MET\ 1996\fP" was produced
-by putting "\fB\\s\ \\n\ \\m\ \\v\fP" into
-.IR /etc/issue .
-.PP
-.SH FILES
-.IR /etc/issue ,
-.IR /var/run/utmp .
-.PP
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR mgetty (8),
-.BR agetty (8).
-.PP
-.SH AUTHOR
-Copyright \(co 1996 Florian La Roche <laroche at redhat.com>.
-Man-page written by David Frey <David.Frey at eos.lugs.ch> and
-Florian La Roche.
diff --git a/raw/man8/mkfs.8 b/raw/man8/mkfs.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 760a5e0..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/mkfs.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-.\" -*- nroff -*-
-.TH MKFS 8 "Jun 1995" "Version 1.9"
-.SH NAME
-mkfs \- build a Linux file system
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B mkfs
-[
-.B \-V
-]
-[
-.B \-t
-.I fstype
-]
-[
-.B fs-options
-]
-.I filesys
-[
-.I blocks
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B mkfs
-is used to build a Linux file system on a device, usually
-a hard disk partition.
-.I filesys
-is either the device name (e.g.
-.IR /dev/hda1 ,
-.IR /dev/sdb2 )
-or the mount point (e.g.
-.IR / ,
-.IR /usr ,
-.IR /home )
-for the file system.
-.I blocks
-is the number of blocks to be used for the file system.
-.PP
-The exit code returned by
-.B mkfs
-is 0 on success and 1 on failure.
-.PP
-In actuality,
-.B mkfs
-is simply a front-end for the various file system builders
-(\fBmkfs\fR.\fIfstype\fR)
-available under Linux.
-The file system-specific builder is searched for in a number
-of directories like perhaps
-.IR /sbin ,
-.IR /sbin/fs ,
-.IR /sbin/fs.d ,
-.IR /etc/fs ,
-.I /etc
-(the precise list is defined at compile time but at least
-contains
-.I /sbin
-and
-.IR /sbin/fs ),
-and finally in the directories
-listed in the PATH enviroment variable.
-Please see the file system-specific builder manual pages for
-further details.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B -V
-Produce verbose output, including all file system-specific commands
-that are executed.
-Specifying this option more than once inhibits execution of any
-file system-specific commands.
-This is really only useful for testing.
-.TP
-.BI -t \ fstype
-Specifies the type of file system to be built.
-If not specified, the default file system type
-(currently ext2) is used.
-.TP
-.B fs-options
-File system-specific options to be passed to the real file
-system builder.
-Although not guaranteed, the following options are supported
-by most file system builders.
-.TP
-.B -c
-Check the device for bad blocks before building the file system.
-.TP
-.BI -l \ filename
-Read the bad blocks list from
-.I filename
-.TP
-.B -v
-Produce verbose output.
-.SH BUGS
-All generic options must precede and not be combined with
-file system-specific options.
-Some file system-specific programs do not support the
-.I -v
-(verbose) option, nor return meaningful exit codes.
-Also, some file system-specific programs do not automatically
-detect the device size and require the
-.I blocks
-parameter to be specified.
-.SH AUTHORS
-David Engel (david at ods.com)
-.br
-Fred N. van Kempen (waltje at uwalt.nl.mugnet.org)
-.br
-Ron Sommeling (sommel at sci.kun.nl)
-.br
-The manual page was shamelessly adapted from Remy Card's version
-for the ext2 file system.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR fs (5),
-.BR badblocks (8),
-.BR fsck (8),
-.BR mkdosfs (8),
-.BR mke2fs (8),
-.BR mkfs.bfs (8),
-.BR mkfs.ext2 (8),
-.BR mkfs.ext3 (8),
-.BR mkfs.minix (8),
-.BR mkfs.msdos (8),
-.BR mkfs.vfat (8),
-.BR mkfs.xfs (8),
-.BR mkfs.xiafs (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/mkswap.8 b/raw/man8/mkswap.8
deleted file mode 100644
index e143704..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/mkswap.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,152 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1998 Andries E. Brouwer (aeb at cwi.nl)
-.\"
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.\" Rewritten for 2.1.117, aeb, 981010.
-.\"
-.TH MKSWAP 8 "25 March 1999" "Linux 2.2.4" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-mkswap \- set up a Linux swap area
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "mkswap [\-c] [\-v" N "] [\-f] [\-p " PSZ "] "device " [" size "]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B mkswap
-sets up a Linux swap area on a device or in a file.
-
-(After creating the swap area, you need the
-.B swapon
-command to start using it. Usually swap areas are listed in
-.I /etc/fstab
-so that they can be taken into use at boot time by a
-.B swapon -a
-command in some boot script.)
-
-The
-.I device
-argument will usually be a disk partition (something like
-.I /dev/hda4
-or
-.IR /dev/sdb7 )
-but can also be a file.
-The Linux kernel does not look at partition Id's, but
-many installation scripts will assume that partitions
-of hex type 82 (LINUX_SWAP) are meant to be swap partitions.
-(Warning: Solaris also uses this type. Be careful not to kill
-your Solaris partitions.)
-
-The
-.I size
-parameter is superfluous but retained for backwards compatibility.
-(It specifies the desired size of the swap area in 1024-byte blocks.
-.B mkswap
-will use the entire partition or file if it is omitted.
-Specifying it is unwise - a typo may destroy your disk.)
-
-The
-.I PSZ
-parameter specifies the page size to use. It is almost always
-unnecessary (even unwise) to specify it, but certain old libc
-versions lie about the page size, so it is possible that
-.B mkswap
-gets it wrong. The symptom is that a subsequent
-.B swapon
-fails because no swap signature is found. Typical values for
-.I PSZ
-are 4096 or 8192.
-
-Linux knows about two styles of swap areas, old style and new style.
-The last 10 bytes of the first page of the swap area distinguishes
-them: old style has `SWAP_SPACE', new style has `SWAPSPACE2' as
-signature.
-
-In the old style, the rest of this first page was a bit map,
-with a 1 bit for each usable page of the swap area.
-Since the first page holds this bit map, the first bit is 0.
-Also, the last 10 bytes hold the signature. So, if the page
-size is S, an old style swap area can describe at most
-8*(S-10)-1 pages used for swapping.
-With S=4096 (as on i386), the useful area is at most 133890048 bytes
-(almost 128 MiB), and the rest is wasted.
-On an alpha and sparc64, with S=8192, the useful area is at most
-535560992 bytes (almost 512 MiB).
-
-The old setup wastes most of this bitmap page, because zero bits
-denote bad blocks or blocks past the end of the swap space,
-and a simple integer suffices to indicate the size of the swap space,
-while the bad blocks, if any, can simply be listed. Nobody wants
-to use a swap space with hundreds of bad blocks. (I would not even
-use a swap space with 1 bad block.)
-In the new style swap area this is precisely what is done.
-The maximum useful size of a swap area now depends on the architecture.
-It is roughly 2GiB on i386, PPC, m68k, ARM, 1GiB on sparc, 512MiB on mips,
-128GiB on alpha and 3TiB on sparc64.
-
-Note that before 2.1.117 the kernel allocated one byte for each page,
-while it now allocates two bytes, so that taking a swap area of 2 GiB
-in use might require 2 MiB of kernel memory.
-
-Presently, Linux allows 32 swap areas (this was 8 before Linux 2.4.10).
-The areas in use can be seen in the file
-.I /proc/swaps
-(since 2.1.25).
-
-.B mkswap
-refuses areas smaller than 10 pages.
-
-If you don't know the page size that your machine uses, you may be
-able to look it up with "cat /proc/cpuinfo" (or you may not -
-the contents of this file depend on architecture and kernel version).
-
-To setup a swap file, it is necessary to create that file before
-initializing it with
-.B mkswap ,
-e.g. using a command like
-
-.nf
-.RS
-# dd if=/dev/zero of=swapfile bs=1024 count=65536
-.RE
-.fi
-
-Note that a swap file must not contain any holes (so, using
-.BR cp (1)
-to create the file is not acceptable).
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Check the device (if it is a block device) for bad blocks
-before creating the swap area.
-If any are found, the count is printed.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Force - go ahead even if the command is stupid.
-This allows the creation of a swap area larger than the file
-or partition it resides on.
-On SPARC, force creation of the swap area.
-Without this option
-.B mkswap
-will refuse to create a v0 swap on a device with a valid SPARC superblock,
-as that probably means one is going to erase the partition table.
-.TP
-.BI "\-p " PSZ
-Specify the page size to use.
-.TP
-.B \-v0
-Create an old style swap area.
-.TP
-.B \-v1
-Create a new style swap area.
-
-.LP
-If no \-v option is given,
-.B mkswap
-will default to new style, but use old style if the current kernel
-is older than 2.1.117 (and also if PAGE_SIZE is less than 2048).
-The new style header does not touch the first block, so may be
-preferable, in case you have a boot loader or disk label there.
-If you need to use both 2.0 and 2.2 kernels, use the \-v0 option
-when creating the swapspace.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR fdisk (8),
-.BR swapon (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/modinfo.8 b/raw/man8/modinfo.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 4a95696..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/modinfo.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1996 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-.\" This program is distributed according to the Gnu General Public License.
-.\" See the file COPYING in the kernel source directory
-.\"
-.TH MODINFO 8 "March 19, 2002" Linux "Linux Module Support"
-.SH NAME
-modinfo \- display information about a kernel module
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B modinfo
-[ options ] <module_file>
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B modinfo
-utility examines the object file
-.I module_file
-associated with a kernel module and displays any information that it
-can glean.
-.SS OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BR \-a ", " \-\-author
-Display the module's author.
-.TP
-.BR \-d ", " \-\-description
-Display the module's description.
-.TP
-.BI \-f format_string ", \-\-format " format_string
-Let the user specify an arbitrary format string which can extract
-values from the ELF section in
-.I module_file
-which contains the module information.
-Replacements consist of a percent sign followed by a tag name in curly
-braces.
-A tagname of
-.I %{filename}
-is always supported, even if the module has no modinfo section.
-.I %{kernel_version}
-shows the version of the kernel the module was compiled for.
-.I %{using_checksums}
-expands to 1 is the module has versioned symbols and to 0 or <none>
-otherwise.
-
-A tagname of
-.I %{parm}
-is special: the format string line is repeated for each known module
-parameter (which may be zero times) and
-.I %{parm}
-is then replaced by descriptions of module parameters (one parameter
-on each repeated line).
-
-Alternatively,
-.I %a\fR,
-.I %d\fR,
-.I %l\fR,
-.I %n
-and
-.I %p
-can be used instead of
-.I %{author}\fR,
-.I %{description}\fR,
-.I %{filename}\fR,
-.I %{license}
-and
-.I %{parm}\fR,
-respectively.
-.TP
-.BR \-h ", " \-\-help
-Display a summary of options and immediately exit.
-.TP
-.BR \-l ", " \-\-license
-Display the module's license.
-.TP
-.BR \-n ", " \-\-filename
-Display the module's filename.
-.TP
-.BR \-p ", " \-\-parameters
-Display the typed parameters that a module may support.
-.TP
-.BR \-V ", " \-\-version
-Display the version of
-.BR modinfo .
-.PP
-If no options are supplied, the default is filename, description,
-author, license and parameters.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR insmod "(8), " modprobe "(8), " depmod "(8), " rmmod "(8), "
-.BR lsmod "(8), " ksyms "(8), " modules "(2) "
diff --git a/raw/man8/netstat.8 b/raw/man8/netstat.8
deleted file mode 100644
index b803eb8..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/netstat.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,459 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" netstat.8
-.\"
-.\" Original: (mdw at tc.cornell.edu & dc6iq at insu1.etec.uni-karlsruhe.de)
-.\"
-.\" Modified: Bernd.Eckenfels at inka.de
-.\" Modified: Andi Kleen ak at muc.de
-.\" Modified: Tuan Hoang tqhoang at bigfoot.com
-.\"
-.\"
-.TH NETSTAT 8 "19 December 2000" "net-tools" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-
-.SH NAME
-netstat \- Print network connections, routing tables, interface statistics, masquerade connections, and multicast memberships
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-
-.B netstat
-.RI [ address_family_options ]
-.RB [ \-\-tcp | \-t ]
-.RB [ \-\-udp | \-u ]
-.RB [ \-\-raw | \-w ]
-.RB [ \-\-listening | \-l ]
-.RB [ \-\-all | \-a ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric | \-n ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric-hosts ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ]
-.RB [ \-\-symbolic | \-N ]
-.RB [ \-\-extend | \-e [ \-\-extend | \-e] ]
-.RB [ \-\-timers | \-o ]
-.RB [ \-\-program | \-p ]
-.RB [ \-\-verbose | \-v ]
-.RB [ \-\-continuous | \-c]
-.RB [delay]
-.P
-.B netstat
-.RB { \-\-route | \-r }
-.RI [ address_family_options ]
-.RB [ \-\-extend | \-e [ \-\-extend | \-e] ]
-.RB [ \-\-verbose | \-v ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric | \-n ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric-hosts ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ]
-.RB [ \-\-continuous | \-c]
-.RB [delay]
-.P
-.B netstat
-.RB { \-\-interfaces | \-i }
-.RI [ iface ]
-.RB [ \-\-all | \-a ]
-.RB [ \-\-extend | \-e [ \-\-extend | \-e] ]
-.RB [ \-\-verbose | \-v ]
-.RB [ \-\-program | \-p ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric | \-n ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric-hosts ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ]
-.RB [ \-\-continuous | \-c]
-.RB [delay]
-.P
-.B netstat
-.RB { \-\-groups | \-g }
-.RB [ \-\-numeric | \-n ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric-hosts ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ]
-.RB [ \-\-continuous | \-c]
-.RB [delay]
-.P
-.B netstat
-.RB { \-\-masquerade | \-M }
-.RB [ \-\-extend | \-e ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric | \-n ]
-.RB [ \-\-numeric-hosts ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ] [ \-\-numeric-ports ]
-.RB [ \-\-continuous | \-c]
-.RB [delay]
-.P
-.B netstat
-.RB { \-\-statistics | -s }
-.RB [ \-\-tcp | \-t ]
-.RB [ \-\-udp | \-u ]
-.RB [ \-\-raw | \-w ]
-.RB [delay]
-.P
-.B netstat
-.RB { \-\-version | \-V }
-.P
-.B netstat
-.RB { \-\-help | \-h }
-.P
-.IR address_family_options :
-.PP
-.RB [ \-\-protocol= { inet , unix , ipx , ax25 , netrom , ddp }[, ...] ]
-.RB [ \-\-unix | \-x ]
-.RB [ \-\-inet | \-\-ip ]
-.RB [ \-\-ax25 ]
-.RB [ \-\-ipx ]
-.RB [ \-\-netrom ]
-.RB [ \-\-ddp ]
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Netstat
-prints information about the Linux networking subsystem. The type of
-information printed is controlled by the first argument, as follows:
-.SS (none)
-By default,
-.B
-netstat
-displays a list of open sockets. If you don't specify any
-address families, then the active sockets of all configured address
-families will be printed.
-.SS "\-\-route , \-r"
-Display the kernel routing tables.
-.SS "\-\-groups , \-g"
-Display multicast group membership information for IPv4 and IPv6.
-.SS "\-\-interface=\fIiface \fR, \fB\-i"
-Display a table of all network interfaces, or the specified
-.IR iface ) .
-.SS "\-\-masquerade , \-M"
-Display a list of masqueraded connections.
-.SS "\-\-statistics , \-s"
-Display summary statistics for each protocol.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.SS "\-\-verbose , \-v"
-Tell the user what is going on by being verbose. Especially print some
-useful information about unconfigured address families.
-.SS "\-\-numeric , \-n"
-Show numerical addresses instead of trying to determine symbolic host, port
-or user names.
-.SS "\-\-numeric-hosts"
-shows numerical host addresses but does not affect the resolution of
-port or user names.
-.SS "\-\-numeric-ports"
-shows numerical port numbers but does not affect the resolution of
-host or user names.
-.SS "\-\-numeric-users"
-shows numerical user IDs but does not affect the resolution of host or
-port names.
-
-.SS "\-\-protocol=\fIfamily \fR, \fB\-A"
-Specifies the address families (perhaps better described as low level
-protocols) for which connections are to be shown.
-.I family
-is a comma (',') separated list of address family keywords like
-.BR inet ,
-.BR unix ,
-.BR ipx ,
-.BR ax25 ,
-.BR netrom ,
-and
-.BR ddp .
-This has the same effect as using the
-.BR \-\-inet ,
-.BR \-\-unix " (" \-x ),
-.BR \-\-ipx ,
-.BR \-\-ax25 ,
-.BR \-\-netrom ,
-and
-.B \-\-ddp
-options.
-.P
-The address family
-.B inet
-includes raw, udp and tcp protocol sockets.
-.SS "\-c, \-\-continuous"
-This will cause
-.B netstat
-to print the selected information every second continuously.
-.SS "\-e, \-\-extend"
-Display additional information. Use this option twice for maximum detail.
-.SS "\-o, \-\-timers"
-Include information related to networking timers.
-.SS "\-p, \-\-program"
-Show the PID and name of the program to which each socket belongs.
-.SS "\-l, \-\-listening"
-Show only listening sockets. (These are omitted by default.)
-.SS "\-a, \-\-all"
-Show both listening and non-listening sockets. With the
-.B --interfaces
-option, show interfaces that are not marked
-.SS "\-F"
-Print routing information from the FIB. (This is the default.)
-.SS "\-C"
-Print routing information from the route cache.
-.SS delay
-Netstat will cycle printing through statistics every
-.B delay
-seconds.
-.IR UP .
-.P
-.SH OUTPUT
-.P
-.SS Active Internet connections \fR(TCP, UDP, raw)\fR
-.SS "Proto"
-The protocol (tcp, udp, raw) used by the socket.
-.SS "Recv-Q"
-The count of bytes not copied by the user program connected to this socket.
-.SS "Send-Q"
-The count of bytes not acknowledged by the remote host.
-.SS "Local Address"
-Address and port number of the local end of the socket. Unless the
-.BR \-\-numeric " (" \-n )
-option is specified, the socket address is resolved to its canonical
-host name (FQDN), and the port number is translated into the
-corresponding service name.
-.SS "Foreign Address"
-Address and port number of the remote end of the socket.
-Analogous to "Local Address."
-.SS "State"
-The state of the socket. Since there are no states in raw mode and usually no
-states used in UDP, this column may be left blank. Normally this can be one
-of several values:
-.TP
-.I
-ESTABLISHED
-The socket has an established connection.
-.TP
-.I
-SYN_SENT
-The socket is actively attempting to establish a connection.
-.TP
-.I
-SYN_RECV
-A connection request has been received from the network.
-.TP
-.I
-FIN_WAIT1
-The socket is closed, and the connection is shutting down.
-.TP
-.I
-FIN_WAIT2
-Connection is closed, and the socket is waiting for a shutdown from the
-remote end.
-.TP
-.I
-TIME_WAIT
-The socket is waiting after close to handle packets still in the network.
-.TP
-.I
-CLOSED
-The socket is not being used.
-.TP
-.I
-CLOSE_WAIT
-The remote end has shut down, waiting for the socket to close.
-.TP
-.I
-LAST_ACK
-The remote end has shut down, and the socket is closed. Waiting for
-acknowledgement.
-.TP
-.I
-LISTEN
-The socket is listening for incoming connections. Such sockets are
-not included in the output unless you specify the
-.BR \-\-listening " (" \-l )
-or
-.BR \-\-all " (" \-a )
-option.
-.TP
-.I
-CLOSING
-Both sockets are shut down but we still don't have all our data
-sent.
-.TP
-.I
-UNKNOWN
-The state of the socket is unknown.
-.SS "User"
-The username or the user id (UID) of the owner of the socket.
-.SS "PID/Program name"
-Slash-separated pair of the process id (PID) and process name of the
-process that owns the socket.
-.B --program
-causes this column to be included. You will also need
-.I superuser
-privileges to see this information on sockets you don't own. This
-identification information is not yet available for IPX sockets.
-.SS "Timer"
-(this needs to be written)
-.P
-.SS Active UNIX domain Sockets
-.SS "Proto"
-The protocol (usually unix) used by the socket.
-.SS "RefCnt"
-The reference count (i.e. attached processes via this socket).
-.SS "Flags"
-The flags displayed is SO_ACCEPTON (displayed as
-.BR ACC ),
-SO_WAITDATA
-.RB ( W )
-or SO_NOSPACE
-.RB ( N ).
-SO_ACCECPTON
-is used on unconnected sockets if their corresponding
-processes are waiting for a connect request. The other flags are not
-of normal interest.
-.SS "Type"
-There are several types of socket access:
-.TP
-.I
-SOCK_DGRAM
-The socket is used in Datagram (connectionless) mode.
-.TP
-.I
-SOCK_STREAM
-This is a stream (connection) socket.
-.TP
-.I
-SOCK_RAW
-The socket is used as a raw socket.
-.TP
-.I
-SOCK_RDM
-This one serves reliably-delivered messages.
-.TP
-.I
-SOCK_SEQPACKET
-This is a sequential packet socket.
-.TP
-.I
-SOCK_PACKET
-Raw interface access socket.
-.TP
-.I
-UNKNOWN
-Who ever knows what the future will bring us - just fill in here :-)
-.PP
-.SS "State"
-This field will contain one of the following Keywords:
-.TP
-.I FREE
-The socket is not allocated
-.TP
-.I LISTENING
-The socket is listening for a connection request. Such
-sockets are only included in the output if you specify the
-.BR \-\-listening " (" \-l )
-or
-.BR \-\-all " (" \-a )
-option.
-.TP
-.I CONNECTING
-The socket is about to establish a connection.
-.TP
-.I CONNECTED
-The socket is connected.
-.TP
-.I DISCONNECTING
-The socket is disconnecting.
-.TP
-.I (empty)
-The socket is not connected to another one.
-.TP
-.I UNKNOWN
-This state should never happen.
-.SS "PID/Program name"
-Process ID (PID) and process name of the process that has the socket open.
-More info available in
-.B "Active Internet connections"
-section written above.
-.SS "Path"
-This is the path name as which the corresponding processes attached
-to the socket.
-.P
-.SS Active IPX sockets
-(this needs to be done by somebody who knows it)
-.P
-.SS Active NET/ROM sockets
-(this needs to be done by somebody who knows it)
-.P
-.SS Active AX.25 sockets
-(this needs to be done by somebody who knows it)
-.PP
-.SH NOTES
-Starting with Linux release 2.2
-.B netstat -i
-does not show interface statistics for alias interfaces. To get per
-alias interface counters you need to setup explicit rules using the
-.BR ipchains(8)
-command.
-
-.SH FILES
-.ta
-.I /etc/services
--- The services translation file
-
-.I /proc
--- Mount point for the proc filesystem, which gives access to kernel
-status information via the following files.
-
-.I /proc/net/dev
--- device information
-
-.I /proc/net/raw
--- raw socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/tcp
--- TCP socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/udp
--- UDP socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/igmp
--- IGMP multicast information
-
-.I /proc/net/unix
--- Unix domain socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/ipx
--- IPX socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/ax25
--- AX25 socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/appletalk
--- DDP (appletalk) socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/nr
--- NET/ROM socket information
-
-.I /proc/net/route
--- IP routing information
-
-.I /proc/net/ax25_route
--- AX25 routing information
-
-.I /proc/net/ipx_route
--- IPX routing information
-
-.I /proc/net/nr_nodes
--- NET/ROM nodelist
-
-.I /proc/net/nr_neigh
--- NET/ROM neighbours
-
-.I /proc/net/ip_masquerade
--- masqueraded connections
-
-.I /proc/net/snmp
--- statistics
-.fi
-.P
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR route (8),
-.BR ifconfig (8),
-.BR ipchains (8),
-.BR iptables (8),
-.BR proc (5)
-.P
-.SH BUGS
-Occasionally strange information may appear if a socket changes
-as it is viewed. This is unlikely to occur.
-.P
-.SH AUTHORS
-The netstat user interface was written by Fred Baumgarten
-<dc6iq at insu1.etec.uni-karlsruhe.de> the man page basically
-by Matt Welsh <mdw at tc.cornell.edu>. It was updated by
-Alan Cox <Alan.Cox at linux.org> but could do with a bit more
-work. It was updated again by Tuan Hoang
-<tqhoang at bigfoot.com>.
-.br
-The man page and the command included in the net-tools
-package is totally rewritten by Bernd Eckenfels
-<ecki at linux.de>.
diff --git a/raw/man8/nmbd.8 b/raw/man8/nmbd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index dbf6593..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/nmbd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,178 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "NMBD" 8 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-nmbd \- NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS over IP naming services to clients
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBnmbd\fR [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d <debug level>] [-H <lmhosts file>] [-l <log directory>] [-n <primary netbios name>] [-p <port number>] [-s <configuration file>]
-
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This program is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBnmbd\fR is a server that understands and can reply to NetBIOS over IP name service requests, like those produced by SMB/CIFS clients such as Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP and LanManager clients\&. It also participates in the browsing protocols which make up the Windows "Network Neighborhood" view\&.
-
-.PP
-SMB/CIFS clients, when they start up, may wish to locate an SMB/CIFS server\&. That is, they wish to know what IP number a specified host is using\&.
-
-.PP
-Amongst other services, \fBnmbd\fR will listen for such requests, and if its own NetBIOS name is specified it will respond with the IP number of the host it is running on\&. Its "own NetBIOS name" is by default the primary DNS name of the host it is running on, but this can be overridden with the \fB-n\fR option (see OPTIONS below)\&. Thus \fBnmbd\fR will reply to broadcast queries for its own name(s)\&. Additional names for \fBnmbd\fR to respond on can be set via parameters in the \fBsm [...]
-
-.PP
-\fBnmbd\fR can also be used as a WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) server\&. What this basically means is that it will act as a WINS database server, creating a database from name registration requests that it receives and replying to queries from clients for these names\&.
-
-.PP
-In addition, \fBnmbd\fR can act as a WINS proxy, relaying broadcast queries from clients that do not understand how to talk the WINS protocol to a WINS server\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--D
-If specified, this parameter causes \fBnmbd\fR to operate as a daemon\&. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port\&. By default, \fBnmbd\fR will operate as a daemon if launched from a command shell\&. nmbd can also be operated from the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, although this is not recommended\&.
-
-
-.TP
--F
-If specified, this parameter causes the main \fBnmbd\fR process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running \fBnmbd\fR under process supervisors such as \fBsupervise\fR and \fBsvscan\fR from Daniel J\&. Bernstein's \fBdaemontools\fR package, or the AIX process monitor\&.
-
-
-.TP
--S
-If specified, this parameter causes \fBnmbd\fR to log to standard output rather than a file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--i
-If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell\&. Setting this parameter negates the implicit daemon mode when run from the command line\&. \fBnmbd\fR also logs to standard output, as if the \fB-S\fR parameter had been given\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--H <filename>
-NetBIOS lmhosts file\&. The lmhosts file is a list of NetBIOS names to IP addresses that is loaded by the nmbd server and used via the name resolution mechanism \fIname resolve order\fR described in \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) to resolve any NetBIOS name queries needed by the server\&. Note that the contents of this file are \fBNOT\fR used by \fBnmbd\fR to answer any name queries\&. Adding a line to this file affects name NetBIOS resolution from this host \fBONLY\fR\&.
-
-
-The default path to this file is compiled into Samba as part of the build process\&. Common defaults are \fI/usr/local/samba/lib/lmhosts\fR, \fI/usr/samba/lib/lmhosts\fR or \fI/etc/samba/lmhosts\fR\&. See the \fBlmhosts\fR(5) man page for details on the contents of this file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--V
-Prints the program version number\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s <configuration file>
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
-
-
-.TP
--d|--debug=debuglevel
-\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&.
-
-
-The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&.
-
-
-Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
-
-
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--l|--logfile=logbasename
-File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&.
-
-
-.TP
--p <UDP port number>
-UDP port number is a positive integer value\&. This option changes the default UDP port number (normally 137) that \fBnmbd\fR responds to name queries on\&. Don't use this option unless you are an expert, in which case you won't need help!
-
-
-.SH "FILES"
-
-.TP
-\fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR
-If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fI/etc/rc\fR
-or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&.
-
-
-If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fI/etc/services\fR
-If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fI/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR
-This is the default location of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) server configuration file\&. Other common places that systems install this file are \fI/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR and \fI/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\fR\&.
-
-
-When run as a WINS server (see the \fIwins support\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page), \fBnmbd\fR will store the WINS database in the file \fIwins\&.dat\fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
-
-
-If \fBnmbd\fR is acting as a \fB browse master\fR (see the \fIlocal master\fR parameter in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) man page, \fBnmbd\fR will store the browsing database in the file \fIbrowse\&.dat \fR in the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself\&.
-
-
-.SH "SIGNALS"
-
-.PP
-To shut down an \fBnmbd\fR process it is recommended that SIGKILL (-9) \fBNOT\fR be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the name database in an inconsistent state\&. The correct way to terminate \fBnmbd\fR is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBnmbd\fR will accept SIGHUP, which will cause it to dump out its namelists into the file \fInamelist\&.debug \fR in the \fI/usr/local/samba/var/locks\fR directory (or the \fIvar/locks\fR directory configured under wherever Samba was configured to install itself)\&. This will also cause \fBnmbd\fR to dump out its server database in the \fIlog\&.nmb\fR file\&.
-
-.PP
-The debug log level of nmbd may be raised or lowered using \fBsmbcontrol\fR(1) (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2\&.2)\&. This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBinetd\fR(8), \fBsmbd\fR(8), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBtestparm\fR(1), \fBtestprns\fR(1), and the Internet RFC's \fIrfc1001\&.txt\fR, \fIrfc1002\&.txt\fR\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page http://samba\&.org/cifs/\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/ntsysv.8 b/raw/man8/ntsysv.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 503debb..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/ntsysv.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,34 +0,0 @@
-.TH NTSYSV 8 "Mon Oct 13 1997"
-.UC 4
-.SH NAME
-ntsysv \- simple interface for configuring runlevels
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBntsysv\fR [--back] [--level <levels>]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBntsysv\fR is a simple interface for configuring runlevel services which
-are also configurable through \fBchkconfig\fR. By default, it configures
-the current runlevel. If the user would like to configure other runlevels,
-those levels can be specified on the command line by listing the levels
-after \fB--levels\fR, without any spaces. For example, the option
-\fI--levels 016\fR edits runlevels 0, 1, and 6.
-
-A service is considered to be started in the runlevel set if it is started
-in any of the runlevels which are being edited.
-
-The \fBntsysv\fR window normally contains a \fBCancel\fR button. If
-\fB--back\fR is specified, a \fBBack\fR button appears instead.
-
-.PD
-.SH "RETURN CODES"
-\fBntsysv\fR returns 0 on success, 2 on error, and 1 if the user cancelled
-(or backed out of) the program.
-
-.PD
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR chkconfig (8),
-.BR serviceconf (8)
-
-.SH AUTHOR
-.nf
-Erik Troan <ewt at redhat.com>
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man8/ping.8 b/raw/man8/ping.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 8558de4..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/ping.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,332 +0,0 @@
-.\" This manpage has been automatically generated by docbook2man
-.\" from a DocBook document. This tool can be found at:
-.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
-.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
-.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve at ggi-project.org>.
-.TH "PING" "8" "27 September 2002" "iputils-020927" "System Manager's Manual: iputils"
-.SH NAME
-ping, ping6 \- send ICMP ECHO_REQUEST to network hosts
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-
-\fBping\fR [ \fB-LRUbdfnqrvVaAB\fR] [ \fB-c \fIcount\fB\fR] [ \fB-i \fIinterval\fB\fR] [ \fB-l \fIpreload\fB\fR] [ \fB-p \fIpattern\fB\fR] [ \fB-s \fIpacketsize\fB\fR] [ \fB-t \fIttl\fB\fR] [ \fB-w \fIdeadline\fB\fR] [ \fB-F \fIflowlabel\fB\fR] [ \fB-I \fIinterface\fB\fR] [ \fB-M \fIhint\fB\fR] [ \fB-Q \fItos\fB\fR] [ \fB-S \fIsndbuf\fB\fR] [ \fB-T \fItimestamp option\fB\fR] [ \fB-W \fItimeout\fB\fR] [ \fB\fIhop\fB\fR\fI ...\fR] \fB\fIdestination\fB\fR
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBping\fR uses the ICMP protocol's mandatory ECHO_REQUEST
-datagram to elicit an ICMP ECHO_RESPONSE from a host or gateway.
-ECHO_REQUEST datagrams (``pings'') have an IP and ICMP
-header, followed by a struct timeval and then an arbitrary
-number of ``pad'' bytes used to fill out the packet.
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-.TP
-\fB-a\fR
-Audible ping.
-.TP
-\fB-A\fR
-Adaptive ping. Interpacket interval adapts to round-trip time, so that
-effectively not more than one (or more, if preload is set) unanswered probes
-present in the network. Minimal interval is 200msec for not super-user.
-On networks with low rtt this mode is essentially equivalent to flood mode.
-.TP
-\fB-b\fR
-Allow pinging a broadcast address.
-.TP
-\fB-B\fR
-Do not allow \fBping\fR to change source address of probes.
-The address is bound to one selected when \fBping\fR starts.
-.TP
-\fB-c \fIcount\fB\fR
-Stop after sending \fIcount\fR ECHO_REQUEST
-packets. With
-\fIdeadline\fR
-option, \fBping\fR waits for
-\fIcount\fR ECHO_REPLY packets, until the timeout expires.
-.TP
-\fB-d\fR
-Set the SO_DEBUG option on the socket being used.
-Essentially, this socket option is not used by Linux kernel.
-.TP
-\fB-F \fIflow label\fB\fR
-Allocate and set 20 bit flow label on echo request packets.
-(Only \fBping6\fR). If value is zero, kernel allocates random flow label.
-.TP
-\fB-f\fR
-Flood ping. For every ECHO_REQUEST sent a period ``.'' is printed,
-while for ever ECHO_REPLY received a backspace is printed.
-This provides a rapid display of how many packets are being dropped.
-If interval is not given, it sets interval to zero and
-outputs packets as fast as they come back or one hundred times per second,
-whichever is more.
-Only the super-user may use this option with zero interval.
-.TP
-\fB-i \fIinterval\fB\fR
-Wait \fIinterval\fR seconds between sending each packet.
-The default is to wait for one second between each packet normally,
-or not to wait in flood mode. Only super-user may set interval
-to values less 0.2 seconds.
-.TP
-\fB-I \fIinterface address\fB\fR
-Set source address to specified interface address. Argument
-may be numeric IP address or name of device. When pinging IPv6
-link-local address this option is required.
-.TP
-\fB-l \fIpreload\fB\fR
-If \fIpreload\fR is specified,
-\fBping\fR sends that many packets not waiting for reply.
-Only the super-user may select preload more than 3.
-.TP
-\fB-L\fR
-Suppress loopback of multicast packets. This flag only applies if the ping
-destination is a multicast address.
-.TP
-\fB-n\fR
-Numeric output only.
-No attempt will be made to lookup symbolic names for host addresses.
-.TP
-\fB-p \fIpattern\fB\fR
-You may specify up to 16 ``pad'' bytes to fill out the packet you send.
-This is useful for diagnosing data-dependent problems in a network.
-For example, \fB-p ff\fR will cause the sent packet
-to be filled with all ones.
-.TP
-\fB-Q \fItos\fB\fR
-Set Quality of Service -related bits in ICMP datagrams.
-\fItos\fR can be either decimal or hex number.
-Traditionally (RFC1349), these have been interpreted as: 0 for reserved
-(currently being redefined as congestion control), 1-4 for Type of Service
-and 5-7 for Precedence.
-Possible settings for Type of Service are: minimal cost: 0x02,
-reliability: 0x04, throughput: 0x08, low delay: 0x10. Multiple TOS bits
-should not be set simultaneously. Possible settings for
-special Precedence range from priority (0x20) to net control (0xe0). You
-must be root (CAP_NET_ADMIN capability) to use Critical or
-higher precedence value. You cannot set
-bit 0x01 (reserved) unless ECN has been enabled in the kernel.
-In RFC2474, these fields has been redefined as 8-bit Differentiated
-Services (DS), consisting of: bits 0-1 of separate data (ECN will be used,
-here), and bits 2-7 of Differentiated Services Codepoint (DSCP).
-.TP
-\fB-q\fR
-Quiet output.
-Nothing is displayed except the summary lines at startup time and
-when finished.
-.TP
-\fB-R\fR
-Record route.
-Includes the RECORD_ROUTE option in the ECHO_REQUEST
-packet and displays the route buffer on returned packets.
-Note that the IP header is only large enough for nine such routes.
-Many hosts ignore or discard this option.
-.TP
-\fB-r\fR
-Bypass the normal routing tables and send directly to a host on an attached
-interface.
-If the host is not on a directly-attached network, an error is returned.
-This option can be used to ping a local host through an interface
-that has no route through it provided the option \fB-I\fR is also
-used.
-.TP
-\fB-s \fIpacketsize\fB\fR
-Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent.
-The default is 56, which translates into 64 ICMP
-data bytes when combined with the 8 bytes of ICMP header data.
-.TP
-\fB-S \fIsndbuf\fB\fR
-Set socket sndbuf. If not specified, it is selected to buffer
-not more than one packet.
-.TP
-\fB-t \fIttl\fB\fR
-Set the IP Time to Live.
-.TP
-\fB-T \fItimestamp option\fB\fR
-Set special IP timestamp options.
-\fItimestamp option\fR may be either
-\fItsonly\fR (only timestamps),
-\fItsandaddr\fR (timestamps and addresses) or
-\fItsprespec host1 [host2 [host3 [host4]]]\fR
-(timestamp prespecified hops).
-.TP
-\fB-M \fIhint\fB\fR
-Select Path MTU Discovery strategy.
-\fIhint\fR may be either \fIdo\fR
-(prohibit fragmentation, even local one),
-\fIwant\fR (do PMTU discovery, fragment locally when packet size
-is large), or \fIdont\fR (do not set DF flag).
-.TP
-\fB-U\fR
-Print full user-to-user latency (the old behaviour). Normally
-\fBping\fR
-prints network round trip time, which can be different
-f.e. due to DNS failures.
-.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-Verbose output.
-.TP
-\fB-V\fR
-Show version and exit.
-.TP
-\fB-w \fIdeadline\fB\fR
-Specify a timeout, in seconds, before
-\fBping\fR
-exits regardless of how many
-packets have been sent or received. In this case
-\fBping\fR
-does not stop after
-\fIcount\fR
-packet are sent, it waits either for
-\fIdeadline\fR
-expire or until
-\fIcount\fR
-probes are answered or for some error notification from network.
-.TP
-\fB-W \fItimeout\fB\fR
-Time to wait for a response, in seconds. The option affects only timeout
-in absense of any responses, otherwise \fBping\fR waits for two RTTs.
-.PP
-When using \fBping\fR for fault isolation, it should first be run
-on the local host, to verify that the local network interface is up
-and running. Then, hosts and gateways further and further away should be
-``pinged''. Round-trip times and packet loss statistics are computed.
-If duplicate packets are received, they are not included in the packet
-loss calculation, although the round trip time of these packets is used
-in calculating the minimum/average/maximum round-trip time numbers.
-When the specified number of packets have been sent (and received) or
-if the program is terminated with a
-SIGINT, a brief summary is displayed. Shorter current statistics
-can be obtained without termination of process with signal
-SIGQUIT.
-.PP
-If \fBping\fR does not receive any reply packets at all it will
-exit with code 1. If a packet
-\fIcount\fR
-and
-\fIdeadline\fR
-are both specified, and fewer than
-\fIcount\fR
-packets are received by the time the
-\fIdeadline\fR
-has arrived, it will also exit with code 1.
-On other error it exits with code 2. Otherwise it exits with code 0. This
-makes it possible to use the exit code to see if a host is alive or
-not.
-.PP
-This program is intended for use in network testing, measurement and
-management.
-Because of the load it can impose on the network, it is unwise to use
-\fBping\fR during normal operations or from automated scripts.
-.SH "ICMP PACKET DETAILS"
-.PP
-An IP header without options is 20 bytes.
-An ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packet contains an additional 8 bytes worth
-of ICMP header followed by an arbitrary amount of data.
-When a \fIpacketsize\fR is given, this indicated the size of this
-extra piece of data (the default is 56). Thus the amount of data received
-inside of an IP packet of type ICMP ECHO_REPLY will always be 8 bytes
-more than the requested data space (the ICMP header).
-.PP
-If the data space is at least of size of struct timeval
-\fBping\fR uses the beginning bytes of this space to include
-a timestamp which it uses in the computation of round trip times.
-If the data space is shorter, no round trip times are given.
-.SH "DUPLICATE AND DAMAGED PACKETS"
-.PP
-\fBping\fR will report duplicate and damaged packets.
-Duplicate packets should never occur, and seem to be caused by
-inappropriate link-level retransmissions.
-Duplicates may occur in many situations and are rarely (if ever) a
-good sign, although the presence of low levels of duplicates may not
-always be cause for alarm.
-.PP
-Damaged packets are obviously serious cause for alarm and often
-indicate broken hardware somewhere in the
-\fBping\fR packet's path (in the network or in the hosts).
-.SH "TRYING DIFFERENT DATA PATTERNS"
-.PP
-The (inter)network layer should never treat packets differently depending
-on the data contained in the data portion.
-Unfortunately, data-dependent problems have been known to sneak into
-networks and remain undetected for long periods of time.
-In many cases the particular pattern that will have problems is something
-that doesn't have sufficient ``transitions'', such as all ones or all
-zeros, or a pattern right at the edge, such as almost all zeros.
-It isn't necessarily enough to specify a data pattern of all zeros (for
-example) on the command line because the pattern that is of interest is
-at the data link level, and the relationship between what you type and
-what the controllers transmit can be complicated.
-.PP
-This means that if you have a data-dependent problem you will probably
-have to do a lot of testing to find it.
-If you are lucky, you may manage to find a file that either can't be sent
-across your network or that takes much longer to transfer than other
-similar length files.
-You can then examine this file for repeated patterns that you can test
-using the \fB-p\fR option of \fBping\fR.
-.SH "TTL DETAILS"
-.PP
-The TTL value of an IP packet represents the maximum number of IP routers
-that the packet can go through before being thrown away.
-In current practice you can expect each router in the Internet to decrement
-the TTL field by exactly one.
-.PP
-The TCP/IP specification states that the TTL field for TCP
-packets should be set to 60, but many systems use smaller values
-(4.3 BSD uses 30, 4.2 used 15).
-.PP
-The maximum possible value of this field is 255, and most Unix systems set
-the TTL field of ICMP ECHO_REQUEST packets to 255.
-This is why you will find you can ``ping'' some hosts, but not reach them
-with
-\fBtelnet\fR(1)
-or
-\fBftp\fR(1).
-.PP
-In normal operation ping prints the ttl value from the packet it receives.
-When a remote system receives a ping packet, it can do one of three things
-with the TTL field in its response:
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Not change it; this is what Berkeley Unix systems did before the
-4.3BSD Tahoe release. In this case the TTL value in the received packet
-will be 255 minus the number of routers in the round-trip path.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Set it to 255; this is what current Berkeley Unix systems do.
-In this case the TTL value in the received packet will be 255 minus the
-number of routers in the path \fBfrom\fR
-the remote system \fBto\fR the \fBping\fRing host.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Set it to some other value. Some machines use the same value for
-ICMP packets that they use for TCP packets, for example either 30 or 60.
-Others may use completely wild values.
-.SH "BUGS"
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Many Hosts and Gateways ignore the RECORD_ROUTE option.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-The maximum IP header length is too small for options like
-RECORD_ROUTE to be completely useful.
-There's not much that that can be done about this, however.
-.TP 0.2i
-\(bu
-Flood pinging is not recommended in general, and flood pinging the
-broadcast address should only be done under very controlled conditions.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.PP
-\fBnetstat\fR(1),
-\fBifconfig\fR(8).
-.SH "HISTORY"
-.PP
-The \fBping\fR command appeared in 4.3BSD.
-.PP
-The version described here is its descendant specific to Linux.
-.SH "SECURITY"
-.PP
-\fBping\fR requires CAP_NET_RAWIO capability
-to be executed. It may be used as set-uid root.
-.SH "AVAILABILITY"
-.PP
-\fBping\fR is part of \fIiputils\fR package
-and the latest versions are available in source form for anonymous ftp
-ftp://ftp.inr.ac.ru/ip-routing/iputils-current.tar.gz.
diff --git a/raw/man8/pppd.8 b/raw/man8/pppd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index ec3be32..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/pppd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1590 +0,0 @@
-.\" manual page [] for pppd 2.4
-.\" SH section heading
-.\" SS subsection heading
-.\" LP paragraph
-.\" IP indented paragraph
-.\" TP hanging label
-.TH PPPD 8
-.SH NAME
-pppd \- Point to Point Protocol daemon
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B pppd
-[
-.I tty_name
-] [
-.I speed
-] [
-.I options
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.LP
-The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) provides a method for transmitting
-datagrams over serial point-to-point links. PPP
-is composed of three parts: a method for encapsulating datagrams over
-serial links, an extensible Link Control Protocol (LCP), and
-a family of Network Control Protocols (NCP) for establishing
-and configuring different network-layer protocols.
-.LP
-The encapsulation scheme is provided by driver code in the kernel.
-Pppd provides the basic LCP, authentication support, and an NCP for
-establishing and configuring the Internet Protocol (IP) (called the IP
-Control Protocol, IPCP).
-.SH FREQUENTLY USED OPTIONS
-.TP
-.I <tty_name>
-Communicate over the named device. The string "/dev/" is prepended if
-necessary. If no device name is given, or if the name of the terminal
-connected to the standard input is given, pppd will use that terminal,
-and will not fork to put itself in the background. A value for this
-option from a privileged source cannot be overridden by a
-non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.I <speed>
-Set the baud rate to <speed> (a decimal number). On systems such as
-4.4BSD and NetBSD, any speed can be specified. Other systems
-(e.g. SunOS) allow only a limited set of speeds.
-.TP
-.B asyncmap \fI<map>
-Set the async character map to <map>. This map describes which
-control characters cannot be successfully received over the serial
-line. Pppd will ask the peer to send these characters as a 2-byte
-escape sequence. The argument is a 32 bit hex number with each bit
-representing a character to escape. Bit 0 (00000001) represents the
-character 0x00; bit 31 (80000000) represents the character 0x1f or ^_.
-If multiple \fIasyncmap\fR options are given, the values are ORed
-together. If no \fIasyncmap\fR option is given, no async character
-map will be negotiated for the receive direction; the peer should then
-escape \fIall\fR control characters. To escape transmitted
-characters, use the \fIescape\fR option.
-.TP
-.B auth
-Require the peer to authenticate itself before allowing network
-packets to be sent or received. This option is the default if the
-system has a default route. If neither this option nor the
-\fInoauth\fR option is specified, pppd will only allow the peer to use
-IP addresses to which the system does not already have a route.
-.TP
-.B call \fIname
-Read options from the file /etc/ppp/peers/\fIname\fR. This file may
-contain privileged options, such as \fInoauth\fR, even if pppd
-is not being run by root. The \fIname\fR string may not begin with /
-or include .. as a pathname component. The format of the options file
-is described below.
-.TP
-.B connect \fIscript
-Use the executable or shell command specified by \fIscript\fR to set
-up the serial line. This script would typically use the chat(8)
-program to dial the modem and start the remote ppp session. A value
-for this option from a privileged source cannot be overridden by a
-non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B crtscts
-Use hardware flow control (i.e. RTS/CTS) to control the flow of
-data on the serial port. If neither the \fIcrtscts\fR, the
-\fInocrtscts\fR, the \fIcdtrcts\fR nor the \fInocdtrcts\fR option
-is given, the hardware flow control setting for the serial port is
-left unchanged.
-Some serial ports (such as Macintosh serial ports) lack a true
-RTS output. Such serial ports use this mode to implement
-unidirectional flow control. The serial port will
-suspend transmission when requested by the modem (via CTS)
-but will be unable to request the modem stop sending to the
-computer. This mode retains the ability to use DTR as
-a modem control line.
-.TP
-.B defaultroute
-Add a default route to the system routing tables, using the peer as
-the gateway, when IPCP negotiation is successfully completed.
-This entry is removed when the PPP connection is broken. This option
-is privileged if the \fInodefaultroute\fR option has been specified.
-.TP
-.B disconnect \fIscript
-Run the executable or shell command specified by \fIscript\fR after
-pppd has terminated the link. This script could, for example, issue
-commands to the modem to cause it to hang up if hardware modem control
-signals were not available. The disconnect script is not run if the
-modem has already hung up. A value for this option from a privileged
-source cannot be overridden by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B escape \fIxx,yy,...
-Specifies that certain characters should be escaped on transmission
-(regardless of whether the peer requests them to be escaped with its
-async control character map). The characters to be escaped are
-specified as a list of hex numbers separated by commas. Note that
-almost any character can be specified for the \fIescape\fR option,
-unlike the \fIasyncmap\fR option which only allows control characters
-to be specified. The characters which may not be escaped are those
-with hex values 0x20 - 0x3f or 0x5e.
-.TP
-.B file \fIname
-Read options from file \fIname\fR (the format is described below).
-The file must be readable by the user who has invoked pppd.
-.TP
-.B init \fIscript
-Run the executable or shell command specified by \fIscript\fR to
-initialize the serial line. This script would typically use the
-chat(8) program to configure the modem to enable auto answer. A value
-for this option from a privileged source cannot be overridden by a
-non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B lock
-Specifies that pppd should create a UUCP-style lock file for the
-serial device to ensure exclusive access to the device.
-.TP
-.B mru \fIn
-Set the MRU [Maximum Receive Unit] value to \fIn\fR. Pppd
-will ask the peer to send packets of no more than \fIn\fR bytes. The
-minimum MRU value is 128. The default MRU value is 1500. A value of
-296 is recommended for slow links (40 bytes for TCP/IP header + 256
-bytes of data). (Note that for IPv6 MRU must be at least 1280)
-.TP
-.B mtu \fIn
-Set the MTU [Maximum Transmit Unit] value to \fIn\fR. Unless the
-peer requests a smaller value via MRU negotiation, pppd will
-request that the kernel networking code send data packets of no more
-than \fIn\fR bytes through the PPP network interface. (Note that for
-IPv6 MTU must be at least 1280)
-.TP
-.B passive
-Enables the "passive" option in the LCP. With this option, pppd will
-attempt to initiate a connection; if no reply is received from the
-peer, pppd will then just wait passively for a valid LCP packet from
-the peer, instead of exiting, as it would without this option.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.I <local_IP_address>\fB:\fI<remote_IP_address>
-Set the local and/or remote interface IP addresses. Either one may be
-omitted. The IP addresses can be specified with a host name or in
-decimal dot notation (e.g. 150.234.56.78). The default local
-address is the (first) IP address of the system (unless the
-\fInoipdefault\fR
-option is given). The remote address will be obtained from the peer
-if not specified in any option. Thus, in simple cases, this option is
-not required. If a local and/or remote IP address is specified with
-this option, pppd
-will not accept a different value from the peer in the IPCP
-negotiation, unless the \fIipcp-accept-local\fR and/or
-\fIipcp-accept-remote\fR options are given, respectively.
-.TP
-.B ipv6 \fI<local_interface_identifier>\fR,\fI<remote_interface_identifier>
-Set the local and/or remote 64-bit interface identifier. Either one may be
-omitted. The identifier must be specified in standard ascii notation of
-IPv6 addresses (e.g. ::dead:beef). If the
-\fIipv6cp-use-ipaddr\fR
-option is given, the local identifier is the local IPv4 address (see above).
-On systems which supports a unique persistent id, such as EUI-48 derived
-from the Ethernet MAC address, \fIipv6cp-use-persistent\fR option can be
-used to replace the \fIipv6 <local>,<remote>\fR option. Otherwise the
-identifier is randomized.
-.TP
-.B active-filter \fIfilter-expression
-Specifies a packet filter to be applied to data packets to determine
-which packets are to be regarded as link activity, and therefore reset
-the idle timer, or cause the link to be brought up in demand-dialling
-mode. This option is useful in conjunction with the
-\fBidle\fR option if there are packets being sent or received
-regularly over the link (for example, routing information packets)
-which would otherwise prevent the link from ever appearing to be idle.
-The \fIfilter-expression\fR syntax is as described for tcpdump(1),
-except that qualifiers which are inappropriate for a PPP link, such as
-\fBether\fR and \fBarp\fR, are not permitted. Generally the filter
-expression should be enclosed in single-quotes to prevent whitespace
-in the expression from being interpreted by the shell. This option
-is currently only available under NetBSD, and then only
-if both the kernel and pppd were compiled with PPP_FILTER defined.
-.TP
-.B allow-ip \fIaddress(es)
-Allow peers to use the given IP address or subnet without
-authenticating themselves. The parameter is parsed as for each
-element of the list of allowed IP addresses in the secrets files (see
-the AUTHENTICATION section below).
-.TP
-.B bsdcomp \fInr,nt
-Request that the peer compress packets that it sends, using the
-BSD-Compress scheme, with a maximum code size of \fInr\fR bits, and
-agree to compress packets sent to the peer with a maximum code size of
-\fInt\fR bits. If \fInt\fR is not specified, it defaults to the value
-given for \fInr\fR. Values in the range 9 to 15 may be used for
-\fInr\fR and \fInt\fR; larger values give better compression but
-consume more kernel memory for compression dictionaries.
-Alternatively, a value of 0 for \fInr\fR or \fInt\fR disables
-compression in the corresponding direction. Use \fInobsdcomp\fR or
-\fIbsdcomp 0\fR to disable BSD-Compress compression entirely.
-.TP
-.B cdtrcts
-Use a non-standard hardware flow control (i.e. DTR/CTS) to control
-the flow of data on the serial port. If neither the \fIcrtscts\fR,
-the \fInocrtscts\fR, the \fIcdtrcts\fR nor the \fInocdtrcts\fR
-option is given, the hardware flow control setting for the serial
-port is left unchanged.
-Some serial ports (such as Macintosh serial ports) lack a true
-RTS output. Such serial ports use this mode to implement true
-bi-directional flow control. The sacrifice is that this flow
-control mode does not permit using DTR as a modem control line.
-.TP
-.B chap-interval \fIn
-If this option is given, pppd will rechallenge the peer every \fIn\fR
-seconds.
-.TP
-.B chap-max-challenge \fIn
-Set the maximum number of CHAP challenge transmissions to \fIn\fR
-(default 10).
-.TP
-.B chap-restart \fIn
-Set the CHAP restart interval (retransmission timeout for challenges)
-to \fIn\fR seconds (default 3).
-.TP
-.B connect-delay \fIn
-Wait for up \fIn\fR milliseconds after the connect script finishes for
-a valid PPP packet from the peer. At the end of this time, or when a
-valid PPP packet is received from the peer, pppd will commence
-negotiation by sending its first LCP packet. The default value is
-1000 (1 second). This wait period only applies if the \fBconnect\fR
-or \fBpty\fR option is used.
-.TP
-.B debug
-Enables connection debugging facilities.
-If this option is given, pppd will log the contents of all
-control packets sent or received in a readable form. The packets are
-logged through syslog with facility \fIdaemon\fR and level
-\fIdebug\fR. This information can be directed to a file by setting up
-/etc/syslog.conf appropriately (see syslog.conf(5)).
-.TP
-.B default-asyncmap
-Disable asyncmap negotiation, forcing all control characters to be
-escaped for both the transmit and the receive direction.
-.TP
-.B default-mru
-Disable MRU [Maximum Receive Unit] negotiation. With this option,
-pppd will use the default MRU value of 1500 bytes for both the
-transmit and receive direction.
-.TP
-.B deflate \fInr,nt
-Request that the peer compress packets that it sends, using the
-Deflate scheme, with a maximum window size of \fI2**nr\fR bytes, and
-agree to compress packets sent to the peer with a maximum window size
-of \fI2**nt\fR bytes. If \fInt\fR is not specified, it defaults to
-the value given for \fInr\fR. Values in the range 9 to 15 may be used
-for \fInr\fR and \fInt\fR; larger values give better compression but
-consume more kernel memory for compression dictionaries.
-Alternatively, a value of 0 for \fInr\fR or \fInt\fR disables
-compression in the corresponding direction. Use \fInodeflate\fR or
-\fIdeflate 0\fR to disable Deflate compression entirely. (Note: pppd
-requests Deflate compression in preference to BSD-Compress if the peer
-can do either.)
-.TP
-.B demand
-Initiate the link only on demand, i.e. when data traffic is present.
-With this option, the remote IP address must be specified by the user
-on the command line or in an options file. Pppd will initially
-configure the interface and enable it for IP traffic without
-connecting to the peer. When traffic is available, pppd will
-connect to the peer and perform negotiation, authentication, etc.
-When this is completed, pppd will commence passing data packets
-(i.e., IP packets) across the link.
-
-The \fIdemand\fR option implies the \fIpersist\fR option. If this
-behaviour is not desired, use the \fInopersist\fR option after the
-\fIdemand\fR option. The \fIidle\fR and \fIholdoff\fR
-options are also useful in conjuction with the \fIdemand\fR option.
-.TP
-.B domain \fId
-Append the domain name \fId\fR to the local host name for authentication
-purposes. For example, if gethostname() returns the name porsche, but
-the fully qualified domain name is porsche.Quotron.COM, you could
-specify \fIdomain Quotron.COM\fR. Pppd would then use the name
-\fIporsche.Quotron.COM\fR for looking up secrets in the secrets file,
-and as the default name to send to the peer when authenticating itself
-to the peer. This option is privileged.
-.TP
-.B dryrun
-With the \fBdryrun\fR option, pppd will print out all the option
-values which have been set and then exit, after parsing the command
-line and options files and checking the option values, but before
-initiating the link. The option values are logged at level info, and
-also printed to standard output unless the device on standard output
-is the device that pppd would be using to communicate with the peer.
-.TP
-.B dump
-With the \fBdump\fR option, pppd will print out all the option values
-which have been set. This option is like the \fBdryrun\fR option
-except that pppd proceeds as normal rather than exiting.
-.TP
-.B endpoint \fI<epdisc>
-Sets the endpoint discriminator sent by the local machine to the peer
-during multilink negotiation to \fI<epdisc>\fR. The default is to use
-the MAC address of the first ethernet interface on the system, if any,
-otherwise the IPv4 address corresponding to the hostname, if any,
-provided it is not in the multicast or locally-assigned IP address
-ranges, or the localhost address. The endpoint discriminator can be
-the string \fBnull\fR or of the form \fItype\fR:\fIvalue\fR, where
-type is a decimal number or one of the strings \fBlocal\fR, \fBIP\fR,
-\fBMAC\fR, \fBmagic\fR, or \fBphone\fR. The value is an IP address in
-dotted-decimal notation for the \fBIP\fR type, or a string of bytes in
-hexadecimal, separated by periods or colons for the other types. For
-the MAC type, the value may also be the name of an ethernet or similar
-network interface. This option is currently only available under
-Linux.
-.TP
-.B hide-password
-When logging the contents of PAP packets, this option causes pppd to
-exclude the password string from the log. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B holdoff \fIn
-Specifies how many seconds to wait before re-initiating the link after
-it terminates. This option only has any effect if the \fIpersist\fR
-or \fIdemand\fR option is used. The holdoff period is not applied if
-the link was terminated because it was idle.
-.TP
-.B idle \fIn
-Specifies that pppd should disconnect if the link is idle for \fIn\fR
-seconds. The link is idle when no data packets (i.e. IP packets) are
-being sent or received. Note: it is not advisable to use this option
-with the \fIpersist\fR option without the \fIdemand\fR option.
-If the \fBactive-filter\fR
-option is given, data packets which are rejected by the specified
-activity filter also count as the link being idle.
-.TP
-.B ipcp-accept-local
-With this option, pppd will accept the peer's idea of our local IP
-address, even if the local IP address was specified in an option.
-.TP
-.B ipcp-accept-remote
-With this option, pppd will accept the peer's idea of its (remote) IP
-address, even if the remote IP address was specified in an option.
-.TP
-.B ipcp-max-configure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPCP configure-request transmissions to
-\fIn\fR (default 10).
-.TP
-.B ipcp-max-failure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPCP configure-NAKs returned before starting
-to send configure-Rejects instead to \fIn\fR (default 10).
-.TP
-.B ipcp-max-terminate \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPCP terminate-request transmissions to
-\fIn\fR (default 3).
-.TP
-.B ipcp-restart \fIn
-Set the IPCP restart interval (retransmission timeout) to \fIn\fR
-seconds (default 3).
-.TP
-.B ipparam \fIstring
-Provides an extra parameter to the ip-up and ip-down scripts. If this
-option is given, the \fIstring\fR supplied is given as the 6th
-parameter to those scripts.
-.TP
-.B ipv6cp-max-configure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPv6CP configure-request transmissions to
-\fIn\fR (default 10).
-.TP
-.B ipv6cp-max-failure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPv6CP configure-NAKs returned before starting
-to send configure-Rejects instead to \fIn\fR (default 10).
-.TP
-.B ipv6cp-max-terminate \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPv6CP terminate-request transmissions to
-\fIn\fR (default 3).
-.TP
-.B ipv6cp-restart \fIn
-Set the IPv6CP restart interval (retransmission timeout) to \fIn\fR
-seconds (default 3).
-.TP
-.B ipx
-Enable the IPXCP and IPX protocols. This option is presently only
-supported under Linux, and only if your kernel has been configured to
-include IPX support.
-.TP
-.B ipx-network \fIn
-Set the IPX network number in the IPXCP configure request frame to
-\fIn\fR, a hexadecimal number (without a leading 0x). There is no
-valid default. If this option is not specified, the network number is
-obtained from the peer. If the peer does not have the network number,
-the IPX protocol will not be started.
-.TP
-.B ipx-node \fIn\fB:\fIm
-Set the IPX node numbers. The two node numbers are separated from each
-other with a colon character. The first number \fIn\fR is the local
-node number. The second number \fIm\fR is the peer's node number. Each
-node number is a hexadecimal number, at most 10 digits long. The node
-numbers on the ipx-network must be unique. There is no valid
-default. If this option is not specified then the node numbers are
-obtained from the peer.
-.TP
-.B ipx-router-name \fI<string>
-Set the name of the router. This is a string and is sent to the peer
-as information data.
-.TP
-.B ipx-routing \fIn
-Set the routing protocol to be received by this option. More than one
-instance of \fIipx-routing\fR may be specified. The '\fInone\fR'
-option (0) may be specified as the only instance of ipx-routing. The
-values may be \fI0\fR for \fINONE\fR, \fI2\fR for \fIRIP/SAP\fR, and
-\fI4\fR for \fINLSP\fR.
-.TP
-.B ipxcp-accept-local
-Accept the peer's NAK for the node number specified in the ipx-node
-option. If a node number was specified, and non-zero, the default is
-to insist that the value be used. If you include this option then you
-will permit the peer to override the entry of the node number.
-.TP
-.B ipxcp-accept-network
-Accept the peer's NAK for the network number specified in the
-ipx-network option. If a network number was specified, and non-zero, the
-default is to insist that the value be used. If you include this
-option then you will permit the peer to override the entry of the node
-number.
-.TP
-.B ipxcp-accept-remote
-Use the peer's network number specified in the configure request
-frame. If a node number was specified for the peer and this option was
-not specified, the peer will be forced to use the value which you have
-specified.
-.TP
-.B ipxcp-max-configure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPXCP configure request frames which the
-system will send to \fIn\fR. The default is 10.
-.TP
-.B ipxcp-max-failure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of IPXCP NAK frames which the local system will
-send before it rejects the options. The default value is 3.
-.TP
-.B ipxcp-max-terminate \fIn
-Set the maximum nuber of IPXCP terminate request frames before the
-local system considers that the peer is not listening to them. The
-default value is 3.
-.TP
-.B kdebug \fIn
-Enable debugging code in the kernel-level PPP driver. The argument
-values depend on the specific kernel driver, but in general a value of
-1 will enable general kernel debug messages. (Note that these
-messages are usually only useful for debugging the kernel driver
-itself.) For the Linux 2.2.x kernel driver, the value is a sum of
-bits: 1 to
-enable general debug messages, 2 to request that the contents of
-received packets be printed, and 4 to request that the contents of
-transmitted packets be printed. On most systems, messages printed by
-the kernel are logged by syslog(1) to a file as directed in the
-/etc/syslog.conf configuration file.
-.TP
-.B ktune
-Enables pppd to alter kernel settings as appropriate. Under Linux,
-pppd will enable IP forwarding (i.e. set /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
-to 1) if the \fIproxyarp\fR option is used, and will enable the
-dynamic IP address option (i.e. set /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr to
-1) in demand mode if the local address changes.
-.TP
-.B lcp-echo-failure \fIn
-If this option is given, pppd will presume the peer to be dead
-if \fIn\fR LCP echo-requests are sent without receiving a valid LCP
-echo-reply. If this happens, pppd will terminate the
-connection. Use of this option requires a non-zero value for the
-\fIlcp-echo-interval\fR parameter. This option can be used to enable
-pppd to terminate after the physical connection has been broken
-(e.g., the modem has hung up) in situations where no hardware modem
-control lines are available.
-.TP
-.B lcp-echo-interval \fIn
-If this option is given, pppd will send an LCP echo-request frame to
-the peer every \fIn\fR seconds. Normally the peer should respond to
-the echo-request by sending an echo-reply. This option can be used
-with the \fIlcp-echo-failure\fR option to detect that the peer is no
-longer connected.
-.TP
-.B lcp-max-configure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of LCP configure-request transmissions to
-\fIn\fR (default 10).
-.TP
-.B lcp-max-failure \fIn
-Set the maximum number of LCP configure-NAKs returned before starting
-to send configure-Rejects instead to \fIn\fR (default 10).
-.TP
-.B lcp-max-terminate \fIn
-Set the maximum number of LCP terminate-request transmissions to
-\fIn\fR (default 3).
-.TP
-.B lcp-restart \fIn
-Set the LCP restart interval (retransmission timeout) to \fIn\fR
-seconds (default 3).
-.TP
-.B linkname \fIname\fR
-Sets the logical name of the link to \fIname\fR. Pppd will create a
-file named \fBppp-\fIname\fB.pid\fR in /var/run (or /etc/ppp on some
-systems) containing its process ID. This can be useful in determining
-which instance of pppd is responsible for the link to a given peer
-system. This is a privileged option.
-.TP
-.B local
-Don't use the modem control lines. With this option, pppd will ignore
-the state of the CD (Carrier Detect) signal from the modem and will
-not change the state of the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal.
-.TP
-.B logfd \fIn
-Send log messages to file descriptor \fIn\fR. Pppd will send log
-messages to at most one file or file descriptor (as well as sending
-the log messages to syslog), so this option and the \fBlogfile\fR
-option are mutually exclusive. The default is for pppd to send log
-messages to stdout (file descriptor 1), unless the serial port is
-already open on stdout.
-.TP
-.B logfile \fIfilename
-Append log messages to the file \fIfilename\fR (as well as sending the
-log messages to syslog). The file is opened with the privileges of
-the user who invoked pppd, in append mode.
-.TP
-.B login
-Use the system password database for authenticating the peer using
-PAP, and record the user in the system wtmp file. Note that the peer
-must have an entry in the /etc/ppp/pap-secrets file as well as the
-system password database to be allowed access.
-.TP
-.B maxconnect \fIn
-Terminate the connection when it has been available for network
-traffic for \fIn\fR seconds (i.e. \fIn\fR seconds after the first
-network control protocol comes up).
-.TP
-.B maxfail \fIn
-Terminate after \fIn\fR consecutive failed connection attempts. A
-value of 0 means no limit. The default value is 10.
-.TP
-.B modem
-Use the modem control lines. This option is the default. With this
-option, pppd will wait for the CD (Carrier Detect) signal from the
-modem to be asserted when opening the serial device (unless a connect
-script is specified), and it will drop the DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
-signal briefly when the connection is terminated and before executing
-the connect script. On Ultrix, this option implies hardware flow
-control, as for the \fIcrtscts\fR option.
-.TP
-.B mp
-Enables the use of PPP multilink; this is an alias for the `multilink'
-option. This option is currently only available under Linux.
-.TP
-.B mpshortseq
-Enables the use of short (12-bit) sequence numbers in multilink
-headers, as opposed to 24-bit sequence numbers. This option is only
-available under Linux, and only has any effect if multilink is
-enabled (see the multilink option).
-.TP
-.B mrru \fIn
-Sets the Maximum Reconstructed Receive Unit to \fIn\fR. The MRRU is
-the maximum size for a received packet on a multilink bundle, and is
-analogous to the MRU for the individual links. This option is
-currently only available under Linux, and only has any effect if
-multilink is enabled (see the multilink option).
-.TP
-.B ms-dns \fI<addr>
-If pppd is acting as a server for Microsoft Windows clients, this
-option allows pppd to supply one or two DNS (Domain Name Server)
-addresses to the clients. The first instance of this option specifies
-the primary DNS address; the second instance (if given) specifies the
-secondary DNS address. (This option was present in some older
-versions of pppd under the name \fBdns-addr\fR.)
-.TP
-.B ms-wins \fI<addr>
-If pppd is acting as a server for Microsoft Windows or "Samba"
-clients, this option allows pppd to supply one or two WINS (Windows
-Internet Name Services) server addresses to the clients. The first
-instance of this option specifies the primary WINS address; the second
-instance (if given) specifies the secondary WINS address.
-.TP
-.B multilink
-Enables the use of the PPP multilink protocol. If the peer also
-supports multilink, then this link can become part of a bundle between
-the local system and the peer. If there is an existing bundle to the
-peer, pppd will join this link to that bundle, otherwise pppd will
-create a new bundle. See the MULTILINK section below. This option is
-currently only available under Linux.
-.TP
-.B name \fIname
-Set the name of the local system for authentication purposes to
-\fIname\fR. This is a privileged option. With this option, pppd will
-use lines in the secrets files which have \fIname\fR as the second
-field when looking for a secret to use in authenticating the peer. In
-addition, unless overridden with the \fIuser\fR option, \fIname\fR
-will be used as the name to send to the peer when authenticating the
-local system to the peer. (Note that pppd does not append the domain
-name to \fIname\fR.)
-.TP
-.B netmask \fIn
-Set the interface netmask to \fIn\fR, a 32 bit netmask in "decimal dot"
-notation (e.g. 255.255.255.0). If this option is given, the value
-specified is ORed with the default netmask. The default netmask is
-chosen based on the negotiated remote IP address; it is the
-appropriate network mask for the class of the remote IP address, ORed
-with the netmasks for any non point-to-point network interfaces in the
-system which are on the same network. (Note: on some platforms, pppd
-will always use 255.255.255.255 for the netmask, if that is the only
-appropriate value for a point-to-point interface.)
-.TP
-.B noaccomp
-Disable Address/Control compression in both directions (send and
-receive).
-.TP
-.B noauth
-Do not require the peer to authenticate itself. This option is
-privileged.
-.TP
-.B nobsdcomp
-Disables BSD-Compress compression; \fBpppd\fR will not request or
-agree to compress packets using the BSD-Compress scheme.
-.TP
-.B noccp
-Disable CCP (Compression Control Protocol) negotiation. This option
-should only be required if the peer is buggy and gets confused by
-requests from pppd for CCP negotiation.
-.TP
-.B nocrtscts
-Disable hardware flow control (i.e. RTS/CTS) on the serial port.
-If neither the \fIcrtscts\fR nor the \fInocrtscts\fR nor the
-\fIcdtrcts\fR nor the \fInocdtrcts\fR option is given, the hardware
-flow control setting for the serial port is left unchanged.
-.TP
-.B nocdtrcts
-This option is a synonym for \fInocrtscts\fR. Either of these options will
-disable both forms of hardware flow control.
-.TP
-.B nodefaultroute
-Disable the \fIdefaultroute\fR option. The system administrator who
-wishes to prevent users from creating default routes with pppd
-can do so by placing this option in the /etc/ppp/options file.
-.TP
-.B nodeflate
-Disables Deflate compression; pppd will not request or agree to
-compress packets using the Deflate scheme.
-.TP
-.B nodetach
-Don't detach from the controlling terminal. Without this option, if a
-serial device other than the terminal on the standard input is
-specified, pppd will fork to become a background process.
-.TP
-.B noendpoint
-Disables pppd from sending an endpoint discriminator to the peer or
-accepting one from the peer (see the MULTILINK section below). This
-option should only be required if the peer is buggy.
-.TP
-.B noip
-Disable IPCP negotiation and IP communication. This option should
-only be required if the peer is buggy and gets confused by requests
-from pppd for IPCP negotiation.
-.TP
-.B noipv6
-Disable IPv6CP negotiation and IPv6 communication. This option should
-only be required if the peer is buggy and gets confused by requests
-from pppd for IPv6CP negotiation.
-.TP
-.B noipdefault
-Disables the default behaviour when no local IP address is specified,
-which is to determine (if possible) the local IP address from the
-hostname. With this option, the peer will have to supply the local IP
-address during IPCP negotiation (unless it specified explicitly on the
-command line or in an options file).
-.TP
-.B noipx
-Disable the IPXCP and IPX protocols. This option should only be
-required if the peer is buggy and gets confused by requests from pppd
-for IPXCP negotiation.
-.TP
-.B noktune
-Opposite of the \fIktune\fR option; disables pppd from changing system
-settings.
-.TP
-.B nolog
-Do not send log messages to a file or file descriptor. This option
-cancels the \fBlogfd\fR and \fBlogfile\fR options.
-.TP
-.B nomagic
-Disable magic number negotiation. With this option, pppd cannot
-detect a looped-back line. This option should only be needed if the
-peer is buggy.
-.TP
-.B nomp
-Disables the use of PPP multilink. This option is currently only
-available under Linux.
-.TP
-.B nompshortseq
-Disables the use of short (12-bit) sequence numbers in the PPP
-multilink protocol, forcing the use of 24-bit sequence numbers. This
-option is currently only available under Linux, and only has any
-effect if multilink is enabled.
-.TP
-.B nomultilink
-Disables the use of PPP multilink. This option is currently only
-available under Linux.
-.TP
-.B nopcomp
-Disable protocol field compression negotiation in both the receive and
-the transmit direction.
-.TP
-.B nopersist
-Exit once a connection has been made and terminated. This is the
-default unless the \fIpersist\fR or \fIdemand\fR option has been
-specified.
-.TP
-.B nopredictor1
-Do not accept or agree to Predictor-1 compression.
-.TP
-.B noproxyarp
-Disable the \fIproxyarp\fR option. The system administrator who
-wishes to prevent users from creating proxy ARP entries with pppd can
-do so by placing this option in the /etc/ppp/options file.
-.TP
-.B notty
-Normally, pppd requires a terminal device. With this option, pppd
-will allocate itself a pseudo-tty master/slave pair and use the slave
-as its terminal device. Pppd will create a child process to act as a
-`character shunt' to transfer characters between the pseudo-tty master
-and its standard input and output. Thus pppd will transmit characters
-on its standard output and receive characters on its standard input
-even if they are not terminal devices. This option increases the
-latency and CPU overhead of transferring data over the ppp interface
-as all of the characters sent and received must flow through the
-character shunt process. An explicit device name may not be given if
-this option is used.
-.TP
-.B novj
-Disable Van Jacobson style TCP/IP header compression in both the
-transmit and the receive direction.
-.TP
-.B novjccomp
-Disable the connection-ID compression option in Van Jacobson style
-TCP/IP header compression. With this option, pppd will not omit the
-connection-ID byte from Van Jacobson compressed TCP/IP headers, nor
-ask the peer to do so.
-.TP
-.B papcrypt
-Indicates that all secrets in the /etc/ppp/pap-secrets file which are
-used for checking the identity of the peer are encrypted, and thus
-pppd should not accept a password which, before encryption, is
-identical to the secret from the /etc/ppp/pap-secrets file.
-.TP
-.B pap-max-authreq \fIn
-Set the maximum number of PAP authenticate-request transmissions to
-\fIn\fR (default 10).
-.TP
-.B pap-restart \fIn
-Set the PAP restart interval (retransmission timeout) to \fIn\fR
-seconds (default 3).
-.TP
-.B pap-timeout \fIn
-Set the maximum time that pppd will wait for the peer to authenticate
-itself with PAP to \fIn\fR seconds (0 means no limit).
-.TP
-.B pass-filter \fIfilter-expression
-Specifies a packet filter to applied to data packets being sent or
-received to determine which packets should be allowed to pass.
-Packets which are rejected by the filter are silently discarded. This
-option can be used to prevent specific network daemons (such as
-routed) using up link bandwidth, or to provide a basic firewall
-capability.
-The \fIfilter-expression\fR syntax is as described for tcpdump(1),
-except that qualifiers which are inappropriate for a PPP link, such as
-\fBether\fR and \fBarp\fR, are not permitted. Generally the filter
-expression should be enclosed in single-quotes to prevent whitespace
-in the expression from being interpreted by the shell. Note that it
-is possible to apply different constraints to incoming and outgoing
-packets using the \fBinbound\fR and \fBoutbound\fR qualifiers. This
-option is currently only available under NetBSD, and then only if both
-the kernel and pppd were compiled with PPP_FILTER defined.
-.TP
-.B persist
-Do not exit after a connection is terminated; instead try to reopen
-the connection.
-.TP
-.B plugin \fIfilename
-Load the shared library object file \fIfilename\fR as a plugin. This
-is a privileged option.
-.TP
-.B predictor1
-Request that the peer compress frames that it sends using Predictor-1
-compression, and agree to compress transmitted frames with Predictor-1
-if requested. This option has no effect unless the kernel driver
-supports Predictor-1 compression.
-.TP
-.B privgroup \fIgroup-name
-Allows members of group \fIgroup-name\fR to use privileged options.
-This is a privileged option. Use of this option requires care as
-there is no guarantee that members of \fIgroup-name\fR cannot use pppd
-to become root themselves. Consider it equivalent to putting the
-members of \fIgroup-name\fR in the kmem or disk group.
-.TP
-.B proxyarp
-Add an entry to this system's ARP [Address Resolution Protocol] table
-with the IP address of the peer and the Ethernet address of this
-system. This will have the effect of making the peer appear to other
-systems to be on the local ethernet.
-.TP
-.B pty \fIscript
-Specifies that the command \fIscript\fR is to be used to communicate
-rather than a specific terminal device. Pppd will allocate itself a
-pseudo-tty master/slave pair and use the slave as its terminal
-device. The \fIscript\fR will be run in a child process with the
-pseudo-tty master as its standard input and output. An explicit
-device name may not be given if this option is used. (Note: if the
-\fIrecord\fR option is used in conjuction with the \fIpty\fR option,
-the child process will have pipes on its standard input and output.)
-.TP
-.B receive-all
-With this option, pppd will accept all control characters from the
-peer, including those marked in the receive asyncmap. Without this
-option, pppd will discard those characters as specified in RFC1662.
-This option should only be needed if the peer is buggy.
-.TP
-.B record \fIfilename
-Specifies that pppd should record all characters sent and received to
-a file named \fIfilename\fR. This file is opened in append mode,
-using the user's user-ID and permissions. This option is implemented
-using a pseudo-tty and a process to transfer characters between the
-pseudo-tty and the real serial device, so it will increase the latency
-and CPU overhead of transferring data over the ppp interface. The
-characters are stored in a tagged format with timestamps, which can be
-displayed in readable form using the pppdump(8) program.
-.TP
-.B remotename \fIname
-Set the assumed name of the remote system for authentication purposes
-to \fIname\fR.
-.TP
-.B refuse-chap
-With this option, pppd will not agree to authenticate itself to the
-peer using CHAP.
-.TP
-.B refuse-pap
-With this option, pppd will not agree to authenticate itself to the
-peer using PAP.
-.TP
-.B require-chap
-Require the peer to authenticate itself using CHAP [Challenge
-Handshake Authentication Protocol] authentication.
-.TP
-.B require-pap
-Require the peer to authenticate itself using PAP [Password
-Authentication Protocol] authentication.
-.TP
-.B show-password
-When logging the contents of PAP packets, this option causes pppd to
-show the password string in the log message.
-.TP
-.B silent
-With this option, pppd will not transmit LCP packets to initiate a
-connection until a valid LCP packet is received from the peer (as for
-the `passive' option with ancient versions of pppd).
-.TP
-.B sync
-Use synchronous HDLC serial encoding instead of asynchronous.
-The device used by pppd with this option must have sync support.
-Currently supports Microgate SyncLink adapters
-under Linux and FreeBSD 2.2.8 and later.
-.TP
-.B updetach
-With this option, pppd will detach from its controlling terminal once
-it has successfully established the ppp connection (to the point where
-the first network control protocol, usually the IP control protocol,
-has come up).
-.TP
-.B usehostname
-Enforce the use of the hostname (with domain name appended, if given)
-as the name of the local system for authentication purposes (overrides
-the \fIname\fR option). This option is not normally needed since the
-\fIname\fR option is privileged.
-.TP
-.B usepeerdns
-Ask the peer for up to 2 DNS server addresses. The addresses supplied
-by the peer (if any) are passed to the /etc/ppp/ip-up script in the
-environment variables DNS1 and DNS2. In addition, pppd will create an
-/etc/ppp/resolv.conf file containing one or two nameserver lines with
-the address(es) supplied by the peer.
-.TP
-.B user \fIname
-Sets the name used for authenticating the local system to the peer to
-\fIname\fR.
-.TP
-.B vj-max-slots \fIn
-Sets the number of connection slots to be used by the Van Jacobson
-TCP/IP header compression and decompression code to \fIn\fR, which
-must be between 2 and 16 (inclusive).
-.TP
-.B welcome \fIscript
-Run the executable or shell command specified by \fIscript\fR before
-initiating PPP negotiation, after the connect script (if any) has
-completed. A value for this option from a privileged source cannot be
-overridden by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B xonxoff
-Use software flow control (i.e. XON/XOFF) to control the flow of data on
-the serial port.
-.SH OPTIONS FILES
-Options can be taken from files as well as the command line. Pppd
-reads options from the files /etc/ppp/options, ~/.ppprc and
-/etc/ppp/options.\fIttyname\fR (in that order) before processing the
-options on the command line. (In fact, the command-line options are
-scanned to find the terminal name before the options.\fIttyname\fR
-file is read.) In forming the name of the options.\fIttyname\fR file,
-the initial /dev/ is removed from the terminal name, and any remaining
-/ characters are replaced with dots.
-.PP
-An options file is parsed into a series of words, delimited by
-whitespace. Whitespace can be included in a word by enclosing the
-word in double-quotes ("). A backslash (\\) quotes the following character.
-A hash (#) starts a comment, which continues until the end of the
-line. There is no restriction on using the \fIfile\fR or \fIcall\fR
-options within an options file.
-.SH SECURITY
-.I pppd
-provides system administrators with sufficient access control that PPP
-access to a server machine can be provided to legitimate users without
-fear of compromising the security of the server or the network it's
-on. This control is provided through restrictions on which IP
-addresses the peer may use, based on its authenticated identity (if
-any), and through restrictions on which options a non-privileged user
-may use. Several of pppd's options are privileged, in particular
-those which permit potentially insecure configurations; these options
-are only accepted in files which are under the control of the system
-administrator, or if pppd is being run by root.
-.PP
-The default behaviour of pppd is to allow an unauthenticated peer to
-use a given IP address only if the system does not already have a
-route to that IP address. For example, a system with a
-permanent connection to the wider internet will normally have a
-default route, and thus all peers will have to authenticate themselves
-in order to set up a connection. On such a system, the \fIauth\fR
-option is the default. On the other hand, a system where the
-PPP link is the only connection to the internet will not normally have
-a default route, so the peer will be able to use almost any IP address
-without authenticating itself.
-.PP
-As indicated above, some security-sensitive options are privileged,
-which means that they may not be used by an ordinary non-privileged
-user running a setuid-root pppd, either on the command line, in the
-user's ~/.ppprc file, or in an options file read using the \fIfile\fR
-option. Privileged options may be used in /etc/ppp/options file or in
-an options file read using the \fIcall\fR option. If pppd is being
-run by the root user, privileged options can be used without
-restriction.
-.PP
-When opening the device, pppd uses either the invoking user's user ID
-or the root UID (that is, 0), depending on whether the device name was
-specified by the user or the system administrator. If the device name
-comes from a privileged source, that is, /etc/ppp/options or an
-options file read using the \fIcall\fR option, pppd uses full root
-privileges when opening the device. Thus, by creating an appropriate
-file under /etc/ppp/peers, the system administrator can allow users to
-establish a ppp connection via a device which they would not normally
-have permission to access. Otherwise pppd uses the invoking user's
-real UID when opening the device.
-.SH AUTHENTICATION
-Authentication is the process whereby one peer convinces the other of
-its identity. This involves the first peer sending its name to the
-other, together with some kind of secret information which could only
-come from the genuine authorized user of that name. In such an
-exchange, we will call the first peer the "client" and the other the
-"server". The client has a name by which it identifies itself to the
-server, and the server also has a name by which it identifies itself
-to the client. Generally the genuine client shares some secret (or
-password) with the server, and authenticates itself by proving that it
-knows that secret. Very often, the names used for authentication
-correspond to the internet hostnames of the peers, but this is not
-essential.
-.LP
-At present, pppd supports two authentication protocols: the Password
-Authentication Protocol (PAP) and the Challenge Handshake
-Authentication Protocol (CHAP). PAP involves the client sending its
-name and a cleartext password to the server to authenticate itself.
-In contrast, the server initiates the CHAP authentication exchange by
-sending a challenge to the client (the challenge packet includes the
-server's name). The client must respond with a response which
-includes its name plus a hash value derived from the shared secret and
-the challenge, in order to prove that it knows the secret.
-.LP
-The PPP protocol, being symmetrical, allows both peers to require the
-other to authenticate itself. In that case, two separate and
-independent authentication exchanges will occur. The two exchanges
-could use different authentication protocols, and in principle,
-different names could be used in the two exchanges.
-.LP
-The default behaviour of pppd is to agree to authenticate if
-requested, and to not require authentication from the peer. However,
-pppd will not agree to authenticate itself with a particular protocol
-if it has no secrets which could be used to do so.
-.LP
-Pppd stores secrets for use in authentication in secrets
-files (/etc/ppp/pap-secrets for PAP, /etc/ppp/chap-secrets for CHAP).
-Both secrets files have the same format. The secrets files can
-contain secrets for pppd to use in authenticating itself to other
-systems, as well as secrets for pppd to use when authenticating other
-systems to itself.
-.LP
-Each line in a secrets file contains one secret. A given secret is
-specific to a particular combination of client and server - it can
-only be used by that client to authenticate itself to that server.
-Thus each line in a secrets file has at least 3 fields: the name of
-the client, the name of the server, and the secret. These fields may
-be followed by a list of the IP addresses that the specified client
-may use when connecting to the specified server.
-.LP
-A secrets file is parsed into words as for a options file, so the
-client name, server name and secrets fields must each be one word,
-with any embedded spaces or other special characters quoted or
-escaped. Note that case is significant in the client and server names
-and in the secret.
-.LP
-If the secret starts with an `@', what follows is assumed to be the
-name of a file from which to read the secret. A "*" as the client or
-server name matches any name. When selecting a secret, pppd takes the
-best match, i.e. the match with the fewest wildcards.
-.LP
-Any following words on the same line are taken to be a list of
-acceptable IP addresses for that client. If there are only 3 words on
-the line, or if the first word is "-", then all IP addresses are
-disallowed. To allow any address, use "*". A word starting with "!"
-indicates that the specified address is \fInot\fR acceptable. An
-address may be followed by "/" and a number \fIn\fR, to indicate a
-whole subnet, i.e. all addresses which have the same value in the most
-significant \fIn\fR bits. In this form, the address may be followed
-by a plus sign ("+") to indicate that one address from the subnet is
-authorized, based on the ppp network interface unit number in use.
-In this case, the host part of the address will be set to the unit
-number plus one.
-.LP
-Thus a secrets file contains both secrets for use in authenticating
-other hosts, plus secrets which we use for authenticating ourselves to
-others. When pppd is authenticating the peer (checking the peer's
-identity), it chooses a secret with the peer's name in the first
-field and the name of the local system in the second field. The
-name of the local system defaults to the hostname, with the domain
-name appended if the \fIdomain\fR option is used. This default can be
-overridden with the \fIname\fR option, except when the
-\fIusehostname\fR option is used.
-.LP
-When pppd is choosing a secret to use in authenticating itself to the
-peer, it first determines what name it is going to use to identify
-itself to the peer. This name can be specified by the user with the
-\fIuser\fR option. If this option is not used, the name defaults to
-the name of the local system, determined as described in the previous
-paragraph. Then pppd looks for a secret with this name in the first
-field and the peer's name in the second field. Pppd will know the
-name of the peer if CHAP authentication is being used, because the
-peer will have sent it in the challenge packet. However, if PAP is being
-used, pppd will have to determine the peer's name from the options
-specified by the user. The user can specify the peer's name directly
-with the \fIremotename\fR option. Otherwise, if the remote IP address
-was specified by a name (rather than in numeric form), that name will
-be used as the peer's name. Failing that, pppd will use the null
-string as the peer's name.
-.LP
-When authenticating the peer with PAP, the supplied password is first
-compared with the secret from the secrets file. If the password
-doesn't match the secret, the password is encrypted using crypt() and
-checked against the secret again. Thus secrets for authenticating the
-peer can be stored in encrypted form if desired. If the
-\fIpapcrypt\fR option is given, the first (unencrypted) comparison is
-omitted, for better security.
-.LP
-Furthermore, if the \fIlogin\fR option was specified, the username and
-password are also checked against the system password database. Thus,
-the system administrator can set up the pap-secrets file to allow PPP
-access only to certain users, and to restrict the set of IP addresses
-that each user can use. Typically, when using the \fIlogin\fR option,
-the secret in /etc/ppp/pap-secrets would be "", which will match any
-password supplied by the peer. This avoids the need to have the same
-secret in two places.
-.LP
-Authentication must be satisfactorily completed before IPCP (or any
-other Network Control Protocol) can be started. If the peer is
-required to authenticate itself, and fails to do so, pppd will
-terminated the link (by closing LCP). If IPCP negotiates an
-unacceptable IP address for the remote host, IPCP will be closed. IP
-packets can only be sent or received when IPCP is open.
-.LP
-In some cases it is desirable to allow some hosts which can't
-authenticate themselves to connect and use one of a restricted set of
-IP addresses, even when the local host generally requires
-authentication. If the peer refuses to authenticate itself when
-requested, pppd takes that as equivalent to authenticating with PAP
-using the empty string for the username and password. Thus, by adding
-a line to the pap-secrets file which specifies the empty string for
-the client and password, it is possible to allow restricted access to
-hosts which refuse to authenticate themselves.
-.SH ROUTING
-.LP
-When IPCP negotiation is completed successfully, pppd will inform the
-kernel of the local and remote IP addresses for the ppp interface.
-This is sufficient to create a host route to the remote end of the
-link, which will enable the peers to exchange IP packets.
-Communication with other machines generally requires further
-modification to routing tables and/or ARP (Address Resolution
-Protocol) tables. In most cases the \fIdefaultroute\fR and/or
-\fIproxyarp\fR options are sufficient for this, but in some cases
-further intervention is required. The /etc/ppp/ip-up script can be
-used for this.
-.LP
-Sometimes it is desirable to add a default route through the remote
-host, as in the case of a machine whose only connection to the
-Internet is through the ppp interface. The \fIdefaultroute\fR option
-causes pppd to create such a default route when IPCP comes up, and
-delete it when the link is terminated.
-.LP
-In some cases it is desirable to use proxy ARP, for example on a
-server machine connected to a LAN, in order to allow other hosts to
-communicate with the remote host. The \fIproxyarp\fR option causes
-pppd to look for a network interface on the same subnet as the remote
-host (an interface supporting broadcast and ARP, which is up and not a
-point-to-point or loopback interface). If found, pppd creates a
-permanent, published ARP entry with the IP address of the remote host
-and the hardware address of the network interface found.
-.LP
-When the \fIdemand\fR option is used, the interface IP addresses have
-already been set at the point when IPCP comes up. If pppd has not
-been able to negotiate the same addresses that it used to configure
-the interface (for example when the peer is an ISP that uses dynamic
-IP address assignment), pppd has to change the interface IP addresses
-to the negotiated addresses. This may disrupt existing connections,
-and the use of demand dialling with peers that do dynamic IP address
-assignment is not recommended.
-.SH MULTILINK
-Multilink PPP provides the capability to combine two or more PPP links
-between a pair of machines into a single `bundle', which appears as a
-single virtual PPP link which has the combined bandwidth of the
-individual links. Currently, multilink PPP is only supported under
-Linux.
-.LP
-Pppd detects that the link it is controlling is connected to the same
-peer as another link using the peer's endpoint discriminator and the
-authenticated identity of the peer (if it authenticates itself). The
-endpoint discriminator is a block of data which is hopefully unique
-for each peer. Several types of data can be used, including
-locally-assigned strings of bytes, IP addresses, MAC addresses,
-randomly strings of bytes, or E-164 phone numbers. The endpoint
-discriminator sent to the peer by pppd can be set using the endpoint
-option.
-.LP
-In circumstances the peer may send no endpoint discriminator or a
-non-unique value. The optional bundle option adds an extra string
-which is added to the peer's endpoint discriminator and authenticated
-identity when matching up links to be joined together in a bundle.
-The bundle option can also be used to allow the establishment of
-multiple bundles between the local system and the peer. Pppd uses a
-TDB database in /var/run/pppd.tdb to match up links.
-.LP
-Assuming that multilink is enabled and the peer is willing to
-negotiate multilink, then when pppd is invoked to bring up the first
-link to the peer, it will detect that no other link is connected to
-the peer and create a new bundle, that is, another ppp network
-interface unit. When another pppd is invoked to bring up another link
-to the peer, it will detect the existing bundle and join its link to
-it. Currently, if the first pppd terminates (for example, because of
-a hangup or a received signal) the bundle is destroyed.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.LP
-The following examples assume that the /etc/ppp/options file contains
-the \fIauth\fR option (as in the default /etc/ppp/options file in the
-ppp distribution).
-.LP
-Probably the most common use of pppd is to dial out to an ISP. This
-can be done with a command such as
-.IP
-pppd call isp
-.LP
-where the /etc/ppp/peers/isp file is set up by the system
-administrator to contain something like this:
-.IP
-ttyS0 19200 crtscts
-.br
-connect '/usr/sbin/chat -v -f /etc/ppp/chat-isp'
-.br
-noauth
-.LP
-In this example, we are using chat to dial the ISP's modem and go
-through any logon sequence required. The /etc/ppp/chat-isp file
-contains the script used by chat; it could for example contain
-something like this:
-.IP
-ABORT "NO CARRIER"
-.br
-ABORT "NO DIALTONE"
-.br
-ABORT "ERROR"
-.br
-ABORT "NO ANSWER"
-.br
-ABORT "BUSY"
-.br
-ABORT "Username/Password Incorrect"
-.br
-"" "at"
-.br
-OK "at&d0&c1"
-.br
-OK "atdt2468135"
-.br
-"name:" "^Umyuserid"
-.br
-"word:" "\\qmypassword"
-.br
-"ispts" "\\q^Uppp"
-.br
-"~-^Uppp-~"
-.LP
-See the chat(8) man page for details of chat scripts.
-.LP
-Pppd can also be used to provide a dial-in ppp service for users. If
-the users already have login accounts, the simplest way to set up the
-ppp service is to let the users log in to their accounts and run pppd
-(installed setuid-root) with a command such as
-.IP
-pppd proxyarp
-.LP
-To allow a user to use the PPP facilities, you need to allocate an IP
-address for that user's machine and create an entry in
-/etc/ppp/pap-secrets or /etc/ppp/chap-secrets (depending on which
-authentication method the PPP implementation on the user's machine
-supports), so that the user's
-machine can authenticate itself. For example, if Joe has a machine
-called "joespc" which is to be allowed to dial in to the machine
-called "server" and use the IP address joespc.my.net, you would add an
-entry like this to /etc/ppp/pap-secrets or /etc/ppp/chap-secrets:
-.IP
-joespc server "joe's secret" joespc.my.net
-.LP
-Alternatively, you can create a username called (for example) "ppp",
-whose login shell is pppd and whose home directory is /etc/ppp.
-Options to be used when pppd is run this way can be put in
-/etc/ppp/.ppprc.
-.LP
-If your serial connection is any more complicated than a piece of
-wire, you may need to arrange for some control characters to be
-escaped. In particular, it is often useful to escape XON (^Q) and
-XOFF (^S), using \fIasyncmap a0000\fR. If the path includes a telnet,
-you probably should escape ^] as well (\fIasyncmap 200a0000\fR). If
-the path includes an rlogin, you will need to use the \fIescape ff\fR
-option on the end which is running the rlogin client, since many
-rlogin implementations are not transparent; they will remove the
-sequence [0xff, 0xff, 0x73, 0x73, followed by any 8 bytes] from the
-stream.
-.SH DIAGNOSTICS
-.LP
-Messages are sent to the syslog daemon using facility LOG_DAEMON.
-(This can be overriden by recompiling pppd with the macro
-LOG_PPP defined as the desired facility.) In order to see the error
-and debug messages, you will need to edit your /etc/syslog.conf file
-to direct the messages to the desired output device or file.
-.LP
-The \fIdebug\fR option causes the contents of all control packets sent
-or received to be logged, that is, all LCP, PAP, CHAP or IPCP packets.
-This can be useful if the PPP negotiation does not succeed or if
-authentication fails.
-If debugging is enabled at compile time, the \fIdebug\fR option also
-causes other debugging messages to be logged.
-.LP
-Debugging can also be enabled or disabled by sending a SIGUSR1 signal
-to the pppd process. This signal acts as a toggle.
-.SH EXIT STATUS
-The exit status of pppd is set to indicate whether any error was
-detected, or the reason for the link being terminated. The values
-used are:
-.TP
-.B 0
-Pppd has detached, or otherwise the connection was successfully
-established and terminated at the peer's request.
-.TP
-.B 1
-An immediately fatal error of some kind occurred, such as an essential
-system call failing, or running out of virtual memory.
-.TP
-.B 2
-An error was detected in processing the options given, such as two
-mutually exclusive options being used.
-.TP
-.B 3
-Pppd is not setuid-root and the invoking user is not root.
-.TP
-.B 4
-The kernel does not support PPP, for example, the PPP kernel driver is
-not included or cannot be loaded.
-.TP
-.B 5
-Pppd terminated because it was sent a SIGINT, SIGTERM or SIGHUP
-signal.
-.TP
-.B 6
-The serial port could not be locked.
-.TP
-.B 7
-The serial port could not be opened.
-.TP
-.B 8
-The connect script failed (returned a non-zero exit status).
-.TP
-.B 9
-The command specified as the argument to the \fIpty\fR option could
-not be run.
-.TP
-.B 10
-The PPP negotiation failed, that is, it didn't reach the point where
-at least one network protocol (e.g. IP) was running.
-.TP
-.B 11
-The peer system failed (or refused) to authenticate itself.
-.TP
-.B 12
-The link was established successfully and terminated because it was
-idle.
-.TP
-.B 13
-The link was established successfully and terminated because the
-connect time limit was reached.
-.TP
-.B 14
-Callback was negotiated and an incoming call should arrive shortly.
-.TP
-.B 15
-The link was terminated because the peer is not responding to echo
-requests.
-.TP
-.B 16
-The link was terminated by the modem hanging up.
-.TP
-.B 17
-The PPP negotiation failed because serial loopback was detected.
-.TP
-.B 18
-The init script failed (returned a non-zero exit status).
-.TP
-.B 19
-We failed to authenticate ourselves to the peer.
-.SH SCRIPTS
-Pppd invokes scripts at various stages in its processing which can be
-used to perform site-specific ancillary processing. These scripts are
-usually shell scripts, but could be executable code files instead.
-Pppd does not wait for the scripts to finish. The scripts are
-executed as root (with the real and effective user-id set to 0), so
-that they can do things such as update routing tables or run
-privileged daemons. Be careful that the contents of these scripts do
-not compromise your system's security. Pppd runs the scripts with
-standard input, output and error redirected to /dev/null, and with an
-environment that is empty except for some environment variables that
-give information about the link. The environment variables that pppd
-sets are:
-.TP
-.B DEVICE
-The name of the serial tty device being used.
-.TP
-.B IFNAME
-The name of the network interface being used.
-.TP
-.B IPLOCAL
-The IP address for the local end of the link. This is only set when
-IPCP has come up.
-.TP
-.B IPREMOTE
-The IP address for the remote end of the link. This is only set when
-IPCP has come up.
-.TP
-.B PEERNAME
-The authenticated name of the peer. This is only set if the peer
-authenticates itself.
-.TP
-.B SPEED
-The baud rate of the tty device.
-.TP
-.B ORIG_UID
-The real user-id of the user who invoked pppd.
-.TP
-.B PPPLOGNAME
-The username of the real user-id that invoked pppd. This is always set.
-.P
-For the ip-down and auth-down scripts, pppd also sets the following
-variables giving statistics for the connection:
-.TP
-.B CONNECT_TIME
-The number of seconds from when the PPP negotiation started until the
-connection was terminated.
-.TP
-.B BYTES_SENT
-The number of bytes sent (at the level of the serial port) during the
-connection.
-.TP
-.B BYTES_RCVD
-The number of bytes received (at the level of the serial port) during
-the connection.
-.TP
-.B LINKNAME
-The logical name of the link, set with the \fIlinkname\fR option.
-.P
-Pppd invokes the following scripts, if they exist. It is not an error
-if they don't exist.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/auth-up
-A program or script which is executed after the remote system
-successfully authenticates itself. It is executed with the parameters
-.IP
-\fIinterface-name peer-name user-name tty-device speed\fR
-.IP
-Note that this script is not executed if the peer doesn't authenticate
-itself, for example when the \fInoauth\fR option is used.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/auth-down
-A program or script which is executed when the link goes down, if
-/etc/ppp/auth-up was previously executed. It is executed in the same
-manner with the same parameters as /etc/ppp/auth-up.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/ip-up
-A program or script which is executed when the link is available for
-sending and receiving IP packets (that is, IPCP has come up). It is
-executed with the parameters
-.IP
-\fIinterface-name tty-device speed local-IP-address
-remote-IP-address ipparam\fR
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/ip-down
-A program or script which is executed when the link is no longer
-available for sending and receiving IP packets. This script can be
-used for undoing the effects of the /etc/ppp/ip-up script. It is
-invoked in the same manner and with the same parameters as the ip-up
-script.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/ipv6-up
-Like /etc/ppp/ip-up, except that it is executed when the link is available
-for sending and receiving IPv6 packets. It is executed with the parameters
-.IP
-\fIinterface-name tty-device speed local-link-local-address
-remote-link-local-address ipparam\fR
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/ipv6-down
-Similar to /etc/ppp/ip-down, but it is executed when IPv6 packets can no
-longer be transmitted on the link. It is executed with the same parameters
-as the ipv6-up script.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/ipx-up
-A program or script which is executed when the link is available for
-sending and receiving IPX packets (that is, IPXCP has come up). It is
-executed with the parameters
-.IP
-\fIinterface-name tty-device speed network-number local-IPX-node-address
-remote-IPX-node-address local-IPX-routing-protocol remote-IPX-routing-protocol
-local-IPX-router-name remote-IPX-router-name ipparam pppd-pid\fR
-.IP
-The local-IPX-routing-protocol and remote-IPX-routing-protocol field
-may be one of the following:
-.IP
-NONE to indicate that there is no routing protocol
-.br
-RIP to indicate that RIP/SAP should be used
-.br
-NLSP to indicate that Novell NLSP should be used
-.br
-RIP NLSP to indicate that both RIP/SAP and NLSP should be used
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/ipx-down
-A program or script which is executed when the link is no longer
-available for sending and receiving IPX packets. This script can be
-used for undoing the effects of the /etc/ppp/ipx-up script. It is
-invoked in the same manner and with the same parameters as the ipx-up
-script.
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-.B /var/run/ppp\fIn\fB.pid \fR(BSD or Linux), \fB/etc/ppp/ppp\fIn\fB.pid \fR(others)
-Process-ID for pppd process on ppp interface unit \fIn\fR.
-.TP
-.B /var/run/ppp-\fIname\fB.pid \fR(BSD or Linux), \fB/etc/ppp/ppp-\fIname\fB.pid \fR(others)
-Process-ID for pppd process for logical link \fIname\fR (see the
-\fIlinkname\fR option).
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/pap-secrets
-Usernames, passwords and IP addresses for PAP authentication. This
-file should be owned by root and not readable or writable by any other
-user. Pppd will log a warning if this is not the case.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/chap-secrets
-Names, secrets and IP addresses for CHAP authentication. As for
-/etc/ppp/pap-secrets, this file should be owned by root and not
-readable or writable by any other user. Pppd will log a warning if
-this is not the case.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/options
-System default options for pppd, read before user default options or
-command-line options.
-.TP
-.B ~/.ppprc
-User default options, read before /etc/ppp/options.\fIttyname\fR.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/options.\fIttyname
-System default options for the serial port being used, read after
-~/.ppprc. In forming the \fIttyname\fR part of this
-filename, an initial /dev/ is stripped from the port name (if
-present), and any slashes in the remaining part are converted to
-dots.
-.TP
-.B /etc/ppp/peers
-A directory containing options files which may contain privileged
-options, even if pppd was invoked by a user other than root. The
-system administrator can create options files in this directory to
-permit non-privileged users to dial out without requiring the peer to
-authenticate, but only to certain trusted peers.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.TP
-.B RFC1144
-Jacobson, V.
-\fICompressing TCP/IP headers for low-speed serial links.\fR
-February 1990.
-.TP
-.B RFC1321
-Rivest, R.
-.I The MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm.
-April 1992.
-.TP
-.B RFC1332
-McGregor, G.
-.I PPP Internet Protocol Control Protocol (IPCP).
-May 1992.
-.TP
-.B RFC1334
-Lloyd, B.; Simpson, W.A.
-.I PPP authentication protocols.
-October 1992.
-.TP
-.B RFC1661
-Simpson, W.A.
-.I The Point\-to\-Point Protocol (PPP).
-July 1994.
-.TP
-.B RFC1662
-Simpson, W.A.
-.I PPP in HDLC-like Framing.
-July 1994.
-.TP
-.B RFC2472
-Haskin, D.
-.I IP Version 6 over PPP
-December 1998.
-.SH NOTES
-The following signals have the specified effect when sent to pppd.
-.TP
-.B SIGINT, SIGTERM
-These signals cause pppd to terminate the link (by closing LCP),
-restore the serial device settings, and exit.
-.TP
-.B SIGHUP
-This signal causes pppd to terminate the link, restore the serial
-device settings, and close the serial device. If the \fIpersist\fR or
-\fIdemand\fR option has been specified, pppd will try to reopen the
-serial device and start another connection (after the holdoff period).
-Otherwise pppd will exit. If this signal is received during the
-holdoff period, it causes pppd to end the holdoff period immediately.
-.TP
-.B SIGUSR1
-This signal toggles the state of the \fIdebug\fR option.
-.TP
-.B SIGUSR2
-This signal causes pppd to renegotiate compression. This can be
-useful to re-enable compression after it has been disabled as a result
-of a fatal decompression error. (Fatal decompression errors generally
-indicate a bug in one or other implementation.)
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-Paul Mackerras (Paul.Mackerras at cs.anu.edu.au), based on earlier work by
-Drew Perkins,
-Brad Clements,
-Karl Fox,
-Greg Christy,
-and
-Brad Parker.
diff --git a/raw/man8/quotacheck.8 b/raw/man8/quotacheck.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 1fe707b..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/quotacheck.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-.TH quotacheck 8 "Fri Jul 20 2001"
-.SH NAME
-quotacheck \- scan a filesystem for disk usage, create, check and repair quota files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B quotacheck
-[
-.B \-gubcfinvdMmR
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I quota-format
-]
-.B \-a
-|
-.I filesystem
-.br
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B quotacheck
-examines each filesystem, builds a table of current disk usage, and
-compares this table against that recorded in the disk quota file for the
-filesystem (this step is ommitted if option
-.B -c
-is specified). If any inconsistencies are detected, both the quota file
-and the current system copy of the incorrect quotas are updated (the
-latter only occurs if an active filesystem is checked which is not advised).
-By default, only user quotas are checked.
-.B quotacheck
-expects each filesystem to be checked to have quota files named
-.I [a]quota.user
-and
-.I [a]quota.group
-located at the root of the associated filesystem. If a file is not
-present,
-.B quotacheck
-will create it.
-.PP
-If the quota file is corrupted,
-.B quotacheck
-tries to save as much data as possible. Rescuing data may need user
-intervention. With no additional options
-.B quotacheck
-will simply exit in such a situation. When in interactive mode (option
-.BR -i )
-, the user is asked for advice. Advice can also be provided from command
-line (see option
-.BR -n )
-, which is useful when
-.B quotacheck
-is run automatically (ie. from script) and failure is unacceptable.
-.PP
-.B quotacheck
-should be run each time the system boots and mounts non-valid filesystems.
-This is most likely to happen after a system crash.
-.PP
-It is strongly recommended to run
-.B quotacheck
-with quotas turned off on for the filesystem. Otherwise, possible damage
-or loss to data in the quota files can result. It is also unwise to
-run
-.B quotacheck
-on a live filesystem as actual usage may change during the scan. To
-prevent this,
-.B quotacheck
-tries to remount the filesystem read-only before starting the scan.
-After the scan is done it remounts the filesystem read-write. You can
-disable this with option
-.BR \-m .
-You can also make
-.B quotacheck
-ignore the failure to remount the filesystem read-only with option
-.BR \-M .
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-b
-Forces
-.B quotacheck
-to make backups of the quota file before writing the new data.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-.B quotacheck
-reports its operation as it progresses. Normally it operates silently.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Enable debugging mode. It will result in a lot of information which can
-be used in debugging the program. The output is very verbose and the
-scan will be slow.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Only user quotas listed in
-.I /etc/mtab
-or on the filesystems specified are to be checked. This is the default action.
-.TP
-.B \-g
-Only group quotas listed in
-.I /etc/mtab
-or on the filesystems specified are to be checked.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Don't read existing quota files. Just perform a new scan and save it to disk.
-.B quotacheck
-also skips scanning of old quota files when they are not found.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Forces checking of filesystems with quotas enabled. This is not
-recommended as the created quota files may be out of sync.
-.TP
-.B \-M
-This flag forces checking of filesystem in read-write mode if a remount
-fails. Do this only when you are sure no process will write to a
-filesystem while scanning.
-.TP
-.B \-m
-Don't try to remount filesystem read-only. See comment with option
-.BR \-M .
-.TP
-.B \-i
-Interactive mode. By default
-.B quotacheck
-exits when it finds an error. In interactive mode user is asked for
-input instead. See option
-.BR \-n .
-.TP
-.B \-n
-If the quota files become corrupted, it is possible for duplicate
-entries for a single user or group ID to exist. Normally in this case,
-.B quotacheck
-exits or asks user for input. When this option is set, the first entry found
-is always used (this option works in interactive mode too).
-.TP
-.B \-F \f2format-name\f1
-Check quota for specified format (ie. don't perform format
-auto-detection). This is recommended as detection might not work well on
-corrupted quota files. Possible format names are:
-.B vfsold
-(version 1 quota),
-.B vfsv0
-(version 2 quota),
-.B rpc
-(quota over NFS),
-.B xfs
-(quota on XFS filesystem)
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Check all mounted non-NFS filesystems in
-.B /etc/mtab
-.TP
-.B \-R
-When used together with the
-.B \-a
-option, all filesystems except for the root filesystem are checked for
-quotas.
-
-.SH NOTE
-.B quotacheck
-should only be run by super-user. Non-privileged users are presumably
-not allowed to read all the directories on the given filesystem.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR quota (1),
-.BR quotactl (2),
-.BR fstab (5),
-.BR quotaon (8),
-.BR repquota (8),
-.BR convertquota (8),
-.BR setquota (8),
-.BR edquota (8),
-.BR fsck (8),
-.BR efsck (8),
-.BR e2fsck (8),
-.BR xfsck (8)
-
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP 15
-.B aquota.user or aquota.group
-located at filesystem root with quotas (version 2 quota, non-XFS
-filesystems)
-.TP 15
-.B quota.user or quota.group
-located at filesystem root with quotas (version 1 quota, non-XFS
-filesystems)
-.TP
-.B /etc/mtab
-names and locations of mounted filesystems
-.SH AUTHOR
-Jan Kara \<jack at suse.cz\>
-.br
-Based on old
-.B quotacheck
-by:
-.br
-Edvard Tuinder \<ed at elm.net\>
-.br
-Marco van Wieringen \<mvw at planets.elm.net\>
diff --git a/raw/man8/quotaon.8 b/raw/man8/quotaon.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 973700c..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/quotaon.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,198 +0,0 @@
-.TH QUOTAON 8
-.UC 4
-.SH NAME
-quotaon, quotaoff \- turn filesystem quotas on and off
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /sbin/quotaon
-[
-.B \-vugfp
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I format-name
-]
-.IR filesystem .\|.\|.
-.br
-.B /sbin/quotaon
-[
-.B \-avugfp
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I format-name
-]
-.LP
-.B /sbin/quotaoff
-[
-.B \-vugp
-]
-[
-.B \-x
-.I state
-]
-.IR filesystem .\|.\|.
-.br
-.B /sbin/quotaoff
-[
-.B \-avugp
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.SS quotaon
-.IX "quotaon command" "" "\fLquotaon\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas on"
-.IX "user quotas" "quotaon command" "" "\fLquotaon\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas on"
-.IX "disk quotas" "quotaon command" "" "\fLquotaon\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas on"
-.IX "quotas" "quotaon command" "" "\fLquotaon\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas on"
-.IX "filesystem" "quotaon command" "" "\fLquotaon\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas on"
-.LP
-.B quotaon
-announces to the system that disk quotas should be enabled on one or
-more filesystems. The filesystem quota files must be present in the root
-directory of the specified filesystem and be named either
-.IR aquota.user
-(for version 2 user quota),
-.IR quota.user
-(for version 1 user quota),
-.IR aquota.group
-(for version 2 group quota), or
-.IR quota.group
-(for version 1 group quota).
-.PP
-XFS filesystems are a special case - XFS considers quota
-information as filesystem metadata and uses journaling to provide
-a higher level guarantee of consistency.
-There are two components to the XFS disk quota system:
-accounting and limit enforcement.
-Except in the case of the root filesystem, XFS filesystems require
-that quota accounting be turned on at mount time.
-It is possible to enable and disable limit enforcement on any XFS
-filesystem after quota accounting is already turned on.
-The default is to turn on both accounting and enforcement.
-.PP
-The XFS quota implementation does not maintain quota information in
-user-visible files, but rather stores this information internally.
-.SS quotaoff
-.IX "quotaoff command" "" "\fLquotaoff\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas off"
-.IX "user quotas" "quotaoff command" "" "\fLquotaoff\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas off"
-.IX "disk quotas" "quotaoff command" "" "\fLquotaoff\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas off"
-.IX "quotas" "quotaoff command" "" "\fLquotaoff\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas off"
-.IX "filesystem" "quotaoff command" "" "\fLquotaoff\fP \(em turn filesystem quotas off"
-.LP
-.B quotaoff
-announces to the system that the specified filesystems should
-have any disk quotas turned off.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.SS quotaon
-.TP
-.B \-a
-All automatically mounted (no
-.B noauto
-option) non-NFS filesystems in
-.B /etc/fstab
-with quotas will have their quotas turned on.
-This is normally used at boot time to enable quotas.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Display a message for each filesystem where quotas are turned on.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Manipulate user quotas. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B \-g
-Manipulate group quotas.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Instead of turning quotas on just print state of quotas (ie. whether. quota is on or off)
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Make
-.B quotaon
-behave like being called as
-.BR quotaoff .
-.SS quotaoff
-.TP
-.B \-F \f2format-name\f1
-Report quota for specified format (ie. don't perform format autodetection).
-Possible format names are:
-.B vfsold
-(version 1 quota),
-.B vfsv0
-(version 2 quota),
-.B xfs
-(quota on XFS filesystem)
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Force all filesystems in
-.B /etc/fstab
-to have their quotas disabled.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Display a message for each filesystem affected.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Manipulate user quotas. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B \-g
-Manipulate group quotas.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-Instead of turning quotas off just print state of quotas (ie. whether. quota is on or off)
-.TP
-.B \-x delete
-Free up the space used to hold quota information (maintained
-internally) within XFS.
-This option is only applicable to XFS, and is silently
-ignored for other filesystem types.
-It can only be used on a filesystem with quota previously turned off.
-.TP
-.B \-x enforce
-Switch off limit enforcement for XFS filesystems (perform
-quota accounting only).
-This option is only applicable to XFS, and is silently
-ignored for other filesystem types.
-.LP
-.SH "XFS EXAMPLES"
-.TP 0
-.B "Turning on quotas on a non-root XFS filesystem"
-Use
-.IR mount (8)
-or
-.B /etc/fstab
-option quota to enable both accounting and limit enforcement.
-.B quotaon
-utility cannot be used for this purpose.
-.TP
-.B "Turning on quotas on an XFS root filesystem"
-Use
-.BR "quotaon -v /" ,
-and
-.IR reboot (8).
-This procedure will enable both accounting and limit enforcement.
-.TP
-.B "Turning off quota limit enforcement on any XFS filesystem"
-Make sure that quota accounting and enforcement are both turned on using
-.BR "repquota -s" .
-Use
-.B "quotaoff -vo"
-to disable limit enforcement.
-This may be done while the filesystem is mounted.
-.TP
-.BR "Turning on quota limit enforcement on any XFS filesystem"
-Make sure that quota accounting is turned on using
-.BR "repquota -s" .
-Use
-.BR "quotaon -v" .
-This may be done while the filesystem is mounted.
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-.B aquota.user or aquota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 2 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.B quota.user or quota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 1 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.B /etc/fstab
-default filesystems
-.PD
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR quotactl (2),
-.BR fstab (5),
-.BR repquota (8).
diff --git a/raw/man8/ramsize.8 b/raw/man8/ramsize.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 901bd75..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/ramsize.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man8/rdev.8
diff --git a/raw/man8/rdev.8 b/raw/man8/rdev.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 98dce2b..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/rdev.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1992, 1993 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.\" Changes from sct at dcs.ed.ac.uk added Sat Oct 9 09:54:00 1993.
-.TH RDEV 8 "20 November 1993" "Linux 0.99" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-rdev \- query/set image root device, RAM disk size, or video mode
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.BR "rdev [ \-rvh ] [ \-o " offset " ] [ " image " [ " value " [ " offset " ] ] ]"
-.BR "rdev [ \-o " offset " ] [ " image " [ " root_device " [ " offset " ] ] ]"
-.BR "ramsize [ \-o " offset " ] [ " image " [ " size " [ " offset " ] ] ]"
-.BR "vidmode [ \-o " offset " ] [ " image " [ " mode " [ " offset " ] ] ]"
-.BR "rootflags [ \-o " offset " ] [ " image " [ " flags " [ " offset " ] ] ]"
-.fi
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-With no arguments,
-.B rdev
-outputs an
-.I /etc/mtab
-line for the current root file system.
-With no arguments,
-.BR ramsize ", " vidmode ", and " rootflags
-print usage information.
-
-In a bootable image for the Linux kernel on i386, there are several pairs
-of bytes which specify the root device, the video mode, and the size of
-the RAM disk. These pairs of bytes, by default, begin
-at offset 504 (decimal) in the kernel image:
-
-.nf
-.RS
- 498 Root flags
-(500 and 502 Reserved)
- 504 RAM Disk Size
- 506 VGA Mode
- 508 Root Device
-(510 Boot Signature)
-.RE
-.fi
-
-.B rdev
-will change these values.
-
-Typical values for the
-.I image
-parameter, which is a bootable Linux kernel image, might be:
-
-.nf
-.RS
-/vmlinux
-/vmunix
-/boot/bzImage-2.4.0
-/dev/fd0
-/dev/fd1
-.RE
-.fi
-
-When using the
-.B rdev
-command, the
-.I root_device
-parameter might be something like:
-
-.nf
-.RS
-/dev/hda1
-/dev/hdf13
-/dev/sda2
-/dev/sdc4
-/dev/ida/c0d0p1
-.RE
-.fi
-
-One may also specify the device by a comma-separated pair
-of decimal integers
-.IR major , minor .
-
-For the
-.B ramsize
-command, the
-.B size
-parameter specifies the size of the RAM disk in kilobytes.
-
-For the
-.B rootflags
-command, the
-.B flags
-parameter contains extra information used when mounting root.
-Currently the only effect of these flags is to force the kernel to
-mount the root filesystem in readonly mode if
-.B flags
-is non-zero.
-
-For the
-.B vidmode
-command, the
-.B mode
-parameter specifies the video mode:
-
-.nf
-.RS
--3 = Prompt
--2 = Extended VGA
--1 = Normal VGA
- 0 = as if "0" was pressed at the prompt
- 1 = as if "1" was pressed at the prompt
- 2 = as if "2" was pressed at the prompt
- n = as if "n" was pressed at the prompt
-.RE
-.fi
-
-If the
-.I value
-is not specified, the
-.I image
-will be examined to determine the current settings.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Causes
-.B rdev
-to act like
-.BR ramsize .
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Causes
-.B rdev
-to act like
-.BR rootflags .
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Causes
-.B rdev
-to act like
-.BR vidmode .
-.TP
-.B \-h
-Provides help.
-.SH BUGS
-The
-.B rdev
-utility, when used other than to find a name for the current root device,
-is an ancient hack that works by patching a kernel image at a magic offset
-with magic numbers. It does not work on architectures other than i386.
-Its use is strongly discouraged. Use a boot loader like SysLinux or LILO
-instead.
-.SH HISTORY
-At offset 502 there used to be the device number of the swap device
-(in Linux 0.12), and "rdev -s" or "swapdev" would set this.
-However, since Linux 0.95 this constant is not used any longer,
-and the swap device is specified using the
-.IR swapon ()
-system call.
-.SH AUTHORS
-.nf
-Originally by Werner Almesberger (almesber at nessie.cs.id.ethz.ch)
-Modified by Peter MacDonald (pmacdona at sanjuan.UVic.CA)
-rootflags support added by Stephen Tweedie (sct at dcs.ed.ac.uk)
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man8/repquota.8 b/raw/man8/repquota.8
deleted file mode 100644
index b7af625..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/repquota.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-.TH REPQUOTA 8
-.UC 4
-.SH NAME
-repquota \- summarize quotas for a filesystem
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /usr/sbin/repquota
-[
-.B \-vsug
-] [
-.B \-t
-|
-.B \-n
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I format-name
-]
-.IR filesystem .\|.\|.
-.LP
-.B /usr/sbin/repquota
-[
-.B \-avtsug
-] [
-.B \-t
-|
-.B \-n
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I format-name
-]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "repquota command" "" "\fLrepquota\fP \(em summarize quotas"
-.IX "user quotas" "repquota command" "" "\fLrepquota\fP \(em summarize quotas"
-.IX "disk quotas" "repquota command" "" "\fLrepquota\fP \(em summarize quotas"
-.IX "quotas" "repquota command" "" "\fLrepquota\fP \(em summarize quotas"
-.IX "filesystem" "repquota command" "" "\fLrepquota\fP \(em summarize quotas"
-.IX "summarize filesystem quotas repquota" "" "summarize filesystem quotas \(em \fLrepquota\fP"
-.IX "report filesystem quotas repquota" "" "report filesystem quotas \(em \fLrepquota\fP"
-.IX display "filesystem quotas \(em \fLrepquota\fP"
-.LP
-.B repquota
-prints a summary of the disc usage and quotas for the specified file
-systems. For each user the current number of files and amount of space
-(in kilobytes) is printed, along with any quotas created with
-.BR edquota (8).
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Report on all filesystems indicated in
-.B /etc/mtab
-to be read-write with quotas.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Report all quotas, even if there is no usage. Be also more verbose about quotafile
-information.
-.TP
-.B \-t
-Truncate user/group names longer than 9 characters. This results in nicer output when
-there are such names.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Don't resolve UIDs/GIDs to names. This can speedup printing a lot.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Try to report used space, number of used inodes and limits in more appropriate units
-than default ones.
-.TP
-.B \-F \f2format-name\f1
-Report quota for specified format (ie. don't perform format autodetection).
-Possible format names are:
-.B vfsold
-(version 1 quota),
-.B vfsv0
-(version 2 quota),
-.B rpc
-(quota over NFS),
-.B xfs
-(quota on XFS filesystem)
-.TP
-.B \-g
-Report quotas for groups.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Report quotas for users. This is the default.
-.LP
-Only the super-user may view quotas which are not their own.
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-.BR aquota.user " or " aquota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 2 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.BR quota.user " or " quota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 1 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.B /etc/mtab
-default filesystems
-.TP
-.B /etc/passwd
-default set of users
-.TP
-.B /etc/group
-default set of groups
-.PD
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR quota (1),
-.BR quotactl (2),
-.BR edquota (8),
-.BR quotacheck (8),
-.BR quotaon (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/rootflags.8 b/raw/man8/rootflags.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 901bd75..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/rootflags.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man8/rdev.8
diff --git a/raw/man8/route.8 b/raw/man8/route.8
deleted file mode 100644
index f59c074..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/route.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,326 +0,0 @@
-.TH ROUTE 8 "2 January 2000" "net-tools" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-route \- show / manipulate the IP routing table
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B route
-.RB [ \-CFvnee ]
-.TP
-.B route
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.RB [ \-A
-family]
-.B add
-.RB [ \-net | \-host ]
-target
-.RB [ netmask
-Nm]
-.RB [ gw
-Gw]
-.RB [ metric
-N]
-.RB [ mss
-M]
-.RB [ window
-W]
-.RB [ irtt
-I]
-.RB [ reject ]
-.RB [ mod ]
-.RB [ dyn ]
-.RB [ reinstate ]
-.RB [[ dev ]
-If]
-.TP
-.B route
-.RB [ \-v ]
-.RB [ \-A
-family]
-.B del
-.RB [ \-net | \-host ]
-target
-.RB [ gw
-Gw]
-.RB [ netmask
-Nm]
-.RB [ metric
-N]
-.RB [[ dev ]
-If]
-.TP
-.B route
-.RB [ \-V ]
-.RB [ \-\-version ]
-.RB [ \-h ]
-.RB [ \--help ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Route
-manipulates the kernel's IP routing tables. Its primary use is to set
-up static routes to specific hosts or networks via an interface after
-it has been configured with the
-.BR ifconfig (8)
-program.
-
-When the
-.B add
-or
-.B del
-options are used,
-.B route
-modifies the routing tables. Without these options,
-.B route
-displays the current contents of the routing tables.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-A family
-use the specified address family (eg `inet'; use `route --help' for a full
-list).
-
-.TP
-.B -F
-operate on the kernel's FIB (Forwarding Information Base) routing
-table.
-This is the default.
-.TP
-.B -C
-operate on the kernel's routing cache.
-
-.TP
-.B \-v
-select verbose operation.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-show numerical addresses instead of trying to determine symbolic host
-names. This is useful if you are trying to determine why the route to your
-nameserver has vanished.
-.TP
-.B \-e
-use
-.BR netstat (8)-format
-for displaying the routing table.
-.B \-ee
-will generate a very long line with all parameters from the routing table.
-
-.TP
-.B del
-delete a route.
-.TP
-.B add
-add a new route.
-.TP
-.B target
-the destination network or host. You can provide IP addresses in dotted
-decimal or host/network names.
-.TP
-.B \-net
-the
-.B target
-is a network.
-.TP
-.B -host
-the
-.B target
-is a host.
-.TP
-.B netmask NM
-when adding a network route, the netmask to be used.
-.TP
-.B gw GW
-route packets via a gateway.
-.B NOTE:
-The specified gateway must be reachable first. This usually means that
-you have to set up a static route to the gateway beforehand. If you specify
-the address of one of your local interfaces, it will be used to decide about
-the interface to which the packets should be routed to. This is a BSDism
-compatibility hack.
-.TP
-.B metric M
-set the metric field in the routing table (used by routing daemons) to M.
-.TP
-.B mss M
-set the TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) for connections over this route
-to M bytes.
-The default is the device MTU minus headers, or a lower MTU when path mtu
-discovery occured. This setting can be used to force smaller TCP packets on the
-other end when path mtu discovery does not work (usually because of
-misconfigured firewalls that block ICMP Fragmentation Needed)
-.TP
-.B window W
-set the TCP window size for connections over this route to W
-bytes. This is typically only used on AX.25 networks and with drivers
-unable to handle back to back frames.
-.TP
-.B irtt I
-set the initial round trip time (irtt) for TCP connections over this
-route to I milliseconds (1-12000). This is typically only used on
-AX.25 networks. If omitted the RFC 1122 default of 300ms is used.
-.TP
-.B reject
-install a blocking route, which will force a route lookup to fail.
-This is for example used to mask out networks before using the default
-route. This is NOT for firewalling.
-.TP
-.B mod, dyn, reinstate
-install a dynamic or modified route. These flags are for diagnostic
-purposes, and are generally only set by routing daemons.
-.TP
-.B dev If
-force the route to be associated with the specified device, as the
-kernel will otherwise try to determine the device on its own (by
-checking already existing routes and device specifications, and where
-the route is added to). In most normal networks you won't need this.
-
-If
-.B dev If
-is the last option on the command line, the word
-.B dev
-may be omitted, as it's the default. Otherwise the order of the route
-modifiers (metric - netmask - gw - dev) doesn't matter.
-
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.TP
-.B route add -net 127.0.0.0
-adds the normal loopback entry, using netmask 255.0.0.0 (class A net,
-determined from the destination address) and associated with the
-"lo" device (assuming this device was prviously set up correctly with
-.BR ifconfig (8)).
-
-.TP
-.B route add -net 192.56.76.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 dev eth0
-adds a route to the network 192.56.76.x via
-"eth0". The Class C netmask modifier is not really necessary here because
-192.* is a Class C IP address. The word "dev" can be omitted here.
-
-.TP
-.B route add default gw mango-gw
-adds a default route (which will be used if no other route matches).
-All packets using this route will be gatewayed through "mango-gw". The
-device which will actually be used for that route depends on how we
-can reach "mango-gw" - the static route to "mango-gw" will have to be
-set up before.
-
-.TP
-.B route add ipx4 sl0
-Adds the route to the "ipx4" host via the SLIP interface (assuming that
-"ipx4" is the SLIP host).
-
-.TP
-.B route add -net 192.57.66.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 gw ipx4
-This command adds the net "192.57.66.x" to be gatewayed through the former
-route to the SLIP interface.
-
-.TP
-.B route add -net 224.0.0.0 netmask 240.0.0.0 dev eth0
-This is an obscure one documented so people know how to do it. This sets
-all of the class D (multicast) IP routes to go via "eth0". This is the
-correct normal configuration line with a multicasting kernel.
-
-.TP
-.B route add -net 10.0.0.0 netmask 255.0.0.0 reject
-This installs a rejecting route for the private network "10.x.x.x."
-
-.LP
-.SH OUTPUT
-The output of the kernel routing table is organized in the following columns
-.TP
-.B Destination
-The destination network or destination host.
-.TP
-.B Gateway
-The gateway address or '*' if none set.
-.TP
-.B Genmask
-The netmask for the destination net; '255.255.255.255' for a host destination
-and '0.0.0.0' for the
-.B default
-route.
-.TP
-.B Flags
-Possible flags include
-.br
-.B U
-(route is
-.BR up )
-.br
-.B H
-(target is a
-.BR host )
-.br
-.B G
-(use
-.BR gateway )
-.br
-.B R
-.RB ( reinstate
-route for dynamic routing)
-.br
-.B D
-.RB ( dynamically
-installed by daemon or redirect)
-.br
-.B M
-.RB ( modified
-from routing daemon or redirect)
-.br
-.B A
-(installed by
-.BR addrconf )
-.br
-.B C
-.RB ( cache
-entry)
-.br
-.B !
-.RB ( reject
-route)
-.TP
-.B Metric
-The 'distance' to the target (usually counted in hops). It is not used by
-recent kernels, but may be needed by routing daemons.
-.TP
-.B Ref
-Number of references to this route. (Not used in the Linux kernel.)
-.TP
-.B Use
-Count of lookups for the route. Depending on the use of -F and -C this will
-be either route cache misses (-F) or hits (-C).
-.TP
-.B Iface
-Interface to which packets for this route will be sent.
-.TP
-.B MSS
-Default maximum segement size for TCP connections over this route.
-.TP
-.B Window
-Default window size for TCP connections over this route.
-.TP
-.B irtt
-Initial RTT (Round Trip Time). The kernel uses this to guess about the best
-TCP protocol parameters without waiting on (possibly slow) answers.
-.TP
-.B HH (cached only)
-The number of ARP entries and cached routes that refer to the hardware
-header cache for the cached route. This will be \-1 if a hardware
-address is not needed for the interface of the cached route (e.g. lo).
-.TP
-.B Arp (cached only)
-Whether or not the hardware address for the cached route is up to date.
-.LP
-.SH FILES
-.I /proc/net/ipv6_route
-.br
-.I /proc/net/route
-.br
-.I /proc/net/rt_cache
-.LP
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.I ifconfig(8), netstat(8), arp(8), rarp(8)
-.LP
-.SH HISTORY
-.B Route
-for Linux was originally written by Fred N. van Kempen,
-<waltje at uwalt.nl.mugnet.org> and then modified by Johannes Stille and
-Linus Torvalds for pl15. Alan Cox added the mss and window options for
-Linux 1.1.22. irtt support and merged with netstat from Bernd Eckenfels.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Currently maintained by Phil Blundell <Philip.Blundell at pobox.com>.
diff --git a/raw/man8/rpm.8 b/raw/man8/rpm.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 539ac4c..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/rpm.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,988 +0,0 @@
-.\" This manpage has been automatically generated by docbook2man
-.\" from a DocBook document. This tool can be found at:
-.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
-.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
-.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve at ggi-project.org>.
-.TH "RPM" "8" "09 June 2002" "Red Hat, Inc." "Red Hat Linux"
-.SH NAME
-rpm \- RPM Package Manager
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.SS "QUERYING AND VERIFYING PACKAGES:"
-.PP
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-q|--query\fR} [\fBselect-options\fR] [\fBquery-options\fR]
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-V|--verify\fR} [\fBselect-options\fR] [\fBverify-options\fR]
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR \fB--import\fR \fB\fIPUBKEY\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-K|--checksig\fR} [\fB--nosignature\fR] [\fB--nodigest\fR]
- \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.SS "INSTALLING, UPGRADING, AND REMOVING PACKAGES:"
-.PP
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-i|--install\fR} [\fBinstall-options\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-U|--upgrade\fR} [\fBinstall-options\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-F|--freshen\fR} [\fBinstall-options\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-e|--erase\fR} [\fB--allmatches\fR] [\fB--nodeps\fR] [\fB--noscripts\fR]
- [\fB--notriggers\fR] [\fB--repackage\fR] [\fB--test\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_NAME\fB\fR\fI\ ...\fR
-
-.SS "MISCELLANEOUS:"
-.PP
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB--initdb|--rebuilddb\fR}
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB--addsign|--resign\fR} \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB--querytags|--showrc\fR}
-
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB--setperms|--setugids\fR} \fB\fIPACKAGE_NAME\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.SS "select-options"
-.PP
-
-
- [\fB\fIPACKAGE_NAME\fB\fR] [\fB-a,--all\fR] [\fB-f,--file \fIFILE\fB\fR]
- [\fB-g,--group \fIGROUP\fB\fR] {\fB-p,--package \fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR]
- [\fB--fileid \fIMD5\fB\fR] [\fB--hdrid \fISHA1\fB\fR] [\fB--pkgid \fIMD5\fB\fR] [\fB--tid \fITID\fB\fR]
- [\fB--querybynumber \fIHDRNUM\fB\fR] [\fB--triggeredby \fIPACKAGE_NAME\fB\fR]
- [\fB--whatprovides \fICAPABILITY\fB\fR] [\fB--whatrequires \fICAPABILITY\fB\fR]
-
-.SS "query-options"
-.PP
-
-
- [\fB--changelog\fR] [\fB-c,--configfiles\fR] [\fB-d,--docfiles\fR] [\fB--dump\fR]
- [\fB--filesbypkg\fR] [\fB-i,--info\fR] [\fB--last\fR] [\fB-l,--list\fR]
- [\fB--provides\fR] [\fB--qf,--queryformat \fIQUERYFMT\fB\fR]
- [\fB-R,--requires\fR] [\fB--scripts\fR] [\fB-s,--state\fR]
- [\fB--triggers,--triggerscripts\fR]
-
-.SS "verify-options"
-.PP
-
-
- [\fB--nodeps\fR] [\fB--nofiles\fR] [\fB--noscripts\fR]
- [\fB--nodigest\fR] [\fB--nosignature\fR]
- [\fB--nolinkto\fR] [\fB--nomd5\fR] [\fB--nosize\fR] [\fB--nouser\fR]
- [\fB--nogroup\fR] [\fB--nomtime\fR] [\fB--nomode\fR] [\fB--nordev\fR]
-
-.SS "install-options"
-.PP
-
-
- [\fB--aid\fR] [\fB--allfiles\fR] [\fB--badreloc\fR] [\fB--excludepath \fIOLDPATH\fB\fR]
- [\fB--excludedocs\fR] [\fB--force\fR] [\fB-h,--hash\fR]
- [\fB--ignoresize\fR] [\fB--ignorearch\fR] [\fB--ignoreos\fR]
- [\fB--includedocs\fR] [\fB--justdb\fR] [\fB--nodeps\fR]
- [\fB--nodigest\fR] [\fB--nosignature\fR] [\fB--nosuggest\fR]
- [\fB--noorder\fR] [\fB--noscripts\fR] [\fB--notriggers\fR]
- [\fB--oldpackage\fR] [\fB--percent\fR] [\fB--prefix \fINEWPATH\fB\fR]
- [\fB--relocate \fIOLDPATH\fB=\fINEWPATH\fB\fR]
- [\fB--repackage\fR] [\fB--replacefiles\fR] [\fB--replacepkgs\fR]
- [\fB--test\fR]
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-\fBrpm\fR is a powerful \fBPackage Manager\fR,
-which can be used to build, install, query, verify, update, and
-erase individual software packages.
-A \fBpackage\fR consists of an archive of files and
-meta-data used to install and erase the archive files. The meta-data
-includes helper scripts, file attributes, and descriptive information
-about the package.
-\fBPackages\fR come in two varieties: binary packages,
-used to encapsulate software to be installed, and source packages,
-containing the source code and recipe necessary to produce binary
-packages.
-.PP
-One of the following basic modes must be selected:
-\fBQuery\fR,
-\fBVerify\fR,
-\fBSignature Check\fR,
-\fBInstall/Upgrade/Freshen\fR,
-\fBUninstall\fR,
-\fBInitialize Database\fR,
-\fBRebuild Database\fR,
-\fBResign\fR,
-\fBAdd Signature\fR,
-\fBSet Owners/Groups\fR,
-\fBShow Querytags\fR, and
-\fBShow Configuration\fR.
-.SS "GENERAL OPTIONS"
-.PP
-These options can be used in all the different modes.
-.TP
-\fB-?, --help\fR
-Print a longer usage message then normal.
-.TP
-\fB--version\fR
-Print a single line containing the version number of \fBrpm\fR
-being used.
-.TP
-\fB--quiet\fR
-Print as little as possible - normally only error messages will
-be displayed.
-.TP
-\fB-v\fR
-Print verbose information - normally routine progress messages will be
-displayed.
-.TP
-\fB-vv\fR
-Print lots of ugly debugging information.
-.TP
-\fB--rcfile \fIFILELIST\fB\fR
-Each of the files in the colon separated
-\fIFILELIST\fR
-is read sequentially by \fBrpm\fR for configuration
-information.
-Only the first file in the list must exist, and tildes will be
-expanded to the value of \fB$HOME\fR.
-The default \fIFILELIST\fR is
-\fI/usr/lib/rpm/rpmrc\fR:\fI/usr/lib/rpm/redhat/rpmrc\fR:\fI/etc/rpmrc\fR:\fI~/.rpmrc\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--pipe \fICMD\fB\fR
-Pipes the output of \fBrpm\fR to the command \fICMD\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--dbpath \fIDIRECTORY\fB\fR
-Use the database in \fIDIRECTORY\fR rathen
-than the default path \fI/var/lib/rpm\fR
-.TP
-\fB--root \fIDIRECTORY\fB\fR
-Use the file system tree rooted at \fIDIRECTORY\fR for all operations.
-Note that this means the database within
-\fIDIRECTORY\fR
-will be used for dependency checks and any scriptlet(s) (e.g.
-\fB%post\fR if installing, or
-\fB%prep\fR if building, a package)
-will be run after a chroot(2) to
-\fIDIRECTORY\fR.
-.SS "INSTALL AND UPGRADE OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The general form of an rpm install command is
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-i|--install\fR} [\fBinstall-options\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.PP
-This installs a new package.
-.PP
-The general form of an rpm upgrade command is
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-U|--upgrade\fR} [\fBinstall-options\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.PP
-This upgrades or installs the package currently installed
-to a newer version. This is the same as install, except
-all other version(s) of the package are removed after the
-new package is installed.
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-F|--freshen\fR} [\fBinstall-options\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.PP
-This will upgrade packages, but only if an earlier version
-currently exists. The \fIPACKAGE_FILE\fR
-may be specified as an
-\fBftp\fR or
-\fBhttp\fR URL,
-in which case the package will be downloaded before being
-installed. See \fBFTP/HTTP OPTIONS\fR
-for information on \fBrpm\fR's internal
-\fBftp\fR and
-\fBhttp\fR
-client support.
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB--aid\fR
-Add suggested packages to the transaction set when needed.
-.TP
-\fB--allfiles\fR
-Installs or upgrades all the missingok files in the package,
-regardless if they exist.
-.TP
-\fB--badreloc\fR
-Used with \fB--relocate\fR, permit relocations on
-all file paths, not just those \fIOLDPATH\fR's
-included in the binary package relocation hint(s).
-.TP
-\fB--excludepath \fIOLDPATH\fB\fR
-Don't install files whose name begins with
-\fIOLDPATH\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--excludedocs\fR
-Don't install any files which are marked as documentation
-(which includes man pages and texinfo documents).
-.TP
-\fB--force\fR
-Same as using
-\fB--replacepkgs\fR,
-\fB--replacefiles\fR, and
-\fB--oldpackage\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-h, --hash\fR
-Print 50 hash marks as the package archive is unpacked.
-Use with \fB-v|--verbose\fR for a nicer display.
-.TP
-\fB--ignoresize\fR
-Don't check mount file systems for sufficient disk space before
-installing this package.
-.TP
-\fB--ignorearch\fR
-Allow installation or upgrading even if the architectures
-of the binary package and host don't match.
-.TP
-\fB--ignoreos\fR
-Allow installation or upgrading even if the operating
-systems of the binary package and host don't match.
-.TP
-\fB--includedocs\fR
-Install documentation files. This is the default behavior.
-.TP
-\fB--justdb\fR
-Update only the database, not the filesystem.
-.TP
-\fB--nodigest\fR
-Don't verify package or header digests when reading.
-.TP
-\fB--nosignature\fR
-Don't verify package or header signatures when reading.
-.TP
-\fB--nodeps\fR
-Don't do a dependency check before installing or upgrading
-a package.
-.TP
-\fB--nosuggest\fR
-Don't suggest package(s) that provide a missing dependency.
-.TP
-\fB--noorder\fR
-Don't reorder the packages for an install. The list of
-packages would normally be reordered to satisfy dependancies.
-.TP
-\fB--noscripts\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nopre\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nopost\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nopreun\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nopostun\fR
-Don't execute the scriptlet of the same name.
-The \fB--noscripts\fR option is equivalent to
-
-\fB--nopre\fR
-\fB--nopost\fR
-\fB--nopreun\fR
-\fB--nopostun\fR
-
-and turns off the execution of the corresponding
-\fB%pre\fR,
-\fB%post\fR,
-\fB%preun\fR, and
-\fB%postun\fR
-scriptlet(s).
-.TP
-\fB--notriggers\fR
-.TP
-\fB--notriggerin\fR
-.TP
-\fB--notriggerun\fR
-.TP
-\fB--notriggerpostun\fR
-Don't execute any trigger scriptlet of the named type.
-The \fB--notriggers\fR option is equivalent to
-
-\fB--notriggerin\fR
-\fB--notriggerun\fR
-\fB--notriggerpostun\fR
-
-and turns off execution of the corresponding
-\fB%triggerin\fR,
-\fB%triggerun\fR, and
-\fB%triggerpostun\fR
-scriptlet(s).
-.TP
-\fB--oldpackage\fR
-Allow an upgrade to replace a newer package with an older one.
-.TP
-\fB--percent\fR
-Print percentages as files are unpacked from the package archive.
-This is intended to make \fBrpm\fR easy to run from
-other tools.
-.TP
-\fB--prefix \fINEWPATH\fB\fR
-For relocateable binary packages, translate all file paths that
-start with the installation prefix in the package relocation hint(s)
-to \fINEWPATH\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--relocate \fIOLDPATH\fB=\fINEWPATH\fB\fR
-For relocatable binary packages, translate all file paths
-that start with \fIOLDPATH\fR in the
-package relocation hint(s) to \fINEWPATH\fR.
-This option can be used repeatedly if several
-\fIOLDPATH\fR's in the package are to
-be relocated.
-.TP
-\fB--repackage\fR
-Re-package the files before erasing. The previously installed
-package will be named according to the macro
-\fB%_repackage_name_fmt\fR
-and will be created in the directory named by
-the macro \fB%_repackage_dir\fR (default value
-is \fI/var/tmp\fR).
-.TP
-\fB--replacefiles\fR
-Install the packages even if they replace files from other,
-already installed, packages.
-.TP
-\fB--replacepkgs\fR
-Install the packages even if some of them are already installed
-on this system.
-.TP
-\fB--test\fR
-Do not install the package, simply check for and report
-potential conflicts.
-.SS "ERASE OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The general form of an rpm erase command is
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-e|--erase\fR} [\fB--allmatches\fR] [\fB--nodeps\fR] [\fB--noscripts\fR] [\fB--notriggers\fR] [\fB--repackage\fR] [\fB--test\fR] \fB\fIPACKAGE_NAME\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.PP
-The following options may also be used:
-.TP
-\fB--allmatches\fR
-Remove all versions of the package which match
-\fIPACKAGE_NAME\fR. Normally an
-error is issued if \fIPACKAGE_NAME\fR
-matches multiple packages.
-.TP
-\fB--nodeps\fR
-Don't check dependencies before uninstalling the packages.
-.TP
-\fB--noscripts\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nopreun\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nopostun\fR
-Don't execute the scriptlet of the same name.
-The \fB--noscripts\fR option during package erase is
-equivalent to
-
-\fB--nopreun\fR
-\fB--nopostun\fR
-
-and turns off the execution of the corresponding
-\fB%preun\fR, and
-\fB%postun\fR
-scriptlet(s).
-.TP
-\fB--notriggers\fR
-.TP
-\fB--notriggerun\fR
-.TP
-\fB--notriggerpostun\fR
-Don't execute any trigger scriptlet of the named type.
-The \fB--notriggers\fR option is equivalent to
-
-\fB--notriggerun\fR
-\fB--notriggerpostun\fR
-
-and turns off execution of the corresponding
-\fB%triggerun\fR, and
-\fB%triggerpostun\fR
-scriptlet(s).
-.TP
-\fB--repackage\fR
-Re-package the files before erasing. The previously installed
-package will be named according to the macro
-\fB%_repackage_name_fmt\fR
-and will be created in the directory named by
-the macro \fB%_repackage_dir\fR (default value
-is \fI/var/tmp\fR).
-.TP
-\fB--test\fR
-Don't really uninstall anything, just go through the motions.
-Useful in conjunction with the \fB-vv\fR option
-for debugging.
-.SS "QUERY OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The general form of an rpm query command is
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-q|--query\fR} [\fBselect-options\fR] [\fBquery-options\fR]
-
-.PP
-You may specify the format that package information should be
-printed in. To do this, you use the
-
- \fB--qf|--queryformat\fR \fB\fIQUERYFMT\fB\fR
-
-option, followed by the \fIQUERYFMT\fR
-format string. Query formats are modifed versions of the
-standard \fBprintf(3)\fR formatting. The format
-is made up of static strings (which may include standard C
-character escapes for newlines, tabs, and other special
-characters) and \fBprintf(3)\fR type formatters.
-As \fBrpm\fR already knows the type to print, the
-type specifier must be omitted however, and replaced by the name
-of the header tag to be printed, enclosed by \fB{}\fR
-characters. Tag names are case insesitive, and the leading
-\fBRPMTAG_\fR portion of the tag name may be omitted
-as well.
-.PP
-Alternate output formats may be requested by following
-the tag with \fB:\fItypetag\fB\fR.
-Currently, the following types are supported:
-.TP
-\fB:armor\fR
-
-Wrap a public key in ASCII armor.
-.TP
-\fB:base64\fR
-Encode binary data using base64.
-.TP
-\fB:date\fR
-Use strftime(3) "%c" format.
-.TP
-\fB:day\fR
-Use strftime(3) "%a %b %d %Y" format.
-.TP
-\fB:depflags\fR
-Format dependency flags.
-.TP
-\fB:fflags\fR
-Format file flags.
-.TP
-\fB:hex\fR
-Format in hexadecimal.
-.TP
-\fB:octal\fR
-Format in octal.
-.TP
-\fB:perms\fR
-Format file permissions.
-.TP
-\fB:shescape\fR
-Escape single quotes for use in a script.
-.TP
-\fB:triggertype\fR
-Display trigger suffix.
-.PP
-For example, to print only the names of the packages queried,
-you could use \fB%{NAME}\fR as the format string.
-To print the packages name and distribution information in
-two columns, you could use \fB%-30{NAME}%{DISTRIBUTION}\fR.
-\fBrpm\fR will print a list of all of the tags it knows about when it
-is invoked with the \fB--querytags\fR argument.
-.PP
-There are two subsets of options for querying: package selection,
-and information selection.
-.SS "PACKAGE SELECTION OPTIONS:"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB\fIPACKAGE_NAME\fB\fR
-Query installed package named \fIPACKAGE_NAME\fR.
-.TP
-\fB-a, --all\fR
-Query all installed packages.
-.TP
-\fB-f, --file \fIFILE\fB\fR
-Query package owning \fIFILE\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--fileid \fIMD5\fB\fR
-Query package that contains a given file identifier, i.e. the
-\fIMD5\fR digest of the file contents.
-.TP
-\fB-g, --group \fIGROUP\fB\fR
-Query packages with the group of \fIGROUP\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--hdrid \fISHA1\fB\fR
-Query package that contains a given header identifier, i.e. the
-\fISHA1\fR digest of the immutable header region.
-.TP
-\fB-p, --package \fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR
-Query an (uninstalled) package \fIPACKAGE_FILE\fR.
-The \fIPACKAGE_FILE\fR may be specified
-as an \fBftp\fR or \fBhttp\fR style URL, in
-which case the package header will be downloaded and queried.
-See \fBFTP/HTTP OPTIONS\fR for information on
-\fBrpm\fR's internal
-\fBftp\fR and
-\fBhttp\fR
-client support. The \fIPACKAGE_FILE\fR argument(s),
-if not a binary package, will be interpreted as an ASCII package
-manifest. Comments are permitted, starting with a '#', and each
-line of a package manifest file may include white space seperated
-glob expressions, including URL's with remote glob expressions,
-that will be expanded to paths that are substituted in place of
-the package manifest as additional \fIPACKAGE_FILE\fR
-arguments to the query.
-.TP
-\fB--pkgid \fIMD5\fB\fR
-Query package that contains a given package identifier, i.e. the
-\fIMD5\fR digest of the combined header and
-payload contents.
-.TP
-\fB--querybynumber \fIHDRNUM\fB\fR
-Query the \fIHDRNUM\fRth database entry
-directly; this is useful only for debugging.
-.TP
-\fB--specfile \fISPECFILE\fB\fR
-Parse and query \fISPECFILE\fR as if
-it were a package. Although not all the information (e.g. file lists)
-is available, this type of query permits rpm to be used to extract
-information from spec files without having to write a specfile
-parser.
-.TP
-\fB--tid \fITID\fB\fR
-Query package(s) that have a given \fITID\fR
-transaction identifier. A unix time stamp is currently used as a
-transaction identifier. All package(s) installed or erased within
-a single transaction have a common identifier.
-.TP
-\fB--triggeredby \fIPACKAGE_NAME\fB\fR
-Query packages that are triggered by package(s)
-\fIPACKAGE_NAME\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--whatprovides \fICAPABILITY\fB\fR
-Query all packages that provide the \fICAPABILITY\fR capability.
-.TP
-\fB--whatrequires \fICAPABILITY\fB\fR
-Query all packages that requires \fICAPABILITY\fR for proper functioning.
-.SS "PACKAGE QUERY OPTIONS:"
-.PP
-.TP
-\fB--changelog\fR
-Display change information for the package.
-.TP
-\fB-c, --configfiles\fR
-List only configuration files (implies \fB-l\fR).
-.TP
-\fB-d, --docfiles\fR
-List only documentation files (implies \fB-l\fR).
-.TP
-\fB--dump\fR
-Dump file information as follows:
-.sp
-.RS
-
-.nf
-path size mtime md5sum mode owner group isconfig isdoc rdev symlink
-
-.fi
-.RE
-
-This option must be used with at least one of
-\fB-l\fR,
-\fB-c\fR,
-\fB-d\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--filesbypkg\fR
-List all the files in each selected package.
-.TP
-\fB-i, --info\fR
-Display package information, including name, version, and description.
-This uses the \fB--queryformat\fR if one was specified.
-.TP
-\fB--last\fR
-Orders the package listing by install time such that the latest
-packages are at the top.
-.TP
-\fB-l, --list\fR
-List files in package.
-.TP
-\fB--provides\fR
-List capabilities this package provides.
-.TP
-\fB-R, --requires\fR
-List packages on which this package depends.
-.TP
-\fB--scripts\fR
-List the package specific scriptlet(s) that are used as part
-of the installation and uninstallation processes.
-.TP
-\fB-s, --state\fR
-Display the \fIstates\fR of files in the package
-(implies \fB-l\fR). The state of each file is one of
-\fInormal\fR,
-\fInot installed\fR, or
-\fIreplaced\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--triggers, --triggerscripts\fR
-Display the trigger scripts, if any, which are contained in
-the package.
-.SS "VERIFY OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The general form of an rpm verify command is
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB-V|--verify\fR} [\fBselect-options\fR] [\fBverify-options\fR]
-
-.PP
-Verifying a package compares information about the installed files in
-the package with information about the files taken from the package
-metadata stored in the rpm database. Among other things, verifying
-compares the size, MD5 sum, permissions, type, owner and group of
-each file. Any discrepencies are displayed.
-Files that were not installed from the package, for example,
-documentation files excluded on installation using the
-"\fB--excludedocs\fR" option,
-will be silently ignored.
-.PP
-The package selection options are the same as for package
-querying (including package manifest files as arguments).
-Other options unique to verify mode are:
-.TP
-\fB--nodeps\fR
-Don't verify dependencies of packages.
-.TP
-\fB--nodigest\fR
-Don't verify package or header digests when reading.
-.TP
-\fB--nofiles\fR
-Don't verify any attributes of package files.
-.TP
-\fB--noscripts\fR
-Don't execute the \fB%verifyscript\fR scriptlet (if any).
-.TP
-\fB--nosignature\fR
-Don't verify package or header signatures when reading.
-.TP
-\fB--nolinkto\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nomd5\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nosize\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nouser\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nogroup\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nomtime\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nomode\fR
-.TP
-\fB--nordev\fR
-Don't verify the corresponding file attribute.
-.PP
-The format of the output is a string of 8 characters, a possible
-attribute marker:
-
-.nf
-\fBc\fR \fB%config\fR configuration file.
-\fBd\fR \fB%doc\fR documentation file.
-\fBg\fR \fB%ghost\fR file (i.e. the file contents are not included in the package payload).
-\fBl\fR \fB%license\fR license file.
-\fBr\fR \fB%readme\fR readme file.
-.fi
-
-from the package header, followed by the file name.
-Each of the 8 characters denotes the result of a comparison of
-attribute(s) of the file to the value of those attribute(s) recorded
-in the database. A single
-"\fB.\fR" (period)
-means the test passed, while a single
-"\fB?\fR" (question mark)
-indicates the test could not be performed (e.g. file permissions
-prevent reading). Otherwise, the (mnemonically
-em\fBB\fRoldened) character denotes failure of
-the corresponding \fB--verify\fR test:
-
-.nf
-\fBS\fR file \fBS\fRize differs
-\fBM\fR \fBM\fRode differs (includes permissions and file type)
-\fB5\fR MD\fB5\fR sum differs
-\fBD\fR \fBD\fRevice major/minor number mis-match
-\fBL\fR read\fBL\fRink(2) path mis-match
-\fBU\fR \fBU\fRser ownership differs
-\fBG\fR \fBG\fRroup ownership differs
-\fBT\fR m\fBT\fRime differs
-.fi
-
-.SS "DIGITAL SIGNATURE AND DIGEST VERIFICATION"
-.PP
-The general forms of rpm digital signature commands are
-.PP
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR \fB--import\fR \fB\fIPUBKEY\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB--checksig\fR} [\fB--nosignature\fR] [\fB--nodigest\fR]
- \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.PP
-The \fB--checksig\fR option checks all the digests and signatures contained in
-\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fR to ensure
-the integrity and origin of the package. Note that
-signatures are now verified whenever a package is read,
-and \fB--checksig\fR is useful to verify
-all of the digests and signatures associated with a package.
-.PP
-Digital signatures cannot be verified without a public key.
-An ascii armored public key can be added to the \fBrpm\fR database
-using \fB--import\fR. An imported public key is
-carried in a header, and key ring management is performed
-exactly like package management. For example, all currently imported
-public keys can be displayed by:
-.PP
-\fBrpm -qa gpg-pubkey*\fR
-.PP
-Details about a specific public key, when imported, can be displayed
-by querying. Here's information about the Red Hat GPG/DSA key:
-.PP
-\fBrpm -qi gpg-pubkey-db42a60e\fR
-.PP
-Finally, public keys can be erased after importing just like
-packages. Here's how to remove the Red Hat GPG/DSA key
-.PP
-\fBrpm -e gpg-pubkey-db42a60e\fR
-.SS "SIGNING A PACKAGE"
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR \fB--addsign|--resign\fR \fB\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fB\fR\fI ...\fR
-
-.PP
-Both of the \fB--addsign\fR and \fB--resign\fR
-options generate and insert new signatures for each package
-\fIPACKAGE_FILE\fR given, replacing any
-existing signatures. There are two options for historical reasons,
-there is no difference in behavior currently.
-.SS "USING GPG TO SIGN PACKAGES"
-.PP
-In order to sign packages using GPG, \fBrpm\fR
-must be configured to run GPG and be able to find a key
-ring with the appropriate keys. By default,
-\fBrpm\fR uses the same conventions as GPG
-to find key rings, namely the \fB$GNUPGHOME\fR environment
-variable. If your key rings are not located where GPG expects
-them to be, you will need to configure the macro
-\fB%_gpg_path\fR
-to be the location of the GPG key rings to use.
-.PP
-For compatibility with older versions of GPG, PGP, and rpm,
-only V3 OpenPGP signature packets should be configured.
-Either DSA or RSA verification algorithms can be used, but DSA
-is preferred.
-.PP
-If you want to be able to sign packages you create yourself, you
-also need to create your own public and secret key pair (see the
-GPG manual). You will also need to configure the \fBrpm\fR macros
-.TP
-\fB%_signature\fR
-The signature type. Right now only gpg and pgp are supported.
-.TP
-\fB%_gpg_name\fR
-The name of the "user" whose key you wish to use to sign your packages.
-.PP
-For example, to be able to use GPG to sign packages as the user
-\fI"John Doe <jdoe at foo.com>"\fR
-from the key rings located in \fI/etc/rpm/.gpg\fR
-using the executable \fI/usr/bin/gpg\fR you would include
-.PP
-.nf
-%_signature gpg
-%_gpg_path /etc/rpm/.gpg
-%_gpg_name John Doe <jdoe at foo.com>
-%_gpgbin /usr/bin/gpg
-.fi
-.PP
-in a macro configuration file. Use \fI/etc/rpm/macros\fR
-for per-system configuration and \fI~/.rpmmacros\fR
-for per-user configuration.
-.SS "REBUILD DATABASE OPTIONS"
-.PP
-The general form of an rpm rebuild database command is
-.PP
-
-\fBrpm\fR {\fB--initdb|--rebuilddb\fR} [\fB-v\fR] [\fB--dbpath \fIDIRECTORY\fB\fR] [\fB--root \fIDIRECTORY\fB\fR]
-
-.PP
-Use \fB--initdb\fR to create a new database, use
-\fB--rebuilddb\fR to rebuild the database indices from
-the installed package headers.
-.SS "SHOWRC"
-.PP
-The command
-.PP
-\fBrpm\fR \fB--showrc\fR
-.PP
-shows the values \fBrpm\fR will use for all of the
-options are currently set in
-\fIrpmrc\fR and
-\fImacros\fR
-configuration file(s).
-.SS "FTP/HTTP OPTIONS"
-.PP
-\fBrpm\fR can act as an FTP and/or HTTP client so
-that packages can be queried or installed from the internet.
-Package files for install, upgrade, and query operations may be
-specified as an
-\fBftp\fR or
-\fBhttp\fR
-style URL:
-.PP
-ftp://USER:PASSWORD@HOST:PORT/path/to/package.rpm
-.PP
-If the \fB:PASSWORD\fR portion is omitted, the password will be
-prompted for (once per user/hostname pair). If both the user and
-password are omitted, anonymous \fBftp\fR is used.
-In all cases, passive (PASV) \fBftp\fR transfers are
-performed.
-.PP
-\fBrpm\fR allows the following options to be used with
-ftp URLs:
-.TP
-\fB--ftpproxy \fIHOST\fB\fR
-The host \fIHOST\fR will be used as a proxy server
-for all ftp transfers, which allows users to ftp through firewall
-machines which use proxy systems. This option may also be specified
-by configuring the macro \fB%_ftpproxy\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--ftpport \fIPORT\fB\fR
-The TCP \fIPORT\fR number to use for
-the ftp connection on the proxy ftp server instead of the default
-port. This option may also be specified by configuring the macro
-\fB%_ftpport\fR.
-.PP
-\fBrpm\fR allows the following options to be used with
-\fBhttp\fR URLs:
-.TP
-\fB--httpproxy \fIHOST\fB\fR
-The host \fIHOST\fR will be used as
-a proxy server for all \fBhttp\fR transfers. This
-option may also be specified by configuring the macro
-\fB%_httpproxy\fR.
-.TP
-\fB--httpport \fIPORT\fB\fR
-The TCP \fIPORT\fR number to use for the
-\fBhttp\fR connection on the proxy http server instead
-of the default port. This option may also be specified by configuring
-the macro \fB%_httpport\fR.
-.SH "LEGACY ISSUES"
-.SS "Executing rpmbuild"
-.PP
-The build modes of rpm are now resident in the
-\fI/usr/bin/rpmbuild\fR
-executable. Although legacy compatibility provided by the popt aliases
-below has been adequate, the compatibility is not perfect; hence build
-mode compatibility through popt aliases is being removed from rpm.
-Install the \fBrpmbuild\fR package, and see
-\fBrpmbuild\fR(8) for documentation of all the
-\fBrpm\fR build modes previously documented here in
-\fBrpm\fR(8).
-.PP
-Add the following lines to \fI/etc/popt\fR
-if you wish to continue invoking \fBrpmbuild\fR from
-the \fBrpm\fR command line:
-.PP
-.nf
-rpm exec --bp rpmb -bp
-rpm exec --bc rpmb -bc
-rpm exec --bi rpmb -bi
-rpm exec --bl rpmb -bl
-rpm exec --ba rpmb -ba
-rpm exec --bb rpmb -bb
-rpm exec --bs rpmb -bs
-rpm exec --tp rpmb -tp
-rpm exec --tc rpmb -tc
-rpm exec --ti rpmb -ti
-rpm exec --tl rpmb -tl
-rpm exec --ta rpmb -ta
-rpm exec --tb rpmb -tb
-rpm exec --ts rpmb -ts
-rpm exec --rebuild rpmb --rebuild
-rpm exec --recompile rpmb --recompile
-rpm exec --clean rpmb --clean
-rpm exec --rmsource rpmb --rmsource
-rpm exec --rmspec rpmb --rmspec
-rpm exec --target rpmb --target
-rpm exec --short-circuit rpmb --short-circuit
-.fi
-.SH "FILES"
-.SS "rpmrc Configuration"
-.PP
-.nf
-\fI/usr/lib/rpm/rpmrc\fR
-\fI/usr/lib/rpm/redhat/rpmrc\fR
-\fI/etc/rpmrc\fR
-\fI~/.rpmrc\fR
-.fi
-.SS "Macro Configuration"
-.PP
-.nf
-\fI/usr/lib/rpm/macros\fR
-\fI/usr/lib/rpm/redhat/macros\fR
-\fI/etc/rpm/macros\fR
-\fI~/.rpmmacros\fR
-.fi
-.SS "Database"
-.PP
-.nf
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Basenames\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Conflictname\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Dirnames\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Filemd5s\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Group\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Installtid\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Name\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Packages\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Providename\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Provideversion\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Pubkeys\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Removed\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Requirename\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Requireversion\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Sha1header\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Sigmd5\fR
-\fI/var/lib/rpm/Triggername\fR
-.fi
-.SS "Temporary"
-.PP
-\fI/var/tmp/rpm*\fR
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.nf
-\fBpopt\fR(3),
-\fBrpm2cpio\fR(8),
-\fBrpmbuild\fR(8),
-.fi
-
-\fBhttp://www.rpm.org/ <URL:http://www.rpm.org/>
-\fR
-.SH "AUTHORS"
-
-.nf
-Marc Ewing <marc at redhat.com>
-Jeff Johnson <jbj at redhat.com>
-Erik Troan <ewt at redhat.com>
-.fi
diff --git a/raw/man8/setquota.8 b/raw/man8/setquota.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 5177da1..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/setquota.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-.TH SETQUOTA 8
-.SH NAME
-setquota \- set disk quotas
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /usr/sbin/setquota
-[
-.B \-r
-]
-[
-.B \-u
-|
-.B \-g
-]
-[
-.B \-F
-.I quotaformat
-]
-.I name
-.I block-softlimit
-.I block-hardlimit
-.I inode-softlimit
-.I inode-hardlimit
-.B \-a
-|
-.I filesystem...
-.LP
-.B /usr/sbin/setquota
-[
-.B \-r
-]
-[
-.B \-u
-|
-.B \-g
-]
-[
-.B \-F
-.I quotaformat
-]
-[
-.B \-p
-.I protoname
-]
-.I name
-.B \-a
-|
-.I filesystem...
-.LP
-.B /usr/sbin/setquota
-.B \-t
-[
-.B \-u
-|
-.B \-g
-]
-[
-.B \-F
-.I quotaformat
-]
-.I block-grace
-.I inode-grace
-.B \-a
-|
-.I filesystem...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.IX "setquota command" "" "\fLsetquota\fP \(em set disk quotas"
-.IX set "disk quotas \(em \fLsetquota\fP"
-.IX "disk quotas" "setquota command" "" "\fLsetquota\fP \(em set disk quotas"
-.IX "disk quotas" "setquota command" "" "\fLsetquota\fP \(em set disk quotas"
-.IX "quotas" "setquota command" "" "\fLsetquota\fP \(em set disk quotas"
-.IX "filesystem" "setquota command" "" "\fLsetquota\fP \(em set disk quotas"
-.B setquota
-is a command line quota editor.
-The filesystem, user/group name and new quotas for this
-filesystem can be specified on the command line.
-.TP
-.B -r
-Edit also remote quota use rpc.rquotad on remote server to set quota.
-.TP
-.B -F \f2quotaformat\f1
-Perform setting for specified format (ie. don't perform format autodetection).
-Possible format names are:
-.B vfsold
-(version 1 quota),
-.B vfsv0
-(version 2 quota),
-.B rpc
-(quota over NFS),
-.B xfs
-(quota on XFS filesystem)
-.TP
-.B -u
-Set user quotas for named user. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B -g
-Set group quotas for named group.
-.TP
-.B -p \f2protoname\f1
-Use quota settings of user or group
-.I protoname
-to set the quota for the named user or group.
-.TP
-.B -t
-Set grace times for users/groups. Times
-.B block-grace
-and
-.B inode-grace
-are specified in seconds.
-.TP
-.B -a
-Go through all filesystems with quota in
-.B /etc/mtab
-and perform setting.
-.PP
-To disable a quota, set the coresponding parameter to 0. To change quotas
-for several filesystems, invoke once for each filesystem.
-.PP
-Only the super-user may edit quotas.
-.SH FILES
-.PD 0
-.TP 20
-.B aquota.user or aquota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 2 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.B quota.user or quota.group
-quota file at the filesystem root (version 1 quota, non-XFS filesystems)
-.TP
-.B /etc/mtab
-mounted filesystem table
-.PD
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR edquota (8),
-.BR quota (1),
-.BR quotactl (2),
-.BR quotacheck (8),
-.BR quotaon (8),
-.BR repquota (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/setserial.8 b/raw/man8/setserial.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 57e4fa7..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/setserial.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,520 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1992, 1993 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.\" Portions of this text are from the README in setserial-2.01.tar.z,
-.\" but I can't figure out who wrote that document. If anyone knows,
-.\" please tell me
-.\"
-.\" [tytso:19940519.2239EDT] I did... - Ted Ts'o (tytso at mit.edu)
-.\"
-.TH SETSERIAL 8 "January 2000" "Setserial 2.17
-.SH NAME
-setserial \- get/set Linux serial port information
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B setserial
-.B "[ \-abqvVWz ]"
-device
-.BR "[ " parameter1 " [ " arg " ] ] ..."
-
-.B "setserial -g"
-.B "[ \-abGv ]"
-device1 ...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B setserial
-is a program designed to set and/or report the configuration information
-associated with a serial port. This information includes what I/O
-port and IRQ a particular serial port is using, and whether or not the
-break key should be interpreted as the Secure Attention Key, and so
-on.
-
-During the normal bootup process, only COM ports 1-4 are initialized,
-using the default I/O ports and IRQ values, as listed below. In order
-to initialize any additional serial ports, or to change the COM 1-4
-ports to a nonstadard configuration, the
-.B setserial
-program should be used. Typically it is called from an
-.I rc.serial
-script, which is usually run out of
-.IR /etc/rc.local .
-
-The
-.I device
-argument or arguments specifies the serial device which should be configured or
-interrogated. It will usually have the following form:
-.BR /dev/cua[0-3] .
-
-If no parameters are specified,
-.B setserial
-will print out the port type (i.e., 8250, 16450, 16550, 16550A, etc.), the
-hardware I/O port, the hardware IRQ line, its "baud base," and some of
-its operational flags.
-
-If the
-.B \-g
-option is given, the arguments to setserial are interpreted as a list
-of devices for which the characteristics of those devices should be
-printed.
-
-Without the
-.B \-g
-option, the first argument to setserial is interpreted as the device
-to be modified or characteristics to be printed, and any additional
-arguments are interpreted as parameters which should be assigned
-to that serial device.
-
-For the most part, superuser privilege is required to set the
-configuration parameters of a serial port. A few serial port parameters
-can be set by normal users, however, and these will be noted as
-exceptions in this manual page.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-.B Setserial
-accepts the following options:
-
-.TP
-.B \-a
-When reporting the configuration of a serial device, print all
-available information.
-.TP
-.B \-b
-When reporting the configuration of a serial device, print a summary
-of the device's configuration, which might be suitable for printing
-during the bootup process, during the /etc/rc script.
-.TP
-.B \-G
-Print out the configuration information of the serial port in a form which
-can be fed back to setserial as command-line arguments.
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Be quiet.
-.B Setserial
-will print fewer lines of output.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Be verbose.
-.B Setserial
-will print additional status output.
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Display version and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-W
-Do wild interrupt initialization and exit. This option is no longer
-relevant in Linux kernels after version 2.1.
-.TP
-.B \-z
-Zero out the serial flags before starting to set flags. This is related
-to the automatic saving of serial flags using the \-G flag.
-
-.SH PARAMETERS
-The following parameters can be assigned to a serial port.
-
-All argument values are assumed to be in decimal unless preceeded by "0x".
-
-.TP
-.BR port " port_number"
-The
-.B port
-option sets the I/O port, as described above.
-.TP
-.BR irq " irq_number"
-The
-.B irq
-option sets the hardware IRQ, as described above.
-.TP
-.BR uart " uart_type"
-This option is used to set the UART type. The permitted types are
-.BR none ,
-8250, 16450, 16550, 16550A, 16650, 16650V2, 16654, 16750, 16850, 16950, and
-16954.
-Using UART type
-.B none
-will disable the port.
-
-Some internal modems are billed as having a "16550A UART with a 1k
-buffer". This is a lie. They do not have really have a 16550A
-compatible UART; instead what they have is a 16450 compatible UART
-with a 1k receive buffer to prevent receiver overruns. This is
-important, because they do not have a transmit FIFO. Hence, they are
-not compatible with a 16550A UART, and the autoconfiguration process
-will correctly identify them as 16450's. If you attempt to override
-this using the
-.B uart
-parameter, you will see dropped characters during file transmissions.
-These UART's usually have other problems: the
-.B skip_test
-parameter also often must be specified.
-.TP
-.B autoconfig
-When this parameter is given,
-.B setserial
-will ask the kernel to attempt to automatically configure the serial
-port. The I/O port must be correctly set; the kernel will attempt to
-determine the UART type, and if the
-.B auto_irq
-parameter is set, Linux will attempt to automatically determine the
-IRQ. The
-.B autoconfig
-parameter should be given after the
-.BR port , auto_irq ", and " skip_test
-parameters have been specified.
-.TP
-.B auto_irq
-During autoconfiguration, try to determine the IRQ. This feature is
-not guaranteed to always produce the correct result; some hardware
-configurations will fool the Linux kernel. It is generally safer not
-to use the
-.B auto_irq
-feature, but rather to specify the IRQ to be used explicitly, using
-the
-.B irq
-parameter.
-.TP
-.B ^auto_irq
-During autoconfiguration, do
-.I not
-try to determine the IRQ.
-.TP
-.B skip_test
-During autoconfiguration, skip the UART test. Some internal modems do
-not have National Semiconductor compatible UART's, but have cheap
-imitations instead. Some of these cheasy imitations UART's do not
-fully support the loopback detection mode, which is used by the kernel
-to make sure there really is a UART at a particular address before
-attempting to configure it. So for certain internal modems you will
-need to specify this parameter so Linux can initialize the UART
-correctly.
-.TP
-.B ^skip_test
-During autoconfiguration, do
-.I not
-skip the UART test.
-.TP
-.BR baud_base " baud_base"
-This option sets the base baud rate, which is the clock frequency divided
-by 16. Normally this value is 115200, which is also the fastest baud
-rate which the UART can support.
-.TP
-.B
-spd_hi
-Use 57.6kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
-This parameter may be specified by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B spd_vhi
-Use 115kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
-This parameter may be specified by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B spd_shi
-Use 230kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
-This parameter may be specified by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B spd_warp
-Use 460kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
-This parameter may be specified by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B spd_cust
-Use the custom divisor to set the speed when the application requests
-38.4kb. In this case, the baud rate is the
-.B baud_base
-divided by the
-.BR divisor .
-This parameter may be specified by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B spd_normal
-Use 38.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
-This parameter may be specified by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.BR divisor " divisor"
-This option sets the custom divison. This divisor will be used then the
-.B spd_cust
-option is selected and the serial port is set to 38.4kb by the
-application.
-This parameter may be specified by a non-privileged user.
-.TP
-.B sak
-Set the break key at the Secure Attention Key.
-.TP
-.B ^sak
-disable the Secure Attention Key.
-.TP
-.B fourport
-Configure the port as an AST Fourport card.
-.TP
-.B ^fourport
-Disable AST Fourport configuration.
-.TP
-.BR close_delay " delay"
-Specify the amount of time, in hundredths of a second, that DTR should
-remain low on a serial line after the callout device is closed, before
-the blocked dialin device raises DTR again. The default value of this
-option is 50, or a half-second delay.
-.TP
-.BR closing_wait " delay"
-Specify the amount of time, in hundredths of a second, that the kernel
-should wait for data to be transmitted from the serial port while
-closing the port. If "none" is
-specified, no delay will occur. If "infinite" is specified the kernel
-will wait indefinitely for the buffered data to be transmitted.
-The default setting is 3000 or 30 seconds of delay.
-This default is generally appropriate for most devices. If too long
-a delay is selected, then
-the serial port may hang for a long time if when a serial port which
-is not connected, and has data pending, is closed. If too short a
-delay is selected, then there is a risk that some of the transmitted
-data is output at all. If the device is extremely slow, like a plotter,
-the closing_wait may need to be larger.
-.TP
-.B session_lockout
-Lock out callout port (/dev/cuaXX) accesses across different sessions.
-That is, once a process has opened a port, do not allow a process with
-a different session ID to open that port until the first process has
-closed it.
-.TP
-.B ^session_lockout
-Do not lock out callout port accesses across different sessions.
-.TP
-.B pgrp_lockout
-Lock out callout port (/dev/cuaXX) accesses across different process groups.
-That is, once a process has opened a port, do not allow a process in a
-different process group to open that port until the first process has
-closed it.
-.TP
-.B ^pgrp_lockout
-Do not lock out callout port accesses across different process groups.
-.TP
-.B hup_notify
-Notify a process blocked on opening a dial in line when a process has
-finished using a callout line (either by closing it or by the serial
-line being hung up) by returning EAGAIN to the open.
-
-The application of this parameter is for getty's which are blocked on
-a serial port's dial in line. This allows the getty to reset the
-modem (which may have had its configuration modified by the
-application using the callout device) before blocking on the open again.
-.TP
-.B ^hup_notify
-Do not notify a process blocked on opening a dial in line when the
-callout device is hung up.
-.TP
-.B split_termios
-Treat the termios settings used by the callout device and the termios
-settings used by the dialin devices as separate.
-.TP
-.B ^split_termios
-Use the same termios structure to store both the dialin and callout
-ports. This is the default option.
-.TP
-.B callout_nohup
-If this particular serial port is opened as a callout device, do not
-hangup the tty when carrier detect is dropped.
-.TP
-.B ^callout_nohup
-Do not skip hanging up the tty when a serial port is opened as a
-callout device. Of course, the HUPCL termios flag must be enabled if
-the hangup is to occur.
-.TP
-.B low_latency
-Minimize the receive latency of the serial device at the cost of
-greater CPU utilization. (Normally there is an average of 5-10ms
-latency before characters are handed off to the line discpline to
-minimize overhead.) This is off by default, but certain real-time
-applications may find this useful.
-.TP
-.B ^low_latency
-Optimize for efficient CPU processing of serial characters at the cost of
-paying an average of 5-10ms of latency before the characters are processed.
-This is the default.
-.SH CONSIDERATIONS OF CONFIGURING SERIAL PORTS
-It is important to note that setserial merely tells the Linux kernel
-where it should expect to find the I/O port and IRQ lines of a
-particular serial port. It does *not* configure the hardware, the
-actual serial board, to use a particular I/O port. In order to do
-that, you will need to physically program the serial board, usually by
-setting some jumpers or by switching some DIP switches.
-
-This section will provide some pointers in helping you decide how you
-would like to configure your serial ports.
-
-The "standard MS-DOS" port associations are given below:
-
-.nf
-.RS
-/dev/ttys0 (COM1), port 0x3f8, irq 4
-/dev/ttys1 (COM2), port 0x2f8, irq 3
-/dev/ttys2 (COM3), port 0x3e8, irq 4
-/dev/ttys3 (COM4), port 0x2e8, irq 3
-.RE
-.fi
-
-Due to the limitations in the design of the AT/ISA bus architecture,
-normally an IRQ line may not be shared between two or more serial
-ports. If you attempt to do this, one or both serial ports will
-become unreliable if you try to use both simultaneously. This
-limitation can be overcome by special multi-port serial port boards,
-which are designed to share multiple serial ports over a single IRQ
-line. Multi-port serial cards supported by Linux include the AST
-FourPort, the Accent Async board, the Usenet Serial II board, the
-Bocaboard BB-1004, BB-1008, and BB-2016 boards, and the HUB-6 serial
-board.
-
-The selection of an alternative IRQ line
-is difficult, since most of them are already used. The following table
-lists the "standard MS-DOS" assignments of available IRQ lines:
-
-.nf
-.RS
-IRQ 3: COM2
-IRQ 4: COM1
-IRQ 5: LPT2
-IRQ 7: LPT1
-.RE
-.fi
-
-Most people find that IRQ 5 is a good choice, assuming that there is
-only one parallel port active in the computer. Another good choice is
-IRQ 2 (aka IRQ 9); although this IRQ is sometimes used by network
-cards, and very rarely VGA cards will be configured to use IRQ 2 as a
-vertical retrace interrupt. If your VGA card is configured this way;
-try to disable it so you can reclaim that IRQ line for some other
-card. It's not necessary for Linux and most other Operating systems.
-
-The only other available IRQ lines are 3, 4, and 7, and these are
-probably used by the other serial and parallel ports. (If your serial
-card has a 16bit card edge connector, and supports higher interrupt
-numbers, then IRQ 10, 11, 12, and 15 are also available.)
-
-On AT class machines, IRQ 2 is seen as IRQ 9, and Linux will interpret it
-in this manner.
-
-IRQ's other than 2 (9), 3, 4, 5, 7, 10, 11, 12, and 15, should
-.I not
-be used, since they are assigned to other hardware and cannot, in general,
-be changed. Here are the "standard" assignments:
-
-.nf
-.RS
-IRQ 0 Timer channel 0
-IRQ 1 Keyboard
-IRQ 2 Cascade for controller 2
-IRQ 3 Serial port 2
-IRQ 4 Serial port 1
-IRQ 5 Parallel port 2 (Reserved in PS/2)
-IRQ 6 Floppy diskette
-IRQ 7 Parallel port 1
-IRQ 8 Real-time clock
-IRQ 9 Redirected to IRQ2
-IRQ 10 Reserved
-IRQ 11 Reserved
-IRQ 12 Reserved (Auxillary device in PS/2)
-IRQ 13 Math coprocessor
-IRQ 14 Hard disk controller
-IRQ 15 Reserved
-.RE
-.fi
-
-.SH MULTIPORT CONFIGURATION
-
-Certain multiport serial boards which share multiple ports on a single
-IRQ use one or more ports to indicate whether or not there are any
-pending ports which need to be serviced. If your multiport board
-supports these ports, you should make use of them to avoid potential
-lockups if the interrupt gets lost.
-
-In order to set these ports specify
-.B set_multiport
-as a parameter, and follow it with the multiport parameters. The
-multiport parameters take the form of specifying the
-.I port
-that should be checked, a
-.I mask
-which indicate which bits in the register are significant, and finally, a
-.I match
-parameter which specifies what the significant bits in that register must
-match when there is no more pending work to be done.
-
-Up to four such port/mask/match combinations may be specified. The
-first such combinations should be specified by setting the parameters
-.BR port1 ,
-.BR mask1 ,
-and
-.BR match1 .
-The second such combination should be specified with
-.BR port2 ,
-.BR mask2 ,
-and
-.BR match2 ,
-and so on. In order to disable this multiport checking, set
-.B port1
-to be zero.
-
-In order to view the current multiport settings, specify the parameter
-.B get_multiport
-on the command line.
-
-Here are some multiport settings for some common serial boards:
-
-.nf
-.RS
-AST FourPort port1 0x1BF mask1 0xf match1 0xf
-
-Boca BB-1004/8 port1 0x107 mask1 0xff match1 0
-
-Boca BB-2016 port1 0x107 mask1 0xff match1 0
- port2 0x147 mask2 0xff match2 0
-.RE
-.fi
-
-.SH Hayes ESP Configuration
-.B Setserial
-may also be used to configure ports on a Hayes ESP serial board.
-.PP
-The following parameters when configuring ESP ports:
-.TP
-.B rx_trigger
-This is the trigger level (in bytes) of the receive FIFO. Larger
-values may result in fewer interrupts and hence better performance;
-however, a value too high could result in data loss. Valid values
-are 1 through 1023.
-.TP
-.B tx_trigger
-This is the trigger level (in bytes) of the transmit FIFO. Larger
-values may result in fewer interrupts and hence better performance;
-however, a value too high could result in degraded transmit
-performance. Valid values are 1 through 1023.
-.TP
-.B flow_off
-This is the level (in bytes) at which the ESP port will "flow off"
-the remote transmitter (i.e. tell him to stop stop sending more
-bytes). Valid values are 1 through 1023. This value should be
-greater than the receive trigger level and the flow on level.
-.TP
-.B flow_on
-This is the level (in bytes) at which the ESP port will "flow on"
-the remote transmitter (i.e. tell him to resume sending bytes) after
-having flowed it off. Valid values are 1 through 1023. This value
-should be less than the flow off level, but greater than the receive
-trigger level.
-.TP
-.B rx_timeout
-This is the amount of time that the ESP port will wait after
-receiving the final character before signaling an interrupt. Valid
-values are 0 through 255. A value too high will increase latency,
-and a value too low will cause unnecessary interrupts.
-
-.SH CAUTION
-CAUTION: Configuring a serial port to use an incorrect I/O port
-can lock up your machine.
-.SH FILES
-.BR /etc/rc.local
-.BR /etc/rc.serial
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR tty (4),
-.BR ttys (4),
-kernel/chr_drv/serial.c
-.SH AUTHOR
-The original version of setserial was written by Rick Sladkey
-(jrs at world.std.com), and was modified by Michael K. Johnson
-(johnsonm at stolaf.edu).
-
-This version has since been rewritten from scratch by Theodore Ts'o
-(tytso at mit.edu) on 1/1/93. Any bugs or problems are solely his
-responsibility.
diff --git a/raw/man8/showmount.8 b/raw/man8/showmount.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 63342c7..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/showmount.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1993 Rick Sladkey <jrs at world.std.com>
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.TH SHOWMOUNT 8 "6 October 1993"
-.SH NAME
-showmount \- show mount information for an NFS server
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /usr/sbin/showmount
-.B "[\ \-adehv\ ]"
-.B "[\ \-\-all\ ]"
-.B "[\ \-\-directories\ ]"
-.B "[\ \-\-exports\ ]"
-.B "[\ \-\-help\ ]"
-.B "[\ \-\-version\ ]"
-.B "[\ host\ ]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B showmount
-queries the mount daemon on a remote host for information about
-the state of the NFS server on that machine. With no options
-.B showmount
-lists the set of clients who are mounting from that host.
-The output from
-.B showmount
-is designed to
-appear as though it were processesed through ``sort -u''.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BR \-a " or " \-\-all
-List both the client hostname and mounted directory in
-host:dir format.
-.TP
-.BR \-d " or " \-\-directories
-List only the directories mounted by some client.
-.TP
-.BR \-e " or " \-\-exports
-Show the NFS server's export list.
-.TP
-.BR \-h " or " \-\-help
-Provide a short help summary.
-.TP
-.BR \-v " or " \-\-version
-Report the current version number of the program.
-.TP
-.B \-\-no\-headers
-Suppress the descriptive headings from the output.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR rpc.mountd (8),
-.BR rpc.nfsd (8)
-.SH BUGS
-The completeness and accurary of the information that
-.B showmount
-displays varies according to the NFS server's implementation.
-.P
-Because
-.B showmount
-sorts and uniqs the output, it is impossible to determine from
-the output whether a client is mounting the same directory more than once.
-.SH AUTHOR
-Rick Sladkey <jrs at world.std.com>
diff --git a/raw/man8/shutdown.8 b/raw/man8/shutdown.8
deleted file mode 100644
index a29326b..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/shutdown.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,179 +0,0 @@
-.\"{{{}}}
-.\"{{{ Title
-.TH SHUTDOWN 8 "Juli 31, 2001" "" "Linux System Administrator's Manual"
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Name
-.SH NAME
-shutdown \- bring the system down
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Synopsis
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /sbin/shutdown
-.RB [ \-t
-.IR sec ]
-.RB [ \-arkhncfF ]
-.I time
-.RI [ warning-message ]
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Description
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBshutdown\fP brings the system down in a secure way. All logged-in users are
-notified that the system is going down, and \fBlogin\fP(1) is blocked.
-It is possible to shut the system down immediately or after a specified delay.
-All processes are first notified that the system is going down by the
-signal \s-2SIGTERM\s0. This gives programs like \fBvi\fP(1)
-the time to save the file being edited,
-mail and news processing programs a chance to exit cleanly, etc.
-\fBshutdown\fP does its job by signalling the \fBinit\fP process,
-asking it to change the runlevel.
-Runlevel \fB0\fP is used to halt the system, runlevel \fB6\fP is used
-to reboot the system, and runlevel \fB1\fP is used to put to system into
-a state where administrative tasks can be performed; this is the default
-if neither the \fI-h\fP or \fI-r\fP flag is given to \fBshutdown\fP.
-To see which actions are taken on halt or reboot see the appropriate
-entries for these runlevels in the file \fI/etc/inittab\fP.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Options
-.SH OPTIONS
-.\"{{{ -a
-.IP "\fB\-a\fP
-Use \fB/etc/shutdown.allow\fP.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -t sec
-.IP "\fB\-t\fP \fIsec\fP"
-Tell \fBinit\fP(8) to wait \fIsec\fP seconds between sending processes the
-warning and the kill signal, before changing to another runlevel.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -k
-.IP \fB\-k\fP
-Don't really shutdown; only send the warning messages to everybody.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -r
-.IP \fB\-r\fP
-Reboot after shutdown.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -h
-.IP \fB\-h\fP
-Halt after shutdown.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -n
-.IP \fB\-n\fP
-[DEPRECATED] Don't call \fBinit\fP(8) to do the shutdown but do it ourself.
-The use of this option is discouraged, and its results are not always what
-you'd expect.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -f
-.IP \fB\-f\fP
-Skip fsck on reboot.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -F
-.IP \fB\-F\fP
-Force fsck on reboot.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ -c
-.IP \fB\-c\fP
-Cancel an already running shutdown. With this option it is of course
-not possible to give the \fBtime\fP argument, but you can enter a
-explanatory message on the command line that will be sent to all users.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ time
-.IP \fItime\fP
-When to shutdown.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ warning-message
-.IP \fIwarning-message\fP
-Message to send to all users.
-.\"}}}
-.PP
-The \fItime\fP argument can have different formats. First, it can be an
-absolute time in the format \fIhh:mm\fP, in which \fIhh\fP is the hour
-(1 or 2 digits) and \fImm\fP is the minute of the hour (in two digits).
-Second, it can be in the format \fB+\fP\fIm\fP, in which \fIm\fP is the
-number of minutes to wait. The word \fBnow\fP is an alias for \fB+0\fP.
-.PP
-If shutdown is called with a delay, it creates the advisory file
-.I /etc/nologin
-which causes programs such as \fIlogin(1)\fP to not allow new user
-logins. Shutdown removes this file if it is stopped before it
-can signal init (i.e. it is cancelled or something goes wrong).
-It also removes it before calling init to change the runlevel.
-.PP
-The \fB\-f\fP flag means `reboot fast'. This only creates an advisory
-file \fI/fastboot\fP which can be tested by the system when it comes
-up again. The boot rc file can test if this file is present, and decide not
-to run \fBfsck\fP(1) since the system has been shut down in the proper way.
-After that, the boot process should remove \fI/fastboot\fP.
-.PP
-The \fB\-F\fP flag means `force fsck'. This only creates an advisory
-file \fI/forcefsck\fP which can be tested by the system when it comes
-up again. The boot rc file can test if this file is present, and decide
-to run \fBfsck\fP(1) with a special `force' flag so that even properly
-unmounted filesystems get checked.
-After that, the boot process should remove \fI/forcefsck\fP.
-.PP
-The \fB-n\fP flag causes \fBshutdown\fP not to call \fBinit\fP,
-but to kill all running processes itself.
-\fBshutdown\fP will then turn off quota, accounting, and swapping
-and unmount all filesystems.
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ Files
-.SH ACCESS CONTROL
-\fBshutdown\fP can be called from \fBinit\fP(8) when the magic keys
-\fBCTRL-ALT-DEL\fP are pressed, by creating an appropriate entry in
-\fI/etc/inittab\fP. This means that everyone who has physical access
-to the console keyboard can shut the system down. To prevent this,
-\fBshutdown\fP can check to see if an authorized user is logged in on
-one of the virtual consoles. If \fBshutdown\fP is called with the \fB-a\fP
-argument (add this to the invocation of shutdown in /etc/inittab),
-it checks to see if the file \fI/etc/shutdown.allow\fP is present.
-It then compares the login names in that file with the list of people
-that are logged in on a virtual console (from \fI/var/run/utmp\fP). Only
-if one of those authorized users \fBor root\fP is logged in, it will
-proceed. Otherwise it will write the message
-.sp 1
-.nf
-\fBshutdown: no authorized users logged in\fP
-.fi
-.sp 1
-to the (physical) system console. The format of \fI/etc/shutdown.allow\fP
-is one user name per line. Empty lines and comment lines (prefixed by a
-\fB#\fP) are allowed. Currently there is a limit of 32 users in this file.
-.sp 1
-Note that if \fI/etc/shutdown.allow\fP is not present, the \fB-a\fP
-argument is ignored.
-.SH FILES
-.nf
-/fastboot
-/etc/inittab
-/etc/init.d/halt
-/etc/init.d/reboot
-/etc/shutdown.allow
-.fi
-.\"}}}
-.SH NOTES
-A lot of users forget to give the \fItime\fP argument
-and are then puzzled by the error message \fBshutdown\fP produces. The
-\fItime\fP argument is mandatory; in 90 percent of all cases this argument
-will be the word \fBnow\fP.
-.PP
-Init can only capture CTRL-ALT-DEL and start shutdown in console mode.
-If the system is running the X window System, the X server processes
-all key strokes. Some X11 environments make it possible to capture
-CTRL-ALT-DEL, but what exactly is done with that event depends on
-that environment.
-.PP
-Shutdown wasn't designed to be run setuid. /etc/shutdown.allow is
-not used to find out who is executing shutdown, it ONLY checks who
-is currently logged in on (one of the) console(s).
-.\"{{{ Author
-.SH AUTHOR
-Miquel van Smoorenburg, miquels at cistron.nl
-.\"}}}
-.\"{{{ See also
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR fsck (8),
-.BR init (8),
-.BR halt (8),
-.BR poweroff (8),
-.BR reboot (8)
-.\"}}}
diff --git a/raw/man8/smbd.8 b/raw/man8/smbd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c2c75b..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/smbd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,230 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBD" 8 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbd \- server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbd\fR [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d <debug level>] [-l <log directory>]
- [-p <port number>] [-O <socket option>] [-s <configuration file>]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This program is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbd\fR is the server daemon that provides filesharing and printing services to Windows clients\&. The server provides filespace and printer services to clients using the SMB (or CIFS) protocol\&. This is compatible with the LanManager protocol, and can service LanManager clients\&. These include MSCLIENT 3\&.0 for DOS, Windows for Workgroups, Windows 95/98/ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, OS/2, DAVE for Macintosh, and smbfs for Linux\&.
-
-.PP
-An extensive description of the services that the server can provide is given in the man page for the configuration file controlling the attributes of those services (see \fBsmb.conf\fR(5)\&. This man page will not describe the services, but will concentrate on the administrative aspects of running the server\&.
-
-.PP
-Please note that there are significant security implications to running this server, and the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) manual page should be regarded as mandatory reading before proceeding with installation\&.
-
-.PP
-A session is created whenever a client requests one\&. Each client gets a copy of the server for each session\&. This copy then services all connections made by the client during that session\&. When all connections from its client are closed, the copy of the server for that client terminates\&.
-
-.PP
-The configuration file, and any files that it includes, are automatically reloaded every minute, if they change\&. You can force a reload by sending a SIGHUP to the server\&. Reloading the configuration file will not affect connections to any service that is already established\&. Either the user will have to disconnect from the service, or \fBsmbd\fR killed and restarted\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--D
-If specified, this parameter causes the server to operate as a daemon\&. That is, it detaches itself and runs in the background, fielding requests on the appropriate port\&. Operating the server as a daemon is the recommended way of running \fBsmbd\fR for servers that provide more than casual use file and print services\&. This switch is assumed if \fBsmbd \fR is executed on the command line of a shell\&.
-
-
-.TP
--F
-If specified, this parameter causes the main \fBsmbd\fR process to not daemonize, i\&.e\&. double-fork and disassociate with the terminal\&. Child processes are still created as normal to service each connection request, but the main process does not exit\&. This operation mode is suitable for running \fBsmbd\fR under process supervisors such as \fBsupervise\fR and \fBsvscan\fR from Daniel J\&. Bernstein's \fBdaemontools\fR package, or the AIX process monitor\&.
-
-
-.TP
--S
-If specified, this parameter causes \fBsmbd\fR to log to standard output rather than a file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--i
-If this parameter is specified it causes the server to run "interactively", not as a daemon, even if the server is executed on the command line of a shell\&. Setting this parameter negates the implicit deamon mode when run from the command line\&. \fBsmbd\fR also logs to standard output, as if the \fB-S\fR parameter had been given\&.
-
-
-.TP
--V
-Prints the program version number\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s <configuration file>
-The file specified contains the configuration details required by the server\&. The information in this file includes server-specific information such as what printcap file to use, as well as descriptions of all the services that the server is to provide\&. See \fIsmb\&.conf\fR for more information\&. The default configuration file name is determined at compile time\&.
-
-
-.TP
--d|--debug=debuglevel
-\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&.
-
-
-The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of the server\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&. Level 1 is a reasonable level for day-to-day running - it generates a small amount of information about operations carried out\&.
-
-
-Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
-
-
-Note that specifying this parameter here will override the \fIlog level\fR parameter in the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file\&.
-
-
-.TP
--l|--logfile=logbasename
-File name for log/debug files\&. The extension \fB"\&.client"\fR will be appended\&. The log file is never removed by the client\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.TP
--b
-Prints information about how Samba was built\&.
-
-
-.TP
--l <log directory>
-If specified, \fIlog directory\fR specifies a log directory into which the "log\&.smbd" log file will be created for informational and debug messages from the running server\&. The log file generated is never removed by the server although its size may be controlled by the \fImax log size\fR option in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file\&. \fBBeware:\fR If the directory specified does not exist, \fBsmbd\fR will log to the default debug log location defined at compile time\&.
-
-
-The default log directory is specified at compile time\&.
-
-
-.TP
--p <port number>
-\fIport number\fR is a positive integer value\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is 139\&.
-
-
-This number is the port number that will be used when making connections to the server from client software\&. The standard (well-known) port number for the SMB over TCP is 139, hence the default\&. If you wish to run the server as an ordinary user rather than as root, most systems will require you to use a port number greater than 1024 - ask your system administrator for help if you are in this situation\&.
-
-
-In order for the server to be useful by most clients, should you configure it on a port other than 139, you will require port redirection services on port 139, details of which are outlined in rfc1002\&.txt section 4\&.3\&.5\&.
-
-
-This parameter is not normally specified except in the above situation\&.
-
-
-.SH "FILES"
-
-.TP
-\fI/etc/inetd\&.conf\fR
-If the server is to be run by the \fBinetd\fR meta-daemon, this file must contain suitable startup information for the meta-daemon\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fI/etc/rc\fR
-or whatever initialization script your system uses)\&.
-
-
-If running the server as a daemon at startup, this file will need to contain an appropriate startup sequence for the server\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fI/etc/services\fR
-If running the server via the meta-daemon \fBinetd\fR, this file must contain a mapping of service name (e\&.g\&., netbios-ssn) to service port (e\&.g\&., 139) and protocol type (e\&.g\&., tcp)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-\fI/usr/local/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR
-This is the default location of the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) server configuration file\&. Other common places that systems install this file are \fI/usr/samba/lib/smb\&.conf\fR and \fI/etc/samba/smb\&.conf\fR\&.
-
-
-This file describes all the services the server is to make available to clients\&. See \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) for more information\&.
-
-
-.SH "LIMITATIONS"
-
-.PP
-On some systems \fBsmbd\fR cannot change uid back to root after a setuid() call\&. Such systems are called trapdoor uid systems\&. If you have such a system, you will be unable to connect from a client (such as a PC) as two different users at once\&. Attempts to connect the second user will result in access denied or similar\&.
-
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
-
-.TP
-\fBPRINTER\fR
-If no printer name is specified to printable services, most systems will use the value of this variable (or \fBlp\fR if this variable is not defined) as the name of the printer to use\&. This is not specific to the server, however\&.
-
-
-.SH "PAM INTERACTION"
-
-.PP
-Samba uses PAM for authentication (when presented with a plaintext password), for account checking (is this account disabled?) and for session management\&. The degree too which samba supports PAM is restricted by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the \fIobey pam restrictions\fR \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) paramater\&. When this is set, the following restrictions apply:
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-\fBAccount Validation\fR: All accesses to a samba server are checked against PAM to see if the account is vaild, not disabled and is permitted to login at this time\&. This also applies to encrypted logins\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-\fBSession Management\fR: When not using share level secuirty, users must pass PAM's session checks before access is granted\&. Note however, that this is bypassed in share level secuirty\&. Note also that some older pam configuration files may need a line added for session support\&.
-
-.LP
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "DIAGNOSTICS"
-
-.PP
-Most diagnostics issued by the server are logged in a specified log file\&. The log file name is specified at compile time, but may be overridden on the command line\&.
-
-.PP
-The number and nature of diagnostics available depends on the debug level used by the server\&. If you have problems, set the debug level to 3 and peruse the log files\&.
-
-.PP
-Most messages are reasonably self-explanatory\&. Unfortunately, at the time this man page was created, there are too many diagnostics available in the source code to warrant describing each and every diagnostic\&. At this stage your best bet is still to grep the source code and inspect the conditions that gave rise to the diagnostics you are seeing\&.
-
-.SH "SIGNALS"
-
-.PP
-Sending the \fBsmbd\fR a SIGHUP will cause it to reload its \fIsmb\&.conf\fR configuration file within a short period of time\&.
-
-.PP
-To shut down a user's \fBsmbd\fR process it is recommended that \fBSIGKILL (-9)\fR \fBNOT\fR be used, except as a last resort, as this may leave the shared memory area in an inconsistent state\&. The safe way to terminate an \fBsmbd\fR is to send it a SIGTERM (-15) signal and wait for it to die on its own\&.
-
-.PP
-The debug log level of \fBsmbd\fR may be raised or lowered using \fBsmbcontrol\fR(1) program (SIGUSR[1|2] signals are no longer used since Samba 2\&.2)\&. This is to allow transient problems to be diagnosed, whilst still running at a normally low log level\&.
-
-.PP
-Note that as the signal handlers send a debug write, they are not re-entrant in \fBsmbd\fR\&. This you should wait until\fBsmbd\fR is in a state of waiting for an incoming SMB before issuing them\&. It is possible to make the signal handlers safe by un-blocking the signals before the select call and re-blocking them after, however this would affect performance\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBhosts_access\fR(5), \fBinetd\fR(8), \fBnmbd\fR(8), \fBsmb.conf\fR(5), \fBsmbclient\fR(1), \fBtestparm\fR(1), \fBtestprns\fR(1), and the Internet RFC's\fIrfc1001\&.txt\fR, \fIrfc1002\&.txt\fR\&. In addition the CIFS (formerly SMB) specification is available as a link from the Web page http://samba\&.org/cifs/\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/smbmnt.8 b/raw/man8/smbmnt.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 45515c5..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/smbmnt.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,91 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBMNT" 8 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbmnt \- helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbmnt\fR {mount-point} [-s <share>] [-r] [-u <uid>] [-g <gid>] [-f <mask>] [-d <mask>] [-o <options>] [-h]
-
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbmnt\fR is a helper application used by the smbmount program to do the actual mounting of SMB shares\&.\fBsmbmnt\fR can be installed setuid root if you want normal users to be able to mount their SMB shares\&.
-
-.PP
-A setuid smbmnt will only allow mounts on directories owned by the user, and that the user has write permission on\&.
-
-.PP
-The \fBsmbmnt\fR program is normally invoked by \fBsmbmount\fR(8)\&. It should not be invoked directly by users\&.
-
-.PP
-smbmount searches the normal PATH for smbmnt\&. You must ensure that the smbmnt version in your path matches the smbmount used\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--r
-mount the filesystem read-only
-
-
-.TP
--u uid
-specify the uid that the files will be owned by
-
-
-.TP
--g gid
-specify the gid that the files will be owned by
-
-
-.TP
--f mask
-specify the octal file mask applied
-
-
-.TP
--d mask
-specify the octal directory mask applied
-
-
-.TP
--o options
-list of options that are passed as-is to smbfs, if this command is run on a 2\&.4 or higher Linux kernel\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h|--help
-Print a summary of command line options\&.
-
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H\&. Warfield and others\&.
-
-.PP
-The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools \fBsmbmount\fR, \fBsmbumount\fR, and \fBsmbmnt\fR is Urban Widmark\&. The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs\&.
-
-.PP
-The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2\&.2 was performed by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/smbmount.8 b/raw/man8/smbmount.8
deleted file mode 100644
index fdf49c0..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/smbmount.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,219 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBMOUNT" 8 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbmount \- mount an smbfs filesystem
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbmount\fR {service} {mount-point} [-o options]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbmount\fR mounts a Linux SMB filesystem\&. It is usually invoked as \fBmount.smbfs\fR by the \fBmount\fR(8) command when using the "-t smbfs" option\&. This command only works in Linux, and the kernel must support the smbfs filesystem\&.
-
-.PP
-Options to \fBsmbmount\fR are specified as a comma-separated list of key=value pairs\&. It is possible to send options other than those listed here, assuming that smbfs supports them\&. If you get mount failures, check your kernel log for errors on unknown options\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbmount\fR is a daemon\&. After mounting it keeps running until the mounted smbfs is umounted\&. It will log things that happen when in daemon mode using the "machine name" smbmount, so typically this output will end up in \fIlog\&.smbmount\fR\&. The \fB smbmount\fR process may also be called mount\&.smbfs\&.
-
-.RS
-.Sh "Note"
-
-.PP
- \fBsmbmount\fR calls \fBsmbmnt\fR(8) to do the actual mount\&. You must make sure that \fBsmbmnt\fR is in the path so that it can be found\&.
-
-.RE
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
-username=<arg>
-specifies the username to connect as\&. If this is not given, then the environment variable \fB USER\fR is used\&. This option can also take the form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or "user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup to be specified as part of the username\&.
-
-
-.TP
-password=<arg>
-specifies the SMB password\&. If this option is not given then the environment variable \fBPASSWD\fR is used\&. If it can find no password \fBsmbmount\fR will prompt for a passeword, unless the guest option is given\&.
-
-
-Note that passwords which contain the argument delimiter character (i\&.e\&. a comma ',') will failed to be parsed correctly on the command line\&. However, the same password defined in the PASSWD environment variable or a credentials file (see below) will be read correctly\&.
-
-
-.TP
-credentials=<filename>
-specifies a file that contains a username and/or password\&.
-The format of the file is:
-.nf
-
-username = <value>
-password = <value>
-.fi
-
-
-This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a shared file, such as \fI/etc/fstab\fR\&. Be sure to protect any credentials file properly\&.
-
-
-.TP
-krb
-Use kerberos (Active Directory)\&.
-
-
-.TP
-netbiosname=<arg>
-sets the source NetBIOS name\&. It defaults to the local hostname\&.
-
-
-.TP
-uid=<arg>
-sets the uid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem\&. It may be specified as either a username or a numeric uid\&.
-
-
-.TP
-gid=<arg>
-sets the gid that will own all files on the mounted filesystem\&. It may be specified as either a groupname or a numeric gid\&.
-
-
-.TP
-port=<arg>
-sets the remote SMB port number\&. The default is 139\&.
-
-
-.TP
-fmask=<arg>
-sets the file mask\&. This determines the permissions that remote files have in the local filesystem\&. This is not a umask, but the actual permissions for the files\&. The default is based on the current umask\&.
-
-
-.TP
-dmask=<arg>
-Sets the directory mask\&. This determines the permissions that remote directories have in the local filesystem\&. This is not a umask, but the actual permissions for the directories\&. The default is based on the current umask\&.
-
-
-.TP
-debug=<arg>
-Sets the debug level\&. This is useful for tracking down SMB connection problems\&. A suggested value to start with is 4\&. If set too high there will be a lot of output, possibly hiding the useful output\&.
-
-
-.TP
-ip=<arg>
-Sets the destination host or IP address\&.
-
-
-.TP
-workgroup=<arg>
-Sets the workgroup on the destination
-
-
-.TP
-sockopt=<arg>
-Sets the TCP socket options\&. See the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) \fIsocket options\fR option\&.
-
-
-.TP
-scope=<arg>
-Sets the NetBIOS scope
-
-
-.TP
-guest
-Don't prompt for a password
-
-
-.TP
-ro
-mount read-only
-
-
-.TP
-rw
-mount read-write
-
-
-.TP
-iocharset=<arg>
-sets the charset used by the Linux side for codepage to charset translations (NLS)\&. Argument should be the name of a charset, like iso8859-1\&. (Note: only kernel 2\&.4\&.0 or later)
-
-
-.TP
-codepage=<arg>
-sets the codepage the server uses\&. See the iocharset option\&. Example value cp850\&. (Note: only kernel 2\&.4\&.0 or later)
-
-
-.TP
-ttl=<arg>
-sets how long a directory listing is cached in milliseconds (also affects visibility of file size and date changes)\&. A higher value means that changes on the server take longer to be noticed but it can give better performance on large directories, especially over long distances\&. Default is 1000ms but something like 10000ms (10 seconds) is probably more reasonable in many cases\&. (Note: only kernel 2\&.4\&.2 or later)
-
-
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
-
-.PP
-The variable \fBUSER\fR may contain the username of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&. The variable can be used to set both username and password by using the format username%password\&.
-
-.PP
-The variable \fBPASSWD\fR may contain the password of the person using the client\&. This information is used only if the protocol level is high enough to support session-level passwords\&.
-
-.PP
-The variable \fBPASSWD_FILE\fR may contain the pathname of a file to read the password from\&. A single line of input is read and used as the password\&.
-
-.SH "BUGS"
-
-.PP
-Passwords and other options containing , can not be handled\&. For passwords an alternative way of passing them is in a credentials file or in the PASSWD environment\&.
-
-.PP
-The credentials file does not handle usernames or passwords with leading space\&.
-
-.PP
-One smbfs bug is important enough to mention here, even if it is a bit misplaced:
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-Mounts sometimes stop working\&. This is usually caused by smbmount terminating\&. Since smbfs needs smbmount to reconnect when the server disconnects, the mount will eventually go dead\&. An umount/mount normally fixes this\&. At least 2 ways to trigger this bug are known\&.
-
-.LP
-
-.PP
-Note that the typical response to a bug report is suggestion to try the latest version first\&. So please try doing that first, and always include which versions you use of relevant software when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution)
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-Documentation/filesystems/smbfs\&.txt in the linux kernel source tree may contain additional options and information\&.
-
-.PP
-FreeBSD also has a smbfs, but it is not related to smbmount
-
-.PP
-For Solaris, HP-UX and others you may want to look at \fBsmbsh\fR(1) or at other solutions, such as Sharity or perhaps replacing the SMB server with a NFS server\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H\&. Warfield and others\&.
-
-.PP
-The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools \fBsmbmount\fR, \fBsmbumount\fR, and \fBsmbmnt\fR is Urban Widmark\&. The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs\&.
-
-.PP
-The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2\&.2 was performed by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/smbpasswd.8 b/raw/man8/smbpasswd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index e0c8ca5..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/smbpasswd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,219 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBPASSWD" 8 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbpasswd \- change a user's SMB password
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbpasswd\fR [-a] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r <remote machine>] [-R <name resolve order>] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-i] [-L] [username]
-
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-The smbpasswd program has several different functions, depending on whether it is run by the \fBroot\fR user or not\&. When run as a normal user it allows the user to change the password used for their SMB sessions on any machines that store SMB passwords\&.
-
-.PP
-By default (when run with no arguments) it will attempt to change the current user's SMB password on the local machine\&. This is similar to the way the \fBpasswd(1)\fR program works\&. \fB smbpasswd\fR differs from how the passwd program works however in that it is not \fBsetuid root\fR but works in a client-server mode and communicates with a locally running \fBsmbd\fR(8)\&. As a consequence in order for this to succeed the smbd daemon must be running on the local machine\&. On a UNIX [...]
-
-.PP
-When run by an ordinary user with no options, smbpasswd will prompt them for their old SMB password and then ask them for their new password twice, to ensure that the new password was typed correctly\&. No passwords will be echoed on the screen whilst being typed\&. If you have a blank SMB password (specified by the string "NO PASSWORD" in the smbpasswd file) then just press the <Enter> key when asked for your old password\&.
-
-.PP
-smbpasswd can also be used by a normal user to change their SMB password on remote machines, such as Windows NT Primary Domain Controllers\&. See the (\fI-r\fR) and \fI-U\fR options below\&.
-
-.PP
-When run by root, smbpasswd allows new users to be added and deleted in the smbpasswd file, as well as allows changes to the attributes of the user in this file to be made\&. When run by root, \fB smbpasswd\fR accesses the local smbpasswd file directly, thus enabling changes to be made even if smbd is not running\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
--a
-This option specifies that the username following should be added to the local smbpasswd file, with the new password typed (type <Enter> for the old password)\&. This option is ignored if the username following already exists in the smbpasswd file and it is treated like a regular change password command\&. Note that the default passdb backends require the user to already exist in the system password file (usually \fI/etc/passwd\fR), else the request to add the user will fail\&.
-
-
-This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--x
-This option specifies that the username following should be deleted from the local smbpasswd file\&.
-
-
-This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--d
-This option specifies that the username following should be \fBdisabled\fR in the local smbpasswd file\&. This is done by writing a \fB'D'\fR flag into the account control space in the smbpasswd file\&. Once this is done all attempts to authenticate via SMB using this username will fail\&.
-
-
-If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format (pre-Samba 2\&.0 format) there is no space in the user's password entry to write this information and the command will FAIL\&. See \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) for details on the 'old' and new password file formats\&.
-
-
-This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--e
-This option specifies that the username following should be \fBenabled\fR in the local smbpasswd file, if the account was previously disabled\&. If the account was not disabled this option has no effect\&. Once the account is enabled then the user will be able to authenticate via SMB once again\&.
-
-
-If the smbpasswd file is in the 'old' format, then \fB smbpasswd\fR will FAIL to enable the account\&. See \fBsmbpasswd\fR(5) for details on the 'old' and new password file formats\&.
-
-
-This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--D debuglevel
-\fIdebuglevel\fR is an integer from 0 to 10\&. The default value if this parameter is not specified is zero\&.
-
-
-The higher this value, the more detail will be logged to the log files about the activities of smbpasswd\&. At level 0, only critical errors and serious warnings will be logged\&.
-
-
-Levels above 1 will generate considerable amounts of log data, and should only be used when investigating a problem\&. Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely cryptic\&.
-
-
-.TP
--n
-This option specifies that the username following should have their password set to null (i\&.e\&. a blank password) in the local smbpasswd file\&. This is done by writing the string "NO PASSWORD" as the first part of the first password stored in the smbpasswd file\&.
-
-
-Note that to allow users to logon to a Samba server once the password has been set to "NO PASSWORD" in the smbpasswd file the administrator must set the following parameter in the [global] section of the \fIsmb\&.conf\fR file :
-
-
-\fBnull passwords = yes\fR
-
-
-This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--r remote machine name
-This option allows a user to specify what machine they wish to change their password on\&. Without this parameter smbpasswd defaults to the local host\&. The \fIremote machine name\fR is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS server to contact to attempt the password change\&. This name is resolved into an IP address using the standard name resolution mechanism in all programs of the Samba suite\&. See the \fI-R name resolve order\fR parameter for details on changing this resolving mechanism\&.
-
-
-The username whose password is changed is that of the current UNIX logged on user\&. See the \fI-U username\fR parameter for details on changing the password for a different username\&.
-
-
-Note that if changing a Windows NT Domain password the remote machine specified must be the Primary Domain Controller for the domain (Backup Domain Controllers only have a read-only copy of the user account database and will not allow the password change)\&.
-
-
-\fBNote\fR that Windows 95/98 do not have a real password database so it is not possible to change passwords specifying a Win95/98 machine as remote machine target\&.
-
-
-.TP
--R name resolve order
-This option allows the user of smbpasswd to determine what name resolution services to use when looking up the NetBIOS name of the host being connected to\&.
-
-
-The options are :"lmhosts", "host", "wins" and "bcast"\&. They cause names to be resolved as follows:
-
-
-\fBlmhosts\fR: Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file\&. If the line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the \fBlmhosts\fR(5) for details) then any name type matches for lookup\&.
-
-\fBhost\fR: Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using the system \fI/etc/hosts \fR, NIS, or DNS lookups\&. This method of name resolution is operating system depended for instance on IRIX or Solaris this may be controlled by the \fI/etc/nsswitch\&.conf\fR file)\&. Note that this method is only used if the NetBIOS name type being queried is the 0x20 (server) name type, otherwise it is ignored\&.
-
-\fBwins\fR: Query a name with the IP address listed in the \fIwins server\fR parameter\&. If no WINS server has been specified this method will be ignored\&.
-
-\fBbcast\fR: Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces listed in the \fIinterfaces\fR parameter\&. This is the least reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally connected subnet\&.
-
-The default order is \fBlmhosts, host, wins, bcast\fR and without this parameter or any entry in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file the name resolution methods will be attempted in this order\&.
-
-
-.TP
--m
-This option tells smbpasswd that the account being changed is a MACHINE account\&. Currently this is used when Samba is being used as an NT Primary Domain Controller\&.
-
-
-This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--U username
-This option may only be used in conjunction with the \fI-r\fR option\&. When changing a password on a remote machine it allows the user to specify the user name on that machine whose password will be changed\&. It is present to allow users who have different user names on different systems to change these passwords\&.
-
-
-.TP
--h
-This option prints the help string for \fB smbpasswd\fR, selecting the correct one for running as root or as an ordinary user\&.
-
-
-.TP
--s
-This option causes smbpasswd to be silent (i\&.e\&. not issue prompts) and to read its old and new passwords from standard input, rather than from \fI/dev/tty\fR (like the \fBpasswd(1)\fR program does)\&. This option is to aid people writing scripts to drive smbpasswd
-
-
-.TP
--w password
-This parameter is only available if Samba has been configured to use the experimental \fB--with-ldapsam\fR option\&. The \fI-w\fR switch is used to specify the password to be used with the \fIldap admin dn\fR\&. Note that the password is stored in the \fIsecrets\&.tdb\fR and is keyed off of the admin's DN\&. This means that if the value of \fIldap admin dn\fR ever changes, the password will need to be manually updated as well\&.
-
-
-.TP
--i
-This option tells smbpasswd that the account being changed is an interdomain trust account\&. Currently this is used when Samba is being used as an NT Primary Domain Controller\&. The account contains the info about another trusted domain\&.
-
-
-This option is only available when running smbpasswd as root\&.
-
-
-.TP
--L
-Run in local mode\&.
-
-
-.TP
-username
-This specifies the username for all of the \fBroot only\fR options to operate on\&. Only root can specify this parameter as only root has the permission needed to modify attributes directly in the local smbpasswd file\&.
-
-
-.SH "NOTES"
-
-.PP
-Since \fBsmbpasswd\fR works in client-server mode communicating with a local smbd for a non-root user then the smbd daemon must be running for this to work\&. A common problem is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the \fB smbd\fR running on the local machine by specifying either \fIallow hosts\fR or \fIdeny hosts\fR entry in the \fBsmb.conf\fR(5) file and neglecting to allow "localhost" access to the smbd\&.
-
-.PP
-In addition, the smbpasswd command is only useful if Samba has been set up to use encrypted passwords\&.
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbpasswd\fR(5), \fBSamba\fR(7)\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/smbspool.8 b/raw/man8/smbspool.8
deleted file mode 100644
index a641354..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/smbspool.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,115 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBSPOOL" 8 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbspool \- send a print file to an SMB printer
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbspool\fR {job} {user} {title} {copies} {options} [filename]
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-This tool is part of the \fBSamba\fR(7) suite\&.
-
-.PP
-smbspool is a very small print spooling program that sends a print file to an SMB printer\&. The command-line arguments are position-dependent for compatibility with the Common UNIX Printing System, but you can use smbspool with any printing system or from a program or script\&.
-
-.PP
-\fBDEVICE URI\fR
-
-.PP
-smbspool specifies the destination using a Uniform Resource Identifier ("URI") with a method of "smb"\&. This string can take a number of forms:
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-smb://server/printer
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-smb://workgroup/server/printer
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-smb://username:password@server/printer
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-smb://username:password@workgroup/server/printer
-
-.LP
-
-.PP
-smbspool tries to get the URI from argv[0]\&. If argv[0] contains the name of the program then it looks in the \fB DEVICE_URI\fR environment variable\&.
-
-.PP
-Programs using the \fBexec(2)\fR functions can pass the URI in argv[0], while shell scripts must set the\fBDEVICE_URI\fR environment variable prior to running smbspool\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP 3
-\(bu
-The job argument (argv[1]) contains the job ID number and is presently not used by smbspool\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-The user argument (argv[2]) contains the print user's name and is presently not used by smbspool\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-The title argument (argv[3]) contains the job title string and is passed as the remote file name when sending the print job\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-The copies argument (argv[4]) contains the number of copies to be printed of the named file\&. If no filename is provided then this argument is not used by smbspool\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-The options argument (argv[5]) contains the print options in a single string and is currently not used by smbspool\&.
-
-.TP
-\(bu
-The filename argument (argv[6]) contains the name of the file to print\&. If this argument is not specified then the print file is read from the standard input\&.
-
-.LP
-
-.SH "VERSION"
-
-.PP
-This man page is correct for version 3\&.0 of the Samba suite\&.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbd\fR(8) and \fBSamba\fR(7)\&.
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbspool\fR was written by Michael Sweet at Easy Software Products\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba software and related utilities were created by Andrew Tridgell\&. Samba is now developed by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar to the way the Linux kernel is developed\&.
-
-.PP
-The original Samba man pages were written by Karl Auer\&. The man page sources were converted to YODL format (another excellent piece of Open Source software, available at ftp://ftp\&.icce\&.rug\&.nl/pub/unix/) and updated for the Samba 2\&.0 release by Jeremy Allison\&. The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2\&.2 was done by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/smbumount.8 b/raw/man8/smbumount.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 922cf5d..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/smbumount.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,56 +0,0 @@
-.\"Generated by db2man.xsl. Don't modify this, modify the source.
-.de Sh \" Subsection
-.br
-.if t .Sp
-.ne 5
-.PP
-\fB\\$1\fR
-.PP
-..
-.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP)
-.if t .sp .5v
-.if n .sp
-..
-.de Ip \" List item
-.br
-.ie \\n(.$>=3 .ne \\$3
-.el .ne 3
-.IP "\\$1" \\$2
-..
-.TH "SMBUMOUNT" 8 "" "" ""
-.SH NAME
-smbumount \- smbfs umount for normal users
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-
-.nf
-\fBsmbumount\fR {mount-point}
-.fi
-
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-
-.PP
-With this program, normal users can unmount smb-filesystems, provided that it is suid root\&. \fBsmbumount\fR has been written to give normal Linux users more control over their resources\&. It is safe to install this program suid root, because only the user who has mounted a filesystem is allowed to unmount it again\&. For root it is not necessary to use smbumount\&. The normal umount program works perfectly well, but it would certainly be problematic to make umount setuid root\&.
-
-.SH "OPTIONS"
-
-.TP
-mount-point
-The directory to unmount\&.
-
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-
-.PP
-\fBsmbmount\fR(8)
-
-.SH "AUTHOR"
-
-.PP
-Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H\&. Warfield and others\&.
-
-.PP
-The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace tools \fBsmbmount\fR, \fBsmbumount\fR, and \fBsmbmnt\fR is Urban Widmark\&. The SAMBA Mailing list is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs\&.
-
-.PP
-The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2\&.2 was performed by Gerald Carter\&. The conversion to DocBook XML 4\&.2 for Samba 3\&.0 was done by Alexander Bokovoy\&.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/svnserve.8 b/raw/man8/svnserve.8
deleted file mode 100644
index ae072b0..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/svnserve.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
-.\" You can view this file with:
-.\" nroff -man [filename]
-.\"
-.TH svnserve 8
-.SH NAME
-svnserve \- Server for the 'svn' repository access method
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP
-\fBsvnserve\fP [\fIoptions\fP]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBsvnserve\fP allows access to Subversion repositories using the svn
-network protocol. It can both run as a standalone server process, or
-it can run out of inetd. You must choose a mode of operation when you
-start \fBsvnserve\fP. The following options are recognized:
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-daemon\fP
-Causes \fBsvnserve\fP to run in daemon mode. \fBsvnserve\fP
-backgrounds itself and accepts and serves TCP/IP connections on the
-svn port (3690, by default).
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-\-listen-port\fP=\fIport\fP
-Causes \fBsvnserve\fP to listen on \fIport\fP when run in daemon mode.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-\-listen-host\fP=\fIhost\fP
-Causes \fBsvnserve\fP to listen on the interface specified by \fIhost\fP,
-which may be either a hostname or an IP address.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-\-foreground\fP
-When used together with \fB\-d\fP, this option causes \fBsvnserve\fP
-to stay in the foreground. This option is mainly useful for
-debugging.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-inetd\fP
-Causes \fBsvnserve\fP to use the stdin/stdout file descriptors, as is
-appropriate for a daemon running out of inetd.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP
-Displays a usage summary and exits.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-r\fP \fIroot\fP, \fB\-\-root\fP=\fIroot\fP
-Sets the virtual root for repositories served by \fBsvnserve\fP. The
-pathname in URLs provided by the client will be interpreted relative
-to this root, and will not be allowed to escape this root.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-tunnel\fP
-Causes \fBsvnserve\fP to run in tunnel mode, which is just like the
-inetd mode of operation (serve one connection over stdin/stdout)
-except that the connection is considered to be pre-authenticated with
-the username of the current uid. This flag is selected by the client
-when running over a tunnel agent.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-threads\fP
-When running in daemon mode, causes \fBsvnserve\fP to spawn a thread
-instead of a process for each connection. The \fBsvnserve\fP process
-still backgrounds itself at startup time.
-.PP
-.TP 5
-\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-listen\-once\fP
-Causes \fBsvnserve\fP to accept one connection on the svn port, serve
-it, and exit. This option is mainly useful for debugging.
-.PP
-Once the client has selected a repository by transmitting its URL,
-\fBsvnserve\fP reads a file named \fBconf/svnserve.conf\fP in the
-repository directory to determine repository-specific settings such as
-what authentication database to use and what authorization policies to
-apply. See the \fBsvnserve.conf\fP(5) man page for details of that
-file format.
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/swapoff.8 b/raw/man8/swapoff.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a06b7e..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/swapoff.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man8/swapon.8
diff --git a/raw/man8/swapon.8 b/raw/man8/swapon.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 6dca7eb..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/swapon.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1980, 1991 Regents of the University of California.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
-.\" must display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" This product includes software developed by the University of
-.\" California, Berkeley and its contributors.
-.\" 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.\"
-.\" @(#)swapon.8 6.3 (Berkeley) 3/16/91
-.\"
-.\" Sun Dec 27 12:31:30 1992: Modified by faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Sat Mar 6 20:46:02 1993: Modified by faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Sat Oct 9 09:35:30 1993: Converted to man format by faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Sat Nov 27 20:22:42 1993: Updated authorship information, faith at cs.unc.edu
-.\" Mon Sep 25 14:12:38 1995: Added -v and -p information
-.\" Tue Apr 30 03:32:07 1996: Added some text from A. Koppenhoefer
-.\"
-.TH SWAPON 8 "25 September 1995" "Linux 1.x" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-swapon, swapoff \- enable/disable devices and files for paging and swapping
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B /sbin/swapon [\-h \-V]
-.br
-.B /sbin/swapon \-a [\-v] [\-e]
-.br
-.BI "/sbin/swapon [\-v] [\-p " "priority" "] " " specialfile " ...
-.br
-.B /sbin/swapon [\-s]
-.br
-.B /sbin/swapoff [\-h \-V]
-.br
-.B /sbin/swapoff \-a
-.br
-.BI /sbin/swapoff " specialfile " ...
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B Swapon
-is used to specify devices on which paging and swapping are to take place.
-Calls to
-.B swapon
-normally occur in the system multi-user initialization file
-.I /etc/rc
-making all swap devices available, so that the paging and swapping activity
-is interleaved across several devices and files.
-
-Normally, the first form is used:
-.TP
-.B \-h
-Provide help
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Display version
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Display swap usage summary by device. Equivalent to "cat /proc/swaps".
-Not available before Linux 2.1.25.
-.TP
-.B \-a
-All devices marked as ``swap'' swap devices in
-.I /etc/fstab
-are made available. Devices that are already running as swap are silently
-skipped.
-.TP
-.B \-e
-When
-.B \-a
-is used with swapon,
-.B
-\-e
-makes swapon silently skip devices that
-do not exist.
-.TP
-.BI \-p " priority"
-Specify priority for
-.BR swapon .
-This option is only available if
-.B swapon
-was compiled under and is used under a 1.3.2 or later kernel.
-.I priority
-is a value between 0 and 32767. See
-.BR swapon (2)
-for a full description of swap priorities. Add
-.BI pri= value
-to the option field of
-.I /etc/fstab
-for use with
-.BR "swapon -a" .
-.PP
-.B Swapoff
-disables swapping on the specified devices and files.
-When the
-.B \-a
-flag is given, swapping is disabled on all known swap devices and files
-(as found in
-.I /proc/swaps
-or
-.IR /etc/fstab ).
-.SH NOTE
-You should not use
-.B swapon
-on a file with holes.
-Swap over NFS may not work.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR swapon (2),
-.BR swapoff (2),
-.BR fstab (5),
-.BR init (8),
-.BR mkswap (8),
-.BR rc (8),
-.BR mount (8)
-.SH FILES
-.I /dev/hd??
-standard paging devices
-.br
-.I /dev/sd??
-standard (SCSI) paging devices
-.br
-.I /etc/fstab
-ascii filesystem description table
-.SH HISTORY
-The
-.B swapon
-command appeared in 4.0BSD.
diff --git a/raw/man8/sync.8 b/raw/man8/sync.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 75cef9d..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/sync.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-.\" Reboot/halt and Linux information extracted from Rick Faith's original
-.\" sync(8) manpage, dating back to the Linux 0.99 days. The Linux-specific
-.\" information is attributed to Linus Torvalds
-.\" Copyright 1992, 1993 Rickard E. Faith (faith at cs.unc.edu)
-.\" May be distributed under the GNU General Public License
-.TH SYNC 8 1998-11 "GNU fileutils 4.0"
-.SH NAME
-sync \- synchronize data on disk with memory
-.SH SYNOPSYS
-.B "sync [\-\-help] [\-\-version]"
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.B sync
-writes any data buffered in memory out to disk. This can
-include (but is not limited to) modified superblocks, modified inodes,
-and delayed reads and writes. This must be implemented by the kernel;
-The
-.B sync
-program does nothing but exercise the
-.BR sync (2)
-system call.
-.PP
-The kernel keeps data in memory to avoid doing (relatively slow) disk
-reads and writes. This improves performance, but if the computer
-crashes, data may be lost or the filesystem corrupted as a result.
-.B sync
-ensures that everything in memory is written to disk.
-.PP
-.B sync
-should be called before the processor is halted in an unusual manner
-(e.g., before causing a kernel panic when debugging new kernel code).
-In general, the processor should be halted using the
-.BR shutdown (8)
-or
-.BR reboot (8)
-or
-.BR halt (8)
-commands, which will attempt to put the system in a quiescent state
-before calling
-.BR sync (2).
-(Various implementations of these commands exist; consult your
-documentation; on some systems one should not call
-.BR reboot (8)
-and
-.BR halt (8)
-directly.)
-.SH "GNU STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.TP
-.B "\-\-help"
-Print a usage message on standard output and exit successfully.
-.TP
-.B "\-\-version"
-Print version information on standard output, then exit successfully.
-.TP
-.B "\-\-"
-Terminate option list.
-.SH ENVIRONMENT
-The variables LANG, LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LC_MESSAGES have the
-usual meaning.
-.SH "CONFORMING TO"
-POSIX 1003.2
-.SH NOTES
-On Linux,
-.B sync
-is only guaranteed to schedule the dirty blocks for writing; it can
-actually take a short time before all the blocks are finally written.
-The
-.BR reboot (8)
-and
-.BR halt (8)
-commands take this into account by sleeping for a few seconds after
-calling
-.BR sync (2).
-.PP
-This page describes
-.B sync
-as found in the file\%utils-4.0 package;
-other versions may differ slightly.
-Mail corrections and additions to aeb at cwi.nl.
-Report bugs in the program to fileutils-bugs at gnu.ai.mit.edu.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR sync (2),
-.BR halt (8),
-.BR reboot (8),
-.BR update (8)
diff --git a/raw/man8/tcpdump.8 b/raw/man8/tcpdump.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 5374374..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/tcpdump.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1970 +0,0 @@
-.\" @(#) $Header: /cvsroot/cmpp/man-pages-zh_CN/raw/man8/tcpdump.8,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $ (LBL)
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (c) 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997
-.\" The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that: (1) source code distributions
-.\" retain the above copyright notice and this paragraph in its entirety, (2)
-.\" distributions including binary code include the above copyright notice and
-.\" this paragraph in its entirety in the documentation or other materials
-.\" provided with the distribution, and (3) all advertising materials mentioning
-.\" features or use of this software display the following acknowledgement:
-.\" ``This product includes software developed by the University of California,
-.\" Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory and its contributors.'' Neither the name of
-.\" the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
-.\" or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
-.\" written permission.
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
-.\" WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-.\"
-.TH TCPDUMP 8 "3 January 2001"
-.SH NAME
-tcpdump \- dump traffic on a network
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.na
-.B tcpdump
-[
-.B \-adeflnNOpqRStuvxX
-] [
-.B \-c
-.I count
-]
-.br
-.ti +8
-[
-.B \-C
-.I file_size
-] [
-.B \-F
-.I file
-]
-.br
-.ti +8
-[
-.B \-i
-.I interface
-]
-[
-.B \-m
-.I module
-]
-[
-.B \-r
-.I file
-]
-.br
-.ti +8
-[
-.B \-s
-.I snaplen
-]
-[
-.B \-T
-.I type
-]
-[
-.B \-U
-.I user
-]
-[
-.B \-w
-.I file
-]
-.br
-.ti +8
-[
-.B \-E
-.I algo:secret
-]
-[
-.I expression
-]
-.br
-.ad
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.LP
-\fITcpdump\fP prints out the headers of packets on a network interface
-that match the boolean \fIexpression\fP. It can also be run with the
-.B \-w
-flag, which causes it to save the packet data to a file for later
-analysis, and/or with the
-.B \-r
-flag, which causes it to read from a saved packet file rather than to
-read packets from a network interface. In all cases, only packets that
-match
-.I expression
-will be processed by
-.IR tcpdump .
-.LP
-.I Tcpdump
-will, if not run with the
-.B \-c
-flag, continue capturing packets until it is interrupted by a SIGINT
-signal (generated, for example, by typing your interrupt character,
-typically control-C) or a SIGTERM signal (typically generated with the
-.BR kill (1)
-command); if run with the
-.B \-c
-flag, it will capture packets until it is interrupted by a SIGINT or
-SIGTERM signal or the specified number of packets have been processed.
-.LP
-When
-.I tcpdump
-finishes capturing packets, it will report counts of:
-.IP
-packets ``received by filter'' (the meaning of this depends on the OS on
-which you're running
-.IR tcpdump ,
-and possibly on the way the OS was configured - if a filter was
-specified on the command line, on some OSes it counts packets regardless
-of whether they were matched by the filter expression, and on other OSes
-it counts only packets that were matched by the filter expression and
-were processed by
-.IR tcpdump );
-.IP
-packets ``dropped by kernel'' (this is the number of packets that were
-dropped, due to a lack of buffer space, by the packet capture mechanism
-in the OS on which
-.I tcpdump
-is running, if the OS reports that information to applications; if not,
-it will be reported as 0).
-.LP
-On platforms that support the SIGINFO signal, such as most BSDs, it will
-report those counts when it receives a SIGINFO signal (generated, for
-example, by typing your ``status'' character, typically control-T) and
-will continue capturing packets.
-.LP
-Reading packets from a network interface may require that you have
-special privileges:
-.TP
-.B Under SunOS 3.x or 4.x with NIT or BPF:
-You must have read access to
-.I /dev/nit
-or
-.IR /dev/bpf* .
-.TP
-.B Under Solaris with DLPI:
-You must have read/write access to the network pseudo device, e.g.
-.IR /dev/le .
-On at least some versions of Solaris, however, this is not sufficient to
-allow
-.I tcpdump
-to capture in promiscuous mode; on those versions of Solaris, you must
-be root, or
-.I tcpdump
-must be installed setuid to root, in order to capture in promiscuous
-mode. Note that, on many (perhaps all) interfaces, if you don't capture
-in promiscuous mode, you will not see any outgoing packets, so a capture
-not done in promiscuous mode may not be very useful.
-.TP
-.B Under HP-UX with DLPI:
-You must be root or
-.I tcpdump
-must be installed setuid to root.
-.TP
-.B Under IRIX with snoop:
-You must be root or
-.I tcpdump
-must be installed setuid to root.
-.TP
-.B Under Linux:
-You must be root or
-.I tcpdump
-must be installed setuid to root.
-.TP
-.B Under Ultrix and Digital UNIX/Tru64 UNIX:
-Any user may capture network traffic with
-.IR tcpdump .
-However, no user (not even the super-user) can capture in promiscuous
-mode on an interface unless the super-user has enabled promiscuous-mode
-operation on that interface using
-.IR pfconfig (8),
-and no user (not even the super-user) can capture unicast traffic
-received by or sent by the machine on an interface unless the super-user
-has enabled copy-all-mode operation on that interface using
-.IR pfconfig ,
-so
-.I useful
-packet capture on an interface probably requires that either
-promiscuous-mode or copy-all-mode operation, or both modes of
-operation, be enabled on that interface.
-.TP
-.B Under BSD:
-You must have read access to
-.IR /dev/bpf* .
-.LP
-Reading a saved packet file doesn't require special privileges.
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.B \-a
-Attempt to convert network and broadcast addresses to names.
-.TP
-.B \-c
-Exit after receiving \fIcount\fP packets.
-.TP
-.B \-C
-Before writing a raw packet to a savefile, check whether the file is
-currently larger than \fIfile_size\fP and, if so, close the current
-savefile and open a new one. Savefiles after the first savefile will
-have the name specified with the
-.B \-w
-flag, with a number after it, starting at 2 and continuing upward.
-The units of \fIfile_size\fP are millions of bytes (1,000,000 bytes,
-not 1,048,576 bytes).
-.TP
-.B \-d
-Dump the compiled packet-matching code in a human readable form to
-standard output and stop.
-.TP
-.B \-dd
-Dump packet-matching code as a
-.B C
-program fragment.
-.TP
-.B \-ddd
-Dump packet-matching code as decimal numbers (preceded with a count).
-.TP
-.B \-e
-Print the link-level header on each dump line.
-.TP
-.B \-E
-Use \fIalgo:secret\fP for decrypting IPsec ESP packets.
-Algorithms may be
-\fBdes-cbc\fP,
-\fB3des-cbc\fP,
-\fBblowfish-cbc\fP,
-\fBrc3-cbc\fP,
-\fBcast128-cbc\fP, or
-\fBnone\fP.
-The default is \fBdes-cbc\fP.
-The ability to decrypt packets is only present if \fItcpdump\fP was compiled
-with cryptography enabled.
-\fIsecret\fP the ascii text for ESP secret key.
-We cannot take arbitrary binary value at this moment.
-The option assumes RFC2406 ESP, not RFC1827 ESP.
-The option is only for debugging purposes, and
-the use of this option with truly `secret' key is discouraged.
-By presenting IPsec secret key onto command line
-you make it visible to others, via
-.IR ps (1)
-and other occasions.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Print `foreign' internet addresses numerically rather than symbolically
-(this option is intended to get around serious brain damage in
-Sun's yp server \(em usually it hangs forever translating non-local
-internet numbers).
-.TP
-.B \-F
-Use \fIfile\fP as input for the filter expression.
-An additional expression given on the command line is ignored.
-.TP
-.B \-i
-Listen on \fIinterface\fP.
-If unspecified, \fItcpdump\fP searches the system interface list for the
-lowest numbered, configured up interface (excluding loopback).
-Ties are broken by choosing the earliest match.
-.IP
-On Linux systems with 2.2 or later kernels, an
-.I interface
-argument of ``any'' can be used to capture packets from all interfaces.
-Note that captures on the ``any'' device will not be done in promiscuous
-mode.
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Make stdout line buffered.
-Useful if you want to see the data
-while capturing it.
-E.g.,
-.br
-``tcpdump\ \ \-l\ \ |\ \ tee dat'' or
-``tcpdump\ \ \-l \ \ > dat\ \ &\ \ tail\ \ \-f\ \ dat''.
-.TP
-.B \-m
-Load SMI MIB module definitions from file \fImodule\fR.
-This option
-can be used several times to load several MIB modules into \fItcpdump\fP.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Don't convert host addresses to names. This can be used to avoid
-DNS lookups.
-.TP
-.B \-nn
-Don't convert protocol and port numbers etc. to names either.
-.TP
-.B \-N
-Don't print domain name qualification of host names.
-E.g.,
-if you give this flag then \fItcpdump\fP will print ``nic''
-instead of ``nic.ddn.mil''.
-.TP
-.B \-O
-Do not run the packet-matching code optimizer.
-This is useful only
-if you suspect a bug in the optimizer.
-.TP
-.B \-p
-\fIDon't\fP put the interface
-into promiscuous mode.
-Note that the interface might be in promiscuous
-mode for some other reason; hence, `-p' cannot be used as an abbreviation for
-`ether host {local-hw-addr} or ether broadcast'.
-.TP
-.B \-q
-Quick (quiet?) output.
-Print less protocol information so output
-lines are shorter.
-.TP
-.B \-R
-Assume ESP/AH packets to be based on old specification (RFC1825 to RFC1829).
-If specified, \fItcpdump\fP will not print replay prevention field.
-Since there is no protocol version field in ESP/AH specification,
-\fItcpdump\fP cannot deduce the version of ESP/AH protocol.
-.TP
-.B \-r
-Read packets from \fIfile\fR (which was created with the -w option).
-Standard input is used if \fIfile\fR is ``-''.
-.TP
-.B \-S
-Print absolute, rather than relative, TCP sequence numbers.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Snarf \fIsnaplen\fP bytes of data from each packet rather than the
-default of 68 (with SunOS's NIT, the minimum is actually 96).
-68 bytes is adequate for IP, ICMP, TCP
-and UDP but may truncate protocol information from name server and NFS
-packets (see below).
-Packets truncated because of a limited snapshot
-are indicated in the output with ``[|\fIproto\fP]'', where \fIproto\fP
-is the name of the protocol level at which the truncation has occurred.
-Note that taking larger snapshots both increases
-the amount of time it takes to process packets and, effectively,
-decreases the amount of packet buffering.
-This may cause packets to be
-lost.
-You should limit \fIsnaplen\fP to the smallest number that will
-capture the protocol information you're interested in.
-Setting
-\fIsnaplen\fP to 0 means use the required length to catch whole packets.
-.TP
-.B \-T
-Force packets selected by "\fIexpression\fP" to be interpreted the
-specified \fItype\fR.
-Currently known types are
-\fBcnfp\fR (Cisco NetFlow protocol),
-\fBrpc\fR (Remote Procedure Call),
-\fBrtp\fR (Real-Time Applications protocol),
-\fBrtcp\fR (Real-Time Applications control protocol),
-\fBsnmp\fR (Simple Network Management Protocol),
-\fBvat\fR (Visual Audio Tool),
-and
-\fBwb\fR (distributed White Board).
-.TP
-.B \-t
-\fIDon't\fP print a timestamp on each dump line.
-.TP
-.B \-tt
-Print an unformatted timestamp on each dump line.
-.TP
-.B \-U
-Drops root privileges and changes user ID to
-.I user
-and group ID to the primary group of
-.IR user .
-
-.B Note!
-Red Hat Linux automatically drops the privileges to user ``pcap''
-if nothing else is specified.
-.TP
-.B \-ttt
-Print a delta (in micro-seconds) between current and previous line
-on each dump line.
-.TP
-.B \-tttt
-Print a timestamp in default format proceeded by date on each dump line.
-.TP
-.B \-u
-Print undecoded NFS handles.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-(Slightly more) verbose output.
-For example, the time to live,
-identification, total length and options in an IP packet are printed.
-Also enables additional packet integrity checks such as verifying the
-IP and ICMP header checksum.
-.TP
-.B \-vv
-Even more verbose output.
-For example, additional fields are
-printed from NFS reply packets, and SMB packets are fully decoded.
-.TP
-.B \-vvv
-Even more verbose output.
-For example,
-telnet \fBSB\fP ... \fBSE\fP options
-are printed in full.
-With
-.B \-X
-telnet options are printed in hex as well.
-.TP
-.B \-w
-Write the raw packets to \fIfile\fR rather than parsing and printing
-them out.
-They can later be printed with the \-r option.
-Standard output is used if \fIfile\fR is ``-''.
-.TP
-.B \-x
-Print each packet (minus its link level header) in hex.
-The smaller of the entire packet or
-.I snaplen
-bytes will be printed. Note that this is the entire link-layer
-packet, so for link layers that pad (e.g. Ethernet), the padding bytes
-will also be printed when the higher layer packet is shorter than the
-required padding.
-.TP
-.B \-X
-When printing hex, print ascii too.
-Thus if
-.B \-x
-is also set, the packet is printed in hex/ascii.
-This is very handy for analysing new protocols.
-Even if
-.B \-x
-is not also set, some parts of some packets may be printed
-in hex/ascii.
-.IP "\fI expression\fP"
-.RS
-selects which packets will be dumped.
-If no \fIexpression\fP
-is given, all packets on the net will be dumped.
-Otherwise,
-only packets for which \fIexpression\fP is `true' will be dumped.
-.LP
-The \fIexpression\fP consists of one or more
-.I primitives.
-Primitives usually consist of an
-.I id
-(name or number) preceded by one or more qualifiers.
-There are three
-different kinds of qualifier:
-.IP \fItype\fP
-qualifiers say what kind of thing the id name or number refers to.
-Possible types are
-.BR host ,
-.B net
-and
-.BR port .
-E.g., `host foo', `net 128.3', `port 20'.
-If there is no type
-qualifier,
-.B host
-is assumed.
-.IP \fIdir\fP
-qualifiers specify a particular transfer direction to and/or from
-.IR id .
-Possible directions are
-.BR src ,
-.BR dst ,
-.B "src or dst"
-and
-.B "src and"
-.BR dst .
-E.g., `src foo', `dst net 128.3', `src or dst port ftp-data'.
-If
-there is no dir qualifier,
-.B "src or dst"
-is assumed.
-For `null' link layers (i.e. point to point protocols such as slip) the
-.B inbound
-and
-.B outbound
-qualifiers can be used to specify a desired direction.
-.IP \fIproto\fP
-qualifiers restrict the match to a particular protocol.
-Possible
-protos are:
-.BR ether ,
-.BR fddi ,
-.BR tr ,
-.BR ip ,
-.BR ip6 ,
-.BR arp ,
-.BR rarp ,
-.BR decnet ,
-.B tcp
-and
-.BR udp .
-E.g., `ether src foo', `arp net 128.3', `tcp port 21'.
-If there is
-no proto qualifier, all protocols consistent with the type are
-assumed.
-E.g., `src foo' means `(ip or arp or rarp) src foo'
-(except the latter is not legal syntax), `net bar' means `(ip or
-arp or rarp) net bar' and `port 53' means `(tcp or udp) port 53'.
-.LP
-[`fddi' is actually an alias for `ether'; the parser treats them
-identically as meaning ``the data link level used on the specified
-network interface.'' FDDI headers contain Ethernet-like source
-and destination addresses, and often contain Ethernet-like packet
-types, so you can filter on these FDDI fields just as with the
-analogous Ethernet fields.
-FDDI headers also contain other fields,
-but you cannot name them explicitly in a filter expression.
-.LP
-Similarly, `tr' is an alias for `ether'; the previous paragraph's
-statements about FDDI headers also apply to Token Ring headers.]
-.LP
-In addition to the above, there are some special `primitive' keywords
-that don't follow the pattern:
-.BR gateway ,
-.BR broadcast ,
-.BR less ,
-.B greater
-and arithmetic expressions.
-All of these are described below.
-.LP
-More complex filter expressions are built up by using the words
-.BR and ,
-.B or
-and
-.B not
-to combine primitives.
-E.g., `host foo and not port ftp and not port ftp-data'.
-To save typing, identical qualifier lists can be omitted.
-E.g.,
-`tcp dst port ftp or ftp-data or domain' is exactly the same as
-`tcp dst port ftp or tcp dst port ftp-data or tcp dst port domain'.
-.LP
-Allowable primitives are:
-.IP "\fBdst host \fIhost\fR"
-True if the IPv4/v6 destination field of the packet is \fIhost\fP,
-which may be either an address or a name.
-.IP "\fBsrc host \fIhost\fR"
-True if the IPv4/v6 source field of the packet is \fIhost\fP.
-.IP "\fBhost \fIhost\fP
-True if either the IPv4/v6 source or destination of the packet is \fIhost\fP.
-Any of the above host expressions can be prepended with the keywords,
-\fBip\fP, \fBarp\fP, \fBrarp\fP, or \fBip6\fP as in:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBip host \fIhost\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-which is equivalent to:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBether proto \fI\\ip\fB and host \fIhost\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-If \fIhost\fR is a name with multiple IP addresses, each address will
-be checked for a match.
-.IP "\fBether dst \fIehost\fP
-True if the ethernet destination address is \fIehost\fP.
-\fIEhost\fP
-may be either a name from /etc/ethers or a number (see
-.IR ethers (3N)
-for numeric format).
-.IP "\fBether src \fIehost\fP
-True if the ethernet source address is \fIehost\fP.
-.IP "\fBether host \fIehost\fP
-True if either the ethernet source or destination address is \fIehost\fP.
-.IP "\fBgateway\fP \fIhost\fP
-True if the packet used \fIhost\fP as a gateway.
-I.e., the ethernet
-source or destination address was \fIhost\fP but neither the IP source
-nor the IP destination was \fIhost\fP.
-\fIHost\fP must be a name and
-must be found both by the machine's host-name-to-IP-address resolution
-mechanisms (host name file, DNS, NIS, etc.) and by the machine's
-host-name-to-Ethernet-address resolution mechanism (/etc/ethers, etc.).
-(An equivalent expression is
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBether host \fIehost \fBand not host \fIhost\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-which can be used with either names or numbers for \fIhost / ehost\fP.)
-This syntax does not work in IPv6-enabled configuration at this moment.
-.IP "\fBdst net \fInet\fR"
-True if the IPv4/v6 destination address of the packet has a network
-number of \fInet\fP.
-\fINet\fP may be either a name from /etc/networks
-or a network number (see \fInetworks(4)\fP for details).
-.IP "\fBsrc net \fInet\fR"
-True if the IPv4/v6 source address of the packet has a network
-number of \fInet\fP.
-.IP "\fBnet \fInet\fR"
-True if either the IPv4/v6 source or destination address of the packet has a network
-number of \fInet\fP.
-.IP "\fBnet \fInet\fR \fBmask \fInetmask\fR"
-True if the IP address matches \fInet\fR with the specific \fInetmask\fR.
-May be qualified with \fBsrc\fR or \fBdst\fR.
-Note that this syntax is not valid for IPv6 \fInet\fR.
-.IP "\fBnet \fInet\fR/\fIlen\fR"
-True if the IPv4/v6 address matches \fInet\fR with a netmask \fIlen\fR
-bits wide.
-May be qualified with \fBsrc\fR or \fBdst\fR.
-.IP "\fBdst port \fIport\fR"
-True if the packet is ip/tcp, ip/udp, ip6/tcp or ip6/udp and has a
-destination port value of \fIport\fP.
-The \fIport\fP can be a number or a name used in /etc/services (see
-.IR tcp (4P)
-and
-.IR udp (4P)).
-If a name is used, both the port
-number and protocol are checked.
-If a number or ambiguous name is used,
-only the port number is checked (e.g., \fBdst port 513\fR will print both
-tcp/login traffic and udp/who traffic, and \fBport domain\fR will print
-both tcp/domain and udp/domain traffic).
-.IP "\fBsrc port \fIport\fR"
-True if the packet has a source port value of \fIport\fP.
-.IP "\fBport \fIport\fR"
-True if either the source or destination port of the packet is \fIport\fP.
-Any of the above port expressions can be prepended with the keywords,
-\fBtcp\fP or \fBudp\fP, as in:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBtcp src port \fIport\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-which matches only tcp packets whose source port is \fIport\fP.
-.IP "\fBless \fIlength\fR"
-True if the packet has a length less than or equal to \fIlength\fP.
-This is equivalent to:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBlen <= \fIlength\fP.
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-.IP "\fBgreater \fIlength\fR"
-True if the packet has a length greater than or equal to \fIlength\fP.
-This is equivalent to:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBlen >= \fIlength\fP.
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-.IP "\fBip proto \fIprotocol\fR"
-True if the packet is an IP packet (see
-.IR ip (4P))
-of protocol type \fIprotocol\fP.
-\fIProtocol\fP can be a number or one of the names
-\fIicmp\fP, \fIicmp6\fP, \fIigmp\fP, \fIigrp\fP, \fIpim\fP, \fIah\fP,
-\fIesp\fP, \fIvrrp\fP, \fIudp\fP, or \fItcp\fP.
-Note that the identifiers \fItcp\fP, \fIudp\fP, and \fIicmp\fP are also
-keywords and must be escaped via backslash (\\), which is \\\\ in the C-shell.
-Note that this primitive does not chase the protocol header chain.
-.IP "\fBip6 proto \fIprotocol\fR"
-True if the packet is an IPv6 packet of protocol type \fIprotocol\fP.
-Note that this primitive does not chase the protocol header chain.
-.IP "\fBip6 protochain \fIprotocol\fR"
-True if the packet is IPv6 packet,
-and contains protocol header with type \fIprotocol\fR
-in its protocol header chain.
-For example,
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBip6 protochain 6\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-matches any IPv6 packet with TCP protocol header in the protocol header chain.
-The packet may contain, for example,
-authentication header, routing header, or hop-by-hop option header,
-between IPv6 header and TCP header.
-The BPF code emitted by this primitive is complex and
-cannot be optimized by BPF optimizer code in \fItcpdump\fP,
-so this can be somewhat slow.
-.IP "\fBip protochain \fIprotocol\fR"
-Equivalent to \fBip6 protochain \fIprotocol\fR, but this is for IPv4.
-.IP "\fBether broadcast\fR"
-True if the packet is an ethernet broadcast packet.
-The \fIether\fP
-keyword is optional.
-.IP "\fBip broadcast\fR"
-True if the packet is an IP broadcast packet.
-It checks for both
-the all-zeroes and all-ones broadcast conventions, and looks up
-the local subnet mask.
-.IP "\fBether multicast\fR"
-True if the packet is an ethernet multicast packet.
-The \fIether\fP
-keyword is optional.
-This is shorthand for `\fBether[0] & 1 != 0\fP'.
-.IP "\fBip multicast\fR"
-True if the packet is an IP multicast packet.
-.IP "\fBip6 multicast\fR"
-True if the packet is an IPv6 multicast packet.
-.IP "\fBether proto \fIprotocol\fR"
-True if the packet is of ether type \fIprotocol\fR.
-\fIProtocol\fP can be a number or one of the names
-\fIip\fP, \fIip6\fP, \fIarp\fP, \fIrarp\fP, \fIatalk\fP, \fIaarp\fP,
-\fIdecnet\fP, \fIsca\fP, \fIlat\fP, \fImopdl\fP, \fImoprc\fP,
-\fIiso\fP, \fIstp\fP, \fIipx\fP, or \fInetbeui\fP.
-Note these identifiers are also keywords
-and must be escaped via backslash (\\).
-.IP
-[In the case of FDDI (e.g., `\fBfddi protocol arp\fR') and Token Ring
-(e.g., `\fBtr protocol arp\fR'), for most of those protocols, the
-protocol identification comes from the 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC)
-header, which is usually layered on top of the FDDI or Token Ring
-header.
-.IP
-When filtering for most protocol identifiers on FDDI or Token Ring,
-\fItcpdump\fR checks only the protocol ID field of an LLC header in
-so-called SNAP format with an Organizational Unit Identifier (OUI) of
-0x000000, for encapsulated Ethernet; it doesn't check whether the packet
-is in SNAP format with an OUI of 0x000000.
-.IP
-The exceptions are \fIiso\fP, for which it checks the DSAP (Destination
-Service Access Point) and SSAP (Source Service Access Point) fields of
-the LLC header, \fIstp\fP and \fInetbeui\fP, where it checks the DSAP of
-the LLC header, and \fIatalk\fP, where it checks for a SNAP-format
-packet with an OUI of 0x080007 and the Appletalk etype.
-.IP
-In the case of Ethernet, \fItcpdump\fR checks the Ethernet type field
-for most of those protocols; the exceptions are \fIiso\fP, \fIsap\fP,
-and \fInetbeui\fP, for which it checks for an 802.3 frame and then
-checks the LLC header as it does for FDDI and Token Ring, \fIatalk\fP,
-where it checks both for the Appletalk etype in an Ethernet frame and
-for a SNAP-format packet as it does for FDDI and Token Ring, \fIaarp\fP,
-where it checks for the Appletalk ARP etype in either an Ethernet frame
-or an 802.2 SNAP frame with an OUI of 0x000000, and \fIipx\fP, where it
-checks for the IPX etype in an Ethernet frame, the IPX DSAP in the LLC
-header, the 802.3 with no LLC header encapsulation of IPX, and the IPX
-etype in a SNAP frame.]
-.IP "\fBdecnet src \fIhost\fR"
-True if the DECNET source address is
-.IR host ,
-which may be an address of the form ``10.123'', or a DECNET host
-name.
-[DECNET host name support is only available on Ultrix systems
-that are configured to run DECNET.]
-.IP "\fBdecnet dst \fIhost\fR"
-True if the DECNET destination address is
-.IR host .
-.IP "\fBdecnet host \fIhost\fR"
-True if either the DECNET source or destination address is
-.IR host .
-.IP "\fBip\fR, \fBip6\fR, \fBarp\fR, \fBrarp\fR, \fBatalk\fR, \fBaarp\fR, \fBdecnet\fR, \fBiso\fR, \fBstp\fR, \fBipx\fR, \fInetbeui\fP"
-Abbreviations for:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBether proto \fIp\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-where \fIp\fR is one of the above protocols.
-.IP "\fBlat\fR, \fBmoprc\fR, \fBmopdl\fR"
-Abbreviations for:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBether proto \fIp\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-where \fIp\fR is one of the above protocols.
-Note that
-\fItcpdump\fP does not currently know how to parse these protocols.
-.IP "\fBvlan \fI[vlan_id]\fR"
-True if the packet is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN packet.
-If \fI[vlan_id]\fR is specified, only true is the packet has the specified
-\fIvlan_id\fR.
-Note that the first \fBvlan\fR keyword encountered in \fIexpression\fR
-changes the decoding offsets for the remainder of \fIexpression\fR
-on the assumption that the packet is a VLAN packet.
-.IP "\fBtcp\fR, \fBudp\fR, \fBicmp\fR"
-Abbreviations for:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBip proto \fIp\fR\fB or ip6 proto \fIp\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-where \fIp\fR is one of the above protocols.
-.IP "\fBiso proto \fIprotocol\fR"
-True if the packet is an OSI packet of protocol type \fIprotocol\fP.
-\fIProtocol\fP can be a number or one of the names
-\fIclnp\fP, \fIesis\fP, or \fIisis\fP.
-.IP "\fBclnp\fR, \fBesis\fR, \fBisis\fR"
-Abbreviations for:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBiso proto \fIp\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-where \fIp\fR is one of the above protocols.
-Note that \fItcpdump\fR does an incomplete job of parsing these protocols.
-.IP "\fIexpr relop expr\fR"
-True if the relation holds, where \fIrelop\fR is one of >, <, >=, <=, =, !=,
-and \fIexpr\fR is an arithmetic expression composed of integer constants
-(expressed in standard C syntax), the normal binary operators
-[+, -, *, /, &, |], a length operator, and special packet data accessors.
-To access
-data inside the packet, use the following syntax:
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fIproto\fB [ \fIexpr\fB : \fIsize\fB ]\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-\fIProto\fR is one of \fBether, fddi, tr, ppp, slip, link,
-ip, arp, rarp, tcp, udp, icmp\fR or \fBip6\fR, and
-indicates the protocol layer for the index operation.
-(\fBether, fddi, tr, ppp, slip\fR and \fBlink\fR all refer to the link
-layer.)
-Note that \fItcp, udp\fR and other upper-layer protocol types only
-apply to IPv4, not IPv6 (this will be fixed in the future).
-The byte offset, relative to the indicated protocol layer, is
-given by \fIexpr\fR.
-\fISize\fR is optional and indicates the number of bytes in the
-field of interest; it can be either one, two, or four, and defaults to one.
-The length operator, indicated by the keyword \fBlen\fP, gives the
-length of the packet.
-
-For example, `\fBether[0] & 1 != 0\fP' catches all multicast traffic.
-The expression `\fBip[0] & 0xf != 5\fP'
-catches all IP packets with options.
-The expression
-`\fBip[6:2] & 0x1fff = 0\fP'
-catches only unfragmented datagrams and frag zero of fragmented datagrams.
-This check is implicitly applied to the \fBtcp\fP and \fBudp\fP
-index operations.
-For instance, \fBtcp[0]\fP always means the first
-byte of the TCP \fIheader\fP, and never means the first byte of an
-intervening fragment.
-
-Some offsets and field values may be expressed as names rather than
-as numeric values.
-The following protocol header field offsets are
-available: \fBicmptype\fP (ICMP type field), \fBicmpcode\fP (ICMP
-code field), and \fBtcpflags\fP (TCP flags field).
-
-The following ICMP type field values are available: \fBicmp-echoreply\fP,
-\fBicmp-unreach\fP, \fBicmp-sourcequench\fP, \fBicmp-redirect\fP,
-\fBicmp-echo\fP, \fBicmp-routeradvert\fP, \fBicmp-routersolicit\fP,
-\fBicmp-timxceed\fP, \fBicmp-paramprob\fP, \fBicmp-tstamp\fP,
-\fBicmp-tstampreply\fP, \fBicmp-ireq\fP, \fBicmp-ireqreply\fP,
-\fBicmp-maskreq\fP, \fBicmp-maskreply\fP.
-
-The following TCP flags field values are available: \fBtcp-fin\fP,
-\fBtcp-syn\fP, \fBtcp-rst\fP, \fBtcp-push\fP, \fBtcp-push\fP,
-\fBtcp-ack\fP, \fBtcp-urg\fP.
-.LP
-Primitives may be combined using:
-.IP
-A parenthesized group of primitives and operators
-(parentheses are special to the Shell and must be escaped).
-.IP
-Negation (`\fB!\fP' or `\fBnot\fP').
-.IP
-Concatenation (`\fB&&\fP' or `\fBand\fP').
-.IP
-Alternation (`\fB||\fP' or `\fBor\fP').
-.LP
-Negation has highest precedence.
-Alternation and concatenation have equal precedence and associate
-left to right.
-Note that explicit \fBand\fR tokens, not juxtaposition,
-are now required for concatenation.
-.LP
-If an identifier is given without a keyword, the most recent keyword
-is assumed.
-For example,
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBnot host vs and ace\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-is short for
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBnot host vs and host ace\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-which should not be confused with
-.in +.5i
-.nf
-\fBnot ( host vs or ace )\fR
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-.LP
-Expression arguments can be passed to \fItcpdump\fP as either a single
-argument or as multiple arguments, whichever is more convenient.
-Generally, if the expression contains Shell metacharacters, it is
-easier to pass it as a single, quoted argument.
-Multiple arguments are concatenated with spaces before being parsed.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.LP
-To print all packets arriving at or departing from \fIsundown\fP:
-.RS
-.nf
-\fBtcpdump host sundown\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print traffic between \fIhelios\fR and either \fIhot\fR or \fIace\fR:
-.RS
-.nf
-\fBtcpdump host helios and \\( hot or ace \\)\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print all IP packets between \fIace\fR and any host except \fIhelios\fR:
-.RS
-.nf
-\fBtcpdump ip host ace and not helios\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print all traffic between local hosts and hosts at Berkeley:
-.RS
-.nf
-.B
-tcpdump net ucb-ether
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print all ftp traffic through internet gateway \fIsnup\fP:
-(note that the expression is quoted to prevent the shell from
-(mis-)interpreting the parentheses):
-.RS
-.nf
-.B
-tcpdump 'gateway snup and (port ftp or ftp-data)'
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print traffic neither sourced from nor destined for local hosts
-(if you gateway to one other net, this stuff should never make it
-onto your local net).
-.RS
-.nf
-.B
-tcpdump ip and not net \fIlocalnet\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print the start and end packets (the SYN and FIN packets) of each
-TCP conversation that involves a non-local host.
-.RS
-.nf
-.B
-tcpdump 'tcp[tcpflags] & (tcp-syn|tcp-fin) != 0 and not src and dst net \fIlocalnet\fP'
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print IP packets longer than 576 bytes sent through gateway \fIsnup\fP:
-.RS
-.nf
-.B
-tcpdump 'gateway snup and ip[2:2] > 576'
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print IP broadcast or multicast packets that were
-.I not
-sent via ethernet broadcast or multicast:
-.RS
-.nf
-.B
-tcpdump 'ether[0] & 1 = 0 and ip[16] >= 224'
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-To print all ICMP packets that are not echo requests/replies (i.e., not
-ping packets):
-.RS
-.nf
-.B
-tcpdump 'icmp[icmptype] != icmp-echo and icmp[icmptype] != icmp-echoreply'
-.fi
-.RE
-.SH OUTPUT FORMAT
-.LP
-The output of \fItcpdump\fP is protocol dependent.
-The following
-gives a brief description and examples of most of the formats.
-.de HD
-.sp 1.5
-.B
-..
-.HD
-Link Level Headers
-.LP
-If the '-e' option is given, the link level header is printed out.
-On ethernets, the source and destination addresses, protocol,
-and packet length are printed.
-.LP
-On FDDI networks, the '-e' option causes \fItcpdump\fP to print
-the `frame control' field, the source and destination addresses,
-and the packet length.
-(The `frame control' field governs the
-interpretation of the rest of the packet.
-Normal packets (such
-as those containing IP datagrams) are `async' packets, with a priority
-value between 0 and 7; for example, `\fBasync4\fR'.
-Such packets
-are assumed to contain an 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) packet;
-the LLC header is printed if it is \fInot\fR an ISO datagram or a
-so-called SNAP packet.
-.LP
-On Token Ring networks, the '-e' option causes \fItcpdump\fP to print
-the `access control' and `frame control' fields, the source and
-destination addresses, and the packet length.
-As on FDDI networks,
-packets are assumed to contain an LLC packet.
-Regardless of whether
-the '-e' option is specified or not, the source routing information is
-printed for source-routed packets.
-.LP
-\fI(N.B.: The following description assumes familiarity with
-the SLIP compression algorithm described in RFC-1144.)\fP
-.LP
-On SLIP links, a direction indicator (``I'' for inbound, ``O'' for outbound),
-packet type, and compression information are printed out.
-The packet type is printed first.
-The three types are \fIip\fP, \fIutcp\fP, and \fIctcp\fP.
-No further link information is printed for \fIip\fR packets.
-For TCP packets, the connection identifier is printed following the type.
-If the packet is compressed, its encoded header is printed out.
-The special cases are printed out as
-\fB*S+\fIn\fR and \fB*SA+\fIn\fR, where \fIn\fR is the amount by which
-the sequence number (or sequence number and ack) has changed.
-If it is not a special case,
-zero or more changes are printed.
-A change is indicated by U (urgent pointer), W (window), A (ack),
-S (sequence number), and I (packet ID), followed by a delta (+n or -n),
-or a new value (=n).
-Finally, the amount of data in the packet and compressed header length
-are printed.
-.LP
-For example, the following line shows an outbound compressed TCP packet,
-with an implicit connection identifier; the ack has changed by 6,
-the sequence number by 49, and the packet ID by 6; there are 3 bytes of
-data and 6 bytes of compressed header:
-.RS
-.nf
-\fBO ctcp * A+6 S+49 I+6 3 (6)\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.HD
-ARP/RARP Packets
-.LP
-Arp/rarp output shows the type of request and its arguments.
-The
-format is intended to be self explanatory.
-Here is a short sample taken from the start of an `rlogin' from
-host \fIrtsg\fP to host \fIcsam\fP:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\f(CWarp who-has csam tell rtsg
-arp reply csam is-at CSAM\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-The first line says that rtsg sent an arp packet asking
-for the ethernet address of internet host csam.
-Csam
-replies with its ethernet address (in this example, ethernet addresses
-are in caps and internet addresses in lower case).
-.LP
-This would look less redundant if we had done \fItcpdump \-n\fP:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\f(CWarp who-has 128.3.254.6 tell 128.3.254.68
-arp reply 128.3.254.6 is-at 02:07:01:00:01:c4\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-.LP
-If we had done \fItcpdump \-e\fP, the fact that the first packet is
-broadcast and the second is point-to-point would be visible:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\f(CWRTSG Broadcast 0806 64: arp who-has csam tell rtsg
-CSAM RTSG 0806 64: arp reply csam is-at CSAM\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-For the first packet this says the ethernet source address is RTSG, the
-destination is the ethernet broadcast address, the type field
-contained hex 0806 (type ETHER_ARP) and the total length was 64 bytes.
-.HD
-TCP Packets
-.LP
-\fI(N.B.:The following description assumes familiarity with
-the TCP protocol described in RFC-793.
-If you are not familiar
-with the protocol, neither this description nor \fItcpdump\fP will
-be of much use to you.)\fP
-.LP
-The general format of a tcp protocol line is:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fIsrc > dst: flags data-seqno ack window urgent options\fP
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-\fISrc\fP and \fIdst\fP are the source and destination IP
-addresses and ports.
-\fIFlags\fP are some combination of S (SYN),
-F (FIN), P (PUSH) or R (RST) or a single `.' (no flags).
-\fIData-seqno\fP describes the portion of sequence space covered
-by the data in this packet (see example below).
-\fIAck\fP is sequence number of the next data expected the other
-direction on this connection.
-\fIWindow\fP is the number of bytes of receive buffer space available
-the other direction on this connection.
-\fIUrg\fP indicates there is `urgent' data in the packet.
-\fIOptions\fP are tcp options enclosed in angle brackets (e.g., <mss 1024>).
-.LP
-\fISrc, dst\fP and \fIflags\fP are always present.
-The other fields
-depend on the contents of the packet's tcp protocol header and
-are output only if appropriate.
-.LP
-Here is the opening portion of an rlogin from host \fIrtsg\fP to
-host \fIcsam\fP.
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\s-2\f(CWrtsg.1023 > csam.login: S 768512:768512(0) win 4096 <mss 1024>
-csam.login > rtsg.1023: S 947648:947648(0) ack 768513 win 4096 <mss 1024>
-rtsg.1023 > csam.login: . ack 1 win 4096
-rtsg.1023 > csam.login: P 1:2(1) ack 1 win 4096
-csam.login > rtsg.1023: . ack 2 win 4096
-rtsg.1023 > csam.login: P 2:21(19) ack 1 win 4096
-csam.login > rtsg.1023: P 1:2(1) ack 21 win 4077
-csam.login > rtsg.1023: P 2:3(1) ack 21 win 4077 urg 1
-csam.login > rtsg.1023: P 3:4(1) ack 21 win 4077 urg 1\fR\s+2
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-The first line says that tcp port 1023 on rtsg sent a packet
-to port \fIlogin\fP
-on csam.
-The \fBS\fP indicates that the \fISYN\fP flag was set.
-The packet sequence number was 768512 and it contained no data.
-(The notation is `first:last(nbytes)' which means `sequence
-numbers \fIfirst\fP
-up to but not including \fIlast\fP which is \fInbytes\fP bytes of user data'.)
-There was no piggy-backed ack, the available receive window was 4096
-bytes and there was a max-segment-size option requesting an mss of
-1024 bytes.
-.LP
-Csam replies with a similar packet except it includes a piggy-backed
-ack for rtsg's SYN.
-Rtsg then acks csam's SYN.
-The `.' means no
-flags were set.
-The packet contained no data so there is no data sequence number.
-Note that the ack sequence
-number is a small integer (1).
-The first time \fItcpdump\fP sees a
-tcp `conversation', it prints the sequence number from the packet.
-On subsequent packets of the conversation, the difference between
-the current packet's sequence number and this initial sequence number
-is printed.
-This means that sequence numbers after the
-first can be interpreted
-as relative byte positions in the conversation's data stream (with the
-first data byte each direction being `1').
-`-S' will override this
-feature, causing the original sequence numbers to be output.
-.LP
-On the 6th line, rtsg sends csam 19 bytes of data (bytes 2 through 20
-in the rtsg \(-> csam side of the conversation).
-The PUSH flag is set in the packet.
-On the 7th line, csam says it's received data sent by rtsg up to
-but not including byte 21.
-Most of this data is apparently sitting in the
-socket buffer since csam's receive window has gotten 19 bytes smaller.
-Csam also sends one byte of data to rtsg in this packet.
-On the 8th and 9th lines,
-csam sends two bytes of urgent, pushed data to rtsg.
-.LP
-If the snapshot was small enough that \fItcpdump\fP didn't capture
-the full TCP header, it interprets as much of the header as it can
-and then reports ``[|\fItcp\fP]'' to indicate the remainder could not
-be interpreted.
-If the header contains a bogus option (one with a length
-that's either too small or beyond the end of the header), \fItcpdump\fP
-reports it as ``[\fIbad opt\fP]'' and does not interpret any further
-options (since it's impossible to tell where they start).
-If the header
-length indicates options are present but the IP datagram length is not
-long enough for the options to actually be there, \fItcpdump\fP reports
-it as ``[\fIbad hdr length\fP]''.
-.HD
-.B Capturing TCP packets with particular flag combinations (SYN-ACK, URG-ACK, etc.)
-.PP
-There are 8 bits in the control bits section of the TCP header:
-.IP
-.I CWR | ECE | URG | ACK | PSH | RST | SYN | FIN
-.PP
-Let's assume that we want to watch packets used in establishing
-a TCP connection.
-Recall that TCP uses a 3-way handshake protocol
-when it initializes a new connection; the connection sequence with
-regard to the TCP control bits is
-.PP
-.RS
-1) Caller sends SYN
-.RE
-.RS
-2) Recipient responds with SYN, ACK
-.RE
-.RS
-3) Caller sends ACK
-.RE
-.PP
-Now we're interested in capturing packets that have only the
-SYN bit set (Step 1).
-Note that we don't want packets from step 2
-(SYN-ACK), just a plain initial SYN.
-What we need is a correct filter
-expression for \fItcpdump\fP.
-.PP
-Recall the structure of a TCP header without options:
-.PP
-.nf
- 0 15 31
------------------------------------------------------------------
-| source port | destination port |
------------------------------------------------------------------
-| sequence number |
------------------------------------------------------------------
-| acknowledgment number |
------------------------------------------------------------------
-| HL | rsvd |C|E|U|A|P|R|S|F| window size |
------------------------------------------------------------------
-| TCP checksum | urgent pointer |
------------------------------------------------------------------
-.fi
-.PP
-A TCP header usually holds 20 octets of data, unless options are
-present.
-The first line of the graph contains octets 0 - 3, the
-second line shows octets 4 - 7 etc.
-.PP
-Starting to count with 0, the relevant TCP control bits are contained
-in octet 13:
-.PP
-.nf
- 0 7| 15| 23| 31
-----------------|---------------|---------------|----------------
-| HL | rsvd |C|E|U|A|P|R|S|F| window size |
-----------------|---------------|---------------|----------------
-| | 13th octet | | |
-.fi
-.PP
-Let's have a closer look at octet no. 13:
-.PP
-.nf
- | |
- |---------------|
- |C|E|U|A|P|R|S|F|
- |---------------|
- |7 5 3 0|
-.fi
-.PP
-These are the TCP control bits we are interested
-in.
-We have numbered the bits in this octet from 0 to 7, right to
-left, so the PSH bit is bit number 3, while the URG bit is number 5.
-.PP
-Recall that we want to capture packets with only SYN set.
-Let's see what happens to octet 13 if a TCP datagram arrives
-with the SYN bit set in its header:
-.PP
-.nf
- |C|E|U|A|P|R|S|F|
- |---------------|
- |0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0|
- |---------------|
- |7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0|
-.fi
-.PP
-Looking at the
-control bits section we see that only bit number 1 (SYN) is set.
-.PP
-Assuming that octet number 13 is an 8-bit unsigned integer in
-network byte order, the binary value of this octet is
-.IP
-00000010
-.PP
-and its decimal representation is
-.PP
-.nf
- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
-0*2 + 0*2 + 0*2 + 0*2 + 0*2 + 0*2 + 1*2 + 0*2 = 2
-.fi
-.PP
-We're almost done, because now we know that if only SYN is set,
-the value of the 13th octet in the TCP header, when interpreted
-as a 8-bit unsigned integer in network byte order, must be exactly 2.
-.PP
-This relationship can be expressed as
-.RS
-.B
-tcp[13] == 2
-.RE
-.PP
-We can use this expression as the filter for \fItcpdump\fP in order
-to watch packets which have only SYN set:
-.RS
-.B
-tcpdump -i xl0 tcp[13] == 2
-.RE
-.PP
-The expression says "let the 13th octet of a TCP datagram have
-the decimal value 2", which is exactly what we want.
-.PP
-Now, let's assume that we need to capture SYN packets, but we
-don't care if ACK or any other TCP control bit is set at the
-same time.
-Let's see what happens to octet 13 when a TCP datagram
-with SYN-ACK set arrives:
-.PP
-.nf
- |C|E|U|A|P|R|S|F|
- |---------------|
- |0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0|
- |---------------|
- |7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0|
-.fi
-.PP
-Now bits 1 and 4 are set in the 13th octet.
-The binary value of
-octet 13 is
-.IP
- 00010010
-.PP
-which translates to decimal
-.PP
-.nf
- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
-0*2 + 0*2 + 0*2 + 1*2 + 0*2 + 0*2 + 1*2 + 0*2 = 18
-.fi
-.PP
-Now we can't just use 'tcp[13] == 18' in the \fItcpdump\fP filter
-expression, because that would select only those packets that have
-SYN-ACK set, but not those with only SYN set.
-Remember that we don't care
-if ACK or any other control bit is set as long as SYN is set.
-.PP
-In order to achieve our goal, we need to logically AND the
-binary value of octet 13 with some other value to preserve
-the SYN bit.
-We know that we want SYN to be set in any case,
-so we'll logically AND the value in the 13th octet with
-the binary value of a SYN:
-.PP
-.nf
-
- 00010010 SYN-ACK 00000010 SYN
- AND 00000010 (we want SYN) AND 00000010 (we want SYN)
- -------- --------
- = 00000010 = 00000010
-.fi
-.PP
-We see that this AND operation delivers the same result
-regardless whether ACK or another TCP control bit is set.
-The decimal representation of the AND value as well as
-the result of this operation is 2 (binary 00000010),
-so we know that for packets with SYN set the following
-relation must hold true:
-.IP
-( ( value of octet 13 ) AND ( 2 ) ) == ( 2 )
-.PP
-This points us to the \fItcpdump\fP filter expression
-.RS
-.B
- tcpdump -i xl0 'tcp[13] & 2 == 2'
-.RE
-.PP
-Note that you should use single quotes or a backslash
-in the expression to hide the AND ('&') special character
-from the shell.
-.HD
-.B
-UDP Packets
-.LP
-UDP format is illustrated by this rwho packet:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\f(CWactinide.who > broadcast.who: udp 84\fP
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-This says that port \fIwho\fP on host \fIactinide\fP sent a udp
-datagram to port \fIwho\fP on host \fIbroadcast\fP, the Internet
-broadcast address.
-The packet contained 84 bytes of user data.
-.LP
-Some UDP services are recognized (from the source or destination
-port number) and the higher level protocol information printed.
-In particular, Domain Name service requests (RFC-1034/1035) and Sun
-RPC calls (RFC-1050) to NFS.
-.HD
-UDP Name Server Requests
-.LP
-\fI(N.B.:The following description assumes familiarity with
-the Domain Service protocol described in RFC-1035.
-If you are not familiar
-with the protocol, the following description will appear to be written
-in greek.)\fP
-.LP
-Name server requests are formatted as
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fIsrc > dst: id op? flags qtype qclass name (len)\fP
-.sp .5
-\f(CWh2opolo.1538 > helios.domain: 3+ A? ucbvax.berkeley.edu. (37)\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-Host \fIh2opolo\fP asked the domain server on \fIhelios\fP for an
-address record (qtype=A) associated with the name \fIucbvax.berkeley.edu.\fP
-The query id was `3'.
-The `+' indicates the \fIrecursion desired\fP flag
-was set.
-The query length was 37 bytes, not including the UDP and
-IP protocol headers.
-The query operation was the normal one, \fIQuery\fP,
-so the op field was omitted.
-If the op had been anything else, it would
-have been printed between the `3' and the `+'.
-Similarly, the qclass was the normal one,
-\fIC_IN\fP, and omitted.
-Any other qclass would have been printed
-immediately after the `A'.
-.LP
-A few anomalies are checked and may result in extra fields enclosed in
-square brackets: If a query contains an answer, authority records or
-additional records section,
-.IR ancount ,
-.IR nscount ,
-or
-.I arcount
-are printed as `[\fIn\fPa]', `[\fIn\fPn]' or `[\fIn\fPau]' where \fIn\fP
-is the appropriate count.
-If any of the response bits are set (AA, RA or rcode) or any of the
-`must be zero' bits are set in bytes two and three, `[b2&3=\fIx\fP]'
-is printed, where \fIx\fP is the hex value of header bytes two and three.
-.HD
-UDP Name Server Responses
-.LP
-Name server responses are formatted as
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fIsrc > dst: id op rcode flags a/n/au type class data (len)\fP
-.sp .5
-\f(CWhelios.domain > h2opolo.1538: 3 3/3/7 A 128.32.137.3 (273)
-helios.domain > h2opolo.1537: 2 NXDomain* 0/1/0 (97)\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-In the first example, \fIhelios\fP responds to query id 3 from \fIh2opolo\fP
-with 3 answer records, 3 name server records and 7 additional records.
-The first answer record is type A (address) and its data is internet
-address 128.32.137.3.
-The total size of the response was 273 bytes,
-excluding UDP and IP headers.
-The op (Query) and response code
-(NoError) were omitted, as was the class (C_IN) of the A record.
-.LP
-In the second example, \fIhelios\fP responds to query 2 with a
-response code of non-existent domain (NXDomain) with no answers,
-one name server and no authority records.
-The `*' indicates that
-the \fIauthoritative answer\fP bit was set.
-Since there were no
-answers, no type, class or data were printed.
-.LP
-Other flag characters that might appear are `\-' (recursion available,
-RA, \fInot\fP set) and `|' (truncated message, TC, set).
-If the
-`question' section doesn't contain exactly one entry, `[\fIn\fPq]'
-is printed.
-.LP
-Note that name server requests and responses tend to be large and the
-default \fIsnaplen\fP of 68 bytes may not capture enough of the packet
-to print.
-Use the \fB\-s\fP flag to increase the snaplen if you
-need to seriously investigate name server traffic.
-`\fB\-s 128\fP'
-has worked well for me.
-
-.HD
-SMB/CIFS decoding
-.LP
-\fItcpdump\fP now includes fairly extensive SMB/CIFS/NBT decoding for data
-on UDP/137, UDP/138 and TCP/139.
-Some primitive decoding of IPX and
-NetBEUI SMB data is also done.
-
-By default a fairly minimal decode is done, with a much more detailed
-decode done if -v is used.
-Be warned that with -v a single SMB packet
-may take up a page or more, so only use -v if you really want all the
-gory details.
-
-If you are decoding SMB sessions containing unicode strings then you
-may wish to set the environment variable USE_UNICODE to 1.
-A patch to
-auto-detect unicode srings would be welcome.
-
-For information on SMB packet formats and what all te fields mean see
-www.cifs.org or the pub/samba/specs/ directory on your favourite
-samba.org mirror site.
-The SMB patches were written by Andrew Tridgell
-(tridge at samba.org).
-
-.HD
-NFS Requests and Replies
-.LP
-Sun NFS (Network File System) requests and replies are printed as:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fIsrc.xid > dst.nfs: len op args\fP
-\fIsrc.nfs > dst.xid: reply stat len op results\fP
-.sp .5
-\f(CW
-sushi.6709 > wrl.nfs: 112 readlink fh 21,24/10.73165
-wrl.nfs > sushi.6709: reply ok 40 readlink "../var"
-sushi.201b > wrl.nfs:
- 144 lookup fh 9,74/4096.6878 "xcolors"
-wrl.nfs > sushi.201b:
- reply ok 128 lookup fh 9,74/4134.3150
-\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-In the first line, host \fIsushi\fP sends a transaction with id \fI6709\fP
-to \fIwrl\fP (note that the number following the src host is a
-transaction id, \fInot\fP the source port).
-The request was 112 bytes,
-excluding the UDP and IP headers.
-The operation was a \fIreadlink\fP
-(read symbolic link) on file handle (\fIfh\fP) 21,24/10.731657119.
-(If one is lucky, as in this case, the file handle can be interpreted
-as a major,minor device number pair, followed by the inode number and
-generation number.)
-\fIWrl\fP replies `ok' with the contents of the link.
-.LP
-In the third line, \fIsushi\fP asks \fIwrl\fP to lookup the name
-`\fIxcolors\fP' in directory file 9,74/4096.6878.
-Note that the data printed
-depends on the operation type.
-The format is intended to be self
-explanatory if read in conjunction with
-an NFS protocol spec.
-.LP
-If the \-v (verbose) flag is given, additional information is printed.
-For example:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\f(CW
-sushi.1372a > wrl.nfs:
- 148 read fh 21,11/12.195 8192 bytes @ 24576
-wrl.nfs > sushi.1372a:
- reply ok 1472 read REG 100664 ids 417/0 sz 29388
-\fP
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-(\-v also prints the IP header TTL, ID, length, and fragmentation fields,
-which have been omitted from this example.) In the first line,
-\fIsushi\fP asks \fIwrl\fP to read 8192 bytes from file 21,11/12.195,
-at byte offset 24576.
-\fIWrl\fP replies `ok'; the packet shown on the
-second line is the first fragment of the reply, and hence is only 1472
-bytes long (the other bytes will follow in subsequent fragments, but
-these fragments do not have NFS or even UDP headers and so might not be
-printed, depending on the filter expression used).
-Because the \-v flag
-is given, some of the file attributes (which are returned in addition
-to the file data) are printed: the file type (``REG'', for regular file),
-the file mode (in octal), the uid and gid, and the file size.
-.LP
-If the \-v flag is given more than once, even more details are printed.
-.LP
-Note that NFS requests are very large and much of the detail won't be printed
-unless \fIsnaplen\fP is increased.
-Try using `\fB\-s 192\fP' to watch
-NFS traffic.
-.LP
-NFS reply packets do not explicitly identify the RPC operation.
-Instead,
-\fItcpdump\fP keeps track of ``recent'' requests, and matches them to the
-replies using the transaction ID.
-If a reply does not closely follow the
-corresponding request, it might not be parsable.
-.HD
-AFS Requests and Replies
-.LP
-Transarc AFS (Andrew File System) requests and replies are printed
-as:
-.HD
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fIsrc.sport > dst.dport: rx packet-type\fP
-\fIsrc.sport > dst.dport: rx packet-type service call call-name args\fP
-\fIsrc.sport > dst.dport: rx packet-type service reply call-name args\fP
-.sp .5
-\f(CW
-elvis.7001 > pike.afsfs:
- rx data fs call rename old fid 536876964/1/1 ".newsrc.new"
- new fid 536876964/1/1 ".newsrc"
-pike.afsfs > elvis.7001: rx data fs reply rename
-\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-In the first line, host elvis sends a RX packet to pike.
-This was
-a RX data packet to the fs (fileserver) service, and is the start of
-an RPC call.
-The RPC call was a rename, with the old directory file id
-of 536876964/1/1 and an old filename of `.newsrc.new', and a new directory
-file id of 536876964/1/1 and a new filename of `.newsrc'.
-The host pike
-responds with a RPC reply to the rename call (which was successful, because
-it was a data packet and not an abort packet).
-.LP
-In general, all AFS RPCs are decoded at least by RPC call name.
-Most
-AFS RPCs have at least some of the arguments decoded (generally only
-the `interesting' arguments, for some definition of interesting).
-.LP
-The format is intended to be self-describing, but it will probably
-not be useful to people who are not familiar with the workings of
-AFS and RX.
-.LP
-If the -v (verbose) flag is given twice, acknowledgement packets and
-additional header information is printed, such as the the RX call ID,
-call number, sequence number, serial number, and the RX packet flags.
-.LP
-If the -v flag is given twice, additional information is printed,
-such as the the RX call ID, serial number, and the RX packet flags.
-The MTU negotiation information is also printed from RX ack packets.
-.LP
-If the -v flag is given three times, the security index and service id
-are printed.
-.LP
-Error codes are printed for abort packets, with the exception of Ubik
-beacon packets (because abort packets are used to signify a yes vote
-for the Ubik protocol).
-.LP
-Note that AFS requests are very large and many of the arguments won't
-be printed unless \fIsnaplen\fP is increased.
-Try using `\fB-s 256\fP'
-to watch AFS traffic.
-.LP
-AFS reply packets do not explicitly identify the RPC operation.
-Instead,
-\fItcpdump\fP keeps track of ``recent'' requests, and matches them to the
-replies using the call number and service ID.
-If a reply does not closely
-follow the
-corresponding request, it might not be parsable.
-
-.HD
-KIP Appletalk (DDP in UDP)
-.LP
-Appletalk DDP packets encapsulated in UDP datagrams are de-encapsulated
-and dumped as DDP packets (i.e., all the UDP header information is
-discarded).
-The file
-.I /etc/atalk.names
-is used to translate appletalk net and node numbers to names.
-Lines in this file have the form
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fInumber name\fP
-
-\f(CW1.254 ether
-16.1 icsd-net
-1.254.110 ace\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-The first two lines give the names of appletalk networks.
-The third
-line gives the name of a particular host (a host is distinguished
-from a net by the 3rd octet in the number \-
-a net number \fImust\fP have two octets and a host number \fImust\fP
-have three octets.) The number and name should be separated by
-whitespace (blanks or tabs).
-The
-.I /etc/atalk.names
-file may contain blank lines or comment lines (lines starting with
-a `#').
-.LP
-Appletalk addresses are printed in the form
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fInet.host.port\fP
-
-\f(CW144.1.209.2 > icsd-net.112.220
-office.2 > icsd-net.112.220
-jssmag.149.235 > icsd-net.2\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-(If the
-.I /etc/atalk.names
-doesn't exist or doesn't contain an entry for some appletalk
-host/net number, addresses are printed in numeric form.)
-In the first example, NBP (DDP port 2) on net 144.1 node 209
-is sending to whatever is listening on port 220 of net icsd node 112.
-The second line is the same except the full name of the source node
-is known (`office').
-The third line is a send from port 235 on
-net jssmag node 149 to broadcast on the icsd-net NBP port (note that
-the broadcast address (255) is indicated by a net name with no host
-number \- for this reason it's a good idea to keep node names and
-net names distinct in /etc/atalk.names).
-.LP
-NBP (name binding protocol) and ATP (Appletalk transaction protocol)
-packets have their contents interpreted.
-Other protocols just dump
-the protocol name (or number if no name is registered for the
-protocol) and packet size.
-
-\fBNBP packets\fP are formatted like the following examples:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\s-2\f(CWicsd-net.112.220 > jssmag.2: nbp-lkup 190: "=:LaserWriter@*"
-jssmag.209.2 > icsd-net.112.220: nbp-reply 190: "RM1140:LaserWriter@*" 250
-techpit.2 > icsd-net.112.220: nbp-reply 190: "techpit:LaserWriter@*" 186\fR\s+2
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-The first line is a name lookup request for laserwriters sent by net icsd host
-112 and broadcast on net jssmag.
-The nbp id for the lookup is 190.
-The second line shows a reply for this request (note that it has the
-same id) from host jssmag.209 saying that it has a laserwriter
-resource named "RM1140" registered on port 250.
-The third line is
-another reply to the same request saying host techpit has laserwriter
-"techpit" registered on port 186.
-
-\fBATP packet\fP formatting is demonstrated by the following example:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\s-2\f(CWjssmag.209.165 > helios.132: atp-req 12266<0-7> 0xae030001
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:0 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:1 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:2 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:3 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:4 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:5 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:6 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp*12266:7 (512) 0xae040000
-jssmag.209.165 > helios.132: atp-req 12266<3,5> 0xae030001
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:3 (512) 0xae040000
-helios.132 > jssmag.209.165: atp-resp 12266:5 (512) 0xae040000
-jssmag.209.165 > helios.132: atp-rel 12266<0-7> 0xae030001
-jssmag.209.133 > helios.132: atp-req* 12267<0-7> 0xae030002\fR\s+2
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-Jssmag.209 initiates transaction id 12266 with host helios by requesting
-up to 8 packets (the `<0-7>').
-The hex number at the end of the line
-is the value of the `userdata' field in the request.
-.LP
-Helios responds with 8 512-byte packets.
-The `:digit' following the
-transaction id gives the packet sequence number in the transaction
-and the number in parens is the amount of data in the packet,
-excluding the atp header.
-The `*' on packet 7 indicates that the
-EOM bit was set.
-.LP
-Jssmag.209 then requests that packets 3 & 5 be retransmitted.
-Helios
-resends them then jssmag.209 releases the transaction.
-Finally,
-jssmag.209 initiates the next request.
-The `*' on the request
-indicates that XO (`exactly once') was \fInot\fP set.
-
-.HD
-IP Fragmentation
-.LP
-Fragmented Internet datagrams are printed as
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\fB(frag \fIid\fB:\fIsize\fB@\fIoffset\fB+)\fR
-\fB(frag \fIid\fB:\fIsize\fB@\fIoffset\fB)\fR
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-(The first form indicates there are more fragments.
-The second
-indicates this is the last fragment.)
-.LP
-\fIId\fP is the fragment id.
-\fISize\fP is the fragment
-size (in bytes) excluding the IP header.
-\fIOffset\fP is this
-fragment's offset (in bytes) in the original datagram.
-.LP
-The fragment information is output for each fragment.
-The first
-fragment contains the higher level protocol header and the frag
-info is printed after the protocol info.
-Fragments
-after the first contain no higher level protocol header and the
-frag info is printed after the source and destination addresses.
-For example, here is part of an ftp from arizona.edu to lbl-rtsg.arpa
-over a CSNET connection that doesn't appear to handle 576 byte datagrams:
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp .5
-\s-2\f(CWarizona.ftp-data > rtsg.1170: . 1024:1332(308) ack 1 win 4096 (frag 595a:328 at 0+)
-arizona > rtsg: (frag 595a:204 at 328)
-rtsg.1170 > arizona.ftp-data: . ack 1536 win 2560\fP\s+2
-.sp .5
-.fi
-.RE
-There are a couple of things to note here: First, addresses in the
-2nd line don't include port numbers.
-This is because the TCP
-protocol information is all in the first fragment and we have no idea
-what the port or sequence numbers are when we print the later fragments.
-Second, the tcp sequence information in the first line is printed as if there
-were 308 bytes of user data when, in fact, there are 512 bytes (308 in
-the first frag and 204 in the second).
-If you are looking for holes
-in the sequence space or trying to match up acks
-with packets, this can fool you.
-.LP
-A packet with the IP \fIdon't fragment\fP flag is marked with a
-trailing \fB(DF)\fP.
-.HD
-Timestamps
-.LP
-By default, all output lines are preceded by a timestamp.
-The timestamp
-is the current clock time in the form
-.RS
-.nf
-\fIhh:mm:ss.frac\fP
-.fi
-.RE
-and is as accurate as the kernel's clock.
-The timestamp reflects the time the kernel first saw the packet.
-No attempt
-is made to account for the time lag between when the
-ethernet interface removed the packet from the wire and when the kernel
-serviced the `new packet' interrupt.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-traffic(1C), nit(4P), bpf(4), pcap(3)
-.SH AUTHORS
-The original authors are:
-.LP
-Van Jacobson,
-Craig Leres and
-Steven McCanne, all of the
-Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory, University of California, Berkeley, CA.
-.LP
-It is currently being maintained by tcpdump.org.
-.LP
-The current version is available via http:
-.LP
-.RS
-.I http://www.tcpdump.org/
-.RE
-.LP
-The original distribution is available via anonymous ftp:
-.LP
-.RS
-.I ftp://ftp.ee.lbl.gov/tcpdump.tar.Z
-.RE
-.LP
-IPv6/IPsec support is added by WIDE/KAME project.
-This program uses Eric Young's SSLeay library, under specific configuration.
-.SH BUGS
-Please send problems, bugs, questions, desirable enhancements, etc. to:
-.LP
-.RS
-tcpdump-workers at tcpdump.org
-.RE
-.LP
-Please send source code contributions, etc. to:
-.LP
-.RS
-patches at tcpdump.org
-.RE
-.LP
-NIT doesn't let you watch your own outbound traffic, BPF will.
-We recommend that you use the latter.
-.LP
-On Linux systems with 2.0[.x] kernels:
-.IP
-packets on the loopback device will be seen twice;
-.IP
-packet filtering cannot be done in the kernel, so that all packets must
-be copied from the kernel in order to be filtered in user mode;
-.IP
-all of a packet, not just the part that's within the snapshot length,
-will be copied from the kernel (the 2.0[.x] packet capture mechanism, if
-asked to copy only part of a packet to userland, will not report the
-true length of the packet; this would cause most IP packets to get an
-error from
-.BR tcpdump );
-.IP
-capturing on some PPP devices won't work correctly.
-.LP
-We recommend that you upgrade to a 2.2 or later kernel.
-.LP
-Some attempt should be made to reassemble IP fragments or, at least
-to compute the right length for the higher level protocol.
-.LP
-Name server inverse queries are not dumped correctly: the (empty)
-question section is printed rather than real query in the answer
-section.
-Some believe that inverse queries are themselves a bug and
-prefer to fix the program generating them rather than \fItcpdump\fP.
-.LP
-A packet trace that crosses a daylight savings time change will give
-skewed time stamps (the time change is ignored).
-.LP
-Filter expressions that manipulate FDDI or Token Ring headers assume
-that all FDDI and Token Ring packets are SNAP-encapsulated Ethernet
-packets.
-This is true for IP, ARP, and DECNET Phase IV, but is not true
-for protocols such as ISO CLNS.
-Therefore, the filter may inadvertently
-accept certain packets that do not properly match the filter expression.
-.LP
-Filter expressions on fields other than those that manipulate Token Ring
-headers will not correctly handle source-routed Token Ring packets.
-.LP
-.BR "ip6 proto"
-should chase header chain, but at this moment it does not.
-.BR "ip6 protochain"
-is supplied for this behavior.
-.LP
-Arithmetic expression against transport layer headers, like \fBtcp[0]\fP,
-does not work against IPv6 packets.
-It only looks at IPv4 packets.
diff --git a/raw/man8/tzselect.8 b/raw/man8/tzselect.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 0168314..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/tzselect.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,44 +0,0 @@
-.TH TZSELECT 8
-.SH NAME
-tzselect \- select a time zone
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B tzselect
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B tzselect
-program asks the user for information about the current location,
-and outputs the resulting time zone description to standard output.
-The output is suitable as a value for the TZ environment variable.
-.PP
-All interaction with the user is done via standard input and standard error.
-.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES"
-.TP
-\fBAWK\fP
-Name of a Posix-compliant
-.I awk
-program (default:
-.BR awk ).
-.TP
-\fBTZDIR\fP
-Name of the directory containing time zone data files (default:
-.IR /usr/local/etc/zoneinfo ).
-.SH FILES
-.TP
-\fBTZDIR\fP\fI/iso3166.tab\fP
-Table of ISO 3166 2-letter country codes and country names.
-.TP
-\fBTZDIR\fP\fI/zone.tab\fP
-Table of country codes, latitude and longitude, TZ values, and
-descriptive comments.
-.TP
-\fBTZDIR\fP\fI/\fP\fITZ\fP
-Time zone data file for time zone \fITZ\fP.
-.SH "EXIT STATUS"
-The exit status is zero if a time zone was successfully obtained from the user,
-nonzero otherwise.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR newctime (3),
-.BR tzfile (5),
-.BR zdump (8),
-.BR zic (8)
-.\" @(#)tzselect.8 1.3
diff --git a/raw/man8/umount.8 b/raw/man8/umount.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 3449779..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/umount.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,134 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright (c) 1996 Andries Brouwer
-.\" This page is somewhat derived from a page that was
-.\" (c) 1980, 1989, 1991 The Regents of the University of California
-.\" and had been heavily modified by Rik Faith and myself.
-.\"
-.\" This is free documentation; you can redistribute it and/or
-.\" modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-.\" published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of
-.\" the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-.\"
-.\" The GNU General Public License's references to "object code"
-.\" and "executables" are to be interpreted as the output of any
-.\" document formatting or typesetting system, including
-.\" intermediate and printed output.
-.\"
-.\" This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-.\" GNU General Public License for more details.
-.\"
-.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public
-.\" License along with this manual; if not, write to the Free
-.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139,
-.\" USA.
-.\"
-.TH UMOUNT 8 "26 July 1997" "Linux 2.0" "Linux Programmer's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-umount \- unmount file systems
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "umount [\-hV]"
-.LP
-.BI "umount -a [\-dflnrv] [\-t " vfstype "] [\-O " options ]
-.br
-.BI "umount [\-dflnrv] " "dir " | " device " [...]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.B umount
-command detaches the file system(s) mentioned from the file hierarchy.
-A file system is specified by giving the directory where it
-has been mounted. Giving the special device on which the file system lives
-may also work, but is obsolete, mainly because it will fail
-in case this device was mounted on more than one directory.
-
-Note that a file system cannot be unmounted when it is `busy' -
-for example, when there are open files on it, or when some process
-has its working directory there, or when a swap file on it is in use.
-The offending process could even be
-.B umount
-itself - it opens libc, and libc in its turn may open for example
-locale files.
-A lazy unmount avoids this problem.
-
-Options for the
-.B umount
-command:
-.TP
-.B \-V
-Print version and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-h
-Print help message and exit.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Verbose mode.
-.TP
-.B \-n
-Unmount without writing in
-.IR /etc/mtab .
-.TP
-.B \-r
-In case unmounting fails, try to remount read-only.
-.TP
-.B \-d
-In case the unmounted device was a loop device, also
-free this loop device.
-.TP
-.B \-a
-All of the file systems described in
-.I /etc/mtab
-are unmounted. (With
-.B umount
-version 2.7 and later: the
-.I proc
-filesystem is not unmounted.)
-.TP
-.BI \-t " vfstype"
-Indicate that the actions should only be taken on file systems of the
-specified type. More than one type may be specified in a comma separated
-list. The list of file system types can be prefixed with
-.B no
-to specify the file system types on which no action should be taken.
-.TP
-.BI \-O " options"
-Indicate that the actions should only be taken on file systems with
-the specified options in
-.IR /etc/fstab .
-More than one option type may be specified in a comma separated
-list. Each option can be prefixed with
-.B no
-to specify options for which no action should be taken.
-.TP
-.B \-f
-Force unmount (in case of an unreachable NFS system).
-(Requires kernel 2.1.116 or later.)
-.TP
-.B \-l
-Lazy unmount. Detach the filesystem from the filesystem hierarchy now,
-and cleanup all references to the filesystem as soon as it is not busy
-anymore.
-(Requires kernel 2.4.11 or later.)
-
-.SH "THE LOOP DEVICE"
-The
-.B umount
-command will free the loop device (if any) associated
-with the mount, in case it finds the option `loop=...' in
-.IR /etc/mtab ,
-or when the \-d option was given.
-Any pending loop devices can be freed using `losetup -d', see
-.BR losetup (8).
-
-.SH FILES
-.I /etc/mtab
-table of mounted file systems
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR umount (2),
-.BR mount (8),
-.BR losetup (8).
-
-.SH HISTORY
-A
-.B umount
-command appeared in Version 6 AT&T UNIX.
diff --git a/raw/man8/useradd.8 b/raw/man8/useradd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 98ccbd0..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/useradd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1991 - 1994, Julianne Frances Haugh
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.TH USERADD 8
-.SH NAME
-useradd \- Create a new user or update default new user information
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP 8
-\fBuseradd\fR [\fB-c\fR \fIcomment\fR] [\fB-d\fR \fIhome_dir\fR]
-.br
-[\fB-e\fR \fIexpire_date\fR] [\fB-f\fR \fIinactive_time\fR]
-.br
-[\fB-g\fR \fIinitial_group\fR] [\fB-G\fR \fIgroup\fR[,...]]
-.br
-[\fB-m\fR [\fB-k\fR \fIskeleton_dir\fR] | \fB-M\fR] [\fB-n\fR] [\fB-o\fR] [\fB-p\fR \fIpasswd\fR] [\fB-r\fP]
-.br
-[\fB-s\fR \fIshell\fR] [\fB-u\fR \fIuid\fR] \fIlogin\fR
-.TP 8
-\fBuseradd\fR \fB-D\fR [\fB-g\fI default_group\fR] [\fB-b\fI default_home\fR]
-.br
-[\fB-e\fI default_expire_date\fR] [\fB-f\fI default_inactive\fR]
-.br
-[\fB-s\fI default_shell\fR]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.SS Creating New Users
-When invoked without the \fB-D\fR option, the \fBuseradd\fR command
-creates a new user account using the values specified on the
-command line and the default values from the system.
-The new user account will be entered into the system files as needed,
-the home directory will be created, and initial files copied, depending
-on the command line options.
-The version provided with Red Hat Linux will create a group for each
-user added to the system, unless the \fB-n\fR option is given.
-The options which apply to the \fBuseradd\fR command are:
-.IP "\fB-c \fIcomment\fR"
-The new user's password file comment field.
-.IP "\fB-d \fIhome_dir\fR"
-The new user will be created using \fIhome_dir\fR as the value for
-the user's login directory.
-The default is to append the \fIlogin\fR name to \fIdefault_home\fR
-and use that as the login directory name.
-.IP "\fB-e \fIexpire_date\fR"
-The date on which the user account will be disabled.
-The date is specified in the format \fIYYYY-MM-DD\fR.
-.IP "\fB-f \fIinactive_days\fR"
-The number of days after a password expires until the account
-is permanently disabled.
-A value of 0 disables the account as soon as the password has
-expired, and a value of -1 disables the feature.
-The default value is -1.
-.IP "\fB-g \fIinitial_group\fR"
-The group name or number of the user's initial login group.
-The group name must exist. A group number must refer to an
-already existing group.
-The default group number is 1 or whatever is specified in
-\fI/etc/default/useradd\fR.
-.IP "\fB-G \fIgroup,[...]\fR"
-A list of supplementary groups which the user is also a member
-of.
-Each group is separated from the next by a comma, with no
-intervening whitespace.
-The groups are subject to the same restrictions as the group
-given with the \fB-g\fR option.
-The default is for the user to belong only to the initial group.
-.IP \fB-m\fR
-The user's home directory will be created if it does not exist.
-The files contained in \fIskeleton_dir\fR will be copied to the
-home directory if the \fB-k\fR option is used, otherwise the
-files contained in \fI/etc/skel\fR will be used instead.
-Any directories contained in \fIskeleton_dir\fR or \fI/etc/skel\fR
-will be created in the user's home directory as well.
-The \fB-k\fR option is only valid in conjunction with the \fB-m\fR
-option.
-The default is to not create the directory and to not copy any
-files.
-.IP \fB-M\fR
-The user home directory will not be created, even if the system
-wide settings from \fI/etc/login.defs\fR is to create home dirs.
-.IP \fB-n\fR
-A group having the same name as the user being added to the system
-will be created by default. This option will turn off this Red Hat
-Linux specific behavior.
-.IP "\fB-o\fR"
-Allow create user with duplicate (non-unique) UID.
-.IP "\fB-p \fIpasswd\fR"
-The encrypted password, as returned by \fBcrypt\fR(3).
-The default is to disable the account.
-.IP \fB-r\fR
-This flag is used to create a system account. That is, a user with a
-UID lower than the value of UID_MIN defined in \fI/etc/login.defs\fR and
-whose password does not expire. Note
-that \fBuseradd\fR will not create a home directory for such an user,
-regardless of the default setting in \fI/etc/login.defs\fR.
-You have to specify \fB-m\fR option if you want a home directory
-for a system account to be created.
-This is an option added by Red Hat.
-.IP "\fB-s \fIshell\fR"
-The name of the user's login shell.
-The default is to leave this field blank, which causes the system
-to select the default login shell.
-.IP "\fB-u \fIuid\fR"
-The numerical value of the user's ID.
-This value must be unique, unless the \fI-o\fR option is used.
-The value must be non-negative.
-The default is to use the smallest ID value greater than 99 and
-greater than every other user.
-Values between 0 and 99 are typically reserved for system accounts.
-.SS Changing the default values
-When invoked with the \fB-D\fR option, \fBuseradd\fR will either
-display the current default values, or update the default values
-from the command line.
-The valid options are
-.IP "\fB-b \fIdefault_home\fR"
-The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory.
-The user's name will be affixed to the end of \fIdefault_home\fR
-to create the new directory name if the \fB-d\fI option is not
-used when creating a new account.
-.IP "\fB-e \fIdefault_expire_date\fR"
-The date on which the user account is disabled.
-.IP "\fB-f \fIdefault_inactive\fR"
-The number of days after a password has expired before the
-account will be disabled.
-.IP "\fB-g \fIdefault_group\fR"
-The group name or ID for a new user's initial group.
-The named group must exist, and a numerical group ID must have
-an existing entry .
-.IP "\fB-s \fIdefault_shell\fR"
-The name of the new user's login shell.
-The named program will be used for all future new user accounts.
-.PP
-If no options are specified, \fBuseradd\fR displays the current
-default values.
-.SH NOTES
-The system administrator is responsible for placing the default
-user files in the \fI/etc/skel\fR directory.
-.br
-This version of useradd was modified by Red Hat to suit Red Hat
-user/group conventions.
-.SH CAVEATS
-You may not add a user to an NIS group.
-This must be performed on the NIS server.
-.SH FILES
-\fB/etc/passwd\fR \- user account information
-.br
-\fB/etc/shadow\fR \- secure user account information
-.br
-\fB/etc/group\fR \- group information
-.br
-\fB/etc/gshadow\fR \- secure group information
-.br
-\fB/etc/default/useradd\fR \- default information
-.br
-\fB/etc/login.defs\fR \- system-wide settings
-.br
-\fB/etc/skel\fR \- directory containing default files
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chfn (1),
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR crypt (3),
-.BR groupadd (8),
-.BR groupdel (8),
-.BR groupmod (8),
-.BR userdel (8),
-.BR usermod (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julianne Frances Haugh (jockgrrl at ix.netcom.com)
diff --git a/raw/man8/userdel.8 b/raw/man8/userdel.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 6c3b75f..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/userdel.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1991 - 1994, Julianne Frances Haugh
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.TH USERDEL 8
-.SH NAME
-userdel \- Delete a user account and related files
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B userdel
-[\fB-r\fR]
-.I login
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBuserdel\fR command modifies the system account files, deleting
-all entries that refer to \fIlogin\fR.
-The named user must exist.
-The options which apply to the \fBuserdel\fR command are:
-.IP \fB-r\fR
-Files in the user's home directory will be removed along with the
-home directory itself and the user's mail spool.
-Files located in other file systems will have to be searched for
-and deleted manually.
-.SH FILES
-/etc/passwd \- user account information
-.br
-/etc/shadow \- secure user account information
-.br
-/etc/group \- group information
-.SH CAVEATS
-\fBuserdel\fR will not allow you to remove an account if the user
-is currently logged in.
-You must kill any running processes which belong to an account that
-you are deleting.
-You may not remove any NIS attributes on an NIS client.
-This must be performed on the NIS server.
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chfn (1),
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR groupadd (8),
-.BR groupdel (8),
-.BR groupmod (8),
-.BR useradd (8),
-.BR usermod (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julianne Frances Haugh (jockgrrl at ix.netcom.com)
diff --git a/raw/man8/usermod.8 b/raw/man8/usermod.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 16a9342..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/usermod.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
-.\" Copyright 1991 - 1994, Julianne Frances Haugh
-.\" All rights reserved.
-.\"
-.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
-.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
-.\" are met:
-.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
-.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
-.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
-.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
-.\" 3. Neither the name of Julianne F. Haugh nor the names of its contributors
-.\" may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
-.\" without specific prior written permission.
-.\"
-.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY JULIE HAUGH AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
-.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
-.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
-.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL JULIE HAUGH OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
-.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
-.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
-.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
-.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
-.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
-.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
-.\" SUCH DAMAGE.
-.TH USERMOD 8
-.SH NAME
-usermod \- Modify a user account
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP 8
-\fBusermod\fR [\fB-c\fR \fIcomment\fR] [\fB-d\fR \fIhome_dir\fR [\fB-m\fR]]
-.br
-[\fB-e\fR \fIexpire_date\fR] [\fB-f\fR \fIinactive_time\fR]
-.br
-[\fB-g\fR \fIinitial_group\fR] [\fB-G\fR \fIgroup\fR [,...]]
-.br
-[\fB-l\fR \fIlogin_name\fR] [\fB-p\fR \fIpasswd\fR]
-.br
-[\fB-s\fR \fIshell\fR] [\fB-u\fR \fIuid\fR [\fB-o\fR]] [\fB-L\fR|\fB-U\fR]
-\fIlogin\fR
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The \fBusermod\fR command modifies the system account files to reflect
-the changes that are specified on the command line.
-The options which apply to the \fBusermod\fR command are:
-.IP "\fB-c \fIcomment\fR"
-The new value of the user's password file comment field.
-It is normally modified using the \fBchfn\fR(1) utility.
-.IP "\fB-d \fIhome_dir\fR"
-The user's new login directory.
-If the \fB-m\fR option is given the contents of the current home directory
-will be moved to the new home directory, which is created if it does not
-already exist.
-.IP "\fB-e \fIexpire_date\fR"
-The date on which the user account will be disabled.
-The date is specified in the format \fIYYYY-MM-DD\fR.
-.IP "\fB-f \fIinactive_days\fR"
-The number of days after a password expires until the account
-is permanently disabled.
-A value of 0 disables the account as soon as the password has
-expired, and a value of -1 disables the feature.
-The default value is -1.
-.IP "\fB-g \fIinitial_group\fR"
-The group name or number of the user's new initial login group.
-The group name must exist. A group number must refer to an
-already existing group.
-The default group number is 1.
-.IP "\fB-G \fIgroup,[...]\fR"
-A list of supplementary groups which the user is also a member
-of.
-Each group is separated from the next by a comma, with no
-intervening whitespace.
-The groups are subject to the same restrictions as the group
-given with the \fB-g\fR option.
-If the user is currently a member of a group which is not listed,
-the user will be removed from the group
-.IP "\fB-l \fIlogin_name\fR"
-The name of the user will be changed from \fIlogin\fR to
-\fIlogin_name\fR.
-Nothing else is changed.
-In particular, the user's home directory name should probably
-be changed to reflect the new login name.
-.IP "\fB-p \fIpasswd\fR"
-The encrypted password, as returned by \fBcrypt\fR(3).
-.IP "\fB-s \fIshell\fR"
-The name of the user's new login shell.
-Setting this field to blank causes the system
-to select the default login shell.
-.IP "\fB-u \fIuid\fR"
-The numerical value of the user's ID.
-This value must be unique, unless the \fI-o\fR option is used.
-The value must be non-negative.
-Values between 0 and 99 are typically reserved for system accounts.
-Any files which the user owns and which are located in the directory
-tree rooted at the user's home directory will have the file user ID
-changed automatically.
-Files outside of the user's home directory must be altered manually.
-.IP "\fB-L\fR"
-Lock a user's password.
-This puts a '!' in front of the encrypted password, effectively disabling
-the password. You can't use this option with \fI-p\fR or \fI-U\fR.
-.IP "\fB-U\fR"
-Unlock a user's password.
-This removes the '!' in front of the encrypted password.
-You can't use this option with \fI-p\fR or \fI-L\fR.
-.SH CAVEATS
-\fBusermod\fR will not allow you to change the name of a user who is
-logged in.
-You must make certain that the named user is not executing any processes
-when this command is being executed if the user's numerical user ID is
-being changed.
-You must change the owner of any crontab files manually.
-You must change the owner of any at jobs manually.
-You must make any changes involving NIS on the NIS server.
-.SH FILES
-/etc/passwd \- user account information
-.br
-/etc/shadow \- secure user account information
-.br
-/etc/group \- group information
-.SH SEE ALSO
-.BR chfn (1),
-.BR chsh (1),
-.BR passwd (1),
-.BR crypt (3),
-.BR groupadd (8),
-.BR groupdel (8),
-.BR groupmod (8),
-.BR useradd (8),
-.BR userdel (8)
-.SH AUTHOR
-Julianne Frances Haugh (jockgrrl at ix.netcom.com)
diff --git a/raw/man8/vidmode.8 b/raw/man8/vidmode.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 901bd75..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/vidmode.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1 +0,0 @@
-.so man8/rdev.8
diff --git a/raw/man8/vmstat.8 b/raw/man8/vmstat.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c3df5c..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/vmstat.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,169 +0,0 @@
-.\" vmstat.8 - manpage for the vmstat(8) utility, part of procps
-.\"
-.\" Copyright (C) 2003 Robert Love
-.\" Licensed under the terms of the GNU General Public License, v2
-.TH VMSTAT 8 "02 Jun 2003" "Linux" "Linux User's Manual"
-.SH NAME
-vmstat \- display virtual memory statistics
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.BI "vmstat [flags]
-.RI [ delay " [" count ]]
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-The
-.BR vmstat (8)
-utility reports statistical information about process status, memory
-consumption, paging activity, block I/O operations, interrupts, context
-switches, and processor usage.
-
-The
-.BR vmstat (8)
-utility is most commonly used to produce a continuous report every
-.IR delay
-seconds. In this mode, the first report given is the average of the statistics
-since system boot. Each subsequent line pertains to that sampling period (that
-is, the last
-.IR delay
-seconds). If no
-.IR delay
-value is given, only one report is given, which is the average since system
-boot.
-
-The optional
-.IR count
-value specifies a maximum number of reports to print before terminating. By
-default (that is, when no
-.IR count
-value is given)
-.BR vmstat (8)
-will continue to print reports every
-.IR delay
-seconds until interrupted.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-Normal invocation of
-.BR vmstat (8)
-does not require any options. The output, however, can be fine-tuned by
-specifying one or more of the following flags:
-.TP
-.B \-\-active, \-a
-Display active and inactive memory statistics in lieu of the buffer and cache
-statistics.
-.TP
-.B \-\-noheaders, \-n
-Do not regularly update the header describing each column. Normally, the header
-is periodically reprinted to ensure it is always viewable.
-.TP
-.B \-\-bytes, \-b
-Display the statistics in bytes.
-.TP
-.B \-\-kb, \-kb
-Display the statistics in kilobytes. This is the default.
-.TP
-.B \-\-mb, \-m
-Display the statistics in megabytes.
-.TP
-.B \-\-gb, -g
-Display the statistics in gigabytes. Note that the translation silently rounds
-down any underflow and displays the result as an integer. This means that the
-translation is efficient and simple, but that a large unit (i.e., MB or GB)
-with small statistics will display zero and not a decimal fraction.
-.TP
-.B \-\-version, \-V
-Display version information and then exit.
-.TP
-.B \--help
-Display usage information and then exit.
-
-.SH FIELDS
-.SS
-.B "procs"
-.nf
-r: The number of runnable processes (that is, processes running or
- waiting to run).
-b: The number of processes in uninterruptible sleep.
-.fi
-.PP
-.SS
-.B "memory"
-.nf
-swpd : the amount of memory paged to disk (in KB by default)
-free : the amount of free physical memory (in KB by default)
-buff : the amount of memory consumed by buffers (in KB by default)
-inact : the amount of memory on the inactive list (in KB by default)
-active: the amount of memory on the active list (in KB by default)
-.fi
-.PP
-.SS
-.B "swap"
-.nf
-si: the amount of memory paged in from disk (in KB/s by default)
-so: the amount of memory paged out to disk (in KB/s by default)
-.fi
-.PP
-.SS
-.B "io"
-.nf
-bi: blocks sent out to a block device (in blocks/s)
-bo: blocks received from a block device (in blocks/s)
-.fi
-.PP
-.SS
-.B "system"
-.nf
-in: the number of interrupts received (in interrupts/s)
-cs: the number of context switches (in switches/s)
-.fi
-.PP
-.SS
-.B "cpu"
-.nf
-us: percentage of total processor time consumed by user-space
-sy: percentage of total processor time consumed by the kernel
-wa: percentage of total processor time spent in I/O wait
-id: percentage of total processor time spent idle
-.fi
-
-.SH NOTES
-
-The current implementation of
-.BR vmstat (8)
-does not display the traditional "w" field under "procs". This is because
-Linux is a demand paging operating system and does not support the notion of
-swapping out entire processes. Thus this statistic is worthless. Older
-versions of
-.BR vmstat (8)
-just displayed a hardcoded zero for this value. Even older versions
-calculated the field based on the number of RSS pages the process owns.
-Although this is a close analogy to the concept of "swapped out", it is still a
-misleading statistic as the Linux kernel has not explicitly decided to swap to
-disk the entire process.
-
-This version of
-.BR vmstat(8)
-displays I/O wait statistics as "wa" under the "cpu" section. This field is
-not part of traditional
-.BR vmstat (8)
-implementations, but Linux kernels since 2.5 have exported this (very useful)
-information. Earlier kernels will simply display zero for this field.
-
-.SH FILES
-.IR /proc/meminfo " \-\- memory information"
-.TP
-.IR /proc/stat " \-\- system statistics"
-.TP
-.IR /proc/[1-9]*/stat " \-\- process statistics"
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.BR ps (1),
-.BR top (1),
-.BR free (1)
-
-.SH AUTHORS
-Written by Robert Love.
-
-The procps package is maintained by Robert Love and was created by Michael
-Johnson.
-
-Send bug reports to <procps-list at redhat.com>.
diff --git a/raw/man8/xinetd.8 b/raw/man8/xinetd.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c5eb9d..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/xinetd.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-.\"(c) Copyright 1992 by Panagiotis Tsirigotis
-.\"(c) Sections Copyright 1998-2001 by Rob Braun
-.\"All rights reserved. The file named COPYRIGHT specifies the terms
-.\"and conditions for redistribution.
-.\"
-.TH XINETD 8 "14 June 2001"
-.\" *************************** NAME *********************************
-.SH NAME
-xinetd \- the extended Internet services daemon
-.\" *************************** SYNOPSIS *********************************
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B xinetd
-[\fIoptions\fP]
-.\" *************************** DESCRIPTION *********************************
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-\fBxinetd\fP performs the same function as \fBinetd\fP: it starts
-programs that provide Internet services. Instead of having such
-servers started at system initialization time, and be dormant until a
-connection request arrives, \fBxinetd\fP is the only daemon process
-started and it listens on all service ports for the services listed in
-its configuration file. When a request comes in, \fBxinetd\fP starts
-the appropriate server. Because of the way it operates, \fBxinetd\fP
-(as well as \fBinetd\fP) is also referred to as a super-server.
-.LP
-The services listed in \fBxinetd\fP's configuration file can be
-separated into two groups. Services in the first group are called
-.I "multi-threaded"
-and they require the forking of a new server process for each new
-connection request. The new server then handles that connection. For
-such services, \fBxinetd\fP keeps listening for new requests so that it
-can spawn new servers. On the other hand, the second group includes
-services for which the service daemon is responsible for handling all
-new connection requests. Such services are called
-.I "single-threaded"
-and \fBxinetd\fP will stop handling new requests for them until the
-server dies. Services in this group are usually datagram-based.
-.LP
-So far, the only reason for the existence of a super-server was to
-conserve system resources by avoiding to fork a lot of processes which
-might be dormant for most of their lifetime. While fulfilling this
-function, \fBxinetd\fP takes advantage of the idea of a super-server to
-provide features such as access control and logging. Furthermore,
-\fBxinetd\fP is not limited to services listed in
-.I /etc/services.
-Therefore, anybody can use \fBxinetd\fP to start special-purpose
-servers.
-.\" *************************** OPTIONS *********************************
-.SH OPTIONS
-.TP
-.BR \-d
-Enables debug mode. This produces a lot of debugging output, and it
-makes it possible to use a debugger on \fBxinetd\fP.
-.TP
-.BI \-syslog " syslog_facility"
-This option enables syslog logging of \fBxinetd\fP-produced messages
-using the specified syslog facility.
-The following facility names are supported:
-.I daemon,
-.I auth,
-.I user,
-.I "local[0-7]"
-(check \fIsyslog.conf(5)\fP for their meanings).
-This option is ineffective in debug mode since all relevant messages are sent
-to the terminal.
-.TP
-.BI \-filelog " logfile"
-\fBxinetd\fP-produced messages will be placed in the specified file.
-Messages are always appended to the file.
-If the file does not exist, it will be created.
-This option is ineffective in debug mode since all relevant messages are sent
-to the terminal.
-.TP
-.BI \-f " config_file"
-Determines the file that \fBxinetd\fP uses for configuration. The
-default is \fI/etc/xinetd.conf\fP.
-.TP
-.BR \-pidfile " pid_file"
-.br
-The process ID is written to the file. This option is ineffective in debug mode.
-.TP
-.BI \-dontfork
-Tells xinetd to stay in the foreground rather than detaching itself, to
-support being run from init or daemontools. This option automatically sets
-.B \-stayalive
-(see below).
-.TP
-.BI \-stayalive
-Tells xinetd to stay running even if no services are specified.
-.TP
-.BI \-limit " proc_limit"
-This option places a limit on the number of concurrently running processes
-that can be started by
-.B xinetd.
-Its purpose is to prevent process table overflows.
-.TP
-.BI \-logprocs " limit"
-This option places a limit on the number of concurrently running servers
-for remote userid acquisition.
-.TP
-.BI \-version
-This option causes xinetd to print out its version information.
-.TP
-.BI \-inetd_compat
-This option causes xinetd to read /etc/inetd.conf in addition to the
-standard xinetd config files. /etc/inetd.conf is read after the
-standard xinetd config files.
-.TP
-.BI \-cc " interval"
-This option instructs
-.B xinetd
-to perform periodic consistency checks on its internal state every
-.I interval
-seconds.
-.LP
-The \fIsyslog\fP and \fIfilelog\fP options are mutually exclusive.
-If none is specified, the default is syslog using the
-.I daemon
-facility.
-You should not confuse \fBxinetd\fP messages with messages related to
-service logging. The latter are logged only if this is specified
-via the configuration file.
-.\" *********************** CONTROLLING XINETD ****************************
-.SH "CONTROLLING XINETD"
-.LP
-\fBxinetd\fP performs certain actions when it receives certain signals.
-The actions associated with the specific signals can be redefined
-by editing \fIconfig.h\fP and recompiling.
-.TP 15
-.B SIGHUP
-causes a hard reconfiguration, which means that \fBxinetd\fP re-reads
-the configuration file and terminates the servers for services that
-are no longer available. Access control is performed again on
-running servers by checking the remote location, access times and
-server instances. If the number of server instances is lowered, some
-arbitrarily picked servers will be killed to satisfy the limit; this
-will happen \fIafter\fP any servers are terminated because of failing
-the remote location or access time checks.
-Also, if the
-.B INTERCEPT
-flag was clear and is set, any running servers for that service will
-be terminated;
-\fIthe purpose of this is to ensure that after a hard reconfiguration
-there will be no running servers that can accept packets from addresses
-that do not meet the access control criteria\fP.
-.TP
-.B SIGQUIT
-causes program termination.
-.TP
-.B SIGTERM
-terminates all running servers before terminating \fBxinetd\fP.
-.TP
-.B SIGUSR1
-causes an internal state dump (the default dump file is
-\fI/var/run/xinetd.dump\fP;
-to change the filename, edit \fIconfig.h\fP and recompile).
-.TP
-.B SIGIOT
-causes an internal consistency check to verify that the data structures
-used by the program have not been corrupted.
-When the check is completed
-.B xinetd
-will generate a message that says if the check was successful or not.
-.LP
-On reconfiguration the log files are closed and reopened. This allows
-removal of old log files.
-.\" *********************** FILES ****************************
-.SH FILES
-.LP
-.PD .1v
-.TP 20
-.B /etc/xinetd.conf
-default configuration file
-.TP
-.B /var/run/xinetd.dump
-default dump file
-.PD
-.\" *********************** SEE ALSO ****************************
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-.I "inetd(8),"
-.LP
-.I "xinetd.conf(5),"
-.LP
-.I "xinetd.log(5)"
-.LP
-.I "http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html"
-.\" *********************** AUTHOR ****************************
-.SH AUTHOR
-Panos Tsirigotis, CS Dept, University of Colorado, Boulder
-Rob Braun
-.\" *********************** PRONUNCIATION ****************************
-.SH PRONUNCIATION
-zy-net-d
-
diff --git a/raw/man8/zdump.8 b/raw/man8/zdump.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 7cc30e2..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/zdump.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-.TH ZDUMP 8
-.SH NAME
-zdump \- time zone dumper
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B zdump
-[
-.B \-v
-] [
-.B \-c
-cutoffyear ] [ zonename ... ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.I Zdump
-prints the current time in each
-.I zonename
-named on the command line.
-.PP
-These options are available:
-.TP
-.B \-v
-For each
-.I zonename
-on the command line,
-print the time at the lowest possible time value,
-the time one day after the lowest possible time value,
-the times both one second before and exactly at
-each detected time discontinuity,
-the time at one day less than the highest possible time value,
-and the time at the highest possible time value.
-Each line ends with
-.B isdst=1
-if the given time is Daylight Saving Time or
-.B isdst=0
-otherwise.
-.TP
-.BI "\-c " cutoffyear
-Cut off the verbose output near the start of the given year.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-newctime(3), tzfile(5), zic(8)
-.\" @(#)zdump.8 7.3
diff --git a/raw/man8/zic.8 b/raw/man8/zic.8
deleted file mode 100644
index 2da0eea..0000000
--- a/raw/man8/zic.8
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,414 +0,0 @@
-.TH ZIC 8
-.SH NAME
-zic \- time zone compiler
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.B zic
-[
-.B \-v
-] [
-.B \-d
-.I directory
-] [
-.B \-l
-.I localtime
-] [
-.B \-p
-.I posixrules
-] [
-.B \-L
-.I leapsecondfilename
-] [
-.B \-s
-] [
-.B \-y
-.I command
-] [
-.I filename
-\&... ]
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.if t .ds lq ``
-.if t .ds rq ''
-.if n .ds lq \&"\"
-.if n .ds rq \&"\"
-.de q
-\\$3\*(lq\\$1\*(rq\\$2
-..
-.I Zic
-reads text from the file(s) named on the command line
-and creates the time conversion information files specified in this input.
-If a
-.I filename
-is
-.BR \- ,
-the standard input is read.
-.PP
-These options are available:
-.TP
-.BI "\-d " directory
-Create time conversion information files in the named directory rather than
-in the standard directory named below.
-.TP
-.BI "\-l " timezone
-Use the given time zone as local time.
-.I Zic
-will act as if the input contained a link line of the form
-.sp
-.ti +.5i
-Link \fItimezone\fP localtime
-.TP
-.BI "\-p " timezone
-Use the given time zone's rules when handling POSIX-format
-time zone environment variables.
-.I Zic
-will act as if the input contained a link line of the form
-.sp
-.ti +.5i
-Link \fItimezone\fP posixrules
-.TP
-.BI "\-L " leapsecondfilename
-Read leap second information from the file with the given name.
-If this option is not used,
-no leap second information appears in output files.
-.TP
-.B \-v
-Complain if a year that appears in a data file is outside the range
-of years representable by
-.IR time (2)
-values.
-.TP
-.B \-s
-Limit time values stored in output files to values that are the same
-whether they're taken to be signed or unsigned.
-You can use this option to generate SVVS-compatible files.
-.TP
-.BI "\-y " command
-Use the given
-.I command
-rather than
-.B yearistype
-when checking year types (see below).
-.PP
-Input lines are made up of fields.
-Fields are separated from one another by any number of white space characters.
-Leading and trailing white space on input lines is ignored.
-An unquoted sharp character (#) in the input introduces a comment which extends
-to the end of the line the sharp character appears on.
-White space characters and sharp characters may be enclosed in double quotes
-(") if they're to be used as part of a field.
-Any line that is blank (after comment stripping) is ignored.
-Non-blank lines are expected to be of one of three types:
-rule lines, zone lines, and link lines.
-.PP
-A rule line has the form
-.nf
-.ti +.5i
-.ta \w'Rule\0\0'u +\w'NAME\0\0'u +\w'FROM\0\0'u +\w'1973\0\0'u +\w'TYPE\0\0'u +\w'Apr\0\0'u +\w'lastSun\0\0'u +\w'2:00\0\0'u +\w'SAVE\0\0'u
-.sp
-Rule NAME FROM TO TYPE IN ON AT SAVE LETTER/S
-.sp
-For example:
-.ti +.5i
-.sp
-Rule US 1967 1973 \- Apr lastSun 2:00 1:00 D
-.sp
-.fi
-The fields that make up a rule line are:
-.TP "\w'LETTER/S'u"
-.B NAME
-Gives the (arbitrary) name of the set of rules this rule is part of.
-.TP
-.B FROM
-Gives the first year in which the rule applies.
-Any integer year can be supplied; the Gregorian calendar is assumed.
-The word
-.B minimum
-(or an abbreviation) means the minimum year representable as an integer.
-The word
-.B maximum
-(or an abbreviation) means the maximum year representable as an integer.
-Rules can describe times that are not representable as time values,
-with the unrepresentable times ignored; this allows rules to be portable
-among hosts with differing time value types.
-.TP
-.B TO
-Gives the final year in which the rule applies.
-In addition to
-.B minimum
-and
-.B maximum
-(as above),
-the word
-.B only
-(or an abbreviation)
-may be used to repeat the value of the
-.B FROM
-field.
-.TP
-.B TYPE
-Gives the type of year in which the rule applies.
-If
-.B TYPE
-is
-.B \-
-then the rule applies in all years between
-.B FROM
-and
-.B TO
-inclusive.
-If
-.B TYPE
-is something else, then
-.I zic
-executes the command
-.ti +.5i
-\fByearistype\fP \fIyear\fP \fItype\fP
-.br
-to check the type of a year:
-an exit status of zero is taken to mean that the year is of the given type;
-an exit status of one is taken to mean that the year is not of the given type.
-.TP
-.B IN
-Names the month in which the rule takes effect.
-Month names may be abbreviated.
-.TP
-.B ON
-Gives the day on which the rule takes effect.
-Recognized forms include:
-.nf
-.in +.5i
-.sp
-.ta \w'Sun<=25\0\0'u
-5 the fifth of the month
-lastSun the last Sunday in the month
-lastMon the last Monday in the month
-Sun>=8 first Sunday on or after the eighth
-Sun<=25 last Sunday on or before the 25th
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-.sp
-Names of days of the week may be abbreviated or spelled out in full.
-Note that there must be no spaces within the
-.B ON
-field.
-.TP
-.B AT
-Gives the time of day at which the rule takes effect.
-Recognized forms include:
-.nf
-.in +.5i
-.sp
-.ta \w'1:28:13\0\0'u
-2 time in hours
-2:00 time in hours and minutes
-15:00 24-hour format time (for times after noon)
-1:28:14 time in hours, minutes, and seconds
-\- equivalent to 0
-.fi
-.in -.5i
-.sp
-where hour 0 is midnight at the start of the day,
-and hour 24 is midnight at the end of the day.
-Any of these forms may be followed by the letter
-.B w
-if the given time is local
-.q "wall clock"
-time,
-.B s
-if the given time is local
-.q standard
-time, or
-.B u
-(or
-.B g
-or
-.BR z )
-if the given time is universal time;
-in the absence of an indicator,
-wall clock time is assumed.
-.TP
-.B SAVE
-Gives the amount of time to be added to local standard time when the rule is in
-effect.
-This field has the same format as the
-.B AT
-field
-(although, of course, the
-.B w
-and
-.B s
-suffixes are not used).
-.TP
-.B LETTER/S
-Gives the
-.q "variable part"
-(for example, the
-.q S
-or
-.q D
-in
-.q EST
-or
-.q EDT )
-of time zone abbreviations to be used when this rule is in effect.
-If this field is
-.BR \- ,
-the variable part is null.
-.PP
-A zone line has the form
-.sp
-.nf
-.ti +.5i
-.ta \w'Zone\0\0'u +\w'Australia/Adelaide\0\0'u +\w'GMTOFF\0\0'u +\w'RULES/SAVE\0\0'u +\w'FORMAT\0\0'u
-Zone NAME GMTOFF RULES/SAVE FORMAT [UNTIL]
-.sp
-For example:
-.sp
-.ti +.5i
-Zone Australia/Adelaide 9:30 Aus CST 1971 Oct 31 2:00
-.sp
-.fi
-The fields that make up a zone line are:
-.TP "\w'GMTOFF'u"
-.B NAME
-The name of the time zone.
-This is the name used in creating the time conversion information file for the
-zone.
-.TP
-.B GMTOFF
-The amount of time to add to UTC to get standard time in this zone.
-This field has the same format as the
-.B AT
-and
-.B SAVE
-fields of rule lines;
-begin the field with a minus sign if time must be subtracted from UTC.
-.TP
-.B RULES/SAVE
-The name of the rule(s) that apply in the time zone or,
-alternately, an amount of time to add to local standard time.
-If this field is
-.B \-
-then standard time always applies in the time zone.
-.TP
-.B FORMAT
-The format for time zone abbreviations in this time zone.
-The pair of characters
-.B %s
-is used to show where the
-.q "variable part"
-of the time zone abbreviation goes.
-Alternately,
-a slash (/)
-separates standard and daylight abbreviations.
-.TP
-.B UNTIL
-The time at which the UTC offset or the rule(s) change for a location.
-It is specified as a year, a month, a day, and a time of day.
-If this is specified,
-the time zone information is generated from the given UTC offset
-and rule change until the time specified.
-The month, day, and time of day have the same format as the IN, ON, and AT
-columns of a rule; trailing columns can be omitted, and default to the
-earliest possible value for the missing columns.
-.IP
-The next line must be a
-.q continuation
-line; this has the same form as a zone line except that the
-string
-.q Zone
-and the name are omitted, as the continuation line will
-place information starting at the time specified as the
-.B UNTIL
-field in the previous line in the file used by the previous line.
-Continuation lines may contain an
-.B UNTIL
-field, just as zone lines do, indicating that the next line is a further
-continuation.
-.PP
-A link line has the form
-.sp
-.nf
-.ti +.5i
-.ta \w'Link\0\0'u +\w'Europe/Istanbul\0\0'u
-Link LINK-FROM LINK-TO
-.sp
-For example:
-.sp
-.ti +.5i
-Link Europe/Istanbul Asia/Istanbul
-.sp
-.fi
-The
-.B LINK-FROM
-field should appear as the
-.B NAME
-field in some zone line;
-the
-.B LINK-TO
-field is used as an alternate name for that zone.
-.PP
-Except for continuation lines,
-lines may appear in any order in the input.
-.PP
-Lines in the file that describes leap seconds have the following form:
-.nf
-.ti +.5i
-.ta \w'Leap\0\0'u +\w'YEAR\0\0'u +\w'MONTH\0\0'u +\w'DAY\0\0'u +\w'HH:MM:SS\0\0'u +\w'CORR\0\0'u
-.sp
-Leap YEAR MONTH DAY HH:MM:SS CORR R/S
-.sp
-For example:
-.ti +.5i
-.sp
-Leap 1974 Dec 31 23:59:60 + S
-.sp
-.fi
-The
-.BR YEAR ,
-.BR MONTH ,
-.BR DAY ,
-and
-.B HH:MM:SS
-fields tell when the leap second happened.
-The
-.B CORR
-field
-should be
-.q +
-if a second was added
-or
-.q -
-if a second was skipped.
-.\" There's no need to document the following, since it's impossible for more
-.\" than one leap second to be inserted or deleted at a time.
-.\" The C Standard is in error in suggesting the possibility.
-.\" See Terry J Quinn, The BIPM and the accurate measure of time,
-.\" Proc IEEE 79, 7 (July 1991), 894-905.
-.\" or
-.\" .q ++
-.\" if two seconds were added
-.\" or
-.\" .q --
-.\" if two seconds were skipped.
-The
-.B R/S
-field
-should be (an abbreviation of)
-.q Stationary
-if the leap second time given by the other fields should be interpreted as UTC
-or
-(an abbreviation of)
-.q Rolling
-if the leap second time given by the other fields should be interpreted as
-local wall clock time.
-.SH NOTE
-For areas with more than two types of local time,
-you may need to use local standard time in the
-.B AT
-field of the earliest transition time's rule to ensure that
-the earliest transition time recorded in the compiled file is correct.
-.SH FILE
-/usr/local/etc/zoneinfo standard directory used for created files
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-newctime(3), tzfile(5), zdump(8)
-.\" @(#)zic.8 7.19
diff --git a/raw/manl/cbdsqr.l b/raw/manl/cbdsqr.l
deleted file mode 100644
index f3705f1..0000000
--- a/raw/manl/cbdsqr.l
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,136 +0,0 @@
-.TH CBDSQR l "15 June 2000" "LAPACK version 3.0" ")"
-.SH NAME
-CBDSQR - compute the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP 19
-SUBROUTINE CBDSQR(
-UPLO, N, NCVT, NRU, NCC, D, E, VT, LDVT, U,
-LDU, C, LDC, RWORK, INFO )
-.TP 19
-.ti +4
-CHARACTER
-UPLO
-.TP 19
-.ti +4
-INTEGER
-INFO, LDC, LDU, LDVT, N, NCC, NCVT, NRU
-.TP 19
-.ti +4
-REAL
-D( * ), E( * ), RWORK( * )
-.TP 19
-.ti +4
-COMPLEX
-C( LDC, * ), U( LDU, * ), VT( LDVT, * )
-.SH PURPOSE
-CBDSQR computes the singular value decomposition (SVD) of a real N-by-N (upper or lower) bidiagonal matrix B: B = Q * S * P' (P' denotes the transpose of P), where S is a diagonal matrix with
-non-negative diagonal elements (the singular values of B), and Q
-and P are orthogonal matrices.
-.br
-
-The routine computes S, and optionally computes U * Q, P' * VT,
-or Q' * C, for given complex input matrices U, VT, and C.
-
-See "Computing Small Singular Values of Bidiagonal Matrices With
-Guaranteed High Relative Accuracy," by J. Demmel and W. Kahan,
-LAPACK Working Note #3 (or SIAM J. Sci. Statist. Comput. vol. 11,
-no. 5, pp. 873-912, Sept 1990) and
-.br
-"Accurate singular values and differential qd algorithms," by
-B. Parlett and V. Fernando, Technical Report CPAM-554, Mathematics
-Department, University of California at Berkeley, July 1992
-for a detailed description of the algorithm.
-.br
-
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.TP 8
-UPLO (input) CHARACTER*1
-= 'U': B is upper bidiagonal;
-.br
-= 'L': B is lower bidiagonal.
-.TP 8
-N (input) INTEGER
-The order of the matrix B. N >= 0.
-.TP 8
-NCVT (input) INTEGER
-The number of columns of the matrix VT. NCVT >= 0.
-.TP 8
-NRU (input) INTEGER
-The number of rows of the matrix U. NRU >= 0.
-.TP 8
-NCC (input) INTEGER
-The number of columns of the matrix C. NCC >= 0.
-.TP 8
-D (input/output) REAL array, dimension (N)
-On entry, the n diagonal elements of the bidiagonal matrix B.
-On exit, if INFO=0, the singular values of B in decreasing
-order.
-.TP 8
-E (input/output) REAL array, dimension (N)
-On entry, the elements of E contain the
-offdiagonal elements of of the bidiagonal matrix whose SVD
-is desired. On normal exit (INFO = 0), E is destroyed.
-If the algorithm does not converge (INFO > 0), D and E
-will contain the diagonal and superdiagonal elements of a
-bidiagonal matrix orthogonally equivalent to the one given
-as input. E(N) is used for workspace.
-.TP 8
-VT (input/output) COMPLEX array, dimension (LDVT, NCVT)
-On entry, an N-by-NCVT matrix VT.
-On exit, VT is overwritten by P' * VT.
-VT is not referenced if NCVT = 0.
-.TP 8
-LDVT (input) INTEGER
-The leading dimension of the array VT.
-LDVT >= max(1,N) if NCVT > 0; LDVT >= 1 if NCVT = 0.
-.TP 8
-U (input/output) COMPLEX array, dimension (LDU, N)
-On entry, an NRU-by-N matrix U.
-On exit, U is overwritten by U * Q.
-U is not referenced if NRU = 0.
-.TP 8
-LDU (input) INTEGER
-The leading dimension of the array U. LDU >= max(1,NRU).
-.TP 8
-C (input/output) COMPLEX array, dimension (LDC, NCC)
-On entry, an N-by-NCC matrix C.
-On exit, C is overwritten by Q' * C.
-C is not referenced if NCC = 0.
-.TP 8
-LDC (input) INTEGER
-The leading dimension of the array C.
-LDC >= max(1,N) if NCC > 0; LDC >=1 if NCC = 0.
-.TP 8
-RWORK (workspace) REAL array, dimension (4*N)
-.TP 8
-INFO (output) INTEGER
-= 0: successful exit
-.br
-< 0: If INFO = -i, the i-th argument had an illegal value
-.br
-> 0: the algorithm did not converge; D and E contain the
-elements of a bidiagonal matrix which is orthogonally
-similar to the input matrix B; if INFO = i, i
-elements of E have not converged to zero.
-.SH PARAMETERS
-.TP 8
-TOLMUL REAL, default = max(10,min(100,EPS**(-1/8)))
-TOLMUL controls the convergence criterion of the QR loop.
-If it is positive, TOLMUL*EPS is the desired relative
-precision in the computed singular values.
-If it is negative, abs(TOLMUL*EPS*sigma_max) is the
-desired absolute accuracy in the computed singular
-values (corresponds to relative accuracy
-abs(TOLMUL*EPS) in the largest singular value.
-abs(TOLMUL) should be between 1 and 1/EPS, and preferably
-between 10 (for fast convergence) and .1/EPS
-(for there to be some accuracy in the results).
-Default is to lose at either one eighth or 2 of the
-available decimal digits in each computed singular value
-(whichever is smaller).
-.TP 8
-MAXITR INTEGER, default = 6
-MAXITR controls the maximum number of passes of the
-algorithm through its inner loop. The algorithms stops
-(and so fails to converge) if the number of passes
-through the inner loop exceeds MAXITR*N**2.
diff --git a/raw/manl/lapack.l b/raw/manl/lapack.l
deleted file mode 100644
index d47eb57..0000000
--- a/raw/manl/lapack.l
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-.TH LAPACK l "2 April 1993" "LAPACK Version 1.1" "LAPACK FORTRAN LIBRARY ROUTINES"
-
-.SH WHAT IS LAPACK?
-.in -0.3i
-LAPACK is a transportable library of Fortran 77 subroutines for
-solving the most common problems in numerical linear algebra: systems
-of linear equations, linear least squares problems, eigenvalue problems,
-and singular value problems. It has been designed to be efficient
-on a wide range of modern high-performance computers.
-
-LAPACK is intended to be the successor to LINPACK and EISPACK.
-It extends the functionality of these packages by including
-equilibration, iterative refinement, error bounds, and driver routines
-for linear systems, routines for computing and re-ordering the Schur
-factorization, and condition estimation routines for eigenvalue
-problems. LAPACK improves on the accuracy of the standard algorithms
-in EISPACK by including high accuracy algorithms for finding singular
-values and eigenvalues of bidiagonal and tridiagonal matrices
-respectively that arise in SVD and symmetric eigenvalue problems.
-The algorithms and software have been restructured to achieve high
-efficiency on vector processors, high-performance ``superscalar''
-workstations, and shared-memory multiprocessors.
-A comprehensive testing and timing suite is provided along with the
-LAPACK software.
-
-.SH HOW TO GET LAPACK
-.in -0.3i
-The entire LAPACK package is available via xnetlib and NAG, or specific
-routines can be obtained via netlib. To see a description of the
-contents of LAPACK, send email to netlib at ornl.gov and in the mail
-message type: send index from lapack.
-
-Xnetlib is an X-version of netlib recently developed at the University
-of Tennessee and Oak Ridge National Laboratory. Unlike netlib, which
-uses electronic mail to process requests for software and other text,
-xnetlib uses an X Window graphical user interface and a socket-based
-connection between the user's machine and the xnetlib server machine to
-process software requests. The complete contents of LAPACK is available
-in tar/compress format from xnetlib.
-
-To receive a copy of xnetlib send the message "send xnetlib.shar from
-xnetlib" to netlib at ornl.gov.
-
-When you receive the shar file, remove the mail header, save it to a
-file, type 'sh filename' and follow the instructions in the README
-file.
-
-Alternatively, the complete LAPACK package can be
-obtained from NAG on magnetic media for a handling charge.
-For further details contact NAG at one of the following addresses:
-
-.nf
-NAG Inc NAG Ltd NAG GmbH
-1400 Opus Place Wilkinson House Schleissheimerstrasse 5
-Suite 200 Jordan Hill Road W-8046 Garching bei Munchen
-Downers Grove, IL 60515-5702 Oxford OX2 8DR Germany
-USA England
-Tel: +1 708 971 2337 Tel: +44 865 511245 Tel: +49 89 3207395
-Fax: +1 708 971 2706 Fax: +44 865 310139 Fax: +49 89 3207396
-.fi
-
-LAPACK has been thoroughly tested, on many different
-types of computers. The LAPACK project supports the package in the
-sense that reports of errors or poor performance will gain immediate
-attention from the developers. Such reports, descriptions
-of interesting applications, and other comments should be sent by
-electronic mail to lapack at cs.utk.edu.
-
-.SH LAPACK USERS' GUIDE
-.in -0.3i
-The LAPACK Users' Guide is published by SIAM and was made available
-May, 1992. LAPACK Users' Guide gives an informal introduction to
-the design of the algorithms and software, summarizes the contents
-of the package, and describes the conventions used in the software
-and documentation, and includes complete specifications for calling
-the routines. The LAPACK Users' Guide can be purchased from:
-SIAM; 3600 University City Science Center; Philadelphia, PA 19104-2688;
-215-382-9800, FAX 215-386-7999. It will also be available from
-booksellers. The Guide costs $15.60 for SIAM members, and $19.50
-for non-members. Please specify order code OT31 when ordering.
-To order by email, send email to service at siam.org.
-
-A list of known problems, bugs, and compiler errors for LAPACK, as
-well as errata for the LAPACK Users' Guide and the LAPACK code itself, is
-maintained on netlib. For a copy of this report, send email to
-netlib at ornl.gov with a message of the form: send release_notes from
-lapack.
-
-.SH LAPACK WORKING NOTES
-.in -0.3i
-A number of working notes were written during the
-development of LAPACK and published as LAPACK Working Notes,
-initially by Argonne National Laboratory and later by the University
-of Tennessee. Many of these reports have subsequently appeared as
-journal articles. Most of these working notes are available in postscript
-form from netlib. To receive a list of available reports, send email to
-netlib at ornl.gov with a message of the form: send index from lapack/lawns.
-Otherwise, requests for copies of these working notes can be sent to
-the following address.
-
-LAPACK Project
-c/o J.J. Dongarra
-Computer Science Department
-University of Tennessee
-Knoxville, Tennessee 37996-1301
-USA
-Email: lapack at cs.utk.edu
-
-.SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
-.in -0.3i
-LAPACK has been funded in part by NSF, DOE, and DARPA, with
-developmental support from NAG Ltd., Cray Research, and many friends
-and colleagues around the world.
-
-
-Ed Anderson, Zhao-jun Bai, Chris Bischof, Jim Demmel, Jack Dongarra,
-Jeremy Du Croz, Anne Greenbaum, Sven Hammarling, Alan McKenney,
-Susan Ostrouchov, and Danny Sorensen
-
- ( l l l l )
- ( a -a a -a )
- 1/4 * ( p p -p -p )
- ( a -a -a a )
- ( c c -c -c )
- ( k -k -k k )
-
-
-.SH NAMING SCHEME
-.in -0.3i
-The name of each LAPACK routine is a coded specification of
-its function (within the very tight limits of standard Fortran 77
-6-character names).
-
-All driver and computational routines have names of the form XYYZZZ,
-where for some driver routines the 6th character is blank.
-
-The first letter, X, indicates the data type as follows:
-
- S REAL
- D DOUBLE PRECISION
- C COMPLEX
- Z COMPLEX*16 or DOUBLE COMPLEX
-
-The next two letters, YY, indicate the type of matrix (or of the most
-significant matrix). Most of these two-letter codes apply to both real
-and complex matrices; a few apply specifically to one or the other.
-
-The last three letters ZZZ indicate the computation performed.
-For example, SGEBRD is a single precision routine that performs a
-bidiagonal reduction (BRD) of a real general matrix.
diff --git a/raw/manl/zdrot.l b/raw/manl/zdrot.l
deleted file mode 100644
index 35a6882..0000000
--- a/raw/manl/zdrot.l
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,116 +0,0 @@
-.SH NAME
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP 18
-SUBROUTINE ZDROT(
-N, CX, INCX, CY, INCY, C, S )
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-INTEGER
-INCX, INCY, N
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-DOUBLE
-PRECISION C, S
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-COMPLEX*16
-CX( * ), CY( * )
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-INTEGER
-I, IX, IY
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-COMPLEX*16
-CTEMP
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IF(
-N.LE.0 )
-RETURN
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IF(
-INCX.EQ.1 .AND. INCY.EQ.1 )
-GO TO 20
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IX
-= 1
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IY
-= 1
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IF(
-INCX.LT.0 )
-IX = ( -N+1 )*INCX + 1
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IF(
-INCY.LT.0 )
-IY = ( -N+1 )*INCY + 1
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-DO
-10 I = 1, N
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-CTEMP
-= C*CX( IX ) + S*CY( IY )
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-CY(
-IY ) = C*CY( IY ) - S*CX( IX )
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-CX(
-IX ) = CTEMP
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IX
-= IX + INCX
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-IY
-= IY + INCY
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-10
-CONTINUE
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-RETURN
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-20
-CONTINUE
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-DO
-30 I = 1, N
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-CTEMP
-= C*CX( I ) + S*CY( I )
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-CY(
-I ) = C*CY( I ) - S*CX( I )
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-CX(
-I ) = CTEMP
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-30
-CONTINUE
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-RETURN
-.TP 18
-.ti +4
-END
-.SH PURPOSE
diff --git a/raw/manl/zdrscl.l b/raw/manl/zdrscl.l
deleted file mode 100644
index aa984c3..0000000
--- a/raw/manl/zdrscl.l
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
-.TH ZDRSCL l "15 June 2000" "LAPACK version 3.0" ")"
-.SH NAME
-ZDRSCL - multiplie an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.TP 19
-SUBROUTINE ZDRSCL(
-N, SA, SX, INCX )
-.TP 19
-.ti +4
-INTEGER
-INCX, N
-.TP 19
-.ti +4
-DOUBLE
-PRECISION SA
-.TP 19
-.ti +4
-COMPLEX*16
-SX( * )
-.SH PURPOSE
-ZDRSCL multiplies an n-element complex vector x by the real scalar 1/a. This is done without overflow or underflow as long as the final result x/a does not overflow or underflow.
-.br
-
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.TP 8
-N (input) INTEGER
-The number of components of the vector x.
-.TP 8
-SA (input) DOUBLE PRECISION
-The scalar a which is used to divide each component of x.
-SA must be >= 0, or the subroutine will divide by zero.
-.TP 8
-SX (input/output) COMPLEX*16 array, dimension
-(1+(N-1)*abs(INCX))
-The n-element vector x.
-.TP 8
-INCX (input) INTEGER
-The increment between successive values of the vector SX.
-> 0: SX(1) = X(1) and SX(1+(i-1)*INCX) = x(i), 1< i<= n
diff --git a/raw/mann/Http.n b/raw/mann/Http.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 6178e06..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/Http.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,758 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Ajuba Solutions.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH "Http" n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-Http \- Client-side implementation of the HTTP/1.0 protocol.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpackage require http ?2.4?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::config \fI?options?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::geturl \fIurl ?options?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::formatQuery \fIlist\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::reset \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::wait \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::status \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::size \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::code \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::ncode \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::data \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::error \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::cleanup \fItoken\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::register \fIproto port command\fR
-.sp
-\fB::http::unregister \fIproto\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBhttp\fR package provides the client side of the HTTP/1.0
-protocol. The package implements the GET, POST, and HEAD operations
-of HTTP/1.0. It allows configuration of a proxy host to get through
-firewalls. The package is compatible with the \fBSafesock\fR security
-policy, so it can be used by untrusted applets to do URL fetching from
-a restricted set of hosts. This package can be extened to support
-additional HTTP transport protocols, such as HTTPS, by providing
-a custom \fBsocket\fR command, via \fBhttp::register\fR.
-.PP
-The \fB::http::geturl\fR procedure does a HTTP transaction.
-Its \fIoptions \fR determine whether a GET, POST, or HEAD transaction
-is performed.
-The return value of \fB::http::geturl\fR is a token for the transaction.
-The value is also the name of an array in the ::http namespace
-that contains state information about the transaction. The elements
-of this array are described in the STATE ARRAY section.
-.PP
-If the \fB-command\fP option is specified, then
-the HTTP operation is done in the background.
-\fB::http::geturl\fR returns immediately after generating the
-HTTP request and the callback is invoked
-when the transaction completes. For this to work, the Tcl event loop
-must be active. In Tk applications this is always true. For pure-Tcl
-applications, the caller can use \fB::http::wait\fR after calling
-\fB::http::geturl\fR to start the event loop.
-.SH COMMANDS
-.TP
-\fB::http::config\fP ?\fIoptions\fR?
-The \fB::http::config\fR command is used to set and query the name of the
-proxy server and port, and the User-Agent name used in the HTTP
-requests. If no options are specified, then the current configuration
-is returned. If a single argument is specified, then it should be one
-of the flags described below. In this case the current value of
-that setting is returned. Otherwise, the options should be a set of
-flags and values that define the configuration:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-accept\fP \fImimetypes\fP
-The Accept header of the request. The default is */*, which means that
-all types of documents are accepted. Otherwise you can supply a
-comma separated list of mime type patterns that you are
-willing to receive. For example, "image/gif, image/jpeg, text/*".
-.TP
-\fB\-proxyhost\fP \fIhostname\fP
-The name of the proxy host, if any. If this value is the
-empty string, the URL host is contacted directly.
-.TP
-\fB\-proxyport\fP \fInumber\fP
-The proxy port number.
-.TP
-\fB\-proxyfilter\fP \fIcommand\fP
-The command is a callback that is made during
-\fB::http::geturl\fR
-to determine if a proxy is required for a given host. One argument, a
-host name, is added to \fIcommand\fR when it is invoked. If a proxy
-is required, the callback should return a two element list containing
-the proxy server and proxy port. Otherwise the filter should return
-an empty list. The default filter returns the values of the
-\fB\-proxyhost\fR and \fB\-proxyport\fR settings if they are
-non-empty.
-.TP
-\fB\-useragent\fP \fIstring\fP
-The value of the User-Agent header in the HTTP request. The default
-is \fB"Tcl http client package 2.2."\fR
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::http::geturl\fP \fIurl\fP ?\fIoptions\fP?
-The \fB::http::geturl\fR command is the main procedure in the package.
-The \fB\-query\fR option causes a POST operation and
-the \fB\-validate\fR option causes a HEAD operation;
-otherwise, a GET operation is performed. The \fB::http::geturl\fR command
-returns a \fItoken\fR value that can be used to get
-information about the transaction. See the STATE ARRAY and ERRORS section for
-details. The \fB::http::geturl\fR command blocks until the operation
-completes, unless the \fB\-command\fR option specifies a callback
-that is invoked when the HTTP transaction completes.
-\fB::http::geturl\fR takes several options:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-binary\fP \fIboolean\fP
-Specifies whether to force interpreting the url data as binary. Normally
-this is auto-detected (anything not beginning with a \fBtext\fR content
-type or whose content encoding is \fBgzip\fR or \fBcompress\fR is
-considered binary data).
-.TP
-\fB\-blocksize\fP \fIsize\fP
-The blocksize used when reading the URL.
-At most \fIsize\fR bytes are read at once. After each block, a call to the
-\fB\-progress\fR callback is made (if that option is specified).
-.TP
-\fB\-channel\fP \fIname\fP
-Copy the URL contents to channel \fIname\fR instead of saving it in
-\fBstate(body)\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-command\fP \fIcallback\fP
-Invoke \fIcallback\fP after the HTTP transaction completes.
-This option causes \fB::http::geturl\fP to return immediately.
-The \fIcallback\fP gets an additional argument that is the \fItoken\fR returned
-from \fB::http::geturl\fR. This token is the name of an array that is
-described in the STATE ARRAY section. Here is a template for the
-callback:
-.RS
-.CS
-proc httpCallback {token} {
- upvar #0 $token state
- # Access state as a Tcl array
-}
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-handler\fP \fIcallback\fP
-Invoke \fIcallback\fP whenever HTTP data is available; if present, nothing
-else will be done with the HTTP data. This procedure gets two additional
-arguments: the socket for the HTTP data and the \fItoken\fR returned from
-\fB::http::geturl\fR. The token is the name of a global array that is described
-in the STATE ARRAY section. The procedure is expected to return the number
-of bytes read from the socket. Here is a template for the callback:
-.RS
-.CS
-proc httpHandlerCallback {socket token} {
- upvar #0 $token state
- # Access socket, and state as a Tcl array
- ...
- (example: set data [read $socket 1000];set nbytes [string length $data])
- ...
- return nbytes
-}
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-headers\fP \fIkeyvaluelist\fP
-This option is used to add extra headers to the HTTP request. The
-\fIkeyvaluelist\fR argument must be a list with an even number of
-elements that alternate between keys and values. The keys become
-header field names. Newlines are stripped from the values so the
-header cannot be corrupted. For example, if \fIkeyvaluelist\fR is
-\fBPragma no-cache\fR then the following header is included in the
-HTTP request:
-.CS
-Pragma: no-cache
-.CE
-.TP
-\fB\-progress\fP \fIcallback\fP
-The \fIcallback\fR is made after each transfer of data from the URL.
-The callback gets three additional arguments: the \fItoken\fR from
-\fB::http::geturl\fR, the expected total size of the contents from the
-\fBContent-Length\fR meta-data, and the current number of bytes
-transferred so far. The expected total size may be unknown, in which
-case zero is passed to the callback. Here is a template for the
-progress callback:
-.RS
-.CS
-proc httpProgress {token total current} {
- upvar #0 $token state
-}
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB\-query\fP \fIquery\fP
-This flag causes \fB::http::geturl\fR to do a POST request that passes the
-\fIquery\fR to the server. The \fIquery\fR must be a x-url-encoding
-formatted query. The \fB::http::formatQuery\fR procedure can be used to
-do the formatting.
-.TP
-\fB\-queryblocksize\fP \fIsize\fP
-The blocksize used when posting query data to the URL.
-At most
-\fIsize\fR
-bytes are written at once. After each block, a call to the
-\fB\-queryprogress\fR
-callback is made (if that option is specified).
-.TP
-\fB\-querychannel\fP \fIchannelID\fP
-This flag causes \fB::http::geturl\fR to do a POST request that passes the
-data contained in \fIchannelID\fR to the server. The data contained in \fIchannelID\fR must be a x-url-encoding
-formatted query unless the \fB\-type\fP option below is used.
-If a Content-Length header is not specified via the \fB\-headers\fR options,
-\fB::http::geturl\fR attempts to determine the size of the post data
-in order to create that header. If it is
-unable to determine the size, it returns an error.
-.TP
-\fB\-queryprogress\fP \fIcallback\fP
-The \fIcallback\fR is made after each transfer of data to the URL
-(i.e. POST) and acts exactly like the \fB\-progress\fR option (the
-callback format is the same).
-.TP
-\fB\-timeout\fP \fImilliseconds\fP
-If \fImilliseconds\fR is non-zero, then \fB::http::geturl\fR sets up a timeout
-to occur after the specified number of milliseconds.
-A timeout results in a call to \fB::http::reset\fP and to
-the \fB-command\fP callback, if specified.
-The return value of \fB::http::status\fP is \fBtimeout\fP
-after a timeout has occurred.
-.TP
-\fB\-type\fP \fImime-type\fP
-Use \fImime-type\fR as the \fBContent-Type\fR value, instead of the
-default value (\fBapplication/x-www-form-urlencoded\fR) during a
-POST operation.
-.TP
-\fB\-validate\fP \fIboolean\fP
-If \fIboolean\fR is non-zero, then \fB::http::geturl\fR does an HTTP HEAD
-request. This request returns meta information about the URL, but the
-contents are not returned. The meta information is available in the
-\fBstate(meta) \fR variable after the transaction. See the STATE
-ARRAY section for details.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::http::formatQuery\fP \fIkey value\fP ?\fIkey value\fP ...?
-This procedure does x-url-encoding of query data. It takes an even
-number of arguments that are the keys and values of the query. It
-encodes the keys and values, and generates one string that has the
-proper & and = separators. The result is suitable for the
-\fB\-query\fR value passed to \fB::http::geturl\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::http::reset\fP \fItoken\fP ?\fIwhy\fP?
-This command resets the HTTP transaction identified by \fItoken\fR, if
-any. This sets the \fBstate(status)\fP value to \fIwhy\fP, which defaults to \fBreset\fR, and then calls the registered \fB\-command\fR callback.
-.TP
-\fB::http::wait\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that blocks and waits for the
-transaction to complete. This only works in trusted code because it
-uses \fBvwait\fR. Also, it's not useful for the case where
-\fB::http::geturl\fP is called \fIwithout\fP the \fB-command\fP option
-because in this case the \fB::http::geturl\fP call doesn't return
-until the HTTP transaction is complete, and thus there's nothing to
-wait for.
-.TP
-\fB::http::data\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBbody\fP element
-(i.e., the URL data) of the state array.
-.TP
-\fB::http::error\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBerror\fP element
-of the state array.
-.TP
-\fB::http::status\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBstatus\fP element of
-the state array.
-.TP
-\fB::http::code\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBhttp\fP element of the
-state array.
-.TP
-\fB::http::ncode\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns just the numeric return
-code (200, 404, etc.) from the \fBhttp\fP element of the state array.
-.TP
-\fB::http::size\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBcurrentsize\fP
-element of the state array, which represents the number of bytes
-received from the URL in the \fB::http::geturl\fP call.
-.TP
-\fB::http::cleanup\fP \fItoken\fP
-This procedure cleans up the state associated with the connection
-identified by \fItoken\fP. After this call, the procedures
-like \fB::http::data\fP cannot be used to get information
-about the operation. It is \fIstrongly\fP recommended that you call
-this function after you're done with a given HTTP request. Not doing
-so will result in memory not being freed, and if your app calls
-\fB::http::geturl\fP enough times, the memory leak could cause a
-performance hit...or worse.
-.TP
-\fB::http::register\fP \fIproto port command\fP
-This procedure allows one to provide custom HTTP transport types
-such as HTTPS, by registering a prefix, the default port, and the
-command to execute to create the Tcl \fBchannel\fR. E.g.:
-.RS
-.CS
-package require http
-package require tls
-
-http::register https 443 ::tls::socket
-
-set token [http::geturl https://my.secure.site/]
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::http::unregister\fP \fIproto\fP
-This procedure unregisters a protocol handler that was previously
-registered via \fBhttp::register\fR.
-
-.SH "ERRORS"
-The \fBhttp::geturl\fP procedure will raise errors in the following cases:
-invalid command line options,
-an invalid URL,
-a URL on a non-existent host,
-or a URL at a bad port on an existing host.
-These errors mean that it
-cannot even start the network transaction.
-It will also raise an error if it gets an I/O error while
-writing out the HTTP request header.
-For synchronous \fB::http::geturl\fP calls (where \fB-command\fP is
-not specified), it will raise an error if it gets an I/O error while
-reading the HTTP reply headers or data. Because \fB::http::geturl\fP
-doesn't return a token in these cases, it does all the required
-cleanup and there's no issue of your app having to call
-\fB::http::cleanup\fP.
-.PP
-For asynchronous \fB::http::geturl\fP calls, all of the above error
-situations apply, except that if there's any error while
-reading the
-HTTP reply headers or data, no exception is thrown. This is because
-after writing the HTTP headers, \fB::http::geturl\fP returns, and the
-rest of the HTTP transaction occurs in the background. The command
-callback can check if any error occurred during the read by calling
-\fB::http::status\fP to check the status and if it's \fIerror\fP,
-calling \fB::http::error\fP to get the error message.
-.PP
-Alternatively, if the main program flow reaches a point where it needs
-to know the result of the asynchronous HTTP request, it can call
-\fB::http::wait\fP and then check status and error, just as the
-callback does.
-.PP
-In any case, you must still call
-\fBhttp::cleanup\fP to delete the state array when you're done.
-.PP
-There are other possible results of the HTTP transaction
-determined by examining the status from \fBhttp::status\fP.
-These are described below.
-.TP
-ok
-If the HTTP transaction completes entirely, then status will be \fBok\fP.
-However, you should still check the \fBhttp::code\fP value to get
-the HTTP status. The \fBhttp::ncode\fP procedure provides just
-the numeric error (e.g., 200, 404 or 500) while the \fBhttp::code\fP
-procedure returns a value like "HTTP 404 File not found".
-.TP
-eof
-If the server closes the socket without replying, then no error
-is raised, but the status of the transaction will be \fBeof\fP.
-.TP
-error
-The error message will also be stored in the \fBerror\fP status
-array element, accessible via \fB::http::error\fP.
-.PP
-Another error possibility is that \fBhttp::geturl\fP is unable to
-write all the post query data to the server before the server
-responds and closes the socket.
-The error message is saved in the \fBposterror\fP status array
-element and then \fBhttp::geturl\fP attempts to complete the
-transaction.
-If it can read the server's response
-it will end up with an \fBok\fP status, otherwise it will have
-an \fBeof\fP status.
-
-.SH "STATE ARRAY"
-The \fB::http::geturl\fR procedure returns a \fItoken\fR that can be used to
-get to the state of the HTTP transaction in the form of a Tcl array.
-Use this construct to create an easy-to-use array variable:
-.CS
-upvar #0 $token state
-.CE
-Once the data associated with the url is no longer needed, the state
-array should be unset to free up storage.
-The \fBhttp::cleanup\fP procedure is provided for that purpose.
-The following elements of
-the array are supported:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBbody\fR
-The contents of the URL. This will be empty if the \fB\-channel\fR
-option has been specified. This value is returned by the \fB::http::data\fP command.
-.TP
-\fBcharset\fR
-The value of the charset attribute from the \fBContent-Type\fR meta-data
-value. If none was specified, this defaults to the RFC standard
-\fBiso8859-1\fR, or the value of \fB$::http::defaultCharset\fR. Incoming
-text data will be automatically converted from this charset to utf-8.
-.TP
-\fBcoding\fR
-A copy of the \fBContent-Encoding\fR meta-data value.
-.TP
-\fBcurrentsize\fR
-The current number of bytes fetched from the URL.
-This value is returned by the \fB::http::size\fP command.
-.TP
-\fBerror\fR
-If defined, this is the error string seen when the HTTP transaction
-was aborted.
-.TP
-\fBhttp\fR
-The HTTP status reply from the server. This value
-is returned by the \fB::http::code\fP command. The format of this value is:
-.RS
-.CS
-\fIHTTP/1.0 code string\fP
-.CE
-The \fIcode\fR is a three-digit number defined in the HTTP standard.
-A code of 200 is OK. Codes beginning with 4 or 5 indicate errors.
-Codes beginning with 3 are redirection errors. In this case the
-\fBLocation\fR meta-data specifies a new URL that contains the
-requested information.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBmeta\fR
-The HTTP protocol returns meta-data that describes the URL contents.
-The \fBmeta\fR element of the state array is a list of the keys and
-values of the meta-data. This is in a format useful for initializing
-an array that just contains the meta-data:
-.RS
-.CS
-array set meta $state(meta)
-.CE
-Some of the meta-data keys are listed below, but the HTTP standard defines
-more, and servers are free to add their own.
-.TP
-\fBContent-Type\fR
-The type of the URL contents. Examples include \fBtext/html\fR,
-\fBimage/gif,\fR \fBapplication/postscript\fR and
-\fBapplication/x-tcl\fR.
-.TP
-\fBContent-Length\fR
-The advertised size of the contents. The actual size obtained by
-\fB::http::geturl\fR is available as \fBstate(size)\fR.
-.TP
-\fBLocation\fR
-An alternate URL that contains the requested data.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBposterror\fR
-The error, if any, that occurred while writing
-the post query data to the server.
-.TP
-\fBstatus\fR
-Either \fBok\fR, for successful completion, \fBreset\fR for
-user-reset, \fBtimeout\fP if a timeout occurred before the transaction
-could complete, or \fBerror\fR for an error condition. During the
-transaction this value is the empty string.
-.TP
-\fBtotalsize\fR
-A copy of the \fBContent-Length\fR meta-data value.
-.TP
-\fBtype\fR
-A copy of the \fBContent-Type\fR meta-data value.
-.TP
-\fBurl\fR
-The requested URL.
-.RE
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.DS
-# Copy a URL to a file and print meta-data
-proc ::http::copy { url file {chunk 4096} } {
- set out [open $file w]
- set token [geturl $url -channel $out -progress ::http::Progress \\
- -blocksize $chunk]
- close $out
- # This ends the line started by http::Progress
- puts stderr ""
- upvar #0 $token state
- set max 0
- foreach {name value} $state(meta) {
- if {[string length $name] > $max} {
- set max [string length $name]
- }
- if {[regexp -nocase ^location$ $name]} {
- # Handle URL redirects
- puts stderr "Location:$value"
- return [copy [string trim $value] $file $chunk]
- }
- }
- incr max
- foreach {name value} $state(meta) {
- puts [format "%-*s %s" $max $name: $value]
- }
-
- return $token
-}
-proc ::http::Progress {args} {
- puts -nonewline stderr . ; flush stderr
-}
-.DE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-safe(n), socket(n), safesock(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-security policy, socket
diff --git a/raw/mann/Tcl.n b/raw/mann/Tcl.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 68daa97..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/Tcl.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,428 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH Tcl n "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tcl \- Summary of Tcl language syntax.
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The following rules define the syntax and semantics of the Tcl language:
-.IP [1]
-A Tcl script is a string containing one or more commands.
-Semi-colons and newlines are command separators unless quoted as
-described below.
-Close brackets are command terminators during command substitution
-(see below) unless quoted.
-.IP [2]
-A command is evaluated in two steps.
-First, the Tcl interpreter breaks the command into \fIwords\fR
-and performs substitutions as described below.
-These substitutions are performed in the same way for all
-commands.
-The first word is used to locate a command procedure to
-carry out the command, then all of the words of the command are
-passed to the command procedure.
-The command procedure is free to interpret each of its words
-in any way it likes, such as an integer, variable name, list,
-or Tcl script.
-Different commands interpret their words differently.
-.IP [3]
-Words of a command are separated by white space (except for
-newlines, which are command separators).
-.IP [4]
-If the first character of a word is double-quote (``"'') then
-the word is terminated by the next double-quote character.
-If semi-colons, close brackets, or white space characters
-(including newlines) appear between the quotes then they are treated
-as ordinary characters and included in the word.
-Command substitution, variable substitution, and backslash substitution
-are performed on the characters between the quotes as described below.
-The double-quotes are not retained as part of the word.
-.IP [5]
-If the first character of a word is an open brace (``{'') then
-the word is terminated by the matching close brace (``}'').
-Braces nest within the word: for each additional open
-brace there must be an additional close brace (however,
-if an open brace or close brace within the word is
-quoted with a backslash then it is not counted in locating the
-matching close brace).
-No substitutions are performed on the characters between the
-braces except for backslash-newline substitutions described
-below, nor do semi-colons, newlines, close brackets,
-or white space receive any special interpretation.
-The word will consist of exactly the characters between the
-outer braces, not including the braces themselves.
-.IP [6]
-If a word contains an open bracket (``['') then Tcl performs
-\fIcommand substitution\fR.
-To do this it invokes the Tcl interpreter recursively to process
-the characters following the open bracket as a Tcl script.
-The script may contain any number of commands and must be terminated
-by a close bracket (``]'').
-The result of the script (i.e. the result of its last command) is
-substituted into the word in place of the brackets and all of the
-characters between them.
-There may be any number of command substitutions in a single word.
-Command substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces.
-.IP [7]
-If a word contains a dollar-sign (``$'') then Tcl performs \fIvariable
-substitution\fR: the dollar-sign and the following characters are
-replaced in the word by the value of a variable.
-Variable substitution may take any of the following forms:
-.RS
-.TP 15
-\fB$\fIname\fR
-\fIName\fR is the name of a scalar variable; the name is terminated
-by any character that isn't a letter, digit, or underscore.
-.TP 15
-\fB$\fIname\fB(\fIindex\fB)\fR
-\fIName\fR gives the name of an array variable and \fIindex\fR gives
-the name of an element within that array.
-\fIName\fR must contain only letters, digits, and underscores.
-Command substitutions, variable substitutions, and backslash
-substitutions are performed on the characters of \fIindex\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fB${\fIname\fB}\fR
-\fIName\fR is the name of a scalar variable. It may contain any
-characters whatsoever except for close braces.
-.LP
-There may be any number of variable substitutions in a single word.
-Variable substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces.
-.RE
-.IP [8]
-If a backslash (``\e'') appears within a word then
-\fIbackslash substitution\fR occurs.
-In all cases but those described below the backslash is dropped and
-the following character is treated as an ordinary
-character and included in the word.
-This allows characters such as double quotes, close brackets,
-and dollar signs to be included in words without triggering
-special processing.
-The following table lists the backslash sequences that are
-handled specially, along with the value that replaces each sequence.
-.RS
-.TP 7
-\e\fBa\fR
-Audible alert (bell) (0x7).
-.TP 7
-\e\fBb\fR
-Backspace (0x8).
-.TP 7
-\e\fBf\fR
-Form feed (0xc).
-.TP 7
-\e\fBn\fR
-Newline (0xa).
-.TP 7
-\e\fBr\fR
-Carriage-return (0xd).
-.TP 7
-\e\fBt\fR
-Tab (0x9).
-.TP 7
-\e\fBv\fR
-Vertical tab (0xb).
-.TP 7
-\e\fB<newline>\fIwhiteSpace\fR
-.
-A single space character replaces the backslash, newline, and all spaces
-and tabs after the newline. This backslash sequence is unique in that it
-is replaced in a separate pre-pass before the command is actually parsed.
-This means that it will be replaced even when it occurs between braces,
-and the resulting space will be treated as a word separator if it isn't
-in braces or quotes.
-.TP 7
-\e\e
-Backslash (``\e'').
-.VS 8.1 br
-.TP 7
-\e\fIooo\fR
-.
-The digits \fIooo\fR (one, two, or three of them) give an eight-bit octal
-value for the Unicode character that will be inserted. The upper bits of the
-Unicode character will be 0.
-.TP 7
-\e\fBx\fIhh\fR
-.
-The hexadecimal digits \fIhh\fR give an eight-bit hexadecimal value for the
-Unicode character that will be inserted. Any number of hexadecimal digits
-may be present; however, all but the last two are ignored (the result is
-always a one-byte quantity). The upper bits of the Unicode character will
-be 0.
-.TP 7
-\e\fBu\fIhhhh\fR
-.
-The hexadecimal digits \fIhhhh\fR (one, two, three, or four of them) give a
-sixteen-bit hexadecimal value for the Unicode character that will be
-inserted.
-.VE
-.LP
-Backslash substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces,
-except for backslash-newline as described above.
-.RE
-.IP [9]
-If a hash character (``#'') appears at a point where Tcl is
-expecting the first character of the first word of a command,
-then the hash character and the characters that follow it, up
-through the next newline, are treated as a comment and ignored.
-The comment character only has significance when it appears
-at the beginning of a command.
-.IP [10]
-Each character is processed exactly once by the Tcl interpreter
-as part of creating the words of a command.
-For example, if variable substitution occurs then no further
-substitutions are performed on the value of the variable; the
-value is inserted into the word verbatim.
-If command substitution occurs then the nested command is
-processed entirely by the recursive call to the Tcl interpreter;
-no substitutions are performed before making the recursive
-call and no additional substitutions are performed on the result
-of the nested script.
-.IP [11]
-Substitutions do not affect the word boundaries of a command.
-For example, during variable substitution the entire value of
-the variable becomes part of a single word, even if the variable's
-value contains spaces.
diff --git a/raw/mann/after.n b/raw/mann/after.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 89dc14f..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/after.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,342 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH after n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-after \- Execute a command after a time delay
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBafter \fIms\fR
-.sp
-\fBafter \fIms \fR?\fIscript script script ...\fR?
-.sp
-\fBafter cancel \fIid\fR
-.sp
-\fBafter cancel \fIscript script script ...\fR
-.sp
-\fBafter idle \fR?\fIscript script script ...\fR?
-.sp
-\fBafter info \fR?\fIid\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is used to delay execution of the program or to execute
-a command in background sometime in the future. It has several forms,
-depending on the first argument to the command:
-.TP
-\fBafter \fIms\fR
-\fIMs\fR must be an integer giving a time in milliseconds.
-The command sleeps for \fIms\fR milliseconds and then returns.
-While the command is sleeping the application does not respond to
-events.
-.TP
-\fBafter \fIms \fR?\fIscript script script ...\fR?
-In this form the command returns immediately, but it arranges
-for a Tcl command to be executed \fIms\fR milliseconds later as an
-event handler.
-The command will be executed exactly once, at the given time.
-The delayed command is formed by concatenating all the \fIscript\fR
-arguments in the same fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command.
-The command will be executed at global level (outside the context
-of any Tcl procedure).
-If an error occurs while executing the delayed command then the
-\fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error.
-The \fBafter\fR command returns an identifier that can be used
-to cancel the delayed command using \fBafter cancel\fR.
-.TP
-\fBafter cancel \fIid\fR
-Cancels the execution of a delayed command that
-was previously scheduled.
-\fIId\fR indicates which command should be canceled; it must have
-been the return value from a previous \fBafter\fR command.
-If the command given by \fIid\fR has already been executed then
-the \fBafter cancel\fR command has no effect.
-.TP
-\fBafter cancel \fIscript script ...\fR
-This command also cancels the execution of a delayed command.
-The \fIscript\fR arguments are concatenated together with space
-separators (just as in the \fBconcat\fR command).
-If there is a pending command that matches the string, it is
-cancelled and will never be executed; if no such command is
-currently pending then the \fBafter cancel\fR command has no effect.
-.TP
-\fBafter idle \fIscript \fR?\fIscript script ...\fR?
-Concatenates the \fIscript\fR arguments together with space
-separators (just as in the \fBconcat\fR command), and arranges
-for the resulting script to be evaluated later as an idle callback.
-The script will be run exactly once, the next time the event
-loop is entered and there are no events to process.
-The command returns an identifier that can be used
-to cancel the delayed command using \fBafter cancel\fR.
-If an error occurs while executing the script then the
-\fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error.
-.TP
-\fBafter info \fR?\fIid\fR?
-This command returns information about existing event handlers.
-If no \fIid\fR argument is supplied, the command returns
-a list of the identifiers for all existing
-event handlers created by the \fBafter\fR command for this
-interpreter.
-If \fIid\fR is supplied, it specifies an existing handler;
-\fIid\fR must have been the return value from some previous call
-to \fBafter\fR and it must not have triggered yet or been cancelled.
-In this case the command returns a list with two elements.
-The first element of the list is the script associated
-with \fIid\fR, and the second element is either
-\fBidle\fR or \fBtimer\fR to indicate what kind of event
-handler it is.
-.LP
-The \fBafter \fIms\fR and \fBafter idle\fR forms of the command
-assume that the application is event driven: the delayed commands
-will not be executed unless the application enters the event loop.
-In applications that are not normally event-driven, such as
-\fBtclsh\fR, the event loop can be entered with the \fBvwait\fR
-and \fBupdate\fR commands.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bgerror(n), concat(n), update(n), vwait(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-cancel, delay, idle callback, sleep, time
diff --git a/raw/mann/append.n b/raw/mann/append.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8581fe7..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/append.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,267 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH append n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-append \- Append to variable
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBappend \fIvarName \fR?\fIvalue value value ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Append all of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to the current value
-of variable \fIvarName\fR. If \fIvarName\fR doesn't exist,
-it is given a value equal to the concatenation of all the
-\fIvalue\fR arguments.
-This command provides an efficient way to build up long
-variables incrementally.
-For example, ``\fBappend a $b\fR'' is much more efficient than
-``\fBset a $a$b\fR'' if \fB$a\fR is long.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-concat(n), lappend(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-append, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/array.n b/raw/mann/array.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d5e9100..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/array.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,358 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH array n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-array \- Manipulate array variables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBarray \fIoption arrayName\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command performs one of several operations on the
-variable given by \fIarrayName\fR.
-Unless otherwise specified for individual commands below,
-\fIarrayName\fR must be the name of an existing array variable.
-The \fIoption\fR argument determines what action is carried
-out by the command.
-The legal \fIoptions\fR (which may be abbreviated) are:
-.TP
-\fBarray anymore \fIarrayName searchId\fR
-Returns 1 if there are any more elements left to be processed
-in an array search, 0 if all elements have already been
-returned.
-\fISearchId\fR indicates which search on \fIarrayName\fR to
-check, and must have been the return value from a previous
-invocation of \fBarray startsearch\fR.
-This option is particularly useful if an array has an element
-with an empty name, since the return value from
-\fBarray nextelement\fR won't indicate whether the search
-has been completed.
-.TP
-\fBarray donesearch \fIarrayName searchId\fR
-This command terminates an array search and destroys all the
-state associated with that search. \fISearchId\fR indicates
-which search on \fIarrayName\fR to destroy, and must have
-been the return value from a previous invocation of
-\fBarray startsearch\fR. Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBarray exists \fIarrayName\fR
-Returns 1 if \fIarrayName\fR is an array variable, 0 if there
-is no variable by that name or if it is a scalar variable.
-.TP
-\fBarray get \fIarrayName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-Returns a list containing pairs of elements. The first
-element in each pair is the name of an element in \fIarrayName\fR
-and the second element of each pair is the value of the
-array element. The order of the pairs is undefined.
-If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, then all of the elements of the
-array are included in the result.
-If \fIpattern\fR is specified, then only those elements whose names
-match \fIpattern\fR (using the matching rules of
-\fBstring match\fR) are included.
-If \fIarrayName\fR isn't the name of an array variable, or if
-the array contains no elements, then an empty list is returned.
-.TP
-\fBarray names \fIarrayName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-Returns a list containing the names of all of the elements in
-the array that match \fIpattern\fR (using the matching
-rules of \fBstring match\fR).
-If \fIpattern\fR is omitted then the command returns all of
-the element names in the array.
-If there are no (matching) elements in the array, or if \fIarrayName\fR
-isn't the name of an array variable, then an empty string is
-returned.
-.TP
-\fBarray nextelement \fIarrayName searchId\fR
-Returns the name of the next element in \fIarrayName\fR, or
-an empty string if all elements of \fIarrayName\fR have
-already been returned in this search. The \fIsearchId\fR
-argument identifies the search, and must have
-been the return value of an \fBarray startsearch\fR command.
-Warning: if elements are added to or deleted from the array,
-then all searches are automatically terminated just as if
-\fBarray donesearch\fR had been invoked; this will cause
-\fBarray nextelement\fR operations to fail for those searches.
-.TP
-\fBarray set \fIarrayName list\fR
-Sets the values of one or more elements in \fIarrayName\fR.
-\fIlist\fR must have a form like that returned by \fBarray get\fR,
-consisting of an even number of elements.
-Each odd-numbered element in \fIlist\fR is treated as an element
-name within \fIarrayName\fR, and the following element in \fIlist\fR
-is used as a new value for that array element.
-If the variable \fIarrayName\fR does not already exist
-and \fIlist\fR is empty,
-\fIarrayName\fR is created with an empty array value.
-.TP
-\fBarray size \fIarrayName\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the number of elements in the
-array.
-If \fIarrayName\fR isn't the name of an array then 0 is returned.
-.TP
-\fBarray startsearch \fIarrayName\fR
-This command initializes an element-by-element search through the
-array given by \fIarrayName\fR, such that invocations of the
-\fBarray nextelement\fR command will return the names of the
-individual elements in the array.
-When the search has been completed, the \fBarray donesearch\fR
-command should be invoked.
-The return value is a
-search identifier that must be used in \fBarray nextelement\fR
-and \fBarray donesearch\fR commands; it allows multiple
-searches to be underway simultaneously for the same array.
-.VS 8.3
-.TP
-\fBarray unset \fIarrayName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-Unsets all of the elements in the array that match \fIpattern\fR (using the
-matching rules of \fBstring match\fR). If \fIarrayName\fR isn't the name
-of an array variable or there are no matching elements in the array, then
-an empty string is returned. If \fIpattern\fR is omitted and is it an
-array variable, then the command unsets the entire array.
-.VE 8.3
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-array, element names, search
diff --git a/raw/mann/bell.n b/raw/mann/bell.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ef88471..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/bell.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bell.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bell.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH bell n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-bell \- Ring a display's bell
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbell \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command rings the bell on the display for \fIwindow\fR and
-returns an empty string.
-If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is omitted, the display of the
-application's main window is used by default.
-The command uses the current bell-related settings for the display, which
-may be modified with programs such as \fBxset\fR.
-.PP
-This command also resets the screen saver for the screen. Some
-screen savers will ignore this, but others will reset so that the
-screen becomes visible again.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-beep, bell, ring
diff --git a/raw/mann/bgerror.n b/raw/mann/bgerror.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e9842ec..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/bgerror.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,314 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bgerror.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bgerror.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH bgerror n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-bgerror \- Command invoked to process background errors
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbgerror \fImessage\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBbgerror\fR command doesn't exist as built-in part of Tcl. Instead,
-individual applications or users can define a \fBbgerror\fR
-command (e.g. as a Tcl procedure) if they wish to handle background
-errors.
-.PP
-A background error is one that occurs in an event handler or some
-other command that didn't originate with the application.
-For example, if an error occurs while executing a command specified
-with the \fBafter\fR command, then it is a background error.
-For a non-background error, the error can simply be returned up
-through nested Tcl command evaluations until it reaches the top-level
-code in the application; then the application can report the error
-in whatever way it wishes. When a background error occurs, the
-unwinding ends in the Tcl library and there is no obvious way for Tcl
-to report the error.
-.PP
-When Tcl detects a background error, it saves information about the
-error and invokes the \fBbgerror\fR command later as an idle event
-handler. Before invoking \fBbgerror\fR, Tcl restores the
-\fBerrorInfo\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR variables to their values at the
-time the error occurred, then it invokes \fBbgerror\fR with the error
-message as its only argument. Tcl assumes that the application has
-implemented the \fBbgerror\fR command, and that the command will
-report the error in a way that makes sense for the application. Tcl
-will ignore any result returned by the \fBbgerror\fR command as long
-as no error is generated.
-.PP
-If another Tcl error occurs within the \fBbgerror\fR command (for
-example, because no \fBbgerror\fR command has been defined) then Tcl
-reports the error itself by writing a message to stderr.
-.PP
-If several background errors accumulate before \fBbgerror\fR is
-invoked to process them, \fBbgerror\fR will be invoked once for each
-error, in the order they occurred. However, if \fBbgerror\fR returns
-with a break exception, then any remaining errors are skipped without
-calling \fBbgerror\fR.
-.PP
-Tcl has no default implementation for \fBbgerror\fR. However, in
-applications using Tk there is a default \fBbgerror\fR procedure which
-posts a dialog box containing the error message and offers the user a
-chance to see a stack trace showing where the error occurred. In
-addition to allowing the user to view the stack trace, the dialog
-provides an additional application configurable button which may be
-used, for example, to save the stack trace to a file. By default,
-this is the behavior associated with that button. This behavior can
-be redefined by setting the option database values
-\fB*ErrorDialog.function.text\fR, to specify the caption for the
-function button, and \fB*ErrorDialog.function.command\fR, to specify
-the command to be run. The text of the stack trace is appended to the
-command when it is evaluated. If either of these options is set to
-the empty string, then the additional button will not be displayed in
-the dialog.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-after(n), tclvars(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-background error, reporting
diff --git a/raw/mann/binary.n b/raw/mann/binary.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d186a5d..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/binary.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,783 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: binary.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: binary.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH binary n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-binary \- Insert and extract fields from binary strings
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbinary format \fIformatString \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.br
-\fBbinary scan \fIstring formatString \fR?\fIvarName varName ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command provides facilities for manipulating binary data. The
-first form, \fBbinary format\fR, creates a binary string from normal
-Tcl values. For example, given the values 16 and 22, on a 32 bit
-architecture, it might produce an 8-byte binary string consisting of
-two 4-byte integers, one for each of the numbers. The second form of
-the command, \fBbinary scan\fR, does the opposite: it extracts data
-from a binary string and returns it as ordinary Tcl string values.
-
-.SH "BINARY FORMAT"
-.PP
-The \fBbinary format\fR command generates a binary string whose layout
-is specified by the \fIformatString\fR and whose contents come from
-the additional arguments. The resulting binary value is returned.
-.PP
-The \fIformatString\fR consists of a sequence of zero or more field
-specifiers separated by zero or more spaces. Each field specifier is
-a single type character followed by an optional numeric \fIcount\fR.
-Most field specifiers consume one argument to obtain the value to be
-formatted. The type character specifies how the value is to be
-formatted. The \fIcount\fR typically indicates how many items of the
-specified type are taken from the value. If present, the \fIcount\fR
-is a non-negative decimal integer or \fB*\fR, which normally indicates
-that all of the items in the value are to be used. If the number of
-arguments does not match the number of fields in the format string
-that consume arguments, then an error is generated.
-.PP
-Each type-count pair moves an imaginary cursor through the binary
-data, storing bytes at the current position and advancing the cursor
-to just after the last byte stored. The cursor is initially at
-position 0 at the beginning of the data. The type may be any one of
-the following characters:
-.IP \fBa\fR 5
-Stores a character string of length \fIcount\fR in the output string.
-If \fIarg\fR has fewer than \fIcount\fR bytes, then additional zero
-bytes are used to pad out the field. If \fIarg\fR is longer than the
-specified length, the extra characters will be ignored. If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then all of the bytes in \fIarg\fR will be
-formatted. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one character will be
-formatted. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format a7a*a alpha bravo charlie\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fBalpha\\000\\000bravoc\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBA\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBa\fR except that spaces are used for
-padding instead of nulls. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format A6A*A alpha bravo charlie\fR
-.CE
-will return \fBalpha bravoc\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBb\fR 5
-Stores a string of \fIcount\fR binary digits in low-to-high order
-within each byte in the output string. \fIArg\fR must contain a
-sequence of \fB1\fR and \fB0\fR characters. The resulting bytes are
-emitted in first to last order with the bits being formatted in
-low-to-high order within each byte. If \fIarg\fR has fewer than
-\fIcount\fR digits, then zeros will be used for the remaining bits.
-If \fIarg\fR has more than the specified number of digits, the extra
-digits will be ignored. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then all of the
-digits in \fIarg\fR will be formatted. If \fIcount\fR is omitted,
-then one digit will be formatted. If the number of bits formatted
-does not end at a byte boundary, the remaining bits of the last byte
-will be zeros. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format b5b* 11100 111000011010\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\x07\\x87\\x05\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBB\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBb\fR except that the bits are stored in
-high-to-low order within each byte. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format B5B* 11100 111000011010\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\xe0\\xe1\\xa0\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBh\fR 5
-Stores a string of \fIcount\fR hexadecimal digits in low-to-high
-within each byte in the output string. \fIArg\fR must contain a
-sequence of characters in the set ``0123456789abcdefABCDEF''. The
-resulting bytes are emitted in first to last order with the hex digits
-being formatted in low-to-high order within each byte. If \fIarg\fR
-has fewer than \fIcount\fR digits, then zeros will be used for the
-remaining digits. If \fIarg\fR has more than the specified number of
-digits, the extra digits will be ignored. If \fIcount\fR is
-\fB*\fR, then all of the digits in \fIarg\fR will be formatted. If
-\fIcount\fR is omitted, then one digit will be formatted. If the
-number of digits formatted does not end at a byte boundary, the
-remaining bits of the last byte will be zeros. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format h3h* AB def\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\xba\\x00\\xed\\x0f\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBH\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBh\fR except that the digits are stored in
-high-to-low order within each byte. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format H3H* ab DEF\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\xab\\x00\\xde\\xf0\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBc\fR 5
-Stores one or more 8-bit integer values in the output string. If no
-\fIcount\fR is specified, then \fIarg\fR must consist of an integer
-value; otherwise \fIarg\fR must consist of a list containing at least
-\fIcount\fR integer elements. The low-order 8 bits of each integer
-are stored as a one-byte value at the cursor position. If \fIcount\fR
-is \fB*\fR, then all of the integers in the list are formatted. If
-the number of elements in the list is fewer than \fIcount\fR, then an
-error is generated. If the number of elements in the list is greater
-than \fIcount\fR, then the extra elements are ignored. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format c3cc* {3 -3 128 1} 260 {2 5}\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\x03\\xfd\\x80\\x04\\x02\\x05\fR, whereas
-.CS
-\fBbinary format c {2 5}\fR
-.CE
-will generate an error.
-.RE
-.IP \fBs\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBc\fR except that it stores one or more
-16-bit integers in little-endian byte order in the output string. The
-low-order 16-bits of each integer are stored as a two-byte value at
-the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first. For
-example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format s3 {3 -3 258 1}\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\x03\\x00\\xfd\\xff\\x02\\x01\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBS\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBs\fR except that it stores one or more
-16-bit integers in big-endian byte order in the output string. For
-example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format S3 {3 -3 258 1}\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\x00\\x03\\xff\\xfd\\x01\\x02\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBi\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBc\fR except that it stores one or more
-32-bit integers in little-endian byte order in the output string. The
-low-order 32-bits of each integer are stored as a four-byte value at
-the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first. For
-example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format i3 {3 -3 65536 1}\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\x03\\x00\\x00\\x00\\xfd\\xff\\xff\\xff\\x00\\x00\\x01\\x00\fR
-.RE
-.IP \fBI\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBi\fR except that it stores one or more one
-or more 32-bit integers in big-endian byte order in the output string.
-For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format I3 {3 -3 65536 1}\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x03\\xff\\xff\\xff\\xfd\\x00\\x01\\x00\\x00\fR
-.RE
-.IP \fBf\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBc\fR except that it stores one or more one
-or more single-precision floating in the machine's native
-representation in the output string. This representation is not
-portable across architectures, so it should not be used to communicate
-floating point numbers across the network. The size of a floating
-point number may vary across architectures, so the number of bytes
-that are generated may vary. If the value overflows the
-machine's native representation, then the value of FLT_MAX
-as defined by the system will be used instead. Because Tcl uses
-double-precision floating-point numbers internally, there may be some
-loss of precision in the conversion to single-precision. For example,
-on a Windows system running on an Intel Pentium processor,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format f2 {1.6 3.4}\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\xcd\\xcc\\xcc\\x3f\\x9a\\x99\\x59\\x40\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBd\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBf\fR except that it stores one or more one
-or more double-precision floating in the machine's native
-representation in the output string. For example, on a
-Windows system running on an Intel Pentium processor,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format d1 {1.6}\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\x9a\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\xf9\\x3f\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBx\fR 5
-Stores \fIcount\fR null bytes in the output string. If \fIcount\fR is
-not specified, stores one null byte. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR,
-generates an error. This type does not consume an argument. For
-example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format a3xa3x2a3 abc def ghi\fR
-.CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fBabc\\000def\\000\\000ghi\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBX\fR 5
-Moves the cursor back \fIcount\fR bytes in the output string. If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR or is larger than the current cursor position,
-then the cursor is positioned at location 0 so that the next byte
-stored will be the first byte in the result string. If \fIcount\fR is
-omitted then the cursor is moved back one byte. This type does not
-consume an argument. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format a3X*a3X2a3 abc def ghi\fR
-.CE
-will return \fBdghi\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fB@\fR 5
-Moves the cursor to the absolute location in the output string
-specified by \fIcount\fR. Position 0 refers to the first byte in the
-output string. If \fIcount\fR refers to a position beyond the last
-byte stored so far, then null bytes will be placed in the unitialized
-locations and the cursor will be placed at the specified location. If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then the cursor is moved to the current end of
-the output string. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then an error will be
-generated. This type does not consume an argument. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary format a5 at 2a1@*a3 at 10a1 abcde f ghi j\fR
-.CE
-will return \fBabfdeghi\\000\\000j\fR.
-.RE
-
-.SH "BINARY SCAN"
-.PP
-The \fBbinary scan\fR command parses fields from a binary string,
-returning the number of conversions performed. \fIString\fR gives the
-input to be parsed and \fIformatString\fR indicates how to parse it.
-Each \fIvarName\fR gives the name of a variable; when a field is
-scanned from \fIstring\fR the result is assigned to the corresponding
-variable.
-.PP
-As with \fBbinary format\fR, the \fIformatString\fR consists of a
-sequence of zero or more field specifiers separated by zero or more
-spaces. Each field specifier is a single type character followed by
-an optional numeric \fIcount\fR. Most field specifiers consume one
-argument to obtain the variable into which the scanned values should
-be placed. The type character specifies how the binary data is to be
-interpreted. The \fIcount\fR typically indicates how many items of
-the specified type are taken from the data. If present, the
-\fIcount\fR is a non-negative decimal integer or \fB*\fR, which
-normally indicates that all of the remaining items in the data are to
-be used. If there are not enough bytes left after the current cursor
-position to satisfy the current field specifier, then the
-corresponding variable is left untouched and \fBbinary scan\fR returns
-immediately with the number of variables that were set. If there are
-not enough arguments for all of the fields in the format string that
-consume arguments, then an error is generated.
-.PP
-It is \fBimportant\fR to note that the \fBc\fR, \fBs\fR, and \fBS\fR
-(and \fBi\fR and \fBI\fR on 64bit systems) will be scanned into
-long data size values. In doing this, values that have their high
-bit set (0x80 for chars, 0x8000 for shorts, 0x80000000 for ints),
-will be sign extended. Thus the following will occur:
-.CS
-\fBset signShort [binary format s1 0x8000]\fR
-\fBbinary scan $signShort s1 val; \fI# val == 0xFFFF8000\fR
-.CE
-If you want to produce an unsigned value, then you can mask the return
-value to the desired size. For example, to produce an unsigned short
-value:
-.CS
-\fBset val [expr {$val & 0xFFFF}]; \fI# val == 0x8000\fR
-.CE
-.PP
-Each type-count pair moves an imaginary cursor through the binary data,
-reading bytes from the current position. The cursor is initially
-at position 0 at the beginning of the data. The type may be any one of
-the following characters:
-.IP \fBa\fR 5
-The data is a character string of length \fIcount\fR. If \fIcount\fR
-is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be
-scanned into the variable. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one
-character will be scanned. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan abcde\\000fghi a6a10 var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB1\fR with the string equivalent to \fBabcde\\000\fR
-stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fBvar2\fR left unmodified.
-.RE
-.IP \fBA\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBa\fR, except trailing blanks and nulls are stripped from
-the scanned value before it is stored in the variable. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan "abc efghi \\000" A* var1\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB1\fR with \fBabc efghi\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBb\fR 5
-The data is turned into a string of \fIcount\fR binary digits in
-low-to-high order represented as a sequence of ``1'' and ``0''
-characters. The data bytes are scanned in first to last order with
-the bits being taken in low-to-high order within each byte. Any extra
-bits in the last byte are ignored. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bits in \fBstring\fR will be scanned. If
-\fIcount\fR is omitted, then one bit will be scanned. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x87\\x05 b5b* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB11100\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB1110000110100000\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBB\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBb\fR, except the bits are taken in
-high-to-low order within each byte. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x70\\x87\\x05 B5B* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB01110\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB1000011100000101\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBh\fR 5
-The data is turned into a string of \fIcount\fR hexadecimal digits in
-low-to-high order represented as a sequence of characters in the set
-``0123456789abcdef''. The data bytes are scanned in first to last
-order with the hex digits being taken in low-to-high order within each
-byte. Any extra bits in the last byte are ignored. If \fIcount\fR
-is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining hex digits in \fBstring\fR will be
-scanned. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one hex digit will be
-scanned. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x86\\x05 h3h* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB706\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB50\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBH\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBh\fR, except the digits are taken in
-high-to-low order within each byte. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x86\\x05 H3H* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB078\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB05\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBc\fR 5
-The data is turned into \fIcount\fR 8-bit signed integers and stored
-in the corresponding variable as a list. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR,
-then all of the remaining bytes in \fBstring\fR will be scanned. If
-\fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 8-bit integer will be scanned. For
-example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x86\\x05 c2c* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB7 -122\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB5\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR. Note that the integers returned are signed, but
-they can be converted to unsigned 8-bit quantities using an expression
-like:
-.CS
-\fBexpr ( $num + 0x100 ) % 0x100\fR
-.CE
-.RE
-.IP \fBs\fR 5
-The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers
-represented in little-endian byte order. The integers are stored in
-the corresponding variable as a list. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fBstring\fR will be scanned. If
-\fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 16-bit integer will be scanned. For
-example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x05\\x00\\x07\\x00\\xf0\\xff s2s* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR. Note that the integers returned are signed, but
-they can be converted to unsigned 16-bit quantities using an expression
-like:
-.CS
-\fBexpr ( $num + 0x10000 ) % 0x10000\fR
-.CE
-.RE
-.IP \fBS\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBs\fR except that the data is interpreted
-as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
-order. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x00\\x05\\x00\\x07\\xff\\xf0 S2S* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBi\fR 5
-The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers
-represented in little-endian byte order. The integers are stored in
-the corresponding variable as a list. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fBstring\fR will be scanned. If
-\fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 32-bit integer will be scanned. For
-example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x05\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x07\\x00\\x00\\x00\\xf0\\xff\\xff\\xff i2i* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR. Note that the integers returned are signed and
-cannot be represented by Tcl as unsigned values.
-.RE
-.IP \fBI\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBI\fR except that the data is interpreted
-as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
-order. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary \\x00\\x00\\x00\\x05\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x07\\xff\\xff\\xff\\xf0 I2I* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBf\fR 5
-The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR single-precision floating point
-numbers in the machine's native representation. The floating point
-numbers are stored in the corresponding variable as a list. If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining bytes in
-\fBstring\fR will be scanned. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one
-single-precision floating point number will be scanned. The size of a
-floating point number may vary across architectures, so the number of
-bytes that are scanned may vary. If the data does not represent a
-valid floating point number, the resulting value is undefined and
-compiler dependent. For example, on a Windows system running on an
-Intel Pentium processor,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x3f\\xcc\\xcc\\xcd f var1\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB1\fR with \fB1.6000000238418579\fR stored in
-\fBvar1\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBd\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBf\fR except that the data is interpreted
-as \fIcount\fR double-precision floating point numbers in the
-machine's native representation. For example, on a Windows system
-running on an Intel Pentium processor,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x9a\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\xf9\\x3f d var1\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB1\fR with \fB1.6000000000000001\fR
-stored in \fBvar1\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBx\fR 5
-Moves the cursor forward \fIcount\fR bytes in \fIstring\fR. If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR or is larger than the number of bytes after the
-current cursor cursor position, then the cursor is positioned after
-the last byte in \fIstring\fR. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then the
-cursor is moved forward one byte. Note that this type does not
-consume an argument. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x01\\x02\\x03\\x04 x2H* var1\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB1\fR with \fB0304\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fBX\fR 5
-Moves the cursor back \fIcount\fR bytes in \fIstring\fR. If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR or is larger than the current cursor position,
-then the cursor is positioned at location 0 so that the next byte
-scanned will be the first byte in \fIstring\fR. If \fIcount\fR
-is omitted then the cursor is moved back one byte. Note that this
-type does not consume an argument. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x01\\x02\\x03\\x04 c2XH* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-.IP \fB@\fR 5
-Moves the cursor to the absolute location in the data string specified
-by \fIcount\fR. Note that position 0 refers to the first byte in
-\fIstring\fR. If \fIcount\fR refers to a position beyond the end of
-\fIstring\fR, then the cursor is positioned after the last byte. If
-\fIcount\fR is omitted, then an error will be generated. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x01\\x02\\x03\\x04 c2 at 1H* var1 var2\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.RE
-
-.SH "PLATFORM ISSUES"
-Sometimes it is desirable to format or scan integer values in the
-native byte order for the machine. Refer to the \fBbyteOrder\fR
-element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array to decide which type character
-to use when formatting or scanning integers.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-format(n), scan(n), tclvars(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-binary, format, scan
diff --git a/raw/mann/bindtags.n b/raw/mann/bindtags.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3b606da..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/bindtags.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,316 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bindtags.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bindtags.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH bindtags n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-bindtags \- Determine which bindings apply to a window, and order of evaluation
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbindtags \fIwindow \fR?\fItagList\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-When a binding is created with the \fBbind\fR command, it is
-associated either with a particular window such as \fB.a.b.c\fR,
-a class name such as \fBButton\fR, the keyword \fBall\fR, or any
-other string.
-All of these forms are called \fIbinding tags\fR.
-Each window contains a list of binding tags that determine how
-events are processed for the window.
-When an event occurs in a window, it is applied to each of the
-window's tags in order: for each tag, the most specific binding
-that matches the given tag and event is executed.
-See the \fBbind\fR command for more information on the matching
-process.
-.PP
-By default, each window has four binding tags consisting of the
-name of the window, the window's class name, the name of the window's
-nearest toplevel ancestor, and \fBall\fR, in that order.
-Toplevel windows have only three tags by default, since the toplevel
-name is the same as that of the window.
-The \fBbindtags\fR command allows the binding tags for a window to be
-read and modified.
-.PP
-If \fBbindtags\fR is invoked with only one argument, then the
-current set of binding tags for \fIwindow\fR is returned as a list.
-If the \fItagList\fR argument is specified to \fBbindtags\fR,
-then it must be a proper list; the tags for \fIwindow\fR are changed
-to the elements of the list.
-The elements of \fItagList\fR may be arbitrary strings; however,
-any tag starting with a dot is treated as the name of a window; if
-no window by that name exists at the time an event is processed,
-then the tag is ignored for that event.
-The order of the elements in \fItagList\fR determines the order in
-which binding scripts are executed in response to events.
-For example, the command
-.CS
-\fBbindtags .b {all . Button .b}\fR
-.CE
-reverses the order in which binding scripts will be evaluated for
-a button named \fB.b\fR so that \fBall\fR bindings are invoked
-first, following by bindings for \fB.b\fR's toplevel (``.''), followed by
-class bindings, followed by bindings for \fB.b\fR.
-If \fItagList\fR is an empty list then the binding tags for \fIwindow\fR
-are returned to the default state described above.
-.PP
-The \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to introduce arbitrary
-additional binding tags for a window, or to remove standard tags.
-For example, the command
-.CS
-\fBbindtags .b {.b TrickyButton . all}\fR
-.CE
-replaces the \fBButton\fR tag for \fB.b\fR with \fBTrickyButton\fR.
-This means that the default widget bindings for buttons, which are
-associated with the \fBButton\fR tag, will no longer apply to \fB.b\fR,
-but any bindings associated with \fBTrickyButton\fR (perhaps some
-new button behavior) will apply.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-binding, event, tag
diff --git a/raw/mann/break.n b/raw/mann/break.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d7d5da..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/break.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,272 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: break.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: break.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH break n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-break \- Abort looping command
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBbreak\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is typically invoked inside the body of a looping command
-such as \fBfor\fR or \fBforeach\fR or \fBwhile\fR.
-It returns a TCL_BREAK code, which causes a break exception
-to occur.
-The exception causes the current script to be aborted
-out to the innermost containing loop command, which then
-aborts its execution and returns normally.
-Break exceptions are also handled in a few other situations, such
-as the \fBcatch\fR command, Tk event bindings, and the outermost
-scripts of procedure bodies.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-catch(n), continue(n), for(n), foreach(n), while(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-abort, break, loop
diff --git a/raw/mann/catch.n b/raw/mann/catch.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ce7907..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/catch.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,301 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: catch.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: catch.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH catch n "8.0" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-catch \- Evaluate script and trap exceptional returns
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBcatch\fI script \fR?\fIvarName\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBcatch\fR command may be used to prevent errors from aborting command
-interpretation. \fBCatch\fR calls the Tcl interpreter recursively to
-execute \fIscript\fR, and always returns without raising an error,
-regardless of any errors that might occur while executing \fIscript\fR.
-.PP
-If \fIscript\fR raises an error, \fBcatch\fR will return a non-zero integer
-value corresponding to one of the exceptional return codes (see tcl.h
-for the definitions of code values). If the \fIvarName\fR argument is
-given, then the variable it names is set to the error message from
-interpreting \fIscript\fR.
-.PP
-If \fIscript\fR does not raise an error, \fBcatch\fR will return 0
-(TCL_OK) and set the variable to the value returned from \fIscript\fR.
-.PP
-Note that \fBcatch\fR catches all exceptions, including those
-generated by \fBbreak\fR and \fBcontinue\fR as well as errors. The
-only errors that are not caught are syntax errors found when the
-script is compiled. This is because the catch command only catches
-errors during runtime. When the catch statement is compiled, the
-script is compiled as well and any syntax errors will generate a Tcl
-error.
-
-.SH EXAMPLES
-
-The \fBcatch\fR command may be used in an \fBif\fR to branch based on
-the success of a script.
-
-.CS
-if { [catch {open $someFile w} fid] } {
- puts stderr "Could not open $someFile for writing\\n$fid"
- exit 1
-}
-.CE
-The \fBcatch\fR command will not catch compiled syntax errors. The
-first time proc \fBfoo\fR is called, the body will be compiled and a
-Tcl error will be generated.
-
-.CS
-proc foo {} {
- catch {expr {1 +- }}
-}
-.CE
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-catch, error
diff --git a/raw/mann/cd.n b/raw/mann/cd.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 7798609..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/cd.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: cd.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: cd.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH cd n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-cd \- Change working directory
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBcd \fR?\fIdirName\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Change the current working directory to \fIdirName\fR, or to the
-home directory (as specified in the HOME environment variable) if
-\fIdirName\fR is not given.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-filename(n), glob(n), pwd(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-working directory
diff --git a/raw/mann/chooseColor.n b/raw/mann/chooseColor.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 148e8e0..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/chooseColor.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,284 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: chooseColor.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: chooseColor.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_chooseColor n 4.2 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_chooseColor \- pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color.
-.PP
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_chooseColor \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The procedure \fBtk_chooseColor\fR pops up a dialog box for the
-user to select a color. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
-possible as command line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\-initialcolor\fR \fIcolor\fR
-Specifies the color to display in the color dialog when it pops
-up. \fIcolor\fR must be in a form acceptable to the \fBTk_GetColor\fR
-function.
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
-Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the color dialog. The color
-dialog is displayed on top of its parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
-.LP
-If the user selects a color, \fBtk_chooseColor\fR will return the
-name of the color in a form acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If the
-user cancels the operation, both commands will return the empty
-string.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.CS
-button .b \-fg [tk_chooseColor \-initialcolor gray \-title "Choose color"]
-.CE
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-color selection dialog
diff --git a/raw/mann/chooseDirectory.n b/raw/mann/chooseDirectory.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d257e9e..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/chooseDirectory.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,287 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: chooseDirectory.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: chooseDirectory.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_chooseDirectory n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_chooseDirectory \- pops up a dialog box for the user to select a directory.
-.PP
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_chooseDirectory \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The procedure \fBtk_chooseDirectory\fR pops up a dialog box for the
-user to select a directory. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are
-possible as command line arguments:
-.TP
-\fB\-initialdir\fR \fIdirname\fR
-Specifies that the directories in \fIdirectory\fR should be displayed
-when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified, then
-the directories in the current working directory are displayed. If the
-parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
-relative path to an absolute path. This option may not always work on
-the Macintosh. This is not a bug. Rather, the \fIGeneral Controls\fR
-control panel on the Mac allows the end user to override the
-application default directory.
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
-Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog
-is displayed on top of its parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
-.TP
-\fB\-mustexist\fR \fIboolean\fR
-Specifies whether the user may specify non-existant directories. If
-this parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that
-already exist. The default value is \fIfalse\fR.
-.LP
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-tk_getOpenFile, tk_getSaveFile
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-directory selection dialog
diff --git a/raw/mann/ckalloc.n b/raw/mann/ckalloc.n
deleted file mode 100644
index af18db5..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/ckalloc.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,281 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Memory.man
-.\"
-.\" Extended Tcl memory leak locator.
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Copyright 1992-1999 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
-.\"
-.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
-.\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
-.\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies. Karl Lehenbauer and
-.\" Mark Diekhans make no representations about the suitability of this
-.\" software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
-.\" implied warranty.
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" $Id: ckalloc.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\"
-.TH "Memory" TCL "" "Tcl"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ckalloc, memory, ckfree, Tcl_DisplayMemory, Tcl_InitMemory, Tcl_ValidateAllMemory - Validated memory allocation interface.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B memory \fBinfo\fR
-
-.B memory \fBtrace\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-
-.B memory \fBvalidate\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-
-.B memory \fBtrace_on_at_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-
-.B memory \fBbreak_on_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-
-.B memory \fBdisplay\fR \fIfile\fR
-
-.sp 2
-.ft CW
-#include <tcl.h>
-.sp
-char *
-ckalloc (unsigned size)
-.sp
-void
-ckfree (char *ptr)
-.sp
-int
-Tcl_DumpActiveMemory (char *fileName);
-.sp
-void
-Tcl_ValidateAllMemory (char *file,
- int line)
-
-void
-Tcl_InitMemory (interp)
-.ft R
-'
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *fileName
-.AP uint size in
-
-.AP char *ptr in
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-A pointer to the Tcl interpreter.
-.AP char *file in
-The filename of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory.
-.AP int line in
-The line number of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory.
-.AP char *fileName in
-File to display list of active memory.
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.SS ckalloc
-.PP
-Thi macro allocates memory, in the same manner as \fBmalloc\fR, with the
-following differences: One, \fBckalloc\fR checks the value returned from
-\fBmalloc\fR (it calls \fBmalloc\fR for you) and panics if the allocation
-request fails. Two, if enabled at compile time, a version of \fBckalloc\fR
-with special memory debugging capabilities replaces the normal version of
-\fBckalloc\fR, which aids in detecting memory overwrites and leaks (repeated
-allocations not matched by corresponding frees).
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIsize\fR - The size of the memory block to be allocated.
-.RE
-.PP
-Returns:
-.RS 2
-A pointer to the allocated memory block.
-.RE
-'
-.SS ckfree
-.PP
-This macro frees memory allocated by \fBckalloc\fR. Like \fBckalloc\fR,
-when memory debugging is enabled, \fBckfree\fR has enhanced capabilities
-for detecting memory overwrites and leaks.
-.PP
-It is very important that you use \fBckalloc\fR when you need to allocate
-memory, and that you use \fBckfree\fR to free it. Should you use \fBmalloc\fR
-to allocate and \fBckfree\fR to free, spurious memory validation errors will
-occur when memory debugging is enabled. Should you use \fBfree\fR to free
-memory allocated by \fBckalloc\fR, memory corruption will occur when memory
-debugging is enabled. Any memory that is to be become the property of the Tcl
-interpreter, such as result space, must be allocated with \fBckalloc\fR. If
-it is absolutely necessary for an application to pass back \fBmalloc\fRed
-memory to Tcl, it will work only if Tcl is complied with the
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR flag turned off. If you convert your application to use
-this facility, it will help you find memory over runs and lost memory. Note
-that memory allocated by a C library routine requiring freeing should still be
-freed with \fBfree\fR, since it calls \fBmalloc\fR rather than \fBckalloc\fR
-to do the allocation.
-.PP
-Parmeters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIptr\fR - The address of a block to free, as returned by ckalloc.
-.RE
-.sp
-'
-.SS Tcl_DumpActiveMemory
-.PP
-This function will output a list of all currently allocated memory to the
-specified file. The following information is outputted for each allocated
-block of memory: starting and ending addresses (excluding guard zone), size,
-source file where \fBckalloc\fR was called to allocate the block and line
-number in that file. It is especially useful to call
-\fBTcl_DumpActiveMemory\fR after the Tcl interpreter has been deleted.
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIfileName\fR - The name of the file to output the memory list to.
-.RE
-'
-.SS Tcl_ValidateAllMemory
-.PP
-Forces a validation of the guard zones of all currently allocated blocks
-of memory. Normally validation of a block occurs when its freed, unless
-full validation is enabled, in which case validation of all blocks
-occurs when \fBckalloc\fR and \fBckfree\fR are called. This function forces
-the validation to occur at any point.
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIfile\fR - The file that this routine is being called from, normally
-\fB__FILE__\fR.
-.br
-\fBo \fIline\fR - The line that this routine is being called from, normally
-\fB__LINE__\fR.
-.RE
-'
-.SH ENABLING MEMORY DEBUGGING
-.PP
-To enable memory debugging, Tcl should be recompiled from scratch with
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR defined. This will also compile in
-a non-stub version of \fBTcl_InitMemory\fR
-to add the \fBmemory\fR command to Tcl.
-.PP
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR must be either left defined for all modules or undefined
-for all modules that are going to be linked together. If they are not, link
-errors will occur, with either \fBTclDbCkfree\fR and \fBTcl_DbCkalloc\fR or
-\fBTcl_Ckalloc\fR and \fBTcl_Ckfree\fR being undefined.
-'
-.SH GUARD ZONES
-.PP
-When memory debugging is enabled, whenever a call to \fBckalloc\fR is
-made, slightly more memory than requested is allocated so the memory debugging
-code can keep track
-of the allocated memory, and also
-eight-byte ``guard zones'' are placed in front of and behind the space that
-will be returned to the caller. (The size of the guard zone is defined
-by the C #define \fBGUARD_SIZE\fR in \fIbaseline/src/ckalloc.c\fR -- it
-can be extended if you suspect large overwrite problems, at some cost in
-performance.) A known pattern is written into the guard zones and,
-on a call to \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones of the space being freed
-are checked to see if either zone has been modified in any way.
-If one has been, the guard bytes and their new contents are identified,
-and a ``low guard failed'' or ``high guard failed'' message is issued.
-The ``guard failed'' message includes the address of the memory packet
-and the file name and line number of the code that called \fBckfree\fR.
-This allows you to detect the common sorts of one-off problems, where
-not enough space was allocated to contain the data written, for example.
-'
-.SH THE MEMORY COMMAND
-'@help: debug/memory
-'@brief: display and debug memory problems
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fIoptions\fR
-.br
-The Tcl \fBmemory\fR command gives the Tcl developer control of Tcl's memory
-debugging capabilities. The memory command has several suboptions, which are
-described below. It is only available when Tcl has been compiled with memory
-debugging enabled.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBinfo\fR
-.br
-Produces a report containing the total allocations and frees since
-Tcl began, the current packets allocated (the current
-number of calls to \fBckalloc\fR not met by a corresponding call
-to \fBckfree\fR), the current bytes allocated, and the maximum number
-of packets and bytes allocated.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBtrace\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-.br
-Turns memory tracing on or off.
-When memory tracing is on, every call to \fBckalloc\fR causes a line of
-trace information to be written to \fIstderr\fR, consisting of the
-word \fIckalloc\fR, followed by the address returned, the amount of
-memory allocated, and the C filename and line number of the code performing
-the allocation, for example...
-.sp
- \fBckalloc 40e478 98 tclProc.c 1406\fR
-.sp
-Calls to \fBckfree\fR are traced in the same manner, except that the
-word \fIckalloc\fR is replaced by the word \fIckfree\fR.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBvalidate\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-.br
-Turns memory validation on or off.
-When memory validation is enabled, on every call to
-\fBckalloc\fR or \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones are checked for every
-piece of memory currently in existence that was allocated by \fBckalloc\fR.
-This has a large performance impact and should only be used when
-overwrite problems are strongly suspected. The advantage of enabling
-memory validation is that a guard zone overwrite can be detected on
-the first call to \fBckalloc\fR or \fBckfree\fR after the overwrite
-occurred, rather than when the specific memory with the overwritten
-guard zone(s) is freed, which may occur long after the overwrite occurred.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBtrace_on_at_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-.br
-Enable memory tracing after \fInnn\fR \fBckallocs\fR have been performed.
-For example, if you enter \fBmemory trace_on_at_malloc 100\fR,
-after the 100th call to \fBckalloc\fR, memory trace information will begin
-being displayed for all allocations and frees. Since there can be a lot
-of memory activity before a problem occurs, judicious use of this option
-can reduce the slowdown caused by tracing (and the amount of trace information
-produced), if you can identify a number of allocations that occur before
-the problem sets in. The current number of memory allocations that have
-occurred since Tcl started is printed on a guard zone failure.
-.TP
-.B memory \fBbreak_on_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-.br
-After the \fBnnn\fR allocations have been performed, \fBckallocs\fR
-output a message to this effect and that it is now attempting to enter
-the C debugger. Tcl will then issue a \fISIGINT\fR signal against itself.
-If you are running Tcl under a C debugger, it should then enter the debugger
-command mode.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBdisplay\fR \fIfile\fR
-.br
-Write a list of all currently allocated memory to the specified file.
-'@endhelp
-'
-.SH DEBUGGING DIFFICULT MEMORY CORRUPTION PROBLEMS
-.PP
-Normally, Tcl compiled with memory debugging enabled will make it easy to isolate
-a corruption problem. Turning on memory validation with the memory command
-can help isolate difficult problems.
-If you suspect (or know) that corruption is
-occurring before the Tcl interpreter comes up far enough for you to
-issue commands, you can set \fBMEM_VALIDATE\fR define, recompile
-tclCkalloc.c and rebuild Tcl. This will enable memory validation
-from the first call to \fBckalloc\fR, again, at a large performance impact.
-.PP
-If you are desperate and validating memory on every call to \fBckalloc\fR
-and \fBckfree\fR isn't enough, you can explicitly call
-\fBTcl_ValidateAllMemory\fR directly at any point. It takes a \fIchar *\fR
-and an \fIint\fR which are normally the filename and line number of the
-caller, but they can actually be anything you want. Remember to remove
-the calls after you find the problem.
-'
-.SH KEYWORDS
-ckalloc, ckfree, free, memory, malloc
-
-
diff --git a/raw/mann/ckfree.n b/raw/mann/ckfree.n
deleted file mode 100644
index fdffbcc..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/ckfree.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,281 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Memory.man
-.\"
-.\" Extended Tcl memory leak locator.
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Copyright 1992-1999 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
-.\"
-.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
-.\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
-.\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies. Karl Lehenbauer and
-.\" Mark Diekhans make no representations about the suitability of this
-.\" software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
-.\" implied warranty.
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" $Id: ckfree.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\"
-.TH "Memory" TCL "" "Tcl"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ckalloc, memory, ckfree, Tcl_DisplayMemory, Tcl_InitMemory, Tcl_ValidateAllMemory - Validated memory allocation interface.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B memory \fBinfo\fR
-
-.B memory \fBtrace\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-
-.B memory \fBvalidate\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-
-.B memory \fBtrace_on_at_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-
-.B memory \fBbreak_on_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-
-.B memory \fBdisplay\fR \fIfile\fR
-
-.sp 2
-.ft CW
-#include <tcl.h>
-.sp
-char *
-ckalloc (unsigned size)
-.sp
-void
-ckfree (char *ptr)
-.sp
-int
-Tcl_DumpActiveMemory (char *fileName);
-.sp
-void
-Tcl_ValidateAllMemory (char *file,
- int line)
-
-void
-Tcl_InitMemory (interp)
-.ft R
-'
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *fileName
-.AP uint size in
-
-.AP char *ptr in
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-A pointer to the Tcl interpreter.
-.AP char *file in
-The filename of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory.
-.AP int line in
-The line number of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory.
-.AP char *fileName in
-File to display list of active memory.
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.SS ckalloc
-.PP
-Thi macro allocates memory, in the same manner as \fBmalloc\fR, with the
-following differences: One, \fBckalloc\fR checks the value returned from
-\fBmalloc\fR (it calls \fBmalloc\fR for you) and panics if the allocation
-request fails. Two, if enabled at compile time, a version of \fBckalloc\fR
-with special memory debugging capabilities replaces the normal version of
-\fBckalloc\fR, which aids in detecting memory overwrites and leaks (repeated
-allocations not matched by corresponding frees).
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIsize\fR - The size of the memory block to be allocated.
-.RE
-.PP
-Returns:
-.RS 2
-A pointer to the allocated memory block.
-.RE
-'
-.SS ckfree
-.PP
-This macro frees memory allocated by \fBckalloc\fR. Like \fBckalloc\fR,
-when memory debugging is enabled, \fBckfree\fR has enhanced capabilities
-for detecting memory overwrites and leaks.
-.PP
-It is very important that you use \fBckalloc\fR when you need to allocate
-memory, and that you use \fBckfree\fR to free it. Should you use \fBmalloc\fR
-to allocate and \fBckfree\fR to free, spurious memory validation errors will
-occur when memory debugging is enabled. Should you use \fBfree\fR to free
-memory allocated by \fBckalloc\fR, memory corruption will occur when memory
-debugging is enabled. Any memory that is to be become the property of the Tcl
-interpreter, such as result space, must be allocated with \fBckalloc\fR. If
-it is absolutely necessary for an application to pass back \fBmalloc\fRed
-memory to Tcl, it will work only if Tcl is complied with the
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR flag turned off. If you convert your application to use
-this facility, it will help you find memory over runs and lost memory. Note
-that memory allocated by a C library routine requiring freeing should still be
-freed with \fBfree\fR, since it calls \fBmalloc\fR rather than \fBckalloc\fR
-to do the allocation.
-.PP
-Parmeters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIptr\fR - The address of a block to free, as returned by ckalloc.
-.RE
-.sp
-'
-.SS Tcl_DumpActiveMemory
-.PP
-This function will output a list of all currently allocated memory to the
-specified file. The following information is outputted for each allocated
-block of memory: starting and ending addresses (excluding guard zone), size,
-source file where \fBckalloc\fR was called to allocate the block and line
-number in that file. It is especially useful to call
-\fBTcl_DumpActiveMemory\fR after the Tcl interpreter has been deleted.
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIfileName\fR - The name of the file to output the memory list to.
-.RE
-'
-.SS Tcl_ValidateAllMemory
-.PP
-Forces a validation of the guard zones of all currently allocated blocks
-of memory. Normally validation of a block occurs when its freed, unless
-full validation is enabled, in which case validation of all blocks
-occurs when \fBckalloc\fR and \fBckfree\fR are called. This function forces
-the validation to occur at any point.
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIfile\fR - The file that this routine is being called from, normally
-\fB__FILE__\fR.
-.br
-\fBo \fIline\fR - The line that this routine is being called from, normally
-\fB__LINE__\fR.
-.RE
-'
-.SH ENABLING MEMORY DEBUGGING
-.PP
-To enable memory debugging, Tcl should be recompiled from scratch with
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR defined. This will also compile in
-a non-stub version of \fBTcl_InitMemory\fR
-to add the \fBmemory\fR command to Tcl.
-.PP
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR must be either left defined for all modules or undefined
-for all modules that are going to be linked together. If they are not, link
-errors will occur, with either \fBTclDbCkfree\fR and \fBTcl_DbCkalloc\fR or
-\fBTcl_Ckalloc\fR and \fBTcl_Ckfree\fR being undefined.
-'
-.SH GUARD ZONES
-.PP
-When memory debugging is enabled, whenever a call to \fBckalloc\fR is
-made, slightly more memory than requested is allocated so the memory debugging
-code can keep track
-of the allocated memory, and also
-eight-byte ``guard zones'' are placed in front of and behind the space that
-will be returned to the caller. (The size of the guard zone is defined
-by the C #define \fBGUARD_SIZE\fR in \fIbaseline/src/ckalloc.c\fR -- it
-can be extended if you suspect large overwrite problems, at some cost in
-performance.) A known pattern is written into the guard zones and,
-on a call to \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones of the space being freed
-are checked to see if either zone has been modified in any way.
-If one has been, the guard bytes and their new contents are identified,
-and a ``low guard failed'' or ``high guard failed'' message is issued.
-The ``guard failed'' message includes the address of the memory packet
-and the file name and line number of the code that called \fBckfree\fR.
-This allows you to detect the common sorts of one-off problems, where
-not enough space was allocated to contain the data written, for example.
-'
-.SH THE MEMORY COMMAND
-'@help: debug/memory
-'@brief: display and debug memory problems
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fIoptions\fR
-.br
-The Tcl \fBmemory\fR command gives the Tcl developer control of Tcl's memory
-debugging capabilities. The memory command has several suboptions, which are
-described below. It is only available when Tcl has been compiled with memory
-debugging enabled.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBinfo\fR
-.br
-Produces a report containing the total allocations and frees since
-Tcl began, the current packets allocated (the current
-number of calls to \fBckalloc\fR not met by a corresponding call
-to \fBckfree\fR), the current bytes allocated, and the maximum number
-of packets and bytes allocated.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBtrace\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-.br
-Turns memory tracing on or off.
-When memory tracing is on, every call to \fBckalloc\fR causes a line of
-trace information to be written to \fIstderr\fR, consisting of the
-word \fIckalloc\fR, followed by the address returned, the amount of
-memory allocated, and the C filename and line number of the code performing
-the allocation, for example...
-.sp
- \fBckalloc 40e478 98 tclProc.c 1406\fR
-.sp
-Calls to \fBckfree\fR are traced in the same manner, except that the
-word \fIckalloc\fR is replaced by the word \fIckfree\fR.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBvalidate\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-.br
-Turns memory validation on or off.
-When memory validation is enabled, on every call to
-\fBckalloc\fR or \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones are checked for every
-piece of memory currently in existence that was allocated by \fBckalloc\fR.
-This has a large performance impact and should only be used when
-overwrite problems are strongly suspected. The advantage of enabling
-memory validation is that a guard zone overwrite can be detected on
-the first call to \fBckalloc\fR or \fBckfree\fR after the overwrite
-occurred, rather than when the specific memory with the overwritten
-guard zone(s) is freed, which may occur long after the overwrite occurred.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBtrace_on_at_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-.br
-Enable memory tracing after \fInnn\fR \fBckallocs\fR have been performed.
-For example, if you enter \fBmemory trace_on_at_malloc 100\fR,
-after the 100th call to \fBckalloc\fR, memory trace information will begin
-being displayed for all allocations and frees. Since there can be a lot
-of memory activity before a problem occurs, judicious use of this option
-can reduce the slowdown caused by tracing (and the amount of trace information
-produced), if you can identify a number of allocations that occur before
-the problem sets in. The current number of memory allocations that have
-occurred since Tcl started is printed on a guard zone failure.
-.TP
-.B memory \fBbreak_on_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-.br
-After the \fBnnn\fR allocations have been performed, \fBckallocs\fR
-output a message to this effect and that it is now attempting to enter
-the C debugger. Tcl will then issue a \fISIGINT\fR signal against itself.
-If you are running Tcl under a C debugger, it should then enter the debugger
-command mode.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBdisplay\fR \fIfile\fR
-.br
-Write a list of all currently allocated memory to the specified file.
-'@endhelp
-'
-.SH DEBUGGING DIFFICULT MEMORY CORRUPTION PROBLEMS
-.PP
-Normally, Tcl compiled with memory debugging enabled will make it easy to isolate
-a corruption problem. Turning on memory validation with the memory command
-can help isolate difficult problems.
-If you suspect (or know) that corruption is
-occurring before the Tcl interpreter comes up far enough for you to
-issue commands, you can set \fBMEM_VALIDATE\fR define, recompile
-tclCkalloc.c and rebuild Tcl. This will enable memory validation
-from the first call to \fBckalloc\fR, again, at a large performance impact.
-.PP
-If you are desperate and validating memory on every call to \fBckalloc\fR
-and \fBckfree\fR isn't enough, you can explicitly call
-\fBTcl_ValidateAllMemory\fR directly at any point. It takes a \fIchar *\fR
-and an \fIint\fR which are normally the filename and line number of the
-caller, but they can actually be anything you want. Remember to remove
-the calls after you find the problem.
-'
-.SH KEYWORDS
-ckalloc, ckfree, free, memory, malloc
-
-
diff --git a/raw/mann/clipboard.n b/raw/mann/clipboard.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d042162..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/clipboard.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,316 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: clipboard.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: clipboard.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH clipboard n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-clipboard \- Manipulate Tk clipboard
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBclipboard \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command provides a Tcl interface to the Tk clipboard,
-which stores data for later retrieval using the selection mechanism.
-In order to copy data into the clipboard, \fBclipboard clear\fR must
-be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to \fBclipboard
-append\fR. To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all
-appends should be completed before returning to the event loop.
-.PP
-The first argument to \fBclipboard\fR determines the format of the
-rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following
-forms are currently supported:
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBclipboard clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR?
-Claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display and removes
-any previous contents. \fIWindow\fR defaults to ``.''. Returns an
-empty string.
-.TP
-\fBclipboard append\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIdata\fR
-Appends \fIdata\fR to the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
-display in the form given by \fItype\fR with the representation given
-by \fIformat\fR and claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's
-display.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
-(the desired ``target'' for conversion, in ICCCM terminology), and
-should be an atom name such as STRING or FILE_NAME; see the
-Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-\fIType\fR defaults to STRING.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument specifies the representation that should be
-used to transmit the selection to the requester (the second column of
-Table 2 of the ICCCM), and defaults to STRING. If \fIformat\fR is
-STRING, the selection is transmitted as 8-bit ASCII characters. If
-\fIformat\fR is ATOM, then the \fIdata\fR is
-divided into fields separated by white space; each field is converted
-to its atom value, and the 32-bit atom value is transmitted instead of
-the atom name. For any other \fIformat\fR, \fIdata\fR is divided
-into fields separated by white space and each
-field is converted to a 32-bit integer; an array of integers is
-transmitted to the selection requester. Note that strings passed to
-\fBclipboard append\fR are concatenated before conversion, so the
-caller must take care to ensure appropriate spacing across string
-boundaries. All items appended to the clipboard with the same
-\fItype\fR must have the same \fIformat\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with
-clipboard requesters that don't use Tk. If the Tk toolkit is being
-used to retrieve the CLIPBOARD selection then the value is converted back to
-a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is
-irrelevant.
-.PP
-A \fB\-\|\-\fR argument may be specified to mark the end of options: the
-next argument will always be used as \fIdata\fR.
-This feature may be convenient if, for example, \fIdata\fR starts
-with a \fB\-\fR.
-.RE
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-clear, format, clipboard, append, selection, type
diff --git a/raw/mann/clock.n b/raw/mann/clock.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f7f40d..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/clock.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,449 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1995 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation
-'\"
-'\" This documentation is derived from the time and date facilities of
-'\" TclX, by Mark Diekhans and Karl Lehenbauer.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: clock.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: clock.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH clock n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-clock \- Obtain and manipulate time
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBclock \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command performs one of several operations that may obtain
-or manipulate strings or values that represent some notion of
-time. The \fIoption\fR argument determines what action is carried
-out by the command. The legal \fIoptions\fR (which may be
-abbreviated) are:
-.TP
-.VS 8.3
-\fBclock clicks\fR ?\fB\-milliseconds\fR?
-Return a high-resolution time value as a system-dependent integer
-value. The unit of the value is system-dependent but should be the
-highest resolution clock available on the system such as a CPU cycle
-counter. If \fB\-milliseconds\fR is specified, then the value is
-guaranteed to be of millisecond granularity.
-This value should only be used for the relative measurement
-of elapsed time.
-.VE 8.3
-.TP
-\fBclock format \fIclockValue\fR ?\fB\-format \fIstring\fR? ?\fB\-gmt \fIboolean\fR?
-Converts an integer time value, typically returned by
-\fBclock seconds\fR, \fBclock scan\fR, or the \fBatime\fR, \fBmtime\fR,
-or \fBctime\fR options of the \fBfile\fR command, to human-readable
-form. If the \fB\-format\fR argument is present the next argument is a
-string that describes how the date and time are to be formatted.
-Field descriptors consist of a \fB%\fR followed by a field
-descriptor character. All other characters are copied into the result.
-Valid field descriptors are:
-.RS
-.IP \fB%%\fR
-Insert a %.
-.IP \fB%a\fR
-Abbreviated weekday name (Mon, Tue, etc.).
-.IP \fB%A\fR
-Full weekday name (Monday, Tuesday, etc.).
-.IP \fB%b\fR
-Abbreviated month name (Jan, Feb, etc.).
-.IP \fB%B\fR
-Full month name.
-.IP \fB%c\fR
-Locale specific date and time.
-.IP \fB%d\fR
-Day of month (01 - 31).
-.IP \fB%H\fR
-Hour in 24-hour format (00 - 23).
-.IP \fB%I\fR
-Hour in 12-hour format (00 - 12).
-.IP \fB%j\fR
-Day of year (001 - 366).
-.IP \fB%m\fR
-Month number (01 - 12).
-.IP \fB%M\fR
-Minute (00 - 59).
-.IP \fB%p\fR
-AM/PM indicator.
-.IP \fB%S\fR
-Seconds (00 - 59).
-.IP \fB%U\fR
-Week of year (00 - 52), Sunday is the first day of the week.
-.IP \fB%w\fR
-Weekday number (Sunday = 0).
-.IP \fB%W\fR
-Week of year (00 - 52), Monday is the first day of the week.
-.IP \fB%x\fR
-Locale specific date format.
-.IP \fB%X\fR
-Locale specific time format.
-.IP \fB%y\fR
-Year without century (00 - 99).
-.IP \fB%Y\fR
-Year with century (e.g. 1990)
-.IP \fB%Z\fR
-Time zone name.
-.RE
-.sp
-.RS
-In addition, the following field descriptors may be supported on some
-systems (e.g. Unix but not Windows):
-.IP \fB%D\fR
-Date as %m/%d/%y.
-.IP \fB%e\fR
-Day of month (1 - 31), no leading zeros.
-.IP \fB%h\fR
-Abbreviated month name.
-.IP \fB%n\fR
-Insert a newline.
-.IP \fB%r\fR
-Time as %I:%M:%S %p.
-.IP \fB%R\fR
-Time as %H:%M.
-.IP \fB%t\fR
-Insert a tab.
-.IP \fB%T\fR
-Time as %H:%M:%S.
-.RE
-.sp
-.RS
-If the \fB\-format\fR argument is not specified, the format string
-"\fB%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %Z %Y\fR" is used. If the \fB\-gmt\fR argument
-is present the next argument must be a boolean which if true specifies
-that the time will be formatted as Greenwich Mean Time. If false
-then the local timezone will be used as defined by the operating
-environment.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBclock scan \fIdateString\fR ?\fB\-base \fIclockVal\fR? ?\fB\-gmt \fIboolean\fR?
-Convert \fIdateString\fR to an integer clock value (see \fBclock seconds\fR).
-This command can parse and convert virtually any standard date and/or time
-string, which can include standard time zone mnemonics. If only a time is
-specified, the current date is assumed. If the string does not contain a
-time zone mnemonic, the local time zone is assumed, unless the \fB\-gmt\fR
-argument is true, in which case the clock value is calculated assuming
-that the specified time is relative to Greenwich Mean Time.
-\fB-gmt\fR, if specified, affects only the computed time value; it does not
-impact the interpretation of \fB-base\fR.
-.sp
-If the \fB\-base\fR flag is specified, the next argument should contain
-an integer clock value. Only the date in this value is used, not the
-time. This is useful for determining the time on a specific day or
-doing other date-relative conversions.
-.sp
-The \fIdateString\fR consists of zero or more specifications of the
-following form:
-.RS
-.TP
-\fItime\fR
-A time of day, which is of the form: \fIhh\fR?\fI:mm\fR?\fI:ss\fR??
-?\fImeridian\fR? ?\fIzone\fR? or \fIhhmm \fR?\fImeridian\fR?
-?\fIzone\fR?. If no meridian is specified, \fIhh\fR is interpreted on
-a 24-hour clock.
-.TP
-\fIdate\fR
-A specific month and day with optional year. The
-acceptable formats are \fImm/dd\fR?\fI/yy\fR?, \fImonthname dd\fR
-?, \fIyy\fR?, \fIdd monthname \fR?\fIyy\fR?, \fIday, dd monthname
-yy\fR, \fI?CC?yymmdd\fR, \fI?CC?yy-mm-dd\fR, \fIdd-monthname-?CC?yy\fR.
-The default year is the current year. If the year is less
-.VS
-than 100, we treat the years 00-68 as 2000-2068 and the years 69-99
-as 1969-1999. Not all platforms can represent the years 38-70, so
-an error may result if these years are used.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fIISO 8601 point-in-time\fR
-An ISO 8601 point-in-time specification, such as \fICCyymmddThhmmss\fR, where
-T is the literal T, \fICCyymmdd hhmmss\fR, or
-\fICCyymmddThh:mm:ss\fR.
-.TP
-\fIrelative time\fR
-A specification relative to the current time. The format is \fInumber
-unit\fR acceptable units are \fByear\fR, \fBfortnight\fR, \fBmonth\fR, \fBweek\fR, \fBday\fR,
-\fBhour\fR, \fBminute\fR (or \fBmin\fR), and \fBsecond\fR (or \fBsec\fR). The
-unit can be specified as a singular or plural, as in \fB3 weeks\fR.
-These modifiers may also be specified:
-\fBtomorrow\fR, \fByesterday\fR, \fBtoday\fR, \fBnow\fR,
-\fBlast\fR, \fBthis\fR, \fBnext\fR, \fBago\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.RS
-The actual date is calculated according to the following steps.
-First, any absolute date and/or time is processed and converted.
-Using that time as the base, day-of-week specifications are added.
-Next, relative specifications are used. If a date or day is
-specified, and no absolute or relative time is given, midnight is
-used. Finally, a correction is applied so that the correct hour of
-the day is produced after allowing for daylight savings time
-differences and the correct date is given when going from the end
-of a long month to a short month.
-.sp
-Daylight savings time correction is applied only when the relative time
-is specified in units of days or more, ie, days, weeks, fortnights, months or
-years. This means that when crossing the daylight savings time boundary,
-different results will be given for \fBclock scan "1 day"\fR and
-\fBclock scan "24 hours"\fR:
-.CS
-.ta 6c
-\fB% clock scan "1 day" -base [clock scan 1999-10-31]
-941443200
-% clock scan "24 hours" -base [clock scan 1999-10-31]
-941439600\fR
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBclock seconds\fR
-Return the current date and time as a system-dependent integer value. The
-unit of the value is seconds, allowing it to be used for relative time
-calculations. The value is usually defined as total elapsed time from
-an ``epoch''. You shouldn't assume the value of the epoch.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-clock, date, time
diff --git a/raw/mann/close.n b/raw/mann/close.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5d584f8..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/close.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,297 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: close.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: close.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH close n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-close \- Close an open channel.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBclose \fIchannelId\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Closes the channel given by \fIchannelId\fR. \fIChannelId\fR must be a
-channel identifier such as the return value from a previous \fBopen\fR
-or \fBsocket\fR command.
-All buffered output is flushed to the channel's output device,
-any buffered input is discarded, the underlying file or device is closed,
-and \fIchannelId\fR becomes unavailable for use.
-.VS "" br
-.PP
-If the channel is blocking, the command does not return until all output
-is flushed.
-If the channel is nonblocking and there is unflushed output, the
-channel remains open and the command
-returns immediately; output will be flushed in the background and the
-channel will be closed when all the flushing is complete.
-.VE
-.PP
-If \fIchannelId\fR is a blocking channel for a command pipeline then
-\fBclose\fR waits for the child processes to complete.
-.VS "" br
-.PP
-If the channel is shared between interpreters, then \fBclose\fR
-makes \fIchannelId\fR unavailable in the invoking interpreter but has no
-other effect until all of the sharing interpreters have closed the
-channel.
-When the last interpreter in which the channel is registered invokes
-\fBclose\fR, the cleanup actions described above occur. See the
-\fBinterp\fR command for a description of channel sharing.
-.PP
-Channels are automatically closed when an interpreter is destroyed and
-when the process exits. Channels are switched to blocking mode, to ensure
-that all output is correctly flushed before the process exits.
-.VE
-.PP
-The command returns an empty string, and may generate an error if
-an error occurs while flushing output.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), open(n), socket(n), eof(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-blocking, channel, close, nonblocking
diff --git a/raw/mann/concat.n b/raw/mann/concat.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 52614ab..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/concat.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,278 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: concat.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: concat.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH concat n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-concat \- Join lists together
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBconcat\fI \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command treats each argument as a list and concatenates them
-into a single list.
-It also eliminates leading and trailing spaces in the \fIarg\fR's
-and adds a single separator space between \fIarg\fR's.
-It permits any number of arguments. For example,
-the command
-.CS
-\fBconcat a b {c d e} {f {g h}}\fR
-.CE
-will return
-.CS
-\fBa b c d e f {g h}\fR
-.CE
-as its result.
-.PP
-If no \fIarg\fRs are supplied, the result is an empty string.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-append(n), eval(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-concatenate, join, lists
diff --git a/raw/mann/continue.n b/raw/mann/continue.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 22a64c6..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/continue.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,272 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: continue.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: continue.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH continue n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-continue \- Skip to the next iteration of a loop
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBcontinue\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is typically invoked inside the body of a looping command
-such as \fBfor\fR or \fBforeach\fR or \fBwhile\fR.
-It returns a TCL_CONTINUE code, which causes a continue exception
-to occur.
-The exception causes the current script to be aborted
-out to the innermost containing loop command, which then
-continues with the next iteration of the loop.
-Catch exceptions are also handled in a few other situations, such
-as the \fBcatch\fR command and the outermost scripts of procedure
-bodies.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-break(n), for(n), foreach(n), while(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-continue, iteration, loop
diff --git a/raw/mann/cursors.n b/raw/mann/cursors.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c3db8f..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/cursors.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,389 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: cursors.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: cursors.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH cursors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-cursors \- mouse cursors available in Tk
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fB-cursor\fR widget option allows a Tk programmer to change the
-mouse cursor for a particular widget. The cursor names recognized by
-Tk on all platforms are:
-.CS
-X_cursor
-arrow
-based_arrow_down
-based_arrow_up
-boat
-bogosity
-bottom_left_corner
-bottom_right_corner
-bottom_side
-bottom_tee
-box_spiral
-center_ptr
-circle
-clock
-coffee_mug
-cross
-cross_reverse
-crosshair
-diamond_cross
-dot
-dotbox
-double_arrow
-draft_large
-draft_small
-draped_box
-exchange
-fleur
-gobbler
-gumby
-hand1
-hand2
-heart
-icon
-iron_cross
-left_ptr
-left_side
-left_tee
-leftbutton
-ll_angle
-lr_angle
-man
-middlebutton
-mouse
-pencil
-pirate
-plus
-question_arrow
-right_ptr
-right_side
-right_tee
-rightbutton
-rtl_logo
-sailboat
-sb_down_arrow
-sb_h_double_arrow
-sb_left_arrow
-sb_right_arrow
-sb_up_arrow
-sb_v_double_arrow
-shuttle
-sizing
-spider
-spraycan
-star
-target
-tcross
-top_left_arrow
-top_left_corner
-top_right_corner
-top_side
-top_tee
-trek
-ul_angle
-umbrella
-ur_angle
-watch
-xterm
-.CE
-
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-
-.TP
-\fBWindows\fR
-On Windows systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
-.RS
-.CS
-arrow
-center_ptr
-crosshair
-fleur
-ibeam
-icon
-sb_h_double_arrow
-sb_v_double_arrow
-watch
-xterm
-.CE
-And the following additional cursors are available:
-.CS
-no
-starting
-size
-size_ne_sw
-size_ns
-size_nw_se
-size_we
-uparrow
-wait
-.CE
-The \fBno\fR cursor can be specified to eliminate the cursor.
-.RE
-
-.TP
-\fBMacintosh\fR
-On Macintosh systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors:
-.RS
-.CS
-arrow
-cross
-crosshair
-ibeam
-plus
-watch
-xterm
-.CE
-And the following additional cursors are available:
-.CS
-text
-cross-hair
-.CE
-.RE
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-cursor, option
diff --git a/raw/mann/dde.n b/raw/mann/dde.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 4dddd17..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/dde.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,371 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: dde.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: dde.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH dde n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-dde \- Execute a Dynamic Data Exchange command
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpackage require dde 1.1\fR
-.sp
-\fBdde \fIservername \fR?\fItopic\fR?
-.sp
-\fBdde ?\-async?\fR \fIcommand service topic \fR?\fIdata\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command allows an application to send Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
-command when running under Microsoft Windows. Dynamic Data Exchange is
-a mechanism where applications can exchange raw data. Each DDE
-transaction needs a \fIservice name\fR and a \fItopic\fR. Both the
-\fIservice name\fR and \fItopic\fR are application defined; Tcl uses
-the service name \fBTclEval\fR, while the topic name is the name of the
-interpreter given by \fBdde servername\fR. Other applications have their
-own \fIservice names\fR and \fItopics\fR. For instance, Microsoft Excel
-has the service name \fBExcel\fR.
-.PP
-The only option to the \fBdde\fR command is:
-.TP
-\fB\-async\fR
-Requests asynchronous invocation. This is valid only for the
-\fBexecute\fR subcommand. Normally, the \fBdde execute\fR subcommand
-waits until the command completes, returning appropriate error
-messages. When the \fB\-async\fR option is used, the command returns
-immediately, and no error information is available.
-.SH "DDE COMMANDS"
-.PP
-The following commands are a subset of the full Dynamic Data Exchange
-set of commands.
-.TP
-\fBdde servername \fR?\fItopic\fR?
-\fBdde servername\fR registers the interpreter as a DDE server with
-the service name \fBTclEval\fR and the topic name specified by \fItopic\fR.
-If no \fItopic\fR is given, \fBdde servername\fR returns the name
-of the current topic or the empty string if it is not registered as a service.
-.TP
-\fBdde execute \fIservice topic data\fR
-\fBdde execute\fR takes the \fIdata\fR and sends it to the server
-indicated by \fIservice\fR with the topic indicated by
-\fItopic\fR. Typically, \fIservice\fR is the name of an application,
-and \fItopic\fR is a file to work on. The \fIdata\fR field is given
-to the remote application. Typically, the application treats the
-\fIdata\fR field as a script, and the script is run in the
-application. The command returns an error if the script did not
-run. If the \fB\-async\fR flag was used, the command
-returns immediately with no error.
-.TP
-\fBdde poke \fIservice topic item data\fR
-\fBdde poke\fR passes the \fIdata\fR to the server indicated by
-\fIservice\fR using the \fItopic\fR and \fIitem\fR specified. Typically,
-\fIservice\fR is the name of an application. \fItopic\fR is application
-specific but can be a command to the server or the name of a file to work
-on. The \fIitem\fR is also application specific and is often not used, but
-it must always be non-null. The \fIdata\fR field is given to the remote
-application.
-.TP
-\fBdde request \fIservice topic item\fR
-\fBdde request\fR is typically used to get the value of something; the
-value of a cell in Microsoft Excel or the text of a selection in
-Microsoft Word. \fIservice\fR is typically the name of an application,
-\fItopic\fR is typically the name of the file, and \fIitem\fR is
-application-specific. The command returns the value of \fIitem\fR as
-defined in the application.
-.TP
-\fBdde services \fIservice topic\fR
-\fBdde services\fR returns a list of service-topic pairs that
-currently exist on the machine. If \fIservice\fR and \fItopic\fR are
-both null strings ({}), then all service-topic pairs currently
-available on the system are returned. If \fIservice\fR is null and
-\fItopic\fR is not, then all services with the specified topic are
-returned. If \fIservice\fR is not null and \fItopic\fR is, all topics
-for a given service are returned. If both are not null, if that
-service-topic pair currently exists, it is returned; otherwise, null
-is returned.
-.TP
-\fBdde eval \fItopic cmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-\fBdde eval\fR evaluates a command and its arguments using the
-interpreter specified by \fItopic\fR. The DDE service must be the
-\fBTclEval\fR service. This command can be used to replace send on
-Windows.
-.SH "DDE AND TCL"
-A Tcl interpreter always has a service name of \fBTclEval\fR. Each
-different interpreter of all running Tcl applications must be
-given a unique
-name specified by \fBdde servername\fR. Each interp is available as a
-DDE topic only if the \fBdde servername\fR command was used to set the
-name of the topic for each interp. So a \fBdde services TclEval {}\fR
-command will return a list of service-topic pairs, where each of the
-currently running interps will be a topic.
-.PP
-When Tcl processes a \fBdde execute\fR command, the data for the
-execute is run as a script in the interp named by the topic of the
-\fBdde execute\fR command.
-.PP
-When Tcl processes a \fBdde request\fR command, it returns the value of the
-variable given in the dde command in the context of the interp named by the
-dde topic. Tcl reserves the variable \fB$TCLEVAL$EXECUTE$RESULT\fR for
-internal use, and \fBdde request\fR commands for that variable will give
-unpredictable results.
-.PP
-An external application which wishes to run a script in Tcl should have
-that script store its result in a variable, run the \fBdde execute\fR
-command, and the run \fBdde request\fR to get the value of the
-variable.
-.PP
-When using DDE, be careful to ensure that the event queue is flushed
-using either \fBupdate\fR or \fBvwait\fR. This happens by default
-when using \fBwish\fR unless a blocking command is called (such as \fBexec\fR
-without adding the \fB&\fR to place the process in the background).
-If for any reason the event queue is not flushed, DDE commands may
-hang until the event queue is flushed. This can create a deadlock
-situation.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-tk(n), winfo(n), send(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, dde, name, remote execution
diff --git a/raw/mann/destroy.n b/raw/mann/destroy.n
deleted file mode 100644
index a0b6805..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/destroy.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: destroy.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: destroy.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH destroy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-destroy \- Destroy one or more windows
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBdestroy \fR?\fIwindow window ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.VS
-.PP
-This command deletes the windows given by the
-\fIwindow\fR arguments, plus all of their descendants.
-If a \fIwindow\fR ``.'' is deleted then the entire application
-will be destroyed.
-The \fIwindow\fRs are destroyed in order, and if an error occurs
-in destroying a window the command aborts without destroying the
-remaining windows.
-No error is returned if \fIwindow\fR does not exist.
-.VE
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application, destroy, window
diff --git a/raw/mann/encoding.n b/raw/mann/encoding.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d3cac8f..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/encoding.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,314 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: encoding.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: encoding.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH encoding n "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-encoding \- Manipulate encodings
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBencoding \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-Strings in Tcl are encoded using 16-bit Unicode characters. Different
-operating system interfaces or applications may generate strings in
-other encodings such as Shift-JIS. The \fBencoding\fR command helps
-to bridge the gap between Unicode and these other formats.
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Performs one of several encoding related operations, depending on
-\fIoption\fR. The legal \fIoption\fRs are:
-.TP
-\fBencoding convertfrom ?\fIencoding\fR? \fIdata\fR
-Convert \fIdata\fR to Unicode from the specified \fIencoding\fR. The
-characters in \fIdata\fR are treated as binary data where the lower
-8-bits of each character is taken as a single byte. The resulting
-sequence of bytes is treated as a string in the specified
-\fIencoding\fR. If \fIencoding\fR is not specified, the current
-system encoding is used.
-.TP
-\fBencoding convertto ?\fIencoding\fR? \fIstring\fR
-Convert \fIstring\fR from Unicode to the specified \fIencoding\fR.
-The result is a sequence of bytes that represents the converted
-string. Each byte is stored in the lower 8-bits of a Unicode
-character. If \fIencoding\fR is not specified, the current
-system encoding is used.
-.TP
-\fBencoding names\fR
-Returns a list containing the names of all of the encodings that are
-currently available.
-.TP
-\fBencoding system\fR ?\fIencoding\fR?
-Set the system encoding to \fIencoding\fR. If \fIencoding\fR is
-omitted then the command returns the current system encoding. The
-system encoding is used whenever Tcl passes strings to system calls.
-
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-It is common practice to write script files using a text editor that
-produces output in the euc-jp encoding, which represents the ASCII
-characters as singe bytes and Japanese characters as two bytes. This
-makes it easy to embed literal strings that correspond to non-ASCII
-characters by simply typing the strings in place in the script.
-However, because the \fBsource\fR command always reads files using the
-ISO8859-1 encoding, Tcl will treat each byte in the file as a separate
-character that maps to the 00 page in Unicode. The
-resulting Tcl strings will not contain the expected Japanese
-characters. Instead, they will contain a sequence of Latin-1
-characters that correspond to the bytes of the original string. The
-\fBencoding\fR command can be used to convert this string to the
-expected Japanese Unicode characters. For example,
-.CS
- set s [encoding convertfrom euc-jp "\\xA4\\xCF"]
-.CE
-would return the Unicode string "\\u306F", which is the Hiragana
-letter HA.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tcl_GetEncoding(3)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-encoding
diff --git a/raw/mann/eof.n b/raw/mann/eof.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c01ed1..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/eof.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,265 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: eof.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: eof.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH eof n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-eof \- Check for end of file condition on channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBeof \fIchannelId\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Returns 1 if an end of file condition occurred during the most
-recent input operation on \fIchannelId\fR (such as \fBgets\fR),
-0 otherwise.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), open(n), close(n), fblocked(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-channel, end of file
diff --git a/raw/mann/error.n b/raw/mann/error.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e69df4..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/error.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,296 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: error.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: error.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH error n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-error \- Generate an error
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBerror \fImessage\fR ?\fIinfo\fR? ?\fIcode\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Returns a TCL_ERROR code, which causes command interpretation to be
-unwound. \fIMessage\fR is a string that is returned to the application
-to indicate what went wrong.
-.PP
-If the \fIinfo\fR argument is provided and is non-empty,
-it is used to initialize the global variable \fBerrorInfo\fR.
-\fBerrorInfo\fR is used to accumulate a stack trace of what
-was in progress when an error occurred; as nested commands unwind,
-the Tcl interpreter adds information to \fBerrorInfo\fR. If the
-\fIinfo\fR argument is present, it is used to initialize
-\fBerrorInfo\fR and the first increment of unwind information
-will not be added by the Tcl interpreter. In other
-words, the command containing the \fBerror\fR command will not appear
-in \fBerrorInfo\fR; in its place will be \fIinfo\fR.
-This feature is most useful in conjunction with the \fBcatch\fR command:
-if a caught error cannot be handled successfully, \fIinfo\fR can be used
-to return a stack trace reflecting the original point of occurrence
-of the error:
-.CS
-\fBcatch {...} errMsg
-set savedInfo $errorInfo
-\&...
-error $errMsg $savedInfo\fR
-.CE
-.PP
-If the \fIcode\fR argument is present, then its value is stored
-in the \fBerrorCode\fR global variable. This variable is intended
-to hold a machine-readable description of the error in cases where
-such information is available; see the \fBtclvars\fR manual
-page for information on the proper format for the variable.
-If the \fIcode\fR argument is not
-present, then \fBerrorCode\fR is automatically reset to
-``NONE'' by the Tcl interpreter as part of processing the
-error generated by the command.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-catch(n), tclvars(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-error, errorCode, errorInfo
diff --git a/raw/mann/eval.n b/raw/mann/eval.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 9046758..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/eval.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,268 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: eval.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: eval.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH eval n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-eval \- Evaluate a Tcl script
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBeval \fIarg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBEval\fR takes one or more arguments, which together comprise a Tcl
-script containing one or more commands.
-\fBEval\fR concatenates all its arguments in the same
-fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command, passes the concatenated string to the
-Tcl interpreter recursively, and returns the result of that
-evaluation (or any error generated by it).
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-concatenate, evaluate, script
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-catch(n), concat(n), error(n), subs(n), tclvars(n)
diff --git a/raw/mann/exec.n b/raw/mann/exec.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e1a2d0..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/exec.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,542 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: exec.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: exec.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH exec n 7.6 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-exec \- Invoke subprocess(es)
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBexec \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIarg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command treats its arguments as the specification
-of one or more subprocesses to execute.
-The arguments take the form of a standard shell pipeline
-where each \fIarg\fR becomes one word of a command, and
-each distinct command becomes a subprocess.
-.PP
-If the initial arguments to \fBexec\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
-they are treated as command-line switches and are not part
-of the pipeline specification. The following switches are
-currently supported:
-.TP 13
-\fB\-keepnewline\fR
-Retains a trailing newline in the pipeline's output.
-Normally a trailing newline will be deleted.
-.TP 13
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-Marks the end of switches. The argument following this one will
-be treated as the first \fIarg\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.PP
-If an \fIarg\fR (or pair of \fIarg\fR's) has one of the forms
-described below then it is used by \fBexec\fR to control the
-flow of input and output among the subprocess(es).
-Such arguments will not be passed to the subprocess(es). In forms
-such as ``< \fIfileName\fR'' \fIfileName\fR may either be in a
-separate argument from ``<'' or in the same argument with no
-intervening space (i.e. ``<\fIfileName\fR'').
-.TP 15
-|
-Separates distinct commands in the pipeline. The standard output
-of the preceding command will be piped into the standard input
-of the next command.
-.TP 15
-|&
-Separates distinct commands in the pipeline. Both standard output
-and standard error of the preceding command will be piped into
-the standard input of the next command.
-This form of redirection overrides forms such as 2> and >&.
-.TP 15
-<\0\fIfileName\fR
-The file named by \fIfileName\fR is opened and used as the standard
-input for the first command in the pipeline.
-.TP 15
-<@\0\fIfileId\fR
-\fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
-value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
-It is used as the standard input for the first command in the pipeline.
-\fIFileId\fR must have been opened for reading.
-.TP 15
-<<\0\fIvalue\fR
-\fIValue\fR is passed to the first command as its standard input.
-.TP 15
->\0\fIfileName\fR
-Standard output from the last command is redirected to the file named
-\fIfileName\fR, overwriting its previous contents.
-.TP 15
-2>\0\fIfileName\fR
-Standard error from all commands in the pipeline is redirected to the
-file named \fIfileName\fR, overwriting its previous contents.
-.TP 15
->&\0\fIfileName\fR
-Both standard output from the last command and standard error from all
-commands are redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR, overwriting
-its previous contents.
-.TP 15
->>\0\fIfileName\fR
-Standard output from the last command is
-redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR, appending to it rather
-than overwriting it.
-.TP 15
-2>>\0\fIfileName\fR
-Standard error from all commands in the pipeline is
-redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR, appending to it rather
-than overwriting it.
-.TP 15
->>&\0\fIfileName\fR
-Both standard output from the last command and standard error from
-all commands are redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR,
-appending to it rather than overwriting it.
-.TP 15
->@\0\fIfileId\fR
-\fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
-value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
-Standard output from the last command is redirected to \fIfileId\fR's
-file, which must have been opened for writing.
-.TP 15
-2>@\0\fIfileId\fR
-\fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
-value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
-Standard error from all commands in the pipeline is
-redirected to \fIfileId\fR's file.
-The file must have been opened for writing.
-.TP 15
->&@\0\fIfileId\fR
-\fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
-value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
-Both standard output from the last command and standard error from
-all commands are redirected to \fIfileId\fR's file.
-The file must have been opened for writing.
-.PP
-If standard output has not been redirected then the \fBexec\fR
-command returns the standard output from the last command
-in the pipeline.
-If any of the commands in the pipeline exit abnormally or
-are killed or suspended, then \fBexec\fR will return an error
-and the error message will include the pipeline's output followed by
-error messages describing the abnormal terminations; the
-\fBerrorCode\fR variable will contain additional information
-about the last abnormal termination encountered.
-If any of the commands writes to its standard error file and that
-standard error isn't redirected,
-then \fBexec\fR will return an error; the error message
-will include the pipeline's standard output, followed by messages
-about abnormal terminations (if any), followed by the standard error
-output.
-.PP
-If the last character of the result or error message
-is a newline then that character is normally deleted
-from the result or error message.
-This is consistent with other Tcl return values, which don't
-normally end with newlines.
-However, if \fB\-keepnewline\fR is specified then the trailing
-newline is retained.
-.PP
-If standard input isn't redirected with ``<'' or ``<<''
-or ``<@'' then the standard input for the first command in the
-pipeline is taken from the application's current standard input.
-.PP
-If the last \fIarg\fR is ``&'' then the pipeline will be
-executed in background.
-In this case the \fBexec\fR command will return a list whose
-elements are the process identifiers for all of the subprocesses
-in the pipeline.
-The standard output from the last command in the pipeline will
-go to the application's standard output if it hasn't been
-redirected, and error output from all of
-the commands in the pipeline will go to the application's
-standard error file unless redirected.
-.PP
-The first word in each command is taken as the command name;
-tilde-substitution is performed on it, and if the result contains
-no slashes then the directories
-in the PATH environment variable are searched for
-an executable by the given name.
-If the name contains a slash then it must refer to an executable
-reachable from the current directory.
-No ``glob'' expansion or other shell-like substitutions
-are performed on the arguments to commands.
-
-.VS
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.TP
-\fBWindows\fR (all versions)
-.
-Reading from or writing to a socket, using the ``\fB@\0\fIfileId\fR''
-notation, does not work. When reading from a socket, a 16-bit DOS
-application will hang and a 32-bit application will return immediately with
-end-of-file. When either type of application writes to a socket, the
-information is instead sent to the console, if one is present, or is
-discarded.
-.sp
-The Tk console text widget does not provide real standard IO capabilities.
-Under Tk, when redirecting from standard input, all applications will see an
-immediate end-of-file; information redirected to standard output or standard
-error will be discarded.
-.sp
-Either forward or backward slashes are accepted as path separators for
-arguments to Tcl commands. When executing an application, the path name
-specified for the application may also contain forward or backward slashes
-as path separators. Bear in mind, however, that most Windows applications
-accept arguments with forward slashes only as option delimiters and
-backslashes only in paths. Any arguments to an application that specify a
-path name with forward slashes will not automatically be converted to use
-the backslash character. If an argument contains forward slashes as the
-path separator, it may or may not be recognized as a path name, depending on
-the program.
-.sp
-Additionally, when calling a 16-bit DOS or Windows 3.X application, all path
-names must use the short, cryptic, path format (e.g., using ``applba~1.def''
-instead of ``applbakery.default'').
-.sp
-Two or more forward or backward slashes in a row in a path refer to a
-network path. For example, a simple concatenation of the root directory
-\fBc:/\fR with a subdirectory \fB/windows/system\fR will yield
-\fBc://windows/system\fR (two slashes together), which refers to the mount
-point called \fBsystem\fR on the machine called \fBwindows\fR (and the
-\fBc:/\fR is ignored), and is not equivalent to \fBc:/windows/system\fR,
-which describes a directory on the current computer. The \fBfile join\fR
-command should be used to concatenate path components.
-.TP
-\fBWindows NT\fR
-.
-When attempting to execute an application, \fBexec\fR first searches for the
-name as it was specified. Then, in order, \fB.com\fR, \fB.exe\fR, and \fB.bat\fR
-are appended to the end of the specified name and it searches for
-the longer name. If a directory name was not specified as part of the
-application name, the following directories are automatically searched in
-order when attempting to locate the application:
-.sp
-.RS
-.RS
-The directory from which the Tcl executable was loaded.
-.br
-The current directory.
-.br
-The Windows NT 32-bit system directory.
-.br
-The Windows NT 16-bit system directory.
-.br
-The Windows NT home directory.
-.br
-The directories listed in the path.
-.RE
-.sp
-In order to execute the shell builtin commands like \fBdir\fR and \fBcopy\fR,
-the caller must prepend ``\fBcmd.exe /c\0\fR'' to the desired command.
-.sp
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBWindows 95\fR
-.
-When attempting to execute an application, \fBexec\fR first searches for the
-name as it was specified. Then, in order, \fB.com\fR, \fB.exe\fR, and \fB.bat\fR
-are appended to the end of the specified name and it searches for
-the longer name. If a directory name was not specified as part of the
-application name, the following directories are automatically searched in
-order when attempting to locate the application:
-.sp
-.RS
-.RS
-The directory from which the Tcl executable was loaded.
-.br
-The current directory.
-.br
-The Windows 95 system directory.
-.br
-The Windows 95 home directory.
-.br
-The directories listed in the path.
-.RE
-.sp
-In order to execute the shell builtin commands like \fBdir\fR and \fBcopy\fR,
-the caller must prepend ``\fBcommand.com /c\0\fR'' to the desired command.
-.sp
-Once a 16-bit DOS application has read standard input from a console and
-then quit, all subsequently run 16-bit DOS applications will see the
-standard input as already closed. 32-bit applications do not have this
-problem and will run correctly, even after a 16-bit DOS application thinks
-that standard input is closed. There is no known workaround for this bug
-at this time.
-.sp
-Redirection between the \fBNUL:\fR device and a 16-bit application does not
-always work. When redirecting from \fBNUL:\fR, some applications may hang,
-others will get an infinite stream of ``0x01'' bytes, and some will actually
-correctly get an immediate end-of-file; the behavior seems to depend upon
-something compiled into the application itself. When redirecting greater than
-4K or so to \fBNUL:\fR, some applications will hang. The above problems do not
-happen with 32-bit applications.
-.sp
-All DOS 16-bit applications are run synchronously. All standard input from
-a pipe to a 16-bit DOS application is collected into a temporary file; the
-other end of the pipe must be closed before the 16-bit DOS application
-begins executing. All standard output or error from a 16-bit DOS
-application to a pipe is collected into temporary files; the application
-must terminate before the temporary files are redirected to the next stage
-of the pipeline. This is due to a workaround for a Windows 95 bug in the
-implementation of pipes, and is how the standard Windows 95 DOS shell
-handles pipes itself.
-.sp
-Certain applications, such as \fBcommand.com\fR, should not be executed
-interactively. Applications which directly access the console window,
-rather than reading from their standard input and writing to their standard
-output may fail, hang Tcl, or even hang the system if their own private
-console window is not available to them.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBMacintosh\fR
-The \fBexec\fR command is not implemented and does not exist under Macintosh.
-.TP
-\fBUnix\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
-The \fBexec\fR command is fully functional and works as described.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-error(n), open(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-execute, pipeline, redirection, subprocess
diff --git a/raw/mann/exit.n b/raw/mann/exit.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b3df64..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/exit.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: exit.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: exit.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH exit n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-exit \- End the application
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBexit \fR?\fIreturnCode\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Terminate the process, returning \fIreturnCode\fR to the
-system as the exit status.
-If \fIreturnCode\fR isn't specified then it defaults
-to 0.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-exec(n), tclvars(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-exit, process
diff --git a/raw/mann/expr.n b/raw/mann/expr.n
deleted file mode 100644
index a78b1e0..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/expr.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,622 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-2000 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: expr.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: expr.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH expr n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-expr \- Evaluate an expression
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBexpr \fIarg \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Concatenates \fIarg\fR's (adding separator spaces between them),
-evaluates the result as a Tcl expression, and returns the value.
-The operators permitted in Tcl expressions are a subset of
-the operators permitted in C expressions, and they have the
-same meaning and precedence as the corresponding C operators.
-Expressions almost always yield numeric results
-(integer or floating-point values).
-For example, the expression
-.CS
-\fBexpr 8.2 + 6\fR
-.CE
-evaluates to 14.2.
-Tcl expressions differ from C expressions in the way that
-operands are specified. Also, Tcl expressions support
-non-numeric operands and string comparisons.
-.SH OPERANDS
-.PP
-A Tcl expression consists of a combination of operands, operators,
-and parentheses.
-White space may be used between the operands and operators and
-parentheses; it is ignored by the expression's instructions.
-Where possible, operands are interpreted as integer values.
-Integer values may be specified in decimal (the normal case), in octal (if the
-first character of the operand is \fB0\fR), or in hexadecimal (if the first
-two characters of the operand are \fB0x\fR).
-If an operand does not have one of the integer formats given
-above, then it is treated as a floating-point number if that is
-possible. Floating-point numbers may be specified in any of the
-ways accepted by an ANSI-compliant C compiler (except that the
-\fBf\fR, \fBF\fR, \fBl\fR, and \fBL\fR suffixes will not be permitted in
-most installations). For example, all of the
-following are valid floating-point numbers: 2.1, 3., 6e4, 7.91e+16.
-If no numeric interpretation is possible, then an operand is left
-as a string (and only a limited set of operators may be applied to
-it).
-.PP
-Operands may be specified in any of the following ways:
-.IP [1]
-As an numeric value, either integer or floating-point.
-.IP [2]
-As a Tcl variable, using standard \fB$\fR notation.
-The variable's value will be used as the operand.
-.IP [3]
-As a string enclosed in double-quotes.
-The expression parser will perform backslash, variable, and
-command substitutions on the information between the quotes,
-and use the resulting value as the operand
-.IP [4]
-As a string enclosed in braces.
-The characters between the open brace and matching close brace
-will be used as the operand without any substitutions.
-.IP [5]
-As a Tcl command enclosed in brackets.
-The command will be executed and its result will be used as
-the operand.
-.IP [6]
-As a mathematical function whose arguments have any of the above
-forms for operands, such as \fBsin($x)\fR. See below for a list of defined
-functions.
-.LP
-Where substitutions occur above (e.g. inside quoted strings), they
-are performed by the expression's instructions.
-However, an additional layer of substitution may already have
-been performed by the command parser before the expression
-processor was called.
-As discussed below, it is usually best to enclose expressions
-in braces to prevent the command parser from performing substitutions
-on the contents.
-.PP
-For some examples of simple expressions, suppose the variable
-\fBa\fR has the value 3 and
-the variable \fBb\fR has the value 6.
-Then the command on the left side of each of the lines below
-will produce the value on the right side of the line:
-.CS
-.ta 6c
-\fBexpr 3.1 + $a 6.1
-expr 2 + "$a.$b" 5.6
-expr 4*[llength "6 2"] 8
-expr {{word one} < "word $a"} 0\fR
-.CE
-.SH OPERATORS
-.PP
-The valid operators are listed below, grouped in decreasing order
-of precedence:
-.TP 20
-\fB\-\0\0+\0\0~\0\0!\fR
-Unary minus, unary plus, bit-wise NOT, logical NOT. None of these operands
-may be applied to string operands, and bit-wise NOT may be
-applied only to integers.
-.TP 20
-\fB*\0\0/\0\0%\fR
-Multiply, divide, remainder. None of these operands may be
-applied to string operands, and remainder may be applied only
-to integers.
-The remainder will always have the same sign as the divisor and
-an absolute value smaller than the divisor.
-.TP 20
-\fB+\0\0\-\fR
-Add and subtract. Valid for any numeric operands.
-.TP 20
-\fB<<\0\0>>\fR
-Left and right shift. Valid for integer operands only.
-A right shift always propagates the sign bit.
-.TP 20
-\fB<\0\0>\0\0<=\0\0>=\fR
-Boolean less, greater, less than or equal, and greater than or equal.
-Each operator produces 1 if the condition is true, 0 otherwise.
-These operators may be applied to strings as well as numeric operands,
-in which case string comparison is used.
-.TP 20
-\fB==\0\0!=\fR
-Boolean equal and not equal. Each operator produces a zero/one result.
-Valid for all operand types.
-.TP 20
-\fB&\fR
-Bit-wise AND. Valid for integer operands only.
-.TP 20
-\fB^\fR
-Bit-wise exclusive OR. Valid for integer operands only.
-.TP 20
-\fB|\fR
-Bit-wise OR. Valid for integer operands only.
-.TP 20
-\fB&&\fR
-Logical AND. Produces a 1 result if both operands are non-zero,
-0 otherwise.
-Valid for boolean and numeric (integers or floating-point) operands only.
-.TP 20
-\fB||\fR
-Logical OR. Produces a 0 result if both operands are zero, 1 otherwise.
-Valid for boolean and numeric (integers or floating-point) operands only.
-.TP 20
-\fIx\fB?\fIy\fB:\fIz\fR
-If-then-else, as in C. If \fIx\fR
-evaluates to non-zero, then the result is the value of \fIy\fR.
-Otherwise the result is the value of \fIz\fR.
-The \fIx\fR operand must have a numeric value.
-.LP
-See the C manual for more details on the results
-produced by each operator.
-All of the binary operators group left-to-right within the same
-precedence level. For example, the command
-.CS
-\fBexpr 4*2 < 7\fR
-.CE
-returns 0.
-.PP
-The \fB&&\fR, \fB||\fR, and \fB?:\fR operators have ``lazy
-evaluation'', just as in C,
-which means that operands are not evaluated if they are
-not needed to determine the outcome. For example, in the command
-.CS
-\fBexpr {$v ? [a] : [b]}\fR
-.CE
-only one of \fB[a]\fR or \fB[b]\fR will actually be evaluated,
-depending on the value of \fB$v\fR. Note, however, that this is
-only true if the entire expression is enclosed in braces; otherwise
-the Tcl parser will evaluate both \fB[a]\fR and \fB[b]\fR before
-invoking the \fBexpr\fR command.
-.SH "MATH FUNCTIONS"
-.PP
-Tcl supports the following mathematical functions in expressions:
-.DS
-.ta 3c 6c 9c
-\fBabs\fR \fBcosh\fR \fBlog\fR \fBsqrt\fR
-\fBacos\fR \fBdouble\fR \fBlog10\fR \fBsrand\fR
-\fBasin\fR \fBexp\fR \fBpow\fR \fBtan\fR
-\fBatan\fR \fBfloor\fR \fBrand\fR \fBtanh\fR
-\fBatan2\fR \fBfmod\fR \fBround\fR
-\fBceil\fR \fBhypot\fR \fBsin\fR
-\fBcos\fR \fBint\fR \fBsinh\fR
-.DE
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBabs(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the absolute value of \fIarg\fR. \fIArg\fR may be either
-integer or floating-point, and the result is returned in the same form.
-.TP
-\fBacos(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc cosine of \fIarg\fR, in the range [0,pi]
-radians. \fIArg\fR should be in the range [-1,1].
-.TP
-\fBasin(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc sine of \fIarg\fR, in the range [-pi/2,pi/2] radians.
-\fIArg\fR should be in the range [-1,1].
-.TP
-\fBatan(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc tangent of \fIarg\fR, in the range [-pi/2,pi/2] radians.
-.TP
-\fBatan2(\fIx, y\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc tangent of \fIy\fR/\fIx\fR, in the range [-pi,pi]
-radians. \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR cannot both be 0.
-.TP
-\fBceil(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the smallest integer value not less than \fIarg\fR.
-.TP
-\fBcos(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the cosine of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
-.TP
-\fBcosh(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the hyperbolic cosine of \fIarg\fR. If the result would cause
-an overflow, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBdouble(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-If \fIarg\fR is a floating value, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise converts
-\fIarg\fR to floating and returns the converted value.
-.TP
-\fBexp(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the exponential of \fIarg\fR, defined as e**\fIarg\fR. If the
-result would cause an overflow, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBfloor(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the largest integral value not greater than \fIarg\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfmod(\fIx, y\fB)\fR
-Returns the floating-point remainder of the division of \fIx\fR by
-\fIy\fR. If \fIy\fR is 0, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBhypot(\fIx, y\fB)\fR
-Computes the length of the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle
-(\fIx\fR*\fIx\fR+\fIy\fR*\fIy\fR).
-.TP
-\fBint(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-If \fIarg\fR is an integer value, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise converts
-\fIarg\fR to integer by truncation and returns the converted value.
-.TP
-\fBlog(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the natural logarithm of \fIarg\fR. \fIArg\fR must be a
-positive value.
-.TP
-\fBlog10(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the base 10 logarithm of \fIarg\fR. \fIArg\fR must be a
-positive value.
-.TP
-\fBpow(\fIx, y\fB)\fR
-Computes the value of \fIx\fR raised to the power \fIy\fR. If \fIx\fR
-is negative, \fIy\fR must be an integer value.
-.TP
-\fBrand()\fR
-Returns a floating point number from zero to just less than one or,
-in mathematical terms, the range [0,1). The seed comes from the
-internal clock of the machine or may be set manual with the srand
-function.
-.TP
-\fBround(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-If \fIarg\fR is an integer value, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise converts
-\fIarg\fR to integer by rounding and returns the converted value.
-.TP
-\fBsin(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the sine of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
-.TP
-\fBsinh(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the hyperbolic sine of \fIarg\fR. If the result would cause
-an overflow, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBsqrt(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the square root of \fIarg\fR. \fIArg\fR must be non-negative.
-.TP
-\fBsrand(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-The \fIarg\fR, which must be an integer, is used to reset the seed for
-the random number generator. Returns the first random number from
-that seed. Each interpreter has it's own seed.
-.TP
-\fBtan(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the tangent of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
-.TP
-\fBtanh(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the hyperbolic tangent of \fIarg\fR.
-.PP
-In addition to these predefined functions, applications may
-define additional functions using \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR().
-.SH "TYPES, OVERFLOW, AND PRECISION"
-.PP
-All internal computations involving integers are done with the C type
-\fIlong\fR, and all internal computations involving floating-point are
-done with the C type \fIdouble\fR.
-When converting a string to floating-point, exponent overflow is
-detected and results in a Tcl error.
-For conversion to integer from string, detection of overflow depends
-on the behavior of some routines in the local C library, so it should
-be regarded as unreliable.
-In any case, integer overflow and underflow are generally not detected
-reliably for intermediate results. Floating-point overflow and underflow
-are detected to the degree supported by the hardware, which is generally
-pretty reliable.
-.PP
-Conversion among internal representations for integer, floating-point,
-and string operands is done automatically as needed.
-For arithmetic computations, integers are used until some
-floating-point number is introduced, after which floating-point is used.
-For example,
-.CS
-\fBexpr 5 / 4\fR
-.CE
-returns 1, while
-.CS
-\fBexpr 5 / 4.0\fR
-\fBexpr 5 / ( [string length "abcd"] + 0.0 )\fR
-.CE
-both return 1.25.
-Floating-point values are always returned with a ``\fB.\fR''
-or an \fBe\fR so that they will not look like integer values. For
-example,
-.CS
-\fBexpr 20.0/5.0\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB4.0\fR, not \fB4\fR.
-
-.SH "STRING OPERATIONS"
-.PP
-String values may be used as operands of the comparison operators,
-although the expression evaluator tries to do comparisons as integer
-or floating-point when it can.
-If one of the operands of a comparison is a string and the other
-has a numeric value, the numeric operand is converted back to
-a string using the C \fIsprintf\fR format specifier
-\fB%d\fR for integers and \fB%g\fR for floating-point values.
-For example, the commands
-.CS
-\fBexpr {"0x03" > "2"}\fR
-\fBexpr {"0y" < "0x12"}\fR
-.CE
-both return 1. The first comparison is done using integer
-comparison, and the second is done using string comparison after
-the second operand is converted to the string \fB18\fR.
-Because of Tcl's tendency to treat values as numbers whenever
-possible, it isn't generally a good idea to use operators like \fB==\fR
-when you really want string comparison and the values of the
-operands could be arbitrary; it's better in these cases to use
-the \fBstring\fR command instead.
-
-.SH "PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS"
-.PP
-Enclose expressions in braces for the best speed and the smallest
-storage requirements.
-This allows the Tcl bytecode compiler to generate the best code.
-.PP
-As mentioned above, expressions are substituted twice:
-once by the Tcl parser and once by the \fBexpr\fR command.
-For example, the commands
-.CS
-\fBset a 3\fR
-\fBset b {$a + 2}\fR
-\fBexpr $b*4\fR
-.CE
-return 11, not a multiple of 4.
-This is because the Tcl parser will first substitute \fB$a + 2\fR for
-the variable \fBb\fR,
-then the \fBexpr\fR command will evaluate the expression \fB$a + 2*4\fR.
-.PP
-Most expressions do not require a second round of substitutions.
-Either they are enclosed in braces or, if not,
-their variable and command substitutions yield numbers or strings
-that don't themselves require substitutions.
-However, because a few unbraced expressions
-need two rounds of substitutions,
-the bytecode compiler must emit
-additional instructions to handle this situation.
-The most expensive code is required for
-unbraced expressions that contain command substitutions.
-These expressions must be implemented by generating new code
-each time the expression is executed.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-arithmetic, boolean, compare, expression, fuzzy comparison
diff --git a/raw/mann/fblocked.n b/raw/mann/fblocked.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d58f40a..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/fblocked.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,268 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fblocked.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fblocked.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH fblocked n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-fblocked \- Test whether the last input operation exhausted all available input
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBfblocked \fIchannelId\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBfblocked\fR command returns 1 if the most recent input operation
-on \fIchannelId\fR returned less information than requested because all
-available input was exhausted.
-For example, if \fBgets\fR is invoked when there are only three
-characters available for input and no end-of-line sequence, \fBgets\fR
-returns an empty string and a subsequent call to \fBfblocked\fR will
-return 1.
-.PP
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-gets(n), open(n), read(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-blocking, nonblocking
diff --git a/raw/mann/fconfigure.n b/raw/mann/fconfigure.n
deleted file mode 100644
index fdaf1b9..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/fconfigure.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,436 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fconfigure.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fconfigure.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH fconfigure n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-fconfigure \- Set and get options on a channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBfconfigure \fIchannelId\fR
-\fBfconfigure \fIchannelId\fR \fIname\fR
-\fBfconfigure \fIchannelId\fR \fIname value \fR?\fIname value ...\fR?
-.fi
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBfconfigure\fR command sets and retrieves options for channels.
-\fIChannelId\fR identifies the channel for which to set or query an option.
-If no \fIname\fR or \fIvalue\fR arguments are supplied, the command
-returns a list containing alternating option names and values for the channel.
-If \fIname\fR is supplied but no \fIvalue\fR then the command returns
-the current value of the given option.
-If one or more pairs of \fIname\fR and \fIvalue\fR are supplied, the
-command sets each of the named options to the corresponding \fIvalue\fR;
-in this case the return value is an empty string.
-.PP
-The options described below are supported for all channels. In addition,
-each channel type may add options that only it supports. See the manual
-entry for the command that creates each type of channels for the options
-that that specific type of channel supports. For example, see the manual
-entry for the \fBsocket\fR command for its additional options.
-.TP
-\fB\-blocking\fR \fIboolean\fR
-The \fB\-blocking\fR option determines whether I/O operations on the
-channel can cause the process to block indefinitely.
-The value of the option must be a proper boolean value.
-Channels are normally in blocking mode; if a channel is placed into
-nonblocking mode it will affect the operation of the \fBgets\fR,
-\fBread\fR, \fBputs\fR, \fBflush\fR, and \fBclose\fR commands;
-see the documentation for those commands for details.
-For nonblocking mode to work correctly, the application must be
-using the Tcl event loop (e.g. by calling \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR or
-invoking the \fBvwait\fR command).
-.TP
-\fB\-buffering\fR \fInewValue\fR
-.
-If \fInewValue\fR is \fBfull\fR then the I/O system will buffer output
-until its internal buffer is full or until the \fBflush\fR command is
-invoked. If \fInewValue\fR is \fBline\fR, then the I/O system will
-automatically flush output for the channel whenever a newline character
-is output. If \fInewValue\fR is \fBnone\fR, the I/O system will flush
-automatically after every output operation. The default is for
-\fB\-buffering\fR to be set to \fBfull\fR except for channels that
-connect to terminal-like devices; for these channels the initial setting
-is \fBline\fR. Additionally, \fBstdin\fR and \fBstdout\fR are
-intially set to \fBline\fR, and \fBstderr\fR is set to \fBnone\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-buffersize\fR \fInewSize\fR
-.
-\fINewvalue\fR must be an integer; its value is used to set the size of
-buffers, in bytes, subsequently allocated for this channel to store input
-or output. \fINewvalue\fR must be between ten and one million, allowing
-buffers of ten to one million bytes in size.
-.VS 8.1 br
-.TP
-\fB\-encoding\fR \fIname\fR
-.
-This option is used to specify the encoding of the channel, so that the data
-can be converted to and from Unicode for use in Tcl. For instance, in
-order for Tcl to read characters from a Japanese file in \fBshiftjis\fR
-and properly process and display the contents, the encoding would be set
-to \fBshiftjis\fR. Thereafter, when reading from the channel, the bytes in
-the Japanese file would be converted to Unicode as they are read.
-Writing is also supported \- as Tcl strings are written to the channel they
-will automatically be converted to the specified encoding on output.
-.RS
-.PP
-If a file contains pure binary data (for instance, a JPEG image), the
-encoding for the channel should be configured to be \fBbinary\fR. Tcl
-will then assign no interpretation to the data in the file and simply read or
-write raw bytes. The Tcl \fBbinary\fR command can be used to manipulate this
-byte-oriented data.
-.PP
-The default encoding for newly opened channels is the same platform- and
-locale-dependent system encoding used for interfacing with the operating
-system.
-.RE
-.VE
-.TP
-\fB\-eofchar\fR \fIchar\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-eofchar\fR \fB{\fIinChar outChar\fB}\fR
-.
-This option supports DOS file systems that use Control-z (\ex1a) as an
-end of file marker. If \fIchar\fR is not an empty string, then this
-character signals end-of-file when it is encountered during input. For
-output, the end-of-file character is output when the channel is closed.
-If \fIchar\fR is the empty string, then there is no special end of file
-character marker. For read-write channels, a two-element list specifies
-the end of file marker for input and output, respectively. As a
-convenience, when setting the end-of-file character for a read-write
-channel you can specify a single value that will apply to both reading
-and writing. When querying the end-of-file character of a read-write
-channel, a two-element list will always be returned. The default value
-for \fB\-eofchar\fR is the empty string in all cases except for files
-under Windows. In that case the \fB\-eofchar\fR is Control-z (\ex1a) for
-reading and the empty string for writing.
-.TP
-\fB\-translation\fR \fImode\fR
-.TP
-\fB\-translation\fR \fB{\fIinMode outMode\fB}\fR
-.
-In Tcl scripts the end of a line is always represented using a single
-newline character (\en). However, in actual files and devices the end of
-a line may be represented differently on different platforms, or even for
-different devices on the same platform. For example, under UNIX newlines
-are used in files, whereas carriage-return-linefeed sequences are
-normally used in network connections. On input (i.e., with \fBgets\fP
-and \fBread\fP) the Tcl I/O system automatically translates the external
-end-of-line representation into newline characters. Upon output (i.e.,
-with \fBputs\fP), the I/O system translates newlines to the external
-end-of-line representation. The default translation mode, \fBauto\fP,
-handles all the common cases automatically, but the \fB\-translation\fR
-option provides explicit control over the end of line translations.
-.RS
-.PP
-The value associated with \fB\-translation\fR is a single item for
-read-only and write-only channels. The value is a two-element list for
-read-write channels; the read translation mode is the first element of
-the list, and the write translation mode is the second element. As a
-convenience, when setting the translation mode for a read-write channel
-you can specify a single value that will apply to both reading and
-writing. When querying the translation mode of a read-write channel, a
-two-element list will always be returned. The following values are
-currently supported:
-.TP
-\fBauto\fR
-.
-As the input translation mode, \fBauto\fR treats any of newline
-(\fBlf\fP), carriage return (\fBcr\fP), or carriage return followed by a
-newline (\fBcrlf\fP) as the end of line representation. The end of line
-representation can even change from line-to-line, and all cases are
-translated to a newline. As the output translation mode, \fBauto\fR
-chooses a platform specific representation; for sockets on all platforms
-Tcl chooses \fBcrlf\fR, for all Unix flavors, it chooses \fBlf\fR, for the
-Macintosh platform it chooses \fBcr\fR and for the various flavors of
-Windows it chooses \fBcrlf\fR. The default setting for
-\fB\-translation\fR is \fBauto\fR for both input and output.
-.VS 8.1 br
-.TP
-\fBbinary\fR
-.
-No end-of-line translations are performed. This is nearly identical to
-\fBlf\fP mode, except that in addition \fBbinary\fP mode also sets the
-end-of-file character to the empty string (which disables it) and sets the
-encoding to \fBbinary\fR (which disables encoding filtering). See the
-description of \fB\-eofchar\fR and \fB\-encoding\fR for more information.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBcr\fR
-.
-The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
-single carriage return character. As the input translation mode,
-\fBcr\fP mode converts carriage returns to newline characters. As the
-output translation mode, \fBcr\fP mode translates newline characters to
-carriage returns. This mode is typically used on Macintosh platforms.
-.TP
-\fBcrlf\fR
-.
-The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
-carriage return character followed by a linefeed character. As the input
-translation mode, \fBcrlf\fP mode converts carriage-return-linefeed
-sequences to newline characters. As the output translation mode,
-\fBcrlf\fP mode translates newline characters to carriage-return-linefeed
-sequences. This mode is typically used on Windows platforms and for
-network connections.
-.TP
-\fBlf\fR
-.
-The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
-single newline (linefeed) character. In this mode no translations occur
-during either input or output. This mode is typically used on UNIX
-platforms.
-.RE
-.PP
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-close(n), flush(n), gets(n), puts(n), read(n), socket(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-blocking, buffering, carriage return, end of line, flushing, linemode,
-newline, nonblocking, platform, translation, encoding, filter, byte array,
-binary
diff --git a/raw/mann/fcopy.n b/raw/mann/fcopy.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ac265e..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/fcopy.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,362 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fcopy.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fcopy.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH fcopy n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-fcopy \- Copy data from one channel to another.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBfcopy \fIinchan\fR \fIoutchan\fR ?\fB\-size \fIsize\fR? ?\fB\-command \fIcallback\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBfcopy\fP command copies data from one I/O channel, \fIinchan\fR to another I/O channel, \fIoutchan\fR.
-The \fBfcopy\fP command leverages the buffering in the Tcl I/O system to
-avoid extra copies and to avoid buffering too much data in
-main memory when copying large files to slow destinations like
-network sockets.
-.PP
-The \fBfcopy\fP
-command transfers data from \fIinchan\fR until end of file
-or \fIsize\fP bytes have been
-transferred. If no \fB\-size\fP argument is given,
-then the copy goes until end of file.
-All the data read from \fIinchan\fR is copied to \fIoutchan\fR.
-Without the \fB\-command\fP option, \fBfcopy\fP blocks until the copy is complete
-and returns the number of bytes written to \fIoutchan\fR.
-.PP
-The \fB\-command\fP argument makes \fBfcopy\fP work in the background.
-In this case it returns immediately and the \fIcallback\fP is invoked
-later when the copy completes.
-The \fIcallback\fP is called with
-one or two additional
-arguments that indicates how many bytes were written to \fIoutchan\fR.
-If an error occurred during the background copy, the second argument is the
-error string associated with the error.
-With a background copy,
-it is not necessary to put \fIinchan\fR or \fIoutchan\fR into
-non-blocking mode; the \fBfcopy\fP command takes care of that automatically.
-However, it is necessary to enter the event loop by using
-the \fBvwait\fP command or by using Tk.
-.PP
-You are not allowed to do other I/O operations with
-\fIinchan\fR or \fIoutchan\fR during a background fcopy.
-If either \fIinchan\fR or \fIoutchan\fR get closed
-while the copy is in progress, the current copy is stopped
-and the command callback is \fInot\fP made.
-If \fIinchan\fR is closed,
-then all data already queued for \fIoutchan\fR is written out.
-.PP
-Note that \fIinchan\fR can become readable during a background copy.
-You should turn off any \fBfileevent\fP handlers during a background
-copy so those handlers do not interfere with the copy.
-Any I/O attempted by a \fBfileevent\fP handler will get a "channel busy" error.
-.PP
-\fBFcopy\fR translates end-of-line sequences in \fIinchan\fR and \fIoutchan\fR
-according to the \fB\-translation\fR option
-for these channels.
-See the manual entry for \fBfconfigure\fR for details on the
-\fB\-translation\fR option.
-The translations mean that the number of bytes read from \fIinchan\fR
-can be different than the number of bytes written to \fIoutchan\fR.
-Only the number of bytes written to \fIoutchan\fR is reported,
-either as the return value of a synchronous \fBfcopy\fP or
-as the argument to the callback for an asynchronous \fBfcopy\fP.
-
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.PP
-This first example shows how the callback gets
-passed the number of bytes transferred.
-It also uses vwait to put the application into the event loop.
-Of course, this simplified example could be done without the command
-callback.
-.DS
-proc Cleanup {in out bytes {error {}}} {
- global total
- set total $bytes
- close $in
- close $out
- if {[string length $error] != 0} {
- # error occurred during the copy
- }
-}
-set in [open $file1]
-set out [socket $server $port]
-fcopy $in $out -command [list Cleanup $in $out]
-vwait total
-
-.DE
-.PP
-The second example copies in chunks and tests for end of file
-in the command callback
-.DS
-proc CopyMore {in out chunk bytes {error {}}} {
- global total done
- incr total $bytes
- if {([string length $error] != 0) || [eof $in] {
- set done $total
- close $in
- close $out
- } else {
- fcopy $in $out -command [list CopyMore $in $out $chunk] \\
- -size $chunk
- }
-}
-set in [open $file1]
-set out [socket $server $port]
-set chunk 1024
-set total 0
-fcopy $in $out -command [list CopyMore $in $out $chunk] -size $chunk
-vwait done
-
-.DE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-eof(n), fblocked(n), fconfigure(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-blocking, channel, end of line, end of file, nonblocking, read, translation
diff --git a/raw/mann/file.n b/raw/mann/file.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 67bf110..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/file.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,579 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: file.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: file.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH file n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-file \- Manipulate file names and attributes
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBfile \fIoption\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command provides several operations on a file's name or attributes.
-\fIName\fR is the name of a file; if it starts with a tilde, then tilde
-substitution is done before executing the command (see the manual entry for
-\fBfilename\fR for details). \fIOption\fR indicates what to do with the
-file name. Any unique abbreviation for \fIoption\fR is acceptable. The
-valid options are:
-.TP
-\fBfile atime \fIname\fR ?\fBtime\fR?
-.
-Returns a decimal string giving the time at which file \fIname\fR was last
-accessed. If \fItime\fR is specified, it is an access time to set
-for the file. The time is measured in the standard POSIX fashion as
-seconds from a fixed starting time (often January 1, 1970). If the file
-doesn't exist or its access time cannot be queried or set then an error is
-generated. On Windows, FAT file systems do not support access time.
-.TP
-\fBfile attributes \fIname\fR
-.br
-\fBfile attributes \fIname\fR ?\fBoption\fR?
-.br
-\fBfile attributes \fIname\fR ?\fBoption value option value...\fR?
-.RS
-This subcommand returns or sets platform specific values associated
-with a file. The first form returns a list of the platform specific
-flags and their values. The second form returns the value for the
-specific option. The third form sets one or more of the values. The
-values are as follows:
-.PP
-On Unix, \fB-group\fR gets or sets the group name for the file. A group id
-can be given to the command, but it returns a group name. \fB-owner\fR gets
-or sets the user name of the owner of the file. The command returns the
-owner name, but the numerical id can be passed when setting the
-owner. \fB-permissions\fR sets or retrieves the octal code that chmod(1)
-uses. This command does also has limited support for setting using the
-symbolic attributes for chmod(1), of the form [ugo]?[[+\-=][rwxst],[...]],
-where multiple symbolic attributes can be separated by commas (example:
-\fBu+s,go\-rw\fR add sticky bit for user, remove read and write
-permissions for group and other). A simplified \fBls\fR style string,
-of the form rwxrwxrwx (must be 9 characters), is also supported
-(example: \fBrwxr\-xr\-t\fR is equivalent to 01755).
-.PP
-On Windows, \fB-archive\fR gives the value or sets or clears the
-archive attribute of the file. \fB-hidden\fR gives the value or sets
-or clears the hidden attribute of the file. \fB-longname\fR will
-expand each path element to its long version. This attribute cannot be
-set. \fB-readonly\fR gives the value or sets or clears the readonly
-attribute of the file. \fB-shortname\fR gives a string where every
-path element is replaced with its short (8.3) version of the
-name. This attribute cannot be set. \fB-system\fR gives or sets or
-clears the value of the system attribute of the file.
-.PP
-On Macintosh, \fB-creator\fR gives or sets the Finder creator type of
-the file. \fB-hidden\fR gives or sets or clears the hidden attribute
-of the file. \fB-readonly\fR gives or sets or clears the readonly
-attribute of the file. Note that directories can only be locked if
-File Sharing is turned on. \fB-type\fR gives or sets the Finder file
-type for the file.
-.RE
-.VS
-.TP
-\fBfile channels ?\fIpattern\fR?
-.
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of names of all
-registered open channels in this interpreter. If \fIpattern\fR is
-specified, only those names matching \fIpattern\fR are returned. Matching
-is determined using the same rules as for \fBstring match\fR.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBfile copy \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR \fItarget\fR
-.br
-\fBfile copy \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR ?\fIsource\fR ...? \fItargetDir\fR
-.RS
-The first form makes a copy of the file or directory \fIsource\fR under
-the pathname \fItarget\fR. If \fItarget\fR is an existing directory,
-then the second form is used. The second form makes a copy inside
-\fItargetDir\fR of each \fIsource\fR file listed. If a directory is
-specified as a \fIsource\fR, then the contents of the directory will be
-recursively copied into \fItargetDir\fR. Existing files will not be
-overwritten unless the \fB\-force\fR option is specified. Trying to
-overwrite a non-empty directory, overwrite a directory with a file, or a
-file with a directory will all result in errors even if \fI\-force\fR was
-specified. Arguments are processed in the order specified, halting at the
-first error, if any. A \fB\-\|\-\fR marks the end of switches; the argument
-following the \fB\-\|\-\fR will be treated as a \fIsource\fR even if it
-starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfile delete \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIpathname\fR ?\fIpathname\fR ... ?
-.
-Removes the file or directory specified by each \fIpathname\fR argument.
-Non-empty directories will be removed only if the \fB\-force\fR option is
-specified. Trying to delete a non-existant file is not considered an
-error. Trying to delete a read-only file will cause the file to be deleted,
-even if the \fB\-force\fR flags is not specified. Arguments are processed
-in the order specified, halting at the first error, if any. A \fB\-\|\-\fR
-marks the end of switches; the argument following the \fB\-\|\-\fR will be
-treated as a \fIpathname\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfile dirname \fIname\fR
-Returns a name comprised of all of the path components in \fIname\fR
-excluding the last element. If \fIname\fR is a relative file name and
-only contains one path element, then returns ``\fB.\fR'' (or ``\fB:\fR''
-on the Macintosh). If \fIname\fR refers to a root directory, then the
-root directory is returned. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBfile dirname c:/\fR
-.CE
-returns \fBc:/\fR.
-.PP
-Note that tilde substitution will only be
-performed if it is necessary to complete the command. For example,
-.CS
-\fBfile dirname ~/src/foo.c\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB~/src\fR, whereas
-.CS
-\fBfile dirname ~\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB/home\fR (or something similar).
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfile executable \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR is executable by the current user,
-\fB0\fR otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBfile exists \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR exists and the current user has
-search privileges for the directories leading to it, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBfile extension \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns all of the characters in \fIname\fR after and including the last
-dot in the last element of \fIname\fR. If there is no dot in the last
-element of \fIname\fR then returns the empty string.
-.TP
-\fBfile isdirectory \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR is a directory, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBfile isfile \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR is a regular file, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBfile join \fIname\fR ?\fIname ...\fR?
-.
-Takes one or more file names and combines them, using the correct path
-separator for the current platform. If a particular \fIname\fR is
-relative, then it will be joined to the previous file name argument.
-Otherwise, any earlier arguments will be discarded, and joining will
-proceed from the current argument. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBfile join a b /foo bar\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB/foo/bar\fR.
-.PP
-Note that any of the names can contain separators, and that the result
-is always canonical for the current platform: \fB/\fR for Unix and
-Windows, and \fB:\fR for Macintosh.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfile lstat \fIname varName\fR
-.
-Same as \fBstat\fR option (see below) except uses the \fIlstat\fR
-kernel call instead of \fIstat\fR. This means that if \fIname\fR
-refers to a symbolic link the information returned in \fIvarName\fR
-is for the link rather than the file it refers to. On systems that
-don't support symbolic links this option behaves exactly the same
-as the \fBstat\fR option.
-.TP
-\fBfile mkdir \fIdir\fR ?\fIdir\fR ...?
-.
-Creates each directory specified. For each pathname \fIdir\fR specified,
-this command will create all non-existing parent directories as
-well as \fIdir\fR itself. If an existing directory is specified, then
-no action is taken and no error is returned. Trying to overwrite an existing
-file with a directory will result in an error. Arguments are processed in
-the order specified, halting at the first error, if any.
-.TP
-\fBfile mtime \fIname\fR ?\fItime\fR?
-.
-Returns a decimal string giving the time at which file \fIname\fR was last
-modified. If \fItime\fR is specified, it is a modification time to set for
-the file (equivalent to Unix \fBtouch\fR). The time is measured in the
-standard POSIX fashion as seconds from a fixed starting time (often January
-1, 1970). If the file doesn't exist or its modified time cannot be queried
-or set then an error is generated.
-.TP
-\fBfile nativename \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns the platform-specific name of the file. This is useful if the
-filename is needed to pass to a platform-specific call, such as exec
-under Windows or AppleScript on the Macintosh.
-.TP
-\fBfile owned \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR is owned by the current user, \fB0\fR
-otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBfile pathtype \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns one of \fBabsolute\fR, \fBrelative\fR, \fBvolumerelative\fR. If
-\fIname\fR refers to a specific file on a specific volume, the path type
-will be \fBabsolute\fR. If \fIname\fR refers to a file relative to the
-current working directory, then the path type will be \fBrelative\fR. If
-\fIname\fR refers to a file relative to the current working directory on
-a specified volume, or to a specific file on the current working volume, then
-the file type is \fBvolumerelative\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfile readable \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR is readable by the current user,
-\fB0\fR otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBfile readlink \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns the value of the symbolic link given by \fIname\fR (i.e. the name
-of the file it points to). If \fIname\fR isn't a symbolic link or its
-value cannot be read, then an error is returned. On systems that don't
-support symbolic links this option is undefined.
-.TP
-\fBfile rename \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR \fItarget\fR
-.TP
-\fBfile rename \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR ?\fIsource\fR ...? \fItargetDir\fR
-.RS
-The first form takes the file or directory specified by pathname
-\fIsource\fR and renames it to \fItarget\fR, moving the file if the
-pathname \fItarget\fR specifies a name in a different directory. If
-\fItarget\fR is an existing directory, then the second form is used. The
-second form moves each \fIsource\fR file or directory into the directory
-\fItargetDir\fR. Existing files will not be overwritten unless the
-\fB\-force\fR option is specified. Trying to overwrite a non-empty
-directory, overwrite a directory with a file, or a file with a directory
-will all result in errors. Arguments are processed in the order specified,
-halting at the first error, if any. A \fB\-\|\-\fR marks the end of
-switches; the argument following the \fB\-\|\-\fR will be treated as a
-\fIsource\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfile rootname \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns all of the characters in \fIname\fR up to but not including the
-last ``.'' character in the last component of name. If the last
-component of \fIname\fR doesn't contain a dot, then returns \fIname\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfile size \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns a decimal string giving the size of file \fIname\fR in bytes. If
-the file doesn't exist or its size cannot be queried then an error is
-generated.
-.TP
-\fBfile split \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns a list whose elements are the path components in \fIname\fR. The
-first element of the list will have the same path type as \fIname\fR.
-All other elements will be relative. Path separators will be discarded
-unless they are needed ensure that an element is unambiguously relative.
-For example, under Unix
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBfile split /foo/~bar/baz\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB/\0\0foo\0\0./~bar\0\0baz\fR to ensure that later commands
-that use the third component do not attempt to perform tilde
-substitution.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBfile stat \fIname varName\fR
-.
-Invokes the \fBstat\fR kernel call on \fIname\fR, and uses the variable
-given by \fIvarName\fR to hold information returned from the kernel call.
-\fIVarName\fR is treated as an array variable, and the following elements
-of that variable are set: \fBatime\fR, \fBctime\fR, \fBdev\fR, \fBgid\fR,
-\fBino\fR, \fBmode\fR, \fBmtime\fR, \fBnlink\fR, \fBsize\fR, \fBtype\fR,
-\fBuid\fR. Each element except \fBtype\fR is a decimal string with the
-value of the corresponding field from the \fBstat\fR return structure;
-see the manual entry for \fBstat\fR for details on the meanings of the
-values. The \fBtype\fR element gives the type of the file in the same
-form returned by the command \fBfile type\fR. This command returns an
-empty string.
-.TP
-\fBfile tail \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns all of the characters in \fIname\fR after the last directory
-separator. If \fIname\fR contains no separators then returns
-\fIname\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfile type \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns a string giving the type of file \fIname\fR, which will be one of
-\fBfile\fR, \fBdirectory\fR, \fBcharacterSpecial\fR, \fBblockSpecial\fR,
-\fBfifo\fR, \fBlink\fR, or \fBsocket\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfile volume\fR
-.
-Returns the absolute paths to the volumes mounted on the system, as a
-proper Tcl list. On the Macintosh, this will be a list of the mounted
-drives, both local and network. N.B. if two drives have the same name,
-they will both appear on the volume list, but there is currently no way,
-from Tcl, to access any but the first of these drives. On UNIX, the
-command will always return "/", since all filesystems are locally mounted.
-On Windows, it will return a list of the available local drives
-(e.g. {a:/ c:/}).
-.TP
-\fBfile writable \fIname\fR
-.
-Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR is writable by the current user,
-\fB0\fR otherwise.
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.TP
-\fBUnix\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
-.
-These commands always operate using the real user and group identifiers,
-not the effective ones.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-filename
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-attributes, copy files, delete files, directory, file, move files, name, rename files, stat
diff --git a/raw/mann/fileevent.n b/raw/mann/fileevent.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ecdb551..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/fileevent.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,344 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fileevent.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: fileevent.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH fileevent n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-fileevent \- Execute a script when a channel becomes readable or writable
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBfileevent \fIchannelId \fBreadable \fR?\fIscript\fR?
-.sp
-\fBfileevent \fIchannelId \fBwritable \fR?\fIscript\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is used to create \fIfile event handlers\fR. A file event
-handler is a binding between a channel and a script, such that the script
-is evaluated whenever the channel becomes readable or writable. File event
-handlers are most commonly used to allow data to be received from another
-process on an event-driven basis, so that the receiver can continue to
-interact with the user while waiting for the data to arrive. If an
-application invokes \fBgets\fR or \fBread\fR on a blocking channel when
-there is no input data available, the process will block; until the input
-data arrives, it will not be able to service other events, so it will
-appear to the user to ``freeze up''. With \fBfileevent\fR, the process can
-tell when data is present and only invoke \fBgets\fR or \fBread\fR when
-they won't block.
-.PP
-The \fIchannelId\fR argument to \fBfileevent\fR refers to an open channel,
-such as the return value from a previous \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR
-command.
-If the \fIscript\fR argument is specified, then \fBfileevent\fR
-creates a new event handler: \fIscript\fR will be evaluated
-whenever the channel becomes readable or writable (depending on the
-second argument to \fBfileevent\fR).
-In this case \fBfileevent\fR returns an empty string.
-The \fBreadable\fR and \fBwritable\fR event handlers for a file
-are independent, and may be created and deleted separately.
-However, there may be at most one \fBreadable\fR and one \fBwritable\fR
-handler for a file at a given time in a given interpreter.
-If \fBfileevent\fR is called when the specified handler already
-exists in the invoking interpreter, the new script replaces the old one.
-.PP
-If the \fIscript\fR argument is not specified, \fBfileevent\fR
-returns the current script for \fIchannelId\fR, or an empty string
-if there is none.
-If the \fIscript\fR argument is specified as an empty string
-then the event handler is deleted, so that no script will be invoked.
-A file event handler is also deleted automatically whenever
-its channel is closed or its interpreter is deleted.
-.PP
-A channel is considered to be readable if there is unread data
-available on the underlying device.
-A channel is also considered to be readable if there is unread
-data in an input buffer, except in the special case where the
-most recent attempt to read from the channel was a \fBgets\fR
-call that could not find a complete line in the input buffer.
-This feature allows a file to be read a line at a time in nonblocking mode
-using events.
-A channel is also considered to be readable if an end of file or
-error condition is present on the underlying file or device.
-It is important for \fIscript\fR to check for these conditions
-and handle them appropriately; for example, if there is no special
-check for end of file, an infinite loop may occur where \fIscript\fR
-reads no data, returns, and is immediately invoked again.
-.PP
-A channel is considered to be writable if at least one byte of data
-can be written to the underlying file or device without blocking,
-or if an error condition is present on the underlying file or device.
-.PP
-Event-driven I/O works best for channels that have been
-placed into nonblocking mode with the \fBfconfigure\fR command.
-In blocking mode, a \fBputs\fR command may block if you give it
-more data than the underlying file or device can accept, and a
-\fBgets\fR or \fBread\fR command will block if you attempt to read
-more data than is ready; no events will be processed while the
-commands block.
-In nonblocking mode \fBputs\fR, \fBread\fR, and \fBgets\fR never block.
-See the documentation for the individual commands for information
-on how they handle blocking and nonblocking channels.
-.PP
-The script for a file event is executed at global level (outside the
-context of any Tcl procedure) in the interpreter in which the
-\fBfileevent\fR command was invoked.
-If an error occurs while executing the script then the
-\fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error.
-In addition, the file event handler is deleted if it ever returns
-an error; this is done in order to prevent infinite loops due to
-buggy handlers.
-
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-\fBfileevent\fR is based on the \fBaddinput\fR command created
-by Mark Diekhans.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bgerror(n), fconfigure(n), gets(n), puts(n), read(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-asynchronous I/O, blocking, channel, event handler, nonblocking, readable,
-script, writable.
diff --git a/raw/mann/filename.n b/raw/mann/filename.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e7436cd..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/filename.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,435 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: filename.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: filename.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH filename n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-filename \- File name conventions supported by Tcl commands
-.BE
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-All Tcl commands and C procedures that take file names as arguments
-expect the file names to be in one of three forms, depending on the
-current platform. On each platform, Tcl supports file names in the
-standard forms(s) for that platform. In addition, on all platforms,
-Tcl supports a Unix-like syntax intended to provide a convenient way
-of constructing simple file names. However, scripts that are intended
-to be portable should not assume a particular form for file names.
-Instead, portable scripts must use the \fBfile split\fR and \fBfile
-join\fR commands to manipulate file names (see the \fBfile\fR manual
-entry for more details).
-
-.SH "PATH TYPES"
-.PP
-File names are grouped into three general types based on the starting point
-for the path used to specify the file: absolute, relative, and
-volume-relative. Absolute names are completely qualified, giving a path to
-the file relative to a particular volume and the root directory on that
-volume. Relative names are unqualified, giving a path to the file relative
-to the current working directory. Volume-relative names are partially
-qualified, either giving the path relative to the root directory on the
-current volume, or relative to the current directory of the specified
-volume. The \fBfile pathtype\fR command can be used to determine the
-type of a given path.
-
-.SH "PATH SYNTAX"
-.PP
-The rules for native names depend on the value reported in the Tcl
-array element \fBtcl_platform(platform)\fR:
-.TP 10
-\fBmac\fR
-On Apple Macintosh systems, Tcl supports two forms of path names. The
-normal Mac style names use colons as path separators. Paths may be
-relative or absolute, and file names may contain any character other
-than colon. A leading colon causes the rest of the path to be
-interpreted relative to the current directory. If a path contains a
-colon that is not at the beginning, then the path is interpreted as an
-absolute path. Sequences of two or more colons anywhere in the path
-are used to construct relative paths where \fB::\fR refers to the
-parent of the current directory, \fB:::\fR refers to the parent of the
-parent, and so forth.
-.RS
-.PP
-In addition to Macintosh style names, Tcl also supports a subset of
-Unix-like names. If a path contains no colons, then it is interpreted
-like a Unix path. Slash is used as the path separator. The file name
-\fB\&.\fR refers to the current directory, and \fB\&..\fR refers to the
-parent of the current directory. However, some names like \fB/\fR or
-\fB/..\fR have no mapping, and are interpreted as Macintosh names. In
-general, commands that generate file names will return Macintosh style
-names, but commands that accept file names will take both Macintosh
-and Unix-style names.
-.PP
-The following examples illustrate various forms of path names:
-.TP 15
-\fB:\fR
-Relative path to the current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fBMyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fBMyDisk:MyFile\fR
-Absolute path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR on the device named \fBMyDisk\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fB:MyDir:MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file name \fBMyFile\fR in a folder named
-\fBMyDir\fR in the current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fB::MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the folder above the
-current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fB:::MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the folder two levels above the
-current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fB/MyDisk/MyFile\fR
-Absolute path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR on the device named
-\fBMyDisk\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fB\&../MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the folder above the
-current folder.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBunix\fR
-On Unix platforms, Tcl uses path names where the components are
-separated by slashes. Path names may be relative or absolute, and
-file names may contain any character other than slash. The file names
-\fB\&.\fR and \fB\&..\fR are special and refer to the current directory
-and the parent of the current directory respectively. Multiple
-adjacent slash characters are interpreted as a single separator.
-The following examples illustrate various forms of path names:
-.RS
-.TP 15
-\fB/\fR
-Absolute path to the root directory.
-.TP 15
-\fB/etc/passwd\fR
-Absolute path to the file named \fBpasswd\fR in the directory
-\fBetc\fR in the root directory.
-.TP 15
-\fB\&.\fR
-Relative path to the current directory.
-.TP 15
-\fBfoo\fR
-Relative path to the file \fBfoo\fR in the current directory.
-.TP 15
-\fBfoo/bar\fR
-Relative path to the file \fBbar\fR in the directory \fBfoo\fR in the
-current directory.
-.TP 15
-\fB\&../foo\fR
-Relative path to the file \fBfoo\fR in the directory above the current
-directory.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBwindows\fR
-On Microsoft Windows platforms, Tcl supports both drive-relative and UNC
-style names. Both \fB/\fR and \fB\e\fR may be used as directory separators
-in either type of name. Drive-relative names consist of an optional drive
-specifier followed by an absolute or relative path. UNC paths follow the
-general form \fB\e\eservername\esharename\epath\efile\fR. In both forms,
-the file names \fB.\fR and \fB..\fR are special and refer to the current
-directory and the parent of the current directory respectively. The
-following examples illustrate various forms of path names:
-.RS
-.TP 15
-\fB\&\e\eHost\eshare/file\fR
-Absolute UNC path to a file called \fBfile\fR in the root directory of
-the export point \fBshare\fR on the host \fBHost\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fBc:foo\fR
-Volume-relative path to a file \fBfoo\fR in the current directory on drive
-\fBc\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fBc:/foo\fR
-Absolute path to a file \fBfoo\fR in the root directory of drive
-\fBc\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fBfoo\ebar\fR
-Relative path to a file \fBbar\fR in the \fBfoo\fR directory in the current
-directory on the current volume.
-.TP 15
-\fB\&\efoo\fR
-Volume-relative path to a file \fBfoo\fR in the root directory of the current
-volume.
-.RE
-
-.SH "TILDE SUBSTITUTION"
-.PP
-In addition to the file name rules described above, Tcl also supports
-\fIcsh\fR-style tilde substitution. If a file name starts with a
-tilde, then the file name will be interpreted as if the first element
-is replaced with the location of the home directory for the given
-user. If the tilde is followed immediately by a separator, then the
-\fB$HOME\fR environment variable is substituted. Otherwise the
-characters between the tilde and the next separator are taken as a
-user name, which is used to retrieve the user's home directory for
-substitution.
-.PP
-The Macintosh and Windows platforms do not support tilde substitution
-when a user name follows the tilde. On these platforms, attempts to
-use a tilde followed by a user name will generate an error. File
-names that have a tilde without a user name will be substituted using
-the \fB$HOME\fR environment variable, just like for Unix.
-
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.PP
-Not all file systems are case sensitive, so scripts should avoid code
-that depends on the case of characters in a file name. In addition,
-the character sets allowed on different devices may differ, so scripts
-should choose file names that do not contain special characters like:
-\fB<>:"/\e|\fR. The safest approach is to use names consisting of
-alphanumeric characters only. Also Windows 3.1 only supports file
-names with a root of no more than 8 characters and an extension of no
-more than 3 characters.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-current directory, absolute file name, relative file name,
-volume-relative file name, portability
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), glob(n)
diff --git a/raw/mann/flush.n b/raw/mann/flush.n
deleted file mode 100644
index b52e0d3..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/flush.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,270 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: flush.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: flush.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH flush n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-flush \- Flush buffered output for a channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBflush \fIchannelId\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Flushes any output that has been buffered for \fIchannelId\fR.
-\fIChannelId\fR must be a channel identifier such as returned by a previous
-\fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR command, and it must have been opened for writing.
-If the channel is in blocking mode the command does not return until all the
-buffered output has been flushed to the channel. If the channel is in
-nonblocking mode, the command may return before all buffered output has been
-flushed; the remainder will be flushed in the background as fast as the
-underlying file or device is able to absorb it.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), open(n), socket(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-blocking, buffer, channel, flush, nonblocking, output
diff --git a/raw/mann/focusNext.n b/raw/mann/focusNext.n
deleted file mode 100644
index cc9b641..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/focusNext.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,295 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: focusNext.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: focusNext.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_focusNext \fIwindow\fR
-.sp
-\fBtk_focusPrev \fIwindow\fR
-.sp
-\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBtk_focusNext\fR is a utility procedure used for keyboard traversal.
-It returns the ``next'' window after \fIwindow\fR in focus order.
-The focus order is determined by
-the stacking order of windows and the structure of the window hierarchy.
-Among siblings, the focus order is the same as the stacking order, with the
-lowest window being first.
-If a window has children, the window is visited first, followed by
-its children (recursively), followed by its next sibling.
-Top-level windows other than \fIwindow\fR are skipped, so that
-\fBtk_focusNext\fR never returns a window in a different top-level
-from \fIwindow\fR.
-.PP
-After computing the next window, \fBtk_focusNext\fR examines the
-window's \fB\-takefocus\fR option to see whether it should be skipped.
-If so, \fBtk_focusNext\fR continues on to the next window in the focus
-order, until it eventually finds a window that will accept the focus
-or returns back to \fIwindow\fR.
-.PP
-\fBtk_focusPrev\fR is similar to \fBtk_focusNext\fR except that it
-returns the window just before \fIwindow\fR in the focus order.
-.PP
-\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR changes the focus model for the application
-to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus.
-After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window
-Tk will automatically give it the input focus.
-The \fBfocus\fR command may be used to move the focus to a window
-other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves
-into a new window the focus will jump to that window.
-Note: at present there is no built-in support for returning the
-application to an explicit focus model; to do this you'll have
-to write a script that deletes the bindings created by
-\fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-focus, keyboard traversal, top-level
diff --git a/raw/mann/for.n b/raw/mann/for.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d7b61ba..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/for.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,298 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: for.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: for.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH for n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-for \- ``For'' loop
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBfor \fIstart test next body\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBFor\fR is a looping command, similar in structure to the C
-\fBfor\fR statement. The \fIstart\fR, \fInext\fR, and
-\fIbody\fR arguments must be Tcl command strings, and \fItest\fR
-is an expression string.
-The \fBfor\fR command first invokes the Tcl interpreter to
-execute \fIstart\fR. Then it repeatedly evaluates \fItest\fR as
-an expression; if the result is non-zero it invokes the Tcl
-interpreter on \fIbody\fR, then invokes the Tcl interpreter on \fInext\fR,
-then repeats the loop. The command terminates when \fItest\fR evaluates
-to 0. If a \fBcontinue\fR command is invoked within \fIbody\fR then
-any remaining commands in the current execution of \fIbody\fR are skipped;
-processing continues by invoking the Tcl interpreter on \fInext\fR, then
-evaluating \fItest\fR, and so on. If a \fBbreak\fR command is invoked
-within \fIbody\fR
-or \fInext\fR,
-then the \fBfor\fR command will
-return immediately.
-The operation of \fBbreak\fR and \fBcontinue\fR are similar to the
-corresponding statements in C.
-\fBFor\fR returns an empty string.
-.PP
-Note: \fItest\fR should almost always be enclosed in braces. If not,
-variable substitutions will be made before the \fBfor\fR
-command starts executing, which means that variable changes
-made by the loop body will not be considered in the expression.
-This is likely to result in an infinite loop. If \fItest\fR is
-enclosed in braces, variable substitutions are delayed until the
-expression is evaluated (before
-each loop iteration), so changes in the variables will be visible.
-For an example, try the following script with and without the braces
-around \fB$x<10\fR:
-.CS
-for {set x 0} {$x<10} {incr x} {
- puts "x is $x"
-}
-.CE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-break, continue, foreach, while
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-for, iteration, looping
diff --git a/raw/mann/foreach.n b/raw/mann/foreach.n
deleted file mode 100644
index df6e2e6..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/foreach.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,325 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: foreach.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: foreach.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH foreach n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-foreach \- Iterate over all elements in one or more lists
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBforeach \fIvarname list body\fR
-.br
-\fBforeach \fIvarlist1 list1\fR ?\fIvarlist2 list2 ...\fR? \fIbody\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBforeach\fR command implements a loop where the loop
-variable(s) take on values from one or more lists.
-In the simplest case there is one loop variable, \fIvarname\fR,
-and one list, \fIlist\fR, that is a list of values to assign to \fIvarname\fR.
-The \fIbody\fR argument is a Tcl script.
-For each element of \fIlist\fR (in order
-from first to last), \fBforeach\fR assigns the contents of the
-element to \fIvarname\fR as if the \fBlindex\fR command had been used
-to extract the element, then calls the Tcl interpreter to execute
-\fIbody\fR.
-.PP
-In the general case there can be more than one value list
-(e.g., \fIlist1\fR and \fIlist2\fR),
-and each value list can be associated with a list of loop variables
-(e.g., \fIvarlist1\fR and \fIvarlist2\fR).
-During each iteration of the loop
-the variables of each \fIvarlist\fP are assigned
-consecutive values from the corresponding \fIlist\fP.
-Values in each \fIlist\fP are used in order from first to last,
-and each value is used exactly once.
-The total number of loop iterations is large enough to use
-up all the values from all the value lists.
-If a value list does not contain enough
-elements for each of its loop variables in each iteration,
-empty values are used for the missing elements.
-.PP
-The \fBbreak\fR and \fBcontinue\fR statements may be
-invoked inside \fIbody\fR, with the same effect as in the \fBfor\fR
-command. \fBForeach\fR returns an empty string.
-.SH EXAMPLES
-.PP
-The following loop uses i and j as loop variables to iterate over
-pairs of elements of a single list.
-.DS
-set x {}
-foreach {i j} {a b c d e f} {
- lappend x $j $i
-}
-# The value of x is "b a d c f e"
-# There are 3 iterations of the loop.
-.DE
-.PP
-The next loop uses i and j to iterate over two lists in parallel.
-.DS
-set x {}
-foreach i {a b c} j {d e f g} {
- lappend x $i $j
-}
-# The value of x is "a d b e c f {} g"
-# There are 4 iterations of the loop.
-.DE
-.PP
-The two forms are combined in the following example.
-.DS
-set x {}
-foreach i {a b c} {j k} {d e f g} {
- lappend x $i $j $k
-}
-# The value of x is "a d e b f g c {} {}"
-# There are 3 iterations of the loop.
-.DE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-for(n), while(n), break(n), continue(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-foreach, iteration, list, looping
diff --git a/raw/mann/format.n b/raw/mann/format.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 4f90dba..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/format.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,452 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: format.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: format.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH format n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-format \- Format a string in the style of sprintf
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBformat \fIformatString \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-This command generates a formatted string in the same way as the
-ANSI C \fBsprintf\fR procedure (it uses \fBsprintf\fR in its
-implementation).
-\fIFormatString\fR indicates how to format the result, using
-\fB%\fR conversion specifiers as in \fBsprintf\fR, and the additional
-arguments, if any, provide values to be substituted into the result.
-The return value from \fBformat\fR is the formatted string.
-
-.SH "DETAILS ON FORMATTING"
-.PP
-The command operates by scanning \fIformatString\fR from left to right.
-Each character from the format string is appended to the result
-string unless it is a percent sign.
-If the character is a \fB%\fR then it is not copied to the result string.
-Instead, the characters following the \fB%\fR character are treated as
-a conversion specifier.
-The conversion specifier controls the conversion of the next successive
-\fIarg\fR to a particular format and the result is appended to
-the result string in place of the conversion specifier.
-If there are multiple conversion specifiers in the format string,
-then each one controls the conversion of one additional \fIarg\fR.
-The \fBformat\fR command must be given enough \fIarg\fRs to meet the needs
-of all of the conversion specifiers in \fIformatString\fR.
-.PP
-Each conversion specifier may contain up to six different parts:
-an XPG3 position specifier,
-a set of flags, a minimum field width, a precision, a length modifier,
-and a conversion character.
-Any of these fields may be omitted except for the conversion character.
-The fields that are present must appear in the order given above.
-The paragraphs below discuss each of these fields in turn.
-.PP
-If the \fB%\fR is followed by a decimal number and a \fB$\fR, as in
-``\fB%2$d\fR'', then the value to convert is not taken from the
-next sequential argument.
-Instead, it is taken from the argument indicated by the number,
-where 1 corresponds to the first \fIarg\fR.
-If the conversion specifier requires multiple arguments because
-of \fB*\fR characters in the specifier then
-successive arguments are used, starting with the argument
-given by the number.
-This follows the XPG3 conventions for positional specifiers.
-If there are any positional specifiers in \fIformatString\fR
-then all of the specifiers must be positional.
-.PP
-The second portion of a conversion specifier may contain any of the
-following flag characters, in any order:
-.TP 10
-\fB\-\fR
-Specifies that the converted argument should be left-justified
-in its field (numbers are normally right-justified with leading
-spaces if needed).
-.TP 10
-\fB+\fR
-Specifies that a number should always be printed with a sign,
-even if positive.
-.TP 10
-\fIspace\fR
-Specifies that a space should be added to the beginning of the
-number if the first character isn't a sign.
-.TP 10
-\fB0\fR
-Specifies that the number should be padded on the left with
-zeroes instead of spaces.
-.TP 10
-\fB#\fR
-Requests an alternate output form. For \fBo\fR and \fBO\fR
-conversions it guarantees that the first digit is always \fB0\fR.
-For \fBx\fR or \fBX\fR conversions, \fB0x\fR or \fB0X\fR (respectively)
-will be added to the beginning of the result unless it is zero.
-For all floating-point conversions (\fBe\fR, \fBE\fR, \fBf\fR,
-\fBg\fR, and \fBG\fR) it guarantees that the result always
-has a decimal point.
-For \fBg\fR and \fBG\fR conversions it specifies that
-trailing zeroes should not be removed.
-.PP
-The third portion of a conversion specifier is a number giving a
-minimum field width for this conversion.
-It is typically used to make columns line up in tabular printouts.
-If the converted argument contains fewer characters than the
-minimum field width then it will be padded so that it is as wide
-as the minimum field width.
-Padding normally occurs by adding extra spaces on the left of the
-converted argument, but the \fB0\fR and \fB\-\fR flags
-may be used to specify padding with zeroes on the left or with
-spaces on the right, respectively.
-If the minimum field width is specified as \fB*\fR rather than
-a number, then the next argument to the \fBformat\fR command
-determines the minimum field width; it must be a numeric string.
-.PP
-The fourth portion of a conversion specifier is a precision,
-which consists of a period followed by a number.
-The number is used in different ways for different conversions.
-For \fBe\fR, \fBE\fR, and \fBf\fR conversions it specifies the number
-of digits to appear to the right of the decimal point.
-For \fBg\fR and \fBG\fR conversions it specifies the total number
-of digits to appear, including those on both sides of the decimal
-point (however, trailing zeroes after the decimal point will still
-be omitted unless the \fB#\fR flag has been specified).
-For integer conversions, it specifies a minimum number of digits
-to print (leading zeroes will be added if necessary).
-For \fBs\fR conversions it specifies the maximum number of characters to be
-printed; if the string is longer than this then the trailing characters will be dropped.
-If the precision is specified with \fB*\fR rather than a number
-then the next argument to the \fBformat\fR command determines the precision;
-it must be a numeric string.
-.PP
-The fifth part of a conversion specifier is a length modifier,
-which must be \fBh\fR or \fBl\fR.
-If it is \fBh\fR it specifies that the numeric value should be
-truncated to a 16-bit value before converting.
-This option is rarely useful.
-The \fBl\fR modifier is ignored.
-.PP
-The last thing in a conversion specifier is an alphabetic character
-that determines what kind of conversion to perform.
-The following conversion characters are currently supported:
-.TP 10
-\fBd\fR
-Convert integer to signed decimal string.
-.TP 10
-\fBu\fR
-Convert integer to unsigned decimal string.
-.TP 10
-\fBi\fR
-Convert integer to signed decimal string; the integer may either be
-in decimal, in octal (with a leading \fB0\fR) or in hexadecimal
-(with a leading \fB0x\fR).
-.TP 10
-\fBo\fR
-Convert integer to unsigned octal string.
-.TP 10
-\fBx\fR or \fBX\fR
-Convert integer to unsigned hexadecimal string, using digits
-``0123456789abcdef'' for \fBx\fR and ``0123456789ABCDEF'' for \fBX\fR).
-.VS
-.TP 10
-\fBc\fR
-Convert integer to the Unicode character it represents.
-.VE
-.TP 10
-\fBs\fR
-No conversion; just insert string.
-.TP 10
-\fBf\fR
-Convert floating-point number to signed decimal string of
-the form \fIxx.yyy\fR, where the number of \fIy\fR's is determined by
-the precision (default: 6).
-If the precision is 0 then no decimal point is output.
-.TP 10
-\fBe\fR or \fBe\fR
-Convert floating-point number to scientific notation in the
-form \fIx.yyy\fBe\(+-\fIzz\fR, where the number of \fIy\fR's is determined
-by the precision (default: 6).
-If the precision is 0 then no decimal point is output.
-If the \fBE\fR form is used then \fBE\fR is
-printed instead of \fBe\fR.
-.TP 10
-\fBg\fR or \fBG\fR
-If the exponent is less than \-4 or greater than or equal to the
-precision, then convert floating-point number as for \fB%e\fR or
-\fB%E\fR.
-Otherwise convert as for \fB%f\fR.
-Trailing zeroes and a trailing decimal point are omitted.
-.TP 10
-\fB%\fR
-No conversion: just insert \fB%\fR.
-.LP
-For the numerical conversions the argument being converted must
-be an integer or floating-point string; format converts the argument
-to binary and then converts it back to a string according to
-the conversion specifier.
-
-.SH "DIFFERENCES FROM ANSI SPRINTF"
-.PP
-The behavior of the format command is the same as the
-ANSI C \fBsprintf\fR procedure except for the following
-differences:
-.IP [1]
-\fB%p\fR and \fB%n\fR specifiers are not currently supported.
-.IP [2]
-For \fB%c\fR conversions the argument must be a decimal string,
-which will then be converted to the corresponding character value.
-.IP [3]
-The \fBl\fR modifier is ignored; integer values are always converted
-as if there were no modifier present and real values are always
-converted as if the \fBl\fR modifier were present (i.e. type
-\fBdouble\fR is used for the internal representation).
-If the \fBh\fR modifier is specified then integer values are truncated
-to \fBshort\fR before conversion.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-sprintf(3), string(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-conversion specifier, format, sprintf, string, substitution
diff --git a/raw/mann/gets.n b/raw/mann/gets.n
deleted file mode 100644
index f5cb809..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/gets.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,285 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: gets.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: gets.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH gets n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-gets \- Read a line from a channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBgets \fIchannelId\fR ?\fIvarName\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command reads the next line from \fIchannelId\fR, returns everything
-in the line up to (but not including) the end-of-line character(s), and
-discards the end-of-line character(s).
-If \fIvarName\fR is omitted the line is returned as the result of the
-command.
-If \fIvarName\fR is specified then the line is placed in the variable by
-that name and the return value is a count of the number of characters
-returned.
-.PP
-If end of file occurs while scanning for an end of
-line, the command returns whatever input is available up to the end of file.
-If \fIchannelId\fR is in nonblocking mode and there is not a full
-line of input available, the command returns an empty string and
-does not consume any input.
-If \fIvarName\fR is specified and an empty string is returned in
-\fIvarName\fR because of end-of-file or because of insufficient
-data in nonblocking mode, then the return count is -1.
-Note that if \fIvarName\fR is not specified then the end-of-file
-and no-full-line-available cases can
-produce the same results as if there were an input line consisting
-only of the end-of-line character(s).
-The \fBeof\fR and \fBfblocked\fR commands can be used to distinguish
-these three cases.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), eof(n), fblocked(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-blocking, channel, end of file, end of line, line, nonblocking, read
diff --git a/raw/mann/glob.n b/raw/mann/glob.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 6538972..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/glob.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,396 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: glob.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: glob.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH glob n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-glob \- Return names of files that match patterns
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBglob \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIpattern \fR?\fIpattern ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command performs file name ``globbing'' in a fashion similar to
-the csh shell. It returns a list of the files whose names match any
-of the \fIpattern\fR arguments.
-.LP
-If the initial arguments to \fBglob\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
-they are treated as switches. The following switches are
-currently supported:
-.VS 8.3
-.TP
-\fB\-directory\fR \fIdirectory\fR
-Search for files which match the given patterns starting in the given
-\fIdirectory\fR. This allows searching of directories whose name
-contains glob-sensitive characters without the need to quote such
-characters explicitly. This option may not be used in conjunction with
-\fB\-path\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-join\fR
-The remaining pattern arguments are treated as a single pattern
-obtained by joining the arguments with directory separators.
-.VE 8.3
-.TP
-\fB\-nocomplain\fR
-Allows an empty list to be returned without error; without this
-switch an error is returned if the result list would be empty.
-.VS 8.3
-.TP
-\fB\-path\fR \fIpathPrefix\fR
-Search for files with the given \fIpathPrefix\fR where the rest of the name
-matches the given patterns. This allows searching for files with names
-similar to a given file even when the names contain glob-sensitive
-characters. This option may not be used in conjunction with
-\fB\-directory\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-types\fR \fItypeList\fR
-Only list files or directories which match \fItypeList\fR, where the items
-in the list have two forms. The first form is like the \-type option of
-the Unix find command:
-\fIb\fR (block special file),
-\fIc\fR (character special file),
-\fId\fR (directory),
-\fIf\fR (plain file),
-\fIl\fR (symbolic link),
-\fIp\fR (named pipe),
-or \fIs\fR (socket), where multiple types may be specified in the list.
-\fBGlob\fR will return all files which match at least one of the types given.
-.RS
-.PP
-The second form specifies types where all the types given must match.
-These are \fIr\fR, \fIw\fR, \fIx\fR as file permissions, and
-\fIreadonly\fR, \fIhidden\fR as special permission cases. On the
-Macintosh, MacOS types and creators are also supported, where any item
-which is four characters long is assumed to be a MacOS type
-(e.g. \fBTEXT\fR). Items which are of the form \fI{macintosh type XXXX}\fR
-or \fI{macintosh creator XXXX}\fR will match types or creators
-respectively. Unrecognised types, or specifications of multiple MacOS
-types/creators will signal an error.
-.PP
-The two forms may be mixed, so \fB\-types {d f r w}\fR will find all
-regular files OR directories that have both read AND write permissions.
-The following are equivalent:
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBglob \-type d *\fR
-\fBglob */\fR
-.CE
-.RE
-except that the first case doesn't return the trailing ``/'' and
-is more platform independent.
-.RE
-.VE 8.3
-.TP
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-Marks the end of switches. The argument following this one will
-be treated as a \fIpattern\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIpattern\fR arguments may contain any of the following
-special characters:
-.TP 10
-\fB?\fR
-Matches any single character.
-.TP 10
-\fB*\fR
-Matches any sequence of zero or more characters.
-.TP 10
-\fB[\fIchars\fB]\fR
-Matches any single character in \fIchars\fR. If \fIchars\fR
-contains a sequence of the form \fIa\fB\-\fIb\fR then any
-character between \fIa\fR and \fIb\fR (inclusive) will match.
-.TP 10
-\fB\e\fIx\fR
-Matches the character \fIx\fR.
-.TP 10
-\fB{\fIa\fB,\fIb\fB,\fI...\fR}
-Matches any of the strings \fIa\fR, \fIb\fR, etc.
-.LP
-As with csh, a ``.'' at the beginning of a file's name or just
-after a ``/'' must be matched explicitly or with a {} construct.
-In addition, all ``/'' characters must be matched explicitly.
-.LP
-If the first character in a \fIpattern\fR is ``~'' then it refers
-to the home directory for the user whose name follows the ``~''.
-If the ``~'' is followed immediately by ``/'' then the value of
-the HOME environment variable is used.
-.LP
-The \fBglob\fR command differs from csh globbing in two ways.
-First, it does not sort its result list (use the \fBlsort\fR
-command if you want the list sorted).
-Second, \fBglob\fR only returns the names of files that actually
-exist; in csh no check for existence is made unless a pattern
-contains a ?, *, or [] construct.
-
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.PP
-Unlike other Tcl commands that will accept both network and native
-style names (see the \fBfilename\fR manual entry for details on how
-native and network names are specified), the \fBglob\fR command only
-accepts native names.
-.TP
-\fBWindows\fR
-.
-For Windows UNC names, the servername and sharename components of the path
-may not contain ?, *, or [] constructs. On Windows NT, if \fIpattern\fR is
-of the form ``\fB~\fIusername\fB@\fIdomain\fR'' it refers to the home
-directory of the user whose account information resides on the specified NT
-domain server. Otherwise, user account information is obtained from
-the local computer. On Windows 95 and 98, \fBglob\fR accepts patterns
-like ``.../'' and ``..../'' for successively higher up parent directories.
-.TP
-\fBMacintosh\fR
-.
-When using the options, \fB\-dir\fR, \fB\-join\fR or \fB\-path\fR, glob
-assumes the directory separator for the entire pattern is the standard
-``:''. When not using these options, glob examines each pattern argument
-and uses ``/'' unless the pattern contains a ``:''.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-exist, file, glob, pattern
diff --git a/raw/mann/global.n b/raw/mann/global.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 0fc3937..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/global.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,274 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: global.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: global.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH global n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-global \- Access global variables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBglobal \fIvarname \fR?\fIvarname ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is ignored unless a Tcl procedure is being interpreted.
-If so then it declares the given \fIvarname\fR's to be global variables
-rather than local ones.
-Global variables are variables in the global namespace.
-For the duration of the current procedure
-(and only while executing in the current procedure),
-any reference to any of the \fIvarname\fRs
-will refer to the global variable by the same name.
-.PP
-Please note that this is done by creating local variables that are
-linked to the global variables, and therefore that these variables
-will be listed by \fBinfo locals\fR like all other local variables.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-namespace(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-global, namespace, procedure, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/history.n b/raw/mann/history.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 4c44141..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/history.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,339 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: history.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: history.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH history n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-history \- Manipulate the history list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBhistory \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBhistory\fR command performs one of several operations related to
-recently-executed commands recorded in a history list. Each of
-these recorded commands is referred to as an ``event''. When
-specifying an event to the \fBhistory\fR command, the following
-forms may be used:
-.IP [1]
-A number: if positive, it refers to the event with
-that number (all events are numbered starting at 1). If the number
-is negative, it selects an event relative to the current event
-(\fB\-1\fR refers to the previous event, \fB\-2\fR to the one before that, and
-so on). Event \fB0\fP refers to the current event.
-.IP [2]
-A string: selects the most recent event that matches the string.
-An event is considered to match the string either if the string is
-the same as the first characters of the event, or if the string
-matches the event in the sense of the \fBstring match\fR command.
-.PP
-The \fBhistory\fR command can take any of the following forms:
-.TP
-\fBhistory\fR
-Same
-as \fBhistory info\fR, described below.
-.TP
-\fBhistory add\fI command \fR?\fBexec\fR?
-Adds the \fIcommand\fR argument to the history list as a new event. If
-\fBexec\fR is specified (or abbreviated) then the command is also
-executed and its result is returned. If \fBexec\fR isn't specified
-then an empty string is returned as result.
-.TP
-\fBhistory change\fI newValue\fR ?\fIevent\fR?
-Replaces the value recorded for an event with \fInewValue\fR. \fIEvent\fR
-specifies the event to replace, and
-defaults to the \fIcurrent\fR event (not event \fB\-1\fR). This command
-is intended for use in commands that implement new forms of history
-substitution and wish to replace the current event (which invokes the
-substitution) with the command created through substitution. The return
-value is an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBhistory clear\fR
-Erase the history list. The current keep limit is retained.
-The history event numbers are reset.
-.TP
-\fBhistory event\fR ?\fIevent\fR?
-Returns the value of the event given by \fIevent\fR. \fIEvent\fR
-defaults to \fB\-1\fR.
-.TP
-\fBhistory info \fR?\fIcount\fR?
-Returns a formatted string (intended for humans to read) giving
-the event number and contents for each of the events in the history
-list except the current event. If \fIcount\fR is specified
-then only the most recent \fIcount\fR events are returned.
-.TP
-\fBhistory keep \fR?\fIcount\fR?
-This command may be used to change the size of the history list to
-\fIcount\fR events. Initially, 20 events are retained in the history
-list. If \fIcount\fR is not specified, the current keep limit is returned.
-.TP
-\fBhistory nextid\fR
-Returns the number of the next event to be recorded
-in the history list. It is useful for things like printing the
-event number in command-line prompts.
-.TP
-\fBhistory redo \fR?\fIevent\fR?
-Re-executes the command indicated by \fIevent\fR and return its result.
-\fIEvent\fR defaults to \fB\-1\fR. This command results in history
-revision: see below for details.
-.SH "HISTORY REVISION"
-.PP
-Pre-8.0 Tcl had a complex history revision mechanism.
-The current mechanism is more limited, and the old
-history operations \fBsubstitute\fP and \fBwords\fP have been removed.
-(As a consolation, the \fBclear\fP operation was added.)
-.PP
-The history option \fBredo\fR results in much simpler ``history revision''.
-When this option is invoked then the most recent event
-is modified to eliminate the history command and replace it with
-the result of the history command.
-If you want to redo an event without modifying history, then use
-the \fBevent\fP operation to retrieve some event,
-and the \fBadd\fP operation to add it to history and execute it.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-event, history, record
diff --git a/raw/mann/html.n b/raw/mann/html.n
deleted file mode 100644
index fa78233..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/html.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,425 +0,0 @@
-'\" -*- tcl -*- doctools manpage
-'\"
-'\" Generated from ./modules/html/html.man by mpexpand with fmt.nroff
-'\"
-.so man.macros
-.TH "html" n 1.2.1 html "HTML Generation"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-html \- Procedures to generate HTML structures
-.SH "SYNOPSIS"
-package require \fBTcl 8.2\fR
-.sp
-package require \fBhtml ?1.2.1?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::author\fR \fIauthor\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::bodyTag\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::cell\fR \fIparam value\fR ?\fItag\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::checkbox\fR \fIname value\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::checkSet\fR \fIkey sep list\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::checkValue\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::closeTag\fR \fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::default\fR \fIkey\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::description\fR \fIdescription\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::end\fR \fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::eval\fR \fIarg\fR ?\fIargs\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::extractParam\fR \fIparam key\fR ?\fIvarName\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::font\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::for\fR \fIstart test next body\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::foreach\fR \fIvarlist1 list1\fR ?\fIvarlist2 list2 ...\fR? \fIbody\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::formValue\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIdefvalue\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::getFormInfo\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::getTitle\fR \fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::h\fR \fIlevel string\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::h1\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::h2\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::h3\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::h4\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::h5\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::h6\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::hdrRow\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::head\fR \fItitle\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::headTag\fR \fIstring\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::if\fR \fIexpr1 body1\fR ?\fBelseif\fR \fIexpr2 body2 ...\fR? ?\fBelse\fR \fIbodyN\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::keywords\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::mailto\fR \fIemail\fR ?\fIsubject\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::meta\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::minorMenu\fR \fIlist\fR ?\fIsep\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::minorList\fR \fIlist\fR ?\fIordered\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::openTag\fR \fItag args\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::passwordInput\fR ?\fIname\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::passwordInputRow\fR \fIlabel\fR ?\fIname\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::quoteFormValue\fR \fIvalue\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::radioSet\fR \fIkey sep list\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::radioValue\fR \fIname value\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::refresh\fR \fIseconds url\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::init\fR ?\fIlist\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::row\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::paramRow\fR \fIlist\fR ?\fIrparam\fR? ?\fIcparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::select\fR \fIname param choices\fR ?\fIcurrent\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::selectPlain\fR \fIname param choices\fR ?\fIcurrent\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::submit\fR \fIlabel\fR ?\fIname\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::set\fR \fIvar val\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::tableFromArray\fR \fIarrname\fR ?\fIparam\fR? ?\fIpat\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::tableFromList\fR \fIquerylist\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::textarea\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIparam\fR? ?\fIcurrent\fR?\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::textInput\fR \fIname args\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::textInputRow\fR \fIlabel name args\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::title\fR \fItitle\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::varEmpty\fR \fIname\fR\fR
-.sp
-\fB::html::while\fR \fItest body\fR\fR
-.sp
-.BE
-.SH "DESCRIPTION"
-.PP
-The package \fBhtml\fR provides commands that generate HTML.
-These commands typically return an HTML string as their result. In
-particular, they do not output their result to \fBstdout\fR.
-.PP
-The command \fB::html::init\fR should be called early to initialize
-the module. You can also use this procedure to define default values
-for HTML tag parameters.
-.TP
-\fB::html::author\fR \fIauthor\fR\fR
-\fBSide effect only\fR. Call this before \fB::html::head\fR to
-define an author for the page. The author is noted in a comment in
-the HEAD section.
-.TP
-\fB::html::bodyTag\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-Generate a BODY tag. The tag parameters are taken from \fIargs\fR or
-from the body.* attributes define with \fB::html::init\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::cell\fR \fIparam value\fR ?\fItag\fR?\fR
-Generate a TD (or TH) tag, a value, and a closing TD (or TH) tag. The
-tag parameters come from \fIparam\fR or TD.* attributes defined with
-\fB::html::init\fR. This uses \fB::html::font\fR to insert a standard
-FONT tag into the table cell. The \fItag\fR argument defaults to "td".
-.TP
-\fB::html::checkbox\fR \fIname value\fR\fR
-Generate a CHECKBOX form element with the specified name and value.
-This uses \fB::html::checkValue\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::checkSet\fR \fIkey sep list\fR\fR
-Generate a set of CHECKBOX form elements and associated labels. The
-\fIlist\fR should contain an alternating list of labels and values.
-This uses \fB::html::checkbox\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::checkValue\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?\fR
-Generate the "name=\fIname\fR value=\fIvalue\fR for a CHECKBOX form
-element. If the CGI variable \fIname\fR has the value \fIvalue\fR,
-then SELECTED is added to the return value. \fIvalue\fR defaults to
-"1".
-.TP
-\fB::html::closeTag\fR \fR
-Pop a tag off the stack created by \fB::html::openTag\fR and generate
-the corresponding close tag (e.g., /BODY).
-.TP
-\fB::html::default\fR \fIkey\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-This procedure is used by \fB::html::tagParam\fR to generate the name,
-value list of parameters for a tag. The \fB::html::default\fR
-procedure is used to generate default values for those items not
-already in \fIparam\fR. If the value identified by \fIkey\fR matches
-a value in \fIparam\fR then this procedure returns the empty string.
-Otherwise, it returns a "parameter=value" string for a form element
-identified by \fIkey\fR. The \fIkey\fR has the form "tag.parameter"
-(e.g., body.bgcolor). Use \fB::html::init\fR to register default
-values. \fIparam\fR defaults to the empty string.
-.TP
-\fB::html::description\fR \fIdescription\fR\fR
-\fBSide effect only\fR. Call this before \fB::html::head\fR to
-define a description META tag for the page. This tag is generated
-later in the call to \fB::html::head\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::end\fR \fR
-Pop all open tags from the stack and generate the corresponding close
-HTML tags, (e.g., </body></html>).
-.TP
-\fB::html::eval\fR \fIarg\fR ?\fIargs\fR?\fR
-This procedure is similar to the built-in Tcl \fBeval\fR command. The
-only difference is that it returns "" so it can be called from an HTML
-template file without appending unwanted results.
-.TP
-\fB::html::extractParam\fR \fIparam key\fR ?\fIvarName\fR?\fR
-This is a parsing procedure that extracts the value of \fIkey\fR from
-\fIparam\fR, which is a HTML-style "name=quotedvalue" list.
-\fIvarName\fR is used as the name of a Tcl variable that is changed to
-have the value found in the parameters. The function returns 1 if the
-parameter was found in \fIparam\fR, otherwise it returns 0. If the
-\fIvarName\fR is not specified, then \fIkey\fR is used as the variable
-name.
-.TP
-\fB::html::font\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-Generate a standard FONT tag. The parameters to the tag are taken
-from \fIargs\fR and the HTML defaults defined with \fB::html::init\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::for\fR \fIstart test next body\fR\fR
-This procedure is similar to the built-in Tcl \fBfor\fR control
-structure. Rather than evaluating the body, it returns the subst'ed
-\fIbody\fR. Each iteration of the loop causes another string to be
-concatenated to the result value.
-.TP
-\fB::html::foreach\fR \fIvarlist1 list1\fR ?\fIvarlist2 list2 ...\fR? \fIbody\fR\fR
-This procedure is similar to the built-in Tcl \fBforeach\fR control
-structure. Rather than evaluating the body, it returns the subst'ed
-\fIbody\fR. Each iteration of the loop causes another string to be
-concatenated to the result value.
-.TP
-\fB::html::formValue\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIdefvalue\fR?\fR
-Return a name and value pair, where the value is initialized from
-existing CGI data, if any. The result has this form:
-.sp
-.nf
- name="fred" value="freds value"
-.fi
-.TP
-\fB::html::getFormInfo\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-Generate hidden fields to capture form values. If \fIargs\fR is
-empty, then hidden fields are generated for all CGI values. Otherwise
-args is a list of string match patterns for form element names.
-.TP
-\fB::html::getTitle\fR \fR
-Return the title string, with out the surrounding TITLE tag, set with
-a previous call to \fB::html::title\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::h\fR \fIlevel string\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate a heading (e.g., H1) tag. The \fIstring\fR is nested in the
-heading, and \fIparam\fR is used for the tag parameters.
-.TP
-\fB::html::h1\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate an H1 tag. See \fB::html::h\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::h2\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate an H2 tag. See \fB::html::h\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::h3\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate an H3 tag. See \fB::html::h\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::h4\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate an H4 tag. See \fB::html::h\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::h5\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate an H5 tag. See \fB::html::h\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::h6\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate an H6 tag. See \fB::html::h\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::hdrRow\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-Generate a table row, including TR and TH tags.
-Each value in \fIargs\fR is place into its own table cell.
-This uses \fB::html::cell\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::head\fR \fItitle\fR\fR
-Generate the HEAD section that includes the page TITLE.
-If previous calls have been made to
-\fB::html::author\fR,
-\fB::html::keywords\fR,
-\fB::html::description\fR,
-or
-\fB::html::meta\fR
-then additional tags are inserted into the HEAD section.
-This leaves an open HTML tag pushed on the stack with
-\fB::html::openTag\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::headTag\fR \fIstring\fR\fR
-Save a tag for inclusion in the HEAD section generated by
-\fB::html::head\fR. The \fIstring\fR is everything in the tag except
-the enclosing angle brackets, < >.
-.TP
-\fB::html::if\fR \fIexpr1 body1\fR ?\fBelseif\fR \fIexpr2 body2 ...\fR? ?\fBelse\fR \fIbodyN\fR?\fR
-This procedure is similar to the built-in Tcl \fBif\fR control
-structure. Rather than evaluating the body of the branch that is
-taken, it returns the subst'ed \fIbody\fR. Note that the syntax is
-slightly more restrictive than that of the built-in Tcl \fBif\fR
-control structure.
-.TP
-\fB::html::keywords\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-\fBSide effect only\fR. Call this before \fB::html::head\fR to
-define a keyword META tag for the page. The META tag is included in
-the result of \fB::html::head\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::mailto\fR \fIemail\fR ?\fIsubject\fR?\fR
-Generate a hypertext link to a mailto: URL.
-.TP
-\fB::html::meta\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-\fBSide effect only\fR. Call this before \fB::html::head\fR to
-define a META tag for the page. The \fIargs\fR is a Tcl-style name,
-value list that is used for the name= and value= parameters for the
-META tag. The META tag is included in the result of
-\fB::html::head\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::minorMenu\fR \fIlist\fR ?\fIsep\fR?\fR
-Generate a series of hypertext links. The \fIlist\fR is a Tcl-style
-name, value list of labels and urls for the links. The \fIsep\fR is
-the text to put between each link. It defaults to " | ".
-.TP
-\fB::html::minorList\fR \fIlist\fR ?\fIordered\fR?\fR
-Generate an ordered or unordered list of links. The \fIlist\fR is a
-Tcl-style name, value list of labels and urls for the links.
-\fIordered\fR is a boolean used to choose between an ordered or
-unordered list. It defaults to \fBfalse\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::openTag\fR \fItag args\fR\fR
-Push \fItag\fR onto a stack and generate the opening tag for
-\fItag\fR. Use \fB::html::closeTag\fR to pop the tag from the stack.
-.TP
-\fB::html::passwordInput\fR ?\fIname\fR?\fR
-Generate an INPUT tag of type PASSWORD. The \fIname\fR defaults to
-"password".
-.TP
-\fB::html::passwordInputRow\fR \fIlabel\fR ?\fIname\fR?\fR
-Format a table row containing a label and an INPUT tag of type
-PASSWORD. The \fIname\fR defaults to "password".
-.TP
-\fB::html::quoteFormValue\fR \fIvalue\fR\fR
-Quote special characters in \fIvalue\fR by replacing them with HTML
-entities for quotes, ampersand, and angle brackets.
-.TP
-\fB::html::radioSet\fR \fIkey sep list\fR\fR
-Generate a set of INPUT tags of type RADIO and an associated text
-label. All the radio buttons share the same \fIkey\fR for their name.
-The \fIsep\fR is text used to separate the elements. The \fIlist\fR
-is a Tcl-style label, value list.
-.TP
-\fB::html::radioValue\fR \fIname value\fR\fR
-Generate the "name=\fIname\fR value=\fIvalue\fR for a RADIO form
-element. If the CGI variable \fIname\fR has the value \fIvalue\fR,
-then SELECTED is added to the return value.
-.TP
-\fB::html::refresh\fR \fIseconds url\fR\fR
-Set up a refresh META tag. Call this before \fB::html::head\fR and the
-HEAD section will contain a META tag that causes the document to
-refresh in \fIseconds\fR seconds. The \fIurl\fR is optional. If
-specified, it specifies a new page to load after the refresh interval.
-.TP
-\fB::html::init\fR ?\fIlist\fR?\fR
-\fB::html::init\fR accepts a Tcl-style name-value list that defines
-values for items with a name of the form "tag.parameter". For
-example, a default with key "body.bgcolor" defines the background
-color for the BODY tag.
-.TP
-\fB::html::row\fR \fIargs\fR\fR
-Generate a table row, including TR and TD tags. Each value in
-\fIargs\fR is place into its own table cell. This uses
-\fB::html::cell\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::html::paramRow\fR \fIlist\fR ?\fIrparam\fR? ?\fIcparam\fR?\fR
-Generate a table row, including TR and TD tags. Each value in
-\fIlist\fR is placed into its own table cell. This uses
-\fB::html::cell\fR. The value of \fIrparam\fR is used as parameter for
-the TR tag. The value of \fIcparam\fR is passed to \fB::html::cell\fR
-as parameter for the TD tags.
-.TP
-\fB::html::select\fR \fIname param choices\fR ?\fIcurrent\fR?\fR
-Generate a SELECT form element and nested OPTION tags. The \fIname\fR
-and \fIparam\fR are used to generate the SELECT tag. The \fIchoices\fR
-list is a Tcl-style name, value list.
-.TP
-\fB::html::selectPlain\fR \fIname param choices\fR ?\fIcurrent\fR?\fR
-Like \fB::html::select\fR except that \fIchoices\fR is a Tcl list of
-values used for the OPTION tags. The label and the value for each
-OPTION are the same.
-.TP
-\fB::html::submit\fR \fIlabel\fR ?\fIname\fR?\fR
-Generate an INPUT tag of type SUBMIT. \fIname\fR defaults to "submit".
-.TP
-\fB::html::set\fR \fIvar val\fR\fR
-This procedure is similar to the built-in Tcl \fBset\fR command. The
-main difference is that it returns "" so it can be called from an HTML
-template file without appending unwanted results. The other
-difference is that it must take two arguments.
-.TP
-\fB::html::tableFromArray\fR \fIarrname\fR ?\fIparam\fR? ?\fIpat\fR?\fR
-Generate a TABLE and nested rows to display a Tcl array. The
-\fIparam\fR are for the TABLE tag. The \fIpat\fR is a
-\fBstring match\fR pattern used to select array elements. It
-defaults to "*".
-.TP
-\fB::html::tableFromList\fR \fIquerylist\fR ?\fIparam\fR?\fR
-Generate a TABLE and nested rows to display \fIquerylist\fR, which is
-a Tcl-style name, value list. The \fIparam\fR are for the TABLE tag.
-.TP
-\fB::html::textarea\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIparam\fR? ?\fIcurrent\fR?\fR
-Generate a TEXTAREA tag wrapped around its current values.
-.TP
-\fB::html::textInput\fR \fIname args\fR\fR
-Generate an INPUT form tag with type TEXT. This uses
-\fB::html::formValue\fR. The args is any additional tag attributes
-you want to put into the INPUT tag.
-.TP
-\fB::html::textInputRow\fR \fIlabel name args\fR\fR
-Generate an INPUT form tag with type TEXT formatted into a table row
-with an associated label. The args is any additional tag attributes
-you want to put into the INPUT tag.
-.TP
-\fB::html::title\fR \fItitle\fR\fR
-\fBSide effect only\fR. Call this before \fB::html::head\fR to
-define the TITLE for a page.
-.TP
-\fB::html::varEmpty\fR \fIname\fR\fR
-This returns 1 if the named variable either does not exist or has the
-empty string for its value.
-.TP
-\fB::html::while\fR \fItest body\fR\fR
-This procedure is similar to the built-in Tcl \fBwhile\fR control
-structure. Rather than evaluating the body, it returns the subst'ed
-\fIbody\fR. Each iteration of the loop causes another string to be
-concatenated to the result value.
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-ncgi, htmlparse
-.SH "KEYWORDS"
-html, form, table, checkbox, radiobutton, checkbutton
diff --git a/raw/mann/if.n b/raw/mann/if.n
deleted file mode 100644
index f433524..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/if.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,281 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: if.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: if.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH if n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-if \- Execute scripts conditionally
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBif \fIexpr1 \fR?\fBthen\fR? \fIbody1 \fBelseif \fIexpr2 \fR?\fBthen\fR? \fIbody2\fR \fBelseif\fR ... ?\fBelse\fR? ?\fIbodyN\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fIif\fR command evaluates \fIexpr1\fR as an expression (in the
-same way that \fBexpr\fR evaluates its argument). The value of the
-expression must be a boolean
-(a numeric value, where 0 is false and
-anything is true, or a string value such as \fBtrue\fR or \fByes\fR
-for true and \fBfalse\fR or \fBno\fR for false);
-if it is true then \fIbody1\fR is executed by passing it to the
-Tcl interpreter.
-Otherwise \fIexpr2\fR is evaluated as an expression and if it is true
-then \fBbody2\fR is executed, and so on.
-If none of the expressions evaluates to true then \fIbodyN\fR is
-executed.
-The \fBthen\fR and \fBelse\fR arguments are optional
-``noise words'' to make the command easier to read.
-There may be any number of \fBelseif\fR clauses, including zero.
-\fIBodyN\fR may also be omitted as long as \fBelse\fR is omitted too.
-The return value from the command is the result of the body script
-that was executed, or an empty string
-if none of the expressions was non-zero and there was no \fIbodyN\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-expr(n), for(n), foreach(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-boolean, conditional, else, false, if, true
diff --git a/raw/mann/incr.n b/raw/mann/incr.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 811b055..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/incr.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: incr.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: incr.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH incr n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-incr \- Increment the value of a variable
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBincr \fIvarName \fR?\fIincrement\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Increments the value stored in the variable whose name is \fIvarName\fR.
-The value of the variable must be an integer.
-If \fIincrement\fR is supplied then its value (which must be an
-integer) is added to the value of variable \fIvarName\fR; otherwise
-1 is added to \fIvarName\fR.
-The new value is stored as a decimal string in variable \fIvarName\fR
-and also returned as result.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-expr(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-add, increment, variable, value
diff --git a/raw/mann/info.n b/raw/mann/info.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 72346e9..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/info.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,420 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1997 Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: info.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: info.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH info n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-info \- Return information about the state of the Tcl interpreter
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBinfo \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command provides information about various internals of the Tcl
-interpreter.
-The legal \fIoption\fR's (which may be abbreviated) are:
-.TP
-\fBinfo args \fIprocname\fR
-Returns a list containing the names of the arguments to procedure
-\fIprocname\fR, in order. \fIProcname\fR must be the name of a
-Tcl command procedure.
-.TP
-\fBinfo body \fIprocname\fR
-Returns the body of procedure \fIprocname\fR. \fIProcname\fR must be
-the name of a Tcl command procedure.
-.TP
-\fBinfo cmdcount\fR
-Returns a count of the total number of commands that have been invoked
-in this interpreter.
-.TP
-\fBinfo commands \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified,
-returns a list of names of all the Tcl commands in the current namespace,
-including both the built-in commands written in C and
-the command procedures defined using the \fBproc\fR command.
-If \fIpattern\fR is specified,
-only those names matching \fIpattern\fR are returned.
-Matching is determined using the same rules as for \fBstring match\fR.
-\fIpattern\fR can be a qualified name like \fBFoo::print*\fR.
-That is, it may specify a particular namespace
-using a sequence of namespace names separated by \fB::\fRs,
-and may have pattern matching special characters
-at the end to specify a set of commands in that namespace.
-If \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name,
-the resulting list of command names has each one qualified with the name
-of the specified namespace.
-.TP
-\fBinfo complete \fIcommand\fR
-Returns 1 if \fIcommand\fR is a complete Tcl command in the sense of
-having no unclosed quotes, braces, brackets or array element names,
-If the command doesn't appear to be complete then 0 is returned.
-This command is typically used in line-oriented input environments
-to allow users to type in commands that span multiple lines; if the
-command isn't complete, the script can delay evaluating it until additional
-lines have been typed to complete the command.
-.TP
-\fBinfo default \fIprocname arg varname\fR
-\fIProcname\fR must be the name of a Tcl command procedure and \fIarg\fR
-must be the name of an argument to that procedure. If \fIarg\fR
-doesn't have a default value then the command returns \fB0\fR.
-Otherwise it returns \fB1\fR and places the default value of \fIarg\fR
-into variable \fIvarname\fR.
-.TP
-\fBinfo exists \fIvarName\fR
-Returns \fB1\fR if the variable named \fIvarName\fR exists in the
-current context (either as a global or local variable) and has been
-defined by being given a value, returns \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBinfo globals \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of all the names
-of currently-defined global variables.
-Global variables are variables in the global namespace.
-If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those names matching \fIpattern\fR
-are returned. Matching is determined using the same rules as for
-\fBstring match\fR.
-.TP
-\fBinfo hostname\fR
-Returns the name of the computer on which this invocation is being
-executed.
-.TP
-\fBinfo level\fR ?\fInumber\fR?
-If \fInumber\fR is not specified, this command returns a number
-giving the stack level of the invoking procedure, or 0 if the
-command is invoked at top-level. If \fInumber\fR is specified,
-then the result is a list consisting of the name and arguments for the
-procedure call at level \fInumber\fR on the stack. If \fInumber\fR
-is positive then it selects a particular stack level (1 refers
-to the top-most active procedure, 2 to the procedure it called, and
-so on); otherwise it gives a level relative to the current level
-(0 refers to the current procedure, -1 to its caller, and so on).
-See the \fBuplevel\fR command for more information on what stack
-levels mean.
-.TP
-\fBinfo library\fR
-Returns the name of the library directory in which standard Tcl
-scripts are stored.
-This is actually the value of the \fBtcl_library\fR
-variable and may be changed by setting \fBtcl_library\fR.
-See the \fBtclvars\fR manual entry for more information.
-.TP
-\fBinfo loaded \fR?\fIinterp\fR?
-Returns a list describing all of the packages that have been loaded into
-\fIinterp\fR with the \fBload\fR command.
-Each list element is a sub-list with two elements consisting of the
-name of the file from which the package was loaded and the name of
-the package.
-For statically-loaded packages the file name will be an empty string.
-If \fIinterp\fR is omitted then information is returned for all packages
-loaded in any interpreter in the process.
-To get a list of just the packages in the current interpreter, specify
-an empty string for the \fIinterp\fR argument.
-.TP
-\fBinfo locals \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of all the names
-of currently-defined local variables, including arguments to the
-current procedure, if any.
-Variables defined with the \fBglobal\fR and \fBupvar\fR commands
-will not be returned.
-If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those names matching \fIpattern\fR
-are returned. Matching is determined using the same rules as for
-\fBstring match\fR.
-.TP
-\fBinfo nameofexecutable\fR
-Returns the full path name of the binary file from which the application
-was invoked. If Tcl was unable to identify the file, then an empty
-string is returned.
-.TP
-\fBinfo patchlevel\fR
-Returns the value of the global variable \fBtcl_patchLevel\fR; see
-the \fBtclvars\fR manual entry for more information.
-.TP
-\fBinfo procs \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of all the
-names of Tcl command procedures in the current namespace.
-If \fIpattern\fR is specified,
-only those procedure names in the current namespace
-matching \fIpattern\fR are returned.
-Matching is determined using the same rules as for
-\fBstring match\fR.
-.TP
-\fBinfo script\fR
-If a Tcl script file is currently being evaluated (i.e. there is a
-call to \fBTcl_EvalFile\fR active or there is an active invocation
-of the \fBsource\fR command), then this command returns the name
-of the innermost file being processed. Otherwise the command returns an
-empty string.
-.TP
-\fBinfo sharedlibextension\fR
-Returns the extension used on this platform for the names of files
-containing shared libraries (for example, \fB.so\fR under Solaris).
-If shared libraries aren't supported on this platform then an empty
-string is returned.
-.TP
-\fBinfo tclversion\fR
-Returns the value of the global variable \fBtcl_version\fR; see
-the \fBtclvars\fR manual entry for more information.
-.TP
-\fBinfo vars\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified,
-returns a list of all the names of currently-visible variables.
-This includes locals and currently-visible globals.
-If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those names matching \fIpattern\fR
-are returned. Matching is determined using the same rules as for
-\fBstring match\fR.
-\fIpattern\fR can be a qualified name like \fBFoo::option*\fR.
-That is, it may specify a particular namespace
-using a sequence of namespace names separated by \fB::\fRs,
-and may have pattern matching special characters
-at the end to specify a set of variables in that namespace.
-If \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name,
-the resulting list of variable names
-has each matching namespace variable qualified with the name
-of its namespace.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-command, information, interpreter, level, namespace, procedure, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/interp.n b/raw/mann/interp.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8706e56..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/interp.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,777 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: interp.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: interp.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH interp n 7.6 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-interp \- Create and manipulate Tcl interpreters
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBinterp \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command makes it possible to create one or more new Tcl
-interpreters that co-exist with the creating interpreter in the
-same application. The creating interpreter is called the \fImaster\fR
-and the new interpreter is called a \fIslave\fR.
-A master can create any number of slaves, and each slave can
-itself create additional slaves for which it is master, resulting
-in a hierarchy of interpreters.
-.PP
-Each interpreter is independent from the others: it has its own name
-space for commands, procedures, and global variables.
-A master interpreter may create connections between its slaves and
-itself using a mechanism called an \fIalias\fR. An \fIalias\fR is
-a command in a slave interpreter which, when invoked, causes a
-command to be invoked in its master interpreter or in another slave
-interpreter. The only other connections between interpreters are
-through environment variables (the \fBenv\fR variable), which are
-normally shared among all interpreters in the application. Note that the
-name space for files (such as the names returned by the \fBopen\fR command)
-is no longer shared between interpreters. Explicit commands are provided to
-share files and to transfer references to open files from one interpreter
-to another.
-.PP
-The \fBinterp\fR command also provides support for \fIsafe\fR
-interpreters. A safe interpreter is a slave whose functions have
-been greatly restricted, so that it is safe to execute untrusted
-scripts without fear of them damaging other interpreters or the
-application's environment. For example, all IO channel creation
-commands and subprocess creation commands are made inaccessible to safe
-interpreters.
-.VS
-See SAFE INTERPRETERS below for more information on
-what features are present in a safe interpreter.
-The dangerous functionality is not removed from the safe interpreter;
-instead, it is \fIhidden\fR, so that only trusted interpreters can obtain
-access to it. For a detailed explanation of hidden commands, see
-HIDDEN COMMANDS, below.
-The alias mechanism can be used for protected communication (analogous to a
-kernel call) between a slave interpreter and its master. See ALIAS
-INVOCATION, below, for more details on how the alias mechanism works.
-.VE
-.PP
-A qualified interpreter name is a proper Tcl lists containing a subset of its
-ancestors in the interpreter hierarchy, terminated by the string naming the
-interpreter in its immediate master. Interpreter names are relative to the
-interpreter in which they are used. For example, if \fBa\fR is a slave of
-the current interpreter and it has a slave \fBa1\fR, which in turn has a
-slave \fBa11\fR, the qualified name of \fBa11\fR in \fBa\fR is the list
-\fBa1 a11\fR.
-.PP
-The \fBinterp\fR command, described below, accepts qualified interpreter
-names as arguments; the interpreter in which the command is being evaluated
-can always be referred to as \fB{}\fR (the empty list or string). Note that
-it is impossible to refer to a master (ancestor) interpreter by name in a
-slave interpreter except through aliases. Also, there is no global name by
-which one can refer to the first interpreter created in an application.
-Both restrictions are motivated by safety concerns.
-
-.VS
-.SH "THE INTERP COMMAND"
-.PP
-.VE
-The \fBinterp\fR command is used to create, delete, and manipulate
-slave interpreters, and to share or transfer
-channels between interpreters. It can have any of several forms, depending
-on the \fIoption\fR argument:
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBalias\fR \fIsrcPath\fR \fIsrcCmd\fR
-Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the \fItargetCmd\fR and
-\fIarg\fRs associated with the alias named \fIsrcCmd\fR
-(all of these are the values specified when the alias was
-created; it is possible that the actual source command in the
-slave is different from \fIsrcCmd\fR if it was renamed).
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBalias\fR \fIsrcPath\fR \fIsrcCmd\fR \fB{}\fR
-Deletes the alias for \fIsrcCmd\fR in the slave interpreter identified by
-\fIsrcPath\fR.
-\fIsrcCmd\fR refers to the name under which the alias
-was created; if the source command has been renamed, the renamed
-command will be deleted.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBalias\fR \fIsrcPath\fR \fIsrcCmd\fR \fItargetPath\fR \fItargetCmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-This command creates an alias between one slave and another (see the
-\fBalias\fR slave command below for creating aliases between a slave
-and its master). In this command, either of the slave interpreters
-may be anywhere in the hierarchy of interpreters under the interpreter
-invoking the command.
-\fISrcPath\fR and \fIsrcCmd\fR identify the source of the alias.
-\fISrcPath\fR is a Tcl list whose elements select a particular
-interpreter. For example, ``\fBa b\fR'' identifies an interpreter
-\fBb\fR, which is a slave of interpreter \fBa\fR, which is a slave
-of the invoking interpreter. An empty list specifies the interpreter
-invoking the command. \fIsrcCmd\fR gives the name of a new
-command, which will be created in the source interpreter.
-\fITargetPath\fR and \fItargetCmd\fR specify a target interpreter
-and command, and the \fIarg\fR arguments, if any, specify additional
-arguments to \fItargetCmd\fR which are prepended to any arguments specified
-in the invocation of \fIsrcCmd\fR.
-\fITargetCmd\fR may be undefined at the time of this call, or it may
-already exist; it is not created by this command.
-The alias arranges for the given target command to be invoked
-in the target interpreter whenever the given source command is
-invoked in the source interpreter. See ALIAS INVOCATION below for
-more details.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBaliases \fR?\fIpath\fR?
-This command returns a Tcl list of the names of all the source commands for
-aliases defined in the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBcreate \fR?\fB\-safe\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIpath\fR?
-Creates a slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR and a new command,
-called a \fIslave command\fR. The name of the slave command is the last
-component of \fIpath\fR. The new slave interpreter and the slave command
-are created in the interpreter identified by the path obtained by removing
-the last component from \fIpath\fR. For example, if \fIpath is \fBa b
-c\fR then a new slave interpreter and slave command named \fBc\fR are
-created in the interpreter identified by the path \fBa b\fR.
-The slave command may be used to manipulate the new interpreter as
-described below. If \fIpath\fR is omitted, Tcl creates a unique name of the
-form \fBinterp\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is an integer, and uses it for the
-interpreter and the slave command. If the \fB\-safe\fR switch is specified
-(or if the master interpreter is a safe interpreter), the new slave
-interpreter will be created as a safe interpreter with limited
-functionality; otherwise the slave will include the full set of Tcl
-built-in commands and variables. The \fB\-\|\-\fR switch can be used to
-mark the end of switches; it may be needed if \fIpath\fR is an unusual
-value such as \fB\-safe\fR. The result of the command is the name of the
-new interpreter. The name of a slave interpreter must be unique among all
-the slaves for its master; an error occurs if a slave interpreter by the
-given name already exists in this master.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBdelete \fR?\fIpath ...?\fR
-Deletes zero or more interpreters given by the optional \fIpath\fR
-arguments, and for each interpreter, it also deletes its slaves. The
-command also deletes the slave command for each interpreter deleted.
-For each \fIpath\fR argument, if no interpreter by that name
-exists, the command raises an error.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBeval\fR \fIpath arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-This command concatenates all of the \fIarg\fR arguments in the same
-fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command, then evaluates the resulting string as
-a Tcl script in the slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. The result
-of this evaluation (including error information such as the \fBerrorInfo\fR
-and \fBerrorCode\fR variables, if an error occurs) is returned to the
-invoking interpreter.
-.TP
-\fBinterp exists \fIpath\fR
-Returns \fB1\fR if a slave interpreter by the specified \fIpath\fR
-exists in this master, \fB0\fR otherwise. If \fIpath\fR is omitted, the
-invoking interpreter is used.
-.VS "" BR
-.TP
-\fBinterp expose \fIpath\fR \fIhiddenName\fR ?\fIexposedCmdName\fR?
-Makes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR exposed, eventually bringing
-it back under a new \fIexposedCmdName\fR name (this name is currently
-accepted only if it is a valid global name space name without any ::),
-in the interpreter
-denoted by \fIpath\fR.
-If an exposed command with the targetted name already exists, this command
-fails.
-Hidden commands are explained in more detail in HIDDEN COMMANDS, below.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBhide\fR \fIpath\fR \fIexposedCmdName\fR ?\fIhiddenCmdName\fR?
-Makes the exposed command \fIexposedCmdName\fR hidden, renaming
-it to the hidden command \fIhiddenCmdName\fR, or keeping the same name if
-\fIhiddenCmdName\fR is not given, in the interpreter denoted
-by \fIpath\fR.
-If a hidden command with the targetted name already exists, this command
-fails.
-Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can
-not contain namespace qualifiers, or an error is raised.
-Commands to be hidden by \fBinterp hide\fR are looked up in the global
-namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
-prevents slaves from fooling a master interpreter into hiding the wrong
-command, by making the current namespace be different from the global one.
-Hidden commands are explained in more detail in HIDDEN COMMANDS, below.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBhidden\fR \fIpath\fR
-Returns a list of the names of all hidden commands in the interpreter
-identified by \fIpath\fR.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBinvokehidden\fR \fIpath\fR ?\fB-global\fR? \fIhiddenCmdName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
-Invokes the hidden command \fIhiddenCmdName\fR with the arguments supplied
-in the interpreter denoted by \fIpath\fR. No substitutions or evaluation
-are applied to the arguments.
-If the \fB-global\fR flag is present, the hidden command is invoked at the
-global level in the target interpreter; otherwise it is invoked at the
-current call frame and can access local variables in that and outer call
-frames.
-Hidden commands are explained in more detail in HIDDEN COMMANDS, below.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBinterp issafe\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
-Returns \fB1\fR if the interpreter identified by the specified \fIpath\fR
-is safe, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.VS "" BR
-.TP
-\fBinterp marktrusted\fR \fIpath\fR
-Marks the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR as trusted. Does
-not expose the hidden commands. This command can only be invoked from a
-trusted interpreter.
-The command has no effect if the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR is
-already trusted.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBshare\fR \fIsrcPath channelId destPath\fR
-Causes the IO channel identified by \fIchannelId\fR to become shared
-between the interpreter identified by \fIsrcPath\fR and the interpreter
-identified by \fIdestPath\fR. Both interpreters have the same permissions
-on the IO channel.
-Both interpreters must close it to close the underlying IO channel; IO
-channels accessible in an interpreter are automatically closed when an
-interpreter is destroyed.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBslaves\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
-Returns a Tcl list of the names of all the slave interpreters associated
-with the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. If \fIpath\fR is omitted,
-the invoking interpreter is used.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBtarget\fR \fIpath alias\fR
-Returns a Tcl list describing the target interpreter for an alias. The
-alias is specified with an interpreter path and source command name, just
-as in \fBinterp alias\fR above. The name of the target interpreter is
-returned as an interpreter path, relative to the invoking interpreter.
-If the target interpreter for the alias is the invoking interpreter then an
-empty list is returned. If the target interpreter for the alias is not the
-invoking interpreter or one of its descendants then an error is generated.
-The target command does not have to be defined at the time of this invocation.
-.TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBtransfer\fR \fIsrcPath channelId destPath\fR
-Causes the IO channel identified by \fIchannelId\fR to become available in
-the interpreter identified by \fIdestPath\fR and unavailable in the
-interpreter identified by \fIsrcPath\fR.
-
-.SH "SLAVE COMMAND"
-.PP
-For each slave interpreter created with the \fBinterp\fR command, a
-new Tcl command is created in the master interpreter with the same
-name as the new interpreter. This command may be used to invoke
-various operations on the interpreter. It has the following
-general form:
-.CS
-\fIslave command \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.CE
-\fISlave\fR is the name of the interpreter, and \fIcommand\fR
-and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command.
-The valid forms of this command are:
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBaliases\fR
-Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the names of all the
-aliases in \fIslave\fR. The names returned are the \fIsrcCmd\fR
-values used when the aliases were created (which may not be the same
-as the current names of the commands, if they have been
-renamed).
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBalias \fIsrcCmd\fR
-Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the \fItargetCmd\fR and
-\fIarg\fRs associated with the alias named \fIsrcCmd\fR
-(all of these are the values specified when the alias was
-created; it is possible that the actual source command in the
-slave is different from \fIsrcCmd\fR if it was renamed).
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBalias \fIsrcCmd \fB{}\fR
-Deletes the alias for \fIsrcCmd\fR in the slave interpreter.
-\fIsrcCmd\fR refers to the name under which the alias
-was created; if the source command has been renamed, the renamed
-command will be deleted.
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBalias \fIsrcCmd targetCmd \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
-Creates an alias such that whenever \fIsrcCmd\fR is invoked
-in \fIslave\fR, \fItargetCmd\fR is invoked in the master.
-The \fIarg\fR arguments will be passed to \fItargetCmd\fR as additional
-arguments, prepended before any arguments passed in the invocation of
-\fIsrcCmd\fR.
-See ALIAS INVOCATION below for details.
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBeval \fIarg \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
-This command concatenates all of the \fIarg\fR arguments in
-the same fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command, then evaluates
-the resulting string as a Tcl script in \fIslave\fR.
-The result of this evaluation (including error information
-such as the \fBerrorInfo\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR variables, if an
-error occurs) is returned to the invoking interpreter.
-.VS "" BR
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBexpose \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIexposedCmdName\fR?
-This command exposes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR, eventually bringing
-it back under a new \fIexposedCmdName\fR name (this name is currently
-accepted only if it is a valid global name space name without any ::),
-in \fIslave\fR.
-If an exposed command with the targetted name already exists, this command
-fails.
-For more details on hidden commands, see HIDDEN COMMANDS, below.
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBhide \fIexposedCmdName\fR ?\fIhiddenCmdName\fR?
-This command hides the exposed command \fIexposedCmdName\fR, renaming it to
-the hidden command \fIhiddenCmdName\fR, or keeping the same name if the
-the argument is not given, in the \fIslave\fR interpreter.
-If a hidden command with the targetted name already exists, this command
-fails.
-Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can
-not contain namespace qualifiers, or an error is raised.
-Commands to be hidden are looked up in the global
-namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
-prevents slaves from fooling a master interpreter into hiding the wrong
-command, by making the current namespace be different from the global one.
-For more details on hidden commands, see HIDDEN COMMANDS, below.
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBhidden\fR
-Returns a list of the names of all hidden commands in \fIslave\fR.
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBinvokehidden\fR ?\fB-global\fR \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
-This command invokes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR with the
-supplied arguments, in \fIslave\fR. No substitutions or evaluations are
-applied to the arguments.
-If the \fB-global\fR flag is given, the command is invoked at the global
-level in the slave; otherwise it is invoked at the current call frame and
-can access local variables in that or outer call frames.
-For more details on hidden commands, see HIDDEN
-COMMANDS, below.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBissafe\fR
-Returns \fB1\fR if the slave interpreter is safe, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.VS "" BR
-.TP
-\fIslave \fBmarktrusted\fR
-Marks the slave interpreter as trusted. Can only be invoked by a
-trusted interpreter. This command does not expose any hidden
-commands in the slave interpreter. The command has no effect if the slave
-is already trusted.
-.VE
-
-.SH "SAFE INTERPRETERS"
-.PP
-A safe interpreter is one with restricted functionality, so that
-is safe to execute an arbitrary script from your worst enemy without
-fear of that script damaging the enclosing application or the rest
-of your computing environment. In order to make an interpreter
-safe, certain commands and variables are removed from the interpreter.
-For example, commands to create files on disk are removed, and the
-\fBexec\fR command is removed, since it could be used to cause damage
-through subprocesses.
-Limited access to these facilities can be provided, by creating
-aliases to the master interpreter which check their arguments carefully
-and provide restricted access to a safe subset of facilities.
-For example, file creation might be allowed in a particular subdirectory
-and subprocess invocation might be allowed for a carefully selected and
-fixed set of programs.
-.PP
-A safe interpreter is created by specifying the \fB\-safe\fR switch
-to the \fBinterp create\fR command. Furthermore, any slave created
-by a safe interpreter will also be safe.
-.PP
-A safe interpreter is created with exactly the following set of
-built-in commands:
-.DS
-.ta 1.2i 2.4i 3.6i
-\fBafter append array binary
-break case catch clock
-close concat continue eof
-error eval expr fblocked
-fcopy fileevent flush for
-foreach format gets global
-history if incr info
-interp join lappend lindex
-linsert list llength lrange
-lreplace lsearch lsort namespace
-package pid proc puts
-read regexp regsub rename
-return scan seek set
-split string subst switch
-tell trace unset update
-uplevel upvar variable vwait
-while\fR
-.DE
-.VS "" BR
-The following commands are hidden by \fBinterp create\fR when it
-creates a safe interpreter:
-.DS
-.ta 1.2i 2.4i 3.6i
-\fBcd exec exit fconfigure
-file glob load open
-pwd socket source vwait\fR
-.DE
-These commands can be recreated later as Tcl procedures or aliases, or
-re-exposed by \fBinterp expose\fR.
-.VE
-.PP
-In addition, the \fBenv\fR variable is not present in a safe interpreter,
-so it cannot share environment variables with other interpreters. The
-\fBenv\fR variable poses a security risk, because users can store
-sensitive information in an environment variable. For example, the PGP
-manual recommends storing the PGP private key protection password in
-the environment variable \fIPGPPASS\fR. Making this variable available
-to untrusted code executing in a safe interpreter would incur a
-security risk.
-.PP
-If extensions are loaded into a safe interpreter, they may also restrict
-their own functionality to eliminate unsafe commands. For a discussion of
-management of extensions for safety see the manual entries for
-\fBSafe\-Tcl\fR and the \fBload\fR Tcl command.
-
-.SH "ALIAS INVOCATION"
-.PP
-The alias mechanism has been carefully designed so that it can
-be used safely when an untrusted script is executing
-in a safe slave and the target of the alias is a trusted
-master. The most important thing in guaranteeing safety is to
-ensure that information passed from the slave to the master is
-never evaluated or substituted in the master; if this were to
-occur, it would enable an evil script in the slave to invoke
-arbitrary functions in the master, which would compromise security.
-.PP
-When the source for an alias is invoked in the slave interpreter, the
-usual Tcl substitutions are performed when parsing that command.
-These substitutions are carried out in the source interpreter just
-as they would be for any other command invoked in that interpreter.
-The command procedure for the source command takes its arguments
-and merges them with the \fItargetCmd\fR and \fIarg\fRs for the
-alias to create a new array of arguments. If the words
-of \fIsrcCmd\fR were ``\fIsrcCmd arg1 arg2 ... argN\fR'',
-the new set of words will be
-``\fItargetCmd arg arg ... arg arg1 arg2 ... argN\fR'',
-where \fItargetCmd\fR and \fIarg\fRs are the values supplied when the
-alias was created. \fITargetCmd\fR is then used to locate a command
-procedure in the target interpreter, and that command procedure
-is invoked with the new set of arguments. An error occurs if
-there is no command named \fItargetCmd\fR in the target interpreter.
-No additional substitutions are performed on the words: the
-target command procedure is invoked directly, without
-going through the normal Tcl evaluation mechanism.
-Substitutions are thus performed on each word exactly once:
-\fItargetCmd\fR and \fIargs\fR were substituted when parsing the command
-that created the alias, and \fIarg1 - argN\fR are substituted when
-the alias's source command is parsed in the source interpreter.
-.PP
-When writing the \fItargetCmd\fRs for aliases in safe interpreters,
-it is very important that the arguments to that command never be
-evaluated or substituted, since this would provide an escape
-mechanism whereby the slave interpreter could execute arbitrary
-code in the master. This in turn would compromise the security
-of the system.
-
-.VS
-.SH "HIDDEN COMMANDS"
-.PP
-Safe interpreters greatly restrict the functionality available to Tcl
-programs executing within them.
-Allowing the untrusted Tcl program to have direct access to this
-functionality is unsafe, because it can be used for a variety of
-attacks on the environment.
-However, there are times when there is a legitimate need to use the
-dangerous functionality in the context of the safe interpreter. For
-example, sometimes a program must be \fBsource\fRd into the interpreter.
-Another example is Tk, where windows are bound to the hierarchy of windows
-for a specific interpreter; some potentially dangerous functions, e.g.
-window management, must be performed on these windows within the
-interpreter context.
-.PP
-The \fBinterp\fR command provides a solution to this problem in the form of
-\fIhidden commands\fR. Instead of removing the dangerous commands entirely
-from a safe interpreter, these commands are hidden so they become
-unavailable to Tcl scripts executing in the interpreter. However, such
-hidden commands can be invoked by any trusted ancestor of the safe
-interpreter, in the context of the safe interpreter, using \fBinterp
-invoke\fR. Hidden commands and exposed commands reside in separate name
-spaces. It is possible to define a hidden command and an exposed command by
-the same name within one interpreter.
-.PP
-Hidden commands in a slave interpreter can be invoked in the body of
-procedures called in the master during alias invocation. For example, an
-alias for \fBsource\fR could be created in a slave interpreter. When it is
-invoked in the slave interpreter, a procedure is called in the master
-interpreter to check that the operation is allowable (e.g. it asks to
-source a file that the slave interpreter is allowed to access). The
-procedure then it invokes the hidden \fBsource\fR command in the slave
-interpreter to actually source in the contents of the file. Note that two
-commands named \fBsource\fR exist in the slave interpreter: the alias, and
-the hidden command.
-.PP
-Because a master interpreter may invoke a hidden command as part of
-handling an alias invocation, great care must be taken to avoid evaluating
-any arguments passed in through the alias invocation.
-Otherwise, malicious slave interpreters could cause a trusted master
-interpreter to execute dangerous commands on their behalf. See the section
-on ALIAS INVOCATION for a more complete discussion of this topic.
-To help avoid this problem, no substitutions or evaluations are
-applied to arguments of \fBinterp invokehidden\fR.
-.PP
-Safe interpreters are not allowed to invoke hidden commands in themselves
-or in their descendants. This prevents safe slaves from gaining access to
-hidden functionality in themselves or their descendants.
-.PP
-The set of hidden commands in an interpreter can be manipulated by a trusted
-interpreter using \fBinterp expose\fR and \fBinterp hide\fR. The \fBinterp
-expose\fR command moves a hidden command to the
-set of exposed commands in the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR,
-potentially renaming the command in the process. If an exposed command by
-the targetted name already exists, the operation fails. Similarly,
-\fBinterp hide\fR moves an exposed command to the set of hidden commands in
-that interpreter. Safe interpreters are not allowed to move commands
-between the set of hidden and exposed commands, in either themselves or
-their descendants.
-.PP
-Currently, the names of hidden commands cannot contain namespace
-qualifiers, and you must first rename a command in a namespace to the
-global namespace before you can hide it.
-Commands to be hidden by \fBinterp hide\fR are looked up in the global
-namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
-prevents slaves from fooling a master interpreter into hiding the wrong
-command, by making the current namespace be different from the global one.
-.VE
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-This mechanism is based on the Safe-Tcl prototype implemented
-by Nathaniel Borenstein and Marshall Rose.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-load(n), safe(n), Tcl_CreateSlave(3)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-alias, master interpreter, safe interpreter, slave interpreter
diff --git a/raw/mann/join.n b/raw/mann/join.n
deleted file mode 100644
index af7a47e..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/join.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,267 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: join.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: join.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH join n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-join \- Create a string by joining together list elements
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBjoin \fIlist \fR?\fIjoinString\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fIlist\fR argument must be a valid Tcl list.
-This command returns the string
-formed by joining all of the elements of \fIlist\fR together with
-\fIjoinString\fR separating each adjacent pair of elements.
-The \fIjoinString\fR argument defaults to a space character.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-list(n), lappend(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, join, list, separator
diff --git a/raw/mann/keysyms.n b/raw/mann/keysyms.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 59211ac..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/keysyms.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1165 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: keysyms.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: keysyms.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH keysyms n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-keysyms \- keysyms recognized by Tk
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Tk recognizes many keysyms when specifying key bindings (eg,
-\fBbind . <Key-\fR\fIkeysym\fR\fB>\fR). The following list enumerates the
-keysyms that will be recognized by Tk. Note that not all keysyms will
-be valid on all platforms. For example, on Unix systems, the presence
-of a particular keysym is dependant on the configuration of the
-keyboard modifier map. This list shows keysyms along with their
-decimal and hexidecimal values.
-.PP
-.CS
-space 32 0x0020
-exclam 33 0x0021
-quotedbl 34 0x0022
-numbersign 35 0x0023
-dollar 36 0x0024
-percent 37 0x0025
-ampersand 38 0x0026
-quoteright 39 0x0027
-parenleft 40 0x0028
-parenright 41 0x0029
-asterisk 42 0x002a
-plus 43 0x002b
-comma 44 0x002c
-minus 45 0x002d
-period 46 0x002e
-slash 47 0x002f
-0 48 0x0030
-1 49 0x0031
-2 50 0x0032
-3 51 0x0033
-4 52 0x0034
-5 53 0x0035
-6 54 0x0036
-7 55 0x0037
-8 56 0x0038
-9 57 0x0039
-colon 58 0x003a
-semicolon 59 0x003b
-less 60 0x003c
-equal 61 0x003d
-greater 62 0x003e
-question 63 0x003f
-at 64 0x0040
-A 65 0x0041
-B 66 0x0042
-C 67 0x0043
-D 68 0x0044
-E 69 0x0045
-F 70 0x0046
-G 71 0x0047
-H 72 0x0048
-I 73 0x0049
-J 74 0x004a
-K 75 0x004b
-L 76 0x004c
-M 77 0x004d
-N 78 0x004e
-O 79 0x004f
-P 80 0x0050
-Q 81 0x0051
-R 82 0x0052
-S 83 0x0053
-T 84 0x0054
-U 85 0x0055
-V 86 0x0056
-W 87 0x0057
-X 88 0x0058
-Y 89 0x0059
-Z 90 0x005a
-bracketleft 91 0x005b
-backslash 92 0x005c
-bracketright 93 0x005d
-asciicircum 94 0x005e
-underscore 95 0x005f
-quoteleft 96 0x0060
-a 97 0x0061
-b 98 0x0062
-c 99 0x0063
-d 100 0x0064
-e 101 0x0065
-f 102 0x0066
-g 103 0x0067
-h 104 0x0068
-i 105 0x0069
-j 106 0x006a
-k 107 0x006b
-l 108 0x006c
-m 109 0x006d
-n 110 0x006e
-o 111 0x006f
-p 112 0x0070
-q 113 0x0071
-r 114 0x0072
-s 115 0x0073
-t 116 0x0074
-u 117 0x0075
-v 118 0x0076
-w 119 0x0077
-x 120 0x0078
-y 121 0x0079
-z 122 0x007a
-braceleft 123 0x007b
-bar 124 0x007c
-braceright 125 0x007d
-asciitilde 126 0x007e
-nobreakspace 160 0x00a0
-exclamdown 161 0x00a1
-cent 162 0x00a2
-sterling 163 0x00a3
-currency 164 0x00a4
-yen 165 0x00a5
-brokenbar 166 0x00a6
-section 167 0x00a7
-diaeresis 168 0x00a8
-copyright 169 0x00a9
-ordfeminine 170 0x00aa
-guillemotleft 171 0x00ab
-notsign 172 0x00ac
-hyphen 173 0x00ad
-registered 174 0x00ae
-macron 175 0x00af
-degree 176 0x00b0
-plusminus 177 0x00b1
-twosuperior 178 0x00b2
-threesuperior 179 0x00b3
-acute 180 0x00b4
-mu 181 0x00b5
-paragraph 182 0x00b6
-periodcentered 183 0x00b7
-cedilla 184 0x00b8
-onesuperior 185 0x00b9
-masculine 186 0x00ba
-guillemotright 187 0x00bb
-onequarter 188 0x00bc
-onehalf 189 0x00bd
-threequarters 190 0x00be
-questiondown 191 0x00bf
-Agrave 192 0x00c0
-Aacute 193 0x00c1
-Acircumflex 194 0x00c2
-Atilde 195 0x00c3
-Adiaeresis 196 0x00c4
-Aring 197 0x00c5
-AE 198 0x00c6
-Ccedilla 199 0x00c7
-Egrave 200 0x00c8
-Eacute 201 0x00c9
-Ecircumflex 202 0x00ca
-Ediaeresis 203 0x00cb
-Igrave 204 0x00cc
-Iacute 205 0x00cd
-Icircumflex 206 0x00ce
-Idiaeresis 207 0x00cf
-Eth 208 0x00d0
-Ntilde 209 0x00d1
-Ograve 210 0x00d2
-Oacute 211 0x00d3
-Ocircumflex 212 0x00d4
-Otilde 213 0x00d5
-Odiaeresis 214 0x00d6
-multiply 215 0x00d7
-Ooblique 216 0x00d8
-Ugrave 217 0x00d9
-Uacute 218 0x00da
-Ucircumflex 219 0x00db
-Udiaeresis 220 0x00dc
-Yacute 221 0x00dd
-Thorn 222 0x00de
-ssharp 223 0x00df
-agrave 224 0x00e0
-aacute 225 0x00e1
-acircumflex 226 0x00e2
-atilde 227 0x00e3
-adiaeresis 228 0x00e4
-aring 229 0x00e5
-ae 230 0x00e6
-ccedilla 231 0x00e7
-egrave 232 0x00e8
-eacute 233 0x00e9
-ecircumflex 234 0x00ea
-ediaeresis 235 0x00eb
-igrave 236 0x00ec
-iacute 237 0x00ed
-icircumflex 238 0x00ee
-idiaeresis 239 0x00ef
-eth 240 0x00f0
-ntilde 241 0x00f1
-ograve 242 0x00f2
-oacute 243 0x00f3
-ocircumflex 244 0x00f4
-otilde 245 0x00f5
-odiaeresis 246 0x00f6
-division 247 0x00f7
-oslash 248 0x00f8
-ugrave 249 0x00f9
-uacute 250 0x00fa
-ucircumflex 251 0x00fb
-udiaeresis 252 0x00fc
-yacute 253 0x00fd
-thorn 254 0x00fe
-ydiaeresis 255 0x00ff
-Aogonek 417 0x01a1
-breve 418 0x01a2
-Lstroke 419 0x01a3
-Lcaron 421 0x01a5
-Sacute 422 0x01a6
-Scaron 425 0x01a9
-Scedilla 426 0x01aa
-Tcaron 427 0x01ab
-Zacute 428 0x01ac
-.CE
-.CS
-Zcaron 430 0x01ae
-Zabovedot 431 0x01af
-aogonek 433 0x01b1
-ogonek 434 0x01b2
-lstroke 435 0x01b3
-lcaron 437 0x01b5
-sacute 438 0x01b6
-caron 439 0x01b7
-scaron 441 0x01b9
-scedilla 442 0x01ba
-tcaron 443 0x01bb
-zacute 444 0x01bc
-doubleacute 445 0x01bd
-zcaron 446 0x01be
-zabovedot 447 0x01bf
-Racute 448 0x01c0
-Abreve 451 0x01c3
-Cacute 454 0x01c6
-Ccaron 456 0x01c8
-Eogonek 458 0x01ca
-Ecaron 460 0x01cc
-Dcaron 463 0x01cf
-Nacute 465 0x01d1
-Ncaron 466 0x01d2
-Odoubleacute 469 0x01d5
-Rcaron 472 0x01d8
-Uring 473 0x01d9
-Udoubleacute 475 0x01db
-Tcedilla 478 0x01de
-racute 480 0x01e0
-abreve 483 0x01e3
-cacute 486 0x01e6
-ccaron 488 0x01e8
-eogonek 490 0x01ea
-ecaron 492 0x01ec
-dcaron 495 0x01ef
-nacute 497 0x01f1
-ncaron 498 0x01f2
-odoubleacute 501 0x01f5
-rcaron 504 0x01f8
-uring 505 0x01f9
-udoubleacute 507 0x01fb
-tcedilla 510 0x01fe
-abovedot 511 0x01ff
-Hstroke 673 0x02a1
-Hcircumflex 678 0x02a6
-Iabovedot 681 0x02a9
-Gbreve 683 0x02ab
-Jcircumflex 684 0x02ac
-hstroke 689 0x02b1
-hcircumflex 694 0x02b6
-idotless 697 0x02b9
-gbreve 699 0x02bb
-jcircumflex 700 0x02bc
-Cabovedot 709 0x02c5
-Ccircumflex 710 0x02c6
-Gabovedot 725 0x02d5
-Gcircumflex 728 0x02d8
-Ubreve 733 0x02dd
-Scircumflex 734 0x02de
-cabovedot 741 0x02e5
-ccircumflex 742 0x02e6
-gabovedot 757 0x02f5
-gcircumflex 760 0x02f8
-ubreve 765 0x02fd
-scircumflex 766 0x02fe
-kappa 930 0x03a2
-Rcedilla 931 0x03a3
-Itilde 933 0x03a5
-Lcedilla 934 0x03a6
-Emacron 938 0x03aa
-Gcedilla 939 0x03ab
-Tslash 940 0x03ac
-rcedilla 947 0x03b3
-itilde 949 0x03b5
-lcedilla 950 0x03b6
-emacron 954 0x03ba
-gacute 955 0x03bb
-tslash 956 0x03bc
-ENG 957 0x03bd
-eng 959 0x03bf
-Amacron 960 0x03c0
-Iogonek 967 0x03c7
-Eabovedot 972 0x03cc
-Imacron 975 0x03cf
-Ncedilla 977 0x03d1
-Omacron 978 0x03d2
-Kcedilla 979 0x03d3
-Uogonek 985 0x03d9
-Utilde 989 0x03dd
-Umacron 990 0x03de
-amacron 992 0x03e0
-iogonek 999 0x03e7
-eabovedot 1004 0x03ec
-imacron 1007 0x03ef
-ncedilla 1009 0x03f1
-omacron 1010 0x03f2
-kcedilla 1011 0x03f3
-uogonek 1017 0x03f9
-utilde 1021 0x03fd
-umacron 1022 0x03fe
-overline 1150 0x047e
-kana_fullstop 1185 0x04a1
-kana_openingbracket 1186 0x04a2
-kana_closingbracket 1187 0x04a3
-kana_comma 1188 0x04a4
-kana_middledot 1189 0x04a5
-kana_WO 1190 0x04a6
-kana_a 1191 0x04a7
-kana_i 1192 0x04a8
-kana_u 1193 0x04a9
-kana_e 1194 0x04aa
-kana_o 1195 0x04ab
-kana_ya 1196 0x04ac
-kana_yu 1197 0x04ad
-kana_yo 1198 0x04ae
-kana_tu 1199 0x04af
-prolongedsound 1200 0x04b0
-kana_A 1201 0x04b1
-kana_I 1202 0x04b2
-kana_U 1203 0x04b3
-kana_E 1204 0x04b4
-kana_O 1205 0x04b5
-kana_KA 1206 0x04b6
-kana_KI 1207 0x04b7
-kana_KU 1208 0x04b8
-kana_KE 1209 0x04b9
-kana_KO 1210 0x04ba
-kana_SA 1211 0x04bb
-kana_SHI 1212 0x04bc
-kana_SU 1213 0x04bd
-kana_SE 1214 0x04be
-kana_SO 1215 0x04bf
-kana_TA 1216 0x04c0
-kana_TI 1217 0x04c1
-kana_TU 1218 0x04c2
-kana_TE 1219 0x04c3
-kana_TO 1220 0x04c4
-kana_NA 1221 0x04c5
-kana_NI 1222 0x04c6
-kana_NU 1223 0x04c7
-kana_NE 1224 0x04c8
-kana_NO 1225 0x04c9
-kana_HA 1226 0x04ca
-kana_HI 1227 0x04cb
-kana_HU 1228 0x04cc
-kana_HE 1229 0x04cd
-kana_HO 1230 0x04ce
-kana_MA 1231 0x04cf
-kana_MI 1232 0x04d0
-kana_MU 1233 0x04d1
-kana_ME 1234 0x04d2
-kana_MO 1235 0x04d3
-kana_YA 1236 0x04d4
-kana_YU 1237 0x04d5
-kana_YO 1238 0x04d6
-kana_RA 1239 0x04d7
-kana_RI 1240 0x04d8
-kana_RU 1241 0x04d9
-kana_RE 1242 0x04da
-kana_RO 1243 0x04db
-kana_WA 1244 0x04dc
-kana_N 1245 0x04dd
-voicedsound 1246 0x04de
-semivoicedsound 1247 0x04df
-Arabic_comma 1452 0x05ac
-Arabic_semicolon 1467 0x05bb
-Arabic_question_mark 1471 0x05bf
-Arabic_hamza 1473 0x05c1
-Arabic_maddaonalef 1474 0x05c2
-Arabic_hamzaonalef 1475 0x05c3
-Arabic_hamzaonwaw 1476 0x05c4
-Arabic_hamzaunderalef 1477 0x05c5
-Arabic_hamzaonyeh 1478 0x05c6
-Arabic_alef 1479 0x05c7
-Arabic_beh 1480 0x05c8
-Arabic_tehmarbuta 1481 0x05c9
-Arabic_teh 1482 0x05ca
-Arabic_theh 1483 0x05cb
-Arabic_jeem 1484 0x05cc
-Arabic_hah 1485 0x05cd
-Arabic_khah 1486 0x05ce
-Arabic_dal 1487 0x05cf
-Arabic_thal 1488 0x05d0
-Arabic_ra 1489 0x05d1
-Arabic_zain 1490 0x05d2
-Arabic_seen 1491 0x05d3
-Arabic_sheen 1492 0x05d4
-Arabic_sad 1493 0x05d5
-Arabic_dad 1494 0x05d6
-Arabic_tah 1495 0x05d7
-Arabic_zah 1496 0x05d8
-Arabic_ain 1497 0x05d9
-Arabic_ghain 1498 0x05da
-Arabic_tatweel 1504 0x05e0
-Arabic_feh 1505 0x05e1
-Arabic_qaf 1506 0x05e2
-Arabic_kaf 1507 0x05e3
-Arabic_lam 1508 0x05e4
-Arabic_meem 1509 0x05e5
-.CE
-.CS
-Arabic_noon 1510 0x05e6
-Arabic_heh 1511 0x05e7
-Arabic_waw 1512 0x05e8
-Arabic_alefmaksura 1513 0x05e9
-Arabic_yeh 1514 0x05ea
-Arabic_fathatan 1515 0x05eb
-Arabic_dammatan 1516 0x05ec
-Arabic_kasratan 1517 0x05ed
-Arabic_fatha 1518 0x05ee
-Arabic_damma 1519 0x05ef
-Arabic_kasra 1520 0x05f0
-Arabic_shadda 1521 0x05f1
-Arabic_sukun 1522 0x05f2
-Serbian_dje 1697 0x06a1
-Macedonia_gje 1698 0x06a2
-Cyrillic_io 1699 0x06a3
-Ukranian_je 1700 0x06a4
-Macedonia_dse 1701 0x06a5
-Ukranian_i 1702 0x06a6
-Ukranian_yi 1703 0x06a7
-Serbian_je 1704 0x06a8
-Serbian_lje 1705 0x06a9
-Serbian_nje 1706 0x06aa
-Serbian_tshe 1707 0x06ab
-Macedonia_kje 1708 0x06ac
-Byelorussian_shortu 1710 0x06ae
-Serbian_dze 1711 0x06af
-numerosign 1712 0x06b0
-Serbian_DJE 1713 0x06b1
-Macedonia_GJE 1714 0x06b2
-Cyrillic_IO 1715 0x06b3
-Ukranian_JE 1716 0x06b4
-Macedonia_DSE 1717 0x06b5
-Ukranian_I 1718 0x06b6
-Ukranian_YI 1719 0x06b7
-Serbian_JE 1720 0x06b8
-Serbian_LJE 1721 0x06b9
-Serbian_NJE 1722 0x06ba
-Serbian_TSHE 1723 0x06bb
-Macedonia_KJE 1724 0x06bc
-Byelorussian_SHORTU 1726 0x06be
-Serbian_DZE 1727 0x06bf
-Cyrillic_yu 1728 0x06c0
-Cyrillic_a 1729 0x06c1
-Cyrillic_be 1730 0x06c2
-Cyrillic_tse 1731 0x06c3
-Cyrillic_de 1732 0x06c4
-Cyrillic_ie 1733 0x06c5
-Cyrillic_ef 1734 0x06c6
-Cyrillic_ghe 1735 0x06c7
-Cyrillic_ha 1736 0x06c8
-Cyrillic_i 1737 0x06c9
-Cyrillic_shorti 1738 0x06ca
-Cyrillic_ka 1739 0x06cb
-Cyrillic_el 1740 0x06cc
-Cyrillic_em 1741 0x06cd
-Cyrillic_en 1742 0x06ce
-Cyrillic_o 1743 0x06cf
-Cyrillic_pe 1744 0x06d0
-Cyrillic_ya 1745 0x06d1
-Cyrillic_er 1746 0x06d2
-Cyrillic_es 1747 0x06d3
-Cyrillic_te 1748 0x06d4
-Cyrillic_u 1749 0x06d5
-Cyrillic_zhe 1750 0x06d6
-Cyrillic_ve 1751 0x06d7
-Cyrillic_softsign 1752 0x06d8
-Cyrillic_yeru 1753 0x06d9
-Cyrillic_ze 1754 0x06da
-Cyrillic_sha 1755 0x06db
-Cyrillic_e 1756 0x06dc
-Cyrillic_shcha 1757 0x06dd
-Cyrillic_che 1758 0x06de
-Cyrillic_hardsign 1759 0x06df
-Cyrillic_YU 1760 0x06e0
-Cyrillic_A 1761 0x06e1
-Cyrillic_BE 1762 0x06e2
-Cyrillic_TSE 1763 0x06e3
-Cyrillic_DE 1764 0x06e4
-Cyrillic_IE 1765 0x06e5
-Cyrillic_EF 1766 0x06e6
-Cyrillic_GHE 1767 0x06e7
-Cyrillic_HA 1768 0x06e8
-Cyrillic_I 1769 0x06e9
-Cyrillic_SHORTI 1770 0x06ea
-Cyrillic_KA 1771 0x06eb
-Cyrillic_EL 1772 0x06ec
-Cyrillic_EM 1773 0x06ed
-Cyrillic_EN 1774 0x06ee
-Cyrillic_O 1775 0x06ef
-Cyrillic_PE 1776 0x06f0
-Cyrillic_YA 1777 0x06f1
-Cyrillic_ER 1778 0x06f2
-Cyrillic_ES 1779 0x06f3
-Cyrillic_TE 1780 0x06f4
-Cyrillic_U 1781 0x06f5
-Cyrillic_ZHE 1782 0x06f6
-Cyrillic_VE 1783 0x06f7
-Cyrillic_SOFTSIGN 1784 0x06f8
-Cyrillic_YERU 1785 0x06f9
-Cyrillic_ZE 1786 0x06fa
-Cyrillic_SHA 1787 0x06fb
-Cyrillic_E 1788 0x06fc
-Cyrillic_SHCHA 1789 0x06fd
-Cyrillic_CHE 1790 0x06fe
-Cyrillic_HARDSIGN 1791 0x06ff
-Greek_ALPHAaccent 1953 0x07a1
-Greek_EPSILONaccent 1954 0x07a2
-Greek_ETAaccent 1955 0x07a3
-Greek_IOTAaccent 1956 0x07a4
-Greek_IOTAdiaeresis 1957 0x07a5
-Greek_IOTAaccentdiaeresis 1958 0x07a6
-Greek_OMICRONaccent 1959 0x07a7
-Greek_UPSILONaccent 1960 0x07a8
-Greek_UPSILONdieresis 1961 0x07a9
-Greek_UPSILONaccentdieresis 1962 0x07aa
-Greek_OMEGAaccent 1963 0x07ab
-Greek_alphaaccent 1969 0x07b1
-Greek_epsilonaccent 1970 0x07b2
-Greek_etaaccent 1971 0x07b3
-Greek_iotaaccent 1972 0x07b4
-Greek_iotadieresis 1973 0x07b5
-Greek_iotaaccentdieresis 1974 0x07b6
-Greek_omicronaccent 1975 0x07b7
-Greek_upsilonaccent 1976 0x07b8
-Greek_upsilondieresis 1977 0x07b9
-Greek_upsilonaccentdieresis 1978 0x07ba
-Greek_omegaaccent 1979 0x07bb
-Greek_ALPHA 1985 0x07c1
-Greek_BETA 1986 0x07c2
-Greek_GAMMA 1987 0x07c3
-Greek_DELTA 1988 0x07c4
-Greek_EPSILON 1989 0x07c5
-Greek_ZETA 1990 0x07c6
-Greek_ETA 1991 0x07c7
-Greek_THETA 1992 0x07c8
-Greek_IOTA 1993 0x07c9
-Greek_KAPPA 1994 0x07ca
-Greek_LAMBDA 1995 0x07cb
-Greek_MU 1996 0x07cc
-Greek_NU 1997 0x07cd
-Greek_XI 1998 0x07ce
-Greek_OMICRON 1999 0x07cf
-Greek_PI 2000 0x07d0
-Greek_RHO 2001 0x07d1
-Greek_SIGMA 2002 0x07d2
-Greek_TAU 2004 0x07d4
-Greek_UPSILON 2005 0x07d5
-Greek_PHI 2006 0x07d6
-Greek_CHI 2007 0x07d7
-Greek_PSI 2008 0x07d8
-Greek_OMEGA 2009 0x07d9
-Greek_alpha 2017 0x07e1
-Greek_beta 2018 0x07e2
-Greek_gamma 2019 0x07e3
-Greek_delta 2020 0x07e4
-Greek_epsilon 2021 0x07e5
-Greek_zeta 2022 0x07e6
-Greek_eta 2023 0x07e7
-Greek_theta 2024 0x07e8
-Greek_iota 2025 0x07e9
-Greek_kappa 2026 0x07ea
-Greek_lambda 2027 0x07eb
-Greek_mu 2028 0x07ec
-Greek_nu 2029 0x07ed
-Greek_xi 2030 0x07ee
-Greek_omicron 2031 0x07ef
-Greek_pi 2032 0x07f0
-Greek_rho 2033 0x07f1
-Greek_sigma 2034 0x07f2
-Greek_finalsmallsigma 2035 0x07f3
-Greek_tau 2036 0x07f4
-Greek_upsilon 2037 0x07f5
-Greek_phi 2038 0x07f6
-Greek_chi 2039 0x07f7
-Greek_psi 2040 0x07f8
-Greek_omega 2041 0x07f9
-leftradical 2209 0x08a1
-topleftradical 2210 0x08a2
-horizconnector 2211 0x08a3
-topintegral 2212 0x08a4
-botintegral 2213 0x08a5
-vertconnector 2214 0x08a6
-topleftsqbracket 2215 0x08a7
-botleftsqbracket 2216 0x08a8
-toprightsqbracket 2217 0x08a9
-botrightsqbracket 2218 0x08aa
-topleftparens 2219 0x08ab
-botleftparens 2220 0x08ac
-toprightparens 2221 0x08ad
-botrightparens 2222 0x08ae
-leftmiddlecurlybrace 2223 0x08af
-rightmiddlecurlybrace 2224 0x08b0
-topleftsummation 2225 0x08b1
-botleftsummation 2226 0x08b2
-topvertsummationconnector 2227 0x08b3
-botvertsummationconnector 2228 0x08b4
-toprightsummation 2229 0x08b5
-botrightsummation 2230 0x08b6
-rightmiddlesummation 2231 0x08b7
-.CE
-.CS
-lessthanequal 2236 0x08bc
-notequal 2237 0x08bd
-greaterthanequal 2238 0x08be
-integral 2239 0x08bf
-therefore 2240 0x08c0
-variation 2241 0x08c1
-infinity 2242 0x08c2
-nabla 2245 0x08c5
-approximate 2248 0x08c8
-similarequal 2249 0x08c9
-ifonlyif 2253 0x08cd
-implies 2254 0x08ce
-identical 2255 0x08cf
-radical 2262 0x08d6
-includedin 2266 0x08da
-includes 2267 0x08db
-intersection 2268 0x08dc
-union 2269 0x08dd
-logicaland 2270 0x08de
-logicalor 2271 0x08df
-partialderivative 2287 0x08ef
-function 2294 0x08f6
-leftarrow 2299 0x08fb
-uparrow 2300 0x08fc
-rightarrow 2301 0x08fd
-downarrow 2302 0x08fe
-blank 2527 0x09df
-soliddiamond 2528 0x09e0
-checkerboard 2529 0x09e1
-ht 2530 0x09e2
-ff 2531 0x09e3
-cr 2532 0x09e4
-lf 2533 0x09e5
-nl 2536 0x09e8
-vt 2537 0x09e9
-lowrightcorner 2538 0x09ea
-uprightcorner 2539 0x09eb
-upleftcorner 2540 0x09ec
-lowleftcorner 2541 0x09ed
-crossinglines 2542 0x09ee
-horizlinescan1 2543 0x09ef
-horizlinescan3 2544 0x09f0
-horizlinescan5 2545 0x09f1
-horizlinescan7 2546 0x09f2
-horizlinescan9 2547 0x09f3
-leftt 2548 0x09f4
-rightt 2549 0x09f5
-bott 2550 0x09f6
-topt 2551 0x09f7
-vertbar 2552 0x09f8
-emspace 2721 0x0aa1
-enspace 2722 0x0aa2
-em3space 2723 0x0aa3
-em4space 2724 0x0aa4
-digitspace 2725 0x0aa5
-punctspace 2726 0x0aa6
-thinspace 2727 0x0aa7
-hairspace 2728 0x0aa8
-emdash 2729 0x0aa9
-endash 2730 0x0aaa
-signifblank 2732 0x0aac
-ellipsis 2734 0x0aae
-doubbaselinedot 2735 0x0aaf
-onethird 2736 0x0ab0
-twothirds 2737 0x0ab1
-onefifth 2738 0x0ab2
-twofifths 2739 0x0ab3
-threefifths 2740 0x0ab4
-fourfifths 2741 0x0ab5
-onesixth 2742 0x0ab6
-fivesixths 2743 0x0ab7
-careof 2744 0x0ab8
-figdash 2747 0x0abb
-leftanglebracket 2748 0x0abc
-decimalpoint 2749 0x0abd
-rightanglebracket 2750 0x0abe
-marker 2751 0x0abf
-oneeighth 2755 0x0ac3
-threeeighths 2756 0x0ac4
-fiveeighths 2757 0x0ac5
-seveneighths 2758 0x0ac6
-trademark 2761 0x0ac9
-signaturemark 2762 0x0aca
-trademarkincircle 2763 0x0acb
-leftopentriangle 2764 0x0acc
-rightopentriangle 2765 0x0acd
-emopencircle 2766 0x0ace
-emopenrectangle 2767 0x0acf
-leftsinglequotemark 2768 0x0ad0
-rightsinglequotemark 2769 0x0ad1
-leftdoublequotemark 2770 0x0ad2
-rightdoublequotemark 2771 0x0ad3
-prescription 2772 0x0ad4
-minutes 2774 0x0ad6
-seconds 2775 0x0ad7
-latincross 2777 0x0ad9
-hexagram 2778 0x0ada
-filledrectbullet 2779 0x0adb
-filledlefttribullet 2780 0x0adc
-filledrighttribullet 2781 0x0add
-emfilledcircle 2782 0x0ade
-emfilledrect 2783 0x0adf
-enopencircbullet 2784 0x0ae0
-enopensquarebullet 2785 0x0ae1
-openrectbullet 2786 0x0ae2
-opentribulletup 2787 0x0ae3
-opentribulletdown 2788 0x0ae4
-openstar 2789 0x0ae5
-enfilledcircbullet 2790 0x0ae6
-enfilledsqbullet 2791 0x0ae7
-filledtribulletup 2792 0x0ae8
-filledtribulletdown 2793 0x0ae9
-leftpointer 2794 0x0aea
-rightpointer 2795 0x0aeb
-club 2796 0x0aec
-diamond 2797 0x0aed
-heart 2798 0x0aee
-maltesecross 2800 0x0af0
-dagger 2801 0x0af1
-doubledagger 2802 0x0af2
-checkmark 2803 0x0af3
-ballotcross 2804 0x0af4
-musicalsharp 2805 0x0af5
-musicalflat 2806 0x0af6
-malesymbol 2807 0x0af7
-femalesymbol 2808 0x0af8
-telephone 2809 0x0af9
-telephonerecorder 2810 0x0afa
-phonographcopyright 2811 0x0afb
-caret 2812 0x0afc
-singlelowquotemark 2813 0x0afd
-doublelowquotemark 2814 0x0afe
-cursor 2815 0x0aff
-leftcaret 2979 0x0ba3
-rightcaret 2982 0x0ba6
-downcaret 2984 0x0ba8
-upcaret 2985 0x0ba9
-overbar 3008 0x0bc0
-downtack 3010 0x0bc2
-upshoe 3011 0x0bc3
-downstile 3012 0x0bc4
-underbar 3014 0x0bc6
-jot 3018 0x0bca
-quad 3020 0x0bcc
-uptack 3022 0x0bce
-circle 3023 0x0bcf
-upstile 3027 0x0bd3
-downshoe 3030 0x0bd6
-rightshoe 3032 0x0bd8
-leftshoe 3034 0x0bda
-lefttack 3036 0x0bdc
-righttack 3068 0x0bfc
-hebrew_aleph 3296 0x0ce0
-hebrew_beth 3297 0x0ce1
-hebrew_gimmel 3298 0x0ce2
-hebrew_daleth 3299 0x0ce3
-hebrew_he 3300 0x0ce4
-hebrew_waw 3301 0x0ce5
-hebrew_zayin 3302 0x0ce6
-hebrew_het 3303 0x0ce7
-hebrew_teth 3304 0x0ce8
-hebrew_yod 3305 0x0ce9
-hebrew_finalkaph 3306 0x0cea
-hebrew_kaph 3307 0x0ceb
-hebrew_lamed 3308 0x0cec
-hebrew_finalmem 3309 0x0ced
-hebrew_mem 3310 0x0cee
-hebrew_finalnun 3311 0x0cef
-hebrew_nun 3312 0x0cf0
-hebrew_samekh 3313 0x0cf1
-hebrew_ayin 3314 0x0cf2
-hebrew_finalpe 3315 0x0cf3
-hebrew_pe 3316 0x0cf4
-hebrew_finalzadi 3317 0x0cf5
-hebrew_zadi 3318 0x0cf6
-hebrew_kuf 3319 0x0cf7
-hebrew_resh 3320 0x0cf8
-hebrew_shin 3321 0x0cf9
-hebrew_taf 3322 0x0cfa
-BackSpace 65288 0xff08
-Tab 65289 0xff09
-Linefeed 65290 0xff0a
-Clear 65291 0xff0b
-Return 65293 0xff0d
-Pause 65299 0xff13
-Scroll_Lock 65300 0xff14
-Sys_Req 65301 0xff15
-Escape 65307 0xff1b
-Multi_key 65312 0xff20
-Kanji 65313 0xff21
-Home 65360 0xff50
-Left 65361 0xff51
-Up 65362 0xff52
-Right 65363 0xff53
-Down 65364 0xff54
-Prior 65365 0xff55
-Next 65366 0xff56
-End 65367 0xff57
-Begin 65368 0xff58
-Win_L 65371 0xff5b
-Win_R 65372 0xff5c
-.CE
-.CS
-App 65373 0xff5d
-Select 65376 0xff60
-Print 65377 0xff61
-Execute 65378 0xff62
-Insert 65379 0xff63
-Undo 65381 0xff65
-Redo 65382 0xff66
-Menu 65383 0xff67
-Find 65384 0xff68
-Cancel 65385 0xff69
-Help 65386 0xff6a
-Break 65387 0xff6b
-Hebrew_switch 65406 0xff7e
-Num_Lock 65407 0xff7f
-KP_Space 65408 0xff80
-KP_Tab 65417 0xff89
-KP_Enter 65421 0xff8d
-KP_F1 65425 0xff91
-KP_F2 65426 0xff92
-KP_F3 65427 0xff93
-KP_F4 65428 0xff94
-KP_Multiply 65450 0xffaa
-KP_Add 65451 0xffab
-KP_Separator 65452 0xffac
-KP_Subtract 65453 0xffad
-KP_Decimal 65454 0xffae
-KP_Divide 65455 0xffaf
-KP_0 65456 0xffb0
-KP_1 65457 0xffb1
-KP_2 65458 0xffb2
-KP_3 65459 0xffb3
-KP_4 65460 0xffb4
-KP_5 65461 0xffb5
-KP_6 65462 0xffb6
-KP_7 65463 0xffb7
-KP_8 65464 0xffb8
-KP_9 65465 0xffb9
-KP_Equal 65469 0xffbd
-F1 65470 0xffbe
-F2 65471 0xffbf
-F3 65472 0xffc0
-F4 65473 0xffc1
-F5 65474 0xffc2
-F6 65475 0xffc3
-F7 65476 0xffc4
-F8 65477 0xffc5
-F9 65478 0xffc6
-F10 65479 0xffc7
-L1 65480 0xffc8
-L2 65481 0xffc9
-L3 65482 0xffca
-L4 65483 0xffcb
-L5 65484 0xffcc
-L6 65485 0xffcd
-L7 65486 0xffce
-L8 65487 0xffcf
-L9 65488 0xffd0
-L10 65489 0xffd1
-R1 65490 0xffd2
-R2 65491 0xffd3
-R3 65492 0xffd4
-R4 65493 0xffd5
-R5 65494 0xffd6
-R6 65495 0xffd7
-R7 65496 0xffd8
-R8 65497 0xffd9
-R9 65498 0xffda
-R10 65499 0xffdb
-R11 65500 0xffdc
-R12 65501 0xffdd
-F33 65502 0xffde
-R14 65503 0xffdf
-R15 65504 0xffe0
-Shift_L 65505 0xffe1
-Shift_R 65506 0xffe2
-Control_L 65507 0xffe3
-Control_R 65508 0xffe4
-Caps_Lock 65509 0xffe5
-Shift_Lock 65510 0xffe6
-Meta_L 65511 0xffe7
-Meta_R 65512 0xffe8
-Alt_L 65513 0xffe9
-Alt_R 65514 0xffea
-Super_L 65515 0xffeb
-Super_R 65516 0xffec
-Hyper_L 65517 0xffed
-Hyper_R 65518 0xffee
-Delete 65535 0xffff
-.CE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-bind
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-keysym, bind, binding
diff --git a/raw/mann/lappend.n b/raw/mann/lappend.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c62964a..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/lappend.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,273 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lappend.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lappend.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH lappend n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lappend \- Append list elements onto a variable
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlappend \fIvarName \fR?\fIvalue value value ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command treats the variable given by \fIvarName\fR as a list
-and appends each of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to that list as a separate
-element, with spaces between elements.
-If \fIvarName\fR doesn't exist, it is created as a list with elements
-given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments.
-\fBLappend\fR is similar to \fBappend\fR except that the \fIvalue\fRs
-are appended as list elements rather than raw text.
-This command provides a relatively efficient way to build up
-large lists. For example, ``\fBlappend a $b\fR'' is much
-more efficient than ``\fBset a [concat $a [list $b]]\fR'' when
-\fB$a\fR is long.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-list(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsort(n), lrange(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-append, element, list, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/library.n b/raw/mann/library.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 02ad65a..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/library.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,546 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1991-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: library.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: library.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH library n "8.0" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-auto_execok, auto_import, auto_load, auto_mkindex, auto_mkindex_old, auto_qualify, auto_reset, tcl_findLibrary, parray, tcl_endOfWord, tcl_startOfNextWord, tcl_startOfPreviousWord, tcl_wordBreakAfter, tcl_wordBreakBefore \- standard library of Tcl procedures
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBauto_execok \fIcmd\fR
-\fBauto_import \fIpattern\fR
-\fBauto_load \fIcmd\fR
-\fBauto_mkindex \fIdir pattern pattern ...\fR
-\fBauto_mkindex_old \fIdir pattern pattern ...\fR
-\fBauto_qualify \fIcommand namespace\fR
-\fBauto_reset\fR
-\fBtcl_findLibrary \fIbasename version patch initScript enVarName varName\fR
-\fBparray \fIarrayName\fR
-.VS
-\fBtcl_endOfWord \fIstr start\fR
-\fBtcl_startOfNextWord \fIstr start\fR
-\fBtcl_startOfPreviousWord \fIstr start\fR
-\fBtcl_wordBreakAfter \fIstr start\fR
-\fBtcl_wordBreakBefore \fIstr start\fR
-.VE
-.BE
-
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-Tcl includes a library of Tcl procedures for commonly-needed functions.
-The procedures defined in the Tcl library are generic ones suitable
-for use by many different applications.
-The location of the Tcl library is returned by the \fBinfo library\fR
-command.
-In addition to the Tcl library, each application will normally have
-its own library of support procedures as well; the location of this
-library is normally given by the value of the \fB$\fIapp\fB_library\fR
-global variable, where \fIapp\fR is the name of the application.
-For example, the location of the Tk library is kept in the variable
-\fB$tk_library\fR.
-.PP
-To access the procedures in the Tcl library, an application should
-source the file \fBinit.tcl\fR in the library, for example with
-the Tcl command
-.CS
-\fBsource [file join [info library] init.tcl]\fR
-.CE
-If the library procedure \fBTcl_Init\fR is invoked from an application's
-\fBTcl_AppInit\fR procedure, this happens automatically.
-The code in \fBinit.tcl\fR will define the \fBunknown\fR procedure
-and arrange for the other procedures to be loaded on-demand using
-the auto-load mechanism defined below.
-
-.SH "COMMAND PROCEDURES"
-.PP
-The following procedures are provided in the Tcl library:
-.TP
-\fBauto_execok \fIcmd\fR
-Determines whether there is an executable file or shell builtin
-by the name \fIcmd\fR. If so, it returns a list of arguments to be
-passed to \fBexec\fR to execute the executable file or shell builtin
-named by \fIcmd\fR. If not, it returns an empty string. This command
-examines the directories in the current search path (given by the PATH
-environment variable) in its search for an executable file named
-\fIcmd\fR. On Windows platforms, the search is expanded with the same
-directories and file extensions as used by \fBexec\fR. \fBAuto_exec\fR
-remembers information about previous searches in an array named
-\fBauto_execs\fR; this avoids the path search in future calls for the
-same \fIcmd\fR. The command \fBauto_reset\fR may be used to force
-\fBauto_execok\fR to forget its cached information.
-.TP
-\fBauto_import \fIpattern\fR
-\fBAuto_import\fR is invoked during \fBnamespace import\fR to see if
-the imported commands specified by \fIpattern\fR reside in an
-autoloaded library. If so, the commands are loaded so that they will
-be available to the interpreter for creating the import links. If the
-commands do not reside in an autoloaded library, \fBauto_import\fR
-does nothing. The pattern matching is performed according to the
-matching rules of \fBnamespace import\fR.
-.TP
-\fBauto_load \fIcmd\fR
-This command attempts to load the definition for a Tcl command named
-\fIcmd\fR. To do this, it searches an \fIauto-load path\fR, which is
-a list of one or more directories. The auto-load path is given by the
-global variable \fB$auto_path\fR if it exists. If there is no
-\fB$auto_path\fR variable, then the TCLLIBPATH environment variable is
-used, if it exists. Otherwise the auto-load path consists of just the
-Tcl library directory. Within each directory in the auto-load path
-there must be a file \fBtclIndex\fR that describes one or more
-commands defined in that directory and a script to evaluate to load
-each of the commands. The \fBtclIndex\fR file should be generated
-with the \fBauto_mkindex\fR command. If \fIcmd\fR is found in an
-index file, then the appropriate script is evaluated to create the
-command. The \fBauto_load\fR command returns 1 if \fIcmd\fR was
-successfully created. The command returns 0 if there was no index
-entry for \fIcmd\fR or if the script didn't actually define \fIcmd\fR
-(e.g. because index information is out of date). If an error occurs
-while processing the script, then that error is returned.
-\fBAuto_load\fR only reads the index information once and saves it in
-the array \fBauto_index\fR; future calls to \fBauto_load\fR check for
-\fIcmd\fR in the array rather than re-reading the index files. The
-cached index information may be deleted with the command
-\fBauto_reset\fR. This will force the next \fBauto_load\fR command to
-reload the index database from disk.
-.TP
-\fBauto_mkindex \fIdir pattern pattern ...\fR
-Generates an index suitable for use by \fBauto_load\fR. The command
-searches \fIdir\fR for all files whose names match any of the
-\fIpattern\fR arguments (matching is done with the \fBglob\fR
-command), generates an index of all the Tcl command procedures defined
-in all the matching files, and stores the index information in a file
-named \fBtclIndex\fR in \fIdir\fR. If no pattern is given a pattern of
-\fB*.tcl\fR will be assumed. For example, the command
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBauto_mkindex foo *.tcl\fR
-.CE
-.LP
-will read all the \fB.tcl\fR files in subdirectory \fBfoo\fR and
-generate a new index file \fBfoo/tclIndex\fR.
-.PP
-\fBAuto_mkindex\fR parses the Tcl scripts by sourcing them into a
-slave interpreter and monitoring the proc and namespace commands that
-are executed. Extensions can use the (undocumented)
-auto_mkindex_parser package to register other commands that can
-contribute to the auto_load index. You will have to read through
-auto.tcl to see how this works.
-.PP
-\fBAuto_mkindex_old\fR parses the Tcl scripts in a relatively
-unsophisticated way: if any line contains the word \fBproc\fR
-as its first characters then it is assumed to be a procedure
-definition and the next word of the line is taken as the
-procedure's name.
-Procedure definitions that don't appear in this way (e.g. they
-have spaces before the \fBproc\fR) will not be indexed. If your
-script contains "dangerous" code, such as global initialization
-code or procedure names with special characters like \fB$\fR,
-\fB*\fR, \fB[\fR or \fB]\fR, you are safer using auto_mkindex_old.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBauto_reset\fR
-Destroys all the information cached by \fBauto_execok\fR and
-\fBauto_load\fR. This information will be re-read from disk the next
-time it is needed. \fBAuto_reset\fR also deletes any procedures
-listed in the auto-load index, so that fresh copies of them will be
-loaded the next time that they're used.
-.TP
-\fBauto_qualify \fIcommand namespace\fR
-Computes a list of fully qualified names for \fIcommand\fR. This list
-mirrors the path a standard Tcl interpreter follows for command
-lookups: first it looks for the command in the current namespace, and
-then in the global namespace. Accordingly, if \fIcommand\fR is
-relative and \fInamespace\fR is not \fB::\fR, the list returned has
-two elements: \fIcommand\fR scoped by \fInamespace\fR, as if it were
-a command in the \fInamespace\fR namespace; and \fIcommand\fR as if it
-were a command in the global namespace. Otherwise, if either
-\fIcommand\fR is absolute (it begins with \fB::\fR), or
-\fInamespace\fR is \fB::\fR, the list contains only \fIcommand\fR as
-if it were a command in the global namespace.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fBAuto_qualify\fR is used by the auto-loading facilities in Tcl, both
-for producing auto-loading indexes such as \fIpkgIndex.tcl\fR, and for
-performing the actual auto-loading of functions at runtime.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtcl_findLibrary \fIbasename version patch initScript enVarName varName\fR
-This is a standard search procedure for use by extensions during
-their initialization. They call this procedure to look for their
-script library in several standard directories.
-The last component of the name of the library directory is
-normally \fIbasenameversion\fP
-(e.g., tk8.0), but it might be "library" when in the build hierarchies.
-The \fIinitScript\fR file will be sourced into the interpreter
-once it is found. The directory in which this file is found is
-stored into the global variable \fIvarName\fP.
-If this variable is already defined (e.g., by C code during
-application initialization) then no searching is done.
-Otherwise the search looks in these directories:
-the directory named by the environment variable \fIenVarName\fP;
-relative to the Tcl library directory;
-relative to the executable file in the standard installation
-bin or bin/\fIarch\fP directory;
-relative to the executable file in the current build tree;
-relative to the executable file in a parallel build tree.
-.TP
-\fBparray \fIarrayName\fR
-Prints on standard output the names and values of all the elements
-in the array \fIarrayName\fR.
-\fBArrayName\fR must be an array accessible to the caller of \fBparray\fR.
-It may be either local or global.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_endOfWord \fIstr start\fR
-.VS
-Returns the index of the first end-of-word location that occurs after
-a starting index \fIstart\fR in the string \fIstr\fR. An end-of-word
-location is defined to be the first non-word character following the
-first word character after the starting point. Returns -1 if there
-are no more end-of-word locations after the starting point. See the
-description of \fBtcl_wordchars\fR and \fBtcl_nonwordchars\fR below
-for more details on how Tcl determines which characters are word
-characters.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_startOfNextWord \fIstr start\fR
-Returns the index of the first start-of-word location that occurs
-after a starting index \fIstart\fR in the string \fIstr\fR. A
-start-of-word location is defined to be the first word character
-following a non-word character. Returns \-1 if there are no more
-start-of-word locations after the starting point.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_startOfPreviousWord \fIstr start\fR
-Returns the index of the first start-of-word location that occurs
-before a starting index \fIstart\fR in the string \fIstr\fR. Returns
-\-1 if there are no more start-of-word locations before the starting
-point.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_wordBreakAfter \fIstr start\fR
-Returns the index of the first word boundary after the starting index
-\fIstart\fR in the string \fIstr\fR. Returns \-1 if there are no more
-boundaries after the starting point in the given string. The index
-returned refers to the second character of the pair that comprises a
-boundary.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_wordBreakBefore \fIstr start\fR
-Returns the index of the first word boundary before the starting index
-\fIstart\fR in the string \fIstr\fR. Returns \-1 if there are no more
-boundaries before the starting point in the given string. The index
-returned refers to the second character of the pair that comprises a
-boundary.
-.VE
-
-.SH "VARIABLES"
-.PP
-The following global variables are defined or used by the procedures in
-the Tcl library:
-.TP
-\fBauto_execs\fR
-Used by \fBauto_execok\fR to record information about whether
-particular commands exist as executable files.
-.TP
-\fBauto_index\fR
-Used by \fBauto_load\fR to save the index information read from
-disk.
-.TP
-\fBauto_noexec\fR
-If set to any value, then \fBunknown\fR will not attempt to auto-exec
-any commands.
-.TP
-\fBauto_noload\fR
-If set to any value, then \fBunknown\fR will not attempt to auto-load
-any commands.
-.TP
-\fBauto_path\fR
-If set, then it must contain a valid Tcl list giving directories to
-search during auto-load operations.
-This variable is initialized during startup to contain, in order:
-the directories listed in the TCLLIBPATH environment variable,
-the directory named by the $tcl_library variable,
-the parent directory of $tcl_library,
-the directories listed in the $tcl_pkgPath variable.
-.TP
-\fBenv(TCL_LIBRARY)\fR
-If set, then it specifies the location of the directory containing
-library scripts (the value of this variable will be
-assigned to the \fBtcl_library\fR variable and therefore returned by
-the command \fBinfo library\fR). If this variable isn't set then
-a default value is used.
-.TP
-\fBenv(TCLLIBPATH)\fR
-If set, then it must contain a valid Tcl list giving directories to
-search during auto-load operations. Directories must be specified in
-Tcl format, using "/" as the path separator, regardless of platform.
-This variable is only used when initializing the \fBauto_path\fR variable.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_nonwordchars\fR
-.VS
-This variable contains a regular expression that is used by routines
-like \fBtcl_endOfWord\fR to identify whether a character is part of a
-word or not. If the pattern matches a character, the character is
-considered to be a non-word character. On Windows platforms, spaces,
-tabs, and newlines are considered non-word characters. Under Unix,
-everything but numbers, letters and underscores are considered
-non-word characters.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_wordchars\fR
-This variable contains a regular expression that is used by routines
-like \fBtcl_endOfWord\fR to identify whether a character is part of a
-word or not. If the pattern matches a character, the character is
-considered to be a word character. On Windows platforms, words are
-comprised of any character that is not a space, tab, or newline. Under
-Unix, words are comprised of numbers, letters or underscores.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBunknown_pending\fR
-Used by \fBunknown\fR to record the command(s) for which it is
-searching.
-It is used to detect errors where \fBunknown\fR recurses on itself
-infinitely.
-The variable is unset before \fBunknown\fR returns.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-info(n), re_syntax(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-auto-exec, auto-load, library, unknown, word, whitespace
diff --git a/raw/mann/lindex.n b/raw/mann/lindex.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 957a4c7..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/lindex.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,275 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lindex.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lindex.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH lindex n 8.2 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lindex \- Retrieve an element from a list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlindex \fIlist index\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command treats \fIlist\fR as a Tcl list and returns the
-\fIindex\fR'th element from it (0 refers to the first element of the list).
-In extracting the element, \fIlindex\fR observes the same rules
-concerning braces and quotes and backslashes as the Tcl command
-interpreter; however, variable
-substitution and command substitution do not occur.
-If \fIindex\fR is negative or greater than or equal to the number
-of elements in \fIvalue\fR, then an empty
-string is returned.
-If \fIindex\fR has the value \fBend\fR, it refers to the last element
-in the list, and \fBend\-\fIinteger\fR refers to the last element in
-the list minus the specified integer offset.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-list(n), lappend(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), lsort(n),
-lrange(n), lreplace(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, index, list
diff --git a/raw/mann/linsert.n b/raw/mann/linsert.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 165417e..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/linsert.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,271 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: linsert.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: linsert.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH linsert n 8.2 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-linsert \- Insert elements into a list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlinsert \fIlist index element \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command produces a new list from \fIlist\fR by inserting all of the
-\fIelement\fR arguments just before the \fIindex\fRth element of
-\fIlist\fR. Each \fIelement\fR argument will become a separate element of
-the new list. If \fIindex\fR is less than or equal to zero, then the new
-elements are inserted at the beginning of the list. If \fIindex\fR has the
-value \fBend\fR, or if it is greater than or equal to the number of
-elements in the list, then the new elements are appended to the list.
-\fBend\-\fIinteger\fR refers to the last element in the list minus the
-specified integer offset.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-list(n), lappend(n), llength(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, insert, list
diff --git a/raw/mann/list.n b/raw/mann/list.n
deleted file mode 100644
index b6d2801..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/list.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,284 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: list.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: list.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH list n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-list \- Create a list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlist \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command returns a list comprised of all the \fIarg\fRs,
-or an empty string if no \fIarg\fRs are specified.
-Braces and backslashes get added as necessary, so that the \fBlindex\fR command
-may be used on the result to re-extract the original arguments, and also
-so that \fBeval\fR may be used to execute the resulting list, with
-\fIarg1\fR comprising the command's name and the other \fIarg\fRs comprising
-its arguments. \fBList\fR produces slightly different results than
-\fBconcat\fR: \fBconcat\fR removes one level of grouping before forming
-the list, while \fBlist\fR works directly from the original arguments.
-For example, the command
-.CS
-\fBlist a b {c d e} {f {g h}}\fR
-.CE
-will return
-.CS
-\fBa b {c d e} {f {g h}}\fR
-.CE
-while \fBconcat\fR with the same arguments will return
-.CS
-\fBa b c d e f {g h}\fR
-.CE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), lsort(n),
-lrange(n), lreplace(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, list
diff --git a/raw/mann/llength.n b/raw/mann/llength.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 25d2a91..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/llength.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,264 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: llength.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: llength.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH llength n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-llength \- Count the number of elements in a list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBllength \fIlist\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Treats \fIlist\fR as a list and returns a decimal string giving
-the number of elements in it.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-list(n), lindex(n), lrange(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, list, length
diff --git a/raw/mann/load.n b/raw/mann/load.n
deleted file mode 100644
index aff61dd..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/load.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,370 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: load.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: load.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH load n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-load \- Load machine code and initialize new commands.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBload \fIfileName\fR
-.br
-\fBload \fIfileName packageName\fR
-.br
-\fBload \fIfileName packageName interp\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command loads binary code from a file into the
-application's address space and calls an initialization procedure
-in the package to incorporate it into an interpreter. \fIfileName\fR
-is the name of the file containing the code; its exact form varies
-from system to system but on most systems it is a shared library,
-such as a \fB.so\fR file under Solaris or a DLL under Windows.
-\fIpackageName\fR is the name of the package, and is used to
-compute the name of an initialization procedure.
-\fIinterp\fR is the path name of the interpreter into which to load
-the package (see the \fBinterp\fR manual entry for details);
-if \fIinterp\fR is omitted, it defaults to the
-interpreter in which the \fBload\fR command was invoked.
-.PP
-Once the file has been loaded into the application's address space,
-one of two initialization procedures will be invoked in the new code.
-Typically the initialization procedure will add new commands to a
-Tcl interpreter.
-The name of the initialization procedure is determined by
-\fIpackageName\fR and whether or not the target interpreter
-is a safe one. For normal interpreters the name of the initialization
-procedure will have the form \fIpkg\fB_Init\fR, where \fIpkg\fR
-is the same as \fIpackageName\fR except that the first letter is
-converted to upper case and all other letters
-are converted to lower case. For example, if \fIpackageName\fR is
-\fBfoo\fR or \fBFOo\fR, the initialization procedure's name will
-be \fBFoo_Init\fR.
-.PP
-If the target interpreter is a safe interpreter, then the name
-of the initialization procedure will be \fIpkg\fB_SafeInit\fR
-instead of \fIpkg\fB_Init\fR.
-The \fIpkg\fB_SafeInit\fR function should be written carefully, so that it
-initializes the safe interpreter only with partial functionality provided
-by the package that is safe for use by untrusted code. For more information
-on Safe\-Tcl, see the \fBsafe\fR manual entry.
-.PP
-The initialization procedure must match the following prototype:
-.CS
-typedef int Tcl_PackageInitProc(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
-.CE
-The \fIinterp\fR argument identifies the interpreter in which the
-package is to be loaded. The initialization procedure must return
-\fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to indicate whether or not it completed
-successfully; in the event of an error it should set the interpreter's result
-to point to an error message. The result of the \fBload\fR command
-will be the result returned by the initialization procedure.
-.PP
-The actual loading of a file will only be done once for each \fIfileName\fR
-in an application. If a given \fIfileName\fR is loaded into multiple
-interpreters, then the first \fBload\fR will load the code and
-call the initialization procedure; subsequent \fBload\fRs will
-call the initialization procedure without loading the code again.
-It is not possible to unload or reload a package.
-.PP
-The \fBload\fR command also supports packages that are statically
-linked with the application, if those packages have been registered
-by calling the \fBTcl_StaticPackage\fR procedure.
-If \fIfileName\fR is an empty string, then \fIpackageName\fR must
-be specified.
-.PP
-If \fIpackageName\fR is omitted or specified as an empty string,
-Tcl tries to guess the name of the package.
-This may be done differently on different platforms.
-The default guess, which is used on most UNIX platforms, is to
-take the last element of \fIfileName\fR, strip off the first
-three characters if they are \fBlib\fR, and use any following
-.VS
-alphabetic and underline characters as the module name.
-.VE
-For example, the command \fBload libxyz4.2.so\fR uses the module
-name \fBxyz\fR and the command \fBload bin/last.so {}\fR uses the
-module name \fBlast\fR.
-.VS "" br
-.PP
-If \fIfileName\fR is an empty string, then \fIpackageName\fR must
-be specified.
-The \fBload\fR command first searches for a statically loaded package
-(one that has been registered by calling the \fBTcl_StaticPackage\fR
-procedure) by that name; if one is found, it is used.
-Otherwise, the \fBload\fR command searches for a dynamically loaded
-package by that name, and uses it if it is found. If several
-different files have been \fBload\fRed with different versions of
-the package, Tcl picks the file that was loaded first.
-.VE
-
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.TP
-\fBWindows\fR\0\0\0\0\0
-.
-When a load fails with "library not found" error, it is also possible
-that a dependent library was not found. To see the dependent libraries,
-type ``dumpbin -imports <dllname>'' in a DOS console to see what the
-library must import.
-When loading a DLL in the current directory, Windows will ignore ``./'' as
-a path specifier and use a search heuristic to find the DLL instead.
-To avoid this, load the DLL with
-.CS
- load [file join [pwd] mylib.DLL]
-.CE
-
-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-If the same file is \fBload\fRed by different \fIfileName\fRs, it will
-be loaded into the process's address space multiple times. The
-behavior of this varies from system to system (some systems may
-detect the redundant loads, others may not).
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-\fBinfo sharedlibextension\fR, Tcl_StaticPackage(3), safe(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-binary code, loading, safe interpreter, shared library
diff --git a/raw/mann/loadTk.n b/raw/mann/loadTk.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a3e38b..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/loadTk.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,311 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: loadTk.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: loadTk.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH "Safe Tk" n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-loadTk \- Load Tk into a safe interpreter.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fB::safe::loadTk \fIslave\fR ?\fB\-use\fR \fIwindowId\fR? ?\fB\-display\fR \fIdisplayName\fR?
-.BE
-
-Safe Tk is based on Safe Tcl, which provides a mechanism
-that allows restricted and mediated
-access to auto-loading and packages for safe interpreters.
-Safe Tk adds the ability to configure the interpreter
-for safe Tk operations and load Tk into safe
-interpreters.
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fB::safe::loadTk\fR command initializes the required data structures
-in the named safe interpreter and then loads Tk into it.
-The command returns the name of the safe interpreter.
-If \fB\-use\fR is specified, the window identified by the specified system
-dependent identifier \fIwindowId\fR is used to contain the ``.''
-window of the safe interpreter; it can be any valid id, eventually
-referencing a window belonging to another application. As a convenience,
-if the window you plan to use is a Tk Window of the application you
-can use the window name (eg: \fB.x.y\fR) instead of its window Id
-(\fB[winfo id .x.y]\fR).
-When \fB\-use\fR is not specified,
-a new toplevel window is created for the ``.'' window of
-the safe interpreter. On X11 if you want the embedded window
-to use another display than the default one, specify it with
-\fB\-display\fR.
-See the \fBSECURITY ISSUES\fR section below for implementation details.
-
-.SH "SECURITY ISSUES"
-.PP
-Please read the \fBsafe\fR manual page for Tcl to learn about the basic
-security considerations for Safe Tcl.
-.PP
-\fB::safe::loadTk\fR adds the value of \fBtk_library\fR taken from the master
-interpreter to the virtual access path of the safe interpreter so that
-auto-loading will work in the safe interpreter.
-.PP
-.PP
-Tk initialization is now safe with respect to not trusting
-the slave's state for startup. \fB::safe::loadTk\fR
-registers the slave's name so
-when the Tk initialization (\fBTk_SafeInit\fR) is called
-and in turn calls the master's \fB::safe::InitTk\fR it will
-return the desired \fBargv\fR equivalent (\fB\-use\fR
-\fIwindowId\fR, correct \fB\-display\fR, etc...).
-.PP
-When \fB\-use\fR is not used, the new toplevel created is specially
-decorated so the user is always aware that the user interface presented comes
-from a potentially unsafe code and can easily delete the corresponding
-interpreter.
-.PP
-On X11, conflicting \fB\-use\fR and \fB\-display\fR are likely
-to generate a fatal X error.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-safe(n), interp(n), library(n), load(n), package(n), source(n), unknown(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-alias, auto\-loading, auto_mkindex, load, master interpreter, safe
-interpreter, slave interpreter, source
diff --git a/raw/mann/lower.n b/raw/mann/lower.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 6daa0f7..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/lower.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,273 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lower.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lower.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH lower n 3.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lower \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlower \fIwindow \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-If the \fIbelowThis\fR argument is omitted then the command lowers
-\fIwindow\fR so that it is below all of its siblings in the stacking
-order (it will be obscured by any siblings that overlap it and
-will not obscure any siblings).
-If \fIbelowThis\fR is specified then it must be the path name of
-a window that is either a sibling of \fIwindow\fR or the descendant
-of a sibling of \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the \fBlower\fR command will insert
-\fIwindow\fR into the stacking order just below \fIbelowThis\fR
-(or the ancestor of \fIbelowThis\fR that is a sibling of \fIwindow\fR);
-this could end up either raising or lowering \fIwindow\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-raise
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-lower, obscure, stacking order
diff --git a/raw/mann/lrange.n b/raw/mann/lrange.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c9e23b5..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/lrange.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,277 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lrange.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lrange.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH lrange n 7.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lrange \- Return one or more adjacent elements from a list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlrange \fIlist first last\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fIList\fR must be a valid Tcl list. This command will
-return a new list consisting of elements
-\fIfirst\fR through \fIlast\fR, inclusive.
-\fIFirst\fR or \fIlast\fR
-may be \fBend\fR (or any abbreviation of it) to refer to the last
-element of the list.
-If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero, it is treated as if it were zero.
-If \fIlast\fR is greater than or equal to the number of elements
-in the list, then it is treated as if it were \fBend\fR.
-If \fIfirst\fR is greater than \fIlast\fR then an empty string
-is returned.
-Note: ``\fBlrange \fIlist first first\fR'' does not always produce the
-same result as ``\fBlindex \fIlist first\fR'' (although it often does
-for simple fields that aren't enclosed in braces); it does, however,
-produce exactly the same results as ``\fBlist [lindex \fIlist first\fB]\fR''
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), list(n), llength(n), lreplace(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, list, range, sublist
diff --git a/raw/mann/lreplace.n b/raw/mann/lreplace.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bf40fb2..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/lreplace.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lreplace.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lreplace.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH lreplace n 7.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lreplace \- Replace elements in a list with new elements
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlreplace \fIlist first last \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBlreplace\fR returns a new list formed by replacing one or more elements of
-\fIlist\fR with the \fIelement\fR arguments.
-\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR specify the first and last index of the
-range of elements to replace. 0 refers to the first element of the
-list, and \fBend\fR (or any abbreviation of it) may be used to refer
-to the last element of the list. If \fIlist\fR is empty, then
-\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are ignored.
-
-If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero, it is considered to refer to the
-first element of the list. For non-empty lists, the element indicated
-by \fIfirst\fR must exist.
-
-If \fIlast\fR is less than zero but greater than \fIfirst\fR, then any
-specified elements will be prepended to the list. If \fIlast\fR is
-less than \fIfirst\fR then no elements are deleted; the new elements
-are simply inserted before \fIfirst\fR.
-
-The \fIelement\fR arguments specify zero or more new arguments to
-be added to the list in place of those that were deleted.
-Each \fIelement\fR argument will become a separate element of
-the list. If no \fIelement\fR arguments are specified, then the elements
-between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are simply deleted. If \fIlist\fR
-is empty, any \fIelement\fR arguments are added to the end of the list.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), list(n), llength(n), lrange(n),
-lsearch(n), lsort(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, list, replace
diff --git a/raw/mann/lsearch.n b/raw/mann/lsearch.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3dd915d..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/lsearch.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,281 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lsearch.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lsearch.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH lsearch n 7.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lsearch \- See if a list contains a particular element
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlsearch \fR?\fImode\fR? \fIlist pattern\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command searches the elements of \fIlist\fR to see if one
-of them matches \fIpattern\fR.
-If so, the command returns the index of the first matching
-element.
-If not, the command returns \fB\-1\fR.
-The \fImode\fR argument indicates how the elements of the list are to
-be matched against \fIpattern\fR and it must have one of the following
-values:
-.TP
-\fB\-exact\fR
-The list element must contain exactly the same string as \fIpattern\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-glob\fR
-\fIPattern\fR is a glob-style pattern which is matched against each list
-element using the same rules as the \fBstring match\fR command.
-.TP
-\fB\-regexp\fR
-\fIPattern\fR is treated as a regular expression and matched against
-each list element using the rules described in the \fBre_syntax\fR
-reference page.
-.PP
-If \fImode\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fB\-glob\fR.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-list, match, pattern, regular expression, search, string
diff --git a/raw/mann/lsort.n b/raw/mann/lsort.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 548b88b..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/lsort.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,426 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lsort.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lsort.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH lsort n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-lsort \- Sort the elements of a list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBlsort \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fIlist\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command sorts the elements of \fIlist\fR, returning a new
-list in sorted order. The implementation of the \fBlsort\fR command
-uses the merge\-sort algorithm which is a stable sort that has O(n log
-n) performance characteristics.
-.PP
-By default ASCII sorting is used with the result returned in
-increasing order. However, any of the following options may be
-specified before \fIlist\fR to control the sorting process (unique
-abbreviations are accepted):
-.TP 20
-\fB\-ascii\fR
-Use string comparison with ASCII collation order. This is the default.
-.TP 20
-\fB\-dictionary\fR
-Use dictionary-style comparison. This is the same as \fB\-ascii\fR
-except (a) case is ignored except as a tie-breaker and (b) if two
-strings contain embedded numbers, the numbers compare as integers,
-not characters. For example, in \fB\-dictionary\fR mode, \fBbigBoy\fR
-sorts between \fBbigbang\fR and \fBbigboy\fR, and \fBx10y\fR
-sorts between \fBx9y\fR and \fBx11y\fR.
-.TP 20
-\fB\-integer\fR
-Convert list elements to integers and use integer comparison.
-.TP 20
-\fB\-real\fR
-Convert list elements to floating-point values and use floating comparison.
-.TP 20
-\fB\-command\0\fIcommand\fR
-Use \fIcommand\fR as a comparison command.
-To compare two elements, evaluate a Tcl script consisting of
-\fIcommand\fR with the two elements appended as additional
-arguments. The script should return an integer less than,
-equal to, or greater than zero if the first element is to
-be considered less than, equal to, or greater than the second,
-respectively.
-.TP 20
-\fB\-increasing\fR
-Sort the list in increasing order (``smallest'' items first).
-This is the default.
-.TP 20
-\fB\-decreasing\fR
-Sort the list in decreasing order (``largest'' items first).
-.TP 20
-\fB\-index\0\fIindex\fR
-If this option is specified, each of the elements of \fIlist\fR must
-itself be a proper Tcl sublist. Instead of sorting based on whole
-sublists, \fBlsort\fR will extract the \fIindex\fR'th element from
-each sublist and sort based on the given element. The keyword
-\fBend\fP is allowed for the \fIindex\fP to sort on the last sublist
-element,
-.VS 8.3.4
-and \fBend-\fIindex\fR sorts on a sublist element offset from
-the end.
-.VE
-For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-lsort -integer -index 1 {{First 24} {Second 18} {Third 30}}
-.CE
-returns \fB{Second 18} {First 24} {Third 30}\fR, and
-.VS 8.3.4
-'\"
-'\" This example is from the test suite!
-'\"
-.CS
-lsort -index end-1 {{a 1 e i} {b 2 3 f g} {c 4 5 6 d h}}
-.CE
-returns \fB{c 4 5 6 d h} {a 1 e i} {b 2 3 f g}\fR.
-.VE
-This option is much more efficient than using \fB\-command\fR
-to achieve the same effect.
-.RE
-.TP 20
-\fB\-unique\fR
-If this option is specified, then only the last set of duplicate
-elements found in the list will be retained. Note that duplicates are
-determined relative to the comparison used in the sort. Thus if
-\fI-index 0\fR is used, \fB{1 a}\fR and \fB{1 b}\fR would be
-considered duplicates and only the second element, \fB{1 b}\fR, would
-be retained.
-
-.SH "NOTES"
-.PP
-The options to \fBlsort\fR only control what sort of comparison is
-used, and do not necessarily constrain what the values themselves
-actually are. This distinction is only noticeable when the list to be
-sorted has fewer than two elements.
-.PP
-The \fBlsort\fR command is reentrant, meaning it is safe to use as
-part of the implementation of a command used in the \fB\-command\fR
-option.
-
-.SH "EXAMPLES"
-
-.PP
-Sorting a list using ASCII sorting:
-.CS
-% lsort {a10 B2 b1 a1 a2}
-B2 a1 a10 a2 b1
-.CE
-
-.PP
-Sorting a list using Dictionary sorting:
-.CS
-% lsort -dictionary {a10 B2 b1 a1 a2}
-a1 a2 a10 b1 B2
-.CE
-
-.PP
-Sorting lists of integers:
-.CS
-% lsort -integer {5 3 1 2 11 4}
-1 2 3 4 5 11
-% lsort -integer {1 2 0x5 7 0 4 -1}
--1 0 1 2 4 0x5 7
-.CE
-
-.PP
-Sorting lists of floating-point numbers:
-.CS
-% lsort -real {5 3 1 2 11 4}
-1 2 3 4 5 11
-% lsort -real {.5 0.07e1 0.4 6e-1}
-0.4 .5 6e-1 0.07e1
-.CE
-
-.PP
-Sorting using indices:
-.CS
-% # Note the space character before the c
-% lsort {{a 5} { c 3} {b 4} {e 1} {d 2}}
-{ c 3} {a 5} {b 4} {d 2} {e 1}
-% lsort -index 0 {{a 5} { c 3} {b 4} {e 1} {d 2}}
-{a 5} {b 4} { c 3} {d 2} {e 1}
-% lsort -index 1 {{a 5} { c 3} {b 4} {e 1} {d 2}}
-{e 1} {d 2} { c 3} {b 4} {a 5}
-.CE
-
-.PP
-Stripping duplicate values using sorting:
-.CS
-% lsort -unique {a b c a b c a b c}
-a b c
-.CE
-
-.PP
-More complex sorting using a comparison function:
-.CS
-% proc compare {a b} {
- set a0 [lindex $a 0]
- set b0 [lindex $b 0]
- if {$a0 < $b0} {
- return -1
- } elseif {$a0 > $b0} {
- return 1
- }
- return [string compare [lindex $a 1] [lindex $b 1]]
-}
-% lsort -command compare \\
- {{3 apple} {0x2 carrot} {1 dingo} {2 banana}}
-{1 dingo} {2 banana} {0x2 carrot} {3 apple}
-.CE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), list(n), llength(n), lrange(n),
-lreplace(n), lsearch(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-element, list, order, sort
diff --git a/raw/mann/memory.n b/raw/mann/memory.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e2d3e84..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/memory.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,281 +0,0 @@
-.\"
-.\" Memory.man
-.\"
-.\" Extended Tcl memory leak locator.
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" Copyright 1992-1999 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
-.\"
-.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
-.\" documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided
-.\" that the above copyright notice appear in all copies. Karl Lehenbauer and
-.\" Mark Diekhans make no representations about the suitability of this
-.\" software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or
-.\" implied warranty.
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\" $Id: memory.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-.\"----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-.\"
-.TH "Memory" TCL "" "Tcl"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-ckalloc, memory, ckfree, Tcl_DisplayMemory, Tcl_InitMemory, Tcl_ValidateAllMemory - Validated memory allocation interface.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.B memory \fBinfo\fR
-
-.B memory \fBtrace\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-
-.B memory \fBvalidate\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-
-.B memory \fBtrace_on_at_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-
-.B memory \fBbreak_on_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-
-.B memory \fBdisplay\fR \fIfile\fR
-
-.sp 2
-.ft CW
-#include <tcl.h>
-.sp
-char *
-ckalloc (unsigned size)
-.sp
-void
-ckfree (char *ptr)
-.sp
-int
-Tcl_DumpActiveMemory (char *fileName);
-.sp
-void
-Tcl_ValidateAllMemory (char *file,
- int line)
-
-void
-Tcl_InitMemory (interp)
-.ft R
-'
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *fileName
-.AP uint size in
-
-.AP char *ptr in
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-A pointer to the Tcl interpreter.
-.AP char *file in
-The filename of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory.
-.AP int line in
-The line number of the caller of Tcl_ValidateAllMemory.
-.AP char *fileName in
-File to display list of active memory.
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.SS ckalloc
-.PP
-Thi macro allocates memory, in the same manner as \fBmalloc\fR, with the
-following differences: One, \fBckalloc\fR checks the value returned from
-\fBmalloc\fR (it calls \fBmalloc\fR for you) and panics if the allocation
-request fails. Two, if enabled at compile time, a version of \fBckalloc\fR
-with special memory debugging capabilities replaces the normal version of
-\fBckalloc\fR, which aids in detecting memory overwrites and leaks (repeated
-allocations not matched by corresponding frees).
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIsize\fR - The size of the memory block to be allocated.
-.RE
-.PP
-Returns:
-.RS 2
-A pointer to the allocated memory block.
-.RE
-'
-.SS ckfree
-.PP
-This macro frees memory allocated by \fBckalloc\fR. Like \fBckalloc\fR,
-when memory debugging is enabled, \fBckfree\fR has enhanced capabilities
-for detecting memory overwrites and leaks.
-.PP
-It is very important that you use \fBckalloc\fR when you need to allocate
-memory, and that you use \fBckfree\fR to free it. Should you use \fBmalloc\fR
-to allocate and \fBckfree\fR to free, spurious memory validation errors will
-occur when memory debugging is enabled. Should you use \fBfree\fR to free
-memory allocated by \fBckalloc\fR, memory corruption will occur when memory
-debugging is enabled. Any memory that is to be become the property of the Tcl
-interpreter, such as result space, must be allocated with \fBckalloc\fR. If
-it is absolutely necessary for an application to pass back \fBmalloc\fRed
-memory to Tcl, it will work only if Tcl is complied with the
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR flag turned off. If you convert your application to use
-this facility, it will help you find memory over runs and lost memory. Note
-that memory allocated by a C library routine requiring freeing should still be
-freed with \fBfree\fR, since it calls \fBmalloc\fR rather than \fBckalloc\fR
-to do the allocation.
-.PP
-Parmeters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIptr\fR - The address of a block to free, as returned by ckalloc.
-.RE
-.sp
-'
-.SS Tcl_DumpActiveMemory
-.PP
-This function will output a list of all currently allocated memory to the
-specified file. The following information is outputted for each allocated
-block of memory: starting and ending addresses (excluding guard zone), size,
-source file where \fBckalloc\fR was called to allocate the block and line
-number in that file. It is especially useful to call
-\fBTcl_DumpActiveMemory\fR after the Tcl interpreter has been deleted.
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIfileName\fR - The name of the file to output the memory list to.
-.RE
-'
-.SS Tcl_ValidateAllMemory
-.PP
-Forces a validation of the guard zones of all currently allocated blocks
-of memory. Normally validation of a block occurs when its freed, unless
-full validation is enabled, in which case validation of all blocks
-occurs when \fBckalloc\fR and \fBckfree\fR are called. This function forces
-the validation to occur at any point.
-.PP
-Parameters:
-.RS 2
-\fBo \fIfile\fR - The file that this routine is being called from, normally
-\fB__FILE__\fR.
-.br
-\fBo \fIline\fR - The line that this routine is being called from, normally
-\fB__LINE__\fR.
-.RE
-'
-.SH ENABLING MEMORY DEBUGGING
-.PP
-To enable memory debugging, Tcl should be recompiled from scratch with
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR defined. This will also compile in
-a non-stub version of \fBTcl_InitMemory\fR
-to add the \fBmemory\fR command to Tcl.
-.PP
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR must be either left defined for all modules or undefined
-for all modules that are going to be linked together. If they are not, link
-errors will occur, with either \fBTclDbCkfree\fR and \fBTcl_DbCkalloc\fR or
-\fBTcl_Ckalloc\fR and \fBTcl_Ckfree\fR being undefined.
-'
-.SH GUARD ZONES
-.PP
-When memory debugging is enabled, whenever a call to \fBckalloc\fR is
-made, slightly more memory than requested is allocated so the memory debugging
-code can keep track
-of the allocated memory, and also
-eight-byte ``guard zones'' are placed in front of and behind the space that
-will be returned to the caller. (The size of the guard zone is defined
-by the C #define \fBGUARD_SIZE\fR in \fIbaseline/src/ckalloc.c\fR -- it
-can be extended if you suspect large overwrite problems, at some cost in
-performance.) A known pattern is written into the guard zones and,
-on a call to \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones of the space being freed
-are checked to see if either zone has been modified in any way.
-If one has been, the guard bytes and their new contents are identified,
-and a ``low guard failed'' or ``high guard failed'' message is issued.
-The ``guard failed'' message includes the address of the memory packet
-and the file name and line number of the code that called \fBckfree\fR.
-This allows you to detect the common sorts of one-off problems, where
-not enough space was allocated to contain the data written, for example.
-'
-.SH THE MEMORY COMMAND
-'@help: debug/memory
-'@brief: display and debug memory problems
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fIoptions\fR
-.br
-The Tcl \fBmemory\fR command gives the Tcl developer control of Tcl's memory
-debugging capabilities. The memory command has several suboptions, which are
-described below. It is only available when Tcl has been compiled with memory
-debugging enabled.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBinfo\fR
-.br
-Produces a report containing the total allocations and frees since
-Tcl began, the current packets allocated (the current
-number of calls to \fBckalloc\fR not met by a corresponding call
-to \fBckfree\fR), the current bytes allocated, and the maximum number
-of packets and bytes allocated.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBtrace\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-.br
-Turns memory tracing on or off.
-When memory tracing is on, every call to \fBckalloc\fR causes a line of
-trace information to be written to \fIstderr\fR, consisting of the
-word \fIckalloc\fR, followed by the address returned, the amount of
-memory allocated, and the C filename and line number of the code performing
-the allocation, for example...
-.sp
- \fBckalloc 40e478 98 tclProc.c 1406\fR
-.sp
-Calls to \fBckfree\fR are traced in the same manner, except that the
-word \fIckalloc\fR is replaced by the word \fIckfree\fR.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBvalidate\fR [\fBon|off\fR]
-.br
-Turns memory validation on or off.
-When memory validation is enabled, on every call to
-\fBckalloc\fR or \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones are checked for every
-piece of memory currently in existence that was allocated by \fBckalloc\fR.
-This has a large performance impact and should only be used when
-overwrite problems are strongly suspected. The advantage of enabling
-memory validation is that a guard zone overwrite can be detected on
-the first call to \fBckalloc\fR or \fBckfree\fR after the overwrite
-occurred, rather than when the specific memory with the overwritten
-guard zone(s) is freed, which may occur long after the overwrite occurred.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBtrace_on_at_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-.br
-Enable memory tracing after \fInnn\fR \fBckallocs\fR have been performed.
-For example, if you enter \fBmemory trace_on_at_malloc 100\fR,
-after the 100th call to \fBckalloc\fR, memory trace information will begin
-being displayed for all allocations and frees. Since there can be a lot
-of memory activity before a problem occurs, judicious use of this option
-can reduce the slowdown caused by tracing (and the amount of trace information
-produced), if you can identify a number of allocations that occur before
-the problem sets in. The current number of memory allocations that have
-occurred since Tcl started is printed on a guard zone failure.
-.TP
-.B memory \fBbreak_on_malloc\fR \fInnn\fR
-.br
-After the \fBnnn\fR allocations have been performed, \fBckallocs\fR
-output a message to this effect and that it is now attempting to enter
-the C debugger. Tcl will then issue a \fISIGINT\fR signal against itself.
-If you are running Tcl under a C debugger, it should then enter the debugger
-command mode.
-'
-.TP
-.B memory \fBdisplay\fR \fIfile\fR
-.br
-Write a list of all currently allocated memory to the specified file.
-'@endhelp
-'
-.SH DEBUGGING DIFFICULT MEMORY CORRUPTION PROBLEMS
-.PP
-Normally, Tcl compiled with memory debugging enabled will make it easy to isolate
-a corruption problem. Turning on memory validation with the memory command
-can help isolate difficult problems.
-If you suspect (or know) that corruption is
-occurring before the Tcl interpreter comes up far enough for you to
-issue commands, you can set \fBMEM_VALIDATE\fR define, recompile
-tclCkalloc.c and rebuild Tcl. This will enable memory validation
-from the first call to \fBckalloc\fR, again, at a large performance impact.
-.PP
-If you are desperate and validating memory on every call to \fBckalloc\fR
-and \fBckfree\fR isn't enough, you can explicitly call
-\fBTcl_ValidateAllMemory\fR directly at any point. It takes a \fIchar *\fR
-and an \fIint\fR which are normally the filename and line number of the
-caller, but they can actually be anything you want. Remember to remove
-the calls after you find the problem.
-'
-.SH KEYWORDS
-ckalloc, ckfree, free, memory, malloc
-
-
diff --git a/raw/mann/messageBox.n b/raw/mann/messageBox.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a8118d..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/messageBox.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,324 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: messageBox.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: messageBox.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_messageBox n 4.2 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_messageBox \- pops up a message window and waits for user response.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_messageBox \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure creates and displays a message window with an
-application-specified message, an icon and a set of buttons. Each of
-the buttons in the message window is identified by a unique symbolic
-name (see the \fB\-type\fR options). After the message window is
-popped up, \fBtk_messageBox\fR waits for the user to select one of the
-buttons. Then it returns the symbolic name of the selected button.
-
-The following option-value pairs are supported:
-.TP
-\fB\-default\fR \fIname\fR
-\fIName\fR gives the symbolic name of the default button for
-this message window ('ok', 'cancel', and so on). See \fB\-type\fR
-for a list of the symbolic names. If this option is not specified,
-the first button in the dialog will be made the default.
-.TP
-\fB\-icon\fR \fIiconImage\fR
-Specifies an icon to display. \fIIconImage\fR must be one of the
-following: \fBerror\fR, \fBinfo\fR, \fBquestion\fR or
-\fBwarning\fR. If this option is not specified, then the info icon will be
-displayed.
-.TP
-\fB\-message\fR \fIstring\fR
-Specifies the message to display in this message box.
-.TP
-\fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR
-Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the message box. The message
-box is displayed on top of its parent window.
-.TP
-\fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the message box. The
-default value is an empty string.
-.TP
-\fB\-type\fR \fIpredefinedType\fR
-Arranges for a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The
-following values are possible for \fIpredefinedType\fR:
-.RS
-.TP 18
-\fBabortretryignore\fR
-Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fBabort\fR,
-\fBretry\fR and \fBignore\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fBok\fR
-Displays one button whose symbolic name is \fBok\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fBokcancel\fR
-Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBok\fR and \fBcancel\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fBretrycancel\fR
-Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fBretry\fR and \fBcancel\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fByesno\fR
-Displays two buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR and \fBno\fR.
-.TP 18
-\fByesnocancel\fR
-Displays three buttons whose symbolic names are \fByes\fR, \fBno\fR
-and \fBcancel\fR.
-.RE
-.PP
-.SH EXAMPLE
-.CS
-set answer [tk_messageBox \-message "Really quit?" \-type yesno \-icon question]
-switch -- $answer {
- yes exit
- no {tk_messageBox \-message "I know you like this application!" \-type ok}
-}
-.CE
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-message box
diff --git a/raw/mann/msgcat.n b/raw/mann/msgcat.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 083aa4a..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/msgcat.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,483 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998 Mark Harrison.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" SCCS: @(#) msgcat.n
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: msgcat.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH "msgcat" n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-msgcat \- Tcl message catalog
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpackage require Tcl 8.2\fR
-.sp
-\fBpackage require msgcat 1.1\fR
-.sp
-\fB::msgcat::mc \fIsrc-string\fR
-.sp
-\fB::msgcat::mclocale \fR?\fInewLocale\fR?
-.sp
-\fB::msgcat::mcpreferences\fR
-.sp
-\fB::msgcat::mcload \fIdirname\fR
-.sp
-\fB::msgcat::mcset \fIlocale src-string \fR?\fItranslate-string\fR?
-.sp
-\fB::msgcat::mcunknown \fIlocale src-string\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBmsgcat\fR package provides a set of functions
-that can be used to manage multi-lingual user interfaces.
-Text strings are defined in a ``message catalog'' which
-is independent from the application, and
-which can be edited or localized without modifying
-the application source code. New languages
-or locales are provided by adding a new file to
-the message catalog.
-.PP
-Use of the message catalog is optional by any application
-or package, but is encouraged if the application or package
-wishes to be enabled for multi-lingual applications.
-
-.SH COMMANDS
-.TP
-\fB::msgcat::mc \fIsrc-string\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-Returns a translation of \fIsrc-string\fR according to the
-user's current locale. If additional arguments past \fIsrc-string\fR
-are given, the \fBformat\fR command is used to substitute the
-additional arguments in the translation of \fIsrc-string\fR.
-
-\fB::msgcat::mc\fR will search the messages defined
-in the current namespace for a translation of \fIsrc-string\fR; if
-none is found, it will search in the parent of the current namespace,
-and so on until it reaches the global namespace. If no translation
-string exists, \fB::msgcat::mcunknown\fR is called and the string
-returned from \fB::msgcat::mcunknown\fR is returned.
-.PP
-\fB::msgcat::mc\fR is the main function used to localize an
-application. Instead of using an English string directly, an
-applicaton can pass the English string through \fB::msgcat::mc\fR and
-use the result. If an application is written for a single language in
-this fashion, then it is easy to add support for additional languages
-later simply by defining new message catalog entries.
-.TP
-\fB::msgcat::mclocale \fR?\fInewLocale\fR?
-This function sets the locale to \fInewLocale\fR. If \fInewLocale\fR
-is omitted, the current locale is returned, otherwise the current locale
-is set to \fInewLocale\fR.
-The initial locale defaults to the locale specified in
-the user's environment. See \fBLOCALE AND SUBLOCALE SPECIFICATION\fR
-below for a description of the locale string format.
-.TP
-\fB::msgcat::mcpreferences\fR
-Returns an ordered list of the locales preferred by
-the user, based on the user's language specification.
-The list is ordered from most specific to least
-preference. If the user has specified LANG=en_US_funky,
-this procedure would return {en_US_funky en_US en}.
-.TP
-\fB::msgcat::mcload \fIdirname\fR
-Searches the specified directory for files that match
-the language specifications returned by \fB::msgcat::mcpreferences\fR.
-Each file located is sourced. The file extension is ``.msg''.
-The number of message files which matched the specification
-and were loaded is returned.
-.TP
-\fB::msgcat::mcset \fIlocale src-string \fR?\fItranslate-string\fR?
-Sets the translation for \fIsrc-string\fR to \fItranslate-string\fR
-in the specified \fIlocale\fR. If \fItranslate-string\fR is not
-specified, \fIsrc-string\fR is used for both. The function
-returns \fItranslate-string\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::msgcat::mcunknown \fIlocale src-string\fR
-This routine is called by \fB::msgcat::mc\fR in the case when
-a translation for \fIsrc-string\fR is not defined in the
-current locale. The default action is to return
-\fIsrc-string\fR. This procedure can be redefined by the
-application, for example to log error messages for each unknown
-string. The \fB::msgcat::mcunknown\fR procedure is invoked at the
-same stack context as the call to \fB::msgcat::mc\fR. The return vaue
-of \fB::msgcat::mcunknown\fR is used as the return vaue for the call
-to \fB::msgcat::mc\fR.
-
-.SH "LOCALE AND SUBLOCALE SPECIFICATION"
-.PP
-The locale is specified by a locale string.
-The locale string consists of
-a language code, an optional country code, and an optional
-system-specific code, each separated by ``_''. The country and language
-codes are specified in standards ISO-639 and ISO-3166.
-For example, the locale ``en'' specifies English and
- ``en_US'' specifes U.S. English.
-.PP
-The locale defaults to the value in \fBenv(LANG)\fR at the time the
-\fBmsgcat\fR package is loaded. If \fBenv(LANG)\fR is not defined, then the
-locale defaults to ``C''.
-.PP
-When a locale is specified by the user, a ``best match'' search is
-performed during string translation. For example, if a user specifies
-en_UK_Funky, the locales ``en_UK_Funky'', ``en_UK'', and ``en'' are
-searched in order until a matching translation string is found. If no
-translation string is available, then \fB::msgcat::unknown\fR is
-called.
-
-.SH "NAMESPACES AND MESSAGE CATALOGS"
-.PP
-Strings stored in the message catalog are stored relative
-to the namespace from which they were added. This allows
-multiple packages to use the same strings without fear
-of collisions with other packages. It also allows the
-source string to be shorter and less prone to typographical
-error.
-.PP
-For example, executing the code
-.CS
-mcset en hello "hello from ::"
-namespace eval foo {mcset en hello "hello from ::foo"}
-puts [mc hello]
-namespace eval foo {puts [mc hello]}
-.CE
-will print
-.CS
-hello from ::
-hello from ::foo
-.CE
-.PP
-When searching for a translation of a message, the
-message catalog will search first the current namespace,
-then the parent of the current namespace, and so on until
-the global namespace is reached. This allows child namespaces
-to "inherit" messages from their parent namespace.
-.PP
-For example, executing the code
-.CS
-mcset en m1 ":: message1"
-mcset en m2 ":: message2"
-mcset en m3 ":: message3"
-namespace eval ::foo {
- mcset en m2 "::foo message2"
- mcset en m3 "::foo message3"
-}
-namespace eval ::foo::bar {
- mcset en m3 "::foo::bar message3"
-}
-puts "[mc m1]; [mc m2]; [mc m3]"
-namespace eval ::foo {puts "[mc m1]; [mc m2]; [mc m3]"}
-namespace eval ::foo::bar {puts "[mc m1]; [mc m2]; [mc m3]"}
-.CE
-will print
-.CS
-:: message1; :: message2; :: message3
-:: message1; ::foo message2; ::foo message3
-:: message1; ::foo message2; ::foo::bar message3
-.CE
-
-.SH "LOCATION AND FORMAT OF MESSAGE FILES"
-.PP
-Message files can be located in any directory, subject
-to the following conditions:
-.IP [1]
-All message files for a package are in the same directory.
-.IP [2]
-The message file name is a locale specifier followed
-by ``.msg''. For example:
-.CS
-es.msg -- spanish
-en_UK.msg -- UK English
-.CE
-.IP [3]
-The file contains a series of calls to mcset, setting the
-necessary translation strings for the language. For example:
-.CS
-::msgcat::mcset es "Free Beer!" "Cerveza Gracias!"
-.CE
-
-.SH "RECOMMENDED MESSAGE SETUP FOR PACKAGES"
-.PP
-If a package is installed into a subdirectory of the
-\fBtcl_pkgPath\fR and loaded via \fBpackage require\fR, the
-following procedure is recommended.
-.IP [1]
-During package installation, create a subdirectory
-\fBmsgs\fR under your package directory.
-.IP [2]
-Copy your *.msg files into that directory.
-.IP [3]
- Add the following command to your package
-initialization script:
-.CS
-# load language files, stored in msgs subdirectory
-::msgcat::mcload [file join [file dirname [info script]] msgs]
-.CE
-
-.SH "POSTITIONAL CODES FOR FORMAT AND SCAN COMMANDS"
-.PP
-It is possible that a message string used as an argument
-to \fBformat\fR might have positionally dependent parameters that
-might need to be repositioned. For example, it might be
-syntactically desirable to rearrange the sentence structure
-while translating.
-.CS
-format "We produced %d units in location %s" $num $city
-format "In location %s we produced %d units" $city $num
-.CE
-.PP
-This can be handled by using the positional
-parameters:
-.CS
-format "We produced %1\\$d units in location %2\\$s" $num $city
-format "In location %2\\$s we produced %1\\$d units" $num $city
-.CE
-.PP
-Similarly, positional parameters can be used with \fBscan\fR to
-extract values from internationalized strings.
-
-.SH CREDITS
-.PP
-The message catalog code was developed by Mark Harrison.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-format(n), scan(n), namespace(n), package(n)
-.SH KEYWORDS
-internationalization, i18n, localization, l10n, message, text, translation
diff --git a/raw/mann/namespace.n b/raw/mann/namespace.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f33946..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/namespace.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,801 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1997 Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: namespace.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: namespace.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH namespace n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-namespace \- create and manipulate contexts for commands and variables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBnamespace \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBnamespace\fR command lets you create, access, and destroy
-separate contexts for commands and variables.
-See the section \fBWHAT IS A NAMESPACE?\fR below
-for a brief overview of namespaces.
-The legal \fIoption\fR's are listed below.
-Note that you can abbreviate the \fIoption\fR's.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace children \fR?\fInamespace\fR? ?\fIpattern\fR?
-Returns a list of all child namespaces that belong to the
-namespace \fInamespace\fR.
-If \fInamespace\fR is not specified,
-then the children are returned for the current namespace.
-This command returns fully-qualified names,
-which start with \fB::\fR.
-If the optional \fIpattern\fR is given,
-then this command returns only the names that match the glob-style pattern.
-The actual pattern used is determined as follows:
-a pattern that starts with \fB::\fR is used directly,
-otherwise the namespace \fInamespace\fR
-(or the fully-qualified name of the current namespace)
-is prepended onto the the pattern.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace code \fIscript\fR
-Captures the current namespace context for later execution
-of the script \fIscript\fR.
-It returns a new script in which \fIscript\fR has been wrapped
-in a \fBnamespace code\fR command.
-The new script has two important properties.
-First, it can be evaluated in any namespace and will cause
-\fIscript\fR to be evaluated in the current namespace
-(the one where the \fBnamespace code\fR command was invoked).
-Second, additional arguments can be appended to the resulting script
-and they will be passed to \fIscript\fR as additional arguments.
-For example, suppose the command
-\fBset script [namespace code {foo bar}]\fR
-is invoked in namespace \fB::a::b\fR.
-Then \fBeval "$script x y"\fR
-can be executed in any namespace (assuming the value of
-\fBscript\fR has been passed in properly)
-and will have the same effect as the command
-\fBnamespace eval ::a::b {foo bar x y}\fR.
-This command is needed because
-extensions like Tk normally execute callback scripts
-in the global namespace.
-A scoped command captures a command together with its namespace context
-in a way that allows it to be executed properly later.
-See the section \fBSCOPED VALUES\fR for some examples
-of how this is used to create callback scripts.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace current\fR
-Returns the fully-qualified name for the current namespace.
-The actual name of the global namespace is ``''
-(i.e., an empty string),
-but this command returns \fB::\fR for the global namespace
-as a convenience to programmers.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace delete \fR?\fInamespace namespace ...\fR?
-Each namespace \fInamespace\fR is deleted
-and all variables, procedures, and child namespaces
-contained in the namespace are deleted.
-If a procedure is currently executing inside the namespace,
-the namespace will be kept alive until the procedure returns;
-however, the namespace is marked to prevent other code from
-looking it up by name.
-If a namespace doesn't exist, this command returns an error.
-If no namespace names are given, this command does nothing.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace eval\fR \fInamespace arg\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
-Activates a namespace called \fInamespace\fR and evaluates some code
-in that context.
-If the namespace does not already exist, it is created.
-If more than one \fIarg\fR argument is specified,
-the arguments are concatenated together with a space between each one
-in the same fashion as the \fBeval\fR command,
-and the result is evaluated.
-.br
-.sp
-If \fInamespace\fR has leading namespace qualifiers
-and any leading namespaces do not exist,
-they are automatically created.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace export \fR?\-\fBclear\fR? ?\fIpattern pattern ...\fR?
-Specifies which commands are exported from a namespace.
-The exported commands are those that can be later imported
-into another namespace using a \fBnamespace import\fR command.
-Both commands defined in a namespace and
-commands the namespace has previously imported
-can be exported by a namespace.
-The commands do not have to be defined
-at the time the \fBnamespace export\fR command is executed.
-Each \fIpattern\fR may contain glob-style special characters,
-but it may not include any namespace qualifiers.
-That is, the pattern can only specify commands
-in the current (exporting) namespace.
-Each \fIpattern\fR is appended onto the namespace's list of export patterns.
-If the \-\fBclear\fR flag is given,
-the namespace's export pattern list is reset to empty before any
-\fIpattern\fR arguments are appended.
-If no \fIpattern\fRs are given and the \-\fBclear\fR flag isn't given,
-this command returns the namespace's current export list.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace forget \fR?\fIpattern pattern ...\fR?
-Removes previously imported commands from a namespace.
-Each \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name such as
-\fBfoo::x\fR or \fBa::b::p*\fR.
-Qualified names contain \fB::\fRs and qualify a name
-with the name of one or more namespaces.
-Each \fIpattern\fR is qualified with the name of an exporting namespace
-and may have glob-style special characters in the command name
-at the end of the qualified name.
-Glob characters may not appear in a namespace name.
-This command first finds the matching exported commands.
-It then checks whether any of those those commands
-were previously imported by the current namespace.
-If so, this command deletes the corresponding imported commands.
-In effect, this un-does the action of a \fBnamespace import\fR command.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace import \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fIpattern\fR \fIpattern ...\fR?
-Imports commands into a namespace.
-Each \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name like
-\fBfoo::x\fR or \fBa::p*\fR.
-That is, it includes the name of an exporting namespace
-and may have glob-style special characters in the command name
-at the end of the qualified name.
-Glob characters may not appear in a namespace name.
-All the commands that match a \fIpattern\fR string
-and which are currently exported from their namespace
-are added to the current namespace.
-This is done by creating a new command in the current namespace
-that points to the exported command in its original namespace;
-when the new imported command is called, it invokes the exported command.
-This command normally returns an error
-if an imported command conflicts with an existing command.
-However, if the \-\fBforce\fR option is given,
-imported commands will silently replace existing commands.
-The \fBnamespace import\fR command has snapshot semantics:
-that is, only requested commands that are currently defined
-in the exporting namespace are imported.
-In other words, you can import only the commands that are in a namespace
-at the time when the \fBnamespace import\fR command is executed.
-If another command is defined and exported in this namespace later on,
-it will not be imported.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace inscope\fR \fInamespace arg\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
-Executes a script in the context of a particular namespace.
-This command is not expected to be used directly by programmers;
-calls to it are generated implicitly when applications
-use \fBnamespace code\fR commands to create callback scripts
-that the applications then register with, e.g., Tk widgets.
-The \fBnamespace inscope\fR command is much like the \fBnamespace eval\fR
-command except that it has \fBlappend\fR semantics
-and the namespace must already exist.
-It treats the first argument as a list,
-and appends any arguments after the first
-onto the end as proper list elements.
-\fBnamespace inscope ::foo a x y z\fR
-is equivalent to
-\fBnamespace eval ::foo [concat a [list x y z]]\fR
-This \fBlappend\fR semantics is important because many callback scripts
-are actually prefixes.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace origin \fIcommand\fR
-Returns the fully-qualified name of the original command
-to which the imported command \fIcommand\fR refers.
-When a command is imported into a namespace,
-a new command is created in that namespace
-that points to the actual command in the exporting namespace.
-If a command is imported into a sequence of namespaces
-\fIa, b,...,n\fR where each successive namespace
-just imports the command from the previous namespace,
-this command returns the fully-qualified name of the original command
-in the first namespace, \fIa\fR.
-If \fIcommand\fR does not refer to an imported command,
-the command's own fully-qualified name is returned.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace parent\fR ?\fInamespace\fR?
-Returns the fully-qualified name of the parent namespace
-for namespace \fInamespace\fR.
-If \fInamespace\fR is not specified,
-the fully-qualified name of the current namespace's parent is returned.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace qualifiers\fR \fIstring\fR
-Returns any leading namespace qualifiers for \fIstring\fR.
-Qualifiers are namespace names separated by \fB::\fRs.
-For the \fIstring\fR \fB::foo::bar::x\fR,
-this command returns \fB::foo::bar\fR,
-and for \fB::\fR it returns an empty string.
-This command is the complement of the \fBnamespace tail\fR command.
-Note that it does not check whether the
-namespace names are, in fact,
-the names of currently defined namespaces.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace tail\fR \fIstring\fR
-Returns the simple name at the end of a qualified string.
-Qualifiers are namespace names separated by \fB::\fRs.
-For the \fIstring\fR \fB::foo::bar::x\fR,
-this command returns \fBx\fR,
-and for \fB::\fR it returns an empty string.
-This command is the complement of the \fBnamespace qualifiers\fR command.
-It does not check whether the namespace names are, in fact,
-the names of currently defined namespaces.
-.TP
-\fBnamespace which\fR ?\-\fBcommand\fR? ?\-\fBvariable\fR? \fIname\fR
-Looks up \fIname\fR as either a command or variable
-and returns its fully-qualified name.
-For example, if \fIname\fR does not exist in the current namespace
-but does exist in the global namespace,
-this command returns a fully-qualified name in the global namespace.
-If the command or variable does not exist,
-this command returns an empty string. If the variable has been
-created but not defined, such as with the \fBvariable\fR command
-or through a \fBtrace\fR on the variable, this command will return the
-fully-qualified name of the variable.
-If no flag is given, \fIname\fR is treated as a command name.
-See the section \fBNAME RESOLUTION\fR below for an explanation of
-the rules regarding name resolution.
-
-.SH "WHAT IS A NAMESPACE?"
-.PP
-A namespace is a collection of commands and variables.
-It encapsulates the commands and variables to ensure that they
-won't interfere with the commands and variables of other namespaces.
-Tcl has always had one such collection,
-which we refer to as the \fIglobal namespace\fR.
-The global namespace holds all global variables and commands.
-The \fBnamespace eval\fR command lets you create new namespaces.
-For example,
-.CS
-\fBnamespace eval Counter {
- namespace export bump
- variable num 0
-
- proc bump {} {
- variable num
- incr num
- }
-}\fR
-.CE
-creates a new namespace containing the variable \fBnum\fR and
-the procedure \fBbump\fR.
-The commands and variables in this namespace are separate from
-other commands and variables in the same program.
-If there is a command named \fBbump\fR in the global namespace,
-for example, it will be different from the command \fBbump\fR
-in the \fBCounter\fR namespace.
-.PP
-Namespace variables resemble global variables in Tcl.
-They exist outside of the procedures in a namespace
-but can be accessed in a procedure via the \fBvariable\fR command,
-as shown in the example above.
-.PP
-Namespaces are dynamic.
-You can add and delete commands and variables at any time,
-so you can build up the contents of a
-namespace over time using a series of \fBnamespace eval\fR commands.
-For example, the following series of commands has the same effect
-as the namespace definition shown above:
-.CS
-\fBnamespace eval Counter {
- variable num 0
- proc bump {} {
- variable num
- return [incr num]
- }
-}
-namespace eval Counter {
- proc test {args} {
- return $args
- }
-}
-namespace eval Counter {
- rename test ""
-}\fR
-.CE
-Note that the \fBtest\fR procedure is added to the \fBCounter\fR namespace,
-and later removed via the \fBrename\fR command.
-.PP
-Namespaces can have other namespaces within them,
-so they nest hierarchically.
-A nested namespace is encapsulated inside its parent namespace
-and can not interfere with other namespaces.
-
-.SH "QUALIFIED NAMES"
-.PP
-Each namespace has a textual name such as
-\fBhistory\fR or \fB::safe::interp\fR.
-Since namespaces may nest,
-qualified names are used to refer to
-commands, variables, and child namespaces contained inside namespaces.
-Qualified names are similar to the hierarchical path names for
-Unix files or Tk widgets,
-except that \fB::\fR is used as the separator
-instead of \fB/\fR or \fB.\fR.
-The topmost or global namespace has the name ``'' (i.e., an empty string),
-although \fB::\fR is a synonym.
-As an example, the name \fB::safe::interp::create\fR
-refers to the command \fBcreate\fR in the namespace \fBinterp\fR
-that is a child of of namespace \fB::safe\fR,
-which in turn is a child of the global namespace \fB::\fR.
-.PP
-If you want to access commands and variables from another namespace,
-you must use some extra syntax.
-Names must be qualified by the namespace that contains them.
-From the global namespace,
-we might access the \fBCounter\fR procedures like this:
-.CS
-\fBCounter::bump 5
-Counter::Reset\fR
-.CE
-We could access the current count like this:
-.CS
-\fBputs "count = $Counter::num"\fR
-.CE
-When one namespace contains another, you may need more than one
-qualifier to reach its elements.
-If we had a namespace \fBFoo\fR that contained the namespace \fBCounter\fR,
-you could invoke its \fBbump\fR procedure
-from the global namespace like this:
-.CS
-\fBFoo::Counter::bump 3\fR
-.CE
-.PP
-You can also use qualified names when you create and rename commands.
-For example, you could add a procedure to the \fBFoo\fR
-namespace like this:
-.CS
-\fBproc Foo::Test {args} {return $args}\fR
-.CE
-And you could move the same procedure to another namespace like this:
-.CS
-\fBrename Foo::Test Bar::Test\fR
-.CE
-.PP
-There are a few remaining points about qualified names
-that we should cover.
-Namespaces have nonempty names except for the global namespace.
-\fB::\fR is disallowed in simple command, variable, and namespace names
-except as a namespace separator.
-Extra \fB:\fRs in a qualified name are ignored;
-that is, two or more \fB:\fRs are treated as a namespace separator.
-A trailing \fB::\fR in a qualified variable or command name
-refers to the variable or command named {}.
-However, a trailing \fB::\fR in a qualified namespace name is ignored.
-
-.SH "NAME RESOLUTION"
-.PP
-In general, all Tcl commands that take variable and command names
-support qualified names.
-This means you can give qualified names to such commands as
-\fBset\fR, \fBproc\fR, \fBrename\fR, and \fBinterp alias\fR.
-If you provide a fully-qualified name that starts with a \fB::\fR,
-there is no question about what command, variable, or namespace
-you mean.
-However, if the name does not start with a \fB::\fR
-(i.e., is \fIrelative\fR),
-Tcl follows a fixed rule for looking it up:
-Command and variable names are always resolved
-by looking first in the current namespace,
-and then in the global namespace.
-Namespace names, on the other hand, are always resolved
-by looking in only the current namespace.
-.PP
-In the following example,
-.CS
-\fBset traceLevel 0
-namespace eval Debug {
- printTrace $traceLevel
-}\fR
-.CE
-Tcl looks for \fBtraceLevel\fR in the namespace \fBDebug\fR
-and then in the global namespace.
-It looks up the command \fBprintTrace\fR in the same way.
-If a variable or command name is not found in either context,
-the name is undefined.
-To make this point absolutely clear, consider the following example:
-.CS
-\fBset traceLevel 0
-namespace eval Foo {
- variable traceLevel 3
-
- namespace eval Debug {
- printTrace $traceLevel
- }
-}\fR
-.CE
-Here Tcl looks for \fBtraceLevel\fR first in the namespace \fBFoo::Debug\fR.
-Since it is not found there, Tcl then looks for it
-in the global namespace.
-The variable \fBFoo::traceLevel\fR is completely ignored
-during the name resolution process.
-.PP
-You can use the \fBnamespace which\fR command to clear up any question
-about name resolution.
-For example, the command:
-.CS
-\fBnamespace eval Foo::Debug {namespace which \-variable traceLevel}\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB::traceLevel\fR.
-On the other hand, the command,
-.CS
-\fBnamespace eval Foo {namespace which \-variable traceLevel}\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB::Foo::traceLevel\fR.
-.PP
-As mentioned above,
-namespace names are looked up differently
-than the names of variables and commands.
-Namespace names are always resolved in the current namespace.
-This means, for example,
-that a \fBnamespace eval\fR command that creates a new namespace
-always creates a child of the current namespace
-unless the new namespace name begins with a \fB::\fR.
-.PP
-Tcl has no access control to limit what variables, commands,
-or namespaces you can reference.
-If you provide a qualified name that resolves to an element
-by the name resolution rule above,
-you can access the element.
-.PP
-You can access a namespace variable
-from a procedure in the same namespace
-by using the \fBvariable\fR command.
-Much like the \fBglobal\fR command,
-this creates a local link to the namespace variable.
-If necessary, it also creates the variable in the current namespace
-and initializes it.
-Note that the \fBglobal\fR command only creates links
-to variables in the global namespace.
-It is not necessary to use a \fBvariable\fR command
-if you always refer to the namespace variable using an
-appropriate qualified name.
-
-.SH "IMPORTING COMMANDS"
-.PP
-Namespaces are often used to represent libraries.
-Some library commands are used so frequently
-that it is a nuisance to type their qualified names.
-For example, suppose that all of the commands in a package
-like BLT are contained in a namespace called \fBBlt\fR.
-Then you might access these commands like this:
-.CS
-\fBBlt::graph .g \-background red
-Blt::table . .g 0,0\fR
-.CE
-If you use the \fBgraph\fR and \fBtable\fR commands frequently,
-you may want to access them without the \fBBlt::\fR prefix.
-You can do this by importing the commands into the current namespace,
-like this:
-.CS
-\fBnamespace import Blt::*\fR
-.CE
-This adds all exported commands from the \fBBlt\fR namespace
-into the current namespace context, so you can write code like this:
-.CS
-\fBgraph .g \-background red
-table . .g 0,0\fR
-.CE
-The \fBnamespace import\fR command only imports commands
-from a namespace that that namespace exported
-with a \fBnamespace export\fR command.
-.PP
-Importing \fIevery\fR command from a namespace is generally
-a bad idea since you don't know what you will get.
-It is better to import just the specific commands you need.
-For example, the command
-.CS
-\fBnamespace import Blt::graph Blt::table\fR
-.CE
-imports only the \fBgraph\fR and \fBtable\fR commands into the
-current context.
-.PP
-If you try to import a command that already exists, you will get an
-error. This prevents you from importing the same command from two
-different packages. But from time to time (perhaps when debugging),
-you may want to get around this restriction. You may want to
-reissue the \fBnamespace import\fR command to pick up new commands
-that have appeared in a namespace. In that case, you can use the
-\fB\-force\fR option, and existing commands will be silently overwritten:
-.CS
-\fBnamespace import \-force Blt::graph Blt::table\fR
-.CE
-If for some reason, you want to stop using the imported commands,
-you can remove them with an \fBnamespace forget\fR command, like this:
-.CS
-\fBnamespace forget Blt::*\fR
-.CE
-This searches the current namespace for any commands imported from \fBBlt\fR.
-If it finds any, it removes them. Otherwise, it does nothing.
-After this, the \fBBlt\fR commands must be accessed with the \fBBlt::\fR
-prefix.
-.PP
-When you delete a command from the exporting namespace like this:
-.CS
-\fBrename Blt::graph ""\fR
-.CE
-the command is automatically removed from all namespaces that import it.
-
-.SH "EXPORTING COMMANDS"
-You can export commands from a namespace like this:
-.CS
-\fBnamespace eval Counter {
- namespace export bump reset
- variable Num 0
- variable Max 100
-
- proc bump {{by 1}} {
- variable Num
- incr Num $by
- Check
- return $Num
- }
- proc reset {} {
- variable Num
- set Num 0
- }
- proc Check {} {
- variable Num
- variable Max
- if {$Num > $Max} {
- error "too high!"
- }
- }
-}\fR
-.CE
-The procedures \fBbump\fR and \fBreset\fR are exported,
-so they are included when you import from the \fBCounter\fR namespace,
-like this:
-.CS
-\fBnamespace import Counter::*\fR
-.CE
-However, the \fBCheck\fR procedure is not exported,
-so it is ignored by the import operation.
-.PP
-The \fBnamespace import\fR command only imports commands
-that were declared as exported by their namespace.
-The \fBnamespace export\fR command specifies what commands
-may be imported by other namespaces.
-If a \fBnamespace import\fR command specifies a command
-that is not exported, the command is not imported.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-variable(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-exported, internal, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/open.n b/raw/mann/open.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 193d3d7..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/open.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,508 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: open.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: open.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH open n 7.6 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-open \- Open a file-based or command pipeline channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBopen \fIfileName\fR
-.br
-\fBopen \fIfileName access\fR
-.br
-\fBopen \fIfileName access permissions\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-.VS
-This command opens a file, serial port, or command pipeline and returns a
-.VE
-channel identifier that may be used in future invocations of commands like
-\fBread\fR, \fBputs\fR, and \fBclose\fR.
-If the first character of \fIfileName\fR is not \fB|\fR then
-the command opens a file:
-\fIfileName\fR gives the name of the file to open, and it must conform to the
-conventions described in the \fBfilename\fR manual entry.
-.PP
-The \fIaccess\fR argument, if present, indicates the way in which the file
-(or command pipeline) is to be accessed.
-In the first form \fIaccess\fR may have any of the following values:
-.TP 15
-\fBr\fR
-Open the file for reading only; the file must already exist. This is the
-default value if \fIaccess\fR is not specified.
-.TP 15
-\fBr+\fR
-Open the file for both reading and writing; the file must
-already exist.
-.TP 15
-\fBw\fR
-Open the file for writing only. Truncate it if it exists. If it doesn't
-exist, create a new file.
-.TP 15
-\fBw+\fR
-Open the file for reading and writing. Truncate it if it exists.
-If it doesn't exist, create a new file.
-.TP 15
-\fBa\fR
-Open the file for writing only. If the file doesn't exist,
-create a new empty file.
-Set the initial access position to the end of the file.
-.TP 15
-\fBa+\fR
-Open the file for reading and writing. If the file doesn't exist,
-create a new empty file.
-Set the initial access position to the end of the file.
-.PP
-In the second form, \fIaccess\fR consists of a list of any of the
-following flags, all of which have the standard POSIX meanings.
-One of the flags must be either \fBRDONLY\fR, \fBWRONLY\fR or \fBRDWR\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fBRDONLY\fR
-Open the file for reading only.
-.TP 15
-\fBWRONLY\fR
-Open the file for writing only.
-.TP 15
-\fBRDWR\fR
-Open the file for both reading and writing.
-.TP 15
-\fBAPPEND\fR
-Set the file pointer to the end of the file prior to each write.
-.TP 15
-\fBCREAT\fR
-Create the file if it doesn't already exist (without this flag it
-is an error for the file not to exist).
-.TP 15
-\fBEXCL\fR
-If \fBCREAT\fR is also specified, an error is returned if the
-file already exists.
-.TP 15
-\fBNOCTTY\fR
-If the file is a terminal device, this flag prevents the file from
-becoming the controlling terminal of the process.
-.TP 15
-\fBNONBLOCK\fR
-Prevents the process from blocking while opening the file, and
-possibly in subsequent I/O operations. The exact behavior of
-this flag is system- and device-dependent; its use is discouraged
-(it is better to use the \fBfconfigure\fR command to put a file
-in nonblocking mode).
-For details refer to your system documentation on the \fBopen\fR system
-call's \fBO_NONBLOCK\fR flag.
-.TP 15
-\fBTRUNC\fR
-If the file exists it is truncated to zero length.
-.PP
-If a new file is created as part of opening it, \fIpermissions\fR
-(an integer) is used to set the permissions for the new file in
-conjunction with the process's file mode creation mask.
-\fIPermissions\fR defaults to 0666.
-.PP
-'\" Not versioned as advice applies to all recent versions of Tcl.
-'\" Prior to that, Tcl didn't really support binary files anyway...
-.VS
-Note that if you are going to be reading or writing binary data from
-the channel created by this command, you should use the
-\fBfconfigure\fR command to change the \fB-translation\fR option of
-the channel to \fBbinary\fR before transferring any binary data. This
-is in contrast to the ``b'' character passed as part of the equivalent
-of the \fIaccess\fR parameter to some versions of the C library
-\fIfopen()\fR function.
-.VE
-.SH "COMMAND PIPELINES"
-.PP
-If the first character of \fIfileName\fR is ``|'' then the
-remaining characters of \fIfileName\fR are treated as a list of arguments
-that describe a command pipeline to invoke, in the same style as the
-arguments for \fBexec\fR.
-In this case, the channel identifier returned by \fBopen\fR may be used
-to write to the command's input pipe or read from its output pipe,
-depending on the value of \fIaccess\fR.
-If write-only access is used (e.g. \fIaccess\fR is \fBw\fR), then
-standard output for the pipeline is directed to the current standard
-output unless overridden by the command.
-If read-only access is used (e.g. \fIaccess\fR is \fBr\fR),
-standard input for the pipeline is taken from the current standard
-input unless overridden by the command.
-.SH "SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS"
-.VS
-.PP
-If \fIfileName\fR refers to a serial port, then the specified serial port
-is opened and initialized in a platform-dependent manner. Acceptable
-values for the \fIfileName\fR to use to open a serial port are described in
-the PORTABILITY ISSUES section.
-
-.SH "CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"
-The \fBfconfigure\fR command can be used to query and set the following
-configuration option for open serial ports:
-.TP
-\fB\-mode \fIbaud\fB,\fIparity\fB,\fIdata\fB,\fIstop\fR
-.
-This option is a set of 4 comma-separated values: the baud rate, parity,
-number of data bits, and number of stop bits for this serial port. The
-\fIbaud\fR rate is a simple integer that specifies the connection speed.
-\fIParity\fR is one of the following letters: \fBn\fR, \fBo\fR, \fBe\fR,
-\fBm\fR, \fBs\fR; respectively signifying the parity options of ``none'',
-``odd'', ``even'', ``mark'', or ``space''. \fIData\fR is the number of
-data bits and should be an integer from 5 to 8, while \fIstop\fR is the
-number of stop bits and should be the integer 1 or 2.
-.TP
-\fB\-pollinterval \fImsec\fR
-.
-This option, available only on Windows for serial ports, is used to
-set the maximum time between polling for fileevents. This affects the
-time interval between checking for events throughout the Tcl
-interpreter (the smallest value always wins). Use this option only if
-you want to poll the serial port more often than 10 msec (the default).
-.TP
-\fB\-lasterror\fR
-.
-This option is available only on Windows for serial ports, and is
-query only (will only be reported when directly requested).
-In case of a serial communication error, \fBread\fR or \fBputs\fR
-returns a general Tcl file I/O error.
-\fBfconfigure -lasterror\fR can be called to get a list
-of error details (e.g. FRAME RXOVER).
-.VE
-
-.VS
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-.sp
-.TP
-\fBWindows \fR(all versions)
-.
-Valid values for \fIfileName\fR to open a serial port are of the form
-\fBcom\fIX\fB:\fR, where \fIX\fR is a number, generally from 1 to 4.
-This notation only works for serial ports from 1 to 9, if the system
-happens to have more than four. An attempt to open a serial port that
-does not exist or has a number greater than 9 will fail. An alternate
-form of opening serial ports is to use the filename \fB\e\e.\ecomX\fR,
-where X is any number that corresponds to a serial port; please note
-that this method is considerably slower on Windows 95 and Windows 98.
-.TP
-\fBWindows NT\fR
-.
-When running Tcl interactively, there may be some strange interactions
-between the real console, if one is present, and a command pipeline that uses
-standard input or output. If a command pipeline is opened for reading, some
-of the lines entered at the console will be sent to the command pipeline and
-some will be sent to the Tcl evaluator. If a command pipeline is opened for
-writing, keystrokes entered into the console are not visible until the the
-pipe is closed. This behavior occurs whether the command pipeline is
-executing 16-bit or 32-bit applications. These problems only occur because
-both Tcl and the child application are competing for the console at
-the same time. If the command pipeline is started from a script, so that Tcl
-is not accessing the console, or if the command pipeline does not use
-standard input or output, but is redirected from or to a file, then the
-above problems do not occur.
-.TP
-\fBWindows 95\fR
-.
-A command pipeline that executes a 16-bit DOS application cannot be opened
-for both reading and writing, since 16-bit DOS applications that receive
-standard input from a pipe and send standard output to a pipe run
-synchronously. Command pipelines that do not execute 16-bit DOS
-applications run asynchronously and can be opened for both reading and
-writing.
-.sp
-When running Tcl interactively, there may be some strange interactions
-between the real console, if one is present, and a command pipeline that uses
-standard input or output. If a command pipeline is opened for reading from
-a 32-bit application, some of the keystrokes entered at the console will be
-sent to the command pipeline and some will be sent to the Tcl evaluator. If
-a command pipeline is opened for writing to a 32-bit application, no output
-is visible on the console until the the pipe is closed. These problems only
-occur because both Tcl and the child application are competing for the
-console at the same time. If the command pipeline is started from a script,
-so that Tcl is not accessing the console, or if the command pipeline does
-not use standard input or output, but is redirected from or to a file, then
-the above problems do not occur.
-.sp
-Whether or not Tcl is running interactively, if a command pipeline is opened
-for reading from a 16-bit DOS application, the call to \fBopen\fR will not
-return until end-of-file has been received from the command pipeline's
-standard output. If a command pipeline is opened for writing to a 16-bit DOS
-application, no data will be sent to the command pipeline's standard output
-until the pipe is actually closed. This problem occurs because 16-bit DOS
-applications are run synchronously, as described above.
-.TP
-\fBMacintosh\fR
-.
-Opening a serial port is not currently implemented under Macintosh.
-.sp
-Opening a command pipeline is not supported under Macintosh, since
-applications do not support the concept of standard input or output.
-.TP
-\fBUnix\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
-.
-Valid values for \fIfileName\fR to open a serial port are generally of the
-form \fB/dev/tty\fIX\fR, where \fIX\fR is \fBa\fR or \fBb\fR, but the name
-of any pseudo-file that maps to a serial port may be used.
-.sp
-When running Tcl interactively, there may be some strange interactions
-between the console, if one is present, and a command pipeline that uses
-standard input. If a command pipeline is opened for reading, some
-of the lines entered at the console will be sent to the command pipeline and
-some will be sent to the Tcl evaluator. This problem only occurs because
-both Tcl and the child application are competing for the console at the
-same time. If the command pipeline is started from a script, so that Tcl is
-not accessing the console, or if the command pipeline does not use standard
-input, but is redirected from a file, then the above problem does not occur.
-.LP
-See the PORTABILITY ISSUES section of the \fBexec\fR command for additional
-information not specific to command pipelines about executing
-applications on the various platforms
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), close(n), filename(n), fconfigure(n), gets(n), read(n),
-puts(n), exec(n), fopen(1)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-access mode, append, create, file, non-blocking, open, permissions,
-pipeline, process, serial
diff --git a/raw/mann/option.n b/raw/mann/option.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bfb21f4..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/option.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,326 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: option.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: option.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH option n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-option \- Add/retrieve window options to/from the option database
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBoption add \fIpattern value \fR?\fIpriority\fR?
-.sp
-\fBoption clear\fR
-.sp
-\fBoption get \fIwindow name class\fR
-.sp
-\fBoption readfile \fIfileName \fR?\fIpriority\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBoption\fR command allows you to add entries to the Tk option
-database or to retrieve options from the database. The \fBadd\fR
-form of the command adds a new option to the database.
-\fIPattern\fR contains
-the option being specified, and consists of names and/or classes
-separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format. \fIValue\fR
-contains a text string to associate with \fIpattern\fR; this is the
-value that will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR or by
-invocations of the \fBoption get\fR command. If \fIpriority\fR
-is specified, it indicates the priority level for this option (see
-below for legal values); it defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
-This command always returns an empty string.
-.PP
-The \fBoption clear\fR command clears the option database. Default
-options (from the
-\fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or the \fB.Xdefaults\fR
-file) will be reloaded automatically the next time an
-option is added to the database or removed from it. This command
-always returns an empty string.
-.PP
-The \fBoption get\fR command returns the value of the option
-specified for \fIwindow\fR
-under \fIname\fR and \fIclass\fR. If several entries in the option
-database match \fIwindow\fR, \fIname\fR, and \fIclass\fR, then
-the command returns whichever was created with highest
-\fIpriority\fR level. If there are several matching
-entries at the same priority level, then it returns whichever entry
-was most recently entered into the option database. If there are
-no matching entries, then the empty string is returned.
-.PP
-The \fBreadfile\fR form of the command reads \fIfileName\fR,
-which should have the standard format for an
-X resource database such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, and adds all the
-options specified in that file to the option database. If \fIpriority\fR
-is specified, it indicates the priority level at which to enter the
-options; \fIpriority\fR defaults to \fBinteractive\fR.
-.PP
-The \fIpriority\fR arguments to the \fBoption\fR command are
-normally specified symbolically using one of the following values:
-.TP
-\fBwidgetDefault\fR
-Level 20. Used for default values hard-coded into widgets.
-.TP
-\fBstartupFile\fR
-Level 40. Used for options specified in application-specific
-startup files.
-.TP
-\fBuserDefault\fR
-Level 60. Used for options specified in user-specific defaults
-files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into
-the X server, or user-specific startup files.
-.TP
-\fBinteractive\fR
-Level 80. Used for options specified interactively after the application
-starts running. If \fIpriority\fR isn't specified, it defaults to
-this level.
-.LP
-Any of the above keywords may be abbreviated. In addition, priorities
-may be specified numerically using integers between 0 and 100,
-inclusive. The numeric form is probably a bad idea except for new priority
-levels other than the ones given above.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-database, option, priority, retrieve
diff --git a/raw/mann/optionMenu.n b/raw/mann/optionMenu.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 9318fad..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/optionMenu.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,275 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: optionMenu.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: optionMenu.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_optionMenu n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_optionMenu \- Create an option menubutton and its menu
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_optionMenu \fIw varName value \fR?\fIvalue value ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure creates an option menubutton whose name is \fIw\fR,
-plus an associated menu.
-Together they allow the user to select one of the values
-given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments.
-The current value will be stored in the global variable whose
-name is given by \fIvarName\fR and it will also be displayed as the label
-in the option menubutton.
-The user can click on the menubutton to display a menu containing
-all of the \fIvalue\fRs and thereby select a new value.
-Once a new value is selected, it will be stored in the variable
-and appear in the option menubutton.
-The current value can also be changed by setting the variable.
-.PP
-The return value from \fBtk_optionMenu\fR is the name of the menu
-associated with \fIw\fR, so that the caller can change its configuration
-options or manipulate it in other ways.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-option menu
diff --git a/raw/mann/package.n b/raw/mann/package.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5feb1f4..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/package.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,431 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: package.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: package.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH package n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-package \- Facilities for package loading and version control
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fBpackage forget ?\fIpackage package ...\fR?
-\fBpackage ifneeded \fIpackage version\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-\fBpackage names\fR
-\fBpackage present \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
-\fBpackage provide \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
-\fBpackage require \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
-\fBpackage unknown \fR?\fIcommand\fR?
-\fBpackage vcompare \fIversion1 version2\fR
-\fBpackage versions \fIpackage\fR
-\fBpackage vsatisfies \fIversion1 version2\fR
-.fi
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command keeps a simple database of the packages available for
-use by the current interpreter and how to load them into the
-interpreter.
-It supports multiple versions of each package and arranges
-for the correct version of a package to be loaded based on what
-is needed by the application.
-This command also detects and reports version clashes.
-Typically, only the \fBpackage require\fR and \fBpackage provide\fR
-commands are invoked in normal Tcl scripts; the other commands are used
-primarily by system scripts that maintain the package database.
-.PP
-The behavior of the \fBpackage\fR command is determined by its first argument.
-The following forms are permitted:
-.TP
-\fBpackage forget ?\fIpackage package ...\fR?
-Removes all information about each specified package from this interpreter,
-including information provided by both \fBpackage ifneeded\fR and
-\fBpackage provide\fR.
-.TP
-\fBpackage ifneeded \fIpackage version\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
-This command typically appears only in system configuration
-scripts to set up the package database.
-It indicates that a particular version of
-a particular package is available if needed, and that the package
-can be added to the interpreter by executing \fIscript\fR.
-The script is saved in a database for use by subsequent
-\fBpackage require\fR commands; typically, \fIscript\fR
-sets up auto-loading for the commands in the package (or calls
-\fBload\fR and/or \fBsource\fR directly), then invokes
-\fBpackage provide\fR to indicate that the package is present.
-There may be information in the database for several different
-versions of a single package.
-If the database already contains information for \fIpackage\fR
-and \fIversion\fR, the new \fIscript\fR replaces the existing
-one.
-If the \fIscript\fR argument is omitted, the current script for
-version \fIversion\fR of package \fIpackage\fR is returned,
-or an empty string if no \fBpackage ifneeded\fR command has
-been invoked for this \fIpackage\fR and \fIversion\fR.
-.TP
-\fBpackage names\fR
-Returns a list of the names of all packages in the
-interpreter for which a version has been provided (via
-\fBpackage provide\fR) or for which a \fBpackage ifneeded\fR
-script is available.
-The order of elements in the list is arbitrary.
-.TP
-\fBpackage present \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
-This command is equivalent to \fBpackage require\fR except that it
-does not try and load the package if it is not already loaded.
-.TP
-\fBpackage provide \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
-This command is invoked to indicate that version \fIversion\fR
-of package \fIpackage\fR is now present in the interpreter.
-It is typically invoked once as part of an \fBifneeded\fR script,
-and again by the package itself when it is finally loaded.
-An error occurs if a different version of \fIpackage\fR has been
-provided by a previous \fBpackage provide\fR command.
-If the \fIversion\fR argument is omitted, then the command
-returns the version number that is currently provided, or an
-empty string if no \fBpackage provide\fR command has been
-invoked for \fIpackage\fR in this interpreter.
-.TP
-\fBpackage require \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
-This command is typically invoked by Tcl code that wishes to use
-a particular version of a particular package. The arguments
-indicate which package is wanted, and the command ensures that
-a suitable version of the package is loaded into the interpreter.
-If the command succeeds, it returns the version number that is
-loaded; otherwise it generates an error.
-If both the \fB\-exact\fR
-switch and the \fIversion\fR argument are specified then only the
-given version is acceptable. If \fB\-exact\fR is omitted but
-\fIversion\fR is specified, then versions later than \fIversion\fR
-are also acceptable as long as they have the same major version
-number as \fIversion\fR.
-If both \fB\-exact\fR and \fIversion\fR are omitted then any
-version whatsoever is acceptable.
-If a version of \fIpackage\fR has already been provided (by invoking
-the \fBpackage provide\fR command), then its version number must
-satisfy the criteria given by \fB\-exact\fR and \fIversion\fR and
-the command returns immediately.
-Otherwise, the command searches the database of information provided by
-previous \fBpackage ifneeded\fR commands to see if an acceptable
-version of the package is available.
-If so, the script for the highest acceptable version number is invoked;
-it must do whatever is necessary to load the package,
-including calling \fBpackage provide\fR for the package.
-If the \fBpackage ifneeded\fR database does not contain an acceptable
-version of the package and a \fBpackage unknown\fR command has been
-specified for the interpreter then that command is invoked; when
-it completes, Tcl checks again to see if the package is now provided
-or if there is a \fBpackage ifneeded\fR script for it.
-If all of these steps fail to provide an acceptable version of the
-package, then the command returns an error.
-.TP
-\fBpackage unknown \fR?\fIcommand\fR?
-This command supplies a ``last resort'' command to invoke during
-\fBpackage require\fR if no suitable version of a package can be found
-in the \fBpackage ifneeded\fR database.
-If the \fIcommand\fR argument is supplied, it contains the first part
-of a command; when the command is invoked during a \fBpackage require\fR
-command, Tcl appends two additional arguments giving the desired package
-name and version.
-For example, if \fIcommand\fR is \fBfoo bar\fR and later the command
-\fBpackage require test 2.4\fR is invoked, then Tcl will execute
-the command \fBfoo bar test 2.4\fR to load the package.
-If no version number is supplied to the \fBpackage require\fR command,
-then the version argument for the invoked command will be an empty string.
-If the \fBpackage unknown\fR command is invoked without a \fIcommand\fR
-argument, then the current \fBpackage unknown\fR script is returned,
-or an empty string if there is none.
-If \fIcommand\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current
-\fBpackage unknown\fR script is removed, if there is one.
-.TP
-\fBpackage vcompare \fIversion1 version2\fR
-Compares the two version numbers given by \fIversion1\fR and \fIversion2\fR.
-Returns -1 if \fIversion1\fR is an earlier version than \fIversion2\fR,
-0 if they are equal, and 1 if \fIversion1\fR is later than \fBversion2\fR.
-.TP
-\fBpackage versions \fIpackage\fR
-Returns a list of all the version numbers of \fIpackage\fR
-for which information has been provided by \fBpackage ifneeded\fR
-commands.
-.TP
-\fBpackage vsatisfies \fIversion1 version2\fR
-Returns 1 if scripts written for \fIversion2\fR will work unchanged
-with \fIversion1\fR (i.e. \fIversion1\fR is equal to or greater
-than \fIversion2\fR and they both have the same major version
-number), 0 otherwise.
-
-.SH "VERSION NUMBERS"
-.PP
-Version numbers consist of one or more decimal numbers separated
-by dots, such as 2 or 1.162 or 3.1.13.1.
-The first number is called the major version number.
-Larger numbers correspond to later versions of a package, with
-leftmost numbers having greater significance.
-For example, version 2.1 is later than 1.3 and version
-3.4.6 is later than 3.3.5.
-Missing fields are equivalent to zeroes: version 1.3 is the
-same as version 1.3.0 and 1.3.0.0, so it is earlier than 1.3.1 or 1.3.0.2.
-A later version number is assumed to be upwards compatible with
-an earlier version number as long as both versions have the same
-major version number.
-For example, Tcl scripts written for version 2.3 of a package should
-work unchanged under versions 2.3.2, 2.4, and 2.5.1.
-Changes in the major version number signify incompatible changes:
-if code is written to use version 2.1 of a package, it is not guaranteed
-to work unmodified with either version 1.7.3 or version 3.1.
-
-.SH "PACKAGE INDICES"
-.PP
-The recommended way to use packages in Tcl is to invoke \fBpackage require\fR
-and \fBpackage provide\fR commands in scripts, and use the procedure
-\fBpkg_mkIndex\fR to create package index files.
-Once you've done this, packages will be loaded automatically
-in response to \fBpackage require\fR commands.
-See the documentation for \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR for details.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-msgcat(n), packagens(n), pkgMkIndex(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-package, version
diff --git a/raw/mann/packagens.n b/raw/mann/packagens.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 94404d0..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/packagens.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,290 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\" All rights reserved.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: packagens.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: packagens.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH pkg::create n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-pkg::create \- Construct an appropriate \fBpackage ifneeded\fR
-command for a given package specification
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fB::pkg::create \fI\-name packageName\fR \fI\-version packageVersion\fR ?\fI\-load filespec\fR? ... ?\fI\-source filespec\fR? ...
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fB::pkg::create\fR is a utility procedure that is part of the standard Tcl
-library. It is used to create an appropriate \fBpackage ifneeded\fR
-command for a given package specification. It can be used to construct a
-\fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR file for use with the \fBpackage\fR mechanism.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-The parameters supported are:
-.TP
-\fB\-name\fR\0\fIpackageName\fR
-This parameter specifies the name of the package. It is required.
-.TP
-\fB\-version\fR\0\fIpackageVersion\fR
-This parameter specifies the version of the package. It is required.
-.TP
-\fB\-load\fR\0\fIfilespec\fR
-This parameter specifies a binary library that must be loaded with the
-\fBload\fR command. \fIfilespec\fR is a list with two elements. The
-first element is the name of the file to load. The second, optional
-element is a list of commands supplied by loading that file. If the
-list of procedures is empty or omitted, \fB::pkg::create\fR will
-set up the library for direct loading (see \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR). Any
-number of \fB\-load\fR parameters may be specified.
-.TP
-\fB\-source\fR\0\fIfilespec\fR
-This parameter is similar to the \fB\-load\fR parameter, except that it
-specifies a Tcl library that must be loaded with the
-\fBsource\fR command. Any number of \fB\-source\fR parameters may be
-specified.
-.PP
-At least one \fB\-load\fR or \fB\-source\fR paramter must be given.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-package(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-auto-load, index, package, version
diff --git a/raw/mann/palette.n b/raw/mann/palette.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3869deb..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/palette.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,308 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: palette.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: palette.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_setPalette n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_setPalette, tk_bisque \- Modify the Tk color palette
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_setPalette \fIbackground\fR
-.sp
-\fBtk_setPalette \fIname value \fR?\fIname value ...\fR?
-.sp
-\fBtk_bisque\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtk_setPalette\fR procedure changes the color scheme for Tk.
-It does this by modifying the colors of existing widgets and by changing
-the option database so that future widgets will use the new color scheme.
-If \fBtk_setPalette\fR is invoked with a single argument, the
-argument is the name of a color to use as the normal background
-color; \fBtk_setPalette\fR will compute a complete color palette
-from this background color.
-Alternatively, the arguments to \fBtk_setPalette\fR may consist of any number
-of \fIname\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, where the first argument of the pair
-is the name of an option in the Tk option database and the second
-argument is the new value to use for that option. The following
-database names are currently supported:
-.DS L
-.ta 4c 8c
-\fBactiveBackground foreground selectColor
-activeForeground highlightBackground selectBackground
-background highlightColor selectForeground
-disabledForeground insertBackground troughColor\fR
-.DE
-\fBtk_setPalette\fR tries to compute reasonable defaults for any
-options that you don't specify. You can specify options other
-than the above ones and Tk will change those options on widgets as
-well. This feature may be useful if you are using custom widgets with
-additional color options.
-.PP
-Once it has computed the new value to use for each of the color options,
-\fBtk_setPalette\fR scans the widget hierarchy to modify the options
-of all existing widgets. For each widget, it checks to see if any
-of the above options is defined for the widget. If so, and if the
-option's current value is the default, then the value is changed; if
-the option has a value other than the default, \fBtk_setPalette\fR
-will not change it. The default for an option is the one provided by
-the widget (\fB[lindex [$w configure $option] 3]\fR) unless
-\fBtk_setPalette\fR has been run previously, in which case it is the
-value specified in the previous invocation of \fBtk_setPalette\fR.
-.PP
-After modifying all the widgets in the application, \fBtk_setPalette\fR
-adds options to the option database to change the defaults for
-widgets created in the future. The new options are added at
-priority \fBwidgetDefault\fR, so they will be overridden by options
-from the .Xdefaults file or options specified on the command-line
-that creates a widget.
-.PP
-The procedure \fBtk_bisque\fR is provided for backward compatibility:
-it restores the application's colors to the light brown (``bisque'')
-color scheme used in Tk 3.6 and earlier versions.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bisque, color, palette
diff --git a/raw/mann/pid.n b/raw/mann/pid.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 8691c9b..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/pid.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,272 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: pid.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: pid.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH pid n 7.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-pid \- Retrieve process id(s)
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpid \fR?\fIfileId\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-If the \fIfileId\fR argument is given then it should normally
-refer to a process pipeline created with the \fBopen\fR command.
-In this case the \fBpid\fR command will return a list whose elements
-are the process identifiers of all the processes in the pipeline,
-in order.
-The list will be empty if \fIfileId\fR refers to an open file
-that isn't a process pipeline.
-If no \fIfileId\fR argument is given then \fBpid\fR returns the process
-identifier of the current process.
-All process identifiers are returned as decimal strings.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-exec(n), open(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-file, pipeline, process identifier
diff --git a/raw/mann/pkgMkIndex.n b/raw/mann/pkgMkIndex.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 284d994..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/pkgMkIndex.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,478 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: pkgMkIndex.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: pkgMkIndex.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH pkg_mkIndex n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-pkg_mkIndex \- Build an index for automatic loading of packages
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-.VS 8.3.0
-\fBpkg_mkIndex ?\fI\-direct\fR? ?\fI\-lazy\fR? ?\fI\-load pkgPat\fR? ?\fI\-verbose\fR? \fIdir\fR ?\fIpattern pattern ...\fR?
-.VE
-.fi
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBPkg_mkIndex\fR is a utility procedure that is part of the standard
-Tcl library.
-It is used to create index files that allow packages to be loaded
-automatically when \fBpackage require\fR commands are executed.
-To use \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR, follow these steps:
-.IP [1]
-Create the package(s).
-Each package may consist of one or more Tcl script files or binary files.
-Binary files must be suitable for loading with the \fBload\fR command
-with a single argument; for example, if the file is \fBtest.so\fR it must
-be possible to load this file with the command \fBload test.so\fR.
-Each script file must contain a \fBpackage provide\fR command to declare
-the package and version number, and each binary file must contain
-a call to \fBTcl_PkgProvide\fR.
-.IP [2]
-Create the index by invoking \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR.
-The \fIdir\fR argument gives the name of a directory and each
-\fIpattern\fR argument is a \fBglob\fR-style pattern that selects
-script or binary files in \fIdir\fR.
-.VS 8.0.3
-The default pattern is \fB*.tcl\fR and \fB*.[info sharedlibextension]\fR.
-.VE
-.br
-\fBPkg_mkIndex\fR will create a file \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR in \fIdir\fR
-with package information about all the files given by the \fIpattern\fR
-arguments.
-It does this by loading each file into a slave
-interpreter and seeing what packages
-and new commands appear (this is why it is essential to have
-\fBpackage provide\fR commands or \fBTcl_PkgProvide\fR calls
-in the files, as described above).
-If you have a package split among scripts and binary files,
-or if you have dependencies among files,
-you may have to use the \fB\-load\fP option
-or adjust the order in which \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR processes
-the files. See COMPLEX CASES below.
-
-.IP [3]
-Install the package as a subdirectory of one of the directories given by
-the \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR variable. If \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR contains more
-than one directory, machine-dependent packages (e.g., those that
-contain binary shared libraries) should normally be installed
-under the first directory and machine-independent packages (e.g.,
-those that contain only Tcl scripts) should be installed under the
-second directory.
-The subdirectory should include
-the package's script and/or binary files as well as the \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR
-file. As long as the package is installed as a subdirectory of a
-directory in \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR it will automatically be found during
-\fBpackage require\fR commands.
-.br
-If you install the package anywhere else, then you must ensure that
-the directory containing the package is in the \fBauto_path\fR global variable
-or an immediate subdirectory of one of the directories in \fBauto_path\fR.
-\fBAuto_path\fR contains a list of directories that are searched
-by both the auto-loader and the package loader; by default it
-includes \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR.
-The package loader also checks all of the subdirectories of the
-directories in \fBauto_path\fR.
-You can add a directory to \fBauto_path\fR explicitly in your
-application, or you can add the directory to your \fBTCLLIBPATH\fR
-environment variable: if this environment variable is present,
-Tcl initializes \fBauto_path\fR from it during application startup.
-.IP [4]
-Once the above steps have been taken, all you need to do to use a
-package is to invoke \fBpackage require\fR.
-For example, if versions 2.1, 2.3, and 3.1 of package \fBTest\fR
-have been indexed by \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR, the command
-\fBpackage require Test\fR will make version 3.1 available
-and the command \fBpackage require \-exact Test 2.1\fR will
-make version 2.1 available.
-There may be many versions of a package in the various index files
-in \fBauto_path\fR, but only one will actually be loaded in a given
-interpreter, based on the first call to \fBpackage require\fR.
-Different versions of a package may be loaded in different
-interpreters.
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-The optional switches are:
-.TP 15
-\fB\-direct\fR
-The generated index will implement direct loading of the package
-upon \fBpackage require\fR. This is the default.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-lazy\fR
-The generated index will manage to delay loading the package until the
-use of one of the commands provided by the package, instead of loading
-it immediately upon \fBpackage require\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-load \fIpkgPat\fR
-The index process will pre-load any packages that exist in the
-current interpreter and match \fIpkgPat\fP into the slave interpreter used to
-generate the index. The pattern match uses string match rules.
-See COMPLEX CASES below.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-verbose\fR
-Generate output during the indexing process. Output is via
-the \fBtclLog\fP procedure, which by default prints to stderr.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-\-\fR
-End of the flags, in case \fIdir\fP begins with a dash.
-
-.SH "PACKAGES AND THE AUTO-LOADER"
-.PP
-The package management facilities overlap somewhat with the auto-loader,
-in that both arrange for files to be loaded on-demand.
-However, package management is a higher-level mechanism that uses
-the auto-loader for the last step in the loading process.
-It is generally better to index a package with \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR
-rather than \fBauto_mkindex\fR because the package mechanism provides
-version control: several versions of a package can be made available
-in the index files, with different applications using different
-versions based on \fBpackage require\fR commands.
-In contrast, \fBauto_mkindex\fR does not understand versions so
-it can only handle a single version of each package.
-It is probably not a good idea to index a given package with both
-\fBpkg_mkIndex\fR and \fBauto_mkindex\fR.
-If you use \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR to index a package, its commands cannot
-be invoked until \fBpackage require\fR has been used to select a
-version; in contrast, packages indexed with \fBauto_mkindex\fR
-can be used immediately since there is no version control.
-
-.SH "HOW IT WORKS"
-.PP
-\fBPkg_mkIndex\fR depends on the \fBpackage unknown\fR command,
-the \fBpackage ifneeded\fR command, and the auto-loader.
-The first time a \fBpackage require\fR command is invoked,
-the \fBpackage unknown\fR script is invoked.
-This is set by Tcl initialization to a script that
-evaluates all of the \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR files in the
-\fBauto_path\fR.
-The \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR files contain \fBpackage ifneeded\fR
-commands for each version of each available package; these commands
-invoke \fBpackage provide\fR commands to announce the
-availability of the package, and they setup auto-loader
-information to load the files of the package.
-.VS 8.3
-If the \fI\-lazy\fR flag was provided when the \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR
-was generated,
-.VE
-a given file of a given version of a given package isn't
-actually loaded until the first time one of its commands
-is invoked.
-Thus, after invoking \fBpackage require\fR you may
-not see the package's commands in the interpreter, but you will be able
-to invoke the commands and they will be auto-loaded.
-
-.VS 8.3
-.SH "DIRECT LOADING"
-.PP
-Some packages, for instance packages which use namespaces and export
-commands or those which require special initialization, might select
-that their package files be loaded immediately upon \fBpackage require\fR
-instead of delaying the actual loading to the first use of one of the
-package's command. This is the default mode when generating the package
-index. It can be overridden by specifying the \fI\-lazy\fR argument.
-.VE
-
-.SH "COMPLEX CASES"
-Most complex cases of dependencies among scripts
-and binary files, and packages being split among scripts and
-binary files are handled OK. However, you may have to adjust
-the order in which files are processed by \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR.
-These issues are described in detail below.
-.PP
-If each script or file contains one package, and packages
-are only contained in one file, then things are easy.
-You simply specify all files to be indexed in any order
-with some glob patterns.
-.PP
-In general, it is OK for scripts to have dependencies on other
-packages.
-If scripts contain \fBpackage require\fP commands, these are
-stubbed out in the interpreter used to process the scripts,
-so these do not cause problems.
-If scripts call into other packages in global code,
-these calls are handled by a stub \fBunknown\fP command.
-However, if scripts make variable references to other package's
-variables in global code, these will cause errors. That is
-also bad coding style.
-.PP
-If binary files have dependencies on other packages, things
-can become tricky because it is not possible to stub out
-C-level API's such as \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fP API
-when loading a binary file.
-For example, suppose the BLT package requires Tk, and expresses
-this with a call to \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fP in its \fBBlt_Init\fP routine.
-To support this, you must run \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR in an interpreter that
-has Tk loaded. You can achieve this with the
-\fB\-load \fIpkgPat\fR option. If you specify this option,
-\fBpkg_mkIndex\fR will load any packages listed by
-\fBinfo loaded\fP and that match \fIpkgPat\fP
-into the interpreter used to process files.
-In most cases this will satisfy the \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fP calls
-made by binary files.
-.PP
-If you are indexing two binary files and one depends on the other,
-you should specify the one that has dependencies last.
-This way the one without dependencies will get loaded and indexed,
-and then the package it provides
-will be available when the second file is processed.
-You may also need to load the first package into the
-temporary interpreter used to create the index by using
-the \fB\-load\fP flag;
-it won't hurt to specify package patterns that are not yet loaded.
-.PP
-If you have a package that is split across scripts and a binary file,
-then you should avoid the \fB\-load\fP flag. The problem is that
-if you load a package before computing the index it masks any
-other files that provide part of the same package.
-If you must use \fB\-load\fP,
-then you must specify the scripts first; otherwise the package loaded from
-the binary file may mask the package defined by the scripts.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-package(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-auto-load, index, package, version
diff --git a/raw/mann/popup.n b/raw/mann/popup.n
deleted file mode 100644
index cd749ed..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/popup.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,268 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: popup.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: popup.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_popup n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_popup \- Post a popup menu
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_popup \fImenu x y \fR?\fIentry\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure posts a menu at a given position on the screen and
-configures Tk so that the menu and its cascaded children can be
-traversed with the mouse or the keyboard.
-\fIMenu\fR is the name of a menu widget and \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR
-are the root coordinates at which to display the menu.
-If \fIentry\fR is omitted or an empty string, the
-menu's upper left corner is positioned at the given point.
-Otherwise \fIentry\fR gives the index of an entry in \fImenu\fR and
-the menu will be positioned so that the entry is positioned over
-the given point.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-menu, popup
diff --git a/raw/mann/proc.n b/raw/mann/proc.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e63bc75..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/proc.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,312 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: proc.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: proc.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH proc n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-proc \- Create a Tcl procedure
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBproc \fIname args body\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBproc\fR command creates a new Tcl procedure named
-\fIname\fR, replacing
-any existing command or procedure there may have been by that name.
-Whenever the new command is invoked, the contents of \fIbody\fR will
-be executed by the Tcl interpreter.
-Normally, \fIname\fR is unqualified
-(does not include the names of any containing namespaces),
-and the new procedure is created in the current namespace.
-If \fIname\fR includes any namespace qualifiers,
-the procedure is created in the specified namespace.
-\fIArgs\fR specifies the formal arguments to the
-procedure. It consists of a list, possibly empty, each of whose
-elements specifies
-one argument. Each argument specifier is also a list with either
-one or two fields. If there is only a single field in the specifier
-then it is the name of the argument; if there are two fields, then
-the first is the argument name and the second is its default value.
-.PP
-When \fIname\fR is invoked a local variable
-will be created for each of the formal arguments to the procedure; its
-value will be the value of corresponding argument in the invoking command
-or the argument's default value.
-Arguments with default values need not be
-specified in a procedure invocation. However, there must be enough
-actual arguments for all the
-formal arguments that don't have defaults, and there must not be any extra
-actual arguments. There is one special case to permit procedures with
-variable numbers of arguments. If the last formal argument has the name
-\fBargs\fR, then a call to the procedure may contain more actual arguments
-than the procedure has formals. In this case, all of the actual arguments
-starting at the one that would be assigned to \fBargs\fR are combined into
-a list (as if the \fBlist\fR command had been used); this combined value
-is assigned to the local variable \fBargs\fR.
-.PP
-When \fIbody\fR is being executed, variable names normally refer to
-local variables, which are created automatically when referenced and
-deleted when the procedure returns. One local variable is automatically
-created for each of the procedure's arguments.
-Global variables can only be accessed by invoking
-the \fBglobal\fR command or the \fBupvar\fR command.
-Namespace variables can only be accessed by invoking
-the \fBvariable\fR command or the \fBupvar\fR command.
-.PP
-The \fBproc\fR command returns an empty string. When a procedure is
-invoked, the procedure's return value is the value specified in a
-\fBreturn\fR command. If the procedure doesn't execute an explicit
-\fBreturn\fR, then its return value is the value of the last command
-executed in the procedure's body.
-If an error occurs while executing the procedure
-body, then the procedure-as-a-whole will return that same error.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-info(n), unknown(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-argument, procedure
diff --git a/raw/mann/puts.n b/raw/mann/puts.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ed5241..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/puts.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,304 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: puts.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: puts.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH puts n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-puts \- Write to a channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBputs \fR?\fB\-nonewline\fR? ?\fIchannelId\fR? \fIstring\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Writes the characters given by \fIstring\fR to the channel given
-by \fIchannelId\fR.
-\fIChannelId\fR must be a channel identifier such as returned from a
-previous invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR. It must have been opened
-for output. If no \fIchannelId\fR is specified then it defaults to
-\fBstdout\fR. \fBPuts\fR normally outputs a newline character after
-\fIstring\fR, but this feature may be suppressed by specifying the
-\fB\-nonewline\fR switch.
-.PP
-Newline characters in the output are translated by \fBputs\fR to
-platform-specific end-of-line sequences according to the current
-value of the \fB\-translation\fR option for the channel (for example,
-on PCs newlines are normally replaced with carriage-return-linefeed
-sequences; on Macintoshes newlines are normally replaced with
-carriage-returns).
-See the \fBfconfigure\fR manual entry for a discussion on ways in
-which \fBfconfigure\fR will alter output.
-.PP
-Tcl buffers output internally, so characters written with \fBputs\fR
-may not appear immediately on the output file or device; Tcl will
-normally delay output until the buffer is full or the channel is
-closed.
-You can force output to appear immediately with the \fBflush\fR
-command.
-.PP
-When the output buffer fills up, the \fBputs\fR command will normally
-block until all the buffered data has been accepted for output by the
-operating system.
-If \fIchannelId\fR is in nonblocking mode then the \fBputs\fR command
-will not block even if the operating system cannot accept the data.
-Instead, Tcl continues to buffer the data and writes it in the
-background as fast as the underlying file or device can accept it.
-The application must use the Tcl event loop for nonblocking output
-to work; otherwise Tcl never finds out that the file or device is
-ready for more output data.
-It is possible for an arbitrarily large amount of data to be
-buffered for a channel in nonblocking mode, which could consume a
-large amount of memory.
-To avoid wasting memory, nonblocking I/O should normally
-be used in an event-driven fashion with the \fBfileevent\fR command
-(don't invoke \fBputs\fR unless you have recently been notified
-via a file event that the channel is ready for more output data).
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), fileevent(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-channel, newline, output, write
diff --git a/raw/mann/pwd.n b/raw/mann/pwd.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c9aadcc..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/pwd.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,263 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: pwd.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: pwd.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH pwd n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-pwd \- Return the current working directory
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpwd\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Returns the path name of the current working directory.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), cd(n), glob(n), filename(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-working directory
diff --git a/raw/mann/raise.n b/raw/mann/raise.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 2e3903c..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/raise.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,273 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: raise.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: raise.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH raise n 3.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-raise \- Change a window's position in the stacking order
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBraise \fIwindow \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-If the \fIaboveThis\fR argument is omitted then the command raises
-\fIwindow\fR so that it is above all of its siblings in the stacking
-order (it will not be obscured by any siblings and will obscure
-any siblings that overlap it).
-If \fIaboveThis\fR is specified then it must be the path name of
-a window that is either a sibling of \fIwindow\fR or the descendant
-of a sibling of \fIwindow\fR.
-In this case the \fBraise\fR command will insert
-\fIwindow\fR into the stacking order just above \fIaboveThis\fR
-(or the ancestor of \fIaboveThis\fR that is a sibling of \fIwindow\fR);
-this could end up either raising or lowering \fIwindow\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-lower
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-obscure, raise, stacking order
diff --git a/raw/mann/re_syntax.n b/raw/mann/re_syntax.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 907a744..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/re_syntax.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1167 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: re_syntax.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: re_syntax.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH re_syntax n "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-re_syntax \- Syntax of Tcl regular expressions.
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-A \fIregular expression\fR describes strings of characters.
-It's a pattern that matches certain strings and doesn't match others.
-
-.SH "DIFFERENT FLAVORS OF REs"
-Regular expressions (``RE''s), as defined by POSIX, come in two
-flavors: \fIextended\fR REs (``EREs'') and \fIbasic\fR REs (``BREs'').
-EREs are roughly those of the traditional \fIegrep\fR, while BREs are
-roughly those of the traditional \fIed\fR. This implementation adds
-a third flavor, \fIadvanced\fR REs (``AREs''), basically EREs with
-some significant extensions.
-.PP
-This manual page primarily describes AREs. BREs mostly exist for
-backward compatibility in some old programs; they will be discussed at
-the end. POSIX EREs are almost an exact subset of AREs. Features of
-AREs that are not present in EREs will be indicated.
-
-.SH "REGULAR EXPRESSION SYNTAX"
-.PP
-Tcl regular expressions are implemented using the package written by
-Henry Spencer, based on the 1003.2 spec and some (not quite all) of
-the Perl5 extensions (thanks, Henry!). Much of the description of
-regular expressions below is copied verbatim from his manual entry.
-.PP
-An ARE is one or more \fIbranches\fR,
-separated by `\fB|\fR',
-matching anything that matches any of the branches.
-.PP
-A branch is zero or more \fIconstraints\fR or \fIquantified atoms\fR,
-concatenated.
-It matches a match for the first, followed by a match for the second, etc;
-an empty branch matches the empty string.
-.PP
-A quantified atom is an \fIatom\fR possibly followed
-by a single \fIquantifier\fR.
-Without a quantifier, it matches a match for the atom.
-The quantifiers,
-and what a so-quantified atom matches, are:
-.RS 2
-.TP 6
-\fB*\fR
-a sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom
-.TP
-\fB+\fR
-a sequence of 1 or more matches of the atom
-.TP
-\fB?\fR
-a sequence of 0 or 1 matches of the atom
-.TP
-\fB{\fIm\fB}\fR
-a sequence of exactly \fIm\fR matches of the atom
-.TP
-\fB{\fIm\fB,}\fR
-a sequence of \fIm\fR or more matches of the atom
-.TP
-\fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}\fR
-a sequence of \fIm\fR through \fIn\fR (inclusive) matches of the atom;
-\fIm\fR may not exceed \fIn\fR
-.TP
-\fB*? +? ?? {\fIm\fB}? {\fIm\fB,}? {\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}?\fR
-\fInon-greedy\fR quantifiers,
-which match the same possibilities,
-but prefer the smallest number rather than the largest number
-of matches (see MATCHING)
-.RE
-.PP
-The forms using
-\fB{\fR and \fB}\fR
-are known as \fIbound\fRs.
-The numbers
-\fIm\fR and \fIn\fR are unsigned decimal integers
-with permissible values from 0 to 255 inclusive.
-.PP
-An atom is one of:
-.RS 2
-.TP 6
-\fB(\fIre\fB)\fR
-(where \fIre\fR is any regular expression)
-matches a match for
-\fIre\fR, with the match noted for possible reporting
-.TP
-\fB(?:\fIre\fB)\fR
-as previous,
-but does no reporting
-(a ``non-capturing'' set of parentheses)
-.TP
-\fB()\fR
-matches an empty string,
-noted for possible reporting
-.TP
-\fB(?:)\fR
-matches an empty string,
-without reporting
-.TP
-\fB[\fIchars\fB]\fR
-a \fIbracket expression\fR,
-matching any one of the \fIchars\fR (see BRACKET EXPRESSIONS for more detail)
-.TP
- \fB.\fR
-matches any single character
-.TP
-\fB\e\fIk\fR
-(where \fIk\fR is a non-alphanumeric character)
-matches that character taken as an ordinary character,
-e.g. \e\e matches a backslash character
-.TP
-\fB\e\fIc\fR
-where \fIc\fR is alphanumeric
-(possibly followed by other characters),
-an \fIescape\fR (AREs only),
-see ESCAPES below
-.TP
-\fB{\fR
-when followed by a character other than a digit,
-matches the left-brace character `\fB{\fR';
-when followed by a digit, it is the beginning of a
-\fIbound\fR (see above)
-.TP
-\fIx\fR
-where \fIx\fR is
-a single character with no other significance, matches that character.
-.RE
-.PP
-A \fIconstraint\fR matches an empty string when specific conditions
-are met.
-A constraint may not be followed by a quantifier.
-The simple constraints are as follows; some more constraints are
-described later, under ESCAPES.
-.RS 2
-.TP 8
-\fB^\fR
-matches at the beginning of a line
-.TP
-\fB$\fR
-matches at the end of a line
-.TP
-\fB(?=\fIre\fB)\fR
-\fIpositive lookahead\fR (AREs only), matches at any point
-where a substring matching \fIre\fR begins
-.TP
-\fB(?!\fIre\fB)\fR
-\fInegative lookahead\fR (AREs only), matches at any point
-where no substring matching \fIre\fR begins
-.RE
-.PP
-The lookahead constraints may not contain back references (see later),
-and all parentheses within them are considered non-capturing.
-.PP
-An RE may not end with `\fB\e\fR'.
-
-.SH "BRACKET EXPRESSIONS"
-A \fIbracket expression\fR is a list of characters enclosed in `\fB[\|]\fR'.
-It normally matches any single character from the list (but see below).
-If the list begins with `\fB^\fR',
-it matches any single character
-(but see below) \fInot\fR from the rest of the list.
-.PP
-If two characters in the list are separated by `\fB\-\fR',
-this is shorthand
-for the full \fIrange\fR of characters between those two (inclusive) in the
-collating sequence,
-e.g.
-\fB[0\-9]\fR
-in ASCII matches any decimal digit.
-Two ranges may not share an
-endpoint, so e.g.
-\fBa\-c\-e\fR
-is illegal.
-Ranges are very collating-sequence-dependent,
-and portable programs should avoid relying on them.
-.PP
-To include a literal
-\fB]\fR
-or
-\fB\-\fR
-in the list,
-the simplest method is to
-enclose it in
-\fB[.\fR and \fB.]\fR
-to make it a collating element (see below).
-Alternatively,
-make it the first character
-(following a possible `\fB^\fR'),
-or (AREs only) precede it with `\fB\e\fR'.
-Alternatively, for `\fB\-\fR',
-make it the last character,
-or the second endpoint of a range.
-To use a literal
-\fB\-\fR
-as the first endpoint of a range,
-make it a collating element
-or (AREs only) precede it with `\fB\e\fR'.
-With the exception of these, some combinations using
-\fB[\fR
-(see next
-paragraphs), and escapes,
-all other special characters lose their
-special significance within a bracket expression.
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, a collating element (a character,
-a multi-character sequence that collates as if it were a single character,
-or a collating-sequence name for either)
-enclosed in
-\fB[.\fR and \fB.]\fR
-stands for the
-sequence of characters of that collating element.
-The sequence is a single element of the bracket expression's list.
-A bracket expression in a locale that has
-multi-character collating elements
-can thus match more than one character.
-.VS 8.2
-So (insidiously), a bracket expression that starts with \fB^\fR
-can match multi-character collating elements even if none of them
-appear in the bracket expression!
-(\fINote:\fR Tcl currently has no multi-character collating elements.
-This information is only for illustration.)
-.PP
-For example, assume the collating sequence includes a \fBch\fR
-multi-character collating element.
-Then the RE \fB[[.ch.]]*c\fR (zero or more \fBch\fP's followed by \fBc\fP)
-matches the first five characters of `\fBchchcc\fR'.
-Also, the RE \fB[^c]b\fR matches all of `\fBchb\fR'
-(because \fB[^c]\fR matches the multi-character \fBch\fR).
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, a collating element enclosed in
-\fB[=\fR
-and
-\fB=]\fR
-is an equivalence class, standing for the sequences of characters
-of all collating elements equivalent to that one, including itself.
-(If there are no other equivalent collating elements,
-the treatment is as if the enclosing delimiters were `\fB[.\fR'\&
-and `\fB.]\fR'.)
-For example, if
-\fBo\fR
-and
-\fB\o'o^'\fR
-are the members of an equivalence class,
-then `\fB[[=o=]]\fR', `\fB[[=\o'o^'=]]\fR',
-and `\fB[o\o'o^']\fR'\&
-are all synonymous.
-An equivalence class may not be an endpoint
-of a range.
-.VS 8.2
-(\fINote:\fR
-Tcl currently implements only the Unicode locale.
-It doesn't define any equivalence classes.
-The examples above are just illustrations.)
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, the name of a \fIcharacter class\fR enclosed
-in
-\fB[:\fR
-and
-\fB:]\fR
-stands for the list of all characters
-(not all collating elements!)
-belonging to that
-class.
-Standard character classes are:
-.PP
-.RS
-.ne 5
-.nf
-.ta 3c
-\fBalpha\fR A letter.
-\fBupper\fR An upper-case letter.
-\fBlower\fR A lower-case letter.
-\fBdigit\fR A decimal digit.
-\fBxdigit\fR A hexadecimal digit.
-\fBalnum\fR An alphanumeric (letter or digit).
-\fBprint\fR An alphanumeric (same as alnum).
-\fBblank\fR A space or tab character.
-\fBspace\fR A character producing white space in displayed text.
-\fBpunct\fR A punctuation character.
-\fBgraph\fR A character with a visible representation.
-\fBcntrl\fR A control character.
-.fi
-.RE
-.PP
-A locale may provide others.
-.VS 8.2
-(Note that the current Tcl implementation has only one locale:
-the Unicode locale.)
-.VE 8.2
-A character class may not be used as an endpoint of a range.
-.PP
-There are two special cases of bracket expressions:
-the bracket expressions
-\fB[[:<:]]\fR
-and
-\fB[[:>:]]\fR
-are constraints, matching empty strings at
-the beginning and end of a word respectively.
-'\" note, discussion of escapes below references this definition of word
-A word is defined as a sequence of
-word characters
-that is neither preceded nor followed by
-word characters.
-A word character is an
-\fIalnum\fR
-character
-or an underscore
-(\fB_\fR).
-These special bracket expressions are deprecated;
-users of AREs should use constraint escapes instead (see below).
-.SH ESCAPES
-Escapes (AREs only), which begin with a
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character,
-come in several varieties:
-character entry, class shorthands, constraint escapes, and back references.
-A
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character but not constituting
-a valid escape is illegal in AREs.
-In EREs, there are no escapes:
-outside a bracket expression,
-a
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character merely stands for that
-character as an ordinary character,
-and inside a bracket expression,
-\fB\e\fR
-is an ordinary character.
-(The latter is the one actual incompatibility between EREs and AREs.)
-.PP
-Character-entry escapes (AREs only) exist to make it easier to specify
-non-printing and otherwise inconvenient characters in REs:
-.RS 2
-.TP 5
-\fB\ea\fR
-alert (bell) character, as in C
-.TP
-\fB\eb\fR
-backspace, as in C
-.TP
-\fB\eB\fR
-synonym for
-\fB\e\fR
-to help reduce backslash doubling in some
-applications where there are multiple levels of backslash processing
-.TP
-\fB\ec\fIX\fR
-(where X is any character) the character whose
-low-order 5 bits are the same as those of
-\fIX\fR,
-and whose other bits are all zero
-.TP
-\fB\ee\fR
-the character whose collating-sequence name
-is `\fBESC\fR',
-or failing that, the character with octal value 033
-.TP
-\fB\ef\fR
-formfeed, as in C
-.TP
-\fB\en\fR
-newline, as in C
-.TP
-\fB\er\fR
-carriage return, as in C
-.TP
-\fB\et\fR
-horizontal tab, as in C
-.TP
-\fB\eu\fIwxyz\fR
-(where
-\fIwxyz\fR
-is exactly four hexadecimal digits)
-the Unicode character
-\fBU+\fIwxyz\fR
-in the local byte ordering
-.TP
-\fB\eU\fIstuvwxyz\fR
-(where
-\fIstuvwxyz\fR
-is exactly eight hexadecimal digits)
-reserved for a somewhat-hypothetical Unicode extension to 32 bits
-.TP
-\fB\ev\fR
-vertical tab, as in C
-are all available.
-.TP
-\fB\ex\fIhhh\fR
-(where
-\fIhhh\fR
-is any sequence of hexadecimal digits)
-the character whose hexadecimal value is
-\fB0x\fIhhh\fR
-(a single character no matter how many hexadecimal digits are used).
-.TP
-\fB\e0\fR
-the character whose value is
-\fB0\fR
-.TP
-\fB\e\fIxy\fR
-(where
-\fIxy\fR
-is exactly two octal digits,
-and is not a
-\fIback reference\fR (see below))
-the character whose octal value is
-\fB0\fIxy\fR
-.TP
-\fB\e\fIxyz\fR
-(where
-\fIxyz\fR
-is exactly three octal digits,
-and is not a
-back reference (see below))
-the character whose octal value is
-\fB0\fIxyz\fR
-.RE
-.PP
-Hexadecimal digits are `\fB0\fR'-`\fB9\fR', `\fBa\fR'-`\fBf\fR',
-and `\fBA\fR'-`\fBF\fR'.
-Octal digits are `\fB0\fR'-`\fB7\fR'.
-.PP
-The character-entry escapes are always taken as ordinary characters.
-For example,
-\fB\e135\fR
-is
-\fB]\fR
-in ASCII,
-but
-\fB\e135\fR
-does not terminate a bracket expression.
-Beware, however, that some applications (e.g., C compilers) interpret
-such sequences themselves before the regular-expression package
-gets to see them, which may require doubling (quadrupling, etc.) the `\fB\e\fR'.
-.PP
-Class-shorthand escapes (AREs only) provide shorthands for certain commonly-used
-character classes:
-.RS 2
-.TP 10
-\fB\ed\fR
-\fB[[:digit:]]\fR
-.TP
-\fB\es\fR
-\fB[[:space:]]\fR
-.TP
-\fB\ew\fR
-\fB[[:alnum:]_]\fR
-(note underscore)
-.TP
-\fB\eD\fR
-\fB[^[:digit:]]\fR
-.TP
-\fB\eS\fR
-\fB[^[:space:]]\fR
-.TP
-\fB\eW\fR
-\fB[^[:alnum:]_]\fR
-(note underscore)
-.RE
-.PP
-Within bracket expressions, `\fB\ed\fR', `\fB\es\fR',
-and `\fB\ew\fR'\&
-lose their outer brackets,
-and `\fB\eD\fR', `\fB\eS\fR',
-and `\fB\eW\fR'\&
-are illegal.
-.VS 8.2
-(So, for example, \fB[a-c\ed]\fR is equivalent to \fB[a-c[:digit:]]\fR.
-Also, \fB[a-c\eD]\fR, which is equivalent to \fB[a-c^[:digit:]]\fR, is illegal.)
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-A constraint escape (AREs only) is a constraint,
-matching the empty string if specific conditions are met,
-written as an escape:
-.RS 2
-.TP 6
-\fB\eA\fR
-matches only at the beginning of the string
-(see MATCHING, below, for how this differs from `\fB^\fR')
-.TP
-\fB\em\fR
-matches only at the beginning of a word
-.TP
-\fB\eM\fR
-matches only at the end of a word
-.TP
-\fB\ey\fR
-matches only at the beginning or end of a word
-.TP
-\fB\eY\fR
-matches only at a point that is not the beginning or end of a word
-.TP
-\fB\eZ\fR
-matches only at the end of the string
-(see MATCHING, below, for how this differs from `\fB$\fR')
-.TP
-\fB\e\fIm\fR
-(where
-\fIm\fR
-is a nonzero digit) a \fIback reference\fR, see below
-.TP
-\fB\e\fImnn\fR
-(where
-\fIm\fR
-is a nonzero digit, and
-\fInn\fR
-is some more digits,
-and the decimal value
-\fImnn\fR
-is not greater than the number of closing capturing parentheses seen so far)
-a \fIback reference\fR, see below
-.RE
-.PP
-A word is defined as in the specification of
-\fB[[:<:]]\fR
-and
-\fB[[:>:]]\fR
-above.
-Constraint escapes are illegal within bracket expressions.
-.PP
-A back reference (AREs only) matches the same string matched by the parenthesized
-subexpression specified by the number,
-so that (e.g.)
-\fB([bc])\e1\fR
-matches
-\fBbb\fR
-or
-\fBcc\fR
-but not `\fBbc\fR'.
-The subexpression must entirely precede the back reference in the RE.
-Subexpressions are numbered in the order of their leading parentheses.
-Non-capturing parentheses do not define subexpressions.
-.PP
-There is an inherent historical ambiguity between octal character-entry
-escapes and back references, which is resolved by heuristics,
-as hinted at above.
-A leading zero always indicates an octal escape.
-A single non-zero digit, not followed by another digit,
-is always taken as a back reference.
-A multi-digit sequence not starting with a zero is taken as a back
-reference if it comes after a suitable subexpression
-(i.e. the number is in the legal range for a back reference),
-and otherwise is taken as octal.
-.SH "METASYNTAX"
-In addition to the main syntax described above, there are some special
-forms and miscellaneous syntactic facilities available.
-.PP
-Normally the flavor of RE being used is specified by
-application-dependent means.
-However, this can be overridden by a \fIdirector\fR.
-If an RE of any flavor begins with `\fB***:\fR',
-the rest of the RE is an ARE.
-If an RE of any flavor begins with `\fB***=\fR',
-the rest of the RE is taken to be a literal string,
-with all characters considered ordinary characters.
-.PP
-An ARE may begin with \fIembedded options\fR:
-a sequence
-\fB(?\fIxyz\fB)\fR
-(where
-\fIxyz\fR
-is one or more alphabetic characters)
-specifies options affecting the rest of the RE.
-These supplement, and can override,
-any options specified by the application.
-The available option letters are:
-.RS 2
-.TP 3
-\fBb\fR
-rest of RE is a BRE
-.TP 3
-\fBc\fR
-case-sensitive matching (usual default)
-.TP 3
-\fBe\fR
-rest of RE is an ERE
-.TP 3
-\fBi\fR
-case-insensitive matching (see MATCHING, below)
-.TP 3
-\fBm\fR
-historical synonym for
-\fBn\fR
-.TP 3
-\fBn\fR
-newline-sensitive matching (see MATCHING, below)
-.TP 3
-\fBp\fR
-partial newline-sensitive matching (see MATCHING, below)
-.TP 3
-\fBq\fR
-rest of RE is a literal (``quoted'') string, all ordinary characters
-.TP 3
-\fBs\fR
-non-newline-sensitive matching (usual default)
-.TP 3
-\fBt\fR
-tight syntax (usual default; see below)
-.TP 3
-\fBw\fR
-inverse partial newline-sensitive (``weird'') matching (see MATCHING, below)
-.TP 3
-\fBx\fR
-expanded syntax (see below)
-.RE
-.PP
-Embedded options take effect at the
-\fB)\fR
-terminating the sequence.
-They are available only at the start of an ARE,
-and may not be used later within it.
-.PP
-In addition to the usual (\fItight\fR) RE syntax, in which all characters are
-significant, there is an \fIexpanded\fR syntax,
-available in all flavors of RE
-with the \fB-expanded\fR switch, or in AREs with the embedded x option.
-In the expanded syntax,
-white-space characters are ignored
-and all characters between a
-\fB#\fR
-and the following newline (or the end of the RE) are ignored,
-permitting paragraphing and commenting a complex RE.
-There are three exceptions to that basic rule:
-.RS 2
-.PP
-a white-space character or `\fB#\fR' preceded by `\fB\e\fR' is retained
-.PP
-white space or `\fB#\fR' within a bracket expression is retained
-.PP
-white space and comments are illegal within multi-character symbols
-like the ARE `\fB(?:\fR' or the BRE `\fB\e(\fR'
-.RE
-.PP
-Expanded-syntax white-space characters are blank, tab, newline, and
-.VS 8.2
-any character that belongs to the \fIspace\fR character class.
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-Finally, in an ARE,
-outside bracket expressions, the sequence `\fB(?#\fIttt\fB)\fR'
-(where
-\fIttt\fR
-is any text not containing a `\fB)\fR')
-is a comment,
-completely ignored.
-Again, this is not allowed between the characters of
-multi-character symbols like `\fB(?:\fR'.
-Such comments are more a historical artifact than a useful facility,
-and their use is deprecated;
-use the expanded syntax instead.
-.PP
-\fINone\fR of these metasyntax extensions is available if the application
-(or an initial
-\fB***=\fR
-director)
-has specified that the user's input be treated as a literal string
-rather than as an RE.
-.SH MATCHING
-In the event that an RE could match more than one substring of a given
-string,
-the RE matches the one starting earliest in the string.
-If the RE could match more than one substring starting at that point,
-its choice is determined by its \fIpreference\fR:
-either the longest substring, or the shortest.
-.PP
-Most atoms, and all constraints, have no preference.
-A parenthesized RE has the same preference (possibly none) as the RE.
-A quantified atom with quantifier
-\fB{\fIm\fB}\fR
-or
-\fB{\fIm\fB}?\fR
-has the same preference (possibly none) as the atom itself.
-A quantified atom with other normal quantifiers (including
-\fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}\fR
-with
-\fIm\fR
-equal to
-\fIn\fR)
-prefers longest match.
-A quantified atom with other non-greedy quantifiers (including
-\fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}?\fR
-with
-\fIm\fR
-equal to
-\fIn\fR)
-prefers shortest match.
-A branch has the same preference as the first quantified atom in it
-which has a preference.
-An RE consisting of two or more branches connected by the
-\fB|\fR
-operator prefers longest match.
-.PP
-Subject to the constraints imposed by the rules for matching the whole RE,
-subexpressions also match the longest or shortest possible substrings,
-based on their preferences,
-with subexpressions starting earlier in the RE taking priority over
-ones starting later.
-Note that outer subexpressions thus take priority over
-their component subexpressions.
-.PP
-Note that the quantifiers
-\fB{1,1}\fR
-and
-\fB{1,1}?\fR
-can be used to force longest and shortest preference, respectively,
-on a subexpression or a whole RE.
-.PP
-Match lengths are measured in characters, not collating elements.
-An empty string is considered longer than no match at all.
-For example,
-\fBbb*\fR
-matches the three middle characters of `\fBabbbc\fR',
-\fB(week|wee)(night|knights)\fR
-matches all ten characters of `\fBweeknights\fR',
-when
-\fB(.*).*\fR
-is matched against
-\fBabc\fR
-the parenthesized subexpression
-matches all three characters, and
-when
-\fB(a*)*\fR
-is matched against
-\fBbc\fR
-both the whole RE and the parenthesized
-subexpression match an empty string.
-.PP
-If case-independent matching is specified,
-the effect is much as if all case distinctions had vanished from the
-alphabet.
-When an alphabetic that exists in multiple cases appears as an
-ordinary character outside a bracket expression, it is effectively
-transformed into a bracket expression containing both cases,
-so that
-\fBx\fR
-becomes `\fB[xX]\fR'.
-When it appears inside a bracket expression, all case counterparts
-of it are added to the bracket expression, so that
-\fB[x]\fR
-becomes
-\fB[xX]\fR
-and
-\fB[^x]\fR
-becomes `\fB[^xX]\fR'.
-.PP
-If newline-sensitive matching is specified, \fB.\fR
-and bracket expressions using
-\fB^\fR
-will never match the newline character
-(so that matches will never cross newlines unless the RE
-explicitly arranges it)
-and
-\fB^\fR
-and
-\fB$\fR
-will match the empty string after and before a newline
-respectively, in addition to matching at beginning and end of string
-respectively.
-ARE
-\fB\eA\fR
-and
-\fB\eZ\fR
-continue to match beginning or end of string \fIonly\fR.
-.PP
-If partial newline-sensitive matching is specified,
-this affects \fB.\fR
-and bracket expressions
-as with newline-sensitive matching, but not
-\fB^\fR
-and `\fB$\fR'.
-.PP
-If inverse partial newline-sensitive matching is specified,
-this affects
-\fB^\fR
-and
-\fB$\fR
-as with
-newline-sensitive matching,
-but not \fB.\fR
-and bracket expressions.
-This isn't very useful but is provided for symmetry.
-.SH "LIMITS AND COMPATIBILITY"
-No particular limit is imposed on the length of REs.
-Programs intended to be highly portable should not employ REs longer
-than 256 bytes,
-as a POSIX-compliant implementation can refuse to accept such REs.
-.PP
-The only feature of AREs that is actually incompatible with
-POSIX EREs is that
-\fB\e\fR
-does not lose its special
-significance inside bracket expressions.
-All other ARE features use syntax which is illegal or has
-undefined or unspecified effects in POSIX EREs;
-the
-\fB***\fR
-syntax of directors likewise is outside the POSIX
-syntax for both BREs and EREs.
-.PP
-Many of the ARE extensions are borrowed from Perl, but some have
-been changed to clean them up, and a few Perl extensions are not present.
-Incompatibilities of note include `\fB\eb\fR', `\fB\eB\fR',
-the lack of special treatment for a trailing newline,
-the addition of complemented bracket expressions to the things
-affected by newline-sensitive matching,
-the restrictions on parentheses and back references in lookahead constraints,
-and the longest/shortest-match (rather than first-match) matching semantics.
-.PP
-The matching rules for REs containing both normal and non-greedy quantifiers
-have changed since early beta-test versions of this package.
-(The new rules are much simpler and cleaner,
-but don't work as hard at guessing the user's real intentions.)
-.PP
-Henry Spencer's original 1986 \fIregexp\fR package,
-still in widespread use (e.g., in pre-8.1 releases of Tcl),
-implemented an early version of today's EREs.
-There are four incompatibilities between \fIregexp\fR's near-EREs
-(`RREs' for short) and AREs.
-In roughly increasing order of significance:
-.PP
-.RS
-In AREs,
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character is either an
-escape or an error,
-while in RREs, it was just another way of writing the
-alphanumeric.
-This should not be a problem because there was no reason to write
-such a sequence in RREs.
-.PP
-\fB{\fR
-followed by a digit in an ARE is the beginning of a bound,
-while in RREs,
-\fB{\fR
-was always an ordinary character.
-Such sequences should be rare,
-and will often result in an error because following characters
-will not look like a valid bound.
-.PP
-In AREs,
-\fB\e\fR
-remains a special character within `\fB[\|]\fR',
-so a literal
-\fB\e\fR
-within
-\fB[\|]\fR
-must be written `\fB\e\e\fR'.
-\fB\e\e\fR
-also gives a literal
-\fB\e\fR
-within
-\fB[\|]\fR
-in RREs,
-but only truly paranoid programmers routinely doubled the backslash.
-.PP
-AREs report the longest/shortest match for the RE,
-rather than the first found in a specified search order.
-This may affect some RREs which were written in the expectation that
-the first match would be reported.
-(The careful crafting of RREs to optimize the search order for fast
-matching is obsolete (AREs examine all possible matches
-in parallel, and their performance is largely insensitive to their
-complexity) but cases where the search order was exploited to deliberately
-find a match which was \fInot\fR the longest/shortest will need rewriting.)
-.RE
-
-.SH "BASIC REGULAR EXPRESSIONS"
-BREs differ from EREs in several respects. `\fB|\fR', `\fB+\fR',
-and
-\fB?\fR
-are ordinary characters and there is no equivalent
-for their functionality.
-The delimiters for bounds are
-\fB\e{\fR
-and `\fB\e}\fR',
-with
-\fB{\fR
-and
-\fB}\fR
-by themselves ordinary characters.
-The parentheses for nested subexpressions are
-\fB\e(\fR
-and `\fB\e)\fR',
-with
-\fB(\fR
-and
-\fB)\fR
-by themselves ordinary characters.
-\fB^\fR
-is an ordinary character except at the beginning of the
-RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression,
-\fB$\fR
-is an ordinary character except at the end of the
-RE or the end of a parenthesized subexpression,
-and
-\fB*\fR
-is an ordinary character if it appears at the beginning of the
-RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression
-(after a possible leading `\fB^\fR').
-Finally,
-single-digit back references are available,
-and
-\fB\e<\fR
-and
-\fB\e>\fR
-are synonyms for
-\fB[[:<:]]\fR
-and
-\fB[[:>:]]\fR
-respectively;
-no other escapes are available.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-RegExp(3), regexp(n), regsub(n), lsearch(n), switch(n), text(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-match, regular expression, string
diff --git a/raw/mann/read.n b/raw/mann/read.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 972d7ae..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/read.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,293 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: read.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: read.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH read n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-read \- Read from a channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBread \fR?\fB\-nonewline\fR? \fIchannelId\fR
-.sp
-\fBread \fIchannelId numChars\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-In the first form, the \fBread\fR command reads all of the data from
-\fIchannelId\fR up to the end of the file.
-If the \fB\-nonewline\fR switch is specified then the last character
-of the file is discarded if it is a newline.
-.VS 8.1
-In the second form, the extra argument specifies how many characters to
-read. Exactly that many characters will be read and returned, unless
-there are fewer than \fInumChars\fR left in the file; in this case
-all the remaining characters are returned. If the channel is
-configured to use a multi-byte encoding, then the number of characters
-read may not be the same as the number of bytes read.
-.PP
-If \fIchannelId\fR is in nonblocking mode, the command may not read as
-many characters as requested: once all available input has been read,
-the command will return the data that is available rather than
-blocking for more input. If the channel is configured to use a
-multi-byte encoding, then there may actually be some bytes remaining
-in the internal buffers that do not form a complete character. These
-bytes will not be returned until a complete character is available or
-end-of-file is reached.
-.VE 8.1
-The \fB\-nonewline\fR switch is ignored if the command returns
-before reaching the end of the file.
-.PP
-\fBRead\fR translates end-of-line sequences in the input into
-newline characters according to the \fB\-translation\fR option
-for the channel.
-See the \fBfconfigure\fR manual entry for a discussion on ways in
-which \fBfconfigure\fR will alter input.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), eof(n), fblocked(n), fconfigure(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-blocking, channel, end of line, end of file, nonblocking, read, translation, encoding
diff --git a/raw/mann/regexp.n b/raw/mann/regexp.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 1d845a2..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/regexp.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,368 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: regexp.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: regexp.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH regexp n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-regexp \- Match a regular expression against a string
-
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBregexp \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIexp string \fR?\fImatchVar\fR? ?\fIsubMatchVar subMatchVar ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Determines whether the regular expression \fIexp\fR matches part or
-all of \fIstring\fR and returns 1 if it does, 0 if it doesn't, unless
-\fB-inline\fR is specified (see below).
-(Regular expression matching is described in the \fBre_syntax\fR
-reference page.)
-.LP
-If additional arguments are specified after \fIstring\fR then they
-are treated as the names of variables in which to return
-information about which part(s) of \fIstring\fR matched \fIexp\fR.
-\fIMatchVar\fR will be set to the range of \fIstring\fR that
-matched all of \fIexp\fR. The first \fIsubMatchVar\fR will contain
-the characters in \fIstring\fR that matched the leftmost parenthesized
-subexpression within \fIexp\fR, the next \fIsubMatchVar\fR will
-contain the characters that matched the next parenthesized
-subexpression to the right in \fIexp\fR, and so on.
-.PP
-If the initial arguments to \fBregexp\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
-they are treated as switches. The following switches are
-currently supported:
-.TP 15
-\fB\-about\fR
-Instead of attempting to match the regular expression, returns a list
-containing information about the regular expression. The first
-element of the list is a subexpression count. The second element is a
-list of property names that describe various attributes of the regular
-expression. This switch is primarily intended for debugging purposes.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-expanded\fR
-Enables use of the expanded regular expression syntax where
-whitespace and comments are ignored. This is the same as specifying
-the \fB(?x)\fR embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 15
-\fB\-indices\fR
-Changes what is stored in the \fIsubMatchVar\fRs.
-Instead of storing the matching characters from \fIstring\fR,
-each variable
-will contain a list of two decimal strings giving the indices
-in \fIstring\fR of the first and last characters in the matching
-range of characters.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-line\fR
-Enables newline-sensitive matching. By default, newline is a
-completely ordinary character with no special meaning. With this
-flag, `[^' bracket expressions and `.' never match newline, `^'
-matches an empty string after any newline in addition to its normal
-function, and `$' matches an empty string before any newline in
-addition to its normal function. This flag is equivalent to
-specifying both \fB\-linestop\fR and \fB\-lineanchor\fR, or the
-\fB(?n)\fR embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 15
-\fB\-linestop\fR
-Changes the behavior of `[^' bracket expressions and `.' so that they
-stop at newlines. This is the same as specifying the \fB(?p)\fR
-embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 15
-\fB\-lineanchor\fR
-Changes the behavior of `^' and `$' (the ``anchors'') so they match the
-beginning and end of a line respectively. This is the same as
-specifying the \fB(?w)\fR embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 15
-\fB\-nocase\fR
-Causes upper-case characters in \fIstring\fR to be treated as
-lower case during the matching process.
-.VS 8.3
-.TP 15
-\fB\-all\fR
-Causes the regular expression to be matched as many times as possible
-in the string, returning the total number of matches found. If this
-is specified with match variables, they will continue information for
-the last match only.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-inline\fR
-Causes the command to return, as a list, the data that would otherwise
-be placed in match variables. When using \fB-inline\fR,
-match variables may not be specified. If used with \fB-all\fR, the
-list will be concatenated at each iteration, such that a flat list is
-always returned. For each match iteration, the command will append the
-overall match data, plus one element for each subexpression in the
-regular expression. Examples are:
-.CS
- regexp -inline -- {\\w(\\w)} " inlined "
- => {in n}
- regexp -all -inline -- {\\w(\\w)} " inlined "
- => {in n li i ne e}
-.CE
-.TP 15
-\fB\-start\fR \fIindex\fR
-Specifies a character index offset into the string to start
-matching the regular expression at. When using this switch, `^'
-will not match the beginning of the line, and \\A will still
-match the start of the string at \fIindex\fR. If \fB\-indices\fR
-is specified, the indices will be indexed starting from the
-absolute beginning of the input string.
-\fIindex\fR will be constrained to the bounds of the input string.
-.VE 8.3
-.TP 15
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-Marks the end of switches. The argument following this one will
-be treated as \fIexp\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.PP
-If there are more \fIsubMatchVar\fR's than parenthesized
-subexpressions within \fIexp\fR, or if a particular subexpression
-in \fIexp\fR doesn't match the string (e.g. because it was in a
-portion of the expression that wasn't matched), then the corresponding
-\fIsubMatchVar\fR will be set to ``\fB\-1 \-1\fR'' if \fB\-indices\fR
-has been specified or to an empty string otherwise.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-re_syntax(n), regsub(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-match, regular expression, string
diff --git a/raw/mann/registry.n b/raw/mann/registry.n
deleted file mode 100644
index a6a3d78..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/registry.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,403 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: registry.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: registry.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH registry n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-registry \- Manipulate the Windows registry
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBpackage require registry 1.0\fR
-.sp
-\fBregistry \fIoption\fR \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBregistry\fR package provides a general set of operations for
-manipulating the Windows registry. The package implements the
-\fBregistry\fR Tcl command. This command is only supported on the
-Windows platform. Warning: this command should be used with caution
-as a corrupted registry can leave your system in an unusable state.
-.PP
-\fIKeyName\fR is the name of a registry key. Registry keys must be
-one of the following forms:
-.IP
-\fB\e\e\fIhostname\fB\e\fIrootname\fB\e\fIkeypath\fR
-.IP
-\fIrootname\fB\e\fIkeypath\fR
-.IP
-\fIrootname\fR
-.PP
-\fIHostname\fR specifies the name of any valid Windows
-host that exports its registry. The \fIrootname\fR component must be
-one of \fBHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\fR, \fBHKEY_USERS\fR,
-.VS
-\fBHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\fR, \fBHKEY_CURRENT_USER\fR,
-\fBHKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG\fR, \fBHKEY_PERFORMANCE_DATA\fR, or
-\fBHKEY_DYN_DATA\fR. The \fIkeypath\fR can be one or more
-.VE
-registry key names separated by backslash (\fB\e\fR) characters.
-.PP
-\fIOption\fR indicates what to do with the registry key name. Any
-unique abbreviation for \fIoption\fR is acceptable. The valid options
-are:
-.TP
-\fBregistry delete \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIvalueName\fR?
-.
-If the optional \fIvalueName\fR argument is present, the specified
-value under \fIkeyName\fR will be deleted from the registry. If the
-optional \fIvalueName\fR is omitted, the specified key and any subkeys
-or values beneath it in the registry hierarchy will be deleted. If
-the key could not be deleted then an error is generated. If the key
-did not exist, the command has no effect.
-.TP
-\fBregistry get \fIkeyName valueName\fR
-.
-Returns the data associated with the value \fIvalueName\fR under the key
-\fIkeyName\fR. If either the key or the value does not exist, then an
-error is generated. For more details on the format of the returned
-data, see SUPPORTED TYPES, below.
-.TP
-\fBregistry keys \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-.
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of names of all the
-subkeys of \fIkeyName\fR. If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those
-names matching \fIpattern\fR are returned. Matching is determined
-using the same rules as for \fBstring\fR \fBmatch\fR. If the
-specified \fIkeyName\fR does not exist, then an error is generated.
-.TP
-\fBregistry set \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIvalueName data \fR?\fItype\fR??
-.
-If \fIvalueName\fR isn't specified, creates the key \fIkeyName\fR if
-it doesn't already exist. If \fIvalueName\fR is specified, creates
-the key \fIkeyName\fR and value \fIvalueName\fR if necessary. The
-contents of \fIvalueName\fR are set to \fIdata\fR with the type
-indicated by \fItype\fR. If \fItype\fR isn't specified, the type
-\fBsz\fR is assumed. For more details on the data and type arguments,
-see SUPPORTED TYPES below.
-.TP
-\fBregistry type \fIkeyName valueName\fR
-.
-Returns the type of the value \fIvalueName\fR in the key
-\fIkeyName\fR. For more information on the possible types, see
-SUPPORTED TYPES, below.
-.TP
-\fBregistry values \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-.
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of names of all the
-values of \fIkeyName\fR. If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those
-names matching \fIpattern\fR are returned. Matching is determined
-using the same rules as for \fBstring\fR \fBmatch\fR.
-
-.SH "SUPPORTED TYPES"
-Each value under a key in the registry contains some data of a
-particular type in a type-specific representation. The \fBregistry\fR
-command converts between this internal representation and one that can
-be manipulated by Tcl scripts. In most cases, the data is simply
-returned as a Tcl string. The type indicates the intended use for the
-data, but does not actually change the representation. For some
-types, the \fBregistry\fR command returns the data in a different form to
-make it easier to manipulate. The following types are recognized by the
-registry command:
-.TP 17
-\fBbinary\fR
-.
-The registry value contains arbitrary binary data. The data is represented
-exactly in Tcl, including any embedded nulls.
-.TP
-\fBnone\fR
-.
-The registry value contains arbitrary binary data with no defined
-type. The data is represented exactly in Tcl, including any embedded
-nulls.
-.TP
-\fBsz\fR
-.
-The registry value contains a null-terminated string. The data is
-represented in Tcl as a string.
-.TP
-\fBexpand_sz\fR
-.
-The registry value contains a null-terminated string that contains
-unexpanded references to environment variables in the normal Windows
-style (for example, "%PATH%"). The data is represented in Tcl as a
-string.
-.TP
-\fBdword\fR
-.
-The registry value contains a little-endian 32-bit number. The data is
-represented in Tcl as a decimal string.
-.TP
-\fBdword_big_endian\fR
-.
-The registry value contains a big-endian 32-bit number. The data is
-represented in Tcl as a decimal string.
-.TP
-\fBlink\fR
-.
-The registry value contains a symbolic link. The data is represented
-exactly in Tcl, including any embedded nulls.
-.TP
-\fBmulti_sz\fR
-.
-The registry value contains an array of null-terminated strings. The
-data is represented in Tcl as a list of strings.
-.TP
-\fBresource_list\fR
-.
-The registry value contains a device-driver resource list. The data
-is represented exactly in Tcl, including any embedded nulls.
-.PP
-In addition to the symbolically named types listed above, unknown
-types are identified using a 32-bit integer that corresponds to the
-type code returned by the system interfaces. In this case, the data
-is represented exactly in Tcl, including any embedded nulls.
-
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-The registry command is only available on Windows.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-registry
diff --git a/raw/mann/regsub.n b/raw/mann/regsub.n
deleted file mode 100644
index b1ce495..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/regsub.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,347 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Scriptics Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: regsub.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: regsub.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH regsub n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-regsub \- Perform substitutions based on regular expression pattern matching
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBregsub \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIexp string subSpec varName\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command matches the regular expression \fIexp\fR against
-\fIstring\fR,
-and it copies \fIstring\fR to the variable whose name is
-given by \fIvarName\fR.
-(Regular expression matching is described in the \fBre_syntax\fR
-reference page.)
-If there is a match, then while copying \fIstring\fR to \fIvarName\fR
-the portion of \fIstring\fR that
-matched \fIexp\fR is replaced with \fIsubSpec\fR.
-If \fIsubSpec\fR contains a ``&'' or ``\e0'', then it is replaced
-in the substitution with the portion of \fIstring\fR that
-matched \fIexp\fR.
-If \fIsubSpec\fR contains a ``\e\fIn\fR'', where \fIn\fR is a digit
-between 1 and 9, then it is replaced in the substitution with
-the portion of \fIstring\fR that matched the \fIn\fR-th
-parenthesized subexpression of \fIexp\fR.
-Additional backslashes may be used in \fIsubSpec\fR to prevent special
-interpretation of ``&'' or ``\e0'' or ``\e\fIn\fR'' or
-backslash.
-The use of backslashes in \fIsubSpec\fR tends to interact badly
-with the Tcl parser's use of backslashes, so it's generally
-safest to enclose \fIsubSpec\fR in braces if it includes
-backslashes.
-.LP
-If the initial arguments to \fBregexp\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
-they are treated as switches. The following switches are
-currently supported:
-.TP 10
-\fB\-all\fR
-All ranges in \fIstring\fR that match \fIexp\fR are found and
-substitution is performed for each of these ranges.
-Without this switch only the first
-matching range is found and substituted.
-If \fB\-all\fR is specified, then ``&'' and ``\e\fIn\fR''
-sequences are handled for each substitution using the information
-from the corresponding match.
-.TP 15
-\fB\-expanded\fR
-Enables use of the expanded regular expression syntax where
-whitespace and comments are ignored. This is the same as specifying
-the \fB(?x)\fR embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 15
-\fB\-line\fR
-Enables newline-sensitive matching. By default, newline is a
-completely ordinary character with no special meaning. With this
-flag, `[^' bracket expressions and `.' never match newline, `^'
-matches an empty string after any newline in addition to its normal
-function, and `$' matches an empty string before any newline in
-addition to its normal function. This flag is equivalent to
-specifying both \fB\-linestop\fR and \fB\-lineanchor\fR, or the
-\fB(?n)\fR embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 15
-\fB\-linestop\fR
-Changes the behavior of `[^' bracket expressions and `.' so that they
-stop at newlines. This is the same as specifying the \fB(?p)\fR
-embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 15
-\fB\-lineanchor\fR
-Changes the behavior of `^' and `$' (the ``anchors'') so they match the
-beginning and end of a line respectively. This is the same as
-specifying the \fB(?w)\fR embedded option (see METASYNTAX, below).
-.TP 10
-\fB\-nocase\fR
-Upper-case characters in \fIstring\fR will be converted to lower-case
-before matching against \fIexp\fR; however, substitutions specified
-by \fIsubSpec\fR use the original unconverted form of \fIstring\fR.
-.VS 8.3
-.TP 10
-\fB\-start\fR \fIindex\fR
-Specifies a character index offset into the string to start
-matching the regular expression at. When using this switch, `^'
-will not match the beginning of the line, and \\A will still
-match the start of the string at \fIindex\fR.
-\fIindex\fR will be constrained to the bounds of the input string.
-.VE 8.3
-.TP 10
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-Marks the end of switches. The argument following this one will
-be treated as \fIexp\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.PP
-The command returns a count of the number of matching ranges that
-were found and replaced.
-See the manual entry for \fBregexp\fR for details on the interpretation
-of regular expressions.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-regexp(n), re_syntax(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-match, pattern, regular expression, substitute
diff --git a/raw/mann/rename.n b/raw/mann/rename.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 92c7796..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/rename.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,270 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: rename.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: rename.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH rename n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-rename \- Rename or delete a command
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBrename \fIoldName newName\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Rename the command that used to be called \fIoldName\fR so that it
-is now called \fInewName\fR.
-If \fInewName\fR is an empty string then \fIoldName\fR is deleted.
-\fIoldName\fR and \fInewName\fR may include namespace qualifiers
-(names of containing namespaces).
-If a command is renamed into a different namespace,
-future invocations of it will execute in the new namespace.
-The \fBrename\fR command returns an empty string as result.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-namespace(n), proc(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-command, delete, namespace, rename
diff --git a/raw/mann/resource.n b/raw/mann/resource.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c6f407c..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/resource.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,390 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: resource.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: resource.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH resource n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-resource \- Manipulate Macintosh resources
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBresource \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBresource\fR command provides some generic operations for
-dealing with Macintosh resources. This command is only supported on
-the Macintosh platform. Each Macintosh file consists of two
-\fIforks\fR: a \fIdata\fR fork and a \fIresource\fR fork. You use the
-normal open, puts, close, etc. commands to manipulate the data fork.
-You must use this command, however, to interact with the resource
-fork. \fIOption\fR indicates what resource command to perform. Any
-unique abbreviation for \fIoption\fR is acceptable. The valid options
-are:
-.TP
-\fBresource close \fIrsrcRef\fR
-Closes the given resource reference (obtained from \fBresource
-open\fR). Resources from that resource file will no longer be
-available.
-.TP
-\fBresource delete\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIresourceType\fR
-This command will delete the resource specified by \fIoptions\fR and
-type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE TYPES below). The options
-give you several ways to specify the resource to be deleted.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-id\fR \fIresourceId\fR
-If the \fB-id\fR option is given the id \fIresourceId\fR (see RESOURCE
-IDS below) is used to specify the resource to be deleted. The id must
-be a number - to specify a name use the \fB\-name\fR option.
-.TP
-\fB\-name\fR \fIresourceName\fR
-If \fB-name\fR is specified, the resource named
-\fIresourceName\fR will be deleted. If the \fB-id\fR is also
-provided, then there must be a resource with BOTH this name and
-this id. If no name is provided, then the id will be used regardless
-of the name of the actual resource.
-.TP
-\fB\-file\fR \fIresourceRef\fR
-If the \fB-file\fR option is specified then the resource will be
-deleted from the file pointed to by \fIresourceRef\fR. Otherwise the
-first resource with the given \fIresourceName\fR and or
-\fIresourceId\fR which is found on the resource file path will be
-deleted. To inspect the file path, use the \fIresource files\fR command.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBresource files ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-If \fIresourceRef\fRis not provided, this command returns a Tcl list
-of the resource references for all the currently open resource files.
-The list is in the normal Macintosh search order for resources. If
-\fIresourceRef\fR is specified, the command will
-return the path to the file whose resource fork is represented by that
-token.
-.TP
-\fBresource list \fIresourceType\fR ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-List all of the resources ids of type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE
-TYPES below). If \fIresourceRef\fR is specified then the command will
-limit the search to that particular resource file. Otherwise, all
-resource files currently opened by the application will be searched.
-A Tcl list of either the resource name's or resource id's of the found
-resources will be returned. See the RESOURCE IDS section below for
-more details about what a resource id is.
-.TP
-\fBresource open \fIfileName\fR ?\fIaccess\fR?
-Open the resource for the file \fIfileName\fR. Standard file access
-permissions may also be specified (see the manual entry for \fBopen\fR
-for details). A resource reference (\fIresourceRef\fR) is returned
-that can be used by the other resource commands. An error can occur
-if the file doesn't exist or the file does not have a resource fork.
-However, if you open the file with write permissions the file and/or
-resource fork will be created instead of generating an error.
-.TP
-\fBresource read \fIresourceType\fR \fIresourceId\fR ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-Read the entire resource of type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE
-TYPES below) and the name or id of \fIresourceId\fR (see RESOURCE IDS
-below) into memory and return the result. If \fIresourceRef\fR is
-specified we limit our search to that resource file, otherwise we
-search all open resource forks in the application. It is important to
-note that most Macintosh resource use a binary format and the data
-returned from this command may have embedded NULLs or other non-ASCII
-data.
-.TP
-\fBresource types ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-This command returns a Tcl list of all resource types (see RESOURCE
-TYPES below) found in the resource file pointed to by
-\fIresourceRef\fR. If \fIresourceRef\fR is not specified it will
-return all the resource types found in every resource file currently
-opened by the application.
-.TP
-\fBresource write\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIresourceType\fR \fIdata\fR
-This command will write the passed in \fIdata\fR as a new resource of
-type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE TYPES below). Several options
-are available that describe where and how the resource is stored.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-id\fR \fIresourceId\fR
-If the \fB-id\fR option is given the id \fIresourceId\fR (see RESOURCE
-IDS below) is used for the new resource, otherwise a unique id will be
-generated that will not conflict with any existing resource. However,
-the id must be a number - to specify a name use the \fB\-name\fR option.
-.TP
-\fB\-name\fR \fIresourceName\fR
-If \fB-name\fR is specified the resource will be named
-\fIresourceName\fR, otherwise it will have the empty string as the
-name.
-.TP
-\fB\-file\fR \fIresourceRef\fR
-If the \fB-file\fR option is specified then the resource will be
-written in the file pointed to by \fIresourceRef\fR, otherwise the
-most resently open resource will be used.
-.TP
-\fB\-force\fR
-If the target resource already exists, then by default Tcl will not
-overwrite it, but raise an error instead. Use the -force flag to
-force overwriting the extant resource.
-.RE
-
-.SH "RESOURCE TYPES"
-Resource types are defined as a four character string that is then
-mapped to an underlying id. For example, \fBTEXT\fR refers to the
-Macintosh resource type for text. The type \fBSTR#\fR is a list of
-counted strings. All Macintosh resources must be of some type. See
-Macintosh documentation for a more complete list of resource types
-that are commonly used.
-
-.SH "RESOURCE IDS"
-For this command the notion of a resource id actually refers to two
-ideas in Macintosh resources. Every place you can use a resource Id
-you can use either the resource name or a resource number. Names are
-always searched or returned in preference to numbers. For example,
-the \fBresource list\fR command will return names if they exist or
-numbers if the name is NULL.
-
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-The resource command is only available on Macintosh.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-open(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-open, resource
diff --git a/raw/mann/return.n b/raw/mann/return.n
deleted file mode 100644
index bb7e5ae..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/return.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,327 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: return.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: return.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH return n 7.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-return \- Return from a procedure
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBreturn \fR?\fB\-code \fIcode\fR? ?\fB\-errorinfo \fIinfo\fR? ?\fB\-errorcode\fI code\fR? ?\fIstring\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Return immediately from the current procedure
-(or top-level command or \fBsource\fR command),
-with \fIstring\fR as the return value. If \fIstring\fR is not specified then
-an empty string will be returned as result.
-
-.SH "EXCEPTIONAL RETURNS"
-.PP
-In the usual case where the \fB\-code\fR option isn't
-specified the procedure will return normally (its completion
-code will be TCL_OK).
-However, the \fB\-code\fR option may be used to generate an
-exceptional return from the procedure.
-\fICode\fR may have any of the following values:
-.TP 10
-\fBok\fR
-Normal return: same as if the option is omitted.
-.TP 10
-\fBerror\fR
-Error return: same as if the \fBerror\fR command were used to
-terminate the procedure, except for handling of \fBerrorInfo\fR
-and \fBerrorCode\fR variables (see below).
-.TP 10
-\fBreturn\fR
-The current procedure will return with a completion code of
-TCL_RETURN, so that the procedure that invoked it will return
-also.
-.TP 10
-\fBbreak\fR
-The current procedure will return with a completion code of
-TCL_BREAK, which will terminate the innermost nested loop in
-the code that invoked the current procedure.
-.TP 10
-\fBcontinue\fR
-The current procedure will return with a completion code of
-TCL_CONTINUE, which will terminate the current iteration of
-the innermost nested loop in the code that invoked the current
-procedure.
-.TP 10
-\fIvalue\fR
-\fIValue\fR must be an integer; it will be returned as the
-completion code for the current procedure.
-.LP
-The \fB\-code\fR option is rarely used.
-It is provided so that procedures that implement
-new control structures can reflect exceptional conditions back to
-their callers.
-.PP
-Two additional options, \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR,
-may be used to provide additional information during error
-returns.
-These options are ignored unless \fIcode\fR is \fBerror\fR.
-.PP
-The \fB\-errorinfo\fR option specifies an initial stack
-trace for the \fBerrorInfo\fR variable; if it is not specified then
-the stack trace left in \fBerrorInfo\fR will include the call to
-the procedure and higher levels on the stack but it will not include
-any information about the context of the error within the procedure.
-Typically the \fIinfo\fR value is supplied from the value left
-in \fBerrorInfo\fR after a \fBcatch\fR command trapped an error within
-the procedure.
-.PP
-If the \fB\-errorcode\fR option is specified then \fIcode\fR provides
-a value for the \fBerrorCode\fR variable.
-If the option is not specified then \fBerrorCode\fR will
-default to \fBNONE\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-break(n), continue(n), error(n), proc(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-break, continue, error, procedure, return
diff --git a/raw/mann/safe.n b/raw/mann/safe.n
deleted file mode 100644
index f839657..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/safe.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,585 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: safe.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: safe.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH "Safe Tcl" n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-Safe\ Base \- A mechanism for creating and manipulating safe interpreters.
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fB::safe::interpCreate\fR ?\fIslave\fR? ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.sp
-\fB::safe::interpInit\fR \fIslave\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.sp
-\fB::safe::interpConfigure\fR \fIslave\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-.sp
-\fB::safe::interpDelete\fR \fIslave\fR
-.sp
-\fB::safe::interpAddToAccessPath\fR \fIslave\fR \fIdirectory\fR
-.sp
-\fB::safe::interpFindInAccessPath\fR \fIslave\fR \fIdirectory\fR
-.sp
-\fB::safe::setLogCmd\fR ?\fIcmd arg...\fR?
-.SH OPTIONS
-.PP
-?\fB\-accessPath\fR \fIpathList\fR?
-?\fB\-statics\fR \fIboolean\fR? ?\fB\-noStatics\fR?
-?\fB\-nested\fR \fIboolean\fR? ?\fB\-nestedLoadOk\fR?
-?\fB\-deleteHook\fR \fIscript\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-Safe Tcl is a mechanism for executing untrusted Tcl scripts
-safely and for providing mediated access by such scripts to
-potentially dangerous functionality.
-.PP
-The Safe Base ensures that untrusted Tcl scripts cannot harm the
-hosting application.
-The Safe Base prevents integrity and privacy attacks. Untrusted Tcl
-scripts are prevented from corrupting the state of the hosting
-application or computer. Untrusted scripts are also prevented from
-disclosing information stored on the hosting computer or in the
-hosting application to any party.
-.PP
-The Safe Base allows a master interpreter to create safe, restricted
-interpreters that contain a set of predefined aliases for the \fBsource\fR,
-\fBload\fR, \fBfile\fR, \fBencoding\fR, and \fBexit\fR commands and
-are able to use the auto-loading and package mechanisms.
-.PP
-No knowledge of the file system structure is leaked to the
-safe interpreter, because it has access only to a virtualized path
-containing tokens. When the safe interpreter requests to source a file, it
-uses the token in the virtual path as part of the file name to source; the
-master interpreter transparently
-translates the token into a real directory name and executes the
-requested operation (see the section \fBSECURITY\fR below for details).
-Different levels of security can be selected by using the optional flags
-of the commands described below.
-.PP
-All commands provided in the master interpreter by the Safe Base reside in
-the \fBsafe\fR namespace:
-
-.SH COMMANDS
-The following commands are provided in the master interpreter:
-.TP
-\fB::safe::interpCreate\fR ?\fIslave\fR? ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-Creates a safe interpreter, installs the aliases described in the section
-\fBALIASES\fR and initializes the auto-loading and package mechanism as
-specified by the supplied \fBoptions\fR.
-See the \fBOPTIONS\fR section below for a description of the
-optional arguments.
-If the \fIslave\fR argument is omitted, a name will be generated.
-\fB::safe::interpCreate\fR always returns the interpreter name.
-.TP
-\fB::safe::interpInit\fR \fIslave\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-This command is similar to \fBinterpCreate\fR except it that does not
-create the safe interpreter. \fIslave\fR must have been created by some
-other means, like \fBinterp create \-safe\fR.
-.TP
-\fB::safe::interpConfigure\fR \fIslave\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR?
-If no \fIoptions\fR are given, returns the settings for all options for the
-named safe interpreter as a list of options and their current values
-for that \fIslave\fR.
-If a single additional argument is provided,
-it will return a list of 2 elements \fIname\fR and \fIvalue\fR where
-\fIname\fR is the full name of that option and \fIvalue\fR the current value
-for that option and the \fIslave\fR.
-If more than two additional arguments are provided, it will reconfigure the
-safe interpreter and change each and only the provided options.
-See the section on \fBOPTIONS\fR below for options description.
-Example of use:
-.RS
-.CS
-# Create a new interp with the same configuration as "$i0" :
-set i1 [eval safe::interpCreate [safe::interpConfigure $i0]]
-# Get the current deleteHook
-set dh [safe::interpConfigure $i0 \-del]
-# Change (only) the statics loading ok attribute of an interp
-# and its deleteHook (leaving the rest unchanged) :
-safe::interpConfigure $i0 \-delete {foo bar} \-statics 0 ;
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::safe::interpDelete\fR \fIslave\fR
-Deletes the safe interpreter and cleans up the corresponding
-master interpreter data structures.
-If a \fIdeleteHook\fR script was specified for this interpreter it is
-evaluated before the interpreter is deleted, with the name of the
-interpreter as an additional argument.
-.TP
-\fB::safe::interpFindInAccessPath\fR \fIslave\fR \fIdirectory\fR
-This command finds and returns the token for the real directory
-\fIdirectory\fR in the safe interpreter's current virtual access path.
-It generates an error if the directory is not found.
-Example of use:
-.RS
-.CS
-$slave eval [list set tk_library [::safe::interpFindInAccessPath $name $tk_library]]
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::safe::interpAddToAccessPath\fR \fIslave\fR \fIdirectory\fR
-This command adds \fIdirectory\fR to the virtual path maintained for the
-safe interpreter in the master, and returns the token that can be used in
-the safe interpreter to obtain access to files in that directory.
-If the directory is already in the virtual path, it only returns the token
-without adding the directory to the virtual path again.
-Example of use:
-.RS
-.CS
-$slave eval [list set tk_library [::safe::interpAddToAccessPath $name $tk_library]]
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fB::safe::setLogCmd\fR ?\fIcmd arg...\fR?
-This command installs a script that will be called when interesting
-life cycle events occur for a safe interpreter.
-When called with no arguments, it returns the currently installed script.
-When called with one argument, an empty string, the currently installed
-script is removed and logging is turned off.
-The script will be invoked with one additional argument, a string
-describing the event of interest.
-The main purpose is to help in debugging safe interpreters.
-Using this facility you can get complete error messages while the safe
-interpreter gets only generic error messages.
-This prevents a safe interpreter from seeing messages about failures
-and other events that might contain sensitive information such as real
-directory names.
-.RS
-Example of use:
-.CS
-::safe::setLogCmd puts stderr
-.CE
-Below is the output of a sample session in which a safe interpreter
-attempted to source a file not found in its virtual access path.
-Note that the safe interpreter only received an error message saying that
-the file was not found:
-.CS
-NOTICE for slave interp10 : Created
-NOTICE for slave interp10 : Setting accessPath=(/foo/bar) staticsok=1 nestedok=0 deletehook=()
-NOTICE for slave interp10 : auto_path in interp10 has been set to {$p(:0:)}
-ERROR for slave interp10 : /foo/bar/init.tcl: no such file or directory
-.CE
-.RE
-
-.SH OPTIONS
-The following options are common to
-\fB::safe::interpCreate\fR, \fB::safe::interpInit\fR,
-and \fB::safe::interpConfigure\fR.
-Any option name can be abbreviated to its minimal
-non-ambiguous name.
-Option names are not case sensitive.
-.TP
-\fB\-accessPath\fR \fIdirectoryList\fR
-This option sets the list of directories from which the safe interpreter
-can \fBsource\fR and \fBload\fR files.
-If this option is not specified, or if it is given as the
-empty list, the safe interpreter will use the same directories as its
-master for auto-loading.
-See the section \fBSECURITY\fR below for more detail about virtual paths,
-tokens and access control.
-.TP
-\fB\-statics\fR \fIboolean\fR
-This option specifies if the safe interpreter will be allowed
-to load statically linked packages (like \fBload {} Tk\fR).
-The default value is \fBtrue\fR :
-safe interpreters are allowed to load statically linked packages.
-.TP
-\fB\-noStatics\fR
-This option is a convenience shortcut for \fB-statics false\fR and
-thus specifies that the safe interpreter will not be allowed
-to load statically linked packages.
-.TP
-\fB\-nested\fR \fIboolean\fR
-This option specifies if the safe interpreter will be allowed
-to load packages into its own sub-interpreters.
-The default value is \fBfalse\fR :
-safe interpreters are not allowed to load packages into
-their own sub-interpreters.
-.TP
-\fB\-nestedLoadOk\fR
-This option is a convenience shortcut for \fB-nested true\fR and
-thus specifies the safe interpreter will be allowed
-to load packages into its own sub-interpreters.
-.TP
-\fB\-deleteHook\fR \fIscript\fR
-When this option is given an non empty \fIscript\fR, it will be
-evaluated in the master with the name of
-the safe interpreter as an additional argument
-just before actually deleting the safe interpreter.
-Giving an empty value removes any currently installed deletion hook
-script for that safe interpreter.
-The default value (\fB{}\fR) is not to have any deletion call back.
-.SH ALIASES
-The following aliases are provided in a safe interpreter:
-.TP
-\fBsource\fR \fIfileName\fR
-The requested file, a Tcl source file, is sourced into the safe interpreter
-if it is found.
-The \fBsource\fR alias can only source files from directories in
-the virtual path for the safe interpreter. The \fBsource\fR alias requires
-the safe interpreter to
-use one of the token names in its virtual path to denote the directory in
-which the file to be sourced can be found.
-See the section on \fBSECURITY\fR for more discussion of restrictions on
-valid filenames.
-.TP
-\fBload\fR \fIfileName\fR
-The requested file, a shared object file, is dynamically loaded into the
-safe interpreter if it is found.
-The filename must contain a token name mentioned in the virtual path for
-the safe interpreter for it to be found successfully.
-Additionally, the shared object file must contain a safe entry point; see
-the manual page for the \fBload\fR command for more details.
-.TP
-\fBfile\fR ?\fIsubCmd args...\fR?
-The \fBfile\fR alias provides access to a safe subset of the subcommands of
-the \fBfile\fR command; it allows only \fBdirname\fR, \fBjoin\fR,
-\fBextension\fR, \fBroot\fR, \fBtail\fR, \fBpathname\fR and \fBsplit\fR
-subcommands. For more details on what these subcommands do see the manual
-page for the \fBfile\fR command.
-.TP
-\fBencoding\fR ?\fIsubCmd args...\fR?
-The \fBenconding\fR alias provides access to a safe subset of the
-subcommands of the \fBencoding\fR command; it disallows setting of
-the system encoding, but allows all other subcommands including
-\fBsystem\fR to check the current encoding.
-.TP
-\fBexit\fR
-The calling interpreter is deleted and its computation is stopped, but the
-Tcl process in which this interpreter exists is not terminated.
-
-.SH SECURITY
-The Safe Base does not attempt to completely prevent annoyance and
-denial of service attacks. These forms of attack prevent the
-application or user from temporarily using the computer to perform
-useful work, for example by consuming all available CPU time or
-all available screen real estate.
-These attacks, while aggravating, are deemed to be of lesser importance
-in general than integrity and privacy attacks that the Safe Base
-is to prevent.
-.PP
-The commands available in a safe interpreter, in addition to
-the safe set as defined in \fBinterp\fR manual page, are mediated aliases
-for \fBsource\fR, \fBload\fR, \fBexit\fR, and safe subsets of
-\fBfile\fR and \fBencoding\fR. The safe interpreter can also auto-load
-code and it can request that packages be loaded.
-.PP
-Because some of these commands access the local file system, there is a
-potential for information leakage about its directory structure.
-To prevent this, commands that take file names as arguments in a safe
-interpreter use tokens instead of the real directory names.
-These tokens are translated to the real directory name while a request to,
-e.g., source a file is mediated by the master interpreter.
-This virtual path system is maintained in the master interpreter for each safe
-interpreter created by \fB::safe::interpCreate\fR or initialized by
-\fB::safe::interpInit\fR and
-the path maps tokens accessible in the safe interpreter into real path
-names on the local file system thus preventing safe interpreters
-from gaining knowledge about the
-structure of the file system of the host on which the interpreter is
-executing.
-The only valid file names arguments
-for the \fBsource\fR and \fBload\fR aliases provided to the slave
-are path in the form of
-\fB[file join \fR\fItoken filename\fR\fB]\fR (ie, when using the
-native file path formats: \fItoken\fR\fB/\fR\fIfilename\fR
-on Unix, \fItoken\fR\fB\\\fIfilename\fR on Windows,
-and \fItoken\fR\fB:\fR\fIfilename\fR on the Mac),
-where \fItoken\fR is representing one of the directories
-of the \fIaccessPath\fR list and \fIfilename\fR is
-one file in that directory (no sub directories access are allowed).
-.PP
-When a token is used in a safe interpreter in a request to source or
-load a file, the token is checked and
-translated to a real path name and the file to be
-sourced or loaded is located on the file system.
-The safe interpreter never gains knowledge of the actual path name under
-which the file is stored on the file system.
-.PP
-To further prevent potential information leakage from sensitive files that
-are accidentally included in the set of files that can be sourced by a safe
-interpreter, the \fBsource\fR alias restricts access to files
-meeting the following constraints: the file name must
-fourteen characters or shorter, must not contain more than one dot ("\fB.\fR"),
-must end up with the extension \fB.tcl\fR or be called \fBtclIndex\fR.
-.PP
-Each element of the initial access path
-list will be assigned a token that will be set in
-the slave \fBauto_path\fR and the first element of that list will be set as
-the \fBtcl_library\fR for that slave.
-.PP
-If the access path argument is not given or is the empty list,
-the default behavior is to let the slave access the same packages
-as the master has access to (Or to be more precise:
-only packages written in Tcl (which by definition can't be dangerous
-as they run in the slave interpreter) and C extensions that
-provides a Safe_Init entry point). For that purpose, the master's
-\fBauto_path\fR will be used to construct the slave access path.
-In order that the slave successfully loads the Tcl library files
-(which includes the auto-loading mechanism itself) the \fBtcl_library\fR will be
-added or moved to the first position if necessary, in the
-slave access path, so the slave
-\fBtcl_library\fR will be the same as the master's (its real
-path will still be invisible to the slave though).
-In order that auto-loading works the same for the slave and
-the master in this by default case, the first-level
-sub directories of each directory in the master \fBauto_path\fR will
-also be added (if not already included) to the slave access path.
-You can always specify a more
-restrictive path for which sub directories will never be searched by
-explicitly specifying your directory list with the \fB\-accessPath\fR flag
-instead of relying on this default mechanism.
-.PP
-When the \fIaccessPath\fR is changed after the first creation or
-initialization (ie through \fBinterpConfigure -accessPath \fR\fIlist\fR),
-an \fBauto_reset\fR is automatically evaluated in the safe interpreter
-to synchronize its \fBauto_index\fR with the new token list.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-interp(n), library(n), load(n), package(n), source(n), unknown(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-alias, auto\-loading, auto_mkindex, load, master interpreter, safe
-interpreter, slave interpreter, source
diff --git a/raw/mann/scan.n b/raw/mann/scan.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 92e4db8..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/scan.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,430 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2000 Scriptics Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: scan.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: scan.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH scan n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-scan \- Parse string using conversion specifiers in the style of sscanf
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBscan \fIstring format \fR?\fIvarName varName ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-This command parses fields from an input string in the same fashion as the
-ANSI C \fBsscanf\fR procedure and returns a count of the number of
-conversions performed, or -1 if the end of the input string is reached
-before any conversions have been performed. \fIString\fR gives the input
-to be parsed and \fIformat\fR indicates how to parse it, using \fB%\fR
-conversion specifiers as in \fBsscanf\fR. Each \fIvarName\fR gives the
-name of a variable; when a field is scanned from \fIstring\fR the result is
-converted back into a string and assigned to the corresponding variable.
-.VS 8.3
-If no \fIvarName\fR variables are specified, then \fBscan\fR works in an
-inline manner, returning the data that would otherwise be stored in the
-variables as a list. In the inline case, an empty string is returned when
-the end of the input string is reached before any conversions have been
-performed.
-.VE 8.3
-
-.SH "DETAILS ON SCANNING"
-.PP
-\fBScan\fR operates by scanning \fIstring\fR and \fIformat\fR together.
-If the next character in \fIformat\fR is a blank or tab then it
-matches any number of white space characters in \fIstring\fR (including
-zero).
-Otherwise, if it isn't a \fB%\fR character then it
-must match the next character of \fIstring\fR.
-When a \fB%\fR is encountered in \fIformat\fR, it indicates
-the start of a conversion specifier.
-A conversion specifier contains up to four fields after the \fB%\fR:
-a \fB*\fR, which indicates that the converted value is to be discarded
-instead of assigned to a variable; a XPG3 position specifier; a number
-indicating a maximum field width; and a conversion character.
-All of these fields are optional except for the conversion character.
-The fields that are present must appear in the order given above.
-.PP
-When \fBscan\fR finds a conversion specifier in \fIformat\fR, it
-first skips any white-space characters in \fIstring\fR (unless the
-specifier is \fB[\fR or \fBc\fR).
-Then it converts the next input characters according to the
-conversion specifier and stores the result in the variable given
-by the next argument to \fBscan\fR.
-.PP
-If the \fB%\fR is followed by a decimal number and a \fB$\fR, as in
-``\fB%2$d\fR'', then the variable to use is not taken from the next
-sequential argument. Instead, it is taken from the argument indicated
-by the number, where 1 corresponds to the first \fIvarName\fR. If
-there are any positional specifiers in \fIformat\fR then all of the
-specifiers must be positional. Every \fIvarName\fR on the argument
-list must correspond to exactly one conversion specifier or an error
-is generated, or in the inline case, any position can be specified
-at most once and the empty positions will be filled in with empty strings.
-.PP
-The following conversion characters are supported:
-.TP 10
-\fBd\fR
-The input field must be a decimal integer.
-It is read in and the value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.TP 10
-\fBo\fR
-The input field must be an octal integer. It is read in and the
-value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.VS 8.4
-If the value exceeds MAX_INT (017777777777 on platforms using 32-bit
-integers), it will be truncated to a signed integer. Hence, 037777777777
-will appear as -1 on a 32-bit machine.
-.VE 8.4
-.TP 10
-\fBx\fR
-The input field must be a hexadecimal integer. It is read in
-and the value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.VS 8.4
-If the value exceeds MAX_INT (0x7FFFFFFF on platforms using 32-bit
-integers), it will be truncated to a signed integer. Hence, 0xFFFFFFFF
-will appear as -1 on a 32-bit machine.
-.VE 8.4
-.TP 10
-\fBu\fR
-The input field must be a decimal integer. The value is stored in the
-variable as an unsigned decimal integer string.
-.TP 10
-\fBi\fR
-The input field must be an integer. The base (i.e. decimal, octal, or
-hexadecimal) is determined in the same fashion as described in
-\fBexpr\fR. The value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.TP 10
-\fBc\fR
-A single character is read in and its binary value is stored in
-the variable as a decimal string.
-Initial white space is not skipped in this case, so the input
-field may be a white-space character.
-This conversion is different from the ANSI standard in that the
-input field always consists of a single character and no field
-width may be specified.
-.TP 10
-\fBs\fR
-The input field consists of all the characters up to the next
-white-space character; the characters are copied to the variable.
-.TP 10
-\fBe\fR or \fBf\fR or \fBg\fR
-The input field must be a floating-point number consisting
-of an optional sign, a string of decimal digits possibly
-containing a decimal point, and an optional exponent consisting
-of an \fBe\fR or \fBE\fR followed by an optional sign and a string of
-decimal digits.
-It is read in and stored in the variable as a floating-point string.
-.TP 10
-\fB[\fIchars\fB]\fR
-The input field consists of any number of characters in
-\fIchars\fR.
-The matching string is stored in the variable.
-If the first character between the brackets is a \fB]\fR then
-it is treated as part of \fIchars\fR rather than the closing
-bracket for the set.
-If \fIchars\fR
-contains a sequence of the form \fIa\fB\-\fIb\fR then any
-character between \fIa\fR and \fIb\fR (inclusive) will match.
-If the first or last character between the brackets is a \fB\-\fR, then
-it is treated as part of \fIchars\fR rather than indicating a range.
-.TP 10
-\fB[^\fIchars\fB]\fR
-The input field consists of any number of characters not in
-\fIchars\fR.
-The matching string is stored in the variable.
-If the character immediately following the \fB^\fR is a \fB]\fR then it is
-treated as part of the set rather than the closing bracket for
-the set.
-If \fIchars\fR
-contains a sequence of the form \fIa\fB\-\fIb\fR then any
-character between \fIa\fR and \fIb\fR (inclusive) will be excluded
-from the set.
-If the first or last character between the brackets is a \fB\-\fR, then
-it is treated as part of \fIchars\fR rather than indicating a range.
-.TP 10
-\fBn\fR
-No input is consumed from the input string. Instead, the total number
-of chacters scanned from the input string so far is stored in the variable.
-.LP
-The number of characters read from the input for a conversion is the
-largest number that makes sense for that particular conversion (e.g.
-as many decimal digits as possible for \fB%d\fR, as
-many octal digits as possible for \fB%o\fR, and so on).
-The input field for a given conversion terminates either when a
-white-space character is encountered or when the maximum field
-width has been reached, whichever comes first.
-If a \fB*\fR is present in the conversion specifier
-then no variable is assigned and the next scan argument is not consumed.
-
-.SH "DIFFERENCES FROM ANSI SSCANF"
-.PP
-The behavior of the \fBscan\fR command is the same as the behavior of
-the ANSI C \fBsscanf\fR procedure except for the following differences:
-.IP [1]
-\fB%p\fR conversion specifier is not currently supported.
-.IP [2]
-For \fB%c\fR conversions a single character value is
-converted to a decimal string, which is then assigned to the
-corresponding \fIvarName\fR;
-no field width may be specified for this conversion.
-.IP [3]
-The \fBl\fR, \fBh\fR, and \fBL\fR modifiers are ignored; integer
-values are always converted as if there were no modifier present
-and real values are always converted as if the \fBl\fR modifier
-were present (i.e. type \fBdouble\fR is used for the internal
-representation).
-.IP [4]
-.VS 8.3
-If the end of the input string is reached before any conversions have been
-performed and no variables are given, and empty string is returned.
-.VE 8.3
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-format(n), sscanf(3)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-conversion specifier, parse, scan
diff --git a/raw/mann/seek.n b/raw/mann/seek.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 9da5017..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/seek.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,299 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: seek.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: seek.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH seek n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-seek \- Change the access position for an open channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBseek \fIchannelId offset \fR?\fIorigin\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Changes the current access position for \fIchannelId\fR.
-\fIChannelId\fR must be a channel identifier such as returned from a
-previous invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR.
-The \fIoffset\fR and \fIorigin\fR
-arguments specify the position at which the next read or write will occur
-for \fIchannelId\fR. \fIOffset\fR must be an integer (which may be
-negative) and \fIorigin\fR must be one of the following:
-.TP 10
-\fBstart\fR
-The new access position will be \fIoffset\fR bytes from the start
-of the underlying file or device.
-.TP 10
-\fBcurrent\fR
-The new access position will be \fIoffset\fR bytes from the current
-access position; a negative \fIoffset\fR moves the access position
-backwards in the underlying file or device.
-.TP 10
-\fBend\fR
-The new access position will be \fIoffset\fR bytes from the end of
-the file or device. A negative \fIoffset\fR places the access position
-before the end of file, and a positive \fIoffset\fR places the access
-position after the end of file.
-.LP
-The \fIorigin\fR argument defaults to \fBstart\fR.
-.PP
-The command flushes all buffered output for the channel before the command
-returns, even if the channel is in nonblocking mode.
-It also discards any buffered and unread input.
-This command returns an empty string.
-An error occurs if this command is applied to channels whose underlying
-file or device does not support seeking.
-.PP
-.VS 8.1
-Note that \fIoffset\fR values are byte offsets, not character
-offsets. Both \fBseek\fR and \fBtell\fR operate in terms of bytes,
-not characters, unlike \fBread\fR.
-.VE 8.1
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), open(n), close(n), gets(n), tell(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-access position, file, seek
diff --git a/raw/mann/selection.n b/raw/mann/selection.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f1075f..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/selection.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: selection.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: selection.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH selection n 8.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-selection \- Manipulate the X selection
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBselection \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command provides a Tcl interface to the X selection mechanism and
-implements the full selection functionality described in the
-X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM).
-.PP
-The first argument to \fBselection\fR determines the format of the
-rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following
-forms are currently supported:
-.PP
-.TP
-\fBselection clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR?
-If \fIselection\fR exists anywhere on \fIwindow\fR's display, clear it
-so that no window owns the selection anymore. \fISelection\fR
-specifies the X selection that should be cleared, and should be an
-atom name such as PRIMARY or CLIPBOARD; see the Inter-Client
-Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-\fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY and \fIwindow\fR defaults to ``.''.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBselection get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR?
-Retrieves the value of \fIselection\fR from \fIwindow\fR's display and
-returns it as a result. \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY and
-\fIwindow\fR defaults to ``.''.
-\fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
-(the desired ``target'' for conversion, in ICCCM terminology), and
-should be an atom name such as STRING or FILE_NAME; see the
-Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-\fIType\fR defaults to STRING. The selection owner may choose to
-return the selection in any of several different representation
-formats, such as STRING, ATOM, INTEGER, etc. (this format is different
-than the selection type; see the ICCCM for all the confusing details).
-If the selection is returned in a non-string format, such as INTEGER
-or ATOM, the \fBselection\fR command converts it to string format as a
-collection of fields separated by spaces: atoms are converted to their
-textual names, and anything else is converted to hexadecimal integers.
-.TP
-\fBselection handle\fR ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR? \fIwindow command\fR
-Creates a handler for selection requests, such that \fIcommand\fR will
-be executed whenever \fIselection\fR is owned by \fIwindow\fR and
-someone attempts to retrieve it in the form given by \fItype\fR
-(e.g. \fItype\fR is specified in the \fBselection get\fR command).
-\fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY, \fItype\fR defaults to STRING, and
-\fIformat\fR defaults to STRING. If \fIcommand\fR is an empty string
-then any existing handler for \fIwindow\fR, \fItype\fR, and
-\fIselection\fR is removed.
-.RS
-.PP
-When \fIselection\fR is requested, \fIwindow\fR is the selection owner,
-and \fItype\fR is the requested type, \fIcommand\fR will be executed
-as a Tcl command with two additional numbers appended to it
-(with space separators).
-The two additional numbers
-.VS
-are \fIoffset\fR and \fImaxChars\fR: \fIoffset\fR specifies a starting
-character position in the selection and \fImaxChars\fR gives the maximum
-number of characters to retrieve. The command should return a value consisting
-of at most \fImaxChars\fR of the selection, starting at position
-\fIoffset\fR. For very large selections (larger than \fImaxChars\fR)
-the selection will be retrieved using several invocations of \fIcommand\fR
-with increasing \fIoffset\fR values. If \fIcommand\fR returns a string
-whose length is less than \fImaxChars\fR, the return value is assumed to
-include all of the remainder of the selection; if the length of
-\fIcommand\fR's result is equal to \fImaxChars\fR then
-\fIcommand\fR will be invoked again, until it eventually
-returns a result shorter than \fImaxChars\fR. The value of \fImaxChars\fR
-will always be relatively large (thousands of characters).
-.VE
-.PP
-If \fIcommand\fR returns an error then the selection retrieval is rejected
-just as if the selection didn't exist at all.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument specifies the representation that should be
-used to transmit the selection to the requester (the second column of
-Table 2 of the ICCCM), and defaults to STRING. If \fIformat\fR is
-STRING, the selection is transmitted as 8-bit ASCII characters (i.e.
-just in the form returned by \fIcommand\fR). If \fIformat\fR is
-ATOM, then the return value from \fIcommand\fR is divided into fields
-separated by white space; each field is converted to its atom value,
-and the 32-bit atom value is transmitted instead of the atom name.
-For any other \fIformat\fR, the return value from \fIcommand\fR is
-divided into fields separated by white space and each field is
-converted to a 32-bit integer; an array of integers is transmitted
-to the selection requester.
-.PP
-The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with
-selection requesters that don't use Tk. If Tk is being
-used to retrieve the selection then the value is converted back to
-a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is
-irrelevant.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR?
-.TP
-\fBselection own\fR ?\fB\-command\fR \fIcommand\fR? ?\fB\-selection\fR \fIselection\fR? \fIwindow\fR
-The first form of \fBselection own\fR returns the path name of the
-window in this application that owns \fIselection\fR on the display
-containing \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no window in this
-application owns the selection. \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY and
-\fIwindow\fR defaults to ``.''.
-.PP
-The second form of \fBselection own\fR causes \fIwindow\fR to become
-the new owner of \fIselection\fR on \fIwindow\fR's display, returning
-an empty string as result. The existing owner, if any, is notified
-that it has lost the selection.
-If \fIcommand\fR is specified, it is a Tcl script to execute when
-some other window claims ownership of the selection away from
-\fIwindow\fR. \fISelection\fR defaults to PRIMARY.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-clear, format, handler, ICCCM, own, selection, target, type
diff --git a/raw/mann/send.n b/raw/mann/send.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ad766c..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/send.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,332 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: send.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: send.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH send n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-send \- Execute a command in a different application
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBsend ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIapp cmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command arranges for \fIcmd\fR (and \fIarg\fRs) to be executed in the
-application named by \fIapp\fR. It returns the result or
-error from that command execution.
-\fIApp\fR may be the name of any application whose main window is
-on the display containing the sender's main window; it need not
-be within the same process.
-If no \fIarg\fR arguments are present, then the command to be executed is
-contained entirely within the \fIcmd\fR argument. If one or
-more \fIarg\fRs are present, they are concatenated to form the
-command to be executed, just as for the \fBeval\fR command.
-.PP
-If the initial arguments of the command begin with ``\-''
-they are treated as options. The following options are
-currently defined:
-.TP
-\fB\-async\fR
-Requests asynchronous invocation. In this case the \fBsend\fR
-command will complete immediately without waiting for \fIcmd\fR
-to complete in the target application; no result will be available
-and errors in the sent command will be ignored.
-If the target application is in the same process as the sending
-application then the \fB\-async\fR option is ignored.
-.TP
-\fB\-displayof\fR \fIpathName\fR
-Specifies that the target application's main window is on the display
-of the window given by \fIpathName\fR, instead of the display containing
-the application's main window.
-.TP
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-Serves no purpose except to terminate the list of options. This
-option is needed only if \fIapp\fR could contain a leading ``\-''
-character.
-
-.SH "APPLICATION NAMES"
-.PP
-The name of an application is set initially from the name of the
-program or script that created the application.
-You can query and change the name of an application with the
-\fBtk appname\fR command.
-
-.SH "DISABLING SENDS"
-.PP
-If the \fBsend\fR command is removed from an application (e.g.
-with the command \fBrename send {}\fR) then the application
-will not respond to incoming send requests anymore, nor will it
-be able to issue outgoing requests.
-Communication can be reenabled by invoking the \fBtk appname\fR
-command.
-
-.SH SECURITY
-.PP
-The \fBsend\fR command is potentially a serious security loophole. On Unix,
-any application that can connect to your X server can send
-scripts to your applications.
-These incoming scripts can use Tcl to read and
-write your files and invoke subprocesses under your name.
-Host-based access control such as that provided by \fBxhost\fR
-is particularly insecure, since it allows anyone with an account
-on particular hosts to connect to your server, and if disabled it
-allows anyone anywhere to connect to your server.
-In order to provide at least a small amount of
-security, Tk checks the access control being used by the server
-and rejects incoming sends unless (a) \fBxhost\fR-style access control
-is enabled (i.e. only certain hosts can establish connections) and (b) the
-list of enabled hosts is empty.
-This means that applications cannot connect to your server unless
-they use some other form of authorization
-such as that provide by \fBxauth\fR.
-.VS
-Under Windows, \fBsend\fR is currently disabled. Most of the
-functionality is provided by the \fBdde\fR command instead.
-.VE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-.VS
-application, dde, name, remote execution, security, send
-.VE
diff --git a/raw/mann/set.n b/raw/mann/set.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 87053c9..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/set.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: set.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: set.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH set n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-set \- Read and write variables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBset \fIvarName \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Returns the value of variable \fIvarName\fR.
-If \fIvalue\fR is specified, then set
-the value of \fIvarName\fR to \fIvalue\fR, creating a new variable
-if one doesn't already exist, and return its value.
-If \fIvarName\fR contains an open parenthesis and ends with a
-close parenthesis, then it refers to an array element: the characters
-before the first open parenthesis are the name of the array,
-and the characters between the parentheses are the index within the array.
-Otherwise \fIvarName\fR refers to a scalar variable.
-Normally, \fIvarName\fR is unqualified
-(does not include the names of any containing namespaces),
-and the variable of that name in the current namespace is read or written.
-If \fIvarName\fR includes namespace qualifiers
-(in the array name if it refers to an array element),
-the variable in the specified namespace is read or written.
-.PP
-If no procedure is active,
-then \fIvarName\fR refers to a namespace variable
-(global variable if the current namespace is the global namespace).
-If a procedure is active, then \fIvarName\fR refers to a parameter
-or local variable of the procedure unless the \fBglobal\fR command
-was invoked to declare \fIvarName\fR to be global,
-or unless a \fBvariable\fR command
-was invoked to declare \fIvarName\fR to be a namespace variable.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-expr(n), proc(n), trace(n), unset(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-read, write, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/socket.n b/raw/mann/socket.n
deleted file mode 100644
index b0422bb..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/socket.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,369 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: socket.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: socket.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH socket n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-socket \- Open a TCP network connection
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.sp
-\fBsocket \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fIhost port\fR
-.sp
-\fBsocket\fR \fB\-server \fIcommand\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIport\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command opens a network socket and returns a channel
-identifier that may be used in future invocations of commands like
-\fBread\fR, \fBputs\fR and \fBflush\fR.
-At present only the TCP network protocol is supported; future
-releases may include support for additional protocols.
-The \fBsocket\fR command may be used to open either the client or
-server side of a connection, depending on whether the \fB\-server\fR
-switch is specified.
-
-.SH "CLIENT SOCKETS"
-.PP
-If the \fB\-server\fR option is not specified, then the client side of a
-connection is opened and the command returns a channel identifier
-that can be used for both reading and writing.
-\fIPort\fR and \fIhost\fR specify a port
-to connect to; there must be a server accepting connections on
-this port. \fIPort\fR is an integer port number and \fIhost\fR
-is either a domain-style name such as \fBwww.sunlabs.com\fR or
-a numerical IP address such as \fB127.0.0.1\fR.
-Use \fIlocalhost\fR to refer to the host on which the command is invoked.
-.PP
-The following options may also be present before \fIhost\fR
-to specify additional information about the connection:
-.TP
-\fB\-myaddr\fI addr\fR
-\fIAddr\fR gives the domain-style name or numerical IP address of
-the client-side network interface to use for the connection.
-This option may be useful if the client machine has multiple network
-interfaces. If the option is omitted then the client-side interface
-will be chosen by the system software.
-.TP
-\fB\-myport\fI port\fR
-\fIPort\fR specifies an integer port number to use for the client's
-side of the connection. If this option is omitted, the client's
-port number will be chosen at random by the system software.
-.TP
-\fB\-async\fR
-The \fB\-async\fR option will cause the client socket to be connected
-asynchronously. This means that the socket will be created immediately but
-may not yet be connected to the server, when the call to \fBsocket\fR
-returns. When a \fBgets\fR or \fBflush\fR is done on the socket before the
-connection attempt succeeds or fails, if the socket is in blocking mode, the
-operation will wait until the connection is completed or fails. If the
-socket is in nonblocking mode and a \fBgets\fR or \fBflush\fR is done on
-the socket before the connection attempt succeeds or fails, the operation
-returns immediately and \fBfblocked\fR on the socket returns 1.
-
-.SH "SERVER SOCKETS"
-.PP
-If the \fB\-server\fR option is specified then the new socket
-will be a server for the port given by \fIport\fR.
-Tcl will automatically accept connections to the given port.
-For each connection Tcl will create a new channel that may be used to
-communicate with the client. Tcl then invokes \fIcommand\fR
-with three additional arguments: the name of the new channel, the
-address, in network address notation, of the client's host, and
-the client's port number.
-.PP
-The following additional option may also be specified before \fIhost\fR:
-.TP
-\fB\-myaddr\fI addr\fR
-\fIAddr\fR gives the domain-style name or numerical IP address of
-the server-side network interface to use for the connection.
-This option may be useful if the server machine has multiple network
-interfaces. If the option is omitted then the server socket is bound
-to the special address INADDR_ANY so that it can accept connections from
-any interface.
-.PP
-Server channels cannot be used for input or output; their sole use is to
-accept new client connections. The channels created for each incoming
-client connection are opened for input and output. Closing the server
-channel shuts down the server so that no new connections will be
-accepted; however, existing connections will be unaffected.
-.PP
-Server sockets depend on the Tcl event mechanism to find out when
-new connections are opened. If the application doesn't enter the
-event loop, for example by invoking the \fBvwait\fR command or
-calling the C procedure \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR, then no connections
-will be accepted.
-
-.SH "CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"
-The \fBfconfigure\fR command can be used to query several readonly
-configuration options for socket channels:
-.VS 8.0.5
-.TP
-\fB\-error\fR
-This option gets the current error status of the given socket. This
-is useful when you need to determine if an asynchronous connect
-operation succeeded. If there was an error, the error message is
-returned. If there was no error, an empty string is returned.
-.VE 8.0.5
-.TP
-\fB\-sockname\fR
-This option returns a list of three elements, the address, the host name
-and the port number for the socket. If the host name cannot be computed,
-the second element is identical to the address, the first element of the
-list.
-.TP
-\fB\-peername\fR
-This option is not supported by server sockets. For client and accepted
-sockets, this option returns a list of three elements; these are the
-address, the host name and the port to which the peer socket is connected
-or bound. If the host name cannot be computed, the second element of the
-list is identical to the address, its first element.
-.PP
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-flush(n), open(n), read(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bind, channel, connection, domain name, host, network address, socket, tcp
diff --git a/raw/mann/source.n b/raw/mann/source.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ca26bad..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/source.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,279 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: source.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: source.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH source n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-source \- Evaluate a file or resource as a Tcl script
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBsource \fIfileName\fR
-.sp
-\fBsource\fR \fB\-rsrc \fIresourceName \fR?\fIfileName\fR?
-.sp
-\fBsource\fR \fB\-rsrcid \fIresourceId \fR?\fIfileName\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command takes the contents of the specified file or resource
-and passes it to the Tcl interpreter as a text script. The return
-value from \fBsource\fR is the return value of the last command
-executed in the script. If an error occurs in evaluating the contents
-of the script then the \fBsource\fR command will return that error.
-If a \fBreturn\fR command is invoked from within the script then the
-remainder of the file will be skipped and the \fBsource\fR command
-will return normally with the result from the \fBreturn\fR command.
-
-The \fI\-rsrc\fR and \fI\-rsrcid\fR forms of this command are only
-available on Macintosh computers. These versions of the command
-allow you to source a script from a \fBTEXT\fR resource. You may specify
-what \fBTEXT\fR resource to source by either name or id. By default Tcl
-searches all open resource files, which include the current
-application and any loaded C extensions. Alternatively, you may
-specify the \fIfileName\fR where the \fBTEXT\fR resource can be found.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-file, script
diff --git a/raw/mann/split.n b/raw/mann/split.n
deleted file mode 100644
index af73898..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/split.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,282 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: split.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: split.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH split n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-split \- Split a string into a proper Tcl list
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBsplit \fIstring \fR?\fIsplitChars\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Returns a list created by splitting \fIstring\fR at each character
-that is in the \fIsplitChars\fR argument.
-Each element of the result list will consist of the
-characters from \fIstring\fR that lie between instances of the
-characters in \fIsplitChars\fR.
-Empty list elements will be generated if \fIstring\fR contains
-adjacent characters in \fIsplitChars\fR, or if the first or last
-character of \fIstring\fR is in \fIsplitChars\fR.
-If \fIsplitChars\fR is an empty string then each character of
-\fIstring\fR becomes a separate element of the result list.
-\fISplitChars\fR defaults to the standard white-space characters.
-For example,
-.CS
-\fBsplit "comp.unix.misc" .\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB"comp unix misc"\fR and
-.CS
-\fBsplit "Hello world" {}\fR
-.CE
-returns \fB"H e l l o { } w o r l d"\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-join(n), list(n), string(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-list, split, string
diff --git a/raw/mann/string.n b/raw/mann/string.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ff435a..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/string.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,576 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: string.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: string.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH string n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-string \- Manipulate strings
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBstring \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...?\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Performs one of several string operations, depending on \fIoption\fR.
-The legal \fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
-.VS 8.1
-.TP
-\fBstring bytelength \fIstring\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the number of bytes used to represent
-\fIstring\fR in memory. Because UTF\-8 uses one to three bytes to
-represent Unicode characters, the byte length will not be the same as
-the character length in general. The cases where a script cares about
-the byte length are rare. In almost all cases, you should use the
-\fBstring length\fR operation. Refer to the \fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR
-manual entry for more details on the UTF\-8 representation.
-.TP
-\fBstring compare\fR ?\fB\-nocase\fR? ?\fB\-length int\fR? \fIstring1 string2\fR
-.VE 8.1
-Perform a character-by-character comparison of strings \fIstring1\fR and
-\fIstring2\fR. Returns
-\-1, 0, or 1, depending on whether \fIstring1\fR is lexicographically
-less than, equal to, or greater than \fIstring2\fR.
-.VS 8.1
-If \fB\-length\fR is specified, then only the first \fIlength\fR characters
-are used in the comparison. If \fB\-length\fR is negative, it is
-ignored. If \fB\-nocase\fR is specified, then the strings are
-compared in a case-insensitive manner.
-.TP
-\fBstring equal\fR ?\fB\-nocase\fR? ?\fB-length int\fR? \fIstring1 string2\fR
-Perform a character-by-character comparison of strings
-\fIstring1\fR and \fIstring2\fR. Returns 1 if \fIstring1\fR and
-\fIstring2\fR are identical, or 0 when not. If \fB\-length\fR is
-specified, then only the first \fIlength\fR characters are used in the
-comparison. If \fB\-length\fR is negative, it is ignored. If
-\fB\-nocase\fR is specified, then the strings are compared in a
-case-insensitive manner.
-.TP
-\fBstring first \fIstring1 string2\fR ?\fIstartIndex\fR?
-.VE 8.1
-Search \fIstring2\fR for a sequence of characters that exactly match
-the characters in \fIstring1\fR. If found, return the index of the
-first character in the first such match within \fIstring2\fR. If not
-found, return \-1.
-.VS 8.1
-If \fIstartIndex\fR is specified (in any of the forms accepted by the
-\fBindex\fR method), then the search is constrained to start with the
-character in \fIstring2\fR specified by the index. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBstring first a 0a23456789abcdef 5\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB10\fR, but
-.CS
-\fBstring first a 0123456789abcdef 11\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB\-1\fR.
-.RE
-.VE 8.1
-.TP
-\fBstring index \fIstring charIndex\fR
-Returns the \fIcharIndex\fR'th character of the \fIstring\fR
-argument. A \fIcharIndex\fR of 0 corresponds to the first
-character of the string.
-.VS 8.1
-\fIcharIndex\fR may be specified as
-follows:
-.RS
-.IP \fIinteger\fR 10
-The char specified at this integral index
-.IP \fBend\fR 10
-The last char of the string.
-.IP \fBend\-\fIinteger\fR 10
-The last char of the string minus the specified integer
-offset (e.g. \fBend\-1\fR would refer to the "c" in "abcd").
-.PP
-.VE 8.1
-If \fIcharIndex\fR is less than 0 or greater than
-or equal to the length of the string then an empty string is
-returned.
-.VS 8.1
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBstring is \fIclass\fR ?\fB\-strict\fR? ?\fB\-failindex \fIvarname\fR? \fIstring\fR
-Returns 1 if \fIstring\fR is a valid member of the specified character
-class, otherwise returns 0. If \fB\-strict\fR is specified, then an
-empty string returns 0, otherwise and empty string will return 1 on
-any class. If \fB\-failindex\fR is specified, then if the function
-returns 0, the index in the string where the class was no longer valid
-will be stored in the variable named \fIvarname\fR. The \fIvarname\fR
-will not be set if the function returns 1. The following character classes
-are recognized (the class name can be abbreviated):
-.RS
-.IP \fBalnum\fR 10
-Any Unicode alphabet or digit character.
-.IP \fBalpha\fR 10
-Any Unicode alphabet character.
-.IP \fBascii\fR 10
-Any character with a value less than \\u0080 (those that
-are in the 7\-bit ascii range).
-.IP \fBboolean\fR 10
-Any of the forms allowed to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
-.IP \fBcontrol\fR 10
-Any Unicode control character.
-.IP \fBdigit\fR 10
-Any Unicode digit character. Note that this includes characters
-outside of the [0\-9] range.
-.IP \fBdouble\fR 10
-Any of the valid forms for a double in Tcl, with optional surrounding
-whitespace. In case of under/overflow in the value, 0 is returned
-and the \fIvarname\fR will contain \-1.
-.IP \fBfalse\fR 10
-Any of the forms allowed to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR where the value is false.
-.IP \fBgraph\fR 10
-Any Unicode printing character, except space.
-.IP \fBinteger\fR 10
-Any of the valid forms for an integer in Tcl, with optional surrounding
-whitespace. In case of under/overflow in the value, 0 is returned
-and the \fIvarname\fR will contain \-1.
-.IP \fBlower\fR 10
-Any Unicode lower case alphabet character.
-.IP \fBprint\fR 10
-Any Unicode printing character, including space.
-.IP \fBpunct\fR 10
-Any Unicode punctuation character.
-.IP \fBspace\fR 10
-Any Unicode space character.
-.IP \fBtrue\fR 10
-Any of the forms allowed to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR where the value is true.
-.IP \fBupper\fR 10
-Any upper case alphabet character in the Unicode character set.
-.IP \fBwordchar\fR 10
-Any Unicode word character. That is any alphanumeric character,
-and any Unicode connector punctuation characters (e.g. underscore).
-.IP \fBxdigit\fR 10
-Any hexadecimal digit character ([0\-9A\-Fa\-f]).
-.PP
-In the case of \fBboolean\fR, \fBtrue\fR and \fBfalse\fR, if the
-function will return 0, then the \fIvarname\fR will always be set to 0,
-due to the varied nature of a valid boolean value.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBstring last \fIstring1 string2\fR ?\fIstartIndex\fR?
-.VE 8.1
-Search \fIstring2\fR for a sequence of characters that exactly match
-the characters in \fIstring1\fR. If found, return the index of the
-first character in the last such match within \fIstring2\fR. If there
-is no match, then return \-1.
-.VS 8.1
-If \fIstartIndex\fR is specified (in any of the forms accepted by the
-\fBindex\fR method), then only the characters in \fIstring2\fR at or before the
-specified \fIstartIndex\fR will be considered by the search. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBstring last a 0a23456789abcdef 15\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB10\fR, but
-.CS
-\fBstring last a 0a23456789abcdef 9\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB1\fR.
-.RE
-.VE 8.1
-.TP
-\fBstring length \fIstring\fR
-Returns a decimal string giving the number of characters in
-\fIstring\fR. Note that this is not necessarily the same as the
-number of bytes used to store the string.
-.VS 8.1
-.TP
-\fBstring map\fR ?\fB\-nocase\fR? \fIcharMap string\fR
-Replaces characters in \fIstring\fR based on the key-value pairs in
-\fIcharMap\fR. \fIcharMap\fR is a list of \fIkey value key value\fR ...
-as in the form returned by \fBarray get\fR. Each instance of a
-key in the string will be replaced with its corresponding value. If
-\fB\-nocase\fR is specified, then matching is done without regard to
-case differences. Both \fIkey\fR and \fIvalue\fR may be multiple
-characters. Replacement is done in an ordered manner, so the key appearing
-first in the list will be checked first, and so on. \fIstring\fR is
-only iterated over once, so earlier key replacements will have no
-affect for later key matches. For example,
-.RS
-.CS
-\fBstring map {abc 1 ab 2 a 3 1 0} 1abcaababcabababc\fR
-.CE
-will return the string \fB01321221\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBstring match\fR ?\fB\-nocase\fR? \fIpattern\fR \fIstring\fR
-.VE 8.1
-See if \fIpattern\fR matches \fIstring\fR; return 1 if it does, 0
-if it doesn't.
-.VS 8.1
-If \fB\-nocase\fR is specified, then the pattern attempts to match
-against the string in a case insensitive manner.
-.VE 8.1
-For the two strings to match, their contents
-must be identical except that the following special sequences
-may appear in \fIpattern\fR:
-.RS
-.IP \fB*\fR 10
-Matches any sequence of characters in \fIstring\fR,
-including a null string.
-.IP \fB?\fR 10
-Matches any single character in \fIstring\fR.
-.IP \fB[\fIchars\fB]\fR 10
-Matches any character in the set given by \fIchars\fR. If a sequence
-of the form
-\fIx\fB\-\fIy\fR appears in \fIchars\fR, then any character
-between \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, inclusive, will match.
-.VS 8.1
-When used with \fB\-nocase\fR, the end points of the range are converted
-to lower case first. Whereas {[A\-z]} matches '_' when matching
-case-sensitively ('_' falls between the 'Z' and 'a'), with \fB\-nocase\fR
-this is considered like {[A\-Za\-z]} (and probably what was meant in the
-first place).
-.VE 8.1
-.IP \fB\e\fIx\fR 10
-Matches the single character \fIx\fR. This provides a way of
-avoiding the special interpretation of the characters
-\fB*?[]\e\fR in \fIpattern\fR.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBstring range \fIstring first last\fR
-Returns a range of consecutive characters from \fIstring\fR, starting
-with the character whose index is \fIfirst\fR and ending with the
-character whose index is \fIlast\fR. An index of 0 refers to the
-.VS 8.1
-first character of the string. \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may be
-specified as for the \fBindex\fR method.
-.VE 8.1
-If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero then it is treated as if it were zero, and
-if \fIlast\fR is greater than or equal to the length of the string then
-it is treated as if it were \fBend\fR. If \fIfirst\fR is greater than
-\fIlast\fR then an empty string is returned.
-.VS 8.1
-.TP
-\fBstring repeat \fIstring count\fR
-Returns \fIstring\fR repeated \fIcount\fR number of times.
-.TP
-\fBstring replace \fIstring first last\fR ?\fInewstring\fR?
-Removes a range of consecutive characters from \fIstring\fR, starting
-with the character whose index is \fIfirst\fR and ending with the
-character whose index is \fIlast\fR. An index of 0 refers to the
-first character of the string. \fIFirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may be
-specified as for the \fBindex\fR method. If \fInewstring\fR is
-specified, then it is placed in the removed character range.
-If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero then it is treated as if it were zero, and
-if \fIlast\fR is greater than or equal to the length of the string then
-it is treated as if it were \fBend\fR. If \fIfirst\fR is greater than
-\fIlast\fR or the length of the initial string, or \fIlast\fR is less
-than 0, then the initial string is returned untouched.
-.TP
-\fBstring tolower \fIstring\fR ?\fIfirst\fR? ?\fIlast\fR?
-Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that all upper (or title) case
-letters have been converted to lower case. If \fIfirst\fR is specified, it
-refers to the first char index in the string to start modifying. If
-\fIlast\fR is specified, it refers to the char index in the string to stop
-at (inclusive). \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may be
-specified as for the \fBindex\fR method.
-.TP
-\fBstring totitle \fIstring\fR ?\fIfirst\fR? ?\fIlast\fR?
-Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that the first character
-in \fIstring\fR is converted to its Unicode title case variant (or upper
-case if there is no title case variant) and the rest of the string is
-converted to lower case. If \fIfirst\fR is specified, it
-refers to the first char index in the string to start modifying. If
-\fIlast\fR is specified, it refers to the char index in the string to stop
-at (inclusive). \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may be
-specified as for the \fBindex\fR method.
-.TP
-\fBstring toupper \fIstring\fR ?\fIfirst\fR? ?\fIlast\fR?
-Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that all lower (or title) case
-letters have been converted to upper case. If \fIfirst\fR is specified, it
-refers to the first char index in the string to start modifying. If
-\fIlast\fR is specified, it refers to the char index in the string to stop
-at (inclusive). \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may be specified as for the
-\fBindex\fR method.
-.VE 8.1
-.TP
-\fBstring trim \fIstring\fR ?\fIchars\fR?
-Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that any leading
-or trailing characters from the set given by \fIchars\fR are
-removed.
-If \fIchars\fR is not specified then white space is removed
-(spaces, tabs, newlines, and carriage returns).
-.TP
-\fBstring trimleft \fIstring\fR ?\fIchars\fR?
-Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that any
-leading characters from the set given by \fIchars\fR are
-removed.
-If \fIchars\fR is not specified then white space is removed
-(spaces, tabs, newlines, and carriage returns).
-.TP
-\fBstring trimright \fIstring\fR ?\fIchars\fR?
-Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that any
-trailing characters from the set given by \fIchars\fR are
-removed.
-If \fIchars\fR is not specified then white space is removed
-(spaces, tabs, newlines, and carriage returns).
-.VS 8.1
-.TP
-\fBstring wordend \fIstring charIndex\fR
-Returns the index of the character just after the last one in the word
-containing character \fIcharIndex\fR of \fIstring\fR. \fIcharIndex\fR
-may be specified as for the \fBindex\fR method. A word is
-considered to be any contiguous range of alphanumeric (Unicode letters
-or decimal digits) or underscore (Unicode connector punctuation)
-characters, or any single character other than these.
-.TP
-\fBstring wordstart \fIstring charIndex\fR
-Returns the index of the first character in the word containing
-character \fIcharIndex\fR of \fIstring\fR. \fIcharIndex\fR may be
-specified as for the \fBindex\fR method. A word is considered to be any
-contiguous range of alphanumeric (Unicode letters or decimal digits)
-or underscore (Unicode connector punctuation) characters, or any
-single character other than these.
-.VE 8.1
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-expr(n), list(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-case conversion, compare, index, match, pattern, string, word, equal, ctype
diff --git a/raw/mann/subst.n b/raw/mann/subst.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d9b8d56..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/subst.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: subst.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: subst.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH subst n 7.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-subst \- Perform backslash, command, and variable substitutions
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBsubst \fR?\fB\-nobackslashes\fR? ?\fB\-nocommands\fR? ?\fB\-novariables\fR? \fIstring\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command performs variable substitutions, command substitutions,
-and backslash substitutions on its \fIstring\fR argument and
-returns the fully-substituted result.
-The substitutions are performed in exactly the same way as for
-Tcl commands.
-As a result, the \fIstring\fR argument is actually substituted twice,
-once by the Tcl parser in the usual fashion for Tcl commands, and
-again by the \fIsubst\fR command.
-.PP
-If any of the \fB\-nobackslashes\fR, \fB\-nocommands\fR, or
-\fB\-novariables\fR are specified, then the corresponding substitutions
-are not performed.
-For example, if \fB\-nocommands\fR is specified, no command substitution
-is performed: open and close brackets are treated as ordinary characters
-with no special interpretation.
-.PP
-Note: when it performs its substitutions, \fIsubst\fR does not
-give any special treatment to double quotes or curly braces. For
-example, the script
-.CS
-\fBset a 44
-subst {xyz {$a}}\fR
-.CE
-returns ``\fBxyz {44}\fR'', not ``\fBxyz {$a}\fR''.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-eval(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-backslash substitution, command substitution, variable substitution
diff --git a/raw/mann/switch.n b/raw/mann/switch.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3790d61..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/switch.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,352 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: switch.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: switch.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH switch n 7.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-switch \- Evaluate one of several scripts, depending on a given value
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBswitch \fR?\fIoptions\fR?\fI string pattern body \fR?\fIpattern body \fR...?
-.sp
-\fBswitch \fR?\fIoptions\fR?\fI string \fR{\fIpattern body \fR?\fIpattern body \fR...?}
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBswitch\fR command matches its \fIstring\fR argument against each of
-the \fIpattern\fR arguments in order.
-As soon as it finds a \fIpattern\fR that matches \fIstring\fR it
-evaluates the following \fIbody\fR argument by passing it recursively
-to the Tcl interpreter and returns the result of that evaluation.
-If the last \fIpattern\fR argument is \fBdefault\fR then it matches
-anything.
-If no \fIpattern\fR argument
-matches \fIstring\fR and no default is given, then the \fBswitch\fR
-command returns an empty string.
-.PP
-If the initial arguments to \fBswitch\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
-they are treated as options. The following options are
-currently supported:
-.TP 10
-\fB\-exact\fR
-Use exact matching when comparing \fIstring\fR to a pattern. This
-is the default.
-.TP 10
-\fB\-glob\fR
-When matching \fIstring\fR to the patterns, use glob-style matching
-(i.e. the same as implemented by the \fBstring match\fR command).
-.TP 10
-\fB\-regexp\fR
-When matching \fIstring\fR to the patterns, use regular
-expression matching
-(as described in the \fBre_syntax\fR reference page).
-.TP 10
-\fB\-\|\-\fR
-Marks the end of options. The argument following this one will
-be treated as \fIstring\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.PP
-Two syntaxes are provided for the \fIpattern\fR and \fIbody\fR arguments.
-The first uses a separate argument for each of the patterns and commands;
-this form is convenient if substitutions are desired on some of the
-patterns or commands.
-The second form places all of the patterns and commands together into
-a single argument; the argument must have proper list structure, with
-the elements of the list being the patterns and commands.
-The second form makes it easy to construct multi-line switch commands,
-since the braces around the whole list make it unnecessary to include a
-backslash at the end of each line.
-Since the \fIpattern\fR arguments are in braces in the second form,
-no command or variable substitutions are performed on them; this makes
-the behavior of the second form different than the first form in some
-cases.
-.PP
-If a \fIbody\fR is specified as ``\fB\-\fR'' it means that the \fIbody\fR
-for the next pattern should also be used as the body for this
-pattern (if the next pattern also has a body of ``\fB\-\fR''
-then the body after that is used, and so on).
-This feature makes it possible to share a single \fIbody\fR among
-several patterns.
-.PP
-Beware of how you place comments in \fBswitch\fR commands. Comments
-should only be placed \fBinside\fR the execution body of one of the
-patterns, and not intermingled with the patterns.
-.PP
-Below are some examples of \fBswitch\fR commands:
-.CS
-\fBswitch\0abc\0a\0\-\0b\0{format 1}\0abc\0{format 2}\0default\0{format 3}\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB2\fR,
-.CS
-\fBswitch\0\-regexp\0aaab {
- ^a.*b$\0\-
- b\0{format 1}
- a*\0{format 2}
- default\0{format 3}
-}\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB1\fR, and
-.CS
-\fBswitch\0xyz {
- a
- \-
- b
- {
- # Correct Comment Placement
- format 1
- }
- a*
- {format 2}
- default
- {format 3}
-}\fR
-.CE
-will return \fB3\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-for(n), if(n), regexp(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-switch, match, regular expression
diff --git a/raw/mann/tclvars.n b/raw/mann/tclvars.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e660e2b..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/tclvars.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,636 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tclvars.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tclvars.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tclvars n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tclvars \- Variables used by Tcl
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The following global variables are created and managed automatically
-by the Tcl library. Except where noted below, these variables should
-normally be treated as read-only by application-specific code and by users.
-.TP
-\fBenv\fR
-This variable is maintained by Tcl as an array
-whose elements are the environment variables for the process.
-Reading an element will return the value of the corresponding
-environment variable.
-Setting an element of the array will modify the corresponding
-environment variable or create a new one if it doesn't already
-exist.
-Unsetting an element of \fBenv\fR will remove the corresponding
-environment variable.
-Changes to the \fBenv\fR array will affect the environment
-passed to children by commands like \fBexec\fR.
-If the entire \fBenv\fR array is unset then Tcl will stop
-monitoring \fBenv\fR accesses and will not update environment
-variables.
-.RS
-.VS 8.0
-Under Windows, the environment variables PATH and COMSPEC in any
-capitalization are converted automatically to upper case. For instance, the
-PATH variable could be exported by the operating system as ``path'',
-``Path'', ``PaTh'', etc., causing otherwise simple Tcl code to have to
-support many special cases. All other environment variables inherited by
-Tcl are left unmodified.
-.VE
-.RE
-.RS
-On the Macintosh, the environment variable is constructed by Tcl as no
-global environment variable exists. The environment variables that
-are created for Tcl include:
-.TP
-\fBLOGIN\fR
-This holds the Chooser name of the Macintosh.
-.TP
-\fBUSER\fR
-This also holds the Chooser name of the Macintosh.
-.TP
-\fBSYS_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the system directory.
-.TP
-\fBAPPLE_M_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the Apple Menu directory.
-.TP
-\fBCP_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the control panels directory.
-.TP
-\fBDESK_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the desk top directory.
-.TP
-\fBEXT_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the system extensions directory.
-.TP
-\fBPREF_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the preferences directory.
-.TP
-\fBPRINT_MON_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the print monitor directory.
-.TP
-\fBSHARED_TRASH_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the network trash directory.
-.TP
-\fBTRASH_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the trash directory.
-.TP
-\fBSTART_UP_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the start up directory.
-.TP
-\fBHOME\fR
-The path to the application's default directory.
-.PP
-You can also create your own environment variables for the Macintosh.
-A file named \fITcl Environment Variables\fR may be placed in the
-preferences folder in the Mac system folder. Each line of this file
-should be of the form \fIVAR_NAME=var_data\fR.
-.PP
-The last alternative is to place environment variables in a 'STR#'
-resource named \fITcl Environment Variables\fR of the application. This
-is considered a little more ``Mac like'' than a Unix style Environment
-Variable file. Each entry in the 'STR#' resource has the same format
-as above. The source code file \fItclMacEnv.c\fR contains the
-implementation of the env mechanisms. This file contains many
-#define's that allow customization of the env mechanisms to fit your
-applications needs.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBerrorCode\fR
-After an error has occurred, this variable will be set to hold
-additional information about the error in a form that is easy
-to process with programs.
-\fBerrorCode\fR consists of a Tcl list with one or more elements.
-The first element of the list identifies a general class of
-errors, and determines the format of the rest of the list.
-The following formats for \fBerrorCode\fR are used by the
-Tcl core; individual applications may define additional formats.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fBARITH\fI code msg\fR
-This format is used when an arithmetic error occurs (e.g. an attempt
-to divide by zero in the \fBexpr\fR command).
-\fICode\fR identifies the precise error and \fImsg\fR provides a
-human-readable description of the error. \fICode\fR will be either
-DIVZERO (for an attempt to divide by zero),
-DOMAIN (if an argument is outside the domain of a function, such as acos(\-3)),
-IOVERFLOW (for integer overflow),
-OVERFLOW (for a floating-point overflow),
-or UNKNOWN (if the cause of the error cannot be determined).
-.TP
-\fBCHILDKILLED\fI pid sigName msg\fR
-This format is used when a child process has been killed because of
-a signal. The second element of \fBerrorCode\fR will be the
-process's identifier (in decimal).
-The third element will be the symbolic name of the signal that caused
-the process to terminate; it will be one of the names from the
-include file signal.h, such as \fBSIGPIPE\fR.
-The fourth element will be a short human-readable message
-describing the signal, such as ``write on pipe with no readers''
-for \fBSIGPIPE\fR.
-.TP
-\fBCHILDSTATUS\fI pid code\fR
-This format is used when a child process has exited with a non-zero
-exit status. The second element of \fBerrorCode\fR will be the
-process's identifier (in decimal) and the third element will be the exit
-code returned by the process (also in decimal).
-.TP
-\fBCHILDSUSP\fI pid sigName msg\fR
-This format is used when a child process has been suspended because
-of a signal.
-The second element of \fBerrorCode\fR will be the process's identifier,
-in decimal.
-The third element will be the symbolic name of the signal that caused
-the process to suspend; this will be one of the names from the
-include file signal.h, such as \fBSIGTTIN\fR.
-The fourth element will be a short human-readable message
-describing the signal, such as ``background tty read''
-for \fBSIGTTIN\fR.
-.TP
-\fBNONE\fR
-This format is used for errors where no additional information is
-available for an error besides the message returned with the
-error. In these cases \fBerrorCode\fR will consist of a list
-containing a single element whose contents are \fBNONE\fR.
-.TP
-\fBPOSIX \fIerrName msg\fR
-If the first element of \fBerrorCode\fR is \fBPOSIX\fR, then
-the error occurred during a POSIX kernel call.
-The second element of the list will contain the symbolic name
-of the error that occurred, such as \fBENOENT\fR; this will
-be one of the values defined in the include file errno.h.
-The third element of the list will be a human-readable
-message corresponding to \fIerrName\fR, such as
-``no such file or directory'' for the \fBENOENT\fR case.
-.PP
-To set \fBerrorCode\fR, applications should use library
-procedures such as \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR and \fBTcl_PosixError\fR,
-or they may invoke the \fBerror\fR command.
-If one of these methods hasn't been used, then the Tcl
-interpreter will reset the variable to \fBNONE\fR after
-the next error.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBerrorInfo\fR
-After an error has occurred, this string will contain one or more lines
-identifying the Tcl commands and procedures that were being executed
-when the most recent error occurred.
-Its contents take the form of a stack trace showing the various
-nested Tcl commands that had been invoked at the time of the error.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_library\fR
-This variable holds the name of a directory containing the
-system library of Tcl scripts, such as those used for auto-loading.
-The value of this variable is returned by the \fBinfo library\fR command.
-See the \fBlibrary\fR manual entry for details of the facilities
-provided by the Tcl script library.
-Normally each application or package will have its own application-specific
-script library in addition to the Tcl script library;
-each application should set a global variable with a name like
-\fB$\fIapp\fB_library\fR (where \fIapp\fR is the application's name)
-to hold the network file name for that application's library directory.
-The initial value of \fBtcl_library\fR is set when an interpreter
-is created by searching several different directories until one is
-found that contains an appropriate Tcl startup script.
-If the \fBTCL_LIBRARY\fR environment variable exists, then
-the directory it names is checked first.
-If \fBTCL_LIBRARY\fR isn't set or doesn't refer to an appropriate
-directory, then Tcl checks several other directories based on a
-compiled-in default location, the location of the binary containing
-the application, and the current working directory.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_patchLevel\fR
-When an interpreter is created Tcl initializes this variable to
-hold a string giving the current patch level for Tcl, such as
-\fB7.3p2\fR for Tcl 7.3 with the first two official patches, or
-\fB7.4b4\fR for the fourth beta release of Tcl 7.4.
-The value of this variable is returned by the \fBinfo patchlevel\fR
-command.
-.VS 8.0 br
-.TP
-\fBtcl_pkgPath\fR
-This variable holds a list of directories indicating where packages are
-normally installed. It is not used on Windows. It typically contains
-either one or two entries; if it contains two entries, the first is
-normally a directory for platform-dependent packages (e.g., shared library
-binaries) and the second is normally a directory for platform-independent
-packages (e.g., script files). Typically a package is installed as a
-subdirectory of one of the entries in \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR. The directories
-in \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR are included by default in the \fBauto_path\fR
-variable, so they and their immediate subdirectories are automatically
-searched for packages during \fBpackage require\fR commands. Note:
-\fBtcl_pkgPath\fR it not intended to be modified by the application. Its
-value is added to \fBauto_path\fR at startup; changes to \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR
-are not reflected in \fBauto_path\fR. If you want Tcl to search additional
-directories for packages you should add the names of those directories to
-\fBauto_path\fR, not \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBtcl_platform\fR
-This is an associative array whose elements contain information about
-the platform on which the application is running, such as the name of
-the operating system, its current release number, and the machine's
-instruction set. The elements listed below will always
-be defined, but they may have empty strings as values if Tcl couldn't
-retrieve any relevant information. In addition, extensions
-and applications may add additional values to the array. The
-predefined elements are:
-
-
-
-
-
-.RS
-.VS
-.TP
-\fBbyteOrder\fR
-The native byte order of this machine: either \fBlittleEndian\fR or
-\fBbigEndian\fR.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBdebug\fR
-If this variable exists, then the interpreter
-was compiled with debugging symbols enabled. This varible will only
-exist on Windows so extension writers can specify which package to load
-depending on the C run-time library that is loaded.
-.TP
-\fBmachine\fR
-The instruction set executed by this machine, such as
-\fBintel\fR, \fBPPC\fR, \fB68k\fR, or \fBsun4m\fR. On UNIX machines, this
-is the value returned by \fBuname -m\fR.
-.TP
-\fBos\fR
-The name of the operating system running on this machine,
-such as \fBWindows 95\fR, \fBWindows NT\fR, \fBMacOS\fR, or \fBSunOS\fR.
-On UNIX machines, this is the value returned by \fBuname -s\fR.
-On Windows 95 and Windows 98, the value returned will be \fBWindows
-95\fR to provide better backwards compatibility to Windows 95; to
-distinguish between the two, check the \fBosVersion\fR.
-.TP
-\fBosVersion\fR
-The version number for the operating system running on this machine.
-On UNIX machines, this is the value returned by \fBuname -r\fR. On
-Windows 95, the version will be 4.0; on Windows 98, the version will
-be 4.10.
-.TP
-\fBplatform\fR
-Either \fBwindows\fR, \fBmacintosh\fR, or \fBunix\fR. This identifies the
-general operating environment of the machine.
-.TP
-\fBthreaded\fR
-If this variable exists, then the interpreter
-was compiled with threads enabled.
-.TP
-\fBuser\fR
-This identifies the
-current user based on the login information available on the platform.
-This comes from the USER or LOGNAME environment variable on Unix,
-and the value from GetUserName on Windows and Macintosh.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtcl_precision\fR
-.VS
-This variable controls the number of digits to generate
-when converting floating-point values to strings. It defaults
-to 12.
-17 digits is ``perfect'' for IEEE floating-point in that it allows
-double-precision values to be converted to strings and back to
-binary with no loss of information. However, using 17 digits prevents
-any rounding, which produces longer, less intuitive results. For example,
-\fBexpr 1.4\fR returns 1.3999999999999999 with \fBtcl_precision\fR
-set to 17, vs. 1.4 if \fBtcl_precision\fR is 12.
-.RS
-All interpreters in a process share a single \fBtcl_precision\fR value:
-changing it in one interpreter will affect all other interpreters as
-well. However, safe interpreters are not allowed to modify the
-variable.
-.RE
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBtcl_rcFileName\fR
-This variable is used during initialization to indicate the name of a
-user-specific startup file. If it is set by application-specific
-initialization, then the Tcl startup code will check for the existence
-of this file and \fBsource\fR it if it exists. For example, for \fBwish\fR
-the variable is set to \fB~/.wishrc\fR for Unix and \fB~/wishrc.tcl\fR
-for Windows.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_rcRsrcName\fR
-This variable is only used on Macintosh systems. The variable is used
-during initialization to indicate the name of a user-specific
-\fBTEXT\fR resource located in the application or extension resource
-forks. If it is set by application-specific initialization, then the
-Tcl startup code will check for the existence of this resource and
-\fBsource\fR it if it exists. For example, the Macintosh \fBwish\fR
-application has the variable is set to \fBtclshrc\fR.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_traceCompile\fR
-The value of this variable can be set to control
-how much tracing information
-is displayed during bytecode compilation.
-By default, tcl_traceCompile is zero and no information is displayed.
-Setting tcl_traceCompile to 1 generates a one line summary in stdout
-whenever a procedure or top level command is compiled.
-Setting it to 2 generates a detailed listing in stdout of the
-bytecode instructions emitted during every compilation.
-This variable is useful in
-tracking down suspected problems with the Tcl compiler.
-It is also occasionally useful when converting
-existing code to use Tcl8.0.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_traceExec\fR
-The value of this variable can be set to control
-how much tracing information
-is displayed during bytecode execution.
-By default, tcl_traceExec is zero and no information is displayed.
-Setting tcl_traceExec to 1 generates a one line trace in stdout
-on each call to a Tcl procedure.
-Setting it to 2 generates a line of output
-whenever any Tcl command is invoked
-that contains the name of the command and its arguments.
-Setting it to 3 produces a detailed trace showing the result of
-executing each bytecode instruction.
-Note that when tcl_traceExec is 2 or 3,
-commands such as set and incr
-that have been entirely replaced by a sequence
-of bytecode instructions are not shown.
-Setting this variable is useful in
-tracking down suspected problems with the bytecode compiler
-and interpreter.
-It is also occasionally useful when converting
-code to use Tcl8.0.
-.TP
-\fBtcl_wordchars\fR
-The value of this variable is a regular expression that can be set to
-control what are considered ``word'' characters, for instances like
-selecting a word by double-clicking in text in Tk. It is platform
-dependent. On Windows, it defaults to \fB\\S\fR, meaning anything
-but a Unicode space character. Otherwise it defaults to \fB\\w\fR,
-which is any Unicode word character (number, letter, or underscore).
-.TP
-\fBtcl_nonwordchars\fR
-The value of this variable is a regular expression that can be set to
-control what are considered ``non-word'' characters, for instances like
-selecting a word by double-clicking in text in Tk. It is platform
-dependent. On Windows, it defaults to \fB\\s\fR, meaning any Unicode space
-character. Otherwise it defaults to \fB\\W\fR, which is anything but a
-Unicode word character (number, letter, or underscore).
-.TP
-\fBtcl_version\fR
-When an interpreter is created Tcl initializes this variable to
-hold the version number for this version of Tcl in the form \fIx.y\fR.
-Changes to \fIx\fR represent major changes with probable
-incompatibilities and changes to \fIy\fR represent small enhancements and
-bug fixes that retain backward compatibility.
-The value of this variable is returned by the \fBinfo tclversion\fR
-command.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-eval(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-arithmetic, bytecode, compiler, error, environment, POSIX, precision, subprocess, variables
diff --git a/raw/mann/tell.n b/raw/mann/tell.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ee7862b..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/tell.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,270 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tell.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tell.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tell n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tell \- Return current access position for an open channel
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtell \fIchannelId\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-.VS 8.1
-Returns an integer string giving the current access position in
-\fIchannelId\fR. This value returned is a byte offset that can be passed to
-\fBseek\fR in order to set the channel to a particular position. Note
-that this value is in terms of bytes, not characters like \fBread\fR.
-.VE 8.1
-The value returned is -1 for channels that do not support
-seeking.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), open(n), close(n), gets(n), seek(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-access position, channel, seeking
diff --git a/raw/mann/time.n b/raw/mann/time.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 35fb1bd..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/time.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,271 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: time.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: time.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH time n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-time \- Time the execution of a script
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtime \fIscript\fR ?\fIcount\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command will call the Tcl interpreter \fIcount\fR
-times to evaluate \fIscript\fR (or once if \fIcount\fR isn't
-specified). It will then return a string of the form
-.CS
-\fB503 microseconds per iteration\fR
-.CE
-which indicates the average amount of time required per iteration,
-in microseconds.
-Time is measured in elapsed time, not CPU time.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-clock(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-script, time
diff --git a/raw/mann/tk.n b/raw/mann/tk.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 5bf4c98..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/tk.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,317 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tk.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tk.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk \- Manipulate Tk internal state
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtk\fR command provides access to miscellaneous
-elements of Tk's internal state.
-Most of the information manipulated by this command pertains to the
-application as a whole, or to a screen or display, rather than to a
-particular window.
-The command can take any of a number of different forms
-depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are:
-.TP
-\fBtk appname \fR?\fInewName\fR?
-If \fInewName\fR isn't specified, this command returns the name
-of the application (the name that may be used in \fBsend\fR
-commands to communicate with the application).
-If \fInewName\fR is specified, then the name of the application
-is changed to \fInewName\fR.
-If the given name is already in use, then a suffix of the form
-``\fB #2\fR'' or ``\fB #3\fR'' is appended in order to make the name unique.
-The command's result is the name actually chosen.
-\fInewName\fR should not start with a capital letter.
-This will interfere with option processing, since names starting with
-capitals are assumed to be classes; as a result, Tk may not
-be able to find some options for the application.
-If sends have been disabled by deleting the \fBsend\fR command,
-this command will reenable them and recreate the \fBsend\fR
-command.
-.TP
-\fBtk scaling \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fInumber\fR?
-.
-Sets and queries the current scaling factor used by Tk to convert between
-physical units (for example, points, inches, or millimeters) and pixels. The
-\fInumber\fR argument is a floating point number that specifies the number of
-pixels per point on \fIwindow\fR's display. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is
-omitted, it defaults to the main window. If the \fInumber\fR argument is
-omitted, the current value of the scaling factor is returned.
-.RS
-.PP
-A ``point'' is a unit of measurement equal to 1/72 inch. A scaling factor
-of 1.0 corresponds to 1 pixel per point, which is equivalent to a standard
-72 dpi monitor. A scaling factor of 1.25 would mean 1.25 pixels per point,
-which is the setting for a 90 dpi monitor; setting the scaling factor to
-1.25 on a 72 dpi monitor would cause everything in the application to be
-displayed 1.25 times as large as normal. The initial value for the scaling
-factor is set when the application starts, based on properties of the
-installed monitor, but it can be changed at any time. Measurements made
-after the scaling factor is changed will use the new scaling factor, but it
-is undefined whether existing widgets will resize themselves dynamically to
-accomodate the new scaling factor.
-.RE
-.VS 8.3
-.TP
-\fBtk useinputmethods \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fIboolean\fR?
-.
-Sets and queries the state of whether Tk should use XIM (X Input Methods)
-for filtering events. The resulting state is returned. XIM is used in
-some locales (ie: Japanese, Korean), to handle special input devices. This
-feature is only significant on X. If XIM support is not available, this
-will always return 0. If the \fIwindow\fR argument is omitted, it defaults
-to the main window. If the \fIboolean\fR argument is omitted, the current
-state is returned. This is turned on by default for the main display.
-.VE
-.SH KEYWORDS
-application name, send
diff --git a/raw/mann/tk_dialog.n b/raw/mann/tk_dialog.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 852524a..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/tk_dialog.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,300 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tk_dialog.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tk_dialog.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tk_dialog n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tk_dialog \- Create modal dialog and wait for response
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtk_dialog \fIwindow title text bitmap default string string ...\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This procedure is part of the Tk script library.
-Its arguments describe a dialog box:
-.TP
-\fIwindow\fR
-Name of top-level window to use for dialog. Any existing window
-by this name is destroyed.
-.TP
-\fItitle\fR
-Text to appear in the window manager's title bar for the dialog.
-.TP
-\fItext\fR
-Message to appear in the top portion of the dialog box.
-.TP
-\fIbitmap\fR
-If non-empty, specifies a bitmap to display in the top portion of
-the dialog, to the left of the text.
-If this is an empty string then no bitmap is displayed in the dialog.
-.TP
-\fIdefault\fR
-If this is an integer greater than or equal to zero, then it gives
-the index of the button that is to be the default button for the dialog
-(0 for the leftmost button, and so on).
-If less than zero or an empty string then there won't be any default
-button.
-.TP
-\fIstring\fR
-There will be one button for each of these arguments.
-Each \fIstring\fR specifies text to display in a button,
-in order from left to right.
-.PP
-After creating a dialog box, \fBtk_dialog\fR waits for the user to
-select one of the buttons either by clicking on the button with the
-mouse or by typing return to invoke the default button (if any).
-Then it returns the index of the selected button: 0 for the leftmost
-button, 1 for the button next to it, and so on.
-If the dialog's window is destroyed before the user selects one
-of the buttons, then -1 is returned.
-.PP
-While waiting for the user to respond, \fBtk_dialog\fR sets a local
-grab. This prevents the user from interacting with the application
-in any way except to invoke the dialog box.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-bitmap, dialog, modal
diff --git a/raw/mann/tkerror.n b/raw/mann/tkerror.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e1e534..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/tkerror.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,273 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkerror.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkerror.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tkerror n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tkerror \- Command invoked to process background errors
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtkerror \fImessage\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-Note: as of Tk 4.1 the \fBtkerror\fR command has been renamed to
-\fBbgerror\fR because the event loop (which is what usually invokes
-it) is now part of Tcl. For backward compatibility
-the \fBbgerror\fR provided by the current Tk version still
-tries to call \fBtkerror\fR if there is one (or an auto loadable one),
-so old script defining that error handler should still work, but you
-should anyhow modify your scripts to use \fBbgerror\fR instead
-of \fBtkerror\fR because that support for the old name might vanish
-in the near future. If that call fails, \fBbgerror\fR
-posts a dialog showing the error and offering to see the stack trace
-to the user. If you want your own error management you should
-directly override \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR.
-Documentation for \fBbgerror\fR is available as part of Tcl's
-documentation.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-background error, reporting
diff --git a/raw/mann/tkvars.n b/raw/mann/tkvars.n
deleted file mode 100644
index f14efcf..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/tkvars.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,307 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkvars.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkvars.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tkvars n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tkvars \- Variables used or set by Tk
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The following Tcl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times
-in its execution:
-.TP 15
-\fBtk_library\fR
-This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library
-of Tcl scripts related to Tk. These scripts include an initialization
-file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up,
-plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors
-for widgets.
-The initial value of \fBtcl_library\fR is set when Tk is added to
-an interpreter; this is done by searching several different directories
-until one is found that contains an appropriate Tk startup script.
-If the \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR environment variable exists, then
-the directory it names is checked first.
-If \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR isn't set or doesn't refer to an appropriate
-directory, then Tk checks several other directories based on a
-compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory,
-the location of the binary containing the application, and the current
-working directory.
-The variable can be modified by an application to switch to a different
-library.
-.TP
-\fBtk_patchLevel\fR
-Contains a decimal integer giving the current patch level for Tk.
-The patch level is incremented for each new release or patch, and
-it uniquely identifies an official version of Tk.
-.TP
-\fBtkPriv\fR
-This variable is an array containing several pieces of information
-that are private to Tk. The elements of \fBtkPriv\fR are used by
-Tk library procedures and default bindings.
-They should not be accessed by any code outside Tk.
-.TP
-\fBtk_strictMotif\fR
-This variable is set to zero by default.
-If an application sets it to one, then Tk attempts to adhere as
-closely as possible to Motif look-and-feel standards.
-For example, active elements such as buttons and scrollbar
-sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them.
-.TP 15
-\fBtk_version\fR
-Tk sets this variable in the interpreter for each application.
-The variable holds the current version number of the Tk
-library in the form \fImajor\fR.\fIminor\fR. \fIMajor\fR and
-\fIminor\fR are integers. The major version number increases in
-any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible
-(i.e. whenever existing Tk applications and scripts may have to change to
-work with the new release). The minor version number increases with
-each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the
-major version number changes.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-variables, version
diff --git a/raw/mann/tkwait.n b/raw/mann/tkwait.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 252b4d7..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/tkwait.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkwait.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkwait.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtkwait variable \fIname\fR
-.sp
-\fBtkwait visibility \fIname\fR
-.sp
-\fBtkwait window \fIname\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBtkwait\fR command waits for one of several things to happen,
-then it returns without taking any other actions.
-The return value is always an empty string.
-If the first argument is \fBvariable\fR (or any abbreviation of
-it) then the second argument is the name of a global variable and the
-command waits for that variable to be modified.
-If the first argument is \fBvisibility\fR (or any abbreviation
-of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
-\fBtkwait\fR command waits for a change in its
-visibility state (as indicated by the arrival of a VisibilityNotify
-event). This form is typically used to wait for a newly-created
-window to appear on the screen before taking some action.
-If the first argument is \fBwindow\fR (or any abbreviation
-of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the
-\fBtkwait\fR command waits for that window to be destroyed.
-This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting
-with a dialog box before using the result of that interaction.
-.PP
-While the \fBtkwait\fR command is waiting it processes events in
-the normal fashion, so the application will continue to respond
-to user interactions.
-If an event handler invokes \fBtkwait\fR again, the nested call
-to \fBtkwait\fR must complete before the outer call can complete.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-variable, visibility, wait, window
diff --git a/raw/mann/trace.n b/raw/mann/trace.n
deleted file mode 100644
index ea010a4..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/trace.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: trace.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: trace.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH trace n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-trace \- Monitor variable accesses
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtrace \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command causes Tcl commands to be executed whenever certain operations are
-invoked. At present, only variable tracing is implemented. The
-legal \fIoption\fR's (which may be abbreviated) are:
-.TP
-\fBtrace variable \fIname ops command\fR
-Arrange for \fIcommand\fR to be executed whenever variable \fIname\fR
-is accessed in one of the ways given by \fIops\fR. \fIName\fR may
-refer to a normal variable, an element of an array, or to an array
-as a whole (i.e. \fIname\fR may be just the name of an array, with no
-parenthesized index). If \fIname\fR refers to a whole array, then
-\fIcommand\fR is invoked whenever any element of the array is
-manipulated. If the variable does not exist, it will be created but
-will not be given a value, so it will be visible to \fBnamespace which\fR
-queries, but not to \fBinfo exists\fR queries.
-.RS
-.PP
-\fIOps\fR indicates which operations are of interest, and consists of
-one or more of the following letters:
-.TP
-\fBr\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the variable is read.
-.TP
-\fBw\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the variable is written.
-.TP
-\fBu\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the variable is unset. Variables
-can be unset explicitly with the \fBunset\fR command, or
-implicitly when procedures return (all of their local variables
-are unset). Variables are also unset when interpreters are
-deleted, but traces will not be invoked because there is no
-interpreter in which to execute them.
-.PP
-When the trace triggers, three arguments are appended to
-\fIcommand\fR so that the actual command is as follows:
-.CS
-\fIcommand name1 name2 op\fR
-.CE
-\fIName1\fR and \fIname2\fR give the name(s) for the variable
-being accessed: if the variable is a scalar then \fIname1\fR
-gives the variable's name and \fIname2\fR is an empty string;
-if the variable is an array element then \fIname1\fR gives the
-name of the array and name2 gives the index into the array;
-if an entire array is being deleted and the trace was registered
-on the overall array, rather than a single element, then \fIname1\fR
-gives the array name and \fIname2\fR is an empty string.
-\fIName1\fR and \fIname2\fR are not necessarily the same as the
-name used in the \fBtrace variable\fR command: the \fBupvar\fR
-command allows a procedure to reference a variable under a
-different name.
-\fIOp\fR indicates what operation is being performed on the
-variable, and is one of \fBr\fR, \fBw\fR, or \fBu\fR as
-defined above.
-.PP
-\fICommand\fR executes in the same context as the code that invoked
-the traced operation: if the variable was accessed as part of a
-Tcl procedure, then \fIcommand\fR will have access to the same
-local variables as code in the procedure. This context may be
-different than the context in which the trace was created.
-If \fIcommand\fR invokes a procedure (which it normally does) then
-the procedure will have to use \fBupvar\fR or \fBuplevel\fR if it
-wishes to access the traced variable.
-Note also that \fIname1\fR may not necessarily be the same as the name
-used to set the trace on the variable; differences can occur if
-the access is made through a variable defined with the \fBupvar\fR
-command.
-.PP
-For read and write traces, \fIcommand\fR can modify
-the variable to affect the result of the traced operation.
-If \fIcommand\fR modifies the value of a variable during a
-read or write trace, then the new value will be returned as the
-result of the traced operation.
-The return value from \fIcommand\fR is ignored except that
-if it returns an error of any sort then the traced operation
-also returns an error with
-the same error message returned by the trace command
-(this mechanism can be used to implement read-only variables, for
-example).
-For write traces, \fIcommand\fR is invoked after the variable's
-value has been changed; it can write a new value into the variable
-to override the original value specified in the write operation.
-To implement read-only variables, \fIcommand\fR will have to restore
-the old value of the variable.
-.PP
-While \fIcommand\fR is executing during a read or write trace, traces
-on the variable are temporarily disabled.
-This means that reads and writes invoked by
-\fIcommand\fR will occur directly, without invoking \fIcommand\fR
-(or any other traces) again.
-However, if \fIcommand\fR unsets the variable then unset traces
-will be invoked.
-.PP
-When an unset trace is invoked, the variable has already been
-deleted: it will appear to be undefined with no traces.
-If an unset occurs because of a procedure return, then the
-trace will be invoked in the variable context of the procedure
-being returned to: the stack frame of the returning procedure
-will no longer exist.
-Traces are not disabled during unset traces, so if an unset trace
-command creates a new trace and accesses the variable, the
-trace will be invoked.
-Any errors in unset traces are ignored.
-.PP
-If there are multiple traces on a variable they are invoked
-in order of creation, most-recent first.
-If one trace returns an error, then no further traces are
-invoked for the variable.
-If an array element has a trace set, and there is also a trace
-set on the array as a whole, the trace on the overall array
-is invoked before the one on the element.
-.PP
-Once created, the trace remains in effect either until the
-trace is removed with the \fBtrace vdelete\fR command described
-below, until the variable is unset, or until the interpreter
-is deleted.
-Unsetting an element of array will remove any traces on that
-element, but will not remove traces on the overall array.
-.PP
-This command returns an empty string.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBtrace vdelete \fIname ops command\fR
-If there is a trace set on variable \fIname\fR with the
-operations and command given by \fIops\fR and \fIcommand\fR,
-then the trace is removed, so that \fIcommand\fR will never
-again be invoked.
-Returns an empty string.
-.TP
-\fBtrace vinfo \fIname\fR
-Returns a list containing one element for each trace
-currently set on variable \fIname\fR.
-Each element of the list is itself a list containing two
-elements, which are the \fIops\fR and \fIcommand\fR associated
-with the trace.
-If \fIname\fR doesn't exist or doesn't have any traces set, then
-the result of the command will be an empty string.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-read, variable, write, trace, unset
diff --git a/raw/mann/unknown.n b/raw/mann/unknown.n
deleted file mode 100644
index c52b6d4..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/unknown.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,313 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: unknown.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: unknown.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH unknown n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-unknown \- Handle attempts to use non-existent commands
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBunknown \fIcmdName \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is invoked by the Tcl interpreter whenever a script
-tries to invoke a command that doesn't exist. The implementation
-of \fBunknown\fR isn't part of the Tcl core; instead, it is a
-library procedure defined by default when Tcl starts up. You
-can override the default \fBunknown\fR to change its functionality.
-.PP
-If the Tcl interpreter encounters a command name for which there
-is not a defined command, then Tcl checks for the existence of
-a command named \fBunknown\fR.
-If there is no such command, then the interpreter returns an
-error.
-If the \fBunknown\fR command exists, then it is invoked with
-arguments consisting of the fully-substituted name and arguments
-for the original non-existent command.
-The \fBunknown\fR command typically does things like searching
-through library directories for a command procedure with the name
-\fIcmdName\fR, or expanding abbreviated command names to full-length,
-or automatically executing unknown commands as sub-processes.
-In some cases (such as expanding abbreviations) \fBunknown\fR will
-change the original command slightly and then (re-)execute it.
-The result of the \fBunknown\fR command is used as the result for
-the original non-existent command.
-.PP
-The default implementation of \fBunknown\fR behaves as follows.
-It first calls the \fBauto_load\fR library procedure to load the command.
-If this succeeds, then it executes the original command with its
-original arguments.
-If the auto-load fails then \fBunknown\fR calls \fBauto_execok\fR
-to see if there is an executable file by the name \fIcmd\fR.
-If so, it invokes the Tcl \fBexec\fR command
-with \fIcmd\fR and all the \fIargs\fR as arguments.
-If \fIcmd\fR can't be auto-executed, \fBunknown\fR checks to
-see if the command was invoked at top-level and outside of any
-script. If so, then \fBunknown\fR takes two additional steps.
-First, it sees if \fIcmd\fR has one of the following three forms:
-\fB!!\fR, \fB!\fIevent\fR, or \fB^\fIold\fB^\fInew\fR?\fB^\fR?.
-If so, then \fBunknown\fR carries out history substitution
-in the same way that \fBcsh\fR would for these constructs.
-Finally, \fBunknown\fR checks to see if \fIcmd\fR is
-a unique abbreviation for an existing Tcl command.
-If so, it expands the command name and executes the command with
-the original arguments.
-If none of the above efforts has been able to execute
-the command, \fBunknown\fR generates an error return.
-If the global variable \fBauto_noload\fR is defined, then the auto-load
-step is skipped.
-If the global variable \fBauto_noexec\fR is defined then the
-auto-exec step is skipped.
-Under normal circumstances the return value from \fBunknown\fR
-is the return value from the command that was eventually
-executed.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-info(n), proc(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-error, non-existent command
diff --git a/raw/mann/unset.n b/raw/mann/unset.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 26f65f3..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/unset.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: unset.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: unset.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH unset n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-unset \- Delete variables
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBunset \fIname \fR?\fIname name ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command removes one or more variables.
-Each \fIname\fR is a variable name, specified in any of the
-ways acceptable to the \fBset\fR command.
-If a \fIname\fR refers to an element of an array then that
-element is removed without affecting the rest of the array.
-If a \fIname\fR consists of an array name with no parenthesized
-index, then the entire array is deleted.
-The \fBunset\fR command returns an empty string as result.
-An error occurs if any of the variables doesn't exist, and any variables
-after the non-existent one are not deleted.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-remove, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/update.n b/raw/mann/update.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d7e4fe3..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/update.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: update.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: update.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH update n 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-update \- Process pending events and idle callbacks
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBupdate\fR ?\fBidletasks\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is used to bring the application ``up to date''
-by entering the event loop repeatedly until all pending events
-(including idle callbacks) have been processed.
-.PP
-If the \fBidletasks\fR keyword is specified as an argument to the
-command, then no new events or errors are processed; only idle
-callbacks are invoked.
-This causes operations that are normally deferred, such as display
-updates and window layout calculations, to be performed immediately.
-.PP
-The \fBupdate idletasks\fR command is useful in scripts where
-changes have been made to the application's state and you want those
-changes to appear on the display immediately, rather than waiting
-for the script to complete. Most display updates are performed as
-idle callbacks, so \fBupdate idletasks\fR will cause them to run.
-However, there are some kinds of updates that only happen in
-response to events, such as those triggered by window size changes;
-these updates will not occur in \fBupdate idletasks\fR.
-.PP
-The \fBupdate\fR command with no options is useful in scripts where
-you are performing a long-running computation but you still want
-the application to respond to events such as user interactions; if
-you occasionally call \fBupdate\fR then user input will be processed
-during the next call to \fBupdate\fR.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-after(n), bgerror(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-event, flush, handler, idle, update
diff --git a/raw/mann/uplevel.n b/raw/mann/uplevel.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 21258f5..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/uplevel.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,315 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: uplevel.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: uplevel.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH uplevel n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-uplevel \- Execute a script in a different stack frame
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBuplevel \fR?\fIlevel\fR?\fI arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-All of the \fIarg\fR arguments are concatenated as if they had
-been passed to \fBconcat\fR; the result is then evaluated in the
-variable context indicated by \fIlevel\fR. \fBUplevel\fR returns
-the result of that evaluation.
-.PP
-If \fIlevel\fR is an integer then
-it gives a distance (up the procedure calling stack) to move before
-executing the command. If \fIlevel\fR consists of \fB#\fR followed by
-a number then the number gives an absolute level number. If \fIlevel\fR
-is omitted then it defaults to \fB1\fR. \fILevel\fR cannot be
-defaulted if the first \fIcommand\fR argument starts with a digit or \fB#\fR.
-.PP
-For example, suppose that procedure \fBa\fR was invoked
-from top-level, and that it called \fBb\fR, and that \fBb\fR called \fBc\fR.
-Suppose that \fBc\fR invokes the \fBuplevel\fR command. If \fIlevel\fR
-is \fB1\fR or \fB#2\fR or omitted, then the command will be executed
-in the variable context of \fBb\fR. If \fIlevel\fR is \fB2\fR or \fB#1\fR
-then the command will be executed in the variable context of \fBa\fR.
-If \fIlevel\fR is \fB3\fR or \fB#0\fR then the command will be executed
-at top-level (only global variables will be visible).
-.PP
-The \fBuplevel\fR command causes the invoking procedure to disappear
-from the procedure calling stack while the command is being executed.
-In the above example, suppose \fBc\fR invokes the command
-.CS
-\fBuplevel 1 {set x 43; d}\fR
-.CE
-where \fBd\fR is another Tcl procedure. The \fBset\fR command will
-modify the variable \fBx\fR in \fBb\fR's context, and \fBd\fR will execute
-at level 3, as if called from \fBb\fR. If it in turn executes
-the command
-.CS
-\fBuplevel {set x 42}\fR
-.CE
-then the \fBset\fR command will modify the same variable \fBx\fR in \fBb\fR's
-context: the procedure \fBc\fR does not appear to be on the call stack
-when \fBd\fR is executing. The command ``\fBinfo level\fR'' may
-be used to obtain the level of the current procedure.
-.PP
-\fBUplevel\fR makes it possible to implement new control
-constructs as Tcl procedures (for example, \fBuplevel\fR could
-be used to implement the \fBwhile\fR construct as a Tcl procedure).
-.PP
-\fBnamespace eval\fR is another way (besides procedure calls)
-that the Tcl naming context can change.
-It adds a call frame to the stack to represent the namespace context.
-This means each \fBnamespace eval\fR command
-counts as another call level for \fBuplevel\fR and \fBupvar\fR commands.
-For example, \fBinfo level 1\fR will return a list
-describing a command that is either
-the outermost procedure call or the outermost \fBnamespace eval\fR command.
-Also, \fBuplevel #0\fR evaluates a script
-at top-level in the outermost namespace (the global namespace).
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-namespace(n), upvar(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-context, level, namespace, stack frame, variables
diff --git a/raw/mann/upvar.n b/raw/mann/upvar.n
deleted file mode 100644
index e60d86e..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/upvar.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,347 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: upvar.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: upvar.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH upvar n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-upvar \- Create link to variable in a different stack frame
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBupvar \fR?\fIlevel\fR? \fIotherVar myVar \fR?\fIotherVar myVar \fR...?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command arranges for one or more local variables in the current
-procedure to refer to variables in an enclosing procedure call or
-to global variables.
-\fILevel\fR may have any of the forms permitted for the \fBuplevel\fR
-command, and may be omitted if the first letter of the first \fIotherVar\fR
-isn't \fB#\fR or a digit (it defaults to \fB1\fR).
-For each \fIotherVar\fR argument, \fBupvar\fR makes the variable
-by that name in the procedure frame given by \fIlevel\fR (or at
-global level, if \fIlevel\fR is \fB#0\fR) accessible
-in the current procedure by the name given in the corresponding
-\fImyVar\fR argument.
-The variable named by \fIotherVar\fR need not exist at the time of the
-call; it will be created the first time \fImyVar\fR is referenced, just like
-an ordinary variable. There must not exist a variable by the
-name \fImyVar\fR at the time \fBupvar\fR is invoked.
-\fIMyVar\fR is always treated as the name of a variable, not an
-array element. Even if the name looks like an array element,
-such as \fBa(b)\fR, a regular variable is created.
-\fIOtherVar\fR may refer to a scalar variable, an array,
-or an array element.
-\fBUpvar\fR returns an empty string.
-.PP
-The \fBupvar\fR command simplifies the implementation of call-by-name
-procedure calling and also makes it easier to build new control constructs
-as Tcl procedures.
-For example, consider the following procedure:
-.CS
-\fBproc add2 name {
- upvar $name x
- set x [expr $x+2]
-}\fR
-.CE
-\fBAdd2\fR is invoked with an argument giving the name of a variable,
-and it adds two to the value of that variable.
-Although \fBadd2\fR could have been implemented using \fBuplevel\fR
-instead of \fBupvar\fR, \fBupvar\fR makes it simpler for \fBadd2\fR
-to access the variable in the caller's procedure frame.
-.PP
-\fBnamespace eval\fR is another way (besides procedure calls)
-that the Tcl naming context can change.
-It adds a call frame to the stack to represent the namespace context.
-This means each \fBnamespace eval\fR command
-counts as another call level for \fBuplevel\fR and \fBupvar\fR commands.
-For example, \fBinfo level 1\fR will return a list
-describing a command that is either
-the outermost procedure call or the outermost \fBnamespace eval\fR command.
-Also, \fBuplevel #0\fR evaluates a script
-at top-level in the outermost namespace (the global namespace).
-.PP
-.VS
-If an upvar variable is unset (e.g. \fBx\fR in \fBadd2\fR above), the
-\fBunset\fR operation affects the variable it is linked to, not the
-upvar variable. There is no way to unset an upvar variable except
-by exiting the procedure in which it is defined. However, it is
-possible to retarget an upvar variable by executing another \fBupvar\fR
-command.
-
-.SH Traces and upvar
-.PP
-Upvar interacts with traces in a straightforward but possibly
-unexpected manner. If a variable trace is defined on \fIotherVar\fR, that
-trace will be triggered by actions involving \fImyVar\fR. However,
-the trace procedure will be passed the name of \fImyVar\fR, rather
-than the name of \fIotherVar\fR. Thus, the output of the following code
-will be \fBlocalVar\fR rather than \fBoriginalVar\fR:
-.CS
-\fBproc traceproc { name index op } {
- puts $name
-}
-proc setByUpvar { name value } {
- upvar $name localVar
- set localVar $value
-}
-set originalVar 1
-trace variable originalVar w traceproc
-setByUpvar originalVar 2
-}\fR
-.CE
-
-If \fIotherVar\fR refers to an element of an array, then variable
-traces set for the entire array will not be invoked when \fImyVar\fR
-is accessed (but traces on the particular element will still be
-invoked). In particular, if the array is \fBenv\fR, then changes
-made to \fImyVar\fR will not be passed to subprocesses correctly.
-.VE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-global(n), namespace(n), uplevel(n), variable(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-context, frame, global, level, namespace, procedure, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/variable.n b/raw/mann/variable.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e9974f..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/variable.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,301 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993-1997 Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: variable.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: variable.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH variable n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-variable \- create and initialize a namespace variable
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBvariable \fR?\fIname value...\fR? \fIname \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command is normally used within a
-\fBnamespace eval\fR command to create one or more variables
-within a namespace.
-Each variable \fIname\fR is initialized with \fIvalue\fR.
-The \fIvalue\fR for the last variable is optional.
-.PP
-If a variable \fIname\fR does not exist, it is created.
-In this case, if \fIvalue\fR is specified,
-it is assigned to the newly created variable.
-If no \fIvalue\fR is specified, the new variable is left undefined.
-If the variable already exists,
-it is set to \fIvalue\fR if \fIvalue\fR is specified
-or left unchanged if no \fIvalue\fR is given.
-Normally, \fIname\fR is unqualified
-(does not include the names of any containing namespaces),
-and the variable is created in the current namespace.
-If \fIname\fR includes any namespace qualifiers,
-the variable is created in the specified namespace. If the variable
-is not defined, it will be visible to the \fBnamespace which\fR
-command, but not to the \fBinfo exists\fR command.
-.PP
-If the \fBvariable\fR command is executed inside a Tcl procedure,
-it creates local variables
-linked to the corresponding namespace variables (and therefore these
-variables are listed by \fBinfo locals\fR.)
-In this way the \fBvariable\fR command resembles the \fBglobal\fR command,
-although the \fBglobal\fR command
-only links to variables in the global namespace.
-If any \fIvalue\fRs are given,
-they are used to modify the values of the associated namespace variables.
-If a namespace variable does not exist,
-it is created and optionally initialized.
-.PP
-A \fIname\fR argument cannot reference an element within an array.
-Instead, \fIname\fR should reference the entire array,
-and the initialization \fIvalue\fR should be left off.
-After the variable has been declared,
-elements within the array can be set using ordinary
-\fBset\fR or \fBarray\fR commands.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-global(n), namespace(n), upvar(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-global, namespace, procedure, variable
diff --git a/raw/mann/vwait.n b/raw/mann/vwait.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d55c29..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/vwait.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,278 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: vwait.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: vwait.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH vwait n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-vwait \- Process events until a variable is written
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBvwait\fR \fIvarName\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command enters the Tcl event loop to process events, blocking
-the application if no events are ready. It continues processing
-events until some event handler sets the value of variable
-\fIvarName\fR. Once \fIvarName\fR has been set, the \fBvwait\fR
-command will return as soon as the event handler that modified
-\fIvarName\fR completes. \fIvarName\fR must globally scoped
-(either with a call to \fBglobal\fR for the \fIvarName\fR, or with
-the full namespace path specification).
-.PP
-In some cases the \fBvwait\fR command may not return immediately
-after \fIvarName\fR is set. This can happen if the event handler
-that sets \fIvarName\fR does not complete immediately. For example,
-if an event handler sets \fIvarName\fR and then itself calls
-\fBvwait\fR to wait for a different variable, then it may not return
-for a long time. During this time the top-level \fBvwait\fR is
-blocked waiting for the event handler to complete, so it cannot
-return either.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-global(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-event, variable, wait
diff --git a/raw/mann/while.n b/raw/mann/while.n
deleted file mode 100644
index 018636c..0000000
--- a/raw/mann/while.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,293 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: while.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\" needed; use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and
-'\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\" enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\" End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\" Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\" End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument
-'\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\" End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\" Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\" End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The
-'\" options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\" by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the
-'\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\" the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\" RCS: @(#) $Id: while.n,v 1.1 2003/12/20 03:31:54 bbbush Exp $
-'\"
-'\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
-.if t .wh -1.3i ^B
-.nr ^l \n(.l
-.ad b
-'\" # Start an argument description
-.de AP
-.ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
-.el \{\
-. ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu
-. el .TP 15
-.\}
-.ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
-.ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
-.\".b
-.\}
-.el \{\
-.br
-.ie !"\\$2"" \{\
-\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP
-.\}
-.el \{\
-\&\\fI\\$1\\fP
-.\}
-.\}
-..
-'\" # define tabbing values for .AP
-.de AS
-.nr )A 10n
-.if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
-.nr )B \\n()Au+15n
-.\"
-.if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n
-.nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
-..
-.AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\" # BS - start boxed text
-'\" # ^y = starting y location
-'\" # ^b = 1
-.de BS
-.br
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 1u
-.if n .nf
-.if n .ti 0
-.if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
-.if n .fi
-..
-'\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
-.de BE
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-.ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul'
-.el \{\
-.\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of
-.\" box if the box started on an earlier page.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.el \}\
-\h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul'
-.\}
-.\}
-.fi
-.br
-.nr ^b 0
-..
-'\" # VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\" # ^Y = starting y location
-'\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter)
-.de VS
-.if !"\\$2"" .br
-.mk ^Y
-.ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
-.el .nr ^v 1u
-..
-'\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar
-.de VE
-.ie n 'mc
-.el \{\
-.ev 2
-.nf
-.ti 0
-.mk ^t
-\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n'
-.sp -1
-.fi
-.ev
-.\}
-.nr ^v 0
-..
-'\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current
-'\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\" # page bottom macro.
-.de ^B
-.ev 2
-'ti 0
-'nf
-.mk ^t
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page,
-.\" draw two sides but no top otherwise.
-.ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu
-\kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c
-.\}
-.bp
-'fi
-.ev
-.if \\n(^b \{\
-.mk ^y
-.nr ^b 2
-.\}
-.if \\n(^v \{\
-.mk ^Y
-.\}
-..
-'\" # DS - begin display
-.de DS
-.RS
-.nf
-.sp
-..
-'\" # DE - end display
-.de DE
-.fi
-.RE
-.sp
-..
-'\" # SO - start of list of standard options
-.de SO
-.SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 5.5c 11c
-.ft B
-..
-'\" # SE - end of list of standard options
-.de SE
-.fi
-.ft R
-.LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
-..
-'\" # OP - start of full description for a single option
-.de OP
-.LP
-.nf
-.ta 4c
-Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR
-Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR
-Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR
-.fi
-.IP
-..
-'\" # CS - begin code excerpt
-.de CS
-.RS
-.nf
-.ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
-..
-'\" # CE - end code excerpt
-.de CE
-.fi
-.RE
-..
-.de UL
-\\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
-..
-.TH while n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-while \- Execute script repeatedly as long as a condition is met
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBwhile \fItest body\fR
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBwhile\fR command evaluates \fItest\fR as an expression
-(in the same way that \fBexpr\fR evaluates its argument).
-The value of the expression must a proper boolean
-value; if it is a true value
-then \fIbody\fR is executed by passing it to the Tcl interpreter.
-Once \fIbody\fR has been executed then \fItest\fR is evaluated
-again, and the process repeats until eventually \fItest\fR
-evaluates to a false boolean value. \fBContinue\fR
-commands may be executed inside \fIbody\fR to terminate the current
-iteration of the loop, and \fBbreak\fR
-commands may be executed inside \fIbody\fR to cause immediate
-termination of the \fBwhile\fR command. The \fBwhile\fR command
-always returns an empty string.
-.PP
-Note: \fItest\fR should almost always be enclosed in braces. If not,
-variable substitutions will be made before the \fBwhile\fR
-command starts executing, which means that variable changes
-made by the loop body will not be considered in the expression.
-This is likely to result in an infinite loop. If \fItest\fR is
-enclosed in braces, variable substitutions are delayed until the
-expression is evaluated (before
-each loop iteration), so changes in the variables will be visible.
-For an example, try the following script with and without the braces
-around \fB$x<10\fR:
-.CS
-set x 0
-while {$x<10} {
- puts "x is $x"
- incr x
-}
-.CE
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-break(n), continue(n), for(n), foreach(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-boolean value, loop, test, while
diff --git a/utils/bi2fbfi.pl b/utils/bi2fbfi.pl
deleted file mode 100755
index e7ed116..0000000
--- a/utils/bi2fbfi.pl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/env perl
-#
-# 将html 格式中的<B></B>转换为roff 格式中的\fB \fR
-# <I></I> 也转换为 \fI \fR
-#
-while(<>){
- s/\<b\>(.*?)\<\/b\>/\\fB\1\\fR/g;
- s/\<B\>(.*?)\<\/B\>/\\fB\1\\fR/g;
- s/\<i\>(.*?)\<\/i\>/\\fI\1\\fR/g;
- s/\<I\>(.*?)\<\/I\>/\\fI\1\\fR/g;
- print
- }
diff --git a/utils/html2man b/utils/html2man
deleted file mode 100755
index 039985d..0000000
--- a/utils/html2man
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/perl
-while(<>){
- s/gb2312/utf8/g;
- s/<DD>//ig;
- s/<DT>//ig;
- s/<DL>//ig;
- s/<\/DL>//ig;
- print
-}
diff --git a/utils/man2html b/utils/man2html
deleted file mode 100755
index 7b167b5..0000000
--- a/utils/man2html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-# bbbush <bbbush at 163.com> 20031123
-# you need to set LC_ALL to zh_CN.GB18030 before you use this script
-# to process GB encoded man pages.
-
-man2html="/usr/bin/groff -Thtml -mandoc"
-if [ ! $# -le "1" ] ;then
- echo "Error! $0 Need exactly 1 arguments and act as a pipe"
- exit
-elif [ $# -eq 1 ] ;then
- $man2html $1 2>/dev/null
-else
- $man2html - 2>/dev/null
-fi
diff --git a/utils/man2html.sh b/utils/man2html.sh
deleted file mode 100644
index d396883..0000000
--- a/utils/man2html.sh
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-#! /bin/sh
-
-# $Id: man2html.sh,v 1.1 2003/11/24 05:10:00 bbbush Exp $
-# www.linuxforum.net CMPP
-# simple shell to process all the man pages, change them to html file
-# Copyright (c) He Weiping(Laser Henry) (laser at zhengmai.com.cn)2000
-# You may freely re-write and/or re-distrabute this scrip
-# all rights revoked
-#
-# Laser 2000/10/11 0.0.1 firstdraft
-# Laser 2000/10/31 0.0.2 change those command to bin dir
-# Laser 2000/10/31 0.0.3 fix the file types error
-#
-
-#TOPDIR=$(cat /tmp/CMANROOT )
-TOPDIR=$(echo $CMANROOT )
-HTMLSUBDIR=html
-HTMLFILE=
-CMDPATH=$TOPDIR/bin
-
-usage() {
- echo "Usage: man2html {the_directory_you_containing_the_man_file}"
-}
-
-prepare() {
- echo "you need to prepare the cman's root"
- echo "use command:"
-# echo "$ pwd >/tmp/CMANROOT"
- echo "$ CMANROOT=\`pwd\`>>~/.bash_profile"
- echo "in your cman's dir"
-}
-
-
-if [ "$#" = "0" ]; then
- usage
- exit 1
-fi
-
-if [ "$TOPDIR" = "" ]; then
- prepare
- exit 1
-fi
-
-
-for i in $*
- do
- if [ -d $i ]; then
- if [ "$i" != "$HTMLSUBDIR" ]; then
- cd $i
- echo "we are now in $i"
- $CMDPATH/man2html.sh *
- cd ..
- fi
- elif [ "$i" != "man2html.sh" ]; then
-
- FILETYPE=$(file $i |cut -f2 -d ' ')
-
- if [ "$FILETYPE" = "troff" ]; then
-
- echo "processing $i"
- HTMLFILE=$(echo $i |cut -d. -f 1)
- echo "generating $HTMLFILE.html"
- man2html $i > $HTMLFILE.html
- cat $HTMLFILE.html | $CMDPATH/htmlcharfix.pl > $TOPDIR/html/$HTMLFILE.html
- rm $HTMLFILE.html
- fi
- fi
- done
-
-exit 0
diff --git a/utils/name.pl b/utils/name.pl
deleted file mode 100644
index 06e84bf..0000000
--- a/utils/name.pl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
-while(<>){
- s/^\.S([H|h])"?\s*名\s*字\s*(\(?NAME\)?"?)?.*$/\.S\1 NAME/;
- s/^\.S([Hh])\s*Name/\.S\1 NAME/;
- s/^\.S([Hh])\s*命令名/\.S\1 NAME/;
- s/^\.SH NAME \[?名字\]?/\.SH NAME/;
- print
-}
diff --git a/utils/pre-trans.pl b/utils/pre-trans.pl
deleted file mode 100755
index a25e997..0000000
--- a/utils/pre-trans.pl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,24 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/env perl
-#
-# 将标题替换为中文和英文混合的标准标题
-# 将签名添加在文档最后
-#
-while (<>){
- s/^\.SH "?SYNOPSIS"?/\.SH "总览 SYNOPSIS"/;
- s/^\.SH "?DESCRIPTION"?/\.SH "描述 DESCRIPTION"/;
- s/^\.SH "?SEE ALSO"?/\.SH "参见 SEE ALSO"/;
- s/^\.SH "?AUTHOR"?/\.SH "作者 AUTHOR"/;
- s/^\.SH "?KEYWORDS"?/\.SH "关键字 KEYWORDS"/;
- s/^\.SH "?OPTIONS"?/\.SH "选项 OPTIONS"/;
- s/^\.SH "?EXAMPLE"?/\.SH "范例 EXAMPLE"/;
- print
-}
-print <<EOF;
-
-.SH "[中文版维护人]"
-.B 姓名 <email>
-.SH "[中文版最新更新]"
-.BR yyyy.mm.dd
-.SH "《中国linux论坛man手册翻译计划》:"
-.BI http://cmpp.linuxforum.net
-EOF
diff --git a/utils/release-manpages b/utils/release-manpages
deleted file mode 100755
index d92f522..0000000
--- a/utils/release-manpages
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-#!/bin/sh
-manpages=man-pages-zh_CN
-release=$manpages-1.5
-rm -rf $manpages*
-rm -rf finally
-cvs -d:pserver:anonymous at sf.linuxforum.net:/cvsroot/cmpp export -r HEAD $manpages
-mv $manpages $release
-count=`wc -l $release/DOCS/00TRANSLATED`
-tar zcf $release.tar.gz $release
-rpmbuild -ta $release.tar.gz
-mkdir finally
-mv /usr/src/redhat/SRPMS/$manpages*.src.rpm finally/
-mv /usr/src/redhat/RPMS/noarch/$manpages*.rpm finally/
-mv $release.tar.gz finally/
-rm -rf $manpages*
-echo $count
diff --git a/utils/update-cman.sh b/utils/update-cman.sh
deleted file mode 100644
index 80cfacb..0000000
--- a/utils/update-cman.sh
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-rm -rf GB/mann
-for i in `cat DOCS/00TRANSLATED` ; do cp -f GB/$i ../cman/$i ; done
diff --git a/utils/zhtw_2_zhcn.pl b/utils/zhtw_2_zhcn.pl
deleted file mode 100755
index 3a9b4ee..0000000
--- a/utils/zhtw_2_zhcn.pl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1821 +0,0 @@
-#!/usr/bin/perl -p
-# 繁简体中文习惯用语对译工具 T2S 0.3 版 2003-07-27 11:10
-# Come From AutoWork Toolkits.
-# Welcome to our team: http://i18n.linux.net.cn
-# Copyleft Developer: Anita(即时科技)；Improver: Liu Songhe；Dictionary Provider：Zong Yaotang
-next if /^%/;
-next if /%NC$/;
-
-s#(?<=\\epsfig\{file=)TL-img/#TL-img-CN/#g;
-s#(?<=\\epsfig\{file=)TO-img/#TO-img-CN/#g;
-s#(?<=\\epsfig\{file=)TS-img/#TS-img-CN/#g;
-s#\\CJKfamily\{hei00l\}#\\CJKfamily\{ghei00bu\}#g;
-s#\\CJKfamily\{fzht_gb18030\}#\\CJKfamily\{fzht_gb18030_gb\}#g;
-
-while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)—/$1─/) {}
-while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)「/$1“/) {}
-while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)」/$1”/) {}
-while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*(?:、|，|。|：|；|！|？))~/$1/) {}
-
-
-s/将视窗还原成标准的大小/将窗口恢复到正常大小/g;
-
-s/硬体疑难排解代理程式/自动跳过驱动程序/g;
-s/请洽询您的系统管理员/请与您的系统管理员联系/g;
-s/切换到下一个文件视窗/切换到下一个文档窗口/g;
-s/切换到前一个文件视窗/切换到上一个文档窗口/g;
-s/启动内嵌或连结的物件/激活嵌入的或链接的对象/g;
-
-s/确认从原始多重分割/确认多次脱离源位置/g;
-s/将视窗缩成一个图示/将窗口缩为图标/g;
-
-s/掌上型电子游乐器/手掌机/g;
-s/一并寻找子资料夹/包含子文件夹/g;
-s/所有视窗缩到最小/最小化所有窗口/g;
-s/设定列印页的格式/页面设置/g;
-s/取得印表机连接埠/捕获打印机端口/g;
-s/请洽询系统管理员/请与系统管理员联系/g;
-s/切换到其他的作业/打开任务列表/g;
-s/洽询电脑制造厂商/与计算机厂商联系/g;
-s/目的地磁碟机已满/目标盘已满/g;
-s/分享档案及印表机/文件和打印共享/g;
-
-
-s/综合性办公大楼/商住楼/g;
-s/重复前次的动作/重复上次操作/g;
-s/中断所有的连线/断开所有的连接/g;
-s/直接电缆线连线/直接电缆连接/g;
-s/因系统保安理由/因系统安全考虑/g;
-s/寻找所指定的字/搜索指定文字/g;
-s/选择整份的文件/选择整个文档/g;
-s/需要使用者介入/需要用户干预/g;
-s/喜欢使用的装置/首选设备/g;
-s/无足够的记忆体/内存不够/g;
-s/视讯压缩解压缩/视频编码解码器/g;
-s/使用者设定档案/用户配置文件/g;
-s/确认取代资料夹/确认文件夹替换/g;
-s/确认从原始分割/确认脱离源位置/g;
-s/全字拼写须符合/匹配整个单词/g;
-s/清除所选的范围/清除所选内容/g;
-s/启动时缩到最小/启动时最小化/g;
-s/内含无效的字元/内嵌无效的字符/g;
-s/列印现用的文件/打印当前文档/g;
-s/连线网路磁碟机/映射网络驱动器/g;
-s/连接到网路资源/映射为网络资源/g;
-s/开启所选的项目/打开所选项目/g;
-s/将视窗缩成图示/将窗口缩为图标/g;
-s/将视窗放到最大/将窗口最大化/g;
-s/键盘语系及配置/键盘语言及布局/g;
-s/检查使用者名称/验证用户名/g;
-s/冠状动脉心脏病/冠心病/g;
-s/关闭现用的文件/关闭当前文档/g;
-s/复原上次的动作/还原上次操作/g;
-s/非重叠显示视窗/平铺窗口/g;
-s/杜斯托也夫斯基/陀思妥耶夫斯基/g;
-s/动态连结程式库/动态链接库/g;
-s/储存现用的文件/保存当前文档/g;
-s/程式管理员群组/程序管理器组/g;
-s/变更视窗的位置/改变窗口位置/g;
-s/变更视窗的大小/改变窗口大小/g;
-s/巴布亚纽几内亚/巴布亚新几内亚/g;
-
-
-s/作用中的视窗/活动窗口/g;
-s/作业系统核心/操作系统内核/g;
-s/总体经济效益/社会经济效益/g;
-s/重叠显示视窗/层叠窗口/g;
-s/中原标准时间/北京时间/g;
-s/智慧型终端机/智能终端/g;
-s/用完就丢商品/一次性商品/g;
-s/硬体已经关闭/硬件已经禁用/g;
-s/依磁碟机代号/按驱动器名/g;
-s/虚拟私人网路/虚拟专用网/g;
-s/新增驱动程式/添加驱动程序/g;
-s/新增个人信箱/添加个人信箱/g;
-s/显示器设定值/显示器设置/g;
-s/无法启动说明/激活帮助失败/g;
-s/无法开启文件/不能打开文档/g;
-s/无法储存文件/不能保存文档/g;
-s/位数分隔字元/分组符号/g;
-s/位数分隔符号/数字分组符号/g;
-s/网路上的芳邻/网上邻居/g;
-s/说明搜寻程式/帮助搜索程序/g;
-s/事件作业方式/事件方案/g;
-s/使用者设定档/用户配置文件/g;
-s/沙乌地阿拉伯/沙特阿拉伯/g;
-s/如何使用说明/如何使用帮助/g;
-s/日光节约时间/夏时制/g;
-s/全国优等教材/国优教材/g;
-s/驱动程式磁片/驱动盘/g;
-s/青年活动中心/青年宫/g;
-s/启动这个视窗/激活这个窗口/g;
-s/启动工作清单/激活任务列表/g;
-s/密闭式清洁站/垃圾楼/g;
-s/另存作业方式/方案另存为/g;
-s/列出说明主题/帮助主题列表/g;
-s/连线永久切断/连接永久断开/g;
-s/连结已经中断/链接可能被断开/g;
-s/连按两下滑鼠/双击/g;
-s/课外教学活动/第二课堂/g;
-s/开启这个文件/打开此文档/g;
-s/建立新的文件/创建新文档/g;
-s/剪辑物件档案/碎片文件/g;
-s/加入新的硬体/添加新硬件/g;
-s/记忆体用完了/内存不足/g;
-s/关联的副档名/相关扩展名/g;
-s/功能表程式集/菜单程序/g;
-s/公共交通运送/公交/g;
-s/工厂所在地点/厂址/g;
-s/个人认证资料/个人证书/g;
-s/附属应用程式/附件/g;
-s/非破坏性检验/无损检测/g;
-s/多工缓冲处理/后台打印/g;
-s/电源作业方式/电源方案/g;
-s/电源管制设定/设置电源方案/g;
-s/电源管制方式/电源方案/g;
-s/登记应用程式/注册应用程序/g;
-s/大型积体电路/大规模集成电路/g;
-s/大型公共汽车/大公共/g;
-s/大小写需符合/区分大小写/g;
-s/不正确的字元/无效字符/g;
-s/不含酒精饮料/软饮料/g;
-s/变更作业方式/更改方案/g;
-s/变更国别设定/更改区域设置/g;
-
-
-s/字元提示器/提示符/g;
-s/子网路遮罩/子网掩码/g;
-s/子母画面电视机/画中画电视/g;
-s/资源回收筒/回收站/g;
-s/资料库等级/数据库类别/g;
-s/桌上型电脑/台式计算机/g;
-s/装置管理员/设备管理程序/g;
-s/主网路登入/主网络登录/g;
-s/主电脑名称/主机名/g;
-s/周休二日制/双休日/g;
-s/重量级人物/大腕/g;
-s/终端机萤幕/终端屏幕/g;
-s/中断使用者/断开用户连接/g;
-s/智慧型系统/智能系统/g;
-s/智慧型犯罪/智能犯罪/g;
-s/智慧财产权/知识产权/g;
-s/指点和评论/点评/g;
-s/正在断线中/正在挂断/g;
-s/整顿和改进/整改/g;
-s/这个使用者/该用户/g;
-s/暂存盘目录/临时目录/g;
-s/预设原始档/默认源文件/g;
-s/萤幕小键盘/软键盘/g;
-s/隐蔽性失业/隐性失业/g;
-s/意外的错误/异常错误/g;
-s/已开发国家/发达国家/g;
-s/移动资料夹/移动文件夹/g;
-s/依原始位置/按源位置/g;
-s/依由小而大/按从小到大/g;
-s/依可用空间/按可用空间/g;
-s/叶门阿拉伯/阿拉伯也门/g;
-s/演出者名称/艺术家名/g;
-s/延伸记忆体/扩充内存/g;
-s/选择性贴上/选择性粘贴/g;
-s/选择的部份/所选内容/g;
-s/行人徒步区/步行街/g;
-s/新增使用者/添加用户/g;
-s/新增工具列/新建工具栏/g;
-s/限制客流量/限流/g;
-s/现用的文件/当前文档/g;
-s/夏令时间制/夏时制/g;
-s/下一个曲目/下一曲目/g;
-s/辖区识别码/作用域标识/g;
-s/系统登录表/注册表/g;
-s/物资交流会/物交会/g;
-s/物理治疗法/理疗/g;
-s/我的文件夹/我的文档/g;
-s/文件功能表/文档菜单/g;
-s/文化娱乐城/文化宫/g;
-s/未开发国家/不发达国家/g;
-s/往左或往右/向左或向右/g;
-s/网页或档案/网页或文件/g;
-s/托养婴幼儿/托幼/g;
-s/条码阅读机/条形码读出器/g;
-s/双画面电视/画中画电视/g;
-s/数据机连线/调制解调器连接/g;
-s/使用者清单/用户列表/g;
-s/使用者名称/用户名/g;
-s/使用者介入/用户操作/g;
-s/使用过档案/使用过文件/g;
-s/食物调理包/软罐头/g;
-s/拾圆人民币/大团结/g;
-s/实体记忆体/物理内存/g;
-s/身分证字号/身份证号码/g;
-s/设置原始档/配置源文件/g;
-s/设定控制台/控制面板/g;
-s/设成预设值/设成默认值/g;
-s/少年观护所/少管所/g;
-s/少年感化院/工读学校/g;
-s/少年辅育院/管教所/g;
-s/商业办公室/写字楼/g;
-s/软式磁碟机/软盘驱动器/g;
-s/人身自由权/人身权/g;
-s/确定要变更/确实要更改/g;
-s/全萤幕模式/全屏方式/g;
-s/全球资讯网/万维网/g;
-s/侵害商标权/侵犯商标权/g;
-s/前一个曲目/上一曲目/g;
-s/朴列汉诺夫/普列汉诺夫/g;
-s/内野高飞球/内场腾空球/g;
-s/目前的文件/当前文件/g;
-s/目前的图示/当前图标/g;
-s/目的资料夹/目标文件夹/g;
-s/默认原始档/默认源文件/g;
-s/米开朗琪罗/米开朗基罗/g;
-s/美新处/美国新闻处/g;
-s/茅利塔尼亚/毛里塔尼亚/g;
-s/林业的虫害/无烟火灾/g;
-s/列支敦斯登/列支敦士登/g;
-s/列印到档案/打印到文件/g;
-s/连结程式库/链接库/g;
-s/连接埠名称/端口名/g;
-s/雷射印表机/静电照相印刷机/g;
-s/扩充记忆体/扩展内存/g;
-s/客方的电脑/客户机/g;
-s/可用的按钮/可用按钮/g;
-s/开拓与扩展/拓展/g;
-s/开始功能表/开始菜单/g;
-s/卡式录音带/盒式录音带/g;
-s/卡拉曼理斯/卡拉曼利斯/g;
-s/矩阵式组织/矩阵组织/g;
-s/居民委员会/居委会/g;
-s/九个指头和一个指头/全局与局部/g;
-s/结束后回到/退出并返回/g;
-s/建立储存体/开辟存储区/g;
-s/剪辑物件档/碎片文件/g;
-s/贾鲁塞斯基/雅鲁泽尔斯基/g;
-s/纪录原始档/日志源文件/g;
-s/记忆体用完/内存耗尽/g;
-s/几内亚比索/几内亚比绍/g;
-s/回覆缓冲区/答复缓冲区/g;
-s/化学工业部/化工部/g;
-s/核子反应炉/反应堆/g;
-s/好记的名称/友好名称/g;
-s/哥斯大黎加/哥斯达黎加/g;
-s/哥德式艺术/哥特式艺术/g;
-s/高科技产业/新技术产业/g;
-s/高传真电视/高清晰电视/g;
-s/干部休养所/干休所/g;
-s/服务提供者/服务供应商/g;
-s/分享的档案/共享文件/g;
-s/非法录影带/黑片/g;
-s/放射线治疗/放疗/g;
-s/法律和纪律/法纪/g;
-s/二次性电池/可充式电池/g;
-s/电子印刷术/静电印刷术/g;
-s/电帚/电动吸尘器/g;
-s/电邮服务器/邮件服务器/g;
-s/登录资料库/连接数据库/g;
-s/档案名无效/非法文件名/g;
-s/档案控制码/文件句柄/g;
-s/档案管理员/文件管理器/g;
-s/从原始分割/脱离源位置/g;
-s/磁碟机代号/驱动器号/g;
-s/传统记忆体/常规内存/g;
-s/抽取式磁碟/可移动磁盘/g;
-s/程式设计员/程序员/g;
-s/程式管理员/程序管理器/g;
-s/长城信用卡/长城卡/g;
-s/布里兹涅夫/勃列日涅夫/g;
-s/拨盘式电话/脉冲式电话/g;
-s/拨号伺服器/拨号服务器/g;
-s/拨号配接卡/拨号网络适配器/g;
-s/辨析既存的/解析现有的/g;
-s/变更连接埠/更改端口/g;
-s/笔记型电脑/笔记本电脑/g;
-s/本机连接埠/本地端口/g;
-s/班达拉尼克/班达拉奈克/g;
-s/巴本德里欧/帕潘德里欧/g;
-s/按键式电话/音频式电话/g;
-s/安全性警告/安全警告/g;
-s/安得洛波夫/安德罗波夫/g;
-s/埃及阿拉伯/阿拉伯埃及/g;
-
-
-s/拨接(连接|网络)/拨号连接/g;
-
-s/作业系统/操作系统/g;
-s/作业失败/操作失败/g;
-s/作业方式/方案/g;
-s/最后一笔/最后一条/g;
-s/组态完成/配置完成/g;
-s/组态设定/配置/g;
-s/组态精灵/配置向导/g;
-s/组态结构/配置纹理/g;
-s/组态档案/配置文件/g;
-s/走通门路/打通渠道/g;
-s/总体经济/宏观经济/g;
-s/自动指定/自动分配/g;
-s/自动执行/自动运行/g;
-s/自筹投资/预算外投资/g;
-s/字型检视/字体查看/g;
-s/字型档案/字体文件/g;
-s/谘询公司/顾问公司/g;
-s/资源分享/资源共享/g;
-s/资源档案/资源文件/g;
-s/资讯时代/信息社会/g;
-s/资料速率/数据传输速度/g;
-s/资料档案/数据文件/g;
-s/资料串流/数据流/g;
-s/装置名称/设备名/g;
-s/装置离线/设备离线/g;
-s/装置就绪/设备就绪/g;
-s/转码序列/转义字符/g;
-s/专业度假/专业实习/g;
-s/专案档案/方案文件/g;
-s/助学贷款/贷学金/g;
-s/伫列名称/队列名/g;
-s/主要途径/主渠道/g;
-s/主要认证/根证书/g;
-s/主审裁判/主裁判员/g;
-s/主记忆体/主存/g;
-s/主机控制器/主控制卡/g;
-s/重组状态/碎片整理状态/g;
-s/重新转向/重定向/g;
-s/重新整理/刷新/g;
-s/重新搜寻/新搜索/g;
-s/重新命名/重命名/g;
-s/重新雇用/返聘/g;
-s/重新导向/重定向/g;
-s/重新拨号/重拨/g;
-s/重复档案/重复文件/g;
-s/重叠显示/层叠窗口/g;
-s/重叠视窗/重叠窗口/g;
-s/终端设备/终端/g;
-s/中继档案/图元文件/g;
-s/中断连线/断开连接/g;
-s/智障人士/智残人/g;
-s/智力医学/第四医学/g;
-s/制作格式/格式化/g;
-s/制造厂商/制造商/g;
-s/指定医师/点名手术/g;
-s/指标速度/指针速度/g;
-s/指标轨迹/指针轨迹/g;
-s/执行绪列/线程栏/g;
-s/支援农业/支农/g;
-s/支援边疆/支边/g;
-s/政治审查/政审/g;
-s/政治庇护/政治避难/g;
-s/正确起始/正常初始化/g;
-s/整数参数/整型参数/g;
-s/争相出售/竞销/g;
-s/诊断模式/诊断方式/g;
-s/真实模式/实模式/g;
-s/这个装置/该设备/g;
-s/这个选项/该选项/g;
-s/这个视窗/该窗口/g;
-s/这个画面/该页/g;
-s/这个档案/这个文件/g;
-s/这个程式/该程序/g;
-s/照相排版/照排/g;
-s/暂时档案/临时文件/g;
-s/暂存档案/临时文件/g;
-s/在职训练/岗位培训/g;
-s/在职培训/岗位练兵/g;
-s/再寄一次/重新发送/g;
-s/远距教学/远距离教育/g;
-s/远端连线/远程连接/g;
-s/远端管理/远程管理/g;
-s/远端电脑/远程计算机/g;
-s/远端磁碟/远程磁盘/g;
-s/原因不详/原因未知/g;
-s/原始设定/原始设置/g;
-s/原程式码/源代码/g;
-s/预览列印/打印预览/g;
-s/预防医学/第一医学/g;
-s/逾时错误/超时错误/g;
-s/余热资源/第五能源/g;
-s/有效日期/生效日期/g;
-s/有失身份/跌份儿/g;
-s/邮递区号/邮政编码/g;
-s/优先等级/优先级/g;
-s/永远启动/始终打开/g;
-s/永远关闭/始终关闭/g;
-s/影音剪接/影音剪辑/g;
-s/影片档案/影片文件/g;
-s/应用程式/应用程序/g;
-s/引言层级/引用级/g;
-s/音效格式/音频格式/g;
-s/音效档案/音频文件/g;
-s/已经移除/已被卸载/g;
-s/疑难排解/疑难解答/g;
-s/移动档案/文件移动/g;
-s/移除档案/删除文件/g;
-s/移除程式/卸载程序/g;
-s/移除程式/卸载程序/g;
-s/依资料夹/按文件夹/g;
-s/依伺服器/按服务器/g;
-s/依寄信人/按寄信人/g;
-s/依服务器/按服务器/g;
-s/依发信人/按发信人/g;
-s/衣索比亚/埃塞俄比亚/g;
-s/业务会报/办公会议/g;
-s/遥测技术/遥感技术/g;
-s/延伸视窗/扩展至窗口/g;
-s/压缩档案/压缩文件/g;
-s/讯息档案/消息文件/g;
-s/巡弋飞弹/巡航导弹/g;
-s/寻找目标/搜索目标/g;
-s/选择说明/帮助选择/g;
-s/选择连线/链接选择/g;
-s/修补档案/补丁文件/g;
-s/休闲活动/业余活动/g;
-s/信件软体/邮件程序/g;
-s/信件软体/信件程序/g;
-s/新资料夹/新文件夹/g;
-s/新增帐号/新建帐号/g;
-s/新增移除/添加删除/g;
-s/新增视窗/新建窗口/g;
-s/新增签名/新建签名/g;
-s/新增昵称/添加昵称/g;
-s/新增程式/添加程序/g;
-s/新细明体/宋体/g;
-s/新的密码/新密码/g;
-s/新的磁片/新盘/g;
-s/谢瓦纳兹/谢瓦尔德纳泽/g;
-s/撷取档案/捕获文件/g;
-s/项目编号/项目符号/g;
-s/相同视窗/同一窗口/g;
-s/现用文件/当前文档/g;
-s/显示整页/显示整个页面/g;
-s/显示说明/显示帮助/g;
-s/显示名称/显示名/g;
-s/显示档案/显示文件/g;
-s/闲置感应/空闲敏感性/g;
-s/先发投手/开局投手/g;
-s/夏令时间/夏时制/g;
-s/系统登录/注册表/g;
-s/系统档案/系统文件/g;
-s/喜好设定/首选项/g;
-s/稀有动物/珍稀动物/g;
-s/希奥塞古/齐奥塞斯库/g;
-s/夕阳市场/银发市场/g;
-s/无线电话/无绳电话/g;
-s/无灰粉笔/无尘粉笔/g;
-s/无法开启/不能打开/g;
-s/无法存取/不能访问/g;
-s/我的最爱/收藏夹/g;
-s/我的文件/我的文档/g;
-s/翁山苏姬/昂山素季/g;
-s/文字文件/文本文件/g;
-s/文字文件/文本文档/g;
-s/文字模式/文本模式/g;
-s/文书处理/文字处理/g;
-s/文书处理/文字处理/g;
-s/文档长度/文件长度/g;
-s/位址限制/地址限制/g;
-s/位址冲突/地址冲突/g;
-s/委托代销/托销/g;
-s/唯读档案/只读文件/g;
-s/往前略过/快进/g;
-s/往后略过/快退/g;
-s/网域字尾/域后缀/g;
-s/网域管理/域管理/g;
-s/网路元件/网络组件/g;
-s/网路连线/网络连接/g;
-s/网际网路/互联网/g;
-s/王牌教师/特级教师/g;
-s/万用字元/通配符/g;
-s/外送传真/待发传真/g;
-s/外观范例/外观示例/g;
-s/外挂程式/插件/g;
-s/脱离文盲/扫盲/g;
-s/脱离挂钩/脱钩/g;
-s/图像档案/图象文件/g;
-s/图示档案/图标文件/g;
-s/投诉电话/监督电话/g;
-s/统筹管理/归口管理/g;
-s/同步备份/同步副本/g;
-s/通讯协定/通信协议/g;
-s/通讯理论/信息论/g;
-s/通信论坛/邮件列表/g;
-s/通配字元/通配符/g;
-s/停止起始/推迟初始化操作/g;
-s/停止回应/停止响应/g;
-s/贴上连结/粘贴链接/g;
-s/贴齐格线/均匀排列/g;
-s/天才儿童/超常儿童/g;
-s/套装软体/软件包/g;
-s/坦尚尼亚/坦桑尼亚/g;
-s/泰国王国/泰王国/g;
-s/太空科技/空间技术/g;
-s/太空技术/航天技术/g;
-s/太空航行/航天/g;
-s/索忍尼辛/索尔仁尼琴/g;
-s/索马利亚/索马里/g;
-s/所有类型/全部类型/g;
-s/所有档案/所有文件/g;
-s/缩到最小/最小化/g;
-s/孙纳雅克/森纳那亚克/g;
-s/随机选曲/随机顺序/g;
-s/随插即用/即插即用/g;
-s/搜寻顺序/搜索顺序/g;
-s/送出档案/发送文件/g;
-s/伺服程式/服务器/g;
-s/斯夫波达/斯沃博达/g;
-s/私校教师/民办教师/g;
-s/私立小学/民办小学/g;
-s/私立大学/民办大学/g;
-s/说明主题/帮助主题/g;
-s/说明档案/说明文件/g;
-s/水平并排/横向平铺窗口/g;
-s/水耕蔬菜/超级蔬菜/g;
-s/数位相机/数字相机/g;
-s/数位唱片/数字唱片/g;
-s/授与存取/授权访问/g;
-s/视讯压缩/视频编码/g;
-s/视讯会议/可视会议/g;
-s/视讯格式/视频格式/g;
-s/视窗系统/窗口系统/g;
-s/使用者级/用户级/g;
-s/使用说明/使用帮助/g;
-s/使用手册/用户手册/g;
-s/使用空间/已用空间/g;
-s/使用介面/用户界面/g;
-s/使用方式/用法/g;
-s/史瓦济兰/斯威士兰/g;
-s/食品雕刻/食雕/g;
-s/实体位址/物理地址/g;
-s/实况录影/实况录像/g;
-s/识别资料/标识/g;
-s/时间设定/时钟设置/g;
-s/圣婴现象/厄尔尼诺现象/g;
-s/圣马利诺/圣马力诺/g;
-s/省电模式/节能方式/g;
-s/声波装置/波形设备/g;
-s/声波格式/波形格式/g;
-s/生理时钟/生物钟/g;
-s/升等职称/评定/g;
-s/审核检查/核查/g;
-s/审查批示/审批/g;
-s/涉外事物/外事/g;
-s/设定完成/配置完成/g;
-s/上层目录/高层目录/g;
-s/色板对应/调色板映射/g;
-s/扫除文盲/扫盲/g;
-s/赛普勒斯/塞浦路斯/g;
-s/柔媚庸俗/媚俗/g;
-s/容量上限/最大空间/g;
-s/日本脑炎/乙脑/g;
-s/认证资料/证书/g;
-s/认证内容/证书属性/g;
-s/认证层次/验证级/g;
-s/人工智慧/人工智能/g;
-s/群组清单/组列表/g;
-s/权利义务/责权利/g;
-s/全字拼写/匹配整个单词/g;
-s/取回档案/取回文件/g;
-s/取代成为/替换为/g;
-s/曲线图列/曲线图栏/g;
-s/区域网路/局域网/g;
-s/区号规则/拨号规则/g;
-s/请按一下/单击/g;
-s/清理退出/清退/g;
-s/清理磁碟/磁盘清理程序/g;
-s/清寒家庭/特困户/g;
-s/倾销核心/核心转储/g;
-s/轻型机车/轻骑/g;
-s/轻松简单/轻松自如/g;
-s/亲职教育/父母学校/g;
-s/切换语系/切换语言/g;
-s/潜在课程/隐形课程/g;
-s/起始传真/传真初始化/g;
-s/起始传送/开始发送/g;
-s/启智学校/弱智学校/g;
-s/启明学校/盲人学校/g;
-s/启动说明/启动帮助/g;
-s/其它厂商/第三方/g;
-s/其他档案/其他文件/g;
-s/普利兹奖/普利策奖/g;
-s/平均价格/均价/g;
-s/平均分摊/均摊/g;
-s/聘雇人员/合同工/g;
-s/品质管制/质量管理/g;
-s/拼字检查/拼写检测/g;
-s/偏好设定/首选项/g;
-s/批次档案/批处理文件/g;
-s/批次档/批处理文件/g;
-s/排气测量/尾气测量/g;
-s/奈及利亚/尼日利亚/g;
-s/内容表单/属性表/g;
-s/内部控制/内控/g;
-s/内部发行/境内发行/g;
-s/目前文件/当前文档/g;
-s/母机资讯/主机信息/g;
-s/莫三比克/莫桑比克/g;
-s/模里西斯/毛里求斯/g;
-s/明星效应/名人效应/g;
-s/密码清单/密码表/g;
-s/密码不符/密码错误/g;
-s/梅尔夫人/梅厄夫人/g;
-s/没有选择/未选定/g;
-s/麦纳马拉/麦克纳马拉/g;
-s/买卖股票/炒股/g;
-s/马林可夫/马林科夫/g;
-s/马尔地夫/马尔代夫/g;
-s/路径太长/路径太深/g;
-s/留职进修/脱产学习/g;
-s/流动户口/临时户口/g;
-s/另存新档/另存为/g;
-s/另存备份/将副本存为/g;
-s/列印工作/打印作业/g;
-s/连线网路/连接网络/g;
-s/连线切断/连接断开/g;
-s/连线传送/连接发送/g;
-s/连到网路/映射到网络/g;
-s/连按两下/双击/g;
-s/立体组织/多维组织/g;
-s/立即重组/开始整理/g;
-s/立即接听/开始应答/g;
-s/李加契夫/利加乔夫/g;
-s/类比数位/模数/g;
-s/雷射唱机/激光唱机/g;
-s/拦截卫星/反卫星/g;
-s/赖比瑞亚/利比里亚/g;
-s/来源路径/源路径/g;
-s/来源格式/源格式/g;
-s/来源档案/源文件/g;
-s/来源代码/源代码/g;
-s/快速向退/快退/g;
-s/快速向前/快进/g;
-s/快速溜冰/速滑/g;
-s/快捷邮件/特快专递/g;
-s/控制装置/控制设备/g;
-s/空中巴士/空中客车/g;
-s/空气污染/大气污染/g;
-s/课堂教学/第一课堂/g;
-s/可执行档/可执行文件/g;
-s/科际整合/跨学科研究/g;
-s/康乐活动/文娱活动/g;
-s/刊授大学/函授大学/g;
-s/开新档案/新建/g;
-s/开始销售/动销/g;
-s/开始位置/起始位置/g;
-s/开启旧档/打开/g;
-s/开启档案/打开文件/g;
-s/卡式电话/磁卡电话/g;
-s/居家护理/家庭病床/g;
-s/精神产品/文艺作品/g;
-s/截止期限/到期日/g;
-s/捷径名称/快捷方式名/g;
-s/捷径参照/快捷方式指向/g;
-s/结束说明/退出帮助/g;
-s/接听逾时/应答超时/g;
-s/接听失败/应答失败/g;
-s/接听模式/应答方式/g;
-s/阶段作业/会话/g;
-s/教学年资/教龄/g;
-s/建议选项/推荐/g;
-s/建立日期/创建时间/g;
-s/建教合作/厂校挂钩/g;
-s/简单日期/短日期/g;
-s/检核位元/检验位/g;
-s/剪辑资料/碎片/g;
-s/剪辑物件/外壳碎片/g;
-s/尖端科技/高新技术/g;
-s/技术转移/技术转让/g;
-s/几内亚亚/几内亚/g;
-s/集市贸易/自由市场/g;
-s/积体电路/集成电路/g;
-s/回给全部/全部回复/g;
-s/换脑筋/转变思想/g;
-s/画面速率/帧传输率/g;
-s/后援投手/替补投手/g;
-s/宏都拉斯/洪都拉斯/g;
-s/核子试爆/核试验/g;
-s/核能电厂/核电站/g;
-s/海桑二世/哈桑二世/g;
-s/哈姆雷特/汉姆雷特/g;
-s/管路交错/管道交叉/g;
-s/观光农业/旅游农业/g;
-s/关系企业/系列企业/g;
-s/瓜地马拉/危地马拉/g;
-s/共享违规/共享冲突/g;
-s/公文旅行/文件旅游/g;
-s/公费旅游/公款旅游/g;
-s/工作日数/劳动日/g;
-s/工作人员/开发人员/g;
-s/工作群组/工作组/g;
-s/工厂休假/厂修/g;
-s/根据档案/根据文件/g;
-s/格瑞那达/格林纳达/g;
-s/戈巴契夫/戈尔巴乔夫/g;
-s/高峰会议/峰会/g;
-s/高等院校/大专院校/g;
-s/复数型态/复数形式/g;
-s/复健医学/康复医学/g;
-s/佛洛伊德/弗洛伊德/g;
-s/封包专用/私有数据包/g;
-s/封包整合/数据包集成/g;
-s/封包切换/分组交换/g;
-s/封包交换/分组交换/g;
-s/分享违规/共享冲突/g;
-s/分隔字元/分隔符/g;
-s/分隔档案/分隔文件/g;
-s/放到最大/最大化/g;
-s/厄瓜多尔/厄瓜多尔/g;
-s/多明尼加/多米尼加/g;
-s/对话方块/对话框/g;
-s/杜布西克/杜布切克/g;
-s/杜布莱宁/多勃雷宁/g;
-s/动画游标/动画光标/g;
-s/钉子精神/钻研精神/g;
-s/调整栏位/调整列宽/g;
-s/调入拨给/调拨/g;
-s/电子看板/电子屏幕/g;
-s/电源管制/电源方案/g;
-s/电源不足/电力不足/g;
-s/电邮论坛/邮件列表/g;
-s/电脑择友/电脑红娘/g;
-s/电脑名称/计算机名/g;
-s/电脑大夫/电脑诊断/g;
-s/第二医学/临床医学/g;
-s/地方小吃/风味小吃/g;
-s/地方税务/地税/g;
-s/低收入户/特困户/g;
-s/低阶语言/低级语言/g;
-s/等级名称/等级名/g;
-s/登录基码/注册表项/g;
-s/登录错误/注册表错误/g;
-s/登录编辑/注册编/g;
-s/得奖产品/受奖产品/g;
-s/道琼指数/道·琼斯指数/g;
-s/倒数计时/倒计时/g;
-s/档名无效/非法文件名/g;
-s/档案总管/资源管理器/g;
-s/档案型态/文件型态/g;
-s/档案系统/文件系统/g;
-s/档案锁定/文件锁定/g;
-s/档案清单/文件列表/g;
-s/档案名称/文件名/g;
-s/档案类型/文件类型/g;
-s/档案关联/文件关联/g;
-s/档案个数/文件数目/g;
-s/档案长度/文件大小/g;
-s/当机意外/死机/g;
-s/单一乐器/单乐器/g;
-s/单数型态/单数形式/g;
-s/大学联考/高考/g;
-s/大型巴士/大巴/g;
-s/大会标志/会标/g;
-s/搭计程车/打的/g;
-s/错误检查/查错/g;
-s/存取许可/访问权限/g;
-s/存取日期/访问时间/g;
-s/存档类型/保存类型/g;
-s/从新起动/重新启动/g;
-s/次级市场/二级市场/g;
-s/此一档案/此一文件/g;
-s/磁碟标签/磁盘卷标/g;
-s/垂直并排/纵向平铺窗口/g;
-s/传送邮件/发送邮件/g;
-s/传送延后/发送延迟/g;
-s/储存文件/保存文档/g;
-s/储存档案/保存文件/g;
-s/出钱出物/出血/g;
-s/程序档案/程序文件/g;
-s/程式群组/程序组/g;
-s/程式名称/程序名/g;
-s/程式档案/程序文件/g;
-s/产官学研/产学研/g;
-s/参照资料/参考数据/g;
-s/参照追踪/跟踪引用/g;
-s/参数设定/参数配置/g;
-s/参数区块/参数块/g;
-s/彩色软片/彩卷/g;
-s/布隆费德/布龙菲尔德/g;
-s/不要删除/不删除/g;
-s/不可使用/无法使用/g;
-s/不得要领/摸不着门道/g;
-s/播放程式/播放器/g;
-s/拨号进度/拨号过程/g;
-s/标准选择/正常选定/g;
-s/标准拖曳/正常拖放/g;
-s/标准视窗/常规窗口/g;
-s/标准工资/基本工资/g;
-s/变更图示/更改图标/g;
-s/变更图示/改变图标/g;
-s/变更设定/更改设置/g;
-s/编辑连结/编辑链接/g;
-s/编辑档案/编辑文件/g;
-s/本端路径/本地路径/g;
-s/背景作业/后台操作/g;
-s/报值挂号/保价信函/g;
-s/保职停薪/停薪留职/g;
-s/保留比赛/改期续赛/g;
-s/保存档案/保存文件/g;
-s/包米迪尼/布迈丁/g;
-s/帮助文档/帮助文件/g;
-s/版面设定/页面设置/g;
-s/柏林围墙/柏林墙/g;
-s/按键对应/键盘映射/g;
-s/安装移除/安装卸载/g;
-s/安全上垒/安全进垒/g;
-s/艾森斯坦/爱森斯坦/g;
-s/Ｃ型肝炎/丙肝/g;
-s/Ｂ型肝炎/乙肝/g;
-s/Ａ型肝炎/甲肝/g;
-
-
-s/尊严死/安乐死/g;
-s/最佳化/优化/g;
-s/组态档/配置文件/g;
-s/自助店/超市/g;
-s/自由式/自由泳/g;
-s/字型档/字体文件/g;
-s/字码页/代码页/g;
-s/姊妹市/姐妹城/g;
-s/子夜场/夜电影/g;
-s/资料库/数据库/g;
-s/资料夹/文件夹/g;
-s/资料档/数据文件/g;
-s/桌上型/台式机/g;
-s/状态列/状态栏/g;
-s/状态档/状态文件/g;
-s/转捩点/转折点/g;
-s/转播站/插转台/g;
-s/抓空子/抽空/g;
-s/著作权/版权/g;
-s/主电脑/主机/g;
-s/中文字/汉字/g;
-s/中继档/图元文件/g;
-s/智慧型/智能型/g;
-s/制造业/第二产业/g;
-s/指令列/命令行/g;
-s/执行绪/线程/g;
-s/执行档/执行文件/g;
-s/侦试到/检测到/g;
-s/招牌菜/商标菜/g;
-s/暂时档/临时文件/g;
-s/暂存档/临时文件/g;
-s/在地人/本地人/g;
-s/再重试/再试试/g;
-s/韵律裤/健美裤/g;
-s/原子笔/圆珠笔/g;
-s/预售屋/期房/g;
-s/预设值/默认值/g;
-s/预设值/默认值/g;
-s/育幼院/保育院/g;
-s/羽毛衣/滑雪衫/g;
-s/有成就/成气候/g;
-s/游览车/旅游车/g;
-s/优酪乳/酸牛奶/g;
-s/用户端/客户端/g;
-s/永远不/从不/g;
-s/硬坐位/硬座/g;
-s/硬碟机/硬盘驱动器/g;
-s/映射站/镜像站/g;
-s/影像档/映像/g;
-s/影节/电影节/g;
-s/营业税/利税/g;
-s/印表机/打印机/g;
-s/隐藏档/隐藏文件/g;
-s/引导盘/启动盘/g;
-s/音源线/线路输入/g;
-s/音效卡/声卡/g;
-s/音带/录音带/g;
-s/易开罐/易拉罐/g;
-s/易开罐/易拉罐/g;
-s/移除档/删除文件/g;
-s/依状态/按状态/g;
-s/依主题/按主题/g;
-s/依优先/按优先/g;
-s/依信件/按信件/g;
-s/依位置/按位置/g;
-s/依未读/按未读/g;
-s/依讨论/按讨论/g;
-s/依说明/按说明/g;
-s/依收信/按收信/g;
-s/依日期/按日期/g;
-s/依旗标/按旗标/g;
-s/依昵称/按昵称/g;
-s/依内容/按属性/g;
-s/依名称/按名称/g;
-s/依类型/按类型/g;
-s/依卷标/按卷标/g;
-s/依寄信/按寄信/g;
-s/依公司/按公司/g;
-s/依附件/按附件/g;
-s/依服务/按服务/g;
-s/依电子/按电子/g;
-s/依电话/按电话/g;
-s/依大小/按大小/g;
-s/依城市/按城市/g;
-s/依标签/按卷标/g;
-s/叶尔钦/叶利钦/g;
-s/要继续/是否继续/g;
-s/养老院/托老所/g;
-s/演奏者/艺术家/g;
-s/颜色酒/色酒/g;
-s/压缩档/压缩文件/g;
-s/选单列/选单栏/g;
-s/悬浮液/乳浊液/g;
-s/许可证/批文/g;
-s/袖珍本/口袋书/g;
-s/星点/一点儿/g;
-s/信件箱/邮件箱/g;
-s/信件匣/信件箱/g;
-s/新增为/添加为/g;
-s/新增到/添加到/g;
-s/新捷径/新快捷方式/g;
-s/辛巴威/津巴布韦/g;
-s/小先生/小老师/g;
-s/小太阳/独生子/g;
-s/小算盘/计算器/g;
-s/小时钟/时钟/g;
-s/小明星/稚星/g;
-s/小皇帝/独生子/g;
-s/小红书/毛语录/g;
-s/相容性/兼容性/g;
-s/显示卡/显卡/g;
-s/闲聊天/闲叨牙/g;
-s/夏斯屈/夏斯特里/g;
-s/夏米尔/沙米尔/g;
-s/下一笔/下一条/g;
-s/瑕疵品/残次品/g;
-s/细明体/宋体/g;
-s/系统档/系统文件/g;
-s/席哈克/希拉克/g;
-s/吸菸族/菸坛/g;
-s/无限大/无穷大/g;
-s/文字行/文本行/g;
-s/文字档/文本文件/g;
-s/文档名/文件名称/g;
-s/位置列/位置栏/g;
-s/位元组/字节/g;
-s/位元图/位图/g;
-s/位元率/比特率/g;
-s/未命名/无标题/g;
-s/未来学/预测学/g;
-s/卫星国/附庸国/g;
-s/唯读档/只读文件/g;
-s/微电脑/微机/g;
-s/网站台/站点/g;
-s/万那杜/瓦努阿图/g;
-s/外野手/外场手/g;
-s/外野审/外场裁判员/g;
-s/吐瓦鲁/图瓦卢/g;
-s/图像档/图像文件/g;
-s/图示档/图标文件/g;
-s/透平机/涡轮机/g;
-s/投影片/幻灯片/g;
-s/投影机/投影仪/g;
-s/通讯闸/网关/g;
-s/通讯闸/网关/g;
-s/通学生/走读生/g;
-s/亭式车站/候车亭/g;
-s/提供者/供应商/g;
-s/讨海人/海碰子/g;
-s/逃漏税/跑漏/g;
-s/太阳炉/太阳灶/g;
-s/太空站/航天站/g;
-s/太空战/宇宙空间战/g;
-s/太空衣/宇宙服/g;
-s/太空梭/航天飞机/g;
-s/太空人/宇航员/g;
-s/太空船/宇宙飞船/g;
-s/锁定档/锁定文件/g;
-s/索引片/选项卡/g;
-s/索引档/索引文件/g;
-s/速食面/方便面/g;
-s/苏利南/苏里南/g;
-s/苏卡诺/苏加诺/g;
-s/饲料鸡/肉鸡/g;
-s/伺服器/服务器/g;
-s/伺服端/服务端/g;
-s/私房钱/小金库/g;
-s/说明档/说明文件/g;
-s/数据机/调制解调器/g;
-s/输入键/回车键/g;
-s/输入档/输入文件/g;
-s/受薪族/吃官粮/g;
-s/使用者/用户/g;
-s/史托夫/斯多夫/g;
-s/食用鸽/肉鸽/g;
-s/时间线/时间轴/g;
-s/狮子山/塞拉利昂/g;
-s/施亚奴/西哈努克/g;
-s/圣文森/圣文森特/g;
-s/省亲假/探亲假/g;
-s/生命线/救命电话/g;
-s/生产线/流水线/g;
-s/摄影机/摄像机/g;
-s/设定值/设置数值/g;
-s/烧录器/刻录机/g;
-s/尚比亚/赞比亚/g;
-s/上一笔/上一条/g;
-s/商友/合伙人/g;
-s/沙达特/萨达特/g;
-s/沙布瑞/萨布里/g;
-s/扫瞄器/扫描仪/g;
-s/扫描器/扫描仪/g;
-s/三温暖/桑拿浴/g;
-s/塞席尔/塞舌尔/g;
-s/萨希尔/查布尔/g;
-s/软碟机/软盘驱动器/g;
-s/荣誉榜/光荣榜/g;
-s/确定要/确实要/g;
-s/权保法/消保法/g;
-s/全萤幕/全屏/g;
-s/全垒打/本垒跑/g;
-s/区域网/局域网/g;
-s/桥接器/网桥/g;
-s/前置码/前缀/g;
-s/千里达/特立尼达和多巴哥/g;
-s/气垫鞋/空调鞋/g;
-s/普通生/平价生/g;
-s/蒲隆地/布隆迪/g;
-s/破码器/解码器/g;
-s/平飞球/平直球/g;
-s/捧爷/马屁精/g;
-s/配接卡/适配器/g;
-s/裴瑞斯/佩雷斯/g;
-s/庞克族/朋客/g;
-s/庞毕度/篷皮杜/g;
-s/暖机中/准备中/g;
-s/纽西兰/新西兰/g;
-s/尼迈瑞/尼迈里/g;
-s/尼克森/尼克松/g;
-s/脑库/智囊团/g;
-s/内码表/代码页/g;
-s/目的地/目标/g;
-s/莫札特/莫差特/g;
-s/莫布杜/蒙博托/g;
-s/末端的/行没的/g;
-s/命令稿/脚本/g;
-s/闵托夫/明托夫/g;
-s/免洗筷/卫生筷/g;
-s/米德朗/密特朗/g;
-s/孟岱尔/蒙代尔/g;
-s/门子货/走后门/g;
-s/没下巴/口无遮拦/g;
-s/忙线中/正忙/g;
-s/忙碌中/正忙/g;
-s/慢运动/慢动作/g;
-s/麦美伦/麦克米伦/g;
-s/马铃薯/土豆/g;
-s/马拉威/马拉维/g;
-s/马可仕/马科斯/g;
-s/罗吉斯/罗杰斯/g;
-s/绿内障/青光眼/g;
-s/铝箔包/软包装/g;
-s/路径档/路径文件/g;
-s/录影带/录像带/g;
-s/卢默贝/卢蒙巴/g;
-s/卢安达/卢旺达/g;
-s/刘易士/刘易斯/g;
-s/溜冰鞋/旱冰鞋/g;
-s/溜冰场/旱冰场/g;
-s/零组件/元器件/g;
-s/列印中/正在打印/g;
-s/列印档/打印文件/g;
-s/列表机/打印机/g;
-s/连接埠/端口/g;
-s/连接埠/端口/g;
-s/冷藏库/冷库/g;
-s/老油子/老油条/g;
-s/老人院/托老所/g;
-s/老抠/吝啬鬼/g;
-s/赖索托/莱索托/g;
-s/来源码/源代码/g;
-s/来源档/源文件/g;
-s/扩音器/扬声器/g;
-s/宽心丸/定心丸/g;
-s/快速面|速食面/方便面/g;
-s/快速键/快捷键/g;
-s/快速地/快捷地/g;
-s/控制台/控制面板/g;
-s/控制码/句柄/g;
-s/空服员/空姐/g;
-s/空白键/空格键/g;
-s/克努玛/恩克鲁玛/g;
-s/科技界/科坛/g;
-s/柯锡金/柯西金/g;
-s/烤火费/取暖费/g;
-s/卡通片/动画片/g;
-s/卡斯楚/卡斯特罗/g;
-s/卡森姆/卡塞姆/g;
-s/卡其布/卡叽布/g;
-s/喀麦隆/喀麦隆/g;
-s/救生盒/急救箱/g;
-s/金钟奖/飞天奖/g;
-s/金马奖/金鸡奖/g;
-s/金耳朵/音响发烧友/g;
-s/介绍费/好处费/g;
-s/解析度/分辨率/g;
-s/捷径方式/快捷方式/g;
-s/教育界/教坛/g;
-s/交谈式/交互式/g;
-s/交流道/立交桥/g;
-s/剪贴簿/剪贴板/g;
-s/驾训班/驾校/g;
-s/贾梅耶/杰马耶勒/g;
-s/贾拉汉/卡拉汉/g;
-s/家目录/主目录/g;
-s/加强班/关心班/g;
-s/加菜金/过节费/g;
-s/加班车/专列/g;
-s/技术师/技术员/g;
-s/纪录档/日志文件/g;
-s/记忆体/内存/g;
-s/记忆体/内存/g;
-s/记录档/日志文件/g;
-s/计程车/出租车/g;
-s/几内亚/几内亚/g;
-s/吉布地/吉布提/g;
-s/货物税/产品税/g;
-s/混血车/拼装车/g;
-s/婚外情/婚外恋/g;
-s/汇流排/总线/g;
-s/回传值/返回值/g;
-s/滑水道/水滑梯/g;
-s/华勒沙/瓦文萨/g;
-s/华德翰/瓦尔德海姆/g;
-s/护目镜/视保屏/g;
-s/蝴蝶装/蝙蝠衫/g;
-s/呼叫器/ＢＰ机/g;
-s/后段班/晚班/g;
-s/何梅尼/霍梅尼/g;
-s/好采头/开门红/g;
-s/函式库/程序库/g;
-s/滚地球/地滚球/g;
-s/光盘机/光驱/g;
-s/光碟机/光驱/g;
-s/观光局/旅游局/g;
-s/股票族/股民/g;
-s/古柯硷/可卡因/g;
-s/够瞧的/够受的/g;
-s/共用级/共享级/g;
-s/恭喜您/祝贺您/g;
-s/功能表/菜单/g;
-s/公事包/公文包/g;
-s/公车站/公交站/g;
-s/工作室/演播室/g;
-s/工作列/任务栏/g;
-s/工业区/开发区/g;
-s/工具列/工具栏/g;
-s/工具列/工具栏/g;
-s/工具列/工具栏/g;
-s/工代会/职工代表大会/g;
-s/更名/重命名/g;
-s/格雷哥/格里格/g;
-s/格达费/卡扎菲/g;
-s/戈慕卡/哥穆尔卡/g;
-s/高传真/高保真/g;
-s/感知器/传感器/g;
-s/赶流行/赶时髦/g;
-s/甘乃迪/肯尼迪/g;
-s/甘比亚/冈比亚/g;
-s/概要档/概要文件/g;
-s/盖亚纳/圭亚那/g;
-s/该档案/该文件/g;
-s/副行程/子进程/g;
-s/副档名/扩展名/g;
-s/副程序/子进程/g;
-s/服侍器/服务器/g;
-s/佛克纳/福克纳/g;
-s/风派/骑墙派/g;
-s/分散式/分布式/g;
-s/分隔档/分隔页文件/g;
-s/放牛班/慢班/g;
-s/仿冒品/假货/g;
-s/方向键/箭头键/g;
-s/范例页/样例页/g;
-s/范法尼/范范尼/g;
-s/犯罪率/发案率/g;
-s/反视镜/后视镜/g;
-s/反安装/卸载/g;
-s/繁体字/正体字/g;
-s/发照者/发行人/g;
-s/发财车/的士头/g;
-s/二元码/二进制码/g;
-s/二轮片/复映片/g;
-s/二极体/二极管/g;
-s/厄瓜多/厄瓜多尔/g;
-s/多渠道/多路管道/g;
-s/多介质/多媒体/g;
-s/对应表/镜像表/g;
-s/独苗/独生女/g;
-s/读书班/干训班/g;
-s/调理包/方便菜/g;
-s/吊点滴/输液/g;
-s/电晶体/晶体管/g;
-s/电话费/话费/g;
-s/电扶梯/滚梯/g;
-s/点字书/盲文/g;
-s/点阵图/位图/g;
-s/点两下/双击/g;
-s/第一笔/第一条/g;
-s/第三波/第三次浪潮/g;
-s/迪斯可/迪斯科/g;
-s/低能儿/弱智儿童/g;
-s/低钠盐/代用盐/g;
-s/低常儿童/智障儿/g;
-s/等级低/低档/g;
-s/等化器/均衡器/g;
-s/登录值/注册表值/g;
-s/登录点/输入指针/g;
-s/登记的/已注册的/g;
-s/登机牌/登机证/g;
-s/德布西/德彪西/g;
-s/单元剧/单本剧/g;
-s/戴斯亭/德斯坦/g;
-s/大礼拜/双休日/g;
-s/打椿脚/安钉子/g;
-s/达文西/达芬奇/g;
-s/促销函/广告信/g;
-s/次基码/子项/g;
-s/磁碟机/驱动器/g;
-s/纯文字/文本/g;
-s/吹喇叭/拍马屁/g;
-s/传送中/正在传输/g;
-s/出版品/出版物/g;
-s/程式化/编程/g;
-s/程式档/程序文件/g;
-s/超音波/超声波/g;
-s/超连结/超链接/g;
-s/抄肥/赚外快/g;
-s/长条图/条形图/g;
-s/长档名/长文件名/g;
-s/柴契尔/撒切尔/g;
-s/查询值/查询数值/g;
-s/步谈机/对讲机/g;
-s/布兰德/勃朗特/g;
-s/布拉吉/连衣裙/g;
-s/布加宁/布尔加宁/g;
-s/不织布/无纺布/g;
-s/不相容/不兼容/g;
-s/不明的/未知的/g;
-s/不高明/二把刀/g;
-s/卜卡萨/博卡萨/g;
-s/波札那/博茨瓦纳/g;
-s/表示式/表达式/g;
-s/毕卡索/毕加索/g;
-s/背景图/墙纸/g;
-s/备份档/备份文件/g;
-s/保证书/责任状/g;
-s/保暖杯/保温杯/g;
-s/包吉巴/布尔吉巴/g;
-s/包戈尼/波德戈尔内/g;
-s/白辽士/柏辽兹/g;
-s/巴罗克/巴洛克/g;
-s/巴勒维/巴列维/g;
-s/奥蒂嘉/奥尔特加/g;
-s/奥布特/奥博特/g;
-s/按一下/单击/g;
-s/按两下/双击/g;
-s/安利尔/恩里莱/g;
-s/安地卡/安提瓜/g;
-s/爱滋病/艾滋病/g;
-s/艾育布/阿尤布·汗/g;
-s/艾德诺/阿登纳/g;
-s/阿叶德/阿连德/g;
-s/阿塞德/阿萨德/g;
-# s/回撤消/重做/g;
-# s/大黑熊/黑瞎子/g;
-# s/错不了/没跑儿/g;
-# s/吹喇叭/戴高帽/g;
-# s/产官学/官产学/g;
-
-
-s/原始(程式)?码/源代码/g;
-s/映射站(台)?/镜像站点/g;
-s/文字(?=模式|编辑)/文本/g;
-s/网际网(络|路)?/互联网/g;
-s/视像(档)?/视频/g;
-s/设定档(?:案)?/配置文件/g;
-s/开机(?:盘|碟|软盘)/启动盘/g;
-s/卷轴(列)?/滚动条/g;
-s/滑动钮(?!扣)/滚动条/g;
-s/分割(?:区)/分区/g;
-s/X~视窗/X~窗口/g;
-s/“输入”键/“回车”键/g;
-s/``输入''键/“回车”键/g;
-s/(纯)?文字档(案)?/文本文件/g;
-s/(?:启|起)动磁(?:碟|片)/启动盘/g;
-s/(?:列|印)表机/打印机/g;
-s/(?:救援|急救)磁(?:碟|片)/急救盘/g;
-
-
-# 把全部「著」字转为「着」……
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)著/$1着/);
-# 然后再在适当的词语，把「着」字转回「著」……
-# 著作、著者、著名、著述、著重、著书
-# 所著、土著、显著、编著
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*(?:所|土|显|编))着/$1著/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)着(?=作|者|名|述|重|书)/$1著/);
-
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x01-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)经由(?!于)/$1通过/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x01-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)连线(?!索)/$1连接/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x01-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)变数(?!据)/$1变量/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x01-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)文件(?!夹)/$1文档/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)用家(?!庭|政)/$1用户/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)列印(?!刷)/$1打印/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)连(?=络|系)/$1联/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)进阶(?!段|梯)/$1高级/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)解(?:析|像)度/$1分辨率/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)(?=点|单|双)按/$1击/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)(?<!方)程式/$1程序/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)(?<!发行)套件/$1软件包/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*(软|硬|光|磁|Zip~))碟/$1盘/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*(软|硬))体/$1件/);
-
-s/(找|搜)寻/搜索/g;
-s/(?<!检|堪)查核(?!对|心)/核查/g;
-
-s/作业/操作/g;
-s/组态/配置/g;
-s/组建/编译版/g;
-s/自订/定制/g;
-s/字元/字符/g;
-s/字型/字体/g;
-s/字集/字符集/g;
-s/字串/字符串/g;
-s/资优/超智/g;
-s/资料/数据/g;
-s/桌布/墙纸/g;
-s/追踪/跟踪/g;
-s/装载/加载/g;
-s/转信/转发/g;
-s/转场/过渡/g;
-s/专案/项目/g;
-s/注解/备注/g;
-s/伫列/队列/g;
-s/属性/特性/g;
-s/主旨/主题/g;
-s/周边/外围/g;
-s/重设/重置/g;
-s/中阶/中端/g;
-s/中断/断开/g;
-s/置中/居中/g;
-s/置换/替换/g;
-s/指令/命令/g;
-s/直印/纵向/g;
-s/执行/运行/g;
-s/知会/通知/g;
-s/支援/支持/g;
-s/支援/支持/g;
-s/整合/集成/g;
-s/侦错/调试/g;
-s/侦测/检测/g;
-s/侦测/检测/g;
-s/遮罩/掩码/g;
-s/站台/站点/g;
-s/站台/站点/g;
-s/詹森/约翰逊/g;
-s/闸道/网关/g;
-s/增加/添加/g;
-s/再试/重试/g;
-s/远端/远程/g;
-s/远端/远程/g;
-s/元件/组件/g;
-s/预设/默认/g;
-s/预设/默认/g;
-s/语系/语境/g;
-s/宇谭/吴丹/g;
-s/宇努/吴努/g;
-s/逾时/超时/g;
-s/游标/光标/g;
-s/游标/光标/g;
-s/邮差/投递员/g;
-s/优育/优生/g;
-s/永远/始终/g;
-s/硬碟/硬盘/g;
-s/萤幕/屏幕/g;
-s/英吋/英寸/g;
-s/引言/引用/g;
-s/引数/参数/g;
-s/音讯/音频/g;
-s/音效/音频/g;
-s/役龄/兵龄/g;
-s/遗弃/孤立/g;
-s/一页/单页/g;
-s/页尾/页脚/g;
-s/页首/页眉/g;
-s/页%u/第%u页/g;
-s/叶门/也门/g;
-s/叶慈/叶芝/g;
-s/业余/工余/g;
-s/摇杆/游戏杆/g;
-s/眼铐/眼镜/g;
-s/眼格/眼界/g;
-s/延伸/扩展/g;
-s/讯息/消息/g;
-s/讯号/信号/g;
-s/选取/选定/g;
-s/选单/菜单/g;
-s/选单/菜单/g;
-s/休眠/冬眠/g;
-s/信箱/邮箱/g;
-s/信头/信件头/g;
-s/信件/邮件/g;
-s/新增/新建/g;
-s/新信/新邮件/g;
-s/撷取/捕获/g;
-s/谐星/笑星/g;
-s/协定/协议/g;
-s/效能/性能/g;
-s/小计/总计/g;
-s/宵夜/夜餐/g;
-s/相容/兼容/g;
-s/相容/兼容/g;
-s/线上/在线/g;
-s/闲置/空闲/g;
-s/细节/明细/g;
-s/奚斯/希斯/g;
-s/矽谷/硅谷/g;
-s/矽肺/尘肺/g;
-s/物件/对象/g;
-s/物件/对象/g;
-s/屋龄/房龄/g;
-s/汶莱/文莱达鲁萨兰/g;
-s/文法/语法/g;
-s/文档(?!案)/文件/g;
-s/位址/地址/g;
-s/位址/地址/g;
-s/位在/位于/g;
-s/位元/位/g;
-s/唯写/只写/g;
-s/唯书/死读书/g;
-s/唯读/只读/g;
-s/网域/域/g;
-s/网路/网络/g;
-s/网路/网络/g;
-s/外野/外场/g;
-s/外菸/洋菸/g;
-s/脱队/掉队/g;
-s/拖曳/拖放/g;
-s/图素/像素/g;
-s/图示/图标/g;
-s/图示/图标/g;
-s/透过/通过/g;
-s/听候/侦听/g;
-s/贴上/粘贴/g;
-s/跳级/跳读/g;
-s/跳出/弹出/g;
-s/特许/特批/g;
-s/特效/特技/g;
-s/套用/应用/g;
-s/套用/应用/g;
-s/套服/套装/g;
-s/陶利/杜尔/g;
-s/逃考/逃学/g;
-s/碳粉/墨粉/g;
-s/摊位/摊床/g;
-s/摊贩/摊主/g;
-s/太空/航天/g;
-s/所在/位置/g;
-s/缩排/缩进/g;
-s/缩排/缩进/g;
-s/说明/帮助/g;
-s/舒兹/舒尔茨/g;
-s/手动/手工/g;
-s/试著/试着/g;
-s/试片/样片/g;
-s/试教/试课/g;
-s/视讯/视频/g;
-s/视窗/窗口/g;
-s/士敏/土水泥/g;
-s/识别/标识/g;
-s/剩下/剩余/g;
-s/升幂/升序/g;
-s/设定/配置/g;
-s/烧录/刻录/g;
-s/商嫂/老板娘/g;
-s/杀价/侃价/g;
-s/色彩/颜色/g;
-s/色板/调色板/g;
-s/扫瞄/扫描/g;
-s/扫黄/打黄/g;
-s/扫黑/打黑/g;
-s/萨伊/扎伊尔/g;
-s/萨特/沙特/g;
-s/软体/软件/g;
-s/软片/胶卷/g;
-s/软碟/软盘/g;
-s/融洽/投洽/g;
-s/容许/允许/g;
-s/日班/白班/g;
-s/认证/验证/g;
-s/热卖/热销/g;
-s/群组/组/g;
-s/群组/工作组/g;
-s/缺省/默认/g;
-s/缺货/脱销/g;
-s/全形/全角/g;
-s/取样/采样/g;
-s/取得/获取/g;
-s/取代/替换/g;
-s/清理/清空/g;
-s/清单/列表/g;
-s/清唱/乾唱/g;
-s/亲戚/胞波/g;
-s/乔塞/乔叟/g;
-s/强度/烈度/g;
-s/枪手/替考/g;
-s/潜力/潜质/g;
-s/牵线/搭桥/g;
-s/洽询/联系/g;
-s/起始/初始/g;
-s/旗号/标志/g;
-s/齐左/左对齐/g;
-s/齐中/居中/g;
-s/齐右/右对齐/g;
-s/溥玛/富马/g;
-s/评卷/阅卷/g;
-s/平装/简装/g;
-s/平行/并行/g;
-s/平剧/京剧/g;
-s/频宽/带宽/g;
-s/拼字/拼写/g;
-s/批销/批发/g;
-s/配演/配角/g;
-s/泡面/方便面/g;
-s/拍品/拍卖的物品/g;
-s/诺鲁/瑙鲁/g;
-s/暖机/预热/g;
-s/农保/农险/g;
-s/牛舍/牛棚/g;
-s/年资/工龄/g;
-s/尼温/奈温/g;
-s/嫩肤/护肤/g;
-s/纳塞/纳赛尔/g;
-s/纳奇/纳吉/g;
-s/那麽/那么/g;
-s/内野/内场/g;
-s/内销/内贸/g;
-s/内含/包括/g;
-s/目前/当前/g;
-s/莫洛/莫罗/g;
-s/模组/模块/g;
-s/模组/模块/g;
-s/模拟/仿真/g;
-s/面料/布料/g;
-s/盲点/盲区/g;
-s/马利/马里/g;
-s/落伍/调队/g;
-s/轮带/轮胎/g;
-s/略过/跳过/g;
-s/路警/交通警察/g;
-s/录影/录像/g;
-s/龙诺/朗诺/g;
-s/零件/散件/g;
-s/聆听/监听/g;
-s/灵活/活泛/g;
-s/临检/突查/g;
-s/列印/打印/g;
-s/列印/打印/g;
-s/寮国/老挝/g;
-s/两页/双页/g;
-s/链结/链接/g;
-s/恋人/对象/g;
-s/联招/统招/g;
-s/联考/统考/g;
-s/连络/联系/g;
-s/连结/链接/g;
-s/黎利/黎萨尔/g;
-s/离职/脱产/g;
-s/离开/退出/g;
-s/离开/退出/g;
-s/冷面/凉面/g;
-s/类比/模拟/g;
-s/蕾丝/花边/g;
-s/雷射/激光/g;
-s/雷根/里根/g;
-s/浪头/潮流/g;
-s/栏位/区域/g;
-s/来源/源/g;
-s/拉远/缩小/g;
-s/拉曼/拉赫曼/g;
-s/拉近/放大/g;
-s/阔人/大款/g;
-s/快销/畅销/g;
-s/快取/高速缓存/g;
-s/快锅/高压锅/g;
-s/快递/速递/g;
-s/肯亚/肯尼亚/g;
-s/柯尔/科尔/g;
-s/看俏/行俏/g;
-s/刊授/函授/g;
-s/开启/打开/g;
-s/卡达/卡塔尔/g;
-s/卷动/滚动/g;
-s/捐款/捐资/g;
-s/巨集/宏/g;
-s/警示/警报/g;
-s/警察/公安/g;
-s/精灵/向导/g;
-s/晶片/芯片/g;
-s/进帐/进分/g;
-s/进位/进制/g;
-s/进阶/高级/g;
-s/近端/本地/g;
-s/介面/界面/g;
-s/结束/退出/g;
-s/揭彩/剪彩/g;
-s/接洽/联系/g;
-s/绞车/卷扬机/g;
-s/降幂/降序/g;
-s/渐层/渐变/g;
-s/建置/编译版/g;
-s/建立/创建/g;
-s/检视/查看/g;
-s/检举/举报/g;
-s/剪下/剪切/g;
-s/迦纳/加纳/g;
-s/夹纸/卡纸/g;
-s/加入/添加/g;
-s/加彭/加蓬/g;
-s/寄出/发送/g;
-s/计画/计划/g;
-s/几内/几内亚/g;
-s/积案/遗案/g;
-s/货柜/集装箱/g;
-s/或是/或者/g;
-s/活猪/生猪/g;
-s/汇入/导入/g;
-s/汇出/导出/g;
-s/回信/回复/g;
-s/回馈/反馈/g;
-s/回复/恢复/g;
-s/回放/重播/g;
-s/灰阶/灰度/g;
-s/画面/帧/g;
-s/滑鼠/鼠标/g;
-s/花头/噱头/g;
-s/护贝/过塑/g;
-s/呼叫/调用/g;
-s/横印/横向/g;
-s/黑信/匿名信/g;
-s/寒害/冷害/g;
-s/海撒/海葬/g;
-s/国语/普通话/g;
-s/国菸/国产香菸/g;
-s/国剧/京剧/g;
-s/国病/社会弊病/g;
-s/滚棒/滚动条/g;
-s/光碟/光盘/g;
-s/惯窃/惯偷/g;
-s/关防/公章/g;
-s/怪手/掘土机/g;
-s/沟通/通信/g;
-s/公厘/毫米/g;
-s/工本/成本/g;
-s/更名/重命名/g;
-s/葛摩/科摩罗/g;
-s/阁下/您/g;
-s/告发/举报/g;
-s/高阶/高端/g;
-s/高级/高档/g;
-s/赶俏/走俏/g;
-s/改寄/重定向/g;
-s/该档/该文件/g;
-s/覆写/覆盖/g;
-s/覆叠/重叠/g;
-s/复原/撤消/g;
-s/复古/回潮/g;
-s/复盖/覆盖/g;
-s/封包/数据包/g;
-s/分割/拆分/g;
-s/费瑟/费萨尔/g;
-s/方块/框/g;
-s/梵谷/凡高/g;
-s/范锡/万斯/g;
-s/范本/模板/g;
-s/蕃茄/西红柿/g;
-s/发屋/发廊/g;
-s/额外/附加的/g;
-s/对映/镜像/g;
-s/对开/单挑/g;
-s/断线/脱机/g;
-s/短函/条子/g;
-s/动作/操作/g;
-s/东加/汤加/g;
-s/定址/编址/g;
-s/订做/自定义/g;
-s/顶价/天价/g;
-s/碟片/盘片/g;
-s/碟机/驱动器/g;
-s/掉价/跌价/g;
-s/掉档/降低等级/g;
-s/调班/倒休/g;
-s/电邮/邮件/g;
-s/电毯/电热毯/g;
-s/电脑/记算机/g;
-s/电脑/计算机/g;
-s/递回/递归/g;
-s/地陪/导游/g;
-s/底线/下划线/g;
-s/底板价/底价/g;
-s/低阶/低端/g;
-s/登入/登录/g;
-s/登入/登录/g;
-s/登录/注册/g;
-s/登记/注册/g;
-s/登出/注销/g;
-s/登出/注销/g;
-s/得标/中标/g;
-s/盗垒/偷垒/g;
-s/导筒/话筒/g;
-s/档名/文件名/g;
-s/档案(?!件)/文件/g;
-s/当机/挂起/g;
-s/单音/单声道/g;
-s/戴扬/达扬/g;
-s/待青/待业/g;
-s/呆帐/坏帐/g;
-s/打私/缉私/g;
-s/打非/打击犯罪/g;
-s/存取/访问/g;
-s/存钱/储蓄/g;
-s/此档/此文件/g;
-s/此处/当前位置/g;
-s/磁片/软盘/g;
-s/垂片/选项卡/g;
-s/床戏/床上戏/g;
-s/传送/发送/g;
-s/传回/返回/g;
-s/储存/保存/g;
-s/除错/调试/g;
-s/出包/出面承包/g;
-s/翅子/鱼翅/g;
-s/程式/程序/g;
-s/成屋/现房/g;
-s/晨运/晨练/g;
-s/陈情/上访/g;
-s/车照/驾照/g;
-s/巢状/嵌套法/g;
-s/常量/常数/g;
-s/查阅/查看/g;
-s/查询/搜索/g;
-s/查体/体检/g;
-s/查德/乍得/g;
-s/层级/级别/g;
-s/餐鸽/肉鸽/g;
-s/裁断/截断/g;
-s/部份/部分/g;
-s/布希/布什/g;
-s/不详/未知/g;
-s/捕手/接手/g;
-s/波道/频道/g;
-s/拨接/连接/g;
-s/病休/请病假/g;
-s/并列/并口/g;
-s/冰糕/冰淇淋/g;
-s/冰棒/冰棍/g;
-s/宾馆/招待所/g;
-s/标示/标记/g;
-s/标签/卷标/g;
-s/辨析/解析/g;
-s/变更/更改/g;
-s/便当/盒饭/g;
-s/边界/边框/g;
-s/臂章/袖标/g;
-s/壁纸/墙纸/g;
-s/壁报/墙报/g;
-s/比金/贝京/g;
-s/贝南/贝宁/g;
-s/鲍率/波特/g;
-s/包括/包含/g;
-s/榜样/标兵/g;
-s/伴读/陪读/g;
-s/半形/半角/g;
-s/版边/页边距/g;
-s/班机/航班/g;
-s/拜访/访问/g;
-s/扒分/赚钱/g;
-s/扒带/盗版带/g;
-s/奥赛/奥运/g;
-s/奥明/阿明/g;
-s/案例/实例/g;
-s/(?<!投)资讯/信息/g;
-# s/道道/办法/g;
-# s/搭伙/搭宴/g;
-# s/搭档/搭伴/g;
-
-
-s/於/于/g;
-s/矽/硅/g;
-s/後/后/g;
-s/乾/干/g;
-s/你/您/g;
-s/埠/端口/g;
-s/檔/文件/g;
-
-
-s/\<s\<(.+?)\>\>/$1/g;
-s/\<t\<文件\>\>/文档/g;
-s/\<t\<延伸\>\>/扩展/g;
-s/\<t\<预设\>\>/默认/g;
-s/\<t\<支援\>\>/支持/g;
-
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)「/$1“/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)」/$1”/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)『/$1“/);
-1 while (s/^((?:[\x00-\x7F]|[\x80-\xFF].)*)』/$1”/);
--
Alioth's /usr/local/bin/git-commit-notice on /srv/git.debian.org/git/chinese/manpages-zh.git
More information about the Chinese-commits
mailing list